Skip to main content

Full text of "The Philadelphia photographer"

See other formats 


BOSTON  PUBLIC  LIBRARY 


3  9999  06503  277  1 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2011  with  funding  from 

Boston  Public  Library 


http://www.archive.org/details/philadelphiaphot1874phil 


Address  ALL  Communications,  both  for  the  Editor  and  the  Publishers,  to  Sherman's 
Building,  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Number  121. 


50  Cents. 


THE 


/ 
PHILADELPHIA 


2_^ 


lwt00ra#fti!t\ 


AN  ILLUSTRATED  MONTHLY  JOURNAL, 


DEVOTED  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


THE  OFFICIAL  ORGAN  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC 
ASSOCIATION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. 


January,    1874. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

BENERMAN    &    WILSON, 

PUBLISHERS. 


Subscriptions  received  by  all  News  and  Stockdealers. 

FIVE  DOLLARS  PER  ANNUM,  IN  ADVANCE. 


Sherman  &  Co.,  Printers,  Philadelphia. 


THE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS— Business  Bringers  at  all  times. 
JB®"  See  Advertisaments  inside. 


SUMMARY    OF    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 
...       1 

1 
..  1 
...       2 

3 


Mosaics,  1874 

Our  New  Prize  Offer 

The  Shaw  and  Wilcox  Patent 

Our  Picture 

Things  New  and  Old.    By  R.  J.  Chute .-, 

Photography  in  France.    By  Ebnest  Lacan 4 

Photographic  Mincemeat.    By  I.  B.  Webster 6 

An  Error  and  its  Remedy.    By  O.  G.  Mason 7 

Means  of  Excluding  Chemical  Rays.     By  John  M. 

Blake •     8 

Bibliographic : 10 

A  Question  on  Insurance.    By  J.  C.  Potter 11 

Retouching  at  Night.    By  Fe.  Wendling 12 

Convenient  Copying  Table.    By  B.  F.  Hall 12 


Printing  and  Toning  Albumen  Paper.    By  R.  M. 

Ceessey 13 

Photographic  Advertising 14 

Notes  In  and  Out  of  the  Studio.    By  G.  Whaeton 

Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A 14 

Preservation  of  Stereographs.    By  Prof.  C.  F.  Himes, 

Ph.D 16 

Society  Gossip 18 

Development.    By  D.  H.  Gross 22 

The  Developer.    By  P.  B.  Geeene 23 

Matters  of  the  N.  P.  A 24 

German  Correspondence.    By  Dr.  H.  Vogel 25 

Views  Abroad  and  Across.    By  Edward  L.  Wilson,  29 

Editor's  Table ; 32 


Embellishment. — "  Cabinet ' 


Portrait,  by  Fritz  Luckhardt,  Vienna,  Austria. 
Philadelphia. 


Prints  by  Wit.  H.  Rhoads, 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s  Paper. 
Anderson's  Photo-Comic  "  Allmyknack." 
Anderson,  J.  A.    Photographic  Apparatus. 
Anthony  &  Co.,  E.  &  H.  T.    The  Bowdish  Chair. 
Ayres'  Chart  of  Photographic  Drapery. 
Benerman  &  Wilson.    Lantern  Slides. 
Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 
Bieestadt,  Chaeles.    Photo.  Views. 
Bullock  &  Ceenshaw.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Carbutt,  J.  H.    Woodbury  Lantern  Slides. 
Chameleon  Barometer. 
Clemons,  Jno.  R.    Albumen  Paper.    Varnish. 
Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  A.  M.    Photograph  Cards. 
Cooper  &  Co.,  Chas.    Portrait  Lenses. 
Curtis,  G.  E.    Niagara  Stereoscopic  Views. 
Dubernet,  L.    Passepartouts  and  Picture  Frames. 
English  Albumen  Paper. 
Entrekin,  W.  G.    Oscillating  Enameler. 
Felt,  L.  W.    The  Photographer's  Exchange. 
Fitzgibbon,  J.  H.    Adhesive  Picture  Mount. 
French,  B.  &  Co.    Voigtlander  Lenses,  &c. 
Gihon,  John  L.    Opaque  and  Cut-Outs. 
Hance's  Photo.  Specialties. 
How  to  Paint  Photographs. 
Jacoby,  W.  H.    Printing  Frame. 
Karstens  &  Braun.    Albumen  Paper. 
Kilburn  Bros.    Stereoscopic  Views. 
Lewis,  R.  A.    Collodion. 
Liesegang,  E.    Albumen  Paper, 
Linn's  Landscape  Photogeaphy. 
Loescher  &  Petsch.    Photo.  Studies. 
Marcy,  L.  J.    Sciopticon. 

Magee,  James  F.  &  Co.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Mardock,  W.  H.  &  Co.    Photo.  Chemists,  &c.    New  Com- 
pound Developer. 
McAllister,  W.  Mitchell.    Magic  Lanterns,  &c. 


Moore,  Albert.    Solar  Printing. 
Moegan  &  Fullee.    Silver  Saver. 
Mosaics,  1873  and  1874. 
Newell  &  Son,  R.    Acid-Proof  Photo.  Ware. 
Pattbeeg,  Lewis  &  Beo.    Passepartouts,  &c. 
Phenix  Feeeotype  Plates. 
Photogeaphee's  Pocket  Refeeence-Book. 
Photogeaphic  Publications. 
Photogeaphee  to  his  Pateons. 
Powees  &  Weightman.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Premiums  foe  1874,  for  New  Subscribers  to  "  Philadel- 
phia Photographer.'" 
Robinson's  New  Photo.  Teimmek. 
Robinson's  Metallic  Guides. 
Rohaut  &  Hutinet.    Photographic  Mounts. 
Ross's  Photogeaphic  Lenses. 
Rottee,  Geo.  &  Co.    Albumen  Paper. 
Ryan,  D.  J.    Photo.  Stock  Depot,  Chromos,  &c. 
Ryder,  J.  F.    Chromos,  Pluck  Nos.  1  and  2. 
Sautee,  G.    Passepartouts.  *> 

Schwaeze  &  Valk.    Photo,  Papers. 
Scovill  Manf'g.  Co.    Photographic  Materials. 
Seavey  L.  W.    Scenic  Artist,  Backgrounds,  &c. 
Shoemakee,  Benjamin  H.    Photo.  Glass. 
Steinheil's  New  Aplanatic  Lenses. 
Stevens,  Chas.  W.    Photographic  Goods. 
The  Skylight  and  the  Dark-Room. 
Wallach,  Willy.    T.  &  M.  Albumen  Paper. 
Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papees. 
Wellee's  Stereoscopic  Treasures. 
Weston's  Patent  Rotary  Burnisher. 
Wilson,  Charles  A.    Photographic  Goods. 
Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials,  &c. 
World,  Back  Volumes  of. 
Woodward,  D.  A.    Solar  Cameras. 
Zentmayee,  Joseph.    Lenses. 


TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS ! 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Photographic  Publishers, 

Beg  Photographers  to  remember  that  their 

BUSINESS  OFFICES, 

DELIVERY  DEPARTMENT, 

And  EDITORIAL  ROOMS, 

Are  now  all  concentrated  in  Sherman's  Building, 
S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

(HI*  No  other  Offices  in  the  City. 


A.RE 

1ST  O  W 

S  J^T  D 

TO    BE 

THE 

BEST 

IN  THE  WHOLE  WORLD' 

THEY 
A.  RE 

1ST  A.MEB 

OlST    THE 

FOURTH 

BA.OE, 

WHICH  PLEASE  READ. 


FOR    SALE    BY    ALL    DEALERS. 

ALFRED  L.  HANCE,  Manufacturing  Chemist, 

126  N.  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia. 


ARE   THE   MOST   POPULAR. 


GUN  COTTONS,  COLLODIONS,  VARNISHES. 


(See  previous  and  following  pages.) 

ASK  FOR  ANDERSON'S  COLLODION. 

TRY  TRASK'S  FERROTYPE  COLLODION. 

jg^»  TEST  THE  WHOLE  LIST. 


Are  now  for  sale  by  nearly  every  dealer  in  the  United  States,  and  they  are  popular  wher- 
ever used.  Photographers  who  do  not  have  a  dealer  enterprising  enough  to  keep  them, 
would  do  well  to  send  their  orders  direct  to  the  manufacturer.  No  goods  in  the  market  are 
put  up  with  so  much  cleanliness  and  care,  or  in  such  full  measure.  A  full  list  of  Hancers 
Specialties  will  be  found  on  the  second  page  following  this. 

THE  HUN  COTTONS  ARE  GUARANTEED  TO  EQUAL  ANY  IN  THE  WORLD. 

YOU  ARE  SAFE  IN  TRYING  THEM. 

THE  COLLODIONS  AME  MADE  OF  THE  PUREST  CHEMICALS, 

And  are  warranted  for  the  special  work  for  which  they  are  advertised. 


GILL'S   INTENSIFIER 

Is  not  generally  appreciated  yet.  If  photographers  knew  its  real  value  they  would  employ 
it  more  largely.  It  is  a  great  helper  in  giving  proper  printing  qualities  to  a  negative,  and 
far  easier  to  use  than  patching  up,  doctoring,  dodges  in  printing,  &c.  Try  it  carefully. 
There  has  been  a  perfect  rush  for  GROUND  GLASS  SUBSTITUTE  during  the  last  month. 
Ask  your  dealer  for  them. 

ALFRED  L.  HANCE,  Manufacturing  Chemist, 

126  N.  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia. 


'JVC 


SUBSTITUT 


The  SUBSTITUTE  is  in  the  form  of  a  varnish ;  is  flowed  and  dried  the  same  as  varnish, 
but  dries  with  a  granulated  or  ground-glass  surface. 

WHEREVER  GROUND  GLASS  IS  REQUIRED, 
HAWCE'S  SUBSTITUTE  ANSWERS  EVERY  PURPOSE, 

FOE  GEOUND  GLASSES  FOE  CAMEEAS, 

FOE  GLAZING  SKY  AND  SIDE-LIGHTS, 

FOE  OBSCUEING  STUDIO  AND  OFFICE  DOOES, 
FOE  FEINTING  WEAK  NEGATIVES, 
FOE  VIGNETTE  GLASSES, 

FOE  A  EETOUCHING  VAENISH, 

FOE  SOFTENING  STEONG  NEGATIVES, 

FOE  THE  CELEBEATED  BERLIN  PROCESS. 

Use  the  "  Substitute."        Use  the  "  Substitute." 

PRICE,  FIFTY  CENTS  PER  BOTTLE. 


LARGE  QUANTITIES  FOR  STUDIO  LIGHTS,  ftc,  SUPPLIED  LOW. 


EEAD  A  FEW  TESTIMONIALS: 

Yohnqstown,  Ohio,  Jan.  27,  1873. 

The  bottle  of  Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute  came  safely  to  hand.    I  selected  a  good  piece  of  glass,  coated  it  with  the 

Substitute,  and  in  a  few  moments  I  had  one  of  the  finest  ground  glasses  I  ever  saw.    I  have  been  using  it  four  or  five  days, 

and  the  more  I  use  it  the  more  I  am  pleased  with  it.    The  "surface"  is  fine  and  delicate,  and  a  great  relief  to  the  eyes. 

I  would  not  be  without  a  bottle  for  ten  dollars.  Lon  Blackburn,  Operator,  Le  Koy's  Gallery. 

R.  Newell  &  Son's  Gallery,  626  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia,  Feb.  17th,  1873. 
I  have  been  frequently  asked  to  recommend  some  new  article  or  preparation  used  in  our  business,  but  have  very  rarely  con- 
sented to  do  so  from  the  fact  that  many  things  that  "promise  very  fair,"  after  thorough  trial,  prove  worthless.  Having  used 
your  different  preparations  of  Collodions,  Intensifiers,  and  Varnish  for  the  past  six  months  in  my  gallery,  I  can  conscien- 
tiously pronounce  them  first-class  in  every  respect.  Your  Ground  Glass  Substitute!  consider  one  of  the  most  practical  and 
useful  articles  I  have  ever  used,  and  no  photographer  who  has  learned  its  value  for  coating  the  backs  of  thin  negatives,  or 
making  ground  glass  for  the  camera  box,  would  ever  be  without  it.  1  have  found  so  many  ways  of  using  it  to  advantage 
that  I  shall  hereafter  order  it  by  the  gallon.  Yours  truly, 

,    ',  R.  Newell 


SPECIALTIES. 

AEE  SOLD  BY  ALL  DEALERS  AS  FOLLOWS  : 

Elbert  Anderson's  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Hance's  White  Mountain  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Curtis'  Niagara  Falls  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Hance's  Peculiar  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Trask's  Ferrotype  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Cummings'  Grit  Varnish, 

Per  Bottle, 40  Cts. 

Hance's  Silver  Spray  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Delicate  Cream  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, 80  Cts. 

Gill's  Concentrated  Chromo  Intensifier, 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute, 

Per  Bottle, „ 50  Cts. 

TRADE  MARK :— THE  BEST  GOODS— FULL  MEASURE. 

TRY  HANCE'S  PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES. 

See  Testimonials  in  former  and  future  advertisements. 

SOOVILL  MFG  CO.,  Trade  Ag'ts.       ALFEED  L.  HANCE,  Manufac'r, 

NEW  YORK.  126  JT.  7th  St.,  Philadelphia, 


Special  Premium  of  Six  Handsome  German 
Cabinet  Pictures  of  Ladies ! 

By  FKITZ  LTJCKHAKDT,  Vienna,  Austria. 

These  pictures  are  alone  worth  $3  for  the  set,  and  more  is  asked  for 
such  by  dealers. 


Given,  to  any  one  who  will  sen!  ns  a  NEW  Subscriber  fir  tie  year  1874. 


What  Others  Think  of  the  Prizes: 


"These  studies  were  greatly  admired  by  the 
members  present,  and  all  were  convinced  that 
they  were  worthy  of  most  careful  study." — Min- 
utes of  the  Chicago  Photo.  Association. 

"  These  pictures  were  examined  and  much  ad- 
mired by  all  present.'' — Indiana  Photo.  Ass'n. 

"The  pictures  elicited  general  praise;  the 
draperies  especially  were  very  favorably  com- 
mented upon.'' — German  Photographers'  Socie- 
ty, New  York. 

"  The  prints  were  thought  to  be  worth  more 
than  the  price  which  was  charged  for  the  journal, 
i.e. ,  $5  ;  and  the  President,  Mr.  Black,  stated  that 
every  operator  should  have  a  set,  for  he  considered 
them  to  be  most  admirable  studies,  and  superior 
to  anything  which  he  had  seen  heretofore." — 
Boston  Photographic  Society. 


"They  were  accepted  as  being  of  a  very  high 
standard.'' — Brooklyn  Photo.  Art  Association. 

"  The  high  artistic  merits  of  the  pictures,  and 
their  great  value  as  studies  for  the  progressive 
photographer,  were  conceded  by  all.  The  general 
harmony  in  the  details  of  each  print,  the  man- 
agement of  light,  and  beautiful  rendering  of 
texture  were  greatly  admired." — Photographic 
Section  of  the  American  Institute,  N.  Y. 

Special  votes  of  thanks  were  given  for  them 
by  the  Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia  ; 
Photographic  Association  of  West.  Illinois  ;  Chi- 
cago Photographic  Association ;  Indiana,  District 
of  Columbia,  and  Maryland  Photographic  Asso- 
ciations ;  Photographic  Section  of  the  American 
Institute ;  German  Photographers'  Society,  New 
York ;  Boston  and  Brooklyn  Photographic  Art 
Associations,  whereat  they  attracted  great  atten- 
tion and  admiration. 


A  Few  Words  from  those  who  have  received  them  as  Premiums  for  New  Subscribers : 


"I  think  when  we  say  they  are  splendid  it  is 
only  a  mild  expression  of  what  they  will  bear." 
— E.  F.  Everett. 

"They  are  well  worth  striving  for,  and  the 
photographers  who  allow  this  set  to  remain  out- 


side their  collection  don't  deserve  them." — J. 
Pitcher  Spooner. 

"  They  are  by  far  the  best  specimens  of  pho- 
tographs of  white  drapery  that  I  ever  saw,  and 
the  artistic  part  leaves  nothing  to  wish  for." — 
James  Paris. 


We  make  this  offer  as  a  matter  of  business,  and  not  as  favor  to  any  one 
on  either  side.  It  will  pay  you  to  give  a  year's  subscription  to  your  oper- 
ator or  to  your  friend  or  customer,  in  order  to  secure  these  pictures. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philada. 


IlsT 

GERMANY,  ENGLAND,  AND  FRANCE, 

PHOTOGRAPHERS  USE 

WAY  MOUTH'S 

Vignetting  Papers. 

(DESIGNS    COPYRIGHTED.) 


THREE     LARGER     SIZES     READ 


OP  ALL  PICTURES,  THE 


$%ttette 


IS  THE  MOST  ARTISTIC, 


When  properly  printed.  But  the  clumsy  devices  generally  in  use  for  printing  them, 
or  rather  for  blending  the  shading  about  the  figure,  produce  but  very  few  really  artistic 
vignette  pictures.  Either  the  shading  is  too  intensely  dark,  not  gradated  in  tint  at  all,  or 
it  shows  an  ugly  direct,  decided  line,  which  is  very  repulsive.  The  shading  should 
blend  gradually  from  the  dark  tint  nearest  to  the  figure,  off  into  the 
white  background.  The  results  are  then  soft,  artistic,  and  beautiful.  The  easiest  and 
best  way  to  secure  them  is  by  the  use  of 

WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 

THEY  ARE  NOT  CLUMSY ;  DO  NOT  BREAK  ;  ARE  ALWAYS  READY ;  COST 
BUT  LITTLE,  AND  ARE  EASY  OF  APPLICATION  TO  ANY  NEGATIVE. 

THEY  NEED  BUT  ONE  ADJUSTMENT  TO  PRINT  ANY  QUANTITY. 

They  entirely  do  away  with  all  the  old  and  troublesome  methods,  either  wood,  metal, 
or  cotton. 

Samples  Mailed  Free  of  Charge. 

And  if  you  do  not  find  one  there,  send  for  a  specimen.  Fifteen  sizes  are  now  made, 
suiting  all  dimensions  of  pictures  from  a  small  carte  figure  to  "Whole-size,  Victorias,  Cabi- 
nets, &c.  Larger  sizes  will  be  introduced  presently,  if  demanded.  They  are  printed  in 
black  for  ordinary  negatives,  yellow  bronze  for  thin  negatives,  and  red  bronze  for  still  weaker 
ones.     Directions  for  use  accompany  each  parcel. 

THREE  NEW  SIZES  FOR  HALF,  CABINET,  AND  WHOLE  SIZES  READY. 


IP  IR,  I  G  IE  S  : 


In  parcels  containing  one  of  eacb  size,  fifteen,  assorted  colors $1  OO 

Assorted  sizes  and  colors,  by  number,  per  package  of  fifteen 1  OO 

3fos.  1,  '■£,  3,  4,  and  5,  assorted  sizes  and  colors,  for  Cartes,  by  number,  per  dozen 50 

"        6,  7, 11,  IS,  and  13,    "  "  "     Large  Cartes  and  Victorias,  by  number,  per  doz.,        75 

"        8, 9, 10, 14,  and  15,    "  "  "     Cabinets  and  Whole-size,  "  "  1  00 

"        16,  17,  and  18,  "  "  "     Half  "  "  "  "  1  25 

{SEE  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

When  ordering,  state  the  number  and  color  you  want.  The  Waymouth  Vignette  Papers 
are  an  English  invention,  and  are  becoming  so  universally  used  in  Europe  that  we  have 
pleasure  in  introducing  them  to  our  patrons.     We  own  the  copyright. 

BEKERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers,  7th  and  Cherry,  EMlaia. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


/ 


Increased  Orders  Establish  their  Value ! 
THE  ADMIRATION  OF  ALL  AT  THE  BUFFALO  EXHIBITION. 


VIGNETTING  PAPERS. 

THREE   NEW   SIZES   READY. 

(See  opposite  page.) 

TESTIMOITIALS: 

"  Waymouth's  Improved  Vignette  Papers  I  have  tried,  and  they  are  just  what  I  have  been  want- 
ing for  years." — Well  Q-.  Singhi. 

"  I  enclose  you  an  example  of  a  new  Vignetting  Mask  sent  to  me  by  Mr.  "Waymouth,  one  of  my 
correspondents.  Being  composed  of  transparent  paper  there  is  no  risk  of  breakage,  and  it  readily 
admits  of  the  gradation  already  very  good,  being  modified  easily  to  suit  the  negative.  This,  I  take  it, 
is  a  point  of  great  importance.  The  great  defect  of  vignetting  glasses  is  the  regular,  formal,  uniform 
effect  of  vignetting  produced  by  them,  unless  the  printer  take  great  pains  to  avoid  it ;  and  as  no  two 
negatives,  as  a  rule,  require  precisely  the  same  form  and  gradation  in  vignetting  anything  tending  to 
produce  one  uniform  style  is  bad.  This  lithographed  mask  on  transparent  paper  will,  I  think,  be 
found  a  useful  adjunct  in  vignetting." — G.  Wharton  Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A.     November  World,  1872. 

"  Mr.  AVaymouth  appears  to  be  actively  employed  in  developing  the  full  capabilities  of  his  Vignet- 
ting Papers.  We  have  received  from  him  some  samples  showing  a  further  extension  of  the  system, 
bronze  powder  entering  into  the  composition  of  the  opaque  portions,  and  securing  a  more  delicate 
gradation  between  the  lucent  centre  and  the  opaque  edges." — British  Journal  of  Photography,  Janu- 
ary 31s*,  1873. 

"Flexible  Vignetting  Masks. — We  have  already  called  attention  to  the  Paper  Vignetting  Masks 
introduced  by  Mr.  Waymouth,  of  Nailsea,  near  Bristol.  From  a  trial  made,  we  are  enabled  to  say 
that  they  answer  exceedingly  well  ;  and  they  are  certain  to  find  favor  among  photographers — a  favor 
they  well  deserve.  Mr.  Waymouth  informs  us  that  since  our  first  notice  of  them,  a  few  week's  since, 
no  fewer  than  eleven  hundred  have  been  sent  out.  This  is  well.'' — British  Journal  of  Photography, 
November  8th,  1872. 

"I  can  testify  to  the  exquisite  softness  obtained  from  your  Vignette  Papers,  which  gradual  and 
soft  effect  I  have  never  seen  equalled  by  any  other  method.'' — H.  A.  H.  Daniel,  Esq.,  Hon.  Sec.  of  the 
Bristol  and  Clifton  Amateur  Photographic  Association. 

"At  a  meeting  of  the  Bristol  and  Clifton  Amateur  Photographic  Association,  held  at  the  Bristol 
Museum,  on  the  16th  of  October,  Mr.  Daniel  read  some  notes  on  Vignette  Printing,  &o. ,  and  laid  the 
new  Vignette  Papers  before  the  meeting,  and  highly  recommended  them,  as  being  cheap,  simple,  and 
effective,  giving  beautifully  soft  vignettes.'' 

From  Professional  Photographers. — "First-class."  "The  sample  sent  answers  perfectly."  "I 
consider  them  first  rate  articles."  "I  think  your  Vignette  Papers  will  be  a  great  improvement  on 
the  old  glasses."     &c,  &c 

Any  number  sent  on  receipt  of  price,  by  any  stoekdealer,  or  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers, 

PHILADELPHIA. 


ROBINSON'S 

METALLIC 


Oval,  Round,  Elliptic  and  Square,  of  all  sizes ;  various  shapes  for  Stereoscopic 
work,  Drug:  Labels,  *c,  Ac.  Regular  sizes  always  ou  band.  Special  Sizes  made 
to  order.  Price  for  regular  photo  sizes,  10  cents  per  incb  tbe  longest  way  of  tbe 
aperture.    Special  sizes,  15  cents  per  incb.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's 


Agents 


PHILADELPHIA,  PA 


HUNDREDS  EXPORTED  TO  ENGLAND  AND  GERMANY. 


RO  B  I  N  S  O  N'S 

PHOTOGRAPH    TRIMMER 

IS  A  NECESSITY  AND  CONSIDERED  INVALUABLE. 
For  examples  of  its  work  we  refer  to  the  recent  and  present  pictures  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

IT  SAVES  TIME,  SAVES  PRINTS,  AND  SAVES  MONEY. 

The  accompanying  cut  represents  the  instru- 
ment in  the  act  of  trimming  a  photograph.  It 
does  not  cut,  but  pinches  off  the  waste  paper,  and 
leaves  the  print  with  a  neatly  beveled  edge  which 
facilitates  the  adherence  of  the  print  to  the 
mount.  Try  one,  and  you  will  discard  the 
knife  and  punch  at  once. 

Oil  the  wheel  bearings  with  Seiving  Machine  Oil. 

A  Trimmer  Mailed  for  $3.50. 

The  difficulty  of  procuring  exactly  true  guides 
for.cutting  out  prints  has  induced  the  inventor 
to  put  up  machinery  for  the  production  of  all 
styles  of  them,  guaranteed  mathematically  true, 
and  to  be  known  as 

H0BINS0FS  IMPROVED  GUIDES. 

See  advertisement  on  opposite  page. 

A  full  stock  of  regular  sizes  now  on  hand. 
A  complete,  illustrated,  catalogue  and  price-list  will 
be  issued  soon. 

TESTIMONIALS. 


ill 


"  For  cutting  ovals  I  think  the  Eobinson  Trimmer 
is  perfect,  and  if  nobody  brings  them  out  in  England 
I  shall,  as  I  think  it  a  pity  such  a  good  thing  should 
not  be  introduced." — Walter  B.  Woodbury. 

"I  would  rather  give  fifty  dollars  than  be  without 
one.  By  its  use  all  annoyance  from  dull  knives  tear- 
ing the  prints  is  avoided,  and  it  is  a  pleasure  to  use 
it." — E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk. 

_  "  Robinson's  Photographic  Trimmer  is  an  excellent 
little  instrument.  It  does  the  work  intended  magnifi- 
cently. It  is  not  only  exquisite  for  trimming  photo- 
graphs, but  also  for  making  Cut-Outs  and  cutting  the 
sensitized  paper  to  any  needed  size,  using  for  the 
latter  purpose  a  guide  of  steel  in  form  of  a  ruler,  thus 
entirely  dispensing  with  the  knife." — Bern'd  Kihl- 
holz,  Chicago,  III. 

"  I  like  the  Trimmer  very  much.  I  think  it  a  very 
useful  article.  It  works  well  and  does  all  it  is  recom- 
mended to  do."— F.  G.  Weller,  Littleton,  N.  H. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmers  have  come  to  hand,  and 
I  like  them  very  much ;  they  are  just  what  I  wanted 
and  found  it  difficult  to  get." — J.  W.  Black,  Boston. 

"I  am  using  the  Robinson  Trimmer  and  consider 
it  the  best  article  for  trimming  photographs  I  ever 
saw."— W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"  It  does  its  work  magnificently.  The  only  wonder 
is,  that  it  was  not  invented  years  ago.  It  is  indis- 
pensable."—Garrett  Bros.,  Philadelphia. 

"  I  think  the  Robinson  Photographic  Trimmer  is 
the  best  thing  ever  put  upon  the  market  for  photo- 
graphic use.  It  is  cheap  and  does  its  work  perfect.  I 
now  make  with  it  all  the  cut-outs  I  use,  and  also  cut 
out  all  my  photographs  from  eleven  by  fourteen 
down  to  cards.  It  only  cost  me  four  dollars  and  I 
would  not  be  without  it  for  the  best  twenty-five  dol- 
ar  cutting  machine  I  ever  saw." — D.  Lothrop,  Phila. 


"The  Trimmer  comes  up  to  all  you  claim  for  it.  I 
would  not  be  without  it." — T.  Cummings,  Lancaster. 

"Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  is  all  that  it  is 
claimed  to  be.  I  have  trimmed  all  my  prints  with  it 
from  the  day  I  received  it,  in  less  than  half  the  time 
taken  by  a  knife.  It  does  its  work  with  mathematical 
correctness  and  uniformity.  I  would  not  be  without 
it  for  ten  times  its  cost.  It  cannot  be  recommended 
too  highly." — W.  H.  Cranston,  Carry,  Pa. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmer  has  proved  to  us  one  of 
the  most  usefully  instruments  that  we  have  in  our 
gallery.  In  the  few  months  that  we  have  owned  it  we 
cut  some  10,000  photographs  with  it,  which  were  cut 
in  one-fourth  the  time,  and  cut  better  than  any  other 
instrument  could  do  it." — Schreiber  &  Sons,  Phila. 

"  It  does  the  work  quick,  sure,  and  perfect.  We 
would  not  be  without  it.-  It  is  simply  what  it  is  rep- 
resented to  be." — B.  Frank  Saylor  &  Co.,  Lancaster. 

"The  Photograph  Trimmer  is  a  good  and  quick  work- 
ing thing.  I  do  not  want  any  thing  better  and  more 
useful  in  the  gallery  for  that  purpose.  I  would  not 
be  without  one." — A.  M.  Bachman,  Allentown,  Pa. 

"  I  have  used  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  some 
time.  A  lady  was  asked  how  she  liked  her  sewing 
machine,  and  in  reply  said  '  Well  I  could  get  along 
without  it,  but  when  I  do  I  shall  not  sew  any  more.' 
That  is  me,  I  can  get  along  without  the  Trimmer  but 
when  I  do  I  shall  not  trim  photographs." — Well  G. 
Singhi,  Binghamton,  N.  Y. 

"  It  gives  perfect  satisfaction,  being  the  best  thing 
of  the  kind  I  have  ever  used.  There  is  nothing 
amongst  my  photographic  stock  more  useful." — M.  P. 
Rice,  Washi?igto?i,  £>.  C. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmer  works  admirably.  Does 
the  work  intended  with  great  satisfaction." — A.  K.  P. 
Trask,  Philadelphia. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 
FOB  SALE  BY  ALL  BEALEBS.  PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


POWERS  &  WEIGHTMAN 


Manufacturing  Chemists 

Sm  Wm  cori  Ninth  and  Parrish  Sts.? 

PHILADELPHIA, 

AND 

No.  56  Maiden  Lane,  NEW  YORK, 

OFFER  TO  STOCKDEALERS  A  FULL  ASSORTMENT  OF  RELIABLE 

Photographic  Chemicals 

OF  THEIR  OWN  MANUFACTURE,  INCLUDING : 


Nitrate  of  Silver, 

Sulphuric  Ether,  Concentrated, 

Ammonia,  Concentrated, 

Bromide  of  Potassium, 

Acetic  Acid, 

Chemically  Pure  Acids, 

Iron  and  Ammonia  Proto-Sulphate, 


Chloride  of  Gold, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium, 

Sulphate  of  Iron, 

Cyanide  of  Potassium, 

Chloroform, 

Tannin, 

Sulphuret  of  Potassium. 


BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO., 

159  Washington  St.,  Boston, 

Importers  and  Sole  Agents  in  the  United  States  for  the  celebrated 

Voigtlander  &  Son,  and  Darlot  Lenses 

For  Portraits,  Views,  and  Stereoscopic  Work  of  all  sizes.     Send  for  Price  List. 


TRY  OUR   NEW  STEREOSCOPIC  LENSES 

IP  YOU  WANT  THE  BEST.     PRICE,  $22  PER  PAIR. 

None  genuine  unless  our  names  are  engraved  on  them. 


ALBUMEN  PAPERS. 


demon's, 
Hovey's, 


Dresden  S.  &  M., 

"       Brilliant. 


AMERICAN  OPTICAL  CO.'S  CAMERA  BOXES 


Black  Walnut  Frames, 0VAL  and  s 


superior  finish. 


Carved  Rustic  Frames, Square' Carve dR-tic'-thi-f°— •»•  ah 


sizes  up  to  18x22. 


Q!  Vl  OY»YV»  OV»     f^O  T»fl     Tt»0  YY"I  CIO    We  have  0f  these  three  different  sizes  and  styles  for  the  Card, 


White  Hollywood  Frames. 


Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 


We  have  these  in  three  different  styles  of  each  size 
for  the  Card,  Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 


Stereoscopes,  Prang's  Chromos,  Glass  Baths,  Plain  Paper, 
Porcelain  Ware,  &c. 

And  every  description  of  goods  used  in  the  business,  at  wholesale  and  retail,  at  the  lowest  cash  prices 

BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO. 


LONDON    1851. 


LONDON    1862. 


PARIS    1867. 


PORTRAIT  1  VIEW  LENSES. 

We  have  now  successfully  introduced  to  the  American  Photographers  the  Ross  Lehs,  and  by  our 
increased  sales  we  know  they  are  appreciated.  At  the  convention  held  at  Buffalo,  July  15,  many  fine 
photographs  were  exhibited  by  photographers,  and  ourselves,  made  with  the  Ross  Lens,  which 
attracted  great  attention. 

While  Ross  &  Co.  are  the  oldest  manufacturers  of  Photographic  Lenses  in  existence,  they  also 
keep  up  with  the  requirements  of  the  fraternity,  by  constantly  manufacturing  new  combinations  and 
improving  on  those  already  in  existence.  They  have  lately  perfected,  and  will  soon  furnish  us  stock 
of,  a  new  series  of  Card  Lenses,  extra  rapid,  peculiary  adapted  for  babies,  and  people  who  will  not  be 
quiet.     We  will  give  notice  of  their  arrival. 

WE  HAVE  NOW  IN  STOCK 

PORTRAIT  LENSES,  from  1-4  to  15  x  18. 
CABINET  LENSES,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3. 
CARD  LENSES,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3. 

TRIPLETS,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7. 

INSTANTANEOUS  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

MEDIUM  ANGLE  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 
LARGE  ANGLE  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

STEREOGRAPHIC  LENSES,  all  sizes. 

Numerous  testimonials  pronounce  them  to  be  the  best,  as  well  as  the  cheapest  Foreign  Lens  ever 
offered  to  the  American  Photographer 


We  will  mail  price-list  on  application,  and  promptly  fill  all  orders. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  eor  the  United  States, 

822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


THE 


PHILADELPHIA 


PHOTOGRAPHER 


EDITED    BY    EDWARD    L.    WILSON. 


"VOLTTDUEE    XI. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  PUBLISHERS, 

S.  W.  GOR.,, SEVENTH  &  CHERRY  STREETS. 

-  •■  '  "   ."'1-8  7  4. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1874,  by  Benerman  &  Wilson,  in  the  Office  of  the 
Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  EMBELLISHMENTS. 


January.  Portrait  of  a  Lady.  By  F.  Luck- 
hardt,  Vienna,  Austria. 

February.  Portrait  of  a  Lady.  By  A.  Mar- 
shall, Boston,  Mass. 

March.  Preparing  Spring  Flowers  for  Market. 
By  Robinson  &  Cherrill,  Tunbridge 
Wells,  England. 

April.  Portrait  of  a  Lady.  By  W.  C.  North, 
Utica,  N.  T. 

May.  Portrait  of  a  Lady.  By  Wegner  & 
Mottu,  Amsterdam,  Holland. 

June.  Dressing  for  the  Masquerade,  Cabinet 
Group.     By  L    G.  Bigelow. 


July.  Portrait  of  a  Lady — Gold  Medal  Prize 
Picture.  By  Bradley  &  Rdlofson,  San 
Francisco,  Cal. 

August.     Portrait  of  a  Lady — the  Second  of  the 

Prize  Series.    By  J.  Barhydt,  Rochester, 

N.  Y. 
September.     View  of  Naples  and  Vesuvius.     By 

G.  Sommer,  Naples,  Italy. 
October.     Portrait  of  a  Lady — Rembrandt  Effect. 

By  J.  H.  Kent,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

November.  Portrait  of  a  Missie — One  of  the 
Prize  Pictures.  By  G.  M.  Elton,  Pal- 
myra, N.  Y. 

December.  Architectural  Study.  By  W.  A. 
Mansell  &  Co.,  London. 


■ 


ILLUSTRATIONS  ON  WOOD. 


PAGE 

Reutlinger's  Studio  in  Paris,      ...  5 

Daylight  Photometer,          ....  11 
Convenient  Copying  Table,          .          .         .13 

A  Broken  Down  Photographer,  ...  29 

As  the  Great  Ship  moved  down  the  Bay,    .  30 

A  Model  Boy, 30 

A  Girl  of  Fourteen, 31 

Horizontal  Bath,         .....  31 

A  Ride  to  Charleroi, 36 

Blowing  Glass,    .         .          ....  36 

The  Flatting  Furnace,        ....  36 

An  Angry  Old  Man,  an  Angry  Dog,  and  a 

Hungry-looking  Pitchfork,  ...  38 

Oblique  Mirrors  Fastened  Outside,     .         .  39 

Night  Retouching  Apparatus,     ...  50 

Dark-Room  Ventilation,      ....  68 

Sections  of  Dark-Room  Ventilation,  .          .  69 

Sight-Rest,  Butterfield's,    ....  72 

How  to  Catch  the  Baby,     ....  75 

Wonder  Camera,          .....  76 

The  Mighty  Signature  of  President  Bogar- 

dus, 83 

You  are  too  Late  ! 83 

A  Rhine  Bed 83 

Night  Travel  on  a  European  Railway,        .  85 

A  True  German  Greeting,            ...  85 

Milk  Cart  in  Berlin, 86 

Studio  of  Loescher  &  Petsch,  Berlin,           .  87 

Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler,         .          .  89 

Trimming  a  Tree  by  Photography,      .         .  106 

A  Hat  of  this  Size, 117 

Women  Ploughing, 117 

Haekmen  of  Vienna,           ....  117 

The  Grand  Exposition  Building  at  Vienna,  118 
The  Grand  Exposition  Building  at  Vienna, 

Ground  Plan, 119 

Dr.  Stein's  Heliopticor,      .         .      121,  122,  123 

Moulton's  Rapid  Print-Washer,           .         .  125 

Crossed  Eyes,      ......  131 

Kilburn  Brothers'  Establishment  at  Little- 
ton, N.  H.,  Plans  of  Floors,        .      138,  139 
Smith's  Copying  Board,      .          .                   .  141 
Studio  of  P.  A.  Mottu,  Amsterdam,  Holland,  142 
Crystal  Self- Acting  Table  Fountain,  .         .  143 
Dr.    Stein's    Heliopticor    Applied    to    the 

Microscope,          .....  146 

Photographing  the  Retina  of  the  Eye,        .  147 

Photographing  the  Tympanum  of  the  Ear,  148 

Thus  this  Man's  Tongue  Ran  on,        .         .  150 
A    Tremendous    Damsel    Enters   Without 

Ceremony,   ......  150 

Women  have  Rights  in  Vienna,          .         .  150 

Time  and  Silver-Saving  Apparatus,   .         .  152 

New  Photo.  Covers, 156 

Inter-State  Exposition  Building,  Chicago,  162 

Women  Working  in  the  Streets  of  Vienna,  170 


Street  Sprinkler  in  Vienna, 

Studio  of  F.  Luckhardt,  Vienna, 

Studio  of  F.  Luckhardt,  Vienna,  Sectional 

Views, 
Edel  weis  !  Frieskes  wasser  ! 
Silvering  and  Toning-Room, 
Floating  the  Paper,    .... 
Treatment  of  Negatives   before   Printing 

Figs.  21,  22,  23,  .... 
The  Pumpkin  Merchant  of  Venice,    . 
A  Court-yard  in  Venice,     . 
Streets  two  feet  Wide, 
Giotto's  Tower  in  Florence, 
Whose  Monument  is  That? 
Cramer's  Bismarck  Head-Rest,  . 
Apparatus   for   Adjusting   the   Subject  in 

Copying 

Detailed   Plans   of  Bradley   &  Rulofson's 

Gallery  in  San  Francisco,    .         .      206 
Interior  of  Studio  of  Bradley  &  Rulofson, 

San  Francisco,     ..... 
A  Convenient  Dark-Tent,   .... 

The  Classic  Busts, 

The  Halls  of  Architectural  Glory  in  Rome, 

Romans  Playing  Games  in  the  Streets, 

Ormsby's  Cameo  Press, 

Medallion  Masks  for  Ferrotypes, 

The  Printing-Room,   . 

The  Silvering  and  Toning-Room, 

The  Studio  of  J.  Barhydt,  Rochester, 

The  Naples  Donkey,  . 

A  Wicked,  Half-naked  Italian,  . 

Ascent  of  Mount  Vesuvius, 

The  Origin  of  the  Tripod,  . 

Relics  of  Pompeii, 

They  come  out  to  cheer    the 

Stripes,"     .... 
Bettini's  Print- Washing  Apparatus, 
Plate-Holder  for  Development,  . 
Dusting  Box  for  the  Graphite  Process, 
Bath  for  new  Method  of  Silvering  Paper,  . 
Hour-Glass  Funnel,    . 
Nason's  Backing  Glass  on  Ferrotype  Plates, 
Perspective,  Correct  and  Incorrect, 
Baron  Frederick  V.  Voigtlander, 
Elastic  Porcelain  Printing-Frame, 
Carved  Skylight,         .  " "     . 
Studio  Tent  for  Portraits,  . 
Under  his  best  Umbrella,    . 
The  "  Scenograph,"  . 
Printing  Table,  Woodbury  Process 
Photographic  Lens  Manufacture, 
Berlin  Umbrella, 
Phosphorescence, 
St.  Paul's,  London,    . 
Westminster  Abbey,   .         . 


PAGE 

170 
171 


172 
174 
194 
195 

195 
197 
198 
199 
201 
202 
204 

205 

,  207 

208 

212 

228 

229 

230 

.     231 

237,  238 

.     247 

,     248 

254 

259 

261 

262 

263 

264 

Stars  and 

265 

273 

297 

299 

301 

302 

305 

310 

supplement 

.     328 

.     329 

.     329 

.     333 

.     337 

.356 

358,  359,  360 

.     362 

.     363 

.     366 

.     367 


N.Y., 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Abnormal  Stereoscopic  Pictures.     Dr    H. 

Vogel, 25 

Absorption  of  Actinic  Rays  in  the  Atmos- 
phere.    Dr.  H.  Vogel,      .  52 
Accessories,         .....          .     236 

Actinometer,  Montagna's.    A.  Montagna,     109 
Advertising,    Photographic.      J.   Pitcher 

Spooner 14 

Air-Bubbles  on  Albumen  after  Fixing,       .      80 
Albumen  as  a  Preliminary  Coating,  A  Sub- 
stitute for.     G.  Wharton  Simpson,     .     Ill 
Albumen  Chlorobromide  Process.  M.  Carey 

Lea, 232 

Albumen  Paper  Company,  The  New.     Dr. 

H.  Vogel 179 

Albumen   Paper   Manufactories.     Dr.    H. 

Vogel, 217 

Alcohol  in   the  Printing   Bath,    Burning. 

J.  G.  Barrows, 61 

Alum, 258 

American  Photography  at  Vienna.     Edw. 

L.Wilson 148 

Americans  in  Germany.     Dr.  H.  Vogel,  .     249 
Apparatus,     Astronomical    Photographic. 

Ernest  Lacan 311 

Apparatus.  American,  at  Vienna.    Edw.  L. 

Wilson, 149 

Apparatus  for  Outdoor  Photography,  .      174 

Application  of  Photography  to  Industrial 

Purposes.     Dr.  H.  Vogel,  .        .     333 

Art  Galleries  in   the  Vienna  Exposition. 

Edw.  L.  Wilson 149 

Art  Principles.     P.  B.  Greene,         .         .       80 
Art  Studies  for  All,    .         .          42,  70,  103,  236 
Artistic  Photography.     C.  D.  Mosher,      .     209 
Astronomical    Photography.    Ernest   La- 
can 141,  270 


Balloon  Photography.     Ernest  Lacan,    .  179 

Barhydt's  Formula,    .....  254 

Baths,  etc.     W.  H.  Potter,       .         .         .  238 

Bibliographic 10,  314 

Bigelow's  Formula,    .....  176 

Bismarck  Head-Rest.     R.  Benecke,          .  204 

Blister  Cure.     J.  Pitcher  Spooner,          .  346 
Bold   Prints  from  Flat  Negatives.     C.  W. 

Hearn 322 

Books,  A  Word  or  Two  about.   .         .         .  370 

Bradley  &  Rulofson's  Studio,      .         .         .  206 

Bradley  &  Rulofson's  Formula,  .          .         .  208 
Braun,  Adolph,  The  Carbon  Printer.    Edw. 

L.  Wilson, 290 

Burnt-in  Enamels, 97 

Burnt-in  Pictures.     Dr.  H.  Vogel,  .         .  217 
Butterfield's  Sight  Rest.     J.  B.  Butter- 
field,         71 


page 
108 
109 


Dr 


Cra 


Carbon  Prints  in  Colors.  A.  Montagna,  . 
Carbon  Pictures  in  Oil.  Ernest  Lacan,  . 
Carbon    Printing    by    Continuation.       G. 

Wharton  Simpson,  .... 
Card  from  President  Rulofson  of  the  N.P.  A. 
Card  Mount  Manufactory  of  M.  Hutinet, 

in  Paris.     Edw.  L.  Wilson, 
Cellular  Structure  of  the  Collodion.     Dr. 

H.  Vogel,  .         .         . 
Centennial,  ...... 

Chicago  Accident,  The.     Dr.  H.  Vogel,  . 
Chicago  Convention,  The,  .... 

Chicago  Exhibition,  The,  ...         71,  97 

Chicago  Exhibition  and  Convention,  The,     161 

Chicago,  Once  more,  then, 

Chicago  Process.     C.  Gentile, 

Chloride,  Bromide,  and  Iodide  of  Silver  in 

Wet  and  Dry  Plates.     Dr.  H.  Vogel, 
Choice  of  Subject  in  Landscape  Photogra- 
phy  

Chromo-Photographs, 
Cleaning  Silver  Bottles, 
Cleaning  Glass,  .... 
Cleveland  Formula.     E.  Decker, 
Coating   Plates   with   India-rubber. 

H.  Vogel,  .... 
Collodion  for  Porcelain  Pictures.    G 

mer, 

Colored  Carbon  Enamel.     Ernest  Lacan 
Composition,       ..... 
Composition   in   Landscape    Photography 

R.  J.  Chute,       .... 
Contraction  of  the  Collodion  Film,  Obser 

vations  on  the.     Dr.  H.  Vogel, 
Contributions   to   the    Debt   Fund  of  the 

N.  P.  A.,     .         .         .         .        90,  115,  158 
Convention  and  Exhibition  of  the  N.P. A., 

The  Sixth  Annual, 
Copying  a  Single  Picture   from  a  Group 

E.  K.  Abrams,    .... 
Copying — How  to  Adjust  the  Subject.     R 

Benecke, 

Copying  Table,  Convenient.     B.  F.  Hall, 
Correction,  ...... 

Correspondence,  Belgian.  Chas.Waldack, 
Correspondence,   German.    Dr.   H.  Vogel, 

25,  50,  99,  153,  179,  217,  249,  266,  309,  333,  378 
Curious  Application  of  Photography.     Ot- 

tavio  Baratti, 106 


Dark-Tent,  A  Convenient.     T.  C.  Harris,  212 

Developer,  The.     P.  B.  Greene,       .         .  23 

Developer  with  Copper.     Mr.  Quiguernz,  350 

Development,  The.     E.  D.  Ormsbt,   .         .  303 

Development.     D.  H.  Cross,      ...  22 

Dr.  Stein's  Heliopticor.    Edw.  L.  Wilson,  146 


143 

345 

330 

333 

58 
266 
225 


193 
347 

99 

279 
221 
107 
108 
306 

179 

300 

269 
42 

307 

179 


241 

77 

204 

12 

187 

375 


CONTENTS. 


Dry  and  Damp  Atmospheres  on  Photogra- 
phy, Action  of.     Dr.  H.  Vogel, 

Dry  Collodion,  Very  Rapid.  Clavier 
D' Alger,    ...... 

Dry  Process,  On  an  Improved.  M.  Carey 
Lea,   ...... 

Dry  Processes.     Ernest  Lacan, 

Dry-Plate    Development.       G.    Wharton 

Simpson, Ill 

Dry-Plate  Work — An  Ingenious  Apparatus 
for  Excursionists.     Ernest  Lacan,    . 

Drying  and  Fuming.     Wilt  Brothers,    . 

Dubroni's  Apparatus.     Dr.  H.  Vogel, 

Dull  Weather  in  Germany.     Dr.  H.  Vogel, 

Dull  Season.     Dr.  H.  Vogel,    . 

Duplicate  Negatives  by  the  Wet  Process. 
Irving  Saunders,       .... 

Dust  Process,  New  Application  of  the.  Dr. 
H.  Vogel, 


266 


350 


164 
312 


336 

347 

52 

52 

249 

62 

217 


Economy  in  Time  and  Silver.    A.  Hesler, 
Editor's  Table,     32,  62,  94,  127,  159,  190, 

223,  254,  286,  318,  350, 
Effect  of  Lenses  of  Strong  or  Feeble  Light 

on  the  Brilliancy  of  the  Picture.     Dr, 

H.  Vogel,  .... 
Enamel  Photography.    G.  Wharton  Simp 

son,  .... 
Enameled  Cameo  Photographs, 
Enameled  Cameo  Souvenir,  or  Glace  Por- 
trait Process.  E.  D.  Ormsby, 
Enameled  Photographs,  Burnt-in. 
Enameled  Souvenir  Photograph,  The  New. 
Enamels,  The  new  Imitation, 
Encaustic  Paste.  Mr.  Sans, 
Encaustic    Paste,    New.        G. 

Simpson,  .... 
Enlargement  Formulae.  J.  P. 
Enlargement,    Modes    of.      G. 

Simpson,      .        .         .... 

Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler, 

Error  and  its  Remedy,  An.    0.  G.  Mason, 

Excluding  Chemical  Rays,  Means  of.    John 

M.  Blake,  . 
Exhibition  at  Chicago, 
Exhibitions,  Industrial.     D.  K.  Cady, 
Exhibitions,  Industrial,      . 
Exhibitors  at  Chicago,  List  of,  . 
Exhibitors  Here  and  There,  A  Word 
Exhibitors  in  Chicago,  To, 
Explanation,  An.     I.  B.  Webster, 
Exposure,  Reducing  the.     Ernest  Lacan, 
Eyes,  How  to  Photograph  the.   R.  J.  Chute, 

102, 


Wharton 


Spooner, 
Wharton 


to, 


61 
382 

53 

283 
168 

231 
66 

222 
168 
350 

251 

346 

14 
89 

7 


277 
315 
339 
277 
163 
146 
25 
111 

130 


Fading  of  Pictures,  Causes  for,           .         .  80 
Fall  of  Portrait  Photographers,  The.     Dr. 

H.  Vogel 266 

Filterings  from  the  Fraternity,  .          .     300,  346 

Florence.     Edw.  L.  Wilson,     .         .         .  200 

Formulas  for  Landscape  Work,  .         .         .  214 


Gems,  Damaged.  C.  0.  Chapman,  .  .  107 
Glace,    or   Enameled   Photograph.     I.    B. 

Webster, 322 

Glace,  or  Souvenir  Pictures,  The,  .  297,  375 
Glass  Patterns.  E.  T.  Whitney,  .  .  107 
Gold  Medal,  Still  Another,  .  .  .130 
Gold  Medal  Offered  to  Foreign  Photographers  130 


Good  for  the  Photographers,  .  .  . 
Graduated  Backgrounds.  J.  S.Steadman, 
Graphite  Process,  The,  .... 
Graphite  in  the  Negative  Process,  The  Use 
of.  E.  Bierstadt,  .... 
Griswold's  Photographic  Compositions, 


PAGE 

54 

58 

298 

304 


Hard  Negatives,  How  to  Print  from.     Er- 
nest Lacan 140 

Health  of  Photographers.  Ernest  Lacan,  239 
Hearn's  Practical  Printer.  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  333 
Hearn's  Formula},  Charles  W., .  .  .  265 
Hermagis'  Lenses.  Edw.  L.  Wilson,  .  331 
Hints  from  the  Record  of  an    Artist  and 

Photographer.     John  L.  Gihon,  .       41 

How  to  Cut  the  Paper  ;  How  to  Catch  the 

Baby.     Porter  Bros.,        ...       75 
How  to  Copy  a  Broken  Ambrotype.    J.  H. 

Hunter, 77 

How  to  Save  Time.  Mrs.  E.  N.  Lockwood,  124 
How   I   Photographed  the  Moon.     H.    C. 

Wilt 348 

How  it  is  Done  in  Boston.  A.  N.  Hardy,  305 
How  I  Prepare  Negatives  for  Printing.    H. 

C.  Wilt, 305 

Hypo  in  Bristol  Board,  How  to  Detect  it 

and  How  to  Remove  it.    Dr.  H.  Vogel,       50 
Hyposulphite  in  the  Developer.     Dr.  H. 

Vogel 266 


Impurities  in  the  Developer.    Dr.  H.  Vogel  266 
Indelible  Photography  with  Colored  Pow- 
ders.    A.  Montagna,          .         .         .  271 
Indelicate    Photographs.       G.    Wharton 

Simpson, 58 

Inducements  for  1875,  ....  321 
Instantaneous  Views.  R.  J.  Chute,  ,  308 
Insurance,  A  Question  on.  J.  C.  Potter,  11 
Intensifying  with  Permanganate  of  Potas- 
sium. Dr.  H.  Vogel,  .  .  .  266 
Interiors,  Photographing,  ....  368 
Iodide  in  the  Bath,   How  to  take  it  out. 

S.  M.  Miller, 77 


Kilburn  Brothers'  Establishment,      .         .138 


Lambert  Process,  The.  Ernest  Lacan,  .  203 
Landscape  Collodions.  C.  A.  Zimmerman,  302 
Landscape  Photography,  Class  in,  132.  174, 

214,  235,  279,  307 


Landscape  Photography.     Dr.  H.  Vogel, 

Lanterniana,       .... 

Last  Chance,  A, 

Last  Word  for  and  Before  1875,  A,     . 

Leaky    Skylight,    How   to    Cure.      E.    T 

Whitney, 

Lectures  on  Photography.  Ernest  Lacan 
Lessons  of  the  Prize  Pictures,  The.  G.R.C 
Levy  &  Co.'s,  Messrs.  J.,  Establishment  in 

Paris.     Edw.  L.  Wilson,    . 
Liebert's  Enlargement  Process.     Edw.  L 

Wilson, 

Liebert's  Establishment  in  Paris.     Ernest 

Lacan,        .... 
Light  and  Shade  in  Composition 
Light  and  the  Subject,  The.    R.  J.  Chute, 
Lighting.     R.  J.  Chute,     .        .         .        . 


308 

321 

33 

353 

107 
312 

187 

295 

292 

177 

70 

313 

210 


CONTENTS. 


Lighting  the  Studio.     Ernest  Lacan, 
Liquid  Glue,        ...... 

Local  Secretary  Hesler's  Appeal  to  Photog- 
raphers.    A.  Hesler, 
Lubricator,  The  Best.     B.  F.  Hall, 
Luckhardt's  Establishment  inVienna.  Edw. 
L.  Wilson, 


311 

348 


145 
305 


170 


Mierophotographic  Stereo.  Slides.    Dr.  H. 

VoGEL, 

Magic  Lantern,  ...... 

Magnesium  Light,   Intensity  of  the.     Dr. 

H.  Vogel, 54 

Mammoth  Lens  and  Box  for  $3,  .         .       81 

Mammoth  Offer,  The,  .  .        97,  124,  130,  161 

Maps,  Plans  and  Drawings  Printed  in  Fatty 

Inks.     Ernest  Lacan, 
Marcy's  Sciopticon.     Dr.  H.  Vogel, 
Martyn's,  Mons.  J-  H.,  Lantern  Slide  Pro- 
cess.    Edw.  L.  Wilson, 
Medallion    Mask   for   Ferrotypes.     C.    N. 
Stevens,     ...... 

Milan  and  its  Great  Cathedral.     Edw.  L. 

Wilson, 

Mincemeat,  Photographic.    I.  B.Webster, 
Morphia  Process,  The,         .... 

Mosaics,  1874, 

Moulton's  Rapid  Print-Washer, 
Mount  Washington  and  Return,  To,  . 
Muybridge"s    and    Kilburn's    Pictures   in 
Berlin.     Dr.  H.  Vogel, 


50 
257 


269 
53 

295 

237 

225 
6 

179 
1 

125 

137 

53 


Nadar  and  his  Studio  in  Paris.     Ernest 
Lacan,         ...... 

Naples  and  Vesuvius.     Edw.  L.  Wilson,  . 
Natural  Composition  Pictures  for  the  Ster- 
eoscope,       ...... 

Negative  Bath,  The.     R.  J.  Chute,  . 
Negative  Varnish,  About.    Dr.  H.  Vogel, 
Neo-oleo  Painting.     Ernest  Lacan, 
New  System  of  Lighting.     C.  E.  Myers,  . 
New  Book,  The.     W.  L.  Shoemaker, 
Newton's  Washing  Process, 
Non- Reversed  Negatives.     Ernest  Lacan, 
Notes  In  and  Out  of  the  Studio.    G.  Whar- 
ton Simpson,  14,  58,  93,  111,  143,  182, 
209,  245,  251, 
P.  A.,  Matters  of  the,    24,  59,  89,  115, 

158,  188,  280,  317,  342, 
P.  A.,  Financial  Condition  of. 
P.    A.,    Proceedings   of  the  Executive 
Committee  of  the,         .       116,  158,  317, 
P.  A.  at  Chicago,  The, 


N. 

N. 
N. 

N. 


43 

259 

55 
3 
217 
176 
326 
273 

79 
140 


2s; 


371 
65 


372 
129 


Obernetter's    Method    of    Making    Trans- 
parent Positives.    Dr.  H.  Vogel,  249 

Obituary, 318,   345 

Order  Sheet, 353 

Our  Picture,   2,  47,  90,  125.  142,  176,  205, 

253,  289,  344,  366 
Our   Profession,    A   Word   for.     William 

Heighway, 74 

Outdoor  Work  on  the  Pacific  Coast,    .         .     211 
Over-Printed  Photographs,   How  to  Save. 

Irving  Saunders,      ....       62 

Pennsylvania    Photographic    Association, 

21,  60,  81,  115,  157,  185,  221,  316,  341 
Permanent  Sensitive  Paper,     C.  F.  Rich- 
ardson,        133 


Permanent  Sensitive  Paper.     G.  Wharton 

Simpson,      .         .        .         .         •        .143 

Perspective,  The  Effect  of.    Dr.  H.  Vogel,     308 
Philadelphia  Photographic  Society,  18,  60, 

78,  113,  156,  185,  220,  339 
Photographing  a  Huge  Map,  How  it  was 

Done.     O.  G.  Mason,  ...         7 

Photography  in  France.     Ernest  Lacan, 

4,  43,  109,  139,  176,  202,  239,  268,  311,  335,  380 
Photometer,  Daylight,         .  .  .         .11 

Photography  in  Italy.     A.  Montagna,  108,  271 
Photo-lithography.     A.  Montagna,  .         .     108 
Photographing    the    Retina    of    the   Eye. 

Edw.  L.  Wilson,        .        .         .         .146 

Photographing  the  Tympanum  of  the  Ear. 

Edw.  L.  Wilson,        ....     148 

Photographic  Society,  The  Vienna,    .  .      186 

Photographers'  Association,  German,  New 

York,    ....         18,  79,  114,  220 

Photographic  Institute,  Chicago,  .       18,  80 

Photographic  Society,  New  England,  Bos- 
ton,      .         .  19,  60,  113,  156,  219,  340 
Photographic  Association,  Chicago,  22,  81, 

183,  219 
Photographic  Association,  Buffalo,     .         ;       60 
Photographic  Society,  Indiana,   61,  79,  157,  186 
Photographer's  Exhibition  in  Boston,  .        78 

Photographic  Society  of  the  District  of  Co- 
lumbia,       ...... 

Photographic  Society  for  Northern  Michigan 
Photo-lithographic  Process,  Improved.   Er- 
nest Lacan,        ..... 

Photographing  without  a  Dark-Room.  Edw. 
L.  Wilson,  ..... 

Photo.  Bas-relief.     G.  Wharton  Simpson, 

Photographic  Experience   in   Montevideo. 

John  L.  Gihon,  ..... 

Photographic   Researches   with   the   Spec- 
trum.    Dr.  H.  Vogel, 
Photographic  Formulas.     R.  Benecke, 
Photo.  Printing  Works  of  M.  Goupil  &  Co., 

Paris,  The.     Edw.  L.  Wilson,    . 
Photographic    Exhibitions  in  Vienna  and 

Berlin.     Dr.  H.  Vogel, 
Photomicrography.     Ernest  Lacan, 
Photographing  without  a  Plate-holder.     L. 

Moulton, 

Pisa   and   the    Leaning    Tower.     Edw.  L, 

Wilson,      .... 
Plain  Prints,   Something  about. 

telle  Edgerly. 
Plate-holder  for   Development. 

Wilson, 

Pocket  Album,  A  New,       .... 

Polychromatic  Prints.     Ernest  Lacan,    . 
Porcelain  Collodion,  Keeping,    . 
Portrait  Photography  in  a  Tent.     Edw.  L. 
Wilson,      ...... 

Positives  on  Opal  Glass,  Elastic  Frame  for 

Printing.     Edw.  L.  Wilson, 
Practical  Printer,  The,       .  .       193,  247 

Practice  in  the  Field,  .... 

Prepared  Mounts,  How  to  Use  Them.   Jas. 

Hadden, 107 

Printing,  Excellent  Work  on  Photographic,     193 
Prize  Offer,  Our  New,  ....  1 

Printing  and  Toning  Albumen  Paper.     R. 

M.  Cressey,        .         .         .         .         .13 
Prizes  for  Large  Photographs.     G.  Whar- 
ton Simpson,        .         .                          .14 
Prize  Offer,  Our, 65 


M.  Cos- 

•       72, 
Edw.   L. 


79 
79 

110 

121 
143 

23-3 

249 
302 

332 

333 
335 

77 

227 

104 

297 

155 

240 

39 

329 

328 
274 
235 


CONTENTS. 


Printing  Medallions.     E.  B.  Cores,  .         .  77 

Prize  Medal,  Our 97 

Printing  Bath,  Strength  of  the.     Ernest 

Lacan, 202 

Prize  Medal  Award,  The,   ....  145 

Prints  with  Fatty  Inks.  Ernest  Lacan,  141 
Proportions  of  Light  and  Shade.     R.    J. 

Chute. 276 

Prof.  Morton  on  Aggressive  Science,           .  135 

Protosulphate  of  Iron.     Wi.  W.  Seeler,  341 

Providence,  Hints  from.    G.  M.  Carlisle,  348 


Rallying  Words.     G.  H.  Loomis,       .         .  196 

Rambling  Remarks.     John  L.  Gihon,        .  232 

Reading  a  Photographic  Journal,       .         .  46 
Refrangible   Rays  upon  Iodide  and    Bro- 
mide   of  Silver,    Action  of  Different. 

Ernest  Lacan, 336 

Reproduced  Negatives,  On,         .         .         .  245 
Reproducing  Negatives,  and  Printing  from 

two  Negatives.    G.Wharton  Simpson,  283 
Reproducing    Negatives   by   the    Dusting 

-Process.     H.,       .                  ...  298 
Reproducing  Negatives.     Dr.  H.  Vogel,  .  333 
Reproducing  Negatives,  New  and  Success- 
ful Method  of.     Dr.  H.  Vogel,  .         .  99 
Reproductions  of  the  Louvre  in  the  Original 

Colors.     Ernest  Lacan,    .        .         .  110 

Reproducing  Negatives.     Ernest  Lacan,  140 
Reproducing    Negatives,    Solution   of  the 

Problem  of.     Dr.  H.  Vogel,       .     153,  217 
Resolutions  of  the  Washington  Society  on 

the  Pay  of  Photographers,  .          .         .  79 
Restoring    and    Copying   Daguerreotypes. 

Dr.  H.  Vogel, 217 

Retouchers  and  Retouching.  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  249 

Retouching  at  Night.     Fr.  Wendling,      .  12 

Retouching  Varnish.     0.  F.  Weaver,       .  302 

Retouching  Negatives,        ....  306 

Retouching  and  Lighting.    D.  H.  Spencer,  346 
Reutlinger's    Studio    in    Paris.      Ernest 

Lacan, 4 

Right  Spirit,  The, 115 

Rome,  A  Little  of  what  I  Saw  in.     Edw. 

L.  Wilson,  .         .        .         .        .228 


Salting  Plain  Paper.     W.  L.  Shoemaker,  303 

Salomon,  Mons.  Adam.     Edw.  L.Wilson,  296 

School  of  Instruction,  A  Photographic,       .  354 
Sensitiveness  of  Bromide  of  Silver  to  Color, 

The.     Dr.  H.  Vogel,          ...  25 
Sensitiveness  of  Collodion  Film,  On  Differ- 
ence in  the.     Dr.  H.  Vogel,      .         .  99 

Serious  Fire, 126 

Shaw  &  Wilcox  Patent,  The,      ...  1 

Shadows  in  Composition,    ....  103 

Short  Exposure.     H.  J.  Rodgers,     .         .  347 
Shortening    the    Exposure,    M.    Liebert's 

Method  of.     Edw.  L.  Wilson,    .        .  329 

Silvering  and  Toning  Room.    C.W.  Hearn,  248 
Silver-Saving  Patents,  No  more  Royalties 

for, 114 

Silvering  the  Paper,  Difficulty  in.     J.  W. 

MORGENEIER, 346 

Silvering  Paper,  New  Method  for.     M.  M. 

Griswold,      .         .         .        .                 .  301 

Silvering  Paper.     J.  H.  Hunter,       .         .  76 

Silver-Saving  Apparatus,  New,'.          .         .  24 

Siphon,  About  a.     I.  B.  Webster,    .         .  6 


Skylight,    New  Style  of  Construction   of. 

Edw.  L.  Wilson, 
Slee's  Mounts.     E.  T.  Whitney, 
Smith's  Copying  Board.     W.  G.  Smith, 
Soap  and  Alcohol,       .... 
Society   Gossip,    18,  60,  78,  113,  156,  183 

219,  316,  339,  373 
Solar  Negative  Prize,  The, 
Solar  Negatives,   Making.     J.  W.  Wykes 
Sooner  Said  than  Done.     Nason, 
Southworth-Wing  Patent,  The,  . 
Southworth-Wing   Patent,  Further   about 

the.     J.  H.  Tompkins, 
Spectroscopical  Observations,  New  Photo 

graphic.     Dr. Vogel,  . 
Sphinx,  The,       ...  50,  78,  281 

Splendid  Offer,  A, 

Splendid  Offer 

Spots   on   Negatives,   Removing.     Ernest 

Lacan, 

Staining   Collodion   Films.     G.  Wharton 

Simpson 

Stereographs,  Preservation  of.     Prof.  C 

F.  Himes,  Ph.D., 
Stereographs,    Something   about.     J.   Lee 

Knight, 

Strong  Developers.    G.  Wharton  Simpson 
Stylish  Backgrounds.     Dr.  H.  Vogel, 
Suggestion,  A  Good.     C.  D.  Mosher, 
Suggestions  to  all  intending  to  visit  the  N 

P.  A.  Convention  at  Chicago,  in  July 

A.  Hesler,  .... 

Sulphate    of  Zinc    in   the    Developer.     G 

Wharton  Simpson,    . 
Sulphurous  Acid  as  a  Substitute  for  Hypo 

Dr.  H.  Vogel,    .... 
Sulphate  of  Silver  Pinholes.  JohnM.  Blake 
Switzerland  and  the  Alps.    Edw.  L.Wilson 


328 
107 
141 
196 


130 
304 
305 
132 

222 

15S 

343 
33 
81 

141 

93 

16 

48 
251 
333 


164 

111 

266 
56 

289 


Table  Fountain,  Crystal  Self- Acting,  .     143 

Take  Care ! 56 

Talbot  Sensitized  Paper.  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  333 
Talk  and  Tattle,  ....  135,  189 
Test  for  Silver  Solutions.     R.  Benecke,   .     205 

The  World, 97 

Things  New  and  Old.  R.  J.  Chute,  .  3,  40,  68 
Toning  Prints  alike.  J.  H.  Hunter,  .  107 
Toning,  Something  New  about.   Montfort 

&  Hill, 304 

Transit  of  Venus,  The.  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  .  179 
Transit  of  Venus,  The,       .         .         .         .213 


Under  the  Skylight,  Hints.     R.  J.  Chute, 

102,  130,  210,  276,  313 
Useful  Hints,  A  Few,  .         .         .         .204 

Useful  Hints.     H.  C.  Wilt,       .         .         .348 


Varnished  Negative  Films,  How  to  Remove. 

Ernest  Lacan, 271 

Varnished  Negatives,  How  to  Clean.     C. 

A.  Palmer 107 

Venice.  Edw.  L.  Wilson,  .  .  .  197 
Ventilating  the  Dark-Room.  R.  J.  Chute,  40,  68 

Venus  Expedition.     Dr.  H.  Vogel,  .         .  249 

Venus,  The  Transit  of,                          .         .  363 

Vesuvius,  Ascent  of.     Edw.  L.  Wilson,    .  262 

Vienna  Exposition.     Edw.  L.  Wilson,       .  117 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Vienna,   Customs  and  Sights  in.     Edw.  L. 

Wilson 151 

Vienna,  Views  from  the  Dome  of  the  Ex- 
position Building.     Edw.  L.  Wilson,     172 
Views  Abroad  and  Across.    Edw.  L.Wilson 
29,  33,  82,  116,  146,  170,  197,  225,  259, 

289,  328,  355 
Vignetting  Papers,  Waymouth's,         .  .       39 

Vitrified  Photographic  Enamels,  .         .      323 

Vogel's  Handbook  of  Photography,  .         .     338 

Washing  Apparatus.     A.  Montagna,         .     272 
Waste  of  Time  and  Silver,  How  to  Avoid 

Unnecessary.     E.  Y.  Webster,  98,  151,  216 


Watson's    Enamel     Process,    Details     of. 

Robinson  &  Cherrill,        .         .         .  323 
Weak  Negatives,  Treatment  of.     A.  Mon- 
tagna,        .         .         .        .         .         .  108 

Wet  Books 130,  257 

Why  should  we  not  Excel?    C.  D.  Mosher,  209 
Wonder  Camera,  How  to  Make  a.   Charles 

M.  Carter 76 

World  Moves,  The, 65 

Wrinkles  and  Dodges,         .         .          61,  76,  106 


Yellow  Spots  on  Albumen  Paper.     Dr.  H. 
Vogel, 


21 


THE  MAGIC  LANTERN. 


ILLUSTRATIONS  ON  WOOD. 


Marcy's  Sciopticon,    . 
Morton's  Vertical  Lantern, 
Morton's  Magic  Lantern.    . 
Science  at  Home,  Illustrated, 
Experimenters'  Lantern,     . 


CONTENTS. 
Blue's  Lantern  Comicalities, 

Catalogue  of  Lantern  Slides, 
Catalogues,  Our,         .         .         . 

Franklin  Institute  Awards, 

How  to  Raise  a  Ghost, 
How  to  Start  a  Show, 


20, 


35 


3 
14,  17 

.       38 

.       34 
.       35 


Lantern  Readings,      .  .         .  .         .  3,  14 

Lantern  Slides  and  How  to  Make  Them,    .  3,  10 
Lantern  Practice.  Prof.  Henry  Morton,  18,  27 


Magic  Lantern,  The.     R.  J.  Chute,  . 

Magical  Memoranda,  .... 

Magic  Lantern  Slides,  Where  they  are  Pro- 
duced and  Where  they  may  be  Bought, 

Magic  Lantern,  The,  Its  History  and  Uses 
for  Educational  and  other  Purposes. 
M.  A.  Root,        .         ...         .  n 


page 
2,  31 


32 


Of  Course  they  Are,    . 
One  Happy  Thing  about  it, 
Outfit,  The, 
Our  $100  Outfit, 
Our  Outfits, 


Prospectus  for  1875, 
Prospectus, 


.  17 
.  25 
5,  9,  22,  37 
.  14 
.       25 


1 

38 


Science  at  Home.    Walter  B.  Woodbury, 

13,  20,  29 
Sparks  from  the  Lantern,  .         .         .  22,  37 


What  to  Buy  and  How  to  Buy  It,  .  5,  9,  22 
Wilson's  Lantern  Journeys,  ...  17 
Wilson's  Lantern  Journeys.     R.  J.  Chute,       26 


THE 


IpiWetyta  fpofflgntfltw. 


Vol.  XL 


JANUARY,  1874. 


No.  121. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1874, 
By  BENEEMAN  &  WILSON, 
In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


MOSAICS  1874. 

Our  fears  that  the  memory  of  the  "finan- 
cial crash"  would  hinder  our  readers  from 
sending  for  Mosaics  as  usual  were  ground- 
less, and  we  misjudged  the  photographic 
fraternity  when  we  thought  that  one  of  the 
first  things  they  would  deny  themselves 
would  he  books.  No  sooner  did  Mosaics 
reach  us  from  the  bindery,  than  the  waiting 
orders  for  it  caused  it  to  be  scattered  on  its 
mission  of  usefulness  in  all  directions,  and 
to  all  countries  almost.  It  is  a  most  useful 
book,  with  more  pages  than  ever,  and  every 
photographer  should  have  it.  We  have 
"  a  few  more  left."    50  cents. 

OUR  NEW  PRIZE  OFFER. 

In  order  to  awaken  an  interest  in  the 
production  of  good  portrait  work,  we  invite 
all  of  our  readers  to  compete  for  a  gold 
medal  which  we  offer  for  the  best  three 
cabinet  size  portrait  negatives  of  one  sub- 
ject which  are  sent  us  by  April  15th,  1874, 
the  successful  competitor  to  be  announced 
in  this  magazine,  and  the  successful  nega- 
tives to  be  printed  for  the  Philadelphia  Pho- 
tographer. Three  practical  photographers 
of  known  ability,  not  competitors,  will  be 
chosen  as  the  judges  to  make  the  award. 
The  negatives  are  to  be  sent  to  Edward  L. 
"Wilson,  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  and 
will  be  submitted  to  the  judges,  numbered. 


The  names  of  the  makers  are  not  to  be  re- 
vealed to  the  jury  until  the  award  is  made. 
We  look  for  generous,  spirited  competition 
in  this  matter,  and  hope  we  shall  be  gratified. 


THE  SHAW  &  WILCOX  PATENT. 

We  must  allude  to  this  grievous  topic  once 
more.  Our  readers  are  covering  us  with 
communications  for  publication  on  the  sub- 
ject and  overwhelming  us  with  correspond- 
ence. We  beg  you  in  mercy  to  refer  to 
what  has  already  been  written  and  published 
over  and  over  again.  We  cannot  give  you 
anything  fresh  upon  it ;  we  can  do  no  good 
for  you  by  publishing  your  communications. 
It  wont  decide  anything.  Mr,  Shaw  has  ob- 
tained from  the  Patent  Office  a  fifth  reissue  of 
his  patent.  With  this  in  his  hands  he  has  the 
power  to  go  into  court  and  make  oath  that 
any  photographer  in  the  land  (or  all  of  them) 
use  his  patent.  Knowledge  as  to  the  fact  is 
not  required  of  him.  This  throws  upon  you 
the  burden  of  proving  that  you  do  not  (if  you 
do  not)  infringe  his  patent.  And  this  you 
must  do,  if  he  complains  against  you,  and 
thus  have  a  lawsuit  with  him  ;  or  else  you 
must  make  terms  with  him.  Many  have 
written  us  to  "know  what  to  do?"  We 
cannot  advise  you.  The  above  are  the  only 
two  things  left  to  you  to  choose  from  ;  you 
must  decide  which  is  best. 

What  the  result  of  a  contest  with  Mr. 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Shaw  would  be  we  cannot  say.  At  Buffalo 
the  disposition  seemed  to  be  to  settle  rather 
than  to  fight — a  great  many  photographers, 
we  learn,  have  done  the  former.  After  so 
many  years  of  hard,  successful  warfare 
against  it,  this  conclusion  mortified  us  ex- 
ceedingly, but  if  photographers  prefer  it, 
we  have  nothing  more  to  say. 

We  are  just  as  heartily  with  you  as  ever,  and 
ready  to  help  you  rightly.  We  also  wish  our 
income  would  allow  us  to  be  so  financially. 
Many  of  you  have  made  agreements  years 
back  with  Mr.  Shaw.  There  are  only  two 
things  that  can  be  done  in  such  cases, 
namely,  to  keep  your  agreement  or  to  suffer 
the  penalty  of  an  action  against  you.  The 
whole  state  of  affairs  is  unfortunate,  but 
there  seems  to  be  no  resource  but  a  long  law- 
suit for  years  to  come.  This  reissue  of  the 
patent  must  be  good  or  it  must  be  bad.  A 
case  in  court  only  can  decide. 


OUR  PICTURE. 


As  promised  some  months  ago,  when  we 
had  the  pleasure  of  presenting  a   picture 
from  negatives  by  Herr  Fritz  Luckhardt, 
of  Vienna,  we  now  give  our  readers  another 
example  of  the  work  of  this  famed  artist 
We  are  enabled  to  do  this  by  the  generosity 
of  the  gentleman  we  have  named,  which, 
be  assured,  is  unusual.     We  are  ashamed  to 
say  it,  but  we  have  to  confess,  that  we  have 
extreme   difficulty  in   inducing   American 
photographers  to  take  enough   interest  in 
the  growth  of  their  art  in  their  own  country 
to  make  negatives  for  our  embellishments. 
There  ought  to  be  enough  interest  taken  in 
supporting  a  plan  which  we  were  the  first 
in  the  world  to  carry  out,  namely,  that  of 
issuing  a  monthly  photographic  study  for 
the  benefit  of  the  craft,  to  not  only  give  us 
plenty  of  negatives,  but  such  an  overwhelm- 
ing quantity  of  them  that  we  should  have 
hard  work  to  choose  from  them,  and  such 
as  would  enable  us  to  show  to  our  readers 
the  very  best  work  that  is  made  by  any  one 
in  the  country.     May  we  not  hope  that  this 
will  be  better  in  the  future,  and  that  our 
new  prize   plan  will   bring   us   something 
really  superb. 

In  our  "Views  Abroad  and  Across,"  we 
shall  presently  describe  Herr  Luckhardt's 


studio  with  drawings,  and  tell  our  readers 
how  he  works,  but  at  present  will  only  give 
a  part  of  a  conversation  we  had  together. 

We  mentioned  the  fact  that  he  had  been 
very  liberal  in  sending  us  negatives  for  two 
pictures  in  our  magazine,  and  stated  what 
we  have  said  above  respecting  the  trouble  we 
had  to  get  such  illustrations.  His  answer 
was:  "When  I  see  a  man  with  the  right 
sort  of  feeling  trying  to  aid  others  to  im- 
prove, I  will  do  all  I  can  for  him  I  saw 
plainly  the  work  the  Philadelphia  Photog- 
rapher had  undertaken,  and  understanding 
its  editor  and  his  method  of  teaching,  I  at 
once  made  up  my  mind  that  he  should  have 
the  best  negatives  I  could  make,  and  as 
many  of  them  as  he  wished,  and  that  is  why 
I  sent  you  as  many  as  I  did.  When  you 
want  more  you  are  very  welcome  to  them." 
We  wish  that  many  of  our  friends  at 
home,  whose  names  we  could  mention, 
would  have  this  same  spirit.  May  we  hope 
that  a  better  state  of  affairs  will  soon  exist. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  our  former 
pictures  by  Herr  Luckhardt  were  studies  in 
dark  drapery,  while  here  we  have  the  re- 
verse,— light  drapery.  Yet  we  have  the 
same  careful  compositions,  the  same  deli- 
cate lighting,  and  the  same  judicious  re- 
touching. There  is  a  something  about  them  . 
which  is  characteristic  of  the  man,  and  we 
shall  explain  what  it  is  and  why  it  is  at  an- 
other time,  when  we  will  also  refer  back  to 
these  beautiful  pictures. 

The  prints  were  made  by  Mr.  William 
H.  Rhoads  of  this  city.  Their  unusual 
beauty  and  brilliancy  are  due  to  the  fact  that 
they  are  printed  on  a  new  doubly  brilliant 
albumen  paper,  recently  introduced  into 
this  country  by  the  Albion  Albumenizing 
Company  of  London,  and  which  is  for  sale 
by  Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.  and  Scovill  Manu- 
facturing Company. 

The  gilt  and  black  mounts  are  of  a  new 
style,  recently  introduced  by  Messrs.  A.  M. 
Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  Philadelphia.  Usually 
these  mounts  are  made  black  on  both  sides, 
and  doubtless  your  stockdealer  is  prepared 
to  show  you  many  beautiful  styles  of  them. 
The  prints  were  trimmed  round  cornered 
by  the  Eobinson  Photograph  Trimmer, 
without  which  we  could  not  undertake  to 
do  them. 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


THIXGS  NEW  AND  OLD. 

by  r.  j.  chute. 
The  Negative  Bath. 

Water,       .         .         .         .15  ounces. 

Nitrate  of  Silver,         .         .        1  ounce. 

Iodide  of  Potassium,  .       2  grains. 

This  or  a  similar  formula  may  be  found 
in  every  work  on  photography,  and  is  often 
reiterated  in  the  journals  ;  but  as  the  nitrate 
bath  is  unlike  most  other  chemical  prepara- 
tions we  use,  in  that  it  is  used  indefinitely, 
it  is  a  matter  of  the  first  importance  that  it 
should  be  kept  in  working  condition  after 
it  is  made.  In  order  to  do  this  it  is  neces- 
sary to  know  when  it  is  in  good  order  and 
when  it  is  not ;  if  it  does  not  work  well,  to 
know  what  the  difficulty  is  and  how  to  ap- 
ply the  remedy. 

If  a  bath  fails  to  produce  good  work  after 
it  has  been  doing  well,  there  is,  of  course,  a 
cause  for  it.  There  may  be  said  to  be  regular 
and  irregular  causes.  The  regular  causes 
are  those  that  come  from  the  usual  routine 
of  work,  and  are  exhaustion,  becoming 
charged  with  ether  and  alcohol,  dust  and 
collodion  films  from  the  plates,  and  or- 
ganic matter  that  dissolves  and  becomes  a 
part  of  the  solution.  The  first  of  these — 
exhaustion — produces  pinholes,  by  the 
strength  becoming  reduced,  leaving  iodide 
of  silver  in  excess,  which  is  deposited  in 
fine  crystals  on  the  surface  of  the  plate.  The 
remedy  for  this  is  to  filter  and  strengthen. 
The  second,  ether  and  alcohol  in  the  bath, 
causes  lines  and  markings  in  the  direction 
that  the  plate  stands  in  the  camera,  from 
the  drying  of  the  plate  by  the  evaporation 
of  the  alcohol  held  in  the  solution.  The 
remedy  for  this  is  to  boil  the  bath  partly 
away  till  the  ether  and  alcohol  are  expelled. 
The  third,  dust  and  collodion  films,  may 
be  avoided  in  a  great  measure  by  being 
careful  to  keep  the  plates  well  protected 
after  being  cleaned,  dusted  before  coating, 
and  then  wipe  carefully  from  the  edges  of 
the  plate  the  heavy  ridges  of  collodion  that 
collect  as  it  drains,  and  which,  if  left,  often 
become  loosened  and  break  off  in  the  bath. 
These  may  be  avoided  by  a  pin  in  the  dip- 
per, so  that  the  plate  shall  not  go  to  the 
bottom ;  or  it  may  be  kept  well  in  motion 
during  the  coating.  The  sure  remedy, 
however,  is  to,filter. 


The  fourth  cause,  organic  matter  in  solu- 
tion, comes  mostly  from  the  plates,  though 
any  particles  of  soluble  matter  that  fall 
into  the  bath  are  taken  up.  A  fruitful 
cause,  probably,  is  albumen  from  the  glass. 
To  avoid  this,  care  should  be  taken  in  al- 
bumenizing  to  prevent  the  albumen  getting 
on  the  back  of  the  plate,  and  also  in  coat- 
ing to  cover  the  surface  as  completely  as 
possible  so  that  no  albumen  is  exposed. 
The  result  of  this  condition  of  the  bath  is 
fog,  streaks,  and  opaque  spots.  These  may 
be  removed  by  adding  nitric  acid,  but  the 
remedy  is  not  very  permanent,  and  it  may 
be  necessary  to  repeat  the  dose  in  a  day  or 
two;  besides  the  deposit  in  the  negative, 
when  developed,  seems  to  be  made  up  so 
largely  of  soluble  matter,  that  after  fixing, 
the  shadows  and  dark  drapery  will  be  al- 
most destitute  of  detail  or  relief.  The  most 
effectual  remedy  for  this  trouble  is  to  neu- 
tralize the  bath  and  boil  it.  It  may  be 
neutralized  with  ammonia,  bicarbonate  of 
soda,  cyanide  of  potassium,  or  perman- 
ganate of  potash.  The  first  two  of  these 
are  preferable,  if  the  bath  is  any  way  de- 
cidedly acid.  The  two  last  have  rather  a 
cleansing  influence,  and  may  often  be  used 
with  success.  The  bath  should  not  only  be 
made  neutral,  but  slightly  alkaline.  In 
this  condition,  when  heat  is  applied,  the 
foul  matter  is  liberated  and  falls  to  the 
bottom  in  a  black  mass.  In  renovating  a 
bath  in  this  way  it  should  be  filtered  after 
boiling  while  it  is  yet  warm.  If  allowed 
to  cool,  much  of  the  matter  thrown  down 
may  be  redissolved  and  the  benefit  of  the 
operation  in  a  measure  lost.  After  filter- 
ing, it  may  be  diluted  with  pure  water  to 
the  proper  strength,  and  pure  nitric  acid 
added  till  it  shows  a  rather  decided  reaction 
on  blue  litmus-paper.  The  effect  of  the 
acid,  or  the  working  condition  of  the  bath, 
cannot  be  definitely  ascertained  until  two 
or  three  hours  after  the  addition  of  the  acid. 

With  care  to  exclude  as  far  as  possible 
all  extraneous  matters,  and  avoid  unnec- 
essary doctoring,  the  treatment  I  have 
described  will  keep  a  bath  in  good  condi- 
tion indefinitely. 

The  practice  of  precipitating  the  iodide 
from  a  bath  whenever  it  shows  any  signs  of 
failure,  no  matter  what  the  cause,  is  one 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


that  cannot  be  too  strongly  condemned. 
The  only  iodide  I  ever  disturb  is  what 
little  is  precipitated,  by  adding  to  it  a  few 
ounces  of  pure  water  that  has  rinsed  the 
bath-dish  after  drawing  off  the  bath.  This  I 
do  not  filter  out,  but  let  it  remain  and  be 
taken  up  again,  if  it  will,  when  the  bath  is 
strengthened  by  boiling.  In  making  up  a 
bath,  after  boiling,  it  should  be  given  its 
full  bulk,  filtered,  and  sufficient  silver  added 
to  bring  it  to  its  proper  strength. 

The  irregular  causes  of  failure  are  those 
that  do  not  arise  as  the  result  of  ordinary 
work,  or  that  come  from  applying  the  wrong 
remedy  in  case  of  some  trivial  derange- 
ment. A  common  remedy  with  inexperi- 
enced operators  for  all  sorts  of  difficulties  is 
acid.  Now  acid  is  onlj-  beneficial  in  cases 
of  an  alkaline  reaction,  or  such  as  I  have  al- 
ready mentioned.  Another  irregular  cause 
is  getting  the  bath  too  strong ;  it  will  pro- 
duce spots,  streaks,  and  hard,  coarse  nega- 
tives. Dilute  and  filter,  and  the  trouble 
will  disappear.  Another  cause  is  quite 
sure  to  make  its  appearance  on  the  ap- 
proach of  cold  weather,  unless  great  care  is 
taken  to  keep  up  the  temperature.  The 
negative  bath  is  the  most  easily  disturbed 
by  cold  of  all  the  chemicals  used,  or  the 
effect  of  cold  upon  it  produces  the  most  an- 
noying difficulties.  And  lastly,  the  bath 
should  not  be  treated  when  the  collodion, 
developer,  or  dirty  plate-holders  are  at 
fault.  Be  sure  of  the  seat  of  difficulty,  if 
possible,  before  applying  a  remedy. 

PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  FRANCE. 

BY  ERNEST  LACAN. 
I. 

In  asking  me  to  send  you  for  the  readers 
of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  a  series 
of  articles,  to  make  them  acquainted  with 
the  establishments  of  the  principal  photog- 
raphers of  Paris,  you  allowed  me  full  liberty 
to  choose  those  that  appeared  to  me  the  most 
interesting  to  describe,  and  at  the  same  time 
you  left  to  my  discretion  the  order  to  be  ob- 
served in  this  undertaking.  I  believe  that 
I  will  meet  with  your  approval,  by  com- 
mencing with  the  studio  of  Mr.  Keutlinger. 
This  skilful  artist  has  every  right  to  occupy 
the  foremost  rank  ;  he  is  one  of  our  oldest 
portrait  photographers,  and  is  one  of  those 


with  whose  name  and  works  your  readers 
are  well  acquainted.  Finally,  his  establish- 
ment has  remained,  in  all  respects,  the  type 
of  those  galleries,  in  whicli  the  first  disciples 
of  Niepce  and  Daguerre  inaugurated  their 
art,  and  made  their  reputations  and  their 
fortunes.  Since  1852,  Reutlinger  has  been 
obliged  to  enlarge  his  establishment  in  order 
to  accommodate  the  great  increase  of  his  cus- 
tom and  his  work.  Experience  has  forced 
him  to  make  numerous  changes  in  his  ap- 
paratus and  his  processes,  but  the  appear- 
ance of  the  operating-room  in  which  he 
works,  and  of  the  reception-rooms  to  which 
the  public  are  admitted,  have  suffered  but 
very  slight  changes. 

When  I  enter  his  place  it  seems  to  me  that 
all  at  once  I  become  twenty  years  younger  ; 
it  would  be  very  desirable  that  all  his  sitters 
should  experience  physically  the  same  effect. 

Before  introducing  the  readers  of  the 
Philadelphia  Photographer  to  the  artist's 
studio,  I  think  it  would  be  well  to  make 
them  acquainted  with  the  master  of  the 
house.  You,  who  now  have  a  personal  ac- 
quaintance with  him,  can  judge  if  the  sketch 
is  a  correct  one. 

Keutlinger,  who  is  of  German  origin,  has 
preserved  the  Teutonic  type  and  accent. 
He  is  of  medium  height,  inclining  to  corpu- 
lency, with  a  round  face.  His  hair,  which  falls 
rather  low  on  the  forehead,  is  brown,  short, 
and  slightly  wavy.  His  mustache  and  goatee 
are  both  thin,  delicate  and  grizzly.  His 
eyes,  slightly  sunken,  have  a  piercing  look 
under  the  spectacles  which  he  always  wears. 
He  is  about  fifty  years  of  age,  but  does  not 
appear  so  old.  He  has  no  special  dress  for 
his  work,  and  nothing  eccentric  in  his  gar- 
ments. There  is  an  air  of  simplicit}'  and 
good  nature  about  him  which  is  not  belied 
by  his  words.  So  much  for  the  man,  now 
let  us  speak  of  his  studio. 

Keutlinger 's  establishment  is  in  the  fifth 
and  sixth  stories  of  a  fine  house  situate  on 
the  Boulevard  Montmartre,  between  Vivi- 
enne  and  Richelieu  Streets.  Two  frames 
hung  at  the  door  which  opens  on  the  Boule- 
vard are  filled  with  attractive  portraits, 
(card  and  imperial  size)  of  our  female  the- 
atrical celebrities.  It  is  about  as  much  of  an 
exhibition  as  is  usually  made  hy  Parisian 
photographers.    A  handsome  and  wide  stair- 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHEK. 


way  leads  to  the  studio.  The  first  things 
that  strike  you  on  entering  the  antecham- 
ber, which  is  transformed  into  an  office,  is 
the  lowness  of  the  ceiling  and  the  want  of 
light.  On  the  right  is  a  room,  larger  and 
better  lighted,  for  the  sa,le  of  those  pictures 
to  which  I  shall  later  refer.  On  the  left  are 
the  exhibition  and  waiting-rooms.  They 
consist  of  three  rooms  of  medium  size, 
slightly  mansarded,  and  whose  principal 
ornaments  are  the  frames  which  cover  the 
walls  and  which  contain  prints  of  all  kinds. 
Here  we  find  specimens  that  have  obtained 
awards  in  all  the  exhibitions  that  have  suc- 
ceeded each  other,  during  the  last  twenty 
years,  in  France  and  other  countries.  A 
young  lady,  Reutlinger's  beautiful  daughter, 
who  speaks  several  languages,  receives  the 
customers  and  does  the  honors  of  these 
salons.  A  small  door  leads  to  the  skylight, 
of  which  I  send  you  here  inclosed  the  pho- 
tograph. The  view  is  taken  from  the  door 
at  which  you  enter.  This  gallery,  formed 
of  two  mansards,  which  have  been  united 
by  removing  the  partition  that  separated 
them,  is  12  metres  (39  feet)  in  length  by  only 


4  metres  (13  feet)  in  breath.  Its  height  to 
the  top  of  the  upper  sash  is  hardly  5  metres 
(16  feet  3  inches).  The  light  comes  from 
the  north,  but  in  sunny  days  it  is  far  from 
being  good,  oh  account  of  the  yellow  reflec- 


tions from  the  houses  situate  on  the  other 
side  of  the  Boulevard,  the  fronts  of  which 
have  a  southern  exposure.  It  is  \>y  means 
of  an  ingenious  combination  of  white  and 
blue  shades,  that  the  artist  succeeds  in  cor- 
recting this  defective  light,  so  as  to  obtain 
the  charming  effects  so  much  admired  in 
his  productions. 

As  may  be  seen  in  the  accompanying 
drawing,  these  curtain  screens,  A,  B,  C, 
can  be  used  separately  simply  by  means  of 
cords  and  pulleys.  They  move  from  the 
bottom  to  the  top  on  the  side  sashes,  and 
slide  on  the  contrary  from  the  top  to  the 
bottom  on  the  upper  sashes.  When  they 
are  not  in  use  they  are  gathered  together 
as  represented  at  D,  E,  F  ;  besides  these, 
other  white  curtains,  G,  can  be  moved  in 
the  ordinary  manner  from  side  to  side. 

This,  I  repeat,  is  the  only  secret  by  which 
the  eminent  photographer  can  execute,  in  a 
gallery  so  unfavorable  in  many  particulars, 
works  which  with  justice  are  classed  among 
the  finest  productions  of  photographic  art. 
It  may  be  said  that  he  handles  light  as  a 
painter  does  color. 

At  the  end  of  the  gallery  is  a  small  room 
for  ladies.  The  door  which  is  seen  on  the 
left  of  our  drawing,  leads  to  the  laboratory, 
which  is  divided  into  three  small  apartments. 
The  first  is  used  for  cleaning  the  plates,  the 
second  for  their  preparation,  the  third  for 
developing  the  negatives. 

From  the  laboratory  we  pass  into  the 
rooms  in  which  are  found  the  artists  who 
retouch  the  negatives  and  the  positive  prints. 
They  consist  of  a  large  apartment,  followed 
by  a  smaller  one,  in  which  seven  persons  are 
continually  working.  In  an  adjoining  room 
are  made  the  enlargements  by  the  negative 
process.  Further  on  is  a  kind  of  storeroom, 
containing  the  stock  of  plates  of  all  sizes 
required  for  the  daily  work. 

Before  leaving  this  portion  of  the  estab- 
lishment, which  is  used  in  the  various  ope- 
rations necessary  for  the  production  of 
the  negative,  I  must  add,  there  is  not 
in  any  of  the  different  rooms  of  which  I 
have  spoken,  a  nook  or  corner  that  is  not 
filled  with  boxes  containing  negatives. 
These  negatives,  which  are  thus  carefully 
preserved,  exceed  one  hundred  thousand  in 
number.     It  is  the  wealth  of  the  house;  a 


6 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


gold-mine  continually  worked,  which  in- 
stead of  becoming  exhausted,  grows  richer 
every  day. 

Continuing  our  investigation,  we  find  on 
the  same  story  the  room  in  which  the  papers 
are  prepared,  and  in  which  is  performed  the 
toning  of  the  positives.  Three  persons  are 
specially  occupied  at  this  portion  of  the 
work.  The  printing  is  done  in  the  upper 
story,  that  is  to  say,  on  the  roof,  which  forms 
a  terrace.  There  we  find  five  hundred  print- 
ing-frames, which  are  constantly  in  use. 
Seven  persons  divide  among  them  the  care- 
ful work  required  in  the  operation  of  print- 
ing. The  customers  of  Reu.tlin.ger  are  not 
composed  of  the  ordinary  public  only,  who 
have  their  portraits  taken,  but  it  includes 
also  the  dealers  in  specialties,  and  commis- 
sion merchantsr  to  whom  he  makes  daily 
deliveries  of  the  portraits  of  the  celebrities 
of  every  description, — actors  and  actresses, 
statesmen,  artists,  authors,  queens  of  the 
demi-monde,  &c,  of  which  he  is  the  pub- 
lisher, and  of  which  the  trade  requires  a 
large  number.  This  is  what  constitutes  the 
daily  sale  which  I  have  already  alluded  to. 
All  these  portraits,  catalogued  and  number- 
ed with  care,  are  arranged  in  cases  and 
drawers  around  the  table  used  for  this  pur- 
pose, and  when  the  buyer  presents  himself, 
instead  of  asking  for  so  many  prints  of 
Mr.  X.  or  Miss  Z.,  he  simply  asks  for  so 
many  dozens  of  such  a  number,  just  as  if  he 
were  buying  any  ordinary  article  from  its 
manufacturer. 

Reutlinger  employs  twenty-eight  persons, 
without  counting  the  colorists  and  retouch- 
ers, who  work  in  their  rooms  at  home.  These 
twenty-eight  persons  are  thus  divided:  two 
at  the  desk,  one  for  the  salesroom,  two  in 
the  waiting-room,  three  in  the  gallery, 
three  in  the  laboratory,  seven  at  retouch- 
ing, three  in  the  preparation  of  the  paper, 
seven  in  the  printing  and  mounting  of  the 
the  prints. 

When  one  has  visited,,  as  I  have  just  done, 
the  establishment  in  all  its  details,  it  is  easy 
to  understand  how  much  work,  perseverance, 
and  talent,  were  required  from  its  creator 
(with  the  simple  means  which  he  employs), 
to  produce  the  charming  works  of  art  to 
which  he  owes  his  fortune  and  universal 
reputation. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  MINCEMEAT. 

BY   I.    B.    WEBSTER. 

Sixteenthly,  about  a  Siphon. — While 
reading  over  one  of  the  papers  that  were 
read  before  the  Buffalo  meeting  of  the  E".  P. 
A.,  I  came  across  a  long  description  of  a 
siphon  for  draining  the  water  from  the 
tub  or  tank  in  which  the  toned  prints  were 
being  washed,  to  insure  a  complete  change  of 
water  at  certain  intervals  during  the  wash- 
ing, and  the  thought  came  to  me  that  perhaps 
I  could  describe  a  simpler  method,  that  does 
the  work  equally  well^while  the  cost  and 
trouble  of  it  are  comparatively  nothing.  I 
will  tell  you  the  simple  story  of  my  discov- 
ery of  it,  which  will  explain  to  you  its  work- 
ings. 

When  the  city  first  brought  the  Ohio 
Eiver  water  into  our  streets,  I  was  among 
the  first  to  introduce  it  into  the  photograph 
business.  Several  years  previous  to  this  I 
had  made  three  large,  shallow  tubs,  25x30 
in  size,  6  or  8  inches  deep,  with  handles  at 
each  end  to  carry  them  by.  They  were 
water-tight.  When  the  water-pipes  were 
put  in  I  had  one  of  these  boxes  lined  with 
sheet-lead,  and  a  waste  hole  made  in  the 
bottom  of  it.  Into  this  I  had  a  ferrule  in- 
serted and  soldered  tight.  I  then  fitted  to 
that  ferrule  a  piece  of  pipe  open  at  both 
ends,  about  four  or  five  inches  long,  which 
would  allow  no  water  to  run  out  of  the  sink 
until  it  reached  the  top  of  this  pipe,  when 
it  would  run  out  as  fast  as  it  came  in. 
Thus,  you  see,  I  always  have  water  in  the  sink 
with  no  danger  of  an  overflow,  as  long  as 
the  top  of  the  pipe  was  open.  One  day, 
while  listlessly  sitting  by  this  sink,  I 
chanced  to  pick  up  a  round,  smooth  drink- 
ing tumbler,  and  set  it  down,  bottom  up, 
over  this  pipe.  Its  bottom  was  at  least  an 
inch  higher  than  the  top  of  the  pipe.  I 
turned  on  the  water,  and  as  it  filled  the  sink 
and  came  to  the  top  of  the  pipe,  I  watched 
the  effect  very  closely,. and  presently  it  began 
to  run  down  the  pipe;  and  as  the  sink  filled  it 
ran  down  the  faster,  and  presently  the  pipe 
was  carrying  off  its  full  capacity,  and  I  saw 
the  quantity  in  the  sink  begin  to  get  lower 
and  lower,  while  the  vacuum  between  the  top 
of  the  pipe  and  the  bottom  of  the  glass  began 
to  get  less  and  less,  until  finally  all  the  air 
was  gone,  and  its  place  filled  with  water  in 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


rapid  motion.  Thus  it  kept  on  until  the 
sink  was  entirely  empty,  notwithstanding 
the  supply-pipe  had  been  doing  its  best  to 
keep  up  to  the  point  where  it  started.  I 
tried  the  experiment  again,  and  it  worked 
the  same  as  before,  I  not  stopping  the  sup- 
ply once.  I  have  done  the  same  thing  with 
a  16  ounce  wide-mouthed  bottle.  Tin  cans 
answer  just  as  well.  I  afterwards  introduced 
this  siphon  into  the  sink  where  I  washed 
my  prints.  My  prints  I  put  into  a  wooden 
box  with  a  canvas  bottom,  which  fits  into 
the  sink,  giving  plenty  of  space  around  it, 
and  the  water  is  let  on  to  the  prints  through 
perforated  lead  pipe.  This  may  be  very  old 
to  some  of  your  readers,  but  I  am  free  to 
say  that  "  no  one  ever  told  it  to  me." 


AN  ERROR  AND  ITS  REMEDY. 

BY   0.    G.    MASON. 

A  few  months  since  I  received  a  note,  re- 
questing me  to  call  at  the  office  of  a  promi- 
nent railroad  company  "  upon  professional 
business."  On  answering  the  request,  I  was 
ushered  into  a  long  hall,  upon  one  side  of 
which  hung  a  map  forty  feet  long,  and  nine 
feet  wide,  highly  finished  in  water  color, 
such  as  was  deemed  best  for  representing 
the  conformation,  variety,  and  general  geo- 
graphical features  of  the  vast  tract  of  our 
territory  lying  between  Lake  Superior  and 
Puget  Sound,  on  the  Pacific  Ocean.  The 
timber  land  was  represented  by  seemingly 
numberless  miniature  trees  in  deep  green  ; 
the  mountains  in  blue,  white,  and  brown  ; 
rivers,  lakes,  and  ocean,  in  brilliant  blue, 
&c.  This  map  I  was  asked  to  photograph 
to  \  scale,  which  would  make  my  copy  about 
ten  feet  by  twenty-five  inches,  exclusive  of 
margin.  With  due  degree  of  hesitation,  I 
undertook  the  work  before  learning,  as  I 
afterwards  did,  that  it  had  been  pronounced 
impossible  by  others  who  had  examined  it. 
Of  course  it  would  not  be  feasible  to  use  a 
plate  ten  feet  long,  and  the  width  of  the  hall 
would  not  admit  of  working  a  proper  lens 
for  producing  an  image  in  sections,  twenty- 
five  inches  high.  I  was  therefore  obliged 
to  remove  the  map  to  other  quarters,  and  as 
my  own  place  was  fully  occupied  by  special 
work  which  I  could  not  well  defer,  I  made 
arrangements' for  the  use  of  the  operating- 


room  of  a  skilful  friend,  whose  reputation 
led  me  to  engage  his  assistance  on  the  work. 
The  map  was  carefully  rolled,  and  with  the 
aid  of  four  men  removed  to  the  place  selected. 
I  concluded  to  make  the  copy  in  six  sections, 
upon  30  x  26  inch  plates.  A  plank  frame  as 
high  as  the  map  was  wide,  and  one-fourth 
its  length,  was  erected  upon  a  movable  plat- 
form, and  securely  fastened  in  a  true  per- 
pendicular ;  about  ten  feet  of  the  map  was 
then  unrolled  and  held  to  the  frame  by  tacks 
driven  through  the  heavy  silk  binding 
which  covered  the  outer  edge  of  the  margin. 
The  camera  was  placed  in  position,  focus 
arranged,  and  a  trial  plate  made  ;  every- 
thing appeared  satisfactory. 

This  preparatory  work  had  consumed 
most  of  the  first  day,  and  in  order  to  insure 
our  labor  for  readiness  to  begin  early  the 
next  morning,  we  nailed  both  the  camera 
stand  and  the  platform  on  which  the  map 
was  mounted,  to  the  floor.  The  great  value 
of  the  map  was  such,  that  for  safety  against 
accident,  by  storm  or  otherwise,  it  was  taken 
down,  re-rolled,  and  placed  in  its  metallic 
case.  When  I  reached  the  operating-room 
on  the  next  morning,  I  found  my  friend  and 
his  assistants  busily  making  a  negative  of 
the  first  section  of  the  map,  which  they  had 
again  placed  in  position.  Upon  inquiry  I 
was  told,  that  careful  measurements  of  the 
image  on  the  focussing-screen  had  been  made, 
and  everything  found  satisfactory  as  on  the 
day  previous.  The  work  was  proceeded  with, 
the  whole  day  being  required  for  its  com- 
pletion, although  we  had  no  failures  from 
error  in  timing  a  single  exposure  or  in 
manipulation.  But  the  heft  of  the  map,  and 
the  great  care  required  in  handling  it,  made 
the  work  necessarily  slow. 

On  the  next  morning  the  negatives  were 
varnished,  and  the  printing  began.  Some 
idea  may  be  formed  of  my  surprise,  when 
on  the  fourth  morning  from  the  beginning 
of  the  work,  I  attempted  to  mount  an  entire 
copy  of  the  great  map,  and  found  that  the 
sheets  would  not  join,  or  rather  that  the 
border  and  all  geographical  lines  failed  to 
meet.  Upon  measuring  the  negatives  I  found 
that  the  left-hand  end  of  each  image  was 
one-fourth  of  an  inch  larger  than  the  right- 
hand  ends  on  the  same  plate.  Owing  to 
some  error  in   measurement,  or  change  of 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


position  after  exposure  of  the  trial  plate,  the 
whole  series  had  been  made  without  the 
original  having  been  at  a  true  right  angle 
with  the  axis  of  the  lens,  hence  the  distor- 
tion. What  could  be  done  to  remedy  the 
defect?  Making  a  new  set  of  negatives  was 
out  of  the  question,  as  the  original  was  then 
far  on  its  way  across  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 
The  order  was  an  important  one,  large  sums 
of  money  were  expected  by  the  company, 
and  some  by  myself,  if  the  work  could  be 
successfully  completed.  After  some  days 
experimenting,  I  constructed  a  mounting- 
table,  large  enough  for  the  whole  copy  when 
mounted,  around  which  was  fitted  a  stretcher 
frame,  which  could  be  easily  removed  at 
will ;  upon  this  frame  I  tightly  stretched  thin 
muslin,  known  in  the  trade  as  ':  strainer 
muslin."  The  narrow  side  of  each  sheet 
was  spread  with  thin  starch  paste,  the  proper 
consistency  having  been  determined  by  ex- 
periment, gradually  working  it  over  the 
entire  sheet,  which  was  then  quickly  laid  on 
the  stretched  muslin,  and  the  narrow  end 
expanded  by  a  gentle  pulling  pressure  of  the 
hands,  until  certain  lines  on  the  print  should 
coincide  with  others  previously  drawn  par- 
allel by  the  use  of  a  long  straight  edge,  the 
entire  length  of  ten  feet.  The  stretcher  was 
then  removed  from  the  table  and  allowed 
to  hang  by  one  edge,  sustained  along  the 
central  portions  by  slats  or  braces  to  prevent 
the  sides  from  springing  inward,  by  con- 
traction of  the  drying  prints.  When  thor- 
oughly dry,  the  entire  map  was  stripped 
from  the  thin  muslin,  a  process  rendered 
easy  by  the  porous  nature  of  the  material, 
and  the  thin  starch  used  in  mounting. 

The  prints  were  then  remounted  with 
strong  "  bookbinder's"  paste  on  firm  heavy 
muslin,  upon  which  parallel  lines  had  been 
ruled  as  in  the  former  case,  to  serve  as  a 
guide  for  any  further  expansion,  which  was 
usually  found  necessary  in  places,  in  order 
that  all  the  lines  might  meet  properly. 

In  this  way  the  error  in  making  the  nega- 
tives was  by  a  large  amount  of  work  cor- 
rected, and  the  photographic  copies  of  the 
great  map  delivered  with  satisfaction  to  all 
except  the  maker,  whose  profit  on  the  esti- 
mated price  had,  by  the  extra  work  required, 
been  reduced  until  it  had  changed  to  the 
wrong  side  of  the  balance  sheet — a  common 
occurrence  with  a  photographer! 


Means  of  Excluding  Chemical  Rays. 

BY   JOHN   M.    BLAKE. 

I  hate  once  before  called  attention  to  the 
value  of  bichromate  of  potash  solution  for 
this  purpose.  By  its  use  we  can  obtain  an  ex- 
cellent illumination,  and  at  the  same  time  it 
is  very  effective  in  stopping  out  chemical 
rays.  Four  years'  experience  in  its  use  has 
confirmed  my  first  impression  as  to  its 
utility;  but  I  can  now  give  some  further 
hints  that  may  be  useful. 

My  attention  was  first  drawn  to  the  prop- 
erties of  this  solution  by  mention  made  of 
it  by  Mr.  B.  Ford  (see  Photographic  News, 
1869,  p.  451).  He  employed  the  solution 
inclosed  between  two  plates  of  glass,  and  was 
thus  enabled  to  watch  development  through 
it  when  out  of  doors. 

Soon  after  I  had  given  the  results  of  some 
experiments,  made  to  determine  the  com- 
parative value  of  this  means  of  illumination, 
the  matter  was  reduced  to  practice,  and 
very  little  modification  has  since  been  found 
necessary  in  the  original  arrangement.  In 
the  first  place,  it  is  well,  as  involving  less 
trouble  and  expense,  to  depend  upon  yellow 
paper,  as  heretofore,  for  the  general  light- 
ing of  the  room,  that  is  when  a  window  of 
sufficient  size  is  available  ;  but  to  have  some 
means  of  darkening  this  readily,  when  dan- 
ger of  fogging  is  apprehended.  Then  im- 
mediately opposite,  and  as  near  as  possible 
to  the  place  it  is  most  convenient  to  hold 
the  plate  while  developing,  have  one  or  two 
common  cylindrical  quart  bottles  filled  with 
half-saturated  solution  ;  each  should  stand 
upon  a  small  circular  shelf  with  raised  edge, 
placed  at  the  bottom  of  an  opening  in  a  thin 
board  partition.  White  light  should  be 
completely  excluded  by  tacking  elastic  wool- 
len cloth,  so  as  to  press  the  edge  on  against 
each  bottle,  and  also  by  blacking  the  bot- 
toms if  found  necessary.  The  necks  of  the 
bottles  should  come  just  inside  of  the  parti- 
tion, the  shelf  being  inclined  for  this  pur- 
pose ;  thus  arranged  they  can  be  taken  out 
on  cold  nights,  to  avoid  freezing.  Glycerin 
or  alcohol  is  not  admissible  as  a  prevent- 
ive ;  it  would  reduce  the  chromic  acid. 
Only  solution  made  from  clean  crystals 
should  be  used.  This  apparatus  will  throw 
a  bright  light  upon  an  object  brought  near 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHER. 


9 


to  it,  and  its  chief  value  will  be  for  the  criti- 
cal examination  of  negatives,  during  and 
after  development.  Few  will  undertake  to 
light  the  whole  room  by  this  means,  al- 
though it  is  easy  to  imagine  what  a  non- 
actinic  paradise  is  thus  brought  within  the 
range  of  possibility. 

In  order  to  make  the  most  of  the  small 
aperture  that  we  do  use,  it  is  necessary  that 
the  light  from  the  sky  or  snow-covered 
ground,  &c,  should  not  be  obstructed  from 
reaching  the  bottles.  It  will  then  pass 
through  from  all  directions,  as  through  a 
globe  lens,  though  from  an  even  larger  field. 
The  globular  form  of  containing  vessel  will 
thus  be  found  superior  to  the  fiat ;  but  a 
cylindrical  vessel  is  cheaper,  and  more 
easily  replaced,  while  practice  shows  it  to 
be  little  inferior  to  the  globular  form.  Two 
one-quart  bottles  of  bright  glass  were  found 
equal  to  an  eighty-ounce  thin  globular  flask 
eight  inches  in  diameter. 

The  bottles  can  be  placed  close  to  an 
argand  lamp,  when  preparing  plates  in  the 
evening,  and  thus  a  powerful  light  thrown 
to  a  long  distance,  making  drying  racks 
and  bath  visible  with  an  entirely  safe  light, 
while  by  a  near  approach  a  splendid  light 
can  be  got  for  development. 

It  is  well,  once  in  a  month  or  two,  to  filter 
the  solution,  and  wipe  the  inside  of  the 
bottles  to  remove  any  deposit  that  may  ob- 
struct the  light. 

Two  four-ounce  vials  filled  with  nearly 
saturated  solution  gave  a  splendid  illumina- 
tion inside  a  tent  of  the  Kouch  form  ;  one 
was  placed  in  the  top  and  received  the  sky- 
light. "When  the  sun  was  shining  on  one 
of  the  vials,  but  screened  by  tissue-paper,  a 
light  was  obtained  that  a  photographer  from 
habit  would  instinctively  shrink  from,  but 
plates  were  prepared,  drained,  and  de- 
veloped, quite  free  from  fog.  The  advan- 
tages of  having  such  a  light  to  develop  by 
will  strike  any  one  on  trial.  It  often  hap- 
pens in  many  mechanical  operations  that 
a  workman  will  accomplish  much  more 
work,  and  do  it  better,  if  pains  be  taken 
that  he  has  a  proper  light  by  which  to  work. 
Employers  often  overlook  their  own  in- 
terests, by  not  recognizing  this  simple  fact. 
"Why  should  this  be  any  the  less  true  in  the 
case  of  development,  an  operation  requiring 


great  experience,  care,  and  attentive  watch- 
ing? In  a  proper  light,  the  point  where 
the  last  portions  of  clear  glass  are  leaving 
the  shadows  is  where  the  first  symptoms  of 
fog  can  be  readily  detected.  Who  cannot 
recall  experience  in  working  in  some  black 
hole,  where  the  operations  have  been  pretty 
much  reduced  to  the  game  of  hit  or  miss ; 
and  you  could  only  know  what  you  had 
bagged,  or  what  blunders  you  had  failed 
to  commit,  on  emerging  into  daylight. 
This  is  an  extreme  case ;  good  work  can  be 
done  if  care  is  taken  to  profit  by  ordinary 
means  of  illumination.  The  use  of  the  light 
through  bichromate  of  potash  solution,  it  is 
claimed,  will  enable  us  to  make  still  an- 
other step  in  advance. 

And  now  in  regard  to  the  reason  of  the 
superiority  of  this  solution ;  the  spectroscope 
shows  at  once.  If  we  start  with  a  very 
dilute  solution,  we  will  see  that  the  trans- 
mitted light  shows  the  spectrum  in  the  red 
and  yellow  with  undiminished  brilliancy; 
while  the  green  and  part  way  into  the  blue 
are  visible  to  a  certain  extent.  As  we  in- 
crease the  strength  of  the  solution,  the  blue 
is  soon  cut  off  entirely,  and  with  a  strong 
solution,  the  portion  of  the  spectrum  that 
contains  the  active  chemical  rays  is  sud- 
denly cut  off  from  the  middle  of  the  green, 
while  the  red  and  yellow  rays  are  trans- 
mitted with  little  loss  of  brilliancy.  That 
portion  of  the  green  remaining  adds  to  the 
illumination,  while  its  chemical  activity  is 
almost  nothing. 

If  we  compare  yellow  pot-metal  glass, 
just  such  as  is  commonly  sold  for  this  pur- 
pose, we  find  the  light  greatly  diminished 
in  the  red  and  yellow,  and  while  the  trans- 
mitted light  is  thus  robbed  of  its  most  valu- 
able part  for  visual  purposes,  the  spectrum 
can  be  traced  far  into  the  blue.  A  speci- 
men of  flashed  yellow  glass  was  found  not 
to  be  superior  to  the  other  variety. 

There  is  an  orange  chrome  paper,  such  as 
used  for  envelopes,  also  coming  to  the  notice 
of  many  in  the  wrappers  for  mailing  the 
British  Journal  of  Photography;  it  is  per- 
haps less  generally  met  with  in  the  United 
States.  It  may  be  known  by  its  tinder-like 
properties,  the  least  spark  spreading  rapidly 
on  its  surface.  "When  this  is  oiled  it  gives 
a  splendid  orange  light,  though  the  spec- 


10 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGE  APHEE. 


troscope  reveals  blue  light,  and  shows  the 
red  and  yellow  with  greatly  diminished 
brilliancy.  Then  there  is  the  common  yel- 
low envelope  paper,  which  fades  on  the  side 
exposed  to  light;  this  is  inferior  to  the 
orange  chronle  paper  described  above. 
Asphalt  varnish  is  utterly  wretched,  greatly 
diminishing  the  light,  and  transmitting 
much  blue. 

I  have  not  had  an  opportunity  of  com- 
paring the  non-actinic  muslin  and  silk,  ad- 
vertised in  European  journals  ;  nor  a  veri- 
table sample  of  silver-stained  glass.  Our 
stockdealers  appear  to  have  made  no  effort 
to  introduce  either.  Certain  varieties  of 
flashed  red  glass  make  perhaps  the  most 
effective  screen  known  ;  but  there  is  the 
drawback,  that  little  light  is  transmitted, 
it  being  only  a  part  of  the  red.  Full  sun- 
light may  be  allowed  to  fall,  through  a 
suitably  chosen  sample,  upon  a  sensitive 
plate  for  several  seconds  without  producing 
fog.  Yet  by  the  aid  of  the  spectroscope  and 
direct  sunlight,  blue  or  violet  transmitted 
light  can  be  detected  with  little  difficulty, 
provided  we  superpose  a  piece  of  green  glass 
to  cut  off  the  glare  of  red  light.  A  blue  sun 
can  be  seen  by  simply  looking  through  the 
red  and  green  glass  mentioned,  with  the 
addition  of  a  piece  of  blue  glass. 

The  utmost  amount  of  light  that  can  be 
transmitted  by  any  possible  medium  can  of 
course  only  approach  the  amount  that  falls 
upon  it.  If  one  medium  transmits  three 
times  as  much  light  as  another,  and  has  at 
the  same  time  the  advantage  that  a  sensi- 
tive plate  can  be  exposed  to  its  full  inten- 
sity thirty  times  as  long  without  producing 
fog,  it  is  reasonable  to  conclude  that  the 
former  is  ninety  times  more  efficient.  If 
we  reason  in  this  way  we  may  take  the 
above  figures  as  expressing  the  relation  of 
bichromate  solution  to  yellow  glass.  If  we 
choose,  we  can  continue  to  dilute  the  solution 
until  the  same  number  of  seconds'  exposure 
to  its  full  intensity  will  fog  a  plate,  as  when 
it  is  closely  approached  to  the  yellow  glass 
window.  Now  our  solution  will  not  admit 
very  much  more  light  than  it  did  before, 
since  when  strong  it  transmitted  the  greater 
part;  still  there  is  a  marked  increase  in  the 
light,  and  it  looks  so  white,  that  one  at  first 
can  hardly  credit  that  a  plate  will  stand  as 


good  a  chance  of  developing  up  clear,  as 
before  the  comparatively  dark  yellow  glass 
window.  A  landscape  was  taken  in  ten 
minutes  through  a  yellow  glass,  by  means 
of  a  portrait  lens. 

A  word  in  regard  to  the  poisonous  prop- 
erties of  bichromate  of  potash.  A  case  is 
reported  (see  Taylor  on  Poisons)  of  death  in 
five  hours  from  accidentally  receiving  a 
small  quantity  of  solution  into  the  mouth, 
when  using  a  siphon. 


BIBLIOGRAPHIC. 

Elements  of  Physical  Manipulation. 
By  Edward  C.  Pickering,  Thayer  Profes- 
sor of  Physics  in  the  Massachusetts  Insti- 
tute of  Technology.  One  vol.,  octavo. 
Illustrated.  Price  in  cloth,  $3.  New 
York:  Hurd  &  Houghton,  publishers. 

This  is  a  work  which  the  thoughtful  and 
intelligent  portion  of  our  readers  (and  we 
hope  they  are  all  either  such,  or  becoming 
such)  will  find  well  worthy  of  their  careful 
study.  "We  have  often  suggested  that 
better  acquaintance  with  natural  philosophy 
would  make  better  photographers  than  we 
have  now,  but  the  difficulty  in  the  way  of 
acquiring  that  knowledge  has  been  the  want 
of  proper  books  of  instruction.  The  ma- 
jority of  the  manuals  on  the  subject  have 
been  prepared  with  the  intention  of  being 
studied  with  a  course  of  lectures.  Professor 
Pickering  with  great  good  foresight  has 
stepped  aside  from  this  rule,  and  supposing 
the  reader  to  be  provided  with  the  instru- 
ments, lucidly  explains  their  use,  what  pre- 
cautions to  take,  and  what  errors  to  avoid. 
This  he  does  with  a  care  which  evinces  the 
practical,  thoughtful  man  throughout. 
Those  who  have  the  leisure  to  devote  to 
physical  research  will  find  this  work  a  most 
useful  companion.  We  wish  that  many  of 
our  readers  would  take  it  up  and  among  the 
special  topics  treated  here  which  would  be 
useful  to  them,  we  might  mention  the  Me- 
chanics of  Solids,  the  Mechanics  of  Liquids 
and  Gases,  and  particularly  Light.  In  this 
last  class  we  have  sections  devoted  to  Pho- 
tometry, Laws  of  Keflection  and  Refraction, 
Laws  of  Lenses,  Eoci  and  Aperture  of  Ob- 
jectives, Interference  of  Light,  Diffraction, 
and  so  on.  Professor  Pickering  has  not 
forgotten  either  to  devote  a  portion  of  his 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


11 


book  to  Photography,  the  instructions  being 
essentially  those  given  to  the  students  of  the 
Institute  by  Mr.  "Whipple.  Throughout  it 
is  a  most  practical,  sensible,  desirable  work. 
It  is  beautifully  printed  on  excellent  paper. 
We  have  the  permission  of  author  and  pub- 
lisher to  make  extracts  from  its  pages,  and 
they  have  kindly  supplied  us  with  electro- 
types for  the  purpose.  We  shall  avail  our- 
selves of  their  kindness,  beginning  now 
with  the  chapter  on  the 

Daylight  Photometer. 
'■'■Apparatus.  —  A  B  is  a  box  about  six 
feet  long,  a  foot  wide,  and  a  foot  and  a 
half  high.  It  may  be  made  of  a  light 
wooden  frame  covered  with  black  paper  or 
cloth.  A  circular  hole  about  four  inches  in 
diameter  is  cut  in  the  end  B,  and  covered. 
with  blue  glazed  paper  with  the  white  side 
out,  and  made  into  a  Bunsen  disk  by  a  drop 
of  melted  candle-wax  in  the  centre.  A 
long  wooden  rod  rests  on  the  bottom  of  the 
box,  and  has  a  standard  wax  candle,  A,  in 
a  spring  candlestick,  attached  to  one  end. 
The  distance  of  the  candle  from  the  disk 
may  thus  be  varied  at  will,  and  measured 
by  a  scale  attached  to  the  rod.  The  box 
should  be  ventilated  by  suitable  holes  cut 
in  it,  or  the  air  will  become  so  impure  that 
the  candle  will  not  burn  properly. 


"  Experiment  — This  instrument  is  inten- 
ded to  compare  the  amount  of  light  in  dif- 
ferent portions  of  a  room,  or  its  brightness 
at  different  times.  When  the  candle  is 
placed  at  a  distance  from  the  photometer 
disk,  the  latter  will  appear  dark  in  the 
centre,  while  by  making  A  B  very  small,  so 
that  the  strongest  light  shall  be  inside,  the 
centre  will  be  bright.  The  color  of  the 
candle  flame  being  of  a  reddish  tint  com- 
pared with  daylight,  is  first  passed  through 
the  blue  paper,  which  thus  renders  the 
colors  more  nearly  alike.  When  the  dis- 
tance of  the  candle  is  such  that  the  illumi- 
nation is  equal  on  both  sides  of  the  disk, 
the  spot  will  n'early  disappear.,  and  unity 


divided  by  the  square  of  this  distance  gives 
a  measure  of  the  comparative  brightness 
under  various  circumstances. 

"An  excellent  experiment  with  this  in- 
strument is  to  measure  the  fading  of  the 
light  at  twilight.  Light  the  candle  and 
place  it  at  such  a  distance  from  the  disk 
that  the  spot  shall  disappear,  as  in  the  last 
experiment.  As  the  light  diminishes,  the 
distance  A  B  must  be  increased.  Take  read- 
ings at  intervals  of  one  minute,  and  con- 
struct a  curve  with  ordinates  equal  to  one 
divided  by  the  square  of  this  distance,  and 
abscissas  equal  to  the  time.  The  amount 
of  light  for  different  distances  of  the  sun 
below  the  horizon  may  be  obtained  directly 
from  this  curve.  In  the  same  way  the 
brightness  of  different  parts  of  the  labora- 
tory may  be  measured,  the  effect  of  draw- 
ing the  window  curtains,  and  the  compara- 
tive brightness  of  clear  and  cloudy  days. 
This  apparatus  was  used  during  the  total 
eclipse  of  1870,  to  measure  the  amount  of 
light  during  totality,  possessing  the  advan- 
tage that  on  returning,  the  precise  degree 
of  darkness  could  be  reproduced  artificially. 
Comparisons  may  also  be  made  with  moon- 
light, the  light  of  the  aurora  or  other  simi- 
lar sources  of  light." 


A  QUESTION  ON  INSURANCE. 

I  wish  to  ask  some  of  our  good  financiers 
to  solve  a  question  for  my  benefit,  and  the 
benefit  also  of  our  whole  craft:  How  long 
are  we  (photographers)  to  be  imposed  upon 
by  insurance  companies?  Why  should  I 
or  any  other  photographer  be  rated  by  in- 
surance companies  the  same  as  druggists? 
Why  should  every  occupant  of  the  same 
block  in  which  my  gallery  is  situated  pay 
one-fourth  per  cent,  more  because  there  is 
a  photograph  gallery  in  the  block  ?  Where, 
when,  and  how  did  insurance  companies  get 
the  idea  that  a  photograph  gallery  was  such 
a  dangerous  institution  to  insure  ?  Has  one 
fire  in  five  thousand  originated  in  a  photo- 
graph gallery  ? 

Now,  I  have  asked  the  above  questions 
that  I  may  ascertain  some  facts  as  to  how 
other  photographers  are  situated,  and  how 
it  is  that  they  keep  such  a  quantity  of  explo- 
sives and  combustibles  as  to  scare  all  the  in- 


12 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


surance  companies  out  of  their  .wits  (if  they 
ever  had  any)  ?  I  can  answer  some  of  the 
above  questions,  so  far  as  my  gallery  is  con- 
cerned, but  my  answers  may  not  apply  to 
others.  The  explosives  and  extraordinary 
combustibles  in  my  gallery  consist  generally 
and  ordinarily  of  from  one  to  two  gallons 
of  alcohol,  which  I  keep  in  a  tin  can ;  from 
one  to  three  pounds  of  sulphate  of  ether,  and 
perhaps  two  or  three  pounds  of  mixed  col- 
lodion ;  and  all  this  kept  in  my  dark-room, 
where  a  lamp  is  seldom  if  ever  introduced. 

Now  why  should  we  pay  the  same  rates 
of  insurance  that  a  druggist  does,  whose 
shelves  and  drawers  are  lined  with  every 
kind  of  explosives  and  extra  hazardous 
combustibles  known  in  the  dispensatory, 
and  his  cellar  is  a  magazine  of  explosives? 
Perhaps  I  am  the  only  photographer  thus 
imposed  upon.  I  am  quite  anxious  to  find  it 
out. 

I  was  most  effectually  burned  out  last 
March,  but  the  fire  originated  at  least  one 
hundred  and  twenty  feet  from  my  gallery, 
in  a  dry  goods  store.  I  saved  as  much  from 
my  gallery,  in  proportion  to  contents,  as 
was  saved  from  other  portions  of  the  block, 
which,  however,  was  very  little. 

It  is  very  true  that  we  have  some  articles 
in  our  galleries  that  we  expect  to  pay  special 
rates  on,  if  we  get  them  insured.  If  I  get 
my  negatives  insured,  I  expect  to  pay  special 
rates,  but  I  cannot  see  the  fairness  in  charg- 
ing extra  rates  on  my  room  furniture,  in- 
struments, &c.  J.  C.  Potter. 

"We  would  add  that  we  have  a  communi- 
cation on  this  subject  also  from  Mrs.  E.  N. 
Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis  ,  who  has  been  one 
of  the  champions  before  the  National  Pho- 
tographic Association  in  this  direction. 
The  Executive  Committee  are  in  corre- 
spondence with  her,  and  will  probably  com- 
municate with  our  readers  concerning  it 
presently. — Ed.  P.  P. 


RETOUCHING  AT  NIGHT. 

BY    FE.    WENDLING. 

Doubtless  many  photographers  have 
tried  to  use  artificial  light  for  retouching 
the  negative,  but  it  seems  without  result. 
I  never  read  or  heard  of  success.  I  have 
made  also  different  efforts  in  that  way  ;  but 


in  the  last  winter  before  Christmas-time 
my  work  pressed  me  to  make  another  experi- 
ment. I  tried  a  petroleum-lamp,  with 
round  burner,  and  fastened  to  it — in  order 
to  secure  a  stronger  light  and  parallel 
beams — the  parabolic  mirror  of  my  magne- 
sium lamp.  I  gained  an  intense  light,  to 
be  sure ;  but  on  retouching  I  felt  my  eyes 
very  much  affected. 

Now,  I  remembered  that  once  a  watch- 
maker told  me  he  was  able  to  work  easily 
in  the  evening,  since  he  employed  the  light- 
blue  glass  (called  optical  glass),  and  I  fol- 
lowed him  in  using  that  material.  The  effect 
was  excellent,  and  since,  I  have  retouched 
a  great  number  of  negatives  at  night. 

As  the  parabolic  (or  spherical)  mirror 
concentrates  also  the  heat-beams,  it  would 
perhaps  be  an  improvement  to  use  instead 
of  the  blue  glass  a  "  curvette,"  containing  a 
solution  of  sulphate  of  copper  with  am- 
monia or  Prussian  blue  dissolved  in  oxalic 
acid. 

This  is  a  welcome  requisite,  although  it 
may  be  considered  both  rough  and  very 
simple — a  very  egg  of  Columbus. 

Vienna,  Nov.  1,  1873. 

CONVENIENT  COPYING  TABLE. 

BY   B.    P.    HALL. 

Fig.  1  is  a  photograph  of  my  copying 
table  as  I  use  it  for  enlarging  small  pic- 
tures, and  it  is  made  as  follows  :  A,  an 
ordinarj'  table,  having  legs  three  feet  long, 
with  a  solid  top  hinged  at  one  end.  Under- 
neath this  top  is  a  sliding-board  B,  full 
length  of  top,  and  six  inches  wide,  held  by 
dovetailed  pieces  screwed  to  the  top. 

Near  each  end  of  this  sliding-board  are 
two  half-inch  holes,  into  which  fit  corre- 
sponding pins  attached  to  a  shorter  board 
C,  which  stands  at  right  angles  to  B. 
Upon  this  shorter  or  upright  piece  is  placed 
the  small  blackboard,  on  which  are  fastened 
the  pictures  cresired  to  be  copied.  This  is 
also  made  adjustable  by  dovetailing  on  C. 

Now  every  photographer  knows  how  de- 
sirable it  is  to  get  rid  of  the  granulated 
appearance  of  copies  from  paper  pictures, 
which  is  caused  by  lights  and  shadows  on 
the  uneven  texture  of  the  paper. 

I  effect  this,  to  a  considerable  degree,  by 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGE  APHEE. 


13 


tilting  my  camera  as  shown  in  Fig.  1,  so 
that  the  light  falls  as  near  at  right  angles 
as  possible. 


This  tilting  is  done  by  a  device  plainly 
shown  in  the  illustration,  viz.,  by  a  couple 
of  pieces  hinged  to  the  underside  of  the 
table  cover,  and  resting  on  notched  pieces 
fastened  to  the  inside  of  the  rails  of  the 
table. 

It  will  readily  be  seen  that  it  matters  not 
at  what  angle  your  camera  may  be,  the 
picture  to  be  copied  will  be  parallel  to  it. 
As  I  frequently  tilt  my  camera  pretty  well, 
I  have  a  narrow  cleat  fastened  to  the  end  of 
the  table  to  prevent  it  sliding  off,  and  it  also 
serves  as  a  guide  to  keep  it  and  the  picture 
at  right  angles  to  each  other  laterally. 


Fig.  2  represents  the  same  table  as  I  use 
it  for  making  magic-lantern  slides,  porce- 
lain pictures,  and  reproducing  negatives. 

The  camera  is  of  course  reversed  on  the 
table  this  time,  looking  upward  and  toward 
the  light.  A  is  a  box,  which  replaces  the 
sliding  blackboard  used  in  copying,  with  its 
open  side  toward  the  lens.  The  negative  is 
placed  at  B,  and  a  vignetting  diaphragm 
at  C.     The  open  side  of  the  box  being  to- 


ward the  lens  sufficiently,  shades  the  near 
side  of  the  negative,  and  necessitates  all  the 
light  coming  from  that  direction  being 
transmitted. 

I  forgot  to  say  that  the  upright  piece  upon 
which  the  box  A  slides  has  a  large  oval 
hole  cut  out  of  it  for  this  purpose. 


PRINTING  AND  TONING 
ALBUMEN  PAPER. 

BY    E.    M.    CRESSET. 

One  of  the  chief  difficulties  met  with  in 
photography,  at  the  present  day,  is  the  want 
of  less  complicated  formulas  and  more  care 
and  skill.  By  adopting  the  following  plan 
you  will  be  enabled  to  produce  as  fine  re- 
sults as  one  could  wish,  with  the  least  diffi- 
culty. 

Procure  any  good  sample  of  paper,  and 
prepare  a  silver  solution  as  follows :  Dis- 
solve in  ice-water  sixty  grains  of  silver  to 
each  ounce  of  water  used.  To  every  thirty- 
two  ounces  of  solution  add  twenty  drops  of 
a  saturated  solution  of  alum  in  water,  and 
add  these  to  four  drachms  of  a  saturated 
solution  of  sal  soda  in  water ;  shake  well 
and  filter,  and  float  your  paper  from  one 
minute  to  three  (and  if  for  immediate  use 
dry  by  artificial  heat,  and  fume  over  strong 
ammonia  ten  to  thirty  minutes).  "When 
surface-dry  place  it  between  blotting-paper 
previously  prepared,  by  drawing  through  a 
twenty-five  grain  solution  of  sal  soda  in 
water.  "When  dry  make  into  book-form,  and 
place  the  silvered  paper  between  the  leaves. 
Paper  thus  prepared  will  remain  good  for 
months,  and  when  about  to  use  fume  ten  to 
thirty  minutes.  Print  but  a  very  little 
darker  than  you  wish  the  finished  print. 
Trim,  wash  in  three  changes  of  soft  water, 
and  tone  in  the  following:  Soft  water, 
thirty-two  ounces  ;  fine  table  salt,  one  table- 
spoonful.  In  a  graduate  put  one  to  two 
drachms  of  acid  gold  solution  and  a  small 
piece  of  blue  litmus-paper.  Now  add  satu- 
rated solution  of  sal  soda  in  water,  drop  by 
drop,  till  the  litmus-paper  remains  blue, 
and  add  to  the  above  toning  solution.  Now 
place  a  few  prints  in,  face  down  ;  at  first  they 
will  turn  a  bright  cherry  color,  and  soon  to 
a  brown  sepia  or  steel  tint.     Fix  in  hypo, 


14 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


strength  one  to  ten  of  water,  with  a  little 
salt.  Turn  the  prints  continually  till 
thoroughly  fixed,  with  the  face  down. 
Take  directly  from  the  hypo  and  place  in  a 
strong  solution  of  salt  and  water,  ten  or 
fifteen  minutes,  and  add  fresh  water,  and 
handle  the  prints  in  several  changes  of  water 
one-half  to  three-quarters  of  an  hour;  then 
pile  the  prints  one  over  the  other  on  a  piece 
of  glass,  and  press  out  the  excess  of  water, 
and  immediately  mount. 

By  following  the  above  plan  you  will  not 
be  troubled  with  any  blistered  prints,  and 
they  will  retain  all  their  original  lustre. 

Acid  Gold  Solution. — Take  four  parts  mu- 
riatic acid  and  two  parts  nitric  acid,  take 
gold  coin  and  roll  thin  or  cut  in  small 
pieces.  Place  in  a  small  glass  flask  or  an 
evaporating-dish  over  a  sand-bath,  and 
apply  gentle  heat.  After  adding  a  suffi- 
cient quantity  of  the  prepared  acid  to  cut 
the  gold,  then  cool  oft",  and  add  water  (if  you 
used  a  two  and  a  half  dollar  piece)  twenty 
ounces.     Filter  and  bottle  for  use. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  ADVERTISING. 

Will  the  craft  in  general  favor  an  in- 
quirer, by  giving  their  experience,  as  to  the 
best  way  of  advertising  ?  In  cities,  the 
daily  papers  and  the  usual  mediums  of  ir- 
regular advertising,  such  as  promiscuous 
distribution  of  cards  and  the  time-honored 
circulation  of  posters  on  "  rock  and  fence, 
on  curb  and  post,"  like  "  S.  T.— 1860— X," 
or  a  ten-cent  monkey  show.  These  and  the 
huge  bunch  of  cheap  circulars,  pendant  by 
cotton  cord  and  a  fresh  tack-nail  every  day, 
at  the  show-case  at  doors,  are  made  to  tell 
where  is  the  "cheapest  gallery  in  town," 
"  $2  per  dozen,"  "one  of  the  largest  galleries 
in  the  State,"  &c,  to  the  end  of  the  chapter. 
I  ran  up  two  pairs  of  stairs,  a  few  days 
since,  purposely  to  see  how  large  such  a  gal- 
lery was  ;  and  one  man  was  there  at  work. 
It  may  be  just  barely  possible,  such  thin 
advertising  will  keep  things  jogging  along. 
But  I  know  galleries  that  advertise  thusly, 
and,  as  above,  one  man  does  all  the  work 
easily,  and  a  gallery  that  could  be  mentioned, 
advertising  only  through  the  press  and  by 
its  work,  keeps  eight  employed,  from  early 


till  late.  Can  we  employ,  next  to  carefully 
finished  work,  any  better  medium  than  the 
public  press?  and  are  we  not  as  a  class  too 
fond  of  using  the  superlative  in  extolling 
the  merits  of  our  photographic  productions  ? 

Our  well-known  friend,  P.  T.  Barnum,  is 
more  than  lavish  of  that  most  excellent 
work  known  as  "  Webster's  Unabridged," 
but  a  medium  must  exist  between  a  "side- 
show" and  an  "art  atelier."  The  public 
are  quick  to  discern  it,  and  every  move  an 
"artist  man"  makes  is  closely  criticized, 
and  his  future  in  a  measure  rests  on  the 
verdict. 

So,  once  more  would  I  ask,  those  especially 
who  are  enrolled  as  our  "  veteran  corps," 
"  Which  is  the  better  way  of  photographic 
advertising?"  by  "public  press,"  "circu- 
lar," "  fence,  post,  curb,  and  sidewalk  post- 
er," or  "carefully  finished  work"  and  "  dis- 
cretionary conduct  toward  our  patrons?" 
J.  Pitcher  Spooner. 


NOTES   IN  AND  OUT  OF  THE 
STUDIO. 

BY  G.  WHARTON   SIMPSON,    M.A.,  F.S.A. 

Modes  of  Enlargement — Prizes  for  Large 
Photographs. 
Modes  of  Enlargement. — One  of  the  most 
definite  lessons  which  photographers  have 
learned  at  the  late  exhibition  of  the  Photo- 
graphic Society  relates  to  the  subject  of 
enlargements,  and  it  leaves  little  doubt  that 
the  most  perfect  results  are  obtained  by  the 
plan  of  producing  an  enlarged  negative, 
rather  than  by  the  modes  of  producing  an 
enlarged  print  from  a  small  negative  by 
means  of  the  solar  camera  or  similar  in- 
strument. At  the  exhibition  we  have  had 
examples  of  almost  every  method  of  en- 
largement. The  Autotype  Company  who 
exhibited  enlarged  prints  four  or  five  feet 
long,  both  of  portraits  and  landscapes,  re- 
ceived the  medal  for  the  best  enlargement. 
It  is  their  plan  to  produce  a  transparency 
in  carbon,  by  contact  printing,  from  the 
original  negative;  and  from  this  trans- 
parency an  enlarged  negative.  The  abso- 
lute sharpness  and  perfection  of  texture  of 
the  carbon  transparency,  which  is  of  course 
free  from   the  granulation   which    always 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTO&EAPHER. 


15 


must  in  greater  or  less  degree  characterize 
an  image  developed  by  the  deposition  of 
nitrate  of  silver,  are  understood  to  con- 
tribute very  materially  to  the  excellence  of 
these  enlargements.  Next  in  excellence  to 
these,  and  probably  in  some  points  quite 
equal  or  superior,  are  those  produced  by 
Mr.  B.  J.  Edwards,  whose  mode  of  en- 
larging consists,  it  is  understood,  in  pro- 
ducing an  albumen  negative,  and  from  that 
an  enlarged  negative.  Next  in  delicacy, 
but  far  inferior  in  vigor,  come  enlarge- 
ments on  collodion  transferred  to  paper. 
Far  surpassing  these  in  vigor,  but  lacking 
something  in  delicacy,  were  some  very  fine 
solar  camera  enlargements  on  albumenized 
paper,  printed  out  in  the  solar  camera,  I 
presume,  by  Mr.  Starke,  of  Zanesville 
(XL  S;).  These  were  very  excellent  of  their 
kind  ;  but  less  delicate,  soft  and  pleasing 
than  those  from  enlarged  negatives.  Fi- 
nally there  were  some  developed  solar- 
camera  prints  good  enough  of  their  kind, 
but  their  coarseness  served  simply  as  an 
admirable  foil  to  the  finish  and  beauty  of 
the  fine  prints  from  enlarged  negatives 
hung  near  to  them. 

Successful  enlargement  is  under  any  cir- 
cumstances an  operation  demanding  much 
skill,  and  the  advantage  of  the  enlarged 
negative  method  is,  that  it  permits  the 
fullest  opportunity  for  the  exercise  of  skill 
and  judgment  in  various  ways  and  at 
various  stages,  by  which  the  original  nega- 
tive if  good  can  be  equalled,  if  imperfect, 
in  some  respects  improved  upon.  Consid- 
erable modification  of  a  photographic  kind 
may  be  effected  in  the  intermediate  trans- 
parency, which  may  be  made  softer  or  more 
vigorous  than  the  original  negative,  but  it 
is  in  the  facility  for  retouching  the  greatest 
power  is  gained.  Retouching  on  the  neg- 
ative can  only  strengthen  or  put  in  lights ; 
it  cannot  deepen  the  shadows.  But  judi- 
cious retouching  having  been  effected  on 
the  lights  of  the  negative,  the  transparency 
next  presents  facilities  for  a  new  essay  in 
retouching,  giving  depth  and  force  to 
shadows,  adding  masses  of  shadow  to  the 
background,  &c.  Then  finally  the  en- 
larged negative  affords  a  further  oppor- 
tunity of  retouching.  Very  little,  indeed, 
need  be  done  at  any  stage,  but  the  various 


stages  being  available,  improvement  in 
each  becomes  possible,  and  an  effect  of  high 
finish  is  thus  secured  with  comparatively 
little  elaboration. 

One  series  of  very  fine  enlargements  ex- 
hibited by  Mr.  Croughton,  which  were 
produced  from  enlarged  negatives,  were 
produced  upon  a  slightly  different  plan. 
They  appeared  to  be  very  highly  finished 
pictures,  and  yet,  in  truth,  there  was 
scarcely  any  work  upon  them  at  any  stage 
of  the  process  by  which  they  were  pro- 
duced. Mr.  Croughton  furnishes  me  with 
details  of  his  operations  as  follows:  "The 
transparent  positive  is  enlarged  from  the 
card  negative  up  to  10  x  8  in  the  usual  way 
upon  a  wet  plate,  with  the  ordinary  ma- 
terials for  the  wet  process.  After  it  is  dry 
it  is  coated  with  a  matt  varnish.  I  then 
place  it  in  the  retouching  frame,  and  with 
a  tuft  of  cotton-wool  in  the  end  of  a  craj'on 
holder,  I  rub  evenly  all  over  the  face  a 
mixture  of  the  finest  black  lead  in  powder, 
mixed  with  putty  powder  (oxide  of  tin). 
The  matt  varnish  presenting  a  surface 
something  like  a  finely  grained  lithographic 
stone,  it  will  readily  be  seen  that  the  black 
lead  gives  a  stippled  effect  all  over,  but  so 
fine  that  it  looks  somewhat  like  an  even 
flat  tint  all  over  the  face.  This  flat  tint 
having  been  thus  simply  produced  all  over 
both  lights  and  shades,  I  now  go  over  the 
lights  with  a  piece  of  bread  moulded  to  a 
point  by  the  fingers,  and  take  off  the  pow- 
dered lead  from  the  points  of  highest  light, 
and  softening  and  subduing  them  where 
necessary.  Then  with  the  point  of  a  black 
lead  pencil  (H  B)  I  deepen  the  pupils  of 
the  eyes,  the  line  of  the  lashes,  the  nostrils, 
lips,  hair,  and  any  part  of  the  drapery  that 
may  require  it.  The  transparency  is  then 
placed  in  the  enlarging  camera,  and  a  20  x 
16  negative  taken  from  it,  which  yields  a 
print  having  all  the  appearance  of  an  elab- 
orately stippled  picture."  Some  examples 
which  I  have  seen  of  this  mode  of  working 
have  been  strikingly  improved  by  the  ad- 
dition of  light  and  shade  in  the  background, 
put  in  with  black  lead  upon  the  transpar- 
ency, which  gave  relief  to  the  figure  and 
pictorial  value  to  the  enlarged  photograph, 
which  was  altogether  wanting  in  the  small 
picture. 


16 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


Prizes  for  Large  Photographs. — Mr. 
Crawshay  has  announced  his  intention  to 
give  next  autumn  a  similar  series  of  prizes 
for  large  photographs  to  that  recently 
awarded.  As  before  there  will  be  £50  for 
the  best,  and  £25  for  the  second  best  series 
of  three  heads,  eight  inches  from  forehead 
to  chin,  on  plates  20  x  16  ;  and  £25  for  the 
best,  and  £12  for  the  second  best  series  of 
three  heads  four  and  a  quarter  inches  from 
forehead  to  chin  on  plates  15  x  12  inches. 
Also  £25  for  the  best  enlargement  on  a  plate 
20  x  16,  by  any  method.  I  will  write  you 
further  details  shortly,  and  I  hope  to  see 
some  American  photographers  enter  the 
competition  next  time. 


Preservation  of  Stereographs. 

BY   PROF.    C.    F.    HIMES,  PH.D. 

Perhaps  no  one  who  has  taken  pleasure 
in  the  stereoscope,  and  has  used  it  systemat- 
ically as  something  more  than  a  toy,  has 
not  at  times  been  annoyed  by  defects  that 
have  put  in  an  appearance  on  the  best  pic- 
tures, or  who  has  not  noticed  the  gradual 
deterioration  by  use,  which  is  inevitable. 
They  may  be  carefully  arranged,  according 
to  the  subjects  they  are  intended  to  illus- 
trate ;  if  of  travels,  for  example,  they  may 
be  assorted  and  numbered,  catalogued,  and 
stowed  away  in  separate  boxes  by  nation- 
alities, or  subjects,  or  on  any  plan,  that  may 
reduce  the  number  handled,  to  find  any 
particular  one,  to  a  minimum,  and  yet  they 
will  be  found  much  more  liable  to  injury 
than  the  printed  volumes  of  travel,  or  the 
well  stored  note-book  they  supplement  so 
well.  The  latter  may  have  worn  bindings, 
stained,  and  partially  effaced,  and  even 
dog-eared  leaves,  but  although  unsightly, 
and  less  attractive  by  reason  of  these,  its 
real  substantial  value  remains  unimpaired. 
It  will  still  tell  its  story  as  well  ;  as  truth- 
fully and  completely  still  call  up  and  re- 
touch gently  fading  recollections.  But  the 
reverse  is  true  of  the  stereograph.  Long 
before  it  begins  to  show  defects,  or  to  be- 
come unsightly  to  casual  inspection,  it  may 
have  experienced  a  decided  change  for  the 
worse  ;  may  have  lost  in  the  power  and 
fulness  with  which  it  renders  its  part  of  the 


story.  This  is  not  the  case  simply  because 
it  is  a  more  tender  article  than  a  printed 
page,  but  because  every  point  of  it,  however 
minute,  represents  something,  says  some- 
thing, and  cannot  be  replaced  or  supplied. 
The  dot  may  be  erased  from  above  an  "  i," 
or  all  of  them,  and  the  intelligibility  of  the 
page  not  be  impaired,  but  the  stereograph 
depends  for  its  full  effect  upon  the  summing 
up,  with  great  and  unconscious  rapidity,  of 
a  number  of  such  points,  by  the  peculiar  as- 
sistance of  the  stereoscope,  increased  by  the 
magnifying  power  of  the  lenses.  Specks  and 
masses,  often  apparently  blotches  of  light 
and  shade,  seemingly  meaningless  in  the 
stereograph,  examined  without  the  instru- 
ment, assume  an  exquisite  beauty  when  their 
full  effect  is  brought  out  by  the  instrument. 
The  injuries  such  pictures  receive  only  re- 
veal themselves  in  the  stereoscope  ;  the  sur- 
face is  not  only  roughened  and  dimmed, 
but  the  wealth  of  details  rendered  available 
by  the  magnifying  power,  and  binocular 
combination  of  the  stereoscope  is  reduced, 
and  each  handling,  however  carefully  done, 
especially  in  large  packs,  inevitably  pro- 
duces its  quantum  of  injurious  effect. 

But  besides  injuries  from  abrasion  and 
other  mechanical  causes,  the  photograph  is 
exceedingly  sensitive  to  chemical  influences; 
a  creature  of  chemical  reactions,  a  result  of 
the  most  delicate  and  insensible  operations 
of  some  of  the  most  subtle  of  nature's 
agents,  it  seems  to  carry  with  it  this  con- 
tinued sensitiveness  to  chemical  influences, 
and  subjection  to  agencies  that  do  not  in 
the  least  degree  affect  the  printed  page  or 
engraving.  Even  after  the  most  excessive 
and  conscientious  care  exercised,  in  the  re- 
moval of  all  traces  of  the  chemicals  neces- 
sarily employed  in  its  production,  the  pho- 
tograph is  therefore  liable  to  meet  with 
misfortunes  peculiar  to  itself.  It  is  very 
sensitive  to  atmospheric  influences.  Acci- 
dental touches  that  would  leave  no  impres- 
sion on  an  ordinary  picture,  may,  when 
aided  by  these,  often  otherwise  impercepti- 
ble influences,  originate  a  train  of  changes 
that  will  inevitably  mar  its  beauty  and 
diminish  its  effectiveness.  Many  of  these 
possibilities  of  deterioration  may  be  avoided 
by  the  use  of  large  revolving  stereoscopes, 
in  which  pictures  may  also  be  conveniently 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


17 


classified.  But,  whilst  those  are  almost  nec- 
essary for  the  safety  and  comfortable  use 
of  glass  views,  few  persons  having  by  ex- 
perience acquired  a  ready  and  safe  manipu- 
lation of  such  views,  they  have  the  incon- 
venience of  not  permitting  ready  reference 
to  any  particular  picture,  as  might  be  fre- 
quently desirable  in  studying  a  classified 
collection.  If  the  instrument  is  large,  many 
pictures  must  perhaps  be  passed  before  the 
lenses  in  the  search  ;  if  it  is  small,  the 
limited  number  contained  would  necessitate 
too  great  a  multiplication  of  boxes  for  even 
many  private  collections  ;  and  again,  but  a 
limited  number  of  individuals  could  com- 
fortably discuss  the  pictures  at  the  same 
time,  unless  the  instrument  were  placed  on 
a  revolving  table. 

It  seems  singular,  since  the  stereoscope 
has  passed  beyond  its  first  stage  of  novelty, 
and  has  indicated  its  applicability  to  the 
illustration  and  study  of  so  many  subjects, 
that  more  effort  has  not  been  made  to  re- 
duce the  liability  of  stereographs  to  the  pre- 
ceding evils,  and  at  the  same  time  render 
their  consultation  easier",  and  their  form 
more  compact,  so  that  they  might  be  ar- 
ranged in  collections  as  books  in  libraries, 
or  in  libraries  with  the  books  they  might 
illustrate.  The  old  card  form  retains  its 
place  just  as  it  came  into  the  market  at 
first.  The  attempted  deviations  from  the 
original  size  are  decided  exceptions,  and 
can  hardly  be  said  to  have  met  with  general 
favor.  The  mounting  of  stereographs  on 
stiff  cards  in  this  way  was  almost  a  neces- 
sity at  first,  that  they  might  be  slid  hori- 
zontally into  the  old  box-formed  stereo- 
scope, almost  exclusively  introduced  into 
the  market,  and  which  was  regarded  as  the 
best ;  Sir  David  Brewster,  whilst  suggest- 
ing many  other  forms,  giving  it  the  pref- 
erence, mainly  by  reason  of  its  exclusion 
of  light  coming  from  all  directions.  But 
the  open  stereoscope,  especially  the  Holmes 
stereoscope,  seems  to  have  grown  into  favor, 
so  that  without  discussing  why  it  is  so,  it  is 
safe  to  say,  that  this  form  of  the  instrument 
seems  to  possess  in  the  highest  degree  the 
conditions  necessary  to  its  most  satisfactory 
employment.  With  it  horizontal  sliding  of 
the  cards  has  given  away  to  vertical  sliding. 
This  is   a  small  matter,  but  by  taking   ad- 


vantage of  it,  the  writer  has  adopted  the 
following  method  of  mounting  his  stereo- 
graphs, which  seems  to  render  their  use 
almost  as  free  from  liability  to  injury  of  the 
pictures  from  mechanical,  chemical  or  at- 
mospheric influences  as  that  of  a  book,  and 
permits  of  ready  reference  to  any  picture, 
whilst  the  space  occupied  is  at  the  same 
time  very  much  reduced.  A  book  is  formed 
about  3f  by  3^  inches  in  size,  with  a  dozen 
or  more  rather  short  guards,  upon  which 
double  leaves  the  size  of  an  ordinary  stereo- 
graph card  are  pasted  like  maps.  Upon 
these  the  stereoscopic  pictures  are  carefully 
mounted  as  on  a  card,  and  with  a  piece  of 
smooth  paper  between  the  two  halves,  are 
subjected  to  pressure  for  several  hours  or 
more.  The  books  when  opened  out  at  any 
page,  can  be  readily  slid  between  the  wire 
guards  of  the  Holmes  stereoscope,  as  an 
ordinary  stereograph,  and  with  equal  effect. 
The  leaves  of  such  a  book  can  be  turned 
over,  and  it  can  be  slid  in  and  out  and 
packed  away  without  touching  the  face  of 
any  picture  with  the  finger,  without  me- 
chanical abrasion,  and  when  packed  away 
on  shelves,  are  not  as  accessible  to  atmos- 
pheric influences.  By  means  of  suitable 
blank  forms  for  a  title-page  and  index  for 
each  volume,  and  a  catalogue  of  the  collec- 
tion, any  stereograph  could  readily  be 
found.  Whole  collections  of  subjects  of 
scientific,  architectural,  mechanical,  ar- 
tistic, &c,  interest  could  in  this  way  easily 
be  placed  for  public  use  in  any  library,  and 
could  be  readily  consulted  by  simple  instru- 
ments placed  near  them,  of  several  forms  if 
desirable,  including  decentered  spectacles, 
to  be  placed  on  the  nose,  as  ordinary  ones. 
Many  persons  would  doubtless  carry  with 
them  spectacles  of  this  kind  specially 
adapted  to  their  eyes,  if  such  collections 
were  common,  whilst  many  others  might 
rely  entirely  upon  their  ability  without  any 
instrument  at  all,  to  obtain  full  effect  of  the 
stereograph  without  any  discomfort. 

There  are  so  few  objections  that  suggest 
themselves  to  this  plan  of  mounting  com- 
pared with  the  advantages,  that  it  might 
after  a  time  largely  supplant  the  card,  even 
for  general  use.  Dealers  in  stereographs  at 
places  of  natural  interest  or  of  resort, 
might  find  it  to  their  interest  to  have  prints 


2 


18 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


mounted  in  this  way,  or  books  in  which 
such  pictures  as  might  be  selected  could  be 
readily  mounted,  or  perhaps  pictures  might 
be  kept  mounted  on  such  sheets,  with  the 
name  and  number  on  the  margin,  which  it 
would  be  the  work  of  but  a  few  minutes  to 
affix  to  guards  in  books  without  such  leaves. 
Leaves  of  thin  paper,  for  fuller  description 
or  comments,  could  readily  be  affixed  by  any 
one,  at  any  time,  to  extra  guards  in  the 
books.  The  compactness,  the  convenience 
of  permanent  arrangement  of  stereographs, 
according  to  subjects  or  dates,  or  localities 
of  collection,  &c,  would  be  a  great  recom- 
mendation even  to  general  collectors.  The 
accumulation  of  stereographs  from  a  Euro- 
pean tour  would  almost  acquire  a  new  value 
in  a  form  so  easy  of  access  and  reference, 
and  so  free  from  injury. 


SOCIETY  GOSSIP. 

Philadelphia  (Philada.),  Dec.  3d. — On 
motion  of  Mr.  Borda,  it  was  resolved  that 
the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  beginning 
with  the  number  for  January,  1874,  should 
hereafter  be  regularly  mailed  to  the  Photo- 
graphic Society  of  Paris,  in  exchange  for 
the  Bulletin  de  la  Societe  Francais,  published 
by  the  said  society. 

Mr.  Fassit  spoke  in  high  terms  of  some 
solar  enlargements  by  Mr.  Vernon  Heath,  of 
London,  which  he  had  seen  while  abroad. 

Mr.  Bell  exhibited  a  series  of  city  views, 
made  on  excess  of  silver  emulsion  plates. 
Also  a  plate  prepared  with  a  collodion  con- 
taining ten  grains  of  bromide  of  cadmium 
per  ounce,  and  dipped  for  fifteen  minutes  in 
a  sixty-grain  silver  bath.  The  plate  was 
brilliant  and  clean,  and  appeared  to  work  a 
little  quicker  than  the  emulsion  plates. 

A  vote  of  thanks  was  tendered  to  Mr 
William  L.  Shoemaker  for  a  very  hand- 
some donation  of  a  new  lantern  screen. 

Mr.  Moore  presented  an  18  x  22  solar  en- 
largement from  a  negative  by  the  Secretary. 
A  vote  of  thanks  was  tendered,  and  it  was 
resolved  that  the  print  should  be  framed 
and  hung  on  the  walls. 

District  of  Columbia  (Washington), 
Dec.  2d. — Annual  meeting,  held  at  Mr. 
Johnson's  gallery.     But  little  business  be- 


sides the  election  of  officers  for  the  ensuing 
year  was  transacted. 

Mr.  Alphonso  Haynes  was  elected  to 
membership.  The  election  of  officers  re- 
sulted as  follows :  President,  E.  J.  Pull- 
man ;  Vice-Presidents,  T.  J.  Bicksler,  .J.  J. 
Gardner,  and  L.  C.  Dillon  ;  Kecording  Sec- 
retary, C.  M.  Bell;  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, S.  C.  Mills ;  Treasurer,  Clarence 
Dodge;  Executive  Committee,  S.  Ott,  M. 
P.  Bice,  J.  C.  Sarmiento,  Henry  Ulke,  and 
N.  E.  Bates. 

The  adjournment  was  followed  by  a  sump- 
tuous collation,  tendered  by  Mr.  Johnson, 
to  whom  a  vote  of  thanks  was  tendered 
therefor. 

The  Association  has  thirty-four  names  on 
its  roll,  and  begins  its  second  year  in  a 
flourishing  condition. 

German  Photographic  Society  (New 
York),  Dec.  4th. — A  communication  was 
read  from  the  Kecording  Secretary,  Mr.  H. 
Schoene,  tendering  his  resignation,  on  ac- 
count of  going  to  Savannah,  Georgia,  as  his 
future  residence.  The  resignation  was  ac- 
cepted, and  the  Corresponding  Secretary 
was  unanimously  ordered  to  express  to  Mr. 
Schoene  the  regret  of  the  Society  at  losing 
his  excellent  services,  and  to  thank  him  for 
all  his  past  labors  and  exertions  for  the 
good  of  the  Society. 

The  Committee  of  Arrangements  reported 
that  every  third  Thursday  in  the  month 
from  now  was  set  aside  for  practical  studies 
in  illumination  and  posing. 

Mr.  A.  A.  Costelli  exhibited  a  model 
of  his  patent  conical  background,  con- 
structed after  the  same  principle  as  the  one 
of  Mr.  Kurtz,  having  a  more  funnel-like 
shape  though,  and  being  made  of  cloth,  a 
considerably  cheaper  material.  Tne  great 
advantage,  however,  of  this  ground  lies  in 
the  frame  supporting  it,  for  when  not  in 
use  it  can  be  put  up  flat  and  stood  against  a 
wall,  occupying  no  more  room  than  any 
ordinary  ground. 

Photographic  Institute  (Chicago), 
Dec.  1st. — Mr.  Green  earnestly  requested  all 
the  members  to  contribute  papers,  &c,  on 
the  subject  of  "  Lighting  and  Posing  "  for 
the  January  meeting. 

The  President  announced  the  subject  to 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGKAPHEE. 


19 


be  discussed  for  this  evening,  viz.,  "The 
Developer,"  and  requested  that  as  many  as 
possible  take  part  in  the  discussion. 

Messrs.  Cross  and  Greene  read  papers  on 
the  subject  (which  see  on  another  page), 
and  a  general  discussion  followed. 

A  member  stated  that  his  ideas  could  be 
summed  up  briefly  as  follows:  Having  given 
a  long  exposure,  use  a  weak  developer ; 
short  exposure,  use  a  strong  developer. 
For  white  drapery  give  a  good  exposure 
and  use  a  weak  developer ;  for  dark  drapery 
a  good  exposure  and  use  a  strong  developer. 
To  obtain  contrast,  a  short  exposure  and 
a  strong  developer.  To  obtain  softness,  a 
long  exposure  and  a  strong  developer.  To 
obtain  delicacy  of  film,  a  long  exposure  and 
a  weak  developer.  To  obtain  good  body  of 
film'(not  excessive  contrast),  a  medium  ex- 
posure and  a  medium  developer.  But  after 
all,  no  rule  can  be  followed,  and  so  much 
can  be  done  to  vary  the  results  by  the  man- 
ner of  manipulation,  that  that  which  seems 
clear  in  theory  may  not  always  be  so  in 
practice. 

Mr.  Hesler  stated  that  the  greatest  va- 
riety of  results  could  be  obtained  by  simply 
varying  the  quantity  of  acetic  acid ;  be- 
sides, the  temperature  of  the  room,  as  well 
as  other  conditions,  materially  affected  the 
result. 

Mr.  Cross  thought  that  much  could  be 
done  to  bring  detail,  when  underexposure 
is  the  case,  by  using  a  small  quantity  of  al- 
cohol in  the  developer. 

Mr.  Greene  could  not  see  the  use  of  alco- 
hol in  the  developer  for  any  condition. 

New  England  (Boston),  Dec.  7th. — 
The  photographic  fraternity  of  this  section 
were  invited  to  attend  a  meeting  of  the  Bos- 
ton Society  this  evening.  Some  thirty  ladies 
and  fifty-four  gentlemen  responded  to  the 
call,  and,  as  Mr.  Black  remarked,  never  be- 
fore had  so  much  beauty  and  genius  been  in 
his  studio  at  one  and  the  same  time.  Mr. 
South  worth  entertained  those  present  with 
a  display  of  daguerreotypes  taken  over 
thirty  years  ago  ;  all  were  pleased  with  his 
kind  attentions,  and  the  meeting  was  opened 
by  the  President,  Mr.  J.  W.  Black,  intro- 
ducing Mr.  G.  H.  Loomis,  who  entertained 
those  present  with  a  most  eloquent  address. 

"We  are   sorry  that   the   rush   upon   our 


columns  prevents  us  from  printing  the 
whole  of  Mr.  Loomis's  address.  It  is  full 
of  good  counsel,  worthy  of  consideration  by 
all,  although  written  for  his  associates  only, 
and  therefore  necessarily  of  a  local  nature. 
After  reviewing  "photography  of  other 
days"  in  a  retrospective  way,  giving  many 
amusing  anecdotes  and  discussing  the  vari- 
ous "types"  that  the  art  has  brought  to 
light,  and  from  light  until  a  "  type-us  fever  " 
seems  to  exist,  and  speaking  of  the  days 
when  our  art  made  "such  a  call  for  men 
and  machinery,  that  the  blacksmith  left  his 
forge  and  hammer,  the  cobbler  his  last  and 
lapstone,  the  bootblack  his  brush  and  box, 
each  intent  upon  keeping  the  supply  of 
artists  up  to  the  demand  of  the  times,"  &c, 
&c,  our  orator  comes  down  to  the  matters 
of  fact  of  to-day.  Touching  upon  the  sub- 
ject of  the  public  taste,  he  says: 

"  I  tell  you,  my  brethren,  that  the  artists 
must  educate  the  public  taste  to  a  higher 
order  of  work,  if  they  would  have  this 
same  public  become  the  patrons  of  some- 
thing better  than  the  poor  productions  I 
have  alluded  to.  Why,  let  me  ask  in  all 
sincerity,  has  the  art  we  practice  been  so 
questionable  in  character  and  results,  as  to 
make  it  a  matter  of  difficulty  for  art  critics 
to  assign  it  a  place  in  the  calendar?  Why 
has  photography  been  denied  its  rights  to 
recognition  as  a  fine  art,  unless  it  be  that 
those  who  are  its  exponents  and  representa- 
tives have  been  weighed  and  found  wanting  ? 
*        *        *        *         *        *        * 

"  We  may  as  well  restate  the  simple  fact, 
that  since  photographers  themselves  have 
begun  to  desire  a  better  appreciation  of  their 
labors,  they  are  securing  it,  and  since  there 
is  a  diminution  of  disreputable  work,  there 
is  a  corresponding  confidence  growing  up 
in  our  favor. 

"As  to  portraiture  as  practiced  by  those 
who  pride  themselves  on  speaking  likenesses, 
because,  forsooth,  their  subjects  sit  for  hours 
and  daj-s  in  the  artists'  studio  talking  while 
being  sketched,  we  are  not  disposed  by  any 
means  to  shirk  the  comparison.  Who  does 
not  remember  the  pink,  white,  and  blue  car- 
icatures which  once  dangled  on  the  necks 
of  our  mothers  and  grandmothers,  and  the 
stiff,  heavy,  and  cumbersome  daubs,  inclosed 
in   massive   gilt,  which   helped   cover   the 


20 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


walls  in  the  mansions  of  our  first  families? 
These,  indeed,  were  the  products  of  the  old 
masters,  and  we  were  called  upon  to  indulge 
in  exclamations  of  admiration,  though  our 
five  senses  all  rebelled  at  once. 

"  All  the  old  masters  self-styled  were  not 
prodigies,  in  fact  many  of  them  were  hardly 
passable,  as  we  use  the  phrase,  and  yet  they 
roosted  in  fine  art  galleries.  It  would  have 
been  a  shocking  violation  of  taste  doubtless, 
but  not  of  the  scriptural  decalogue,  to  have 
worshipped  their  works,  since  they  were 
not '  the  likeness  of  anything'  in  the  heavens 
above  or  on  the  earth  beneath. 

"As  showing  the  march  of  progress,  we 
have  only  to  observe  that  a  large  majority 
of  these  family  portraits  have  found  their 
true  place  in  the  order  of  things,  and  have 
gone  up  from  one  to  three  flights  in  popular 
estimation,  resting  at  last  in  the  upper 
chambers  and  attics  of  all  well-ordered 
dwellings. 

"We  are  in  no  mood  to  cultivate  other 
than  the  most  cordial  and  friendly  relations 
with  those  who  claim  so  much  in  a  name, 
for  we  know  that  '  a  rose  by  any  other 
name  would  smell  as  sweet.' 

"  If  photography  is  not  a  fine  art,  why 
then  let  us  make  it  one,  for,  indeed,  such  it 
deserves  to  be,  and  our  brethren  of  the  pal- 
ette, brush,  and  easel,  if  they  cannot  in  the 
generosity  of  their  hearts  recognize  us  as 
equals,  let  us  still  on  and  up  until  they  shall 
acknowledge  us  as  their  superiors. 

*         *         *         *         *         *         * 

"  I  have  now  a  few  thoughts  about  the 
living  present  and  the  hopeful  future." 
******* 

Here  Mr.  Loomis  commented  upon  the 
ugly  competition  that  some  of  the  craft  al- 
lowed to  occur,  and  upon  the  advantages  of 
a  schedule  of  prices,  at  least  in  the  city  of 
Boston.     On  this  latter  topic  he  said  : 

"  What  we  particularly  wish  to  impress 
in  this  connection  is  the  desirability  of  a 
more  elevated  standard  of  prices,  as  well  as 
workmanship,  not  presuming  that  we  can 
adopt  a  schedule  that  will  secure  unanimity 
of  opinion  or  unanimous  adoption.  Some 
of  our  people  have  gone  into  the  club  busi- 
ness, and  have  delegated  one  in  every  dozen 
of  the  population  of  their  several  localities 


to  act  as  agents  or  drummers.  The  very 
best  of  everything  is  offered  at  half  price  at 
the  same  counter  where  double  the  half  is 
demanded  of  those  who  are  without  the  club 
password.  This  perhaps  is  good  business 
strategy,  'and  may  for  awhile  add  to  the 
financial  exchequer,  but  there  is  a  great 
liability  to  a  disagreeable  reaction." 

A  round  of  amusing  anecdotes  of  photo- 
graphic practice  followed  this;  a  good 
"fatherly"  lecture  to  the  New  England 
craft,  on  the  advantages  of  their  Associa- 
tion and  their  duty  to  support  it,  and  then, 
amid  frequent  applause,  he  closed  as  fol- 
lows : 

"I  am  aware  that  the  practical  duties  of 
the  photographer  lead  elsewhere  than  in 
literary  paths,  and  give  him  but  limited  op- 
portunities for  oratorical  display,  and  yet 
in  the  exercise  of  his  functions  as  chemist 
and  optician  he  is  constantly  acquiring  new 
and  interesting  facts  which,  in  communi- 
cating to  others,  need  no  forensic  "prepara- 
tion. 

"  Mr.  President  and  brethren,  I  have 
'spoken  my  piece, '  and  with  that  charity 
which  'suffereth  long  and  is  kind,'  you 
have  endured  patiently  to  the  end." 

Mr.  Loomis  was  greeted  with  rounds 
of  applause,  after  which  the  President 
introduced  a  friend,  who  interested  all 
present  by  reading  several  poems.  He  was 
repeatedly  encored.  After  the  readings, 
the  President  entertained  the  visitors  with 
a  splendid  display  of  the  stereopticon  slides  ; 
the  views  were  made  in  the  polar  regions 
by  Dr.  Hays  and  J.  Dunmore.  Dr.  Hays, 
who  happened  to  call  on  Mr.  Black  on  busi- 
ness, was  seized  by  the  President,  who  would 
not  let  him  leave  until  he  had  given  a  thrill- 
ing description  of  his  travels  among  the 
icebound  regions.  The  Doctor  told  many 
tales  about  the  inhabitants  of  the  Polar 
Seas,  and  his  great  description  of  his  bear 
fight  brought  down  the  house  (almost).  Dr. 
Hays  complimented  Mr.  John  Dunmore 
for  his  wonderful  success  in  having  pro- 
duced such  remarkable  negatives  of  the 
Arctic  regions,  for  they  were,  without 
doubt,  the.  best  ever  made  of  that  part  of 
the  earth,  and  as  Mr.  J.  W.  Black  had  re- 
produced them  for  use  in  the  stereopticon, 
the  people  could  now  form  some  idea  of  the 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


21 


regions  near  the  north  pole.  After  Dr. 
Hays  had  closed,  Mr.  Black  exhibited  on 
the  screen  the  Landy  arid  Khoads  babies. 

Pennsylvania  (Philadelphia),  Dec. 
16th. — Held  at  the  rooms  of  Messrs.  Trask 
&  Bacon. 

The  Committee  on  Medal  reported  that 
Mr.  Harrison  Krips,  having  presented  the 
best  sample  of  work,  a  fine  card  of  an  old 
gentleman,  was  entitled  to  the  medal. 

The  election  of  officers  for  the  ensuing 
year  resulted  as  follows  :  President,  Mr.  H. 
C.  Phillips  ;  Vice-Presidents,  Messrs.  A.  K. 
P.  Trask,  H.  P.  Smith,  Gerhard  Schreiber; 
Treasurer,  John  R.  demons;  Secretary,  R. 
J.  Chute;  Corresponding  Secretary,  E.  L. 
"Wilson;  Executive  Committee,  Messrs.  B. 
P.  Saylor,  John  Carbutt,  W.  H.  Rhoads, 
J.  G.  Tyson,  W.  G.  Entrekin. 

Mr.  E.  L.  Wilson  presented  for  inspec- 
tion a  very  fine  collection  of  prints  of  vari- 
ous kinds  and  sizes,  collected  by  him  during 
his  recent  European  tour  ;  they  were  greatly 
admired.  The  "Rebecca"  of  Mr.  Valen- 
tine Blanchard,  of  London,  created  much 
praise. 

At  the  suggestion  of  Mr.  Wilson,  a  com- 
mittee— Messrs.  Wilson,  Rhoads,  and  Chute 
— was  appointed  to  confer  on  the  subject  of 
having  a  course  of  art  lectures  delivered 
before  the  Association. 

Mr.  Wilson  extended  a  general  invita- 
tion to  the  members  of  the  Association  to 
the  anniversary  of  the  tenth  year  of  the  pub- 
lication of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer, 
which  was  accepted. 

Mr.  Schreiber  presented  for  inspection  a 
solution  manufactured  under  a  patent  that, 
it  was  claimed  by  the  manufacturers,  would 
precipitate  silver  from  hypo  waste  solu- 
tions quicker  and  cheaper  than  sulphuret  of 
potassium,  and  it  was  claimed  that  it  would 
not  conflict  with  the  Shaw  patent. 

Mr.  W.  G.  Entrekin,  of  Manayunk,  pre- 
sented for  inspection  a  number  of  samples 
of  the  result  of  enamelling  by  his  new  burn- 
isher, which  certainly  were  superior  to  any- 
thing yet  seen,  and  to  prove  that  his  patent 
was  valid  and  not  conflicting  with  any 
other,  two  letters  were  read  from  Mr.  C. 
M.  Parks,  formerly  chief  examiner  of  the 
Patent   Office,  'which    explained   that   the 


invention  was  original,  and  none  need  fear 
using  it. 

Mr.  John  R.  Clemonsread  some  extracts 
from  Regnault's  Chemistry  proving  from 
authority  of  various  authors,  that  the  use  of 
the  material  claimed  in  the  Shaw  patent  was 
known  and  published  years  before  his  patent 
was  obtained,  viz. : 

In  Regnault's  Chemistry  *  page  299,  vol- 
ume 2d,  paragraph  1121,  14th  line  from  the 
top,  we  read  as  follows  : 

"Protoxide  of  silver  has  so  great  an 
affinity  for  hyposulphurous  acid  that  it  ab- 
stracts it  from  potassa  and  soda.  If 
oxide  of  silver  be  digested  with  a  solution 
of  hyposulphite  of  soda,  a  considerable  pro- 
portion of  oxide  of  silver  dissolves,  and  the 
liquid,  when  evaporated,  yields  crystals  of 
the  double  hyposulphite  of  soda  and  silver. 
The  chloride,  bromide,  and  iodide  of  silver 
also  dissolve  readily  in  a  solution  of  hypo- 
sulphite of  soda,  and  after  evaporation  the 
liquid  affords  the  same  crystals  of  double 
hyposulphite.  The  solubility  of  the  chloride, 
bromide,  and  iodide  of  silver  is  applied  in 
photography  to  the  fixing  of  the  image  ; 
that  is,  to  the  removal  of  the  compounds  of 
silver  from  the  parts  which  have  not  been 
acted  on  by  light.  Solutions  of  the  double 
hyposulphites  when  boiled  give  off  sulphide 
of  silver,  and  sulphate  of  soda  is  formed. 
The  hyposulphites  of  silver  can  be  obtained 
isolated,  in  the  form  of  a  white  powder,  by 
pouring  a  solution  of  hyposulphite  of  soda 
into  a  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver  ;  but  the 
precipitate  soon  blackens  in  the  light,  sul- 
phide of  silver  being  formed." 

In  Regnault's  Chemistry ,  page  300,  vol- 
ume 2d,  paragraph  1124,  19th  line  from  the 
top,  we  find  as  follows  : 

"  The  same  sulphide  of  silver  is  produced 
by  the  humid  way,  when  a  salt  of  silver  is 
precipitated  by  sulphydric  acid  or  by  an 
alkaline  sulphydrate." 

Also,  in  Regnault's  Chemistry,  page  388, 
volume  1,  paragraph  332,  8th  line  from  the 
top,  we  find  as  follows  : 

"A  great  number  of  metallic  sulphides 

*  Published  in  Philadelphia  by  Parrish, 
Dunning  &  Mears.  Translated  from  the  French 
by  Thomas  Betton,  M.D.,  with  Notes  by  James 
C.  Booth  and  William  E.  Faber.    1852. 


22 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


can  also  be  prepared  by  passing  a  current 
of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  through  a  solution 
of  the  metallic  salts,  especially  insoluble 
sulphides  from  metals  of  the  5th  and  6th 
sections. 

"Sulphides  from  metals  of  the  3d  section 
may  also  be  prepared  in  the  humid  way,  by 
pouring  a  solution  of  alkaline  sulphide  into 
a  saline  solution  of  the  metal.  Thus,  with 
sulphate  of  the  protoxide  of  iron  and  mono- 
sulphide  of  potassium,  the  reaction  is,"  &c, 
»fec.  Twenty-fifth  line  from  the  top,  "Metal- 
lic sulphides  resist  powerfully  the  action  of 
heat,  there  being  only  a  few  sulphides  of 
the  sixth  section  which  are  decomposed  at  a 
very  elevated  temperature." 

Mr.  A.  K.  P.  Trask  exhibited  one  of  New- 
ell's  patent  field  baths,  wooden,  and  lined 
with  the  Newell's  patent  coating.  It  was 
commented  upon  very  favorably. 

Messrs.  Gilbert  &  Bro.  offered  the  use  of 
their  room  for  next  meeting,  which  was  ac- 
cepted. 

Thanks  were  offered  Messrs.  Trask  & 
Bacon  for  the  use  of  their  room. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association 
(Chicago),  Dec.  3d. — Twenty  members 
present. 

The  following  letter  was  read  from  Ben- 
jamin French,  Esq.,  Boston:  "I  see  you 
have  a  good  deal  to  say  at  your  meetings 
about  paper  blistering.  I  would  suggest  to 
you  to  try  always  a  fresh  bath  of  hypo  every 
day,  and  be  sure  it  is  of  the  same  tempera- 
ture as  your  gold  bath,  not  colder.  If  your 
hypo  bath  is  a  little  warm,  and  not  too 
strong  (it  has  been  suggested  to  me),  blisters 
will  not  come,  nor  will  they  come  in  a  fresh 
hypo  bath  of  same  temperature  as  gold  bath. 
I  don't  suppose  this  is  new  to  you,  but 
thought  it  would  be  no  harm  to  see." 

Mr.  Alfred  Hall  then  read  his  paper  on 
Chemistry,  illustrated  by  Youman's  Chemi- 
cal Chart  and  Blackboard  Exercises.  This 
paper  showed  most  careful  preparation,  re- 
search, and  study,  and  was  listened  to  with 
great  attention  by  the  members  present. 

On  motion,  a  vote  of  thanks  was  given 
Mr.  Hall  for  his  entertaining  paper,  and 
he  was  requested  to  continue  the  subject  at 
his  earliest  convenience. 

Messrs.  Hall  and  Hesler  spoke  in   most 


flattering  terms  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Pocket  Ref- 
erence-Booh, of  its  great  value  to  every  pho- 
tographer, and  expressed  the  hope  that  it 
may  soon  be  found  in  every  gallery. 


DEVELOPMENT.* 

BY   D.  H.   CROSS, 

The  proper  development  of  the  photo- 
graphic impression  involves  a  certain  de- 
gree of  dexterity  in  manipulation,  as  well 
as  intelligence  concerning  the  nature  of  the 
agents  employed.  Attention  to  composition, 
lighting,  and  exposure  is  of  course  very  im- 
portant, but  this  will  avail  little  if  the  pro- 
cess of  development  does  not  receive  its  full 
share  of  attention.  When  the  lighting  and 
exposure  are  known  to  be  faulty,  there  is  at 
least  a  partial  remedy  in  development.  A 
knowledge  of  the  nature  of  the  agents  used 
is  important  at  the  outset. 

Protosalts  of  iron  being  used  almost  ex- 
clusively for  development  proper,  I  shall 
allude  to  them  only. 

The  effect  of  protosulphate  of  iron,  when 
used  alone  is  to  give  an  image  full  of 
detail,  but  flat,  gray,  and  devoid  of  con- 
trast. The  effect  of  acids  of  all  kinds  is  to 
retard  the  action  of  the  iron,  and  give  con- 
trast or  vigor.  Acetic  acid  is  used  almost 
exclusively  of  late,  both  as  a  retarder  and 
to  give  flowing  properties  to  the  solution. 
Formulas  are  of  little  use,  except  as  starting- 
points,  and  as  such  I  give  one  as  good  for 
a  normal  developer  as  any  with  which  I  am 
familiar. 

Prepare  a  saturated  solution  of  iron  in 
water,  and  keep  a  sufficient  quantity  in 
readiness,  as  it  will  keep  indefinitely.  Pre- 
pare a  second  solution,  25  grains  to  the 
ounce  of  water  (a  common  hydrometer  is 
convenient  and  sufficiently  accurate  for  this 
purpose),  add  3  or  4  ounces  of  acetic  acid  to 
20  ounces  of  this  solution  ;  ordinarily,  alco- 
hol is  not  required.  When  it  is  to  give 
flowing  properties,  the  nitrate  solution, 
"silver  bath,"  should  be  partially  evapor- 
ated. The  person  who  develops  should 
keep  constantly  in  mind  the  strength  of  the 
light,  the  length  of  exposure,  and  the  char- 

*  Read  before  the  Photographic  Institute  of 
Chicago. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGKAPHER 


23 


acter  of  the  lighting.  If  the  lighting  is  soft 
and  diffused,  exposure  may  to  shorter  and 
developer  stronger  of  acid,  and  the  plate 
rocked  more  than  if  the  lighting  is  decided 
and  bold.  If  the  lighting  is  decided  and 
bold,  the  exposure  should  be  longer  and  the 
developer  stronger  of  iron,  and  the  plate 
should  be  held  quite  still.  The  quantity  of 
developer  used  affects  the  result;  the  lesser 
quantity  gives  greater  contrast.  A  weak 
developer  should  be  used  copiously,  and  the 
plate  held  still  when  great  delicacy  and  soft- 
ness is  desired.  Close  observation  and  quick 
decision  is  required  just  at  the  moment  de- 
velopment has  commenced.  We  should  be 
in  readiness  with  weak  and  strong  devel- 
opers, to  vary  the  quantities  of  solution  in 
the  plate,  and  to  vary  the  proportions  of 
acid  and  iron,  and  to  rock  the  plate  or  hold 
it  still,  as  the  effect  requires.  Generally 
some  or  all  of  the  above  means  will  enable 
us  to  produce  the  effect  desired  ;  sometimes, 
however,  in  large  work  there  will  still  be 
too  much  contrast;  if  so,  add  a  few  drops  of 
alcohol  to  the  ounce  of  developer  before 
flowing  the  plate,  and  I  think  this  fault 
will  be  effectually  cured.  Never  having 
seen  this  remedy  for  excessive  intensity 
used  or  mentioned,  I  would  call  attention  to 
it  as  one  of  the  most  effectual  and  conveni- 
ent at  our  disposal.  Indeed,  it  is  so  potent 
an  antidote  for  hardness  or  chalkiness  that 
care  must  be  exercised  or  flatness  will  re- 
sult. The  larger  the  proportion  of  alcohol 
within  certain  limits,  the  softer  the  re- 
sult. 

A  general m fault  is  underexposure;  there 
is  no  remedy  for  very  short  exposures,  and 
there  is  little  danger  of  overexposure.  A 
negative  that  is  thin  and  flat  may  be  made 
more  contrasting  and  intenser  easily  with 
pyro  and  silver.  We  will  now  strive  to  in- 
crease contrasts.  This  may  be  done  by  short 
setting  the  collodion  film,  and  short  im- 
mersion in  the  bath,  add  acid  to  the  devel- 
oper, use  little  developer,  and  rock  the  plate. 
Use  more  silver  in  the  pyro  when  redevel- 
oping, or  increase  the  proportion  of  acid  in 
the  pyro.  I  think  that  there  is  too  much 
reliance  on  formulae.  We  should  learn  the 
effect  of  each  ingredient,  both  in  excess  and 
deficiency,  and  depend  more  upon  judg- 
ment and  of,  the  effects  now  produced,  and 


correct  remedies  will   soon  suggest  them- 
selves to  the  careful  observer. 

Hoping  that  the  above  may  benefit  some 
co-laborers  in  our  beautiful  art,  I  remain 
very  truly,  an  interested  and  humble  de- 
votee of  our  art. 


THE  DEVELOPER. 


BY   P.    B.    GREENE. 

What  I  have  to  say  on  the  subject  of  de- 
velopment will  be  but  little;  I  will  simply 
tell  you  how  I  work. 

I  have  tried  nearly  all  the  dodges  of  using 
other  substances  in  connection  with  proto- 
sulphate  of  iron,  such  as  sugar,  rock  candy, 
epsom  salts,  gelatin,  double  salts  of  iron 
and  ammonia,  &c,  but  have  always  fallen 
back  on  simple  protosulphate  of  iron  and 
acetic  acid.  I  have  come  to  the  conclusion 
that  other  things  are  only  an  extra  expense, 
and  of  no  use  only  to  retard  the  action  of  the 
iron,  that  the  same  results  can  be  obtained 
by  using  a  weaker  developer,  and  save  the 
cost  of  the  other  ingredients  added  as  re- 
tarders. 

My  formula  for  preparing  the  develojoer 
is  as  follows : 

STOCK    SOLUTION. 

Protosulphate  of  Iron  (pulv. ),     .      1  pound. 

Warm  Water,      .  .  .         .     2  quarts. 

For  everyday  use  take  8  ounces  of  stock 
solution  and  3  ounces  of  acetic  acid,  filter 
into  a  quart  bottle,  and  fill  up  with  water, 
making  it  in  strength  2  ounces  of  iron  to 
the  quart. 

This  is  the  strength  I  prefer  for  ordinary 
purposes.  Sometimes  you  may  require  it 
stronger  or  weaker  ;  that  you  can  vary  to 
suit  your  work  in  hand.  The  shorter  the 
exposure  the  stronger  you  want  your  de- 
veloper ;  for  that  reason  it  is  a  good  plan  to 
have  a  bottle  of  developer  in  your  dark- 
room, the  full  strength  of  the  stock  solution 
with  acetic  acid  added,  3  ounces  to  every 
8  ounces  of  stock  solution. 

The  method  of  using  will  depend  very 
much  on  the  subject  in  hand;  as  a  general 
thing  the  stiller  you  hold  the  plate  and  keep 
it  covered  with  the  developer,  the  better 
will  be  the  result.     If  you  see  the  image  is 

*  Read  before  the  Photographic  Institute  of 
Chicago. 


24 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


coming  out  too  thin  in  the  high-lights,  rock 
the  plate  so  the  developer  will  wash  out  the 
silver  in  the  shadows,  and  deposit  it  on  the 
highlights,  but  if  it  shows  too  much  con- 
trast in  light  and  shade,  hold  as  still  as 
possible,  so  as  to  retain  all  the  silver  in  the 
shadows  that  is  possible.  For  solar  nega- 
tives I  should  flow  the  developer  freely,  so 
as  to  wash  off  all  the  surplus  silver  from 
the  plate,  then  hold  still,  and  let  the  image 
come  out  fine  and  even  ;  I  never  use  any 
alcohol  if  I  can  possibly  help  it.  I  prefer 
to  work  over  my  bath  and  free  it  from  the 
alcohol,  than  to  try  to  work  a  bath  that  you 
are  compelled  to  use  alcohol  in  the  devel- 
oper with. 

In  landscape  work  I  always  carry  a  satu- 
rated solution  with  the  acid  added,  and  re- 
duce as  I  want  to  use  it.  I  have  two  rea- 
sons for  this.  1st.  It  is  less  bulky  and 
lighter  to  carry.  2d.  We  are  compelled  to 
vary  the  strength  more  in  outdoor  work 
than  you  are  in  gallery  work.  Sometimes,  for 
instantaneous  work  and  very  poorly  lighted 
interiors,  I  use  the  full  strength  of  the 
stock  solution.  Also,  in  the  woods,  where 
the  foliage  is  very  dense,  you  are  compelled 
to  use  a  strong  developer  to  obtain  detail, 
while,  on  the  other  hand,  if  it  is  pretty 
much  all  light,  I  use  a  very  weak  developer. 
The  stronger  you  use  the  developer  the 
more  detail  you  will  get,  while  the  weaker, 
the  more  contrast. 

I  do  not  wish  to  be  understood  to  say 
that  strong  developer  makes  the  best  work, 
for  the  quicker  the  development  the  coarser 
will  be  the  deposit  of  silver.  Therefore  use 
your  developer  as  weak  as  you  can,  and  ob- 
tain the  proper  amount  of  detail. 


New  Silver-saving  Apparatus. — Messrs. 
Morgan  &  Fuller,  Norwich,  Conn.,  have  shown 
us  a  working  model  of  Laighton's  automatic  sil- 
ver-saving apparatus,  which  is  very  ingenious 
and  seems  to  work  like  a  charm.  It  measures 
out  the  chloride  as  needed,  and  empties  it  into 
the  developer  waste,  and  the  silver  is  caught  on 
a  false  bottom,  while  the  water  goes  down  the 
sink.  This  apparatus  is  not  an  infringement  on 
any  other,  we  believe,  and  photographers  who 
use  it  are  no  more  liable  to  Mr.  Shaw  than  they 
are  if  they  use  an  ordinary  bucket.  The  two 
patents  do  not  clash  at  all  in  our  judgment. 


MATTERS  OF  THE 


Membership  costs  $2;  annual  dues,  $4. 
Life  membership,  $25,  and  no  dues. 

All  remittances  of  back  dues,  and  fees,  and 
dues  for  new  members  should  be  made  to 
the  Permanent  Secretary,  Edward  L.  "Wil- 
son, Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

Life  Member. — The  following  has  been 
made  a  life  member  by  the  Executive  Com- 
mittee:  J.  Holy  Land,  Baltimore. 

Debt  Fund. — Contributions  heretofore  ac- 
knowledged,    $240  50 

J.  Holy  Land,  .  ,  .  .  3  00 
W.  J.  Baker,  .         .         .         .       15  00 

A.  McCormick,      .         .         .         .         2  00 


$260  50 

The  Executive  Committee  met  at  the  office 
of  Messrs.  Benerman  &  'Wilson,  December 
19th,  Messrs.  Adams  (chairman),  Bogar- 
dus,  Pthoads,  Moore,  and  Wilson  being 
present.  The  subject  of  the  indebtedness 
of  the  Association  was  considered  at  length, 
and  referred  to  the  Secretary  and  Treasurer 
to  report  at  the  next  meeting. 

The  next  Convention  at  Chicago  was  also 
discussed,  and  the  Secretary  was  ordered  to 
confer  with  the  Local  Secretary  and  report. 

A  communication  from  the  United  States 
Centennial  Commission  was  read,  acknowl- 
edging the  application  of  the  National  Pho- 
tographic Association  for  space  for  the  ex- 
hibition of  photographs. 

Mrs.  Lock  wood's  insurance  project  was 
likewise  brought  up,  and  further  correspon- 
dence with  her  ordered. 

A  resolution  was  passed,  directing  the 
Secretary  to  issue  a  circular  letter  to  the 
Vice-Presidents  of  the  Association,  asking 
them  to  strive  to  influence  their  several 
State  legislatures  in  behalf  of  art  education, 
&c.  Also  to  ask  their  co-operation  in  re- 
moving the  debt  of  the  Association. 

The  Executive  Committee  now  have  a 
grave  responsibility  pressed  upon  them,  and 
hope  the  members  of  the  Association  will 
not  hamper  their  actions  by  keeping  them 
in  debt.     They  are  working  constantly  and 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


25 


earnestly  for  the  craft,  and  trust  to  you  to 
stand  by  them. 

AN    EXPLANATION. 

Louisville,  Ky.,  Dec.  20th,  1873. 
"  He  that  hath  ears  to  hear  let  him  hear," 
and  if  possible  understand  also,  Shaw's  pat- 
ent and  the  National  Photographic  Associa- 
tion. After  reading  the  communications 
thus  far  published  in  regard  to  the  action 
had  at  Buffalo,  and  after  having  received 
several  letters  bearing  upon  the  subject  from 
various  photographers  throughout  the  coun- 
try, I  am  convinced  that  what  was  done  at 
that  time  was  not  fully  understood,  and  that 
a  brief  explanation  is  called  for.  The  Na- 
tional Photographic  Association,  as  a  body, 
refused  to  entertain  or  to  act  upon  Mr. 
,Shaw's  propositions,  but  left  the  matter  to 
be  discussed  with  Mr.  Shaw  after  the  ad- 
journment of  the  session,  inviting  all  who 
felt  an  interest  in  the  matter  to  meet  at  7  p.m., 
at  which  time  he  (Mr.  Shaw)  would  have 
his  papers,  that  we  might  gain  information 
of  his  claim  or  claims,  in  order  to  enable  us, 
as  individuals,  to  act  understanding^  in  the 
premises,  for  be  it  known  that  a  very  large 
proportion  of  those  present  were  entirely 
ignorant  of  his  claims.  I  positively  knew 
nothing  of  them  whatever.  At  the  ap- 
pointed time  there  was  a  goodly  gathering, 
and  when  ready  for  business,  Mr.  Shaw 
stated  that  he  had  not  been  able  to  find  the 
papers  he  wanted,  whereupon  a  committee 
was  appointed  by  those  present  (and  not  by 
the  N.  P.  A.)  to  meet  Mr.  Shaw  at  another 
time,  when  he  would  be  ready  with  his 
papers.  This  committee  met  Mr.  Shaw  the 
nest  day,  and  the  result  of  that  conference 
can  be  seen  in  the  "supplement"  of  the 
September  number  of  the  Philadelphia  Pho- 
tographer. The  National  Photographic  As- 
sociation were  not  in  any  way  responsible 
for  the  action  of  this  committee.  The  whole 
object  was  to  bring  out  Mr.  Shaw's  whole 
claim,  and  nothing  more.  This  committee 
recommended  no  action  beyond  suggesting 
the  publication  of  Mr.  Shaw's  patent  in  full 
together  with  Mr.  Bell's  opinion  upon  its 
merits.  Now  when  the  accusation  comes  up 
"  that  your  committee  have  not  given  the 
matter  due  consideration,  and  have  acted  on 
a  supposition, "(&c,  &c,  I  see  that  the  object 


of  this  committee  is  not  understood.  We 
were  not  investigating  the  merits  of  Mr. 
Shaw's  claims,  and  by  reading  the  sugges- 
tion of  the  committee  again,  it  will  be  seen 
that  they  only  wanted  to  get  Mr.  Shaw's 
whole  claim  in  print,  that  all  could  study 
it,  and  then  when  approached  by  Mr.  Shaw 
on  the  subject  they  could,  as  individuals, 
treat  with  him  understandingly.  I  have  in 
my  possession  a  letter  from  an  intelligent 
gentleman  and  photographer,  in  which  ap- 
pears this  strange  passage,  viz.  :  "  I  believe 
you  are  on  the  committee  to  decide  whether 
the  Association  will  purchase  Shaw's  patent 
on  the  terms  which  he  proposed  at  the  Buf- 
falo Convention  or  not,  and  give  him  an 
answer  on  or  before  the  first  day  of  January, 
1874."  There  was  no  such  committee  ap- 
pointed, and  as  a  matter  of  course  I  could 
not  be  on  it.  There  is  still  another  point 
to  which  I  wish  to  call  attention.  In  rec- 
ommending all  to  treat  with  Mr.  Shaw  as 
individuals  it  was  not  contemplated  that 
they  should  do  so  in  communications  pub- 
lished in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer  or 
any  other  journal,  although  it  is  not  for  me 
to  dictate  a  course  to  be  pursued  by  any  one. 
I  simply  throw  out  this  suggestion. 

I.  B.  Webster. 

GERMAN  CORRESPONDENCE. 

The  Sensitiveness  of   Bromide  of   Silver   to 
Color — Abnormal  Stereoscojric  Pictures. 

The  Vienna  Exhibition  is  over.  Those 
who  have  visited  it  have  had  an  opportunity 
to  learn  ;  at  least  they  could  find  out  how 
many  things  should  not  be  done,  and  satis- 
fied or  dissatisfied,  according  to  the  ideas  of 
the  spectator,  we  return  to  our  everyday 
life.  I,  for  my  part,  feel  glad  that  I  can 
work  again  for  the  advancement  of  photog- 
raphy. Problems  are  not  wanting  ;  indeed, 
with  every  advancing  step  our  art  presents 
new  riddles  ;  such  a  riddle  is  now  before  me. 
A  short  time  ago  I  experimented  with  the 
colors  of  the  spectrum.  My  intention  was 
to  find  out  what  effect  an  alkaline  develop- 
ment had  on  the  plates.  My  experiments 
of  last  summer  had  convinced  me  that  this 
development  is  capable  of  showing  more  de- 
tail than  an  acid  development.     The  cause  of 


26 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


this  must  be  bromide  or  chloride  of  silver,  for 
it  is  well  known  that  the  alkaline  developer 
has  no  effect  on  iodide  of  silver.  Schultz- 
Sellack  has  made  a  special  study  of  the  action 
of  the  spectral  colors  on  iodide,  bromide,  and 
chloride  of  silver,  employing  the  ordinary 
acid  developer.  We  learned  through  him 
that  bromide  of  silver  is  affected  by  violet 
indigo  blue,  but  no  further,  for  he  says  its  ac- 
tion extends  nearly  to  the  spectral  line  F. 
This  line  is  situated  near  the  boundary  be- 
tween blue  and  green.  Judge  of  my  sur- 
prise when  experimenting  with  Wortley's 
bromine  collodion  and  an  alkaline  developer, 
I  found  that  the  action  had  extended  not 
only  into  the  blue,  but  even  beyond  into  the 
green  and  yellow,  and  only  stopped  when  red 
was  reached.  I  obtained  this  effect  with  ten 
minutes'  exposure,  whilst  Schultz-Sellack 
extends  the  time  of  exposure  sometimes  to 
fifteen  minutes.  This  effect,  extending  al- 
most to  the  red,  was  of  course  but  feeble, 
and  I  could  not  base  upon  it  a  hope  to  draw 
from  it  a  practical  advantage.  But  I  ob- 
served another  peculiarity  in  these  spectrum 
pictures,  which  has  not  been  noticed  before  ; 
a  more  energetic  action  had  taken  place  in 
the  green  (near  the  line  F)  than  in  the  blue 
(at  the  line  F).  This  shows  that  Wortley's 
plates  are  more  sensitive  to  green,  a  less  re- 
frangible color,  than  to  the  more  refrangible 
blue,  while  otherwise  we  are  accustomed  to 
assume  the  reverse. 

The  greatest  peculiarity  is  that  plates 
which  have  been  made  with  bromine  collo- 
dion and  the  silver  bath  do  not  show  this 
sensitiveness.  I  have  tried  this  repeatedly, 
both  with  acid  and  alkaline  development. 
The  sensitiveness  extended  much  further 
than  stated  by  Schultz-Sellack,  for  the  plates 
were  affected  as  far  as  F  (the  boundary  be- 
tween green  and  yellow),  but  the  sensitive- 
ness decreased  gradually  from  the  blue,  and 
of  an  increase  in  the  green  no  trace  was  no- 
ticeable. Although  I  do  not  know  as  yet  the 
reason  why  the  Wortley  plates  are  more  sen- 
sitive to  the  green  than  to  the  blue  (I  suppose 
that  the  amount  of  uranium  has  something 
to  do  with  it),  and  more  sensitive  than  ordi- 
nary bromine  plates,  still  it  is  important  to 
know  that  there  are  certain  preparations 
which  show  a  greater  sensitiveness  to  other- 
wise  ineffective  colors  than   our  ordinary 


plates,  and  we  may  hope  that  before  long 
we  will  have  plates  which  are  sensitive  to 
the  red  and  yellow  rays.  This  would  over- 
come the  disagreeable  abnormal  action  of 
colors,  which  not  only  disturb  us  in  tak- 
ing copies  of  oil-paintings,  but  also  in  por- 
traiture;  for  the  red  lips,  the  rosy  cheeks, 
the  blonde  hair,  not  to  mention  freckles,  &c, 
these  are  all  abnormal  colors,  and  we  would 
have  to  despair  if  it  was  not  for  the  retouch. 
Unfortunately,  at  the  present  season  of  the 
year,  sunlight  is  so  scarce  that  I  will  have 
to  postpone  further  investigation  to  some 
future  time.     More  anon. 

Peculiar  abnormalities  of  another  kind 
have  recently  been  noticed  by  Mr.  Hartman, 
the  worthy  successor  of  Mr.  Petsch.  A  few 
years  ago  one  of  their  correspondents  called 
attention  to  the  fact,  that  in  Loescher  & 
Petsch's  celebrated  stereo  "  Gems  of  Ger- 
man Life,"  the  figures  on  the  right  side  of  the 
picture  are  a  little  larger  than  those  on  the  left 
side,  and  asked  them  the  reason  why.  I  ex- 
plained it  by  the  difference  of  the  lenses  ;  one 
of  the  objectives  of  Loescher  &  Petsch's  cam- 
era has  a  longer  focus  than  the  other.  In 
the  "  Gems  of  German  Life  "the  difference 
is  small ;  one  set  of  the  figures  is  perhaps 
one-tenth  larger  than  the  other  set. 

Mr.  Hartman  exhibited  a  large  lot  of 
stereos  in  our  Society,  all  of  which  were 
faulty. 

On  the  left  half,  for  instance,  the  figures 
were  one-fourth  larger  than  on  the  right 
half,  and  the  two  halves  were  sometimes 
one  inch  too  far  apart ;  in  other  instances 
one  inch  too  close  together ;  in  others  the 
two  pictures  were  not  parallel  to  each  other  ; 
but,  strange  to  say,  all  these  pictures  com- 
bined in  the  stereoscope.  The  pictures  were 
plastic,  and  it  would  almost  seem  as  if  it 
was  not  necessary  to  be  so  very  particular 
in  mounting  these  prints ;  but  this  is  not 
the  case.  Although  all  these  faults,  men- 
tioned by  Mr.  Hartman,  did  not  interfere 
materially  with  the  stereoscopic  effect,  still 
there  are  many  stereos  offered  for  sale  which 
in  the  stereoscope  will  not  come  together 
except  by  an  enormous  exertion  of  the  eyes. 
It  is  not  easy  to  say  what  the  faults  are ;  in 
many  cases  the  camera  has  been  placed  in 
the  wrong  position.  In  landscape  pictures, 
for  instance,  the  position  of  the  camera  for 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


27 


the  left  picture  differs  sometimes  ten  feet 
and  more  from  the  position  for  the  right 
picture.  The  background  appears,  of  course, 
very  plastic,  hut  the  foreground  suffers,  and 
it  becomes  very  difficult  to  bring  the  two 
pictures  together.  Occasionally  something 
similar  happens  when  we  work  with  a 
camera  the  two  objectives  of  which  are 
placed  at  a  distance  equal  to  the  distance 
between  the  two  human  eyes,  and  this  is 
generally  considered  as  the  correct  method. 
Mr.  Prim  took  recently  a  bouquet  of  flowers 
with  such  a  camera,  the  bouquet  being 
placed  at  a  distance  of  ten  inches.  It  was 
difficult  to  bring  the  two  pictures  together, 
and  the  plastic  effect  was  exaggerated.  Mr. 
Hartman  explains  this,  and  perhaps  justly, 
by  seating  that  the  axes  of  the  two  eyes  in 
contemplating  such  an  object  converge 
considerably,  while  the  axis  of  the  lens  re- 
mains parallel ;  and  this  has  certainly  an 
influence  on  the  picture. 

Berlin,  Nov.  1,  1873. 

[The  above  letter  of  Dr.  Vo^el  reached  us  too 
late  for  our  December  issue. — Ed.] 

SECOND    LETTER. 

The  Sensitiveness  of  Bromide  of  Silver- 
to  ■  the  so-called  Non-actinic  Rays.  —  Be- 
fore I  commence  I  have  to  apologize  that 
in  this  letter  I  will  be  compelled  to 
speak  only  of  my  own  investigations.  My 
name  is  Vogel  (English,  bird),  and  as  the 
species  is  not  discernible  from  the  generic 
name,  everybody  is  at  liberty  to  call  me  to- 
day a  "'cuckoo,"  who  all  the  time  speaks  of 
himself.  To  quiet  the  apprehension  of  the 
reader,  I  will  say,  however,  that  I  will  not 
speak  of  my  person  but  of  my  latest  experi- 
ments, which  had  for  their  object,  to  see  if 
the  photographically  ineffective  red  and 
yellow  colors  could  not  be  made  effective. 
These  experiments  have  led  to  results  which 
may  be  of  importance  to  the  progress  of 
photography. 

The  yellow,  red,  and  blue  colors  have  al- 
ways been  the  bugbear  of  photographers. 
The  dark  appeared  light  in  the  picture  if  it 
was  blue,  the  bright  appeared  dark  in  the 
picture  if  it  was  yellow,  green,  or  red ;  all 
this  is  well  known,  and  I  have  only  to  men- 
tion incidentally  blue  eyes,  which  appear 
watery  pale;  blonde  hair,  which  often  looks 
black,  and  the  more  golden  it  is  the  blacker  ; 


yellow  freckles,  which  look  like  dark  spots, 
in  order  to  demonstrate  the  difficulties 
which  colors  cause  us  in  photography,  not 
to  mention  blue  and  yellow  dresses  with 
red  or  green  trimmings. 

I  also  call  attention  to  the  results  which 
we  obtain  in  landscape  photography,  from 
a  blue  sky  with  white  clouds,  from  green 
trees  and  a  yellow  glowing  sunset.  If  by  a 
carefully  selected  time  of  exposure,  skilful 
manipulation,  and  negative  retouch,  we 
overcome  some  of  these  abnormal  actions  of 
colors,  still  we  cannot  remove  the  effects  en- 
tirely ;  they  are  there,  and  it  is  only  neces- 
sary to  compare  a  photographic  copy  of  an 
oil  painting  with  the  original,  to  see  at  once 
the  faulty  action  of  color.  My  friend 
Petsch  declared  a  year  ago,  that  he  would 
turn  his  back  on  photography,  as  it  did  not 
come  up  to  his  ideal ;  it  would  always  be 
hampered  by  the  action  of  color.  At 
that  time  I  did  not  believe  myself  that  we 
would  overcome  this  difficulty  so  easily  ;  to- 
day I  can  state  with  certainty,  that  it  is 
possible  to  fix  the  so-called  inactinic  colors, 
yellow,  red,  and  green,  as  effectively  as  blue 
and  violet.  In  my  last  letter  I  communi- 
cated to  you  the  results  of  my  investigations 
with  Wortley's  bromide  of  silver  plates. 
I  found  when  I  exposed  these  plates  to 
the  solar  spectrum,  that  they  were  more 
sensitive  to  the  green  light  than  blue,  and 
I  inclined  to  the  belief  that  this  was  owing 
to  the  action  of  the  alkaline  developer  which 
is  employed  with  these  plates.  To  ascertain 
this  fact  I  tried  the  acid  developer  with 
sulphate  of  iron  and  nitrate  of  silver,  and 
the  result  remained  the  same  ;  the  alkaline 
developer  could  therefore  not  be  the  cause. 
In  order  to  determine  this  question  definitely 
I  prepared  some  bromide  of  silver  plates 
myself,  and  exposed  these  to  the  spectrum  ; 
there  was  some  action  in  the  green,  but  not 
stronger  than  in  the  blue  ;  on  the  contrary, 
it  was  feebler.  I  soon  found  the  solution  of 
the  riddle.  I  experimented  with  iodide  of 
silver  and  bromide  of  silver  plates,  and  I 
soon  noticed  that  the  bromide  of  silver  dry 
plates  had  a  slight  but  much  further  ex- 
tending sensitiveness  for  yellow  and  red 
than  the  wet  ones.  No  doubt  remained, 
that  the  coating  of  the  plates  exercised  an 
influence   on   the    sensitiveness  for   color. 


28 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Schultz-Sellack  states  that  the  sensitiveness 
of  hromide  of  silver  extends  only  as  far  as 
the  line  F  of  the  spectrum,  i.  e.,  for  light  blue 
but  not  for  green  ;  on  the  other  hand,  Draper 
and  others  have  maintained  that  bromide 
of  silver  is  sensitive  to  green.  Stuart 
Wortley  recommends  great  caution  in 
working  with  bromide  of  silver  plates,  and 
to  exercise  particular  care  in  lighting  the 
dark-room;  and  indeed,  when  I  exposed 
bromide  of  silver  plates  to  the  spectrum,  I 
found  them  sensitive  to  all  the  colors,  even 
to  red.  Fortunately  this  sensitiveness  is  but 
slight,  and  with  care  we  have  little  to  fear. 
This  feeble  sensitiveness  for  red  and  yellow 
which  I  have  established,  is  therefore  of  but 
secondary  interest ;  the  case,  however,  is  dif- 
ferent with  green,  in  so  far  as  the  sensitive- 
ness of  the  Wortley  plates  for  this  color  is 
greater  than  for  blue.  My  experiments 
with  iodide  and  bromide  of  silver,  led  me 
at  once  to  suppose  that  the  coating  of  the 
Wortley  plates  must  have  something  to  do 
with  it,  and  in  order  to  determine  this  point, 
I  washed  a  plate  with  alcohol  and  water  be- 
fore exposing  it ;  the  sensitiveness  for  green 
had  disappeared.  Still  more  was  I  surprised, 
that  several  plates  which  had  been  sent  to 
me  from  England,  did  not  show  this  pecu- 
liar sensitiveness  either. 

To  my  mind  there  remained  no  doubt 
that  the  sensitiveness  of  photographic  plates 
for  color  is  influenced  by  the  coating,  be  it 
nitrate  of  silver  or  some  other  preservative. 
Last  year  I  published  a  number  of  investi- 
gations of  sensitizers.  I  showed  that  if  a 
substance  was  employed  to  make  a  photo- 
graphic film  more  sensitive,  for  instance, 
iodide  of  silver,  it  ought  to  possess  two 
qualities:  first,  it  ought  to  be  capable  of  bind- 
ing iodine  chemically  ;  secondly,  it  ought 
to  absorb  the  light  which  acts  photographi- 
cally on  the  plate.  An  example  is  pyrogallic 
acid.  If  a  solution  of  pyrogallic  acid  is  put 
upon  a  dry  iodide  of  silver  plate,  the  latter 
does  not  become  more  sensitive  but  less  so, 
because  the  plate  is  made  more  transparent 
by  the  pyrogallic  acid,  and  allows  the 
chemical  rays  to  pass  through  it.  If,  how- 
ever, the  solution  is  allowed  to  dry,  the 
plates  which  have  been  impregnated  with 
pyrogallic  acid  show  a  greater  sensitiveness 
than  the  others,  for  now  the  plates  absorb 


the  chemical  light  powerfully,  and  the  pyro- 
gallic acid  at  the  same  time  favors  decom- 
position, by  absorbing  the  iodine  which  is 
set  free  through  the  action  of  light.  Optical 
and  chemical  absorption  should  hence  go 
hand  in  hand  in  order  to  qualify  a  substance 
for  a  sensitizer. 

After  knowing  all  this  I  had  a  right  to 
suppose,  that  a  substance  which  was  capable 
of  absorbing  green  light  to  a  greater  degree 
than  the  blue,  while  it  at  the  same  time  fixed 
chemically,  iodine  and  bromine,  would  also 
be  capable  of  increasing  the  sensitiveness 
for  green.  I  did  not  find  such  a  substance 
at  once ;  I  examined  several  d3restuffs  with 
the  spectroscope,  and  found  one  which  ab- 
sorbs the  yellow  light  to  a  greater  extent 
than  the  blue;  this  substance  is  coralline. 
If  my  theory  was  correct,  this  substance 
when  placed  upon  a  bromine  plate  ought  to 
increase  its  sensitiveness  for  yellow.  I 
made  the  experiment,  and  to  my  great  joy 
I  found  my  supposition  confirmed.  The 
plate  which  had  been  prepared  with  coral- 
line was  sensitive  to  the  indigo  of  the  spec- 
trum! From  here  the  sensitiveness  decreased 
until  light-blue  was  reached,  from  whence 
it  gradually  increased  and  became  in  yellow 
as  powerful  as  in  indigo.  I  had  succeeded 
in  preparing  a  plate  which  was  as  sensitive  to 
yellow,  which  has  heretofore  been  considered 
as  inert,  as  to  blue,  formerly  considered  the 
most  energetically  acting  color.  But,  you  will 
say,  one  experiment  is  no  experiment.  I 
state,  therefore,  that  I  have  prepared  plate 
after  plate  with  coralline,  and  the  result 
has  been  always  the  same.  Yes,  more,  I 
found  a  sample  of  commercial  coralline 
which  was  distinguished  by  an  extraordi- 
nary powerful  absorption  of  yellow  light. 
I  coated  a  prepared  plate  with  this  specimen 
of  coralline,  and  to  my  surprise  I  obtained 
a  picture  of  the  solar  spectrum,  which  was 
interrupted.  The  sensitiveness  decreased 
from  indigo  to  blue,  stopped  at  the  boundary 
of  blue  and  green  entirely,  i.  e.,  at  the  line 
F.  Here  the  plate  had  not  been  affected  at 
all.  The  action  commenced  again  where  the 
yellow  light  of  the  spectrum  had  fallen  upon 
the  plate,  and  continued  as  far  as  the  red. 

This  placed  my  supposition  beyond  the 
pale  of  doubt,  and  I  tried,  after  having 
made  a  collodion  sensitive  to  yellow  light, 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


29 


how  I  might  prepare  one  sensitive  to  red 
light.  Different  materials  were  examined 
with  the  spectroscope ;  finally  I  found  an 
anilin  green  which  absorbed  the  red  of  the 
spectrum  with  great  energy.  A  bromide 
collodion  was  treated  at  once  with  this  ani- 
lin green,  and  plates  prepared  with  it. 
My  hopes  were  realized.  The  plates  proved 
sensitive  as  far  as  the  red  color  of  the  spec- 
trum. The  picture  of  the  spectrum  was 
very  curious.  The  action  of  the  indigo 
color  and  blue  was  very  strong,  but  gradu- 
ally decreased  towards  the  green,  and  dis- 
appeared in  the  yellow  almost  entirely  ;'  in 
the  orange  it  recommenced  again  slightly, 
and  became  very  energetic  in  the  red. 

After  all  these  experiments,  I  believe 
that  I  am  entitled  to  the  conclusion  that 
we  are  able  to  make  bromide  of  silver  sen- 
sitive to  any  color;  it  is  only  necessary  to 
add  to  the  bromide  of  silver  a  substance 
which  absorbs  the  color  in  question,  and 
which  at  the  same  time  promotes  the  chem- 
ical decomposition  of  bromide  of  silver  by 
light.  It  is  well  known  that  even  beyond 
the  red,  invisible  raj's  exist,  as  well  as  be- 
yond the  violet ;  the  latter  exert  a  strong 
chemical  action — not  so  the  former ;  but  I 
feel  strongly  convinced  now  that  it  will  be 
easy  to  make  them  chemically  effective. 
The  term  actinic  and  nonactinic  does  not 
exist  any  longer.  In  order  to  find  in  how 
far  this  has  been  practically  confirmed,  I 
made  the  following  experiment. 

The  picture  of  a  blue  ribbon'  on  a  yellow 
background  was  taken.  "With  an  ordinary 
iodide  of  silver  plate  I  obtained  a  (positive) 
picture,  representing  a  white  ribbon  on  a 
black  background.  A  coralline  bromide  of 
silver  plate  was  tried  next.  It  was  natural 
that  on  such  a  plate  the  blue  and  yellow 
should  be  marked  equally  strong,  and  the 
result  would  have  been  nothing.  I  now 
placed  in  front  of  the  objective  a  piece  of 
yellow  glass;  through  this  plate  all  the 
yellow  light  could  pass,  but  not  so  the 
blue ;  and  I  now  obtained  actually  a  strong 
impression  of  the  yellow  color — in  fact,  the 
result  was  a  positive,  representing  a  dark 
ribbon  on  a  light  background. 

So  far  as  my  experiments  have  extended, 
they  have  established  the  principle  accord- 
ing  to   which,  photographic   films   can   be 


made  sensitive  to  so-called  nonactinic  colors. 
It  will  require,  of  course,  numerous  experi- 
ments, in  order  to  establish  those  conditions 
which  necessarily  have  to  be  observed  to 
make  this  new  invention  practically  useful. 

You  may  perhaps  ask  if  I  have  made 
also  experiments  with  iodide  of  silver. 
This  is  actually  the  case,  but  it  has  not 
proved  as  advantageous  as  bromide  of  sil- 
ver, and  has  besides  the  drawback  that  it 
is  too  sensitive  to  blue  light ;  the  latter 
can,  however,  be  diminished.  If,  for  in- 
stance, we  wash  an  iodide  of  silver  plate, 
its  sensitiveness  for  blue  is  considerably 
lessened,  but  it  still  remains  strong  enough 
to  exceed  that  for  any  other  color.  Curious 
it  is  that  a  washed  iodide  of  silver  plate 
displays  a  different  sensitiveness  for  color 
than  a  fresh  one,  and  the  latter  differs 
again  from  a  dry  plate. 

"With  the  aid  of  the  photographic  spec- 
tral analysis  we  approach  the  solution  of 
the  riddle  of  the  dry  process,  and  further 
investigation  will  probably  furnish  very 
interesting  results  for  the  practice  of  pho- 
tography. Yours,  very  truly, 

Dr.  H.  Yogel. 
Berlin,  Dee.  1,  1873. 


VIEWS  ABROAD  AND  ACROSS. 

BY  EDWARD   L.    WILSON. 
I. 


#HEN  I 
left  my 
desk  in 
August 
last   for 

A  broken-down  photographer.  a     jour- 

ney across  the  water  and  a  ramble  among 
the  things  abroad,  my  condition  was  much 
like  that  of  an  overdeveloped  negative, 
i.  e.,  my  image  was  flat  and  weak,  and  lacked 
strength.  I  kicked  against  work,  on  account 
of  having  had  too  much  of  it  to  do,  and  work 
retaliated  and  kicked  against  me,  as  it  does 
always  against  a  broken-down  photographer. 
Moreover,  the  desire  to  be  useful  in  the  in- 
terests of  photography  on  the  occasion  of 
our  great  Centennial  Exposition  in  1876 
gave  me  the  desire  "to  see  how  they  do 
things  in  Yienna,"  and  under  all  the  circum- 


30 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


stances  I  concluded  that  the  very  best  thing 
I  could  do  would  be  to  lay  down  the  pen, 
kick  over  the  tripod  and  give  it  a  rest,  and 
make  a  journey  abroad.  To  guard  against 
defrauding  my  subscribers  in  thus  absenting 
myself,  I  promised  inwardly  that  I  would 
devote  myself  to  their  interests  as  much  as 
possible  while  I  was  away,  and  keep  an 
eye  and  a  note-book  always  ready  for  their 
service.  This  I  did;  and  dropping  the  cus- 
tomary editorial  garb — we — that  I  may 
write  more  freely,  I  will  endeavor  to  give 
more  details  of  what  I  saw  than  I  could 
give  in  the  letters  written  while  away.  You 
must  also  forget  the  customary  editorial 
dignity,  and  look  upon  these  chaptei-s  as 
coming  from  one  of  your  number,  for  that 
I  am.  I  will  pour  the  whole  journey  into 
a  funnel  with  a  very  dense  filter  and  give 
you  the  residue,  not  promising,  however,  to 
be  strictly  photographic  always,  though  I 
shall  strive  to  adhere  to  the  -picturesque  gen- 
erally. I  shall  not  soon  forget  the  leave- 
taking  that  preceded  my  departure.  Presi- 
dent Bogardus  and  members  of  his  family, 
and  Mr.  W.  Irving  Adams,  of  Scovill 
Manufacturing  Company,  were  good  enough 
to  come  to  the  dock  to  wave  a  parting  salute. 
Some  delay  occurred  in  the  sailing  of  the 
"Cuba,"  and  a  storm  came  up  which 
"spoiled  the  hilarity  of  the  occasion."     As 


As  the  great  ship  moved  down  New  York  Bay. 
the  great  ship  moved  down  New  York  Bay 
the  last  thing  I  saw  was  these  good  friends; 
and  Mr.  Adams  particularly,  who  stood 
crouched  behind  a  great  wharf-post  waving 
his  handkerchief  until  we  could  see  each 
other  no  longer,  for  to  be  equal  with  him,  I 
stood  astern  in  the  rain  until  my  handker- 
chief must  have  appeared  very  small  to  those 
"  I  left  behind  me  " 

After  two  days  the  voyage  was  a  most 
agreeable  one  (for  those  who  like  sea-voyages 
— I  do  not),  and  as  descriptions  of  sea- 
voyages  are  monotonous,  I  will  leave  mine 
to  conjecture,  and  at  once  jump  ashore  on 
the  other  side  of  the  Atlantic. 


I  was  the  first  of  the  passengers  or  crew 
to  step  ashore,  which  was  at  Queenstown, 
Ireland,  and  as  I  did  so  I  began  to  feel  my 
promise,  and  soon  realized  the  fact  that 
when  one  goes  to  Europe  as  I  did,  with 
limited  time  and  a  desire  to  see  all  that  could 
be  seen  in  that  time,  the  thought  that  there 
are  three  or  four  thousand  at  home  who  ex- 
pect a  report  of  all  seen  useful  and  interest- 
ing in  their  profession,  he  feels  very  much 
as  if  he  was  tied  to  somebody's  apron-string. 
This  feeling  I  had  during  my  whole  journey, 
and  as  soon  as  I  set  foot  on  dry  land  I  be- 
gan to  hunt  up  "subjects."  Europe  is,- of 
course,  most  interesting  to  a  stranger,  and 
although  we  are  all  accustomed  to  seeing 
people  of  all  nations  living  among  us,  yet 
there  is  nothing  like  seeing  them  in  their 
"native  element."  If  you  love  the  pic- 
turesque there  is  much  there  to  gratify  you. 
I  recognized  the  "Irish  language"  imme- 
diately in  the  first  out- 
burst which  I  heard  of  it. 
It  came  from  the  lips  of  a 
model  boy,  a  genuine  spe- 
cimen, who  wanted  "a 
copper,  sir,  to  pay  for  a 
night's  lodgin'."  This  re- 
quest was  made  with  so 
much  real  modest  good 
nature  and  sweetness  that  I  stopped  to  con- 
verse with  the  young  gentleman. 
Alas!  forme.  No  sooner  done  than 
a  troop  of  others  gathered  around, 
repeating  the  same  request.  I  had  to 
give  them  all  employment  eventually, 
declaring  it  to  be  against  my  prin- 
ciples to  encourage  idleness.  My 
model  said  he  "  could  sing,  sir,"  so  I  got 
him  to  sing  while  I  took  his  picture,  and 
gave  the  others  something  to  do.  As  I  have 
before  stated,  my  jaunt  through  Ireland  was 
only  a  brief  one.  Dublin  was  my  objective 
point  there,  and  I  found  scarcely  a  more  in- 
teresting city  in  my  whole  journey.  The 
people  seemed  to  have  the  idea  that  Ameri- 
cans are  constitutionally  weak,  or  else  it 
was  their  extreme  politeness  that  caused 
one  to  be  greeted  on  all  sides  with  "  Will  ye 
ride,  sir?"  from  all  sorts  of  people,  with  all 
sorts  of  vehicles,  and  all  sorts  of  animals  to 
drag  them.  The  donkey  is  one  of  the  prin- 
cipal productions,  and  "never  dies."     The 


A  model  boy. 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTO  GKAPHER, 


31 


streets  are  full  of  genre  pictures,  and  abound 
in  food  for  the  camera,  and  so  is  it  with  the 
country  itself.  The  little  thatched  cottages, 
the  old  castles,  the  drooping,  dreamy, 
mossy  foliage,  the  luxuriant  ivy,  the  verdant 
hedges,  and  the  tiny  fields,  the  little  lakes 
and  the  rivers  are  all  most  picturesque.  Ire- 
land is  beautiful!  After  leaving  it;  a  day 
or  two  in  Scotland;  and  as  much  in  London 
and  Paris,  to  which  places  we  shall  return, 
I  proceeded  to  Brussels,  which  is  Paris  in 
miniature.  While  it  is  full  of  beautiful 
new  streets  and  boulevards,  and  magnificent 
structures  of  modern  build,  there  is  so  much 
of  the  old-time  people  and  of  the  old-fash- 
ioned buildings  left,  that  one  has  constant 
enjoyment  in  whatever  direction  he  may 
travel.  I  also  made  my  first  acquaintance 
with  the  "old  masters"  here,  for  in  Brus- 
sels are  several  extensive  galleries,  where 
are  some  handsome  works  of  art.  But  in 
the  streets  one  may  see  the  gayest  equipages 
filled  with  fashionable  people,  flying  along, 
and  the  drollest  looking  dog-carts  driven  by 
the  most  primitive-looking  peasantry  ;  side 
by  side,  with  the  gayest  of  the  gay,  in  the 
richest  promenades,  we  see  the  old  Flemish 
people  with  their  rude  costumes  and  their 
wooden  shoes.  To  see  girls  dressed  in  the 
clothing  of  the  other  sex  is  no  novelty.  I 
saw  a  great  girl  of  fourteen,  bare-headed, 
and  with  long  plaits 
down  to  her  waist, 
walking  leisurely 
along  the  street, 
knitting,  and  dress- 
f)  ed  in  a  masculine 
~n  garb, apparently  the 
■O    clothes  of  a  larger 

brother.    Herwood- 
A  great  girl  of  fourteen.  .  _, 

en  shoes  were  suffi- 
ciently large  for  a  silver  saving  apparatus. 
Full  of  such  scenes  as  these  are  the  streets 
of  Brussels.  In  architecture,  too.  there  is 
much  to  delight  one — the  magnificent  old 
Gothic  Hotel  de  Ville,  the  new  Bourse,  the 
grand  old  churches  with  their  carved  work 
and  sculpture,  &c,  &c. ,  are  all  superb. 

Photography  there  is  carried  to  a  very 
high  state  of  perfection.  The  carbon  pro- 
cess, the  burnt-in  enamel  process,  and  the 
enlargement  of  pictures  are  practiced  con- 
siderably.    I,  saw  some  beautiful  portraits, 


and  inspected  several  establishments.  The 
studios  are,  in  construction,  much  like  our 
own.  Accessories  are  used  to  a  much  greater 
degree,  as  well  as  fancy  backgrounds,  than 
in  America,  and  all  of  a  more  expensive 
and  eleirant  character. 


The  chemical  manipulations  are  identical 
with  our  own,  except,  perhaps,  in  their 
manner  of  sensitizing  the  negative  plate. 
The  horizontal  bath  is  much  used,  being- 
preferred  to  the  vertical  form.  It  is  claimed 
that  it  is  much  more  easily  kept  in  order 
than  the  vertical  bath,  and  much  cleaner 
work  can  be  made  with  it.  As  shown  in 
the  figure,  the  solution  fills  part  of  the  dish 
only,  and  when  the  plate  is  immersed,  one 
end  of  the  dish  is  lifted,  and  the  solution 
made  to  move  back  and  forth  over  the  plate. 
When  sensitized,  the  plate  is  lifted  from  the 
bath  by  means  of  a  silver  hook,  applied  at 
one  corner,  or  else  by  means  of  a  dipper, 
with  which  it  is  also  let  down  into  the  bath. 
When  not  in  use,  of  course  the  dish  should 
be  covered. 

This  much  for  the  present.  The  week 
thus  far  spent  was  only  a  prelude  to  the 
route  which  I  mapped  out  for  myself,  and 
I  hope  to  make  my  record  more  interesting 
when  I  come  to  places  where  I  had  more 
time  to  see  and  to  make  notes  of  what  I  saw. 


Mr.  B.  W.  Kilburn,  of  Kiiburn  Brothers, 
Littleton,  N.  H.,  has  made  two  trips  to  the  summit 
of  Mount  Washington  during  this  season,  and 
returned  with  some  exquisite  results.  We  do 
not  think  we  ever  saw  such  softness  with  such 
detail  and  delicacy  as  these  pictures  possess,  in 
any  photographs  of  white  objects.  They  are 
simply  perfect,  and  considering  the  circumstances 
under  which  they  were  made,  are  wonderful 
triumphs  for  our  art.  The  frost  feathers  are 
superb. 


32 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGKAPHEK. 


Items  op  News. — Many  are  out  of  situations 
now.  Employ  them  who  can.  See  advertise- 
ments in  "Situations  Wanted"  column  in  Spe- 
cialties— Messrs.  E.  L.  Allen  and  Frank  Rowell, 
two  of  the  best  photographers  in  Boston,  have 
formed  a  copartnership,  and  have  recently  opened 
new  and  beautiful  apartments  at  No.  25  Winter 
Street.  We  wish  them  great  success. — Mr.  H. 
L.  Bingham,  late  of  Kalamazoo,  Michigan,  has 
removed  to  San  Antonio,  Texas,  where  he  is 
about  to  engage  in  business. — Such  men  as  Mr. 
Alfred  Hall,  of  Chicago,  deserve  great  credit  for 
the  pains  they  take  to  instruct  their  fellow- 
members.  Mr.  Hall's  lecture  on  Chemistry  (see 
Society  Gossip)  was  a  credit  to  him,  and  to  the 
Society  with  which  he  is  connected. — We  have 
a  letter  from  a  man  whose  "  hole  sole  is  raped  up 
in  potography, "  and  who  wants  to  "learn  the 
bisnes." — Mr.  John  R.  Clemons  asks  us  not  to 
notice  his  paper  anymore.  Says  "it  is  good 
enough  without." — Mr.  L.  M.  Melander  is  about 
to  open  a  new  gallery  at  No.  88  North  Clark 
Street,  Chicago. — Mr.  Lyman  Shepard,  late 
operator  with  Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  West 
Virginia,  committed  suicide  last  month. — The 
Emperor  of  Austria  was  presented  with  the  pho- 
tographs of  Mr.  Landy's  babies,  exhibited  at 
Vienna,  and  took  them  away  in  his  own  carriage. 
He  seemed  to  be  much  pleased  with  them. — As 
Mr.  Simpson  states  in  his  "Notes,"  Mr.  W.  G. 
Starke,  of  Zanesville,  Ohio,  sent  enlargements  to 
compete  for  the  Crawshay  prize,  but  they  arrived 
too  late. 


Pictures  Received. — We  have  samples  of 
their  work  from  Messrs.  Tuttle,  Belfast,  Maine  ; 
Taylor,  San  Francisco  ;  and  Johnson  &  Glenton, 
Nashua,  N.  H.  They  all  show  wonderful  prog- 
ress in  their  work,  and  deserve  great  credit  for 
trying  to  excel. 


Mr.  C.  D.  Mosher,  951  Wabash  Avenue, 
Chicago,  has  sent  us  some  admirable  specimens 
of  photography,  of  cabinet  size,  which  were  a 
surprise  to  us.  for  only  a  few  years  ago  Mr. 
Mosher  could  not  send  forth  such  work  from  his 
place.  Mr.  D.  H.  Cross  is  his  operator,  Mr. 
Fred.  Wingard  his  printer,  and  Mr.  S.  Carr  his 
retoucher,  all  of  whom  he  gives  their  full  credit 
for  their  share  of  the  work  very  generously. 


Messrs.  J.  W.  &  J.  S.  Moulton,  Salem,  Mass., 
have  sent  us  some  excellent  stereographs  of  Wash- 


ington, White  Mountains,  Yosemite  Valley,  snow 
scenes,  &c,  which  are  examples  of  choice  work. 
They  publish  a  long  list  of  such. 


Mr.  J.  H.  Fitzgibbon,  St.  Louis,  Mo.,  has 
been  turning  his  attention  to  stereoscopic  work, 
and  has  sent  us  some  excellent  prints  from  his 
negatives.  His  views  of  the  New  Bridge  and  of 
the  Synagogue  are  particularly  excellent. 


The  Philadelphia  Ledger,  of  December  19tb, 
gives  our  fraternity  a  long  and  complimentary 
article  under  the  title  of  "  Good  for  the  Photog- 
raphers," which  we  shall  publish  entire  in  our 
next.  A  few  such  encouraging  words  as  it  gives 
from  the  press  would  encourage  the  advance- 
ment of  our  art  amazingly.     More  anon. 


The  American  Institute  awarded  a  silver  medal 
to  the  American  Photo-Relief  Printing  Co.  (Mr. 
J.  Carbutt,  superintendent)  for  Woodbury  prints 
on  paper  and  glass. 


We  have  received  Vick's  Floral  Guide,  first 
number,  for  1874,  which  contains  200  pages; 
500  engravings,  and  a  colored  plate.  Published 
quarterly,  at  twenty-five  cents  a  year.  A  Ger- 
man edition  at  same  price.  James  Vick,  Ro- 
chester, N.  Y.,  is  the  publisher.  This  catalogue 
is  a  work  of  art. 


Postponement. — Owing  to  the  fact  that  our 
photographic  friends  are  so  busy  during  the 
holidays,  we  have  concluded  to  postpone  our 
anniversary  celebration.  Send  in  your  applica- 
tions for  tickets,  and  you  will  be  duly  apprised 
of  the  time.  

Important  Discovery  by  Dr.  Vogel. — Our 
readers  will  notice  with  much  interest  the  an- 
nouncement which  Dr.  Vogel  makes  in  the  "  Ger- 
man Correspondence,"  of  his  discovery  that  the 
nonactinic  rays  may  be  made  actinic.  We  look 
anxiously  for  more  details  of  his  experiments,  and 
congratulate  him  on  what  he  has  done. 


Our  Premiums. — Our  readers  will  notice  sev- 
eral new  features  introduced  in  our  magazine 
this  month.  Will  they  not  please  use  these  to 
aid  them  in  securing  new  subscribers,  and  thus 
make  great  demands  upon  us  for  premiums? 


The  tenth  public  exhibition  of  the  French 
Photographic  Society  opens  May  1st,  1874.  We 
will  send  a  copy  of  the  regulations  to  all  intend- 
ing exhibitors.     No  time  to  be  lost. 


ADVERTISING  RATES  FOR  SPECIAETIES — It  will  be  understood  that  matter  under 
this  head  is  not  to  be  considered  as  always  having  editorial  sanction,  though  we  shall  endeavor  to  clear  it 
of  anything  tending  to  deceive  or  mislead.  Stockdealers  will  find  this  a  beneficial  mode  of  advertising, 
and  sure  to  pay  largely.  Six  lines,  one  insertion,  $2.00,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words 
to  a  line— in  advance.  Operators  desiring  situations,  no  charge.  Matter  must  be  received  by  the  23rd 
to  secure  insertion.  Advertisers  will  please  not  ask  us  for  recommendations.  *S=-  We  cannot  undertake 
to  mail  answers  to  parties  who  advertise.    Please  always  add  your  address  to  the  advertisement. 


Wanted. — A  photographic  operator  j  must 
be  capable  of  doing  good  work.  To  one  that 
will  suit  a  permanent  situation  and  good  salary 
is  offered.  Good  recommendation  will  be  re- 
quired. Call,  or  address  W.  G.  Entrekin, 
4382  and  4384  Main  St.,  Manayunk,  Phila.,  Pa. 


Important  to  every  Photog- 
rapher in  the  country.  See 
advt.  on  another  page  of  the 
Photographers'  Exchange. 

For  Sale  at  a  Bargain. — $1000  cash  will 
buy  my  gallery  in  Athens,  Ga.  It  is  well  equip- 
ped for  first-class  work,  and  enjoys  the  first-class 
patronage  of  the  city  and  surrounding  country. 
No  first-class  opposition.  The  city  has  a  popu- 
lation of  about  5000  inhabitants.  The  Univer- 
sity of  Georgia  is  situated  there,  with  an  average 
attendance  of  about  300  students  ;  also,  a  female 
college  and  other  high  schools,  all  in  a  flourish- 
ing condition.  It  is  the  best  opening  for  an  en- 
terprising man  in  the  South.  The  gallery  has 
been  established  eight  years,  and  is  located  on 
the  best  street,  and  in  the  center  of  business, 
and  opposite  the  University.  The  climate  of 
Athens  is  unsurpassed,  and  it  is  considered  the 
healthiest  city  in  the  State.  My  reason  for  sell- 
ing is  that  my  time  is  wholly  taken  up  with  my 
business  in  Atlanta. 

I  will  sell  for  $1000  cash  ;  or,  if  the  party 
prefers,  $600  cash,  balance  on  time  to  suit,  with 
security  and  ten  per  cent,  interest.  Parties 
meaning  business  will  please  address 

C.  W.  Motes,  Photographer, 

Atlanta,  Ga. 


Use  Mardock  &  Co.'s 
New  Compound  Developer. 


For  Sale. — First-class  photograph  gallery. 
Best  location,  best  light  in  town,  handsome 
rooms,  well  furnished,  established  three  years. 
Prices,  $5  per  dozen  cards.  $3  for  4-4.  Without 
instruments,  $400.  For  particulars  address 
Photographer,  A.  C, 

Kansas  City,  Mo. 


Wilson's   Baltimore   Stock 
Depot,   7   North   Charles   St. 
Try  an  order. 
ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK 


LANTERN  SLIDES  AT  50  CENTS.— Choice 
American,  Foreign,  and  Miscellaneous  Views, 
clear  and  brilliant  with  any  light.  Neatly 
mounted,  three  inches  diameter,  and  in  any 
quantity,  at  50  cents  each.  Send  for  catalogue. 
Also,  an  improved  Oil  Lamp  for  any  lantern. 
Wm.  R.  Brooks,  Phelps,  N.  Y. 


Opinion  on  the  Weston  Patent. 

For  the  benefit  of  those  interested  we  publish 
the  following  : 

Bangor,  Nov.  17th,  1873. 

Hon.  J.  P.  Bass. — Sir:  The  question  sub- 
mitted to  me,  as  to  whether  the  stoppage  of  one 
roll  of  the  Excelsior  Roll  Press,  and  its  use  in 
polishing  photographs,  either  with  or  without 
heat,  would  infringe  the  Weston  reissued  patent 
of  February,  1873,  for  a  burnisher  for  photo 
graphs,  <fcc. ,  has  received  my  attention.  Basing 
my  opinion  on  the  specification  and  claims  of 
said  reissue,  which  is  prima  facie  valid,  I  do  not 
hesitate  to  pronounce  said  alteration  and  use  an 
infringement  of  each  and,  if  heat  is  used,  all  the 
claims. 

Stopping  one  roll  of  said  press  and  feeding  the 
card  over  it  by  revolving  the  other,  polishing  it 
in  its  passage,  is  covered  by  the  first  claim  of  the 
reissue.  It  produces  a  "  burnishing  machine  by 
which  a  surface  is  given  to  the  article  to  be  pol- 
ished, by  feeding  it  under  pressure  over  the  sur- 
face of  a  stationary  burnisher,"  and  such  ma- 
chine is  what  Weston  claims.  Stopping  the  roll 
converts  it  into  a  "stationary  burnisher'' — as 
far  as  its  operation  on  the  picture  is  concerned — 
its  shape  being  a  matter  of  no  consequence,  and 
the  combination  of  this  stopped  roll  with  the 
revolving  one  is  substantially  the  combination 
of  the  feed  roll  and  stationary  burnisher  set  forth 
in  the  second  claim  of  the  reissue.  Heating  the 
stationary  roll  introduces  into  the  combination 
the  elements  which  Weston's  third  claim  is  based 
upon. 

I  consider  the  device  as  simply  a  colorable 
variation  of  Weston's  machine,  performing  sub- 
stantially the  same  work  in  substantially  the 
same  way,  and  should  advise  the  prosecution  of 
infringing  parties,  having  confidence  in  the 
validity  of  the  patent,  and  believing  that  it  will 
be  sustained  by  the  courts. 
Very  respectfully, 

William  Franklin  Seavey, 
Counsellor  at  Law  and  in  Patent  Cases. 

AND  MOSAICS,  1873,  $4.50. 


To  Photographers  using  the 
Weston  Burnisher. 

Do  not  use  gum  in  India  ink  for  touching  out 
spots  on  cards  to  be  burnished. 

A  lubricator,  highly  recommended  by  some 
photographers,  is  composed  of  one  grain  white 
Castile  soap  dissolved  in  four  ounces  of  very  thin 
plain  collodion,  or  the  mount  can  be  coated  with 
thin  plain  collodion  before  mounting. 


The  Photographers'  Ex- 
chage.  See  advertisement 
on  another  page. 


Jacobt  has  a  clear  patent  on  his  printing- 
frame,  and  it  does  not  infringe  on  the  Mezzotint 
patent.  Parties  reporting  the  same  to  injure  the 
sale  of  his  frame  had  better  look  out.  Any  one 
buying  them,  can  use  them  without  fear  of  any 
one. 


L.  G.  Bigelow  offers  his  services  as  an  opera- 
tor, from  the  present  time  until  July  1st,  1874, 
at  a  fair  remuneration.  He  guarantees  first-class 
negatives.  Address  at  56  Henry  Street,  Detroit, 
Michigan. 


Use  Waymouth's  Vignette 
Papers. 

For  Sale  Cheap. — One  of  the  best  galleries, 
doing  a  splendid  paying  business.  The  only  one 
in  the  town  ;  situated  in  the  business  centre. 
North  light,  plenty  of  room,  water,  and  gas.  A 
rare  chance.  If  you  mean  to  buy  come  soon,  or 
address  Photographer, 

Middletown,  Pa. 


Robinson  Photo.  Trimmer. 
A  new  thing.   $3.50.   See  ad. 

The  Photographic  Portfolio,  or  Universal 
Scrap  Book,  with  an  improved  scope,  and  sam- 
ples of  leaves  and  mounts,  to  hold  fifty-four 
cartes-de-visite,  twelve  imperials,  twelve  stereo- 
graphs, and  two  4-4  or  whole  sizes,  costs  but 
$5.55,  and  if  ordered  from  the  publisher,  can  be 
returned  if  not  satisfactory.  The  addition  of 
leaves  or  mounts,  to  hold  any  number  and  size  of 
pictures  that  may  be  desired,  will  be  but  little 
expense  after  this  first  outlay.  Samples  ordered 
by  express  will  be  sent  C.O.D.,  with  instructions 
to  allow  the  package  to  be  examined  on  the  pay- 
ment of  a  sufficient  amount  to  cover  the  express 
both  ways.  The  above  sample,  filled  with  choice 
photographs,  will  be  sold  to  agents,  or  parties 
who  may  wish  to  sell  or  canvas  for  them,  for 
$10.50,  net.     Send  for  circulars. 

A.  C.  Partridge, 
351  Washington  St.,  Boston. 


Fannie  Eaton's  Cartes. — Fifteen  for  $1.50. 
See  October  No.  Philadelphia  Photographer. 
Comic  and  good  studies.     For  sale  by 

Benerman  &  Wilson,  Philada. 


Use  Mardock  &  Co.'s 
New  Compound  Developer. 

Office  of  Wilson,  Hood  &  Co., 

Dealers  in  P holographic  Requisites,  Frames, 

Stereoscopes,  and  Views, 

No.    822    Arch    Street, 

Philadelphia,  September  20,  1873. 
We  have  pleasure  of  announcing  that  we  have 
in  stock  a  small  lot  of  Albumen  Paper  of  the  cele- 
brated manufacture  of  the  Albion  Albumenizing 
Co.,  of  London,  England. 
Following  are  colors,  quality,  and  price  : 

White  Saxe,  per  ream,  $34  00 

Blue         "     "  34  00 

Pink         " "  34  00 

White  Rives, "  33  00 

Blue         "     "  33  00 

Pink         "     "  33  00 

We  have  had  it  well  tried  and  can  advise  our 
customers  to  purchase. 


Illustrations  to  the  N.  P.  A.  Lectures. 
— Photographers  who  desire  to  study  the  lectures 
delivered  at  Buffalo  by  Messrs.  Pearsall,  Baker, 
and  Wilson,  with  the  illustrations,  thus  securing 
invaluable  instruction  in  art  principles,  will  be 
glad  to  know  that  these  gentlemen  have  arranged 
to  supply  sets  of  their  illustrations  at  the  mere 
cost  of  production,  and  they  may  be  had  as  fol- 
lows :  G.  Frank  E.  Pearsall,  298  Fulton  Street, 
Brooklyn,  N.  T.,  six  cabinet  cards,  including 
twenty-four  illustrations,  reduced  size,  $1.  W. 
J.  Baker,  390  Main  Street,  Buffalo,  N.  Y.,  a  full 
set  of  illustrations  of  the  size  of  the  originals, 
$2.  Edward  L.  Wilson,  Philadelphia,  nine  cab- 
inet cards,  including  illustrations  named  in  the 
report,  $1.50. 

A  reading  of  the  lectures  will  convince  any  one 
of  the  value  of  them,  and  the  desirability  of 
having  the  illustrations. 

Robinson  Photo.  Trimmer. 
A  new  thing.   $3.5©.    See  ad. 

Photographers  using  the  Weston  Burnisher 
oon  obtain  a  higher  finish  by  first  coating  the 
card  with  plain  collodion,  then  applying  the 
lubricator  and  polishing  as  usual. 


Wilson's  Baltimore  Stock 
Depot,  7  North  Charles  St. 
Try  an  order. 

peeial  Preparations. 


Use  Mardock  &  Co.'s 
See  advertisement. 


ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS,  1873,  $4.50. 


Wanted. — Agents  to  travel  through  the  seve- 
ral states.  None  need  apply  except  practical 
photographers,  and  those  acquainted  with  the 
use  of  the  solar  camera.     Apply  to 

H.  L.  Emmons,  Baltimore,  Md. 


Use  Mardock  &  Co.'s 
New  Compound  Developer. 

Photographers  of  the  South  who  wish  to  save 
time,  freight,  and  money  should  buy  their  goods 
at  Warner's  Photographic  Stockhouse,  Rome,  Ga. 

I ATMODTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 

"  I  am  using  and  like  them  very  much 
thus  far."— A.  MARSHALL,  Boston. 

"A  sensible  improvement." — GEO.  S. 
COOK,  Charleston,  S.  C. 


Stereoscopic  Negatives  Wanted. — Parties 
having  for  sale  new,  unused,  stereo,  negatives  of 
attractive  American  scenery,  will  oblige  us  by 
sending  a  list  of  them  and  the  prices. 

Benerman  &  Wilson,  Phila. 


The  Ferrotyper's  Guide  is 
ready.    75  cents.    See  advt. 


STEIIMHEIL! 

Albany,  N.  Y.  June  9,  1873. 
WILSON,  HOOD   &  CO. 

Gents :  Your  favor  of  the  5th,  enclo- 
sing receipt,  duly  arrived. 

We  send  by  mail  one  full  set  of  our 
Stereo.  Views,  hoping  you  will  be  able 
to  find  a  ready  sale  for  them ;  the  next 
dozen  we  think  will  astonish  you,  the 
size  of  object,  depth  of  cut,  and  sharp- 
ness ;  those  Steinheil  Lenses  are  splen- 
did, (pair  No.  4,  W.  H.  &  Co.) 

Yours  truly,        HURST  &  SON. 


Royal  Albumen  Paper  is  the  best.    Wm.  H. 
Mardock  &  Co.,  importers. 


Use  Mardock  &  Co.'s 
New  Compound  Developer. 


Trapp  &  Munch  received 
the  Medal  of  Merit  for  their 
Albumen  Paper,  at  the  Vien- 
na Exhibition. 


VOIGTLANDER  &  SON  LENSES. 

Ryder's  Art  Gallery,  239  Superior  St., 
Cleveland,  Ohio,  Dec.  18,  1872. 

Benj.  French  &  Co. 

Dear  Sirs: — Twenty-four  years  ago  I 
bought  and  commenced  using  my  first 
Voigtlander  Lens.  It  was  a  good  one. 
Since  then  I  have  owned  and  used  a 
good  many  of  the  same  brand,  of  various 
sizes.     They  were  all  and  always  good. 

Some  of  the  larger  sizes  that  I  have 
recently  bought  seem  to  me  better  than 
any  I  have  ever  had  or  seen  before. 
Yours,  truly, 

J.  F.  RYDER. 


Use  Waymouth's  Vignette 
Papers. 


The  Stereoscope  :  its  theory,  history,  and 
construction,  with  contributions  to  the  subject 
of  binocular  vision  and  suggestions  as  to  the 
use,  selection,  &c,  of  a  stereoscope,  illustrated, 
by  Prof.  Charles  F.  Himes,  50  cents.  For  sale  by 
Benerman  &  Wilson,  Philadelphia.  All  who  are 
interested  in  the  stereoscope  should  possess  this 
excellent  work. '    Now  ready. 

ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS,  1873,  $4.50. 


ROSS  LENSES. 

TESTIMONIALS. 

San  Francisco,  May  18th,  1873. 
WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO. 

Gents  :  The  Ross  Cabinet  Lens  which 
I  received  from  you  about  one  year  ago, 
has  been  in  constant  use  during  that 
time.  I  could  write  much  in  its  praise, 
and  I  will  here  say  that  I  execute  with 
it  all  sizes,  from  the  smallest  locket  to 
8  x  10  heads  and  groups.  Truly,  it  is 
the  best  lens  I  have  ever  used  during 
my  photographic  experience  of  twenty- 
eight  years. 

Very  respectfully, 

SILAS  SELLECK. 


SITUATIONS    WANTED. 

(No  charge  for  advertisements  under  tins  head: 

Limited  to  four  lines.     Inserted  once  only, 

unless  by  request.) 

4®"  We  cannot  have  letters  directed  to  our  care, 
unless  the  parties  send  for  them,  and  send  stamps  to 
pay  postage.  We  cannot  undertake  to  mail  them; 
please  do  not  request  it. 

The  German  Photographer's  Society,  of  New 
York,  have  established  at  Chas.  Cooper  &  Co.'s, 
150  Chatham  Street,  New  York,  a  mutual  labor 
exchange  office.  Employers  in  need  of  help,  and 
employees  in  want  of  situations,  will  please  send 
their  names,  directions,  and  full  particulars  to 
the  place  above,  where  each  case  will  be  prompt- 
ly attended  to,  free  of  charge. 

Edwabd  Boettcher, 

Cor.  Secretary. 
As   operator   or  retoucher.     Understands    all 
branches.     Address  F.  E.  Loomis,  Holly  Spring, 
Wisconsin. 

By  a  young  man  with  eight  years'  experience 
in  the  best  galleries.  Can  operate  and  print,  but 
retouching  is  his  forte.  Address  S.  Samuels, 
care  344  Pearl  Street,  Photographer,  Cleveland, 
Ohio. 

By  a  lady;  is  a  good  negative  retoucher, 
and  well  qualified  to  tint  and  retouch  cards.  L. 
E.  Bowering,  Holtsville,  Suffolk  County,  Long 
Island,  N.  Y. 

By  a  young  man  of  three  years'  experience. 
Can  operate,  print,  tone,  &c.  Can  come  well 
recommended.  Address  Henry  W.  Foster,  Box 
816,  Monmouth,  111. 

By  an  operator,  one  who  is  also  a  good  hand  at 
retouching;  six  years'  practice  in  photography. 
Specimens  sent  on  application.  Address  J.  E. 
St.  Clair,  P.  0.  Box  134,  Jacksonville,  111. 

By  an  operator  of  ten  years'  experience  ;  can 
act  as  operator  or  retoucher.  J.  E.  Morris, 
Reading,  Hamilton  Co.,  Ohio. 

By  a  man  of  many  years'  experience,  both  of  in 
and  out-door  work.  New  York  or  Philadelphia 
prefered.  Address  D.  C.  Chittenden,  care  of  J. 
B.  Mitchell,  26  South  Seventh  Street,  Phila. 

By  an  operator  of  sixteen  years'  experience  in 
a  first-class  establishment.  Can  retouch.  Ad- 
dress W.  H.  C,  Box  657,  Carbondale,  Pa. 

As  ferrotype  operator  in  any  first-class  gallery 
in  city.     James  A.  Smith,  Tiskilwa,  111. 

By  a  young  man  of  steady  habits,  as  printer, 
toner,  retoucher,  or  assistant  operator  ;  has  had 
three  years'  experience.  Photographer,  402  N. 
Main  Street,  Bloomington,  111. 

By  a  young  man  as  assistant  operator  or 
printer.  Apply  to  S.  Stein,  304  Third  Street, 
Milwaukee,  Wis. 

By  a  first-class  retoucher  in  a  gallery.  Ad- 
dress E.  D.  M.,  42  North  Ninth  St.,  Phila.,  Pa. 
As  assistant  operator,  by  a  man  who  has  had 
six  years'  experience.  Wants  to  get  in  a  first- 
class  gallery,  where  he  may  have  a  chance  to 
improve.     Wm.  H.  Peters,  Brownsville,  Mo. 

By  a  young  lady  in  a  photograph  gallery  ;  has 
same  experience,  and  can  give  reference.  Ad- 
dress H.  L.,  Photograph  Gallery,  43  N.  Eighth 
Street. 

By  a  competent  operator  ;  has  been  in  busi- 
ness for  himself.  Can  work  in  India  ink,  and 
do  first-class  retouching.  Photographer,  Box 
230  Sherburne,  N.  Y. 


By  a  young  lady  as  retoucher.  Can  also  tint 
and  spot  out.  Address  M.  A.,  S.  E.  corner 
Franklin  and  Diamond  Streets,  Philadelphia. 

By  a  young  man  of  four  years'  experience. 
Can  print,  tone,  and  retouch  negatives.  Is  will- 
ing to  make  himself  generally  useful.  Address 
Photographer,  Sassafrass  Fork,  N.  C. 

As  retoucher,  by  a  lady  accustomed  to  fine 
work  in  oil  and  crayon.  No  objection  to  assist 
in  printing.     Address  I.  K.  L.,  Ithica,  N.  Y. 

SOCIETY  CALENDAR. 

(P ub/ished  for  the  convenience  of  Visiting  Pho- 
tographers and  those  desiring  to  correspond. ) 

Jgtg=-  This  Calendar  is  published  free  to  the  Socie- 
ties, and  we  shall  feel  obliged  for  notice  of  any  changes 
in  time  of  meeting  or  in  the  officers,  also  to  add  any 
we  have  overlooked. 

Boston  Photographic  Association. — At  J.  W. 
Black's  studio,  the  first  Friday  of  each  month. 
J.  W.  Black,  President;  J.  H.  Hallenbeck, 
Secretary,  Boston. 

Photographic  Section  of  the  American  Insti- 
tute, New  York. — At  the  Institute  rooms,  the 
first  Tuesday  of  each  month.  H.  J.  Newton, 
President ;  Oscar  G.  Mason,  Secretary,  Bellevue 
Hospital. 

German  Photographic  Society,  New  York. — 
At  Nos.  64  and  66  East  Fourth  Street,  New 
York,  every  Thursday  evening.  W.  Kurtz,  Presi- 
dent ;  Edward  Boettcher,  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, 79  Newark  Avenue,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 

Brooklyn  Photographic  Art  Association, 
Brooklyn,  N.  Y. — Second  Monday  in  each 
month.  Rev.  Dr.  C.  H.  Hall,  President ;  Chas. 
E.  Bolles,  Cor.  Secretary,  Brooklyn. 

Maryland  Photographic  Association,  Balti- 
more.— At  rooms  of  C.  A.  Wilson,  7  North 
Charles  Street,  first  Thursday  in  each  month. 
N.  H.  Busey,  President ;  G.  0.  Brown,  Secretary, 
Baltimore,  Md. 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia. — At  No. 
520  Walnut  Street,  third  floor,  first  Wednesday 
of  each  month.  J.  C.  Browne,  President;  E. 
Wallace,  Jr.,  Secretary,  1130  Spruce  Street. 

Pennsylvania  Photographic  Association,  Phil- 
adelphia.— At  the  galleries  of  the  members.  H- 
H.  Phillips,  President ;  R.  J.  Chute,  Secretary, 
Office  Philadelphia  Piiotographer. , 

Photographic  Association  of  the  District  of 
Columbia,  Washington,  D.  C. — E.  J  Pullman, 
President ;  C.  M.  Bell,  Secretary,  459  Pennsyl- 
vania Ave. ,  Washington.  First  Tuesday,  monthly. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association. — At  rooms 
of  C.  W.  Stevens,  158  State  Street,  first  Wednes- 
day evening  of  each  month.  A.  Hesler,  Presi- 
dent ;  G.  A.  Douglas,  Secretary,  158  State  St. 

Indiana  Photographic  Association. — At  Indi- 
anapolis, first  Wednesday  monthly.  J.  Perry 
Elliott,  President;  D.  0.  Adams,  Secretary,  In- 
dianapolis. 

Photographic  Association  of  Western  Illinois. — 
At  Galesburg,  first  Wednesday  of  October,  Janu- 
ary, April,  and  July.  S.  T.  Bryan,  President ; 
J.  F.  Barker,  Secretary,  Galesburg. 

Chicago  Photograjjhic  Institute,  Chicago. — 
1st  Monday,  monthly,  at  Chicago  Art  Institute. 
A.  Hesler,  President ;  L.  M.  Melander,  Secre- 
tary, Chicago. 

Buffalo  Photographic  Association. — At  Buffa- 
lo, the  first  Wednesday  evening  of  each  month. 
J.  Samo,  President;  Jennie  M.  Crockett,  Sec'y. 


ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS  1873,  $4.50. 


T  h:  IE 


CHAMELEON  BAROMETER 


The  Greatest  Scientific  Novelty  of  the  Age. 


FORETELLS  the  WEATHER. 


MAILED,  ON  RECEIPT  OF  PRICE,  BY 


BENERMAN  *  WILSON, 


Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts,,  Philadelphia. 


50  Cents.- 


■50  Cents. 


New  York,  December  24,  1873. 

For  Winter  work  use  our  latest 
styles  Interior. 

For  Spring  and  Summer,  order  a 
Landscape  background,  and  begin  to 
make  sample  pictures  for  the  next 
N.  P.  A.  Convention. 

Enclose  stamp  for  samples. 

LAFAYETTE  W.  SEAVEY, 

8  Lafayette  Place,  New  York. 


LATEST. 

JTos.  66,  67  &  68, 

Were  exhibited  at  the  Buffalo  Convention. 
Large  sales. 

JVo.  69. 

A  moonlight.     New  and  a  decided  novelty. 


DR.  VOGEL'S 

NEW  WORK! 

THE    PHOTOGRAPHER'S 

Pocket  Reference-Book 

AND 

DICTIONARY: 

An  Alphabetically  arranged  collection  of  practically  important  hints  on  the  construction 
of  the  Gallery  ;  selection  and  trial  of  lenses  and  chemicals  ;  approved  formulas  for  the  differ- 
ent photographic  processes  ;  tables  of  weights  and  measures  ;  rules  for  avoiding  failure,  etc., 
etc.,  for 

Photographers  and  Amateurs, 

IS  NOW  READY! 

AND  IS  KECEIVING  THE  HIGHEST  PEAISE  WHEEEVEK  IT  GOES. 


IT  IS  A  BOOK  EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER  SHOULD  HAVE. 

There  is  hardly  a  matter  occurring  in  your  daily  work  which  it  does  not  throw  light  upon 
and  make  easy.     Examine  it  for  yourself. 


For  sale  by  all  dealers.    Price,  $1.50,  post-paid. 

BENERMAN&  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


IMPORTANT  ANNOUNCEMENT. 


W.   H.   MARDOCE  «£   CO. 

Have  the  pleasure  of  announcing  the  discovery  of  a 

NEW   COMPOUND    DEVELOPER, 

By  the  use  of  which,  with  ordinary  Collodion,  the  time  of  exposure  is  reduced  fully  one-half,  and 
in  connection  with  our  new  Rapid  Collodion  only  oae-quarter  the  usual  time  of  exposure  is  required. 
The  trouble  attending  the  taking  of  Children's  Portraits  is  thus  entirely  obviated,  an  instantaneous 
exposure  only  being  required  when  the  compound  is  used  in  concentrated  form. 

The  Negatives  resulting  from  the  use  of  this  Developer  are  distinguished  for  beauty  of  half-tone, 
vigour,  and  fine  •printing  qualities. 

After-intensification  is  seldom,  if  ever,  required.  We  are  in  receipt  of  numerous  Testimonials  from 
parties  who  have  thoroughly  tried  it,  and  annex  some. 

"I  have  great  pleasure  in  testifying  to  the  superior  merits  of  your  new  Compound  Developer.  It 
not  only  saves  half  the  usual  time  of  exposure,  but  gives  Negatives  finer  in  detail,  and  printing  qual- 
ities, than  I  have  been  able  to  obtain  with  the  usual  Iron  Developer.  It  also  keeps  well,  as  I  am  now 
using  a  solution  made  two  weeks  ago,  and  I  find  it  as  efficient  as  when  freshly  made.  I  cannot  re- 
commend it  too  highly." — Wit.  Klauser,  466  Sixth  Avenue,  N.  Y. 

"Your  new  Developer,  in  connection  with  your  Rapid  Collodion,  works  in  less  than  half  the  usual 
time  "required  with  ordinary  development.  It  is  a  great  improvement." — 0.  C.  Smith,  with  H.  L. 
Cowell,  New  Haven,  Conn. 

PRICE  PER  POUND  30  CENTS.     For  Sale  by  all  Dealers  and  Manufacturers. 

W.  H.  MARDOCK  &.  CO.,  No.  15  Amity  Street,  New  York. 

W.  H.  MARDOCK  &  CO.'S  Extra  Rapid  Collodion,  in  connection  with  their  Compound  Developer, 
saves  seventy  per  cent,  in  time  of  exposure.     PRICE  PER  POUND  $1.25. 

TRY  ME  AND  I  WILL  STICK  TO  YOU. 


THE  ADHESIVE  PICTURE  MOUNT. 

FITZGIBBON'S  PATENT 

For  Ferrotypes,  Gems,  and  all  other  styles  of  Plate  Pictures, 
and^small  Photographs. 

This  simple,  practical,  and  desirable  improved  mount  speaks  for  itself,  when  seen  or  used,  and  is 
bound  in  time  to  supersede  all  other  styles  in  the  market.  It  saves  time  in  mounting,  gives  a  neater 
finish  than  the  old  way,  does  away  with  the  purchasing  or  making  of  sticking  paper  and  all  its  attend- 
ing inconveniences  ;  of  labor,  paste,  gum,  or  mucilage.  It  is  perfect  in  itself,  and  consists  of  a  pre- 
pared flap,  back  or  cover,  for  covering  the  back  of  the  picture,  and  attached  to  the  mount  by  the 
manufacturer.  The  price  of  the  same  is  really  less  than  the  cost  of  the  present  style  and  way  of 
mounting,  taking  into  consideration  the  purchasing  or  making  of  sticking  paper,  besides  the  great 
saving  of  time  (which  is  money),  especially  in  galleries  that  do  a  large  ferrotype  or  gem  business,  also 
being  more  satisfactory  to  yourself  and  customers  in  turning  out  more  neat  and  finished  work  in  the 
shortest  possible  time. 

05?-  THEY  ARE  READY  FOR  SALE  NOW.    ASK  YOUR  STOCKDEALER  FOR  THEM, 
Or  get  him  to  procure  them  for  you  from  the  manufacturer, 

A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO.,  PHILADELPHIA. 

Samples  will  be  sent  free  of  charge  to  any  gallery  in  the  United  States- by  application  to  the  man- 
ufacturer, or  to 

J,  H,  FITZGIBBON,  116  N.  Fourth  Street,  St.  Louis,  Mo, 


SOUTHERN  PHOTOGRAPHERS 

Buy  your  Goods  in  Baltimore  at  the 

Popular  Stock  Depot 

PHI?  A  WII ?nilif  No.7N.Charles St., 

UflilO.  Jl.  W  lJUOUlV,     BAiUMOBE, 

Invites  those  desiring  low  prices,  good  goods,  and  promptness  to  send  him  their  orders. 

VOIGTLANDER'S  CAMERA  TUBES  AND  LENSES, 

C.  C.  HARRISON'S  PORTRAIT  AND  GLOBE  LENSES, 

AMERICAN  OPTICAL  COMPANY'S  APPARATUS. 

All  popular  brands  of  ALBUMENIZED  PAPER,  both  heavy  and  light,  and  guaranteed  to  produce 
uniformly  the  most  perfect  results. 

DEALER  IN  ALL  MATERIALS  USED  FOR 

POECELAIN  PICTUEES,  INCLUDING  POECELAIN  GLASS,  PLAIN  and  GROUND 

OF  ALL  SIZES,  THE  BEST  IN  MARKET.     A  SPLENDID  ASSORTMENT  OF 


Black  Walnut,  Rosewood,  l^ffii  QflgB^       /jfa      TO^JnP  ^ggSB   i^gfl   For  Porcelain  Pictures 
Gilt,  and  Rustic  njEP      <ig%  [B&jBfc  wA  rlMSsm  [S3       and  Photographs. 


FRAME 

Silk,  Cote  Velvet,  ana  Velvet  Up  Passepartouts  for  Porcelain  Pictures. 
GENUINE  B.  P.  C.  GLASS. 

PORCELAIN  WARE  BATHS, 

DIPPERS  AND  TRA  YS. 

A  FULL  ASSORTMENT  OF 

CASES,  FRAMES,  GLASS,  APPARATUS,  ROLLER  PRESSES, 

BACKGROUNDS,  PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHAIRS  AND  LOUNGES, 

AND  CHEMICALS  OF  THE  PUREST  MANUFACTURE,  Ac,  Ac, 

With  whatever  else  is  requisite  for  the  pursuit  of  Photography,  supplied  at  the  shortest  notice,  and. 
on  the  most  favorable  terms. 

The  attention  of  Photographers  throughout  the  United  States  is  respectfully  invited  to  the  advan- 
tages offered  of  a  superior  quality  of  materials,  and  extensive  facilities  for  the  execution  of  orders, 
which  are  respectfully  solicited.  Orders  filled  with  care  and  despatch,  and  sent,  if  desired,  with  bill 
for  collection  by  Express,  to  any  part  of  the  United  States. . 

Address 

OHAS.  A.  WILSON, 

No.  7  North  Charles  St.,  Baltimore. 


The 


The  most  I  T^% 

Elaborate  |  J30WDISH 

Complete,  ^^^  y>    ^1U1J 


And  Perfect 

Posing 
Apparatus. 


Chair. 


Enabling  the  photographer  to  successfully  secure  every  variety  of  pose  with  facility  and  reliability. 
It  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  varying  necessities  of  female  portraiture,  and  is  equally  suited  for 
children,  for  vignettes,  or  for  full  lengths.  The  BOWDISH  CHAIR  is  substantial  in  construction, 
elegant  in  design,  and  rich  in  upholstery  and  finish.  Those  who  have  purchased  them,  speak  in  the 
highest  terms,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 


J5& 

+- 


"+ 


TESTIMONIALS:  8» 


-+ 


"About  ten  days  ago  I  received  the  new  chair  you  promised  to  send  me  when  I  saw  you  last,  and 
would  have  written  and  acknowledged  your  kind  favor  long  ago  if  1  had  correctly  known  your  ad- 
dress. Accept  my  best  thanks  for  this  really  beautiful  chair,  which  now,  after  ten  days'  trial,  has 
proved  to  be  a  decided  success  in  every  way.  It  has  become  the  real  favorite  for  posing  in  my  studio. 
Besides  this,  in  external  appearance  the  new  chair  appears  so  much  superior  in  finish,  and  is  at  the 
same  time  highly  ornamental,  and  the  head  rest  is  so  much  easier  handled  than  with  any  chair  I  have 
ever  seen  before.  In  short,  it  gives  the  sitter  the  greatest  possible  comfort  and  steadiness.  I  think 
the  chair  I  have  justly  deserves  the  name  of  'Perfect  Posing  Chair.' " — H.  Rocher,  Chicago,  111., 
January  10,  1873. 

"  Since  receiving  your  posing  chair,  nearly  a  year  since,  I  have  had  it  in  constant  use,  and  am 
satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  posing  chair  in  the  market.  It  is  easily  worked,  and  is  so  well  made  that 
one  will  last  a  life  time,  and  then  be  a  valuable  heirloom." — L.  G.  Bigelow. 

"The  Bowdish  Chair  came  in  good  order  and  gives  the  best  of  satisfaction.  Should  you  wish  a 
recommendation  for  it,  say  what  you  please  and  we  will  endorse  it.  You  cannot  praise  it  too  highly." 
— Slee  Bros.,  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  Sept.  10,  1872. 

"  Your  chair  has  arrived  at  last.  lam  much  pleased  with  it.  1  don't  think  my  gallery  can  be 
complete  without  one  of  them.  Wishing  you  the  success  your  invention  merits,  I  am,  truly  yours, 
A.  Hesler." 

Prints  will  be  sent,  if  desired,  before  purchasing.     There  are  three  styles  kept  in  stock,  viz  : 

No.  2.  With  nickel-plated  rods  and  rest,  in  velveteen  or  reps $60  00 

No.  4.       "  "  "  "  "  "    square  carved  legs 70  00 

No.  6.       "  "  "  "     in  best  plush,  paneled 80  00 

Special  chairs  to  order. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO.,  Sole  Agents, 

591  Broadway j  JVew  York. 


TO   PEOFESSIONAL  PHOTOGEAPHEES   AND   THE   TEADE. 


CH.    DAUVOIS, 

Acknowledged  to  be  the  Best  and  Cheapest  in  the  World. 


No.  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris, 


ESPECIAL   MANUFACTURERS   OP 


MOUNTS^FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


TRADE    MARK,    Ch.D. 


Bristol  Boards  of  every  size  and  thickness,  plain. 

India  Tinted  and  Fancy  Printing. 

Book-post  and  Card  Cases. 

Stout  Blotting  Paper  Albums. 

First-class  Rives  Albumenized  Paper,  &c,  &c. 


Mounts  for  Cartes-de-Visite, 
Cabinet  Portrait, 
Victoria  Card, 

Stereoscopic  Views — all  new  samples  of  French 
styles. 

MEDALS  AWARDED  AT  EVERY  EXHIBITION. 

All  orders  are  to  be  sent  to  their  establishment,  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris,  or  to  Wholesale  Houses 
of  the  United  States.     Samples  on  application. 

LIBERAL  DISCOUNT  TO  WHOLESALE  HOUSES. 


TRY    IT    AND    BE    CONVINCED. 


The  best  COLLODION  in  use  is 

LEWIS  &  HOLT'S  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE, 

Sold  with  a  Printed  Formula  accompanying  each  Bottle. 

Being  among  the  first  in  this  country  to  make  Collodion  Pictures,  they  can  warrant  it  to  be  one 

of  the  best  in  use. 
also,  their 

ADAMANTINE  VARNISH  for  Amtirotypes,  Negatives,  ai  Melainotypes. 

This  Varnish,  when  applied  to  Negatives,  dries  in  a  few  seconds  perfectly  hard,  and  does  not  lower  the 
intensity,  or  soften  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  in  Printing.  It  gives  a  beautiful  gloss  and  brilliancy  to 
Ambrotypes.    For  Sale  by  Stockdealers  generally.    Prepared  by  jj^  _^__  LEWIS 

160  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

HEADQUARTERS     FOR    THE    TRADE. 

Show  Displayers,  Velvet  Stands, 

Velvet  Passepartouts,         Velvet  Cases, 
Beveled  Matts,  Double  Matts, 

Fancy  Metal  Frames,  Standard  Matts, 

Fancy  Paper  Passepartouts. 

These  goods  are  entirely  of  our  own  manufacturing.  A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand ;  odd 
sizes  and  styles  made  to  order. 

LEWIS  PATTBERG  &  BRO.,  709  flMO  Broadway,  New  York. 


mmm 


i 

i 


PL,UCK  So.  1. 


PLUCK  Wo.  2. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1873,  by  A.  M.  Willaed,  in  the  office 
of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 

JUST  OUT,  AND  READY  FOR  DELIVERY. 


The  above  sketches  show  the  design,  and  give  an  idea  of  the  subject. 

The  paintings  from  which  the  chromos  are  copied  are  of  a  high  order  of 
art, — from  the  easel  of  A.  M.  Willard,  an  artist  of  the  quaint  and  humorous 
school,  whose  brush  tells  a  story,  and  gives  the  point,  as  fluently  as  the  Dan- 
bury  man's  pen. 

The  hit  he  has  made  in  these  pictures  is  particularly  happy,  and  stirs 
the  mirthful  vein*  in  every  nature,  at  the  same  time  giving  the  strongest  type 
of  PLUCK,  as  characteristic  of  Young  America.  Every  man  who  has  been 
a  boy  sometime  in  his  life  can  appreciate  them. 

These  pictures  are  destined  for  a  larger  and  quicker  sale  than  any 
chromos  ever  published.  As  an  attraction  in  the  show-room  of  every  pho- 
tographer, they  are  worth  twice  the  price  asked  for  them.  For  holiday  pre- 
sents they  are  just  the  thing. 

They  are  mounted  on  stretchers  16  x  22  inches  in  size. 


Price,  $10  per  Pair;  Unmounted,  $9.50  per  Pair. 


Photographers  purchasing  to  sell  again,  can  do  well  with  them.     Your 
order  is  respectfully  solicited. 


Address 


J.  F.  RYDER,  Publisher, 

239  Superior  Street,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 


Are  the  very  best  that  are  made,  and  are  now  without  a  rival  in  the  market.  They  are  clean 
cut,  most  desirable  shapes  and  sizes,  and  made  of  non-actinic  paper,  manufactured  specially 
for  the  purpose.  Each  package  contains  30  Cut-Outs,  or  Masks,  with  corresponding  Insides, 
assorted  for  five  differently  sized  ovals  and  one  arch-top. 

PRICE,  $1.00  PER  PACKAGE.     Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

Parties  wishing  special  sizes,  or  large  lots  of  a  few  sizes,  may  have  them  cut  to  order 
promptly,  by  addressing  the  manufacturer.     No  lot  costing  less  than  $1.00  made  at  a  time. 

No  printer  should  attempt  to  make  medallion  pictures  without  them. 


THEY  HAVE  NO  EQUAL  FOR  QUALITY. 

Beware  of  spurious  imitations  made  of  common  paper,  full  of  holes,  badly  cut,  and  odd 
shapes  and  sizes.  Ask  your  stockdealer  for  GIHON'S  CUT-OUTS,  and  see  that  they  are 
in  his  envelopes  with  instruction  circular  included. 


IS   DESIGNED    EOR 

COMPLETELY  OBSCURING  THE  IMPERFECT  BACKGROUNDS  OF  COPIES, 
RETOUCHING  NEGATIVES, 

FAULTY  SKIES  IN  LANDSCAPES, 

COATING  THE  INSIDE  OF  LENSES  OR  CAMERA  BOXES, 
BACKING  SOLAR  NEGATIVES, 

COVERING  VIGNETTING  BOARDS, 

AND    FOR  ANSWERING 

ALL  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  INTELLIGENT  PHOTOGRAPHER  IN  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  ARTISTIC  RESULTS  IN  PRINTING. 


WHEREVER  YOU  WANT  TO  KEEP  OUT  LIGHT,  USE  OPAQUE. 

It  is  applied  with  a  brush,  dries  quickly  and  sticks. 


OUT-OUTS  (thirty),  $1.00. 


OPAQUE,  50  GENTS. 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Address  all  orders  to 

JOHN  L.  CIHON,  Inventor, 

128  -flT.  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


£^ 


JANUARY. 


ELBERT  ANDERSON'S 


niTi-cinc  uunniGE  \ 

Makes  everybody  scream,  while  it  is  also  a  book  embodying  instruction,  and  handsomely  illustrated. 
Among  other  things  it  contains 


For  each  month  in  the  year;  embellished  handsomely;    EXPLANATIONS  OF  THE  TWELVE 
SIGNS  OF  THE  ZODIAC  ILLUSTRATED  ;  and  the  following  : 


Dedication. 

The  Weather. 

The  Probabilities. 

Places  of  the  Planets. 

Eclipses. 

Cronological  Circlelers. 

Customary  Notes. 

To  Find  your  Horror'scope. 

Signs  of  the  Zodiac. 

The  Photographic  Hamlet. 


"  Say  Amen  !  to  that,  Brother." 

Declining  a  Kiss. 

Not  at  all  Extraordinary. 

Riddlicous. 

An  Incident  of  my  Life. 

Rapidity  of  Light. 

Money  vs.  Honor. 

The  Lowest  Depth  of  Meanness. 

He  Didn't  Dance  the  "Lancers.'' 

Three  Collodion  Puzzles. 

A  Joke  and  its  Results. 


Photo.  Mezzotints. 

The  Twins. 

Beware  of  Strangers  who  ask  you 

to  Play  Cards. 
"Notice  to  Sportsmen. 
Sphynx. 

What  I  Know  of  Photography. 
After-Dinner  Session. 
Art  as  Apt-lied  to  Photography. 
A  Tale  of  a  Fox. 


It  is  full  of  witty  stories,  sayings,  doings,  puns,  jokes,  practical  hints,  take-offs,  etc.,  with  grotesque 
illustrations,  and  all  the  features  of  a  first-class  Almanac.  All  the  wit  and  humor  which  Mr.  Ander- 
son suppressed  in  his  "Skylight  and  Dark-Room,"  may  be  found  in  his  ALLMTKNACK.  Samples 
of  illustrations  herewith.     Dealers  can  sell  thousands  ;  photographers  can  sell  hundreds. 

Liberal  discount  for  wholesale  orders. 

JUST  THE  THING   FOR  DULL  WEATHER. 

PRICE  75  CENTS. 

BENERMAN"  &  WILSON",  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 
JS^T*  You  have  no  idea  how  good  and  how  funny  it  is. 


Sftlllll|* 


IP 


(Actual  »ix«  of  a  No.  1  Steinheil  L^nt.) 


NEW  APLANATIC  LENSES. 


We  have  for  the  past  five  years  controlled  the  sale  of  these  Lenses  in  the  United  States,  and  the 
numerous  unsolicited  testimonials  we  have  received  are  both  gratifying  to  the  Messrs.  Steinheil  and 
ourselves. 

We  regret  that  we  are  forced  to  advance  the  prices,  which  is  due  to  the  increased  cost  of  production 
Prices  now  are  as  follows  : 


Nos.  1  and  2  are  in  matched  pairs  for  Stereoscopic  Work. 

No.  1.  1-4  size.  34  inch  focus. 

"    2.  1-2     "  bl     " 

"    3.  4-4     "  7       " 

"    4.  8-10  "  101     " 

"    5.  10-12  "  131     " 

"    6.  13-16  "  161     " 


$25  00 
30  00 
-15  00 
60  00 
70  00 

110  00 


Any  one  who  has  worked  the  Steinheil  Lens  is  acquainted  with  their  excellencies ;  to  those  who 
have  not  had  that  pleasure,  we  will  state  that  they  are  unexcelled  for 

GROUPS^ 

LANDSCAPES^   and 

COPIES, 

and  are  very  fine  for  in-door  work,  but  requires  more  time  than  quick-working  Portrait  Lenses. 

We  feel  sure  that  at  least  one  of  these  Lenses  is  needful  for  the  successful  prosecution  of  your 
business,  and  so  solicit  your  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  States, 

No.  822  Arch  Street,  Philadetohia,  Pa. 


IMPORTANT  TO 


PHOTOGRAPHERS. 


ILVE 


PATENTED 


OCT.  11,  1870. 


The  amount  of  silver  annually  wasted  in  the  business  of  picture-making,  and  quietly 
allowed  to  run  down  the  sink-spout,  is  simply  enormous.  This  practice,  with  slight  excep- 
tions, has  been  countenanced  since  the  discovery  of  photography.     But 

THE  TIME  HAS  COME  WHEN 


by  the^iid  of  this 
new  apparatus 


EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER 


in  the  world  can 
prevent  this 


great  loss.   This  mass  BMg  I  lOTT      DC       A  DDETOT'Erft  on  ^s  wa^  ^rom  tne 


of  silver  can  and 


hands  of  the  operator 


to  the  common  sewer.     This  new  apparatus  will  carefully  collect  and  save  all  this  precious 
metal.     It  costs  but  little  to  place  it  in  each  dark-room,  where  it  quietly  and  surely  does 

its  economical  work.     £\l\||Bj     i"  even  the  smallest 
gallery  it  can  Lo      |fBm|J|l        I   U       PAY      a  largo  percentage 


,     r  IS  IK     it  is  entirely  different  from  anything 


on  its  cost.     Experience  proves  this 

in  this  line  ever  before  offered  to  the  Photographic  fraternity.     It  is  simple,  cheap,  and  re- 
liable; based  upon  common  sense,  the  wants  of  the  business,  and  well-known  scientific 
principles,  calculated  to  save  all  value  from  photographer's  washings  and  waste  solutions, 
with  little  attention  or  expense,  which  it  really  and 

systematically  does  without     Sl^iiallflUJli^O     on    an^    apparatus    now 
patented,  it  differing  in  principle,  construction,  operation,  and  results  from  the  well-known 

SHAW'S  PATENT  APPARATUS, 

and  cannot  fail  to  commend  itself  to  your  earnest  attention  and  careful  consideration. 

Messrs.  Morgan  &  Fuller,  of  Norwich,  Conn.,  the  proprietors  of  this  long  needed  and 
useful  invention,  will  manufacture  and  furnish  it  to  the  fraternity  at  prices  which  bring  it 
within  the  reach  of  every  one. 

N.  D.  MORGAN, 
GEO.  W.  FULLER. 


Photographic  Card  Warehouse. 


A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 

MANUFACTURERS, 

No.  18  South  Sixth  St.  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 

PHILADELPHIA. 


EVERYTHING  APPERTAINING  TO  THE   LINE   OF  OUR 

MANUFACTURES  FURNISHED  WITH  CARE 

AND  PROMPTNESS. 


Our  long  experience  in  and  facilities  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods,  and 
familiarity  with  the  peculiar  wants  of  Photographers,  enable  us  to  offer  superior  induce- 
ments to  those  who  may  favor  us  with  their  orders. 

JAMES  F.  MAGEE  &  CO. 

MANUFACTURERS    OF 

PURE 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMICALS, 

No.  108  North  Fifth  Street, 

PHILADELPHIA. 


Stock  Dealers  only  Supplied. 


LANTERN  SLIDES. 


a© 


SELECTED  FROM 


EMBRACING 


Views  of  all  Parts  of  the  World ! 


PLAIN,  COLORED,  AND  OOMIO 

LANTERN   SLIDES, 


OF  ALL  KINDS,  AT  LOW  PRICES. 


SCIOPTICONS  AND  LANTERNS  SUPPLIED. 


SELECTIONS    MADE    PERSONALLY. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Southwest  qot.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Photographic  Publications,  1874. 

Knowing  the  advantages  of  well-written  works  on  Photography  to  our 
readers,  we  issue  our  annual  catalogue,  that  they  may  have  the  opportunity 
of  selecting  the  very  best.  We  always  find  the  photographer  who  reads 
what  is  published  pertaining  to  his  profession,  to  be  the  photographer  who 
succeeds  in  his  business  the  best.  Above  all,  those  who  regularly  and  contin- 
ually receive  a  good  photographic  magazine  are  those  who  are  always  ahead 
with  new  goods,  new  styles,  and  new  information.  We  recommend  an  in- 
vestment in  a  part  or  all  of  the  list  below,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  them  to 
you  on  receipt  of  price. 

CATALOGUE. 

A  The  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

The  oldest,  best,  and  most  popular  Photographic  Magazine  in  America.  Eleventh  Year.  Please  read  the 
prospectus  on  page  three  of  cover  and  premium  list  opposite.  Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2.50  for  six 
months,  in  advance.    Current  number,  50  cents.    Specimen  copies,  free. 

B  The  Skylight  and  the  Dark- Room. 

By  Elbert  Anderson,  operator  at  Kurtz's  studio,  New  York.  This  is  the  most  beautiful  and  elaborate 
work  on  the  art  ever  published.  It  contains  nearly  250  pages — large,  square — twelve  photographs  made  by  the 
author  to  illustrate  the  lessons  of  the  work,  and  almost  two  hundred  fine  wood-cuts.  See  advertisements. 
Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  postpaid,  $4.00. 

O  Photographic  Mosaics. 

The  1874  edition  excels  all  of  its  eight  older  brethren.  The  list  of  articles  is  made  up  of  original  contribu- 
tions, written  especially  for  its  pages,  on  all  departments  of  the  art,  wholly  by  practical  men  who  are  only  heard 
from  once  a  year  through  the  persuasion  of  the  editor,  in  this  way.  See  special  advertisement.  146  pages. 
Paper  cover,  50  cents.    Cloth,  $1.    A  few  copies  of  former  editions,  from  1866,  at  same  price. 

D  The  Ferrotyper'  s  Guide. 

A  new  work  on  the  Ferrotype.    Price,  75  cents. 

E       Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

This  is  not  exactly  a  book,  but  a  collection  of  24  large  Victoria  size  photographic  studies  in  lighting  and 
posing,  made  especially  to  teach  how  to  light  and  pose  ordinary  and  extra-ordinary  subjects  in  all  the  plain, 
fancy,  "  Rembrandt"  and  "Shadow"  styles.  It  is  accompanied  by  an  explanatory  key  of  instructions,  together 
with  a  diagram  for  each  picture,  showing  how  the  sitter  and  the  camera  were  placed  in  the  skylight,  their 
relation  to  the  background,  and  what  blinds  were  opened  and  closed  at  the  time  of  the  sitting.  It  almost 
supplies  a  rule  by  which  you  can  quickly  tell  how  to  manage  every  subject  that  comes  to  you.  The  studies  are 
mounted  on  folding  leaves,  so  that  twelve  can  be  examined  at  once.    Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  $6,  postpaid. 

F  Wilson's  Landscape  Studies. 

An  album  of  landscape  studies  in  style  similar  to  Bigelow's  Album,  containing  ten  5x8  views,  with  the 
formula,  &c,  by  George  Washington  Wilson,  Esq.,  the  renowned  Scotch  landscape  photographer.  A  splendid 
work.    In  cloth,  gilt,  $4. 

G  Handbook  of  the  Practice  and  Art  of  Photography. 

By  Dr.  Vogel.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  during  the  year. 

H     How  to  Paint  Photographs  in  Water  Colors. 

A  practical  Handbook  designed  especially  for  the  use  of  Students  and  Photographers,  containing  directions 
for  Brush  Work  in  all  descriptions  of  Photo-Portraiture,  Oil,  Water  Colors,  Ink,  How  to  Retouch  the  nega- 
tive, &c.    By  George  B.  Ayres,  Artist.  Third  edition.    Differing  largely  from  previous  editions.    Price,  $2.00. 


I  Pictorial  Effect  in  Photography. 

By  H.'P.  Robinson,  London.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  in  preparation. 

J    .  How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph. 

This  is  a  fine  little  work  of  48  pages,  written  by  the  wife  of  a  celebrated  New  York  photographer,  for  the 
purpose  of  educating  the  public  on  the  all-important  subject  of  sitting  for  a  picture.  It  is  bound  in  cloth  at  60 
cents  per  copy,  and  paper  cover  30  cents. 

K  Loohout  Landscape  Photography. 

By  Prof.  R.  M.  Linn,  Lookout  Mountain,  Tenn.  A  pocket  manual  for  the  outdoor  worker,  and  full  of  good 
for  every  photographer.    75  cents.    Be  sure  to  get  it. 

L      Himes's  Leaf  Prints ;  or,  Glimpses  at  Photography. 

By  Prof.  Charles  F.  Himes,  Ph.D.  Full  of  useful  information  for  the  photographic  printer.  Illustrated 
with  a  whole-size  photograph.    Cloth,  $1.25. 

M  The  American  Carbon  Manual. 

By  Edw.  L.  Wilson.  A  complete  manual  of  the  Carbon  process  from  beginning  to  end.  With  a  fine 
example  by  the  process.    Cloth,  $2.00. 

N        Ayres's  Chart  of  Photographic  Drapery. 

This  is  a  photograph  of  forty-two  pieces  of  cloth,  of  all  the  colors  and  shades,  handsomely  mounted  on  a 
card.  It  should  be  hung  in  every  reception-room,  to  show  your  customers  what  color  dresses  to  wear,  and  to 
show  you  what  sort  of  backgrounds  and  accessories  to  use.    Price,  $2.00. 

O  The  Photographer  to  His  Patrons. 

A  splendid  little  twelve-page  leaflet,  which  answers  all  vexatious  questions  put  to  you  by  your  sitters,  and 
serves  as  a  grand  advertising  medium.  It  is  for  photographers  to  give  away  to  their  customers.  Send  for  a 
copy  and  an  illustrated  circular.  Over  300,000  already  sold  and  in  use  all  over  the  country.  $20.00  for  1000, 
$35.00  for  2000,  and  so  on.    Printed  and  supplied  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

P  Pretty  Faces. 

A  leaflet  much  smaller  than  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons,"  for  the  same  purpose,  but  costing  less,  viz. : 
1000  copies,  $10.00  ;  2000,  $17.50,  and  larger  orders  at  less  rates. 

Q,  The  Year-Booh  of  Photography. 

By  G.  Wharton  Simpson.  English  edition.  Similar  to  Mosaics,  and  full  of  good,  short,  practical  articles. 
50  cents.    1869, 1870, 1871, 1872,  and  1873  now  on  hand.    1874,  about  January  20th. 

R     Elbert  Anderson's  Photo-  Comic  Allmyhnach 

A  complete  Almanac,  full  of  witty  sayings,  jokes,  puns,  stories,  etc.,  etc.  Profusely  illustrated  with  comic 
and  original  sketches,  yet  all  interspersed  with  much  practical  matter  of  value  to  every  photographer.  Price, 
75  cents. 

S  Photographers'  Pocket  Reference- Booh. 

By  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  of  Berlin.  A  dictionary  of  all  the  terms  used  in  the  art,  and  contains  formulas  for  almost 
every  known  manipulation.  Altogether  different  from  any  work  ever  published.  Cloth,  $1.50.  See  special 
advertisement. 


To  save  writing,  photographers  may  order  the  above  of  us  by  the  marginal  letters,  thus,  "  Please  send  us 
one  copy  of  each,  book  A,  B,  K,"  &c,  &c.    Any  of  the  above  sent  post  free  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Benerman  &  Wilson's  Publications  sold  by  all  Dealers. 


ENGLISH 


Mmw  n  tp£]t 


jj£j|j  ^\  JJJT/J 


Messrs.  Marion  &  Co.,  London,  have  pleasure  in  introducing  their 

UNRIYALLED 

DOUBLY  BRILLIANT  PAPER 

TO  AMERICAN  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 

IT    IS    USED    BY    ALL 

THE  BEST  PHOTOGRAPHERS  IN  GREAT  BRITAIN  AND  THE  EASTERN 

WORLD. 


Those  in  America  who  depend  upon  home  and  German  productions,  will 
find  it  to  their  advantage  to  try  MARION  &  CO.'S. 


st-  s^  $*?*&&&» 


FRESH  STOCK  ON  HAND. 


Scovill  Manufacturing  Co., 

TRADE  AGENTS, 

4  Beekman  Street,  New  York. 


IMPORTANT  TO  EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER  II  THE  COM. 

PHOTOGRAPHERS'  EXCHANGE, 

CHICAGO,  ILLINOIS. 

ESTABLISHED  BY  A  PRACTICAL  PHOTOGRAPHER. 

As  the  name  implies  this  is  a  medium  to  facilitate  intercourse  amongst  Photographers,  and  through 
which  they  can  buy,  sell,  or  exchange,  anything  and  everything  of  value  in  the  line  of  photographic 
apparatus. 

The  benefit  derived  from  an  institution  of  this  kind  will  be  appreciated  by  every  intelligent  and 
enterprising  photographer. 

It  is  a  well  known  fact  that  every  gallery  has  more  or  less  of  dead  stock  on  hand  ;  stock  possessing 
value,  but  still  useless  to  the  owner. 

Heretofore  no  means  has  existed  to  dispose  of  these  goods  satisfactorily,  and  consequently  they 
have  been  suffered  to  lie  around  and  to  be  kicked  about  until  rendered  worthless. 

This  can  be  obviated  in  the  future,  as  you  are  now  enabled  to  dispose  of  your  surplus  stock,  and 
replace  it  with  something  you  need. 

The  great  advantage  you  gain  by  selling  through  us  is  that  your  goods  will  be  continually  advertised 
in  the  different  Photographic  publications,  and  in  our  Monthly  Catalogue  until  disposed  of. 

Now  is  the  time  to  send  in  your  goods,  as  we  have  applications  on  our  books  for  all  kinds  of  im- 
plements, such  as  Cameras,  Tubes,  Stands,  Baths,  Dishes,  &c,  <fcc.  Every  commission  entrusted  to  us 
will  be  carefully  attended  to. 

For  the  transaction  of  all  business  we  have  adopted  the  following 

RULES  AND  REGULATIONS. 

1st. — Photographic  Apparatus  of  every  description  will  be  received  and  sold  or  exchanged. 

2nd. — When  goods  are  disposed  of  the  proceeds  will  be  immediately  remitted  to  the  consignee,  deduct- 
ing our  commission. 
3d. — On  all  sales  under  Fifty  Dollars,  our  commission  will  be  20  per  cent,  above  Fifty,  15  per  cent. 
Special  rates  to  those  who  wish  to  dispose  of  entire  outfits. 

4th. — Freight  and  Expressage  must  be  paid  for  by  the  consignee. 

5th. — Every  consignment  should  be  accompanied   with  the  lowest  cash  •price,  and  also   a  letter  of 
instruction  which  will  be  our  guide  in  disposing  of  the  goods. 

6th. — A  catalogue  of  goods  on  hand  will  be  published  monthly,  and  sent  free  to  any  address. 

Circulars  and  further  information  sent  on  application. 
All  goods  and  communications  should  be  addressed  to 

PHOTOGRAPHERS'  EXCHANGE, 

JVo.  lJf9  Chicago  Avenue, 

CHICAGO. 

L.  W.  PELT,  Proprietor. 


1 


1874 


H 


N 


G 


HOUSE 


F 

T 
H 
W        E 

E 
S 

T 

IN 


w% 


1ST4 


T  "4 


TEVENS, 

1 58  State  St., 


ORDERS 


FILLED  COPRECTLY 
AND  PROMPTLY 


Crt 


P 


«  GREAT  CENTRAL." 


jj  o^°^ 


SPECIALT 


y 


EVERYTHING  A  PHOTOGRAPHER  NEEDS  KEPT  IN 
STOOK  AND  SOLD  AT  LOWEST  PRICES. 


NO  MISTAKE! 

BEST  PORTRAIT  LENSES 


-A-K/E 


Ohas.  F.  Usener's, 


TRY  THEM  and  BE  CONVINCED. 


Charles  Cooper  fy  Co., 

WHOLESALE  AGENTS, 

150  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

JOHN   R.  CLEmOItfS, 

IMPORTER  OF 


AND  MANUFACTURER  OF 


ALBUMEN  AND  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPERS. 

PINK  AND  BLUE  ALBUMEN  PAPER  CONSTANTLY  ON  HAND  OR  MADE  TO  ORDER, 

915  Sansom  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

CLEMONS'  NEW  ALBUMEN   PAPER, 

A  superior  article  introduced  into  the  market  about  a  year  ago.  It  is  equal,  if  not  superior  to  any  Paper 
imported ;  the  great  demand  proves  such  to  he  the  case.  It  is  praised  by  all  who  use  it  as  to  its  keeping 
white  during  warm  weather ;  also,  for  its  brilliancy  and  toning  qualities,  and  it  is  made  White,  Pink,  and 
Blue.    Sizes  medium,  26  x  40  and  35  x  46. 

CLEMONS'  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPER 

Has  stood  the  test  above  all  other  makes  for  the  last  nine  years.  An  article  extensively  used  for  all  Plain, 
Solar,  and  Colored  Work.    Sizes,  U%  x  23,  26  x  40,  and  35  x  46. 

JOHN  R.  CLEMONS,  Manufacturer, 

915  SANSOM  ST.,  PHILADELPHIA. 

#    * 


"Make  my  order  thirty  instead  of  twenty.  Lot  last  sent  are  all  gone." — Dr.  E.  Liesegang, 
Dusseldorf,  Germany. 

"Hurry  on  the  Bigelow  Albums  ordered.  We  are  out  and  orders  waiting."— Piper  &  Carter, 
London,  England. 


IGELOW'S  ALBIl 


OF 


LIGHTING  AND  POSING. 
SELLS  ALL  OVER  THE  WORLD. 

A  NEW  EDITION  HAS  BEEN  ISSUED  WITH  AN  ENLARGED  KEY, 

AND  NEARLY  ALL  NEW  STUDIES. 

This   album  brings  lighting  and  posing  down  to  a 
system  at  once  plain,  easy  and  desirable. 

No  good,  intelligent  operator  can  afford 
to  work  without  it. 

It  Contains 

24  Victoria  Portrait  Studies 

in  Light  and  Pose, 

WITH  AN  EXPLANATORY  KEY, 

Telling  exactly  HOW  EACH  PICTURE    WAS 
MADE;   WHERE  THE  CAMERA  AND 
THE    SITTER     WERE    PLACED 
when  it  was  made ;  WHA  T  CUR- 
TAINS WERE  OPENED 
in  lighting  the  subject, 
$c,  $c. 

A  diagram  of  the  interior  of  the  skylight  is  given  in  each  case,  telling  the  whole  story.    IT  IS  BOUND 
HANDSOMELY  IN  CLOTH,  GILT. 


NEW  KEY,  ENLARGED. 


NEW  PICTURES. 


'  It  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  aids  to  art  education  which  has  yet  been  presented  to  the  photo, 
portraitist.  Each  print  represents  a  distinct  study  of  pose  and  lighting,  the  widest  variety  of  effects 
being  comprehended.  We  should  be  glad  to  see  it  in  the  hands  of  English  portraitists  generally." — 
Photo.  News. 

"  The  method  is  an  admirable  one  and  Mr.  Bigelow  deserves  credit  for  the  systematic  way  in  whieh 
he  has  carried  it  out." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  confess  that  this  work  has  furnished  me  much  instruction,  particularly  the  manner  in  which, 
by  word  and  picture,  studies  about  light  and  pose  are  explained  and  made  comprehensible." — Dr. 
Vogel. 

"  We  do  not  know  of  anything  ourselves  that  has  been  presented  to  the  trade  which  is  calculated 
to  do  so  much  real  good  as  Bigelow's  Album,  with  the  explanatory  key  to  the  studies.  It  is  an  in- 
valuable guide  to  the  portraitist." — Philadelphia  Photographer. 

It  is  considered  invaluable  by  the  practical  photographers  who  use  it. 


PRICE,  $6.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCKDEALERS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


fourth:     thousand, 

Over 


IT  IS 

COMPLETELY 

REVISED. 


HOW  TO  FAIT 
PHOTOGRAPHS 


3000  Copies 

HAVE  BEEN  SOLD. 


The  THIRD  EDITION  is  so  different  from  former  ones,  that  it  may  almost  be  said  that  it  is  A  new 
work. 

If  Gives  the  Best  and  Freshest  Instructions  to  be  had  on  the  Subject. 

Written  by  a  practical  photographic  colorist,  Mr.  Geo.  B.  Ayres. 

PRICE  $2.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Photographers  and  artists  whose  interest  it  is  to  produce  work  in  Water  Colors,  Oil,  India  Ink,  or 
who  wish  complete  instructions  in  retouching  negatives,  should  consult  Mr.  Ayres'  capital  work. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA. 


TRAPP  &  MUNCH'S 


gmwmttt 


Introduced  into  this  country  since  1868  has  become  the  leading  paper,  and  is 
now  better  known  and  more  appreciated  than  any  other  brand. 

That  this  great  success  is  well  deserved  and  due  to  its  excellent  qualities 
may  be  judged  from  the  fact,  that  of  all  the  competitors  of  the  Vienna  Ex- 
hibition, Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  alone  received  the 

:m::ejixajii  o:f  merit 

for  Albumenized  Paper. 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALL  THE  STOCKHOUSES. 

WILLY  WALLACH, 

GENERAL  AGENT  FOR  THE  UNITED  STATES, 

41  John  Street,  New  York. 


•o*SM|cg 


§"3.8  5  co  .2 

OT3  <u  k-S  "E 

Eh  «  JvgH  £ 


l%\t  l|ot0grap|er  to  \\%  lata/' 


WHAT  IS  IT? 


TIHE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS  is  a  little  book  or  pamphlet  of  twelve  pages,  the 
1  intention  of  which  is  :  1st.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  say  a  few  words  in  a  kindly  way 
to  those  who  have  photographs  taken,  in  order  that  the  intercourse  between  them  and  their 
photographer  may  be  pleasant  and  result  in  the  most  successful  pictures.  Every  photographer 
knows  that  he  is  constantly  beset  with  a  lot  of  questions,  as  to  the  proper  way  to  dress,  the  best 
time  to  come,  and  so  on,  which  take  a  great  deal  of  his  time  to  answer.  This  little  book  answers 
them  all,  and  the  mere  handing  of  a  copy  to  the  questioner,  which  he  or  she  can  carry  away  and  study 
at  leisure,  serves  as  admirably  as  a  half-hour's  conversation. 

2d.  It  is  a  cheap  mode  of  advertising.  What  could  you  want  better  than  to  have  your  business  card 
so  attractive  that  people  will  come  and  ask  for  it,  hand  it  around  from  one  to  another,  discuss  it,  and 
then  keep  it  for  reference  ?  This  is  what  they  do  with  this  little  "  tract."  Witness  what  those  who 
have  tried  it  say  below. 

3d.  It  is  also  intended  to  convey  to  the  public  at  large  the  fact  that  photography  is  not  a  branch  of 
mechanics,  nor  photographers  a  sort  of  mechanic  themselves,  but  that  both  are  entitled  to  respect,  the 
same  as  the  family  physician  or  the  minister  ;  that  the  photographer  has  rights  as  well  as  the  public  ; 
that  he  must  be  trusted,  and  that  he  alone  is  responsible  for  his  results.  Moreover,  that  he  must  make 
the  picture  and  not  they. 

How  far  the  work  serves  these  three  ends  the  reader  must  judge  from  the  testimonials  below,  of  a 
few  of  those  who  have  been  using  our  little  publication  in  their  business. 

We  believe  it  will  pay  you  to  use  it,  and  that  you  will  assist  just  that  much  in  elevating  your  art  and 
your  craft,  an  object  which  we  are  all  working  for. 

We  get  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Tatrons^  up  in  neat  style,  on  the  best  letter  cap  paper,  assorted 
tints,  green,  pink,  and  buff.  Eight  pages  are  devoted  to  the  body  of  the  work,  which  contains  para- 
graphs or  chapters — 1,  on  the  object  of  the  work  ;  2,  on  photography  ;  3,  when  to  come  ;  4,  how  to 
come ;  5,  how  to  dress  ;  6,  how  to  "  behave  ;  7,  the  children  ;  8,  general  remarks  on  coloring,  copy- 
ing, frames,  prices,  &o. 

All  this  is  inclosed  in  a  cover  of  the  same  kind  of  paper,  the  pages  of  which  are  at  the  service  of 
the  photographer  who  orders  them  to  have  printed  thereon  anything  he  may  please,  which  printing 
we  do  without  extra  charge.  The  cuts  on  the  opposite  page  and  others  we  supply  free.  We  publish 
this  leaflet  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

1000  copies,   cover  included,     .     .  $20  00      I      3000  copies,  cover  included,     .     .  $50  00 
2000       "  "  "  .     .     35  00  5000       "  "  "  .     .     75  00 

We  will  send  samples  of  the  book  and  special  rates  to  any  who  may  desire  it.  Over  500,000  have 
been  sold. 

We  invite  you  to  examine  the  good  words  which  our  patrons  have  sent  us  concerning  this  publication. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"  I  sent  one  out  West  to  a  friend,  and  she 
wrote  that  she  was  now  posted,  and  when  she 
came  here  to  have  a  picture  made,  she  would 
come  'according  to  directions.'  " — A.  Bogar- 
dus,  New  York. 

"  A  grand  idea." — Elbert  Anderson. 

"  A  splendid  medium  for  educating  'skulls' 
that  cannot  think  and  will  not  learn." — Wm.  H. 
Whitehead,  Pittsburg,  Pa. 

"It  is  eagerly  sought  for  and  read  by  every- 
body who  visits  our  Gallery.'' — J.  Gurney  & 
Son,  New  York. 

"It  assists  me  greatly." — James  Mullen, 
Lexington,  Ky. 

"  The  many  valuable  hints  in  it  cannot  fail  to 
be  beneficial  to  both  photographer  and  patron." 
— Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  W.  Virginia. 


"They  are  the  best  kind  of  business  cards  a 
photographer  can  have." — T.  S.  Estabrooke, 
Brooklyn. 

"  You  have  conferred  a  great  favor  on  the  fra- 
ternity in  supplying  it,  and  we  hope  it  will  bene- 
fit some  of  the  '  know -every  things'1  in  this  quar- 
ter." — A.  C.  McIntyre  &  Co.,  Ogdensburg. 

' '  They  are  just  the  thing  to  post  people  up  on 
what  they  ought  to  know  in  order  to  secure  good 
pictures." — J.  P.  Whipple,  White  Water. 


on 


joures. " — J.  if.  Whipple,   w  nite  wj 

"  I  really  think  your  little  book  '  hits  the  nail 
the  head.'  "—J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

"It  is  the  best  advertising  medium  I  have 
ever  found." — H.  M.  Sedgewick,  Granville,  O. 

"  I  think  they  are  a  perfect  success,  and  will 
do  us  photographers  a  great  deal  of  good." — G 
W.  Mathis. 


BEERMAN  &  WILSON,  PMoppMc  PiMista, 

SEVENTH  &  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


0m  WtoWMtfy 


IN  EVERT  VARIETY. 


No.  4  BEEKMAN  STREET,  NEW  YORK, 
No.  73  BOLD  STREET,  LIVERPOOL,  ENGLAND. 


DEALERS  SUPPLIED  WITH  THE  BEST  GOODS  OH  THE  BEST  TERMS, 


Our  own  extensive  facilities  for  manufacturing  enable  us  to  produce  first  quality  of  goods, 
and  our  extensive  connections  at  home  and  abroad  give  us  facilities  which  no  one  else  has. 


MANUFACTORIES :  WaS$  SsS?J5S!:  * 


SEE  OTHER  ADVERTISEMENTS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  BOOKS  and  MAGAZINES 


Examine  Scovill's  Photographic  Clocto,  and  Real  Hie  PMograpliic  Times. 


THE  ZENTMAYER  LENS 

For  Views  and  Copying. 


These  Lenses  possess  pre-eminently,  the  following  qualities  : 

Width  of  visual  angle,  ranging  from  80°  to  90°;  depth  of  focus;  extreme  sharpness  over  the 
whole  field  ;  true  perspective  ;  freedom  from  all  distortion  in  copying  ;  portability  and  cheapness. 

Each  mounting  is  provided  with  a  revolving  Diaphragm,  containing  the  stops  of  the  different  com- 
binations for  which  they  are  designed.  The  larger  ones  are  provided  with  an  internal  shutter  for 
making  and  closing  the  exposure. 


No.  1, 
"  2, 
"  3, 
"  4,  8 
"  5,  12 
"    6,  18 


2k  inch  focus, 

51 


3  x 

4  x 
6Jx 

10    x 
14    x    1 
20 


3  plate,  . 

.  $20  00 

5   '"'   . 

.  25  00 

8J  "      . 

.  30  00 

12  "   . 

.  42  00 

17  "   . 

.   60  00 

24  "   . 

.  90  00 

No.  1  and  No.  2  combined, 

"  2     "      "    3 

"  3    "      "    4 

"  4    "      "5 

"  5    "      "    6 

"  1,  2,  and  3, 

"  3,  4,  and  5, 


$33  00 
40  00 
55  00 
75  00 

110  00 
48  00 
88  00 


No.  3,  with  large  mounting  to  combine  with  No.  4  and  No.  5,  $35. 

No.  1  and  No.  2,  specially  adapted  for  Stereoscopic  Views,  are  furnished  in  matched  pairs.  No.  1 
and  No.  2,  single,  not  to  combine  with  other  sizes,  $36  a  pair. 

Lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six  combinations,  from  2£  to  18  inches,  $173. 

Zentmayer's  Stereoscopic  outfits,  including  a  pair  of  No.  2  Lenses  4x7  box,  7  x  10  India  Rubber 
Bath  and  Dipper,  Tripod,  Printing  Frames,  and  outside  box,  $60. 

JOSEPH  ZENTMAYER,  Manufacturer, 

147  South  Fourth  Street,  Philadelphia. 


Dealers  selecting  their  autumn  stock  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  would  do  well  to  examine  our 

unrivalled  variety  of  Views  of 

THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS, 

NIAGARA,   WASHINGTON, 

FAIRMOUNT  PARK,  PHILADELPHIA,    * 

FLOWERS,  GROUPS,  &c. 

JS3~  Q,UAIiITT  UNSURPASSED  ! 


KILBURN  BROS.,  Littleton,  New  Hampshire. 


NIAGARA 


STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS. 


Winter  and  Summer  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  of  all  sizes.     Trade  supplied  on  good  terms.     Variety 
unequalled. 

G.  E.  CURTIS,  Photographer, 

Niagara  Falls,  N\  Y. 


Mr.  Curtis'  views  answer  Mr.  Robinson's  query  :   "Are  there  any  clouds  in  America?  " 


KYLIGHT 


THE 

AND  THE 


ARK-ROOM 


By  ELBERT  ANDERSON, 

Is  tie  Most  Useful,  Elaborate,  anfl  HaisomeWork  ever  issnefl  on  Photoffraphy . 

IT  IS  EMPHATICALLY  A  WORKING  PHOTOGRAPHER'S  BOOK. 


PRICE  $4.00. 

PLEASE  READ  THE  OTHER  ADVERTISEMENTS  AND  TESTIMONIALS. 

The  book  contains  a  vast  amount  of  invaluable  information  nev.er  found  in  elementary  works  on 
this  subject.  There  are  no  visionary  nor  theoretical  notions  ;  there  is  not  a  single  manipulation  given 
that  has  not  been  practiced  a  thousand  times  over  by  the  author. 

Among  many  other  things  it  treats  fully  on  the  following : 

Optics. — Decomposition  of  Light — Colors  of  Bodies — Complementary  Colors — Interference  of  Waves 
of  Light — Dispersion  of  Lenses — The  Diaphragm — Curvature  of  Field — Optical  Instruments — The 
Magic  Lantern — Camera  Obscura — The  Eye — Insensibility  of  a  Certain  Portion  of  the  Retina — Ster- 
eoscopicity — The  Stereoscope — The  Refracting  Stereoscope — Polarization  of  Light. 

Outlines  op  Chemistry. — The  Atomic  Theory — Atomic  Weight — Chemical  Equivalents — Nomencla- 
ture of  the  Elements — Diffusion  of  Gases — Double  Decomposition — Crystallization — Efflorescence — 
Deliquescence — Cleavage — Chemical  Affinity — On  the  Chemical  Action  of  Light — Theory  of  Photog- 
raphy. 

Photography. — Photographic  Chemicals — The  Skylight — The  Backgrounds — Accessories — Reflectors — 
The  Platform — The  Reception-Room — The  Dark-Room — The  Tanks — The  Chemical  Room — On  the 
Selection  of  Glass  for  Negatives — On  the  Method  of  Cleaning  the  Plates — Polishing  the  Plates — Al- 
bumenizing  the  Plates — Preparation  of  the  Albumen — Collodion — Iodides  and  Bromides  used  in 
Collodion — Formula  for  Iodized  Collodion — Elbert  Anderson's  Portrait  Collodion — The  Negative 
Bath — Development — Nature  of  the. Invisible  Image — Developing  and  Redeveloping — Effects  of  In- 
tensification— The  Fixing  Solutions — Rectification  of  the  Negative  Bath — To  Fuse  the  Bath — To 
Restore  a  Disordered  Bath  by  Precipitation — To  Throw  Down  the  Silver  in  the  Metallic  State — The 
Camera — The  Plateholder — The  Lens — Varnishing  the  Negative — Negative  Varnish — Retouching  the 
Negative — The  Printing-Room — Silvering  Plain  Paper — Ammonio-Nitrate  of  Silver — Albumen  Paper 
— The  Positive  Bath — To  Silver  the  Paper — Fuming — The  Print — The  Press — Vignette  Printing 
Boards — Medallion  Printing — Fancy  Medallion  Printing — Washing  the  Prints — Toning  the  Prints — 
Fixing  Bath — The  Washing  Tank — Mounting — The  Press — Encaustic  Paste — Miscellaneous  Hints — 
Porcelain  Printing  by  the  Collodio-Chloride  Process — Collodio-Chloride — Porcelain  Printing  Frames 
— The  Ferrotype — Transparencies  for  the  Magic  Lantern  :  How  Made — By  the  Copying  Camera — By 
Direct  Printing  on  Dry  Plates — By  the  Collodio-Chloride  Process — Coloring  Magic  Lantern  Slides — 
On  Copying — To  Clean  a  Daguerreotype — On  the  Recovery  of  Silver  from  the  Wastes — Silver  from 
the  Developer — The  Washings  from  the  Prints — Waste  from  the  Toning  Bath — Clippings,  Filters,  &c. 
— Of  the  Treatment  of  these  Residues. 

Art  as  Applied  to  Photography. — Balance  of  Lines — Perspective — Drawbacks  of  the  Camera — 
Examples  of  Distortion  of  the  Camera — Curious  Effects  of  Distance  of  a  Lens — Imperfections  of  the 
Human  Face — Brilliancy — Relief — Position 

Details  op  Manipulations. — Manipulation  No.  1 — Exposure — Manipulation  No.  2 — Remarks  on 
Development — Pinholes — Fogging — Filtering  the  Bath. 

It  also  contains  a  Great  Number  of  Original  Illustra- 
tions, and  12  Interesting  Photographs, 

The  book  is  written  in  a  style  at  once  dignified,  elegant,  and  yet  perfectly  simple,  and  almost  the 
only  streak  of  the  author's  well-known  humor  is  to  be  found  in  the  preface,  which  is  alone  worth 
the  price  of  the  book.  ' 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 


For  Sale  by  all  Dealers. 


S.  W.  cor.  7th  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


JAG  OBIT'S 

IMITATION  PORCELAIN 


AND 


Combination  Printing  Frame 

WITH  SELF-ADJUSTING  SPKING-  BED,  CLAMPING  SPRINGS, 
YIGNETTING  ARRANGEMENTS, 

FOR  PORCELAIN  AND  CONTACT  PRINTING. 


Any  negative  may  be  used  with  suecess.  The  time  of  printing  is  the  same  as  in  common  printing, 
and  may  be  done  in  any  kind  of  weather.  Pictures  printed  with  this  frame  need  but  little  retouching, 
or  not  as  fine  retouching  to  get  the  finest  effects. 

I  need  not  comment  on  this  frame,  for  when  tried  will  prove  for  itself.  For  printing  on  the  Por- 
celain plate  it  is  best  and  a  success.  Having  a  self-adjusting  bed,  will  form  to  any  thickness  of  plate. 
For  common  printing  it  is  complete.  But  the  most  to  be  praised  is  the  Imitation  Porcelain  for  which  it 
is  invented,  which  all  prefer  to  the  genuine  Porcelain,  for  the  reason  they  can  be  sent  by  mail  and  will 
not  break.  They  are  printed  on  Albumen  Paper,  the  same  as  a  Card  Photograph,  and  when  framed 
in  a  velvet  Passepartout  can  scarcely  be  detected  from  the  genuine  Porcelain. 

I  have  used  one  of  these  frames  in  my  gallery  the  last  year,  charging  two  dollars  per  dozen  more 
for  this  kind  of  work.  All  of  my  patrons  prefer  this  to  the  porcelain,  and  find  no  fault  with  the  price. 
I  have  therefore  secured  a  patent,  and  propose  to  manufacture  and  put  them  in  the  market  for  sale, 
that  others  may  use  them.  I  feel  satisfied  that  by  trying  them  they  will  prove  satisfactory ;  if  not, 
you  can  return  the  same  by  paying  charges. 

Specimens  published  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  in  the  April  and  October  numbers,  1873. 
Be  sure  and  see  them.     Stockdealers  will  be  supplied  from  the  factory  at  Minneapolis,  Minnesota. 


SIZES     A3XTX3     PRICES. 

Frame  for  1-4  Negative,    ....  $4  00     I     Frame  for  6£  x  8£  Negative, 
5x7       "  ....      5  00     I  "  8x10 

Frame  for  11x14  Negative,     .     .     .     .     $6  25 


$5  50 
5  75 


Any  other  size  made  to  order.     Terms,    Cash  or  C.  O.  D.     Parties  not  finding  them  with  their 
Stockdealers  can  order  them  from 


P.  0.  Box  1758. 


W.  H.  JACOBY,  Minneapolis,  Minn. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 
#     * 


FOR  $3.00  EACH. 


THE  PUBLICATION  OF  THE 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    WORLD 


Having  been  suspended,  the  publishers  offer  the  FEW  KEMAHsTlNG- 
YOLUMES  on  hand  for  the  exceedingly  low  price  of  $3.00  A  VOLUME. 

They  contain  many  of  the  best  home  and  foreign  contributions  to  photo- 
graphic literature  ever  published.     Among  which  are  a  series  of  papers  on 

POSITION  AND  COMPOSITION, 

AND   ANOTHER   ENTITLED 

LANDSCAPE   LESSONS, 

Both  of  which  are  beautifully  illustrated,  and  alone  worth  more  than  the 
cost  of  the  volumes.  The  pictures  in  both  volumes  are  varied  in  style,  are 
very  beautiful,  and  a  dozen  such  pictures  could  not  be  bought  for  twice  the 
price  asked  for  the  whole  volume  of  the  World. 


SJEJE   THE   LIST. 


VOL.  I. 


January.  Photo-Relief  Print.  Woodbury  Pro- 
cess. By  American  Photo-Relief  Printing 
Co.,  Philadelphia. 

February.  "  Giant's  Causeway."  Landscape. 
By  G.  W.  Wilson,  Aberdeen,  Scotland. 

March.  Portrait  Studies.  By  J.  Grasshoff,  Ber- 
lin, Prussia. 

April.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  J.  Grasshoff,  Ber- 
lin, Prussia. 

May.  Victoria  Holyoake  Portraits.  By  Sud- 
dards  &  Fennemore,  Philadelphia. 

June.  Carte  Studies  of  Children.  By  John  A. 
Scholten,  St.  Louis,*  Mo. 

July.  Cabinet  Portraits.  By  W.  H.  Jacoby, 
Minneapolis,  Minn. 

August.  "Just  as  I  am.''  Reproduction  from 
Drawing      By  W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

September.  "Reflections."  By  T.  T.  Sweeny, 
Cleveland,  Ohio. 

October.  Statuary.  By  J.  H.  Kent,  Rochester, 
New  York. 

November.  "  Both  Puzzled."  Woodbury  Print. 
By  Am.  Photo-Relief  Printing  Co. 

December.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  M.  B.  Brady. 
New  York. 


VOL.  IL 


By  W.   Kurtz, 
By  A.  N.  Hardy, 


January.      Cabinet  Portrait. 
New  York. 

February.     Cabinet  Portrait. 
Boston,  Mass. 

March.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  H.  Rocher,  Chi- 
cago, 111. 

April.     Cameo   Cabinet   Portrait.      By   W.    C. 
North,  Utica,  N.  Y. 

May.      Cabinet   Portrait.      By  Jones   &    Stiff, 
Salem,  Mass. 

June.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  Dinmore  &  Wil- 
son, Baltimore,  Md. 

July.       Cabinet  Portrait.     By   J.   H.    Lamson, 
Portland,  Me. 

August.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  B.   M.    Cline- 
dinst,  Staunton,  Va. 

September.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  J.  A.  Schol- 
ten &  Co.,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

October.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  J.  Landy,  Cin- 
cinnati, Ohio. 

November.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  J.  A.  Schol- 
ten &  Co.,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

December.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  C.  D.  Mosher, 
Chicago,  111. 


Order  soon  if  you  want  them.     Postage  payable  at  your  own  office,  or 
36  cents  extra,  prepaid. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 

EGGSHELL,  GLOSSY,  CHOCOLATE-TINTED. 

(PATENTED  MARCH  1st,  1870.) 

ALL  SIZES,  FEOM  1-9  to  10x14.  BLACK  AND  CHOCOLATE. 

THE  PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Worcester,  Mass., 

ARE  NOW  MAKING  THE  MOST  POPULAR  BRAND  OF  PLATES  IN  THE  TRADE. 


PHICB     XjIST 

Size. 

Eggshell. 

Glossy. 

Size. 

Eggshell. 

Glossy. 

Per  Box  of  8  Doz. 

1-9 

$0.80 

$0.90 

Per  Box  of  2  Doz. 

4-4 

$2.40 

$2.70 

"           8     " 

1-6 

1.25 

1.35 

a              4.      << 

5-7 

2.40 

2.70 

«            8     " 

1-4 

1.85 

2.00 

<<               2      " 

7-10 

2.70 

2.90 

"            4     " 

4Jx6£ 

1.85 

2.00 

<(            2     " 

8x10 

2.70 

2.90 

"            4     " 

1-2 

2.20 

2.35 

Per  Sheet, 

10x14 

.14 

.15 

«            2     " 

4JxlO 

2.20 

2.35 

Kkyisbd,  New  York, 

December  28th,  1872 

EGGSHELL,    GLOSSY,   AND   CHOCOLATE-TINTED   PLATES,    ALL   SIZES   AND    STYLES, 
ALWAYS   ON    HAND   AND   READY   FOR   DELIVERY. 

Each  package  of  Phenix  Plates  has  printed  on  the  wrapper,  "Manufactured 

by  the  Phenix  Plate  Co.,  Worcester,  Mass.,"  and  none 

are  genuine  unless  bearing  that  stamp. 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  constitu- 
ting them  our  sole  and  exclusive  agents  for  the  sale  of  our  Plates. 

That  company  is  so  well  and  favorably  known  in  the  business,  that  no  com- 
mendation of  ours  is  required  to  assure  the  Trade  that  they  will  be  liberally 
dealt  with  in  every  respect. 

Ptenix  Plates  are  for  sale  ly  all  Stock  Dealers  tbroilioiit  tlie  country. 

PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Manufacturers, 

Worcester,  Mass, 

SCOTILL  MFG.  CO.,  Aleuts  for  the  Me,  I  Beeta  St.,  I Y. 


SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT. 


ALL  PERSONS  ARE  HEREBY  NOTIFIED,  and  cautioned  against  infringing  my  Solar  Camera 
Patent. 

Infringers  will  settle  with  H.  L.  Emmons,   Att.orney-at-Law,   Baltimore,   Md. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD, 

Baltimore,  Md, 

DO   YOUR   OWN   SOLAR   PRINTING. 

SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT  LICENSE  AND  STAMP 

Good  for  the  future  at  $40.     May  be  ordered  through  your  STOCKDEALER  or  from  the  PATENTEE. 

I>.  A.  WOODWARD,  Baltimore,  Md. 

AUG.  SCHWARZE.  SCHWARZE     &    VALK  WILLIAM  VALK. 

NO.    614    ARCH   STREET,    PHILADELPHIA. 

most  ciPsiD0FEET™  0F  German  AlMmen  Paper,  anil  Arrowroot  Plain  Salted  Paper. 

DEALERS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  MATERIALS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 

Will  mail  to  any  address  in  the  country,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  $1,  one  dozen  sheets  of  Assorted  Photo- 
graphic Paper,  each  sheet  being  numbered  for  distinction. 


No,  50  Cedar  Street,  New  York, 

SOLE  AGENTS  FOR 

F.  Z.  IMPERIAL"  DRESDEN  ALBUMEN  PAPER 

Rives  and  Steinbach  ;  Light  and  Heatt     White,  Pink,  and  Blue. 


We  beg  leave  to  inform  the  Photographic  Stockhouses  that  we  keep  a  complete  assortment  of 
"  F.  Z.  IMPERIAL"  ALBUMEN  PAPER  always  on  hand,  and  offer  it  to  the  trade  at  the  lowest 
market  prices. 

KARSTENS  &  BRAUN,  No.  50  Cedar  Street,  New  York. 

Gh.    SATJTUB. 

JYo.    138   South   Eighth  Street,   Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURER  AND   WHOLESALE  DEALER  IN 


The  attention  of  the  trade  is  particularly  called  to  the  superior  quality  of  our  Glass  and  materials 
and  neatness  of  finish.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand. 


SiLL®iK    &    CRENSI 

No.  528  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia, 


MANUFACTURERS  AND  IMPORTERS  OF  PURE  CHEMICALS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 
IMPORTERS  OF  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN,  APPARATUS,  ETC. 


^LOOKOUT 

PHOTOGRAPHY 

A  Pocket  Manual  for  tie  Landscape  PMoirapler, 

YET  CONTAINING  MANY  USEFUL  HINTS  FOE  ALL  PHOTOGKAPHEES. 

By  the  Late  Prof.  R.  M.  LINN, 

LOOKOUT  MOUNTAIN,  TENN 

This  admirable  little  work  was  published  last  fall,  a  little  too  late  for  the  season.  It  is 
now  confidently  recommended  to  every  photographer  about  to  do  any  class  of  work,  outside 
or  inside  the  skylight. 

CONTENTS. 


Introductory. 

Main  Requisites  of  a  Good  Photographic  Land- 
scape. 

Artistic  Effect. 

Proper  Illumination. 

Direction  of  Light. 

Clouds. 

Length  of  Exposure. 

Apparatus  for  Field  Work. 

On  the  Selection  of  View  Lenses. 

Camera  Boxes. 

Bath  Cups. 

Preliminary  Preparations. 

Taking  the  Field. 

Hints  on  Printing  and  Finishing. 

To  Print  Clouds". 

Toning  Bath  for  Views. 

On  Fixing  and  W ashing  Prints. 

Suggestions  on  Mounting  Prints. 

To  Cut  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

To  Mount  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

Formulae  and  Processes  for  Landscape  Photog- 
raphy. 

Ever-ready  Iodizer  for  Landscape  Photography. 


Remarks  on  Preparing  and  Using  Iodizer. 

On  the  Management  of  Flowing  Bottles. 

On  the  Preparation  of  Plain  Collodion. 

The  Silver  Bath  for  Negatives. 

To  Renovate  an  Old  Negative  Bath. 

To  Prepare  Carbonate  of  Silver. 

Permanganate  of  Potash — Its  Use  in  our  Art. 

Preparation  and  Using  of  Developer. 

Fixing  Solution  for  View  Negatives. 

On  Redeveloping  and  Strengthening  Agents. 

To  Clean  and  Polish  the  Glass. 

To  Prepare  Chloride  of  Gold  Solution. 

The  Paste  for  Mounting  of  Photographs. 

The   Operator's   Oracle — Failures  :    Causes  and 

Remedies  ;  for  consultation  in  time  of  trouble. 
Counsels  and  Cautions  for  the  Printer,  including 

Formulas  for  Silvering  Bath,  &c 
Failures  in  Silvering  Albumenized  Paper. 
Failures  in  Toning  Photographs. 
Failures  in  Fixing  Photographs. 
Instantaneous  Photography. 
View  Photography  Financially  Considered. 
Stereoscoping  Applied  to  Portraiture. 
Concluding  Remarks. 


POTCS   75   C*Wt$. 


It  is  a  Perfect  Success,  and  is 

Selling  Well  and  Pleasing  Everybody 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


THE  WOODBURY  LANTERN  SLIDE. 

.Extract from  the  Proceedings  of  the  Berlin  Photographic  Society  : 
"  Subsequently  various  pictures  were  exhibited,  including  a  collection  of  American  photographic 
lantern  slides,  done  by  the  Woodbury  process,  which  elicited  very  high  praise  for  their  clearness,  del- 
icacy, and  wonderful  detail.     In  particular,  a  view  of  the  moon  was  thought  to  be  very  remarkable." 

PRICE   OF  TRANSPARENCIES: 

Per  slide $1  00 

"    dozen 9  00 

"    hundred , '. 65  00 

The  trade  supplied.     Send  for  catalogue.     Address  all  orders  to 

J.  CARBUTT,  Supt.,  American  Photo-Relief  Printing  Co., 

1002  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

N.  B. — About  November  1st  will  remove  to  our  new  and  spacious  building,  Twenty-fourth  Street, 
above  Green. 

WM.  H.  MARDOCK  &  CO., 

Manufacturing    Chemists, 

Beg  to  -|  ._      ■  »i'm«7    fimitTlTim    f       One  Block  west  of 

"TCis"rval|No.l5  AMITY  STREETJB^straiia 

NEW  YORK, 

MANUFACTURERS    OF 

Superior  Photographic  Chemicals 

AND  SPECIALTIES 

Sole  Importers  op  the  Celebrated  Eoyal  Brand  op 

AIiBUMESNIZISD   PAPER, 

In  Pink,  White,  or  Blue,  Rives  and  Steinbach,  Single  or  Double  Albumenized. 
AGENTS  FOR  AUG.  SEMMENDINGER'S 

stjbebior  C-A.:m::e:r,_a.  boxes, 

Fitted  with  Patent  Brass  Rollers,  and  the  new  Reversible  Silver  Corners  (Patent  applied  for.) 

C^  Photographic  Materials  of  every  description. 

LIESEGANG'S  ALBUMEN  PAPER 

Is  used  and  recommended  by  the  London  Stereoscopic  Company  ;  Messrs.  Alessandri  Fratelli, 
of  Rome  ;  Le  Lieure,  of  Eome  ;  A.  Sorgato,  of  Venice  ;  Er.  Bruckmann,  of  Munich ;  C.  Reut- 
linger,  of  Paris ;  C.  Bergamasio,  of  Petersburg ;  Abdullah,  of  Constantinople ;  and  many 
other  first  class  photographers  throughout  the  World. 

IT  IS  THE  BEST  PAPER  IN  THE  MARKET. 

Sample  sheets,  and  English,  French,  and  German  Price  List  to  be  had  free  on  application  > 
from  the  Manufacturer. 


9 

DUSSELDORF    ON    THE    RHINE,   GERMANY, 

(FORMERLY  AT  ELBERFELD). 

For  Sale  by  SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  New  York. 


AYRES'  CHART  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  DRAPERY, 

Shows  what  color  dress  should  be  worn,  and  what  color  Sack- 
ground  and  Accessories  to  use  in  the  Photograph. 

This  "  Chart  "  designed  by  George  B.  Ayres,  author  of  "How  to  Paint  Photographs,'1 
is  a  photographic  copy  of  42  pieces  of  woolen  colored  cloth,  showing  exactly  how  each  color 
will  photograph  or  "  take,"-  and  if  used  will  be  found  one  of  the  best  paying  investments 
the  photographer  can  make.  The  colors  are  arranged  in  rows  and  numbered,  with  a  sched- 
ule attached,  so  that  any  one  can  refer  to  and  use  it.  The  Photograph  is  of  large  size,  on 
extra  heavy  card,  with  a  list  and  explanation,  handsomely  printed  in  brown  ink. 

It  will  be  sent  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  $2.00.     For  sale  by  all  stockdealers. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

PHOTOGRAPHERS,:^;™,  GLASS. 


Very  Superior,  Single  Thick  Crystal. 

6 \ i8},8i  10, 10 x  14,  16  x 20,  and  all  other  Sizes  used  by  Photographers  and  Picture  Dealers. 

FOR  SALE  CHEAP. 
TOGETHER  WITH  PLATE    AND    CRYSTAL    GLASS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION,  BY 

BENJAMIN  H.  SHOEMAKER, 

FRENCH  PLATE  GLASS  DEPOT, 
205,  207,  209,  &  211  _ZV.  Fourth  St.,  Philadelphia. 

GEORGE  ROTTER  &  CO., 

DRESDEN,  GERMANY, 

MANUFACTURERS   OP 

ALBUMEN    PAPERS, 

Kives  and  Steinbach;  Light  and  Heavy;  "White,  Pink,  and  Blue. 

Our  excellent  Albumen  Papers  to  which  the  first  premium,  the  silver  medal,  was  awarded  at  the 
Photographic  Exhibition  at  Hamburg,  1868,  both  single  and  double  nlbumenized,  can  be  worked  suc- 
cessfully by  any  formula  in  use.  It  prints  and  tones  rapidly,  producing  faithfully  the  finest  effects  of 
the  negatives.  Even  with  a  slight  silvering,  in  a  completely  neutral  silver  bath  (1 :  15-20),  they  pro- 
duce in  the  gold  bath  a  rich,  succulent,  and  warm  tone.  We  warmly  recommend  them  to  all  photo- 
graphic stockhouses. 


@\/ill 


MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 


No.  4  Beekman  Street,  New  York, 


WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  STOCK 


DEALERS  8UPPIHBD 

On  the  Most  Advantageous  Terms,  with 

EVERY  ARTICLE  IN  THE  WORLD 

Used  or  sold  in  the  Art  of  Photography. 


jUgg^  Our  facilities  are  such  that  we  cannot  be  superseded  by  any- 
other  house  anywheres.  We  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to 
deal  with  us. 


ASK  YOUR  DEALER  FOR  SCOVILL'S  GOODS. 


SeeTZi:za::rnt'  "photographic  times." 


f  he  latent  fjtjtomtfetutw* 

WITH 

INCREASED  FACILITIES, 

STEAM-POWER, 

AND  MACHINERY, 

1  am  prepared  to  furnish 


1PPAR1TU 


FKOM 


CAMERA  BOXES  TO  PRINTING  FRAMES, 


AT  BOTTOM  PEICES, 


And  will  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to  deal  with  me. 


NO.    65    EAST    INDIANA    STKEET, 


CHIC-A-G-O. 


LATE   ANDERSON   &    BIXBY. 


flMHlfty 


FOR  1874. 


EDITED  BY  EDWARD  L.  WILSON. 


This  favorite    annual  is    NOW   READY,    wholly    filled   with   Articles  prepared 
expressly  for  it  by  the  eminent  photographers  of  Europe  and  America,  and  is 

UNUSUALLY  GOOD! 


BEAD   THE  CONTENTS: 


1873  ;  On  the  Sensitiveness  of  Bromide  of  Sil- 
ver ;  Toning  and  Fixing ;  Is  Honesty  the  Best 
Policy?  Transparent  Paper;  Growing;  A  New 
Test  for  Hyposulphite  of  Sodium ;  Chemical 
Manipulation  and  Collodion ;  How  to  Buy  a 
Lens  ;  Copying  of  Every  Description  Executed 
in  the  Highest  Style  of  the  Art ;  Expression  ; 
The  Reception-Room  ;  Treatment  of  Prints  after 
Toning ;  Public  Taste  ;  Plate  Vise ;  Progress  of 
Photography  in  America  ;  How  to  be  a  Photog- 
rapher of  the  Times  ;  The  Uncertainties  of  Pho- 
tography ;  Exploration  Field  Photography  ;  How 
to  Make  Varnish  for  Negatives,  and  How  to 
Varnish  Them ;  Porcelain  Printing ;  How  to 
Elevate  Our  Art ;  Lighting  for  Portraits  ;  Some- 
thing Practical ;  Photographs  ;  Negative  Var- 
nish ;  Lighting  the  Sitter  ;  Photographic  Excel- 
lence ;  On  Certain  Causes  of  Failure  and  Success 
in  Photography ;  Negative  Retouching ;  The 
Roller  Press  and  Burnisher ;  Recovery  of  Gold 
and  Silver  from  the  Waste  or  Spent  Solutions ; 


Concerning  Formulae ;  Notes  on  Photographic 
Subjects ;  Hints  on  Photographic  Printing  ; 
Things  which  Hurt ;  Collodion  Transfers  ;  Along- 
side ;  A  Chapter  on  Practical  Matters  ;  What  to 
do  with  Negative  Baths  which  have  been  Ren- 
dered Unserviceable  by  Constant  Usage  ;  Photo- 
graphic Literature  ;  Influence  of  Long  and  Short 
Exposures  upon  the  Brilliancy  of  the  Pictures ; 
Wet-Plate  Photography  Out  of  Doors  ;  Sandarac 
and  Benzoin  Varnish  ;  On  Printing,  and  How  to 
do  it ;  Cleansing  a  Discolored  Printing  Bath  ; 
On  the  Double  Iodides  and  Bromides,  and  How 
to  Prepare  Them  ;  Backgrounds  :  Mr.  Faulkner's 
Method  of  Making  Them  ;  A  Practical  Sugges- 
tion for  Stereo-Landscape  Negatives  ;  Preparing 
Photographs,  etc.,  for  Coloring;  No  More  Pin- 
Holes;  Successive  Development;  The  Green- 
Glass  Question  ;  Backgrounds  ;  Transparencies 
for  the  Stereoscope ;  Lantern  Pictures  ;  The 
Dark-Room ;  Photographing  in  Hot  Climates  ; 
Many  Mites  from  Many  Minds. 


Price,  in  Cloth,  $1.00 ;  in  Paper  Cover,  50  Cents. 


Tie  Best  Little  HaMlooS  of  Plotograiy  in  He  World.       For  Sale  by  all  Dealers. 


BEJSTEJRMAJf  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


GRAND  MEDAL  OF  MERIT, 

AWARDED  AT  VIENNA  TO 


SEND  FOB  A  CATALOGUE. 


Charles  Bierstadt, 


LANDSCAPE 
PHOTOGRAPHER, 

Trade  supplied  with  the  hest  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  Hudson  River,  Saratoga,  Partage, 
New  York,Watkins'  Glen,  Havana  Glen,  California,  Yosemite  Valley,  Rogers'  Statuary,  &c. 


t,  Niagara  Falls,  N.Y. 


D.  J.  RYAN'S 

Southern  Photographic  and  Ferrotype 

STOCK     DEPOT, 

SAVANNAH,    GA. 

First- Class  Stock  at  Northern  Prices, 

Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance,  Drayage,  &c. 

fl®-  SEND  FOR  PRICE  LIST. 


P.  G.  WELLER,  PUBLISHER  OF  STEREOSCOPIC  VIEWS 

OF  THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS  AND  VICINITY  AND  MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS, 

LITTLETON,  N.  H. 

SPECIALTY:  WELLER'S  STEREOSCOPIC  TREASURES,  which  embrace  a  series  of  subject  pic- 
tures from  nature,  such  as  are  not  made  by  any  other  artdst  in  the  country.  New  subjects  added  continually. 
Dealers  and  jobbers  supplied  on  favorable  terms. 


AT  VIENNA 


Highest  Award 


TO    ANT    EUROPEAN    PHOTOGRAPHERS  "WAS 
MADE    TO 


LOESHER  &  PETSCH, 


FOR    THEIR 


Admirable 
STUDIES! 


At'the  request  of  several  parties,  we  herewith  submit  to  the  Photographers  of  America, 
this  grand  collection  of  portraits  and  still-life  pictures  from  the  Atelier  of  Messrs.  Loesher 
&  Petsch,  in  Berlin.  The  praise  which  has  been  bestowed  upon  these  pictures,  particularly 
at  the  Vienna  Exhibition,  convinces  us  that  they  should  be  treasured  as  suitable  models  of 
pose  and  lighting  of  the  sitter,  harmonious  and  artistic  arrangement  of  furniture,  etc. 

The  prints  have  been  made  without  resorting  to  so-called  tricks,  and  extraordinary  retouch- 
ing has  also  been  avoided,  for  the  double  purpose  of  giving  a  better  insight  into  photogra- 
phic technicalities,  and  also,  in  order  to  reduce  the  price.  These  photographs  are  the  only 
European  ones  to  which  the  international  jury  awarded  the  two  medals  for  progress  and 
taste.     Mr.  Lewitzky,  a  photographer,  and  member  of  the  jury,  exclaimed: 

"The  exhibition  of  Messrs.  Loesher  &  Petsch  has  charmed  me  ;  according  to  my  opin- 
ion, Loesher  &  Petsch,  in  Europe,  and  Kurtz,  in  New  York,  are  the  first  photographers 
of  the  world  !" 

THEY  AEE  INDEED  MOST  EXQUISITE. 

"We  will  Express  the  sett  on  receipt  of  $30,  or  post  them  at  your  risk  to  any  address.  The 
price  is  remarkably  low,  as  each  print  is  most  carefully  made. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

See  review  of  these  pictures  in  the  "  Philadelphia  Photographer  "  for  last  month. 


Just  the  thing  needed  ! 


ENTJEtEKIN'S 


OSCILLATING 


FOR 


Burnishing  Photographs 

GIVING 

A  BEAUTIFUL  FINISH  AND  GLOSS, 

FAR  SUPERIOR  TO  ANYTHING  TET  INVENTED  FOR  THAT  PURPOSE. 

The  Enameler  is  the  invention  of  a  practical  photographer,  and  has  been  thoroughly 
tested  ;  it  is  simply  perfect.  Any  person  can  work  it  and  produce  the  most  charming 
results.     It  will  be  sold  to  the  fraternity  at  a  fair  price. 

Office  of  C.  M.  Parks,  Late  Principal  Examiner  in  the  Patent  Office, 
Washington,  December  12th,  1873. 
William  G.  Entrekin. 

Dear  Sir  :  I  am  familiar  with  the  class  of  machines  to  which  your  Photographic  Burnisher  relates, 
as  I  was  examiner  of  that  class  of  inventions  in  the  United  States  Patent  Office  for  some  time,  and  have 
had  occasion  to  keep  myself  posted  in  regard  to  them  since,  and  believe  your  Burnisher  is  the  very  best 
in  existence,  embracing  all  the  features  necessary  to  make  a  complete  polished  surface  upon  a  photo- 
graph, and  also  believe  the  time  will  come  when  every  photographer  of  any  pretension  will  be  com- 
pelled to  use  one.     I  predict  for  you  success  in  your  Patent.  Yours  truly, 

C.  M.  Parks,  Solicitor  of  Patents. 


6  inch  Roll,  $25 ;  14  inch  Roll,  $45 ;  18  inch  Roll,  $75. 
W.  G.  ENTREKIN,  Patentee, 

Nos.  4382  and  4884  MAIN  ST.,  MANAYUNK,  PA. 


THE  ENAMELER  WILL  BE  SOLD  BY  ALL  STOCK  DEALERS. 


Established  in  1857. 


L.  DUBERNET, 


Manufacturer  of 


PAPER  PASSEPARTOUTS, 

ENAMELED  AND  VELVET  PASSEPARTOUTS, 
PLAIN  AND  DOUBLE  MATTS, 
VELTET  STANDS, 

FANCY  GILT  FRAMES,  AND  EASELS, 

AND  THE  NEWEST  STYLES  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  FRAMES, 

13  &  15  AMITY  ST.  (near  tie  Grand  Central  Hotel),  NEW  YORK. 

PICTURE    AND    STOCK    DEALERS    SUPPLIED. 


JpBCY'S  SCIOPTICON 

!  is  a  greatly  improveifform^ 


FOR   HOME, 
[tCTUREftoOM  j 

Unrivalled 


Price,  latest  improvements,  complete, 

with  Camera  Objective, $45.00 

Price,  without  front  objective,.. 36.00 

For  Circulars  address 

L.  J.  MARCY, 

1340  Chestnut  St., 

Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Maroy's  Photographic  Printing  Apparatus,  Price  $7.00. 
(See  Philadelphia  Photographer,  1872,  page  38.) 

The  Sciopticon  Manual, 

Including  Optics,  Experiments,  Photographing,  and  Coloring 
Slides,  &c.     Enlarged,  Revised  Edition  Just  Out. 

*3~  Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  50  cents. 


ENLAEGE  M 


enTS 


IDE  BY  THE  SOLAR  [HEN, 

AND  COPYING  DONE,  FOR  THE  TRADE. 


18  SOLAR   CAMERAS. 


EXPEDITIOUS. 


Send  for  Instructions  (free)  for  making        CYOCI    I    £ftlT 
SOLAR  NEGATIVES.  LAULLLLIl  I 


ALBERT   MOORE, 

No.  828  Wood  Street,  Philadelphia. 


MAGIC  LANTERNS. 


Stereo-Panopticons, 

Stereopticons,  &c. 


This  is  my  new  patented  instrument,  and  is  the  most  powerful  Magic 
Lantern  ever  made ;  and,  with  a  brilliant  oil  lamp,  gives  a  light  one-third 
brighter  than  Marcy's  Sciopticon. 


A  Profitable  Business  for  a  Man  with  Small  Capital. 


A  photographer  can  make  money  by  exhibiting  at  night. 

W.  MITCHELL  McALLISTER, 

No.  1314  Chestnut  Street, 

Send  stamp  for  Catalogue.  PHILADELPHIA. 


The  publishers  of  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER,  encouraged  by  the 
growing  interest  taken  in  their  PREMIUM  LIST,  by  operators,  printers,  employees,  etc., 
offer  the  following 

PREMIUMS  FOR  1874, 

FOR  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS. 


CONDITIONS:  These  premiums  are  only  given  to  old  or  present  subscribers  for 
new  ones.     No  premium  will  be  given  you  on  your  own  renewal. 


WE  WILL  GIVE  FOR  THREE  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  (IN  ADDITION  TO 
TOUR  OWN),  FOR  ONE  TEAR, 

Vols.  I  &  II  of  the  Photographic  World ! 


TWO  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  FOR  ONE  TEAR, 


Either  Volume  I  or  II  of  the  Photographic  World, 


Or  your  choice  of  the  following  :  $1  on  each  per  year,  payable  in  any  of  our  publications, 
not  in  cash;  i.  e.,  $10  will  secure  our  Magazine  for  one  year  to  an  OLD  subscriber,  to  a  new  one, 
and  one  dollar's  worth  of  our  other  publications. 

Any  enterprising  operator  can,  by  writing  a  few  letters  and  a  little  effort,  secure  enough 
new  subscribers  to  pay  for  his  own,  and  fit  him  out  with  our  whole  list  of  premiums,  or  a 
set  of  the  six  Luckhardt  pictures.     (See  special  advertisement.) 

This  magnificent  offer  was  never  equalled  by  any  publisher,  photographic  or  otherwise. 
Strive  hard  to  win  the  whole  ! 

Please  examine  the  order  blanks  in  this  number,  and  send  for  more  if  you  wish  them. 

BENEKMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 

Philadelphia  Photographer  for  1874 ! 

The  increasing  favor  shown  the  publishers  of  this  Magazine  during  the  first  ten  years  of  its  life, 
just  closed,  has  given  them  the  means  to  prepare  for  their  intelligent  patrons  still  greater  attrac- 
tions than  ever  for  the  year  1874.     The  old  staff  of  regular  contributors  will  be  continued. 

A  series  of  illustrated  descriptive  articles  on 

PHOTOGRAPHY    IN    FRANCE, 

which  will  include  descriptions  of  all  the  leading  photographic  studios  and  factories  in  France,  will 
be  contributed  by  Mons.  Ernest  Lacan,  Secretary  of  the  French  Photographic  Society.' 
A  series  of  handsomely  illustrated  articles,  entitled 

VIEWS    ABROAD    AND    ACROSS, 

by  the  editor,  including  sketches  of  matters  and  things  photographic,  made  during  a  tour  in  Eng- 
land, Ireland,  Scotland,  France,  Belgium,  Prussia,  Austria,  Italy,  and  Switzerland  ;  a  continuation 
of  the  articles  on  the  study  of  art;  fresh  and  original  papers  by  old  and  new  contributors,  &c,  &c. 

DURING   1874, 

No  photographic  artist  should  fail  to  subscribe  for  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGKAPHER. 
It  is  going  to  be  one  of  the  most  eventful  years  ever  known  in  the  art,  for 

TWO  GREAT  PATENT  CONTESTS, 

now  under  way — the  "  Shaw  "  patent  and  the  Sliding  Plate-holder  patent — both  of  vital  impor- 
tance to  the  craft,  will  take  place,  and  all  should  be  posted  on  them  as  they  proceed.  The  fullest 
and  earliest  information  will  be  u;iven  in  this  Magazine. 

THE  PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC  ASSOCIATION  are 
only  given  entire  in  one  number  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

THE   EMBELLISHMENTS   FOR    1874 

will  be  from  negatives  by  Messrs.  Luckhardt,  Marshall,  Sommer,  Robinson  &  Cherrill,  Kurtz, 
Jewell,  North,  Curtis,  Mottu,  and  others,  and  will  be  unusually  excellent  and  choice,  illustrating 
all  branches  of  photography,  and  introducing  very  useful  studies. 

THEY  ALONE  WILL  BE  WORTH  THE  COST  OF  SUBSCRIPTION. 

ILLUSTRATIONS,  by  means  of  engravings,  cuts,  &c.  will  be  profusely  employed,  and  every 
effort  made  to  secure  to  the  readers  of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer 

The  Most  Elegant  and  Useful  Photographic  Magazine  in  the  World! 

To  Employees,  Employees,  &c.  ;  Please  read  our  liberal  offer  of 

PREMIUMS  ON  THE  OPPOSITE  PAGE 


NOTICE   TO    SUBSCRIBERS. 


Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2  50  for  six  months,  50  cents  per  copy.      Positively  in  advance. 

In  remitting  by  mail  a  post-office  order,  or  draft  payable  to  the  order  of  Benerman  &  "Wilson,  is 
preferable  to  bank  notes.      Clearly  give   your  Post-office,   County,  and  Slate. 

Canada  subscribers  must  remit  24  cents  extra,  to  prepay  postage.  Foreign  subscriptions  must  be 
accompanied  by  the  postage  in  addition. 

Advertising  sheets  are  bound  with  each  number  of  the  Magazine.  Advertisements  are  inserted 
at  the  following  rates : 

One  Month.  Six  Months.  One  Year. 

One  Page, $20  00  $110  00  $200  00 

Half    "      12  00  66  00  120  00 

Quarter  Page, 7  00  38  50  70  00 

Eighth        "      4  00  22  00  40  00 

Cards,  of  Six  lines  or  less, 2  00  11  00  20  00 

The  attention  of  advertisers,  and  those  having  galleries,  &c,  for  sale,  is  called  to  our  Specialties 
pages.  Terms  $2  for  six  lines,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a  line,  always 
in  advance.  Duplicate  insertions,  50  cents  less,  each.  Sure  to  pay.  jgigfOperators  desiring  situa- 
tions, no  charge. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

OFFICE,  S.W.  COB.  OF  SEVENTH  AND  CHEEEY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


WESTON'S   ROTARY  BURNISHER. 

Gives  an  Unequalled  Finish  to  Photographic  Prints. 


SELLING  PRICE  LIST. 

Card  size,  4  in.  roller,  •    •    •  $20 

Cabinet  size,  6  in.  roller,  •    -30 

Extra  Cabinet  size,  9  in.  roller,  40 

14       "         50 

18       "         80 


On  receipt  of  draft  or  postal  order  for  the  amount  of  the  purchase,  and  not  otherwise  (thereby 
saving  us  return  express  charges),  we  will  allow  a  discount  of  five  per  cent,  from  the  price  list,  and 
ship  to  the  party  ordering  by  return  express. 

Each  machine,  before  shipped,  will  pass  the  critical  inspection  of  Mr.  E.  R.  Weston,  the  inventor, 
thereby  assuring  a  perfect  instrument  in  all  cases.  All  necessary  materials,  with  full  directions  for 
using  same,  will  accompany  each  press. 


WESTON'S    BURNISHER    PATENT. 

Otjr  attention  having  been  called  to  the  fact,  that  certain  parties  are  attempting  to  intro- 
duce Burnishing  Machines,  clearly  infringing  on  the  Weston  Patent,  we  hereby 


CAUTION 


All  parties  against  using  or  selling  such  machines,  by  whatever  name  they  may  be  called,  as 
we  shall  prosecute  all  concerned  in  any  way  with  such  infringements. 


OPINION  ON  THE  'WESTON  PATENT. 

FOR  THE  BENEFIT  OF  THOSE  INTERESTED  WE  PUBLISH  THE  FOLLOWING  : 

Bangor,  Me.,  Nov.  17th,  1873. 
Hon.  J.  P.  Bass. — Sir: — The  question  submitted  to  me.  as  to  whether  the  stoppage  of  one  roll  of 
the  Excelsior  Roll  Press,  and  its  use  in  polishing  photographs,  either  with  or  without  heat,  would  in- 
fringe the  Weston  reissued  patent  of  February,  1873,  for  a  burnisher  for  photographs,  Ac,  has  received 
my  attention.  Basing  my  opinion  on  the  specification  and  claims  of  said  reissue,  which  is  prima 
fane,  valid,  I  do  not  hesitate  to  pronounce  said  alteration  and  use  an  infringement  of  each,  and,  if  heat 
is  used,  all  the  claims. 

Stopping  one  roll  of  said  press  and  feeding  the  card  over  it  by  revolving  the  other,  polishing  it  in  its 
passage,  is  covered  by  the  first  claim  of  the  reissue.  It  produces  a  "  burnishing  machine  by  which  a  sur- 
face is  given  to  the  article  to  be  polished,  by  feeding  it  under  pressure  over  the  surface  of  a  stationary 
burnisher,"  and  such  machine  is  what  Weston  claims.  Stopping  the  roll  converts  it  into  a  "stationary 
burnisher'' — as  far  as  its  operation  on  the  picture  is  concerned — its  shape  being  a  matter  of  no  conse- 
quence, and  the  combination  of  this  stopped-roll  with  the  revolving  one  is  substantially  the  combina- 
tion of  the  feed-roll  and  stationary  burnisher  set  forth  in  the  second  claim  of  the  reissue.  Heating  the 
stationary  roll  introduces  into  the  combination  the  elements  which  Weston's  third  claim  is  based  upon. 
I  consider  the  device  as  simply  a  colorable  variation  of  Weston's  machine,  performing  substantially 
the  same  work  in  substantially  the  same  way,  and  should  advise  the  prosecution  of  infringing  parties, 
having  confidence  in  the  validity  of  the  patent,  and  believing  that  it  will  be  sustained  by  the  courts. 

Very  respectfully, 

William  Franklin  Seavey, 

Counsellor  at  Law  and  in  Patent  Cases. 


All  photographers  are  cautioned  to  use  no  machines  infringing  the  principle  of  the  "Weston  Bur- 
nisher," to  which  letters  patent  have  been  granted  in  the  United  States  and  Canadas,  and  also  for 
England,  Prussia,  Austria,  France,  and  Belgium. 

[dp"  Mr.  Wm.  Bollard,  of  Brockville,  Ontario,  is  our  agent  for  Ontario  and  Quebec  ;  also  has 
the  right  to  sell  in  all  the  Provinces. 

All  orders  and  communications  addressed  to  the  Q       DA  CO     JL     Pfl         RannAP       Ma 

subscribers  will  receive  prompt  attention.  J.     i    ■     DHOO     **     UU.,     Ddl.yUI.     If!  U. 


Address  ALL  Communications,  both  for  the  Editor  and  the  Publishers,  to  Sherman's 
Building,  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Number  122. 


50  Cents. 


THE 


PHILADELPHIA 


lwt00ra%. 


AN  ILLUSTRATED  MONTHLY  JOURNAL, 


DEVOTED  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


THE  OPnOIAL  ORGAN  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC 
ASSOCIATION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. 


FeTDruary,    1874. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

BENERMAN    &    WILSON, 

PUBLISHERS. 


Subscriptions  received  by  all  News  and  Stockdealers. 

FIVE  DOLLARS  PER  ANNUM,  IN  ADVANCE. 


Sherman  &  Co.,  Printers,  Philadelphia. 


THE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS-Business  Bringera  at  all  times. 
fi@~  See  Advertisements  inside. 


SUMMARY    OP    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

A  Last  Chance 33 

Views  Abroad  and  Across.    By  Edward  L.  Wilson,  33 

Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papers 39 

Things  New  and  Old.    By  E.  J.  Chute 40 

Hints  from  the  Record  of  an  Artist  and  Photogra- 
pher.   By  John  L.  Gihon , 41 

Art  Studies  for  All.    VII 42 

Photography  in  France.    By  Ernest  Lacan 43 

Reading  a  Photographic  Journal 46 

A  Good  Suggestion 46 

Our  Picture 47 

Something  about  Stereographs.    By  J.  Lee  Knight,  48 

TheSphynx 50 


page 

German  Correspondence.    By  Dr.  H.  Vogel 50 

Good  for  the  Photographers 54 

Natural  Composition  Pictures  for  the  Stereoscope 55 

Take  Care 56 

Sulphate  of  Silver  Pinholes.    By  John  M.  Blake...  56 

Centennial 58 

Notes  In  and  Out  of  the  Studio.    By  G.  Wharton 

Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A 58 

Matters  of-  the  N.  P.  A 59 

Society  Gossip 60 

Wrinkles  and  Dodges 61 

Editor's  Table 62 


Embellishment.— "Cabinet"  Portrait,  by  A.  Marshall,  Boston.    Prints  by  Wm.  H.  Rhoads, 

Philadelphia. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s  Paper. 

Anderson's  Photo-Comic  "Allmyknack." 

Anderson,  J.  A.    Photographic  Apparatus. 

Anthony  &  Co.,  E.  &  H.  T.    The  Bowdish  Chair. 

Ayres'  Chart  of  Photographic  Drapery. 

Benerman  &  Wilson.    Lantern  Slides. 

Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

Bierstadt,  Charles.    Photo.  Views. 

Bullock  &  Crenshaw.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Chameleon  Barometer. 

Clemons,  Jno.  R.    Albumen  Paper.    Varnish. 

Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  A.  M.    Photograph  Cards. 

Cooper  &  Co.,  Chas.    Portrait  Lenses. 

Dubernet,  L.    Passepartouts  and  Picture  Frames. 

English  Albumen  Paper. 

Entrekin,  W.  G.    Oscillating  Enameler. 

Felt,  L.  W.    The  Photographer's  Exchange. 

French,  B.  &  Co.    Voigtlander  Lenses,  &c. 

Gihon,  John  L.    Opaque  and  Cut-Outs. 

Hance's  Photo.  Specialties. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs. 

Jacoby,  W.  H.    Printing  Frame. 

Karstens  &  Braun.    Albumen  Paper. 

Kilburn  Bros.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Lea's  Manual  of  Photography. 

Lewis,  R.  A.    Collodion. 

Liesegang,  E.    Albumen  Paper, 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 

Marcy,  L.  J.    Seiopticon. 

Marion  &  Co.    Specialties. 

Magee,  James  F.  &  Co.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

McAllister,  W.  Mitchell.    Manufacturing  Optician. 

Moore,  Albert.    Solar  Printing. 

Mosaics,  1873  and  1874. 

National  Photographers'  Chemical  Co. 

Newell  &  Son,  R.    Acid-Proof  Photo.  Ware. 


Pattberg,  Lewis  &  Bro.    Passepartouts,  &c. 
Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 
Photographer's  Pocket  Reference-Book. 
Photographic  Publications. 
Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 
Powers  &  Weightman.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Premiums  for  1874,  for  New  Subscribers  to  "Philadel- 
phia Photographer." 
Rice  &  Thompson.    Photographic  Stock  House. 
Robinson's  New  Photo.  Trimmer. 
Robinson's  Metallic  Guides. 
Rohaut  &  Hutinet.    Photographic  Mounts. 
Ross's  Photographic  Lenses. 
Rotter,  Geo.  &  Co.    Albumen  Paper. 
Ryan,  D.  J.    Photo.  Stock  Depot,  Chromos,  &c. 
Sauter,  G.    Passepartouts. 
Schwarze  &  Valk.    Photo,  Papers. 
Scovill  Manf'g.  Co.    Photographic  Materials. 
Seavey  L.  W.    Scenic  Artist,  Backgrounds,  &c. 
Shoemaker,  Benjamin  H.    Photo.  Glass. 
Smith,  P.  &  Co.    Photographic  Stock. 
Steinheil's  New  Aplanatic  Lenses. 
Stereograph  Book. 

Stevens,  Chas.  W.    Photographic  Goods. 
The  Skylight  and  the  Dark-Room. 
Wallach,  Willy.    T.  &  M.  Albumen  Paper. 
Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papers. 
Weller's  Stereoscopic  Treasures. 
Weston's  Patent  Rotary  Burnisher. 
Wilson,  Charles  A.    Photographic  Goods. 
Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials,  &c. 
World,  Back  Volumes  of. 
Woodward,  D.  A.    Solar  Cameras. 
Year-Book  of  Photography. 
Zentmayer,  Joseph.    Lenses. 


HUN 


9 


HOTOGBAPHI 

SPECIALTIES. 

A  E  E 

NOW 

S  A.  I  D 

TO    BE 

THE 

BEST 

IN  THE  WHOLE  WORLD ! 

THEY 
ARE 

NAMED 

ON    THE 

EOTTRTH 

B  A.OE, 

WHICB  PLEASE  HEAD. 


FOR    SALE     BY    ALL     DEALERS. 


ALFRED  L.  HANCE,  Manufacturing  Chemist, 

126  N.  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia. 


HANCE'S 

HOTOGRAPHI 

SPECIALTIES 

ARE   THE    MOST   POPULAR. 


GUN  COTTONS,  COLLODIONS,  VARNISHES. 

(See  previous  and  following  pages.) 

ASK  FOR  ANDERSON'S  COLLODION. 

TRY  TRASK'S  FERROTYPE  COLLODION. 

fl©-  TEST  THE  WHOLE  LIST. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC 
SPECIALTIES 


PHOTOGRAPHIC 
SPECIALTIES 


Are  now  for  sale  by  nearly  every  dealer  in  the  United  States,  and  they  are  popular  wher- 
ever used.  Photographers  who  do  not  have  a  dealer  enterprising  enough  to  keep  them, 
would  do  well  to  send  their  orders  direct  to  the  manufacturer.  No  goods  in  the  market  are 
put  up  with  so  much  cleanliness  and  care,  or  in  such  full  measure.  A  full  list  of  Hance's 
Specialties  will  be  found  on  the  second  page  following  this. 

THE  SUN  COTTONS  AKE  GUARANTEED  TO  EQUAL  AM  IN  THE  WORLD, 

YOU  ARE  SAFE  IN  TRYING  THEM. 

THE  COLLODIONS  ABE  MADE  OF  THE  PUREST  CHEMICALS, 

And  are  warranted  for  the  special  work  for  which  they  are  advertised. 

GILL'S   INTENSIFIER 

Is  not  generally  appreciated  yet.  If  photographers  knew  its  real  value  they  would  employ 
it  more  largely.  It  is  a  great  helper  in  giving  proper  printing  qualities  to  a  negative,  and 
far  easier  to  use  than  patching  up,  doctoring,  dodges  in  printing,  &c.  Try  it  carefully. 
There  has  been  a  perfect  rush  for  GROUND  GLASS  SUBSTITUTE  during  the  last  month. 
Ask  your  dealer  for  tbem. 

ALFRED  L.  HANCE,  Manufacturing  Chemist, 

126  N.  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia. 


RODND  GLAS 

SUBSTITUTE. 


The  SUBSTITUTE  is  in  the  form  of  a  varnish ;  is  flowed  and  dried  the  same  as  varnish, 
but  dries  with  a  granulated  or  ground-glass  surface. 

WHEREVER   GROUND  GLASS  IS  REQUIRED, 
HANCE'S  SUBSTITUTE  ANSWERS  EVERY  PURPOSE. 

FOR  GROUND  GLASSES  FOR  CAMERAS, 

FOR  GLAZING  SKY  AND  SIDE-LIGHTS, 

FOR  OBSCURING  STUDIO  AND  OFFICE  DOORS, 
FOR  PRINTING  WEAK  NEGATIVES, 
FOR  VIGNETTE  GLASSES, 

FOR  A  RETOUCHING  VARNISH, 

FOR  SOFTENING  STRONG  NEGATIVES, 

FOR  THE  CELEBRATED  BERLIN  PROCESS. 

Use  the  "  Substitute."        Use  the  "  Substitute." 

PRICE,  FIFTY  CENTS  PER  BOTTLE. 


LARGE  QUANTITIES  FOR  STUDIO  LIGHTS,   &c,   SUPPLIED  LOW. 


READ  A  FEW  TESTIMONIALS: 

Youngstown,  Ohio,  Jan.  27,  1873. 

The  bottle  of  Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute  came  safely  to  hand.    I  selected  a  good  piece  of  glass,  coated  it  with  the 

Substitute,  and  in  a  few  moments  I  had  one  of  the  finest  ground  glasses  I  ever  saw.    I  have  been  using  it  four  or  five  days, 

and  the  more  I  use  it  the  more  I  am  pleased  with  it.    The  "surface"  is  fine  and  delicate,  and  a  great  relief  to  the  eyes. 

I  would  not  be  without  a  bottle  for  ten  dollars.  Lon  Blackbubn,  Operator,  Le  Roy's  Gallery. 

E.  Newell  &  Sou's  Galleby,  626  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia,  Feb.  17th,  1873. 
I  have  been  frequently  asked  to  recommend  some  new  article  or  preparation  used  in  our  business,  but  have  very  rarely  con- 
sented to  do  so  from  the  fact  that  many  things  that  "promise  very  fair,"  after  thorough  trial,  prove  worthless.  Having  used 
your  different  preparations  of  Collodions,  Intensifiers,  and  Varnish  for  the  past  six  months  in  my  gallery,  I  can  conscien- 
tiously pronounce  them  first-class  in  every  respect.  Your  Ground  Glass  Substitute!  consider  one  of  the  most  practical  and 
useful  articles  I  have  ever  used,  and  no  photographer  who  has  learned  its  value  for  coating  the  backs  of  thin  negatives,  or 
making  ground  glass  for  the  camera  box,  would  ever  be  without  it.  I  have  found  so  many  ways  of  using  it  to  advantage 
that  I  shall  hereafter  order  it  by  the  gallon.  Yours  truly, 

R.  Newell 


HANCE'S 

HOTOGRAPHI 


SPECIALTIES. 

AKE  SOLD  BY  ALL  DEALERS  AS  FOLLOWS  : 

Elbert  Anderson's  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Hance's  White  Mountain  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  ,80  Cts. 

Curtis'  Niagara  Falls  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Hance's  Peculiar  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Trask's  Ferrotype  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Cummings'  Grit  Varnish, 

Per  Bottle, 40  Cts. 

Hance's  Silver  Spray  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Delicate  Cream  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, 80  Cts. 

Gill's  Concentrated  Chromo  Intensifier, 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute, 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

TRADE  MARK :— THE  BEST  GOODS— FULL  MEASURE. 

TRY  HAMS  PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES. 


See  Testimonials  in  former  and  future  advertisements. 


SCOVILL  MF'G  CO.,  Trade  Ag'ts.       ALFKED  L.  HANCE,  Manufac'r, 

NEW  YORK.  126  N.  7th  St.,  Philadelphia. 


Special  Premium  of  Six  Handsome  German 
Cabinet  Pictures  of  Ladies ! 

By  FRITZ  LUCKHARDT,  Vienna,  Austria. 

These  pictures  are  alone  worth  $3  for  the  set,  and  more  is  asked  for 
such  by  dealers. 


Gira  to  any  one  who  will  sencl  is  a  NEW  Sibscriber  for  tie  year  1871 


What  Others  Think  of  the  Prizes: 


"  These  studies  were  greatly  admired  by  the 
members  present,  and  all  were  convinced  that 
they  were  worthy  of  most  careful  study." — Min- 
utes-ofthe  Chicago  Photo,  Association. 

"  These  pictures  were  examined  and  much  ad- 
mired by  all  present.'' — Indiana  Photo.  Ass'n. 

"The  pictures  elicited  general  praise;  the 
draperies  especially  were  very  favorably  com- 
mented upon.'' — Germa?i  Photographers''  Socie- 
ty, New  York. 

"  The  prints  were  thought  to  be  worth  more 
-than  the  price  which  was  charged  for  the  journal, 
i.e.,  $5  ;  and  the  President,  Mr.  Black,  stated  that 
every  operator  should  have  a  set,  for  he  considered 
them  to  be  most  admirable  studies,  and  superior 
to  anything  which  he  had  seen  heretofore.'' — 
Boston  Photographic  Society. 


' '  They  were  accepted  as  being  of  a  very  high 
standard." — Brooklyn  Photo.  Art  Association. 

"  The  high  artistic  merits  of  the  pictures,  and 
their  great  value  as  studies  for  the  progressive 
photographer,  were  conceded  by  all .  The  general 
harmony  in  the  details  of  each  print,  the  man- 
agement of  light,  and  beautiful  rendering  of 
texture  were  greatly  admired." — Photographic 
Section  of  the  American  Institute,  JV.  Y. 

Special  votes  of  thanks  were  given  for  them 
by  the  Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia  ; 
Photographic  Association  of  West.  Illinois  ;  Chi- 
cago Photographic  Association  ;  Indiana,  District 
of  Columbia,  and  Maryland  Photographic  Asso- 
ciations ;  Photographic  Section  of  the  American 
Institute  ;  German  Photographers'  Society,  New 
York;  Boston  and  Brooklyn  Photographic  Art 
Associations,  whereat  they  attracted  great  atten- 
tion and  admiration. 


A  Few  Words  from  those  who  have  received  them  as  Premiums  for  New  Subscribers 


"  I  think  when  we  say  they  are  splendid  it  is 
only  a  mild  expression  of  what  they  will  bear." 
— E.  F.  Everett. 

"  They  are  well  worth  striving  for,  and  the 
photographers  who  allow  this  set  to  remain  out- 


side their  collection  don't  deserve  them." — J. 
Pitcher  Spooner. 

"  They  are  by  far  the  best  specimens  of  pho- 
tographs of  white  drapery  that  I  ever  saw,  and 
the  artistic  part  leaves  nothing  to  wish  for." — 
James  Paris. 


We  make  this  offer  as  a  matter  of  business,  and  not  as  favor  to  any  one 
on  either  side.  It  will  pay  you  to  give  a  year's  subscription  to  your  oper- 
ator or  to  your  friend  or  customer,  in  order  to  secure  these  pictures. 

BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philada. 


And  Perfect!/^ 

CijChair. 


Enabling  the  photographer  to  successfully  secure  every  variety  of  pose  with  facility  and  reliability. 
It  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  varying  necessities  of  female  portraiture,  and  is  equally  suited  for 
children,  for  vignettes,  or  for  full  lengths.  The  BOWDISH  CHAIR  is  substantial  in  construction, 
elegant  in  design,  and  rich  in  upholstery  and  finish.  Those  who  have  purchased  them,  speak  in  the 
highest  terms,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 

4  TESTIMONIALS :  $» 

+ + 

"About  ten  days  ago  I  received  the  new  chair  you  promised  to  send  me  when  I  saw  you  last,  and 
would  have  written  and  acknowledged  your  kind  favor  long  ago  if  1  had  correctly  known  your  ad- 
dress. Accept  my  best  thanks  for  this  really  beautiful  chair,  which  now,  after  ten  days'  trial,  has 
proved  to  be  a  decided  success  in  every  way.  It  has  become  the  real  favorite  for  posing  in  my  studio. 
Besides  this,  in  external  appearance  the  new  chair  appears  so  much  superior  in  finish,  and  is  at  the 
same  time  highly  ornamental,  and  the  head  rest  is  so  much  easier  handled  than  with  any  chair  I  have 
ever  seen  before.  In  short,  it  gives  the  sitter  the  greatest  possible  comfort  and  steadiness.  I  think 
the  chair  I  have  justly  deserves  the  name  of  'Perfect  Posing  Chair.' " — H.  Rocher,  Chicago,  ML, 
January  10,  1873. 

"  Since  receiving  your  posing  chair,  nearly  a  year  since,  I  have  had  it  in  constant  use,  and  am 
satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  posing  chair  in  the  market.  It  is  easily  worked,  and  is  so  well  made  that 
one  will  last  a  life  time,  and  then  be  a  valuable  heirloom." — L.  G.  Bigelow. 

"The  Bowdish  Chair  came  in  good  order  and  gives  the  best  of  satisfaction.  Should  you  wish  a 
recommendation  for  it,  say  what  you  please  and  we  will  endorse  it.  You  cannot  praise  it  too  highly." 
— Slee  Bros.,  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  Sept.  10,  1872. 

"  Your  chair  has  arrived  at  last.  lam  much  pleased  with  it.  1  don't  think  my  gallery  can  be 
complete  without  one  of  them.  Wishing  you  the  success  your  invention  merits,  I  am,  truly  yours, 
A.  Hesler." 


Prints  will  be  sent,  if  desired,  before  purchasing.     There  are  three  styles  kept  in  stock,  viz  : 

No.  2.  With  nickel-plated  rods  and  rest,  in  velveteen  or  reps $60  00 

No.  4.       "  "  "  "  "  "    square  carved  legs 70  00 

No.  6.       "  "  "  "     in  best  plush,  paneled 80  00 

Special  chairs  to  oider. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO.,  Sole  Agents, 

591  Broadway,  Mew  York. 


GIHON'S  CBT-ODTS 

Are  the  very  best  that  are  made,  and  are  now  without  a  rival  in  the  market.  They  are  clean 
cut,  most  desirable  shapes  and  sizes,  and  made  of  non-actinic  paper,  manufactured  specially 
for  the  purpose.  Each  package  contains  30  Cut-Outs,  or  Masks,  with  corresponding  Insides, 
assorted  for  five  differently  sized  ovals  and  one  arch-top. 

PRICE,  $1.00  PER  PACKAGE.     Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

Parties  wishing  special  sizes,  or  large  lots  of  a  few  sizes,  may  have  them  cut  to  order 
promptly,  by  addressing  the  manufacturer.     No  lot  costing  less  than  $1.00  made  at  a  time. 

JSJgg?°  No  printer  should  attempt  to  make  medallion  pictures  without  them. 

THEY  HAVE  NO  EQUAL  FOR  QUALITY. 

Beware  of  spurious  imitations  made  of  common  paper,  full  of  holes,  badly  cut,  and  odd 
shapes  and  sizes.  Ask  your  stockdealer  for  GIHON'S  CUT-OUTS,  and  see  that  they  are 
in  his  envelopes  with  instruction  circular  included. 


GIHON'S  OPAQU 

IS    DESIGNED    FOR 

COMPLETELY  OBSCURING  THE  IMPERFECT  BACKGROUNDS  OF  COPIES, 
RETOUCHING  NEGATIVES, 

FAULTY  SKIES  IN  LANDSCAPES, 

COATING  THE  INSIDE  OF  LENSES  OR  CAMERA  BOXES, 
BACKING  SOLAR  NEGATIVES, 

COVERING  VIGNETTING  BOARDS, 

AND    EOR  ANSWERING 

ALL  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  INTELLIGENT  PHOTOGRAPHER  IN  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  ARTISTIC  RESULTS  IN  PRINTING. 


WHEREVER  YOU  WANT  TO  KEEP  OUT  LIGHT,  USE  OPAQUE. 

It  is  applied  with  a  brush,  dries  quickly  and  sticks. 


CUT-OUTS  (thirty),  $1.00. 


OPAQUE,  50  CENTS. 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Address  all  orders  to 

JOHN  L.  CIHON,  Inventor, 

128  J¥.  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia,  I*a. 


ROBINSO  3SSTS 

METALLIC 


t==l 


Oval,  Round,  Elliptic  and  Square,  of  all  sizes  ;  various  shapes  for  Stereoscopic 
work,  Drug:  Labels,  Ac,  tic.  Regular  sizes  always  on  band.  Special  Sizes  made 
to  order.  Price  for  regular  pboto.  sizes,  10  cents  per  incb  tbe  longest  way  of  tbe 
aperture.    Special  sizes,  15  cents  per  incb.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALE  DEALERS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Apts, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA 


HUNDREDS  EXPORTED  TO  ENGLAND  AND  GERMANY. 


R  O  B  I  N  S  O  N'S 

PHOTOGRAPH    TRIMMER 

IS  A  NECESSITY  AND  CONSIDERED  INVALUABLE. 

For  examples  of  its  work  we  refer  to  the  recent  and  present  pictures  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

IT  SAVES  TIME,  SAVES  PRINTS,  AND  SAVES  MONEY. 

The  accompanying  cut  represents  the  instru- 
ment in  the  act  of  trimming  a  photograph.  It 
does  not  cm*,  hut  pinches  off the  waste  paper,  and 
leaves  the  print  with  a  neatly  beveled  edge  which 
facilitates  the  adherence  of  the  print  to  the 
mount.  Try  one,  and  you  will  discard  the 
knife  and  punch  at  once. 

Oil  the  wheel  hearings  with  Sewing  Machine  Oil. 

A  Trimmer  Mailed  for  $3.50. 

The  difficulty  of  procuring  exactly  true  guides 
for  cutting  out  prints  has  induced  the  inventor 
to  put  up  machinery  for  the  production  of  all 
styles  of  them,  guaranteed  mathematically  true, 
and  to  be  known  as 

ROBINSON'S  IMPROVED  GUIDES. 

See  advertisement  on  opposite  page. 

A  full  stock  of  regular  sizes  now  on  hand. 
A  complete,  illustrated,  catalogue  and  price-list  will 
be  issued  soon. 

TESTIMONIALS. 


"  For  cutting  ovals  I  think  the  Robinson  Trimmer 
is  perfect,  and  if  nobody  brings  them  out  in  England 
I  shall,  as  I  think  it  a  pity  such  a  good  thing  should 
not  be  introduced." — Walter  B.  Woodbury. 

"  I  would  rather  give  fifty  dollars  than  be  without 
one.  By  its  use  all  annoyance  from  dull  knives  tear- 
ing the  prints  is  avoided,  and  it  is  a  pleasure  to  use 
it."— E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk. 

"  Robinson's  Photographic  Trimmer  is  an  excellent 
little  instrument.  It  does  the  work  intended  magnifi- 
cently. It  is  not  only  exquisite  for  trimming  photo- 
graphs, but  also  for  making  Cut-Outs  and  cutting  the 
sensitized  paper  to  any  needed  size,  using  for  the 
.  latter  purpose  a  guide  of  steel  in  form  of  a  ruler,  thus 
entirely  dispensing  with  the  knife." — Bern'd  Kihl- 
holz,  Chicago,  I'll. 

"  I  like  the  Trimmer  very  much.  I  think  it  a  very 
useful  article.  It  works  well  and  does  all  it  is  recom- 
mended to  do."— F.  G.  Weller,  Littleton,  iV.  H. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmers  have  come  to  hand,  and 
I  like  them  very  much ;  they  are  just  what  I  wanted 
and  found  it  difficult  to  get."— J.  W.  Black,  Boston. 

"I  am  using  the  Robinson  Trimmer  and  consider 
it  the  best  article  for  trimming  photographs  I  ever 
saw." — W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"  It  does  its  work  magnificently.  The  only  wonder 
is,  that  it  was  not  invented  years  ago.  It  is  indis- 
pensable."— Garrett  Bros.,  Philadelphia. 

"  I  think  the  Robinson  Photographic  Trimmer  is 
the  best  thing  ever  put  upon  the  market  for  photo- 
graphic use.  It  is  cheap  and  does  its  work  perfect.  I 
now  make  with  it  all  the  cut-outs  I  use,  and  also  cut 
out  all  my  photographs  from  eleven  by  fourteen 
down  to  cards.  It  only  cost  me  four  dollars  and  I 
would  not  be  without  it  for  the  best  twenty-five  dol- 
ar  cutting  machine  I  ever  saw." — D.  Lothrop,  Phila. 


"  The  Trimmer  comes  up  to  all  you  claim  for  it.  I 
would  not  be  without  it." — T.  Cummings,  Lancaster. 

"Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  is  all  that  it  is 
claimed  to  be.  I  have  trimmed  all  my  prints  with  it 
from  the  day  I  received  it_,  in  less  than  half  the  time 
taken  by  a  knife.  It  does  its  work  with  mathematical 
correctness  and  uniformity.  I  would  not  be  without 
it  for  ten  times  its  cost.  It  cannot  be  recommended 
too  highly." — W.  H.  Cranston,  Corry,  Pa. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmer  has  proved  to  us  one  of 
the  most  usefully  instruments  that  we  have  in  our 
gallery.  In  the  few  months  that  we  have  owned  it  we 
cut  some  10,000  photographs  with  it,  which  were  cut 
in  one-fourth  the  time,  and  cut  better  than  any  other 
instrument  could  do  it." — Schreiber  &  Sons,  Phila. 

"  It  does  the  work  quick,  sure,  and  perfect.  We 
would  not  be  without  it.  It  is  simply  what  it  is  rep- 
resented to  be."— B.  Frank  Saylor  &  Co.,  Lancaster. 

"The  Photograph  Trimmer  is  a  good  and  quick  work- 
ing thing.  I  do  not  want  any  thing  better  and  more 
useful  in  the  gallery  for  that  purpose.  I  would  not 
be  without  one." — A.  M.  Bachman,  Allentown,  Pa. 

"I  have  used  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  some 
time.  A  lady  was  asked  how  she  liked  her  sewing 
machine,  and  in  reply  said  '  Well  I  could  get  along 
without  it,  but  when  I  do  I  shall  not  sew  any  more.' 
That  is  me,  I  can  get  along  without  the  Trimmer  but 
when  I  do  I  shall  not  trim  photographs." — Well  G. 
Singhi,  Binghamton,  N.  Y. 

"  It  gives  perfect  satisfaction,  being  the  best  thing 
of  the  kind  I  have  ever  used.  There  is"  nothing 
amongst  my  photographic  stock  more  useful." — M.  P. 
Rice,  Washington,  D.  C. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmer  works  admirably.  Does 
the  work  intended  with  great  satisfaction." — A.  K.  P. 
Trask,  Philadelphia. 


BENEBMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 
FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS.  PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


SOUTHERN  PHOTOGRAPHERS 

Buy  your  Goods  in  Baltimore  at  the 

Popular  Stock  Depot. 

Invites  those  desiring  low  prices,  good  goods,  and  promptness  to  send  him  their  orders. 

VOIGTLANDER'S  CAMERA  TUBES  AND  LENSES, 

C.  C.  HARRISON'S  PORTRAIT  AND  GLOBE  LENSES, 

AMERICAN  OPTICAL  COMPANY'S  APPARATUS. 

All  popular  brands  of  ALBUMENIZED  PAPER,  both  heavy  and  light,  and  guaranteed  to  produce 
uniformly  the  most  perfect  results. 

DEALER  IN  ALL  MATERIALS  USED  FOR 

POECELAIN  PICTUEES,  INCLUDING  POECELAIN  GLASS,  PLAIN  and  GEOUND 

OP  ALL  SIZES,  THE  BEST  IN  MARKET.     A  SPLENDID  ASSORTMENT  OF 

Black  Walnut,  Rosewood,  ^g?i  lHW^      /^3k       ™w2lw    ^"HHP^  ^ES?  ^or  P°rceh»in  Pictures 
Gilt,  and  Rustic  riff     MpM  ltt%  JflflL  [jjp  [Sffi       and  Photographs. 

Silk,  CottonVelTet,  anaVelvet  Eflp  Passepartouts  for  Porcelain  Retires. 
GENUINE  B.  P.  C.  GLASS. 

PORCELAIN  WARE  BATHS, 

DIPPERS  AND  TRA  YS. 

A  FULL  ASSORTMENT  OF 

CASES,  FRAMES,  GLASS,  APPARATUS,   ROLLER  PRESSES, 

BACKGROUNDS,  PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHAIRS  AND  LOUNGES, 

AND  CHEMICALS  OF  THE  PUREST  MANUFACTURE,  Ac,  Ac, 

With  whatever  else  is  requisite  for  the  pursuit  of  Photography,  supplied  at  the  shortest  notice,  and. 
on  the  most  favorable  terms. 

The  attention  of  Photographers  throughout  the  United  States  is  respectfully  invited  to  the  advan- 
tages offered  of  a  superior  quality  of  materials,  and  extensive  facilities  for  the  execution  of  orders, 
which  are  respectfully  solicited.  Orders  filled  with  care  and  despatch,  and  sent,  if  desired,  with  bill 
for  collection  by  Express,  to  any  part  of  the  United  States. 

Address 

OHAS.  A.  WILSON, 

No.  7  North  Charles  St.,  Baltimora 


BARCAI  M  S! 


The  following  for  sale,  at  the  extremely  low  prices  given,  to  close  out 
consignment  accounts.  All  are  in  good  order,  and  most  of  them  have  been 
but  very  slightly  used. 

One  11-14  Holmes,  Booth  &  Hayden  Lens,  $75  00 

One  Ho.  5  Steinheil  Lens,    •             •      •  60  00 

One  8-inch  Globe  Lens, 50  00 

One  Ho.  4  Steinheil  Lens,    •             •      •  50  00 

One  6*  x  8*  Holmes,  Booth  &  Hayden  Lens,  50  00 

One  Half  Voigtlander  Lens,             •      •  45  00 

One  6^  x8*  Semmendinger  Box,  •             •  14  00 

One  Ho.  13  Double  Swing-back  Chicago  Box,  28  00 

One  5  x  8  Swing-hack  Stereo.  Box,            •  28  00 

One  10-12  Portrait  Box,         first  quality  33  00 

One  8-10  Swing-front  Portrait  Box,    "  32  00 

One  11-14  D.  S.  B.  View  Box,            "  60  00 
One  Ho.  25  A.  0.  Co.  Gem  Box,    ■             -105  00 

Fitted  with  nine  1-9  and  four  1-4  Darlot  tubes. 

Draft  to  Amount  to  Accompany  Order.   Ms  Guaranteed  as  Represented 


OUR  ILLUSTRATED  PRICE  LIST  FOR  1873-74  NOW  READY. 


ILSON,  HOOD   *   CO., 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO., 

159  Washington  St.,  Boston, 

Importers  and  Sole  Agents  in  the  United  States  for  the  celebrated 

Voigtlander  &  Son,  and  Darlot  Lenses 

For  Portraits,  Views,  and  Stereoscopic  Work  of  all  sizes.     Send  for  Price  List. 


TRY  OUR   NEW  STEREOSCOPIC   LENSES 

IF  YOU  WANT  THE  BEST.     PRICE,  $22  PER  PAIR. 

None  genuine  unless  our  names  are  engraved  on  them. 


ALBUMEN  PAPERS. 


demon's, 
Hovey's, 


Dresden  S.  &  M., 

"       Brilliant. 


AMERICAN  OPTICAL  OO.'S  CAMERA  BOXES 


Black  Walnut  Frames, 0VAL  mi  m'^:'rm£z"  "d  !ty'es' of 
Carved  Rustic  Frames,  s«um- c"™d*£^"?nm  °mm,s'  A" 

Oill  rmyv»  Q  Yl      Hq  Y»/"1     "P-pn  YY\  CiCt    We  have  of  these  tnree  different  sizes  and  styles  for  the  Card, 
hJllUI  LLldjll     \JObL  U    II  CLLLlt/b*  Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 

White  Hollywood  Frames. 


We  have  these  in  three  different  styles  of  each  size 
for  the  Card,  Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 


Stereoscopes,  Prang's  Chromos,  Glass  Baths,  Plain  Paper, 
Porcelain  Ware,  &c. 

And  every  description  of  goods  used  in  the  business,  at  wholesale  and  retail,  at  the  lowest  cash  prices 

BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO. 


- 


THE 


§?hik<Uljrltiii  $M$$w0tt. 


Vol.  XL 


No.  12  2. 


FEBRUARY,   1874. 

Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1874, 
By  BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


A  LAST  CHANCE. 

A   Splendid   Offer. 

Our  readers  are  aware,  most  of  them, 
that  during  1871  and  1872  we  published  a 
kindred  magazine  to  the  Philadelphia  Pho- 
tographer called  the  Photographic  World. 
It  was  devoted  principally  to  the  publica- 
tion' of  foreign  matters  pertaining  to  pho- 
tography, and  contains  many  very  valuable 
and  excellent  papers  that  will  never  lose 
their  value.  Indeed,  we  do  not  think  any 
two  volumes  of  the  Philadelphia  Photogra- 
pher are  worth  more  than  the  two  volumes 
of  the  World.  And,  besides  their  readable 
contents,  they  contain  twenty-four  most 
beautiful  specimens  of  photography,  by  va- 
rious processes  and  covering  almost  every 
style.  These  alone  are  worth  all  we  ever 
asked  for  the  whole  work. 

But,  as  our  readers  urenot  aware— at  least 
not  so  painfully  as  we  are — the  Photographic 
World  gave  us  more  work  than  we  could  do, 
and  financially  it  was  not  a  success,  for  it 
was  not  encouraged  sufficiently.  We  there- 
fore, discontinued  it,  with  several  thousand 
copies  left  on  our  shelves.  Since  then  we 
have  tried  to  sell  them  at  a  low  price,  but 
we  are  free  to  say  that  they  are  not  largely 
purchased.  We  now  want  that  shelf  room, 
and  were  about  to  send  the  Worlds  to  our 
paper-maker,  to  be  ground  over,  when  the 
thought  occurred  to   us  that  we  could   do 


more  good  with  them  by  making  our  read- 
ers the  following  splendid  offer  : 

To  any  subscribers  to  the  Philadelphia 
Photographer,  who  tvill  signify  their  will- 
ingness to  receive  them,  we  will  send  six,  or 
at  our  option,  more  copies  of  the  Photo- 
graphic World,  free  of  charge,  until  March 
18th;  after  that,  all  copies  left  will  be  other- 
wise disposed  of. 


VIEWS  ABROAD  AND  ACROSS. 

BY    EDWARD    L.    WILSON. 
II. 

Yes,  but  I  have  not  left  Brussels  yet, 
and  I  must  tell  you  a  little  more  about  it. 
As  I  said  before,  the  Bulletin  Beige  de  la 
Photographie  is  published  here,  and  its  edi- 
tor, Mons.  Y/alker,  is  largely  engaged  in 
the  manufacture  of  chemicals,  glassware, 
&c,  anskdoes  not  co.nfine  himself  to  the  re- 
quirements of  photographers  alone.  The 
fact  is,  there  is  so  much  else  to  see  in  Brus- 
sels that  I  gave  photography  the  go-by  for 
a  day,  and  yielded  to  the  temptation  of  other 
things.     Forgive  me. 

One  thing  which  first  attracts  and  aston- 
ishes an  American  who  has  a  fondness  for 
works  of  art,  is  the  immense  wealth  of  such 
objects  in  the  Continental  churches  and 
cathedrals.  Those  buildings,  therefore,  are 
much  frequented  by  tourists,  and  one  can 


34 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


there  study  works  of  art  and  human  nature 
at  the  same  time. 

In  Brussels  there  is  the  famous  old  Cathe- 
dral of  St.  Michael  and  G-udule.  Its  mag- 
nificent stained  windows  thrill  one  with 
delight,  and  send  beauty  in  all  directions 
through  the  dark  interior,  by  means  of  sun- 
light messengers.  The  nave  is  lined  with 
noble  statues,  the  chapels  and  confessionals 
are  adorned  with  beautiful  sculpture  and 
paintings  and  carvings  ;  but  what  attracted 
me  the  most  was  the  pulpit,  which  is  the 
most  wondrous  example  of  wood-carving  of 
its  kind  that  there  is  in  existence,  perhaps. 
It  represents  the  expulsion  of  Adam  and  Eve 
from  Paradise,  with  many  accompanying 
allegorical  figures  of  greater  than  life  size, 
all  beautifully  and  wonderfully  grouped  and 
carved.  It  is  a  splendid  subject  for  a  pho- 
tograph, and  the  Brussels  photographers 
have  done  it  full  justice,  although  I  cannot 
say  much  of  what  else  they  have  done,  be- 
cause it  is  most  difficult  to  get  good  views 
of  objects  in  that  beautiful  city  there.  I 
wandered  and  wondered  a  long  time  in  this 
old  cathedral,  and  then  set  about  other 
things. 

Did  you  ever  feel  the  pleasure  of  that  per- 
fect freedom  which  one  has  when  entirely 
away  from  the  cares  and  trials  of  the  daily 
routine  of  business  ?  I  felt  it  in  Brussels, 
and  I  gave  way  to  it.  I  wandered  now  in 
the  park,  listening  to  the  chirp  of  the  birds 
and  the  music  of  the  beautiful  fountains  ; 
then,  taking  in  the  beauties  of  the  abun- 
dance of  sculpture,  or  watching  the  busy 
throng  of  people  of  all  classes  who  made  a 
"short  cut"  across,  thinking  how  many 
pictures  I  could  capture,  if  I  only  had  my 
apparatus  here.  Then  I  strayed  off  among 
the  boulevards — once  the  site  of  the  fortifi- 
cations of  the  city,  but  now  beautiful  wide 
streets  lined  with  trees — and  sat  me  down 
at  a  table  in  front  of  some  beer  house,  whose 
wide  pavement  was  covered  with  tables  and 
chairs,  and  people  drinking  beer,  as  they 
discussed  the  past,  the  present,  and  the  fu- 
ture, where  I  could  watch  the  strange  pano- 
rama that  never  ceased  to  move  before  me. 
Oh,  Brussels  !  how  fascinating  thou  art,  and 
what  a  splendid  chance  here  for  Scovill 
Manufacturing  Company  to  open  a  branch 
store  for  the  sale  of  brass  buttons,  for  sol- 


diers, police,  newsboys,  pages,  porters,  car- 
riers, cooks,  bootblacks,  and — every  other 
man  are  lined  with  brass  buttons,  all  as  nu- 
merous as  the  trees  on  the  boulevards. 
And  yet  they  seem  to  be  a  modest  people, 
with  all  their  brass. 

But  I  must  not  waste  your  time  with 
these  details.  They  are  not  of  photogra- 
phy^ Jet  there  are  pictures  here  for  the 
camera  in  abundance. 

When  tired — nay,  not  tired,  for  I  never 
tire  of  watching  human  beings — but  when 
I  was  warned  that  my  time  was  slipping  by,  I 
turned  my  steps  to  the  old  Museum,  where  I 
made  my  first  bow  to  a  splendid  collection  of 
the  paintings  of  the  old  masters.  Here  I  was, 
certain,  right  in  the  midst  of  the  works  of 
Guido,  Correggio,  Cuyp,  Bubens,  Van  Dyck, 
Vanderweyde,  and  others.  I  at  once  felt 
the  advantages  of  such  little  knowledge  as  I 
have  of  art  principles,  and  I  found  myself 
involuntary  applying  that  knowledge  then. 
Pyramids  and  diagonals  and  lovely  curves 
would  spring  out  at  me — like  spectres  ? — 
no !  but  like  real,  living  objects.  And 
now  a  great  broad  expanse  of  light  would 
startle  and  thrill  me,  or  a  sublime  rich 
shadow  make  me  stand  and  search  for  the 
wondrous  detail  I  was  sure  to  find.  I 
was  in  aesthetic  glory,  and  I  wandered  to 
and  fro  among  the  galleries  with  a  feeling 
of  enthusiasm  and  ownership  which  I  shall 
never  forget.  There  was  every  variety  of 
subject  here,  and  artists  of  all  grades  and 
sexes  making  copies.  Many  times  I  halted 
before  a  life-size  painting  of  Adam.  It 
was  exquisitely  beautiful  in  figure,  and  the 
coloring  of  the  flesh  seemed  flesh  itself. 
Here,  thought  I,  is  where  the  painter  has 
the  advantage  of  us.  He  can,  with  color 
and  brush,  imitate  nature  more  closely  than 
we,  and  he  can  create  expression,  which  we 
cannot  do.  Yet  are  we  not  progressing, 
and  have  we  not  a  new  power  in  the  pencil 
by  which  the  modelling  of  the  negative  may 
be  almost  anything  we  choose  to  make  it? 
As  to  expression,  that  depends  more  upon 
our  own  personal  humor  at  the  time  we 
make  the  negative,  than  we  generally  ad- 
mit. But  we  will  discuss  this  subject  again. 
The  attendant  upon  the  Museum  has  warned 
me,  by  the  rattling  of  a  huge  bunch  of  huge 
keys,  which  he  carries,  that  the  hour  for 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


35 


closing  has  arrived,  and  I  reluctantly  leave. 
Into  the  street  again,  I  find  myself  again 
giving  way  to  the  feeling  of  freedom  and  I 
find  plenty  to  occupy  me  Right  at  hand 
is  the  statue  of  Duke  Alva,  who,  in  A.D. 
1500,  made  it  his  boast  that  in  six  years  he 
"  took  off  the  heads  of  18,000  persons,"  so 
that  the  photographers  of  the  present  day 
are  not  of  the  first  engaged  in  such  deplor- 
able business,  although  we  have  an  Alva 
(Pearsall)  among  us.  The  palaces,  the  Bo- 
tanical Garden,  the  fountains,  and  the  pub- 
lic buildings  here  are  all  beautiful ;  and  not 
only  this,  they  are  so  located  as  to  have  the 
most  beautiful  appearance, — their  surround- 
ings are  beautiful.  I  took  in  all  I  could 
of  them,  resting  not  until  night  overtook 
me. 

Brussels  at  night  is  quite  as  beautiful 
as  at  daytime.  The  Galerie  St.  Hubert, 
which  is  a  great  arcade,  692  feet  long,  64 
feet  high,  and  26  feet  wide,  seems  to  have 
sprung  into  existence  like  a  gas  jet  itself. 
It  is  now  most  brilliantly  illuminated,  as 
well  as  its  shops,  and  the  latter  make  show 
of  their  most  glittering  wares  in  their  win- 
dows. Streams  of  people  of  all  classes 
pour  through  this  popular  avenue,  and  post- 
ing myself  in  the  shadow  of  a  great  column 
I  stood  and  watched  the  Babel-like  scene. 
Amid  the  music  and  the  merriment  of  the 
gay  people,  who  seemed  to  forget  care  en- 
tirely in  the  beer  and  the  ices  which  they 
were  absorbing  at  the  numerous  establish- 
ments devoted  to  the  traffic  of  such  dain- 
ties, I  stood  alone,  in  a  foreign  land.  Nu- 
merous persons  approached  me,  whom  I 
suppose  could  as  easily  see  I  was  a  foreigner 
as  1  could  see  that  they  were  foreigners  to 
me,  offering  their  services  for  all  sorts  of 
things,  both  delicate  and  indelicate.  But 
I  preferred  to  have  no  "guide."  I  had 
escaped  from  my  cage,  and  I  wished  to  fly 
along  alone.  To  the  beautiful  park  I  went 
again,  where  another  world  seemed  to  have 
sprung  up.  The  great  music-stand  was 
filled  with  fine  performers,  and  the  space  in 
front  was  transformed  into  a  garden  devoted 
to  beer  and  ices,  with  thousands  of  people 
promenading  to  and  fro,  giving  way  to  the 
bewitching  influence  of  all  things  around 
them.  Each  person  seemed  to  have  a  com- 
panion.    I  had  none  ;  and  not  daring  to  be 


lonely,  I  made  a  stroll  to  my  hotel,  and  was 
soon  asleep. 

Do  you  not  see  how  difficult  it  is  for  me 
to  make  my  "views"  entirely  photo- 
graphic ?  Every  way  I  turned  I  found 
splendid  material  for  the  camera — magnifi- 
cent buildings,  splendid  streets,  and  genre 
pictures  on  every  corner  and  each  rod  of 
of  the  way. 

From  Brussels,  one  day,  I  made  an  ex- 
cursion to  Charleroi,  where  are  located 
some  of  the  largest  glass  manufactories  of 
the  world,  to  say  nothing  of  the  coal-mines 
in  the  neighborhood.  You  are  not  aware, 
perhaps,  that  nearly  all  of  the  fine  "  French" 
picture  and  negative  glass,  which  is  used  in 
photography,  is  made  in  Belgium.  Nearly 
all  the  "French  "  plate-glass  for  our  show- 
cases and  front  windows  is  also  manufac- 
tured in  Belgium.  It  is  called  "  French," 
I  suppose,  because  many  of  the  men  who 
make  it  speak  French — not  all,  however, 
for  I  learned,  by  dear  experience,  that  many 
of  them  jabber  the  most  absurd  Flemish. 

Well,  it  was  to  see  photographic  glass 
made  that  I  went  to  Charleroi.  It  is  a 
city  upon  a  hill,  or  a  great  many  hills,  and 
looks,  from  a  distance,  like  a  huge  charcoal 
mound,  for  the  earth  and  the  factories  and 
the  people  are  nearly  all  one  color,  and  the 
smoke  which  colors  all  seems  to  ooze  from 
everything  and  everybody.  Nothing  seems 
clear  there  but  the  glass.  When  I  arrived  at 
the  station  a  man  seized  my  luggage,  and 
wished  to  know  if  I  wished  a  "  c&rrazgh  !" 
Upon  being  informed  that  I  did,  I  was  led  to 
a  small  inn  where  a  jolly  fat  woman  was  the 
proprietress.  I  bargained  with  her  for  the 
use  of  a  horse  with  a  loeg  reach,  and  for 
Hubert,  her  humpbacked  driver.  While 
Hubert  changed  his  clothes  and  put  on  his 
best  blouse  (which  barely  reached  over  his 
hump),  and  clean  wooden  shoes,  and  I  made 
some  notes,  the  "rig"  was  made  ready. 

One  learns  to  be  patient  in  this  country. 
It  takes  a  long  time  to  get  everything  or 
anything  done-  but  in  a  reasonable  time 
Hubert  and  the  horse  and  I  were  ready, 
and  we  started. 

Had  Dr.  Vogel  seen  us  as  we  climbed  the 
hills  of  Charleroi,  at  the  rate  of  about  8  15, 
he  would  have  exclaimed,  as  is  his  habit, 
"Das  ist  ein  schone  genre  bild!"      Hubert 


36 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


jerked  his  horse,  but  the  latter  seemed  to  have 
an  understanding  with  Hubert,  and  made 
no  increase  in  his  speed.  However,  after 
travelling  through  the  narrow,  dirty  streets, 


Hubert  jerked  his  horse,  but 

and  the  curious  market-place,  where  the 
women  were  squatted  on  the  ground  with 
white  handkerchiefs  about  their  heads,  and 
white  muslin  shawls  pinned  tightly  to  their 
shrivelled  bodies,  with  their  merchandise 
arranged  around  them,  and  through  a  great 
procession  of  the  peasantry  who  were  com- 
ing to  market,  the  women  bareheaded,  but 
earning  umbrellas  as  large  as  balloons,  and 
passing  a  funeral,  which  our  malicious  horse 
tried  to  break  up  by  seizing  the  hat  of  the 
head  pallbearer,  through  dozens  of  dog- 
carts, and  simooms  of  dust,  we  arrived  at 
the  office  of  one  of  the  largest  glass-making 
firms,  to  whom  I  had  a  letter  of  introduc- 
tion. I  was  received  with  such  gentlemanly 
courtesy,  that  notwithstanding  the  dirt  and 
dust,  1  wanted  to  stay  longer  than  my  time 
would  allow.  I  was  taken  through  the 
manufactory  and  shown  the  whole  process, 
from  the  mixing  of  the  ingredients  to  the 
packing  of  the  glass  in  the  very  familiar 
boxes,  for  market.  You  all  understand 
how  glass  is  made.  Here,  in  one  depart- 
ment, are  huge  furnaces,  almost  without 
number,  and  a  scene  is  presented  which  is 
almost  appalling.  What  with  the  roaring 
of  the  furnaces,  the  belching  of  the  flames 
from  their  mouths,  the  running  to  and  fro  of 
half-naked  men  and  boys,  the  contortions  of 
the  glass-  blowers,  and  the  clashing  of  broken 
glass,  one  might  be  excused  from  thinking 
himself  in  that  portion  of  the  Inferno  which 


Dante  devoted  to  defunct  glasshlowers  who 
spoiled  too  much  good  glass  while  here  in 
the  flesh  and  perspiration. 

After  the  "  metal  "  is  "  ready  "  the  glass- 
blower,  with  his  hollow  iron  tube, 
dips  sufficient  from  the  mass  to 
make  a  cylinder.  Standing  upon 
a  high  platform  in  front  of  the 
furnace,  he  first  blows  through  his 
tube,  and  then  swings  the  bag- 
shaped  mass  thus  formed  to  and 
fro  in  the  air  until  it  grows  larger 
and  larger,  heating  it  between 
times.  Eventually  he  produces  a 
cylinder  from  five  to  six  feet  long, 
say  fifteen  to  eighteen  inches  in 
diameter,  and  when  standing  on 
end  looking  like  a  huge  "glass 
shade  "  such  as  is  used  for  flowers, 
wax  fruit,  &c. 
These  cylinders  are  taken  now  to  the  flat- 
ting furnace.  They  are  lifted  into  the  fur- 
nace, and  after  attaining  a  certain  heat,  the 


Eventually  he  produces  a  cylinder. 

workman  touches  them  with  an  instrument, 
at  one  end,  which  causes  a  crack  to  run 
along  the  whole  length.  Now  the  sides  be- 
gin to  separate,  and  as  the  cylinder  becomes 


JVoiv  the  sides  begin  to  separate. 

hotter,  so  it  becomes  less  a  cylinder,  until  it 
rests  upon  its  warm  bed  almost  flat.  The 
workman  now  takes  a  heavy  iron  tool,  simi- 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


37 


lar  to  a  scraper  or  hoe,  and  works  it  over 
the  glass  until  it  is  as  flat  as  he  can  make  it. 
The  sheet  is  then  dexterously  lifted  into  a 
cooling  furnace,  where  it  gradually  becomes 
cold,  and  from  which  it  is  carried  to  another 
room,  cut  into  proper  size,  and  boxed  for 
market — the  small  sizes  for  the  photog- 
rapher, and  the  larger  ones  for  the  picture 
dealer  and  the  glazier.  Yet  be  assured  the 
photographer  gets  the  best  attention,  for 
his  glass  is  all  selected,  and  I  charged  the 
workmen  here  to  be  very  conscientious  about 
it.  I  was  laughed  at,  but  that  was  not  the 
first  time  I  had  been  laughed  at  for  my  in- 
terest in  behalf  of  the  photographic  fra- 
ternity. 

From  Charleroi  I  went  back  to  Brussels, 
glad  to  leave  Hubert  and  his  obstinate 
horse. 

From  Brussels  I  went  to  Cologne  "be- 
tween two  days,"  for  I  could  have  a  berth 
in  an  "American  sleeping-car,"  or  "  wagen- 
lite,"  as  they  call  it  here,  or  "  schla-f-wagen  " 
in  Germany.  It  was  the  first  one  I  had 
seen  in  Europe,  and  the  conductor  was  a 
social  young  Swiss  who  had  lived  in  Amer- 
ica. The  sleeping-car  here  is  a  great  curi- 
osity,t  and  I  saw  many  passengers  going  the 
same  way,  come  forward,  look  at  it  with 
apparent  dread,  and  shaking  their  heads,  go 
back  to  their  upright  seats,  and  snore  it  out 
there  in  preference.  I  went  to  Cologne  to 
see  the  great  Cathedral,  and  I  saw  it,  and 
trembled  at  it.  With  its  one  side  rotted 
and  worn  with  age,  and  the  other  compara- 
tively new,  with  the  scaffolding  still  up, 
and  the  great  piles  of  wrought  and  un- 
wrought  stone  about  it,  awaiting  their  turn 
to  do  good  service  in  increasing  the  size  of 
the  immense  structure,  it  looks  like  a  moun- 
tain with  its  attendant  debris,  so  overpow- 
eringly  huge  is  it.  Its  interior  strikes  one 
with  awe.  Its  stained  windows,  with  their 
hundreds  of  life-size  figures  and  portraits, 
have  all  the  delicacy  and  softness  of  oil 
paintings,  and  excel  them  in  color  and  bril- 
liancy. Each  one  is  an  historical  study  and 
an  aesthetic  delight.  Such  work  is  not 
made  now.  The  art  has  been  lost.  Here, 
too,  are  the  seven  famous  chapels,  adorned 
with  all  that  wealth  and  religious  ardor 
could  supply  to  make  them  impressive  and 
beautiful.      Still  I  more    wonderful   are  the 


ninety-six  carved  seats  of  the  choir,  the 
panels  in  the  backs  of  which  are  each  a  work 
of  art,  and  represent  a  scene  in  Scripture 
history.  Gorgeous  tapestry  hangs  down  in 
luxuriant  folds  within  the  nave,  which  baf- 
fles one's  power  to  comprehend  its  beauty, 
while  the  tall  columns  stand  solemnly  reach- 
ing out  their  arms  to  each  other,  forming 
arches  of  exquisite  proportions  and  sym- 
metry. What  plenteous  food  here  for  the 
camera.  Yet  it  is  almost  inaccessible  on 
account  of  the  dim  light  of  the  interior.  ' 
Truly  grand  is  the  Cathedral  at  Cologne. 
It  is  a  long  way  from  being  finished  yet! 
After  spending  all  the  time  I  could  in  the 
interior,  I  walked  around  it,  and,  more  than 
ever  became  impressed  with  its  immensity. 
And  it  was  at  Cologne  that  I  first  caught 
sight  of  the  beautiful  Rhine,  across  which, 
at  this  place,  a  fine  tubular  bridge  is  erected, 
I  went  also  to  the  Church  of  St.  Ursula,  and 
saw  the  bones  of  that  departed  faithful  one, 
with  those  of  the  eleven  thousand  virgins, 
who  met  their  death  with  her,  besides  many 
other  curious  objects,  such  as  finely-dressed 
skeletons,  &c,  of  which  there  was  no  lack 
Then  I  took  a  stroll  among  the  fortifica- 
tions of  this  city,  for  Cologne  is  the  Micaw- 
ber  of  the  Rhine — it  is  always  "  waiting  for 
something  to  turn  up,"  and  is  always  ready 
with  "its  armor  girded  on."  Many  strange 
street  scenes  meet  the  eye  here.  Women's 
rights  are  fully  respected.  I  saw  several 
women  sweeping  and  sprinkling  the  streets, 
driving  oxen,  drawing  milk  carts,  and  doing 
other  manful  service.  The  streets  need 
the  thorough  cleansing  power  of  women,  be 
assured.  A  man  could  not  do  them  justice. 
Nature  did  a  good  thing  when  she  estab- 
lished her  "only  genuine"  Cologne-water 
distillery  here.  It  is  also  needed,  and  no 
doubt  the  birth  of  the  "only  original" 
Jules  Marina  Farina  was  a  godsend  to  this 
filthy  city. 

From  Cologne,  by  rail,  to  Bonn.  Here 
I  visited  the  great  University  of  course, 
and  its  wonderful  museum,  and  also  made 
a  tour  of  the  beautiful  old  intellectual  city 
so  famed  in  history,  and  whose  history  is  so 
dear  to  many.  But  I  came  here  to  realize 
the  dream  of  my  youth,  i  e. ,  to  take  a  sail 
upon  the  Rhine.  At  the  appointed  hour 
I  embarked  on  the  fairy-likesteamer  Lorely, 


38 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


and  soon  I  found  mj'self  really  sailing  upon 
the  bosom  of  that  classic  river.  The  pas- 
sengers were  numerous,  and  in  their  holiday 
attire,  but  all  unknown  to  me ;  so,  undis- 
turbed, on  a  shady  bench  near  the  stern,  I 
threw  myself  down,  and  gave  way  to  the 
enchanting  scene  about  me.  We  halted 
often,  now  at  some  little  village,  or  in  mid- 
river,  where  small  row-boats  added  to  or 
took  from  our  load,  and  I  realized  to  the  full 
my  dream  of  beautiful  villas,  crags,  and 
castles,  and  terraces  of  grape  vines,  and  the 
dreamy  atmosphere.  Longfellow's  Hype- 
rion came  back  to  memory,  and  as  I  looked 
over  into  the  water  something  seemed  to 
say,  as  I  dreamed, 

"  Take  care  !  she  is  fooling  thee. " 

I  was  awakened  from  my  reverie  by  "  a 
maiden  fair,"  who  had  grapes  to  sell.  1  pur- 
chased two  huge  bunches  of  two  varieties,  as 
a  climb  up  the  Drachenfels  was  before  me, 
and  I  would  need  refreshing.  Just  then  a 
turn  of  the  little  craft  brought  the  "  Seven 
Mountains  "  in  full  view  on  the  left,  and 
overtopping  all 

"  The  castled  crag  of  Drachenfels 
Frowns  on  the  wide  and  winding  Khine." 
Soon  we  landed  at  Konigswater,  and  T  pre- 
pared to  ascend  the  mountain.  The  day 
was  hot,  and  stooping  constantly  to  gather 
wild  flowers  made  it  hotter.  First  through 
the  narrow  streets  of  the  little  village,  then 
along  a  winding  pathway  through  a  terraced 
vineyard,  up,  up,  up,  the  great  ruins  now 
in  sight  and  now  hid  by  the  rocks,  "  so  near 
and  yet  so  far."  I  thought  I  would  make 
a  short  cut  by  crossing  some  fields.  Ah  ! 
me.  I  became  an  innocent  trespasser.  Sud- 
denly I  came  upon  a  suspicious -looking 
house,  whose  inmates  seemed  to  be  gone  on 
some  pleasant  excursion.  I  was  not  left  in 
doubt  long  as  to  the  character  of  that  house 
and  its  inmates,  for  the  latter  turned  out 
upon  me  suddenly,  and  turned  out  to  be  an 
angry  old  man,  an  angry  dog,  and  a  hungry- 
looking  pitchfork.  The  old  man  shouted, 
the  dog  barked,  and  the  pitchfork  danced 
frantically  up  and  down  on  the  stone  step. 
I  thought — I  thought — well,  under  these  cir- 
cumstances, if  Dr.  Vogel  was  here,  he  would 
say,  "A  tine  genre  picture,  Herr  Wilson." 
The  whole  excitement  seemed  to  be  about 
my  grapes.  The  man,  the  dog,  and  the  pitch- 


fork all  argued  that  I  had  stolen  them  from 
their  vineyard.  I  waved  a  flag  of  truce, 
and    on   comparing   grapes    found   the    old 


An  angry  old  man,  an  angry  dog,  and  a  hungry-looking 
pitchfork. 

man  had  none  of  that  style  in  his  vineyard. 
So,  much  displeased,  I  proceeded  with  the 
climb.  It  was  pleasant,  as  all  mountain- 
climbing  is,  and  reaching  the  grand  old 
ruins  I  had  a  glorious  view  of  the  Rhine, 
up  and  down.  It  is  grandly  beautiful ;  it  is 
bewitching  as  far  as  the  eye  can  see,  from  one 
way  to  the  other,  and  it  is  all  I  dreamed  it 
to  be,  old  castles,  ruins,  and  all,  but owr  Hud- 
son is  the  most  beautiful.  I  may  not  tell 
you  more  now.  I  descended,  and  crossed 
the  river  in  a  row-boat  with  an  old  good- 
natured  German,  who  offered  to  sell  me 
some  of  the  old  castles  for  our  Hudson,  upon 
my  telling  him  that  we  only  needed  them 
and  legends  to  make  the  Hudson  classic.  I 
told  him  I  only  carried  a  satchel,  and 
couldn't  take  his  offer,  but  I  would  like  to 
have  a  legend,  for  what  is  a  visit  to  the 
Rhine  without  hearing  a  legend  ?  So  he  gave 
me  one,  and  it  is  too  good  to  withhold,  so 
hear  ye  the  legend  of  the  old  boatman  of 
Godesberg : 

"  The  old  wheelwright  of  Godesberg  had  a 
son,  whose  ambition  seemed  to  arise  beyond 
spokes  and  axles,  but  the  old  man  knew 
nothing  else,  and  was  in  great  trouble  about 
it.  One  night  the  lad  strolled  down  the 
riverside,  as  was  his  wont,  to  drive  home 
the  cows.  Arriving  at  the  pasture-field,  no 
cows  could  be  found.  The  lad  wandered 
through  the  vineyards  and  up  the  hillside 
even  to  the  top,  in  search  of  the  stray  kine, 
but  without  success.  Then  down  through 
the  woods  he  came,  calling  loudly  to  his  fa- 
vorite heifer  to  '  come  and  go  home.'  At 
last,  in  his  despair,  fearing  that  if  he  re- 
turned home  without  them  his  father  would 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


39 


accuse  him  of  having  sat  down  by  the  way- 
side to  pore  over  his  books,  as  indeed  he 
often  did,  and  then  thrash  him,  he  knelt 
down  by  a  big  tree  and  began  to  pray.  In 
his  nervousness,  while  he  prayed  he  scraped 
the  earth,  and  when  opening  his  eyes  he 
discovered  his  knees  piled  up  with  large, 
green,  luscious  crystals!  He  forgot  all 
about  his  kine,  and,  gathering  his  hands 
full  of  the  crystals,  ran  with  them  to  a  con- 
fidential old  friend,  who  was  a  blacksmith 
and  also  a  chemist,  and  who  applied  leeches, 
and  who  was,  likewise,  a  photographer  of 
the  ancient  kind.  The  old  man  declared 
the  crystals  to  be  protosulphate  of  iron, 
and  very  valuable  for  developing  photo- 
graphic plates.  The  young  man  at  once 
'took  out  a  patent,'  began  to  levy  tribute 
upon  the  fraternity  at  large — but  not  then 
very  large — and  was  in  danger  of  getting 
rich;  but,  not  content,  he  applied  'the 
doctrine  of  equivalents,'  claimed  'the  use 
of  pyro  and  other  equivalents,  and,  in 
fact,  every  method  of  development ;  where- 
upon he  stumbled  and  fell,  and  from  that  day, 
scratch  as  he  would,  no  more  crystals  would 
come.  He  went  mad  and  refused  to  cease  dig- 
ging, until  one  day  he  fell  into  the  hole  he 
had  dug  and  died,  and  covered  himself  up." 
This  is  a  fresh  legend,  and  this  is  its  pre- 
liminary exposure. 

My  next  halt  on  the  Ehine  was  at  Dus- 
seldorf.  Beautiful, 
quiet,  restful  Dus- 
seldorf!  whose  peo- 
ple sit  at  their  win- 
dows and  see  all  that 
goes  on  in  the  street 
by  means  of  oblique 
mirrors  fastened  out- 
side, and  whose  mah- 
lers  (painters)  and 
mustard  have  a 
world-wide  reputa- 
tion. Moreover,  here 
resides  a  brother  of 
the  optician,  Mr. 
Dallmeyer,of  whom 
I  bought  a  handkerchief— for  know  that  I 
buy  a  handkerchief  in  every  city  as  a  re- 
membrancer. Here  also  resides  my  good 
friend  Dr.  Liesegang,  the  talented  editor  of 
the  Photographisctyes  Archiv,  of  whom  and  of 


Oblique  mirrors  fastened 
outside. 


whose  fine  establishment,  and  of  the  sights 
we  had  together,  I  must  tell  you  in  my  next. 

Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papers. 

"The  vignetting  papers  are  a  success. 
Work  splendidly.— J.  W.  &  J.  S.  Motjl- 
ton,  Salem,  Mass." 

The  reception  of  such  remarks  as  the 
above,  concerning  Waymouth's  vignetting 
papers,  induces  us  once  more  to  call  the  at- 
tention of  our  readers  to  that  great  pho- 
tographic convenience.  Moreover,  in  order 
that  all  may  have  an  opportunity  to  test 
their  merits,  we  present  each  of  our  readers 
with  a  vignetting  paper  of  one  of  the  me- 
dium sizes,  and  we  would  consider  it  a  favor 
to  have  them  used. 

There  is  nothing  so  disagreeable  as  a  badly 
vignetted  picture,  and  there  is  nothing  more 
chaste  and  beautiful  than  one  properly  done. 
Again,  there  is  no  method  so  simple,  so 
easy,  and  so  certain  as  by  means  of  Mr. 
Waymouth's  invention.  Simply  "tack" 
them  to  the  outer  surface  of  the  negative  by 
the  corners,  carefully  adjusting  them  to  the 
figure  by  holding  them  (negative  and  paper) 
up  to  the  light.  Then  print  as  usual.  If 
an  exceedingly  delicate  effect  is  desired, 
fasten  the  vignette  paper  to  the  printing- 
frame  a  little  above  the  negative. 

It  would  seem  that  they  would  come  into 
very  general  use.  They  are  very  cheaply 
sold,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  advertisement, 
so  cheaply  as  to  be  used  on  every  negative, 
though  one  paper  may  be  used  over  and 
over  again  on  different  negatives.  We  have 
at  least  called  your  attention  to  them,  and 
twice  given  you  "  a  sample  to  try."  Should 
you  then  continue  to  make  badly  vignetted 
pictures  ? 


Messrs.  Long  &  Smith,  Quincy,  Ills., 
say  :  "  We  find  many  are  troubled  with  por- 
celain collodion  from  its  not  keeping,  while 
ours  keeps  splendidly  any  length  of  time. 
We  keep  it  tightly  corked,  and  the  bottle  in- 
closed in  a  tin  case,  and  that  standing  on  the 
floor  in  a  cool  part  of  our  store.  From  this 
fact  we  infer  that  it  should  be  kept  in  a  cool, 
even  temperature,  and,  of  course,  entirely 
dark.  The  above  fact  may  be  of  value  to 
somebody." 


40 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


THINGS  NEW  AND  OLD. 

BY    E.   J.    CHUTE. 

Ventilating  the  Dark-room. 

There  may  be  differences  of  opinion  as 
to  which  part  of  the  work  is  most  important 
in  the  practice  of  photography,  but  when  it 
comes  to  the  question  of  health  there  can  be 
but  one  answer  in  reference  to  the  sanitary 
influence  of  the  dark-room,  in  most  photo- 
graphic galleries.  In  any  other  department 
of  the  business  a  man  will  hold  out  as  long, 
and  have  his  health  affected  as  little  by  pho- 
tography, as  by  any  other  branch  of  business 
he  may  follow,  but  there  are  few  who  can 
confine  themselves  exclusively  to  dark-room 
work  and  not  break  down  sooner  or  later. 
The  poor  operator,  who  has  been  for  months 
buried,  as  it  were,  in  that  chemical  den, 
till  almost  crazed  with  headaches,  and  ema- 
ciated from  loss  of  sleep  and  appetite,  con- 
sults a  physician,  to  see  if  he  can  ascertain 
what  the  trouble  is,  or  whether  it  is  his 
business  that  affects  him.  The  doctor  looks 
wisely  at  him,  and  inquires  what  chemicals 
he  uses  in  his  business.  He  replies  that  he 
is  "  working  mostly  with  collodion  made  of 
ether,  alcohol,  and  gun-cotton,  and  excited 
with  iodides  and  bromides,  and  with  devel- 
oper made  of  protosulphate  of  iron  dissolved 
in  water  with  a  little  acetic  acid."  The 
disciple  of  Galen  strokes  his  beard  and  says 
he  "  don't  think  those  would  have  any  inju- 
rious effect."  Perhaps  not,  if  a  person  is  not 
confined  very  closely,  or  is  passing  in  and 
out  so  as  to  get  a  change  of  air,  but 
when  a  man  comes  to  be  tied  to  his  post,  as 
many  are  in  our  large  galleries,  from  the 
time  he  comes  in  the  morning,  till  he  goes 
at  night,  and  all  this  time  drinking  in  the 
fumes  from  the  collodion  till  his  clothes  and 
even  his  breath  seem  saturated  with  it,  it 
■must  have  an  injurious  effect. 

As  we  all  know,  the  vapor  from  ether  is 
heavier  than  the  atmosphere,  and  is  there- 
fore not  so  easily  carried  off  by  the  ordinary 
means  of  ventilation.  It  falls  and  combines 
with  the  atmospheric  gases  in  the  lower  part 
of  the  room,  so  that  the  operator  is  continu- 
ally moving  in  and  breathing  a  combina- 
tion of  elements  not  very  well  calculated 
to  promote  a  healthy  condition  in  an  organ- 
ism so  delicate  as  the  human  lungs. 


Now,  the  important  consideration  in  ref- 
erence to  this  matter  is  to  devise  some 
means  of  ventilation  that  shall  carry  off  the 
fumes  that  fall  as  well  as  those  that  rise.  I 
have  long  had  in  mind  a  plan  which  I  in- 
tended to  try  whenever  I  should  have  occa- 
sion to  fit  up  a  dark-room,  but  as  there 
seems  no  immediate  prospect  of  my  putting 
it  into  operation,  I  will  make  the  sugges- 
tions, in  hopes  that  it  may  prove  of  benefit 
to  somebody  else. 

1  should  construct  a  ventilator,  if  con- 
venient, on  the  side  of  the  room  and  near 
the  place  where  the  plates  are  to  be  coated 
with  collodion,  but  I  would  make  this  a 
secondary  consideration  if  I  could  run  it  up 
against  a  chimney-flue  or  stove-funnel,  as 
the  important  point  would  be  to  warm  the 
ventilator  and  thus  secure  an  upward  cur- 
rent ;  or  else  let  the  outside  arrangement  be 
such  as  to  secure  the  desired  upward  move- 
ment. If  not  put  in  when  the  room  is 
built  .let  it  be  put  up  against  the  wall.  It 
need  not  project  more  than  two  and  a  half 
or  three  inches  from  the  wall,  but  let  it  be 
eighteen  inches  or  two  feet  wide,  making 
an  opening  something  the  shape  of  the  in- 
side of  a  large  bath-holder,  running  up  the 
wall.  It  should  come  down  to  within  about 
three  feet  of  the  floor  and  be  open  at  the 
bottom.  With  a  current  of  air  drawing 
into  this  the  collodion  vapor,  as  it  falls  from 
the  plate,  would  be  immediately  carried 
away.  In  order  to  supply  the  room  with 
fresh  air,  I  should  have  a  perforated  wooden 
or  tin  pipe  run  around  near  the  top  of  the 
rOom  and  connect  either  with  another  room 
where  it  would  get  a  good  supply,  or  else 
run  it  outside.  This  could  be  regulated  by 
a  damper,  so  as  to  admit  as  much  or  as  little 
fresh  air  as  desirable.  A  small  ventilator, 
in  or  near  the  top  of  the  room,  to  carry  off 
the  hot  air  in  summer,  would  complete  the 
arrangement,  and  I  believe  would  give  a 
well-ventilated,  healthy  dark-room. 

The  principle  of  the  arrangement  is  to 
ventilate  from  the  bottom  of  the  room,  and 
while  carrying  oft"  the  chemical  vapors  that 
accumulate,  avoid  dust  that  might  be  car- 
ried up  where  the  ventilator  is  exclusively 
at  the  top.  If  it  be  not  practicable  to  carry 
the  ventilator  up  near  a  chimney  or  funnel 
— and  this  would  only  be  of  advantage  in 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


41 


cold  weather — I  would  suggest  that  it  be 
carried  out  of  the  highest  part  of  the  room, 
so  that  it  might  be  warmed  as  much  as  pos- 
sible by  the  heat  that  rises  in  the  apartment. 
In  order  to  secure  an  upward  current  of  air, 
or  prevent  it  from  blowing  down,  as  it  will 
do  sometimes,  a  damper  or  valve,  something 
on  the  principle  of  a  valve  in  a  pump,  might 
be  placed  in  the  upper  part  of  the  ventilator, 
which  should  be  either  square  or  round,  so 
hung  that  the  slightest  current  upward 
would  open  it,  while  a  downward  movement 
would  close  it. 

I  will  give  my  ideas  more  in  detail,  with 
illustrations,  in  the  next  number  of  the 
Philadelphia  Photographer. 

(To  be  continued.) 


HINTS  FROM  THE  RECORD  OF  AN 
ARTIST  AND  PHOTOGRAPHER. 

BY   JOHN    L.    GTHON. 

The  September  number  of  the  Photogra- 
pher for  1873  deserves  more  than  a  passing 
notice  from  every  one  who  is  in  the  habit 
of  publicly  expressing  his  views.  To  the 
craft  it  is  possibly  as  important  a  volume  as 
has  ever  been  issued,  and  much  that  it  con- 
tains should  be  most  carefully  read,  re- 
membered, and  practiced.  I  had  purposed 
making  a  somewhat  lengthy  criticism  of  its 
pages,  but  upon  a  second  reading  I  find  that 
I  should  have  made  some  blunders — con- 
demned things  worthy  of  praise  and  extolled 
views  of  doubtful  merit. 

Controversies  are  always  disagreeable  af- 
fairs to  enter  into,  and  a  full  expression  of 
one's  thoughts  is  very  apt  to  entail  them. 
Metaphorically  speaking,  there  is  plenty  of 
grain,  and  each  one  can  separate  the  wheat 
from  the  tares  according  to  his  own  liking. 
At  the  same  time  I  cannot  refrain  from 
assuming  the  position  that  some  of  our 
members  are  too  enthusiastic,  too  sanguine 
as  to  the  future  of  photography.  The  hope 
that  our  pictures  will  ever  be  classed  with 
the  glorious  efforts  of  the  old  or  even  the 
modern  masters  of  art,  will  never  be  real- 
ized. There  has  been  a  deal  of  comment 
sa  to  the  level  that  our  vocation  should  hold 
in  the  established  scale  of  men's  professions. 
The  effort  to  place  it  upon  the  same  base 
with  painting  and  sculpture  must  necessa- 


rily end  in  failure,  and  it  is  visionary  to 
suppose  that  any  of  our  pictures,  as  at  pres- 
ent made,  or  as  they  promise  to  be  produced, 
will  be  hung  with  the  works  of  legitimate 
artists.  Photography  must  hold  a  neutral 
ground.  It  must  have  a  platform  of  its 
own.  It  cannot  claim  perfect  equality  with 
the  fine  arts,  for  the  adept  there  has  the 
opportunity  of  showing  what  imagination 
can  conceive  and  skill  execute.  With  our- 
selves there  is  a  constant  struggle  of  Mind 
v.  Matter.  We  are  hampered  by  difficulties 
at  every  point.  One  cannot  give  full  sway 
to  his  fancies,  nor  can  he  with  success  re- 
produce the  scenes  that  he  has  designed. 
The  real  artists,  mostly  of  European  celeb- 
rity, who  have  made  photographs  of  a  high 
order,  have  been  obliged  to  resort  to  tricks 
of  every  kind  in  their  production.  Com- 
position printing,  varied  ways  of  masking 
the  negatives  while  exposed,  and  an  unlim- 
ited amount  of  retouching  and  etching  are 
all  resorted  to.  These  pictures  are  con- 
demned by  many  of  our  fraternity  as  being 
innovations.  They  want  nothing  more  than 
can  be  accomplished  by  the  simple  exposure 
of  a  plate  before  a  subject,  arranged  in  a 
certain  manner.  To  carry  this  idea  out,  our 
art  is  reduced  to  a  very  low  level  indeed,  be- 
cause it  is  difficult  to  comprehend  that  an 
intelligent  man  can  daily,  monthly,  and 
yearly  practice  it,  with  the  sources  of  infor- 
mation now  at  his  command,  and  yet  fail  to 
secure  good  chemical  or  mechanical  results. 
I  maintain  that  in  the  execution  of  npicture 
we  are  confined  within  very  narrow  bound- 
aries. "Manipulation,"  so  much  talked 
of,  is  probably  of  secondary  importance,  as 
being  readily  conquered  ;  but  we  do  have 
formidable  enemies  in  our  lenses,  and  in  the 
necessity  for  making  an  exposure  of  the 
plate  at  a  certain  time.  We  are  baffled  by 
the  idea  that  our  models  must  become  mo- 
tionless, rigid  statues;  and  we  are  forced  to 
confess  our  entire  inability  to  portray  ex- 
pression as  we  desire  it.  Talk  of  hanging 
up  photographs  with  the  works  of  Kaphael, 
Kembrandt,  Titian,  Angelo,  Correggio,  or 
any  others  of  that  galaxy.  Why,  there 
was  not  a  man  amongst  them  that  would 
not  have  kicked  the  camera  out  of  his  door 
or  window.  Just  think  of  the  absurdity  of 
one  of  those  men,  covering  his  head  with  a 


42 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


dark  cloth  and  insisting  upon  his  model  to 
keep  "perfectly  still,"  or  to  "wink  occa- 
sionally," if  necessary.  Many  of  the  pho- 
tographs that  excite  the  most  admiration  at 
the  "  expositions  "  are  very  faulty  when 
examined  with  a  literal  reference  to  that 
which  is  expected  of  a  perfect  "  sun  pic- 
ture." The  true  artist  will  use  his  lenses, 
cameras,  and  chemicals  with  the  same  feel- 
ing that  he  will  display  with  paints,  brushes, 
or  chiselling  tools.  Unfortunately,  he  finds 
that  our  implements  are  not  equally  as  con- 
trollable as  the  others.  I  was  much  amused 
by  an  incident  that  occurred  in  my  rooms, 

some  years   ago.     Mr.  H n  is,  perhaps, 

the  most  celebrated  marine  painter  in 
America.  Whilst  paying  me  a  friendly  visit 
he  picked  up  a  large  copy  of  a  foreign  view. 
He  took  some  exceptions  to  the  composi- 
tion, particularly  to  the  lines  of  the  clouds. 
I  suggested  that  he  should  make  an  im- 
provement, when  he  at  once  selected  some 
brushes  and  colors  that  were  always  near, 
and  attempted  by  a  few  of  his  characteris- 
tically bold  dashes  to  convey  his  ideas  of 
the  proposed  alterations.  Alas !  he  had 
albumen-paper  to  work  upon,  and  you  can 
conceive  the  result.  The  washes  that  he 
was  so  well  capable  of  making  with  such 
fine  effect  upon  suitable  material,  became 
in  this  instance  meaningless  batches  of 
greasy,  muddy-looking  stains,  and  a  very 
few  sweeps  sufficed  to  disgust  him  with  the 
whole  operation.  Perseverance  and  dili- 
gence to  a  certain  extent,  combat  all  these 
difficulties;  but  where  the  worker  has  to 
expend  his  chief  attention  to  the  surmount- 
ing of  mechanical  obstacles,  he  loses  the 
power  of  evincing  ideality,  of  showing  a 
genuine  feeling,  of  creating  that  which  has 
to  be  admired  far  more  than  the  value  of 
the  stuffs  that  compose  it,  or  for  the  manner 
in  which  they  are  combined.  When  you 
see  such  men  as  Salomon  and  Petsch,  men 
who  have  devoted  many  of  the  best  years 
of  their  lives  to  photography,  men  who 
have  ever  been  regarded  by  us  as  successful 
in  every  sense,  when  you  see  them  delibe- 
rately forsaking  our  ranks,  and  acknowl- 
edging .that  their  efforts,  after  all,  have 
been  failures,  you  are  forced  into  a  train  of 
thought  that  is  by  no  means  favorable  to 
our   calling.      To    complete    your    discom- 


fiture, read  Dr.  Vogel's  very  able  chapter 
on  "  Photographic  ^Esthetics,"  as  published 
in  his  Handbook.  The  views  that  are  so 
well  expressed  there  cover  the  entire  subject. 

The  thanks  of  the  National  Photographic 
Association  are  especially  due  to  some  few 
of  its  members  who  so  disinterestedly  gave 
the  results  of  their  labors  for  our  mutual 
benefit,  and  I  am  glad  that  our  esteemed 
President  showed  his  appreciation  of  them. 
Certain  formulae  and  "  processes "  were 
freely  given,  and  more  lucidly  explained 
than  they  have  been  by  those  who  have 
been  mulcting  us.  The  initiated  will  have 
no  great  difficulty  in  appreciating  the  truth 
of  the  remark. 

Montevideo,  S.  A.,  November,  1873. 


ART  STUDIES  FOR  ALL. 

VII. 

(Continued  from  page  538,  Vol.  X.) 

51.  We  now  come  to  the  subject  of  com- 
position. So  far  as  we  have  gone,  we  have 
learned  that  what  language  is  to  the  poet  so 
are  form,  light  and  shade,  color  and  acces- 
sories to  the  artist.  When  we  have  mas- 
tered these  elements,  we  are  ready  to  com- 
pose according  to  the  requirements  of  our 
art.  Nature  steps  in  too,  now,  insisting 
upon  obedience  to  her  laws,  with  which  one 
must  be  well  acquainted,  before  he  can  pro- 
ceed far  in  the  art  of  composition. 

52.  Fortunately  our  work  is  made  easier, 
from  the  fact  that  we  are  not  called  upon  to 
make  pictures  continually  of  actors  wherein 
we  must  represent  tragedy  or  comedy,  but 
what  we  do  have  to  do,  is  to  make  our  pro- 
ductions lifelike,  i.  e.,  like  the  living,  natu- 
ral persons  before  our  cameras,  and  we  must 
see  that  our  poses,  lighting,  &c,  harmonize 
with  the  character  of  the  subject  in  hand. 
We  should  never  lose  sight  of  this  law  of 
unity,  for  on  it,  more  than  on  any  other, 
depends  the  pleasing  effect  of  our  work. 

63.  Success  in  composition  requires,  first, 
a  careful  observance  of  the  rules  as  already 
treated  in  the  various  elements  of  art,  and 
then  an  understanding  of  the  principles  of 
perspective,  line,  light  and  shade,  variety, 
repose,  simplicity,  and  harmony.  Perspec- 
tive and  line  demand  the  first  attention,  and 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


43 


it  will  be  well  to  read  the  sections  treating 
upon  these  over  again  in  previous  chapters. 

54.  When  making  a  group,  the  principal 
figure  should  receive  the  principal  light,  and 
the  picture  should  not  be  crowded  any  more 
than  the  lens  in  use  compels.  If  the  group 
be  a  large  one,  it  should  be  broken  up  into 
smaller  ones.  When  a  mass  of  people  are 
crowded  together  and  no  prominence  given 
to  any  one  person,  or  any  number  of  persons 
divided  from  the  rest  with  reference  to  the 
effect  of  gradation,  it  is  then  merely  group- 
ing, and  not  composing. 

55.  Figures  should  be  more  or  less  varied 
in  attitude,  too,  because  exact  repetition  of 
lines  produces  monotony  and  formality. 
This  variation  should  be  governed  by  the 
subject  and  by  the  prominence  of  the  figures. 
If  you  are  making  a  family  group,  although 
the  members  thereof  may  wish  the  baby  to  be 
the  most  prominent  figure,  the  correct  way 
is  to  give  the  parents  the  leading  position, 
and  around  them  group  the  rest  harmoni- 
ously. The  principles  of  nature  and  the 
laws  of  art  both  frown  upon  making  the 
figures  all  equally  prominent.  Having  these 
things  all  arranged,  we  will  proceed  to  the 
lighting  in  our  next  study. 


PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  FRANCE. 

BY    ERNEST   LACAN. 
II. 

If  Eeutlinger's  establishment  reminds 
one,  as  I  said  in  my  former  letter,  of  the  ap- 
pearance of  the  earliest  photographic  estab- 
lishments of  Paris,  that  which  Nadar  occu- 
pies shows  an  entirely  new  departure,  and 
an  eminently  original  personality. 

It  was  in  1852  that  Nadar,  whose  real 
name  is  Felix  Tournachon,  made  his  photo- 
graphic debut.  He  was  already  very  well 
known  in  the  literary,  artistic,  and  theatrical 
worlds,  by  articles  in  whicn  were  revealed 
keen  wit,  and  a  humor  hearty  and  con- 
genial, and  by  spirited  drawings  and  mirth- 
provoking  caricatures.  Although  born  at 
.  Lyons,  he  was  a  Parisian  par  excellence. 
He  knew  everybody,  and  everybody  knew 
him,  for  he  had  been  successively  a  student 
of  medicine,  a  designer,  a  journalist,  and 
he  had  made  innumerable  friends  among  the 


different  classes  of  persons  who  had  been 
his  companions  in  work  or  pleasure.  In 
1852  he  rented  a  small  house  with  a  garden 
attached,  situate  No.  113  St.  Lazare  Street 
(a  cabalistic  number),  and  he  had  painted 
on  the  wall  in  gigantic  letters  his  strange 
fictitious  name.  He  made  there  the  por- 
traits of  every  one  who  had  any  celebrity. 
His  prints,  which  were  large  for  that  time, 
presented  an  entirely  novel  appearance. 

Nadar  worked  generally  in  full  sunlight, 
or  at  least  by  lighting  the  subject  in  such  a 
way  that  one  side  of  the  face  was  very  light, 
and  the  other  very  dark.  This  resembled 
very  much  what  is  now  called  the  Kem- 
brandt  portrait.  These  artistic  pictures 
had  a  great  success,  and  soon  the  new  pho- 
tographer felt  the  need  of  enlarging  his 
establishment.  He  opened  a  studio  on  the 
Boulevard  des  Capucines  near  the  Madeleine. 
He  had  there  in  the  second  story  a  glass- 
room  and  ateliers,  which  differed  only  from 
those  of  his  co-workers  by  their  larger  di- 
mensions and  their  style  of  ornamentation. 
Everything  on  the  inside  and  outside  was 
painted  red.  From  the  vestibule  which 
opened  on  the  Boulevard  to  all  the  passers  by 
(and  in  which  were  exposed  numerous 
specimens),  up  to  the  iron  work  of  the  glass 
roof,  everything  presented  to  the  eye  this 
glaring  color.  Nadar  himself  appeared  to 
his  visitors  wearing  a  long  woollen  jacket, 
which,  together  with  his  great  height,  his  red 
hair,  his  curled  mustache,  and  his  pale  com- 
plexion, gave  him  the  appearance  of  a  stage 
devil,  as  represented  at  the  theatre  in  cer- 
tain fantastical  pieces.  The  prints  he  made 
were  bordered  with  red  lines.  His  signa- 
ture and  the  address  were  printed  in  red. 
It  was  in  fact  a  veritable  carnival  of  red. 
As  the  Empire  was  then  in  existence,  and 
as  Nadar  was  known  to  be  a  Republican,  it 
was  said  to  be  a  striking  manifestation  of 
his  political  opinions. 

At  the  same  time  Nadar  organized 
another  studio  at  the  entrance  to  the  Bois 
de  Boulogne,  for  hippie  photography.  The 
idea  was  an  ingenious  one,  but  had  no  suc- 
cess, and  our  friend  soon  left  this  branch 
establishment  to  other  persons,  who  were 
equally  unsuccessful.  At  this  time  also 
Nadar  was  giving  his  attention  to  aerostat- 
ics and  dreamed,  as  many  others  before  him 


44 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


had,  of  the  possibility  of  guiding  balloons. 
As  the  study  and  experiments  in  this  branch 
require  considerable  expenditure,  he  was 
desirous  of  obtaining  all  possible  assistance 
by  associating  the  public  in  this  new  enter- 
prise. Under  his  direction,  an  immense 
balloon  was  constructed  called  the  "  Giant," 
from  which  was  suspended  what  might  be 
properly  called  a  little  house,  in  which  fif- 
teen or  twenty  persons  could  be  conveni- 
ently lodged.  There  were  two  ascensions 
made,  each  witnessed  by  an  enormous  crowd 
of  paying  spectators.  The  first  was  success- 
fully made,  but  the  second  ended  in  a  cat- 
astrophe, which  excited  the  attention  of  the 
whole  world,  and  from  which  Nadar  and 
his  wife  only  escaped  by  a  miracle.  In  fact 
they  remained  several  months  between  life 
and  death. 

This  adventure  made  the  name  of  Nadar 
popular,  and  he  became  celebrated.  Since 
that  time,  although  he  has  not  given  up  his 
aeronautic  studies,  our  friend  has  taken 
up  with  increased  ardor  his  photographic 
works. 

Some  months  ago  he  rented  in  the  Rue 
Anjou  St.  Honore,  near  the  expiatory  chapel 
of  Louis  XVI,  between  the  Boulevard 
Haussmann  and  the  Boulevard  Malesherbes, 
that  is  to  say  in  the  most  opulent  and  ele- 
gant quarter,  a-  house,  which  he  has  con- 
verted into  a  little  artistic  palace.  Hence 
pink  has  taken  the  place  of  the  red  in 
the  general  decoration,  and  the  master  of 
the  house  has  substituted  the  white  cash- 
mere jacket  for  the  scarlet  one.  Even  the 
hair  already  silvered  by  age  (Nadar  is 
fifty-three  years  old),  has  acquired  what 
painters  call  a  neutral  tint.  The  witty 
artist  has  remained  Republican,  but  out  of 
courtesy  to  the  kings,  princes,  and  great 
persons  who  visit  him  during  their  sojourn 
in  Paris,  he  manifests  his  opinions  less 
openly. 

The  house  that  he  occcupies  opens  by  a 
large  vestibule  entered  through  a  glass  fold- 
ing door.  This  vestibule  is  covered  with 
frames  in  which  are  exposed  various  speci- 
mens. On  the  left  is  a  large  reception-room, 
adorned  with  very  fine  paintings,  repre- 
senting the  different  phases  of  the  ascension 
of  the  Giant.  Works  of  art  and  high-priced 
porcelains  (Nadar  is  one  of  our  principal 


collectors  in  this  line),  attract  the  atten- 
tion of  the  visitor.  On  the  right  of  the 
vestibule  is  the  sales-room,  at  the  back  of 
which,  through  curtains  made  of  old  tapes- 
try, always  open,  is  seen  the  principal  room, 
which  alone  takes  up  the  half  of  the  ground 
floor.  This  large  apartment,  which  resem- 
bles an  art  exhibition-room,  is  lighted  from 
the  top ;  a  kind  of  gallery,  formed  by  the 
slender  columns  that  support  the  ceiling, 
surrounds  it  on  three  sides.  It  is  there 
that  the  customers  are  received  and  await 
without  impatience  the  time  for  sitting, 
having  to  entertain  the  eyes  and  the  mind 
exquisite  paintings,  curious  albums,  rare 
flowers,  and  works  of  art  of  all  kinds.  But 
what  interests  visitors  the  most  is  to  see 
the  working  of  Viensseuf,  the  skilful  painter 
attached  to  the  establishment.  Paying  no 
attention  to  the  curious  eyes  which  follow 
his  brush,  the  artist  is  seated  in  one  of  the 
corners  of  the  immense  room.  His  pallet 
and  his  color  box  are  all  he  requires.  Under 
his  hand  the  enlarged  print  on  canvas  or 
paper  is  transformed  into  a  splendid  oil 
painting,  or  into  a  beautiful  aquarel  of  life 
size.  He  excels  especially  in  this  last  style, 
and  one  is  forced  to  admire  the  truly  extra- 
ordinary effects  which  he  produces  by  the 
use  of  water  colors  in  works  of  so  large  a 
size.  His  half-length  portraits  cost  from 
one  to  two  thousand  francs ;  and  his  full 
length  from  three  to  four  thousand ;  but 
Nadar's  customers  do  not  object  to  these 
high  prices,  for  they  are  genuine  master- 
pieces. 

When  the  hour  for  sitting  has  arrived, 
the  customer  ascends  to  the  second  story,  on 
which  are  the  operating-rooms  and  the 
laboratories.  The  ladies,  who  may  have 
something  to  change  in  their  toilet,  first 
stop  on  the  ground-floor,  where  there  is  a 
large  cabinet  boudoir  for  their  use.  There, 
also,  are  the  private  apartments  of  Nadar 
and  his  family,  and  in  the  back  portion  of 
the  building  the  rooms  for  retouching  the 
negatives  and  the  positive  prints,  the  rotary 
presses,  and  the  sleeping  apartments  of  the 
principal  employes,  who  live  in  the  estab- 
lishment. In  the  first  story  is  the  main 
operating-room,  which  is  fourteen  metres 
long  by  twelve  wide,  and  three  metres  in 
average    height.     The    skylight,    which    is 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


45 


straight  and  not  inclined  as  is  generally  the 
case,  is  hung  with  three  rows  of  curtains 
(made  of  muslin  and  cretonne,  both  of 
a  grayish  tint)  which  move  in  all  directions. 
A  small  rolling  chamber,  which  is  also  fur- 
nished with  a  double  row  of  curtains,  and 
which  can  be  moved  in  any  direction,  allows 
the  operator,  according  to  the  season,  the 
hour,  and  type  of  the  sitters,  to  light 
them  under  all  their  aspects,  and  at  all 
angles,  from  a  front-light  to  the  divers 
glancing  lights  of  that  known  by  the  name 
of  "the  illumination  of  the  foot-lights  " 

Large  backgrounds,  painted  by  some  of 
the  best  scene  painters  of  Paris,  represent 
in  the  most  natural  manner  a  great  variety 
of  subjects. 

This  immense  terrace  can  be  lighted  as 
desired,  from  the  north,  the  east,  or  the 
west. 

Four  laboratories  are  adjacent  to  the 
sitting-room  ;  two  for  the  preparation  of  the 
glass,  and  two  for  the  development. 

On  the  same  floor  are  the  rooms  for  print- 
ing, toning,  and  fixing.  The  first,  although 
having  glass  sashes  on  every  side,  admits 
only  the  light  from  the  north  ;  the  light  is 
distributed  with  great  discretion,  and,  more- 
over, almost  all  the  sashes  are  glazed  with 
ground-glass. 

The  preparation  of  the  paper  and  the 
printing  are  done  in  a  room  that  is  almost 
entirely  dark,  situated  in  an  angle  of  this 
atelier. 

In  this  establishment  the  washing  of  the 
prints  is  the  object  of  most  particular  atten- 
tion. There  is  but  one  large  tank,  in  which 
the  water  is  continually  and  completely  re- 
newed by  means  of  an  automatic  siphon. 
The  tank  is  emptied  and  filled  four  or  five 
times  every  hour.  The  prints  are  not 
touched  by  the  hands  of  man,  but  free  them- 
selves in  such  a  way  as  to  avoid  as  much  as 
possible  arty  ulterior  chemical  reaction. 
Nadar  takes  upon  himself  the  task  of  re- 
moving from  the  water  every  morning  the 
prints  immersed  the  preceding  night,  and 
he  examines  each  with  great  care,  rejecting 
all  those  that  seem  to  him  imperfect.  The 
drying  is  done  by  means  of  blotting-paper, 
and  the  mounting  and  framing  are  done  on 
the  ground-floor  in  the  salesroom.  In  the 
basement  are  the  kitchen  and  dining-rooms, 


and  the  laboratory  for  the  treatment  of  the 
wastes. 

The  persons  employed  may  be  thus  de- 
scribed: Nadar,  who  has  taken  for  aid,  in 
the  direction  of  his  ateliers,  one  of  the  most 
esteemed  Belgian  photographers,  Mr.  Wal- 
ter Damry,  of  Liege ;  Paul  Nadar,  who, 
though  only  eighteen  years  of  age,  is  already 
a  skilful  operator,  and  actively  assists  his 
father;  two  aids  and  a  boy  complete  the 
service  in  the  making  of  the  negatives  ;  four 
printers  and  toners  ;  six  retouchers  of  nega- 
tives, and  three  artists  for  retouching  the 
positive  prints  ;  three  women  for  the  mount- 
ing, and  two  ladies  for  the  reception  of 
customers  and  the  keeping  of  the  books  ;  and 
finally,  four  male  and  female  servants.  Such 
is  the  ensemble  of  the  working  force  at  the 
command  of  the  celebrated  artist,  to  defy 
competition  and  overcome  the  difficulties  of 
the  art.  Up  to  the  present  time  success  has 
crowned  his  efforts,  and  the  public  holds  him 
in  high  favor.  It  must  be  admitted,  how- 
ever, that  he  has  neglected  nothing  to  main- 
tain this  position.  He  has  anticipated  all 
improvements,  and  his  prints  have  a  pecu- 
liar character,  which  renders  them  eminently 
artistic.  Boldly  lighted,  they  present  start- 
ling effects,  together  with  an  exquisite  purity 
of  outside  and  a  transparency  of  tone  which 
render  them  most  charming  to  the  eye. 
They  are  especially  remarkable  for  a  har- 
mony which  is  particularly  striking  in  the 
portraits  of  women  dressed  in  white.  The 
entire  gradation  of  whites,  so  difficult  to 
obtain  in  photography,  is  represented  along- 
side of  the  deepest  blacks.  The  kind  of 
portraits  most  generally  made  by  Nadar  is 
the  album  card  bust,  enamelled  or  plain,  and 
the  enlargements.  All  the  cards  made  at 
this  establishment  have  the  date  photo- 
graphed in  the  ornamental  designs  which 
surround  the  picture.  It  is  a  very  good 
idea,  and  is  rendered  more  complete  by  the 
reproduction  of  the  autographic  signature 
when  it  is  the  portrait  of  a  well-known  per- 
son. I  would  mention  that  Nadar  is  the 
first  in  France  who  applied  the  electric 
light  to  photography.  His  experiments,  at 
the  time  he  made  them,  about  1860,  attracted 
a  great  deal  of  attention.  It  was  by  means 
of  this  light  that  he  was  enabled  to  repro- 
duce  in   a   numerous  series  of  views,  of  a 


46 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


highly  fantastic  character,  the  interior  of 
the  catacombs  and  of  the  sewers  of  Paris. 
He  has  used  also  with  success  the  mag- 
nesium light  for  the  same  purpose. 

I  will  finish  with  a  single  word.  Nadar 
calls  his  galler}'  a  model  establishment,  and 
he  is  in  every  way  justified  in  so  doing. 


Reading  a  Photographic  Journal. 

Is  there  any  advantage  to  the  photogra- 
pher in  reading  a  photographic  magazine? 
This  is  a  question  that  it  seems  entirely  un- 
necessary to  ask ;  the  proofs  are  indisputably 
all  on  one  side.  There  may  be  those  who  pro- 
fess to  be  independent  of  any  instruction 
that  can  be  given  them,  and  refuse  to  sub- 
scribe for  a  journal  because  they  cannot 
find  anything  but  what  they  know  already. 
Doubtless  there  are  very  few  who  read  and 
digest  with  sufficient  interest  and  thorough- 
ness, or  are  so  susceptible  of  improvement  as 
to  feel  that  they  grow  in  knowledge  from 
day  to  day,  or  can  compare  the  work  of  to- 
day with  that  made  yesterday  or  last  week, 
and  see  great  strides  of  progress ;  but  the 
benefit  derived  from  reading  the  books  and 
magazines  in  the  hands  of  photographers  is 
a  matter  of  growth.  The  photographer 
who  reads  the  current  photographic  litera- 
ture is  sure  to  be  benefited,  though  he  may 
scarcely  be  aware  himself  that  any  change 
has  come  over  him,  unless  he  makes  a  com- 
parison with  what  he  was  a  few  years  ago. 
He  finds  his  mind  has  expanded;  he  has 
more  generous  ideas  in  reference  to  his  busi- 
ness and  to  his  neighbors.  He  is  not  afraid 
to  meet  a  brother  photographer,  nor  does 
he  lock  his  dark-room  door  when  one  hap- 
pens to  visit  him.  He  takes  the  journals 
and  attends  the  photographic  conventions, 
and  believes  he  derives  benefit  from  both. 
It  is  only  necessary  to  draw  a  comparison 
between  this  man  and  the  one  who  never 
reads  and  don't  believe  conventions  accom- 
plish any  good.  One  is  growing  and  de- 
veloping in  the  light,  the  other  remains 
stunted  and  dwarfed  in  darkness,  unable  to 
see  his  own  condition  and  deformity ;  in 
short,  the  man  who  reads  is  mentally,  artis- 
tically, and  we  are  quite  sure  financially,  the 
superior  of  the  other. 


The  foregoing  thoughts  were  suggested 
to  us  by  a  letter  from  one  of  our  correspond- 
ents, accompanied  by  specimens  of  his  work, 
which  are  strictly  first-class  and  show  a 
very  great  improvement  over  his  previous 
efforts.  We  will  suppress  his  name  and  give 
his  letter  here,  as  encouragement  to  others 
to  follow  his  method  of  self-improvement. 

New  Hampshire,  Nov.  22, 1873. 
Mr.  Edward  L.  Wilson. 

Dear  Sir:  I  inclose  some  specimens  of 

photography    as    made   by   ,    which 

we  flatter  ourselves  show  a  fair  degree 
of  improvement  over  previous  samples 
sent  you.  You  may  remember  that  nearly 
two  years  ago  I  sent  you  some  prints,  ask- 
ing you  to  criticize,  which  you  kindly  did, 
and  to  my  benefit.  At  that  time  you  asked 
me  to  make  some  negatives  for  the  World. 
It  was  my  intention  to  do  so,  but  I  was 
soon  after  taken  sick,  and  was  obliged  to 
sell  my  business,  and  did  not  do  anything 
more  for  over  a  year.  But  during  that 
time  I  spent  many  a  pleasant  hour  with 
your  valuable  journal,  and  although  I  fell 
behind  many  who  were  in  daily  practice, 
the  time  was  not  wholly  lost  to  me.  I 
have  been  a  constant  reader  of  the  Phila- 
delphia Photographer  for  several  years,  and 
am  largely  indebted  to  it  for  whatever  suc- 
cess I  have  met  with,  and  if  at  any  time,  for 
want  of  better,  you  would  like  anything 
from  us,  it  would  give  us  pleasure  to  send 
you  the  best  we  can  make. 

Respectfully  yours, 


Such  tokens  of  appreciation  of  our  efforts 
stimulate  us  to  renewed  energy  to  make  our 
work — our  magazine — still  better  and  more 
useful  than  ever. 


A  GOOD  SUGGESTION. 

Mr.  C.  D.  Mosher,  of  Chicago,  seems  to 
have  caught  the  spirit  of  enterprise  of  the 
day,  and  of  the  citj"  in  which  he  lives,  and 
makes  to  the  members  of  the  National  Pho- 
tographic Association  the  following  useful 
suggestions,  which  we  hope  will  be  acted 
upon,  viz. : 

"  I    would   make   a   suggestion    for   our 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


47 


National  Photographic  Association,  as  a 
stimulant  for  all  who  exhibit  photographs, 
to  have  their  work  nicely  framed  ;  the  re- 
sult would  be  to  add  more  interest  and 
greater  attractions  to  visitors,  as  well  as  to 
the  artistic  photographer.  Anything  that 
will  increase  the  interest,  and  will  add 
greater  attractions  to  our  Gallery  of  Art, 
to  induce  visitors  to  swell  our  cash  receipts, 
should  be  the  one  great  object  and  aim  of 
every  individual  member  and  photographer. 

"  My  plan  would  be  this, — to  offer  a  pre- 
mium to  every  manufacturer  of  frames  for 
photographers  for  the  best  design  in  walnut 
or  gilt  of  the  different  sizes  we  use,  to  be 
decided  by  three  practical  photographers, 
say  Messrs.  Rocher  of  Chicago,  Gutekunst 
of  Philadelphia,  Frank  Pearsall  of  Brook- 
lyn, which  would  bring  out  every  conceiv- 
able design  and  style  ;  and  every  manufac- 
turer would  be  anxious  to  exhibit  their 
styles  and  advertise  their  goods  upon  the 
photographs  of  those  framed,  as  that  would 
show  off  their  frames  to  the  greatest  advan- 
tage, and  the  photographs  would  be  framed 
beautifully,  we  equally  benefited,  and  our 
display  in  the  Gallery  of  Art  complete 

"  I  will  give,  to  lead  off,  five  dollars  pre- 
mium for  the  best  style  of  8x10  walnut 
frame,  and  five  dollars  for  the  best  8  x  10 
gold-gilt  frame;  and  let  some  other  pho- 
tographer give  equal  premiums,  or  more, 
on  other  different  sizes  through  the  whole 
catalogue ;  by  that  way  we  will  all  be  bene- 
fited— the  manufacturer  of  frames  and  the 
photographer. 

"  Very  respectfully  yours, 

"  C.  D.  Mosher." 


OUR  PICTURE. 

The  beautiful  examples  of  photography 
which  grace  our  current  issue  are  from 
negatives  by  Mr.  Augustus  Marshall,  Bos- 
ton, Mass.,  and  are  graceful  and  lovely  in 
all  their  details.  Mr.  Marshall  always  stood 
among  the  best  of  our  photographers,  even 
years  ago,  when  good  photographers  were 
much  more  scarce  than  poor  ones  are  now, 
but  he  has  always  been  a  progressive  man, 
and  not  long  ago  went  to  Europe  to  satisfy 
his  longings  for  a  gamble  among  the  places 


of  photographic  interest  there.  Since  then 
he  has  made  us  these  negatives,  and  they 
are  examples  of  his  average  work.  We 
think  them  well  worthy  of  study  on  account 
of  their  excellent  chemical  qualities,  and  of 
their  careful  lighting  and  posing. 

As  is  our  custom,  we  asked  Mr.  Marshall 
for  some  ideas  concerning  his  method  of 
working,  and  his  answer  we  append,  viz.  : 

Boston,  January  8th,  1874. 
The  negatives  sent  were  made  in  a  bath  of 
the  usual  strength  with   a  liberal  dose  of 
nitric  acid. 

Collodion. 

Ether 10  ounces. 

Alcohol,   .         .         .         .       14       " 
Iodide  of  Cadmium,  .     120  grains. 

Bromide  of  Potassium,     .       48       " 

Grind  the  potassium  to  a  powder  in  a 
glass  mortar,  add  the  cadmium,  and  pour 
on  alcohol,  grinding  all  the  time  until  com- 
pletely dissolved  (it  will  take  from  four  to 
six  ounces)  ;  add  this  to  the  plain  collodion 
made  from  the  balance  of  alcohol  and  ether. 

This  makes  a  very  soft- working  collodion, 
very  good  for  Rembrandts. 

I  hardly  think  this  item  worth  publish- 
ing, as  it  contains  nothing  new.  I  hope  to 
make  something  better  for  you  before  long, 
in  the  way  of  negatives. 

Just  before  Christmas,  in  making  up  a 
silver  bath,  the  bottom  of  the  bottle  came 
off,  by  a  hard  knock,  and  the  silver  (2  lbs.) 
went  on  to  the  dark-room  floor.  There  was 
pretty  lively  work  for  a  few  minutes,  mop- 
ping it  up  with  towels  and  any  old  cloths 
we  could  get  hold  of,  and  wringing  out  into 
an  evaporating  dish.  It  was  a  sorry-looking 
mess,  being  a  mixture  of  silver,  hypo,  iron, 
and  dirt.  The  young  man  working  for  me 
suggested  throwing  it  down  with  strips  of 
copper,  obtained  at  the  coppersmith's.  This 
was  put  into  the  bath  and  allowed  to  remain 
some  hours,  or  until  by  adding  muriatic  acid 
there  was  no  precipitation  to  the  water. 
Again,  this  was  now  washed  thoroughly  in 
a  good  many  changes  of  water,  until  by 
adding  weakened  ammonia  there  was  no 
longer  observed  a  change  to  the  blue  tint. 
Then  being  well  drained,  and  put  over  a 
heater  where  there  was  a  chimney  to  carry 
off  the  fumes,  a  mixture  of  nitric  acid  C.  P., 


48 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


one  part  to  two  of  water,  was  poured  on  in 
sufficient  quantity  to  dissolve  the  silver. 
Evaporated  and  fused,  it  made  as  good  a 
bath  as  "  never  was."  Not  more  than  half 
a  pound  of  silver  was  lost. 

All  this  may  be  nothing  new  to  most  of 
your  readers,  but  it  may  benefit  some  one 
placed  in  like  circumstances. 

Wishing  you  "  Happy  New  Year," 
I  remain,  yours  truly, 

A.  Marshall. 

Here  we  have  not  only  some  useful  hints 
concerning  the  picture,  but  also  a  valuable 
method  which  will  come  good  whenever  an 
emergency,  such  as  he  describes,  occurs. 
Mr.  Marshall,  it  will  be  seen,  promises  us 
"something  better"  presently.  We  shall 
gladly  welcome  it  from  him,  or  from  any  of 
our  working  subscribers,  at  any  time. 


Something  about  Stereographs. 

BY   J.    LEE    KNIGHT. 

That  popular  scientific  toy,  the  stereo- 
scope, having  occasioned  a  constantly  in- 
creasing demand  for  a  class  of  pictures  only 
rendered  possible  by  means  of  photography, 
I  submit  the  following  details  of  making 
such  pictures,  thinking  that  the  directions 
here  given  will  simplify  the  tedious  and 
troublesome  labor  of  trimming,  transpos- 
ing, and  correctly  mounting  stereoscopic 
prints. 

Taking  for  granted  that  the  chemical 
manipulations  and  artistic  selection  of 
views  have  been  more  fully  discussed  by 
abler  operators,  I  come  directly  to  the  con- 
sideration of  some  details  which  have  proven 
as  satisfactory  in  practice  as  they  are  plausi- 
ble in  theory. 

I  conceive  the  theory  of  a  stereograph  to 
be,  that  the  two  pictures  which  are  to  finally 
blend  in  the  stereoscope  and  appear  as  one 
reality  to  the  eye  should  be  taken  from  the 
same  elevation,  but  from  two  points  of  per- 
spective as  far  distant  as  are  the  two  natu- 
ral eyes  apart ;  that  they  should  be  of  the 
same  size ;  that  they  should  be  transposed 
in  mounting,  and  that  they  should  finally 
both  be  placed  vertical  to  the  same  hori- 
zontal base-line.     These  conditions  are  all 


easily  and  accurately  accomplished  as  fol- 
lows : 

I  have  drawn  on  the  ground-glass  of  my 
camera  three  pencil  lines,  horizontal  to  the 
base  and  about  an  inch  apart ;  I  have  also 
imbedded  in  one  of  the  side-rails  of  the  base 
of  my  camera,  and  near  the  back  end,  a 
small  spirit-vial,  or  levelling-tube  (bought 
at  any  hardware  store  for  ten  cents),  which 
is  securely  protected  by  a  piece  of  sheet- 
brass  let  in  flush  with  the  top  of  the  rail, 
and  having  a  slot  an  eighth  of  an  inch  wide 
and  two  inches  long  through  which  to  ob- 
serve the  air-bubble.  These  two  simple 
devices  enable  me  to  level  up  readily  and 
perfectly,  by  observing  that  some  one  of  the 
pencil  lines  passes  through  a  point  common 
to  both  images  projected  on  the  ground -glass 
by  the  two  matched  lenses,  and  that  the 
air-bubble  of  the  spirit-level  comes  to  th.e 
centre  marked  on  the  brass  guard. 

With  the  camera  properly  levelled  and  a 
negative  taken  and  varnished  I  am  ready 
for  using  the  first  trimming  pattern.  Of 
these  I  have  three,  cut  from  strips  of  glass, 
one  3  by  9  inches,  another  3J  by  9  inches, 
and  a  third  one  3  by  5  inches.  If  I  desire 
prints  for  the  ordinary  width  mounts  I  use 
the  3  by  9  inch  pattern  ;  if  of  the  extra 
width,  the  3£  by  9,  laying  it  on  the  var- 
nished side  of  the  negative,  and  being  care- 
ful that  the  lower  edge  is  on  an  exact  line 
from  some  given  point  in  one  picture  to  the 
corresponding  point  in  the  other  one.  I  then 
with  a  knife  cut  through  the  varnished  film 
on  each  side  of  the  pattern  from  one  end  of 
the  negative  to  the  other. 

These  marks  are  useful  as  guides  in  pla- 
cing the  paper  when  printing,  and  the  black 
lines  they  give  in  the  print  serve  also  as 
guides  in  the  final  trimming.  We  some- 
times trim  the  long  way  before  toning. 
When  the  prints  have  been  toned  and 
washed,  and  are  ready  to  be  taken  from 
the  water,  I  bunch  them,  faces  all  one  way, 
press  the  water  well  out,  and  hang  up  by  a 
clip  to  drain.  They  thus  remain  straight, 
and  are  much  easier  to  manage  than  if  hung 
singly  and  allowed  tocurl  up.  When  nearly 
or  quite  dry  they  are  made  ready  for  trim- 
ming by  laying  the  bunch  face  downward, 
and  with  a  soft  pencil  drawing  two  light 
lines  on  the  back  of  each,  thus  X>  crossing 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


49 


each  other  near  the  centre  of  the  print  I 
then  place  them  one  at  a  time,  face  up,  on 
a  piece  of  glass,  lay  on  the  long  pattern  of 
the  proper  width,  bringing  the  lower  edge 
exactly  to  the  black  line  given  by  the 
scratched  line  in  the  foreground  of  the 
negative,  and  with  two  strokes  of  a  sharp 
knife  trim  the  print  at  top  and  bottom  from 
end  to  end.  If  entirely  dry,  the  pattern 
will  fill  the  space  between  the  two  black 
lines  ;  if  somewhat  damp,  the  sky  line  may 
project  a  trifle  beyond  the  upper  edge  of  the 
pattern.  In  no  case  can  the  black  lines  be 
of  any  damage  to  the  print,  but,  as  above 
shown,  are  of  real  value  in  accurate  print- 
ing and  trimming.  After  trimming  at 
bottom  and  top  I  fold  each  print  double, 
face  outward,  by  one  straight  fold  across 
the  centre,  observing  that  the  edges  are 
even,  so  that  the  crease  or  fold  will  be  ex- 
actly perpendicular  to  the  base  or  lower 
edge.  I  then  lay  on  the  3  by  5  pattern 
crosswise  of  the  doubled  print,  bring- 
ing the  right-hand  side  up  as  near  the 
folded  edge  as  possible,  and  having  evened 
the  lower  edge,  press  down  firmly,  and  with 
one  stroke  of  the  knife  I  trim  both  ends  of 
the  print  at  once,  and  with  a  second  stroke 
I  trim  off  the  slightly  projecting  folded 
edge,  which  cuts  the  print  in  two  in  the 
centre. 

Placing  the  pieces  on  a  pile  in  regular 
order,  they  are  ready  for  mounting,  unless 
it  be  desired  to  wet  them  down,  which  may 
readily  be  done  by  placing  them,  one  by 
one,  in  the  corner  of  a  tray,  seeing  that  they 
do  not  spread  enough  to  pass  each  other, 
which  would  mix  them. 

In  mounting,  I  paste  one  piece  and  place 
it  on  the  mount,  without  rubbing  down,  half 
an  inch  from  the  end  of  the  mount,  hori- 
zontal to,  and  about  a  quarter  of  an  inch 
from,  the  bottom  of  the  mount,  and  at  that 
end  where  the  [>  shaped  pencil -mark, 
(which  is  half  of  the  original  x  made  on 
the  whole  print)  will  point  outward.  This 
is  the  guide  by  which  I  know  the  pieces  are 
transposed.  1  then  paste  the  other  piece, 
lay  it  on,  and  bring  the  two  pieces  snug  up 
together  in  the  centre — neither  overlapping 
each  other,  nor  leaving  any  space  between, 
and  being  quite  careful  that  no  jog  occurs 
where  the  pieces  join,  but  that  the  edges 


are  even  at  bottom  and  top ;  I  then  lay  on 
three  or  four  thicknesses  of  white  print 
paper,  and  rub  both  down  at  once. 

If  the  camera  was  properly  levelled,  the 
pattern  placed  accurately  in  lining  the  nega- 
tive, and  subsequently  in  trimming  the 
print,  there  is  no  reason  why  the  finished 
picture  should  not  readily  and  perfectly 
blend  in  the  stereoscope,  and  effectually 
avoid  that  chief  of  all  annoyances  in  looking 
at  stereographs,— distortion  from  inaccu- 
rate mounting.  A  stereograph  imperfectly 
mounted  is  worthless  as  a  stereograph,  but 
I  believe  these  simple  directions  will  enable 
even  the  merest  tyro  to  produce  views  free 
from  this  fault,  and  may  possibly  furnish 
some  hints  that  will  prove  serviceable  to 
the  very  best  of  us. 

If  the  completed  picture  be  a  meanly  ex- 
ecuted work  because,  when  looking  at  it, 
we  are  tempted  to  think  we  could  walk 
round  some  object  in  the  foreground,  we 
shall,  nevertheless,  have  the  satisfaction  of 
knowing  that  we  have  proceeded  de  legibus, 
and  must  conclude  that  the  theory  is  at 
fault  rather  than  the  practice.  We  will, 
moreover,  be  surprised,  and  possibly  pleased, 
to  discover  what  a  vast  multitude  of  other- 
wise very  clever  people  are  ansesthetically 
afflicted  with  a  species  of  mental  aberration, 
which,  while  blissful  to  them  as  a  condition 
of  utter  ignorance  of  true  art  culture, 
proves  a  source  of  profitable  revenue  to 
ourselves. 

And,  in  conclusion,  I  respectfully  suggest 
that  if  our  own  optical  art  perceptions  have 
not  been  too  severely  corrected  for  antique 
actinism  and  preadamite  refraction,  even 
those  who  have  acquired  the  power  of  cor- 
rect vision,  and  cultivated  their  tastes,  will 
hesitate  to  impugn  our  motives  if  we  ply 
our  vocation  by  furnishing  our  patrons  with 
the  means  of  enjoyment  afforded  by  so  in- 
expensive and  innocent  a  scientific  toy  as 
that  monstrous  innovation  of  modern  me- 
chanical art,  the  stereoscope! 


If  your  prints  show  a  scum  or  deposit  on 
the  surface  while  toning,  wipe  the  surface 
with  a  piece  of  soft  cotton-flannel.  It  will 
remove  the  deposit  and  leave  the  prints 
bright  and  clear. 


50 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Answers. 

To  Querist. — After  the  experience  de- 
scribed with  your  bath,  we  should  conclude 
there  was  not  much  silver  in  it.  The  best 
way  will  be  to  take  it  to  an  assayist  or  re- 
finer, and  let  him  see  what  he  can  make  of 
it. — Sphynx. 

To  C.  A.  B. — Try  Mr.  Clemons's  method 
of  burning  out  with  alcohol,  as  reported  in 
the  National  Photographic  Association's 
proceedings,  September  issue  of  this  journal. 
— Sphynx. 

To  J.  A.  W.  Pittman. — Two  good  form- 
ulae, for  printing  on  canvas,  may  be  found 
in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer  for  July, 
1869,  page  243.  We  would  reprint  them 
here,  but  they  are  too  long  for  the  limited 
space  of  Sphynx. — Sphynx. 

Ketouching  by  Lamplight. — The  best 
and  only  successful  means  of  accomplish- 
ing retouching  at  night,  so  far  as  my  ex- 
perience goes,  is  as  follows  : 

Take  some  thin  boards,  or  an  old  box, 
and  make  a  retouching  stand  about  the  size 
and  shape  shown  in  the  drawing,  line  the 


same  with  white  paper,  set  it  on  a  stand  or 
table,  light  a  kerosene  lamp,  and  put  it  in 
the  box  ;  make  a  sort  of  shade  of  foolscap  or 
note  paper  (or  wrap  the  paper  around  the 


lamp  chimney  loosely),  or  interpose  one  or 
more  thicknesses  of  ground-glass  or  tissue- 
paper-,  or  in  fact  any  medium  which  will 
sufficiently  diffuse  the  light.  Shut  the  door 
of  the  box,  and  suspend  or  secure  the  nega- 
tive so  that  it  will  lie  flat  upon  the  front, 
and  covering  the  opening,  then  proceed  as 
usual.  You  will  find  it  necessary  to  use 
more  diffused  light  for  thin  negatives,  &c. 

Inclosing  the  light  in  this  manner  con- 
centrates it  upon  your  work,  and  shuts  it  out 
of  the  room,  and  although  there  is  nothing 
equal  to  daylight,  still  with  care  and  prac- 
tice a  great  deal  can  be  done  at  night. 

Hoping  it  may  answer  McC.'s  purpose,  I 
remain  yours,  &c,  E.  Z.  W. 


GERMAN  CORRESPONDENCE. 

Microphotographic  Stereo  Slides  —  Hypo  in  ■ 
Bristol  Board:  how  to  Detect  it  and  how 
to  Remove  it — The  Absorption  of  Actinic 
Rays  in  the  Atmosphere — DubronV  s  Appa- 
ratus— Dull  Weather  in  Germany — Effect 
of  Lenses  of  Strong  or  Feeble  Light  on  the 
Brilliancy  of  the  Picture — Muybridge 's  and 
Kilbum's  Pictures  in  Berlin  —  Marcy's 
Sciopticon  —  Intensity  of  the  Magnesium 
Light. 

The  attention  of  the  public  has  recently 
been  directed  to  a  special  kind  of  stereo- 
scopic pictures,  but  so  far  only  a  few  of 
them  have  been  published.  I  refer  to 
stereoscopic  views  of  microscopic  objects. 
Microphotographs  are  plenty,  and  as  magic- 
lantern  slides  they  form  an  article  of  trade  ; 
but  stereoscopic  pictures  of  microscopic  ob- 
jects are  much  more  instructive,  for  from 
these  we  learn  what  is  near  and  what  is  far, 
what  is  hollow  and  what  is  elevated.  Such 
stereoscopic  effects  are  furnished  by  the 
binocular  microscope,  an  invention  of  your 
countryman,  Biddle  (1853),  for  the  naked 
ej-e.  But  so  far  binocular  microscopes  are 
very  expensive,  and  only  in  the  hands  of  a 
few.  It  is  easy,  however,  to  make  these 
stereoscopic  pictures  with  any  ordinary  mi- 
croscope. It  is  done  by  skilfully  blending 
the  object  lens  of  the  microscope.  Years 
ago  I  called  attention  to  the  fact  that  a 
very  large  lens,  for  instance,  a  portrait  lens, 
yielded  a  picture  quite  different  from  the 
one  taken  with  a  lens   of  smaller  opening. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


51 


The  right  half  of  the  lens  takes  in  more  of 
the  right  side  of  the  person,  and  the  left 
half  of  the  lens  more  of  the  left  side  of 
the  person.  If  we  now  cover  one-half  of 
the  lens  and  take  two  pictures,  one  with  the 
right  half  and  the  other  with  the  left  half, 
the  two  together  will  give  a  stereoscopic 
effect.  The  same  principle  we  can  emplo}^ 
to  make  microscopic  pictures.  The  lenses 
of  the  microscope  are  of  course  very  small, 
but  still  they  are  much  larger  than  the  ob- 
ject, which  is  a  mere  speck;  in  fact  they 
are,  when  compared  with  the  object,  still  too 
large.  If  we  stop  off",  first  the  one  half  and 
next  the  other  half  of  the  lens  and  take  a 
picture,  we  obtain  in  fact  a  very  complete 
stereoscopic  effect;  and  Dr.  Fritch  has  made 
in  this  manner  excellent  microphotographs 
for  the  stereoscope.  This  new  process  might 
gain  in  America  new  friends  for  micropho- 
tography. 

Recently  several  cases  have  occurred  here 
where  pictures  have  turned  yellow  in  con- 
sequence of  impure  mounts.  This  yellow 
fever  manifested  itself  in  the  shape  of  small 
spots,  sometimes  not  larger  than  a  pin's  head. 
A  great  number  of  such  mounts  had  to  be 
rejected,  and  the  pecuniary  loss  was  con- 
siderable. A  quantity.of  them  were  handed 
to  me  for  examination,  and  I  was  surprised 
to  find  but  an  exceedingly  small  portion  of 
soda  in  them.  This  hypo  was  a  remnant  of 
the  soda  employed  in  the  bleaching  process, 
in  order  to  remove  the  chlorine.  In  order 
to  test  them  for  soda,  we  proceed  as  fol- 
lows: 1  grain  of  iodine  is  dissolved  in  25 
cubic  centimetres  of  alcohol ;  of  this  solu- 
tion we  take  2J  cubic  centimetres,  dilute  it 
with  900  cubic  centimetres  of  water,  and 
add  100  cubic  centimetres  of  a  decoction  of 
1  part  starch  in  100  parts  of  water.  This 
deep  blue  fluid  contains  per  every  cubic 
centimetre  To¥oo  °'  iodine. 

In  order  to  test  a  questionable  mount,  we 
take  a  piece  of  about  three  times  the  size  of 
a  carte  de  visite,  cut  it  to  pieces  with  a  pair 
of  scissors,  and  place  these  in  a  clean  glass 
vessel ;  we  now  pour  100  cubic  centimetres 
of  boiling  distilled  water  over  it,  and  place 
it  for  twelve  hours  in  a  warm  place.  We 
next  take  two  perfectly  clean  test-tubes, 
place  in  each  of  them  1  cubic  centimetre  of 
the  iodine  solution,  and  dilute  the  one  with 


15  cubic  centimetres  of  water,  the  other 
with  15  cubic  centimetres  of  the  water  in 
which  the  mounts  have  been  soaked.  If  a 
trace  of  soda  was  contained  in  the  latter  it 
will  manifest  itself  by  discoloring  the  blue 
solution  of  iodide  of  starch,  and  this  is  easily 
recognized  by  comparing  the  two  tubes.  If 
the  quantity  of  soda  is  exceedingly  small, 
the  discoloration  will  not  manifest  itself  at 
once,  but  occur  after  some  time  has  elapsed. 
It  is  even  possible  to  determine  approxi- 
mately the  quantity  of  soda  that  is  present 
in  the  mount.  Suppose  we  have  used  15 
cubic  centimetres  of  the  water  in  which  the 
mounts  have  been  soaked,  to  discolor  1  cubic 
centimetre  of  iodide  of  starch  solution,  it 
follows  that  the  100  cubic  centimetres  of 
water  which  were  used  to  soak  the  mounts, 
would  discolor  6|  cubic  centimetres  of  iodide 
of  starch,  those  contain  6|  x  Tq-J-qo  iodine. 
One  part  iodine  requires  two  parts  113'posui- 
phite  of  soda  to  discolor  it,  hence  the  mount 
in  question  contains  j-tfFcfo  gramme  of  hypo  ; 
and  if  three  pieces  of  the  size  of  a  carte  de 
visite  mount  have  been  taken,  each  piece  of 
the  size  of  a  carte  de  visite  would  contain 
T45To2o  gramme  of  hypo.  In  fact  I  have  found 
quantities  which  approximate  the  above.  I 
found,  for  instance,  in  a  carte  de  visite 
mount  -jjVj  gramme  of  hypo.  Some  will 
say  that  so  small  a  quantity  can  do  no  harm, 
as  the  quantity  of  silver,  which  is  the  col- 
oring substance,  is  also  very  small. 

According  to  Davanne,  one  sheet  of  pa- 
per contains  0.075  nitrate  of  silver,  and 
hence  one  carte  de  visite  =  -J^  =  T?\o  ; 
hence  a  carte  de  visite  contains  6.6  times 
as  much  silver  as  the  above  carte  de  visite 
mount  contained  hypo.  If  31  parts  of 
hypo  suffice  to  convert  27  parts  of  silver 
into  sulphate  of  silver,  i.  e  ,  turn  the  paper 
yellow,  it  follows  that  the  above  apparently 
insignificant  quantity  of  hypo  is  capable  of 
converting  one-eighth  of  the  silver  of  the 
picture  into  sulphate.  The  silver  in  the 
picture  is  very  unevenly  distributed,  the 
lights  containing  much  less  than  the  shad- 
ows, and  the  above  quantity  of  hypo  is 
abundantly  largo  to  turn  the  lights  yellow. 

The  question  arises  if  such  mounts,  the 
injurious  defects  of  which  only  manifest 
themselves  after  they  have  been  bought, 
may  still  be  made  serviceable.     This  is  in 


52 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHBE. 


fact  possible ;  it  is  only  necessary  to  treat 
the  mounts  with  a  material  which  destroys 
the  hypo.  This  substance  is  iodine.  The 
mounts  are  moistened  with  the  above-men- 
tioned tincture  of  iodine  (1  part  iodine,  900 
water)  by  dipping  them  into  it  for  one 
minute,  placing  them  next  on  clean  blot- 
ting-papers to  dry.  This  suffices  to  destroy 
the  hypo. 

Lately  I  have  made  a  number  of  spectral 
observations,  which  furnished  me  impor- 
tant data  on  the  changes  of  the  chemical  in- 
tensity of  the  light  in  the  atmosphere.  It  has 
been  known  for  some  time  that  the  chemi- 
cal intensity  of  the  light  of  the  sun  becomes 
more  feeble  in  proportion  as  the  sun  ap- 
proaches the  horizon,  and  that  watery  va- 
pors decrease  the  chemical  intensity.  There 
are,  however,  other  circumstances  which 
affect  the  transparency  of  the  atmosphere. 
I  noticed  this  when  making  my  experi- 
ments with  bromide  of  silver  plates.  Some- 
times, with  a  perfectly  clear  sky  I  obtained 
only  a  very  limited  picture  of  the  spectrum  ; 
and  at  other  times,  when  the  atmosphere 
was  less  clear,  the  picture  was  much  more 
complete.  For  instance,  on  October  7th, 
at  2  o'clock  p.m.,  I  obtained  with  ten  min- 
utes' exposure  a  picture  extending  from  vio- 
let to  red,  while  on  October  17th,  the  action 
extended  only  to  near  the  yellow,  while  at 
the  same  time  the  sensitiveness  to  ultra  vio- 
let was  greater.  On  the  18th  of  October, 
violet  did  not  have  any  effect  at  all  oh  the 
bromide  of  silver,  while  red  acted  consid- 
erably. On  October  29th,  the  action  of  violet 
was  still  more  feeble,  while  that  of  red  in- 
creased. One  day  later,  the  photographic 
action  of  violet  had  increased  again,  red 
having  '  decreased  correspondingly.  In 
short,  you  see  how  fluctuation  in  the  inten- 
sity of  the  chemically  active  rays  occurs,  of 
which  the  eye  perceives  nothing;  and  it  is 
only  to  be  regretted  that  we  do  not  possess 
a  reliable  instrument,  a  photometer,  with 
which  we  can  measure  these  vibrations. 
The  chemical  photometers  which  have' been 
constructed  so  far  determine  only  the  com- 
bined effect  of  the  solar  light,  but  they 
make  no  distinction  in  the  action  of  the 
different  colors,  which,  as  my  experiments 
have  demonstrated,  is  very  variable.  So 
far,  the  violet,  the  blue,,  and  the  green  rays, 


or  in  other  words,  the  rays  of  certain' colors, 
have  proved  photographically  practicable  ; 
a  photometer  should  therefore  fix  the  light 
intensity  of  these  colors,  in  order  to  become 
practically  useful. 

In  the  last  session  of  our  Society,  an  ap- 
paratus was  produced  which  really  belongs 
to  the  class  of  photographic  sea-serpents, 
i.  e.,  to  that  class  of  rare  occurrences  which 
sometimes  suddenly  start  into  being,  in 
order  to  disappear  with  the  same  rapidity  ; 
a.  few  years  later  they  reappear,  after  being 
generally  forgotten.  The  apparatus  in  ques- 
tion is  that  of  Dubroni  for  making  photo- 
graphic plates  without  a  dark-room.  There 
are  many  constructions  of  this  kind,  and 
Dubroni  himself  has  constructed  two  of 
them  ;  one  of  these  is  but  little  known,  per- 
haps because  the  price  is  rather  high,  but 
this  one  has  such  excellent  qualities  as  one 
would  hardly  suppose  at  first  sight.  It  is  a 
plate-holder,  in  which  a  porcelain  dish  has 
been  fixed  for  the  purpose  of  sensitizing 
and  developing;  this  porcelain  dish  is,  in 
fact,  but  a  square  frame,  which  has  been 
hollowed  out  below,  and  the  nitrate  bath 
can  be  poured  into  it;  at  the  back  it  has 
been  ground  down  in  such  a  manner  that  a 
collodionized  piece  of  plate  glass  can  be 
placed  firmly  against  it;  all  the  rest  is  sim- 
ilar to  an  ordinary  dark  slide,  with  the 
only  difference  that  the  two  shutters  con- 
tain small  windows  of  yellow  glass.  When 
the  plate  has  been  inserted,  and  all  the 
shutters  have  been  closed,  the  sensitizing  is 
accomplished  by  tilting  the  slide-holder. 
The  silvering  solution  is  afterwards  with- 
drawn by  means  of  a  pipette,  and  the  plate 
is  then  exposed.  After  exposure,  the  de- 
veloper is  introduced  by  means  of  a  second 
pipette,  and  by  tilting  the  box  the  develop- 
ment is  effected  ;  the  process  may  be  watched 
through  a  yellow  window.  Mr.  Priimm 
has  worked  repeatedly  with  this  apparatus, 
and  very  successfully.  Condition  of  success 
is  cleanliness.  The  frame  has  to  be  cleaned 
very  thoroughly  with  blotting-paper  after 
each  exposure. 

Every  one  here  is  complaining  about  the 
weather;  since  two  weeks  we  have  not  seen 
the  sun.  The  precious  Christmas  days, 
which  generally  bring  numberless  orders, 
have  passed  by  without  bringing  any  busi- 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


53 


ness.  Some  photographers  have  taken  me- 
dallion cartes  by  lamplight  with  tolerably 
good  results. 

In  your  August  number,  page  227,  I 
wrote  to  you  concerning  the  action  of  ob- 
jectives, either  feeble  or  strong  in  light. 
The  belief  is  very  widespread,  that  the 
former  even  with  a  correspondingly  longer 
time  of  exposure  do  not  yield  as  brilliant 
pictures  as  the  latter.  I  found  that  this  be- 
lief was  erroneous,  and  the  reason  of  it  is 
that  with  long  exposure  a  considerable  por- 
tion of  the  silver  solution  drips  from  the 
plate,  and  hence  the  developed  picture  ap- 
pears weaker  than  a  plate  which  is  developed 
after  a  short  exposure,  and  where  the  larger 
portion  of  the  silver  bath  adheres  to  the 
plate,  and  hence  on  being  developed  yields  a 
more  brilliant  picture.  According  to  my 
opinion  it  is  not  the  objective  of  great  light- 
intensity  which  yields  the  brilliant  picture. 
Our  friend  Simpson  has  his  doubts  about 
this  view.  He  maintains  that  the  greater 
brilliancy  of  pictures  taken  with  light- 
strong  lenses  has  been  established  on  dry 
plates,  on  which  a  dripping  of  the  silver 
solution  is  out  of  the  question.  I  admit 
that  Mr.  Simpson  is  right  in  this  particu- 
lar, i.  e.,  that  light-strong  objectives  yield 
more  brilliant  pictures  with  dry  plates  than 
objectives  feeble  in  light ;  but  I  dispute  the 
conclusion  drawn  from  this,  namely^that  the 
light-intensity  of  the  instrument  is  the  di- 
rect cause.*  So  far  as  I  know  nobody  has 
made  comparative  experiments,  i.  e.,  worked 
with  two  instruments  simultaneously,  and 
fixed  the  time  of  exposure  reverse  to  the 
light-intensity  of  the  instrument.  Experi- 
ments with  instruments  the  light-intensity 
of  which  is  exactly  known,  can  only  decide 
this  question.  The  experience  that  objec- 
tives feeble  in  light  yield  weaker  pictures 
on  dry  plates,  I  explain  to  myself  quite  dif- 
ferently. Experienced  dry-plate  workers 
know  very  well  that  it  is  better  to  take  the 
time  of  exposure  a  little  too  long  than  too 
short.  This  rule  they  employ  principally 
with  weak  objectives.  They  expose  (fear- 
ing underexposure)  rather  too  long  than  too 
short,  and  the  results  are  feeble  pictures. 

The  cause  is,  therefore,  an  individual  one, 
and  the  instrument  is  not  to  blame,  but 
rather  the  worker,  who,  generally,  does  not 


know  the  exact  light-intensity  of  his  objec- 
tive. That  this  is  actually  the  case  I  have 
recently  established  practical l}'. 

I  took  three  tannin  plates  and  exposed 
them  in  a  stereoscopic  camera,  the  opening 
of  one  of  the  objectives  being  stopped  off  in 
such  a  manner  that  its  light-intensity  was 
twelve  times  less  than  the  other,  and  I  ex- 
posed the  plate  under  the  "stopped  off" 
lens  twelve  times  longer.  The  result 
was  that  the  two  negatives  developed  with 
equal  rapidity,  and  the  brilliancy  of  the 
two  pictures  was  absolutely  equal.  I  can- 
not, therefore,  change  my  former  opinion, 
and  insist  upon  what  I  have  said  before. 

Two  American  novelties  have  recently 
attracted  a  good  deal  of  attention  here  ;  one 
of  them,  landscapes  by  Mr.  Muybridge  of 
San  Francisco.  To  the  visitors  of  the  Vienna 
Exhibition  these  pictures  were  no  novel- 
ties, but  in  Berlin  they  were  not  generally 
known,  and  the  excellence  and  large  size  of 
the  plates,  the  brilliancy  of  tone,  the  happy 
selection  of  the  objects,  excited  general  ad- 
miration. 

Landscapes  of  this  size  are  the  exception 
here,  and  the  thought  that  Muybridge,  with 
his  mammoth  camera  for  plates  of  twenty- 
two  inches,  climbed  mountains,  fills  many 
a  one  with  admiration  and  respect. 

The  numerous  stereos  of  Muybridge  found 
also  many  admirers.  He  has  even  accom- 
panied the  campaigns  against  the  Modocs, 
and  photographed  the  most  interesting 
scenery  and  incidents.  These  pictures,  which 
place  before  us  golden  California,  many 
thousand  miles  away,  and  whieh  make  us 
acquainted  with  its  cities,  landscapes,  and 
inhabitants,  as  if  we  saw  them,  demonstrate 
more  and  more  the  invaluable  service  which 
photography  renders  the  study  of  geogra- 
phy. Equally  interesting,  and  for  the  same 
reason,  are  the  pictures  by  Mr.  Kilburn, 
of  a  country  almost  unknown  to  us,  namely, 
Mexico.  Really,  the  American  photog- 
raphers are  an  enterprising  set.  Let  us  re-=- 
joice  that  our  mutual  friend  Kilburn  safely 
returned  from  that  land  of  robbery  and 
murder,  and  perhaps  I  will  meet  him  and 
his  camera,  soon,  on  a  trip  through  Europe. 

For  another  American  novelty  we  are  in- 
debted to  Mr.  Marcy.  Mr.  Woodbury  in- 
troduced his  sciopticon  here.     I  have  tried 


54 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


the  same  and  compared  it  with  my  old 
magic-lantern.  The  light-intensity  of  the 
instrument  is  really  astonishing.  I  have 
never  been  able  to  get  so  much  light  with 
a  petroleum  lamp,  and  curious  also  is  the 
little  space  the  instrument  occupies.  The 
saying  "  Multum  in  parvo  "  is  really  well 
adapted  to  it. 

I  have  repeatedly  employed  magnesium 
light  for  the  lantern.  It  has,  however,  for 
a  long  lecture  many  drawbacks  ;  not  to  men- 
tion the  smoke,  it  drops  too  much.  Large 
particles  of  burning  metal  drop  off,  and  the 
picture  looks  "  flickering,"  i.  e.,  the  bright- 
ness is  changeable.  Winstanly  has  recently 
determined  the  brightness  of  the  magnesium 
light,  as  compared  with  the  lime  light,  and 
he  found  the  latter  four  times  brighter  than 
the  former.  The  calculation  is  based  on 
the  burning  of  one  wire  and  a  consumption 
of  2  8  grains  per  minute.  When  two  wires 
are  burned  simultaneously  the  brightness 
will  be  double. 

Yours  truly, 

Dr.  H.  Vogel. 


GOOD  FOR  THE  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 

"The  Philadelphia  Photographer,  which 
has  just  completed  the  tenth  year  of  its  exist- 
ence (growing  with  the  growth  of  the  art  it 
illustrates),  has  given  some  advice  to  pho- 
tographers that  should  be  echoed  through 
all  trades  and  professions  It  says:  'What 
shall  I  get  up  for  the  Centennial  ?.'  is  a  query 
which  every  photographer  should  ask  him- 
self now  day  by  day,  and  prepare  for  a  sub- 
stantial answer.  The  Centennial  Exhibi- 
tion is  not  to  be  an  ordinary  one,  such  as  we 
have  each  year  under  the  auspices  of  the 
National  Photographic  Association,  but  a 
very  extraordinary  one,  where  your  best 
work  should  be  shown  in  elegant  style.  The 
Centennial  Commission  are  disposed  to  treat 
photographers  very  favorably,  and  to  have 
a  hall  especially  constructed  for  the  art  of 
photography.  This  being  the  case,  let  us 
not  fail  to  do  our  best,  including  liberal  sub- 
scriptions to  the  stock.' 

"  Few  departments  of  the  exhibition  can 
be  made  of  greater  public  interest  than  that 
devoted  to  specimens  of  photography.  As 
an  art,  it  is  much  younger   even  than  the 


youthful  nation  among  whose  industries  its 
best  results  will  be  exhibited  ;  and,  although 
it  now  takes  rank  with  those  arts  that  are 
older  than  the  nation,  it  has  before  it  a  future 
to  which  its  present  position  is  but  a  step. 
The  public  obtains  some  notion  of  the  ad- 
vances made  in  photography  by  the  gradual 
improvement  in  the  pictures  produced  by 
this  process,  but  does  not  realize  that  the 
process  itself  has  been  almost  revolutionized 
within  the  last  ten  years,  and  that  to-day 
equally  good  pictures  are  made  by  modes  of 
procedure  based  on  two  opposing  principles. 
In  some  of  its  features  photography  is  yet 
a  mystery  to  those  who  practice  it  with  the 
best  effects,  but  the  mystery  is  gradually 
being  solved  under  well-disciplined  agencies, 
such  as  societies,  annual  conventions  and 
exhibitions,  and  monthly  magazines  entire- 
ly devoted  to  the  discussion  of  problems  of 
photography  in  its  relation  to  art,  optics,  and 
chemistry.  Probably  the  best  agency  is  the 
National  Association,  which  holds  annual 
conventions,  where  papers  are  read  and  dis- 
cussed, and  the  pictures  made  by  different 
processes  are  exhibited.  At  the  last  con- 
vention of  this  Association,  discussions  were 
held  which  curiously  illustrated  the  fact 
that  the  'science'  involved  in  photog- 
raphy is  no  more  exact  than  some  of  its 
more  pretentious  sisters.  One  set  of  pho- 
tographers, it  appears,  used  a  bath  for  nega- 
tive plates  containing  a  large  proportion  of 
acid  and  a  small  proportion  or  silver,  and 
another  set  used  a  bath  strong  in  silver,  but 
only  slightly  acid.  Each  set  produced  good 
pictures,  while  the  conservatives  could  see 
no  advantage  in  using  either  formula  of  the 
radicals,  as  they  by  a  medium  course  also 
produced  good  pictures.  There  was  a  similar 
disagreement  on  the  subjectof  skylights  and 
on  many  other  questions  involved  in  the 
art.  All  of  these  disputed  points  must  be 
settled  before  photography  can  make  a  near 
approach  to  perfection,  and  the  fact  that  they 
remain  disputed  while  such  splendid  speci- 
mens of  the  art  are  made  as  we  daily  see  in 
shop  windows,  suggests  the  hope  that,  in 
some  period  of  the  future,  '  the  sun  artist ' 
will  give  us  pictures  as  much  superior  to 
those  of  to-day  as  they  in  turn  are  to  the 
prints  with  which  the  town  was  satisfied  ten 
years  ago.     Such  results  are  ordinarily  the 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


55 


slow  outgrowth  of  patient  study  and  experi- 
ment on  the  part  of  a  few,  but  in  photogra- 
phy, through  the  medium  of  societies,  maga- 
zines, and  exhibitions,  the  humblest  member 
of  the  craft  contributes  something  to  the 
general  fund  of  information  and  aids  in  new 
discoveries. 

"The  work  of  the  photographic  chemist 
does  not  consist  alone  in  the  production  of 
pictures  artistically  true  in  tone  through  the 
medium  of  chemicals,  for  photography  has 
become  of  late  the  handmaid  of  the  higher 
sciences,  and  the  results  of  nearly  every  dis- 
covery in  photographic  chemistry  have  been 
utilized  in  some  practical  way  for  the  bene- 
fit of  mankind.  Photography  has  a  still 
greater  value  as  a  cultivator  of  art  tastes, 
for  it' puts  in  the  hands  of  the  poorer  classes 
exact  representations  of  beautiful  scenery, 
or  exact  copies  of  fine  works  of  art,  instead 
of  the  vulgar  prints  and  coarse  daubs  that 
were  common  twenty  years  ago.  Such  an 
art  is  deserving  of  recognition  in  the  exhi- 
bition of  a  nation  where  it  has  obtained 
possibly  its  greatest  development." 

We  extract  the  above  from  Mr.  George 
W.  Childs's  paper,  the  Philadelphia  Public 
Ledger  of  December  19th,  in  order  to  give 
encouragement  to  our  readers,  and  to  enable 
them  to  say  with  us,  "  Good  for  the  Public 
Ledger."  When  we,  as  a  profession,  can 
have  such  recognition  as  this  from  the  press, 
we  think  we  are  entitled  to  feel  proud  of  it. 
What  is  said  here  about  our  magazine,  i.  e., 
that  it  is  "growing  with  the  growth  of  the 
art  it  illustrates,"  is  very  cheering  .to  us. 
Mr.  Childs  may  not  remember,  but  we  do, 
that  when  about  to  embark  in  our  enter- 
prise we  asked  his  opinion  as  to  our  proba- 
ble success.  He  answered,  "You  won't  suc- 
ceed. Photography  won't  support  it." 
"Then,"  said  we,  "we  will  make  photography 
support  it,"  just  as  Mr.  Childs  one  day  said, 
"  Some  day  I  will  own  the  Public  Ledger." 
In  our  little  circle,  with  him  as  an  example, 
we  have  tried  to  do  what  he  has  done  in  a 
much  wider  field.  We  are  glad  that  he  has 
changed  his  mind  about  our  art;  many  have, 
and  it  deserves  it.  Let  such  good  words  as 
this  cheer  us  on  to  upbuild  and  uphold  our 
National  Association,  and  to  do  better,  and 
better,  and  better. 


As  to  the  Centennial,  we  mean  to  drum 
you  up  every  month  on  this  subject,  so 
please  see  what  we  have  to  say  concerning  it 
on  another  page. 


Natural  Composition  Pictures  for  the 
Stereoscope. 

We  approve  of  the  efforts  of  such  parties 
as  Messrs.  Loescher  &  Petsch,  and  Gris- 
wold,  and  Weller,  to  produce  natural 
groups  for  the  stereoscope,  which  tell  stories 
interesting  to  all.  It  is  good  practice,  and 
it  brings  ample  remuneration,  for  such 
pictures  are  always  most  pleasing  to  the 
public,  and  are  readily  purchased. 

But  we  have  before  us  a  series  of  pictures 
that  are  entirely  new  in  conception,  and 
most  beautiful  in  execution.  We  allude  to 
twelve  perfect  gems  for  the  stereoscope,  just 
published  by  Messrs.  Kilburn  Brothers, 
Littleton,  New  Hampshire,  illustrative  of 
some  stanzas  of  Mr.  James  Russell  Lowell's 
poem  of  "  The  Vision  of  Sir  Launfal."  In 
the  prelude  to  part  second  of  that  poem  we 
read  how — 

"Down  swept  the  chill  wind  froni  the  mountain-peak. 
From  the  snow  five  thousand  summers  old ; 

On  open  wold  and  hill-top  bleak 
It  had  gathered  all  the  cold, 

And  whirled  it  like  sleet  on  the  wanderer's  cheek  ; 
It  carried  a  shiver  everywhere — " 

But  now  begin  the  illustrations  : 

1277.  The  little  brook  heard  it  and  built  a  roof, 
"Neath  which  he  could  house  him,  winter-proof; 

1278.  All  night  by  the  white  stars'  frosty  gleams 
He  groined  his  arches  and  matched  his  beams ; 

1279.  Slender  and  clear  were  his  crystal  spars 
As  the  lashes  of  light  that  trim  the  stars; 

1280.  He  sculptured  every  summer  delight 
In  his  halls  and  chambers  out  of  sight; 

1281.  Sometimes  his  tinkling  waters  slipt 
Down  through  a  frost-leaved  forest  crypt; 

1282.  Long,  sparkling  aisles  of  steel-stemmed  trees 
Bending  to  counterfeit  a  breeze ; 

1283.  Sometimes  the  roof  no  fretwork  knew 
But  silvery  mosses  that  downward  grew ; 

1284.  Sometimes  it  was  carved  in  sharp  relief 
With  quaint  arabesques  of  ice  fern  leaf; 

1285.  Sometimes  it  was  simply  smooth  and  clear, 
For  the  gladness  of  heaven  to  shine  through, 

and  here 

1286.  He  had  caught  the  nodding  bulrush  tops 
And  hung  them  thickly  with  diamond-drops, 


56 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


1287.  That  crystalled  the  beams  of  moon  and  sun 
And  made  a  star  of  every  one : 

1288.  No  mortal  builder's  most  rare  device 
Could  match  this  winter  palace  of  ice. 

The  illustrations,  as  our  readers  have  all 
guessed,  are  ice  views,  and  it  seems  as  if  the 
poet  must  have  had  them  before  him  when 
he  wrote  his  beautiful  lines.  As  to  the 
talented  photographer,  he  has  given  us 
more  superb  illustrations  than  the  mind  and 
pencil  of  any  living  artist  could  do,  for  he 
has  sought  out  amid  the  scenes  about  him, 
where  the  frost-king  reigns  so  much  of  the 
year,  all  the  pictures  drawn  by  the  poet's 
pen.  We  have  "The  Little  Brook,"  the 
"Crystal  Spars,"  the  "  Tinkling  Waters," 
the  "  Aisles  of  Steel-stemmed  Trees,"  the 
"Ice  Fern  Leaf,"  the  "Nodding  Bulrush 
Tops,"  the  "Diamond  Drops,"  the  "Frost- 
leaved  Forest-crypt,"  and  the  "Winter 
Palace  of  Ice,"  all  most  faithfully  rendered 
by  the  camera  and  the  master-manager  of 
it.  We  did  not  know,  much  as  we  have 
been  there  amongst  it,  that  such  a  variety 
of  ice-work  could  be  found. 

It  truly  seems 

...  "As  if  every  image  that  mirrored  lay, 
In  his  depths  serene  through  the  summer  day, 
Each  fleeting  shadow  of  earth  and  sky, 
Lest  the  happy  model  should  be  lost, 
Had  been  mimicked  in  fairy  masonry 
By  the  elfin  builders  of  the  frost " — 

and  caught  by  the  photographer. 

We  think  this  series  is  among  the  hap- 
piest hits  that  our  friend  Kilburn  has  ever 
made  by  means  of  his  magic  camera. 


TAKE  CARE! 

We  have  before  us  cards  and  circulars 
and  letters  which  have  been  scattered  among 
the  fraternity  pertaining  to  the  following  : 

1.  A  process  for  coloring,  called  the  "  Pearl 
Crayon  Process."  The  seller  of  this  uses 
the  N.  P.  A.  monogram  trade-mark  on  his 
cards. 

2.  An  "  instrument  "to  "  last  you  a  life- 
time," for  retouching  negatives,  the  "most 
wonderful  and  valuable  discovery  ever 
made  in  the  art  of  photography." 

3.  "  A  new  process  of  copying  and  en- 


larging from  small  pictures,"  on  "  metallic 
plates." 

Our  subscribers  ask  us  for  advice  on  these 
matters. 

As  the  parties  who  sell  such  things  do. not 
usually  wait  upon  us,  we  cannot  tell  much 
about  them  unless  we  purchase  ourselves, 
as  we  often  do  in  such  cases  in  order  to  post 
our  readers.  The  first  we  refused  to  adver- 
tise in  our  magazine ;  the  second  we  have 
seen  results  by,  but  they  do  not  near  ap- 
proach the  quality  of  mediocrity. 

There  is  one  safe  rule  for  our  readers  to 
go  by,  and  that  is  to  take  care  how  they  buy 
anything,  no  matter  how  fairly  it  is  repre- 
sented to  them,  unless  an  opportunity  is 
given  to  test  it. 


Sulphate  of  Silver  Pinholes. 

BY   JOHN   M.    BLAKE. 

Crystals  of  sulphate  of  silver  often  form 
during  development,  when  working  with  a 
strong  bath,  say  60  grains,  and  developing 
with  sulphate  of  iron.  The  film  may  come 
out  of  the  bath  in  perfect  condition  ;  but  if 
we  develop  the  plate,  and  then  drain  and 
blow  upon  the  surface  to  remove  still  more 
of  the  solution,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  film 
has  a  velvety  look.  This  is  caused  by  a 
multitude  of  small  crystals  of  sulphate  of 
silver.  They  will  be  removed  by  solution 
in  less  than  a  minute,  if  the  plate  is  washed 
with  water.  For  this  reason  they  are  quite 
likely  to  escape  notice.  The  effect  produced 
by  the  formation  of  these  crystals  is  to  cover 
up  a  portion  of  the  film  under  each  of  them, 
and  thus  hinder  the  deposit.  Pinholes  are 
left  on  the  solution  of  the  crystals,  and  the 
general  effect  is  to  give  a  peculiar,  coarse 
look  to  the  image.  Pinholes  of  this  kind 
have  not  the  character  of  a  distinct  punc- 
ture entirely  through  the  film,  since  the 
growth  of  the  crystals,  in  the  high-lights  at 
least,  began  after  development  had  com- 
menced. 

As  proof  that  these  crystals  are  sulphate 
of  silver,  it  may  be  mentioned  that  their 
solubility  in  water  is  identical  with  that 
salt.  Also  a  simple  saturated  solution  of 
sulphate  of  silver  does  not  act  upon  them. 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


57 


The}'  form  as  well  on  a  plain  collodion  film 
that  has  been  soaked  in  the  strong  silver 
bath.  If,  while  working  a  bath  with  which 
ordinary  sulphate  of  iron  developer  con- 
stantly and  abundantly  gives  these  crystals, 
we  substitute  protonitrate  of  iron,  or  pyro- 
gallic  developer,  the  crystals  cease  to  form  ; 
but  simple  sulphate  of  potash,  or  of  ammo- 
nia will  produce  them  fully  as  well  as  sul- 
phate of  iron. 

The  crystals  by  sulphate  of  potash  are 
larger  in  size  than  those  produced  when  sul- 
phate of  iron  is  used,  and  their  microscopic 
character  is  also  somewhat  different.  Those 
produced  by  sulphate  of  ammonia  also  have 
a  character  peculiar  to  themselves.  Certain 
sulphates  appear  to  produce  these  crystals 
out  of  proportion  to  the  amount  of  sulphuric 
acid  which  they  contain.  Probably  this  is 
not  due  to  the  formation  of  a  double  sul- 
phate of  silver,  since  a  crystal,  started  with 
sulphate  of  iron  solution,  was  seen  under 
the  microscope  to  continue  its  growth  in 
mixed  solutions  of  sulphate  of  potash  and 
nitrate  of  silver.  In  explanation,  double 
salts  often  are  less  soluble  than  their  two 
constituents,  and  a  crystal  of  simple  sul- 
phate of  silver  would  not  be  built  upon  by 
a  double  salt.  If  the  crystal  by  sulphate  of 
iron  was  a  double  salt  to  begin  with,  and 
this  is  possible,  then  supercrystallization 
might  occur,  and  a  greater  difference  in  the 
facility  of  production  of  pinhole  crystals  by 
different  sulphates  than  actually  exists 
would  be  quite  consistent. 

We  will  now  add  the  results  of  some  trials 
with  several  sulphates  that  are  frequently 
added  to  the  sulphate  of  iron  developer.  It 
must  be  understood  that  the  results  will 
vary  within  certain  limits,  according  to  the 
habit  in  flowing  the  developer  and  the  con- 
sequent amount  of  dilution  or  loss  of  silver 
nitrate;  also  upon  the  amount  of  exposure 
and  consequent  absorption  of  silver  in  form- 
ing the  image.  The  examples  given  were 
at  the  maximum;  plain  collodion  films  were 
used,  soaked  in  the  different  baths.  Tem- 
perature, 60°  to  70°  F. 

A  solution  of  sulphate  of  iron,  100  grains 
to  the  ounce,  gave  no  sulphate  of  silver 
crystals  on  development  with  a  film  taken 
from  a  40-grain  silver  bath  ;  on  one  from  a 
45-grain  bath  a  few  crystals  formed  in  the 


thick  edge  of  the  film  ;  a  55-grain  bath  gave 
them  abundantly  ;  a  50-grain  iron  solution 
behaved  the  same  as  the  100-grain ;  a  25- 
grain  iron  gave  none  with  a  45-grain  bath, 
a  very  few  with  a  50-grain,  but  abundantly 
with  a  60-grain  bath;  a  15-grain  iron  solu- 
tion gave  none  with  a  60-grain,  a  few  with 
a  65-grain,  and  more  with  a  72-grain  bath. 

A  sulphate  of  potash  solution,  30  grains 
to  the  ounce,  gave  a  few  crystals  with  a  40- 
grain  silver  bath,  and  a  20-grain  potash  also 
a  few  with  the  same  bath  ;  a  13-grain  potash 
gave  none  with  a  55-grain  silver,  but  a  few 
with  a  60-grain  bath  ;  a  9-grain  potash  gave 
a  few  with  a  66-grain  silver. 

A  20-grain  sulphate  of  ammonia  solution 
gave  the  crystals  with  a  40-grain  silver  ;  a 
13-grain  ammonia  gave  a  few  with  a  45- 
grain  silver,  and  abundantly  with  a  60- 
grain  silver  ;  a  9-grain  ammonia  gave  a  few 
with  a  55-grain  silver. 

A  40-grain  sulphate  of  copper  gave  a  few 
crystals  with  a  40-grain  silver,  and  abun- 
dantly with  a  60-grain ;  a  20-grain  copper 
gave  a  few  with  a  50-grain,  and  abundantly 
with  a  60-grain  silver;  a  13-grain  copper 
gave  none  with  a  60-grain,  but  gave  them 
with  a  66-grain  silver. 

A  40-2jrain  double  sulphate  of  iron  and 
ammonia  gave  a  few  crystals  on  the  thick 
part  of  the  film,  with  a  45-grain  silver,  and 
plenty  with  a  50-grain  ;  a  20-grain  double 
sulphate  solution  gave  none  with  a  55-grain 
bath,  but  abundantly  with  a  60-grain. 

An  appreciable  interval  elapses  after  the 
mixing  of  the  solutions  on  the  plate  before 
the  crystals  begin  to  form,  and  if  the  devel- 
opment of  an  image  commences  and  goes  on 
vigorously  during  the  interval,  the  trouble 
may  not  appear.  Furthermore,  it  will  be 
seen  from  the  results  of  experiments  given 
above,  that  if  we  confine  ourselves  to  the 
strength  of  solutions  that  general  experi- 
ence has  shown  to  give  the  best  and  most 
uniform  results  with  bromo-iodized  collo- 
dion, there  will  be  no  danger  of  the  forma- 
tion of  these  pinholes;  also  that  a  limit  is 
put  to  the  strength  of  solutions  we  may  wish 
to  employ  for  the  purpose  of  forcing  up  an 
image  with  a  very  short  exposure,  excepting 
what  might  be  gained  by  heating  the  devel- 
oper to  increase  the  solubility  of  the  sul- 
phate of  silver. 


58 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


CENTENNIAL. 

A  few  more  words  on  this  to  keep  it 
alive.  When  the  Centennial  Exhibition 
opens,  if  we  find  that  photographers  have 
taken  no  interest  in  it,  we  can  at  least  com- 
fort ourselves  with  the  fact  that  we  let  them 
know  about  it.  But  we  do  not  anticipate 
any  such  sad  lack  of  interest.  The  display 
of  photography  there  will  be  the  grandest 
the  world  ever  saw,  and  nearly  every  pho- 
tographer in  the  United  States  will  see  it,  be- 
sides many  from  abroad  who  have  already 
told  us  they  are  coming  over. 

Let  us  then  all  be  getting  ready;  now  is 
the  time  to  do  that.  The  Centennial  Com- 
mission will  provide  well  for  our  art.  Let 
our  art  provide  well  for  the  exhibition. 
More  than  this,  they  have  already  recog- 
nized the  importance  of  our  art  in  making 
the  editor  of  this  magazine,  a  member  of 
the  Executive  Committee  of  the  Citizens' 
Centennial  Committee,  and  this  being  the 
case,  we  pledge  ourselves  to  look  after  the 
interests  of  photography  and  its  votaries. 
We  are  heart  and  hand  in  the  matter. 
Join  us. 

What  is  most  wanted  now  is  subscriptions 
to  the  stock.  The  shares  are  $10,  one- 
fifth  payable  now.  So  far  as  we  know,  our 
craft  have  only  taken  ninety-nine  shares. 
That  is  not  a  speck  of  what  we  should  do.  It 
is  a  good  investment  and  will  pay  good  in- 
terest. Pennsylvania  photographers  especi- 
ally should  look  to  this.  Please  let  us  know 
immediately  how  many  shares  we  may  put 
your  name  down  for.  The  books  are  open 
at  our  office  now. 


NOTES  IN  AND  OUT  OF  THE 
STUDIO. 

BY   G.  WHARTON  SIMPSON,   M.A. ,  F.S.A. 

Indelicate  Photographs. — Some  excite- 
ment has  recently  been  caused  amongst 
dealers  in  photographs  by  prosecutions  in- 
stituted by  the  Society  for  the  Suppression  of 
Vice  against  two  or  three  dealers  for  the  ex- 
posure and  sale  of  photographs  of  actresses 
in  the  character  costumes  in  which  they 
regularly  appear  on  the  stage.  In  many 
cases  these  costumes  cannot  be  described  as 
ample,  and  many  of  the  pictures  are  doubt- 


less silly  and  vulgar  in  their  lavish  display 
of  physical  charms  (?),  but  as  they  are  toler- 
ated on  the  stage  in  their  flesh  and  blood 
form,  few  people  would  think  them  criminal 
in  their  photographic  representation.  The 
Society  in  question,  with  a  laudable  con- 
cern for  the  preservation  of  public  decency, 
think  that  this  pictorial  display  of  scant 
drapery  is  demoralizing,  and  hence  these 
prosecutions.  The  judge  expressed  his  con- 
viction that  with  but  slight  exception  the 
photographs  in  question  might  be  found  in 
drawing-rooms  throughout  the  kingdom  ; 
but  as  the  accused  parties  plead  guilty, 
they  were  simply  bound  over  to  appear  to 
receive  sentence  whenever  called  upon, 
which  is  a  legal  mode  I  presume  of  saying 
that  they  had  done  nothing  worthy  of  pun- 
ishment. The  shop-windows  devoted  to 
photographs  were,  however,  suddenly  trans- 
formed. Lady  Godiva  and  Mazeppa  re- 
tired from  public  gaze,  and  the  cards  of 
swarms  of  half-draped  ballet  girls  followed 
them.  I  don't  know  whether  these  vulgar 
portraits  have  inundated  American  cities 
to  the  same  extent  that  they  have  prevailed 
on  this  side;  if  they  have,  some  of  your 
readers  will  probably  think  that,  whilst  it  is 
somewhat  startling  to  prosecute  the  venders 
of  such  things  for  indecency,  it  is  a  pity 
public  taste  cannot  suppress  pictures  which 
degrade  photography  by  their  vulgarity. 

Graduated  Backgrounds. — -A  correspon- 
dent, Mr.  J.  S.  Steadman,  sends  me  details 
of  a  method  which  he  employs  with  success 
in  producing  matt  backgrounds  in  oil,  with 
graduated  tints.     He  says: 

"  The  materials  required  for  producing 
matt  backgrounds  in  oil  (if  a  slate  color  is 
chosen),  are  white  lead  ground  in  oil,  black 
turpentine,  linseed  oil,  and  a  little  encaustic 
varnish;  also  one  paint-brush  and  a  large 
hog-hair  brush  for  stippling  purposes.  The 
white  lead  must  be  broken  or  mixed  up 
with  turpentine  to  about  the  liquid  state  of 
ordinary  paint,  and  afterwards  strained,  if 
not  thought  fine  enough  and  free  from  all 
lumps.  The  operator  will  find,  if  he  will 
try  a  little  of  this  color  on  the  background, 
or  anything  that  he  may  choose  (so  that 
there  be  not  too  much  suction),  that  the 
color  will  dry  dead  or  flat  in  a  few  seconds. 
To  obviate  this,  and  to  make  the  color  work 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


59 


free,  a  few  drops  of  the  linseed  oil  must  be 
added  according  to  the  amount  of  color  in 
use.  But  be  careful  not  to  use  too  much 
oil,  or  the  color  will  remain  glossy  instead 
of  flat;  therefore  I  consider  a  trial  or  so 
necessary  for  inexperienced  persons.  Next 
add  a  small  quantity  of  the  varnish,  about 
the  same  in  proportion  as  the  oil.  It  assists 
in  drying  and  hardening  the  color.  Having 
properly  mixed  up  the  white  lead  in  the 
turpentine,  oil,  and  varnish,  commence  to 
mix  up  the  stain  in  another  pot  or  pan 
with  a  littld  turpentine  to  dissolve  the 
black. 

"  For  a  graduated  background  commence 
with  the  lightest  part  to  be  painted.  Put 
sufficient  of  the  black  into  the  white  lead 
already  mixed  up,  to  stain  it  to  the  strength 
required,  remembering  that  flatting  dries 
out  two  or  three  shades  lighter  when  dry. 
Commence  painting  the  lightest  parts  of 
the  background,  and  keep  adding  the  stain 
in  small  quantities,  so  making  it  darker  till 
worked  out  to  the  deepest  shade  required, 
and  occasionally  stipple  the  color  with  a 
large  hog-hair  brush  from  the  light  to  the 
dark  parts,  so  keeping  a  uniform  graduated 
effect  as  the,  paint  is  laid  on,  not  allowing 
it  to  get  stiff,  as  it  would  do  before  the 
whole  background  could  be  finished. 

"If  thought  necessary,  alittle  ultramarine 
blue  may  be  added  to  enliven  the  color,  or 
any  other  tints  may  be  used  in  the  same 
manner.  Backgrounds  that  have  not  been 
previously  painted  will  require  sizing  before 
painting  with  any  ordinary  size  ;  or  give  it 
a  coating  of  oil  color  previous  to  flatting  it." 


MATTERS  OF  THE 


Membership  costs  $2;  annual  dues,  $4. 
Life  membership,  $'25,  and  no  dues. 

All  remittances  of  back  dues,  and  fees,  and 
dues  for  new  members  should  be  made  to 
the  Permanent  Secretary,  Edward  L.  Wil- 
son, Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

Life  Members. — No  additions. 


Debt  Fund. — Are  photographers  not  now 
in  condition  to  help  something  towards  the 
removal  of  the  debt?  The  exhibitions  cost 
so  much  each  year  that  it  would  seem  folly 
to  undertake  another  one,  unless  the  Execu- 
tive Committee  can  be  guaranteed  that 
their  efforts  will  be  appreciated,  and  the  As- 
sociation kept  free  from  debt.  Make  one 
brave  effort,  remit  your  dues,  and  help  a 
little  besides,  and  the  thing  will  be  done. 

The  Executive  Committee  meeting  last 
held  was  too  late  for  us  to  report  this  month. 

Chicago. — The  Chicago  photographers 
seem  determined  to  do  their  very  best  to  in- 
sure the  success  of  the  coming  N.  P.  A. 
Convention  there.  Arrangements  are  being 
pushed  with  all  possible  vigor,  and  there  is 
no  lack  of  earnestness  in  the  matter.  We 
are  quite  sure  that  we  can  rely  on  Chicago. 
Of  their  action,  more  elsewhere. 

To  Foreign  Photographers.  —  The  Sixth 
Annual  Exhibition  of  the  National  Photo- 
graphic Association  will  be  held  in  Chicago, 
111.,  beginning  Tuesday,  July  14th,  1874.. 
Foreign  photographers  are  invited  as  usual 
to  contribute  to  the  display,  and  the  usual 
large  gold  medals  are  awarded  for  the  best 
exhibition  of  work  from  each  foreign  coun- 
try. The  arrangements  are  the  same  as  last 
year.  For  further  particulars,  address  the 
Permanent  Secretary. 

The  dealers  and  the  photographers  are 
not  onl}'  beginning  to  work,  but  to  give 
their  money  to  help  the  Exhibition  to  suc- 
cess. The  following  is  an  example  of  the 
feeling  that  exists : 

"  We  were  presented  a  few  days  ago  by 
Messrs.  Mosher  and  Brand,  a  document,  ask- 
ing us  to  contribute  towards  the  National 
Photographic  Association  Convention,  to 
be  held  in  July.  We  were  glad  to  have  an 
opportunity  to  do  so,  as  we  want  it  with- 
out fail  to  be  held  in  our  city  the  coming 
annual  session,  and  registered  ourselves  for 
in  the  cause. 

"  Kice  &  Thompson." 


Wipe  out  your  dark-room  with  a  wet 
cloth  or  sponge.  This  will  often  relieve  you 
of  annoying  spots  and  markings  that  you 
may  have  tried  in  vain  to  discover  the 
cause  of. 


60 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


SOCIETY  GOSSIP. 

Philadelphia  (Philada.),  Jan.  7th. — 
Mr.  Bell  spoke  in  favorable  terms  of  an  in- 
stantaneous process  by  Mr.  Duchochois,  in 
which  the  pyroxylin  is  so  treated  as  to  re- 
move all  traces  of  nitro-glucose. 

Mr.  Partridge  remarked,  that  in  his 
hands,  nitro-glucose  had  no  effect  whatever 
on  emulsions. 

Mr.  Partridge  exhibited  a  field  camera- 
box  for  i\  x  7  plates,  made  by  himself,  and 
fitted  with  many  ingenious  improvements 
in  respect  to  lightness,  convenience,  and 
neat  adjustment  of  the  parts. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Carbutt,  it  was  re- 
solved that  a  special  meeting  be  called  for 
Monday  evening,  January  l'ith,  for  an  ex- 
hibition of  slides  by  calcium  light;  a  post- 
ponement rendered  necessary  by  the  fact 
of  the  non-delivery  of  the  gas  bags  in  time 
for  this  evening's  meeting. 

That  meeting  (12th)  was  held,  and  was  a 
very  pleasurable  one. 

New  England  (Boston),  Jan.  7th. — 
Mr.  D.  B.  Vickery,  of  Haverhill,  heing 
called  by  the  President,  gave  the  following 
mode  of  preparing  his  negative  cotton  for 
stock : 

Take  three  or  four  different  makes  of 
cotton,  about  sixteen  ounces  in  all,  mix 
them  all  together  in  an  evaporating-dish, 
then  pour  in  one  gallon  of  water  and  one 
ounce  liq.  ammonia;  stir  the  mass  well. 
Then  wash  in  several  changes  of  water  and 
finish  by  washing  in  alcohol.  Then  pick 
apart,  and  lay  it  on  a  clean  glass  shelf  to 
dry  ;  then  put  it  in  paper  boxes.  By  pre- 
paring a  lot  of  cotton  in  this  manner  you 
will  always  have  a  reliable  stock  on  hand. 
One  reason  for  my  doing  this  is  I  have  had 
some  trouble  in  always  getting  the  same 
quality  of  cotton  for  use ;  now  I  have  a  full 
stock  on  hand  at  all  times. 

No  special  business  was  transacted. 

Buffalo  (Buffalo,  N.  Y.),  Jan.  12th.— 
Mr.  W.  J.  Baker  began  his  interesting  series 
of  lectures  on  chemistry,  which  he  will  con- 
tinue for  a  number  of  meetings,  and  for 
which  the  Association  returned  their  thanks. 

A  very  interesting  paper  was  read  from 
Mrs.  Butler,  on  the  negative  bath.  She 
said  she  never  had  any  trouble  with  her 


bath,  and  had  not  boiled  or  sunned  one  for 
ten  years.  Her  method  of  working  was 
this:  She  always  tested  her  chemicals  each 
morning  whether  worked  the  day  before  or 
not,  and  if  her  bath  failed  to  be  in  order 
she  put  kaolin  in,  and  kept  it  in  commotion 
about  twenty  minutes;  when  settled  draw 
off'  with  a  siphon,  and  it  is  ready  for  using. 
She  never  covered  her  bath  except  while 
the  plate  was  in.  In  this  simple  way  she 
had  kept  it  in  order  for  the  length  of  time 
mentioned. 

Pennsylvania  (Philadelphia),  January 
19th. — The  reports  of  the  retiring  Secretary 
and  Treasurer  were  read  and  accepted,  and 
the  new  officers  duly  installed. 

The  Committee  on  Medal  made  their  re- 
port, awarding  the  prize  to  Henry  F. 
Smith,  of  Mr.  Khoads's  gallery,  for  the  best 
cabinet  portrait  from  an  untouched  nega- 
tive. There  were  eight  competitors,  and 
the  interest  in  the  matter  as  well  as  the 
quality  of  the  work  showed  a  decided  im- 
provement over  last  month. 

Mr.  Wilson,  in  behalf  of  the  Committee 
on  Art  Lectures,  reported  that  he  had  had 
some  correspondence  with  Prof.  J.  W. 
Wier,  of  Yale  College.  Two  letters  were 
read,  giving  the  terms  for  a  course  of  six 
lectures,  with  the  subjects,  and  a  synopsis 
of  the  leading  points  to  be  presented.  Mr. 
Wilson  spoke  warmWin  favor  of  the  course, 
and  called  for  some  expression  in  reference 
to  what  the  members  were  willing  to  do. 
A  sufficient  number  subscribed  for  tickets 
to  give  the  enterprise  an  encouraging  as- 
pect; and,  on  motion,  the  report  was  ac- 
cepted, and  the  committee  continued,  with 
power  to  act  in  the  matter  as  may  be 
deemed  expedient. 

A  letter  was  read  from  Mr.  Shaw,  refut- 
ing the  claims  of  Mr.  demons  in  reference 
to  "  Regnault's  Chemistry  "  (extracts  from 
which  were  read  at  the  last  meeting),  by 
stating  that  Iiegnault's  Chemistry  had  been 
in  the  courts  years  ago  in  his  cases,  and  the 
same  passages  cited  without  avail.  "The 
courts  have  invariably  admitted  the  validity 
of  the  patent  upon  its  merits,  and  notwith- 
standing that  they  have  twice  set  the  patent 
aside  upon  technical  grounds,  have  always 
held  that  the  invention  was  a  patentable 
one;  and  the  Patent  Office,  with   all  this 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER, 


61 


evidence  and  decision  of  the  courts  before 
them,  have  promptly  renewed  the  patent 
as  often  as  a  renewal  has  been  applied  for." 
The  object  of  Mr.  Shaw's  letter  was  to  cor- 
rect any  erroneous  impression  that  may 
have  been  made  in  the  minds  of  photogra- 
phers. 

Mr.  Schreiber  spoke  in  high  terms  of  Mr. 
Newell's  wooden  composition  baths.  He 
was  using  one,  and  found  it  all  that  could 
be  desired. 

An  invitation  from  Mr.  Moore  to  hold 
the  next  meeting  at  his  rooms  was  accepted. 

A  vote  of  thanks  was  tendered  Messrs. 
Gilbert  Brothers  for  the  use  of  their  rooms 
this  evening. 

Mr.  Trask  wanted  an  understanding  in 
reference  to  the  medal  pictures,  whether 
they  could  be  made  from  negatives  already 
on  hand,  or  whether  they  were  to  be  made 
during  the  month  of  competition.  It  was 
decided  that  the  negatives  were  to  be  made 
during  the  month. 

Indiana  (Indianapolis),  Jan.  7th,  1874  — 
The  developer  being  the  subject  of  discussion 
for  the  evening,  the  articles  in  the  January 
Philadelphia  Photographer,  by  Messrs.  Cross 
and  Green,  were  read;  they  met  the  views 
of  the  members  so  thoroughly  that  it  was 
thought  but  little  could  be  added,  and  the 
discussion  turned  to  the  chemistry  of  the 
developer. 

Mr.  Dwyer  recommended  Mardoch's  com- 
pound iron  for  short  exposures  and  pictures 
of  children. 

Mr.  Pendergrast  was  called  on  to  read 
the  monthly  paper,  which  was  interesting 
and  instructive. 

The  chair  was  taken  by  Mr.  Hosier, 
President  of  the  Association.  The  minutes 
of  the  last  meeting  being  read,  the  meeting 
proceeded  to  the  election  of  officers  for  the 
ensuing  year,  which  resulted  as  follows : 
President,  G.  A.  Douglas;  Vice-President, 
P.  B.  Greene;  Second  Vice-President,  D. 
H.  Cross;  Treasurer,  C.  D.  Mosher;  Secre- 
tary, 0.  F.  Weaver ;  Executive  Commit- 
tee, A.  Hesler,  E.  D.  Ormsby,  and  Joshua 
Smith. 

Dr.  Vogel's  Photographer's  Reference 
Book  will  be  found  very  useful  to  "study 
up  "  at  this  season. 


WRINKLES  AND  DODGES. 

In  reading  the  Photographer,  I  noticed 
the  discussion  on  cleaning  the  printing-bath 
by  burning  alcohol.  I  tried  it.  The  first 
dishful  burned  very  nicely;  but  the  second 
I  could  not  light.  I  began  to  think,  and 
remembered  I  lighted  the  first  at  the  edge 
of  the  dish  where  I  wiped  the  mouth  of  the 
alcohol  bottle,  and  set  it  on  fire,  and  it 
burned  as  readily  as  at  first ;  whereas  I 
could  not  light- it  in  the  solution.  I  pre- 
sume that  was  the  trouble  with  friend  Bing- 
ham when  he  tried  so  hard  to  light  his  bath 
and  failed. 

I  congratulate  you  upon  your  safe  return 
home,  hoping  you  have  had  both  a  pleasant 
and  profitable  trip. 

Your  friend, 

J.  G.  Barrows. 

Economy. — Have  you  tried  the  plan  of 
keeping  silvered  paper  between  blotters 
that  have  been  passed  through  a  30-grain 
solution  of  sal  soda  ?  If  not  try  it,  and  you 
will  be  pleased ;  but  to  make  it  of  any  use 
the  silvered  paper  must  be  placed  between 
the  blotters  before  it  is  fully  dry  from  the 
silver  solution.  I  silver  enough  at  a  time 
to  last  two  or  three  weeks,  and  I  make  just 
as  good  prints  with  that  silvered  three 
weeks  as  that  just  silvered.  The  saving  of 
material  and  time  must  be  apparent  to  all 
who  try  it. 

A.  Hesler. 

The  following  are  for  use,  if  for  no  other 
than  the  waste-basket. 

I  made  a  4-4  print  for  a  respectable  party 
last  week.  The  proof  was  returned  as  not 
being,  satisfactory  on  account  of  its  size, 
accompanied  with  the  remark  that  they 
"  supposed  it  ivas  ugoing  to  be  blowed  up." 
Your  correspondent  "Hz,"  but  nothing 
was  "  blowed  "up. 

Not  long  since  I  made  a  negative  for  a 
middle-aged  dame  from  the  Emerald  Isle. 
The  prints  were  promised  on  a  certain  day 
the  following  week.  On  the  day  appointed 
she  made  her  appearance  at  my  door,  and 
made  known  her  presence  by  several  lusty 
raps.  My  wife  being  in  the  reception-room 
at  the  time  answered  the  call,  and  was 
greeted  with    "Please   mum,  I   want   my 


62 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


drawds."  "Want  what?"  asked  my  wife. 
"I  want  my  drawds,"  was  the  reply.  My 
wife  was  nonplussed,  and  made  for  the 
studio,  and  related  to  me  the  interview. 
Now,  what  in  the  world  does  she  want? 
"Why,  don't  you  know?  She  has  had 
her  'pietur'  'drawn,'  and  now  wants  the 
'  drawds.'  "  G.   H.  S. 

It  is  hard  times,  but  it  would  be  harder 
with  me  if  I  should  be  deprived  of  my 
monthly  instalment  of  Philadelphia  Photog- 
rapher.    I  therefore  remit. 

Gr.  H.  Sherman. 

I  inclose  two  little  items,  which,  if  you 
think  they  will  be  of  service  to  anybody,  you 
can  make  use  of. 

To  save  overprinted  photographs,  tone 
and  fix  in  the  usual  way.  Having  taken 
out  all  sufficiently  light,  turn  off  the  hypo 
fixing  solution,  and  wash  in  one  or  two 
waters;  then  turn  on  to  the  prints  a  very 
strong,  fresh  solution  of  hyposulphite  of 
soda  in  water  quite  warm  ;  watch  closely, 
and  remove  as  soon  as  light  enough.  If 
very  dark  prints  are  to  be  bleached,  don't 
overtone,    as   they   will    look   more   toned 


after  bleaching.  Prints  bleached  in  this 
way  will  come  out  as  brilliant  as  when 
printed  right,  and  fixed  in  the  usual  way. 
I  have  tried  several  formulae,  such  as  cy- 
anide, ammonia,  &c. ,  but  the  prints  were 
spoiled  in  tone  and  brilliancy,  also  the 
paper  turned  yellow. 

To  duplicate  negatives  by  the  wet  pro- 
cess, place  upon  each  corner  of  the  negative 
to  be  duplicated  a  piece  of  cardboard  suffi- 
cient to  keep  the  coated  and  sensitized  plate 
from  touching  against  it. 

Place  this  in  the  plate-holder,  and  upon 
it  an  ordinary  wet  collodion  plate,  and  close 
as  usual.  Place  the  camera  in  good  light, 
with  two  thicknesses  of  tissue-paper  over 
front  of  iens  ;  slide  the  bellows  as  close  to 
lens  as  possible,  and  be  able  to  cover  the 
plate  ;  expose  about  the  ordinary  time  for 
a  negative  in  the  usual  way;  develop,  and 
you  get  a  nice  sharp  transparency  ;  and 
from  this  you  can  make  as  many  negatives 
as  wished  in  the  same  manner,  or  enlarge- 
ments can  be  made  as  with  other  transpar- 
encies. 

Irving  Saunders. 

Alfred  Centre,  N.  Y. 


Our  Prize  Offer  ! — Do  not  forget  it. 


Mr.  Moore's  Prize  for  Solar  Negatives 
Forget  it  not. 


The  Public  Ledger  Almanac  for  1874,  pub- 
lished by  George  W.  Childs,  Esq.,  publisher  of 
the  Public  Ledger,  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  and  given 
to  all  the  subscribers  to  the  latter,  is  not  only  a 
capital  almanac  but  contains  a  wonderful  amount 
of  statistical  matter,  municipal,  state,  and  na- 
tional, which  every  one  will  find  most  conve- 
nient and  valuable  to  have  at  hand. 


Bierstadt's  Views  of  Niagara,  the  Yosemite 
Valley,  &c,  are  considered  to  be  unexcelled, 
and  a  fine  catalogue  of  them  lies  before  us  from 
Mr.  Charles  Bierstadt,  Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y. 
Mr.  Bierstadt's  advertisement  will  be  found  in 
proper  place.  He  has  recently  returned  from  a 
tour  in  Egypt,  Palestine,  Ac,  with  a  stock  of 
splendid  negatives,  of  course.  We  wish  him 
great  success  with  them. 


Moulton's  Patent  Photographic  Washer 
strikes  us  as  one  of  the  most  useful  and  practical 
things  ever  offered  to  the  fraternity.  It  is  so 
light,  that  instead  of  having  to  carry  much  water 
up  several  flights  of  stairs  as  many  do,  to  wash 
their  prints,  you  can  carry  washer  and  prints 
down  stairs  to  the  water,  and  in  a  few  moments, 
it  is  claimed,  give  all  the  necessary  washing. 
The  prints  are  placed  on  a  cylindrical  network, 
which  is  made  to  revolve,  and  causes  a  stieam 
of  water  to  flow  constantly  over  them.  It  must 
very  thoroughly  do  the  work. 


Italian  Photography. — From  Mr.  Georges 
Sommer,  Naples,  we  have  received  a  number  of 
card  portraits  indicating  the  state  and  progress 
of  the  art  in  beautiful  Italy.  They  are  specimens 
of  the  best  Italian  photography,  and  we  take 
pleasure  in  announcing  that  we  hope  ere  long  to 
secure  from  Mr.  Sommer  an  illustration  for  this 
journal. 


Corrections   in  Mosaics  for  1874. — In  Mr. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGR  APHEE. 


63 


Hall's  formula  for  varnish  on  page  49,  read  two 
pounds  instead  of  one  of  common  orange  shellac. 
Also  in  Mr.  J.  C.  Browne's  article,  page  121,  last 
line,  instead  of  "none  are  made,''  read  ''have 
one  made," 


Removal. — Messrs.  P.  Smith  &  Co.,  Cincin- 
nati, who  have  conducted  the  "Old  Reliable" 
stock  house  at  No.  36  W.  Fifth  Street  since  1843, 
nearly  ever  since  the  birth  of  our  art,  have  just 
removed  to  new  quarters  at  No  121  W.  Fifth 
Street,  where  they  have  a  handsome  store  on  the 
ground  floor,  140  feet  deep,  and  fine  conveniences 
for  their  growing  trade.  We  wish  them  all  sorts 
of  prosperity,  for  they  deserve  it. 


The  awards  of  the  Anthony  prizes  are  to  be 
made  this  month — we  expect.  We  wonder  who 
have  had  success  in  the  matter? 


More  Honors. — Mr.  Elbert  Anderson  has  been 
honored  by  the  American  Institute  with  a  Medal 
of  Co-operation  "for  unretouched  negatives.'' 
We  congratulate  him. 

Mr.  H.  F.  Smith,  operator  for  Mr.  W.  H. 
Rhoads,  and  Mr.  H.  Krips,  operator  for  Dra- 
per &  Husted,  have  each  taken  a  medal  from  the 
Pennsylvania  Photographic  Association  for  the 
best  work.  Let  the  "operators"  shine.  We 
like  to  see  it,  and  we  admire  the  employers  who 
thus  aid  in  their  encouragement. 


Pictures  Received. — We  have  received  some 
very  pretty  stereographs  from  L.  E.  Walker, 
Warsaw,  N.  Y.  They  show  clean,  careful  chem- 
ical work,  while  the  subjects  are  well  chosen  and 
skilfully  managed.  Of  the  views,  numbers  907, 
914,  917,  920,  and  300  are  very  successful,  being 
views  of  falls,  cascades,  and  rapids  in  Enfield  and 
Buttermilk  Ravines.  "Some  Pleasing  Studies 
for  Our  Young  Folks,"  also,  are  good  specimens 
of  genre  composition.  "The  First  Shave," 
"Playing  Grandma, "  "Little  Jack  Horner," 
and  "Mush  and  Milk."  are  very  creditable  in 
this  direction.  Mr.  Walker  issues  a  neat  cata- 
logue of  quite  a  large  number  of  views  pub- 
lished by  him. 

Several  stereos  from  J.  C.  Potter,  Elyria, 
Ohio,  of  winter  scenery,  are  specimens  of  suc- 
cessful work  in  photographing  snow  scenes.  Mr. 
Potter  has  chosen  a  time  such  as  always  makes 
us  feel  a  desire  to  use  the  camera,  and  secure 
the  fleeting  beauties  of  the  scene  before  a  gust 
of  wind  or  ray  of  sunshine  should  destroy  it  all. 
They  illustrate  a  winter  morning  when  the  trees, 
fences,  and  every  exposed  object  is  heavily  cov- 
ered with  sleet.  In  these  views  many  of  the 
trees  have  become  so  loaded  that  the  branches 
have  been  broken  down,  while  others  are  bend- 


ing to  the  ground  under  the  great  weight  accu- 
mulated on  them. 

We  also  have  some  very  beautiful  specimens  of 
stereo  work  from  Mr.  J.  P.  Doremus,  Paterson, 
N.  J.  A  very  interesting  tiio  comprises  Views 
of  Passaic  Falls,  made  with  3£,  6,  and  10£  inch 
focus  lenses,  showing  the  effect  of  the  various 
foci.     The  winter  views  are  especially  fine. 

Specimens  of  portrait  work  have  also  been 
received  from  John  Ferras,  Markinch,  Fife, 
Eng.  ;  Well  G.  Singhi,  Binghamton,  N.  Y.  ;  J. 
C.  Wilson,  Cherokee,  Iowa;  H.  B.  Hillyer, 
Austin,  Texas;  Alexander  Gardner,  Washing- 
ton, D.  C.  ;  J.  M.  Emery,  Galva,  III.;  Irving 
Saunders,  Alfred  Centre,  N.  Y.  ;  and  W.  A. 
Manvilie,  Marshalltown,  Iowa;  all  indicating 
progress  in  their  work,  and  in  their  letters  ex- 
pressing a  determination  to  improve.  This  is 
the  spirit  we  like  to  see,  and  take  pleasure  in 
encouraging. 


What  our  Subscribers  Say. 

Elyria,  Ohio,  January  12th,  1874. 

Edward  L.  Wilson,  Esq.  :  Inclosed  you  will 
find  post-office  order  for  $5  for  the  good  old  Pho- 
tographer for  one  more  year.  It  is  hard  times  for 
me,  as  I  am  fitting  up  my  new  rooms,  and  I  find 
a  place  to  expend  more  money  than  I  can  get 
out  of  my  business,  and  yet  I  cannot  get  along 
without  the  Photographer,  and  you  cannot  afford 
to  send  out  such  a  valuable  and  indispensable  ex- 
ponent of  our  art  (you  see  I  consider  photog- 
raphy an  art,  and  why  not?)  without  compen- 
sation. How  rich  and  instructive  has  been  the 
Photographer  the  past  year,  and  I  look  for  an 
improvement  every  year,  and  am  in  no  way  dis- 
appointed. It  would  be  as  reasonable  for  a  first- 
class  (or  fourth-class  for  that  matter)  lawyer  to 
expect  to  practice  law  without  reading  up  the 
decisions  of  the  higher  courts,  as  for  a  first  or 
fourth-rate  photographer  to  expect  to  keep  up 
with  the  improvements  without  the  Philadelphia 
Photographer. 

I  shall  move  into  my  new  rooms  the  1st  of 
Majch,  and  I  flatter  myself  that  I  shall  appre- 
ciate them  after  operating  in  so  small  and  in- 
convenient a  room  for  nearly  one  year.  I  am 
putting  into  my  new  rooms  all  the  conveniences 
of  first-class  rooms,  and  I  am  quite  certain 
there  will  not  be  anything  very  much  superior 
in  the  State.  I  have  placed  my  light  so  that  I 
can  work  it  from  the  east,  south,  or  west,  as  well 
as  all  the  intermediate  points,  with  distances 
sufficient  for  any  kind  of  work.  Room  I  do  not 
lack  in  any  department.  Will  send  you  some 
samples  of  work  as  soon  as  I  occupy. 

I  have  not  done  much  at  viewing  since  I  burn- 
ed out,  as  I  lost  my  tent,  and  have  not  had  the 


61 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


time  to  get  up  another  since.  Will  send  you  a 
few  stereos  made  the  past  week,  representing  the 
effects  of  our  recent  sleet  storm,  which  has  done 
great  injury  to  the  shade  and  ornamental  trees  of 
our  village. 

Wishing  the  Photographer  a  successful  year, 
I  am  respectfully,  J.  C.  Potter. 


The  Philadelphia  Photographer,  for  January, 
1874.  Benerman  &  Wilson,  Philadelphia. 
Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. — This  is  in  one 
respect  a  trade  journal,  but  the  organ  of  a  trade, 
which,  from  its  connection  with  chemistry  and 
other  arts,  rises  to  the  dignity  of  a  science.  Any 
one  who  follows  its  table  of  contents  from  month 
to  month  will  be  astonished  at  the  rapidity  with 
which  improvements  are  being  introduced  and 
the  readiness  with  which  they  are  utilized.  The 
frontispiece  is  a  specimen  of  the  perfection  to 
which  photography  has  been  brought  in  Vienna. 
—  The  Age,  Philadelphia. 


Items  op  News. — Mr.  N.  A.  Robinson,  Hills- 
boro,  III.,  a  member  of  the  National  Photo- 
graphic Association,  died  September  17th.  He 
was  sick  some  nine  months. — The  National  Pho- 
tographers' Chemical  Company,  Mr.  Aug.  Jen- 
nings, 352  Pearl  Street,  New  York,  general  agent, 
has  been  formed  to  issue  licenses,  &c,  under  the 
Shaw  patent. — New  England  photographers  will 
be  glad  to  know  of  the  complete  recovery  of 
Mrs.  F.  S.  Russell,  of  Boston,  the  well-known 
solar  printer. — Mr.  Jas.  L.  Forbes,  late  of  Gur- 
ney's,  is  now  with  Mr.  MacGregor,  255  and  257 
Fulton  Street,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.— Mr.  Daniel 
Bendann  has  opened  new  galleries  of  photography 
at  No.  26  North  Charles  Street,  Baltimore.— 
Prices  for  printing  by  the  Woodbury  process  may 
be' had  of  Mr.  J.  Carbutt,  superintendent,  at  the 
new  works,  No.  624  North  Twenty-fourth  Street, 
Philadelphia. — Mr.  J.  Lee  Knight,  Topeka,  Kan- 
sas, has  received  twenty-nine  first  premiums  at 
State  Fairs  for  photographs  — Messrs.  Long  & 
Smith,  520  Maine  Street,  Quincy,  111.,  issue  a 
neat  little  circular  of  instructions  for  using 
Long's  bath-warmer,  which  they  will  send  Tfree 
to  all  applicants.  They  also  act  as  agents  for 
our  publications. 


Photographic  Mosaics.  Edited  by  Edward 
L.  Wilson.  Benerman  &  Wilson,  Philadelphia. 
— The  editor  of  this  little  work  seems  determined 
that  photography  shall  not  be  left  without  a  his- 
torian to  detail  its  rise  and  progress,  its  claims 
and  the  many  improvements  that  are  being  con- 
stantly introduced.  His  labors  in  the  Philadel- 
phia Photographer,  from  month  to  month,  are 
now  supplemented  by  these  Mosaics,  for  which 
he  tells  us  there  is  a  demand.     If  we  may  judge 


from  the  list  of  contributors,  he  has  already 
gathered  around  him  a  number  of  persons  who 
sympathize  with  him  in  his  enthusiasm  with 
reference  to  true  art.  Many  of  the  articles  are 
technical,  and,  therefore,  we  judge  of  great  in- 
terest to  students  as  well  as  to  practical  opera- 
tors.—  The  Age,  Philadelphia. 


The  January  number  of  the  Philadelphia 
Photographer  begins  the  eleventh  yearly  volume 
of  a  monthly  which  is  now  recognized  at  home 
and  abroad  as  one  of  the  best,  because  the  most 
practical  of  its  class.  Its  frontispiece,  this  time, 
is  a  cabinet  portrait  by  Fritz  Luckhardt,  Vienna, 
finely  executed,  but  very  indifferently  set  on  a 
black  and  gilt  mount,  which  kills  the  photo- 
graph. The  most  valuable  article  here  is  the 
first  of  "  Views  Abroad  and  Across,"  by  Edward 
L.  Wilson,  the  editor,  in  which,  with  the  assist- 
ance of  design  and  engraving,  he  relates  his  im- 
pressions of  what  he  saw  and  learned  in  a  recent 
visit  to  Europe — largely  among  the  photogra- 
phers, of  course.  Published  by  Benerman  &  Wil- 
son, Philadelphia. — Press,  Philadelphia. 


Mr.  A.  Lesage,  Dublin,  Ireland,  has  under- 
taken a  large  historical  composition  picture  of 
the  members  of  the  recent  "Home-rule  Confer- 
ence.'' Over  two  hundred  persons  will  be  repre- 
sented by  the  group,  which  will  be  copied  down 
and  prints  offered  for  sale.  No  doubt  this  bit  of 
enterprise  will  meet  with  a  large  reward. 


The  Fanciers'  Journal  and  Poultry  Ex- 
change is  the  title  of  a  new  weekly  magazine 
published  in  Philadelphia  by  Joseph  M.  Wade, 
No.  39  North  Ninth  Street,  at  $2.50  per  year. 
It  is  neatly  gotten  up,  and  must  be  a  success. 
The  January  number  contains  two  photo-litho- 
graphs, from  photographs  by  Messrs.  Schreiber  & 
Son.  Some  day  we  hope  to  see  it  illustrated  by 
means  of  photographs  from  life. 


Mr.  A.  0.  Burrill  and  others  will  find  the 
following  a  good  receipt  for  making  ferrotype 
varnish  :  White  gum  shellac  dissolved  in  alco- 
hol to  a  proper  consistency.  If  too  thick,  add 
alcohol.  Pound  the  gum  fine  in  a  piece  of  can- 
vas before  adding  the  alcohol.  A  dozen  drops  of 
ammonia  to  eight  ounces  of  varnish  improves  it. 


Loescher  &  Petsch's  Pictures. — Of  these 
pictures  Mr.  C.  D.  Mosher,  who  has  a  set,  says  : 
Chicago,  January  14t.h,  1874. 

' '  I  received  the  photographs  to-day  by  express. 
I  think  they  are  very  excellent,  and  indispensa- 
ble art  studies  for  the  photographer,  and  would 
most  cheerfully  recommend  them  to  my  brothers 
as  a  paying  investment,  and  an  attraction  of 
real  merit  to  their  gallery  of  art.'' 


ADVERTISHS*}  RATES  FOR  SPECIALTIES It  will  be  understood  that  matter  under 

this  head  is  n'ti  to  be  considered  as  always  having  editorial  sanction,  though  we  shall  endeavor  to  clear  it 
of  anything  tending  to  deceive  or  mislead.  Stoekdealers  will  find  this  a  beneficial  mode  of  advertising, 
and  sure  to  pay  largely.  Six  lines,  one  insertion,  $2.00,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words 
to  a  line — in  advance.  Operators  desiring  situations,  no  charge.  Matter  must  be  received  by  the  23rd 
to  secure  insertion.  Advertisers  will  please  not  ask  us  for  recommendations.  4HT  We  cannot  undertake 
to  mail  answers  to  parties  who  advertise.    Please  always  add  your  address  to  the  advertisement. 


For  Sale. — An  old  established,  well  paying, 
first-class  photograph  gallery,  centrally  located, 
with  newly  furnished  rooms,  and  splendid  large 
north  skylight.     Terms,  cash.     Satisfactory  rea-. 
sons  for  selling.     Address 

Mrs.  Emilie  Brecht, 
906  North  Sixth  Street,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 


Use  Waymouth's  Vignette 
Papers. 

Wanted. — A  first-rate  negative  retoucher,  who 
thoroughly  understands  the  art,  and  can  come 
well  recommended.     Apply  to 

Lon.  Blackburn,  Youngstown,  0. 


Photograph  Gallery  for  Sale  at  a  bargain. 
Only  one  in  town.  Best  light  in  southern  Michi- 
gan. Good  lenses  (Ross  and  H.  B.  &  H.)  Plenty 
of  water,  large  dark-room  ;  in  fact  the  gallery 
needs  but  to  be  seen  to  be  appreciated.  Will  sell 
contents  of  gallery  and  give  lease,  or,  if  preferred, 
will  dispose  of  the  building.      Address       J.H. 

Box  94,  Jonesville,  Hillsdale  Co.,  Mich. 


For  Sale. — One  of  the  most  complete  galle- 
ries, doing  a  business  of  four  to  five  hundred 
dollars  per  month,  located  in  a  town  of  10,000 
inhabitants,  in  Illinois.     For  particulars,  address 

"Artist," 
221  North  Tenth  Street,  Philada.,  Pa. 

Trapp  &  Munch  received 
the  Medal  of  Merit  for  their 
Albumen  Paper,  at  the  Vien- 
na Exhibition. 


For  Sale. — The  long  established  photograph 
gallery,  known  as  ''Shaw's,"  for  sale,  at  a  great 
bargain,  for  cask.  A  north  and  south  skylight 
combined,  suitable  for  all  sorts  of  weather  ;  also, 
all  modern  improvements.  Receipts  running, 
even  at  these  dull  times,  from  one  hundred  and 
fifty  to  two  hundred  dollars  per  week,  and  can 
be  brought  up  to  much  more  than  that  by  a 
smart,  energetic  man,  who  devotes  all  his  time  to 
the  business.  My  reason  for  selling  is,  that  I  am 
in  another  line  of  business  that  requires  all  my 
time.  None  but  cash  customers  need  apply. 
Apply  to  William  Shaw, 
137  Twenty-second  St.,  Chicago,  Ills. 


For  Sale.— The  Bushby  &  Hart  Gallery, 
Lynn,  Mass.  Operating-room  20  x45  ;  two  lights, 
east  and  west ;  reception-room  30  x  30  ;  south 
printing-room.  Fourteen  lenses,  largest,  mam- 
moth ;  card  negatives,  6|x8^,  two  on  a  plate; 
twelve  thousand  plates  registered,  besides  thous- 
ands of  cabinets,  4-4,  and  larger  negatives.  None 
preserved  except  those  ordered  from.  Receipts 
for  1873,  $10,500  ;  for  the  past  four  years,  $43,- 
500.  The  net  profits  for  the  poorest  year  since 
1867  would  more  than  pay  for  the  gallery.  Ap- 
paratus, furniture,  negatives,  stationary  fixtures, 
new  $650  parlor-grand  piano,  all  valued  at  $5500 
and  insured  for  $4000,  will  be  sold  for  $4000. 
Rent  $450.  Bushby  has  engaged  to  go  to  Europe 
in  the  spring  ;  Hart  has  real  estate  in  the  west 
demanding  his  attention. 


Robinson  Photo.  Trimmer. 
A  new  thing.    $3.50.   See  ad. 

Wanted. — A  complete  outdoor  stereoscopic 
outfit,  with  hand-wagon,  &c. 

Also,  for  sale,  cheap,  or  will  give  in  exchange 
for  the  above,  an  extra  4-4  C.  C.  Harrison  tube  ; 
a  half  size  Harrison  tube;  also,  a  good  10x12 
photo,  press.     For  particulars,  address 

0.  H.  Wildey, 
Box  43,  Skaneateles,  Onon.  Co.,  N.  Y. 


Wanted. — By  first  of  April,  1874,  an  operator 
and  poser,  must  be  capable  of  doing  first-class 
work;  to  one  that  will  suit,  steady  employment' 
and  good  salary  is  offered.  Must  come  well  rec- 
ommended. Address,  with  photograph  of  self, 
Brown  &  Higgins, 
Wheeling,  W.  Va. 


For  Sale. — A  paying  gallery  in  a  growing 
town,  on  the  Detroit  and  Bay  City  Railroad. 
Population  1500.  Good  country.  No  opposition 
within  twenty  miles  around.  Price  $350,  cash 
down,  with  instruments.  Come  immediately  as 
I  mean  business,  to  A.  L.  Oakley, 

Vassar,  Tuscola  Co.,  Mich. 


For  Sale. — One  of  the  most  prosperous  gal- 
leries in  New  York  State.  Doing  the  best  busi- 
ness and  the  best  work  in  the  city  where  located. 
Very  best  reason  given  for  selling.  A  bargain 
as  to  price  will  be  given.     Address 

"New  York," 
Office  Philadelphia  Photographer. 


ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS,  1873,  $4.50. 


"The  subject  of  washing  is  one  that  demands 
the  greatest  care  on  the  part  of  the  photographer, 
and  there  is  an  almost  positive  certainty  that 
unless  it  be  done  systematically  and  thoroughly, 
the  prints,  however  carefully  managed  in  other 
respects,  will  rapidly  fade. 

To  work  thoroughly  the  water  must  be  used 
abundantly,  and  must  be  continually  changed. 
If  prints  be  thrown  into  a  tank  and  a  stream  of 
running  water  be  made  to  flow  into  it  for  several 
hours,  a  few  prints  may  be  satisfactorily  washed, 
but  if  the  number  be  large  they  will  interfere 
with  each  other  and  the  washing  will  be  more  or 
less  imperfect." — Lea's  Manual,  page  295. 


The  Rapid  Photo-Washer, 
instead  of  soaking  the  prints, 
applies  the  water  in  the  form 
of  spray,  to  both  sides  of 
the  paper,  with  considerable 
force,  at  each  revolution,  or 
from  IOO  to  150  times  per 
minute,  thereby  washing 
them  thoroughly  in  a  very 
few  minutes,  with  but  little 
water.  Full  particulars  next 
month,  or  address  L.  V. 
Moulton,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis. 

Look  out  for  something 
new  next  month.  No  more 
soaking  of  prints  six  hours  ! 
No  more  faded  photographs ! 
Prints  are  washed  thoroughly 
in  a  few  minutes  by  the  Rapid 
Photo-Washer. 


Found  at  last!  Print  wash- 
ing revolutionized !  Perma- 
nent prints  made  and  time 
saved  by  the  Rapid  Photo- 
Washer.  Full  particulars 
next  month,  or  address  L.  V. 
Moulton,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis. 

For  Sale. — A  gallery  in  a.  growing  manufac- 
turing town,  with  large  country  trade  ;  the  ter- 
minus of  two  railroads  and  the  junction  of  four. 
I  am  getting  the  following  prices  for  work  : 
8x10,  $7;  4x4,  $5;  Imperial  cards,  $8  per 
dozen;  Victoria,  $6;  C.  D.  V.,  $4;  and  larger 
work  in  the  same  proportion.  No  competition 
in  photographs.  The  gallery  is  well  stocked 
with  instruments,  frames,  albums,  &c.  North 
top  and  side  light.  Tenement  on  same  floor. 
Rent  reasonable,  and  duplicate  rrders  from  old 
negatives  more  than  pay  rent  of  the  whole. 
Will  be  sold  at  a  fair  valuation.  For  further 
particulars,  address  •'A.." 

Care  of  Messrs.  Benerman  &  Wilson. 


ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS  1873,  $4.50. 


The  Technologist,  or  Industrial  Monthly, 
for  1874. — The  January  number  of  this  standard 
journal,  issued  by  the  Industrial  Publication 
Company,  176  Broadway,  New  York,  has  reached 
us,  and,  as  usual,  it  is  filled  with  valuable  and 
interesting  information.  The  table  of  contents 
gives  a  list  of  nearly  fifty  important  articles,  not 
including  mere  current  items  of  information,  of 
which  there  are  seven  or  eight  columns.  Of  these 
articles  nineteen  are  illustrated,  the  illustrations 
including  two  full-page  engravings,  printed  in 
colors.  In  looking  over  its  pages,  one  is  struck 
with  the  clearness  and  simplicity  which  character- 
ize the  descriptions  of  new  machines  and  pro- 
cesses ;  the  earnestness  and  vigor  of  the  edi- 
torials, and  the  spiciness  of  the  news  items. 
Those  of  our  readers  who  are  interested  in  in- 
dustrial progress,  ought  by  all  means  to  examine 
this  periodical,  which  may  be  obtained  of  any 
news  agent,  or  direct  from  the  publishers.  It  is 
the  cheapest  industrial  journal  now  before  the 
public,  the  subscription  rate  being  only  $1.50 
per  year,  or  fifteen  cents  per  single  number,  for 
a  large,  thirty-eight  page  magazine. 


Wilson's  Baltimore  Stock 
Depot,  7  North  Charles  St. 
Try  an  order. 

For  Sale. — Frank  Jewell's  gallery,  in  Scran- 
ton,  Pa.  This  establishment  has  been  in  suc- 
cessful operation  for  a  little  over  three  years, 
and  has  an  extended  and  first-class  reputation  ; 
is  handsomely  and  conveniently  fitted  up,  and 
arranged  in  the  best  manner  for  doing  a  success- 
ful business.  Population  of  the  town,  45,000, 
and  no  opposition.  There  are  now  9000  nega- 
tives on  hand,  duplicate  orders  from  which 
more  than  pay  rent.  Also,  stock  enough  to  run 
the  place  five  or  six  months.  Sold  only  to 
gratify  the  ambition  of  the  present  proprietor 
to  get  to  a  large  city.  Address  for  particulars, 
Frank  Jewell, 
Scranton,  Pa. 

Use  Waymouth's  Vignette 
Papers. 

For  Sale. — One  of  the  finest  galleries  in  the 
State  of  Indiana,  furnished  with  all  the  latest 
improvements  in  instruments,  accessories,  &c. 
Rooms  for  residence  attached.  This  gallery  is 
situated  in  a  city  of  over  12,000  inhabitants, 
and  doing  a  splendid  business.  For  particulars, 
apply  to  P.  Smith  &  Co., 

No.  121   West  Fifth  Street.  Cincinnati,  Ohio. 


For  Sale. — A  photographic  gallery  in  one  of 
the  most  desirable  business  localities  in  the  city 
of   Philadelphia.     For  further    particulars,   ad- 
dress "Art," 
Office  Philadelphia  Photographer. 


For  Sale  at  a  Bargain. — $1000  cash  will 
buy  my  gallery  in  Athens,  Ga.  It  is  well  equip- 
ped for  first-class  work,  and  enjoys  the  first-class 
patronage  of  the  city  and  surrounding  country. 
No  first-class  opposition.  The  city  has  a  popu- 
lation of  about  5000  inhabitants.  The  Univer- 
sity of  Georgia  is  situated  there,  with  an  average 
attendance  of  about  300  students  ;  also,  a  female 
college  and  other  high  schools,  all  in  a  flourish- 
ing condition.  It  is  the  best  opening  for  an  en- 
terprising man  in  the  South.  The  gallery  has 
been  established  eight  years,  and  is  located  on 
the  best  street,  and  in  the  center  of  business, 
and  opposite  the  University.  The  climate  of 
Athens  is  unsurpassed,  and  it  is  considered  the 
healthiest  city  in  the  State.  My  reason  for  sell- 
ing is  that  my  time  is  wholly  taken  up  with  my 
business  in  Atlanta. 

I  will  sell  for  $1000  cash  ;  or,  if  the  party 
prefers,  $600  cash,  balance  on  time  to  suit,  with 
security  and  ten  per  cent,  interest.  Parties 
meaning  business  will  please  address 

C.  W.  Motes,  Photographer, 

Atlanta,  Ga. 

For  Sale. — First-class  photograph  gallery. 
Best  location,  best  light  in  town,  handsome 
rooms,  well  furnished,  established  three  years. 
Prices,  $5  per  dozen  cards.  $3  for  4-4.  Without 
instruments,  $400.     For  particulars  address 

Photographer,  A.  C, 

Kansas  City,  Mo. 


Jacoby  has  a  clear  patent  on  his  printing- 
frame,  and  it  does  not  infringe  on  the  Mezzotint 
patent.  Parties  reporting  the  same  to  injure  the 
sale  of  his  frame  had  better  look  out.  Any  one 
buying  them,  can  use  them  without  fear  of  any 
one. 


L.  G.  Bigelow  offers  his  services  as  an  opera- 
tor, from  the  present  time  until  July  1st,  1874, 
at  a  fair  remuneration.  He  guarantees  first-class 
negatives.  Address  at  56  Henry  Street,  Detroit, 
Michigan. 


Office  of  Wilson,  Hoon  &  Co., 

Dealers  in  Photographic  Requisites,  Frames, 

Stereoscopes,  and  Views, 

No.    822    Arch    Street, 

Philadelphia,  September  20, 1873. 
We  have  pleasure  of  announcing  that  we  have 
in  stock  a  small  lot  of  Albumen  Paper  of  the  cele- 
brated manufacture  of  the  Albion  Albumenizing 
Co.,  of  London,  England. 

Following  are  colors,  quality,  and  price  : 

White  Saxe per  ream,  $34  00 

Blue         "     "  34  00 

Pink         "     "  34  00 

White  Rives, "  33  00 

Blue         "     "  33  00 

Pink         "_    "  33  00 

We  have  had  it  well  tried  and  can  advise  our 
customers  to  purchase. 

Wanted. — Agents  to  travel  through  the  seve- 
ral states.  None  need  apply  except  practical 
photographers,  and  those  acquainted  with  the 
use  of  the  solar  camera.     Apply  to 

H.  L.  Emmons,  Baltimore,  Md. 


f  AYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 

"I  am  using  and  like  them  very  much 
thus  far."— A.  MARSHALL,  Boston. 

"A  sensible  improvement." — GEO.  S. 
COOK,  Charleston,  S.  C. 


VOIGTLAMR  &  SON  LENSES. 

Ryder's  Art  Gallery,  239  Superior  St., 
Cleveland,  Ohio,  Dec.  18,  1872. 

Benj.  French  &  Co. 

Dear  Sirs: — Twenty-four  years  ago  I 
bought  and  commenced  using  my  first 
Voigtlander  Lens.  It  was  a  good  one. 
Since  then  I  have  owned  and  used  a 
good  many  of  the  same  brand,  of  various 
sizes.     They  were  all  and  always  good. 

Some  of  the  larger  sizes  that  I  have 
recently  bought  seem  to  me  better  than 
any  I  have  ever  had  or  seen  before. 
Yours,  truly, 

J.  F.  RYDER. 

ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS,  1873,  $4.50. 


Stereoscopic  Negatives  Wanted. — Parties 
having  for  sale  new,  unused,  stereo,  negatives  of 
attractive  American  scenery,  will  oblige  us  by 
sending  a  list  of  them  and  the  prices. 

Benerman  &  Wilson,  Phila. 

SITUATIONS    WANTED. 

(No  charge  for  advertisements  tinder  this  head: 

limited  to  four  lines.     Inserted  once  only, 

unless  by  request.) 

4®=  We  cannot  have  letters  directed  to  our  care, 
unless  the  parties  send  for  them,  and  send  stamps  to 
pay  postage.  We  cannot  undertake  to  mail  them; 
please  do  not  request  it. 

By  one  who  retouches.  Understands  print- 
ing, toning,  and  the  general  business  of  a  pho- 
tograph gallery.  Address  "Artist,"  221  North 
Tenth  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

By  a  respectable  young  man,  in  some  house 
where  he  will  have  a  chance  to  learn  the  busi- 
ness. Has  good  character  and  references.  Ad- 
dress A.  Banks,  1169  South  Eleventh  Street, 
Philadelphia,  Pa. 

By  a  gentleman  artist,  late  of  Sarony,  with 
fourteen  years'  experience  in  photography,  ac- 
quired in  the  first  houses  of  Paris,  London,  and 
New  York.  Address  Ch.  Hasselman,  624  Capp 
street,  between  Twenty-first  and  Twenty-second 
streets,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 

As  a  good  negative  retoucher  and  finishing 
artist.  Address  Miss  E.  Lawrence,  55  Ross 
Street,  Brooklyn,  E.  D.,  Long  Island,  N.  Y. 


As  operator.  Address,  stating  price  paid  per 
week,  Box  103,  Union  City,  Pa. 

By  a  young  man  as  printer  and  toner  or 
operator's  assistant.  Has  had  six  years'  experi- 
ence in  first-class  galleries.  Address  Ed.  E. 
Bliss,  147  Adams  Avenue,  Detroit.  Mich. 

By  a  lady  as  retoucher.  Can  also  tint,  spot 
out,  and  print.  Address  E.  Gr.,  2057  Third 
Avenue,  New  York. 

By  an  operator  or  printer  of  five  years'  expe- 
rience. Will  either  rent  or  take  charge  of  room. 
West  preferred.  Address  Operator,  Post  Office 
Drawer  67,  Janesville,  Wis. 

As  assistant  operator  or  printer  in  some  good 
gallery  ;  or  would  take  a  small  gallery  for  a 
share  or  a  salary.  Please  address  M.  D.  Board- 
man,  Plymouth,  Richland  Co.,  Ohio. 

By  a  young  man.  Seven  years'  practice  at 
printing.  Best  of  reference.  Box  186,  Wil- 
mington, N.  C. 

As  retoucher,  by  a  young  man  of  good  habits, 
with  an  experience  of  several  years.  Refer- 
ences :  J.  A.  Scholten,  A.  J.  Fox,  St.  Louis. 
Address  C.  A.  Harcep,  care  of  Scholten's  Gal- 
lery, St.  Louis,  Mo. 

To  attend  a  photograph  gallery  in  Philadel- 
phia or  New  York.  Can  retouch  negatives  first 
class.  Please  state  terms  in  answering.  Miss 
M.  T.,  care  Mr.  L.  Dubernet,  15  Amity  Street, 
New  York  City. 

By  a  first-class  operator  as  positionist  or  dark 
room  man.  Can  give  the  best  of  reference.  Ad- 
dress P.  0.  Box  71,  Chicago,  111. 

By  an  A  No.  1  operator,  at  present  engaged 
in  one  of  the  leading  galleries  in  New  York. 
Salary,  $35  to  $45  per  week.  Or  would  take 
partnership  interest  in  gallery  in  lieu  of  his 
services.  Address  Felix  Meritus,  care  "Wal- 
ter," Pianos,  338  East  Fourteenth  Street,  New 
York  City. 

As  a  general  operator  or  printer.  Single 
man,  of  steady  moral  habits.  Can  retouch. 
Address  John  Ferren,  Rockville,  Park  Co.,  Ind. 

By  a  first-class  operator.  A  No.  1  negatives 
guaranteed.  Address  Artist,  care  Otto  Miehle, 
467  Division  Street,  Chicago,  111. 

As  retoucher,  by  a  lady  who  has  spent  several 
years  as  a  student  in  art  sohools.  Address  A. 
E.  S.,  Elmira,  N.  Y. 

The  German  Photographer's  Society,  of  New 
York,  have  established  at  Chas.  Cooper  &  Co.'s, 
150  Chatham  Street,  New  York,  a  mutual  labor 
exchange  office.  Employers  in  need  of  help,  and 
employees  in  want  of  situations,  will  please  send 
their  names,  directions,  and  full  particulars  to 
the  place  above,  where  each  case  will  be  prompt- 
ly attended  to,  free  of  charge. 

Edwabd  Boettcher, 

Cor.  Secretary. 


MSS^ 


By  a  young  man  of  over  two  years'  experi- 
ence, as  operator  or  general  assistant  in  a 
strictly  first-class  gallery.  Address  B.  S.  Wil- 
liams, Tunkhannock,  AVyoming  Co.,  Pa. 

By  a  young  man  of  good  habits,  in  a  good 
gallery,  as  assistant.  Has  had  a  year's  expe- 
rience in  the  photographic  art.  Address  Photo, 
Fulton,  Whiteside  Co.,  111. 

SOCIETY  CALENDAR. 

(Published  for  the  convenience  of  Visiting  Pho- 
tographers and  those  desiring  to  correspond.) 

4®*  This  Calendar  is  published  free  to  the  Socie- 
ties, and  we  shall  feel  obliged  for  notice  of  any  changes 
in  time  of  meeting  or  in  the  officers,  also  to  add  any 
we  have  overlooked. 

Boston  Photographic  Association. — At  J.  W. 
Black's  studio,  the  first  Friday  of  each  month. 
J.  W.  Black,  Presideut;  J.  H.  Hallenbeck, 
Secretary,  Boston. 

Photographic  Section  of  the  American  Insti- 
tute, New  York. — At  the  Institute  rooms,  the 
first  Tuesday  of  each  mouth.  H.  J.  Newton, 
President ;  Oscar  G.  Mason,  Secretary,  Bellevue 
Hospital. 

German  Photographic  Society,  New  York. — 
At  Nos.  64  and  66  East  Fourth  Street,  New 
York,  every  Thursday  evening.  W.  Kurtz,  Presi- 
dent ;  Edward  Boettcher,  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, 79  Newark  Avenue,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 

Brooklyn  Photographic  Art  Association, 
Brooklyn.  N.  Y. — Second  Monday  in  each 
month.  Rev.  Dr.  C.  H.  Hall,  President  ;  Chas. 
E.  Bolles,  Cor.  Secretary,  Brooklyn. 

Maryland  Photographic  Association,  Balti- 
more.— At  rooms  of  C.  A.  Wilson,  7  North 
Charles  Street,  first  Thursday  in  each  month. 
N.  H.  Busey,  President ;  G.  0.  Brown,  Secretary, 
Baltimore,  Md. 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia. — At  No. 
520  Walnut  Street,  third  floor,  first  Wednesday 
of  each  month.  J.  C.  Browne,  President;  E. 
Wallace,  Jr.,  Secretary,  1130  Spruce  Street. 

Pennsylvatiia  Photographic  Association,  Phil- 
adelphia.— At  the  galleries  of  the  members.  H- 
H.  Phillips,  President ;  R.  J.  Chute,  Secretary, 
Office  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

Photographic  Association  of  the  District  of 
Columbia,  Washington,  D.  C. — E.  J.  Pullman, 
President ;  C.  M.  Bell,  Secretary,  459  Pennsyl- 
vaniaAve  , Washington.   First  Tuesday, monthly. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association. — At  rooms 
of  C.  W.  Stevens,  158  State  Street,  first  Wednes- 
day evening  of  each  month.  G.  A.  Douglas, 
President ;  0.  F.  Weaver,  Secretary,  158  State 
Street. 

Indiana  Photographic  Association. — At  Indi- 
anapolis, first  Wednesday  monthly.  J.  Perry 
Elliott,  President;  D.  0.  Adams,  Secretary,  In- 
dianapolis. 

Photographic  Association  of  Western  Illinois. — 
At  Galesburg,  first  Wednesday  of  October,  Janu- 
ary, April,  and  July.  S.  T.  Bryan,  President; 
J.  F.  Barker,  Secretary,  Galesburg. 

Chicago  Photographic  Institute,  Chicago. — 
1st  Monday,  monthly,  at  Chicago  Art  Institute. 
A.  Hesler,  President  ;  L.  M.  Me'lander,  Secre- 
tary, Chicago. 

Buffalo  Photographic  Association. — At  Buffa- 
lo, the  first  Wednesday  evening  of  each  month. 
J.  Samo,  President;  Jennie  M.  Crockett,  Sec'y. 


ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS,  1873,  $4.50. 


90Tt 


TO  PHOTOGEAPHERS ! 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Beg  Photographers  to  remember  that  their 

BUSINESS  OFFICE, 

DELIVERY  DEPARTMENT, 

And  EDITORIAL  ROOMS, 

Are  now  all  concentrated  in  Sherman's  Building, 
S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

fdr5  No  other  Offices  in  the  City. 


LIESEGANG'S  ALBUMEN  PAPER 

Is  used  and  recommended  by  the  London  Stereoscopic  Company  ;  Messrs.  Alessandri  Fratelli, 
of  Rome  ;  Le  Lieure,  of  Rome  ;  A.  Sorgato,  of  Venice  ;  Fr.  Bruckmann,  of  Munich ;  C.  Reut- 
linger,  of  Paris ;  C.  Bergamasio,  of  Petersburg ;  Abdullah,  of  Constantinople ;  and  many 
other  first  class  photographers  throughout  the  World. 

IT  IS  THE  BEST  PAPER  IN  THE  MARKET. 

Sample  sheets,  and  English,  French,  and  German  Price  List  to  be  had  free  on  application 
from  the  Manufacturer.  . 


DUSSELDORF    ON    THE    RHBNE,    GERMANY, 

(FORMERLY  AT  ELBERFELD). 

For  Sale  by  SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  New  York. 


INITTO  p  PiTOERiPiO  II  TIE  COUHTRY. 

PHOTOGRAPHERS*  EXCHANGE, 

CHICAGO,  ILLINOIS. 

ESTABLISHED  BY  A  PRACTICAL  PHOTOGRAPHER. 

As  the  name  implies  this  is  a  medium  to  facilitate  intercourse  amongst  Photograpfcers,  and  through 
which  they  can  buy,  sell,  or  exchange,  anything  and  everything  of  value  in  the  line  of  photographic 
apparatus. 

The  benefit  derived  from  an  institution  of  this  kind  will  be  appreciated  by  every  intelligent  and 
enterprising  photographer. 

It  is  a  well  known  fact  that  every  gallery  has  more  or  less  of  dead  stock  on  hand  ;  stock  possessing 
value,  but  still  useless  to  the  owner. 

Heretofore  no  means  has  existed  to  dispose  of  these  goods  satisfactorily,  and  consequently  they 
have  been  suffered  to  lie  around  and  to  be  kicked  about  until  rendered  worthless. 

This  can  be  obviated  in  the  future,  as  you  are  now  enabled  to  dispose  of  your  surplus  stock,  and 
replace  it  with  something  you  need. 

The  great  advantage  you  gain  by  selling  through  us  is  that  your  goods  will  be  continually  advertised 
in  the  different  Photographic  publications,  and  in  our  Monthly  Catalogue  until  disposed  of. 

Now  is  the  time  to  send  in  your  goods,  as  we  have  applications  on  our  books  for  all  kinds  of  im- 
plements, such  as  Cameras,  Tubes,  Stands,  Baths,  Dishes,  &c,  &c.  Every  commission  entrusted  to  us 
will  be  carefully  attended  to. 

For  the  transaction  of  all  business  we  have  adopted  the  following 

RULES  AND  REGULATIONS. 

1st. — Photographic  Apparatus  of  every  description  will  be  received  and  sold  or  exchanged. 
2nd. — When  goods  are  disposed  of  the  proceeds  will  be  immediately  remitted  to  the  consignee,  deduct- 
ing our  commission. 
3d. — On  all  sales  under  Fifty  Dollars,  our  commission  will  be  20  per  cent,  above  Fifty,  15  per  cent. 
Special  rates  to  those  who  wish  to  dispose  of  entire  outfits. 
4th. — Freight  and  Expressage  must  be  paid  for  by  the  consignee. 
5th. — Every  consignment  should   be  accompanied   with   the  lowest  cash  price,   and   also   a  letter  of 

instruction  which  will  be  our  guide  in  disposing  of  the  goods. 
6th. — A  catalogue  of  goods  on  hand  will  be  published  monthly,  and  sent  free  to  any  address. 

Circulars  and  further  information  sent  on  application. 
All  goods  and  communications  should  be  addressed  to 

PHOTOGRAPHERS'  EXCHANGE, 

No.  1Jj,9  Chicago  Avenue, 

CHICAGO. 

L.  W.  FELT,  Proprietor. 


ENTREKIN'S 


OSCILLATING 


FOR  BURNISHING  PHOTOGRAPHS, 

GIVING  A  BEAUTIFUL  FINISH  AND  GLOSS  FAE  SUPEEIOE  TO  ANYTHING 
YET  INVENTED  FOE  THAT  PUEPOSE. 


W.  G.  ENTREKIN,  Patentee, 

Nos    4382  and  4384  MAIN  ST.,  MANAYUNK,  PA 

Q^*  The  Enameler  is  sold  by  all  stockdealers.  See  outside  of  cover. 


mm  ROTIRT  BOMBIEI 


Gives  an    Unequalled  Finish  to 
Photographic  Prints. 

Selling  Price  List  :  Card  size,  4-inch  roller,  $20  ;  Cabinet  size,  6-inch  roller,  $30  ;  Extra  Cabi- 
net size,  9-inch  roller,  $40,  14-inch  roller,  $50,  and  18-inch  roller,  $80. 

On  receipt  of  draft  or  postal  order  for  the  amount  of  the  purchase,  and  not  otherwise  (thereby 
saving  us  return  express  charges),  we  will  allow  a  discount  of  five  per  cent,  from  the  price  list,  and 
ship  to  the  party  ordering  by  return  express.  Each  machine,  before  shipped,  will  pass  the  critical 
inspection  of  Mr.  E.  R.  Weston,  the  inventor,  thereby  assuring  a  perfect  instrument  in  all  cases.  All 
necessary  materials,  with  full  directions  for  using  same,  will  accompany  each  press. 

WESTON'S  BURNISHER  PATENT.— Our  attention  having  been  called  to  the  fact  that  certain 
parties  are  attempting  to  introduce  burnishing  machines,  clearly  infringing  on  the  Weston  patent,  we 
hereby  caution  all  parties  against  using  or  selling  such  machines,  by  whatever  name  they  may  be  called, 
as  we  shall  prosecute  all  concerned  in  any  way  with  such  infringements. 

OPINION  ON  THE  WESTON  PATENT.— For  the  benefit  of  those  interested  we  publish  the  following : 

Bangor,  Me.,  Nov.  17th,  1873. 

Hon.  J.  P.  Bass. — Sir: — The  question  submitted  to  me.  as  to  whether  the  stoppage  of  one  roll  of 
the  Excelsior  Roll  Press,  and  its  use  in  polishing  photographs,  either  with  or  without  heat,  would  in- 
fringe the  Weston  reissued  patent  of  February,  1873,  for  a  burnisher  for  photographs,  &c,  has  received 
my  attention.  Basing  my  opinion  on  the  specification  and  claims  of  said  reissue,  which  is  prima 
facte  valid,  I  do  not  hesitate  to  pronounce  said  alteration  and  use  an  infringement  of  each,  and,  if  heat 
is  used,  all  the  claims. 

Stopping  one  roll  of  said  press  and  feeding  the  card  over  it  by  revolving  the  other,  polishing  it  in  its 
passage,  is  covered  by  the  first  claim  of  the  reissue.  It  produces  a  "  burnishing  machine  by  which  a  sur- 
face is  given  to  the  article  to  be  polished,  by  feeding  it  under  pressure  over  the  surface  of  a  stationary 
burnisher,"  and  such  machine  is  what  Weston  claims.  Stopping  the  roll  converts  it  into  a  "stationary 
burnisher'' — as  far  as  its  operation  on  the  picture  is  concerned — its  shape  being  a  matter  of  no  conse- 
quence, and  the  combination  of  this  stopped-roll  with  the  revolving  one  is  substantially  the  combina- 
tion of  the  feed-roll  and  stationary  burnisher  set  forth  in  the  second  claim  of  the  reissue.  Heating  the 
stationary  roll  introduces  into  the  combination  the  elements  which  Weston's  third  claim  is  based  upon. 
I  consider  the  device  as  simply  a  colorable  variation  of  Weston's  machine,  performing  substantially 
the  same  work  in  substantially  the  same  way,  and  should  advise  the  prosecution  of  infringing  parties, 
having  confidence  in  the  validity  of  the  patent,  and  believing  that  it  will  be  sustained  by  the  courts. 

Very  respectfully,  William  Franklin  Seavey, 

Counsellor  at  Law  and  in  Patent  Cases. 
All  photographers  are  cautioned  to  use  no  machines  infringing  the  principle  of  the  "Weston  Bur- 
nisher," to  which  letters  patent  have  been  granted  in  the  United  States  and  Canadas,  and  also  for 
England,  Prussia,  Austria,  France,  and  Belgium. 

OCip"  Mr.  Wm.  Bollard,  of  Brcckville,  Ontario,  is  our  agent  for  Ontario  and  Quebec  ;  also  has 
the  right  to  sell  in  all  the  Provinces. 

All  orders  and  communications  addressed  to  the  D       DftQQ     X,     Pn         Ranrinr       Ma 

subscribers  will  receive  prompt  attention.  '•     r.     DftOO     «»     UUij     DdlllJUl  j     ITIC 


T  ZEE  IE 

NATIONAL  PHOTOGRAPHERS' 
CHEMICAL  COMPANY, 

ORGANIZED     IN     THE    CITY     OF     NEW     YORK,    JANUARY     6,    1874. 

WM.  S.  PENDLETON,  President.  JOSEPH  N.  MADDOX,  Secretary. 

Trustees  : 
Wm.  S.  Pendleton,  Augustus  Jennings,  Chas.  H.  Williamson,  Chas.  K.  Bill,  J.  N.  Maddox. 

AUGUSTUS  JENNINGS,  Appointed  Superintendent  and  General  Agent. 

OFFICE,  352    PEARL   STREET,  NEW  YORK. 

The  purposes  for  which  said  corporation  is  formed  are  the  following,  viz  :  The  purchase  of  Shaw's 
Patent  Process  for  recovering  silver  and  gold  from  spent  photographic  solutions  and  washings,  refining 
of  gold  and  silver,  and  to  transact  business  generally  as  manufacturing  chemists,  to  buy  and  sell,  and 
deal  in  goods  necessary  and  convenient  for  the  prosecution  of  said  business. 


TO    PHOTOGRAPHERS: 

The  National  Photographers'  Chemical  Company,  having  secured  for  a  limited  time  the  privi- 
lege of  purchasing  and  the  right  to  issue  licenses  for  the  use  of  Shaw's  Patent  Process  for  recovering 
silver  and  gold  from  spent  photographic  solutions  and  washings,  would  now  call  the  attention  of  every 
photographer  to  the  exceedingly  favorable  terms  which  we  have  secured  from  Mr.  Shaw,  and  would 
invite  your  cooperation  and  assistance  in  securing  the  same  permanently  within  the  specified  time.  It 
is  admitted  by  every  one  who  has  investigated  the  subject  that  about  one-half  of  all  the  silver  used 
in  making  photographic  prints  ultimately  goes  into  the  hyposulphite  fixing  solutions,  and  that  three- 
fourths  of  all  the  silver  used  in  making  negatives  and  ferrotypes  is  to  be  found  in  the  hypo  and  cyanide 
solutions  used  in  fixing  such  negatives  and  ferrotypes,  and  that  there  is  no  other  known  method  by 
which  the  silver  can  be  so  surely  and  economically  recovered  from  these  fixing  solutions  as  it  can  be 
by  precipitation  with  sulphuret  of  potassium  ;  and,  as  this  method  of  recovering  it  is  claimed  by  Mr. 
Shaw,  an  interest  in  his  patent  is  greatly  to  the  advantage  of  every  photographer. 

You  are  now  solicited  to  subscribe  to  the  stock  of  said  Company,  and  secure  the  use  of  this  patent, 
together  with  the  right  and  privilege  of  saving  all  of  your  waste  by  its  use,  and  having  it  reduced  at 
ten  per  cent,  of  the  amount  recovered.  No  photographer  can  ask  for  terms  more  reasonable,  and  those 
who  neglect  to  improve  this  opportunity  will  have  no  one  but  themselves  to  blame  if  at  some  time 
hereafter  they  are  compelled  to  accept  on  less  favorable  terms. 


Notice. — The  undersigned  having  sold  his  Patent  Process  for  Recovering  Silver  and  Gold  from  spent 
Photographic  Solutions  and  Washings  to  the  "  National  Photographers'  Chemical  Company,"  of  New 
York  City,  would  inform  photographers  that  they  now  have  the  opportunity  of  securing  to  themselves 
the  exclusive  control  of  said  Patent.  The  entire  amount  of  stock  is  now  offered  to  photographers, 
and  will  be  held  subject  to  their  subscription  until  the  first  of  August  next.  After  that  date  I  reserve 
to  myself  the  right  to  take  the  balance  of  said  stock  not  then  subscribed  for. 

I  have  made  arrangements  with  said  ''National  Photographers'  Chemical  Company"  to  reoeive  at 
par  in  payment  for  subscription  to  their  stock  any  and  all  stock  of  the  Shaw  &  Wilcox  Co.,  which  may 
be  held  and  presented  for  that  purpose  by  photographers  who  have  heretofore  subscribed  and  paid  for 
said  stock,  the  same  to  be  presented  for  exchange  prior  to  the  first  day  of  August  next.  I  would  also 
state  that  I  am  authorized  by  said  Shaw  &  Wilcox  Company  to  pay  all  legal,  equitable  and  just  claims 
held  by  any  one  against  said  Company,  provided  that  parties  holding  such  claims  will  allow  as  an  offset 
such  legal,  equitable  and  just  claims  as  said  Company  may  have  against  them. 

Very  respectfully, 
J.  SHAW,  Agent  for  the  Skaw  $-  Wilcox  Company, 

Bridgeport,  Conn.,  January  13, 1874. 


AUGUSTUS  JENNINGS,  General  Agent, 

On  Behalf  of  the  National  Photographers'  Chemical  Company, 

J¥o.  352  Pearl  Street,  New  York  City. 


1843  'THE  OLD  RELIABLE.''         1874 


P.  SMITH  &  CO., 


DEALERS  IN 


HOTOGRAPHIC   STOCK 


Beg  leave  to  announce  that  they  have 

¥S  IP  ISHf  O  ^  W*  HTB 

-^^-^R<'   ^JV^  .^^.Y^^.  ^w^k         ^       7W**^  ^^^r 

From  their  old  quarters  at 

No.  36  West  Fifth  Street,  Cincinnati,  0., 

Which  they  have  occupied  since  1843,  to  the 

NEW  AND  SPACIOUS  STORE, 

121  WEST  FIFTH  STREET, 

Where  they  will  be  pleased  to  welcome  their 

PHOTOGEAPHIC  FRIENDS. 


PRICE  50  CENTS,  PER  POST. 


THE 


Year- Book  of  Photography 

AND  ^  It/ 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  NEWS  ALMANAC, 


Edited  by  G.  WHARTON   SIMPSON",  M.A.,  F.S.A., 

We  feel  much  pleasure  in  announcing  that  this  annual  contains  nearly  one  hundred  original  articles 
contributed  by  the  most  distinguished  gentleman  connected  with  the  photographic  art,  besides  a  care- 
ful resume  of  all  the  novelties  and  improvements  in  photography  during  the  year. 

THE   SIZE   IS   AGAIN    INCREASED. 

A  Charming  Figure  Study  from  a  Negative  by  Fritz  Ltjckhardt,  printed  by  the  Woodbury- 
type  P?,ocess,  appears  as  Frontispiece.  . 

FOE  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALEES. 

BEKERMAN  &  WILSON,  ph^Sh.i0P™,re' 

Marion  & Co.s  Specialties. 


ALBUMENIZED  PAPERS, 

Used  by  the  best  English  and  Colonial  photographers  ;  Wilson,  of  Aberdeen  ;  Vandyke 
&  Brown,  Liverpool;  Notrnan,  Montreal;  Bourne  &  Shepherd,  India;  and  hundreds  of 
others. 

MOUNTS 

For  Cartes-de-Visite,  Cabinet,  and  larger  sizes,  of  the  very  best  style  and  quality,  as  made 
for  the  leading  English  and  Colonial  photographers.  We  will  post  samples  free  to  any 
photographer  on  receipt  of  application. 

GILT  AND  SILVER  ORMOLU  METAL  FRAMES, 

For  Miniatures,  Cartes-de-Visite,  and  Cabinets. 

PHOTOGRAPHS. 

The  largest  and  best  selected  stock  in  Great  Britain.  Upwards  of  1000  copies  of 
Modern  Paintings,  artistically  colored  in  water  colors ;  English  and  Continental  Photogra- 
phic Views;  the  principal  Picture  Galleries;  Portraits  of  Eminent  Personages;  over  300,- 
000  in  stock. 

MARION  &  CO.,  22  &  23  Soho  Square,  LONDON,  ENGLAND. 


DR.  VOGEL'S 

PHOTOCRAPHER'S 

Pocket  Reference-Book 

AND 

DICTIONARY: 

An  Alphabetically  arranged  collection  of  practically  important  hints  on  the  construction 
of  the  Gallery  ;  selection  and  trial  of  lenses  and  chemicals  ;  approved  formulae  for  the  differ- 
ent photographic  processes  ;  tables  of  weights  and  measures  ;  rules  for  avoiding  failure,  etc., 
etc.,  for 

Photographers  and  Amateurs, 

IS  RECEIVING  THE  HIGHEST  PRAISE  WHEREVER  IT  GOES. 


IT  IS  A  BOOK  EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER  SHOULD  HAVE, 

Because  it  is  a  ready  helper  under  all  difficult  circumstances. 


Extract  from  the  Minutes  of  the  Chicago  Photographic  Association,  Dec.  3. 

"Messrs.  Hall  and  Hesler  spoke  in  most  flattering  terms  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Pocket  Reference- Book,  of 
its  greiit  value  to  every  photographer,  and  expressed  the  hope  that  it  may  soon  be  found  in  every 
gallery." 


There  is  hardly  a  matter  occurring  in  your  daily  work  which  it  does  not  throw  light  upon 
and  make  easy.     Examine  it  for  yourself. 


For  sale  by  all  dealers.    Price,  $1.50,  post-paid. 

BENERMAF&  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


WAYMOUTH'S 


IGNETTIN 

PAP  ERS. 


(See  opposite  page.) 


TBSTIMOUIALS: 

"  Waymouth's  Improved  Vignette  Papers  I  have  tried,  and  they  are  just  what  I  have  heen  want- 
ing for  years." — Well  G.  Singhi. 

"Being  composed  of  transparent  paper  there  is  no  risk  of  breakage,  and  it  readily  admits  of  the 
gradation  already  very  good,  being  modified  easily  to  suit  the  negative.  This,  I  take  it,  is  a  point  of 
great  importance.  This  lithographed  mask  on  transparent  paper  will,  I  think,  be  found  a  useful 
adjunct  in  vignetting." — G.  Wharton  Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A. 

"  From  a  trial  made,  we  are  enabled  to  say  that  they  answer  exceedingly  well  ;  and  they  are  certain 
to  find  favor  among  photographers — a  favor  they  well  deserve." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  can  testify  to  the  exquisite  softness  obtained  from  your  Vignette  Papers,  which  gradual  and 
soft  effect  I  have  never  seen  equalled  by  any  other  method.'' — H.  A.  H.  Daniel,  Esq.,  Hon.  Sec.  of  the 
Bristol  and  Clifton  Amateitr  Photographic  Association. 

"  The  Waymouth  Vignetting  Paper  are  a  decided  success.  They  are  splendid." — J.  W.  §■  J.  S. 
Moulton,  Salem  Mass. 

From,  Professional  Photographers. — "First-class."  "The  sample  sent  answers  perfectly."  "I 
consider  them  first  rate  articles."  "I  think  your  Vignette  Papers  will  be  a  great  improvement  on 
the  old  glasses."     Ac,  &c. 

Any  number  sent  on  receipt  of  price,  by  any  stockdealer,  or  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers, 

PHILADELPHIA. 


IIEsT 

GERMANY,  ENGLAND,  AND  FRANCE, 

PHOTOGEAPHEES  USE 

WAY  MOUTH'S 

VIGNETTING  PAPERS. 

(DESIGNS    COPYRIGHTED,) 


OF  ALL  PICTURES,  THE 


figttette 


IS  THE  MOST  ARTISTIC, 


When  properly  printed.  But  the  clumsy  devices  generally  in  use  for  printing  them, 
or  rather  for  blending  the  shading  about  the  figure,  prodvice  but  very  few  really  artistic 
vignette  pictures.  Either  the  shading  is  too  intensely  dark,  not  gradated  in  tint  at  all,  or 
it  shows  an  ugly  direct,  decided  line,  which  is  very  repulsive.  The  shading  should 
blend  gradually  from  the  dark  tint  nearest  to  the  figure,  off  into  the 
white  background.  The  results  are  then  soft,  artistic,  and  beautiful.  The  easiest  and 
best  way  to  secure  them  is  by  the  use  of 

WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 

THEY  AEE  NOT  CLUMSY ;  DO  NOT  BEEAK  ;  AEE  ALWAYS  READY  ;  COST 
BUT  LITTLE,  AND  AEE  EASY  OF  APPLICATION  TO  ANY  NEGATIVE. 

THEY  NEED  BUT  ONE  ADJUSTMENT  TO  PRINT  ANY  QUANTITY. 

They  entirely  do  away  with  all  the  old  and  troublesome  methods,  either  wood,  metal, 
or  cotton. 

PLEASE  TRY  THE  SAMPLE  GIVEN  IN  THIS  MAGAZINE. 


Eighteen  sizes  are  now  made,  suiting  all  dimensions  of  pictures  from  a  small  carte  figure 
to  Whole-size,  Victorias,  Cabinets,  &c.  They  are  printed  in  black  for  ordinary  negatives, 
yellow  bronze  for  thin  negatives,  and  red  bronze  for  still  weaker  ones.  Directions  for  use 
accompany  each  parcel. 

:p  :e,  i  o  :e  s  : 

In  parcels  containing  one  of  each  size,  Nos.  1  to  15,  assorted  colors $1  OO 

Assorted  sizes  and  colors,  by  number,  per  package  of  fifteen 1  OO 

>"os.  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  assorted  sizes  and  colors,  for  Cartes,  by  number,  per  dozen 50 

"        6,  7, 11,  12,  and  IS,    "  "  "     Large  Cartes  and  Victorias,  by  number,  per  doz.,        75 

"        8,  9, 10,  14,  and  15,    "  "  "     Cabinets  and  Whole-size,  "  "  1  00 

16, 17,  and  18,  "  "  "     Half  "  "  "  "  1  25 

{SEE  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

When  ordering,  state  the  number  and  color  you  want.  The  Waymouth  Vignette  Papers 
are  an  English  invention,  and  are  becoming  so  universally  used  in  Europe  that  we  have 
pleasure  in  introducing  them  to  our  patrons.     We  own  the  copyright. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers,  m  and  Cherry,  PMMa. 

FOR   SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


THE  PHOTOGRAPHER'S 

Pocket  Reference-Book, 

BY  DR.  VOGEL. 

Every  photographer  has  felt  the  need  of  a  work  to  which  he  could  refer 
quickly  and  tind  such  information  as  comes  up  in  his  daily  practice,  and  yet 
with  which  he  is  not  entirely  familiar,  such  as  optical  and  chemical  terms, 
chemical  formulae  and  equivalents,  tables  of  weights  and  measures,  and  for  the 
changing  of  the  old  system  of  the  same  to  the  decimal;  varied  photo-formulae 
in  brief;  hints  useful  in  cases  of  emergency  and  failure,  together  with  the 
thousand  and  one  things  which  come  up  daily — in  fact  a  dictionary  in 
brief.  But  until  now  that  want  has  been  unsupplied,  and  much  time  has  had 
to  be  taken  in  searching  through  volumes  of  magazines  and  books  to  find  out 
Information  that  a  ready  reference  book  would  give  in  a  moment. 

Several  thousand  copies  of  the  German  edition  have  been  sold.  The 
American  edition,  revised  and  rearranged,  is  now  ready. 

See  reviews  in  the  photographic  magazines  and  other  advertisements. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS.    PRICE,  $1.50. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Plolo.  Pnllisliers,  PMMelflliia. 
HP  TT  "FT1 

ALBION  ALBUMENIZING  CO. 

LONDON  AND  GLASGOW, 

Request  American  Photographers  to  give  their 
yaper  a  fair  trial. 


F< 


THE  SEVEKAL  BRANDS  EOE  SALE  BY 


^         3£^W4p#  <*         ^ir^#£ 


PHILADELPHIA,  PA., 


SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

4  BEEKMAN  STREET,  NEW  YORK. 


t  h:  e 


CHAMELEON  BAROMETER 


Invented  by  WALTER  B.  WOODBURY,  Esq.,  London. 


The  Greatest  Scientific  Novelty  of  the  Age. 


FORETELLS  the  WEATHER. 


MAILED,  ON  RECEIPT  OP  PRICE,  BY 


BENERMAN  *  WILSON, 


Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts,,  Philadelphia. 


50  Cents.- 


50  Cents. 


New  York,  January  24,  1874. 

For  Winter  work  use  our  latest 
styles  Interior. 

For  Spring  and  Summer,  order  a 
Landscape  background,  and  begin  to 
make  sample  pictures  for  the  next 
N.  P.  A.  Convention. 

Enclose  stamp  for  samples. 

LAFAYETTE  W.  SEAVEY, 

8  Lafayette  Place,  New  York,. 


LATEST. 

JTos.  66,  67  &  68, 

Were  exhibited  at  the  Buffalo  Convention. 
Large  sales. 

JVo.  69. 

A  moonlight.     New  and  a  decided  novelty. 


THE 


SteRE°grapH 

BOOK, 


ADAPTED    TO    THE 


Complete  Preservation  and  Convenient  Arrange- 
ment of  the  Pictures 

IN  THE  MOST  COMPACT  FORM, 

Prof.  CHARLES  F.  HIES,  Ph.D.,  Inventor, 

Is  a  "  book"  made  after  the  plan  suggested  by  Prof.  Himes  in  the  "  Philadelphia 
Photographer,"  for  January,  187 1^. 

This  method  of  mounting  stereographs  is  intended  to  combine  com- 
pactness with  comparative  freedom  from  injury.  Mechanical  abrasion 
is  entirely  avoided ;  and  liability  to  deterioration  by  chemical  action  is 
greatly  lessened,  b}'  reducing  the  chance  of  accidental  contact  with  sub- 
stances that  may  initiate  chemical  changes,  which  generally  continue 
under  ordinary  conditions  until  the  value  as  well  as  the  beauty  of  the 
pictures  is  greatly  impaired. 

It  seems  especially  adapted  to  large  private  collections,  and,  by  reason 
of  the  facility  for  classification  it  affords,  to  the  arrangement  of  stereo- 
graphs for  public  study  and  inspection,  illustrative  of  scientific  subjects, 
travels,  architecture,  &c,  &c,  permitting  them  to  be  almost  as  accessible 
as  the  volumes  of  a  library. 

PRICE  50  CEISTTS. 

Dealers  and  Stereoscopic  Publishers  supplied  on  good  terms. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


NO  MISTAKE! 

T  H  "FT! 

BEST  PORTRAIT  LENSES 


^LE/ES 


Chas.  F.  Usener's. 


TRY  THEM  and  BE  CONVINCED. 


Charles  Cooper  fy  Co., 

WHOLESALE  AGENTS, 

150  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

JOHN   R.  ClaESMONS, 

IMPORTER  OF 


AND  MANUFACTURER  OF 


ALBUMEN  HMD  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPERS. 

PINK  AND  BLUE  ALBUMEN  PAPER  CONSTANTLY  ON  HAND  OR  MADE  TO  ORDER, 

915  Sansom  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

CLEMONS'  NEW  ALBUMEN   PAPER, 

A  superior  article  introduced  into  the  market  about  a  year  ago.  It  is  equal,  if  not  superior  to  any  Paper 
imported ;  the  great  demand  proves  such  to  be  the  case.  It  is  praised  by  all  who  use  it  as  to  its  keeping 
white  during  warm  weather ;  also,  for  its  brilliancy  and  toning  qualities,  and  it  is  made  White,  Pink,  and 
Blue.    Sizes  medium,  26  x  40  and  35  x  46. 

CLEMONS'  ARROWROOT  SALTED   PAPER 

Has  stood  the  test  above  all  other  makes  for  the  last  nine  years.  An  article  extensively  used  for  all  Plain , 
Solar,  and  Colored  Work.    Sizes,  17%  x  23,  26  x  40,  and  35  x  46. 

JOHN  R.  CLEMONS,  Manufacturer, 

915  SANSOM  ST.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


"Make  ray  order  thirty  instead  of  twenty.  Lot  last  sent  are  all  gone." — Dr.  E.  Liesegang, 
Dnsseldorf,  Germany. 

"Hurry  on  the  Bigelow  Albums  ordered.  We  are  out  and  orders  waiting."— Piper  &  Carter, 
London,  England. 


IGELOW'S  ALBU 


OF 


LIGHTING  AND  POSING. 
SELLS  ALL  OVER  THE  WORLD. 

A  NEW  EDITION  HAS  BEEN  ISSUED  WITH  AN  ENLAEGED  KEY, 

AND  NEARLY  ALL  NEW  STUDIES. 

This   album  brings  lighting  and  posing  down  to  a 
system  at  once  plain,  easy  and  desirable. 

No  good,  intelligent  operator  can  afford 
to  tvorh  without  it. 


It  Contains 

24  Victoria  Portrait  Studies 

in  Light  and  Pose, 

WITH  AN  EXPLANATORY  KEY, 

Telling  exactly  HOW  EACH  PICTURE    WAS 

MADE;   WHERE  THE  CAMERA  AND 

THE    SITTER     WERE    PLACED 

rvhen  it  was  made ;  WHA  T  CUR- 
TAINS WERE  OPENED 

in  lighting  the  subject, 
$c,  §c. 

A  diagram  of  the  interior  of  the  skylight  is  given  in  each  case,  telling  the  whole  story.    IT  IS  BOUND 
HANDSOMELY  IN  CLOTH,  GILT. 


NEW  KEY,  ENLARGED. 


NEW  PICTURES. 


'It  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  aids  to  art  education  which  has  yet  been  presented  to  the  photo, 
portraitist.  Each  print  represents  a  distinct  study  of  pose  and  lighting,  the  widest  variety  of  effects 
being  comprehended.  We  should  be  glad  to  see  it  in  the  hands  of  English  portraitists  generally." — 
Photo.  News. 

"  The  method  is  an  admirable  one  and  Mr.  Bigelow  deserves  credit  for  the  systematic  way  in  whieh 
he  has  carried  it  out." — British  Journal  of  Photography : 

"I  confess  that  this  work  has  furnished  me  much  instruction,  particularly  the  manner  in  which, 
byword  and  picture,  studies  about  light  and  pose  are  explained  and  made  comprehensible." — Dr. 
Vogel. 

"  We  do  not  know  of  anything  ourselves  that  has  been  presented  to  the  trade  which  is  calculated 
to  do  so  much  real  good  as  Bigelow's  Album,  with  the  explanatory  key  to  the  studies.  It  is  an  in- 
valuable guide  to  the  portraitist.'' — Philadelphia  Photographer. 

It  is  considered  invaluable  by  the  practical  photographers  who  use  it. 


PRICE,  $6.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCKDEALERS. 
BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


FOURTH      THOUSAND. 


IT  IS 

COMPLETELY 

REVISED. 


HOW  TO  POT 
PHOTOGRAPHS 


Over 
3000  Copies 

HAVE  BEEN  SOLD. 


The  THIRD  EDITION  is  so  different  from  former  ones,  that  it  may  almost  be  said  that  it  is  A  new 
work. 

It  Gives  the  Best  and  Freshest  Instructions  to  be  had  on  the  Subject. 

Written  by  a  practical  photographic  colorist,  Mr.  Geo.  B.  Ayees. 

PRICE  $2.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Photographers  and  artists  whose  interest  it  is  to  produce  work  in  Water  Colors,  Oil,  India  InK,  or 
who  wish  complete  instructions  in  retouching  negatives,  should  consult  Mr.  Ayres'  capital  work. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA. 

TRAPP  &  MUNOH'S 


SUkntett 


Introduced  into  this  country  since  1868  has  become  the  leading  paper,  and  is 
now  better  known  and  more  appreciated  than  any  other  brand. 

That  this  great  success  is  well  deserved  and  due  to  its  excellent  qualities 
may  be  judged  from  the  fact,  that  of  all  the  competitors  of  the  Yienna  Ex- 
hibition, Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  alone  received  the 

:m::e:d_a_Xj  oif  mebit 

for  Albumenized  Paper. 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALL  THE  STOCKHOUSES. 

WILLY  WALLACH, 

GENERAL  AGENT  FOR  THE  UNITED  STATES, 

41  John  Street,  New  York. 


or  X 


*%\t  ll]otograp|er  to  Ijis  latrons. 


ft 


WHAT  IS  IT? 


TIHE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS  is  a  little  book  or  pamphlet  of  twelve  pages,  the 
1  intention  of  which  is  :  1st.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  say  a  few  words  in  a  kindly  way 
to  those  who  have  photographs  taken,  in  order  that  the  intercourse  between  them  and  their 
photographer  may  be  pleasant  and  result  in  the  most  successful  pictures.  Every  photographer 
knows  that  he  is  constantly  beset  with  a  lot  of  questions,  as  to  the  proper  way  to  dress,  the  best 
time  to  come,  and  so  on,  which  take  a  great  deal  of  his  time  to  answer.  This  little  book  answers 
them  all,  and  the  mere  handing  of  a  copy  to  the  questioner,  which  he  or  she  can  carry  away  and  study 
at  leisure,  serves  as  admirably  as  a  half-hour's  conversation. 

2d.  It  is  a  cheap  mode  of  advertising  What  could  you  want  better  than  to  have  your  business  card 
so  attractive  that  people  will  come  and  ask  for  it,  hand  it  around  from  one  to  another,  discuss  it,  and 
then  keep  it  for  reference?  This  is  what  they  do  with  this  little  "tract."  Witness  what  those  who 
have  tried  it  say  below. 

3d.  It  is  also  intended  to  convey  to  the  public  at  large  the  fact  that  photography  is  not  a  branch  of 
mechanics,  nor  photographers  a  sort  of  mechanic  themselves,  but  that  both  are  entitled  to  respect,  the 
same  as  the  family  physician  or  the  minister  ;  that  the  photographer  has  rights  as  well  as  the  public  ; 
that  he  must  be  trusted,  and  that  he  alone  is  responsible  for  his  results.  Moreover,  that  /temust  make 
the  picture  and  not  they. 

How  far  the  work  serves  these  three  ends  the  reader  must  judge  from  the  testimonials  below,  of  a 
few  of  those  who  have  been  using  our  little  publication  in  their  business. 

We  believe  it  will  pay  you  to  use  it,  and  that  you  will  assist  just  that  much  in  elevating  your  art  and 
your  craft,  an  object  which  we  are  all  working  for. 

We  get  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons  "  up  in  neat  style,  on  the  best  letter  cap  paper,  assorted 
tints,  green,  pink,  and  buff.  Eight  pages  are  devoted  to  the  body  of  the  work,  which  contains  para- 
graphs or  chapters — 1,  on  the  object  of  the  work  ;  2,  on  photography  ;  3,  when  to  come  ;  4,  how  to 
come;  5,  how  to  dress;  6,  how  to  "behave;  7,  the  children  ;  8,  general  remarks  on  coloring,  copy- 
ing, frames,  prices,  Ac. 

All  this  is  inclosed  in  a  cover  of  the  same  kind  of  paper,  the  pages  of  which  are  at  the  service  of 
the  photographer  who  orders  them  to  have  printed  thereon  anything  he  may  please,  which  printing 
we  do  without  extra  charge.  The  cuts  on  the  opposite  page  and  others  we  supply  free.  We  publish 
this  leaflet  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

1000  copies,  cover  included,     .     .  $20  00  3000  copies,  cover  included,     .     .  $50  00 

2000       "  "  "  .     .     35  00      I      5000       "  '•  "  .     .     75  00 

We  will  send  samples  of  the  book  and  special  rates  to  any  who  may  desire  it.  Over  500,000  have 
been  sold. 

We  invite  you  to  examine  the  good  words  which  our  patrons  have  sent  us  concerning  this  publication. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"  I  sent  one  out  West  to  a  friend,  and  she 
wrote  that  she  was  now  posted,  and  when  she 
came  here  to  have  a  picture  ™\ade,  she  would 
come  'according  to  directions.'  '' — A.  Bogar- 
dus,  New  York. 

"A  grand  idea." — Elbert  Anderson. 

"A  splendid  medium  for  educating  'skulls' 
that  cannot  think  and  will  not  learn." — Wm.  H. 
Whitehead,  Pittsburg,  Pa. 

"  It  is  eagerly  sought  for  and  read  by  every- 
body who  visits  our  Gallery.'' — J.  Gurney  & 
Son,  New  York. 

"  It  assists  me  greatly." — James  Mollen, 
Lexington,  Ky. 

"  The  many  valuable  hints  in  it  cannot  fail  to 
be  beneficial  to  both  photographer  and  patron." 
— Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  W.  Virginia. 


"  They  are  the  best  kind  of  business  cards  a 
photographer  can  have." — T.  S.  Estabrooke, 
Brooklyn. 

"You  have  conferred  a  great  favor  on  the  fra- 
ternity in  supplying  it,  and  we  hope  it  will  bene- 
fit some  of  the  '  know-everythings  '  in  this  quar- 
ter."— A.  C.  McIntyre  &  Co.,  Ogdensburg. 

"They  are  just  the  thing  to  post  people  up  on 
what  they  ought  to  know  in  order  to  secure  good 
pictures." — J.  P.  Whipple,  White  Water. 

"  I  really  think  your  little  book  '  hits  the  nail 
on  the  head.'  " — J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

"It  is  the  best  advertising  medium  I  have 
ever  found." — H.  M.  Sedgewick,  Granville,  O. 

"  I  think  they  are  a  perfect  success,  and  will 
do  us  photographers  a  great  deal  of  good." — G 
W.  Mathis. 


BEHEBM  &  WILSON,  PMopplic  Publishers, 

SEVENTH  &  CHERRY  STS„  PHILADELPHIA. 


dkrntpng. 


\ 


IN  EVERY  VARIETY. 


No.  4  BEEKMAN  STREET,  NEW  YORK, 
No.  73  BOLD  STREET,  LIVERPOOL,  ENGLAND. 


DEALERS  SUPPLIED  WITH  THE  BEST  GOODS  OH  THE  BEST  TEEMS, 


Our  own  extensive  facilities  for  manufacturing  enable  us  to  produce  first  quality  of  goods, 
and  our  extensive  connections  at  home  and  abroad  give  us  facilities  which  no  one  else  has. 


MANUFACTORIES :  ( W"S?%  gsgTJSg: ct 


SEE  OTHEE  ADVEKTISEMENTS  IN  PHOTOGKAPHIC  BOOKS  and  MAGAZINES 


Examine  ScotUI's  PMootMc  Clofe  ani  Real  tie  MonrajMc  Times, 


THE  ZENTMAYER  LENS 

For  Views  and  Copying. 


No.  1, 

2\  inch  focus,  3 

"  2, 

3i  "    "    4 

"  3, 

51  "    "    6 

"  4, 

8   "    "   10 

"  5, 

12   "    "   14 

"  6, 

18   "    "   20 

3  plate,  . 

.  $20  00 

No.  1  and  No.  2  combined, 

5   "   . 

.  25  00 

"  2  "   "  3 
'.'  3  "  "  4 
"  4  "   "5    " 

8J  "   . 

.   30  00 

12  "   . 

.  42  00 

"  5  "   "6 

17  "   . 

.   60  00 

"  1,  2,  and  3, 

24  "   . 

.  90  00 

"  3,  4,  and  5,    " 

These  Lenses  possess  pre-eminently,  the  following  qualities  : 

Width  of  visual  angle,  ranging  from  80°  to  90Q  ;  depth  of  focus ;  extreme  sharpness  over  the 
whole  field  ;  true  perspective ;  freedom  from  all  distortion  in  copying  :  portability  and  cheapness. 

Each  mounting  is  provided  with  a  revolving  Diaphragm,  containing  the  stops  of  the  different  com- 
binations for  which  they  are  designed.  The  larger  ones  are  provided  with  an  internal  shutter  for 
making  and  closing  the  exposure. 

$33  00 

40  00 

55  00 

75  00 

110  00 

48  00 

88  00 

No.  3,  with  large  mounting  to  combine  with  No.  4  and  No.  5,  $35. 

No.  1  and  No.  2,  specially  adapted  for  Stereoscopic  Views,  are  furnished  in  matched  pairs.  No.  1 
and  No.  2,  single,  not  to  combine  with  other  sizes,  $36  a  pair. 

Lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six  combinations,  from  1\  to  18  inches,  $173. 

Zentmayer's  Stereoscopic  outfits,  including  a  pair  of  No.  2  Lenses  4x7  box,  7x10  India  Rubber 
Bath  and  Dipper,  Tripod,  Printing  Frames,  and  outside  box,  $60. 

JOSEPH  ZENTMAYER,  Manufacturer, 

14:7  South  Fourth  Street,  Philadelphia. 

STEREOSCOPIC   riEWS. 


Dealers  selecting  their  autumn  stock  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  would  do  well  to  examine  our 

unrivalled  variety  of  Views  of 

THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS, 

NIAGARA,   WASHINGTON, 

FAIRMOUNT  PARK,  PHILADELPHIA, 

FLOWERS,  GROUPS,  &c. 

m-  ^UAMTY  UNSURPASSED  ! 


KILBURN  BROS.,  Littleton,  New  Hampshire. 

NIAGARA 

STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS. 


Winter  and  Summer  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  of  all  sizes.     Trade  supplied  on  good  terms.     Variety 
unequalled. 

G.  E.  CURTIS,  Photographer, 

Niagara  Palls,  1ST.  Y. 

i 

Mr.  Curtis'  views  answer  Mr.  Robinson's  query  :   "Are  there  any  clouds  in  America?  " 


THE 


raiGHT«lARHOOM 


By  ELBERT  ANDERSON, 

Is  the  lost  Useful,  Elaborate,  anfl  toilsome  Wort  ever  issued  on  Photoffraphy. 

IT  IS  EMPHATICALLY  A  WORKING  PHOTOGRAPHER'S  ROOK. 


PRICE  $4.00. 

PLEASE  READ  THE  OTHER  ADVERTISEMENTS  AND  TESTIMONIALS. 

The  book  contains  a  vast  amount  of  invaluable  information  never  found  in  elementary  works  on 
this  subject.  There  are  no  visionary  nor  theoretical  notions  ;  there  is  not  a  single  manipulation  given 
that  has  not  been  practiced  a  thousand  times  over  by. the  author. 

Among  many  other  things  it  treats  fully  on  the  following : 

Optics. — Decomposition  of  Light — Colors  of  Bodies — Complementary  Colors — Interference  of  Waves 
of  Light — Dispersion  of  Lenses — The  Diaphragm — Curvature  of  Field — Optical  Instruments — The 
Magic  Lantern — Camera  Obscura — The  Eye — Insensibility  of  a  Certain  Portion  of  the  Retina — Ster- 
eoscopicity — The  Stereoscope — The  Refracting  Stereoscope — Polarization  of  Light. 

Outlines  op  Chemistry. — The  Atomic  Theory — Atomic  Weight — Chemical  Equivalents — Nomencla- 
ture of  the  Elements — Diffusion  of  Gases — Double  Decomposition — Crystallization — Efflorescence — 
Deliquescence — Cleavage — Chemical  Affinity — On  the  Chemical  Action  of  Light — Theory  of  Photog- 
raphy. 

Photography. — Photographic  Chemicals — The  Skylight — The  Backgrounds — Accessories — Reflectors — 
The  Platform — The  Reception-Room — The  Dark-Room — The  Tanks — The  Chemical  Room — On  the 
Selection  of  Glass  for  Negatives — On  the  Method  of  Cleaning  the  Plates — Polishing  the  Plates — Al- 
bumenizing  the  Plates — Preparation  of  the  Albumen — Collodion — Iodides  and  Bromides  used  in 
Collodion — Formula  for  Iodized  Collodion — Elbert  Anderson's  Portrait  Collodion — The  Negative 
Bath — Development — Nature  of  the  Invisible  Image — Developing  and  Redeveloping — Effects  of  In- 
tensification— The  Fixing  Solutions — Rectification  of  the  Negative  Bath — To  Fuse  the  Bath — To 
Restore  a  Disordered  Bath  by  Precipitation — To  Throw  Down  the  Silver  in  the  Metallic  State — The 
Camera — The  Platebolder — The  Lens — Varnishing  the  Negative — Negative  Varnish — Retouching  the 
Negative — The  Printing-Room — Silvering  Plain  Paper — Ammonio-Nitrate  of  Silver — Albumen  Paper 
— The  Positive  Bath — To  Silver  the  Paper — Fuming — The  Print — The  Press — Vignette  Printing 
Boards — Medallion  Printing — Fancy  Medallion  Printing — Washing  the  Prints — Toning  the  Prints — 
Fixing  Bath — The  Washing  Tank — Mounting — The  Press — Encaustic  Paste — Miscellaneous  Hints — 
Porcelain  Printing  by  the  Collodio-Chloride  Process — Collodio-Chloride — Porcelain  Printing  Frames 
— The  Ferrotype — Transparencies  for  the  Magic  Lantern  :  How  Made — By  the  Copying  Camera — By 
Direct  Printing  on  Dry  Plates — By  the  Collodio-Chloride  Process — Coloring  Magic  Lantern  Slides — 
On  Copying — To  Clean  a  Daguerreotype — On  the  Recovery  of  Silver  from  the  Wastes — Silver  from 
the  Developer — The  Washings  from  the  Prints — Waste  from  the  Toning  Bath — Clippings,  Filters,  &c. 
— Of  the  Treatment  of  these  Residues. 

Art  as  Applied  to  Photography. — Balance  of  Lines — Perspective — Drawbacks  of  the  Camera — 
Examples  of  Distortion  of  the  Camera — Curious  Effects  of  Distance  of  a  Lens — Imperfections  of  the 
Human  Face — Brilliancy — Relief — Position 

Details  op  Manipulations. — Manipulation  No.  1 — Exposure — Manipulation  No.  2 — Remarks  on 
Development — Pinholes — Fogging — Filtering  the  Bath. 

It  also  contains  a  Great  Number  of  Original  Illustra- 
tions;, and  12  Interesting  Photographs. 

The  book  is  written  in  a  style  at  once  dignified,  elegant,  and  yet  perfectly  simple,  and  almost  the 
only  streak  of  the  author's  well-known  humor  is  to  be  found  in  the  preface,  which  is  alone  worth 
the  price  of  the  book. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

For  Sale  by  all  Dealers.  S.  W.  cor.  7th  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


CHEMICAL-PROOF 


Photographic  Ware. 


No  More  Breakage. 

No  More  Contaminated  Solutions. 

No  More  Loss 
by  Absorption  or  Leakage. 


The  result  of  years  of  experience;  a 
decided  improvement;  and  for  simplic- 
ity, compactness,  lightness,  and  durabil- 
ity, they  excel  all  others. 

Have  been  thoroughly  tested,  and 
received  the  highest  testimonials  from 
those  who  have  used  them. 


"We  have  tried  your  Acid-proof  Composition,  and  find  it  to  be  everything  you  recommend  it  to  be 
It  is  an  almost  indispensable  requisite  in  a  photograph  gallery.     For  plate-holders  particularly,  it  is 
worth  many  times  its  cost.      Glass  or  rubber  corners  are  no  longer  necessary  in  their  construction. 
They  may  just  as  well  hereafter  be  made  entirely  of  wood,  and  it  matters  very  little  what  kind  of 
wood."— Wm.  Nims,  Fort  Edwards,  N.  Y.,  September  12,  1873. 

"  I  have  had  the  wooden  Bath  you  made  for  me  in  use  for  some  time,  and  am  highly  pleased  with 
it;  it  is  just  what  I  have  wanted  for  a  long  while,  and  could  not  obtain  one  made  in  this  particular 
shape  heretofore.  The  composition  is  all  that  could  be  desired."— James  Mullen,  Lexington,  Ky., 
December  27,  1873. 

"  Your  new  patent  Field  Bath  you  kindly  forwarded  to  me  I  have  thoroughly  examined  and  tested, 
and  having  had  considerable  experience  in  field  work  the  last  twenty-seven  years,  and  used  the  very 
m;iny  different  kinds  of  Baths,  I  can  cheerfully  recommend  yours  to  excel  all  others  for  convenience 
and  other  excellent  qualities." — R.  M.  Cressey,  Wenona,  Mich.,  January  4,  1874. 

"Our  attention  having  been  called  to  your  patent  Baths,  we  determined  upon  giving  them  a  trial, 
in  justice  to  your  discovery,  we  feel  it  our  duty  to  attest  its  merits.  It  is  all  that  is  claimed,  and  more  ; 
for  apart  from  the  many  advantage  claimed  for  it,  it  produces  the  most  perfect  negative  we  ever  made, 
and  seems  to  have  the  quality  of  purifying  the  solution.  Once  used,  no  photographer,  we  feel  con- 
fident, would  be  without  them." — Schreiber  &  Sons,  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  January  16,  1874. 

MANUFACTURED  BY 

R.  NEWELL  &  SON,  No.  626  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia. 

FOM  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

*         -X- 


Photographic  Card  Warehouse. 


A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 

MANUFACTURERS, 

No.  18  South  Sixth  St.  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 


EVERYTHING  APPERTAINING  TO  THE   LINE   OF  OUR 

MANUFACTURES  FURNISHED  WITH  CARE 

AND  PROMPTNESS. 


Our  long  experience  in  and  facilities  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods,  and 
familiarity  with  the  peculiar  wants  of  Photographers,  enable  us  to  offer  superior  induce- 
ments to  those  who  may  favor  us  with  their  orders. 


JAMES  F.  MAGEE  &  CO. 

MANUFACTURERS    OF 

PURE 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMICALS, 

No.  108  North  Fifth  Street, 

PHILADELPHIA. 


Stock  Dealers  only  Supplied. 


LANTERN  SLIDES. 


a  wwm  m@@m  @w  haw®, 


SELECTED  FROM 


EMBRACING 


Views  of  all  Parts  of  the  World ! 


PLAIN,  COLORED,  AND  OOMIO 

LANTERN   SLIDES, 


OF  ALL  KINDS,  AT  LOW  PRICES. 


SCIOPTICONS  AND  LANTERNS  SUPPLIED. 


SELECTIONS     MADE     PERSONALLY. 


ALSO,  GLASS  STEREOSCOPIC  PICTURES. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Southwest  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Photographic  Publications,  1874. 

Knowing  the  advantages  of  well-written  works  on  Photography  to  our 
readers,  we  issue  our  annual  catalogue,  that  they  may  have  the  opportunity 
of  selecting  the  very  best.  We  always  find  the  photographer  who  reads 
what  is  published  pertaining  to  his  profession,  to  be  the  photographer  who 
succeeds  in  his  business  the  best.  Above  all,  those  who  regularly  and  contin- 
ually receive  a  good  photographic  magazine  are  those  who  are  always  ahead 
with  new  goods,  new  styles,  and  new  information.  We  recommend  an  in- 
vestment in  a  part  or  all  of  the  list  below,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  them  to 
you  on  receipt  of  price. 


CATALOGUE. 


A  The  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

The  oldest,  best,  and  most  popular  Photographic  Magazine  in  America.  Eleventh  Year.  Please  read  the 
prospectus  on  page  three  of  coyer  and  premium  list  opposite.  Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2.50  for  six 
months,  in  advance.    Current  number,  50  cents.    Specimen  copies,  free. 

B  The  Skylight  and  the  Dark-Room. 

By  Elbert  Anderson,  operator  at  Kurtz's  studio,  New  York.  This  is  the  most  beautiful  and  elaborate 
work  on  the  art  ever  published.  It  contains  nearly  250  pages — large,  square — twelve  photographs  made  by  the 
author  to  illustrate  the  lessons  of  the  work,  and  almost  two  hundred  fine  wood-cuts.  See  advertisements. 
Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  postpaid,  $4.00. 

C  Photographic  Mosaics. 

The  1874  edition  excels  all  of  its  eight  older  brethren.  The  list  of  articles  is  made  up  of  original  contribu- 
tions, written  especially  for  its  pages,  on  all  departments  of  the  art,  wholly  by  practical  men  who  are  only  heard 
from  once  a  year  through  the  persuasion  of  the  editor,  in  this  way.  See  special  advertisement.  146  pages. 
Paper  cover,  50  cents.    Cloth,  $1.    A  few  copies  of  former  editions,  from  1866,  at  same  price. 

D  The  Ferrotype?' 's  Guide. 

A  new  work  on  the  Ferrotype.    Price,  75  cents. 

E       Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

This  is  not  exactly  a  book,  but  a  collection  of  24  large  Victoria  size  photographic  studies  in  lighting  and 
posing,  made  especially  \o  teach  how  to  light  and  pose  ordinary  and  extra-ordinary  subjects  in  all  the  plain, 
fancy,  "  Rembrandt "  and  "  Shadow  "  styles.  It  is  accompanied  by  an  explanatory  key  of  instructions,  together 
with  a  diagram  for  each  picture,  showing  how  the  sitter  and  the  camera  were  placed  in  the  skylight,  their 
relation  to  the  background,  and  what  blinds  were  opened  and  closed  at  the  time  of  the  sitting.  It  almost 
supplies  a  rule  by  which  you  can  quickly  tell  how  to  manage  every  subject  that  comes  to  you.  The  studies  are 
mounted  on  folding  leaves,  so  that  twelve  can  be  examined  at  once.    Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  $6,  postpaid. 

F  Wilson's  Landscape  Studies. 

An  album  of  landscape  studies  in  style  similar  to  Bigelow's  Album,  containing  ten  5x8  views,  with  the 
formula,  &c,  by  George  Washington  Wilson,  Esq.,  the  renowned  Scotch  landscape  photographer.  A  splendid 
work.    In  cloth,  gilt,  $4. 

G  Handbook  of  the  Practice  and  Art  of  Photography. 

By  Dr.  Vogel.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  during  the  year. 

H     How  to  Paint  Photographs  in  Water  Colors. 

A  practical  Handbook  designed  especially  for  the  use  of  Students  and  Photographers,  containing  directions 
for  Brush  Work  in  all  descriptions  of  Photo-Portraiture,  Oil,  Water  Colors,  Ink,  How  to  Retouch  the  nega- 
tive, &c.    By  George  B.  Ayres,  Artist.  Third  edition.    Differing  largely  from  previous  editions.    Price,  $2.00. 


I  Pictorial  Effect  in  Photography . 

By  H.  P.  Robinson,  London.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  in  preparation. 

J  How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph. 

This  is  a  fine  little  work  of  48  pages,  written  by  the  wife  of  a  celebrated  New  York  photographer,  for  the 
purpose  of  educating  the  public  on  the  all-important  subject  of  sitting  for  a  picture.  It  is  bound  in  cloth  at  60 
cents  per  copy,  and  paper  cover  30  cents. 

K  Lookout  Landscape  Photography . 

By  Prof.  R.  M.  Linn,  Lookout  Mountain,  Tenn.  A  pocket  manual  for  the  outdoor  worker,  and  full  of  good 
for  every  photographer.    75  cents.    Be  sure  to  get  it. 

L      Himes's  Leaf  Prints ;  or,  Glimpses  at  Photography. 

By  Prof.  Charles  F.  Himes,  Ph.D.  Full  of  useful  information  for  the  photographic  printer.  Illustrated 
with  a  whole-size  photograph.    Cloth,  $1.25. 

M  The  American  Carbon  Manual. 

By  Edw.  L.  Wilson.  A  complete  manual  of  the  Carbon  process  from  beginning  to  end.  With  a  fine 
example  by  the  process.    Cloth,  $2.00. 

N        Ayres's  Chart  of  Photographic  Drapery. 

This  is  a  photograph  of  forty-two  pieces  of  cloth,  of  all  the  colors  and  shades,  handsomely  mounted  on  a 
card.  It  should  be  hung  in  every  reception-room,  to  show  your  customers  what  color  dresses  to  wear,  and  to 
show  you  what  sort  of  backgrounds  and  accessories  to  use.    Price,  $2.00. 

O  The  Photographer  to  His  Patrons. 

A  splendid  little  twelve-page  leaflet,  which  answers  all  vexatious  questions  put  to  you  by  your  sitters,  and 
serves  as  a  grand  advertising  medium.  It  is  for  photographers  to  give  away  to  their  customers.  Send  for  a 
copy  and  an  illustrated  circular.  Over  300,000  already  sold  and  in  use  all  over  the  country.  $20.00  for  1000, 
$35.00  for  2000,  and  so  on.    Printed  and  supplied  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

P  Pretty  Faces. 

A  leaflet  much  smaller  than  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons,"  for  the  same  purpose,  but  costing  less,  viz. : 
1000  copies,  $10.00 ;  2000,  $17.50,  and  larger  orders  at  less  rates. 

Q  The  Year- Booh  of  Photography. 

By  G.  Wharton  Simpson.  English  edition.  Similar  to  Mosaics,  and  full  of  good,  short,  practical  articles. 
50  cents.    1869, 1870, 1871, 1872,  and  1873  now  on  hand.    1874,  about  January  20th. 

R     Elbert  Anderson' s  Photo-  Comic  Alimyknack 

A  complete  Almanac,  full  of  witty  sayings,  jokes,  puns,  stories,  etc.,  etc.  Profusely  illustrated  with  comic 
and  original  sketches,  yet  all  interspersed  with  much  practical  matter  of  value  to  every  photographer.  Price, 
75  cents. 

S  Photographers'  Pocket  Reference- Book. 

By  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  of  Berlin.  A  dictionary  of  all  the  terms  used  in  the  art,  and  contains  formulas  for  almost 
every  known  manipulation.  Altogether  different  from  any  work  ever  published.  Cloth,  $1.50.  See  special 
advertisement. 


=-§-= 


To  save  writing,  photographers  may  order  the  above  of  us  by  the  marginal  letters,  thus,  "  Please  send  us 
one  copy  of  each,  book  A,  B,  K,"  &c,  &c.    Any  of  the  above  sent  post  free  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Benerman  &  Wilson's  Publications  sold  by  all  Dealers. 


« 


(jLctual  size  of  a  No.  1  Steinheil  I«i,j 


NEW  APLANATIC  LENSES, 


FOR 

GROUPS, 

LANDSCAPES 

,    an 

d 

COPIES. 

We  have  now  a  full  stock  of  these  celeb 

rated  Lenses,  at  the  following  prices  : 

No.  1,                            1-4  size, 

3£  inch  focus, 

$25  00 

"2,                            1-2     " 

6i     .< 

30  00 

"    3,                            4-4     " 

7 

45  00 

"    4,                            8-10  " 

101     " 

60  00 

"    5,                          10-12  " 

134i     •■        . 

70  00 

"    6,                          13-16   " 

16|     "        • 

110  00 

Nos.  1  and  2  are  in  matched  pairs  for  Stereoscopic  Work. 

THEY  ARE  IN  USE  BY  MOST  LEADING  PHOTOGRAPHERS,  INCLUDING 

GUTEKUNST,  BROADBENT  &  PHILLIPS,  DeMORAT, 

WENDEROTH,  FENNEMORE,  LOTHROP, 

And  many  others,  equally  well  known. 

We  feel  sure  that  at  least  one  of  these  Lenses  is  needful  for  the  successful  prosecution  of  your 
business,  and  so  solicit  your  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  States, 

No.  822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


MANUFACTURING  OPTICIAN, 

1314  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia. 

Sole  Manufacturer  of  the  Stereo-Panopticon  and  Artopticon,  warranted  to  be  the  most 
perfect  and  powerful  Magic  Lanterns  made. 


MCALLISTER'S 

PATBIsTT 

ARTOPTICON 


Each  lantern  is  adjustable  for  use 
with  powerful  coal  oil  light — oxycal- 
cium,  hydro-oxyc'alcium,  and  oxy- 
hydrogen  lights. 

j^jgpThe  coal  oil  lamp  used  gives 
very  much  more  light  than  any  other 
lamp  yet  made. 

Giving  exhibitions  with  the  Artopti- 
con  will  prove  a  profitable  business  for 
a  man  icith  a  small  capital. 


,— aarJ  I  '  *  ill*!,,,,,,,, 


am 


-. 


% 


liii 
nlUllfc     — 1 


»    r'    iHTHHgegJPB 


The   STEREO-PAlfOPTICOJf    is  an  improved   instrument,   suitable  for  giving 
exhibitions  of  dissolving  views  on  the  largest  scale.     Send  for  printed  description. 


MCALLISTER'S 

PATENT    TINTERS. 

These  tinters  are  used  for  giving  to  magic  lantern  pictures 
various  beautiful  tints  or  colors,  as  blue,  red,  yellow,  green, 
crimson,  &c,  &c.  They  can  be  adjusted  to  the  lantern,  either 
on  the  end  of  the  front  lens,  or  may  be  screwed  to  the  back 
of  the  front  lens-holder,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Stereo-Panop- 
ticon and  Educational  lanterns.  On  the  Artopticon,  they 
are  placed  on  the  end  of  the  front  lens  tube. 

NEW  and  BEAUTIFUL  SLIDES  for  LANTERN  USE  in  LARGE  VARIETY. 

Priced  and  Illustrated  Catalogues  free,  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  stamp. 

W.  MITCHELL  McALLISTER,  1314  Chestnut  St.,  Phila. 


^fttEfiF 


♦*> 


CHICAGO 


JACOBYS 


^1 


AND 


Gombination  Printing  Frame 

WITH  SELF-ADJUSTING  SPRING  BED,  CLAMPING  SPEINGS, 
VIGNETTING  ARRANGEMENTS, 

FOR  PORCELAIN  AND  CONTACT  PRINTING. 


Any  negative  may  be  used  with  suscess.  The  time  of  printing  is  the  same  as  in  common  printing, 
and  may  be  done  in  any  kind  of  weather.  Pictures  printed  with  this  frame  need  but  little  retouching, 
or  not  as  fine  retouching  to  get  the  finest  effects. 

I  need  not  comment  on  this  frame,  for  when  tried  will  prove  for  itself.  For  printing  on  the  Por- 
celain plate  it  is  best  and  a  success.  Having  a  self-adjusting  bed,  will  form  to  any  thickness  of  plate. 
For  common  printing  it  is  complete.  But  the  most  to  be  praised  is  the  Imitation  Porcelain  for  which  it 
is  invented,  which  all  prefer  to  the  genuine  Porcelain,  for  the  reason  they  can  be  sent  by  mail  and  will 
not  break.  They  are  printed  on  Albumen  Paper,  the  same  as  a  Card  Photograph,  and  when  framed 
in  a  velvet  Passepartout  can  scarcely  be  detected  from  the  genuine  Porcelain. 

I  have  used  one  of  these  frames  in  my  gallery  the  last  year,  charging  two  dollars  per  dozen  more 
for  this  kind  of  work-  All  of  my  patrons  prefer  this  to  the  porcelain,  and  find  no  fault  with  the  price. 
I  have  therefore  secured  a  patent,  and  propose  to  manufacture  and  put  them  in  the  market  for  sale, 
that  others  may  use  them.  I  feel  satisfied  that  by  trying  them  they  will  prove  satisfactory ;  if  not, 
you- can  return  the  same  by  paying  charges. 

Specimens  published  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  in  the  April  and  October  numbers,  1873. 
Be  sure  and  see  them.     Stockdealers  will  be  supplied  from  the  factory  at  Minneapolis,  Minnesota. 

SIZSS     ^L3NT33     PRICES. 

Frame  for  1-4  Negative,    .     .     .      .  $4  00     I     Frame  for  64  x  8£  Negative,  .     .     .  $5  50 
5x7       "           ....      5  00     I             "           8x10  "         ...     5  75 

Frame  for  11  x  14  Negative $6  25 

Any  other  size  made  to  order.  Terms,  Cash  or  C.  O.  D.  Parties  not  finding  them  with  their 
Stockdealers  can  order  them  from 


P.  O.  Box  1758. 


W.  H.  JACOBY,  Minneapolis,  Minn. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 
*      * 


FOR   $3.00  EACH. 


THE  PUBLICATION  OF  THE 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    WORLD 

Having  been  suspended,  the  publishers  offer  the  FEW  KEMAINING 
YOLUMES  on  hand  for  the  exceedingly  low  price  of  $3.00  A  VOLUME. 

They  contain  many  of  the  best  home  and  foreign  contributions  to  photo- 
graphic literature  ever  published.     Among  which  are  a  series  of  papers  on 

POSITION   AMD   COMPOSITION, 

AND    ANOTHER    ENTITLED 

LANDSCAPE    LESSONS, 

Both  of  which  are  beautifully  illustrated,  and  alone  worth  more  than  the 
cost  of  the  volumes.  The  pictures  in  both  volumes  are  varied  in  style,  are 
very  beautiful,  and  a  dozen  such  pictures  could  not  be  bought  for  twice  the 
price  asked  for  the  whole  volume  of  the  World. 


SEE    THE   LIST. 


VOL.  I. 


VOL.  II. 


January.  Photo-Relief  Print.  Woodbury  Pro- 
cess. By  American  Photo-Relief  Printing 
Co.,  Philadelphia. 

February.  "  Giant's  Causeway."  Landscape. 
By  G.  W.  Wilson,  Aberdeen,  Scotland. 

March.  Portrait  Studies.  By  J.  Grasshoff,  Ber- 
lin, Prussia. 

April.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  J.  Grasshoff,  Ber- 
lin, Prussia. 

May.  Victoria  Holyoake  Portraits.  By  Sud- 
dards  &  Fennemore,  Philadelphia. 

June.  Carte  Studies  of  Children.  By  John  A. 
Scholten,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

July.  Cabinet  Portraits.  By  W.  H.  Jacoby, 
Minneapolis,  Minn. 

August.  "Just  as  I  am."  Reproduction  from 
Drawing      By  W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

September.  "Reflections."  By  T.  T.  Sweeny, 
Cleveland,  Ohio. 

October.  Statuary.  By  J.  H.  Kent,  Rochester, 
New  York. 

November.  "  Both  Puzzled."  Woodbury  Print. 
By  Am.  Photo-Relief  Printing  Co. 

December.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  M.  B.  Brady. 
New  York. 


By   W.   Kurtz, 


January.      Cabinet  Portrait. 
New  York. 

February.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  A.  N.  Hardy, 
Boston,  Mass. 

March.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  H.  Rocher,  Chi- 
cago, 111. 

April.     Cameo   Cabinet   Portrait.      By    W.    C. 
North,  Utica,  N.  Y. 

May.      Cabinet   Portrait. 
Salem,  Mass. 

Ju7ie.     Cabinet  Portrait, 
son,  Baltimore,  Md. 

July.       Cabinet   Portrait. 
Portland,  Me. 

August.     Cabinet  Portrait, 
dinst,  Staunton,  Va. 

September.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  J.  A.  Schol- 
ten &  Co.,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

October.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  J.  Landy,  Cin- 
cinnati, Ohio. 

November.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  J.  A.  Schol- 
ten &  Co.,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

December.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  C.  D.  Mosher, 
Chicago,  III. 


By  Jones  &  Stiff, 
By  Dinmore  &  Wil- 
By  J.  H.  Lamson, 
By   B.   M.    Cline- 


Order  soon  if  you  want  them.     Postage  payable  at  j^our  own  office,  or 
36  cents  extra,  prepaid. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 

EGGSHELL,  GLOSSY,  CHOCOLATE-TIHTED. 

(PATENTED  MARCH  1st,  1870.) 

ALL  SIZES,  FEOM  1-9  to  10x14.  BLACK  AND  CHOCOLATE. 

THE  PHENIX  PLATE  00.,  Worcester,  Mass., 

ARE  NOW  MAklNG  THE  MOST  POPULAR  BRAND  OF  PLATES  IN  THE  TRADE. 


Per  Box  of  8  Doz. 


juniors 

Eggshell.   Glossy. 
$0.80      $0.90 


XjUST 


Size. 

1-9  $0.80  $0.90  Per  Box  of  2  Doz. 

1-6  1.25  1.35  "            4     " 

1-4  1.85  2.00  "            2     " 

4£x6£  1.85  2.00  "            2     " 

1-2  2.20  2.35  Per  Sheet, 

4|xl0  2.20  2.35 

Revised,  New  York,  December  28th,  1872. 


Size. 

4-4 

5-7 

7-10 

8x10 

10x14 


Eggshell. 

$2.40 

2.40 

2.70 

2.70 

.14 


Glossy 

$2.70 

2.70 

2  90 

2.90 

.15 


EGGSHELL,    GLOSSY,    AND    CHOCOLATE-TINTED   PLATES,    ALL    SIZES    AND    STYLES, 
ALWAYS    ON    HAND    AND   READY   FOR   DELIVERY. 

Each  package  of  Phenix  Plates  has  printed  on  the  wrapper,  "Manufactured 

by  the  Phenix  Plate  Co.,  Worcester,  Mass.,"  and  none 

are  genuine  unless  bearing  that  stamp. 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  constitu- 
ting them  our  sole  and  exclusive  agents  for  the  sale  of  our  Plates. 

That  company  is  so  well  and  favorably  known  in  the  business,  that  no  com- 
mendation of  ours  is  required  to  assure  the  Trade  that  they  will  be  liberally 
dealt  with  in  every  respect. 

Phenix  Plates  are  for  sale  by  all  Stock  Dealers  ttoiMt  Die  country. 

PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Manufacturers, 

Worcester,  Mass. 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  Apts  for  tie  Me,  4  Beekman  St,  N.  Y. 


SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT. 


ALL  PERSONS  ARE  HEREBY  NOTIFIED,  and  cautioned  against  infringing  my  Solar  Camera 
Patent. 

Infringers  will  settle  with    H.  L.  Emmons,   Attorney-at-Law,   Baltimore,   Md. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD, 

Baltimore,  Md. 

DO   YOUR   OWN   SOLAR    PRINTING. 

SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT  LICENSE  AND  STAMP 

Good  for  the  future  at  $40.     May  be  ordered  through  your  STOCKDEALER  or  from  the  PATENTEE. 

1>.  A.  WOODWARD,  Baltimore,  Md. 


AUG.  SCHWARZE.  SCHWARZE      &L    VALK  WILLIAM  VALK. 

NO.    614    ARCH   STREET,    PHILADELPHIA. 

m0ST  szri  0F  Germ  Allium  Paper,  and  Arrowroot  Plain  Salted  Paper. 

DEALERS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  MATERIALS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 

Will  mail  to  any  address  in  the  country,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  f  1,  one  dozen  sheets  of  Assorted  Photo- 
graphic Paper,  each  sheet  being  numbered  for  distinction. 

^ "■'■■ ■  ■■'ihmkii.ihii ■'"■■  ■— — — — — 


No.  50  Cedar  Street,  JSew  York, 

SOLE  AGENTS  FOR 

"F.Z.IMPERIAL"  DRESDEN  ALBUMEN  PAPER 

Rites  and  Steinbach  ;  Light  and  Heaty     White,  Pink,  and  Blue. 


We  beg  leave  to  inform  the  Photographic  Stoekhouses  that  we  keep  a  complete  assortment  of 
"F.  Z.  IMPERIAL"  ALBUMEN  PAPER  always  on  hand,  and  offer  it  to  the  trade  at  the  lowest 
market  prices. 

KARSTENS  St  BRAUN,  No.  50  Cedar  Street,  New  York. 

O-.    SATJTBB. 

-ZVo.    138  South  Eighth  Street,   Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURER   AND   WHOLESALE    DEALER   IN 


The  attention  of  the  trade  is  particularly  called  to  the  superior  quality  of  our  Glass  and  materials 
and  neatness  of  finish.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand. 


BULLOCK    &    EREiPJSS 

No.  528  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia, 


MANUFACTURERS  AND  IMPORTERS   OF   PURE   CHEMICALS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 
IMPORTERS  OF  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN,  APPARATUS,  ETC. 


JLfNVPB 

JLOOKOHJT 

JL  JL  W  W  §  C  JL  IP  JS 

A  Poctet  Manual  for  tie  Landscape  Phottppler, 

YET  CONTAINING    MANY    USEFUL    HINTS    EOK  ALL    PHOTOGEAPHEES. 

By  the  Late  Prof.  R.  M.  LINN, 

LOOKOUT  MOUNTAIN,  TENN. 

This  admirable  little  work  was  published  last  fall,  a  little  too  late  for  the  season.  It  is 
now  confidently  recommended  to  every  photographer  about  to  do  any  class  of  work,  outside 
or  inside  the  skylight. 

CONTENTS. 


Introductory. 

Main  Requisites  of  a  Good  Photographic  Land- 
scape. 

Artistic  Effect. 

Proper  Illumination. 

Direction  of  Light. 

Clouds. 

Length  of  Exposure. 

Apparatus  for  Field  Work. 

On  the  Selection  of  View  Lenses. 

Camera  Boxes. 

Bath  Cups. 

Preliminary  Preparations. 

Taking  the  Field. 

Hints  on  Printing  and  Finishing. 

To  Print  Clouds. 

Toning  Bath  for  Views. 

On  Fixing  and  Washing  Prints. 

Suggestions  on  Mounting  Prints. 

To  Cut  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

To  Mount  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

Formulae  and  Processes  for  Landscape  Photog- 
raphy. 

Ever-ready  Iodizer  for  Landscape  Photography. 


Remarks  on  Preparing  and  Using  Iodizer. 

On  the  Management  of  Flowing  Bottles. 

On  the  Preparation  of  Plain  Collodion. 

The  Silver  Bath  for  Negatives. 

To  Renovate  an  Old  Negative  Bath. 

To  Prepare  Carbonate  of  Silver. 

Permanganate  of  Potash — Its  Use  in  our  Art. 

Preparation  and  Using  of  Developer. 

Fixing  Solution  for  View  Negatives. 

On  Redeveloping  and  Strengthening  Agents. 

To  Clean  and  Polish  the  Glass. 

To  Prepare  Chloride  of  Gold  Solution. 

The  Paste  for  Mounting  of  Photographs. 

The    Operator's   Oracle — Failures  :    Causes  and 

Remedies ;  for  consultation  in  time  of  trouble. 
Counsels  and  Cautions  for  the  Printer,  including 

Formulas  for  Silvering  Bath,  &c 
Failures  in  Silvering  Albumenized  Paper. 
Failures  in  Toning  Photographs. 
Failures  in  Fixing  Photographs. 
Instantaneous  Photography. 
View  Photography  Financially  Considered. 
Stereoscoping  Applied  to  Portraiture. 
Concluding  Remarks. 


It  is  a  Perfect  Success,  and  is 

Selling  Well  and  Pleasing  Everybody 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


LONDON    1851. 


LONDON    1862. 


PARIS    1867. 


We  have  now  successfully  introduced  to  the  American  Photographers  the  Eoss  Lens,  and  by  our 
increased  sales  we  know  they  are  appreciated.  At  the  convention  held  at  Buffalo,  July  15,  many  fine 
photographs  were  exhibited  by  photographers,  and  ourselves,  made  with  the  Ross  Lens,  which 
attracted  great  attention. 

While  Ross  &  Co.  are  the  oldest  manufacturers  of  Photographic  Lenses  in  existence,  they  also 
keep  up  with  the  requirements  of  the  fraternity,  by  constantly  manufacturing  new  combinations  and 
improving  on  those  already  in  existence.  They  have  lately  perfected,  and  will  soon  furnish  us  stock 
of,  a  new  series  of  Card  Lenses,  extra  rapid,  peculiary  adapted  for  babies,  and  people  who  will  not  be 
quiet.     We  will  give  notice  of  their  arrival. 

WE  HAVE  NOW  IN  STOCK 

PORTRAIT  LENSES,  from  1-4  to  15  X 18. 
CABINET  LENSES,  \os.  1,  2,  and  3. 
CARD  LENSES,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3. 

TRIPLETS,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  1. 

INSTANTANEOUS  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

MEDIUM  ANGLE  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

LARGE  ANGLE  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

STEREOGRAPHIC  LENSES,  all  sizes. 

Numerous  testimonials  pronounce  them  to  be  the  best,  as  well  as  the  cheapest  Foreign  Lens  ever 
offered  to  the  American  Photographer 

We  will  mail  price-list  on  application,  and  promptly  fill  all  orders. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  States, 

822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


AYRES'  CHART  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  DRAPERY, 

Shows  ivhat  color  dress  should  be  worn,  and  ivhat  color  Back- 
ground and  Accessories  to  use  in  the  Photograph. 

This  "  Chakt  "  designed  by  George  B.  Ayres,  author  of  uHow  to  Paint  Photographs," 
is  a  photographic  copy  of  42  pieces  of  woolen  colored  cloth,  showing  exactly  how  each  color 
will  photograph  or  "take,"  and  if  used  will  he  found  one  of  the  best  paying  investments 
the  photographer  can  make.  The  colors  are  arranged  in  rows  and  numbered,  with  a  sched- 
ule attached,  so  that  any  one  can  refer  to  and  use  it.  The  Photograph  is  of  large  size,  on 
extra  heavy  card,  with  a  list  and  explanation,  handsomely  printed  in  brown  ink. 

It  will  be  sent  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  $2.00.     For  sale  by  all  stockdealers. 

BENERMAN  &.  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


'    NEGATIVE 
AND  PICTURE 


Very  Superior,  Single  Thick  Crystal. 

6J  x  8|,  8  x  10,  10  x  14,  16  x  20,  and  all  other  Sizes  used  by  Photographers  and  Picture  Dealers. 

FOR  SALE  CHEAP. 
TOGETHER  WITH  PLATE    AND    CRYSTAL    GLASS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION,  BY 

BENJAMIN   H.  SHOEMAKER, 

FRENCH  PLATE  GLASS  DEPOT, 
205,  207,  209,  &  211  iV.  Fourth  St.,  Philadelphia. 

GEOEGE  ROTTER  &  CO., 

DRESDEN,  GERMANY, 

MANUFACTURERS   OP 

ALBUMEN    PAPERS, 

Kives  and  Steinbach;  Light  and  Heavy;  "White,  Pink,  and  Blue. 

Our  excellent  Albumen  Papers  to  which  the  first  premium,  the  silver  medal,  was  awarded  at  the 
Photographic  Exhibition  at  Hamburg,  1868,  both  single  and  double  albumenized,  can  be  worked  suc- 
cessfully by  any  formula  in  use.  It  prints  and  tones  rapidly,  producing  faithfully  the  finest  effects  of 
the  negatives.  Even  with  a  slight  silvering,  in  a  completely  neutral  silver  bath  (1  :  15-20),  they  pro- 
duce in  the  gold  bath  a  rich,  succulent,  and  warm  tone.  We  warmly  recommend  them  to  all  photo- 
graphic stockhouses. 


C©WI£ 


MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 


No.  4  Beekman  Street,  New  York, 


WHOLESALE  DEALEKS  IN 


BMAMEMM  MWPPMMM 

On  the  Most  Advantageous  Terms,  with 

EVERY  ARTICLE  IN  THE  WORLD 

Used  or  sold  in  the  Art  of  Photography. 


fflgff*  Our  facilities  are  such  that  we  cannot  be  superseded  by  any 
other  house  anywheres.  "We  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to 
deal  with  us. 


ASK  YOUR  DEALER  FOR  SCOVILL'S  GOODS. 


"e"Seem°ntSrd°rment6  "PHOTOQRAPHIC  TIMES." 


J.  A.  ANDERSONS 

Position  and  Baby  Chair 
Combined. 


THE  HANDSOMEST, 

MOST  COMPLETE, 

AND  CHEAPEST 

PIECE  OF  APPARATUS  EVER  OFFERED  TO  THE  PHOTOGRAPHER, 


BUY  NO  IMITATION. 


SEND  FOR  PRICE  LIST. 


Photographers  can  save  from  10  to  20  per  cent,  by  sending  direct  to  the 
manufactory  for  Apparatus. 

J.  A.  ANDERSON, 

LA  TE  ANDERSON  &  BIXB  Y. 

65    EAST    INDIANA    ST.,   CHICAGO. 


PHOTOCRAPHIC 


FOR  1874. 


EDITED  BY  EDWARD  E.  WILSON. 


This  favorite    annual  is    NOW    READY,    wholly    filled    with   Articles   prepared 
expressly  for  it  by  the  eminent  photographers  of  Europe  and  America,  and  is 

UNUSUALLY   GOOD! 


BEAD   THE  CONTENTS, 


1873  ;  On  the  Sensitiveness  of  Bromide  of  Sil- 
ver ;  Toning  and  Fixing ;  Is  Honesty  the  Best 
Policy?  Transparent  Paper;  Growing;  A  New 
Test  for  Hyposulphite  of  Sodium  ;  Chemical 
Manipulation  and  Collodion ;  How  to  Buy  a 
Lens  ;  Copying  of  Every  Description  Executed 
in  the  Highest  Style  of  the  Art ;  Expression  ; 
The  Reception-Room  ;  Treatment  of  Prints  after 
Toning  ;  Public  Taste  ;  Plate  Vise  ;  Progress  of 
Photography  in  America  ;  How  to  be  a  Photog- 
rapher of  the  Times  ;  The  Uncertainties  of  Pho- 
tography ;  Exploration  Field  Photography  ;  How 
to  Make  Varnish  for  Negatives,  and  How  to 
Varnish  Them  ;  Porcelain  Printing ;  How  to 
Elevate  Our  Art ;  Lighting  for  Portraits  ;  Some- 
thing Practical  ;  Photographs  ;  Negative  Var- 
nish ;  Lighting  the  Sitter  ;  Photographic  Excel- 
lence ;  On  Certain  Causes  of  Failure  and  Success 
in  Photography;  Negative  Retouching;  The 
Roller  Press  and  Burnisher  ;  Recovery  of  Gold 
and  Silver  from  the  Waste  or  Spent  Solutions  ; 


Concerning  Formulae  ;  Notes  on  Photographic 
Subjects ;  Hints  on  Photographic  Printing ; 
Things  which  Hurt;  Collodion  Transfers  ;  Along- 
side ;  A  Chapter  on  Practical  Matters  ;  W h ;i t  to 
do  with  Negative  Baths  which  have  been  Ren- 
dered Unserviceable  by  Constant  Usage  ;  Photo- 
graphic Literature  ;  Influence  of  Long  and  Short 
Exposures  upon  the  Brilliancy  of  the  Pictures; 
Wet-Plate  Photography  Out  of  Doors  ;  Sandarac 
and  Benzoin  Varnish  ;  On  Printing,  and  How  to 
do  it;  Cleansing  a  Discolored  Printing  Bath; 
On  the  Double  Iodides  and  Bromides,  and  How 
to  Prepare  Them  ;  Backgrounds:  Mr.  Faulkner's 
Method  of  Making  Them  ;  A  Practical  Sugges- 
tion for  Stereo-Landscape  Negatives  ;  Preparing 
Photographs,  etc.,  for  Coloring;  No  More  Pin- 
Holes;  Successive  Development;  The  Green- 
Glass  Question  ;  Backgrounds  ;  Transparencies 
for  the  Stereoscope ;  Lantern  Pictures  ;  The 
Dark-Room  ;  Photographing  in  Hot  Climates ; 
Many  Mites  from  Many  Minds. 


Price,  in  Cloth,  $1.00 ;  in  Paper  Cover,  50  Cents. 


The  Best  Little  HaMM  of  Photography  in  the  Worlfl.       For  Sale  by  all  Dealers, 


BENEBMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publisher*, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


GRAND   MEDAL  OF  MERIT 


AWARDED  AT  VIENNA  TO 


SEND    FOR   A    CATALOGUE. 


Charles  Bierstadt 


LANDSCAPE 
lj     PHOTOGRAPHER, 

Trade  supplied  with  the  best  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  Hudson  River,  Saratoga,  Partage, 
New  York,Watkins'  Glen,  Havana  Glen,  California,  Yosemite  Valley,  Eogers'  Statuary,  &c. 


Niagara  Falls,  N.Y. 


D.  J.  RYAN'S 

Southern  Photographic  and  Ferrotype 

STOCK     DEPOT, 

SAVAMAH,    GA. 

First- Class  Stock  at  Northern  Prices, 

Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance,  Drayage,  &c. 

8@-  SEND  FOR  PRICE  LIST. 


F.  G.  WELLER,  PUBLISHER  OF  STEREOSCOPIC  VIEWS 

OF  THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS  AND  VICINITY  AND  MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS, 

LITTLETON,  N.  H. 

SPECIALTY:  WELLER'S  STEREOSCOPIC  TREASURES,  which  embrace  a  series  of  subject  pic- 
tures from  nature,  such  as  are  not  made  by  any  other  artist  in  the  country.  New  subjects  added  continually. 
Dealers  and  jobbers  supplied  on  favorable  terms. 


POWERS     «     WEIGHTMAN, 


MANUFACTURING  CHEMISTS, 


Offer  to  Stockdealers 
A  full  Assortment  of  Reliable 


Photographic  Chemicals 


Of  their  own  Manufacture, 
including  : 


Nitrate  of  Silver,  Sulphuric  Ether  (concentrated),  Ammonia  (concentrated), 
Bromide  of  Potassium,  Acetic  Acid,  Chemically  Pure  Acids, 
Iron  and  Ammonia  Proto-Sulphate,  Chloride  of  Gold, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  Sulphate  of  Iron,  Cyanide  of  Potassium, 
Chloroform,  Tannin,  Sulphuret  of  Potassium. 

MANUAL  OF  PHOTOGRAPHY, 

SECOND  EDITION,  $3.75. 

Is  for  sale  by  all  dealers,  and  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philada. 


MAMMOTH   PHOTOGRAPHIC  STOCK   HOUSE. 

No.  259  Wabash  Avenue,  Chicago,  Ills., 


AGENTS    FOR   THE    NORTHWEST    FOR 


WESTON'S  ROTARY  BURNISHER. 


Send  for  our  complete  Price  List. 


*©-     TO  PEOFESSIONAL   PHOTOGKAPHEKS    AND   THE   TEADE. 


CH.    DAUVOIS, 

Acknowledged  to  be  the  Best  and  Cheapest  in  the  World. 


No.  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris, 

ESPECIAL    MANUFACTURERS    OF 

MOUNTSoSnFOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


Bristol  Boards  of  every  size  and  thickness,  plain. 

India  Tinted  and  Fancy  Printing. 

Book-post  and  Card  Cases. 

Stout  Blotting  Paper  Albums. 

First-class  Kives  Albumenized  Paper,  Ac,  <fec. 


TRADE    MARK,    Ch.D 

Mounts  for  Cartes-de-Visite, 
Cabinet  Portrait, 
Victoria  Card, 

Stereoscopic  Views — all  new  samples  of  French 
styles. 

MEDALS  AWARDED  AT  EVERT  EXHIBITION. 

All  orders  are  to  be  sent  to  their  establishment,  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris,  or  to  Wholesale  Houses 
of  the  United  States.     Samples  on  application. 

LIBERAL  DISCOUNT  TO  WHOLESALE  HOUSES. 

TRY    IT    AND    BE    CONVINCED. 


The  best  COLLODION  in  use  is 

LEWIS  &  HOLT'S  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE, 

Sold  with  a  Printed  Formula  accompanying  each  Bottle. 

Being  among  the  first  in  this  country  to  make  Collodion  Pictures,  they  can  warrant  it  to  be  one 

of  the  best  in  use. 

ALSO,  THEIR 

ADAMANTINE  VARNISH  for  Aitootjpes,  Negatives,  and  Melainotypes. 

This  Varnish,  when  applied  to  Negatives," dries  in  a  few  seconds  perfectly  hard,  and  does  not  lower  the 
Intensity,  or  soften  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  in  Printing.  It  gives  a  beautiful  gloss  and  brilliancy  to 
Ambrotypes.    For  Sale  by  Stockdealers  generally.    Prepared  by  j^_  ^    LEWIS 

160  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

HEADQUARTERS     FOR    THE     TRADE. 

Show  Displayers,  Velvet  Stands, 

Velvet  Passepartouts,         Velvet  Oases, 
Beveled  Matts,  Double  Matts, 

Fancy  Metal  Frames,  Standard  Matts, 

Fancy  Paper  Passepartouts. 

These  goods  are  entirely  of  our  own  manufacturing.  A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand  ;  odd 
sizes  and  styles  made  to  order. 

LEWIS  PATTBERG  &  BRO.,  709  (&TwO  Broadway,  New  York. 


Established  in  1857. 


L.  DUBERNET, 


Manufacturer  of 


PAPER  PASSEPARTOUTS, 

ENAMELED  AND  VELVET  PASSEPARTOUTS, 
PLAIN  AND  DOUBLE  MATTS, 
VELVET  STANDS, 

FAJfCT  GILT  FRAMES,  AND  EASELS, 

AND  THE  NEWEST  STYLES  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  FRAMES, 

13  &  15  AMITY  ST.  (near  the  Grani  Central  Hotel),  NEW  YORK. 

PICTURE    AND    STOCK    DEALERS    SUPPLIED. 


icy's  sciopticon 

aqreattyi">Prove(ffom0t 

X.MP, 


Unrivalled 


Price,  latest  improvements,  complete, 

with  Camera  Objective, $45.00 

Price,  without  front  objective, 36.00 

For  Circulars  address 

L.  J.  MARCY, 

1340  Chestnut  St., 

Philadelphia,  fa. 

Marcy's  Photographic  Printing  Apparatus,  Price  $7.00. 
(See  Philadelphia  Photographer,  1872,  page  38.) 

The  Sciopticon  Manual, 

Including  Optics,  Experiments,  Photographing,  and  Coloring 
Slides,  &c.     Enlarged,  .Revised  Edition  Just  Out. 

.fl®~  Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  50  cents. 


enlaRGE  M 


enTS 


IDE  Bl  THE  SOLID  CIIB1, 

AND  COPYING  DONE,  FOR  THE  TRADE. 


18  SOLAR   CAMERAS. 


EXPEDITIOUS. 


Send  for  Instructions  (free)  for  making        CYOITI     I    CMTT 
SOLAR  NEGATIVES.  LAOLLLLIl  I 


ALBERT   MOORE, 

No.  828  Wood  Street,  Philadelphia. 


TetWERkwCE  vsCTMRt 


^R.W. 


*>&, 


iW 


JANUARY. 


ELBERT  ANDERSON'S 


PHOTO-COMIC  AU1YD1CI ! 

Makes  everybody  scream,  while  it  is  also  a  book  embodying  instruction,  and  handsomely  illustrated. 
Among  other  things  it  contains 


For  each  month  in  the  year;  embellished  handsomely;    EXPLANATIONS  OF  THE  TWELVE 
SIGNS  OF  THE  ZODIAC  ILLUSTRATED ;  and  the  following  : 


Dedication. 

The  Weather. 

The  Probabilities. 

Places  of  the  Planets. 

Eclipses. 

Cronological  Circlelers. 

Customary  Notes. 

To  Find  your  Horror'scope. 

Signs  of  the  Zodiac. 

The  Photographic  Hamlet. 


"  Say  Amen  !  to  that,  Brother." 

Declining  a  Kiss. 

Not  at  all  Extraordinary. 

Riddlicous. 

An  Incident  of  my  Life. 

Rapidity  of  Light. 

Money  vs.  Honor. 

The  Lowest  Depth  of  Meanness. 

He  Didn't  Dance  the  "Lancers.'' 

Three  Collodion  Puzzles. 

A  Joke  and  its  Results. 


I   Photo.  Mezzotints. 
i   The  Twins. 

Beware  of  Strangers  who  ask  you 
to  Play  Cards. 

'Notice  to  Sportsmen. 

Sphynx. 

What  I  Know  of  Photography. 

After-Dinner  Session. 

Art  as  Apt-lied  to  Photography. 

A  Tale  of  a  Fox. 


It  is  full  of  witty  stories,  sayings,  doings,  puns,  jokes,  practical  hints,  take-offs,  etc.,  with  grotesque 
illustrations,  and  all  the  features  of  a  first-class  Almanac.  All  the  wit  and  humor  which  Mr.  Ander- 
son suppressed  in  his  "Skylight  and  Dark-Room,"  may  be  found  in  his  ALLMYKNACK.  Samples 
of  illustrations  herewith.     Dealers  can  sell  thousands  ;  photographers  can  sell  hundreds. 

Liberal  discount  for  wholesale  orders. 

JUST  THE  THING   FOR  DULL  WEATHER. 

PRICE  75  CENTS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON",  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 
J8iil~  You  have  no  idea  how  good  and  how  funny  it  is. 


The  publishers  of  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHEK,  encouraged  by  the 
growing  interest  taken  in  their  PREMIUM  LIST,  by  operators,  printers,  employees,  etc  , 
offer  the  following 

PREMIUMS  FOR  1874, 

FOR  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS. 


CONDITIONS!  These  premiums  are  only  given  to  old  or  present  subscribers  for 
new  ones.     No  premium  will  be  given  you  on  your  own  renewal. 


"WE  WILL  GIVE  FOR  THREE  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  (IN  ADDITION  TO 
YOUR  OWN),  EOR  ONE  YEAR, 

Vols.  I  &  II  of  the  Photographic  World 


TWO  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  FOR  ONE  YEAR, 


Either  Volume  I  or  II  of  the  Photographic  World, 


Or  your  choice  of  the  following  :  $1  on  each  per  year,  payable  in  any  of  our  publications, 
not  in  cash ;  i.  e.,  $10  will  secure  our  Magazine  for  one  year  to  a,n  OLD  subscriber,  to  a  new  one, 
and  one  dollar's  worth  of  our  other  publications. 

Any  enterprising  operator  can,  by  writing  a  few  letters  and  a  little  effort,  secure  enough 
new  subscribers  to  pay  for  his  own,  and  fit  him  out  with  our  whole  list  of  premiums,  or  a 
set  of  the  six  Luckhardt  pictures.     (See  special  advertisement.) 

This  magnificent  offer  was  never  equalled  by  any  publisher,  photographic  or  otherwise. 
Strive  hard  to  win  the  whole  ! 

Please  examine  the  order  blanks  in  this  number,  and  send  for  more  if  you  wish  them. 

BENEKMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 

Philadelphia  Photographer  for  1874 ! 

The  increasing  favor  shown  the  publishers  of  this  Magazine  during  the  first  ten  years  of  its  life, 
has  given  them  the  means  to  prepare  for  their  intelligent  patrons  still  greater  attractions  than 
ever  for  the  year  1874.     The  old.  staff  of  regular  contributors  will  be  continued. 

A'  series  of  illustrated  descriptive  articles  on 

PHOTOGRAPHY   IN   FRANCE, 

which  will  include  descriptions  of  all  the  leading  photographic  studios  and  factories  in  France,  are 
being  contributed  by  Mons.  Ernest  Lacan,  Secretary  of  the  French  Photographic  Society. 
One  of  a  series  of  handsomely  illustrated  articles,  entitled 

VIEWS    ABROAD    AND    ACROSS, 

by  the  editor,  including  sketches  of  matters  and  things  photographic,  made  during  a  tour  in  Eng- 
land, Ireland,  Scotland,  France,  Belgium,  Prussia,  Austria,  Italy,  and  Switzerland,  will  be  in  each 
number  during  the  year ;  a  continuation  of  the  articles  on  the  study  of  art ;  fresh  and  original 
papers  by  old  and  new  contributors,  &c,  &c. 

DURING   1874, 

No  photographic  artist  should  fail  to  subscribe ■  for  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGKAPHEE. 
It  is  going  to  be  one  of  the  most  eventful  years  ever  known  in  the  art,  for 

TWO  GREAT  PATENT  CONTESTS, 

now  under  way — the  "Shaw"  patent  and  the  Sliding  Plate-holder  patent — both  of  vital  impor- 
tance to  the  craft,  will  take  place,  and  all  should  be  posted  on  them  as  they  proceed.  The  fullest 
and  earliest  information  will  be  given  in  this  Magazine. 

THE  PROCEEDINGS  OF  "THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGEAPHIC  ASSOCIATION  are 
only  given  entire  in  one  number  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

THE    EMBELLISHMENTS   FOR    1874 

will  be  from  negatives  by  Messrs.  Luckbardt,  Marshall,  Sommer,  Eobinson  &  Cherrill,  Kurtz, 
Jewell,  North,  Curtis,  Mottu,  and  others,  and  will  be  unusually  excellent  and  choice,  illustrating 
all  branches  of  photography,  and  introducing  very  useful  studies. 

THEY  ALONE  WILL  BE  WORTH  THE  COST  OP  SUBSCRIPTION. 

ILLUSTEATIONS,  by  means  of  engravings,  cuts,  &c,  will  be  profusely  employed,  and  every 
effort  made  to  secure  to  the  readers  of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer 

The  Most  Elegant  and  Useful  Photographic  Magazine  in  the  World! 

To  Employees,  Employees,  &c.  ;  Please  read  our  liberal  offer  of 

PREMIUMS  ON  THE  OPPOSITE  PAGE 


NOTICE   TO    SUBSCRIBERS. 


Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2  50  for  six  months,  50  cents  per  copy.     Positively  in  advance. 
In  remitting  by  mail  a  post-office  order,  or  draft  payable  to  the  order  of  Benerman  &  Wilson,  is 
preferable  to  bank  notes.      Clearly  give   your  Post-office,  County,  and  State. 

Canada  subscribers  must  remit  24  cents  extra,  to  prepay  postage.  Foreign  subscriptions  must  be 
accompanied  by  the  postage  in  addition. 

Advertising  sheets  are  bound  with  each  number  of  the  Magazine.  Advertisements  are  inserted 
at  the  following  rates : 

One  Month.  Six  Months.  One  Year. 

One  Page, $20  00    $110  00    $200  00 

Half    " 12  00     66  00     120  00 

Quarter  Page, 7  00     38  50    70  00 

Eighth        '•      4  00     22  00     40  00 

Cards,  of  Six  lines  or  less, 2  00    1100    20  00 

The  attention  of  advertisers,  and  those  having  galleries,  &c,  for  sale,  is  called  to  our  Specialties 
pages.  Terms  $2  for  six  lines,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a  line,  always 
in  advance.  Duplicate  insertions,  50  cents  less,  each.  Sure  to  pay.  Jjjgp^Operators  desiring  situa- 
tions, no  charge. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

OFFICE,  S.W.  COR.  OF  SEVENTH  AND  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


IT    WILL    PAY    TO   BUY    THE    BEST. 

ENTREKIN'S 

OSCILLATING  ENAMELER. 


PHOTOGRAPHS,  jKilcIS^  ™H  &  ™s 

FAR  SUPERIOR   TO   ANYTHING   YET   INVENTED   FOR  THAT   PURPOSE. 

PRICE    LIST: 

6  inch  Roll,  $25;  14  inch  Roll,  $45;  18  inch  Roll,  $75. 


EVERY    MACHINE    WARRANTED    PERFECT. 


Office  of  C.  M.  Parks,  Late  Principal  Examiner  in  the  Patent  Office, 
Washington,  December  12th,  1873. 
William  G.  Entrekin. 

Dear  Sir  :  I  am  familiar  with  the  class  of  machines  to  which  your  Photographic  Burnisher  relates, 
as  I  was  examiner  of  that  class  of  inventions  in  the  United  States  Patent  Office  for  some  time,  and  have 
had  occasion  to  keep  myself  posted  in  regard  to  them  since,  and  believe  your  Burnisher  is  the  very  best 
in  existence,  embracing  all  the- features  necessary  to  make  a  complete  polished  surface  upon  a  photo- 
graph, and  also  believe  the  time  will  come  when  every  photographer  of  any  pretensions  will  be  com- 
pelled to  use  one.     I  predict  for  you  success  in  your  patent.  Yours  truly, 

C.  M.  Parks,  Solicitor  of  Patents. 

Office  of  C.  M.  Parks,  Solicitor  of  Patents,  428  Seventh  Street, 
Washington,  D.  C,  January  5th,  1874. 
Wsr.  G.  Entrekin. 

Dear  Sir  :  Yours  is  just  received.  You  need  not  fear  any  trouble  from  any  parties  in  regard  to 
the  Weston  machine  ;  your  Burnisher  does  not  infringe  with  any  feature  of  the  Weston  machine  in 
the  least  particular.     You  can,  therefore,  manufacture  and  sell  your  machine  with  impunity. 

Yours  truly,  C.  M.  Parks. 


Q^=  WE 

All  photographers  not  to  be  frightened  out  of  purchasing  our  superior  ''Oscillating  Enameler  for 
Burnishing  Photographs."  We  simply  defy  any  party  or  parties  to  interfere  with  us  in  the  manufac- 
ture or  sale  of  said  machine,  for  which  we  hold  letters  patent  for  seventeen  years,  in  the  United  States 
and  Territories.  We  will  guarantee  protection  to  every  purchaser.  We  shall  sell  to  the  fraternity  a 
good  machine  at  a  fair  price.  Photographers  can  buy  direct  from  us,  if  they  cannot  procure  them  of 
their  dealers. 

W.  G.  ENTKEKIN,  Patentee, 

4382  &  43 8 4  Main  St.,  Manayurik,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


Address  ALL  Communications,  both  for  the  Editor  and  the  Publishers,  to  Sherman's 
Building,  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Number  123. 


50  Cents. 


THE 


PHILADELPHIA 


Iwtojjraph^r- 


AN  ILLUSTRATED  MONTHLY  JOURNAL, 


DEVOTED  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


THE  OFFICIAL  ORGAN  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGEAPHIO 
ASSOCIATION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. 


JS/L  sl  r  o  la.,    1  S  "Z  4=. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

BENERMAN    &     WILSON, 

PUBLISHEKS. 


Subscriptions  received  by  all  News  and  Stockdealers. 

FIVE  DOLLARS  PER  ANNUM,  IN  ADVANCE. 


Sherman,  &  Co.,  Printers,  Philadelphia. 


THE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS-Business  Bringers  at  all  times. 
fi@?~  See  Advertisements  inside. 


SUMMARY    OP    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Our  Prize  Offer , 65 

The  World  Moves 65 

The  Financial  Condition  of  the  N:  P.  A 65 

Burnt-in  Enamel  Photographs 66 

Things  Kew  and  Old.    By  R.  J.  Chute 68 

Art  Studies  for  All.    VIII 70 

The  Chicago  Exhibition 71 

Butterfleld's  Sight-Rest = 71 

Something  About  Plain  Prints.    By  M.  C.  Edgerly,  72 

A  Word  for  Our  Profession.    By  W.  Heighway 74 

How  to  Cut  the  Paper — How  to  Catch  the  Baby 75 

How  to  Make  a  Wonder  Camera.    By  C.  M.  Carter,  76 


PAGE 

Wrinkles  and  Dodges 76 

TheSphynx : 78 

Society  Gossip 78 

A  Splendid  Offer 81 

Views  Abroad  and  Across.    By  Edward  L.  Wilson,  82 

Griswold's  Photographic  Compositions 88 

Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler 89 

Matters  of  the  N.  P.  A 89 

Our  Picture 90 

Notes  In  and  Out  of  the  Studio.    By  G.  Wharton 

Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A 93 

Editor's  Table 94 


Embellishment.— Combination  Picture,  "Preparing  Spring  Flowers  for  Market."    Negatives  by  Robinson 
&  Cherrill,  Tumbridge  Wells,  Eng.    Prints  by  Wm.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s  Paper. 

Anderson's  Photo-Comic  "Allmyknack." 

Anderson,  J.  A.    Photographic  Apparatus. 

Anthony  &  Co.,  E.  &  H.  T.    The  Bowdish  Chair. 

Ayres'  Chart  of  Photographic  Drapery'. 

Benerman  &  Wilson.    Lantern  Slides. 

Bierstadt,  Charles.    Photo.  Views. 

Bullock  &  Crenshaw.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Chameleon  Barometer. 

Clemons,  Jno.  R.    Albumen  Paper.    Varnish. 

Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  A.  M.    Photograph  Cards. 

Cooper  &  Co.,  Chas.    Portrait  Lenses. 

Curtis,  G.  E.    Stereo.  Views. 

Dubernet,  L.    Passepartouts  and  Picture  Frames. 

Entrekin,  W.  G.    Oscillating  Enameler. 

Felt,  L.  W.    The  Photographer's  Exchange. 

French,  B.  &  Co.    Voigtlander  Lenses,  &c. 

Gihon,  John  L.    Opaque  and  Cut-Outs. 

Hance's  Photo.  Specialties. 

Jacoby,  W.  H.    Printing  Frame. 

Hale,  Kilburn  &  Co.    Frames. 

Karstens  &  Braun.    Albumen  Paper. 

Kilburn  Bros.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Lea's  Manual  of  Photography. 

Lewis,  R.  A.    Collodion. 

Liesegang,  E.    Albumen  Paper, 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 

Marcy',  L.  J.    Sciopticon. 

Marion  &  Co.    Specialties. 

Magee,  James  F.  &  Co.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

McAllister,  W.  Mitchell.    Manufacturing  Optician. 

McCollin,  Thos.  H.    Photographic  Materials. 

Moore,  Albert.    Solar  Printing. 

Mosaics,  1873  and  1874. 

Moulton,  L.  V.    Rapid  Photo-Washer. 


National  Photographers'  Chemical  Co. 
Newell  &  Son,  R.    Chemical-Proof  Photo.  Ware. 
Pattberg,  Lewis  &  Bro.    Passepartouts,  &c. 
Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 
Photographer's  Pocket  Reference-Book. 
Photographic  Publications. 
Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 
Powebs  &  Weightman.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Premiums  for  1874,  for  New  Subscribers  to  "Philadel- 
phia Photographer.'' 
Rau,  Geo.    German  Albumen  Colors. 
Robinson's  New  Photo.  Trimmer. 
Robinson's  Metallic  Guides. 
Rohaut  &  Hutinet.    Photographic  Mounts. 
Ross's  Photographic  Lenses. 
Rotter,  Geo.  &  Co.    Albumen  Paper. 
Ryan,  D.  J.    Photo.  Stock  Depot,  Chromos,  &c. 
Sauter,  G.    Passepartouts. 
Schwarze  &  Valk.    Photo,  Papers. 
Scovill  Manf'g.  Co.    Photographic  Materials. 
Seavey  L.  W.    Scenic  Artist,  Backgrounds,  &c. 
Shoemaker,  Benjamin  H.    Photo.  Glass. 
Steinheil's  New  Aplanatic  Lenses. 
Stereograph  Book. 

Stevens,  Chas.  W.    Photographic  Goods. 
The  Sky-light  and  the  Dark-Room. 
Waymouth-'s  Vignetting  Papers. 
Weller's  Stereoscopic  Treasures. 
Wilson,  Charles  A.    Photographic  Goods. 
Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials,  &c. 
World,  Back  Volumes  of. 
Woodward,  D.  A.    Solar  Cameras. 
Year-Book  of  Photography. 
Zentmay'er,  Joseph.    Lenses. 


Special  Premium  of  Six  Handsome  German 
Cabinet  Pictures  of  Ladies ! 

By  FRITZ  LUCKHARDT,  Vienna,  Austria. 

These  pictures  are  alone  worth  $3  for  the  set,  and  more  is  asked  for 
such  by  dealers. 


Given  to  any  one  wno  fill  sen!  ns  a  NEW  Sntarilier  for  tie  year  1874. 


What  Others  Think  of  the  Prizes: 


"These  studies  were  greatly  admired  by  the 
members  present,  and  all  were  convinced  that 
they  were  worthy  of  most  careful  study." — Min- 
utes of  the  Chicago  Photo.  Association. 

"  These  pictures  were  examined  and  much  ad- 
mired by  all  present.'' — Indiana  Photo.  Ass'n. 

"The  pictures  elicited  general  praise;  the 
draperies  especially  were  very  favorably  com- 
mented upon.'' — German  Photographers'1  Socie- 
ty, New  York. 

"  The  prints  were  thought  to  be  worth  more 
than  the  price  which  was  charged  for  the  journal, 
i.e.,  $5  ;  and  the  President,  Mr. Black,  stated  that 
every  operator  should  have  a  set,  for  he  considered 
them  to  be  most  admirable  studies,  and  superior 
to  anything  which  he  had  seen  heretofore." — 
Boston  Photographic  Society. 


"They  were  accepted  as  being  of  a  very  high 
standard.'' — Brooklyn  Photo.  Art  Assaciatioti. 

"  The  high  artistic  merits  of  the  pictures,  and 
their  great  value  as  studies  for  the  progressive 
photographer,  were  conceded  by  all.  The  general 
harmony  in  the  details  of  each  print,  the  man- 
agement of  light,  and  beautiful  rendering  of 
texture  were  greatly  admired." — Photographic 
Section  of  the  American  Institute,  iV.  Y. 

Special  votes  of  thanks  were  given  for  them 
by  the  Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia  ; 
Photographic  Association  of  West.  Illinois  ;  Chi- 
cago Photographic  Association  ;  Indiana,  District 
of  Columbia,  and  Maryland  Photographic  Asso- 
ciations ;  Photographic  Section  of  the  American 
Institute ;  German  Photographers'  Society,  New 
York ;  Boston  and  Brooklyn  Photographic  Art 
Associations,  whereat  they  attracted  great  atten- 
tion and  admiration. 


A  Few  Words  from  those  who  have  received  them  as  Premiums  for  New  Subscribers : 


"  I  think  when  we  say  they  are  splendid  it  is 
only  a  mild  expression  of  what  they  will  bear." 
— E.  F.  Everett. 

"They  are  well  worth  striving  for,  and  the 
photographers  who  allow  this  set  to  remain  out- 


side their  collection  don't  deserve  them.'' — J. 
Pitcher  Spooner. 

*'  They  are  by  far  the  best  specimens  of  pho- 
tographs of  white  drapery  that  I  ever  saw,  and 
the  artistic  part  leaves  nothing  to  wish  for." — 
James  Paris. 


We  make  this  offer  as  a  matter  of  business,  and  not  as  favor  to  any  one 
on  either  side.  It  will  pay  you  to  give  a  year's  subscription  to  your  oper- 
ator or  to  your  friend  or  customer,  in  order  to  secure  these  pictures. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philada. 


The 


And  Perfectly^    . 

^il^HAIR. 


4  TESTIMONIALS : 

H 


Enabling  the  photographer  to  successfully  secure  every  variety  of  pose  with  facility  and  reliability. 
It  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  varying  necessities  of  female  portraiture,  and  is  equally  suited  for 
children,  for  vignettes,  or  for  full  lengths.  The  BOWDISH  CHAIR  is  substantial  in  construction, 
elegant  in  design,  and  rich  in  upholstery  and  finish.  Those  who  have  purchased  them,  speak  in  the 
highest  terms,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 

-+ 

"About  ten  days  ago  I  received  the  new  chair  you  promised  to  send  me  when  I  saw  you  last,  and 
would  have  written  and  acknowledged  your  kind  favor  long  ago  if  1  had  correctly  known  your  ad- 
dress. Accept  my  best  thnnks  for  this  really  beautiful  chair,  which  now,  after  ten  days'  trial,  has 
proved  to  be  a  decided  success  in  every  way.  It  has  become  the  real  favorite  for  posing  in  my  studio. 
Besides  this,  in  external  appearance  the  new  chair  appears  so  much  superior  in  finish,  and  is  at  the 
same  time  highly  ornamental,  and  the  head  rest  is  so  much  easier  handled  than  with  any  chair  I  have 
ever  seen  before.  In  short,  it  gives  the  sitter  the  greatest  possible  comfort  and  steadiness.  I  think 
the  chair  I  have  justly  deserves  the  name  of  'Perfect  Posing  Chair.'  " — H.  Rocher,  Chicago,  111., 
January  10,  1873. 

"  Since  receiving  your  posing  chair,  nearly  a  year  since,  I  have  had  it  in  constant  use,  and  am 
satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  posing  chair  in  the  market.  It  is  easily  worked,  and  is  so  well  made  that 
one  will  last  a  life  time,  and  then  be  a  valuable  heirloom." — L.  G.  Bigelow. 

"The  Bowdish  Chair  came  in  good  order  and  gives  the  best  of  satisfaction.  Should  you  wish  a 
recommendation  for  it,  say  what  you  please  and  we  will  endorse  it.  You  cannot  praise  it  too  highly." 
— Slee  Bros.,  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  Sept.  10,  1872. 

"  Your  chair  has  arrived  at  last.  lam  much  pleased  with  it.  1  don't  think  my  gallery  can  be 
complete  without  one  of  them.  Wishing  you  the  success  your  invention  merits,  I  am,  truly  yours, 
A.  Hesler." 

Prints  will  be  sent,  if  desired,  before  purchasing.     There  are  three  styles  kept  in  stock,  viz  : 

No.  2.  With  nickel-plated  rods  and  rest,  in  velveteen  or  reps $60  00 

No.  4.        "  "  "  "  "  "    square  carved  legs, 70  00 

No.  6.       "  "  "  "     in  best  plush,  paneled 80  00 

Special  chairs  to  order. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO.,  Sole  Agents, 

591  Broadway,  New  York. 


'SCUT 


Are  the  very  best  that  are  made,  and  are  now  without  a  rival  in  the  market.  They  are  clean 
cut,  most  desirable  shapes  and  sizes,  and  made  of  non-actinic  paper,  manufactured  specially 
for  the  purpose.  Each  package  contains  30  Cut-Outs,  or  Masks,  with  corresponding  Insides, 
assorted  for  five  differently  sized  ovals  and  one  arch-top. 

PRICE,  $1.00  PER  PACKAGE.     Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

Parties  wishing  special  sizes,  or  large  lots  of  a  few  sizes,  may  have  them  cut  to  order 
promptly,  by  addressing  the  manufacturer.     No  lot  costing  less  than  $1.00  made  at  a  time. 

No  printer  should  attempt  to  make  medallion  pictures  without  them. 


THEY  HAVE  NO  EQUAL  FOR  QUALITY. 

Beware  of  spurious  imitations  made  of  common  paper,  full  of  holes,  badly  cut,  and  odd 
shapes  and  sizes.  Ask  your  stockdealer  for  GIHON'S  CUT-OUTS,  and  see  that  they  are 
in  his  envelopes  with  instruction  circular  included. 


IS    DESIGNED    FOR 

COMPLETELY  OBSCURING  THE  IMPERFECT  BACKGROUNDS  OP  COPIES, 
RETOUCHING  NEGATIVES, 

FAULTY  SKIES  IN  LANDSCAPES, 

COATING  THE  INSIDE  OF  LENSES  OR  CAMERA  BOXES, 
BACKING  SOLAR  NEGATIVES, 

COVERING  VIGNETTING  BOARDS, 

AND    FOR  ANSWERING 

ALL  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  INTELLIGENT  PHOTOGRAPHER  IN  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  ARTISTIC  RESULTS  IN  PRINTING. 


WHEREVER  YOU  WANT  TO  KEEP  OUT  LIGHT,  USE  OPAQUE. 

It  is  applied  with  a  brush,  dries  quickly  and  sticks. 


CUT-OUTS  (thirty),  $1.00. 


OPAQUE,  50  CENTS. 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Address  all  orders  to 

JOHN  L.  CIHON,  Inventor, 

128  JT.  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


BOBINSO  rnj'ss 


^ETALL/c 


Oval,  Round,  Elliptic  and  Square,  of  all  sizes  ;  various  shapes  fur  Stereoscopic 
wnrk,  Drug  Isabels,  46c,  Ac.  Regular  sizes  ahiajs  on  band.  Special  Sizes  made 
to  order.  Price  for  regular  photo  sizes,  10  cents  per  inch  the  longest  way  of  the 
aperture.    Special  sizes,  15  cents  per  inch.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents 


PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


HUNDREDS  EXPORTED  TO  ENGLAND  AtfD  GERMANY. 


RO  B  I  N  S  O  N'S 

PHOTOGRAPH    TRIMMER 

IS  A  NECESSITY  AND  CONSIDERED  INVALUABLE. 
For  examples  of  its  work  we  refer  to  the  recent  and  present  pictures  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

IT  SAVES  TIME,  SAVES  PRINTS,  AND  SAVES  MONEY. 

The  accompanying  cut  represents  the  instru- 
ment in  the  act  of  trimming  a  photograph.  It 
does  not««£,  but  pinches  off  \,he  waste  paper,  and 
leaves  the  print  with  a  neatly  beveled  edge  which 
facilitates  the  adherence  of  the  print  to  the 
mount.  Try  one,  and  you  will  discard  the 
knife  and  punch  at  once. 

Oil  the  wheel  bearings  with  Sewing  Machine  Oil. 


A  Trimmer  Mailed  for  $3.50. 

The  difficulty  of  procuring  exactly  true  guides 
for  cutting  out  prints  has  induced  the  inventor 
to  put  up  machinery  for  the  production  of  all 
styles  of  them,  guaranteed  mathematically  true, 
and  to  be  known  as 

ROBINSON'S  IMPROVED  GUIDES. 

See  advertisement  on  opposite  page. 

A  full  stock  of  regular  sizes  now  on  hand. 
A  complete,  illustrated,  catalogue  and  price-list  will 
be  issued  soon. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"  For  cutting  ovals  I  think  the  Robinson  Trimmer 
is  perfect,  and  if  nobody  brings  them  out  in  England 
I  shall,  as  I  think  it  a  pity  such  a  good  thing  should 
not  be  introduced." — Walter  B.  Woodbury. 

"  I  would  rather  give  fifty  dollars  than  be  without 
one.  By  its  use  all  annoyance  from  dull  knives  tear- 
ing the  prints  is  avoided,  and  it  is  a  pleasure  to  use 
it." — E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk. 

"  Robinson's  Photographic  Trimmer  is  an  excellent 
little  instrument.  It  does  the  work  intended  magnifi- 
cently. It  is  not  only  exquisite  for  trimming  photo- 
graphs, but  also  for  making  Cut-Outs  and  cutting  the 
sensitized  paper  to  any  needed  size,  using  for  the 
latter  purpose  a  guide  of  steel  in  form  of  a  ruler,  thus 
entirely  dispensing  with  the  knife." — Bern'd  Kihl- 
holz,  Chicago,  Ml. 

"  I  like  the  Trimmer  very  much.  I  think  it  a  very 
useful  article.  It  works  well  and  does  all  it  is  recom- 
mended to  do." — F.  G.  Weller,  Littleton,  N.  H. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmers  have  come  to  hand,  and 
I  like  them  very  much ;  they  are  just  what  I  wanted 
and  found  it  difficult  to  get." — J.  W.  Black,  Boston. 

"I  am  using  the  Robinson  Trimmer  and  consider 
it  the  best  article  for  trimming  photographs  I  ever 
saw." — W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"  It  does  its  work  magnificently.  The  only  wonder 
is,  that  it  was  not  invented  years  ago.  It  is  indis- 
pensable."—Garrett  Bros.,  Philadelphia. 

"  I  think  the  Robinson  Photographic  Trimmer  is 
the  best  thing  ever  put  upon  the  market  for  photo- 
graphic use.  It  is  cheap  and  does  its  work  perfect.  I 
now  make  with  it  all  the  cut-outs  I  use,  and  also  cut 
out  all  my  photographs  from  eleven  by  fourteen 
down  to  cards.  It  only  cost  me  four  dollars  and  I 
would  not  be  without  it  for  the  best  twenty-five  dol- 
ar  cutting  machine  I  ever  saw." — D.  Lothrop,  Phila. 


"  The  Trimmer  comes  up  to  all  you  claim  for  it.  I 
would  not  be  without  it." — T.  Cummings,  Lancaster. 

"  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  is  all  that  it  is 
claimed  to  be.  I  have  trimmed  all  my  prints  with  it 
from  the  day  I  received  it,  in  less  than  half  the  time 
taken  by  a  knife.  It  does  its  work  with  mathematical 
correctness  and  uniformity.  I  would  not  be  without 
it  for  ten  times  its  cost.  It  cannot  be  recommended 
too  highly." — W.  H.  Cranston,  Comj,  Pa. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmer  has  proved  to  us  one  of 
the  most  usefully  instruments  that  we  have  in  our 
gallery.  In  the  few  months  that  we  have  owned  it  we 
cut  some  10,000  photographs  with  it,  which  were  cut 
in  one-fourth  the  time,  and  cut  better  than  any  other 
instrument  could  do  it." — Schreiber  &  Sons,  Phila. 

"  It  does  the  work  quick,  sure,  and  perfect.  We 
would  not  be  without  it.  It  is  simply  what  it  is  rep- 
resented to  be." — B.  Frank  Saylor  &  Co.,  Lancaster. 
"The  Photograph  Trimmer  is  a  good  and  quick  work- 
ing  thing.  I  do  not  want  any  thing  better  and  more 
useful  in  the  gallery  for  that  purpose.  I  would  not 
be  without  one." — A.  M.  Bachman,  Allenlown,  Pa. 

"  I  have  used  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  some 
time.  A  lady  was  asked  how  she  liked  her  sewing 
machine,  and  in  reply  said  '  Well  I  could  get  along 
without  it,  but  when  I  do  I  shall  not  sew  any  more.' 
That  is  me,  I  can  get  along  without  the  Trimmer  but 
when  I  do  I  shall  not  trim  photographs." — Well  G. 
Singhi,  Binghamton,  N.  Y. 

"  It  gives  perfect  satisfaction,  being  the  best  thing 
of  the  kind  I  have  ever  used.  There  is  nothing 
amongst  my  photographic  stock  more  useful." — M.  P. 
Rice,  Washington,  D.  C. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmer  works  admirably.  Does 
the  work  intended  with  great  satisfaction." — A.  K.  P. 
Trask,  Philadelphia. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 
FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS.  PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


SOUTHERN  PHOTOGRAPHERS 

Buy  your  Goods  in  Baltimore  at  the 

Popular  Stock  Depot. 

cos.  i  wason^^s*' 

Invites  those  desiring  low  prices,  good  goods,  and  promptness  to  send  him  their  orders. 

VOIGTLANDER'S  CAMERA  TUBES  AND  LENSES, 

C.  C.  HARRISON'S  PORTRAIT  AND  GLOBE  LENSES, 

AMERICAN  OPTICAL  COMPANY'S  APPARATUS. 

All  popular  brands  of  ALBUMENIZED  PAPER,  both  heavy  and  light,  and  guaranteed  to  produce 
uniformly  the  most  perfect  results. 

DEALER  IN  ALL  MATERIALS  USED  FOR 

POKCELAIN  PICTUKES,  INCLUDING  POKCELAIN  GLASS,  PLAIN  and  GKOUND 

OP  ALL  SIZES,  THE  BEST  IN  MARKET.      A  SPLENDID  ASSORTMENT  OF 

Black  Walnut,  Rosewood,  L^ET"  ^rTJ       /j%       \wkUm    ^wS^  !<3_jj  ^or  Porcelain  Pictures 
Gilt,  an.)  Rustic  rJBr       gEtjb   ##  «¥«  imaM  \tS^       and  Photographs. 

Silt,  CotM  Velvet,  anil  Velvet  Eflp  Passepartouts  for  Porcelain  Pictures. 
GENUINE  B.  P.  C.  GLASS. 

PORCELAIN  WARE  BATHS, 

DIPPERS  AND  TRAYS. 

A  FULL  ASSORTMENT  OF 

CASES,  FRAMES,  GLASS,  APPARATUS,   ROLLER  PRESSES, 

BACKGROUNDS,  PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHAIRS  AND  LOUNGES, 

AND  CHEMICALS  OF  THE  PUREST  MANUFACTURE,  Ac,  Ac, 

With  whatever  else  is  requisite  for  the  pursuit  of  Photography,  supplied  at  the  shortest  notice,  and. 
on  the  most  favorable  terms. 

The  attention  of  Photographers  throughout  the  United  States  is  respectfully  invited  to  the  advan- 
tages offered  of  a  superior  quality  of  materials,  and  extensive  facilities  for  the  execution  of  orders, 
which  are  respectfully  solicited.  Orders  filled  with  care  and  despatch,  and  sent,  if  desired,  with  bill 
for  collection  by  Express,  to  any  part  of  the  United  States. 

Address 

CHAS.  A.  WILSON, 

No.  7  North  Charles  St.,  Baltimore, 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO. 

HATE    BEEN    APPOINTED   AGENTS    EOR   THE    SALE    OF 

Entrekiftfs  Oscillating  Enameler* 


Each  press  is  supplied  with  Gas  Burner  or  Alcohol  Lamp  (as  the  purchaser  prefers),  an 
Oil-Stone,  for  polishing  the  Burnisher,  and  one  jar  of  Entrekin's  Luhricator. 

PRICES   AS   FOLLOWS: 

6  inch,  $25 14  inch,  $45 18  inch,  $75. 

EXTRA  JARS' OP  THE  LUBRICATOR  ONE  DOLLAR. 

WE   ARE   ALSO   AGENTS   EOR 

Julius  Kruger's  Patent  Cement  Water  Colors 

FOR    COLORING    PHOTOGRAPHS    ON    ALBUMEN    OR    PLAIN   PAPERS. 

PRICES: 

Box  of  6  Cakes,  $2.25.-12  Cakes,  $4.25.-18  Cakes,  $6.50. 

We  have  also  an  extra  fine  lot  of 

Parys'  Negative  Gun  Cotton,         price,  per  ounce,  $0.50 
Liesgang's  Papyroxyline,  "        "       1.25 

French  Aniline  Colors,  "  perbox'      5.00 

FULL  STOCK  OF 

MONOGRAM  COLLODIONS,  VARNISHES  and  COTTONS, 
WILSON'S  HEAD  RESTS,  TABLES,  CHAIRS,  VASES,  COLUMNS,  &C. 

Price  Lists  gratis  on  application. 

SALESROOMS,  822  ARCH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO., 

159  Washington  St.,  Boston, 

Importers  and  Sole  Agents  in  the  United  States  for  the  celebrated 

Voigtlander  &  Son,  and  Darlot  Lenses 

For  Portraits,  Views,  and  Stereoscopic  Work  of  all  sizes.     Send  for  Price  List. 


TRY  OUR   NEW  STEREOSCOPIC   LENSES 

IP  YOU  WANT  THE  BEST.     PRICE,  $22  PER  PAIR. 

None  genuine  unless  our  names  are  engraved  on  them. 


ALBUMEN  PAPEKS. 


demon's, 
Hovey's, 


Dresden  S.  &  M., 

"       Brilliant. 


AMERICAN  OPTICAL  CO.'S  CAMERA  BOXES 


Black  Walnut  Frames, 0VAL  and  tv"S£££l£r  *"d  ,t?Us' of 
Carved  Rustic  Frames,  s,u're'  ^1£^12&!n'mm-  A" 

We  have  of  these  three  different  size9  and  styles  for  the  Card, 
Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 


Sherman  Card  Frames. 
White  Hollywood  Frames. 


We  have  these  in  three  different  styles  of  e.aeh  size 
for  the  Card,  Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 


Stereoscopes,  Prang's  Chromos,  Glass  Baths,  Plain  Paper, 
Porcelain  Ware,  &c. 

And  every  description  of  goods  used  in  the  business,  at  wholesale  and  retail,  at  the  lowe*t  cash  prices 

BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO. 


[useum  of  Com^arattbe  ^oologg, 

CAMBRIDGE,  MASS.  >^/«  Zj 

(S71   J 


p-^«^~*.0%i~  -W^h*— ^/^ 


<*£-  J^a^y  M  - 


The  changes  introduced  into  the  SECOND  REVISED  EDITION  of  our  NATURAL  HISTORY 
SERIES  were  made  at  the  suggestion  of  the  late  Prcf.  Agassiz,  and  relate  mainly  to  the 
ietter-press   accompanying   the    plates. 

The  letter  given  in  fac-simile  above  is  evidence  that  we  have  spared  no  pains  to  bring 
the  "Series"  up  to  the  standard  of  the  highest  scientific  excellence.  No  severer  test  could 
be  applied  than  a  close  scrutiny  by  the  great  naturalist,  whose  uncompromising  severity  in 
all  matters  connected  with  his  favorite  science  is  well  known.  Having  succeeded  in  satis- 
fying him,  it  will  no  doubt  be  conceded  that  we  have  given  a  most  valuable  aid  to  those 
teachers  who  cannot  command  the  use  of  a  collection  of  natural  specimens,  systematically 
arranged;  —  a   boon   which    must   be   denied   to   most   of  them,  at  least   for  a  long  time  vto  come. 

For   particulars     apply   to 

L.    PRANG    &    CO.,   Boston,   Mass. 

Publishers  of  Prang's  American  Chromos, 

Prang's   Natural   History  Series,  etc.  etc. 

illustrated  CATALOGUES  of  our  Publications  sent  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  Postage 
Stamp. 


THE 


prilMklplmi  HfcfltflrjMjrkr* 


Vol.  XL 


MARCH,  1874. 


No.  12  3. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1874, 

By  BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


OUR  PRIZE  OFFER. 

Don't  forget  this.  Judging  from  some 
pictures  already  forwarded  to  us,  we  are 
quite  sure  that  the  competition  this  year 
will  be  fiercer  than  ever,  and  that  it  will  be 
RQ»easy  thing  to  get  the  medal,  for  the  com- 
peting pictures  will  be  more  excellent  than 
anjv  ever  before  offered.  Send  the  best  you 
can  make,  and  let  the  competition  be  hearty, 
so  that  whoever  gets  the  medal  will  have  to 
earn  it,  and  the  one  who  gets  it  will  receive 
the  more  credit  with  it. 
■•  The  rules  will  be  the  same  as  in  former 
cases,  and  a  set  of  prints  from  the  compet- 
ing negatives  will  be  sent  to  each  worthy 
competitor.     April  15th  is  the  limit. 


THE  WORLD  MOVES. 

Kefeering  to  our  splendid  offer  on  the 
front  page  of  our  last  number,  we  would 
say  that  the  demand  for  gratis  copies  of  the 
Photographic  World,  more  than  equals  our 
expectations,  and  is  greater  than  at  any 
previous  time.  We  urge  our  readers  to 
come  in  for  their  share  promptly,  as  there 
is  a  probability  of  the  whole  lot  being  taken 
up  by  the  prescribed  time,  March  18th. 

Quite  a  number  have  been  so  much  pleased 
with  the  copies  we  have  given  them  that 
they  write  back  that  they  "must  have  all 
the  rest."     Of  course,  we  are  glad  to  have 


such  appreciative  responses  to  our  "  extra- 
ordinary generosity,"  and  to  save  inquiry, 
we  would  state,  for  the  information  of  those 
interested,  viz.  :  1.  There  are  two  volumes, 
twenty-four  numbers,  of  the  World.  2.  They 
were  originally  published  at  $5  per  volume. 

3.  The  price  was  reduced  to  $3  per  volume. 

4.  Our  present  terms  are,  six  copies  our 
selection,  $0.00.  Balance  of  two  volumes 
(18  copies),  $4.50. 

These  are  our  lowest,  and  best,  and  only 
terms;  and,  rather  than  part  with  them  on 
any  other,  we  should  feel  justified  in  grind- 
ing them  up  into  paper  for  the  Philadelphia 
Photographer.  We  will  do  this,  however — 
if  any  of  our  subscribers  think  they  would 
like  the  two  volumes,  but  cannot  afford  the 
investment  now — we  will  send  them  the  six 
gratis  copies  and  reserve  the  rest  for  awhile, 
until  they  can  pay  for  them. 


THE   FINANCIAL  CONDITION  OF 
THE  N.  P.  A. 

Those  of  our  readers  who  are  not  mem- 
bers of  the  National  Photographic  Associa- 
tion will  pardon  our  frequent  allusion  to 
this  matter.  We  suppose  quite  as  many  of 
them  are  members  as  are  not,  so  we  must 
strive  to  interest  all  parties. 

During  the  past  month,  the  Executive 
Committee  have  been  examining  into  the 
status   of   the   Association's   finances,   and. 


66 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHEE. 


they  find  about  $4000  debt  to  pay,  and 
over  $3900  due  from  the  members  for  dues, 
so  that  if  the  dues  were  paid,  and  a  slight 
"lift"  from  the  wealthier  members  given, 
the  Association  would  soon  be  beyond  all 
fear  of  another  crisis.  That  the  members 
don't  pay  their  dues  is  very  strange.  With 
some  it  is  neglect,  but  doubtless  with  the 
majority  they  don't  know  just  how  much 
they  are  behindhand.  For  the  information 
of  all,  let  us  say  that  until  last  June  the 
dues  were  $2  a  year.  At  Buffalo,  those  at- 
tending the  convention  paid  their  dues  in 
advance  from  June,  1873,  to  June,  1874,  but 
during  the  convention,  next  to  the  last  day, 
the  dues  were  raised  to  $4  per  annum,  thus 
making  $2  more  for  those  who  had  already 
paid,  to  pay,  and  $4  due  by  those  who  had 
not  yet  paid  anything.  Many  think  because 
they  have  paid  the  $2  at  Buffalo  that  they 
should  not  pay  more,  but  the  necessities  of 
the  Association  compelled  the  rise  asked  for, 
and  all  good  members  should  pay  it  if  they 
wish  the  Association  to  go  on.  During 
February,  by  order  of  the  Executive  Com- 
mittee, the  Secretary  has  sent  a  postal  card  to 
each  one,  asking  for  the  balances  due  the 
treasury.  A  few  are  responding  cheerfully, 
and  contributing  towards  the  debt  too,  and 
declaring  that  "  the  debt  is  our  debt  and 
we  must  pay  it;"  also  saying  that  "the  As- 
sociation must  not  go  down."  This  looks 
very  cheerful,  and  we  are  glad  to  see  it, 
for  we  believe  it  will  be  the  greatest  mis- 
take the  photographers  of  the  United  States 
ever  made  to  let  this  Association  collapse. 
It  is  not  only  doing  great  good  as  an  educa- 
tional institution  by  means  of  its  annual 
exhibitions  (which  it  is  true  many  of  you 
cannot  attend,  but  the  good  it  does  is  dif- 
fused by  those  who  do,  and  thus  you  are  all 
benefited),  but  it  is  a  most  powerful  preven- 
tive  of  evil  in  the  way  of  the  hungry  sharks, 
who  used  to  infest  the  land  with  their  secret 
processes  and  barefaced  swindles.  Com- 
pare the  state  of  affairs  five  years  ago  with 
what  it  is  now,  and  see  if  it  would  better 
your  condition  to  go  back.  If  it  would,  then 
by  all  means  let  us  retrace  our  steps. 

Now,  a  word  or  two  about  why  the  Asso- 
ciation is  in  debt,  and  why  it  has  been  in 
debt  so  long  and  so  much.  The  great  cause 
is  the  conventions.     At  none  of  them  did 


the  public  and  the  dues  received  from  new 
members  ever  pay  the  expenses,  except  at 
Cleveland.  Each  year  there  has  been  a 
larger  balance  for  the  Executive  Committee 
to  make  up  by  loan,  and  they  are  unwilling 
to  do  this  longer,  when  they  find  the  mem- 
bers themselves  do  not  pay  their  dues.  We 
are  quite  sure  that  if  all  pay  up  now,  and 
remove  the  debt  and  continue  to  pay  here- 
after, that  the  Association  will  have  more 
than  enough  income  to  support  it,  exhibi- 
tions, conventions,  and  all,  handsomely. 


Burnt-in  Enamel  Photographs. 

We  would  not  be  surprised  if  many  of 
our  readers  should  ask,  what  are  "Burnt- 
in  Enamel  Photographs?"  because  it  is  a 
long  time  since  anything  concerning  such 
pictures  has  appeared  in  these  pages.  To 
avoid  such  a  query,  we  will  first  state, 
briefly,  what  they  are,  namely,  photographs 
which  are  by  various  methods  made  upon 
or  transferred  to  white  enamelled  plates  of 
copper,  or  of  white  porcelain  only,  then 
submitted  to  the  action  of  heat  in  a  muffle 
and  burned  into  the  surface  of  the  enamel, 
so  that  the  picture  is  really  a  portion  of  the 
plate,  is  not  affected  by  any  of  the  elements, 
and  is  as  absolutely  permanent  as  anything 
photographic  can  ever  be  expected  to  be. 

For  years  such  pictures  have  been  made, 
by  as  many  different  methods,  but  as  a  gen- 
eral thing  the  results,  in  portraiture,  have 
not  been  what  they  should  be.  It  was  com- 
paratively easy  to  make  them  upon  china- 
ware,  for  in  such  cases  slight  blemishes  and 
coarseness  were  not  so  much  noticed.  But 
in  portraiture  we  must  have  the  most  deli- 
cate softness,  spotlessness,  and  purity  of 
tone.  As  each  new  claimant  came  forward 
he  would  assert  the  excellencies  of  "  his 
own  modification  ;"  but  while  some  good 
results  were  shown,  it  was  acknowledged 
that  they  were  preceded  by  very  many  fail- 
ures. M.  Camarsac  and  one  or  two  others 
seemed  to  secure  uniform  results  with  ease, 
but  they  kept  their  process  an  absolute 
secret,  and  would  not  communicate  it  to 
any  one  for  any  price. 

MM.  Tessie  du  Mothay  and  Marechal 
exhibited  some  beautiful  examples  at  the 
Paris  Exposition,  in   1867,  for  which  they 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


67 


were  awarded  a  medal.  They  called  them 
"  vitrified  photographs."  A  plate  was  thor- 
oughly cleaned  and  coated  with  a  solution  of 
india-rubber  dissolved  in  benzole  and  mixed 
with  collodion.  When  the  film  was  dry,  it 
was  coated  with  iodized  collodion,  sensi- 
tized, exposed,  developed,  and  fixed  in  the 
ordinary  way.  Then  the  image  was  inten- 
sified strongly  and  put  into  a  bath  of  gold 
and  platinum,  after  which,  washing,  fixing 
with  cyanide,  and  varnishing  followed. 
The  vitrification  came  next.  The  plate 
was  put  into  a  muffle-furnace  and  the  or- 
ganic matter  burned  out,  leaving  only  the 
metals.  Afterwards  it  was  covered  with  a 
flux,  and  again  placed  in  the  muffle  until 
the  desired  glaze  was  produced. 

But  their  process  had  drawbacks  which 
prevented  its  general  practice. 

Some  of  the  finest  results  we  have  seen, 
in  various  colors,  but  on  chinaware,  were 
by  Mr.  J.  Leth,  of  Vienna,  and  were 
shown  at  one  or  two  of  our  National  Pho- 
tographic Association's  exhibitions.  At 
Vienna,  we  saw  some  magnificent  specimens 
by  Mr.  Leth.  His  method  was  to  make  a 
positive,  float  the  film  from  it  upon  the  con- 
vex surface  of  the  enamelled  plate,  to  which 
gentle  rubbing  makes  it  adhere  closely,  the 
plate  having  first  been  covered  with  a  mix- 
ture of — 


Distilled  Water,    . 

.   100 

grammes 

Bichromate  of  Potash,  . 

6 

" 

Gum  Arabic, 

.       5 

" 

Honey, 
White  Sugar, 

1 
1 

*  * 

The  enamel  is  then  exposed  to  sunlight, 
for  one  or  two  minutes,  and  when  taken  to 
the  dark-room  and  the  film  removed  an  im- 
age is  found  printed  upon  the  plate.  Pow- 
dered pigments,  varying  in  color,  according 
to  the  color  of  picture  desired,  are  now 
dusted  over  the  picture,  and  adhere  to  those 
parts  not  acted  upon  by  the  light.  The 
plate  is  subsequently  immersed  in  a  solution 
of  weak  sulphuric  acid  and  alcohol,  in  order 
to  remove  any  traces  of  the  bichromate, 
then  washed  with  plenty  of  water,  and  when 
dry  it  is  ready  for  the  furnace.  After  the 
burning-in,  the  glaze  is  applied  the  same  as 
in  the  other  process. 

But  none  of  these  processes  were  satisfac- 


tory, or  easy,  or  certain  in  their  results,  and 
therefore  the  progress  of  burnt-in  photogra- 
phy, in  portraiture  at  least,  has  been  but 
very  slow.  A  brighter  day  is  dawning, 
however,  and  an  easy,  workable,  and  cer- 
tain method  is  at  our  hands,  if  we  choose  to 
take  it  up.  A  number  of  our  readers  will 
remember  having  seen,  at  the  exhibitions 
of  St.  Louis  and  Buffalo,  several  perfect 
gems  in  this  line,  by  Messrs.  Robinson  & 
Cherrill.  Of  course  we  lost  no  time  in  ask- 
ing them  to  make  known  their  method. 
Their  answer  was,  "  No  !  these  are  only  the 
best  results  of  our  experiments.  We  have 
not  mastered  the  process  yet.  Further  ex- 
periment will  bring  it,  and  when  that  time 
comes  you  shall  know."  When  visiting 
these  gentlemen,  in  October,  we  found  them 
still  laboring  hard,  and  they  declared  that 
they  had  now  overcome  every  obstacle,  and 
to  prove  it,  without  telling  us  the  nature  of 
the  ingredients  used,  made  several  pictures 
from  beginning  to  end  in  our  presence,  and 
we  are  free  to  say  that  we  were  surprised 
and  delighted  at  the  ease  with  which  they 
could  be  produced. 

Their  method  is,  briefly,  to  make  a  posi- 
tive, float  it  from  the  glass  in  water ;  tone 
and  fix  it;  transfer  it  to  the  convex  enam- 
elled plate,  burn  it  in,  glaze  it,  and  it  is 
ready  for  delivery — for  brooches,  breastpins, 
girdles,  cases,  lockets,  and  what  not — wher- 
ever you  choose  to  place  a  beautiful,  per- 
manent photograph.  Messrs.  Robinson  & 
Cherrill  assured  us  that  there  was  a  great 
demand  for  them,  and,  in  fact,  quite  an  ex- 
citement over  them.  We  feel  sure  that  any 
American  photographer  who  would  intro^ 
duce  them  in  connection  with  his  business 
would  make  them  pay  well  ;  for  old  nega- 
tives may  be  used  and  made  profitable,  while 
now  they  are  valueless.  We  endeavored  to 
get  from  the  gentlemen  named  permission 
to  communicate  the  details  of  their  method 
to  our  readers.  Their  answer  was,  that  they 
were  renowned  for  the  alacrity  with  which 
they  had  always  communicated  to  their  co- 
workers everything  they  knew,  but  that  in 
this  instance,  besides  a  couple  of  years  of 
time-taking  experiment,  they  had  expended 
several  hundred  pounds  in  perfecting  the 
process,  and  they  believed  they  were  not 
wrong  in  asking  photographers  who  desired 


68 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


to  know  all  the  details  to  reimburse  them. 
They  did  not  propose  to  communicate  their 
method  to  any  one  in  England,  but  in 
America,  if  enough  photographers  would 
club  together  to  pay  them  $5000,  they 
would  furnish  each  member  of  the  club 
with  the  fullest  details,  and  from  time  to 
time  with  any  improvements  they  make, 
should  they  see  room  to  make  any.  Then, 
if  the  club  saw  fit  to  make  the  thing  public, 
they  could  do  so,  or  it  could  remain  a  pro- 
tected secret  with  themselves.  Those  in- 
terested, therefore,  will  please  refer  to  the 
advertisement  on  the  subject. 

While  we  wish  that  everybody  might  have 
this  process,  as  that  cannot  be,  having  seen 
it  worked,  and  witnessed  its  simplicity  and 
ease  and  certainty,  we  unhesitatingly  recom- 
mend it,  hoping  that  enough  gentlemen 
will  agree  together  to  buy  the  secret  and 
then  make  it  public.  Fifty  photographers, 
at  $100  each,  would  do  the  work. 

Our  readers  know  our  record  in  such 
matters  and  need  no  assurance  that  we 
would  not  commend  this  thing  did  we  not 
personally  know  the  gentlemen  named,  and 
that  they  have  placed  the  fraternity  under 
very  many  obligations  for  useful  things, 
given  freely,  and  had  we  not  seen  them 
work  the  thing,  from  the  making  of  the 
positive  to  the  glazing  and  finishing  of  the 
picture.  Moreover,  we  have  the  pictures 
we  saw  made  at  our  office,  where  all  are 
welcome  to  see  them. 

We  give  our  readers  an  example  of  an- 
other variety  of  work  this  month,  made  by 
Messrs.  Robinson  &  Cherrill,  in  which  they 
also  excel,  together  with  the  details  of  their 
process. 

Both  classes  of  pictures  may  be  made 
profitable  by  any  enterprising  photogra- 
pher, we  are  quite  sure. 


This  month  we  believe  we  issue  an  un- 
usually attractive  number.  At  least  we 
have  striven  to  make  it  so.  We  intend  that 
our  magazine  shall  get  better  and  better 
each  month.  Please  try  to  get  us  some 
more  subscribers.  The  six  premium  pic- 
tures are  as  beautiful  as  ever. 


THINGS  NEW  AND  OLD. 

BY   R.    J.    CHUTE. 

Ventilating  the  Dark-room  {continued). 

This  question  of  ventilation  is  one  that 
has  puzzled  so  many  much  wiser  heads  than 
mine,  that  I  am  not  oversanguine  in  any 
recommendations  I  may  make. 

A  small  room,  however,  such  as  most  of 
us  use  for  the  chemical  'operations  connected 
with  the  making  of  negatives  in  the  gallery, 
presents  no  such  difficulties  as  the  ventilation 
of  the  English  Houses  of  Parliament,  or  the 
Halls  of  Congress  at  Washington,  yet  it  is  of 
no  less  importance  to  the  occupant,  and  the 
best  possible  means  that  can  be  devised  should 
be  adopted  to  give  every  dark-room  a  thor- 
FIG.1. 
\ZZ7 


F, 


^ 

X 

*"\     """ 

*  * 

~~~?^- 

—j      i 

A 


ough  ventilation.  It  requires  no  elaborate 
system.  The  operations  of  natural  laws  in 
reference  to  the  movements  of  currents  of 
air  are  very  simple,  and  it  is  only  necessary 
that  these  should  be  observed  to  secure  the 
desired  result.  It  is  well  known  that  cold 
air  is  heavier  than  warm  ;  also,  most  of  the 
foul  vapors  and  impure  gases  fall  and  min- 
gle with  the  cold  air,  while  the  warm,  rare-  . 
fled  air  rises.  It  is  well  known,  also,  that 
heat  is  one  of  the  best  of  disinfectants. 

Now  we  have  only  to  conform  to  these 
operations  of  natural  laws  to  secure  the  end 
we  desire.  In  the  accompanying  diagrams 
Fig.  1  shows  the  plan  I  described  in  the  last 
number  of  this  journal.  A  is  the  dark- 
room, represented  as  about  8  x  10  or  12  feet, 
and  10  feet  high  ;  the  diagram  represents 
the  width  and  height,  b  b  are  ventilators 
on  each  side,  passing  up  the  walls,  and 
uniting  in  the  centre  of  the  ceiling.  If  a 
larsre  room,  the  ventilators   had   better  be 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHER. 


69 


constructed  on  both  sides;  but  if  the  room 
be  small,  it  would  be  sufficient  on  one  side 
Fig.  2  is  a  section  of  the  side  of  the  room, 
showing  the  ventilator  b  extending  about  2 
feet  in  width  on  the  wall,  and  a  supposed 
flue,  /,  against  which  it  is  placed.  The 
sheathing  of  the  ventilator  on  the  ceiling 
should  be  of  thin  material  (a  thin  board 
sheathing,  painted  black,  would  be  a  good 
conductor  of  heat),  so  that  the  advantage  of 
its  broad  surface 


FIG.  2. 


!/ 


1 


h 


may  be  gained 
by  its  being  rea- 
dily warmed  by 
the   heat  of  the 


room,  which  will  tend  to  give  an  upward 
current  at  all  times.  The  diagram,  Fig.  1, 
supposes  the  dark-room  to  be  near  the  roof, 
as  represented  at  C.  Should  there  be  a  flue 
or  funnel  at  one  side,  as  at/,  then  the  ven- 
tilator, instead  of  passing  out  at  the  centre, 
might  pass  out  as  at  e.  But  should  the 
room  be  so  situated  that  there  could  be  no 
outlet  through  the  ceiling,  then  place  the 
ventilator  as  represented  by  the  dotted  lines 
at  g. 

The  fresh  air  supply  is  from  the  perforated 
pipe  D,  which  should  run  on  two  or  three 
sides  of  the  room,  and  have  a  damper,  to 
open  or  close,  near  the  outer  end.  If  con- 
nected with  the  outer  air,  which  would 
probably  be  best,  a  fine  wire  gauze  should 
be  placed  over  the  mouth.  The  perfora- 
tions should  be  made  so  as  to  throw  the  air 
out  horizontally  into  the  room.  The  ad- 
vantage of  placing  the  supply-pipe  at  the 
top  of  the  room  will,  I  think,  be  readily 
seen.  The  cool  air,  as  it  enters  the  room 
from  two  or  three  sides,  will  immediately 
fall  and  cause  a  change  in  the  air  through- 
out the  room  ;  whereas,  if  the  air  were  ad- 
mitted at  the  bottom,  or  an  open  door  or 
window  depended  upon  for  a  supply,  it 
would  pass  immediately  into  the  ventila- 
tors, and  the  air  in  the  upper  part  of  the 
room  scarcely  be  disturbed 
at  all.  Moreover,  this  ar- 
rangement will,  I  think,  se- 
cure immunity  from  dustin 
a  great  measure.  Though 
dust  is  sometimes  raised, 
yet  if  left  to  itself,  it  nat- 
urally falls,  and  with  this  arrangement  it 


FIG.3.r-^ 


will  be  assisted  in  falling.  Contrary  to 
the  system  of  ventilating  at  the  top,  which 
always  tends  to  keep  the  dust  whirling, 
this  method  carries  it  down,  and  keeps  it 
there,  or  takes  it  off  through  the  venti- 
lator. The  advantage  of  a  perforated 
supply-pipe  is  that  the  air  is  not  allowed  to 
rush  in  with  force  in  a  great  volume,  which 
is  sure  to  carry  dust  with  it  if  there  be  any 
to  be  found,  but  it  must  enter  slowly,  and 
be  distributed  over  considerable  surface; 
this  neutralizes  the  force,  and  diffuses  it 
throughout  the  room  just  as  it  is  needed. 

Fig.  3,  is  a  section  of  ventilator  showing 
an  interior  automatic  valve,  which  is  in- 
tended to  prevent  a  downward  current.  On 
one  side  of  the  pipe  a  piece  is  put  in  on  an 
angle,  filling  about  one-third  of  the  open- 
ing, and  on  the  upper  edge  of  this  the  valve 
is  hung.  It  is  so  constructed  with  a  double 
thickness  on  the  narrow  side  that  its  own 
weight  will  keep  it  open,  but  the  least  cur- 
rent of  air  coming  down  will  close  it.  Care 
should  be  taken  in  hanging  this  valve  to 
have  it  work  perfectly  free,  for  on  this  will 
its  utility  depend. 

The  top  of  the  ventilator  may  be  protected 
by  a  hood,  as  shown  in  the  diagram,  or  any 
of  the  improved  A^entilators  in  common  use 
might  work  well. 

In  reasoning  on  this  plan,  it  might  be 
suggested  that  the  currents  of  air  will  not 
move  as  desired.  That  is,  the  supply-pipe 
will  be  as  likely  to  prove  a  means  of  egress 
as  ingress;  that  the  air,  becoming  warm  at 
the  top  of  the  room,  will  escape  through 
this  pipe,  and  keep  up  an  outward  current 
instead  of  an  inward  one.  This  may  prove 
true  when  a  door  or  window  is  open,  so  that 
a  pressure  of  air  comes  in  from  below,  and 
then  it  will  certainly  do  no  harm  if  heated 
air  escapes  in  that  way;  but  when  the  room 
is  closed,  and  the  heavy  air  is  drawn  off 
from  the  lower  part  of  the  room  by  the 
ventilators,  the  pressure  on  the  heated  air 
above  is  removed,  and  the  sort  of  vacuum 
there  formed  by  the  air  becoming  contin- 
ually rarefied  by  heat,  will  cause  a  constant 
rushing  in  of  fresh  air  to  supply  it.  This 
fresh  supply  falls,  and  takes  the  place  of 
that  being  carried  off — and  so  a  continual 
circulation  is  kept  up,  giving  a  fresh  and 
healthful  atmosphere. 


70 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


ART  STUDIES  FOR  ALL. 
VIII. 

(Continued  from  page  43.) 

56.  The  study  of  light  and  shade  we  re- 
ferred to  in  the  last  volume,  but  we  deem 
it  expedient  to  take  it  up  again  here  in  its 
application  to  composition.  The  manage- 
ment of  light  and  shade  in  a  composition 
requires  great  care  and  study.  The  adapta- 
tion of  it  to  the  character  of  the  subject  is 
not  only  to  be  considered,  but  the  quality 
of  draperies,  accessories,  &c  ,  in  regard  to 
their  power  of  absorbing  or  reflecting  light ; 
the  mechanical  arangement  of  light  and 
shade  that  will  be  produced,  and  the  force 
and  nature  of  colors  that  may  affect  the 
composition. 

57.  Whether  the  picture  be  a  group  or 
have  but  one  principal  figure,  the  arrange- 
ment of  light  should  be  such  as  to  give 
prominence  to  the  principal  subject,  by 
avoiding  the  introduction  of  anything  that 
will  draw  the  attention  away  from  the 
central  figure  or  figures.  If  a  group  is  to 
be  photographed,  such  an  arrangement  of 
light  must  be  made  as  will  illuminate  the 
whole,  and  give  prominence  to  the  figures 
composing  the  group  rather  than  to  back- 
ground or  accessories.  As  to  the  nature  of 
materials  that  compose  a  group,  violent  con- 
trasts, such  as  black  and  white  drapery, 
should  be  avoided.  The  light  cannot  be 
arranged  to  do  justice  to  such  extremes,  and 
the  harmony  of  the  lighting  as  well  as  the 
composition  is  often  destroyed. 

58.  With  a  single  figure  the  whole  ar- 
rangement is  more  under  the  control  of  the 
artist  than  with  a  group,  and  the  various 
points  of  the  picture  can  be  studied  to  pro- 
duce the  best  possible  effect.  The  nature  of 
the  light  best  adapted  for  the  subject,  is  the 
first  consideration.  If  light  drapery,  a  much 
more  subdued  light  will  be  required  than 
for  dark,  and  the  accessories  must  be  ar- 
ranged so  as  to  not  be  entirely  lost  by  con- 
trast. The  observation  in  reference  to  ex- 
tremes of  black  and  white  apply  here  as 
well  as  in  groups,  and  with  white  drapery 
anything  that  absorbs  light  to  any  great 
degree  should  be  avoided. 

59.  The  source  and  direction  of  the  light 
must  be  considered  according:  to  the  nature 


of  the  composition.  According  to  the  rules 
of  art,  a  top-light  produces  the  best  effect, 
by  allowing  every  part  of  the  picture  to  be 
more  clearly  defined.  An  oblique  or  side 
light  casts  the  shadow  of  one  object  upon 
another,  and  sometimes  runs  them  together 
in  confusion.  In  portraiture,  however, 
care  must  be  taken  with  a  top-light  to  avoid 
heavy  shadows  on  the  face.  In  landscape 
photography,  where  the  principal  points  are 
much  separated,  an  oblique  light  is  very 
effective  in  giving  force  and  expression  to 
the  composition. 

60.  Unity  of  light  in  a  picture  is  an  estab- 
lished rule  of  art,  founded  on  a  law  of 
nature.  This  rule  is  not  so  applicable  to 
groups  for  portraiture,  where  we  are  ob- 
liged to  light  all  equally  well,  as  far  as  pos- 
sible, as  it  is  to  the  style  of  grouping  known 
as  genre  co7nposiiion.  But  in  pictures  of  the 
latter  class,  as  well  as  those  of  single  por- 
traiture, the  principal  figure  should  be  placed 
in  the  focus  of  light,  while  everything  else 
is  subordinate.  The  centre  figure  then  be- 
comes the  centre  of  observation  ;  for  the 
eye  is  ever  attracted  by  light  and  turns  in- 
stinctively to  it.  Gradation,  so  indispen- 
sable to  harmony,  requires  the  same  atten- 
tion in  lighting  the  different  figures  of  a 
composition,  so  that  a  perfect  blending,  from 
the  principal  figure,  in  the  strongest  light 
to  that  of  the  least  importance,  in  the  deep- 
est shadow,  may  be  secured,  as  in  lighting  a 
single  face,  where  a  harmonious  gradation 
from  the  highest  light  to  the  deepest  shadow 
is  now  so  universally  sought  for  and  obtain- 
ed. It  will  be  readily  seen,  that  under  the 
proper  regulation  of  laws,  light  is  to  the 
artist  a  language  or  medium  of  expression, 
the  due  observance  of  which  enables  him  to 
make  clear  the  plan  of  his  picture,  and  give 
the  interpretation  he  desires. 

61.  Objects  receiving  light  should  not  be 
extended  to  the  margin,  because,  in  the  first 
place,  the  lights  cannot  be  well  supported  by 
the  shades.  In  the  next,  extending  the 
lights  quite  to  the  boundary  gives  the  effect 
of  an  unfinished  picture,  which  destroys  the 
unity,  so  essential  to  the  harmony  and  com- 
pleteness of  the  subject. 

62.  The  lights,  as  well  as  the  figures, 
should  vary  in  form.  This  depends  much 
upon  the  management  of  the  drapery.     In 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGE APHEE. 


71 


the  infinitely  various  modes  of  arranging 
draperies,  the  artist  may  contract  or  extend 
his  lights  at  pleasure,  varying  the  general 
effect  to  any  extent. 

63.  If  the  light  and  shade  in  a  picture  are 
well  arranged,  and  in  due  quantity,  the 
effect  will  he  pleasing,  even  at  such  dis- 
tance from  the  eye  that  the  subject  cannot 
be  distinguished.  It  is  then  a  mere  corre- 
spondence, or  a  balancing  of  light  and  shade. 
On  a  nearer  approach,  its  force  and  powerful 
relief  attract  the  eye,  and  fix  the  attention 
of  the  spectator.  It  will  not  have  this  effect, 
unless  it  possesses  the  essential  requisites  of 
chiaro-oscuro. 

(To  be  continued.) 


THE  CHICAGO  EXHIBITION. 

After  an  extended  tour  in  the  West  and 
Northwest,  I  am  able  to  say  positively 
that  the  next  exhibition  of  the  National 
Photographic  Association  will  be  strongly 
represented  by  delegates  and  exhibitors 
from  those  sections.  The  desire  to  exhibit 
work  seems  stronger  and  more  unanimous 
than  on  any  previous  year,  and  many  at 
present  unknown  names  will,  after  the 
Chicago  Exhibition  of  1874,  stand  in  the 
front  rank  with  our  ablest  professionals. 

Away  in  some  secluded  village,  off  from 
the  main  lines  of  travel,  I  have  been  startled 
with  pleasure  to  find  productions  which  will 
compare  favorably  with  those  produced  in 
many  metropolitan  galleries. 

In  one  special  instance,  on  inquiring  as  to 
the  means  used  in  acquiring  the  knowledge 
and  taste  exhibited  in  the  work  displayed, 
I  found  the  photographer  was  a  subscriber 
to  twenty-five  dollars'  worth  of  art  litera- 
ture per  annum,  among  which  was  the  Lon- 
don Art  Journal,  the  Philadelphia  Photog- 
rapher, the  Aldine,  and  Mosaics.  From 
these  and  starting  with  a  natural  taste  for 
pictorial  effects  and  a  love  for  his  business, 
he  has  risen  to  rank  par  excellence,  as 
the  next  exhibition  will  probably  prove. 
Everywhere  I  find  the  skilled  ones  the 
reading  ones ;  and  they  show  it  not  only  in 
their  work  but  in  their  manners  and  con- 
versation. They  are  wide  awake  to  any- 
thing which  will  advance  them  in  perfect- 


ing themselves  in  their  business.  Some  are 
getting  rich,  and  many  of  them  are  in  pros- 
perous circumstances.  Most  of  them  ac- 
knowledge that  the  way  was  shown  them 
through  the  study  of  photographic  publica- 
tions, and  above  all  by  the  meetings  or 
reports  of  the  National  Photographic  Asso- 
ciation or  its  annual  exhibitions.  Most  are 
already  members,  and  nearly  every  one  of 
those  who  have  not  joined  expressed  a  de- 
termination to  do  so. 

Friends,  there  is  another  side  to  the  pic- 
ture taken  on  the  same  trip, — men  doing 
business  so  ignorant  of  their  work  as  not  to 
be  able  to  keep  out  of  the  fog  over  half  the 
time.  Some  do  fair  chemical  work,  but 
pose  only  to  expose  their  ignorance  of  all 
art  principles,  and  even  of  the  mechanical 
laws  of  their  business,  and  who  do  not  know 
enough  of  their  business  to  explain  intelligi- 
bly to  their  customers  the  answers  to  ques- 
tions every  day  asked. 

Such  cases  of  course  are  rare,  but  they 
ought  not  to  exist  at  all  in  a  business  which 
assumes  and  is  generally  recognized  as  a 
fine  art.  May  the  grand  army  of  progress 
induce  them  to  join  its  ranks,  with  the  hope 
that,  by  example  and  precept,  they  may 
be  led  to  become  members  in  mind  as  well 
as  name.  The  West  is  bound  to  make  a 
grand  showing  at  Chicago,  and  we  say  to 
all,  "  Look  to  your  laurels.''  B. 


BUTTERFIELD'S  SIGHT-REST. 

BY   J.    B.    BUTTERFIELD. 

Glancing  over  the  October  number  of 
the  Photographer,  I  espied  a  little  arrange- 
ment illustrated  and  called  a  sight-post, 
and  having  felt  the  necessity  of  some  such 
article  myself,  especially  when  using  the 
heavy  head-rest  for  the  purpose,  which  is  a 
very  inconvenient  article  to  be  moved  about 
so  much,  and  causing  a  great  deal  of  unnec- 
essary labor,  I  devised  one  for  myself, 
which  I  think  is  a  neat  and  effective  little 
article,  and  which  I  have  called  a  sight- 
rest  ;  it  can  be  raised  or  lowered  to  any  de- 
sired height  for  either  sitting  or  standing- 
pictures,  and  I  find  it  very  convenient  and 
useful,  and  would  not  be  without  it. 


72 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


Fig.  1  is  the  rest  at  about  the  height  for 
a  sitting  picture.  A  is  the  stand  and  up- 
right, made  of  walnut  or  any  suitable  wood. 


The  front  of  the  upright  is  grooved  thus, 
to  allow  the  sliding-rod  B  to  lay  close  and 
be  guided  by  the  upright. 

C  is  a  ratchet-pall,  held  in  place  by  spring 
D,  on  the  back  of  the  upright,  and  catches 
in  depressions  in  sliding-rod  B,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  2,  thereby  holding  the  rod  at  any  de- 
sired height.  The  same  can  be  raised  or 
lowered  simply  by  pulling  the  rod  up  or 
pushing  it  down. 

The  rod  is  surmounted  with  a  tasty  and 
showy  frame,  either  card  or  cabinet,  which 
contains  a  picture  in  some  pleasing  position, 
claiming  the  attention  of  the  sitter,  and  help- 
ing the  operator  to  a  great  extent  to  produce 
a  picture  with  a  pleasant  expression,  much 
better  than  gazing  at  the  corner  of  the 
camera-box  or  unsightly  head-rest,  which 
is  entirely  out  of  place. 


Ernest  Krueger's  colors  for  albumen 
paper  are  very  brilliant,  and  Mr.  Eau,  the 
agent  for  this  country,  has  shown  us  some 
photographs  prettily  colored  with  them. 
Please  read  the  advertisement. 


SOMETHING  ABOUT  PLAIN 
PRINTS. 

BY    M.    COSTELLE    EDGERLY. 

It  is  a  greatly  to-be-deplored  fact  that  the 
photographer  in  general  has  so  incomplete 
a  knowledge  regarding  that  part  of  his  work 
which  is  to  pass  through  the  finishing  hands 
of  the  artist  or  colorist. 

There  are  many  unhappy  artists,  who 
often  receive  prints,  which,  to  save  their 
reputation,  they  must  refuse  to  use,  and 
must  return  with  complaints;  there  are 
many  tortured  photographers,  who  daily 
waste  their  substance  in  the  manufacture  of 
prints  which  will  be  returned  only  to  be 
destroyed. 

For  the  sake  of  these  distressed  ones,  I 
desire  to  make  a  few  suggestions  to  my 
friends,  the  photographers,  on  the  proper 
mode  of  preparing  plain  prints. 

But  first,  do  try,  and  accept,  and  follow 
this  counsel. 

If  a  competent  artist  returns  to  you  a 
print  which  he  claims  is  not  fit  for  work- 
ing, believe  him,  cheerfully  accept  the  situa- 
tion, and  try  and  better  a  new  print  all  that 
you  are  able.  Believe  that  it  is  even  more 
for  your  interest  than  his  to  give  him  the 
very  best  of  prints,  and  that  in  case  of  the 
production  of  an  unsatisfactory  picture, 
your  name  will  suffer  more  than  his;  for 
the  gallery  from  which  a  painting  emanates 
is  always  quoted  more  generally  than  the 
name  of  the  artist. 

If  the  picture  is  good,  strong  in  likeness, 
finely  executed,  and  brilliant,  your  name  is 
thereafter  glorified  by  all  who  see  and  ad- 
mire; and  it  will  be  hard  to  break  the  faith 
of  such  trusting  persons  in  your  ability  to 
perform  almost  any  known  thing  in  the  art 
of  picture-making.  The  first  thing  to  be 
regarded  in  making  a  plain  print,  is  the  ut- 
most cleanliness.  Bear  with  me,  ye  dainty 
ones,  whose  motto  is:  "Cleanliness,  and 
then  godliness."  It  would  be  hard  for  you 
to  credit  the  trials  that  we  sustain  just  from 
this  one  thing — soiled  prints.  The  tiniest 
mark  of  a  soiled  finger  on  plain  paper  can- 
not be  entirely  overcome  in  finishing.  Color 
cannot  be  mixed  to  use  on  an  oily  surface, 
so  that  it  will  not  be  still  apparent  when  the 
light  strikes  it  in  a  certain  way.  Then  the 
paper  must  be  handled  carefully,  that  there 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGK APHER. 


73 


may  not  be  a  break  or  wrinkle  anywhere  ; 
and  moreover,  brilliancy  cannot  be  obtained 
when  the  paper  has  been  silvered  long 
enough  to  have  lost,  in  the  least,  its  pristine 
purity.  The  lights  will  be  yellow  and 
opaque,  and  any  tone  that  the  print  may 
receive  will  (mingled  with  the  yellow  hue 
of  the  paper)  cause  muddy  and  clouded 
shadows.  The  tone,  I  am  well  aware,  is  a 
mooted  question  among  artists,  or  "so- 
called"  artists;  for  he  who  contends  that 
the  brown  tone  is  the  proper  one  does  not 
fully  understand  his  business,  and  I  can 
prove  it.  There  never  can  be  made  a  clear 
flesh  and  blood  face  over  a  brown  tone. 
Especially  is  it  impossible  to  depict  certain 
varieties  of  complexion  true  to  life,  with 
their  marvellously  pure  sea-shell  tints,  and 
transparent  blue  traceries  of  veins.  Where 
the  deeper  shadows  are  above  the  eyes, 
under  the  chin,  and  some  other  occasional 
shades,  the  tone  does  not  matter,  it  is  well 
enough  there;  but  in  the  lighter  shadows, 
on  the  temples,  brow,  under  the  eyes,  about 
the  mouth,  and  on  the  neck  and  bosom, 
there  should  not  be  a  trace  of  brown  ;  for 
these  are  delicate  shades,  grayish,  or  in- 
clined to  blue  or  green,  and  must  be  pure 
and  transparent,  showing  no  dirty  under- 
current of  any  other  color,  and  especially 
any  color  made  in  the  photograph. 

The  painting  which  shows  the  photo- 
graph peeping  through  its  colors,  reminds 
one  of  that  economical  young  woman,  who 
inquired  how  much  it  would  cost  to  have 
one  coat  of  paint  on  her  picture. 

The  photographic  print  should  be  used 
simply  for  the  assistance  its  outlines  give 
to  the  production  of  a  correct  likeness;  that 
secured,  it  should  be  completely  covered, 
painted  out,  and  entirely  lost  for  evermore 
to  mortal  vision, — only  the  painting  left 
with  its  firm  flesh  and  graceful  draperies 
standing  out  independently  from  the  dis- 
tance of  the  background. 

Next  come  those  artists  who  stipulate  for 
a  blue  tone.  That  is  not  much  better  than 
brown,  but  is  a  little.  I  used  to  call  loudly 
for  that  myself  before  I  learned  better. 
But  there  are  certain  complexions  which 
cannot  be  painted  any  more  successfully 
over  a  blue  tone  than  can  some  others  over 
the  brown.  i 


Then  comes  that  perfection  of  tone  for 
all  kinds  and  descriptions  of  to-be-painted 
pictures;  the  clear  neutral  gray,  than  which 
there  can  be  none  more  suitable. 

Any  photographer  from  whom  I  receive 
prints  with  this  tone,  has  my  enduring 
respect. 

For  crayons  and  inks,  this  is  the  only 
one  that  is  admissible,  inasmuch  as  it  is  im- 
possible to  hide  the  photograph  in  those 
truly  beautiful  productions  of  art  when  the 
prints  have  any  approach  to  color,  as  red, 
brown,  or  blue. 

In  the  working  of  pictures  which  have  a 
blue  tone,  a  compromise  is  often  effected  by 
a  mixture  of  color  with  the  ink,  till  the 
photograph's  tone  is,  so  to  speak,  infused 
into  it.  This  too  is  done  for  working  a 
brown  tone,  and  the  effect  in  the  finished 
picture,  although  better  than  could  have 
been  gained  without,  looks  like  an  expres- 
sion of  bad  taste  in  the  artist,  when  it  is 
only  his  misfortune  that  he  is  compelled  to 
resort  to  such  means. 

The  brown  crayon  print  though  is  irre- 
mediable; for  crayon  cannot  be  modified  by 
red  or  any  other  color.  Black  they  are  as 
drifted  charcoal,  and  black  must  they  re- 
main, though  the  print  be  as  brown  as  a 
nut. 

And  these  pictures,  bear  in  mind,  are  ex- 
pected to  delude  people  into  the  belief  that 
they  resemble  fine  lithographic  engravings  ; 
and  properly  made  they  do,'  only  that  they 
surpass  them. 

But  do  you  not  see  that  these  colored 
faces,  stippled  with  black,  bear  not  the 
slightest  similitude  to  an  engraving,  with 
its  pearly  lights  and  effectively  transparent 
shadows  ? 

To  cover  the  brown  tone  of  the  shadows, 
the  crayon  must  be  ground  in  until  it 
reaches  a  density  that  gives  an  effect  too 
sooty  for  any  white  citizen. 

This  never  will  do  ;  so  the  brown  shadows 
and  red  half-tones  must  be  allowed  to  look 
through  the  crayon,  the  lighter  parts  of  the 
background  must  remain  of  this  same  color, 
so  decidedly  foreign  and  inimical  to  the 
supposed  object  of  the  picture,  and  the 
high-lights  in  the  drapery  must  also  take 
part  in  the  general  discoloration. 

Perhaps  I  have  devoted  too  much  time  to 


74 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


this  talk  about  tone;  but  I  do  not  think 
that  too  great  stress  can  be  placed  on  its 
importance;  for  why  should  we  not,  in  one 
piece  of  work  as  well  as  another,  be  fas- 
tidiously careful  in  every  minor  detail 
which  goes  to  make  up  the  grand  result? 

When  we  attempt  the  portrayal  of  flesh 
in  colors,  on  canvas  or  paper,  all  acknowl- 
edge that  there  cannot  be  too  great  care  in 
searching  out  in  the*  human  face  and  per- 
petuating in  the  pictured  one,  all  the  deli- 
cate tints  and  all  the  peculiarity  and  rich- 
ness of  color  that  can  be  found,  to  make  it 
approach  as  nearly  as  lies  in  human  power, 
the  living  breathing,  original.  Then  why 
should  not  the  photographer  and  artist  work 
together  to  secure  every  means  in  their 
united  power,  to  make  ink  and  crayon  pic- 
tures as  minutely  as  possible  like  the  en- 
gravings they  represent? 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  photographer  who 
does  not  already  understand  them,  to  study 
up  the  processes  through  which  a  plain 
print  should  pass,  to  issue  forth  a  success. 
Many  unquestioningly  believe  that  plain 
paper  is  to  be  subjected  to  like  treatment 
with  albumen;  they  use  the  same  fixing 
and  toning  baths,  and  the  same  time  in 
each  is  allotted  to  both.  This  is  a  serious 
error  ;  and  though  I  do  not  know  the  modus 
operandi  by  which  magnificent  results  are 
gained,  I  do  immediately  recognize  a  result, 
be  it  magnificent  or  otherwise.  The  brand  of 
the  paper,  as  far  as  1  have  noticed,  makes  but 
little  difference.  The  ordinarily  used  paper 
is  all  good  if  only  it  receives  proper  atten- 
tion and  treatment. 

I  wish  some  one  of  the  philanthropic  read- 
ers of  this  journal,  who  has  been  successful 
with  his  plain  paper  baths,  would  send  his 
formulDe  for  publication.  I  could  call  on 
several  by  name,  but  their  excessive  coy- 
ness forbids. 

Sometimes  the  innocent  paper  passes 
through  such  processes  of  torture,  that  it 
comes  forth  roughened  and  coarse-grained, 
with  a  surface  like  blotting-paper ;  so  ex- 
tremely like,  in  some  cases,  that  the  most 
carefully  laid-on  washes  leave  a  hard  line 
wherever  the  color  stops  its  flow,  which  will 
be  without  any  warning,  and  on  every  pos- 
sible occasion. 

This   rough   soft   paper  can  be   used   to 


better  advantage  for  large  pictures ;  but 
there  is  certain  failure  in  any  attempt  at 
the  elaborate  finish  required  for  small  ones. 
Still,  a  really  better  effect  can  be  obtained 
even  with  such  paper  than  with  that  so 
glossily  smooth  that  color  will  only  partly 
absorb,  and  barely  adhere.  That  the  pic- 
ture should  be  a  permanently  enduring  crea- 
tion, the  paper  must  be  capable  of  absorp- 
tion to  such  an  extent  that  its  fibres  can  be 
completely  saturated  with  color,  so  that  the 
well-diluted  tints  can  be  soaked  in,  little  by 
little,  till  it  is  full  to  the  surface.  Such  a 
picture  cannot  fade  or  easily  be  destroyed  ; 
but  we  cannot  say  as  much  for  these  with 
hard  smooth  surfaces,  on  which  thick  color 
must  be  stippled  with  a  fine-pointed  brush. 
Such  can  but  be  the  merest  daubs,  and 
liable  to  perish  soon  from  the  face  of  the 
earth,  which  is  one  comfort. 
(To  be  continued.) 


A  WORD  FOR  OUR  PROFESSION. 

BY    W.    HEIGHWAY. 

That  it  is  a.  branch  of  the  fine  arts,  is  the 
honorable  boast  of  those  of  our  number  who 
have  a  love  for  their  work  and  ambition 
above  the  sordid  consideration  of  dollars 
and  cents;  but  there  are  by  far  too  many  of 
us  who  have  no  just  conception  of  or  care  for 
the  higher  claims  of  art,  and  tinkering  along 
a  daily  routine  of  careless,  botchy  work, 
merely  regarding  it  as  a  trade,  by  which 
they  can  subsist  with  less  labor  than  by  fol- 
lowing heavier  trades,  for  which  they  might 
be  better  adapted.  No  wonder  then,  with 
so  many  of  these  evidences  of  perverted 
skill  (?)  constantly  before  them,  that  the 
public  misjudge  the  merits  of  our  beautiful 
art,  and  degrade  it  to  the  level  claimed  by 
this  miserable  mediocrity. 

It  may  be  urged  by  some,  that  this  objec- 
tion is  a  very  fanciful  one  ;  that  it  matters 
little  what  is  thought  of  us  by  the  public, 
so  long  as  they  come  to  us  as  sitters  and  pay 
their  money.  Individuals  advancing  such 
an  opinion  take  to  themselves  credit  for  a 
great  deal  of  philosophy,  that  they  are  able 
to  take  such  a  high  and  independent  ground. 
But  in  reality  is  it  not  rather  grovelling 
than  noble,  and  is  it  not  our  duty  to  strive 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


75 


to  gain  the  good  opinion  of  the  world  in  an 
honest  and  manly  way  ? 

We  should  treat  all  our  visitors  in  a 
uniformly  courteous  manner,  not  toadying 
to  the  rich  and  influential,  and  snubbing 
the  poorer  of  our  customers;  adopting  po- 
liteness and  uniform  attention  to  all,  not  as 
a  policy  that  pays,  but  as  a  duty  to  ourself 
as  a  gentleman.  That  you  will  reap  a  ben- 
efit from  it,  there  is  no  doubt,  and  in  addi- 
tion to  this  pecuniary  advantage  you  raise 
the  tone  of  your  business  and  tend  to  an 
advancement  of  the  profession. 

Not  one  of  the  less  active  of  the  causes  of 
the  low  estimate  the  public  take  of  photog- 
raphy as  a  profession,  is  to  be  found  in  the 
constant  parading  of  vulgar  jealousies  ;  that 
■public  washing  of  dirty  linen,  alas  !  too  com- 
mon amongst  us.  Let  us  never  fail  to 
speak  with  the  greatest  possible  respect  of 
our  competitors  and  their  work.  Instead 
of  petty  sneers  and  insinuations  of  ugly 
things,  which  are  mean  and  contemptible, 
let  us  speak  of  our  rivals  as  we  would  they 
should  speak  of  us.  Our  listeners  can  dis- 
criminate between  the  utterances  of  jealousy 
and  the  expression  of  fair  and  honest  criti- 
cism ;  and  the  calumniator,  believe  me, 
does  not  benefit  himself,  but  only  brings 
discredit  on  the  profession.  A  little  more 
politeness  and  charity,  and  a  little  less 
jealousy  would  tend  greatly  to  our  advance- 
ment in  the  respect  of  the  public. 

The  time  has  come  when  our  profession 
depends  on  the  highest  order  of  culture, 
thought,  and  art  knowledge,  for  our  cus- 
tomers are  becoming  more  and  more  en- 
lightened in  art  matters  every  day,  and 
bring  fine  discriminating  powers  to  bear  in 
judgment  of  our  work.  It  is  necessary  for 
us  to  be  ahead  of  them,  or  we  shall  find 
ourselves  deserted  of  all  our  friends  ;  while 
we  shall  see  Mr.  Jones,  across  the  way,  who 
does  keep  up  with  the  times,  who  does 
think  and  act  on  his  artistic  knowledge,  and 
is  of  gentlemanly  deportment,  has  his  gal- 
lery filled  with  satisfied  patrons. 

Read  the  journals  devoted  to  photography. 
You  may  not  be  able  to  see  how  much  you 
gain  by  it ;  you  may  even  doubt  if  you  have 
gained  a  single  -'wrinkle;"  and  perhaps 
you  may  believe  you  know  more  than  the 
editor  and  all  his^  staff  put  together.     But 


even  in  this  unpleasant  state  of  mind,  read. 
Read  all  this  "trash  and  nonsense;"  it 
tends  to  elevate  the  mind,  and  in  that  way, 
if  in  no  other,  it  does,  you  good. 


HOW  TO  CUT  THE  PAPER— HOW 
TO  CATCH  THE  BABY. 

Here  is  our  method  of  cutting  paper. 
We  have  two  pieces  of  zinc,  the  first  of 
which  is  3§  inches,  and  the  second  2  inches 
wide  ;  take  a  quarter  sheet  of  paper,  lay  it 
on  the  table,  place  the  larger  pattern  on,  one 
edge  and  cut  off  a  strip  the  width  of  the 
pattern;  lay  it  on  as  before  and  it  will  just 
half  cover  the  remainder.  Cut  along  the 
edge  as  before,  and  the  quarter  sheet  is  in  3 
strips  3|  inches  wide;  then  take  the  smaller 
pattern  and  cut  across  the  strips  in  the  same 
way  and  you  have  pieces  of  paper  just  right 
for  cartes  de  visite.  We  use  a  rolling  glass 
cutter  (Robinson's  trimmer  would  probably 
be  better),  which  does  not  go  close  to  the  pat- 
tern, so  the  latter  are  a  little  smaller  than 
the  paper  is  to  be  cut.  If  a  cutter  is  used  that 
will  cut  the  paper  as  small  as  the  patterns, 
the  latter  should  be  3 J  and  2J  inches  re- 
spectively. The  above  method  gives  48 
cartes  out  of  a  sheet,  and  is  much  more 
convenient  than  to  fold  the  paper  and  then 
cut;  besides,  it  leaves  the  edges  smooth  and 
straight,  and  does  not  break  the  paper. 


Inclosed  you  will   find  a  tintype  which 
shows    our   way   of  "catching    the  baby." 


76 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


The  box  was  described  in  the  World  some 
time  last  summer. 

Raising  the  front  causes  the  bird  to  swing 
enough  to  attract  attention.    (See  cut.) 

Porter  Bros. 


HOW  TO  MAKE  A  WONDER 
CAMERA. 

Probably  there  are  but  few  photogra- 
phers who  know  how  easily  they  can  make 
a  "  wonder  camera." 

The  so-called  "  wonder  camera "  is  in- 
tended to  show  opaque  objects  upon  a  screen, 


Tig.l. 


1     f 


1 

i 

I 

i  © 

0 

ri_ 

j j 

e 

; r 

, 

. 

much  enlarged  and  in  their  original  colors. 
A  common  card  photograph  may  be  shown 
as  large  as  life  without  the  least  coarseness, 
but  as  fine  as  the  original. 

Colored  lithographs  of  all  kinds  are  very 
beautiful  when  enlarged  in  this  manner. 
As  a  means  of  amusement  it  far  surpasses 
the  magic  lantern.  After  experiment  I 
have  succeeded  in  making  the  above  instru- 
ment in  a  very  simple  manner.  It  consists 
of  a  wooden  box  with  a  top  made  of  tin  or 
sheet-iron;  the  chimney  is  made  of  the 
same  material.  The  lens  is  the  same  as 
used  upon  a  camera  for  making  photographs. 
At  the  back  of  the  box  (as  will  be  seen  De- 
reference to  the  plan  and  elevation)  are  two 
doors  placed  upon  hinges.  When  the  box 
is  in  use  the  door  e  is  kept  closed.     The 


other  door  consists  of  two  parts  placed  at 
right  angles  to  one  another;  the  object  of 
this  is  to  fill  the  opening  in  the  door  e  while 
the  pictures  are  being  attached  to  c;  when 


c  is  swung  into  position  opposite  the  lens 
placed  at  6,  d  is  carried  to  one  side. 

If  stereoscopic  views  are  to  be  shown,  a 
slit  may  be  cut  at  e,  through  which  they 
may  be  inserted  without  opening  the  box. 

The  door  e  should  be  cut  off  a  little  at  the 
bottom  so  as  to  admit  air.  The  light  is 
placed  at  h,  as  nearly  opposite  the  picture 
as  possible.  It  should  be  a  strong  light ;  an 
argand  burner  is  the  best.  At  the  back  of 
the  light  is  a  piece  of  tin,  bent  into  the  form 
ef  a  reflector.     The  light  coming  from  h 


Fiff.3 


strikes  c,  and  is  reflected  through  the  lens 
upon  the  screen.  The  plan  of  the  box  is 
represented  with  the  top  removed. 

I  have  given  no  dimensions,  as  they  will 
depend  upon  the  focal  distance  of  the  lens 
and  height  of  the  light.  Care  must  be  used 
to  have  the  distance  from  the  lens  to  c,  when 
closed,  equal  to  the  focal  distance. 

By  following  the  above  directions  any 
photographer  can  make  a  camera,  which  if 
purchased  would  cost  from  $25  to  $30. 

Charles  M.  Carter. 


WRINKLES  AND  DODGES. 

I  never  saw  or  read  of  any  one  doing  it 
just  as  I  do.  1  place  my  paper  on  the  solu- 
tion, tap  it  (the  paper)  gently  with  my  fin- 
gers to  break  bubbles  (if  any  exist),  but  to 
make  sure,  I  lift  it  up  at  the  corners  and 
examine,  replace,  and  then  gently  oscillate 
the  dish,  so  that  the  solution  is  in  motion 
most  of  the  time  the  paper  is  on  it.  By 
this  means  the  solution  is  of  the  same 
strength  throughout,  and  each  piece  of  pa- 
per receives  the  same  amount  of  silvering; 
and  the  silvering  is  done  in  less  time  and 
more  thoroughly.  After  each  piece  is  sen- 
sitized, I  hang  it  up  by  one  corner,  so  that 
the  opposite  end  (the  drip-corner)  hangs  by 
the  side  of  the  dish,  and  just  touches  the 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


77 


solution.     By  this   means   I   save   all   my 

drippings. 

J.  H.  Hunter. 

I  must  tell  you  how  I  got  out  of  a  scrape 
a  few  days  ago.  Perhaps  it  is  worth  pub- 
lishing, as  some  in  a  similar  "fix"  might 
not  think  of  it. 

I  was  called  away,  about  ten  miles  from 
home,  to  photograph  a  corpse,  and  upon  ar- 
riving and  unpacking  my  camera  I  found 
the  plate-holder  had  been  left  at  home — it  was 
but  two  hours  till  time  for  the  funeral.  No 
gallery  nearer  than  mine,  and  it  was  out  of 
the  question  to  go  back  after  it.  I  kept  a 
straight  face  and  said  nothing,  but  pro- 
ceeded as  follows  : 

Got  everything  arranged  ;  camera  in  po- 
sition,focussed,  and  racked  out  the  tube  the 
thickness  of  the  negative  glass,  carefully 
noted  the  position  of  the  camera  on  the 
stand,  and  removed  it  to  the  dark-room. 
Then  covered  the  back  of  the  ground -glass 
with  the  focussing  cloth,  folded  in  several 
thicknesses.  Then  set  a  strip  of  pasteboard 
on  edge  at  the  bottom  of  the  ground-glass, 
on  the  inside,  of  such  width  as  to  bring  the 
plate  up  to  proper  place,  and  secured  with 
pins  at  either  end  ;  placed  the  plate  in  front, 
and  in  contact  with  the  ground-glass,  and 
found  the  bath  on  the  back  of  the  plate  held 
it  there  nicely  ;  placed  the  camera  back  on 
the  stand,  as  before,  and  fired  away.  Got 
my  negative,  all  right,  of  course.  Would 
not  advise  any  one  to  leave  the  plate-holder 
when  they  go  out,  but  if  they  should,  I 
know  of  no  better  way  out  of  it. 

L.  Moulton. 

Some  time  since  I  had  to  copy  and  en- 
large the  middle  picture  of  a  group  of  three 
persons,  in  which  the  outside  ones  rested 
their  hands  on  the  shoulders  of  the  middle 
person,  in  such  a  manner  they  could  not  be 
vignetted  off  without  taking  all  but  the  face 
of  the  middle  person.  I  made  a  print  with 
them  on,  and  then  mixed  pure  albumen 
with  the  india-ink,  and  with  this  painted 
the  hands  out  without  blotching  the  print 
much.  It  was  scarcely  noticeable  when 
framed. 

Mixing  albumen  with  the  ink  is  an  old 
thing,  I  know,  buff  may  be  of  use  to  some  of 


your  many  readers,  if  you  think  it  worth 
publishing.  E.   K.  Abr&ms. 

I  have  a  little  dodge  in  tinting  medal- 
lions. It  is  simply  this.  Having  assorted 
the  sizes  I  place  the  cards  in  a  cigar-box  ; 
take  them  to  my  printing  window.  Having 
first  placed  a  folded  paper  on  the  sill,  I  pro- 
ceed to  place  my  prints  behind  the  masking 
glasses  (my  masks  are  pasted  to  1-4  glass), 
and  laying  them  on  the  folded  paper,  plac- 
ing as  many  in  the  light  as  I  can  readily 
tend.  No  clothes-pins  or  pads.  This  ena- 
bles me  to  tend  about  six  prints,  alternating, 
keeping  me  busy.  E.  B.  Cores. 

I  had  a  broken  ambrotype  to  copy.  It 
was  in  a  dozen  or  more  pieces,  made  on 
white  glass.  The  breaks  showed  badly, 
and  the  black  varnish  on  the  back  was  all 
chipped,  so  I  took  the  picture  carefully  out 
of  the  case  and  matt,  &c. ,  carefully  cleaned 
the  black  varnish  off,  took  a  ferrotype-plate, 
gummed  it,  then  I  took  a  brush  and  india- 
ink  and  carefully  blackened  the  broken 
edged  places  on  the  gummed  plate,  pressing 
the  edges  close  together,  taking  care  that  no 
air-bubbles  remained  under  the  plate.  I  no- 
ticed before,  in  copying  a  broken  picture, 
that  the  cracks  were  seemingly  larger  than 
in  the  ambrotype,  and  I  thought  it  might 
come  from  the  refraction  of  light  through 
the  cracks.  By  blackening  the  edges  I 
stopped  it.  J.   H.  Hunter. 

I  have  made  a  little  discovery  (new  to 
myself  at  least),  in  regard  to  clearing  old 
baths  of  iodide.  Let  the  bath  get  almost 
cold  enough  to  freeze,  and  the  iodide  will 
form  in  the  shape  of  very  fine  crystals, 
which  are  easily  filtered  out.  I  find  the 
method  very  simple  and  effectual,  especially 
in  winter.  When  summer  comes,  I  shall 
adopt  the  plan  of  packing  my  bath  in  ice, 
to  produce  the  necessary  degree  of  cold. 
This  may  be  old  to  you,  but  I  find  it  a  de- 
cided saving  of  time  and  labor  over  the 
old  method  of  diluting,  filtering,  and  evap- 
orating;. S.  M.  Miller. 


Mosaics,  The  Year- Book  of  Photography, 
and  British  Journal  Almanac,  for  1874,  we 
will  mail  to  any  one  for  $1.50. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Queries. 

On  examining  the  negatives  by  different 
makers,  I  observe  the  films  have  different 
colors ;  thus  we  see  bluish,  grayish,  white, 
lead-color,  dark-brown,  drab-brown,  &o., 
&c.  I  have  failed  to  find  in  any  work  on 
photography  any  explanation  or  informa- 
tion on  this  subject.  The  olive-brown  being 
no  doubt  preferable,  can  and  will  any  of 
your  readers  throw  a  little  light  on  this 
point :  whether  the  color  can  be  obtained  at 
pleasure,  by  the  developer,  or  certain  con- 
ditions of  bath,  light,  &c.  ? 

Some  days,  mine  are  of  a  rich  brown ; 
others,  again,  cold  and  blue. 

Olivia  Brown. 


SOCIETY  GOSSIP. 

Philadelphia  (Philadelphia),  Feb.  4th. 
— Messrs.  D.  Anson  Partridge  and  John  K. 
Clemons  were  elected  to  membership. 

Dr.  Seiler  exhibited  some  microscopic 
enlargements,  and  made  some  remarks  on 
the  apparatus  required  for  making  them. 
He  said  that  he  had  obtained  a  superior  il- 
lumination suited  for  all  work  not  exceed- 
ing 1000  diameters,  by  condensing  the  direct 
rays  of  the  sun  through  a  bull's-eye  con- 
denser upon  a  concave  reflector  attached  to 
the  stage  close  to  the  object.  This  gave  a 
comparatively  large  circle  of  strong  light, 
which  was  of  great  advantage  when  using 
low  power  objectives.  The  Doctor  said  that 
he  had  been  enabled  to  avoid  the  occur- 
rence of  "  refraction  lines"  around  such 
bodies  as  diatoms,  blood-cells,  &c,  by  dif- 
fusing the  light  through  a  piece  of  ground- 
glass  before  it  passed  through  the  object. 

Mr.  Younar  said  that  he  had  succeeded  in 


obtaining  some  dry  negatives  free  from  ha- 
lation, without  the  use  of  backing,  by  add- 
ing to  the  sensitive  emulsion  thirty  drops  of 
a  solution  of  aurin  in  alcohol.  It  did  not 
seem  to  interfere  in  any  wise  with  the  good 
working  qualities  of  the  emulsion. 

A  vote  of  thanks  was  tendered  to  Mr. 
Young  for  an  improved  oxy-hydrogen  lime 
jet,  which  he  had  donated  to  the  Society. 

Photographers'  Exhibition.  —  The 
members  of  the  Boston  Photographic  As- 
sociation held  an  exhibition  last  month  at 
the  rooms  of  Mr.  J.  W.  Black,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  comparing  their  handiwork,  and  in- 
formally discussing  matters  pertaining  to 
the  art  of  photography.  Although  the  Asso- 
ciation has  been  in  operation  about  three 
years,  yet  this  is  the  first  exhibition  the 
members  have  had  among  themselves,  and 
its  success  will  doubtless  lead  to  others  of  a 
similar  kind  in  the  future.  It  is  also  pro- 
posed to  give  a  general  exhibition  some  time 
during  the  coming  spring,  under  the  aus- 
pices of  this  society.  About  thirty  gentle- 
men were  present  at  the  meeting,  and  the 
collection  of  contributions  was  quite  large 
and  very  fine  in  character.  Mr.  D.  W. 
Butterfield,  of  Boston,  entered  some  large 
White  Mountain  views,  which  were  exceed- 
ingly well  executed.  The  cloud  effects  in 
these  pictures  were  especially  deserving  of 
note.  Mr.  E.  J.  Foss,  of  Boston,  exhibited 
some  large  portraits  in  the  Rembrandt  style, 
which  attracted  a  good  deal  of  interest  for 
their  success  in  this  difficult  line  of  the  art. 
He  also  showed  a  couple  of  full-lengths  of 
Maguinness,  the  comic  actor,  which  were 
very  odd  in  their  way.  Mr.  M.  T.  Carter, 
of  Worcester,  displayed  a  case  of  cabinets, 
all  female  heads,  which  showed  fine  artistic 
skill,  particularly  in  the  management  of  the 
draperies.  Messrs.  Phillips,  of  Lynn,  Black 
and  Hardy,  of  Boston,  and  Russell,  of  Law- 
rence, also  exhibited  some  excellent  cabi- 
nets, and  Messrs.  Wires,  of  Lynn,  Vickery, 
of  Haverhill,  Richardson,  of  Wakefield,  and 
others  showed  pocket  specimens  of  great 
merit.  The  exhibition  as  a  whole  was  very 
successful,  and  contributed  to  both  the 
pleasure  and  profit  of  those  present. 

Such  exhibitions  are  of  great  value  to 
all  who  can  attend  them,  and  we  should  be 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


79 


glad  to  see   them  multiplied  all  over   the 
country. 

Indiana  (Indianapolis),  Jan.  4th. — The 
subject  of  "Developer"  was  discussed  at 
some  length  in  an  interesting  and  profita- 
ble manner. 

Mr.  Clark  had  tried  the  new  "Compound 
Developer,"  and  pronounced  it  a  failure. 

Messrs.  Fowler  and  Dryer  had  tried  it 
more  thoroughly,  and  recommended  it 
highly,  stating  that  the  exposure  need  not 
he  more  than  half  as  long  as  where  the  ordi- 
nary iron  developer  is  used.  They  were 
both  of  the  opinion,  however,  that  its  keep- 
ing qualities  were  not  good,  and  that  it  lost 
its  strength  rapidly  in  solution. 

Mr.  Elliott  suggested  that  there  was  no 
use  in  guessing  on  the  suhject  when  an  ordi- 
nary hydrometer  would  readily  indicate  the 
strength  of  the  solution. 

All  agreed  that  "how  to  shorten  expos- 
ures and  work  successfully,"  was  an  im- 
portant problem,  and  experiments  in  that 
direction  ought  to  be  encouraged.  Clouds 
and  rain  having  been  the  order  almost  in- 
variably during  the  last  month,  the  mem- 
bers had  not  been  able  to  make  the  neces- 
sary pictures  by  which  to  illustrate  properly 
the  subject  of  "  Lighting  and  Posing,"  and 
on  motion,  the  discussion  was  postponed 
until  our  next  meeting. 

District  of  Columbia  (Washington). — 
Mr  Bates  read  a  very  interesting  paper  on 
"Facts,  Positive  and  Negative,"  after 
which  considerable  discussion  ensued  as  to 
the  best  mode  of  getting  rid  of  a  grievance 
which  affects  the  profession  injuriously, 
when  the  following  resolutions  were  finally 
agreed  to : 

"  Whereas-,  The  Senate  of  the  United 
States  has  been  in  the  habit  of  granting  privi- 
leges to  certain  parties  for  the  purpose  of 
carrying  on  the  photographic  business  in  the 
Capitol  building  without  having  to  pay 
rent,  license,  or  taxes ;  and  whereas  all 
such  discrimination  is  unjust  and  injurious: 

And  Whereas,  It  has  become  a  common 
practice  for  photographers  in  the  employ  of 
the  government  to  undertake  commissions 
for  pay,  often  at  very  low  rates,  thus  enter- 
ing into  competition  with  members  of  the 
profession  who  have  to  invest  capital,  buy 


material,  employ  assistants,  pay  rent,  li- 
cense, and  taxes  :  therefore  be  it 

Resolved,  That  the  Executive  Committee 
be  authorized  to  mem  oral  ize  Congress  to 
grant  permission  to  any  member  of  this  as- 
sociation, who  may  desire  it,  to  run  a  pho- 
tographic establishment  in  the  Capitol  build- 
ing free  of  rent,  license,  or  taxes. 

Resolved,  That  the  Executive  Committee 
be  authorized  to  petition  Congress  to  in- 
crease the  pay  of  all  photographers  in  the 
employ  of  the  government,  so  that  they  may 
have  no  excuse  for  entering  into  a  competi- 
tion which  was  never  contemplated  when 
the  offices  were  created." 

No  doubt  the  photographers  of  Washing- 
ton and  vicinity  have  just  cause  for  com- 
plaint, and  since  our  art  is  so  very  useful 
to  the  government  in  nearly  all  of  its  de- 
partments, we  trust  the  voice  of  the  frater- 
nity there  will  be  regarded. 

Michigan  Alive  to  a  Sense  op  its 
Duty. — The  photographers  of  Bay  City, 
Mich.,  held  a  meeting  February  3d,  and  or- 
ganized a  society  for  Northern  Michigan, 
with  Mr.  B.  M.  Cressy  as  Chairman,  and 
Mr.  J.  H.  Scotford  as  Secretary.  A  com- 
mittee was  appointed  to  draft  a  constitution 
and  by-laws,  to  report  at  the  next  meeting, 
to  be  held  at  East  Saginaw.  We  are  glad 
to  see  this. 

German  Photographers'  Association 
(New  York). — Newton's  Washing  Process. — 
When  Mr.  Newton,  over  a  year  ago,  pub- 
lished his  process  of  removing  the  hyposul- 
phite of  soda  in  the  prints  with  acetate  of 
lead,  a  committee  was  appointed  to  test  this 
method  thoroughly.  Said  committee  re- 
ported at  next  meeting,  that  the  prints  were 
indeed  free  from  all  hypo,  but  that  the  tone 
had  changed  a  little  from  brown  to  blue. 
At  the  same  time,  fears  were  expressed  that 
the  new  chemical  combination  would  in  time 
injure  the  prints.  This  has  proved  now  to 
be  only  too  true.  The  Secretary,  who 
was  chairman  of  the  aforesaid  committee, 
subjected  at  that  time  several  prints  out  of 
one  day's  printing,  to  the  acetate  of  lead 
washing,  and  kept  these  together  with  other 
prints  of  the  same  lot,  but  washed  in  the 
usual  manner.  At  the  last  January  monthly 
meeting,  those  prints   were  exhibited,  and 


80 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHO  TOGKAPHEE. 


showed  that  those  treated  with  lead  were 
bluish-yellow  and  very  much  faded,  whereas 
the  others  had  lost  nothing  of  their  original 
brilliancy.  The  meeting  thought  it  very  de- 
sirable that  other  associations  or  individual 
photographers  should  publish  their  experi- 
ence in  this  matter. 

Air-bubbles  or  Albumen  after  Fixing. — Mr. 
E.  Krueger  called  the  attention  of  the  meet- 
ing to  the  minutes  of  the  Berlin  Society  for 
the  Promotion  of  Photography  as  published 
in  the  Mlttheilungen.  Our  Berlin  friends 
suggest  the  addition  of  alcohol,  ether,  &c, 
to  the  hypo  bath  for  preventing  those  bub- 
bles, but  nobody  seems  to  think  of  the  old 
and  sure  remedy  of  putting  the  prints  in  a 
strong  solution  of  common  salt  after  they 
are  fixed.  This  has  besides  the  other  ad- 
vantage, that  prints  treated  in  this  manner 
lose  their  hypo  more  readily  in  the  washing. 
If  bubbles  should  show  already  during  fix- 
ing, then  a  weaker  hypo  solution  is  de- 
sirable. 

Causes  for  Fading  of  Pictures. — Quite  a 
discussion  sprang  up,  whether  light  or  air 
is  the  more  damaging  factor  for  causing 
pictures  to  turn  yellow  and  fade.  Numerous 
instances  were  related,  where  prints  ex- 
cluded from  all  light  turned  yellow,  and 
others,  which  were  exposed,  did  not,  and 
vice  versa.  Several  members  promised  to 
make  extensive  experiments  in  the  hope  of 
solving  this  problem,  and  it  was  suggested  to 
call  the  attention  of  the  numerous  photog- 
raphers' associations  to  this  subject  in  order 
to  get  reliable  facts  from  all  quarters. 

Photographic  Institute  (Chicago). — 
The  members  of  this  thriving  society,  im- 
pelled by  their  artistic  surroundings  in  their 
pleasant  meeting-rooms,  have  taken  up  the 
study  of  art  principles  with  a  will.  Mr.  P. 
B.  Greene  read  a  very  creditable  paper  re- 
cently, from  which  we  make  some  extracts 
below,  which  was  illustrated  by  means  of 
the  sciopticon.  This  latter  fact,  and  the 
fact  that  it  was  interspersed  with  readings 
from  Ruskin,  make  it  impossible  for  us  to 
render  it  intelligibly. 

The  subject  of  admitting  females  to  mem- 
bership is  also  being  anxiously  discussed  at 
the  Institute.  Why  discuss  it  ?  Why  not 
follow  the  example  of  the  National  Photo- 
graphic Association  in  the  matter  ? 


Among  other  good  things,  Mr.  Greene 
said : 

"  Why  should  we  be  contented  to  receive 
$40  or  $50  for  a  picture  for  which  an  artist 
would  charge  from  $150  to  $500.  There  is 
but  one  answer  for  this.  We  do  not  consider 
our  work  as  good  as  his.  There  is  no  rea- 
son why  we  should  not  produce  as  good 
work  as  any  artist.  .  If  we  were  qualified  to 
do  it,  we  could  ;  but  we  have  been  working 
on  the  wrong  track  all  the  time.  It  has  been 
our  object,  or  of  most,  if  not  all  the  photog- 
raphers, to  see  how  cheap  they  can  do  the 
work,  instead  of  trying  to  see  how  much 
they  can  get,  and  how  good  a  job  they  can 
do.  I  will  ask  you,  all  of  you,  would  you 
not  rather  give  $250  for  coloring  a  photo- 
graph if  you  could  sell  the  same  for  $400  or 
$500?  You  know  that  all  the  portrait 
painters  use  photographs  to  assist  them. 
Now  there  is  no  reason  why  photographers 
cannot  get  just  as  much  for  their  work  as 
other  artists  do,  if  they  will  do  as  good  work, 
and  the  only  reason  they  do  not  do  it  is  be- 
cause their  work  lacks  artistic  excellence  .  .  . 

"  I  am  afraid  too  little  attention  is  paid 
to  the  lighting  of  the  negative,  and  too 
much  is  expected  of  the  retoucher.  I  think 
that  all  that  should  be  done  to  a  negative  in 
the  way  of  retouching,  should  be  to  smooth 
it  up,  but  nothing  should  be  done  to  the 
high-lights. 

"  There  are  ten  negatives  spoiled  by  work- 
ing them  too  much  where  there  is  one  that 
is  not  worked  enough.  I  wiH  leave  the  por- 
trait branch  of  the  art  for  others  to  discuss, 
and  will  take  up  landscape  or  outdoor  pho- 
tography. 

"  This  is  a  branch  of  the  art  which  you 
cannot  control  as  you  can  in  the  glass-house. 
You  cannot  shut  off  or  let  on  light;  you  can- 
not turn  your  subject  to  the  light  to  suit; 
you  have  to  take  it  as  you  find  it,  but  you 
can  wait  for  the  sun  to  move  round  to  give 
you  variety  in  lighting. 

"For  architectural  works  of  light  color, 
you  will  get  the  finest  effect  in  detail  on  a 
light,  cloudy  day,  but  not  as  much  strength 
and  vigor  as  you  will  by  sunlight.  Red 
brick  and  dark  colors  always  require  sun- 
light. Also  all  landscape  work  where  there 
is  foliage  or  water  require  sunlight." 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


81 


Now  followed  a  lantern  display  of  some 
very  fine  examples  of  outdoor  work. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association, 
Feb.  4th. — The  evening  was  taken  up  mainly 
with  the  installation  of  the  new  officers,  an 
address  by  the  retiring  President,  Mr.  Hes- 
ler,  the  appointment  of  Messrs.  Denslow, 
Sloat,  Hine,  and  Cross,  to  read  papers  at 
the  next  meeting,  and  addresses  by  visiting 
members.  Negatives  were  also  shown,  and 
their  merits  discussed,  much  to  the  profit  of 
those  present. 

Pennsylvania  (Philada.),  Feb.  16th. — 
L.  C.  Fisher  and  Harry  B.  Hansbury  were 
elected  members  of  the  Association. 

The  Committee  on  Medal  reported  that 
there,were  but  two  competitors,  who  proved 
to  be  Messrs.  Henry  F.  Smith  and  Joseph  D. 
Butterfield;  the  medal  being  again  awarded 
to  Mr.  Smith. 

Mr.  Moore,  for  the  Committee  on  Art 
Lectures,  reported  that  it  was  deemed  inex- 
pedient to  hold  a  course  of  lectures  this  sea- 
son. It  was  thought  best  to  postpone  the 
matter  till  another  winter,  and  then  com- 
mence earlier.  In  the  meantime  the  ques- 
tion should  be  kept  alive,  and  as  much  in- 
terest created  as  possible,  so  that  the  move- 
ment may  receive  the  unanimous  support  of 
the  members. 

Mr.  Shoemaker  called  attention  to  the 
excellent  article  in  Mosaics,  by  Frank 
Jewell,  on  "  Lighting  the  Sitter,"  and  by 
his  request  it  was  read. 

The  Secretary  presented  several  cabinet 
pictures  which  he  had  received  from  an  old 
member  of  the  Association,  well  known  to 
many  of  the  members,  Mr.  S.  M.  Kobinson, 
of  the  firm  of  McClurg  &  Robinson,  Pitts- 
burg. The  pictures  were  examined  by  the 
members,  and  received  complimentary  com- 
ments. 

Mr.  Carbutt  called  for  a  report  of  the 
working  formulas  of  the  successful  compet- 
itors. 

Mr.  Smith  said  that  he  had  used  the  same 
formula  for  several  years  :  Silver  bath,  40 
grains ;  collodion,  2h  grains  bromide  to  4 
grains  iodide  ;  Hance's  Silver  Spray  cotton, 
which  had  proved  the  best  he  could  find. 
Developer  :  Iron,  1  ounce ;  water,  20  ounces ; 
acetic  acid,  from  2  drachms  to  4  ounces. 


Mr.  Krips  also  gave  his  formula  as  fol- 
lows :  Iodide  of  potassium,  2\ ;  iodide  of 
cadmium  2J;  bromide  of  cadmium,  If; 
Anthony's  red  labelled  cotton  well  washed. 
The  older  the  collodion  the  better  it  is ;  gives 
more  brilliancy  and  depth.  Developer:  Iron, 
1  ounce;  acetic  acid,  J  ounce  to  40  ounces 
water. 

Mr.  Carbutt  said  he  was  fitting  up  a  dark- 
room for  copying,  and  had  found  the  bichro- 
mate of  potash  light  very  effective.  He 
filled  a  glass  bath  with  a  solution  of  one 
ounce  of  bichromate  to  twelve  ounces  of 
water,  and  placed  it  in  the  window  as 
recommended  in  the  Year-Booh  of  Photog- 
raphy. Part  of  the  day  the  sun  shone  di- 
rectly on  it,  and  it  gave  a  beautiful  non- 
actinic  light. 

Mr.  Rhoads  said  he  found  an  excellent 
light  by  using  yellow  and  green  glass. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Rhoads,  voted  that  in 
future  each  successful  competitor  for  the 
medal  contribute  his  process  in  writing  to 
the  meeting  following  the  award. 

A  SPLENDID  OFFER. 

A  Mammoth  Lens  and  Box  for  $3. 

A  great  many  ingenious  plans  have  been 
suggested  for  the  raising  of  funds  to  place 
the  National  Photographic  Association  on 
a  business  basis  again  by  freeing  it  from 
debt.  The  best  and  the  real  plan  is,  for  the 
members  to  pay  their  dues,  but  as  that  is  a 
slow  method,  seemingly,  some  liberal  gen- 
tlemen have  come  to  the  rescue  with  a  plan 
which  we  believe  will  at  least  partially  do 
the  work.  Men  "  go  in  "  to  a  thing  liber- 
ally when  there  is  a  hope  of  their  getting 
something  back,  therefore  we  believe  the 
offer  we  are  authorized  to  make  now  will 
receive  popular  approval  and  acceptance. 
It  is  this : 

Messrs.  Benjamin  French  &  Co.,  agents 
of  the  world-renowned  Voigtlander  lenses, 
agree  to  give  away  a  new  No.  9  Mammoth 
Lens,  price  $425,  and  Scovill  Manufacturing 
Co.,  proprietors  of  American  Optical  Co. :s 
works,  promise  to  give  with  it  one  of  their 
best-finished  and  latest  improved  double 
swing-back  portrait  camera  boxes,  of  a  size 
to  suit  the  lens,  on  the  following  conditions  : 

1.  The  lens  and  box  are  to  be  given  at 


82 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


the   Annual    Exhibition    of    the   National 
Photographic  Association  at  Chicago. 

2.  They  will  be  given  to  one  person  of  six 
hundred  who  meanwhile  contribute  $3  to 
the  debt  fund  of  the  National  Photographic 
Association. 

3.  Every  person  contributing  said  sum 
will  remit  it  to  the  Permanent  Secretary, 
and  will  be  sent  in  return  a  numbered  card, 
which  will  entitle  him  to  a  vote,  by  proxy 
or  in  person,  as  to  the  holder  of  what  num- 
ber the  lens  and  box  shall  be  given. 

4.  Each  ticket  entitles  the  holder  to  one 
vote,  and  one  person  may  have  as  many 
tickets  as  he  chooses  to  contribute  for. 

5.  Any  person  unable  to  attend  may  se- 
lect his  proxy  to  vote  for  him. 

6.  The  box  and  lens  will  be  on  exhibi- 
tion at  Chicago,  and  there  the  vote  will  be 
taken  as  to  who  shall  have  it.  Six  hundred 
tickets,  numbered  the  same  as  those  sent  to 
the  contributors,  will  be  placed  in  a  recep- 
tacle, and  from  it  three  shall  be  drawn. 
Which  one  of  these  three  shall  secure  the 
lens  and  box  shall  be  decided  by  the  vote 
of  the  contributors. 

7.  The  lens  and  box  are  given  to  the  As- 
sociation by  the  gentlemen  named,  and  all 
the  contributions  go  towards  the  removal 
of  the  debt  of  the  Association,  so  that  if  the 
majority  of  the  contributors  fail  to  secure 
the  gift,  they  will  at  least  have  the  satisfac- 
tion of  benefiting  the  Association,  which  is 
so  much  benefit  to  them  all.  The  voting  will 
be  so  conducted  that  the  utmost  fairness  is 
guaranteed.  The  parties  give  the  articles  to 
benefit  the  Association,  and  care  not  to  whom 
they  are  voted.  There  will  be  a  lively  de- 
mand for  the  tickets,  and  the  number  being 
limited,  we  advise  our  readers  to  secure  all 
they  can  at  once. 


VIEWS  ABROAD  AND  ACROSS. 

BY    EDWARD    L.    WILSON. 
III. 

I  may  indulge  the  hope,  1  trust,  that  1 
will  give  offence  to  no  one  by  taking  up 
some  of  the  few  pages  of  this  magazine  with 
descriptions  and  illustrations  of  things  I 
saw  during  my  most  enjoyable  tour.  I 
do  not  do  it  simply  to  amuse  and  to  fill  up. 
I  trust  I  have  a  higher  motive  than  that. 
Eor  many  years  it  has  been  my  involuntary 


habit  to  look  upon  everybody,  and  upon 
all  things  with  the  eyes  of  a  hungry 
camera — to  school  myself  to  seeing  every- 
thing that  passes  by  and  as  far  as  possible 
to  make  up  pictures  and  compositions  of 
one  kind  or  another  as  I  hurry  along.  I 
derive  a  great  deal  of  enjoyment  in  this  way, 
besides  many  profitable  lessons.  Many  per- 
sons go  along  and  see  nothing.  Photogra- 
phers should  never  do  this,  but  be  constantly 
on  the  alert  for  studies.  Be  careful,  how- 
ever, to  avoid  being  a  nuisance  to  those  who 
walk  with  you,  by  calling  their  attention  to 
what  you  see.  I  think  one  of  the  highest 
compliments  I  ever  had  bestowed  upon  my 
unfortunate  head,  was  from  a  friend  who 
almost  daily  walks  by  my  side,  when  he 
said,  ■'  I  believe  you  have  eyes  in  all  parts 
of  your  head,"  but  he  hurt  my  feelings  at 
the  same  time,  and  now  if  I  see  a  pictur- 
esque subject  in  the  street,  I  enjoy  it  alone 
and  say  nothing.  But  you,  my  respected 
readers,  are  learning  in  a  different  school 
from  my  friend,  and  I  therefore  call  your 
attention  to  these  things,  because  I  hope 
thereby  to  induce  you  to  educate  your  eyes 
in  the  direction  I  have  mentioned  and  to 
study  nature.  You  will  find  in  it  an  im- 
mense fund  of  enjo3'ment  as  well  as  much 
profit  to  you  in  the  exercise  of  your  daily- 
work  in  the  studio.  And  as  feeling  is  a 
thing  which  should  be  displayed  in  every 
picture,  I  trust  I  do  not  err  in  selecting 
from  the  thousands  which  I  saw,  some  of 
the  most  intensely  feeling  subjects.  They 
are  real  ones  though,  and  when  the  novelty 
of  foreign  travel  wears  off  a  little  you  may 
expect  something  more  sober  and  substantial. 
I  forgot  to  tell  you  in  my  last  of  a  little 
occurrence.  These  little  kingdoms  and 
duchies,  and  what  not,  some  of  them  not 
larger  than  the  Nutmeg  State,  are  very 
jealous  of  their  neighbors,  and  sometimes 
very  exact  in  their  examination  of  one's 
passport  and  of  one's  luggage.  I  avoided 
much  annoyance  on  the  latter  score  by 
carrying  all  my  luggage  in  a  satchel,  but 
on  the  former,  I  was  tripped  up  by  a  gen- 
tleman of  the  order  of  the  spiked  hat,  as  I 
attempted  to  pass  from  one  depot  into 
another.  His  hand  was  laid  upon  my 
shoulder,  and  he  said  in  broken  English, 
"  What  is  your  name?"   I   answered  cor- 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


83 


rectly.    "  An  Englishman  ?"  "Oh,  no!  any- 
thing   but  that!"    "American?"    "Yes." 


The  mighty  signature  of  President  Bogardus. 

"Have  you  a  passport?"  "Fes,"  but  then  I  re- 
membered that  I  had  sent  my  passport  ahead 
to  my  banker  to  attach  aw  for  Vienna,  not 
expecting  any  annoyance  in  this  section. 
But  a  happy  thought  occurred  to  me,  and 
acting  upon  it,  I  handed  him  the  following : 

To  the  Board  of  Jurors  at  the  Universal  Exposition  at 
Vienna,  of  the  Department  of  the  Multiplying  Arts. 

Gentlemen:  The  bearer  of  this,  Mr.  Edward 
L.  Wilson,  visits  your  Exposition  in  the  interests 
of  the  National  Photographic  Association  of  the 
United  States,  of  which  he  is  the  Permanent 
Secretary,  and  we  recommend  him  to  you  as 
worthy  of  any  courtesies  you  may  have  time  to 
show  him. 

He  is  the  editor  of  the  Philadelphia  Photogra- 
pher, the  organ  of  the  Association,  deeply  inte- 
rested in  the  Arts  and  Sciences,  and  is  in  search 
of  such  information  as  will  aid  us  all  in  the  prog- 
ress of  our  art  in  this  country. 

Any  favors  you  may  show  him  will  be  thank- 
fully received. 

Respectfully  yours, 
Abraham  Bogardus, 

President. 

W.  Irving  Adams, 
Wm.  H.  Rhoads,  &c,  &,o. 
Executive  Committee- 
He  read  it  carefully  (?),  examined  the  seal, 
and  the  mighty  signature  of  President  Bo- 
gardus, folded  it  up  deliberately,  handed  it 
back  to  me,  gave  me  a  withering  look,  and 
said,  "Pass  on,  young  American  man  /" — and 
I  passed. 

Hardly  does  ope  escape  from  the  clutches 
of  such  pompous  and  ignorant  officials  be- 


fore he  runs  into  another  scrape.  In  many 
places  the  "station  "  doors  are  closed  five 
minutesbefore  the  trai  n 
starts,  and  if  you  are 
late — and  all  these  pet- 
ty officials  seem  to  try 
to  make  you  so — you 
are  left.  If  you  and 
your  coat-tail  escapes 
the  closing  doors  you 
are  fortunate,  but  no 
sooner  do  you  enter 
the  depot  than  you  be- 
come unfortunate,  for 
if  you  attempt  to  cross 
the  tracks,  you  feel  an- 
other hand  upon  your 
shoulder,  or  see  some 
excited  official  in  the  distance  running  to- 
wards you,  and  exclaiming  "Look  out!  you 
get  run  over  there  —  you  are  too  late!" 
Your  only  way  is  to  preserve  your  equa- 
nimity and  you  will  never  miss  a  train.  Yet, 
be  as  calm  as  you  will,  when  night  comes 
you  are  ready  for  bed,  even  though  it  be  a 
Rhine  bed.  Did  you  ever  sleep  on  a  Khine 
bed?  It  is,  first,  an  immense  feather  bed 
into  which  you  plunge.  Coverlet,  blanket, 
and  counterpane  are  all  embodied  in  one 
piece  of  furniture,  namely,  another  feather 
bed,  shorter  and  stumpier  than  the  other. 
This  you  pull  upon  you  If  your  feet  are  cov- 
ered, your  neck  is  exposed,  and  vice  versa. 
If  you  are  agitated  in  your  dreams,  the  top- 


You  are  too  late  ! 


Your  anxiety  to  keep  covered  is  increased. 

most  bed  rolls  on  the  floor,  and  there  is  a 
struggle  to  obtain  it  again.  If  in  the  strug- 
gle to  -do  that  you  fall  out,  you  are  thank- 
ful that  the  bed  is  between  you  and  the  floor, 
for  all  the  floors  here  are  innocent  of  carpet. 
Your  anxiety  to  keep  covered  is  increased 
by  a  generous  outpouring  of  the  entomolog- 
ical specimens  of  Ehine-land,  while  you  are 


84 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


prompted  to  make  a  clean  breast  of  it  by  the 
low  ceiling  and  the  heat.  There  is  not  much 
sleep  between  Rhine  feathers — until  you  be- 
come accustomed  to  them. 

But  now  I  am  in  Dusseldorf,  with  Dr. 
Liesegang.  This  is  a  beautiful  city,  with 
the  river  dividing  it  in  all  directions,  with 
its  beautiful  park  and  its  cleanly  streets,  a 
direct  contrast  to  Cologne.  No  wonder  that 
artists  congregate  here,  and  no  wonder  that 
the  pictures  of  the  far-famed  Dusseldorf  art- 
ists are  so  bewitchingly  beautiful,  because 
everything  around  seems  to  inspire  one  with 
aesthetic  feeling.  Here  reside  some  of  the 
most  famous  artists  of  the  world  ;  and  here 
are  several  art  galleries,  private  and  public, 
which  Dr.  Liesegang  and  I  luxuriated  in  for 
a  whole  day.  It  was  a  treat  I  shall  not  soon 
forget,  and  I  longed  for  the  time  to  visit  the 
studios  of  some  of  the  great  masters.  They 
are  not  backward  at  all  in  using  photog- 
raphy as  a  helper  in  their  work.  The  liv- 
ing model  of  to-day  is  not  what  she  was  in 
the  days  of  Rubens,  and  Raphael,  and  Mu- 
rillo.  Then  she  could  stand  in  almost  any 
attitude  for  any  length  of  time,  and  as  often 
as  the  artist  required  her.  Now  her  back 
is  weak  and  her  "spine  is  curved,  and  she 
hasn't  the  strength  to  do  as  did  her  beauti- 
ful sisters  in  the  ages  that  are  past.  What, 
then,  is  there  to  keep  the  artist  from  a  state 
of  dismay  and  despondency  but  willing  pho- 
tography, always  ready  and  useful  in  ten 
thousand  ways  to  give  a  lift  to  almost  any- 
thing ?  The  model  is  now  taken  to  the  pho- 
tographer, posed  in  various  attitudes,  nega- 
tives made,  and  the  walls  of  the  studio 
covered  with  enlargements  from  them,  so 
that  she  may  now  rest,  only  answering  to 
the  call  of  the  master  when  he  desires  to  see 
the  color  of  her  flesh  or  her  clothing  ;  for 
you  must  know  that  the  great  paintings 
which  you  see  are  not  imaginary  produc- 
tions, but  are  made  up  from  living,  natural 
models.  A  really  conscientious  painter  will 
scarcely  put  a  flower  in  his  picture  without 
a  natural  one  to  paint  from. 

A  large  business  is  done  here  in  copying 
oil  paintings,  by  the  Messrs.  Overbeck.  No 
sooner  is  a  painting  finished  than  it  is  taken 
to  their  studio  to  be  copied  by  the  camera; 
and  there  is  a  quality  about  the  German 
copies    of   oil    paintings    which    American 


photographers  do  not  seem  to  understand. 
The  first  great  object  is  to  light  the  subject 
properly.  The  copying-room  of  the  Messrs. 
Overbeck  is  very  large,  and  perhaps  eighteen 
feet  high,  with  high  front  and  side-lights. 
All  the  walls  and  objects  in  the  room  that 
would  act  as  reflecting  surfaces,  are  care- 
fully blackened,  and  all  extraneous  light  is 
shut  off  from  the  lenses  by  long  cones,  which 
reach  out  as  far  beyond  the  brass-work  as 
possible.  The  camera  is  placed  on  wheels, 
which  run  on  an  iron  track  nearly  the  whole 
length  of  the  copying-room,  and  fasten- 
ings supplied  to  make  it  rigid  in  any  desired 
place.  The  painting  is  placed  on  an  ad- 
justable stand,  and  is  coated  with  thin  lin- 
seed oil  previous  to  copying,  in  order  to 
clear  up  the  shadows,  &c.  A  Steinheil  lens 
is  used,  and  is  declared  by  the  Messrs.  Over- 
beck to  be  the  best  for  flat  surfaces.  The 
exposure  varies  according  to  the  intensity 
of  the  light.  In  the  chemical  manipulation 
of  the  negative,  I  saw  no  novelty  except  in 
one  instance.  Many  of  the  copies  are  very 
large,  and  in  making  such  it  is  very  difficult 
to  get  a  uniform  thickness  of  collodion  all 
over  the  plate.  The  Messrs.  Overbeck  first 
coat  the  plate  in  the  usual  way,  and  then 
turning  it  end  for  end,  re-coat  it,  and  thus 
have  quite  the  same  thickness  of  film  all 
over  the  plate.  This  double  coating  of  col- 
lodion also  tends  to  keep  the  plate  moist, 
which  is  a  very  essential  thing  in  making 
the  long  exposure  necessary  when  copying 
an  oil  painting.  Plates  thus  treated  will 
bear  exposure  at  least  two  hours — a  hint  for 
those  who  have  interiors,  &c,  to  make. 

The  printing  and  mounting  departments 
of  Messrs.  Overbeck  were  quite  as  extensive 
and  complete  as  their  copying-room,  and 
everything  was  done  with  system,  cleanli- 
ness, and  care.  A  large  portrait  business 
is  also  connected  with  their  other  branch. 
But  what  interested  me  as  much  as  anything 
else  was,  their  machine  for  washing  prints. 
I  will  describe  it,  with  cuts,  next  month. 

Now  let  me  say  a  word  or  two  about  Dr. 
Liesegang  himself.  He  not  only  edits  and 
publishes  one  of  the  most  valuable  and  in- 
fluential photographic  magazines — the  Pho- 
togrnphisches  Archiv — in  Europe,  but  also 
conducts  the  most  extensive  stock  depot  that 
I  saw  there.     This  latter  is  also  more  like 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


85 


an  American  establishment  than  any  I  saw, 
inasmuch  as  a  large  stock  of  goods  is  kept 
on  hand,  so  that  the  photographer  can  go 
there  and  get  anything  he  wants.  And  that 
is  not  all.  Dr.  Liesegang's  papyroxylin, 
gun-cotton,  strontium-collodion,  and  chemi- 
cals, are  also  manufactured  largely  by  him, 
besides  his  celebrated  albumen  paper,  and 
first-rate  photographic  apparatus.  And  be- 
sides all  this,  with  the  farsightedness  of  a 
true  Yankee  merchant,  he  no  sooner  hears 
of  a  novelty  in  any  market,  than  he  orders 
it  for  stock  in  his  own  store.  He  sells 
largeh7  of  the  American  Optical  Co.'s  ap- 
paratus, Bigelow's  backgrounds,  and  other 
novelties,  and  Benerman  &  "Wilson's  pho- 
tographic publications.  The  Key  to  Bige- 
low's Album  he  has  translated  and  published 
in  German,  French,  and  Italian,  besides 
others  of  our  works,  and  through  him  they 
go  to  Russia,  India,  Italy,  Egypt,  Africa, 
Asia,  and  all  over  Europe  and  the  islands 
of  the  sea  to  which  his  trade  reaches.  I 
do  not  know  of  any  one  who  does  such  a 
cosmopolitan  trade  as  he,  and  surely  his  en- 
terprise well  entitles  him  to  it.  I  had  pleas- 
ure in  calling  his  attention  to  many  novel- 
ties.advertised  in  the  Philadelphia  Photog- 
rapher, and  he  at  once  sent  orders  abroad 
for  them,  being  determined  to  enable  him- 
self to  supply  everything.  He  has  not  been 
in  Dussseldorf  quite  a  year,  having  removed 
there  from  Elberfeld.  I  was  sorry  to  break 
away  from  his  hospitality  and  from  his 
lovely  city. 


If  you  are  a  photographer,  you  will  dream  of-. 


At  8  p.m.  I  found  myself  rapidly  moving 
"on  to  Berlin."  I  had  hoped  to  secure  a 
sleeping  car,  but  there  was  none  to  secure. 
I  therefore  had  to  content  myself  with  one- 
fourth  the  space  in  one  of  the  close  apart- 
ments of  a  "  first-class"  (?)  European  railway 


carriage.  The  seats  face  each  other,  and 
the  apartments  hold  eight  persons.  If  you 
"see"  the  guard,  you  can  have  the  space 
usually  allotted  to  two  persons,  in  which 
case,  if  you  are  of  similar  makeup  to  my 
own,  you  will  have  room  to  double  up  your- 
self into  tolerable  sleeping  shape ;  but  the 
chances  are  that  before  "  daylight  doth  ap- 
pear," that  your  toes  will  have  become  en- 
tangled in  the  tresses  of  the  lady  who  sleeps 
at  your  feet.  If  not,  the  fear  of  it  will  keep 
you  half  awake,  and  in  your  unrest,  if  you 
are  a  photographer,  you  will  dream  of  stories 
of  the  iron-horse  vs.  the  night-horse,  until 
demons,  whose  bodies  are  bottled  up  with 
all  sorts  of  diabolical  chemicals,  seem  to 
fill  the  air  in  all  sorts  of  horrid  shapes, 
and  perhaps  that  obstreperous  one  of 
fragrant  odor,  and  many  equivalents,  will 
fumigate  under  your  very  nose,  until  you 
awaken  in  a  cold  chill.  Such  a  rough 
night  I  had  of  it  on  my  way  from  Dussel- 
dorf  to  Berlin,  and  I  was  glad  when  day- 
break came,  and  not  very  far  distant  I  could 
see  the  city  of  Berlin.  A  few  moments  more 
and  I  felt  that  which  all  persons  feel  when 
they  meet  a  good  friend  and  true,  for  Dr. 
Vogel,  our  good  friend,  met  me  at  the  sta- 
tion, and  a  true  German  greeting  followed. 
Then  came  several  days  of  feasting  upon  the 
photographic  and  art  treasures  of   Berlin. 


A  true  German  greeting  followed. 
A  preliminary  tramp  took  us  through  the 
quiet  shades  of  the  Thiergarten,  up  to  the 
new  and  imposing  Column  of  Victory, 
through  the  Brandenburg  gate,  and  down 
the  beautiful  Street  Unter  der  Linden,  pass- 
ing the  palaces  of  the  Emperor  and  the 
Crown  Prince,  across  the  river  Spree  by 
means  of  the  splendid  bridge,  until  we  came 
to  the  Museum.  As  I  looked  upon  the  fres- 
coes which  adorn  it,  and  then  sauntered 
wonderingly  among  the  various  galleries 
of  paintings,  and  statuary,  and  antiquities, 


86 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


and  terra-cotta,  and  what  not  of  things  ar- 
tistic and  tasteful,  I  thought,  no  wonder  the 
Berlin  photographers  make  good  work. 
They  would  be  disgraced  if  they  did  not, 
for  here  in  this  Museum  is  everything  they 
need  to  cultivate  them  in  every  branch  of 
aesthetics — everything  to  inspire  feeling  and 
everything  to  suggest  the  principles  of  art. 
Oh  !  for  such  an  institution  in  this  country, 
to  which  photographers,  struck  with  fervor 
and  thirst  for  more  light,  could  make  pil- 
grimages. If  not  the  originals,  here  are 
casts  of  all  the  best  marbles  in  the  world. 
Magnificent  paintings,  wondrous  in  compo- 
sition, and  so  much  and  so  many,  that 
months  should  be  occupied  in  their  stucty. 
Among  the  great  attractions  are  the  six 
mural  paintings  by  Kaulbach,  representing 
"  The  Fall  of  Babel,"  "  The  Prosperity  of 
Greece,"  "  Destruction  of  Jerusalem  by 
Titus,"  "The  Battle  of  the  Huns,"  "Ar- 
rival of  the  Crusaders  before  Jerusalem 
under  Godfrej'  de  Bouillon,"  and  the  "Age 
of  the  Reformation."  The  figures  are  most 
perplexing  in  their  number,  larger  than  life, 
and  the  coloring  and  composition  so  grand, 
that  one  doubts  that  the  hand  of  man  could 
ever  have  created  them. 

Berlin  has  the  apjiearance  of  being  just 
what  it  is,  namely,  an  intellectual  city.  Its 
academies  and  universities  are  celebrated, 
and  the  lover  of  art  sees  much  in  the  streets 
and  in  the  buildings  to  entertain  and  edify 
him.  And  while  I  took  my  share  of  its  in- 
tellectual pleasures,  I  also  paid  my  respects 
to  the  delectabilities  of  "  Schnitzel,"  and 
more  than  frequently  attended  discussions 
pertaining  to  photography  across  a  table 
covered  with  alkaline  soda-wasser,  &c,  with 
hundreds  of  good-natured  Germans  about  us 


The  old  frau  who  drives  shouts  at  them  continuously. 

enjoying   their  repas.ts.     As   to  music,  Ber- 
lin does  not  neglect  to  render  it  in  the  most 


artistic  style,  and  I  enjoyed  much  of  it. 
When  tired  of  the  interior  one  has  but  to 
go  into  the  street  and  find  enjoyment  enough 
— living  pictures,  which  appear  quaint  and 
queer  to  American  eyes.  Now  it  is  a  low, 
primitive  milk  cart,  drawn  by  two  great 
muscular  dogs,  who  pull  with  a  will,  while 
the  old  frau  who  drives,  shouts  at  them 
continuously  or  lashes  them  with  her  whip. 
Immediately  after,  in  strong  contrast  with 
this  interesting  group,  rumble  the  wheels  of 
royalty  in  gorgeous  splendor,  so  that  the 
streets  are  full  of  sights  varying  in  interest. 
But  now  a  little  about  photography  in 
Berlin.  The  principal  commission  mer- 
chant here  in  our  art  is  Mr.  Romain  Tal- 
bot, No.  11  Karl  Strasse,  who  was  for  over 
twenty  years  located  in  Paris,  until  driven 
away  by  the  Franco-German  war.  Here 
the  stock  business  is  conducted  in  a  different 
way  from  ours.  The  dealer's  stock  is  not 
large,  but  he  receives  orders  for  everything, 
and  then  purchases  what  is  wanted  from  the 
various  manufactories  which  abound  in 
Berlin.  Mr.  Talbot  is  very  popular  here, 
and  I  owe  him  for  many  courtesies  shown 
me  while  in  Berlin.  I  shall  never  forget 
him,  and  wish  I  could  do  more  for  him. 
One  of  the  great  sights  of  Berlin  is  the  chem- 
ical laboratory  of  Mr.  E.  Schering.  Here 
nearly  all  the  chemicals  which  are  used  by 
German  and  Continental  photographers  are 
manufactured,  and  of  the  best  quality.  But 
this  great  establishment  is  not  confined  to 
photography  alone,  as  it  produces  all  sorts 
of  chemicals  for  medicine  and  the  sciences  at 
large.  Many  pleasant  hours  were  devoted 
to  the  inspection  of  the  various  departments 
and  the  methods  of  distillation,  dissolution, 
crystallization,  boiling,  crushing,  grinding, 
baking,  and  what  not,  in  all  the  stages 
of  manufacture,  from  the  crude  material  to 
the  beautiful  commercial  product.  Some 
very  eccentric  processes  are  followed  in 
order  to  procure  the  desired  results;  and  in 
all  cases  the  utmost  care  and  cleanliness  are 
insisted  upon.  The  various  products  are 
classified  and  kept  stored  in  separate  rooms. 
For  example,  the  poisons  are  in  one  room, 
acids  in  another,  alkalies  in  another,  and  so 
on,  so  that  when  they  are  weighed  out  to 
fill  orders,  the  one  cannot  influence  theother. 
In  this  way  greater  chemical  purity  is  se- 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER 


cured.  The  manufacture  of  various  pho- 
tographic chemicals  and  of  gun-cotton  was 
going  on  lively,  and  I  wish  I  had  space  to 
tell  you  how  some  of  the  things  you  use  are 
made.  It  would  certainly  aid  in  the  more 
intelligent  use  of  them. 

Somehow  or  another,  ore?'  good  friend  Dr. 
Vogel,  President  of  the  excellent  Berlin 
Society  for  the  Advancement  of  Photog- 
raphy, thought  the  good  feeling  existing  be- 
tween  German  and  American  photographers 
was  sufficiently  strong  to  warrant  him  in  call- 
ing aspecial  meeting  of  the  society  to  enable 
the  humble  representative  from  America  to 
meet  the  members.  Accordingly,  I  had  the 
great  pleasure  of  meeting  with  some  fifty  of 
the  leading  photographers  of  Ber- 
lin. I  need  not  repeat  the  com- 
plimentary addresses  that  were 
made,  further  than  to  say  that  I 
was  glad  of  the  opportunity  to 
tell  our  friends  in  Berlin  how 
much  they  had  taught  us,  and 
how  gratefully  we  remembered 
them.  As  far  back  as  18(55  the 
importation  of  "  Berlin  Cartes  " 
began  in  this  country,  and  they 
started  a  revolution  for  which  I 
was  glad  to  be  able  to  assure  our 
Berlin  co-workers  that  we  thank- 
ed them.  Before  then,  the  ma- 
jority of  us  were  content  with 
lighting  which  showed  neither 
purpose  nor  thought;  with  the 
most  inartistic  backgrounds,  and 
the  most  frightful  accessories. 
Our  negatives  either  showed  all 
the  rugosities  of  the  skin,  or  else 
the  subject  was  overlighted  in 
order  to  hide  them.  But  when 
these  Berlin  cartes  came  to  us  with  their 
roundness,  and  their  brilliancy,  and  their 
delicate  play  of  half  tones,  and  their  ar- 
tistic pose,  we  awakened  out  of  sleep, 
and  went  at  it  to  imitate  them.  The 
secret  of  retouching  the  negative  was 
whispered  into  our  ears  from  the  same 
source,  and  the  effect  was  unparalleled.  I 
need  not  give  the  details.  There  was  a  re- 
vival which  spread  over  the  whole  land,  and 
gradually  we  worked  up  to  the  "  Berlin 
Cartes,"  and  even  excelled  them,  until  the 
Berliners   had  £0  look   after  their  laurels, 


and  we  were  recognized  as  their  rivals. 
Now  an  exchange  exists.  The  evening  I 
spent  with  the  Berlin  Society,  much  interest 
was  expressed  by  the  members  in  a  lot  of 
American  photographs  which  had  been  sent 
them  from  New  York.  And  although  I 
am  free  to  say  now  that  the  average  Amer- 
ican work  is  as  good  as  that  of  the  average 
Berlin  productions,  yet  I  am  as  free  to  say 
that  Berlin  stirred  us  up,  and  to  her  and  her 
amiable  and  hospitable  photographers  be  all 
the  praise.  Loescher,  and  Petsch,  and  Mil- 
ster,  and  Hartman,  and  Schaarwachter,  and 
Quidde,  the  dead  Grasshof  and  their  co- 
workers, we  should  never  forget;  and  be 
assured  there  is  the  very  warmest  kind  of 


feeling  existing  in  Berlin  for  you  all ;  and 
anything  from  America  excites  the  live- 
liest interest. 

They  look  upon  you  as  their  greatest 
rivals,  and  rejoice  to  see  you  even  equalling 
or  excelling  them.  If  you  ever  visit  them 
you  are  sure  of  every  courtesy  being  ex- 
tended you,  as  was  the  fact  in  my  case. 
When  I  visited  their  galleries  I  found  the 
same  cordiality  which  greeted  me  at  their 
Society.  And  what  is  strange  to  say,  I 
found  their  work-rooms,  and  their  skylights, 
and  their  reception-rooms  very  much  the 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGKAPHEE. 


same  as  our  own,  with  the  exception  that  a 
different  language  is  spoken.  I  confess  to 
a  little  disappointment  on  this  score,  for  I 
had  hoped  to  find  many  useful  things  to  dot 
down  in  my  memorandum-hook  for  use  in 
these  views.  On  the  contrary,  however,  I 
believe  a  posse  of  American  photographers 
could  go  into  the  galleries  of  Berlin,  and 
work  them  quite  as  easily  as  they  could  go 
to  any  strange  place  and  work  it.  Loescher 
&  Petsch  's  studio  is  a  very  pleasant  one,  with 
the  top  and  side  light  facing  the  north,  as 
shown  in  the  drawing,  and  plenty  of  light ; 
a  garden  of  beautiful  flowers  being  at  the 
north  of  it.  They  practice  the  method 
of  lighting  shown,  considerably,  but  work 
at  both,  ends  in  all  parts  of  their  light,  ad- 
justing their  curtains  accordingly.  They 
use  screens  also  and  every  other  means  nec- 
essary to  secure  the  effect  they  desire.  They 
employ  most  beautiful  accessories,  and  all 
grades  and  styles  of  backgrounds,  the  latter 
being  hung  from  rollers  at  the  ceiling. 

Mr.  Hans  Hartman  has  taken  Mr.  Petsch 's 
place  at  the  camera,  the  latter  having  for- 
saken photography  for  the  more  "expan- 
sive "  (?)  art  of  oil  painting.  The  work  of 
these  gentlemen  was  awarded  the  highest 
honors  at  Vienna,  and  it  deserved  them. 

Mr.  Ernest  Milster's  studio  has  been  de- 
scribed in  these  pages.  He  makes  magnifi- 
cent portrait  work,  and  has  an  establish- 
ment for  the  copying  of  oil  paintings, 
similar  to  that  of  the  Messrs.  Overbeck  in 
Dusseldorf.  Mr.  Quidde  is  also  engaged 
exclusively  in  this  line.  The  rising  young 
photographer  of  Berlin  is  Mr.  Julius 
Schaarwachter,  whose  work  is  excellent. 

Photography  seems  to  thrive  in  Berlin, 
although  there  are  bad  photographers  there 
as  well  as  the  best. 

Dr.  Vogel,  as  you  all  know,  is  their 
recognized  leader,  and  a  better  one  they 
cannot  have.  He  is  also  professor  of  chem- 
istry and  physics  in  one  of  Berlin's  oldest 
universities,  and  I  visited  his  rooms  there 
with  much  interest.  He  has  most  complete 
and  convenient  apparatus  for  his  labors,  but 
as  I  was  there  during  vacation  I  could  not 
see  the  practical  workings  of  the  institution. 
Photography  is  taught  to  many  each  year, 
and  I  only  wish  we  had  a  place  like  it.  Dr. 
Vogel  is  always  alive  to  the  interests  of  his 


constituents.  His  nature  is  such  that  he  can- 
not take  an  interest  in  anything  unless  he 
takes  a  great  interest  in  it,  and  photography 
is  his  fascination.  He  is  continually  with 
and  among  the  fraternity,  and  does  not 
place  himself  so  distant  from  them  that 
they  can  never  reach  him.  Thus  he  knows 
practically  all  that  goes  on,  and  knows  it 
quickly.  He  works  constantly,  and  although 
often  opposed  by  a  few  whom  nothing  can 
satisfy,  he  always  comes  out  first  best.  He 
works  for  the  good  of  all,  and  not  for  a  few 
selected  pets,  and  that  is  why  he  is  popular 
and  beloved  by  all  those  for  whom  he  labors. 
Long  may  he  live! 

GRISWOLD'S    PHOTOGRAPHIC 
COMPOSITIONS. 

Our  readers  will  all  remember  the  excel- 
lent and  beautiful  pictures  of  "  Blowing 
Bubbles"  and  "The  Hen's  Nest,"  which 
have  appeared  in  our  magazine,  by  Mr.  M. 
M.  Griswold,  and  also  that  we  have  fre- 
quently alluded  to  his  stereographic  compo- 
sitions of  the  same  order  and  excellence. 

This  being  a  branch  of  our  art  which  can 
be  largely  cultivated,  and  enlarged,  and 
made  profitable,  we  have  made  an  arrange- 
ment with  Mr.  Griswold  for  the  use  of  his 
negatives,  such  as  enables  us  to  offer  prints 
from  them  to  our  readers,  as  studies,  at  a 
fair  price,  and  we  now  do  so  with  the  sug- 
gestion, that  if  they  are  purchased  and 
studied,  that  they  are  sure  to  repay  for  the 
outlay  largely.  We  should  like  to  see  more 
attention  paid  to  this  branch  of  photogra- 
phy, for  it  is  improving,  educating,  and 
profitable.  There  are  some  twenty-seven 
of  Mr.  Griswold's  stereographic  composi- 
tions, and  he  will  now  and  then  increase 
the  number.  Other  occupation  has  com- 
pelled him  to  suspend  the  publication  of 
the  subjects  now  ready,  and,  feeling  that 
such  excellent  studies  should  not  lie  dor- 
mant when  they  could  be  made  to  do  so 
much  good,  we  have  resurrected  them,  and 
opportunity  is  given  to  all  to  possess  them. 
A  full  catalogue  is  given  in  the  advertise- 
ment of  them  and  the  prices.  There  is  a 
vein  of  sentiment  or  humor  in  each  one 
which  will  make  them  attractive  to  every- 
body possessed  of  any  soul. 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTO  GEAPHEE. 


89 


Dealers  will  be  supplied  at  fair  rates, 
though  the  object  is  to  keep  the  price  down 
to  the  working  photographer,  that  all  may 
have  an  easj'  chance  to  obtain  them. 

We  hope  that  a  fair  scattering  of  them 
will  create  a  little  revolution  in  the  trade 
and  perhaps  make  business  a  little  better. 
The  public  want  something  new  occasion- 
ally;  why  should  not  stereoscopic  composi- 
tions be  in  turn  this  time? 


ENTREKIN'S  OSCILLATING 
ENAMELLER. 

Never  be  contented  with  a  good  thing, 
even,  if  it  can  be  made  better.  We  are 
led  to  -this  thought  by  an  examination  of 
Mr.  Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameller  and  a 
comparison  of  it  with  other  "  burnishers  " 
in  the  market.  The  great  difficulty  with 
other  kinds  has  been  that  they  would  not 
work  uniformly  well,  and  that  they  would 
scratch  more  pictures  than  they  improved. 
We  found  it  impossible  to  use  them  for  pol- 
ishing the  pictures  in  this  magazine.  But 
Mr.  Entrekin  claims  to  have  overcome  all 
these  troubles  by  ingenious  contrivances, 
all  of  which  he  has  secured  by  patents,  and 


in  the  use  of  which  he  agrees  to  protect 
purchasers  of  his  machines.  The  principal 
improvements  in  his  enameller  are,  1.  A 
double  movable  wedge  and  spring  playing 
under  the  burnisher,  which  raise  and  lower 
the  latter  equally  from  end  to  end,  preventing 
it  from  "  wabbling,"  and  making  it  adjust 
itself  to  any  thickness  of  card.  2.  The  bur- 
nisher itself  is  movable  and  removable.  If 
an  accident  occurs,  to  it,  it  can  instantly  be 
removed  and  a  duplicate  (which  should  al- 


ways be  on  hand)  put  in  its  place,  and  the 
work  goes  on  without  the  delay  and  expense 
entailed  by  having  to  send  the  whole  ma- 
chine to  the  shop  for  repairs.  3.  The  bur- 
nisher itself  oscillates — moves  from  side  to 
side  —  constantly  with  each  turn  of  the 
crank,  and  thus  absolutely  prevents  the 
scratching  and  destruction  of  the  print. 
Mr.  Entrekin  says  you  cannot  scratch  a 
print  with  his  burnisher.  We  give  a  cut  of 
the  machine,  and  now  turn  our  readers  over 
to  its  excellencies  for  their  examination,  and 
to  the  advertisement. 


MATTERS  OF  THE 


Membership  costs  $2 ;  annual  dues,  $4. 
Life  membership,  $2i,  and  no  dues. 

All  remittances  of  back  dues,  and  fees,  and 
dues  for  new  members  should  be  made  to  the 
Permanent  Secretary,  Edward  L.  Wilson, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

Life  Member. — J.  Holyland,  Baltimore, 
Maryland. 

The  Postal  Card. — Every  member  of  the 
National  Photographic  Association  has  been 
sent  a  statement  of  his  account  with  the 
Treasury.  It  is  very  important  that  remit- 
tances be  made  at  once.  It  is  none  too 
early  to  make  arrangements  for  the  Chicago 
Exhibition,  but  they  cannot  be  made  with 
an  empty  treasury.  If  you  want  the  As- 
sociation to  continue,  remit  now. 

Please  read  the  article  on  another  page 
on  "The  Financial  Condition  of  the  Na- 
tional Photographic  Association." 

To  Foreign  Photographers.  —  The  Sixth 
Annual  Exhibition  of  the  National  Photo- 
graphic Association  will  be  held  in  Chicago, 
111.,  beginning  Tuesday,  July  14th,  1874. 
Foreign  photographers  are  invited  as  usual 
to  contribute  to  the  display,  and  the  usual 
large  gold  medals  will  be  awarded  for  the 
best  exhibition  of  work  from  each  foreign 
country.  The  arrangements  are  the  same 
as  last  year.  For  further  particulars,  ad- 
dress the  Permanent  Secretary. 

Information  for  home  exhibitors  will  be 


90 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHEE. 


given  in  due  season.      The  rules  will   be 
substantially  as  heretofore. 

Contributions  to  the  Debt  Fund  — 


A.  M.  Collins,  Son  &  Co  ,   Phila.,  Pa., 

G.  H.  Loomis,  Boston,  M:iss., 

J.  Holyland,  Baltimore,  Md., 

C.  H.  Pease,  Goshen,  Ind.. 

S.  P.  Gaugler,   Believue,  Ohio, 

L.  F.  Reynard,  Syracuse,  N.  Y., 

E.  Decker,  Cleveland,  Ohio,   . 

F.  L.  Le  Roy,  Youngstown,  Ohio, 

G.  H.  Wood  &  Co.,  Towanda,  Pa., 

E.  W.  Beckwith,  Plymouth,  Pa., 
A.  S.  Barber.  Willimantic,  Conn., 
J.  C.  Mills,  Penn  Ynn,  N.  Y., 
R.  Walzl.  Baltimore,  Md  ,       . 
W.  Nims,  Fort  Edward,  N.  Y.. 
L.  V.  Moulton.  Beaver  Dam,  Wis., 
J.  G.  Stewart,  Carlinville,  111., 

F.  A.  Simonds,  Chillicothe,  Ohio, 
F.  M.  Rood,  Poultney,  Vt.,     . 
T.  M.  Moltz,  West  Fairview,  Pa., 
A.  Hall,  Chicago,  HI.,     . 
J.  E.  Rich,  Charles  City,  Iowa, 
J.  C.  Haring,  Massillon,  Ohio. 
W.  G.  C    Kimball,  Concord,  N.  H., 
Carson  &  Graham,    Hillsdale,  Mich. 


Heretofore  acknowledged, 


$100  00 


50 

00 

00 

50 

00 

00 

00 

50 

00 

00 

00 

8  00 

3  00 

6  00 

1    00 

8  00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 


$162  50 
.  260  50 

$423   00 


OUR  PICTURE. 

When  in  England  we,  of  course,  made 
a  pilgrimage  or  two  to  the  studio  of  Mr.  H. 
P.  Kobinson  (and  his  partner  Mr.  N.  K. 
Cherrill),  the  well-known  author  of  Picto- 
rial Effect  in  Photography.  We  shall  give 
our  views  of  what  we  saw  there  presently, 
but  meanwhile  call  your  attention  to  a  very 
important  branch  of  photographic  industry 
which  is  largely  practiced  by  the  gentlemen 
named,  and  to  give  you  an  example  of  their 
work  from  negatives,  which  they  kindly 
made  for  us  when  we  were  there.  We  must 
first  say  that  the  subject  is  named  "  Prepar- 
ing Spring  Flowers  for  Market,"  and  that 
our  picture  is  copied  from  an  original  print, 
which  is  about  24  x  30.  As  a  work  of  art 
the  composition  is  nearly  faultless.  As  an 
example  of  what  taste  and  industry  will 
do  it  is  capital.  How  to  make  such  work 
is  fully  described  in  his  book  by  Mr.  Kobin- 


son at  length,  but  our  space  only  allows  us 
to  make  some  extracts. 

Combination  printing,  which  is  the  branch 
we  allude  to,  means,  as  you  know,  the 
making  of  prints  from  two  or  more  nega- 
tives ;  the  various  parts  being  printed  from 
the  different  negatives  combined,  or  succes- 
sively. "  The  most  simple  form  of  combi- 
nation printing,  and  the  one  most  easy  of 
accomplishment  and  most  in  use  by  photog- 
raphers, is  that  by  which  a  natural  sky  is 
added  to  a  landscape."  And  this  form  we 
would  recommend  to  any  one  commencing 
this  style  of  work.  In  most  landscape 
negatives,  larger  than  stereoscopic,  the  sky 
is  usually  a  blank,  from  the  fact  that  the 
time  of  exposure  for  the  landscape  is  neces- 
sarily so  much  longer  than  that  required 
for  the  sky  that  flying  clouds  move  away, 
leaving  no  impression.  Now  to  remedy 
this  a  separate  negative  is  made  of  the  clouds, 
at  any  time  when  they  are  favorable  for 
photographing,  and  with  an  almost  instanta- 
neous exposure  they  are  secured  with  the 
most  perfect  detail.  To  print  in  a  sky,  the 
landscape  is  printed  fir.^t,  masking  the  sky, 
if  necessary,  so  that  it  may  be  left  white. 
If  a  mask  is  used  care  must  be  taken  to 
avoid  printing  a  sharp  line.  This  may  be 
done  by  keeping  the  edge  of  the  mask  sepa- 
rated from  the  negative,  producing  the 
same  effect  as  in  vignetting.  After  printing 
the  landscape  the  cloud  negative  is  put  in 
the  place  of  the  other,  and  the  sky  printed 
by  masking  the  landscape  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  was  done  with  the  sky.  A  little 
practice  will,  of  course,  be  necessary  to 
work  successfully,  but  when  the  simpler  form 
is  once  mastered,  then  something  more  com- 
plicated may  be  attempted.  Panoramic 
landscapes,  with  cloud  effects,  may  be  pro- 
duced from  several  different  negatives  ;  and 
when  the  methods  of  working  have  become 
well  understood,  something  more  difficult 
still  may  be  attempted  ;  such  a  picture,  for 
instance,  as  our  illustration.  This  is  a  capi- 
tal study;  the  lighting  particularly  may  be 
considered  in  connection  with  our  art  studies 
on  another  page. 

We  will  not  attempt  to  dissect  this  pic- 
ture, but  leave  that  for  the  student  to  do  in 
connection  with  the  following  copious  ex- 
tracts on  combination  printing,  which  we 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


91 


make  from  Mr.  Kobinson's  excellent  work. 
He  says  : 

"  Perhaps  the  greatest  use  to  which  com- 
bination printing  is  now  put  is  in  the  pro- 
duction of  portraits  with  natural  landscape 
backgrounds.  Many  beautiful  pictures, 
chiefly  cabinets  and  cards,  have  been  done 
in  this  way  by  several  photographers.  The 
easiest  kind  of  figure  for  a  first  attempt 
would  be  a  three-quarter  length  of  a  lady, 
because  you  would  then  get  rid  of  the  fore- 
ground, and  have  to  confine  your  attention 
to  the  upper  part.pf  the  figure  and  the  dis- 
tance. Pictures  of  this  kind  have  a  very 
pleasing  effect.  In  the  figure  negative, 
everything  should  be  stopped  out,  with  the 
exception  of  the  figure,  with  black  varnish  ; 
this  should  be  done  on  the  back  of  the  glass 
when  practicable,  which  produces  a  softer 
join  ;  but  for  delicate  parts — such  as  down 
the  face — where  the  joins  must  be  very 
close,  and  do  not  admit  of  anything  ap- 
proaching to  vignetting,  the  varnish  must 
be  applied  on  the  front.  A  much  better 
effect  than  painting  out  the  background  of 
the  figure  negative  is  obtained  by  taking 
the  figure  with  a  white  or  very  light  screen 
behind  it ;  this  plan  allows  sufficient,  light 
to  pass  through  the  background  to  give  an 
agreeable  atmospheric  tint  to  the  distant 
landscape;  and  stopping  out  should  only  be 
resorted  to  when  'the  background  is  too 
dark,  or  when  stains  or  blemishes  occur, 
that  would  injure  theeffect.  An  impression 
must  now  be  taken  which  is  not  to  be  toned 
or  fixed.  Cutout  the  figure,  and  lay  it,  face 
downwards,  on  the  landscape  negative  in 
the  position  you  wish  it  to  occupy  in  the 
finished  print.  It  may  be  fixed  in  its  posi- 
tion by  gumming  the  corners  near  the  lower 
edge  of  the  plate.  It  is  now  ready  for 
printing.  It  is  usually  found  most  conve- 
nient to  print  the  figure  negative  first. 
When  this  has  been  done,  the  print  must 
be  laid  down  on  the  landscape  negative  so 
that  the  figure  exactly  covers  the  place  pre- 
pared for  it  by  the  cut-out  mask.  When 
printed,  the  picture  should  be  carefully  ex- 
amined, to  see  if  the  joins  may  be  improved 
or  made  less  visible.  It  will  be  found  that, 
in  many  places,  the  effect  can  be  improved 
and  the  junctions  made  more  perfect,  espe- 
cially where  a  light 'comes  against  a  dark — 


such  as  a  distant  landscape  against  the  dark 
part  of  a  dress — by  tearing  away  the  edge  of 
the  mask  covering  the  dark,  and  supplying 
its  place  by  touches  of  black  varnish  at  the 
back  of  the  negative;  this,  in  printing,  will 
cause  the  line  to  be  less  defined,  and  the 
edges  to  soften  into  each  other.  If  the 
background  of  the  figure  negative  has  been 
painted  out,  the  sky  will  be  represented  by 
white  paper  ;  and  as  white  paper  skies  are 
neither  natural  nor  pleasing,  it  will  be  ad- 
visable to  sun  it  down. 

"  If  a  full-length  figure  be  desired,  it  will 
be  necessary  to  photograph  the  ground  with 
the  figure,  as  it  is  almost  impossible  to  make 
the  shadow  of  a  figure  match  the  ground  on 
which  it  stands  in  any  other  way.  This 
may  be  done  either  out  of  doors  or  in  the 
studio.  The  figure  taken  out  of  doors  would, 
perhaps,  to  the  critical  eye,  have  the  most 
natural  effect,  but  this  cannot  always  be 
done,  neither  can  it  be,  in  many  respects, 
done  so  well.  The  light  is  more  unmanage- 
able out  of  doors,  and  the  difficulty  arising 
from  the  effect  of  wind  on  the  dress  is  very 
serious.  A  slip  of  natural  foreground  is 
easily  made  up  in  the  studio  ;  the  error  to 
be  avoided  is  the  making  too  much  of  it. 
The  simpler  a  foreground  is  in  this  case,  the 
better  will  be  the  effect. 

"  The  composition  of  a  group  should  next 
engage  the  student's  attention.  In  making 
a  photograph  of  a  large  group,  as  many 
figures  as  possible  should  be  obtained  in 
each  negative,  and  the  position  of  the  joins 
so  contrived  that  they  shall  come  in  places 
where  they  will  be  least  noticed,  if  seen  at 
all.  It  will  be  found  convenient  to  make  a 
sketch  in  pencil  or  charcoal  of  the  compo- 
sition before  the  photograph  is  commenced. 
The  technical  working  out  of  a  large  group 
is  the  same  as  for  a  single  figure  ;  it  is,  there- 
fore, not  necessary  to  repeat  the  details." 

Mr.  Eobinson  now  alludes  to  an  example 
in  his  book  similar  in  style  to  our  picture, 
and  then  adds  what  may  equally  as  well 
apply  to  it,  as  follows  : 

"A  small  rough  sketch  was  first  made  of 
the  idea,  irrespective  of  any  considerations 
of  the  possibility  of  its  being  carried  out. 
Other  small  sketches  were  then  made,  modi- 
fying the  subject  to  suit  the  figures  avail- 
able as  models,  and  the  scenery  accessible, 


92 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


without  very  much  going  out  of  the  way  to 
find  it.  From  these  rough  sketches  a  more 
elaborate  sketch  of  the  composition,  pretty 
much  as  it  stands,  and  of  the  same  size,  was 
made,  the  arrangement  being  divided  so 
that  the  different  portions  may  come  on  15 
by  12  plates,  and  that  the  junctions  may 
come  in  unimportant  places,  easy  to  join, 
but  not  easy  to  be  detected  afterwards.  The 
separate  negatives  were  then  taken. 

"  At  first  sight,  it  will  appear  difficult  to 
place  the  partly-printed  pictures  in  the 
proper  place  on  the  corresponding  negative. 
There  are  many  ways  of  doing  this,  either 
of  which  may  be  chosen  to  suit  the  subject. 
Sometimes  a  needle  may  be  run  through 
some  part  of  the  print,  the  point  being  al- 
lowed to  rest  on  the  corresponding  part  of 
the  second  negative.  The  print  will  then 
fall  in  its  place  at  that  point.  Some  other 
point  has  then  to  be  found  at  a  distance 
from  the  first  ;  this  may  be  done  by  turn- 
ing up  the  paper  to  any  known  mark  on  the 
negative,  and  allowing  the  print  to  fall 
upon  it;  if  the  two  separate  points  fall  on 
the  right  places,  all  the  others  must  be  cor- 
rect. Another  way  of  joining  the  prints 
from  the  separate  negatives  is  by  placing  a 
candle  or  lamp  under  the  glass  of  the  print- 
ing-frame— practically,  to  use  a  glass  table 
— and  throwing  a  light  through  the  nega- 
tive and  paper,  the  join  can  then  be  seen 
through.  But  the  best  method  is  to  make 
register  marks  on  the  negatives.  This  is 
done  in  the  following  manner.  We  will 
suppose  that  we  wish  to  print  a  figure  with 
a  landscape  background  from  two  negatives, 
the  foreground  having  been  taken  with  the 
figure.  At  the  two  bottom  corners  of  the 
figure  negative  make  two  marks  with  black 
varnish,  thus  |_j;  these,  of  course,  will 
print  white  in  the  picture.  A  proof  is  now 
taken,  and  the  outline  of  the  figure  cut  out 
accurately.  "Where  the  foreground  and 
background  join,  the  paper  may  be  torn 
across,  and  the  edges  afterwards  vignetted 
with  black  varnish  on  the  back  of  the  nega- 
tives. This  mark  is  now  fitted  in  its  place 
on  the  landscape  negative.  Another  print 
is  now  taken  of  the  figure  negative,  and  the 
white  corner  marks  cut  away  very  accu- 
rately with  a  pair  of  scissors.  The  print  is 
now  carefully  applied  to  the  landscape  nega- 


tive, so  that  the  mark  entirely  covers  those 
parts  of  the  print  already  finished.  The 
landscape  is  then  printed  in.  Before,  how- 
ever, it  is  removed  from  the  printing-frame, 
if,  on  partial  examination,  the  joins  appear 
to  be  perfect,  two  lead-pencil  or  black  var- 
nish marks  are  made  on  the  mark  round  the 
cut-out  corners  at  the  bottom  of  the  print. 
After  the  first  successful  proof  there  is  no 
need  for  any  measurement  or  fitting  to  get 
the  two  parts  of  the  picture  to  join  perfectly  ; 
all  that  is  necessary  is,  merely  to  cut  out 
the  little  white  marks,  and  fit  the  corners  to 
the  corresponding  marks  on  the  mask  ;  and 
there  is  no  need  to  look  if  the  joins  coincide 
at  other  places,  because,  if  two  points  are 
right,  it  follows  that  all  must  be  so.  This 
method  can  be  applied  in  a  variety  of  ways 
to  suit  different  circumstances. 

"  There  are  one  or  two  things  to  consider 
briefly  before  concluding  this  subject. 

"  It  is  true  that  combination  printing,  al- 
lowing, as  it  does,  much  greater  liberty  to 
the  photographer,  and  much  greater  facili- 
ties for  representing  the  truth  of  nature, 
also  admits,  from  these  very  facts,  of  a  wide 
latitude  for  abuse;  but  the  photographer 
must  accept  the  conditions  at  his  own  peril. 
If  he  find  that  he  is  not  sufficiently  advanced 
in  knowledge  of  art,  and  has  not  sufficient 
reverence  for  nature,  to  allow  him  to  make 
use  of  these  liberties,  let  him  put  on  his 
fetters  again,  and  confine  himself  to  one 
plate.  It  is  certain  (and  this  I  will  put  in 
italics,  to  impress  it  more  strongly  on  the 
memory)  that  a  -photograph  produced  by 
combination  printing  must  be  deeply  studied 
in  every  particular ',  so  that  no  departure  from 
the  truth  of  nature  shall  be  discovered  by  the 
closest  scrutiny.  No  two  things  must  occur 
in  one  picture  that  cannot  happen  in  nature 
at  the  same  time.  If  a  sky  is  added  to  a 
landscape,  the  light  must  fall  on  the  clouds 
and  on  the  earth  from  the  same  source  and 
in  the  same  direction.  This  is  a  matter 
that  should  not  be  done  by  judgment  alone, 
but  by  judgment  guided  by  observation  of 
nature.  Effects  are  often  seen,  especially  in 
cloud  land,  very  puzzling  to  the  calm  rea- 
soner  when  he  sees  them  in  a  picture,  but 
these  are  the  effects  that  are  often  best  worth 
preserving,  and  which  should  never  be  neg- 
lected." 


THE    PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


93 


Our  prints  were  made  by  Mr.  William  H. 
Ehoads,  o"n  the  excellent  brand  of  paper  re- 
cently introduced  by  the  Albion  Albumen- 
izing  Company  of  London,  for  whom  Wil- 
son, Hood  &  Co.,  Philadelphia,  are  the 
agents.  Mr.  Rhoads  speaks  very  highly  of 
the  excellencies  of  this  paper,  and  the  beauty 
of  the  prints  tell  even  more  than  that. 


NOTES  IN  AND  OUT  OF    THE 
STUDIO. 

BY  G,  WHARTON  SIMPSON,  M.A.,  P.S.A, 

Staining  Collodion  Films. — The  idea  of 
staining  collodion  films  is  an  old  one,  hav- 
ing been  repeatedly  proposed  by  experi- 
mentalists for  different  purposes.  If  I  re- 
member rightly  it  was  proposed  in  America 
some  ten  or  a  dozen  years  ago,  to  tint  col- 
lodion with  saffron  or  turmeric,  as  an  easy 
method  of  securing  greater  intensity  in  the 
negative,  and  some  years  later  it  was  sug- 
gested that  saturating  the  film  of  a  very 
hard  negative  with  a  tint  of  anilin  blue, 
would  probably  secure  greater  softness  in 
the  prints.  The  use  of  a  varnish  of  a  diac- 
tinic  color  has  been  found  useful  in  giving 
additional  printing  vigor  to  weak  negatives. 
At  the  first  glance  it  scarcely  seems  reason- 
able to  suppose  that  the  application  of  a 
yellow  varnish  all  over  the  negative  should 
give  it  any  additional  intensity,  inasmnch 
as  the  yellow  tint  of  the  varnish  should  re- 
lax the  passage  of  light  equally  all  over  the 
lights  and  shadows  of  the  image.  But 
apart  from  the  fact  that  the  slow  printing 
induced  in  itself  conduces  to  vigor,  there 
is  really  an  actual  increase  of  intensity  or 
contrast  to  be  gained  by  using  a  varnish 
which  will  communicate  a  yellow  dye  to 
the  film.  A  glance  at  the  actual  condition 
will  show  how  this  happens.  All  spirit 
varnishes  actually  permeate  the  collodion 
film,  leaving  a  layer  of  resin  not  simply  on 
the  surface,  but  permeating  the  texture  of 
the  collodion,  and  the  dense  portions  of  the 
image  being  so  much  thicker  than  the 
shadows,  act  in  some  degree  like  bibulous 
paper ;  they  retain  a  greater  proportion  of 
the  resin  and  of  the  coloring  matter  than  the 
shadows.  The  result  is  that  the  depth  of 
the  yellow  tint  in  the  lights,  where  a  greater 
body  of  it  has  been   absorbed,  is  considera- 


bly greater  than  that  of  the  shadows,  and 
so  an  actual  increase  of  contrast  is  secured- 
But  there  appears  to  be  a  probability  of  a 
still  greater  and  more  important  purpose 
for  the  practice  of  tinting  or  staining  the- 
collodion  film.  Our  friend  Dr.  Yogel  has 
doubtless  communicated  to  you  his  impor- 
tant discovery,  of  rendering  a  film  as  sensi- 
tive to  the  yellow  as  to  the  blue  ray  by  first 
applying  to  the  film  a  substance  which  will 
absorb  the  yellow  ray.  Here  is  a  most  im- 
portant field  for  experiment  in^this  direc- 
tion, which  promises  to  well  repay  the  in- 
vestigator. 

Another  valuable  use  for  stained  films  was 
suggested  some  time  ago,  by  a  skilful  Eng- 
lish amateur,  Mr.  Henry  Cooper,  who  pro- 
posed this  plan  as  a  means  of  superseding 
the  necessity  for  backing  dry  plates  with  a 
nonactinic  pigment.  Your  readers  are  fa- 
miliar with  the  fact  that  some  dry  plates 
having  an  exceedingly  transparent  film,  are 
subject  to  the  defect  known  as  "blurring," 
the  result  of  the  light  passing  through  the 
transparent  film,  and  being  reflected  back 
so  as  to  form  a  blurred  image.  The  appli- 
cation of  a  yellow  pigment  at  the  back  of 
the  plate  was  found  to  check  this  defect ; 
but  it  was  a  troublesome  remedy.  Tinting 
the  film  with  a  nonactinic  color,  is  found  to 
check  the  action  even  more  efficiently,  and 
without  anything  like  the  same  inconveni- 
ence as  the  pigment  involves.  In  a  recent 
communication,  after  speaking  of  its  use 
with  dry  plates,  Mr.  Cooper  says : 

"  Of  the  value  of  the  method  for  a  dry  pro- 
cess there  cannot,  therefore,  be  a  doubt,  and 
I  have  been  constantly  assailed  with  the 
question,  '  Cannot  you  use  it  also  in  the 
wet  process,  or  will  it  injure  the  bath,  or 
collodion,  or  make  the  plates  slower?'  I 
am  now  in  a  position  to  answer  these  three 
queries  in  a  satisfactory  manner. 

"  Using  the  preparation  of  dye  which  I 
am  about  to  advise,  I  do  not  find  any  practi- 
cal difference  in  the  sensitiveness  of  the  film, 
and  I  am  also  glad  to  say  that  a  very  much 
larger  quantity  may  be  used  without  injur- 
ing either  the  bath  or  the  collodion.  In 
some  very  trying  cases  it  is  advisable  to  use 
a  deeply-stained  collodion,  and  give  the 
little  longer  exposure  which  such  a  course 
entails. 


94 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


"  I  need  not  take  up  space  by  describing 
the  subjects  where  I  should  advocate  a  larger 
dose  of  dye,  as  each  worker  must  be  guided 
by  individual  experience;  but  may  remark, 
in  passing,  I  have  found  the  method  invalu- 
able in  photographing  skies,  interiors,  and 
subjects  where  there  are  great  contrasts  of 
light  and  shade  in  juxtaposition.  To  more 
thoroughly  test  the  action  of  the  dye  on  the 
nitrate  of  silver  bath,  I  added  a  large  dose 
of  the  alcoholic  solution  to  forty  ounces  of 
bath.  The  silver  solution  was  powerfully 
colored,  and  a  large  proportion  of  dye  was 
precipitated.  After  standing  for  a  week 
the  bath  was  filtered,  and  a  plate  tried.  The 
film  was  deeply  stained,  but  gave,  upon  ex- 
posure and  development,  a  brilliant,  clean, 
and  forcible  image.  Even  after  keeping  for 
two  months  this  colored  bath  was  not  injur- 
ed by  the  dye,  the  only  difference  perceiv- 
able being  a  diminution  in  color,  each  plate 
abstracting  a  goodly  quantity  of  dye.  After 
this  conclusive  proof  of  the  harmlessness  of 
the  dye  I  was  then  using,  I  did  not  hesitate  to 
sensitize  plates  coated  with  stained  collodion* 
in  any  of  my  baths,  and  I  never  regretted 
doing  so.  The  anilin  dye  which  I  have 
found  most  practically  useful  is  the  one 
called  rosanilin,  and  for  the  sample   I  used 


last  summer  and  autumn  I  was  indebted  to 
the  courtesy  of  Colonel  Wortley,  who  kindly 
forwarded  it  to  me.  The  most  convenient 
way  of  using  it  is  to  make  up  a  solution  in 
absolute  alcohol  of  ten  grains  to  the  ounce. 
The  preparation  to  be  added  to  the  collodion 
is  about  five  minims  of  this  solution  to  each 
ounce. 

"  When  the  negative  is  fixed  the  film  will 
still  be  of  a  pinkish  tint,  which  may  either 
be  removed  by  rinsing  the  plate  with  a  little 
common  methylated  alcohol,  or  it  may  be 
allowed  to  remain,  as  it  will  do  no  harm  in 
printing,  being  even  advantageous  with  a 
thin,  delicate  negative.  If  it  be  determined 
to  allow  the  dye  to  remain  in  the  film,  the 
negative  must  be  coated  before  drying  with 
a  solution  of  gum,  albumen,  or  other  sub- 
stance, to  prevent  the  varnish  from  dissolv- 
ing out  the  rosanilin. 

"  It  would  be  a  great  convenience  if  some 
photographic  chemist  would  send  out  an 
alcoholic  solution  of  rosanilin,  as  the  dye 
itself  is  awkward  stuff  to  handle,  and  I  ven- 
ture to  ask  the  trade  to  oblige  us  in  this 
matter.  Until  it  can  be  procured  in  solu- 
tion my  advice  is,  do  not  buy  more  than 
you  want  to  dissolve,  and  put  it  into  the 
requisite  amount  of  alcohol  at  once." 


Himes's  Stereograph  Book. — We  have  made 
up  some  stereograph  books  after  the  plan  de- 
scribed by  Professor  Himes  in  our  January  num- 
ber, and  have  them  ready  for  sale.  Sample 
copies,  fifty  cents.  Please  refer  to  the  adver- 
tisement.   

Items  of  News.  —  The.  Philadelphia  Sketch  Club 
issue  a  monthly  •'Portfolio"  of  photo-lithographs 
of  their  sketches.  The  initiatory  number  is  be- 
fore us,  ard  promises  well,  as  it  contains  several 
very  good  things. — Dr.  J.  Fletcher  Woodward 
advertises  his  patents  for  a  photographic  trunk 
and  a  dark-tent  for  sale,  owing  to  the  misfortune 
which  has  befallen  him  of  looking  so  much  like 
some  one  else,  that  he  has  been  arrested  and  im- 
prisoned for  murder.  Please  read  his  advertise 
ment. — Messrs.  R.  Newell  &  Son  have  shown  us 
some  capital  testimonials  from  photographers  to 
the  value  of  their  cement  and  photographic  ware. 
Send  for  one. — The  Philadelphia  Age,  in  alluding 


to  the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  says:  "All 
the  latest  inventions  and  discoveries  in  the  art 
photographical  receive  prompt  notice  in  this 
periodical,  and  we  do  not  see  how  any  one,  even 
incidentally  connected  with  the  trade,  can  afford 
to  be  without  it."  It  tells  the  truth.— Of  Dr. 
Vogel's  Photographer 's  Reference-Book,  Mr.  W. 
Heighway  writes  :  ,;  I  think  it  is  calculated  to 
be  of  great  use  to  many  workers  in  our  profession 
as  a  helpful  book  in  time  of  doubt  and  difficulty." 
— Several  correspondents  ask  if  we  "know  any- 
thing about  the  'Preparation  for  Negatives,' 
advertised  by  C.  F.  Cook."  We  answer  that  we 
do  not.  How  can  any  varnish  "enable  you  to 
retouch  your  negatives  in  half  the  usual  time?" 
—Mr.  T.  H.  Johnson,  of  the  firm  of  D.  H.  An- 
derson &  Co.,  Richmond,  Va.,  recently  accom- 
panied Professor  Donaldson  in  a  balloon  to — . — 
Mr.  D.  J.  Ryan,  Savannah,  Ga,  has  occupied 
his  new  and  beautiful   store,  where  he   will  be 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


95 


glad  to  see  all  his  friends,  old  and  new,  and  to 
fill  their  orders  for  stock. — Mr.  David  Bendann 
has  associated  himself  with  Mr.  James  Fryer,  at 
No.  10  North  Charles  Street,  Baltimore,  where 
they  have  opened  a  fine  art  gallery  for  the  sale  of 

all  objects  of  art.  

The  English  Year-Books. — The  Year-Buok 
of  Photography,  edited  by  Mr.  G.  Wharton 
Simpson,  is  at  hand  for  1874,  larger  than  ever, 
and  full  of  very  useful  information.  The  same 
may  be  said  of  the  British  Journal  Almanac^ 
edited  by  Mr.  J.  Trail  Taylor.  We  have  a  stock 
ol  both.     Mailed  for  fifty  cents  each. 


An  Impostor. — We  learn  that  a  man  claiming 
to  be  the  brother  of  Mr.  John  G.  Hood,  of  Wil- 
son, Hood  &  Co.,  is  defrauding  photographers 
out  West.  Mr.  Hood  desires  us  to  say  that  he 
has  but  one  brother,  who  is  in  business  in  this 
city,  and  that  photographers  should  not  credit 
the  gentleman  who  claims  to  be  his  relative. 


The  Right  Way  to  Look  at  it  — Mr.  Wm. 
Bryan,  Russellville,  Ky.,  says  :  "  I  have  just 
received  the  money  for  three  4-4  prints,  and 
in  sending  you  the  money  for  the  Philadel- 
phia Photographer  for  1874,  I  feel  that  it  will 
only  cost  me  a  few  cents,  and  I  will  have  twelve 
good  pictures  and  much  valuable  knowledge  in 
return."  

We  have  received  a  copy  of  the  Ninth  Annual 
Catalogue  of  the  Officers  and  Students,  with  a 
statement  of  the  course  of  instruction  of  the 
Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology.  We  re- 
joice to  see  the  prosperity  of  such  institutions. 


•'Prang's  Natural  Historv  Series,"  is 
the  name  given  to  a  series  of  beautiful  chromos, 
illustrating  the  works  of  nature.  They  already 
include  several  families  in  zoology,  plants,  flow- 
ers, vegetables,  &c,  and  are  very  instructive 
when  studied  with  the  letter  press  which  accom- 
panies them.  We  bind  an  inset  concerning  them 
in  this  number,  to  which  please  refer. 


Mr.  J.  F.  Ryder,  of  Cleveland,  Ohio,  called 
upon  us  a  few  days  ago  as  full  of  ''pluck"  (1  and  2) 
as  ever,  the  best  evidence  of  which  is  that  he  is 
willing  to  be  Local  Secretary  for  the  National 
Photographic  Association  again  if  the  conven- 
tion wishes  to  go  to  Cleveland. 


The  Lens  is  a  Quarterly  Journal  of  Micro- 
scopy and  the  Allied  Natural  Sciences,  published 
in  Chicago.  The  December  number  is  before  us, 
and  contains  a  beautiful  Woodbury  type,  from 
one  of  Dr.  Woodward's  negatives. 


Dr.   Vogel's   Photographers'  Reference- 
Book  is  continually  winning  new  laurels.     The 


London  Photographic  Journal  says,  concerning 
it:  "Dr.  Herman  Vogel,  of  Berlin,  the  worthy 
President  of  the  Society  for  the  Advancement  of 
Photography  in  that  city,  is  too  well  known  as  a 
sound  photographic  chemist  to  require  an  intro- 
duction at  our  hands.  His  Reference-Book  and 
Dictionary  is  a  handy  volume,  which  will  be 
found  especially  useful  to  the  working  operator. 
The  information  being  alphabetically  arranged, 
is  always  convenient  to  hand  ;  and  his  advice  as 
regards  the  preparation  of  baths,  developers,  <fcc, 
as  also  his  rules  how  to  avoid  failures,  may  be 
relied  upon  with  a  quiet  conscience.  The  most 
recent  processes,  both  wet  and  dry,  are  described 

in  the  volume.''         

Bigelow's  Album  op  Lighting  and  Posing 
seems  to  go  even,  better  in  Europe  than  it  does 
at  home.  The  Key  has  been  translated  into  Ger- 
man, French,  and  Italian.     All  should  study  it. 


The  attention  of  photographers  is  requested 
by  Messrs.  A.  M.  Collins,  Son  &  Co.  to  their  new 
group  mounts,  two  samples  of  designs  for  which 
will  be  found  among  our  advertising  sheets.  They 
have  shown  us  a  number  of  very  pretty  styles. 

Pictures  Received. — Since  our  last  issue  we 
have  received  quite  a  number  of  specimens  of 
various  styles  of  work,  and  some  of  them  we  find 
so  superior,  that  it  is  with  pleasure  we  notice 
them,  and  wish  that  all  might  have  the  privilege 
of  studying  them,  and  be  stimulated  to  strive  for 
the  same  degree  of  excellence.  Several  cabinets 
from  Mr.  F.  Gutekunst,  of  this  city,  are  beauti- 
ful specimens  of  portraiture  ;  one  particularly  of 
a  little  girl  in  jaunty  hat  and  bare  arms,  is  a 
perfect  gem.  The  posing,  the  lighting,  the  un- 
affected expression,  all  are  admirable,  and  show 
that  the  artist  is  still  in  the  foremost  rank. 

From  Mr.  N.  S.  Hardy,  of  Boston,  several  cab- 
inets, all  of  a  very  high  order  of  merit.  These 
are  of  children,  and  for  exquisite  delicacy  in  light 
and  shade,  and  perfect  rendering  of  white  dra- 
pery, are  difficult  to  excel. 

From  Mr.  H.  Rocher,  Chicago,  some  beautiful 
composition  cabinets,  showing  fine  artistic  ar- 
rangement, and  judicious  selection  of  accessories. 

From  Mr.  H.  L.  Bingham,  San  Antonio,  Texas, 
several  cabinets.  Although  in  a  remote  section 
of  the  country,  Mr.  Bingham  is  turning  out  some 
fine  work.  Cabinets  are  also  received  from 
Messrs.  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  San  Francisco,  and 
Mr.  Milton  F.  Carter,  of  Worcester,  Mass., 
showing  fine  work. 

A  Victoria  card  from  R.  Goebel,  St.  Charles, 
Mo.,  illustrates  a  scene  of  destruction — a  railroad 
train  having  been  precipitated  from  a  bridge  by 
the  breaking  of  an  axle  of  the  tender. 


93 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


From  Messrs.  Souder  &  Nowell,  this  city,  we 
have  a  fine  carte  de  visile  portrait  of  T.  S.  Ar* 
thur,  a  name  familiar  to  almost  every  child  in  the 
land. 

Cartes  de  visite  have  also  been  received  from 
Messrs.  S.  T.  Bryan,  Young  America,  111.  ;  J. 
B.  Medlar,  Jefferson,  Wis.;  Davis  Bros.,  Ports- 
mouth, N.  H.,  and  E.  K.  Abrams  &  Co  ,  Browns- 
ville, Pa.  Stereos  have  been  received  of  Huosac 
Tunnel  and  vicinity,  from  Messrs.  Russell  & 
Stone,  Boston.  Of  the  labors  of  the  sturdy  lum- 
bermen of  Michigan,  being  winter  views  in  the 
woods  and  on  the  log-driving  streams,  by  W.  C. 
Cain,  Alpena,  Mich.,  and  a  series  of  views, 
mostly  of  Lake  George  scenery,  from  S.  R.  Stod- 
dard, Glen's  Falls,  N.  Y.  Many  of  these  are  fine 
specimens  of  taste  and  skill  in  choosing  the  sub- 
ject and  managing  the  light. 


W  atkins's  Stereos. — The  finest  lot  of  stereos 
we  have  had  the  pleasure  of  examining  for  some 
time,  came  to  us  a  few  days  ago  from  Mr.  C.  E. 
Watkins,  San  Francisco.  These  comprise  views 
on  the  Pacific  Railroad,  Yosemite  Valley,  Mt 
Shasta,  Groups  of  Indians,  Capt.  Jack's  retreats, 
Pacific  Coast,  &3.  We  have  selected  some  of  the 
best  subjects,  and  will  notice  them  briefly  . 
"View  on  the  Merced,  Yosemite  Valley  ;"  this 
is  beautiful  in  light  and  composition.  "  Mt. 
Shasta,  view  from  the  Northeast, :' and  "Glacier 
on  Mt.  Shasta,  Siskiyou  Co.,  Cal.;"  these  remind 
one  of  the  wonderful  Swiss  and  Alpine  views, 
and  bring  before  us  scenery  that  many  are  not 
aware  exists  in  America.  On  the  Pacific  Rail- 
road we  have  ''Truckee  River  below  Truckee 
Station;"  "  Summit  Tunnel  before  completion; 
Altitude,  7042  feet.''  "The  Devil's  Slide," 
Weber  Canyon,  Utah  ;  a  most  singular-looking 
formation  of  rock  on  the  mountain  side  ;  and 
"  Bloomer  Cut,  bird's-eye  view."  "  At  the  Gey- 
sers,'' is  a  picture  of  a  happy-looking  little  miss, 
and  beside  her  a  young  pet  deer.  It  might  be 
called  the  two  dears.  "Witches  Caldron,  Gey- 
sers.'' We  can  almost  imagine  we  see  the  three 
weird  spirits  circling  around  and  chanting  their 
monotonous  song  : 

"Bubble,  bubble,  toil  and  trouble, 
Fire  burn  and  caldron  bubble." 

"  Steamboat  Geyser  ;"  "  Devil's  Canyon;"  "Dev- 
il's Teakettle  ;"  "In  the  Devil's  Canyon,"  and 
the  "  Devil's  Canyon,  view  looking  down  the 
canyon."  This  last  is  a  magnificent  view,  and  in- 
spires no  terrors,  as  the  evil  name  might  indi- 
cate. In  all  these  Geyser  views,  the  seething 
vapor  continually  boiling  from  the  earth,  might 
indicate  that  Vulcan  had  set  up  a  foundry  down 
below,  with  steam  engines  and  modern  ma- 
chinery.     "  View  of  the  spot  where  Gen.  E.  R. 


S.  Canby  and  the  Peace  Commissioners  were 
murdered  by  the  Modocs. "  "Captain  Jack's 
Cave  ;"  "  Captain  Jack's  Stronghold  ;"  "  Lava 
Bed,  showing  Soldier's  Cemetery;"  "Group 
of  Warm  Spring  Indians  ;"  "  At  the  Rancherio, 
Mendocino  County,  California."  This  is  a  pic- 
ture of  an  Indian  encampment,  the  principal 
figure  in  which  is  a  little  chubby  Indian  baby, 
sitting  on  a  mat  on  the  ground,  and  one  hand 
resting  on  his  basket  cradle.  He  sits  perfectly 
still,  looks  directly  at  you,  and  what  shows  of 
his  form  above  the  basket  indicates  that  his  en- 
tire suit  of  baby  clothes  consists  of  an  orna- 
ment like  a  locket  on  his  neck,  and  a  bracelet 
on  his  arm.  A  fine  piece  of  bronze  statuary. 
"  A  Piute  Chief,  "  is  a  good  picture  of  an  Indian. 
"The  Willamette  Falls,  Oregon"  "Rooster 
Rock,  Columbia  River."  "  The  Oldest  Inhab- 
itant of  the  Farallon  Islands,"  is  not  excelled 
by  anything  in  York's  collection  from  the  Zoo- 
logical Gardens  "  Young  Gull  presenting  his 
Bill,  the  latest  thing  out."  "  Gull,  Shags,  and 
Murr,  Farallon  Islands,  Pacific  Ocean,"  "Sea 
Lions,  Farallon  Islands,"  "At  Woodward's 
Gardens.  San  Francisco,"  "View  of  the  City  of 
San  Francisco."  These  views  have  evidently 
been  chosen  with  a  great  deal  of  care  and  judg- 
ment. They  are  artistic  in  treatment,  and  some 
of  them  indicate  indomitable  energy  and  perse- 
verance to  secure  them.  Such  work  assures  us 
that  nature  will  not  go  unrepresented,  even  in 
her  most  hidden  recesses  or  giddy  heights. 


Messrs.  Long  &  Smith,  Quincy,  111.,  desire 
us  to  call  attention  to  their  advertisement  of  a 
gallery  for  sale,  which  they  assure  us  is  a  most 
desirable  one.  With  respect  to  Mr.  Long's  bath- 
warmer,  they  write  us  that  one  of  their  cus- 
tomers says  :  "  Accept  my  hearty  thanks  for  the 
cut  of  the  bath-warmer.  It  is  splendid.  I  would 
not  be  without  it  for  fifty  dollars,  and  it  did  not 
cost  me  fifty  cents." 

Mr.  J.  Pitcher  Spooner,  Stockton,  Cal., 
sends  a  lot  of  cards,  Victorias  and  cabinets, 
showing  throughout  the  evidences  of  a  live, 
thinking,  progressive  photographer  being  at  the 
helm  in  his  photographic  craft.  Mr.  Spooner  is 
one  of  the  livest  and  best  photographers  on  the 
Pacific  coast.  Here  is  an  evidence  of  it.  He 
says  :  "  1  will  be  one  of  eighty  to  give  $50  each 
to  the  treasury  of  the  National  Photographic 
Association  to  put  it  beyond  the  possibility  of 
ever  getting  into  debt  again.  It  has  done  me 
great  good,  and  it  must  not  go  down." 


Dr.  Vogel's  German  letter  and  Mr.  Lacan's 
French  correspondence  did  not  reach  us  until  too 
late  for  insertion  this  month. 


ADVERTISING  RATES  FOR  SPECIALTIES — It  will  be  understood  that  matter  under 
this  head  is  n"*  to  be  considered  as  always  having  editorial  sanction,  though  we  shall  endeavor  to  clear  it 
of  anything  tending  to  deceive  or  mislead.  Stockdealers  will  find  this  a  beneficial  mode  of  advertising, 
and  sure  to  pay  largely.  Six  lines,  one  insertion,  $2.00,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words 
to  a  line— in  advance.  Operators  desiring  situations,  no  charge.  Matter  must  be  received  by  the  23rd 
to  secure  insertion.  Advertisers  will  please  not  ask  us  for  recommendations.  4®-  We  cannot  undertake 
to  mail  answers  to  parties  who  advertise.    Please  always  add  your  address  to  the  advertisement. 


Photo.  Cab  for  Sale. — Firs'-elass,  and  well 
accoutred.     For  terms  and  description,  address 
E.  W.  Blake,  Phillipsburg,  N.  J. 


For  Sale. — The  finest,  most  pleasant,  and 
most  completely  fitted  gallery  in  New  England. 
Established  nearly  fifteen  years.  Population  of 
town,  eighteen  to  twenty  thousand ;  splendid 
back  country  and  surrounded  by  large  factory 
villages.  Satisfactory  reasons  for  selling.  Ad- 
dress Photographer, 

Lock  Box  1654,  Norwich,  Conn. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

For  Sale. — The  subscriber  offers  for  sale  his 
gallery  in  the  city  of  Marshall,  Iowa,  for  cash 
only  ;  doing  the  largest  business  of  any  gallery 
in  Central  Iowa.  The  leading  gallery  in  the 
city,  and  only  one  other  gallery.  Competition 
not  formidable.  Will  be  sold  at  a  bargain,  if 
sold  within  thirty  days.  Full  particulars  on  ap- 
plication, including  diagram  of  gallery.  Do  not 
write  unless  you  mean  business.  If  not  sold 
within  thirty  days,  will  want  a  first-class  opera- 
tor to  take  an  interest  in  a  business  of  $400  per 
month.  W.  H.  Elliott, 

Marshall,  Marshall  Co.,  Iowa. 


Something  that  you  want. 

See  advt.  of  the  Rapid  Photo. 

Washer. 

Boston  Gallery  for  Sale. — The  constant 
increase  of  Mrs.  Foss'  business  makes  an  especial 
agent  necessary,  and  I  shall  be  compelled  to  sell 
my  place  to  attend  to  it.  My  studio  is  14  x  38 
feet,  with  a  pure  north,  side,  and  top  light.  I 
have  the  best  mammoth  tube  box  and  stand  in 
Boston.  A  new,  24-inch  press,  cast  steel  (nick- 
eled) rollers.  Will  match  my  card  and  cob  tube 
with  anybody.  Solar  camera,  and  everything 
for  a  first-class  business.  Dark-room,  10x14 
feet,  11  feet  high,  ventilated.  Studio,  artist's, 
reception,  and  work-rooms  all  on  one  floor,  up 
two  flights  only.  Cheap  rent,  splendid  location, 
being  opposite  the  world-renowned  Boston  Com- 
mons. Lease,  good  trade,  best  prices.  Posses- 
sion given  at  once,  reserving  the  privilege  to 
finish  college  and  other  iwork  engaged. 
E.  J.  Foss, 
171^  Tremont  St.,  Boston. 


For  Sale. — A  photographic  car  ;  the  best  one 
I  ever  saw,  built  to  my  order  one  and  a  half 
years  ago.  Has  revolving  light,  also  large  side 
light ;  works  splendid ;  furnished  with  every- 
thing necessary,  and  first-class.  My  health  has 
failed,  and  I  must  sell  to  change  climate.  For 
particulars,  address  soon,  D.  R.  Judkins, 

Streator,  La  Salle  Co.,  111. 


For  Sale. — At  a  great  sacrifice,  my  patents 
on  photographers'  tent  and  trunk,  at  $1200  ;  also, 
my  entire  stock,  apparatus,  and  fixtures  of  gal- 
lery at  McMinnville,  Tenn.  Gallery  for  rent  at 
$15  per  month ;  no  opposition.  Being  forced 
from  my  home  and  business  and  imprisoned,  is 
my  reason  for  this  offer.     Address 

Dr.  J.  Fletch.  Woodward, 
27  N.  Front  St.,  Nashville,  Tenn. 


Wanted. — An  artist  to  finish  photographs  in 
oil  and  India-ink.  A  salary  paid,  or  an  interest 
in  the  business.  Situation  permanent  and  pleas- 
ant. A  photographer  also  needed  ;  must  he  first- 
class.  References  given  and  required.  Address 
Williams,  Photographer, 

Box  519,  Houston,  Texas. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

For  Sale. — In  a  live  town  of  eight  thousand 
inhabitants,  a  gallery  supplied  with  Dallmeyer 
tubes  and  other  things  to  match  ;  is  in  central 
location,  up  one  flight  of  stairs.  The  town  is 
a  railroad  centre  and  is  growing  fast.  It  is  a 
good  chance  for  a  live  artist  who  wishes  to  "go 
West. ' '  Any  one  who  means  business  will  receive 
full  information  by  applying  to 

.  Long  &  Smith, 

Dealers  in  Photographic  Stock,  Quincy,  111. 


Gallery  for  Sale. — In  a  live  town  of  three 
thousand  inhabitants,  no  opposition  within  thirty 
miles.  Good  rooms,  fine  north  side  and  skylights, 
and  doing  a  good  business.  Price  low,  terms 
easy.     For  particulars  address 

' '  Photographer,  ' ' 
P.O.  Box  142,  Shelbina,  Mo. 


For  Sale. — A  photographic  gallery  in  one  of 
the  most  desirable  business  localities  in  the  city 
of  Philadelphia.  For  further  particulars,  ad- 
dress "Art," 

Office  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS,  1874,  $4.50. 


For  Sale. — A  nice  little  gallery  in  a  town  of 
fifteen  hundred  inhabitants  ;  good  country  ;  no 
opposition  within  twelve  miles.  Gallery  28x16 
feet ;  good  instruments,  one  4-4  Voigtlander  lense, 
one  1-4  same  make,  two  1-4  Darlot.  Price,  $500. 
Address  R.  M.  Denham, 

P.O.  Bos  220,  St.  Clairsville,  Ohio. 


For  Sale. — A  newly  fitted  up  ferrotype  gal- 
lery, in  the  city  of  Newburgh,  on  the  Hudson ; 
over  twenty  thousand  inhabitants  ;  low  rent  and 
good  business.  A  good  opening  for  a  man  to 
start  the  photograph  business  with  the  ferrotype 
trade.     For  particulars,  call  or  address 

"F.  H.  B.," 
P.O.  Box  717,  Newburgh,  N.  Y. 


Don't  soak  your  prints  sev- 
eral hours  and  damage  their 
brilliancy,  but  get  the  Rapid 
Photo.  Washer. 


For  Sale.— Brady's  National  Gallery,  627 
Pennsylvania  Avenue,  Washington,  D. C,  with 
twenty  thousand  negatives,  and  the  largest  politi- 
cal and  historical  collection  in  the  country.  Es- 
tablished twenty  years  ;  always  the  first  gallery 
in  the  capitol  and  now  doing  a  good  business. 
A  half  interest  or  the  whole  will  be  sold  cheap 
to  close  a  copartnership. 


For  Sale. — One  of  the  finest  galleries  in  the 
State  of  Indiana,  furnished  with  all  the  latest 
improvements  in  instruments,  accessories,  &c. 
Rooms  for  residence  attached.  This  gallery  is 
situated  in  a  city  of  over  12,000  inhabitants, 
and  doing  a  splendid  business.  For  particulars, 
apply  to  P.  Smith  &  Co., 

No.  121  West  Fifth  Street.  Cincinnati,  Ohio. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

For  Sale. — A  photograph  gallery  in  a  thriving 
manufacturing  town  of  five  thousand  inhabitants. 
Established  ten  years.  No  opposition  within  ten 
miles.  Good  trade ;  good  prices ;  plenty  of 
room  ;  low  rent ;  large  skylight  ;  all  very  con- 
venient. Rare  chance  for  a  small  capital.  Ad- 
dress Wm.  L.  Teush, 

Boonton,  N.  J. 


For  Sale. — Owing  to  the  death  of  Mr.  H. 
Lazier,  the  executors  of  his  estate  will  sell  the 
newly  fitted  up  photographic  gallery,  situated  on 
the  best  street  in  the  City  of  Syracuse,  N.  Y.  ; 
up  one  flight  of  stairs  and  all  on  one  floor.  This 
gallery  is  in  complete  running  order  and  will  be 
sold  at  half  its  value,  with  a  long  lease  if  desired. 
Address  Mrs.  H.  Lazier, 


Wanted. — About  the  first  of  April.  A  good 
operator,  one  who  has  had  some  experience  in 
viewing  preferred.  No  dissipated  man  need  ap- 
ply.    Address,  stating  terms,  &c, 

Viewest, 
Lock  Box  16,  Parkersburg,  Va. 


Photograph  Gallery  for  Sale  at  a  bargain. 
Only  one  in  town.  Best  light  in  southern  Michi- 
gan. Good  lenses  (Ross  and  H.  B.  &  H.)  Plenty 
of  water,  large  dark-room  ;  in  fact  the  gallery 
needs  but  to  be  seen  to  be  appreciated.  Will  sell 
contents  of  gallery  and  give  lease,  or,  if  preferred, 
will  dispose  of  the  building.     Address      J.H. 

Box  94,  Jonesville,  Hillsdale  Co.,  Mich. 


Trapp  &  Munch  received 
the  Medal  of  Merit  for  their 
Albumen  Paper,  at  the  Vien- 
na Exhibition. 


Wanted. — By  first  of  April,  1874,  an  operator 
and  poser,  must  be  capable  of  doing  first-class 
work;  to  one  that  will  suit,  steady  employment 
and  good  salary  is  offered.  Must  come  well  rec- 
ommended. Address,  with  photograph  of  self, 
Brown  &  Higgins, 

Wheeling,  W.  Va. 

For  Sale. — One  of  the  most  prosperous  gal- 
leries in  New  York  State.  Doing  the  best  busi- 
ness and  the  best  work  in  the  city  where  located. 
Very  best  reason  given  for  selling.  A  bargain 
as  to  price  will  be  given.     Address 

"New  York," 
Office  Philadelphia  Photographer. 


Jacoby  has  a  clear  patent  on  his  printing- 
frame,  and  it  does  not  infringe  on  the  Mezzotint 
patent.  Parties  reporting  the  same  to  injure  the 
sale  of  his  frame  had  better  look  out.  Any  one 
buying  them,  can  use  them  without  fear  of  any 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

YOIGTLANDER& son  lenses. 

Ryder's  Art  Gallery,  239  Superior  St., 
Cleveland,  Ohio,  Dec.  18,  1872. 

Benj.  French  &  Co. 

Dear  Sirs: — Twenty-four  years  ago  I 
bought  and  commenced  using  my  first 
Voigtlander  Lens.  It  was  a  good  one. 
Since  then  I  have  owned  and  used  a 
good  many  of  the  same  brand,  of  various 
sizes.     They  were  all  and  always  good. 

Some  of  the  larger  sizes  that  I  have 
recently  bought  seem  to  me  better  than 
any  I  have  ever  had  or  seen  before. 
Yours,  truly, 

J.  F.  RYDER. 


118  West  Genesee  St.,  Syracuse,  N.  Y 

ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS,  1874,  $4.50. 


Griswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Office  of  Wilson,  Hood  &  Co., 

Dealers  in  Photographic  Requisites,  Frames, 

Stereoscopes,  and  Views, 

No.    822    Arch    Street, 

Philadelphia,  September  20, 1873. 
We  have  pleasure  of  announcing  that  we  have 
in  stock  a  small  lot  of  Albumen  Paper  of  the  cele- 
brated manufacture  of  the  Albion  Albumenizing 
Co.,  of  London,  England. 

Following  are  colors,  quality,  and  price  : 

White  Saxe,  per  ream,  $34  00 

Blue         "     "  34  00 

Pink         "     "  34  00 

White  Rives, "  33  00 

Blue         "     "  33  00 

Pink         "     "  33  00 

We  have  had  it  well  tried  and  can  advise  our 
customers  to  purchase. 

Griswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Wanted. — Agents  to  travel  through  the  seve- 
ral states.  None  need  apply  except  practical 
photographers,  and  those  acquainted  with  the 
use  of  the  solar  camera.     Apply  to 

H.  L.  Emmons,  Baltimore,  Md. 


fAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 

"  I  am  using  and  like  them  very  much 
thus  far."— A.  MARSHALL,  Boston. 

"A  sensible  improvement." — GEO.  S. 
COOK,  Charleston,  S.  C. 


Stereoscopic  Negatives  Wanted. — Parties 
having  for  sale  new,  unused,  stereo,  negatives  of 
attractive  American  scenery,  will  oblige  us  by 
sending  a  list  of  them  and  the  prices. 

Benerman  &  Wilson,  Phila. 

SITUATIONS    WANTED. 

(No  charge  for  advertisements  under  this  head : 

limited  to  four  lines.     Inserted  once  only, 

unless  by  request.) 

$£8=  We  cannot  have  letters  directed  to  our  care 

unless  the  parties  send  for  them,  and  send  stamps  to 

pay  postage.    We  cannot  undertake  to  mail  them; 

please  do  not  request  it. 

As  operator,  india  ink  worker,  and  negative 
retoucher.  Address  J.  Frank  Uhl,  Millersburg, 
Ohio. 

By  an  operator  of  six  years'  experience  ;  is  up 
to  the  times.  References  given  and  samples  sent. 
Address  Geo.  A.  Ferris,  Rochester,  Ind. 

By  a  young  man  who  is  thoroughly  practical 
in  all  branches  of  the  art.  Would  run  a  good 
gallery  on  salary  or  shares.  Is  willing  to  come 
on  trial  until  his  employer  is  satisfied  of  his  abil- 
ity.    Address  Photo.  Artist,  Houston,  Ohio. 

In  a  first-class  gallery,  as  assistant  operator, 
by  a  young  man  of  five  years'  experience  in  the 
operating-room,  and  a  constant  reader  of  the 
Philadelphia  Photographer.  Address  T.  M. 
Swem,  Shelbina,  Mo. 

By  a  first-class  operator  who  has  worked  in 
many  of  the  largest;  European  photographic 
ateliers,  and  speaks  fluently  different  languages, 
a  good  and  permanent  situation.  Please  address 
M.  Lamberg,  Berlin,  Friedrich-Strasse  104a. 


By  a  lady  of  good  address,  a  situation  in  a 
gallery  to  take  charge  of  the  reception-room  and 
printing  ;  has  had  two  years'  experience.  Ad- 
dress Box  865,  Galesburg,  Ills. 

By  a  first-class  hand  from  Chicago,  as  retouch- 
er. Had  three  years'  experience,  and  can  do  the 
finest  mezzo-grain  retouch.  One  who  thoroughly 
understands  how  and  where  to  work.  Can  also 
do  good  ink  and  water  color  work.  Address  Box 
255,  Angora,  Ind. 

As  first-class  printer  and  toner,  or  assistant 
operator  or  view  artist.  Address  Artist,  Box  93, 
Providence,  R.  I. 

By  a  photographer  of  experience,  in  some 
first-class  establishment ;  no  objection  to  going 
south.  Address  F.  P.  Mobsby,  75  North  Clark 
Street,  Chicago,  Ills. 

By  a  photographer  experienced  in  all  branches, 
or  would  rent  a  good  gallery  in  one  of  the  southern 
states  (Alabama  or  Georgia  preferred),  with 
privilege  of  buying.  Address  Photographer, 
Morrisville,  Madison  Co.,  N.  Y. 

In  Philadelphia,  by  an  experienced  operator 
and  retoucher.  Could  take  charge  of  a  gallery 
if  required.  Address  F.  R.  Thornbery,  832 
Dickinson  Street,  Richmond,  Philadelphia. 

As  a  good  negative  retoucher.  Address  Miss 
L.  Benton,  No.  218  19th  Street,  South  Brooklyn, 
L.  I.,  N.  Y. 

A  situation  in  some  good  gallery,  as  assistant 
operator,  or  printer  and  toner.  Two  years'  ex- 
perience in  conducting  a  gallery.  Good  refer- 
ences given.  Address  R.  M.  Denham,  Box  220, 
St.  Clairsville,  Ohio. 

A  practical  photographer  of  16  years'  experi- 
ence in  all  branches  of  the  business  would  like 
to  connect  himself  with  some  enterprising  party 
at  some  principal  watering  place  during  the  sum- 
mer; would  prefer  taking  an  interest;  can  fur- 
nish instruments  if  desired.  Address  C.  H.  Hall, 
Amenia,  N.  Y. 

In  a  first-class  gallery,  as  retoucher  or  printer 
and  assistant  operator  ;  can  do  first-class  work  at 
retouching.  Good  references  given.  Address 
H.  I.  Hills,  Skaneateles,  Onondaga  Co.,  N.  Y. 

By  a  young  man  as  general  assistant  in  a  gal- 
lery ;  has  had  experience  in  the  different  bran- 
ches. Address  J.  H.  Tymesen,  Lodi,  Seneca 
Co.,  N.  Y. 

By  an  operator  of  10  years'  experience.  Best 
of  reference  given.  Address  Samuel  W.  Clark, 
Boston,  Mass. 

As  retoucher  in  a  first-class  gallery.  Samples 
of  work  if  required.  Address  A.  F.  Terry, 
Washington  Court  House,  Ohio. 


The  Rapid  Photo.  Washer 
is  a  perfect  success,  and  it 
is  something  that  has  long 
been  needed. 


EXTRA! 
No.  70. 

A  New  Forest  Background.    Very  peculiar  and 
effective.     Introduced  by  Bogardus,  N.  Y. 

No.  71. 

A  Rich   Interior,  with   elaborate   tapestry  on 

walls.     Introduced  by  Moran,  N.  Y. 
See  other  advertisement. 


ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS,  1874,  $4.50. 


SOCIETY  CALENDAR. 

(Published  for  the  convenience  of  Visiting  Pho- 
tographers and  those  desiring  to  correspond. ) 
4®*  This  Calendar  is  published  free  to  the  Socie- 
ties, and  we  shall  feel  obliged  for  notice  of  any  changes 
in  time  of  meeting  or  in  the  officers,  also  to  add  any 
we  have  overlooked. 


Boston  Photographic  Association. — At  J.  W. 
Black's  studio,  the  first  Friday  of  each  month. 
E.  J.  Foss,  President;  C.  H.  Danforth,  Secre- 
tary, Boston. 

Photographic  Section  of  the  American  Insti- 
tute, New  York. — At  the  Institute  rooms,  the 
first  Tuesday  of  each  month.  H.  J.  Newton, 
President ;  Oscar  G.  Mason,  Secretary,  Bellevue 
Hospital. 

German  Photographic  Society,  New  York.  — 
At  Nos.  64  and  66  East  Fourth  Street,  New 
York,  every  Thursday  evening.  W.  Kurtz,  Presi- 
dent ;  Edward  Boettcher,  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, 79  Newark  Avenue,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 

Brooklyn  Photographic  Art  Association, 
Brooklyn,  N.  Y. — Second  Monday  in  each 
m»nth.  Rev.  Dr.  C.  H.  Hall,  President  ;  Chas. 
E.  Bolles,  Cor.  Secretary,  Brooklyn. 

Maryland  Photographic  Association,  Balti- 
more.— At  rooms  of  C.  A.  Wilson,  7  North 
Charles  Street,  first  Thursday  in  each  month. 
N.  H.  Busey,  President ;  G.  0.  Brown,  Secretary, 
Baltimore,  Md. 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia. — At  No. 
520  Walnut  Street,  third  floor,  first  Wednesday 
of  each  month.  J.  C.  Browne,  President;  E. 
Wallace,  Jr.,  Secretary,  1130  Spruce  Street. 

Pennsylvania  Photographic  Association,  Phil- 
adelphia.— At  the  galleries  of  the  members.  H- 
H.  Phillips,  President;  R.  J.  Chute,  Secretary, 
Office  Philadelphia  Photographer. 


Photographic  Association  of  the  District  of 
Columbia,  Washington,  D.  C. — E.  J.  Pullman, 
President ;  C.  M.  Bell,  Secretary,  459  Pennsyl- 
vania Ave. ,  Washington.   First  Tuesday,  monthly. 

Indiana  Photographic  Association. — At  Indi- 
anapolis, first  Wednesday  monthly.  J.  Perry 
Elliott,  President;  D.  0.  Adams,  Secretary,  In- 
dianapolis. 

Photographic  Association  of  Western  Illinois. — 
At  Galesburg,  first  Wednesday  of  October,  Janu- 
ary, April,  and  July.  S.  T.  Bryan,  President  ; 
J.  F.  Barker,  Secretary,  Galesburg. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association. — At  rooms 
of  C.  W.  Stevens,  158  State  Street,  first  Wednes- 
day evening  of  each  month.  G.  A.  Douglas, 
President ;  0.  F.  Weaver,  Secretary,  158  State 
Street. 

Chicago  Photographic  Institute,  Chicago. — 
1st  Monday,  monthly,  at  Chicago  Art  Institute. 
A.  Hesler,  President ;  L.  M.  Melander,  Secre- 
tary, Chicago. 

Buffalo  Photographic  Association.— At  Buffa- 
lo, the  first  Wednesday  evening  of  each  month. 
J.  Samo,  President;  Jennie  M.  Crockett,  Sec'y. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 


GERMAN  ALBUMEN  COLORS! 


JULIUS     KRUGE  R'S 

PATSVT   C^SUSWT   C®&®»S» 

FOR  COLORING  PHOTOGRAPHS  ON  ALBUMEN  and  PLAIN  PAPER. 

These  colors  have  become  very  popular  in  Germany  and  France  (where  they  have  obtained  the 
highest  recommendations),  on  account  of  their  extraordinary  brilliancy,  eveness,  and  easy  application. 
They  can  be  used  on  Albumen  Paper,  and  are  without  doubt  the  best  that  have  been  offered  to  the 
public.     The  Colors  are  put  up  in  boxes  of  6,  12,  and  18. 

CEO.  RAU,  SoSe  Agent, 

No.  922  Girard  Ave.,  Philadelphia. 


manufacturers  of 

LOOKING      ^^^K-^P*^^       Walnut 
GLASS-**      g      -rf^^^fe^^^  mk.    Mouldings 

■  '■■■'"  "■ — ■  Sslggfe^s^a  0 

«     BACKING, 


PICTURE 
FRAMES 


Patented  Solid 
Ovals  and  Spandrels, 


"VVAREROOMS, 

48  &  50 1. 61  St, 


&c,  &c. 

Solid  Walnnt  Work 
a  Specialty. 


FACTORIES, 

615  to  621  Filbert  St. 


MOULTON'S 


RAPID  PHOTO-WASHER. 


§ 


§ 


Rs 


§ 


Patented  August  12th,  1873. 


Instead  of  soaking  the  Prints  it  applies  the  water  in  the  form  of  spray,  with  considerable 

force,  to  both  sides  of  the  paper  at  each  revolution,  or  from  one  hundred 

to  one-hundred-fifty  times  per  minute. 

Washes  with  exact  uniformity,  and  gives  more  brilliant  and  permanent  work  ; 
is  simple,  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order,  and  will  last  a  life-time. 

Size  Cylinder,  Capacity  in  Cards.  Largest  Print.  Price. 

Diam.  16in.  Length  14  l-2in.  84  14  by  17  ins.  $30 

"     20        "       19  144  18  by  22  "  40 

"     25        "       24  220  22  by  28  "  50 

Larger  sizes  may  follow.  fi^Liberal  discounts  to  dealers  and  agents. 


TisaiSTxnMconNrx.A.ij , 


"  I  write  to  testify  to  the  satisfaction  I  feel  with  the  working  of  your  Kapid  Print  Washer. 
It  is  simply  perfection,  as  far  as  my  experience  with  it  goes,  vis  :  One  year's  constant  use.    I 
have  washed  eight  dozen  cartes  in  ten  minutes,  and  the  most  accurate  test  I  know  of,  starch 
and  iodine,  failed  to  show  a  trace  of  hvpo  remaining." — L.  G.  Bigelow,  Detroit,  Mich 
Feb.  10th,  1874. 


L.  V.  MOULTON,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis. 


SOUTHERN 

Photographic™  Ferrotype 

STOCK  DEPOT, 
Savannah,  Geo. 

FIRST-CLASS  STOCK 

AT  NORTHERN  PRICES, 

Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance, 
cRosscup^wEsTrpHAx^1^^-^^ — ^=  Drayage,  &e. 

SEHD    FOE-    ZFIR/ICEi    LIST.^ 

The  undersigned,  having  purchased  the  entire  interest,  goodwill,  and  business  of 

Photo.  Materials  &  Picture  Frames 

OF  J.  HAWORTH, 

Desires  to  inform  his  friends  and  the  trade  generally,  that  he  will  continue  the  business,  as 

heretofore,  at  the  old  stand, 

624  ARCH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA, 

Where  he  hopes,  by  prompt  attention  and  fair  dealing,  to  merit  a»continuance  of  the  patron- 
age so  largely  given  to  the  late  firm. 

We  will  still  keep  a  well  assorted  stock  of 

PICTURE  FRAMES  (OVAL  AND  SQUARE), 

VELVET  CASES,  COLLODIONS, 

VARNISHES,  PURE  CHEMICALS,   &c, 

which  can  be  had  at  the  lowest  rates ;  as  well  as 

PASSEPARTOUTS,    STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS   OF    ALL    PARTS    OF   THE  WORE]), 
STEREOSCOPIC  INSTRUMENTS,  «ftc. 

We  also  have  a  full  line  of  CAMEKAS  of  the  best  makes  and  latest  improvements, 
CAMERA  STANDS,  HEAD-EESTS,  BACKGEOUNDS,  and  all  Accessories  necessary 
to  the  Photographic  Art.  We  would  call  the  attention  of  photographers  to  the  fact  that  we 
manufacture  SQTJAKE  EEAMES,  and  so  can  generally  ship  any  frames  (especially  odd 
sizes)  the  same  day  they  are  ordered.  We  would  also  call  attention  to  the  noted  ALBU- 
MEN PAPEES,  Morgan's  and  H.  Extra,  the  best  for  warm  weather,  for  which  I  am 
the  agent, 

THOMAS  H.  McCOLLIN, 

Successor  to  Haworth  &  McCollin,  624  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


^NTW 


*'*mum& 


Messrs.  EOBINSON  &  CHEREILL 

Desire  to  announce  to  American  Photographers  that  they  have  perfected  a  speedy  and 
certain  method  of  making  BURWT-IIV  E1VAMEL.  PICTURES.  This  acquire- 
ment has  cost  them  the  outlay  of  much  money  and  time,  but  they  are  willing  to  communi- 
cate their  process  to  American  Photographers  if  a  willingness  to  partially  reimburse  them 
is  shown.  They  have  heretofore  given  to  the  fraternity  whatever  novelties  and  ideas  they 
have  had,  but  in  this  instance,  under  the  circumstances,  they  feel  that  they  will  not  be  con- 
sidered as  ungenerous  when  they  withhold  the  burnt-in  process.  They  propose  to  hold  it 
to  themselves  in  Europe,  but  offer  it  to  American  Photographers  on  the  following  terms  : 

Their  price  is  $5000.  If  one  hundred  photographers  subscribe  $50  each,  or  fifty  photog- 
raphers $100  each,  they  will  supply  each  subscriber  with  the  most  detailed  instructions  as  to 
the  process,  and  where  and  how  to  obtain  the  materials,  and  hereafter  post  each  subscriber 
on  all  matters  of  improvement  that  they  may  hereafter  discover.  The  time  will  be  limited 
to  June  1st,  1874. 

THE  RESULTS  LEAVE  NOTHING  TO  DESIRE 

SAMPLES  MAY  BE  SEEN  AT 

124  North  Seventh  Street, 

PHILADELPHIA, 

And  all  communications  should  be  addressed  to 

EOBINSON  &  CHEKBILL, 
124  N.  Seventh  SI, 


ia;  Pa. 


^gsw<s§ 


$ 


LIFE 


0  IMPOSITION 


FOR  THE  STEREOSCOPE. 


CATALOGUE. 


1.  Blowing  Bubbles. 

2.  B  stands  for  Bumble-B. 

3.  Blackberry  Blossoms. 

4.  The  Hen's  Nest. 

5.  Let  us  Have  Piece. 

6.  Mamma,  where  was  I  when  you  were 

a  little  girl  ? 

7.  Our  Domestic's  Relations. 

8.  She  went  to  the  Butchers. 

9.  My  Lady  and  My  Lady's  Maid. 

10.  The  Mountain  Spring. 

11.  Unveiling  a  Statue  of  Young  America. 

12.  Young  America  in  the  Nursery. 

13.  Young  America  as  an  Artist. 

14.  Young  America  Asleep. 


15.  The  Sunbeam  Fairy. 

16.  The  Picture-Book. 

17.  Sitting  for  my  Picture. 

18.  Young  America  Bathing. 

19.  Young  Boston's  Ambition. 

20.  Ding-Dong-Ding,  Music  on  a   Rubber 

String. 

21.  Reflection. 

22.  The 'Loiterers. 

23.  The  Cabin  Porch. 

24.  Beatrice  Shoo-Fly. 

25.  Home  Group. 

26.  A  Yiew. 

27.  The  Gleaner. 


Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price.    $2.00  per  dozen. 

DEALERS  SUPPLIED  ON  GOOD  TERMS. 


These  inimitable  pictures  are  all  natural  compositions,  and  touch  the  tender  chords  of 
human  nature  most  wonderfully.  They  are  attractive  to  every  one  who  has  a  heart,  but 
particularly  instructive  as  studies  for  photographers,  in  grouping,  posing,  and  composition. 

They  will  help  any  man  make  better  and  easier  pictures  of  children,  and  should  be  studied. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,   Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


CHEMICAL-PROOF 

Photographic  Ware. 


No  More  Breakage. 

No  More  Contaminated  Solutions. 

No  More  Loss 
by  Absorption  or  Leakage. 


The  result  of  years  of  experience;  a 
decided  improvement;  and  for  simplic- 
ity, compactness,  lightness,  and  durabil- 
ity, they  excel  all  others. 

Have  been  thoroughly  tested,  and 
received  the  highest  testimonials  from 
those  who  have  used  them. 


"We  have  tried  your  Acid-proof  Composition,  and  find  it  to  be  everything  you  recommend  it  to  be 
It  is  an  almost  indispensable  requisite  in  a  photograph  gallery.     For  plate-holders  particularly,  it  is 
worth  many  times  its  cost.     Glass  or  rubber  corners  are  no  longer  necessary  in  their  construction. 
They  may  just  as  well  hereafter  be  made  entirely  of  wood,  and  it  matters  very  little  what  kind  of 
wood."— Wm.  Nims,  Fort  Edwards,  N.  Y.,  September  12,  1873. 

"  I  have  had  the  wooden  Bath  you  made  for  me  in  use  for  some  time,  and  am  highly  pleased  with 
it;  it  is  just  what  I  have  wanted  for  a  long  while,  and  could  not  obtain  one  made  in  this  particular 
shape  heretofore.  The  composition  is  all  that  could  be  desired. " — James  Mullen,  Lexington,  Ky. , 
December  27,  1873. 

"Your  new  patent  Field  Bath  you  kindly  forwarded  to  me  I  have  thoroughly  examined  and  tested, 
and  having  had  considerable  experience  in  field  work  the  last  twenty-seven  years,  and  used  the  very 
many  different  lands  of  Baths,  I  can  cheerfully  recommend  yours  to  excel  all  others  for  convenience 
and  other  excellent  qualities." — R.  M.  Cressey,  Wenona,  Mich.,  January  4,  1874. 

"Our  attention  having  been  called  to  your  patent  Baths,  we  determined  upon  giving  them  a  trial, 
in  justice  to  your  discovery,  we  feel  it  our  duty  to  attest  its  merits.  It  is  all  that  is  claimed,  and  more  ; 
for  apart  from  the  many  advantage  claimed  for  it,  it  produces  the  most  perfect  negative  we  ever  made, 
and  seems  to  have  the  quality  of  purifying  the  solution.  Once  used,  no  photographer,  we  feel  con- 
fident, would  be  without  them." — Scheeiber  &  Sons,  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  January  16,  1874. 

MANUFACTURED  BY 

R.  NEWELL  &  SON,  No.  626  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


Photographic  Card  Warehouse. 


A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 

MANUFACTURERS, 

No.  18  South  Sixth  St.  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 

PHILADELPHIA. 


EVERYTHING  APPERTAINING  TO  THE   LINE   OF  OUR 

MANUFACTURES  FURNISHED  WITH  CARE 

AND  PROMPTNESS. 


Our  long  experience  in  and  facilities  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods,  and 
familiarity  with  the  peculiar  wants  of  Photographers,  enable  us  to  offer  superior  induce- 
ments to  those  who  may  favor  us  with  their  orders. 

JAMES  F.  MAGEE  &  CO 

MANUFACTURERS    OF 

PURE 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMICALS, 

No.  108  North  Fifth  Street, 


Stock  Dealers  only  Supplied. 


LANTERN  SLIDES 


SELECTED  FROM 


EMBRACING 


Views  of  all  Parts  of  the  World ! 


PLAIN,  COLORED,  AND  COMIC 

LANTERN   SLIDES, 


OF  ALL  KINDS,  AT  LOW  PRICES. 


SCIOPTICONS  AND  LANTERNS  SUPPLIED. 


SELECTIONS     MADE    PERSONALLY. 


ALSO,  GLASS  STEREOSCOPIC   PICTURES. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Southwest  eor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Photographic  Publications,  1874. 

Knowing  the  advantages  of  well-written  works  on  Photography  to  our 
readers,  we  issue  our  annual  catalogue,  that  they  may  have  the  opportunity 
of  selecting  the  very  best.  We  always  find  the  photographer  who  reads 
what  is  published  pertaining  to  his  profession,  to  be  the  photographer  who 
succeeds  in  his  business  the  best.  Above  all,  those  who  regularly  and  contin- 
ually receive  a  good  photogi-aphic  magazine  are  those  who  are  always  ahead 
with  new  goods,  new  styles,  and  new  information.  We  recommend  an  in- 
vestment in  a  part  or  all  of  the  list  below,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  them  to 
you  on  receipt  of  price. 

CATALOGUE. 

A.  The  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

Tne  oldest,  best,  and  most  popular  Photographic  Magazine  in  America.  Eleventh  Year.  Please  read  the 
ospectus  on  page  three  of  cover  and  premium  list  opposite.  Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2.50  for  six 
onths,  in  advance.    Current  number,  50  cents.    Specimen  copies,  free. 

B  The  Skylight  and  the  Dark- Room. 

By  Elbert  Anderson,  operator  at  Kurtz's  studio,  New  York.  This  is  the  most  beautiful  and  elaborate 
work  on  the  art  ever  published.  It  contains  nearly  250  pages — large,  square — twelve  photographs  made  by  the 
author  to  illustrate  the  lessons  of  the  work,  and  almost  two  hundr.id  fine  wood-cuts.  See  advertisements. 
Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  postpaid,  $4.00. 

O  Photographic  Mosaics. 

The  1874  edition  excels  all  of  its  eight  older  brethren.  The  list  ot  articles  is  made  up  of  original  contribu- 
ti  ons,  written  especially  for  its  pages,  on  all  departments  of  the  art,  whoi  ly  by  practical  men  who  are  only  heard 
from  once  a  year  through  the  persuasion  of  the  editor,  in  this  way.  See  special  advertisement.  146  pages. 
Paper  cover,  50  cents.    Cloth,  $1.    A  few  copies  of  former  editions,  from  1866,  at  same  price. 

D  The  Ferrotyper 's  Guide. 

A  new  work  on  the  Ferrotype.    Price.  75  cents. 

-E       Bigelow's  Album,  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

This  is  not  exactly  a  book,  but  a  collection  of  24  large  Victoria  size  photographic  studies  in  lighting  and 
posing,  made  especially  to  teach  how  to  light  and  pose  ordinary  and  extra-ordinary  subjects  in  all  the  plain, 
fancy,  "  Rembrandt"  and  "Shadow"  styles.  It  is  accompanied  by  an  explanatory  key  of  instructions,  together 
with  a  diagram  for  each  picture,  showing  how  the  sitter  and  the  camera  were  placed  in  the  skylight,  their 
relation  to  the  background,  and  what  blinds  were  opened  and  closed  at  the  time  of  the  sitting.  It  almost 
supplies  a  rule  by  which  you  can  quickly  tell  how  to  manage  every  subject  that  comes  to  you.  The  studies  are 
mounted  on  folding  leaves,  so  that  twelve  can  be  examined  at  once.    Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  $6,  postpaid. 

F  Wilson's  Landscape  Studies. 

An  album  of  landscape  studies  in  style  similar  to  Bigelow's  Album,  containing  ten  5x8  views,  with  the 
ormula,  &c,  by  George  Washington  Wilson,  Esq.,  the  renowned  Scotch  landscape  photographer.  A  splendid 
work.    In  cloth,  gilt,  $4. 

G  Handbook  of  the  Practice  and  Art  of  Photography . 

By  Dr.  Vogel.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  during  the  year. 

H     How  to  Paint  Photographs  in  Water  Colors. 

A  practical  Handbook  designed  especially  for  the  use  of  Students  and  Photographers,  containing  directions 
for  Brush  Work  in  all  descriptions  of  Photo-Portraiture,  Oil,  Water  Colors,  Ink,  How  to  Retouch  the  nega- 
tive, &c.    By  George  B.  Ayres,  Artist.  Third  edition.    Differing  largely  from  previous  editions.    Price,  $2.00. 


I  Pictorial  Effect  in  Photography. 

By  H.  P.  Robinson,  London.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  in  preparation. 

J  How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph. 

This  is  a  fine  little  work  of  48  pages,  written  by  the  wife  of  a  celebrated  New  York  photographer,  for  the 
purpose  of  educating  the  public  on  the  all-important  subject  of  sitting  for  a  picture.  It  is  bound  in  cloth  at  60 
cents  per  copy,  and  paper  cover  30  cents. 

K  Lookout  Landscape  Photography . 

By  Prof.  R.  M.  Linn,  Lookout  Mountain,  Tenn.  A  pocket  manual  for  the  outdoor  worker,  and  full  of  good 
for  every  photographer.    75  cents.    Be  sure  to  get  it. 

L      Himes's  Leaf  Prints;  or,  Glimpses  at  Photography. 

By  Prof.  Chaeles  F.  Himes,  Ph.D.  Full  of  useful  information  for  the  photographic  printer.  Illustrated 
with  a  whole-size  photograph.    Cloth,  $1.25. 

M  The  American  Carbon  Manual. 

By  Edw.  L.  Wilson.  A  complete  manual  of  the  Carbon  process  from  beginning  to  end.  With  a  fine 
example  by  the  process.    Cloth,  $2.00. 

N        Ayres's  Chart  of  Photographic  Drapery. 

This  is  a  photograph  of  forty-two  pieces  of  cloth,  of  all  the  colors  and  shades,  handsomely  mounted  on  a 
card.  It  should  be  hung  in  every  reception-room,  to  show  your  customers  what  color  dresses  to  wear,  and  to 
show  you  what  sort  of  backgrounds  and  accessories  to  use.    Price,  $2.00. 

O  The  Photographer  to  His  Patrons. 

A  splendid  little  twelve-page  leaflet,  which  answers  all  vexatious  questions  put  to  you  by  your  sitters,  and 
serves  as  a  grand  advertising  medium.  It  is  for  photographers  to  give  away  to  their  customers.  Send  for  a 
copy  and  an  illustrated  circular.  Over  300,000  already  sold  and  in  use  all  over  the  country.  $20.00  for  1000, 
$35.00  for  2000,  and  so  on.    Printed  and  supplied  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

P  Pretty  Faces. 

A  leaflet  much  smaller  than  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons,'"  for  the  same  purpose,  but  costing  less,  viz. : 
1000  copies,  $10.00 ;  2000,  $17.50,  and  larger  orders  at  less  rates. 

Q  The  Year-Booh  of  Photography. 

By  G.  Wharton  Simpson.  English  edition.  Similar  to  Mosaics,  and  full  of  good,  short,  practical  articles. 
50  cents.    1869, 1870, 1871, 1872,  and  1873  now  on  hand.    1874,  about  January  20th. 

R     Elbert  Anderson's  Photo-  Comic  Allmyknack 

A  complete  Almanac,  full  of  witty  sayings,  jokes,  puns,  stories,  etc.,  etc.  Profusely  illustrated  with  comic 
and  original  sketches,  yet  all  interspersed  with  much  practical  matter  of  value  to  every  photographer.  Price, 
75  cents. 

S  Photographers'  Pocket  Reference- Book. 

By  De.  H.  Vogel,  of  Berlin.  A  dictionary  of  all  the  terms  used  in  the  art,  and  contains  formulas  for  almost 
every  known  manipulation.  Altogether  different  from  any  work  ever  published.  Cloth,  $1.50.  See  special 
advertisement. 


To  save  writing,  photographers  may  order  the  above  of  us  by  the  marginal  letters,  thus,  "  Please  send  us 
one  copy  of  each,  book  A,  B,  K,"  &c,  &c.    Any  of  the  above  sent  post  free  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Benerman  &  Wilson's  Publications  sold  by  all  Dealers. 


$ 


^wg^'s  sojirs 


(Actual  size  of  a  No.  I  Steinheil  IrtnM.) 


NEW  APLANATIC  LENSES 


FOR 

GROUPS, 

LANDSCAPES,    an 

d 

GO  PISS. 

We  have  now  a  full  stock  of  these  celebrated  Lenses,  at  the  following  prices : 

No.  1,                            1-4  size,                             3£  inch  focus, 

$25  00 

...   2,                            1-2     "                               5j     " 

30  00 

"    3,                            4-4     "                               7       "        " 

45  00 

"    4,                            8-10  "                              104i     " 

60  00 

"    5,                          10-12  "                             131     " 

70  00 

"    6,                          13-16   "                              16|     '« 

110  00 

Nos.  1  and  2  are  in  matched  pairs  for  Stereoscopic  Work. 

THEY  ARE  IN  USE  BY  MOST  LEADING  PHOTOGRAPHERS,  INCLUDING 

GUTEKUNST,  BROADBENT  &  PHILLIPS,  DeMOHAT, 

WENDEROTH,  FENNEMORE,  LOTHROP, 

And  many  others,  equally  -well  known. 

We  feel  sure  that  at  least  one  of  these  Lenses  is  needful  for  the  successful  prosecution  of  your 
business,  and  so  solicit  your  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  foe,  the  United  States, 

No.  822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


MANUFACTURING  OPTICIAN, 

1314  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia. 

Sole  Manufacturer  of  the  Stereo-Panopticon  and  Artopticon,  warranted  to  be  the  most 
perfect  and  powerful  Magic  Lanterns  made. 


MCALLISTER'S 


PATEITT 


ARTOFTICON 


Each  lantern  is  adjustable  for  use 
with  powerful  coal  oil  light — oxycal- 
cium,  hydro-oxycalcium,  and  oxy- 
hydrogen  lights. 

Jfgp^The  coal  oil  lamp  used  gives 
very  much  more  light  than  any  other 
lamp  yet  made. 

Giving  exhibitions  with  the  Artopti- 
con  will  prove  a  profitable  business  for 
a  man  with  a  small  capital. 

The   STEREO-PAIVfOPTICOrV    is  an  improved   instrument,   suitable  for  giving 
exhibitions  of  dissolving  views  on  the  largest  scale.     Send  for  printed  description. 

MCALLISTER'S 

PATENT    TINTERS. 

These  tinters  are  used  for  giving  to  magic  lantern  pictures 
various  beautiful  tints  or  colors,  as  blue,  red,  yellow,  green, 
crimson,  &c,  &c.  They  can  be  adjusted  to  the  lantern,  either 
on  the  end  of  the  front  lens,  or  may  be  screwed  to  the  back 
of  the  front  lens-holder,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Stereo-Panop- 
ticon and  Educational  lanterns.  On  the  Artopticon,  they 
are  placed  on  the  end  of  the  front  lens  tube. 

NEW  and  BEAUTIFUL  SLIDES  for  LANTERN  USE  in  LARGE  VARIETY. 

Priced  and  Illustrated  Catalogues  free,  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  stamp. 


W.  MITCHELL  McALLISTER,  1314  Chestnut  St.,  Phila. 


PROMPT 

AND 

CORRECT 

IN  FILLING 

ORDERS. 


M 


P 


* 


I  MAKE 

THE 

LOWEST 

PRICES. 


ss 


£3 


E 


irti 


^s 


>E 


PURE 
CHEMICALS 

A 
SPECIALTY. 


hi 


■ 


HJ 


f-fc 
Iff 

# 


Hi 


m 


TERMS 


OR 

O-O-D 


«JAC  OBIT'S 


AND 


Combination  Printing  Frame 

WITH  SELF-ADJUSTING  SPEING  BED,  CLAMPING  SPEINGS, 
VIGNETTING  AEEANGEMENTS, 

FOR  PORCELAIN  AND  CONTACT  PRINTING. 


Any  negative  may  be  used  with  suecess.  The  time  of  printing  is  the  same  as  in  common  printing, 
and  may  be  done  in  any  kind  of  weather.  Pictures  printed  with  this  frame  need  but  little  retouching, 
or  not  as  fine  retouching  to  get  the  finest  effects. 

I  need  not  comment  on  this  frame,  for  when  tried  will  prove  for  itself.  For  printing  on  the  Por- 
celain plate  it  is  best  and  a  success.  Having  a  self-adjusting  bed,  will  form  to  any  thickness  of  plate. 
For  common  printing  it  is  complete.  But  the  most  to  be  praised  is  the  Imitation  Porcelain  for  which  it 
is  invented,  which  all  prefer  to  the  genuine  Porcelain,  for  the  reason  they  can  be  sent  by  mail  and  will 
not  break.  They  are  printed  on  Albumen  Paper,  the  same  as  a  Card  Photograph,  and  when  framed 
in  a  velvet  Passepartout  can  scarcely  be  detected  from  the  genuine  Porcelain. 

I  have  used  one  of  these  frames  in  my  gallery  the  last  year,  charging  two  dollars  per  dozen  more 
for  this  kind  of  work.  All  of  my  patrons  prefer  this  to  the  porcelain,  and  find  no  fault  with  the  price. 
I  have  therefore  secured  a  patent,  and  propose  to  manufacture  and  put  them  in  the  market  for  sale, 
that  others  may  use  them.  I  feel  satisfied  that  by  trying  them  they  will  prove  satisfactory ;  if  not, 
you  can  return  the  same  by  paying  charges. 

Specimens  published  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  in  the  April  and  October  numbers,  1873. 
Be  sure  and  see  them.     Stockdealers  will  be  supplied  from  the  factory  at  Minneapolis,  Minnesota. 


SIZES     j3l.  1ST  jO     PRICES. 

Frame  for  1-4  Negative,    .     .     .     .$4  00     1     Frame  for  6£  x  8£  Negative, 
5x7       "  ....      5  00     I  "  8x10 

Frame  for  11x14  Negative,     .     .     .     .     $6  25 


$5  50 
5  75 


Any  other  size  made  to  order.     Terms,    Cash  or  C.  O.  D.     Parties  not  finding  them  with  their 
Stockdealers  can  order  them  from 


P.  0.  Box  1758. 


W.  H.  JACOBY,  Minneapolis,  Minn. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 
*      * 


FOR   $3.00  EACH. 


THE  PUBLICATION  OF  THE 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    WORLD 


Having  been  suspended,  the  publishers  offer  the  FEW  EEMAUSTING 
VOLUMES  on  hand  for  the  exceedingly  low  price  of  $3.00  A  VOLUME. 

They  contain  many  of  the  best  home  and  foreign  contributions  to  photo- 
graphic literature  ever  published.     Among  which  are  a  series  of  papers  on 

POSITION   AND   COMPOSITION, 

AND   ANOTHER   ENTITLED 

LANDSCAPE   LESSONS, 

Both  of  which  are  beautifully  illustrated,  and  alone  worth  more  than  the 
cost  of  the  volumes.  The  pictures  in  both  volumes  are  varied  in  style,  are 
very  beautiful,  and  a  dozen  such  pictures  could  not  be  bought  for  twice  the 
price  asked  for  the  whole  volume  of  the  World. 


SEE   THE   LIST. 


VOL.  I. 


January.  Photo-Relief  Print.  Woodbury  Pro- 
cess. By  American  Photo-Relief  Printing 
Co.,  Philadelphia. 

February.  "  Giant's  Causeway."  Landscape. 
By  G.  W.  Wilson,  Aberdeen,  Scotland. 

March.  Portrait  Studies.  By  J.  Grasshoff,  Ber- 
lin, Prussia. 

April.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  J.  Grasshoff,  Ber- 
lin, Prussia. 

May.  Victoria  Holyoake  Portraits.  By  Sud- 
dards  &  Fennemore,  Philadelphia. 

June.  Carte  Studies  of  Children.  By  John  A. 
Scholten,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

July.  Cabinet  Portraits.  By  W.  H.  Jacoby, 
Minneapolis,  Minn. 

August.  "Just  as  I  am."  Reproduction  from 
Drawing      By  W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

September.  "Reflections."  By  T.  T.  Sweeny, 
Cleveland,  Ohio. 

October.  Statuary.  By  J.  H.  Kent,  Rochester, 
New  York. 

November.  "  Both  Puzzled."  Woodbury  Print. 
By  Am.  Photo-Relief  Printing  Co. 

December.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  M.  B.  Brady. 
New  York. 


VOL.  II. 


January.      Cabinet  Portrait. 
New  York. 


By   W.   Kurtz, 
By  A.  N.  Hardy, 


February.     Cabinet  Portrait. 
Boston,  Mass. 

March.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  H.  Roeher,  Chi- 
cago, 111. 

April.     Cameo    Cabinet   Portrait.      By    W.    C. 
North,  IJtica,  N.  Y. 

May.      Cabinet   Portrait.      By  Jones   &    Stiff, 
Salem,  Mass. 

June.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  Dinniore  &  Wil- 
son, Baltimore,  Md. 

July.       Cabinet  Portrait.     By   J.   H.    Lamson, 
Portland,  Me. 

August.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  B.  M.    Cline- 
dinst,  Staunton,  Va. 

September.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  J.  A.  Schol- 
ten &  Co.,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

October.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  J.  Landy,  Cin- 
cinnati, Ohio. 

November.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  J.  A.  Schol- 
ten &  Co.,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

December.     Cabinet  Portrait.     By  C.  D.  Mosher, 
Chicago,  III. 


Order  soon  if  you  want  them.     Postage  payable  at  your  own  office,  or 
36  cents  extra,  prepaid. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.f  Philadelphia. 


Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 

EGGSHELL,  GLOSSY,  CHOCOLATE-TINTED. 

(PATENTED  MARCH  1st,  1870.) 

ALL  SIZES,  FBOM  1-9  to  10x14.  BLACK  AND  CHOCOLATE. 

THE  PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Worcester,  Mass., 

ARE  NOW  MAKING  THE  MOST  POPULAR  BRAND  OF  PLATES  IN  THE  TRADE. 


PRICE     IjIST 

Size. 

Eggshell. 

Glossy. 

Size. 

Eggshell. 

Glossy 

Per  Box  of  8  Doz. 

1-9 

$0.80 

$0.90 

Per  Box  of  2  Doz. 

4-4 

$2.40 

$2.70 

8     » 

1-6 

1.25 

1.35 

a                4      " 

5-7 

2.40 

2.70 

8     " 

1-4 

1.85 

2.00 

"            2     " 

7-10 

2.70 

2.90 

"            4     " 

4£x6£ 

1.85 

2.00 

<<            2     " 

8x10 

2.70 

2.90 

"            4     " 

1-2 

2.20 

2.35 

Per  Sheet, 

10x14 

.14 

.15 

"            2     " 

4JxlO 

2.20- 

2.35 

Ke vised,  New  York, 

December  28th,  1872 

EGGSHELL,    GLOSSY,    AND    CHOCOLATE-TINTED   PLATES,    ALL    SIZES    AND    STYLES, 
ALWAYS   ON    HAND   AND   READY   TOR   DELIVERY. 

Each  package  of  Phenix  Plates  has  printed  on  the  wrapper,  "Manufactured 

by  the  Phenix  Plate  Co.,  Worcester,  Mass.,"  and  none 

are  genuine  unless  bearing  that  stamp. 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  constitu- 
ting them  our  sole  and  exclusive  agents  for  the  sale  of  our  Plates. 

That  company  is  so  well  and  favorably  known  in  the  business,  that  no  com- 
mendation of  ours  is  required  to  assure  the  Trade  that  they  will  be  liberally 
dealt  with  in  every  respect. 

Phenix  Plates  are  for  sale  by  all  Stoct  Dealers  tiroilioiit  lie  country. 

PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Manufacturers, 

Worcester,  Mass, 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  Apts  for  tie  Me,  4  Mm  St.,  N.  Y. 


SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT. 


ALL  PERSONS  ARE  HEREBY  NOTIFIED,  and  cautioned  against  infringing  my  Solar  Camera 
Patent. 

Infringers  will  settle  with  H.  L.  Emmons,   Attorney-at-Law,   Baltimore,   Md. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD, 

Baltimore,  Md, 

DO   YOUR   OWN   SOLAR    PRINTING. 

SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT  LICENSE  AND  STAMP 

Good  for  the  future  at  $40.     May  be  ordered  through  your  STOCKDEALER  or  from  the  PATENTEE. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD,  Baltimore,  Md. 

AUG.  SCHWARZE.  SCHWARZE      &L    VALK  WILLIAM   VALK. 

NO.    614   ARCH   STREET,    PHILADELPHIA. 

host  ss££S^OT»s»  0F  German  Allien  Paper,  anil  Arrowroot  Plain  Salted.  Paper. 

DEALERS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  MATERIALS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 

Will  mail  to  any  address  in  the  country,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  $1,  one  dozen  sheets  of  Assorted  Photo- 
graphic Paper,  each  sheet  being  numbered  for  distinction. 

JVo.  SO  Cedar  Street,  Jf^w  York, 

SOLE  AGENTS  FOR 

"F.Z.  IMPERIAL"  DRESDEN  ALBUMEN  PAPER. 

Rives  and  Steinbach  ;  Light  and  Heavy     White,  Pink,  and  Blue. 


"We  beg  leave  to  inform  the  Photographic  Stockhouses  that  we  keep  a  complete  assortment  of 
"  F.  Z.  IMPERIAL"  ALBUMEN  PAPER  always  on  hand,  and  offer  it  to  the  trade  at  the  lowest 
market  prices. 

KARSTENS  Si  BRAUN,  No.  50  Cedar  Street,  New  York. 

Gh    SATJTBB. 

JVo.    IS 8   South  Eighth  Street,   Philadelphia, 

manufacturer  and  wholesale  dealer  in 


The  attention  of  the  trade  is  particularly  called  to  the  superior  quality  of  our  Glass  and  materials 
and  neatness  of  finish.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand. 

BULLOCK    &    CRENSHAW, 

No.  528  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURERS  AND  IMPORTERS   OF   PURE   CHEMICALS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 
IMPORTERS  OF  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN,  APPARATUS,  ETC. 


LOOKOUT 

Mr  JnUM  JH  Mt»inR^9kJlr  JnIL  JC 

A  Pocket  Manual  for  the  Landscape  Pnotopnner, 

YET  CONTAINING  MANY  USEFUL  HINTS  EOR  ALL  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 

By  the  Late  Prof.  R.  M.  LINN, 

LOOKOUT  MOUNTAIN,  TENN. 

This  admirable  little  work  was  published  last  fall,  a  little  too  late  for  the  season.  It  is 
now  confidently  recommended  to  every  photographer  about  to  do  any  class  of  work,  outside 
or  inside  the  skylight. 

CONTENTS. 


Introductory. 

Main  Requisites  of  a  Good  Photographic  Land- 
scape. 

Artistic  Effect. 

Proper  Illumination. 

Direction  of  Light. 

Clouds. 

Length  of  Exposure. 

Apparatus  for  Field  Work. 

On  the  Selection  of  View  Lenses. 

Camera  Boxes. 

Bath  Cups. 

Preliminary  Preparations. 

Taking  the  Field. 

Hints  on  Printing  and  Finishing. 

To  Print  Clouds. 

Toning  Bath  for  Views. 

On  Fixing  and  Washing  Prints. 

Suggestions  on  Mounting  Prints. 

To  Cut  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

To  Mount  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

Formulae  and  Processes  for  Landscape  Photog- 
raphy. 

Ever-ready  Iodizer  for  Landscape  Photography. 


Remarks  on  Preparing  and  Using  Iodizer. 

On  the  Management  of  Flowing  Bottles. 

On  the  Preparation  of  Plain  Collodion. 

The  Silver  Bath  for  Negatives. 

To  Renovate  an  Old  Negative  Bath. 

To  Prepare  Carbonate  of  Silver. 

Permanganate  of  Potash — Its  Use  in  our  Art. 

Preparation  and  Using  of  Developer. 

Fixing  Solution  for  View  Negatives. 

On  Redeveloping  and  Strengthening  Agents. 

To  Clean  and  Polish  the  Glass. 

To  Prepare  Chloride  of  Gold  Solution. 

The  Paste  for  Mounting  of  Photographs. 

The   Operator's   Oracle — Failures  :    Causes  and 

Remedies  ;  for  consultation  in  time  of  trouble. 
Counsels  and  Cautions  for  the  Printer,  including 

Formulae  for  Silvering  Bath,  Ac 
Failures  in  Silvering  Albumenized  Paper. 
Failures  in  Toning  Photographs. 
Failures  in  Fixing  Photographs. 
Instantaneous  Photography. 
View  Photography  Financially  Considered. 
Stereoscoping  Applied  to  Portraiture. 
Concluding  Remarks. 


$>&£€&   79    G309T&. 


It  is  a  Perfect  Success,  and  is 

Selling  Well  and  Pleasing  Everybody 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


LONDON    1851. 


LONDON    1862. 


PARIS    1867. 


We  have  now  successfully  introduced  to  the  American  Photographers  the  Ross  Lens,  and  by  our 
increased  sales  we  know  they  are  appreciated.  At  the  convention  held  at  Buffalo,  July  15,  many  fine 
photographs  were  exhibited  by  photographers,  and  ourselves,  made  with  the  Ross  Lens,  which 
attracted  great  attention. 

While  Ross  &  Co.  are  the  oldest  manufacturers  of  Photographic  Lenses  in  existence,  they  also 
keep  up  with  the  requirements  of  the  fraternity,  by  constantly  manufacturing  new  combinations  and 
improving  on  those  already  in  existence.  They  have  lately  perfected,  and  will  soon  furnish  us  stock 
of,  a  new  series  of  Card  Lenses,  extra  rapid,  peeuliary  adapted  for  babies,  and  people  who  will  not  be 
quiet.     We  will  give  notice  of  their  arrival. 

WE  HAVE  NOW  IN  STOCK 

PORTRAIT  LENSES,  from  1-4  to  15  x  18. 
CABINET  LENSES,  Xos.  1,  2,  and  3. 
CARD  LENSES,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3. 

TRIPLETS,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7. 

INSTANTANEOUS  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

MEDIUM  ANGLE  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

LARGE  ANGLE  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

STEREOGRAPHIC  LENSES,  all  sizes. 

Numerous  testimonials  pronounce  them  to  be  the  best,  as  well  as  the  cheapest  Foreign  Lens  ever 
offered  to  the  American  Photographer 

We  will  mail  price-list  on  application,  and  promptly  fill  all  orders. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  eok  the  United  States, 

822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


AYRES'  CHART  OF.  PHOTOGRAPHIC  DRAPERY, 

Shoivs  what  color  dress  should  he  worn,  and  what  color  Sack- 
ground  and  Accessories  to  use  in  the  Photograph. 

This  "  Chart  "  designed  by  George  B.  Ayres,  author  of  "How  to  Paint  Photographs," 
is  a  photographic  copy  of  42  pieces  of  woolen  colored  cloth,  showing  exactly  how  each  color 
will  photograph  or  "take,"  and  if  used  will  he  found  one  of  the  best  paying  investments 
the  photographer  can  make.  The  colors  are  arranged  in  rows  and  numbered,  with  a  sched- 
ule attached,  so  that  any  one  can  refer  to  and  use  it.  The  Photograph  is  of  large  size,  on 
extra  heavy  card,  with  a  list  and  explanation,  handsomely  printed  in  brown  ink. 

It  will  be  sent  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  $2.00.     For  sale  by  all  stockdealers. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

P  HOTOCRAPHERSrr,  GLASS. 


Very  Superior,  Single  Thick  Crystal. 

6  J  x  8  J,  8  x  10, 10  x  14,  16  x  20,  and  all  other  Sizes  used  by  Photographers  and  Picture  Dealers. 


FOR  SALE  CHEAP. 


PLATE    AND    CRYSTAL    GLASS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION,  BY 


BENJAMIN   H.  SHOEMAKER, 

FRENCH  PLATE  GLASS  DEPOT, 
205,  207,  209,  &  211  N.  Fourth  St.,  Philadelphia. 


GEORGE  ROTTER  &  CO., 

DRESDEN,  GERMANY, 


MANUFACTURERS   OP 


ALBUMEN    PAPERS. 

Eives  and  Steinbach;  Light  and  Heavy;  White,  Pink,  and  Bine. 

Our  excellent  Albumen  Papers  to  which  the  first  premium,  the  silver  medal,  was  awarded  at  the 
Photographic  Exhibition  at  Hamburg,  1868,  both  single  and  double  albumenized,  can  be  worked  suc- 
cessfully by  any  formula  in  use.  It  prints  and  tones  rapidly,  producing  faithfully  the  finest  effects  of 
the  negatives.  Even  with  a  slight  silvering,  in  a  completely  neutral  silver  bath  (1 :  15-20),  they  pro- 
duce in  the  gold  bath  a  rich,  succulent,  and  warm  tone.  We  warmly  recommend  them  to  all  photo- 
graphio  stockhouses. 


OVftj 


MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

Nos.  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 


WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  STOCK 


BEALEMM  MWFPMIEM 

On  the  Most  Advantageous  Terms,  with 

EVERY  ARTICLE  IN  THE  WORLD 

Used  or  sold  in  the  Art  of  Photography. 


jf^p5  Oar  facilities  are  such  that  we  cannot  be  superseded  by  any 
other  house  anywheres.  We  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to 
deal  with  us. 


ASK  YOUR  DEALER  FOR  SCOVILL'S  GOODS. 


Removed  to  New  Store,  419  &.  421  Broome  St. 
^  "S  IT™'6  "PHOTOGRAPHIC  TIMES." 


NO  MISTAKE! 

TZHZIE 

BEST  PORTRAIT  LENSES 


.a.:R/:e] 


Chas.  F.  Usener's. 


TRY  THEM  and  BE  CONVINCED. 


Charles  Cooper  fy  Co., 

WHOLESALE  AGENTS, 

150  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

JOHN   R.  CXjESXKEONS, 

IMPORTER  OF 
AND  MANUFACTURER  OF 

ALBUMEN  110  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPERS. 

PINK  AND  BLUE  ALBUMEN  PAPER  CONSTANTLY  ON  HAND  OR  MADE  TO  ORDER, 

915  Sansom  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

CLEMONS'  NEW  ALBUMEN   PAPER, 

A  superior  article  introduced  into  the  market  about  a  year  ago.  It  is  equal,  if  not  superior  to  any  Paper 
imported ;  the  great  demand  proves  such  to  be  the  case.  It  is  praised  by  all  who  use  it  as  to  its  keeping 
white  during  warm  weather;  also,  for  its  brilliancy  and  toning  qualities,  and  it  is  made  White,  Pink,  and 
Blue.    Sizes  medium,  26  x  40  and  35  x  46. 

CLEMONS'  ARROWROOT  SALTED   PAPER 

Has  stood  the  test  above  all  other  makes  for  the  last  nine  years.  An  article  extensively  used  for  all  Plaia, 
Solar,  and  Colored  Work.    Sizes,  17%  x  23,  26  x  40,  and  35  x  46. 

JOHN  R.  CLEMONS,  Manufacturer, 

915  SANSOM  ST.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


"Make  my  order  thirty  instead  of  twenty.  Lot  last  sent  are  all  gone.'' — Dr.  E.  Liesegang, 
Dusseldorf,  Germany. 

"Hurry  on  the  Bigelow  Albums  ordered.  We  are  out  and  orders  waiting." — Piper  &  Carter, 
Lo.tdon,  England. 


IGELOWS  ALBU 


OP 


LIGHTING  AND  POSING. 
SELLS  ALL  OVER  THE  WORLD. 

A  NEW  EDITION  HAS  BEEN  ISSUED  WITH  AN  ENLARGED  KEY, 

AND  NEARLY  ALL  NEW  STUDIES. 

This   album  brings  lighting  and  posing  down  to  a 
system  at  once  plain,  easy  and  desirable. 

No  good,  intelligent  operator  can  afford 
to  tvork  without  it. 

It  Contains 

24  Victoria  Portrait  Studies 

in  Light  and  Pose, 

WITH  AN  EXPLANATORY  KEY, 

Telling  exactly  HOW  EACH  PICTURE    WAS 
MADE;   WHERE  THE  CAMERA  AND 
THE    SITTER     WERE    PLACED 
when  it  vxis  made  ;  WHA  T  CUR- 
TAINS WERE  OPENED 
in  lighting  the  subject, 

A  diagram  of  the  interior  of  the  skylight  is  given  in  each  case,  telling  the  whole  story.    IT  IS  BOUND 
HANDSOMELY  IN  CLOTH,  GILT. 


NEW  KEY,  ENLARGED. 


NEW  PICTURES. 


'  It  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  aids  to  art  education  which  has  yet  been  presented  to  the  photo, 
portraitist.  Each  print  represents  a  distinct  study  of  pose  and  lighting,  the  widest  variety  of  effects 
being  comprehended.  We  should  be  glad  to  see  it  in  the  hands  of  English  portraitists  generally." — 
Photo.  News. 

"  The  method  is  an  admirable  one  and  Mr.  Bigelow  deserves  credit  for  the  systematic  way  in  which 
he  has  carried  it  out." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

' '  I  confess  that  this  work  has  furnished  me  much  instruction,  particularly  the  manner  in  which, 
by  word  and  picture,  studies  about  light  and  pose   are  explained  and  made  comprehensible." — Dr. 


"  We  do  not  know  of  anything  ourselves  that  has  been  presented  to  the  trade  which  is  calculated 
to  do  so  much  real  good  as  Bigelow's  Album,  with  the  explanatory  key  to  the  studies.  It  is  an  in- 
valuable guide  to  the  portraitist." — Philadelphia  Photographer. 

It  is  considered  invaluable  by  the  practical  photographers  who  use  it. 


PRICE,  $6.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCKDEALERS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


FOTT  RTH      THOUSAND. 

Over 


IT  IS 

COMPLETELY 

REVISED. 


HOW  TO  PAINT 
PHOTOGRAPHS 


3000  Copies 

HAVE  BEEN  SOLD. 


The  THIRD  EDITION  is  so  different  from  former  ones,  that  it  may  almost  be  said  that  it  is  A  new 
work. 

It  Gives  the  Best  and  Freshest  Instructions  to  be  had  on  the  Subject. 

Written  by  a  practical  photographic  colorist,  Mr.  Geo.  B.  Ayees. 

PRICE  $2.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Photographers  and  artists  whose  interest  it  is  to  produce  work  in  Water  Colors,  Oil,  India  Ink,  or 
who  wish  complete  instructions  in  retouching  negatives,  should  consult  Mr.  Ayres'  capital  work. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA. 

TRAPP  &  MUNCH'S 


gJbtttttW 


Introduced  into  this  country  since  1868  has  become  the  leading  paper,  and  is 
now  better  knowu  and  more  appreciated  than  any  other  brand. 

That  this  great  success  is  well  deserved  and  due  to  its  excellent  qualities 
may  be  judged  from  the  fact,  that  of  all  the  competitors  of  the  Yienna  Ex- 
hibition, Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  alone  received  the 

nyCEID^.I_.    OIF   MBBIT 

for  Albumenized  Paper. 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALL  THE  STOCKHOUSES. 

WILLY  WALLACH, 

GENERAL  AGENT  FOR  THE  UNITED  STATES, 

41  John  Street,  New  York. 


er  to  jjfa  latam" 


WHAT  IS  IT? 


TIHE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS  is  a  little  book  or  pamphlet  of  twelve  pages,  the 
y  intention  of  which  is  :  1st.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  say  a  few  words  in  a  kindly  way 
to  those  who  have  photographs  taken,  in  order  that  the  intercourse  between  them  and  their 
photographer  may  be  pleasant  and  result  in  the  most  successful  pictures.  Every  photographer 
knows  that  he  is  constantly  beset  with  a  lot  of  questions,  as  to  the  proper  way  to  dress,  the  best 
time  to  come,  and  so  on,  which  take  a  great  deal  of  his  time  to  answer.  This  little  book  answers 
them  all,  and  the  mere  handing  of  a  copy  to  the  questioner,  which  he  or  she  can  carry  away  and  study 
at  leisure,  serves  as  admirably  as  a  half-hour's  conversation. 

2d.  It  is  a  cheap  mode  of  advertising  What  could  you  want  better  than  to  have  your  business  card 
so  attractive  that  people  will  come  and  ask  for  it,  hand  it  around  from  one  to  another,  discuss  it,  and 
then  keep  it  for  reference?  This  is  what  they  do  with  this  little  "tract."  Witness  what  those  who 
have  tried  it  say  below. 

3d.  It  is  also  intended  to  convey  to  the  public  at  large  the  fact  that  photography  is  not  a  branch  of 
mechanics,  nor  photographers  a  sort  of  mechanic  themselves,  but  that  both  are  entitled  to  respect,  the 
same  as  the  family  physician  or  the  minister ;  that  the  photographer  has  rights  as  well  as  the  public  ; 
that  he  must  be  trusted,  and  that  he  alone  is  responsible  for  his  results.  Moreover,  that  he  must  make 
the  picture  and  not  they. 

How'far  the  work  serves  these  three  ends  the  reader  must  judge  from  the  testimonials  below,  of  a 
few  of  those  who  have  been  using  our  little  publication  in  their  business. 

We  believe  it  will  pay  you  to  use  it,  and  that  you  will  assist  just  that  much  in  elevating  your  art  and 
your  craft,  an  object  which  we  are  all  working  for. 

We  get  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons'1'  up  in  neat  style,  on  the  best  letter  cap  paper,  assorted 
tints,  green,  pink,  and  buff.  Eight  pages  are  devoted  to  the  body  of  the  work,  which  contains  para- 
graphs or  chapters — 1,  on  the  object  of  the  work  ;  2,  on  photography  ;  3,  when  to  come  ;  4,  how  to 
come;  5,  how  to  dress;  6,  how  to  "behave;  7,  the  children  ;  8.  general  remarks  on  coloring,  copy- 
ing, frames,  prices,  &c. 

All  this  is  inclosed  in  a  cover  of  the  same  kind  of  paper,  the  pages  of  which  are  at  the  service  of 
the  photographer  who  orders  them  to  have  printed  thereon  anything  he  may  please,  which  printing 
we  do  without  extra  charge.  The  cuts  on  the  opposite  page  and  others  we  supply  free.  We  publish 
this  leaflet  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

1G00  copies,  cover  included,     .     .  $20  00  3000  copies,  cover  included,     .     .  $50  00 

2000       "  '.'-'?  .     .     35  00  5000       "  "  "  .     .     75  00 

We  will  send  samples  of  the  book  and  special  rates  to  any  who  may  desire  it.  Over  500,000  have 
been  sold. 

We  invite  you  to  examine  the  good  words  which  our  patrons  have  sent  us  concerning  this  publication. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"  I  sent  one  out  West  to  a  friend,  and  she 
wrote  that  she  was  now  posted,  and  when  she 
came  here  to  have  a  picture  "\ade,  she  would 
come  'according  to  directions.'  '" — A.  Bogar- 
dus,  New  York. 

"A  grand  idea." — Elbert  Anderson. 

"  A  splendid  medium  for  educating  'skulls' 
that  cannot  think  and  will  not  learn." — Wm.  H. 
Whitehead,  Pittsburg,  Pa. 

"  It  is  eagerly  sought  for  and  read  by  every- 
body who  visits  our  Gallery.'' — J.  Gurney  & 
Son,  New  York. 

"  It  assists  me  greatly." — James  Mullen, 
Lexington,  Ky. 

"  The  many  valuable  hints  in  it  cannot  fail  to 
be  beneficial  to  both  photographer  and  patron." 
— Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  W.  Virginia. 


"  They  are  the  best  kind  of  business  cards  a 
photographer  can  have." — T.  S  Estabrooke, 
Brooklyn. 

"  You  have  conferred  a  great  favor  on  the  fra- 
ternity in  supplying  it,  and  we  hope  it  will  bene- 
fit some  of  the  '  hnow-everythings  '  in  this  quar- 
ter." — A.  C.  McIntyre  &  Co.,  Ogdensburg. 

' '  They  are  just  the  thing  to  post  people  up  on 
what  they  ought  to  know  in  order  to  secure  good 
pictures." — J.  P.  Whipple,  White  Water. 

"  I  really  think  your  little  book  'hits  the  nail 
on  the  head.'  " — J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

"It  is  the  best  advertising  medium  I  have 
ever  found." — H.  M.  Sedgewick,  Granville,  O. 

"  I  think  they  are  a  perfect  success,  and  will 
do  us  photographers  a  great  deal  of  good." — G 
W.  Mathis. 


BENEBMAN  &  WILSON,  PMoppMc  Publishers, 

SEVENTH  &  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


(|ampng.        $ 


mmmnmm 


IN  EVERY  VARIETY. 


Nos.  419  &  421  BROOME  ST.,  NEW  YORK, 
No.  73  BOLD  STREET,  LIVERPOOL,  ENGLAND. 


DEALERS  SUPPLIED  WITH  THE  BEST  GOODS  ON  THE  BEST  TERMS. 


Our  own  extensive  facilities  for  manufacturing  enable  us  to  produce  first  quality  of  goods, 
and  our  extensive  connections  at  home  and  abroad  s;ive  us  facilities  which  no  one  else  has. 


MANUFACTORIES :  ( WaS&'  SdS'iSS: Ct 


SEE  OTHEK  ADVEKTISEMENTS  IN  PHOTOG-KAPHIC  BOOKS  and  MAGAZINES 


Examine  ScovilPs  Photographic  Clocb.  ani  Read  the  Photographic  Times. 


THE  ZENTMAYER  LENS 

For  Views  and  Copying. 


These  Lenses  possess  pre-eminently,  the  following  qualities  : 

Width  of  visual  angle,  ranging  from  80°  to  90°  ;  depth  of  focus ;  extreme  sharpness  over  the 
whole  field ;  true  perspective ;  freedom  from  all  distortion  in  copying  ;  portability  and  cheapness. 

Each  mounting  is  provided  with  a  revolving  Diaphragm,  containing  the  stops  of  the  different  com- 
binations for  which  they  are  designed.  The  larger  ones  are  provided  with  an  internal  shutter  for 
making  and  closing  the  exposure. 


No.  1,     2|  inch  focus, 

3x3    plate,  . 

.  $20  00 

No.  1  and  No.  2  combined,    . 

.     .  $33  00 

"    2,     3i     " 

«    3,     b\     "        « 

"    4,     8       " 

4x5       "      . 

6£  x    8|     "      . 

10    x    12     "      . 

.     25  00 

.      30  00 
.     42  00 

"    2    "      "    3 

"    3    "      "    4 

"    4    "      "5          " 

"    5    "      "    6 

...      40  00 
.     .     .      55  00 
...      75  00 
.     .     .110  00 

"    5,  12       " 

14    x    17     "      . 

.      60  00 

"    1,  2,  and  3, 

...      48  00 

"    6,  18       " 

20    x    24     "       . 

.     90  00 

"    3,  4,  and  5, 

...      88  00 

No.  3,  with  large  mounting  to  combine  with  No.  4  and  No.  5,  $35. 

No.  1  and  No.  2,  specially  adapted  for  Stereoscopic  Views,  are  furnished  in  matched  pairs.  No.  1 
and  No.  2,  single,  not  to  combine  with  other  sizes,  $36  a  pair. 

Lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six  combinations,  from  2£  to  18  inches,  $173. 

Zentmayer's  Stereoscopic  outfits,  including  a  pair  of  No.  2  Lenses  4x7  box,  7  x  10  India  Rubber 
Bath  and  Dipper,  Tripod,  Printing  Frames,  and  outside  box,  $60. 

JOSEPH  ZENTMAYER,  Manufacturer, 

147  South  Fourth  Street,  Philadelphia. 

STEREOSCOPIC   riBJTS. 


Dealers  selecting  their  autumn  stock  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  would  do  well  to  examine  our 

unrivalled  variety  of  Views  of 

THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS, 

NIAGARA,   WASHINGTON, 

FAIRMOVNT  PARK,  PHILADELPHIA, 

FLOWERS,  GROUPS,  &c. 

m-  QUAUITY  UNSURPASSED  ! 


KILBURN  BROS.,  Littleton,  New  Hampshire. 

NIAGARA 

STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS. 


Winter  and  Summer  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  of  all  sizes.     Trade  supplied  on  good  terms.     Variety 
unequalled. 

G.  E.  CURTIS,  Photographer, 

Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y. 

Mr.  Curtis'  views  answer  Mr.  Robinson's  query  :  "Are  there  any  clouds  in  America?  " 


THE 

AND  THE 


ARE-ROOM 


By  ELBERT  ANDERSON, 

Is  the  Most  Useful,  Elaborate,  anfl  Hanflsome  Work  ever  issnefl  on  Photoffraphy. 

IT  IS  EMPHATICALLY  A  WORKING  PHOTOGRAPHER'S  BOOK. 


PRICE  $4.00. 

PLEASE  READ  THE  OTHER  ADVERTISEMENTS  AND  TESTIMONIALS. 

The  book  contains  a  vast  amount  of  invaluable  information  never  found  in  elementary  works  on 
this  subject.  There  are  no  visionary  nor  theoretical  notions  ;  there  is  not  a  single  manipulation  given 
that  has  not  been  practiced  a  thousand  times  over  by  the  author. 

Among  many  other  things  it  treats  fully  on  the  following : 

Optics. — Decomposition  of  Light — Colors  of  Bodies — Complementary  Colors — Interference  of  Waves 
of  Light — Dispersion  of  Lenses — The  Diaphragm — Curvature  of  Field — Optical  Instruments — The 
Magic  Lantern — Camera  Obscura — The  Eye — Insensibility  of  a  Certain  Portion  of  the  Retina — Ster- 
eoscopicity — The  Stereoscope — The  Refracting  Stereoscope — Polarization  of  Light. 

Outlines  op  Chemistry. — The  Atomic  Theory — Atomic  Weight — Chemical  Equivalents — Nomencla- 
ture of  the  Elements — Diffusion  of  Gases — Double  Decomposition — Crystallization — Efflorescence — 
Deliquescence — Cleavage — Chemical  Affinity — On  the  Chemical  Action  of  Light — Theory  of  Photog- 
raphy. 

Photography. — Photographic  Chemicals — The  Skylight — The  Backgrounds — Accessories — Reflectors — 
The  Platform — The  Reception-Room — The  Dark-Room — The  Tanks — The  Chemical  Room — On  the 
Selection  of  Glass  for  Negatives — On  the  Method  of  Cleaning  the  Plates — Polishing  the  Plates — Al- 
bumenizing  the  Plates — Preparation  of  the  Albumen — Collodion — Iodides  and  Bromides  used  in 
Collodion — Formula  for  Iodized  Collodion — Elbert  Anderson's  Portrait  Collodion — The  Negative' 
Bath — Development — Nature  of  the  Invisible  Image — Developing  and  Redeveloping — Effects  of  In- 
tensification— The  Fixing  Solutions — Rectification  of  the  Negative  Bath — To  Fuse  the  Bath — To 
Restore  a  Disordered  Bath  by  Precipitation — To  Throw  Down  the  Silver  in  the  Metallic  State — The 
Camera — The  Plateholder — The  Lens — Varnishing  the  Negative — Negative  Varnish — Retouching  the 
Negative — The  Printing-Room — Silvering  Plain  Paper — Ammonio-Nitrate  of  Silver — Albumen  Paper 
— The  Positive  Bath — To  Silver  the  Paper — Fuming — The  Print — The  Press — Vignette  Printing 
Boards — Medallion  Printing — Fancy  Medallion  Printing — Washing  the  Prints — Toning  the  Prints — 
Fixing  Bath — The  Washing  Tank — Mounting — The  Press — Encaustic  Paste — Miscellaneous  Hints — 
Porcelain  Printing  by  the  Collodio-Chloride  Process — Collodio-Chloride — Porcelain  Printing  Frames? 
— The  Ferrotype — Transparencies  for  the  Magic  Lantern  :  How  Made — By  the  Copying  Camera — By 
Direct  Printing  on  Dry  Plates — By  the  Collodio-Chloride  Process — Coloring  Magic  Lantern  Slides — 
On  Copying — To  Clean  a  Daguerreotype — On  the  Recovery  of  Silver  from  the  Wastes — Silver  from 
the  Developer — The  Washings  from  the  Prints — Waste  from  the  Toning  Bath — Clippings,  Filters,  &c. 
— Of  the  Treatment  of  these  Residues. 

Art  as  Applied  to  Photography. — Balance  of  Lines — Perspective — Drawbacks  of  the  Camera — ■ 
Examples  of  Distortion  of  the  Camera — Curious  Effects  of  Distance  of  a  Lens — Imperfections  of  the 
Human  Face — Brilliancy — Relief — Position 

Details  op  Manipulations. — Manipulation  No.  1 — Exposure — Manipulation  No.  2 — Remarks  on 
Development — Pinholes — Fogging — Filtering  the  Bath. 

It  also  contains  a  Great  Number  of  Original  Illustra- 
tions, and  12  Interesting  Photographs. 

The  book  is  written  in  a  style  at  once  dignified,  elegant,  and  yet  perfectly  simple,  and  almost  the 
only  streak  of  the  author's  well-known  humor  is  to  be  found  in  the  preface,  which  is  alone  worth 
the  price  of  the  book. 


For  Sale  by  all  Dealers. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

S.  W.  cor.  7th  and  dietary  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


y///Y ////■//./   ^/  //?://,/ ;/j  /,'■;  .  >/>///'/ 


J//t'rt /Ufi'/?./    (/  .'.  /  /'jVy's/j  /f>;     y  /r'/y/f..'.     :we   /" 


flllllllllll 


Invite  attention  to  annexed  Specimens  of 


CARDS  FOE  GROUPS 


\ WHICH  WE  ARE  PREPARED  TO  FURNISH  A3  FOLLOWS: 

No.  2.    8  x  10.    White  or  Light  Buff  Cards,  with  3  and  4  Square,  or  3  and  4  Oval  Openings, 

designated  G.  3,  and  G.  4, $3.25  per  100. 

No.  2.    10x12.  White  or  Light  Buff  Cards,  with  5  and  6  Square,  or  5  and  6  Oval  Openings, 

designated  G.  5,  and  G.  6, $4.75  per  100. 

No.  1.    11x14.   White  or  Light  Buff  Cards,  with  7  and  8  Square,  or  7  and  8  Oval  Openings, 

designated  G.  7,  and  G.  8, $6.50  per  100. 


BY  ALL  I 


D 


THE  ADVANTAGE  TO  BE  DERIVED  FROM  THE  USE  OF  THESE  CARDS 

Will  be  found  fully  set  forth  in  the  following  Communication  from  Capt.  J.  LEE  KNIGHT. 


Topeka,  January  1st,  1874. 

Messrs.  A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO. 

Having  received  samples  of  the  New  Group  Mounts  introduced  by  you,  I  take  pleasure  in 
calling  the  attention  of  practical  Photographers  to  them,  as  supplying  a  want  long  felt  by  all  who  earn  their  daily 
bread  under  the  sky-light. 

The  Designs  are!  neat  and  attractive,;  and  will  readily  suggest  to  the  intelligent  operator  a  multitude  of  ways  in 
which  the  revenues  of  a  Gallery  may  be  increased  by  their  use — for  Family  Groups,  for  Class  Groups,  for  Groups  of 
Officers  of  Lodges  and  Societies,  and  by  neatly  cutting  out  the  openings,  converting  them  into  mats  for  framing  select 
lots  of  small  pictures.     In  all  cases  framing  follows,  as  a  corollary  consequence. 

I  have  never  shown  them  to  a  single  customer,  where  I  have  not  by  means  of  them,  increased  the  original  order 
for  pictures,  general!)!  to  twice,  and  often  three  or  four  times  the  amount  I  should  otherwise  have  sold,  and  in  nearly 
every  case  found  sale  for  a  good  frame  besides. 

While  pencilling!  this  note,  a  gentleman  came  into  my  Gallery  to  order  half-a-dozen  duplicate  cards  of  his  baby, 
from  a  negative  madei  two  years  ago.  While  looking  up  the  registration,  he  said  he  would  like  to  make  a  contract 
for  a  group  of  his  whejile  family,  of  which  he  should  want  a  number,  if  he  could  get  something  good,  but  thought  nine 
on  a  card  would  be  h\o  small,  and  if  made  larger  would  be  inconvenient  for  sending  by  mail.  I  thought  so  too,  and 
explained  the  difficulty  of  children  and  adults  being  taken  together.  I  then  showed  him  the  Group  Mounts;  suggest- 
ing card  groups  of  two  or  three  for  the  older  children,  the  baby  alone,  and  self  and  wife  together,  exhibiting  a  similar 
group,  framed.  That  settled  it.  Result — The  sale  of  five  half-dozens,  512.50,  and  a  frame  at  #2.50,  total  $15. 00. 
He  had  come  to  speifid  $1.50,  and  certainly  would  not  have  spent  more  than  §6.00  to  $8.00  for  any  group  I  could 
have  made  for  him,  nor  would  such  a  group,  if  made,  have  been  any  special  advantage  or  credit  to  me.  As  it  is,  I 
can  give  him  his  money's  worth,  and  will  besides,  receive  both  credit  and  profit  in  doing  so. 

They  only  need  l|o  be  seen  to  sell. 

J.     LEE     KNIGHT. 


atoTjefi 


TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS! 


BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Beg  Photographers  to  remember  that  their 

BUSINESS  OFFICE, 

DELIVERY  DEPARTMENT, 

And  EDITORIAL  ROOMS, 

Are  now  all  concentrated  in  Sherman's  Building, 
S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

1^*  No  other  Offices  in  the  City. 

LIESEGANG'S  ALBUMEN  PAPEB 

Is  used  and  recommended  by  the  London  Stereoscopic  Company  ;  Messrs.  Alessandri  Fratelli, 
of  Home  ;  Le  Lieure,  of  Kome  ;  A.  Sorgato,  of  Venice  ;  Fr.  Bruckmann,  of  Munich ;  C.  Keut- 
linger,  of  Paris ;  0.  Bergamasio,  of  Petersburg ;  Abdullah,  of  Constantinople ;  and  many 
other  first  class  photographers  throughout  the  World. 

IT  IS  THE  BEST  PAPER  IN  THE  MARKET. 

Sample  sheets,  and  English,  French,  and  German  Price  List  to  be  had  free  on  application 
from  the  Manufacturer. 


9 

DUSSELDORF    ON    THE    RHINE,   GERMANY, 

(FORMERLY  AT  ELBERFELD). 

For  Sale  by  SCOVILL  MANUFACTU£ING  COMPANY,  New  York. 


PRICE  50  CENTS,  PER  POST. 


THE 


Year-Book  of  Photography 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  NEWS  ALMANAC. 


Edited  by  G.  WHARTON   SIMPSON,  M.A.,  F.S.A., 

We  feel  much  pleasure  in  announcing  that  this  annual  contains  nearly  one  hundred  original  articles 
contributed  by  the  most  distinguished  gentleman  connected  with  the  photographic  art,  besides  a  care- 
ful resume  of  all  the  novelties  and  improvements  in  photography  during  the  year. 

THE   SIZE   IS   AGAIN    INCREASED. 

A  Charming  Figure  Study  from  a  Negative  by  Fritz  Luckhardt,  printed  by  the  Woodbury- 
type  Process,  appears  as  Frontispiece. 

FOE  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALEKS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  "*$%$%$&£"• 

Marion  & Co.s  Specialties. 


ALBUMENIZED  PAPERS, 

Used  by  the  best  English  and  Colonial  photographers  ;  Wilson,  of  Aberdeen ;  Vandyke 
&  Brown,  Liverpool;  Notman,  Montreal;  Bourne  &  Shepherd,  India;  and  hundreds  of 
others. 

MOUNTS 

Eor  Cartes-de-Visite,  Cabinet,  and  larger  sizes,  of  the  very  best  style  and  quality,  as  made 
for  the  leading  English  and  Colonial  photographers.  We  will  post  samples  free  to  any 
photographer  on  receipt  of  application. 

GILT  AND  SILVER  ORMOLU  METAL  FRAMES, 

Eor  Miniatures,  Cartes-de-Visite,  and  Cabinets. 

PHOTOGRAPHS. 

The  largest  and  best  selected  stock  in  Great  Britain.  Upwards  of  1000  copies  of 
Modern  Paintings,  artistically  colored  in  water  colors ;  English  and  Continental  Photogra- 
phic Views;  the  principal  Picture  Galleries;  Portraits  of  Eminent  Personages;  over  300,- 
000  in  stock. 

MARION  &  CO.,  22  &  23  Soho  Square,  LONDON,  ENGLAND. 


DR.  VOGEL'S 

PHOTOGRAPHER'S 

Pocket  Reference-Book 

AND 

DICTIONARY: 

An  Alphabetically  arranged  collection  of  practically  important  hints  on  the  construction 
of  the  Gallery  ;  selection  and  trial  of  lenses  and  chemicals  ;  approved  formulae  for  the  differ- 
ent photographic  processes  ;  tables  of  weights  and  measures  ;  rules  for  avoiding  failure,  etc., 
etc.,  for 

Photographers  and  Amateurs, 

IS  RECEIVING  THE  HIGHEST  PRAISE  WHEREVER  IT  GOES. 


IT  IS  A  BOOK  EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER  SHOULD  HAVE, 

Because  it  is  a  ready  helper  under  all  difficult  circumstances. 


Extract  from  the  Minutes  of  the  Chicago  Photographic  Association,  Dec.  3. 

"Messrs.  Hall  and  Hesler  spoke  in  most  flattering  terms  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Pocket  Reference-Booh,  of 
its  great  value  to  every  photographer,  and  expressed  the  hope  that  it  may  soon  be  found  in  every 
gallery." 


There  is  hardly  a  matter  occurring  in  your  daily  work  which  it  does  not  throw  light  upon 
and  make  easy.     Examine  it  for  yourself. 


For  sale  by  all  dealers.    Price,  $1.50,  post-paid. 

BENERMAN&  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


WAYMOUTH'S 


NETT 


PAPERS. 


[See  opposite  page.) 


TESTIMOUIALS 


"  Waymouth's  Improved  Vignette  Papers  I  have  tried,  and  they  are  just  what  I  have  heen  want- 
ing for  years." — Well  G.  Singhi. 

"Being  composed  of  transparent  paper  there  is  no  risk  of  breakage,  and  it  readily  admits  of  the 
gradation  already  very  good,  being  modified  easily  to  suit  the  negative.  This,  I  take  it,  is  a  point  of 
great  importance.  This  lithographed  mask  on  transparent  paper  will,  I  think,  be  found  a  useful 
adjunct  in  vignetting." — G.  W '  hart  on  Simpson,  JVE.A.,  F.S.A. 

"  From  a  trial  made,  we  are  enabled  to  say  that  they  answer  exceedingly  well  ;  and  they  are  certain 
to  find  favor  among  photographers — a  favor  they  well  deserve." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  can  testify  to  the  exquisite  softness  obtained  from  your  Vignette  Papers,  which  gradual  and 
soft  effect  I  have  never  seen  equalled  by  any  other  method." — H.  A.  H.  Daniel,  Esq.,  Hon.  Sec.  of  the 
Bristol  and  Clifton  Amateur  Photographic  Association. 

"The  Waymouth  Vignetting  Paper  are  a  decided  success.  They  are  splendid." — J.  W.  ^-  J.  S. 
Monlton,  Salem  Mass. 

From  Professional  Photographers. — "First-class."  "The  sample  sent  answers  perfectly."  "I 
consider  them  first  rate  articles."  "I  think  your  Vignette  Papers  will  be  a  great  improvement  on 
the  old  glasses."     Ac,  &c. 


Any  number  sent  on  receipt  of  price,  by  any  stockdealer,  or  by 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers, 

PHILADELPHIA. 


IlsT 

GERMANY,  ENGLAND,  AND  FRANCE, 

PHOTOGRAPHEKS  USE 

WAYMOUTH'S 

VIGNETTING  PAPERS. 

(DESIGNS    COPYRIGHTED.) 


W\%u\\t 


OF  ALL  PICTURES,  THE  'ThJ  I  I  p  I   IP  IS  THE  MOST  ARTISTIC, 

When  properly  printed.  But  the  clumsy  devices  generally  in  use  for  printing  them, 
or  rather  for  blending  the  shading  about  the  figure,  produce  but  very  few  really  artistic 
vignette  pictures.  Either  the  shading  is  too  intensely  dark,  not  gradated  in  tint  at  all,  or 
it  shows  an  ugly  direct,  decided  line,  which  is  very  repulsive.  The  shading  should 
blend  gradually  from  the  dark  tint  nearest  to  the  figure,  off  into  the 
tvhite  background.  The  results  are  then  soft,  artistic,  and  beautiful.  The  easiest  and 
best  way  to  secure  them  is  by  the  use  of 

WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 

THEY  ARE  NOT  CLUMSY ;  DO  NOT  BREAK  ;  ARE  ALWAYS  READY ;  COST 
BUT  LITTLE,  AND  ARE  EASY  OF  APPLICATION  TO  ANY  NEGATIVE. 

THEY  NEED  BUT  ONE  ADJUSTMENT  TO  PRINT  ANY  QUANTITY. 

They  entirely  do  away  with  all  the  old  and  troublesome  methods,  either  wood,  metal, 
or  cotton.  ■ 

PLEASE  THY  THE  SAMPLE  GIVEN  IN  THIS  MAGAZINE. 


Eighteen  sizes  are  now  made,  suiting  all  dimensions  of  pictures  from  a  small  carte  figure 
to  Whole-size,  Victorias',  Cabinets,  &c.  They  are  printed  in  black  for  ordinary  negatives, 
yellow  bronze  for  thin  negatives,  and  red  bronze  for  still  weaker  ones.  Directions  for  use 
accompany  each  parcel. 

!P  IR,  I  O  IE  S  : 

In  parcels  containing'  one  of  each  size,  Nos.  1  to  15,  assorted  colors $1  00 

Assorted  sizes  and  colors,  by  number,  per  package  of  fifteen 1  00 

Nos.  1,  a,  3,  4,  and  5,  assorted  sizes  and  colors,  for  Cartes,  by  number,  per  dozen 50 

"        6,  7, 11, 13,  and  13,    "  "  "     Large  Cartes  and  Victorias,  by  number,  per  doz.,        75 

"        8, 9, 10,  14,  and  15,    "  "  "     Cabinets  and  Whole-size,  "  "  1  00 

"  .     16, 17,  and  18,  "  "  "     Half  "  "  "  "  1  25 

{SEE  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

When  ordering,  state  the  number  and  color  you  want.  The  Waymouth  Vignette  Papers 
are  an  English  invention,  and  are  becoming  so  universally  used  in  Europe  that  we  have 
pleasure  in  introducing  them  to  our  patrons.     We  own  the  copyright. 

BEBEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers,  m  mi  Merry,  PMIada. 

FOR   SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


THE  PHOTOGRAPHER'S 

Pocket  Reference-Book 


BY  DR.  VOGEL. 

Every  photographer  has  felt  the  need  of  a  work  to  which  he  could  refer 
quickly  and  find  such  information  as  comes  up  in  his  daily  practice,  and  yet 
with  which  he  is  not  entirely  familiar,  such  as  optical  and  chemical  terms, 
chemical  formulas  and  equivalents,  tables  of  weights  and  measures,  and  for  the 
changing  of  the  old  system  of  the  same  to  the  decimal;  varied  photo-formulas 
in  brief;  hints  useful  in  cases  of  emergency  and  failure,  together  with  the 
thousand  and  one  things  which  come  up  daily — in  fact  a  dictionary  in 
brief.  But  until  now  that  want  has  been  unsupplied,  and  much  time  has  had 
to  be  taken  in  searching  through  volumes  of  magazines  and  books  to  find  out 
information  that  a  ready  reference  book  would  give  in  a  moment. 

Several  thousand  copies  of  the  German  edition  have  been  sold.  The 
American  edition,  revised  and  rearranged,  is  now  ready. 

See  reviews  in  the  photographic  magazines  and  other  advertisements. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS.    PRICE,  $1.50. 

BENERIAN  &  WILSON,  Mo.  Misters,  FbMeljlia. 


ALBION  ALBUMENIZING  CO. 

LONDON  AND  GLASGOW, 

Request  American  Photographers  to  give  their 
Paper  a  fair  trial. 


THE  SEVEEAL  BRANDS  FOR  SALE  BY 

wtt$0H*  moot*  &  co., 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA., 

AND 

SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

4  BEEKMAN  STEEBT,  NEW  YOEK. 


T  H  IB 


CHAMELEON  BAROMETER 


Invented  bt  WALTER  B.  WOODBURY,  Esq.,  London. 


The  Greatest  Scientific  Novelty  of  the  Age. 


FORETELLS  the  WEATHER. 


MAILED,  ON  RECEIPT  OF  PRICE,  BY 


BENERMAN  *  WILSON, 


Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia, 


50  Cents. 


•50  Cents. 


New  York,  January  24,  1874. 

For  Winter  work  use  our  latest 
styles  Interior. 

For  Spring  and  Summer,  order  a 
Landscape  background,  and  begin  to 
make  sample  pictures  for  the  next 
N.  P.  A.  Convention. 

Enclose  stamp  for  samples. 

LAFAYETTE  W. SEAVEY, 

8  Lafayette  Place,  New  York. 


LATEST. 

JSTos.  66,  67  &  68, 

Were  exhibited  at  the  Buffalo  Convention. 
Large  sales. 

Wo.  69. 

A  moonlight.     New  and  a  decided  novelty. 


THE 


BOOK, 


ADAPTED    TO    THE 


Complete  Preservation  and  Convenient  Arrange- 
ment of  the  Pictures 

IN  THE  MOST  COMPACT  FORM, 

Prof.  CHARLES  I  HIES,  PU,  Inventor, 

Is  a  "  book"  made  after  the  plan  suggested  by  Prof.  Himes  in  the  "  Philadelphia 
Photographer,"  for  January,  187 4,. 

This  method  of  mounting  stereographs  is  intended  to  combine  com- 
pactness with  comparative  freedom  from  injury.  Mechanical  abrasion 
is  entirely  avoided;  and  liability  to  deterioration  by  chemical  action  is 
greatly  lessened,  by  reducing  the  chance  of  accidental  contact  with  sub- 
stances that  may  initiate  chemical  changes,  which  generally  continue 
under  ordinary  conditions  'until  the  value  as  well  as  the  beauty  of  the 
pictures  is  greatly  impaired. 

It  seems  especially  adapted  to  large  private  collections,  and,  by  reason 
of  the  facility  for  classification  it  affords,  to  the  arrangement  of  stereo- 
graphs for  public  study  and  inspection,  illustrative  of  scientific  subjects, 
travels,  architecture,  &c,  &c,  permitting  them  to  be  almost  as  accessible 
as  the  volumes  of  a  library. 

PEICE  SO  CENTS. 

Dealers  and  Stereoscopic  Publishers  supplied  on  good  terms. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


J.  A.  ANDERSON'S 

Position  and  Baby  Chair 
Combined. 


THE  HANDSOMEST, 

MOST  COMPLETE, 

AND  CHEAPEST 

PIECE  OF  APPARATUS  EVER  OFFERED  TO  THE  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


BUT  NO  IMITATION. 


SEND  FOB  PBICJE  LIST 


Photographers  can  save  from  10  to  20  per  cent,  by  sending  direct  to  the 
manufactory  for  Apparatus. 

J.  A.  ANDERSON, 

LATE  ANDERSON  &  BIXBY. 

65   EAST   INDIANA    ST.,   CHICAGO. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC 


FOR  1874. 


EDITED  BY  EDWARD  L.  WILSON. 


This   favorite    annual  is    NOW    READY,    -wholly    filled   -with   Articles  prepared 
expressly  for  it  by  the  eminent  photographers  of  Europe  and  America,  and  is 

UNUSUALLY   GOOD! 


MEAD   THE  CONTEXTS: 


1873  ;  On  the  Sensitiveness  of  Bromide  of  Sil- 
ver ;  Toning  and  Fixing ;  Is  Honesty  the  Best 
Policy?  Transparent  Paper;  Growing;  A  New 
Test  for  Hyposulphite  of  Sodium  ;  Chemical 
Manipulation  and  Collodion ;  How  to  Buy  a 
Lens;  Copying  of  Every  Description  Executed 
in  the  Highest  Style  of  the  Art ;  Expression  ; 
The  Reception -Room  ;  Treatment  of  Prints  after 
Toning  ;  Public  Taste  ;  Plate  Vise  ;  Progress  of 
Photography  in  America  ;  How  to  be  a  Photog- 
rapher of  the  Times  ;  The  Uncertainties  of  Pho- 
tography ;  Exploration  Field  Photography  ;  How 
to  Make  Varnish  for  Negatives,  and  How  to 
Varnish  Them;  Porcelain  Printing;  How  to 
Elevate  Our  Art ;  Lighting  for  Portraits  ;  Some- 
thing Practical;  Photographs;  Negative  Var- 
nish ;  Lighting  the  Sitter  ;  Photographic  Excel- 
lence ;  On  Certain  Causes  of  Failure  and  Success 
in  Photography ;  Negative  Retouching;  The 
Roller  Press  and  Burnisher;  Recovery  of  Gold 
and  Silver  from  the  Waste  or  Spent  Solutions ; 


Concerning  Formulae ;  Notes  on  Photographic 
Subjects ;  Hints  on  Photographic  Printing ; 
Things  which  Hurt;  Collodion  Transfers;  Along- 
side; A  Chapter  on  Practical  Matters;  What  to 
do  with  Negative  Baths  which  have  been  Ren- 
dered Unserviceable  by  Constant  Usage  ;  Photo- 
graphic Literature  ;  Influence  of  Long  and  Short 
Exposures  upon  the  Brilliancy  of  the  Pictures; 
Wet-Plate  Photography  Out  of  Doors;  Sandarac 
and  Benzoin  Varnish  ;  On  Printing,  and  How  to 
do  it ;  Cleansing  a  Discolored  Printing  Bath  ; 
On  the  Double  Iodides  and  Bromides,  anl  How 
to  Prepare  Them  ;  B  ickgrounds  :  Mr.  Faulkner's 
Method  of  Making  Them  ;  A  Practical  Sugges- 
tion for  Stereo-Landscape  Negatives  ;  Preparing 
Photographs,  etc.,  for  Coloring;  No  More  Pin- 
Holes;  Successive  Development;  The  Green- 
Glass  Question  ;  Backgrounds  ;  Transparencies 
for  the  Stereoscope ;  Lantern  Pictures  ;  The 
Dark-Room  ;  Photographing  in  Hot  Climates  ; 
Many  Mites  from  Many  Minds. 


Price,  in  Cloth,  $1.00 ;  in  Paper  Cover,  50  Cents. 


Tie  Best  Little  HaniM  of  Photography  in  Die  World.       For  Sale  by  all  Dealers. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


GRAND  MEDAL  OF  MERIT, 


AWARDED  AT  VIENNA  TO 


SEND   FOE   A   CATALOGUE. 


Charles  Bierstadt, 


LANDSCAPE 
PHOTOGRAPHER, 

Trade  supplied  with  the  best  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  Hudson  River,  Saratoga,  Partage, 
New  York,Watkins'  Glen,  Havana  Glen,  California,  Yosemite  Valley,  Rogers'  Statuary,  &c. 


t,  Niagara  Falls,  IN.  Y. 


D.  J.  RYAN'S 

Southern  Photographic  and  Ferrotype 

STOCK     DEPOT, 

SAVAMAH,    GA. 

First- Class  Stock  at  Northern  Prices, 

Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance,  Drayage,  &c. 

fl®""  SEND  FOR  PRICE  LIST. 


P,  G.  WELLER,  PUBLISHER  OF  STEREOSCOPIC  VIEWS 

OF  THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS  AND  VICINITY  AND  MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS, 

LITTLETON,  N.  H. 

SPECIALTY:  WELLER'S  STEREOSCOPIC  TREASURES,  which  embrace  a  series  o  subject  pic- 
tures from  nature,  such  as  are  not  made  by  any  other  artist  in  the  country.  New  subjects  added  continually. 
Dealers  and  jobbers  supplied  on  favorable  terms. 


POWERS     &     WEIGHTMAN, 


P-H 


5=1 


MANUFACTURING  CHEMISTS, 


Offer  to  Stoekdealers 
A  full  Assortment  of  Reliable 


Photographic  Chemicals 


Of  their  own  Manufacture, 
including  : 


Nitrate  of  Silver,  Sulphuric  Ether  (concentrated),  Ammonia  (concentrated), 
Bromide  of  Potassium,  Acetic  Acid,  Chemically  Pure  Acids, 
Iron  and  Ammonia  Proto-Sulphate,  Chloride  of  Gold, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  Sulphate  of  Iron,  Cyanide  of  Potassium, 
Chloroform,  Tannin,  Sulphuret  of  Potassium. 

L  E  A.'  S 

MANUAL  OF  PHOTOGRAPHY 

SECOND  EDITION,  $3.75. 

Is  for  sale  by  all  dealers,  and  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philada. 


J 


MAMMOTH   PHOTOGRAPHIC  STOCK  HOUSE. 

No.  259  Wabash  Avenue,  Chicago,  Ills., 


AGENTS    FOR    THE    NORTHWEST    FOR 


WESTON'S  ROTARY  BURNISHER, 

Send  for  our  complete  Price  List. 


TO   PEOFESSIONAL   PHOTOGRAPHERS    AND   THE   TRADE. 


CH.    DAUVOIS, 

Acknowledged  to  be  the  Best  and  Cheapest  in  the  World. 


No.  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris, 

ESPECIAL   MANUFACTURERS    OF 

MOUNTS^pTLFOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


TRADE    MARK,    Ch.D. 


Mounts  for  Cartes-de-Visite, 
Cabinet  Portrait, 
Victoria  Card, 

Stereoscopic  Views — all  new  samples  of  French 
styles. 


Bristol  Boards  of  every  size  and  thickness,  plain. 

India  Tinted  and  Fancy  Printing. 

Book-post  and  Card  Cases. 

Stout  Blotting  Paper  Albums. 

First-class  Rives  Albumenized  Paper,  Ac,  Ac. 


MEDALS  AWARDED  AT  EVERY  EXHIBITION. 

All  orders  are  to  be  sent  to  their  establishment,  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris,  or  to  Wholesale  Houses 
of  the  United  States.     Samples  on  application. 

LIBERAL  DISCOUNT  TO  WHOLESALE  HOUSES. 

TRY    IT    AND    BE    CONVINCED. 


The  best  COLLODION  in  use  is 

LEWIS  &  HOLT'S  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE, 

Sold  with  a  Printed  Formula  accompanying  each  Bottle. 

Being  among  the  first  in  this  country  to  make  Collodion  Pictures,  they  can  warrant  it  to  be  one 

of  the  best  in  use. 

ALSO,   THEIR 

ADAMANTINE  VARNISH  for  Artrotypes,  Negatives,  ail  Melainotjpes. 

This  Varnish,  when  applied  to  Negatives,  dries  in  a  few  seconds  perfectly  hard,  and  does  not  lower  the 
intensity,  or  soften  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  in  Printing.  It  gives  a  beautiful  gloss  and  brilliancy  to 
Ambrotypes.    For  Sale  by  Stockdealers  generally.    Prepared  by  jj_  _^_  LEWIS 

160  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

HEADQUARTERS     FOR    THE     TRADE. 

Show  Displayers,  Velvet  Stands, 

Velvet  Passepartouts,         Velvet  Cases, 
Beveled  Matts,  Double  Matts, 

Fancy  Metal  Frames,  Standard  Matts, 

Fancy  Paper  Passepartouts. 

These  goods  are  entirely  of  our  own  manufacturing.  A  largo  assortment  constantly  on  hand  ;  odd 
sizes  and  styles  made  to  order. 

LEWIS  PATTBERG  &  BBO.,  709  (3Hft&)  Broadway,  New  York. 


Established  in  1857. 


L.  DUBERNET, 


Manufacturer  of 


PAPER  PASSEPARTOUTS, 

ENAMELED  AND  TELTET  PASSEPARTOUTS, 
PLAIN  AND  DOUBLE  MITTS, 
VELVET  STANDS, 

FANCY  GILT  FRAMES,  AND  EASELS, 

AND  THE  NEWEST  STYLES  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  FRAMES, 

13  &  15  AMITY  ST.  (near  lie  Grani  Central  Hotel),  NEW  YORK. 

PICTURE    AND    STOCK    DEALERS    SUPPLIED. 


IpRCY'S  SCIOPTICOK 

!  /s  a  qreatty  improve(ffom     / 


with 


flStf 


FOR   HOME, 
ttCTURE^OOM 

Unrivalled 


Price,  latest  improvements,  complete, 

with  Camera  Objective, $45.00 

Price,  without  front  objective, 36.00 

For  Circulars  address 

L.  J.  MARCY, 

1340  Chestnut  St., 

Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Marcy's  Photographic  Printing  Apparatus,  Price  $7.00. 

(See  Philadelphia  Photographer,  1872,  page  38.) 

The  Sciopticon  Manual, 

Including  Optics,  Experiments,  Photographing,  and  Coloring 
Slides,  &c.     Enlarged,  Kevised  Edition  Just  Out. 

#g~  Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  50  cents. 


enlaBGE  M 


enTS 


IDE  BY  THE  SOLAR  CAMERA, 

AND  COPYING  DONE,  FOR  THE  TRADE. 


18  SOLAR   CAMERAS. 


EXPEDITIOUS. 


Send  for  Instructions  (free)  for  making        CYOCI    I    CKIT 
SOLAR  NEGATIVES.  LAOLLLLMl  I 


ALBERT   MOORE, 

No.  828  Wood  Street,  Philadelphia. 


MARCH. 


ELBERT  ANDERSON'S 


PHOTO-COMIC  ALL 


Makes  everybody  scream,  while  it  is  also  a  book  embodying  instruction,  and  handsomely  illustrated. 
Among  other  things  it  contains 


For  each  month  in  the  year;  embellished  handsomely;    EXPLANATIONS  OF  THE  TWELVE 
SIGNS  OF  THE  ZODIAC  ILLUSTRATED  ;  and  the  following  : 


Dedication. 

The  Weather. 

The  Probabilities. 

Places  of  the  Planets. 

Eclipses. 

Cronologieal  Circlelers. 

Customary  Notes. 

To  Find  your  Horror'scope. 

Signs  of  the  Zodiac. 

The  Photographic  Hamlet. 


"  Say  Amen  !  to  that,  Brother." 

Declining  a  Kiss. 

Not  at  all  Extraordinary. 

Riddlicous. 

An  Incident  of  my  Life. 

Rapidity  of  Light. 

Money  vs.  Honor. 

The  Lowest  Depth  of  Meanness. 

He  Didn't  Dance  the  "Lancers.'' 

Three  Collodion  Puzzles. 

A  Joke  and  its  Results. 


Photo.  Mezzotints. 

The  Twins. 

Beware  of  Strangers  who  ask  you 

to  Play  Cards. 
'Notice  to  Sportsmen. 
Sphynx. 

What  I  Know  of  Photography. 
After-Dinner  Session. 
Art  as  Apt-lied  to  Photography. 
A  Tale  of  a  Fox. 


It  is  full  of  witty  stories,  sayings,  doings,  puns,  jokes,  practical  hints,  take-offs,  etc.,  with  grotesque 
illustrations,  and  all  the  features  of  a  first-class  Almanac.  All  the  wit  and  humor  which  Mr.  Ander- 
son suppressed  in  his  "Skylight  and  Dark-Room,"  may  be  found  in  his  ALLMYKNACK.  Samples 
of  illustrations  herewith.     Dealers  can  sell  thousands  ;  photographers  can  sell  hundreds. 

Liberal  discount  for  wholesale  orders. 

JUST  THE  THING   FOR  DULL  WEATHER. 

PRICE  75  CENTS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 
You  have  no  idea  how  good  and  how  funny  it  is. 


The  publishers  of  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE,  encouraged  by  the 
growing  interest  taken  in  their  PEEMIUM  LIST,  by  operators,  printers,  employees,  etc., 
offer  the  following 

PREMIUMS  FOR  1874, 

FOR  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS. 


CONDITIONS:  These  premiums  are  only  given  to  old  or  present  subscribers  for 
new  ones.     No  premium  will  be  given  you  on  your  own  renewal. 


WE  WILL  GIVE  FOE  THEEE  NEW  SUBSCEIBEES  (IN  ADDITION  TO 
YOUE  OWN),  EOE  ONE  YEAE, 

Vols.  I  &  II  of  the  Photographic  World ! 


TWO  NEW  SUBSCEIBEES  FOE  ONE  YEAE, 


Either  Volume  I  or  II  of  the  Photographic  World, 


Or  your  choice  of  the  following  :  $1  on  each,  per  year,  payable  in  any  of  our  publications, 
not  in  cash ;  i.  e.,  $10  will  secure  our  Magazine  for  one  year  to  an  old  subscriber,  to  a  new  one, 
and  one  dollar's  worth  of  our  other  publications. 

Any  enterprising  operator  can,  by  writing  a  few  letters  and  a  little  effort,  secure  enough 
new  subscribers  to  pay  for  his  own,  and  fit  him  out  with  our  whole  list  of  premiums,  or  a 
set  of  the  six  Luckhardt  pictures.     (See  special  advertisement.) 

This  magnificent  offer  was  never  equalled  by  any  publisher,  photographic  or  otherwise. 
Strive  hard  to  win  the  whole  I 

Please  examine  the  order  blanks  in  this  number,  and  send  for  more  if  you  wish  them. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 

Philadelphia  Photographer  for  1874 ! 

The  increasing  favor  shown  the  publishers  of  this  Magazine  during  the  first  ten  years  of  its  life, 
has  given  them  the  means  to  prepare  for  their  intelligent  patrons  still  greater  attractions  than 
ever  for  the  year  1874.     The  old  staff  of  regular  contributors  will  be  continued. 

A  series  of  illustrated  descriptive  articles  on 

PHOTOGRAPHY    IN    FRANCE, 

which  will  include  descriptions  of  all  the  leading  photographic  studios  and  factories  in  France,  are 
being  contributed  by  Mons   Ernest  Lacan,  Secretary  of  the  French  Photographic  Society. 
One  of  a  series  of  handsomely  illustrated  articles,  entitled 

VIEWS    ABROAD    AND    ACROSS, 

by  the  editor,  including  sketches  of  matters  and  things  photographic,  made  during  a  tour  in  Eng- 
land, Ireland,  Scotland,  France,  Belgium,  Prussia,  Austria,  Italy,  and  Switzerland,  will  be  in  each 
number  during  the  year  ;  a  continuation  of  the  articles  on  the  study  of  art ;  fresh  and  original 
papers  by  old  and  new  contributors,  &c,  &c. 

DURING    1874, 

No  photographic  artist  should  fail  to  subscribe  for  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHER. 
It  is  going  to  be  one  of  the  most. eventful  years  ever  known  in  the  art,  for 

TWO  GREAT  PATENT  CONTESTS, 

now  under  way — the  "Shaw"  patent  and  the  Sliding  Plate-holder  patent — both  of  vital  impor- 
tance to  the  craft,  will  take  place,  and  all  should  be  posted  on  them  as  they  proceed.  The  fullest 
and  earliest  information  will  be  given  in  this  Magazine. 

THE  PPvOCEEDINGS  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC  ASSOCIATION  are 
only  given  entire  in  one  number  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

THE    EMBELLISHMENTS    FOR    1874 

will  be  from  negatives  by  Messrs.  Luckhardt,  Marshall,  Sommer,  Robinson  &  Cherrill,  Kurtz, 
Jewell,  North,  Curtis,  Mottu,  and  others,  and  will  be  unusually  excellent  and  choice,  illustrating 
all  branches  of  photography,  and  introducing  very  useful  studies. 

THEY  ALONE  WILL  BE  WORTH  THE  COST  OF  SUBSCRIPTION, 

ILLUSTRATIONS,  by  means  of  engravings,  cuts,  &c,  will  be  profusely  employed,  and  every 
effort  made  to  secure  to  the  readers  of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer 

The  Most  Elegant  and  Useful  Photographic  Magazine  in  the  World! 

To  Employees,  Employees,  &c.  ;  Please  read  our  liberal  offer  of 

PREMIUMS  ON  THE  OPPOSITE  PAGE 


NOTICE   TO    SUBSCRIBERS. 

Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2  50  for  six  months,  50  cents  per  copy.     Positively  in  advance. 
In  remitting  by  mail  a  post-office  order,  or  draft  payable  to  the  order  of  Benerman  &  Wilson,  is 
preferable  to  bank  notes.     Clearly  give   your  Post-office,  County,  and  State. 

Canada  subscribers  must  remit  24  cents  extra,  to  prepay  postage.  Foreign  subscriptions  must  be 
accompanied  by  the  postage  in  addition. 

Advertising  sheets  are  bound  with  each  number  of  the  Magazine.  Advertisements  are  inserted 
at  the  following  rates : 

One  Month.  Six  Months.  One  Year. 

One  Page, $20  00    $110  00    $200  00 

Half    "      12  00     66  00     120  00 

Quarter  Page, 7  00     38  50    70  00 

Eighth        " 4  00     22  00     40  00 

Cards,  of  Six  lines  or  less, 2  00 1100    : . 20  00 

The  attention  of  advertisers,  and  those  having  galleries,  &c,  for  sale,  is  called  to  our  Specialties 
pages.  Terms  $2  for  six  lines,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a  line,  always 
in  advance.  Duplicate  insertions,  50  cents  less,  each.  Sure  to  pay.  Jpg^Operators  desiring  situa- 
tions, no  charge. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

OFFICE,  S.W.COB.OF  SEVENTH  AND  CHEEBY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


IT    WILL    PAY    TO    BUY    THE    BEST. 


ENTREKIN'S 

OSCILLATING  ENAMELER 


BURNISHING     i^^^g^^L  BEAUTIFUL 
FMO&BAFHS,  JBSjiBttL.  ^FINISH  &G-L0SS 


FAR   SUPERIOR  TO   ANYTHING   YET    INVENTED   FOR   THAT   PURPOSE. 

PBIOE    LIST: 

6  inch  Roll,  $25;  14  inch  Roll,  $45;  18  inch  Roll,  $75. 


EVERY    MACHINE    WARRANTED    PERFECT. 


Office  of  C.  M.  Parks,  Late  Principal  Examiner  in  the  Patent  Office, 
Washington,  December  12th,  1873. 
William  G.  Entrekin. 

Dear  Sir  :  I  am  familiar  with  the  class  of  machines  to  which  your  Photographic  Burnisher  relates, 
as  I  was  examiner  of  that  class  of  inventions  in  the  United  States  Patent  Office  for  some  time,  and  have 
had  occasion  to  keep  myself  posted  in  regard  to  them  since,  and  believe  your  Burnisher  is  the  very  best 
in.  existence,  embracing  all  the  features  necessary  to  make  a  complete  polished  surface  upon  a  photo- 
graph, and  also  believe  the  time  will  come  when  every  photographer  of  any  pretensions  will  be  com- 
pelled to  use  one.     I  predict  for  you  success  in  your  patent.  Yours  truly, 

C.  M.  Parks,  Solicitor  of  Patents. 

Office  of  C.  M.  Parks,  Solicitor  of  Patents,  428  Seventh  Street, 
Washington,  D.  C,  January  5th,  1874. 
Wm.  G.  Entrekin. 

Dear  Sir  :  Yours  is  just  received.  You  need  not  fear  any  trouble  from  any  parties  in  regard  to 
the  Weston  machine  ;  your  Burnisher  does  not  infringe  with  any  feature  of  the  Weston  machine  in 
the  least  particular.     You  can,  therefore,  manufacture  and  sell  your  machine  with  impunity. 

Yours  truly,  C.  M.  Parks. 


05^  WE 

All  photographers  not  to  be  frightened  out  of  purchasing  our  superior  '-Oscillating  Enameler  for 
Burnishing  Photographs."  We  simply  defy  any  party  or  parties  to  interfere  with  us  in  the  manufac 
ture  or  sale  of  said  machine,  for  which  we  hold  letters  patent  for  seventeen  years,  in  the  United  States 
and  Territories.  We  will  guarantee  protection  to  every  purchaser.  We  shall  sell  to  the  fraternity  a 
good  machine  at  a  fair  price.  Photographers  can  buy  direct  from  us,  if  they  cannot  procure  them  of 
their  dealers. 

D^"  Pay  no  attention   to  the    "CAUTIONS"    of  other  parties,  who  intimate  that  our  machine 
infringes  theirs.     Examine,  and  buy  the  best. 

W.  G.  ENTREKIN,  Patentee, 

4382  &  4384  Main  St.,  Manayunh,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


B®"  Address  ALL  Communications,  both  for  the  Editor  and  the  Publishers,  to  Sherman's 
Building,  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Number  124. 


50  Cents. 


THE 


PHILADELPHIA 


iwt00™im\ 


AN  ILLUSTRATED  MONTHLY  JOURNAL, 
DEVOTED  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


THE  OFFICIAL  OEGAN  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC 
ASSOCIATION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. 


April,    187  4. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

BENEKMAN    &     WILSON, 

PUBLISHEKS. 


Subscriptions  received  by  all  News  and  Stockdealers. 

FIVE  DOLLARS  PER  ANNUM,  IN  ADVANCE. 


Sherman  &  Co.,  Printers,  Philadelphia. 


THE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATEONS-Business  Bringers  at  all  times. 
Jd^sT"  See  Advertisements  inside. 


SUMMARY    OP    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

The  Mammoth  Offer 97 

The  Chicago  Exhibition 97 

The  World 97 

Burnt-iii  Enamels 97 

Our  Prize  Medal 97 

How  to  avoid  Unnecessary  Waste  of  Time  and  Silver. 

By  E.  Z.  Webster 98 

German  Correspondence.    By  Dr.  Vogel 99 

Hints  Under  the  Skylights.    By  R.  J.  Chute 102 

Art  Studies  for  All.    IX 103 

Something  About  Plain  Prints.    By  M.  C.  Edgeely,  104 

Wrinkles  and  Dodges 10G 

Photography  in  Italy.    By  A.  Montagna 108 


page 

Photography  in  France.    By  Ernest  Lacan 109 

Notes  In  and  Out  of  the  Studio.    By  G.  Wharton 

Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A ill 

Society  Gossip '. 113 

Matters  of  the  N.  P.  A 115 

Proceedings  of  Executive  Committee  of  the  N.  P.  A.,  116 
Views  Abroad  and  Across.    By  Edward  L.  Wilson,  116 

The  Mammoth  Offer  124 

How  to  Save  Time.    By  Mrs.  E.  N.  Lockwood 124 

Moulton's  Rapid  Print-washer 125 

Our  Picture 125 

Serious  Fire 126 

Editor's  Table .*. 127 


Embellishment.— Cabinet  Portrait. 


Negatives  by  Walter  C.  North,  Utica,  New  York. 
Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 


Prints  by  Wm.  H. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s  Paper. 

Anderson's  Photo-Comic  "  Allmyknack." 

Anderson,  J.  A.    Photographic  Apparatus. 

Anthony  &  Co.,  E.  &  H.  T.    The  Bowdish  Chair. 

Beard,  J.  P.  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials. 

Benerman  &  Wilson.    Lantern  Slides. 

Bierstadt,  Charles.    Photo.  Views. 

Bigelow's  Album  op  Lighting  and  Posing. 

Bullock  &  Crenshaw.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Chameleon  Barometer. 

Clemons,  Jno.  R.    Albumen  Paper.    Varnish. 

Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  A.  M.    Photograph  Cards. 

Cooper  &  Co.,  Chas.    Portrait  Lenses. 

Curtis,  G.  E.    Stereo.  Views. 

Dubernet,  L.    Passepartouts  and  Picture  Frames. 

Entrekin,  W.  G.    Oscillating  Enameler. 

French,  B.  &  Co.    Voigtlander  Lenses,  &c. 

Gihon,  John  L.    Opaque  and  Cut-Outs. 

Griswold's  Life  Compositions  for  the  Stereoscope. 

Hance's  Photo.  Specialties. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs. 

Jacoby,  W.  H.    Printing  Frame. 

Hale,  Kilburn  &  Co.    Frames. 

Karstens  &  Braun.    Albumen  Paper. 

Kilburn  Bros.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Kkell,  George.    Photo.  Furniture. 

Lewis,  R.  A.    Collodion. 

Liesegang,  E.    Albumen  Paper, 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 

Lcescher  &  Petsch.    A  New  Invoice  of  Studies. 

Marcy,  L.  J.    Sciopticon. 

Marion  &  Co.    Specialties. 

Magee,  James  F.  &  Co.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

McAllister,  W.  Mitchell.    Manufacturing  Optician. 

McCollin,  Thos.  H.    Photographic  Materials. 

Moore,  Albert.    Solar  Printing. 


Mosaics,  1873  and  1874. 
Moulton,  L.  V.    Rapid  Photo-Washer. 
National  Photographers'  Chemical  Co. 
Pattberg,  Lewis  &  Bro.    Passepartouts,  &c. 
Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 
Photographer's  Pocket  Reference-Book. 
Photographic  Publications. 
Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 
Powers  &  Weightman.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Premiums  for  1874,  for  New  Subscribers  to  "Philadel- 
phia Photographer." 
Rau,  Geo.    German  Albumen  Colors. 
Rice  &  Thompson.    Photo.  Stock  House. 
Robinson  &  Cherrill.    Burnt-in  Enamels. 
Robinson's  New  Photo.  Trimmer. 
Robinson's  Metallic  Guides. 
Rohaut  &  Hutinet.    Photographic  Mounts. 
Rotter,  Geo.  &  Co.    Albumen  Paper. 
Ryan,  D.  J.    Photo.  Stock  Depot,  Chromos,  &c. 
Sauter,  G.    Passepartouts. 
Schwarze  &  Valk.    Photo,  Papers. 
Scovill  Manf'g.  Co.    Photographic  Materials. 
Seavey  L.  W.    Scenic  Artist,  Backgrounds,  &c. 
Steinheil's  New  Aplanatic  Lenses. 
Stereograph  Book. 
Stevens,  Chas.  W.    Photographic  Goods. 
The  Skylight  and  the  Dark-Room. 
Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papers. 
Weller's  Stereoscopic  Treasures. 
Wilson,  Charles  A.    Photographic  Goods. 
Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials,  &c. 
Willy  Wallach.    Albumen  Paper. 
World,  Back  Volumes  of. 
Woodward,  D.  A.    Solar  Cameras. 
Zentmayer,  Joseph.    Lenses. 


>-> 

o 

r& 

d 

o> 

03 

3 

2s 

CC 

3 

£ 

o 

c 

O 
CD 

eu 

111 

O 
O 

o 

Q. 

<S 

A 

O 

-1 

CO 

CD 

o 

C 

0) 

III 

e~ 

3 
O 

03 

> 

o 

<N 

cS 

111 

h- 1 

O 

s 

O 

o 

O 

i-t* 

o> 

T"^ 

A 

tJ3 

•n 

a. 
"3 

o 
<1 

O 

c 

ID 

(- 

o 

■  FH 

o 

e 

s 

^ 

£ 

< 

o 

5 

El 


*»» 


ifcme  genuine  without  the  signature  of  the  manufacturer 
over  the  cork. 

ALFRED  L.  HANCE,  Philadelphia. 


THE  ABOVE  IS  A  F  AC -SIMILE  OF  THE  L4BLE  USED  ON 

HANCE'S   NEW  DOUBLE  IODIZED   COLLODION 


BE  SURE  YOU  TRY  IT. 


I  can  confidently  recommend  it  as  being  possessed 
of  very  superior  advantages  over  any  other  Collodion, 
but  not  desiring  to  say  too  -much  about  my  own  pro- 
ductions, respectfully  request  portrait  photographers 
to  try  it.  The  advantages  of  a  Collodion  made  with 
these  new  salts  is  spoken  of  by  several  leading  pho- 
tographers, as  follows  : 

"  Although  I  have  made  use,  extensively,  of  other  iodides,  I  have  never  found  any  collo- 
dion to  give  such  perfect  satisfaction  as  this  does  after  it  has  heconie  ripe.  *  *  *  Like  good 
wine,  it  improves  with  age." — J.  Carbutt. 

11  For  fineness  of  film,  exquisite  detail,  and  the  production  of  good  printing  qualities,  I 
have  never  seen  it  equalled." — K.  J.  Chute. 

ALFRED  L.  HANOE,  Manufacturer, 

126  North  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia. 


KIT  ARE  IIKE'S  PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES  ? 


HANCE'S  DOUBLE  IODIZED 

COLLODION.  This  is  made  by  com- 
pounding the  different  iodides  according  to 
their  equivalents,  and  producing  a  new  salt. 
It  is  being  used  by  some  of  the  best  photog- 
raphers, but  its  general  use  is  retarded,  no 
doubt,  by  the  extra  trouble  in  making  it. 
The  peculiarities  of  this  Collodion  are  good 
keeping  qualities,  its  improvement  by  age, 
and  the  richness  of  effect  produced  in  the 
negative,  the  film  being  perfectly  structure- 
less. As  it  requires  time  to  ripen,  I  have 
the  advantage  of  making  a  quantity  and 
keeping  it  always  ready  to  supply  any  de- 
mand. 

I  know  the  difficulties  many  labor  under 
of  making  a  collodion  to  suit  them,  and 
keep  it  in  good  condition  till  it  is  used  up, 
especially  where  a  large  business  is  not 
done ;  and  it  is  my  purpose  to  produce  some- 
thing that  will  suit  every  man's  case,  and 
by  helping  to  supply  the  best  materials, 
help  them  to  produce  the  best  work. 

ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  POR- 
TRAIT COLLODION  is  made  ac- 
cording to  the  formula  used  by  Mr.  Ander- 
son in  Mr.  Kurtz's  gallery  in  New  York. 
It  is  especially  adapted  to  portrait  work  ; 
and  the  wonderful  reputation  Mr.  Kurtz 
has  won,  together  with  the  honors  conferred 
on  Mr.  Anderson  as  his  assistant,  are  suffi- 
cient guarantee  of  its  excellence. 

HANCE'S  WHITE  MOUNTAIN 

COLLODION  is  adapted  more  especially 
to  outdoor  work,  and  for  quick  working, 
delineating  foliage,  frost-work,  or  sky, it 
stands  unrivalled.  It  is  made  after  the  for- 
mula used  by  that  celebrated  mountain 
artist,  B.  W.  Kilburn,  of  Littleton,  N.  H., 
whose  work  is  too  well  known  to  need  any 
comments. 

CURTIS'  NIAGARA  FALLS 
COLLODION  is  another  used  for  land- 
scapes. The  wonderfully  beautiful  views 
made  by  Mr.  Curtis,  of  the  great  cataract, 
with  this  collodion,  have  a  world-wide  repu- 
tation, and  are  an  indisputable  evidence 
that  he  could  have  nothing  better  to  pro- 
duce such  magnificent  work. 

HANCE'S  PECULIAR  POR- 
TRAIT COLLODION  is  peculiar  in 
that  it  is  prepared  without  bromides,  and  is 
adapted  for  use  with  Black's  acid  bath. 
To  those  using  the  acid  bath  this  collodion 
is  indispensable.    Formula  on  the  bottle. 


TRASK'S  FERROTYPE  COL- 
LODION is  made  especially  for  positive 
pictures.  Mr.  Trask  has  no  superior  in  this 
class  of  work,  and  this  collodion  is  the  result 
of  his  practice  and  experience  for  years  in 
proving  what  was  BEST.  It  is  made  after 
his  formula  and  ferrotypers  will  find  it  all 
that  can  be  desired. 

CUMMINGS'   GRIT  TARNISH 

gives  a  very  fine  surface  for  retouching. 
Those  that  use  a  varnish  of  this  kind  will 
find  that  this  has  no  superior.  By  it  the 
retouching  is  greatly  facilitated  and  the 
same  amount  of  work  on  a  negative  may 
be  done  with  it  in  half  the  time  that  would 
be  required  without  it. 

HANCE'S  SILVER  SPRAY 
GUN  COTTON  is  now  being  used  by 
many  of  the  best  photographers,  and  the 
testimonials  I  am  receiving  are  sufficient 
evidence  of  its  excellence.  1  prepare  it  with 
great  care,  and  warrant  it  free  from  acid, 
very  soluble,  gives  good  intensity  so  that 
no  redevelopment  is  necessary,  gives  perfect 
detail,  and  a  film  pure  and  structureless. 

HANCE'S  DELICATE  CREAM 
GUN  COTTON  is  adapted  to  those  who 
like  a  very  delicate,  soft-working  collodion, 
giving  all  the  modelling  especially  in  the 
Kembrandt  style,  and  with  light  drapery. 
Its  sensitiveness  renders  it  particularly 
adapted  for  children,  or  any  work  that  re- 
quires short  exposure. 

GILL'S  CONCENTRATED 
CHROMO  INTENSIFIER  is  in- 
tended to  strengthen  the  negative.  It  im- 
parts a  beautiful  tone  and  gives  excellent 
printing  qualities. 

HANCE'S  GROUND-GLASS 
SUBSTITUTE  is  simply  what  its  name 
implies,  a  substitute  for  ground-glass  for 
any  purpose  that  it  is  used  for  in  the  gallery. 
It  is  so  perfect  an  imitation  of  ground-glass 
that  it  can  only  be  distinguished  by  the 
closest  scrutiny.  Its  surface  is  so  fine  that 
it  is  just  the  thing  for  cameras,  and  it  is 
being  used  now  very  extensively  for  that 
purpose.  To  the  landscape  photographer 
a  bottle  of  it  is  indispensable.  If  he  breaks 
his  ground-glass,  which  often  happens  in  the 
field,  he  has  only  to  coat  a  plate,  such  as  he 
is  sure  to  have  with  him  for  negatives,  with 
the  substitute,  and  in  a  few  moments  his 
ground-glass  is  replaced  and  his  work  goes 
on.  It  is  equally  useful  in  the  printing 
room,  and  any  photographer  who  has  once 
used  it  will  never  again  be  without  it. 


HANCE'S 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES. 

ARE  SOLD  BY  ALL  DEALERS  AS  FOLLOWS  : 

Hance's  Double  Iodized  Colodion, 

Per  pound,  $1  50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Elbert  Anderson's  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Hance's  White  Mountain  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Curtis'  Niagara  Falls  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50. Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Hance's  Peculiar  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Trask's  Ferrotype  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Cummings'  Grit  Varnish, 

Per  Bottle, 40  Cts. 

Hance's  Silver  Spray  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Delicate  Cream  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, . 80  Cts. 

Gill's  Concentrated  Chromo  Intensifier, 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute, 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

TRADE  MARK :— THE  BEST  GOODS— FULL  MEASURE. 

TRY  HANCE'S  PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES. 

See  Testimonials  in  former  and  future  advertisements. 

SCOVILL  MFG  CO.,  Trade  Ag'ts.       ALFRED  L,  HANCE,  Manufac'r, 

NEW  YOKK.  126  &.  7th  St.,  Philadelphia. 


ROUND  GLAS 

SUBSTITUTE. 


The  SUBSTITUTE  is  in  the  form  of  a  varnish;  is  flowed  and  dried  the  same  as  varnieh, 
but  dries  with  a  granulated  or  ground-glass  surface. 

WHEREVER  GROUND  GLASS  IS  REQUIRED, 
HAJTCE'S  SUBSTITUTE  ANSWERS  EVERY  PURPOSE. 

FOE  GEOUND  GLASSES  FOE  CAMEEAS, 

FOR  GLAZING  SKY  AND  SIDE-LIGHTS, 

FOE  OBSCUEING  STUDIO  AND  OFFICE  DOOES, 
FOE  FEINTING  WEAK  NEGATIVES, 
FOE  VIGNETTE  GLASSES, 

FOE  A  EETOUCHING  VAENISH, 

FOE  SOFTENING  STEONG  NEGATIVES, 

FOE  THE  CELEBEATED  BERLIN  PROCESS. 

Use  the "  Substitute."        Use  the  "  Substitute." 

PRICE,  FIFTY  CENTS  PER  BOTTLE. 


LARGE  QUANTITIES  FOR  STUDIO  LIGHTS,  &c.,  SUPPLIED  LOW. 


EEAD  A  FEW  TESTIMONIALS: 

Youhgstown,  Ohio,  Jan.  27,  1873. 

The  bottle  of  Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute  came  safely  to  hand.    I  selected  a  good  piece  of  glass,  coated  it  with  the 

Substitute,  and  in  a  few  moments  I  had  one  of  the  finest  ground  glasses  I  ever  saw.    I  have  been  using  it  four  or  five  days, 

and  the  more  I  use  it  the  more  I  am  pleased  with  it.    The  "surface"  is  fine  and  delicate,  and  a  great  relief  to  the  eyes. 

I  would  not  be  without  a  bottle  for  ten  dollars.  Los  Blackbcbn,  Operator,  Le  Eoy's  Gallery. 

E.  Newell  k  Sow's  Galleby,  626  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia,  Feb.  17th,  1873. 
I  have  been  frequently  asked  to  recommend  some  new  article  or  preparation  used  in  our  business,  but  have  very  rarely  con- 
sented to  do  so  from  the  fact  that  many  things  that  "promise  very  fair,"  after  thorough  trial,  prove  worthless.  Having  used 
your  different  preparations  of  Collodions,  Intensifiers,  and  Varnish  for  the  past  six  months  in  my  gallery,  I  can  conscien- 
tiously pronounce  them  first-class  in  every  respect.  Your  Ground  Glass  Substitute  I  consider  one  of  the  most  practical  and 
useful  articles  I  have  ever  used,  and  no  photographer  who  has  learned  its  value  for  coating  the  backs  of  thin  negatives,  or 
making  ground  glass  for  the  camera  box,  would  ever  be  without  it.  I  have  found  so  many  ways  of  using  it  to  advantage 
that  I  shall  hereafter  order  it  by  the  gallon.  Yours  truly, 

R.  Newell 


Special  Premium  of  Six  Handsome  German 
Cabinet  Pictures  of  Ladies ! 

By  FRITZ  LUCKHARDT,  Vienna,  Austria. 

These  pictures  are  alone  worth  $3  for  the  set,  and  more  is  asked  for 
such  by  dealers. 


Given  to  any  one  who  will  sen!  ns  a  NEW  Sntoikr  for  tie  year  1874. 


What  Others  Think  of  the  Prizes: 


"These  studies  were  greatly  admired  by  the 
members  present,  and  all  were  convinced  that 
they  were  worthy  of  most  careful  study." — Min- 
utes of  the  Chicago  Photo.  Association. 

"These  pictures  were  examined  and  much  ad- 
mired by  all  present.'' — Indiana  Photo.  Ass'n. 

"The  pictures  elicited  general  praise;  the 
draperies  especially  were  very  favorably  com- 
mented upon.1' — German  Photographers'1  Socie- 
ty, New  York. 

"  The  prints  were  thought  to  be  worth  more 
than  the  price  which  was  charged  for  the  journal, 
i.e.,  $5  ;  and  the  President,  Mr. Black,  stated  that 
every  operator  should  have  a  set,  for  he  considered 
them  to  be  most  admirable  studies,  and  superior 
to  anything  which  he  had  seen  heretofore." — 
Boston  Photographic  Society. 


"  They  were  accepted  as  being  of  a  very  high 
standard.'' — Brooklyn  Photo.  Art  Association. 

"  The  high  artistic  merits  of  the  pictures,  and 
their  great  value  as  studies  for  the  progressive 
photographer,  were  conceded  by  all .  The  general 
harmony  in  the  details  of  each  print,  the  man- 
agement of  light,  and  beautiful  rendering  of 
texture  were  greatly  admired." — Photographic 
Section  of  the  American  Institute,  N.  Y. 

Special  votes  of  thanks  were  given  for  them 
by  the  Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia  ; 
Photographic  Association  of  West.  Illinois  ;  Chi- 
cago Photographic  Association  ;  Indiana,  District 
of  Columbia,  and  Maryland  Photographic  Asso- 
ciations ;  Photographic  Section  of  the  American 
Institute;  German  Photographers'  Society,  New 
York;  Boston  and  Brooklyn  Photographic  Art 
Associations,  whereat  they  attracted  great  atten- 
tion and  admiration. 


A  Few  Words  from  those  who  have  received  them  as  Premiums  for  New  Subscribers : 


"I  think  when  we  say  they  are  splendid  it  is 
only  a  mild  expression  of  what  they  will  bear." 
— E.  F.  Everett. 

"They  are  well  worth  striving  for,  and  the 
photographers  who  allow  this  set  to  remain  out- 


side their  collection  don't  deserve  them." — J. 
Pitcher  Spooner. 

"They  are  by  far  the  best  specimens  of  pho- 
tographs of  white  drapery  that  I  ever  saw,  and 
the  artistic  part  leaves  nothing  to  wish  for." — 
James  Paris. 


We  make  this  offer  as  a  matter  of  business,  and  not  as  favor  to  any  one 
on  either  side.  It  will  pay  you  to  give  a  year's  subscription  to  your  oper- 
ator or  to  your  friend  or  customer,  in  order  to  secure  these  pictures. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philada. 


The|55'Bowdish!S'Chair. 


1  If    " 


4H&  i ' 


ife^ 


Enabling  the  photographer  to  successfully  secure  every  variety  of  pose  with  facility  and  reliability. 
It  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  varying  necessities  of  female  portraiture,  and  is  equally  suited  for 
children,  for  vignettes,  or  for  full  lengths.  The  BOWDISH  CHAIR  is  substantial  in  construction, 
elegant  in  design,  and  rich  in  upholstery  and  finish.  Those  who  have  purchased  them,  speak  in  the 
highest  terms,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 

4  TESTIMONIALS:  $» 

+ + 

''About  ten  days  ago  I  received  the  new  chair  you  promised  to  send  me  when  I  saw  you  last,  and 
would  have  written  and  acknowledged  your  kind  favor  long  ago  if  1  had  correctly  known  your  ad- 
dress. Accept  my  best  thanks  for  this  really  beautiful  chair,  which  now,  after  ten  days'  trial,  has 
proved  to  be  a  decided  success  in  every  way.  It  has  become  the  real  favorite  for  posing  in  my  studio. 
Besides  this,  in  external  appearance  the  new  chair  appears  so  much  superior  in  finish,  and  is  at  the 
same  time  highly  ornamental,  and  the  head  rest  is  so  much  easier  handled  than  with  any  chair  I  have 
ever  seen  before.  In  short,  it  gives  the  sitter  the  greatest  possible  comfort  and  steadiness.  I  think 
the  chair  I  have  justly  deserves  the  name  of  'Perfect  Posing  Chair.'  " — H.  Rochee,  Chicago,  111., 
January  10,  1873. 

"  Since  receiving  your  posing  chair,  nearly  a  year  since,  I  have  had  it  in  constant  use,  and  am 
satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  posing  chair  in  the  market.  It  is  easily  worked,  and  is  so  well  made  that 
one  will  last  a  life  time,  and  then  be  a  valuable  heirloom. " — L.  G.  Bigblow. 

"The  Bowdish  Chair  came  in  good  order  and  gives  the  best  of  satisfaction.  Should  you  wish  a 
recommendation  for  it,  say  what  you  please  and  we  will  endorse  it.  You  cannot  praise  it  too  highly." 
— Slee  Bros.,  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  Sept.  10,  1872. 

"  Your  chair  has  arrived  at  last.  I  am  much  pleased  with  it.  1  don't  think  my  gallery  can  be 
complete  without  one  of  them.  Wishing  you  the  success  your  invention  merits,  I  am,  truly  yours, 
A.  Heslee." 

Prints  will  be  sent,  if  desired,  before  purchasing.     There  are  three  styles  kept  in  stock,  viz  : 

No.  2.   With  nickel-plated  rods  and  rest,  in  velveteen  or  reps  $60  00 

No.  4.        "  "  "  "  "  "    square  carved  legs, 70  00 

No.fi.       "  "  "  "     in  best  plush,  paneled 80  00 

Special  chairs  to  order. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO.,  Sole  Agents, 

591  Broadway ,  New  York. 


GIHON'S  CUT 


Are  the  very  best  that  are  made,  and  are  now  without  a  rival  in  the  market.  They  are  clean 
cut,  most  desirable  shapes  and  sizes,  and  made  of  non-actinic  paper,  manufactured  specially 
for  the  purpose.  Each  package  contains  30  Cut-Onts,  or  Masks,  with  corresponding  Insides, 
assorted  for  five  differently  sized  ovals  and  one  arch-top. 

PRICE,  $1.00  PER  PACKAGE.     Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

Parties  wishing  special  sizes,  or  large  lots  of  a  few  sizes,  may  have  them  cut  to  order 
promptly,  by  addressing  the  manufacturer.     No  lot  costing  less  than  $1.00  made  at  a  time. 

JD^P"  No  printer  should  attempt  to  make  medallion  pictures  without  them. 

THEY  HAVE  NO  EQUAL  FOR  QUALITY. 

Beware  of  spurious  imitations  made  of  common  paper,  full  of  holes,  badly  cut,  and  odd 
shapes  and  sizes.  Ask  your  stockdealer  for  GIHON'S  CUT-OUTS,  and  see  that  they  are 
in  his  envelopes  with  instruction  circular  included. 


IS    DESIGNED    FOR, 

COMPLETELY  OBSCURING  THE  IMPERFECT  BACKGROUNDS  OF  COPIES, 
RETOUCHING  NEGATIVES, 

FAULTY  SKIES  IN  LANDSCAPES, 

COATING  THE  INSIDE  OF  LENSES  OR  CAMERA  BOXES, 
BACKING  SOLAR  NEGATIVES, 

COVERING  VIGNETTING  BOARDS, 

AND    FOR  ANSWERING 

ALL  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  INTELLIGENT  PHOTOGRAPHER  IN  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  ARTISTIC  RESULTS  IN  PRINTING. 


WHEREVER  YOU  WANT  TO  KEEP  OUT  LIGHT,  USE  OPAQUE. 

It  is  applied  with  a  brush,  dries  quickly  and  sticks. 


OUT-OUTS  (thirty),  $1.00. 


OPAQUE,  50  CENTS. 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Address  all  orders  to 

JOHN  L.  CIHON,  Inventor, 

128  -2V.  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia,  JPa. 


ROBINSO  N"J3 

METALLIC 


fe=j 


Oval,  Round,  Elliptic  and  Square,  of  all  sizes ;  various  shapes  for  Stereoscopic 
work,  Drag  Labels,  Ac  Ac.  Regnlar  sizes  always  on  hand.  Special  Sizes  made 
to  order.  Price  for  regular  photo  sizes,  10  cents  per  inch  the  longest  way  of  the 
aperture.    Special  sizes,  15  cents  per  inch.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


BENER1M  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


HUNDREDS  EXPORTED  TO  ENGLAND  AND  GERMANY 


R  O  B  I  N  S  O  N'S 

JrHO  TOO"M  nFXi.     XKSmIjmER, 

IS  A  NECESSITY  AND  CONSIDERED  INVALUABLE. 
For  examples  of  its  work  we  refer  to  the  recent  and  present  pictures  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

IT  SAVES  TIME,  SAVES  PRINTS,  AND  SAVES  MONEY. 

The  accompanying  cut  represents  the  instru- 
ment in  the  act  of  trimming  a  photograph.  It 
does  not  cut,  hut  pinches  off  the  waste  paper,  and 
leaves  the  print  with  a  neatly  beveled  edge  which 
facilitates  the  adherence  of  the  print  to  the 
mount.  Try  one,  and  you  will  discard  the 
knife  and  punch  at  once. 


Oil  the  wheel  bearings  with  Sewing  Machine  Oil. 

A  Trimmer  Mailed  for  $3.50. 

The  difficulty  of  procuring  exactly  true  guides 
for  cutting  out  prints  has  induced  the  inventor 
to  put  up  machinery  for  the  production  of  all 
styles  of  them,  guaranteed  mathematically  true, 
and  to  be  known  as 

ROBINSON'S  IMPROVED  GUIDES. 

See  advertisement  on  opposite  page. 

A  full  stock  of  regular  sizes  now  on  hand. 
A  complete,  illustrated,  catalogue  and  price-list  will 
be  issued  soon. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"  For  cutting  ovals  I  think  the  Robinson  Trimmer 
is  perfect,  and  if  nobody  brings  them  out  in  England 
I  shall,  as  I  think  it  a  pity  such  a  good  thing  should 
not  be  introduced." — Walter  B.  Woodbury. 

"I  would  rather  give  fifty  dollars  than  be  without 
one.  By  its  use  all  annoyance  from  dull  knives  tear- 
ing the  prints  is  avoided,  and  it  is  a  pleasure  to  use 
it."— E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk. 

"  Robinson's  Photographic  Trimmer  is  an  excellent 
little  instrument.  It  does  the  work  intended  magnifi- 
cently. It  is  not  only  exquisite  for  trimming  photo- 
graphs, but  also  for  making  Cut-Outs  and  cutting  the 
sensitized  paper  to  any  needed  size,  using  for  the 
latter  purpose  a  guide  of  steel  in  form  of  a  ruler,  thus 
entirely  dispensing  with  the  knife." — Bern'd  Kihl- 
holz,  Chicago,  III. 

"I  like  the  Trimmer  very  much.  I  think  it  a  very 
useful  article.  It  works  well  and  does  all  it  is  recom- 
mended to  do." — F.  G.  Weller,  Littleton,  N.  H. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmers  have  come  to  hand,  and 
I  like  them  very  much  ;  they  are  just  what  I  wanted 
and  found  it  difficult  to  get." — J.  W.  Black,  Boston. 

"I  am  using  the  Robinson  Trimmer  and  consider 
it  the  best  article  for  trimming  photographs  I  ever 
saw." — W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"  It  does  its  work  magnificently.  The  only  wonder 
is,  that  it  was  not  invented  years  ago.  It  is  indis- 
pensable."— Garrett  Bros.,  Philadelphia. 

"  I  think  the  Robinson  Photographic  Trimmer  is 
the  best  thing  ever  put  upon  the  market  for  photo- 
graphic use.  It  is  cheap  and  does  its  work  perfect.  I 
now  make  with  it  all  the  cut-outs  I  use,  and  also  cut 
out  all  my  photographs  from  eleven  by  fourteen 
down  to  cards.  It  only  cost  me  four  dollars  and  I 
would  not  be  without  it  for  the  best  twenty-five  dol- 
lar cutting  machine  I  ever  saw." — D.  Lothrop,  Phila. 


"  The  Trimmer  comes  up  to  all  you  claim  for  it.  I 
would  not  be  without  it." — T.  Cummings,  Lancaster. 

"Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  is  all  that  it  is 
claimed  to  be.  I  have  trimmed  all  my  prints  with  it 
from  the  day  I  received  it,  in  less  than  half  the  time 
taken  by  a  knife.  It  does  its  work  with  mathematical 
correctness  and  uniformity.  I  would  not  be  without 
it  for  ten  times  its  cost.  It  cannot  be  recommended 
too  highly." — W.  H.  Cranston,  Corry,  Pa. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmer  has  proved  to  us  one  of 
the  most  usefully  instruments  that  we  have  in  our 
gallery.  In  the  few  months  that  we  have  owned  it  we 
cut  some  10,000  photographs  with  it,  which  were  cut 
in  one-fourth  the  time,  and  cut  better  than  any  other 
instrument  could  do  it." — Schreiber  &  Sons,  Phila. 

"  It  does  the  work  quick,  sure,  and  perfect.  We 
would  not  be  without  it.  It  is  simply  what  it  is  rep- 
resented to  be."— B.  Frank  Saylor  &  Co.,  Lancaster. 
"The  Photograph  Trimmer  is  a  good  and  quick  work- 
ing thing.  I  do  not  want  any  thing  better  and  more 
useful  in  the  gallery  for  that  purpose.  I  would  not 
be  without  one." — A.  M.  Bachman,  Allenlovm,  Pa. 

"  I  have  used  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  some 
time.  A  lady  was  asked  how  she  liked  her  sewing 
machine,  and  in  reply  said  '  Well  I  could  get  along 
without  it,  but  when  I  do  I  shall  not  sew  any  more.' 
That  is  me,  I  can  get  along  without  the  Trimmer  but 
when  I  do  I  shall  not  trim  photographs." — Well  G. 
Singhi,  Binghamlon,  N.  Y. 

"  It  gives  perfect  satisfaction,  being  the  best  thing 
of  the  kind  I  have  ever  used.  There  is  nothing 
amongst  my  photographic  stock  more  useful." — M.  P. 
Rice,  Washington,  D.  C. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmer  works  admirably.  Does 
the  work  intended  with  great  satisfaction." — A.  K.  P. 
Trask,  Philadelphia. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 
FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS.  PHILADELPHIA,  PA 


SOUTHERN  PHOTOGRAPHERS 

Buy  your  Goods  in  Baltimore  at  the 

POP"'"-  Stock  Depot. 

PWK  A  WTKflHTNo7NCharlesSt> 

bHillJ.  il.  If  llluUll,     BALTIMORE, 

Invites  those  desiring  low  prices,  good  goods,  and  promptness  to  send  him  their  orders. 

VOIGTLANDER'S  CAMERA  TUBES  AND  LENSES, 

C.  C.  HARRISON'S  PORTRAIT  AND  GLOBE  LENSES, 

AMERICAN  OPTICAL  COMPANY'S  APPARATUS. 

All  popular  brands  of  ALBUMENIZED  PAPER,  both  heavy  and  light,  and  guaranteed  to  produce 
uniformly  the  most  perfect  results. 

DEALER  IN  ALL  MATERIALS  USED  FOR 

POKCELAIN  PICTUKES,  INCLUDING  POKCELAIN  GLASS,  PLAIN  and  GROUND 

OF  ALL  SIZES,  THE  BEST  IN  MARKET.     A  SPLENDID  ASSORTMENT  OF 


Black  Walnut,  Rosewood,  ^ji  ^f^^      fwL      "^fm^H    ^ks^  <€25   'For  P°rcelain  Pictures 
Gilt,  and  Rustic  rJftT      ^|   db|»&  3BtfU«  [BBBfl  J59       and  Photographs. 


Sill,  Cotton  Velvet,  anfl  Velvet  Edp  Passepartouts  for  Porcelain  Rote. 
GENUINE  B.  P.  C.  GLASS. 

PORCELAIN  WARE  BATHS, 

DIPPERS  AND  TRA  YS. 

A  FULL  ASSORTMENT  OF 

CASES,  FRAMES,  GLASS,  APPARATUS,   ROLLER  PRESSES, 

BACKGROUNDS,  PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHAIRS  AND  LOUNGES, 

AND  CHEMICALS  OF  THE  PUREST  MANUFACTURE,  Ac,  Ac, 

With  whatever  else  is  requisite  for  the  pursuit  of  Photography,  supplied  at  the  shortest  notice,  and 
on  the  most  favorable  terms. 

The  attention  of  Photographers  throughout  the  United  States  is  respectfully  invited  to  the  advan- 
tages offered  of  a  superior  quality  of  materials,  and  extensive  facilities  for  the  execution  of  orders, 
which  are  respectfully  solicited.  Orders  filled  with  care  and  despatch,  and  sent,  if  desired,  with  bill 
for  collection  by  Express,  to  any  part  of  the  United  States. 

Address 

CHAS.  A.  WILSON, 

No.  7  North  Charles  St.,  Baltimore. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO. 

HAVE    BEEN    APPOINTED    AGENTS    FOR    THE    HALE    OF 

Entrekirtfs  Oscillating  Enameler* 


Each  press  is  supplied  with  Gas  Burner  or  Alcohol  Lamp  (as  the  purchaser  prefers),  an 
Oil-Stone,  for  polishing  the  Burnisher,  and  one  jar  of  Entrekin's  Lubricator. 

PRICES   AS   FOLLOWS: 

6  inch,  $28 14  inch,  $45 18  inch,  $75. 

EXTRA  JARS  OF  THE  LUBRICATOR  ONE  DOLLAR. 

WE   ARE   ALSO   AGENTS   FOR 

Julius  Kruger's  Patent  Cement  Water  Colors 

FOR    COLORING    PHOTOGRAPHS    ON    ALBUMEN    OR    PLAIN   PAPERS. 

PRICES: 

Box  of  6  Cakes,  $2.25.-12  Cakes,  $4.25.-18  Cakes,  $6.50. 

W.A.IR.IR^ICq'TIEID    VEBT    ZFinSTlE. 
We  have  also  an  extra  fine  lot  of 

Parys'  Negative  Gun  Cotton,         **<*,** ounce,  $0.50 
Liesgang's  Papyroxyline,  "        "       1.25 

French  Aniline  Colors,  "  perbox>      5.00 

FULL  STOCK  OF 

MONOGRAM  COLLODIONS,  VARNISHES  and  COTTONS, 
WILSON'S  HEAD  RESTS,  TABLES,  CHAIRS,  VASES,  COLUMNS,  &C. 

Price  Lists  gratis  on  application. 

SALESEOOMS,  822  ARCH  STEEET,  PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


MOULTON'S 


RAPID  PHOTO-WASHER. 


Kl 

S 

*-1 

Rh 

u 

5 

fci 

'< 

H 

Pi 

Ri 

fee 
fen 


fa 

fee 


b 


Patented  August  12th,  1873. 


Instead  of  soaking  the  Prints  it  applies  the  water  in  the  form  of  spray,  with  considerable 

force,  to  both  sides  of  the  paper  at  each  revolution,  or  from  one  hundred 

to  one-hundred-fifty  times  per  minute. 

Washes  with  exact  uniformity,  and  gives  more  brilliant  and  permanent  work ; 
is  simple,  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order,  and  will  last  a  life-time. 


Size  Cylinder, 

Capacity  in  Cards. 

Diam.  16in.  Length  14  l-2in. 

84 

"     20        "       19 

144 

"     25        "       24 

220 

Largest  Print. 


Price. 


Larger  sizes  may  follow. 


14  by  17  ins.  $30 

18  by  22  "  40 

22  by  28  "  50 

discounts  to  dealers  and  agents. 


"  I  write  to  testify  to  the  satisfaction  I  feel  with  the  working  of  your  Rapid  Print  Washer.  It  is  simply  per- 
fection, as  far  as  my  experience  with  it  goes,  viz  :  One  year's  constant  use.  I  have  washed  eight  dozen  cartes  in 
ten  minutes,  and  the  most  accurate  test  I  know  of,  starch  and  iodine,  failed  to  show  a  trace  of  hypo,  remain- 
ing'.'— L.  G.  Bigelow,  Detroit,  Mich.,  Feb.  10th,  1874. 

"Time  saved  is  money  earned."  The  above  maxim  is  as  true  in  the  photographic  business  as  in  any  otter, 
and  in  this  connection  I  would  say,  that  Moulton's  Rapid  Photo-Washer  will  save  more  time  in  any  weW-regu- 
lated  gallery,  than  any  mechanism  ever  yet  invented;  besides  the  prints  finish  with  a  finer  lustre  than  those 
washed  by  any  other  device  I  have  ever  yet  seen.  Having  used  one  for  the  past  two  months,  washing  from  100 
to  300  prints  "dailv,  I  am  pleased  to  add  my  testimonial  to  its  excllence." — Wm.  M.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 
March  11th,  1874.  

ANALYSIS    OF    PRINTS. 

"After  analyzing  the  prints  which  were  washed  by  you  during  ten  minutes,  in  your  Rapid  Photo- Washer, 
and  those  furnished  by  an  artist  of  this  city,  washed  in  a  syphon  tank  in  running  water  for  one  hour  and  left  in 
the  water  over  night,  for  the  quantity  of  hyposulphites  left  therein,  I  take  pleasure  in  stating  that  the  prints 
treated  in  the  Rapid  Photo-Washer  contain  perceptibly  less  hyposulphites  than  those  washed  in  the  other  man- 
ner described." — Gustavus  Bode,  Analytical  Chemist,  and  Dealer  in  Photographic  Stock,  Milwaukee,  Feb.  21, 1874. 


L.  V.  MOULTON,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis. 


.... 


W.    C.     NORTH, 


UTICft,    N.     Y. 


THE 


Itihulelpta  ^hfitf>§xi\y\m. 


Vol.  XL  APRIL,  1874. 

Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1874, 

By  BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


No.  124. 


THE  MAMMOTH  OFFER. 

The  progress  that  is  made  in  this  affair  is 
a  matter  of  astonishment  to  us.  Scarcely 
had  a  week  of  the  life  of  our  last  number 
passed  before  the  demand  for  tickets  began, 
some  parties  not  only  wanting  one  ticket, 
but  three  and  five.  "We  hope  to  announce 
in  our  next  that  the  tickets  are  all  gone.  A 
more  minute  description  of  the  box  and  lens 
are  given  further  on,  and  we  congratulate 
in  advance  the  lucky  one  who  secures  the 
splendid  prize. 


THE  CHICAGO  EXHIBITION. 

Our  readers  are  referred  to  the  action  of 
the  Executive  Committee  on  this  subject 
further  on.  At  one  time  we  feared  that 
there  would  be  no  exhibition,  and  that  the 
National  Photographic  Association  must 
cease  to  exist.  We  rejoice  that  it  is  other- 
wise. We  hope  that  all  will  take  hearty 
interest  in  it  now,  and  go  to  Chicago  with 
their  finest  work.  Let  it  be  tb;e  very  best  of 
all  exhibitions  and  conventions.  We  have 
some  suggestions  to  make  which  we  will 
withhold  until  next  month,  for  fear  of  sup- 
planting the  Executive  Committee  who,  at 
this  writing,  have  not  yet  met. 


THE  WORLD. 

Our  offer  to  send  free  copies  of  the  World 
terminated  March  ISth.   Thousands  of  copies 


have  been  sent  to  our  readers  gratis,  but  we 
have  no  more  to  give  away.  We  now  offer 
what  are  left  to  fill  up  broken  volumes,  or 
we  can  supply  full  volumes  at  tiventy-five 
cents  per  copy,  for  one  month  only.  Please- 
read  the  advertisement. 


BURNT-IN  ENAMELS. 

The  attention  of  those  who  may  have- 
overlooked  this  matter  in  our  last  issue  is 
directed  to  the  article  and  advertisement  on 
this  subject  given  therein. 

OUR  PRIZE  MEDAL. 

April  15th  is  the  limit,  with  the  usual 
three  days  of  grace,  given  for  the  reception 
of  negatives  in  competition  for  the  hand- 
some gold  medal  offered  by  us,  and  the  con- 
ditions are  as  follows : 

1.  The  offer  is  for  the  best  three  portrait 
negatives  received  by  us  within  the  time- 
named. 

•2.  A»print  from  each  negative  is  also  re- 
quired, and  the  whole,  carefully  packed, 
must  be  sent,  express  paid,  to  this  office. 

3.  The  negatives  are  preferred  all  of  one 
subject,  so  as  to  prove  that  if  a  man  can 
make  a  good  thing  once  he  can  do  it  again. 

4.  The  negatives  will  not  be  thrown  out 
if  the  subjects  differ,  provided  their  average- 
quality  is  the  same. 

5.  A  print  of  each  subject  will  be  sent  to 


98 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


every  one  competing  gratis,  providing  none 
of  the  pictures  are  so  bad  as  to  lead  the 
judges  to  suspect  that  the  negatives  are 
merely  sent  to  secure  the  set  of  prints. 

6.  The  mounts  on  which  the  prints  are 
placed  should  be  without  names,  but  a  slip 
of  paper  should  be  placed  with  the  prints  or 
negatives,  containing  the  name  of  the  maker. 

7.  The  negatives  and  prints  will  be  sub- 
mitted to  the  jurors  (none  of  whom  will 
compete)  without  the  names,  but  numbered, 
so  that  the  jury  will  not  know  at  the  time 
to  whom  they  make  the  award. 

8.  After  the  award  is  made,  each  competi- 
tor shall  be  promptly  notified,  and  the  set 
of  prints  sent  as  soon  as  they  can  be  printed. 

9.  There  will  be  no  public  criticism  of  the 
pictures,  or  comparisons  made. 

10.  Retouching  and  all  other  legitimate 
means  will  be  allowed. 

The  competition  will  be  fierce.  Do  your 
best. 

How  to  avoid  Unnecessary  Waste  of 
Time  and  Silver. 

BY    E.    Z.    WEBSTER. 

Doubtless  the  following  will  strike  some 
of  my  brother  photographers  as  an  unnec- 
essary waste  of  words;  but  the  result  of 
twenty-seven  years'  experience  in  the  busi- 
ness, has  satisfied  me  that  not  one  photog- 
rapher in  fifty  makes  a  systematic  and 
economical  use  of  his  silver  and  gold ;  I 
must  include  not  only  "  greenbacks,"  &c, 
but  time,  which  is  money.  A  properly 
graduated  scale  would  place  time  high  above 
all  other  treasures,  and  still  it  is  more  lav- 
ishly wasted.  No  ambitious  photographer 
can  afford  to  waste  his  time,  and  certainly 
no  real  devotee  of  our  beautiful  art  ever 
need  waste  a  moment.  Ever}'  hour  of  day- 
light is  pure  gold,  and  should  be  devoted  to 
those  purposes,  which  can  only  be  success- 
fully prosecuted  by  day,  leaving  until  night 
those  things  which  can  just  as  well  be  at- 
tended to  at  that  time  (of  course  I  am  ad- 
dressing the  ambitious,  and  the  devotee). 
If  you  are  an  old  veteran  my  advice  is  un- 
necessary, but  those  who  have  a  name  to 
make  will  please  take  heed. 

If  you  do  not  know  how  to  fill  in  your 
day  because  the  weather  is  unsuitable  for 
sitters  or  chemical   practice,  just  refer  to 


page  41  of  the  Photographic  Mosaics  for 
1873,  and  read  the  article  "What  to  Do 
and  When  to  Doit;"  and  when  night  comes 
sit  down  and  copy  it  in  "  loud  "  letters,  and 
nail  it  up  in  your  gallery  where  you  and 
your  assistants  can  always  see  it  and  heed  it. 

"  But  what  can  be  done  at  night?"  Why, 
many  things  can  be  done  by  lamplight 
which  will  economize  your  daylight.  If 
you  are  master  of  every  branch  of  your 
business  you  will  find  enough  to  do,  and  if 
not  master  you  will  find  enough  to  do  as 
pupil.  Study,  study,  study;  read  every- 
thing pertaining  to  your  business;  think  it 
all  over;  cull  out  a  word  here  an  idea  there, 
and  put  into  practice  every  useful  hint  and 
available  suggestion.  On  my  sitting-room 
table  lie  the  Philadelphia  Photographer, 
Skylight  and  Dark-Boom,  Mosaics,  Photo- 
graphic Bulletin,  The  Photographic  Chdde, 
The  British  Journal,  and  Photographic  News, 
Almanacs,  &c,  &c. ;  and  I  keep  them  there 
constantly,  and  have  read  every  word  in  all 
of  them  carefully.  I  have  gleaned,  culled, 
and  "precipitated  "  their  contents,  and  when 
an  article  comes  under  my  eye  which  I  wish 
to  study  up  or  to  carry  into  practice,  or 
which  I  think  might  be  made  available,  I 
make  a  memorandum  in  a  little  diary  so 
that  I  can  find  the  desired  article  with- 
out difficulty.  And,  notwithstanding  my 
many  years  of  experience  I  find  so  much 
which  is  new  to  me,  and  so  much  that  is 
useful,  that  I  can  but  wonder  how  any  pho- 
tographer can  possibly  succeed  who  neglects 
his  printed  opportunities.  Of  course,  there 
is  great  diversity  of  opinion  in  regard  to 
the  various  processes;  one  writer  advocates 
one  plan  or  formula,  and  another  writer 
condemns  that  and  recommends  another, 
which  is  diametrically  opposed,  and  still 
each  seems  to  produce  successful  results  in 
the  hands  of  those  who  can  work  it ;  but  no 
one  can  succeed  who  tries  to  follow  all  the 
paths.  He  must  take  some  one  which  he 
has  confidence  in  and  follow  it  up  and  make 
that  his  general  plan,  and  then  work,  study, 
think,  and  press  into  service  every  available 
hint,  suggestion,  and  idea  which  can  be  ob- 
tained. 

You  may  be  wondering  what  all  this  has 
to  do  with  "avoiding  unnecessary  waste  of 
silver."     Why,   my  friend,  it  has   every- 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PIIOTOGEAPHER. 


99 


thing  to  do  with  it.  The  waste  of  time  and 
opportunities  is  more  important  than  all 
other  waste  put  together,  and  any  one  who 
does  not  economize  in  all  things  does  not 
economize  at  all;  and  here  let  me  explain 
by  saying  that  true  economy  sometimes 
seems  an  absolute  waste,  but  the  final  result 
must  always  be  considered,  and  if  the  object 
gained  is  worth  all  the  labor,  time,  and 
treasure  which  has  been  expended,  well  and 
good  ;  but  if  the  same  object  might  have 
been  attained  at  a  less  cost  of  time  and 
treasure,  by  a  more  judicious  expenditure 
of  either,  then  there  was  a  lack  of  economy. 
Many  photographers  are  deluded  with  the 
idea  that  a  "  silver-saving  apparatus  "  would 
insure  their  everlasting  salvation  pecuni- 
arily, and  because  they  are  told  that  nearly 
all  the  silver  used  in  their  business  can  be 
recovered  the  utmost  carelessness  is  prac- 
ticed, consequently  from  fifteen  to  thirty 
per  cent,  more  silver  is  wasted  than  is  nec- 
essary, and  the  unnecessary  waste  is  greater 
than  the  clear  saving  of  any  "silver-saving 
process "  in  use.  Of  course,  no  one  can 
deny  the  propriety  of  saving  all  the  silver 
which  can  be  saved  economically,  but  it  re- 
quires more  judgment  to  determine  when, 
where,  and  how  to  save  silver,  than  it  does 
to  run  a  steamboat,  because  the  relative 
value  of  time  and  silver  is  constantly  and 
sometimes  momentarily  transposed,  and 
when  a  man  gets  silver  saving  on  the  brain, 
he  will  follow  up  and  corner  the  last  drop, 
and  ferret  out  and  bag  the  smallest  scrap, 
even  though  he  may  have  a  sitter  in  the 
chair  and  a  dozen  more  waiting. 

Suppose  you  could  save  seventy-five  per 
cent,  of  the  silver  used,  if  you  will  count 
the  cost  of  time  and  trouble  expended  in 
saving  so  high  a  percentage,  and  then  de- 
duct the  unnecessary  waste  which  you  made 
thinking  it  could  "  'most  all  be  recovered,'' 
then  deduct  that  twenty-five  per  cent,  for 
refining,  allowing  the  refiner  to  do  the 
figuring,  and  when  you  get  through  you 
will  find  the  silver  you  have  saved  has  cost 
you  about  one  hundred  dollars  per  pound. 

Further,  I  claim  that  the  term  "  waste 
or  spent  solutions''  is  a  misnomer,  and 
does  not  apply  to  any  solution  containing 
any  substance  which  we  wish  to  retain  or 
reconvert  to  the  same  or  any  other  purpose. 


When  the  silver  has  been  precipitated  from 
hypo,  cyanide,  or  any  other  solution,  the 
remaining  solution  may  be  "  waste  or  spent," 
provided  we  have  no  other  use  for  it. 

The  same  remark  holds  good  in  regard  to 
the  chlorides,  sulphurets,  &c.  When  the 
silver  has  been  extracted  therefrom  the  resi- 
dues or  refuse  constitute  waste,  and  nothing 
else. 

Finally,  I  claim  that  the  most  economical 
way  to  save  silver  is  not  to  waste  it  unnec- 
essarily, and  in  my  next  paper  I  shall  point 
out  some  of  the  holes  through  which  silver 
escapes,  and  will  endeavor  to  suggest  a  par- 
tial remedy. 

(To  be  continued.) 


GERMAN  CORRESPONDENCE. 

New  and  Successful  Method  of  Reproducing 
Negatives — Chloride,  Bromide,  and  Iodide  of 
Silver  in  Wet  and  Dry  Plates — On  Differ- 
ence in  the  Sensitiveness  of  Collodion  Film. 
To-day  I  have  to  report  some  news  of 
great  importance,  which  is  of  interest  not 
only  to  Germany  but  for  the  whole  photo- 
graphic fraternity.  It  is  a  method  of  repro- 
ducing negatives.  You  will  say.  this  is 
nothing  new.  That  maybe.  We  have  had 
reproduced  negatives  for  a  long  time,  and 
when  we  read  the  reports  of  the  papers  we 
are  led  to  believe  that  the  matter  is  very 
easy,  but  if  we  ourselves  try  it,  practically, 
we  may  get  a  tolerably  good  negative, 
but  it  does  not  bear  comparison  with  the 
original,  either  in  softness,  half-tone,  or 
harmony.  If  from  a  negative  a  positive 
is  made  by  the  camera,  or  by  Edward's 
albumen  plates,  a  part  of  the  fineness  is 
generally  sacrificed,  or  if  everything  comes 
out  sharp  and  clear  the  positive  will  not  have 
the  same  proportions  of  light  and  shade  as 
the  negative,  and  this  deviation  will  in- 
crease when  we  take  a  negative  from  the 
reproduced  positive;  in  fact,  in  most  cases 
the  negative  so  obtained  cannot  stand  com- 
parison with  the  original.  The  want  of  an 
easy  method  of  reproducing  negatives  is  felt 
the  more  as  our  negatives  are  the  most  fra- 
gile part  of  the  photographic  household,  and 
if  one  breaks  it  is,  in  most  cases,  not  the 
worst,  but  one  of  the  best  and  finest. 

It  is  with  pain  that  I  think  of  some  broken 
plates,  from  Aden,  Egypt,  and  the  summits 


100 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


of  the  Carpathian  Mountains,  which  unfor- 
tunately can  never  be  replaced.  Under  all 
these  circumstances,  judge  of  my  surprise  on 
receiving,  about  two  weeks  ago,  a  box  from 
Mr.  Obernetter,  in  Munich,  containing  a 
number  of  original  negatives,  and  also  re- 
productions of  the  same.  The  reproductions 
were  of  a  peculiar  blackish-gray  color,  and 
at  first  sight  tbe  copies  appeared  thinner 
than  the  originals.  At  first  I  had  my 
doubts,  but  I  soon  found  out  that  prints 
made  from  the  copies  did  not  vary  from 
those  taken  from  the  originals.  Generally, 
the  prints  from  the  reproduced  negative  are 
more  brilliant;  they  showed  deeper  shadows 
and  brighter  lights.  But  this  rather  ap- 
peared to  be  an  advantage.  In  regard  to 
clearness,  purity,  and  softness  they  left  noth- 
ing to  be  desired.  Obernetter  has  handed 
his  process  to  the  Vienna  Photographic 
Societ}'  and  received  the  gold  medal  for  it. 
The  process  in  itself  is  not  new,  but  in  its 
execution  it  varies  from  all  the  other  meth- 
ods. Obernetter  does  not  require  a  diaposi- 
tive  to  make  a  negative,  but  he  simply  ob- 
tains the  negative  direct,  and  in  one  opera- 
tion, by  the  so-called  dust  process.  This 
process,  which  heretofore  has  only  been 
used  for  making  burned-in  photographs, 
consists  in  the  employment  of  a  film  of  gum 
ambic,  which  is  sensitized  with  chromate  of 
potash.  Such  a  film  is  slightly  sticky,  so 
much  so  that  a  pigment  powder  will  adhere 
to  it.  This  stickiness  is  lost  by  exposure  to 
light.  If  such  a  plate  is  exposed  to  the  light 
which  passes  through  a  negative,  those 
places  only  will  remain  sticky  which  are 
covered  by  the  dense  parts  of  the  negative, 
while  the  others  lose  it.  If  the  plate,  after 
having  been  exposed,  is  dusted  over  with  a 
powder,  the  latter  will  only  adhere  to  those 
parts  which  were  covered  by  the  dense  parts 
of  the  negative.  We  obtain  in  this  manner, 
by  a  single  operation,  a  negative.  Ober- 
netter has  not  published  his  results  as  yet, 
but  they  will  be  printed  very  soon.  In  the 
meantime  I  myself  have  made  experiments 
in  this  direction.  I  coated  a  glass  plate 
with  the  following  solution  : 

Gum  Arabic,                  .         .6  parts. 
Chromate  of  Potash,     .         .  2.5     " 
Grape  Sugar,         .         .         .      4     " 
Water 72     " 


The  film  is  dried  in  the  dark  at  a  tempera- 
ture of  about  90°  to  100°  Fahrenheit.  I 
placed  a  negative  plate  on  the  film  and  ex- 
posed with  the  photometer  to  15  degrees.  On 
the  plate  there  appears  afeebleimage.  When 
the  film  had  been  exposed  for  a  short  time, 
to  a  damp  atmosphere,  I  dusted  English  red 
over  it,  and  obtained  in  fact  a  negative. 
The  dusting  has  to  be  repeated  several  times, 
and  the  excess  of  color  has  to  be  removed 
with  a  soft  brush.  The  negative  which  is 
obtained  in  this  manner  is  reversed  in  posi- 
tion when  compared  with  the  original. 
When  we  wish  to  have  it  in  the  same  posi- 
tion as  the  original  we  have  to  lift  the  film. 
For  this  purpose  plain  collodion  is  poured 
over  it,  and  the  plate  is  placed  in  acidulated 
water  (1  part  of  sulphuric  acid,  100  water)  ; 
this  removes  the  film  with  the  picture.  The 
film,  after  being  washed,  is  placed  in  the 
correct  position  on  a  plate  of  glass.  It  seems 
as  if,  in  this  way  only,  perfectly  plain  sur- 
faces would  be  covered  with  the  negative 
film;  this,  however,  is  not  the  case,  for 
Obernetter  copies  curved  negatives  also,  by 
placing  a  gum-gelatin  film  on  mica. 

Astonishment  has  frequently  been  ex- 
pressed that  Obernetter  is  able  to  make  light 
prints  from  ordinary  negatives,  which  are 
not  reversed  in  position.  Now  the  secret  is 
out.  Obernetter  makes  by  the  above-men- 
tioned process  a  reversed  negative,  and 
makes  from  it  the  light  print.  He  has 
practiced  this  process  for  years,  and  writes 
himself:  "  Two-thirds  of  all  the  work  done 
at  my  atelier  I  would  have  been  unable  to 
make  if  I  had  not  had  this  process;  begin- 
ning with  the  war  pictures  of  1870  to  the 
pictures  of  the  Vienna  Exposition  in  1873." 
Kecently  Obernetter  has  reproduced  plates 
of  sixty  centimetres  in  size.  He  reproduces 
also  negatives  for  the  profession, and  charges, 
for  instance,  for  a  stereoscope  negative  $2 
in  currency.  In  three  or  four  weeks  I  ex- 
pect to  receive  the  full  particulars  of  this 
process,  when  I  will  communicate  further 
details  to  you. 

In  the  meantime  I  have  continued  my 
experiments  in  spectral  analysis,  and  have 
made  very  curious  observations,  which  will 
very  materially  modify  all  our  former  ideas 
about  the  sensitiveness  of  the  photographic 
film.     Heretofore  experiments  have  gener- 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


101 


ally  been  made  with  wet  plates;  for  in- 
stance, most  of  the  photographic  spectral 
experiments  were  made  with  wet  plates, 
and  the  results  have  rather  rashly  been  ap- 
plied to  dry  plates  also;  this  has  led  to 
many  errors.  The  behavior  of  the  photo- 
graphic film,  in  relation  to  color,  becomes 
completely  changed  when  we  wash  and 
dry  it. 

According  to  the  experiments  of  Schultz- 
Sellack,  wet  chloride  of  silver  (under  nitrate 
of  silver)  is  sensitive  only  to  the  extreme 
violet  rays,  near  the  line   H   (see  Figure), 


A    BC 


E  6 


while  the  other  visible  colors  exert  hardly 
any  influence.  The  dry  chloride  of  silver, 
according  to  my  experiments,  behaves  quite 
different;  it  is  about  two  and  a  half  times  less 
sensitive  than  bromide  of  silver,  but  with  a 
sufficient  exposure  it  is  affected  by  almost  all 
thecolors  of  the  spectrum.  With  chloride  of 
silver  1  obtained  a  picture  of  the  spectrum 
which  extended  to  the  line  B,  in  red  (see 
Figure).  The  effect  on  bromide  of  silver 
is  also  modified  by  the  state  in  which  it  is 
submitted  to  the  light,  whether  dry  or  wet, 
as  I  have  mentioned  already  in  a  previous 
letter;  but  I  noticed  this  most  strikingly 
with  iodide  of  silver.  When  exposed  wet, 
it  yields  a  picture  of  the  spectrum  extend- 
ing from  ultra  violet  to  a  little  beyond  G, 
where  it  suddenly  stops. 

When  exposed  dry  the  sensitiveness  ex- 
tends much  farther,  even  into  the  green, 
where  it  suddenly  decreases,  but  continues 
into  the  red  beyond  the  line  B  (see  Figure). 
These  observations  explain  many  phenom- 
ena of  dry-plate  photography.  It  has  often 
been  asserted  that  dry  plates  prepared  with 
iodide  of  silver  only,  yield  pictures  as  soft 
as  those  made  with  wet  bromo-iodide  of 
silver  plates.  Krone  has  recently  stated  the 
same,  and  expresses  the  opinion  that  the 
resin  which  he  adds  to  his  dry  plates  affects 
the  plates  in  the  same  way  in  which  bro- 


mide of  silver  acts  in  the  wet  process.  We 
do  not  need,  however,  such  an  hypothesis, 
for  the  sensitiveness  of  iodide  of  silver  in 
the  dry  state  is  totally  different  from  that 
in  the  wet  state;  its  behavior  when  dry 
corresponds  almost  completely  with  a  wet 
bromo-iodide  plate,  only  that  the  latter 
works  much  more  rapidly. 

After  such  discoveries  it  cannot  surprise 
us  that  a  washed  and  dried  bromo-iodide  of 
silver  plate  is  affected  differently  from  a  wet 
one;  it  is  less  sensitive  for  violet,  but  with 
long  exposure  it  shows  greater  sensitive- 
ness for  green. 

Numerous  investigations  are  necessary  to 
modify  our  former  views  about  the  sensi- 
tiveness of  photographic  plates,  and  par- 
ticularly to  bring  a  clearer  understanding 
in  the  dry  plate  question. 

I  have  to  add  a  few  words  about  what  is 
called  sensitiveness.  When  we  take  two 
kinds  of  collodion  from  two  different  sources, 
and  make  a  portrait  with  either  of  them, 
one  of  them  may  perhaps  yield  a  much 
more  detailed  picture,  at  ten  seconds'  ex- 
posure, than  the  other. 

Everybody  will  pronounce  the  former 
more  sensitive  than  the  latter  ;  but  if  we 
make  several  trials  with  those  two  collo- 
dions, and  vary  the  time  of  exposure,  we 
obtain  a  different  result.  I  had  two  kinds 
of  collodion  which  I  tested  in  the  following 
manner :  with  each  one  I  made  a  triple 
carte  de  visite  plate,  the  first  plate  was 
exposed  for  ten  seconds,  the  second  for 
twenty,  and  the  third  for  thirty  seconds. 

A  comparison  of  the  two  pictures,  which 
had  each  been  exposed  for  ten  seconds, 
showed  collodion  number  one  decidedly 
more  sensitive  than  the  other.  The  two 
pictures  of  twenty  seconds  each  furnished  a 
like  result,  while  the  two  of  thirty  seconds 
were  exactly  alike  in  detail.  Collodion 
number  two  was,  therefore,  with  such  an 
exposure  fully  as  sensitive  as  number  one. 

Something  similar  I  have  noticed  when 
exposing  plates  to  the  spectrum.  With  a 
short  exposure  iodide  of  silver  is  much  more 
sensitive  than  bromide  of  silver.  With 
long  exposure  bromide  of  silver  is  much 
more  sensitive  for  the  red  and  yellow  colors 
than  iodide  of  silver.  The  practical  pho- 
tographer understands  by  sensitiveness  the 


102 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


ability  to  yield  a  detailed  picture  with  a 
very  short  exposure.  The  sensitiveness  with 
long  exposure  is  an  entirely  different  matter. 
For  my  landscape  photographs  I  prefer  a 
slow  collodion  ;  one  which  with  long  expo- 
sure gives  fine  details.  I  prefer  this  to  the 
sensitive  ones  which  work  rapidly  but  give 
overexposed  lights. 

Very  truly  yours, 

Prof.  H.  Vogel. 


HINTS  UNDER  THE    SKYLIGHT. 

by  r.  j.  chute. 
The  Eyes. 
The  most  important  feature  of  tbe  face 
is  the  eyes.  In  them  are  expressed  life,  love, 
joy,  animation,  goodness,  and  all  that  makes 
the  human  face  attractive,  and  often  be- 
witching. They  also  express  the  opposites 
of  these,  and  may  become  equally  repulsive. 
They  are  the  windows  of  the  soul.  To  them 
we  always  look  when  we  would  read  the 
workings  of  the  mind.  To  them  the  artist 
looks  when  he  would  measure  tbe  qualities 
of  his  sitter,  and  decide  upon  the  light,  atti- 
tude, and  representation  of  character  to  be 
given  him. 

Among  photographers  the  eye  receives  a 
variety  of  treatment.  Mr.  South  worth,  at 
the  convention  at  Buffalo,  explained  his 
method  or  rule  of  lighting  the  sitter  to  be 
that  of  screening  the  light  till  it  became 
easy  to  the  eyes.  Mr.  Frank  Jewell,  in 
Mosaics,  also  regulates  the  light  according 
to  the  eye,  but  has  a  little  different  method. 
He  regulates  the  position  of  his  sitter  and 
the  light  till  the  "catch-light,"  or  little 
white  spot  in  the  eye,  appears  in  both  ;  this 
he  claims  gives  a  proper  light  for  the  face. 
The  rule  is  an  excellent  one,  and  may  be 
followed  with  full  confidence  in  its  success, 
for  the  formation  of  the  eye  is  usually  de- 
termined by  the  character  of  the  face.  Others 
work  from  the  eyes  by  various  methods, 
while  some  pay  no  particular  regard  to  them, 
but  work  more  by  a  general  study  of  the 
whole  features.  The  eyes,  however,  cannot 
be  treated  with  too  much  care,  as  the  suc- 
cess of  a  picture  very  materially  depends 
upon  the  clearness,  depth,  and  life  given  to 
them.  And  here  I  may  remark  that  this 
is  a  matter  almost  wholly  under  the  control 
of  the  artist. 


Dark  eyes  are,  perhaps,  subject  to  the 
greatest  abuse,  and  are  often  robbed  of  their 
life  and  brilliancy  by  reflections  from  sur- 
rounding objects,  to  which  they  are  so  suscep- 
tible. These  reflections  are  sometimes  from 
the  carpet,  from  light  screens,  or  from  the 
walls  of  the  studio.  They  are  often  very 
perplexing,  and  the  best  method  is  to  exor- 
cise all  permanent  tints  that  produce  these 
effects,  and  be  careful  to  move  out  of  the 
way  any  offending  screens.  The  old  notion 
of  blue  walls  and  blue  screens  was  a  pro- 
ductive source  of  evil  in  this  direction,  and 
all  the  more  so  because  it  was  deceptive. 
The  blue  reflection  in  the  eye  could  not 
readily  be  seen,  and  yet  it  photographed 
white.  From  these. causes  have  doubtless 
arisen  tbe  great  difficulty  in  photographing 
light  pyes.  The  reflections  in  them  are  not 
as  readily  perceived,  even  as  in  dark  eyes, 
hence  they  have  been,  in  days  gone  by,  so 
literally  and  so  generally  extinguished,  that 
the  public  had  come  to  think  that  people 
with  light  eyes  could  never  get  a  good  pic- 
ture. But  the  introduction  of  neutral  tints, 
and  the  exclusion  of  everything  that  will 
reflect  actinic  light,  has  proved  that  light 
eyes  may  be  photographed  in  all  their  ful- 
ness and  beauty  as  well  as  dark  ones. 

In  order  to  secure  a  natural  expression  of 
the  eyes,  they  must  be  perfectly  easy.  A 
glare  of  light  that  causes  discomfort  should 
be  avoided  ;  the  eyes  should  rest  on  some 
object  that  can  be  easily  and  distinctly 
seen,  for  there  is  nothing  more  trying  than 
an  effort  to  look  at  an  object  that  is  either 
too  small,  too  near,  or  too  far  away  to  ac- 
commodate their  natural  focus.  The  art- 
ist who  is  observing,  even  if  he  does  not- 
understand  the  construction  and  anatomy  of 
the  eye,  will  soon  learn  to  judge  frum  the 
form  of  the  eyes  about  where  to  place  the 
rest.  In  near-sighted  persons  they  are 
generally  round  and  full  like  a  short-focussed 
lens,  while  a  long-sighted  person  will  have 
eyes  with  the  balls  more  flattened;  but  it  is 
always  well  to  consult  the  comfort  of  the 
sitter  in  this  respect ;  he  then  feels  that  you 
are  mindful  of  the  conditions  that  insure 
success,  and  that  you  will  not  overlook  even 
the  smallest  item  that  may  have  a  bearing 
upon  the  result. 

One  of  the  evils  in  this    connection  has 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PIIOTOGE APHEE. 


103 


been  the  impression  among  sitters,  arising, 
no  doubt,  from  instructions  they  have  re- 
ceived from  time  to  time  when  before  the 
camera,  that  the  eyes  are  to  be  fixed  upon 
one  point,  and  not  changed  on  any  condi- 
tion, nor  even  winked.  Is  it  a  wonder  that 
we  see  cross-eyed  and  strained-eyed  looking 
pictures  ?  If  an  object  be  given  the  sitter  to 
look  at,  it  should  not  be  less  than  three 
inches  in  diameter,  nor  more  than  six.  A 
cabinet  card  is  a  good  size,  and  he  should  be 
particularly  told  that  he  has  the  privilege  of 
examining  it  all  over;  let  the  eyes  wander 
from  one  point  to  another  with  perfect 
freedom,  and  wink  them  naturally.  A  full 
and  free  expression  of  the  eye  is  secured  by 
those  who  can  see  at  a  distance  by  letting 
them  look  as  far  away  as  possible  ;  give  them 
no  particular  point  to  fix  the  eye,  but  let  it 
wander  freely  into  the  farthest  and  darkest 
corner  of  the  studio.  The  height  of  the  eye 
should  also  bo  considered,  and  the  rest  raised 
or  lowered  so  as  to  have  the  direction  of  the 
sight  correspond    with  the    position  of  the 

head. 

(To  be  continued.) 

ART  STUDIES  FOR  ALL. 
IX. 

SHADOWS    IN    COMPOSITION. 

64.  In  our  last  we  considered  the  subject 
of  lighting  in  connection  with  composition  ; 
we  now  propose  to  call  the  attention  of  the 
student  to  the  opposite,  or  shadow  effects, 
and  make  some  suggestions  in  reference  to 
the  part  they  perform. 

65.  Shadows  are  natural  attendants  of 
light,  and  the  student  of  nature  will  observe 
how  one  always  balances  the  other.  This 
is  in  accordance  with  the  law  of  compensa- 
tion that  follows  in  everything  throughout 
the  universe,  and  it  is  only  by  a  careful 
study  of  nature  that  we  learn  to  distinguish 
the  causes  that  influence  us  in  viewing  a 
scene,  to  pronounce  it  grand  or  insipid. 

66.  In  reproducing  what  we  see  in  na- 
ture by  what  is  termed  art,  extensive  shades 
contribute  greatly  to  the  beautiful  as  well 
as  the  grand  and  majestic  result  of  the  whole 
together;  they  equally  serve  to  give  rich- 
ness and  grace  to  the  middle  tints,  and 
brilliancy,  beauty,   and   animation   to   the 


masses  of  light;  they  also  afford  a  repose 
no  less  grateful  and  necessary  to  prevent 
the  fatigue  and  overexertion  of  the  sight  on 
the  illuminated  parts.  To  this  end,  all  the 
obscure  or  dark  parts  should  bo  so  arranged 
as  to  form  one  general  mass,  and  its  great- 
est force  collected  into  some  one  part, 
where  it  will  have  the  best  effect,  and  he- 
come  a  principle  on  which  all  the  others  are 
in  a  graduated  and  harmonious  dependence. 

67.  The  photographic  art  student  will 
readily  understand  the  application  of  these 
suggestions  to  his  daily  practice.  Whether 
it  be  a  head,  a  three-quarter  length,  or  a 
full  figure,  the  application  remains  the  same. 
The  test  of  skill,  however,  is  with  the  first 
of  these,  for  it  is  only  in  that  perfect  blend- 
ing of  shadow  with  light,  rounding  up  to 
the  highest  part  where  the  pure  light  is 
but  a  mere  point,  and  falling  off'  through 
the  delicate  gradations  of  tints  into  the 
deepest  shadow,  that  a  head  can  claim  to  be 
artistic  in  composition  of  light  and  shade. 

68.  It  is  gratifying  that  the  days  of  white 
pictures  have  passed,  and  it  has  been  de- 
monstrated that  extensive  shades  are  admis- 
sible in  a  portrait,  as  well  as  in  a  landscape 
where  rocks  and  hills  cast  their  grim  shad- 
ows and  give  grandeur  to  the  scene ;  that 
a  face  may  receive  the  same  treatment  at 
the  hands  of  an  artist  that  nature  accords 
to  her  works  everywhere,  and  be  more 
truthful,  more  pleasing,  more  life-like. 
The  shadows  and  middle  tints  give  support 
and  brilliancy  to  the  lights  ;  there  is  no 
glare  ;  the  eye  does  not  tire  but  wanders 
from  point  to  point  continually  attracted 
by  the  sense  of  completeness  and  repose 
that  characterizes  the  whole.  An  impor- 
tant consideration  in  a  bust  portrait  is  to 
give  it  a  well -shaded  background,  the 
deepest  parts  against  the  lights  in  the 
model ;  this  is  indispensable  to  the  brilliancy 
and  beauty  of  the  face. 

69.  In  the  more  elaborate  compositions 
of  figures  and  accessories,  shadows  may  be 
made  effective  by  a  judicious  arrangement 
of  the  several  parts,  especially  the  drape- 
ries, the  whole  being  based  on  some  part  in 
which  the  depth  of  shadow  culminates,  and 
from  which  the  eye  is  led  to  the  principal 
subject  of  the  composition.  In  reference  to 
this  mass  of  shadow,  whether  in  a  bust  or 


104 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


full-length  portrait,  it  need  hardly  be  ob- 
served that  even  where  most  vigorous,  it 
should  not  be  a  mere  blot,  which  obliterates 
wherever  it  is  extended.  The  occasions  are 
very  few,  where  either  the  form  or  the 
proper  color  of  objects  can  be  thus  totally 
lost,  because  objects  in  the  strongest  shade 
are  only  deprived  of  direct  light;  they  are 
more  or  less  illuminated  by  the  surrounding 
atmosphere,  and  the  reflected  lights  from 
other  objects. 

70.  This  is  a  point  that  requires  great 
care  on  the  part  of  the  photographer  ;  to  so 
arrange  his  light  that  the  form  and  detail 
in  the  deepest  shadows  will  be  given.  In 
many  of  the  so-called  Rembrandt  or  shadow 
pictures,  this  blot  of  shade  is  a  grievous  de- 
fect, and  mars  the  beauty  of  many  an  other- 
wise beautiful  production. 

71.  The  artist  with  brush  and  color  may 
give  the  form  in  shadow  at  will,  and  study 
the  effect  of  every  touch  he  makes  ;  but  the 
artist  photographic  has  not  the  same  con- 
trol over  his  work  after  the  impression  is 
once  made,  except  by  retouching  the  nega- 
tive, and  the  basest  use  of  that  indispensa- 
ble adjunct  of  the  art  is  in  supplying  what 
is  actually  lost  or  wanting.  In  a  perfect 
negative  impression  there  should  be  nothing 
lost — no  blanks  of  either  light  or  shadow. 
As  all  means  are  legitimate  in  producing  a 
work  of  art,  so  long  as  the  method  is  not  ap- 
parent in  the  result,  the  photographer 
should  not  hesitate  to  avail  himself  of  any 
device  that  will  assist  him  in  representing 
the  truth  of  nature. 

72.  When  in  producing  the  shadow  ef- 
fects the  hair  is  dark  and  gives  too  heavy  a 
mass  of  shadow,  it  may  be  lighted  with  a 
slight  touch  of  powder  so  as  to  give  all  the 
detail,  and  yet  not  appear  in  the  finished 
picture  that  any  artifice  whatever  was  re- 
sorted to.  This  is  much  better  too  than 
using  reflected  light  in  the  shadow,  so  long 
as  the  face  does  not  need  it.  One  of  the 
worst  effects  that  can  be  produced  is  the 
wasting  of  a  natural  shadow  by  throwing  in 
a  false  light  for  the  purpose  of  illuminating 
some  other  part.  It  is  much  better  to  em- 
ploy some  of  the  more  happy  artifices,  such 
as  a  little  paint  or  powder,  a  little  different 
arrangement  of  the  folds  of  a  drapery, 
which  may  be  made  to  break  up  too  dense 


a  mass  of  shade,  or  the  contracting,  or  ex- 
tending of  accessories,  so  that  reflexes  may 
be  obtained  wherever  they  will  produce  the 
best  effect. 


SOMETHING  ABOUT  PLAIN 
PRINTS. 

BY   M.    COSTELLE    EDGERLY. 

(Continued  from  page  74.) 
Now  we  come  to  the  treatment  of  copies. 
We  have  to  copy  often,  old  card  photo- 
graphs made  perhaps  in  early  photographic 
days;  as  yellow  as  gold,  and  the  albumen 
surface  veined  with  seams  and  crossed  in  all 
directions  by  minute  breaks  in  the  albumen. 
Enlarged  to  even  the  ordinary  three-inch 
head,  we  have  the  face  divided  into  sections, 
like  a  railroad  map,  by  immense  fissures  and 
chasms.  This  has  rather  a  dubious  appear- 
ance ;  but  there  is  no  cause  for  any  alarm 
as  to  the  final  issue.  Only  do  not  make  a 
print  from  the  negative,  as  it  is  in  its  native 
rugged  state,  and  send  it  to  be  finished. 
There  will  be  no  high-lights  in  a  print  from 
such  a  negative.  Yellow,  photographs  dark 
— an  assertion  which  although  not  original 
with  me,  is  nevertheless  true,  and  one  of 
which  it  is  too  frequently  my  painful  duty 
to  remind  many  a  first-class  photographer. 
Then  where  the  high-lights  should  be,  in 
this  copy  of  a  time-yellowed  photograph, 
will  be  half-tone,  possibly  three-quarter 
tone.  This  cannot  be  entirely  remedied  by 
the  artist.  By  making  the  shadows  very 
deep,  he  can  always  brighten  other  parts  of 
the  face  by  the  contrast ;  and  he  can  (and 
too  often  feels  compelled  to)  resort,  in  addi- 
tion to  his  legitimate  means,  to  that  crime 
against  good  taste,  of  using  chalk  for  light- 
ing ink  pictures,  and  mixing  color  with 
white  paint,  for  water-colors.  This  is  de- 
testable ;  and  the  more  so,  when  five  minutes 
of  careful  manipulation  of  the  negative  be- 
fore printing,  would  obviate  all  such  ne- 
cessity. 

Varnish  your  negatives  with  retouching 
varnish;  then  with  cotton-stump  and  pow- 
dered lead,  go  over  all  those  portions  of  the 
face  where  high-lights  should  be  ;  pay  strict 
attention  as  you  go  to  the  copied  photo- 
graph, that  you  may  not  produce  a  light 
where  rightfully  belongs  a  shade,  and  thus 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


105 


make  a  change  in  the  likeness,  which  may 
cause  the  artist  much  trouble  and  labor  to 
restore  Then,  with  a  soft  pencil,  work 
along  on  these  crossing  and  recrossing  lines 
of  shade,  caused  by  the  breaks,  making 
them  to  correspond  as  nearly  as  possible 
with  the  surrounding  portions  of  the  face. 
Better  make  them  lighter  though,  than 
otherwise;  for  you  will  remember  that 
white  can  be  made  to  receive  any  shade  of 
color,  either  light  or  dark  ;  but  that  which 
is  printed  dark  cannot  be  made  lighter,  and 
at  the  same  time  present  a  respectable  ap- 
pearance ;  for  black  is  independent  and  ob- 
stinate, and  will  keep  its  personality,  in 
some  degree,  to  the  last. 

Any  artist  who  lives  where  he  can  visit  the 
gallery  from  whence  he  receives  work,  will 
be  willing  to  attend  to  the  negatives  him- 
self; but  if  the  work  has  to  be  sent  any 
distance  to  be  finished,  the  retouching  of  the 
negatives  must  be  left  to  the  photographer, 
and  in  most  cases  he  will  be  not  only  willing 
but  anxious  to  receive  instruction  in  any- 
thing that  will  better  his  work. 

Even  in  preparing  cheap  pictures  it  is  best 
to  try  always  for  the  best  effects,  although 
the  price  will  not  admit  of  an  elaborate 
finish.  I  will  not  speak  at  length  of  the 
unselfish  motive,  in  giving  great  satisfac- 
tion, with  but  little  extra  labor,  to  those  not 
able  pecuniarily  to  pay  for  the  best  work  ; 
but  I  will  mention  another  consideration 

The  mass  of  people  who  look  at  a  picture 
on  a  friend's  wall,  do  not  ask  "How  much 
did  you  pay  for  this?"  but,  "Who  made 
it?"  and  the  reply  is  invariably  the  name 
of  the  photographer  who  received  the  order  ; 
the  artist  is  usually  unknown. 

The  majority  of  people,  in  passing  judg- 
ment and  making  comparisons,  never  think 
of  inquiring  into  the  difference  between  the 
prices,  but  invariably  pronounce  the  pho- 
tographer from  whose  rooms  the  superior 
picture  came,  the  "  best  artist."  Do  not 
understand  me  as  advocating  an  equal 
amount  of  work  on  pictures  of  all  prices ; 
but  I  do  most  unhesitatingly  denounce  the 
odious  practice,  of  undue  negligence  re- 
garding the  negatives  and  prints  of  cheap 
pictures.  Although  the  work  may  be  far 
from  fine,  there  ia  no  excuse  for  a  lack  of 
effect  in  the  very  cheapest  of  productions, 


and  the  foundation  for  this  must  be  laid  in 
the  work  bestowed  on  the  negative. 

I  will  now  mention  the  orthodox  manner 
of  dealing  with  copies,  when  changes  in  the 
drapery  are  required  to  be  made. 

Before  beginning,  however,  I  wish  to 
make  an  apologetic  bow  to  those  who  know 
all  about  it,  and  say  that  I  am  not  instruct- 
ing them  at  all  ;  only  those  who  need  and 
desire  such  information. 

Many  of  you  would  be  surprised  to  know 
how  lamentably  deficient  many  otherwise 
good  photographers  are  in  this  department. 
If  I  had  not  personally  instructed  so  many, 
and  had  seen  the  sad  nied  of  instructing  ten 
times  as  many  more,  I  should  be  incredu- 
lous too.  I  suppose  the  reason  is,  that 
many  had  not  until  quite  lately,  had  much 
copying  to  do;  and  feeling  more  interest  in 
their  so-considered  more  special  province  of 
making  albumen  photographs,  have  not  de- 
voted the  necessary  time  to  the  ways  and 
means  to  be  employed. 

We  occasionally  have  pictures  to  copj-, 
of  gentlemen  with  high,  closely-buttoned 
vests,  which  it  is  desired  should  be  made 
open  in  the  painting,  displaying  the  white 
shirt-bosom,  collar,  and  tie.  Now,  is  it  not 
a  severe  strain  on  the  credulity  to  believe 
that  any  one  in  his  right  mind,  would  have 
so  little  thought  (to  speak  very  mildly  in- 
deed) as  to  send  a  print  from  the  negative 
in  its  primitive  state,  expecting  a  brush  and 
water-colors  to  hide  this  black  mass  of 
broadcloth  and  buttons  with  the  snowy  plaits 
of  a  shirt  bosom  ?  Yet  such  prints  are  sent 
frequently,  and  very  promptly  returned. 

One  would  suppose  that  even  a  stranger 
to  our  ways  that  are  so  dark,  would  see  that 
this  thing  never  could  be  done  in  a  way  to 
disguise  the  apparent  fact,  that  the  man  was 
suffering  from  cold  and  wore  two  vests  of 
different  pattern,  with  a  very  thin  white 
garment  between  ;  for  the  undervest  cer- 
tainly could  show  itself  through  the  bosom 
of  the  shirt. 

A  piece  of  paper,  the  size  and  shape  of 
this  ungainly  garment,  then,  should  be 
pasted  over  it  in  the  negative,  which  will 
cause  in  the  print  a  white  space,  whereon 
the  artist  has  the  opportunity  of  exercising 
his  skill  and  manufacturing  the  missing 
garments  to  his  own  taste. 


106 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Perhaps  the  background  is  spotted, 
clouded,  and  scratched — then  by  the  process 
known  as  double-printing,  make  a  smooth, 
even,  light  background,  on  which  anything 
can  be  accomplished  ;  or  if  the  picture  is  to 
be  ink,  the  print  may  he  made  with  a  white 
ground  to  be  finished  in  vignette  form. 

The  process  of  double-printing  is  a  very 
necessary  and  quite  simple  one.  First  make 
a  print;  then  cut  with  great  caution  and  a 
keen  knife,  the  face  and  figure — or  all  that 
is  to  be  a  part  of  the  completed  work,  from 
the  remainder — or  that  which  is  to  be 
changed.  Fasten  this  discarded  background 
by  the  corners  to  the  film  side  of  the  nega- 
tive, and  allow  the  face  and  figure  to  print 
as  long  as  is  necessary.  Then,  as  expedi- 
tiously, and  in  as  dark  a  corner  as  possible, 
remove  both  background  and  negative  from 
the  printing-frame,  insert  instead  a  per- 
fectly clean  square  of  glass,  and  the  new 
print,  which  is  now  on  a  white  background. 
Now  place  the  other  part  of  the  first  print 
over  the  figure,  that  it  may  not  become 
darker,  and  allow  the  background  to  ae- 
quh'e  the  desired  uniform  depth.  This 
method  is  well  known  and  long  practiced 
by  most  photographers,  but  there  are  many 
who  are  quite  innocent  of  ever  having  re- 
sorted to  any  such  expedient. 

Supposing  we  have  a  picture  of  a  gentle- 
man with  his  hat  on,  sent,  accompanied  by 
a  description  of  the  concealed  forehead  and 
hair,  with  the  request  that  the  hat  should 
be  removed. 

The  course  to  be  pursued  in  this  case,  is 
to  make  a  print  and  cut  out  the  face  and 
form,  leaving  on  the  background  the  hat 
together  with  the  deep  shadow  that  it  casts 
on  the  forehead.  Fasten  this  to  the  nega- 
tive (after  touching  out  an}7  dark  foreign 
spots  or  scratches  which  may  be  on  the  face) ; 
make  your  print  on  a  white  background. 
The  background  must  not  be  printed  at  all 
in  a  case  of  this  kind,  on  account  of  the 
forehead,  which  is  better  un printed. 

In  short,  every  part  of  a  copied  picture 
which  is  to  be  removed  at  all,  should  be 
blocked  out  in  the  negative,  leaving  a  white 
space. 

The  most  of  my  acquaintances  among 
photographers  are  large-hearted,  and  will- 
ing to  do  almost  anything  for  the  sake  of 


conferring  a  favor  if  nothing  else;  and  in 
addition  their  minds  are  ever  filled  with  the 
desire  of  increasing  their  knowledge  and 
rising  higher  in  their  well-beloved  art.  I 
am  sure  it  occasions  an  artist  as  much  sin- 
cere regret  to  be  compelled  to  return  a  print, 
with  an  expression  of  dissatisfaction,  as-  it 
does  the  photographer  to  receive  it,  and  to 
number  it  among  his  other  trials  and 
vexations  of  the  day.  I,  for  one,  do  above 
all  things  dislike  to  make  such  a  return. 

It  is  desirable  that  there  should  be  greater 
unanimity  between  the  photographer  and 
artist,  and  when  such  a  feeling  has  become 
universal  the  man}'  good  results  will  speak 
for  themselves. 

On  all  those  who  desire  and  work  for  such 
existing  harmony  between  our  two  brother- 
hoods, I  pronounce  a  benedicite. 


WRINKLES  AND  DODGES. 

A  Curious  Application  of  Photogra- 
phy.— Mr.  OttavioBaratti,  Piverone,  Italy, 
gives  us  a  new  and  novel  use  for  photogra- 
phy. Hesays: 
"  I  had  some 
fruit  trees 
that  wanted 
pruning,  and 
there  was  no 
intelligent  or 
active  gard- 
ener at  hand ; 
time  was  pass- 
ing rapidly  ; 
what  should  I 
do  ?  I  photo- 
graphed my  trees,  and  sent  the  photographs 
to  an  establishment  in  Turin.  The  next 
day  I  received  them  back  pruned  in  a  mas- 
terly manner,  as  shown  in  the  sketch.  I 
did  the  rest." 

The  following  also,  all  speak  for  them- 
selves. 

Here  is  a  little  dodge  that  I  just  discov- 
ered to-day,  that  may  be  of  use  to  the 
readers  of  your  Journal.  All  photographers 
are  called  upon  to  copy  gems  that  have  been 
sent  through  the  mail;  sometimes  they  be- 
come kinked  or  creased  in  transmission. 
They  can  be  pressed  out  smooth  by  passing 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


107 


them  through  the  photographic  roller,  tak- 
ing care  to  protect  both  sides  with   paper, 
which  gives  an  even  surface  to  copy  from. 
C.  O.  Chapman. 

After  being  considerably  perplexed  over 
the  prepared  mounts  on  account  of  the  prints 
peeling  oft',  I  discovered  the  following, 
which  if  you  think  proper,  an  insertion  in 
the  Photographer  may  be  welcome  to  some 
of  your  readers. 

If  prints  mounted  on  Slee's  Prepared 
Mounts  be  pressed  carefully  with  a  damp 
cloth,  instead  of  a  dry  one,  they  will  not 
peel.  The  dampness  on  the  surface  pre- 
vents curling  until  the  mucilage  takes  hold. 
James  Hadden. 

A  Little  Dodge. — A  very  nice  thing  to 
cut  paper  or  trim  photographs,  is  a  "  magic 
glass-cutter,"  that  sells  for  fifty  cents  in 
the  hardware  stores. — J. 

An  acquaintance  dropped  in  the  gallery 
the  other  afternoon,  just  as  I  was  about 
toning  my  prints,  and  he  complained  of 
having  his  prints  tone  unlike.  Each  dish- 
ful would  be  different  in  color,  so  I  showed 
him  my  method,  as  follows  :  After  the  prints 
commence  to  tone,  I  place  an  untoned  print 
in  the  gold  solution,  and  by  contrasting  the 
prints  already  in  the  bath  with  the  one 
placed  in  afterwards,  you  can  judge  at  once 
of  the  tone.  It  is  of  a  great  deal  of  use  to 
me,  and  may  help  some  one  in  a  fix  like 
my  acquaintance  was.  Until  I  tried  this 
method  I  used  to  overtone  fearfully. 

J.  H.  Hunter. 

As  I  have  often  received  benefit  from  the 
"Wrinkle  and  Dodge  "column,  I  would  like 
to  contribute  my  mite.  I  have  seen  many 
ways  of  cleaning  off  varnished  negatives, 
but  of  course  like  my  way  best,  and  as  I 
have  never  found  any  one  using  it.  only  as 
I  have  taught  it  to  them,  I  will  give  it  for 
the  benefit  of  all.  I  proceed  as  follows  :  I 
take  my  varnished  negative  and  pour  on  it 
a  little  concentrated  ammonia,  rubbing  it 
well  over  the  surface,  then  setting  it  in  a 
level  place,  pour  a  little  more  on  the  centre 
of  the  plate,  and  prepare  another  the  same 
way  ;  then  lay  the  varnished  sides  together, 
and  serve  another  pair  the  same  way;  con- 
tinue doing  so  till  I  have  a  dozen  or  two  in 


the  pile.  Then  set  a  weight  on  top  and  let 
them  lay  an  hour  or  so,  when  the  film  will 
easily  come  off,  and  after  thorough  rinsing 
the  plates  are  ready  for  albumenizing.  I 
cleaned  and  albumenized  fifty  j  glasses  in  a 
little  over  an  hour  a  short  time  since.  It  is 
much  the  quickest,  and  I  think  the  cleanest 
method  I  have  ever  seen  published. 

Charles  A.  Palmer. 

I  go  home  and  sleep  in  peace  now;  no 
fears  of  wetting  my  neighbors.  The  cure 
of  a  leaky  skylight  is  effected  in  this  way  : 
I  procured  a  tinman's  services  to  construct 
a  gutter  for  each  rail,  shaped  like  the  letter 
V,  about  one  inch  and  a  half  deep.  If  there 
is  an  iron  bar  across  the  light,  cut  into  the 
gutter  sufficient  depth  to  admit  a  portion  of 
it.  At  the  bottom  of  the  light  a  cross  gutter 
receives  the  droppings  from  all  the  parallel 
gutters,  and  a  small  pipe,  say  one-half  inch, 
leading  outdoors  through  the  sash,  entirely 
prevents  trouble  within. 

Anoiher. — Glass  patterns  are  so  apt  to  get 
the  corners  knocked  off,  and  so  difficult  to 
handle,  I  have  remedied  mine  by  cementing 
an  old  chipped  one  to  a  good  one,  placing 
back  to  back  ;  this  gives  a  capital  handle, 
and  works  to  a  charm.  A  narrow  slip  of 
sticking-paper,  say  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch, 
all  around  on  the  face  of  the  glass  you  use  for 
a  pattern  prevents  it  slipping,  and  helps  to 
save  the  corners.  Stick  the  glasses  together 
by  using  balsam  of  fir. 

Slee's  Mounts. — If  using  the  above  mounts, 
take  prints  direct  from  the  washing  (drip- 
ping wet,  one  at  a  time),  lay  on  the  mount 
and  pass  through  a  clothes-wringer  (not 
too  hard  a  pressure).  After  sufficient  are 
mounted  to  cover  a  sheet  of  blotting-paper, 
remove  the  surplus  water  with  another 
sheet,  with  once  rubbing,  then  remove  and 
stand  upright  until  they  curl  slightly,  then 
roll  and  put  under  light  weight. 

E.  T.  Whitney. 

To  clean  a  silver-bottle,  pour  in  a  strong 
solution  of  cyanide ;  shake  a  few  times, 
pour  out,  and  rinse  with  water  two  or  three 
times,  and  your  bottle  is  perfectly  clean. 
Keep  the  solution,  and  filter  and  strengthen 
when  required.  By  doing  this  you  can 
sun  your  bath  better  in  two  hours  than  in 


108 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


a  week's  exposure  in  the  dirty  black  bottles 
photographers  appear  to  delight  in. 

Strong  cyanide  is  the  best  thing  I  know 
of  to  clean  glass  plates.  Kub  both  sides 
with  a  sponge  tied  on  a  stick,  then  rinse  in 
water,  when  the  glass  will  be  ready  for 
albumenizing  if  you  use  that  for  a  sub- 
stratum. I  do  not  use  a  substratum,  but 
rub  the  plates  as  I  take  them  from  the  water 
with  'whiting,  letting  it  dry  on.  Plates  so 
prepared  will  keep  any  length  of  time. 
When  wanted  for  use  rub  off  the  whiting 
with  a  dry  chamois  leather,  and  you  will 
have  a  clean  plate  and  one  on  which  the 
collodion  will  stick. 


PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  ITALY.* 

Mesagne,  January  20th,  1874. 

To  the  Editor  of  the 

Philadelphia  Photographer. 

Dear  Sir:  You  have  seen  our  beautiful 
peninsula,  but  alas  !  too  hastily  to  have  been 
able  to  thoroughly  appreciate  all  its  beau- 
ties. The  land  of  arts  requires  long  and  in- 
telligent observation  to  reveal  itself  in  its 
true  aspect ;  and  you,  sir,  have  not  been  able 
to  unite  long  and  patient  researches  with 
intelligent  investigation.  The  photographic 
art,  which  forms  the  subject  of  your  special 
attention,  must  have  cut  a  very  sorry  figure 
in  this  cursory  glance  that  you  were  able  to 
give.  In  truth,  the  colossal  establishments 
— the  great  artistic  industrial  societies — the 
immense  stock-houses  of  the  new  world, 
which  are  devoted  to  photography,  and 
which  provide  for  all  its  intellectual  and 
material  wants,  have  no  counterparts  with 
us.  Nevertheless,  in  the  series  of  letters 
which  I  intend  to  write  you,  I  shall  try  to 
show  you  all  that  we  possess  pertaining  to 
our  art.  I  will  give  special  prominence  to 
the  most  interesting  studies  and  experi- 
ments of  our   workers   in   the  art-science, 

*  Our  readers  will  be  glad  to  know  that  as 
another  result  of  our  jaunt  on  the  Continent,  we 
have  secured  a  valuable  Italian  correspondent 
in  the  person  of  our  friend  Sig.  A.  Montagna, 
editor  of  the  Rivisita  de  Fotogrqfia,  and  we 
hope  to  have  notes  now  from  the  land  of  the  sun 
and  of  fine  art,  monthly. — Ed. 


who,  with  a  modesty  equal  to  their  merit, 
circulate  their  interesting  productions  in 
the  most  restricted  circle,  disdaining  every 
species  of  notoriety,  every  interested  exposi- 
tion of  their  discoveries. 

I  will  commence  by  mentioning  Sig.  So- 
bacchi,  an  industrious  and  intelligent  young 
man,  who  has  recently  perfected  a  carbon 
process  which  he  calls  totantracogmjia,  by 
means  of  which  he  obtains  directly  from 
the  original  itself  and  without  apparatus  (?) 
most  correct  and  permanent  copies  in  any 
tint  whatever.  A  bichromatized  gelatin 
paper  is  placed  in  contact  with  the  original 
and  exposed  to  the  light ;  after  the  printing 
it  is  developed  by  passing  over  it  by  means 
of  a  brush  any  color  whatever,  which 
brings  forth  the  picture  in  all  its  most  mi- 
nute details.  It  is  then  washed  sufficiently 
and  drying  makes  it  complete,  except  the 
coating,  when  necessary,  with  a  white  and 
transparent  varnish. 

I  inclose  with  this  a  few  prints  by  this 
process,  which  will  enable  you  to  judge  of 
the  perfection  with  which  the  vainous  de- 
tails of  the  original  are  reproduced. 

Photo-lithography  now  possesses  also 
amongst  us  a  skilful  worker.  Signor  Mar- 
zocchini,  of  Leghorn,  has  succeeded  in  easily 
obtaining  photo-lithographic  productions 
exceeding!}'  well  executed.  The  process 
which  he  employs  is  very  simple. 

He  prints  his  pictures  on  bichromatized 
gelatin  paper,  develops  them  by  passing 
over  them  a  fatty  ink,  by  means  of  a  roller, 
and  then  transfers  them  to  the  stone,  and 
prints  with  a  press  as  usual. 

I  take  pleasure  also  in  sending  with  the 
present  a  proof  mode  by  Marzocchini,  which 
reproduces  from  an  engraving  a  scene  in 
Venice. 

The  processes  recommended  by  the  pho- 
tographic journals  make  but  little  headway 
in  Italy.  I  cannot  tell  you  why,  but  I  be- 
lieve it  is  owing  in  a  great  measure  to  a 
want  of  enterprise,  and  an  aversion  to 
change. 

When  an  Italian  photographer  has  tried 
a  process  and  has  succeeded  in  obtaining 
from  it  good  and  regular  results,  he  does 
not  willingly  abandon  it  for  another  which 
is  recommended  to  him  as  being  better. 

Retouching  the   negatives   was  tardy  in 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


109 


reaching  us,  but  now  the  brush  and  the  pen- 
cil have  become  indispensable  instruments. 

Apropos  of  retouching  I  wish  to  mention 
to  you  a  method  which  succeeds  remarka- 
bly well  with  me  in  the  correcting  of  very 
weak  negatives.  I  commence  by  printing 
from  the  defective  negative  a  positive  on 
paper,  and  then  from  that  positive  a  nega- 
tive also  on  paper.  I  fix  without  toning  it, 
and  then  whilst  still  wet  I  place  it  on  the 
back  of  the  negative,  to  be  corrected  in  such 
manner  as  to  make  the  outlines  of  the  pic- 
ture coincide,  viewed  by  transmitted  light. 

I  allow  it  to  remain  until  perfectly  dry 
and  smooth,  then  with  an  ordinary  pencil 
I  perform  by  transmitted  light  the  retouch- 
ing necessary  to  increase  the  brilliancy  of 
the  lights,  and  by  the  means  of  varnish  I 
render  transparent  those  parts  which  I  wish 
to  make  darker  in  the  print. 

Printing  with  negatives  prepared  in  this 
manner  requires  more  time,  but  the  effect 
obtained  compensates  for  it  with  usury. 
Other  merits  of  this  process  are  the  facility 
of  retouching  and  the  greatly  softening  ef- 
fect which  this  presents  owing  to  the  dif- 
fusion through  the  glass  which  is  between 
the  two  negatives. 

You  have  no  doubt  read  in  the  Photogra- 
phic News  of  December  5th,  the  protestation 
of  Mr.  W.  Marquand  concerning  my  actin- 
ometer. 

This  gentleman  asserts  that  my  instru- 
ment is  constructed  on  a  principle  precisely 
identical  with  that  described  by  him  some 
time  back  in  the  same  periodical.  The  date 
of  this  description  not  being  given  and  not 
having  been  able  to  ascertain  it,  notwith- 
standing my  persistent  applications  to  Mr. 
Simpson,  I  will  state  simply  that  the  actin- 
ometer  was  invented  by  me  in  1869,  and 
described  the  following  year  in  my  Photo- 
graphic Review,  of  which  I  send  you  a  copy. 

In  my  next  letter  I  will  write  to  you 
about  some  most  interesting  experiments, 
and  meanwhile  I  cordially  salute  you. 

A.  Montagva. 


Kefer  to  Your  Books.  We  publish  one 
or  more  works  suited  to  the  trials  and  trou- 
bles of  every  department  of  photography. 
When  you  are  tried  or  troubled  in  your 
work  you  would  do  well  to  consult  them. 


PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  FRANCE. 

All  the  activity  of  investigators  is  now 
directed,  in  France,  to  two  principal  ob- 
jects: firstly,  the  substitution  for  the  print- 
ing processes  with  salts  of  silver,  of  others 
which  give  indelible  prints,  such  as  carbon 
photograph}',  heliographic  engraving,  or 
printing  with  fatty  inks;  and  secondly,  the 
improvement  of  the  enlarging  processes. 

The  first  of  these  problems  had  been  partly 
solved  some  time  back,  thanks  to  the  labors 
of  Poitevin  ;  but  if  the  principle  discovered 
and  employed  by  him  was  good  (so  good 
that  to-day,  after  many  more  or  less  suc- 
cessful researches,  it  is  to  this  starting-point 
that  we  have  returned),  the  two  methods  to 
which  he  has  given  birth,  carbon  photog- 
raphy and  phoio-lithography,  did  not  give, 
practically,  results  sufficiently  complete  to 
warrant  their  being  readily  and  exclusively 
adopted. 

It  was  necessary,  therefore,  to  make  still 
further  improvements  in  the  manner  of 
working.  Every  one  set  to  work,  and  to- 
day it  is  very  evident  that  these  processes 
are  neither  less  permanent  nor  more  com- 
plicated than  the  salts  of  silver  processes,  and 
that  they  furnish  pictures  equally  perfect. 

Notwithstanding  this  fact,  our  photog- 
raphers who,  whatever  they  may  say,  are 
too  much  given  to  routine,  would  have  still 
remained  undecided  had  not  a  few  men 
whose  names  are  known  to  us  all,  entered 
boldly  the  new  paths. 

Mr.  Pierson,  one  of  the  first  and  oldest 
photographers  in  Paris,  in  partnership  with 
Mr.  Braun,  his  son-in-law,  and  who  is  also 
the  son  of  the  celebrated  photographer  of 
Dornaeh,  has  just  reorganized  his  establish- 
ment so  as  to  work  on  a  large  scale  the  car- 
bon process.  All  the  portraits  which  will 
come  from  his  establishment,  from  the  carte 
de  visite  to  the  large  size,  will  be  printed 
by  this  process,  and  I  am  sure  that  the 
public  will  not  complain.  Messrs  Pierson 
&  Braun  have  even  succeeded  in  transfer- 
ring the  image  from  the  temporary  support 
to  the  painter's  canvas,  so  that,  confiding 
these  sketches  so  easily  made  to  an  artist, 
they  can  deliver  to  their  patrons  oil  paint- 
ings for  which  no  fears  need  be  entertained 
of  future  fading,  as  is  the  case  sometimes 
with  pictures  made  with  the  salts  of  silver. 


110 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


By  thisprocess  they  haveformedin  their  es- 
tablishment a  small  art  gallery,  which  is  the 
reduction  of  the  collections  of  the  Louvre. 
The  principal  pictures  of  this  national  col- 
lection which  came  near  being  lost  by  the 
burning  of  the  Tuileries,  in  1871,  bave  been 
reproduced  by  them,  printed  as  I  have  just 
described  on  canvas,  and  then  painted  by 
artists  who  have  applied  themselves  to  re- 
produce the  colors  of  the  originals.  They 
are  thus  enabled  to  sell  to  the  trade,  at  prices 
within  the  reach  of  all,  reduced  facsimiles 
of  the  masterpieces  of  the  various  schools. 
This  is  a  meaYis  of  popularizing  works  of  art 
whose  importance  will  soon  be  appreciated. 

Another  large  house  in  Paris  is  now  pre- 
paring to  substitute  carbon  photography  for 
the  ordinary  printing  processes,  and  other 
establishments  will  soon  follow  this  example. 

In  regard  to  photo-lithography,  or  rather 
the  printing  by  chromatized  gelatin  and 
fatty  inks,  it  has  also  reached  a  point  of 
practical  application. 

1  have  before  me  a  charming  album,  in 
folio,  containing  twenty-five  reproductions 
of  the  original  designs  of  works  which  have 
figured  at  the  exhibition  of  paintings  in  1873. 
The  whole  is  appropriately  bound,  and  is 
sold  to  the  public  at  fifteen  francs  ($3.00). 
Now,  these  productions,  which  possess  great 
interest,  for  they  are  veritable  fac  similes, 
have  been  executed  and  printed  in  great 
numbers  by  the  following  very  simple  pro- 
cess :  An  ordinary  photographic  negative  is 
taken  from  the  original,  then  there  is  placed 
under  this  negative,  in  the  pressure-frame, 
a  sheet  of  papyrolithe.  This  is  a  thick  paper 
prepared  by  means  of  gummy  (bichroma- 
tized)  substances,  to  which  is  added  gum 
guaiacum,  and  for  the  discovery  of  which  we 
are  indebted  to  Mr.  Fleury  Hermagis.  The 
frame  is  exposed  for  a  few  minutes  to  the 
light,  exactly  as  is  done  in  printing  with 
the  salts  of  silver.  The  sheet  is  then  taken 
from  the  frame  and  plunged  into  a  tank 
filled  with  water,  in  which  the  portions 
which  have  not  been  acted  upon  quickly 
dissolve.  During  this  operation  the  artist 
spreads  on  a  glass  plate  a  small  quantity  of 
transfer  ink,  and  charges  with  it  a  printer's 
roller,  as  uniformly  as  possible  ;  then  he  re- 
moves the  sheet  from  the  bath,  and  after 
having  slightly  drained  it,  lays  it  on  a  second 


glass  plate  to  which  the  dampness  will  cause 
it  to  adhere.  The  image  is  already  perfectly 
visible,  and  appears  of  a  yellowish-brown. 
After  inking,  which  is  done  with  the  great- 
est ease  by  giving  a  few  turns  of  the  roller, 
the  picture  has  all  its  boldness,  and  all  the 
details  show  themselves  with  extreme  deli- 
cacy. When  there  are  but  a  few  prints  to 
make,  the  first  image  may  be  made  use  of 
by  inking  it  each  time  that  a  print  is 
made  under  the  press ;  but  in  reality  the 
image  on  papyrolithe  is  intended  for  repro- 
duction on  stone.  This  operation  is  per- 
formed in  the  same  manner  as  the  litho- 
graphic transfers.  Instead  of  using  the  or- 
dinary lithographic  stone,  a  transfer  may 
be  made  on  zinc,  and  by  means  of  a  mor- 
dant an  engraving  in  relief  may  be  obtained  ; 
or  if  wood  is  used  we  have  a  drawing  ready 
for  the  engraver. 

But  the  process  of  Mr.  Fleury  Hermagis 
is  only  suitable  for  the  reproduction  of  line 
work,  whilst  that  of  Mr  Geymet  may  be 
used  for  printing  views  and  portraits  from 
life.  It  is  now  in  practical  operation,  and 
we  have  before  us  specimens  that  will  favor- 
ably compare  with  the  best  prints  made 
with  the  chloride  of  silver. 

In  factitis  Poitevin's  process  modified  in 
the  details,  and  made  more  perfect  in  its 
operation.  The  stone,  greased  with  care,  is 
covered  with  a  coating  of  gelatin  composed 
of  two  solutions,  prepared  separately,  the 
degree  of  fusion  of  the  substances  employed 
not  being  the  same. 

The  gelatin  (Grenetine),  so  named  from 
its  manufacturer,  M.  Grenet,  of  Rouen,  is 
obtained  from  the  skins  of  young  animals, 
and  the  cartilages  of  the  calf;  it  is  prepared 
with  great  care,  and  is  sold  in  very  thin  and 
transparent  sheets. — From  Monckhoven 's 
New  Treatise. 

First  Solution. 
Water,      ,         .         .200  c.c,  6J  fl.  oz. 

Gelatin  (Grenetine),      12  grammes,      185  grs. 

Second  Solution. 

Water,      .         .         .400  c.c,  13£  fl.  oz. 

Fish  Glue,         .  .     12  grammes,      185  grs. 

White  Glue,       .  .     12  grammes,     185  grs. 

These  dissolved  separately  with  heat,  are 
mixed  and  filtered,  then  12  grammes  (185 
grains)  of  bichromate  of  potash  are  added. 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Ill 


The  preparation  of  the  stones  with  this  mix- 
ture is  made  in  a  room  with  a  temperature 
of  from  30  to  50  degrees  Centigrade,  equal  to 
from  80  to  122  degrees  Fahrenheit. 

After  exposure  to  light,  the  stones  are 
plunged  into  water  for  two  hours,  in  order 
that  all  portions  of  the  coating  which  have 
not  been  affected  by  the  light  should  be  dis- 
solved. The  other  operations  are  the  same 
as  in  ordinary  lithography.  I  repeat,  that 
in  the  hands  of  Mr.  Geymet,  this  process  has 
become  entirely  practical,  and  gives  excel- 
lent results. 

But  a  new  printing  process,  which  has  al- 
ready made  considerable  progress,  is  that 
devised  by  Mr.  Leon  Vidal,  the  zealous 
founder  of  the  Photographic  Society  of  Mar- 
seilles,- and  published  by  him  under  the 
name  of  photographic  polychromania.  The 
specimens  that  he  presented  to  the  French 
Photographic  Society  at  its  last  meeting 
caused  general  admiration.  They  might  be 
called  charming  miniatures. 

Mr.  Vidal  has  just  organized  a  special 
establishment  at  Marseilles,  and  I  hope 
shortly  to  be  able  to  send  you  some  of  his 
astonishing  colored  prints.  A  novelty, 
which  has  been  warmly  welcomed,  is  the 
process  for  reducing  the  time  of  exposure, 
recently  made  known  by  Mr.  Melchion.  It 
consists  simply  of  a  previous  and  very  short 
exposure  of  the  plate  to  the  light  in  the 
camera  itself.  Two  of  our  principal  Pari- 
sian portrait  photographers,  Messrs.  Frank 
and  Liebert,  have  adopted  this  system,  rec- 
ognizing at  once  its  very  great  advantages. 
I  give  you  Mr.  Liebert's  mode  of  operating : 

The  objo'ctive  he  uses  is  furnished  with 
a  stop,  whose  brass  periphery  is  lined  with 
cloth  in  the  inside,  in  order  that  it  may  be 
removed  without  effort.  In  the  centre  of 
this  stop  a  hole  is  made,  equal  at  least  to  the 
half  of  the  diameter  of  the  front  lens;  this 
opening  is  closed  by  an  opal  glass  whose 
softened  ground  side  should  face  the  lens. 
On  the  front  of  this  stop  is  fixed  a  shade  of 
blackened  sheet-iron,  which  moves  by  means 
of  a  hinge  fixed  to  the  upper  portion  of  it, 
allowing  the  lens  to  be  covered  or  uncovered 
at  will  without  disturbing  the  stop. 

When  the  sitter  is  focussed  as  usual,  the 
objective  is  covered  with  the  stop,  which  is 
furnished  with  the  opal  glass  and  re-covered 


with  the  shade ;  the  softened  ground  glass 
is  replaced  by  the  frame  containing  the  sen- 
sitized plate;  then  the  frame  is  closed.  The 
shade  is  then  raised  for  an  interval  of  time, 
which  may  vary  from  one  to  five  seconds, 
according  to  the  intensity  of  the  light  and 
the  length  of  the  focus  of  the  objective  ;  then 
the  lenses  are  unmasked  by  quickly  remov- 
ing the  stop,  which  is  replaced  as  soon  as  the 
pose  is  finished. 

We  see  that  by  this  process  the  time  is 
reduced  at  least  one-third,  and  that  nothing 
is  changed  in  the  ordinary  operations,  which 
may  be  performed  so  rapidly  that  the  sitter 
not  only  feels  no  fatigue,  but  is  not  even 
aware  of  its  use. 

Before  development  the  plate  is  again 
plunged  into  the  silver-bath.  As  I  said  be- 
fore, many  photographers  have  already 
adopted  this  system. 

Ernest  Lacan. 


NOTES  IN  AND  OUT  OF  THE 
STUDIO. 

BY  G.   WHARTON  SIMPSON,   M.A.,  F.S.A. 

A  Substitute  for  AUmmer.  as  a  Preliminary 
Coating. — Sulphate  of  Zinc  in  the  Devel- 
oper.— Dry-Plate  Development. 
A  Substitute  for  Albumen  as  a  Preliminary 
Coating. — Mr.   Tunny   has    recently   called 
attention  to  the  value  of  gelatin  as  a  pre- 
liminary coating  for  plates,  being  less  liable 
to  injure  the  nitrate  bath,  and   possessing 
some  other  advantages.     His  mode  of  pro- 
ceeding is  as  follows : 

"After  the  new  plate  or  glass  has  been 
subjected  to  a  bath  composed  of  nitric  acid 
and  water  (one  ounce  nitric  acid  to  twelve 
ounces  water)  for  a  few  minutes,  the  surface 
is  well  rubbed  with  a  linen  pad  made  in  the 
following  manner:  Take  a  long  strip  of 
linen  about  three  or  four  inches  broad  ;  roll 
it  tightly  round  a  pencil  till  it  has  a  diame- 
ter of  about  one  and  a  half  inches  ;  tie  it 
tightly  with  a  cord,  draw  out  the  pencil, 
and  cut  the  end  cf  the  roll  square.  You 
have  now  a  glass  cleaner  which  will  save 
the  fingers,  and  prove  a  most  effective  agent 
in  cleaning  the  plate. 

"  The  plate  or  glass  having  been  well  rub- 
bed, rinse  it  thoroughly  below  the  tap,  and 


112 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


then  it  will  be  ready  for  the  following  sub- 
stratum : 

Sheet  Qelatin,    .  .               75  grains. 

Water,        .          .  .  .60  ounces. 

Ammonia  Liquid,  .  .       1  ounce. 

Alcohol,     .         .  .  .       1       " 

"The  gelatin  had  better  be  soaked  in  cold 
water  for  a  few  hours,  and  then  as  much 
boiling  water  added  as  will  dissolve  it. 
Care  must  be  taken,  however,  that  the  gel- 
atin be  not  in  excess  of  the  quantity  indi- 
cated. Filter  as  much  into  a  lipped  meas- 
ure as  may  be  required. 

"  Take  the  glass,  hold  it  horizontally,  rest 
the  lip  of  the  measure  on  the  corner  of  the 
glass,  flow  the  fluid  over  the  plate  without 
lifting  the  lip  of  the  measure  from  its  con- 
tact with  the  glass:  this  secures  immunity 
from  air-cells.  Let  the  fluid  now  be  run 
off"  at  the  opposite  corner,  and  tilt  the  glass 
so  that  the  last  drops  may  run  round  the 
four  edges  of  the  plate.  This  is  necessary, 
as  the  edge  has  sometimes  a  tendency  not 
to  take  kindly  with  the  fluid. 

"As  each  glass  is  coated,  place  it  in  the 
rack.  After  they  have  been  drained  a  short 
time,  if  they  are  required  for  immediate  use 
they  can  be  dried  off  at  the  fire,  or  be  left 
spontaneously  to  do  so. 

"The  surface  has  all  the  appearance  of 
albumen,  but  is  not  so  easily  affected  by 
damp.  I  have  used  this  method  for  such  a 
sufficient  period  as  to  confidently  recom- 
mend it  to  all.  If  the  plates  are  old  and 
have  been  varnished,  the  following  method 
is  the  most  expeditious  and  best  of  any  I 
have  tried.  To  remove  the  old  coatings 
place  plate  after  plate  in  a  bath,  of  methy- 
lated spirit  seven  ounces,  nitric  acid  one 
ounce,  and  in  about  ten  minutes  the  whole 
film  leaves  the  glass  in  one  sheet.  Rinse 
the  glass  under  the  tap,  apply  the  gelatin 
substratum,  and  you  have  a  glass  as  easily 
prepared  and  clean  as  if  it  were  a  new  one. 
Avoid  strong  boiling  solutions  of  soda  or 
potash,  more  especially  with  patent  plate, 
as  they  attack  the  surface  and  leave  innu- 
merable stains  that  no  after  means  will  re- 
move." 

Sulphate  of  Zinc  in  the  Developer . — Mr.  T. 
Gulliver,  one  of  my  correspondents,  speaks 
of  the  value  of  sulphate  of  zinc  in  the  de- 
veloper, as  aiding  in  the  production  of  fine 


results  and  economizing  acetic   acid.     He 
says : 
"  Take 

Sulphate  of  Zinc,      .         .     2  scruples. 
Water,       .         ...     5  ounces. 
Mix  and  filter. 

"Of  the  above  add  three  ounces  to  two 
ounces  of  glacial  acetic  acid,  using  the  mix- 
ture for  the  developer  in  about  the  same 
proportion  as  usual,  but,  if  anything,  rather 
less,  as  the  effect  of  sulphate  of  zinc  is  to 
confer  greater  density.  A  larger  propor- 
tion may  be  used  with  advantage,  when 
copying  maps,  engravings,  &c,  where  lines, 
not  flat  tints,  form  the  shadows  of  the  pic- 
ture. 

"  The  negative  develops  slowly,  and  the 
deposit  is  very  fine.  The  negatives  are  dull 
in  appearance  when  dried,  but  this  disap- 
pears when  the  negative  is  varnished." 

Dry-Plate  Development. — I  mentioned  a 
few  months  ago,  the  enormously  strong 
alkaline  developer  which  Colonel  Wortley 
has  found  it  possible  to  use  with  advantage. 
He  recently  communicates  his  further  ex- 
perience.    He  says: 

"You  will  remember  that  I  have  shown 
you  on  various  occasions  the  difference  in 
density  produced  in  negatives  developed 
respectively  by  small  and  large  amounts  of 
ammonia,  and  you  are  also  aware  that  the 
sensitiveness  of  a  plate  is  enormously  in- 
creased by  being  developed  with  strong 
ammonia.  It  is  interesting  to  notice  that 
the  density  of  plate?  varies  also  very  much 
in  using  weak  and  strong  pyrogallic  acid 
solution,  but  with  the  important  difference 
that  there  is  little  or  no  loss  of  sensitiveness. 
Thus,  then,  1  find  that  the  proper  way  to 
develop  a  dry  plate  is  to  commence  with 
extremely  little  pyrogallic  and  the  maxi- 
mum of  ammonia,  and  gradually  to  work  up 
the  density  by  small  additions  of  pyrogallic 
solution,  as  the  density  and  character  of  a 
negative  are  in  this  way  much  more  under 
control. 

"  Another  modification  that  I  find  of  the 
greatest  value  is  the  addition  of  gelatin  to 
the  developer  ;  it  enables  one  to  reduce  the 
bromide  by  three-fourths  of  the  quantity 
that  would  be  necessary  did  we  not  avail 
ourselves  of  the  services  of  gelatin  ;  and  we 
thereby  get  the  advantage  that  the  gelatin, 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


113 


though  restraining  the  negative,  does  not 
affect  the  production  of  detail ;  whereas  it 
is  well  known  that  bromide,  if  used  in  at 
all  too  great  quantity,  has  great  effect  in 
destroying  detail  in  the  shadows.  The  gel- 
atin can  even  be  used  as  the  restrainer 
without  any  bromide  at  all.  It  should  also 
be  noticed  that  the  gelatin  helps  greatly  in 
giving  an  even  development  to  the  plate, 
and  the  delicacy  and  printing  color  of  the 
negative  are  unusually  good. 

"Another  advantage  gained  by  using  the 
gelatin  as  a  controller  is,  that  it  enables  one 
to  use  a  strong  developer  made  with  liquid 
ammonia  with  no  danger  of  stains  or  un- 
equal development. 

"One  more  thing  I  have  found  of  great 
use  during  the  past  summer,  viz.,  the  devel- 
opment of  dry  plates  by  fuming  with 
ammonia.  This  is  of  especial  value  with 
collodion  dry  plates  in  the  printing  of 
transparencies,  as  the  deposit  is  extremely 
fine  and  delicate;  and  those  who  are  using 
gelatino-bromide  will  find  it  simply  inval- 
uable, as  it  does  away  with  nearly  all  the 
annoyances  that  some  gelatino-bromide 
films  give  in  consequence  of  their  uncertain 
behavior  under  aqueous  developers. 

"  In  my  practice  I  use  glycerin  on  the 
plate  to  retain  an  even  moisture  during  the 
fuming  process." 


SOCIETY  GOSSIP. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  SOCIETY  OF  PHILADEL- 
PHIA, March  4th.  Mr.  Partridge  exhibited 
a  negative  made  with  some  emulsion  pre- 
pared by  Col.  Stuart  Wortley,  of  London, 
in  the  summer  of  1872.  The  negative  was 
very  clean  and  good,  and  had  been  exposed 
for  three  seconds  only,  and  even  then  had 
to  be  restrained  in  the  development,  which 
was  very  rapid. 

Dr.  Seiler  exhibited  an  improved  tube 
and  lens  adjustment  for  microscopic  enlarge- 
ments. He  also  remarked  upon  the  diffi- 
culty of  getting  a  clean  negative  from  mi- 
croscopic slides  prepared  with  the  blue 
coloring  matter  known  as  hematoxalin, 
and  said  that  the  best  method  in  his  hands 
had  been  to  interpose  a  plate  of  yellow 
glass,  which  increased  the  vigor  and  con- 
trast in  the  negative,  at  the  expense,  how- 


ever, of  the  exposure,  which  had  to  be  in- 
creased. 

The  Chair  remarked  upon  the  fact  that 
blue  glass  would  not  answer  as  well  as  the 
ammonio-sulphate  of  copper  cell  for  this 
kind  of  work,  especially  when  condensed 
light  was  used.  The  cell  served  the  double 
purpose  of  intercepting  the  heat  rays  and 
correcting  the  objective. 

On  inquiry,  as  to  whom  the  discovery  of 
the  use  of  the  ammonio-sulphate  of  copper 
cell  was  due,  the  Chair  replied  that  he  be- 
lieved that  Mr.  Eutherfurd,  of  New  York, 
had  made  the  discovery  and  communicated 
it  to  Dr.  Woodward,  U.  S.  A.,  "Washington, 
by  whom  it  was  first  used. 

Mr.  Corlies  exhibited  a  print  from  a  dry 
tannin  negative,  taken  on  a  plate  prepared 
in  1867. 

Boston  Photographic  Association, 
February  6th,  1874,  annual  meeting.  The 
election  of  officers  for  the  year  1874  resulted, 
viz.:  Mr.  E.  J.  Foss,  President;  Mr.  W. 
T.  Bowers,  Vice-President ;  Mr.  Charles  H. 
Danforth.,  Secretary;  Mr.  E.  F.  Smith,  re- 
elected Treasurer ;  and  Messrs.  D.  T.  Bur- 
rill.,  T.  N.  Phillips,  and  B.  B,  Wilson,  the 
Executive  Committee. 

Messrs.  Black,  Foss,  and  Smith  addressed 
the  meeting  as  to  the  future  of  the  Associa- 
tion. 

Mr.  R.  B.  Lewis  was  elected  a  member  ; 
after  which  a  vote  of  thanks  was  passed  to 
the  retiring  officers,  and  the  meeting  ad- 
journed. 

Theregular  monthly  meeting  (for  March) 
was  held  at  Mr.  Black's  studio,  Friday  eve- 
ning, March  6th. 

Mr.  Burrill,  one  of  the  Executive  Com- 
mittee, tendered  his  resignation,  which  was 
reluctantly  accepted,  and  Mr.  Black  elected 
to  fill  the  vacancy. 

The  Executive  Committee  for  the  year 
1873  was  then  called  on  for  their  report, 
which  was  deferred  at  the  last  meeting,  and 
made  the  following  report: 

We  have  examined  the  books  of  the  Secre- 
tary and  Treasurer  and  find  them  well  kept. 
We  find  a  number  of  names  that  are  delin- 
quent ;  also  a  large  number  that  are  prompt 
and  regular  in  paying  their  dues  ;  that  the 
past  Secretaries  have  been  dilatory  in  hav- 


8 


114 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHER. 


ing  persons  joining  the  Association  sign  the 
constitution. 

We  would  therefore  recommend  that  the 
present  Secretary  be  instructed  to  have 
every  member  sign  the  constitution,  so  there 
can  be  no  question  as  to  the  legal  standing 
of  our  members. 

Augustus  Marshall, 
Fred.  C.  Low, 

Executive  Committee. 

On  motion,  the  report  and  recommenda- 
tion were  adopted. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Loomis,  "  that  all  per- 
sons having  paid  their  initiation  fee  previous 
to  this  meeting  shall  be  recorded  members," 
was  adopted. 

The  business  of  the  meeting  being  finished, 
a  short  time  was  taken  up  in  a  social  man- 
ner. 

Mr.  T.  H.  Brooks,  of  the  firm  of  Chute  & 
Brooks,  Montevideo,  South  America,  was 
present  and  introduced  to  the  meeting 

Some  fine  pictures  were  brought  in  for 
exhibition  by  members  of  the  Association. 
Mr.  Burnham  had  a  very  large  view,  which 
was  much  admired;  also  a  fine  half-length 
portrait,  which  was  beautiful.  Mr.  Hardy, 
also  Mr.  Stevens,  had  a  large  collection  of 
cabinets,  which  were  clean  and  fine  in  de- 
tail. 

Mr.  Foss  exhibited  some  very  fine  large 
albumen  prints,  and  some  album  heads 
mounted  on  glass,  which  gave  them  a  soft 
and  delicate  appearance.  This  style  of 
mounting  fills  up  the  pores  of  the  paper  and 
gives  the  picture  a  very  smooth  look,  not 
showing  the  fibre  of  the  paper.  He  had 
also  a  head-rest,  with  an  improved  arrange- 
ment at  the  top  to  hold  the  head,  that  was 
very  firm  and  substantial. 

Regrets  were  expressed  at  not  seeing  Mr. 
Edward  L.  Wilson,  as  was  expected,  and 
the  President  stated  the  cause  of  his  absence. 
Also  that  Mr.  Anthony  was  unable  to  at- 
tend this  meeting,  but  would  at  some  future 
meeting  not  far  distant. 

About  fifty  persons  were  in  attendance. 

German  Photographers'  Association 
(New  York),  March  5th. — For  officers  for 
the  ensuing  year,  the  following  gentlemen 
were  elected  unanimously  : 

President,  Mr.  W.  Kurtz :    Vice-Presi- 


dent, Mr.  P.  F.  Weil ;  Recording  Secretary, 
Mr.  A  Baumojarten  ;  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, Mr.  Edw.  Boetteher ;  Treasurer,  Mr. 
L.  Nagel ;  Financial  Secretary,  Mr.  G. 
Gennert;  Librarian,  Mr.  A.  Martin;  Cus- 
todian, Mr.  W.  Trapp. 

The  Secretary's  report,  after  recapitulat- 
ing the  most  important  subjects  brought  be- 
fore the  meetings  during  the  last  year, 
showed  an  increase  of  sixteen  in  the  roll  of 
membership,  making  the  whole  number 
seventy-one,  of  which  forty-eight  are  resi- 
dents of  New  York  and  environs,  and 
twenty-three  of  other  cities. 

The  Treasurer  reported  a  balance  of 
$1068.72  in  hand. 

The  Librarian  reported  the  collection  of 
photographs  to  number  615  pictures  of  all 
styles  and  sizes.  The  library  contains  200 
bound  journals  and  books,  and  150  unbound 
journals.  The  Association's  property  was 
augmented  further  by  a  large  show-frame, 
made  especially  for  exhibitions,  together 
with  a  considerable  number  of  frames  and 
passepartouts,  and  lastly,  by  a  medal, 
awarded  at  the  last  American  Institute 
Fair. 

All  reports  were  received  with  applause 
and  great  satisfaction,  showing  a  flourishing 
state  of  affairs  and  steady  progress. 

No  More  Royalties  for  Silver-Saving  Pat- 
ents.— Messrs  Kurtz  and  Kleinhaus  have 
obtained  at  the  Patent  Office  in  Washing- 
ton, a  caveat  for  precipitating  metallic  gold 
and  silver  out  of  spent  photographic  solu- 
tions by  galvanic  batteries  This  caveat  the 
above  gentlemen  have  turned  over  to  the 
German  Photographers'  Association,  and 
this  Association  permits  every  photographer 
in  the  land  to  use  such  galvanic  batteries  for 
the  purpose  the  caveat  was  entered  and 
granted  for. 

Presuming  that  every  photographer 
knows  enough  about  galvanic  batteries  to 
make  a  long  description  unnecessary,  the 
secretary  suggests  that  "a  Smee's  battery 
is  the  most  desirable.  It  will  work  for  four 
or  eight  weeks  without  any  interruption, 
when  it  may  be  found  necessary  to  supply 
a  fresh  solution  of  sulphuric  acid,  and  to 
amalgamate  the  zinc  plates.  Besides  the 
first  cost  of  about  $5,  there  is  no  further 
expense  worth  mentioning.    The  whole  pro- 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


115 


cess  is  simple  and  cheap,  and  does  away  not 
only  with  the  noxious  sulphuret  of  potas- 
sium itself,  but  with  the  royalty  attached 
to  its  use  also  " 

Pennsylvania  Photographic  Associ- 
ation (Philadelphia),  March  16th.— The 
medal  for  the  best  cabinet  picture  was 
awarded  to  Mr.  H.  C.  Phillips. 

Voted  that  the  Secretary  be  instructed  to 
inquire  of  Mr.  Shaw  in  what  case,  or  court, 
the  extracts  from  Regnault's  Chemistry 
were  cited  as  evidence  against  his  claim. 

Mr.  Carbutt  exhibited  a  large  number  of 
very  fine  Woodbury  prints,  bound  in  book 
form,  which  were  examined  by  the  mem- 
bers, and  elicited  much  praise. 

After  considerable  discussion  as  to  what 
kind  of  picture  was  most  instructive,  the 
good  or  the  bad,  a  committee  was  appointed 
to  consider  the  matter  of  awarding  a  medal 
for  the  best  print  to  be  made  from  a  rather 
poor  negative;  the  style  of  printing  to  be 
left  to  the  printer. 


MATTERS  OF  THE 


you  want  the  Association  to  continue  remit 
now. 

Information  for  exhibitors  will  be  given 
next  month.  The  rules  will  be  substantially 
as  heretofore. 

Contributions  to  the  Debt  Fund: 

Heretofore  acknowledged,     .  .    $423  00 

Carson  &  Graham,  Hillsdale,  Mich.,  .  5  00 

L.  A.  Gillette,  Saline,  Mich.,  3  00 

Z.  P.  McMillen,  Galesburg.  111.,  .  1  00 

A.  S.  Barber,  Willimantic,  Conn.,  .  40 

J.  M.  Morton  Paluxy  Mills,  Texas,  .  I  00 

0.  C.  Bundy,  Virginia  City,  Montana,  6  00 

$439  40 


Membership  costs  $2;  annual  dues,  $4. 
Life  membership,  $25,  and  no  dues. 

All  remittances  of  back  dues,  and  fees  and 
dues  for  new  members,  should  be  made  to 
the  Permanent  Secretary,  Edward  L.  Wil- 
son, Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

Life  Members  received  in  March. — P.  C. 
Nason,  Columbus,  O.;  O.  C  Bundy,  Vir- 
ginia City,  Montana;  A.  W.  Phipps,  New 
Castle,  Pa.  ;  and  R.  Shriver,  Cumberland, 
Md. 

It  will  be  seen  by  reference  to  the  pro- 
ceedings of  the  Executive  Committee  that 
the  fees  for  life  membership  are  to  be  raised, 
and  we  would  suggest  to  photographers  the 
expediency  of  coming  in  now. 

The  Postal  Card. — Every  member  has 
been  sent  a  statement  of  his  account  with 
the  Treasurer ;  only  a  few  have  responded. 
Arrangements  for  the  Chicago  Exhibition 
cannot  be  made  with  an  empty  treasury.    If 


Less  errors  in  crediting  to  this  fund 
when  money  was  intended  for  dues, 


8  00 
$431  40 


The  Right  Spirit  —  Mr.  P.  C.  Nason,  of 
Columbus,  O.,  writes  as  follows:  "A  few 
days  since,  I  received  a  postal  card  calling 
for  $2 ;  advance  in  dues.  Inclosed  please 
find  the  amount.  Had  I  understood  this  it 
would  have  been  paid  at  Buffalo,  as  I  have 
always  prided  myself  in  being  prompt  with 
all  associations  of  which  I  have  been  a 
member. 

"  You  seem  to  think  the  '  panic '  has  been 
the  cause  of  delay  in  members  not  remitting 
the  '  extra  or  advance  dues,'  but  /attribute 
it  to  a  misunderstanding  of  the  conditions. 
I  was  well  aware  that  the  annual  dues  had 
advanced  from  two  to  four  dollars,  but  never 
dreamed  for  a  moment  that  this  affected  old 
members,  or  rather  those  members  who  had 
paid  their  regular  dues  up  to  the  1874  meet- 
ing, but  supposed  it  did  not  become  due  until 
after  June,  1874.  In  fact,  my  time  being 
wholly  occupied,  I  had  neglected  to  post 
myself  or  ever  give  the  matter  a  second 
thought. 

"  In  my  ramblings  among  the  photogra- 
phers in  this  and  adjoining  States,  I  have 
often  been  spoken  to  concerning  the  advance 
in  dues,  and  have  told  each  and  all  that  it 
did  not  become  due  until  we  should  meet  at 
Chicago.  I  acknowledge  my  error  and  ig- 
norance of  the  correct  state  of  the  affair, 
and  this  is  my  apology  for  the  same. 

':  The  Association  is  of  immense  benefit 
to  each  and  every  one  connected  with  pho- 
tography, either  directly  or  indirectly,  and 
I,  for  one,  should  feel  very  sorry  to  have  it- 


116 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


said  that  the  N.  P.  A.  stood  for  the  National 
Poverty  Association  ;  and  wishing  to  be 
of  more  benefit  to  the  fraternity  than  would 
be  a  pair  of  blacksmith' s  bellows,  I  inclose  a 
draft  for  $25,  and  wish  m}'  name  to  be  en- 
rolled with  the  life  members." 


Proceedings  of  the  Executive  Com- 
mittee of  the  N.  P.  A. 

A  meeting  of  the  Executive  Committee 
of  the  National  Photographic  Association 
was  held  at  Nos  419  and  421  Broome  Street, 
New  York,  Monday,  March  16th,  1874. 
Present:  Messrs.  Adams  (Chairman),  Bo- 
gardus,  Moore,  Rhoads,  and  Wilson. 

The  report  of  the  Committee  of  Inves- 
tigation into  the  matter  of  the  assets  and 
liabilities  of  the  Association  was  read  by 
Mr.  Moore. 

The  Association  is  indebted  still  to  the 
amount  of  $2872.35,  and  its  assets  are  over 
$3500,  due  by  the  members,  so  that  if  the 
dues  were  all  paid  the  Association  would  be 
free  from  debt  and  have  a  balance  in  the 
Treasury.  With  the  exception  of  about 
$300,  for  counsel's  fees  and  some  small  inci- 
dental expenses,  the  whole  indebtedness  is 
for  matters  ordered  by  the  members  when 
assembled  in  convention,  many  voting  for 
the  measures  who  have  not  yet  paid  their 
dues.  It  is  extremely  unpleasant  to  the 
committee  to  make  such  a  revelation,  but 
they  know  the  panic  has  retarded  every- 
thing financially,  and  they  still  have  confi- 
dence enough  in  the  members  that  now  all 
arrears  will  soon  be  paid. 

Mr.  Bhoads  reported  that  he  had  audited 
the  accounts  of  the  late  Local  Secretary, 
Mr.  Baker,  and  that  there  was  a  balance  of 
$95.35  due  Mr.  Baker. 

Messrs.  Preston  C.  Nason,  Columbus, 
Ohio;  O.  C.  Bundy,  Virginia  Cit}*,  Mon- 
tana; A.  W.  Phipps,  New  Castle,  Pa.,  and 
Robert  Shriver,  Cumberland,  Md.,  were  re- 
ported by  the  committee  as  having  applied 
for  life  membership,  and  they  were  ad- 
mitted. 

The  subject  of  increasing  the  fee  for  life 
membership  was  discussed  at  length,  and  all 
present  took  part  in  the  debate.  It  was  the 
unanimous  opinion  that  after  the  Chicago 
Convention  the  fee  should  be  doubled,  and 


such  a  recommendation  will  be  made  to  the 
Convention. 

The  thanks  of  the  Committee  were  ordered 
to  be  sent  to  Messrs.  Benjamin  French  & 
Co.  andScovill  Manufacturing  Co.  for  their 
"  mammoth  offer." 

Communications  pertaining  to  the  Chicago 
Convention  were  received  from  Local  Sec- 
retary Hesler,  and  he  was  instructed  to  pro- 
ceed with  all  diligence  to  make  his  arrange- 
ments. It  was  the  opinion  of  the  Execu- 
tive Committee  that  now  times  were  better, 
that  the  members  would  manfully  and 
promptly  pay  their  dues,  and  that,  with  the 
liberal  purchase  of  tickets  for  the  "  mam- 
moth offer,"  would  insure  the  finest  conven- 
tion and  exhibition  at  Chicago  that  the 
Association  ever  had. 

The  Secretary  was   instructed   to  notify 
each  member  by  postal  card  of  the  Conven- 
tion and  concerning  life  membership. 
Edward  L.  Wilson, 

Secretary. 


VIEWS  ABROAD  AND  ACROSS. 

RY  EDWARD  L.   WILSON. 

IV. 

All  has  not  been  told  that  I  saw  in  Ber- 
lin. You  may  wonder  that  I  have  not  more 
photographic  notes  collected  there  to  give  you, 
but  you  will  remember  that  for  ten  years 
past  Dr.  Vogel  has  faithfully  kept  you  in- 
formed on  all  that  pertains  to  photography 
in  his  splendid  city.  This  thought  gave  me 
considerable  comfort  when  I  was  there,  be- 
cause I  saw  so  many  things  beautiful  and 
new  to  me  outside  of  photography,  that  it 
was  too  strong  a  temptation  to  me  to  resist 
not  to  enjoy  them.  So  I  gave  way,  and  I 
gloried  amid  the  attractions  of  the  museum, 
the  aquarial  and  zoological  gardens,  and  the 
picture  galleries,  and  hid  in  the  corners 
where  I  could  hear  the  music  and  see  the 
people.  In  these  gardens  thousands  assem- 
ble, yet  there  is  not  the  slightest  attempt  at 
insult  or  disorder;  every  one  seemed  to  be 
enjoying  himself,  and  no  one  interfered  with 
another.  This  struck  me  as  singular,  and 
made  me  think  of  our  photographic  con- 
ventions. 

I  was  sorry  to  leave  Berlin,  and  to  this 
day  I  regret  that  I  had  to  leave  it  so  soon,  but 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


117 


the  day  and  the  hour  came,  and  one  more 
dinner  out  in  the  open  air — for  a  Berliner 
won't  eat  in  the  house  if  he  can  get  a  place 
outside  to  do  it — one  more  shake-hands  all 
around,  and  with  Dr.  Vogel  on  my  arm,  we 
started  for  the  "station"  to  "hook"  our- 
selves for  Vienna.  You  know,  of  course, 
that  on  all  European  railways  three  classes 
of  cars  are  run,  first,  second,  and  third.  The 
first  is  comfortable  and  clean,  usually  ;  the 
second  is  not  so  nicely  upholstered  or  so 
clean;  and  the  third  is  supplied  with  pine 
benches  only,  full  of  filth  and  vermin,  and 
tobacco  refuse.  The  German  cars,  however, 
are  usually  better  than  those  in  Great  Britain, 
and  when  about  to  purchase  "first-class" 
at  Berlin,  an  English  gentleman  stepped  up 
to  me-and  said,  "I  beg  your  pardon,  sir; 
do7i't  buy  a  '  fir  st-c\  ass  ;'  none  but  fools  and 
Englishmen  do  that  in  Germany."  I  thank- 
ed him,  and  assuring  him  of  my  inborn  dread 
of  being  suspected  of  being  either  a  fool  or 
an  Englishman,  purchased  :<  second-class," 
and  Dr.  Vogel  and  I  had  the  apartment 
all  to  ourselves  for  a  good  part  of  the  jour- 
ney, until  a  California  gentleman  and  lady 
broke  our  rest  some  time  during  the  night. 
The  Doctor  being 
voluntary  courier  to 
the  expedition,  studied 
the  guide-book,  while 
I  found  much  outside 
to  entertain  me,  to  say 
nothing  of  the  care 
required  by  the  extra 
large  felt  hat  which  he 

compelled   me  to  buy 
A  hat  of  this  size.  jest   j    shou]d    u  suffer 

from  the  Italian  sun."  It  suggested  an  old 
dodge  for  saving  wastes,  and  I  thought  a  hat 
of  this  size  ought  to  save  a  photographer 
from  using  any  silver  at  all. 

Well,  as  we  rattled  along,  picturesque 
old  churches  added  to  the  beauty  of  every 
town  we  passed.  Windmills  were  whirling 
around  in  groups  of  dozens  on  every  hil- 
lock ;  women  were  toiling  in  the  fields,  some 
carrying  great  loads  of  hay  upon  their  heads. 
Here  a  horse  and  ox  would  be  sleepily  drag- 
ging along  a  plow  together,  one  woman 
guiding  the  plow  and  another  driving  the 
team  ;  there  a  group  of  youngsters  gam- 
bolling in  the  dirt  and  dust,  as  happy  as 


crown  princes — and  why  not?  Each  mile 
made  a  picture.  No  fences  stood  in  the 
way,  the  railroad  was  below  the  grade  of 
the  public  thoroughfare,  and  away  we  flew 
until  we  came  to  Saxony,  where  instead  of 
the  Indiana-like  country  through  which  we 
had  just   passed,    the   hills   began   to   rise 


One  woman  guiding  the  plough,  another  driving. 
around  us,  and  the  river  ttf  wind,  until  it 
became  almost  as  charming  as  our  own  Con- 
necticut Valley.  About  dawn  we  were 
leaping  along  the  banks  of  the  beautiful 
Elbe,  and  beautiful  it  is,  a  very  Susque- 
hanna on  a  smaller  scale.  Hardly  a  mile 
in  a  straight  line,  but  a  continual  winding 
around  among  the  hills  as  if  on  a  frolic  we 
went,  until  the  great  forms  of  Schondau 
and  Liliansberg  and  Konigstein  loomed  up 
in  the  distance,  as  though  tantalizing  us 
because  we  had  not  time  to  go  stand  at  their 
feet  and  make  our  humble  obeisances. 

It  now  grew  too  dark  to  see  more  than 
the  lights  of  the  lamps,  and  creeping  under 
my  hat  I  fell  asleep  ;  but  I  did  not  rest,  men- 
tally or  physically,  for  we  passed  through 
Dresden  without  the  least  idea  of  what  her 
highest  steeple  is  like,  to  say  nothing  of  her 
world-renowned  picture  gallery.  But  Vogel 
is  a  doctor,  and  he  said  if  I  would  go  to 
Rome  and  Naples 
I  could  not  see 
Dresden,  so  Dres- 
den I  did  not  see, 
for  I  had  not 
time. 

We  arrived  in 
Vienna  at  9£  a.m. 
A  great  posse  of 
hackmen  of  both  sexes  assailed  us,  and  mak- 
ing a  choice  we  were  soon  at  our  quarters, 
which  were  within  hearing  of  the  buzz  and 
hum  and  din  of  the  great  Welt  Austellung, 
or  World's  Exposition,  and  it  was  not  long 
before  we  were  in  the  midst  of  the  throng 
pressing  towards  the  entrance  gate.     Out- 


Hackmen  of  both  sexes 
assailed  us. 


118 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


side  were  hundreds  of  restaurants  and  bier- 
gardens,  and  side  shows  of  all  sorts  of  mal- 
formations and  monstrosities  and  what  not. 
Once  in  the  gate,  within  the  grounds  proper 
of  the  Exposition,  we  found  ourselves  in  a 
very  Babel.  I  expected  that,  but  I  did  not 
expect  to  see  great  houses  there  moved  from 
Egypt,  and  Turkey,  and  Persia,  and  China, 
and  "Russia,  and  Hungary,  and  Switzerland, 
and  the  Carpathian  Mountains,  and  Siberia, 
and  where  not,  all  rebuilt  there,  furnished 
in  native  style,  and  inhabited  by  genuine 
natives.  But  there  they  were,  in  all  their 
simplicity  or  beauty,  or  cunning,  or  ugli- 
ness, just  as  it  happened.  Even  the  Ameri- 
can negro  and  the  Indian  with  his  wigwam 
were  there,  enough  variety  indeed  to  make 
a  miniature  world,  and  I  shall  never  forget 
my  first  impressions  of  it. 

Crowning  all  in  its  splendor,  and  amidst 


that  I  had  a  month's  work  before  me,  and 
only  one-fourth  that  time  to  do  it  in.  More- 
over, and  worse  yet,  the  arrangements  were 
so  bad  that  to  see  all  the  photographs,  what 
I  especially  wanted  to  do,  would  cost  me 
several  miles'  walk  and  much  time.  In- 
stead of  being  arranged  in  classes,  the  mer- 
chandise of  all  kinds  was  arranged  in  de- 
partments assigned  to  the  countries  from 
which  it  came.  A  drawing  will  make  it 
plainer.  The  great  dome  stood  in  the  cen- 
tre, and  diverging  from  it  were  great  wings, 
and  from  these  again  other  departments,  as 
shown  in  the  figure,  only  of  course  in  much 
greater  number.  So  it  will  be  seen  that  we 
had  to  go  over  much  ground,  through  pas- 
sages in  all  directions,  to  visit  the  sections 
devoted  to  each  country,  and  to  see  the  ex- 
hibition of  photographs  which  beautified 
almost  every  section. 


The  grand  Exposition 

all  and  above  all,  stood  the  magnificent  Ex- 
position building,  a  faint  idea  only  of  which 
can  be  had  from  the  drawing  here  given. 
Before  entering  we  were  joined  by  Dr.  E. 
Horning,  the  editor  of  the  Photographisches 
Correspondenz,  of  Vienna,  and  one  of  the 
Austrian  Commissioners  in  charge  of  the 
Exhibition.  Thanks  to  him  we  were  ad- 
mitted to  places  where  the  friendless  could 
not  follow,  and  I  am  indebted  to  him  for 
many  courtesies  during  my  stay  in  Vienna, 
and  for  the  use  of  his  office. 

As  soon  as  I  entered  the  great  dome  I  felt 


Building  at  Vienna. 

Dr.  Vogel,  who,  as  one  of  the  jurors  in 
the  Department  of  Photography  spent  nearly 
a  month  here,  has  already  given  us  so  much 
information  in  his  letters  concerning  the 
photographs  at  the  Exposition,  that  there  is 
not  much  left  for  me  to  do,  and  I  sent  for- 
ward a  list  of  those  to  whom  prizes  were 
awarded.  The  display  was  certainly  mag- 
nificent, and  embraced  examples  of  nearly 
everything  photography  had  ever  done, 
from  the  day  of  its  birth  up  to  the  then 
present.  The  display  from  Austria  was  of 
course  the  best,  and  the  Prussians  were  not 


THE    PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER 


119 


far  behind.  America  was  not  very  numer- 
ously represented,  but  what  she  had  there 
was  as  good  as  anything  shown,  and  far 
above  the  average.  Satisfied  and  comforted 
on  that  point,  I  could  enjoy  a  second  look 
at  the  others  the  more.  American  photog- 
raphy is  decidedly  as  far  advanced  as  any 
in  the  world,  and  the  jury  confirmed  this  by 
giving  to  her  one  of  the  two  first  prizes, 
the  other  going  to  Prussia.  Austria  would 
have  stood  alongside  had  it  not  been  for  the 
fact  that  our  good  friend,  Fritz  Luekhardt, 


Davanne,  Taupenot,  Blanquart  Everard, 
Fizeau,  Humbert  de  Molard,  Negre,  and 
Bayard.  "What  would  these  aavnns,  the 
most  of  whom  are  in  their  graves,  say,  if 
they  could  rise  and  compare  those  results  of 
hard  labor  of  theirs  with  the  most  improved 
examples  of  modern  photography?  They 
would  admit,  as  we  all  do,  that  the  little 
plant  which  they  nursed,  and  dug  about 
and  dunged,  had  indeed  grown  to  the  dig- 
nity of  a  most  flourishing,  widespreading , 
and  fruitful  tree. 


was  one  of  the  jurors  and  therefore  could 
not  compete.  I  think  his  prints  were  the 
most  exquisite  examples  of  printing  and 
toning  I  ever  saw  there  or  anywhere. 
There  was  an  indescribable  loveliness  and 
delicacy  and  softness,  almost  liquidity,  about 
them,  which  I  could  hardly  understand. 
Then  they  were  so  elegantly  displayed,  on 
an  elaborate  vertical  stand  of  ebony  and 
bronze.  At  each  corner  was  a  bronze 
statue,  representing  severally,  optics,  chem- 
istry, art,  and  printing,  while  here  and  there 
were  has  reliefs  representing  different  pho- 
tographic operations,  all  elegant  and  elabo- 
rate, yet  tasteful.  Perhaps  the  largest  and 
finest  display  by  any  one  person  was  that  of 
Mr.  VV.  Kurtz,  of  New  York.  Mr.  W.  R. 
Howell  also  made  a  fine  display  of  work. 
All  these  have  been  described  in  full. 

One  of  the  most  interesting  collections 
was  that  of  the  French  Photographic  So- 
ciety, which  included  a  series  of  historical 
relics  by  the  various  photographic  processes 
of  some  of  the  early  experimentalists  in  the 
various  reaches  of  photography,  among 
whom  were  Poitevin,  Daguerre.  Le  Gray, 
Fargier,  Camarsac,  Bertsch,  Niepce  de  St. 
Victor,  Barresvill,  Le  Mercier  Lerebours, 


Dr.  Horning  published  a  very  convenient 
guide  to  the  photographic  section  of  the  ex- 
position, but  even  that  did  not  overcome 
the  inconveniences  caused  by  the  horrible 
arrangement  alluded  to.  Why  the  photo- 
graphs were,  not  all  placed  in  close  contact 
with  each  other,  and  made  of  themselves 
one  grand  exhibition,  as  were  the  paintings, 
T  cannot  imagine.  I  hope  the  managers 
of  our  own  Centennial  Exposition  will  do 
our  art  the  justice  to  give  it  better  consid- 
eration. 

The  jurors  have  already  decided  whose 
work  was  entitled  to  the  most  consideration 
at  Vienna,  and  you  have  had  their  names. 
Dr.  Vogel  has  also,  as  I  have  said,  told  you 
of  the  most  striking  things  there,  so  there 
is  but  little  left  for  me  to  do.  It  would  do 
no  good  to  tread  upon  the  toes  of  a  few 
whose  toes  I  would  like  to  tread  upon  for  the 
sake  of  our  art,  whose  pictures  exhibited 
were  simply  abominations  ;  for  if  the  par- 
ties can  so  delude  themselves  as  to  rise  to 
the  point  of  exhibiting  at  a  world's  fair 
such  fearful  examples  of  in  every  way  bad 
photography  as  they  did,  under  the  delusion 
that  they  were  "  works  of  art,"  or  such  mon- 
strosities as  they  did  with  poetical  nom  de 


120 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


plumes  merely  because  they  were  "  big 
things,"  and  showed  the  "  wonderful  "  (?) 
incapacity  of  the  lenses  of  a  pet  friend,  I 
am  sure  that  nothing  I  could  say  could  ever 
bring  Mr.  or  Mrs.  down  from  that  point, 
and  the  only  hope  photography  has  for 
release  from  such  demoralizing  productions 
is  in  the  death  of  the  parties  who  make 
them. 

Mr.  Abel  Lewis  and  Mr.  Marshall  Wane, 
of  Douglass,  Isle  of  Man,  exhibited  each 
some  superb  specimens  of  portraiture. 

The  large  pictures  of  living  animals,  by 
Mr.  Frank  Haes,  London,  were  certainly 
never  excelled. 

Messrs.  Robinson  &  Cherrill  always  show 
fine  pictures,  and  they  even  excelled  them- 
selves here.  Their  work  is  familiar  to  all 
who  visit  our  annual  National  Photographic 
Association  exhibitions. 

The  stereographs,  by  M.  Lamy,  of  Paris, 
were  beyond  comparison.  M.  Lamy  was 
present  during  each  day  for  several  months, 
making  stereographs  of  the  Exposition,  and 
each  negative  he  made  was  a  photographic 
treat  to  examine.     He  is  unexcelled. 

Some  exquisite  cabinet  pictures,  by  An- 
toine  Lumier,  attracted  my  admiration  con- 
siderably. He  and  M.  "Walery,  of  Paris, 
are  certainly  masters  in  their  profession. 
The  Child  at  the  Cross,  by  the  latter,  I  re- 
member as  one  of  the  finest  genre  pictures 
I  saw. 

M.  Merget's  prints,  on  the  salts  of  pla- 
tinum, iridium,  &c,  without  the  action  of 
light,  but  by  fumigation  and  pressure,  were 
exceedingly  interesting. 

The  glass  transparencies  by  Messrs.  J. 
Levy  &  Co.,  Paris,  excelled  anything  in 
that  line,  and  were  the  most  perfect  things 
in  photography,  for  nothing  equals  a  good 
glass  positive.  More  of  these  when  we 
visit  their  establishment  together. 

The  burnt-in  enamels  by  Deroche  ap- 
proached those  by  Robinson  &  Cherrill  in 
quality,  but,  alas  !  his  process  is  secret,  and 
not  for  sale. 

The  copies  of  paintings  by  Bingham, 
Paris,  were  fine,  and  the  portraits  by  Mr. 
Ch.  Reutlinger  were  all  that  Mons.  Lacan 
claimed  for  them  in  his  letter  to  us  in  Jan- 
uary. 

The  Egyptian    landscapes   and   architec- 


tural views,  by  Mr.  D  Schoefft,  of  Vienna, 
were  the  best,  I  think,  I  ever  saw  of  that 
warm  country,  and  were  fairly  enchanting. 

The  same  may  be  said  of  the  work  of  Mr. 
P.  Sebah,  of  Constantinople,  who  truly  un- 
derstands the  handling  of  the  camera  out  of 
doors  and  under  the  sun. 

Mr.  F.  Moraites,  Athens,  Greece,  also 
displayed  some  fine  things. 

Mr.  Antonio  Sorgato,  Venice,  Italy,  ex- 
hibited some  of  the  most  natural  genre  pic- 
tures it  was  my  pleasure  to  see.  Great  care 
was  exercised  in  their  arrangement  and 
finish,  and  the  story  in  no  case  was  exag- 
gerated or  spoiled 

Now  we  come  to  the  solitary  dozen  of 
exquisite  gems  by  Loescher  &  Petsch,  Ber- 
lin. They  hung  in  a  good  light,  against  a 
column,  a  little  aside  from  the  general  pas- 
sageway, but  when  one  once  found  them  he 
was  sure  to  return  again  and  again  to  drink 
in  their  beauties  ;  and  if  he  be  a  photogra- 
pher, he  is  fortunate  if  he  goes  not  away 
from  them  crazed  over  their  excellence. 
As  I  stood  there  I  thought,  how  I  would 
like  to  mount  those  twelve  pictures  on  a 
great  banner,  and,  shouldering  it,  go  home 
and  march  over  the  whole  land  with  them, 
that  every  American  photographer  could 
see  them.  But  the  most  I  could  do  was  to 
purchase  a  few  sets  and  have  them  sent 
over,  that  those  who  wished  could  purchase 
and  study  them.  It  was  a  rare  treat  to 
study  them  there. 

Mr.  F.  Hanfstaengel,  of  Munich,  exhibited 
some  fine  things,  representing  national  char- 
acters, &c,  and  Messrs.  Otto  Van  Bosch  & 
Co.,  Frankfort,  had  some  excellent  work 
there. 

The  finest  interior  work  T  saw  was  by  Mr. 
F.  Reinecke,  Hanover,  Germany. 

Mr.  J.  Lowy,  in  Vienna,  proved  himself 
to  be  one  of  the  best  of  portraitists. 

Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  exhibited  a  large 
number  of  splendid  pictures  on  their  excel- 
lent paper,  so  well  known  here,  and  among 
them  three  views  on  sheets  of  albumen 
paper  thirty-three  by  sixty  inches  in  size! 

Some  of  the  most  tenderly  beautiful  work 
there  was  among  the  groups  of  young  girls, 
from  Mr.  J.  B.  Rottmayer,  in  Trieste,  Aus- 
tria. I  hope  to  secure  some  of  them  for  a 
future  illustration  of  this  journal. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


121 


Some  panoramic  views,  by  Messrs.  Baldi 
&  Wurthle,  Salzburg,  were  also  equal  to 
the  best  outdoor  work  shown. 

Mr.  Julius  Geitinger  and  Miss  Adele,  of 
Vienna,  also  stand  very  high  in  the  art,  as 
was  proven  by  their  superb  work. 

From  Kussia  the  best  work  shown  was 
from  Mr.  Ch.  Bergamaseo.  That  cold  cli- 
mate does  not  seem  to  interfere  with  his 
securing  the  best  results. 

Of  apparatus  there  was  a  display  from 
many  sections.  More  about  that  next 
month.  I  was  glad  to  see,  though,  that 
none  equalled  our  own  American  Optical 
Company's  goods.  Like  our  photographers, 
they  are  ahead. 

One  of  the  real  curiosities  of  the  Exposi- 
tion at  large,  was  the  automatic  apparatus 
for  photographing  without  a  dark-room, 
the  invention  of  Dr.  S.  T.  Stein,  of  Frank- 
fort on  the  Main,  and  called  by  him  "The 
Heliopticor." 

There  are  a  number  of  devices  such  as 
that  of  Dubroni,  Leech,  our  own  Wright 
and  Eatzell,  &c,  similar  to  Herr  Stein's, 
but  none  so  elaborate  in  construction  or  so 
ambitious  in  design.  The  inventor  avers, 
and  truly  too,  that  photography  is  a  great 
helper  to  the  sciences,  and  he  intends  that 
his  invention  shall  help  them  still  more. 
He  will  certainly  make  good  his  promise  if 
his  beautiful  apparatus  may  indeed  be  prac- 
tically applied  in  all  the  directions  he  de- 
scribes. I  was  much  pleased  with  what  I 
saw,  but  as  the  inventor  is  best  acquainted 
with  his  invention.  I  will  quote  his  own  de- 
scription, for  which  I  have  to  thank  Dr. 
Homing's  Correspondenz.  After  describing 
the  several  inventions  similar  to  his  own, 
their  capabilities  and  their  shortcomings, 
Dr.  Stein  says : 

"  The  aim  I  had  in  view  in  the  construc- 
tion of  my  apparatus  was  not  only  to  give 
the  landscape  photographer  a  sure  method 
without  the  use  of  a  cumbersome  dark-tent, 
but  to  give  more  particularly  the  naturalist, 
the  scientist,  the  military,  as  well  as  ama- 
teurs, without  much  practice  and  study,  a 
means  of  making  photographic  studies. 

"  My  apparatus  consists  of  a  camera,  with 
a  plate-holder  of  V  to  2>  depth  (A  B  C  D, 
Fig  1),  whose  slide  is  partly  glazed  with 
colored  glass  (brown-yellow  or  red)  («.  Fig. 


2).    The  depth  of  the  holder  depends  on  the 
size  of  the  camera  and  objective.    The  larger 


the  plate  the  deeper  the  holder,  although  for 
the  largest  generally  used  (whole  plate)  the 
depth  should  not  exceed  \\'  to  2/.  This 
holder  can  be  constructed  for  any  ordinary 
camera  and  objective.  In  the  holder  is  set 
a  movable  glass  frame  (vv  vv),  Figs.  3  and 
5,  which  can  be  made  of  varnished  wood, 
vulcanized  rubber,  or  paper,  one-quarter  of 
the  back  part  of  which  is  covered  by  a  ver- 
tical wall  (6),  Figs.  1  and  4.  The  side  of  the 
frame  towards  the  lid  of  the  holder  is  pol- 
ished flat,  to  be  covered  by  a  ground-glass 
(S  S),  Figs.  2  and  4.  A  piece  of  soft  vul- 
canized india-rubber  is  placed  between  the 
glass  and  frame;  the  ground-glass  is  placed 
on  the  frame,  to  which  it  is  held  by  a  spring 
on  the  side.  The  picture  intended  is  fo- 
cussed,  and  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 
description,  the  negative  takes  the  place  of 
the  ground-glass.  By  the  use  of  a  glass 
frame,  whose  edges  and  sides  are  ground 
flat,  the  india-rubber  is  superfluous,  as  the 
laws  of  adhesion  keep  the  glass  in  place.  The 
collodionized  plate  is  pressed  by  the  strong 
springs  of  the  holder  (p p),  Fig  3,  through 
the  aid  of  four  small  bolts  (x  x  x_x),  Fig.  1, 
on  the  soft  rubber,  or  polished  edges  of  the 
glass  frame,  making  a  hermetical  inclosure; 
the  receptacle  for  the  silver-bath  is  now  com- 
plete (the  collodionizi'd  plate  forming  the 
bottom),  resembling  a  partly  covered  flat 
dish. 


122 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


Fig.  2. 


To  supply  the  silver  solution,  a  round  hole 
is  provided  on  the  side  (e),  Fig.  1,  which 
corresponds  to  another  in  the  movable  frame 
(rf),Figs.  1,  2,  and  4. 
This  hole  is  closed 
by  a  sli'Je  (k),  Figs. 
1  and  2.  This  slide  is 
continually  pressed 
down  by  the  spring 
(i),  and  is  drawn  up 
Ht  (/).  A  right- 
aigled  tube,  with 
cock  (c).  fits  into  the 
opening  {d  e) ;  the 
glass  funnel  (/)  on 
this  tube  must  cor- 
respond in  size  to 
the  chamber  (b) ;  the 
larger  the  chamber 
the  larger  the  fun- 
nel. For  the  small- 
est plates  (25  cubic 
centimetres)  use  10 
grammes;  for  whole  plates  100  grammes 
solution,  to  correspond  with  the  size  of  the 
chamber  (6)  Figs.  1-4. 

"  When  the  tube  (e  c  I),  Fig.  1,  is  in  the 
opening  (d),  the  elastic  slide  (A)  is  held  up 
by  the  resistance  of  the  tube  (e  d)  ;  the  mo- 
ment the  tube  (e  d)  is  withdrawn  the  slide 
slips  down  before  the  tube  leaves  the  side 
of  the  apparatus,  and  the  opening  is  closed 
to  the  light.  At  (&)  is  a  loop  to  draw  up  the 
glazed  slide  (g)-.  at  (r)  a  bolt  to  keep  it  closed  ; 
at  (w)  a  spring  to  hold  the  ground-glass;  the 
latter  can  be  used  in  the  ordinary  frame.  I 
would  here  particularly  state  that  the  mov- 
able frame  (v  v  v  v),  Figs.  1,  4,  and  5,  at  (6) 
contains  no  trough,  as  many  would  believe, 
as  can  be  seen  in  the  cut,  Figs.  2  and  5  ;  only 
a  partition  (b),  the  front,  which  is  at  every 
exposure  the  negative  plate,  forming  then 
the  trough  (s  s) ;  in  Fig.  5  is  the  negative 
(t  t),  the  india-rubber  (y  »),  the  upper  and 
lower  part  of  the  movable  frame;  to  the 
right  of  the  lower  (v)  is  the  partition  (6),  to 
the  height  of  which  the  solutions  must  be 
put  in." 

Now  let  us  go  through  an  imaginary  ex- 
posure with  the  heliopticor.  The  opera- 
tions would  be  as  follows  : 

1.  The  ground-glass  is  placed  on  the  mov- 
able frame  (v  v  v  v),  and  held  by  the  spring 


(w)  placed  in  the  heliopticor,  and  focussed 
in  the  usual  manner. 

2.  The  plate-holder  is  taken  from  the 
camera,  the  spring  is  drawn  back  from  the 
ground-glass.,  and  the  latter  put  aside. 

8.  A  polished  glass  plate  of  the  required 
size  is  dipped  in  water,  and  coated  with  the 
following  solution  of  albumen:  distilled 
water,  800  grammes  ;  iodide  of  potassium, 
0  50  gramme ;  fresh  beaten  white  of  egg, 
25  grammes:  glacial  acetic  acid,  10  drops, 
and  dried.  It  is  advisable  to  have  these 
plates  already  pre- 

Fm    3  r  . 

pared, or  in  stock. 
A  plate  prepared 
as  above  is  coated 
with  iodized  col- 
lodion, and  when 
properly  set,,  laid 
on  the  frame,  Fig. 
],  collodion  side 
down,b}T  means  of 
the  lid  (h)  springs 
(p  p),  Fig.  3,  and 
the  bolts  (x  xxx), 
Fig.  1,  is  pressed  tight  against  the  gum  or 
polished  glass  ;  the  holder  is  then  placed  in  a 
horizontal  position. 

4.  The  tube  (I  c)  is  placed  with  closed 
cock  into  the  hole  (e  d)  after  the  slide  (k) 
is  drawn  up  at  (/).  In  the  funnel  (I)  is 
poured  (with  a  suitable  vessel)  as  much  solu- 
tion (1  arg.  nit.,  10  aqua  dist.,  1  drop  acid, 
nit.)  as  the  chamber  at  (b)  permits,  which 
can  be  seen  and  controlled  by  means  of  the 
large  yellow  or  red*  glass  window  at  (a). 
(This  slide  can  be  drawn  up  during  the 
operation.)  After  the  funnel  is  filled  the 
cock  is  opened,  and  the  solution  flows  into 
the  chamber  (b),  the  glazed  slide  is  lowered, 
the  cock  (I)  closed.  The  holder  is  tilted 
over  softly,  so  that  the  colored  glass  will  be 
on  the  top,  which  will  cause  the  solution  to 
flow    over    the   collodionized   plate.      The 

*  Red  or  light-crimson  glass  is  preferable  to 
the  yellow  for  this  purpose,  as  the  latter  cutting 
off  all  actinic  rays,  is  almost  too  dark  to  watch 
the  progress  of  the  operation  through  it.  It  is 
well  to  try  strips  of  silvered  paper  under  the  dif- 
ferent colored  glass  for  several  hours,  which  will 
conclusively  show  that  such  exposed  under  the 
crimson,  has  not  changed  as  much  as  that  under 
the  yellow  glass. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


123 


holder  is  gently  rocked  to  and  fro  for  sev- 
eral minutes,  to  facilitate  the  coating  of  the 
plate,  which  can  also  be  watched  through 
the  stained  glass.  As  soon  as  this  is  accom- 
plished, the  holder  is  again  placed  in  a  hori- 
zontal position,  the  tube  (I  c  e)  is  turned 
down,  the  cock  opened,  and  the  solution 
allowed  to  run  out  at  (m),  Fig.  4,  through 
a  filter  into  the  stock-bottle.  The  tube  is 
then  withdrawn,  the  slide  (k),  through  the 
pressure  of  the  spring  (i),  shutting  out  all 
light  from  the  hole  (d).  The  tube  should 
never  be  withdrawn  as  long  as  any  solution 
remains  in  the  chamber,  as  the  slide  (k)  is 
only  intended  to  keep  out  the  light. 

Fig.  4. 

m 


5.  The  holder  is  placed  in  the  camera,  the 
bolt  (r)  is  opened,  the  glazed  slide  (g)  drawn 
up  at  (q),  the  cap  taken  off  the  tube,  and 
exposed  according  to  circumstances.  Figs. 
1  and  2. 

6.  After  sufficient  exposure  the  cap  is  re- 
placed, the  glazed  slide  (g)  is  shut,  the  holt 
(?•)  closed,  the  holder  taken  outof  the  camera, 
and  a  second  tube,  with  funnel  placed  in  the 
hole  (e),  by  raising  the  spring  (i)  at  (/). 
The  cock  is  opened,  and  the  developing  so- 
lution (pyro  or  iron)  is  poured  in  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  silver  solution;  it  is 
then  tilted  over  so  that  it  covers  the  plate 
at  once,  and  watched  until  sufficiently  de- 
veloped :  more  light  can  be  let  in  by  draw- 
ing the  slide  off  the  small  red  glass  (h),  Fig. 
3.  When  sufficiently  developed,  the  holder 
is  again  placed  horizontally,  and  the  solu- 
tion allowed  to  run  out ;  the  tube  is  then 
turned  up,  and    water   to   rinse   the   plate 


poured  in,  which  can  be  repeated  until  suf- 

„      _  ficiently  washed.  The  plate 

Fm.  5.  J  ' 

can  be  redeveloped  if  nec- 
essary. 

7.  The  holder  is  re- 
versed, the  bolts  (x  x  x  x) 
are  drawn,  the  plate  is 
finally  rinsed  before  fixing, 
drying,  and  varnishing. 

8.  As  soon  as  the  plate 
is  removed  from  the  frame, 
the  latter,  Fig.  5,  is  placed 
in  clean  water  and  cleaned, 
which  is  very  simple,  as 
the  corners  are  all  rounded, 

after  which  it  is  dried  in  the  holder  for 
further  exposures.  Each  apparatus  is  sup- 
plied with  two  frames. 

The  fact  that  every  object  which  the  eye 
can  see  will,  with  a  suitable  light,  as  soon 
as  the  rays  in  their  mixture  contain  the 
ultra-violet,  violet,  blue,  and  green  light, 
i.  e.,  include  chemical  rays,  will  make  an 
impression  on  the  sensitive  plate,  and 
thereby  leave  a  permanent  picture,  has  in- 
duced me  to  combine  the  above  apparatus 
with  different  optical  helpmeets,  to  facilitate 
the  practice  of  photography  to  the  physician 
and  naturalist.  For  this  purpose  I  combine 
the  heliopticor  with  the  microscope,  for  mi- 
cro-photographs; with  the  ear-reflector,  for 
photographs  of  the  tympanum,  or  interior  of 
the  ear ;  the  laryngoscope,  to  photograph 
the  interior  of  the  throat ;  and  with  one  for 
this  purpose  constructed  by  me,  the  ure- 
thrometer,  for  photographing  the  interior  of 
the  urethra  and  urinary  organs,  with  the 
womb-reflector,  to  photograph  the  female 
sexual  organs,  uterus,  and  rectum.  All  these 
applications  can  be  of  the  greatest  value  to 
the  practical  surgeon,  as  diseases  internal 
as  well  as  external  can,  by  successive  photo- 
graphic exposure,  be  sporadically  collected, 
which  photographs  will  give  him  such  an 
objective  representation  as  cannot  be 
equalled  by  the  pencil  of  the  best  artist. 

Dr.  Stein  now  describes  how  to  utilize  his 
apparatus  in  all  the  departments  named,  and 
then  says : 

"  I  have  made  an  attempt  in  the  above, 
to  give  a  view  of  the  wide  field  that  is  yet 
open  to  applied  photograph}'.  The  simpler 
the  methods,  the  handier  the  apparatus  to 


124 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


those  not  acquainted  with  photography  are 
made,  the  more  this  beautiful  art  will  be 
used  for  the  advancement  of  science  and 
knowledge.  Astronomy,  meteorology,  anat- 
omy, physiology,  technical  and  military 
science  have  lately  brought  photography  to 
their  aid.  It  is  for  the  above  departments 
I  hope  to  have  done  a  great  service  with 
my  apparatus.  To  the  travelling  naturalist 
as  well  as  the  tourist,  it  substitutes  an  artist 
and  means  of  sketching  which  no  other 
method  can  easily  supply.  The  different 
photographs  exhibited  in  a  group  around 
my  models  at  the  Vienna  Exposition,  will 
give  an  idea  what  can  be  accomplished  by 
those  not  acquainted  with  the  art,  in  an  easy 
and  simple  manner.  My  apparatus  gives 
all  a  means  to  fix  the  instantaneous  phe- 
nomena of  nature  with  the  aid  of  light  with- 
out previous  study,  as  something  to  pre- 
serve, and  to  gather  out  of  the  sea  of  float- 
ing impression  the  certain  conviction  of  the 
prevailing  laws." 


THE  MAMMOTH  OFFER. 

It  looks  as  if  Messrs.  Benjamin  French 
and  Scovill  Manufacturing  Company  have, 
by  their  generosity,  hit  upon  a  plan  that 
will  relieve  the  National  Photographic  As- 
sociation from  its  embarrassment,  provided 
the  members  also,  continue  to  pay  up  their 
dues.  We  knoiv  that  the  panic  has  made  us 
all  squirm  and  scratch  to  get  along  for  the 
past  six  months,  but  we  believe  now,  that 
with  the  return  of  the  season  of  sunshine, 
that  financial  sunshine  is  also  coming,  and 
that  a  good  business  is  at  hand.  Several 
photographers,  hereabouts,  have  told  us 
that  on  every  clear  day  they  are  literally 
run  down  with  business,  and  we  hope  such 
good  news  will  come  to  us  from  all  parts  of 
the  country.  And  judging  from  the  de- 
mands made  for  the  tickets  in  this  matter 
of  the  mammoth  lens  and  box,  offered  in 
our  last  number,  many  photographers  ex- 
pect to  go  into  the  large  picture  business. 
Mr.  French  called  upon  us  a  few  days  ago, 
and  gave  us  a  description  of  the  lens.  It 
is  suited  for  every  size,  from  17  x  '20  down 
to  8  x  10  inches,  or  even  whole  plate  size, 
and  is  the  handsomest  lens  made  by  Mr. 
Voigtlander.     The  box,  Scovill    Manufac- 


turing Company  informs  us,  is  to  be  of  a  size 
to  suit  the  lens,  gotten  up  with  double 
swing-back  and  all  the  other  modern  ad- 
vantages of  a  first-class  portrait-box.  The 
box  and  lens  will  be  worth  $550,  and  the 
cost  to  whoever  gets  it  will  be  $3  only.  The 
tickets  are  now  going  out  rapidlj'.  There 
are  six  hundred  of  them  only,  and  if  you 
choose,  you  may  mention  the  number  of  the 
ones  you  desire  sent  to  you.  They  may  be 
had  of  the  following  parties:  Scovill  Manu- 
facturing Company,  New  York;  B.  French 
&  Co.,  Boston;  and  Edward  L.  Wilson, 
Philadelphia. 

HOW  TO  SAVE  TIME. 

Women,  I  believe,  are  proverbially  noted 
for  being  unable  to  keep  a  secret,  and  in- 
clined to  tell  everything  they  know  or  hear ; 
but  J  shall  only  tell  what  I  know,  and  that 
is,  we  are  a  great  deal  better  off  than  most  of 
the  fraternity.  But  don't  tell  any  one  that 
we  no  longer  have  to  use  nearly  two  days  to 
print  and  finish  up  two  or  three  hundred 
photographs,  but  have  the  work  better  done 
now,  between  the  rising  and  setting  of  the 
sun,  and  the  pictures  ready  to  deliver. 

Now,  don't  scowl,  and  shake  your  head, 
it  is  so  ;  just  call  around  about  two  o'clock 
this  afternoon,  and  you  will  find  the  pic- 
tures are  nearly  finished. 

You  have  heard  of  grinding-out  photo- 
graphs; well,  that's  the  way  we  do  it.  We 
take  our  pictures  from  the  fixing  bath,  im- 
merse them  in  one  water,  then  place  them 
in  this  nice  little  thread-cylinder,  side  by 
side,  and  subject  our  pictures  to  numerous 
little  sprays  of  constantly-changing  fresh 
water,  which  strikes  them  on  each  side  si- 
multaneously, as  the  cylinder  is  revolving. 
In  ten  minutes'  time  they  have  been  thor- 
oughly washed,  and  only  about  two  pails  of 
water  used  ;  we  are  all  ready  now  to  place 
them  together  and  mount. 

The  albumen  is  not  half  soaked  off,  neither 
are  any  torn,  nor  the  edges  roughened  by 
handling  ;  and,  of  course,  they  are  far  more 
brilliant  and  pleasing.  Well,  you  like  the 
arrangement,  of  course  you  do ;  and  after 
you  have  used  one  a  month  you  will  won- 
der, as  we  do,  how  we  could  have  done  with- 
out it. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


125 


There  ha9  not  been  a  day  since  we  pur- 
chased our  machine,  that  I  have  not  felt  as 
if  every  photographer  ought  to  know  what 
a  blessing  and  labor-saving  arrangement  is 
ready  for  their  use;  and  when  we  read  an 
extract  from  the  British  Journal,  advocating 
''that  prints -washed  rapidly,  kept  better, 
and  looked  more  brilliant  from  the  first, 
than  prints  washed  by  the  prolonged  soak- 
ing;" also  suggesting,  "constant  handling 
the  pictures,  over  and  over  in  different  wa- 
ters, for  the  space  of  an  hour  or  hour  and  a 
half,  when  they  would  be  sufficiently  well 
washed,"  I  could  resist  no  longer,  but  felt 
as  if  I  ought,  and  it  really  was  my  duty  to 
let  every  one  I  could,  know  how  to  save  so 
much  time,  patience,  vexation,  and  care. 

I  think  there  are  many  worthless  things 
that  are  advertised,  but  when  anything  that 
is  good  and  a  real  benefit  to  us  comes  to  our 
knowledge,  we,  as  a  fraternal  association, 
should  be  willing  to  let  each  other  know  its 
deserving  merits.  Therefore,  I  sincerely 
advise  you  all  not  to  wait  till  the  next  Con- 
vention to  find  out  what  the  Washer  is, 
but  try  one  right  away,  and  you  will  have 
four  months  longer  time  in  your  life,  to 
carry  a.  thankful  heart  towards  the  inventor 
for  all  he  has  saved  you  from. 

Mrs.  E.  N.  Lockwood. 


Moulton's  Rapid  Print-Washer. 

To  those  whose  supply  of  water  is  limited, 
or  who  are  obliged  to  carry  it  up  two  or 
three  flights  of  stairs,  any  method  that  se- 
cures speedy  and  thorough  washing  with  an 
economical  use  of  water,  is  a  great  boon. 
This    seems    to   be   supplied    in    Moulton's 


Rapid  Print-Washer,  a  cut  of  which  is  pre- 
sented herewith.     One  especial  advantage  of 


this  is,  that  it  may  be  taken  to  the  faucet 
wherever  it  may  be,  in  the  basement  or 
upper  story,  and  over  an  ordinary  sink  ;  the 
prints  are  washed  in  a  few  minutes  in  the 
most  thorough  manner.  Mr.  Moulton  has 
submitted  a  test  to  Mr.  Gustavus  Bode, 
anatytical  chemist  in  Milwaukee,  who  says 
that  the  prints  treated  in  the  Rapid  Washer 
for  ten  minutes,  were  freer  from  traces  of 
hypo  than  some  that  had  been  washed  in  a 
siphon  tank,  in  running  water,  for  an  hour, 
and  then  left  to  soak  over  night.  We  can 
only  advise  photographers  to  investigate  it, 
prove  its  merits,  and  be  governed  by  their 
own  judgment  as  to  its  utility.  Our  desire 
is  to  place  in  the  hands  of  every  photogra- 
pher every  means  that  will  help  him  to  pro- 
duce the  best  work,  in  the  surest  and  most 
expeditious  manner.  This  Washer  seems  to 
us  to  supply  a  want  that  has  long  been  felt. 


OUR  PICTURE. 


It  is  seldom  that  we  have  called  attention 
to  the  pictorial  page  of  our  magazine  with 
so  much  pleasure  as  we  do  this  month. 
This  is  from  the  fact  that  we  feel  that  there 
will  be  but  one  opinion  among  our  readers 
in  reference  to  this  beautiful  specimen.  We 
often  present  pictures  that  we  are  satisfied 
many  do  not  appreciate.  We  offer  them 
for  the  purpose  of  inciting  thought,  inspec- 
tion, and  study  ;  and  those  who  do  not  look 
at  them  in  that  way  may  fail  to  find  any- 
thing beautiful  or  instructive,  but  in  this 
picture  we  know  the  senses  will  be  capti- 
vated at  once,  and  all  will  be  led  to  study 
its  beauties  and  derive  profit  by  dwelling 
upon  its  many  points  of  excellence.  As 
will  be  seen,  it  is  from  the  studio  of  Mr. 
Walter  C.  North,  of  Utica,  N.  Y.  Mr. 
North  is  one  of  our  enterprising  and  pro- 
gressive artists.  He  is  an  old  contributor 
to  this  department  of  our  journal,  and  it 
only  needs  a  comparison  between  this  pic- 
ture and  those  published  several  years  ago 
by  him  to  see  the  wonderful  strides  he  has 
made  Not  that  he  was  behind  others  at 
that  time,  for  he  was  not,  and  we  are  happy 
to  be  able  to  present  this  evidence  that  he 
stands  in  the  front  rank  to-day. 

"  The  subject  is  Miss  Carrie  Everts,  who 
is  attending  the  ladies'  seminary  at  Hamil- 


126 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


ton,  N.  Y.,  and  who  was  a  willing  as  well 
as  a  charming  subject  for  '  Our  Picture.'  " 

We  wish  that  more  of  our  beautiful 
American  ladies,  of  which  no  country  can 
hoast  so  many,  would  overcome  the  shrink- 
ing delicacy  that  prevents  us  from  oftener 
giving  our  readers  a  study  like  this.  In 
painting,  sculpture,  architecture,  or  any 
department  of  art,  we  strive  for  that  which 
is  most  beautiful.  Our  disposition  is  to 
study  the  highest  types  of  beauty  we  can 
find,  whether  amid  the  solitudes  of  nature, 
where  the  lofty  mountain  or  the  deep  ra- 
vine, the  placid  lake  or  the  roaring  cata- 
ract lend  grandeur  to  the  scene  ;  or  in  the 
equally  varied  and  interesting  studies  pre- 
sented in  social  life,  where  nature  has  endow- 
ed our  common  humanity  with  so  much  that 
is  interesting  and  attractive.  And  it  is  by 
these  that  our  appreciation  is  cultivated, 
elevated,  and  refined  ;  and  he  or  she  who 
may  be  instrumental  in  bringing  before  us 
the  most  perfect  illustrations  of  nature's 
beauties  or  handiwork,  confers  a  favor  that 
carries  an  influence  for  good  wherever  it 
may  go. 

Mr.  North  says  of  his  method  of  work- 
ing :  "I  took  very  great  pains  to  make  the 
negatives  extra  nice,  so  that  we  could  be 
mutually  benefited. 

"  I  placed  the  sitter  well  out  under  the 
light  and  used  Kent's  hand-screen  with  good 
effect.  But  I  think  a  great  deal  of  the  per- 
fection in  the  negative  lies  in  the  beautiful 
effects  of  light  and  shadow  that  I  can  get 
with  my  soft  light.  I  believe  1  can  get  a 
greater  variety  of  effects  with  this  light 
than  with  any  other  I  ever  saw.  Having 
plenty  of  room  to  place  the  sitter  under 
either  edge  of  the  light,  I  am  not  obliged 
to  place  them  always  in  one  spot.  I  like 
Kent's  hand-screen  the  more  I  use  it,  and 
often  wonder  why  it  is  not  more  generally 
used  by  photographers." 

The  following  is  Mr.  North's 

FoP-MULA. 

Plain  Collodion,  made  of  equal  parts  al- 
cohol and  ether,  5  grains  of  cotton  to  the 
ounce;  iodide  of  ammonium,  5 grains  to  the 
ounce;  bromide  of  cadmium,  2\  grains  to 
the  ounce.  I  grind  my  iodide  and  bromide 
separately,  in  a  small  mortar,  with  a  few 
ounces  of  the  plain  collodion  till  all  is  dis- 


solved, then  add  to  the  bulk  of  the  plain 
collodion,  and  let  it  settle  till  ready  for  use. 

Negative  Bath. — Forty  to  forty-five  grains 
strong,  very  slightly  acid.  Whpn  it  shows 
effects  of  too  much  alcohol  and  ether,  I  boil 
it  down  about  one-third,  after  adding  the 
necessary  quantity  of  water  and  silver  that 
it  needs. 

Developer. — Iron,  1  ounce;  double  sul- 
phate of  iron  and  ammonia,  1  ounce;  acetic 
acid,  2  ounces;  water,  32  ounces.  Fix  in 
hypo. 

I  placed  the  sitter  pretty  well  under  the 
light,  and  used  "  Kent's  Hand-screen,"  care- 
full}' and  as  judiciously  as  possible.  My  sky- 
light and  side-light  has  a  southern  exposure, 
is  very  soft  and  beautiful,  getting  a  great 
variety  of  effects,  just  as  we  want  them; 
plenty  of  room  to  work  in  and  easily  man- 
aged. 

We  think  it  of  the  utmost  importance,  in 
order  to  make  the  best  of  negatives,  to  study 
well  the  lighting  of  the  subject.  It  is  folly 
to  think  that  all  sitters  can  be  placed  in  the 
same  light  and  secure  good  effects,  or  even 
good  likenesses.  All  faces  should  be  studied 
well,  and  judgment  exercised  as  to  how  and 
where  to  place  them  to  get  the  best  results. 

When  the  fraternity  generally  adopts 
that  plan,  we  will  see  still  better  work  than 
we  do  now. 

SERIOUS  FIRE. 

The  Storerooms  and  Editorial  rooms  of  the 
Philadelphia  Photographer  completely  del- 
uged with  water. 

We  have  to  record  a  misfortune  which 
has  just  fallen  upon  the  Philadelphia  Pho- 
tographer, which  came  very  near  sending 
the  present  number  where  none  of  our  read- 
ers would  ever  see  it  in  its  present  shape. 

On  Tuesday,  March  17th,  about  5  a.m. 
the  engine  belt-box  leading  from  the  first 
floor  of  Sherman's  building,  where  our 
rooms  are  located,  to  the  bindery  of  Marley 
&  Co.  overhead,  took  fire,  and  in  a  few 
moments  the  whole  six  stories  of  the  im- 
mense structure  were  in  flumes.  The  fire- 
men were  soon  on  the  spot,  and  by  deluging 
the  building  saved  it,  but  ruined  the  great 
bulk  of  its  contents.  We  being  in  the  lower 
floor  caught  it  without  limit,  and  the  great 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER, 


127 


bulk  of  our  stock  of  books,  back  numbers, 
lantern-slides,  photographs,  &c.,  and  includ- 
ing our  new  sanctum  just  fitted  up,  are  badly 
damaged. 

Still,  with  all  this  drawback,  we  are  en- 
abled to  issue  at  our  usual  time,  and  things 
are  going  on  pretty  much  the  same  as  ever. 
We  still  live — we  hope  to  continue  to  do  so. 
We  can  fill  orders  for  all  the  books  on  our 
catalogue  yet,  for  awhile  at  least.  Please 
continue  to  deluge  us  with  your  orders,  and 
we  will  let  you  know  when  to  hold  up. 

But  the  World!  Well,  this  second  deluge 


has  almost  relieved  us  of  that.  For  awhile 
we  can  make  good  the  offer  on  our  first  page, 
and  then  that  will  be  ended.  For  bargains 
for  one  month  only  please  refer  to  our  ad- 
vertising pages. 

There  will  be  no  delay  in  the  transac- 
tion of  our  business,  but  for  a  long  time 
we  shall  feel  this  sudden  and  great  loss. 
At  this  writing  we  cannot  tell  what  is  gone 
exactly,  but  if  we  fail  in  noticing  any  little 
requests  that  have  been  made  of  us  in  our 
present  number,  please  attribute  it  to  too 
much  water. 


Pictures  Received. — We  have  been  remem- 
bered by  quite  a  number  of  earnest  workers  since 
our  last,  and  we  wish  we  could  take  each  one  by 
the  hand  and  give  him  words  of  encouragement, 
but  as  this  cannot  be,  we  can  only  say  we  are 
grateful  for  these  evidences  from  time  to  time, 
of  the  efforts  and  successes  of  those  for  whom  we 
labor. 

Alva  Pearsall,  of  Brooklyn,  heads  the  list  with 
several  beautiful  cabinets  and  cards.  They  show 
care  and  skill  in  every  part  of  the  work,  and  sus- 
tain the  high  reputation  this  artist  has  already 
acquired.  Some  cabinets  of  Fred.  Douglass, 
from  J.  H.  Kent,  Rochester,  in  his  usual  excel- 
lent style.  A  number  of  cards  and  cabinets  from 
Hoard  &  Tenney,  Winona,  Minn.,  who  are  work- 
ing in  the  right  direction,  with  some  very  good 
effects,  but  from  whom  we  shall  expect  to  see 
improvement.  Cabinets  and  cards  also  from 
Forrester  Clark,  of  Pittsfield,  Mass.,  which  pos- 
sess many  good  qualities,  and  show  the  artist  to 
be  an  enterprising  worker.  Cards  have  been  re- 
ceived from  H.  B.  Hillyer,  Austin,  Texas,  and 
0.  C.  Bundy,  Montana,  who  deserve  encourage- 
ment for  their  efforts  in  localities  so  remote. 
Some  very  pretty  stereos  of  Wodenethe,  resi- 
dence of  Henry  Winlhrop  Sargent,  Fishkill-on- 

Hudson,   by .     We  also  have  some 

good  cabinet  pictures  from  Ashland,  Ohio,  with- 
out name,  and  samples  of  their  work  from 
Messrs.  Lon  M.  Neely,  Muncie,  Ind  ,  Wager  & 
Churchill,  Erie,  Pa.,  and  from  Mr.  J.  B.  Med- 
lar, Racine,  Wis.,  all  showing  good  progress. 


Bird's  Head-Screen. — We  had  the  privi- 
lege of  examining  this  screen  a  few  days  ago  in 
our  office.     It  is  very  neatly  gotten  up,  and  well 


adapted  to  the  purpose  for  which  it  is  intended' 
The  Scovill  Manufacturing  Company  are  the 
agents,  and  photographers  can  get  them,  no 
doubt,  from  their  favorite  stockdealers  in  any 
part  of  the  country.  The  Photographic  Times 
will,  no  doubt,  describe  the  screen  fully. 

Beware. — We  have  received  from  a  corre- 
spondent a  postal  card,  of  the  contents  of  which 
the  following  is  the  opening  paragraph,  and  con- 
tains the  substance  of  the  whole  : 

"Brother  Artist. — Dear  Sir:  If  you  have 
any  old  negative  baths  that  will  not  work  satis- 
factorily, and  wish  them  changed  into  printing 
baths,  send  them  to  me.  I  will  do  it  for  one- 
half  of  the  solution,  or  for  $1  for  every  two 
ounce.;)  of  silver  it  contains." 

We  say  beware  because  the  toll  taken  is  alto- 
gether too  large.  A  refiner  will  reduce  your 
solution  and  give  you  pure  nitrate  of  silver  in 
return  for  twenty-five  per  cent.,  while  this  man 
wants  one-half  for  merely  changing  a  negative 
bath  to  a  printing  bath,  which  any  man  can  do 
for  himself  in  a  few  minutes. 


A  Medal  Offered  to  Foreign  Photogra- 
phers.—  We  have  a  great  many  subscribers  in 
foreign  lands,  and  some  of  them  have  taken  us 
to  task  for  not  giving  them  a  chance  also  to  se- 
cure the  prize  medal.  Surely  we  will  be  glad  to 
do  this,  but  as  the  time  is  so  short  now.  we  make 
a  special  offer  to  our  foreign  subscribers,  of  a,  gold 
medal  for  the  best  three  portrait  negatives  sent 
us  by  July  15th,  1874.  The  rules  and  conditions 
the  same  as  those  made  for  the  other  competi- 
tion. We  hope  with  these  two  offers  to  secure 
some  very  handsome  things  for  the  coming  em- 
bellishments of  our  magazine, 


128 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEA  PHEE. 


Numbers  op  the  "World"  Wanted. — We 
have  been  so  "extremely  generous"  (as  our 
readers  put  it)  in  giving  away  the  numbers  of  the 
World,  that  we  unwittingly  exhausted  our  sup- 
ply of  certain  numbers.  We  want  all  we  can  get 
of  the  numbers  for  June,  August,  and  December, 
1872.  Will  those  who  have  them  also  be  "ex- 
tremely generous,"  and  exchange  with  us  for 
other  numbers,  that  we  may  help  the  few  who 
want  them  to  make  up  full  volumes,  otherwise 
we  will  give  fifty  cents  per  copy  for  them. 

Mr.  T.  H.  McCollin  has  succeeded  Messrs. 
Haworth  &  McCollin,  in  the  stock  business,  at 
No.  624  Arch  St.,  the  old  firm  stand,  where  he 
keeps  everything  needed  by  the  photographer. 
One  of  his  specialties  is  Morgan's  albumen  paper, 
which  is  very  superior. 


The  Solar  Negative  Prize. — Mr.  Moore  de- 
sires us  to  call  attention  again  to  his  offer  of  a 
gold  medal  for  the  best  solar  negative  sent  him 
by  April  20th,  the  time  having  been  extended  on 
account  of  bad  weather.  Particulars  on  page 
565  of  our  December,  1873,  issue. 


Items  of  News. — Business  is  first  rate. — 
Mr.  William  T.  Cowey,  late  of  Brookville,  Ind., 
died  of  consumption,  February  18th,  last.  He 
was  a  native  of  England,  and  came  to  this  country 
about  ten  years  ago. — In  noticing  the  improved 
albumen  colors  sold  by  Mr.  George  Rau,  of 
this  city,  we  said  they  were  made  by  Mr.  E. 
Krtiger.  Instead,  they  are  made  in  Berlin, 
Prussia,  by  Mr.  Julius  Kriiger. — Messrs.  Left- 
wich  &  Stafford  have  just  completed  a  new  and 
beautiful  establishment  at  Carrolton,  Mo.  We 
are  glad  they  can  afford  this  monument  to  theii 
enterprise  and  good  work. — Mr.  A.  C.  Mclntyre, 
Brockville,  Ontario,  has  also  just  entered  his  new 
'•Thousand  Island  Studio,"  which  he  has  had 
under  way  for  some  time.  It  is  said  to  be  as 
benutiful,  comparatively,  as  the  beautiful  section 
of  country  in  which  it  is  located. — Mr.  Hunting- 
ton, St.  Paul,  Minn.,  recently  presented  to  the 
State  Legislature  an  original  group  picture  of  the 
members  of  that  body  to  the  State,  and  it  will  be 
hung  in  the  hall  of  the  Historical  Society.  The 
House  accepted  the  picture,  and  the  clerk  was  di- 
rected to  extend  the  thanks  of  that  body  to  Mr. 
Huntington. 


How  the  World  Moves  Others. — We  have 
the  following  from  one  of  our  generous  friends, 
who,  like  many  others,  seems  to  think  he  can 
never  do  enough  for  the  Philadelphia  Photog- 
rapher. 

Winsted,  Conn.,  March  10th,  1874. 

I've  got  three  subscribers.     Am  trying  to  get 


one  or  two  more  ;  will  send  on  in  a  day  or  two. 
The  extra  copies  of  the  World  is  what  did  the 
business.      A  good  thought  of  yours. 

Yours  truly,         T.  M.  V.  Doughty. 
We  have  a  few  more  copies  of  the  World  to 
give  away  as  premiums.     Try  your  hand  at  the 
last  chance. 

Operators,  Etc. .Wanted  — We  have  constant 
applications  from  our  correspondents  for  oper- 
ators, retouchers,  printers,  &c.  Of  course,  all 
we  can  do  in  such  cases  is  to  put  parties  in  cor- 
respondence with  each  other,  but  we  cannot  al- 
ways do  that.  If  photographers  would  advertise 
in  Specialties,  we  believe  they  would  always  get 
what  and  all  they  want.  But  as  there  is  often 
an  objection  to  publishing  their  own  names,  we 
would  say  that  we  shall  arrange  hereafter  to  have 
all  such  advertisements  numbered,  and  the  an- 
swers  may  come  to  our  care,  and  we  will  forward 
them  to  all  parties  who  agree  to  pay  the  postage. 
We  begin  this  in  our  Specialties  this  month,  as 
will  be  seen  by  reference,  and  call  particular  at- 
tention to  it. 

Scovill  Manufacturing  Company's  New 
Store. — We  made  our  first  visit  to  this  estab- 
lishment a  few  days  ago,  and  we  think  we  are 
correct  in  pronouncing  it  the  largest  and  finest 
stock-depot  in  the  world.  A  fine  double  six- 
storied  iron  front  is  the  first  we  see  of  it ;  and 
then  entering  upon  the  first  floor  we  come  upon 
the  offices,  the  glass  cases  for  the  exhibition  of 
apparatus,  and  the  several  floors  devoted  to  the 
sale  and  storing  of  merchandise;  the  vaults  for 
collodions,  cotton,  &a.  ;  the  fire-proofs  for  lenses 
and  what  not,  to  make  up  a  most  complete 
establishment.  We  shall  soon  give  our  readers 
a  more  detailed  description  of  it.  We  found 
them  full  of  orders,  and  with  business  under  full 
headway.  ^^^^ 

Saving  Silver  and  Gold. — We  would  call 
the  attention  of  our  readers  to  the  announcement, 
made  in  the  report  on  another  page,  of  the 
proceedings  of  the  German  Photographers'  So- 
ciety, that  Messrs.  Kurtz  and  Kleinhaus  have 
filed  a  caveat  for  a  patent  for  saving  metals 
from  photographers'  wastes,  by  a  method  which 
is  entirely  at  variance  with  Mr.  Shaw's  method. 
We  hope  that  the  patent  will  be  completed,  and 
that  we  shall  be  given  more  definite  particulars 
soon.  

Fire. — We  regret  to  learn  that  on  January 
9th  Mr.  E.  H.  Train,  Helena.  Montana,  lost  his 
whole  establishment  by  fire.  Loss  .about  $2000. 
He  is  now  well  fixed  in  his  new  quarters. 


ADVERTISIISO  KATES  FOB  SPECIALTIES — It  will  be  understood  that  matter  under 
this  head  is  n~>t  to  be  considered  as  always  having  editorial  sanction,  though  we  shall  endeavor  to  clear  it 
of  anything  tending  to  deceive  or  mislead.  Stockdealers  will  find  this  a  beneficial  mode  of  advertising, 
and  sure  to  pay  largely.  Six  lines,  one  insertion,  $2.00,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words 
to  a  line — in  advance.  Operators  desiring  situations,  no  charge.  Matter  must  be  received  by  the  23rd 
to  secure  insertion.  Advertisers  will  please  not  ask  us  for  recommendations.  4S~  We  cannot  undertake 
to  mail  answers  to  parties  who  advertise.    Please  always  add  your  address  to  the  advertisement. 


PERSONAL. 

To  my  Friends. 

Feeling  that  a  continued  connection  with  the 
so-called  "0.  C.  S.  H.,"  under  the  present  man- 
agement, would  have  a  tendency  only  to  waft 
the  confidence  of  my  friends  farther  and  farther 
from  a  redeeming  point,  I  therefore  concluded 
it  prudent  to  withdraw  my  connection  with  the 
same,  and  in  doing  so,  it  behooves  me  to  return 
my  most  sincere  thanks  to  my  business  relations 
and  to  my  personal  friends  in  particular,  for 
their  extreme  liberality  in  bestowing  their  many 
favors  upon  the  house  I  represented. 

I  very  much  regret  this  change,  for  it  deprives 
me  of  those  extremely  pleasant,  semi-occasional 
visits  to  your  studios.  But,  should  all  go  well, 
I  may  yet  see  you  occasionally,  in  my  own  "  per- 
sonal curve." 

I  shall  leave  it  entirely  with  you  to  decide, 
whether  my  efforts  in  your  behalf  and  in  rep- 
resenting the  0.  C.  S.  H.  have  proven  a  success 
or  otherwise. 

For  the  present,  I  shall  remain  in  the  beautiful 
city  of  Columbus,  and  at  any  and  all  times  shall 
be  only  too  happy  to  receive  my  old  and  new 
acquaintances,  and,  as  in  the  past,  shall  endeavor 
to  make  your  visits  one  of  pleasure  and  profit. 
Yours  sure, 

Preston  C.  Nason. 

Columbus,  O.,  January  1, 1874. 

Copies  of  the  "  Photogra- 
phic World"  for  June,  Au- 
gust, and  December,  1872, 
wanted.  50  cents  per  copy 
paid  for  them  at  the  office  of 
the  "  Philadelphia  Photog- 
rapher. " 


Gallery  in  Rome,  Georgia,  for  Sale. — 
Healthy  country ;  a  growing  iron  centre  ;  no 
competition  ;  population  6000  and  over,  and  a 
good  neighboring  country.  Rent,  $200  a  year; 
board,  $16  to  $20  a  month.  Now  doing  $3000 
a  year  business.  Good  reasons  for  selling.  A 
live,  good  photographer  can  do  handsomely. 
Address  Wm.  A.  Reckling, 

Rome,  Floyd  Co.,  Georgia. 

Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 


For  Sale  or  Lease. — The  only  gallery  in  a 
city  of  3500  inhabitants  ;  business  centre  of  a 
county  of  47,000  inhabitants.  Site  of  Wayland 
University.  Very  healthy  climate.  Good  light, 
good  rooms.  Rent  very  low.  Well  stocked,  and 
doing  a  good  business.  Only  reason  for  selling, 
want  to  give  entire  attention  to  the  Rapid  Photo- 
Washer.  Address  L.  V.  Moulton, 
Beaver  Dam,  Wisconsin. 


Something  that  you  want. 

See  advt.  of  the  Rapid  Photo. 

Washer. 


$200 
Will  purchase  our  "  Photo.  Car,"  which  is  10x28 
feet,   8  feet  high  on  inside  ;  good  top  and  side 
lights  ;  substantial  trucks  ;  sound  in  all  parts. 

Will  sell  to  a  "new  beginner"  and  give  him 
six  months  instructions.  "  Ohio  photographers  " 
will  please  remember  this  to  those  who  are  in- 
quiring for  a  "Photo.  Car."     Address 

Roloson  &  Glover, 

Shiloh,  Ohio. 


Attention,  Artists.     For  Rent. 

The  finest,  pleasantest,  and  largest  suit  of 
photographic  rooms  in  the  Mahoning  Valley  ; 
best  location  in  the  city,  in  the  centre  of  busi- 
ness ;  established  over  five  years.  Population 
of  town,  15,000.  Splendid  farming  country. 
Size  of  rooms,  43  x  90  feet ;  with  splendid  north 
and  side  skylight.  Possession  can  be  had  16th 
of  May.     For  further  particulars,  address 

Evan  J.  Evans,  Youngstown,  Ohio. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

For  Sale. — One  of  the  leading  photograph 
galleries  in  the  Middle  States.  A  cash  purchaser 
can  get  a  great  bargain.  For  particulars,  ad- 
dress C.  W., 

Care  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co. 

Wanted. — A  good  photographer,  with  $1500 
capital,  to  take  a  one-half  interest  in  one  of  our 
best  galleries  (worth  four  times  the  amount).  A 
rare  business  opportunity  for  a  No.  1  operator. 
Address,  immediately,  "Energetic," 

Care  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co. 


ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS,  1874,  $4.50. 


Wanted  Immediately. — A  good  photogra- 
pher as  partner  in  a  first-class  gallery,  inland 
city  of  fifty  thousand  inhabitants.  I  want  a 
partner,  as  other  business  demands  part  of  my 
time.  Satisfactory  explanations.  Parties  mean- 
ing business  will  please  address        H.  Glass, 

Utica,  Oneida  Co.,  N.  Y. 


Wanted. — Five  artists,  to  finish  photographs 
in  India  ink,  water  colors,  crayon,  and  oil.  We 
want  none  but  good  workmen.  Please  send  sam- 
ple of  work  and  state  the  time  required  to  do 
the  same,  and  salary  expected.  No  bummer  need 
apply.     Address  J.  H.  Nason, 

326  State  Street,  Chicago,  Ills. 


Don't  soak  your  prints  sev- 
eral hours  and  damage  their 
brilliancy,  but  get  the  Rapid 
Photo.  Washer. 

Wanted. — An  A  No.  1  operator  and  artistic 
poser.  To  one  that  will  suit,  prompt  pay  and 
steady  employment  is  offered.  Address,  stating 
terms,  sample  of  work,  and  photo,  of  self, 

Hallwig  &  Co., 
N.  E.  cor.  Olive  and  7th  Sts.,  St.  Louis. 


Photo.  Car  for  Sale. — Firs'-class,  and  well 
accoutred.     For  terms  and  description,  address 
E.  W.  Blake,  Phillipsburg,  N.  J. 


Boston  Gallery  for  Sale. — The  constant 
increase  of  Mrs.  Foss'  business  makes  an  especial 
agent  necessary,  and  I  shall  be  compelled  to  sell 
my  place  to  attend  to  it.  My  studio  is  14  x  38 
feet,  with  a  pure  north,  side,  and  top  light.  I 
have  the  best  mammoth  tube  box  and  stand  in 
Boston.  A  new,  24-inch  press,  cast  steel  (nick- 
eled) rollers.  Will  match  my  card  and  cob  tube 
with  anybody.  Solar  camera,  and  everything 
for  a  first-class  business.  Dark-room,  10x14 
feet,  11  feet  high,  ventilated.  Studio,  artist's, 
reception,  and  work-rooms  all  on  one  floor,  up 
two  flights  only.  Cheap  rent,  splendid  location, 
being  opposite  the  world-renowned  Boston  Com- 
mons. Lease,  good  trade,  best  prices.  Posses- 
sion given  at  once,  reserving  the  privilege  to 
finish  college  and  other  work  engaged. 
E.  J.  Foss, 
171^  Tremont  St.,  Boston. 


For  Sale. — At  a  great  sacrifice,  my  patents 
on  photographers'  tent  and  trunk,  at  $1200  ;  also, 
my  entire  stock,  apparatus,  and  fixtures  of  gal- 
lery at  McMinnville,  Tenn.  Gallery  for  pent  at 
$15  per  month;  no  opposition.  Being  forced 
from  my  home  and  business  and  imprisoned,  is 
my  reason  for  this  offer.      Address 

Dr.  J.  Fletch.  Woodward, 
27  N.  Front  St.,  Nashville,  Tenn. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

For  Sale. — A  photographic  gallery  in  one  of 
the  most  desirable  business  localities  in  the  city 
of  Philadelphia.  For  further  particulars,  ad- 
dress "Art," 

Office  Philadelphia  Photographer. 


For  Sale. — One  of  the  most  prosperous  gal- 
leries in  New  York  State.  Doing  the  best  busi- 
ness and  the  best  work  in  the  city  where  located. 
Very  best  reason  given  for  selling.  A  bargain 
as  to  price  will  be  given.      Address 

"New  York," 
Office  Philadelphia  Photographer. 


Jacoby  has  a  clear  patent  on  his  printing- 
frame,  and  it  does  not  infringe  on  the  MezzotiDt 
patent.  Parties  reporting  the  same  to  injure  the 
sale  of  his  frame  had  better  look  out.  Any  one 
buying  them,  can  use  them  without  fear  of  any 


VOI&TLAMR  &  SON  LENSES. 

Ryder's  Art  Gallery,  239  Superior  St., 
Cleveland,  Ohio,  Dec.  18,  1872. 

Benj.  French  &  Co. 

Dear  Sirs: — Twenty-four  years  ago  I 
bought  and  commenced  using  my  first 
Voigtlander  Lens.  It  was  a  good  one. 
Since  then  I  have  owned  and  used  a 
good  many  of  the  same  brand,  of  various 
sizes.     They  were  all  and  always  good. 

Some  of  the  larger  sizes  that  I  have 
recently  bought  seem  to  me  better  than 
any  I  have  ever  had  or  seen  before. 
Yours,  truly, 

J.  F.  RYDER. 


Trapp  &  Munch  received 
the  Medal  of  Merit  for  their 
Albumen  Paper,  at  the  Vien- 
na Exhibition. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Photograph  Gallery  for  Sale  at  a  bargain. 
Only  one  in  town.  Best  light  in  southern  Michi- 
gan. Good  lenses  (Ross  and  H.  B.  &  H.)  Plenty 
of  water,  large  dark-room;   in  fact  the  gallery  Stereoscopic  Negatives  Wanted. — Parties 

needs  but  to  be  seen  to  be  appreciated.  Will  sell  having  for  sale  new,  unused,  stereo,  negatives  of 
contents  of  gallery  and  give  lease,  or,  if  preferred,  attractive  American  scenery,  will  oblige  us  by 
will  dispose  of  the  building.     Address       J.H.  sending  a  list  of  them  and  the  prices. 

Box  94,  Jonesville,  Hillsdale  Co.,  Mich.  Benerman  &  Wilson,  Phila. 

ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS,  1874,  $4.50. 


Office  of  Wilson,  Hood  &  Co., 
Dealers  in  Photographic  Requisites,  Frames, 
Stereoscopes,  and  Views, 
No.    822    Aiich    Street, 
•■  Philadelphia,  September  20, 1873. 

We  have  pleasure  of  announcing  that  we  have 
in  stock  a  sniiill  lot  of  Albumen  Paper  of  the  cele- 
brated manufacture  of  the  Albion  Albuminizing 
Co.,  of  London,  England. 

Following  are  colors,  quality,  and  price  : 

White  Saxe per  ream,  $34  00 

Blue         "      "  34  00 

Pink         "     "  34  00 

White  Rives, "  33  00 

Blue         "     "  33  00 

Pink         "     "  33  00 

We  have  had  it  well  tried  and  can  advise  our 
customers  to  purchase. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Wanted. — Agents  to  travel  through  the  seve- 
ral states.  None  need  apply  except  practical 
photographers,  and  those  acquainted  with  the 
use  of  the  solar  camera.     Apply  to 

H.  L.  Emmons,  Baltimore,  Md. 

SITUATIONS  0PEN7 

$5=  Advertisements  in  this  department  of  Special- 
ties will  be  inserted  at  twenty-five  cents  for  every  seven 
words,  or  fraction  of  seven  words,  and  must  be  paid  for 
when  the  advertisement  is  sent;  stamps  for  answers 
should  also  be  sent,  unused  stamps  returned.  Each 
advertiser  will  be  given  a  number,  and  the  answers 
all  coming  to  this  office  will  be  forwarded  promptly 
and  confidentially  to  him.  This  column  is  for  the 
aid  of  photographers  needing  assistants,  and  an  ad- 
vertisement in  it  is  sure  to  bring  just  what  is  wanted. 

For  a  first-class  printer  and  toner.  Wages  $20 
per  week.  Do  not  apply  unless  you  are  worth 
the  money.  Address  "23,"  care  Philadelphia 
Photographer. 

For  a  retoucher.  A  native  German  preferred. 
Nothing  but  negative  retouching  to  do.  State 
terms.  Address  "]1,"  care  Philadelphia  Pho- 
tographer. 

For  a  lady  attendant,  who  would  also  be  ex- 
pected to  mount  and  touch  out  spots  in  prints, 
in  a  small  western  gallery.  Address  "42,"  care 
Philadelphia  Photographer. 

For  a  young  man  wishing  instructions  in  pho- 
tography. Wages  paid  according  to  usefulness. 
Address  "  112, "  care  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

Wanted  at  once.  A  man  of  known  and  ac 
knowledged  ability  as  operator.  He  must  be  of 
good  address,  good  habits,  orderly,  and  careful 
in  his  work  ;  a  good  positionist ;  understanding 
the  production  of  shadow  effect  and  stylish  work, 
and,  with  an  assistant  in  the  dark-room,  be  able 
to  make  forty  negatives  a  day,  The  situation  is 
in  one  of  the  best  galleries  in  the  country,  in  a 
city  of  150,000  inhabitants.  The  man  who  can 
meet  the  above  requirements  can  have  a  perma- 
nent situation,  will  be  fully  appreciated,  and 
paid  all  his  services  are  worth.  He  will  please 
address  Proprietor,  care  Philadelphia  Photog- 
rapher;  stating  all  such  facts  in  information  as 
will  be  desired  by  "Proprietor.'' 

For  a  first-class  water  colorist  and  crayon 
worker.  Address  "43,"  care  of  Benerman  & 
Wilson. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

WATMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPEES. 

"  I  am  using  and  like  them  very  much 
thus  far."— A.  MARSHALL,  Boston. 

"A  sensible  improvement." — GEO.  S. 
COOK,  Charleston,  S.  C. 


The  Rapid  Photo.  Washer 
is  a  perfect  success,  and  it 
is  something  that  has  long 
been  needed. 


SITUATIONS    WANTED. 

( No  charge  for  advertisements  under  this  head  : 

limited  to  four  lines.     Inserted  once  only , 

unless  by  request.) 

>8£g=*  We  cannot  have  letters  directed  to  our  care 

unless  the  parties  send  for  them,  and  send  stamps  to 

pay  postage.    We  cannot  undertake  to  mail  them ; 

please  do  not  request  it. 

As  a  good  operator,  in  a  gallery  in  New  Eng- 
land, or  in  eastern  or  central  New  York.  Ad- 
dress P.  L.,  box  122,  Bridgeport,  Ct. 

By  a  first-class  toner  and  printer.  Can  work 
in  the  darkroom.  Address  "Business,''  care  of 
C.  R.  Bronson,  Bridgeport,  Ct. 

In  city  or  country,  as  first-class  painter  on  por- 
celain and  albumen  ;  also,  an  A  No.  1  negative 
retoucher.  The  best  wages  expected.  Address 
Henry  Muraour,  care  of  Mr.  Debauveris,  2,  4,  & 
6  Howard  Street,  New  York. 

By  a  practical  artist  in  crayon,  water  colors, 
and  India  ink.  Have  long  experience.  New 
England  or  Middle  States  preferred.  Address 
Theo.  Harding,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

As  operator  and  retoucher.  Address  Pleasant 
C.  Hunter,  284  Green  Mt.  Av.,  Baltimore,  Md. 

In  a  first-class  Eastern  gallery,  as  printer  and 
toner  or  rperator's  assistant.  Address  Ed.  E. 
Bliss,  147  Adams  Avenue,  Detroit,  Mich. 

As  a  negative  retoucher.  References  :  J.  H. 
Lampson,  Portland,  Me.  ;  F.  W.  Hardy,  Bangor, 
Me.     Address  Henry  C.  Call,  Bangor,  Me. 

By  an  artist.  Can  work  in  water  colors,  ink, 
and  crayon  ;  or  can  assist  in  dark-room.  Ten 
years'  experience.  Address  0.  L.,  care  of  Slee 
Bros.,  Poughkeepsie,  New  York. 

In  some  gallery,  as  printer  or  assistant  ope- 
rator; have  had  six  years' experience.  Can  give 
good  reference.  Address  Billie,  care  P.  0.  box 
253,  Mobile,  Ala. 

In  a  good  gallery,  by  a  thoroughly  practical 
artist  in  water  colors,  crayon,  and  India  ink. 
Am  a  good  workman  and  give  good  likenesses. 
Address  J.  Roche,  Artist,  Station  D,  New  York 
City. 

As  a  retoucher,  in  a  first-class  gallery,  after 
the  10th  of  April.  Address  M.  E.  Torrey, 
Drawer  254,  Kalamazoo,  Mich. 

By  a  lady,  a  situation  as  a  good  negative  re- 
toucher. Address  Miss  L.  Benning,  Holtsville, 
Suffolk  Co.,  Long  Island,  New  York. 

By  a  lady,  as  a  good  negative  retoucher  j  can 
also  finish  photographs  in  oil,  water  colors,  or 
India  ink.  Samples  of  work  on  hand.  Address 
S.  E.  P.,  Box  54,  Ovid.  Seneca  Co.,  N.  Y. 


ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  BOOK  AND  MOSAICS,  1874,  $4.50. 


By  a  gentleman  who  thoroughly  understands 
the  different  branches  of  the  picture  business  ; 
would  prefer  a  situation  in  a  frame  manufactory, 
stock  depot,  or  art  store.  Address  Artist,  Box 
54,  Ovid,  N.  Y. 

An  A  No.  1  operator,  speaking  French  and 
German,  at  present  engaged  in  a  leading  gallery 
in  New  York,  is  open  for  an  engagement  from 
April  1st ;  at  fair  salary,  or  interest  in  good  gal- 
lery in  lieu  of  his  services.  Address  "  Veritas," 
care  Mr.  L.  Dubernet,  15  Amity  St.,  N.  Y.  City. 

By  an  artist,  in  a  first-class  gallery,  to  work 
in  India  ink  and  water  colors  ;  also,  negative 
retouching.  Address  Artist,  81  Breckenridge, 
Street,  Buffalo. 

As  assistant  in  a  first-class  gallery,  chance  for 
improving  and  permanent  situation  more  of  an 
object  than  salary.  West  preferred.  Address 
Photo.,  care  box  364,  Oil  City,  Penna. 

By  a  young  man,  having  had  five  years'  ex- 
perience in  the  business,  and  being  fully  enabled 
to  operate,  retouch,  print,  and  tone.  I  will  work 
for  salary  or  rent  rooms.  Address  C.  F.  Voigt, 
661  Short  Street,  Milwaukee,  Wis. 

By  a  first-class  photograph  printer.  Salary 
$18  per  week.  Address  A.  Thiese,  box  731 
Taunton,  Mass. 

By  a  first-class  printer.  Best  of  references 
given.  For  further  particulars,  address  Chas. 
W.  Hearn,  123  Congress  St.,  Portland,  Maine. 


SOCIETY  CALENDAR. 

(Published  for  the  convenience  of  Visiting  Pho- 
tographers and  those  desiring  to  correspond.) 

Xi®*  This  Calendar  is  published  free  to  the  Socie- 
ties, and  we  shall  feel  obliged  for  notice  of  any  changes 
in  time  of  meeting  or  in  the  officers,  also  to  add  any 
we  have  overlooked. 

Boston  Photographic  Association. — At  J.  W. 
Black's  studio,  the  first  Friday  of  each  month. 
E.  J.  Foss,  President ;  C.  H.  Danforth,  Secre- 
tary, 27  Central  Square,  Cambridgeport. 

Photographic  Section  of  the  American  Insti- 
tute, New  York. — At  the  Institute  rooms,  the 
first  Tuesday  of  each  month.  H.  J.  Newton, 
President ;  Oscar  G.  Mason,  Secretary,  Bellevue 
Hospital. 

German  Photographic  Society,  New  York.  — 
At  Nos.  64  and  66  East  Fourth  Street,  New 
York,  every  Thursday  evening.  W.  Kurtz,  Presi- 
dent ;  Edward  Boettcher,  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, 79  Newark  Avenue,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 


Brooklyn  Photographic  Art  Association, 
Brooklyn,  N.  Y. — Fourth  Tuesday  in  each  month, 
at  179  Montague  Street.  Rev.  Dr.  C.  H.  Hall. 
President;  Chas.  E.  Bolles,  Cor.  Secretary. 

Maryland  Photographic  Association,  .Balti- 
more.— At  rooms  of  C.  A.  Wilson,  7  North 
Charles  Street,  first  Thursday  in  each  month. 
N.  H.  Busey,  President ;  G.  0.  Brown,  Secretary, 
Baltimore,  Md. 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia,. — At  No. 
520  Walnut  Street,  third  floor,  first  Wednesday 
of  each  month.  J.  C.  Browne,  President;  E. 
Wallace,  Jr.,  Secretary,  1130  Spruce  Street. 

Pennsylvania  Photographic  Association,  Phil- 
adelphia..— At  the  galleries  of  the  members.  H- 
H.  Phillips,  President ;  R.  J.  Chute,  Secretary, 
Office  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

Photographic  Association  of  the  District  of 
Columbia,  Washington,  D.  C. — E.  J  Pullman, 
President ;  C.  M.  Bell,  Secretary,  459  Pennsyl- 
vania Ave  ,  Washington.   First  Tuesday,  monthly. 

Indiana  Photographic  Association. — At  Indi- 
anapolis, first  Wednesday  monthly.  J.  Perry 
Elliott,  President;  D.  0.  Adams,  Secretary,  In- 
dianapolis. 

Photographic  Association  of  Western  Illinois. — 
At  Galesburg,  first  Wednesday  of  October,  Janu- 
ary, April,  and  July.  S.  T.  Bryan,  President  ; 
J.  F.  Barker,  Secretary,  Galesburg. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association. — At  rooms 
of  C.  W.  Stevens,  158  State  Street,  first  Wednes- 
day evening  of  each  month.  G.  A.  Douglas, 
President ;  0.  F.  Weaver,  Secretary,  158  State 
Street. 

Chicago  Photographic  Institute,  Chicago. — 
1st  Monday,  monthly,  at  Chicago  Art  Institute. 
A.  Hesler,  President ;  L.  M.  Melander,  Secre- 
tary, Chicago. 

Buffalo  Photographic  Association. — At  Buffa- 
lo, the  first  Wednesday  evening  of  each  month. 
J.  Samo,  President ;  Jennie  M.  Crockett,  Sec'y. 


The  subscriber  desires  to  call  attention  to  an  Entirely  New  Style  of  Carved  Frame, 
unique,  handsome,  and_stylish,  and  very  becoming  to  photographs,  which  he  is  now  manu- 
facturing, and  will  furnish  at  the  following  prices  : 


4x5     @  $6  00  per  doz. 
5^x7^®    9  00        " 
6>|x83^@  12  00 

7"x9   @  12  00 


8  x  10  @  $15  00  per  doz. 

9x11  @  15  00    " 

10x12  @  18  00   " 

11  x  14  @  24  00 


12x16 
13  x  17 

16x20 


$30  00  per  doz. 
36  00 

,  42  00 


Larger  sizes  $3.00  per  dozen  for  each  additional  four  inches  or  less  in  length  and  breadth. 
Sample  of  each  size,  except  the  two  smallest,  sent  on  receipt  of  price.  Orders  for  one  dozen 
or  more  filled  C.O.D.  if  ten  per  cent,  is  sent  with  order. 

H.  H.  SNELLINC,  Scarsdale,  N.  Y. 


A***lt**OKT 


We  are  informed  that  some  of  our  competitors  are  advancing  the  prices  of 

PHOTOGRAPHIC    GOODS, 

and  we  have  been  requested  to  do  the  same,  but  have  declined  to  enter  into  any  combination 
whatever. 

PUnfJlflPDADTIFDC!    can  rest  assured  that  we  shall   fl@»  T  f)W   LDTPPCI 
inUlUllMinMO  adhere  strictly  to  our  jg@-  LU  TT     llUOlljQ 


as  published  in  our  Catalogue  of  August,  1873,  until  further  notice.  The  prices  therein  quoted 
are  the  lowest  yet  made,  and  all  who  have  not  received  that  list  will  please  send  us  their 
address,  when  it  will  be  promptly  forwarded. 

Notice  our  very  low  prices  on 

Ferrotype  Plates,  Camera  Boxes,  &c. 

Everything  sold  at  bottom  figures,  and  all  orders  executed  to  the  letter,  and  with  the 
greatest  of  promptness. 

Agents  for  the  Northwest  for  Weston's  Rotary  Burnishers  and  Scotch  Albu- 

butnen  Paper. 

RIOE  &  THOMPSON'S 

Mammoth  Stock  House,  259  Wabash  Av.,  Chicago. 


13.     J. 

SOUTHERN 

Photographic^Ferrotype 

STOCK  DEPOT, 
Savannah,  Geo. 

FIRST-CLASS  STOCK 

AT  NORTHERN  PRICES, 

Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance, 
crqssgupm/est.pha:^ — r^s?-— ^-  Dray  age,  <xe. 

SBlsTD     FOB    P.RIOB    LIST. 


GOODS 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALMOST  NOTHING. 


BARGAINS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 

The  Late  Fire 

In  Sherman's  Building  having  caused  a  portion  of  our  stock  of  Books  and 
Magazines  to  be  deluged  with  water,  we  offer  the  following  bargains  to  opera- 
tors, assistants,  employers,  &c. : 


86 

43 

147 

41 

72 

16 

26 

32 

129 

160 

6 

11 

84 

70 

46 

1452 

1236 


Copies 


Dr.  Vogel's  Reference-Book,      .     .     .     . 
Anderson's  Skylight  and  Dark-Room,     . 
"  Comic  All-my-Knacks    (paper) 

"  "  (cloth), 

How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph,       " 


3aper) . 


Carbon  Manual  (cloth), 
Photographic  Mosaics  (cloth), 
"  "         (paper), 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 
Wilson's  Landscape  Studies,  . 
Bigelow's  Albums,  .... 
Year-Book  of  Photography,  . 
Glimpses  at  Photography, 
How  to  Paint  Photographs  (cloth), 
Photographic  World  (1871  and  1872), 
Philadelphia  Photographer  (1865  to  1874), 


$0  50 
1  25 
20 
30 
20 
10 
50 
30 
25 
25 

1  50 

2  50 
25 
50 
75 
10 
15 


The  above  goods  were  WET  and  not  burned.  They  are  now  dry,  and  for 
all  practical  uses  as  good  as  new  books,  but  so  stained  that  we  cannot  sell  them 
for  new,  and  we  offer  them  for  one  month  only,  at  the  above  rates. 

LET  THE  ORDERS  COME  NOW  !  One  dollar  will  buy  lots  of  useful 
reading!     A  good  chance  to  fill  up  back  volumes  of  our  Magazines. 

State  your  orders  explicitly. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photographic  Publishers, 

SEVEUTII  &  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 

For  one  month  ONLY!    For  ONE  month!       \ 


The  National  Photographers'  Chemical  Co. 

WM.  S.  PENDLETON,  President.  JOSEPH  N.  MADDOX,  Secretary. 

AUGUSTUS  JENNINGS,  General  Superintendent. 

Office,  No.  352  Pearl  Street,  New  York  City. 


Capital  Stock,  $300,000,  divided  into  3000  Shares,  of  $100  each. 

The  objects  for  which  said  Company  is  formed  are  the  following,  viz.  :  The  purchase  of  SHAW'S 
PATENT  PROCESS,  for  recovering  silver  and  gold  from  spent  and  waste  photographic  solutions  and 
washings  ;  the  selling  of  rights,  and  the  granting  of  licences  under  said  patent;  collecting  and  reduc- 
ing of  photographic  waste,  and  refining  of  gold  and  silver. 

This  Company  being  fully  Incorporated  under  the  Laws  of  the  State  of  New  York,  no  liability 
attaches  to  any  stockholder  beyond  the  payment  of  the  amount  of  capital  stock  subscribed  for — which 
may  be  paid  by  installments  of  $5.00  per  month,  upon  each  share  subscribed  for,  or  may  be  paid  in 
photographic  waste,  at  the  option  of  each  subscriber,  and  we  obligate  ourselves  to  work  the  waste  for 
all  of  our  stockholders  at  10  per  cent.,  to  the  amount  of  $100  annually,  for  every  share  of  stock  held 
by  each  after  such  stock  is  paid  for. 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  Mr.  Shaw  to  r9mit  all  claims  for  past  use  or  infringement  of 
his  said  patent,  which  he  may  have  against  any  photographer  who  subscribes  for  stock  in  our  Com- 
pany— proportionate  to  the  amount  of  such  claim — prior  to  the  first  of  July  next. 

We  will  also  receive  in  payment  for  subscription  to  our  capital  stock,  from  all  photographers  who 
have  subscribed  and  paid  therefor,  all  certificates  of  the  capital  stock  of  the  Shaw  &  Wilcox  Com- 
pany, at  their  par  value,  provided  such  certificates  are  presented  for  exchange  prior  to  the  first  of 
August  next. 

We  have  likewise  made  such  arrangements  with  Mr.  Shaw,  that  all  photographers  who  have 
heretofore  subscribed  for  the  stock  of  the  Shaw  &  Wilcox  Company,  and  have  paid  any  portion  of 
such  subscription,  or  who  hold  any  other  valid  claim  against  said  Shaw  &  Wilcox  Company,  can, 
by  corresponding  with  Mr.  Shaw,  obtain  from  him  a  due-bill  for  the  amount  of  their  claim,  which 
said  due-bill  will  be  accepted  by  us  at  its  face  value,  in  payment  for  subscription  to  our  capital  stock, 
provided  the  same  is  presented  to  us  prior  to  the  first  day  of  August  next. 

In  fact,  we  have  secured  from  Mr.  Shaw  such  exceedingly  liberal  terms  for  the  purchase  of  his 
Patent  that  no  inducement  whatever  is  left  for  any  one  to  oppose  it,  as  the  cost  attendant  upon  a 
single  suit  would  be  far  more  than  a  share  or  two  of  the  stock  ;  and  when  such  suit  was  ended,  the 
photographer  would  have  nothing  for  his  mffney,  let  the  case  go  which  way  it  would.  Whereas,  by 
expending  one-fourth  of  the  cost  of  such  suit  in  the  stock  of  our  Company,  he  can  make  a  profitable 
investment,  besides  securing  for  himself  the  free  use  of  the  patent,  and  the  right  of  having  all  of  his 
waste  worked  at  10  per  cent.,  if  he  so  elects. 

We  would  therefore  urge  upon  all  photographers  throughout  the  land  to  unite  with  and  assist  us 
in  consummating  the  purchase  now,  while  it  may  be  had  upon  such  exceedingly  advantageous  terms, 
and  thus  save  the  entire  fraternity  from  all  further  cost  and  annoyance  from  harrasing  litigation. 

Among  those  who  have  already  subscribed  for  stock  in  our  Company  will  be  found  the  following 
names,  who  will  be  recognized  at  once  as  among  the  leading  and  most  prominent  photographers  of 
the  country  : 


Shares. 

Wm.  S.  Pendleton,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y 10      $1000 

Frank  Jewell,  Scranton,  Pa 10  1000 

Edward  Klauber,  Louisville,  Ky 7  700 

I.  B.  Webster,  Louisville,  Ky 5  500 

Henry  Rocher,  Chicago,  111 5  500 

Allen  &  Rowell,  Boston,  Mass 5  500 

James  W.  Black,  Boston,  Mass 5  500 

James  W.  Turner,  Boston,  Mass 3  300 


Shares . 

A.  N.  Hardy,  Boston,  Mass 3  8300 

Wm.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia,  Pa 5  500 

Albert  Moore,  Philadelphia,  Pa 5  500 

Chas.  H.  Williamson,  Brooklyn,  N.Y..  5  500 

Alva  Pearsall,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y 5  500 

Joseph  N.  Maddox,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y 5  500 

Charles  K.  Bill,  New  York 5  500 

Richard  A.  Lewis,  New  York 2  200 


Surely,  no  photographer  should  hesitate  for  a  moment  to  join  an  enterprise  endorsed  and  sup- 
ported by  such  names  as  the  above. 

Aside  from  the  advantages  to  accrue  from  securing  the  free  use  of  the  patent  for  ourselves,  there 
is  no  doubt  but  it  will  prove  a  profitable  investment,  as  Mr.  Shaw  has  already  made  contracts  with 
upwards  of  twelve  hundred  of  the  leading  galleries  of  the  country,  whereby  he  is  to  work  their  waste 
at  25  per  cent.,  so  that,  allowing  the  waste  from  these  twelve  hundred  to  yield  him  an  average  of  only 
$25  a  year  each,  he  is  sure  now  of  at  least  thirty  thousand  dollars  a  year  income  from  the  patent  as 
it  stands — a  sum  sufficient  to  pay  a  dividend  of  10  per  cent,  upon  our  entire  capital  stock.  We, 
therefore,  cordially  invite  your  co-operation  in  securing,  if  possible,  within  the  next  ninety  days 
sufficient  subscription  to  not  only  enable  us  to  purchase  the  patent,  but  to  secure  all  of  Mr.  Shaw's 
contracts  with  outsiders,  and  thus  make  a  paying  investment  from  the  start,  besides  securing  the  free 
use  of  the  patent  for  ourselves.     For  further  particulars,  address 

AUGUSTUS  JENNINGS,  Gen'l  Supt,  352  Pearl  St,  New  York  City. 


Photographic  Card  Warehouse. 


A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 

MANUFACTURERS, 

No.  18  South  Sixth  St.  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 

PHILADELPHIA. 


EVERYTHING  APPERTAINING  TO  THE   LINE   OF  OUR 

MANUFACTURES  FURNISHED  WITH  CARE 

AND  PROMPTNESS. 


Our  long  experience  in  and  facilities  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods,  and 
familiarity  with  the  peculiar  wants  of  Photographers,  enable  us  to  offer  superior  induce- 
ments to  those  who  may  favor  us  with  their  orders. 


JAMES  F.  MAGEE  &  CO. 

MANUFACTURERS    OF 

PURE 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMICALS, 

No.  108  North  Fifth  Street, 


Stock  Dealers  only  Supplied. 


LANTERN  SLIDES. 


>©R  © 


SELECTED  FROM 


«CO»8B  *  FOREICH  <CAT.Afc<0«Yr*& 


EMBRACING 


Views  of  all  Parts  of  the  World ! 


PLAIN,  00L0EED,  AND  COMIC 

LANTERN   SLIDES, 


OF  ALL  KINDS,  AT  LOW  PRICES. 


SCIOPTICONS  AND  LANTERNS  SUPPLIED. 


SELECTIONS     MADE     PERSONALLY. 


ALSO,  GLASS  STEREOSCOPIC  PICTURES. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

South  west  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia, 


Photographic  Publications,  1874. 

Knowing  the  advantages  of  well-written  works  on  Photography  to  our 
readers,  we  issue  our  annual  catalogue,  that  they  may  have  the  opportunity 
of  selecting  the  very  best.  We  always  find  the  photographer  who  reads 
what  is  published  pertaining  to  his  profession,  to  be  the  photographer  who 
succeeds  in  his  business  the  best.  Above  all,  those  who  regularly  and  contin- 
ually receive  a  good  photographic  magazine  are  those  who  are  always  ahead 
with  new  goods,  new  styles,  and  new  information.  We  recommend  an  in- 
vestment in  a  part  or  all  of  the  list  below,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  them  to 
you  on  receipt  of  price. 

CATALOGUE. 

A  The  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

ne  oldest,  best,  and  most  popular  Photographic  Magazine  in  America.  Eleventh  Year.  Please  read  the 
ospectus  on  page  three  of  cover  and  premium  list  opposite.  Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2.50  for  six 
onths,  in  advance.    Current  number,  50  cents.    Specimen  copies,  free. 

B  The  Shy  light  and  the  Darh-LLoom. 

By  Elbert  Anderson,  operator  at  Kurtz's  studio,  New  York.  This  is  the  most  beautiful  and  elaborate 
work  on  the  art  ever  published.  It  contains  nearly  250  pages — large.,  square — twelve  photographs  made  by  the 
author  to  illustrate  the  lessons  of  the  work,  and  almost  two  hundred  fine  wood-cuts.  See  advertisements. 
Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  postpaid,  $4.00. 

O  Photographic  Mosaics. 

The  1874  edition  excels  all  of  its  eight  older  brethren.  The  list  oi  articles  is  made  up  of  original  contribu- 
tions, written  especially  for  its  pages,  on  all  departments  of  the  art,  whoj  ly  by  practical  men  who  are  only  heard 
from  once  a  year  through  the  persuasion  of  the  editor,  in  this  way.  See  special  advertisement.  146  pages. 
Paper  cover,  50  cents.    Cloth,  $1.    A  few  copies  of  former  editions,  from  1866,  at  same  price. 

D  The  Ferrotyper' 's  Guide. 

A  new  work  on  the  Ferrotype.    Price.  75  cents. 

E       Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

This  is  not  exactly  a  book,  but  a  collection  of  24  large  Victoria  size  photographic  studies  in  lighting  and 
posing,  made  especially  to  teach  how  to  light  and  pose  ordinary  and  extra-ordinary  subjects  in  all  the  plain, 
fancy,  "  Rembrandt"  and  "Shadow"  styles.  It  is  accompanied  by  an  explanatory  key  of  instructions,  together 
with  a  diagram  for  each  picture,  showing  how  the  sitter  and  the  camera  were  placed  in  the  skylight,  their 
relation  to  the  background,  and  what  blinds  were  opened  and  closed  at  the  time  of  the  sitting.  It  almost 
supplies  a  rule  by  which  you  can  quickly  tell  how  to  manage  every  subject  that  comes  to  you.  The  studies  are 
mounted  on  folding  leaves,  so  that  twelve  can  be  examined  at  once.    Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  $6,  postpaid. 

F  Wilson's  Landscape  Studies. 

An  album  of  landscape  studies  in  style  similar  to  Bigelow's  Album,  containing  ten  5x8  views,  with  the 
ormula,  &c,  by  George  Washington  Wilson,  Esq.,  the  renowned  Scotch  landscape  photographer.  A  splendid 
work.    In  cloth,  gilt,  $4. 

G  Handbook  of  the  Practice  and  Art  of  Photography. 

By  Dr.  Vogel.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  during  the  year. 

H     How  to  Paint  Photographs  in  Water  Colors. 

A  practical  Handbook  designed  especially  for  the  use  of  Students  and  Photographers,  containing  directions 
for  Brush  Work  in  all  descriptions  of  Photo-Portraiture,  Oil,  Water  Colors,  Ink,  How  to  Retouch  the  nega- 
tive, &c.    By  George  B.  Ayres,  Artist.  Third  edition.    Differing  largely  from  previous  editions.    Price,  $2.00. 


I  Pictorial  Effect  in  Photography : 

By  H.  P.  Robinson,  Loudon.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  in  preparation. 

J  How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph. 

This  is  a  fine  little  work  of  48  pages,  written  by  the  wife  of  a  celebrated  New  York  photographer,  for  the 
purpose  of  educating  the  public  on  the  all-important  subject  of  sitting  for  a  picture.  It  is  bound  iu  cloth  at  60 
cents  per  copy,  and  paper  cover  30  cents. 

K  Lookout  Landscape  Photography . 

By  Prof.  R.  M.  Linn,  Lookout  Mountain,  Tenn.  A  pocket  manual  for  the  outdoor  worker,  and  full  of  good 
for  every  photographer.    75  cents.    Be  sure  to  get  it. 

L      Himes's  Leaf  Prints;  or,  Glimpses  at  Photography. 

By  Prof.  Charles  F.  Himes,  Ph.D.  Full  of  useful  information  for  the  photographic  printer.  Illustrated 
with  a  whole-size  photograph.    Cloth,  $1.25. 

M  The  American  Carbon  Manual. 

By  Edw.  L.  Wilson.  A  complete  manual  of  the  Carbon  process  from  beginning  to  end.  With  a  fine 
example  by  the  process.    Cloth,  $2.00. 

N        Ayres's  Chart  of  Photographic  Drapery. 

This  is  a  photograph  of  forty-two  pieces  of  cloth,  of  all  the  colors  and  shades,  handsomely  mounted  on  a 
card.  It  should  be  hung  in  every  reception-room,  to  show  your  customers  what  color  dresses  to  wear,  and  to 
show  you  what  sort  of  backgrounds  and  accessories  to  use.    Price,  $2.00. 

O  The  Photographer  to  His  Patrons. 

A  splendid  little  twelve-page  leaflet,  which  answers  all  vexatious  questions  put  to  you  by  your  sitters,  and 
serves  as  a  grand  advertising  medium.  It  is  for  photographers  to  give  away  to  their  customers.  Send  for  a 
copy  and  an  illustrated  circular.  Over  300,000  already  sold  and  in  use  all  over  the  country.  $20.00  for  1000, 
$35.00  for  2000,  and  so  on.    Printed  and  supplied  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

P  Pretty  Faces. 

A  leaflet  much  smaller  than  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons,"  for  the  same  purpose,  but  costing  less,  viz. : 
1000  copies,  $10.00  ;  2000,  $17.50,  and  larger  orders  at  less  rates. 

Q,  The  Year- Booh  of  Photography. 

By  G.  Wharton  Simpson.  English  edition.  Similar  to  Mosaics,  and  full  of  good,  short,  practical  articles. 
50  cents.    1869, 1870, 1871, 1872,  and  1873  now  on  hand.    1874,  about  January  20th. 

R     Elbert  Anderson's  Photo-  Comic  Allmyhnack. 

A  complete  Almanac,  full  of  witty  sayings,  jokes,  puns,  stories,  etc.,  etc.  Profusely  illustrated  with  comic 
and  original  sketches,  yet  all  interspersed  with  much  practical  matter  of  value  to  every  photographer.  Price, 
75  cents. 

S  Photographers'  Pocket  Reference- Booh. 

By  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  of  Berlin.  A  dictionary  of  all  the  terms  used  in  the  art,  and  contains  formulas  for  almost 
every  known  manipulation.  Altogether  different  from  any  work  ever  published.  Cloth,  $1.50.  See  special 
advertisement. 


To  save  writing,  photographers  may  order  the  above  of  us  by  the  marginal  letters,  thus,  "  Please  send  us 
one  copy  of  each,  book  A,  B,  K,"  &c,  Ac.    Any  of  the  above  sent  post  free  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Benerman  &  Wilson's  Publications  sold  by  all  Dealers. 


EIL'S 


*% 


(JLetual  size  of  a  No.  1  Steinheil  JL^ns.) 


NEW  APLANATIC  LENSES 

FOR 

GROUPS, 

LANDSCAPES^    and 


COPIES. 

now  a  full  stock  of  these  celebrated  Lenses, 

at  the  following  prices  : 

No.  1,                            1-4  size, 

3^  inch  focus, 

$25  00 

"    2,                            1-2     " 

5i      ■  < 

30  00 

"    3,                            4-4     " 

7       " 

45  00 

"    4,                            8-10  " 

10i    «       .< 

60  00 

"    5,                          10-12  " 

13{     " 

70  00 

"    6,                          13-16   " 

16|     " 

110  00 

Nos.  1  and  2  are  in  matched  pairs  for  Stereoscopic  Work, 

THEY  ARE  IN  USE  BY  MOST  LEADING  PHOTOGRAPHERS,  INCLUDING 

GUTEKUNST,  BROADBENT  &  PHILLIPS,  DeMORAT, 

WENDEROTH,  FENNEMORE,  LOTHROP, 
And  many  others,  equally  well  known. 

We  feel  sure  that  at  least  one  of  these  Lenses  is  needful  for  the  successful  prosecution  of  your 
business,  and  so  solicit  your  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  States, 

No.  822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


MANUFACTURING   OPTICIAN, 

1314  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia. 

Sole  Manufacturer  of  the  Stereo-Panopticon  and  Artopticon,  warranted  to  be  the  most 
perfect  and  powerful  Magic  Lanterns  made. 


MCALLISTER'S 

PATENT 

ARTOPTICON 


Each  lantern  is  adjustable  for  use 
with  powerful  coal  oil  light — oxycal- 
cium,  hydro-oxycalcium,  and  oxy- 
hydrogen  lights. 

Jg£§p='The  coal  oil  lamp  used  gives 
very  much  more  light  than  any  other 
lamp  yet  made. 

Giving  exhibitions  with  the  Artopti- 
con will  -prove  a  profitable  business  for 
a  man  ivith  a  small  capital. 

The   STEREO-PAIOPTICOI    is   an  improved   instrument,   suitable  for  giving 
exhibitions  of  dissolving  views  on  the  largest  scale.     Send  for  printed  description. 


MCALLISTER'S 

ENT    TINTER 


These  tinters  are  used  for  giving  to  magic  lantern  pictures 
various  beautiful  tints  or  colors,  as  blue,  red,  yellow,  green, 
crimson,  &c,  &c.  They  can  be  adjusted  to  the  lantern,  either 
on  the  end  of  the  front  lens,  or  may  be  screwed  to  the  back 
of  the  front  lens-holder,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Stereo- Panop- 
ticon and  Educational  lanterns.  On  the  Artopticon,  they 
are  placed  on  the  end  of  the  front  lens  tube. 

NEW  and  BEAUTIFUL  SLIDES  for  LANTERN  USE  in  LARGE  VARIETY. 

Priced  and  Illustrated  Catalogues  free,  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  stamp. 


W.  MITCHELL  McALLISTER,  1314  Chestnut  St.,  Phila. 


C5^^ 


"  Great  Central 

CASH 


Pure 
A 


w      S3 
o      05 


Photographic 
Warehouse, 


CO 

fa 

Q 


Z    ^    CO 

^  H  I13 
b  05  g 


Oh  £h 


ffl 


PQ  2  03 


03   H 


~0h  fc 
<1 


Q 
EH    S   H 

05  O  H 
H  £  <J 
g  <!  Cb  05 

O  O  £  0-i 


H 
<1 

05 
O 
Oh 

< 
> 

Q 

< 


State  St., 


Lowest  Prices 
Guarantee! 


DEALER  IN 


EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  TO 

PHOTOGRAPHY. 


CO 

O 

o 
o 

Q 


o 

H 
H 

O 

o 

5  05 
^  ° 


CO 


H  05 


<  < 


05  fc  td 

0<1Q 


tx2  X  t"1 

0-i  (_l  03 

P  05  O 

Oh  Cm  O-i 


DR.  VOGEL'S 

PHOTOGRAPHER'S 

Pocket  Reference-Book 

AND 

DICTIONARY: 

An  Alphabetically  arranged  collection  of  practically  important  hints  on  the  construction 
of  the  Gallery  ;  selection  and  trial  of  lenses  and  chemicals  ;  approved  formulae  for  the  differ- 
ent photographic  processes  ;  tables  of  weights  and  measures  ;  rules  for  avoiding  failure,  etc., 
etc.,  for 

Photographers  and  Amateurs, 

IS  EECEIVING  THE  HIGHEST  PKAISE  WHEEEVEE  IT  GOES. 


IT  IS  A  BOOK  EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER  SHOULD  HAVE, 

Because  it  is  a  ready  helper  under  all  difficult  circumstances. 


Extract  from  the  Minutes  of  the  Chicago  Photographic  Association,  Dec.  3. 

"Messrs.  Hall  and  Hesler  spoke  in  most  flattering  terms  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Pocket  Reference- Book,  of 
its  great  value  to  every  photographer,  and  expressed  the  hope  that  it  may  soon  be  found  in  every 
gallery." 


There  is  hardly  a  matter  occurring  in  your  daily  work  which  it  does  not  throw  light  upon 
and  make  easy.     Examine  it  for  yourself. 


For  sale  by  all  dealers.    Price,  $1.50,  post-paid. 

BBNERMAN&  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


*VC 


iVETt 


\** 


PAP  ERS. 


{See  opposite  page.) 


TBSTIMOITIALS: 

"  Waymouth's  Improved  Vignette  Papers  I  have  tried,  and  they  are  just  what  I  have  been  want- 
ing for  years." — Well  G.  Singhi. 

"  Being  composed  of  transparent  paper  there  is  no  risk  of  breakage,  and  it  readily  admits  of  the 
gradation  already  very  good,  being  modified  easily  to  suit  the  negative.  This,  I  take  it,  is  a  point  of 
great  importance.  This  lithographed  mask  on  transparent  paper  will,  I  think,  be  found  a  useful 
adjunct  in  vignetting." — G.  Wharton  Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A. 

"  From  a  trial  made,  we  are  enabled  to  say  that  they  answer  exceedingly  well  ;  and  they  are  certain 
to  find  favor  among  photographers — a  favor  they  well  deserve." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  can  testify  to  the  exquisite  softness  obtained  from  your  Vignette  Papers,  which  gradual  and 
soft  effect  I  have  never  seen  equalled  by  any  other  method.'' — H.  A.  H.  Daniel,  Esq.,  Hon.  Sec.  of  the 
Bristol  and  Clifton  Amateur  Photographic  Association. 

"  The  Way  mouth  Vignetting  Paper  are  a  decided  success.  They  are  splendid." — J.  W.  §■  J.  S. 
Moulton,  Salem,  Mass. 

From.  Professional  Photographers. — "First-class."  "The  sample  sent  answers  perfectly."  "I 
consider  them  first  rate  articles."  "I  think  your  Vignette  Papers  will  be  a  great  improvement  on 
the  old  glasses."     Ac.,  &o. 


Any  number  sent  on  receipt  of  price,  by  any  stockdealer,  or  by 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers, 

PHILADELPHIA . 


LIFE 

OMPOSITION 

FOR  THE  STEREOSCOPE. 


CATALOGUE. 


1.  Blowing  Bubbles. 

2.  B  stands  for  Bumble-B. 

3.  Blackberry  Blossoms. 

4.  The  Hen's  Nest. 

5.  Let  us  Have  Piece. 

6.  Mamma,  where  was  I  when  you  were 

a  little  girl  ? 

7.  Our  Domestic's  Kelations. 

8.  She  went  to  the  Butchers. 

9.  My  Lady  and  My  Lady's  Maid. 

10.  The  Mountain  Spring. 

11.  Unveiling  a  Statue  of  Young  America. 

12.  Young  America  in  the  Nursery. 

13.  Young  America  as  an  Artist. 

14.  Young  America  Asleep. 


15.  The  Sunbeam  Fairy. 

16.  The  Picture-Book. 

17.  Sitting  for  my  Picture. 

18.  Young  America  Bathing. 

19.  Young  Boston's  Ambition. 

20.  Ding-Dong-Ding,  Music  on  a  Bubber 

String. 

21.  Befiection. 

22.  The  Loiterers. 

23.  The  CabiD  Porch. 

24.  Beatrice  Shoo-Fly. 

25.  Home  Group. 

26.  A  View. 

27.  The  Gleaner. 


Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price.    $2.00  per  dozen. 

DEALERS  SUPPLIED  ON  GOOD  TERMS. 


These  inimitable  pictures  are  all  natural  compositions,  and  touch  the  tender  chords  of 
human  nature  most  wonderfully.  They  are  attractive  to  every  one  who  has  a  heart,  but 
particularly  instructive  as  studies  for  photographers,  in  grouping,  posing,  and  composition. 

They  will  help  any  man  make  better  and  easier  pictures  of  children,  and  should  be  studied. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,   Publishers, 

Seventh,  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 

ALBION  ALBUMENIZING  CO 

LONDON  AND  GLASGOW, 

Request  American  Photographers  to  give  their 
Paper  a  fair  trial. 


THE  SEVEEAL  BBANDS  FOE  SALE  BY 


PHILADELPHIA,  PA., 


SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

4  BEEKMAN  STEEBT,  NEW  YOEK. 

Mabion  I  Os  Specialties. 


ALBUMENIZED  PAPERS, 

Used  by  the  best  English  and  Colonial  photographers ;  Wilson,  of  Aberdeen ;  Vandyke 
&  Brown,  Liverpool ;  Notman,  Montreal;  Bourne  &  Shepherd,  India;  and  hundreds  of 
others. 

MOUNTS 

For  Cartes-de-Visite,  Cabinet,  and  larger  sizes,  of  the  very  best  style  and  quality,  as  made 
for  the  leading  English  and  Colonial  photographers.  We  will  post  samples  free  to  any 
photographer  on  receipt  of  application. 

GILT  AND  SILVER  ORMOLU  METAL  FRAMES, 

For  Miniatures,  Cartes-de-Visite,  and  Cabinets. 

PHOTOGRAPHS. 

The  largest  and  best  selected  stock  in  Great  Britain.  Upwards  of  1000  copies  of 
Modern  Paintings,  artistically  colored  in  water  colors;  English  and  Continental  Photogra- 
phic Views;  the  principal  Picture  Galleries;  Portraits  of  Eminent  Personages;  over  300,- 
000  in  stock. 

MARION  &  CO.,  22  &  23  Soho  Square,  LONDON,  ENGLAND. 


THE 


CHAMELEON  BAROMETER 


Invented  by  WALTER  B.  WOODBURY,  Esq.,  London. 


The  Greatest  Scientific  Novelty  of  the  Age. 


FORETELLS  the  WEATHER 


MAILED,  ON  RECEIPT  OF  PRICE,  BY 


BENERMAN  *  WILSON, 


Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts,,  Philadelphia. 


50  Cents.- 


50  Cents. 


New  York,  April  1,  1874. 

The  growing  taste  demands  elaborate  and 
highly  finished  backgrounds  both  interior  and 
exterior. 

Our  new  designs  are  specially  desirable. 

Can  you  make  a  good  picture  with  a  poor  back- 
ground ?     Inclose  stamp  for  samples. 

LAFAYETTE  W.  SEAVEY, 

8  Lafayette  Place,  Neiv  York. 


EXTRA! 
JVo.  70. 

A  New  Forest  Background.    Very  peculiar  and 
effective.     Introduced  by  Bogardus,  N.  Y. 

No.  71. 

A  Rich  Interior,  with   elaborate  tapestry  on 
walls.     Introduced  by  Mora,  N.  Y. 

See  other  advertisements. 


T  HE  E 

TERE°GRAp 

BOOK, 

ADAPTED    TO    THE 

COMPLETE  PRESERVATION  AND  CONVENIENT  ARRANGEMENT  OF 
THE  PICTURES  IN  THE  MOST  COMPACT  EORM, 

Prof.  CHARLES  F.  HUES,  M,  Inventor, 

Is  a  "  book"  made  after  the  plan  suggested  by  Prof.  Himes  in  the  "  Philadelphia 
Photographer" for  January,  1874- 

PRICE  50  CEISTTS. 

Dealers  and  Stereoscopic  Publishers  supplied  on  good  terms. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

A  NEW 
INVOICE 

JUST   RECEIVED 

OF 

LOESCHER  &  PETSCH'S 

ADMIRABLE 

STUDIES! 

The  praise  which  has  been  bestowed  upon  these  pictures,  particularly  at  the  Vienna  Exhibition,  convinces  us 
that  they  should  be  treasured  as  suitacle  models  of  pose  and  lighting  of  the  sitter,  harmonious  and  artistic  arrangement  of 
furniture,  etc.  These  photographs  are  the  only  European  ones  for  which  the  international  jury  awarded  the  two 
medals  for  progress  and  taste,  Mr.  Lewitzky,  a  photographer,  and  member  of  the  jury,  exclaimed :  "  The  exhi- 
bition of  Messrs.  Loescher  &  Petsch  has  charmed  me ;  according  to  my  opinion,  Loescher  &  Petsch,  in 
Europe,  and  Kurtz,  in  New  York,  are  the  first  photographers  of  the  world !" 

We  will  Express  the  sett  on  receipt  of  $30  ;  or  post  them  at  your  risk  to  any  address.  The  price  is  remarka- 
bly low,  as  each  print  is  most  carefully  made. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

J^-  See  review  of  these  pictures  in  the  "  Philadelphia  Photographer  "  for  December,  1873. 


jg  COKTST-A.KTTLY 

PHOTOGRAPHERS  USE 

WAYMOUTH'S 

VIGNETTING  PAPERS. 

(DESIGNS    COPYRIGHTED.) 


$ip*tte 


OP  ALL  PICTURES,  THE  Th|   I  I  PI   IF  IS  THE  MOST  ARTISTIC, 

When -properly  ■printed.  But  the  clumsy  devices  generally  in  use  for  printing  them, 
or  rather  for  blending  the  shading  about  the  figure,  produce  but  very  few  really  artistic 
vignette  pictures.  Either  the  shading  is  too  intensely  dark,  not  gradated  in  tint  at  all,  or 
it  shows  an  ugly  direct,  decided  line,  which  is  very  repulsive.  The  shading  should 
blend  gradually  from  the  dark  tint  nearest  to  the  figure,  off  into  the 
white  background.  The  results  are  then  soft,  artistic,  and  beautiful.  The  easiest  and 
best  way  to  secure  them  is  by  the  use  of 

WAYMOUTH'S  VICNETTE  PAPERS. 

THEY  ARE  NOT  CLUMSY ;  DO  NOT  BREAK  ;  ARE  ALWAYS  READY ;  COST 
BUT  LITTLE,  AND  ARE  EASY  OP  APPLICATION  TO  ANY  NEGATIVE. 

THEY  NEED  BUT  ONE  ADJUSTMENT  TO  PRINT  ANY  QUANTITY. 

They  entirely  do  away  with  all  the  Old  and  troublesome  methods,  either  wood,  metal, 
or  cotton. 

PLEASE  TRY  THE  SAMPLE  GIVEN  IN"  THIS  MAGAZINE  FOB  FEB.  1874. 


Eighteen  sizes  are  now  made,  suiting  all  dimensions  of  pictures  from  a  small  carte  figure 
to  Whole-size,  Victorias,  Cabinets,  &c.  They  are  printed  in  black  for  ordinary  negatives, 
yellow  bronze  for  thin  negatives,  and  red  bronze  for  still  weaker  ones.  Directions  for  use 
accompany  each  parcel. 

IP  JB  I  C  IE  S  : 

In  parcels  containing'  one  of  each  size,  Nos.  1  to  15,  assorted  colors $1  OO 

Assorted  sizes  and  colors,  by  number,  per  package  of  fifteen 1  OO 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  assorted  sizes  and  colors,  for  Cartes,  by  number,  per  dozen 50 

"        6,  7, 11, 12,  and  13,    "  "  "     Large  Cartes  and  Victorias,  by  number,  per  doz.,        75 

"        8,  9, 10, 14,  and  15,    "  "  "     Cabinets  and  Whole-size,  "  "  1  00 

16,  17,  and  18,  "  "  "     Half  "  "  "  "  1  25 

(SEE  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

When  ordering,  state  the  number  and  color  you  want.  The  Waymouth  Vignette  Papers 
are  an  English  invention,  and  are  becoming  so  universally  used  in  Europe  that  we  have 
pleasure  in  introducing  them  to  our  patrons.     We  own  the  copyright. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers,  m  and  Cherry,  Mafla. 

FOR   SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


msz-'Ar 


% 


9  mm  mfl*^ 


Messrs.  ROBINSON  &  CHERRILL 

Desire  to  announce  to  American  Photographers  that  they  have  perfected  a  speedy  and 
certain  method  of  making  BIJRNT-IJV  ENAMEL  PICTURES.  This  acquire- 
ment has  cost  them  the  outlay  of  much  money  and  time,  but  they  are  willing  to  communi- 
cate their  process  to  American  Photographers  if  a  willingness  to  partially  reimburse  them 
is  shown.  They  have  heretofore  given  to  the  fraternity  whatever  novelties  and  ideas  they 
have  had,  but  in  this  instance,  under  the  circumstances,  they  feel  that  they  will  not  be  con- 
sidered as  ungenerous  when  they  withhold  the  burnt-in  process.  They  propose  to  hold  it 
to  themselves  in  Europe,  but  offer  it  to  American  Photographers  on  the  following  terms  : 

Their  price  is  $5000.  If  one  hundred  photographers  subscribe  $50  each,  or  fifty  photog- 
raphers $100  each,  they  will  supply  each  subscriber  with  the  most  detailed  instructions  as  to 
the  process,  and  where  and  how  to  obtain  the  materials,  and  hereafter  post  each  subscriber 
on  all  matters  of  improvement  that  they  may  hereafter  discover.  The  time  will  be  limited 
to  June  1st,  187 4:* 

THE  RESULTS  LEAVE  NOTHING  TO  DESIRE. 

SAMPLES  MAY  BE  SEEN  AT 

124  North  Seventh  Street, 

PHILADELPHIA, 

And  all  communications  should  be  addressed  to 

ROBINSON  &  CHEKRILL, 

124 1,  Seyentl  SI,  PMMelpMa,  Pa. 


NO  MISTA KE! 

BEST  PORTRAIT  LENSES 


j^:r,:e 


Ohas.  F.  Usener's. 


TRY  THEM  and  BE  CONVINCED. 


Charles  Cooper  ty  Co., 

WHOLESALE  AGENTS, 

150  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

JOHN   R.  CLEMONS, 

IMPORTER  OF 
AND  MANUFACTURER  OF 

ALBUMEN  AND  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPERS. 

PINK  AND  BLUE  ALBUMEN  PAPER  CONSTANTLY  ON  HAND  OR  MADE  TO  ORDER, 

CLEMONS'  NEW  ALBUMEN   PAPER, 

A  superior  article  introduced  into  the  market  about  a  year  ago.  It.  is  equal,  if  not  superior  to  any  Paper 
imported ;  the  great  demand  proves  such  to  be  the  case.  It  is  praised  by  all  who  use  it  as  to  its  keeping 
white  during  warm  weather;  also,  for  its  brilliancy  and  toning  qualities,  and  it  is  made  White,  Pink,  and 
Blue.    Sizes  medium,  26  x  40  and  35  x  46. 

CLEMONS'  ARROWROOT  SALTED   PAPER 

Has  stood  the  test  above  all  other  makes  for  the  last  nine  years.  An  artiele'extensively  used  for  all  Plain, 
Solar,  and  Colored  Work.    Sizes,  17%  x  23,  26  x  40,  and  35  x  46. 

Prices  lower  than  those  of  any  foreign  make. 

CLEMONS'  N.  P.  A.  VARNISH, 

For  Plain  Work  and  Retouching  upon. 

CLEMONS'  GOLDEN  VARNISH, 

For  Intensifying  and  Retouching  upon. 

JOHN  R.  CLEMONS,  Manufacturer, 

915  SANSOM  ST.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


"Make  my  order  thirty  instead  of  twenty.  Lot  last  sent  are  all  gone." — Dr.  E.  Liesegang, 
Dusseldorf,  Germany. 

"Hurry  on  the  Bigelow  Albums  ordered.  We  are  out  and  orders  waiting. "—  Piper  &  Carter, 
London,  England. 


LIGHTING  AND  POSING. 
SELLS  ALL  OVER  THE  WORLD. 

A  NEW  EDITION  HAS  BEEN  ISSUED  WITH  AN  ENLARGED  KEY, 

AND  NEARLY  ALL  WEW  STVDIES. 

This   album  brings  lighting  and  posing  down  to  a 
system  at  once  plain,  easy  and  desirable. 

No  good,  intelligent  operator  can  afford 
to  tvork  without  it. 

It  Contains 

24  Victoria  Portrait  Studies 

in  Light  and  Pose, 

WITH  AN  EXPLANATORY  KEY, 

Telling  exactly  HOW  EACH  PICTURE    WAS 
MADE;   WHERE  THE  CAMERA  AND 
THE    SITTER     WERE    PLACED 
ivhen  it  was  m.ade ;  WHA  T  CUR- 
TAINS WERE  OPENED 
in  lighting  the  subject, 
$c;  SfC. 

A  diagram  of  the  interior  of  the  skylight  is  given  in  each  case,  telling  the  whole  story.    IT  IS  BOUND 
HANDSOMELY  IN  CLOTH,  GILT. 


NEW  KEY,  ENLARGED. 


NEW  PICTURES. 


'It  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  aids  to  art  education  which  has  yet  been  presented  to  the  photo, 
portraitist.  Each  print  represents  a  distinct  study  of  pose  and  lighting,  the  widest  variety  of  effects 
being  comprehended.  We  should  be  glad  to  see  it  in  the  hands  of  English  portraitists  generally." — 
Photo.  News. 

"  The  method  is  an  admirable  one  and  Mr.  Bigelow  deserves  credit  for  the  systematic  way  in  which 
he  has  carried  it  out." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  confess  that  this  work  has  furnished  me  much  instruction,  particularly  the  manner  in  which, 
by  word  and  picture,  studies  about  light  and  pose  are  explained  and  made  comprehensible." — Dr. 
Vogel. 

"  We  do  not  know  of  anything  ourselves  that  has  been  presented  to  the  trade  which  is  calculated 
to  do  so  much  real  good  as  Bigelow's  Album,  with  the  explanatory  key  to  the  studies.  It  is  an  in- 
valuable guide  to  the  portraitist." — Philadelphia  Photographer. 

It  is  considered  invaluable  by  the  practical  photographers  who  use  it. 


PRICE,  $6.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCKDEALERS. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


FOURT]  TjCOUSAND. 

Over 

3000  Copies 

HAVE  BEEN  SOLD. 

The  THIRD  EDITION  is  so  different  from  former  ones,  that  it  may  almost  be  said  that  it  is  a  new 
work. 

It  Gives  the  Best  and  Freshest  Instructions  to  be  had  on  the  Subject. 

Written  by  a  practical  photographic  colorist,  Mr.  Geo.  B.  Ayres. 

PRICE  $2.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Photographers  and  artists  whose  interest  it  is  to  produce  work  in  Water  Colors,  Oil,  India  Ink,  or 
who  wish  complete  instructions  in  retouching  negatives,  should  consult  Mr.  Ayres'  capital  work. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA. 

TRAPP  &  MUNCH'S 


gJktttttt 


Introduced  into  this  country  since  1868  has  become  the  leading  paper,  and  is 
now  better  known  and  more  appreciated  than  any  other  brand. 

That  this  great  success  is  well  deserved  and  due  to  its  excellent  qualities 
may  be  judged  from  the  fact,  that  of  all  the  competitors  of  the  Vienna  Ex- 
hibition, Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  alone  received  the 

:m::e:d.^:e_,  oif  :m::e:r,it 

for  Albumenized  Paper. 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALL  THE  STOCKHOUSES. 

WILLY  WALLACH, 

GENERAL  AGENT  FOR  THE  UNITED  STATES, 

41  John  Street,  New  York. 


*%\t  i^otograpler  to  (pa  latronx 


ft 


WHAT  IS  IT? 


TIHE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS  is  a  little  book  or  pamphlet  of  twelve  pages,  the 
1  intention  of  which  is  :  1st.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  say  a  few  words  in  a  kindly  way 
to  those  who  have  photographs  taken,  in  order  that  the  intercourse  between  them  and  their 
photographer  may  be  pleasant  and  result  in  the  most  successful  pictures.  Every  photographer 
knows  that  he  is  constantly  beset  with  a  lot  of  questions,  as  to  the  proper  way  to  dress,  the  best 
time  to  come,  and  so  on,  which  take  a  great  deal  of  his  time  to  answer.  This  little  book  answers 
them  all,  and  the  mere  handing  of  a  copy  to  the  questioner,  which  he  or  she  can  carry  away  and  study 
at  leisure,  serves  as  admirably  as  a  half-hour's  conversation. 

2d.  It  is  a  cheap  mode  of  advertising  What  could  you  want  better  than  to  have  your  business  card 
so  attractive  that  people  will  come  and  ask  for  it,  hand  it  around  from  one  to  another,  discuss  it,  and 
then  keep  it  for  reference?  This  is  what  they  do  with  this  little  "tract."  Witness  what  those  who 
have  tried  it  say  below. 

3d.  It  is  also  intended  to  convey  to  the  public  at  large  the  fact  that  photography  is  not  a  branch  of 
mechanics,  nor  photographers  a  sort  of  mechanic  themselves,  but  that  both  are  entitled  to  respect,  the 
same  as  the  family  physician  or  the  minister ;  that  the  photographer  has  rights  as  well  as  the  public  ; 
that  he  must  be  trusted,  and  that  he  alone  is  responsible  for  his  results.  Moreover,  that  he  must  make 
the  picture  and  not  they. 

How  far  the  work  serves  these  three  ends  the  reader  must  judge  from  the  testimonials  below,  of  a 
few  of  those  who  have  been  using  our  little  publication  in  their  business. 

We  believe  it  will  pay  you  to  use  it,  and  that  you  will  assist  just  that  much  in  elevating  your  art  and 
your  craft,  an  object  which  we  are  all  working  for. 

We  get  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons^  up  in  neat  style,  on  the  best  letter  cap  paper,  assorted 
tints,  green,  pink,  and  buff.  Eight  pa,ges  are  devoted  to  the  body  of  the  work,  which  contains  para- 
graphs or  chapters — 1,  on  the  object  of  the  work  ;  2,  on  photography  ;  3,  when  to  come  ;  4,  how  to 
come;  5,  how  to  dress  ;  6,  how  to  "behave;  7,  the  children;  8,  general  remarks  on  coloring,  copy- 
ing, frames,  prices,  &c. 

All  this  is  inclosed  in  a  cover  of  the  same  kind  of  paper,  the  pages  of  which  are  at  the  service  of 
the  photographer  who  orders  them  to  have  printed  thereon  anything  he  may  please,  which  printing 
we  do  without  extra  charge.  The  cuts  on  the  opposite  page  and  others  we  supply  free.  We  publish 
this  leaflet  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

1000  copies,   cover  included,      .      .  $20  00       I       3000  copies,  cover  included,     .      .  $50  00 
2000       "  "  .     .     35  00  5000       "  "  "  .     .     75  00 

We  will  send  samples  of  the  book  and  special  rates  to  any  who  may  desire  it.  Over  500,000  have 
been  sold. 

We  invite  you  to  examine  the  good  words  which  our  patrons  have  sent  us  concerning  this  publication. 


TESTI  MONIALS. 


"  I  sent  one  out  West  to  a  friend,  and  she 
wrote  that  she  was  now  posted,  and  when  she 
came  here  to  have  a  picture  -nade,  she  would 
come  'according  to  directions.'  '' — A.  Bogar- 
dus,  New  York. 

"A  grand  idea." — Elbert  Anderson. 

"  A  splendid  medium  for  educating  'skulls' 
that  cannot  think  and  will  not  learn." — Wm.H. 
Whitehead,  Pittsburg,  Pa. 

"  It  is  eagerly  sought  for  and  read  by  every- 
body who  visits  our  Gallery.'' — J.  Gurney  & 
Son,  New  York. 

"  It  assists  rue  greatly." — James  Mullen, 
Lexington,  Ky. 

"  The  many  valuable  hints  in  it  cannot  fail  to 
be  beneficial  to  both  photographer  and  patron." 
— Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  W.  Virginia. 


"They  are  the  best  kind  of  business  cards  a 
photographer  can  have." — T.  S  Estabrooke, 
Brooklyn. 

"  You  have  conferred  a  great  favor  on  the  fra- 
ternity in  supplying  it,  and  we  hope  it  will  bene- 
fit some  of  the  '  know-everythings'  in  this  quar- 
ter. " — A.  C.  McIntyre  &  Co.,  Ogdensburg. 

"  They  are  just  the  thing  to  post  people  up  on 
what  they  ought  to  know  in  order  to  secure  good 
pictures." — J.  P.  Whipple,  White  Water. 

' '  I  really  think  your  little  book  '  hits  the  nail 
on  the  head.'  " — J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

"It  is  the  best  advertising  medium  I  have 
ever  found." — H.  M.  Sedgewick,  Granville,  O. 

"  I  think  they  are  a  perfect  success,  and  will 
do  us  photographers  a  great  deal  of  good." — G 
W.  Mathis. 


BENEEfflAN  &  WILSON,  PMoppMc  Pilista, 

SEVENTH  &  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


GpmS 


m 


APHICM 


IN  EVERY  VARIETY. 


Nos.  419  &  421  BROOME  ST.,  NEW  YORK, 
No.  73  BOLD  STREET,  LIVERPOOL,  ENGLAND. 


DEALERS  SUPPLIED  WITH  THE  BEST  MODS  ON  THE  BEST  TEEMS, 


Our  own  extensive  facilities  for  manufacturing  enable  us  to  produce  first  quality  of  goods, 
and  our  extensive  connections  at  home  and  abroad  give  us  facilities  which  no  one  else  has. 


MANUFACTORIES :  (^^Ig^^; 


SEE  OTHEK  ADVERTISEMENTS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  BOOKS  and  MAGAZINES 


Examine  Scortll's  PMograiMc  Clocks,  aiii  Read  tlie  Photographic  Times. 


THE  ZENTMAYER  LENS 

For  Views  and  Copying. 


These  Lenses  possess  pre-eminently,  the  following  qualities  : 

Width  of  visual  angle,  ranging  from  80°  to  90°  ;  depth  of  focus ;  extreme  sharpness  over  the 
whole  field ;  true  perspective  ;  freedom  from  all  distortion  in  copying  ;  portability  and  cheapness. 

Each  mounting  is  provided  with  a  revolving  Diaphragm,  containing  the  stops  of  the  different  com- 
binations for  which  they  are  designed.  The  larger  ones  are  provided  with  an  internal  shutter  for 
making  and  closing  the  exposure. 


No.  1, 

2\  inch  focus,  3 

"  2, 

3i  "    "    4 

"  3, 

51  "    "    6 

"  4, 

8   "    "   10 

"  5, 

12   "    "   14 

"  6, 

18   "    "   20 

3  plate,  . 

.  $20  00 

5   "   . 

.  25  00 

8J  "   . 

.   30  00 

12  "   . 

.  42  00 

17  "   . 

.   60  00 

24  "   . 

.  90  00 

No.  1  and  No.  2  combined, 


2 

3  "   "  4 

4  "   "5 

5  "  "6 
1,  2,  and  3, 
3,  4,  and  5, 


$33  00 
40  00 
55  00 
75  00 

110  00 
48  00 
88  00 


No.  3,  with  large  mounting  to  combine  with  No.  4  and  No.  5,  $35. 

No.  1  and  No.  2,  specially  adapted  for  Stereoscopic  Views,  are  furnished  in  matched  pairs.  No.  1 
and  No.  2,  single,  not  to  combine  with  other  sizes,  $36  a  pair. 

Lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six  combinations,  from  2|  to  18  inches,  $173. 

Zentmayer's  Stereoscopic  outfits,  including  a  pair  of  No.  2  Lenses  4x7  box,  7  x  10  India  Rubber 
Bath  and  Dipper,  Tripod,  Printing  Frames,  and  outside  box,  $60. 

JOSEPH  ZENTMAYER,  Manufacturer, 

147  South  Fourth  Street,  Philadelphia. 

STEREOSCOPIC   riEWS. 


Dealers  selecting  their  autumn  stock  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  would  do  well  to  examine  our 

unrivalled  variety  of  Views  of 

THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS, 

NIAGARA,   WASHINGTON, 

FAIRMOUNT  PARK,  PHILADELPHIA, 

FLOWERS,  GROUPS,  &c. 

m-  QUALITY  UNSURPASSED  ! 


KILBURN  BROS.,  Littleton,  New  Hampshire. 

NIAGARA        " 

STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS. 


Winter  and  Summer  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  of  all  sizes.     Trade  supplied  on  good  terms.     Variety 
unequalled. 

G.  E.  CURTIS,  Photographer, 

Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y. 

i 

Mr.  Curtis'  views  answer  Mr.  Robinson's  query  :   "Are  there  any  clouds  in  America?  " 


KYLMT 


tec: 

AND  THE 


A1I-U0I 


By  ELBERT  ANDERSON, 

Is  the  Most  Useful,  Elaborate,  and  Hanflsome  Work  ever  issuefl  on  Photography. 

IT  IS  EMPHATICALLY  A  WORKING  PHOTOGRAPHER'S  BOOK. 


PRICE  $4.00. 

PLEASE  READ  THE  OTHER  ADVERTISEMENTS  AND  TESTIMONIALS. 

The  book  contains  a  vast  amount  of  invaluable  information  never  found  in  elementnry  works  on 
this  subject.  There  are  no  visionary  nor  theoretical  notions  ;  there  is  not  a  single  manipulation  given 
that  has  not  been  practiced  a  thousand  times  over  by  the  author. 

Among  many  other  things  it  treats  fully  on  the  following : 

Optics. — Decomposition  of  Light — Colors  of  Bodies — Complementary  Colors — Interference  of  Waves 
of  Light — Dispersion  of  Lenses — The  Diaphragm — Curvature  of  Field — Optical  Instruments — The 
Magic  Lantern — Camera  Obscura — The  Eye — Insensibility  of  a  Certain  Portion  of  the  Retina — Ster- 
eoscopicity — The  Stereoscope — The  Refracting  Stereoscope — Polarization  of  Light. 

Outlines  of  Chemistry. — The  Atomic  Theory — Atomic  AYeight — Chemical  Equivalents — Nomencla- 
ture of  the  Elements — Diffusion  of  Gases — Double  Decomposition — Crystallization — Efflorescence — 
Deliquescence — Cleavage — Chemical  Affinity — On  the  Chemical  Action  of  Light — Theory  of  Photog- 
raphy. 

Photography. — Photographic  Chemicals — The  Skylight — The  Backgrounds — Accessories — Reflectors — 
The  Platform — The  Reception-Room — The  Dark-Room — The  Tanks — The  Chemical  Room — On  the 
Selection  of  Glass  for  Negatives — On  the  Method  of  Cleaning  the  Plates — Polishing  the  Plates — Al- 
bumenizing  the  Plates — Preparation  of  the  Albumen — Collodion — Iodides  and  Bromides  used  in 
Collodion — Formula  for  Iodized  Collodion — Elbert  Anderson's  Portrait  Collodion — The  Negative 
Bath — Development — Nature  of  the  Invisible  Image — Developing  and  Redeveloping — Effects  of  In- 
tensification— The  Fixing  Solutions — Rectification  of  the  Negative  Bath — To  Fuse  the  Bath — To 
Restore  a  Disordered  Bath  by  Precipitation — To  Throw  Down  the  Silver  in  the  Metallic  State — The 
Camera — The  Platebolder — The  Lens — Varnishing  the  Negative — Negative  Varnish — Retouching  the 
Negative — The  Printing-Room — Silvering  Plain  Paper — Ammonio-Nitrate  of  Silver — Albumen  Paper 
— The  Positive  Bath — To  Silver  the  Paper — Fuming — The  Print — The  Press — Vignette  Printing 
Boards — Medallion  Printing — Fancy  Medallion  Printing — Washing  the  Prints — Toninglhe  Prints — 
Fixing  Bath — -The  Washing  Tank — Mounting — The  Press — Encaustic  Paste — Miscellaneous  Hints — 
Porcelain  Printing  by  the  Collodio-Chloride  Process — Collodio-Chloride — Porcelain  Printing  Frames 
— The  Ferrotype — Transparencies  for  the  Magic  Lantern  :  How  Made — By  the  Copying  Camera — By 
Direct  Printing  on  Dry  Plates — By  the  Collodio-Chloride  Process — Coloring  Magic  Lantern  Slides — 
On  Copying — To  Cle;in  a  Daguerreotype — On  the  Recovery  of  Silver  from  the  Wastes — Silver  from 
the  Developer — The  Washings  from  the  Prints — Waste  from  the  Toning  Bath — Clippings,  Filters,  &c. 
— Of  the  Treatment  of  these  Residues. 

Art  as  Applied  to  Photography. — Balance  of  Lines — Perspective — Drawbacks  of  the  Camera — 
Examples  of  Distortion  of  the  Camera — Curious  Effects  of  Distance  of  a  Lens — Imperfections  of  the 
Human  Face — Brilliancy — Relief — Position 

Details  op  Manipulations. — Manipulation  No.  1 — Exposure — Manipulation  No.  2 — Remarks  on 
Development — Pinholes — Fogging — Filtering  the  Bath. 

It  also  contains  a  Great  Number  of  Original  Illustra- 
tions, and  12  Interesting  Photographs. 

The  book  is  written  in  a  style  at  once  dignified,  elegant,  and  yet  perfectly  simple,  and  almost  the 
only  streak  of  the  author's  well-known  humor  is  to  be  found  in  the  preface,  which  is  alone  worth 
the  price  of  the  book. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

For  Sale  by  all  Dealers.  S.  W.  cor.  7th  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


JSOIUEETHinxrCS-    nXTETOTZ 


JACOBY'S 


AND 


Combination  Printing  Frame 

WITH  SELF-ADJUSTING  SPRING  BED,  CLAMPING  SPRINGS, 
VIGNETTING  ARRANGEMENTS, 

FOR  PORCELAIN  AND  CONTACT  PRINTING. 


Any  negative  may  be  used  with,  success.  The  time  of  printing  is  the  same  as  in  common  printing, 
and  may  be  done  in  any  kind  of  weather.  Pictures  printed  with  this  frame  need  but  little  retouching, 
or  not  as  fine  retouching  to  get  the  finest  effects. 

I  need  not  comment  on  this  frame,  for  when  tried  will  prove  for  itself.  For  printing  on  the  Por- 
celain plate  it  is  best  and  a  success.  Having  a  self-adjusting  bed,  will  form  to  any  thickness  of  plate. 
For  common  printing  it  is  complete.  But  the  most  to  be  praised  is  the  Imitation  Porcelain  for  which  it 
is  invented,  which  all  prefer  to  the  genuine  Porcelain,  for  the  reason  they  can  be  sent  by  mail  and  will 
not  break.  They  are  printed  on  Albumen  Paper,  the  same  as  a  Card  Photograph,  and  when  framed 
in  a  velvet  Passepartout  can  scarcely  be  detected  from  the  genuine  Porcelain. 

I  have  used  one  of  these  frames  in  my  gallery  the  last  year,  charging  two  dollars  per  dozen  more 
for  this  kind  of  work  All  of  my  patrons  prefer  this  to  the  porcelain,  and  find  no  fault  with  the  price. 
I  have  therefore  secured  a  patent,  and  propose  to  manufacture  and  put  them  in  the  market  for  sale, 
that  others  may  use  them.  I  feel  satisfied  that  by  trying  them  they  will  prove  satisfactory;  if  not, 
you  can  return  the  same  by  paying  charges. 

Specimens  published  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  in  the  April  and  October  numbers,  1873. 
Be  sure  and  see  them.     Stockdealers  will  be  supplied  from  the  factory  at  Minneapolis,  Minnesota. 


sizes    -a.3ktid   f  :fl  x  o  :e:  «s. 

Frame  for  1-4  Negative,    .     .     .      .  $4  00     I     Frame  for  6^  x8£  Negative, 
5x7       "  ....      5  00     I  "  8x10 

Frame  for  11x14  Negative $6  25 


.  $5  50 
.     5  75 


Any  other  size  made  to  order.     Terms,    Cash  or  C.  0.  D.     Parties  not  finding  them  with  their 
Stockdealers  can  order  them  from 


P.  O.  Box  1758. 


W.  H.  JACOBY,  Minneapolis,  Minn. 
FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

.V.  £. 


LAST  CHANCE! 


THE  PUBLICATION  OF  THE 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    WORLD 


Having  been  suspended,  the  publishers  offer  the  PEW  KEMAINIJSTG 
'VOLUMES  on  hand  for  the  exceedingly  low  price  of  $3.00  A  VOLUME. 

They  contain  many  of  the  best  home  and  foreign  contributions  to  photo- 
graphic literature  ever  published.     Among  which  are  a  series  of  papers  on 

POSITION   AND   COMPOSITION, 

AND    ANOTHER   ENTITLED 

LANDSCAPE    LESSONS, 

Both  of  which  are  beautifully  illustrated,  and  alone  worth  more  than  the 
cost  of  the  volumes.  The  pictures  in  both  volumes  are  varied  in  style,  are 
very  beautiful,  and  a  dozen  such  pictures  could  not  be  bought  for  twice  the 
price  asked  for  the  whole  volume  of  the  World. 


SEE    THE   LIST. 


VOL.  I. 


VOL.  II. 


January.  Photo-Relief  Print.  Woodbury  Pro- 
cess. By  American  Photo-Relief  Printing 
Co.,  Philadelphia. 

February.  "  Giant's  Causeway."  Landscape. 
By  G.  W.  Wilson,  Aberdeen,  Scotland. 

March.  Portrait  Studies.  By  J.  GrasshofF,  Ber- 
lin, Prussia. 

April.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  J.  Grasshoff,  Ber- 
lin, Prussia. 

May.  Victoria  Holyoake  Portraits.  By  Sud- 
dards  &  Fennemore,  Philadelphia. 

June.  Carte  Studies  of  Children.  By  John  A. 
Scholten,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

July.  Cabinet  Portraits.  By  W.  H.  Jacoby, 
Minneapolis,  Minn. 

August.  "  Just  as  I  am.''  Reproduction  from 
Drawing      By  W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

September.  "Reflections."  By  T.  T.  Sweeny, 
Cleveland,  Ohio. 

October.  Statuary.  By  J.  H.  Kent,  Rochester, 
New  York. 

November.  " Both  Puzzled."  Woodbury  Print. 
By  Am.  Photo-Relief  Printing  Co. 

December.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  M.  B.  Brady. 
New  York. 


January.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  W.  Kurtz, 
New  York. 

February.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  A.  N.  Hardy, 
Boston,  Mass. 

March.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  H.  Rocher,  Chi- 
cago, 111. 

April.  Cameo  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  W.  C. 
North,  Utica,  N.  Y. 

May.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  Jones  &  Stiff, 
Salem,  Mass. 

June.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  Dinmore  &  Wil- 
son, Baltimore,  Md. 

July.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  J.  H.  Lamson, 
Portland,  Me. 

August.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  B.  M.  Cline- 
dinst,  Staunton,  Va. 

September.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  J.  A.  Schol- 
ten &  Co.,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

October.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  J.  Landy,  Cin- 
cinnati, Ohio. 

November.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  J.  A.  Schol- 
ten &  Co.,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

December.  Cabinet  Portrait.  By  C.  D.  Mosher, 
Chicago,  111. 


Order  soon  if  you  want  them.'   Postage  payable  at  your  own  office,  or 
30  cents  extra,  prepaid. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 

EGGSHELL,  GLOSSY,  CHOCOLATE-TINTED. 

(PATENTED  MARCH  1st,  1870.) 

ALL  SIZES,  PEOM  1-9  to  10x14.  BLACK  AND  CHOCOLATE. 

THE  PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Worcester,  Mass., 

ARE  NOW  MAKING  THE  MOST  POPULAR  BRAND  OF  PLATES  IN  THE  TRADE. 


Size,     Eggshell.   Glossy. 


Per  Box  of  8  Doz. 


1-9 
1-6 
1-4 
4ix6J 
1-2 
4}-xl0 


$0.80 
1.25 
1.85 
1.85 
2.20 
2.20 


50.90 
1.35 
2.00 
2.00 
2.35 
2.35 


LIST 

Per  Box  of  2  Doz. 
ii  4     u 

"  2     " 

ii  2     " 

Per  Sheet, 


4-4 

5-7 

7-10 

8x10 

10x14 


Eggshell,    Glossy 
$2.40      $2.70 


2.40 

2.70 

2.70 

.14 


2.70 

2  90 

2.90 

.15 


Kevised,  New  York,  December  28th,  1872. 


EGGSHELL,    GLOSSY,    AND    CHOCOLATE-TINTED   PLATES,    ALL    SIZES   AND    STYLES, 
ALWAYS    ON    HAND    AND   READY    FOR   DELIVERY. 

Each  package  of  Phenix  Plates  has  printed  on  the  wrapper,  "Manufactured 

by  the  Phenix  Plate  Co.,  Worcester,  Mass.,"  and  none 

are  genuine  unless  bearing  that  stamp. 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  constitu- 
ting them  our  sole  and  exclusive  agents  for  the  sale  of  our  Plates. 

That  company  is  so  well  and  favorably  known  in  the  business,  that  no  com- 
mendation of  ours  is  required  to  assure  the  Trade  that  they  will  be  liberally 
dealt  with  in  every  respect. 

Phenix  Plates  are  for  sale  ly  all  Stock  Dealers  ttouglioiit  tie  country. 

PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Manufacturers, 

Worcester,  Mass. 

SCOVILL  KG.  CO.,  Apts  for  tie  T*  4  Beetai  St.,  I.  Y. 


SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT. 


ALL  PERSONS  ARE  HEREBY  NOTIFIED,  and  cautioned  against  infringing  my  Solar  Camera 
Patent. 

Infringers  will  settle  with   H.  L.  Emmons,    Attorney-at-Law,   Baltimore,    Md. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD, 

Baltimore.  Md. 

DO   YOUR   OWN   SOLAR    PRINTING. 

SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT  LICENSE  AND  STAMP 

Good  for  the  future  at  $40.     May  be  ordered  through  your  STOCKDEALER  or  from  the  PATENTEE. 

I>.  A.  WOODWARD.  Baltimore,  Md. 

AUG.  SCHWARZE.  SCHWARZE      &    VALK  WILLIAM  VALK. 

NO.    614   ARCH   STREET,    P  H I L  AD  E  X  P  H I  A. 

most  ^rEi  0F  German  Allien  Paper,  and  Arrowroot  Plain  Saltefl  Paper. 

DEALERS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  MATERIALS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 

Will  mail  to  any  address  in  the  country,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  $1,  one  dozen  sheets  of  Assorted  Photo- 
graphic Paper,  each  sheet  beiag  numbered  for  distinction. 


JVo.  50  Cedar  Street,  New  York, 

SOLE  AGENTS  FOR 

"F.Z.  IMPERIAL"  DRESDEN  ALBUMEN  PAPER. 

Rites  and  Steinbach  ;  Light  and  Heavy     White,  Pink,  and  Blue. 


We  beg  leave  to  inform  the  Photographic  Stockhouses  that  we  keep  a  complete  assortment  of 
"  F.  Z.  IMPERIAL"  ALBUMEN  PAPER  always  on  hand,  and  offer  it  to  the  trade  at  the  lowest 
market  prices. 

KARSTENS  k  BRAUN,  No.  50  Cedar  Street,  New  York. 


Or.    SAUTER. 

No.    138   South  Eighth  Street,   Philadelphia, 

manufacturer  and  wholesale  dealer  in 


The  attention  of  the  trade  is  particularly  called  to  the  superior  quality  of  our  Glass  and  materials 
and  neatness  of  finish.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand. 

BULLOCK    &    OilMSHAW, 

No.  528  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURERS   AND  IMPORTERS   OF   PURE  CHEMICALS   FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 
IMPORTERS  OF  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN,  APPARATUS,  ETC. 


LOOKOUT 

1L  A  IHTlfl^C^  A  IP  HP 

PHOTOGRAPHY 

A  Pocket  Manual  fir  tie  Landscape  Piippto, 

YET  CONTAINING    MANY    USEFUL    HINTS    FOE  ALL    PHOTOGRAPHEES. 

By  the  Late  Prof.  R.  M.  LINN, 

LOOKOUT  MOUNTAIN,   TENN. 

This  admirable  little  work  was  published  last  fall,  a  little  too  late  for  the  season.  It  is 
now  confidently  recommended  to  every  photographer  about  to  do  any  class  of  work,  outside 
or  inside  the  skylight. 

CONTENTS. 


Introductory. 

Main  Requisites  of  a  Good  Photographic  Land- 
scape. 

Artistic  Effect. 

Proper  Illumination. 

Direction  of  Light. 

Clouds. 

Length  of  Exposure. 

Apparatus  for  Field  Work. 

On  the  Selection  of  View  Lenses. 

Camera  Boxes. 

Bath  Cups. 

Preliminary  Preparations. 

Taking  the  Field. 

Hints  on  Printing  and  Finishing. 

To  Print  Clouds. 

Toning  Bath  for  Views. 

On  Fixing  and  Washing  Prints. 

Suggestions  on  Mounting  Prints. 

To  Cut  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

To  Mount  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

Formulae  and  Processes  for  Landscape  Photog- 
raphy. 

Ever-ready  Iodizer  for  Landscape  Photography. 


Remarks  on  Preparing  and  Using  Iodizer. 

On  the  Management  of  Flowing  Bottles. 

On  the  Preparation  of  Plain  Collodion. 

The  Silver  Bath  for  Negatives. 

To  Renovate  an  Old  Negative  Bath. 

To  Prepare  Carbonate  of  Silver. 

Permanganate  of  Potash — Its  Use  in  our  Art. 

Preparation  and  Using  of  Developer. 

Fixing  Solution  for  View  Negatives. 

On  Redeveloping  and  Strengthening  Agents. 

To  Clean  and  Polish  the  Glass. 

To  Prepare  Chloride  of  Gold  Solution. 

The  Paste  for  Mounting  of  Photographs. 

The   Operator's   Oracle — Failures  :    Causes  and 

Remedies  ;  for  consultation  in  time  of  trouble. 
Counsels  and  Cautions  for  the  Printer,  including 

Formulas  for  Silvering  Bath,  &c 
Failures  in  Silvering  Albumenized  Paper. 
Failures  in  Toning  Photographs. 
Failures  in  Fixing  Photographs. 
Instantaneous  Photography. 
View  Photography  Financially  Considered. 
Stereoscoping  Applied  to  Portraiture. 
Concluding  Remarks. 


It  is  a  Perfect  Success,  and  is 

Selling  Well  and  Pleasing  Everybody. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


SCOVILL  MANUF'G  CO. 


DEALERS 


[ 


10 


AND  PROPRIETORS  OF  THE  WORKS  OP  THE 

American  Optical 


Beg  the  trade  to  remember  that  they  have  removed  from 


o.  4  Beekman  SI 


TO 


BROOME  J 
STREET, 


GERMAN  ALBUMEN  COLORS! 


JULIUS     KRUGER'S 

fATS»T    Cc«**VT    C0t$8% 

FOR  COLORING  PHOTOGRAPHS  ON  ALBUMEN  and  PLAIN  PAPER. 

These  colors  have  become  very  popular  in  Germany  and  France  (where  they  have  obtained  the 
highest  recommendations),  on  account  of  their  extraordinary  brilliancy,  evenness,  and  ensy  application. 
They  can  be  used  on  Albumen  Paper,  and  are  without  doubt  the  best  that  have  been  offered  to  the 
public.     The  Colors  are  put  up  in  boxes  of  6,  12,  and  18. 

GEO.  RAU,  Sole  Agent, 

No.  922  Girard  Ave.,  Philadelphia. 

HALE,    ZECILZBTTZE^TsT    &c    CO, 


Wholesale 


LOOKING 

GLASS  and 

PICTURE 
FRAMES. 

Patented  Solid 
Ovals  and  Spandrels. 


WAREROOMS, 

48&50N.6thSt. 


"Manufacturers  of 


Walnut 
Mouldings 


BACKING 

&e.,  &c. 


Solid  Walnut  Work 
a  Specialty, 


FACTORIES, 

615  to  621  Filbert  St. 


The  undersigned,  having  purchased  the  entire  interest,  goodwill,  and  business  of 

Photo.  Materials  &  Picture  Frames 

OF  J.   HAWORTH, 

Desires  to  inform  his  friends  and  the  trade  generally,  that  he  will  continue  the  business,  as 

heretofore,  at  the  old  stand, 

624  ARCH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA, 

Where  he  hopps,  by  prompt  attention  and  fair  dealing,  to  merit  a  continuance  of  the  patron- 
age so  largely  given  to  the  late  firm. 

We  will  still  keep  a  well  assorted  stock  of 

PICTURE  FRAMES  (OVAL  AND  SQUARE), 

VELVET  CASES,   COLLODIONS, 

VARNISHES,  PURE  CHEMICALS,   &c, 

which  can  be  had  at  the  lowest  rates ;  as  well  as 

PASSEPARTOUTS,    STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS   OF    ALL   PARTS    OF   THE  WORLD, 
STEREOSCOPIC  INSTRUMENTS,  Ac 

We  also  have  a  full  line  of  CAMERAS  of  the  best  makes  and  latest  improvements, 
CAMERA  STANDS,  HEAD-RESTS,  BACKGROUNDS,  and  all  Accessories  necessary 
to  the  Photographic  Art.  We  would  call  the  attention  of  photographers  to  the  fact  that  we 
manufacture  SQUARE  FRAMES,  and  so  can  generally  ship  any  frames  (especially  odd 
sizes)  the  same  day  they  are  ordered.  We  would  also  call  attention  to  the  noted  ALBU- 
MEN PAPERS,  Morgan's  and  H.  Extra,  the  best  for  warm  weather,  for  which.  I  am 
the  agent. 


THOMAS  H.  McCOLLIN, 

Successor  to  Haworth  &  McCollin,  624  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


C0¥!|,# 


MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

Nos.  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 

WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN 


BMAMBMM  MWPPMBM 

On  the  Most  Advantageous  Terms,  with 

EVERY  ARTICLE  IN  THE  WORLD 

Used  or  sold  in  the  Art  of  Photography. 


Jt^lP  Our  facilities  are  such  that  we  cannot  be  superseded  by  any 
other  house  anywheres.  We  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to 
deal  with  us. 


ASK  YOUR  DEALER  FOR  SCOVILL'S  GOODS. 


Removed  to  New  Store,  419  &  421  Broome  St. 
^SeT^rr"s  "PHOTOGRAPHIC  TIMES." 


J.  A.  ANDERSON'S 

ZDsTIE]  W 

Position  and  Baby  Chair 
Combined. 


THE  HANDSOMEST, 

MOST  COMPLETE, 

AND  CHEAPEST 

PIECE  OF  APPARATUS  ETER  OFFERED  TO  THE  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


BUY  NO  IMITATION. 


SEND  FOB  PRICE  LIST 


Photographers  can  save  from  10  to  20  per  cent,  by  sending  direct  to  the 
manufactory  for  Apparatus. 


J.  A.  ANDERSON, 

LATE  ANDERSON  &  BIXBY. 

65   EAST    INDIANA    ST.,   CHICAGO. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC 


FOR  1874. 


EDITED  BY  EDWARD  L.  WILSON. 


This   favorite    annual  is   wholly    filled    with   Articles   prepared   expressly  for 
it  by  the  eminent  photographers  of  Europe  and  America,  and  is 

UNUSUALLY   GOOD! 


READ   THE  CONTENTS: 


1873  ;  On  the  Sensitiveness  of  Bromide  of  Sil- 
ver ;  Toning  and  Fixing ;  Is  Honesty  the  Best 
Policy?  Transparent  Paper;  Growing;  A  New 
Test  for  Hyposulphite  of  Sodium ;  Chemical 
Manipulation  and  Collodion ;  How  to  Buy  a 
Lens  ;  Copying  of  Every  Description  Executed 
in  the  Highest  Style  of  the  Art;  Expression; 
The  Reception-Room  ;  Treatment  of  Prints  after 
Toning  ;  Public  Taste  ;  Plate  Vise  ;  Progress  of 
Photography  in  America  ;  How  to  be  a  Photog- 
rapher of  the  Times  ;  The  Uncertainties  of  Pho- 
tography ;  Exploration  Field  Photography  ;  How 
to  Make  Varnish  for  Negatives,  and  How  to 
Varnish  Them  ;  Porcelain  Printing ;  How  to 
Elevate  Our  Art ;  Lighting  for  Portraits  ;  Some- 
thing Practical;  Photographs;  Negative  Var- 
nish ;  Lighting  the  Sitter  ;  Photographic  Excel- 
lence ;  On  Certain  Causes  of  Failure  and  Success 
in  Photography;  Negative  Retouching;  The 
Roller  Press  and  Burnisher  ;  Recovery  of  Gold 
and  Silver  from  the  Waste  or  Spent  Solutions  ; 


Concerning  Formulae  ;  Notes  on  Photographic 
Subjects;  Hints  on  Photographic  Printing; 
Things  which  Hurt;  Collodion  Transfers;  Along- 
side ;  A  Chapter  on  Practical  Matters  ;  What  to 
do  with  Negative  Baths  which  have  been  Ren- 
dered Unserviceable  by  Constant  Usage  ;  Photo- 
graphic Literature  ;  Influence  of  Long  and  Short 
Exposures  upon  the  Brilliancy  of  the  Pictures; 
Wet-Plate  Photography  Out  of  Doors  ;  Sandarac 
and  Benzoin  Varnish  ;  On  Printing,  and  How  to 
do  it ;  Cleansing  a  Discolored  Printing  Bath  ; 
On  the  Double  Iodides  and  Bromides,  anil  How 
to  Prepare  Them  ;  Backgrounds:  Mr.  Faulkner's 
Method  of  Making  Them  ;  A  Practical  Sugges- 
tion for  Stereo-Landscape  Negatives  ;  Preparing 
Photographs,  etc.,  for  Coloring;  No  More  Pin- 
Holes;  Successive  Development;  The  Green- 
Glass  Question  ;  Backgrounds  ;  Transparencies 
for  the  Stereoscope ;  Lantern  Pictures  ;  The 
Dark-Room  ;  Photographing  in  Hot  Climates  ; 
Many  Mites  from  Many  Minds. 


Price,  in  Cloth,  $1.00 ;  in  Paper  Cover,  50  Cents. 


The  Best  Little  Handbook:  of  Photography  in  the  World.       For  Sale  by  all  Dealers. 

BENEBMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


Gm^lSTD   MEDAL  OF  MERIT, 

AWARDED  AT  VIENNA   TO 


SEND   FOR   A  CATALOGUE. 


LANDSCAPE 
PHOTOGRAPHER, 

Trade  supplied  with  the  best  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  Hudson  River,  Saratoga,  Partage, 
New  York,Watkins'  Glen,  Havana  Glen,  California,  Yosemite  Valley,  Rogers'  Statuary,  &c. 


Charles  Bierstadt, 


Niagara  Falls,  IN.Y. 


LIESEGANG'S  ALBUMEN  PAPER 

Is  used  and  recommended  by  the  London  Stereoscopic  Company  ;  Messrs.  Alessandri  Fratelli, 
of  Rome  ;  Le  Lieure,  of  Rome  ;  A.  Sorgato,  of  Venice  ;  Fr.  Bruckmann,  of  Munich ;  C.  Reut- 
linger,  of  Paris ;  C.  Bergamasio,  of  Petersburg ;  Abdullah,  of  Constantinople ;  and  many 
other  first  class  photographers  throughout  the  World. 

IT  IS  THE  BEST  PAPER  IN  THE  MARKET. 
Sample  sheets,  and  English,  French,  and  German  Price  List  to  be  had  free  on  application 
from  the  Manufacturer. 


DUSSELDORF    ON    THE    RHINE,   GERMANY, 

(FORMERLY  AT  ELBEEFELD). 

For  Sale  by  SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  New  York 


F.  G.  WELLER,  PUBLISHER  OF  STEREOSCOPIC  VIEWS 

OF  THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS  AND  VICINITY  AND  MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS, 

LITTLETON,  N.  H. 

SPECIALTY  :  WELLER'S  STEREOSCOPIC  TREASURES,  which  embrace  a  series  o  subject  pic- 
tures from  nature,  such  as  are  not  made  by  any  other  artist  in  the  country.  New  subjects  added  continually. 
Dealers  and  jobbers  supplied  on  favorable  terms. 


P  OjW  K  R  S     &     WEIGHTMAN? 


CO 

E-h 

G<2 

t=J 

zyz 

Pd 

«H 

P=* 

«« 

-e| 

= 

P-, 

& 

n=i 

- 

!=i 

tf 

CO 

<* 

oa 

E-t 

^ 

t=i 

— 

a 

5=1 

a. 

MANUFACTURING  CHEMISTS, 


Offer  to  Stockdealers 
A  full  Assortment  of  Reliable 


Photographic  Chemicals 


Of  their  own  Manufacture, 
including : 


Nitrate  of  Silver,  Sulphuric  Ether  (concentrated),  Ammonia  (concentrated), 
Bromide  of  Potassium,  Acetic  Acid,  Chemically  Pure  Acids, 
Iron  and  Ammonia  Proto-Sulphate,  Chloride  of  Gold, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  Sulphate  of  Iron,  Cyanide  of  Potassium, 
Chloroform,  Tannin,  Sulphuret  of  Potassium. 

GEORGE   ROTTER  &   CO., 

DRESDEN,  GERMANY, 

MANUFACTURERS    OP 

ALBUMEN    PAPERS. 

Kives  and  Steinbach ;  Light  and  Heavy ;  "White,  Pink,  and  Blue. 

Our  excellent  Albumen  Papers  to  which  the  first  premium,  the  silver  medal,  was  awarded  at  the 
Photographic  Exhibition  at  Hamburg,  1868,  both  single  and  double  albumenized,  can  be  worked  suc- 
cessfully by  any  formula  in  use.  It  prints  and  tones  rapidly,  producing  faithfully  the  finest  effects  of 
the  negatives.  Even  with  a  slight  silvering,  in  a  completely  neutral  silver  bath  (1  :  15-20),  they  pro- 
duce in  the  gold  bath  a  rich,  succulent,  and  warm  tone.  We  warmly  recommend  them  to  all  photo- 
graphic stockhouses. 


MAMMOTH   PHOTOGRAPHIC  STOCK   HOUSE. 

No.  259  Wabash  Avenue,  Chicago,  Ills., 


AGENTS    FOR   THE    NORTHWEST    FOR 


WESTON'S  ROTARY  BURNISHER. 

Send  for  our  complete  Price  List. 


TO   PKOFBSSIONAL   PHOTOGRAPHERS    AND   THE   TRADE. 


CH.    DAUVOIS, 

Acknowledged  to  be  the  Best  and  Cheapest  in  the  World. 


;@H4Wf  &  Iffilif,  8«@@@88®E8, 
No.  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris, 


ESPECIAL    MANUFACTURERS    OF 


MOUNTS-^FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY 


TRADE    MARK,    Clx.D. 


Mounts  for  Cartes-de-Visite, 
Cabinet  Portrait, 
Victoria  Card, 

Stereoscopic  Views — all  new  samples  of  French 
styles. 


Bristol  Boards  of  every  size  and  thickness,  plain. 

India  Tinted  and  Fancy  Printing. 

Book-post  and  Card  Cases. 

Stout  Blotting  Paper  Albums. 

First-class  Rives  Albumenized  Paper,  &c,  &c. 


MEDALS  AWARDED  AT  EVERY  EXHIBITION. 

All  orders  are  to  be  sent  to  their  establishment,  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris,  or  to  Wholesale  Houses 
of  the  United  States.     Samples  on  application. 

LIBERAL  DISCOUNT  TO  WHOLESALE  HOUSES. 


TRY    IT    AND    BE    CONVINCED. 


The  best  COLLODION  in  use  is 

LEWIS  &  HOLT'S  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE, 

Sold  with  a  Printed  Formula  accompanying  each  Bottle. 

Being  among  the  first  in  this  country  to  make  Collodion  Pictures,  they  can  warrant  it  to  be  one 

of  the  best  in  use. 
also,  their 

ADAMANTINE  TARNISH  for  Itintjft  Negatives,  ail  Melaiiotps. 

This  Varnish,  when  applied  to  Negatives,  dries  in  a  few  seconds  perfectly  hard,  and  does  not  lower  the 
intensity,  or  soften  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  in  Printing.  It  gives  a  beautiful  gloss  and  brilliancy  to 
Ambrotypes.    For  Sale  by  Stockdealers  generally.    Prepared  by  R,    A    LEWIS 

160  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

HEADQUARTERS     FOR    THE     TRADE. 

Show  Displayers,  Velvet  Stands, 

Velvet  Passepartouts,         Velvet  Oases, 
Beveled  Matts,  Double  Matts, 

Fancy  Metal  Frames,  Standard  Matts, 

Fancy  Paper  Passepartouts. 

These  goods  are  entirely  of  our  own  manufacturing.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand  ;  odd 
sizes  and  styles  made  to  order. 

LEWIS  PATTBEEG  &  BRO.,  709  (SMJ)  Broadway,  New  York. 


Established  in  1857. 


L.  DUBERNET, 


Manufacturer  of 


PAPER  PASSEPARTOUTS, 

EN AMELED  AND  VELTET  PASSEPARTOUTS, 
PEAIN  AND  DOUBLE  MATTS, 
VELVET  STANDS, 

FANCY  GIET  FRAMES,  AND  EASEES, 

AND  THE  NEWEST  STYLES  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  FRAMES, 

13  &  15  AMITY  ST.  (near  He  M  Central  Hotel),  NEW  YORK. 

PICTURE    AND    STOCK    DEALERS    SUPPLIED. 


TpRcrs  gciQPTicoH 

!  is  a  greatly  improveiffom     i 


FOR    HOME, 

[EctureRooM 
Unrivalled 


Price,  latest  improvements,  complete, 

with  Camera  Objective, $45.00 

Price,  without  front  objective, 36.00 

For  Circulars  address 

L.  J.  MARCY, 

1340  Chestnut  St., 

Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Marcy's  Photographic  Printing  Apparatns,  Price  $7.00. 

(See  Philadelphia  Photographer,  1872,  page  38.) 

The  Sciopticon  Manual, 

Including  Optics,  Experiments,  Photographing,  and  Coloring 
Slides,  &c.     Enlarged,  Revised  Edition  Just  Out. 
.85?*  Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  50  cents. 


E  N 


laRGE  M 


enTS 


IDE  BY  THE  SOLAR  CAMERA, 

AND  COPYING  DONE,  FOR  THE  TRADE. 


18  SOLAR   CAMERAS. 


EXPEDITIOUS.  **"&5$R&terk*   EXCELLENT 

ALBERT   MOORE, 

No.  828  Wood  Street,  Philadelphia. 


w  that  Claim 

A6MNST  ENGLAND 
A  /  ARAM  A  *.  600,000,000 
SHENANDOAH  300.00O.000 

f%ojOctA  M26saooo 
Q6SH       jn§ooogo 


^*\v  (*J 


(TtiatolmCo 


APRIL 


ELBERT  ANDERSON'S 


PHOTO-COMIC  ALMYK1CK ! 


Makes  everybody  scream,  while  it  is  also  a  book  embodying  instruction,  and  handsomely  illustrated . 
Among  other  things  it  contains 


For   each   month   in  the  year;   embellished   handsomely;    EXPLANATIONS  OF  THE  TWELVE 
SIGNS  OF  THE  ZODIAC  ILLUSTRATED  ;  and  the  following  : 


Dedication. 

The  Weather. 

The  Probabilities. 

Places  of  the  Planets. 

Eclipses. 

Cronological  Circlelers. 

Customary  Notes. 

To  Find  your  Horror'scope. 

Signs  of  the  Zodiac. 

The  Photographic  Hamlet. 


"  Say  Amen  !  to  that,  Brother." 

Declining  a  Kiss. 

Not  at  all  Extraordinary. 

Riddlioous. 

An  Incident  of  my  Life. 

Rapidity  of  Light. 

Money  vs.  Honor. 

The  Lowest  Depth  of  Meanness. 

He  Didn't  Dance  the  "Lancers.'' 

Three  Collodion  Puzzles. 

A  Joke  and  its  Results. 


Photo.  Mezzotints. 

The  Twins. 

Beware  of  Strangers  who  ask  you 

to  Play  Cards. 
Notice  to  Sportsmen. 
Sphynx. 

What  I  Know  of  Photography. 
After-Dinner  Session. 
Art  as  Apt-lied  to  Photography. 
A  Tale  of  a  Fox. 


It  is  full  of  witty  stories,  sayings,  doings,  puns,  jokes,  practical  hints,  take-offs,  etc.,  with  grotesque 
illustrations,  and  all  the  features  of  a  first-class  Almanac.  All  the  wit  and  humor  which  Mr.  Ander- 
son suppressed  in  his  "Skylight  and  Dark-Room,"  may  be  found  in  his  ALLMTKNACK.  Samples 
of  illustrations  herewith.     Dealers  can  sell  thousands  ;  photographers  can  sell  hundreds. 

Liberal  discount  for  wholesale  orders. 

JUST  THE  THING   FOR  DULL  WEATHER. 

PEICB  75  CENTS. 

BEKERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 
You  have  no  idea  how  good  and  how  funny  it  is. 


The  publishers  of  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER,  encouraged  by  the 
growing  interest  taken  in  their  PREMIUM  LIST,  by  operators,  printers,  employees,  etc., 
offer  the  following 

PREMIUMS  FOR  1874, 

FOR  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS 


CONDITIONS:  These  premiums  are  only  given  to  old  or  present  subscribers  for 
new  ones.     No  premium  will  be  given  you  on  your  own  renewal. 


WE   WILL  GIVE  FOR  THREE  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  (IN  ADDITION  TO 
YOUR  OWN),  FOR  ONE  TEAR, 

Vols.  I  &  II  of  the  Photographic  World ! 


TWO  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  FOR  ONE  YEAR, 


Either  Volume  I  or  II  of  the  Photographic  World, 


Or  your  choice  of  the  following  :  $1  on  each  per  year,  payable  in  any  of  our  publications, 
not  in  cash;  i.  e.,  $10  will  secure  our  Magazine  for  one  yea?'  to  an  old  subscriber,  to  a  new  one, 
and  one  dollar's  ioorth  of  our  other  publications. 

Any  enterprising  operator  can,  by  writing  a  few  letters  and  a  little  effort,  secure  enough 
new  subscribers  to  pay  for  his  own,  and  fit  him  out  with  our  whole  list  of  premiums,  or  a 
set  of  the  six  Luckhardt  pictures.     (See  special  advertisement.) 

This  magnificent  offer  was  never  equalled  by  any  publisher,  photographic  or  otherwise. 
Strive  hard  to  win  the  whole  ! 

Please  examine  the  order  blanks  in  this  number,  and  send  for  more  if  you  wish  them. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


T  H- E 

Philadelphia  Photographer  for  1874 ! 

The  increasing  favor  shown  the  publishers  of  this  Magazine  during  the  first  ten  years  of  its  life, 
has  given  them  the  means  to  prepare  for  their  intelligent  patrons  still  greater  attractions  than 
ever  for  the  year  1874.     The  old  staff  of  regular  contributors  will  be  continued. 

A  series  of-  illustrated  descriptive  articles  on 

PHOTOGRAPHY   IN   FRANCE, 

which  will  include  descriptions  of  all  the  leading  photographic  studios  and  factories  in  France,  are 
heing  contributed  by  Mons   Ernest  Lacan,  Secretary  of  the  French  Photographic  Society. 
One  of  a  series  of  handsomely  illustrated  articles,  entitled 

VIEWS    ABROAD    AND    ACROSS, 

by  the  editor,  including  sketches  of  matters  and  things  photographic,  made  during  a  tour  in  Eng- 
land, Ireland,  Scotland,  France,  Belgium,  Prussia,  Austria,  Italy,  and  Switzerland,  will  be  in  each 
number  during  the  j^ear  ;  a  continuation  of  the  articles  on  the  study  of  art ;  fresh  and  original 
papers  by  old  and  new  contributors,  &c,  &c. 

DURINC   1874, 

No  photographic  artist  should  fail  to  subscribe  for  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 
It  is  going  to  be  one  of  the  most  eventful  years  ever  known  in  the  art,  for 

TWO  GREAT  PATENT  CONTESTS, 

now  under  way — the  "  Shaw  "  patent  and  the  Sliding  Plate-holder  patent — both  of  vital  impor- 
tance to  the  craft,  will  take  place,  and  all  should  be  posted  on  them  as  they  proceed.  The  fullest. 
and  earliest  information  will  be  ejiven  in  this  Magazine. 

THE  PROCEEDINGS  OF  'THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC  ASSOCIATION  are 
only  given  entire  in  one  number  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

THE    EMBELLISHMENTS    FOR    1874 

will  be  from  negatives  by  Messrs.  Luckhardt,  Marshall,  Sommer,  Robinson  &  Cherrill,  Kurtz, 
Jewell,  North,  Curtis,  Mottu,  and  others,  and  will  be  unusually  excellent  and  choice,  illustrating 
all  branches  of  photography,  and  introducing  very  useful  studies. 

THEY  ALONE  WILL  BE  WORTH  THE  COST  OP  SUBSCRIPTION. 

ILLUSTRATIONS,  by  means  of  engravings,  cuts,  &c,  will  be  profusely  employed,  and  every 
effort  made  to  secure  to  the  readers  of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer 

The  Most  Elegant  and  Useful  Photographic  Magazine  in  the  "World ! 

To  Employees,  Employees,  &c.  ;  Please  read  our  liberal  offer  of 

PKEMIUMS  ON  THE  OPPOSITE  PAGE 


NOTICE   TO    SUBSCRIBERS. 


Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2  50  for  six  months,  50  cents  per  copy.     Positively  in  advance. 

In  remitting  by  mail  a  post-office  order,  or  draft  payable  to  the  order  of  Benerman  &  Wilson,  is 
preferable  to  bank  notes.     Clearly  give  your  Post-office,  County,  and  State. 

Canada  subscribers  must  remit  24  cents  extra,  to  prepay  postage.  Foreign  subscriptions  must  be 
accompanied  by  the  postage  in  addition. 

Advertising  sheets  are  bound  with  each  number  of  the  Magazine.  Advertisements  are  inserted 
at  the  following  rates : 

One  Month.  Six  Months.  One  Year. 

One  Page, '.$20  00  $110  00  $200  00 

Half    "      12  00  66  00 120  00 

Quarter  Page, 7  00  38  50  70  00 

Eighth       '■      4  00  22  00  40  00 

Cards,  of  Six  lines  or  less, 2  00  11  00  20  00 

The.  attention  of  advertisers,  and  those  having  galleries,  &c,  for  sale,  is  called  to  our  Specialties 
pages.  Terms  $2  for  six  lines,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a  line,  always 
in  advance.  Duplicate  insertions,  50  cents  less,  each.  Sure  to  pay.  Jgigp'Operators  desiring  situa- 
tions, no  charge. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

OFFICE,  S.  W.  COR.  OF  SEVENTH  AND  CHEERY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


IT    WILL    PAY    TO    BUY    THE    BEST. 

ENTREKIN'S 

OSCILLATING  ENAMELER 


BURNISHING     M^Mmm     BEAUTIFUL 

|f  11  ^^^J|fi       ill™ 

PHOTOGRAPHS.  JHiP^E    ^FINISH  &  GLOSS 


FAR   SUPERIOR  TO   ANYTHING   YET   INVENTED  FOR   THAT   PURPOSE. 

PBIOE    LIST: 

6  inch  Roll,  $25;  14  inch  Roll,  $45;  18  inch  Roll,  $75. 


EVERY    MACHINE    WARRANTED    PERFECT. 


Office  of  C.  M.  Parks,  Late  Principal  Examiner  in  the  Patent  Office, 
Washington,  December  12th,  1873. 
AVilliam  G.  Entrekin. 

Dear  Sir  :  I  am  familiar  with  the  class  of  machines  to  which  j'our  Photographic  Burnisher  relates, 
as  I  was  examiner  of  that  class  of  inventions  in  the  United  States  Patent  Office  for  some  time,  and  have 
had  occasion  to  keep  myself  posted  in  regard  to  them  since,  and  believe  your  Burnisher  is  the  very  best 
in  existence,  embracing  all  the  features  necessary  to  make  a  complete  polished  surface  upon  a  photo- 
graph, and  also  believe  the  time  will  come  when  every  photographer  of  any  pretensions  will  be  com- 
pelled to  use  one.     I  predict  for  you  success  in  your  patent.  Yours  truly, 

C.  M.  Parks,  Solicitor  of  Patents. 

Office  of  C.  M.  Parks,  Solicitor  of  Patents,  428  Seventh  Street, 
Washington,  D.  C,  January  5th,  1874. 
Wii.  G.  Entrekin. 

Dear  Sir  :  Yours  is  just  received.  You  need  not  fear  any  trouble  from  any  parties  in  regard  to 
the  Weston  machine  ;  your  Burnisher  does  not  infringe  with  any  feature  of  the  Weston  machine  in 
the  least  particular.     You  can,  therefore,  manufacture  and  sell  your  machine  with  impunity. 

Yours  truly,  C.  M.  Parks. 


D^=  WE 

All  photographers  not  to  be  frightened  out  of  purchasing  our  superior  "Oscillating  Enameler  for 
Burnishing  Photographs."  We  simply  defy  any  party  or  parties  to  interfere  with  us  in  the  manufac 
ture  or  sale  of  said  machine,  for  which  we  hold  letters  patent  for  seventeen  years,  in  the  United  States 
and  Territories.  We  will  guarantee  protection  to  every  purchaser.  We  shall  sell  to  the  fraternity  a 
good  machine  at  a  fair  price.  Photographers  can  buy  direct  from  us,  if  they  cannot  procure  them  of 
their  dealers. 

D^=  Pay  no  attention  to  the   "CAUTIONS"   of  other  parties,  who  intimate  that  our  machine 
infringes  theirs.     Examine,  and  buy  the  best. 

W.  G.  ENTREKIN,  Patentee, 

4382  &  43 S4  Main  St.,  Manayunk,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


Address  ALL  Communications,  both  for  the  Editor  and  the  Publishers,  to  Sherman's 
Building,  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Number  125. 


THE 


50  Cents. 


PHILADELPHIA 


h0t00raplti[t\ 


AH  ILLUSTRATED  MONTHLY  JOURNAL, 


DEVOTED  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


THE  OFFICIAL  OKGAN  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGEA.PHIO 
ASSOCIATION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. 


IMC  st  y,     1  O  "Z  4. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

BENERMAN    &    WILSON, 

PTJBLISHEKS. 


Subscriptions  received  by  all  News  and  Stockdealers. 

FIVE  DOLLARS  PER  ANNUM,  IN  ADVANCE. 


Sherman  &  Co.,  Printers,  Philadelphia. 


SOMETHING  NEW!  { 


Out  Next  Month. 
See  Advertisement  inside. 


SUMMARY    OP    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Still  Another  Gold  Medal 129 

Gold  Medal  Offered  to  Foreign  Photographers 129 

The  N.  P.  A.  at  Chicago 129 

The  Solar  Negative  Prize 130 

The  Mammoth  Offer 130 

Wet  Books '. 130 

Hints  Under  the  Skylight.    By  R.  J.  Chute 130 

The  Southworth- Wing  Patent 132 

A  Class  in  Landscape  Photography 132 

Permanent  Sensitive  Paper.    By  C.  F.  Richardson..  133 

Talk  and  Tattle 135 

To  Mount  Washington  and  Return 137 

Photography  in  France.    By  Ernest  Lacan 139 

Smith's  Copying  Board 141 

Our  Picture 142 


PAGE 

Crystal  Self-acting  Table  Fountain 143 

Notes  In  and  Out  of  the  Studio.    By  G.  Wharton 

Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A 143 

The  Prize  Medal 145 

Local   Secretary   Hesler's  Appeal   to   the    Photog- 
raphers   145 

Views  Abroad  and  Across.    By  Edward  L.  Wilson,  146 
How  to  avoid  Unnecessary  Waste  of  Time  and  Silver. 

By  E.  Z.  Webster 151 

German  Correspondence.    By  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  Ph.D....  153 

A  New  Pocket-Album 155 

Society  Gossip 156 

Matters  of  the  N.  P.  A 158 

Proceedings  of  Executive  Committee  of  the  N.  P.  A.,  158 
Editor's  Table 159 


Embellishment. — Cabinet  Portrait.    Negatives  by  Messrs.  Wegner  &  Mottu,  Amsterdam,  Holland.    Prints 

by  Wm.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s  Paper. 

Anderson,  J.  A.    Photographic  Apparatus. 

Anthony  &  Co.,  E.  &  H.  T.    The  Bowdish  Chair. 

Benerman  &  Wilson.    Lantern  Slides. 

Bierstadt,  Charles.    Photo.  Views. 

Bigelow's  Album  op  Lighting  and  Posing. 

Bullock  &  Crenshaw.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Cameo  Press,  The  Universal. 

Chameleon  Barometer. 

Clemons,  Jno.  R.    Albumen  Paper.    Varnish. 

Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  A.  M.    Photograph  Cards. 

Cooper  &  Co.,  Chas.    Portrait  Lenses. 

Crystal  Self-acting  Table  Fountain. 

Curtis,  G.  E.    Stereo.  Views. 

Dean,  John  &  Co.    Adamantean  Ferrotype  Plates. 

Entrekin,  W.  G.    Oscillating  Enameler. 

French,  B.  &  Co.    Voigtlander  Lenses,  &c. 

Gihon,  John  L.    Opaque  and  Cut-Outs. 

Griswold's  Life  Compositions  for  the  Stereoscope. 

Hance's  Photo.  Specialties. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs. 

Jacoby,  W.  H.    Printing  Frame. 

Hale,  Kilburn  &  Co.    Frames. 

Karstens  &  Braun.    Albumen  Paper. 

Kilburn  Bros.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Knell,  George.    Photo.  Furniture. 

Lewis,  R.  A.    Collodion. 

Liesegang,  E.    Albumen  Paper, 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 

Loescher  &  Petsch.    A  New  Invoice  of  Studies. 

Marion  &  Co.    Specialties. 

Magee,  James  F.  &  Co.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

McAllister,  W.  Mitchell.    Manufacturing  Optician. 

McCollin,  Thos.  H.    Photographic  Materials. 

Moore,  Albert.    Solar  Printing. 


Mosaics,  1874. 

Moulton,  L.  V.    Rapid  Photo-Washer. 
Newell's  Improved  Bath-Holder. 
Pattberg,  Lewis  &  Bro.    Passepartouts,  &c. 
Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 
Photographer's  Pocket  Reference-Book. 
Photographic  Publications. 
Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 
Powers  &  Weightman.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Premiums  for  1874,  for  New  Subscribers  to  "Philadel- 
phia Photographer." 
Rau,  Geo.    German  Albumen  Colors. 
Rice  &  Thompson.    Photo.  Stock  House. 
Robinson  &  Cherrill.    Burnt-in  Enamels. 
Robinson's  New  Photo.  Trimmer. 
Robinson's  Metallic  Guides. 
Rohaut  &  Hutinet.    Photographic  Mounts. 
Ross'  Portrait  and  View  Lenses. 
Rotter,  Geo.  &  Co.    Albumen  Paper. 
Ryan,  D.  J.    Photo.  Stock  Depot,  Chromos,  &c. 
Sauter,  G.    Passepartouts. 
Schwaeze  &  Valk.    Photo,  Papers. 
Scovill  Manf'g.  Co.    Photographic  Materials. 
Seavey  L.  W.    Scenic  Artist,  Backgrounds,  Ac. 
Snelling,  H.  H.    Lebanon  Rustic  Frame. 
Steinheil's  New  Aplanatic  Lenses. 
Stevens,  Chas.  W.    Photographic  Goods. 
Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papers. 
Weller's  Stereoscopic  Treasures. 
Wilson,  Charles  A.    Photographic  Goods. 
Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials,  Ac. 
Willy  Wallach.    Albumen  Paper. 
Woodward,  D.  A.    Solar  Cameras. 
Zentmayer,  Joseph.    Lenses. 


8 


4 


Special  Premium  of  Six  Handsome  German 
Cabinet  Pictures  of  Ladies ! 

By  FE1TZ  LUCKHARDT,  Vienna,  Austria. 

These  pictures  are  alone  worth  $3  for  the  set,  and  more  is  asked  for 
such  by  dealers. 

Given  to  any  one  who  will  send  ns  a  HEW  Subscriber  for  tie  year  1874 

What  Others  Think  of  the  Prizes: 


"  These  studies  were  greatly  admired  by  the 
members  present,  and  all  were  convinced  that 
they  were  worthy  of  most  careful  study." — Min- 
utes of  the  Chicago  Photo.  Association. 

"These  pictures  were  examined  and  much  ad- 
mired by  all  present.  '"—Indiana  Photo.  Ass'n. 

"The  pictures  elicited  general  praise;  the 
draperies  especially  were  very  favorably  com- 
mented upon.'' — German  Photographers'1  Socie- 
ty, New  York. 

"  The  prints  were  thought  to  be  worth  more 
than  the  price  which  was  charged  for  the  journal, 
i.e.,  $5  ;  and  the  President,  Mr.  Black,  stated  that 
every  operator  should  have  a  set,  for  he  considered 
them  to  be  most  admirable  studies,  and  superior 
to  anything  which  he  had  seen  heretofore." — 
Boston  Photographic  Society. 


"They  were  accepted  as  being  of  a  very  high 
standard.''— Brooklyn  Photo.  Art  Association. 

"  The  high  artistic  merits  of  the  pictures,  and 
their  great  value  as  studies  for  the  progressive 
photographer,  were  conceded  by  all.  The  general 
harmony  in  the  details  of  each  print,  the  man- 
agement of  light,  and  beautiful  rendering  of 
texture  were  greatly  admired." — Photographic 
Section  of  the  American  Institute,  N.  Y. 

Special  votes  of  thanks  were  given  for  them 
by  the  Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia  ; 
Photographic  Association  of  West.  Illinois  ;  Chi- 
cago Photographic  Association  ;  Indiana,  District 
of  Columbia,  and  Maryland  Photographic  Asso- 
ciations ;  Photographic  Section  of  the  American 
Institute  ;  German  Photographers'  Society,  New 
York ;  Boston  and  Brooklyn  Photographic  Art 
Associations,  whereat  they  attracted  great  atten- 
tion and  admiration. 


A  Few  Words  from  those  who  have  received  them  as  Premiums  for  New  Subscribers : 


"I  think  when  we  say  they  are  splendid  it  is 
only  a  mild  expression  of  what  they  will  bear." 
— E.  F.  Everett. 

"They  are  well  worth  striving  for,  and  the 
photographers  who  allow  this  set  to  remain  out- 


side their  collection  don't  deserve  them.'' — J. 
Pitcher  Spooner. 

"  They  are  by  far  the  best  specimens  of  pho- 
tographs of  white  drapery  that  I  ever  saw,  and 
the  artistic  part  leaves  nothing  to  wish  for." — 
James  Paris. 


We  make  this  offer  as  A  MATTER  OF  BUSINESS,  and 
not  as  a.  favor  to  any  one  on  either  side.  It  will  pay 
to  GIVE  A  YEAR'S  SUBSCRIPTION  TO  YOUR  OPERATOR 
or  to  your  friend  or  customer,  in  order  to  SECURE 
THESE  PICTURES. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philada. 


The 


Chair. 


Enabling  the  photographer  to  successfully  secure  every  variety  of  pose  with  facility  and  reliability. 
It  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  varying  necessities  of  female  portraiture,  and  is  equally  suited  for 
children,  for  vignettes,  or  for  full  lengths.  The  BOWDISH  CHAIR  is  substantial  in  construction, 
elegant  in  design,  and  rich  in  upholstery  and  finish.  Those  who  have  purchased  them,  speak  in  the 
highest  terms,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 

4  TESTIMONIALS:  & 

+ + 

■'About  ten  days  ago  I  received  the  new  chair  you  promised  to  send  me  when  I  saw  you  last,  and 
would  have  written  and  .acknowledged  your  kind  favor  long  ago  if  1  had  correctly  known  your  ad- 
dress. Accept  my  best  thanks  for  this  really  beautiful  chair,  which  now,  after  ten  days'  trial,  has 
proved  to  be  a  decided  success  in  every  way.  It  has  become  the  real  favorite  for  posing  in  my  studio. 
Besides  this,  in  external  appearance  the  new  chair  appears  so  much  superior  in  finish,  and  is  at  the 
same  time  highly  ornamental,  and  the  head  rest  is  so  much  easier  handled  than  with  any  chair  I  have 
ever  seen  before.  In  short,  it  gives  the  sitter  the  greatest  possible  comfort  and  steadiness.  I  think 
the  chair  I  have  justly  deserves  the  name  of  'Perfect  Posing  Chair.'  " — H.  Rocher,  Chicago,  111., 
January  10,  1873. 

"  Since  receiving  your  posing  chair,  nearly  a  year  since,  I  have  had  it  in  constant  use,  and  am 
satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  posing  chair  in  the  market.  It  is  easily  worked,  and  is  so  well  made  that 
one  will  last  a  life  time,  and  then  be  a  valuable  heirloom." — L.  G.  Bigelow. 

"The  Bowdish  Chair  came  in  good  order  and  gives  the  best  of  satisfaction.  Should  you  wish  a 
recommendation  for  it,  say  what  you  please  and  we  will  endorse  it.  You  cannot  praise  it  too  highly." 
— Slee  Bros.,  Puughkeepsie,,  N.  Y.,  Sept.  10,  1872. 

"  Your  chair  has  arrived  at  last.  I  am  much  pleased  with  it.  1  don't  think  my  gallery  can  be 
complete  without  one  of  them.  Wishing  you  the  success  your  invention  merits,  I  am,  truly  yours, 
A.  Hesler." 

Prints  will  be  sent,  if  desired,  before  purchasing.     There  are  three  styles  kept  in  stock,  viz  : 

No.  2.  With  nickel-plated  rods  and  rest,  in  velveteen  or  reps $60  00 

No.  4.        "  "  "  "  "  "    square  carved  legs 70  00 

No.  6.       "  "  "  "     in  best  plush,  paneled 80  00 

Special  chairs  to  order. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO.,  Sole  Agents, 

591  Broadway ,  New  York. 


GIHOH'S  CUT-OUTS 

Are  the  very  best  that  are  made,  and  are  now  without  a  rival  in  the  market.  They  are  clean 
cut,  most  desirable  shapes  and  sizes,  and  made  of  non-actinic  paper,  manufactured  specially 
for  the  purpose.  Each  package  contains  30  Cut-Outs,  or  Masks,  with  corresponding  Insides, 
assorted  for  five  differently  sized  ovals  and  one  arch-top. 

PRICE,  $1.00  PER  PACKAGE.     Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

Parties  wishing  special  sizes,  or  large  lots  of  a  few  sizes,  may  have  them  cut  to  order 
promptly,  by  addressing  the  manufacturer.     No  lot  costing  less  than  $1.00  made  at  a  time. 

fig^*  No  printer  should  attempt  to  make  medallion  pictures  without  them. 

THEY  HAVE  EO  EQUAL  FOR  QUALITY. 

Beware  of  spurious  imitations  made  of  common  paper,  full  of  holes,  badly  cut,  and  odd 
shapes  and  sizes.  Ask  your  stockdealer  for  GTHON'S  CUT-OUTS,  and  see  that  they  are 
in  his  envelopes  with  instruction  circular  included. 


GIHON'S  OPAQUE 

IS    DESIGNED    FOR 

COMPLETELY  OBSCURING  THE  IMPEKFECT  BACKGROUNDS  OF  COPIES, 
RETOUCHING  NEGATIVES, 

FAULTY  SKIES  IN  LANDSCAPES, 

COATING  THE  INSIDE  OF  LENSES  OR  CAMERA  BOXES, 
BACKING  SOLAR  NEGATIVES, 

COVERING  VIGNETTING  BOARDS, 

AND    FOR  ANSWERING 

ALL  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  INTELLIGENT  PHOTOGRAPHER  IN  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  ARTISTIC  RESULTS  IN  PRINTING. 


WHEREVER  YOU  WANT  TO  KEEP  OUT  LIGHT,  USE  OPAQUE. 

It  is  applied  with  a  brush,  dries  quickly  and  sticks. 


CUT-OUTS  (thirty),  $1.00. 


OPAQUE,  50  CENTS. 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Address  all  orders  to 

JOHN  L.  GIHON,  Inventor, 

128  JV,  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia,  JPa. 


JOHN  DEAN  &  CO. 


MANUFACTURERS, 


Worcester,  Mass., 


OFFEE  AT   WHOLESALE,   AT   LOWEST   PEICES,   THE 


dammten 


ATE, 


BLACK  and  Patent  CHOCOLATE  TINTED, 
EGG-SHELL  and  GLOSSY. 

The  experience  and  extensive  facilities  of  John  Dean  &  Co.  enable  them 
to  produce  the  most  desirable  Ferrotype  Plates  in  the  market. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  GO., 

TRADE   AGENTS, 

591  BROADWAY,  NEW  YORK. 


WEGNER  ifc  MOTTV, 


AMhTKKJ)AM. 


THE 


IfMtaMpkiii  ^Ii0t0gvnjilie^ 


Vol.  XL 


MAY,  1874. 


No.  12  5. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  187*, 

By  BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


STILL  ANOTHER  GOLD  MEDAL. 

Being  well  pleased  with  our  success  in 
our  offer  of  a  medal  for  Portraiture,  we  now 
want  to  stimulate  those  who  wprk  in  the 
field,  and  give  them  an  opportunity  to  win 
a  prize.  We  therefore  offer  a  Gold  Medal 
for  the  three  best  Landscape  Negatives  sent 
us  by  the  15th  of  August.  The  size  to  be 
suitable  for  our  magazine,  not  larger  than 
4-4;  a  5  x  8  plate  is  the  size  we  prefer. 

The  regulations  will  be  the  same  as  for 
the  competition  in  portraiture,  as  given  on 
the  first  page  of  our  April  number. 


Gold  Medal  Offered  to  Foreign  Pho- 
tographers. 

We  desire  to  remind  our  foreign  sub- 
scribers of  the  offer  we  make  of  a  Gold 
Medal  for  the  best  three  portrait  negatives 
sent  us  by  the  15th  July,  and  to  renew  the 
invitation  to  them  all  to  compete.  Our 
American  competition  just  terminated  has 
brought  us  some  of  the  finest  work  iwl  have 
ever  seen,  and  we  trust  the  many  foreign 
artists,  whose  names  are  familiar  to  Ameri- 
cans, will  not  suffer  this  opportunity  to  pass 
without  making  an  effort  to  sustain  the 
high  reputation  th*y  have  so  long  enjoyed. 

The  regulations  will  be  the  same  as  for 
the  American  competition,  as  given  on  the 
first  page  of  our  April  number.  We  hope 
to  see  as  active  a  contest  as  we  have  had  on 


this  side,  and  believe  it  will  result  in  much 
good  to  all,  both  at  home  and  abroad. 


THE  N.  P.  A.  AT  CHICAGO. 

As  the  time  draws  near  for  the  next 
Annual  Convention  of  the  National  Pho- 
tographic Association  the  details  are  begin- 
ning to  be  arranged,  and  matters  are  as- 
suming tangible  shape.  We  call  attention 
to  Mr.  Hesler's  article  further  on,  extend- 
ing an  invitation  to  all  to  come,  and  to  the 
directions  for  exhibitors.  The  whole  coun- 
try yielded  to  the  Northwest  and  appointed 
the  next  convention  at  Chicago,  and  we 
want  to  impress  upon  the  photographers  of 
that  section  the  important  fact  that  the  suc- 
cess of  the  Convention  will  depend  very 
much  upon  how  they  take  hold  of  it,  and 
the  extent  to  which  they  support  the  Local 
Secretary.  As  united  action  is  always  more 
potent  than  separate  individual  effort,  it 
would  be  well  for  photographers  to  orga- 
nize,,, wherever  a  dozen  of  them  can  be 
brought  together,  for  the  special  purpose  of 
promoting  the  interests  of  the  National 
Photographic  Association  meeting  to  be 
held  in  Chicago  in  July. 

A  notice  just  received  from  Mr.  Hesler 
indicates  that  the  photographers  there  are 
moving  in  the  matter,  and  it  only  requires 
a  united  effort  on  the  part  of  all,  both  in 
city  and  country,  to  make  this  the  grandest 
exhibition  that  has  ever  been  held. 


130 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHO  TOGKAPHER. 


THE  SOLAR  NEGATIVE  PRIZE. 

Mr.  Albert  Moore,  who  has  kindly 
offered  a  Gold  Medal  for  the  best  Solar  Neg- 
ative, desires  us  to  say  that  the  responses 
have  not  been  as  numerous  as  he  wishes 
they  might  be,  and  he  has  extended  the 
time  to  June  1st. 

This  is  a  branch  of  photography  in  which 
there  is  quite  as  much  room  for  improve- 
ment as  any  other,  and  we  do  hope  those 
who  can,  will  show  interest  enough  in  the 
matter  to  compete  for  this  medal.  No  so 
much  for  the  sake  of  securing  the  medal  as 
to  enable  Mr.  Moore — who  is  unexcelled  as 
a  solar  printer — to  exhibit  some  examples 
of  work  at  the  Chicago  Convention  which 
will  do  credit  to  American  photography. 


THE  MAMMOTH  OFFER. 

We  hope  we  will  be  pardoned  for  calling 
attention  to  this  matter  again.  Tickets  are 
"going,"  some  taking  as  many  as  ten,  at  a 
time.  This  is  good,  but  there  are  more  left. 
Some  objection  is  made  to  the  method  pro- 
posed for  drawing  at  Chicago,  and  we  are 
authorized  to  say  that  holders  of  tickets 
may  dictate  any  other  plan,  and  whatever 
the  majority  prefers  will  be  respected  and 
followed.  Perhaps  it  would  be  best  to  have 
no  voting  at  all  but  a  simple  drawing,  and 
the  first  number  drawn  to  be  the  successful 
one,  whether  the  owner  be  present  in  per- 
son or  by  proxy,  or  not  represented  at  all. 
Please  announce  your  desires  in  the  matter 
when  you  send  for  tickets  this  month,  and 
we  are  assured  that  your  wishes  will  be 
respected. 

In  order  that  it  may  be  known  what  sort 
of  an  instrument  is  offered  we  quote  a  letter 
to  B.  French  &  Co.  from  Mr.  Landy,  as 
follows : 

208  West  Fourth  Street, 
Cincinnati,  February  25th,  1874. 

Messrs.  Benj.  French  &  Co., 

Boston,  Mass. 
Gentlemen  :  I  have  tried  the  Mammoth 
Yoigtlander  you  sent  me,  and  I  consider 
it  the  best  large  instrument  I  have  ever 
seen,  and  I  have  tried  those  made  by  other 
makers,  Dallmeyer's  included,  and  they  do 
not  compare  with  the  Voigtlander.     I  have 


told  P.  Smith  &  Co.  to  write  you  that  I 
would  keep  it. 

Respectfully,  yours, 

J.  Landy. 
P.  S. — All  my  baby  pictures  were  made 
with  half  size  Voigtlander  lenses. 

J.  L. 

WET  BOOKS. 

Some  of  our  readers  were  doubtless  dis- 
appointed in  not  receiving  copies  of  the 
damaged  books  they  ordered  ;  but  we  can 
only  say  if  they  were  disappointed,  we  were 
surprised.  Our  last  number  had  scarcely 
been  out  of  the  office  a  day  before  the  orders 
began  to  come  in,  and  in  a  few  days  Ander- 
son's Skylight  and  Dark-room,  Bigelow's 
Album,  and  Wilson's  Landscape  Studies 
were  exhausted.  We  congratulate  those 
who  were  so  fortunate  as  to  get  those  books, 
at  such  a  discount,  and  believe  they  will  do 
them  good.  We  still  have  a  few  more 
copies  of  the  other  works  on  hand,  and  we 
keep  the  offer  open  another  month,  as  will 
be  seen  by  reference  to  our  advertising 
pages.  Most  of  these  books  are  damaged 
much  less  than  we  at  first  supposed.  The 
numbers  of  the  Photographic  World,  and 
Philadelphia  Photographer,  especially,  have 
dried  out  so  that  it  can  scarcely  be  dis- 
covered that  they  have  been  wet ;  and  at  the 
price  we  are  offering  them  they  will  give 
more  photographic  information  than  can  be 
had  for  the  money  in  any  other  way.  The 
price  on  any  of  the  damaged  goods  hardly 
pays  us  for  packing  them,  but  we  want  to 
get  them  off.  We  want  to  wipe  out  every 
trace  of  the  late  deluge,  and  reorganize  with 
everything  new  and  fresh.  Send  along 
your  orders  now. 


HINTS  TTNDER  THE    SKYLIGHT. 

BY  R.  J.   CHUTE. 

The  Eyes  [continued). 

Under  this  head  last  month  I  made  some 
observations  on  the  general  management  of 
the  eyes  ;  I  now  come  to  the  consideration 
of  some  special  cases  that  require  special 
treatment. 

The  first  of  these  is  crossed  eyes,  or  eyes 
one  or  both  of  which  are  turned.    Generally 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


131 


B     D 


it  is  desirable  to  overcome  a  difficulty  of  this 
kind,  so  that  the  deformity  may  not  appear 
in  the  picture,  and  it  is  not  the  least  of  the 
artist's  trials  sometimes  to  accomplish  this 
satisfactorily. 

Where  the  eyes  are  badly  twisted,  both 
perhaps  being  turned  in  or  out,  the  easiest 
and  most  effectual  method  of  overcoming 
the  difficulty  is  to  make  a  profile  if  the  face 
will  at  all  admit  of  it,  being  careful  to 
place  the  eye-rest  so  that  the  eye  that  shows 
will  appear  to  be  in  a  natural  position.  In 
such  cases  as  are  illustrated  by  the  annexed 
figure,  where  one  eye  only  appears  to  be 
affected,  they  may  be  made 
to  appear  quite  straight 
and  natural.  By  placing 
the  rest  at  A,  one  eye  will 
appear  to  be  looking  di- 
rectly forward,  while  the 
other  seems  to  look  at  B. 
Now  by  carrying  the  rest 
to  C  the  twisted  eye  will 
be  brought  to  D,  and  the 
difference  between  them  will  be  so  equalized 
that  oftentimes  no  fault  is  perceptible  in  the 
picture. 

Secondly,  serious  difficulty  is  often  ex- 
perienced in  photographing  eye-glasses  and 
spectacles.  This  has  been  so  general  that 
many  artists  keep  a  supply  of  frames,  of 
various  patterns  without  glasses,  to  substi- 
tute for  those  worn  by  the  sitter  when  re- 
quired. This  is  well,  and  is  a  much  less 
evil  than  to  produce  the  eyes  blank  by  re- 
flections in  the  glasses.  But  to  this  there  is 
objection  in  many  cases.  If  the  sitter  is 
used  to  wearing  glasses,  his  eyes  are  much 
more  easy  and  natural  with  them  than  with- 
out. Some  persons  can  distinguish  no  ob- 
ject whatever  at  any  distance  with  the 
naked  eye,  hence,  when  an  effort  is  made  to 
look  where  nothing  can  be  seeit,  the  eye  is 
wearied  and  has  a  strained,  unnatural  ex- 
pression which  affects  the  whole  face. 

Usually  a  more  successful  sitting  can  be 
had  when  the  sitter's  own  glasses  can  be 
used,  and  with  few  exceptions  they  may 
with  care  be  used  with  perfect  success. 

Glasses  that  have  a  very  convex  surface 
are  the  most  difficult,  as  they  gather  reflec- 
tions from  so  wide  an  angle. 

Ordinarily,  however,  a  little  manipulation 


is  all  that  is  necessary  ;  and  this  is  brought 
to  bear  in  so  poising  the  glasses  that  all  re- 
flections will  be  avoided.  By  raising  or 
lowering  them,  by  tipping  them  forward  or 
back,  they  may  be  brought  into  such  posi- 
tion as  to  give  the  eye  perfectly  clear.  But 
it  must  be  remembered  that  this  cannot  be 
done  without  attention  to  the  surroundings 
in  the  studio.  If  there  be  a  light  carpet, 
light  screens,  or  light  walls,  their  surfaces 
will  be  reflected  in  the  glasses,  and  all  efforts 
to  avoid  it  will  be  fruitless,  except  by  the 
removal  or  covering  of  the  reflecting  sur- 
faces. Light  from  the  carpet  may  be 
avoided  by  spreading  a  dark  covering  over 
it  in  front  of  the  sitter  for  the  occasion  ; 
screens  and  walls  maybe  covered  by  placing 
a  small  dark  screen  near  the  sitter.  But 
not  the  least  important  item  in  this  connec- 
tion is  what  the  artist  himself  may  wear. 
A  light  coat  on  his  back  is  mirrored  in  the 
glasses,  or  in  the  eye  even,  and  yet  he  won- 
ders where  the  reflections  come  from  !  He 
who  wants  his  pictures  free  from  reflected 
lights  in  the  eyes,  will  do  well  to  see  that 
they  are  not  produced  by  anything  his  fancy 
or  convenience  may  induce  him  to  put  on. 
Dark  drapery  is  said  to  be  best  for  the  sit- 
ter ;  it  certainly  is  best  for  the  operator. 

Thirdly,  weak  and  squinting  eyes  are 
often  very  perplexing,  photographically. 
The  first  of  these  must  be  turned  as  much 
as  possible  from  the  light,  and  if  disposed  to 
wink  very  much,  which  is  generally  the 
case,  the  sitting  must  be  made  very  short. 
A  dark  screen  in  front  of  the  sitter  is  a  great 
relief  to  weak  eyes.  In  cases  of  this  kind 
care  should  be  taken,  too,  to  see  that  the 
sitter  does  not  fix  the  eyes  on  any  point 
until  the  plate  is  ready  to  be  exposed.  This 
is  a  point  that  I  fear  is  too  often  overlooked, 
and  the  sitter  is  allowed  to  "  gaze  "  at  some 
object  from  the  time  he  takes  his  seat  till 
the  whole  operation  is  through  with.  There 
are  many  matters  of  this  kind  that  affect 
the  comfort  of  the  sitter,  and  have  more  or 
less  influence  in  determining  the  degree  of 
success  in  the  sitting.  A  liberal  investment 
of  courtesy,  patience,  and  consideration  of 
the  feelings  and  comfort  of  those  who  place 
themselves  in  our  hands  for  so  personal  an 
interview  as  sitting  for  their  photograph, 
will  pay  a  good  dividend  in  greenbacks. 


132 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


THE  SOTJTHWORTH-WING 
PATENT. 

Editor  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

Dear  Sir:  "Will  you  please  say  to  the 
photographic  fraternity  that  the  suit  brought 
by  Wing,  Southworth,  and  Ormsbee  against 
the  undersigned,  at  this  place,  for  infringe- 
ment of  the  above  patent,  has  developed 
some  new  and  very  important  evidence  for 
the  defence,  which  is  now  being  printed, 
and  upon  which  we  hope  to  get  a  decision 
in  May  or  June  next. 

Photographers  interested  personally,  or 
for  the  good  of  the  fraternity,  can  obtain  a 
copy  of  this  testimony  by  addressing  the 
undersigned.  I  can  also  furnish  printed 
"answer  to  bill  of  complaint,"  and  other 
legal  papers,  which  will  enable  any  photog- 
rapher to  conduct  the  defence  at  little  cost. 
Tours  truly, 

J.  H.  Tompkins, 

Grand  Rapids,  Mich. 


A  Class  in  Landscape  Photography. 

As  the  season  approaches  when  many  a 
photographer  will  long  for  the  air  and  sun- 
shine among  the  beauties  of  opening  spring, 
and  many  others  will  look  about  them  for 
suitable  appliances  with  which  to  go  forth, 
either  for  pleasure  or  profit,  and  select  some 
of  the  choice  bits  that  nature  has  scattered 
profusely  almost  everywhere,  we  have 
thought  it  expedient  to  form  a  class  for 
study  and  mutual  improvement  in  this 
branch  of  photography  ;  as  we  believe  there 
are  enough  that  are  interested  in  this  direc- 
tion if  they  will  but  unite  in  the  enterprise, 
to  make  it  very  interesting  and  instructive 
to  all  who  are  wishing  and  willing  to  learn. 

"With  this  end  in  view  we  extend  a  cor- 
dial invitation  to  all  who  are  interested  in 
landscape  photography,  either  practically 
or  as  amateurs,  whether  experienced  or  just 
beginning,  who  desire  to  improve  and  gain 
such  information  as  a  full  and  free  discus- 
sion may  impart,  to  join  the  movement,  and 
notify  us  at  an  early  day  if  they  are  willing 
to  do  so.  What  we  mean  by  this  is  a  class 
of  active  workers  who  take  especial  interest 
in  this  department,  and  who  are  willing  to 
communicate   to  us  their  experiences,  me- 


thods of  working,  and  any  dodges  or  devices 
that  they  may  think  new  or  interesting. 
The  meetings  of  the  class  will  be  held 
monthly  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer, 
and  the  pith  of  all  the  matter  collected  will 
be  incorporated  in  the  report. 

In  making  reference  to  any  thoughts 
communicated  by  members  we  will  use  fic- 
titious names  if  the  writers  so  prefer,  and 
make  the  whole  incognito. 

Our  purpose  will  be  to  benefit  every 
reader  of  this  journal,  if  possible,  by  this 
series  of  articles,  but  we  are  sure  the  greatest 
advantage  will  be  derived  from  them  by 
those  who  take  part  in  the  discussion,  and 
give  as  well  as  receive. 

We  shall  call  to  our  aid  the  experience  of 
some  of  the  best  landscape  photographers, 
as  given  in  their  writings,  and  endeavor  in 
every  way  to  make  the  series  thoroughly 
practical. 

Having  now  stated  the  object  we  have  in 
view,  we  submit  the  matter  to  the  consid- 
eration of  all  who  are  interested,  and  hope 
they  will  signify  to  us  if  they  wish  to  be 
enrolled  as  members  of  the  clasSj  so  that  at 
our  next  meeting  we  can  start  out  fully  or- 
ganized for  the  work  before  us. 

We  shall  endeavor  at  each  meeting  to  lay 
out  the  work  for  the  next,  so  that  during 
the  month,  questions  may  be  asked  and 
communications  sent  in  reference  to  the  par- 
ticular subject  before  us. 

At  our  next  meeting  we  shall  consider  the 
question  of  apparatus.  The  best  lenses  for 
different  kinds  of  work,  the  best  camera  box, 
the  best  dark-tent,  and  if  time  and  space  per- 
mit give  some  formula  for  collodion,  bath, 
&c.  In  reference  to  all  these  we  invite  con- 
tributions, with  suggestions  from  theory  or 
experience  as  to  what  may  be  best  adapted 
for  the  work.  We  also  invite  contributions 
from  dry-plate  workers,  as  this  might  be 
interesting  to  many,  and  form  an  import- 
ant item  in  our  studies.  Who  will  be  first 
to  join  the  class  in  landscape  photography? 


The  new  set  of  prize  prints  contains  the  best 
work  of  some  of  our  most  talented  photog- 
raphers, and  is  the  best  series  of  studies  by 
far,  and  the  cheapest,  that  was  ever  pub- 
lished. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


133 


PERMANENT  SENSITIVE  PAPER.* 

BY    C.    F.    RICHARDSON. 

This  subject  has  been  much  discussed  for 
the  past  two  or  three  years,  from  which  its 
importance  may  be  inferred.  But  the  ad- 
vantages of  a  paper  which  will  remain  sen- 
sitive and  white  for  some  weeks  before 
printing,  and  for  some  days  between  print- 
ing and  toning,  are  too  evident  to  need  a 
recital.  I  think  it  is  generally  admitted 
that  no  process  has  yet  been  published  by 
which  results  equal  to  those  on  fresh  paper 
can  be  obtained,  and  before  giving  my 
method  of  working,  I  will  briefly  review 
some  of  those  which  have  been  published, 
and  state  some  of  the  objections  to  them. 
Some  of  these  objections  I  have  learned 
from  actual  trial,  and  others  from  the  pub- 
lished statements  of  others. 

One  of  the  first  methods  proposed  was  by 
the  addition  of  citric,  tartaric,  or  oxalic 
acid  to  the  sensitizing  solution.  Citric  acid 
appears  to  be  the  most  powerful  agent  for 
the  purpose.  But  although  paper  prepared 
in  this  way  preserves  its  whiteness  for  a 
long  time,  I  am  convinced  by  numerous 
trials  that  as  good  prints  cannot  be  made 
on  it  as  by  the  usual  process.  The  prints, 
whether  the  paper  be  fumed  or  not,  are  of 
an  unpleasant  foxy  red,  and  although  they 
can  be  toned  to  dark  tints,  they  have  a  pecu- 
liar mealy  color,  difficult  to  describe  and  as 
difficult  to  like. 

Another  method  consisted  in  partially 
washing  away  the  free  nitrate  of  silver  after 
sensitizing,  and  supplying  its  place  by  sub- 
mitting the  paper  to  strong  fuming  during 
the  printing.  But  besides  the  inconve- 
niences of  this,  it  was  admitted  by  many 
of  those  who  advocated  this  method  that 
there  were  difficulties  in  the  way  of  pro- 
ducing first-class  prints,  and  the  process  has 
certainly  never  come  into  general  use. 

About  a  year  ago  Mr.  Hopkins  repub- 
lished a  process  which  had  been  proposed 
some  years  previously,  and  which  consisted 
in  packing  the  paper,  when  nearly  dry, 
between  sheets  of  blotting-paper  which  had 
been  previously  soaked  in  a  solution  of  car- 
bonate of  soda  and  dried.     This  preserves 

*  Read  before  the  Boston  Photographic  Asso- 
ciation. 


the  paper  white  for  a  considerable  time, 
some  which  I  have  under  trial  being  two 
months  old,  with  slight  discoloration,  but 
on  the  second  day  after  sensitizing,  the 
prints  were  flat  and  poor. 

On  the  3d  of  May,  1872,  Mr.  J.  M. 
Turnbull  published  in  the  Photographic 
News,  a  method  which  consisted  in  floating 
the  paper,  when  partially  dry,  on  a  bath  of 
citric  acid.  I  tried  this,  and  although  I 
did  not  succeed  with  it,  the  prints  seeming 
to  need  more  silver,  you  will  see  that  I  am 
indebted  to  Mr.  Turnbull  for  a  valuable  hint. 

Two  evils  result  from  keeping  ordinary 
sensitive  paper,  which  appear  to  be  inde- 
pendent in  their  nature,  although  springing 
from  the  same  cause,  viz.,  the  combination 
of  the  free  nitrate  of  silver  with  the  sizing 
of  the  paper.  First,  the  paper  discolors  ; 
second,  it  prints  flat  and  mealy.  In  any 
successful  keeping  process,  it  is  necessary  to 
overcome  both  these  defects,  and  although 
there  are  many  ways  of  preserving  the 
color  of  the  paper,  it  does  not  seem  so  easy 
to  maintain  vigor. 

The  process  which  I  shall  now  give  you 
is  no  longer  experimental,  but  one  by  which 
I  have  done  all  my  printing  for  a  year. and 
a  half,  and  which  two  others  have  used  from 
four  to  six  months  with  success.  Some  mem- 
bers now  in  the  room  have  also  tried  samples 
of  the  paper,  and  can  speak  as  to  the  results. 

Supposing  that  you  are  using  a  40-grain 
bath,  slightly  alkaline,  prepare  the  follow- 
ing, which  we  will  call  No.  2: 


Nitrate  of  Silver,  . 

1  ounce. 

Nitrate  of  Ammonia, 

.     1     " 

Loaf  Sugar,  . 

.  32  grains. 

Citric  Acid,  . 

160     " 

C.  P.  Nitric  Acid, 

.     i  drop. 

Water 

.  16  ounces. 

Filter,  and  place  in  a  tray  beside  your 
usual  bath,  which  we  will  call  No.  1.  Float 
your  paper  from  two  to  three  minutes  on 
No.  1,  drain  well,  and  place  directly  on  No. 
2.  Leave  it  until  a  second  sheet  is  ready  to 
remove  from  No.  1 ;  then  hang  the  first  up 
to  dry.  Proceed  in  the  same  manner  till 
you  have  sufficient  to  last  a  week  or  more. 
When  dry,  smooth  it  out  face  downwards 
on  a  sheet  of  tissue-paper,  and  roll  it  back 
inwards,  and  in  half  an  hour  it  will  lay  flat- 
in  your  drawer. 


134 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


This  paper  will  now  keep  two  or  three 
weeks  in  cool  weather,  and  when  required 
for  use,  is  fumed  with  strong  ammonia  for 
one  hour.  After  fuming  it  will  not  keep  so 
long,  but  may  be  relied  on  for  a  week  at 
least.  Print  about  the  usual  depth,  and  the 
prints  will  keep  white  before  toning  as  long 
as  the  fumed  paper. 

The  paper  being  acid,  would  fail  to  tone 
in  most  baths  without  some  preparation  for 
it.  Therefore,  add  to  the  first  water  in 
which  the  prints  are  washed  before  toning 
saturated  solution  of  bicarbonate  of  soda, 
at  the  rate  of  about  an  ounce  to  a  third  of  a 
pailful  of  water.  Leave  them  in  this  for 
ten  minutes ;  then  give  them  one  or  two 
changes  of  simple  water,  and  tone  and  fix 
as  usual,  taking  care  not  to  overtone.  I  use 
the  acetate  of  soda  bath,  but  I  have  no 
doubt  any  good  bath  will  work  equally 
well.  I  have  used  different  brands  of  paper 
with  essentially  the  same  results.  Should 
you  wish  to  tone  quicker,  use  more  soda. 

Like  most  acid  sensitizing  solutions,  No. 
2  discolors  after  a  time,  when  it  may  be 
necessary  to  use  kaolin  to  decolorize  it.  As 
the  sheet  is  wet  when  laid  on  No.  2,  but  little 
of  this  is  used  up,  making  the  process  an  eco- 
nomical one.    No.  2  improves  much  with  use. 

Should  a  slight  scummy  deposit  show  on 
the  paper  when  dry,  it  maybe  disregarded, 
as  it  dissolves  in  the  fixing  bath,  but  it  may 
be  entirely  prevented  by  the  addition  of  a 
few  drops  of  nitric  acid  to  No.  2.  This  de- 
posit is  citrate  of  silver,  formed  by  the  alka- 
line action  of  the  first  bath  with  the  citric 
acid  of  the  second.  The  amount  of  nitric 
acid  given  in  the  formula  will  probably 
entirely  prevent  its  formation,  unless  No. 
1  is  too  alkaline.  As  the  acid  in  No.  2  is 
being  constantly  neutralized  by  the  alkaline 
solution  on  the  paper,  a  few  grains  of  citric 
acid  should  be  added  occasionally  if  the 
paper  does  not  keep  sufficiently  well. 

This  paper  still  did  not  keep  as  well  as  I 
wished,  and  it  occurred  to  me  that  a  combi- 
nation of  this  method  with  the  carbonate  of 
soda  paper  might  be  an  improvement.  I 
accordingly  packed  some  in  that  paper,  and 
I  have  here  a  print  made  on  Tuesday,  March 
31st,  from  a  sheet  which  bears  date  Febru- 
ary 18th,  and  was  therefore  six  weeks  old. 
It  works  as  well  as  if  only  a  week  old,  and 


shows  as  yet  no  sign  of  discoloring.  This 
was  so  satisfactory  that  I  have  for  some 
time  practiced  this  addition,  using  common 
heavy  printing  paper  for  the  soda. 

Although  I  cannot  of  course  say  that 
there  is  no  other  successful  method  of  keep- 
ing paper,  yet  I  think  a  careful  considera- 
tion of  the  manipulation  employed  will 
show  good  chemical  reasons  for  the  success 
of  this  process.  When  a  sheet  of  salted 
paper  is  floated  on  a  solution  of  nitrate  of 
silver,  it  is  well  known  that  the  character 
of  the  chloride  of  silver  formed  differs 
greatly  according  as  the  solution  is  alka- 
line or  acid,  and  considered  independently 
from  the  condition  of  the  soluble  silver  re- 
maining upon  the  paper.  This  is  also  seen 
in  the  collodion  process,  for  if  a  plate  be  ex- 
cited in  an  alkaline  bath,  which  is  after- 
wards washed  away,  and  the  plate  de- 
veloped in  the  usual  manner,  it  will  show 
the  effect  of  the  alkaline  bath  by  fogging. 
On  the  contrary  a  plate  may  be  excited  in 
an  acid  solution,  covered  with  an  alkaline 
preservative,  and  afterwards  developed 
with  perfect  clearness. 

We  all  remember  the  change  in  the  char- 
acter of  our  albumen  prints  upon  the  intro- 
duction of  the  alkaline  silver  solution  and 
ammonia  fuming,  the  strength  of  silver  and 
time  of  floating  being  greatly  reduced. 
Paper  floated  upon  an  alkaline  solution 
furnishes  the  chloride  of  silver  in  the  best 
condition  for  printing,  both  as  regards  sen- 
sitiveness and  vigor,  but  also,  and  by  virtue 
of  these  qualities,  it  discolors  and  spoils 
sooner.  If  the  free  nitrate  of  silver  be  en- 
tirely washed  away  from  such  a  paper,  it 
will  keep  some  time,  but  at  the  expense  of 
both  sensibility  and  vigor.  I  therefore 
come  to  the  conclusion  that  in  the  method 
which  I  propose  the  chloride  of  silver  re- 
tains the  peculiar  properties  conferred  by 
an  alkaline  formation,  while  the  acid  of  the 
second  solution  prevents  the  free  nitrate 
from  acting  on  the  sizing  of  the  paper  to  its 
discoloration,  and  also  forms  a  small  quan- 
tity of  citrate  of  silver,  which  still  further 
helps  in  the  production  of  a  vigorous  print. 
The  only  purpose  of  the  nitrate  of  silver  in 
the  second  bath  is  to  retain  a  sufficient 
amount  upon  the  paper  to  produce  a  vigor- 
ous impression. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER 


135 


Although  I  cannot  claim  to  have  com- 
pletely exhausted  the  subject,  the  above 
theory  is  sustained  by  the  fact  that  I  have 
so  far  been  unable,  although  I  have  made 
many  trials  to  that  end,  to  combine  the  in- 
gredients of  these  two  solutions,  or  the  solu- 
tions themselves,  in  one  bath  that  would 
produee  the  same  results.  I  hope  this  pro- 
cess may  receive  a  fair  trial  at  your  hands, 
as  I  am  confident  that  you  may  by  its  use 
secure  all  the  advantages  of  a  practically 
permanent  sensitized  paper,  without  the 
sacrifice  of  any  quality  of  good  printing. 


TALK  AND  TATTLE. 

At  no  period  of  our  existence  has  there 
been  such  a  revival  in  the  cause  of  science 
as  there  is  at  present.  Old  men  are  dying 
and  leaving  their  millions  for  the  establish- 
ment of  Institutes  for  technical  instruction, 
and  lecturers  are  spreading  such  knowledge 
among  the  people  in  all  directions.  How 
good  this  is,  and  may  photography  share  in 
it,  for  if  there  ever  was  a  set  of  men  who 
needed  technical  instruction  in  matters  per- 
taining to  their  daily  avocation,  photogra- 
phers certainly  do  now.  How  many  are 
there  of  them  who  know  why  they  are  able 
to  produce  the  results  they  do  ?  And  how 
many  of  them  would  know  exactly  what  to 
do  should  any  important  obstruction  occur 
in  their  manipulations  ?  Photography  is 
an  infant  yet,  and  we  have  not  begun  to  see 
what  there  is  in  it,  and  we  never  will  until 
some  means  are  promulgated  for  the  techni- 
cal education  of  its  votaries. 

A  correspondent  writes  viz. :  "  I  am  much 
opposed  to  your  photographic  school.  We 
have  too  many  artists  now ;  too  much 
competition,  and  consequent  low  prices ; 
and  when  our  college  opens  up  the  same 
facilities  for  education  as  law,  medicine, 
and  dentistry  do,  your  cheap  fry  will  indeed 
be  cut  off,  but  sons  of  wealth  will  come  in, 
and  in  great  numbers,  and  their  competition 
will  ruin  the  business.  Think  over  it.  Pause. 
We  should  rather  go  slow,  cautiously  close 
the  doors  and  let  no  one  come  in  until  he 
has  served  his  two  or  three  years'  appren- 
ticeship." 

And  this  from  a  man  who   a  few  years 


ago  was  anxious  to  embark  as  a  photogra- 
pher, and  whom,  although  we  have  never 
seen  hirn,  we  literally  taught  photography 
by  letter,  until  now  he  is  one  of  the  best 
workers  in  his  State.  For  shame.  Shall 
we  apply  to  him  the  suggestion  of  Mr.  Josh. 
Billings  that  "  some  people  forget  when 
they  were  tadpoles?" 

It  is  not  to  multiply  photographers  that 
we  ask  for  a  school  for  technical  instruction 
in  photography  ;  but  it  is  for  the  purpose  of 
putting  more  science  into  those  who  are,  or 
may  come,  into  our  profession. 

A  few  weeks  ago,  at  the  anniversary  of 
the  Franklin  Institute  in  this  city  Prof. 
Morton,  in  commenting  upon  the  immense 
advantages  of  aggressive  science,  said : 

"  Example  is  better  than  precept,  as  the 
judicious  copy  book  used  to  say  to  us  at 
school,  and  I  will  therefore  take  a  case  and 
give  you  two  views,  the  external  or  artistic, 
and  the  interior  or  scientific,  of  the  same 
scene. 

"  We  are  in  a  valley  among  snow-capped 
mountains,  and  before  us  a  lake  spreads  its 
mirror  to  the  sky. 

"  No  breath  of  air  ripples  its  surface ;  no 
wavelet  breaks  upon  its  beach ;  nothing  is 
there  but  absolute  repose. 

"So  says  the  artist;  and,  painting  such  a 
scene,  he  calls  his  picture  '  Silence,'  '  Re- 
pose,' '  The  Lake  of  Dreams,'  or  some  such 
appropriate  title. 

"Now,  however,  let  us  look  at  that  same 
scene  with  eyes  touched  by  the  wand  of  sci- 
ence and  opened  to  see  beneath  the  surface 
of  things. 

"  What  do  we  then  behold?  Is  there  any 
longer  an  impression  of  repose,  of  rest,  of 
sleep  ? 

"  Look  at  that  mass  of  water,  with  its 
mirror-like  surface. 

"  We  see  there  a  perfect  Sebastopol  of  fly- 
ing missiles.  Water-atoms  hurled  in  clouds 
from  the  surface  into  the  air,  water-atoms 
hurled  back  from  the  air  into  the  water 
surface. 

"  It  is  by  such  action  as  this,  science  shows 
us,  that  evaporation  takes  place,  or  the  in- 
visible though  rapid  passage  of  the  liquid 
water  into  the  viewless  air. 

"  The  whole  mass  of  the  water  is  likewise 
thrilling  through  with  those  heat  motions, 


136 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


of  which,  if  deprived  partially,  it  would 
freeze  into  ice,  and,  if  robbed  utterly,  would 
shrink  into  some  formless  horror,  of  which 
even  the  imagination  of  science  can  form 
no  picture." 

How  truly  is  the  photography  of  to-day 
represented  by  the  placid  lake  as  viewed 
through  unscientific  eyes,  and  how  appro- 
priately a  picture  of  its  condition  might  be 
called  "Silence,"  or  "Eepose,"  or  "The 
Lake  of  Dreams."  But  this  need  not  be  so. 
Chemistry  and  physics,  and  all  the  kindred 
sciences  which  call  upon  photography  so 
often  for  help,  stand  ready  to  help  us  in  turn, 
wand  in  hand,  to  see  and  to  understand  all 
that  there  is  "  beneath  the  surface." 

V.  says  :  "  I  have  been  trying  to  get  you 
a  new  subscription  or  two  to  send  with  my 
own,  but  have  so  far  failed.  The  fact  is, 
our  people  are  very  mean  in  some  things. 
The  great  majority  would  sooner  have  a 
dime  novel  than  the  choicest  work  on  art 
or  science,  or  rather  attend  a  negro  min- 
strel or  Black  Crook  performance  than  a 
scientific  lecture."  Alas  !  the  city  in  which 
V.  lives  is  not  singular  in  the  propensities 
which  he  describes.  It  is  hard  to  under- 
stand why  it  is  that  men  who  want  to  make 
a  living  and  more,  by  their  daily  work,  are 
so  slow  to  employ  all  the  means  within  their 
power  to  secure  the  desired  end.  But  it  has 
always  been  so,  for  ages  at  least.  "  Palissy, 
the  Potter,"  spent  years  of  diligent  experi- 
ment in  trying  to  discover  the  secret  of 
glazing  and  enamelling  chinaware,  thus 
wasting  the  labor  of  a  lifetime  "in  learn- 
ing what  the  poorest  Italian  potter  could 
have  told  him  in  five  minutes."  But  in- 
stead of  seeking  for  information  at  proper 
sources,  first  he  plodded  along  his  own  way. 
How  many  photographers  there  are  like 
him  who  might  be  doing  much  better  if  they 
would  but  read.  In  commenting  upon  the 
"modern  advantages"  which  the  artisans 
of  the  present  day  have,  especially  in  the 
way  of  literature,  the  Public  Ledger  says : 
"The  point  to  be  made  in  considering  the 
subject  is  this:  That  every  man,  in  what- 
ever calling',  in  these  days  of  scientific  in- 
vestigation and  the  printing  press,  should 
diligently  read  whatever  pertains  to  his  art, 
profession,  handicraft,  or   pursuit.     There 


are  not  a  few  who  grope  in  the  dark,  like  Pa- 
lissy, the  Potter.  He  could  not  help  it,  but 
the  modern  artisan  has  no  excuse. 

*         ****** 

"The  ready  writers  who  keep  the  printing 
press  in  motion  are  ever  on  the  alert  for 
subjects  for  their  pens,  and  the  man  who 
reads  and  keeps  himself  up  to  the  current  of 
events  and  developments  in  any  branch  of 
human  knowledge  may  find  a  short  cut  to 
the  end  which  Palissy  achieved  in  the  jour- 
ney of  a  life.  He  may  even  learn  in  '  five 
minutes'  what  it  has  required  centuries  to 
reveal.  The  man  who  does  not  read  is  far 
from  appreciating  the  force  of  the  question 
once  asked  by  a 'self-made  man:'  'Does 
one  need  to  know  anything  more  than  the 
twenty-four  letters  in  order  to  learn  every- 
thing else  that  one  wishes?'  " 

In  a  profession  like  ours,  growing  as  it 
does  far  faster  than  its  years  would  seem  to 
allow,  the  followers  of  it  should  read  every- 
thing published  pertaining  to  it. 

That  puts  us  in  mind  of  "a  peace  of 
poitrey  "  recently  sent  us.  We  have  not 
space  for  it  all,  even  did  the  "  peace  "  itself 
convince  us  that  the  author  is  well  ac- 
quainted with  the  rules  of  versification,  but 
we  must  give  a  verse  or  two,  because  of  the 
wise  admonitions  which  they  contain,  no 
doubt  from  a  sincere  and  honest  heart.  He 
is  writing  about  the  value  of  photographic 
journals,  and  says :  Had  it  not  been  for  our 
journals, 

"  Where  would  our  art  of  have  been  to-day, 
(I  think  that  you  will  have  to  say), 
Drudgeing  along  at  a  feareful  rate, 
In  a  dilapedating  state. 

' '  Let  us  open  our  pocket  books, 
In  the  editor's  eyes  and  look. 
We  never  can  lose  such  a  chance, 
Here  is  the  money  hi  advance." 

The  last  sentiment  we  like  very  much. 

T.  and  H.  say  :  "  We  are  not  members  of 
the  National  Photographic  Association,  but 
hope  to  attend  the  Chicago  exhibition.  We 
perhaps  are  wrong  in  judging  of  the  Society 
by  some  of  the  members  in  our  State,  but 
their  '  advancement  of  the  art '  has  so  dis- 
gusted us  that  we  have  not  taken  the  in- 
terest we  undoubtedly  should  in  it."     An- 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


137 


other  says  :  "  There  are  somethings  about 
the  Assoeiation  we  do  not  like."  Now,  let 
us  ask  these  good  people  if  there  is  anything 
in  the  world  that  is  human,  that  they  find 
to  he  just  as  they  want  it?  We  should  look 
at  the  good  the  Association  does,  and  not  at 
the  evil  transactions  of  a  few  of  its  members. 
Make  the  highest  progress  our  standard,  our 
objective  point,  and  not  fault-finding  with 
our  neighbors.  In  addressing  the  Franklin 
Institute  a  few  weeks  ago,  our  old  instructor 
and  contributor,  Mr.  Coleman  Sellers,  said  : 
"  Trust  me,  the  teaching  of  man  by  man  in 
frequent  intercourse  is  the  most  potent  means 
of  acquiring  knowledge,  and  knowledge  well 
applied  is  indeed  a  power.  Say  not  to  me 
that  learning  unfits  our  men  for  work.  I  tell 
you  proper  instruction  is  what  our  working 
people  most  need — what  the  Franklin  Insti- 
tute has  ever  tried  to  give  them.  There  is 
in  the  world  drudgery  to  be  done,  drudgery 
that  needs  no  brain-work,  but  there  will  be 
through  all  times  enough  stupidity  to  satisfy 
all  the  wants  in  this  direction,  and  intelli- 
gent laborers  will  make  their  heads  save 
their  hands  to  their  own  profit,  and  the 
benefit  of  the  whole  human  family." 

Let'  us  then  support  our  Association,  if 
only  to  give  a  thousand  of  us  each  once 
a  year  the  opportunity  of  rubbing  against 
each  other,  and  of  comparing  our  work. 
The  good  thus  accomplished  will  be  sure  to 
diffuse  itself  and  benefit  us  all,  whether  we 
are  able  to  be  there  or  not.  Don't  let  a 
break  occur  now. 


TO  MOUNT  WASHINGTON  AND 
RETURN. 

We  have  been  perpetrating  another  one 
of  those  absences  from  business  which  all  who 
wish  to  preserve  their  health  and  strength 
should  yield  to  systematically,  and  a  few 
notes  of  what  we  saw  may  not  be  without 
interest  to  our  readers. 

We  halted  in  New  York  to  see  the  new 
store  of  Scovill  Manufacturing  Company, 
at  Nos.  419  and  421  Broome  Street.  In- 
stead of  entering  a  dingy  old  dungeon,  as 
was  our  wont  at  "old  No.  4,"  after  inspect- 
ing the  massive  double  front  of  iron,  we 
entered  the  new  store.     Upon  the  first  floor 


are  the  offices  devoted  to  the  several  depart- 
ments of  the  business,  and  the  stock  of  some 
of  the  special  manufacturers  of  the  com- 
pany ;  on  the  west  side,  occupying  all  of  the 
space  except  the  room  needed  for  the  eleva- 
tor and  stairways,  is  an  immense  vertical 
glass  show-case,  devoted  to  the  display  of 
the  American  Optical  Company's  apparatus. 
It  was  worth  moving,  for  the  space  to  make 
such  a  show  of  these  unrivalled  goods;  and 
now  they  stand  there  before  the  photogra- 
pher as  he  enters,  not  only  tempting  him, 
but  compelling  him  to  purchase.  If  pho- 
tographers have  any  weakness  at  all,  it  is 
for  new  and  good  apparatus,  and  here  is  the 
finest  chance  on  earth  to  indulge  that  weak- 
ness. Above  this  floor  are  four  other  stories, 
equally  well-lighted  and  convenient,  where 
goods  are  stored,  and  preparations  and 
chemicals  and  other  goods  are  made  ready 
for  market.  The  top  floor  we  hope  is  to  be 
devoted  to, — well,  we  may  be  telling  secrets, 
and  we  ask  you  to  watch  the  Times,  and  you 
will  presently  see  all  about  it.  The  base- 
ment and  sub-basement  are  devoted  exclu- 
sively to  photography,  where  the  stock  of 
photographic  goods  there  displayed  has  no 
equal,  either  in  size  or  quality.  You  can 
get  everything  there  used  in  our  art.  A 
stone  vault  for  the  storage  of  collodions, 
cottons,  &c,  is  under  the  pavement,  and  is 
one  of  the  curiosities  of  the  place.  Then 
there  are  fire-proofs  for  lenses  ;  a  well-lighted 
corner  for  Benerman  &  Wilson's  publica- 
tions, and  all  the  conveniences  for  the  busi- 
ness that  experience  could  suggest.  It  is 
altogether  an  establishment  which  photog- 
raphy may  be  proud  of.  We  could  say 
much  more  about  it,  but  do  not  want  to 
deprive  our  companion  the  Times  of  the 
privilege  which  it  will  soon  avail  itself  of, 
of  giving  an  illustrated  description  of  the 
whole  establishment. 

From  New  York  to  New  Haven,  where 
we  spent  a  pleasant  hour  with  our  well- 
known  contributor,  Mr.  John  M.  Blake. 
We  found  him  to  be  one  of  those  patient 
experimentalists  to  whom  all  the  sciences, 
and  none  more  than  photography,  are  so 
much  indebted  for  the  discoveries  which 
they  have  made  and  given  so  freely  to  the 
world.     Would  that  we  had  more  of  them. 

Connecticut   and    its    neighborhood   are 


138 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


much  disturbed  by  Mr.  Shaw  at  present, 
and  an  indignation  meeting  was  recently 
held  by  the  photographers  there,  at  the 
studio  of  Mr.  J.  K.  Bandy.  We  had  hoped 
to  gather  the  particulars  from  Mr.  Bundy, 
but  he  was  engaged  in  a  procession  of  Odd- 
Fellows,  and  we  could  not  see  him.  We 
hope  to  get  them  and  give  them  else- 
where. 

The  next  visit  was  made  at  the  factory  of 
the  Samuel  Peck  Manufacturing  Company, 
where  are  made  a  great  many  photographic 
goods.  The  well-known  "Union"  goods, 
cases,  lockets,  frames,  &c,  are  made  here. 
The  material  of  which  they  are  made  is 
mixed  by  a  patented  process,  and  divided 
into  tablets  of  proper  size,  which  harden 
when  exposed  to  air.  When  the  workman 
is  about  to  use  them,  he  heats  them  in  an 
oven  until  they  become  soft;  they  are  then 
laid  upon  the  face  of  a  die,  pressure  applied, 
and  lo !  as  if  by  magic,  we  are  presented 
with  a  beautiful  work  of  art  in  the  shape  of 
a  case  or  frame.  Apparatus  of  a  cheaper 
grade  is  also  largely  made  here,  and  the 
best  of  printing-frames,  negative  boxes,  pa- 
per boxes,  &c.  One  of  the  largest  clock 
factories  is  also  connected,  and  the  whole 
establishment  presents  a  most  busy  and 
prosperous  scene.  It  is  under  the  manage- 
ment of  Mr.  Carlos  Smith,  who  is  the  Sec- 
retary and  Treasurer,  and  Mr.  W.  Irving 
Adams  (of  Scovill  Manufacturing  Com- 
pany), President,  who  were  present,  and 
showed  us  the  kindest  attention. 

The  evening  we  passed  at  Springfield, 
Mass.,  calling  as  usual  upon  Messrs.  Moore 
Brothers,  at  whose  studio  all  photographers 
are  always  welcome.  This  city  always 
looked  like  a  good  place  to  hold  the  N.  P.  A. 
Convention. 

The  next  day  we  passed  on  to  Littleton, 
N.  H.,  where,  joining  our  good  friend,  Mr. 
B.  W.  Kilburn,  we  journeyed  to  the  summit 
of  Mount  Washington,  walking  up  from  the 
base,  with  the  railway  as  our  guide.  We 
were  four  nights  upon  the  summit  and  parts 
of  five  days,  as  guests  of  Sergeants  Thornett 
and  Line,  and  Corporal  De  Bosher,  who 
comprise  the  detachment  of  the  United 
States  Signal  Corps,  or  "  Old  Probability's 
Brigade."  The  thermometer  was  18°  be- 
low zero,  and  the  wind   blowing  seventy 


miles  an  hour  sometimes  ;  but  a  gayer,  jol- 
lier time  one  could  hardly  have.  Our  friends 
there  gave  us  as  warm  a  reception  as  the 
mercury  would  allow ;  and  what  with  eat- 
ing and  sleeping  and  joking  and  laughing, 
and  a  tri-daily  tramp  and  battle  with  the 
elements,  we  descended  the  mountain  on  the 
fifth  day,  with  increased  weight  and  better 
health.  Such  a  journey  we  have  before  de- 
scribed, and  want  of  space  forbids  us  to 
repeat.  The  sights  to  be  seen  there  are 
glorious,  and  the  freedom  from  the  cares 
and  worries  of  business  one  feels  there  is 
also  glorious.  Mountain  climbing  has  no 
rival  as  a  preserver  of  health. 

Beturned  to  Littleton,  we  made  an  in- 
spection of  the  new  buildings  of  Messrs.  Kil- 
burn  Brothers.  Here  we  have  an  establish- 
ment three  stories  and 
a  loft  high,  60  feet 
long  and  36  feet  wide, 
with  a  back  building 
25  x  36  feet,  two  stories 
high,  wholly  devoted 
to  the  manufacture 
of  stereoscopic  slides. 
We  do  not  think  it 
can  be  equalled  any- 
where for  size ;  and, 
as  to  the  quality  of 
work  made  by  the 
Kilburn  Brothers,  it 
is  the  best.  Good 
work,  and  enterprise 
and  promptness,  have 
built  them  this  huge  establishment,  and  they 
deserve  all  the  success  they  have  had  or 
expect  to  get.  The  little  drawings  annexed 
will  give  a  feeble  idea  of  the  convenient 
arrangement  of  the  interior.  It  is  all  well 
lighted,  there  being  twenty-seven  windows 
on  each  side,  and  an  equal  proportion  in  the 
ends.  The  front  room  on  the  left  of  the 
first  floor  is  devoted  to  the  washing  of  prints. 
The  water  is  brought  from  a  spring  at  some 
300  feet  elevation  into  the  tank  W,  and  runs 
from  it  into  the  washing-troughs.  At  B  is 
the  steam-boiler,  which  supplies  the  engine 
E,  and  heats  the  building  with  steam.  S  is 
the  room  in  which  the  paper  is  silvered,  20 
feet  square  ;  F  the  fuming-room,  and  where 
the  paper  is  cut  as  wanted;  and  T  is  the 
tonincr-room,  20x24  feet. 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


139 


] 

R       [ 

1 

] 

[ 

]  p 

[ 

] 

3 
] 

s     [ 

[ 

] 

[ 

- 

c 

]  k  = 

0    [ 

-  - 

rn    r,C 

Figure  2  is  a  plan  of  the  floor  above. 
The  entrance  from  tho  street  is  at  E.  The 
business  office  is  at  0, 
and  the  finished  stock 
and  salesroom  is  at  S. 
The  room  R  is  devoted 
to  printing  the  titles 
on  the  mounts,  and  to 
rolling  the  pictures. 
The  press  used  is 
a  double  roller,  the 
lower  roll  of  which  is 
hollow,  and  heated  by 
steam  passing  through 
it  constantly.  It  is 
such  a  novelty  that 
we  propose  presently 
to  devote  a  separate 
article  to  describing 
it.  P  is  a  grand  printing-room,  50  feet 
long  and  15  feet  wide,  facing  the  south. 
Here  is  the  liveliest  room  in  the  whole  place, 
and  a  busy  one. 

Figure  3  represents  the  next  floor  above. 
M  and  D  is  the  mounting  and  drying  room. 
_____-__^__      S   is   devoted    to   the 
|"      storage  of  card  stock, 
paper,  and  materials; 
P  L      and   P  P   is   another 

grand  printing-room, 
60  feet  long  by  15  feet 
wide.  It  is  a  credit 
to  American  photog- 
raphy, and  the  Amer- 
ican love  for  the  ste- 
reoscope, that  such  an 
establishment  as  this 
is  called  for. 

Littleton  also  has 
another  new  establish- 
ment also  devoted  to 
the  stereoscope,  Mr. 
F.  G.  Weller  being  the  proprietor.  His 
rooms  are  very  convenient  and  handsome. 
"While  he  also  publishes  landscape  views, 
his  great  specialty  is  his  "Stereoscopic 
Treasures"  or  groups.  In  this  he  undoubt- 
edly excels,  and  he  is  continually  adding 
new  subjects,  and  doing  a  most  prosperous 
growing  business. 

We  spent  a  day  in  Boston,  also,  calling 
upon  good  old  friends  there.  The  newest 
photographic  sensation  there  is  the  splendid 


establishment  of  Messrs.  Allen  &  Rowell. 
It  is  reached  by  a  steam  elevator,  and  con- 
sists of  two  large  skylights  ;  one  of  them,  a 
double  one  ;  the  finest  dark-room  we  ever 
saw;  a  splendid  reception  and  art  room, 
together  with  several  tasty  little  dressing- 
rooms,  where  parties  may  be  alone;  a  much 
better  plan  than  having  a  single  large  room 
for  the  purpose.  Then  there  are  printing 
and  finishing  and  artists'  rooms,  with  every 
convenience,  and  a  room  devoted  to  carbon 
enlargements.  We  are  promised  a  picture 
for  our  magazine  from  these  gentlemen 
"  soon,"  when  we  shall  describe  their  splen- 
did establishment  more  in  detail. 

In  the  evening  we  attended  a  meeting  of 
the  New  England  Photographic  Associa- 
tion, at  the  studio  of  Mr.  J.  W.  Black,  and 
it  was  a  real  privilege  to  be  there.  About 
sixty  members  were  present,  and  a  report 
of  the  meeting  will  be  found  elsewhere. 
New  England  is  full  o£  good  photographers, 
and  the  majority  of  them  subscribe  for  the 
Philadelphia  Photographer.  Their  Associ- 
ation is  a  credit  to  them,  and  we  told  them 
so.  The  best  of  feeling  seems  to  prevail 
among  them,  and  they  work  together  for 
their  mutual  advancement,  and  thus  set  a 
good  example  to  the  trade  in  general. 


PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  FRANCE. 

It  appears  that  the  epidemic  that  attacks 
positive  prints  on  paper,  and  which  mani- 
fests itself  by  yellow  spots,  is  now  raging 
everywhere.  Complaints  are  heard  from 
all  quarters,  and  in  all  countries  the  cause 
and  the  remedy  are  sought  for.  The  ques- 
tion was  discussed  at  the  last  meeting  of  the 
Photographic  Society,  and  the  information 
which  was  given  there  and  then,  seems  to 
me  worthy  of  very  serious  consideration. 

Like  many  others,  a  provincial  photog- 
rapher attributed  this  accident  to  the  Bris- 
tol board  upon  which  he  mounted  his  prints; 
he  therefore  returned,  with  many  com- 
plaints, to  Messrs.  Rohaut  &  Hutinet,  a 
sheet  of  the  board  furnished  by  them. 
These  intelligent  manufacturers  took  this 
sheet  and  pasted  a  print  upon  it ;  then  after 
having  cut  it  in  two,  they  sent  back  one 
portion  to  their  customer  and  kept  the 
other.  Two  weeks  afterwards  the  photog- 
rapher returned  the  print  full  of  spots  ;  the 


140 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGE  APHEE. 


one  they  had  kept  had  remained  perfectly 
free  from  them,  and  is  still  so,  as  we  have 
been  enabled  to  judge  with  our  own  eyes. 

Mr.  Franek  de  Villecholle  has  stated  a 
similar  fact.  Prints  that  underwent  no 
change  in  his  atelier,  when  transferred  to 
the  establishment  of  one  of  his  co-workers, 
became  covered  with  spots.  After  a  careful 
investigation  he  learned  that  the  latter  had 
the  tile  floor  of  his  laboratory  washed  every 
day.  Mr.  Franek  had  already  remarked,  that 
prints  piled  one  on  top  of  the  other,  before 
they  were  perfectly  dry,  soon  began  to  spot. 

It  results  from  these  divers  observations, 
that  the  spots  so  much  complained  of  every- 
where, should  be  attributed  to  mould,  pro- 
duced by  the  fermentation  of  the  paste  under 
the  influence  of  dampness. 

The  preventive  remedy  is  easily  found;  it 
suffices  to  keep  away  from  the  atelier  every- 
thing that  produces  or  maintains  dampness. 

At  the  last  meeting  of  the  Syndical  Cham- 
ber of  Photography,  Mr.  Franek  showed 
two  paper  positives  printed  from  the  same 
negative,  but  which  greatly  differed  one 
from  the  other.  The  first  was  hard,  with 
no  half  tints.  The  second  was  well  modelled, 
soft  and  harmonious.  The  secret  of  this 
difference  is  in  a  very  simple  device.  The 
skilful  artist,  who  has  adopted  with  advan- 
tage the  system  justproposedby  Mr.  Melch- 
ior  to  shorten  the  pose,  and  which  consists 
in  allowing  the  diffused  light  to  penetrate 
into  the  camera  before  the  exposure,  con- 
ceived the  idea  of  apptying  this  process  to 
printing  positives. 

Before  placing  the  sheet  of  albumenized 
sensitized  paper  in  the  frame  he  exposes  it 
for  a  few  seconds  to  the  light,  just  long 
enough  for  it  to  acquire  a  hardly  visible  tint; 
he  then  proceeds  immediately  to  printing. 

By  this  means  he  not  only  materially 
shortens  the  time  of  posing,  but  he  obtains 
besides  from  hard  negatives,  which  had 
always  given  very  imperfect  prints,  excel- 
lent pictures,  whose  modelling  leaves  noth- 
ing to  be  desired. 

Mr.  Franek  declares  that  this  system 
gives  him  daily  excellent  results,  in  the 
event  of  his  wishing  to  print  more  rapidly, 
or  if  he  has  to  use  negatives  that  are  too  hard. 

One  of  the  great  objections  to  carbon  pho- 
tography,  is   the   necessity  of   having   re- 


course to  some  means  to  turn  the  image, 
which  is  reversed  from  its  natural  position. 
A  provincial  photographer,  who  makes  a 
specialty  of  this  process,  makes  known  to 
me  the  very  simple  method  he  uses  to  ob- 
tain negatives  which  give  at  once  the 
images  in  their  natural  position. 

He  takes  one  of  his  dry  plate-holders  and 
removes  the  spring  which  holds  the  glass  ; 
he  then  fastens  a  small  spiral  spring  at  each 
angle  of  the  closing  shutter.  He  then  pre- 
pares a  plate,  places  it  in  the  holder,  the  film 
side  uppermost,  and  covers  it  with  the  shut- 
ter transformed  as  above ;  then  he  makes 
the  pose.  The  light  acts  therefore  through 
the  glass  upon  the  surface  of  the  coating 
which  is  in  contact  with  it.  Thus  is  ob- 
tained a  corrected  negative.  After  a  few 
experiments  it  is  easy  to  determine  the  rela- 
tion to  establish  between  the  ground  glass 
plate  destined  to  be  focussed  and  the  collo- 
dionized  coating,  and  to  focus  exactly.  The 
sharpness  of  the  picture  is  equal  to  that  of 
negatives  obtained  in  the  ordinary  manner. 

The  author  of  this  communication  re- 
marks, that  in  following  the  directions 
given  by  him,  any  one  can  alter  a  plate- 
holder  and  adapt  it  to  this  new  use. 

It  is  understood  that  before  putting  the 
sensitized  plate  in  the  frame,  it  is  indispens- 
able to  wipe  carefully  the  reverse  side,  or 
what  is  better,  to  coat  it  with  normal  col- 
lodion before  sensitizing.  By  this  means 
will  be  avoided  the  presence  of  small  drops 
from  the  sensitizing  bath,  which  would  pro- 
duce upon  the  back  of  the  plate,  a  refraction 
of  the  luminous  rays  and  prevent  the  uni- 
formity of  the  impression. 

Mr.  Thomas  Sutton  has  recently  made 
known  a  process  which  is  now  used  by 
several  carbon  photographers,  and  by  means 
of  which,  a  negative  may  be  obtained  from 
another  negative;  consequently,  a  corrected 
negative.  Here  is  substantially  the  mode 
of  operating.  Place  under  the  negative  to 
be  reproduced  a  plate  prepared  with  the 
bromized  collodion  for  the  dry  process. 
The  two  plates  are  placed  in  the  pressure- 
frame,  which  is  exposed  for  a  few  seconds 
to  the  light ;  then  the  development  is  made 
by  the  alkaline  process  until  a  satisfactory 
negative  by  transparency  is  obtained ;  the 
plate  is  then  plunged  into  a  bath  of  nitric 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


141 


acid,  dilated  with  an  equal  volume  of  water. 
This  solution  dissolves  all  the  reduced  silver, 
and  nothing  remains  in  the  plate  but  the 
non-reduced  bromide  of  silver,  which  forms 
a  negative  image,  very  transparent,  but 
very  weak.  To  bring  it  to  the  desired  tone, 
it  is  necessary  to  expose  it  again  to  the  ac- 
tion of  the  light.  "When  it  has  become  suf- 
ficiently strong  it  is  fixed  by  means  of  the 
hyposulphite. 

It  is  easy  to  understand  that  by  this 
method  excellent  reproductions  may  be  ob- 
tained, not  only  in  carbon  photography,  but 
for  all  purposes  where  a  reversed  negative 
may  be  necessary. 

In  my  last  letter  I  spoke  of  the  litho- 
graphic process  of  Messrs.  Hermagis  & 
Geyniet,  and  of  the  remarkable  results  ob- 
tained by  them.  Both  of  these  gentlemen 
submitted  to  the  Society  of  Photography,  at 
the  meeting  of  the  6th  of  March,  new 
specimens,  which  show  still  further  progress. 
Mr.  Geymet  brought  the  fac-simile  of  a 
manuscript  embellished  with  numerous  pen 
drawings,  and  containing  more  than  100 
sheets  in  8°,  made  entirely  by  his  process, 
and  he  announced  that  commercially  this 
work  could  be  sold  at  fifty  centimes  (ten 
cents).  He  showed  besides,  a  large  number 
of  photo-lithographic  prints  (views  and  por- 
traits after  nature),  of  the  albumen  card 
size.  I  send  you  inclosed  one  of  these 
prints,  and  you  can  judge  if  I  exaggerate 
when  I  say  that  these  plates,  printed  by 
means  of  fatty  ink,  have  all  the  qualities  of 
pictures  printed  with  the  salts  of  silver. 

You  will  agree  with  me  that  reduced  to 
these  dimensions  they  adapt  themselves  in 
the  most  complete  manner  to  the  illustrating 
of  books  by  publishers. 

The  skilful  chemist,  Mr.  Stebbing, 
makes  known  to  me  a  very  simple  and 
effectual  method  of  removing  the  spots 
which  sometimes  form  on  the  negative  after 
printing  with  the  salts  of  silver.  It  sufiices 
to  plunge  the  negative  into  a  dish  contain- 
ing a  solution  of  ammonia  at  fifty  per  cent, 
and  to  lightly  rub  with  a  tuft  of  cotton  the 
places  which  have  been  attacked,  until  the 
yellow  spots  disappear  completely. 

The  annual  publication  for  1874  of  the 
"  Bureau  des  Longitudes,"  one  of  our  most 
important  bodies  of  scientists,  has  just  come 


out,  and  I  find  there  a  legitimate  homage 
rendered  to  the  work  of  your  fellow-coun- 
tryman, Mr.  L.  M.  Kutherfurd.  In  a  scien- 
tific notice  upon  the  physical  composition  of 
the  sun,  which  appears  in  this  volume, 
Mr.  Faye,  our  eminent  astronomer,  thus 
expresses  himself:  "Already,  in  America 
and  in  England,  dealers  supply  numerous 
specimens  of  astronomical  photography.  In 
the  first  rank  we  must  place  the  admirable 
photographs  of  the  moon  that  Mr.  Lewis  M. 
Kutherfurd  has  published,  on  the  scale  of 
fifty-four  centimetres  for  the  diameter  of 
the  orb  ;  those  of  the  disk  of  the  sun,  which 
present  with  the  same  sharpness  as  the  best 
glasses  and  with  an  effect  quite  as  striking, 
the  spots,  the  faculre,  the  brilliant  mottling 
of  the  surface  of  this  orb  ;  and  those  of  the 
solar  spectrum,  whose  lines  have  been  reg- 
istered by  light  itself  with  unswerving 
fidelity.  It  is  high  time  that  these  marvels 
should  be  placed  within  reach  of  the  French 
people."  Ernest  Lacan. 


SMITH'S  COPYING  BOARD. 

I  inclose  a  photograph  of  my  copying 
board.  I  have  used  it  for  the  past  two 
years,  and  in  copying  find  it  all  that  can  be 
desired.  To  the  frame,  or  head-piece,  is 
attached  a  cord,  which  runs  in  a  groove  un- 
derneath the  bed, 
and  works  with  a 
thumb-screw  at  the 
end.  You  will  see 
from  the  photo- 
graph the  conveni- 
ence of  the  head- 
piece ;  also,  that  it 
enables  you  to  get 
the  picture  in  posi- 
tion on  the  ground- 
glass  without  re- 
moving your  head 
from     under      the 

dark-cloth.  The  copying  board  will  be  ap- 
preciated by  all  photographers  who  have 
much  copying  to  do,  and  will  find  it  much 
more  convenient  than  running  about  the 
room  with  hammer  in  hand  and  mouth  full 
of  tacks.  Should  you  think  it  worth  a  place 
in  your  journal,  you  are  welcome  to  it.  It 
is  not  patented.  W.  G.  Smith. 


142 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


OUR  PICTURE. 

It  is  seldom  we  have  an  opportunity  of 
illustrating  the  cosmopolitan  character  of 
our  journal,  and  showing  how  far-reach- 
ing phbtography  is,  such  as  we  have  this 
month.  We  are  happy  in  presenting  a 
specimen  of  photography  from  Holland,  as 
well  as  a  representative  of  the  fair  sex  in 
that  far-off  country.  This  picture  brings  to 
mind  the  impressions  of  schoolboy  days  re- 
ceived from  the  text-books  in  use,  where 
scenes  in  Holland  were  represented  with 
ice  and  snow,  the  people  in  odd-looking 
costumes,  and  travelling  on  skates  or  wooden 
shoes.  But  a  picture  like  this  conveys  a 
different  impression.  We  see  that  people 
in  Holland  are  very  much  like  people  every- 
where else  ;  that  we  are  all  of  one  common 
family,  with  similar  interests,  tastes,  and 
feelings.  This  picture,  which  will  compare 
favorably  with  work  from  more  favored 
localities,  is  from  the  studio  of  Mr.  P.  A. 
Mottu,  of  Amsterdam,  who  is  the  leading 
artist  there,  and  is  at  the  head  of  all  pho- 
tographic enterprises  in  that  section.  He  is 
editor  of  the  only  photographic  magazine 
published  in  Holland  ;  also  president  of  the 
Photographic  Society  of  Amsterdam.     He 


12  grammes. 
300 
400 

300  grammes. 


has  recently  erected  a  new  and  elegant 
studio,  of  which  he  sends  us  some  beautiful 
views,  showing  the  interior  construction, 
with  furniture,  accessories,  &c.     There  are 


two  skylights,  and  all  the  facilities  for  an 
extensive  business,  which  we  are  sure  his 
enterprise  must  have  secured  him. 

We  are  indebted  to  the  fair  subject  of  this 
picture  as  well  as  to  Mr.  Mottu,  and  trust 
her  example,  in  the  interests  of  our  art,  may 
induce  others  to  favor  us  in  the  same  way. 

Mr.  Mottu  gives  us  the  sizes  of  his  studios 
as  follows :  The  largest  40  feet  long  by  20 
feet  wide  ;  the  other  48  feet  long  by  15  feet 
wide.  He  says:  "  My  light  is  full  north 
for  the  large  studio,  and  west  for  the  other. 
I  can  in  the  large  one,  at  any  hour  of  the 
day,  work  without  hindrance  from  the  sun, 
on  three  sides,  right,  left,  and  over  the  win- 
dows  

"  My  collodion  is  composed  as  follows  : 
No.  1. 
Cotton,   . 

Absolute  Alcohol,  . 
Ether,     . 

No.  2. 
Absolute  Alcohol,  . 
Iodide  of  Ammonium,  .         8         " 
Iodide  of  Cadmium,       .         8         " 
Bromide  of  Ammonium,       4         " 
A  few  drops  of  distilled  water. 
"  No.  2  is  mixed  with  No.  1,  and  if  the 
pyroxylin  is  of  good  quality 
you  can    employ  the   collo- 
dion the  following  day. 

"  The  sensitizing  bath  is 
the  same  as  every  one  em- 
ploys, 8  to  10  per  cent,  of  sil- 
ver, and  acidified  with  nitric 
acid. 

Developer. 

Sulphate  of  Iron,     .     30  grms. 
Water,     .         .         .1000     " 
Acetic  Acid,     .         .      10     " 
Alcohol  if  wanted." 

The  prints  in  this  issue,  as 
well  as  those  in  the  April 
number,  were  made  by  Mr. 
William  H.  Rhoads  of  this 
city,  on  paper  by  Marion  & 
Co.,  of  London,  whose  spe- 
cialties are  advertised  in  this 
journal.  This  paper  is  much  in  use  in  Lon- 
don we  found,  and  is  "picked,"  so  that  it 
is  guaranteed  no  imperfect  sheets  will  be 
found  in  a  ream. 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


143 


CRYSTAL  SELF-ACTING  TABLE 
FOUNTAIN. 

This  is  not  a  piece  of  photographic  appa- 
ratus, but  as  an  ornament  for  the  waiting- 
room,  or  an  accessory  for  certain  styles  of 
rustic  pictures,  it  is  not  excelled  by  any- 
thing we  have  ever  seen.  "  The  principle 
on  which  it  operates  is  the  simple  law  of 
gravity.  The  inside  of  the  pedestal  forms 
a  round  tube,  four  inches  in  diameter,  ex- 
tending to  the  base.  ...  In  this  a  weight- 
ed valve  moves  up  and  down,  like  that  of 
a  pump.  When  raised  up  and  allowed  to 
descend  by  its  own  weight,  it  forces  up  all 
the  water  in  the  tube  under  it,  through  a 
small  pipe  to  the  jet,  whence  it  falls  again 
into  the  basin  and  keeps  the  water  always 
at  the  same  height." 

In  style  and  finish  it  is  decidedly  orna- 
mental, as  will  be  seen  by  the  engraving. 
It  is  in  reality,  a  foun- 
tain and  aquarium. 
The  glass  basin  holds 
a  gallon  or  more  of 
water,  which  is  kept 
in  constant  circulation 
by  the  action  of  the 
fountain,  and  in  which 
gold-fish  may  be  kept, 
and  add  much  to  the 
beauty  of  the  arrange- 
ment. "With  small 
water-plants  and  vines 
trailing  from  the  sides, 
with  buds  and  blos- 
soms gracefully  ar- 
ranged in  the  cups 
provided  for  them, 
and  kept  watered  by  the  pearly  spray  con- 
tinually falling,  it  becomes  a  refreshing 
and  attractive  feature  for  the  parlor,  the 
drawing-room,  or  the  sick-room  ;  or  even 
amid  the  dry  routine  of  business,  where 
things  poetic  or  sentimental  are  seldom 
considered,  this  might  refresh  many  a 
weary  brain,  and  throw  around  an  influ- 
ence at  once  cheering  and  elevating.  As 
we  write,  amid  the  grime  and  dust,  as  is  gen- 
erally supposed,  of  an  editorial  sanctum,  one 
stands  on  our  desk  beside  us,  throwing  up 
its  little  jet  of  crystal  gems,  and  making  the 
whole  atmosphere  seem  fresh  and  fragrant, 
as  our  imagination  supplies  the  vines  and 


blossoms  that  are  only  wanting  to  complete 
the  picture. 

This  little  candidate  for  public  favor  is 
gotten  up  at  the  works  of  the  American 
Fountain  Co.,  50  Courtland  Street,  N.  Y., 
who  say  that  "  every  method  that  years  of 
experience  could  suggest,  has  been  adopted 
to  make  this  fountain  a  success  in  every 
way  ;"  and  we  think  they  have  succeeded 
admirably.  For  particulars  as  to  price,  &c, 
we  refer  to  our  advertising  pages. 

NOTES  IN  AND  OUT  OF  THE 
STUDIO. 

BY  G.  WHARTON  SIMPSON,   M.A.,  F.S.A. 

Carbon  Printing  by  Continuation.  —  Photo 
Bas-relief. — Permanent  Sensitive  Paper. 
Carbon  Printing  by  Continuation. — I  do 
not  know  to  what  extent  carbon  printing  is 
now  practiced  in  America.  In  this  country, 
whilst  not  widely  spread,  it  is  steadily  and 
extensively  carried  out  in  a  few  important 
establishments.  In  the  government  photo- 
graphic establishments,  for  instance,  it  is 
almost  exclusively  employed.  At  the  Koyal 
Arsenal,  Woolwich,  where  photography  is 
used  largely  in  connection  with  military 
purposes,  it  is  employed,  and  the  system  of 
printing  by  continuation  in  the  dark  is 
found  to  be  very  successful,  and  of  most 
vital  service  in  dull  weather,  the  results  of  a 
short  exposure  and  few  hours'  repose  being, 
as  I  think  I  once  before  mentioned,  in  every 
respect  equal  to  those  fully  printed  out  in 
the  light.  During  the  winter  months  I 
learn  that  it  has  again  been  resorted  to,  the 
production  of  photographs  connected  with 
the  Gold  Coast  Expedition  necessitating 
pushing  forward  of  the  work.  The  tissue 
is  exposed  to  light  under  a  negative  about 
three-fifths  the  time  required  to  give  a  fully 
printed  result,  and  the  incipient  picture  is 
then  put  away  in  a  box  to  be  developed  the 
next  day.  It  was  found  that  in  bad.  wintry 
weather,  such  as  we  have  lately  been  hav- 
ing, only  as  many  as  six  degrees  were  mark- 
ed on  the  actinometer  throughout  the  day 
— that  is  to  say,  the  sensitive  paper  only 
colored  deeply  six  times  from  morning  till 
night — and  this  was,  as  a  rule,  barely  suffi- 
cient to  print  two  pigment  pictures,  the 
average    negative    requiring    about    three 


144 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


tints,  or  rather  more.  Therefore,  by  only 
half-printing,  or  little  more,  the  gain  in 
time  is  very  great,  and  half  the  number 
more  pictures  are  got  off  than  in  the  ordi- 
nary way  of  printing.  This  plan  has  been 
carried  on  at  Woolwich  for  the  past  two 
months,  and  with  great  success.  Some  care 
is,  of  course,  necessary  to  time  exposures 
correctly,  and  not  to  overlook  development 
when  the  proper  period  has  elapsed  ;  but  no 
more  failures  are  obtained  by  this  method 
of  printing  than  in  the  usual  one.  Another 
fact  connected  with  carbon  printing  is 
worthy  of  record.  When  the  Woolwich 
establishment  first  adopted  carbon  printing, 
several  years  ago,  the  usual  run  of  negatives 
were  much  too  dense  for  the  work,  and 
sometimes  as  many  as  twenty,  and  even  five- 
and-twenty,  tints  had  to  be  recorded  on  the 
photometer  before  a  negative  was  sufficient- 
ly printed.  Since  then  it  has  always  been 
an  endeavor  to  get  thin  negatives,  which 
give  more  vigorous  prints  in  carbon  than 
they  do  in  silver,  and  now  cliches  are  seldom 
taken  at  the  establishment  which  require 
more  than  three  or  four  tints,  copies  being 
printed  from  them  in  five  or  ten  minutes. 

Photo  Bas-relief. — I  have  recently  seen  a 
curious  novelty  in  portraiture  which  is  very 
effective.  It  consists  in  a  bas-relief  on  a 
photographic  basis,  or,  perhaps,  to  be  more 
accurate  and  precise,  it  is  a  photograph  on 
a  basis  modelled  in  low  relief.  The  ex- 
amples I  have  seen  are  all  of  cabinet  size, 
and  consist  of  large  bust  portraits,  both  in 
profile,  three-quarter,  and  full  face,  the  first- 
named  being,  I  think,  most  suitable  and 
most  effective.  How  the  bas-relief  is  pro- 
duced, whether  dependent  upon  some  in- 
genious process,  or  upon  the  personal  skill 
of  a  modeller,  I  am  unable  to  state.  All 
that  is  necessary  to  the  result  is,  that  a  plain 
paper  print  shall  be  forwarded  to  the  artist, 
and  this  plain  paper  print  is  modelled  into 
the  due  relief,  the  back  being  filled  up  with 
some  plastic  material.  Some  of  your  read- 
ers may  be  familiar  with  a  similar  kind  of 
portrait  in  relief  modelled  in  wax,  and  tint- 
ed in  the  colors  of  life.  These  photo-bas- 
reliefs  are  similar,  but,  instead  of  being 
colored,  they  are  in  the  simple  black  and 
white  of  the  photograph,  which  is  much 
more  severely  artistic  and  satisfactory  than 


the  tinted  wax.  A  good  photograph,  perfect- 
ly indicating  the  modelling  in  the  original, 
must,  it  is  manifest,  be  a  necessary  aid  in 
the  production  of  these  plastic  portraits. 
In  the  examples  I  have  seen  every  undula- 
tion in  the  contour  of  features,  bosom,  hair, 
and  drapery,  is  admirably  rendered,  and  the 
result  is  singularly  pleasing.  I  hope  shortly 
to  be  able  to  forward  you  an  example  of  this 
novelty,  and  to  give  your  readers  any  ad- 
ditional details  of  the  method  which  I 
may  be  able  to  learn.  If  any  of  them  pos- 
sess a  little  skill  in  the  sculptor's  art,  or  any 
knowledge  of  modelling  plastic  materials, 
these  hints  may  suggest  experiments. 

Permanent  Sensitive  Paper. — The  subject 
of  preparing  sensitive  paper  with  keeping 
qualities  still  receives  attention  in  this 
country,  whilst  the  two  or  three  thoroughly 
successful  methods,  which  are  trade  secrets, 
remain  as  secret  as  ever.  A  paper  recently 
read  by  Mr.  J.  M.  Turnbull  gave  some  in- 
teresting experiences,  and  the  following 
method  is  the  best  the  writer  has  tried  after 
many  experiments.     He  says  : 

"  I  do  not  think  paper  by  this  method 
should  be  prepared  to  keep  more  than  two 
to  three  months.  The  paper  is  first  floated 
on  the  usual  silver  bath  of  from  forty  to 
sixty  grains,  and  hung  up  to  dry  ;  when 
nearly  dry,  but  not  dry  enough  to  curl  up, 
it  is  floated  on  a  bath,  of  citric  acid  five 
grains,  water  one  ounce.  It  must  not  lie 
any  time  on  this  bath — just  so  long,  and  no 
longer,  than  that  the  paper  may  lay  flat, 
when  it  is  again  hung  up  to  dry.  Such 
paper  will  keep  white  for  some  weeks. 
Should  the  paper  be  wanted  to  keep  longer, 
it  may  be  left  longer  on  the  bath,  or  the  citric 
acid  may  be  increased.  Paper  floated  on  the 
5-grain  solution  tones  as  readily  and  gives  as 
good  finished  prints  as  the  ordinary  paper." 

Mosaics  for  1874. — A  week  or  two  ago  I 
received  my  copy  of  Mosaics  for  1874.  It 
is,  if  that  be  possible,  better  than  ever.  It 
is  a  somewhat  supererogatory  work  for  me 
to  offer  any  meed  of  admiration,  as  by  the 
time  these  lines  reach  your  readers,  I  have  no 
doubt  every  one  of  them  has  availed  himself 
of  his  privilege  of  obtaining  a  copy  and  at 
once  devouring  its  contents.  Still  I  may  be 
permitted  to  congratulate  you  and  your  read- 
ers on  the  great  excellence  of  your  annual. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


145 


THE  PRIZE  MEDAL  AWARD. 

The  competition  for  the  gold  medal  which 
we  offered  closed  on  Saturday  the  18th,  and 
the  award  was  made  on  Monday  the  20th 
of  April.  There  were  thirty  competitors 
in  all,  and  the  contest  wa9  sharp,  as  wo 
had  predicted.  It  has  produced  a  higher 
grade  of  work  than  any  similar  competition 
has  ever  done  for  us  before,  and  we  feel 
great  satisfaction  in  promising  our  readers 
a  series  of  pictures  for  illustrating  our  maga- 
zine, for  nearly  a  year  to  come,  that  will 
average  far  above  those  published  in  any 
one  year  before.  "We  have  more  than  re- 
alized our  anticipations  in  offering  the 
medal,  and  have  fully  accomplished  the 
object  we  had  in  view,  viz.,  to  secure  the 
best  work  that  can  be  made  for  our  illustra 
tions.  But  you  all  want  to  know  who 
received  the  medal.  The  committee,  con- 
sisting of  three  eminently  practical  men, 
Messrs.  Wm.  H.  Khoads,  C.  Alfred  Garrett, 
and  R.  J.  Chute,  met  in  our  office  on  Mon- 
day afternoon,  and  after  a  careful  examina- 
tion of  all  the  competing  negatives,  were 
unanimous  in  awarding  the  medal  to  Messrs. 
Bradley  &  Rulofson,  of.  San  Francisco,  and 
we  are  sure  the  judgment  of  all  candid  and 
cultivated  minds  will  justify  the  decision 
they  arrived  at.  There  were  six  negatives 
of  the  same  subject,  from  which  the  com- 
mittee selected  three  for  the  award,  though 
the  relative  quality  of  each  was  equally 
fine.  The  subject  is  a  lady,  with  more  than 
ordinary  grace  and  beauty ;  the  lighting 
and  posing  evince  the  highest  order  of 
artistic  skill,  and,  chemically,  the  negatives 
combine  softness  with  brilliancy,  and  are 
without  spot  or  blemish.  One  conspicuous 
feature  of  them  is  the  very  slight  retouch- 
ing, showing  clearly  the  pristine  excellence 
of  the  work.  We  congratulate  our  friends 
on  the  Pacific  coast  on  their  success,  and 
thank  them  heartily  for  their  efforts  to  send 
us  such  elegant  examples  of  their  skill. 
"While  we  see  some  work  that  is  apparently 
imitative,  and  may  be  classed  as  resembling 
certain  European  styles,  or  certain  work  in 
this  country,  this  seems  to  be  a  style  of  its 
own  ;  purely  American,  we  should  say,  and 
possessing  such  high  artistic  merit  as  to 
recommend  it  as  a  fit  example  for  study 
or  imitation.    Indeed'  the  same  mav  be  said 


of  the  work  of  a  number  of  the  other  com- 
petitors. There  were  several  that  followed 
so  closely  on  the  successful  ones,  that  had 
these  been  absent  the  committee  would  have 
found  it  difficult  to  have  decided.  We 
rejoice  at  this  high  degree  of  excellence,  and 
congratulate  all,  both  those  who  have  so 
contributed  the  excellent  results  of  their 
efforts,  and  those  who  will  be  benefited  by 
studying  their  beautiful  productions. 

We  shall  publish  prints,  tastily  mounted, 
from  all  the  competing  negatives,  in  order 
that  our  readers  may  have  the  opportunity 
to  study  them,  and  we  commend  them  to 
all  who  wish  to  improve,  and  desire  to  have 
a  high  standard  of  excellence  to  guide  them, 
as  the  best  by  far  we  have  ever  had  the 
privilege  of  offering.  By  reference  to  our 
advertisement  concerning  them  further  par- 
ticulars may  be  had. 


Local  Secretary  Hesler's  Appeal  to 
the  Photographers. 

Brother  photographers,  not  only  of  the 
N.  P.  A  ,  but  all  who  claim  that  name,  East, 
West,  North,  South,  old  ivorld  and  new,  in 
behalf  of  the  N.  P.  A.  and  our  new  city 
which  has  so  recently,  phcenix-like,  risen 
from  its  ashes,  I  invite  you  to  come  and 
see  us  in  July  next.  Bring  yourself,  your 
wife,  friends,  and,  above  all,  bring  what 
you  can  of  your  best  work  to  show  us;  and 
we,  in  return,  will  show  you  the  most  won- 
derful city  the  world  has  ever  seen.  Don't 
fear  that  you  will  be  crowded  for  space  to 
show  your  pictures;  we  have  secured  the 
best  place  for  the  purpose  west  of  the  Atlan- 
tic, and  room  enough  to  hold  all  the  pho- 
tographs in  America,  and  a  few  besides. 
Bring  not  only  portraits,  but  compositions 
of  all  kinds  the  art  and  your  ingenuity 
can  invent,  and  to  you  who  do  so  will  be 
the  honor  given  by  public  approval.  Our 
hotel  accommodations  are  unsurpassed  by 
any  city  in  the  world;  all  new,  and  furnished 
and  fitted  with  an  eye  single  to  the  comfort 
and  convenience  of  the  public  who  visit  us. 
The  charges  will  be  moderate  ;  as  low  if  not 
lower  than  any  other  place  where  our  con- 
ventions have  been  held,  and  for  comfort  no- 
where surpassed  I  know  the  time  is  short 
for  us  to  get  ready  to  receive  you,  but  we 


10 


146 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


will  do  what  we  can.  You  shall  be  all 
heartily  welcome,  and  have  the  best  place 
to  exhibit  your  work  and  hold  your  meet- 
ings, and  exhibit  your  lantern  pictures,  that 
you  have  ever  had  (all  under  one  roof),  near 
depots  and  hotels,  and  where  you  will  have 
the  cool  breezes  of  Lake  Michigan  to  fan 
you.  I  want  to  see  five  thousand  at  least 
of  our  fraternity  here  in  July  next,  and  we 
will  show  to  this  astonishing  city  what  can 
be  done  in  other  parts  of  the  world  in  the 
way  of  photographing. 

Due  notice  will  be  given  of  the  hotel 
rates,  and  all  other  necessary  information. 
It  is  by  attending  these  conventions  and 
communing  together  that  we  educate  our- 
selves in  our  art ;  and  b}T  exhibiting  our 
work  that  we  educate  the  people,  and  call 
their  attention  to  what  we  are  doing.  Don't 
be  afraid  to  bring  and  exhibit  your  work. 
It  may  not  be  as  good  as  some,  but  it  will, 
no  doubt,  have  some  good  points,  and  by 
comparison  you  can  the  better  see  wherein 
you  err,  and  thereby  improve.  And,  too, 
by  exhibiting  you  gain  the  confidence  of 
your  customers,  that  you  are  not  ashamed 
or  afraid  to  exhibit  your  work  by  the  side 
of  the  best,  and  thus  increase  your  business. 
,  So  come  and  show  yourself  and  your  pic- 
tures, and  you  will  not  regret  it. 

A.  Hesler, 
i  Local  Secretary  N.  P.  A. 

TO  EXHIBITOKS  IN  CHICAGO, 
July,  1874. 

Notice  to  all  who  intend  to  exhibit  (and 
I  would  be  glad  to  see  every  photographer 
in  the  world  exhibit  something  pertaining 
to  our  art),  also  all  manufacturers  and  deal- 
ers, who  want  space  :  I  would  saj',  you  can 
have  all  the  room,  either  wall  or  floor,  you 
want,  but  you  must  notify  me  as  early  as 
the  first  of  June,  and  not  later  than  the  fif- 
teenth of  June,  of  the  space  in  square  feet  you 
will  want.  And  state  whether  for  pictures 
in  frames,  apparatus,  chemicals,  or  frames, 
&c,  so  the  space  can  be  provided  for  you. 
We  make  this  request  because  we  want  all 
our  space  filled.  Bare  walls  look  badly,  and 
it  costs  money  to  provide  space,  therefore  we 
don't  propose  to  go  to  the  expense  of  pro- 
viding it,  if  it  will  not  be  filled  or  occu- 
pied, yet  we  wish  all  that  want  it  to  have 


all  the  room  necessary,  and  it  will  be  but 
little  trouble  for  you  to  say  how  many 
square  feet  of  wall  or  floor  you  will  need. 

A.  Hesler, 
Local  Secretary  N.  P.  A. 
Post-office  address,  until  further  notice, 
Evanston,  111. 


VIEWS  ABROAD  AND  ACROSS. 

BY  EDWARD  L.   WILSON. 

V. 

Some  of  the  applications  of  Dr.  Stein's 
heliopticor  may  interest  you,  and  I  take 
the  liberty  of  explaining  them  here  with 
illustrations. 

Dr.  Stein  says :  "To  easily  fix  photo- 
graphic pictures  of  the  microscope,  I  com- 
bine my  automatic  holder  with  it  by  means 
of  a  conical  wooden  tube  h,  Pig.  A,  with  the 

^  tubeofamic- 

Fig.  A. 

roscope.  The 

objects  are 
placed  at  k,  b, 
and  arelight- 
ed,  by  the  re- 
flector, a,  for 
transparent, 
and  the  lens, 
c,  for  opaque 
objects;  at  I 
is  a  microm- 
eter-screw to 
focus  the  ob- 
ject; at  A,  one 
to  raise  and 
lower  the  he- 
liopticor. In 
the  frame,  e, 
d,g,f,  which 
is  grooved,  is 
contained the 
ground-glass 
and  autom- 
atic holder, 
while  the 
tube,  A.  /, 
takes  the 
place  of  the 
camera ;  at  i 
is  the  slide ;  at  m,  the  funnel  for  pouring  in 
the  chemicals.  These  photographs  can  be 
taken  in  the  night  as  well  as  in  daylight. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPH  EP. 


147 


An  artificial  light  (gas,  photogene,  petro- 
leum), when  properly  concentrated  and  pro- 
perly exposed,  will  answer  as  well  ;  work- 
ing at  night  dispenses  with  the  use  of  the 
grooved  frame,  #,/,  d,  e,  it  being  only  neces- 
sary to  place  the  holder  on  the  conical  tube. 
"  For  the  reproduction  of  the  retina  of  the 
eye,  I  make  use  of  an  ophthalmoscope,  which 
is  constructed  on  the  great  Liebreich's  prin- 
ciples. After  the  pupil  of  the  eye  to  be 
photographed  is  sufficiently  distended  with 
the  aid  of  atropia,  the  head  of  the  person 
sitting  is  held  by  a  rest,  made  for  this  pur- 
pose, I,  Fig.  B,  and  m,  n ;  the  back  of  the 


instance,  magnesium,  are  thrown  by  means 
of  the  reflector,  r,  through  the  tube,  g,  a,  c, 
into  the  interior  of  the  eye,  light  it  up,  and 
return  by  means  of  the  lens  at  e;  the  rays 
reflecting  will  collect  in  the  centre  of  the  re- 
flector,?1, which  is  pierced  like  a  diaphragm. 
Back  of  this  reflector  is  the  photographic 
tube,  which  is  set  on  the  heliopticor  at  q,  p. 
To  prevent  the  optical  rays  from  blinding 
the  eye,  a  piece  of  cobalt  blue  glass  is  in- 
serted in  the  tube,  e,  g,  f,  which  is  taken 
out  when  focussing,  which  is  generally  done 
by  candlelight.  At  s  is  an  adjusting  screw 
for  enlarging  the  lens  combination;  at  o,  the 


Fig.  B. 


head  is  held  by  the  ordinary  head-rest,  so 
that  a  firm  stand  is  secured  between  three 
points.  The  system  of  tubes,  e,  s,  g,  /,  as  well 
as  the  helioptric  camera,  q,  p,  are  screwed 
with  strong  iron  bars,  movable  at  i/r,  to  the 
table,  a,  i.  At  r  is  the  optical  reflector,  which 
can  be  moved  in  all  directions  by  means  of 
the  screws  g  and/;  also  the  biconvex  lens  at 
e,  which  is  intended  to  neutralize  all  reflec- 
tions of  the  cornea.     The  rays  of  light,  for 


micrometer-screw  of  the  photographic  ob- 
jective q,  p,  of  the  heliopticor ;  at  h,  is  an 
easily  moved  knob  to  fix  the  gaze  of  the  eye 
to  be  photographed. 

"  The  photographs  of  the  retina  made  with 
my  apparatus  are  about  three  centimetres 
in  diameter  ;  the  entrance  of  the  optic  nerve 
as  well  as  the  distribution  of  the  blood- 
vessels of  the  central  artery  of  the  eye,  are 
photographed  with  ease.     For  taking   dis- 


148 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER 


eased  forms  of  the  interior,  this  apparatus  is 
especially  adapted. 

"The  apparatus,  Fig.  C,  for  photograph- 
ing the  tympanum,  consists  of  three  parts  : 
1.  The  ear-funnel,  A.  2.  The  lighting  appa- 
ratus, B.  3.  The  photographic  apparatus,  C. 
These  parts,  as  can  be  seen  by  the  cut  below, 

Fig.  C. 


are  connected  together.  The  apparatus  is 
fastened  with  a  spherical  joint  to  a  suitable 
stand,  to  enable  it  to  be  moved  in  the  proper 
position  towards  the  sun.  The  ear-funnel 
consists  of  a  1^  lines  long  conical  tube, 
which  is  pushed  into  the  ear,  to  push  aside 
the  small  hairs  in  the  auditory  passage, 
which  would  obstruct  the  picture.  It  is 
made  of  vulcanized  rubber.  The  lighting 
apparatus,  B,  which  is  easily  closed  by  the 
lid,  a,  c,  consists  of  two  metallic  tubes  sol- 
dered together  at  right  angles,  b,  d,  one  being 
provided  with  parallel  sides,  the  other  with 
rounded  sides.  At  the  junction  of  the  tubes 
is  placed  a  pierced  metallic  reflector  at  an 
angle  of  45°  (e,  g)  /).  The  photographic 
apparatus,  c,  consists  of  a  double  objective  of 
12  lines  (C)  with  a  small  camera  of  2  lines 
depth,   and    heliopticor,    ground-glass,  and 


holder  are  held  by  an  easily  movable  rect- 
angle, D.    Between  the  objective  and  light- 
ing apparatus  is  placed  an  enlarging  plano- 
convex lens.     The  apparatus  is  used  in  the 
manner  described  in  the  cut,  Fig.  B.     The 
lighting   apparatus   can   be    moved   on   its 
own    axis,   and   in    conjunction    with    the 
spherical  joint  of  the  stand, 
can  be  moved  to  any  desirable 
position  with  the  greatest  ease. 
The  rays  which  penetrate  the 
tube,  a,  b,  c,  d,  are  thrown  by 
the  reflector,  e.f,  in  the  direc- 
tion, A,  on  the  tympanum,  the 
picture  of    which  is  then  re- 
flected back  through  the  open- 
ing g,  in  the  reflector,  and  lens 
combination,  h,  i,  k,  I,  m,  on 
the  ground-glass   o.     The  fo- 
cussing is  done  partly  by  means 
of  the  adjusting  screw,  p,  and 
the  lens  at  h,  according  to  the 
size  of  picture  desired.  During 
the  photographic  proceedings, 
the  ear  must  be  drawn  back  by 
an  assistant   to  facilitate   the 
inserting  of  the  ear-funnel  into 
the  slightly  curved   auditory 
passage,    thereby   insuring    a 
direct  and  straight  line.     The 
time  of  exposure,  in  good  sun- 
light, and    by  using  good  bro- 
mo-iodized  collodion,  is  half  a 
second  ;   by  ordinary  daylight  five  to  ten  sec- 
onds.    The  opening  and  closing  of  the  expo- 
sure is  done  at  a,  d." 

This  interesting  apparatus  is  no  doubt 
destined  to  be  very  useful  in  the  sciences, 
and  for  that  reason  I  give  it  so  much  space. 
On  page  470  of  the  last  volume  of  this 
magazine,  Dr.  Vogel  gives  the  American 
photographers  who  displayed  their  work  at 
Vienna  good  words,  and  certainly  it  is  more 
graceful  for  him  to  do  it  than  for  me.  I 
have  already  spoken  of  the  pleasure  it  gave 
me  to  feel  that,  although  the  number  of 
American  exhibitors  was  fe\g,  their  work 
was  unsurpassed.  It  was  a  matter  of  con- 
siderable interest  to  me  to  have  this  point 
decided  as  soon  after  I  entered  the  Exposi- 
tion as  possible,  and  no  doubt  our  friends 
Rocher  and  Kurtz  and  Anderson  and  Osier, 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


149 


and  othor  American  photographers  who 
were  there,  felt  the  same  way.  Our  work 
was  as  good  as  the  best,  and  therefore  I  need 
not  proceed  to  describe  in  detail  the  beauti- 
ful results  from  the  studios  of  those  named 
by  Dr.  Vogel  on  the  page  alluded  to.  I  was 
proud  of  my  country's  photography,  and  was 
never  ashamed  to  call  attention  to  it.  It 
was  a  pleasure,  too,  to  take  my  German 
friends  to  the  American  pictures,  and  when 
dissertating  upon  their  good  qualities,  to  be 
able  also  to  give  personal  recollections  of 
nearly  all  the  men  who  made  them  and  of 
their  studios. 

i  "Ah!"  said  a  friend,  "no  wonder  you 
make  such  beautiful  work  in  America,  be- 
cause you  have  such  excellent  apparatus.'' 
This  was  said  as  he  was  busy  examining  the 
unrivalled  construction  of  the  boxes  on  ex- 
hibition from  Scovill  Manufacturing  Com- 
pany, New  York,  proprietors  of  the  Amer- 
ican Optical  Company's  works.  Many  of 
the  little  conveniences  about  these  boxes, 
combining  as  they  do  to  make  up  the  great- 
est convenience  the  American  photographer 
has,  were  new  to  my  friend,  and  were  care- 
fully explained,  to  his  delight.  It  is  not  out 
of  place  to  say  that  I  know  that  the  result  of 
their  exhibition  in  Vienna  has  been  orders 
for  these  boxes  to  go  to  Algiers,  to  Asia,  to 
Prussia,  and  to  Russia.  If  /  may  be  proud 
of  my  friends,  the  photographers  of  Amer- 
ica, surely  they  may  be  proud  of  the  Amer- 
ican Optical  Company's  apparatus,  for  noth- 
ing in  the  world  excels  it,  if  I  may  judge 
from  the  fine  display  of  such  goods  from  all 
parts  of  the  Continentvand  by  the  handsome 
award  of  the  medal,  which  was  secured 
from  the  managers  of  the  great  Vienna 
Exposition  by  Scovill  Manufacturing  Com- 
pany. 

Of  lenses  and  optical  instruments  there 
was  no  end,  including  those  made  by  the 
well-known  Voigtlander,  Ross,  Steinheil, 
&c.  The  finest  display,  in  many  respects, 
was  by  the  renowned  French  optician,  Mons. 
J.  Fleury  Hermagis,  who  is  an  eminent 
photographer  as  well.  His  lenses  are  used 
by  M.  Adam  Salomon,  and  I  shall  have 
more  to  say  of  both  of  these  gentlemen  and 
their  productions  when  we  come  to  our  views 
in  Paris. 

Neither  were  our  photographic  magazines 


forgotten,  for  in  a  prominent  place  among 
the  scientific  publications  of  America,  ap- 
peared the  familiar  pages  of  the  Philadelphia 
Photographer,  where  it  won  many  friends 
and  new  subscribers.  It  is  the  only  photo- 
graphic magazine  in  the  world  each  number 
of  which  is  accompanied  by  a  specimen  pho- 
tograph ;  and  it  contains  more  matter  each 
month,  too,  than  any  of  its  contemporaries. 

Now  I  have  said  enough  about  us,  and 
with  Dr.  Vogel,  let  us  look  for  awhile  into 
the  numberless  art  galleries.  Oh  !  did  mor- 
tal man  ever  expect  to  have  such  a  feast  ? 
There  was  the  utmost  profusion  of  paintings 
of  all  classes  and  styles  of  subjects,  and  of 
the  various  schools  and  countries.  One 
could  well  spend  a  month  among  them  and 
not  see  them  all,  so  it  was  our  only  plan  to 
select  our  favorites,  and  then  to  pore  over 
them.  The  sculpture  was  also  profuse  and 
enchanting.  If  photographers  could  have 
resource  to  such  collections  as  these  how 
photography  would  advance !  Yet,  with  all 
this  gaudy  display,  the  figure-painting  which 
touched  me  the  most  was  of  a  little  dainty 
peasant  miss,  walking  with  slate  under  her 
arm  to  school ;  and  of  the  statuary,  a  similar 
little  girl  playing  with  two  kittens  between 
her  bare  feet  was  most  attractive.  These 
are  just  my  simple  ideas. 

I  found  that  that  hat  was  deluding  some  of 
the  visitors  into  thinking  that  I  was  myself 
an  artist.  To  take  it  off  looked  even  more 
suspicious,  and  so  I  kept  it  on.  In  the  act 
of  doing  this,  one  luckless  hour,  I  was  ap- 
proached by  a  portly  gentleman,  who  seemed 
very  anxious  for  conversation,  and  who  also 
wore  a  large  hat.  "Fine  lot  of  paintings, 
sir,"  he  said.  "Yes,"  I  answered.  "Great 
variety  ;  one  could  hardly  fail  to  be  able  to 
make  a  collection."  "True,"  I  said.  "Are 
you  an  artist,  sir?"  Working  in  that  di- 
rection. "  Oh  !  I  am  so  glad.  What  school 
do  you  like  the  best?"  Well,  we  are  trying 
to  raise  a  photographic  school  in  America. 
I  think  I  should  like  that  the  best.  "  Oh, 
heavens!  that  disgusting  business?  I  hope 
you  are  not  a  photographer?"  Well,  no; 
that  is,  not  now, — not  at  present.  "I  am 
so  glad.  I  am  a  painter.  I  don't  like  any 
school  much.  The  Italians  only  paint  pic- 
tures of  martyrs  and  madonnas.  The 
French  are  good  on  figures,  but  they  are 


150 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


too  fond  of  the  nude.  They  take  the  same 
naked  woman  and  change  her  position  a 
little, — just  as  I  am  told  you  Yankees  change 
a  word  or  two  in  your  joatent  specifications, 
and  then  get  a  reissue,  and  sail  as  if  under 
new  colors,  while  in  reality  it  is  only  the 
same  old  thing  disguised, — and  then  call  her 
'  Aurora,'  or  '  Fantasie,'  or  the  '  Sky 
Nymph,'  or  the  'Muddled  Mistress,'  or 
something  else ;  it  grows  monotonous  does 
this  style.  The  German  home  scenes  and 
historical  representations  touch  the  very 
heart;  and  the  Flemish,  coming  in  between 
the  French  and  the  German,  are  tender  and 
attractive.  But  then  the  English  pictures, 
especially  their  landscapes,  are  the  finest  in 


Thus  this  man's  tongue  ran  on. 

the  world!"  Thus  this  man's  tongue  ran 
on,  until,  finding  no  other  way,  I  said: 
My  friend,  it  is  my  usual  dinner  hour, 
with  which  I  never  allow  anything  to  in- 
terfere, and  we  parted.  When  I  went  to 
pay  for  my  dinner  I  found  my  pocket-book 
was  gone,  but  it  wasn't  the  one  I  carried 
anything  in ;  and  I  think  there  was  one 
man,  with  a  talent  for  fine  art  and  a  large 
hat,  disappointed. 

It  would  be  folly  for  me  to  attempt  any 
description  of  wbat  we  saw  in  these  great 
galleries.  There  will  be  just  such  a  display 
in  Philadelphia,  in  1876,  where  I  hope  you 
will  all  see  it.  Meanwhile,  study  up  your 
art  principles,  that  you  may  have  more  ca- 
pacity for  enjoying  the  pictures  and  under- 
standing them.  Day  after  day  we  wandered 
among  the  great  collections  of  beautiful 
things,  clambering  to  the  top  of  the  dome, 
also,  from  which  grand  views  were  to  be 
had  in  all  directions.  The  Exhibition  not 
being  open  in  the  evenings,  we  devoted 
them  to  music,  our  favorite  being  at  the 


Volksgarten,  where  Edward  Strauss  and 
his  superb  orchestra  played  "The  Beautiful 
Blue  Danube,"  as  the  muddy  stream  moved 
sluggishly  through  the  city  near  by,  and 
where  "the  beautiful  Spanish  flower-girls" 
from  Vienna  are  too  tedious  to  mention. 
The  one  was  a  rest  after  the  other,  and  the 
world  of  people  about  us  was  a  sight  as 
wonderful  as  any,  for  we  were  among  the 
people  of  all  nations.  Strauss  did  not  forget 
to  play  "Yankee  Doodle,"  and  he  and  his 
did  it  full  justice. 

There  are  many  strange  customs  in  Vi- 
enna, and  one  is  always  on  the  alert  for 
surprises.  For  example :  You  arise  in  the 
morning  at  such  an  hour  as  your  inclination 
dictates.  While  you  are  doing  that  which 
in  early  youth  you  were  taught  to  do,  i.  e., 
dressing  yourself,  the  door  opens,  a  tremen- 


A  tremendous  damsel  enters  without  ceremony. 

dous  damsel  enters  without  ceremony,  seizes 
your  boots  and — the  fright  is  over — and 
she  takes  them  away.  Even  this  is  shock- 
ing enough  to  the  nerves  of  a  man  away 
from  home,  but  he  must  be  prepared  for 
anything,  as  I  learned  when  the  boots 
came  back.  Ano- 
ther and  younger 
maiden  brought 
them,  nicely  pol- 
ished, and  when 
giving  her  the 
usual  fee,  if  it  was 
you,  man  or  wo- 
man, she  would 
seize  your  hand 
and  kiss  it,  as  a 
token  of  her  gra- 
titude. Women 
have  their  rights 
in  Vienna,  and  if  they  don't  they  take  them. 


Women  have  their  rights  in 
Vienna. 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


151 


A  roam  about  the  city  teaches  one  a  great 
deal  and  gives  one  an  opportunity  of  wit- 
nessing some  strange  and  ludicrous  sights. 
The  churches,  which  arc  all  museums  of 
sculpture  and  painting,  were  not  neglected 
by  us.  Old  St  Stephens,  with  its  849  feet  of 
length,  its  steeple  443  feet  high,  and  its  old 
walls,  which  have  stood  since  A.D.  1258, 
gave  us  a  treat  I  shall  not  soon  forget,  for 
besides  the  works  of  art  it  contains,  mass 
was  being  held,  and  a  thousand  people  were 
in  attendance,  consisting  of  all  grades  of 
society,  from  the  picturesque  peasantry  to 
princes  and  princesses.  Old  and  young 
were  there — soldiers,  draymen,  elegantly 
dressed  ladies  and  roughly  clad  country 
people,  all  worshipping  together,  while  here 
and  there  among  the  great  aisles  were  just 
such  groups  as  ages  ago  inspired  the  pencils 
of  Raffaelle,  Rembrandt,  and  other  of  the  old 
masters,  in  abundance.  Of  beggars  there 
was  a  whole  army,  who  failed  not  to  sus- 
pend praying  to  ask  alms  of  the  passing 
stranger.  I  found  my  big  hat  was  a  pro- 
tection in  such  cases,  for  I  was  taken  for  a 
native  !  I  sighed  for  a  camera  and  a  good 
light  to  capture  some  of  the  life  pictures 
there  before  me.  What  a  contrast  to  the 
eighteen  massive  solemn  columns,  each  nine 
feet  in  diameter,  which,  standing  erect,  had 
supported  the  nave,  and  opened  niches  in 
their  sides  to  accommodate  the  hundred 
stiff,  cold  statues  which  have  stood  there  for 
century  upon  century.  At  the  old  Augus- 
tine Church,  we  saw  that  master  work  of 
the  great  Canova,  the  tomb  of  the  Arch- 
duchess Christine.  How  sublime  it  is.  It 
consists  of  a  pyramid  of  marble  over  thirty 
feet  high,  in  the  face  of  which  is  an  opening 
apparently  into  a  vault.  Approaching  this 
is  a  figure  of  Virtue  carrying  a  vase  contain- 
ing the  ashes  of  the  deceased.  Two  little 
girls  carrying  torches  attend  her,  and  be- 
hind them  comes  Benevolence  supporting 
an  old  man  bowed  down  with  grief.  A 
little  sorrowing  child  accompanies  him.  On 
the  opposite  side  is  a  crouching  lion,  on 
which  reclines  a  mourning  genius.  The 
whole  is  a  magnificent  and  justly  famed 
work  of  art.  Here  we  saw  also  silver  urns 
with  royal  hearts  in  them  ;  dressed  skele- 
tons and  grinning  skulls  enough  to  make  us 
to  get  into  fresh  air  asjain. 


At  the  museum  we  had  a  rare  treat  in  a 
collection  of  old  paintings  belonging  to  a 
private  party ;  some  of  them  were  very 
curious. 

I  had  intended  to  tell  you  more  of  the 
status  of  photography  in  Vienna  in  this 
letter,  but  space  will  not  allow,  and  it  must 
lay  over  until  next  month. 


How  to  avoid  Unnecessary  Waste  of 
Time  and  Silver. 

BY    E.    Z.    WEBSTER. 

No.  2. 

In  my  first  paper  I  endeavored  to  impress 
upon  the  minds  of  my  brother  photogra- 
phers the  value  and  importance  of  saving 
time. 

We  will  now  proceed  to  the  next  and 
main  subject  under  consideration,  i.  e.,  the 
unnecessary  waste  of  silver,  and  how  to 
avoid  it ;  and  as  the  making  of  the  negative 
is  the  first  use,  there  is  the  proper  place  to 
commence  the  saving  of  silver. 

Although  I  do  not  propose  to  teach  the 
art,  or  to  criticize  the  pet  formulas  or  pro- 
cesses of  my  brother  photographers,  still  I 
must  give  my  own  views  upon  all  points 
bearing  upon  the  subject  under  considera- 
tion ;  and  while  I  would  not  arrogate  to 
myself  one  tithe  of  the  knowledge  possessed 
by  the  many  great  and  brilliant  exponents 
of  our  beautiful  art,  still  I  believe  there 
are  scores  of  operators  who  have  not  yet 
"learned  everything,"  and  some  things 
which  I  have  learned  may  be  of  use  to 
them. 

One  thing  I  have  learned  is  this,  viz.,  it 
don't  pay  to  be  everlastingly  at  war  with  your 
negative  bath;  and  any  man  who  tries  to 
make  his  bath  work  all  sorts  of  collodion, 
all  sorts  of  developers,  acids,  alkalies,  dirty 
plates,  and  everything  else,  will  always  be 
in  a  chronic  state  of  perspiration  and 
uncertainty,  not  to  mention  the  immense 
amount  of  silver  and  other  materials  wasted. 

A  good  forty-grain  bath  is  the  most  reli- 
able and  best  adapted  to  the  various  com- 
mercial collodions  in  the  market ;  and,  unless 
you  are  an  adept,  I  would  not  advise  you 


152 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


to  confine  yourself  to  "  home-made  "  col- 
lodion. 

See  that  every  plate  is  absolutely  clean 
upon  the  back  and  edges,  and  chemically 
pure  upon  the  front,  and  free  from  dust 
when  it  goes  into  the  bath,  for  dirty  plates 
are  an  abomination,  they  spoil  the  picture, 
sour  the  temper,  soil  the  bath,  and  disgust 
the  sitter.  Try  to  reduce  your  negative 
process  down  to  the  utmost  certainty,  by 
careful  attention  to  every  detail  of  prepara- 
tion, and  then  watch  every  shade  of  chemi- 
cal change,  thereby  enabling  you  to  nip 
disaster  in  the  bud.  The  making  of  the 
negative  is  the  most  critical  and  the  most 
important  part  in  the  photographic  process. 
Volumes  have  been  written  upon  the  sub- 
ject, and  yet  there  is  no  one  accepted  rule 
or  standard  formula;  but  I  will  take  it  for 
granted  that  you  know  all  about  it. 

Every  operator  knows  that  the  negative 
solution  must  be  free  from  all  floating  par- 
ticles, as  well  as  from  chemical  impurities. 
There  are  various  means  of  remedying  the 
latter,  while  the  former  must  generally  be 
filtered  out  ;  consequently,  some  operators 
are  always  filtering  their  bath,  and  the  un- 
necessary waste  of  silver  by  so  doing  is  sur- 
prising ;  the  filters  absorb  large  quantities 
of  silver,  to  say  nothing  of  the  slops  which 
seem  almost  unavoidable. 

I  weighed  a  new  nine-inch  filtering-paper, 
and  then  filtered  the  bath  solution  which 
I  had  been  using,  containing  about  one 
gallon.  The  filter  before  using  weighed 
about  100  grains;  the  same  filter  weighed 
when  wet,  and  had  stopped  dripping,  306 
grains,  and,  when  thoroughly  dry  again, 
it  weighed  180  grains;  another  filter  just 
like  it,  which  was  used  immediately  after, 
weighed  150  grains  when  dry  ;  while  some 
old  filters,  which  have  come  under  my 
observation,  were  very  much  heavier;  of 
course,  the  larger  the  filter,  the  more 
solution  is  absorbed.  The  use  of  cotton 
may  be  more  economical,  still  there  will 
be  great  loss.  And  then,  again,  it  is 
not  always  convenient  to  stop  to  filter. 
Now,  if  you  will  take  a  box  of  a  suitable 
size,  minus  a  top,  and  set  your  bath  into  it 
(see  Fig.  1),  and,  just  as  soon  as  your  plate 
is  dipped,  tip  it  (the  bath)  forward  (see  Fig. 
2),  and  let  it  remain  in  that  position  until 


you  are  ready  to  remove  it  to  the  plate- 
holder,  you  will  be  astonished  to  see  how 
free  from  pinholes  your  negative  will  he, 


SHOWING      THE 

POSITION   OF  PLATE 

WHILE  COATING. 


and  it  will  save  you  an  immense  amount  of 
filtering.  I  have  been  practicing  this  plan 
for  many  years,  and  am  surprised  that  so 
few  operators  have  adopted  it.  This  box 
may  be  filled  with  warm  water  in  cold,  and 
with  ice-water  in  hot  weather,  thereby  se- 
curing a  more  uniform  temperature  of  the 
solution.  Much  solution  is  allowed  to  drip 
upon  the  floor,  and  elsewhere,  by  unneces- 
sary haste  or  carelessness  in  removing  the 
plate  from  the  bath.  Of  course  there  are 
times,  and  very  often,  when  it  is  neces- 
sary "to  push  things,"  and  then  "quick  " 
is  the  word,  "hurry  up  the  plate."  Don't 
stop  for  the  drip,  but,  if  you  are  working 
large  plates,  it  will  pay  you  to  fix  up  an 
arrangement  like  the  one  represented  in 
Fig.  3,  which  should  be  fastened  to  the  wall 
of  the  dark-room  at  the  proper  height,  and 
as  close  to  your  bath  as  possible,  so  as  to 
avoid  the  waste  of  solution  while  passing 
the  plate  to  position.  While  the  plate  is 
draining,  you  can  get  your  plate-holder  all 
in  readiness,  or  coat  and  dip  another  plate, 
&c,  and  the  silver  which  is  saved  is  all 
ready  to  use  again.  It  does  not  require 
refining,  and  is  not  subject  to  a  royalty  y?'ab, 
nor  does  the  silver  which  can  be  saved  by 
following  the  suggestions  contained  in  this 
series  of  papers.     The  main  object  to  be 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


1 53 


kept  in  mind  mii9t  be  to  retain  the  silver  in 
the  original,  or  some  other  workable  form,  by 
the  simplest  and  most  economical  plan  ;  and 
I  will  guarantee  that  the  amount  of  silver 
which  can  be  saved  by  a  systematic  routine 
of  avoiding  unnecessary  waste  will  be  twice 
as  great,  and  no  more  troublesome,  than  the 
endeavor  to  regain  your  contaminated  silver 
by  sending  it  to  the  miller,  who  keeps  the 
grist  and  sends  you  the  toll. 
(To  be  continued.) 


GERMAN  CORRESPONDENCE. 

Solution  of  the  Problem  of  Reproducing  Neg- 
atives— New  Photographic  Spectroscopical 
Observations. 

To-day  I  am  in  the  position  to  report  on 
one  of  the  most  important  and  interesting 
of  discoveries.  A  problem  of  great  impor- 
tance for  practical  photography  has  been 
solved,  i.  e.,  the  reproduction  of  negatives. 
You  will,  perhaps,  state  that  this  is  nothing 
new;  and  I  remark,  that  I,  as  well  as 
others,  have  frequently  reproduced  nega- 
tives ;  but  if  any  one  has  ever  obtained  a 
negative  which  is  exactly  like  the  original, 
possessing  the  same  sharpness,  softness,  and 
harmony,  I  doubt  very  much.  Even  when 
we  do  not  take  slight  variations  into  ac- 
count, there  has  hardly  a  negative  been 
made  which  could  completely  replace  the 
original.  The  reason  is,  probably,  that  for 
the  production  of  the  negative  two  pro- 
cesses are  necessary ;  first,  the  production 
of  the  positive,  and  next,  the  negative  No 
matter  if  we  work  with  chloride  of  silver, 
or  with  the  camera,  something  always  is 
lost.  The  relation  of  light  and  shade  be- 
comes deranged  already  in  the  positive,  and 
when  we  take  a  negative  from  the  positive 
new  differences  will  occur,  and  the  conse- 
quence is  that,  as  a  rule,  the  negative  dif- 
fers considerably  from  the  positive. 

Obernetter  has  solved  the  problem  of 
making  a  negative  by  employing  a  process 
which  requires  a  single  copying  process 
only,  i.  e.,  he  makes  from  a  negative  another 
negative.  He  employs  the  dust  process  of 
Poitevin.  This  process  was  improved  by 
Obernetter  and  Zeubert,  and  formerly  em- 
ployed for  making  porcelain  pictures.     A 


glass  plate  is  coated  with  a  film  of  gum, 
grape-sugar,  and  chromate  of  potash.  This 
film,  when  dry,  is  somewhat  sticky;  so 
much  so  that  a  pigment  powder  when 
dusted  over  it  adheres  to  it.  The  action  of 
light  destroys  this  stickiness,  and  when  the 
film  has  been  exposed  under  a  positive,  only 
the  places  which  have  been  covered  by  the 
opaque  parts  will  retain  their  stickiness. 

If,  now,  after  exposure  a  powder  is  dusted 
over  it,  it  will  adhere  only  to  the  parts 
which  have  not  been  exposed  to  light,  and 
in  this  way  we  obtain  a  positive  from  a  posi- 
tive ;  of  course  a  negative  will  yield  a  neg- 
ative. Obernetter  himself  has  practiced 
this  process  for  years  with  the  best  success, 
and  transmitted  lately  to  the  Berlin  Photo- 
graphic Association  a  number  of  reproduced 
negatives,  together  with  the  originals.  The 
former  were  such  exact  copies  that  only  a 
skilled  eye  could  detect  the  difference.  Ober- 
netter makes  it  a  business  to  reproduce  neg- 
atives, and  has,  in  fact,  made  excellent 
work  for  Loescher  &  Petsch  here.  The  pro- 
cess is  for  him  of  special  interest  in  his 
"  Lichtdruck  "  establishment,  where  he  has 
to  work  with  reversed  negatives,  in  order 
that  the  resulting  pictures  may  appear  in 
the  proper  position.  Formerly  it  was  -cus- 
tomary to  detach  the  film  from  the  glass, 
and  to  reverse  it,  but  now  Obernetter  is, 
by  the  above-mentioned  process,  enabled 
to  make  a  reversed  negative,  because  the 
reproduced  negative  is  already  reversed, 
and  can  therefore  be  used  for  the  "  Licht- 
druck "  directly.  When  a  negative  is  de- 
sired in  which  the  position  is  not  reversed, 
we  pour  collodion  over  the  dusted  film,  and 
after  it  has  dried  we  place  the  plate  in 
water  ;  the  film  soon  becomes  detached  from 
the  glass,  and  the  film,  with  the  picture, 
can  easily  be  reversed,  and  placed  on  glass. 

At  first  sight  it  looks  as  if  plate-glass  was 
only  suitable  for  this  purpose,  but  this  is 
not  so.  Obernetter  has  copied  curved  neg- 
atives by  this  process,  and  it  is  not  at  all 
difficult.  He  uses  mica  plates  for  the  pur- 
pose, which  he  coats  with  the  sensitive 
composition.  These  conform  to  the  curved 
plates,  and  after  the  picture  has  been  de- 
tached it  is  readily  transferred  to  glass. 
Obernetter  has  already  reproduced  two 
thousand  negatives  for  the  "Lichtdruck" 


154 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


up  to  a  size  of  two  feet.  Another  advan- 
tage is,  that  by  regulating  the  exposure,  we 
have  it  in  our  power  to  change  a  hard  neg- 
ative into  a  soft  one,  or  a  weak  one  into  a 
brilliant  one.  Obernetter  sent  me  original 
negatives  and  copies,  and  it  is  a  fact,  that 
the  reproduced  negatives  give  finer  results 
than  the  original.  The  Vienna  Society  has 
awarded  to  the  inventor  the  golden  Voigt- 
lander  medal.  He  has  published  his  method 
of  working,  which  is  as  follows  : 

Dextrin,    ....         4  grains. 
White  Sugar,    .         .         .         5       " 
Bichromate  of  Ammonium,       2       " 
Water,      .         .         .         .     100       " 
Glycerin,  .         .         .     2-8  drops. 

The  above  materials,  after  being  dis- 
solved, are  filtered,  and  a  newly-polished 
piece  of  plate-glass  is  coated  with  it ;  the 
excess  is  poured  off  from  one  corner,  and 
the  plate  is  put  aside  to  dry.  If  the  plate 
is  put  into  a  drying-oven,  in  which  the  tem- 
perature is  from  122-160  degrees  F.,  the 
film  will  be  dry  in  from  five  to  ten  minutes  ; 
the  film  is  exposed  under  the  negative  to 
diffused  daylight  while  still  warm.  The 
exposure  lasts  for  about  five  to  fifteen  min- 
utes, according  to  the  density  of  the  neg- 
ative ;  when  the  picture  becomes  faintly 
visible  the  exposure  is  right.  After  exposure 
the  plate  is  placed  again  in  the  drying- 
oven  until  it  is  a  little  warmer  than  the  air 
of  the  room  in  which  the  picture  is  to  be 
developed.  The  development  should  take 
place  in  a  room  not  too  light.  The  plate 
is  placed  upon  a  piece  of  white  paper,  a 
brush  is  placed  in  levigated  plumbago,  and 
the  plate  is  carefully  brushed  with  it ;  by 
breathing  on  the  plate  it  takes  the  plumbago 
more  readily  (the  operation  is  somewhat 
tedious  for  the  beginner,  particularly  when 
the  plate  has  been  somewhat  overexposed, 
besides,  the  plumbago-dust  makes  one  look 
like  a  chimney-sweep).  When  the  requisite 
density  has  been  obtained  the  plate  is  dusted 
off  and  coated  with  a  plain  collodion,  con- 
taining two  per  cent,  of  cotton  ;  when  dry 
a  sharp  knife  is  passed  around  the  margin, 
and  the  plate  is  placed  in  water.  The  film 
is,  after  two  or  three  minutes,  easily  de- 
tached from  the  plate,  and  may  be  reversed 
and  floated  on  a  plate  of  glass.     The  plate 


is  washed  under  a  gentle  stream  of  water,  in 
order  to  remove  air-bubbles  which  possibly 
may  have  formed,  and,  finally,  solution  of 
gum  (2  parts  gum  to  100  of  water)  is  poured 
over  it,  and  the  plate  is  left  to  dry,  spon- 
taneously, and  in  a  vertical  position. 

Obernetter  regulates  the  proportion  of 
glycerin  according  to  the  humidity  of  the 
atmosphere.  When  the  air  is  damp  and 
warm  no  glycerin  is  necessary,  but  when 
the  air  is  cold  and  dry  the  addition  of 
glycerin  is  advantageous.  In  America, 
where  the  air  is  dry,  the  addition  of  glyce- 
rin is  in  most  cases  to  be  recommended. 

The  plumbago  plays  a  very  important 
part.  The  best  is  the  genuine  Siberian, 
finely  precipitated.  It  is  to  be  had  of  the 
celebrated  Faber,  at  Stein,  near  Nuremberg. 
Obernetter  states  that  it  is  easy  to  guess  the 
time  of  exposure.  Plates  which  have  been 
exposed  too  short  a  time  become  veiled, 
while  the  result  of  overexposure  is  a  hard 
picture.  I  must  remark,  that  guessing  at 
the  time  of  exposure  is  a  rather  risky  opera- 
tion. I  have  repeatedly  made  experiments, 
but  always  in  vain;  finally  I  resorted  to 
the  photometer,  and  succeeded  admirably. 
With  thin  plates  I  copied  to  fifteen  degrees  ; 
with  dense  ones  to  sixteen  degrees  ;  and  this 
enables  one  to  be  entirely  independent  of 
the  weather. 

I  have  written  to  you  in  a  former  letter 
about  my  experiments  with  the  solar  spec- 
trum. I  have  continued  these  experiments, 
and  have  obtained  some  very  original  re- 
sults, which  overthrow  all  that  we  have 
known  until  now  about  the  sensitiveness 
for  spectral  colors  of  iodide,  bromide,  and 
chloride  of  silver. 

Schultz-Sellack,  who  examined  them  four 
years  ago,  stated  that  only  the  ultra-violet, 
violet,  and  blue,  affected  pure  iodide,  brom- 
ide, or  chloride  of  silver  chemically.  When 
we  count  from  the  ultra-violet,  the  sensitive- 
ness of  the  chloride  of  silver  ceases  in  violet, 
that  of  iodide  of  silver  in  indigo,  and  the 
action  on  bromide  of  silver  extends  to  blue ; 
so  states  Schultz-Sellack. 

That  these  assertions  do  not  answer  for 
bromide  of  silver  I  have  already  reported. 
Bromide  of  silver  is,  in  fact,  affected  as  far 
as  the  red.  That  Schultz-Sellack  noticed 
an  effect  only  as  far  as  blue,  is  explained  by 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


155 


his  using  a  spectrum  very  feeble  in  light, 
and  too  short  an  exposure.  After  having 
tried  bromide  of  silver,  I  took  chloride  and 
iodide  of  silver,  both  in  the  dry  state  ;  these 
also  showed  a  sensitiveness  for  all  the  colors 
of  the  spectrum  up  to  red,  and  this  sensi- 
tiveness can  be  modified  by  adding  pig- 
ments. A  very  curious  result  I  obtained 
with  colored  chloride  of  silver.  I  gave  to 
it  a  red  color  by  means  of  naphthalin  red, 
and  obtained  a  plate  which  was  the  most 
sensitive  for  yellow,  so  much  so,  that  this 
color  affected  the  plate  more  strongly  than 
blue. 

When  we  test  such  a  chloride  of  silver- 
collodion  for  yellow  color,  we  are  apt  to 
believe  that  this  would  act  with  more  force 
than  blue,  but  this  is  not  the  case  ;  this  fact 
appears  strange,  but  is  easily  explained.  The 
yellow  of  the  solar  spectrum  is  about  a  hun- 
dred times  brighter  than  the  violet,  while, 
in  painted  colors,  the  yellow  is  at  most  only 
ten  times  more  brilliant  than  ultramarine 
blue;  in  many  cases  it  is  only  four  to  five 
times  brighter,  and  hence  its  action  will  be 
from  ten  to  twenty  times  more  feeble  than 
the  spectrum,  and,  under  these  circumstan- 
ces, not  exceed  the  action  of  the  blue.  To 
this  we  have  to  add  another  circumstance. 
In  our  work  direct  sunlight  is  excluded ; 
our  objects  are,  therefore,  illuminated  by 
the  blue  sky,  and  blue  is  the  predominant 
color.  It  becomes  necessary  to  resort  to 
other  means  in  order  to  overcome  this  diffi- 
culty. I  shall  write  about  this  in  a  future 
letter. 

It  is  strange  how  the  action  of  the  solar 
spectrum  fluctuates.  Formerly  the  solar 
spectrum  was  considered  as  something  con- 
stant ;  but  already  my  first  experiment 
proved  to  me  that  constancy  is  out  of  the 
question.  Although  I  experimented  only 
when  the  sky  was  perfectly  clear  ;  although 
I  took  into  consideration  the  sun's  altitude, 
I  soon  observed  that  the  action  sometimes 
extended  far  towards  the  violet,  at  others 
to  the  red.  I  have  had  days  when  violet 
affected  bromide  of  silver  hardly  at  all,  and 
at  others  very  strongly.  The  cause  of  these 
variations  is  doubtless  the  different  trans- 
parency for  color  in  the  atmosphere ;  some- 
times the  violet,  sometimes  another  color  is 
more  strongly  absorbed.  . 


In  conclusion,  a  remark  about  Mr.  Carey 
Lea's  article  in  the  British  Journal  of  Pho- 
tography. He  has  repeated  my  experiments 
with  colored  collodion;  but,  instead  of  em- 
ploying the  solar  spectrum,  he  used  an  arti- 
ficial one,  which  he  made  of  colored  strips 
of  glass.  I  will  here  state  that  such  a  spec- 
trum can  never  yield  the  same  results  as  a 
solar  one,  for  the  simple  reason  that  the 
colors  are  not  pure.  A  cobalt  glass  permits, 
besides  the  blue  rays,  considerable  red  light 
to  pass;  through  yellow  glass  green,  red, 
and  some  blue  passes,  besides  yellow.  Pieces 
of  glass,  which  have  been  colored  red  with 
a  rose-anilin  varnish,  allow  a  considerable 
quantity  of  blue  light  to  pass  through  them 
besides  red.  If  we  expose  a  film  under  such 
a  plate,  and  we  should  get  an  impression, 
who  is  able  to  say  if  it  is  the  result  of  the 
action  of  red  or  of  blue  light?  Similar  re- 
sults are  produced  by  pigments.  If  we  paint 
a  spectrum  with  alizarin  red,  Naples  yellow, 
and  indigo,  and  take  a  photograph  of  it,  we 
will  find  that  the  red  has  impressed  the 
plate  the  strongest,  and  the  blue  the  least ; 
just  the  reverse  of  the  action  of  the  true 
solar  spectrum.  If  therefore  Mr.  Lea  ob- 
tained under  his  colored  glasses  different 
results  from  those  which  I  obtained  with 
the  solar  spectrum,  the  fact  does  not  sur- 
prise me  at  all. 

Yours  very  truly, 

Dr.  H.  Vogel. 


A  NEW  POCKET-ALBUM. 

"We  have  long  seen  and  felt  the  necessity 
for  some  convenient  method  of  mounting 
and  protecting  photographs,  so  that  they 
may  be  carried  in  the  pocket  and  readily 
examined. 

The  device  we  herewith  illustrate  is  in- 
tended to  supply  this  want.  It  is  a  cover 
with  expanding  back,  so  that  from  six  to 
twenty-four  pictures  may  be  inserted.  They 
are  made  all  sizes,  from  card  to  8  x  10.  The 
pictures  are  mounted  in  the  usual  way,  and 
then  strips  of  linen,  or  strong  paper,  of  the 
proper  width,  are  pasted  on  one  edge,  by 
which  the  picture  is  inserted  and  held  in 
place  in  the  cover.  Fig.  1  represents  the 
cover,  with  the  perforations  in  the   back, 


156 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


through  which  spreading  clasps  bind   the 
whole   together.     These   are   so  easily  in- 


Fig.  1. 


serted  or  removed,  that  pictures  are  readily 
put  in  or  taken  out  at  any  time.     Fig.  2 


Fig.  2. 


represents  the  picture,  with  the  guard  pasted 
on  ready  for  insertion. 

The  arrangement  is  simple,  and  we  are 
sure  will  be  readily  comprehended.  We 
know  there  are  many  photographers  and 
others  who  often  want  to  carry  with  them 
a  few  choice  specimens,  either  for  study  or 
exhibition,  whose  case  this  article  will  meet 
exactly.  The  real  and  first  object  of  them, 
however,  is  to  enable  photographers  to  pub- 
lish local  or  other  views,  and  sell  them, 
neatly  done  up  in  these  covers.  Or  it  may 
be  portraits  of  a  club  or  class,  or  any  other 
thing,  where  a  cheap  binding  is  needed  for 
holding  and  preserving  several  pictures  to- 


gether. They  are  manufactured  and  sold 
by  Benerman  &  Wilson,  to  whom  all  orders 
may  be  addressed.  See  advertising  depart- 
ment. 

SOCIETY  GOSSIP. 

Philadelphia  (Philada.). — The  Presi- 
dent exhibited  a  print  showing  the  crystal- 
line structure  of  a  sheet  of  mica,  this  latter 
having  been  placed  in  direct  contact  with 
the  sensitive  paper  in  the  printing-frame. 
The  President  also  exhibited  some  outdoor 
views  made  with  a  Dallmeyer  rapid  rectili- 
near lens. 

Mr.  Carbutt  called  the  attention  of  the 
Society  to  two  presentation  prints  which 
accompanied  the  last  number  of  the  Bulle- 
tin de  la  Societe  Franqaise.  Mr.  Carbutt 
said  that  these  prints  might  be  considered 
fine  specimens  of  the  process  known  as 
Rousselon's  improved  photo-engraving  pro- 
cess, in  which,  while  Mr.  Kousselon  had 
undoubtedly  introduced  many  improve- 
ments, still  the  original  idea  must  be  ac- 
knowledged as  Mr.  Woodbury's.  Mr.  Car- 
butt then  said  that  in  these  processes,  a 
gelatin  relief,  containing  fine  emery,  or 
some  similar  substance  to  give  a  grain,  was 
first  printed  from  the  negative  and  mounted 
on  a  zinc  plate ;  that  it  was  then  pressed 
either  into  soft  metal,  afterwards  electro- 
typed  in  copper,  or  into  wax,  afterwards 
faced  with  steel ;  the  mould  thus  obtained 
being  inked  and  printed  from  in  the  usual 
way.  Mr.  Carbutt  said  that  the  process 
was  probably  an  expensive  one  to  work,  but 
that  it  produced  results  of  unequalled 
beauty,  as  could  be  seen  by  an  inspection  of 
the  prints  now  before  the  Society ;  and  he 
moved  that  they  be  framed  and  hung  on 
the  walls. 

Mr.  Sartain,  in  seconding  the  motion, 
said  that  no  hand  engraving  could  possibly 
compare  in  delicacy  with  the  proofs  ex- 
hibited. 

Boston  Photographic  Association. — 
Committee  on  Stereo  Camera  reported  no 
claim  had  been  presented  that  would  justify 
them  in  making  a  disposal  of  said  camera. 

Mr.  Foss  presented  to  the  members  of 
the  Association  samples  of  his  retouching 
powder  and  the   way  to  procure  it,    viz., 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGKAPHEE. 


157 


sift  coal  ashes,  then  wash  two  or  three  times, 
saving  the  portion  poured  off,  let  dry,  and 
it  is  ready  for  use.  Also  his  method  for 
mounting  prints  on  glass:  Flow  your  plate 
with  thick  albumen  and  let  it  dry,  then 
pour  on  a  few  drops  of  albumen  and  lay  the 
paper  on,  commencing  at  one  corner  the 
same  as  in  silvering,  and  let  the  surplus 
drain  off. 

Mr.  Edward  L.  Wilson,  of  Philadelphia, 
was  present,  was  introduced,  and  made  a 
very  interesting  address,  at  the  conclusion 
of  which  he  was  greeted  with  applause. 

Messrs.  Southworth,  Rowell,  and  Bowers 
also  made  a  few  remarks  concerning  the 
National  Association  Exhibition,  &c,  after 
which  Mr.  Wilson  was  introduced  indi- 
vidually to  the  members  present. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Smith,  Mr.  Wilson 
was  unanimously  elected  an  honorary  mem- 
ber. 

Mr.  C.  F.  Richardson  read  a  paper  on 
"  Durable  or  Permanent  Sensitive  Paper."* 

Mr.  Stevens  told  how  he  prepared  his  re- 
touching varnish,  viz.:  To  one  ounce  of  com- 
mon varnish,  add  one  teaspoonful  of  water, 
shake,  and  the  precipitate  will  dissolve  and 
it  is  ready  for  use. 

Pennsylvania  (Philadelphia),  April 
20th. — Met  at  the  rooms  of  the  American 
Photo-Eelief  Printing  Company,  J.  Car- 
butt,  Superintendent. 

The  medal  for  the  best  pictures  of  a  lady 
and  gentleman  was  awarded  to  Henry  F. 
Smith. 

A  letter  was  read  from  Mr.  Shaw,  in  an- 
swer to  the  inquiry  the  Secretary  was  di- 
rected to  make  at  the  last  meeting,  in  ref- 
erence to  the  work  entitled  "  Regnault's 
Chemistry."  Mr.  Shaw  said,  "he  believed 
it  had  been  introduced  in  every  case  ever 
tried  against  his  patent."  Mr.  Clemons 
said  he  had  examined  the  several  cases  that 
had  been  tried,  and  could  find  no  reference 
to  "  Regnault's  Chemistry  "  being  used,  and 
thought  Mr.  Shaw's  answer  was  not  satis- 
factory. 

Mr.  Wilson  exhibited  a  collection  of 
cabinet  pictures  which  he  had  received  in 
competition  for  the  gold  medal  he  offered 

through     the     Philadelphia    Photographer. 

-.. . .—  i . . 

*  See  page  133. 


Among  them  were  the  magnificent  pictures 
by  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  of  San  Francisco, 
to  whom  the  medal  was  awarded.  The  in- 
spection of  such  work  was  a  rare  treat,  and 
was  much  enjoyed  by  the  members  present. 
Among  them  was  one  set  of  pictures  made 
entirely  by  a  lady,  posing,  lighting,  chemi-. 
cal  work  and  all, — Mrs.  E.  N.  Lockwood, 
Ripon,  Wis. 

The  President  gave  notice  that  a  medal 
was  to  be  given  for  the  best  print,  and  those 
who  wished  to  compete  could  procure  the 
negatives  from  the  Treasurer. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Wilson,  Messrs.  Mc- 
Cormick,  Smith,  and  Krips,  were  appointed 
a  committee  to  examine  the  prize  pictures 
he  had  exhibited,  and  fix  upon  a  standard 
which  should  govern  all  offering  pictures 
for  competition  in  the  Association.  That 
no  medal  be  awarded  to  any  that  were  not 
as  good  as  the  one  to  be  selected  by  the 
committee.  One  of  the  pictures  by  Mr.  J. 
Barhydt,  of  Rochester,  N.  Y.,  was  chosen. 

Also  voted  that  hereafter,  in  the  pictures 
for  competition,  retouching,  or  any  legiti- 
mate means  for  improving  the  work,  be  al- 
lowed, that  will  produce  the  best  possible 
results ;  and  that  the  subject  and  style  of 
the  picture  be  left  entirely  at  the  option  of 
the  competitor. 

At  the  close  of  the  meeting,  Mr.  Carbutt 
entertained  the  members  with  a  fine  lantern 
exhibition,  and  also  showed  them  some  of 
the  workings  of  the  photo-relief  process. 

Indiana. — The  Secretary  of  the  Photo- 
graphic Society  at  Indianapolis  says  : 

"The  last  two  regular  monthly  meetings 
of  the  Indianapolis  Photographic  Associa- 
tion were  among  the  most  interesting  ones 
that  the  Society  has  ever  had ;  but,  owing 
to  the  fact  that  they  owed  their  interest 
largely  to  illustrations  accompanying  the 
discussions,  which  of  course  cannot  be  given 
in  the  Photographer,  I  shall  not  attempt  to 
inflict  the  'minutes'  upon  your  readers,  but 
merely  ask  you  to  say  to  them  that  the 
Indianapolis  Photographic  Association  '  is 
still  alive  and  kicking.'  The  subjects  dis- 
cussed were  respectively  '  Lighting  and  Pos- 
ing,' and  '  Printing  and  Toning.'  " 

A  New  Association.— There  seems  to 
be  an  arousing  among  the  photographers  of 


158 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Brooklyn  and  New  England,  to  a  sense  of 
their  interests  in  the  matter  of  the  so-called 
"Shaw  Silver-saving  Process."  We  have 
been  hanging  at  their  doors  and  rattling  at 
their  latches  until  we  had  to  turn  away  in 
despair,  unable  to  think  otherwise  than  that 
they  were  all  asleep.  They  are  now  awake, 
although  we  fear  it  is  not  doing  them  much 
good. 

In  Brooklyn,  New  York,  "an  indigna- 
tion meeting"  was  held  recently,  and  a 
series  of  resolutions  were  adopted.  The  pub- 
lication of  them  in  a  daily  paper  has,  we 
understand,  caused  Mr.  Shaw  to  sue  those 
whose  names  were  attached  to  them,  for 
libel,  and  we  believe  cross-suits  have  been 
instituted  against  Mr.  Shaw.  We  cannot 
say  more  as  to  this  until  we  learn  more  of 
the  facts,  except  to  add  that  it  is  a  penal 
offence  in  the  eyes  of  the  United  States  law 
for  parties  to  combine  against  a  patent.  It 
is  not  the  right  way. 

Next  we  have  an  invitation  card  to  a 
meeting  of  the  "  photographers  of  New 
York,  Brooklyn,  Providence,  Hartford, 
Norwich,  and  other  places,  to  devise  ways 
and  means  to  protect  ourselves  against  the 
demands  of  Shaw,  and  his  patent  silver- 
saving  process." 

This  meeting  was  held,  and  the  following 
officers  elected  :  J  K.  Bundy,  New  Haven, 
President ;  E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk,  Vice- 
President;  D.  P.  Kamsdell,  New  Haven, 
Secretary ;  F.  W.  Burwell,  New  Haven, 
Treasurer.  A  companion  association  is 
about  to  be  organized  in  Brooklyn  we  un- 
derstand. We  have  no  official  particulars 
from  either  body. 

MATTERS    OF   THE 


Membership  costs  $2 ;  annual  dues,  $4. 
Life  membership,  $25,  and  no  dues. 

All  remittances  of  back  dues,  and  fees 
and  dues  for  new  members,  should  be  made 
to  the  Permanent  Secretary,  Edward  L. 
Wilson,  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Phila- 
delphia. 


.  $431 

40 

5 

00 

3 

00 

1 

00 

3 

00 

5 

00 

5 

00 

Life  Member  received  in  April,  David 
Ginter,  Conneautville,  Pa. 

It  will  be  seen  by  reference  to  the  pro- 
ceedings of  the  Executive  Committee  that 
the  fees  for  life  membership  are  to  be 
raised,  and  we  would  suggest  to  photog- 
raphers the  expediency  of  coming  in  now. 

Contributions  to  the  Debt  Fund : 
Heretofore  acknowledged, 
E.  H.  Train,  Helena,  Montana,     . 
E.  R.  Curtiss,  Madison,  Wis., 
J.  Paul  Martin,  Boone,  Iowa, 
W.  V.  Ranger,  Syracuse,  N.  Y.,   . 
J.  H.  Samson,  Portland,  Maine,   . 
Cramer,  Gross  &  Co.,  St.  Louis,  Mo., 

$453  40 

Regulations  for  Exhibitors  and  Members, 
next  month. 

Pay  your  dues!     Do. 

To  Frame  Manufacturers. — Eeferring  to 
the  article  on  page  46  of  our  February 
issue  by  Mr.  C.  D.  Mosher,  headed  "A 
Good  Suggestion,"  we  would  say  that  an 
effort  is  under  way  to  carry  out  the  project 
proposed  there  by  Mr.  Mosher.  The  money 
necessary  for  the  premiums  must  be  raised 
by  private  subscription,  and  all  parties 
favoring  it  are  requested  to  confer  with  Mr. 
C.  D.  Mosher,  951  Wabash  Avenue,  Chi- 
cago.    Further  particulars  next  month. 

Get  your  best  work  ready  to  exhibit  at 
Chicago. 

PROCEEDINGS 

OP  THE 

Executive  Committee  of  the  N.  P.  A. 

A  meeting  of  the  Executive  Committee 
was  held  at  the  office  of  the  Philadelphia 
Photographer  on  Wednesday,  April  22d. 
Present,  Messrs.  W.  Irving  Adams,  chair- 
man, A.  Bogardus,  A.  Moore,  William  H. 
Khoads,  and  Edward  L.  Wilson,  Secretary. 

Letters  from  Local  Secretary  Hesler  were 
read,  concerning  the  coming  Exhibition  and 
Convention  at  Chicago;  and  Messrs.  Bo- 
gardus and  Wilson  announced,  that  agree- 
ably to  an  invitation  extended  to  them,  they 
would  visit  Chicago  early  in  May,  in  order 
to  arrange  with  Mr.  Hesler  and  the  Chi- 
cago and  Western  photographers  for  making 
the  coming  Exhibition  the  most  brilliant 
and  successful  one  ever  held. 

Resolutions  were  passed  by  this  commit- 
tee, pertaining  to  the  Exhibition,  which  it 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTO  GEAPHBR, 


159 


is  thought  will  insure  a  hrillinnt  affair,  and 
give  photography  such  a  push  forward  as  it 
has  never  had. 

It  will  incur  unusual  expense  to  carry  out 
the  plans  proposed,  hut  the  Executive  Com- 
mittee undertake  them,  believing  that  the 
members  of  the  Association  will  sustain 
them,  by  paying  their  dues   and  making 


such  contributions  as  they  can  afford,  nov;, 
during  the  month  of  May. 

The  regulations  fcr  exhibitors,  members, 
&c.,  will  be  published  next  month  in  full ; 
and  the  usual  circular  giving  railway  ar- 
rangements, &c,  will  follow. 

Edward  L.  Wilson, 

Secretary. 


The  Shaw  Patent  Reissues.— In  some  way 
or  other  we  learn  that  we  have  created  the  im- 
pression that  there  have  been^w  reissues  of  Mr. 
Shaw's  patent,  while  the  real  fact  is  that  there 
have  been  four  only.  The  original  issue,  and 
four  reissues,  is  what  we  meant  when  we  said 
five.     Please  take  notice. 


Look  out  for  Him. — Mr.  W.  M.  Lockwood 
informs  us  that  "  a  man  by  the  name  of  L.  Fel- 
ton,  alias  La  Felton,  alias  L.  Felong,  alias  L. 
Bierstadt,  claims  to  have  patented  an  '  Adjust- 
able Screen  '  for  the  transmission  of  yellow  light, 
and  is  now  selling  his  screens  in  California." 

Mr.  Lockwood  says  that  said  Felong,  with  his 
numerous  aliases,  has  no  patent,  but  "stole  the 
design  "  from  him,  as  he  was  the  originator  of 
the  idea,  as  published  in  the  Philadelphia  Pho- 
tographer for  October,  1873,  under  the  head  of 
"  Photometry  of  Colors." 

Mr.  Walter  C.  North  informs  us  that  he  has 
sold  his  gallery  to  Mr.  Wilhelm  Fritz,  and  does 
not  intend  to  go  into  business  again  at  present, 
but  will  be  open  to  a  good  engagement  where 
good  work  is  wanted.  Mr.  North  would  be  a 
valuable  acquisition  to  any  gallery  that  could 
secure  his  services. 


Cincinnati  Industrial  Exposition  for  1874 
will  open  on  Wednesday,  September  2d,  and 
continue  until  Saturday,  October  3d.  It  prom- 
ises to  be  the  largest  exposition  ever  held  in  the 
United  States.  We  call  the  attention  of  photog- 
raphers to  it,  and  trust  they  will  not  be  backward 
in  seeing  that  the  photographic  art  is  well  repre- 
sented there. 


The  Franklin  Institute  will  celebrate  the 
fiftieth  year  of  its  foundation  by  an  exhibition 
of  arts  and  manufactures,  to  be  held  in  the  city 
of  Philadelphia,  from  the  6th  to  the  31st  of 
October,  1874.  A  cordial  invitation  is  extended 
to  all  artisans,  mechanics,  manufacturers,  &c., 


throughout  the  United  States,  to  contribute  their 
best  productions,  and  compete  for  the  prizes. 
This  exhibition  is  intended  to  show  the  progress 
of  the  past  fifty  years,  and  nothing  would  be 
more  fitting  than  a  fine  display  of  photographs. 
For  the  photographers  in  the  Atlantic  States,  par- 
ticularly, this  will  doubtless  be  the  best  opportu- 
nity for  an  exhibition  of  some  of  their  best  work 
that  will  occur  during  the  year  after  Chicago. 


Messrs.  A.  A.  Hickox  &  Co.,  of  San  Fran- 
cisco, send  us  a  quarterly  Price  List,  which  will 
be  useful  to  photographers  on  the  Pacific.  They 
have  established  a  factory  for  the  manufacture 
of  gilt  frames  of  all  descriptions.  They  are  well 
stocked  with  the  best  materials,  including  the 
American  Optical  Company's  goods.  They  are 
also  sole  proprietors  of  '■  Sheriff's  Universal 
Camera-Stand." 


"What  we  owe  to  Patents  "  is  the  title  of 
a  pamphlet  by  Mr.  H.  Howson  of  this  city.  Mr. 
Howson  did  good  service  for  the  fraternity  in 
the  Bromide  Patent  contest,  and  is  one  of  the 
best  patent  lawyers. in  the  country.  His  pam- 
phlet is  full  of  useful  information  to  inventors 
and  others  interested  in  this  direction. 


Success  of  a  Philadelphia  Artist. — As  we 
predicted,  a  majority  of  the  prizes  offered  by  Mr. 
Edward  Anthony,  of  New  York,  were  won  by 
subscribers  to  the  Philadelphia  Photographer  ; 
and  two  of  them,  we  are  happy  to  say,  came  to 
this  city,  being  awarded  to  Mr.  F.  Gutekunst 
for  the  best  head  of  a  boy  under  six  years  old, 
and  the  best  head  of  a  girl  under  six  years  old. 
They  are  superb  specimens  of  photography,  and 
an  honor  to  the  artist  who  produced  them. 
While  we  confess  the  gratification  of  a  feeling  of 
local  pride  in  this  matter,  we  also  congratulate 
our  enterprising  townsman  on  his  maintenance 
of  the  high  reputation  he  has  so  long  enjoyed. 


We  have  before  us  the  "  Annual  of  the  Syra- 


k 


160 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


cuse  University,  of  Syracuse,  N.  Y.,  for  1873- 
74."  In  connection  with  this  institution  is  a 
"College  of  Fine  Arts,"  in  which  photography 
is  taught  as  one  of  its  regular  studies.  A  pho- 
tographic studio  is  soon  to  be  provided,  furnished 
with  all  the  latest  improvements  in  the  art. 
Ward  V.  Ranger,  a  member  of  the  N.  P.  A.,  is 
Professor  of  Drawing  and  Professor  of  Photogra- 
phy. We  are  glad  to  call  attention  to  this  rec- 
ognition of  our  art,  and  hope  it  will  not  be  long 
before  such  institutions  will  be  multiplied  all 
over  the  land. 


On  our  recent  trip  to  New  England,  we  had 
the  pleasure  of  being  present  at  the  April  meet- 
ing of  the  Boston  Photographic  Association. 
Among  other  matters  of  interest,  Mr.  T.  R. 
Burnham  exhibited  some  very  fine  large  heads 
from  direct  negatives.  Mr.  Burnham  will  be 
remembered  as  winning  the  $50  prize  we  offered 
several  years  ago. 


Fires. — We  regret  to  learn  that  the  galleries 
of  W.  J.  Rawlins  &  Co.,  Wooster,  Ohio,  and  G. 
K.  Sherman,  Elgin,  111.,  were  destroyed  by  fire 
on  Monday  morning,  March  26th.  That  of  Raw- 
lins &  Co.  was  a  new  gallery,  and  said  to  be  one 
of  the  most  complete  in  the  State.  Mr.  Sherman 
says  his  loss  is  about  $1000  above  his  insurance, 
but  "will  be  at  work  again  in  a  few  days.'' 
Also  Mr.  Well.  G.  Singhi,  Bingham,  N.  Y.,  we 
are  sorry  to  learn  has  suffered  a  similar  misfor- 
tune, his  gallery  being  completely  burned  on 
Saturday,  April  18th,  1874. 


Messrs.  L.  M.  Melander  &  Brother  have 
opened  a  new  gallery  at  No.  88  North  Clark 
Street,  Chicago.      We  wish  them  success. 


Griswold's  Compositions  should  not  be  over- 
looked by  our  readers.  Any  one  can  sell  them. 
All  should  study  them,  for  it  is  our  belief  that 
any  one  pushing  this  style  of  picture,  either  for 
the  album  or  the  stereoscope,  will  make  them 
pay.  A  catalogue  of  them  is  given  in  the  adver- 
tising pages. 


Messrs.  Smith  &  Courtney,  of  Canton,  Ohio, 
present  us  their  compliments  in  a  very  neat  cir- 
cular, from  which  we  learn  that  they  have  formed 
a  copartnership  for  the  practice  of  photography 
in  all  its  branches,  and  invite  their  friends  and 
the  public  to  an  inspection  of  their  work.  They 
have  our  best  wishes. 


We  know  how  to  sympathize  with  those  who 
suffer  from  fire  or  water,  and  call  attention  to 
our  advertised  list  of  books  by  the  wet  process. 


We  have  on  our  table  a  finely-printed  Cata- 


logue and  Price  List  from  Mr.  Romain  Talbot  of 
Berlin.  It  contains  a  sample  sheet  of  his  albu- 
men paper. 


We  have  samples  of  their  work  from  Messrs. 
Lon  M.  Neely,  Muncie,  Ind.,  and  from  Mr.  J. 
B.  Medlar,  Racine,  Wis.,  all  showing  good  prog- 
ress. 


Pictures  Received. — From  R.  Benecke,  St. 
Louis,  a  fine  lot  of  views  on  the  Kansas  Pacific 
Railway,  8x10  size  ;  also  one  mammoth  of  the 
new  bridge  at  St.  Louis.  A  number  of  fine  genre 
pictures,  stereos,  from  F.  G.  Weller,  Littleton, 
N.  H.  These  are  mostly  familiar  scenes,  repre- 
senting children's  sports,  and  are  gotten  up  with 
a  good  deal  of  taste  and  feeling.  A  lot  of  fine 
stereos  from  Charles  Pollock,  Boston,  being  a 
series  of  views  in  Florida,  photographed  by  C. 
Seaver.  Some  fine  cabinets  from  Bushby  &  Hart, 
Lynn,  Mass.  One  of  these,  particularly,  is  such 
work  as  always  does  us  good  to  look  at.  A  pro- 
file of  an  old  white-haired  gentleman,  in  which 
the  most  exquisite  modelling  and  detail  are  given. 
We  have  the  promise  of  something  for  the  journal 
from  these  gentlemen,  and  we  predict  for  our 
readers  a  treat  when  it  comes.  From  A.  C.  Mc- 
Intyre  &  Co.,  Alexandria  Bay,  Jefferson  County, 
N.  Y.,  a  lot  of  fine  stereos  of  "Scenery  among 
the  Thousand  Islands  on  the  River  St.  Law- 
rence." From  Mr.  A.  Bogardus,  New  York,  sev- 
eral charming  cabinet  pictures  in  different  styles. 
The  effects  are  exquisitely  fine.  From  E.  J. 
Foss,  Boston,  some  very  pretty  cards  mounted  on 
glass.  This  gives  an  enamel  or  sort  of  porcelain 
finish  that  is  very  effective.  From  Mr.  Mason, 
of  Medina,  Ohio,  a  number  of  stereos  of  snow- 
scenes  and  frostwork.  The  following  pictures 
all  show  effort  and  progress  on  the  part  of  the 
authors,  and  they  all  deserve  credit  for  their 
work:  Mr.  H.  Albee,  Marlboro',  Mass.,  cards 
and  cabinets;  C.  C.  Giers,  Nashville,  Tenn., 
cabinets;  H.  L.  Bingham,  San  Antonio,  Texas, 
cabinets  ;  S.  J.  Morrow,  Yankton,  Dakota,  cards, 
showing  his  work  made  several  years  ago  and 
that  at  the  present  time  ;  the  improvement  is 
very  marked  ;  also  stereo  of  Indian  chiefs.  Cards 
also  from  the  following:  J.  Paul  Martin,  Boone, 
Iowa ;  Orin  Mclntyre,  Canton,  Ohio ;  G.  W. 
Tirrell,  Weymouth,  Mass.  ;  J.  M.  Capper,  Troy, 
N.  Y.  ;  Balch,  Boston;  R.  Knowlton  &  Son, 
Minonk  and  Eureka,  111.  ;  E.  H.  Train,  Helena, 
Montana ;  and  from  T.  S.  Johnson,  Chicago, 
cards  and  stereos  of  animals,  very  successful. 
From  G.  W.  Edmondson,  of  Plymouth,  Ohio,  a 
number  of  expressive  stereos,  entitled  "The 
Drinker's  Progress;"  also  a  card  of  "The  No- 
torious Van  Pelt,"  of  whisky  war  fame. 


ADVERTISING  RATES  FOR  SPECIALTIES.— It  will  be  understood  that  matter  under 
this  head  is  n^t  to  be  considered  as  always  having  editorial  sanction,  though  we  shall  endeavor  to  clear  it 
of  anything  tending  to  deceive  or  mislead.  Stockdealers  will  find  this  a  beneficial  mode  of  advertising, 
and  sure  to  pay  largely.  Six  lines,  one  insertion,  $2.00,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words 
to  a  line — in  advance.  Operators  desiring  situations,  no  charge.  Matter  must  be  received  by  the  23rd 
to  secure  insertion.  Advertisers  will  please  not  ask  us  for  recommendations.  >8®=-  We  cannot  undertake! 
to  mail  answers  to  parties  who  advertise.    Please  always  add  your  address  to  the  advertisement. 


The  subscriber  will  dispose  of  the  following 
articles,  for  want  of  use.  One  4-4  Usener  lens, 
selected  by  myself,  warranted  fine  ;  one  1-2  size 
French  lens  made  by  Gasc  &  Charconnet,  fine  ; 
one  4-4  mahogany  view  and  portrait  box,  double 
swing-back,  fine  and  in  good  condition  ;  one  2 
tube  box,  swing-back,  for  plates  4i  x6J,  2  hold- 
ers, good  ;  one  sliding  card  box,  Peace's  make, 
4  card  and  J  holders ;  two  4-4  plain  boxes,  with 
holders  considerably  worn ;  one  large  camera 
stand,  Peace's  make  ;  two  backgrounds  on  frames 
8  x  S,  heavy  castors;  one  circular  platform,  on 
castors  4^  feet  in  diameter,  covered  with  carpet ; 
one  Knell's  fringed  chair;  one  8-10  covered 
rubber  field  bath  ;  one  4-4  porcelain  bath  ;  two 
pieces  canton  matting,  each  10x14  feet,  good; 
one  letter  copying  press,  11x17  inches. 
Address  William  H.  Rhoads, 

1800  Frankford  Road,  Philada,  Pa. 


To  Landscape  Photogra- 
phers.— Please  remember, 
during  the  coming  season, 
that  we  are  in  the  market 
constantly  for  the  purchase 
of  good  Stereoscopic  Nega- 
tives of  interesting  American 
Views.  Send  proofs  and 
prices  of  negatives  to  Ben- 
erman  &  Wilson,  Photo. 
Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

The  Stereograph  Book,  adapted  to  the  com- 
plete preservation  and  convenient  arrangement 
of  the  pictures  in  the  most  compact  form,  Prof. 
Charles  F.  Himes,  Ph.D.,  Inventor,  is  a  book 
made  after  the  plan  suggested  by  Prof.  Himes  in 
the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  for  January, 
1874.  Price,  50  cents.  Dealers  and  stereoscopic 
publishers  supplied  on  good  terms. 

Benerman  &  Wilson,  Publishers,  Phila. 


Griswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

To  View  Photographers. — For  sale  cheap, 
Zentmayer  lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six 
combinations,  from  2£  to  18  inch  focus ;  Zent- 
mayer &  Willard  stereoscopic  tubes  ;  also  camera 
boxes,  tripods,  &c.     Address  or  apply  to 

James  MacGregor, 
257  Fulton  Street,  Brooklyn. 


Negatives  of  the  Yosemite  Valley,  Niagara, 
Sierra  Nevadas,   &c,  for  sale.     J.  J.  Reilley's 
make.     Proofs  and  prices  supplied  by 
Benerman  &  Wilson, 

Photo.  Publishers,  Philada. 


Griswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Special  and  Important  Notice  to  Photog- 
raphers.— All  photographers  have  a  right  to 
use  Entrekin 's  Patent  Oscillating  Enamelers  for 
burnishing  their  photographs,  for  which  I  hold 
a  patent  for  seventeen  years.  We  do  not  resort 
to  advertising  dodges  in  order  to  sell  them.  They 
sell  at  sight.  We  can,  do,  and  will  protect  all 
who  may  use  them,  and  there  is  no  necessity  for 
being  alarmed  at  the  insinuating  advertisements 
that  may  appear  from  time  to  time.  A  patent 
for  a  hot-roller  press  was  granted  several  years 
ago.  We  do  not  claim  that,  but  we  do  claim  all 
the  improvements  we  have  made  both  in  the 
machine  and  in  the  results.  Compare  for  your- 
self. Wm.  G.  Entrekin, 

Patentee  of  the  Oscillating  Bnameler, 
Manayunk,  Philada.,  Pa. 

The  Rapid  Photo-Washer 
will  wash  your  prints  in  ten 
minutes. 

Health  Lift. — See  advertisement,  and  also 
our  editorial  next  month.  See  one  in  the  office 
of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 


Any  person  having  any  claim  against  J.  H. 
Dampf,  please  present  them  for  adjustment  to 
J.  H.  Dampf,  Corning,  N.  Y. 


Copies  of  the  Photogra- 
phic World"  for  June,  Au- 
gust, and  December,  1872, 
wanted.  50  cents  per  copy 
paid  for  them  at  the  office  of 
the  "  Philadelphia  Photog- 
rapher."         

For  Sale. — A  newly  fitted  gallery  in  a  good 
business  town,  with  two  railroads  and  good 
country  round  ;  must  be  sold  by  the  first  of  June. 
Cheap,  and  terms  easy.     Address 

J.  H.  Bagley,  Tioga,  Pa. 


USE  WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


For  Sale. — The  finest,  most  pleasant,  and 
most  completely  fitted  gallery  in  New  England. 
Established  nearly  fifteen  years.  Population  of 
town,  18,000  to  20,000  ;  splendid  back  country, 
and  surrounded  by  large  factory  villages.  Satis- 
factory reasons  for  selling.     Address 

Photographer, 
Lock  Box  1654,  Norwich,  Conn. 


To  Landscape  Photogra- 
phers.— Please  remember, 
during  the  coming  season, 
that  we  are  in  the  market 
constantly  for  the  purchase 
of  good  Stereoscopic  Nega- 
tives of  interesting  American 
Views.  Send  proofs  and 
prices  of  negatives  to  Ben- 
erman  &  Wilson,  Photo. 
Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Wanted — An  energetic  partner  with  $2500 
cash,  or  more,  in  a  good  flourishing  gallery  in  one 
of  the  handsomest  cities  of  the  Union.  Would 
sell  out  entire,  but  prefer  a  partner.     Address 

"  32,"   care  Benerman  &  Wilson,  Philada. 


See  advertisement  of   Rapid 
Photo-Washer. 


For  Sale — at  a  bargain,  to  any  photographer 
who  can  do  thoroughly  good  and  artistic  work — 
one-half  interest  in  a  popular,  centrally  located 
gallery  in  Ithaca,  N.  Y.     Lease  runs  six  years. 

Address  Albert  J.  Purdt, 

P.  0.  Box  797,  Ithaca,  N.  Y. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

For  Sale. — One  of  the  leading  photograph 
galleries  in  the  Middle  States.  A  cash  purchaser 
can  get  a  great  bargain.  For  particulars,  ad- 
dress C.  W., 

Care  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co. 


Newell's  Baths  and  Dishes 
having  been  indorsed  by  the 
trade,  have  been  placed  in 
the  hands  of  all  stockdealers 
for  sale.  Please  inquire  for 
them. 

Wanted. — A  good  photographer,  with  $1500 
capital,  to  take  a  one-half  interest  in  one  of  our 
best  galleries  (worth  four  times  the  amount).  A 
rare  business  opportunity  for  a  No.  1  operator. 
Address,  immediately,  "Energetic," 

Care  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co. 

USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


|1THE0.J.HARBACM,# 


,  . V  ENCLOSE  STAMPER  CATALOGU  E 


MAGIC  LANTERNS  AND  SLIDES  WANTED. 

March's  Sciopticon,  Stereo-Panopticon,  pair 
Marcy's  Sciopticons,  and  two  pairs  Oxy-Calcium 
Stereoptieons,  for  sale  low.     Address 

Theo.  J.  Harbach. 


If  you  want  to  improve  your 
work  and  save  time  get  the 
Rapid   Photo-Washer. 

Photo.  Car  for  Sale. — Firs'-class,  and  well 
accoutred.     For  terms  and  description,  address 
E.  W.  Blake,  Phillipsburg,  N.  J. 


Wanted. — Agents  to  travel  through  the  seve- 
ral states.  None  need  apply  except  practical 
photographers,  and  those  acquainted  with  the 
use  of  the  solar  camera.     Apply  to 

H.  L.  Emmons,  Baltimore,  Md. 

SITUATIONS    WANTED. 

(No  charge  for  advertisements  under  t-his  head: 

limited  to  four  lines.     Inserted  once  only, 

unless  by  request.) 

4®=*  We  cannot  have  letters  directed  to  our  care 

unless  the  parties  send  for  them,  and  send  stamps  to 

pay  postage.    We  cannot  undertake  to  mail  them ; 

please  do  not  request  it. 

By  an  operator.  Thorough  knowledge  of  all 
branches.  Thirteen  years'  experience.  AVith 
reference.  Address  H.  L.,  care  Philadelphia. 
Photographer. 

In  some  good  place  to  work  this  summer,  wages 
not  so  much  of  an  object  as  to  give  good  satis- 
faction to  the  firm.  Address  C.  J.  Appleby, 
Watts  Flats,  Chaut.  County,  N.  Y. 

In  a  good  gallery  ;  can  work  at  all  branches, 
but  not  perfect  in  any  ;  have  worked  three  years 
at  the  business.  Address  Peter  Williamson,  Box 
35,  St.  Johns,  Mich. 

By  a  young  man  to  learn  the  photographic 
business  ;  good  references  given.  Address,  giving 
terms  and  particulars,  S.  P.  Large,  Putnam,  0. 

As  operator.  Has  had  seven  years'  experience 
in  the  business.  Address  Freadell,  30  Parkman 
Street,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

As  operator,  assistant,  or  to  do  general  work. 
Address  J.  A.  Sehaffer,  Box  175,  Tamaqua,  Pa. 

As  a  first-class  printer  and  toner.  Address  J. 
A.  Robertson,  care  A.  Tinipe,  Artist,  Second  St., 
Davenport,  Iowa. 

A  first-class  operator  and  retoucher,  at  present 
engaged  in  a  leading  gallery,  is  open  for  an  en- 
gagement. References  and  specimens  sent  on 
application  to  Alfred  Billows,  Ottawa,  La  Salle 
County,  Ills. 

By  a  young  lady  as  retoucher,  and  to  wait  on 
the  reception  room,  in  New  York  or  Brooklyn. 
Address  S.  M.  J.,  77  Christopher  St.,  New  York. 

VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


By  a  young  man  of  steady  habits,  as  an  assist- 
ant operator  and  printer.  One  year's  experience. 
Address,  stating  your  own  terms,  "Photogra- 
pher," Box  157,  Mechanicville,  Sar  Co.,  N.  Y. 

By  a  lady  in  a  photograph  gallery,  either  as 
printer  and  toner,  retoucher,  or  to  attend  in  the 
reception  room  ;  is  competent  to  fill  any  of  these 
positions.  Address  Lizzie  M.  Jones,  care  0.  B. 
Parken,  West  Meridan,  Conn. 

By  a  first  class  operator  and  retoucher.  Open 
for  an  engagement  from  May  1st,  at  reasonable 
salary,  or  would  run  a  gallery  on  shares.  Ad- 
dress "Photographer,''  Box  49,  Indiana,  Pa. 

By  an  A  No.  1  operator  and  retoucher,  India 
ink,  crayon,  and  water  colorist ;  would  take 
charge  of  gallery,  or  on  shares.  Address  Geo. 
M.  Groh,  Riehwood,  Union  County,  Ohio. 

As  printer  at  a  summer  resort  the  coming  sea- 
son ;  will  assist  at  operating.  Address  A.  H. 
Atwood,  West  Troy,  N.  Y. 

By  an  artist  in  a  first-class  gallery,  to  work  in 
ink,  water  colors,  and  negative  retouching.  Ad- 
dress Artist,  81  Breckenridge  St.,  Buffalo,  N.  Y. 

By  a  first-class  retoucher  and  crayonist.  Ad- 
dress M.  E.  Torrey,  P.  0.  Drawer  254,  Kalama- 
zoo, Mich,  , 

By  a  yound  lady  in  a  photographic  gallery,  to 
attend  reception  room.  Address  Kate  Cameron, 
2143  N.  Fourth  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

As  an  operator,  printer,  or  toner.  Can  give 
good  references.  Address  J.  A.  Robertson, 
Rock  Island,  Rock  Island  County,  III. 

SOCIETY   CALENDAR. 

{Published  for  the  convenience  of  Visiting  Pho- 
tographers and  those  desiring  to  correspond.) 

4®=*  This  Calendar  is  published  free  to  the  Socie- 
ties, and  we  shall  feel  obliged  for  notice  of  any  changes 
in  time  of  meeting  or  in  the  officers,  also  to  add  any 
we  have  overlooked. 

Boston  Photographic  Association. — At  J.  W. 
Black's  studio,  the  first  Friday  of  each  month. 
E.  J.  Foss,  President;  C.  H.  Danforth,  Secre- 
tary, 27  Central  Square,  Cambridgeport. 

Photographic  Section  of  the  American  Insti- 
tute, New  York. — At  the  Institute  rooms,  the 
first  Tuesday  of  each  month.  H.  J.  Newton, 
President ;  Oscar  G.  Mason,  Secretary,  Bellevue 
Hospital. 

German  Photographic  Society,  New  York. — 
At  Nos.  64  and  66  East  Fourth  Street,  New 
York,  every  Thursday  evening.  W.  Kurtz,  Presi- 
dent ;  Edward  Boettcher,  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, 79  Newark  Avenue,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 


Brooklyn  Photographic  Art  Association, 
Brooklyn,  N.  Y. — Fourth  Tuesday  in  each  month, 
at  179'  Montague  Street.  Rev.  Dr.  C.  H.  Hall, 
President;  Chas.  E.  Bolles,  Cor.  Secretary. 

Maryland  Photographic  Association,  Balti- 
more.— At  rooms  of  C.  A.  Wilson,  7  North 
Charles  Street,  first  Thursday  in  each  month. 
N.  H.  Busey,  President ;  G.  0.  Brown,  Secretary, 
Baltimore,  Md. 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia. — At  No. 
520  Walnut  Street,  third  floor,  first  Wednesday 
of  each  month.  J.  C.  Browne,  President;  E. 
Wallace,  Jr.,  Secretary,  1130  Spruce  Street. 

Pennsylvania  Photographic  Association,  Phil- 
adelphia,.— At  the  galleries  of  the  members.  H- 
C.  Phillips,  President;  R.  J.  Chute,  Secretary, 
Office  Philadelphia  Photographer.   Third  Friday. 

Photographic  Association  of  the  District  of 
Columbia,  Washington,  D.  C. — E.  J  Pullman, 
President;  C.  M.  Bell,  Secretary,  459  Pennsyl- 
vania Ave  ,  Washington.   First  Tuesday,  monthly. 

Indiana  Photographic  Association. — At  Indi- 
anapolis, first  Wednesday  monthly.  J.  Perry 
Elliott,  President ;  D.  0.  Adams,  Secretary,  In- 
dianapolis. 

Photographic  Association  of  Western  Illinois. — 
At  Galesburg,  first  Wednesday  of  October,  Janu- 
ary, April,  and  July.  S.  T.  Bryan,  President  ; 
J.  F.  Barker,  Secretary,  Galesburg. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association. — At  rooms 
of  C.  W.  Stevens,  158  State  Street,  first  Wednes- 
day evening  of  each  month.  G.  A.  Douglas, 
President ;  0.  F.  Weaver,  Secretary,  158  State 
Street. 

Chicago  Photographic  Institute,  Chicago. — 
1st  Monday,  monthly,  at  Chicago  Art  Institute. 
A.  Hesler,  President ;  L.  M.  Melander,  Secre- 
tary, Chicago. 

Buffalo  Photographic  Association. — At  Buffa- 
lo, the  first  Wednesday  evening  of  each  month. 
J.  Samo,  President;  Jennie  M.  Crockett,  Sec'y. 


mm$ 


ST^PAlfL^M/MM 


GEO.    KNELL, 


MANUFACTURER  OF 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  POSING  CHAIRS  AND  LOUNGES,  &. 


ALSO, 


SOFA-BEDS,  and  all  kinds  of  ADJUSTABLE  CHAIRS, 

ALWAYS  ON  HAND, 
No.  155  NORTH  FOURTH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


T  H  E 


In  order  that  photographers  may  have  an  early  opportunity  of  studying  the  very  elegant 
pictures  from  negatives  which  have  been  sent  to  us  in  competition  for  our 


COLD 


EDAL 


we  shall  publish  them  for  sale.  There  are  THIRTY  PICTURES  IN  A  SET — of  men, 
women,  and  children — and  the  following  is  a  catalogue  of  them,  numbered  in  the  order  in 
which  the  negatives  were  received. 


1  A.  N.  Hardy,  Boston,  Mass. 

2  J.  McClure  &  Co.,  St.  John,  N.B. 

3  D.  Ginter,  Conneautville,  Pa. 

4  W.  N.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 

5  F.  B.  Clench,  Lockport,  N.  Y. 

6  Theo.  Nieberg,  St.  Marys,  0. 

7  C.  Chadbourne,  Toledo,  0. 

8  E.  H.  Alley,  Toledo,  0. 

9  B.  Gray,  Bloomington,  111. 

10  C.  D.  Mosher,  Chicago,  111. 

11  E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk,  Conn. 


12  N.  H.  Busey,  Baltimore,  Md. 

13  M.  T.  Carter,  Worcester,  Mass. 

14  W.  W.  Whiddit,  Newburg,  N.  Y. 

15  L.  G.  Bigelow,  Williarnsport,  Pa. 

16  G.  M.  Elton,  Palmyra,  N.  Y. 

17  I.  Saunders,  Alfred  Centre,  N.  Y. 

18  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  San  Fran- 

cisco, Cal. 

19  Forrester  Clark,  Pittsfield, 

Mass. 

20  Otto  Lewin,  New  York  City. 


21  F.  L.  Stuber,  Bethlehem,  Pa. 

22  D.  T.  Burrill,   North   Bridge- 

water,  Mass. 

23  J.  Barhy'Dt,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

24  Albright  Bros.,  Wooster,  O. 

25  F.  S.  Crowell,  Mt.  Vernon,  O. 

26  Trask  &  Bacon,  Philadelphia. 

27  G.  W.  Harris,  Lancaster,  N.  Y. 

28  B.  Williams,  Tunkhannock,  Pa. 

29  F.  Gutekunst,  Philadelphia. 

30  J.  Inglis,  Montreal,  Can. 


It  will  be  seen  that  a  number  of  our  best  photographers  have  competed. 

Sm*  THE  AWARD  WAS  MADE  FOR  NO.  18. 

Three  negatives  or  more  were  sent  by  each  competitor.     The  sets  include  one  example 
from  each  competitor.     All  the  duplicates  may  be  had  to  order. 
The  prints  are  supplied  at  the  following  rates  : 

A  Set  of  Thirty  in  the  Improved  Photograph  Cover, $4  OO 

"  without        "  "  "        3  75 

Selections,  per  dozen, 2  00 


EVERY  OPERATOR  &  EVERY  PRINTER  SHOULD  GET  AND  STUDY  THEM. 


Nothing  so  really  elegant  was  ever  offered  for  sale. 

Orders  filled  in  turn. 

BEBTERMAN  &  WILSON,  &JS&0  7th  &  Cherry  Sts.,  Phila. 


IMPROVED 


PHOTOGRAPH  COVERS 


Fig.  2. 
Fig.  1. 

Frequent  inquiries  for  something  at  a  much  lower  price  than  an  album,  for  the  holding 
together  and  preservation  of  photographs,  has  induced  us  to  manufacture  an  article  which 
we  think  will  meet  the  want. 

IT  SERVES  ALL  THE  PURPOSES  OF  AN  ALBUM,  FOR 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Portraits, 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Landscapes, 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Photographs  of  any  hind, 

MAY  BE  NEATLY  AND  CHEAPLY  BOUND  IN  THESE  COVERS. 

They  are  made  with  expanding  backs,  so  that  from  six  to  twenty-four  pictures  may  be 
inserted  in  one  cover.  The  pictures  are  mounted  in  the  usual  way,  and  then  strips  of  linen, 
or  strong  paper,  of  the  proper  width,  are  pasted  on  one  edge,  by  which  the  picture  is  inserted 
and  held  in  place  in  the  cover  by  a  paper  fastener.  Fig.  1  represents  the  cover,  with  the 
perforations  in  the  back,  through  which  the  spreading  clasps  of  the  paper  fastener  bind  the 
whole  together.  These  are  so  easily  inserted  or  removed,  that  pictures  are  readily  put  in  or 
taken  out  at  any  time.  Fig.  2  represents  the  picture,  with  the  guard  pasted  on  ready  for 
insertion.  The  arrangement  is  simple,  and  we  are  sure  will  be  readily  comprehended.  For 
binding  together  views  of  your  town  or  city,  or  portraits  of  celebrities,  they  are  very  neat. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  sizes  and  prices,  without  cards : 


For  Photograph. 

Card  Size,  . 
Cabinet  Size, 
5-8  " 

4-4  " 

8-10  " 


Per  dozen.  Per  hundred. 

$1.50 $10.00 

2.25 13.50 

3.00 18.00 

6.00 36.00 

7.50 45.00 


Larger  or  special  sizes  made  to  order.     Furnished  with  card  board  at  best  rates.     Samples 

mailed  at  dozen  price. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC 


BOOKS 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALMOST  NOTHING. 

"A  FEW  MORE  LEFT." 


BARGAINS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 


The  Late  Fire 

In  Sherman's  Building  having  caused  a  portion  of  our  stock  of  Books  and 
Magazines  to  be  deluged  with  water,  we  offer  the  following  bargains  to  opera- 
tors, assistants,  employers,  &c. : 


43  Copies  Dr.  Vogel's  Reference-Book, 


47 

26 

50 

6 

14 

12 

89 

60 

34 

40 

16 

800 

600 


Anderson's  Comic  All-my-Knack  (paper), 

"  "  (cloth), 

How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph,       " 

"  "         "  "  (paper) 

Carbon  Manual  (cloth), 
Photographic  Mosaics  (cloth),     . 
"  "         (paper),    . 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography, . 
Year-Book  of  Photography,  .     . 
Glimpses  at  Photography, 
How  to  Paint  Photographs  (cloth). 
Photographic  World   (1871  and  1872), 
Philadelphia  Photographer  (1865  to  1874), 


$0  50 
20 
30 
20 
10 
50 
30 
25 
25 
25 
50 
75 
10 
15 


The  above  goods  were  WET  and  not  burned.  They  are  now  dry,  and  for 
all  practical  uses  as  good  as  new  books,  but  so  stained  that  we  cannot  sell  them 
for  new,  and  we  offer  them  for  one  more  month,  at  the  above  rates. 

LET  THE  ORDERS  COME  NOW  !  One  dollar  will  buy  lots  of  useful 
reading!     A  good  chance  to  fill  up  back  volumes  of  our  Magazines. 

State  your  orders  explicitly. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photographic  Publishers, 

SEVENTH  &  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


DR'VOGB  L'S 

HAND  BOOK 


OF 


OTOGRAPHY. 


THE  SECOND   EDITION 

Is  in  Press  and  will  be  ready  soon. 


SEE  FUTURE  ADVERTISEMENTS. 


FOR    SALE    BY    ALL    DEALERS. 


B.ENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers. 

PHILADELPHIA. 


The  Blood  is  tie  Life!   Perfect  Circulation  thereof  is  Perfect  Health, 

THE  HEALTH-LIFT 

REDUCED  TO  A  SCIENCE. 

A  Thorough  Gymnastic  System  in  Ten  Minutes  Once  a  Day. 

Cumulative  Exercise,  popularly  known  as  the  Health-Lift,  or  Lifting-Cure, 

whilst  improving  the  health,  will  double  the  actual  strength  in  three  months;  occu- 
pies only  ten  minutes  once  a  day ;  furnishes  a  safer  and  more  valuable  mode  of  physical 
training  than  the  gymnasium,  or  any  other  system ;  it  is  adapted  to  both  ladies  and  gen- 
tlemen, requiring  no  change  of  dress  ;  does  not  fatigue  or  exhaust,  but,  by  equalizing  and 
improving  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  refreshes  and  invigorates ;  and  finally,  is  daily 
recommended  by  leading  physicians,  to  those  suffering  from  want  of  tone  and  vigor,  or  from 
dyspepsia  and  other  forms  of  indigestion,  or  from  the  various  diseases  of  the  nervous  system, 
or  from  the  classs  of  ailments  caused  by  torpor,  or  congestion  of  the  liver — in  short,  it  is 
warmly  approved  by  the  Medical  Profession  as  the  most  efficient,  safe,  and  simple 
means  of  preventing  diseases  arising  from  sedentary  habits.  In  brief,  it 
consists  of  a  series  of  gradually  increasing  muscular  efforts,  alternating  with  appropriate 
rests. 

Its  rationale  may  be  thus  summed  up  :  It  is  a  harmonious  and  simultaneous  exercise  of 
the  whole  body;  every  muscle  is  brought  into  use,  and  each  in  proportion  to  its  relative 
strength.  So  distributed  is  this  effort,  that  there  is  no  danger  of  injurious  strain  or  rupture. 
The  strength  is  augmented  and  equalized,  and  thus  the  individual  becomes  uniformly  strong, 
and  consequently  healthy.  It  puts  a  man  in  possession  of  himself.  It  is  a  true  exercise,  a 
correct  developing  agency,  and,  in  many  instances,  a  safe  method  of  cure. 

These  results  may  be  secured  by  the  use  of  the  "Reactionary  Lifter,"  which  com- 
mends itself  for  cheapness,  durability,  and  portability,  its  elegance  and  uniqueness  of  con- 
struction, as  well  as  its  ease  and  accuracy  of  adjustment. 


THE  REACTIONARY  LIFTER. 

This  form  of  exercise  is  especially  adapted  to  Professional  Men,  Students, 
Ladies,  and  all  xvho  lead  a  sedentary  life. 

Full  particulars  sent  free  on  application  to  the 

HEALTH  LIFT  COMPANY, 

46  East  14th  Street,  New  York. 

FHILADELPHTA  AGENCIES, 

226  South  Third  Street,  and  1516  Chestnut  Street. 


BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO., 

159  Washington  St.,  Boston, 

Importers  and  Sole  Agents  in  the  United  States  for  the  celebrated 

Voigtlander  &  Son,  and  Darlot  Lenses 

For  Portraits,  Views,  and  Stereoscopic  Work  of  all  sizes.     Send  for  Price  List. 


TRY  OUR  NEW  STEREOSCOPIC  LENSES 

IP  YOU  WANT  THE  BEST.     PRICE,  $22  PER  PAIR. 

None  genuine  unless  our  names  are  engraved  on  them. 


ALBUMEN  PAPEES. 


demon's, 
Hovey's, 


Dresden  S.  &  II., 

"       Brilliant. 


AMERICAN  OPTICAL  CO.'S  CAMERA  BOXES 


Black  Walnut  frames, c 


>j  superior  finish. 


f^Q"PT7'Orl    "Rl"IQ'f"irk    "P"PQTY1AQ      Square,   Carved  Rustic,  with  leaf  on  corners.     All 


Sherman  Card  Frames. 
White  Hollywood  Frames. w- 


>j  sizes  up  to  18x22. 

We  have  of  these  three  different  sizes  and  styles  for  the  Card, 
Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 


have  these  in  three  different  styles  of  each  size 
the  Card,  Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 


Stereoscopes,  Prang's  Chromos,  Glass  Baths,  Plain  Paper, 
Porcelain  Ware,  &c. 

And  every  description  of  goods  used  in  the  business,  at  wholesale  and  retail,  at  the  lowest  cash  prices. 

BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO. 


Photographic  Card  Warehouse. 


A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 

MANUFACTURERS, 

No.  18  South  Sixth  St.  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 


EVERYTHING  APPERTAINING  TO  THE   LINE   OF  OUR 

MANUFACTURES  FURNISHED  WITH  CARE 

AND  PROMPTNESS. 


Our  long  experience  in  and  facilities  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods,  and 
familiarity  with  the  peculiar  wants  of  Photographers,  enable  us  to  offer  superior  induce- 
ments to  those  who  may  favor  us  with  their  orders. 


JAMES  F.  MAGEE  &  CO. 

MANUFACTURERS    OF 

PURE 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMICALS, 

No.  108  North  Fifth  Street, 


Stock  Dealers  only  Supplied. 


LANTERN  SLIDES. 


a  wwm  mmmm  mm  waww, 


SELECTED  FROM 


aoasK  *  ycostsgscw  c at ax.q cty^s 


EMBRACING 


Views  of  all  Parts  of  the  World ! 


PLAIN,  COLORED,  AND  00MI0 

LANTERN   SLIDES, 


OF  ALL  KINDS,  AT  LOW  PRICES. 


SCIOPTICONS  AND  LANTERNS  SUPPLIED. 


SELECTIONS     MADE     PERSONALLY. 


ALSO,  GLASS  STEREOSCOPIC   PICTURES, 

A  NEW  AND  BEAUTIFUL  SELECTION  JUST  EECEIVED. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Southwest  eor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Photographic  Publications,  1874. 

Knowing  the  advantages  of  well-written  works  on  Photography  to  our 
readers,  we  issue  our  annual  catalogue,  that  they  may  have  the  opportunity 
of  selecting  the  very  best.  We  always  find  the  photographer  who  reads 
what  is  published  pertaining  to  his  profession,  to  be  the  photographer  who 
succeeds  in  his  business  the  best.  Above  all,  those  who  regularly  and  contin- 
ually receive  a  good  photographic  magazine  are  those  who  are  always  ahead 
with  new  goods,  new  styles,  and  new  information.  We  recommend  an  in- 
vestment in  a  part  or  all  of  the  list  below,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  them  to 
you  on  receipt  of  price. 

CATALOGUE. 


A  The  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

ne  oldest,  best,  and  most  popular  Photographic  Magazine  in  America.  Eleventh  Year.  Please  read  the 
ospectus  on  page  three  of  cover  and  premium  list  opposite.  Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2.50  for  six 
onths,  in  advance.    Current  number,  50  cents.    Specimen  copies,  free. 

B  The  Skylight  and  the  Dark-Room. 

By  Elbert  Anderson,  operator  at  Kurtz's  studio,  New  York.  This  is  the  most  beautiful  and  elaborate 
work  on  the  art  ever  published.  It  contains  nearly  250  pages — large,  square — twelve  photographs  made  by  the 
author  to  illustrate  the  lessons  of  the  work,  and  almost  two  hundred  fine  wood-cuts.  See  advertisements. 
Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  rjostpaid,  $4.00.    A  few  copies  only  left. 

C  Photographic  Mosaics. 

The  1874  edition  excels  all  of  its  eight  older  brethren.  The  list  of  articles  is  made  up  of  original  contribu- 
ti  ons,  written  especially  for  its  pages,  on  all  departments  of  the  art,  whoi  ly  by  practical  men  who  are  only  heard 
from  once  a  year  through  the  persuasion  of  the  editor,  in  this  way.  See  special  advertisement.  146  pages. 
Paper  cover,  50  cents.    Cloth,  $1.    A  few  copies  of  former  editions,  from  1866,  at  same  price. 

D  The  Ferrotyper's  Guide. 

A  new  work  on  the  Ferrotype.    Price.  75  cents. 

E       Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

This  is  not  exactly  a  book,  but  a  collection  of  24  large  Victoria  size  photographic  studies  in  lighting  and 
posing,  made  especially  to  teach  how  to  light  and  pose  ordinary  and  extra-ordinary  subjects  in  all  the  plain, 
fancy,  "  Rembrandt "  and  "  Shadow  "  styles.  It  is  accompanied  by  an  i-xplanatory  key  of  instructions,  together 
with  a  diagram  for  each  picture,  showing  how  the  sitter  and  the  caaierawere  placed  in  the  skylight,  their 
relation  to  the  background,  and  what  blinds  were  opened  and  closed  at  the  time  of  the  sitting.  It  almost 
supplies  a  rule  by  which  you  can  quickly  tell  how  to  manage  every  subject  that  comes  to  you.  The  studies  are 
mounted  on  folding  leaves,  so  that  twelve  can  be  examined  at  once.    Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  $6,  postpaid. 

F  Wilson's  Landscape  Studies. 

An  album  of  landscape  studies  in  style  similar  to  Bigelow's  Album,  containing  ten  5x8  views,  with  the 
formula,  &c,  by  George  Washington  Wilson,  Esq.,  the  renowned  Scotch  landscape  photographer.  A  splendid 
work.    All  gone  and  none  to  be  had. 

G  Handbook  of  the  Practice  and  Art  of  Photography. 

By  Dr.  Vogel.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  in  press. 

H     How  to  Paint  Photographs  in  Water  Colors. 

A  practical  Handbook  designed  especially  for  the  use  of  Students  and  Photographers,  containing  directions 
for  Brush  Work  in  all  descriptions  of  Photo-Portraiture,  Oil,  Water  Colors,  Ink,  How  to  Retouch  the  nega- 
tive, &c.    By  George  B.  Ayres,  Artist.  Third  edition.    Differing  largely  from  previous  editions.    Price,  $2.00. 


I  Pictorial  Effect  in  Photography. 

By  H.  P.  Robinson,  London.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  in  preparation. 

J  How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph. 

This  is  a  fine  little  work  of  48  pages,  written  by  the  wife  of  a  celebrated  New  York  photographer,  for  I  he 
purpose  of  educating  the  public  on  the  all-important  subject  of  sitting  for  a  picture,  it  is  bound  in  cloth  at  00 
cents  per  copy,  and  paper  cover  30  cents. 

K  Lookout  Landscape  Photography . 

By  Prof.  R.  M.  Linn,  Lookout  Mountain,  Tenn.  A  pocket  manual  for  the  outdoor  worker,  and  full  of  good 
for  every  photographer.    75  cents.    Be  sure  to  get  it. 

L      Him&s's  Leaf  Prints;  or,  Glimpses  at  Photography. 

By  Prof.  Charles  F.  Himes,  Ph.D.  Full  of  useful  information  for  the  photographic  printer.  Illustrated 
with  a  whole-size  photograph.    Cloth,  $1.25. 

M  The  American  Carbon  Manual. 

By  Edw.  L.  Wilson.  A  complete  manual  of  the  Carbon  process  from  beginning  to  end.  With  a  fine 
example  by  the  process.    Cloth,  $2.00. 

N        Ayres's  Chart  of  Photographic  Drapery. 

This  is  a  photograph  of  forty-two  pieces  of  cloth,  of  all  the  colors  and  shades,  handsomely  mounted  on  a 
card.  It  should  be  hung  in  every  reception-room,  to  show  your  customers  what  color  dresses  o  wear.  and.  to 
show  you  what  sort  of  backgrounds  and  accessories  to  use.    Price,  $2.00. 

O  The  Photographer  to  His  Patrons. 

A  splendid  little  twelve-page  leaflet,  which  answers  all  vexatious  questions  put  to  you  by  your  sitters,  and 
serves  as  a  grand  advertising  medium.  It  is  for  photographers  to  give  away  to  their  customers.  Send  for  a 
copy  and  an  illustrated  circular.  Over  300,000  already  sold  and  in  use  all  over  the  country.  $20.00  for  1000, 
$35.00  for  2000,  and  so  on.    Printed  and  supplied  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

P  Pretty  Faces. 

A  leaflet  much  smaller  than  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons"  for  the  same  purpose,  but  costing  less,  viz. : 
1000  copies,  $10.00 ;  2000,  $17.50,  and  larger  orders  at  less  rates. 

Q,  The  Year-Booh  of  Photography. 

By  G.  Wharton  Simpson.  English  edition.  Similar  to  Mosaics,  and  pull  of  good,  short,  practical  articles. 
50  cents.    1869, 1870, 1871, 1872,  and  1873  now  on  hand.    1874,  about  January  20th. 

R     Elbert  Anderson' s  Photo-  Comic  Allmyhnach. 

A  complete  Almanac,  full  of  witty  sayings,  jokes,  puns,  stories,  etc.,  etc.  Profusely  illustrated  with  comic 
and  original  sketches,  yet  all  interspersed  with  much  practical  matter  of  value  to  every  photographer.  Price, 
75  cents. 

S  Photographers'  Pocket  Reference- Booh. 

By  Dr  .  H.  Vogel,  of  Berlin.  A  dictionary  of  all  the  terms  used  in  the  art,  and  contains  formulas  for  almost 
every  known  manipulation.  Altogether  different  from  any  work  ever  published.  Cloth,  $1.50.  See  special 
advertisement.    A  splendid,  indispensable  book. 


=***= 


To  save  writing,  photographers  may  order  the  above  of  us  by  the  marginal  letters,  thus,  "  Please  send  us 
one  copy  of  each,  book  A,  B,  K,"  &c,  &c.    Any  of  the  above  sent  post  free  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Benerman  <8  Wilson's  Publications  sold  by  all  Dealers. 


« 


JSHBU.S  SOj,. 


(JLctual  size  of  a  No.  1  Steinheil  Z/vna.) 


NEW  APLANATIC  LENSES, 


GROUP 
LijS 


FOR 


BSCAPES,    and 

GO  PISS. 


We  have  now  a  full  stock  of  these  celebrated  Lenses,  at  the  following  prices  : 


No.  1, 
2, 
"  3, 
4, 
5, 
6, 


1-4  size, 

1-2     '.' 

4-4     " 

8-10  " 
10-12  " 
13-16  " 
Nos.  1  and  2  are  in  matched  pairs  for  Stereoscopic  Work. 


3^  inch  focus, 

$25  00 

51  « 

30  00 

7 

45  00 

ioj-  " 

60  00 

1.31  " 

70  00 

16^  " 

110  00 

"I  always  take  great  pleasure  in  recommending  the  Steinheil  Lenses,  and  you  can  say  almost 
anything  in  their  favor  for  me.  They  possess  all  the  merits  of  higher  priced  lenses,  and  if  I  was 
starting  again  I  should  stock  myself  with  them."  B.  W.  Kilburn. 


THEY  AHE  IN  USE  BY  MOST  LEADING  PH0T0GEAPHERS,  INCLUDING 

GUTEKUNST,   BROADBENT  &  PHILLIPS,  DeMORAT, 

WENDEROTH,  FENNEMORE,  LOTHROP, 

And  many  others,  equally  well  known, 

We  feel  sure  that  at  least  one  of  these  Lenses  is  needful  for  the  successful  prosecution  of  your 
business,  and  so  solicit  your  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  Statks, 

No.  822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


MANUFACTURING  OPTICIAN, 

1314  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia. 

Sole  Manufacturer  of  the  Stereo-Panopticon  and  Artopticon,  warranted  to  be  the  most 
perfect  and  powerful  Magic  Lanterns  made. 


MCALLISTER'S 


PATEUT 


AHTOPTICON 


Each  lantern  is  adjustable  for  use 
with  powerful  coal  oil  light — oxycal- 
cium,  hydro-oxycalcium,  and  oxy- 
hydrogen  lights. 

jgggp^The  coal  oil  lamp  used  gives 
very  much  more  light  than  any  other 
lamp  yet  made. 

Giving  exhibitions  ivith  the  Artoptl- 
con  will  prove  a  profitable  business  for 
a  man  'with  a  small  capital. 

The   STEREO-PArVOPTICOrV    is  an  improved   instrument,' suitable  for  giving 
exhibitions  of  dissolving  views  on  the  largest  scale.     Send  for  printed  description. 


MCALLISTER'S 

PATENT    TINTERS. 

These  tinters  are  used  for  giving  to  magic  lantern  pictures 
various  beautiful  tints  or  colors,  as  blue,  red,  yellow,  green, 
crimson,  &c,  &c.  They  can  be  adjusted  to  the  lantern,  either 
on  the  end  of  the  front  lens,  or  may  be  screwed  to  the  back 
of  the  front  lens-holder,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Stereo-Panop- 
ticon and  Educational  lanterns.  On  the  Artopticon,  they 
are  placed  on  the  end  of  the  front  lens  tube. 

NEW  and  BEAUTIFUL  SLIDES  for  LANTERN  USE  in  LARGE  VARIETY. 

Priced  and  Illustrated  Catalogues  free,  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  stamp. 

W.  MITCHELL  McALLISTER,  1314  Chestnut  St.,  Phila. 


^^    /"  Great  Central 

CASH 


Pure  Chemicals 
A 


o 


CO 

PS 


Photographic 
Warehouse, 


co 

pa 
ft 

ft 
«1 


ft 


fr 


co 
<  pa  ft 

O 


ft  co 
pa 
ft 


p- 


pq 


pa  K 
PQ  eq 
ft 

CO 


ft 

H 

<i  pa 
ft  o 
pa  ' 


Ph    tf 


eq  a  Ph 

i>  <i  <i 

►H  ft  >■ 

&1  s  pa 
o 


g  -<  cb  ft  ft 
^  W  g  o  ^ 

O  o  fc  Pm  <i 


State  St., 


Lowest  Prices 
Guaranteed. 


o 

H 
H 
O 
O 

^  f£ 
^" 

ft  fit 
^  ^  cd 

o  pa  « 
.  o  < 

ft  fc  ft 
O  <1  o 

HH    CO    tz 

o  pa  2 
pagn 

ftg£ 

ft  ft  o 
Ph  ft  ft 


DEALER  IN 


EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  TO 

PHOTOGRAPHY. 


CO 

O 
i— i 

ft 

o 
o 

Q 

ft 

pa 
ft 
< 
> 


ft 
5  ft 

ft  PQ 


NO  MISTAKE! 


TIKE 


BEST  PORTRAIT  LENSES 


_a.:r,:e 


Chas.  F.  Usener's. 


TRY  THEM  and  BE  CONVINCED. 


Charles  Cooper  $  Co., 

WHOLESALE  AGENTS, 

150  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

JOHN   R.  CIiESHEONS, 

IMPORTER  OF 
AND  MANUFACTURER   OF 

ALBUMEN  AND  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPERS. 

PINK  AND  BLUE  ALBUMEN  PAPER  CONSTANTLY  ON  HAND  OR  MADE  TO  ORDER. 

CLEMONS'  NEW  ALBUMEN   PAPER, 

A  superior  article  introduced  into  the  market  about  a  year  ago.  It  is  equal,  if  not  superior  to  any  Paper 
imported ;  the  great  demand  proves  such  to  be  the  case.  It  is  praised  by  all  who  use  it  as  to  its  keeping 
white  during  warm  weather;  also,  for  its  brilliancy  and  toning  qualities,  and  it  is  made  White,  Pink,  and 
Blue.    Sizes  medium,  26  x  40  and  35  x  46. 

CLEMONS'  ARROWROOT  SALTED   PAPER 

Has  stood  the  test  above  all  other  makes  for  the  last  nine  years.  An  article  extensively  used  for  all  Plain 
Solar,  and  Colored  Work.    Sizes,  17%  x  23,  26  x  40,  and  35  x  46. 

Prices  loiver  than  those  of  any  foreign  make. 

CLEMONS'  N.  P.  A.  VARNISH, 

For  Plain  Work  and  Retouching  upon. 

CLEMONS'  GOLDEN  VARNISH, 

For  Intensifying  and  Retouching  upon. 

JOHN  R.  CLEMONS,  Manufacturer, 

915  SAJSTSOM  ST.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


"Make  my  order  thirty  instead  of  twenty.  Lot  last  sent  are  all  gone." — Dr.  E.  Liesegang, 
Dusseldorf,  Germany. 

"Hurry  on  the  Bigelow  Albums  ordered.  We  are  out  and  orders  waiting. "—Piper  &  Carter, 
Lo,idon,  England. 


LIGHTING  AND  POSING. 
SELLS  ALL  OVER  THE  WORLD. 

A  NEW  EDITION  HAS  BEEN  ISSUED  WITH  AN  ENLAKGED  KEY, 

AND  NEARLY  ALL  NEW  STUDIES. 

This   album  brings  lighting  and  posing  down  to  a 
system  at  once  plain,  easy  and  desirable. 

No  good,  intelligent  operator  can  afford 
to  ivork  without  it. 

It  Contains 

24  Victoria  Portrait  Studies 

in  Light  and  Pose, 

WITH  AN  EXPLANATORY  KEY, 

Telling  exactly  HOW  EACH  PICTURE    WAS 

MADE;   WHERE  THE  CAMERA  AND 

THE    SITTER     WERE    PLACED 

when  it  was  made ;  WHA  T  CUR- 
TAINS WERE  OPENED 

in  lighting  the  subject, 
$c,  $c. 

A  diagram  of  the  interior  of  the  skylight  is  given  in  each  case,  telling  the  whole  story.    IT  IS  BOUND 
HANDSOMELY  IN  CLOTH,  OILT. 


NEW  KEY,  ENLARGED. 


NEW  PICTURES. 


'  It  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  aids  to  art  education  which  has  yet  been  presented  to  the  photo, 
portraitist.  Each  print  represents  a  distinct  study  of  pose  and  lighting,  the  widest  variety  of  effects 
being  comprehended.  We  should  be  glad  to  see  it  in  the  hands  of  English  portraitists  generally." — 
Photo.  News. 

"  The  method  is  an  admirable  one  and  Mr.  Bigelow  deserves  credit  for  the  systematic  way  in  which 
he  has  carried  it  out." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

' '  I  confess  that  this  work  has  furnished  me  much  instruction,  particularly  the  manner  in  which, 
by  word  and  picture,  studies  about  light  and  pose  are  explained  and  made  comprehensible." — Dr. 
Vogel. 

"  We  do  not  know  of  anything  ourselves  that  has  been  presented  to  the  trade  which  is  calculated 
to  do  so  much  real  good  as  Bigelow's  Album,  with  the  explanatory  key  to  the  studies.  It  is  an  in- 
valuable guide  to  the  portraitist." — Philadelphia  Photographer. 

It  is  considered  invaluable  by  the  practical  photographers  who  use  it. 


PRICE,  $6.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCKDEALERS. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


HOW  TO   PAINT  PHOTOGRAPHS. 


The  THIRD  EDITION  is  so  different  from  former  ones,  that  it  may  almost  be  said  that  it  is  A  new 

WORK. 

It  Gives  the  Best  and  Freshest  Instructions  to  be  had  on  the  Subject. 

Written  by  a  practical  photographic  colorist,  Mr.  Geo.  B.  Ayres. 

PRICE,  $2.00.     FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Photographers  and  artists  whose  interest  it  is  to  produce  work  in  Water  Colors,  Oil,  India  InK,  or 
who  wish  complete  instructions  in  retouching  negatives,  should  consult  Mr.  Ayres'  capital  work. 

BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Gk    SATJTER 

No.    138   Soutli   Eighth  Street,   Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURER   AND   WHOLESALE   DEALER   IN 


The  attention  of  the  trade  is  particularly  called  to  the  superior  quality  of  our  Glass  and  materials 
and  neatness  of  finish.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand. 

BULLOCK    &    CRENSHAW, 

No.  528  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURERS   AND  IMPORTERS   OF   PURE   CHEMICALS   FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 
IMPORTERS  OF  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN,  APPARATUS,  ETC. 

TRAPP  &  MUNCH'S 


&lfimttn 


Introduced  into  this  country  since  1868  has  become  the  leading  paper,  and  is 
now  better  known  and  more  appreciated  than  any  other  brand. 

That  this  great  success  is  well  deserved  and  due  to  its  excellent  qualities 
may  be  judged  from  the  fact,  that  of  all  the  competitors  of  the  Yienna  Ex- 
hibition, Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  alone  received  the 

^dZEID^.!.,    CD2T   MERIT 

for  Albumenized  Paper. 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALL  THE  STOCKHOUSES. 

WILLY  WALLACH, 

GENERAL  AGENT  FOR  THE  UNITED  STATES, 

41  John  Street,  New  York. 


J 


SCOVILL  MANUFG  CO. 


DEALERS 


III  EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY, 


AND  PROPRIETORS  OP  THE  WORKS  OF  THE 

American  Optical 
Company 

Beg  the  trade  to  remember  that  they  have  removed  from 

No.  4  Beekman  St. 


TO 


BROOME J 
STREET, 


The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 

WHAT  IS  IT? 


TIHE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS  is  a  little  book  or  pamphlet  of  twelve  pages,  the 
1  intention  of  which  is  :  1st.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  say  a  few  words  in  a  kindly  way 
to  those  who  have  photographs  taken,  in  order  that  the  intercourse  between  them  and  their 
photographer  may  be  pleasant  and  result  in  the  most  successful  pictures.  Every  photographer 
knows  that  he  is  constantly  beset  with  a  lot  of  questions,  as  to  the  proper  way  to  dress,  the  best 
time  to  come,  and  so  on,  which  take  a  great  deal  of  his  time  to  answer.  This  little  book  answers 
them  all,  and  the  mere  handing  of  a  copy  to  the  questioner,  which  he  or  she  can  carry  away  and  study 
at  leisure,  serves  as  admirably  as  a  half-hour's  conversation. 

2d.  It  is  a  cheap  mode  of  advertising  What  could  you  want  better  than  to  have  your  business  card 
so  attractive  that  people  will  come  and  ask  for  it,  hand  it  around  from  one  to  another,  discuss  it,  and 
then  keep  it  for  reference?  This  is  what  they  do  with  this  little  "tract."  Witness  what  those  who 
have  tried  it  say  below. 

3d.  It  is  also  intended  to  convey  to  the  public  at  large  the  fact  that  photography  is  not  a  branch  of 
mechanics,  nor  photographers  a  sort  of  mechanic  themselves,  but  that  both  are  entitled  to  respect,  the 
same  as  the  family  physician  or  the  minister ;  that  the  photographer  has  rights  as  well  as  the  public  ; 
that  he  must  be  trusted,  and  that  he  alone  is  responsible  for  his  results.  Moreover,  that  he  must  make 
the  picture  and  not  they. 

How  far  the  work  serves  these  three  ends  the  reader  must  judge  from  the  testimonials  below,  of  a 
few  of  those  who  have  been  using  our  little  publication  in  their  business. 

We  believe  it  will  pay  you  to  use  it,  and  that  you  will  assist  just  that  much  in  elevating  your  art  and 
your  craft,  an  object  which  we  are  all  working  for. 

We  get  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Vatrons''''  up  in  neat  style,  on  the  best  letter  cap  paper,  assorted 
tints,  green,  pink,  and  buff.  Eight  pages  are  devoted  to  the  body  of  the  work,  which  contains  para- 
graphs or  chapters — 1,  on  the  object  of  the  work;  2,  on  photography  ;  3,  when  to  come  ;  4,  how  to 
come;  5,  how  to  dress;  6,  how  to  "behave;  7,  the  children  ;  8,  general  remarks  on  coloring,  copy- 
ing, frames,  prices,  <fcc. 

All  this  is  inclosed  in  a  cover  of  the  same  kind  of  paper,  the  pages  of  which  are  at  the  service  of 
the  photographer  who  orders  them  to  have  printed  thereon  anything  he  may  please,  which  printing 
we  do  without  extra  charge.  Cuts  for  the  covers  we  supply  free.  We  publish  this  leaflet  in  English, 
German,  and  Spanish. 

1000  copies,  cover  included,     .     .  $20  00      I      3000  copies,  cover  included,     .     .  $50  00 
2000       "  "  "  .     .     35  00  5000       "  "  "  .     .     75  00 

We  will  send  samples  of  the  book  and  special  rates  to  any  who  may  desire  it.  Over  500,000  have 
been  sold. 

We  invite  you  to  examine  the  good  words  which  our  patrons  have  sent  us  concerning  this  publication. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"  I  sent  one  out  West  to  a  friend,  and  she 
wrote  that  she  was  now  posted,  and  when  she 
came  here  to  have  a  picture  "nade,  she  would 
come  'according  to  directions.''' — A.  Bogar- 
dus,  New  York. 

"A  grand  idea." — Elbert  Anderson. 

"A  splendid  medium  for  educating  'skulls' 
that  cannot  think  and  will  not  learn." — Wm.  H. 
Whitehead,  Pittsburg,  Pa. 

"  It  is  eagerly  sought  for  and  read  by  every- 
body who  visits  our  Gallery." — J.  Gurney  & 
Son,  New  York. 

"  It  assists  me  greatly." — James  Mullen, 
Lexington,  Ky. 

"  The  many  valuable  hints  in  it  cannot  fail  to 
be  beneficial  to  both  photographer  and  patron." 
— Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  W.  Virginia. 


"  They  are  the  best  kind  of  business  cards  a 
photographer  can  have." — T.  S.  Estabrooke, 
Brooklyn. 

"You  have  conferred  a  great  favor  on  the  fra- 
ternity in  supplying  it,  and  we  hope  it  will  bene- 
fit some  of  the  '■Icnoiu-everythings'1  in  this  quar- 
ter." — A.  C.  McIntyre  &  Co.,  Ogdensburg. 

"They  are  just  the  thing  to  post  people  up  on 
what  they  ought  to  know  in  order  to  secure  good 
pictures." — J.  P.  Whipple,  White  Water. 

"  I  really  think  your  little  book  '  hits  the  nail 
on  the  head.'  " — J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

"It  is  the  best  advertising  medium  I  have 
ever  found." — H.  M.  Sedgewick,  Granville,  0. 

"  I  think  they  are  a  perfect  success,  and  will 
do  us  photographers  a  great  deal  of  good." — G 
W.  Mathis. 


BESEEM  &  WILSON,  Fhotopjhic  Publishers, 

SEVENTH  &  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


t0#  Wwfmttrfy 

dtompng.        #- 


HFBOTOGBAPHICM 


IN  EVERY  VARIETY. 


Nos.  419  &  421  BROOME  ST.,  NEW  YORK, 
No.  73  BOLD  STREET,  LIVERPOOL,  ENGLAND. 


DEALERS  SUPPLIED  WITH  THE  BEST  GOODS  OB  THE  BEST  TERMS. 


Our  own  extensive  facilities  for  manufacturing  enable  us  to  produce  first  quality  of  goods, 
and  our  extensive  connections  at  home  and  abroad  give  us  facilities  which  no  one  else  has. 


MANUFACTORIES :  (WaS%  go"j^wofen'0t 


SEE  OTHEE  ADVERTISEMENTS  IN  PHOTOGEAPHIC  BOOKS  and  MAGAZINES 


Examine  Scoylll's  Photographic  Clocks,  aM  Read  the  Photographic  Times. 


THE  ZENTMAYER  LENS 

For  Views  and  Copying. 


These  Lenses  possess  pre-eminently,  the  following  qualities  : 

Width  of  visual  angle,  ranging  from  80°  to  90°  ;    depth  of  focus ;    extreme  sharpness  over  the 
whole  field;  true  perspective;  freedom  from  all  distortion  in  copying  ;  portability  and  cheapness. 

Each  mounting  is  provided  with  a  revolving  Diaphragm,  containing  the  stops  of  the  different  com- 


binations for  which  they  are  designed 
making  and  closing  the  exposure 


The  larger  ones  are  provided  with  an  internal  shutter  for 


No.  1, 
"  2, 
"  3, 
"    *, 


2\  inch  focus, 

3i     " 

5}     " 

8  " 
12  " 
18       " 


3 
4 

10 
14 

20 


)i  X 


3  plate,  . 

.  $20  00 

5   "   . 

.  25  00 

8i  "   . 

.   30  00 

12  "   . 

.  42  00 

17  "   . 

.   60  00 

24  "   . 

.  90  00 

\o.   1  and  No.  2  combined,  . 

.  .  $33  00 

"  2  "   "  3    " 

.  .  .   40  00 

"  3  "  "  4 

.  .  .   55  00 

"  4  "   "  5 

.  .  .   75  00 

"  5  "   "  6 

.  .  .110  00 

.  .  .   48  00 

"  3,  4,  and  5, 

.  .  .   88  00 

No.  3,  with  large  mounting  to  combine  with  No.  4  and  No.  5,  $35. 

No.  1  and  No.  2,  specially  adapted  for  Stereoscopic  Views,  are  furnished  in  matched  pairs.  No.  1 
and  No.  2,  single,  not  to  combine  with  other  sizes,  $36  a  pair. 

Lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six  combinations,  from  2£  to  18  inches,  $173. 

Zentmayer's  Stereoscopic  outfits,  including  a  pair  of  No.  2  Lenses  4x7  box,  7  x  10  India  Rubber 
Bath  and  Dipper,  Tripod,  Printing  Frames,  and  outside  box,  $60. 

JOSEPH  ZENTMAYER,  Manufacturer, 

147  South  Fourth  Street,  Philadelphia. 

STEREOSCOPIC   VIEW'S. 


Dealers  selecting  their  autumn  stock  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  would  do  well  to  examine  our 

unrivalled  variety  of  Views  of 

THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS, 

NIAGARA,   WASHINGTON, 

FAIRMOVNT  PARK,  PHILADELPHIA, 

FLOWERS,  GROUPS,  &c. 

8S~  Q.UAMTY  UNSURPASSED  ! 


KILBURN  BROS.,  Littleton,  New  Hampshire. 

NIAGARA 

STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS. 

Winter  and  Summer  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  of  all  sizes.     Trade  supplied  on  good  terms.     Variety 
unequalled. 

G.  E.  CURTIS,  Photographer, 

Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y. 

Mr.  Curtis'  views  answer  Mr.  Robinson's  query  :   "Are  there  any  clouds  in  America?  " 


GERMAN  ALBUMEN  COLORS! 


JULIUS     KRUGE  R'S 

fAtSUT   $*M*VT   $OfcO*$, 

FOR  COLORING  PHOTOGRAPHS  ON  ALBUMEN  and  PLAIN  PAPER. 

These  colors  have  become  very  popular  in  Germany  and  France  (where  they  have  obtained  the 
highest  recommendations),  on  account  of  their  extraordinary  brilliancy,  evenness,  and  easy  application. 
They  can  be  used  on  Albumen  Paper,  and  are  without  doubt  the  best  that  have  been  offered  to  the 
public.     The  Colors  are  put  up  in  boxes  of  6,  12,  and  18. 

GEO.  RAU,  Sole  Agent, 

No.  922  Girard  Ave.,  Philadelphia. 

&c    (DO., 

Manufacturers  of 

Walnut 

Mouldings 

BACKING, 

&c,  &c. 

Solid  Walnut  Work 
a  Specialty. 


HALE 

Wholesale 


LOOKING 
GLASS  ^ 

PICTURE 
FRAMES. 

Patented  Solid 
Ovals  and  Spandrels 


WAKEROOMS, 


48  &  50  If .  6tH  St. 


FACTORIES, 

615  to  621  Filbert  St. 


The  undersigned,  having  purchased  the  entire  interest,  goodwill,  and  business  of 

Photo.  Materials  &  Picture  Frames 

OF  J.  HAWORTH, 

Desires  to  inform  his  friends  and  the  trade  generally,  that  lie  will  continue  the  business,  as 

heretofore,  at  the  old  stand, 

624  ARCH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA, 

Where  he  hopes,  by  prompt  attention  and  fair  dealing,  to  merit  a  continuance  of  the  patron- 
age so  largely  given  to  the  late  firm. 

We  will  still  keep  a  well  assorted  stock  of 

PICTURE  FRAMES  (OVAL  AND  SQUARE), 

VELVET  CASES,  COLLODIONS, 

VARNISHES,  PURE  CHEMICALS,   &c, 

which  can  be  had  at  the  lowest  rates;  as  well  as 

PASSEPARTOUTS,    STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS   OF    AEE    PARTS    OF   THE  WOREO, 
STEREOSCOPIC  INSTRUMEJiTS,  Ac. 

We  also  have  a  full  line  of  CAMERAS  of  the  best  makes  and  latest  improvements, 
CAMERA  STANDS,  HEAD-RESTS,  BACKGROUNDS,  and  all  Accessories  necessary 
to  the  Photographic  Art.  We  would  call  the  attention  of  photographers  to  the  fact  that  we 
manufacture  SQUARE  FRAMES,  and  so  can  generally  ship  any  frames  (especially  odd 
sizes)  the  same  day  they  are  ordered.  We  would  also  call  attention  to  the  noted  ALBU- 
MEN PAPERS,  Morgan's  and  H.  Extra,  the  best  for  warm  weather,  for  which  I  am 
the  ascent. 


THOMAS  H.  McCOLLIN, 

Successor  to  Haworth  &  McCollin,  624  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


SOIUEESTHinNTG-   KTEW 


JAG  OBIT'S 


IMITATION  PORCELAIN 


AND 


Combination  Printing  Frame 

WITH  SELF-ADJUSTING  SPEING  BED,  CLAMPING  SPRINGS, 
YIGNETTING  ARRANGEMENTS, 

FOR  PORCELAIN  AND  CONTACT  PRINTING. 


Any  negative  may  be  used  with  success.  The  time  of  printing  is  the  same  as  in  common  printing, 
and  may  be  done  in  any  kind  of  weather.  Pictures  printed  with  this  frame  need  but  little  retouching, 
or  not  as  fine  retouching  to  get  the  finest  effects. 

I  need  not  comment  on  this  frame,  for  when  tried  will  prove  for  itself.  For  printing  on  the  Por- 
celain plate  it  is  best  and  a  success.  Having  a  self-adjusting  bed,  will  form  to  any  thickness  of  plate. 
For  common  printing  it  is  complete.  But  the  most  to  be  praised  is  the  Imitation  Porcelain  for  which  it 
is  invented,  which  all  prefer  to  the  genuine  Porcelain,  for  the  reason  they  can  be  sent  by  mail  and  will 
not  break.  They  are  printed  on  Albumen  Paper,  the  same  as  a  Card  Photograph,  and  when  framed 
in  a  velvet  Passepartout  can  scarcely  be  detected  from  the  genuine  Porcelain. 

I  have  used  one  of  these  frames  in  my  gallery  the  last  year,  charging  two  dollars  per  dozen  more 
for  this  kind  of  work.  All  of  my  patrons  prefer  this  to  the  porcelain,  and  find  no  fault  with  the  price. 
I  have  therefore  secured  a  patent,  and  propose  to  manufacture  and  put  them  in  the  market  for  sale, 
that  others  may  use  them.  I  feel  satisfied  that  by  trying  them  they  will  prove  satisfactory ;  if  not, 
you  can  return  the  same  by  paying  charges. 

Specimens  published  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  in  the  April  and  October  numbers,  1873. 
Be  sure  and  see  them.     Stockdealers  will  be  supplied  from  the  factory  at  Minneapolis,  Minnesota. 


SIZES     A.1STJD     PRICES. 

Frame  for  1-4  Negative,    .     .     .     .  $4  00     |     Frame  for  6£  x8£  Negative, 
5x7       "  ....      500     I  "  8x10 

Frame  for  11x14  Negative,     ....     $6  25 


.  $5  50 
.     5  75 


Any  other  size  made  to  order.     Terms,    Cash  or  C.  0.  D.     Parties  not  finding  them  with  their 
Stockdealers  can  order  them  from 


P.  0.  Box  1758. 


W.  H.  JACOBY,  Minneapolis,  Minn. 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  CO.,  Trade  Agents. 


419  Jb  421  Broome  St.,  New  York. 
*      * 


LINN'S  LOOKOUT 
LANDSCAPE   PHOTOGRAPHY. 


C-=> 


*-& 


YET  CONTAINING    MANY    USEFUL    HINTS    EOE,  ALL    PHOTOGKAPHEES. 

By  the  Late  Prof.  R.  M.  LINN, 

LOOKOUT  MOUNTAIN,   TENN. 

This  admirable  little  work  was  published  last  fall,  a  little  too  late  for  the  season.  It  is 
now  confidently  recommended  to  every  photographer  about  to  do  any  class  of  work,  outside 
or  inside  the  skylight. 

CONTENTS. 


Introductory. 

Main  Requisites  of  a  Good  Photographic  Land- 
scape. 

Artistic  Effect. 

Proper  Illumination. 

Direction  of  Light. 

Clouds. 

Length  of  Exposure. 

Apparatus  for  Field  Work. 

On  the  Selection  of  View  Lenses. 

Camera  Boxes. 

Bath  Cups. 

Preliminary  Preparations. 

Taking  the  Field. 

Hints  on  Printing  and  Finishing. 

To  Print  Clouds. 

Toning  Bath  for  Views. 

On  Fixing  and  Washing  Prints. 

Suggestions  on  Mounting  Prints. 

To  Cut  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

To  Mount  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

Formulae  and  Processes  for  Landscape  Photog- 
raphy. 

Ever-ready  Iodizer  for  Landscape  Photography. 


Remarks  on  Preparing  and  Using  Iodizer. 
On  the  Management  of  Flowing  Bottles. 
On  the  Preparation  of  Plain  Collodion. 
The  Silver  Bath  for  Negatives. 
To  Renovate  an  Old  Negative  Bath. 
To  Prepare  Carbonate  of  Silver. 
Permanganate  of  Potash — Its  Use  in  our  Art. 
Preparation  and  Using  of  Developer. 
Fixing  Solution  for  View  Negatives. 
On  Redeveloping  and  Strengthening  Agents. 
To  Clean  and  Polish  the  Glass. 
To  Prepare  Chloride  of  Gold  Solution. 
The  Paste  for  Mounting  of  Photographs. 
The    Operator's   Oraele — Failures  :    Causes  and 
*  Remedies;  for  consultation  in  time  of  trouble. 
Counsels  and  Cautions  for  the  Printer,  including 

Formulas  for  Silvering  Bath,  &c. 
Failures  in  Silvering  Albumenized  Paper. 
Failures  in  Toning  Photographs. 
Failures  in  Fixing  Photographs. 
Instantaneous  Photography. 
View  Photography  Financially  Considered. 
Stereoscoping  Applied  to  Portraiture. 
Concluding  Remarks. 


PRICE,  75  CENTS. 


FOB  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALEBS. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


MOULTON'S 


RAPID  PHOTO-WASHER. 


3 


O 

ft? 
Oh 


>i 

feel 

H 

kj 

U- 

fca 

<o 

bn 

C| 

t>l 

s 

o> 

b 

^ 

M 

fcn 

^ 

^ 

^ 

b 

Patented  August  12th,  1873. 


Instead  of  soaking  the  Prints  it  applies  the  water  in  the  form  of  spray,  with  considerable 

force,  to  both  sides  of  the  paper  at  each  revolution,  or  from  one  hundred 

to  one-hundred-fifty  times  per  minute. 

Washes  with  exact  uniformity,  and  gives  more  brilliant  and  permanent  work ; 
is  simple,  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order,  and  will  last  a  life-time. 


Size  Cylinder, 

Diam.  16in.  Length  14  l-2in. 
"     20        "       19 
11     25        "       24 

Larger  sizes  may  follow. 


Capacity  in  Cards.  Largest  Print.  Price. 

84  14  by  17  ins.  $30 

144  18  by  22  "  40 

220  22  by  28  "  50 

£@~Lib8ral  discounts  to  dealers  and  agents. 


rXsE3S»nsX3VE03?aX  ALS  . 

"I  write  to  testify  to  the  satisfaction  I  feel  with  the  working  of  your  Eapid  Print  Washer.  It  is  simply  per- 
fection, as  far  as  my  experience  with  it  goes,  viz  :  One  year's  constant  use.  I  have  washed  eight  dozen  cartes  in 
ten  minutes,  and  the  most  accurate  test  I  know  of,  starch  and  iodine,  failed  to  show  a  trace  of  hypo,  remain- 
ing. '-L.  G.  Bigelow,  Detroit,  Mich.,  Feb.  10th,  1874. 

"Time  saved  is  money  earned."  The  above  maxim  is  as  true  in  the  photographic  business  as  in  any  otter, 
and  in  this  connection  I  would  say,  that  Moulton's  Rapid  Photo-Washer  will  save  more  time  in  any  weW-regu- 
lated  gallery,  than  any  mechanism  ever  yet  invented  ;  besides  the  prints  finish  with  a  finer  lustre  than  those 
washed  by  any  other  device  I  have  ever  yet  seen.  Having  used  one  for  the  past  two  months,  washing  from  100 
to  300  prints  daily,  I  am  pleased  to  add  my  testimonial  to  its  excllence." — Wl.  M.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 
March  11th,  1874. 


ANALYSIS    OF    PRINTS. 

"After  analyzing  the  prints  which  were  washed  by  you  during  ten  minutes,  in  your  Rapid  Photo-Washer, 
and  those  furnished  by  an  artist  of  this  city,  washed  in  a  syphon  tank  in  running  water  for  one  hour  and  left  in 
the  water  over  night,  for  the  quantity  of  hyposulphites  left  therein,  I  take  pleasure  in  stating  that  the  prints 
treated  in  the  Rapid  Photo-Washer  contain  perceptibly  less  hyposulphites  than  those  washed  in  the  other  man- 
ner described." — Gustavus  Bode,  Analytical  Chemist,  and  Dealer  in  Photographic  Stock,  Milwaukee,  Feb.  21, 1874 


L  V.  MOULTON,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis. 


t 

If 


"We  are  informed  that  some  of  our  competitors  are  advancing  the  prices  of 

PHOTOGRAPHIC    GOODS, 

and  we  have  been  requested  to  do  the  same,  but  have  declined  to  enter  into  any  combination 
whatever. 


PHOTOGRAPHERS 


can  rest  assured  that  we  shall 
adhere  strictly  to  our 


LOW  PRICES 


as  published  in  our  Catalogue  of  August,  1873,  until  further  notice.  The  prices  therein  quoted 
are  the  lowest  yet  made,  and  all  who  have  not  received  that  list  will  please  send  us  their 
address,  when  it  will  be  promptly  forwarded. 

Notice  our  very  low  prices  on 

Ferrotype  Plates,  Camera  Boxes,  &c. 

Everything  sold  at  bottom  figures,  and  all  orders  executed  to  the  letter,   and  with  the 
greatest  of  promptness. 

Agents  for  the  Northwest  for  Weston's  Sotary  Burnishers  and  Scotch  Albu- 

bumen  Paper. 

RICE  &  THOMPSON'S 

Mammoth  Stock  House,  259  Wabash  Av.,  Chicago. 


SOUTHERN 

Photographic^Ferrotype 

STOCK  DEPOT, 
Savannah,  Geo. 

FIRST-CLASS  STOCK 

AT  NORTHERN  PRICES, 

Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance, 
Drayage,  &e. 


SIElsriD     FOB    PBICESL'IST, 


Reflecting  Solar  Camera. 


IMPM &WEB 


Direct  Printing  Camera. 


Manufactured  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the  original  inventor  and  patentee,  combining 
ALL  THE  IMPORTANT  improvements  that  have  been  made.  The  CONDENSING  LENSES,  free 
from  color  as  can  be  obtained,  and  the  objective  or  MAGNIFYING  LENSES  (which  are  triple 
compound)  of  short  focus,  are  made  in  Europe  expressly  to  order,  while  the  OPTICAL  CONSTRUC- 
TION of  the  apparatus  is  calculated  to  secure  the  greatest  amount  of  light  to  pass  through  the  nega- 
tive WITH  PRECISION  AND  RAPIDITY  of  action.  By  recent  improvements  the  bodies  of  these 
Cameras,  are  composed  principally  of  METAL,  combining  lightness  with  great  strength  and  durability, 
rendering  them  unaffected  by  exposure  to  the  weather.  The  REFLECTING  CAMERA  can  be  moved 
to  and  from  the  window  with  the  greatest  ease,  carrying  the  sensitive  surface  along  with  it  ;  while  the 
mode  of  working  its  reflector  has  been  so  improved  that  the  HIGHEST  WINDS  CANNOT  DIS- 
TURB IT,  at  the  same  time  the  regulation  being  effected  with  the  greatest  facility,  thereby  securing 
sharpness  and  perfection  of  the  picture. 


PRICES  OF  DIRECT  PRINTING  AND  REFLECTING  SOLAR  CAMERAS  ; 
10  inch  diameter  Condensing  Lens,  will  print  picture  18  x  23  in.,         ..... 

12     "  "  "  "  "  25x30  " 

15     "  "  "  "  "  "       29x36  " 

18     "  "  "  "  "  "       40x50  " 


$190  00 

220  00 

275  00 
380  00 

Every  Camera  will  be  tested  and  guaranteed  before  delivery,  and  will  be  licensed  and  accompanied 
by  the  regular  Patent  Stamp  of  the  patentee. 


D.  A.  WOODWARD, 

Baltimore,  Md. 


A  NEW 


INVOICES 


JUST   RECEIVED  \\ 


OF 


LOESCHEE  &  PETSCH'S 

ADMIRABLE 

STUDIES! 

The  praise  which  has  been  bestowed  upon  these  pictures,  particularly' at  the  Vienna  Exhibition,  convinces  us 
thatthey  should  be  treasured  as  sui/acle  models-  of  pose  and  lighting  of  the  sitter,  harmonious  and  artistic  arrangement  of 
furniture,  etc.  These  photographs  are  the  only  European  ones  for  which  the  international  jury  awarded  the  two 
medals  for  progress  and  taste,  Mr.  Lewitzky,  a  photographer,  and  member  of  the  jury,  exclaimed :  "  The  exhi- 
bition of  Messrs.  Loescher  &  Petsch  has  charmed  me ;  according  to  my  opinion,  Loescher  &  Petsch,  in 
Europe,  and  Kurtz,  in  New  York,  are  the  first  photographers  of  the  world !" 

We  will  Express  the  sett  on  receipt  of  $30  ;  or  post  them  at  your  risk  to  any  address.  The  price  is  remarka- 
bly low,  as  each  print  is  most  carefully  made. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

j8®="  See  review  of  these  pictures  in  the  "  Philadelphia  Photographer  "  for  December,  1873. 

The  Universal 


EMBOSSING    PATENTED   JANUARY   9,  1872. 

This  Press  will  cameo  all  sizes,  from  cards  to  cabinets,  and  is  sold  lower  than  any  other  that  will  do 
the  same  work.     It  has  been  greatly  improved  and  made  very  complete  in  all  its  parts. 

PRICE,  ®16.50. 

MANUFACTURED  AND  SOLD  WHOLESALE  AND  RETAIL  BY 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO.,  822  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


NEWELL'S 

IMPROVED  BATH  HOLDER 


ACKNOWLEDGED  TO  BE 


THE    BEST    IN    THE    WORLD 


READ  THE  LATEST  TESTIMONIALS: 

Messrs.   R.  Newell  &  Son.  Boston,  Mass.,  March  30,  1874. 

Dear  Sirs :  In  answer  to  your  letter  of  inquiry,  as  to  how  I  like  the  Bath  Holder,  I  have  delayed 
answering  that  I  might  have  time  to  thoroughly  test  it.  I  find  it  in  every  way  first-rate  ;  does  not 
injure  the  bath,  is  light  and  of  convenient  shape,  and  is  altogether  the  best  holder  I  have  used. 
Hoping  you  will  meet  with  success  in  the  sale  of  the  article,  I  remain, 

Yours  truly,  A.  Marshall,  147  Tremont  Street. 


Messrs.  R.  Newell  &  Son. 


Albany,  N.  Y.,  March  25,  1874. 


Gents  :  The  28  x  28  Bath  works  splendid,  and  I  must  say  the  system  of  making  baths  of  wood 
and  coating  them  with  your  composition  has  supplied  a  want  long  needed  by  the  practical  photog- 
rapher, as  large  glass  baths  are  always  dangerous.  Very  truly, 

E.  S.  M.  Hains,  45  North  Pearl  Street. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  FIRST-CLASS  STOGKDEALERS. 


CRYSTAL 

SELF-ACTING 

TaMe  Fountain. 

Price, 

$17.00. 


New  York,  May  1st,  1874. 
The  large,  new,  and  magnificent  Gallery  of 
WM.  KURTZ, 
MADISON  SQUARE,  NEW  YORK, 

Opened  April  1st,  is  furnished  with  twelve  back- 
grounds, new  in  design,  from  the  Scenic  Studio 

f  LAFAYETTE  W.  SEAVEY, 

8  Lafayette  Place,  New  York. 

THE  KURTZ  PLAIN  combines  the  general 
effects  of  light  and  shade  desirable  and  found  in 
our  Scenic  Backgrounds.  This  is  the  first  and 
only  plain  ground  with  which  side-slips  can  be 
appropriately  used.     Send  stamp  for  sample. 


Seavey's  Bactpiil  Bulletin. 


EXTRA! 
No.  70. 

A  New  Forest  Background.    Very  peculiar  and 
effective.     Introduced  by  Bogardus,  N.  Y. 

No.  71. 

A  Rich  Interior,  with   elaborate  tapestry  on 
walls.     Introduced  by  Mora,  N.  Y. 

See  other  advertisements. 


LONDON    1851. 


PARIS    1867. 


ROSS' 


PORTRAIT 


AUID 


VIEW  LENSES. 


We  have  now  successfully  introduced  to  the  American  Photqgraphers  the  Ross  Lbns,  and  by  our 
increased  sales  we  know  they  are  appreciated.  At  the  convention  held  at  Buffalo,  July  15,  many  fine 
photographs  were  exhibited  by  photographers,  and  ourselves,  made  with  the  Ross  Lbns,  which 
attracted  great  attention. 

While  Ross  &  Co.  are  the  oldest  manufacturers  of  Photographic  Lenses  in  existence,  they  also 
keep  up  with  the  requirements  of  the  fraternity,  by  constantly  manufacturing  new  combinations  and 
improving  on  those  already  in  existence.  They  have  lately  perfected,  and  will  soon  furnish  us  stock 
of,  a  new  series  of  Card  Lenses,  extra  rapid,  peculiarly  adapted  for  babies,  and  people  who  will  not  be 
quiet.     We  will  give  notice  of  their  arrival. 

WE  HAVE  NOW  IN  STOCK 

PORTRAIT  LENSES,  from  1-4  to  15  x  18. 

CABINET  LENSES,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3. 

CARD  LENSES,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3. 

TRIPLETS,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  1. 
INSTANTANEOUS  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

MEDIUM  ANGLE  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

LARGE  ANGLE  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

STEREOGRAPHIC  LENSES,  all  sizes- 

Numerous  testimonials  pronounce  them  to  be  the  best,  as  well  as  the  cheapest  Foreign  Lens  ever 
offered  to  the  American  Photographer. 

We  will  mail  price-list  on  application,  and  promptly  fill  all  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  States, 
822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


^aswo£B 


» 


LIFE 


OMPOSITION 


FOR   THE   STEREOSCOPE. 


CATALOGUE. 


Blowing  Bubbles. 

B  stands  for  Bumble-B. 

Blackberry  Blossoms. 

The  Hen's  Nest. 

Let  us  Have  Piece. 

Mamma,  where  was  I  when  you  were 

a  little  girl  ? 
Our  Domestic's  Belations. 
She  went  to  the  Butchers. 
My  Lady  and  My  Lady's  Maid. 
The  Mountain  Spring. 
Unveiling  a  Statue  of  Young  America. 
Young  America  in  the  Nursery. 
Young  America  as  an  Artist. 
Young  America  Asleep. 


15.  The  Sunbeam  Fairy. 

16.  The  Picture-Book. 

17.  Sitting  for  my  Picture. 

18.  Young  America  Bathing. 

19.  Young  Boston's  Ambition. 

20.  Ding-Dong-Ding,  Music  on  a  Kubber 

String. 

21.  Pveflection. 

22.  The  Loiterers. 

23.  The  Cabin  Porch. 

24.  Beatrice  Shoo-Ply. 

25.  Home  Group. 

26.  A  View. 

27.  The  Gleaner. 


Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price.    $2.00  per  dozen.     Order  by  number. 
DEALERS  SUPPLIED  ON  GOOD  TERMS. 


These  inimitable  pictures  are  all  natural  compositions,  and  touch  the  tender  chords  of 
human  nature  most  wonderfully.  They  are  attractive  to  every  one  who  has  a  heart,  but 
particularly  instructive  as  studies  for  photographers,  in  grouping,  posing,  and  composition. 

They  will  help  any  man  make  better  and  easier  pictures  of  children,  and  should 

be  studied. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,   Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 

ALBION  ALBUMENIZING  CO 

LONDON  AND  GLASGOW, 

Bequest  American  Photographers  to  give  their 
Paper  a  fair  trial. 


THE  SEVEKAL  BKANDS  FOR  SALE  BY 


PHILADELPHIA,  PA., 

AMD 

SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

4  BEEKMAN  STKEET,  NEW  YOEK. 


Marion  & Co.s  Specialties. 


ALBUMENIZED  PAPERS, 

Used  by  the  best  English  and  Colonial  photographers  ;  Wilson,  of  Aberdeen ;  Vandyke 
&  Brown,  Liverpool ;  Notman,  Montreal;  Bourne  &  Shepherd,  India;  and  hundreds  of 
others. 

MOUNTS 

For  Cartes-de-Visite,  Cabinet,  and  larger  sizes,  of  the  very  best  style  and  quality,  as  made 
for  the  leading  English  and  Colonial  photographers.  We  will  post  samples  free  to  any 
photographer  on  receipt  of  application. 

GILT  AND  SILVER  ORMOLU  METAL  FRAMES, 

For  Miniatures,  Cartes-de-Visite,  and  Cabinets. 

PHOTOGRAPHS. 

The  largest  and  best  selected  stock  in  Great  Britain.  Upwards  of  1000  copies  of 
Modern  Paintings,  artistically  colored  in  water  colors  ;  English  and  Continental  Photogra- 
phic Views;  the  principal  Picture  Galleries;  Portraits  of  Eminent  Personages;  over  300,- 
000  in  stock. 

MARION  &  CO.,  22  &  23  Soho  Square,  LONDON,  ENGLAND. 


A    SPLENDID,   USEFUL    BOOK. 


DR.    "V  O  Gr  E  Xj  '  S 

PHOTOGRAPHER'S 

Pocket  Reference-Book 


ZDICTIOIsT-AJR/y 


An  Alphabetically  arranged  collection  of  practically  important  hints  on  the  construction 
of  the  Gallery  ;  selection  and  trial  of  lenses  and  chemicals  ;  approved  formula?  for  the  differ- 
ent photographic  processes  ;  tables  of  weights  and  measures  ;  rules  for  avoiding  failure,  etc., 
etc.,  for 

Photographers  and  Amateurs, 

IS  RECEIVING  THE  HIGHEST  PKAISE  WHEREVER  IT  GOES. 


IT  IS  A  BOOK  EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER  SHOULD  HAVE, 

Because  it  is  a  ready  helper  under  all  difficult  circumstances. 


Extract  from  the  Minutes  of  the  Chicago  Photographic  Association,  Dec.  3. 

"Messrs.  Hall  and  Hesler  spoke  in  most  flattering  terms  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Pocket  Reference-Boole,  of 
its  great  value  to  every  photographer,  and  expressed  the  hope  that  it  may  soon  be  found  in  every 
gallery." 


There  is  hardly  a  matter  occurring  in  your  daily  work  which  it  does  not  throw  light  upon 
and  make  easy.     Examine  it  for  yourself. 


For  sale  by  all  dealers.    Price,  $1.50,  post-paid. 

BENEBMAJST  &  WILSON,  JPhoto.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


PAPERS. 


[See  opposite  page.) 


TESTIMONIALS: 

"  Waymouth's  Improved  Vignette  Papers  I  have  tried,  and  they  are  just  what  I  have  been  want- 
ing for  years." — Well  Gr.  Singhi. 

"Being  composed  of  transparent  paper  there  is  no  risk  of  breakage,  and  it  readily  admits  of  the 
gradation  already  very  good,  being  modified  easily  to  suit  the  negative.  This,  I  take  it,  is  a  point  of 
great  importance.  This  lithographed  mask  on  transparent  paper  will,  I  think,  be  found  a  useful 
adjunct  in  vignetting." — G.  Wharton  Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A. 

"  From  a  trial  made,  we  are  enabled  to  say  that  they  answer  exceedingly  well  ;  and  they  are  certain 
to  find  favor  among  photographers — a  favor  they  well  deserve." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  can  testify  to  the  exquisite  softness  obtained  from  your  Vignette  Papers,  which  gradual  and 
soft  effect  I  have  never  seen  equalled  by  any  other  method.'' — H.  A.  H.  Daniel,  Esq.,  Hon.  Sec.  of  the 
Bristol  and  Clifton  Amateur  Photographic  Association. 

"  The  Waymouth  Vignetting  Paper  are  a  decided  success.  They  are  splendid." — J.  W.  §■  J.  S. 
Monlton,  Salem  Mass. 

From,  Professional  Photographers. — "First-class."  "The  sample  sent  answers  perfectly."  "I 
consider  them  first  rate  articles."  "I  think  your  Vignette  Papers  will  be  a  great  improvement  on 
the  old  glasses."     &c,  &c. 


Any  number  sent  on  receipt  of  price,  by  any  stockdealer,  or  by 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers, 

PHILADELPHIA . 


KfS  CONSTANTLY 

INOiEVEASZIINrGr  ! 

PHOTOGKAPHEKS  USE 

WAYMOUTH'S 

VIGNETTING  PAPERS. 

(DESIGNS    COPYRIGHTED.) 


OF  ALL  PICTURES,  THE 


fiprtte 


IS  THE  MOST  ARTISTIC, 


When  properly  printed.  But  the  clumsy  devices  generally  in  use  for  printing  them, 
or  rather  for  blending  the  shading  about  the  figure,  produce  but  very  few  really  artistic 
vignette  pictures.  Either  the  shading  is  too  intensely  dark,  not  gradated  in  tint  at  all,  or 
it  shows  an  ugly  direct,  decided  line,  which  is  very  repulsive.  The  shading  should 
blend  gradually  from  the  dark  tint  nearest  to  the  figure,  off  into  the 
white  background.  The  results  are  then  soft,  artistic,  and  beautiful.  The  easiest  and 
best  way  to  secure  them  is  by  the  use  of 

WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 

THEY  ARE  NOT  CLUMSY ;  DO  NOT  BREAK  ;  ARE  ALWAYS  READY ;  COST 
BUT  LITTLE,  AND  ARE  EASY  OF  APPLICATION  TO  ANY  NEGATIVE. 

THEY  NEED  BUT  ONE  ADJUSTMENT  TO  PRINT  ANY  QUANTITY. 

They  entirely  do  away  with  all  the  old  and  troublesome  methods,  either  wood,  metal, 
or  cotton. 

PLEASE  THY  THE  SAMPLE  GIVEN  IN  THIS  MAGAZINE  FOE  FEB.  1874. 


Eighteen  sizes  are  now  made,  suiting  all  dimensions  of  pictures  from  a  small  carte  figure" 
to  Whole-size,  Victorias,  Cabinets,  &c.  They  are  printed  in  black  for  ordinary  negatives, 
yellow  bronze  for  thin  negatives,  and  red  bronze  for  still  weaker  ones.  Directions  for  use 
accompany  each  parcel. 

IP  IR,  I  O  IE  S  : 

In  parcels  containing  one  of  each  size,  Nos.  1  to  15,  assorted  colors §1  00 

Assorted  sizes  and  colors,  by  number,  per  package  of  fifteen 1  00 

Nos.  1,  a,  3,  4,  and  5,  assorted  sizes  and  colors,  for  Cartes,  by  number,  per  dozen 50 

"        6,  7, 11, 12,  and  13,    "  "  "     Large  Cartes  and  Victorias,  by  number,  per  doz.,        75 

"        8, 9, 10, 14,  and  15,    "  "  "     Cabinets  and  Whole-size,  "  "  1  00 

16,  17,  and  18,  "  "  "     Half  "  "  "  "  1  35 

(SEE  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

When  ordering,  state  the  number  and  color  you  want.  The  Waymouth  Vignette  Papers 
are  an  English  invention,  and  are  becoming  so  universally  used  in  Europe  that  we  have 
pleasure  in  introducing  them  to  our  patrons.     We  own  the  copyright. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers,  7tli  ani  Cherry,  Mala. 

FOR   SALE  BY  ALL   DEALERS. 


<&*££''+ 


9  mm  inw*^ 


Messrs.  EOBINSON  &  CHEERILL 

Desire  to  announce  to  American  Photographers  that  they  have  perfected  a  speedy  and 
certain  method  of  making  BURWT-I1V  E1VAMEL  PICTURES.  This  acquire- 
ment has  cost  them  the  outlay  of  much  money  and  time,  but  they  are  willing  to  communi- 
cate their  process  to  American  Photographers  if  a  willingness  to  partially  reimburse  them 
is  shown.  They  have  heretofore  given  to  the  fraternity  whatever  novelties  and  ideas  they 
have  had,  but  in  this  instance,  under  the  circumstances,  they  feel  that  they  will  not  be  con- 
sidered as  ungenerous  when  they  withhold  the  burnt-in  process.  They  propose  to  hold  it 
to  themselves  in  Europe,  but  offer  it  to  American  Photographers  on  the  following  terms  : 

Their  price  is  $5000.  If  one  hundred  photographers  subscribe  $50  each,  or  fifty  photog- 
raphers $100  each,  they  will  supply  each  subscriber  with  the  most  detailed  instructions  as  to 
the  pi'ocess,  and  where  and  how  to  obtain  the  materials,  and  hereafter  post  each  subscriber 
on  all  matters  of  improvement  that  they  may  hereafter  discover.  The  time  will  be  limited 
to  June  1st,  1874. 

THE  RESULTS  LEAVE  NOTHING  TO  DESIRE. 

SAMPLES  MAY  BE  SEEN  AT 


124  North  Seventh  Street 


PHILADELPHIA, 

And  all  communications  should  be  addressed  to 

EOBINSON  &  0HEREILL, 

124  H.  Seventh  St,  PMMelpMa,  Pa. 


T  S  IE 


CHAMELEON  BAROMETER 


Invented  by  WALTER  B.  WOODBURY,  Esq.,  London 


The  Greatest  Scientific  Novelty  of  the  Age. 


FORETELLS  the  WEATHER. 


MAILED,  ON  RECEIPT  OF  PRICE,  BY 


BENERMAN  *  WILSON, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts,,  Philadelphia. 


50  Oents- 


■50  Cents. 


The  subscriber  desires  to  call  attention  to  an  Entirely  New  Style  of  Carved  Frame, 
unique,  handsome,  and_stylish,  and  very  becoming  to  photographs,  which  he  is  now  manu- 
facturing, and  will  furnish  at  the  following  prices : 


4x5      @  $6  00  per  doz. 

5y2*iy2@  9  oo     " 

6^x8^®  12  00 
7x9      @  12  00 


8  x  10  @  $15  00  per  doz. 

9x11  @     15  00        " 

10  x  12  @     18  00        " 

11x14  @    24  00        " 


12x16    ®  $30  00  per  doz. 
13x17    @    36  00        " 
16x20    @    42  00 


Larger  sizes  $3.00  per  dozen  for  each  additional  four  inches  or  less  in  length  and  breadth. 
Sample  of  each  size,  except  the  two  smallest,  sent  on  receipt  of  price.  Orders  for  one  dozen 
or  more  filled  C.O.D.  if  ten  per  cent,  is  sent  with  order. 

H.  H.  SNELLINC,  Newburgh,  N.  Y. 


ov 


MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

Nos.  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 


WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  STOCK 


BBAZBBS  SUPPLIED 


On  the  Most  Advantageous  Terms,  with 

EVERY  ARTICLE  IN  THE  WORLD 

Used  or  sold  in  the  Art  of  Photography. 


igjp  Oar  facilities  are  such  that  we  cannot  he  superseded  by  any 
other  house  anywheres.  "We  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to 
deal  with  us. 


ASK  YOUR  DEALER  FOR  SCOVILL'S  GOODS. 


Removed  to  New  Store,  419  &  421  Broome  St. 

^SeeT„:^::;rrmMts  "photographic  times." 


THE 

Philadelphia  Photographer  for  1874 ! 

■   The  increasing  favor  shown  the  publishers  of  this  Magazine  during  the  first  ten  years  of  its  life, 
has  given  them  the  means  to  prepare  for  their  intelligent  patrons  still  greater  attractions  than 
ever  for  the  year  1874.     The  old  staff  of  regular  contributors  will  be  continued. 
A  series  of  illustrated  descriptive  articles  on 

PHOTOCRAPHY   IN   FRANCE, 

which  will  include  descriptions  of  all  the  leading  photographic  studios  and  factories  in  France,  are 
being  contributed  by  Mons.  Ernest  Lacan,  Secretary  of  the  French  Photographic  Society. 
One  of  a  series  of  handsomely  illustrated  articles,  entitled 

VIEWS    ABROAD    AND    ACROSS, 

by  the  editor,  including  sketches  of  matters  and  things  photographic,  made  during  a  tour  in  Eng- 
land, Ireland,  Scotland,  France,  Belgium,  Prussia,  Austria,  Italy,  and  Switzerland,  will  be  in  each 
number  during  the  year ;  a  continuation  of  the  articles  on  the  study  of  art ;  fresh  and  original 
papers  by  old  and  new  contributors,  &c,  &c. 

DURING   1874, 

No  photographic  artist  should  fail  to  subscribe  for  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGKAPHER. 
It  is  going  to  be  one  of  the  most  eventful  years  ever  known  in  the  art,  for 

TWO  GREAT  PATENT  CONTESTS, 

now  under  way — the  "Shaw"  patent  and  the  Sliding  Plate-holder  patent — both  of  vital  impor- 
tance to  the  craft,  will  take  place,  and  all  should  be  posted  on  them  as  they  proceed.  The  fullest 
and  earliest  information  will  be  s;iven  in  this  Magazine. 

THE  PROCEEDINGS    OF  ^THE    NATIONAL    PHOTOGRAPHIC    ASSOCIATION  are 
only  given  entire  in  one  number  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

THE   EMBELLISHMENTS    FOR    1874 

will  be  from  negatives  by  Messrs.  Luckhardt,  Marshall,  Sommer,  Robinson  &  Cherrill,  Kurtz, 
Jewell,  North,  Curtis,  Mottu,  and  others,  and  will  be  unusually  excellent  and  choice,  illustrating 
all  branches  of  photography,  and  introducing  very  useful  studies. 

THEY  ALONE  WILL  BE  WOETH  THE  COST  OP  SUBSCRIPTION. 

ILLUSTRATIONS,  by  means  of  engravings,  cuts,  &c,  will  be  profusely  employed,  and  every 
effort  made  to  secure  to  the  readers  of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer 

The  Most  Elegant  and  Useful  Photographic  Magazine  in  the  World! 

To  Employers,  Employees,  &c.  ;  Please  read  our  liberal  offer  of 

PKEMIUMS  ON  THE  OPPOSITE  PAGE 


NOTICE   TO    SUBSCRIBERS. 


Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2  50  for  six  months,  50  cents  per  copy.     Positively  in  advance. 

In  remitting  by  mail  a  post-office  order,  or  draft  payable  to  the  order  of  Benerman  &  Wilson,  is 
preferable  to  banknotes.      Clearly  give   your  Post-office,   County,  and  State. 

Canada  subscribers  must  remit  24  cents  extra,  to  prepay  postage.  Foreign  subscriptions  must  be 
accompanied  by  the  postage  in  addition. 

Advertising  sheets  are  bound  with  each  number  of  the  Magazine.  Advertisements  are  inserted 
at  the  following  rates : 

One  Month.  Six  Months.  One  Year. 

One  Page, $20  00  $110  00  $200  00 

Half    "      12  00  66  00  120  00 

Quarter  Page, 7  00  38  50  70  00 

Eighth        "      4  00  22  00  40  00 

Cards,  of  Six  lines  or  less, 2  00  11  00  20  00 

The  attention  of  advertisers,  and  those  having  galleries,  &c  ,  for  sale,  is  called  to  our  Specialties 
pages.  Terms  $2  for  six  lines,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a  line,  always 
in  advance.  Duplicate  insertions,  50  cents  less,  each.  Sure  to  pay.  j^g^Operators  desiring  situa- 
tions, no  charge. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

OFFICE,  S.W.  COR.  OF  SEVENTH  AND  CHEEKY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


ENTREKIN'S 

OSCILLATING  ENAMELER. 


BURNISHING 
PHOTOGRAPHS 


Far  superior  to  any- 
thing yet  invented  for 
that  purpose. 


giving  A 


BEAUTIFUL 


Every     Machine     war- 
ranted perfect. 


The  Oscillating  Enameler  is  constructed  on  scientific  principles,  and  in  the  operation  of  burnishing  the 
roll  and  burnisher  both  move,  giving  a  combined  action  on  the  face  of  the  photograph,  and  producing  a  fine 
finish  with  a  very  light  pressure,  so  that  enameled  mounts  can  be  burnished,  as  well  as  plain  mounts.  This 
fact  alone  makes  the  Enameler  superior  to  all  other  machines  for  burnishing  photographs.  The  reason  why 
it  is  the  best,  the  double  action  of  roll  and  burnisher  prevents  the  card  from  sticking  on  the  burnisher  ;  it 
also  prevents  the  burnisher  from  scratching  the  albumen  off  the  face  of  the  picture  and  spoiling  it,  as  is  the 
ease  in  similar  machines.  The  oscillating  motion  of  the  burnisher  feeds  the  card  and  keeps  the  burnisher 
polished.  Equal  pressure  at  both  ends  of  the  burnisher  is  another  great  advantage,  which  prevents  the 
card  from  turning  while  in  the  operation  of  burnishing,  as  is  the  case  in  other  machines.  The  mechanism  of 
the  pressure  is  certain,  and  can  be  operated  in  an  instant  correctly. 

The  removable  burnisher  is  another  great  advantage,  giving  the  photographer  the  opportunity  of  having 
several,  so  that  if  one  becomes  injured  it  can  immediately  be  removed  and  replaced  with  another  one,  causing 
no  delay.    SOLD  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

PRICE    LIST": 

6  inch  Roll,  $25 ;  14  inch  Roll,  $50 ;  18  inch  Roll,  $75. 


Office  of  C.  M.  Parks,  Late  Principal  Examiner  in  the  Patent  Office, 
William  G.  Entrekin.  Washington,  December  12th,  1873. 

Dear  Sir  :  I  am  familiar  with  the  class  of  machines  to  which  your  Photographic  Burnisher  relates, 
as  I  was  examiner  of  that  class  of  inventions  in  the  United  States  Patent  Office  for  some  time,  and  have 
had  occasion  to  keep  myself  posted  in  regard  to  them  since,  and  believe  your  Burnisher  is  the  very  best 
in  existence,  embracing  all  the  features  necessary  to  make  a  complete  polished  surface  upon  a  photo- 
graph, and  also  believe  the  time  will  come  when  every  photographer  of  any  pretensions  will  be  com- 
pelled to  use  one.     I  predict  for  you  success  in  your  patent.  Yours  truly, 

C.  M.  Parks,  Solicitor  of  Patents. 

Office  of  C.  M.  Parks,  Solicitor  of  Patents,  428  Seventh  Street 
Wm.  G.  Entrekin.  Washington,  D.  C,  January  5th,  1874. 

Dear  Sir  :  Yours  is  just  received.  You  need  not  fear  any  trouble  from  any  parties  in  regard  to 
other  machines  ;  your  Burnisher  does  not  infringe  with  any  feature  of  any  other  machine  in  the  least 
particular.     You  can,  therefore,  manufacture  and  sell  yours  with  impunity . 

Yours  truly,  C.  M.  Parks. 


OF"  WE 

All  photographers  not  to  be  frightened  out  of  purchasing  our  superior  ''Oscillating  Enameler  for 
Burnishing  Photographs."  We  simply  defy  any  party  or  parties  to  interfere  with  us  in  the  manufac 
ture  or  sale  of  said  machine,  for  which  we  hold  letters  patent  for  seventeen  years,  in  the  United  States 
and  Territories.  We  will  guarantee  protection  to  every  purchaser.  We  shall  sell  to  the  fraternity  a 
good  machine  at  a  fair  price.  Photographers  can  buy  direct  from  us,  if  they  cannot  procure  them  of 
their  dealers. 

[EP*  Pay  no  attention  to  the   "  CAUTIONS''   of  other  parties,  who  intimate  that  our  machine 
infringes  theirs.     Examine,  and  buy  the  best. 

W.  G.  ENTEEKIN,  Patentee, 

4382  &  4384:  Main  St.,  Manayunk,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


8@*  Address  ALL  Communications,  both  for  the  Editor  and  the  Publishers,  to  Sherman's 
Building,  Seventh  and  Oherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Number  126. 


50  Cents. 


THE 

PHILADELPHIA 


AN  ILLUSTRATED  MONTHLY  JOURNAL, 


DEVOTED  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


THE  OFPIOIAL  OKGAN  OP  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGK^PHIO 
ASSOCIATION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. 


June,     1  S  "Z  4=. 


PHILADELPHIA: 
BENERMAN    &     WILSON, 


PUBLISHEKS. 


Subscriptions  received  by  all  News  and  Stockdealers. 

FIVE  DOLLARS  PER  ANNUM,  IN  ADVANCE. 


Sherman  &  Co.,  Printers,  Philadelphia. 


SOMETHING  NEW!   See  Advertisement  inside, 


SUMMARY    OP    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

The  Mammoth  Offer 161 

The  Chicago  Exhibition  and  Convention 161 

A  Word  to  Exhibitors  Here  and  There 163 

Suggestions  to  all  intending  to  visit  the  N.  P.  A.  Con- 
vention at  Chicago,  in  July 164 

On  an  Improved  Dry  Process.    By  M.  Carey  Lea....  164 

Enamelled  Cameo  Photographs 168 

The  New  Imitation  Enamels 168 

Views  Abroad  and  Across.    By  Edward  L.  Wilson,  170 
Class  in  Landscape  Photography 174 


page 

Our  Picture 176 

Photography  in  France.    By  Ernest  Lacan... 176 

German  Correspondence.    By  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  Ph.D....  179 
Notes  In  and  Out  of  the  Studio.    By  G.  Wharton 

Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A 182 

Society  Gossip 183 

The  Lessons  of  the  Prize  Pictures.    By  G.  R.  C 187 

Matters  of  the  N.  P.  A 188 

Talk  and  Tattle 189 

Editor's  Table 190 


Embellishment.—"  Dressing  for  the  Masquerade."    Negatives  by  L.  G.  Bigelow.    Prints  by  Wm.  H.  Rhoads, 

Philadelphia. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s  Paper. 

Anderson,  J.  A.    Photographic  Apparatus. 

Anthony  &  Co.,  E.  &  H.  T.    The  Bowdish  Chair. 

Art  Publications. 

Beard,  J.  P.    Photographic  Goods. 

Benerman  &  Wilson.    Lantern  Slides. 

Bierstadt,  Charles.    Photo.  Views. 

Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

Bullock  &  Crenshaw.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Cameo  Press,  The  Universal. 

Chameleon  Barometer. 

Clemons,  Jno.  R.    Albumen  Paper.    Varnish. 

Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  A.  M.    Photograph  Cards. 

Cooper  &  Co.,  Chas.    Portrait  Lenses. 

Curtis,  G.  E.    Stereo.  Views. 

Damaged  Lantern  Slides. 

Dean,  John  &  Co.    Adamantean  Ferrotype  Plates. 

Entrekin,  W.  G.    Oscillating  Enameler. 

French,  B.  &  Co.    Voigtlander  Lenses,  &c. 

Gihon,  John  L.    Opaque  and  Cut-Outs. 

Griswold's  Life  Compositions  for  the  Stereoscope. 

Hance's  Photo.  Specialties. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs. 

Hale,  Kilburn  &  Co.    Frames. 

Harbach,  Theo.  J.    Lantern  Slides. 

Improved  Photograph  Covers. 

Jacoby,  W.  H.    Printing  Frame. 

Karstens  &  Braun.    Albumen  Paper. 

Kilburn  Bros.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Knell,  George.    Photo.  Furniture. 

Lewis,  R.  A.    Collodion. 

Liesegang,  E.    Albumen  Paper, 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 

Loeffler,  J.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Lcescher  &  Petsch.    A  New  Invoice  of  Studies. 

Marion  &  Co.    Specialties. 

Magee,  James  F.  &  Co.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Marcy's  Sciopticon,  &c. 

McAllister,  W.  Mitchell.    Manufacturing  Optician. 

McCollin,  Thos.  H.    Photographic  Materials. 


Moore,  Albert.    Solar  Printing. 
Mosaics,  1874. 

Moulton,  L.  V.    Rapid  Photo-Washer. 
Newell's  Improved  Bath-Holder. 
Pattberg,  Lewis  &  Bro.    Passepartouts,  &c. 
Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 
Photographer's  Pocket  Reference-Book. 
Photographic  Publications. 
Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 
Powers  &  Weightman.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Premiums  for  1874,  for  New  Subscribers  to  "Philadel- 
phia Photographer.'' 
Prize  Pictures. 

Rau,  Geo.    German  Albumen  Colors. 
Rice  &  Thompson.    Photo.  Stock  House. 
Robinson's  New  Photo.  Trimmer. 
Robinson's  Metallic  Guides. 
Rohaut  &  Hutinet.    Photographic  Mounts. 
Ross'  Portrait  and  View  Lenses. 
Rotter,  Geo.  &  Co.    Albumen  Paper. 
Ryan,  D.  J.    Photo.  Stock  Depot,  Chromos,  &c. 
Sauter,  G.    Passepartouts. 
Schwarze  &  Valk.    Photo,  Papers. 
Scovill  Manf'g.  Co.    Photographic  Materials. 
Seavey  L.  W.    Scenic  Artist,  Backgrounds,  &c. 
Snelling,  H.  H.    Lebanon  Rustic  Frame. 
Steinheil's  New  Aplanatic  Lenses. 
Stevens,  Chas.  W.    Photographic  Goods. 
The  Practical  Printer, 
vogel's  hand-book  of  photography. 
Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papers. 
Weller's  Stereoscopic  Treasures. 
Wet  Photographic  Books. 
Wilson,  Charles  A.    Photographic  Goods. 
Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials,  &c. 
Willy  Wallach.    Albumen  Paper. 
Woodward,  D.  A.    Solar  Cameras. 
Zentmayer,  Joseph.    Lenses. 
Zimmerman  Bros.    Photographic  Stock  Depot. 


BELOW  IS  A  F  AC-SIMILE  OF  THE  LABEL  USED  OX  IIANCE'S  NEW 
DOUBLE  IODIZED  COLLODION.- BE  SURE  YOU  TRY  IT. 

I  can  confidently  recommend  it  as  being  possessed  of  very  superior  advantages 
over  any  other  Collodion,  but  not  desiring  to  say  too  much  about  my  own  pro- 
ductions, respectfully  request  portrait  photographers  to  try  it.  The  advantages 
of  a  Collodion  made  xoith  these  new  salts  is  spoken  of  by  several  leading  pho- 
tographers, as  follows : 

"  Although  I  have  made  use,  extensively,  of  other  iodides,  I  have  never  found  any  collo- 
dion to  give  such  perfect  satisfaction  as  this  does  after  it  has  become  ripe.  *  *  *  Like  good 
wine,  it  improves  with  age." — J.  Carbutt. 

"  For  fineness  of  film,  exquisite  detail,  and  the  production  of  good  printing  qualities,  I 
have  never  seen  it  equalled." — Ii.  J.  Chute. 


\ 
>> 

o 

T3 

0 

V 

a 

3 

IS5 

3 

I— 1 

so 

CO 

& 

O 

c 
u 

03 

& 

XL 
III 

T3 

o 

03 

O 
!> 

0. 

C3 

Q 

o 

-1 

03 
03 

c 

1 

111 

s~ 

3 
O 

03 

> 

o 

CM 

cS 

a 

o 

111 

M 

o 

o 

O 

■-Hf 

a> 

-3 

■** 

bfl 

TS 

.3 

< 

o 

s 

03 

CO 

■- 

o 

>    .s. 

o 

c 

1     S 

,3 

* 

•    < 

o 
u 

5 

.None  genuine  without  the  signature  of  the  manufacturer 
over  the  cork. 

ALFRED  L.  HANCE,  Philadelphia. 


C 

03 

3 

h        3 
fciD       O 

-3 

1-H 

03 

ec 

s 

O 

■ 

> 

Ah 

z 

CO 

d 

H 

Q-l 

< 

03 

3 

GO 

2 

-3 
o 

£ 

* 

M 

•5 

> 

'     '-*^> 

03 

m 

* 

S*> 

«H 

N 

J3 

a; 

..     T3 

&0 

O 

es       < 

t-l 

cc 

-w        c 

: 

s  * 

HANGFS    BATH    PRESERVATIVE. 

If  you  would  escape  the  worries  and  vexations  of  the  dark-room,  use  it.     Messrs.  R.  Newell 
&  Son  say:  i:  We  have  doctored  these  baths  with  your  Preservative;  it  is  invaluable." 


HANCE'S  BATH  PRESERVA- 
TIVE. Knowing  the  difficulties  photog- 
raphers encounter  in  the  use  of  the  negative 
bath,  arising  from  various  causes,  and  often 
beyond  the  comprehension  or  ability  of  the 
operator  to  solve,  I  have  sought  for  some- 
thing that  would  not  only  cure,  but  prevent, 
many  of  the  ills  that  negative  baths  are  sub- 
ject to. 

In  the  "  British  Journal  of  Photography" 
of  last  year,  Mr.  A.  L.  Henderson  recom- 
mended the  use  of  nitrate  of  barytes  as  of 
great  advantage  in  the  bath.  Acting  upon 
this  suggestion,  and  taking  the  nitrate  of 
barytes  as  a  basis,  I  have  prepared  a  com- 
pound which  I  offer  to  the  fraternity  as  a 
Bath  Preservative. 

It  is  a  trite  saying  that  an  ounce  of  preven- 


tive is  worth  a  pound  of  cure,  and  I  pre- 
sume all  photographers  would  appreciate 
the  principle,  and  apply  the  preventive  if  it 
were  within  their  reach.  This  Preservative 
has  been  proved  to  keep  the  bath  in  good 
working  condition  almost  indefinitely.  By 
its  use  the  bath  is  worked  with  much  less 
acid,  consequently  is  more  sensitive,  streaks 
and  stains  are  avoided,  no  pinholes  from 
an  excess  of  iodide,  and  redevelopment  is 
seldom  necessary.  Disordered  baths  are  at 
once  restored,  and  an  occasional  evaporation 
and  strengthening  only  is  necessary  to  keep 
them  in  working  condition.  Photographers 
will  find  this  a  great  boon.  Try  it  and  be 
convinced. 

Full   directions    for   use   accompany  the 
Preservative. 


ALFRED  L.  HANCE,  Manufacturer,  126  North  Seventh  St.,  Phila. 


WH&T  ARE  NANCE'S  PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES  ? 


HAKCE'S  BATH  PRESERVA- 
TIVE. A  sure  preventive  of  pinholes, 
stains,  &c.  It  preserves  the  bath  in  good 
working  condition,  and  will  be  found  worth 
its  weight  in  gold. 

HANCE'S  DOUBLE  IODIZED 
COLLODION.  This  is  made  by  com- 
pounding the  different  iodides  according  to 
their  equivalents,  and  producing  a  new  salt. 
It  is  being  used  by  some  of  the  best  photog- 
raphers, but  its  general  use  is  retarded,  no 
doubt,  by  the  extra  trouble  in  making  it. 
The  peculiarities  of  this  Collodion  are  good 
keeping  qualities,  its  improvement  by  age, 
and  the  richness  of  effect  produced  in  the 
negative,  the  film  being  perfectly  structure- 
less. As  it  requires  time  to  ripen,  I  have 
the  advantage  of  making  a  quantity  and 
keeping  it  always  ready  to  supply  any  de- 
mand. 

ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  POR- 
TRAIT COLLODION  is  made  ac- 
cording to  the  formula  used  by  Mr.  Ander- 
son in  Mr.  Kurtz's  gallery  in  New  York. 
It  is  especially  adapted  to  portrait  work. 

Owing  to  the  cost  of  materials,  manufac- 
turing, &c,  together  with  the  royalty  paid, 
the  above  brand  of  Collodion  will  be  ad- 
vanced May  1st  from  $1.50  to  $1.75  per  lb. 
All  interested  will  please  take  notice. 

A.  L.  Hance. 

HANCE'S  WHITE  MOUNTAIN 

COLLODION  is  adapted  more'especially 
to  outdoor  work,  and  for  quick  working, 
delineating  foliage,  frost-work,  or  sky,  it 
stands  unrivalled.  It  is  made  after  the  for- 
mula used  by  that  celebrated  mountain 
artist,  B.  W.  Kilburn,  of  Littleton,  N.  H., 
whose  work  is  too  well  known  to  need  any 
comments. 

CURTIS'  NIAGARA  FALLS 
COLLODION  is  another  used  for  land- 
scapes. The  wonderfully  beautiful  views 
made  by  Mr.  Curtis,  of  the  great  cataract, 
with  this  collodion,  have  a  world-wide  repu- 
tation, and  are  an  indisputable  evidence 
that  he  could  have  nothing  better  to  pro- 
duce such  magnificent  work. 

HANCE'S  PECULIAR  POR- 
TRAIT COLLODION  is  peculiar  in 
that  it  is  prepared  without  bromides,  and  is 
adapted  for  use  with  Black's  acid  bath, 
To  those  using  the  acid  bath  this  collodion 
is  indispensable.    Formula  on  the  bottle. 


TRASK'S  FERROTYPE  COL- 
LODION is  made  especially  for  positive 
pictures.  Mr.  Trask  has  no  superior  in  this 
class  of  work,  and  this  collodion  is  the  result 
of  his  practice  and  experience  for  years  in 
proving  what  was  BEST.  It  is  made  after 
his  formula  and  ferrotypers  will  find  it  all 
that  can  be  desired. 

CUMMINGS'   GRIT  VARNISH 

gives  a  very  fine  surface  for  retouching. 
Those  that  use  a  varnish  of  this  kind  will 
find  that  this  has  no  superior.  By  it  the 
retouching  is  greatly  facilitated  and  the 
same  amount  of  work  on  a  negative  may 
be  done  with  it  in  half  the  time  that  would 
be  required  without  it. 

HANCE'S  SILVER  SPRAY 
GUN  COTTON  is  now  being  used  by 
many  of  the  best  photographers,  and  the 
testimonials  I  am  receiving  are  sufficient 
evidence  of  its  excellence.  1  prepare  it  with 
great  care,  and  warrant  %t  free  from  acid, 
very  soluble,  gives  good  intensity  so  that 
no  redevelopment  is  necessary,  gives  perfect 
detail,  and  a  film  pure  and  structureless. 

HANCE'S  DELICATE  CREAM 
GUN  COTTON  is  adapted  to  those  who 
like  a  very  delicate,  soft-working  collodion, 
giving  all  the  modelling  especially  in  the 
Rembrandt  style,  and  with  light  drapery. 
Its  sensitiveness  renders  it  particularly 
adapted  for  children,  or  any  work  that  re- 
quires short  exposure. 

GILL'S  CONCENTRATED 
CHROMO  INTENSIFIER  is  in- 
tended to  strengthen  the  negative.  It  im- 
parts a  beautiful  tone  and  gives  excellent 
printing  qualities. 

HANCE'S  GROUND-GLASS 
SUBSTITUTE  is  simply  what  its  name 
implies,  a  substitute  for  ground-glass  for 
any  purpose  that  it  is  used  for  in  the  gallery. 
It  is  so  perfect  an  imitation  of  ground-glass 
that -it  can  only  be  distinguished  by  the 
closest  scrutiny.  Its  surface  is  so  fine  that 
it  is  just  the  thing  for  cameras,  and  it  is 
being  used  now  very  extensively  for  that 
purpose.  To  the  landscape  photographer 
a  bottle  of  it  is  indispensable.  If  he  breaks 
his  ground-glass,  which  often  happens  in  the 
field,  he  has  only  to  coat  a  plate,  such  as  he 
is  sure  to  have  with  him  for  negatives,  with 
the  substitute,  and  in  a  few  moments  his 
ground-glass  is  replaced  and  his  work  goes 
on.  It  is  equally  useful  in  the  printing 
room,  and  any  photographer  who  has  once 
used  it  will  never  asrain  be  without  it. 


BELOW  IS  A  F  AC-SIMILE  OF  THE  LABEL  USED  ON  HANCE'S  NEW 
DOUBLE  IODIZED  COLLODION.— BE  SURE  YOU  TRY  IT. 

I  can  confidently  recommend  it  as  being  possessed  of  very  superior  advantages 
over  any  other  Collodion,  but  not  desiring  to  say  too  much  about  my  own  pro- 
ductions, respectfully  request  portrait  photographers  to  try  it.  The  advantages 
of  a  Collodion  made  with  these  new  salts  is  spoken  of  by  several  leading  pho- 
tographers, as  follows : 

"  Although  I  have  mado  use,  extensively,  of  other  iodides,  I  have  never  found  any  collo- 
dion to  give  such  perfect  satisfaction  as  this  does  after  it  has  become  ripe.  *  *  *  Like  good 
wine,  it  improves  with  age." — J.  Carbutt. 

"  For  fineness  of  film,  exquisite  detail,  and  the  production  of  good  printing  qualities,  I 
have  never  seen  it  equalled." — li.  J.  Chute. 


SKDisaKBiaa^ 


None  genuine  without  the  signature  of  the  manufacturer 
over  the  cork. 

ALFRED  L.  HANCE,  Philadelphia. 


s 

p 

bJD      O 

TD 

T-H 

S3 

< 
O 

■ 

> 

Ph 

z 

CO 

o 

H 

in 

< 

2 

m 

12 
O 

s 

£? 

1— 1 

rrs 

> 

•\\ 

o 

CO 

£ 

>~> 

en 

N 

-C 

0> 

-     T3 

W> 

O 

<&        c 

M 

CO 

u      *■ 

-*J          c 

1 

g  * 

HANGED    BATH    PRESERVATIVE, 

If  you  would  escape  the  worries  and  vexations  of  the  dark-room,  use  it.     Messrs.  E..  Newell 
&  Son  say :  "  We  have  doctored  these  baths  with  your  Preservative ;  it  is  invaluable." 


HANCE'S  BATH  PRESERVA- 
TIVE. Knowing  the  difficulties  photog- 
raphers encounter  in  the  use  of  the  negative 
bath,  arising  from  various  causes,  and  often 
beyond  the  comprehension  or  ability  of  the 
operator  to  solve,  I  have  sought  for  some- 
thing that  would  not  only  cure,  but  prevent, 
many  of  the  ills  that  negative  baths  are  sub- 
ject to. 

In  the  "  British  Journal  of  Photography  " 
of  last  year,  Mr.  A.  L.  Henderson  recom- 
mended the  use  of  nitrate  of  barytes  as  of 
great  advantage  in  the  bath.  Acting  upon 
this  suggestion,  and  taking  the  nitrate  of 
barytes  as  a  basis,  I  have  prepared  a  com- 
pound which  I  offer  to  the  fraternity  as  a 
Bath  Preservative. 

It  is  a  trite  saying  that  an  ounce  of  preven- 


tive is  worth  a  pound  of  cure,  and  I  pre- 
sume all  photographers  would  appreciate 
the  principle,  and  apply  the  preventive  if  it 
were  within  their  reach.  This  Preservative 
has  been  proved  to  keep  the  bath  in  good 
working  condition  almost  indefinitely.  By 
its  use  the  bath  is  worked  with  much  less 
acid,  consequently  is  more  sensitive,  streaks 
and  stains  are  avoided,  no  pinholes  from 
an  excess  of  iodide,  and  redevelopment  is 
seldom  necessary.  Disordered  baths  are  at 
once  restored,  and  an  occasional  evaporation 
and  strengthening  only  is  necessary  to  keep 
them  in  working  condition.  Photographers 
will  find  this  a  great  boon.  Try  it  and  be 
convinced. 

Full   directions    for   use   accompany  the 
Preservative. 


ALFRED  L.  HANGE,  Manufacturer,  126  North  Seventh  St,,  Phila. 


WHAT  ARE  HANCE'S  PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES  ? 


HASCE'S  BATH  PRESERVA- 
TIVE. A  sure  preventive  of  pinholes, 
stains,  &c.  It  preserves  the  Lath  in  good 
working  condition,  and  will  be  found  worth 
its  weight  in  gold. 

HANCE'S  DOUBLE  IODIZED 

COLLODION.  This  is  made  by  com- 
pounding the  different  iodides  according  to 
their  equivalents,  and  producing  a  new  salt. 
It  is  being  used  by  some  of  the  best  photog- 
raphers, but  its  general  use  is  retarded,  no 
doubt,  by  the  extra  trouble  in  making  it. 
The  peculiarities  of  this  Collodion  are  good 
keeping  qualities,  its  improvement  by  age, 
and  the  richness  of  effect  produced  in  the 
negative,  the  film  being  perfectly  structure- 
less. As  it  requires  time  to  ripen,  I  have 
the  advantage  of  making  a  quantity  and 
keeping  it  always  ready  to  supply  any  de- 
mand. 

ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  POR- 
TRAIT COLLODION  is  made  ac- 
cording to  the  formula  used  by  Mr.  Ander- 
son in  Mr.  Kurtz's  gallery  in  New  York. 
It  is  especially  adapted  to  portrait  work. 

Owing  to  the  cost  of  materials,  manufac- 
turing, &c,  together  with  the  roj-alty  paid, 
the  above  brand  of  Collodion  will  be  ad- 
vanced May  1st  from  $1.50  to  $1.75  per  lb. 
All  interested  will  please  take  notice. 

A.  L.  Hance. 

HANCE'S  WHITE  MOUNTAIN 

COLLODION  is  adapted  more  especially 
to  outdoor  work,  and  for  quick  working, 
delineating  foliage,  frost-work,  or  sky,  It 
stands  unrivalled.  It  is  made  after  the  for- 
mula used  by  that  celebrated  mountain 
artist,  B.  W.  Kilburn,  of  Littleton,  N.  H., 
whose  work  is  too  well  known  to  need  any 
comments. 

CURTIS'  NIAGARA  FALLS 
COLLODION  is  another  used  for  land- 
scapes. The  wonderfully  beautiful  views 
made  by  Mr.  Curtis,  of  the  great  cataract, 
with  this  collodion,  have  a  world-wide  repu- 
tation, and  are  an  indisputable  evidence 
that  he  could  have  nothing  better  to  pro- 
duce such  magnificent  work. 

HANCE'S  PECULIAR  POR- 
TRAIT COLLODION  is  peculiar  in 
that  it  is  prepared  without  bromides,  and  is 
adapted  for  use  with  Black's  acid  bath, 
To  those  using  the  acid  bath  this  collodion 
is  indispensable.    Formula  on  the  bottle. 


TRASK'S  FERROTYPE  COL- 
LODION is  made  especially  for  positive 
pictures.  Mr.  Trask  has  no  superior  in  this 
class  of  work,  and  this  collodion  is  the  result 
of  his  practice  and  experience  for  years  in 
proving  what  was  BEST.  It  is  made  after 
his  formula  and  ferrotypers  will  find  it  all 
that  can  be  desired. 

CUMMINGS'   GRIT  VARNISH 

gives  a  very  fine  surface  for  retouching. 
Those  that  use  a  varnish  of  this  kind  will 
find  that  this  has  no  superior.  By  it  the 
retouching  is  greatly  facilitated  and  the 
same  amount  of  work  on  a  negative  may 
be  done  with  it  in  half  the  time  that  would 
be  required  without  it. 

HANCE'S    SILVER    SPRAY 

GUN  COTTON  is  now  being  used  by 
many  of  the  best  photographers,  and  the 
testimonials  I  am  receiving  are  sufficient 
evidence  of  its  excellence.  1  prepare  it  with 
great  care,  and  warrant  it  free  from  acid, 
very  soluble,  gives  good  intensity  so  that 
no  redevelopment  is  necessary,  gives  perfect 
detail,  and  a  film  pure  and  structureless. 

HANCE'S  DELICATE  CREAM 
GUN  COTTON  is  adapted  to  those  who 
like  a  very  delicate,  soft-working  collodion, 
giving  all  the  modelling  especially  in  the 
Kembrandt  style,  and  with  light  drapery. 
Its  sensitiveness  renders  it  particularly 
adapted  for  children,  or  any  work  that  re- 
quires short  exposure. 

GILL'S  CONCENTRATED 
CHROMO  INTENSIFIER  is  in- 
tended to  strengthen  the  negative.  It  im- 
parts a  beautiful  tone  and  gives  excellent 
printing  qualities. 

HANCE'S  GROUND-GLASS 
SUBSTITUTE  is  simply  what  its  name 
implies,  a  substitute  for  ground-glass  for 
any  purpose  that  it  is  used  for  in  the  gallery. 
It  is  so  perfect  an  imitation  of  ground-glass 
that  it  can  only  be  distinguished  by  the 
closest  scrutiny.  Its  surface  is  so  fine  that 
it  is  just  the  thing  for  cameras,  and  it  is 
being  used  now  very  extensively  for  that 
purpose.  To  the  landscape  photographer 
a  bottle  of  it  is  indispensable.  If  he  breaks 
his  ground-glass,  which  often  happens  in  the 
field,  he  has  only  to  coat  a  plate,  such  as  he 
is  sure  to  have  with  him  for  negatives,  with 
the  substitute,  and  in  a  few  moments  his 
ground-glass  is  replaced  and  his  work  goes 
on.  It  is  equally  useful  in  the  printing 
room,  and  any  photographer  who  has  once 
used  it  will  never  asjain  be  without  it. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES. 

AEE  SOLD  BY  ALL  DEALEES  AS  FOLLOWS  : 

Hance's  Double  Iodized  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Elbert  Anderson's  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.75 Half-pound,  90  Cts. 

Hance's  White  Mountain  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Curtis'  Niagara  Falls  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50. Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Hance's  Peculiar  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Trask's  Ferrotype  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Cummings'  Grit  Varnish, 

Per  Bottle, 40  Cts. 

Hance's  Silver  Spray  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Delicate  Cream  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, : 80  Cts. 

Gill's  Concentrated  Chromo  Intensifier, 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute, 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Bath  Preservative  ne&daott^s^r0^ 

Per  Bottle, 1  00. 

TRADE  MARK :— THE  BEST  GOODS— FULL  MEASURE. 

TRY  HANCE'S  PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES. 

See  Testimonials  in  former  and  future  advertisements. 

SCOVILL  MF'G  CO.,  Trade  Ag'ts.       ALFEED  L.  HANCE,  Manufac'r, 

NEW  YOKK.  126  N.  7th  St.,  Philadelphia. 


The  SUBSTITUTE  is  in  the  form  of  a  varnish ;  is  flowed  and  dried  the  same  as  varnish, 
but  dries  with  a  granulated  or  ground-glass  surface. 

WHEREVER  GROUND  GLASS  IS  REQUIRED, 
HANCE'S  substitute  answers  every  purpose. 

FOR  GROUND  GLASSES  FOE  CAMEEAS, 

FOR  GLAZING  SKY  AND  SIDE-LIGHTS, 

FOE  OBSCUEING  STUDIO  AND  OFFICE  DOORS, 
FOR  PRINTING  WEAK  NEGATIVES 
FOR  VIGNETTE  GLASSES, 

FOR  A  RETOUCHING  VARNISH, 

FOR  SOFTENING  STRONG  NEGATIVES, 

FOR  THE  CELEBRATED  BERLIN  PROCESS. 

Use  the  "  Substitute."        Use  the  "  Substitute." 

PRICE,  FIFTY  CENTS  PER  BOTTLE. 


LARGE  QUANTITIES  FOR  STUDIO  LIGHTS,  &c,  SUPPLIED  LOW. 


READ  A  FEW  TESTIMONIALS: 

Youngstown,  Ohio,  Jan.  27,  1873. 

The  bottle  of  Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute  came  safely  to  hand.    I  selected  a  good  piece  of  glass,  coated  it  with  the 

Substitute,  and  in  a  few  moments  I  had  one  of  the  finest  ground  glasses  I  ever  saw.    I  have  been  using  it  four  or  five  days, 

and  the  more  I  use  it  the  more  I  am  pleased  with  it.    The  "surface  "  is  flue  and  delicate,  and  a  great  relief  to  the  eyes. 

I  would  not  be  without  a  bottle  for  ten  dollars.  Lon  Blackburn,  Operator,  Le  Roy's  Gallery. 

R.  Newell  &  Son's  Gallery,  626  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia,  Feb.  17th,  1873. 
I  have  been  frequently  asked  to  recommend  some  new  article  or  preparation  used  in  our  business,  but  have  very  rarely  con- 
sented to  do  so  from  the  fact  that  many  things  that  "promise  very  fair,"  after  thorough  trial,  prove  worthless.  Having  used 
your  different  preparations  of  Collodions,  Intensifiers,  and  Varnish  for  the  past  six  months  in  my  gallery,  I  can  conscien- 
tiously pronounce  them  first-class  in  every  respect.  Your  Ground  Glass  Substitute!  consider  one  of  the  most  practical  and 
useful  articles  I  have  ever  used,  and  no  photographer  who  has  learned  its  value  for  coating  the  backs  of  thin  negatives,  or 
making  ground  glass  for  the  camera  box,  would  ever  be  without  it.  I  have  found  so  many  ways  of  using  it  to  advantage 
that  I  shall  hereafter  order  it  by  the  gallon.  Yours  truly, 

R.  Newell 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES. 

AEE  SOLD  BY  ALL  DEALERS  AS  FOLLOWS  : 

Hance's  Double  Iodized  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Elbert  Anderson's  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.75 Half-pound,  90  Cts. 

Hance's  White  Mountain  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Curtis'  Niagara  Falls  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Hance's  Peculiar  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Trask's  Ferrotype  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Cummings'  Grit  Varnish, 

Per  Bottle, 40  Cts. 

Hance's  Silver  Spray  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, ....: 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Delicate  Cream  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, 80  Cts. 

Gill's  Concentrated  Chromo  Intensifier, 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute, 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Bath  Preservative  HMdBoffssoSbTro«u«, 

Per  Bottle, 1  OO. 

TRADEMARK:— THE  BEST  GOODS— FULL  MEASURE. 

TRY  HANCE'S  PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES. 

See  Testimonials  in  former  and  future  advertisements. 

SOOVILL  MF'G  CO.,  Trade  Ag'ts.       ALFEED  L.  HANCE,  Manufac'r, 

NEW  YOKK.  126  N.  7  th  St.,  Philadelphia. 


ROUND  GLAS 

SUBSTITUTE. 


The  SUBSTITUTE  is  in  the  form  of  a  varnish  ;  is  flowed  and  dried  the  same  as  varnish, 
but  dries  with  a  granulated  or  ground-glass  surface. 

WHEREVER  GROUND  GLASS  IS  REQUIRED, 
ELANCE'S  SUBSTITUTE  ANSWERS  EVERY  PURPOSE. 

FOR  GROUND  GLASSES  FOR  CAMERAS, 

FOR  GLAZING  SKY  AND  SIDE-LIGHTS, 

FOR  OBSCURING  STUDIO  AND  OFFICE  DOORS, 
FOR  PRINTING  WEAK  NEGATIVES 
FOR  VIGNETTE  GLASSES, 

FOR  A  RETOUCHING  VARNISH, 

FOR  SOFTENING  STRONG  NEGATIVES, 

FOR  THE  CELEBRATED  BERLIN  PROCESS. 

Use  the  "  Substitute."        Use  the  "  Substitute." 

PRICE,  FIFTY  CENTS  PER  BOTTLE. 


LARGE  QUANTITIES  FOR  STUDIO  LIGHTS,  &c,  SUPPLIED  LOW. 


READ  A  FEW  TESTIMONIALS: 

Youngstown,  Ohio,  Jan.  27,  1873. 

The  bottle  of  Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute  came  safely  to  hand.    I  selected  a  good  piece  of  glass,  coated  it  with  the 

Substitute,  and  in  a  few  moments  I  had  one  of  the  finest  ground  glasses  I  ever  saw.    I  have  been  using  it  four  or  five  days, 

and  the  more  I  use  it  the  more  I  am  pleased  with  it.    The  "surface"  is  fine  and  delicate,  and  a  great  relief  to  the  eyes. 

I  would  not  be  without  a  bottle  for  ten  dollars.  Lon  Blackburn,  Operator,  Le  Roy's  Gallery. 

R.  Newell  &  Son's  Gallery,  626  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia,  Feb.  17th,  1873. 
I  have  been  frequently  asked  to  recommend  some  new  article  or  preparation  used  in  our  business,  but  have  very  rarely  con- 
sented to  do  so  from  the  fact  that  many  things  that  "promise  very  fair,"  after  thorough  trial,  prove  worthless.  Having  used 
your  different  preparations  of  Collodions,  Intensifiers,  and  Varnish  for  the  past  six  months  in  my  gallery,  I  can  conscien- 
tiously pronounce  them  first-class  in  every  respect.  Your  Ground  Glass  Substitute  I  consider  one  of  the  most  practical  and 
useful  articles  I  have  ever  used,  and  no  photographer  who  has  learned  its  value  for  coating  the  backs  of  thin  negatives,  or 
making  ground  glass  for  the  camera  box,  would  ever  be  without  it.  I  have  found  so  many  ways  of  using  it  to  advantage 
that  I  shall  hceafter  order  it  by  the  gallon.  Yours  truly, 

R.  Newell 


^gfwo§5 


& 


LIFE 


OPPOSITION 


FOR   THE   STEREOSCOPE. 


8 


CATALOGUE. 


9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 


Blowing  Bubbles. 

B  stands  for  Bumble-B. 

Blackberry  Blossoms. 

The  Hen's  Nest. 

Let  us  Have  Piece. 

Mamma,  where  was  I  when  you  were 

a  little  girl  ? 
Our  Domestic's  Relations. 
She  went  to  the  Butchers. 
My  Lady  and  My  Lady's  Maid. 
The  Mountain  Spring. 
Unveiling  a  Statue  of  Young  America. 
Young  America  in  the  Nursery. 
Young  America  as  an  Artist. 
Young  America  Asleep. 


15.  The  Sunbeam  Fairy. 

16.  The  Picture-Book. 

17.  Sitting  for  my  Picture. 

18.  Young  America  Bathing. 

19.  Young  Boston's  Ambition. 

20.  Ding-Dong-Ding,  Music  on  a  Rubber 

String. 

21.  Reflection. 

22.  The  Loiterers. 

23.  The  Cabin  Porch. 

24.  Beatrice  Shoo-Fly. 

25.  Home  Group. 

26.  A  View. 

27.  The  Gleaner. 


Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price.    $2.00  per  dozen.     Order  by  number 
DEALERS  SUPPLIED  ON  GOOD  TERMS. 


These  inimitable  pictures  are  all  natural  compositions,  and  touch  the  tender  chords  of 
human  nature  most  wonderfully.  They  are  attractive  to  every  one  who  has  a  heart,  but 
particularly  instructive  as  studies  for  photographers,  in  grouping,  posing,  and  composition. 

They  will  help  any  man  make  better  and  easier  pictures  of  children,  and  should 

be  studied. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,   Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 


In  order  that  photographers  may  have  an  early  opportunity  of  studying  the  very  elegant 
pictures  from  negatives  which  have  been  sent  to  us  in  competition  for  our 

COLD     MEDAL! 

we  publish  them  for  sale.  There  are  THIRTY  PICTURES  IN  A  SET— of  men,  women, 
and  children,  groups  and  single  figures- — and  the  following  is  a  catalogue  of  them,  numbered 
in  the  order  in  which  the  negatives  were  received. 


1  A.  N.  Hardy,  Boston,  Mass. 

2  J.  McClure  &  Co.,  St.  John,  N.B. 

3  D.  Ginter,  Conneautville,  Pa. 

4  W.  N.  Lock  wood,  Ripon,  Wis. 

5  F.  B.  Clench,  Lockport,  N.  Y. 

6  Theo.  Nieberg,  St..  Marys,  0. 

7  C.  Chadbourne,  Toledo,  0. 

8  E.  H.  Alley,  Toledo,- 0. 

9  B.  Gray,  Bloomington,  111. 

10  C.  D.  Mosher,  Chicago,  111. 

11  E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk,  Conn. 


12  N.  H.  Busey,  Baltimore,  Md. 

13  M.  T.  Carter,  Worcester,  Mass. 

14  W.  W.  Whiddit,  Newburg,  N.  Y. 

15  L.  G.  Bigelow,  Williamsport,  Pa. 

16  G.  M.  Elton,  Palmyra,  N.  Y. 

17  1.  Saunders,  Alfred  Centre,  N.  Y. 

18  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  San  Fran- 

cisco, Cal. 

19  Forrester  Clark,  Pittsfield, 

Mass. 

20  Otto  Lewin,  New  York  City. 


21  F.  L.  Stuber,  Bethlehem,  Pa. 

22  D.  T.  Burrill,   North   Bridge- 

water,  Mass. 

23  J.  Barhydt,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

24  Albright  Bros.,  Wooster,  O. 

25  F.  S.  Crowell,  Mt,  Vernon,  O. 

26  Trask  &  Bacon,  Philadelphia. 

27  G.  W.  Harris,  Lancaster,  N.  Y. 

28  B.  Williams,  Tunkhannock,  Pa. 

29  F.  Gutekunst,  Philadelphia. 

30  J.  Inglis,  Montreal,  Can. 


It  will  be  seen  that  a  number  of  our  best  photographers  have  competed. 

jg@=  THE  AWARD   WAS  MADE  FOB  NO.  18. 

Three  negatives  or  more  were  sent  by  each  competitor.     The  sets  include  one  example 
from  each  competitor.     All  the  duplicates  may  be  had  to  order. 
The  prints  are  supplied  at  the  following  rates  : 

A  Set  of  Thirty  in  the  Improved  Photograph  Cover  (advanced;,....    $4  25 

"  without        "  "  "        3  75 

Selections,  per  dozen, 2  00 


EVERY  OPERATOR  &  EVERY  PRINTER  SHOULD  GET  AND  STUDY  THEM. 


Nothing  so  really  elegant  was  ever  offered  for  sale. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSOU,  (puCBts,)  7th  &  Cherry  Sts,  Phila. 


Reflecting  Solar  Camera. 
IMPROVED 


SOLAR    CAMERAS. 


Direct  Printing  Camera. 

Manufactured  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the  original  inventor  and  patentee,  combining 
ALL  THE  IMPORTANT  improvements  that  have  been  made. 

Every  Camera  will  be  tested  and  guaranteed  before  delivery,  and  will  be  licensed  and  accompanied 
by  the  regular  Patent  Stamp  of  the  patentee. 

PRICES  OF  DIRECT  PRINTING  OR  REFLECTING  SOLAR  CAMERAS : 
10  inch  diameter  Condensing  Lens,  will  print  picture  18  x  23  in.,         .....       $190  00 

12     "  "  "  "  "  25x30  " 220  00 

15     "  "  "  "  "  "        29x36  " 275  00 

18     "  "  "  "  "  40x50  "  .         .         .         .         .    380  00 

Can  be  ordered  op  all  Stockdealers.     Boxing  charged  for  at  cost. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD,  Baltimore,  Md. 


ROBINSON'S 

INIMITABLE 

PHOTOGRAPH 
TRIMMER. 

BETTER  THAN  KNIVES, 

AND 

WILL  OUTWEAR  A 

GROSS  OF  THEM. 

See  other  Advertisement. 


Ask  your   stockdealer  to  show  it  to  you,  or 
send  direct  to  us  for  one. 

Price,  by  mail,  $3.50. 

BENEEMAN&  WILSON,  Manf'rs'Apnts, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


New  York,  May  1st,  1874. 
The  large,  new,  and  magnificent  Gallery  of 
WM.  KURTZ, 
MADISON  SQUARE,  NEW  YORK, 

Opened  April  1st,  is  furnished  with  twelve  back- 
grounds, new  in  design,  from  the  Scenic  Studio 

f  LAFAYETTE  W.  SEAVEY, 

6*  Lafayette  Place,  New  York. 

THE  KURTZ  PLAIN  combines  the  general 
effects  of  light  and  shade  desirable  and  found  in 
our  Scenic  Backgrounds.  This  is  the  first  and 
only  plain  ground  with  which  side-slips  can  be 
appropriately  used.     Send  stamp  for  sample. 


Seavey's  Background  Bulletin. 


EXTRA! 
No.  70. 

A  New  Forest  Background.    Very  peculiar  and 
effective.     Introduced  by  Bogardus,  N.  Y. 

No.  71. 

A  Rich   Interior,  with   elaborate  tapestry  on 
walls.     Introduced  by  Mora,  N.  Y. 

See  other  advertisements. 


WAYMOUTH'S 


igneiting  Papers 


ARE  NOW  MADE  OF  TWO  SHAPES,  as  shown  in  the  drawings  above.  They  consist  of  finely 
gradated,  lithographed  designs,  mounted  on  protecting  sheets  of  non-actinic  paper,  and  are  the  light 
est,  neatest,  and  best  means  of  producing  vignette  pictures  ever  offered. 

TBSTIMOUIALS: 

"  Waymouth's  Improved  Vignette  Papers  I  have  tried,  and  they  are  just  what  I  have  been  want- 
ing for  years." — Well  G.  Singhi. 

"  They  readily  admit  of  the  gradation  already  very  good,  being  modified  easily  to  suit  the  negative. 
This,  I  take  it,  is  a  point  of  great  importance." — G.  Wharton  Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A. 

"  From  a  trial  made,  we  are  enabled  to  say  that  they  answer  exceedingly  well  ;  and  they  are  certain 
to  find  favor  among  photographers — a  favor  they  well  deserve." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

' '  I  can  testify  to  the  exquisite  softness  obtained  from  your  Vignette  Papers,  which  gradual  and 
soft  effect  I  have  never  seen  equalled  by  any  other  method." — H.  A.  H.  Daniel,  Esq.,  Hon.  Sec.  of  the 
Bristol  and  Clifton  Amateur  Photographic  Association. 

"The  Waymouth  Vignetting  Paper  are  a  decided  success.  They  are  splendid." — J.  W.  §■  J.  S. 
Monlton,  Salem  Mass. 

From  Professional  Photographers. — "First-class."  "The  sample  sent  answers  perfectly."  "I 
consider  them  first  rate  articles."  "I  think  your  Vignette  Papers  will  be  a  great  improvement  on 
the  old  glasses."     Ac,  &c. 

Any  number  sent  on  receipt  of  price,  by  any  stockdealer,  or  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers, 

PHILADELPHIA. 

(See  opposite  page.) 


DO  YOU  USE 


WAYMOUTH'S 

f4fS8 

(DESIGNS    COPYRIGHTED.) 

OF  ALL  PICTURES,  THE  Thl  \f\    XjrTTv  IS  THE  MOST  ARTISTIC, 

When  properly  printed.  But  the  clumsy  devices  generally  in  use  for  printing  them, 
or  rather  for  blending  the  shading  about  the  figure,  produce  but  very  few  really  artistic 
vignette  pictures.  Either  the  shading  is  too  intensely  dark,  not  gradated  in  tint  at  all,  or 
it  shows  an  ugly  direct,  decided  line,  which  is  very  repulsive.  The  shading  should 
blend  gradually  from  the  dark  tint  nearest  to  the  figure,  off  into  the 
tvJlite  background.  The  results  are  then  soft,  artistic,  and  beautiful.  The  easiest  and 
best  way  to  secure  them  is  by  the  use  of 

WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 

THEY  AKE  NOT  CLUMSY ;  DO  NOT  BEEAK  ;  ARE  ALWAYS  READY ;  COST 
BUT  LITTLE,  AND  ARE  EASY  OF  APPLICATION  TO  ANY  NEGATIVE. 

THEY  NEED  BUT  ONE  ADJUSTMENT  TO  PRINT  ANY  QUANTITY. 

They  entirely  do  away  with  all  the  old  and  troublesome  methods,  either  wood,  metal, 
or  cotton. 

PLEASE  TBY  THE  SAMPLE  GIVEN  IN  THIS  MAGAZINE  FOE  FEB.  1874. 


Eighteen  sizes  are  now  made,  suiting  all  dimensions  of  pictures  from  a  small  carte  figure 
to  Whole-size,  Victorias,  Cabinets,  &c.  They  are  printed  in  black  for  ordinary  negatives, 
yellow  bronze  for  thin  negatives,  and  red  bronze  for  still  weaker  ones.  Directions  for  use 
accompany  each  parcel. 

IP  IR,  I  O  IE  S  : 

In  parcels  containing  one  of  each  size,  Nos.  1  to  15,  assorted  colors $1  00 

Assorted  sizes  and  colors,  by  number,  per  package  of  fifteen 1  00 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  assorted  sizes  and  colors,  for  Cartes,  by  number,  per  dozen 50 

"    6,  7,  11,  12,  and  13    "  "  "       Large  Cartes  and  Victorias,  by  number,  per  doz 75 

"    8,  9, 10,  14,  and  15    "  "  "     Cabinets  and  Whole-size,  "  u  A   100 

"    18, 17,  and  18,  "  "  "     Half  "  "  "  "       125 

{SEE  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

When  ordering,  state  the  number  and  color  you  want.  The  Waymouth  Vignette  Papers 
are  an  English  invention,  and  are  becoming  so  universally  used  in  Europe  that  we  have 
pleasure  in  introducing  them  to  our  patrons. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers,  7tn  and  Cherry,  Maia. 

FOE   SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


BALTIMORE ! 

THE  ATTENTION  OF  PHOTOGKAPHEKS  is  invited  to  my  stock  of  photographic 
goods.     I  am  prepared  to  fill  all  orders,  large  or  small,  promptly  at  best  prices. 

are  received  as  soon  as  by  any  one  in  the  market. 

AMONG  OTHER  THINGS, 

The  American  Optical  Co.'s  Apparatus, 
Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler, 
Chute's  Universal  Cameo  Press, 
Robinson's  Print-Trimmers  and  Guides, 
Morrison's  and  Steinheil's  View  Lenses, 
Waymouth's  Vignette  Papers, 
All  Makes  of  Portrait  Lenses, 
Chemicals,  Glass,  and  Frames, 

are  carefully  selected  for  my  special  sales.     My  expenses  are  light.     I  do  my  own  work 
personally,  and  can  supply  goods  as  low  as  the  next  one. 

A  trial  order  solicited.     Freight  and  expressage  from  Baltimore  very  low  to  any  point 
South  or  West. 

CHAS.A. WILSON, 

No.  7  No.  7  No.  7 

NORTH    CHARLES    STREET, 

BALTIMORE,  MD. 


P.   NICE, 


1  II  I'  N  T  K  ICSS. 


i  ruuil-C  Liorar 

1  [VAN  I)  I  ERE."  "^CVli  IO.SI   r  V. 


STRESSING  FOR  THE  JJpSQUERAOE, 


THE 


|JhihuWjrlmi  $i$ip$n$htt. 


Vol.  XI. 


JUNE,  1874. 


No.   12  6. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1874, 

By  BENEEMAN  &  WILSON, 

In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


THE  MAMMOTH  OFFER. 

We  want  to  keep  this  matter  before  the 
fraternity,  as  it  is,  perhaps,  one  of  import- 
ance to  the  life  and  future  success  of  the  Na- 
tional Photographic  Association.  From  all 
quarters  we  have  applications  for  tickets, 
and  words  of  encouragement  to  the  effect 
that  the  National  Photographic  Association 
must  be  sustained ;  but  as  these  only  com- 
prise a  few  of  the  great  number  upon  whom 
the  Association  depends  for  support,  we 
want  all  to  feel  the  necessity  of  lending  a 
helping  hand  to  place  it  on  a  firm  and  sure 
basis.  The  offer  to  which  we  call  attention, 
made  by  Messrs.  Benj.  French  &  Co.  of  Bos- 
ton, and  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.  of 
New  York,  of  a  mammoth  lens  and  camera, 
gives  every  one  a  chance  to  secure  this  prize 
for  the  small  sum  of  three  dollars.  The 
tickets  are  going  off  steadily,  and  we  shall 
expect  to  see  lively  times  over  it  at  the  Chi- 
cago convention.  Send  in  your  orders  early. 

Should  there  be  anything  concerning  the 
offer  which  you  do  not  understand,  please 
write  us  for  information. 

It  has  been  decided  that  the  articles  will 
be  drawn,  and  not  voted  for,  the  first  num- 
ber drawn  securing  the  prize. 

Several  of  those  who  have  recently  bought 
tickets  indicate  their  preference  for  that 
method ;  and,  as  intimated  in  our  last,  the  do- 
nors of  the  articles  will  respect  their  wishes. 


THE  CHICAGO  EXHIBITION   AND 
CONVENTION. 

It  is  no  unusual  thing  in  matters  na- 
tional, state,  municipal,  and  corporate,  to 
see  affairs  assuming  such  a  shape  that  a 
wretched  wreck  seems  almost  inevitable. 
And  we  confess  to  having  had  a  disagreeable 
feeling  a  few  months  ago  that  some  such 
fate  was  hovering  over  the  affairs  of  the 
National  Photographic  Association.  We- 
have  alluded  to  the  matter  frequentty,  and 
all  we  want  to  say  on  that  score  now  is,  that 
we  don't  think  so  any  more.  We  are  quite 
sure  that  the  Association  is  stronger  to-day 
than  it  has  ever  been  before,  and  we  are 
ashamed  that  we  listened  to  any  croaking 
insinuations  that  it  would  ever  be  anything 
else  than  strong.  We  were  mistaken  in  our 
estimate  of  the  esteem  in  which  the  Asso- 
ciation is  held  by  the  photographers  of  the 
United  States.  They  know  it  is  a  good 
thing  for  them  and  they  mean  to  uphold  it.. 
The  many  letters  we  have  received  from 
near  and  far,  saying  "  The  Association  must 
continue,"  "Don't  let  it  go  down,"  &c,  &c.  r 

1  -Reassured  us,  and  our  ]ate  visit  to  Chicago 
in  company  with  President  Bogardus  con- 
vinced us  that  the  National  Photographic 
Association  is  a  necessity,  and  that  there  is 
plenty  of  pluck  and  backbone  left  to  sus- 
tain it.  Moreover,  the  Annual  Convention 
and  Exhibition  to  be  held  at  Chicago,  in, 

11 


162 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


July,  is  going  to  be  the  best  one  and  the 
largest  and  most  beautiful  ever  held. 

We  spent  one  whole  day  with  President 
Bogardus  and  Local  Secretary  Hesler,  visit- 
ing the  fraternity  there,  and  in  the  evening 
one  of  the  most  enthusiastic  mass  meetings 
we  ever  saw  was  held.  A  resolution  wel- 
coming the  Association  to  Chicago  was 
adopted  unanimously.  And  although  the 
Chicago  photographers  are  not  as  ready  for 
their  guests  as  they  hope  to  be  in  a  few  years 
more,  on  account  of  the  dreadful  fire  which 
so  recently  destroyed  all  their  galleries, 
i.  e.,  ready  witb  as  handsome  studios  as  they 
would  in  their  honest  pride  like  to  show, 
yet  they  are  as  ready  with  earnest  welcome 
and  hearty  interest  to  have  you,  as  they 
ever  will  be  and  are  determined  to  do  their 
be-st.  They  are  flocking  around  Mr.  Hes- 
ler to  help  him  all  they  can,  and  all  who 
go  there  will  be  sure  of  a  genuine  West- 
ern reception.  Chicago  is  the  most  won- 
derful city  in  the  Union,  and  well  worth  a 
long  travel  to  see.  The  hotels  there  have 
hardly  any  equals  in  the  world.  The  Grand 
Interstate  Exposition  Building  is  the 
largest  of  its  kind  in  America,  and  it  has 
been  secured  for  the  National  Photo- 
graphic Association.  We  present  a  picture 
of  it  herewith.     Inside,  opposite  the  main 


and  air,  and  every  convenience  for  the  uses 
of  the  Association  will  be  attended  to.  We 
do  not  see  how  anything  could  be  better. 
Success  is  already  guaranteed  when  such 
eminent  photographers  as  Messrs.  Brand 
and  Mosher  and  Fassett  and  Rocher  and 
Hall  and  Copelin  and  their  neighbors  take 
hold,  assisted  by  the  fraternity  from  the 
neighboring  cities.  All  they  ask  of  you  is 
to  come  and  see  what  a  hearty  reception  you 
will  have,  and  how  much  they  will  have 
ready  to  teach  you  and  make  you  feel  paid 
for  any  sacrifice  you  make  to  be  there. 

The  stockdealers  are  a  unit  in  doing 
their  share  of  the  work,  and  photographers 
will  find  in  their  stores,  all  new,  a  show  of 
goods  needful  in  their  line  such  as  cannot 
be  surpassed  in  any  other  city.  Mr. 
Charles  W.  Stevens,  the  proprietor  of  the 
•'Great  Central,"  at  158  State  Street,  had 
just  returned  from  a  trip  South  when  we 
called.  He  is  within  five  minutes'  walk  of 
the  exposition  building,  and  says  :  "  Tell  the 
fraternity  we  welcome  them  to  Chicago, 
and  they  will  have  the  finest  time  they  ever 
had  together."  Since  our  visit  Mr.  Stevens 
has  announced  that  there  will  be  a  "  levee" 
held  at  his  place  during  the  incoming  and 
outgoing.  His  right-hand  man,  Mr.  G.  A. 
Douglass,  President  of  the  Chicago  Photo- 


central  entrance,  is  a  huge  fountain,  and  all 
around  it,  and  in  the  three  Art  rooms  in  the 
rear  of  it,  will  be  arranged  the  pictures  and 
other  articles  to  be  exhibited  by  our  Asso- 
ciation. In  a  gallery  over  the  entrance  the 
meetings  will  be  held,  in  full  view  of  the 
exhibition,  although  undisturbed  by  it. 
There  will  'be  plenty  of  space  and  light 


graphic  Society,  will  be  there  to  second  or 
to  lead  in  every  good  thing  for  the  common 
interest. 

Messrs.  Rice  and  Thompson  have  a  mag- 
nificent store  at  No.  259  Wabash  Avenue, 
all  newly  and  handsomely  fitted  up,  and 
well  stocked,  and  they  assured  us  that  they 
would  not  be  backward  in  their  efforts  to 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


l<;:; 


give  strength  to  the  affairs  of  the  National 
Photographic  Association. 

Messrs.  N.  C.  Thayer  &  Co.  have  just 
opened  their  new  store  at  Nos.  250  &  252 
Wabash  Avenue,  with  a  fine  stock  of  goods, 
where  Mr.  Thayer's  old  friends  will  be  sure 
to  find  him  when  he  is  not  helping  along 
the  good   work  at  the  exposition   buildings. 

And  although  latest  because  newest,  but 
not  least,  are  Messrs.  J.  P.  Beard  &  Co  , 
who  were  also  just  fitting  up  their  new 
store  at  No  48  Madison  Street.  Mr.  Beard 
is  a  young  man  new  in  the  trade  but  earnest 
in  his  desire  to  promote  the  interests  of  his 
subscribers,  and  invites  photographers  to 
make  their  headquarters  at  his  store  He 
has  three  floors  devoted  to  photography — 
one  entire  floor  to  the  American  Optical 
Co.'s  apparatus. 

Mr.  J.  A.  Anderson,  the  apparatus 
maker,  is  alive  with  the  rest  and  will  not 
be  behind.  In  fact  we  never  saw  an}-  body 
of  men  in  any  city  so  universally  interested 
in  the  welfare  of  the  National  Photographic 
Association  as  they  are  in  Chicago,  and 
when  men  work  together  in  that  way  they 
are  sure  to  accomplish  their  object.  Al- 
together we  do  not  see  how  things  could 
look  more  cheerful  than  they  do,  and  we 
predict  not  only  the  finest  exhibition  and 
convention  ever  held,  but  that  there  will 
be  more  live  photographers  in  the  land  after 
it,  more  wise  ones,  and  that  the  Association 
will  leave  Chicago  out  of  debt,  and  stronger 
than  we  ever  dreamed  of. 


A  WORD  TO  EXHIBITORS  HERE 
AND  THERE. 

1st.  To  those  in  the  West.  You  know  I 
have  for  several  years  been  trying  to  get 
the  Convention  to  Chicago,  that  you  might 
all  have  an  opportunity  of  attending  with- 
out too  great  expense.  Now  we  are  to  meet 
in  the  centre  of  the  Northwest,  and  have 
the  finest  place  to  exhibit  and  meet  in  we 
have  ever  had,  or  are  likely  to  have  again. 
I  wish  to  urge  upon  you  all  for  your  own 
benefit,  the  importance  of  being  present, 
and  also  bringing  and  exhibiting  some  of 
your  work.  Don't  be  afraid  that  others  will 
eclipse  you ;  every  man's  work  will  have 
some  good  points,  and  I  care  not  how  care- 


fully you  study  the  works  of  others,  unless 
you  hang  up  and  compare  your  own  with 
them,  you  will  not  be  able  to  detect  your 
faults,  or  see  the  point  to  correct  them. 
This  I  saw  illustrated  and  admitted  to  me 
last  year  in  Buffalo,  by  one  of  the  best 
photographers  in  the  country.  He  said  to 
me,  "  I  did  not  perceive  it  until  I  came  to 
compare ;  but  now  I  see  plainly  that  I  have 
been  lighting  too  strong  of  late,  and  must 
correct  it  as  soon  as  I  get  home,"  and  he 
was  not  alone.  Some  found  they  did  not 
light  strong  enough,  and  a  thousand  points 
can  be  seen  only  by  comparison,  so  bring 
your  work  as  well  as  yourself.  In  omitting 
this,  you  acknowledge  to  all,  and  especially 
to  your  patrons  at  home,  that  you  are  afraid 
to  have  your  pictures  hung  up  by  the  side 
of  others.  The  poorest  pictures  will  find 
some  admirers.  I  observed  this  last  July 
in  Buffalo.  Someone  exhibited  a  very  poor 
lot  of  tintypes,  and  I  saw  several  admiring 
them  as  "  splendid  " 

I  have  heard  the  remark  at  several  con- 
ventions, that  "  I  did  not  bring  work,  be- 
cause I  could  not  make  as  fine  a  show  as 
some  others."  This  is  not  necessary.  Bring 
your  best  work;  have  it  hung  and  exhibited. 
It  is  not  the  frames  you  make  ;  it  is  the 
pictures.  1  have  often  heard  the  remark 
by  people,  looking  at  photographs,  "  What 
splendid  frames,"  and  very  near  such  a 
grand  display  hung  good  pictures  in  very 
plain  frames,  and  they  would  exclaim, 
"  What  beautiful  pictures." 

We  don't  object  to  your  pictures  being 
nicely  framed,  but  don't  keep  them  away  if 
they  are  not.  Last  fall,  in  the  very  build- 
ing we  are  to  exhibit  in  next  July,  I  saw 
photographs  gaudily  framed  that  were 
passed  by  without  comment,  and  a  small 
collection  by  a  new  young  man,  plainly 
framed,  near  by,  attracted  a  great  deal  of 
attention  and  praise. 

The  above  applies  to  all  photographers  in 
small  places,  and  men  of  small  means. 
These  conventions  are  for  your  benefit,  no 
matter  where  you  are  located,  and  if  you 
wish  to  advance  in  the  art,  and  in  a  pecu- 
niary way,  don't,  through  fear  or  modesty, 
neglect  this  best  of  all  opportunities  of 
making  your  work  and  yourself  known  be- 
fore the  world. 


164 


THE  PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


To  our  Canadian  friends  we  extend  the 
right  hand  of  invitation  and  welcome,  and 
saj',  come  ! 

To  the  East  and  South,  I  know  you  will 
come,  because  we  ca?i't  do  without,  you. 

Apply  early  for  space,  so  I  may  know 
how  much  to  prepare.  Ask  for  enough, 
and  then  see  that  you  fill  it. 

Unless  serious  objection  is  made,  I  shall 
class  or  place  all  work  so  as  to  have  each 
State  by  itself.     So  it  behooves  each  State 
to  see  to  it  that  it  makes  a  good  showing. 
A.  Hesler, 
Local  Secretary  N.  P.  A. 

Post-office  address  until  July  6th, 

Evanston,  III. 
After  July  6th, 

Exposition  Building, 

Chicago,  III. 

SUGGESTIONS  TO  AIL 
Intending  to  visit  the  N.  P.  A.  Con- 
vention at  Chicago,  in  July. 

"We  want  to  see  everybody  here  by  Mon- 
day, July  13th.  Parties  coming  on  the 
different  routes  from  any  point,  and  all 
large  railroad  centres,  should  try  and  secure 
or  charter  cars  at  specific  rates,  and  fill 
them  first  with  photographers,  and  there 
not  being  enough  of  these  to  fill  them,  sell 
tickets  to  any  who  can  be  induced  to  come 
and  see  Chicago,  as  well  as  the  Exhibition. 
Please  take  action  now,  and  report  to  Per- 
manent Secretary  Wilson,  so  it  can  be  em- 
bodied in  the  circular  to  be  sent  out  the  last 
of  June. 

A.  Hesler, 
Locnl  Secretary  N.  P.  A. 


ON  AN  IMPROVED  DRY  PROCESS. 

BY    M.    CAREY    LEA. 

The  dry  processes  known  up  to  the  pres- 
ent time  divide  themselves  naturally  into 
two  very  distinct  classes,  those  like  the 
Taupenot,  Fothergill,  English,  and  other 
processes,  in  which  the  chief  constituent  of 
the  preservative  is  albumen,  and  on  the 
other  hand  those  like  the  gum  gallic,  the 
tea,  pyrogallic  acid,  tannin,  and  other  pro- 
cesses in  which  no  albumen  is  used.     The 


albumen  processes  have  certain  well-marked 
and  excellent  characteristics,  but  they  are 
all  slow  and  require  long  exposures.  Never- 
theless it  has  been  found  for  some  years 
past  in  England,  where  dry-plate  work  is 
very  popular,  that  a  large  proportion  of  the 
best  prints  exhibited  were  made  from  nega- 
tives belonging  to  the  class  of  albumen  pre- 
servatives. 

On  my  return  to  America  last  summer  I 
commenced  a  series  of  experiments  to  ascer- 
tain whether  the  advantages  of  these  two 
different  systems  could  not  be  combined, 
and  whether  a  satisfactory  rapidity  could 
not  be  imparted  to  albumen  plates,  whilst 
preserving  their  delicacy  and  fine  modula- 
tion. In  this  attempt  I  have  recently  suc- 
ceeded, even  beyond  my  hopes,  and  have 
obtained  a  process  differing  in  all  its  essen- 
tial features  from  any  now  in  use.  It  is  a 
collodio-albumen  dry  process,  and  yet  as 
rapid  as  the  wet.  At  the  same  time  in  sim- 
plicity and  quickness  of  manipulation,  I 
believe  I  may  say  it  exceeds  all  other  dry 
processes. 

Before  proceeding  to  the  details  I  may  be 
permitted  a  few  words  of  explanatory 
preface. 

When  in  the  year  1866  I  first  took  up 
the  study  of  the  emulsion  process  several 
formulae  had  been  published,  and  some  of 
these  called  for  the  presence  of  silver  nitrate 
in  excess  of  what  is  needed  to  decompose 
the  soluble  bromides  in  the  collodion.  But 
at  that  time,  the  silver  nitrate  was  always 
added  in  powder,  and  much  of  it  did  not 
pass  into  solution.  There  was  a  tendency 
for  the  grains  of  nitrate  instead  of  dissolv- 
ing to  become  coated  with  silver  bromide, 
and  then  to  resist  the  weak  solvent  power 
of  the  collodion.  I  introduced  the  system 
of  dissolving  the  silver  nitrate  by  heat  in  a 
portion  of  alcohol,  and  adding  this  to  the 
bromized  collodion  and  at  once  agitating 
violently.  In  this  way  all  of  the  silver  salt 
was  got  into  solution,  and  then  I  found  that 
whenever  the  silver  nitrate  was  present  in 
excess,  the  plates  invariably  fogged.  After  a 
continued  research  I  found  that  this  could 
be  obviated  in  two  ways,  either  by  the  in- 
troduction of  a  chloride  into  the  bromide 
collodion,  or  by  the  addition  of  aqua  regia. 
The  latter  I  gave  the  preference  to,  and  the 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


165 


general  experience  of  photographers  during 
the  years  that  have  elapsed  since  then,  has 
confirmed  that  opinion.  Sometimes,  indeed, 
an  advantage  is  gained  by  combining  both 
methods. 

The  behavior  of  the  emulsion  made  with 
silver  nitrate  in  solution  proved  absolutely 
that  up  to  that  time  no  plate  had  ever  been 
made  with  silver  nitrate  in  excess.  The 
excess  had  lain  at  the  bottom  in  powder, 
and  inert.  Its  doing  so  was  all  that  saved 
the  plates.  Had  it  dissolved,  they  would 
have  fogged.  The  addition  of  a  chloride, 
or  of  aqua  regia  first  rendered  it  possible  to 
use  silver  nitrate  in  excess,  and  the  gain  in 
sensitiveness  was  immense.  At  first  the 
extent  of  the  advantage  was  hardly  recog- 
nized,'but  latterly  it  has  been  thoroughly 
appreciated.  In  describing  the  action  of 
aqua  regia,  I  stated  that  any  amount  of  ex- 
cess of  silver  nitrate  might  be  employed, 
but  that  I  found  the  best  results  came  with 
a  small  excess.  I  regret  to  say  that  shortly 
after  a  most  unexampled  attempt  was  made 
to  appropriate  my  process  on  the  strength 
of  simply  varying  the  proportion  of  silver 
nitrate.  By  some  this  variation  was  held 
to  be  an  improvement,  whilst  other  photog- 
raphers found  that  they  succeeded  best  with 
my  formula?.  Whilst  these  discordant  re- 
sults in  nowise  justified  the  attempted  ap- 
propriation the  fact  nevertheless  remained 
unexplained,  why  such  different  conclusions 
should  have  been  come  to  by  different  ex- 
perimenters. 

It  was  not  until  some  time  after  that  I 
succeeded  in  solving  this  enigma.  I  found 
that  different  preservatives  required  very 
different  proportions  of  silver  nitrate.  Up 
to  that  time  it  had  been  customary  to  rec- 
ommend one  and  the  same  proportion  of 
silver,  no  matter  what  preservative  was  to 
follow.  This  system  was  essentially  wrong, 
for  each  different  preservative  has  its  defi- 
nite proportion  of  silver  salts  with  which  it 
gives  its  best  results.  The  less  sensitive  the 
preservative,  the  larger  the  quantity  of  silver 
nitrate  which  it  requires. 

For  a  long  time  I  had  worked  with  the 
cochineal  preservative  which  I  had  pro- 
posed. This  is  the  most  sensitive  of  all 
preservatives  known  up  to  this  time;  it 
therefore  requires  to  be  worked  with  a  very 


moderate  excess  of  silver  nitrate;  if  more 
be  used,  the  plates  are  found  to  solarize 
easily,  and  if  at  all  overexposed,  are  found 
to  intensify  with  great  difficulty. 

Subsequently  I  tried  pyrogailic  acid  and 
got  very  excellent  results.  This  substance 
proved  to  be  less  sensitive  than  cochineal, 
but.  I  found  that  this  inferior  sensitiveness 
could  be  compensated  for  by  increasing  the 
nitrate,  which  increase  was  borne  in  this 
case,  though  it  would  not  have  been  in  the 
case  of  the  cochineal.  By  further  experi- 
ments I  succeeded  in  establishing  the  gen- 
eral law  that  I  have  stated  above,  viz  ,  that 
the  less  sensitive  the  preservative,  the  larger 
the  proportion  of  silver  needed  for  it.  So 
that  we  have  a  regular  series,  cochineal, 
pyrogailic  acid,  gallic  acid,  and  tannin, 
diminishing  in  sensitiveness  from  the  first 
to  the  last,  and  each  member  requiring 
considerably  more  silver  than  the  next 
member  before  it. 

As  albumen  is  a  preservative  consider- 
ably less  sensitive  than  any  of  the  four  just 
mentioned,  less  sensitive  even  than  tannin, 
it  is  clear  that  if  it  be  used  in  the  preserva- 
tive bath,  the  dose  of  silver  must  be  very 
large  in  order  that  we  may  obtain  a  high 
degree  of  sensitiveness,  and  it  also  follows 
that  this  large  dose  will  be  borne  without 
those  inconveniences  that  accompany  its 
use  with  the  more  sensitive  preservatives. 
This  is  to  be  expected,  even  if  the  albumen 
be  mixed  with  more  sensitive  preservative 
agents,  for  as  I  have  already  shown  else- 
where, when  two  preservative  agents  of 
different  degrees  of  sensitiveness  are  mixed, 
the  result  will  be  a  degree  of  sensitiveness 
conferred^  intermediate  between  the  two. 
but  rather  inclining  to  be  lftss  sensitive. 

Applying  this  principle  I  succeeded  at 
once  in  obtaining  very  sensitive  albumen 
plates,  indeed,  far  more  sensitive  than  any 
one  would  have  believed  that  albumen 
plates  could  be.  It  is  needless  here  to  give 
the  formula,  since  it  has  been  superseded 
by  a  further  improvement  which  I  have 
just  made,  and  shall  now  describe,  and 
which  is  a  complete  departure  from  all  ex- 
isting methods  both  in  principle  and  in 
practice. 

The  albumen  plates  which  I  first  made 
were  prepared  in  the  method  usual   with 


166 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


emulsion  plates.  The  glasses  were  edged 
and  then  coated  with  emulsion,  plunged 
into  water,  and  washed  till  the  greasy  lines 
disappeared,  then  passed  into  the  albumen 
preservative  and  dried. 

In  reflecting  over  this  process,  it  occurred 
to  me  that  silver  nitrate  was  so  completely 
precipitated  by  albumen,  that  there  could 
be  no  reason  or  advantage  in  this  prelimi- 
nary washing.  That,  on  the  contrary,  it 
was  probable  that  a  better  result  would  be 
got  by  plunging  the  plate  directly  into  the 
albumen  bath  as  soon  as  set. 

The  importance  of  this  change  seemed  so 
great  that  I  first  experimented  with  it  in 
the  following  manner.  An  emulsion  was 
taken  with  a  very  large  excess  of  silver 
nitrate,  an  excess  of  ten  or  twelve  grains 
to  the  ounce.  This  large  excess  was  to 
make  the  trial  more  decisive,  and  for  the 
same  reason,  the  plate  was  coated  twice,  so 
as  to  get  a  very  thick  film  with  a  large 
quantity  of  silver  nitrate.  A  solution  of 
albumen  was  prepared,  which,  to  increase 
the  severity  of  the  trial,  was  made  very  di- 
lute, one  per  cent,  only  of  albumen  dis- 
solved in  water,  half  a  drachm  of  albumen 
to  six  ounces  water.  Into  this  the  plate 
was  plunged  as  soon  as  set.  It  was  taken 
out  when  the  greasy  lines  had  disappeared, 
and  the  bath  was  tested  for  silver  nitrate. 
None  had  been  re  moved  from  the  plate,  and  this 
was  also  the  case  (or  only  the  very  faintest 
infinitesimal  trace)  when  the  plate  had  been 
left  in  some  time  longer.  All  the  silver  had 
been  converted  into  silver  albuminate  within 
the  film,  so  that  evidently  the  previous 
washing  as  always  hitherto  practiced  could 
be  dispensed  with  advantageously,  at  least 
with  an  album  an  preservative,  because  in 
this  way  a  larger  quantity  of  organic  insol- 
uble silver  salt  was  retained  inside  the  film. 
The  above  trial  was  made  by  daylight. 

Experiment  with  plates  prepared  in  the 
dark  and  exposed  in  the  camera  gave  the 
fullest  confirmation  of  the  expectations  I 
had  formed  :  in  fact  the  gain  was  much 
greater  than  I  had  ventured  to  hope. 

So  that  now  I  conclude  that  when  albu- 
men is  used,  the  washing  of  the  plate  is  just 
as  injurious  and  unnecessary  as  would  be  the 
washing  of  an  ordinary  wet  plate  before 
plunging  it  into  the  silver  bath.     The  wet  and 


dry  processes  are  thus  brought  curiously 
together,  for  in  both  the  plate  is  collodion- 
ized,  and  then  simply  plunged  into  a  bath, 
and  is  then  finished.  The  albumen  plate 
may  be  either  dried  or  used  wet ;  when,  wet 
it  is  even  more  sensitive  than  when  dry. 

The  simplification  obtained  in  this  way 
is  sufficiently  evident,  and  the  diminished 
trouble  in  making  the  plates,  also  the  diffi- 
culty about  pure  water  for  the  washing. 
But  these  considerations  are  very  unimpor- 
tant compared  with  the  gain  to  the  plate 
itself.     The  advantages  are: 

1.  It  is  much  more  sensitive.  With  an 
equal  exposure  the  development  is  over  in 
one-fourth  the  time,  and  with  one-fourth  as 
much  ammonia  carbonate. 

2.  The  irradiation  and  blurring  are  greatly 
diminished.  Small  dark  objects  projected 
against  a  bright  sky  are  depicted  clean  and 
sharp.  Small  leafless  twigs  in  deep  shadows 
standing  against  a  bright  sky,  instead  of 
having  an  indistinct  and  blurred  effect,  come 
out  as  sharp  as  if  they  had  been  cut  in  the 
film  with  an  engraving  tool. 

3.  There  is  better  detail  in  the  deep 
shadows,  and  more  variety  of  half  tone. 

4.  Much  less  tendency  to  spots  and  pin- 
holes. 

I  shall  now  proceed  to  give  the  formulae. 
Besides  the  introduction  of  albumen  to  the 
emulsion  process,  and  the  change  respecting 
the  washing,  I  have  found  several  other 
improvements  which  promise  to  be  valuable. 
I  find  an  advantage  in  adding  cobalt  chloride 
to  the  collodion,  and  an  alkaline  nitrite. 
These  two  changes  are  of  less  importance 
than  those  previously  mentioned.  They 
are  not  essential  and  may  be  omitted,  but 
they  have  their  utility,  and  I  prefer  to  em- 
ploy them.  Another  change  of  more  im- 
portance is  the  following.  In  processes  in 
which  albumen  has  been  used,  it  has  hitherto 
taken  the  place  of  other  preservatives.  I 
use  it  in  connection  with  them,  that  is,  with 
gallic  acid,  pyrogallic  acid,  gum,  &c. 

Collodion. 
Dry  Cadmium  Bromide,     200  grains. 
Ammonium  Bromide,    .       48       " 
Pyroxylin,     .         .  .      240      " 

Ether,    .         .  .         .20  fluid  ounces. 

Alcohol,         ...       12 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


167 


To  this  may  be  added  with  advantage  : 


Cobalt  Chloride, 
Potash  Nitrite,  . 


32  grains. 
32       " 


Potash  nitrite  dissolves  with  some  diffi- 
culty in  alcohol.  Half  the  twelve  ounces 
of  alcohol  should  be  appropriated  to  dis- 
solve the  nitrite,  the  other  salts  to  be  dis- 
solved in  the  other  half.  Keep  the  collodion 
in  a  warm  light  place  for  a  month.  With- 
out the  right  sort  of  cotton  a  total  failure 
will  result,  or  at  least  only  a  partial  success. 
The  best  pyroxylin  I  have  had  was  made 
for  me.* 

When  it  is  intended  to  prepare  an  emul- 
sion, three  or  four  ounces  of  collodion  is 
taken,  and  to  each  ounce  two  drops  of 
aqua  -  regia  are  added.  [Aqua  regia  is 
easily  prepared  by  adding  half  an  ounce 
of  nitric  acid  to  an  ounce  of  hydrochloric 
in  a  stoppered  vial,  and  setting  in  hot  water 
until  the  mixture  turns  orange  color.) 

The  silver  nitrate  in  fine  powder  is 
weighed  out,  taking  twenty-three  grains  to 
each  ounce  of  collodion  (if  the  cobalt 
chloride  and  potash  nitrite  are  used,  then 
twenty-five  grains  silver  nitrate).  This  is 
dissolved  in  alcohol.  To  do  this,  take  a 
large  test-tube,  capable  of  holding  about 
three  ounces,  so  that  the  alcohol  may  occupy 
but  a  small  space  at  the  bottom,  and  he  in 
no  danger  of  boiling  over.  Cover  the  pow- 
dered nitrate  with  alcohol  about  an  inch 
deep.  Boil  over  a  gas  flame,  shake,  boil 
again,  and  after  a  couple  of  minutes  pour 
this  into  the  bottle  of  collodion,  and  in- 
stantly shake  well  for  a  couple  of  minutes. 
Pour  a  rather  less  quantity  of  alcohol  over 
the  residue  in  the  test-tube,  and  repeat. 
The  third  time  ought  to  finish  the  solution, 
but  if  not  a  fourth  may  follow.  The  shak- 
ing is  much  more  effective  if  a  bottle  of  such 
size  be  selected  that  it  is  only  about  one- 
third  filled.  Of  course  it  must  be  wrapped 
in  opaque  yellow  paper. 

After  about  ten  or  twelve  hours  it  will 
be  ready  for  use.  In  the  middle  of  this  in- 
terval it  should  have  one  more  good  shak- 
ing.    Just  before  using  it  should  be  filtered 

*  By  Mr.  Peter  Parys,  512  Hallowell  Street, 
Philadelphia,  from  whom  this  particular  grade 
can  be  obtained.   I 


through  sponge,  or  fine  close  linen.  The 
plates  should  bo  edged  with  India-rubber 
dissolved  in  benzole,  the  edging  along  the 
sides  not  quite  meeting  that  at  the  ends, 
but  leaving  an  opening  for  the  escape  of 
water  under  the  film.  To  get  an  even  coat> 
pour  on  plenty,  carry  it  over  the  plate  quickly, 
and  in  rocking,  raise  the  far  end  but  little, 
and  slowly.  These  three  rules  will  be  found 
very  useful. 

As  soon  as  set,  plunge  directly  into  the 
preservative  bath. 

Preservative  Bath. 


Water,        .... 

8  ounces. 

Guru  and  Sugar  Solution,  . 

10  d 

raebms 

Prepared  Albumen,    . 

5 

" 

60-grain  solution  of  Gallic 

Acid  in  Alcohol, 

3 

" 

60-grain   solution  of    Tan- 

nin in  Water, 

3 

" 

The  tannin  maybe  used  or  left  out.  The 
ingredients  must  be  added  in  the  above 
order,  or  a  flocky  precipitate  may  be  pro- 
duced which  ruins  the  bath,  even  if  filtered 
out. 

Gum-Sugar  Solution. — Dissolve  half  a 
pound  of  good  gum  arabic  and  three  ounces 
of  white  lump  sugar  in  forty-four  ounces 
water.  Add  one  and  one-half  fluid  drachm 
carbolic  acid  to  make  it  keep.  Shake  well, 
and  filter. 

Prepared  Albumen. — To  the  whites  of  five 
eggs,  add  an  equal  bulk  of  water,  and  a 
quarter  ounce  of  acetic  acid  No.  8.  Shake 
well,  and  filter  through  sponge. 

Backing. — It  is  best  to  back  the  plates. 
Take  one- quarter  pound  an  natto,  three  ounces 
water,  one-quarter  ounce  glycerin,  one-half 
drachm  carbolic  acid.  It  will  take  about 
two  days  for  the  annatto  to  soften  in  the 
water,  and  mix  up  to  a  thick  paste  to  be 
applied  with  a  brush.  If  the  paste  by 
standing  dries  too  thick  for  use,  add  water, 
but  no  more  glycerin. 

Development. — For  a  whole-size  plate,  take 
a  7  x  9  pan,  put  in  four  ounces  of  water  and 
half  a  drachm  of  sixty-grain  alcoholic  so- 
lution of  pyrogallic  acid.  Put  the  plate  in 
(having  previously  removed  the  backing  by 
sponging),  leave  it  for  a  minute,  then  take 
it  out,  and  put  into  the  pan  one-half  drachm 
of  fifteen-grain  solution  of  potassium  bro- 


168 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


mide  and  half  a  drachm  of  eighty-grain 
solution  of  flinty  (not  powdery)  ammonium 
carbonate.  If  the  exposure  has  been  suffi- 
cient, this  will  presently  bring  up  to  print- 
ing density.  If  not,  add  a  little  more  car- 
bonate. If  any  trouble  is  experienced  in 
getting  density,  it  is  better  to  redevelop 
with  citric  acid  and  silver,  either  before  or 
after  fixing.  If  the  image  is  very  faint, 
redevelop  as  before.  But  a  weak  imagejn- 
dicates  bad  materials  or  some  misman- 
agement. 

Fixing. — Very  weak  hyposulphite,  one 
ounce  to  the  gallon. 

The  negatives  obtained  by  this  process 
are  not  only  excellent  in  quality,  but  very 
attractive  in  appearance,  much  more  so 
than  ordinary  dry-plate  negatives.  In 
actual  practice  the  process  is  very  easy  and 
pleasant  to  work. 


Enamelled  Cameo  Photographs. 

These  are  a  combination  of  two  methods 
of  finishing  photographs,  which  have  been 
practiced  for  several  years,  viz.,  the  en- 
amelling by  means  of  collodion  and  gela- 
tin, and  the  popular  embossed  or  cameo 
finish. 

We  have  seen  some  charming  specimens 
of  this  style  by  Mr.  F.  A.  Wenderoth  of 
this  city,  who  is  introducing  them  very 
successfully. 

We  regret  to  learn,  however,  that  the 
idea  is  already  in  the  hands  of  the  process- 
monger,  who  is  endeavoring  to  sell  as  new 
what  has  been  the  property  of  the  fraternity 
for  years.  We  caution  our  readers  against 
being  taken  in,  as  they  have  only  to  practice 
the  processes  that  are  free  to  them,  as  pub- 
lished through  the  journals  and  year-books 
for  several  years  past,  to  acquire  all  that 
they  would  receive  for  a  hundred  dollars  or 
so,  that  they  might  pay  one  of  the  venders 
of  secrets  we  have  referred  to. 

In  the  April  (1869)  number  of  the  Phila- 
delphia Photographer  is  the  California  enam- 
elling process,  which  is  probably  as  good  as 
any  in  use.  If  it  were  not  for  the  press  of 
matter  on  our  columns,  we  would  repro- 
duce the  article  entire,  but  its  length  pre- 
cludes us  from  doing  so.     We  can  furnish 


the  number  referred  to,  however,  to  all  who 
wish  to  try  the  process. 

The  best  method  is  to  use  a  thin  mount, 
which  has  been  moistened,  and  apply  it  to 
the  picture,  at  the  time  the  latter  is  placed 
on  the  glass,  with  the  gelatin.  It  then  all 
dries  together,  and  when  the  print  leaves 
the  glass  it  is  already  mounted.  It  is  then 
trimmed  to  the  required  size,  embossed  in 
the  cameo  press,  and  lastly  mounted  on  the 
usual  mount,  which  renders  it  firm,  and 
gives  a  complete  and  beautiful  finish  to  the 
whole. 

Chute's  Universal  Cameo  Press,  as  adver- 
tised by  Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.,  is  the  best 
adapted  for  the  various  sizes  of  any  we 
know  of. 

This  is  a  picture  that  probably  will  com- 
mand a  sale  wherever  it  is  made,  and  is 
just  the  thing  for  photographers  to  intro- 
duce as  something  new. 


The  New  Imitation  Enamels. 

These  are  the  next  thing  to  be  all  the 
rage,  and  of  course  everybody  wants  to 
know  how  to  make  them.  The  secret  pro- 
cess man  is  around  preying  upon  the 
anxious  ones,  and  drawing  fifty  or  a  hundred 
dollars  wherever  he  can.  Now  I  would  say 
to  the  brethren  of  the  fraternity,  don't  be 
in  too  much  of  a  hurry.  The  methods  of 
doing  this  have  been  published  over  and 
over,  and  you  may  receive  without  cost,  or 
if  any,  very  trifling,  all  that  you  will  get 
by  being  in  haste  to  be  ahead  of  your  neigh- 
bor, and  paying  a  large  sum  of  money  for 
it.  All  will  have  it,  and  all  will  work  it, 
but  there  can  be  but  little  done  with  it  till 
the  public  have  made  up  their  mind  that 
they  want  them,  and  by  that  time  all  will 
be  in  possession  of  the  secrets. 

In  the  meantime  I  ask  photographers  to 
try  carefully  the  following  processes,  and 
work  out  something  for  themselves. 

Mr.  B.  J.  Edwards,  in  the  Year-Book  of 
Photography  for  1874,  says :  "Coat  a  piece 
of  patent  plate  glass  with  plain  collodion, 
and  allow  it  to  dry  ;  now  dissolve  one  ounce 
of  pure  neutral  gelatin  in  eight  or  ten 
ounces  of  water,  and  immerse  the  un- 
mounted prints  in  the  warm  gelatin  ;  with- 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


169 


draw  the  prints  from  the  gelatin,  and 
quickly  lay  them  faco  downwards  on  the 
collodionized  glass  plate,  pressing  out  all  air- 
bubbles  with  a  'squegee.'  Allow  the  prints 
to  set  for  about  an  hour,  and  then  mount  the 
cards,  by  means  of  a  strong  solution  of  gel- 
atin, to  the  backs  of  the  prints  without  re- 
moving them  from  the  glass  ;  when  per- 
fectly dry,  run  a  penknife  round  the  edges, 
when  they  may  be  detached  from  the  glass 
and  pressed  in  the  usual  way.  The  cards 
used  for  mounting  should  be  very  thin,  and 
of  fine  qualit}' ;  they  should  also  be  soaked 
in  water  a  few  minutes  before  being  at- 
tached to  the  prints. 

"  Another,  and  perhaps  a  better  plan  than 
the  above,  is  to  mount  a  piece  of  stout  pa- 
per to  the  backs  of  the  prints  in  place  of  the 
cards;  when  quite  dry  the  prints  are  re- 
moved from  the  glass,  and  after  being 
trimmed  and  passed  through  the  cameo 
press,  they  are  mounted  with  strong  glue  or 
gelatin  on  the  ordinary  cards.  The  most 
suitable  kind  of  photographs  for  the  pur- 
pose are  those  known  as  medallion  portraits, 
the  head  and  bust  being  taken  with  a  dark 
background,  and  the  outer  edge  of  the  paper 
tinted  to  a  warm  gray  by  exposure  to  light. 
A  great  variety  of  effect  may  be  obtained 
by  exposing  this  part  of  the  print  under  a 
thin  negative,  instead  of  the  plain  glass  used 
to  support  the  mask.  A  piece  of  morocco 
leather,  or  rough  drawing-paper  photo- 
graphed in  a  strong  side  light  will  give  a 
stippled  effect.  I  have  also  seen  some  very 
beautiful  borders  made  by  means  of  a  nega- 
tive of  a  frosted  window-pane. 

"  The  prints  should  be  one  or  two  shades 
darker  than  is  usual  for  ordinary  work. 
Should  they  require  any  retouching  or  spot- 
ting, this  should  be  done  with  lead-pencil 
on  the  surface  of  the  rough  print  before  it 
is  immersed  in  the  gelatin ;  it  is  useless  to 
attempt  to  spot-out  defects  in  the  finished 
picture." 

Mr.  M.  Whiting,  in  the  British  Journal 
Almanac  for  1873,  makes  the  following  sug- 
gestions :  "  Having  used  this  process  for 
several  years,  I  mention  a  slight  improve- 
ment which  prevents  the  loss  of  gloss  and 
the  enamel  sinking,  when  finally  it  is  at- 
tached to  the  finished  mount. 

"  This   is   obtained  by  sticking  a   second 


piece  of  paper  on  to  the  back  of  the  print 
whilst  it  remains  on  the  glass,  and  allowing 
both  to  dry  before  removing.  The  print 
will  then  be  of  sufficient  substance  to  keep 
the  glaze  smooth,  when  fresh  sticking  ma- 
terial is  rubbed  over  to  attach  to  the  mount. 
"The  other  preliminaries  are  as  before, 
except  that  about  a  drachm  of  glycerin  is 
added  to  about  four  ounces  of  the  plain  col- 
lodion. 

"  The  process  will  then  be  as  follows : 
Rub  the  plate  with  white  wax  and  ether; 
coat  with  collodion;  level  the  plates  on  a 
stand,  and  pour  on  a  hot  solution  of  about 
one  ounce  of  gelatin  to  twelve  of  water, 
fixed  with  the  white  of  an  egg.  This  is  to 
be  guided  with  a  glass  rod  all  over  the  plate, 
then  the  greater  part  tilted  off,  and  the 
glass  left  on  a  level  stand  to  dry.  When 
dry  cover  the  plate  with  water,  and  draw 
over  the  wet  print,  which  is  made  to  adhere 
to  the  gelatin  with  a  squegee.  Again  dry, 
and  paste  on  the  paper  as  abovementioned  ; 
and  when,  lastly,  dry,  cut  round  the  edge  of 
the  glass,  and  the  print  will  easily  come  off 
finished  with  a  good  gloss." 

Mr.  L.  (jr.  Kleffel,  in  the  Year-Booh  of 
Photography  for  1872,  gives  the  following 
method,  which  he  says  was  communicated 
to  him  by  Mr.  F.  Haarstick,  of  Dusseldorf, 
and  to  the  perfection  of  which  he  can  bear 
witness. 

"  Ordinary  well-polished  glass  plates  are 
coated  with  normal  collodion,  and  when 
the  film  has  set  perfectly,  but  has  not  be- 
come completely  dry,  the  pictures,  which 
have  previously  been  trimmed  and  finished, 
are  dipped  rapidly  into  alcohol,  and  applied 
without  delay  to  the  plates.  The  prints  are 
pressed  and  rubbed  down  with  smooth 
writing-paper,  and  the  operation  of  mount- 
ing is  proceeded  with  as  soon  as  the  back  of 
the  prints  have  become  white,  or  in  other 
words,  as  soon  as  the  alcohol  has  again 
evaporated.  The  card-board  should  be  al- 
lowed to  remain  in  water  for  at  least  half 
an  hour  previously  to  its  being  employed 
for  mounting. 

"The  more  rapidly  the  pictures  are  ap- 
plied and  pressed  upon  the  collodion  surface, 
the  more  beautiful  will  be  the  finished  re- 
sult." 

In   addition  to  the  foregoing,  the  Photo- 


170 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


graphic  World  for  May,  1871,  has  one  of  the 
best  processes  I  have  yet  seen.  Messrs. 
Benerman  &  Wilson  can  supply  this  to  all 
who  wish.  To  make  the  pictures  properly, 
the  form  or  die  of  the  cameo  press  should 
be  used  to  make  the  cut-outs,  unless  you  have 
a  guide  of  the  same  size  and  shape.  The 
marginal  printing  is  a  matter  of  taste  with 
every  artist,  but  flashy,  gaudy  designs 
should  be  avoided.  The  suggestion  of  Mr. 
Edwards  in  reference  to  a  negative  of  a 
frosted  window-pane,  may  be  practiced  in  a 
great  variety,  I  think,  by  coating  plates 
with  solutions  of  various  salts,  and  printing 
directly  from  them  when  dry,  or  making  a 
negative  by  transmitted  light. 

I  hope  those  interested  will  practice  these 
suggestions,  and  doubtless  a  perfect  method 
will  soon  be  worked  out  with  but  little  cost 
to  any  one. 

Sub. 

VIEWS  ABROAD  AND  ACROSS. 

BY    EDWARD    L.    WILSON. 

VI. 

In  the  streets  of  Vienna  new  things  con- 
stantly attracted  us.  As  I  have  said,  wo- 
men's rights  here  are  fully  respected,  and 
we  see  them  enjoying  the  privilege  of  en- 
gaging in  all  sorts  of  work. 


swings  from  side  to  side,  thus  increasing  the 
influence  of  the  water.  Strange  enough 
sights  are  these.  While  dreaming  over 
them  I  met  some  American  friends,  and  to 
meet  a  friend  from  home  in  a  foreign  land 
is  a  good  thing. 


A  great  lubber  of  a  man  sat  on  the  handles  looking 

In  front  of  a  building  I  saw  a  woman 
filling  a  wheelbarrow  with  mortar,  while  a 
great  lubber  of  a  man  sat  on  the  handles 
looking  on.  Women  carrying  loads  of  coal 
and  other  stuff  on  their  heads  and  backs 
could  always  be  seen.  The  most  of  the  street- 
cleaning  and  street-sprinkling  is  done  by 
the  women.  Their  sprinklers  are  of  the 
most  primitive  sort.  A  hogshead  on  wheels, 
drawn  by  a  horse  driven  by  a  woman,  while 
in  the  rear  walks  another  woman  holding  a 
rope  attached  to  a  piece  of  perforated  tubing 
through   which  the  water   runs,  which  she 


In  the  rear  walks  another  woman  holding  a  rope. 

One  of  the  pleasantest  afternoons  in 
Vienna  was  in  company  with  that  prince 
of  photographers,  Mr.  Fritz.  Luckhardt. 
Joined  by  his  estimable  lady  and  Dr.Vogel, 
we  turned  our  backs  upon  photography  and 
took  a  rest,  such  as  tired  brains  and  over- 
worked bodies  always  welcome.  We  wan- 
dered among  the  gardens  and  in  the  park 
of  the  beautiful  summer  residence  of  the 
Emperor,  at  Schonbrunn;  visited  the  Zoo- 
logical Gardens,  drank  a  glass  of  good  water 
(for  the  water  in  the  city  is  not  good,  and 
the  people  never  drink  it) ;,  lunched  on 
"schwarzbrod  und  wiirst;"  climbed  up  to 
the  top  of  the  beautiful  Gloried,  whence  we 
had  splendid  views  of  the  country  round- 
about; listened  to  the  music  of  the  won- 
derful fountains  ;  traversed  the  num- 
berless avenues  of  beautiful  trees, 
and  enjoyed  to  the  full  the  privi- 
leges of  this  splendid  breathing- 
place.  We  closed  the  day  with  a 
visit  to  the  opera  in  the  new  opera 
house,  which  is  one  of  the  largest 
and  finest  in  existence.  Never  shall 
I  forget  our  friend  Luckhardt  for  his  kind- 
ness, or  cease  to  respect  him  for  the  excel- 
lent work  he  makes. 

As  I  have  said  before,  his  standing  as  a 
photographer  in  Vienna  is  first.  He  was 
selected  by  the  Emperor  to  be  one  of  the 
jury,  or  the  unequalled  specimens  of  his 
work  exhibited  at  the  Grand  Exposition 
would  have  secured  for  him  as  great  honors 
as  those  won  by  Messrs.  Kurtz  and  Loescher 
&  Petsch.  I  made  several  visits  to  his 
studio.  I  cannot  say  that  it  impressed  me 
very  remarkably,  for  we  have  many  finer 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


171 


ones  in  our  own  country.  But  Mr.  Luck- 
hardt's  establishment  is  undoubtedly  a 
model  one.  It  is  situated  on  the  roof  or 
terrace  of  the  Grand  Hotel,  and  a  long 
climb  is  necessary  to  reach  it.  But  in  Eu- 
rope people  must  get  accustomed  to  such 
clambers,  for  it  is  a  necessity.  And  in  Mr. 
Luckhardt's  case  it  seemed  to  make  no  dif- 
ference, for  his  rooms  were  always  crowded 
and  his  camera  constantly  busy.  His  re- 
ception, dressing,  exhibition,  finishing,  and 
delivery  rooms  are  all  on  one  floor,  and 
over  these  the  skylight,  dark-room,  print- 
ing, and  solar  camera  departments,  are 
conveniently  arranged,  and  supplied  with 
every  necessary  thing  to  make  the  best  of 
results.  The  assortment  of  furniture  and 
backgrounds  was  lavish  and  elegant.  The 
skylight  proper  was  nothing  extraordinary, 
but  one  in  which  the  most  beautiful  effects 
are  obtainable  at  almost  all  times.  The 
drawings  I  annex  will  bring  it  more  plainly 
to  j"our  mind. 

The  first  one  is  an  exterior  view.  It  rep- 
resents it  as  standing  on  the  ground,  while 
in  reality  it  is  built  upon  the  solid  marble 
roof  of  a  hotel,  the  other  rooms  mentioned 
beine'  underneath  in  the  hotel  buildinjr. 


southern  sun.  Separate  from  this  on  the 
roof  are  the  printing  and  solar  camera 
rooms. 

The  next  figure  gives  us  the  exact  ground 
plan  of  the  whole,  and  the  third  figure  a 
sectional  view  of  the  skylight  proper. 

The  dimensions  are  given  by  the  figures 
in  Austrian  feet  and  inches,  and  the  Austrian 
foot  is  about  three  eighths  of  an  inch  longer 
than  ours.  Where  two  commas  are  over  the 
figure  it  means  inches,  and  where  one  only 
is  used,  feet  are  meant.  I  think  it  is  plain 
to  you  without  further  description.  If  not, 
I  will  be  glad  to  give  any  who  wish  it 
further  details. 

Mr.  Luckhardt  usually  works  an  open 
light,  and  from  both  ends  of  the  room,  east 
and  west.  For  cabinets  and  large  heads, 
he  u$es  a  four-inch  diameter  Voigtlander 
lens,  and  exposes  on  an  average  about 
fifteen  seconds.  His  card  lenses  are  of  the 
same  excellent  manufacture. 

We  had  many  "  talks  "  together  about 
photography  and  photographers,  and  I 
found  him,  as  one  must  be  sure  of  after  ex- 
amining his  work,  a  man  possessing  first, 
the  most  exalted  opinion  of  his  art  ;  second, 
the  importance  of  making  every  picture  as 


K  is  the  entrance  from  the  roof  to  the 
dark-room  ;  B  is  the  top-light,  which  is 
sunk  below  the  angle  of  the  roof  D  E  ; 
and  C  is  the  side-light,  both  of  which  face 
the  north.  It  reminded  me  more  of  Messrs. 
Trask  &  Bacon's  Philadelphia  light  than 
any  I  have  see,n.  MI  is  a  "sunshade," 
erected   to   protect  the   skylight   from  the 


near  as  he  can  to  perfection,  and  third,  as 
full  as  he  could  be  of  that  indescribable 
feeling  which  all  must  attain  if  they  would 
excel.  Works  of  art  are  scattered  and 
hung  all  around  that  he  and  his  assistants 
may  study  them,  obtaining  an  idea  here  and 
another  there  that  will  serve  them  at  some 
time  or  another.     For  the  same  reason  he 


171 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGE APHEE. 


subscribes  for  all  the  illustrated  newspapers 
in  order  to  study  the  pictures.  He  said, 
"  In  the  one  I  may  find  an  idea  for  myself; 
in  another  something  useful  for  my  re- 
touchers, and  in  all  something  of  service  to 
my  printer,  or  pupil,  or  other  assistants." 
He  truly  said,  "  The  skylight  construction  is 


raphy,  is  interested  in  its  progress,  and  will 
do  anything  to  advance  it.  I  found  in  him 
a  kindred  spirit,  and  tried  to  induce  him  to 
come  to  America.  Two  examples  of  his 
work  have  been  given  you  in  this  magazine, 
and  I  hope  presently  you  will  have  some 
more. 


A 

; 

-G6'--.. 

i 

— 1-1 — 

L 

s -JL±8'- -t> 

1     l 

i><i    Esa   c=-<i 


not  the  thing.  It  is  the  good  quality  of  the 
light  from  heaven  itself.  Give  me  that  and 
I  will  do  all  the  rest,  even  without  any 
studio.  If  the  light  is  not  good,  I  dismiss 
my  sitter,  and  wait  until  it  is  good;  or  if 
they  cannot  wait  I  ask  them  to  come  again. 
If  they  cannot  do  either,  then  I  request 
them  to  go  to  another  photographer,  as  I 
will  not  willingly  make  a  bad  picture. 
"With  me  it  is  all  a  matter  of  feeling,  and  I 
cannot  work  without  it.  One  cannot  im- 
part this  to  another  or  hardly  describe  it. 
An  expert  will  go  over  a  number  of  exam- 
ples of  cloth  and  tell  you  their  value,  but 
he  cannot  tell  you  how  to  do  it."  It  must 
be  acquired  by  study  and  practice,  and  I 
guess  once  in  awhile  it  comes  naturally. 
Mr.  Luckhardt  examines  and  studies  each 
negative  carefully  before  dismissing  the 
sitter,  and  if  it  is  not  up  to  his  ideas, 
another  trial  is  made.  I  wish  my  readers 
could  all  enjoy  the  opportunities  that  I  en- 
joyed of  seeing  him  at  this  work.  It  was  a 
profitable  pleasure  which  I  wish  I  could 
dispense  to  you  as  abundantly  as  I  received 
it.  I  hope  the  day  will  come  when  we 
will  have  him  in  person  at  one  of  our  an- 
nual exhibitions,  and  then  we  can  quiz 
him  all  we  have  a  mind  to,  for  he  is  very 
amiable,  and  withholds  nothing  from  those 
who  desire  to  improve.     He  loves  photog- 


A  very  flourishing  photographic  society 
exists  in  Vienna.  Mr.  Luckhardt  is  the 
secretary,  and  the  life  of  it.  Extracts  from 
its  minutes  are  published  in  this  magazine 
from  time  to  time.  I  had  not  the  oppor- 
tunity to  attend  one  of  its  meetings,  nor  to 
visit  many  of  its  members,  for  the  simple 
reason  that  I  went  to  Vienna  to  see  the 
Grand  Exposition,  and  had  to  make  many 
other  pleasures  all  around  give  way  to  its 
demands. 

A  very  strong  organization  was  formed 
for  making  photographs  of  the  Exposition, 
and  some  very  elegant  things  have  been 
produced.  I  shall  probably  refer  to  this 
matter  again  presently,  in  another  connec- 
tion. 

Photography  seems  to  be  well  patronized 
in  Vienna,  and  the  work  usually  done  is  of 
a  high  degree  of  excellence.  I  wish  I 
could  have  seen  more  of  it,  but  I  was  on  a 
short  furlough  only,  and  just  saw  enough  to 
tantalize  me  into  a  desire  to  go  and  see 
more.  Let  us  leave  photography  now,  and 
make  our  last  visit  together  to  the  Grand 
Exposition. 

The  issues  of  this  magazine,  for  a  good 
many  months  to  come,  could  not  hold  all  I 
would  like  to  tell  you  of  what  I  saw. 

I  went  up  on  the  dome  one  afternoon, 
and  had  a  grand  sight  both  in  and  outside 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


173 


of  the  building.  The  view  from  the  out- 
side was  clearer  than  when  we  were  at  the 
Gloriat,  and  I  had  a  good  sight  of  Vienna 
and  its  environs.  It  is  a  great  city.  The 
"  beautiful  blue  Danube  "  could  be  seen  for 
miles,  and  the  mountains,  with  the  convents 
on  their  summits,  aided  in  making  up  a 
grand  scene  The  ascent  to  the  dome  was 
made  about  halfway  by  means  of  an  eleva- 
tor, and  then,  stepping  from  the  elevator, 
we  came  to  a  fine  gallery,  which  encircled 
the  interior  of  the  dome,  and  around  which 
we  could  walk  and  see  the  wondrous  sights 
below.  From  this  we  step  outside,  arid 
clamber  up  a  winding  stairway  to  the  top, 
where  there  is  also  a  gallery  all  around  the 
dome.  The  world  outside  having  been  seen, 
we  came  down  again  to  the  inside  to  look 
and  wonder,  and  wonder  and  look  at  the 
world  inside.  The  sounds  that  came  up  were 
as  wondrous  as  the  sights.  A  great  organ 
was  being  played,  and  soothed  the  feelings, 
already  excited  and  overcome  by  the  scene, 
with  its  sweet  music.  Then  the  rush  and 
roar  of  the  great  fountain  in  the  centre  ; 
the  noise  of  the  thousands  of  people  walking 
to  and  fro;  the  ringing  of  great  bells;  the 
bewitching  show  of  the  elegant  goods  on 
exhibition,  with  their  many  colors  and  tints, 
made  up  a  picture  indescribable,  but  never 
to  be  forgotten, — indeed,  a  world  within  a 
world,  seen  from  above.  After  descending, 
we  took  a  glass  of  soda-water  at  the  Ameri- 
can restaurant,  and  then  proceeded,  in  the 
two  hours  that  were  left,  to  make  our  last 
impressions  of  the  Weltaustellung. 

First,  through  an  entire  mile  of  moving 
machinery  in  a  building  by  itself,  and  then 
through  the  main  avenue,  taking  a  hasty 
glance  at  the  beauties  on  the  way  back  to 
the  art  department,  where  we  wandered 
among  the  grand  collection  of  pictures 
again,  until  the  great  fog-horn,  attached 
to  a  lighthouse  outside,  warned  us  that  it 
was  six  o'clock,  and  that  we  must  go.  So 
glancing  once  more  at  the  lovely  statuary, 
and  arming  myself  with  a  couple  of  pounds 
of  catalogues  and  a  few  of  the  photographs 
of  the  Exhibition,  I  turned  my  back  to  it, 
and  then  took  a  stroll  among  the  outer  at- 
tractions. 

First,  something  to  eat.  You  enter  a 
restaurant,  and   a   "kellner"   (waiter),  in 


the  course  of  a  few  minutes,  comes  to  you, 
if  you  call  him  loud  and  often  enough.  He 
takes  your  order  for,  say  bread,  meat,  and 
tea.  He  goes  and  tells  another  "  kellner," 
who,  after  a  long  wait,  brings  you  a  plate; 
another  wait,  and  a  cup  and  saucer;  another 
wait,  and  some  bread  ;  then,  if  you  are 
patient,  you  get  a  plate  and  a  cup  for  your 
friend.  Further  patience  is  rewarded  by 
your  meat ;  and,  by  the  time  you  are  done, 
if  you  eat  with  a  thankful  heart,  your  butter 
comes  for  your  bread.  Bread  being  all  gone, 
do  not  ask  for  more,  if  you  ever  want  to 
get  away  from  the  place.  After  you  are 
done,  if  you  are  particularly  and  remarkably 
patient,  in  some  time  the  "  zahl-kellner  " 
(pay-waiter),  comes  and  makes  out  your 
bill,  lets  you  pay,  and,  thank  heaven,  lets 
you  go. 

But  I  cannot  begin  to  give  you  any  ade- 
quate description  of  the  world  that  seemed 
to  be  represented  by  sample  at  this  place. 
It  was  a  Bedlam  and  a  Babel,  beautiful  and 
bewildering.  The  last  sight  of  it  I  took 
with  the  good  Vogel,  sitting  at  the  door  of 
the  Swiss  restaurant.  We  had  already  lux- 
uriated and  feasted  among  the  Turks  and  the 
Persians,  and  the  Hungarians  and  the  Aus- 
trians,  and  the  Egyptians  and  the  Armeni- 
ans, and  who  not ;  and  now,  as  we  sat  upon 
a  rustic  bench  at  the  door  of  a  little  Swiss 
cottage,  listening  to  the  rude  music  inside 
and  eating  our  cheese,  we  took  our  last 
glimpse  of  the  greatest  scene  our  eyes  had 
ever  beheld.  Around  us  was  a  pleasant 
little  grove.  In  the  distance  we  could  see 
the  Egyptian  temple  and  the  Persian  pal- 
ace with  the  Turkish  minarets  standing  out 
against  the  sky.  All  around  were  the  build- 
ings from  Japan  and  China  and  the  Car- 
pathian Mountains  and  everywhere  else, 
making  up  a  scene  I  shall  never  forget. 
The  great  dome  stood  up  above  all  and 
over  all,  now  closed  and  asleep,  with  its 
long  wings  on  each  side,  at  rest. 

The  sun  went  down  with  gorgeous  clouds 
attendant;  and  thus  ended  our  visit  to  the 
great  Vienna  Exposition  of  1873. 

The  next  morningearly  wesaid  "  G-ood-by, 
Vienna,"  and  at  7  a.m.,  I  was  comfortably 
seated  in  an  apartment  car  with  Dr.  Vogel, 
on  the  way  to  Venice,  via  the  Semmering 
Kail  way.    Oh  !  ye  landscape  photographers, 


174 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


how  I  wish  you  could  take  your  hungry 
cameras  to  this  delightful  region.  It  was 
an  all-day  ride,  each  mile  a  wonder. 
Twenty-five  miles  of  this  railway  cost 
$7,500,000,  including  in  that  distance  fifteen 
tunnels  and  fifteen  arched  bridges.  At 
every  twist  and  turn  we  climb  higher,  and 
new  beauties  are  presented.  Each  moment 
it  looked  as  if  we  were  going  to  be  plunged 
headlong,  either  down  into  the  deep  valleys 
or  into  the  face  of  the  mountains  ahead. 
On  and  up,  up,  up,  we  go,  wondering  how 
we  are  ever  to  get  out  of  this  wild  winding 
way.  The  valleys  are  richly  cultivated, 
and  the  hills  are  topped  with  churches, 
while  some  of  the  most  inaccessible  crags 
bear  ruined  castles  upon  their  brows. 

Swiftly  we  go  along,  seemingly  regardless 
of  the  fact  that  the  grade  ascends  one  mile 
in  forty.  Now  over  a  beautiful  viaduct 
900  feet  long,  and  the  engine  stops  to 
breathe  as  if  preparing  for  a  hard  plunge 
through  a  tunnel  ahead.  Down  540  feet 
below  is  the  village 
of  Gloggnitz.  Be- 
fore we  turned  the 
last  curve  a  few 
moments  ago  it  was 
opposite  us  on  the 
left',  and  away 
above  us.  "While 
we  rest  the  quaint- 
ly dressed  little 
girls  run  along  by 
the  train  with  a  bottle  of  water  in  one  hand 
and  flowers  in  the  other,  crying  eagerly, 
"  Edel  weis!  Edel  weis  !  Frieshes  wasser.! 
Frieshes  wasser  !"  We  patronize  the  little 
Alpine  merchants,  and  then  struggle  on. 
The  pyramidal  peaks  grow  higher  as  we  ap- 
proach them,  but  they  must  be  mastered. 
Tunnels  and  bridges,  bridges  and  tunnels 
quickly  succeed  each  other.  One  of  the 
latter  3000  feet  long  is  on  the  very  verge  of 
a  precipice,  and  here  and  there  is  broken 
through,  and  lets  in  the  light.  Soon  we 
are  at  Semmering  '2892  feet  above  the  sea 
level.  We  avoid  a  300  feet  accent  by  scud- 
ding through  45(  0  more  feet  of  tun<nel,  and 
come  out  at  the  other  end  into  Styria.  The 
country  begins  to  look  like  America,  but 
the  peasantry  make  us  feel  that  we  are  in  a 
foreign  land,  for  their  picturesque  dress  and 


Edel  weis.'  Frieshes  wasser  ! 


their  strange  ways  are  all  new  to  us,  al- 
though we  see  a  little  of  all  nations  at  home. 
Towards  evening  we  enter  the  Slavonic 
region,  and  lo !   we  see  the  Julian  Alps! 

They  are  muffled  by  great  banks  of  clouds 
about  their  necks,  but  their  snowy  caps 
catch  the  crimson  rays  of  the  setting  sun 
and  present  a  scene  of  grandeur  such  as  Dr. 
Vogel  says  he  never  saw  them  present  be- 
fore, and  he  has  been  there  six  times. 

About  dark  we  reached  Adelsburg,  Aus- 
tria, a  curious  old  town,  whose  attraction  is 
an  immense  grotto,  stretching  two  and  a 
half  miles  under  the  earth,  and  divided  up 
into  beautiful  chambers  and  halls.  The 
largest  chamber  is  112  feet  high,  660  feet 
wide,  and  665  feet  long.  It  was  lighted 
with  1800  candles  for  our  benefit,  and  as  we 
marched  long  amid  the  stalactites  and  stal- 
agmites, following  the  blazing  torches  of 
our  guides,  the  Poik  River  rumbled  through 
underneath,  and  made  the  music  for  the 
occasion.  Mightier  pens  than  mine  have 
described  this  great  work  of  Nature,  and  I 
won't  try  it.  The  next  day  we  journeyed 
on  to  Venice. 


Class  in  Landscape  Photography. 

The  suggestion  we  made  last  month  to 
the  effect  that  those  interested  in  this  direc- 
tion should  unite  in  discussing  through  this 
column  the  best  methods  of  working,  and 
endeavor  to  improve  themselves  in  this 
branch  of  our  art,  has  been  well  received, 
and  «,  number  have  signified  their  interest 
in  it. 

The  subject  for  consideration  this  month 
is  suitable  apparatus  for  the  work  to  be 
done.  One  lens,  or  one  pair  of  lenses  will 
hardly  answer  for  the  practical  photog- 
rapher, as  a  picture  may  often  be  made  with 
a  short  focus  lens  that  could  not  be  got  at 
with  one  of  long  focus.  An  instantaneous 
view  may  also  be  made  with  a  quid*- work- 
ing lens  thatcould  not  be  made  with  one 
requiring  any  length  of  exposure.  So  we 
will  mention  briefly  some  of  the  best  lenses 
and  the  style  of  work  they  are  adapted  for. 

The  Morrison  wide-angle  view  lens,  for 
which  Scovill  Manufacturing  Company  are 
agents,   is   very   highly  spoken    of,  and    is 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


175 


used  by  many  of  the  best  photographers. 
It  embraces  an  angle  of  90°,  and  is  suitable 
for  views  in  confined  situations,  such  as 
buildings  in  the  narrow  streets  of  the  city, 
and  often  in  deep  ravines  where  it  is  de- 
sirable to  get  as  near  the  view  as  possible. 
The  Globe  and  Zentmayer  lenses  are  of 
about  the  same  capacity  of  the  Morrison, 
and  both  large  and  small  sizes  are  excellent 
lenses.  They  work  well  either  for  views  or 
copying. 

The  Ross  lenses  in  "doublets"  and 
"triplets"  are  constructed  for  various 
styles  of  work,  but  those  particularly 
adapted  for  outdoor  photography  are  very 
quick  workers,  being  just  the  thing  for  in- 
stantaneous work,  such  as  marine  views, 
street  scenes,  and  photographs  of  animals. 
The  Steinheil  lens  is  also  highly  recom- 
mended. Both  these  last  are  imported  and 
sold  by  Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.  of  this  city. 
The  Voigtlander  orthoscopic  lenses  are  of 
all  sizes,  and  possess  very  superior  qualities. 
These,  with  the  Darlot  lenses  which  run 
from  stereo  to  4-4  sizes,  are  imported  and 
sold  by  Benjamin  French  &  Co.,  Boston. 
The  imitation  Dallmeyer  lenses  are  also 
very  fine,  and  particularly  adapted  to  quick 
work.  George  S.  Bryant  &  Co.  are  agents 
for  these.  Any  of  these  lenses  can  prob- 
ably he  procured  through  any  stockdealer. 

For  cameras  there  is  nothing  superior  to 
the  American  Optical  Company's  boxes, 
either  for  large  or  small  sizes. 

A  S.  Murray,  of  Pittsburg,  says  he  is  an 
amateur  but  a  "great  lover  of  the  art." 
He  is  using  a  pair  of  imitation  Dallmeyer 
lenses,  and  has  succeeded  very  well.  He  has 
recently  "  purchased  one  of  those  beautiful 
stereo  boxes  of  the  American  Optical  Com- 
pany's make,  which  he  considers  a  perfect 
thing  both  as  to  beauty  and  usefulness." 
He  is  also  having  a  dark-box  made  which  we 
hope  he  will  describe  to  us  next  month. 
"We  are  glad  to  enrol  Mr.  Murray  as  one 
of  our  members. 

D.  E.  Smith,  of  Oneida,  N.  Y.,  exhibits 
some  specimens  of  his  work  in  outdoor 
photography.  He  says  he  intended  to  pur- 
chase a  stereoscopic  outfit  this  season.,  but 
shallcontent  himself  with  a  quick-working 
half-size  Peerless  portrait  lens,  and  a  Vic- 
toria box  for   5x7    plates.     Mr.   Smith  is 


also  an  amateur,  but  shows  a  good  spirit 
when  he  says  :  "  If  I  can't  have  the  best  con- 
ditions I  will  not  say  I  will  not  do  anything, 
but  try  to  do  the  best  I  can  under  the  cir- 
cumstances. And  I  intend  to  make  some 
good  pictures  too  if  I  have  not  made  a  bril- 
liant beginning." 

Mr.  Stewart  Merrill  exhibits  some  very 
creditable  views  of  Fort  Riley,  Kansas. 
"  One  year  ago,"  he  says  :  "I  knew  noth- 
ing at  all  of  photography,  but  by  constant 
reading  and  some  little  practice,  I  have  a 
few  ideas  about  it  now."  He  uses  a  very  acid 
bath,  and  the  plate  from  which  one  of  the 
views  was  made,  he  says,  "  was  in  the  shield 
over  an  hour."  "  To  preserve  the  plates  in 
hot  weather,  I  use  a  piece  of  thick  blotting- 
board,  wet  on  one  side  only,  and  that  side 
next  to  the  glass." 

Mr.  J.  W.  Black,  of  Boston,  in  Mosaics 
for  1874  says:  "  To  make  a  view  away  from 
the  rooms  with  a  tent,  or  otherwise  with  as 
little  trouble  as  possible,  I  first  take  my 
bath,  top  to  screw  on  (an  acid  bath,  of 
course,  but  less  so  than  for  room  work), 
next  my  box  with  the  lens  adjusted  so  as 
to  move  both  ways.  My  camera  box  con- 
tains the  ground-glass,  holder,  dark  cloth, 
and  a  grooved  box  for  the  negatives.  The 
glass  I  have  done  up,  four  in  a  package, 
albumenized,  ready  to  coat  with  collodion. 

"  I  have  a  dark-tent  for  large  plates,  which 
is  amply  large  to  stand  up  in,  and  plenty  of 
room  to  coat  plates  of  any  size.  It  takes 
about  five  minutes  to  set  it  up  and  put  it  in 
working  order." 

These  suggestions  in  reference  to  appa- 
ratus, from  one  of  the  best  photographers 
of  this  country,  may  be  practiced  with 
safety.  There  are  further  hints  as  to  Mr. 
Black's  methods  of  working,  which  we  will 
give  to  the  class  under  the  proper  head. 

We  cordially  invite  all  interested  in 
landscape  photography  to  write  us  their 
methods  and  experiences,  formulas,  &c. 

The  subject  for  next  month  will  be  bath, 
collodion,  developer,  &e  ,  with  methods  and 
conditions  of  working. 


Do  not  forget  to  send  some  of  your  pic- 
tures to  Chicago  to  hehp  make  the  Exhibi- 
tion what  it  should  be^and  go  yourself. 


176 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


OUR  PICTURE. 

In  the  department  of  groups  there  have 
heen  very  few  contributions  to  our  journal, 
and  we  are  glad  to  present  you  one  this 
month  of  a  picturesque  and  novel  kind.  It 
was  contributed  by  L.  G.  Bigelow,  operator 
with  John  F.  Nice,  Williamsport,  Pa.  Mr. 
Bigelow  has  taught  us  so  many  excellent 
lessons  in  his  Albion  of  Lighting  and 
Posing  (a  work  by  the  way  which  all 
workers  should  have),  in  the  management 
of  single  figures,  that  wc  are  very  glad 
indeed  to  be  able  to  present  you  a  specimen 
of  his  work  in  the  group  department.  It  is 
full  of  useful  lessons  if  you  will  but  care- 
fully compare  and  study  it  with  the  instruc- 
tions. Mr.  Bigelow  in  sending  us  the  neg- 
atives, says:  "It  is  difficult  to  apply  art 
rules  in  making  up  photographic  groups, 
from  the  fact  that  in  art  compositions  there 
is  one  or  more  central  or  important  figures 
to  which  all  the  others  are  secondary  and 
supporting;  while  in  photograph  groups  for 
portraiture  all  are  supposed  to  be  of  equal 
importance,  and  individuals  must  not  be 
slighted  pictorially  or  the  sale  of  the  pic- 
ture is  assuredly  lost;  for  this  or  that  figure 
is  not  as  good  as  its  neighbor.  In  genre 
compositions  of  course  we  are  not  limited  in 
this  direction,  but  our  greatest  obstacle  is 
to  group  our  subjects  in  such  manner  as  to 
gain  perspective,  and  overcome  the  appear- 
ance that  they  are  placed  in  a  line  like  sol- 
diers on  dress  parade.  I  know  of  no  way 
by  which  perspective  may  be  obtained  bet- 
ter than  by  placing  in  the  foreground  low 
objects  or  pieces  of  furniture  which  tend  to 
break  up  the  line  appearance  and  also  give 
depth  to  the  picture.  All  ambitious  pho- 
tographers should  know  what  constitutes 
angular,  pyramidal,  and  circular  grouping, 
for  otherwise  many  mistakes  will  be  made 
which  this  knowledge  would  have  pre- 
vented. Special  attention  must  be  paid  to 
side  lines,  or  those  lines  which  run  parallel 
to  the  sides  of  the  picture.  Break  these 
lines  all  you  can.  For  instance,  if  a  chair 
is  placed  near  the  margin  of  a  picture,  set  it 
with  the  back  toward  the  centre,  or  if 
turned  the  other  way,  be  sure  to  set  some 
lower  object  between  it  and  the  margin,  and 
near  the  chair ;  which  you  at  once  see 
breaks  up  the  effect  of  parallel  lines  formed 


by  the  back  of  the  picture  and  the  margin 
line.  If  a  curtain  were  draped  just  back  of 
the  chair  it  would  do  just  as  well  to  break 
the  lines  mentioned.  The  lines  of  a  curtain 
should  be  draped  from  the  margin  toward 
the  centre  of  the  picture,  and  so  in  principle 
must  be  the  arrangement  of  all  accessories 
in  photography,  portraiture  or  grouping. 
All  these  points  are  told  j-ou  in  detail  by 
Mr.  E.  L.  Wilson,  in  his  lecture  on  the 
'  Management  of  the  Lines'  delivered  at 
the  Buffalo  convention.     Kefer  to  it. 

"The  formula  is  the  same  as  given  in  my 
Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 


COLLODION. 

Alcohol, 

1   ounce. 

Ether,  .... 

.     1      " 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  . 

5  grains. 

Bromide  of  Cadmium,  . 

2i      « 

DEVELOPER. 

Iron,   . 

15  grains. 

Water 

1  ounce. 

"To  eight  ounces  of  solution  add  about 
one  ounce  of  acetic  acid." 

The  subject  of  this  picture  is  "  Dressing  for 
the  Masquerade," — the  centre  figure  repre- 
senting the  "Vivandiere,"  and  the  others  the 
"  Huntress  "  and  "  Curiosity."  The  group 
is  a  very  pretty  one,  and  the  composition  and 
lighting  very  creditable.  The  chemical  ef- 
fects cannot  be  easily  excelled.  The  prints 
'were  made  by  Mr.  William  H.  Khoads, 
Philadelphia,  on  the  Albion  Albumenizing 
Company's  paper.  They  were  enamelled 
on  Mr.  W.  G.  Entriken's  new  and  beauti- 
ful oscillating  enameller — the  best  of  its 
kind  we  have  seen  to  produce  the  desired 
result. 


PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  FRANCE. 

BI    ERNEST    LACAN. 

A  few  days  ago  I  received  a  letter  from 
Mr.  Pettemans,  one  of  the  agents  who 
make  it  a  business  to  bring  to  notice  foreign 
processes  and  products,  in  which  he  invited 
me  to  inspect,  in  his  establishment,  speci- 
mens of  neo-oleo-painting.  I  availed  myself 
of  this  invitation  and  I  saw  a  numerous  col- 
lection of  oil  paintings,  copies  of  pictures, 
portraits,  groups,  &c,  of  all  sizes.  At  a 
glance  one  could  see  that  if  these  pictures 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


177 


possessed  no  artistic  superiority,  they  at 
least  were  on  a  par  with  those  made  in  the 
ateliers  of  photographers,  where  the  image 
is  transferred  to  canvas  in  order  to  be 
painted  in  oil.  I  did  not  see  here  anything 
that  appeared  to  me  very  new,  but  Mr. 
Pettemans  having  offered  to  make  one  of 
these  pictures  in  my  presence,  I  must  admit 
that  I  was  much  interested  in  the  operation. 
Here  is  exactly  what  he  did.  He  took  a 
positive  print  on  ordinary  unsized  albumen 
paper  and  placed  it  on  a  retouching  glass 
(sterolor),  face  downwards.  It  was  the  por- 
trait of  a  man,  album  card  size,  rendered 
transparent  similar  to  an  image  on  wax- 
paper.  He  then  opened  a  box  in  which 
were  a  dozen  of  those  small  metallic  tubes 
containing  the  oil  colors  used  by  painters, 
a  porcelain  palette,  a  few  fitch  brushes,  and 
two  vials,  one  full  of  the  liquid  in  which  is 
first  plunged  the  images  to  render  them 
transparent,  the  other  containing  picture 
varnish.  The  operator  placed  on  the  palette 
a  little  each  of  brownish-red,  blue,  dark- 
brown  and  prepared  pink  flesh  colors,  then 
on  the  end  of  his  brush  he  took  a  little  of 
the  first  tint  and  put  some  of  it  on  the  back 
of  the  image  in  the  places  corresponding  to 
the  cheek  bones,  to  the  lips,  and  the  shades 
in  general.  He  operated  in  the  same  man- 
ner with  the  blue,  which  he  applied  under 
the  eyes,  around  the  outlines  of  the  cheeks 
in  the  half  tone ;  he  laid  on  liberally  the 
dark-brown  in  the  place  corresponding  to 
the  hair,-  finally  on  the  whole  of  the  face 
and  over  all  the  tints  already  used  he  spread 
the  flesh  color.  He  then  removed  the  print 
from  the  glass,  turned  it  over,  and  I  saw  a 
modelled  painting  with  a  proper  gradation 
of  colors,  exactly  similar  to  those  that  I 
had  seen  exposed  in  the  gallery  through 
which  I  had  just  passed.  The  operation 
had  not  lasted  five  minutes. 

It  is  certainly  not  the  first  time  that  prints 
have  been  colored  on  the  back  so  that  seen 
by  transparency  they  present  the  aspect  of 
paintings,  the  photographs  forming  the 
drawing  and  consequently  the  resemblance, 
if  it  is  a  portrait;,  but  the  former  method 
required  the  hand  of  a  more  or  less  skilful 
artist.  What  is  truly  original  in  the  pro- 
cess of  which  I  speak,  is  that  it  is  no  longer 
necessary  to  know  how  to  paint  or  even  to 


draw  to  apply  it;  any  ordinary  workman, 
a  child  even,  can  perform  it  successfully. 
The  tubes  containing  the  colors  are  num- 
bered, and  it  suffices  to  know  that  such  a 
portion  of  the  face  corresponds  to  such  a 
number,  to  make  use  of  it  properly,  and 
this  is  learned  in  a  lesson-.  It  is  the  flesh 
color,  more  or  less  light,  yellow  or  red,  and 
which  is  spread  finally  on  all  the  other 
tints,  which  gives  the  particular  character 
of  the  carnation,  according  to  the  person 
who  has  posed. 

I  must  add  that  when  the  colors  are  dry 
the  print  is  laid  upon  canvas  and  pressed, 
so  that  the  paper  is  moulded  on  the  tissue, 
reproducing  the  hollows  and  reliefs,  so  that 
the  color  appears  to  be  really  on  the  canvas 
itself;  varnishing  ends  the  operation. 

I  inclose  in  this  letter  a  small  specimen 
of  this  process :  it  is  the  portrait  of  Madame 
Judic,  the  singer,  so  much  liked  by  the 
Parisian  public;  she  is  represented  in  one 
of  her  costumes  in  the  piece  called  "  La 
Timbale  d'argent."  You  will  thus  be  enabled 
to  judge  of  the  effect  that  can  be  obtained  ;  it 
is  not  art,  but  it  is  clearly  a  very  ingenious 
process,  offered  to  all  photographers,  to  sat- 
isfy those  customers  who  desire  to  have 
portraits  painted  in  oil.  The  invention 
consists  in  the  application  of  the  colors, 
which  mix  and  combine  in  such  a  way  as  to 
form  a  homogeneous  whole. 

About  ten  years  ago  a  photographer  newly 
established  in  Paris,  Mr.  Liebert,  brought 
to  notice  a  solar  camera  without  reflector, 
very  simple  in  its  construction,  and  which 
had  at  that  time  a  great  deal  of  success.  A 
short  time  afterwards  he  published,  under 
the  title  of  Photography  in  America,  a  work 
in  which  he  gave  the  different  processes  used 
by  him,  and  which  he  had  learned  to  put 
in  practice  during  a  long  sojourn  in  the 
United  States.  The  book  was  appreciated, 
and  the  author,  who  was  a  man  of  great  in- 
telligence and  rare  activity,  soon  took  rank 
among  our  first  portrait  photographers. 
To-day  his  establishment  is  one  of  the  most 
in  vogue  in  Paris,  and  it  must  be  said  also 
one  of  the  best  appointed.  All  luxury  is 
banished,  but  everything  is  so  arranged  as 
to  facilitate  the  work.  Mr.  Liebert  is  essen- 
tially a  practical  man,  which  in  no  manner 
prevents  him  from  being  an  artist. 


12 


178 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


His  establishment  is  not  located  in  a  large 
building  like  those  of  Nadar  and  "Wallery, 
but  nevertheless  he  occupies  in  one  of  our 
finest  quarters  ("  Rue  St.  Lazare,"  near  the 
new  opera  house),  a  building  specially  con- 
structed for  him.  The  ground-floor  opens 
on  the  street  and  is  composed  only  of  a  ves- 
tibule forming  an  exhibition-room  ;  all  the 
salons  and  ateliers  are  on  the  second  floor 
and  en  suite.  Photography  reigns  here  su- 
preme, and  the  eye  seeks  in  vain  in  the 
frames  which  everywhere  cover  the  walls, 
other  works  than  those  of  the  light. 

The  glass-house  is  remarkable  for  its  size; 
it  is  not  less  than  12  metres  (39  feet)  long, 
by  6  (19J)  feet  in  breadth,  and  4.50  (15)  feet 
in  height.  The  general  appearance  of  this 
gallery  is  the  same  as  that  of  Keutlinger's, 
of  which  the  Philadelphia  Photographer  has 
given  an  interior  view.  The  roof  is  in- 
clined at  an  angle  of  35°,  and  has  glass 
sashes  covering  a  space  of  8  metres  (26 
feet),  as  also  has  the  side  of  the  gallery 
which  faces  the  north.  All  these  sashes 
have  thick  blue  glass,  except  the  first  four 
rows  at  each  extremity,  and  a  row  about  3 
metres  (9|  feet)  wide  at  the  top  of  the  roof 
in  that  part  adjoining  the  wall.  As  the 
ground-glass  placed  in  that  portion  in 
which  the  sitter  is  posed  diffuses  the  light 
sufficiently,  Mr.  Liebert  does  not  use,  as 
Eeutlinger  does,  side  screens  which  raise  or 
lower,  although  this  idea  is  a  good  one.* 

Among  the  apparatus  and  accessories  of 
American  origin  used  by  this  skilful  pho- 
tographer, the  conical  background  for  me- 
dallions lighted  in  the  Kembrandt  style, 
may  be  classed  with  those  that  appear  the 
most  ingenious.  It  is  a  kind  of  large  fun- 
nel, closed  and  widening  at  the  mouth, 
made  of  tin  painted  gray,  that  he  places 
behind  the  sitter,  and  on  which  the  light 
strikes  in  such  a  manner  as  to  still  further 
increase  the  effects  of  this  style  of  lighting. 

Mr.  Liebert,  who  makes  many  enlarge- 
ments, uses  exclusively  for  that  purpose  the 
solar  camera  without  reflector,  of  which  I 
have  already  spoken.  He  also  makes  use 
of  an  apparatus,  of  which  he  is  the  inventor, 
to  obtain  from  small  transparent  positives 

*  The  side  curtains  are  blue  and  white,  and 
move  in  the  direction  of  the  length  of  the  atelier. 


on  glass,  enlarged  negatives  which  require 
no  further  retouching.  The  little  positive 
used  in  this  case  is  made  upon  opal  glass 
prepared  with  chlorided  collodion.  All  the 
instruments  and  all  the  processes  used  by 
Mr.  Liebert  are  described  in  detail  in  the 
Manual  of  Practical  Photography,  which 
he  is  about  to  publish,  and  of  which  he  has 
requested  me  to  send  you  one  of  the  first 
copies  furnished  by  the  printer.  Although 
he  has  preserved  the  title  of  Photography  in 
America,  and  announces  it  as  a  second  edi- 
tion of  that  work,  the  present  volume  is  in 
reality  full  of  new  matter,  as  you  will  see. 
The  author  writes  to  me  that  he  would  con- 
sider himself  very  happy  to  have  you  make 
such  extracts  from  his  work  as  might  prove 
useful  for  the  Philadelphia  Photographer, 
"  which  he  reads  monthly  with  a  very  great 
deal  of  interest." 

I  think  you  will  agree  with  me  that  the 
specimens  that  adorn  this  work  are  very 
curious  in  every  respect.  Printed  by  the 
"Woodbury  process,  they  are  accompanied 
by  a  heliographic  plate  by  Kousselon,  all 
coming  from  the  ateliers  of  Goupil,  which 
I  intend  to  describe  in  another  letter.  As 
may  be  seen  from  the  remarkable  portrait 
placed  at  the  commencement  of  the  volume, 
Mr.  Liebert  is  still  a  young  man,  being  but 
very  little  over  forty,  but  his  life  has  been 
a  varied  one.  When  an  officer  in  the  navy 
he  travelled  a  great  deal,  and  he  spent  sev- 
eral years  in  California  at  the  time  of  the 
gold  fever ;  he  then  resided  in  the  United 
States  some  time  and  became  a  naturalized 
citizen.  He  had  come  on  a  simple  business 
visit  to  France  when  he  made  up  his  mind 
to  remain  there  and  take  a  wife.  He  is 
well  informed,  intelligent,  very  active,  and 
very  industrious.  After  the  sad  days  of  the 
Commune,  when  Paris  was  still  smoking, 
he  undertook  to  reproduce  all  the  ruins  that 
the  siege  of  the  Prussians  and  the  bloody 
insurrection  had  made  in  the  unfortunate 
capital.  Notwithstanding  countless  diffi- 
culties, he  succeeded  in  a  few  days  in  ob- 
taining more  than  three  hundred  nega- 
tives, from  which  he  has  made  an  album 
that  will  be  for  the  history  of  this  unhappy 
period  a  record  of  inestimable  value,  and  I 
may  add,  that  all  the  sovereigns  to  whom 
the  artist  has  sent  a  copy  of  this  album, 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGE APHEE. 


179 


have  conveyed  to  him  the  acknowledgments 
of  their  satisfaction.  Mr.  Liebert  may  be 
classed  among  the  men  in  France  who  have 
received  the  largest  number  of  medals  and 
decorations.  He  ranks  as  one  of  our  most 
skilful  and  practical  photographers. 

All  the  Parisian  press  was  invited  a  few 
days  ago  by  Nadar  to  assist  at  a  very  curi- 
ous experiment  that  he  wished  to  attempt. 
He  intended  to  ascend  to  a  certain  height 
in  a  captive  balloon,  and  reproduce  by  pho- 
tography a  portion  of  the  panorama  which 
unfolded  itself  beneath  him.  It  is  not  nec- 
essary to  say  that  the  views  were  to  be  taken 
instantaneously.  Nadar  has  already  made 
a  similar  attempt,  and  the  picture  that  he 
obtained  is  still  in  his  atelier,  where  I  re- 
cently examined  it.  He  desired  to  demon- 
strate the  utility  of  this  application  of 
photography  in  case  of  war,  and  even  in 
time  of  peace,  for  the  making  of  surveys, 
the  projection  of  plans,  and  for  all  those 
topographical  works  which  require  so  much 
money  and  time  by  the  processes  ordinarily 
employed.  Photography  would  do  away 
with  the  preliminary  triangulation  based 
on  a  mass  of  trigonometrical  formulas,  dis- 
pensing with  the  use  of  theodolites,  alidades, 
graphometers,  &c.  It  would  no  longer  be 
necessary  to  drag  the  chains  through  fields, 
vineyards,  and  swamps,  and  it  has  been  cal- 
culated that  five  hundred  geodesic  photo- 
graphs daily,  each  embracing  about  four 
square  miles,  would  give  the  general  plan 
of  Prance  in  eighty  working  days.  It  was 
to  prove  that  this  problem  was  capable  of 
realization  that  Nadar  wished  to  make  the 
experiment  of  which  I  have  spoken. 

Unfortunately  a  very  violent  wind  has 
prevented  him  from  making  the  ascent. 
Let  us  hope  that  at  some  future  time  he 
will  be  able  to  accomplish  his  design. 

Next  month,  in  the  July  number,  we  expect 
to  commence  with  the  prize  pictures,  and  shall 
issue  those  by  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  of  San  Fran- 
cisco, to  whom  the  medal  was  awarded.  The 
whole  set  we  now  have  ready,  and  commend 
them  to  the  attention  of  all  who  wish  to  improve. 
The  money  paid  for  a  set  of  these  pictures  will 
be  well  invested,  and  we  want  to  see  them  in  the 
bands  of  every  photographer,  because  we  are  sure 
they  will  benefit  all  who  study  them. 


GERMAN  CORRESPONDENCE. 

The  Transit  of  Venus. — Observations  on  the 
Contraction  of  the  Collodion  Film. — Coat- 
ing Plates  with  India-rubber. — The  Mor- 
phia Process. — Neiu  Albumen  Paper  Cow,- 
pany. 

The  summer  advances,  and  the  nearer 
the  term  approaches  for  the  great  astronom- 
ical event  of  this  year,  the  more  zealous 
are  the  preparations  carried  on  in  all  the 
civilized  countries  of  the  world  for  the 
proper  observation  of  the  same.  Here  also 
trials  for  photographing  the  sun  are  in  prog- 
ress, and  many  a  photographer  who  hears  of 
it  puts  to  himself  the  question,  why  are  so 
many  experiments  necessary  ?  photograph- 
ing the  sun  is  an  easy  matter.  This  is 
very  true,  nothing  is  easier  than  taking  a 
picture  of  the  sun,  but  the  matter  assumes 
an  entirely  different  aspect  when  a  picture  is 
to  be  made  which  admits  of  very  exact  meas- 
urement, for  in  this  case  the  pictures  them- 
selves have  to  be  mathematically  correct, 
and  most  photographs  are  in  this  respect  defi- 
cient. They  cannot  be  mathematically  cor- 
rect, because,  1.  Most  lenses  distort  a  little. 
2.  Because  the  collodion  film  by  the  develop- 
ing, intensifying,  drying,  and  varnishing 
processes,  becomes  somewhat  changed,  and 
the  original  picture  is  altered  in  its  propor- 
tions. This  change  in  the  collodion  film 
makes  all  measurement  illusory,  no  matter 
how  small  it  may  be,  for  the  question  is  to 
measure  fractions  of  the  seconds  of  an  arc. 
If,  for  instance,  we  take  the  size  of  the 
whole  sun,  equal  to  1800  seconds,  and  we 
take  a  picture  of  four  inches  diameter, 
then  one  second  is  equal  to  t/oq  =  ?Aq  inch, 
but  the  intention  is  to  measure  T^  of  a  sec- 
ond =  ?-£$■$  inch.  How  is  this  possible 
if  collodion  contracts  ^7,  as  Pashen  has 
demonstrated,  or  in  other  words,  seven 
times  as  much  as  the  size  which  is  to  be 
measured. 

It  is  a  question  of  the  utmost  importance 
to  find  a  film  which  does  not  contract. 
Eutherfurd,  the  celebrated  astronomer  and 
photographer,  has  published  also  his  obser- 
vations on  the  contraction  of  the  collodion 
film;  according  to  him  the  matter  is  not  as- 
bad  as  represented,  it  amounted  to  only 
2'djotP     This  surprising  discrepancy  in  the 


180 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


statements  of  Pashen  and  Butherfurd  in- 
duced me  recently  to  investigate  this  sub- 
ject myself,  and  I  found  that  the  contrac- 
tion varies  considerably  with  different 
samples  of  cotton.  There  are  samples  of 
cotton  which  contract  very  much,  while 
others  possess  this  quality  in  a  lesser  degree. 
I  found  that  thick  collodion  contracts  the 
most,  while  the  limpid  ones  much  less.  Of 
all  the  kinds  which  I  have  tried,  Schering's 
celloidin-collodion  contracted  the  least. 

The  contraction  varied  also  with  one  and 
the  same  sample,  according  to  its  concen- 
tration. The  same  collodion  which,  with 
two  per  cent,  of  pyroxylin,  showed  a  con- 
traction, did  not  show  any  with  one  and  a 
half  per  cent.  If  no  celloidin  is  to  be  had, 
it  will  be  necessary  to  employ  a  diluted  col- 
lodion. 

Fothergill's  dry-plate  process  has  been 
proposed  for  taking  the  pictures  of  the 
transit  of  Venus;  it  is  said  to  furnish  very 
stable  film.  The  stability,  however,  is  not 
due  to  the  process,  but  is  owing  to  the  small 
amount  of  cotton  present  in  the  collodion,  for 
the  collodion  which  is  employed  in  this  pro- 
cess contains  but  0.9  per  cent,  of  pyroxylin. 

Still  another  point  exercises  an  influence, 
i.  e.,  the  adhesion  of  the  film  to  the  glass. 
"When  the  film  is  very  firm,  the  adhesion  is 
slight,  and  when  the  adhesion  is  slight  there 
is  danger  of  displacement.  When,  for  in- 
stance, the  film  becomes  detached  from  the 
corners  of  the  glass  during  the  washing,  and 
water  gets  between  the  film  and  the  glass, 
the  former  will  become  changed  in  shape  ; 
the  same  result  follows  when  the  film  be- 
comes in  any  part  of  it  broken  or  perforated. 
Every  means  which,  increases  the  adhesion  of 
the  film  to  the  glass  lessens  also  the  distor- 
tion, and  vice  versa. 

Hence  albumenizing  the  plates  before 
collodionizing  is  beneficial  as  well  as  coat- 
ing with  caoutchouc,  while  on  the  other 
hand,  gum  substances,  when  placed  upon 
the  film,  become  detrimental,  for  these  cause 
a  raising  of  the  film  during  development, 
and  hence  distortion,  and  it  follows  that  all 
the  dry-plate  processes  in  which  gum  is 
used  as  a  preservative  are  not  suited  for 
work  of  this  kind;  those  who  desire  to  em- 
ploy a  dry-plate  process  should  select  one 
in  which    the    preservative,  after    having 


been  poured  on  is  washed  off  again,  as,  for 
instance,  with  albumen,  or  where  the  pre- 
servative is  so  much  diluted  that  it  cannot 
exert  an  injurious  influence ;  very  suitable 
for  this  purpose  is  pure  morphia  (not  acetate 
of  morphia).  One  gramme  of  morphia, 
when  boiled  with  1750  grammes  of  water, 
yields  a  preservative  which  makes  a  washed 
iodide  of  silver  plate  very  sensitive,  with- 
out exercising  any  injurious  influence  on 
the  stability.  I  have  tried  further  to  find 
out  what  influence  an  alkaline  developer 
exercises  on  the  film.  It  has  often  been 
stated  that  an  alkaline  developer  loosens  the 
film  and  causes  contraction.  This,  how- 
ever, takes  place  only  when  a  gum  is  on 
the  film,  otherwise,  the  alkaline  developer 
does  not  affect  the  film,  and  is  even  in  some 
respects  preferable  to  the  acid  developer, 
for  when  the  collodion  film  is  treated  for  a 
long  time  with  pyrogallic  acid  it  will 
always  contract,  as  is  readily  seen  when  we 
intensify  with  pyrogallic  and  silver  solution. 

The  alkaline  developer  is,  of  course,  only 
suitable  for  certain  plates  (chloro-bromine 
process) ;  the  preparation  of  the  plate  is  not 
a  success  in  everybody's  hands. 

I  hope  that  the  hints  which  I  have  given 
in  the  above  lines  will  not  be  too  late  for 
the  Venus  expedition  ;  perhaps  they  are  im- 
portant also  for  the  preparation  of  all  plates 
where  exact  measurements  are  necessary,  as, 
for  instance,  the  reproduction  of  cartoons, 
&c,  &c. 

I  have  spoken  above  of  caoutchouc  solu- 
tion for  coating  plates,  and  will  mention 
now  how  the  solution  is  best  prepared.  One 
part  of  finely  cut  india-rubber  is  dissolved  in 
one  hundred  parts  of  chloroform.  It  takes 
two  or  three  days  until  the  solution  is  com- 
pleted ;  one  part  remains  undissolved  and 
floats  on  the  top  ;  the  clear  solution  is  drawn 
off  with  a  glass  tube,  and  is  diluted  with  ten 
times  its  volume  of  pure  and  very  volatile 
benzine.  The  solution  is  placed  on  the 
cleaned,  dried,  and  dusted  plate  before 
coating  the  same  with  collodion.  The  plates 
may  be  kept  for  a  month  in  a  place  free 
from  dust. 

The  morphia  plates  which  I  have  men- 
tioned above  deserve  particular  attention  on 
account  of  their  sensitiveness.  It  is  not 
at  all   difficult    to    make    morphia   plates 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


181 


which  are  nearly  half  as  sensitive  as  wet 
plates,  but  the  most  curious  part  is  their  sen- 
sitiveness to  color.  While  ordinary  bromo- 
iodide  collodion  plates  are  sensitive  only  as 
far  as  green  (beginning  from  the  violet  of  the 
spectrum),  morphia  plates  show  a  sensitive- 
ness which  extends  as  far  as  the  red  and 
into  it. 

This  circumstance  is  of  great  importance 
for  photographing  the  sun,  for  the  edge  of 
the  sun  emits  relatively  more  reddish-yellow 
and  green  rays  than  the  centre,  and  with 
ordinary  collodion  the  edge  appears  often 
underexposed.  Morphia  plates,  however, 
do  not  keep  long;  already  after  four  days 
the  sensitiveness  begins  to  diminish.  This 
has,  of  course,  nothing  to  do  with  photo- 
graphing the  transit  of  Venus,  as  the  day 
when  it  occurs  is  well  known. 

The  morphia  process  which  I  now  prac- 
tice is  as  follows : 

(a.)    COLLODION. 

Bromide  of  Cadmium,  .        ]  gramme. 

Iodide  of  Cadmium,   .  1       " 

Alcohol,     .  .  .         .25  grammes. 

Filter   and   dilute  with   three   times   the 

volume  of  plain  collodion   containing   two 

percent,  of  cotton. 

(b.)    NITRATE    BATH. 

Nitrate  of  Silver,        .         .       100  parts. 
Water,         ....     1000       " 
Iodide  of  Potassium,  .         .  i      ■" 

(C.)    MORPHIA    SOLUTION. 

One   gramme    Morphia   boiled    with  1750  cubic 
centimetres  of  Water  for  one  hour. 

(d.)    PYROGALLIC    SOLUTION. 

Pyrogallic,  ...        1  gramme. 

Alcohol,       .  .         .  .10  grammes. 

(e.)    CITRATE    OF    SILVER    SOLUTION. 

Citric  Acid,  ...        1  part. 

Nitrate  of  Silver,  .         .        1      " 

Water,  .         .  .         .50  parts. 

(/".)  Fixing  solution  as  usual. 

The  plate  is  collodionized  and  placed  for 
at  least  three  minutes  into  the  silver  bath  ; 
it  is  afterwards  dipped  in  distilled  water 
and  well  washed.  It  is  next  placed  for 
three  minutes  into  the  morphia  solution 
and  dried. 

For  the  purpose  of  development,  the  plate 
is  placed  into  diluted  pyrogallic  solution. 


Pyrogallic  Solution, 
Water, 


I  part. 
20  pai  is. 


The  picture  appears  feebly,  the  plate  is 
taken  out  and  developed  with  pyrogallic, 
to  which  very  little  silver  solution  (e)  has 
been  added. 

If  the  plate  has  been  overexposed  it  is 
advisable  to  take  more  silver  solution.  The 
development  progresses  very  slowly  ;  only 
after  all  the  details  have  appeared  more 
silver  solution  should  be  added  to  the  in- 
tensifier. 

In  conclusion.  I  have  to  communicate  to 
you  some  important  news.  The  eight  or 
ten  different  establishments  of  Dresden  for 
the  production  of  albumen  paper  have  been 
consolidated,  and  form  now  one  single  manu- 
factory. The  enterprise  is  a  stock  con- 
cern. We  will  therefore  in  the  future  only 
have  one  source  in  Dresden  from  which  we 
can  obtain  albumen  paper,  and  the  factory 
has  only  one  competitor  in  Germany, 
namely,  Trapp  &  Munch,  in  Friedberg 
(Hasse).  It  is  said  that  the  principal  party 
which  supplies  plain  paper  (Blanchet  freres 
in  Elves)  is  interested  in  the  undertaking. 
This  event  may  become  of  great  impor- 
tance for  photography.  If  a  factory  which 
furnishes  such  an  important  article  as  albu- 
men paper  has  no  competitor  it  will  be  able 
to  dictate  terms.  There  are,  of  course, 
other  establishments  outside  of  Germany 
which  manufacture  albumen  paper,  but 
none  of  them  are  so  extensive  as  those  of 
Dresden.  Of  the  fifteen  hundred  reams  of 
paper  manufactured  weekly  by  Blanchet 
freres  in  Rives,  one  thousand  go  to  Dres- 
den for  the  purpose  of  being  albumenized  ; 
the  balance  is  distributed  through  the 
other  states.  At  present  we  have,  besides 
Blanchet,  only  one  factory  where  plain 
paper  is  made,  namely,  the  one  of  Steinbach 
in  Malmedy,  where  the  Saxe  paper  is  made. 
So  far,  this  paper  has  been  considered  in- 
ferior to  the  Rives  paper ;  perhaps  the  new 
arrangement  will  give  an  impulse  to  his 
establishment,  for  I  should  feel  very  sorry 
if  we  were  dependent  on  one  establishment 
for  the  supply  of  plain  paper. 

Yours,  truly, 

Dr.  H.  Vogel. 


181 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


NOTES  IN  AND  OUT  OF  THE 
STUDIO. 

BY  G.  WHARTON  SIMPSON,   M.A.,  P.S.A. 

Eliminating  Hypo  from  Negatives. — Another 
Novelty  in  Dry  Plates. — Additional  Prizes 
by  Mr.  Crawshay. 

Eliminating  Hyposulphite  from  Negatives. 
— One  of  my  correspondents,  Mr.  Gregson, 
sends  me  details  of  a  method  he  has  em- 
ployed for  removing  all  traces  of  the  hypo 
fixing  solution  from  the  negative  film.  He 
says  : 

"  Many  of  your  readers  have,  I  presume, 
been  exceedingly  annoyed  by  the  loss  of 
valuable  negatives  by  crystallization,  that 
from  haste  or  other  causes  have  had  insuffi- 
cient washing,  after  fixing  with  hyposul- 
phite of  soda,  both  before  and  after  var- 
nishing. Sometimes  it  is  years  before  this 
is  perceived.  It  generally  first  shows  itself 
in  the  thick  edge  of  the  film,  where  a  de- 
composition of  the  varnish  shows  the  pres- 
ence of  the  enemy.  Sometimes  it  appears 
in  small  points  over  the  negative,  spoiling 
every  print,  for  which  the  paper  is  often 
blamed,  and  which  revarnishing  will  not 
always  remove. 

"  I  have  for  some  years  used  the  following 
method  of  decomposing  the  hypo  in  the 
film,  and  have  not  lost  a  negative  from 
crystallization  since.  My  immunity  from 
the  cracking  of  varnished  films  of  late  I 
partly  attribute  to  this  method.  Make  a 
stock  solution — 


Iodine, 

.     30  grains. 

Iodide  of  Potassium,  . 

.     40       " 

Water, 

5  ounces 

For  use,  to  one  part  of  this  add  four  parts 
water.  Wash  the  negative  as  usual,  and 
pour  on  this  solution  similar  to  develop- 
ing, when,  if  hypo  is  present,  a  milky  pre- 
cipitate is  produced,  and,  on  returning  it 
to  the  developing  glass,  the  deep  sherry 
color  which  it  has  will  be  found  to  have 
disappeared  A  second  application,  after 
slight  washing,  will  be  found  to  retain  its 
color.  After  a  rinse  to  remove  the  iodine 
water,  the  negative  is  completely  free  from 
hyposulphite,  and  no  fear  need  be  enter- 
tained of  crystallization,  either  before  or 
after  varnishing. 


"  I  should  state  that  this  makes  the  nega- 
tive more  dense,  the  iodine  exercising  a 
powerful  toning  action;  but  the  half  tones 
are  equally  strengthened,  so  there  is  not 
the  risk  of  hardness  being  produced  as 
when  an  intensifier  is  used.  This  intensi- 
fication may  be  carried  still  further  by  ex- 
posing it  to  the  sun's  rays  before  drying. 

"  I  have  found  no  change  of  intensity  on 
varnishing,  nor  after  being  put  away  for 
years;  neither  is  there  any  contraction  of 
the  film  from  its  use. 

"  The  stock  solution  is  the  best  plate-cleaner 
I  have  ever  used;  I  have  not  had  a  single 
dirty  plate  since  using  it.  Although  iodine 
is  somewhat  expensive,  it  will  not  be  found 
so  in  use,  as  but  a  small  quantity  is  em- 
ployed. Once  used,  it  will  not  be  forsaken 
by  those  who,  like  myself,  are  old-fashioned 
enough  to  prefer  a  clean  plate  to  an  albu- 
menized  one.  It  may  be  used  for  removing 
stains  from  the  fingers,  which  it  does  equal 
to  cyanide,  without  its  danger ;  the  color  of 
it  may  then  be  removed  from  the  fingers  by 
a  strong  solution  of  hypo.  In  fact,  it  is  a 
universal  scouring  or  cleansing  agent  for 
the  photographer." 

Another  Novelty  in  Dry  Plates. — A  cor- 
respondent sends  me  the  following  details  of 
a  dry  process  in  which  tobacco  is  used  as 
the  preservative.     It  is  as  follows  : 


Tobacco, 
Gum  Arabic, 
Water, 


20  grains. 
10      " 
1  ounce. 


Boil  the  tobacco  in  the  water,  which  you 
will  find  to  make  a  saturated  solution,  and 
on  cooling  to  throw  down  a  portion  of  the 
soluble  matter  out  of  solution.  Filter,  and 
in  the  filtrate  dissolve  the  gum.  I  have 
found  tobacco  per  se  'to  give  good  results, 
but  prefer  to  add  the  gum  when  the  plates 
are  to  be  kept  for  some  time. 

Additional  Prizes  by  Mr.  Oraivshay. — 
Your  readers  are  already  familiar  I  believe 
with  the  details  of  the  munificent  prizes 
offered  by  Mr.  Crawshay  for  large  direct 
photographs.  That  gentleman  has  just  re- 
solved to  extend  his  encouragement  of  pho- 
tographic excellence  still  further  by  offer- 
ing a  series  of  liberal  prizes  for  landscape 
photographs,  the  competition  to  take  place 
some  time  in  autumn,  at  the  same  time  as 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER 


183 


the  portrait  competition.  A  prize  of  £25 
is  for  the  hest  three  landscapes  of  any  size 
not  less  than  ten  inches  by  eight,  and  a 
second  prize  of  £12  for  the  second  best  three 
of  similar  proportions  ;  also  a  prize  of  £10 
for  the  best  landscape  of  any  size,  and  a 
prize  of  £5  for  the  second  best  landscape  of 
any  size.  Mr.  Crawshay  is  desirous  that 
each  landscape  shall  be  a  genuine  view  of 
the  scene  it  professes  to  represent,  and  not 
a  patchwork  cf  many  places.  But  he  does 
not  bar  such  combination  as  may  be  de- 
sirable to  secure  either  higher  truth  or  pic- 
torial effect.  If  the  subject  be  one  in  which 
justice  cannot  be  secured  by  the  use  of  one 
negative,  several  negatives  may  be  em- 
ployed, so  that  portions  of  foreground, 
figures,  clouds,  &c,  may  be  produced  on 
separate  negatives,  and  secured  in  the  pic- 
ture by  combination  printing.  The  compe- 
tition will  be  open  to  photographers  in  all 
parts  of  the  world  ;  and  as  the  wide  condi- 
tions give  facilities  for  almost  every  land- 
scape photographer  to  compete,  it  is  hoped 
that  a  goodly  number  will  enter  the  lists. 
The  size  of  the  competing  pictures  for  the 
first  prize  is  within  the  power  of  most  pho- 
tographers, whilst  for  the  next  no  size  is 
laid  down.  Supreme  excellence  alone  will 
take  the  prize.  The  precise  time  and  place 
of  the  competition  will  be  duly  announced 
when  decided. 


SOCIETY  GOSSIP. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association 
held  a  meeting  in  their  room,  158  State 
Street,  May  6th.  President  G.  A.  Douglass 
in  the  chair. 

After  the  reading  of  the  minutes  of  the 
last  meeting,  upon  motion  of  Mr.  Green,  the 
meeting  adjourned  for  one  week,  in  courtesy 
to  the  visitors,  among  whom  were  Messrs. 
Abraham  Bogardus,  President  of  the  Na- 
tional Photographic  Association,  and  Ed- 
ward L.  Wilson,  Permanent  Secretary,  and 
editor  of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

General.  Meeting. — Mr.  Douglass  called 
the  meeting  to  order,  and  Mr.  A.  J.  W. 
Copelin  was  called  to  the  chair ;  Mr.  O.  F. 
Weaver  was  elected  Secretary. 

Mr.  Hesler,  as  Local  Secretary,  stated  the 


object  of  the  meeting  just  formed,  to  be  to 
consider  tho  subject  of  the  coming  Conven- 
tion. Our  very  worthy  brothers,  A.  Bo- 
gardus, President  of  the  National  Photo- 
graphic Association,  ami  E.  L.  Wilson, 
Permanent  Secretary,  were  with  us,  had 
come  a  long  way,  and  they  would  like  to 
hear  from  all  present  in  regard  to  the  ques- 
tion. He  stated  his  office  as  Local  Secre- 
tary was  not  one  of  his  choosing,  and  would 
very  willingly  relinquish  his  claim,  but  the 
highest  authority  had  refused  to  accept  his 
resignation.  He  had  issued  a  great  many 
letters  to  the  brother  photographers,  and 
had  received  very  encouraging  replies.  At 
a  meeting  of  our  Society  some  four  months 
ago,  the  vote  being  taken,  "  Do  we  want  the 
Exhibition  to  come  here,"  it  was  decided  in 
the  affirmative  by  a  good  majority.  Called  a 
special  meeting  8th  of  April.  A  resolution 
was  offered  at  that  meeting,  "That  the 
Executive  Committee  of  the  National  Pho- 
tographic Association  be  requested  to  post- 
pone the  Convention  being  held  here  the 
present  season,  as,  on  account  of  our  great 
losses  so  recently  by  the  great  fire,  we 
were  not  prepared  to  receive  our  brother 
photographers  as  we  would  wish  to."  The 
resolution  was  voted  down.  He  had  every 
reason  to  believe  a  majority  were  in  favor 
of  taking  hold  and  helping  the  matter  right 
along.  After  several  times  trying,  he  had 
finally  secured  the  Exposition  building  on 
very  reasonable  terms,  and  we  would  have 
the  finest  show-room  in  America,  room 
enough  for  all.  He  introduced  Mr.  Wilson, 
who  stated,  among  other  things,  that  he  had 
come  West  for  his  own  benefit,  to  be  cheered 
up.  Had  heard  there  was  great  disorder  in 
the  camp,  but  he  was  very  happy  to  say  he 
could  pronounce  it  a  false  alarm.  He  had 
visited  many  galleries  through  the  day,  and 
found  the  Chicago  artists  were  almost  a  unit 
in  the  desire  to  have  the  Convention  come 
here;  he  would  like  to  call  on  all,  but  bis 
time  was  limited.  Five  years  ago  nearly 
every  artist  in  the  United  States  was 
ashamed  of  the  work  he  was  turning  out, 
but  now  it  was  very  different ;  you  are 
proud  of  your  work  and  of  the  name  artist. 
It  is  one  of  the  results  of  these  annual  gath- 
erings. They  made  photographers  feel  that 
they  were  of  some  use  and  of  some  import- 


184 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


ance  in  and  to  the  world,  and  now  they 
hold  their  heads  up !  and  they  have  a  right 
to.  In  former  exhibitions  we  were  com- 
pelled to  ask  an  admittance  fee,  but  this  time 
we  propose  to  make  it  free  to  all.  If  the 
brotherhood  take  hold  of  the  matter  with  a 
will  it  will  be  the  grandest  "show"  ever 
held  in  America. 

Mr.  Bogardus  being  introduced,  said : 
Excuse  me  if  I  go  back  a  little  ways.  Some 
years  ago  Chicago  put  in  a  claim  to  have 
the  Convention  here,  but  could  not  secure 
enough  votes  to  get  it.  Later  there  was  a 
rivalry  between  St.  Louis  and  Chicago,  and 
as  there  had  been  one  in  Cleveland,  which 
is  in  this  range,  St.  Louis  secured  it.  Was 
pleased  to  hear  Mr.  Hesler  say,  "  We  are 
outvoted,  and  we  will  go  with  you  to  St. 
Louis." 

But  a  short  time  ago  Chicago  was  de- 
vastated by  the  great  fire,  now  it  was  up 
again  grander  than  ever,  and  where  such 
pluck  had  been  shown,  he  knew  a  photo- 
graphic show  would  be  successfnl.  He  did 
not  expect  Chicago  photographers  were 
going  to  spend  their  money  recklessly ;  that 
is  not  what  is  wanted.  We  want  to  come 
here  and  attend  to  business.  We  cannot 
do  too  much  to  build  up  the  trade.  In 
London  people  were  invited  to  come  and  sit 
for  their  picture,  being  promised  a  picture 
and  a  glass  of  beer,  or  a  picture  and  a  piece 
of  pie  for  a  shilling.  We  did  not  want  to 
see  the  business  come  to  that  here;  we  must 
keep  it  up  some  way.  Was  not  necessary 
to  say  anything  in  regard  to  the  benefits 
derived  from  attending  the  Convention  ;  we 
go  there  and  see  something  we  are  not 
familiar  with,  and  anything  that  will  help 
us  is  certainly  a  benefit.  On  my  way  to 
St.  Louis,  I  met  a  man  in  Ohio,  who  did  not 
even  know  how  to  make  a  medallion  pic- 
ture. He  learned  how  at  the  St.  Louis 
Convention.  I  had  a  letter  from  him  since 
stating  he  used  to  get  $2  a  dozen,  but  now 
gets  $3.  As  for  him  he  had  learned  more 
in  one  Convention  than  he  ever  had  in  his 
room. 

In  Cleveland  nearly  the  whole  city  at- 
tended the  Convention,  and  afterwards  de- 
manded more  pictures  and  wanted  good 
ones.  I  have  served  twenty-seven  years  at 
the   business,    and    learn    something    new 


every  year.  Some  claimed  it  was  run  too 
much  in  the  interest  of  the  stockdealers. 
I  consider  they  deserve  to  make  a)l  they 
can  out  of  it,  for  they  spend  a  good  deal  of 
time  and  money  in  the  cause,  and  I  like  to 
see  them  repaid. 

Mr.  Cross  stated  that  he  rose  from  an  ob- 
scure village  in  New  England,  and  was 
eager  and  willing  to  learn  ;  could  do  so  by 
looking  at  other  work,  and  certainly  the  Ex- 
hibition would  be  the  place  to  see  it.  Then 
we  could  test  our  own  work  by  placing  it 
beside  others.  This  movement  cannot  fail. 
No  one  can  doubt  the  motives  of  either  of 
these  gentlemen — officers  of  the  Associa- 
tion. They  were  earnest  and  have  proven 
it  by  not  only  giving  their  time  but  much 
of  their  money. 

Mr.  Brand  said  :  He  would  take  hold  and 
do  all  he  could.  The  Convention  was  com- 
ing here,  and  he  really  hoped  all  would  help 
to  make  it  a  success. 

Mr.  Fassett  said:  He  would  do  all  he 
could  to  make  it  a  success. 

Mr.  Mosher  advocated  the  Exhibition, 
and  was  bound  to  do  all  he  could  for  it. 

Mr  Copelin  being  called  upon,  invited 
Mr.  Hall  to  the  chair,  and  then  cheered  the 
cause  on  by  declaring  his  intention  of  lend- 
ing a  willing  hand. 

Mr.  Hall  gave  -his  reasons  for  opposing 
the  Convention  coming  here  this  season, 
and  after  speaking  at  some  length,  it  was 
moved  we  take  the  sense  of  the  meeting  to 
find  out  the  feeling  on  the  subject. 

Twenty-three  voted  aye,  and  two  nay — 
an  overwhelming  majority. 

Mr.  Hall  moved  to  make  it  unanimous. 
Carried  enthusiastically. 

Mr.  Abbott  had  opposed  its  coming  here 
at  present,  but  should  bury  ( the  hatchet 
now. 

Mr.  J.  K.  Stevens  thought  the  photogra- 
phers just  as  well  prepared  now  as  they  ever 
would  be.  Glad  to  see  the  good  feeling  pre- 
vailing, and  hoped  all  would  take  hold,  and 
do  the  best  they  could.  He  should  lend  it 
all  the  assistance  he  could. 

Mr.  Spencer  was  not  really  a  photog- 
rapher, but  somewhat  connected  with,  and 
a  lover  of,  the  art.     Should  help  it  along. 

Mr.  Armstrong:  I  shall  put  my  shoulder 
to  the  wheel. 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


185 


Messrs.  W.  H.  Lathrop,  of  Lacrosse,  J. 
Adams  and  G.  H.  Sherman,  of  Elgin,  S.  W. 
Truesdall,  of  Kenosha,  J.  S.  Medler,  of 
"Woodstock,  and  L.  H.  Pitman  of  Mt. 
Pleasant,  were  present,  and  signified  their 
willingness  and  determination  to  lend  it  all 
the  help  they  could. 

Mr.  Brand  moved  a  vote  of  thanks  be 
tendered  our  guests,  Messrs.  Bogardus  and 
Wilson. 

Mr.  Wilson  in  reply,  stated  he  came  here 
to  be  cheered  up,  and  was  happy  to  say  he 
had  been,  nobly. 

Mr.  Bogardus  did  not  desire  a  vote  of 
thanks.  Was  very  well  pleased  to  be  here, 
and  would  bid  them  all  good  night. 

Mr.  Hesler  laid  a  subscription  paper  on 
the  table,  and  the  chair  called  upon  those 
who  would,  to  come  forward  and  subscribe 
to  the  fund.  Upon  motion  of  Mr.  Brand, 
the  paper  was  turned  over  to  a  committee 
of  three  to  have  full  control  of  the  same. 
Mr.  Hesler  appointed  as  such  committee, 
Messrs.  Brand,  Mosher,  and  Copelin. 

Mr.  Wilson  presented  the  Chicago  Pho- 
tographic Association  with  an  album  of  the 
thirty  competing  cabinet  photographs  for 
the  Gold  Medal  prize,  for  which  he  received 
the  thanks  of  the  Society. 

After  further  remarks  by  Messrs.  Brand, 
Mosher,  Hall,  Hesler,  Ormsby,  and  others, 
the  meeting  adjourned. 

Philadelphia,  May  6th. — The  Presi- 
dent announced  the  death  of  Mr.  William 
Langenheim,  one  of  the  earliest  daguerreo- 
typists,  and  an  honorary  member  of  the 
Society,  and  stated  that  Mr.  Langenheim 
began  to  take  daguerreotypes  in  this  city 
about  the  year  1840  in  the  Exchange  Build- 
ing. He  devoted  much  attention  to  the 
albumen  process,  both  for  negatives  and 
positives,  and  brought  his  results  to  a  high 
standard  of  excellence.  His  pictures  for 
the  magic  lantern  were  unsurpassed,  and 
well  appreciated  both  at  home  and  abroad. 
Mr.  Langenheim  was  a  gentleman  of  a  re- 
tiring disposition,  and  not  communicative 
in  relation  to  his  experiments. 

Mr.  Tilghman,in  moving  that  the  re- 
marks of  the  President  be  entered  on  the 
minutes  of  the  Society  in  commemoration 
of  Mr.  Langenheim,  observed  that  he  him- 
self had  known  him  long  and  well,  and  un- 


fortunately had  been  the  immediate  cause  of 
great  pecuniary  loss  to  him,  by  showing 
him  some  crude  results  of  his  own  in  the 
calotype  process  of  Fox  Talbot.  Mr.  Lan- 
genheim was  so  impressed  with  the  capabil-  \ 
ities  of  photography  on  paper,  that  he 
bought  from  Mr.  Talbot  the  patent  right 
for  this  country,  and  expended  largely  in 
introducing  and  perfecting  it.  The  dis- 
covery by  Le  Gray  and  Archer  of  the  col- 
lodion process  rendered  the  calotype  value- 
less. Mr.  Langenheim  worked  out  the  Le 
Gray  process  on  albumen  to  a  perfection 
that  excited  the  wonder  and  admiration  of 
all  who  beheld  the  glass  positives  he  exhib- 
ited at  the  first  World's  Fair  in  London, 
1851.  His  micro-photographs  have  never 
been  surpassed,  or  even  approached. 

On  motion,  the  Secretary  was  instructed 
to  furnish  a  copy  of  the  minutes  of  this 
meeting  to  the  family  of  the  late  Mr.  Lan- 
genheim. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Schreiber,  Mr.  Fred- 
erick Langenheim  was  elected  an  honorary 
member  of  the  Society. 

Mr.  Sergeant  read  a  paper  by  Mr.  M. 
Carey  Lea,  on  "  A  New  Dry  Process." 

A  vote  of  thanks  was  tendered  to  Mr. 
Lea  for  his  communication. 

The  President  exhibited  a  print  from  a 
batch  of  paper  which  had  been  kept  a 
month  after  sensitizing.  Also  an  ingenious 
arrangement  for  micro-photography  by 
Mr.  Zentmayer. 

Mr.  Hewitt  exhibited  some  very  fine 
negatives  made  by  a  modification  of  the 
collodio-albumen  dry  process,  as  published 
by  Mr.  England  in  the  British  Journal  of 
Photography,  1867. 

Mr.  Schreiber  exhibited  a  handsome  book 
entitled  "Noted  Horses  of  America,"  being 
a  series  of  photographs  by  himself  and 
brother,  all  taken  from  life. 

Pennsylvania,  Philadelphia. — Mr. 
Augustus  Schwarze  was  elected  to  member- 
ship. 

A  committee  of  five  was  appointed  to 
draft  a  form  for  a  protective  association. 

The  subject  of  enamel  pictures  excited  a 
good  deal  of  interest,  but  the  attraction  of 
the  evening  was  two  of  Entrekin's  beautiful 
oscillating  enamellers.  They  were  worked 
in  the  presence  of  the  members,  and  the 


186 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


marvellously  perfect  finish  given  to  the 
photograph  was  sufficient  evidence  to  all  of 
the  superior  excellence  of  the  machine. 
Mr.  Entrekin  has,  by  his  push  and  enter- 
prise, and  his  personal  attention  to  the  per- 
fect working  of  every  machine,  gained  the 
confidence  of  all  who  have  used  or  seen 
them,  and  is  deserving  of  the  success  that 
is  sure  to  come  to  him. 

Ordered  that  a  print  from  each  negative 
that  has  won  a  medal,  be  deposited  with  the 
Society. 

In  the  competition  for  the  medal  for  the 
best  print,  it  was  decided  that  no  double 
printing  or  fancy  background  should  be 
admitted. 

Photographic  Association  of  the 
District  of  Columbia. — There  was  an 
unusually  large  attendance  at  the  May  meet- 
ing, and  the  session  proved  the  most  inter- 
esting of  any  since  its  organization. 

A  valuable  paper  was  read,  entitled  "  The 
benefit  of  photographic  associations  to  the 
profession  and  to  the  community  at  large." 

Among  the  topics,  discussed  was  the  fol- 
lowing: "  Best  toning  bath  for  portraits," 
"  Effect  of  citric  acid  in  the  printing  bath," 
"  Double  iodides  in  collodion,"  "  Burnished 
photographs,"  and  various  other  matters  of 
interest  to  the  profession. 

Indiana  Photographic  Association, 
May  6th. — The  election  of  officers  to  serve 
the  next  six  months  was  held,  with  the  fol- 
lowing result :  President,  L.  D.  Judkins  ; 
Vice-President,  Henderson  George  ;  Secre- 
tary, J.  Perry  Elliott;  Corresponding  Sec- 
retary, C.  B.  Ingraham ;  Treasurer,  Harry 
Fowler;  Librarian,  D.  O.  Adams. 

The  members  present  seemed  to  be  shap- 
ing their  affairs  with  a  view  to  attending 
the  Annual  Exhibition  of  the  National 
Photographic  Association  at  Chicago,  and 
J.  Perry  Elliott  and  L.  D.  Judkins  were  ap- 
pointed a  committee  to  confer  with  the 
railroads  in  reference  to  reduced  rates,  and 
all  photographers  desiring  to  join  the  In- 
dianapolis party  are  requested  to  notify  the 
committee  at  once. 

The  Secretarj'  said  he  had  come  to  the 
conclusion  that  for  large  heads  or  bust  pic- 
tures, 11  x  14  size  and  larger,  the  solar 
camera  was  the  best  instrument  to  employ, 
and  as  there  seemed  to  be  a  difference  of 


opinion  on  the  subject,  it  was  proposed,  and 
agreed  upon,  that  "The  Kelative  Merits  of 
Solar  and  Contact  Printing,"  be  the  subject 
for  discussion  at  the  June  meeting. 

The  Vienna  Photographic  Society 
seems  to  be  in  a  flourishing  condition,  and 
the  life  of  it  seems  to  be  our  esteemed  friend 
Herr  E.  Luckhardt,  with  whose  work  we  are 
all  so  familiar.  Sixty-one  members  were 
present  at  a  late  meeting.  It  will  be  re- 
membered that  each  year  Herr  Voigtlander, 
the  famed  optician,  offers  several  medals 
for  improvements  in  photography.  A  com- 
mission is  appointed  by  this  Society  to  ex- 
amine the  claims  of  competitors  and  to  make 
the  awards.  The  result  for  this  year  is  as 
follows :  The  gold  medal  to  Herr  J.  B. 
Obernetter,  of  Munich,  for  his  "Process 
for  the  reproduction  of  negatives,"  which 
Dr.  Vogel  has  already  given  us.  The  silver 
medal  was  awarded  to  Herr  B.  Johannes, 
of  Parten  Kirchen,  for  "  Studies  from  na- 
ture;" a  silver  medal  to  Dr.  Stein  for  his 
heliopticor ;  and  a  bronze  medal  to  Herr  H. 
Eckert  for  improvements  in  phototypy. 
Herr  Luckhardt  spoke  in  glowing  terms  of 
the  advantages  of  Herr  Obernetter's  process. 
Among  other  things  he  said  that  he  put  the 
process  to  a  severe  test,  by  copying  his 
stereoscopic  negatives,  which  differed  in 
depth,  sharpness,  and  intensity.  He  could 
not  tell  the  difference  between  the  originals 
and  the  reproductions  without  marking. 
A  prominent  advantage  in  this  process  is 
in  being  enabled  to  make  soft  negatives 
from  hard  ones,  and  vice  versa,  the  prize 
picture  (landscape  10  x  12)  being  made  from 
a  copied  negative,  the  original  requiring 
two  days  to  get  one  print  off,  while  the  copy 
furnished  two  or  three  a  day.  He  concluded 
his  remarks,  which  were  received  with  great 
approbation,  by  stating  that  there  was  a 
little  unpleasantness  connected  with  the 
process,  which  was,  in  dusting  the  plate  the 
manipulator  would  become  as  black  as  a 
chimney-sweep. 

Some  effort  is  being  made  to  tax  the  pho- 
tographers in  Austria.  We  join  the  hope 
of  our  friends  there  that  it  won't  .be  done. 
Our  own  government  found  that  it  was  a 
mistake. 

Photographic  Society  of  Berlin. — 
Dr.  H   Vogel,  President.      C.  Quidde,  Sec- 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGR  APIIEP. 


187 


retary,  presented  a  negative,  which  was 
made  by  means  of  a  brush  or  pencil,  with 
India-ink,  and  notwithstanding  the  techni- 
cal difficulties  in  its  production,  it  is  very 
efficacious  and  elicited  great  attention. 

Herr  Moser  exhibited  several  peculiar 
stereoscopic  views,  which  were  taken 
against  the  sun,  with  a  small  stop,  showing 
four  reflected  pictures  of  the  sun  one  above 
the  other,  each  larger  and  fainter  than  the 
other,  while  the  sun  itself  could  not  be  seen 
on  the  picture.  The  President  explained 
the  above,  which  was  caused  by  the  reflec- 
tion of  the  light  inside  the  tube,  which 
occurs  when  the  sun  shines  in  the  lens,  and 
when  a  small  stop  is  used. 

The  President  showed  his  practical  test 
for  hypo  in  card-mounts.  Herr  Keichard 
asked  if  there  was  no  way  to  get  rid 
of  all  the  hypo  in  the  card-mounts.  The 
President  stated  that  hypo  was  used  to  re- 
move the  chlorine  which  was  used  to  bleach 
the  paper-pulp.  Mounts  made  of  clean 
white  rags  contain  no  hypo.  Instead  of 
hypo,  the  sulphate  of  soda  could  be  used  for 
this  purpose,  which  is  more  durable  and 
would  not  endanger  the  picture.  The  manu- 
facturers think  it  too  dear  compared  with 
hypo.  The  hypo  in  the  present  mounts  can 
be  destroyed  by  dipping  them  into  iodine- 
water.  Herr  Moser  asked  if  hypo  was  con- 
tained in  colored  mounts.  The  President 
has  found  it  in  them.  He  found  further  in 
certain  blue  and  green  cards  ultramarine, 
a  color  containing  sulphur,  which  would 
rapidly  destroy  a  picture.  Herr  Mosher 
recommended  adding  a  small  quantity  of 
iodine  to  the  starch  paste  for  mounting  the 
pictures.  The  President  states  his  inten- 
tion of  testing  whether  it  can  be  safely  rec- 
ommended or  not. 


Correction. — The  formula  given  in  Dr.  Vo- 
gel's  correspondence,  in  our  last  number,  for  the 
new  process  of  reproducing  negatives,  should 
have  read  grammes  instead  of  grains.  Corrected, 
it  should  stand  as  follows  : 


THE  LESSONS  OF  THE  PRIZE 
PICTURES. 


BY  G.   R.  C. 


Dextrin, 

4  grammes. 

White  Sugar, 

.       5 

Bichromate  of  Ammonium, 

.       2 

Water,  .          .     '     .      -    . 

.  100 

Glycerin, 

2  to  8  drops. 

The  beautiful  set  of  prize  pictures  now 
being  published  by  Messrs.  Benerman  & 
Wilson,  have  a  great  deal  in  them  that  pho- 
tographers everywhere  may  profit  by  if 
they  will  but  compare  and  study  them. 
They  should  not  be  looked  over  carelessly, 
or  only  with  a  superficial  glance,  to  com- 
mend one  and  criticize  another,  but  should 
be  read  carefully.  We  may  read  them  as 
we  would  a  book;  to  comprehend  them  is 
to  read  them. 

We  read  in  them,  not  only  the  qualities 
of  artistic  skill,  or  chemical  manipulation 
that  was  brought  to  bear  in  producing  them, 
but  we  have  every  man's  idea,  as  far  as  he 
could  execute  it,  of  a  specimen  of  first-class 
photography.  We  seem  to  catch  the 
thought  that  was  in  his  mind,  and  see  the 
purpose  he  had  in  view.  We  can  also 
understand  how  near  the  result  comes  to 
the  standard  aimed  at.  That  most  of  them 
have  fallen  short  of  their  highest  concep- 
tions can  hardly  be  doubted,  for  our  aspira- 
tions are  generally  far  above  what  we  are 
able  to  execute. 

These  pictures  have  lessons  -in  lighting, 
posing,  expression,  composition,  and 
choice  of  subject.  In  the  first  of  these, 
lighting,  we  find  a  variety  of  effects.  Some 
have  aimed  to  secure  a  soft,  harmonious 
blending  of  light  and  shade,  while  the  ideal 
in  the  mind  of  another  has  been  something 
bold  and  vigorous.  Either  of  these  will  be 
found  to  have  failed  in  some  cases,  while 
those  who  have  taken  a  middle  ground,  and 
sought  to  combine  brilliancy  with  softness, 
have  succeeded  the  best. 

By  comparing  one  with  another  these 
differences  are  very  apparent,  and  then  by 
comparing  again  these  pictures  with  our 
own  that  we  are  making  every  day,  we  may 
find  it  advisable  to  take  a  "  new  departure." 
that  will  lead  us  nearer  the  right  direction 
than  any  method  we  have  ever  pursued 
before.  In  connection  with  the  study  of 
lighting,  we  are  to  consider  whether  the 
negative  was  properly  timed  ;  whether  the 
detail  in  the  shadows  would  have  been 
brought    out    better    by   exposing    a    few 


188 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


seconds  longer,  or  whether  the  time  has 
been  too  long,  so  as  to  cause  flatness  on  a 
picture  that  otherwise  would  have  been  well 
lighted.  These  are  points  where  we  must 
endeavor  to  discriminate  and  judge  whether 
the  lighting  was  really  at  fault,  or  the  time 
of  exposure  was  too  long  or  too  short. 

In  posing  we  are  to  consider  the  relation 
between  the  subject  and  position.  Does  the 
latter  correspond  with  the  former?  Does 
it  seem  to  be  the  most  favorable  for  the 
form  and  features  ?  Is  it  adapted  to  the 
age,  style,  and  idea  of  the  subject,  and  does 
it  secure  a  proper  balance  of  lines  that  give 
a  harmonious  support  to  the  whole  ? 

Expression  !  You  may  say,  what  has  the 
photographic  artist  to  do  with  expression  ? 
He  has  everything  to  do  with  it.  In  this 
is  displayed  one  of  the  most  subtle  elements 
of  his  artistic  skill.  It  is  not  in  the  severe, 
grum  expression  that  the  artist  always  fails, 
but  quite  as  often  in  the  simpering  smirk 
that  gives  so  much  of  the  air  of  affectation, 
and  is  generally  the  result  of  that  final 
charge  on  the  part  of  the  photographer, 
viz,  "Now  try  and  look  pleasant."  In 
comparing  the  pictures  in  this  respect  we 
can  readily  detect  which  is  the  assumed  and 
which  the  natural  ;  which  is  produced  by 
calling  the  attention  of  the  sitter  to  the  fact 
that  she  was  sitting  for  her  picture  and 
must  not  be  too  serious ;  and,  which  by 
such  a  manner  and  method  as  to  take  the 
mind  from  self,  keeping  it  active  with  other 
things,  and  securing  that  unaffected,  digni- 
fied expression,  which  is  always  pleasing, 
and  of  which  we  never  tire.  It  is  well  to 
notice  also  how  much  the  position  of  the 
eyes  affect  the  expression.  This  is  a  study 
of  itself.  Life  and  animation,  or  the  re- 
verse, are  controlled  very  much  by  the 
direction  given  the  eyes.  In  composition, 
the  lessons  may  be  particularly  valuable. 
"When  a  picture  is  pleasing  to  the  eye, 
everything  seeming  to  be  in  keeping  with 
the  subject,  in  lighting,  posing,  and  choice 
of  accessories,  then  we  may  conclude  that 
the  composition  is  good,  even  if  we  cannot 
analyze  it,  and  determine  why  it  is  so.  On 
the  other  hand,  if  a  picture  appears  out  of 
proportion,  one  part  does  not  agree,  or  is  not 
in  harmony  with  another,  then  the  compo- 
sition   is   at    fault.     We   may   be   safe   in 


taking  as  guides  for  practice  those  that 
please  us,  but  it  is  well  to  study  why  this  or 
that  is  so,  and  be  able  to  proceed  under- 
standing^. The  choice  of  subject  is  one  of 
the  most  important  of  all,  whether  it  be  a 
simple  portrait,  or  to  embody  an  idea  and 
tell  a  story.  "Winter  is  represented  by  frosts, 
cold  threatening  clouds  and  a  bleak  and 
barren  landscape;  Spring  comes  out  in  gay 
attire  of  foliage  and  flowers,  with  beauty 
and  sunshine  everywhere;  so  we  should 
choose  the  subject  in  keeping  with  the  idea 
we  wish  to  represent.  With  this  thought  in 
view  there  is  much  to  learn  from  these  pic- 
tures that  can  be  applied  to  our  daily  prac- 
tice, and  when  once  settled  upon  the  sub- 
ject appropriate  to  the  object  of  our  effort, 
we  may  proceed  with  a  good  prospect  of 
success  in  every  other  department. 

As  examples  for  study,  or  for  imitation  of 
their  excellent  qualities,  those  to  be  par- 
ticularly commended  are  Nos.  1,  5,  10, 
12,  13,  15,  16,  17,  18,  19,  20,  21,  23,  26,  and 
29.  None  of  them  should  be  studied  only 
for  the  purpose  of  criticism,  but  their  good 
points  should  be  considered  as  well,  and 
such  use  made  of  the  lessons  they  convey 
that  we  shall  appropriate  and  pattern  after 
all  that  is  good,  and  endeavor  to  avoid  all 
that  is  bad. 

A  set  of  these  prints  should  be  in  the 
hands  of  every  photographer,  as  nothing  so 
practically  educational,  and  conveying  such 
a  high  order  of  instruction,  has  ever  been 
published. 


MATTERS    OF   THE 


Membership  costs  $2;  annual  dues,  $4. 
Life  membership,  $25,  and  no  dues.  The 
fees  for  life  membership  will  probably  be 
doubled  at  the  Chicago  Convention. 

All  remittances  of  back  dues,  and  fees 
and  dues  for  new  members,  should  be  made 
to  the  Permanent  Secretary,  Edward  L. 
Wilson,  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Phila- 
delphia. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


189 


To  Frame  Manufacturers. — We  arc  au- 
thorized to  say  that  a  Gold  Medal  is  offered 
for  the  bent  display  of  frames  at  the  Chicago 
Exhibition.  Photographers  are  urged  to 
inform  their  frame  makers  of  this  fact,  and 
as  all  frames  look  better  with  handsome 
photographs  in  them,  it  is  suggested  that  the 
photographer  and  the  frame  maker  work  to- 
gether in  this  matter,  and  together  present 
the  finest  exhibition  ever  held.  No  re- 
strictions are  made  as  to  the  style  or  kind 
of  frames,  but  the  medal  is  for  the  best  dis- 
play of  frames. 

The  Regulations  for  Exhibitors  will  be 
found  in  the  supplement.  The  usual  circular 
giving  further  regulations,  railroad  and 
hotel  arrangements,  &c,  will  be  issued 
about  June  20th.  If  you  fail  to  receive  a 
copy  apply  to  us  for  one. 

Pay  your  dues  before  you  go  to  Chicago, 
to  save  hurry  and  bustle  there,  and  as  an 
accommodation  to  the  Treasurer. 

Where  shall  the  next  Convention  be  ? — A 
member  from  the  South  says  :  "  I  am  con- 
vinced that  if  the  National  Photographic 
Association  Convention  was  held  further 
south  next  year  that  it  would  be  greatly 
strengthened.  The  meetings  have  been  so 
far  from  us  that  we  could  not  attend.  We 
cannot  afford  to  travel  the  whole  breadth  of 
our  nation  every  year ;  come  South."  No 
doubt  our  good  friends  in  the  South  could 
have  the  Convention  there  if  they  would 
only  come  to  Chicago  and  say,  "Come." 
The  Association  don't  like  to  go  anyiohere 
unless  it  is  invited,  and  we  have  no  doubt  it 
is  all  ready  to  go  South  if  it  is  wanted  there. 
Southerners,  meet  us  in  Chicago  and  let  us 
talk  it  over. 

A  Change  of  Officers] dp. — Do  not  the 
members  of  the  National  Photographic 
Association  think  that  a  change  of  officer- 
ship  this  year  would  do  good  ?  We  are  not 
authorized  to  speak  for  others,  but  the  Presi- 
dent and  Permanent  Secretary  do  authorize 
us  to  say  that  it  would  be  a  great  relief  to 
them  to  have  a  rest.  Their  offices  entail 
more  labor  and  personal  expenditure  of 
money  than  many  think  of,  and  although 
they  have  tried  to  serve  the  Association 
faithfully  for  about  six  years,  they  are  just 
as  well  aware  as  any  one  else  that  they  have 
not  pleased  every  one,  neither  does  the  As- 


sociation grow  under  their  hands  as  they 
would  like,  and  therefore  they  suggest  that 
the  good  of  the  Association  would  be  en- 
hanced if  a  change  of  officers!) ip  be  made. 
Try  and  think  of  it  between  this  and  the 
time  of  the  Convention,  and  there  act  upon  it. 
The  Debt  Fund. — Amount  received  the 
same  as  reported  last  month.    No  additions. 


TALK  AND  TATTLE. 

Our  foreign  medal  is  likely  to  be  well 
competed  for,  since  we  have  received  letters 
from  many  foreign  photographers  an- 
nouncing their  intention  of  sending  nega- 
tives for  competition.  Among  these  are  a 
number  whose  work  shone  at  the  Vienna 
Exhibition,  one  of  them  being  from  Russia. 
This  is  good  news  for  our  readers,  who  will 
be  thus  guaranteed  the  finest  possible  speci- 
mens of  photography  in  our  future  numbers 
for  some  time  to  come. 

The  New  Association. — In  our  last  Talk  and 
Tattle  we  alluded  to  the  effort  being  made 
to  upbuild  a  new  association,  whose  special 
object  should  be  the  protection  of  its  mem- 
bers from  impositions  of  various  sorts.  Mr. 
H.  H.  Hannay,  Vice-President  of  the  Brook- 
lyn Photographic  Art  Association,  writes 
us  on  the  subject  as  follows  : 

"  I  wish  to  correct  an  error  in  your  May  num- 
ber, when  speaking  of  a  meeting  in  Brooklyn. 
It  was  not  an  indignation  meeting  against  Shaw 
or  any  other  man — it  was  a  regular  monthly 
meeting  of  the  Brooklyn  Photographic  Art  As- 
sociation, and  tbe  report  made  was  to  that 
society  by  a  committee  appointed  to  report  on 
the  Shaw  claims."  Again,  "Also  in  connection 
with  the  meeting  you  say  that  it  is  a  penal  of- 
fence to  combine  against  a  United  States  patent. 
Now  this  might  lead  some  to  think  we  had  com- 
mitted this  grave  offence.  We  do  not  mention 
Shaw  in  our  Association.  We  combine  as  men 
and  citizens  to  protect  ourselves  against  any  man 
or  men  who  do  us  wrong,  and  who  by  money  or 
a  knowledge  of  the  general  apathy  of  photog- 
raphers, hope  to  frighten  them  into  anything 
they  may  see  fit  to  claim  from  them,  whether  just 
or  unjust." 

Mr.  Hannay  also  sends  us  copies  of  a 
"Report  of  a  Special  Committee  of  the 
Mutual  Photographic  Protective  Association, ' ' 
which  sets  forth  the  reasons  for  forming  the 


190 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHEE. 


new  association,  its  object,  and  a  call  upon  all 
photographers  to  join  them.  Mr.  H.  J.  New- 
ton, 128  W.  43d  Street,  New  York,  a  gentle- 
man well  known  to  our  readers,  is  the  Treas- 
urer, from   whom  copies  of  the  resolutions 


may  be  had.  The  new  Association  has  as- 
suredly undertaken  a  hard  work,  that  of 
uniting  the  photographers  of  the  United 
States,  but  nevertheless  it  is  one  much 
needed,  and  we  wish  it  success. 


A  New  Book.- — We  expect  to  issue  during  the 
month  a  book  entitled  The,  Practical  Printer,  by 
Mr.  C.  W.  Hearn.  It  is  from  the  pen  of  a  prac- 
tical man,  and  we  are  sure  will  be  found  to  be  a 
great  help  in  the  printing  department,  which  has 
heretofore  been  too  much  neglected. 


Our  Foreign  Medal. — In  view  of  the  fact 
that  we  shall  be  very  busily  engaged  with  the 
N.  P.  A.  Convention  at  Chicago,  about  the  15th 
of  July,  we  have  decided  to  extend  the  time  to 
the  15th  of  August.  This  will  give  our  foreign 
friends  an  additional  month,  which  we  hope  will 
be  an  advantage  to  them,  and  induce  an  addi- 
tional number  of  competitors. 


The  Health  Lift. — This  is  not  exactly  a 
photographic,  apparatus,  but  may  be  of  great 
assistance  in  conducting  the  business,  as  health 
is  the  first  of  all  considerations.  It  is  a  ma- 
chine that  is  intended  to  take  the  place  of  the 
gymnasium,  and  by  a  regular  practice  of  ten 
minutes  daily  the  health  is  improved,  and  in  a 
short  time  the  strength  doubled.  It  is  a  system 
of  cumulative  exercise,  which  will  prove  invalu- 
able to  any  one  of  sedentary  habits.  We  have 
one  in  our  office,  and  our  daily  exercise  on  it 
sets  the  blood  in  motion,  and  seems  to  give  us 
new  life  and  vigor.  (Full  particulars  in  our 
advertising  department  last  month.) 


Wet  Books. — By  reference  to  an  advertise- 
ment, it  will  be  seen  that  our  list  of  damaged 
books  has  been  greatly  reduced  since  last  month. 
The  few  we  have  left,  we  offer  at  rates  that  we 
hope  will  clear  our  shelves  within  thirty  days. 
Send  your  orders  early. 


We  are  sorry  to  announce  that  our  old  friend 
and  correspondent,  Mr.  Charles  Waldack,  author 
of  the  admirable  Treatise  which  bears  his  name, 
and  so  well  known  in  Cincinnati,  where  he  has 
practiced  photography  so  many  years,  has  re- 
turned to  his  native  home  in  Belgium,  to  remain 
for  some  time  at  least.     He  has  opened  a  portrait 


gallery  in  Ghent.  He  says  that  the  status  of 
photography  in  Belgium  is  very  far  behind  that 
in  America  in  every  respect.  The  only  mite  of 
cheerfulness  we  can  filter  out  of  this  matter  of 
our  country  losing  so  good  a  photographer  as 
Mr.  Waldack,  is  to  be  derived  from  the  close  of 
his  letter,  wherein  he  says  :  "Now  that  my  time 
will  not  be  entirely  absorbed  by  my  business,  I 
will  be  able  to  send  you  something  from  time  to 
time  for  the  Philadelphia  Photographer."  Of 
course  all  our  readers  will  join  us  in  saying  that 
letters  from  Mr.  Waldack  will  be  always  wel- 
come. 


Obituary. — We  regret  to  be  called  upon  to 
record  the  departure  from  us  of  two  of  the  fathers 
of  photography. 

Professor  Samuel  L.  Walker,  of  Poughkeepsie, 
N.  Y.,  died  at  that  place  after  a  brief  illness,  on 
Saturday  evening,  April  25th,  in  his  72d  year. 
He  was  one  of  the  first  disciples  of  Daguerre  in 
this  country,  and  attained  great  success  in  the 
days  when  the  daguerreotype  was  in  the  height 
of  its  popularity.  The  Professor  was  a  great 
lover  of  nature,  and  intensely  devoted  to  the  art 
he  loved  so  well.  He  was  beloved  by  all  who 
knew  him,  especially  those  of  his  own  profession. 
The  photographers  of  Poughkeepsie  showed  bim 
marked  respect,  and  closed  their  places  of  busi- 
ness on  the  day  of  the  funeral. 

The  other  was  Mr.  William  Langenheim  of 
this  city,  who  died  May  4th,  in  the  68th  year  of 
his  age.  Mr.  Langenheim  was  a  native  of  Ger- 
many, and  came  to  this  country  about  forty  years 
ago.  He  settled  in  Texas,  was  under  General 
Houston  in  the  Texan  war  ;  was  taken  prisoner 
by  the  Mexicans  and  confined  at  Matamoras 
about  a  year;  was  in  the  government  service  as 
clerk  in  New  Orleans  and  Florida  several  years, 
and  in  1840  came  to  Philadelphia,  where  he  and 
his  brother  soon  after  went  into  the  daguerreo- 
type business  in  the  Merchants'  Exchange.  They 
were  among  the  first  who  practiced  daguerreo- 
typing  in  this  country,  aud  also  first  in  introduc- 
ing photographs  on  paper,  for  which  they  bought 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


191 


Fox  Talbot's  patent.  They  were  the  inventors 
of  the  pictures  on  glass  now  becoming  so  popular 
as  lantern  slides,  and  in  these  have  carried  the 
art  to  a  very  high  state  of  perfection,  particu- 
larly in  colored  work,  which  they  made  a  spe- 
cialty, and  in  which  they  built  up  a  substantial 
and  prosperous  business.  Mr.  Langenheim  was 
widely  known  in  this  city,  and  his  memory  will 
be  cherished  by  a  large  circle  of  friends. 


We  have  before  us  a  notice  of  the  death  of 
Mr.  Josiah  Brown,  of  East  Mauch  Chunk,  which 
occurred  at  that  place  April  26th,  1874.  De- 
ceased was  forty-five  years  of  age,  and  one  of 
the  earliest  photographers  in  the  Lehigh  Valley. 
He  did  business  in  Mauch  Chunk  for  nearly 
twenty  years,  and  was  well  known  throughout 
that  section  as  a  skilful  artist. 


Business  Changes. — Mr.  Willy  AVallach,  the 
well-known  dealer  in  photographic  papers,  has 
removed  to  the  capacious  store,  No.  4  Beekman 
Street,  formerly  occupied  by  Scovill  Manufac- 
turing Company,  where  he  has  added  to  his  full 
and  complete  stock,  and  hopes  to  receive  a  lib- 
eral share  of  patronage. 

The  firm  of  J.  Gurney  &  Son,  No.  108  Fifth 
Avenue,  has  been  dissolved,  and  Mr.  Benjamin 
Gurney  is  to  continue  the  business  at  Kurtz's 
old  gallery,  872  Broadway.  We  wish  him  suc- 
cess; 

Messrs.  Oscar  Foss  and  A.  A.  Hickox,  of  San 
Francisco,  have  formed  a  copartnership,  under 
the  firm  of  Oscar  Foss  &  Co.,  for  conducting  the 
photographic  stock  business.  We  hope  they  will 
be  remembered  by  the  fraternity  on  the  Pacific, 
and  guaranteed  success  in  their  new  enterprise. 

A  letter  from  Mr.  W.  H.  Reckling,  of  Rome, 
Ga.,  informs  us  that  he  is  about  to  remove  to 
Columbia,  S.  C,  to  take  the  business  of  the  late 
Richard  Wearn,  a  member  of  the  N.  P.  A.,  de- 
ceased. He  inclosed,  also,  a  specimen  of  his 
work.     We  wish  him  success. 

The  firm  of  Mote  &  Swaine,  Richmond,  Ind., 
was  dissolved  March  4th,  1874.  Mr.  Swaine  re- 
tires, and  the  business  is  continued  by  Messrs. 
E.  J.  &  W.  A.  Mote. 


Pictures  Received. — From  Kilburn  Brothers, 
Littleton,  N.  H. ,  a  number  of  beautiful  stereos. 
"  The  Old  Mill  Dam  ''  is  a  gem,  with  its  miniature 
waterfall  and  fairy-like  formations  of  frost  and 
ice.  A  winter  street  scene,  on  the  "  1st  of  May, 
1874,"  shows  how  that  hoary  individual  lingered 
in  the  lap  of  spring.  A  series  of  views  illustrat- 
ing the  pleasures  and  toils  of  making  maple- 
sugar.  Gathering  the  sap,  boiling  it  down,  and 
having   a  sweet  time  at  the  conclusion,  are  all 


finely  pictured.  The  last,  however,  seems  the 
most  attractive,  where  a  liberal  sprinkling  of  the 
fair  sex  lends  grace  and  beauty  to  the  scene,  and 
each  with  a  dish  of  the  delicious  product  of  the 
maple,  makes  one  wish  he  might  be  there  to  share 
the  dainty  feast.  A  large  number  of  views  from 
J.  Loeffler,  Tompkinsville,  Staten  Island,  N.  Y., 
illustrating  the  scenery  of  ''  Catskill  Mountain,'' 
"Trenton  Falls,"  and  "Lake  Mohotik,"  all 
very  fine  work.  From  J.  H.  Johnson,  New  Vi- 
enna, Ohio,  pictures  illustrating  the  temperance 
crusade.  From  W.  II.  Potter,  Mansfield,  Ohio, 
some  fine  stereos  ;  and  from  Hamilton  &  Iloyt, 
Sioux  City,  Iowa,  cards  and  stereos.  Cabinets 
have  been  received  from  F.  Gutekunst  and  F.  A. 
Wenderoth  of  Philadelphia;  J.  C.  Moulton, 
Fitchburg,  Mass.  ;  Sheldon  &  Davis,  Kingston, 
Ont.  ;  J.  C.  Baring,  Massillon,  Ohio.  Cabinets 
and  cards  from  Sittler  &,  Lanney,  Shelbyville, 
111.  ;  and  Frank  B.  Ford,  Kendallville,  Ind. 
Cards  from  C.  D.  Mosher,  Chicago  ;  S.  B.  Smith, 
Marshall,  Mich.  ;  W.  A.  Reckling,  Rome,  Ga.  ; 
and  J.  H.  Medlar,  Jefferson,  Wis.  Several  8  x  10 
views  from  Stewart  Merrill,  of  Fort  Riley,  Kan- 
sas, a  new  beginner,  are  very  creditable. 

We  have  samples  of  their  work  from  Messrs. 
Lon  M.  Neely,  Muncie,  Ind.,  and  from  Mr.  J. 
B.  Medlar,  Racine,  Wis.,  all  showing  good  prog- 
ress. 


"  The  Souventr." — This  is  the  name  given  to 
a  very  beautiful  style  of  picture  being  introduced 
by  Mr.  E.  L.  Brand,  of  Chicago.  It  is  an  enam- 
elled, cameo  picture,  with  a  tasteful  border,  ele- 
gantly and  tastefully  mounted,  and  very  effect- 
ive. Mr.  Brand,  we  believe,  is  about  to  offer 
presses  for  their  production. 


Art  Works. — In  order  that  the  growing  de- 
sire, which  we  are  glad  to  see  on  the  part  of  many 
of  our  readers,  to  obtain  information  and  instruc- 
tion in  the  principles  of  fine  art,  may  be  indulged, 
we  have  gone  to  considerable  pains  to  examine 
and  select  such  works  from  the  catalogues  of 
various  publishers  as  we  think  are  the  best 
adapted  to  the  wants  of  photographers,  and,  hav- 
ing classified  them,  have  arranged  with  the  pub- 
lishers for  their  sale.  A  list  of  them,  and  a 
short  synopsis  of  their  merits,  may  be  found  in 
our  advertising  columns,  to  which  all  interested 
will  please  refer. 


The  Interstate  Industrial  Exposition  of  Chi- 
cago will  open  September  9th,  and  close  October 
10th,  1874.  We  have  before  us  a  programme  for 
this  Exposition,  giving  a  list  of  officers  and  de- 
tailed information  for  the  benefit  of  exhibitors. 
The  Exposition  building  has  been  erected  at  a 


192 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


cost  of  about  $300,000,  and  it  is  said  to  be  the 
largest  and  best  of  its  class  on  this  continent. 
(This  is  the  building  in  which  the  National  Pho- 
tographic Association  Convention  will  meet  in 
July.)  We  hope  our  Western  photographers  will 
take  advantage  of  this  opportunity  to  make  a 
good  display  of  their  work. 


Our  New  Prize  Pictures. — We  wish  to  call 
attention  to  our  new  and  fine  set  of  prize  pic- 
tures now  ready.  As  specimens  of  all  grades  of 
work,  and  as  a  guide  for  those  who  are  trying  to 
improve,  they  excel  anything  that  has  ever  been 
published.  They  may  be  had  in  our  new  photo- 
graph covers  (or  without),  and  are  in  a  most  con- 
venient and  attractive  form.  (See  advertise- 
ment.) 


Griswold's  Compositions  should  not  be  over- 
looked by  our  readers.  Any  one  can  sell  them. 
All  should  study  them,  for  it  is  our  belief  that 
any  one  pushing  this  style  of  picture,  either  for 
the  album  or  the  stereoscope,  will  make  them 
pay.  A  catalogue  of  them  is  given  in  the  adver- 
tising pages. 


The  International  Review  is  a  new  maga- 
zine, issued  six  times  a  year,  by  Messrs.  A.  S. 
Barnes  &  Co.,  of  New  York,  at  $5  a  year.  It  is 
devoted  to  the  great  questions  of  our  age  and 
country,  literary,  scientific,  social,  national,  and 
religious,  and  has  already  enlisted  a  fine  staff  of 
contributors.  The  March  number  contains  two 
articles  very  interesting  to  photographers,  "  The 
Transit  of  Venus,"  by  Prof.  J.  E.  Hilgard,  of 
the  U.  S.  Coast  Survey,  and  "Practical  Work  in 
Painting,"  by  Philip  Gilbert  Hamerton,  Esq.,  of 
London.  We  wish  we  had  room  to  reprint  them 
both. 


A  correspondent,  writing  us  from  Massachu- 
setts, says  :  "  I  was  told  in  Boston,  that  when  I 
sent  my  samples  to  you,  that  you  would  not  take 
any  notice  of  second-class  photographers  ;  but  I 
determined  to  try  and  see.  We  want  men  to 
elevate  our  art  who  are  willing  to  learn,  and  I 
am  one  of  them."  We  are  glad  our  correspon- 
dent was  not  discouraged  by  the  unkind  thrust 
at  us,  for  we  are  always  ready  and  willing  to 
help  every  one  if  we  can.  We  claim  to  be  no 
respecter  of  persons;  or  if  we  should  show  any 
favor  it  would  be  to  those  who  needed  it  most. 
We  want  no  one  to  feel  diffident  about  commu- 
nicating with  us  on  any  matter  connected  with 
their  business. 


editor  and  publisher,  contains  a  fine  photograph 
of  the  Hon.  Thomas  H.  Walker,  Judge  of  the 
Twenty-first  Judicial  District  of  Pennsylvania, 
by  George  M.  Bretz,  of  Pottsville.  Thus  we  see 
how  photography  is  continually  winning  its  way 
into  favor  and  usefulness 


Excursion  to  Chicago. — The  photographers 
of  New  England,  New  York,  and  Philadelphia, 
and  of  all  other  places  convenient,  are  invited  to 
join  an  excursion  to  Chicago,  leaving  Philadel- 
phia the  Thursday  or  Friday  previous  to  the  Con- 
vention. Chartered  Pullman  Sleeping  Car,  spe- 
cial. All  intending  to  go,  please  address  the 
Permanent  Secretary  one  week  in  advance. 


Art  Culture. — "A  Handbook  of  Art  Tech- 
nicalities and  Criticisms,  selected  from  the  works 
of  John  Ruskin,  and  arranged  and  supplemented 
by  the  Rev.  W.  H.  Piatt,  for  the  use  of  the  in- 
telligent traveller  and  art  student,  with  a  new 
glossary  of  art  terms,  and  an  alphabetical  and 
chronological  list  of  artists.  New  York  :  John 
Wiley  &  Son,  publishers,  1874."  The  nature  of 
this  work  is  so  amply  described  in  the  title,  that 
there  is  but  very  little  left  for  us  to  say  concerning 
what  it  is.  What  it  contains  is  just  the  very  sort 
of  instruction  which  the  advanced  photographer 
of  to-day,  and  the  student  as  well,  both  want  to 
imbibe  until  they  a,re  full  of  it.  It  is  a  concen- 
tration of  the  best  parts  of  the  works  of  the  in- 
imitable art  critic,  John  Ruskin,  Esq.  One  who 
loves  art,  and  the  study  of  it,  cannot  turn  to  a 
page  without  deriving  both  enjoyment  and  in- 
struction. Both  the  portrait  and  the  landscape 
photographer,  the  negative  retoucher  and  the 
colorist,  will  find  this  work  invaluable  to  them. 
We  shall,  with  the  permission  of  the  publishers, 
take  occasion  to  quote  from  it  presently,  and 
call  more  particular  attention  to  its  merits.  It 
is  most  beautifully  gotten  up,  elegantly  illus- 
trated, and  is  in  itself  a  work  of  art.  Price  $3. 
Supplied  by  Benerman  &  Wilson.  Philadelphia. 


Judicial  Photography. — The  Legal  Chron- 
icle for   Ap^il    18th,  1874,  Solomon   Foster,  Jr., 


We  hope  our  landscape  workers  will  bear  in 
mind  the  offer  we  made  on  our  first  page  last 
month  of  a  Gold  Medal  for  the  best  three  land- 
scape negatives  sent  us  by  the  15th  of  August. 
The  season-  is  now  upon  us  when  it  will  be  a 
pleasure  to  get  out  and  make  choice  of  Nature's 
beautiful  compositions.  When  a  good  thing  is 
found,  study  it  well,  visit  it  at  different  hours  of 
the  day,  if  possible,  and  choose  the  light  that 
will  produce  the  best  effect.  We  want  something 
in  landscape  photography  that  will  be  of  the 
same  high  order  as  the  beautiful  medal  pictures 
we  have  in  portraiture. 


ALL  ABOIT  CHICAGO. 


PAPERS  TO  BE  READ  AT  THE 
CONVENTION 

Are  invited,  and  it  is  especially  requested 
that  they  be  short  and  practical.  The  time 
of  the  Convention  is  precious,  and  the  ex- 
pense of  printing  is  more  than  the  Asso- 
ciation can  at  present  afford.  The  Perma- 
nent Secretary  will  feel  obliged  if  parties 
intending  to  read  papers  will  announce 
their  subjects  to  him  by  the  15th  inst.,  in 
order  that  the  programme  may  be  made 
up  in  time  for  the  usual  circular. 

THE  SCOVILL  AND  HOLMES 
MEDALS 

Are  offered  this  year,  as  usual,  "  for  the 
first  and  second  greatest  improvements 
made  in  photography  during  the  last  asso- 
ciation year."  Inventors,  experimentalists, 
and  others,  will  please  send  their  models, 
manuscripts,  &c,  to  the  Permanent  Secre- 
tary by  June  25th,  at  latest.  An  earlier 
time  will  better  suit  the  committee  in 
charge,  in  order  that  they  may  have  all  the 
time  possible  to  make  their  examinations. 

AN   EXCURSION   PULLMAN 
PALACE  SLEEPING  CAR 

Or  two  will  leave  Philadelphia  for  Chi- 
cago on  the  Thursday  or  Friday  previous 
to  the  Convention,  chartered  for  the  trip. 
Those  who  can  make  it  convenient  to  start 
from  that  point  are  requested  to  inform  the 
Permanent  Secretary  at  least  one  week 
ahead,  and  accommodations  will  be  pro- 
vided for  them,  male  or  female.  All  will 
be  welcome. 

Edward  L.  Wilson,  Per.  Sec'y, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,Phila. 


THE  EXHIBITION. 

REGULATIONS    AND    ARRANGEMENTS. 

The  Sixth  Annual  Exhibition  of  the 
National  Photographic  Association  of  the 
United  States  will  be  held  in  the  Inter-State 
Exposition  building  in  Chicago,  111.,  begin- 
ning Monday,  July  13th,  1874. 

The  meetings  of  the  Association  will  be 
held  in  the  same  building,  free  to  members, 
whose  dues  are  paid.  Badges  will  be  sup- 
plied at  the  entrance. 

Regulations  for  those  not  members  will 
be  supplied  hereafter. 

A  cordial  invitation  is  given  to  all  pho- 
tographers abroad  and  at  home,  whether 
members  of  the  Association  or  not,  to  ex- 
hibit of  their  work,  and  space  will  be  pro- 
vided free  of  charge. 

The  Committee  of  Arrangements  will  re- 
ject any  articles  that  are  deemed  improper 
for  exhibition. 

No  articles  will  be  permitted  to  be  with- 
drawn until  the  close  of  the  Exhibition, 
without  a  permit  from  the  committee  in 
charge. 

DIRECTIONS  TO  EXHIBITORS 

At  the  next  Annual  Convention  of  the  Nationa'' 
Photographic  Association,  to  be  held  in 
Chicago,  opening  July  13th,  1874. 

1.  Estimate  about  the  wall-space  required 
for  your  work,  and  send,  early,  the  compu- 
tation thereof  to  A.  Hesler,  Local  Secretary 
N.  P.  A  ,  Evanston,  111. 

2.  Inquire  of  your  express  agent  the  time 
required  to  forward  a  box  from  your  place  to 
Chicago,  111.,  and  send  so  that  it  will  arrive 


here  not  before  the  7th  of  July  next,  nor 
after  the  14th. 

3.  At  the  time  of  dispatching  your  box, 
mail  a  descriptive  invoice  of  the  same  to  A. 
Hesler,  Local  Secretary  N.  P.  A.,  Chicago, 
111.,  and  place  a  duplicate  of  the  invoice  in 
the  box  itself. 

4.  Prepay  all  charges. 

5.  Screw  each  frame  on  to  cleats,  and 
screw  them  to  the  sides  of  the  box. 

6.  Fasten  the  lid  with  screws ;  use  no 
nails  for  this  purpose 

7.  Put  your  name  on  the  back  of  each 
frame,  or  your  card  under  the  glass  in  front. 

8.  Put  your  name  on  the  bottom  of  the 
box  inside. 

9.  Direct  the  box  to  A.  Hesler,  Local 
Secretary  N.  P.  A.,  Inter-State  Exposition 
Building,  Chicago,  111.,  and  on  the  inside 
of  the  lid  put  your  own  name  and  address. 

10.  You  can  easily  see  how  mistakes  and 
much  confusion  will  be  avoided  by  strict 
adherence  to  these  instructions. 

Articles  for  exhibition  will  be  received  at 
the  Hall  from  July  7th ;  not  earlier. 

Arrangements  with  express  and  railway 
companies  are  being  made  for  a  commuta- 
tion of  fares  and  freights,  and  the  result 
will  be  announced  in  a  circular,  to  be  issued 
about  June  20th. 

A  copy  will  be  sent  to  all  photographers 
who  can  be  reached.  Those  who  do  not  get 
it,  may  have  copies  by  applying  to  either 
the  Permanent  or  Local  Secretary. 

The  list  of  hotels  and  their  rates  will  also 
be  given  in  the  circular. 

Photographers  intending  to  be  present 
will  please  notify  Mr.  E.  L.  Brand,  of  the 
Committee  on  Hotels,  No.  596  Wabash 
Avenue,  as  to  the  number  of  rooms  and 
price  they  desire,  and  quarters  will  be  en- 
gaged for  them. 

A.  Hesler. 

Local  Secretary,  Evanston,  111. 

Edward  L.  Wilson, 

Permanent  Secretary,  Philada. 


PHOTOGRAPHERS,  ATTENTION! 

Evanston,  III.,  May  21,  1874. 

Mr.  E.  L.  Wilson, 

Permanent  Secretary. 

Hear  Sir  :  The  hotels  have  responded 
liberally,  and  reduced  their  rates  fifty  cents 
to  one  dollar  per  day. 

Below  I  give  you  the  names  of  such  as 
have  reduced  their  rates,  viz. : 

Per  day. 

Palmer,  from  $3.50-$5.00  to  $3.00-$4  00 
Grand  Pacific,"  5  00  "  4.00 

Sherman,  "  5.00  "  4  00 

Tremont,  "  5.00  "  4  00 

Clifton  House,"  4.00"  3  50 

Matteson,  3  00 

New  Briggs  House,  3.00 

Commercial,  2.50 

St.  James,  2.50 

Metropolitan,  2.50 

Kuhn's  European  Rooms  $1  to  $2  per 
day,  according  to  room.  Dining  rooms 
attached. 

Brevoort  House,  on  the  European  plan, 
rooms  $1  to  $3  per  day.  Dining  rooms 
attached. 

It  is  the  wish  of  the  Reception  Commit- 
tee to  be  notified  by  every  one  coming  to  the 
Convention,  by  postal  card,  the  name  of  the 
hotel  they  wish  to  go  to,  and  rooms  will 
be  secured  for  them  and  a  committee  ap- 
pointed to  escort  them  to  their  hotels.  Ad- 
dress E.  L.  Brand,  596  Wabash  Avenue. 
By  attending  to  this  it  will  save  each  one  a 
great  deal  of  trouble  and  make  it  pleasant 
for  all  parties.  The  above-named  hotels 
are  all  new,  and  for  elegance  and  comfort 
the  four  first  named  are  not  surpassed,  if 
at  all  equalled,  in  the  world.  The  rest  are 
just  as  good  for  comfort  and  table,  but  not 
quite  so  expensive.  There  are  a  large 
number  of  lower-priced  hotels,  but  we  can- 
not vouch  for  the  elegance  of  accommoda- 
tions. The  above-named  we  can  vouch 
for.  In  your  postal  card  to  Mr.  Brand 
state  also  the  time  of  arrival  of  your  train, 
and  by  what  route  you  come.  If  desirable, 
we  can  place  parties  from  any  given  point 
together,  so   as  to   make  it  pleasanter  for 

them.  A.  Hesler, 

Local  Secretary  N.  P.  A. 


WHAT  THE  PROSPECTS  ARE. 

Mr.  C.  D.  Mosnuit,  one  of  the  hardest 

workers  in  the  mutter,  says:  "We  are 
going  to  have  a  rmiser  in  July.  All  tin; 
West  is  ablaze,  nnd  I  do  certainly  think 
we  shall  have  the  largest  body  of  photog- 
raphers there  we  ever  had  together." 

Messrs.  Rick  &  Thompson  say:  "We 
think  we  shall  have  the  best  and  largest 
Convention  ever  held." 

Messrs  J.  P.  Beard  &  Co.  say:  "We 
shall  do  all  in  our  feeble  power  to  keep  the 
N.  P.  A." 

Several  of  the  Chicago  papers  say  : 

"The  object  of  these  conventions  is  two-fold  : 
First,  to  educate  photographers,  and  improve 
their  art  ;  to  interchange  ideas,  practical  exper- 
iences and  discoveries  during  the  past  year,  and 
to  examine  and  compare  each  others  pictures. 
Second,  to  educate  the  public  in  what  photogra- 
phy is  doing,  and  show  them  what  good  photo- 
graphs are,  and  what  photography  can  do  when 
combined  with  art,  and  manipulated  by  men  of 
science  and  art-culture.  For  this  purpose  are 
displayed,  not  only  photographs  in  all  their 
varied  branches,  but  all  kinds  of  materials  used 
in  the  art. 

"Persons  who  have  not  had  practical  experi- 
ence can  have  no  idea  of  the  amount  of  capital 
and  varied  industries  employed  in  the  produc- 
tion of  a  photograph. 

"This  exhibition  will  give  our  citizens  an 
opportunity  to  see  what  they  are  all  interested  in 
— the  workings  of  this  most  wonderful  and 
be  i u til'ul  of  all  arts  and  sciences  combined.'' 


Messrs.  RICE  &  THOMPSON, 

No.  259  Wabash  Av., 

(JEIICAGO, 

Desire  to  say  to  photographers  that 
they  will  find  it  to  their  advantage  to 
visit  their  new  and  beautiful  store,  and 
examine  their  stock  of  low  priced  goods. 

They  offer  particular  advantages  to 
photographers,  as  will  be  seen  by  refer- 
ence to  their  advertisement  further  on. 

Visiting  photographers  will  be  wel- 
comed, and  every  convenience  provided 
to  make  their  stay  comfortable  and 
pleasant. 

KEMEMBER 

259.      259.      259. 


A  C 


"Grand  Central"  Photographic  Warehouse 

OF 

CHAS.   W.    STEVENS, 

158   ST^JTie]   ST.,   Cl-IIO-A-GO,   ILL., 

FROM    JULY    13th   to    18th,    1874. 

CONVENTION  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC  ASSOCIATION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES, 
I  AT    THE    INTER-STATE    EXPOSITION    BUILDING. 

YOU  ARE  CORDIALLY  INVITED  TO  BE  PRESENT. 


THE  HOUSE  OF  J.  P.  BEARD  &  GO. 


The  hundreds  of  photographers  who  visit 
Chicago  during  the  coming  National  Pho- 
tographic Association  Convention  and  Ex- 
hibition, in  July  next,  will,  if  they  act 
wisely,  not  only  see  and  hear  everything 
there,  and  learn  all  the}'  can,  but  they  will 
also  look  about  the  great  Western  Head- 
quarters in  order  to  find  the  most  advan- 
tageous place  to  buy  a  stock  of  goods,  and 
to  deal  in  the  future. 

To  those  who  propose  to  make  such  an 
examination,  we  would  suggest  to  them  the 
propriety  of  examining  the  carefully  selected 
and  new  stock  of  Photographic  Necessities 
on  exhibition  and  for  sale  by  Messrs.  J.  P. 
Beard  &  Co.,  at  No.  48  Madison"  Street, 
Chicago.  Although  this  house  is  not  so 
well  known  in  the  West  as  others  are,  for 
the  simple  reason  that  it  is  &new  one,  yet  be 
assured  it  is  as  amply  prepared  as  any  other 
to  supply  the  wants  of  the  photographer  in 
every  respect.  The  conductors  began  busi- 
ness with  the  following  purposes  in  view. 
1.  To  keep  a  splendid  stock  of  goods  con- 
stantly on  hand,  so  that,  2.  All  orders  may 
be  expected  to  be  filled  promptly,  usually 
the  day  they  are  received,  and  all  the  goods 
ordered  to  be  sent  exactly  as  ordered,  without 
substituting  other  goods  for  them.  3.  So 
to  take  advantage  of  every  opportunity  to 
purchase  goods  at  the  best  figures  as  to  en- 
able them,  not  only  to  defy  competition  in 


prices  and  in  quality,  but  as  a  usual  thing 
to  undersell.  4.  Good  goods  will  always  be 
given  the  preference,  although  ample  prepa- 
ration is  made  to  supply  anything  the  pur- 
chaser may  require.  No  doubt  photog- 
raphers will  appreciate  these  advantages,  as 
they  always  do.  No  pains  whatever  will 
be  spared  to  not  only  obtain  their  confidence, 
but  to  retain  it,  so  that  whether  near  or  far, 
you  may  send  your  orders  to  .them,  large 
or  small,  feeling  sure  that  they  will  have 
the  best  personal  attention. 

Messrs.  J.  P.  Beard  &  Co.  beg  to  an- 
nounce that  they  have  added  to  their  new 
establishment  a  cosy  private  office,  to 
which  photographers  visiting  the  Conven- 
tion are  specially  invited,  and  where  they 
will  find  all  the  conveniences  for  letter- 
writing,  mailing  newspapers,  and  for  chat- 
ting together,  and  for  resting  themselves 
between  the  sessions — in  fact  where  visitors 
can  make  themselves  perfectly  at  home. 
Meanwhile,  or  after  the  Convention,  when- 
ever you  come  to  Chicago,  before  you  buy 
your  goods,  be  sure  to  visit  our  new  and 
beautiful  rooms.  And  if  you  are  so  unfor- 
tunate as  to  be  unable  to  come  and  see  us, 
intrust  us  with  your  orders,  and  we  guar- 
antee satisfaction,  both  in  goods  and  prices, 
Our  stock  is  all  new,  and  fresh,  and  good. 
Please  read  our  other  advertisements,  and 
send  to  us  for  circulars. 


Very  Respectfully, 

J.  J*.  BJEAMJ>  &  CO., 

No.  4.8  Madison  Street,  Chicago. 


I  J.  P.  BEARD  &  Cov 


WE 


ARE 
rAGENT8 
FOR  THE 


WE  MANUFACTURE 

New  PEERLESS  COLLODION, 

FOR  FERROTYPES, 

PEERLESS  COLLODION 

FOR  NEGATIVES,  /     jtA 

EUREKA  VARNISH  /  ffr  /northwest 

FOR  NEGATIVES,  g        ^%/    J  FOR 

EUREKA  VARNISH/ /^  /  ENTREKIN'S 

FOR  FERROTYPES,       /    ^QP^  /        pATENT 

J.P.B.CHLORIDMGOLI)./  b   /OSCILLATING 

6y  /EMAMELER 

i^^f     #    WE  ARE  HEADQUARTERS 
Qfa     /  FOR  THE 

AWI.  OPT.  CO.'S 


WE  HAVE  THE 
HICHEST 


FOR 
THE  ABOVE. 

TRY 
THEM! 


APPARATUS. 


AND  EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  to  the  ART  OP  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


$^REMEMBER«=Si§r 

WE  POSITIVELY  WILL  NOT  BE 

UNDERSOLD  BY  ANY  HOUSE 

IN  THE  NORTHWEST. 


yfcfflCAGO,  ILLS.  | 


158  State  St., 

CKICA 


IMPORTANT  TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 


TAKE  NOTICE ! 

WHAT    PARTIES    SAY,    WHO    ARE     USING 

J.  A.  ANDERSON'S  CAMERA  BOXES. 

Office  of  Chicago  Photographic  and  Copying  Company- 

320,  322,  324,  &  326  State  Street. 
J.  A.  Anderson. — Dear  Sir: — The  10  x  12  Conical  Bellows  Camera  you  made  us  gives  entire  satisfaction.  It 
is  finely  finished,  and  the  working  parts  are  all  complete  in  their  action.  We  now  have  seven  of  your  boxes 
in  our  operating  department  and  shall  discard  all  others  (the  so-called  "Success")  for  your  make,  ;is  we  will 
save  the  price  in  repairs.  They  are  all  in  constant  use  every  day,  and  stand  the  test  better  than  any  other  make 
we  have  used.  For  durability,  accuracy,  and  cheapness,  they  certainly  have  no  rivals;  they  compare  favorably 
with  the  A.  0.  Co.'s  boxes,  and  are  far  superior  to  anything  else  in  the  market. 

(Signed),  JAS.  S.  NASON. 


NEW  POSITION  AND  BABY  CHAIR,  COMBINED. 


THE 
HANDSOMEST, 

MOST 
COMPLETE, 

AND 
CHEAPEST 


PIECE  OF  APPARATUS  EVER  OFFERED  TO  THE  PH0T0ORAPHER. 


BUY  NO  IMITATION. 


SEND   FOR   PRICE  LIST. 


Photographers  can  save  from    10  to  20  per  cent,  by  sending  direct  to  the  manufactory  for  Apparatus. 

TESTIMONIAL. 

Elgin,  April  5th,  1874. 
Mr.  J.  A.  Anderson. — Sir: — The  Camera  Boxes  prove  to  be  all  that  I  expected.    The  11  x  14  is  superior  to  any 
that  I  ever  used ;  it  is  a  beauty,  and  I  am  proud  of  it.     The  cheapness,  too,  is  an  item  especially  with  meat 
this  time,  having  lost  all  the  contents  of  my  gallery  by  fire.     I  am  obliged  to  you  for  your  favor. 

Yours,  "  G.  H.  Sherman. 

(<&§="  See  other  testimonials  in  special  advertisements). 

J.    A.    ANDERSON,     (Late  Anderson  &  Bixby), 

65  East  Indiana  Street,  Chicago. 


We  are  informed  that  some  of  our  competitors  :ire  advancing  the  pricts  of 


And  we  have  been  requested  to  do  the  same,  but  have  declined  to  enter  into  any  romhination  what- 
ever. Photographers  can  rest  assured  that  we  shall  adhere  strictly  to  our  LOW  PRICES,  as  published 
in  our  Catalogue,  of  August,  1873,  until  further  notice.  The  prices  therein  quoted  are  the  lowest  yet 
made,  and  all  who  have  not  received  that  list  will  please  send  us  their  address,  when  it  will  be  promptly 
forwarded.     Note  our  very  low  prices  on 

FERROTYPE  PLATES,  CAMERA  BOXES,  &c. 

Everything  sold  at  bottom  figures,  and  all  orders  executed  to  the  letter,  and  with  the  greatest  of 
promptness.      Agents  for  the  Northwest  for 

WESTON'S  ROTARY  BURNISHERS, 

WOODWARD'S  SOLAR  CAMERAS, 

And  SCOTCH  ALBUMEN  PAPER. 

We  hope  all  those  who  have  not  tried  the  Scotch  Albumen  Paper,  will  give  it  a  trial,  as  it  is  giving 
universal  satisfaction,  and  is  having  an  immense  sale.      We  have  it  in  White  and  Pink. 

Prices  furnished  on  application  for  Woodward's  Solar  Cameras,  either  the  Reflectors  or  Direct  Prin- 
ters, with  license  attached.  Any  one  desiring  a  license  for  the  use  of  Solar  Cameras,  can  get  the  same 
of  us  at  the  price  charged  by  Mr.  Woodward,  $40.00. 

Don't  forget  to  order  a  Weston  Burnisher  ;  we  are  selling  large  numbers  of  them,  and  the  fine  effect 
produced  from  their  use  is  commending  itself  to  all. 

Remember,  we  carry  the  LARGEST  STOCK  IN  THE  AVEST,  avd  owning  the  land  and  the,  building 
we  occupy,  we  are  fully  prepared  to  give  you  ro'k  hottvm  prices  on  everything. 


RICE!  Bi  THOMPSON'S 

I 
259  Wabash  Ave.,  CHICAGO. 


ADVERTISING  KATES  FOR  SPECIALTIES — It  will  be  understood  that  matter  under 
this  head  is  mt  to  be  considered  as  always  having  editorial  sanction,  though  we  shall  endeavor  to  clear  it 
of  anything  tending  to  deceive  or  mislead.  Stookdoa.lers  will  lind  this  a  beneficial  mode  of  advertising, 
and  sure  to  pay  largely.  Six  lines,  ono  insertion,  #2.00,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words 
to  a  line— in  advance.  Operators  desiring  situations,  no  charge.  Matter  must  be  received  by  the  23rd 
to  secure  insertion.  Advertisers  will  please  not  ask  us  lor  recommendations.  JOS'  We  cannot  undertake/ 
to  mail  answers  to  parties  who  advertise.    Please  always  add  your  address  to  the  advertisement. 


What  ? — Yes,  it  is  a  fact,  the  Convention  will 
be  held  in  Chicago  in  July,  and  everybody  is 
going.  Charles  W.  8tevens'  "Great  Central" 
will  be  the  headquarters,  and  the  largest  stock 
of  photographic  materials  ever  displayed  will  be 
seen  at  158  State  Street.     Come  and  see. 


Baltimore 

Baltimore 

Baltimore 
Stockhouse, 

Stockhouse, 

Stockhouse, 
Chas.  A.  Wilson, 

Chas.  A.  Wilson, 

Chas.  A.  Wilson, 
No.  7  North  Charles  St. 
No.  7  North  Charles  St. 
No.  7  North  Charles  St. 


Wanted. — A  photographer  thoroughly  ac- 
quainted with  the  work  of  the  dark-room,  who 
can  pose  and  compose  with  skill  and  taste  in  the 
light,  and  understands  retouching  negatives. 
None  need  apply  who  do  not  come  up  to  the 
above  requirements.  D.  H.  Anderson, 

1311  Main  St.,  Richmond,  Va. 


For  Sale. — The  largest  and  best  arranged 
photograph  rooms,  in  a  manufacturing  city  of 
37,000  inhabitants.  Good  entrance.  Good  rep- 
utation. Rooms  doing  at  present  $100  per  week. 
Rent  low.  Reason  for  selling  :  changing  busi- 
ness. Will  be  sold  cheap,  and  on  reasonable 
terms.     Inquire  of  Mr.  Codman, 

At  G.  S.  Bryant  &  Co's,  Boston,  Mass. 

Attention  is  called  to  J.  A.  Anderson's  Ca- 
mera Boxes  and  testimonials  in  our  advertise- 
ments. These  boxes  are  fast  taking  rank  among 
the  leading  boxes  in  the  country,  and  photogra- 
phers will  find  it  to  their  advantage  to  post 
themselves  in  regard  to  prices,  Ac. 

For  Sale. — In  Indianapolis,  Ind. ,  a  first-class 
photograph  gallery  ;  two  large  skylights,  good 
instruments,  water  supplied  by  the  city  water 
works,  and  all  conveniences  for  doing  large,  first- 
class  work.  Located  on  the  principal  business 
street,  and  now  doing  a  good  business. 

Address  Photo., 

Care  of  L.  S.  White,  Indianapolis,  Ind. 


Our  Latest  Illustrated  Price  List  has 
been  published.  Central  manufacture  for  pho- 
tography. T.  F.  Schippang  &  Co., 

Berlin,  S.  W.  Neuenburger  St.,  25. 


For  Sale. — A  solar  camera  that  prints  25  x  30, 
nearly  new,  and  cost  $250,  for  sale  for  $150. 
Cash  only.     License  included.     Apply  to 

S.  A.  Thomas,  717  6th  Avenue,  N.  Y. 


For  Sale  or  To  Let. — A  splendid  Broadway 
gallery,  furnished  complete  with  everything  re- 
quired to  work  ;  or  would  rent  rooms  and  sell 
fixtures  only.  Rent  very  low,  and  will  be  sold 
at  a  bargain.  I  have  other  business  that  re- 
quires all  my  attention.     Address 

C.  K.  Bill,  Solar  Printer, 

758  Broadway,  N.  Y. 


A  Fact. — You  can  safely  rely  on  it.  The 
biggest  and  most  successful  show  ever  made  by 
the  N.  P.  A.  will  be  the  Chicago  Convention,  in 
July,  and  the  most  popular  place  in  Chicago 
during  the  Convention  will  be  the  "  Great  Cen- 
tral "  Photogrophic  Warehouse  of  Charles  W. 
Stevens,  158  State  Street.     Come  and  see. 


Wanted. — A  lady  to  retouch   negatives  and 
finish  photographs  in  India  ink  and  water  colors. 
Address  C.  J.  Warner,  Rome,  Ga. 


$250-$500  Cash,  which  is  half  price,  will 
buy  a  fine  portable  gallery,  with  or  without  out- 
fit, and  is  doing  a  good  paying  business.  Has 
splendid  light,  is  quick  and  easy  moved,  strong, 
etc.  Size,  12x24.  Proprietor  compelled  tore- 
turn  to  Europe  this  summer  ;  otherwise  would 
not  sell  at  all.     For  particulars,  address 

F.  Dael, 
P.  0.  Box  141,  Versailles,  Ky. 

Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Photographic  Gallery  for  Sale. — This 
gallery  is  located  on  Pennsylvania  Avenue,  be- 
9th  and  10th  Streets,  west,  Washington,  D.  G.j 
the  best  business  part  of  the  city.  Has  superior 
light,  and  first-class  instruments  and  fixtures. 
Terms  moderate.     Address 

Mrs.  W.  Ogilvie, 

905  Pennsylvania  Avenue,  Washington,  D.  C. 


USE  WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


Foe  Sale. — Photograph  rooms  in  new  brick 
building,  24  by  80  feet.  Established  ten  years. 
Over  7000  negatives.  In  the  rapidly  growing 
village  of  Waverly,  junction  of  four  railroads. 
North  light.  Everything  complete  for  portrait 
and  viewing.     Sickness  the  cause  for  selling. 

Address  Mead  &  Beard, 

Waverly,  Tioga  Co.,  N.  T. 


Photographers  in  the  South 
and  Southwest  who  would 
buy  goods  to  their  best  ad- 
vantage would  do  well  to  pat- 
ronize the  Stockhouse  of 
Chas.  A.  Wilson,  No.  7  North 
Charles  St.,  Baltimore,  Md. 
Send  a  trial  order. 


Danville,  Iowa,  March  11, 1874. 
Mr.  J.  A.  Anderson. 

Dear  Sir  :  After  a  month's  trial  of  the  box 
bought  of  you,  I  am  willing  to  add  my  testimony 
as  to  the  superiority  of  your  camera  boxes.  It 
works  like  a  charm  and  is  satisfactory  in  every 
respect.  Yours  truly, 

Huberd  Williams. 


For  Sale,  Cheap. — A  Shive's  direct  solar 
camera,  12  inch  condensing  lens,  all  complete  ; 
or  would  exchange  for  a  mammoth  tube  and  box. 
Would  sell  my  rooms  very  reasonable.  Splendid 
new  rooms,  just  fitted  up.  Correspondence 
solicited.     Population  15,000.     Address 

J.  S.  Young,  Box  96,  Steubenville,  Ohio. 


For  Sale. — Photograph  gallery  in  Toledo, 
Ohio,  doing  a  good  business.  Good  light  and 
apparatus.  Up  one  flight  of  stairs.  Water 
works  and  gas.  Three  years'  lease.  To  a  cash 
customer  this  is  a  good  chance.     Address 

G.  H.  Chesebro, 
207  Summit  St.,  Toledo,  Ohio. 


A  Good  Resolution. — That  you  will  attend 
the  Convention  of  the  N.  P.  A.,  in  Chicago,  in 
July  next,  and  not  fail  to  see  Charles  W. 
Stevens,  at  the  "Great  Central,"  158  State 
Street.  More  goods  there  than  can  be  found  in 
any  other  house  in  the  trade.  Prices,  of  course, 
always  the  lowest. 


I  most  cheerfully  recommend  Mr.  J.  A.  Ander- 
son's Camera  Boxes,  for  beauty,  durability,  and 
cheapness.  I  have  two  in  my  establishment 
since  my  opening  here,  and  find  them  fully  up 
to  the  claims  of  a,Ji)St-class  instrument. 

W.  A.  Armstrong, 
State  and  Quincy  Streets,  Chicago. 

Mr.  Armstrong  has  for  a  number  of  years  past 
been  engaged  in  business  in  Saginaw.  Mich., 
and  is  a  photographer  well  known  to  the  frater- 
nity. 


For  Sale. — My  newly-fitted  rooms  in  Spring- 
field, Southwest  Missouri.  Population  over  7000. 
The  central  trading  point  for  all  the  surrounding 
country.  Situated  on  the  line  of  the  Atlantic 
and  Pacific  Railroad.  Rapidly  building  up  with 
all  kinds  of  factories.  Climate  most  delightful. 
Only  first-class  rooms  in  the  southwest  part  of 
the  State.  Well  furnished  with  latest  improve- 
ments. North  light  top  and  side.  Plenty  to  do, 
and  good  prices  for  doing  it.  $800  cash  will 
purchase.     Address  W.  S.  Johnson, 

Springfield,  Mo. 

Prove  It. — Come  and  investigate.  You  can 
see  the  greatest  display  of  pictures,  hear  some 
of  the  best  teachers  in  our  art  at  the  N.  P.  A. 
Convention,  and  visit  that  noted  place,  the 
"Great  Central  "  Photographic  Warehouse,  158 
State  Street,  where  Charles  W.  Stevens  will  be 
on  hand  to  welcome  all  comers. 


J.  A.  Anderson,  Manufacturer  of  Photo- 
graphic Apparatus,  65  East  Indiana  St.,  Chicago. 
Send  for  price  list. 


$500  will  buy  a  gallery  that  has  been  in  suc- 
cessful operation  for  over  twelve  years.  Good 
north  and  side  light,  well  furnished  and  pleas- 
antly situated  ;  but  one  competing  gallery  in  a 
scope  of  20  to  30  miles.  Good  business  and  good 
prices.  Cards,  $3  ;  4-4,  $8  per  dozen.  Address 
James  McAdam,  Wenona,  111. 


Please  read  the  two-page 
advertisements  of  Charles  A. 
Wilson,  Baltimore  Stock- 
house,  No.  7  North  Charles 
Street.  Please  remember  the 
number,  7  North  Charles  St., 
Baltimore,  Md. 


Push,  pluck,  perseverance,  patience,  prompt- 
ness, prove  prime  partners,  photographically 
pondered.  Purchasers,  put  Charles  W.  Stevens, 
158  State  Street,  Chicago,  on  all  your  orders. 


The  Rapid  Photo-Washer 
will  wash  your  prints  in  ten 
minutes. 

Any  person  having  any  claim  against  J.  H. 
Dampf,  please  present  them  for  adjustment  to 
J.  H.  Dampf,  Corning,  N.  Y. 


Wanted — An    energetic    partner  with    $2500 

cash,  or  more,  in  a  good  flourishing  gallery  in  one 

of  the  handsomest  cities  of  the  Union.     Would 

sell  out  entire,  but  prefer  a  partner.     Address 

"  32,"  care  Benerman  &  Wilson,  Philada. 


USE  WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


NOTICE  TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 

David  A.  Woodward  v.  Francis  L.  Mitchell. 

hi,  the  Circuit  Court  of  the  United  States  for 
the  Western  District  of  Missouri.  April 
Term,  1874.     In  Equity. 

This  cause  being  submitted  for  finnl  decree, 
this  22d  day  of  April,  A.  D.  1874,  it  is  ordered, 
adjudged,  and  decreed,  that  the  injunction  here- 
tofore granted  in  this  cause  be  and  the  same  is 
hereby  made  permanent,  and  that  the  defendant 
above  named,  his  servants,  agents,  operators, 
and  workmen,  and  each  and  every  of  them,  be 
and  they  are  hereby  perpetually  enjoined  and 
restrained  from,  either  directly  or  indirectly, 
making,  constructing,  using,  or  vending  to  others 
to  be  used,  or  in  anywise  counterfeiting  or  imi- 
tating the  solar  camera,  or  any  instrument  for 
photographic  purposes  made  in  accordance  here- 
with, whether  known  by  that  or  any  other  name, 
constructed  and  operating  in  the  manner  and 
upon  the  principles  described  in  certain  letters 
patent  of  the  United  States,  dated  on  the  10th 
day  of  July,  1866,  being  the  reissue  of  certain 
other  letters  patent  granted  to  the  said  David  A. 
Woodward,  for  a  new  and  useful  improvement 
in  instruments  used  for  photographic  purposes, 
and  called  the  "  solar  camera,"  bearing  date  the 
24th  day  of  February,  A.  D.  1857. 

And  it  is  further  adjudged,  ordered,  and  de- 
creed that  the  defendant  pay  the  costs  of  the 
proceedings  in  this  cause. 

United  States  of  America,  Western  District  of  Missouri,  ss. 

I,  M.  M.  Price,  Clerk  of  the  Circuit  Court  of 
the  United  States,  in  and  for  the  Western  Dis- 
trict of  Missouri,  and  Eighth  Circuit,  do  hereby 
certify  that  the  foregoing  is  truly  taken  and 
made  from  the  original  now  of  record  in  the  said 
Circuit  Court. 

In  testimony  whereof,  I  have  hereunto  sub- 
scribed my  name,  and  affixed  the  seal  of  the  said 
Circuit  Court,  this  8th  day  of  May,  A.  D.  1874. 

[seal]  M.  M.  Price,  Clerk. 


Newell's  Baths  and  Dishes 
having  been  indorsed  by  the 
trade,  have  been  placed  in 
the  hands  of  all  stockdealers 
for  sale.  Please  inquire  for 
them. 


Wanted. — Agents  to  travel  through  the  seve- 
ral states.  None  need  apply  except  practical 
photographers,  and  those  acquainted  with  the 
use  of  the  solar  camera.     Apply  to 

H.  L.  Emmons,  Baltimore,  Md. 


If  you  want  to  improve  your 
work  and  save  time  get  the 
Rapid  Photo-Washer. 

USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


^IMPORTER  OF ri-rA 

^FORTHEMAGICLANTER^™T/% 
HI  Lewies ASPEC/ALT/f. .  JT 

^ENCLOSE  STAMP  FOR  CATALOGUE  1L 
L?i^^«09^tLBfRT:;:STv.P;H|JA,^.^c!S7^ 


MAGIC  LANTERNS  AND  SLIDES  WANTED. 


The  subscriber  will  dispose  of  the  following 
articles,  for  want  of  use.  One  4-4  Usener  lens, 
selected  by  myself,  warranted  fine  ;  one  1-2  size 
French  lens  made  by  Gasc  &  Charconnet,  fine  ; 
one  4-4  mahogany  view  and  portrait  box,  double 
swing-back,  fine  and  in  good  condition  ;  one  2 
tube  box,  swing-back,  for  plates  4{  x6|,  2  hold- 
ers, good;  one  sliding  card  box,  Peace's  make, 
4  card  and  £  holders;  two  4-4  plain  boxes,  with 
holders  considerably  worn  ;  one  large  camera 
stand,  Peace's  make  ;  two  backgrounds  on  frames 
8x8,  heavy  castors  ;  one  circular  platform,  on 
castors  4i  feet  in  diameter,  covered  with  carpet ; 
one  Knell's  fringed  chair;  one  8-10  covered 
rubber  field  bath  ;  one  4-4  porcelain  bath  ;  two 
pieces  canton  matting,  each  10  x  14  feet,  good  ; 
one  letter  copying  press,  11x17  inches. 
Address  William  H.  Rhoads, 

1800  Frankford  Road,  Philada,  Pa. 


Caution. — Photographers  will  please  take 
notice,  that  a  patent  is  applied  for,  for  the  Cera- 
mic Photographs,  or  Vitrified  Photo.  Enamels. 
Burnt  in  by  fire,  by  a  new,  simple  and  certain 
process,  which  secures  the  most  beautiful  gra- 
dations of  tone,  depth,  and  transparency  in  the 
shades,  and  brilliancy  in  the  high  lights.  Terms 
for  instruction  in  the  method,  and  requisites  for 
the  art,  may  be  had  solely  of 

Thos.  H.  Rutter,  Photo.  Enameler, 

Care  of  Rice  &  Thompson, 
259  Wabash  Avenue,  Chicago,  111. 


St.  James  Hotel,  Grant,  Cobb  &  Hilton, 
Proprietors,  corner  of  State  and  Van  Buren  Sts. 
(two  blocks  only  from  the  N.  P.  A.  Exhibition), 
Chicago.    $2.50  per  dayjto  photographers,  special. 


SITUATIONS    WANTED. 

(No  charge  for  advertisements  under  this  head: 

limited  to  four  lines.     Inserted  once  only, 

unless  by  request.) 

4JSg=-  We  cannot  have  letters  directed  to  our  care 

unless  the  parties  send  for  them,  and  send  stamps  to 

pay  postage.    We  cannot  undertake  to  mail  them ; 

please  do  not  request  it. 

As  a  first-class  operator.  C.  E.  Webster, 
Crawfordsville,  Ind. 

By  a  young  Frenchman,  well  versed  in  all  the 
branches  of  photography  and  painting,  as  ope- 
rator or  colorist.  Alphonse  Locquier,  Lake 
Charles,  Calcagsien  Parish,  La. 

As  printer  and  retoucher.  Can  paint  por- 
traits in  oil  colors.    J.  F.  Gard,  Logansport,  Ind. 


VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


With  a  traveling  ferrotyper,  to  run  a  gallery 
on  a  new  plan.  George  Brown,  Scenic  Artist, 
Mount  Morris,  N.  T. 

By  a  lady,  to  fiuish  photographs  in  colors  and 
ink.  References  given  and  required.  Address, 
stating  terms,  M.  B.  Atkinson,  215  Spruce  St., 
Philadelphia. 

As  operator.  Can  make  clean,  nice,  artistic 
negatives  every  day  in  the  week.  Has  run  one 
of  the  leading  galleries  of  the  Northwest  for 
three  years.  Can  furnish  the  best  of  reference. 
P.  0.  Box  1306,  Joliet,  111. 

By  a  first-class  German  operator,  four  years 
in  this  country.  Good  references  will  be  given. 
Address  Fred.  Geuckotard.  care  of  Mrs.  Geb- 
hardt,  74  Avenue  A,  New  York. 

By  a  young  man  who  has  some  knowledge  of 
the  business  in  all  its  branches,  as  general  assist- 
ant. Good  references  given.  C.  C,  Lock  Box 
19,  Shelby ville,  Tenn. 

In  a  first-class  gallery,  to  finish  photos  in 
crayon,  colors,  or  ink,  or  to  retouch  negatives. 
Salary  $15  to  $20  per  week.  F.  D.  L.,  J.  Loff- 
ler,  Photographer,  Tompkinsville,  Richmond 
County,  N.  Y. 

By  a  young  man  of  steady  habits,  to  learn 
water  coloring  under  good  instructor.  Would 
make  himself  generally  useful  about  a  photo- 
graph gallery.  Western  States  preferred.  A. 
W.  Zumbro,  Macomb,  Hi. 

By  a  first-class  man  of  twelve  years'  experi- 
ence, as  operator  in  a  leading  gallery,  or  part- 
nership interest  in  lieu  of  services.  Address 
Positionist  and  Operator,  care  L.  Dubernet,  15 
Amity  Street,  New  York  City. 

By  a  lady,  as  retoucher  of  negatives.  Can 
give  good  recommendation.  Maud  Mey,  P.  0. 
Box  161,  Athens,  New  York. 

As  printer.  Seven  years'  experience.  Good 
reference,  Ac.  H.  M.  J.,  Box  1038,  Springfield, 
Mass. 

By  a  lady  of  eight  years'  experience.  Feels 
capable  of  filling  any  place  in  a  gallery.  Ad- 
dress Artist,  1001   Green  Street,  Philadelphia. 

As  an  assistant  operator  and  general  assistant. 
Can  print  well  and  can  make  good  ferrotypes. 
Only  needs  practice,  and  will  work  cheap.  Ad- 
dress Will  R.  Carlton,  Keensburgh,  Wabash 
County,  111. 

By  a  strictly  first-class  operator,  posted  in  all 
the  latest  improvements.  Address  G.  W.  Bel- 
cour,  care  of  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  419 
&  421  Broome  Street,  New  York. 

By  a  first-class  operator  and  retoucher.  Is 
now  in  a  first-class  gallery,  but  desires  to  change 
locality.  Good  references.  Address  Operator, 
care  of  J.  Q.  A.  Tresize,  Springfield,  111. 

As  negative  retoucher,  by  a  competent  man. 
For  specimen  of  work,  I  would  refer  you  to  the 
pictorial  page  of  the  April  number  of  this  mag- 
azine. John  H.  King,  corner  of  Huntington 
and  Cooper  Streets,  Utica,  N.  Y. 


SOCIETY  CALENDAR. 

{Published  for  the  convenience  of  Visiting;  Pho- 
tographers and  those  desiring  to  correspond.) 

4®="  This  Calendar  is  published  free  to  the  Socie- 
ties, and  we  shall  feel  obliged  for  notice  of  any  changes 
in  time  of  meeting  or  in  the  officers,  also  to  add  any 
we  have  overlooked. 

Boston  Photographic,  Association. — At  J.  W. 
Black's  studio,  the  first  Friday  of  each  month. 
E.  J.  Foss,  President ;  C.  H.  Danforth,  Secre- 
tary, 27  Central  Square,  Cambridgeport. 

Photographic  Section  of  the,  American  Insti- 
tute, New  York. — At  the  Institute  rooms,  the 
first  Tuesday  of  each  month.  H.  J.  Newton, 
President ;  Oscar  G.  Mason,  Secretary,  Bellevue 
Hospital. 

German  Photographic  Society,  New  York.  — 
At  Nos.  64  and  66  East  Fourth  Street,  New 
York,  every  Thursday  evening.  W.  Kurtz,  Presi- 
dent ;  Edward  Boettcher,  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, 79  Newark  Avenue,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 

Brooklyn  Photographic  Art  Association, 
Brooklyn,  N.  Y.—- Fourth  Tuesday  in  each  month, 
at  179  Montague  Street,  Rev.  Dr.  C.  H.  Hall, 
President ;  Chas.  E.  Bolles,  Cor.  Secretary. 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia. — At  No. 
520  Walnut  Street,  third  floor,  first  Wednesday 
of  each  month.  J.  C.  Browne,  President;  E. 
Wallace,  Jr.,  Secretary,  1130  Spruce  Street. 

Pennsylvania,  Photographic  Association,  Phil- 
adelphia.— At  the  galleries  of  the  members.  H- 
C.  Phillips,  President ;  R.  J.  Chute,  Secretary, 
Office  Philadelphia  Photographer.   Third  Friday. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association. — At  rooms 
of  C.  W.  Stevens,  158  State  Street,  first  Wednes- 
day evening  of  each  month.  G.  A.  Douglas, 
President ;  0.  F.  Weaver,  Secretary,  158  State 
Street. 

Chicago  Photographic  Institute,  Chicago. — 
1st  Monday,  monthly,  at  Chicago  Art  Institute. 
A.  Hesler,  President ;  L.  M.  Melander,  Secre- 
tary, Chicago. 

Buffalo  Photographic  Association. — At  Buffa- 
lo, the  first  Wednesday  evening  of  each  month. 
J.  Samo,  President;  Jennie  M.  Crockett,  Sec'y. 


Ms$iw& 


^mBs 


zi&J^pmi^M- 


m^PAMmM/jM, 


AUG.  SCHWARZE.  SCHWARZE     SL    VALK  WILLIAM  VALK. 

NO.    614    AMCB   STMEET,    f  M I  i  AD  JE  X  Jf  H I  A. 

German  AlMinen  Paper,  and  Arrowroot  Plain  Sailed  Paper. 


IMPORTERS  OP  THE 
MOST   CELEBRATED    RRANDS   OF 


DEALERS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  MATERIALS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 

Will  mail  to  any  address  in  the  country,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  $1,  one  dozen  sheets  of  Assorted  Photo- 
graphic Paper,  each  sheet  being  numbered  for  distinction. 


ART 

PUBLICATIONS! 


In  order  to  meet  the  thirst  now  happily  growing  so  rapidly  among  photographers,  for 
knowledge  bearing  upon 

ART  PRINCIPLES  APPLICABLE  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY, 

We  have  arranged  with  the  various  publishers  of  art  works  for  the  sale  of  such  as  we  think 
will  be  useful  to  photographers,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  copies  of  them  on  receipt  of  price, 
as  follows : 

ART  CULTURE. 

A  Hand-book  of  Art  Technicalities  and  Criticism.     By  John  Ruskin,       .         .  % 3  00 

STUDY  OF  ART. 

By  M.  A.  Dwight, 2  00 

THE  OLD  MASTERS  AND  THEIR  PICTURES. 

By  S.  Tyler, 1  50 

MODERN  PAINTERS  AND  THEIR  PAINTINGS. 

By  S.  Tyler, 1  50 

MANUAL  OF  FREE-HAND  DRAWING  AND  DESIGN- 
ING, AND  GUIDE  TO  SELF  INSTRUCTION.     By  Walter  Smith, 

MANUAL  OF  FREE-HAND  DRAWING  AND  DESIGN- 
ING, AND  GUIDE  TO  SELF  INSTRUCTION.     (Primary  Edition.)      By 
Walter  Smith, 

All  orders  filled  promptly. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


MARCY'S 


McAllisters 

MAGIC  LANTERNS 


IN  GREAT  VARIETY. 


LANTERN  SLIDES, 


OF  ALL  PARTS 
op  the  WORLD. 


LARGE  STOCK  JUST  RECEIVED  BY 


BEHEBHAH  8  WILSOH.  hpifc  Siiailt  ill  CIlllT!  St  PMI*. 

DAMAGED 


I    It  Hi 


^m 


Ft 


nasi 


1 


The  recent  fire  in  our  establishment  caused  a  part  of  our  large  stock  of  Lantern  Slides 
to  be  damaged  by  water.  For  all  practical  uses  they  are  not  damaged  at  all.  Any  photog- 
rapher, by  repairing  the  sticking  paper  around  them,  may  make  them  as  good  as  new.  We 
cannot  repair  them  to  look  like  fresh  stock,  so  wo  offer  them  at  the  following  reduced  rates : 

Levy's  Foreign  Views  (Holy  Land,  Paris,  and  Europe),  50  ets. 

Ketailed  at  $1.25. 
Colored  Scripture  and  Comic  Slides, .    60  and  75    " 

Retailed  at  $1.25  and  $2.00. 
American  Views  and  Statuary, 40    " 

Retailed  at  75  cts.  and  $1.00. 

Care  given  to  selecting  for  parties  who  cannot  be  present  to  select  for  themselves, 


BEITERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


SOMETHING  NEW 
SOMETHING  NEW 
SOMETHING  NEW 
SOMETHING  NEW 
SOMETHING  NEW 
SOMETHING  NEW 

SOMETHING  NEW  WILL  BE  HANDED  TO  ALL  THE  PHOTOGKAPHEKS  WHO 

Visit  the  Chicago  Convention! 

THOSE    WHO    CANNOT    ATTEND    WILL    BE    SENT    A    COPY    ON 
APPLICATION  TO  THE  PUBLISHERS. 


IT  INTERESTS  ALL, 

WILL  MAKE  BUSINESS, 
WILL  SAVE  TIME, 

AND 

HELP  RAISE  PRICES. 


See  Future  Advertisements. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Philadelphia^  Pa. 


In  press  and  will  be  ready  in  June,  a  new  photographic  work  entitled 

THE  PRACTICAL  PRINTER, 

By  CHAS.  W.   HEARN, 

A  gentleman  who  has  devoted  several  years  to  photographic  printing  especially,  and  who  16 
now  engaged  at  it  as  his  constant  occupation. 

The  work  gives  all  the  instructions  that  a  beginner  could  possibly  want 
in  detail,  and  is  what  the  title  indicates — practical. 

It  will  also  be  found  of  invaluable  service  to  any  photographic  printer,  be 
he  ever  so  skilled. 

Too  little  attention  has  heretofore  been  given  to  photographic  printing, 
which  is  indeed  quite  as  important  a  branch  of  the  art  as  negative  making. 

It  is  the  hope  of  both  author  and  publishers  to  create 

REFORM 

in  this  matter,  by  the  issue  of  this  work,  and  as  it  is  to  put  money  in  the 
pockets  of  all  who  read  it,  the  hope  is  that  it  will  be  generally  i*ead. 

Contents  next  month. 

A  fine  example  of  photographic  printing,  by  the  author,  will  accompany 
the  work,  from  negatives  by  F.  Gutekunst,  Philadelphia. 


PRICE,      S  2.5  O 


BEMRMAN  &  WILSON,  PMopjMc  Mista, 

SEVENTH  &  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


Special  Premium  of  Six  Handsome  German 
Cabinet  Pictures  of  Ladies ! 

By  FRITZ  LUCKHAKDT,  Vienna,  Austria. 

These  pictures  are  alone  worth  $3  for  the  set,  and  more  is  asked  for 
such  by  dealers. 

Given  to  any  one  who  will  sen4  ns  a  HEW  Sntarita  for  tie  year  1874. 


What  Others  Think  of  the  Prizes: 


"These  studies  were  greatly  admired  by  the 
members  present,  and  all  were  convinced  that 
they  were  worthy  of  most  careful  study." — Min- 
%btes  of  the  Chicago  Photo.  Association. 

"  These  pictures  were  examined  and  much  ad- 
mired by  all  present.'' — Indiana  Photo.  Ass'n. 

"The  pictures  elicited  general  praise;  the 
draperies  especially  were  very  favorably  com- 
mented upon.'' — German  Photographers'1  Socie- 
ty, Neiv  York. 

"  The  prints  were  thought  to  be  worth  more 
than  the  price  which  was  charged  for  the  journal, 
i.e.,$b;  and  the  President,  Mr.  Black,  stated  that 
every  operator  should  have  a  set,  for  he  considered 
them  to  be  most  admirable  studies,  and  superior 
to  anything  which  he  had  seen  heretofore." — 
Boston  Photographic  Society. 


"They  were  accepted  as  being  of  a  very  high 
standard." — Brooklyn  Photo.  Art  Association. 

"  The  high  artistic  merits  of  the  pictures,  and 
their  great  value  as  studies  for  the  progressive 
photographer,  were  conceded  by  all.  The  general 
harmony  in  the  details  of  each  print,  the  man- 
agement of  light,  and  beautiful  rendering  of 
texture  were  greatly  admired." — Photographic 
Section  of  the  American  Institute,  iV.  Y. 

Special  votes  of  thanks  were  given  for  them 
by  the  Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia  ; 
Photographic  Association  of  West.  Illinois  ;  Chi- 
cago Photographic  Association  ;  Indiana,  District 
of  Columbia,  and  Maryland  Photographic  Asso- 
ciations ;  Photographic  Section  of  the  American 
Institute  ;  German  Photographers'  Society,  New 
York ;  Boston  and  Brooklyn  Photographic  Art 
Associations,  whereat  they  attracted  great  atten- 
tion and  admiration. 


A  Few  Words  from  those  who  have  received  them  as  Premiums  for  New  Subscribers 


"I  think  when  we  say  they  are  splendid  it  is 
only  a  mild  expression  of  what  they  will  bear." 
— E.  F.  Everett. 

"They  are  well  worth  striving  for,  and  the 
photographers  who  allow  this  set  to  remain  out- 


side their  collection  don't  deserve  them." — J. 
Pitcher  Spooner. 

"  They  are  by  far  the  best  specimens  of  pho- 
tographs of  white  drapery  that  I  ever  saw,  and 
the  artistic  part  leaves  nothing  to  wish  for." — 
James  Paris. 


We  make  this  offer  as  A  MATTER  OF  BUSINESS,  and 
not  as  a  favor  to  any  one  on  either  side.  It  ivill  pay 
to  GIVE  A  YEAR'S  SUBSCRIPTION  TO  YOUR  OPERATOR 
or  to  your  friend  or  customer,  in  order  to  SECURE 
THESE  PICTURES. 

BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philada. 


The 


And  Perfect /^ 

£LjL.HAIR. 


Enabling  the  photographer  to  successfully  secure  every  variety  of  pose  with  facility  and  reliability. 
It  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  varying  necessities  of  female  portraiture,  and  is  equally  suited  for 
children,  for  vignettes,  or  for  full  lengths.  The  BOWDISH  CHAIR  is  substantial  in  construction, 
elegant  in  design,  and  rich  in  upholstery  and  finish.  Those  who  have  purchased  them,  speak  in  the 
highest  terms,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 

4  TESTIMONIALS :  $» 

+ + 

"About  ten  days  ago  I  received  the  new  chair  you  promised  to  send  me  when  I  saw  you  last,  and 
would  have  written  and  acknowledged  your  kind  favor  long  ago  if  1  had  correctly  known  your  ad- 
dress. Accept  my  best  thanks  for  this  really  beautiful  chair,  which  now,  after  ten  days'  trial,  has 
proved  to  be  a  decided  success  in  every  way.  It  has  become  the  real  favorite  for  posing  in  my  studio. 
Besides  this,  in  external  appearance  the  new  chair  appears  so  much  superior  in  finish,  and  is  at  the 
same  time  highly  ornamental,  and  the  head  rest  is  so  much  easier  handled  than  with  any  chair  I  have 
ever  seen  before.  In  short,  it  gives  the  sitter  the  greatest  possible  comfort  and  steadiness.  I  think 
the  chair  I  have  justly  deserves  the  name  of  'Perfect  Posing  Chair.'  " — H.  Rochek,  Chicago,  Ml., 
January  10,  1873. 

"  Since  receiving  your  posing  chair,  nearly  a  year  since,  I  have  had  it  in  constant  use,  and  am 
satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  posing  chair  in  the  market.  It  is  easily  worked,  and  is  so  well  made  that 
one  will  last  a  life  time,  and  then  be  a  valuable  heirloom." — L.  Gr.  Bigelow. 

"The  Bowdish  Chair  came  in  good  order  and  gives  the  best  of  satisfaction.  Should  you  wish  a 
recommendation  for  it,  say  what  you  please  and  we  will  endorse  it.  You  cannot  praise  it  too  highly." 
— Slee  Bros.,  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  Sept.  10,  1872. 

"  Your  chair  has  arrived  at  last.  I  am  much  pleased  with  it.  1  don't  think  my  gallery  can  be 
complete  without  one  of  them.  Wishing  you  the  success  your  invention  merits,  I  am,  truly  yours, 
A.  Hesler." 


Prints  will  be  sent,  if  desired,  before  purchasing.     There  are  three  styles  kept  in  stock,  viz  : 

No.  2.   With  nickel-plated  rods  and  rest,  in  velveteen  or  reps $60  00 

No.  4.        "  "  "  "  "  "    square  carved  legs, 70  00 

No.  6.       "  "  "  "     in  best  plush,  paneled 80  00 

Special  chairs  to  order. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO.,  Sole  Agents, 

5 91  Broadway,  JVew  York. 


GIHOH'S  CUT-OUTS 

Are  the  very  best  that  are  made,  and  are  now  without  a  rival  in  the  market.  They  are  el '-an 
cut,  most  desirable  shapes  and  sizes,  and  made  of  non-actinic  paper,  manufactured  specially 
for  the  purpose.  Each  package  contains  30  Cut-Onts,  or  Masks,  with  corresponding  Insides, 
assorted  for  five  differently  sized  ovals  and  one  arch-top. 

PRICE,  $1.00  PER  PACKAGE.     Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

Parties  wishing  special  sizes,  or  large  lots  of  a  few  sizes,  may  have  them  cut  to  order 
promptly,  by  addressing  the  manufacturer.     No  lot  costing  less  than  $1.00  made  at  a  time. 

$§$*"  No  printer  should  attempt  to  make  medallion  pictures  without  them. 

THEY  HAVE  NO  EQUAL  FOR  QUALITY. 

Beware  of  spurious  imitations  made  of  common  paper,  full  of  holes,  badly  cut,  and  odd 
shapes  and  sizes.  Ask  your  stockdealer  for  GIHON'S  CUT-OUTS,  and  see  that  they  are 
in  his  envelopes  with  instruction  circular  included. 


OPAQU 


IS    DESIGNED    FOR 

COMPLETELY  OBSCURING  THE  IMPERFECT  BACKGROUNDS  OF  COPIES, 
RETOUCHING  NEGATIVES, 

FAULTY  SKIES  IN  LANDSCAPES, 

COATING  THE  INSIDE  OF  LENSES  OR  CAMERA  BOXES, 
BACKING  SOLAR  NEGATIVES, 

COVERING  VIGNETTING  BOARDS, 

AND   FOR  ANSWERING 

ALL  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  INTELLIGENT  PHOTOGRAPHER  IN  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  ARTISTIC  RESULTS  IN  PRINTING. 


WHEREVER  YOU  WANT  TO  KEEP  OUT  LIGHT,  USE  OPAQUE. 

It  is  applied  with  a  brush,  dries  quickly  and  sticks. 


CUT-OUTS  (thirty),  $1.00. 


OPAQUE,  50  CENTS. 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Address  all  orders  to 

JOHN  L.  CIHON,  Inventor, 

128  JST.  Seventh  St.,  JPhiladelpJiia,  JPa. 


ROBINSO  JSff'S 

METALLIC 


t=d 


«haJ.  Round,  Elliptic  and  Square,  of  all  sizes;  various  shapes  for  Stereoscopic 
work,  Drug  Labels,  «fcc,  Ac.  Regular  sizes  always  on  band.  Special  Sizes  made 
to  order.  Price  for  regular  photo  sizes,  10  cents  per  incb  the  longest  way  of  the 
aperture.    Special  sizes,  15  cents  per  inch.    FOR  SALE  BT  ALL.  DEALERS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


HUNDREDS  EXPORTED  TO  ENGLAND  AND  GERMANY 


ROBINSO  N'S 

PHOTOGRAPH    TRIMMER 

IS  A  NECESSITY  AND  CONSIDERED  INVALUABLE. 
For  examples  of  its  work  we  refer  to  the  recent  and  present  pictures  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

IT  SAVES  TIME,  SAVES  PRINTS,  AND  SAVES  MONEY. 

The  accompanying  cut  represents  the  instru- 
ment in  the  act  of  trimming  a  photograph.  It 
does  note?**,  but  pinches  off  the  waste  paper,  and 
leaves  the  print  with  a  neatly  beveled  edge  which 
facilitates  the  adherence  of  the  print  to  the 
mount.  Try  one,  and  you  will  discard  the 
knife  and  punch  at  once. 

Oil  the  wheel  bearings  with  Sewing  Machine  Oil. 

A  Trimmer  Mailed  for  $3.50. 

The  difficulty  of  procuring  exactly  true  guides 
for  cutting  out  prints  has  induced  the  inventor 
to  put  up  machinery  for  the  production  of  all 
styles  of  them,  guaranteed  mathematically  true, 
and  to  be  known  as 

ROBINSON'S  IMPROVED  GUIDES. 

See  advertisement  on  opposite  page. 

A  full  stock  of  regular  sizes  now  on  hand. 
A  complete,  illustrated,  catalogue  and  price-list  will 
be  issued  soon. 

READ  THE  TESTIMONIALS. 


"  For  cutting  ovals  I  think  the  Robinson  Trimmer 
is  perfect,  and  if  nobody  brings  them  out  in  England 
I  shall,  as  I  think  it  a  pity  such  a  good  thing  should 
not  be  introduced." — Walter  B.  Woodbury. 

"  I  would  rather  give  fifty  dollars  than  be  without 
one.  By  its  use  all  annoyance  from  dull  knives  tear- 
ing the  prints  is  avoided,  and  it  is  a  pleasure  to  use 
it."— E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk. 

"  Robinson's  Photographic  Trimmer  is  an  excellent 
little  instrument.  It  does  the  work  intended  magnifi- 
.  cently.  It  is  not  only  exquisite  for  trimming  photo- 
graphs, but  also  for  making  Cut-Outs  and  cutting  the 
sensitized  paper  to  any  needed  size,  using  for  the 
latter  purpose  a  guide  of  steel  in  form  of  a  ruler,  thus 
entirely  dispensing  with  the  knife." — Bern'd  Kihl- 
holz,  Chicago,  III. 

"  I  like  the  Trimmer  very  much.  I  think  it  a  very 
useful  article.  It  works  well  and  does  all  it  is  recom- 
mended to  do." — P.  G.  Weller,  Littleton,  N.  H. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmers  have  come  to  hand,  and 
I  like  them  very  much ;  they  are  just  what  I  wanted 
and  found  it  difficult  to  get." — J.  W.  Black,  Boston. 

"  I  am  using  the  Robinson  Trimmer  and  consider 
it  the  best  article  for  trimming  photographs  I  ever 
saw." — W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"  It  does  its  work  magnificently.  The  only  wonder 
is,  that  it  was  not  invented  years  ago.  It  is  indis- 
pensable."— Garrett  Bros.,  Philadelphia. 

"  I  think  the  Robinson  Photographic  Trimmer  is 
the  best  thing  ever  put  upon  the  market  for  photo- 
graphic use.  It  is  cheap  and  does  its  work  perfect.  I 
now  make  with  it  all  the  cut-outs  I  use,  and  also  cut 
out  all  my  photographs  from  eleven  by  fourteen 
down  to  cards.  It  only  cost  me  four  dollars  and  I 
would  not  be  without  it  for  the  best  twenty-five  dol- 
]  ar  cutting  machine  I  ever  saw." — D.  Lothrop,  Phila. 


"  The  Trimmer  comes  up  to  all  you  claim  for  it.  I 
would  not  be  without  it." — T.  Cummings,  Lancaster. 

"  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  is  all  that  it  is 
claimed  to  be.  I  have  trimmed  all  my  prints  with  it 
from  the  day  I  received  it,  in  less  than  half  the  time 
taken  by  a  knife.  It  does  its  work  with  mathematical 
correctness  and  uniformity.  I  would  not  be  without 
it  for  ten  times  its  cost.  It  cannot  be  recommended 
too  highly." — W.  H.  Cranston,  Corry,  Pa. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmer  has  proved  to  us  one  of 
the  most  usefully  instruments  that  we  have  in  our 
gallery.  In  the  few  months  that  we  have  owned  it  we 
cut  some  10,000  photographs  with  it,  which  were  cut 
in  one-fourth  the  time,  and  cut  better  than  any  otheT 
instrument  could  do  it." — Schreiber  &  Sons,  Phila. 

"  It  does  the  work  quick,  sure,  and  perfect.  We 
would  not  be  without  it.  It  is  simply  what  it  is  rep- 
resented to  be." — B.  Frank  Saylor  &  Co.,  Lancaster. 
"The  Photograph  Trimmer  is  a  good  and  quick  work- 
ing thing.  I  do  not  want  any  thing  better  and  more 
useful  in  the  gallery  for  that  purpose.  I  would  not 
be  without  one." — A.  M.  Bachman,  Allenlown,  Pa. 

"  I  have  used  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  some 
time.  A  lady  was  asked  how  she  liked  her  sewing 
machine,  and  in  reply  said  '  Well  I  could  get  along 
without  it,  but  when  I  do  I  shall  not  sew  any  more.' 
That  is  me,  I  can  get  along  without  the  Trimmer  but 
when  I  do  I  shall  not  trim  photographs." — Well  G. 
Singhi,  Binghamton,  N.  Y. 

"  It  gives  perfect  satisfaction,  being  the  best  thing 
of  the  kind  I  have  ever  used.  There  is  nothing 
amongst  my  photographic  stock  more  useful." — M.  P. 
Rice,  Washington,  B.  C. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmer  works  admirably.  Does 
the  work  intended  with  great  satisfaction." — A.  K.  P. 
Trask,  Philadelphia. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 
FOB  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALEBS.  PHILADELPHIA,  PA 


BOOKS 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALMOST  NOTHING. 

"A  FEW  MORE  LEFT." 


BARGAINS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 

The  Late  Fire 

In  Sherman's  Building  having  caused  a  portion  of  our  stock  of  Books  and 
Magazines  to  be  deluged  with  water,  we  offer  the  following  bargains  to  opera- 
tors, assistants,  employers,  &c. : 


26  Copies  Dr.  Vogel's  Reference-Book, 


20 

16 

30 

6 

12 

12 

49 

30 

14 

16 

8 

600 

400 


Anderson's  Comic  All-my-Knack  (paper), 

"  "  (cloth), 

How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph,       " 

"  (paper), 

Carbon  Manual  (cloth), 
Photographic  Mosaics  (cloth),     . 
"  "         (paper),   . 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography, . 
Year-Book  of  Photography,  . 
Glimpses  at   Photography, 
How  to  Paint  Photographs  (cloth), 
Photographic  World   (1871  and  1872), 
Philadelphia  Photographer  (1865  to  1874) 


$0  50 
20 
30 
20 
10 
50 
30 
25 
25 
25 
50 
75 
10 
15 


The  above  goods  were  WET  and  not  burned.  They  are  now  dry,  and  for 
all  practical  uses  as  good  as  new  books,  but  so  stained  that  we  cannot  sell  them 
for  new,  and  we  offer  them  for  one  more  month,  at  the  above  rates. 

LET  THE  ORDERS  COME  NOW"  !  One  dollar  will  buy  lots  of  useful 
reading!     A  good  chance  to  fill  up  back  volumes  of  our  Magazines. 

State  your  orders  explicitly. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photographic  Publishers, 

SEVENTH  &  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO. 

Take  pleasure  in  calling  attention  to  the  following  NEW  articles,  which  they  now  have  in  stock,  and 

can  ship  at  short  notice. 

EntrekinPs  Oscillating  Enamelers, 

Each  Press  is  supplied  with  Gas  Burner  or  Alcohol  Lamp  (as  the  purchaser  prefers),  an  Oil  Stone,  for 
polishing  the  Burnisher,  and  one  Cake  of  Soap  for  making  Lubricator. 

PRICES  AS  FOLLOWS  : 

6  in.,  $26;     lO  in.,  $40  ;     14  in.,  $50  ;    18  in.,  $75. 

BIRD'S  HEAD  SCREENS  (each),  $10,  $12,  and  $15. 

f  ITTE'S  EVAPORATING  DISHES  ail  WATER  BATHS  COMBINED. 

PRICES  AS  FOLLOWS  : 

i  Gallon,  $3.50;  3Qts.,$4.50;  1  Gallon,  $5.00  ;  li  Gallons,  $5.50 

LARGER  SIZES  TO  ORDER. 

NASOIPS  BACKGROUND  CARRIAGE,  $5.00. 

MOULTON'S  RAPID  PHOTO-WASHER. 

Washes  with  exact  uniformity,  and  gives  more  brilliant  and  permanent  work  ;   is  simple,  not  liable  to 
get  out  of  order,  and  will  last  a  life-time. 

Size  of  Cylinder.  Capacity  in  Cards.     Largest  Print.  Price. 

Diam.  16  in.,  Length  Uh  in.  84  14  x  17  in.        $30  00 

"      20  "         "        19     "  144  18  x  22  "  40  00 

"      25  "         "        24     "  220  22  x  28  "  50  00 

WS,    ARE    ALSO    AGENTS    FOR 

Julius  Kruger's  Patent  Cement  Water  Colors 

FOR    COLORING    PHOTOGRAPHS    ON    ALBUMEN    OR    PLAIN    PAPERS. 

PRICES  : 

Box  of  6  Cakes,  $2.25.-12  Cakes,  $4.25.-18  Cakes,  $6.50. 

■W^baZEa^ZETTIE-D    VERY    PIUE. 
We  have  also  an  extra  fine  lot  of 

Parys'  Negative  Gun  Cotton,         ***  per  ounce,  $0.50 
Liesgang's  Papyroxyline,  -        -        1.25 

French  Aniline  Colors,  ■   *eTho*>      5.00 

FULL  STOCK  OP 

MONOGRAM  COLLODIONS,  VARNISHES  and  COTTONS,  WILSON'S  HEAD 

RESTS, TABLES,  CHAIRS,  VASES,  COLUMNS,  AM.  OPTICAL  CO.'S 

APPARATUS,  KNELL'S,  SCOVILL'S,  and  B0WDISH  CHAIRS. 

SOLE  AGENTS  AND  MANUFACTURERS  OF 

Berper's,  anfl  Sup  &  Lenzi's  Print  Cotters,  anil  Chute's  Cameo  Press. 

Price  Lists  gratis  on  application. 

SALESROOMS,  822  AR0H  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


JOHN  DEAN  &  CO., 
MANUFACTURERS, 

Worcester,  Mass., 

OFFER  AT   WHOLESALE,   AT   LOWEST   PEICES,   THE 


UIB, 


BLACK  and  Patent  CHOCOLATE  TINTED, 
EGG-SHELL  and  GLOSSY. 

The  experience  and  extensive  facilities  of  John  Dean  &  Co.  enable  them 
to  produce  the  most  desirable  Ferrotype  Plates  in  the  market. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO., 

TRADE   AGENTS, 

591  BROADWAY,  NEW  YORK. 


BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO., 

159  Washington  St.,  Boston, 

Importers  and  Sole  Agents  in  the  United  States  for  the  celebrated 

Voigtlander  &  Son,  and  Darlot  Lenses 

For  Portraits,  Views,  and  Stereoscopic  Work  of  all  sizes.     Send  for  Price  List. 


TRY  OUR  NEW  STEREOSCOPIC  LENSES 

IP  YOU  WANT  THE  BEST.     PRICE,  $22  PER  PAIR. 

None  genuine  unless  our  names  are  engraved  on  them. 


ALBUMEN  PAPERS. 


demon's, 
Hovey's, 


Dresden  S.  &  M., 

"       Brilliant. 


AMERICAN  OPTICAL  CO.'S  CAMERA  BOXES 


Black  Walnut  Frames, 0VAL  and  s 


superior  finish. 


P'n"PT7'Pr1    "R"nQ"Hp    "FtPITTIPQ     Square,   Carved  Rustic,  with  leaf  on  corners.     All 


>j  sizes  up  to  18x22. 


QV»  ^Y»YY"l  nrt      r^O  Y>f\     "P"PO  YY1  QCt    We  have  °f  these  three  different  sizes  and  styles  for  the  Card, 


White  Hollywood  Frames. 


Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 

We  have  these  in  three  different  styles  of  each  size 
for  the  Card,  Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 


Stereoscopes,  Prang's  Chromos,  Glass  Baths,  Plain  Paper, 
Porcelain  Ware,  &c. 

And  every  description  of  goods  used  in  the  business,  at  wholesale  and  retail,  at  the  lowest  cash  prices. 

BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO. 


Photographic  Card  Warehouse. 


A.  Iff.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 

MANUFACTURERS, 

No.  18  South  Sixth  St.  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 


EVERYTHING  APPERTAINING  TO  THE   LINE   OF  OUR 

MANUFACTURES  FURNISHED  WITH  CARE 

AND  PROMPTNESS. 


Our  long  experience  in  and  facilities  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods,  and 
familiarity  with  the  peculiar  wants  of  Photographers,  enable  us  to  offer  superior  induce- 
ments to  those  who  may  favor  us  with  their  orders. 

JAMES  F.  MAGEE  &  CO. 

MANUFACTURERS    OF 

PURE 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMICALS, 

No.  108  North  Fifth  Street, 

ZPHILJ^IDIEJl.IF'III.A.. 


Stock  Dealers  only  Supplied. 


LANTERN  SLIDES. 


A  fine  stock  on  hand,  selected  from  home  and  foreign  catalogues,  embracing 


Views  of  all  Parts  of  the  World ! 


American  Trade  Agents  for  J.  Levy  &  Cos's  Celebrated  Slides. 


PLAIN,  COLORED,  AND  COMIC 

LANTERN    SLIDES, 

OF  ALL  KINDS,  AT  LOW  PRICES. 

Superior  Slides  made  by  the  Woodbury  Process. 


SCIOPTICONS  AND  LANTERNS  SUPPLIED. 


EXAMINE  OUR  $100  LANTERN  OUTFIT. 

SELECTIONS  MADE  PERSONALLY.  PEICES  MOST  ADVANTAGEOUS. 


ALSO,  GLASS  STEREOSCOPIC  PICTURES, 

A  NEW  AND  BEAUTIFUL  SELECTION  JUST  EECEIVED. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Southwest  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Photographic  Publications,  1874. 

Knowing  the  advantages  of  well-written  works  on  Photography  to  our 
readers,  we  issue  our  annual  catalogue,  that  they  may  have  the  opportunity 
of  selecting  the  very  best.  We  always  find  the  photographer  who  reads 
what  is  published  pertaining  to  his  profession,  to  be  the  photographer  who 
succeeds  in  his  business  the  best.  Above  all,  those  who  regularly  and  contin- 
ually receive  a  good  photographic  magazine  are  those  who  are  always  ahead 
with  new  goods,  new  styles,  and  new  information.  We  recommend  an  in- 
vestment in  a  part  or  all  of  the  list  below,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  them  to 
you  on  receipt  of  price. 

CATALOGUE. 

A  The  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

ne  oldest,  best,  and  most  popular  Photographic  Magazine  in  America.  Eleventh  Year.  Please  read  the 
ospectus  on  page  three  of  cover  and  premium  list  opposite.  Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2.50  for  six 
onths,  in  advance.    Current  number,  50  cents.    Specimen  copies,  free. 

B  The  Skylight  and  the  Darh-Rooin. 

By  Elbert  Anderson,  operator  at  Kurtz's  studio,  New  York.  This  is  the  most  beautiful  and  elaborate 
work  on  the  art  ever  published.  It  contains  nearly  250  pages — large,  square — twelve  photographs  made  by  the 
author  to  illustrate  the  lessons  of  the  work,  and  almost  two  hundred  fine  wood-cuts.  See  advertisements. 
Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  postpaid,  $4.00.    A  few  copies  only  left. 

C  Photographic  Mosaics. 

The  1874  edition  excels  all  of  its  eight  older  brethren.  The  list  of  articles  is  made  up  of  original  contribu- 
tions, written  especially  for  its  pages,  on  all  departments  of  the  art,  whoi  ly  by  practical  men  who  are  only  heard 
from  once  a  year  through  the  persuasion  of  the  editor,  in  this  way.  See  special  advertisement.  146  pages. 
Paper  cover,  50  cents.    Cloth,  $1.    A  few  copies  of  former  editions,  from  1866,  at  same  price. 

D  The  Ferrotyper 's  Guide. 

A  new  work  on  the  Ferrotype.    Price.  75  cents. 

E       Bigelow's  Album,  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

This  is  not  exactly  a  book,  but  a  collection  of  24  large  Victoria  size  photographic  studies  in  lighting  and 
posing,  made  especially  to  teach  how  to  light  and  pose  ordinary  and  extra-ordinary  subjects  in  all  the  plain, 
fancy,  "  Rembrandt"  and  "Shadow"  styles.  It  is  accompanied  by  an  explanatory  key  of  instructions,  together 
with  a  diagram  for  each  picture,  showing  how  the  sitter  and  the  camera  were  placed  in  the  skylight,  their 
relation  to  the  background,  and  what  blinds  were  opened  and  closed  at  the  time  of  the  sitting.  It  almost 
supplies  a  rule  by  which  you  can  quickly  tell  how  to  manage  every  subject  that  comes  to  you.  The  studies  are 
mounted  on  folding  leaves,  so  that  twelve  can  be  examined  at  once.    Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  $6,  postpaid. 

F  Wilson's  Landscape  Studies. 

An  album  of  landscape  studies  in  style  similar  to  Bigelow's  Album,  containing  ten  5x8  views,  with  the 
formula,  &c,  by  George  Washington  Wilson,  Esq.,  the  renowned  Scotch  landscape  photographer.  A  splendid 
work.    All  gone  and  none  to  be  had. 

G  Handbook  of  the  Practice  and  Art  of  Photography. 

By  Dr.  Vogel.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  in  press. 

H     How  to  Paint  Photographs  in  Water  Colors. 

A  practical  Handbook  designed  especially  for  the  use  of  Students  and  Photographers,  containing  directions 
for  Brush  Work  in  all  descriptions  of  Photo-Portraiture,  Oil,  Water  Colors,  Ink,  How  to  Retouch  the  nega- 
tive, &c.    By  George  B.  Ayres,  Artist.  Third  edition.    Differing  largely  from  previous  editions.    Price,  $2.00. 


I  Pictorial  Effect  in  Photography. 

,       By  ir.  P.  Robinson,  London.    out  of  print.    New  edition  in  preparation. 

J  How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph. 

This  is  a  fine  little  work  of  48  pages,  written  by  the  wife  of  a  celebrated  New  York  photographer,  for  the 
purpose  of  educating  the  public  on  the  all-important  subject  of  sitting  for  a  picture.    It  is  bound  in  cloth  at  60 

cents  per  copy,  and  paper  cover  30  cents. 

K  Looliout  Landscape  Photography. 

By  Prof.  R.  M.  Linn,  Lookout  Mountain,  Tenn.  A  pocket  manual  for  the  outdoor  worker,  and  full  of  good 
for  every  photographer.    75  cents.    Be  sure  to  get  it. 

L      HiTnes' S  Leaf  Prints;  or,  Glimpses  at  Photography. 

By  Prof.  Charles  F.  Himes,  Ph.D.  Full  of  useful  information  for  the  photographic  printer.  Illustrated 
with  a  whole-size  photograph.    Cloth,  $1.25. 

M  The  American  Carbon  Manual. 

By  Edw.  L.  Wilson.  A  complete  manual  of  the  Carbon  process  from  beginning  to  end.  With  a  fine 
example  by  the  process.    Cloth,  $2.00. 

N        Ayres's  Chart  of  Photographic  Drapery. 

This  is  a  photograph  of  forty-two  pieces  of  cloth,  of  all  the  colors  and  shades,  handsomely  mounted  on  a 
card.  It  should  be  hung  in  every  reception-room,  to  show  your  customers  what  color  dresses  o  wear  and  to 
show  you  what  sort  of  backgrounds  and  accessories  to  use.    Price,  $2.00. 

O  The  Photographer  to  His  Patrons. 

A  splendid  little  twelve-page  leaflet,  which  answers  all  vexatious  questions  put  to  you  by  your  sitters,  and 
serves  as  a  grand  advertising  medium.  It  is  for  photographers  to  give  away  to  their  customers.  Send  for  a 
copy  and  an  illustrated  circular.  Over  300,000  already  sold  and  in  use  all  over  the  country.  $20.00  for  1000, 
$35.00  for  2000,  and  so  on.    Printed  and  supplied  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

P  Pretty  Faces. 

A  leaflet  much  smaller  than  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons"  for  the  same  purpose,  but  costing  less,  viz. : 
1000  copies,  $10.00  ;  2000,  $17.50,  and  larger  orders  at  less  rates. 

Q  The  Year-Booh  of  Photography. 

By  G.  Wharton  Simpson.  English  edition.  Similar  to  Mosaics,  and  full  of  good,  short,  practical  articles. 
50  cents.    1869, 1S70, 1871, 1872,  and  1873  now  on  hand.    1874,  about  January  20th. 

R     Elbert  Anderson' s  Photo-  Comic  Alhnyhnach. 

A  complete  Almanac,  full  of  witty  sayings,  jokes,  puns,  stories,  etc.,  etc.  Profusely  illustrated  with  comic 
and  original  sketches,  yet  all  interspersed  with  much  practical  matter  of  value  to  every  photographer.  Price, 
75  cents. 

S  Photographers'  Pocket  Reference- Booh. 

By  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  of  Berlin.  A  dictionary  of  all  the  terms  used  in  the  art,  and  contains  formulas  for  almost 
every  known  manipulation.  Altogether  different  from  any  work  ever  published.  Cloth,  $1.50.  See  special 
advertisement.    A  splendid,  indispensable  book. 

To  save  writing,  photographers  may  order  the  above  of  us  by  the  marginal  letters,  thus,  "  Please  send  us 
one  copy  of  each,  book  A,  B,  K,"  &c,  &c.    Any  of  the  above  sent  post  free  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Benerman  &  Wilson's  Publications  sold  by  all  Dealers. 


HEIL'S 


(Actual  size  of  a  JVo.  1  Steinheil  Lin*.) 


NEW  APLANATIC  LENSES, 

FOR 

GROUPS, 

LANDSCAPES^   and 

COPIES. 

We  have  now  a  full  stock  of  these  celebrated  Lenses,  at  the  following  prices  : 


No.  1, 

1-4  size, 

3£  inch  focus, 

$25  00 

"    2, 

1-2     " 

51     u 

"    30  00 

"    3, 

4-4     " 

7       " 

45  00 

"    4, 

8-10  " 

104i     « 

60  00 

"    5, 

10-12  " 

13|     << 

70  00 

"    6, 

13-16   " 

lfii     "        " 

110  00 

Nos.  1  and  2  are  in  matched  pairs  for  Stereoscopic  Work. 


"I  always  take  great  pleasure  in  recommending  the  Steinheil  Lenses,  and  you  can  say  almost 
anything  in  their  favor  for  me.  They  possess  all  the  merits  of  higher  priced  lenses,  and  if  I  was 
starting  again  I  should  stock  myself  with  them."  B.  W.  Kilbuen. 


THEY  ARE  IN  USE  BY  MOST  LEADING  PHOTOGRAPHERS,  INCLUDING 

GUTEKUNST,  BROADBENT  &  PHILLIPS,  DeMORAT, 

WENDEROTH,  FENNEMORE,  LOTHROP, 
And  many  others,  equally  well  known. 

We  feel  sure  that  at  least  one  of  these  Lenses  is  needful  for  the  successful  prosecution  of  your 
business,  and  so  solicit  your  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  States, 

No.  822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


MANUFACTURING   OPTICIAN, 

1314  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia. 

Sole  Manufacturer  of  the  Stereo-Panopticon  and  Artopticon,  warranted  to  be  the  most 
perfect  and  powerful  Magic  Lanterns  made. 


MCALLISTER'S 

PATEUT 

ARTOPTICO 


Each  lantern  is  adjustable  for  use 
with  powerful  coal  oil  light — oxycal- 
cium,  hydro-oxycalcium,  and  oxy- 
hydrogen  lights. 

J^H00  The  coal  oil  lamp  used  gives 
very  much  more  light  than  any  other 
lamp  yet  made. 

Giving  exhibitions  with  the  Artopti- 
con will  prove  a  profitable  business  for 
a  man  with  a  small  capital. 

The   STEREO-PARfOPTICOrU    is   an  improved   instrument,   suitable  for  giving- 
exhibitions  of  dissolving  views  on  the  largest  scale.     Send  for  printed  description. 


MCALLISTER'S 

ENT    TINTERS. 


These  tinters  are  used  for  giving  to  magic  lantern  pictures 
various  beautiful  tints  or  colors,  as  blue,  red,  yellow,  green, 
crimson,  &c,  &c.  They  can  be  adjusted  to  the  lantern,  either 
on  the  end  of  the  front  lens,  or  may  be  screwed  to  the  back 
of  the  front  lens-holder,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Stereo-Panop- 
ticon and  Educational  lanterns.  On  the  Artopticon,  they 
are  placed  on  the  end  of  the  front  lens  tube. 

NEW  and  BEAUTIFUL  SLIDES  for  LANTERN  USE  in  LARGE  VARIETY. 

Priced  and  Illustrated  Catalogues  free,  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  stamp. 


W.  MITCHELL  McALLISTER,  1314  Chestnut  St.,  Phila. 


DR.    VO  G  E  L'S 

HAND  BOOK 


OIF1 


PHOTOGRAPHY. 


THE  SECOND   EDITION 

Is  in  Press  and  will  be  ready  soon. 


SEE  FUTURE  ADVERTISEMENTS. 


FOR    SALE    BY    ALL    DEALERS. 


BUNEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers. 

PHILADELPHIA. 


NO  MISTAKE! 

BEST  PORTRAIT  LENSES 


^a_:r,:e 


Ohas.  F.  Usener's. 


TRY  THEM  and  BE  CONVINCED. 


Charles  Cooper  fy  Co., 

WHOLESALE  AGENTS, 

150  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

JOHN   R.  CLEMONS, 

IMPORTER  OF 
AND  MANUFACTURER  OF 

ALBUMEN  AND  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPERS. 

PINK  AND  BLUE  ALBUMEN  PAPER  CONSTANTLY  ON  HAND  OR  MADE  TO  ORDER, 

CLEMONS'  NEW  ALBUMEN   PAPER, 

A  superior  article  introduced  into  the  market  about  a  year  ago.  It  is  equal,  if  not  superior  to  any  Paper 
imported;  the  great  demand  proves  such  to  be  the  case.  It  is  praised  by  all  who  use  it  as  to  its  keeping 
white  during  warm  weather;  also,  for  its  brilliancy  and  toning  qualities,  and  it  is  made  White,  Pink,  and 
Blue.    Sizes  medium,  26  x  40  and  35  x  46. 

CLEMONS'  ARROWROOT  SALTED   PAPER 

Has  stood  the  test  above  all  other  makes  for  the  last  nine  years.  An  article  extensively  used  for  all  Plain 
Solar,  and  Colored  Work.    Sizes,  17%  x  23,  26  x  40,  and  35  x  46. 

Prices  lower  than  those  of  any  foreign  make. 

CLEMONS'  N.  P.  A.  VARNISH, 

For  Plain  Work  and  Retouching  upon. 

CLEMONS'  COLDEN  VARNISH, 

For  Intensifying  and  Retouching  upon. 

JOHN  R.  CLEMONS,  Manufacturer, 

915  SAWSOM  ST.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


"Make  my  order  thirty  instead  of  twenty.  Lot  last  sent  are  all  gone." — Dr.  E.  Liesegang, 
Dusseldorf,  Germany. 

"Hurry  on  the  Bigelow  Albums  ordered.  We  are  out  and  orders  waiting."— Piper  &,  Carter, 
Lfcidon,  England. 


IGELOW'S  ALBl 


OF 


LIGHTING  AND  POSING. 
SELLS  ALL  OVER  THE  WORLD. 

A  JEW  EDITION  HAS  BEEN  ISSUED  WITH  AN  ENLARGED  KEY, 

AND  NEARLY  ALL  NEW  STUDIES. 

This   album  brings  lighting  and  posing  down  to  a 
system  at  once  plain,  easy  and  desirable. 

No  good,  intelligent  operator  can  afford 
to  work  without  it. 

It  Contains 

24  Victoria  Portrait  Studies 

in  Light  and  Pose, 

WITH  AN  EXPLANATORY  KEY, 

Telling  exactly  HOW  EACH  PICTURE    WAS 
MADE;  WHERE  THE  CAMERA  AND 
THE    SITTER    WERE    PLACED 
when  it  ivas  made ;  WHA  T  CUR- 
TAINS WERE  OPENED 
in  lighting  the  subject, 
&c.,  $c. 

A  diagram  of  the  interior  of  the  skylight  is  given  in  each  case,  telling  the  whole  story.    IT  IS  BOUND 
HANDSOMELY  IN  CLOTH,  GILT. 


NEW  KEY,  ENLARGED. 


NEW  PICTURES. 


*  It  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  aids  to  art  education  which  has  yet  been  presented  to  the  photo, 
portraitist.  Each  print  represents  a  distinct  study  of  pose  and  lighting,  the  widest  variety  of  effects 
being  comprehended.  We  should  be  glad  to  see  it  in  the  hands  of  English  portraitists  generally." — 
Photo.  News. 

"  The  method  is  an  admirable  one  and  Mr.  Bigelow  deserves  credit  for  the  systematic  way  in  which 
he  has  carried  it  out." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  confess  that  this  work  has  furnished  me  much  instruction,  particularly  the  manner  in  which, 
byword  and  picture,  studies  about  light  and  pose  are  explained  and  made  comprehensible." — Dr. 
Vogel. 

"  We  do  not  know  of  anything  ourselves  that  has  been  presented  to  the  trade  which  is  calculated 
to  do  so  much  real  good  as  Bigelow's  Album,  with  the  explanatory  key  to  the  studies.  It  is  an  in- 
valuable guide  to  the  portraitist." — Philadelphia  Photographer. 

It  is  considered  invaluable  by  the  practical  photographers  who  use  it. 


PRICE,  $6.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCKDEALERS. 
BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


HOW  TO   PAINT  PHOTOGRAPHS. 


The  THIRD  EDITION  is  so  different  from  former  ones,  that  it  may  almost  be  said  that  it  is  A  new 
work. 

It  Gives  the  Best  and  Freshest  Instructions  to  be  had  on  the  Subject. 

Written  by  a  practical  photographic  colorist,  Mr.  Geo.  B.  Ayres. 

PRICE,  $2.00.     FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Photographers  and  artists  whose  interest  it  is  to  produce  work  in  Water  Colors,  Oil,  India  InK,  or 
who  wish  complete  instructions  in  retouching  negatives,  should  consult  Mr.  Ayres'  capital  work. 

' EENEBMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia, 

O-.    SATJTER. 

No.    138  South  Eighth  Street,   Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURER   AND    WHOLESALE   DEALER   IN 


The  attention  of  the  trade  is  particularly  called  to  the  superior  quality  of  our  Glass  and  materials 
and  neatness  of  finish.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand. 

BULLOCK    &    CRENSHAW, 

No.  528  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURERS  AND  IMPORTERS  OF   PURE   CHEMICALS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 
IMPORTERS  OF  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN,  APPARATUS,  ETC. 

TRAPP  &  MUNOH'S 


2Mbttnt£tt 


Introduced  into  this  country  since  1868  has  become  the  leading  paper,  and  is 
now  better  known  and  more  appreciated  than  any  other  brand. 

That  this  great  success  is  well  deserved  and  due  to  its  excellent  qualities 
may  be  judged  from  the  fact,  that  of  all  the  competitors  of  the  Vienna  Ex- 
hibition, Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  alone  received  the 

IMIIEID.A.ILj    OIF    IMHEZE^IT 

for  Albumenized  Paper. 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALL  THE  STOCKHOUSES. 

WILLY  WALLACH, 

GENERAL  AGENT  FOR  THE  UNITED  STATES, 

No.  4  Beekman  St.,  and  36  Park  Row,  New  York. 


SCOVILL  MANUF'G  CO. 


DEALERS 


10 


AND  PROPRIETORS  OP  THE  WORKS  OP  THE 

American  Optical 
Company 

Beg  the  trade  to  remember  that  they  have  removed  from 

No.  4  Beekman  St. 


TO 


BROOME 
STREET, 


The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons, 


WHAT  IS  IT? 


TIHE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS  is  a  little  book  or  pamphlet  of  twelve  pages,  the 
l  intention  of  which  is  :  1st.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  say  a  few  words  in  a  kindly  way 
to  those  who  have  photographs  taken,  in  order  that  the  intercourse  between  them  and  their 
photographer  may  be  pleasant  and  result  in  the  most  successful  pictures.  Every  photographer 
knows  that  he  is  constantly  beset  with  a  lot  of  questions,  as  to  the  proper  way  to  dress,  the  best 
time  to  come,  and  so  on,  which  take  a  great  deal  of  his  time  to  answer.  This  little  book  answers 
them  all,  and  the  mere  handing  of  "a  copy  to  the  questioner,  which  he  or  she  can  carry  away  and  study 
at  leisure,  serves  as  admirably  as  a  half-hour's  conversation. 

2d.  It  is  a  cheap  mode  of  advertising  What  could  you  want  better  than  to  have  your  business  card 
so  attractive  that  people  will  come  and  ask  for  it,  hand  it  around  from  one  to  another,  discuss  it,  and 
then  keep  it  for  reference?  This  is  what  they  do  with  this  little  "tract."  Witness  what  those  who 
have  tried  it  say  below. 

3d.  It  is  also  intended  to  convey  to  the  public  at  large  the  fact  that  photography  is  not  a  branch  of 
mechanics,  nor  photographers  a  sort  of  mechanic  themselves,  but  that  both  are  entitled  to  respect,  the 
same  as  the  family  physician  or  the  minister;  that  the  photographer  has  rights  as  well  as  the  public  ; 
that  he  must  be  trusted,  and  that  he  atone  is  responsible  for  his  results.  Moreover,  that  Aemust  make 
the  picture  and  not  they. 

How  far  the  work  serves  these  three  ends  the  reader  must  judge  from  the  testimonials  below,  of  a 
few  of  those  who  have  been  using  our  little  publication  in  their  business. 

We  believe  it  will  pay  you  to  use  it,  and  that  you  will  assist  just  that  much  in  elevating  your  art  and 
your  craft,  an  object  which  we  are  all  working  for. 

We  get  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Pations"  up  in  neat  style,  on  the  best  letter  cap  paper,  assorted 
tints,  green,  pink,  and  buff.  Eight  pages  are  devoted  to  the  body  of  the  work,  which  contains  para- 
graphs or  chapters — 1,  on  the  object  of  the  work;  2,  on  photography  ;  3,  when  to  come  ;  4,  how  to 
come;  5,  how  to  dress;  6,  how  to  "behave;  7,  the  children  ;  8,  general  remarks  on  coloring,  copy- 
ing, frames,  prices,  &c. 

All  this  is  inclosed  in  a  cover  of  the  same  kind  of  paper,  the  pages  of  which  are  at  the  service  of 
the  photographer  who  orders  them  to  have  printed  thereon  anything  he  may  please,  which  printing 
we  do  without  extra  charge.      We  publish  this  leaflet  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 


Cuts  for  the  covers  we  supply  free. 


1000  copies,  cover  included, 
2000 


$20  00 
35  00 


3000  copies,  cover  included, 
5000   "     "     " 


$50  00 
75  00 


Over  500,000  have  been  sold. 
We  invite  you  to  examine  the  good  words  which  our  patrons  have  sent  us  concerning  this  publication. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"I  sent  one  out  West  to  a  friend,  and  she 
wrote  that  she  was  now  posted,  and  when  she 
came  here  to  have  a  picture  "\ade,  she  would 
come  'according  to  directions.'  >■' — A.  Bogar- 
dus,  New  York. 

"  A  grand  idea." — Elbert  Anderson. 

"  It  is  eagerly  sought  for  and  read  by  every- 
body who  visits  our  Gallery." — J.  Gurney  & 
Son,  New  York. 

"  It  assists  me  greatly." — James  Mullen, 
Lexington,  Ky. 

"  The  many  valuable  hints  in  it  cannot  fail  to 
be  beneficial  to  both  photographer  and  patron." 
— Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  W.  Virginia. 


"  You  have  conferred  a  great  favor  on  the  fra- 
ternity in  supplying  it,  and  we  hope  it  will  bene- 
fit some  of  the  '  know-everythings  '  in  this  quar- 
ter." — A.  C.  McIntyre  &  Co.,  Ogdensburg. 

' :  They  are  just  the  thing  to  post  people  upon 
what  they  ought  to  know  in  order  to  secure  good 
pictures." — J.  P.  Whipple,  White  Water. 

"  I  really  think  your  little  book  '  hits  the  nail 
on  the  head.'  " — J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

"It  is  the  best  advertising  medium  I  have 
ever  found." — H.  M.  Sedgewick,  Granville,  O. 

"  I  think  they  are  a  perfect  success,  and  will 
do  us  photographers  a  great  deal  of  good." — G 
W.  Mathis. 


We  will  send  samples  of  the  book,  and  special  rates,  to  any 
who  may  desire  it. 

BEKERMAN  &  WILSON",  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


0&  Wmfwum 


mmmm\m 


IN  EVERY  VARIETY. 


Nos.  419  &  421  BROOME  ST.,  NEW  YORK, 
No.  73  BOLD  STREET,  LIVERPOOL,  ENGLAND. 


DEALERS  SUPPLIED  WITH  THE  BEST  GOODS  ON  THE  BEST  TERMS. 


Our  own  extensive  facilities  for  manufacturing  enable  us  to  produce  first  quality  of  goods, 
and  our  extensive  connections  at  home  and  abroad  give  us  facilities  which  no  one  else  has. 


MANUFACTORIES :  (]^2|3jy?J^ 


SEE  OTHER  ADVERTISEMENTS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  BOOKS  and  MAGAZINES 


Examine  Scoyill's  Photographic  Clocks,  and  Real  the  Photographic  Times. 


THE  ZENTMAYER  LENS 

For  Views  and  Copying. 


These  Lenses  possess  pre-eminently,  the  following  qualities  : 

Width  of  visual  angle,  ranging  from  80°  to  90°;  depth  of  focus;  extreme  sharpness  over  the 
whole  field;  true  perspective;  freedom  from  all  distortion  in  copying  ;  portability  and  cheapness. 

Each  mounting  is  provided  with  a  revolving  Diaphragm,  containing  the  stops  of  the  different  com- 
binations for  which  they  are  designed.  The  larger  ones  are  provided  with  an  internal  shutter  for 
making  and  closing  the  exposure. 


No 

1, 

2* 

inch  focus, 

3 

X 

" 

2, 

3* 

" 

4 

X 

(i 

3, 

5* 

"        " 

6| 

X 

" 

4, 

8 

ii        i< 

10 

X 

" 

5, 

12 

ii        ii 

14 

X 

" 

6, 

18 

ii        ii 

20 

X 

3    plate, 

5 

8J 

12 
17 
24 


$20  00 
25  00 
30  00 
42  00 
60  00 
90  00 


No.  1  and  No.  2  combined, 

"  2    "      "    3 

i<  3     <<      i.    4 

i<  4    <<      i<    5 

i<  6    .<      «    6 

"  1,  2,  and  3,    " 

"  3,  4,  and  5,    " 


$33  00 
40  00 
55  00 
75  00 

110  00 
48  00 
88  00 


No.  3,  with  large  mounting  to  combine  with  No.  4  and  No.  5,  $35. 

No.  1  and  No.  2.  specially  adapted  for  Stereoscopic  Views,  are  furnished  in  matched  pairs.  No.  1 
and  No.  2,  single,  not  to  combine  with  other  sizes,  $36  a  pair. 

Lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six  combinations,  from  2£  to  18  inches,  $173. 

Zentmayer's  Stereoscopic  outfits,  including  a  pair  of  No.  2  Lenses  4x7  box,  7x10  India  Rubber 
Bath  and  Dipper,  Tripod,  Printing  Frames,  and  outside  box,  $60. 

JOSEPH  ZENTMAYER,  Manufacturer, 

147  South  Fourth  Street,  Philadelphia. 

STEREOSCOPIC   riEWS. 


Dealers  selecting  their  autumn  stock  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  would  do  well  to  examine  our 

unrivalled  variety  of  Views  of 

THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS, 

NIAGARA,   WASHINGTON, 

FAIBMOUNT  PARK,  PHILADELPHIA, 

FLOWERS,  GROUPS,  &c. 

AS-  QUAUITY  UNSURPASSED  ! 


KILBURN  BROS.,  Littleton,  New  Hampshire. 

NIAGARA 

STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS. 


Winter  and  Summer  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  of  all  sizes.     Trade  supplied  on  good  terms.     Variety 
unequalled. 

G.  E.  CURTIS,  Photographer, 

Niagara  Palls,  N.  T. 

Mr.  Curtis'  views  answer  Mr.  Robinson's  query  :   "Are  there  any  elouds  in  America?  " 


GERMAN  ALBUMEN  COLORS! 


JULIUS    KRUGER'S 
PATESfT    CfiM$»T    COS-OSSS, 

FOR  COLORING  PHOTOGRAPHS  ON  ALBUMEN  and  PLAIN  PAPER. 

These  colors  have  become  very  popular  in  Germany  and  France  (where  they  have  obtained  the 
highest  recommendations),  on  account  of  their  extraordinary  brilliancy,  evenness,  and  easy  application. 
They  can  be  used  on  Albumen  Paper,  and  are  without  doubt  the  best  that  have  been  offered  to  the 
public.     The  Colors  are  put  up  in  boxes  of  6,  12,  and  18. 

CEO.  RAU,  Sole  Agent, 

No.  922  Girard  Ave.,  Philadelphia. 

ZHZ^LIE,    lECILZBTTZRvlsr    &c    CO., 


Wholesale 


LOOKING 

GLASS  and 

PICTURE 
FRAMES. 

Patented  Solid 
Ovals  and  Spandrels 


WAEEROOMS, 

48&50NJM. 


3Ianufacturers  of 


Walnut 
Mouldings 

BACKING, 

&o.,  &c. 

Solid  Walnut  Work 
a  Specialty. 


FACTORIES, 

515  to  621  Filbert  St. 


The  undersigned,  having  purchased  the  entire  interest,  goodwill,  and  business  of 

Photo.  Materials  &  Picture  Frames 

OF  J.  HAWORTH, 

Desires  to  inform  his  friends  and  the  trade  generally,  that  he  will  continue  the  business,  as 

heretofore,  at  the  old  stand, 

624  ARCH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA, 

Where  he  hopes,  by  prompt  attention  and  fair  dealing,  to  merit  a  continuance  of  the  patron- 
age so  largely  given  to  the  late  firm. 

We  will  still  keep  a  well  assorted  stock  of 

PICTURE  FRAMES  (OVAL  AND  SQUARE), 

VELVET  CASES,   COLLODIONS, 

VARNISHES,  PURE  CHEMICALS,   &c, 

which  can  be  had  at  the  lowest  rates  ;  as  well  as 

PASSEPARTOUTS,    STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS   OF   ALI   PARTS    OF  THE  WORLD, 
STEREOSCOPIC  INSTRUMENTS,  Ac. 

We  also  have  a  full  line  of  CAMERAS  of  the  best  makes  and  latest  improvements, 
CAMERA  STANDS,  HEAD-RESTS,  BACKGROUNDS,  and  all  Accessories  necessary 
to  the  Photographic  Art.  We  would  call  the  attention  of  photographers  to  the  fact  that  we 
manufacture  SQUARE  FRAMES,  and  so  can  generally  ship  any  frames  (especially  odd 
sizes)  the  same  day  they  are  ordered.  We  would  also  call  attention  to  the  noted  ALBU- 
MEN PAPERS,  Morgan's  and  H.  Extra,  the  best  for  warm  weather,  for  which  I  am 
the  agent. 


THOMAS  H.  McCOLUN, 

Successor  to  Haworth  &  McCollin,  624  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


JACOBY'S 


AND 


Combination  Printing  Frame 

WITH  SELF-ADJUSTING  SPRING  BED,  CLAMPING  SPRINGS, 
VIGNETTING  ARRANGEMENTS, 

FOR  PORCELAIN  AND  CONTACT  PRINTING. 


Any  negative  may  be  used  with  success.  The  time  of  printing  is  the  same  as  in  common  printing, 
and  may  be  done  in  any  kind  of  weather.  Pictures  printed  with  this  frame  need  but  little  retouching, 
or  not  as  fine  retouching  to  get  the  finest  effects. 

I  need  not  comment  on  this  frame,  for  when  tried  will  prove  for  itself.  For  printing  on  the  Por- 
celain plate  it  is  best  and  a  success.  Having  a  self-adjusting  bed,  will  form  to  any  thickness  of  plate. 
For  common  printing  it  is  complete.  But  the  most  to  be  praised  is  the  Imitation  Porcelain  for  which  it 
is  invented,  which  all  prefer  to  the  genuine  Porcelain,  for  the  reason  they  can  be  sent  by  mail  and  will 
not  break.  They  are  printed  on  Albumen  Paper,  the  same  as  a  Card  Photograph,  and  when  framed 
in  a  velvet  Passepartout  can  scarcely  be  detected  from  the  genuine  Porcelain. 

I  have  used  one  of  these  frames  in  my  gallery  the  last  year,  charging  two  dollars  per  dozen  more 
for  this  kind  of  work.  All  of  my  patrons  prefer  this  to  the  porcelain,  and  find  no  fault  with  the  price. 
I  have  therefore  secured  a  patent,  and  propose  to  manufacture  and  put  them  in  the  market  for  sale, 
that  others  may  use  them.  I  feel  satisfied  that  by  trying  them  they  will  prove  satisfactory  ;  if  not, 
you  can  return  the  same  by  paying  charges. 

Specimens  published  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  in  the  April  and  October  numbers,  1873. 
Be  sure  and  see  them.      Stockdealers  will  be  supplied  from  the  factory  at  Minneapolis,  Minnesota. 


sizes    ^3L3\rx>    aniens, 

Frame  for  1-4  Negative,    ...      .  $4  00     I     Frame  for  6£  x  8J  Negative, 
5x7       "  ....      5  00     I  "  8x10 

Frame  for  11x14  Negative,     .     .     .     .     $6  25 


.  $5  50 
.     5  75 


Any  other  size  made  to  order.     Terms,    Cash  or  C.  0.  D.     Parties  not  finding  them  with  their 
Stockdealers  can  order  them  from 


P.  O.  Box  1758. 


W.  H.  JACOBY,  Minneapolis,  Minn. 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  CO.,  Trade  Agents. 


dl9  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 
*      * 


LINN'S   LOOKOUT 
LANDSCAPE   PHOTOGRAPHY 


P-H 

-=3 


■-d 


•—3 


YET  CONTAINING   MANY    USEFUL    HINTS    FOE  ALL    PHOTOGEAPHEES. 

By  the  Late  Prof.  R.  M.  LINN, 

LOOKOUT  MOUNTAIN,  TENN. 

This  admirable  little  work  was  published  last  fall,  a  little  too  late  for  the  season.  It  is 
now  confidently  recommended  to  every  photographer  about  to  do  any  class  of  work,  outside 
or  inside  the  skylight. 

CONTENTS. 


Introductory. 

Main  Requisites  of  a  Good  Photographic  Land- 
scape. 

Artistic  Effect. 

Proper  Illumination. 

Direction  of  Light. 

Clouds. 

Length  of  Exposure. 

Apparatus  for  Field  Work. 

On  the  Selection  of  View  Lenses. 

Camera  Boxes. 

Bath  Cups. 

Preliminary  Preparations. 

Taking  the  Field. 

Hints  on  Printing  and  Finishing. 

To  Print  Clouds. 

Toning  Bath  for  Views. 

On  Fixing  and  Washing  Prints. 

Suggestions  on  Mounting  Prints. 

To  Cut  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

To  Mount  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

Formulae  and  Processes  for  Landscape  Photog- 
raphy. 

Ever-ready  Iodizer  for  Landscape  Photography. 


Remarks  on  Preparing  and  Using  Iodizer. 

On  the  Management  of  Flowing  Bottles. 

On  the  Preparation  of  Plain  Collodion. 

The  Silver  Bath  for  Negatives. 

To  Renovate  an  Old  Negative  Bath. 

To  Prepare  Carbonate  of  Silver. 

Permanganate  of  Potash — Its  Use  in  our  Art. 

Preparation  and  Using  of  Developer. 

Fixing  Solution  for  View  Negatives. 

On  Redeveloping  and  Strengthening  Agents. 

To  Clean  and  Polish  the  Glass. 

To  Prepare  Chloride  of  Gold  Solution. 

The  Paste  for  Mounting  of  Photographs. 

The    Operator's    Oracle — Failures  :    Causes  and 

Remedies  ;  for  consultation  in  time  of  trouble. 
Counsels  and  Cautions  for  the  Printer,  including 

Formulae  for  Silvering  Bath,  Ac 
Failures  in  Silvering  Albumenized  Paper. 
Failures  in  Toning  Photographs. 
Failures  in  Fixing  Photographs. 
Instantaneous  Photography. 
View  Photography  Financially  Considered. 
Stereoseoping  Applied  to  Portraiture. 
Concluding  Remarks. 


PRICE,  75  CENTS. 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


MOULTON'S 


RAPID  PHOTO-WASHER. 


hi 

feq 

h 

s 

^ 

to 

<o 

fcs 

c^ 

fe*1 

s 

c^ 

fa 

* 

^ 
^ 

tb. 

b 

Patented  August  12th,  1873. 


Instead  of  soaking  the  Prints  it  applies  the  water  in  the  form  of  spray,  with  considerable 

force,  to  both  sides  of  the  paper  at  each  revolution,  or  from  one  hundred 

to  one-hundred-fifty  times  per  minute. 

Washes  with  exact  uniformity,  and  gives  more  brilliant  and  permanent  work ; 
is  simple,  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order,  and  will  last  a  life-time. 


Size  Cylinder, 

Diam.  16in.  Length  14  l-2in. 
"     20        "       19 
"     25        "       24 

Larger  sizes  may  follow. 


Capacity  in  Cards.  Largest  Print.  Price.  ■ 

84  14  by  17  ins.  $30 

144  18  by  22  "  40    ■ 

220  22  by  23  "  50 

«@~Liberal  discounts  to  dealers  and  agents. 


TESTIMONIALS  . 

"  I  write  to  testify  to  the  satisfaction  I  feel  with  the  working  of  your  Rapid  Print  Washer.  It  is  simply  per- 
fection, as  far  as  my  experience  with  it  goes,  viz :  One  year's  constant  use.  I  have  washed  eight  dozen  cartes  in 
ten  minutes,  and  the  most  accurate  test  I  know  of,  starch  and  iodine,  failed  to  show  a  trace  of  hypo,  remain- 
ing.'—L.  G.  Bigelow,  Detroit,  Mich.,  Feb.  10th,  1874. 

"  Time  saved  is  money  earned."  The  above  maxim  is  as  true  in  the  photographic  business  as  in  any  other, 
and  in  this  connection  I  would  say,  that  Moulton's  Rapid  Photo-Washer  will  save  more  time  in  any  well-regu- 
lated  gallery,  than  any  mechanism  ever  yet  invented  ;  besides  the  prints  finish  with  a  finer  lustre  than  those 
washed  by  any  other  device  I  have  ever  yet  seen.  Having  used  one  for  the  past  two  months,  washing  from  100 
to  300  prints  daily,  I  am  pleased  to  add  my  testimonial  to  its  excllence." — Wm.  M.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 
March  11th,  1874. 

ANALYSIS    OF    PRINTS. 

"After  analyzing  the  prints  which  were  washed  by  you  during  ten  minutes,  in  your  Rapid  Photo-Washer, 
and  those  furnished  by  an  artist  of  this  city,  washed  in  a  syphon  tank  in  running  water  for  one  hour  and  left  in 
the  water  over  night,  for  the  quantity  of  hyposulphites  left  therein,  I  take  pleasure  in  stating  that  the  prints 
treated  in  the  Rapid  Photo-Washer  contain  perceptibly  less  hyposulphites  than  those  washed  in  the  other  man- 
ner described." — Gustavus  Bode,  Analytical  Chemist,  and  Dealer  in  Photographic  Stock,  Milwaukee,  Feb.  21, 1874 


L  V.  MOULTON,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis. 


THE 

ALBION  ALBUMENIZING  CO. 

LONDON  AND  GLASGOW, 
Office,   No.   II    Brackenbury   Road,  Hammersmith,  London,) 

Request  American  Photographers  to  give  their 
Paper  a  fair  trial. 


THE  SEVEEAL  BEANDS  FOE  SALE  BY 


PHILADELPHIA,  PA., 

AND 

SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

4  BEEKMAN  STREET,  NEW  YORK. 


Marion  & Co.s  Specialties. 


ALBUMENIZED  PAPERS, 

Used  by  the  best  English  and  Colonial  photographers  ;  Wilson,  of  Aberdeen ;  Vandyke 
&  Brown,  Liverpool ;  Notman,  Montreal ;  Bourne  &  Shepherd,  India ;  and  hundreds  of 
others. 

MOUNTS 

For  Cartes-de-Visite,  Cabinet,  and  larger  sizes,  of  the  very  best  style  and  quality,  as  made 
for  the  leading  English  and  Colonial  photographers.  "We  will  post  samples  free  to  any 
photographer  on  receipt  of  application. 

GILT  AND  SILVER  ORMOLU  METAL  FRAMES, 

For  Miniatures,  Cartes-de-Visite,  and  Cabinets. 

PHOTOGRAPHS. 

The  largest  and  best  selected  stock  in  Great  Britain.  Upwards  of  1000  copies  of 
Modern  Paintings,  artistically  colored  in  water  colors;  English  and  Continental  Photogra- 
phic Views ;  the  principal  Picture  Galleries  ;  Portraits  of  Eminent  Personages ;  over  300,- 
000  in  stock. 

MARION  &  CO.,  22  &  23  Soho  Square,  LONDON,  ENGLAND. 


A  SPLENDID,  USEFUL  BOOK. 

OUR  LAST  AND  NEWEST  PUBLICATION. 


I>  FL.   VOGB 


PHOTOGRAPHER'S 


POCKET 


MJiraTMJ 


|W« 


%M 


raj 


An  Alphabetically  arranged  collection  of  practically  important  hints  on  the  construction 
of  the  Gallery  ;  selection  and  trial  of  lenses  and  chemicals  ;  approved  formulae  for  the  differ- 
ent photographic  processes ;  tables  of  weights  and  measures  ;  rules  for  avoiding  failure,  etc., 
etc.',  for 

Photographers  and  Amateurs, 

IS  RECEIVING  THE  HIGHEST  PEAISE  WHEREVER  IT  GOES. 


IT  IS  A  BOOK  EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER  SHOULD  HAVE, 

Because  it  is  a  ready  helper  under  all  difficult  circumstances. 


Extract  from  the  Minutes  of  the  Chicago  Photographic  Association. 

"Messrs.  Hall  and  Hesler  spoke  in  most  flattering  terms  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Pocket  Reference- Booh,  of 
its  great  value  to  every  photographer,  and  expressed  the  hope  that  it  may  soon  be  found  in  every 
gallery." 

There  is  hardly  a  matter  occurring  in  your  daily  work  which  it  does  not  throw  light  upon 
and  make  easy.     Examine  it  for  yourself. 


For  sale  by  all  dealers.    Price,  $1.50,  post-paid. 

BBNEBMAN&  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


A  NEW 
IKTVOICE 

JUST    RECEIVED 

OF 


LOESCHER  &  PETSCH'S 

ADMIRABLE 

STUDIES! 

The  praise  which  has  been  bestowed  upon  these  pictures,  particularly  at  the  Vienna  Exhibition,  convinces  us 
that  they  should  be  treasured  as  suitacle  models  of  pose  and  lighting  of  the  sitter,  harmonious  and  artistic  arrangement  of 
furniture,  etc.  These  photographs  are  the  only  European  ones  for  which  the  international  jury  awarded  the  two 
medals  for  progress  and  taste,  Mr.  Lewitzky,  a  photographer,  and  member  of  the  jury,  exclaimed:  "  The  exhi- 
bition of  Messrs.  Loesciier  &  Petsch:  has  charmed  me;  according  to  my  opinion,  Loeschee  &  Petsch,  in 
Europe,  and  Kurtz,  in  New  York,  are  the  first  photographers  of  the  world !" 

We  will  Express  the  sett  on  receipt  of  $30  ;  or  post  them  at  your  risk  to  any  address.  The  price  is  remarka- 
bly low,  as  each  print  is  most  carefully  made. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Sis..  Philadelphia. 

4@=  See  review  of  these  pictures  in  the  "  Philadelphia  Photographer  "  for  December,  1873. 

The  Universal 


EMBOSSING    PATENTED   JANUARY    9,  1872. 

This  Precs  will  cameo  all  sizes,  from  cards  to  cabinets,  and  is  sold  lower  than  any  other  that  will  do 
the  same  work.     It  has  been  greatly  improved  and  made  very  complete  in  all  its  parts. 

PRICE,  S16.SO. 

MANUFACTURED  AND  SOLD  WHOLESALE   AND  RETAIL  BY 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO.,  822  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 

Q^p"  CAUTION. — Photographers  are  cautioned  against  buying  other  presses  that  may  use  an  elastic 
embossing  substance,  as  they  are  an  infringement  on  the  above.  R.  J.  Chute,  Patentee. 


NEWELL'S 

IMPROVED  BATH  HOLDER 


ACKNOWLEDGED  TO  BE 


THE    BEST    IN    THE    WORLD 


READ  THE  LATEST  TESTIMONIALS: 

Messrs.  R.  Newell  &  Son.  Boston,  Mass.,  March  30,  1874. 

Dear  Sirs  :  In  answer  to  your  letter  of  inquiry,  as  to  how  I  like  the  Bath  Holder,  I  have  delayed 
answering  that  I  might  have  time  to  thoroughly  test  it.  I  find  it  in  every  way  first-rate ;  does  not 
injure  the  bath,  is  light  and  of  convenient  shape,  and  is  altogether  the  best  holder  I  have  used. 
Hoping  you  will  meet  with  success  in  the  sale  of  the  article,  I  remain, 

Yours  truly.  A.  Marshall,  147  Tremont  Street. 


Messrs.  R.  Newell  &  Son. 


Albany,  N.  Y.,  March  25,  1874. 


Gents  :  The  28  x  28  Bath  works  splendid,  and  I  must  say  the  system  of  making  baths  of  wood 
and  coating  them  with  your  composition  has  supplied  a  want  long  needed  by  the  practical  photog- 
rapher, as  large  glass  baths  are  always  dangerous.  Very  truly, 

E.  S.  M.  Hains,  45  North  Pearl  Street. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  F/RST-CLASS  STOCKDEALERS. 


SOUTHERN 

Photographic™  Ferrotype 

STOCK  DEPOT, 
Savannah,  Geo. 


FIRST-CLASS  STOCK 

AT  NORTHERN  PRICES, 


CROSSCUPkWEST.PHA 


Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance, 
Drayage,  &e. 


SBITD     FOB    IFIE^ICIE     LIST. 


LONDON     1851. 


PARIS    1867. 


ROSS' 


PORTRAIT 


.A.  1ST  ID 


VIEW  LENSES 


We  have  now  successfully  introduced  to  the  American  Photographers  the  Ross  Lens,  and  by  our 
increased  sales  we  know  they  are  appreciated.  At  the  convention  held  at  Buffalo,  July  15,  many  fine 
photographs  were  exhibited  by  photographers,  and  ourselves,  made  with  the  Ross  Lens,  which 
attracted  great  attention. 

While  Ross  &  Co.  are  the  oldest  manufacturers  of  Photographic  Lenses  in  existence,  they  also 
keep  up  with  the  requirements  of  the  fraternity,  by  constantly  manufacturing  new  combinations  and 
improving  on  those  already  in  existence.  They  have  lately  perfected,  and  will  soon  furnish  us  stock 
of,  a  new  series  of  Card  Lenses,  extra  rapid,  peculiarly  adapted  for  babies,  and  people  who  will  not  be 
quiet.      We  will  give  notice  of  their  arrival. 

WE  HAVE  NOW  IN  STOCK 

PORTRAIT  LENSES,  from  1-4  to  15  x  18. 

CABINET  LENSES,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3. 

CARD  LENSES,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3. 

TRIPLETS,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7. 
INSTANTANEOUS  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

MEDIUM  ANGLE  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

LARGE  ANGLE  DOUBLETS,  all  sizes. 

STEREOGRAPHIC  LENSES,  all  sizes. 

Numerous  testimonials  pronounce  them  to  be  the  best,  as  well  as  the  cheapest  Foreign  Lens  ever 
offered  to  the  American  Photographer. 

We  will  mail  price-list  on  application,  and  promptly  fill  all  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  States, 

822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


C0¥I4£ 


MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

Nos.  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 

WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  STOCK 


BBALEBS  SUPPLIED 

On  the  Most  Advantageous  Terms,  with 

EVERY  ARTICLE  IN  THE  WORLD 

Used  or  sold  in  the  Art  of  Photography. 


Our  facilities  are  such  that  we  cannot  be  superseded  by  any 
other  house  anywheres.  We  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to 
deal  with  us. 


ASK  YOUR  DEALER  TOR  SCOVILL'S  GOODS. 


Removed  to  New  Store,  419  &  421  Broome  St. 

^SeeT^:Z—lB  "PHOTOGRAPHIC  TIMES." 


Nearly  all  Gone! 

PHOTOGRAPHIC 


FOR  1874. 


EDITED  BY  EDWARD  U  WILSON. 


This  favorite    annual  is   -wholly    filled   with   Articles  prepared   expressly  for 
it  by  the  eminent  photographers  of  Europe  and  America,  and  is 

UNUSUALLY   GOOD! 


BEAD   THE  CONTENTS: 


1873  ;  On  the  Sensitiveness  of  Bromide  of  Sil- 
ver ;  Toning  and  Fixing;  Is  Honesty  the  Best 
Policy?  Transparent  Paper;  Growing;  A  New 
Test  for  Hyposulphite  of  Sodium  ;  Chemical 
Manipulation  and  Collodion ;  How  to  Buy  a 
Lens;  Copying  of  Every  Description  Executed 
in  the  Highest  Style  of  the  Art;  Expression; 
The  Reception-Room  ;  Treatment  of  Prints  after 
Toning;  Public  Taste;  Plate  Vise;  Progress  of 
Photography  in  America  ;  How  to  be  a  Photog- 
rapher of  the  Times  ;  The  Uncertainties  of  Pho- 
tography ;  Exploration  Field  Photography  ;  How 
to  Make  Varnish  for  Negatives,  and  How  to 
Varnish  Them;  Porcelain  Printing;  How  to 
Elevate  Our  Art ;  Lighting  for  Portraits  ;  Some- 
thing Practical;  Photographs;  Negative  Var- 
nish ;  Lighting  the  Sitter  ;  Photographic  Excel- 
lence ;  On  Certain  Causes  of  Failure  and  Success 
in  Photography;  Negative  Retouching;  The 
Roller  Press  and  Burnisher;  Recovery  of  Gold 
and  Silver  from  the  Waste  or  Spent  Solutions ; 


Concerning  Formulas ;  Notes  on  Photographic 
Subjects ;  Hints  on  Photographic  Printing  ; 
Things  which  Hurt ;  Collodion  Transfers  ;  Along- 
side ;  A  Chapter  on  Practical  Matters;  What  to 
do  with  Negative  Baths  which  have  been  Ren- 
dered Unserviceable  by  Constant  Usage;  Photo- 
graphic Literature  ;  Influence  of  Long  and  Short 
Exposures  upon  the  Brilliancy  of  the  Pictures  ; 
Wet-Plate  Photography  Out  of  Doors;  Sandarac 
and  Benzoin  Varnish  ;  On  Printing,  and  How  to 
do  it ;  Cleansing  a  Discolored  Printing  Bath  ; 
On  the  Double  Iodides  and  Bromides,  ami  How 
to  Prepare  Them  ;  Backgrounds:  Mr.  Faulkner's 
Method  of  Making  Them  ;  A  Practical  Sugges- 
tion for  Stereo-Landscape  Negatives;  Preparing 
Photographs,  etc.,  for  Coloring;  No  More  Pin- 
Holes;  Successive  Development;  The  Green- 
Glass  Question  ;  Backgrounds  ;  Transparencies 
for  the  Stereoscope  ;  Lantern  Pictures  ;  The 
Dark-Room  ;  Photographing  in  Hot  Climates; 
Many  Mites  from  Many  Minds. 


Price,  in  Cloth,  $1.00 ;  in  Paper  Cover,  50  Cents. 


The  Best  Little  Handbook  of  Photography  in  the  World.       For  Sale  by  all  Dealers. 


BENEJZMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


GEAND   MEDAL  OF  MERIT, 

AWARDED  AT  VIENNA    TO 


SEND    FOR    A    CATALOGUE. 


Charles  Bierstadt, 


LANDSCAPE 
PHOTOGRAPHER, 

Trade  supplied  with  the  best  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  Hudson  River,  Saratoga,  Partage, 
New  Tork,Watkins'  Glen,  Havana  Glen,  California,  Yosemite  Valley,  Rogers'  Statuary,  &c. 


Niagara  Falls,  IN.  Y. 


LIESEGANG'S  ALBUMEN  PAPER 

Is  used  and  recommended  by  the  London  Stereoscopic  Company  ;  Messrs.  Alessandri  Fratelli, 
of  Rome  ;  Le  Lieure,  of  Rome  ;  A.  Sorgato,  of  Venice  ;  Fr.  Bruckmann,  of  Munich  ;  C.  lleut- 
linger,  of  Paris ;  C.  Bergamasio,  of  Petersburg ;  Abdullah,  of  Constantinople ;  and  many 
other  first  class  photographers  throughout  the  World. 

IT  IS  THE  BEST  PAPER  IN  THE  MARKET. 

Sample  sheets,  and  English,  French,  and  German  Price  List  to  be  had  free  on  application 
from  the  Manufacturer. 


DUSSELDORF    ON    THE    RHINE,    GERMANY, 


(FORMERLY  AT  ELBERFELD). 


For  Sale  by  SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  New  York. 


SWELLEirS 


WmWi 


F.  G.  WELLER,  PUBLISHER  OF  STEREOSCOPIC  VIEWS 

OF  THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS  AND  VICINITY  AND  MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS, 

LITTLETON,  N.   IT. 

SPECIALTY:  WELLER'S  STEREOSCOPIC  TREASURES,  which  embrace  a  series  o  subject  pic- 
tures from  nature,  such  as  are  not  made  by  any  other  artist  in  the  country.  New  subjects  added  contiuually. 
Dealers  and  jobbers  supplied  on  favorable  terms. 


POWERS     &     WEI6HTMAN, 


E-h 


•0     mi 


era 


MANUFACTURING  CHEMISTS, 


Offer  to  Stockdealers 
A  full  Assortment  of  Reliable 


Photographic  Chemicals 


Of  their  own  Manufacture, 
including  : 


Nitrate  of  Silver,  Sulphuric  Ether  (concentrated),  Ammonia  (concentrated), 
Bromide  of  Potassium,  Acetic  Acid,  Chemically  Pure  Acids, 
Iron  and  Ammonia  Proto-Sulphate,  Chloride  of  Gold, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  Sulphate  of  Iron,  Cyanide  of  Potassium, 
Chloroform,  Tannin,  Sulphuret  of  Potassium. 

GEORGE   ROTTER  &  CO., 

DRESDEN,  GERMANY, 

MANUFACTURERS   OP 

ALBUMEN    PAPERS. 

Eives  and  Steinbach;  Light  and  Heavy;  White,  Pink,  and  Blue. 

Our  excellent  Albumen  Papers  to  which  the  first  premium,  the  silver  medal,  was  awarded  at  the 
Photographic  Exhibition  at  Hamburg,  1868,  both  single  and  double  albumenized,  can  be  worked  suc- 
cessfully by  any  formula  in  use.  It  prints  and  tones  rapidly,  producing  faithfully  the  finest  effects  of 
the  negatives.  Even  with  a  slight  silvering,  in  a  completely  neutral  silver  bath  (1  :  15-20),  they  pro- 
duce in  the  gold  bath  a  rich,  succulent,  and  warm  tone.  We  warmly  recommend  them  to  all  photo- 
graphic stockhouses. 

LiC 


The  subscriber  desires  to  call  attention  to  an  Entirely  New  Style  of  Carved  Frame, 
unique,  handsome,  and  stylish,  and  very  becoming  to  photographs,  which  he  is  now  manu- 
facturing, and  will  furnish  at  the  following  prices: 


4x5      @  $6  00  per  doz. 

8  x  10    (3>,  $15  00  per  doz. 

12x16    @  $30  00  per  doz 

5^x73^@    9  00 
6^x8^  @  12  00        " 

9x11    @     15  00 

13x17    @    36  00        " 

10x12    @     18  00        " 

16x20    @    42  00        " 

7x9     @  12  00        " 

11x14    @    24  00     ■    " 

Larger  sizes  $3.00  per  dozen  for  each  additional  four  inches  or  less  in  length  and  breadth. 
Sample  of  each  size,  except  the  two  smallest,  sent  on  receipt  of  price.  Orders  for  one  dozen 
or  more  filled  C.O.I),  if  ten  per  cent,  is  sent  with  order. 

H.  H.  SNELLiNC,  Newburgh,  N.  Y. 


TO   PEOFBSSIONAL   PHOTOGRAPHERS    AND   THE   TRADE. 


CH.    DAUVOIS, 

Acknowledged  to  be  the  Best  and  Cheapest  in  the  World. 


No.  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris, 


ESPECIAL    MANUFACTURERS    OP 


MOUNTSo&FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


TRADE    MARK,    Ch.D. 


Mounts  for  Cartes-de-Visite, 
Cabinet  Portrait, 
Victoria  Card, 

Stereoscopic  Views — all  new  samples  of  French 
styles. 


Bristol  Boards  of  every  size  and  thickness,  plain. 

India  Tinted  and  Fancy  Printing. 

Book-post  and  Card  Cases. 

Stout  Blotting  Paper  Albums. 

First-class  Kives  Albumenized  Paper,  Ac,  Ac. 


MEDALS  AWARDED  AT  EVERY  EXHIBITION. 

All  orders  are  to  be  sent  to  their  establishment,  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris,  or  to  Wholesale  Houses 
of  the  United  States.     Samples  on  application. 

LIBERAL  DISCOUNT  TO  WHOLESALE  HOUSES. 


TRY    IT    AND    BE    CONVINCED. 


The  best  COLLODION  in  use  is 

LEWIS  &  HOLT'S  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE, 

Sold  tvith  a  Printed  Formula  accompanying  each  Bottle. 

Being  among  the  first  in  this  country  to  make  Collodion  Pictures,  they  can  warrant  it  to  be  one 

of  the  best  in  use. 

ALSO,  THEIR 

ADAMANTINE  TARNISH  for  Airotjp,  Negatives,  aid  Melaieotps. 

This  Varnish,  when  applied  to  Negatives,  dries  in  a  few  seconds  perfectly  hard,  and  does  not  lower  the 
intensity,  or  soften  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  in  Printing.  It  gives  a  beautiful  gloss  and  brilliancy  to 
Ambrotypes.    For  Sale  by  Stockdealers  generally.    Prepared  by  B,    A    LEWIS 

160  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

HEADQUARTERS     FOR    THE     TRADE. 

Show  Displayers,  Velvet  Stands, 

Velvet  Passepartouts,         Velvet  Cases, 
Beveled  Matts,  Double  Matts, 

Fancy  Metal  Frames,  Standard  Matts, 

Fancy  Paper  Passepartouts. 

These  goods  are  entirely  of  our  own  manufacturing.  A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand  ;  odd 
sizes  and  styles  made  to  order. 

LEWIS  PATTBEBG  &  BBO.,  709  (8fiftS)  Broadway,  New  York. 


SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT. 


ALL  PERSONS  ARE  HEREBY  NOTIFIED,  and  cautioned  against  infringing  my  Solar  Camera 
Patent. 

Infringers  will- settle  with   H.  L.  Emmons,   Attorney-at-Law,   Baltimore,   Md. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD, 

Baltimore,  Md, 

GEO.    KNELL, 

MANUFACTURER  OF 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  POSING  CHUBS  MD  LOUNGES,  L 

ALSO, 

SOFA-BEDS,  and  all  kinds  of  ADJUSTABLE  CHAIRS, 

ALWAYS  ON  HAND, 
No.  155  NORTH  FOURTH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 

trm^^mmm-f<—^^^^^—~~—r——  I...II.IM..III.I1.IIII. .in  iiiiiiiiiim  | IIIIHIIMI 

enlaBGEmEN    J.    fe 

IDE  BY  THE  SOUR  CAMERA, 

AND  COPYING  DONE,  FOR  THE  TRADE. 


18  SOLAR   CAMERAS. 


EXPEDITIOUS.  ^^JSSftZS&Sr*'.    EXCELLENT 

ALBERT   MOORE, 

No.  828  Wood  Street,  Philadelphia. 


Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 

EGQSHELL,  GLOSSY,  CHOCOLATE-TINTED. 

(PATENTED  MARCH  1st,  1870.) 

ALL  SIZES,  FEOM  1-9  to  10x14.  BLACK  AND  CHOCOLATE. 

THE  PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Worcester,  Mass., 

ARE  NOW  MAKING  THE  MOST  POPULAR  BRAND  OF  PLATES  IN  THE  TRADE. 


Per  Box  of  8  Doz. 


PRICE 

Eggshell.   Glossy. 
$0.90 


IjIST 


Size 

1-9  $0.80  $0.90  Per  Box  of  2  Doz. 

1-6  1.25        1.35  "  4     " 

1-4  1.85        2.00  "  2     " 

4Jx6J  1.85  2.00  "            2     " 

1-2  2.20  2.35  Per  Sheet, 

4JxlO  2.20  2.35 

Eetised,  New  York,  December  28th,  1872. 


Size.     Eggshell,   Glossy 


4-4 

5-7 

7-10 

8x10 

10x14 


52.40 
2.40 
2.70 
2.70 
.14 


&2.70 
2.70 
2.90 
2.90 
.15 


EGGSHELL,    GLOSSY,    AND    CHOCOLATE-TINTED   PLATES,    ALL    SIZES   AND    STYLES, 
ALWAYS    ON    HAND    AND   READY   FOR   DELIVERY. 

Each  package  of  Phenix  Plates  has  printed  on  the  wrapper,  ''Manufactured 

by  the  Phenix  Plate  Co.,  Worcester,  Mass.,"  and  none 

are  genuine  unless  bearing  that  stamp. 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  constitu- 
ting them  our  sole  and  exclusive  agents  for  the  sale  of  our  Plates. 

That  company  is  so  well  and  favorably  known  in  the  business,  that  no  com- 
mendation of  ours  is  required  to  assure  the  Trade  that  they  will  be  liberally 
dealt  with  in  every  respect. 

Phenix  Plates  are  for  sale  by  all  Stock  Dealers  throughout  tbe  country. 

PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Manufacturers, 

Worcester,  Mass. 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  Apts  for  tie  Me,  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  N.  Y. 


The  publishers  of  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER,  encouraged  by  the 
growing  interest  taken  in  their  PKEMIUM  LIST,  by  operators,  printers,  employees,  etc., 
offer  the  following 

PREMIUMS  FOR  1874, 

FOR  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS 


CONDITIONS!  These  premiums  are  only  given  to  old  or  present  subscribers  for 
new  ones.     No  premium  will  be  given  you  on  your  own  renewal. 


WE  WILL  GIVE  FOE  THREE  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  (IN  ADDITION  TO 
YOUR  OWN),  FOR  ONE  YEAR, 

Vols.  I  &  II  of  the  Photographic  World ! 


TWO  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  FOR  ONE  YEAR, 


Either  Volume  I  or  II  of  the  Photographic  World, 


Or  your  choice  of  the  following  :  $1  on  each  per  year,  payable  in  any  of  our  publications, 
not  in  cash;  i.  e.,  $10  will  secure  our  Magazine  for  one  year  to  an  OLD  subscriber,  to  a  new  one, 
and  one  dollar's  worth  of  our  other  publications. 

Any  enterprising  operator  can,  by  writing  a  few  letters  and  a  little  effort,  secure  enough 
new  subscribers  to  pay  for  his  own,  and  fit  him  out  with  our  whole  list  of  premiums,  or  a 
set  of  the  six  Luckhardt  pictures.     (See  special  advertisement.) 

This  magnificent  offer  was  never  equalled  by  any  publisher,  photographic  or  otherwise. 
Strive  hard  to  win  the  whole  ! 

Please  examine  the  order  blanks  in  this  number,  and  send  for  more  if  you  wish  them. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts-,  Philadelphia. 


THE 

Philadelphia  Photographer  for  1874 ! 

Tho  increasing  favor  shown  the  publishers  of  this  Magazine  during  the  first  ten  years  of  its  life, 
has  given  them  the  means  to  prepare  for  their  intelligent  patrons  still  greater  attractions  than 
ever  for  the  year  1874.     The  old  staff  of  regular  contributors  will  be  continued. 

A  series  of  illustrated  descriptive  articles  on 

PHOTOGRAPHY   IN    FRANCE, 

which  will  include  descriptions  of  all  the  leading  photographic  studios  and  factories  in  France,  are 
being  contributed  bjr  Mons   Ernest  Lacan,  Secretary  of  the  French  Photographic  Society. 
One  of  a  series  of  handsomely  illustrated  articles,  entitled 

VIEWS    ABROAD    AND    ACROSS, 

by  the  editor,  including  sketches  of  matters  and  things  photographic,  made  during  a  tour  in  Eng- 
land, Ireland,  Scotland,  France,  Belgium,  Prussia,  Austria,  Italy,  and  Switzerland,  will  be  in  each 
number  during  the  year ;  a  continuation  of  the  articles  on  the  study  of  art;  fresh  and  original 
papers  by  old  and  new  contributors,  &c,  &c. 

DURING   1874, 

No  photographic  artist  should  fail  to  subscribe  for  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGPvAPHER. 
It  is  going  to  be  one  of  the  most  eventful  years  ever  known  in  the  art,  for 

TWO  GREAT  PATENT  CONTESTS, 

now  under  way — the  "Shaw"  patent  and  the  Sliding  Plate-holder  patent — both  of  vital  impor- 
tance to  the  craft,  will  take  place,  and  all  should  be  posted  on  them  as  they  proceed.  The  fullest 
and  earliest  information  will  be  given  in  this  Magazine. 

THE  PPvOCEEDINGS  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC  ASSOCIATION  are 
only  given  entire  in  one  number  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

THE  EMBELLISHMENTS  FOR  THE  NEXT  FEW  MONTHS 

will  be  from  the  Gold  Medal  Prize  Negatives  by  Messrs.  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  Barhydt,  Mosher, 
Gutekunst,  Hardy,  and  others,  and  will  be  unusually  excellent  and  choice,  illustrating  all  branches 
of  photography,  and  introducing  very  useful  studies.  Also,  splendid  pictures  from  Messrs  J.  H. 
Kent  and  Alva  Pearsall,  to  be  followed  by  the  competitors  for  the  foreign  and  for  the  Landscape 
Gold  Medal  Prizes  offered  by  us. 

•    THEY  ALONE  WILL  BE  WORTH  THE  COST  OF  SUBSCRIPTION. 

ILLUSTRATIONS,  by  means  of  engravings,  cuts,  &c,  are  profusely  employed,  and  every  effort 
is  made  to  secure  to  the  readers  of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer 

The  Most  Elegant  and  Useful  Photographic  Magazine  in  the  "World! 

To  Employees,  Employees,  &c.  ;  Please  read  our  liberal  offer  of 

PEEMIUMS  ON  THE  OPPOSITE  PAGE 


NOTICE   TO    SUBSCRIBERS. 


Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2  50  for  six  months,  50  cents  per  copy.     Positively  in  advance. 

In  remitting  by  mail  a  post-office  order,  or  draft  payable  to  the  order  of  Benerman  &  Wilson,  is 
preferable  to  bank  notes.     Clearly  give  your  Post-office,  County,  and  State. 

Canada  subscribers  must  remit  24  cents  extra,  to  prepay  postage.  Foreign  subscriptions  must  be 
accompanied  by  the  postage  in  addition. 

Advertising  sheets  are  bound  with  each  number  of  the  Magazine.  Advertisements  are  inserted 
at  the  following  rates : 

One  Month.  Six  Months.  One  Year. 

One  Page, $20  00  $110  00  $200  00 

Half    "      12  00  66  00  120  00 

Quarter  Page, 7  00  38  50  70  00 

Eighth        "      4  00  22  00  40  00 

Cards,  of  Six  lines  or  less, 2  00  11  00  20  00 

The  attention  of  advertisers,  and  those  having  galleries,  &c,  for  sale,  is  called  to  our  Specialties 
pages.  Terms  $2  for  six  lines,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a  line,  always 
in  advance.  Duplicate  insertions,  50  cents  less,  each.  Sure  to  pay.  jgg^Operators  desiring  situa- 
tions, no  charge. 

BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

OFFICE,  S.  W.  COR.  OF  SEVENTH  AND  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


ENTREKIN'S 

OSCILLATING  ENA 


BURNISHING 
PHOTOGRAPHS, 


Far    superior    to    any-  = 
thing    yet   invented    for  % 
that  purpose. 


BEAUTIFUL 

& 


Every     Machine     war- 
gy"-    ranted  perfect. 


The  Oscillating  Enameler  is  constructed  on  scientific  principles,  and  in  the  operation  of  burnishing  the 
roll  and  burnisher  both  move,  giving  a  combined  action  on  the  face  of  the  photograph,  and  producing  a  fine 
finisb  with  a  very  light  pressure,  so  that  enameled  mounts  can  be  burnished,  as  well  as  plain  mounts.  This 
fact  alone  makes  the  Enameler  superior  to  all  other  machines  for  burnishing  photographs.  The  reason  why 
it  is  the  best,  the  double  action  of  roll  and  burnisher  prevents  the  card  from  sticking  on  the  burnisher;  it 
also  prevents  the  burnisher  from  scratching  the  albumen  off  the  face  of  the  picture  and  spoiling  it,  as  is  the 
case  in  similar  machines.  The  oscillating  motion  of  the  burnisher  feeds  the  card  and  keeps  the  burnisher 
polished.  Equal  pressure  at  both  ends  of  the  burnisher  is  another  great  advantage,  which  prevents  the 
card  from  turning  while  in  the  operation  of  burnishing,  as  is  the  case  in  other  machines.  The  mechanism  of 
the  pressure  is  certain,  and  can  be  operated  in  an  instant  correctly. 

The  removable  burnisher  is  another  great  advantage,  giving  the  photographer  the  opportunity  of  having 
several,  so  that  if  one  becomes  injured  it  can  immediately  be  removed  and  replaced  with  another  one  causing 
no  delay.    SOLD  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

PRICE    LIST: 

6inchRoll,$25;  10  inch,  $40;  14  inch,  $50;  18  inch,  $75. 

Office  of  C.  M.  Parks,  Late  Principal  Examiner  in  the  Patent  Office, 
William  G.  Entrekin.  "    .  Washington,  December  12th,  1873. 

Dear  Sir  :  I  am  familiar  with  the  class  of  machines  to  which  your  Photographic  Burnisher  relates, 
as  I  was  examiner  of  that  class  of  inventions  in  the  United  States  Patent  Office  for  some  time,  and  have 
had  occasion  to  keep  myself  posted  in  regard  to  them  since,  and  believe  your  Burnisher  is  the  very  best 
in  existence,  embracing  all  the  features  necessary  to  make  a  complete  polished  surface  upon  a  photo- 
graph, and  also  believe  the  time  will  come  when  every  photographer  of  any  pretensions  will  be  com- 
pelled to  use  one.     I  predict  for  you  success  in  your  patent.  Yours  truly, 

C.  M.  Parks,  Solicitor  of  Patents. 

Oflace  of  C.  M.  Parks,  Solicitor  of  Patents,  428  Seventh  Street 
Wm.  G.  Entrekin.  Washington,  D.  C,  January  5th,  1874. 

Dear  Sir  :  Yours  is  just  received.  You  need  not  fear  any  trouble  from  any  parties  in  regard  to 
other  machines  ;  your  Burnisher  does  not  infringe  with  any  feature  of  any  other  machine  in  the  least 
particular.     You  can,  therefore,  manufacture  and  sell  yours  with  impitnity. 

Yours  truly,  C.  M.  Parks. 


D^-  WE 


CAtttOl 


All  photographers  not  to  be  frightened  out  of  purchasing  our  superior  "Oscillating  Enameler  for 
Burnishing  Photographs."  We  simply  defy  any  party  or  parties  to  interfere  with  us  in  the  manufae 
ture  or  sale  of  said  machine,  for  which  we  hold  letters  patent  for  seventeen  years,  in  the  United  States 
and  Territories.  We  will  guarantee  protection  to  every  purchaser.  We  shall  sell  to  the  fraternity  a 
good  machine  at  a  fair  price.  Photographers  can  buy  direct  from  us,  if  they  cannot  procure  them  of 
their  dealers. 

D^*  Pay  no  attention  to  the   "CAUTIONS''   of  other  parties,  who  intimate  that  our  machine 
infringes  theirs.     Examine,  and  buy  the  best. 

W.  G.  ENTKEKIN,  Patentee, 

4382  &  4384  Main  St.,  Manayunlc,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


Address  ALL  Communications,  both  for  the  Editor  and  the  Publishers,  to  Sherman's 
Building,  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Number  127. 


50  Cents. 


THE 


PHILADELPHIA 


It0t00r»#lm\ 


AN  ILLUSTRATED  MONTHLY  JOURNAL,     ' 
DEVOTED  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


THE  OFFICIAL  ORGAN  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC 
ASSOCIATION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. 


T   TX   1  y,      1   3  "Z   4. 


PHILADELPHIA: 
BENEEMAN    &     WILSON, 

PUBLISHEKS. 


Subscriptions  received  by  all  News  and  Stock-Dealers. 

FIVE  DOLLARS  PER  ANNUM,  IN  ADVANCE. 


Sherman  &  Co.,  Printers,  Philadelphia. 


SOMETHING   NEW!     See  Advertisement  inside. 


SUMMARY    OP    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Once  More  Then— Chicago....; 193 

An  Excellent  Work  on  Photographic  Printing 193 

Soap  and  Alcohol 196 

Rallying  Words.    By  G.  H.  Loomis 196 

Views  Abroad  and  Across.    By  Edward  L.  Wilson,  197 

Photography  in  France.    By  Ernest  Lacan 202 

A  Few  Useful  Hints.    By  R.  Benecke 204 

Our  Prize  Picture 205 

Matters  of  the  N.  P.  A 209 

Artistic  Photography.    By  C.  D.  Mosher 209 

Hints  Under  the  Skylight.    By  R.  J.  Chute 210 


PAGE 

Outdoor  Work  on  the  Pacific  Coast,    By  J.  J.  Reilly,  211 

A  Convenient  Dark-Tent.    By  T.  C.  Harris 212 

The  Transit  of  Venus 213 

Class  in  Landscape  Photography 214 

How  to  Avoid  Unnecessary  Waste  in  Silver 216 

German  Correspondence.    By  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  Ph.D. ..  217 

Society  Gossip 219 

The  New  Enameled  Souvenir  Photograph 222 

Further  about  the  Southworth-Wing  Patent 222 

Editor's  Table 223 


Embellishment.— The  Gold  Medal  Prize  Picture.    Negatives  by  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 
Prints  by  Wm.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia.    Burnished  by  Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s  Paper. 
Anderson,  J.  A.    Photographic  Apparatus. 
*  Anthony  &  Co.,  E.  &  H.  T.    The  Bowdish  Chair. 
Art  Publications. 
Beard,  J.  P.    Photographic  Goods. 
Benerman  &  Wilson.    Lantern  Slides. 
Bierstadt,  Charles.    Photo.  Views. 
Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 
Brand  &  Co.,  E.  L.    Souvenir  Photogra  hs. 
Bullock  &  Crenshaw.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Cameo  Press,  The  Universal. 
Chameleon  Barometer. 
Clemons,  Jno.  R.    Albumen  Paper.    Varnish. 
Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  A.  M.    Photograph  Cards. 
Cooper  &  Co.,  Chas.    Portrait  Lenses. 
Curtis,  G.  E.    Stereo.  Views. 
Damaged  Lantern  Slides. 

Dean,  John  &  Co.    Adamantean  Ferrotype  Plates. 
Entrekin,  W.  G.    Oscillating  Enameler. 
Fredricks  &  Co.,  Chas.  D.    Glace  Process. 
French,  B.  &  Co.    Voigtlander  Lenses,  &c. 
Gennert,  G.    Albumen  Paper,  &c. 
Gihon,  John  L.    Opaque  and  Cut-Outs. 
Griswold's  Life  Compositions  for  the  Stereoscope. 
Hance's  Photo.  Specialties. 
How  to  Paint  Photographs. 
Improved  Photograph  Covers. 
Kilburn  Bros.    Stereoscopic  Views. 
Lea's  Manual  of  Photography. 
Lewis,  R.  A.    Collodion. 
Liesegang,  E.    Albumen  Paper, 
Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 
Loeffler,  J.    Stereoscopic  Views. 
LassciiER  &  Petsch.    A  New  Invoice  of  Studies. 
Marion  &  Co.    Specialties. 

Magee,  James  F.  &  Co.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Marcy's  Sciopticon,  &c. 

Masonic  Temple,  Philadelphia.    Stereo.  Views. 
McAllister,  W.  Mitchell.    Manufacturing  Ontician. 
McCollin,  Thos.  H.    Photographic  Materials. 
Moore,  Albert.    Solar  Printing. 
Mosaics,  1874. 


Moulton,  L.  V.    Rapid  Photo-Washer. 
Nason's  Background  Carriage,  Camera  Stand,  &c. 
Newell's  Improved  Bath-Holder. 
Pattberg,  Lewis  &  Bro.    Passepartouts,  &c. 
Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 
Photographer's  Pocket  Reference-Book. 
Photographic  Publications. 
Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 
Powers  &  Weightman.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Premiums  for  1874,  for  New  Subscribers  to  "  Philadel- 
phia Photographer.'' 
Prize  Pictures. 

Rau,  Geo.    German  Albumen  Colors. 
Rice  &  Thompson.    Photo.  Stock  House. 
Robinson's  New  Photo.  Trimmer. 
Robinson's  Metallic  Guides. 
Rohaut  &  Hutinet.    Photographic  Mounts. 
Ross'  Portrait  and  View  Lenses. 
Rotter,  Geo.  &  Co.    Albumen  Paper. 
Ryan,  D.  J.    Photo.  Stock  Depot,  Chromos,  &c. 
Sauter,  G.    Passepartouts. 
Schwarze  &  Valk.    Photo,  Papers. 
Scovill  Manf'g.  Co.    Photographic  Materials. 
"  S.  D."  Camera  Boxes. 

Seavey  L.  W.    Scenic  Artist,  Backgrounds,  &c. 
Snelling,  H.  H.    Lebanon  Rustic  Frame. 
"Something  New." 
Steinheil's  New  Aplanatic  Lenses. 
Stevens,  Chas.  W.    Photographic  Goods. 
Thayer  &  Co.,  N.  C.    Photo.  Goods  and  Frames. 
The  Practical  Printer. 
Vogel's  Hand-Book  of  Photography. 
Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papers. 
Weller's  Stereoscopic  Treasures. 
Wet  Photographic  Books. 
Wilson,  Charles  A.    Photographic  Goods. 
Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials,  &c. 
Willy  Wallach.    Albumen  Paper. 
Woodward,  D.  A.    Solar  Cameras. 
Zentmayer,  Joseph.    Lenses. 
Zimmerman  Bros.    Photographic  Stock  Depot. 


Lantern  Slides! 


AND 


We  have  just  received  from  France, 


4000  LANTERN  SLIDES! 


Views  of  all  parts  of  the  world — which  we  shall  exhibit  at 


The  Chicago 


And  give  photographers  and  others  an  opportunity  to  make  selections  from  them  at  very 

low  prices. 


Can  make  money  by  giving  exhibitions  to  the  public. 


HOW    IT    IS    DONE. 

Local  Secretary  Hesler,  who  has  just  purchased  a  lot  of  these  elegant   slides  from  us,    sends  the 
following  : 

Evanston,  III.,  June,  1874. 

Dear  Sirs  :  The  transparencies  you  sent  are  duly  at  hand.  I  must  say  I  am  happily  disappointed 
in  them,  their  beauty  of  selection  and  perfection  of  execution  are  really  marvellous.  I  have  shown 
them  to  several  gentlemen  who  have  traveled  over  these  countries,  viz.,  France,  Germany,  Switzer- 
land, Egypt,  and  the  Holy  Land,  and  all  say  that  they  really  get  more  satisfaction  in  studying  and 
viewing  these  pictures,  as  I  show  them  with  Marcy's  Sciopticon,  than  they  get  in  traveling  over  the 
same  countries.  I  wonder  that  more  photographers  do  not  possess  themselves  of  a  Marcy's  Sciopticon, 
for  with  these  views  they  can  fill  in  very  profitable  evenings.  I  do  it  thusly  :  Having  the  pictures  and 
lantern  (Marcy's,  which  I  believe  is  the  best  in  use),  let  the  people  know  you  have  them,  and  will  give 
Parlor  Exhibitions  at  any  person's  house  who  wishes  to  entertain  friends.  For  this  purpose  you  want 
some  few  comics  ;  most  of  these  you  can  easily  make  of  a  local  character.  Make  a  few  transparencies 
of  the  babies  crying  and  laughing,  leading  men,  and  host  and  hostess,  if  possible.  Have  enough 
foreign  and  home  views,  that  you  need  not  always  show  the  same  things.  For  such  an  entertainment 
you  can  get  from  $10  to  $20  per  night ;  and  this  not  only  pays  you  but  advertises  you  in  the  best  pos- 
sible manner.  Try  it !  you  who  can  command  your  evenings,  and,  my  word  for  it,  you  will  find  it  to 
pay  you.  A.  Hesler. 

This  shows  what  any  one  else  may  do  with  a  good  lantern  and  an  assortment  of  slides. 

GOME  TO  CHICAGO! 

And  select  for  yourselves.  You  will  not  have  such  a  chance  again.  A  Marcy's  Sciopticon  and 
one  hundred  slides  can  be  carried  in  your  hand.      We  shall  have  them  there  ready  for  delivery. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
Cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Mosaics,  1874. 


§ 

rmWi 


THE 


HOTOGRAPHER'S  _W  RIEND. 


^   PRONOUNCED  BY  ALL  THE  MOST  READABLE  AND  REST 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  JOURNAL  EXTANT, 


IS  FOR  SALE. 


WHAT  PHOTOGRAPHER  WILL  STEP  FORWARD  AND  UNITE  TO  HIS  OTHER 

BUSINESS  AN  INTERESTING  AND  PROFITABLE 

OCCUPATION  FOR  LEISURE  HOURS. 

This  Magazine  is  offered  for  sale  for  satisfactory  reasons,  which  will  be  patent  to  all 
who  will  read  this  circular.  The  "Photographer's  Friend"  pays  as  a  business  in- 
vestment, and  there  are  5,000  Photographers  in  the  land  who  are  ready  to  aid  the 
one  who  undertakes  the  management  of  this 

MOST  POPULAR  LITERARY 

COMPENDIUM  UPON  PHOTOGRAPHY. 

BALTIMORE,  MD. 

Being  unable,  from  the  pressure  of  my  increasing  wholesale  trade,  and  the 
demands  my  large  gallery  makes  upon  my  time,  to  devote  the  proper  attention 
to  the  publication  of  the  "Photographer's  Friend,"  lam  compelled  to  offer  it 
FOR  SALE.  I  do  so  reluctantly ,  for  it  is  difficult  to  part  with  what  has  been 
my  companion  and  solace  during  leisure  hours,  and  that  too  in  the  full  tide  of 
success,  but  the  demands  of  business  and  of  health  are  imperative. 

My  object,  in  placing  before  the  photographic  public  a  standard  Journal  which 
should  be  a  complete  epitome  of  the  passing  events,  and  which  should  also  be  the 
vehicle  for  sterling  information,  has  been  attained,  and  lean  resign  the  "  Friend  " 
into  other  hands  with  the  proud  knowledge  of  having  earned  the  appreciation  and 
support  which  has  been  so  liberally  bestowed  upon  me  by  the  friends  and,  patrons 
of  the  "  Photographer's  Friend." 

The  name  of  the  Journal  stands  deservedly  high  with  the  prof essio?i,  for  it  has 
never  stooped,  to  the  performance  of  a  base  action,  never  advertised  an.  unjust 
thing,  or  lent  its  name  to  any  of  the  impositions  which  have  been  endeavored  at 
various  times  to  foist  upon  the  fraternity  ;  therefore,  the  person  who  purchases, 
this  Magazine  has  no  bad  record  to  overcome,  nor  attempts  the  revivifying  of  no 
effete  and,  dismantled  hull,  but  takes  charge  of  a  literary  enterprise  which  is  to- 
day a  LIVING  SUCCESS. 


I  am  now  on  the  fourth  year  of  its  publication  ;  having  had  the  primary  idea 
of  a  gratis  work,  but  the  high  favor  the  initial  number  gained,  their  rapid, 
exhaustion,  and  constant  inquiries  for  more,  made  the  issue  of  a  regular  journal 
as  much  a.  necessity  as  a  choice,  so  the  "Friend"  was  made  a  quarterly.  In 
thai  form  it  was  subscribed  for  so  eagerly  it  was  again  reconstructed  to  a  bi- 
monthly shape  as  it  is  now  issued. 

Its  value  as  an  advertising  medium  has  been  recognized  by  all  the  trades  which 
deal  with  photographers,  and  the  revenue  from  this  source  goes  a  long  way 
towards  the  expense  of  publication. 

I  place  this  magazine  in  the  market  frankly  and  fearlessly,  feeling  assured, 
that  an  examination  is  all  that  is  required. 

Full  particulars  and  ample  information  by  addressing 

P.   WALZL,  Baltimore,  Mn. 


tHEREBEu^ 


A  BI-MONTHLY 


DEVOTED  TO   THE  PHOTOGRAPHIC  ART. 

1HE  FAVORITE  JOURNAL  OF  THE  FRATERNITY. 

HANDSOMELY  ILLUSTRATED 

AT  EACH  ISSUE  BY  SOME  ONE  OP  OUR  LEADING  OPERATORS, 

IS  OFFERED  FOR  SALE. 


You  are  all  familiar  with  it.  Every  one  appreciates  it.  It  is  a  good  thing  and  it  pays. 
WHO   WILL  BECOME  THE  O  WNER  ! 

Make  inquiries  into  this  matter  ;  chances  like  this  are  not  often  offered  nor  suffered  long 
to  remain  in  the  market.     Address  all  communications  to 

RICHARD  WALZL, 

46  N.  Charles  St.,  Baltimore,  Md. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES. 

AEE  SOLD  BY  ALL  DEALERS  AS  FOLLOWS  : 

Hance's  Double  Iodized  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1  SO Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Elbert  Anderson's  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.75 Half-pound,  90  Cts. 

Hance's  White  Mountain  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Curtis'  Niagara  Falls  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 : .'....Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Hance's  Peculiar  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Trask's  Ferrotype  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Cummings'  Grit  Varnish, 

Per  Bottle, 40  Cts. 

Hance's  Silver  Spray  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Delicate  Cream  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce,. 80  Cts. 

Gill's  Concentrated  Chromo  Intensifies 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute, 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Bath  Preservative  HeadsoffSaaTro„WeS, 

Per  Bottle, 1  OO. 

TRADE  MARK :— THE  BEST  GOODS— FULL  MEASURE. 

TRY  HANCE'S  PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES. 

See  Testimonials  in  former  and  future  advertisements. 

SOOVILL  MF'G  CO.,  Trade  Ag'ts.       ALFRED  L.  HANCE,  Manufac'r, 

NEW  YOKK.  126  If.  7th  St.,  Philadelphia. 

*     * 


WW  fW  JW® 


SUBSTITUTE. 


The  SUBSTITUTE  is  in  the  form  of  a  varnish;  is  flowed  and  dried  the  same  as  varnish, 
but  dries  with  a  granulated  or  ground-glass  surface. 

WHEREVER  GROUND  GLASS  IS  REQUIRED, 
HAJTCE'S  SUBSTITUTE  ANSWERS  EVERY  PURPOSE. 

FOE  GEOUND  GLASSES  FOR  CAMEEAS, 

FOE  GLAZING  SKY  AND  SIDE-LIGHTS, 

FOE  OBSCUEING  STUDIO  AND  OFFICE  DOOES, 
FOE  FEINTING  WEAK  NEGATIVES 
FOE  VIGNETTE  GLASSES, 

FOE  A  EETOUCHING  VAENISH, 

FOE  SOFTENING  STEONG  NEGATIVES, 

FOE  THE  CELEBEATED  BERLIN  FROCESS. 

Use  the  "  Substitute."        Use  the  "  Substitute." 

PRICE,  FIFTY  CENTS  PER  BOTTLE. 


LARGE  QUANTITIES  FOR  STUDIO  LIGHTS,  &c,  SUPPLIED  LOW. 
EEAD  A  FEW  TESTIMONIALS: 

Youhgstown,  Ohio,  Jan.  27,  1873. 

The  botlle  of  Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute  came  safely  to  hand.    I  selected  a  good  piece  of  glass,  coated  it  with  the 

Substitute,  and  in  a  few  moments  I  had  one  of  the  finest  ground  glasses  I  ever  saw.    I  have  been  using  it  four  or  five  days, 

and  the  more  I  use  it  the  more  I  am  pleased  with  it.    The  "surface  "  is  fine  and  delicate,  and  a  great  relief  to  the  eyes. 

I  would  not  be  without  a  bottle  for  ten  dollars.  Loh  Blackburn,  Operator,  Le  Boy's  Gallery. 

R.  Newell  &  Son"s  Gallery,  626  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia,  Feb.  17th,  1873. 
I  have  been  frequently  asked  to  recommend  some  new  article  or  preparation  used  in  our  business,  but  have  very  rarely  con- 
sented to  do  so  from  the  fact  that  many  things  that  "promise  very  fair,"  after  thorough  trial,  prove  worthless.  Having  used 
your  different  preparations  of  Collodions,  Intensifiers,  and  Varnish  for  the  past  six  months  in  my  gallery,  I  can  conscien- 
tiously pronounce  them  first-class  in  every  respect.  Your  Ground  Glass  Substitute  I  consider  one  of  the  most  practical  and 
useful  articles  I  have  ever  used,  and  no  photographer  who  has  learned  its  value  for  coating  the  backs  of  thin  negatives,  or 
making  ground  glass  for  the  camera  box,  would  ever  be  without  it.  I  have  found  so  many  ways  of  using  it  to  advantage 
that  I  shall  hereafter  order  it  by  the  gallon.  Yours  truly, 

R.  Newell 

TRY 
HANCE'S    BATH   PRESERVATIVE, 


PRICE,  $1.00. 

GUARANTEES  REGULAR  AND  GOOD  RESULTS. 


N.  C.  THAYER  &  CO. 


Would  say  to  Western 

Photographers 
that  they  claim,  to  have 
the  largest, 
the  finest, 
and  the 

best  stoeli  of 

AM.  OPT.  CO.'S 


Apparatu 


FIRST-CLASS 

Chemicals 


BEAUTIFUL 
STYLES 


OF 

Frames, 


2 
5 
0 

& 

2 
5 

W 


13 


N 
U 
E 


AND 


AS>S» 


PHOTO- 1  GRAPHIC 


Requisites, 


AND  PRIDE  THEMSELVES  IN  KEEPING 
ONLY 

First-Class 

GOODS. 

THEY  EXTEND  A  HEARTY  WELCOME 

To  every  photographer  who  may  be  dis- 
posed to  call  upon  them,  and  will  make 
it  to  the  advantage  of  all  who  do. 

We  Mora  tie  Convention, 

And  mean  to  do  all  in  our 

power  to  promote 

Its  success. 


CHICAGO 


THE  HUNDREDS  OF  PHOTOGRAPHERS 


Who  visit  Chicago  during  the  coming 
National  Photographic  Association  Con- 
vention and  Exhibition,  this  month,  will, 
if  they  act  wisely,  not  only  see  and  hear 
everything  there,  and  learn  all  they  can,  but 
they  will  also  look  about  the  great  Western 
Headquarters  in  order  to  find  the  most  ad- 
vantageous place  to  buy  a  stock  of  goods, 
and  to  deal  in  the  future. 

Put  the  number  down  so  you  will  re- 
member it— 48,  48,  48,  48,  48,  48,  48,  48— 
48  Madison  Street,  and  so  you  will  be  sure 
to  find  it.  We  speak  of  course  to  those 
who  propose  to  make  such  an  examination, 
for  it  will  pay  them  to  inspect  the  carefully 
selected  and  new  stock  of  Photographic  Ne- 
cessities on  exhibition  and  for  sale  by  Messrs. 
J.  P.  Beard  &  Co.,  at  No.  48  Madison  St., 
Chicago.  Although  this  house  is  not  so 
well  known  in  the  West  as  others  are,  for 
the  simple  reason  that  it  is  a  new  one,  yet  be 
assured  it  is  as  amply  prepared  as  any  other 
to  supply  the  wants  of  the  photographer  in 
every  respect.  The  conductors  began  busi- 
ness with  the  following  purposes  in  view. 
1.  To  keep  a  splendid  stock  of  goods  con- 
stantly on  hand,  so  that,  2.  All  orders  may 
be  expected  to  be  filled  promptly,  usually 
the  day  they  are  received,  and  all  the  goods 
ordered  to  be  sent  exactly  as  ordered,  without 
substituting  other  goods  for  them.  3.  So 
to  take  advantage  of  every  opportunity  to 
purchase  goods  at  the  best  figures  as  to  en- 
able them,  not  only  to  defy  competition  in 
prices  and  in  quality,  but  as  a  usual  thing 
to  undersell.     4.  Good  goods  will  always  be 


given  the  preference,  although  ample  prepa- 
ration is  made  to  supply  anything  the  pur- 
chaser may  require.  No  doubt  photog- 
raphers will  appreciate  these  advantages,  as 
they  always  do.  No  pains  whatever  will 
be  spared  to  not  only  obtain  their  confidence, 
but  to  retain  it,  so  that  whether  near  or  far, 
you  may  send  your  orders  to  them,  large 
or  small,  feeling  sure  that  they  will  have 
the  best  personal  attention. 

Messrs.  J.  P.  Beard  &  Co.  beg  to  an- 
nounce that  they  have  added  to  their  new 
establishment  a  cosy  private  office,  to 
which  photographers  visiting  the  Conven- 
tion are  specially  invited,  and  where  they 
will  find  all  the  conveniences  for  letter- 
writing,  mailing  newspapers,  and  for  chat- 
ting together,  and  for  resting  themselves 
between  the  sessions — in  fact  where  visitors 
can  make  themselves  perfectly  at  home. 
Meanwhile,  or  after  the  Convention,  when- 
ever you  come  to  Chicago,  before  you  buy 
your  goods,  be  sure  to  visit  our  new  and 
beautiful  rooms.  And  if  you  are  so  unfor- 
tunate as  to  be  unable  to  come  and  see  us, 
intrust  us  with  your  orders,  and  we  guar- 
antee satisfaction,  both  in  goods  and  prices, 
Our  stock  is  all  new,  and  fresh,  and  good. 
Please  read  our  other  advertisement  oppo- 
site, and  send  to  us  for  circulars. 

By  reference  to  the  N.  P.  A.  circular, 
which  we  will  send  you  if  you  have  not 
received  a  copy,  you  will  see  that  No.  48  is 
only  a  short  walk  from  the  Grand  Exposi- 
tion building  and  is  marked  No.  2  on  the 
map.     So  remember  No.  2,  too. 


Very  Respectfully, 

J.   P.   BEARD  &  CO., 

48  Madison  Street,     Chicago. 


J.  P.  BEARD  &  Co. 

— —^^— — — ■ 1 j 

WE  MANUFACTURE 

New  PEERLESS  COLLODION 

FOR  FERROTYPES, 

PEERLESS  COLLODION 

FOR  NEGATIVES,  /     ^A 

EUREKA  VARNISH  /  ffr 

FOR  NEGATIVES,  #  KJ 

EUREKA  VARNISH 

FOR  FERROTYPES, 


'AGENTS 
FOR  THE 

IORTHWEST 

FOR 


AND 


J.  P.  B.  CHLORIDE  of  GOLD. 


PATENT 

OSCILLATING 


WE  HAVE  THE 
HIGHEST 


II 


FOR 
THE  ABOVE. 

TRY 
THEM! 


WE  ARE  HEADQUARTERS 
FOR  THE 

AM.  OPT.  CO.'S 

APPARATUS. 

AND  EVERYTHING;  PERTAINING  to  the  ART  07  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


f^REMEMBER«=®|r 

WE  POSITIVELY  WILL  NOT  BE 

UNDERSOLD  BY  ANY  HOUSE 

IN  THE  NORTHWEST. 


CHICAGO,  ILLS. 


ON 


AT  THE 

"  Great  Central," 

During  Convention  of  N.  P.  A.,  with  the 
largest  and  most  complete  stock  of 

HOTOGRAPHER 


Ever  shown  in  the  West! 

Prices  that  will  please  you! 


mAP 


I 


BJ 


Sflfl 


State  Street, 

CHICAGO. 


Only  5  minutes  ivalJi  from  Exposition  Building, 
and  near  all  the  leading  Hotels. 


&& 


is 

P5 


P§ 


^ 


4 


>$n 


&* 


# 

# 


We  are  informed  that  some  of  our  competitors  are  advancing  the  prices  of 


m 


And  we  have  been  requested  to  do  the  snme,  but  have  declined  to  enter  into  any  comhination  what- 
ever. Photographers  can  rest  assured  that  we  shall  adhere  strictly  to  our  LOW  PRICES,  as  published 
in  our  Catalogue,  of  August,  1873,  until  further  notice.  The  prices  therein  quoted  are  the  lowest  yet 
made,  and  all  who  have  not  received  that  list  will  please  send  us  their  address,  when  it  will  be  promptly 
forwarded.     Note  our  very  low  prices  on 

FERROTYPE  PLATES,  CAMERA  BOXES,  &c. 

Everything  sold  at  bottom  figures,  and  all  orders  executed  to  the  letter,  and  with  the  greatest  of 
promptness.     Agents  for  the  Northwest  for 

WESTON'S  ROTARY  BURNISHERS, 

WOODWARD'S  SOLAR  CAMERAS, 

And  SCOTCH  ALBUMEN  PAPER. 

We  hope  all  those  who  have  not  tried  the  Scotch  Albumen  Paper,  will  give  it  a  trial,  as  it  is  giving 
universal  satisfaction,  and  is  having  an  immense  sale.     We  have  it  in  White  and  Pink. 

Prices  furnished  on  application  for  Woodward's  Solar  Cameras,  either  the  Reflectors  or  Direct  Prin- 
ters, with  license  attached.  Any  one  desiring  a  license  for  the  use  of  Solar  Cameras,  can  get  the  same 
of  us  at  the  price  charged  by  Mr.  Woodward,  $40.00. 

Don't  forget  to  order  a  Weston  Burnisher  ;  we  are  selling  large  numbers  of  them,  and  the  fine  effect 
produced  from  their  use  is  commending  itself  to  all. 

Remember,  we  carry  the  LARGEST  STOCK  IN  THE  WEST,  and  owning  the  land  and  the  building 
we  occupy,  we  are  fully  prepared  to  give  you  rock  bottom  prices  on  everything. 


MCE  &  THOMPSON'S 


259  Wabash  Ave.,  CHICAGO. 


IMPORTANT  TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 


TAKE  NOTICE ! 

WHAT    PARTIES    SAY,    WHO    ARE     USING 

J.  A.  ANDERSON'S  CAMEEA  BOXES. 

Office  of  Chicago  Photographic  and  Copying  Company, 
320,  322,  324,  &  32G  State  Street. 
J.  A.  Anderson.— Dear  Sir  :— The  10x12  Conical  Bellows  Camera  you  made  us  gives  entire  satisfaction.  It 
is  finely  finished,  and  the  working  parts  are  all  complete  in  their  action.  We  now  have  seven  of  your  boxes 
in  our  operating  department  and  shall  discard  all  others  (the  so-called  "Success")  for  your  make,  as  we  will 
save  the  price  in  repairs.  They  are  all  in  constant  use  every  day,  and  stand  the  test  better  than  any  other  make 
we  have  used.  For  durability,  accuracy,  and  cheapness,  they  certainly  have  no  rivals ;  they  compare  favorably 
with  the  A.  O.  Co.'s  boxes,  and  are  far  superior  to  anything  else  in  the  market. 

(Signed),  JAS.  S.  NASON. 


j.  .a..  .a.:n":d:e:r,so2T's 
NEW  POSITION  AND  BABY  CHAIR,  COMBINED. 


THE 
HANDSOMEST, 

MOST 
COMPLETE, 

AND 
CHEAPEST 


PIECE  OF  APPARATUS  EVER  OFFERED  TO  THE  PHOTOGRAPHER, 


BUY  JTO  IMITATION. 


SEND  FOR  PRICE  LIST. 


Photographers  can  save  from  10  to  20  per  cent,  by  sending  direct  to  the  manufactory  for  Apparatus. 

TESTIMONIAL. 

Elgin,  April  5th,  1874. 
Mr.  J.  A.  Anderson. — Sir : — The  Camera  Boxes  prove  to  be  all  that  I  expected.    The  11  x  14  is  superior  to  any 
that  I  ever  used  ;  it  is  a  beauty,  and  I  am  proud  of  it.    The  cheapness,  too,  is  an  item  especially  with  me  at 
this  time,  having  lost  all  the  contents  of  my  gallery  by  fire.    I  am  obliged  to  you  for  your  favor. 

Yours,  G.  H.  Sherman. 

(J&tf  See  other  testimonials  in  special  advertisements). 

J.    A.    ANDERSON,    (Late  Anderson  &  Bixby), 

65  JEast  Indiana  Street,  Chicago. 


PHOTOGRAPHERS,  ATTENTION  ! 


YOU  NEED  NOT  BUY  THE  GLACE,  CALIFORNIA, 

OR  ANY  OTHER  ENAMEL  PROCESS. 

EXAMINE  THE  NEW 

Enameled  and  Embossed 


PHOTOGRAPHS, 

AND  PATENT  IMPROVED  PRESSES  FOR  MOULDING  THEM. 


INTRODUCED    BY 


Messrs.  E.  L.  Brand  &  Co. 

596  WABASH  AVENUE,  CHICAGO. 

IPS*  Fcjll  Instructions  Supplied  GRATIS! 

Messrs.  E.  L.  BRAND  &  CO.  desire  to  state  to  Photographers  that 
they  purchased  the  process  for  making  the  SOUVENIR  photographs  in 
France,  but  finding  it  incomplete  and  impracticable,  they  have  diligently 
ex.periment.ed  until  they  have  a  perfect  process.  But  after  all,  the  great 
desideratum  is  a  properly  constructed  PRESS  for  moulding;  the  pic- 
tures, or  in  other  words,  raising  them  in  cameo  style.  Such  a  machine 
Messrs.  Brand  &  Co.  have  perfected,  and  offer  to  the  photographers  at 
popular  prices. 

They  are  complete  in  themselves,  embodying  a  press  and  dies  of  all  popu- 
lar sizes.  They  are  made  on  entirely  new  principles,  and  will  commend 
themselves  to  all  who  see  them.     They  will  be  shown  at 


The  Chicago 


Convention, 


where  a  room  will  be  furnished  in  the  Exposition  Building  for  the  accommodation  of  those 
who  wish  to  learn  how  to  make  the  SOUVENIR  PHOTOGRAPHS  without  charge. 

They  are  scoing  to  be  the  leading  picture,  and  will  pay  A  SPLENDID  PROFIT.  Do  not 
pay  for  ANY" process  until  you  see  ours,  with  its  many  improvements,  for  we  can  give  you 
the  best  process  in  the  world,  GRATIS.     For  further  particulars,  address 

E.  L.  BRAND  &  CO. 

596  Wabash  Ave.,  Chicago,  His. 


oPfice  of 


G* 


p.  FBEDRICftg 

o 


^  *  c 


587  Broadway,  opposite  Metropolitan  Hotel, 


•yVew  York,  June  1,  187 Jf. 
To  rira  Photographers  of  the  United  States: 

All  authority  given  to  parties  to  act  as  our  Agents, 
in  instructing  and  selling  our  Glace  process,  is  hereby 
revoked,  from  this  date. 

C.  D.  FREDEICKS  $  CO. 


Our  Mr.  Hugh  O'Neil,  after  several  months'  experiments,  has  succeeded  in  making  simple  and 
practical  the  Enamel  or  Glace  process  for  Photographs,  of  all  sizes.  The  process  is  easy  and  rapid  ; 
one  smart  boy  or  girl  can  prepare  one  hundred  Imperials  or  Cabinets  in  two  hours,  and  emboss  and 
mount  them  next  day,  in  same  time.  Our  customers  willingly  pay  double  price  for  these  beautiful 
pictures,  which,  since  we  have  introduced  them,  are  so  much  sought  for,  that  all  leading  photographers 
in  this  city  and  elsewhere  are  obliged  to  make  them. 

Our  price  for  instruction  ranges  from  $50  to  $100,  according  to  locality.  Among  our  pupils  we  may 
mention  the  names  of  Sarony,  Gurney,  Howell,  and  others  of  this  city  ;  Gutekunst  and  others  of 
Philadelphia ;  Kuhn  &  Cummins,  Bendann,  and  others,  of  Baltimore  ;  John  A.  Scholten,  of  St.  Louis  ; 
W.  M.  Knight,  Buffalo,  and  many  others  too  numerous  to  mention. 

"We  are  well  aware  that  the  photographic  community  have  often  been  imposed  upon,  by  persons 
pretending  to  sell  something  valuable,  which  afterwards  proved  to  be  of  no  practical  use,  and  for  this 
reason  we  will  send  a  specimen  of  our  work,  which  any  photographer,  possessing  ordinary  ability,  can 
equal,  free  of  charge. 

Having  been  informed  that  certain  inexperienced  parties,  in  this  city,  pretend  to  give  instructions 
//*  our  process,  and  as  our  legalized  agents  for  giving  such  instructions  will  not  reach  your  locality,  we 
offer  it  to  you  for  the  sum  of  $25,  including  our  Mr.  O'Neil' s  processes,  for  all  the  different  branches  of 
photography,  which  will  entitle  you  at  any  time  to  visit  our  gallery  and  get  thoroughly  posted  by 
ocular  demonstration,  should  you  so  desire.  We  also  guarantee  to  keep  you  posted  in  any  improve- 
ments which  we  may  make  in  our  Glace  process.  Should  you  accept  our  proposition,  please  send  for 
the  agreetiient,  sign  it,  and  return  to  us  with  draft  for  the  amount  specified,  and  we  will  immediately 
forward  you  a  similar  paper,  signed  by  us,  together  with  the  process  for  Glace  and  Photography,  with 
the  necessary  working  materials  which  we  will  send  C.O.D.  as  per  price  list,  viz.  : 

DIES  FOR  EMBOSSING. 

Card  size $4  00 

Imperial  or  Cabinet  size 6  OO 

4-4  size '. 8  OO 

MATERIALS. 

Best  French  Gelatine per  lb.,    $1  00 

Card  Board  for  backing,  Cabinet  size per  100,         50 

"  "  «  4-4  size "  2  00 

Press,  in  which  all  the  different  size  dies  can  be  used  (an  ordinary  letter  press 

will  answei) 7  50 

Many  photographers  use  only  the  cabinet  size  for  their  Glace  pictures,  the  other  sizes  can  always 
be  obtained,  if  desired.  Yours  respectfully, 

C.  D.  Fredricks  &  Co. 


NEW 


IS  A 


New  Advertising  Medium 


FOR    PHOTOGRAPHERS, 


W    W    0 

B  ill 


cd 


^    be 


©     ° 

(8  "S 

»  s 


-  is 

2  ^ 

8,   £ 

&■•& 

W      - 

0  ~ 

-fi  .s 

c,    c 

a  S 
H-2 


03   .g 

o    <* 


ft  w 

ft  h.S 
-  -  a 

©  ©  s 
-  _ 


a* 


.=  ©  « 


a  & 


©  £ 
-    « 


^  fa 

-2  S 

M  © 

£  4> 

>  y. 

<— ■  m 

S  * 

£  es 

&*1L 


V 
9 

U 
ft 
& 

fS  ^ 

©  S 


4*    © 

5  © 
SB** 

S«     5(5 

"     K     «• 

SB    ™ 

3  2  'S 

■J    °    S 


*»  S 


S£  g>| 


o    c    n 


TRY  SOME!       BUY  SOME! 


> 

r 
(/) 

r 
w 

0 
*l 

Pi 
PJ 

0 
o 

DC 
> 

0 
W 


IB 


B     H 


© 
-. 

9 

© 
s 


C      5° 


g.P 


O      3 


hj 


&6  z. 

©   "'•    b 

G      CD 
^      CD     - 

?  &2 

©      <^"      03 

e  ^  © 

T    ®    O 
*§    S 

5  ^  § 

®       CD       - 

W     —    CD 

2      ro 
°  £"  <» 

»   ®   § 

h—    N     c+ 

s      05       P»         I 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  &  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia, 


SOMETHING  NEW. 
SOMETHING  NEW. 
SOMETHING  NEW. 
SOMETHING  NEW. 
SOMETHING  NEW. 
SOMETHING  NEW. 

SOMETHING  NEW  WILL  BE  HANDED  TO  ALL  THE  PHOTOGRAPHERS  WHO 

Visit  the  Chicago  Convention! 

THOSE    WHO    CANNOT    ATTEND    WILL    BE    SENT    A    COPY    ON 
APPLICATION  TO  THE  PUBLISHERS. 

IT  INTEEESTS  ALL, 

WILL  MAKE  BUSINESS, 
WILL  SAVE  TIME, 

AND 

HELP  RAISE  PRICES. 

{See  Advertisement  on  opposite  Page.) 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Philadelphia,  Pa« 


THE  PRACTICAL 


A  new  work  on  Photographic  Printing  is 

now  ruE^flLncrsr ! 

ENTITLED 

THE  PRACTICAL  PRINTER, 

By   CHAS.  W.   HEARN, 

A  gentleman  who  has  devoted  several  years  to  photographic  printing  especially,  and  who  is 
now  engaged  at  it  as  his  constant  occupation. 

The  work  gives  all  the  instructions  that  a  beginner  could  possibl}'  want 
in  detail,  and  is  what  the  title  indicates — practical. 

It  will  also  be  found  of  invaluable  service  to  any  photographic  printer,  be 
he  ever  so  skilled. 

Too  little  attention  has  heretofore  been  given  to  Photo- 
graphic Printing,  which  is  indeed  quite  as  important  a 
branch  of  the  art  as  negative  making. 

It  is  the  hope  of  both  author  and  publishers  to  create 


REFORM 


in  this  matter,  by  the  issue  of  this  work,  and  as  it  is  to  put  money  in  the 
pockets  of  all  who  read  it,  the  hope  is  that  it  will  be  generally  read. 
For  Contents  see  the  opposite  page. 

A  fine  example  of  Photographic  .Printing,  by  the  author,  will 
accompany  the  work,  from  negatives  by  F.  Gutekunst,  Philada. 


IP  IR/  I  G  IE,      $  3.5  O. 

BEMRMAN  &  WILSON,  PMoppMc  Piiista, 

SEVENTH  &  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


The  Last  JYew  Book! 


THE  PRACTICAL  PRINTER, 

A  COMPLETE  MANUAL  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PRINTING 

ON  PLAIN   AND   ALBUMEN   PAPER,    AND    ON  PORCELAIN. 


COIsTTE^TTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  Printing  Room,  with  a  Plan.  The  Silver- 
ing and  Toning  Room,  with  a  Plan.  The  Dry- 
ing Room,  with  a  Plan. 

PART  I.— ALBUMEN  PAPER  PRINTING. 

The  Positive  Bath  for  Albumen  Paper.  Sil- 
vering the  Albumen  Paper.  Drying  the  Paper. 
Fuming  the  Paper.  Preservation  of  Sensitive 
Albumenized  Paper — Washed  Sensitive  Paper. 
Cutting  the  Paper.  The  Printing  Boards.  Keep- 
ing Tally.  Vignette  Printing  Blocks.  Treat- 
ment of  the  Negatives  before  Printing.  Filling 
of  the  Boards.  Fitting  Vignette  Boards  to  the 
Negatives  for  Printing.  Medallion  and  Arch- 
top  Printing.  Fancy  Printing.  Vignette  Cameo 
and  Medallion  Vignette  Cameo  Printing.  Print- 
ing the  Bendann  Backgrounds.  Printing  Intense 
Negatives.  Printing  Weak  Negatives.  A  Few 
More  Remarks  about  Printing — Treatment  of 
Broken  Negatives.  Cutting  the  Prints.  Wash- 
ing the  Prints.  Acidifying  the  Prints.  Toning 
Baths.  Artistic  Toning.  Fixing  Baths  and 
Fixing  Prints.  Washing  the  Prints.  Mounting 
the  Prints.     Finishing  the  Prints. 


PART  II.— PLAIN  PAPER  PRINTING:. 

Salting  the  Paper.  Positive  Baths  for  Plain 
Salted  Paper.  Silvering  Plain  Salted  Paper. 
Drying,  Fuming,  and  Cutting  the  Paper.  Treat- 
ment of  the  Negatives  before  Printing.  Print- 
ing-in  False  Backgrounds.  General  Plain  Paper 
Printing.  Further  Treatment  of  the  Prints  after 
Printing.  Causes  of  Failures  in  Albumen  and 
Plain  Paper  Printing. 


PART  III.— PORCELAIN  PRINTING. 

Selection  of  the  Porcelain  Plates.  Cleaning 
of  the  Porcelain  Plates.  Albumenizing  the 
Porcelain  Plates.  Making  the  Porcelain  Collo- 
dion. Coating,  Fuming,  and  Drying  the  Plates. 
Porcelain  Printing  Boards.  Placing  the  Sensi- 
tive Plate  on  the  Board  for  Printing.  Printing 
Vignette  Porcelains.  Printing  Medallion  Por- 
celains. Washing  the  Porcelains.  Toning  the' 
Porcelain.  Fixing  the  Porcelain.  Final  Wash- 
ing of  the  Porcelain.  Drying  and  Tinting  of  the 
Porcelain.  Varnishing  the  Porcelain.  Causes 
of  Failures  in  Porcelain  Printing. 


Together  with  nearly  100  Wood  Cuts,  and  an  elegant  Cabinet  Portrait, 
from  negatives  by  Mr.  F.  Gutekunst,  printed  by  the  author,  Mr.  Chas.  W. 
Hearn. 

MAILED  POST-PAID  ON  RECEIPT  OF  $2.50,  BY  ANT  DEALER,  OR 
BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  PUBLISHERS, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Street,  Philadelphia. 


QBj  S 


anual 


PluirifTlnlPfDl  All  d!u  fv 
inilli  I  lUiuiniHsl  sni 


Third  Thousand! 

"We  have  undertaken  the  publication  of  the  third  thousand  of  this  valuable  Text-Book, 
and  offer  it  to  the  photographers  in  a  more  attractive  and 


New  Shape. 


The  author's  illustrations  now  number  150,  nearly  double  the  number  of  the  first  edition. 

The  Chapters  on  Failures  have  been  much  elaborated  and  rearranged,  so  as  to  afford  a 
ready  reference  in  case  of  almost  any  trouble  or  difficulty  liable  to  occur  to  the  photogra- 
pher, with  appropriate  remedies  therefor.     The  following  are  among  other 


New  Things: 


Method  of  preparing  silvered  PAPER  WHICH  WILL  KEEP  FOR 
WEEKS,  and  with  care,  even  for  months ;  no  washing  or  additional 
manipulation  of  the  paper  needed. 

Investigation  of  Negative  Varnishes  and  formulas  for  Water-proof  Var- 
nish, such  that  negatives  varnished  tvith  it  have  been  kept  for  montlis 
under  ivater  without  injury. 

Tables  to  aid  in  the  construction  of  glass  houses,  <&c. 


NOTICES  OF  THE  PRESS. 


"  There  is  a  valuable  chapter  on  the  preparation  of  a  sensitive  paper  that  is  not  liable  to  discoloration 

We  close  the  present  notice  by  cordially  commending  Mr.  Lea's  Manual  to  our  readers." — British  Journal  of  Pho- 
tography. 

"  M.  Carey  Lea's  excellent '  Manual  of  Photography '  is  a  very  full  and  complete  work."— Philad'a  Bulletin. 

"  If  we  say  that  this  work  is  an  encyclopedia  of  its  art,  we  shall  hardly  exaggerate  its  comprehensiveness. 
....  The  author  takes  every  department,  and  every  branch  of  each,  and  gives  that  distinct  and  clear  information 

that  is  needed  by  photographers The  worth  of  the  labor  is  proved  in  the  fact  that  this  new  and  enlarged 

edition  follows  the  first  so  speedily.  Hereafter,  those  who  would  excel  must  master  the  Manual."— North 
American. 

PRICE,  $3.75. 

It  contains  440  pages  on  fine  toned  paper,  150  wood  cuts,  cloth,  beveled  edges,  and  gilt. 

FOE  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCK-DEALEKS. 
Sent  by  return  mail,  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &.  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


OFFICE  OF 


Established  1865.- 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  GO., 

PHOTOGRAPHIC 

equisites, 

Frames, 


STEREOSCOPES  AND  VIEWS, 
822  ARCH  ST., 

Philadelphia,  July  1,  .187  £.. 

We  shall  be  represented  at  the  National  Photographic 
Convention  to  be  held  in  Chicago,  commencing  July  14th, 
1874,  by  Mr.  John  G.  Hood,  and  Mr.  Geo.  J.  Wolf,  either 
of  whom  will  receive  orders  for  any  article  or  articles  per- 
taining to  photography. 

Hoping  that  all  our  Western  and  Southern  customers  will 
attend,  and  favor  us  with  their  orders,  we  are 

Very  truly, 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO. 


FERROTYPERS ! 


TRY  THE  NEW  CANDIDATE. 


SjSS 


m 


10  x  14  Eagle  Eggshell,  per  box  200  plates,        ....     $26  00 
10x14      "      Glossy,  "        200       "  ....       28  00 

A  Good  Article  at  a  Fair  Price! 

j§@=  NO  CHARGE  FOE  BOXING.  ~©g 

ALL  DEALERS  HAVE  THE  EAGLE  BRAND  FOR  SALE. 


*> 


EXAMINE  THIS  NEW  BRAND  OF 

CAMERA    BOXES. 

1-4  size,  reversible,  "  Square  Dealer,"          .         .         .         .         .  $7  50 

1-2     "            "                  "           "..'....  8  00 

4-4     "             "                   "            "......  12  00 

8-10  "             "                   "            " 15  00 

1-4     "  "         1-9  to  1-4,  and  four  Gems  on  a  1-4  plate,  with 

four  1-9  tubes,  complete,  .         .         .         .  21  00 


.  "mm-  LiDrai 

THE    GOLD    MEDAL 

PMIZM   JPICTITMM 


BRADLEY  &  RULOFSON, 


SAN  FRANCISCO. 


THE 


§Jhihulel|rfeut  |Mi0tM)nti)ber» 


Vol.  XL 


JULY,  1874. 


No.   12  7. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1874, 

By  BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


ONCE  MORE  THEN— CHICAGO.  . 

A  few  more  words  before  we  meet  you 
all  on  the  shores  of  Lake  Michigan.  As 
the  time  approaches,  and  matters  assume 
form  and  become  more  and  more  settled, 
we  are  favorably  impressed  with  the  fine 
prospects  for  the.  National  Photographic 
Association,  at  Chicago.  The  photographers 
of  the  Northwest,  and  particularly  of  the 
city  of  Chicago,  are  a  host,  not  only  in 
numbers,  hut  in  enterprise  and  enthusiasm, 
in  any  matter  in  which  they  becotne  inter- 
ested. They  are  wide  awake,  and  the  signs 
are  all  auspicious  for  the  grandest  meeting 
we  have  ever  had.  Chicago  rebuilt  is  be- 
coming one  of  the  finest  cities  in  the  coun- 
try ;  we  shall  have  there  the  finest  hall  we 
have  ever  met  in,  we  expect  to  see  the  finest 
display  of  photographs  ever  exhibited,  and 
we  have  no  doubt  that  all  who  go  will  have 
the  finest  time  tbey  ever  had.  We  want  to 
see  all  there  and  take  every  member  by  the 
hand.  Do  not  forget  the  mammoth  offer — 
the  great  camera  and  lens  that  are  to  he 
drawn.  We  advise  all  to  secure  tickets 
before  the  convention,  as  there  may  be  none 
to  he  had  at  Chicago.  Arrange'  your  busi-ft 
ness,  appropriate  your  cash,  prepare  and 
send  off  your  specimens,  and  then — go  your- 
self. We  shall  probably  take  down  the  hand- 
some collection  of  foreign  pictures  which 
hangs  in  our  office,  and  exhibit  them  at 
Chicago.     They  are  worth  seeing. 


AN  EXCELLENT  WORK  ON  PHO- 
TOGRAPHIC PRINTING. 

The  Practical  Printer.  By  C.  W. 
Hearn  (Young  Printer)  196  pag",s  ;  80 
illustrations,  with  a  cabinet  print  from 
negatives  by  P.  Gutekunst,  Philadelphia, 
an  example  of  printing  by  the  author 
Cloth  bound.  Price,  $2.50.  Published 
by  Benerman  &  Wilson. 

This  is  the  new  book  we  announced  last 
month  as  in  press,  and  we  feel  sure  it  wi!! 
supply  a  want  that  has  long  been  felt. 

Nearly  all  our  best  photographers  admit 
that  the  printing  department  has  been  too 
much  neglected.  JNo  pains  or  expense  have 
been  spared  to  construct  the  best  sk3rlights, 
work  the  best  chemicals,  and  the  most  ap- 
proved formulae;  to  employ  men  of  the 
highest  abilities  in  the  dark-room,  under 
the  skylight,  and  in  the  retouching  depart- 
ment ;  all  that  the  negatives  may  be  strictly 
first-class.  Oftentimes  all  the  energies  of 
the  proprietor  are  given  to  the  negative  de- 
partment. He  buys  books  on  chemistry, 
light,  art,  and  studies  them  all  diligently, 
bat  the  printing  department  is  left,  in  a 
great  measure,  to  take  care  of  itself.  No 
books  are  ever  bought  for  the  printer;  he 
may  not  have  an  opportunity  to  even  see 
the  monthly  journal  his  employer  takes  for 
his  own  especial  benefit  The  printer  picks 
up  what  he  can  and  does  his  best,  but  neither 
he  nor  anybody  else  dreams  that  anyartistic 


13 


194 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGK APHER. 


skill  or  study  is  required  to  produce  a  good 
print.  If  the  prints  are  not  right  the  nega- 
tives must  be  at  fault.  They  are  all  printed 
on  one  brand  of  paper,  all  prepared  in  the 
same  way,  and  some  prints  turn  out  well, 
while  others  do  not ;  if  there  be  any  fault  it 
is  attributed  to  the  negatives!  This  is  the 
way  it  has  been  to  a  great  extent.  There  has 
been  a  want  of  union,  or  harmony  of  work- 
ing between  the  departments.  The  nega- 
tive maker  has  often  been  surprised  that 
some  of  his  most  beautiful  work  has  produced 
such  miserable  prints.  He  has  often  seen, 
too,  that  the  proof  from  a  negative,  printed 
perhaps  on  any  old  piece  of  paper  that  came 
to  hand,  probably  left  over  from  the  day 
before,  would  be  better  than  any  afterwards 
printed  in  filling  the  order.  This  would 
arise  from  the  printer  not  understanding 
the  conditions  necessary  to  make  the  best 
print  from  that  particular  negative. 

Mr.  Hearn  as  a  practical  man  has  seen 
all  these  things,  and  being  strongly  im- 
pressed with  the  importance  of  having  more 
light  in  this  direction,  has  prepared  this 
book  It  is  mainly  a  transcript  of  his  own 
experience;  and  as  every 
thorough  man  in  any  bu- 
siness knows  how  much 
depends  on  what  are 
often  considered  minor 
details,  and  which  are 
often  overlooked  by  ex- 
perienced teachers,  the 
explicitness  of  this  work 
will  be  appreciated.  It 
is  an  important  feature 
of  it,  and  all  who  study 
it  for  information  will 
find  it  a  perfect  text- 
book for  the  printing- 
room.  There  seems  to  be 
nothing  omitted.  Every 
condition  and  quality  of 
negative,  its  peculiar  fea- 
tures, how  to  study  it, 
and  the  treatment  it 
should  receive  in  the 
process  of  printing,  the  selection  and  prepa- 
ration of  the  paper,  the  effect  produced  by 
certain  processes  and  methods  of  working, 
and  every  point,  apparently  from  the  first 
inspection  of  the  negative  to  the  finishing 


of  the  print,  is  anticipated,  and  the  necessary 
instructions  to  cover  all  contingencies 
given.  Any  proprietor  who  will  place  this 
book  in  the  hands  of  his  printer  will  no 
doubt  find  an  improvement  in  his  work,  and 
be  himself  relieved  of  much  responsibility 
of  looking  after  that  department.  It  is 
especially  adapted  to  those  who  are  learning 
or  striving  to  improve,  though  it  is  full  of 
useful  suggestions,  and  will  be  a  great  help 
in  the  hands  of  the  most  experienced.  The 
author  has  been  known  to  the  readers  of 
this  journal  for  several  years  past  under 
the  nom  deplume  of  "  Young  Printer."  He 
is  yet  a  young  man,  but  by  diligent  study 
and  observation  has  made  himself  a  master 
of  his  business.  The  book  is  well  illustrated, 
and  contains  also  a  specimen  print  by  the 
author,  from  negatives  by  Mr.  F.  Gute- 
kunst,  of  this  city.  We  propose  to  give  a 
few  illustrations  from  the  work,  showing  the 
nature  of  the  instruction  given,  and  how 
minutely  the  author  goes  into  the  details  of 
all  his  work.  The  annexed  is  a  cut  of  "  The 
(Silvering  and  Toning  Rooms." 

"  The  principal  use  of  this  room  is  to  sen- 

Fig.  1. —  The  Silvering  and  Toning  Roomf. 


sitize  the  paper  after  it  is  albumenized,  or 
in  the  case  of  plain  paper,  after  it  is  salted, 
and  then  later  in  the  da}',  when  the  sensi-; 
tizing  is  through  with,  to  tone  and  fix,  as 
well    as  to   wash   the   prints,  all   of  which 


TUB  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


195 


things  can  be  done  without  at  all   interfer- 
ing with  each  other. 

"  A  is  a  dark  curtain,  which  in  the  figure 
is  partly  raised,  but  during  the  silvering 
and  toning  processes  it  is  brought  down  to 
A/,  and  the  white  bleached  cloth  screen  B 
(which  is  shaded  in  the  figure  so  as  to  show 
it  more  distinctly)  covers  the  rest  of  the 
glass,  and  thus,  in  the  toning,  a  soft  and 
diffused  light  is  given  to  that  part  of  the 
room  (the  shelf  C)  where  the  toning  is  done. 
D  is  the  silvering-dish,  and  D/  is  the  place 
where  this  silvering-dish  is  kept  when  not 
ill  use.  E  is  where  the  kettle  of  potash  is 
kept  for  the  purpose  of  cleaning  old  plates. 
F  is  where  the  nitric  acid  tray  is  kept.  GG 
are  two  sinks.  H  is  a  shelf  on  which  the 
toning-bath  bottles  may  be  kept.  K  is  a 
rack  with  three  overlapping  pieces  of  wood, 
to  which  there  are  a  number  of  spring  clips 
attached,  which  hold  the  pictures  while 
draining,  as  they  are  removed  from  the 
water.  L  is  a  washing-tank  which  has  a 
perforated  false  hottom  through  which  the 
water  passes  into  the  lower  part  and  thence 
into  the  waste  pipe  I/.  The  stopcock  M  is 
adjusted  after  the  tank  becomes  three- 
quarters  filled,  *so  that  it  will  permit  the 
water  to  flow  out  as  fast  as  it  enters  through 
the  pipe  N.  P  P  is  an  overflow  pipe  which 
conducts  the  water,  when  it  reaches  that 
place,  into  the  waste  pipe  L/.  R  is  the  place 
where  the  hypo  dish  is  kept.  S  is  the  place 
where  the  two-gallon  hypo  bottle  is  placed 
This  bottle  is  always  kept  full  of  a  saturated 
solution  of  hyposulphite  of  sodium.  V  is 
the  door  that  leads  into  the  drying-room." 

In  the  second  chapter,  on  "  Silvering  the 
Albumen  Paper,"  he  says: 

"  Take  up  the  upper  right-hand  corner 
of  the  sheet  (the  length  of  it  should  run  from 
your  right  to  your  left  hand)  with  the  right 
hand,  and  the  lower  left-hand  corner  with 
your  left  hand,  and  let  the  sheet  assume  a 
curved  position,  the  right  hand  being  high- 
est. Lay  the  lower  left-hand  corner  of  the 
sheet  (which  you  have  hold  of  with  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  left  hand)  on 
the  upper  part  of  the  dish  (see  the  Fig.),  mid- 
way between  the  right  and  left  hand  corners, 
keeping  hold  of  the  turned-up  corner  while 
it  is  there,  for  the  purpose  of  guiding  the 
corner  to  its  proper  place  in  the  dish. 


"  As  you  hold  the  sheet  at  present,  the 
upper  right-hand  corner  is  up  in  the  air, 
being  held  there  with  the  right  hand. 


"  Now  draw  the  corner  that  is  on  the  solu- 
tion gently  towards  the  lower  left-hand 
corner  of  the  dish,  and  at  the  same  time 
slowly  lower  the  paper  on  the  bath  with  the 
right  hand,  so  that  by  the  time  the  lower 
left-hand  corner  of  the  paper  reaches  its 
proper  place,  the  whole  of  the  sheet  will  be 
lying  in  the  solution. 

u  The  drawing  of  the  paper  towards  you 
drives  the  bubbles  that  may  be  on  the  bath 
before  the  sheet,  so  that  when  the  sheet  is 
all  on  the  bath,  the  bubbles,  if  there  are  any, 
will  be  along  the  edges  of  and  beyond  the 
paper.  A  slight  tap  on  the  back  of  the 
paper  may  be  necessary,  but  that  is  all." 

Fig.  21.  Fig.  23.  Fig.  22. 


Figs.  21,  22,  and  23  are  illustrations  from 
Chapter  X,  on  "The  Treatment  of  the 
Negatives  before  Printing."  Fig.  21  repre- 
sents a  print  from  a  negative  that  gives 
hard,  black  shadows  ]  Fig.  22  shows  the  re- 
sult of  a  proper  manipulation  of  the  negative 
before  printing  ;  and  Fig.  23  shows  how  the 
treatment  may  be  carried  too  far  and  give 
a  flat,  insipid-looking  picture. 

We  would  gladly  have  given  a  whole 
chapter  as  a  specimen  of  the  work,  but  our 
space  will  not  permit.  We  commend  it  to 
the  perusal  of  all  interested  in  this  depart- 
ment of  our  art,  and  trust  that  our  purpose  in 
publishing  it  may  be  fully  realized  by  its 
benefiting  all  who  read  it.  The  advertise- 
ment will  give  you  an  idea  of  the  contents. 


196 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


SOAP  AND  ALCOHOL. 

We  learn  from  a  correspondent  in  the 
"West,  that  he  has  been  threatened  with 
prosecution  for  infringement,  by  a  party 
who  has  a  patent  for  a  varnish  composed  of 
castile  soap,  glycerin,  alcohol,  and  ammo- 
nia, because  said  correspondent  has  been 
lubricating  his  prints  with  a  solution  of 
soap  and  alcohol,  previous  to  passing  them 
through  the  burnisher. 

We  submitted  this  question  to  one  of  the 
ablest  patent  lawyers  in  this  country,  and 
have  his  professional  opinion.  He  says,  if 
one  ingredient  be  omitted  from  a  patent 
compound  it  is  no  infringement.  We  think 
our  brethren  may  continue  to  lubricate  and 
to  burnish,  without  regard  to  the  threats  of 
this  new  claimant. 


RALLYING  WORDS. 

BT    G.    H.   LOOMIS. 

I  find  in  perusing  your  journal,  many 
good  suggestions  relative  to  the  plans  and 
purposes  of  the  National  Photographic 
Association,  and  the  improvements  which 
each  successive  year  should  show  over  its 
predecessor.  If  I  am  not  too  late  for  the 
July  number,  I  would  like  to  restate  and 
emphasize  a  few  of  these  points. 

Though  I  have  not  before  me  the  pream- 
ble and  constitution  of  the  Association,  it  is 
safe  to  say,  that  the  cardinal  objects  are, 
progress  in  the  art  we  practice,  and  the 
cultivation  of  those  social  amenities  and 
courtesies  which  inspire  reciprocal  good  and 
stimulate  healthy  and  kindly  emulation. 

No  unprejudiced  observer  can  have  failed 
to  see,  that  since  the  organization  of  our 
national  and  local  associations,  great,  and 
indeed,  wonderful  progress  has  been  made 
in  our  beautiful  art.  This  progress  has 
been  the  result  of  a  free  and  generous  in- 
terchange of  thought  upon  the  theory  and 
practice  of  photography,  in  the  which  that 
mean  spirit  of  selfishness,  which  will  neither 
elaborate  an  idea  or  intrust  it  to  another, 
has  been  gradually  and  we  hope  perma- 
nently banished.  Though  in  business  pur- 
suits, most  if  not  all  of  us  are  "  playing  for 
money,"  it  is  a  refreshing  sight  we  occa- 
sionally enjoy  when  the    skilful   and  suc- 


cessful in  the  game  "show  their  hands," 
and  explain  to  the  uninitiated  how  it  was 
done.  It  has  always  proved  a  losing  in- 
vestment when  we  hide  our  talents,  be  they 
few  or  many,  instead  of  putting  them  at 
interest.  There  are  many  splendid  gems 
enveloped  in  secretive  and  selfish  brains, 
that  would  soon  be  utilized  and  rendered 
productive  if  they  could  be  got  at  or  drawn 
out  by  other  and  more  practical  minds. 
Cobwebs  are  not  considered  good  material, 
either  to  clothe  or  decorate  the  advanced 
guard  in  any  enterprise.  They  are  more 
becoming  the  Eip  Van  Winkle  snoozer,  and 
who  that  would,  unlike  him,  avoid  a  sorry 
waking,  had  better  take  shorter  naps. 

We  say  then,  brethren,  travel  more,  ob- 
serve more,  study  more,  and  above  all,  we 
beseech  you  to  forget  not  the  assembling  of 
yourselves  together,  for  inasmuch  as  ye  do 
these  things,  will  your  measure  of  success 
be  more  abundant  and  satisfactory. 

Heed  Hesler's  cordial  invitation  to  "go 
West;"  you  will  never  regret  it,  though  it 
takes  next  to  the  last  dollar  that's  owed 
you.  The  destroyed  and  rebuilt  city  of 
Chicago  and  its  environs  will  astonish  you, 
and  a  drive  through  it  is  alone  worth  a 
pilgrimage  across  the  continent.  We  say 
then  don't  fail  of  the  present  double  induce- 
ments to  attend  the  Convention  and  Exhibi- 
tion. Send  or  take  with  you  some  specimens 
of  your  skill  and  taste  as  an  artist,  at  the 
same  time  be  the  bearer  and  exponent  of 
some  live  practical  thoughts  and  suggestions 
relating  to  your  art,  its  advancement,  ele- 
vation, and  perfection.  Don't  forget,  how- 
ever, that  the  soul  of  wisdom  as  well  as  of 
wit  is  brevity. 

Sift  out  the  chaff,  and  as  Capt.  Cuttle 
would  say,  "give  us  solid  chunks  of  prac- 
tical common  sense."  Our  reports  are  get- 
ting too  unwieldy,  voluminous,  and  expen- 
sive, and  to  avoid  further  inflation  we  must 
boil  down  our  thoughts  and  concentrate  our 
ideas.  We  beg  pardon,  however,  for  giving 
so  much  unsolicited  advice.  As  we  were 
saying,  our  Chicago  friends  are  working  too 
hard  to  deserve  failure,  and  in  appreciation 
of  their  efforts  as  well  as  our  own  good,  let 
us  respond  generously  to  their  call.  Let  us 
throw  away  our  head-cloths,  emerge  from 
our  pent-up  laboratories,  and  bid  a  temporary 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEA  PH  EK. 


197 


aurevoir  to  business,  and  make  Chicago  the 
central  point  of  a  pleasant  and  profitable 
vacation.  Such  as  have  grievances  to  be 
redressed,  doubts  to  be  solved,  and  wrongs 
to  be  righted,  I  mean  of  course,  those  that 
have  a  connection  with  the  Association,  our 
advice  is  to  meet  with  your  brethren  in 
convention  assembled,  talk  over  the  matter 
in  a  spirit  of  equity  and  forbearance,  and 
while  yielding  nothing  to  wrong,  strive  to 
reach  the  right  through  the  agencies  that 
heal  rather  than  aggravate  any  such  dis- 
sensions that  may  exist.  To  such  as  are 
qualified  for  and  desire  official  positions,  we 
say  put  in  an  appearance.  The  martyrdom 
that  generally  waits  on  these  honors  is 
worth  experiencing,  and  it  ought  to  be 
"  passed  round."  During  good  behavior 
is  too  long  a  term,  and  for  such  as  abuse 
their  privileges,  resignation  or  removal  is 
a  duty,  and  retirement  a  blessing. 

We  believe  in  rotation  always,  provided 
that  we  are  outside  of  the  line.  Having 
once  filled  a  "local"  position,  involving 
some  little  personal  experience,  we  have 
ever  since  had  a  "  fellow  feeling  "  for  others 
likewise  honored,  and  while  the  situation  is 
very  useful  and  somewhat  agreeable,  it  has 
at  the  same  time  a  little  of  the  ar-daous 
about  it,  just  enough  for  me  to  ask  Brothers 
Ryder,  Rhoads,  Fitzgibbons,  and  Baker,  to 
join  me  in  one  glorious  hurrah  for  the 
health  and  success  of  the  present  incumbent. 
Brother  Hesler.  If  in  conclusion  I  do  not 
specially  mention  the  elective  board,  it  is 
not  because  my  condolence  is  either  local  or 
limited.  More,  my  brethren,  when  I  meet 
you  in  Chicago. 

VIEWS  ABROAD  AND  ACROSS. 

BY    EDWARD    L.    WILSON. 
VII. 

Here  we  are  on  Italian  soil, — not  exactly 
that  either,  for  we  are  in  Venice,  and  soil 
is  a  scarce  article  here.  We  were  awakened 
at  2  a.m.,  to  be  fumed!  Yes,  fumed,  like  so 
much  albumen  paper.  We  were  huddled 
into  a  room,  the  air  in  which  seemed  to 
become  at  once  filled  with  dust,  to  smell 
strongly  of  sulphuric  acid  and  chloride  of 
lime,  and  each  moment  to  grow  hotter. 
Our  baggage  was  also  spread  out,  and  when 


we  all  began  to  choke  and  sneeze,  the  doors 
were  opened,  and  we  were  let  out,  fumed, 
purified,  and  guaranteed  not  to  carry  any 
disease  into  Italy.  Four  hours  after  wo 
were  in  Venice,  floating  up  the  Grand 
Canal  in  a  gondola.  After  a  good  break- 
fast, we  proceeded  at  once  with  feasting 
upon  the  art  treasures  of  this  wondrous  city. 
Of  its  15,000  houses,  147  canals,  117  islands, 
and  378  bridges,  I  would  like  to  tell  you 
all,  but  I  am  warned  against  attempting  to 
write  a  book.  Wiser  ones  have  done  that, 
and  besides,  the  best  of  lantern  slides  can 
be  had  in  profusion  of  Venice,  which  with 
the  other  will  be  quite  as  satisfactory,  only 
you  cannot  ride  in  a  gondola.  Gondola 
riding  is  rest,  and  had  any  one  at  any  time 
during  the  enjoyment  of  that  luxury,  come 
to  me  with  any  sort  of  a  fair  offer  for  the 
Philadelphia  Photographer  and  the  remu- 
nerative office  of  Permanent  Secretary  of 
the  National  Photographic  Association,  and 
its  glowing  perquisites,  I  think  I  should 
have  been  tempted  to  sell  out,  buy  a  gon- 
dola and  two  oarsmen,  and  stay  in  Venice. 
The  first  thing  that  impresses  you  in 
Venice,  after  you  are  accustomed  to  the 
novelty  of  the  streets  of  water,  is  the  quiet 
of  the  city.  The  streets  are  innocent  of 
any  sort  of  wheeled  vehicle,  or  of  horse's 
hoof.  Think  then  how  different  must  be 
the  industries  of  a  city  like  that  from  those 
of  our  own  busy  cities.  The  principal 
noises  of  Venice  are 
made  by  the  gondo- 
liers, who  shout  "  turn 
to  the  right,"  or  "the 
left,"  as  they  approach 
a  turn  in  the  canals,  and 
of  the  cries  of  the  vend- 
ors of  merchandise,  who 
carry  their  wares  upon 
their  heads.  Among 
these  latter  some  very 
picturesque  sights  are  to 
be  seen.  I  noticed  among 
others,  almost  daily,  a 
tall,  handsome  fellow, 
with  a  great  pumpkin  on 
his  head,  shouting  as  loud  as  he  could,  until 
hesold  his  pumpkin.  Pumpkin  is  a  standard 
article  of  food  in  Venice.  Every  way  we 
turned  we  saw  things  that  were  beautiful. 


As  loud  as  he  could. 


198 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


The  buildings,  many  of  them,  were  once 
palaces,  and  give  one  all  possible  enjoyment 
in  the  study  of  architecture.  It  is  very 
evident  that  they  were  erected  by  a  very 
different  race  of  people  from  those  who  in- 
habit them  now.  We  visited  several  of 
these  palaces,  and  to  speak  only  of  the 
buildings  themselves,  I  never  saw  such  a 
display  of  everything  beautiful  in  the  way 
of  decorative  architecture.  Thegreat  mar- 
ble fronts  spring  up  from  the  canals  like 
beautiful  water-lilies.  Each  row  of  win- 
dows represents  a  different  variety  ;  each 
doorway  is  a  wonder  ;  frescoes  once  adorned 
the  fronts,  else  the  most  elaborate  carvings 
in  marble,  overtopped  by  cornices  to  har- 


monize. Even  more  beautiful  than  the 
front  of  the  house  is  the  court-3'ard  very 
often.     Here  is  an  example.     A    stairway 


of  most  beautiful  design  and  proportions, 
such  as  would  cost  a  fortune  here  to  possess  ;  a 
veranda  whose  arches  and  columns  are  each 
a  study,  and  in  the  yard  the  well  is  inclosed 
by  bronze  of  exquisite  design,  worth  now 
almost  its  weight  in  gold.  Again,  the 
bridges  of  Venice  are,  many  of  them,  of 
great  beauty.  The  Kialto,  about  which  so 
much  has  been  written  and  said,  is  the  king 
of  all.  Twelve  thousand  piles  were  driven 
first  to  rest  it  upon.  It  is  but  158  feet  long 
and  46  feet  wide,  but  a  row  of  shops  lines 
each  side,  and  it  presents  a  busy  scene.  It 
is  all  of  beautiful  white  marble.  The  Bridge 
of  Sighs  is  small,  and  not  particularly  beau- 
tiful, but  is  famous  for  its  dreadful  his- 
tory. Many  a  mil- 
lionaire has  walked 
across  its  narrow 
length,  well  know- 
ing all  his  wealth 
could  never  return 
him  alive.  We 
walkediicross  it  and 
never  returned.  We 
were  led  down  into 
the  dreadful  dun- 
geons on  the  other 
side,  then  through 
them  under  the  ca- 
nal, up  and  out  into 
the  court-yard  of 
the  Ducal  Palace. 

But  the  great  at- 
tractions in  Venice 
are  the  churches. 
Not  usually  noted 
for  the  remarkable 
beauties  of  their  ex- 
teriors, but  they  con- 
tain such  a  wealth 
of  art  treasures  as 
to  make  each  one  a 
museum  of  such 
things.  Da j'  after 
day  we  wandered 
among  them  feast- 
ing upon  the  works 
of  Titian,  and  the 
Tintorettos,  and  of 
Paul  Veronese,  and  Bellini,  and  Cano- 
va,  and  many  other  great  painters  and 
sculptors.     The  old  Church   of  St.  Mark's, 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


L99 


with  its  five  domes,  is  curious  above  all 
others.  The  ceilings  and  floors  and  walls 
alike  are  made  up  of  mysterious  mosaic 
pictures,  some  of  them  almost  equal  to 
paintings  in  oil.  For  eight  hundred  years 
this  old  pile  has  stood,  exciting  won- 
der and  admiration.  Directly  in  front 
stands  its  campanile  or  bell-tower,  804  feet 
high.  The  top  is  reached  by  a  series  of  in- 
clined planes,  and  from  it  there  is  a  mag- 
nificent view  of  the  curious  city  below,  of 
the  Lagoon,  the  Adriatic  Sea,  the  distant 
mountains  in  one  direction,  and  fifty  miles  of 
the  far-off  snowy  Alps  in  another.  The 
Grand  Ducal  Palace  and  library  are  among 
the  chief  attractions,  and  contain  acres  of  pic- 
tures, which  bewilder  the  brain  to  contem- 
plate. We  saw  hundreds  of  sculptured 
tombs,  among  them  that  of  Canova,  the 
great  sculptor  ;  carved  choir-stalls,  whose 
every  panel  represents  a  scene  in  Scripture 
history — the  work  of  generations  ;  cloisters 
whose  rich  adornments  make  one  fairly 
shudder  at  the  thought  of  the  immense  out- 
lay of  labor  and  gold  which  they  must  have 
cost ;  single  tombs  which  cost  enough  money 
to  furnish  a  cemetery  that  would  satisfy 
the 'most  exacting;  rich  marbles,  whose 
color  and  polish  fairly  dazed  us  ;  paintings 
and  bronzes  and  mosaics  of  all  varieties  and 

grades.  Day 
after  day  we 
took  them 
in,  often  for- 
getting that 
our  bodies 
needed  re- 
pose. To  go 
into  detail 
concerning 
them  would 
but  tire  you. 
Much  may 
be  learned 
about  them 
from  books 
of  travel  and 
from  the  art 
workswhich 
Streets  iwujeef  wide.  ou,.  publish- 

ers offer  in  their  catalogues. 

As  we  rode  from  place  to  place  in  the  gon- 
dola, we  could  see  many  curious  sights.     In 


the  evenings  we  gathered  with  the  people  to 
listen  to  the  music  of  the  marine  band,  in 
St.  Mark's  Place.  This  is  the  largest 
space  of  ground  in  Venice,  and  measures 
575  feet  by  268  feet,  in  the  shape  of  an 
L.  All  the  principal  buildings  and  many 
of  the  finest  stores  front  upon  it.  There 
are  streets  upon  land  in  Venice,  of  course, 
but  the  most  of  them  are  mere  passages, 
about  only  two  feet  wide,  i.  e.}  as  far  as 
you  can  reach  with  two  feet,  as  was  proven 
by  actual  experiment.  It  was  a  great  pleas- 
ureand  privilege  to  havethecompany  of  Dr. 
Vogel  here.  He  had  visited  Venice  before, 
and  was  therefore  not  a  stranger,  although 
he  remarked  that  all  seemed  as  new  and  as 
fresh  to  him  as  at  first.  At  nearly  every 
turn  in  this  city  one  sees  the  evidence  that 
those  who  erected  and  adorned  it  were  art- 
ists and  art  lovers.  Pictures  for  the  camera 
bristle  up  about  you  in  all  directions,  and 
really  photography  is  one  of  the  principal 
industries,  for  no  one  leaves  Venice  with- 
out a  good  supply  of  photographs.  They 
are  well  taken  as  a  usual  thing,  and  very 
cheap,  of  all  sizes,  from  carte  to  full  sheet. 
The  largest  producer  is  Signor  Charles  Naya, 
who  has  not  only  very  fine  salesrooms  on 
St.  Mark's  Place,  but  a  very  extensive 
manufactory,  so  to  speak,  near  the  Grand 
Canal.  We  visited  both,  and  found  much 
to  interest  us.  We  noticed  before  in  many 
of  the  churches,  a  camera  standing  alone, 
exposed  to  some  bit  of  carving  or  sculpture 
or  painting.  These  were  the  servants  of 
Signor  Naya.  Heusesdry  plates,  andonsuch 
objects  where  the  changes  of  light  are  not 
great,  and  where  there  is  not  much  light  at 
all,  he  often  exposes  as  much  as  five  days. 
Of  course  this  cannot  be  done  with  exterior 
views.  There  are  few  photographic  estab- 
lishments in  Europe  more  extensive  than 
Signor  Naya's.  He  occupies  the  whole  of 
what  was  once  an  immense  palace.  His 
business  is  divided  systematically  into  de- 
partments, in  each  of  which  is  the  usual 
number  of  assistants.  Madame  Naya  pre- 
sides over  all,  and  we  found  her  most  agree- 
able and  intelligent.  We  were  courteously 
shown  the  whole  establishment,  and  all  the 
operations,  from  the  preparation  of  the 
plates  to  the  printing  and  finishing.  Fresh 
water  is  a  scarce  article  in  Venice,  and  is 


200 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


brought  to  the  photographer  daily.  Wash- 
ing the  prints,  therefore,  must  be  done  in 
the  most  economical  manner — more  econom- 
ical, sad  experience  tells  me,  than  effectual, 
I  am  sorry  to  say.  Signor  Naya  produces 
some  very  pretty  results,  by  printing  on 
blue  paper,  and  then  coloring  the  buildings, 
and  putting  in  clouds.  The  results  look 
like  pictures  elaborately  colored,  but  they 
are  sold  remarkably  low.  Signor  Naya 
understands  the  policy  of'saving  his  wastes, 
and  altogether  his  establishment  is  one  of 
the  best  managed  I  ever  saw,  throughout. 
I  carried  away  a  great  weight  of  his  pic- 
tures, and  they  refresh  my  memory  of  the 
lovely  breathing-time  we  had  in  "Venice, 
my  beautiful." 

As  Dr.  Vogel  and  I  floated  along  under 
the  awning  of  our  gondola,  we  frequently 
remarked  how  blessed  it  was  thus  to  be  away 
from  the  imperious  duties  of  journalism. 
One  day  we  were  paid  up  for  such  sinful 
thoughts  by  bad  news.  Dr.  Vogel's  publisher 
had  got  into  some  distress  with  a  work  in 
press,  and  I  had  to  lose  my  beloved  and 
best  of  companions.  He  had  to  go  back  to 
Berlin,  and  I  left  Venice  disconsolate  and 
alone  to  continue  my  journey. 

From  Venice  to  Florence,  and  at  once  to 
work.  Here  the  churches  are  also  very  at- 
tractive with  their  pillars,  and  columns,  and 
carved  work,  and  tapestry,  and  tombs,  and 
chapels,  and  sculpture,  and  bronzes,  and 
paintings,  the  love  tokens  of  the  once  fa- 
mous Medici — the  works  of  Thorwaldsen, 
Michael  Angelo,  and  their  contemporaries. 
One  of  the  most  dazzling  sights  is  the  Chapel 
of  the  Princes.  It  is  an  octagonal  building 
of  one  room — the  interior  inlaid  and  cov- 
ered from  floor  to  dome  with  precious  mar- 
bles, alabasters,  agates,  chalcedonies,  petri- 
fied woods,  and  precious  stones  of  all  con- 
ceivable colors,  wrought  and  polished  in 
the  highest  style  of  art,  the  whole  sur- 
mounted by  a  dome  decorated  with  beauti- 
ful frescoes.  This  elaborate  structure  cost 
$5,000,000.  Now  we  go  to  others,  and  are 
in  the  midst  of  the  works  of  Fra  Bartolo- 
meo,  Andrea  del  Sarto,  and  Taddeo  Gaddi. 
Madonnas,  and  martyrs,  and  magi  are  pic- 
tured in  profusion,  and  my  life-dream  of 
being  in  the  presence  of  these  works  of  the 
old  masters  is  realized,  but  there  is  such  a  be- 


wildering amount  of  all  that  I  can  hardly 
realize  it.  I  ply  all  the  art  knowledge  which 
I  have  ever  attained,  and  I  find  it  to  give  me 
great  good  service, for  I  can  enjoy  and  under- 
stand to  a  degree  which  I  could  not  have 
done  without  it.  Oh !  how  I  wished  that 
the  National  Photographic  Association 
could  hold  one  of  its  conventions  here,  and 
studjr  these  exquisite  examples  of  composi- 
tion, light  and  shade,  and  color  !  Photog-' 
raphy  would  take  a  leap,  then,  that  would 
cause  more  excitement  than  the  birth  of  the 
art  itself,  for  I  am  sure  there  is  the  material 
in  the  present  generation  of  photographers 
to  do  it  if  it  is  only  rightly  developed. 

The  Cathedral  at  Florence  is  one  of  the 
wonders  of  that  city.  It  was  erected  A.D. 
1298  to  A.D  1474,  and  displays  three  differ- 
ent styles  of  architecture.  Black  and 
white  marble  piled  up  in  various  designs 
make  up  its  exterior.  Five  hundred  and 
sixteen  steps  take  you  to  the  giant  cross  on 
the  summit  of  the  dome.  The  interior  is 
one  of  the  most  superb  examples  of  Gothic 
architecture  in  the  world — 555  feet  long, 
340  feet  wide.  The  great  Gothic  arches  of 
sombre  gray  inside  are  overcoming,  and 
rest  on  columns  twelve  feet  in  diameter. 
When  Arnolfi,  the  designer  of  these  arches, 
saw  them,  he  said  :  "  God  preserve  my  work 
from  thunder ;  I  have  preserved  it  from 
earthquake."  The  Baptistery  is  close  by, 
and  among  its  treasures  are  the  famous  three 
bronze  doors,  one  of  which  Rogers  used  as 
his  model  for  the  great  bronze  door  at  the 
Capitol  in  Washington.  It  was  the  custom 
in  olden  time  to  build  the  church,  the  bap- 
tistery, and  the  campanile  or  bell-tower  close 
to  but  separate  from  each  other,  instead  of  all 
combined  in  one  grand  structure  with  a 
steeple  as  is  now  the  custom.  Therefore,  we 
must  not  forget,  what  is  perhaps  the  most 
beautiful  of  all  campanili,  the  one  belonging 
to  the  Cathedral  here  at  Florence.  It  was 
commenced  in  A.D  1334  by  Giotto,  and  is 
sometimes  called  Giotto's  Tower.  It  is  293 
feet  high,  and  consists  of  four  stories,  the 
lowest  of  which  is  richly  decorated  with  bas- 
reliefs  and  statues.  Among  the  former  are 
the  seven  works  of  mercy,  seven  beatitudes, 
seven  sacraments,  and  seven  cardinal  vir- 
tues. At  the  summit  are  three  pillars,  on 
which  Giotto  intended  to  raise  a  spire  100 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


201 


feet  high.  It  is  of  white  and  black  marble. 
One  never  forgets  the  sublimo  view  from  its 
top.  The  annexed  drawing  of  it  is  from 
Longfellow's  Flower  de  Luce,*  from  whose 
song  we  quote : 

"  In  the  old  Tuscan  town  stands  Giotto's  tower, 
The  lily  of  Florence  blossoming  in  stone, — 

A  vision,  a  delight,  and  a  desire, — 
The  builder's  perfect  and  centennial  flower, 

That  in  the  night  of  ages  bloomed  alone, 
But  wanting  still  the  glory  of  the  spire." 


We  are  now  at  the  Palace  Vecchio  !  On 
the  left  Michael  Angelo's  "  David  ;"  on  the 
right  Cellini's  "  Perseus,"  and  in  front  of  us 
the  "  Rape  of  the  Sabines, "  "Judith,"  and 
many  other  original  works  of  art.  Up  one 
hundred  and  twenty-six  steps,  and  we  are 
in  the  Uffizi  Gallery,  at  the  end  of  a- corri- 
dor 600  feet  long,  lined  with  statuary  and 
other  works  of  art.     On  the  other  side  is  a 

i 
*  Published  by  J.  R    Osgood  &  Co.,  Boston. 


twin  to  this,  Rich  treasures  surrounded  us 
— a  week's  work  at  least  to  see  them  all. 
Fifty  artists  were  here  making  abortive 
copies,  and  every  few  yards  stood  a  camera 
dumb,  but  doing  its  work  better  than  the 
women  and  men  of  the  brush.  I  was  also 
dumb  with  awe  and  delight.  Here  was 
Niobe,  and  the  Venus  de  Medici  with  not,  a 
straight  line  about  it,  and  the  Wrestlers, 
and  the  Cymbal  players,  and  paintings, 
cameos,  jewels, gems,  draw- 
ings, inscriptions,  bronzes, 
and  what  not.  Paintings 
of  the  Dutch,  Tuscan,  Vene- 
tian, Flemish,  German, and 
French  schools,  in  profu- 
sion. Now  through  an 
avenue  lined  with  hand- 
wrought  tapestry — ten  mi- 
nutes' walk  and  we  are  in 
the  Pitti  Palace,  where  are 
fourteen  saloons  of  pictures 
by  Carlo  Dolci,  Caracci, 
and  others.  llubens'"Holy 
Family,"  Titian's  "Magda- 
len," Rembrandt's  "Old 
Man,"  Carlo  Dolci's  "Mar- 
tyrdom of  St.  Andrew," 
are  all  here,  with  a  num- 
ber of  Salvator  Rosa's  best 
landscapes.  What  folly  for 
me  to  try  to  give  you  any 
conception  of  all  these 
things.  We  must  some  day 
go  back  to  them,  and  study 
some  of  the  lessons  they 
teach  more  carefully.  Can 
any  one  do  any  sort  of  jus- 
tice in  such  a  hasty  "view" 
as  this  to  the  city  where 
Dante,  and  Galileo,  and 
Petrarch  lived,  and  where 
the  great  masters  produced  their  treasures  in 
such  profusion  ?  No  wonder  our  own  Powers 
and  Mrs.  Browning,  and  many  of  our  mod- 
ern artists,  loved  Florence  so  they  could  not 
getaway,  /wanted  to  stay  there  too.  I  went 
sadly  to  Sig.  Brogi,  the  eminent  photogra- 
pher there,  and  selected  all  I  could  carry  of 
his  photographs  of  these  Florentine  treas- 
ures, the  last  evening  I  was  there,  and 
overcome  I  proceeded  to  my  hotel,  and  pre- 
pared for  Rome.     I  wanted  a  bath,  and  an 


202 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Whose  monument  is  thai  f 


hour  or  so  after  I  called  for  it  a  porter  came 
and  announced  that  "  the  water  had  been  or- 
dered." An- 
other hour  or 
two,  and  a  wo- 
man opened 
the  door  and 
set  in  a  vessel 
of  immense 
capacity  and 
odd  shape  fill- 
ed with  water. 
I  looked  at  it, 
and  then  at 
her,  and  do  you 
wonder,  after 
the  days  that 
T  had  been  delving  around  among  these 
ancient  marbles  and  bronzes,  that  I  asked, 
Whose  monument  is  that  ? 

PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  FRANCE. 

BV    ERNEST    LACAN. 

Photographers  who  have  to  make  nu- 
merous and  cheap  prints  have  sought  for  a 
long  time  for  an  economical  process  which 
would  give  them  acceptable  pictures,  and 
which  at  the  same  time  would  reduce  the 
strength  of  the  silver  bath.  Several  meth- 
ods of  this  kind  have  been  used  and  pub- 
lished, but  it  must  be  admitted  that  the 
printing  is  more  or  less  injuriously  affected 
by  the  parsimony  exercised  in  the  composi- 
tion of  the  bath.  I  have  just  received  from 
a  professional  photographer,  established  in 
a  provincial  town,  a  communication  on  this 
subject  which  appears  to  me  to  merit  atten- 
tion. 

The  author  of  the  letter  referred  to  above, 
M.  Thierree,  uses  a  bath  composed  of  80 
cubic  centimetres,  2.70  fluid  ounces  of  dis- 
tilled water,  12  grammes  (185  grains)  of 
crystallized  nitrate  of  silver,  and  20  cubic 
centimetres  (0.67  fluid  ounces)  of  alcohol  at 
40°.  The  sheet  of  paper  should  float  on 
this  bath  for  three  or  four  minutes,  then  it 
is  passed  over  a  long  glass  rod  on  the  albu- 
menized  side,  to  return  to  the  dish  the  ex- 
cess of  liquid  Then  the  paper  is  dried. 
The  desiccation  is  rapid,  owing  to  the  fact 
that  the  paper  has  taken  up  only  a  very 
little  of  the  liquid,  which  contains  20  per 


cent,  of  alcohol,  evaporating  very  rapidly. 
It  is  easy  to  understand  that  a  very  small 
quantity  of  the  bath  is  lost,  and  that  it  re- 
tains for  a  longer  time  its  volume  and  its 
strength.  It  is  used  until  it  has  fallen  to  5 
per  cent.,  then  it  is  brought  back  to  its 
original  strength.  From  time  to  time  alco- 
hol is  added,  so  that  the  bath  should  always 
have  an  appreciable  odor  of  it.  The  author 
of  the  communication  asserts  that,  even 
during  the  hottest  weather,  discoloration 
never  takes  place  in  the  nitrate  solution  ; 
the  coagulation  of  the  albumen  being  com- 
plete there  is  no  danger  of  sulphuration. 
The  bath,  although  very  weak,  gives  irre- 
proachable prints,  as  the  proportion  of  silver 
lowered  to  five  or  six  degrees  is  quite  suffi- 
cient to  transform  into  chloride  of  silver 
the  salt  which  is  mixed  with  the  albumen, 
and  to  convert  a  portion  of  this  last  into 
albuminate  of  silver;  besides  the  paper, 
freed  by  the  draining  of  the  glass  rod  from 
the  excess  of  nitrate  which  is  ordinarily 
allowed  to  remain,  preserves  its  whiteness 
for  a  longer  time;  in  fact  the  albumen 
promptly  coagulated  by  the  sensitizing  so- 
lution, becomes  less  permeable,  and  protects 
the  substance  and  the  sizing  of  the  paper. 
The  toning  is  obtained  by  the  double  chlo- 
ride of  gold  and  potassium,  and  the  use  of 
chalk.  It  results  from  an  experiment  made 
by  M  Thierree,  that  each  whole  sheet  sen- 
sitized in  this  manner  absorbs  only  1.05 
grammes  of  nitrate  instead  of  3  grammes, 
which  it  absorbs  by  the  ordinary  process ; 
in  short  the  advantages  claimed  by  the  au- 
thor for  his  process  are:  the  consolidation 
of  the  albumen  coating,  the  maintaining  of 
the  volume,  and  the  purity  of  the  bath,  the 
rapid  desiccation,  the  longer  preservation 
of  the  sensitized  paper,  and  economy  in  the 
use  of  the  nitrate  of  silver.  I  inclose  in 
this  letter  a  print  obtained  by  this  process. 
A  chemist,  who  is  already  well  known  to 
photographers  by  divers  special  prepara- 
tions, Mr.  Encausse,  also  communicates  to 
me  si une  interesting  observations  concern- 
ing the  silver  bath  and  albumenzed  paper. 
He  wished  to  ascertain  the  cause  to  which 
should  be  attributed  the  fading  of  certain 
prints;  for  that  purpose  he  rendered  them 
sufficiently  transparent  to  be  studied  under 
a  microscope,  and  he  discovered  that  certain 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


203 


portions  of  them  were  absolutely  without 
albumen.  Ho  thought  that  this  arose  from 
an  imperfect  coagulation  at  the  time  that 
the  paper  is  sensitized,  and  to  convince  him- 
self he  operated  in  the  following  manner  : 
After  having  prepared  some  albumen,  he 
divided  it  into  three  parts;  the  first,  em- 
ployed pure  and  chlorided  by  a  mixture  of 
chloride  of  sodium,  corresponding  to  3  per 
cent,  of  albumen,  gave  him  a  very  brilliant 
paper;  the  second,  mixed  with  10  per  cent, 
of  its  weight  of  distilled  water,  and  chlo- 
rided as  the  first  at  3  per  cent.,  gave  a  more 
even  but  less  brilliant  coating;  the  third 
portion,  diluted  with  20  per  cent,  of  its 
weight  of  distilled  water,  was  chlorided  like 
the  others  at  3  percent.  In  preparing  these 
three  samples  of  paper  Mr.  Encausse  wished 
to  ascertain  the  action  of  the  nitrate  of  silver 
on  different  thicknesses  of  albumen,  and 
his  experiments  have  convinced  him  that 
in  the  three  samples  the  albumen  was  only 
completely  coagulated  when  exposed  to  the 
same  degree  of  acidity  of  the  sensitizing 
bath.  The  thickness  of  the  albumen  coat- 
ing on  paper  is  of  very  little  importance  in 
regard  to  the  stability  of  the  prints,  but  by 
experiments  which  followed  those  men- 
tioned above,  Mr.  Encausse  has  discovered 
that  non-coagulated  albumen  is  easily  dis- 
solved in  ordinary  water.  What  will  be- 
come of  this  albumen  after  having  passed 
through  the  toning  and  fixing  baths?  It 
is  true  that  after  the  action  of  light  the  me- 
tallic coating  of  silver  preserves  it,  but  this 
coating  cannot  be  retained  and  solidified  on 
those  portions  where  the  albumen  is  not  co- 
agulated. It  results  from  this  that  the  use 
of  neutral  silver  baths  should  be  rejected. 

Mr.  Leiberthas  just  announced  a  novelty 
which  produces  here  a  lively  sensation. 
Here  it  is : 

Since  about  two  years  might  be  seen  ex- 
posed in  different  stores,  especially  rented 
for  this  purpose,  portrait  enlargements  ex- 
ceeding in  perfection  everything  that  has 
heretofore  been  obtained  in  that  style. 
These  splendid  specimens  were  signed  Lam- 
bert &  Vuillier.  One  day  these  gentlemen 
sent  circulars  to  all  photographers,  in  which 
they  announced  that  they  would  disclose 
the  secret  of  their  process  when  they  should 
have  obtained  a  certain  number  of  subscri- 


bers willing  to  pny  the  sum  which  they 
specified.  They  added  that  up  to  that  time 
they  would  execute  for  photographers  all 
the  orders  which  might  be  sent  to  them. 
At  the  same  time  they  presented  to  the  Pho- 
tographic Society  a  series  of  specimens  which 
called  forth  the  admiration  as  well  as  the 
despair  of  all  the  portraitists  who  saw  them  ; 
for  after  the  most  careful  examination  by 
the  most  experienced  persons  it  was  impos- 
sible to  determine  in  what  manner  these 
prints  were  obtained.  Now,  the  mode  of 
subscription  proposed  by  Messrs.  Lambert 
&  Vuillier  is  not  favorably  looked  upon  in 
France,  and  on  the  other  hand  it  was  in- 
convenient to  have  them  execute  all  the  en- 
largements which  were  needed.  To-day 
things  have  changed.  Mr.  Lambert,  the 
inventor,  remaining  the  sole  possessor  of  his 
process,  has  taken  out  letters-patent,  and  is 
preparing  to  grant  rights  to  all  those  who 
apply  for  them  through  Mr.  Leibert,  whom 
he  has  just  taken  into  partnership  in  this 
affair. 

I  assisted  at  an  exhibition  of  the  process 
made  by  Mr.  Lambert,  in  the  presence  of 
several  of  our  principal  photographers,  pur- 
chasers of  licenses,  and  I  declare  that  we 
were  all  astonished  at  the  simplicity  of  the 
operations  and  the  beauty  of  the  results  ob- 
tained in  our  presence.  It  was  at  the  end 
of  April,  at  5  o'clock  p.m.  Mr.  Leibert 
took  a  transparent  positive  portrait  on  glass 
by  the  carbon  process,  and  placed  it  in  the 
back  portion  of  an  ordinary  bellows  camera, 
half  plate,  furnished  with  its  objective 
(aplanatic  or  any  other)  serving  as  ampli- 
fier. The  positive,  placed  against  the  trans- 
parent glass  of  the  window,  whose  remain- 
ing portion  is  covered  with  yellow  paper, 
receives  the  diffused  light  reflected  by  a 
simple  mirror  placed  outside  the  window. 
The  enlarged  image  is  projected  into  the 
interior  of  the  operating-room  on  a  collo- 
dionized  and  sensitized  plate  placed  on  an 
ordinary  copying-stand.  This  is  all  the  ap- 
paratus required.  At  the  experiment  at 
which  we  assisted,  the  exposure  lasted  only 
six  minutes,  notwithstanding  the  late  hour. 
The  developed  image  appeared  to  us  rather 
weak,  but  we  learned  later  that  it  was  nec- 
essary that  it  should  be  so. 

It  is  never  necessary  to  have  recourse  to 


204 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


intensifying;  in  reality  the  manner  in 
which  the  retouches  are  made  enables  the 
operator  to  give  to  the  large  negative  all  the 
vigor  of  tone  desirable.  These  retouches, 
which  are  done  by  hand,  are  applied  by  a 
process  that  I  may  not  reveal,  as  therein 
lies  the  whole  of  the  invention,  but  what  I 
may  say  is  that  this  process  is  extremely 
simple,  very  easily  executed,  and  very  expe- 
ditions. After  one  hour's  work  the  enlarged 
portrait  from  a  very  defective  positive  can 
be  made  as  perfect  as  if  an  artist  had  spent 
several  days  in  retouching  it.  It  is  unnec- 
essary to  state  that  this  method  of  retouch- 
ing can  be  applied  with  equal  success  to  all 
negatives,  enlarged  or  not. 

Apropos  of  enlargements  I'  would  men- 
tion here  a  very  ingenious  heliostat  which 
was  presented  to  the  Photographic  Society 
at  the  meeting  of  May  6th.  The  reflecting 
mirror  is  furnished  with  a  support  which 
allows  the  necessary  inclination  to  be  given 
to  the  glass  with  respect  to  the  different 
heights  which  the  sun  takes  during  the  year. 
This  inclination  once  given  to  the  mechan- 
ism (whose  system  of  wheels  is  so  arranged 
that  the  motion  decreases  from  morning  to 
noon,  and  increases  from  noon  to  night), 
communicates  to  the  glass  the  inclined  and 
circular  movement  which  causes  it  to  follow 
with  perfect  regularity  the  apparent  motion 
of  the  sun,  and  to  maintain  the  luminous 
rays  in  an  invariable  direction.  In  this 
manner  the  enlarged  prints  should  be  much 
sharper.  This  instrument  is  also  made 
without  the  clockwork  movement ;  in  this 
case,  after  having  inclined  the  glass  accord- 
ing to  the  height  of  the  sun,  it  is  only  nec- 
essary to  give  with  the  hand  a  rotary  mo- 
tion. The  inventor  of  this  ingenious  appa- 
ratus is  Mr.  Derogy,one  of  our  most  skilful 
opticians. 


A  FEW  USEFUL  HINTS. 

BY    R.    BENECKE. 

I  send  you  a  few  items,  which  you  may 
publish  for  the  benefit  of  the  fraternity. 
The  first,  and  I  think  a  very  important 
improvement,  is,  as  you  will  see  from  the 
inclosed  photograph,  an  attachment  to  Mr. 
Cramer's  Bismarck  Head-rest.  Whenever  a 
plate  is  spoiled  by  moving  of  the  sitter,  I 


have  noticed,  it  is  in  nine  cases  out  of  ten 
where  an  ordinary   head-rest  is  used,  that 


the  motion  was  up  and  down,  caused  by  the 
expansion  and  collapse  of  the  chest  during 
the  sitting.  This  rest  is  very  easily  ad- 
justed, and  has  proved  to  me  to  be  of  so 
much  service  in  portraiture,  that  I  am  con- 
vinced that  all  my  photographic  brethren 
will  like  it.  I  think  the  agent  for  Cramer's 
rest  would  be  willing  to  put  this  addition 
to  that  already  very  excellent  head-rest. 
The  extra  expense  would  not  amount.  I 
think,  to  more  than  fifty  or  seventy-five 
cents.  Another  little  dodge  I  have  intro- 
duced into  my  practice.  The  object  is  to 
see  at  one  glance  whether  a  plan,  map,  &c  , 
to  be  copied,  stands  parallel  with  the  in- 
strument. It  is  nothing  but  a  straight 
board  about  six  or  eight  inches  square,  in 
the  centre  of  which  a  round  stick  is  fastened 
perpendicularly.  Thus :  Let  the  board  be 
of  a  dark  color,  and  the 
stick  white.  Now  hold 
it  or  hang  it  by  a  string 
in  front  of  the  drawing; 
let  the  stick  be  there 
where  the  two  diagon- 
als would  cross  each  other.  Next  point 
your  camera  at  it.  Now  if  you  see  in  the 
centre  of  your  ground-glass  a  white  circular 
spot  on  dark  ground,  your  drawing-board 
and  camera  stand  correct;  if  not,  that  is  if 
you  see  the  picture  of  this  contrivance  too 
high  or  too  low,  lower  or  raise  your  instru- 
ment, and  shift  it  until  you  see  no  more  of 
the  stick  but  a  white  spot  on  black  ground. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


205 


The    following   sketch    will    explain    it    at 


Here  is  another  item.  It  is  very  desir- 
able often  to  ascertain  the  exact  amount  of 
nitrate  of  silver  contained  in  a  solution  that 
holds  -other  salts,  nitrate  of  ammonia,  for 
instance,  and  where  consequently  an  actino- 
hydrometer  cannot  be  used.  The  plan  I 
have  adopted  is  this  :  Take,  say  one-half 
ounce  of  the  solution  to  be  tested,  add  mu- 
riatic acid  until  all  chloride  of  silver  is  pre- 
cipitated, an  excess  won't  hurt;  take  two 
pieces  of  filtering-paper,  both  of  the  same 
size  and  kind,  put  them  in  a  funnel  and 
pour  the  chloride,  &c,  on  it;  pour  also 
three  or  four  times  water  on  it  to  wash  out 
the  nitrates.  Now,  after  it  has  ceased  drip- 
ping, spread  the  filters  on  an  old  daguerreo- 
type plate,  ferrotype  plate,  or  piece  of  glass ; 
put  it  in  a  hot  place,  and  soon  you  will 
have  the  dry  chloride  of  silver  on  your 
filter.  Next  pull  your  two  filters  apart; 
put  the  one  that  has  the  chloride  on  one 
side  of  the  scales,  and  the  other  empty  filter 
on  the  other.  Now  weigh  the  chloride. 
By  aid  of  the  following  table  you  can  cal- 
culate at  once  how  many  grains  of  nitrate 
of  silver  there  were  in  the  solution. 

1  grain  Chloride  of  Silver  =  1.18  Nitrate  of  Silver. 


10 


=  2.37 
=  3.55 
=  4.74 
=  5.92 
=  7.11 
=  8.29 
=  9.48 
=  10.66 
=  11.85 


To  illustrate  this  mode  by  an  example,  we 
will  suppose  we  foun,d  the  chloride  contained 
in  one-half  ounce  of  the  solution  to  weigh 
eighteen  grains,  or  double  that  amount, 
thirty-six  grains,  in  one  ounce. 


30  gra.  Chloride  of  Silver  =  35. 55  Nitrate  of  Silver 
6  "  "  "  =    7.11 

42.66   the  amount  of 
nitrate  of  silver  in  one  ounce  of  the  tested  solu 
tion. 

Doctors  seem  to  agree  now  that,  in  order 
to  get  the  greatest  brilliancy  and  perma- 
nency in  silver-prints,  a  short  but  thorough 
washing  is  the  plan  to  be  followed.  I  have 
some  prints  now,  made  in  1858,  which  show 
no  signs  of  fading  yet,  and  were  washed 
with  very  little  water.  They  were  washed 
by  causing  the  water  to  fall  on  them  from  a 
height  of  ten  to  twelve  feet.  I  placed  them 
on  a  board,  and  by  means  of  a  long  pole 
nailed  to  it  which  I  lowered  from  my  win- 
dow, I  caught  the  stream  of  water  on  them. 
The  paper  would  become  quite  translucent, 
as  if  it  had  been  oiled,  but  would  be  all 
right  again  on  drying.  With  one  bucket 
of  water  I  used  to  wash  three  whole  size 
prints.  This  was  a  rather  tedious  way,  but 
some  plan  could  easily  be  devised  by  which 
the  same  process  could  be  applied  on  a  large 
scale. 

A  few  more  dodges  I  will  reserve  for  my 
next  letter,  if  you  will  take  the  trouble  to 
present  them  to  your  readers  in  a  readable 
shape. 


OUR  PRIZE  PICTURE. 

We  take  pleasure  in  calling  attention  to 
our  illustration  this  month,  it  being  the 
winning  picture  in  the  recent  competition 
for  a  gold  medal  we  offered  for  the  best  three 
cabinet  negatives. 

Our  object  in  offering  the  medal  was  two- 
fold :  first,  to  induce  photographers  to 
make  the  effort  to  do  their  very  best,  thereby 
improving  and  elevating  themselves  to  a 
higher  standard  of  excellence,  and  develop- 
ing abilities  and  resources  that  they  were 
not  before  aware  of  possessing. 

Secondly,  we  hoped  to  secure  a  better  class 
of  work  for  our  illustrations;  something 
that  would  be  representative  of  the  progress 
of  our  art,  and  fit  examples  for  study  and 
imitation  by  all  who  are  striving  to  improve. 

We  are  happy  to  say  our  wishes  were 
fully  realized  ;  our  confidence  in  the  readi- 
ness and  ability  of  many  of  our  leading 
artists  to  respond  to  such  a  call,  has  been 


206 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


fully  sustained,  and  we  place  before  our 
readers  the  first  example  of  the  series  we 
expect  to  draw  from,  for  a  few  months. 

There  were  several  of  the  prize  set  that 
possessed  merits  so  nearly  equal  that  the 
judges  found  it  a  nice  point  to  decide  which 
should  be  placed  before  all  others.  But 
when  the  negatives  came  to  be  examined  in 

J 


2    5 


all  their  details,  and  to  show  the  care  and 
skill  that  had  been  brought  to  bear  in  their 
production,  the  judges  were  unanimous  in 
their  opinion,  awarding  the  medal  to 
Messrs.  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  of  San  Fran- 
cisco.    They  sent  us  six  negatives  of  the 


among  the  purest  specimens  of  photography 
it  has  ever  been  our  good  fortune  to  inspect. 
All  there  is  in  the  print  was  produced  in 
the  negative.  The  retouching  is  so  slight 
that  it  can  scarcely  be  detected,  and  the 
beautiful  gradations  of  light  and  shade  are 
perfectly  natural  and  spontaneous.  For 
chemical  effects,  lighting,  posing,  and  gene- 


6.0-M* 


ral  artistic  treatment,  we  commend  the  pic- 
ture to  the  study  of  all  who  feel  that  they 
are  not  yet  as  high  up  in  the  scale  of  excel- 
lence as  they  wish  to  be,  and  trust  they  may 
be  benefited  We  give  below  letters  from 
Mr.  Rulofson  and  his  operator,  Mr.  Taylor, 


W/7M 

MONTGOMERY    ST 


same  subject,  all  equally  perfect,  being  ab- 
solutely without  spot  or  blemish.*  They  are 

*  Prints  from  the  six  may  be  had  of  the  pub- 
lishers of  this  magazine,  for  $1.  See  advertise- 
ment of  prize  prints. 


with  plans  of  their  gallery,  and  a  cut,  from 
a  photograph,  of  their  operating-room.  The 
latter,  from  the  8  x  10  print  sent  us,  has  a 
very  inviting  appearance,  seems  large, 
and  well  supplied  with  all  appliances  neces- 


TUB  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


207 


sary  for  first-class  work.  We  think  it  well 
worth  imitating  by  any  who  are  recon- 
structing or  building,  and  wish  a  studio 
well  appointed  and  perfectly  adapted  to  the 
business. 

The  modesty  of  our  friends  in  speaking 
of  themselves  is  as  refreshing  as  their  work 
is  excellent.  Their  apparent  unconscious- 
ness of  having  produced  anything  superior, 
brings  forcibly  to  mind  the  following  para- 
graph from  a  new  work  entitled  Art  Cul- 
ture: a.  Handbook  of  Art  Technicalities  and 
Criticisms,  by  John  Kuskin.  Under  "Art 
Laws,"  he  says  : 

"  While  in  painting,  much  knowledge  of 
what  is  technical  and  practical  is  necessary 
to  a  right  judgment,  and  while  every  great 
composition  is  in  perfect  harmony  with  all 
true  rules,  and  involves  thousands  too  deli- 
cate for  eye,  ear,  or  thought  to  trace;  while 


reason  wisely  over  the  way  a  bee  builds  its 
comb,  and  be  profited  by  finding  out  certain 
things  about  the  angles  of  it.  But  the  bee 
knows  nothing  about  the  matter.  It  builds 
its  comb  in  a  far  more  inevitable  way.  And 
from  a  bee  to  Paul  Veronese,  all  master- 
workers  work  with  this  awful,  this  inspired 
unconsciousness. " 

The  following  are  the  letters  referred  to, 
and  we  are  glad  to  see  the  operator  recog- 
nized, and  allowed  credit  for  his  part  in 
the  work. 

"  San  Francisco,  May  13th,  1874. 
"Friend  Wilson: 

"I  herewith  forward  to  you  a  note  from 
Mr.  Taylor,  giving  our  formula?  for  work- 
ing, and  containing  some  of  his  views  on 
the  subject,  but  I  must  confess  I  would  not 
have  you  understand  that  I  indorse  all  he 


IONTGOM  ERY  ST. 


it  is  possible  to  reason,  with  infinite  plea- 
sure and  profit,  about  these  principles,  when 
the  thing  is  once  doije,  yet  all  our  reasoning 
will  not  enable  any  one  to  do  another  thing 
like  it,  because  all  reasoning  falls  infinitely 
short  of  a  divine  instinct.     Thus  we  may 


says  on  the  subject,  of  the  relative  quality 
of  San  Francisco  work,  nor  the  causes  to 
which  he  ascribes  the  assumed  superiority, 
while  I  would  be  slow  to  d -tract  from  the 
industry,  perseverance,  and  skill  of  our 
photographer.     I  think  it  but  fair  to  admit 


208 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


that  they  possess  some  climatic  advantages 
not  enjoyed  elsewhere  in  America.  I  don't 
regard  the  light  as  superior  in  actinic  power 
to  that  of  the  Atlantic  States  ;  but  we  do 
possess  a  more  even  temperature,  the  ther- 
mometer seldom  rising  above  75°  or  falling 
below  60°,  with  a  slightly  humid  atmos- 
phere, presenting  the  most  favorable  condi- 
tions for  delicate  chemical  processes  involv- 
ing the  use  of  volatile  substances.  And  a 
Californian's  proverbial  modesty  causes  us  to 


and  expert,  valuable  aids  in  the  mounting 
and  finishing  department. 

"  We  made  several  attempts  to  obtain  an 
interior  negative  of  our  reception-room,  of 
which  we  are  proud,  but  failed,  owing  to 
the  long  exposure  required,  and  the  throng 
constantly  interrupting. 

"  And  now  it  only  remains  for  me  to  say, 
that  I  regret  not  being  able  to  present  some 
more  interesting  material  for  your  consid- 
eration. William  H.  Rulofson  " 


cast  about  tor  some  natural  cause  to  which 
to  attribute  any  superiority,  which  our 
friends  may  kindly  ascribe  to  our  produc- 
tions. 

"  I  send  herewith  a  plan  of  our  gallery, 
from  the  street  entrance  to  elevator,  to  the 
roof;  there  are  in  all  twenty-nine  rooms, 
reasonably  well  adapted  to  their  several 
uses.  Tou  will  observe  that  we  formerly 
occupied  the  corner  building  only ;  we  then 
cut  through  into  the  adjoining  building  on 
Sacramento  Street,  and  later,  effected  an 
entrance  into  the  one  on  Montgomery 
Street.  We  are  now  giving  employment 
to  thirty-four  hands  all  told.  We  employ 
six  Chinese;  they  are  faithful,  industrious, 


"San  Francisco,  May  4th,  1874. 

"  Edward  L.  Wilson. 

"  Dear  Sir  :  In  obedience  to  your  re- 
quest, I  give  you  my  formula  by  which  the 
prize  negatives  were  made.  It  is  an  old 
and  long-used  formula,  but  I  think  there  is 
no  better  when  carefully  used. 


COLLODION. 
Ether  and  Alcohol, 
Cotton, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium, 
Bromide  of  Potassium, 


equal  parts. 
6  grains  to  ounce. 
4£  grains. 
2  grains. 


■Silver  bath — 40  grains,  slightly  acid. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PIIOTOG  RAPHER. 


209 


DEVELOPER. 
Wnter,      .         .  .  .96  ounces. 

Iron,        .         .  .         .       fi        " 

Aoetio  Acid,     .  .  .10        " 

Alcohol,  .         .  .  .       6        " 

"  The  above  is  the  formula  I  have  worked 
for  the  last  four  years,  all  the  time  I  have 
been  with  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  and  our 
negatives,  in  quality,  improve  from  year 
to  year — not  by  trying  every  newfangled 
notion  that  comes  along,  but  by  giving  our 
closest  attention  to  the  details  of  the  process. 
I  have  worked  in  photography  for  the  last 
sixteen  years  in  the  Eastern  and  "Western 
States,  and  have  met  more  thoroughbred 
photographers  in  San  Francisco  than  I 
ever  saw  in  my  life  before.  This  city  has 
the  reputation  of  making  some  of  the  finest 
photographs  in  the  Union,  and  I  might  say 
the  world,  and  it  is  all  due  to  the  careful, 
hard  workers  in  photography.  The  climate 
has  nothing  to  do  with  it.  Work,  work 
does  it ;  wo?'k  is  the  word  with  us. 
"D.  B.  Taylor, 

"Operator  with  B.  &  R." 
The  prints  were  made  by  Mr.  William  H. 
Khoads,  on  the  Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s 
paper;  sold  by  Messrs.  Wilson,  Hood  &  Co., 
and  were  enamelled  by  Mr.  W.  G.  Entrekin, 
by  his  now  well-known  and  much- used 
enameller.  They  speak  well  for  the  printer, 
for  the  negative-maker,  and  enameller. 


MATTERS    OF   THE 


Membership  costs  $2 ;  annual  dues,  $4. 
Life  membership,  $25,  and  no  dues.  The 
fees  for  life  membership  will  probably  be 
doubled  at  the  Chicago  Convention. 

All  remittances  of  back  dues,  and  fees 
and  dues  for  new  members,  should  be  made 
to  the  Permanent  Secretary,  Edward  L. 
Wilson,  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts. ,  Phila- 
delphia. 

Pay  your  dues  before  you  go  to  Chicago, 
to  save  hurry  and  bustle  there,  and  as  an 
accommodation  to  the  Treasurer. 

Life  Members. — Mr.  W.  R.  Phipps,  Lex- 


ington, Kentucky,  and  Mrs*  E,  M.  With- 
ington,  lone  City,  Cal.,  have  been  elected 
life  members. 

The  Regulations  for  Exhibitors  will  be 
found  in  the  circular,  together  with  the 
railroad  and  hotel  arrangements,  &c,  which 
was  issued  a  few  days  ago.  If  you  have 
failed  to  receive  a  copy  apply  to  us  and  we 
will  send  you  one. 

The  Finance  Committee  of  Chicago,  in  the 
interest  of  the  N.  P.  A.,  takes  pleasure  in 
sending  greeting  to  the  photographers  of  the 
United  States  through  your  valuable  Jour- 
nal, that  there  is  united  action  and  effort 
on  the  part  of  all  the  photographers  and 
stockdealers  of  Chicago  to  make  this  annual 
meeting  the  greatest  ever  held,  not  only 
putting  forth  every  exertion  in  their  power 
in  hard  work,  but  they  came  down  with 
their  cash. 

Chas.  W.  Stevens  headed  the  list  with  a 
cash  subscription  of  three  hundred  dollars  ; 
that  is  the  banner  subscription,  and  he  is 
pushing  with  all  his  energy  with  the  rest  of 
us,  to  make  it  a  success. 

Mr.  D.  H.  Cross,  our  operator,  will  read 
a  paper  called  "Hints  and  Suggestions." 
Yours,  very  respectfully, 

C.  D.  Mosher. 

Take  Notice. — A  meeting  of  the  Executive 
Committee  of  the  N.  P.  A.  will  be  held  at 
the  Palmer  House,  Chicago,  Monday,  July 
13th,  at  3  p.m. 

W.  Irving  Adams, 

Edward  L.  Wilson,  Chairman. 

Secretary. 

ARTISTIC  PHOTOGRAPHY. 

WHY    SHOULD    WE    NOT    EXCEL? 
BY    C    D.    MOSHER. 

Science  and  Art  in  photography  have 
attained  to  that  high  appreciation  of  real 
merit  and  truthfulness  of  the  likeness  that 
places  photography  to-day  as  one  of  the  fine 
arts,  which  has  been  brought  about  by  years 
of  hard  study.  The  old  style  of  photograph 
had  no  real  art  merit  in  it.  The  photogra- 
pher just  plumped  his  patron  down  in  his 
chair  in  a  full  blaze  of  light,  many  times  as 
stiff  and  ungainly  as  the  marble  statuary 
before  the  artist  hand  had  given  it  life,  and 
so  it  was  with  photography.     Science  and 


14 


210 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


art  have  perfected  it,  more  complete,  more 
truthful  than  any  artist  hand  can  draw  by 
art  rules  in  painting  and  drawing. 

The  artistic  photographer  has  light  and 
shade,  roundness,  the  true  symmetry  of 
artistic  proportions,  grace,  ease,  and  natural 
pose,  and  lifelike  expression  that  is  not  ex- 
celled. 

To-day  the  artistic  photographer  can  give 
his  patrons  likenesses  from  life,  and  the 
beautiful  landscape  in  every  form,  true  to 
nature,  almost  perfection  itself,  with  not  as 
much  as  one  hair  added  to  or  taken  from. 


HINTS  UNDER  THE  SKYLIGHT. 

BV   R.    J.    CHUTE. 

Lighting. 

The  construction  and  situation  of  the 
light  is  of  such  importance  that  it  should 
be  the  first  consideration  in  erecting  or  re- 
fitting a  gallery.  It  is  the  basis  of  all  suc- 
cess or  failure,  and  those  not  thoroughly 
versed  in  this  direction,  will  do  well  to  look 
to  it  for  the  cause  of  some  of  the  shortcom- 
ings they  experience  and  which  they  are 
endeavoring,  in  vain,  to  overcome.  I  would 
advise  no  one  to  be  influenced  by  this  or 
that  theorist,  as  to  the  arrangement  of  a 
light,  but  rather  investigate  the  causes  that 
have  given  the  greatest  success  in  the  pho- 
tographic art. 

H.  P.  Eobinson  says:  "Some  men  suc- 
ceed in  spite  of  difficulties ;"  this  we  all 
know  to  be  true,  and  also  that  hundreds 
fail  on  account  of  difficulties.  N  ow,  in  erect- 
ing a  gallery,  the  better  the  light  can  be 
adapted  to  the  work  the  less  difficulties 
there  will  be  to  overcome,  and  the  more 
uniformly  successful  will  be  the  work  done 
under  it. 

I  do  not  propose,  at  this  time,  to  give 
any  directions  or  specifications  in  reference 
to  the  construction  of  a  skylight,  but  simply 
to  suggest  the  importance  of  this  depart- 
ment of  the  studio,  and  to  express  my  belief 
that  the  greatest  fault  that  is  general  in 
photographic  skylights  is  expressed  in  two 
short  words,  viz.,  too  high.  I  know  of  no 
one  who  has  ever  achieved  great  success 
under  a  high  light  unless  it  was  correspond- 
ingly large;  while  it  will  be  found  that 
those  who  have  won  both  fame  and  fortune 


have  done  it  under  comparatively  loiv 
lights.  Burnett,  in  his  "  Practical  Hints  on 
Light  and  Shade  in  Painting,"  in  reference 
to  "the  means  by  which  the  painter  works," 
says  :  "  That  there  is  an  art  in  the  manage- 
ment and  disposition  of  those  means  will  be 
easily  granted,  and  it  is  equally  certain,  that 
this  art  is  to  be  acquired  by  a  careful  ex- 
amination of  the  Works  of  those  who  have 
excelled  in  it."  That  the  above  is  as  appli- 
cable to  photography  as  to  painting  all  will 
readily  admit.  The  means  by  which  we 
work,  and  our  success  in  their  management 
and  disposition,  determine  the  quality  of 
art  culture  there  is  in  us.  And  as  light 
and  shade,  exclusively,  give  all  the  varied 
effects  we  strive  for,  it  is  of  the  utmost  im- 
portance that  we  should  find,  if  possible,  the 
best  means  for  using  these  agents  of  our 
will,  that  assume  form  and  place  at  our 
bidding,  giving  the  semblance  of  something 
tangible  in  all  the  beautiful  gradations 
which  we  see  in  the  best  works  produced 
by  our  art. 

To  do  this  we  have  not  only  to  study  the 
works  of  those  who  have  excelled,  but  as 
far  as  possible  the  means  by  which  they 
achieved  success. 

The  use  of  a  top  and  side  light  combined 
has  generally  been  recommended,  and  prob- 
ably nine-tenths  of  the  lights  in  use  are  so 
constructed.  The  side-light  is  useful  and 
sometimes  necessary,  but  is  subject  to  such 
abuse  that  its  general  utility  may  be  ques- 
tioned. A  low  top-light  produces  every 
effect  desired  in  ordinary  portraiture,  and 
even  those  not  skilled  in  the  art  of  lighting 
cannot  then  easily  go  astray. 

There  is  a  disposition  among  many  to  use 
too  much  side-light.  The  effect  is  very  bad 
in  most  cases.  The  beauty  of  the  eyes  is 
seriously  impaired  by  the  reflected  side- 
light; the  natural  shadows  of  the  face  are 
destroyed,  and  the  features  either  appear  dis- 
torted, or  are  weak  and  insipid.  That  im- 
portant feature,  the  mouth,  around  which 
plays  so  much  of  sentiment,  life,  and  beauty, 
loses  nearly  all  its  charms  under  this  treat- 
ment. The  delicate  shadows  that  delineate 
the  exquisite  curves  and  lines  of  character 
and  expression  are  quite  destroyed ;  the 
upper  lip  is  lighted  almost  equally  with  the 
lower,  the  shadow  under  the  latter  is  want- 


TUB  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


211 


ing,  and  if  the  light  on  the  face  is  softened 
to  any  extent,  the  whole  becomes  as  near  a 
blank  as  anything  can  possibly  be  and  still 
have  form. 

Now,  the  best  workers  of  to-day  use  side- 
light very  sparingly,  and  those  who  have 
not  the  fullest  confidence  in  their  abilities 
or  knowledge,  or  have  failed  to  satisfy 
themselves  in  their  own  work,  should  study 
the  difference  between  their  own  and  the 
work  of  some  of  those  who  have  succeeded 
best,  and  ascertain  if  possible  wherein  the 
difference  lies. 

When  full  figures  were  in  demand,  a  fair 
proportion  of  side-light  was  rather  neces- 
sary, in  order  that  the  subject  should  be 
properly  lighted,  but  then  the  effect  was 
considered  in  reference  to  the  whole  form, 
the  face  of  course  being  the  most  prominent, 
but  still  subject  in  a  great  degree  to  other 
and  less  important  parts.  But  in  these 
days  when  the  face  is  the  picture,  and  the 
most  exquisite  modelling  is  required  to  give 
it  truthfulness  and  beauty,  success  depends 
either  upon  the  most  consummate  skill,  or 
very  favorable  conditions. 


OUTDOOR  WORK  ON  THE  PACIFIC 
COAST. 

BIT   J.    J.    KEILLY. 

Within  the  past  few  months  I  have  had 
several  inquiries  from  brother  photogra- 
phers as  to  what  instruments  and  chemicals 
I  use  in  my  outdoor  work  ;  if  I  made  my 
own  collodion,  and  if  so,  how  iodized,  &c. 
Now  it  may  be  of  some  benefit  to  the  fra- 
ternity to  know;  if  so,  I  am  perfectly  willing 
they  should,  so  as  to  enable  them  to  make 
all  the  improvement  they  can  in  outdoor 
photography.  Our  art  is  beautiful,  but  the 
trouble  is,  the  men  who  spend  both  time  and 
money  in  the  way  of  trying  to  make  fine 
work  are  poorly  paid  for  it.  I  read  that 
this  thing  was  discussed  in  the  convention 
last  July  in  Buffalo.  Fine  work  is  not  ap- 
preciated by  the  public  in  stereoscopic 
views.  The  man  who  can  furnish  the 
cheapest  sells  most  without  regard  to 
quality,  and  there  is  where  the  wrong 
comes  in.     I  used  to  get  $24  per  gross  for 


stereoscopic  views  some  eight  years  ago  at 
Niagara,  and  two  years  ago  $24  per  gross 
for  views  of  the  Yosemite  Valley,  and  to- 
day can  get  barely  half  that.  It  is  not  be- 
cause my  views  are  poorer,  for  they  are  at 
least  fifty  per  cent,  better,  but  the  men  who 
handle  them  say,  "  I  can  buy  views  from 
Mr.  A.  at  $12  per  gross,  and  why  do  you 
ask  more?"  Why?  because  my  views  are 
better.  "  Yes,  but  the  public  don't  see  any 
difference;"  and  so  the  poorest  will  sell 
fastest  because  he  can  sell  them  cheapest. 
Now  if  I  cannot  afford,  or  will  not  sell  my 
views  as  cheap  as  Mr.  A.,  I  cannot  sell  any, 
and  consequently  must  starve.  This  I  can- 
not afford  to  do,  so  I  say  to  myself,  "  Well, 
there  is  no  use  in  being  so  particular  to 
have  ever}'  print  just  right,  and  printed 
and  toned  just  so;  I  will  let  them  go; 
the  public  will  never  see  the  difference." 
And  so  the  man  who  spends  both  time  and 
money  in  getting  up  nice  work,  cannot  get 
paid  more  than  half  for  his  labor.  This  is- 
discouraging,  to  say  the  least. 

Since  I  left  Niagara,  I  have  been  over 
a  great  portion  of  this  coast ;  in  the  Yosemite 
Valley  especially,  for  the  past  four  sum- 
mers. I  have  also  made  a  few  trips  out- 
side of  the  valley,  crossing  the  summits  of 
the  wild  Sierra  Nevada  Mountains,  and 
also  running  some  risk  of  being  scalped  by 
the  Indians  ;  also  ascending  the  tops  of  the 
highest  mountains,  ten  thousand  feet  above 
the  sea,  where  lay  in  places  from  five  to- 
ten  feet  of  snow  in  the  month  of  August,, 
and  no  water  to  be  found  short  of  one  or 
two  miles  to  wash  negatives  with.  This 
difficulty  was  overcome  by  building  a  brush 
fire  and  heating  stone  in  it ;  then  filling  a 
a  bucket  full  of  snow  and  placing  the  hot 
stone  therein ;  in  a  few  minutes  we  had 
plenty  of  soft  water,  and  by  cutting  a  top 
off  one  of  my  socks,  and  tying  it  around  the 
faucet,  1  was  enabled  to  get  clean  water, 
and  so  do  clean  work,  and  on  that  trip  of 
four  weeks  I  made  some  fine  cloud  effects. 
But  I  can  get  no  more  for  this  class  of  work, 
from  these  hard-earned  negatives,,  than  if 
they  had  cost  me  nothing,  and  the  pictures 
were  of  the  poorest  kind. 

My  way  of  working  is  as  follows  : 
I  am  using  a  pair  of  Z\  inch  focus  tubes, 
known  as  the  imitation  Dallmeyerrs  ;  also  a 


212 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


pair  of  genuine  Dallmeyer's  wide  angle  2h 
inch  focus.  With  these  two  pairs  I  do  all 
my  work. 

My  collodion  is  as  follows: 


No   1. 

Plain  Collodion,    . 

]   ounce. 

Iodide  of  Cadmium, 

.     4  grains. 

Bromide  of  Cadmium,  . 

.     4      " 

No.  2. 

Plain  Collodion,    . 

1  ounce. 

Iodide  of  Cadmium, 

7  grains. 

Bromide  ot   Cadmium,  . 

.     3       " 

These  two  can  be  so  mixed  as  to  save  the 
most  delicate  clouds.  If  No.  1  works  too 
thin,  mix  wilh  it  a  little  of  No.  2  for  cloud 
effects;  if  not  for  clouds,  mix  in  equal  pro- 
portions. 

No.  3. 

Plain  Collodion,    .  .  ]  ounce. 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  .  .     6  grains. 

Bromide  of  Ammonium,         .     3       " 

This  will  much  benefit  your  collodion  by. 
mixing  one-third  of  No.  3,  that  is,  if  no 
clouds  are  to  be  taken.  In  making  my  col- 
lodion, I  use  equal  parts  of  ether  and  alco- 
hol, but  I  dissolve  my  iodides  and  bromides 
in  the  alcohol  first,  and  I  use  from  3j  to  4 
grains  of  gun-cotton  to  the  ounce. 

DEVELOPER. 
Double    Sulphate    of    Iron 

and  Ammonia,         .         .       1  ounce.. 
Water,         .  .    ■      .  .20  ounces. 

Acetic  Acid,       .  .  2       " 

No  Alcohol. 


REDEVELOPER. 

Pyrogallic  Acid,   . 

Citric  Acid,  .         .          .         . 

Water 

3  grains. 
2       " 
1  ounce. 

No.  2. 

Nitrate  of  Silver, 

Water 

20  grains. 
1  ounce. 

Twenty  drops  of  No.  2  in  one-half  ounce 
of  the  pyro,  poured  over  the  negative  after 
fixing  and  well  washing,  will  bring  it  up  to 
the  required  intensity.  This  solution  may 
be  poured  off  and  on  the  plate  till  enough 
intensity  is  obtained,  but  must  not  be  used  a 
second  time.  But  the  bottle  must  be  washed 
clean  before  developing  a  second  plate. 
After  fixing  the  negative,  and  then  rede- 


veloping, it  don't  dry  any  more  intense. 
Always  keep  a  weak  solution  of  sulphuret  of 
potash  on  hand,  so  that  should  the  pyro 
stain  or  turn  your  negative  a  scarlet  color, 
by  flowing  the  plate  with  the  sulphuret 
once  or  twice,  this  color  will  leave.  Wash 
well,  and  set  up  to  dry  ;  then  it  is  ready  for 
varnishing. 


A  CONVENIENT  DARK-TENT. 

BY    T.    C    HARRIS. 

I  give  below  a  description  of  a  "  dark- 
tent"  for  outdoor  work,  which  is  the  best 
thing  of  the  kind  I  ever  saw.  It  may  not 
be  new  to  many  of  your  readers,  but  is  too 
good  a  thing  to  be  lost;  neither  is  the  idea 
an  original  one  with  myself.  It  is  simply 
this :  Make  a  large  bag  (say  three  feet 
square)  of  three  or  four  thicknesses  of  orange 
calico,  and  for  a  bottom  sew  in  a  piece  3x3 
feet,  same  thickness.  In  the  centre  of  this 
make  a  small  hole,  and  work  the  edges  like 
a  button-hole.  Now  get  a  small  rope  about 
twelve  feet  long,  and  pass  one  end  through 
the  hole,  and  tie  a  knot  in  it,  and  the  tent 
is    complete ;    weight    from   three   to   four 


pounds.  To  use:  Pick  up  two  rough  sticks 
about  four  feet  long  and  as  large  as  the 
finger,  tie  them  together  in  the  middle  with 
the  inside  end  of  the  cord,  to  support  the 
top  when  hung  up.  The  other  end  of  the 
cord  is  fastened  to  a  branch  or  body  of  a 
tree,  fence-corner,  or  anything  else.  The 
sticks  are  then  turned  across  each  other,  so 
as  to  hold  out  the  top  and  sides  in  the  shape 
of  a  box.  It  should  be  about  four  feet  deep 
and  three  feet  square  or  larger,  hung  up  so 
that  about  a  foot  of  the  lower  edge  will  lay 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


213 


on  the  ground.  The  bath,  chemicals,  &c., 
are  placed  inside,  on  the  ground,  against 
the  back-wall,  and  the  front-side  is  lifted  to 
get  under.  In  moving  from  place  to  place, 
the  tent  can  be  rolled  up  in  a  small,  com- 
pact bundle,  and  tied  with  the  rope.  1  find 
that  four  thick  orange  calico  to  be  ample, 
will  admit  plenty  of  light  to  work  by,  but 
not  fog  the  plates.  A  little  window  of 
orange  glass,  4x4  inches,  can  be  added, 
but  is  unnecessary.  One  of  these  tents  can  be 
made  by  any  one,  and  is  really  worth  a 
dozen  of  the  unwieldy  things  sold  by  stock- 
dealers. 


THE  TRANSIT  OF  VENUS. 

This  event,  which  occurs  on  the  8th  and  9th 
of  December  next,  will  be  the  most  impor- 
tant in  photography  of  an y  during  the  year, 
and  the  most  important  to  science  of  any 
that  has  occurred  during  the  present  gen- 
eration. Our  government  has  made  ample 
provision  for  observing  this  phenomenon, 
and  will  send  out  no  less  than  eight  different 
parties,  to  as  many  separate  stations  in 
various  parts  of  the  world. 

Mr.  L.  E.  Walker,  photographer  at  the 
Treasury  Department,  at  Washington,  has 
kindly  furnished  us  with  a  list  of  the  several 
parties,  and  the  stations  to  which  they  are 
assigned,  which  we  give  below.  We  notice  in 
this  list  that  all  of  the  chief  photographers, 
and  several  of  the  first  assistants,  are  sub- 
scribers to  the  Philadelphia  Photographer . 
We  are  glad  to  see  this,  and  commend  it 
especially  to  the  consideration  of  all  young 
men  in  the  business.  The  man  who  reads  and 
studies  carefully  everything  connected  with 
his  profession,  soon  commands  attention  by 
his  knowledge  and  intelligence,  and  is  sure 
ere  long  to  take  a  high  position  among  his 
fellows. 

We  notice  also  among  the  names,  several- 
who  have  had  experience  in  this  class  of 
work,  having  been  on  the  eclipse  expedition 
to  Iowa,  in  1869. 

Many  of  them  go  to  remote  stations, 
where  for  a  time  they  will  be  quite  isolated 
from  the  rest  of  the  world,  and  widely  sep- 
arated from  all  their  social  and  domestic 
relations,  but  we  wish  them  all  success  in 
their  enterprise/,  and- a  safe  return  to  their 
homes.     They  go  on  a  useful  mission. 


United  States  Parties  to  observe  the 
Transit  of  Venus,  Decemukr  8  and  9, 
1874. 

Wladiviontok,  Siberia. 

Prof.  Asaph  Hall,  U.S.N.,  Chief  Astronomer. 
Mr.  0.  B.  Wheeler,  Asst.  Astronomer. 
Mr.  D.  R.  Clark,  Chief  Photographer. 
Mr.  T.  S    Tappnn,  1st  Asst.  Photographer. 
Mr.  G.  J.  Rockwell,  2d  Asst.  Photographer. 
Mr.  F.  M.  Lacey,  2d  Asst.  Photographer. 

Will  start  for  San  Francisco  about  the 
25th  of  July,  and  will  meet  the  U.  8. 
Steamer  Lackawana,  on  August  loth,  at 
Yokohama. 

Nagasaki,  Japan. 
Prof.  Geo.   Davidson,  U.  S.  Coast  Survey,  Chief 

Astronomer. 
Mr.  0.  H.  Tittmann,  Asst.  Astronomer. 
Mr.  S    R.  Seibert,  Chief  Photographer. 
Mr.  H.  Ellerton  Lodge,  1st  Asst.  Photographer. 
Mr.  F.  H.  Williams,  2d  Asst.  Photographer. 

Will  sail  from  San  Francisco,  either  the 
15th  August  or  1st  September. 

Pekin,  China. 

Prof.  James  C.  Watson,  Chief  Astronomer. 
Prof.  C    A.  Young,  Asst.  Astronomer. 
Mr.  W.  V.  Ranger,  Chief  Photographer. 
Dr.  E.  Watson,  1st  Asst.  Photographer. 
Mr.  Benj.  J.  Conrad,  2d  Asst.  Photographer. 

Same  as  the  Siberian  party. 

The  Southern  parties. left  Sandy  Hook, 
Sunday,  the  6th  of  June,  direct  for  the  Cape 
of  Good  Hope. 

Hobart  Town,  Tasmania. 
Prof.  Win.  Harkness,  U.S.N.,  Chief  Astronomer. 
Mr.  Leonard  Waldo,  Asst.  Astronomer. 
Mr.  John  Moran,   Chief  Photographer. 
Mr.WillardH.  Churchill,  1st  Asst.  Photographer. 
Mr.  Walter  B.  Devereux,  2d  Asst  Photographer. 

Crozet  Island. 
Capt.     Charles    W.    Raymond,     U  S.A.,     Chief 

Astronomer. 
1st  Lt.  S.  E.  Tillman,  U.S.A.,  Asst.  Astronomer. 
Mr.  Wm.  R.  Pywell,  Chief  Photographer. 
J.  G.  Campbell,  1st  Asst.  Photographer. 
Theodore  Richey,  2d  Asst.  Photographer. 

New  Zealand,  Bluff  Harbor. 
Prof.  C.  H.  F.  Peters,  Chief  Astronomer. 
1st  Lt.  E.  W.  Bass.  U.S.A.,  Asst.  Astronomer. 


214 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Mr.  C.  L.  Phillippi,  Chief  Photographer. 
Mr.  Israel  Russell,  1st  Asst.  Photographer. 
Mr.  E.  B    Pierson,  1st  Asst.  Photographer. 
Mr.  L.  II.  Ayme,  2d  Asst.  Photographer. 

Kerguelen  Land. 
Lt.-Com.  Geo.  P.  Ryan,  U.S.N. ,  Chief. 
Lt.-Com.  C.  J.  Train,  U.S.N.,  Asst.  Astronomer. 
Mr.  D.  R.  Holmes,  Chief  Photographer. 
Mr.  G.  W.  Dryer,  1st  Asst.  Photographer. 
Mr.  Irvin  Stanley,  2d  Asst.  Photographer. 

Chatham  Island. 
Mr.  Edwin  Smith,  U.  S^  Coast  Survey,  Chief. 
Mr.   Albert  H.  Scott,  U.  S.  Coast  Survey,   Asst. 

Astronomer. 
Mr.  Louis  Seebohm,  Chief  Photographer. 
Mr.  Otto  Buehler,  1st  Asst.  Photographer. 
Mr.  W.  H.  Rau,  2d  Asst.  Photographer. 

We  have  also  received  from  Washington 
quite  an  elaborate  pamphlet  of  instructions, 
prepared  by  the  Commission  on  the  Transit 
of  Venus,  and  issued  under  the  order  of  the 
Secretary  of  the  Navy,  for  the  use  of  the 
observing  parties.  It  contains  all  the  in- 
formation in  detail  necessary,  for  the  guid- 
ance of  those  engaged  in  the  work.  It  is 
interesting  to  us  all,  as  showing  the  disci- 
pline and  systematic  arrangement  of  every- 
thing connected  with  the  enterprise.  If  we 
can  find  room  next  month  we  shall  make 
some  extracts  that  we  think  may  be  valua- 
ble to  our  readers. 

Class  in  Landscape  Photography. 

It  will  usually  be  found  that  some  differ- 
ence in  formulae  and  methods  of  working  is 
required  between  gallery  and  field  work,  as 
the  conditions,  such  as  subject,  light,  &c, 
vary  much  more  out  of  doors  than  in.  But 
as  a  general  rule,  chemicals  that  produce 
good  work  in  the  gallery  will  do  so  in  the 
field,  with  such  slight  modifications  as  a 
little  thicker  collodion,  and  a  weaker  de- 
veloper, for  subjects  well  illuminated. 

As  we  always  feel  a  confidence  in  the 
suggestions  or  formulae  of  those  who  are 
proficient  in  their  calling,  we  propose  to 
quote  from  some  of  the  men  who  have  been 
very  successful  in  this  department.  Mr.  G. 
W.  Wilson,  the  celebrated  landscape  pho- 
tographer of  Aberdeen,  Scotland,  says : 
"  My  success  is  due  to  care,  and  I  have  used 
the  following  formulas  for  ten  years  : 

"  Bath  — Ordinary   30-grain  bath  of  ni- 


trate of  silver,  without  anything  added  to 
it,  except  about  4  grains  of  iodide  of  potas- 
sium to  every  16  ounces. 

"  Collodion. — As  I  never  could  make  it  to 
please  myself,  I  always  buy  it  from  some 
respectable  maker.* 

DEVELOPER. 

Glacial  Acetic  Acid,  .  .       1  ounce. 

Water,        .  .  .  .16  ounces. 

Protosulphate  of  Iron,        .     15  to  30  grains, 

to  the  ounce  of  solution. 

"  In  warm  weather  I  dilute  the  developer 
immediately  before  using  it,  consequently 
can  carry  in  one  bottle  as  much  as  when 
diluted  would  make  two." 

Linn's  "  Lookout  Landscape  Photogra- 
phy" gives  the  following : 

SILVER    BATH    FOR    NEGATIVES. 
Crystallized  Nitrate  of  Silver,   .     40  grains. 
Pure  Water,       ....       1  ounce. 
Carbonate  of  Silver  Solution,     .       5  drops. 
"  If  for  copying  or  large  view  negatives, 
especially  with  the  Globe  lens,  use  of 
Fused  Nitrate  of  Silver.       .  .     1  ounce. 

Crystallized  Nitrate  of  Silver,      .     1  ounce. 
Nitric  acid  to  neutralize  if  alkaline. 

"The  first  formula  is  for  stereoscopic 
views  or  portraiture.  We  have  the  power 
with  these  agents  of  producing  every  gra- 
dation of  strength,  from  brilliant  softness 
to  harsh  intensity. 

"  The  power  of  modifying  with  fused 
silver,  and  the  resources  of  the  negative 
bath  are  generally  overlooked  by  photog- 
raphers, who,  as  a  rule,  seek  in  the  collo- 
dion for  desired  chemical  effects.  This  is 
good  as  far  as  it  goes,  but  let  a  good  silver- 
bath  be  the  basis  of  all  your  experiments." 

To  fuse  nitrate  of  silver,  "  raise  the  heat, 
and  continue  the  evaporation  until  it  ceases 
foaming,  and  the  residue  has  the  appear- 
ance of  melted  wax.  When  cool,  dissolve 
in  a  small  quantity  of  water,  bottle,  and 
keep  in  stock.  Use  for  imparting  vigor  to 
a  negative  bath. 

"  To  prepare  carbonate  of  silver,  take  of 

*  To  those  similarly  situated  we  would  recom- 
mend Hance's  White  Mountain  and  Niagara 
Falls  Collodions.  They  are  both  made  after  for- 
mulae, by  men  whose  work  cannot  be  excelled, 
viz.,  Messrs.  Kilburn  of  Littleton,  N.  H.,  and 
Curtis  of  Niagara  Falls. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


215 


silver  solution  any  quantity,  carbonate  of 
potash  in  saturated  solution,  add  until  all 
or  nearly  all  of  the  silver  is  precipitated. 
Be  careful  not  to  get  in  too  much  potash, 
as  it  will  redissolve  a  portion  of  the  carbo- 
nate of  silver,  and  cause  it  to  precipitate  too 
slowly.  Make  it  up  in  a  large  bottle,  so  as 
to  wash  more  expeditiously.  Fill  up  with 
good  soft  water.  Let  it  settle  and  pour  off 
carefully.  Repeat  this  washing,  say  ten 
times,  or  until  the  last  trace  of  potash  is 
washed  out  Put  the  residue,  which  is  car- 
bonate of  silver,  in  a  small  bottle,  and  keep 
a  little  water  on  it,  and  set  away  in  the 
dark.  Always  keep  a  stock  of  this  on  hand. 
It  is  the  only  proper  substance  to  neutralize 
a  negative  bath.  An  old  worn-out  solution 
will  -answer  to  precipitate  in  this  way,  and 
you  can  hardly  make  a  better  use  of  it.  It 
can  be  added  in  any  portion  to  the  bath,  or 
it  may  be  composed  of  it  by  neutralizing 
with  nitric  acid,  and  reducing  with  water 
to  the  proper  standard,  40  grains.  Donotuse 
a  printing  bath  in  preparing  the  carbonate." 
The  formula,  given  by  Prof.  Linn,  for 
collodion,  is  no  doubt  very  good.  We  know 
that  plain  collodion  made  up  and  allowed 
to  sttind  and  ripen  thoroughly,  possesses 
very  superior  qualities.  To  those  who  make 
their  own  collodion,  and  are  always  looking 
for  something  better,  we  commend  his  for- 
mulas. 

PLAIN    COLLODION. 


Negative  Cotton,    , 

1  ounce. 

Ether,          .          .          .          . 

.     40       " 

Alcohol,      . 

.     40       " 

Bromide  of  Cadmiurn.- 

.     40  grains 

"  Mix  the  ether  and  alcohol,  then  add  the 
cotton  in  small  tufts,  shake  well,  and  after 
standing  a  day  or  two,  filter,  and  keep  in  a 
dark  cool  place.  It  will  work  at  once,  but 
is  much  better  to  stand  some  time.  For  fine 
stereoscopic  negatives  a  thoroughly  ripened 
collodion  is  essential.  Have  a  good  quan- 
tity laid  away  for  months  ahead.  The  bro- 
mide of  cadmium  will  facilitate  the  ripening. 

EVER-READY    IODIZER. 

Alcohol  (Atwood's  patent),      .     lfi  ounces. 


Iodide  of  Cadmium, 
Iodide  of  Ammonium, 
Bromide  of  Ammonium,  . 
Bromide  of  Potassium,     . 
Bromide  of  Cadmium, 


1  ounce. 

2  ounces. 
1  drachm. 
1 

2 


"  Pulverize  the  flinty  salts  (bromide  of  po- 
tassium), add  this  and  the  other  bromides 
to  the  alcohol  first ;  let  it  stand  a  few  hours, 
and  then  add  the  iodides.  When  settled  it 
is  ready  for  use,  and  keeps  any  length  of 
time  without  changing.  To  sensitize  take 
iodizer,  1  ounce;  plain  collodion,  10  ounces." 

Mr.  John  L.  Gihon,  who  has  sent  us  some 
beautiful  specimens  of  his  work,  both  in 
portrait  and  landscape  photography,  from 
Montevideo,  S  A.,  says :  "  The  thin  delicate 
negatives  that  every  advanced  operator 
prides  himself  upon  producing  in  atelier 
work,  are  most  unsuitable  for  landscape 
purposes,  and  he  who  takes  the  field  pro- 
vided with  the  materials  that  he  has  used 
for  portraiture,  will  soon  find  that  modifi- 
cations are  necessary.  Collodion,  bath,  and 
developer,  each  and  all,  have  to  be  altered. 
With  collodion,  I  have  always  maintained 
that  excessive  nicety  in  choice  and  propor- 
tions of  sensitizing  salts  is  not  of  the  first 
importance.  The  quantity  and  character 
of  the  cotton  that  is  added  to  the  ether  and 
alcohol,  and  the  relative  proportions  of  each 
of  the  latter,  have  always  presented  them- 
selves to  me  as  matters  worthy  of  more  at- 
tention. I  advance  it  as  a  rule  that  nicer 
distinctions  in  the  printing  capacities  of  a 
negative  can  be  made  by  judicious  selections 
of  gun-cotton,  than  by  the  same  amount  of 
experiment  with  different  iodides  and  bro- 
mides." 

He  recommends  using  about  double  the 
quantity  of  cotton  for  landscape  work  that 
is  used  for  portraiture;  and  to  use  a  bath 
45  grains  strong.  In  reference  to  developer 
he  refers  to  a  formula  published  by  us  some 
years  ago,  and  says:  "Late  constant  use 
leads  me  to  recommend  it  in  the  strongest 
terms. 


Protosuljhate  of  Iron, 

Sulphate  of  Copper,- 

Water, 

Glacial  Acetic  Acid, 

Alcohol,  . 

Ammonia, 


3  ounces. 
1 

80       " 
3       " 
3 
100  drops. 


"  This  developer  improves  with  some  little 
age,  and  can  be  used  with  the  utmost  safety 
in  relation  to  any  fogging  propensities.  Its 
action  upon  a  well-timed  plate  is  all  that 
can  possibly  be  desired." 


216 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGE  APHEE. 


HOW  TO  AVOID  UNNECESSARY 
WASTE  OF  SILVEE. 

The  developings  and  first  washings  of 
the  negative  are  rich  in  silver,  most  of 
which  can  be  saved  by  using  proper  means 
and  care.  The  plan  recommended  in  An- 
derson's Skylight  and  Darkroom  is  about 
the  best,  but  some  simpler  method  will 
answer  very  well.  An}-  large  vessel  into 
which  you  can  run  the  developings  and 
first  washings,  where  they  can  remain  un- 
disturbed long  enough  to  settle,  will  answer 
the  purpose.  The  iron  in  the  developer  is 
sufficient  to  precipitate  all  the  silver  held 
in  solution,  but  it  settles  slowly.  "When 
the  vessel  is  full  let  it  stand  a  day  or  two, 
and  then  decant  what  you  can;  filter  the 
remaining  liquid  through  a  cloth  or  paper 
filter.  Another,  and  perhaps  the  least 
troublesome  plan,  is  to  make  a  long  conical- 
shaped  bag  of  cotton  cloth  or  some  similar 
material,  which  can  be  suspended  in  a  barrel 
by  tacking  the  open  or  large  end  of  the  bag 
around  the  upper  end  of  the  barrel,  allowing 
the  small  end  of  the  bag  to  reach  nearly  or 
quite  to  the  bottom  of  the  barrel  (of  course 
the  barrel  is  supposed  to  stand  on  one  end, 
and  the  upper  head  is  removed).  The  waste- 
pipe  should  be  inserted  well  up  toward  the 
top  of  the  barrel  ;  now  let  your  developings 
and  first  plate  washings  run  into  the  bag, 
which  will  act  as  a  filter,  and  save  all  the 
silver,  and  when  you  have  obtained  sufficient 
precipitate  to  make  it  pay,  you  can  recon- 
vert it  to  a  workable  condition  by  simply 
submitting  the  precipitate  to  the  action  of 
muriatic  acid,  which  will  dissolve  out  the 
ferro-sulphate  and  leave  a  residuum  which 
is  pure  silver,  requiring  only  to  be  thor- 
oughly washed  and  then  dissolved  in  di- 
luted nitric  acid  ;  the  acid  may  be  driven 
off  by  evaporation,  or  neutralized,  when  the 
silver  solution  becomes  ready  for  use. 

In  fixing  the  negative  some  operators 
prefer  to  use  cyanide  of  potassium,  but 
hyposulphite  of  soda  is  most  generally  used; 
in  either  case  a  shallow  dish  or  tray  large 
enough  to  lay  a  number  of  negatives  in, 
face  up,  with  solution  enough  to  well  cover 
the  same,  is  the  most  convenient  and  eco- 
nomical. By  fixing  in  this  manner  the  so- 
lution becomes  rich  in  silver,  all  of  which 
can  be  recovered  by  the  galvanic  process, 


but  if  you  do  not  like  to  fuss  with  a  battery, 
and  are  in  no  hurry,  you  can  immerse  a 
piece  of  copper,  or  a  copper  plate  in  the 
hypo  or  cyanide  solution,  three  or  four 
inches  square,  and  let  it  remain;  the  pure 
metallic  silver  will  be  deposited  upon  the 
surface  of  the  plate,  and  when  desirable  to 
do  so  you  can  scale  off  the  silver,  and  re- 
duce it  with  nitric  acid,  evaporate,  or  neu- 
tralize, and  the  silver  solution  is  ready  for 
use. 

Of  course  I  am  aware  that  there  are 
several  other  ways  of  recovering  silver 
from  the  solutions  above  mentioned,  but 
the  plan  here  recommended  is  the  most 
easily  managed  by  the  majority  of  opera- 
tors. The  chlorides,  carbonates,  &c,  are 
also  easily  managed,  but  the  sulphurets, 
&c,  require  brains,  and  other  conveniences, 
which  I  do  not  propose  to  furnish.  A 
great  deal  of  silver  might  be  retained  in 
a  workable  condition  by  using  a  little  fore- 
thought. For  instance,  suppose  you  obtain 
a  large  open-mouth  bottle,  or  other  suit- 
able vessel,  and  place  it  in  some  conve- 
nient spot.  N-ow,  when  you  rinse  out 
your  negative  bath-holder,  pour  the  first 
rinsings  into  the  bottle,  and  when  you  are 
done  with  a  filter  just  drop  it,  while  wet, 
into  the  same  bottle  ;  do  the  same  with  blot- 
ting-papers, sponges,  and  in  fact  everything 
which  becomes  saturated  with  the  negative 
solution.  By  constant  additions  the  con- 
tents of  the  bottle  gains  volume  and 
strength,  and  an  occasional  stirring  will  re- 
duce the  whole  to  a  pulpy  mass,  which 
should  be  strained,  and  squeezed  as  dry  as 
possible,  and  then  the  weak  solution  thus 
obtained  can  be  strengthened  with  new 
silver,  or  by  boiling  down,  and  is  ready  for 
use  either  to  renew  an  old  or  make  a  new 
bath. 

By  making  the  eontents  of  the  sto^o-bottle 
tolerably  strong  of  nitric  acid  the  silver 
contained  in  old  dry  filters,  clippings,  &c, 
can  be  reduced  and  utilized. 

The  advantage  of  some  simple  plan  of 
avoiding  waste  must  be  obvious  to  anyone, 
who  will  stop  to  think  of  the  foolishness  of 
"  going  around  Kobin  Hood's  barn  "  to  save 
a  mere  fraction  of  the  silver  which  he  has 
made  into  a  conglomeration  which  could  be 
avoided  with  less  trouble. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


217 


GERMAN  CORRESPONDENCE. 

About  Negative  Varnish — Albumen  Paper 
Manufactories — Yellow  Spots  on  Albumen 
Paper — Reproducing  Negatives — About  En- 
amelled Burnt-in  Pictures — New  Applica- 
tion of  the  Dust  Process — Restoring  and 
Copying  Daguerreotypes. 

It  may  appear  as  labor  lost  to  write 
something  new  about  negative  varnish, 
particularly  when  writing  to  America, 
where  good  varnishes  are  by  no  means 
scarce,  and  where  even  inferior  kinds,  on 
account  of  the  dry  climate,  do  good  service. 
It  is  different  in  the  damp  climate  of  Eu- 
rope, and  year  in  and  year  out,  we  hear 
complaints  about  the  cracking  of  the  film. 
"  Such  things  do  not  happen  with  us,  "said  an 
American  friend  to  me.     Happy  America! 

But  there  are  certain  shortcomings  in 
varnishing  which  occur  also  in  America, 
and  of  these  I  will  speak  now.  It  has  likely 
happened  to  every  photographer,  that  the 
picture  on  being  varnished,  became  dis- 
solved ;  it  was  eaten  away  as  soon  as  the 
varnish  was  poured  upon  it,  and  floated 
partially  or  entirely  away  witb  it.  I  ob- 
served this  phenomenon  ten  years  ago,  and 
found  that  an  addition  of  water  to  the  var- 
nish will  cure  the  evil.  One  cubic  centim- 
etre of  water  to  one  hundred  cubic  centim- 
etres of  varnish  suffices.  When  water  is 
added  to  the  varnish,  a  precipitate  is  formed 
which  is  removed  by  warming  the  varnish. 
This  fact  has  led  to  the  supposition  that  too 
strong  alcohol  is  the  cause  of  the  dissolving 
of  the  film,  for  it  is  well  known  that  some 
samples  of  pyroxjdin  will  dissolve  in  warm 
alcohol,  and  this  is  the  reason  why  the 
same  varnish  will  not  dissolve  every  film, 
but  only  with  certain  collodions.  Ungar, 
in  Vienna,  has  lately  demonstrated,  that 
not  only  the  alcohol,  but  also  a  certain  per- 
centage of  turpentine  in  the  varnish,  causes 
this  eating  away  of  the  film.  Ungar  found 
that  a  solution  of  20  parts  of  turpentine  in 
100  parts  of  water,  possessed  strong  dis- 
solving power  for  collodion  films,  so  much 
so,  that  the  film  will  always  be  dissolved 
when  these  conditions  are  present,  and  par- 
ticularly when  the  plate  has  been  warmed. 

I  remember  a  communication  of  our 
friend  Simpson,  which  he  wrote  ten  years 


ago,  to  the  effect  that  oil  of  turpentine  may 
be  used  for  dissolving  cotton  ;  at  all  events, 
there  are  several  substances  which  will  dis- 
solve cotton,  which  heretofore  have  been 
but  little  tried,  for  instance,  acetone,  nitro- 
benzole,  &c. 

Ungar's  communication  points  to  the  fact 
that  turpentine  in  the  varnish  exercises 
an  injurious  influence;  on  the  other  hand, 
turpentine  is  frequently  added  to  varnish 
because  it  improves  its  quality  in  other  re- 
spects. Ungar  maintains  that  the  ugly  cracks 
and  splits  in  varnish  are  avoided  by  adding 
turpentine.  He  speaks  of  a  varnish  which 
showed  cracks  one-quarter  of  an  hour  after 
it  had  been  applied,  and  which  by  the  ad- 
dition of  turpentine  became  fit  for  use. 
Castor  oil,  which  is  also  sometimes  added  to 
varnish,  is  said  to  be  not  near  as  efficient  as 
turpentine.  Ungar  gives  the  following 
formula? : 

Yellow  Shellac,       .  .2  parts. 

Turpentine,    ....      1  part. 

Dissolved  in  weak  alcohol. 


Also, 

Sandarac, 

Turpentine, 

Camphor, 


1  part. 
\  part. 
i  pait. 


Plates  which  have  been  coated  with  the 
last-named  varnish,  may  be  placed  for 
weeks  in  nitric  acid  without  the  film  being 
destroyed.  In  order  to  remove  this  varnish 
warm  lye  has  to  be  used.  Ungar  states 
further,  that  the  lead-pencil  retouch  adheres 
to  this  varnish  without  any  further  prepara- 
tion. 

I  add  some  observations  on  the  distortion 
of  the  film,  due  to  the  action  of  the  varnish, 
sometimes  in  the  shape  of  expansion,  at 
others  as  contractions.  It  seems  that  this 
depends  mainly  on  the  character  of  the 
varnish  which  has  been  employed,  for  a 
mastic  varnish  which  I  tried  recently  did 
not  expand  the  film  in  the  least. 

In  my  last  letter,  I  wrote  to  you  that  all 
the  Dresden  albumen  paper  manufactories 
had  been  consolidated  into  a  single  joint- 
stock  concern.  It  was  at  the  time  supposed 
that  Trapp  &  Munch,  in  Friedberg,  would 
also  join  in  this  arrangement ;  this,  however, 
is  not  the  case.  Trapp  &  Munch  remain 
independent,  and   use  as  heretofore   Eives 


218 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


plain  paper.  Speaking  about  paper,  I  have 
to  caution  those  of  my  readers  who  are 
smokers.  Mr.  Constant  states  that  the 
small  yellow  spots  which  we  sometimes  no- 
tice on  the  finished  pictures,  are  caused  by 
the  ash-dust  from  cigars.  He  has  noticed 
that  in  the  centre  of  this  spot  a  small  grain 
is  always  perceptible,  and  that  a  yellow 
color  extends  around  it,  which  extends  the 
further  the  larger  the  grain.  This  spot 
becomes  visible  after  fixing  and  washing, 
but  becomes  prominent  only  after  drying. 
Mr.  Constant  refers  to  the  testimony  of  a 
lady  photographer,  who  was  much  annoyed 
by  these  spots,  until  finally  she  forbid  her 
workmen  to  smoke  in  the  atelier,  when  the 
spots  disappeared. 

I  myself  do  not  smoke,  and  have  never 
noticed  these  spots,  but  on  the  other  hand,  I 
know  several  photographers  here  who  smoke 
constantly,  and  who  have  neves  noticed 
them. 

The  process  of  Obernetter  for  reproducing 
negatives  is  much  talked  about.  I  have 
recently  seen  a  negative  portrait  of  the 
Emperor,  which  had  been  reproduced  by 
Obernetter  in  an  admirable  manner.  It  is 
certain  that  not  every  one  is  able  to  repro- 
duce by  this  process  as  successfully  as 
Obernetter,  who,  by  years  of  practice,  has 
acquired  an  astonishing  routine,  and  this 
seems  to  be  necessary.  His  process  is  the 
same  as  the  one  which  is  employed  in 
making  enamelled  or  burnt-in  pictures.  I 
have  met  in  America  many  persons  who 
have  tried  this  process,  but  did  not  meet 
with  any  success.  Obernetter  has  published 
lately  some  interesting  facts  which  explain 
the  want  of  success.  In  making  a  porcelain 
picture  a  film  of  chromate  of  gum  is  exposed 
to  light,  and  dusted  over  with  the  enamel 
powder,  the  plate  is  afterward  coated  with 
collodion,  and  washed  finally  with  diluted 
acid  in  order  to  remove  the  chromic  salts. 
This  acid  is,  according  to  Obernetter,  the 
objectionable  feature ;  it  decomposes  the 
pigment,  which  loses  in  consequence  tone 
and  lustre,  and  turns  gray  and  ugly. 

This  objectionable  feature  is  at  once  re- 
moved if  we  employ,  in  place  of  the  acid, 
an  alkali  for  washing  the  plate,  for  instance, 
a  weak  solution  of  soda  or  potash. 

Many   persons   torment    themselves    by 


making  the  solutions  in  the  dark,  by  dust- 
ing in  the  dark,  and  coating  the  plate  in 
the  dark,  &c.  This,  however,  is  not  nec- 
essary. The  solution  does  not  suffer-  by 
light ;  the  dry  film  is  somewhat  affected  by 
light,  but  only  if  the  action  continues  for 
some  time. 

Woodbury  has  also  worked  Obernetter's 
process,  and  obtained  very  excellent  results. 
He  states  that  breathing  on  the  exposed  film 
should  be  avoided,  while,  on  the  other  hand, 
Obernetter  recommends  it.  Woodbury  rec- 
ommends to  let  the  plates  rest  for  a  short 
time.  He  says  that  breathing  on  them  has 
always  caused  him  trouble,  particularly 
streaks  in  the  direction  of  the  stroke  of  the 
brush.  Obernetter  describes  further  an  ap- 
plication of  the  dust  process  for  the  produc- 
tion of  plates  suitable  for  the  printing  press. 

A  copper  or  glass  plate  is  coated  with  a 
thick  solution  of  10  grammes  gelatin,  2 
grammes  glycerin,  4  grammes  bichromate 
of  ammonia,  and  50  grammes  of  water; 
when  the  plate  has  become  dry  it  is  exposed 
under  a  negative.  After  exposure  the  plate 
is  dusted  over  with  fine  zinc-dust,  such  as 
is  found  in  the  zinc  works,  until  the  depths 
are  strongly  infected  with  it.  When  the 
plate  has  been  sufficiently  dusted  a  part  of 
the  chromate  is  washed  out  with  water,  and 
this  is  continued  so  long  as  the  water  has  a 
lemon-yellow  color  :  afterwards  the  plate  is 
left  to  dry  spontaneously.  The  remnant  of 
the  chromate  remaining  in  the  plate  is  just 
sufficient  to  make  the  gelatin  film,  by  long 
exposure  to  light  or  heating  to  150  degrees, 
insoluble.  When  this  has  been  done  the  plate 
is  exposed  to  dilute  muriatic  acid,  the  zinc 
dissolves,  and  the  resulting  hydrogen  re- 
duces, in  its  nascent  state,  the  insoluble 
gelatin  into  the  soluble  modification.  The 
film  is  then  washed  with  hot  water,  and  we 
have  a  relief  plate,  in  which  all  the  parts 
are  depressed  where  the  zinc-dust  had  been 
before,  in  other  words,  the  shadows.  This 
relief  plate  can  be  copied  by  the  galvanic 
process.  Unfortunately  the  half  tones,  as 
well  as  the  shadows,  are  depressed,  and 
hence  we  have  no  half  tones  in  the  picture. 
But  line  drawings  may  be  reproduced  by 
this  process  in  an  excellent  manner. 

This  kind  of  work,  however,  is  by  no 
means  pleasant,  for  the  zinc-dust  is  injurious 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


219 


to  health,  and  to  inhale  it  cannot  be  avoided. 
If  we  work  for  half  an  hour  at  this  process 
the  consequences  are  metallic  taste,  loss  of 
appetite,  and  tendency  to  vomiting.  Par- 
tially we  can  protect  ourselves  by  the  use  of 
respirators.  Two  or  three  plates  a  day  may 
be  made  with  impunity. 

In  conclusion,  let  me  give  you  a  process 
for  restoring  old  daguerreotypes  which  have 
turned  yellow,  blue,  or  black.  Maybe  that 
this  process  is  known  already.  I  do  not 
find  a  notice  of  it,  however.  The  manner  is 
simple.  The  daguerreotype  is  placed  in  a 
solution  of  cyanide  of  potassium,  when 
sometimes  it  will  become  as  bright  as  new. 
When  we  wish  to  reproduce  a  daguerreotype, 
it  will  be  advisable  to  so  place  the  same  that 
the  polishing  lines  are  placed  horizontal  ; 
generally  these  lines  cross  the  face  from 
right  to  left. 

Yours  truly, 

Dr.  Vogel. 


SOCIETY  GOSSIP. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association. — 
Wednesday  evening,  June  3d,  1874.  Thomas 
Severn  was  elected  a  member. 

Mr.  Greene  read  a  very  able  paper  on 
"Art  as  applied  to  Photography,"  after 
which  a  discussion  followed  by  Messrs.  Hall, 
Hesler,  Greene,  Cross,  Cunningham,  and 
others. 

Mr.  D.  H,  Cross  criticized  the  statement 
that  there  could  be  no  fine  art  where  there 
were  rules.  Every  general  principle,  when 
applied,  when  worked  up  to,  was  a  rule, 
and  without  principles  there  could  be  noth- 
ing done. 

Mr.  A.  Hesler  was  also  of  opinion  that  in 
the  toning,  pose,  and  background  of  pho- 
tographic pictures,  unless  there  was  artistic 
taste  exercised,  the  public  would  not  have 
the  work  palmed  off  on  them.  In  so  much 
there  was  room  for  the  application  of  artistic 
principles  to  photography  ;  further  than  that 
there  was  not. 

Mr.  A.  Hall  derided  the  idea  that  the 
work  of  the  camera  could  be  styled  artistic 
After  further  discussion,  a  vote  of  thanks 
was  returned  to  Mr.  Greene  for  his  paper, 
which  was  placed  on  file,  without  any  con- 
clusion as  to  whether  photography  was  or 


could  be  improved  by  the  application  of 
artistic  principles,  or  must  be  run  as  a  me- 
chanical trade. 

Mr.  Hesler  explained  how  the  National 
Photographic  Association  affairs  were  com- 
ing on.  Everything  is  running  smoothly, 
and  very  satisfactorily.  He  had  not  the 
least  doubt  but  we  would  have  the  greatest 
show  this  season  that  we  ever  had.  All 
were  responding  liberally,  and  applications 
for  space  were  coming  in  rapidly.  The 
art  gallery,  and  so  much  of  the  main  part 
of  the  Exposition  building  as  shall  be  found 
necesary,  will  be  fitted  up  to  receive  the 
specimens  of  art,  which  are  to  be  arranged 
according  to  the  different  parts  of  the  Union 
in  which  they  may  happen  to  have  been 
constructed.  The  rest  of  the  building  not 
occupied  in  this  way  will  be  decorated  with 
flags,  evergreens,  and  appropriate  mottoes. 
Music  will  be  supplied  by  a  purely  original 
plan.  Nothing  but  nature's  songsters,  and 
only  such  of  those  as  wear  feathers,  are  to 
be  employed.  But  it  is  proposed  to  secure 
as  many  of  these  as  possible,  and  distribute 
them  about  the  building  so  plentifully  that 
the  nights  and  days  of  the  artistic  festival 
shall  be  thoroughly  filled  with  their  music. 

Mr.  Greene  moved  that  the  Chicago  Pho- 
tographic Association  throw  open  their 
rooms  to  welcome  the  photographic  fra- 
ternity, visiting  the  National  Photographic 
Association's  convention  in  July.  Car- 
ried unanimously.  Mr.  Greene  was  ap- 
pointed a  committe  to  procure  badges,  for 
members  of  the  Chicago  Photographic  Asso- 
ciation to  wear  during  the  convention  of  the 
National  Photographic  Association  ;  also  to 
procure  a  flag  to  unfurl  from  our  head- 
quarters, as  a  guide  to  strangers. 

Mr.  Hesler  stated  he  had  lately  received 
several  hundred  fine  lantern  transparencies, 
which  he  would  be  pleased  to  exhibit  before 
the  Society.  Mr.  Hesler's  offer  was  accepted, 
and  Wednesday  evening,  the  10th  inst., 
fixed  as  the  time.  The  Secretary  was  in- 
structed to  notify  all  photographers  of  Chi- 
cago, inviting  them  to  be  present,  with  their 
ladies,  and  such  friends  as  they  may  choose 
to  invite. 

On  motion,  adjourned. 

Boston  Photographic  Association. — 
Friday  evening,  June  5th,  1874.     The  com- 


220 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


mittee  appointed  at  the  previous  meeting 
to  make  arrangements  for  those  wishing 
to  attend  or  exhibit  at  the  National  Pho- 
tographic Association,  at  Chicago,  re- 
ported progress  ;  having  arranged  for  those 
sending  pictures,  to  box  and  forward  them 
to  the  store  of  B.  French  &  Co.,  from  which 
place  they  will  be  shipped  about  the  1st  of 
July,  all  together.  Quite  a  number  signi- 
fied their  intention  to  send  specimens. 

Messrs.  Black  and  Hallenbeck  were  ap- 
pointed a  committee  to  issue  a  circular  to 
those  that  would  send  pictures,  informing 
them  of  the  arrangements  made,  with  in- 
structions for  shipping. 

The  President  read  a  circular  from  the 
Secretary  of  the  Massachusetts  Mechanics' 
Charitable  Association,  inviting  the  pho- 
tographers to  furnish  pictures,  to  exhibit  at 
the  Twelfth  Exhibition  of  their  Association, 
which  will  be  held  in  Boston,  commencing 
on  the  16th  of  September,  and  closing  on 
the  7th  of  October. 

Quite  a  number  of  tickets  were  taken  for 
the  mammoth  camera  and  tube. 

A  very  fine  lot  of  cards  and  cabinets  from 
Mr.  Delamater,  of  Hartford,  Conn.,  were 
left  for  inspection,  being  very  fine  in  chemi- 
cal effects,  as  well  as  lighting  and  posing, 
and  elicited  some  very  flattering  remarks 
from  the  members. 

Mr.  Prescott  (who  was  elected  to  mem- 
bership at  the  last  meeting),  brought  in 
some  8  x  10  portraits,  which  were  very  nicely 
finished,  and  received  much  praise. 

Mr.  Thomas  R.  Burnham,  the  prince  of 
large  plates,  had  quite  an  exhibition  of 
pictures,  consisting  of  groups  and  two- 
third-length  portraits,  made  on  20x24 
plates,  and  very  finely  lighted  and  finished. 

Adjourned  to  the  last  Friday  in  June. 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadel- 
phia.—Wednesday,  June  3d,  1874.  Mr. 
Sartain,  a  member  of  the  Franklin  Institute, 
who  was  present  during  the  evening,  called 
the  attention  of  the  Society  to  a  pamphlet,  in 
which  regulations,  &c,  were  set  forth,  rela- 
tive to  an  exhibition  of  American  Art,  to 
be  given  under  the  auspices  of  the  said  In- 
stitute, in  October  next.  Mr.  Sartain  said 
that  it  was  desired  that  the  art  of  photog- 
raphy should  have  a  prominent  place  among 


the  fine  arts,  and  that  the  members  of  the 
Franklin  Institute  invited  the  co-operation 
of  this  Society,  in  order  that  the  photo- 
graphic display  might  be  made  as  effective 
as  possible.  Mr.  Sartain  also  said  that  pre- 
miums would  be  awarded  for  the  best  speci- 
mens of  work,  &c. 

After  some  conversation  on  the  subject, 
Dr.  Wilcocks  offered  the  following  resolu- 
tions, which  were  adopted. 

"  Resolved,  That  this  Society  have  heard 
with  satisfaction  of  the  intention  of  the 
Franklin  Institute,  to  include  in  their  exhi- 
bition of  art,  in  the  month  of  October,  a 
display  of  photographs. 

"  Resolved,  That  this  Society  will  loan 
for  said  exhibition,  any  specimens  of  fine 
work  which  the  Fine  Art  Committee  of  the 
Institute  may  select." 

A  communication  from  Mr.  M.  Carey 
Lea,  entitled  the  "  Albumen  Chloro-bromide 
Process,"  was  read  by  the  Secretary.  The 
paper  was  accompanied  by  a  proof  of  the 
process,  which  was  examined  with  interest, 
and  pronounced  upon  favorably. 

Mr.  Best  exhibited  a  negative  made  by 
Sutton's  wet  process,  with  a  ten-grain  bro- 
mized  collodion,  eighty-grain  bath,  and  a 
preservative  of  one  ounce  of  glycerin,  and 
three  ounces  of  five-grain  gelatin  solution. 
Exposed  fourteen  hours  after  preparation 
with  alkaline  development  and  an  exposure 
equal  to  a  wet  plate. 

Mr.  Carbutt  exhibited  a  number  of  the 
London  "Figaro,"  which  contained  a  fine 
portrait  printed  b}7  the  Woodbury  process. 
Mr.  Carbutt  spoke  of  the  advance  made  in 
this  department  of  photography,  and  that 
now,  prints  could  be  made  cheap  enough  to 
be  used  as  illustrations  in  periodicals,  when 
made  by  the  mechanical  processes. 

After  adjournment,  the  slides  sent  in  ex- 
change by  the  Photographic  Society  of 
Edinburgh,  were  exhibited  in  the  sciopti- 
con.  The  collection  is  a  large  and  fine  one, 
and  is  composed  principally  of  Scottish 
views. 

German  Photographers'  Association. 
—  Washing  of  Prints. — Several  months  ago, 
when  Mr.  Kurtz  returned  from  his  Euro- 
pean trip,  he  spoke  about  Mr.  Albert's, 
Munich,  method  of  washing  prints  by  means 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


221 


of  a  douche,  and  stated  that  he  was  im- 
pressed by  it  so  favorably,  that  he  would 
introduce  it  in  his  new  gallery,  then  in 
course  of  erection.  This  he  has  done  since, 
and  the  satisfactory  working  of  it  has'  in- 
duced Messrs.  Charles  Cooper  &  Co.  to 
wash  their  prints  on  the  same  principle. 
Mr.  Kleinhaus  of  the  above  firm  explained 
the  modus  operandi  at  the  last  meeting. 

After  fixing,  the  prints  are  put  in  a  flat 
trough,  the  bottom  of  which  consists  of 
grooved  plate-glass,  and  is  in  an  inclined 
position,  to  allow  the  water  to  run  off; 
above  this  trough  are  several  douches,  con- 
nected by  hose  with  a  water-pipe  running 
along  the  ceiling.  To  prevent  the  prints 
from  being  carried  away  from  under  the 
douches  by  the  force  of  the  water,  the}r  are 
put  in  half  cylinders  of  glass,  about  twenty 
inches  in  diameter  for  large  prints,  and 
glass  rods  for  smaller  ones.  When  placed 
on  top  of  these  they  will  not  move.  After 
being  washed  on  both  sides  for  about  five 
minutes,  the  silver  test  for  hypo  as  lately 
published,  fails  to  show  any  trace  of  it. 
Generally  after  thus  washed,  the  prints  are 
thrown  in  a  tank  with  running  water,  till 
the  whole  lot  is  got  through  with. 

Chromo-photograplis. — Mr.  Koans,  of 
Kartstadt,  N.  J.,  exhibited  several  double 
photographs,  or  as  called  by  him  chromo- 
photographs.  They  have  a  very  pleasing 
effect,  and  although  the  idea  is  not  a  new 
one,  the  process  of  making  them  is  consid- 
erably improved. 

Two  prints  are  made  from  the  same  nega- 
tive, one  on  albumen  paper,  the  other  on 
plain  ;  the  last  one  is  printed  only  far  enough 
to  show  all  details.  B37  any  varnish,  thinned 
a  good  deal  by  spirits  of  turpentine,  the 
albumen  print  is  made  transparent,  and 
fastened  to  the  inner  side  of  an  oval  convex 
glass.  This  is  done  by  a  thick  mastic  var- 
nish or  any  colorless  gum,  as  Canadian 
balsam,  &c.  Care  has  to  be  taken  in  this 
operation  to  get  rid  of  all  air-bubbles. 
Another  oval  convex  glass  is  put  at  the 
back  of  this  print,  and  the  plain  paper  one 
is  moved  behind  this  glass,  till  both  prints 
appear  like  one  ;  then  a  piece  of  white  card- 
board furnishes  the  back,  and  the  whole  is 
fastened  together)  around  the  edges  by  stick- 
ing-paper,  and  put  in  a  suitable  frame.  For 


coloring  these  pictures,  the  prominent  fea- 
tures as  eyes,  lips,  and  the  finer  details  in 
dress,  are  colored  on  the  back  of  the 
transparent  albumen  print,  with  thinner 
water  colors  ;  the  rest  is  done  on  the  plain 
print  by  dry  colors  being  rubbed  on  pretty 
strong. 

Mr.  O.  Lewin  exhibited  several  Imperial 
cards  with  Rembrandt  effect.  They  showed 
a  remarkable  progress  in  his  work  and  were 
duly  admired. 

Pennsylvania,  Philadelphia. — Some 
discussion  arose  on  the  question  of  compe- 
ting for  the  medal  offered  each  month,  and 
the  method  of  making  the  award. 

Mr.  Saylor  spoke  in  opposition  to  award- 
ing a  medal.  He  thought  it  would  be  better 
to  appoint  a  permanent  committee  to  ex- 
amine the  work  brought  in  by  members, 
whose  duty  it  should  be  to  explain  the 
merits  and  demerits  of  the  different  speci- 
mens. He  would  like  to  bring  some  of  his 
work,  and  have  somebody  show  him  where 
he  could  improve.  He  had  found  it  to  pay 
him  to  come  from  Lancaster  to  attend  these 
meetings,  but  he  thought  that  by  some  such 
arrangement  as  this,  he  and  all  would  be 
benefited  a  great  deal  more  than  by  award- 
ing a  medal  for  the  best  picture,  without 
any  explanation  being  given  why  it  was 
better  than  another,  or  what  its  reai  merits 
consisted  of. 

The  Committee  on  a  Mutual  Protective 
Association  reported  progress,  and  was  con- 
tinued. A  letter  was  read  from  Mr.  H.  H. 
Hannay,  chairman  of  the  committee  ap- 
pointed by  the  Brooklyn  Association  for 
the  same  purpose,  urging  a  national  organi- 
zation at  as  early  a  day  as  possible. 

Mr.  Carbutt  spoke  in  reference  to  criti- 
cizing pictures  that  are  brought  in.  He 
thought  pictures  might  be  exhibited  by  the 
,  lantern,  and  let  some  one  explain  the  light- 
ing, posing,  chemical  effects,  &c.  If  mem- 
bers were  sensitive  about  having  their  own 
work  criticized,  pictures  not  made  b}7  the 
members  might  be  used.  He  thought  in 
this  way  a  great  deal  might  be  learned  in 
the  rudiments  of  the  art,  that  we  should  be 
a  long  time  in  acquiring  if  left  to  work  it 
out  ourselves.  He  well  remembered  when 
he  first  learned  to  see  light  and  shade  on  a 
face.     It  was  a  long  time  before  he  learned 


222 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


this,  but  after  it  once  came  to  him  he  then 
saw  light  and  shade  everywhere. 

Mr.  Carbutt  said  he  had  been  questioned 
by  photographers  as  to  the  cause  of  their 
paper  turning  brown.  He  said  it  usually  oc- 
curred in  warm  weather,  and  when  there  was 
a  great  deal  of  moisture  in  the  atmosphere. 
He  suggested  that  after  silvering,  the  paper 
be  placed  in  a  box — Shoemaker's  fuming-box 
would  be  just  the  thing — the  paper  being  in 
the  upper  part,  and  in  the  bottom  place 
some  unslacked  lime;  this  absorbs  the  mois- 
ture, and  permits  the  paper  to  dry  readily. 
Any  means  of  drying  the  paper  quickly  he 
thought  would  obviate  the  trouble. 

Mr.  Shoemaker  said  he  used  a  neutral 
bath,  and  floated  a  very  short  time  in  hot 
weather,  and  in  this  way  seldom  had  any 
trouble. 

The  Secretary  said  he  had  overcome  the 
difficulty  by  keeping  the  silver  bath  cool, 
and  less  alkaline  than  in  cold  weather. 

Adjourned  to  September. 

The  New  Enamelled  Souvenir 
Photograph. 

This  is  the  name  given  by  Messrs.  E.  L.  Brand 
&  Co.,  of  Chicago,  to  a  new  style  of  photograph, 
which  we  found  them  very  bu:-ily  engaged  in  pro- 
ducing when  we  visited  them  a  few  weeks  ago. 

The  "Souvenir  "  is  a  gelatinized  cameo  pic- 
ture, but  by  no  means  what  is  termed  the  Glace 
or  California  enamel  picture.  It  is  of  a  very  supe- 
rior quality  and  finish,  which  finish  is  due  to  the 
method  employed  for  their  production  by  Messrs. 
Brand  &  Co.  These  gentlemen  are  willing,  and 
offer  to  teach  their  Souvenir  process  to  any  one  de- 
siring ihe  knowledge,  gratis,  for  they  do  not  wish 
to  be  considered  in  the  light  of  process  sellers, 
and  neither  are  they.  But  taking  up  the  process 
as  Mr.  Brand  brought  it  personally  from  France, 
improved  as  it  was,  they  found  it  was  not  perfect, 
and  by  diligent  and  lengthened  experiment  that 
the  great  thing  wanted  to  secure  the  very  best  re- 
sults was  a  properly  constructed  press  for  moulding 
the  picture,  for  without  the  proper  cameo  effect 
no  one  would  consider  the  souvenir  as  a  valuable 
souvenir  at  all,  for  it  would  be  expressionless. 
Therefore  these  gentlemen  set  themselves  about 
constructing  a  press  of  the  desired  kind,  and 
they  have  perfected  one  which  they  think  will 
make  the  Souvenir  irresistibly  attractive  to  any 
patron  of  good  taste.  These  presses,  made  to 
mould  all  sizes  from  a  carte  to  an  18x23  pic- 
ture, are  now  ready  for  the  market,  and  thanks  to 


Mr.  Brand,  who  personally  called  upon  us,  we 
have  witnessed  their  perfect  working  in  our  city, 
and  the  first  photographer  to  whom  it  was  shown, 
Mr.  F.  Gutekunst,  purchased  one  of  the  largest 
presses,  although  he  was  working  the  Glace  pro- 
cess. They  do  seem  to  fill  every  requirement,  but 
as  the  Convention  is  near  at  hand,  and  as  Messrs. 
Brand  &  Co.  earnestly  invite  all  visiting  photog- 
raphers to  call  at  their  establishment,  at  59(5  Wa- 
bash Avenue,  and  examine  their  beautiful  Souve- 
nir photographs  and  their  Souvenir  press,  the 
most  of  our  readers  will  have  an  opportunity  of 
seeing  with  their  own  eyes  what  we  so  feebly  de- 
scribe. It  is  assuredly  a  great  inducement  to 
purchase  the  press  when  one  can  obtain  free  all 
the  latest  details  for  making  the  picture,  which 
promises  to  be  so  popular,  and  is  certainly  very 
strikingly  beautiful  and  attractive. 

Be  sure  to  look  into  the   matter  when  you  go 
to  Chicago. 


FURTHER  ABOUT  THE   SOUTH- 
WORTH-WING  PATENT. 

Dear  Sir  :  As  I  have  many  inquiries  from 
photographers  as  to  the  status  of  the  case  of 
Wing  H  al.  against  myself,  will  you  permit  me  to 
say  that  the  suit  was  inaugurated  at  this  place 
over  a  year  since,  and  was,  I  understand,  the 
first  of  the  kind  instituted  after  the  case  of  Wing 
vs.  Schoonmaker,  four  years  ago.  If  the  rule  of 
"first  come  first  served"  be  applied,  it  will  be 
tried  first,  although  I  learn  from  Boston  that  the 
complainants  are  crowding  parties  there,  while 
they  delay  the  case  here  This  looks  suspicious. 
As  I  believe  we  have  the  best  evidence  in  the 
United  States  on  file,  if  the  complainants,  know- 
ing this,  bring  the  case  at  issue  between  us  here 
to  a  speedy  trial,  and  succeed  in  getting  a  de- 
cision in  their  favor,  it  will  probably  seem  wise 
for  others  in  a  similar  situation  to  settle  upon  the 
best  attainable  terms.  If  the  decision  be  other- 
wise, as  I  can  place  copies  of  our  testimony  in 
the  hands  of  all  interested  parties,  they  have  hut 
to  obtain  and  file  the  same  evidence  to  insure  a 
like  result,  and  at  very  little  cosi  to  them 

At  the  commencement  of  the  May  term  of  the 
United  States  Court  at  this  place,  the  case  was 
entered  upon  the  calendar,  and  we  expect  the 
same  will  be  tried  when  reached  in  its  order. 
How  soon  that  will  be  it  is  impossible  to  tell,  but 
probably  not  before  August  ^or  September  now, 
as  the  Court,  I  believe,  takes  a  recess  during  hot 
weather.  The  counsel  for  defence  have  been 
ready  and  anxious  for  trial  since  February  last. 

J.   H    Tompkins. 
Grand  Rapids,  Mich.,  June  18th,  1874. 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


223 


Ouit  Foreign  Medal.— We  desire  to  remind 
our  foreign  subscribers  of  the  gold  medal  we 
offer  for  the  best  three  cabinet  negatives  sent  us 
by  the  15th  of  August.  As  this  is  the  last  op- 
portunity we  shall  have  to  urge  them  to  make 
something  especially  for  us,  we  hope  they  will 
give  the  matter  their  early  attention.  Some 
have  already  sent  their  contributions,  and  we 
hope  to  see  an  animated  contest. 


Landscape  Medal. — We  also  call  attention 
again. to  our  offer  of  a  gold  medal  for  the  best 
three  landscape  negatives  sent  us  by  the  15th  of 
August.  These  are  to  be  the  size  for  our  illus- 
trations. We  hope  all  our  landscape  workers 
will  bear  this  in  mind,  and  make  a  little  effort  to 
secure  something  that  will  not  only  be  an  honor  to 
themselves,  but  a  credit  to  the  art  they  represent. 


UroN  further  examination  we  have  found 
more  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Reference- Book  that  were 
damaged  by  water  than  we  supposed  we  had. 
We  can  continue  to  supply  them  at  the  wet  rate. 
fifty  cents  each. 


Art  Works. — In  addition  to  the  works  adver- 
tised last  month,  we  now  have  several  others  as 
follows:  "  Lessing's  Laocoon,"  "  The  Old  Mas- 
ters and  their  Pictures,"  "Thoughts  About 
Art,"  "Christian  Art  and  Symbolism,"  "Mod- 
ern Painters  and  their  Paintings."  These  are 
all  beautiful  books,  highly  interesting  and  edu- 
cational to  all  who  are  studying  in  this  direction. 
We  commend,  especially  to  the  attention  of  art 
students,  Ruskin's  work,  entitled  "A  Handbook 
of  Art  Culture,"  which  heads  our  advertisement 
last  month,  as  one  of  the  most  admirable  works 
that  has  recently  appeared  on  this  subject.  They 
are  all  worthy  of  careful  study,  and  no  class  can 
be  benefited  by  them  more  than  photographers 
who  are  trying  to  gain  some  knowledge  of  art,  and 
rise  above  the  mere  mechanism  of  their  profession. 
We  would  call  the  attention  of  our  local  societies 
who  are  forming  libraries,  to  these  works,  and 
suggest  this  as  a  means  of  placing  them  within 
the  reach  of  all.  It  is  only  a  few  years  since 
such  books  as  these  were  not  to  be  had,  and  we 
rejoice  that  the  interest  awakened  in  art  matters 
in  this  country  has  called  for  the  publication  of 
them. 


Something  New  — Our  renders  have  no  doubt 
noticed  that  we  proposed  something  tirw.  This 
is  a  leaflet  similar  to  the  one  we  have  published 
for  some  time,  entitled  "  To  my  Patrons."  It  is 
an  improvement  on  that  in  many  respects  ;  is 
beautifully  gotten  up,  with  an  illustrated  cover, 
and  makes  a  very  beautiful  and  attractive  little 
work.     See  advertisement. 


The  Scovill  and  Holmes  Medals. — Those 
interested  should  bear  in  mind  that  these  medals 
are  given  for  the  best  improvement  in  photog- 
raphy. Those  wishing  to  compete  with  novel 
apparatus  or  processes  should  send  their  models 
or  formulae  to  the  awarding  committee  at  an 
early  day. 

Boston  to  Chicago. — Messrs.  Benj.  French 
k  Co.,  of  Boston,  have  generously  offered  to  re- 
ceive and  ship  to  Chicago  all  boxes  of  pictures 
intended  for  the  Exhibition.  Sent  in  this  way 
they  will  go  much  cheaper  and  safer.  The  Bos- 
ton Society  has  issued  a  circular  to  the  photog- 
raphers of  New  England  calling  their  attention 
to  this  offer,  and  giving  directions  for  sending 
goods.  The  circular  concludes  with  the  follow- 
ing reference  to  the  Mammoth  Offer  : 

"Messrs.  Benjamin  French  &  Co.  have  pre- 
sented to  the  National  Photographic  Association 
a  mammoth  No.  9  Voigtlander  tube,  valued  at 
$425  and  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Compan}' 
have  also  presented  a  17  x  20  camera  box,  suit- 
able for  the  above  tube.  The  tube  and  box  are 
to  be  disposed  of  by  drawing,  the  proceeds  to  be 
given  to  the  National  Photographic  Association. 
Six  hundred  tickets  are  to  be  sold  at  $3.00  each  ; 
and  the  first  number  drawn  will  entitle  the 
holder  to  the  prize." 

Secure  your  tickets  before  the  Convention. 


The  Chicago  Photographic  Association 
held  an  adjourned  meeting  on  Wednesday 
evening,  June  10th,  to  which  their  ladies  and 
friends  were  invited,  for  the  purpose  of  witness- 
ing a  scioptieon  exhibition  by  Mr.  A.  Hesler. 
They  were  entertained  with  views  in  Asia,  Africa, 
China,  England,  France,  Ac. 

We  are  glad  to  see  an  interest  in  exhibitions 
of  this  kind,  as  there  is  nothing  so  easily  gotten 
up  that  is  so  interesting  and  instructive. 


224 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER 


Mr.  C.  D.  Mosher,  of  Chicago,  held  his 
annual  art  receptions  on  the  evenings  of  the 
2d  and  4th,  and  the  afternoon  and  evening  of 
the  6th  of  June.  We  received  a  very  neatly 
gotten-up  card  of  invitation,  together  with  a 
catalogue  of  pictures  on  exhibition.  Such  enter- 
tainments as  these  advertise  a  gallery  and  help 
business.  

Messrs.  Huntington  &  Bartram  have  re- 
cently opened  a  fine  new  gallery  in  St.  Paul, 
Minnesota.  We  are  glad  to  see  the  art. demand- 
ing such  establishments,  and  wish  them  success. 


Excursion  to  Chicago. — We  would  call  the 
attention  of  those  who  think  of  starting  from 
Philadelphia  to  the  notice  we  gave  last  month, 
under  the  head  of  "  All  About  Chicago,"  that 
one  or  two  Pullman  cars  will  be  chartered  for 
the  trip,  and  we  would  be  pleased  to  have  all 
who  will,  join  us  and  help  make  up  a  pleasant 
party.  Please  notify  us  a  week  in  advance,  so 
that  we  may  make  the  necessary  provisions.  Will 
start  Thursday  or  Friday  previous  to  the  Conven- 
tion.   

Views  of  Egypt,  Nubia,  etc. — Messrs.  W. 
A.  Mansell  &  Co.,  No.  2  Percy  Street,  London, 
have  sent  us  a  series  of  catalogues  of  views  which 
they  publish,  and  we  know  from  a  visit  to  their 
establishment  that  it  is  the  most  advantageous 
place  in  London  to  purchase.  They  supply  views 
of  all  parts  of  the  world  at  very  low  prices,  and 
best  of  all,  of  most  excellent  quality.  We  have 
some  before  us  now  of  Egypt,  Nubia,  &c. ,  from 
negatives  by  that  prince  of  English  landscape 
photographers,  Mr.  Frank  M.  Good.  We  always 
had  a  profound  admiration  for  Mr.  Good's  work. 
No  one  excels  him,  and  we  are  glad  he  his 
secured  such  good  printers  and  publishers. 
Visitors  to  London  should  be  sure  to  visit  them. 


facturers  always  make  their  best  show  about  the 
time  of  the  National  Photographic  Association 
Convention,  and  we  have  done  our  best  for  them 
in  the  way  of  display.  What  with  our  extra  ad- 
vertisements, the  beautiful  prize  pictures,  and 
the  display  of  woodcuts  in  the  articles,  this  may 
be  called  a  pictorial  number.      Read  it  carefully. 


Mr.  W.  H.  Rulofson,  of  San  Francisco,  ex- 
pects to  attend  the  Chicago  convention.  We 
think  we  can  be  safe  in  promising  him  a  hearty 
reception.  

A  New  Firm. — Mr.  Frank  Jewell,  whose 
name  is  doubtless  familiar  to  many  of  our 
readers,  has  sold  his  gallery  at  Scranton,  Penn- 
sylvania, and  formed  a  copartnership  with  Mr. 
Erownell,  under  the  firm  of  Brownell  &  Jewell. 
Their  gallery  is  at  889  Broadway,  New  York.  We 
congratulate  Mr.  Jewell  on  having  found  a  wider 
fisld  for  the  exercise  of  his  abilities  and  enter- 
prise, and  wish  the  new  firm  every  success. 


Views  of  the  Interior  and  Exterior  of 
the  New  Masonic  Temple,  Philadelphia. — 
Mr.  F.  Gutekunst  of  this  city  has  the  exclusive 
right  to  make  negatives  of  this  superb  Temple. 
Mr.  James  Cremer  publishes  the  pictures  in  con- 
nection with  Messrs.  Benerman  &  Wilson.  The 
stereo  size  is  now  ready,  as  will  be  seen  by  refer- 
ence to  the  advertisement,  and  they  are  not  only 
interesting  to  ail  brother  Masons,  but  likewise 
most  interesting  as  studies  of  the  various  orders 
of  architecture — Egyptian,  Doric,  Ionic,  Corin- 
thian, Gothic,  &c.  As  photographs  they  are 
unexcelled. 


Photographs  of  Horses. — Messrs.  Schreiber 
&  Sons,  818  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  have  just 
published  a  very  beautiful  work  containing  pho- 
tographs of  the  principal  race-horses  of  the  coun- 
try. It  is  handsomely  bound  and  a  gre.it  credit 
to  the  publishers,  who  excel  in  this  sort  of  work. 

Another  Teacher  in  Photography. — 
Those  of  our  readers  who  need  instruction  in 
photography  will  feel  glad  to  know  that  they 
can  avail  themselves  of  the  services  of  one  who 
is  most  competent  to  teach  them.  We  allude  to 
Mr.  Walter  C.  North,  late  of  Utica,  N.  Y.,  who 
is  well  known  by  his  work  to  our  readers,  and 
who,  having  recently  sold  his  gallery,  will  visit 
those  who  desire  instructions  in  any  branch  of  the 
art  on  very  reasonable  terms.  Among  other  things 
he  includes  the  Glace  process  in  detail.  As  a  man 
and  as  a  photographer  he  is  first-class,  and  it 
gives  us  great  pleasure  to  commend  him  to  the 
needful.      His  present  address  is  Rondout,  N.  Y. 


Our  Adverttsements    this   month  will  well 
repay  a  careful  reading.      The  dealers  and  manu- 


Venetian  Views — Messrs.  H.  F.  &  M.  Muns- 
ter,  Venice,  Italy,  have  sent  us  a  beautiful  large 
photograph  of  the  tomb  of  Canova,  and  also  a 
catalogue  of  their  publications,  which  embraces 
a  very  fine  collection  at  low  prices. 

Photographic  Lenses  :  On  their  Choice  and 
U.-e.  By  J.  H.  Dallmeyer.  Revised  and  edited 
for  American  readers — is  the  title  of  a  very  use- 
ful pamphlet  which  all  photographers  should  re. id 
before  purchasing  their  lenses.  The  editor 
claims  to  have  corrected  some  errors  in  the  orig- 
inal in  order  that  American  readers  may  not  be 
misled.  All  dealers  have  it,  we  understand,  and 
we  recommend  its  perusal. 


HAS. 


« 


TEVENS' 


u 


WIDE  ANGLE"  I  "RAPID  RECTILINEAR 

Great  Central 

Photographic  Warehouse, 


J5 


STATE 
STREET. 


In  rigid  setting,  on  the  eash  plan.  Especially  re- 
constructed for  the  N.  P.  A  Convention  of  187 J/-. 

New  Carves,  Improved  Machinery,  etc. 

The  "  Wide  Angle"  "  Great  Central"  has  this  ad- 
vantage over  existing  houses. 

IMMENSE  ANGLE— taking  in  orders  from  all 
parts  of  the  country,  and  filling  all  bills  accurately. 

Can  be  used  with  less  money,  for  a  large  quantity 
of  goods  (remember,  this  is  important) ;  "  Q  TJICK 
A  CTING"  Prompt  in  filling  all  orders,  and  giving 
the  best  satisfaction  to  its  patrons.  Try  the  "  Wide 
Angle"  and  satisfy  yourself— WARRANTED. 

8  113 


Photographers'  Posing  Furniture  a  Specialty 

AT  THE  INDUSTRIAL  ART  WORKS. 

C.  A.  SCHINDLER,  Manufacturer  and  Patentee, 

P.  O.  Box  63,  WEST  HOBOKEN,  N.  J.,  opposite  West  23d  Street,  New  York  City, 


Offers  to  consumers,  and  the  trade  at  large, 
that  popular  line  of  goods  lately  introduced 
through  the  New  York  market,  at  reduced  prices. 
Specially  recommendable  is  the 


This  is  the  only  sliding-back  chair  yet  produced  in  which  the  brittle  cast-iron  in  the  main  part  is  avoided, 
It  is  constructed  of  hard  wood  and  wrought-iron.  The  rigid  back  rises  over  twelve  inches,  making  it  equal  to 
six  chairs  in  one.  It  is  luxuriously  upholstered  and  trimmed,  and,  through  its  elegance  and  comfort,  gives  the 
sitter  a  graceful  and  natural  position  without  the  aid  of  objectionable  head  and  body  braces. 

A  practical  experience  of  over  twenty-five  years  in  manufacturing  fine  furniture,  for  New  York  City  trade, 
should  be  a  sufficient  guarantee  for  their  quality.  Special  orders  promptly  forwarded.  Novelties  constantly 
added.    Pedestals,  Adjustable  Curtains,  with  fixtures,  Imitation  Rocks,  Ivy  Vines,  Eye  Stands,  &c,  &c. 

Material  for  recovering,  &c,  furnished.    The  principal  New  York  stockhouses  have  also  adopted  my 

PRICE  LIST— All  Articles  in  Finished  Black  Walnut. 

No.  1,  Position  Chair,  upholstered  in  rep,  6  inch  fringe $10  50 

"    2,            "                "         ash  rail  frame,  upholstered  in  terry,  6  inch  fringe 12  00 

"    3,             "                 "               "            "                   "                   "      spring  seat,  6  inch  fringe 12  50 

"    4,             "                 "               "            "                   "                   "                 "          8      "        "      15  00 

"    5,             "                 "               "            "                   "                   "                 "        10      "        "      16  50 

"    6,             "                 "               "            "                   "               plush,            "          8      "        "      17  50 

"    7,             "                 "               "            "                   "                   "                 "        10      "        "      19  00 

"    8,            "                "         revolving,  upholstered  in  terry,  6  inch  fringe 14  00 

"    9,            "                "                  "                  "                    "      8      "        "      16  50 

"  10.             "                 "                   "                   "               plush,  8      "        "      19  00 

"  11,  Phenix  Posing  Chair,  or  Chair  of  the  Future,  no  arms,  velvet,  6  inch  fringe 21  00 

"  12,             "                 "                   "               "          "               "            "               "       8      "        "      23  00 

"  13,            "                "                  "               "         "              "           "            velveteen,  8  inch  fringe,  25  00 

"  14,            "                "                  "               "         "              "     revolving,          "         8      "        "  27  50 

"  15,             "                 "                   "               "          "               "            "            plush,         8      "        "  33  00 

"  16,            "                "                  "               "          "               "    with  arms,  velvet,       6      "        "  25  00 

"  17,            "                "                  "               "         "              "           "            velveteen,  8      "        "  29  00 

"  18,             "                 "                   "               "          "               "            "             plush,         8      "        "  37  50 

"19,            "                "                  "               "         "    arms  and  baby  attach't,  velvet,  6      "        "  35  00 

"  20,             "                 "                   "               "          "            "            "          "    velveteen,  8      "        "  40  00 

"  21,  Settee  Chair,  engraved,  paneled,  gilded,  covered  in  terry 35  00 

"22,           "           "                  "         different  patterns,    "        "      "     35  00 

"  23,  Child's  Chair,  velveteen,  6  inch  fringe 18  75 

"  24,            "                 "        plush,         6      "        " 23  00 

"  25,  Child's  IiOunge,  in  rep 11  00 

"  26,           "                "            velveteen 12  50 

"27,            "                 "             plush 18  00 

"  28,  Child's  Sola,  three  feet  long,  in  rep 15  00 

"  29,           "                "             "           "      velveteen 17  50 

"  30,           "                ,;             "           "      plush 25  00 

"  31,  Child's  High  Chair,  velveteen,  6  inch  fringe 16  00 

"  32,  Baby  Attachment,  separate 12  00 

114 


E.  WEISKOPF,^~^OPTICAL  LENSES, 

No.  182  CENTRE  STREET, 

(UP  STAIRS) 

Cor.  Hester  Street,  NEW  YORK. 

THE    PHENIX    PLATES    OVER    ALL! 

The  Phenix  Plates  have  won  over  the  best  Ferrotypers  in  the  land,  and  are  constantly  receiving 
more  and  more  praise.     They  are  UNEQUALLED. 

peicb  list — :p"e:r,  boix:- 

SlZES,  1-9  1-6        1-4      4}4x6}^        1-2    4^x10       4-4  5x7        7x10        8x10     10x14 

Per  Sheet. 

Eggshell,  $0.80    $1.25    $1.85    $1.85    $2.20    $2.20    $2.40    $2.40    $2.70    $2.70    $0.14 
Glossy,  90      1.35       2.00      2.00      2.35      2.35       2.70       2.70       2.90       2.90         15 

PHENIX  PLATE  CO.— Scovill  Mfg.  Co.,  Agents,  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  N.  Y. 

■  II  .1.    I    —     II        !■!■         II       ij|- II  I       I  II 

CHAMPION  PLATE— Black  or  Chocolate-Tinted. 

10  x  14,  Eggshell,  per  box,  200  plates, $24  00 

10  x  14,  Glossy,  "         200       "  26  00 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  N.  Y. 

CAUTION. 


THE  PUBLIC  ARE  HEREBY  NOTIFIED   THAT  THE 

PHILADELPHIA  CARTE  ENVELOPE, 

Manufactured  by  Nixon  &  Stokes,  Philadelphia,  and  sold  by  the  regular 
stoekhouses  (who  will  not  deal  in  contraband  goods),  is  the  only  Carte  En- 
velope that  is  patented. 

ALL  OTHERS  ARE  AN   INFRINGEMENT 

and  parties  buying,  selling,  or  using  them  will  be  dealt  with  according  to  law. 
We  warn  the  trade  against  buying  Carte  or  Picture  Envelopes  of  trav- 
ellers who  are  not  connected  with  the  regular  stoekhouses. 

NIXON  &  STOKES, 

No.   2400  VINE  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA. 

115 


The  American  Optical  Company's 

▲ppjjuly  m9. 

SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  CO.,  Manufacturers, 

419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York. 


INSIDE,  OUTSIDE,  AND  THROUGHOUT,  THE  AMERICAN  OPTICAL  COMPANY'S  APPARATUS  IS 

UNDENIABLY  THE  BEST! 

And  has  been  so  decided  repeatedly  at  Fairs  and  Exhibitions  ;  and,  better  still,  by  the  thousands 
of  photographers  who  use  it  all  over  North  and  South  America,  and  even  in  Europe. 

A  COMPLETE  CATALOGUE  of  this  Apparatus  will  be  issued  soon.     Duplicate  copies  supplied 
gratis.     The  list  covers 

Apparatus  of  all  kinds, 

Harrison  Portrait  Lenses, 

The  Unequalled  Globe  Lenses, 

The  Celebrated  Ratio  Lenses. 

Photographers  desiring  to  examine  the  merits  of  these  goods  will  find  them  kept  on  hand  by  every 
stockdealer  in  the  country. 


ALL  FIRST-QUALITY  BOXES  AKE  SUPPLIED  WITH  SOLID  GLASS  CORNERS 
IN  THE  HOLDERS,  WITHOUT  EXTRA  CHARGE. 

SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  New  York. 

116 


PHILADELPHIA 

ABB  ENVELOP 


This  popular  Envelope  is  now  made  of  a  variety  of  shapes  and  sizes,  to 
suit  all  classes  of  Cabinet,  Victoria,  and  Carte  Photographs,  and  Ferrotypes. 

Excellent  Cap  Paper  of  various  tints  is  used,  and  the  openings  are  oval 
arch  top,  embossed  and  gilt. 

Their  manufacture  is  secured  by  letters  patent,  and  all  others  are 

INFRINGEMENTS. 


PIIUDILFHIi 


Garte 


ENVELOPES. 


PHILADELPHIA 


Garte 


ENVELOPES, 


MILLIONS  OI   THEM  ABE  SOLD  ANNUALLY, 

And  they  are  the  safest  envelope  for  mailing,  the  most  beautiful  to  deliver 

pictures  in,  and,  when  the  flap  is  turned  back  (see  cut),  they 

form  an  elegant  stand  for  the  picture. 


Specimens  will  be  supplied  by  any  dealer  in  the  country,  with  prices. 
They  are  sold  in  large  quantities  and  kept  constantly  in  stock,  by 


SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  CO.,  New  York. 

B.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY,  New  York. 
WM.  B.  HOLMES,  New  York. 

C.  W.  STEVENS,  Chicago. 


BEN  J.  FRENCH  &  CO.,  Boston. 
GEO.  S.  BRYANT  &  CO. ,  Boston. 
DODGE,  COLLIER  &  PERKINS,  Boston. 
F.  HENDRICKS,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO.,  Philadelphia. 


117 


National  Photographic  Emporium, 

No.  46  North  Charles  Street, 
BALTIMORE,  MD., 

THE  MOST  COMPLETE  AND   BEST  KEGULATED   STOCKHOUSE 

IN  AMEBIC  A, 


IFTJIR-ZCsTISIHIIIIISra- 


EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY 

OF  THE  FINEST  AND  BEST  QUALITY, 

AT  THE  LOWEST  MARKET  RATES. 


A    SPECIAL   DISCOUNT    SYSTEM, 

AN  IMPORTANT  FEATURE  TO  CASH  BUYERS. 


Send  for  the  Neiv  Price  List,  Illustrated,  gratis  on  application. 


"The    Photographer's   Friend,' 

Published  by  this  thriving  Emporium,  is  issued  for  1874  as  a 

BI-MONTHLY  PHOTOGRAPHIC  MAGAZINE, 

And  will  excel  in  practical  instruction  and  beautiful  illustrations  all  the  previous  efforts. 

Terms,  $2.50  per  annum,  in  advance. 

118 


A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 
photographic  (Sard  Warehouse, 

18  S.  Sixth  St.,  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 

PH  ILADELPHIA. 


We  have  recently  nfle  tie  follows  additions  to  nor  Stock : 

AN  ASSORTMENT  OF  WHITE  AND  LIGHT  BUFF  CARDS, 

8  x  10,  10  x  12,  and  11  x  14,  with  Oval  and  Square  Card-Size 
Openings,  designed  to  furnish  a  cheap  and  convenient  means  of 
mounting  photographs  in  groups  of  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  and  8. 


BEVELED,  GILT-EDGE,  CARD  AND  CABINET  MOUNTS,  Black 
and  Rose  Tint. 


BON-TON  CARDS.     Nos.  12,  13,  &  14,  with  Oval  and  Arch-Top 
Openings. 


FITZGIBBON'S  PATENT  ADHESIVE  FERROTYPE  MOUNTS. 

Nos.  3,  4,  5  &  6,  Oval  Openings  ;  Nos.  9  &  10,  Arch-Top  Openings, 
$3.25  per  1000 ;  No.  12  Oval  and  Arch-Top  Openings,  $4.37  per  1000. 


In  addition  to  the  above,  we  invite  attention  to  our  new  line  of  Card 
and  Cabinet  Mounts,  No.  42,  White  and  Tinted,  Enameled  Backs,  with 
Plain  Face.     This  quality  may  be  used  in  Burnishing  Machines.     Also 


to  Gilt  Beveled  Edge  Card  and  Cabinet  Mounts  of  a  thickness  suitable 

119 


l5< 

for  Albums  :  No.  43,  Black,  and  No.  36,  White. 


Morrison's  Wide- Angle  View  Lenses 

Patented  May  21st,  1872. 

(See  eur  article  on  page  69  of  the  May,  1873,  number.) 

These  Lenses  are  constructed  on  scientific  principles;  they  embrace  an 
angle  of  fully  90  degrees,  and  are  absolutely  free  from  distortion  and  flare. 


No. 

Size  View. 

Focal  Length. 

Price. 

1 

3x3 

2%  inch. 

$40  00  per  pair. 

2 

3£x    5 

3       » 

40  00       " 

3 

4   x   5£ 

4       " 

40  00       " 

4 

4£x    6£ 

4*     " 

40  00       " 

5 

5x8 

5       " 

40  00       " 

6 

6i'x   8J 

6       " 

30  00  each. 

7 

8   xlO 

8       " 

40  00     " 

8 

11    xl4 

10       " 

60  00     " 

9 

14   xl7 

13*     " 

80  00     " 

10 

17    x20 

15*     » 

100  00     « 

11 

24   x30 

18       " 

160  00     " 

REMARKS. 

Nos.  1  to  5  are  all  made  in  matched  pairs  for  stereoscopic  work.  The 
shorter-focussed  Lenses  are  especially  adapted  for  street  and  other  views  in 
confined  situations.  For  general  purposes,  a  pair  of  No.  5  Lenses  will  be 
found  most  useful.  Equipped  with  these,  and  a  new  Philadelphia  Box,  the 
photographer  will  be  prepared  for  stereoscopic  or  the  popular  5x8  views. 

SC0VILL  MANUFACTURING  CO.,  New  York,  Trade  Agents. 


T  EC  IE 


u 


PEERLESS"  PORTRAIT  LENS. 

ALL    SIZES    READY. 


PRICES: 

1-4  size,  with  central  stops $12  50 

1-2  "  " 20  00 

4.4  "  " 50  00 

Extra  4-4"  "     125  00 

1-2  "  "      quick  acting 40  00 

4-4  "  "  "  60  00 

Extra4-4"  "  "  150  00 

These  lenses  are  guaranteed  first-class  in  every  respect. 

SC0YILL  MANUFACTURING  CO.,  New  York. 

120  * 


ADVERTISING  RATES  FOR  (SPECIALTIES.— It.  will  be  understood  that  matter  under 
this  head  is  not  to  be  considered  as  always  having  editoiial  sanction,  though  we  shall  endeavor  to  clear  it  of 
anything-  tending  to  deceive  or  mislead.  Stock-dealers  will  find  this  a  beneficial  mode  of  advertising,  and 
sure  to  pay  largely.  Six  lines,  one  insertion,  82.00,  and  26  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  lo  a 
line — in  advance.  Operators  desiring  situations,  no  charge.  Matter  must,  be  received  by  the  23d  to  secure 
insertion.  Advertisers  will  please  not  ask  us  for  recommendations.  JttSff*  We  cannot  undertake  to  mail 
answers  to  parties  who  advertise.    Please  always  add  your  address  to  the  advertisement. 


Peace  and  prosperity  has  been  the  lot  of  those 
photographers  who  have  been  wise  and 
bought  their  supplies  of  Chas.  W.  Stevens, 
158  State  Street,  Chicago.  It  costs  but 
little  to  satisfy  yourself  of  the  fact.  When 
you  come  to  the  N.  P.  A.  Convention,  in  July, 
call  on  me  at  the  "Great  Central,"  or  send 
your  order  if  you  cannot  visit  our  city. 


The  Rapid  Photo.  Washer 
will  be  on  exhibition  at  Chi- 
cago. 

Universal  Light  Modifier 

(Nason's). 

At  which  the  -universal  host  up  sent 

A  shout 

In  praise. 

See  it  at  Chicago. 


Nasonian  Cut-Outs. 

Latest  novelty — unique,  useful. 

Exhibited  at  Chicago. 


Non-Ague 

Camera  Stand.     "  Never  shakes. 
Go  to  Chicago  and  see  it. 


Fourteen  in  One. 

Do  not  fail  to  go  to  Chicago  and  examine 
"Fourteen  in  One."     Nason  will  exhibit  it. 

Nason's  Inventions. 

"Improved  Background  Carriage;"  "Uni- 
versal Light  Modifier;"  "Photo.  Eye  Rest;" 
"  Non-Ague  Camera  Stand;"  "Fourteen  in 
One;"  "Nasonian  Cut-Outs  ;"  "  Infantine  Back- 
ground;" "  Magic  Mirror  ;"  "N.  P.  A.  Badge," 
and  many  other  novelties  will  be  exhibited  at 
Chicago.     Go  !  by  all  means,  go. 

Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Foe  Sale. — A  first-class  gallery  in  Washua, 
Iowa.  A  live  town  ;  population  2000.  Gallery 
newly  fitted  up  ;  centrally  located  ;  ground  floor  ; 
plenty  of  room  ;  north  sky  and  side-lights. 

Plenty  of  instruments  for  doing  all  classes  of 
work.  Country  well  settled.  No  opposition. 
Will  be  sold  cheap.     For  particulars,  address 

J.  E.  Ricn,  Charles  City,  Iowa. 

USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


Wanted,  for  Cash. — One  14  x  17  camera  box  ; 
one  7x10  ferrotype  box  ;  four  1-4  tubes. 

Address  J.  McCord,  Indianapolis,  Ind. 


Baltimore 

Baltimore 

Baltimore 
Stockhouse, 

Stockhouse, 

Stockhouse, 
Chas.  A.  Wilson, 

Chas.  A.  Wilson, 

Chas.  A.  Wilson, 
No.  7  North  Charles  St. 
No.  7  North  Charles  St. 
No.  7  North  Charles  St. 


For  Sale. — At  Maueh  Chunk,  Pa.,  Brown's 
(deceased)  Photographic  Gallery ;  fixtures  and 
stereoscopic  view  negatives,  of  the  coal  regions, 
cheap.  A  photographer  can  open  immediately, 
print  the  views  and  sell  all  he  can  make  during 
the  season.     Over  90,000  visitors  last  season. 

Address  Reuben  Knecht,  Easton,  Pa. 


Linn's  Landscape  Photogra* 

phy  is  the  book  for  the 

season. 


Wanted — An   energetic   partner  with    $2500 

cash,  or  more,  in  a  good  flourishing  gallery  in  one 

of  the  handsomest  cities  of  the  Union.     Would 

sell  out  entire,  but  prefer  a  partner.     Address 

"  32,"  care  Benerman  &  Wilson,  Philada. 


Newell's  Baths  and  Dishes 
having  been  indorsed  by  the 
trade,  have  been  placed  in 
the  hands  of  all  stockdealers 
for  sale.  Please  inquire  for 
them. 

Luxury — a  clear  conscience.  This  rare  photo- 
graphic experience  can  be  easily  possessed 
by  all  the  "Sons  of  light,"  it  comes  from 
the  satisfaction  of  buying  your  supplies  at 
the  "Great  Central"  Photographic  Ware- 
house of  Chas.  W.  Stevens,  158  State  Street, 
Chicago.  You  will  be  in  our  city  to  N.P.A. 
Convention,  call  and  see  me. 

VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


For  Sale. — Four  1-4  Darlot  tubes,  set  in 
brass  plate,  for  making  four  1-4  pictures  at  one 
sitting,  cost  $36,  will  be  sold  for  $21 ;  one  A.  0. 
C.  stereo,  box,  new,  cost  $35,  will  sell  it  for  $21 ; 
also,  one  1-2  size  camera  box  for  $3,  has  been 
used  but  little  and  all  are  as  good  as  new. 

These  goods  are  sold  for  one  who  has  quit  the 
business.  Address 

J.  M.,  care  of  Lon.  Blackburn. 

Box  723,  Toungstown,  Ohio. 


These  dull  times  you  must 
bring  out  novelties  and  im- 
prove your  work.  None  of 
the  late  inventions  approach 
in  beauty,  style,  simplicity, 
ease,  and  cheapness,  Ben- 
dann's  Patent  Backgrounds. 
The  outlay  is  trifling,  their 
application  easy  and  prompt, 
and  the  result  PAYS.  You 
cannot  do  without  them. 
For  sale  by  all  stock-dealers, 
and  by  Daniel  Bendann,  Bal- 
timore. Thousands  have 
been  sold  to  London,  Paris, 
Berlin,  Vienna. 

Happiness  secured  to  the  photographer  by  visit- 
ing the  N.  P.  A.  Convention,  in  July,  and 
during  his  stay  making  frequent  calls  at  the 
"  Great  Central  "  Photographic  Warehouse 
of  Chas.  W.  Stevens,  158  State  St.,  Chicago. 
The  largest  stock  and  lowest  prices. 


If  you  want  to  improve  your 
work  and  save  time  get  the 
Rapid  Photo-Washer. 

For  Sale.  —  A  good  gallery  in  a  thriving 
town.  Population  1500,  and  large  country  trade. 
This  is  a  rare  chance  for  a  young  man  to  estab- 
lish a  permanent  business,  with  a  small  invest- 
ment. Has  good  north  light  and  first-class  in- 
struments, and  all  in  good  running  order.  Price, 
$250.     For  particulars,  address 

B.  S.  Williams,  Tunkhannock,  Pa. 


Trapp  &  Munch  received 
the  Medal  of  Merit  for  their 
Albumen  Paper,  at  the  Vien- 
na Exhibition. 


For  Sale.— A  first  class  portable  gallery,  well 

equipped  and  in  good  order,  now  located  at  one 

of  the  popular  summer  resorts  ;  will  be  sold  cheap 

on  account  of  sickness.     For  particulars,  address 

E.  P.  Southwick,  Photographer, 

Greenwich,  Conn. 

USE  WAYMOUTH*S 


Gallery  for  Sale. — I  wish  to  sell  my  gal- 
lery in  Athens,  Ohio.  Rooms  well  arranged 
and  pleasant.  Population  3000.  New  apparatus, 
good  light.  Price,  from  $300  to  $500.  Bad 
health  reason  for  selling.  For  further  particu- 
lars, address  John  H.   Tomlinson, 

Athens,  Ohio. 


See  advertisement  of   Rapid 
Photo-Washer. 


A  Bargain. — One  Bryant's  posing  chair, 
nearly  new,  $18;  one  8x10  mahogany  camera, 
in  perfect  order,  rubber  bellows,  patent  guides, 
and  focusing  screw,  $20  ;  one  1-2  size  Harrison's 
plain  lens,  $16.  For  sale  for  want  of  use. 
Address  Box  341,  Great  Barrington, 

Berkshire  Co.,  Mass. 

Griswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Wanted. — A  first-class  retoucher,  one  who 
would  be  willing  to  assist  at  printing  for  a  few 
months.  Address  209  Jefferson  Avenue,  Detroit, 
Mich.  ;   or  see  the  undersigned  at  Chicago, 

J.  H.  Swaine. 


Photographers  in  the  South 
and  Southwest  who  would 
buy  goods  to  their  best  ad- 
vantage would  do  well  to  pat- 
ronize the  Stockhouse  of 
Chas.  A.  Wilson,  No.  7  North 
Charles  St.,  Baltimore,  Md. 
Send  a  trial  order. 


Attention  is  called  to  J.  A.  Anderson's  Ca- 
mera Boxes  and  testimonials  in  our  advertise- 
ments. These  boxes  are  fast  taking  rank  among 
the  leading  boxes'  in  the  country,  and  photogra- 
phers will  find  it  to  their  advantage  to  post 
themselves  in  regard  to  prices,  &e. 

Linn's  Landscape  Photogra- 
phy is  the  book  for  the 
season. 


Our  Latest  Illustrated  Price  List  has 
been  published.  Central  manufacture  for  pho- 
tography. T.  F.  Schippang  &  Co., 

Berlin,  S.  W.  Neuenburger  St.,  25. 


The  Rapid  Photo-Washer 
will  wash  your  prints  in  ten 
minutes. 


J.  A.  Anderson,  Manufacturer  of  Photo- 
graphic Apparatus,  65  East  Indiana  St.,  Chicago. 
Send  for  price  list. 

VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


Photographic  Gallery  for  Sale. — This 
gallery  is  located  on  Pennsylvania  Avenue,  be- 
9th  and  10th  Streets,  west,  Washington,  D.  C; 
the  best  business  part  of  the  city.  Has  superior 
light,  and  first-class  instruments  and  fixtures. 
Terms  moderate.     Address 

Mrs.  W.  Ogilvie, 

905  Pennsylvania  Avenue,  Washington,  D.  C. 


Please  read  the  two-page 
advertisements  of  Charles  A. 
Wilson,  Baltimore  Stock- 
house,  No.  7  North  Charles 
Street.  Please  remember  the 
number,  7  North  Charles  St., 
Baltimore,  Md. 


Danville,  Iowa,  March  11,  1874. 
Mr.  J.  A.  Anderson. 

Dear  Sir  :  After  a  month's  trial  of  the  box 
bought  of  you,  I  am  willing  to  add  my  testimony 
as  to  the  superiority  of  your  camera  boxes.  It 
works  like  a  charm  and  is  satisfactory  in  every 
respect.  Yours  truly, 

Huberd  Williams. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

I  most  cheerfully  recommend  Mr.  J.  A.  Ander- 
son's Camera  Boxes,  for  beauty,  durability,  and 
cheapness.  I  have  two  in  my  establishment 
since  my  opening  here,  and  find  them  fully  up 
to  the  claims  of  a,  first-class  instrument. 

W.  A.  Armstrong, 
State  and  Quincy  Streets,  Chicago. 

Mr.  Armstrong  has  for  a  number  of  years  past 
been  engaged  in  business  in  Saginaw,  Mich., 
and  is  a  photographer  well  known  to  the  frater- 
nity. 

Co  to  the  Exhibition  and 
see  how  they  wash  pictures 
in  ten  minutes  "out  west." 


For  Sale. — My  newly-fitted  rooms  in  Spring- 
field, Southwest  Missouri.  Population  over  7000. 
The  central  trading  point  for  all  the  surrounding 
country.  Situated  on  the  line  of  the  Atlantic 
and  Pacific  Railroad.  Rapidly  building  up  with 
all  kinds  of  factories.  Climate  most  delightful. 
Only  first-class  rooms  in  the  southwest  part  of 
the  State.  Well  furnished  with  latest  improve- 
ments. North  light  top  and  side.  Plenty  to  do. 
and  good  prices  for  doing  it.  $800  cash  will 
purchase.     Address  W.  S.  Johnson, 

Springfield,  Mo. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 
USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


Wanted. — Agents  to  travel  through  the  seve- 
ral states.  None  need  apply  except  practical 
photographers,  and  those  acquainted  with  the 
use  of  the  solar  camera.     Apply  to 

II.  L.  Emmons,  Baltimore,  Md. 


To  Landscape  Photogra- 
phers.— Please  remember, 
during  the  coming  season, 
that  we  are  in  the  market 
constantly  for  the  purchase 
of  good  Stereoscopic  Nega- 
tives of  interesting  American 
Views.  Send  proofs  and 
prices  of  negatives  to  Ben- 
erman  &  Wilson,  Photo. 
Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

The  subscriber  will  dispose  of  the  following 
articles,  for  want  of  use.  One  4-4  Usener  lens, 
selected  by  myself,  warranted  fine  ;  one  1-2  size 
French  lens  made  by  Gasc  &  Charconnet,  fine  ; 
one  4-4  mahogany  view  and  portrait  box,  double 
swing-back,  fine  and  in  good  condition  ;  one  2 
tube  box,  swing-back,  for  plates  4£  x  6|,  2  hold- 
ers, good;  one  sliding  card  box,  Peace's  make, 
4  card  and  \  holders ;  two  4-4  plain  boxes,  with 
holders  considerably  worn  ;  one  large  camera 
stand,  Peace's  make  ;  two  backgrounds  on  frames 
8x8,  heavy  castors  ;  one  circular  platform,  on 
castors  4|  feet  in  diameter,  covered  with  carpet ; 
one  Knell's  fringed  chair;  one  8-10  covered 
rubber  field  bath  ;  one  4-4  porcelain  bath  ;  two 
pieces  canton  matting,  each  10  x  14  feet,  good  ; 
one  letter  copying  press,  11x17  inches. 
Address  William  H.  Rhoads, 

1800  Frankford  Road,  Philada,  Pa. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

St.  James  Hotel,  Grant,  Cobb  &  Hilton, 
Proprietors,  corner  of  State  and  Van  Buren  Sts. 
(two  blocks  only  from  the  N.  P.  A.  Exhibition), 
Chicago.    $2.50  per  day  to  photographers,  special. 


WAYMOUTH'S  VMETTE  PAPERS. 

"  I  am  using  and  like  them  very  much 
thus  far."— A.  MARSHALL,  Boston. 

"A  sensible  improvement." — GEO.  S. 
COOK,   Charleston,  S.  C. 


Wealth  will  be  the  reward  of  your  labors  if 
you  are  industrious,  saving,  and  buy  your 
supplies  of  Chas.  W.  Stevens,  at  his  "  Great 
Central"  Photographic  Warehouse,  158 
State  Street,  Chicago.  You  anticipate  a 
visit  to  our  city,  in  July,  to  attend  the  N. 
P.  A.  Convention,  make  it  your  business  to 
call  at  the  "  Great  Central." 

VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


MARCY'S 


McAllisters 

MAGIC  LANTERNS 

IN  GREAT  VARIETY. 

LANTERN  SLIDES, 


OF  ALL  PARTS 
of  the  WORLD. 


LARGE  STOCK  JUST  RECEIVED  BY 


BBliHtlM S  WILSOJ,  Idas,  Seventh  ail  (lot!  Sis,  Mail. 

DAMAGED 


i  nils 


v«« 


mm 


Ft 


1 


■11 


The  recent  fire  in  our  establishment  caused  a  part  of  our  large  stock  of  Lantern  Slides 
to  be  damaged  by  water.  For  all  practical  uses  they  are  not  damaged  at  all.  Any  photog- 
rapher, by  repairing  the  sticking  paper  around  them,  may  make  them  as  good  as  new.  We 
cannot  repair  them  to  look  like  fresh  stock,  so  we  offer  them  at  the  following  reduced  rates : 

L.evy's  Foreign  Views  (Holy  Land,  Paris,  and  Europe),  50  cts. 

Eetailed  at  $1.25. 
Colored  Scripture  and  Comic  Slides,  •    60  and  75    " 

Retailed  at  $1.25  and  $2.00. 
American  Views  and  Statuary, 40    " 

Retailed  at  75  cts.  and  $1.00. 

Jgigf  Care  given  to  selecting  for  parties  who  cannot  be  present  to  select  for  themselves. 


BEHERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


T  JE3I  IE 


CHAMELEON  BAROMETER 


Invented  by  WALTER  B.  WOODBURY,  Esq.,  London. 


The  Greatest  Scientific  Novelty  of  the  Age. 


FORETELLS  the  WEATHER, 


MAILED,  ON  RECEIPT  OP  PRICE,  BY 

BENERMAN  *  WILSON, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

50  Cents. 50  Cents. 

AUG.  SCHWARZE.  SCHWARZE     &    VALK  "WILLIAM  VALK. 

HO.    614    JLJtCM    STMJSJET,    PHILADELPHIA. 

German  Aim  Paper,  and  Arrowroot  Plain  Salted  Paper. 


IMPORTERS  OF  THE 
MOST  CELEBRATED  BRANDS  OP 


) 

DEALERS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  MATERIALS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 

Will  mail  to  any  address  in  the  country,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  $1,  one  dozen  sheets  of  Assorted  Photo- 
graphic Paper,  each  sheet  being  numbered  for  distinction. 


TERMS   IN   ART;   or 
ART  LIFE. 

ibtz-  g h .a. ir, l  :e s   zelvie  zeus-^. 

It  explains  all  those  Terms  connected  -with  Fine  Art  which  are  most  important  to  know. 

No  Educated  Person  should  be  -without  it. 
It  also  contains  the  Prices  of  all  articles  connected  with  Painting,  &c,  which  will  be 

found  a  very  useful  reference. 


PRICE,  ONE  DOLLAR. 

Sent  to  any  address,  free  of  postage,  on  receipt  of  price. 

For  Sale  by  BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  7th  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Phila. 
STEREOSCOPIC  VIEWS  OF  THE 

MASONIC  TEMPLE,   PHILADELPHIA. 

The  Grand  Lodge  of  Penneylvania,  finding  from  the  rapid  growth  of  the  Order  they  must  provide 
a  more  spacious  edifice  for  the  meetings  of  the  numerous  Lodges,  in  1867  purchased  the  lot  on  the 
Northeast  corner  Broad  and  Filbert  streets,  suitable  for  their  purpose,  it  being  bounded  on  all  sides 
by  streets.  With  great  care  a  plan  was  decided  upon — James  H.  Windrim,  Architect.  The  building 
is  of  granite,  250  feet  long,  by  150  feet  wide,  style  of  the  Norman  school,  two  stories  and  entresol, 
with  pinnacles  and  towers  ;  main  tower  240  ft.  from  the  base  ;  foundation  31  ft.  below  the  level  of  street. 

The  corner-stone  was  laid  June  24th,  1868,  with  appropriate  Masonic  ceremonies.  From  that  time, 
until  September  26th,  1873,  the  date  of  dedication,  the  Building  Committee  labored  indefatigably, 
and  present,  as  the  result  of  their  labor,  a  Temple  first  in  splendor  since  the  days  of  King  Solomon. 
The  cost  of  building  and  furniture,  one  and  a-half  million  of  dollars. 

The  interior  has  one  main  hall,  of  Doric  architecture,  sweeping  through  from  end  to  end,  250  feet 
long,  and  20  feet  wide.  On  either  side  are  the  rooms  set  apart  for  the  officials  of  the  Grand  Lodge, 
fitted  up  in  the  most  approved  manner.  On  this  floor,  also,  is  the  "  Grand  Banqueting  Hall,"  of  the 
composite  order  of  architecture,  with  decorations  of  flowers,  game,  and  fruit.  The  room  is  105  feet 
long,  50  feet  wide;  ceiling  30  feet,  with  accommodation  for  seating  500  persons.  Upon  this  floor  there 
is  one  Lodge  room  called  the  Oriental  Hall,  from  its  style  of  architecture.  It  will  seat  200  persons. 
Its  decoration  and  furniture  strictly  accord  with  the  Oriental  style,  as  do  all  the  decorations  and  fur- 
niture of  all  parts  of  the  Temple,  conform  to  the  style  of  architecture  of  the  rooms  in  which  they  are 
placed.  The  heating  and  ventilating  apparatus  are  wonders.  The  water  is  supplied  from  two  sources  ; 
part  from  the  city  :  but  the  main  supply  is  from  a  well  beneath  the  tower,  which  is  forced  into  four 
cedar  tanks  of  four  thousand  gallons  capacity  each,  placed  at  different  parts  of  the  building. 

The  principal  floor  is  divided  into  Lodge  rooms — that  of  the  Grand  Lodge  the  largest ;  it  is  105  feet 
long,  51  feet  wide,  ceiling  50  feet  high  ;  will  seat  800  persons — it  is  in  pure  Corinthian  style.  Grand 
Chapter  Hall  is  90  feet  long,  50  feet  wide,  and  50  feet  high,  and  is  in  the  Italian  Renaissance  style, 
and  will  seat  600  persons.  The  Commandery  Rooms  are  situated  in  Eastern  entresol,  above  the  prin- 
cipal floor,  of  Gothic  architecture,  and  will  seat  500  persons.  The  suite  consists  of  the  Asylum,  Council 
Chamber,  Banqueting  Hall,  Armory,  and  Regalia  Room.  All  are  grandly  magnificent.  The  remaining 
rooms  are  the  Egyptian,  Ionic,  and  Norman  Halls,  with  others,  each  a  marvel  of  beauty. 

There  are  40,000  Free  Masons  in  the  State,  330  Lodges,  60  being  in  the  City  of  Philadelphia. 

$2.  per  dozen  by  mail,  post-paid.  Or  in  sets  of  12,  16,  and  22,  embracing  the  most  beautiful  views 
of  the  exterior  and  interior,  at  the  dozen  rate. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Philadelphia. 


AlsTDEESON'S 

SKYLIGHT  and  DARK-ROOM 

WE  HAVE  BUT 

TWENTY-FIVE  COPIES  LEFT 

OF   THIS   VALUABLE   BOOK. 

And  owing  to  the  loss  of  the  negatives  no  more  will  be  printed.     Those  desiring  to  secure  a  copy 
will  be  wise  if  they  do  so  now.  3?IE?>IOIE      $4. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Seventh  and  Cherry,  Philada. 


18  74 


Special  Premium  of  Six  Handsome  German 
Cabinet  Pictures  of  Ladies ! 

By  FRITZ  LUCKHARDT,  Vienna,  Austria. 

These  pictures  are  alone  worth  $3  for  the  set,  and  more  is  asked  for 
such  by  dealers. 

Given  to  any  one  who  will  ran  ns  a  NEW  Sntarilier  for  the  year  1871 

What  Others  Think  of  the  Prizes: 


"These  studies  were  greatly  admired  by  the 
members  present,  and  all  were  convinced  that 
they  were  worthy  of  most  careful  study." — Min- 
utes of  the  Chicago  Photo.  Association. 

"  These  pictures  were  examined  and  much  ad- 
mired by  all  present." — Indiana  Photo.  Ass'n. 

"The  pictures  elicited  general  praise;  the 
draperies  especially  were  very  favorably  com- 
mented upon.'' — German  Photographers1  Socie- 
ty, New  York. 

"  The  prints  were  thought  to  be  worth  more 
than  the  price  which  was  charged  for  the  journal, 
i.e.,  $5  ;  and  the  President,  Mr.  Black,  stated  that 
every  operator  should  have  a  set,  for  he  considered 
them  to  be  most  admirable  studies,  and  superior 
to  anything  which  he  had  seeu  heretofore." — 
Boston  Photographic  Society. 


"They  were  accepted  as  being  of  a  very  high 
standard." — Brooklyn  Photo.  Art  Association. 

"  The  high  artistic  merits  of  the  pictures,  and 
their  great  value  as  studies  for  the  progressive 
photographer,  were  conceded  by  all.  The  general 
harmony  in  the  details  of  each  print,  the  man- 
agement of  light,  and  beautiful  rendering  of 
texture  were  greatly  admired." — Photographic 
Section  of  the  American  Institute,  N.  Y. 

Special  votes  of  thanks  were  given  for  them 
by  the  Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia  ; 
Photographic  Association  of  West.  Illinois  ;  Chi- 
cago Photographic  Association  ;  Indiana,  District 
of  Columbia,  and  Maryland  Photographic  Asso- 
ciations ;  Photographic  Section  of  the  American 
Institute  ;  German  Photographers'  Society,  New 
York ;  Boston  and  Brooklyn  Photographic  Art 
Associations,  whereat  they  attracted  great  atten- 
tion and  admiration. 


A  Few  Words  from  those  who  have  received  them  as  Premiums  for  New  Subscribers : 


"I  think  when  we  say  they  are  splendid  it  is 
only  a  mild  expression  of  what  they  will  bear." 
— E.  F.  Everett. 

"They  are  well  worth  striving  for,  and  the 
photographers  who  allow  this  set  to  remain  out- 


side their  collection  don't  deserve  them." — J. 
Pitcher  Spooner. 

"They  are  by  far  the  best  specimens  of  pho- 
tographs of  white  drapery  that  I  ever  saw,  and 
the  artistic  part  leaves  nothing  to  wish  for." — 
James  Paris. 


We  make  this  offer  as  A  MATTER  OF  BUSINESS,  and 
not  as  a  favor  to  any  one  on  either  side.  It  ivill  pay 
to  GIVE  A  YEAR'S  SUBSCRIPTION  TO  YOUR  OPERATOR 
or  to  your  friend  or  customer,  in  order  to  SECURE 
THESE  PICTURES. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philada. 


Apparatus. !  ^^  J  inilVl 


Enabling  the  photographer  to  successfully  secure  every  variety  of  pose  with  facility  and  reliability. 
It  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  varying  necessities  of  female  portraiture,  and  is  equally  suited  for 
children,  for  vignettes,  or  for  full  lengths.  The  BOWDISH  CHAIR  is  substantial  in  construction, 
elegant  in  design,  and  rich  in  upholstery  and  finish.  Those  who  have  purchased  them,  speak  in  the 
highest  terms>  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 


+- 


TESTIMONIALS: 


+- 

"About  ten  days  ago  I  received  the  new  chair  you  promised  to  send  me  when  I  saw  you  last,  and 
would  have  written  and  acknowledged  your  kind  favor  long  ago  if  1  had  correctly  known  your  ad- 
dress. Accept  my  best  thanks  for  this  really  beautiful  chair,  which  now,  after  ten  days'  trial,  has 
proved  to  be  a  decided  success  in  every  way.  It  has  become  the  real  favorite  for  posing  in  my  studio. 
Besides  this,  in  external  appearance  the  new  chair  appears  so  much  superior  in  finish,  and  is  at  the 
same  time  highly  ornamental,  and  the  head  rest  is  so  much  easier  handled  than  with  any  chair  I  have 
ever  seen  before.  In  short,  it  gives  the  sitter  the  greatest  possible  comfort  and  steadiness.  I  think 
the  chair  I  have  justly  deserves  the  name  of  'Perfect  Posing  Chair.' " — H.  Rocher,  Chicago,  111., 
January  10,  1873. 

"  Since  receiving  your  posing  chair,  nearly  a  year  since,  I  have  had  it  in  constant  use,  and  am 
satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  posing  chair  in  the  market.  It  is  easily  worked,  and  is  so  well  made  that 
one  will  last  a  life  time,  and  then  be  a  valuable  heirloom." — L,  Or.  Bigelow. 

"The  Bowdish  Chair  came  in  good  order  and  gives  the  best  of  satisfaction.  Should  you  wish  a 
recommendation  for  it,  say  what  you  please  and  we  will  endorse  it.  You  cannot  praise  it  too  highly." 
— Slee  Bros.,  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  Sept.  10,  1872. 

"  Tour  chair  has  arrived  at  last.  I  am  much  pleased  with  it.  1  don't  think  my  gallery  can  be 
complete  without  one  of  them.  Wishing  you  the  success  your  invention  merits,  I  am,  truly  yours, 
A.  Hesler." 


Prints  will  be  sent,  if  desired,  before  purchasing.     There  are  three  styles  kept  in  stock,  viz  : 

No.  2.  With  nickel-plated  rods  and  rest,  in  velveteen  or  reps $60  00 

No.  4.       "  "  "  "  "  "    square  carved  legs, 70  00 

No.  6.       "  "  "  "     in  best  plush,  paneled 80  00 

Special  chairs  to  order. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO.,  Sole  Agents, 

591  Broadway,  New  York, 


GIHOH'S  CUT-OUTS 

Are  the  very  best  that  are  made,  and  are  now  without  a  rival  in  the  market.  They  are  clean 
cut,  most  desirable  shapes  and  sizes,  and  made  of  non-actinic  paper,  manufactured  specially 
for  the  purpose.  Each  package  contains  30  Cut-Outs,  or  Masks,  with  corresponding  Insides, 
assorted  for  five  differently  sized  ovals  and  one  arch-top. 

PRICE,  $1.0*0  PER  PACKAGE.     Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

Parties  wishing  special  sizes,  or  large  lots  of  a  few  sizes,  may  have  them  cut  to  order 
promptly,  by  addressing  the  manufacturer.     No  lot  costing  less  than  $1.00  made  at  a  time. 

BggT"  No  printer  should  attempt  to  make  medallion  pictures  without  them. 

THEY  HAVE  NO  EQUAL  FOR  QUALITY. 

Beware  of  spurious  imitations  made  of  common  paper,  full  of  holes,  badly  cut,  and  odd 
shapes  and  sizes.  Ask  your  stockdealer  for  GIHON'S  CUT-OUTS,  and  see  that  they  are 
in  his  envelopes  with  instruction  circular  included. 


GIHON'S  OPAQUE 

IS    DESIGNED    FOR 

COMPLETELY  OBSCURING  THE  IMPERFECT  BACKGROUNDS  OF  COPIES, 
RETOUCHING  NEGATIVES, 

FAULTY  SKIES  IN  LANDSCAPES, 

COATING  THE  INSIDE  OF  LENSES  OR  CAMERA  BOXES, 
BACKING  SOLAR  NEGATIVES, 

COVERING  VIGNETTING  BOARDS, 

AND    FOR  ANSWERING 

ALL  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  INTELLIGENT  PHOTOGRAPHER  IN  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  ARTISTIC  RESULTS  IN  PRINTING. 


WHEREVER  YOU  WANT  TO  KEEP  OUT  LIGHT,  USE  OPAQUE. 

It  is  applied  with  a  brush,  dries  quickly  and  sticks. 


CUT-OUTS  (thirty),  $1.00.  OPAQUE,  50  GENTS. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Address  ail  orders  to 

JOHN  L.  CIHON,  Inventor, 

128  JV.  Seventh  St,,  Philadelphia,  JPa. 


r  o  b  i  va  s  o  »t'» 


METALL/c 


t*d 


Oval,  Hon  ixl.  Elliptic  and  Square,  of  all  sizes  ;  various  shapes  for  Stereoscopic 
work,  Drug:  Labels,  Ac,  «fec.  Regular  sizes  always  on  hand.  Special  Sizes  made 
to  order.  Price  for  regular  photo,  sizes,  10  cents  per  inch  the  longest  way  of  the 
aperture.    Special  sizes,  15  cents  per  inch.    FOR  SALE  BT  ALL  DEALERS. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


HUNDREDS  EXPORTED  TO  ENGLAND  AND  GERMANY 


R  O  B  I  N  S  O  N'S 

PHOTOGRAPH    TRIMMER 

IS  A  NECESSITY  AND  CONSIDERED  INVALUABLE. 
For  examples  of  its  work  we  refer  to  the  recent  and  present  pictures  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

IT  SAVES  TIME,  SAVES  PRINTS,  AND  SAVES  MONEY. 

The  accompanying  cut  represents  the  instru- 
ment in  the  act  of  trimming  a  photograph.  It 
does  not  cut,  but  pinches  off  the  waste  paper,  and 
leaves  the  print  with  a  neatly  beveled  edge  which 
facilitates  the  adherence  of  the  print  to  the 
mount.  Try  one,  and  you  will  discard  the 
knife  and  punch  at  once: 

Oil  the  wheel  hearings  with  Saving  Machine  Oil. 

A  Trimmer  Mailed  for  $3.50. 

The  difficulty  of  procuring  exactly  true  guides 
for  cutting  out  prints  has  induced  the  inventor 
to  put  up  machinery  for  the  production  of  all 
styles  of  them,  guaranteed  mathematically  true, 
and  to  be  known  as 

ROBINSON'S  IMPROVED  GUIDES. 

See  advertisement  on  opposite  page. 

A  full  stock  of  regular  sizes  now  on  hand. 
A  complete,  illustrated,  catalogue  and  price-list  will 
be  issued  soon. 

READ  THE  TESTIMONIALS. 


"  For  cutting  ovals  I  think  the  Robinson  Trimmer 
is  perfect,  and  if  nobody  brings  them  out  in  England 
I  shall,  as  I  think  it  a  pity  such  a  good  thing  should 
not  be  introduced." — Walter  B.  Woodbury. 

"I  would  rather  give  fifty  dollars  than  be  without 
one.  By  its  use  all  annoyance  from  dull  knives  tear- 
ing the  prints  is  avoided,  and  it  is  a  pleasure  to  use 
it." — E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk. 

"  Robinson's  Photographic  Trimmer  is  an  excellent 
little  instrument.  It  does  the  work  intended  magnifi- 
cently. It  is  not  only  exquisite  for  trimming  photo- 
graphs, but  also  for  making  Cut-Outs  and  cutting  the 
sensitized  paper  to  any  needed  size,  using  for  the 
latter  purpose  a  guide  of  steel  in  form  of  a  ruler,  thus 
entirely  dispensing  with  the  knife." — Bern'd  Kihl- 
holz,  Chicago,  Til. 

"  I  like  the  Trimmer  very  much.  I  think  it  a  very 
useful  article.  It  works  well  and  does  all  it  is  recom- 
mended to  do." — F.  G.  Weller,  Littleton,  iV.  H. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmers  have  come  to  hand,  and 
I  like  them  very  much ;  they  are  just  what  I  wanted 
and  found  it  difficult  to  get." — J.  W.  Black,  Boston. 

"I  am  using  the  Robinson  Trimmer  and  consider 
it  the  best  article  for  trimming  photographs  I  ever 
saw." — W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"  It  does  its  work  magnificently.  The  only  wonder 
is,  that  it  was  not  invented  years  ago.  It  is  indis- 
pensable."— Garrett  Bros.,  Philadelphia. 

"  I  think  the  Robinson  Photographic  Trimmer  is 
the  best  thing  ever  put  upon  the  market  for  photo- 
graphic use.  It  is  cheap  and  does  its  work  perfect.  I 
now  make  with  it  all  the  cut-outs  I  use,  and  also  cut 
out  all  my  photographs  from  eleven  by  fourteen 
down  to  cards.  It  only  cost  me  four  dollars  and  I 
would  not  be  without  it  for  the  best  twenty-five  dol- 
]  ar  cutting  machine  I  ever  saw." — D.  Lothrop,  Phila. 


"  The  Trimmer  comes  up  to  all  you  claim  for  it.  I 
would  not  be  without  it." — T.  Cummings,  Lancaster. 

"Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  is  all  that  it  is 
claimed  to  be.  I  have  trimmed  all  my  prints  with  it 
from  the  day  I  received  it,  in  less  than  half  the  time 
taken  by  a  knife.  It  does  its  work  with  mathematical 
correctness  and  uniformity.  I  would  not  be  without 
it  for  ten  times  its  cost.  It  cannot  be  recommended 
too  highly." — W.  H.  Cranston,  Carry,  Pa. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmer  has  proved  to  us  one  of 
the  most  usefully  instruments  that  we  have  in  our 
gallery.  In  the  few  months  that  we  have  owned  it  we 
cut  some  10,000  photographs  with  it,  which  were  cut 
in  one-fourth  the  time,  and  cut  better  than  any  other 
instrument  could  do  it." — Schreiber  &  Sons,  Phila. 

"  It  does  the  work  quick,  sure,  and  perfect.  We 
would  not  be  without  it.  It  is  simply  what  it  is  rep- 
resented to  be." — B.  Frank  Saylor  &  Co.,  Lancaster. 
"The  Photograph  Trimmer  is  a  good  and  quick  work- 
ing thing.  I  do  not  want  any  thing  better  and  more 
useful  in  the  gallery  for  that  purpose.  I  would  not 
be  without  one." — A.  M.  Bachman,  Allentown,  Pa. 

"  I  have  used  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  some 
time.  A  lady  was  asked  how  she  liked  her  sewing 
machine,  and  in  reply  said  '  Well  I  could  get  along 
without  it,  but  when  I  do  I  shall  not  sew  any  more.' 
That  is  me,  I  can  get  along  without  the  Trimmer  but 
when  I  do  I  shall  not  trim  photographs." — Well  G. 
Singhi,  Singhamton,  N.  Y. 

"  It  gives  perfect  satisfaction,  being  the  best  thing 
of  the  kind  I  have  ever  used.  There  is  nothing 
amongst  my  photographic  stock  more  useful." — M.  P. 
Rice,  Washington,  D.  C. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmer  works  admirably.  Does 
the  work  intended  with  great  satisfaction." — A.  K.  P. 
Trask,  Philadelphia. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 
FOB  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALEBS.  PHILADELPHIA,  PA 


BOOKS 


FOR  SALE  AT  ALMOST  NOTHING. 


'A  FEW  MORE  LEFT. 


BARGAINS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 

The  Late  Fire 

In  Sherman's  Building  having  caused  a  portion  of  our  stock  of  Books  and 
Magazines  to  be  deluged  with  water,  we  offer  the  following  bargains  to  opera- 
tors, assistants,  employers,  &c. : 


16  Copies  Dr.  Vogel's  Reference-Book, 


20 

16 

30 

6 

8 

11 

200 

200 


Anderson's  Comic  All-my-Knack  (paper), 

"  "  (cloth), 

How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph,       " 

"  (paper), 

Carbon  Manual  (cloth), 

Glimpses  at  Photography, 

Photographic  World  (1871  and  1872),     . 
Philadelphia  Photographer  (1865  to  1874), 


$0  50 
20 
30 
20 

.10 
50 
50 
10 
15 


The  above  goods  were  WET  and  not  burned.  They  are  now  dry,  and  for 
all  practical  uses  as  good  as  new  books,  but  so  stained  that  we  cannot  sell  them 
for  new,  and  we  offer  them  for  one  more  month,  at  the  above  rates. 

LET  THE  ORDERS  COME  NOW  !  One  dollar  will  buy  lots  of  useful 
reading!     A  good  chance  to  fill  up  back  volumes  of  our  Magazines. 

State  your  orders  explicitly. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photographic  Publishers, 

SEVENTH  &  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO. 

Take  pleasure  in  calling  attention  to  the  following  NEW  articles,  which  they  now  have  in  stock,  and 

can  ship  at  short  notice. 

EntrekinPs  Oscillating  Enamelers, 

Each  Press  is  supplied  with  Gas  Burner  or  Alcohol  Lamp  (as  the  purchaser  prefers),  an  Oil  Stone,  for 
polishing  the  Burnisher,  and  one  Cake  of  Soap  for  making  Lubricator. 

PRICES  AS  FOLLOWS  : 

6  in.,  $25;     10  in.,  $40  ;     14  in.,  $60  ;    18  in.,  $75. 
BIRD'S  HEAD  SCREENS  (each),  $10,  $12,  and  $15. 

WITTE'S  EVAPORATING  DISHES  ant  WATER  BATHS  COMBINED. 

PRICES  AS  FOLLOWS  : 

\  Gallon,  $3.50  ;  3Qts.,$4.50;  1  Gallon,  $5.00  ;  H  Gallons,  $5.50 

LARGER  SIZES  TO  ORDER. 

WASOIPS  BACKGROUND  CARRIAGE,  $5.00. 

MOULTON'S  RAPID  PHOTO-WASHER. 

Washes  with  exact  uniformity,  and  gives  more  brilliant  and  permanent  work  ;  is  simple,  not  liable  to 
get  out  of  order,  and  will  last  a  life-time. 

Size  of  Cylinder.  Capacity  in  Cards.     Largest  Print.  Price. 

Diam.  16  in.,  Length  144  in.  84  14  x  17  in.        $30  00 

"      20  "         "        19     "  144  18x22  "  40  00 

"      25  "         "        24     "  220  22x28  "  50  00 

WE    ARE    ALSO    AOENTS    FOR 

Julius  Kruger's  Patent  Cement  Water  Colors 

FOR    COLORING    PHOTOGRAPHS    ON    ALBUMEN    OR    PLAIN   PAPERS. 

PRICES  : 

Box  of  6  Cakes,  $2.25—12  Cakes,  $4.25.-18  Cakes,  $6.50. 

■w.A.ie.DR^A.icsrTiEiD  veey  piite. 

We  have  also  an  extra  fine  lot  of 

Parys'  Negative  Gun  Cotton,         ?*„>,&* *™,  $0.50 
Liesgang's  Papyroxyline,  -        -       1.25 

French  Aniline  Colors,  ■   perbox>      5.00 

FULL  STOCK  OF 

MONOGRAM  COLLODIONS,  VARNISHES  and  COTTONS,  WILSON'S  HEAD 

RESTS, TABLES,  CHAIRS,  VASES,  COLUMNS,  AM.  OPTICAL  CO.'S 

APPARATUS,  KNELL'S,  SCOVILL'S,  and  B0WDISH  CHAIRS. 

SOLE  AGENTS  AND  MANUFACTURERS  OF 

Bercner's,  ani  Buds  &  Lenzi's  Print  Cutters,  ani  Chute's  Cameo  Press. 

Price  Lists  gratis  on  application. 

SALESROOMS,  822  ARCH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


"Make  my  order  thirty  instead  of  twenty.  Lot  last  sent  are  all  gone." — Dr.  E.  Liesegang, 
Dusseldorf,  Germany. 

"Hurry  on  the  Bigelow  Albums  ordered.  We  are  out  and  orders  waiting."-  Piper  &  Carter, 
Lo.idon,  England. 


IGELOW'S  ALBI 


OF 


LIGHTING  AND  POSING. 
SELLS  ALL  OVER  THE  WORLD. 

A  NE¥  EDITION  HAS  BEEN  ISSUED  WITH  AN  ENLARGED  KEY, 

AND  NEARLY  ALL  NEW  STUDIES. 

This   album  brings  lighting  and  posing  down  to  a 
system  at  once  plain,  easy  and  desirable. 


No  good,  intelligent  operator  can  afford 
to  work  without  it. 

It  Contains 

24  Victoria  Portrait  Studies 

in  Light  and  Pose, 

WITH  AN  EXPLANATORY  KEY, 

Telling  exactly  HOW  EACH  PICTURE    WAS 

MADE;   WHERE  THE  CAMERA  AND 

THE    SITTER     WERE    PLACED 

when  it  was  made ;  WHA  T  CUR- 
TAINS WERE  OPENED 

in  lighting  the  subject, 
$c,  $c. 

A  diagram  of  the  interior  of  the  skylight  is  given  in  each  case,  telling  the  whole  story.    IT  IS  BOUND 
HANDSOMELY  IN  CLOTH,  GILT. 


NEW  KEY,  ENLARGED. 


NEW  PICTURES. 


'It  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  aids  to  art  educntion  which  has  yet  been  presented  to  the  photo, 
portraitist.  Each  print  represents  a  distinct  study  of  pose  and  lighting,  the  widest  variety  of  effects 
being  comprehended.  We  should  be  glad  to  see  it  in  the  hands  of  English  portraitists  generally." — 
Photo.  News. 

"  The  method  is  an  admirable  one  and  Mr.  Bigelow  deserves  credit  for  the  systematic  way  in  which 
he  has  carried  it  out." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  confess  that  this  work  has  furnished  me  much  instruction,  particularly  the  manner  in  which, 
by  word  and  picture,  studies  about  light  and  pose  are  explained  and  made  comprehensible." — Dr. 
Vogel. 

"  We  do  not  know  of  anything  ourselves  that  has  been  presented  to  the  trade  which  is  calculated 
to  do  so  much  real  good  as  Bigelow's  Album,  with  the  explanatory  key  to  the  studies.  It  is  an  in- 
valuable guide  to  the  portraitist.'' — Philadelphia  Photographer. 

It  is  considered  invaluable  by  the  practical  photographers  who  use  it. 


PRICE,  $6.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCKDEALERS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


HOW  TO   PAINT  PHOTOCRAPHS. 


The  THIRD  EDITION  is  so  different  from  former  ones,  that  it  may  almost  be  said  that  it  is  A  new 
work. 

It  Gives  the  Best  and  Freshest  Instructions  to  be  had  on  the  Subject. 

Written  by  a  practical  photographic  colorist,  Mr.  Geo.  B.  Aybes. 

PRICE,  $2.00.     FOB  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALEBS. 

Photographers  and  artists  whose  interest  it  is  to  produce  work  in  Water  Colors,  Oil,  India  Ink,  or 
who  wish  complete  instructions  in  retouching  negatives,  should  consult  Mr.  Ayres'  capital  work. 

BENEKMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


Gk    SATJTEB. 

JVo.    138  South   Eighth  Street,   Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURER   AND   WHOLESALE   DEALER   IN 


The  attention  of  the  trade  is  particularly  called  to  the  superior  quality  of  our  Glass  and  materials 
and  neatness  of  finish.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand. 

BULLOCK   i    CRENSHAW, 

No.  528  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURERS  AND  IMPORTERS   OF   PURE   CHEMICALS   FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 
IMPORTERS  OF  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN,  APPARATUS,  ETC. 

TRAPP  &  MUNOH'S 


glfatmen 


Introduced  into  this  country  since  1868  has  become  the  leading  paper,  and  is 
now  better  knowu  and  more  appreciated  than  any  other  brand. 

That  this  great  success  is  well  deserved  and  due  to  its  excellent  qualities 
may  be  judged  from  the  fact,  that  of  all  the  competitors  of  the  "Vienna  Ex- 
hibition, Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  alone  received  the 

MZEZD-AJD    OIF1    ZLVUZEIE^IT 

for  Albumenized  Paper. 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALL  THE  STOCKHOUSES. 

WILLY  WALLACH, 

GENERAL  AGENT  FOR  THE  UNITED  STATES, 

No.  4  Beekman  St.,  and  36  Park  Row,  New  York. 


SCOVILL  MANUFG  CO. 


DEALERS 


III  EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY, 


AND  PROPRIETORS  OF  THE  WORKS  OP  THE 

American  Optical 
Company 

Beg  the  trade  to  remember  that  they  have  removed  from 

No.  4  Beekman  St. 


TO 


BROOME  Jl^l 
STREET,  TfdBil 


The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 


WHAT  IS  IT? 


TIHE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS  is  a  little  book  or  pamphlet  of  twelve  pages,  the 
*  intention  of  which  is  :  1st.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  say  a  few  words  in  a  kindly  way 
to  those  who  have  photographs  taken,  in  order  that  the  intercourse  between  them  and  their 
photographer  may  be  pleasant  and  result  in  the  most  successful  pictures.  Every  photographer 
knows  that  he  is  constantly  beset  with  a  lot  of  questions,  as  to  the  proper  way  to  dress,  the  best 
time  to  come,  and  so  on,  which  take  a  great  deal  of  his  time  to  answer.  This  little  book  answers 
them  all,  and  the  mere  handing  of  a  copy  to  the  questioner,  which  he  or  she  can  carry  away  and  study 
at  leisure,  serves  as  admirably  as  a  half-hour's  conversation. 

2d.  It  is  a  cheap  mode  of  advertising  What  could  you  want  better  than  to  have  your  business  card 
so  attractive  that  people  will  come  and  ask  for  it,  hand  it  around  from  one  to  another,  discuss  it,  and 
then  keep  it  for  reference?  This  is  what  they  do  with  this  little  "tract."  Witness  what  those  who 
have  tried  it  say  below. 

3d.  It  is  also  intended  to  convey  to  the  public  at  large  the  fact  that  photography  is  not  a  branch  of 
mechanics,  nor  photographers  a  sort  of  mechanic  themselves,  but  that  both  are  entitled  to  respect,  the 
same  as  the  family  physician  or  the  minister;  that  the  photographer  has  rights  as  well  as  the  public  ; 
that  he  must  be  trusted,  and  that  he  atone  is  responsible  for  his  results.  Moreover,  that  he  must  make 
the  picture  and  not  they. 

How  far  the  work  serves  these  three  ends  the  reader  must  judge  from  the  testimonials  below,  of  a 
few  of  those  who  have  been  using  our  little  publication  in  their  business. 

We  believe  it  will  pay  you  to  use  it,  and  that  you  will  assist  just  that  much  in  elevating  your  art  and 
your  craft,  an  object  which  we  are  all  working  for. 

We  get  "  The,  Photographer  to  his  Patro?is'n  up  in  neat  style,  on  the  best  letter  cap  paper,  assorted 
tints,  green,  pink,  and  buff.  Eight  pages  are  devoted  to  the  body  of  the  work,  which  contains  para- 
graphs or  chapters — 1,  on  the  object  of  the  work;  2,  on  photography  ;  3,  when  to  come  ;  4,  how  to 
come;  5,  how  to  dress;  6,  how  to  "behave;  7,  the  children  ;  8,  general  remarks  on  coloring,  copy- 
ing, frames,  prices,  &c. 

All  this  is  inclosed  in  a  cover  of  the  same  kind  of  paper,  the  pages  of  which  are  at  the  service  of 
the  photographer  who  orders  them  to  have  printed  thereon  anything  he  may  please,  which  printing 
we  do  without  extra  charge.     We  publish  this  leaflet  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 


Cuts  for  the  covers  ive  supply  free. 


1000  copies,  cover  included, 
2000 


.     .  $20  00  3000  copies,  cover  included, 

.     :     35  00  5000       " 

Over  500,000  have  been  sold. 


$50  00 
75  00 


We  invite  you  to  examine  the  good  words  which  our  patrons  have  sent  us  concerning  this  publication. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"I  sent  one  out  West  to  a  friend,  and  she 
wrote  that  she  was  now  posted,  and  when  she 
came  here  to  have  a  picture  "nade,  she  would 
come  'according  to  directions.'  '' — A.  Bogar- 
dus,  New  York. 

"  A  grand  idea." — Elbert  Anderson. 

"  It  is  eagerly  sought  for  and  read  by  every- 
body who  visits  our  Gallery.'' — J.  Gurney  & 
Son,  New  York. 

"  It  assists  me  greatly." — James  Mullen, 
Lexington,  Ky. 

"  The  many  valuable  hints  in  it  cannot  fail  to 
be  beneficial  to  both  photographer  and  patron." 
— Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  W.  Virginia. 


"  You  have  conferred  a  great  favor  on  the  fra- 
ternity in  supplying  it,  and  we  hope  it  will  bene- 
fit some  of  the  '  Icnow-everythings''  in  this  quar- 
ter."— A.  C.  McIntyre  &  Co.,  Ogdensburg. 

"They  are  just  the  thing  to  post  people  up  on 
what  they  ought  to  know  in  order  to  secure  good 
pictures." — J.  P.  Whipple,  White  Water. 

"  I  really  think  your  little  book  '  hits  the  nail 
on  the  head.'  " — J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

"It  is  the  best  advertising  medium  I  have 
ever  found." — H.  M.  Sedgewick,  Granville,  0. 

"  I  think  they  are  a  perfect  success,  and  will 
do  us  photographers  a  great  deal  of  good." — G 
W.  Mathis. 


We  will  send  samples  of  the  book,  and  special  rates,  to  any 
who  may  desire  it. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


t« 


v,\tt  p»*«M 


(ffompng. 


**k 


l& 


msmwmm 


IN  EVERY  VARIETY. 


Nos.  419  &  421  BROOME  ST.,  NEW  YORK, 
No.  73  BOLD  STREET,  LIVERPOOL,  ENGLAND. 


DEALERS  SUPPLIED  WITH  THE  BEST  GOODS  OH  THE  BEST  TEEMS. 


Our  own  extensive  facilities  for  manufacturing  enable  us  to  produce  first  quality  of  goods, 
and  our  extensive  connections  at  home  and  abroad  srive  us  facilities  which  no  one  else  has. 


MANUFACTORIES :  ( W"*S%-'  ^STiSg: a 


SEE  OTHER  ADVERTISEMENTS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  BOOKS  and  MAGAZINES 


Examine  Scovill's  Photographic  Clocks.  aM  Read  the  Photographic  Times. 


THE  ZENTMAYER  LENS 

For  Views  and  Copying. 


These  Lenses  possess  pre-eminently,  the  following  qualities  : 

Width  of  visual  angle,  ranging  from  80°  to  90°;  depth  of  focus;  extreme  sharpness  over  the 
whole  field  ;  true  perspective  ;  freedom  from  all  distortion  in  copying  :  portability  and  cheapness. 

Each  mounting  is  provided  with  a  revolving  Diaphragm,  containing  the  stops  of  the  different  com- 
binations for  which  they  are  designed.  The  larger  ones  are  provided  with  an  internal  shutter  for 
making  and  closing  the  exposure. 


No.  1, 

2£  inch  focus, 

3x3 

"    2, 

3*     "        " 

4x5 

"    3. 

5}     «        « 

6£  x    8i 

"    4, 

8       " 

10    x    12 

"    5, 

12       " 

14    x    17 

"    6, 

18       " 

20    x    24 

plate, 


$20  00 
25  00 
30  00 
42  00 
60  00 
90  00 


No.  1  and  No.  2  combined, 

"  2  "   "  3 

"  3  "  "  4 

"  4  "   "5 

"  5  "   "6 

"  1,  2,  and  3, 

"  3,  4,  and  5, 


$33  00 
40  00 
55  00 
75  00 

110  00 
48  00 
88  00 


No.  3,  with  large  mounting  to  combine  with  No.  4  and  No.  5,  $35. 

No.  1  and  No.  2,  specially  adapted  for  Stereoscopic  Views,  are  furnished  in  matched  pairs.  No.  1 
and  No.  2,  single,  not  to  combine  with  other  sizes,  $36  a  pair. 

Lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six  combinations,  from  2£  to  18  inches,  $173. 

Zentmayer's  Stereoscopic  outfits,  including  a  pair  of  No.  2  Lenses  4x7  box,  7  x  10  India  Rubber 
Bath  and  Dipper,  Tripod,  Printing  Frames,  and  outside  box,  $60. 

JOSEPH  ZENTMAYER,  Manufacturer, 

147  South  Fourth  Street,  Philadelphia. 

STEREOSCOPIC   V*IEW*S. 


Dealers  selecting  their  autumn  stock  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  would  do  well  to  examine  our 

unrivalled  variety  of  Views  of 

THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS, 

NIAGARA,   WASHINGTON, 

FAIBMOUNT  PARK,  PHILADELPHIA, 

FLOWERS,  GROUPS,  &c. 

*3-  QUALITY  UNSURPASSED  ! 


KILBURN  BROS.,  Littleton,  New  Hampshire. 

NIAGARA 

STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS. 


Winter  and  Summer  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  of  all  sizes.     Trade  supplied  on  good  terms.     Variety 
unequalled. 

G.  E.  CURTIS,  Photographer, 

Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y. 

Mr.  Curtis'  views  answer  Mr.  Robinson's  query  :  "Are  there  any  clouds  in  America?  " 


GERMAN  ALBUMEN  COLORS ! 

JULIUS    KRUGE  R'S 

fATStt  Csi«swT  Coioas, 

FOR  COLORING  PHOTOGRAPHS  ON  ALBUMEN  and  PLAIN  PAPER. 

These  colors  have  become  very  popular  in  Germany  and  France  (where  they  have  obtained  the 
highest  recommendations),  on  account  of  their  extraordinary  brilliancy,  evenness,  and  easy  application. 
They  can  be  used  on  Albumen  Paper,  and  are  without  doubt  the  best  that  have  been  offered  to  the 
public.     The  Colors  are  put  up  in  boxes  of  6,  12,  and  18. 

GEO.  RAU,  Sole  Agent, 

No.  922  Girard  Ave.,  Philadelphia. 


The  subscriber  desires  to  call  attention  to  an  Entirely  New  Style  of  Carved  Frame, 
unique,  handsome,  and  stylish,  and  very  becoming  to  photographs,  which  he  is  now  manu- 
facturing, and  will  furnish  at  the  following  prices  : 


4x5      @  $6  00  per  doz. 
5^x7}^®    9  00        " 
6J4x8>£@  12  00 

7x9      @  12  00        " 


8  x  10  @  $15  00  per  doz. 

9x11  @    15  00 

10x12  @    18  00        " 

11x14  @    24  00 


12  x  16    @  $30  00  per  doz. 
13x17    @    36  00        " 
16x20    @    42  00 


Larger  sizes  $3.00  per  dozen  for  each  additional  four  inches  or  less  in  length  and  breadth. 
Sample  of  each  size,  except  the  two  smallest,  sent  on  receipt  of  price.  Orders  for  one  dozen 
or  more  filled  C.O.D.  if  ten  per  cent,  is  sent  with  order. 

H.  H.  SNELLINC,  Newburgh,  N.  Y. 


The  undersigned,  having  purchased  the  entire  interest,  goodwill,  and  business  of 

Photo.  Materials  &  Picture  Frames 

OF  J.  HAWORTH, 

Desires  to  inform  his  friends  and  the  trade  generally,  that  he  will  continue  the  business,  as 

heretofore,  at  the  old  stand, 

624  ARCH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA, 

Where  he  hopes,  by  prompt  attention  and  fair  dealing,  to  merit  a  continuance  of  the  patron- 
age so  largely  given  to  the  late  firm. 

We  will  still  keep  a  well  assorted  stock  of 

PICTURE  FRAMES  (OVAL  AND  SQUARE), 

VELVET  CASES,  COLLODIONS, 

VARNISHES,  PURE  CHEMICALS,  &c, 

which  can  be  had  at  the  lowest  rates;  as  well  as 

PASSEPARTOUTS,    STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS   OF    ALI    PARTS    OF   THE  WORLD, 
STEREOSCOPIC  INSTRUMENTS,  Ac. 

We  also  have  a  full  line  of  CAMERAS  of  the  best  makes  and  latest  improvements, 
CAMERA  STANDS,  HEAD-RESTS,  BACKGROUNDS,  and  all  Accessories  necessary 
to  the  Photographic  Art.  We  would  call  the  attention  of  photographers  to  the  fact  that  we 
manufacture  SQUARE  FRAMES,  and  so  can  generally  ship  any  frames  (especially  odd 
sizes)  the  same  day  they  are  ordered.  We  would  also  call  attention  to  the  noted  ALBU- 
MEN PAPERS,  Morgan's  and  H.  Extra,  the  best  for  warm  weather,  for  which  I  am 
the  agent. 


THOMAS  H.  McCOLLIN, 

Successor  to  Haworth  &  McCollin,  624  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


G.  GENNERT, 

53  Maiden  Lane,  N.  Y., 


IMPORTER  OF  THE  CELEBRATED 


S.  *  M.  DRESDEN 


4t.$'Ultt:t 


FxxFEaS, 


RIVES  &  STEINBACH 

WHITE,  PINK,  and  BLUE. 

Every  one  says  it  works  the  most  uniform,  economical,  and  gives  finer  results  than  any 
other.  To  satisfy  yourself  that  it  is  the  best,  send  to  your  stock  dealer  for  a  sample  dozen. 
Kept  by  all  stock  dealers  in  the  United  States. 

ALSO, 

Hyposulphite  of  Soda, 

Solid  German  Glass  Baths, 

Saxe  Evaporating  Dishes, 

And  French  Filter  Paper. 


Special  attention  is  called  to  the   Extra  Brilliant  or  Double    Glossy  Paper, 

which  is  recognized  by  the  best  artists  all  over  the  world  as  the  finest  Albumen  Paper  in 
this  country  or  Europe. 

*       * 


LINN'S  LOOKOUT 
LANDSCAPE   PHOTOGRAPHY 


era 

f=s 

CC3 


CIS 


P-l 

-=3 


CO 


•~cJ 


S3 


YET  CONTAINING    MANY    USEFUL    HINTS    FOR  ALL    PHOTOGRAPHERS. 

By  the  Late  Prof.  R.  M.  LINN, 

LOOKOUT  MOUNTAIN,  TENN. 

This  admirable  little  work  was  published  last  fall,  a  little  too  late  for  the  season.  It  is 
now  confidently  recommended  to  every  photographer  about  to  do  any  class  of  work,  outside 
or  inside  the  skylight. 

CONTENTS. 


Introductory. 

Main  Requisites  of  a  Good  Photographic  Land- 
scape. 

Artistic  Effect. 

Proper  Illumination. 

Direction  of  Light. 

Clouds. 

Length  of  Exposure. 

Apparatus  for  Field  Work. 

On  the  Selection  of  View  Lenses. 

Camera  Boxes. 

Bath  Cups. 

Preliminary  Preparations. 

Taking  the  Field. 

Hints  on  Printing  and  Finishing. 

To  Print  Clouds. 

Toning  Bath  for  Views. 

On  Fixing  and  Washing  Prints. 

Suggestions  on  Mounting  Prints. 

To  Cut  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

To  Mount  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

Formulae  and  Processes  for  Landscape  Photog- 
raphy. 

Ever-ready  Iodizer  for  Landscape  Photography. 


Remarks  on  Preparing  and  Using  Iodizer. 

On  the  Management  of  Flowing  Bottles. 

On  the  Preparation  of  Plain  Collodion. 

The  Silver  Bath  for  Negatives. 

To  Renovate  an  Old  Negative  Bath. 

To  Prepare  Carbonate  of  Silver. 

Permanganate  of  Potash — Its  Use  in  our  Art. 

Preparation  and  Using  of  Developer. 

Fixing  Solution  for  View  Negatives. 

On  Redeveloping  and  Strengthening  Agents. 

To  Clean  and  Polish  the  Glass. 

To  Prepare  Chloride  of  Gold  Solution. 

The  Paste  for  Mounting  of  Photographs. 

The   Operator's   Oracle — Failures  :    Causes  and 

Remedies  ;  for  consultation  in  time  of  trouble. 
Counsels  and  Cautions  for  the  Printer,  including 

Formulae  for  Silvering  Bath,  &c 
Failures  in  Silvering  Albumenized  Paper. 
Failures  in  Toning  Photographs. 
Failures  in  Fixing  Photographs. 
Instantaneous  Photography. 
View  Photography  Financially  Considered. 
Stereoscoping  Applied  to  Portraiture. 
Concluding  Remarks. 


PRICE,  75  CENTS.  FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


MOULTON'S 


RAPID  PHOTO-WASHER. 


&q 

^ 

5 

R, 

"-I 

u 

o 

5 

fel 

'< 

H 

M 

ft. 

^ 

to 

<0 

bn 

ci 

t*i 

s 

Pi 

pq 

^ 

^ 

^ 

b 

O 

H 

t— 

O 

N 

Patented  August  12th,  1873. 


Instead  of  soaking  the  Prints  it  applies  the  water  in  the  form  of  spray,  with  considerable 
force,  to  both  sides  of  the  paper  at  each  revolution,  or  from  one  hundred  to  one-hundred- 
fifty  times  per  minute.  Washes  with  exact  uniformity,  and  gives  more  brilliant  and  per- 
manent work ;  is  simple,  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order,  will  last  a  lifetime,  and  will  enable  you 
to  get  out  work  at  short  notice,  thereby  securing  many  orders  that  would  otherwise  be  lost. 


Size  Cylinder, 

Diam.  16in.  Length  14  l-2in. 
"     20        "       19 
11     25        "       24 

Larger  sizes  may  follow. 


Capacity  in  Cards. 

84 

144 
220 


Largest  Print. 

Price. 

14  by  17  ins. 

$30 

18  by  22  " 

40 

22  by  28  " 

50 

S00VILL  MFG.  CO.,  Trade  Agents. 


TESTIMOKTIAIjS  . 

"  I  write  to  testify  to  the  satisfaction  I  feel  with  the  working  of  your  Rapid  Print.  Washer.  It  is  simply  per- 
fection, as  far  as  my  experience  with  it  goes,  viz  :  One  year's  constant  use.  I  have  washed  eight  dozen  cartes  in 
ten  minutes,  and  the  most  accurate  test  I  know  of,  starch  and  iodine,  failed  to  show  a  trace  of  hypo,  remain- 
ing. '— L.  G.  Bigelow,  Detroit,  Mich.,  Feb.  10th,  1874. 

"Time  saved  is  money  earned."  The  above  maxim  is  as  true  in  the  photographic  business  as  in  any  other, 
and  in  this  connection  I  would  say,  that  Moulton's  Rapid  Photo-Washer  will  save  more  time  in  any  well-regu- 
lated gallery,  than  any  mechanism  ever  yet  invented  ;  besides  the  prints  finish  with  a  finer  lustre  than  those 
washed  by  any  other  device  I  have  ever  yet  seen.  Having  used  one  for  the  past  two  months,  washing  from  100 
to  300  prints  daily,  I  am  pleased  to  add  my  testimonial  to  its  exellence." — Wm.  M.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 
March  11th,  1874. 

ANALYSIS    OF    PRINTS. 

"After  analyzing  the  prints  which  were  washed  by  you  during  ten  minutes,  in  your  Rapid  Photo- Washer, 
and  those  furnished  by  an  artist  of  this  city,  washed  in  a  syphon  tank  in  running  water  for  one  hour  and  left  in 
the  water  over  night,  for  the  quantity  of  hyposulphites  left  therein,  I  take  pleasure  in  stating  that  the  prints 
treated  in  the  Rapid  Photo-Washer  contain  perceptibly  less  hyposulphites  than  those  washed  in  the  other  man- 
ner described."— Gustavus  Bode,  Analytical  Chemist,  and  Dealer  in  Photographic  Stock,  Milwaukee,  Feb.  21, 1874 


L  V.  MOULTON,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis. 


THE 

ALBION  ALBUMENIZING  CO. 

LONDON  AND  GLASGOW, 
(Office,  No.   II    Brackenbury  Road,  Hammersmith,  London,) 

Request  American  Photographers  to  give  their 


P 


'aper  a  fair  trial. 


THE  SEVERAL  BRANDS  FOR  SALE  BY 


PHILADELPHIA,  PA., 

AUD 

SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

4  BEEKMAN  STEEET,  NEW  YORK. 

Marion  & Oo.s  Specialties. 


ALBUMENIZED  PAPERS, 

Used  by  the  best  English  and  Colonial  photographers  ;  Wilson,  of  Aberdeen  ;  Vandyke 
&  Brown,  Liverpool ;  Notman,  Montreal;  Bourne  &  Shepherd,  India;  and  hundreds  of 
others. 

MOUNTS 

For  Cartes-de-Visite,  Cabinet,  and  larger  sizes,  of  the  very  best  style  and  quality,  as  made 
for  the  leading  English  and  Colonial  photographers.  We  will  post  samples  free  to  any 
photographer  on  receipt  of  application. 

GILT  AND  SILVER  ORMOLU  METAL  FRAMES, 

For  Miniatures,  Cartes-de-Visite,  and  Cabinets. 

PHOTOGRAPHS. 

The  largest  and  best  selected  #stock  in  Great  Britain.  Upwards  of  1000  copies  of 
Modern  Paintings,  artistically  colored  in  water  colors;  English  and  Continental  Photogra- 
phic Views;  the  principal  Picture  Galleries;  Portraits  of  Eminent  Personages;  over  300,- 
000  in  stock. 

MARION  &  CO.,  22  &  23  Soho  Square,  LONDON,  ENGLAND. 


A  SPLENDID,  USEFUL  BOOK. 

OUR  LAST  AND  NEWEST  PUBLICATION. 


33  3=1.    V  O  C3r  353 

PHOTOGRAPHER'S 

POCKET 


aiiiiiwRi 


VMd.    d^AW 


i 


An  Alphabetically  arranged  collection  of  practically  important  hints  on  the  construction 
of  the  Gallery  ;  selection  and  trial  of  lenses  and  chemicals  ;  approved  formulae  for  the  differ- 
ent photographic  processes  ;  tables  of  weights  and  measures  ;  rules  for  avoiding  failure,  etc., 
etc.,  for 

Photographers  and  Amateurs, 

IS  RECEIVING  THE  HIGHEST  PRAISE  WHEREVER  IT  GOES. 


IT  IS  A  BOOK  EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER  SHOULD  HAVE, 

Because  it  is  a  ready  helper  under  all  difficult  circumstances. 


Extract  from  the  Minutes  of  the  Chicago  Photographic  Association. 

"Messrs.  Hall  and  Hesler  spoke  in  most  flattering  terms  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Pocket  Reference- Book,  of 
its  great  value  to  every  photographer,  and  expressed  the  hope  that  it  may  soon  be  found  in  every 
gallery." 

There  is  hardly  a  matter  occurring  in  your  daily  work  which  it  does  not  throw  light  upon 
and  make  easy.     Examine  it  for  yourself. 


For  sale  by  all  dealers.    Price,  $l.SO,  post-paid. 

BENEMMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


A  NEW 

INVOICE 

JUST    RECEIVED 

OF 


LOESCHEE  &  PETSCH'S 


ADMIRABLE 


STUDIES! 


The  praise  which  has  been  bestowed  upon  these  pictures,  particularly  at  the  Vieuua  Exhibition,  convinces  us 
that  they  should  be  treasured  as  suilacle  models  of  pose  and  lighting  of  the  sitter,  harmonious  and  artistic  arrangement  of 
furniture,  etc.  These  photographs  are  the  only  European  ones  for  which  the  international  jury  awarded  the  two 
medals  for  progress  and  taste,  Mr.  Lewitzky,  a  photographer,  and  member  of  the  jury,  exclaimed :  "  The  exhi- 
bition of  Messrs.  Loescher  &  Petsch  has  charmed  me;  according  to  my  opinion,  Loeschee  &  Petsch,  in 
Europe,  and  Kurtz,  in  New  York,  are  the  first  photographers  of  the  world !" 

We  will  Express  the  sett  on  receipt  of  $30  ;  or  post  them  at  your  risk  to  any  address.  The  price  is  remarka- 
bly low,  as  each  print  is  most  carefully  made. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

4®=  See  review  of  these  pictures  in  the  "  Philadelphia  Photographer  "  for  December,  1873. 


The  Universal 


EMBOSSING    PATENTED   JANUARY    9,  1872. 

This  Press  will  cameo  all  sizes,  from  cards  to  cabinets,  and  is  sold  lower  than  any  other  that  will  do 
the  same  work.     It  has  been  greatly  improved  and  made  very  complete  in  all  its  parts. 
We  furnish  a  card,  victoria,  and  cabinet  size. 

PRICE,  ®20.00. 

MANUFACTURED  AND  SOLD  WHOLESALE  AND  RETAIL  BY 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO.,  822  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 

CEP"  CAUTION.— Photographers  are  cautioned  against  buying  other  presses  that  may  use  an  ^^it- 
embossing  substance,  as  they  are  an  infringement  on  the  above.  R.  J.  Chute,  Patentee. 


NEWELL'S 

IMPROVED  BATH  HOLDER 


ACKNOWLEDGED  TO  BE 


THE    BEST    IN    THE    WORLD! 


READ  THE  LATEST  TESTIMONIALS : 

Messes.  R.  Newell  <fc  Son.  Boston,  Mass.,  March  30,  1874. 

Dear  Sirs:  In  answer  to  your  letter  of  inquiry,  as  to  how  I  like  the  Bath  Holder,  I  have  delayed 
answering  that  I  might  have  time  to  thoroughly  test  it.  I  find  it  in  every  way  first-rate  ;  does  not 
injure  the  bath,  is  light  and  of  convenient  shape,  and  is  altogether  the  best  holder  I  have  used. 
Hoping  you  will  meet  with  success  in  the  sale  of  the  article,  I  remain, 

Tours  truly,  A.  Marshall,  147  Tremont  Street. 


Messrs.  R.  Newell  &  Son. 


Albany,  N.  Y.,  March  25,  1874. 


Gents :  The  28  x  28  Bath  works  splendid,  and  I  must  say  the  system  of  making  baths  of  wood 
and  coating  them  with  your  composition  has  supplied  a  want  long  needed  by  the  practical  photog- 
rapher, as  large  glass  baths  are  always  dangerous.  Very  truly, 

E.  S.  M.  Hains,  45  North  Pearl  Street. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  FIRST-CLASS  STOCKDEALERS. 


X>«,    J.     R 

SOUTHERN 

Photographic^Ferrotype 

STOCK  DEPOT, 
Savannah,  Geo. 

FIRST-CLASS  STOCK 

AT  NORTHERN  PRICES, 

Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance, 

cRosscuptwEsf.PHA^^- — 5£?— -~ ^~  Drayage,  oce. 

SZElsTID     IFO'IR,    IP  IR,  I  CIS    LIST 


LONDON     1851. 


LONDON     1862. 


PARIS    1867. 


ROSS' 


PORTRAIT 


.A.  IN"  ID 


VIEW  LENSES. 


We  have  now  successfully  introduced  to  the  American  Photographers  the  Ross  Lens,  and  by  our 
increased  sales  we  know  they  are  appreciated.  At  the  convention  held  at  Buffalo,  July  15,  many  fine 
photographs  were  exhibited  by  photographers,  and  ourselves,  made  with  the  Ross  Lens,  which 
attracted  great  attention. 

While  Ross  &  Co.  are  the  oldest  manufacturers  of  Photographic  Lenses  in  existence,  they  also 
keep  up  with  the  requirements  of  the  fraternity,  by  constantly  manufacturing  new  combinations  and 
improving  on  those  already  in  existence.  They  have  lately  perfected,  and  will  soon  furnish  us  stock 
of.  a  new  series  of  Card  Lenses,  extra  rapid,  peculiarly  adapted  for  babies,  and  people  who  will  not  be 
quiet.     We  will  give  notice  of  their  arrival. 

WE  HAVE  NOW  IN  STOCK 

Portrait  Lenses,  from  1-4  to  15  x  is.  Instantaneous  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Cabinet  Lenses,  51os.  1,  2,  and  3.  Medium  Angle  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Card  Lenses,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3.  Large  Angle  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Triplets,  Kos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7.  Stereographic  Lenses,  all  sizes. 

We  shall  soon  have  in  Stock,  Ross  &  Co.'s  latest  introduction,  which  is  at  present  exciting  the 
Photographers  of  Europe  with  its  excellence,  and  has  been  named  the 

SYMMETRICAL    LENS. 


We  shall  keep  following  sizes  in  stock,  other  numbers  imported  to  order. 


No. 


Large  Stop 
Covering. 


Medium  Stop 
Covering. 


*3  5x4 

6  8%x6Vo 

8  10x8 

11  15x12 

12  18x16 


Small  Stop 
Covering. 

714x41/2  8x5 

9x7 

12x10  .... 

18x16  

22x20  


Equivalent 
Focus. 

5  inches. 


10 


10x8 
13x11 

22x18     18 

25x21     21 


Price. 

$27  00 
54  00 
72  00 
108  00 
135  00 


In  matched  pairs,  $54.00. 


Numerous  testimonials  pronounce  them  to  be  the  best,  as  well  as  the  cheapest  Foreign  Lens  ever 
offered  to  the  American  Photographer. 

We  will  mail  price-list  on  application,  and  promptly  fill  all  orders. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 


SOLE  AGENTS  FOR 
THE  UNITED  STATES 


,  822  Arc!  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO., 

159  Washington  St.,  Boston, 

Importers  and  Sole  Agents  in  the  United  States  for  the  celebrated 

Voigtlander  &  Son,  and  Darlot  Lenses 

For  Portraits,  Views,  and  Stereoscopic  Work  of  all  sizes.     Send  for  Price  List. 


TRY  OUR  NEW  STEREOSCOPIC  LENSES 

IF  YOU  WANT  THE  BEST.     PRICE,  $22  PER  PAIR. 

None  genuine  unless  our  names  are  engraved  on  them. 


ALBUMEN  PAPERS. 


demon's, 
Hovey's, 


Dresden  S.  &  M., 

"       Brilliant. 


AMERICAN  OPTICAL  CO.'S  CAMERA  BOXES 


Black  Walnut  Frames, 0VAL  and  SQU^riof  Zrs  and  styles' 
Carved  Rustic  Frames, Square'  CarTed5r.!f0up,s,thi£50,,flon,e"-  A11 


Sherman  Card  Frames. 
White  Hollywood  Frames. 


We  have  of  these  three  different  sizes  and  styles  for  the  Card, 
Victoria,  and  Cahinet  Photographs. 


We  have  these  in  three  different  styles  of  each  size 
for  the  Card,  Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 


Stereoscopes,  Prang's  Chromos,  Glass  Baths,  Plain  Paper, 
Porcelain  Ware,  &c. 

And  every  description  of  goods  used  in  the  business,  at  wholesale  and  retail,  at  the  lowest  cash  prices. 

BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO. 


LIFE 

(IMPOSITION 

FOR   THE   STEREOSCOPE. 


CATALOGUE. 


1.  Blowing  Bubbles. 

2.  B  stands  for  Bumble-B. 

3.  Blackberry  Blossoms. 

4.  The  Hen's  Nest. 

5.  Let  us  Have  Piece. 

6.  Mamma,  where  was  I  when  you  were 

a  little  girl  ? 

7.  Our  Domestic's  Belations. 

8.  She  went  to  the  Butchers. 

9.  My  Lady  and  My  Lady's  Maid. 

10.  The  Mountain  Spring. 

11.  Unveiling  a  Statue  of  Young  America. 

12.  Young  America  in  the  Nursery. 

13.  Young  America  as  an  Artist. 

14.  Young  America  Asleep. 


15.  The  Sunbeam  Fairy. 

16.  The  Picture-Book. 

17.  Sitting  for  my  Picture. 

18.  Young  America  Bathing. 

19.  Young  Boston's  Ambition. 

20.  Ding-Dong-Ding,  Music  on  a   Rubber 

String. 

21.  Reflection. 

22.  The  Loiterers. 

23.  The  Cabin  Porch. 

24.  Beatrice  Shoo-Ply. 

25.  Home  Group. 

26.  A  View. 

27.  The  Gleaner. 


Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price.    $2.00  per  dozen.     Order  by  number. 
DEALERS  SUPPLIED  ON  GOOD  TERMS. 


These  inimitable  pictures  are  all  natural  compositions,  and  touch  the  tender  chords  of 
human  nature  most  wonderfully.  They  are  attractive  to  every  one  who  has  a  heart,  but 
particularly  instructive  as  studies  for  photographers,  in  grouping,  posing,  and  composition. 

They  will  help  any  man  make  better  and  easier  pictures  of  children,  and  should 

be  studied. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publ.shers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 


RIZE 


CTURES 


In  order  that  photographers  may  have  an  early  opportunity  of  studying  the  very  elegant 
pictures  from  negatives  which  have  been  sent  to  us  in  competition  for  our 

COLD     MEDAL! 

we  publish  them  for  sale.  There  are  THIRTY  PICTURES  IN  A  SET — of  men,  women, 
and  children,  groups  and  single  figures — and  the  following  is  a  catalogue  of  them,  numbered 
in  the  order  in  which  the  negatives  were  received. 


1  A.  N.  Hardy,  Boston,  Mass. 

2  J.  McClukk  &  Co.,  St.  John,  N.B. 

3  D.  Gintee,  Conneautville,  Pa. 

4  W.  N.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 

5  F.  B.  Clench,  Lockport,  N.  Y. 

6  Theo.  Nieberg,  St.  Marys,  O. 

7  C.  Chadbourne,  Toledo,  0. 

8  E.  H.  Alley,  Toledo,  O. 

9  B.  Gray,  Bloomington,  111. 

10  C.  D.  Mosher,  Chicago,  111. 

11  E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk,  Conn. 


12  N.  H.  Busey,  Baltimore,  Md. 

13  M.  T.  Carter,  Worcester,  Mass. 

14  W.  W.  Whiddit,  Newburg,  N.  Y. 

15  L.  G.  Bigelow,  Williamsport,  Pa. 

16  G.  M.  Elton,  Palmyra,  N.  Y. 

17  I.  Saunders,  Alfred  Centre,  N.Y. 

18  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  San  Fran- 

cisco, Cal. 

19  Forrester  Clark,  Pittsfleld, 

Mass. 

20  Otto  Lewin,  New  York  City. 


21  F.  L.  Stuber,  Bethlehem,  Pa. 

22  D.  T.  Burrill,   North   Bridge- 

water,  Mass. 

23  J.  Barhydt,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

24  Albright  Bros.,  Wooster,  0. 

25  F.  S.  Crowell,  Mt.  Vernon,  O. 

26  Trask  &  Bacon,  Philadelphia. 

27  G.  W.  Harris,  Lancaster,  N.  Y. 

28  B.  Williams,  Tunkhannock,  Pa. 

29  F.  Gutekunst,  Philadelphia. 

30  J.  Inglis,  Montreal,  Can. 


It  will  be  seen  that  a  number  of  our  best  photographers  have  competed. 

fl@-  THE  AWARD  WAS  MADE  FOB  JVO.  18. 

Three  negatives  or  more  were  sent  by  each  competitor.     The  sets  include  one  example 
from  each  competitor.     All  the  duplicates  may  be  had  to  order. 
The  prints  are  supplied  at  the  following  rates  : 

A  Set  of  Thirty  In  the  Improved  Photograph  Cover  (advanced;,....    $4  25 

without       "  "  "        3  75 

Selections,  per  dozen, 3  OO 


EVERY  OPERATOR  &  EVERY  PRINTER  SHOULD  GET  AND  STUDY  THEM. 


Nothing  so  really  elegant  was  ever  offered  for  sale. 

BEIERMAN  L  WILSON,  «li&,,)  7th  L  Cherry  Sts.,  Phila. 


Photographic  Publications,  1874. 

Knowing  the  advantages  of  well-written  works  on  Photography  to  our 
readers,  we  issue  our  annual  catalogue,  that  they  may  have  the  opportunity 
of  selecting  the  very  best.  We  always  find  the  photographer  who  reads 
what  is  published  pertaining  to  his  profession,  to  be  the  photographer  who 
succeeds  in  his  business  the  best.  Above  all,  those  who  regularly  and  contin- 
ually receive  a  good  photographic  magazine  are  those  who  are  always  ahead 
with  new  goods,  new  styles,  and  new  information.  We  recommend  an  in- 
vestment in  a  part  or  all  of  the  list  below,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  them  to 
you  on  receipt  of  price. 


CATALOGUE. 


A  The  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

The  oldest,  best,  and  most  popular  Photographic  Magazine  in  America.  Eleventh  Year,  Please  read  the 
prospectus  on  page  three  of  cover  and  premium  list  opposite.  Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2.50  for  six 
months,  in  advance.    Current  number,  50  cents.    Specimen  copies,  free. 

B  The  Skylight  and  the  Dark- Room. 

By  Elbert  Anderson,  operator  at  Kurtz's  studio,  New  York.  This  is  the  most  beautiful  and  elaborate 
work  on  the  art  ever  published.  It  contains  nearly  250  pages — large,  square — twelve  photographs  made  by  the 
author  to  illustrate  the  lessons  of  the  work,  and  almost  two  hundred  fine  wood-cuts.  See  advertisements. 
Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  postpaid,  $4.00.    A  few  copies  only  left. 

O  Photographic  Mosaics. 

The  1874  edition  excels  all  of  its  eight  older  brethren.  The  list  ot  articles  is  made  up  of  original  contribu- 
tions, written  especially  for  its  pages,  on  all  departments  of  the  art,  whoily  by  practical  men  who  are  only  heard 
from  once  a  year  through  the  persuasion  of  the  editor,  in  this  way.  See  special  advertisement.  146  pages. 
Paper  cover,  50  cents.    Cloth,  $1.    A  few  copies  of  former  editions,  from  1866,  at  same  price. 

D  The  Ferrotyper'  s  Guide. 

A  new  work  on  the  Ferrotype.    Pi  ice.  75  cents. 

E       Bigelow's  Album,  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

This  is  not  exactly  a  book,  but  a  collection  of  24  large  Victoria  size  photographic  studies  in  lighting  and 
posing,  made  especially  to  teach  how  to  light  and  pose  ordinary  and  extra-ordinary  subjects  in  all  the  plain, 
fancy,  "  Rembrandt"  and  "Shadow"  styles.  It  is  accompanied  by  an  explanatory  key  of  instructions,  together 
with  a  diagram  for  each  picture,  showing  how  the  sitter  and  the  camera  were  placed  in  the  skylight,  their 
relation  to  the  background,  and  what  blinds  were  opened  and  closed  at  the  time  of  the  sitting.  It  almost 
supplies  a  rule  by  which  you  can  quickly  tell  how  to  manage  every  subject  that  comes  to  you.  The  studies  are 
mounted  on  folding  leaves,  so  that  twelve  can  he  examined  at  once.    Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  $6,  postpaid. 

F  Wilson's  Landscape  Studies. 

An  album  of  landscape  studies  in  style  similar  to  Bigelow's  Album,  containing  ten  5x8  views,  with  the 
formula,  &c,  by  George  Washington  Wilson,  Esq.,  the  renowned  Scotch  landscape  photographer.  A  splendid 
work.    All  gone  and  none  to  be  had. 

Gr  Handbook  of  the  Practice  and  Art  of  Photography. 

By  Dr.  Vogel.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  in  press. 

H     How  to  Paint  Photographs  in  Water  Colors. 

A  practical  Handbook  designed  especially  for  the  use  of  Students  and  Photographers,  containing  directions 
for  Brush  Work  in  all  descriptions  of  Photo-Portraiture,  Oil,  Water  Colors,  Ink,  How  to  Retouch  the  nega- 
tive, &c.    By  George  B.  Ayres,  Artist.  Third  edition.    Differing  largely  from  previous  editions.    Price,  $2.00. 


I  Pictorial  Effect  in  Photography. 

By  H.  P.  Robinson,  Loudon.    Out  of  print.    New  edition  in  preparation. 

J  Hoiv  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph. 

This  is  a  fine  little  work  of  48  pages,  written  by  the  wife  of  a  celebrated  New  York  photographer,  for  the 
purpose  of  educating  the  public  on  the  all-important  subject  of  sitting  for  a  picture.  It  is  bound  in  cloth  at  GO 
cents  per  copy,  and  paper  cover  30  cents. 

K  Lookout  Landscape  Photography. 

By  Prof.  R.  M.  Linn,  Lookout  Mountain,  Tenn.  A  pocket  manual  for  the  outdoor  worker,  and  full  of  good 
for  every  photographer.    75  cents.    Be  sure  to  get  it. 

L      Himes's  Leaf  Prints ;  or,  Glimpses  at  Photography. 

By  Prof.  Charles  F.  Himes,  Ph.D.  Full  of  useful  information  for  the  photographic  printer.  Illustrated 
with  a  whole-size  photograph.    Cloth,  $1.25. 

M  The  American  Carbon  Manual. 

By  Edw.  L.Wilson.  A  complete  manual  of  the  Carbon  process  from  beginning  to  end.  With  a  fine 
example  by  the  process.    Cloth,  $2.00. 

N        Ayres's  Chart  of  Photographic  Drapery. 

This  is  a  photograph  of  forty-two  pieces  of  cloth,  of  all  the  colors  and  shades,  handsomely  mounted  on  a 
card.  It  should  be  hung  in  every  reception-room,  to  show  your  customers  what  color  dresses  o  wear  and  to 
show  you  what  sort  of  backgrounds  and  accessories  to  use.    Price,  $2.00. 

O  The  Photographer  to  His  Patrons. 

A  splendid  little  twelve-page  leaflet,  which  answers  all  vexatious  questions  put  to  you  by  your  sitters,  and 
serves  as  a  grand  advertising  medium.  It  is  for  photographers  to  give  away  to  their  customers.  Send  for  a 
copy  and  an  illustrated  circular.  Over  300,000  already  sold  and  in  use  all  over  the  country.  $20.00  for  1000, 
$35.00  for  2000,  and  so  on.    Printed  and  supplied  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

P  Pretty  Faces. 

A  leaflet  much  smaller  than  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons"  for  the  same  purpose,  but  costing  less,  viz. : 
1000  copies,  $10.00 ;  2000,  $17.50,  and  larger  orders  at  less  rates. 

Q,  The  Year-Booh  of  Photography. 

By  G.  Wharton  Simpson.  English  edition.  Similar  to  Mosaics,  and  pull  of  good,  short,  practical  articles. 
50  cents.    1869, 1870, 1871, 1872,  and  1873  now  on  hand.    1874,  about  January  20th. 

R     Elbert  Anderson' s  Photo-  Comic  Allmyknack. 

A  complete  Almanac,  full  of  witty  sayings,  jokes,  puns,  stories,  etc.,  etc.  Profusely  illustrated  with  comic 
and  original  sketches,  yet  all  interspersed  with  much  practical  matter  of  value  to  every  photographer.  Price, 
75  cents. 

S  Photographers'  Pocket  Reference- Book. 

By  Dr  .  H.  Vogel,  of  Berlin.  A  dictionary  of  all  the  terms  used  in  the  art,  and  contains  formulas  for  almost 
every  known  manipulation.  Altogether  different  from  any  work  ever  published.  Cloth,  $1.50.  See  special 
advertisement.    A  splendid,  indispensable  book. 


To  save  writing,  photographers  may  order  the  above  of  us  by  the  marginal  letters,  thus,  "  Please  send  us 
one  copy  of  each,  book  A,  B,  K,"  Ac,  <fec.    Any  of  the  above  sent  post  free  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Benerman  &  Wilson's  Publications  sold  by  all  Dealers. 


% 


rtVMEIL'S  S0/,s, 


NEW 


planatic  Lenses 


FOR 

GROUPS, 
LANDSCAPES, 

AND 

COPIES. 


FOR 

GROUPS, 
LANDSCAPES, 

AND 

COPIES. 


(JLetual  rice  of  a  No.  1  Steinheil  Z*n».) 

We  have  now  a  full  stock  of  these  celebrated  Lenses,  at  the  following  prices : 
No.  1,  1-4  size,  3£  inch  focus,  


2 1-2 

3 4-4 

4 8-10 

5 10-12 

6, 13-16 


5*  " 
7 

10i  " 
13*  " 
16*  " 


$25  00 
30  00 
45  00 
60  00 
70  00 

110  00 


Nos.  1  and  2  are  in  matched  pairs  for  Stereoscopic  Work. 


"I  always  take  great  pleasure  in  recommending  the  Steinheil  Lenses,  and  you  can  say  almost 
anything  in  their  favor  for  me.  They  possess  all  the  merits  of  higher  priced  lenses,  and  if  I  was 
starting  again  I  should  stock  myself  with  them."— B.  W.  Kilburn. 


THEY  ARE 

IN  USE  BY  MOST  LEADING  PHOTOGRAPHERS, 

INCLUDING 

GUTEKUNST,  WENDEROTH, 

BROADBENT  &  PHILLIPS,  FENNEMORE, 

DeMORAT,  LOTHROP, 

And  many  others,  equally  well  known. 

We  feel  sure  that  at  least  one  of  these  Lenses  is  needful  for  the  successful  prosecution  of  your 
business,  and  so  solicit  your  orders.  * 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  States, 

No.  822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


MANUFACTURING  OPTICIAN, 

1314  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia. 

Sole  Manufacturer  of  the  Stkreo-Panopticon  and  Artopticon,  warranted  to  be  the  most 
perfect  and  powerful  Magic  Lanterns  made. 


Ill 


Jllfflllllil^  ^ 


MCALLISTER'S 

ARTOPTICON 


Each  lantern  is  adjustable  for  use 
with  powerful  coal  oil  light — oxycal- 
cium,  hydro-oxycalcium,  and  oxy- 
hydrogen  lights. 

B^^The  coal  oil  lamp  used  gives 
very  much  more  light  than  any  other 
lamp  yet  made. 

Giving  exhibitions  with  the  Artopti- 
con will  prove  a  profitable  business  for 
a  man  with  a  small  capital. 


The   STEREO-PASOPTICOSI    is  an  improved   instrument,   suitable  for  giving 
exhibitions  of  dissolving  views  on  the  largest  scale.     Send  for  printed  description. 


MCALLISTER'S 

PATENT    TINTERS. 

These  tinters  are  used  for  giving  to  magic  lantern  pictures 
various  beautiful  tints  or  colors,  as  blue,  red,  yellow,  green, 
crimson,  &c,  &c.  They  can  be  adjusted  to  the  lantern,  either 
on  the  end  of  the  front  lens,  or  may  be  screwed  to  the  back 
of  the  front  lens-holder,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Stereo-Panop- 
ticon and  Educational  lanterns.  On  the  Artopticon,  they 
are  placed  on  the  end  of  the  front  lens  tube. 

NEW  and  BEAUTIFUL  SLIDES  for  LANTERN  USE  in  LARGE  VARIETY. 

Priced  and  Illustrated  Catalogues  free,  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  stamp. 


W.  MITCHELL  McALLISTER,  1314  Chestnut  St.,  Phila. 


DR.    VOGE  L'S 

HAND  BOOK 


OIF1 


PHOTOGRAPHY. 


THE  SECOND   EDITION 

Is  in  Press  and  will  be  ready  soon. 


SEE  FUTURE  ADVERTISEMENTS. 


FOR    SALE    BY    ALL    DEALERS, 


B.ENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers. 

PHILADELPHIA. 


Reflecting  Solar  Camera. 
IMPROVED 


SOLAR    CAMERAS, 


Direct  Printing  Camera. 

Manufactured  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the  original  inventor  and  patentee,  combining 
ALL  THE  IMPORTANT  improvements  that  have  been  made. 

Every  Camera  will  be  tested  and  guaranteed  before  delivery,  and  will  be  licensed  and  accompanied 
by  the  regular  Patent  Stamp  of  the  patentee. 

PRICES  OP  DIRECT  PRINTING  OR  REFLECTING  SOLAR  CAMERAS : 

10  inch  diameter  Condensing  Lens,  will  print  picture  18  x  23  in., $190  00 

12     "  "  "  "  "  "       25x30  " 220  00 

15     "  "  "  "  "  29x36  " 275  00 

18     "  "  "  "  "  40x50  " 380  00 

Can  be  ordered  of  all  Stockdealers.     Boxing  charged  for  at  cost. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD,  Baltimore,  Md. 


ROBINSON'S 

INIMITABLE 

PHOTOGRAPH 
TRIMMER. 

BETTER  THAN  KNIVES, 

AND 

WILL  OUTWEAR  A 

GROSS  OF  THEM. 

See  other  Advertisement. 


Ask  your   stockdealer  to  show  it  to  you,  or 
send  direct  to  us  for  one. 

Price,  by  mail,  $3.50. 

BENERMAN&  WILSON,  ManfW  Agents, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


New  York,  May  1st,  1874. 
The  large,  new,  and  magnificent  Gallery  of 
WM.  KURTZ, 
MADISON  SQUARE,  NEW  YORK, 

Opened  April  1st,  is  furnished  with  twelve  back- 
grounds, new  in  design,  from  the  Scenic  Studio 

f  LAFAYETTE  W.  SEAVEY, 

8  Lafayette  Place,  New  York. 

THE  KURTZ  PLAIN  combines  the  general 
effects  of  light  and  shade  desirable  and  found  in 
our  Scenic  Backgrounds  This  is  the  first  and 
only  plain  ground  with  which  side-slips  can  be 
appropriately  used.     Send  stamp  for  sample. 


Seavey's  BactpM  Bulletin. 


EXTRA! 
No.  70. 

A  New  Forest  Background.    Very  peculiar  and 
effective.      Introduced  by  Bogardus,  N.  Y. 

No,  71. 

A  Rich  Interior,  with  elaborate  tapestry  on 
walls.     Introduced  by  Mora,  N.  Y. 

See  other  advertisements. 


GS-O! 

TOCHICA 

G-O! 

BACKGROUND  CARRIAGE 


WILL  BE  THERE,  and  WILL  EXHIBIT 
HIS  IMPROVED  PATENT 


700 


OVER  /  I  1 1  I  SOLD 


ON  TRIAL,  AND  NOT  ONE  RETURNED. 


NASON'S 

UNIVERSAL 

Light  Modifier,  Reflector 

AND 

Background  Carriage, 

COMBINED. 

The  most  useful  combination  that  ever  entered  a 
Photo-Studio.  Buy  no  "Head  Screens"  until  you 
have  examined  the  above. 

ALL  OF  OUR  GOODS  ARE  SOLD  ON  TRIAL 


DO  MOT  FAIL  TO  SEE 


14 


IN    ONE! 

JVO  TOILET  ROOM  COMPLETE  WITHOUT  IT! 
JYASON  WILL  EXHIBIT  IT  AT 

CHICAGO. 


NON^LCUE 


HHERHSTMID 

"Never  Shakes." 


NASONIAN 

CUT-OUTS 

UNIQUE!  NOVEL!!  USEFUL!!! 


The  above,  and  many  other  useful  inventions  appertaining  to  Photography  are  maufac- 
tured  by  the 

NASON  NOVELTY  COMPANY, 

COLUMBUS,  OHIO, 

And  are  for  sale  by  every  progressive  Photographic  Stock  Dealer  in  America. 


WAYMOUTH'S 


ignetting  Papers 


ARE  NOW  MADE  OF  TWO  SHAPES,  as  shown  in  the  drawings  above.  They  consist  of  finely 
gradated,  lithographed  designs,  mounted  on  protecting  sheets  of  non-actinic  paper,  and  are  the  light 
est,  neatest,  and  best  means  of  producing  vignette  pictures  ever  offered. 

TBSTIMOITIALS: 

"  Waymouth's  Improved  Vignette  Papers  I  have  tried,  and  they  are  just  what  I  have  been  want- 
ing for  years." — Well  G,  Singhi. 

"  They  readily  admit  of  the  gradation  already  very  good,  being  modified  easily  to  suit  the  negative. 
This,  I  take  it,  is  a  point  of  great  importance." — G.  Wharton  Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A. 

"  From  a  trial  made,  we  are  enabled  to  say  that  they  answer  exceedingly  well  ;  and  they  are  certain 
to  find  favor  among  photographers — a  favor  they  well  deserve." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  can  testify  to  the  exquisite  softness  obtained  from  your  Vignette  Papers,  which  gradual  and 
soft  effect  I  have  never  seen  equalled  by  any  other  method.'' — H.  A.  H.  Daniel,  Esq.,  Hon.  Sec.  of  the 
Bristol  and  Clifton  Amateur  Photographic  Association. 

"  The  Way  mouth  Vignetting  Paper  are  a  decided  success.  They  are  splendid." — J.  W.  <$•  J.  S. 
Moulton,  Salem  Mass. 

From  Professional  Photographers. — "First-class."  "The  sample  sent  answers  perfectly."  "I 
consider  them  first  rate  articles."  "I  think  your  Vignette  Papers  will  be  a  great  improvement  on 
the  old  glasses."     Ac,  Ac. 

Any  number  sent  on  receipt  of  price,  by  any  stockdealer,  or  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers, 

PHILADELPHIA . 

[See  opposite  page.) 


DO  YOU  USE 


WAYMOUTH'S 

(DESIGNS    COPYRIGHTED.) 

OF  ALL  PICTURES,  THE  Thl  T  fl    TpTrF  IS  THE  M°ST  ARTISTIC, 

When  properly  printed.  But  the  clumsy  devices  generally  in  use  for  printing  them, 
or  rather  for  blending  the  shading  about  the  figure,  produce  but  very  few  really  artistic 
vignette  pictures.  Either  the  shading  is  too  intensely  dark,  not  gradated  in  tint  at  all,  or 
it  shows  an  ugly  direct,  decided  line,  which  is  very  repulsive.  The  shading  should 
blend  gradually  from  the  dark  tint  nearest  to  the  figure,  off  into  the 
white  background.  The  results  are  then  soft,  artistic,  and  beautiful.  The  easiest  and 
best  way  to  secure  them  is  by  the  use  of 

WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 

THEY  AKE  NOT  CLUMSY ;  DO  NOT  BREAK  ;  ARE  ALWAYS  READY ;  COST 
BUT  LITTLE,  AND  ARE  EASY  OF  APPLICATION  TO  ANY  NEGATIVE. 

THEY  NEED  BUT  ONE  ADJUSTMENT  TO  PRINT  ANY  QUANTITY. 

They  entirely  do  away  with  all  the  old  and  troublesome  methods,  either  wood,  metal, 
or  cotton. 

PLEASE  TRY  THE  SAMPLE  GIVEN  IN  THIS  MAGAZINE  FOR  FEB.  1874. 


Eighteen  sizes  are  now  made,  suiting  ail  dimensions  of  pictures  from  a  small  carte  figure 
to  "Whole-size,  Victorias,  Cabinets,  &c.  They  are  printed  in  black  for  ordinary  negatives, 
yellow  bronze  for  thin  negatives,  and  red  bronze  for  still  weaker  ones.  Directions  for  use 
accompany  each  parcel. 

IP  IR,  I  O  IE  S  : 

In  parcels  containing  one  of  each  size,  Nos.  1  to  15,  assorted  colors $1  00 

Assorted  sizes  and  colors,  by  number,  per  package  of  fifteen 1  00 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  assorted  sizes  and  colors,  for  Cartes,  by  number,  per  dozen 50 

"    6,  7, 11, 12,  and  13    "  "  "      Large  Cartes  and  Victorias,  by  number,  per  doz 75 

"    8,  9, 10,  14,  and  15    "  "  "     Cabinets  and  Whole-size,  "  "       1  00 

"    16,  17,  and  18,  "  "  "     Half  "  "  "  "      1  25 

(SEE  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

"When  ordering,  state  the  number  and  color  you  want.  The  Waymouth  Vignette  Papers 
are  an  English  invention,  and  are  becoming  so  universally  used  in  Europe  that  we  have 
pleasure  in  introducing  them  to  our  patrons. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers,  7th  and  Cherry,  PliMa. 

FOR   SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


IMPROVED 


PHOTOGRAPH  COVERS, 


Fig.  1. 


Fig.  2. 


Frequent  inquiries  for  something  at  a  much  lower  price  than  an  album,  for  the  holding- 
together  and  preservation  of  photographs,  has  induced  us  to  manufacture  an  article  which 
we  think  will  meet  the  want. 

IT  SERVES  ALL  THE  PURPOSES  OF  AN  ALBUM,  FOR 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Portraits, 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Landscapes, 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Photographs  of  any  hind, 

MAY  BE  NEATLY  AND  CHEAPLY  BOUND  IN  THESE  COVEKS. 

They  are  made  with  expanding  backs,  so  that  from  six  to  twenty-four  pictures  may  be 
inserted  in  one  cover.  The  pictures  are  mounted  in  the  usual  way,  and  then  strips  of  linen, 
or  strong  paper,  of  the  proper  width,  are  pasted  on  one  edge,  by  which  the  picture  is  inserted 
and  held  in  place  in  the  cover  by  a  paper  fastener.  Fig.  1  represents  the  cover,  with  the 
perforations  in  the  back,  through  which  the  spreading  clasps  of  the  paper  fastener  bind  the 
whole  together.  These  are  so  easily  inserted  or  removed,  that  pictures  are  readily  put  in  or 
taken  out  at  any  time.  Fig.  2  represents  the  picture,  with  the  guard  pasted  on  ready  for 
insertion.  The  arrangement  is  simple,  and  we  are  sure  will  be  readily  comprehended.  For 
binding  together  views  of  your  town  or  city,  or  portraits  of  celebrities,  they  are  very  neat. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  sizes  and  prices,  without  cards : 

For  Photograph.  Per  dozen.  Per  hundred. 

Card  Size, $1.50    ......  $10.00 

Cabinet  Size, 2.25 13.50 

EXTRA   HEAVY    COVEKS. 

5-8  Size, 4.50 33.00 

4-4      " 6.00 40.00 

8-10  " 8.00 56.50 

Larger  or  special  sizes  made  to  order.     Furnished  with  card  board  at  best  rates.     Samples 

mailed  at  dozen  price. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


JAMES  F.  MAGEE  &  CO 

MANUFACTURERS    OF 

PURE 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMICALS 

No.  108  North  Fifth  Street, 

ZPHIL.AJDIEaiilPIII.A.. 


Stock  Dealers  only  Supplied. 

SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT. 


ALL  PERSONS  ARE  HEREBY  NOTIFIED,  and  cautioned  against  infringing  my  Solar  Camera 
Patent. 

Infringers  will  settle  with  H.  L.  Emmons,   Attorney-at-Law,   Baltimore,   Md. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD, 

Baltimore,  Md. 

STEREOSCOPIC   VIEWS 

OF 

The  Catskill  Mountains,  Trenton  Falls,  H.  Y., 
Lake  Mohonk,  N.  Y„  &c,  &c. 

GREAT  VARIETY  AND  FIEST-CLASS  QUALITY. 

THE  TRADE  SUPPLIED  ON  REASONABLE  TERMS. 

J.  LOEFFLER,  Photographer,  Tompkinsville,  Staten  Island,  N.  Y. 


BALTIMORE ! 

THE  ATTENTION  OF  PHOTOGRAPHERS  is  invited  to  my  stock  of  photographic 
goods.     I  am  prepared  to  fill  all  orders,  large  or  small,  promptly  at  best  prices. 

AMiL  TME  M&WEEtTMM 

are  received  as  soon  as  by  any  one  in  the  market. 

AMONG  OTHER  THINGS, 

The  American  Optical  Co.'s  Apparatus, 
Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler, 
Chute's  Universal  Cameo  Press, 
Robinson's  Print-Trimmers  and  Guides, 
Morrison's  and  Steinheil's  View  Lenses, 
Waymouth's  Vignette  Papers, 
All  Makes  of  Portrait  Lenses, 
Chemicals,  Glass,  and  Frames, 

are  carefully  selected  for  my  special   sales.     My  expenses  are  light.     I  do  my  own  work 
personally,  and  can  supply  goods  as  low  as  the  next  one. 

A  trial  order  solicited.     Freight  and  expressage  from  Baltimore  very  low  to  any  point 
South  or  West. 

No.  7  No.  7  No.  7 

NORTH    CHARLES    STREET, 

BALTIMORE,  MD. 


G0VI££ 


MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

Nos.  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 

WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  STOCK 


BMJkMEMS  SUPPLIED 

On  the  Most  Advantageous  Terms,  with 

EVERY  ARTICLE  IN  THE  WORLD 

Used  or  sold  in  the  Art  of  Photography. 


Our  facilities  are  such  that  we  cannot  be  superseded  by  any 
other  house.    We  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to  deal  with  us. 


ASK  YOUR  DEALER  FOR  SCOVILL'S  GOODS. 


Removed  to  New  Store,  419  &  421  Broome  St. 

^Seen::^rrrmenls  "photographic  times." 


NEARLY  AXmXi  GONE! 


IC 


EDITED  BY  EDWARD  JL.  WILSON. 


This  favorite  annual  is  wholly  filled  with  Articles  prepared  expressly  for  it  by  the 
eminent  photographers  of  Europe  and  America,  and  is  Unusually  Good. 

Price,  in  Cloth,  $1.00 ;  in  Paper  Cover,  50  Cents. 


Tie  Best  Little  Handbook  of  Plotogranly  in  tie  World.      For  Sale  ly  all  Dealers, 

BENBBMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


POWERS     &     WEIGHTMAN, 


Ol 

© 

CXi 

s 

P*=- 

s 

£=) 

M 

tr3 

tzj 

t-1 

i=~ 

!=} 

tra 

MANUFACTURING  CHEMISTS, 


Offer  to  Stockdealers 
A  full  Assortment  of  Reliable 


Photographic  Chemicals 


Of  their  own  Manufacture, 
including  : 


Nitrate  of  Silver,  Sulphuric  Ether  (concentrated),  Ammonia  (concentrated), 
Bromide  of  Potassium,  Acetic  Acid,  Chemically  Pure  Acids, 
Iron  and  Ammonia  Proto-Sulphate,  Chloride  of  Gold, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  Sulphate  of  Iron,  Cyanide  of  Potassium, 
Chloroform,  Tannin,  Sulphuret  of  Potassium. 


GRAND   MEDAL  OF  MERIT 

A  WARDED  AT  VIENNA    TO 


SEND    FOR    A    OATALOfil'K. 


Charles  Bierstadt, 


Niagara  Falls,  N.Y. 


LANDSCAPE 
PHOTOGRAPHER, 

Trade  supplied  with  the  hest  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  Hudson  River,  Saratoga,  Partage, 
New  York,Watkins'  Glen,  Havana  Glen,  California,  Yosemite  Valley,  Rogers'  Statuary,  &c. 

LIESEGANG'S  ALBUMEN  PAPER 

Is  used  and  recommended  by  the  London  Stereoscopic  Company  ;  Messrs.  Alessandri  Fratelli, 
of  Rome  ;  Le  Lieure,  of  Rome  ;  A.  Sorgato,  of  Venice  ;  Fr.  Bruckmann,  of  Munich  ;  C.  Reut- 
linger,  of  Paris ;  C.  Bergamasio,  of  Petersburg ;  Abdullah,  of  Constantinople ;  and  many 
other  first  class  photographers  throughout  the  World. 

IT  IS  THE  BEST  PAPER  IN  THE  MARKET. 
Sample  sheets,  and  English,  French,  and  German  Price  List  to  be  had  free  on  application 
from  the  Manufacturer. 


DUSSELDORF    ON    THE    RHINE,   GERMANY, 

(FORMERLY  AT  ELBERFELD). 

For  Sale  by  SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  New  York. 


F.  G.  WELLER,  PUBLISHER  OF  STEREOSCOPIC  VIEWS 

OF  THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS  AND  VICINITY  AND  MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS, 

LITTLETON,  N.  H. 

SPECIALTY  :  WELLER'S  STEREOSCOPIC  TREASURES,  which  embrace  a  sereis  of  subject  pic- 
tures from  nature,  such  as  are  not  made  by  any  other  artist  in  the  country.  New  subjects  added  continually. 
Dealers  and  jobbers  supplied  on  favorable  terms. 


LANTERN  SLIDES. 


A  fine  stock  on  hand,  selected  from  home  and  foreign  catalogues,  embracing 


Views  of  all  Parts  of  the  World ! 


American  Trade  Agents  for  J.  Levy  &  Co.'s  Celebrated  Slides. 


PLAIN,  COLORED,  AND  00MI0 

LANTERN    SLIDES, 

OF  ALL  KINDS,  AT  LOW  PRICES. 

Superior  Slides  made  by  the  Woodbury  Process. 


SCIOPTICONS  AND  LANTERNS  SUPPLIED. 


EXAMINE  OUR  $100   LANTERN   OUTFIT. 

SELECTIONS  MADE  PERSONALLY.  PKICES  MOST  ADVANTAGEOUS. 


ALSO,  GLASS  STEREOSCOPIC  PICTURES, 

A  NEW  AND  BEAUTIFUL  SELECTION  JUST  EECEIVED. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Southwest  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


TO   PROFESSIONAL   PHOTOGRAPHERS    AND   THE   TRADE. 


CH.    DAUVOIS, 

Acknowledged  to  be  the  Best  and  Cheapest  in  the  World. 


No.  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris, 


ESPECIAL    MANUFACTURERS    OF 


MOUNTS^FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


TRADE    MARK,    Ch.D. 


Mounts  for  Cartes-de-Visite, 
Cabinet  Portrait, 
Victoria  Card, 

Stereoscopic  Views — all  new  samples  of  French 
styles. 


Bristol  Boards  of  every  size  and  thickness,  plain. 

India  Tinted  and  Fancy  Printing. 

Book-post  and  Card  Cases. 

Stout  Blotting  Paper  Albums. 

First-class  Rives  Albumenized  Paper,  <tc,  <tc. 


MEDALS  AWARDED  AT  EVERY  EXHIBITION. 

All  orders  are  to  be  sent  to  their  establishment,  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris,  or  to  Wholesale  Houses 
of  the  United  States.     Samples  on  application. 

LIBERAL  DISCOUNT  TO  WHOLESALE  HOUSES. 

TRY    IT    AND    BE    CONVINCED. 


The  best  COLLODION  in  use  is 

LEWIS  &  HOLT'S  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE, 

Sold  with  a  Printed  Formula  accompanying  each  Bottle. 

Being  among  the  first  in  this  country  to  make  Collodion  Pictures,  they  can  warrant  it  to  be  one 

of  the  best  in  use. 


ALSO,   THEIR 


ADAMANTINE  VARNISH  for  AiWypes,  Negatives,  aid  Melaiitjp. 

This  Varnish,  when  applied  to  Negatives,  dries  in  a  few  seconds  perfectly  hard,  and  does  not  lower  the 
intensity,  or  soften  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  in  Printing.  It  gives  a  beautiful  gloss  and  brilliancy  to 
Ambrotypes.    For  Sale  by  Stockdealers  generally.    Prepared  by  E.  A.  LEWIS 

160  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

HEADQUARTERS     FOR    THE     TRADE. 

Show  Displayers,  Velvet  Stands, 

Velvet  Passepartouts,         Velvet  Cases, 
Beveled  Matts,  Double  Matts, 

Fancy  Metal  Frames,  Standard  Matts, 

Fancy  Paper  Passepartouts. 

These  goods  are  entirely  of  our  own  manufacturing.  A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand  ;  odd 
sizes  and  styles  made  to  order. 

LEWIS  PATTBEBG  &  BRO.,  709  6M0  Broadway,  New  York. 


Photographic  Card  Warehouse. 


A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 

MANUFACTURERS, 

No.  18  South  Sixth  St.  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 

PHILADELPHIA. 


EVERYTHING  APPERTAINING  TO  THE   LINE   OF  OUR 

MANUFACTURES  FURNISHED  WITH  CARE 

AND  PROMPTNESS. 


S^°  Our  long  experience  in  and  facilities  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods,  and 
familiarity  with  the  peculiar  wants  of  Photographers,  enable  us  to  offer  superior  induce- 
ments to  those  who  may  favor  us  with  their  orders. 


hlaEGEmEN    JL    b 

IDE  II  THE  SOUR  CAMERA, 

AND  COPYING  DONE,  FOR  THE  TRADE. 


18  SOLAR   CAMERAS. 


EXPEDITIOUS.   ^'^Sffif'"'1   EXCELLENT 

ALBERT   MOORE, 

No.  828  Wood  Street,  Philadelphia. 


Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 

EGGSHELL,  GLOSSY,  CHOCOLATE-TINTED. 

(PATENTED   MARCH   1st,  1870.) 

ALL  SIZES,  FROM  1-9  to  10x14.  BLACK  AND  CHOCOLATE. 

THE  PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Worcester,  Mass., 

ARE  NOW  MAKING  THE  MOST  POPULAR  BRAND  OF  PLATES  IN  THE  TRADE. 


miOE     LIST 

Size, 

Eggshell. 

Glo&sy. 

Size. 

Eggshell, 

Glossy 

Per  Box  of  8  Doz. 

1-9 

$0.80 

$0.90 

Per  Box  of  2  Doz. 

4-4 

$2.40 

$2.70 

8     " 

1-6 

1.25 

1.35 

K            4     " 

5-7 

2.40 

2.70 

«            8     " 

1-4 

1.85 

2.00 

"            2     " 

7-10 

2.70 

2.90 

a             4     (c 

4Jx6J 

1.85 

2.00 

it            2     " 

8x10 

2.70 

2.90 

"            4     " 

1-2 

2.20 

2.35 

Per  Sheet, 

10x14 

.14 

.15 

"            2     " 

4^x10 

2.20 

2.35 

Ke vised,  New  York, 

December  28th,  1872 

EGGSHELL,    GLOSSY,    AND    CHOCOLATE-TINTED    PLATES,    ALL   SIZES   AND    STYLES, 
ALWAYS    ON    HAND    AND   READY   FOR   DELIVERY. 

Each  package  of  Phenix  Plates  has  printed  on  the  wrapper,  "Manufactured 

by  the  Phenix  Plate  Co.,  Worcester,  Mass.,"  and  none 

are  genuine  unless  bearing  that  stamp. 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  constitu- 
ting them  our  sole  and  exclusive  agents  for  the  sale  of  our  Plates. 

That  company  is  so  well  and  favorably  known  in  the  business,  that  no  com- 
mendation of  ours  is  required  to  assure  the  Trade  that  they  will  be  liberally 
dealt  with  in  every  respect. 

Fkerii  Plates  are  for  sale  ly  all  Stock  Dealers  ttronglioiit  the  country. 

PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Manufacturers, 

Worcester,  Mass. 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  Apts  for  tie  Me,  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  N.  Y. 


The  publishers  of  the  "PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER,  encouraged  by  the 
growing  interest  taken  in  their  PREMIUM  LIST,  by  operators,  printers,  employees,  etc., 
offer  the  following 

PREMIUMS  FOR  1874, 

FOR  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS 


CONDITIONS!  These  premiums  are  only  given  to  old  or  present  subscribers  for 
new  ones.     No  premium  will  be  given  you  on  your  own  renewal. 


WE  WILL  GIVE  FOR  THREE  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  (IN  ADDITION  TO 
YOUR  OWN),  EOR  ONE  YEAR, 

Vols.  I  &  II  of  the  Photographic  World ! 


TWO  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  FOR  ONE  YEAR, 


Either  Volume  I  or  II  of  the  Photographic  World, 


Or  your  choice  of  the  following  :  $1  on  each  per  year,  payable  in  any  of  our  publications, 
not  in  cash;  i.  e.,  $10  will  secure  our  Magazine  for  one  year  to  an  old  subscriber,  to  a  new  one, 
and  one  dollar's  viorth  of  our  other  publications. 

Any  enterprising  operator  can,  by  writing  a  few  letters  and  a  little  effort,  secure  enough 
new  subscribers  to  pay  for  his  own,  and  fit  him  out  with  our  whole  list  of  premiums,  or  a 
set  of  the  six  Luckhardt pictures.     (See  special  advertisement.) 

This  magnificent  offer  was  never  equalled  by  any  publisher,  photographic  or  otherwise. 
Strive  hard  to  win  the  whole  ! 

Please  examine  the  order  blanks  in  this  number,  and  send  for  more  if  you  wish  them. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 


hiladelphia  photographer, 


Is  admitted  by  all  who  understand  such  things  to  be 

The  Livest  and  Best  Photographic  Magazine  Published ! 

IT    PUBLISHES 

A  Handsome  Specimen  Photograph  in  each  issue, 
The  Latest  Photographic  News  from  home  sources, 

Monthly  Letters  from  England,  France,  Germany,  and  Italy, 
Correspondence  from  all  parts  of  the  World, 

Illustrations  on  Wood  of  all  sorts  of  Articles  used  in  the  Art, 
Processes,  Formulae,  Wrinkles  and  Dodgss,  without  number, 
The  Earliest  Information  on  all  matters  of  use  to  its  readers, 
Elaborate  Drawings  of  Skylights  in  all  parts  of  the  World, 

AND 

EACH  MONTHLY  ISSUE  IS  A  PHOTOGRAPHIC  WORK  IN  ITSELF. 

BE    ASSURED 

NO  PHOTOGRAPHER  CAN  AFFORD  TO  DO  WITHOUT  IT. 


NOW  IN  ITS  ELEVENTH  YEAR.     SAMPLE  COPIES  FREE. 


Please  read  what  we  give  for  new  subscribers  as 

PREMIUMS  ON  THE  OPPOSITE  PAGE 


NOTICE   TO    SUBSCRIBERS. 


Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2  50  for  six  months,  50  cents  per  copy.     Positively  in  advance. 

In  remitting  by  mail  a  post-office  order,  or  draft  payable  to  the  order  of  Benerman  &  Wilson,  is 
preferable  to  bank  notes.      Clearly  give   your  Post-office,   County,  and  State. 

Canada  subscribers  must  remit  24  cents  extra,  to  prepay  postage.  Foreign  subscriptions  must  be 
accompanied  by  the  postage  in  addition. 

Advertising  sheets  are  bound  with  each  number  of  the  Magazine.  Advertisements  are  inserted 
at  the  following  rates : 

One  Month.  Six  Months.  One  Year. 

One  Page, $20  00  $110  00  $200  00 

Half    "       12  00  66  00  120  00 

Quarter  Page, 7  00  38  50  70  00 

Eighth        "      4  00  22  00  40  00 

(Jards,  of  Six  lines  or  less, 2  00  11  00  20  00 

The  attention  of  advertisers,  and  those  having  galleries,  &c,  for  sale,  is  called  to  our  Specialties 
pages.  Terms  $2  for  six  lines,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a  line,  always 
in  advance.  Duplicate  insertions,  50  cents  less,  each.  Sure  to  pay.  g^°Operators  desiring  situa- 
tions, no  charge. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

OFFICE,  S.  W.  COR.  OF  SEVENTH  AND  CHEEEY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


ENTREKIN'S 

OSCILLATING  EN  AM 


GIVING    A 


BURNISHING      MSfgS£ff*%     BEAUTIFUL 
PHOTOGRAPHS  dBE2fi||g     fell!  &  GLOSS 

Far    superior    to    any-  ^^^^-Kpg|^|i^g|        '  ^  =^=^_  Every     Machine     war- 

thing    yet- invented    for   "  _        ^^^s^C^TSE?  .  ===jjp)   ~"  ^=^[_  ranted  perfect, 

that  purpose.  ^s^ftl^;  1~:  ■_'_  -_,-__^-\  .-_±-^y^   --------- ^-^^Ht^^""" 

The  Oscillating  Enameler  is  constructed  on  scientific  principles,  and  in  the  operation  of  burnishing  the 
roll  and  burnisher  both  move,  giving  a  combined  action  on  the  face  of  the  photograph,  and  producing  a  fine 
finish  with  a  very  light  pressure,  so  that  enameled  mounts  can  be  burnished,  as  well  as  plain  mounts.  This 
fact  alone  makes  the  Enameler  superior  to  all  other  machines  for  burnishing  photographs.  The  reason  why 
it  is  the  best,  the  double  action  of  roll  and  burnisher  prevents  the  card  from  sticking  on  the  burnisher;  it 
also  prevents  the  burnisher  from  scratching  the  albumen  off  the  face  of  the  picture  and  spoiling  it,  as  is  the 
case  in  similar  machines.  The  oscillating  motion  of  the  burnisher  feeds  the  card  and  keeps  the  burnisher 
polished.  Equal  pressure  at  both  ends  of  the  burnisher  is  another  great  advantage,  which  prevents  the 
card  from  turning  while  in  the  operation  of  burnishing,  as  is  the  case  in  other  machines.  The  mechanism  of 
the  pressure  is  certain,  and  can  be  operated  in  an  instant  correctly. 

The  removable  burnisher  is  another  great  advantage,  givfhg  the  photographer  the  opportunity  of  having 
several,  so  that  if  one  becomes  injured  it  can  immediately  be  removed  and  replaced  with  another  one,  causing 
no  delay.    SOLD  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

PKEOB    LIST: 

6  inch  Roll,  $25 ;  10  inch,  $40 ;  14  inch,  $50 ;  18  inch,  $75. 


PHOTOGRAPHERS!  TAKE  NOTICE! 

Whereas  certain  parties  are  advertising  that  they  will  prosecute  all  photographers  who 
make  Burnished  Photographs  on  other  than  their  primitive  machines,  you  are  hereby 
notified  that  it  is  believed  that  such  advertisements  are  intended  to  prevent  the  sale  of  Entrekin's 
Oscillating  Enameler.  The  parties  thus  advertising  are  hereby  dared  to  prosecute  any  one 
using  my  Enameler,  or  the  inventor  and  manufacturer  thereof. 

Entrekin's  Patent  Oscillating  Enameler  is  the  only  patent  Burnisher  in  existence 
that  covers  the  principle  of  a  Burnishing  machine,  as  in  its  double  action 
on  the  face  of  the  photograph,  it  breaks  lines,  and  produces  a  burnish 
which  cannot  be  obtained  on  any  other  machine  yet  invented,  as  all  other  so 
called  Burnishers  are  only  Polishing  presses,  and  not  Burnishers.  Burnish-finished  photo- 
graphs can  only  be  produced  on  a  machine  constructed  on  the  principle  of  ?ny  patent  Oscillating 
Enameler.  Said  patent  is  valid,  and  all  Photographers  can  use  my  Burnisher,  as  I  will 
protect  all  in  its  use.  1  am  fully  prepared  to  meet  any  parties  in  law,  or 
in  any  other  way  they  may  think  proper,  as  I  shall  soon  claim  a  royalty 
on  all  machines  using  a  hinged  plate,  in  connection  with  a  friction  feed 
roll.  All  such  presses  now  in  use  are  infringements  on  my  patent,  and 
I  am  contesting  that  point  in  the  United  States  Patent  Office. 

W.  G.  ENTREKIN, 

Inventor  and  Patentee  of  Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler. 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 

Trade  Agents  for  Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler. 


/ 


Address  ALL  Communications,  both  for  the  Editor  and  the  Publishers,  to  Sherman's 
Building,  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


Number  128. 


50  Cents. 


THE 


PHILADELPHIA 


It0t00ra#tti(t\ 


AN  ILLUSTRATED  MONTHLY  JOURNAL, 


DEVOTED  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


THE  OFFICIAL  ORGAN  OP  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGEAPHIO 
ASSOCIATION  OP  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. 


August,      1874. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

BENEEMAN    &    WILSON, 

PUBLISHERS. 


Subscriptions  received  by  all  News  and  Stock-Dealers. 

FIVE  DOLLARS  PER  ANNUM,  IN  ADVANCE. 


Sherman  &  Co.,  Printers,  Philadelphia. 


SOMETHING   NEW !     See  Advertisement  inside. 


SUMMARY    OF    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

The  Chicago  Convention 225 

Views  Ahroad  and  Across.    By  Edward  L.  Wilson,  225 
The  Enameled  Cameo  Souvenir  or  Glacg  Portrait 

Process.    By  E.  D.  Ormsby 231 

Albumen  Chloro-bromide  Process.  By  M.  Carey  Lea,  232 

Rambling  Remarks.    By  John  L.  Gihon 232 

Class  in  Landscape  Photography 235 

Art  Studies  for  All 236 

Medallion  Masks  for  Ferrotypes 237 

Baths,  etc.    By  W.  H.  Potter 238 

Photography  in  France.    By  Ernest  Lacan 239 


PAGE 

The  Sixth  Annual  Convention  and  Exhibition  of 

the  N.  P.  A 241 

Matters  of  the  N.  P.  A 245 

On  Reproducing  Negatives 245 

The  Practical  Printer 247 

German  Correspondence.    By  Prof.  H.  Vogel,  Ph.D.  249 
Notes  In  and  Out  of  the  Studio.    By  G.  Wharton 

Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A 251 

Our  Picture 253 

Editor's  Table 254 


Embellishment. — A  Competing  Prize  Picture.    Negatives  and  Prints  by  J.  Barhydt,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s  Paper. 

Anderson,  J.  A.    Photographic  Apparatus. 

Anthony  &  Co.,  E.  &  H.  T.    The  Bowdish  Chair. 

Art  Publications. 

Beard,  J.  P.    Photographic  Goods. 

Benerman  &  Wilson.    Lantern  Slides. 

Bierstadt,  Charles.    Photo.  Views. 

Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

Brand  &  Co.,  E.  L.    Souvenir  Photogra  hs. 

Bullock  &  Crenshaw.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Cameo  Press,  The  Universal. 

Clemons,  Jno.  R.    Albumen  Paper.    Varnish. 

Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  A.  M.    Photograph  Cards. 

Cooper  &  Co.,  Chas.    Portrait  Lenses. 

Curtis,  G.  E.    Stereo.  Views. 

Damaged  Lantern  Slides. 

Dean,  John  &  Co.    Adamantean  Ferrotype  Plates. 

Entrekin,  W.  G.    Oscillating  Enameler. 

Faser,  C.    Frames. 

French,  B.  &  Co.    Voigtlander  Lenses,  &c. 

Gennert,  G.    Albumen  Paper,  &c. 

Gihon,  John  L.    Opaque  and  Cut-Outs. 

Griswold's  Life  Compositions  for  the  Stereoscope. 

Hance's  Photo.  Specialties. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs. 

Improved  Photograph  Covers. 

Kilburn  Bros.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Lea's  Manual  of  Photography. 

Lewis,  R.  A.    Collodion. 

Liesegang,  E.    Albumen  Paper, 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 

Loeffler,  J.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Losscher  &  Petsch.    A  New  Invoice  of  Studies. 

Marion  &  Co.    Specialties. 

Magee,  James  F.  &  Co.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Marcy's  Sciopticon,  &c. 

Masonic  Temple,  Philadelphia.    Stereo.  Views. 

McAllister,  W.  Mitchell.    Manufacturing  Ontician. 

McCollin,  Thos.  H.    Photographic  Materials. 

Moore,  Albert.    Solar  Printing. 


Mosaics,  1874. 

Moulton,  L.  V.    Rapid  Photo-Washer. 
Nason's  Background  Carriage,  Camera  Stand,  &c. 
Newell's  Improved  Bath-Holder. 
Pattberg,  Lewis  &  Bro.    Passepartouts,  &c. 
Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 
Photographer's  Pocket  Reference-Book. 
Photographic  Publications. 
Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 
Powers  &  Weightman.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Premiums  for  1874,  for  New  Subscribers  to  "Philadel- 
phia Photographer.'' 
Prize  Pictures. 

Rau,  Geo.    German  Albumen  Colors. 
Rice  &  Thompson.    Photo.  Stock  House. 
Robinson's  New  Photo.  Trimmer. 
Robinson's  Metallic  Guides. 
Rohaut  &  Hutinet.    Photographic  Mounts. 
Ross'  Portrait  and  View  Lenses. 
Ryan,  D.  J.    Photo.  Stock  Depot,  Chromos,  &c. 
Sauter,  G.    Passepartouts. 
Schwarze  &  Valk.    Photo,  Papers. 
Scovill  Manf'g.  Co.    Photographic  Materials. 
"S.  D."  Camera  Boxes. 

Seavey  L.  W.    Scenic  Artist,  Backgrounds,  &c. 
Snelling,  H.  H.    Lebanon  Rustic  Frame. 
"Something  New." 
Steinheil's  New  Aplanatic  Lenses. 
Stevens,  Chas.  W.    Photographic  Goods. 
The  Practical  Printer. 
Vogel's  Hand-Book  of  Photography. 
Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papers. 
Weller's  Stereoscopic  Treasures. 
Wilson,  Charles  A.    Photographic  Goods. 
Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials,  &c. 
Willy  Wallach.    Albumen  Paper. 
Woodward,  D.  A.    Solar  Cameras. 
Zentmayer,  Joseph.    Lenses. 
Zimmerman  Bros.    Photographic  Stock  Depot. 


HERMAGIS' 

Celebrated  French 


JECTIVES 


These  celebrated  lenses,  which  are 

USED  BY  MONS.  ADAM  SALOMON,  OF  PARIS, 

exclusively  for  making  his 

WORLD-RENOWNED  PORTRAITS! 

have  been  difficult  to  get,  on  account  of  the  demand  for  them  in  Europe. 

Having  been  appointed  his  American  trade  agents  by  Mons.  Hermagis,  we  have  pleasure 
in  announcing  to  American  photographers  that  we  have  just  received  an  invoice  of  his 
lenses  for 

The  Salomon  Style,  8x10  size, 

For  Cabinet  Size,  extra  quick, 

For  Cabinet  Size,  quick, 

For  Carte  Size,  extra  quick, 

For  Carte  Size,  quick, 

AND 

HERMAGIS'  NEW  SYSTEM  1PUUTIC  LENSES  FOR  VIEWS. 


Also,  HERMAGIS'  INIMITABLE  FOCUSING  GLASSES. 


These  lenses  are  unsurpassed  by  any  other.     For  further  particulars  and  prices,  apply  to 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


NASON'S  NOVELTIES 

LEAD  THE  VAN! 

ORDERS  FOR  30T'   GASES    0F   THE 

'NASONIAN  CUT-OUTS" 

Were  taken  at  Chicago  in  two  days — Thursday  and  Friday — and  on  our  arrival  home  the 
following  Wednesday,  we  found  NINETEEN  letters,  containing  orders  from  parties  who 
saw  the  beautiful  specimens  on  exhibition. 

The  Nasonian  is  the  latest  novelty  in  ornamental  printing,  and  exactly  fills  a  want  long 
felt,  and  will  have  a  larger  and  quicker  sale  than  any  other  one  article  ever  offered  the 
American  Photographer  ;  for  the  simple  reason  that  they  are  sold  so  low. 

There  is  no  cut-out  in  the  market  that  is  got  up  or  put  up  in  as  good  style  as  the  Nasonian. 
The  paper  used  is  of  a  superior  non-actinic  quality.  The  designs  (copyrighted)  are  unique 
and  novel,  and  at  the  same  time  neat  and  artistic. 

Through  the  suggestions  of  Messrs.  Rocher,  Mosher,  Brand,  and  other  leading  photogra- 
phers, we  have  added  two  new  Grecian  designs,  and  will  hereafter  put  them  up  in  THREE, 
instead  of  two  different  sized  cases,  viz: 

CASE  ONE  contains  80  pieces — 40  complete  cut-outs,  20  sizes,  and  10  different  styles — 
for  carte-de-visites  only. 

CASE  TWO  contains  same  number  and  styles  as  the  above,  but  with  3^  x  4|,  to  3Jx  5^ 
openings,  suitable  for  cabinet  cards,  4-4  and  8x  10  frames. 

CASE  THREE  contains  same  styles  as  above,  but  with  5x7,  5J  x  7J,  and  6x8  openings, 
suitable  for  4-4,  8  x  10,  10  x  12,  and  11  x  14  frames. 

EACH  CASE  contains  cut-outs  especially  arranged  for  groups,  and  are  sold  at  the 
extreme  low  price  of  two  dollars. 

ALWAYS  try  to  be  the  first  in  introducing  NEW  STYLES  to  your  patrons;  and  if 
your  dealer  is  not  enterprising  enough  to  have  these  goods  in  stock  now,  don't  wait,  but 
enclose  two  dollars  to  us,  and  you  will  get  either  set  wanted  by  return  mail  so  quick  you'll 
think  you've  had  them  six  months. 

We  will  send  the  THREE  SETS  COMPLETE  to  any  part  of  America  (express  paid) 
on  receipt  of  $6.00. 

We  have  taken  great  care  in  arranging  and  packing  these  cut-outs  in  elegant  pasteboard 
cases,  therefore  we  cannot  change  or  break  packages. 

ORDERS  FOR  THE  ABOVE,  AND  FOR 

Nason's  Background  Carriage,  Universal  Light  Modifier, 
Non-Ague  Camera  Stand,  Magic  Mirror,  &c, 

Will  receive  prompt  attention  by  being  addressed  to  the 

NASON  NOVELTY  COMPANY, 

«&*  See  our  other  advertisements.  COL  TJjjLIi  ITS;    OHIO> 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES. 

AEE  SOLD  BY  ALL  DEALERS  AS  FOLLOWS  : 

Hanfce's  Double  Iodized  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1  50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Elbert  Anderson's  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.75 Half-pound,  90  Cts. 

Hance's  White  Mountain  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Curtis'  Niagara  Falls  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Hance's  Peculiar  Portrait  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Trask's  Ferrotype  Collodion, 

Per  pound,  $1.50 Half-pound,  80  Cts. 

Cummings'  Grit  Varnish, 

Per  Bottle, 40  Cts. 

Hance's  Silver  Spray  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Delicate  Cream  Gun  Cotton, 

Per  Ounce, 80  Cts. 

Gill's  Concentrated  Chromo  Intensifies 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute, 

Per  Bottle, 50  Cts. 

Hance's  Bath  Preservative  Head ^isi^t™***, 

Per  Bottle, 1  00. 

TRADE  MARK :— THE  BEST  GOODS— FULL  MEASURE. 

TRY  HANCE'S  PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES. 

See  Testimonials  in  former  and  future  advertisements. 

SCOVILL  MF'G  00.,  Trade  Ag'ts.       ALFEED  L.  HANCE,  Manufac'r, 

NEW  YOEK.  126  N.  7th  St.,  Philadelphia. 


BELOW  IS  A  F  AC-SIMILE  OF  THE  LABEL  USED  OM  HAIVCE'S  JVEW 
DOUBLE  IODIZED  COLLODION.— BE  SURE  YOU  TRY  IT. 

I  can  confidently  recommend  it  as  being  possessed  of  very  superior  advantages 
over  any  other  Collodion,  but  not  desiring  to  say  too  much  about  my  own  pro- 
ductions, respectfully  request  portrait  photographers  to  try  it.  The  advantages 
of  a  Collodion  made  with  these  new  salts  is  spoken  of  by  several  leading  pho- 
tographers, as  follows : 

""  Although  I  have  made  use,  extensively,  of  other  iodides,  I  have  never  found  any  collo- 
dion to  give  such  perfect  satisfaction  as  this  does  after  it  has  hecome  ripe.  **  *  *  Like  good 
wine,  it  improves  with  age." — J.  Cakbtjtt. 

"  For  fineness  of  film,  exquisite  detail,  and  the  production  of  good  printing  qualities,  I 
have  never  seen  it  equalled." — K.  J.  Chute. 


>> 

o 

r& 

oj 

03 

rO 

i— i 

-- 

3 

p 

o 

b/) 

© 

U 
03 

ft 

K 

Fh 

o 

Ui 

o 

> 

0. 

a 

p 

O 

03 

-1 

o 

c 

Ui 

a 

o 

03 

> 

o 

<M 

c3 

s 

O 

id 

1— 1 

O 

O 

o 

r+* 

,£5 

be 

T3 

3 

Q. 

1 

,  1, 

O 

C 

03 

o 

o 

c 

s 

rG 

Ph 

£ 

=    < 

o 
o 

5 

IK>STOi£«: 


Kone  genuine  without  the  signature  of  the  manufacturer 
over  the  cork. 

ALFRED  L.  HANCE,  Philadelphia. 


a 

P 

(X 

C5 

B 

Fh        P 
bC      C 

T3 

ec 

i— 

F-i 

03 

CJ 

< 
o 

1          ■ 

> 

Ph 

X 

02 

d 

< 

O 

£ 

00 

o 

F- 

1— 1 

►S 

> 

£ 

o 

a 

£ 

£►> 

.C 

el 

„     n3 

bJO 

+■ 

F- 

O 

a 

a 

h- 1 

02 

4. 

a 

£ 

£ 

HANGED    BATH    PRESER¥1TI¥E. 

If  you  would  escape  the  worries  and  vexations  of  the  dark-room,  use  it.     Messrs.  R.  Newell 
&  Son  say :  "  We  have  doctored  these  haths  with  your  Preservative ;  it  is  invaluable." 


HANCE'S  BATH  PRESERVA- 
TIVE. Knowing  the  difficulties  photog- 
raphers encounter  in  the  use  of  the  negative 
hath,  arising  from  various  causes,  and  often 
beyond  the  comprehension  or  ability  of  the 
operator  to  solve,  I  have  sought  for  some- 
thing that  would  not  only  cure,  but  prevent, 
many  of  the  ills  that  negative  baths  are  sub- 
ject to. 

In  the  "  British  Journal  of  Photography" 
of  last  year,  Mr.  A.  L.  Henderson  recom- 
mended the  use  of  nitrate  of  barytes  as  of 
great  advantage  in  the  bath.  Acting  upon 
this  suggestion,  and  taking  the  nitrate  of 
barytes  as  a  basis,  I  have  prepared  a  com- 
pound which  I  offer  to  the  fraternity  as  a 
Bath  Preservative. 

It  is  a  trite  saying  that  an  ounce  of  preven- 


tive is  worth  a  pound  of  cure,  and  I  pre- 
sume all  photographers  would  appreciate 
the  principle,  and  apply  the  preventive  if  it 
were  within  their  reach.  This  Preservative 
has  been  proved  to  keep  the  bath  in  good 
working  condition  almost  indefinitely.  By 
its  use  the  bath  is  worked  with  much  less 
acid,  consequently  is  more  sensitive,  streaks 
and  stains  are  avoided,  no  pinholes  from 
an  excess  of  iodide,  and  redevelopment  is 
seldom  necessary.  Disordered  baths  are  at 
once  restored,  and  an  occasional  evaporation 
and  strengthening  only  is  necessary  to  keep 
them  in  working  condition.  Photographers 
will  find  this  a  great  boon.  Try  it  and  be 
convinced. 

Full   directions    for   use   accompany  the 
Preservative. 


ALFRED  L,  HANCE,  Manufacturer,  126  North  Seventh  St.,  Phila. 


WHAT  ARE  NANCE'S  PHOTOGRAPHIC  SPECIALTIES  ? 


HANCE'8  BATH  PRESERVA- 
TIVE. A  sure  preventive  of  pinholes, 
stains,  &c.  It  preserves  the  bath  in  good 
working  condition,  and  will  be  found  worth 
its  weight  in  gold. 

HANCE'S  DOUBLE  IODIZED 

COLLODION.  This  is  made  by  com- 
pounding the  different  iodides  according  to 
their  equivalents,  and  producing  a  new  salt. 
It  is  being  used  by  some  of  the  best  photog- 
raphers, but  its  general  use  is  retarded,  no 
doubt,  by  the  extra  trouble  in  making  it. 
The  peculiarities  of  this  Collodion  are  good 
keeping  qualities,  its  improvement  by  age, 
and  the  richness  of  effect  produced  in  the 
negative,  the  film  being  perfectly  structure- 
less. As  it  requires  time  to  ripen,  I  have 
the  advantage  of  making  a  quantity  and 
keeping  it  always  ready  to  supply  any  de- 
mand. 

ELBERT  ANDERSON'S  POR- 
TRAIT COLLODION  is  made  ac- 
cording to  the  formula  used  by  Mr.  Ander- 
son in  Mr.  Kurtz's  gallery  in  New  York. 
It  is  especially  adapted  to  portrait  work. 

Owing  to  the  cost  of  materials,  manufac- 
turing, <fec,  together  with  the  royalty  paid, 
the  above  brand  of  Collodion  will  be  ad- 
vanced May  1st  from  $1.50  to  $1.75  per  ft). 
All  interested  will  please  take  notice. 

A.  L.  Hance. 

HANCE'S  "WHITE  MOUNTAIN 
COLLODION  is  adapted  more  especially 
to  outdoor  work,  and  for  quick  working, 
delineating  foliage,  frost-work,  or  sky,  it 
stands  unrivalled.  It  is  made  after  the  for- 
mula used  by  that  celebrated  mountain 
artist,  B.  W.  Kilburn,  of  Littleton,  N.  H., 
whose  work  is  too  well  known  to  need  any 
comments. 

CURTIS'  NIAGARA  FALLS 

COLLODION  is  another  used  for  land- 
scapes. The  wonderfully  beautiful  views 
made  by  Mr.  Curtis,  of  the  great  cataract, 
with  this  collodion,  have  a  worldTwide  repu- 
tation, and  are  an  indisputable  evidence 
that  he  could  have  nothing  better  to  pro- 
duce such  magnificent  work. 

HANCE'S  PECULIAR  POR- 
TRAIT COLLODION  is  peculiar  in 
that  it  is  prepared  without  bromides,  and  is 
adapted  for  use  with  Black's  acid  bath. 
To  those  using  the  acid  bath  this  collodion 
is  indispensable.    Formula  on  the  bottle. 


TRASH'S  FERROTYPE  COL- 
LODION is  made  especially  for  positive 
pictures.  Mr.  Trask  has  no  superior  in  this 
class  of  work,  and  this  collodion  is  the  result 
of  his  practice  and  experience  for  years  in 
proving  what  was  BEST.  It  is  made  after 
his  formula  and  ferrotypers  will  find  it  all 
that  can  be  desired. 

CUMMINGS'   GRIT  VARNISH 

gives  a  very  fine  surface  for  retouching. 
Those  that  use  a  varnish  of  this  kind  will 
find  that  this  has  no  superior.  By  it  the 
retouching  is  greatly  facilitated  and  the 
same  amount  of  work  on  a  negative  may 
be  done  with  it  in  half  the  time  that  would 
be  required  without  it. 

HANCE'S  SILVER  SPRAY 
GUN  COTTON  is  now  being  used  by 
many  of  the  best  photographers,  and  the 
testimonials  I  am  receiving  are  sufficient 
evidence  of  its  excellence.  I  prepare  it  with 
great  care,  and  warrant  it  free  from  acid, 
very  soluble,  gives  good  intensity  so  that 
no  redevelopment  is  necessary,  gives  perfect 
detail,  and  a  film  pure  and  structureless. 

HANCE'S  DELICATE  CREAM 
GUN  COTTON  is  adapted  to  those  who 
like  a  very  delicate,  soft-working  collodion, 
giving  all  the  modelling  especially  in  the 
Rembrandt  style,  and  with  light  drapery. 
Its  sensitiveness  renders  it  particularly 
adapted  for  children,  or  any  work  that  re- 
quires short  exposure. 

GILL'S  CONCENTRATED 
CHROMO  INTENSIFIER  is  in- 
tended to  strengthen  the  negative.  It  im- 
parts a  beautiful  tone  and  gives  excellent 
printing  qualities. 

HANCE'S  GROUND-GLASS 
SUBSTITUTE  is  simply  what  its  name 
implies,  a  substitute  for  ground-glass  for 
any  purpose  that  it  is  used  for  in  the  gallery. 
It  is  so  perfect  an  imitation  of  ground-glass 
that  it  can  only  be  distinguished  by  the 
closest  scrutiny.  Its  surface  is  so  fine  that 
it  is  just  the  thing  for  cameras,  and  it  is 
being  used  now  very  extensively  for  that 
purpose.  To  the  landscape  photographer 
a  bpttle  of  it  is  indispensable.  .  If  he  breaks 
his  ground-glass,  which  often  happens  in  the 
field,  he  has  only  to  coat  a  plate,  such  as  he 
is  sure  to  have  with  him  for  negatives,  with 
the  substitute,  and  in  a  few  moments  his 
ground-glass  is  replaced  and  his  work  goes 
on.  It  is  equally  useful  in  the  printing 
room,  and  any  photographer  who  has  once 
used  it  will  never  again  be  without  it. 


ROUND  GLA 


SUBSTITUTE. 


The  SUBSTITUTE  is  in  the  form  of  a  varnish ;  is  flowed  and  dried  the  same  as  varnish, 
but  dries  with  a  granulated  or  ground-glass  surface. 

WHEREVER  GROUND  GLASS  IS  REQUIRED, 
HANCE'S  SUBSTITUTE  ANSWERS  EVERY  JPUBPOSE. 

FOE  GEOUND  GLASSES  FOE  CAMEEAS, 

FOE  GLAZING  SKY  AND  SIDE-LIGHTS, 

FOE  OBSCUEING  STUDIO  AND  OFFICE  DOOES, 
FOE  FEINTING  WEAK  NEGATIVES 
FOE  VIGNETTE  GLASSES, 

FOE  A  EETOUCHING  VAENISH, 

FOE  SOFTENING  STEONG  NEGATIVES, 

FOE  THE  CELEBEATED  BERLIN  PROCESS. 

Use  the  "  Substitute."        Use  the  "  Substitute." 

PRICE,  FIFTY  CENTS  PER  BOTTLE. 


LARGE  QUANTITIES  FOR  STUDIO  LIGHTS,  &c,  SUPPLIED  LOW. 
EEAD  A  FEW  TESTIMONIALS: 

Youngstown,  Ohio,  Jan.  27,  1873. 

The  bottle  of  Hance's  Ground  Glass  Substitute  came  safely  to  hand.    I  selected  a  good  piece  of  glass,  coated  it  with  the 

Substitute,  and  in  a  few  moments  I  had  one  of  the  finest  ground  glasses  I  ever  saw.    I  have  been  using  it  four  or  five  days, 

and  the  more  I  use  it  the  more  I  am  pleased  with  it.    The  "surface  "  is  fine  and  delicate,  and  a  great  relief  to  the  eyes. 

I  would  not  be  without  a  bottle  for  ten  dollars.  Lon  Blackburn,  Operator,  Le  Roy's  Gallery. 

R.  Newell  &  Son's  Gallery,  626  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia,  Feb.  17th,  1873. 
I  have  been  frequently  asked  to  recommend  some  new  article  or  preparation  used  in  our  business,  but  have  very  rarely  con- 
sented to  do  so  from  the  fact  that  many  things  that  "promise  very  fair,"  after  thorough  trial,  prove  worthless.  Having  used 
your  different  preparations  of  Collodions,  Intensifiers,  and  Varnish  for  the  past  six  months  in  my  gallery,  I  can  conscien- 
tiously pronounce  them  first-class  in  every  respect.  Your  Ground  Glass  Substitute  I  consider  one  of  the  most  practical  and 
useful  articles  I  have  ever  used,  and  no  photographer  who  has  learned  its  value  for  coating  the  backs  of  thin  negatives,  or 
making  ground  glass  for  the  camera  box,  would  ever  be  without  it.  I  have  found  so  many  ways  of  using  it  to  advantage 
that  I  shall  hereafter  order  it  by  the  gallon.  Yours  truly, 

.  R.  Newell 


HA 


TRY 
NCE'S    BATH   PRESERVATIVE, 


PRICE,  $1.00. 
guarantees  regular  and  good  results. 


J.  P.  BEARD  &  Co 


WE  MANUFACTURE 

New  PEERLESS  COLLODION 

FOR  FERROTYPES, 

PEERLESS  COLLODION 

FOR  NEGATIVES, 

EUREKA  YARNISH 

FOR  NEGATIVES, 

EUREKA  VARNISH 

FOR  FERROTYPES, 

AND 

J.  P.  B.CHLORIDEof&OLD. 


WE 
ARE 
'AGENTS 
FOR  THE 

ORTHWEST 

FOR 


PATENT 

OSCILLATING 


WE  HAVE  THE 
HIGHEST 


WE  ARE  HEADQUARTERS 
FOR  THE 


FOR 
THE  ABOVE. 

TRY 
THEM! 


Q*/  AM.  OPT.  CO.'S 

^/APPARATUS. 

m  AND  EVERYTHING-  PERTAINING-  to  the  ART  OF  PHOTOGRAPHY. 

IS^EtEMEMBER^^fT 

WE  POSITIVELY  WILL  NOT  BE 

UNDERSOLD  BY  ANY  HOUSE 

IN  THE  NORTHWEST. 

•/CHICAGO,  ILLS.  I 

aammmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmamammmmmmmmmammmmmmmmmmmmmamB 


THE  PRACTICAL 


A  new  work  on  Photographic  Printing  is 
ENTITLED 

THE  PRACTICAL  PRINTER, 

By   CHAS.  W.   HEARN, 

A  gentleman  who  has  devoted  several  years  to  photographic  printing  especially,  and  who  is 
now  engaged  at  it  as  his  constant  occupation. 

The  work  gives  all  the  instructions  that  a  beginner  could  possiblj'  want 
in  detail,  and  is  what  the  title  indicates — practical. 

It  will  also  be  found  of  invaluable  service  to  any  photographic  printer,  be 
he  ever  so  skilled. 

Too  little  attention  has  heretofore  been  given  to  Photo- 
graphic Printing,  which  is  indeed  quite  as  important  a 
branch  of  the  art  as  negative  making. 

It  is  the  hope  of  both  author  and  publishers  to  create 


REFORM 


in  this  matter,  by  the  issue  of  this  work,  and  as  it  is  to  put  money  in  the 
pockets  of  all  who  read  it,  the  hope  is  that  it  will  be  generally  read. 
For  Contents  see  the  opposite  page. 

A  fine  example  of  Photographic  Printing,  by  the  author,  will 
accompany  the  work,  from  negatives  by  F.  Gutekunst,  Philada. 


IF  IR,  I  C  IE,      S  2.5  O. 

BEMRMAN  &  WILSON,  Photoffraphic  Publishers, 

SEVENTH  &  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


The  Last  New  Book! 


THE  PRACTICAL  PRINTER 


A  COMPLETE  MANUAL  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PRINTING 

ON   PLAIN   AND   ALBUMEN   PAPER,    AND    ON   PORCELAIN. 


COITTB^TS. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  Printing  Room,  with  a  Plan.  The  Silver- 
ing and  Toning  Room,  with  a  Plan.  The  Dry- 
ing Room,  with  a  Plan. 

PART  I.— ALBUMEN  PAPER  PRINTING. 

The  Positive  Bath  for  Albumen  Paper.  Sil- 
vering the  Albumen  Paper.  Drying  the  Paper. 
Fuming  the  Paper.  Preservation  of  Sensitive 
Albumenized  Paper — Washed  Sensitive  Paper. 
Cutting  the  Paper.  The  Printing  Boards.  Keep- 
ing Tally.  Vignette  Printing  Blocks.  Treat- 
ment of  the  Negatives  before  Printing.  Pilling 
of  the  Boards.  Fitting  Vignette  Boards  to  the 
Negatives  for  Printing.  Medallion  and  Arch- 
top  Printing.  Fancy  Printing.  Vignette  Cameo 
and  Medallion  Vignette  Cameo  Printing.  Print- 
ing the  Bendann  Backgrounds.  Printing  Intense 
Negatives.  Printing  Weak  Negatives.  A  Few 
More  Remarks  about  Printing — Treatment  of 
Broken  Negatives.  Cutting  the  Prints.  Wash- 
ing the  Prints.  Acidifying  the  Prints.  Toning 
Baths.  Artistic  Toning.  Fixing  Baths  and 
Fixing  Prints.  Washing  the  Prints.  Mounting 
the  Prints.     Finishing  the  Prints. 


PART  II.— PLAIN  PAPER  PRINTING. 

Salting  the  Paper.  Positive  Baths  for  Plain 
Salted  Paper.  Silvering  Plain  Salted  Paper. 
Drying,  Fuming,  and  Cutting  the  Paper.  Treat- 
ment of  the  Negatives  before  Printing.  Print- 
ing-in  False  Backgrounds.  General  Plain  Paper 
Printing.  Further  Treatment  of  the  Prints  after 
Printing.  Causes  of  Failures  in  Albumen  and 
Plain  Paper  Printing. 


PART  III.— PORCELAIN  PRINTING. 

Selection  of  the  Porcelain  Plates.  Cleaning 
of  the  Porcelain  Plates.  Albumenizing  the 
Porcelain  Plates.  Making  the  Porcelain  Collo- 
dion. Coating,  Fuming,  and  Drying  the  Plates. 
Porcelain  Printing  Boards.  Placing  the  Sensi- 
tive Plate  on  the  Board  for  Printing.  Printing 
Vignette  Porcelains.  Printing  Medallion  Por- 
celains. Washing  the  Porcelains.  Toning  the 
Porcelain.  Fixing  the  Porcelain.  Final  Wash- 
ing of  the  Porcelain.  Drying  and  Tinting  of  the 
Porcelain.  Varnishing  the  Porcelain.  Causes 
of  Failures  in  Porcelain  Printing. 


Together  with  nearly  100  Wood  Cuts,  and  an  elegant  Cabinet  Portrait, 
from  negatives  by  Mr.  F.  Gutekunst,  printed  by  the  author,  Mr.  Chas.  W. 
Hearn. 


It  is  selling  splendidly! 


Hundreds  already  gone! 


MAILED  POST-PAID  ON  RECEIPT  OF  $2.50,  EY  ANY  DEALER,  OR 
BENERMAN  &.  WILSON, 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  PUBLISHERS, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Street,  Philadelphia. 


IMPORTANT  TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 


TAKE  NOTICE ! 

WHAT    PARTIES    SAY,    WHO    ARE     USING 

J.  A.  ANDERSON'S  CAMERA   SOXES. 

Office  of  Chicago  Photographic  and  Copying  Company, 
320,  322,  324,  &  326  State  Street. 
J.  A.  Anderson. — Dear  Sir: — The  10x12  Conical  Bellows  Camera  you  made  us  gives  entire  satisfaction.  It 
is  finely  finished,  and  the  working  parts  are  all  complete  in  their  action.  We  now  have  seven  of  your  boxes 
in  our  operating  department  and  shall  discard  all  others  (the  so-called  "Success")  for  your  make",  as  we  will 
save  the  price  in  repairs.  They  are  all  in  constant  use  every  day,  and  stand  the  test  better  than  any  other  make 
we  have  used.  For  durability,  accuracy,  and  cheapness,  they  certainly  have  no  rivals;  they  compare  favorably 
with  the  A.  0.  Co.'s  boxes,  and  are  far  superior  to  anything  else  in  the"  market. 

(Signed),  JAS.  S.  NASON. 


J".   .A..   .AlSTIDElR/SOICT'S 

NEW  POSITION  AND  BABY  CHAIR,  COMBINED. 


THE 
HANDSOMEST. 


COMPLETE, 

AMD 
CHEAPEST 


PIECE  OF  APPARATDS  EVER  OFFERED  TO  THE  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


BUY  AO  IMITATION. 


SEND   FOB  PBICM  LIST. 


Photographers  can  save  from  10  to  20  per  cent,  by  sending  direct  to  the  manufactory  for  Apparatus. 

TESTIMONIAL. 

Elgin,  April  5th,  1874. 

Mr.  J.  A.  Anderson. — Sir :— The  Camera  Boxes  prove  to  be  all  that  I  expected.  The  11  x  14  is  superior  to  any 
that  I  ever  used;  it  is  a  beauty,  and  I  am  proud  of  it.  The  cheapness,  too,  is  an  item  especially  with  me  at 
this  time,  having  lost  all  the  contents  of  my  gallery  bv  fire.    I  am  obliged  to  you  for  your  favor. 

Yours,  "  G.  H.  Sherman. 

(4®°  See  other  testimonials  in  special  advertisements). 

J.    A.    ANDERSON,    (Late  Anderson  &  Bixby), 

65  East  Indiana  Street,  Chicago. 


IN    EUROPE,    MEDALS    HAVE    BEEN    AWARDED    TO   THE 
MAKERS    BY   ALMOST   EVERY   COUNTRY. 

Lantern  Slides! 


AND 


We  have  just  received  from  Prance, 


4000  LANTERN  SLIDES! 


The  Scovill  Gold  Medal  was  awarded  for  the  display  of  these  pictures 
at  the  N.  P.  A.  Exhibition,  1873. 


We  can  now  give  photographers  and  others  an  opportunity  to  make  selections  from  them  at  very 
low  prices. 

.A-XsTZ"     EFTEBPBISIlsra     ZPE^SOZsT 

Can  make  money  by  giving  exhibitions  to  the  public. 


HOW    IT    IS    DONE. 

Local  Secretary  Hesler,  who  has  just  purchased  a  lot  of  these  elegant   slides  from  us,    sends  the 
following  : 

Evanston,  III.,  June,  1874. 

Dear  Sirs  :  The  transparencies  you  sent  are  duly  at  hand.  I  must  say  lam  happily  disappointed 
in  them,  their  beauty  of  selection  and  perfection  of  execution  are  really  marvellous.  I  have  shown 
them  to  several  gentlemen  who  have  traveled  over  these  countries,  viz.,  Prance,  Germany,  Switzer- 
land, Egypt,  and  the  Holy  Land,  and  all  say  that  they  really  get  more  satisfaction  in  studying  and 
viewing  these  pictures,  as  I  show  them  with  Marcy's  Sciopticon,  than  they  get  in  traveling  over  the 
same  countries.  I  wonder  that  more  photographers  do  not  possess  themselves  of  a  Marcy's  Sciopticon, 
for  with  these  views  they  can  fill  in  very  profitable  evenings.  I  do  it  thusly  :  Having  the  pictures  and 
lantern  (Marcy's,  which  I  believe  is  the  best  in  use),  let  the  people  know  you  have  them,  and  will  give 
Parlor  Exhibitions  at  any  person's  house  who  wishes  to  entertain  friends.  For  this  purpose  you  want 
some  few  comics  ;  most  of  these  you  can  easily  make  of  a  local  character.  Make  a  few  transparencies 
of  the  babies  crying  and  laughing,  leading  men,  and  host  and  hostess,  if  possible.  Have  enough 
foreign  and  home  views,  that  you  need  not  always  show  the  same  things.  Por  such  an  entertainment 
you  can  get  from  $10  to  $20  per  night ;  and  this  not  only  pays  you  but  advertises  you  in  the  best  pos- 
sible manner.  Try  it !  you  who  can  command  your  evenings,  and,  my  word  for  it,  you  will  find  it  to 
pay  you.  A.  Hesler. 

This  shows  what  any  one  else  may  do  with  a  good  lantern  and  an  assortment  of  slides. 


A  Marcy's  Sciopticon  and  one  hundred  slides  can  be  carried  in  your  hand, 
for  delivery  the  day  the  order  is  received. 


We  have  them  ready 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
Cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


51  ^H 


BiHlIMP1 


lrl(  _mw 


IS  I 


TRY  THE  NEW  CANDIDATE. 


10  x  14  Eagle  Eggshell,  per  box  200  plates, 
10x14      "      Glossy,  "        200       " 


3  00 
28  00 


A  Good  Article  at  a  Pair  Price! 


g&°  NO  CHARGE  FOE  BOXING.  =®g 


ALL  DEALERS  HAVE  THE  EAGLE  BRAND  FOR  SALE. 


# 


t> 


# 


EXAMINE  THIS  NEW  BRAND  OP 


CAMERA    BOXES 


1-4  size, 

reversi 

ble 

,  "  Square 

Dealer,"          . 

. 

$7  50 

1-2     " 

u 

u 

(« 

. 

8  00 

4-4     " 

u 

u 

u 

. 

12  00 

8-10  " 

(( 

u 

u 

. 

15  00 

1-4     " 

a 

1-9  to  1-4, 

and  four  Gems  on  a  1-4  plate, 

with 

four  1-9  tubes,  complete,  . 

. 

21  00 

J.   BARUYDT, 


:     i 


ROCHESTER. 


THE 


IuUnW|rhui  §Jhfit0gvai>het\ 


Vol.  XL 


AUGUST,   1874. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1874, 
By  BENERMAN  &   WILSON, 
In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


No.  12  8. 


THE  CHICAGO  CONVENTION. 

The  Sixth  Annual  Convention  and  Ex- 
hibition of  the  National  Photographic  As- 
sociation passed  offagreeably  to  programme. 
Although  much  interfered  with  by  the  fire, 
it  was,  taken  all  in  all,  a  most  brilliant  suc- 
cess— in  some  respects  eclipsing  its  prede- 
cessors. 

The  Association  thought  proper  to  take 
the  printing  of  its  proceedings  into  its  own 
hands,  and  issue  the  same  presently  in 
pamphlet  form.  Meanwhile  we  give  our 
readers  further  on  a  skeleton  report,  and 
refer  them  to  the  official  one  for  the  details. 
They  will  be  published  for  subscribers 
only. 

It  is  our  pleasure,  as  well  as  our  duty,  to 
speak  in  the  most  unequivocal  praise  of  the 
very  handsome  manner  in  which  the  pho- 
tographers and  stockdealers  of  Chicago 
bore  the  entire  expense  of  the  Convention. 
The  treasury  will  not  be  asked  for  one  dol- 
lar of  the  costs.  On  the  contrary,  Local 
Secretary  Hesler  hopes  to  have  a  balance  to 
pay  into  the  treasury.  This  is  not  only  very 
handsome,  but  it  is  unprecedented. 

There  is  no  doubt  but  what  the  Associa- 
tion is  now  stronger  and  in  better  condition 
than  ever  before,  and  we  wish  it  continued 
growth  and  usefulness  under  its  new  and 
talented  president  and  his  staff.  Long  live 
the  National  Photographic  Association  ! 


VIEWS  ABROAD  AND  ACROSS. 

BY    EDWARD   L.    WILSON.' 
VIII. 

Not  so  fast  to  Eome  either,  for  I  went 
to  Milan  also,  and  I  must  tell  you  about 
that.  I  entered  the  city  at  sunrise,  and  a 
sunrise  which  came  up  to  my  expectations 
of  an  Italian  sunrise,  but  no  more  gaudy 
than  many  I  have  seen  in  my  own  native 
land.  Milan  is  a  beautiful  city,  and  each 
year,  thanks  to  the  enterprise  and  good  taste 
and  tact  of  Victor  Emanuel,  it  is  yearly  be- 
coming more  and  more  beautiful.  There 
are  many  objects  of  interest  to  attract  the 
traveller  for  a  few  days.  The  art  museums 
are  very  interesting,  as  they  contain  some 
fine  old  paintings,  the  Marriage  at  Cana, 
by  Paul  Veronese,  the  Marriage  of  the 
Virgin,  by  Kaphael,  &c,  &c,  and  I  was  so 
fortunate  as  to  be  present  at  the  exhibition 
of  modern  paintings,  where  I  saw  some  ex- 
quisite works  of  art.  There  are  several  old 
churches  here  which  contain  some  interest- 
ing works  of  art,  but  they  are  very  tame 
after  one  has  visited  those  in  Venice  and 
Florence.  But  at  the  Church  San  Maria 
del  Grogie  is  a  picture  which  thousands 
visit  monthly,  the  "Last  Supper"  of  Le- 
onardo da  Vinci,  a  fresco  old  and  worn  and 
faded  by  age,  but  yet  so  wondrously  impres- 
sive that  once  seen  it  cannot  be  forgotten. 
Photographs  of  parts  or  all  of  this  renowned 


15 


226 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


composition  could  be  had  in  the  building, 
and  two  or  three  cameras  stood  there  with 
negatives  exposed,  showing  that  there  was 
a  demand  for  the  copies.  As  I  stood  there 
contemplating  the  picture  and  thinking  of 
the  camera,  I  almost  started  at  the  thought 
that  I  saw  one  of  the  figures  move. 

Of  the  triumphal  arches  so  common  in 
Europe  one  of  the  handsomest  is  the  one  at 
the  southern  terminus  of  the  Simplon  Pass, 
here  in  Milan,  a  noble  work,  erected  by 
Napoleon  I,  in  commemoration  of  the  com- 
pletion of  that  magnificent  highway. 

The  Victor  Emanuel  Gallery  is  the 
handsomest  arcade  in  Europe,  perhaps,  be- 
ing newly  erected,  in  the  form  of  a  Latin 
cross,  and  lined  with  shops,  whose  display 
of  wares  is  overwhelming.  A  dome  rises 
from  the  centre  one  hundred  and  eighty 
feet  high,  and  twenty-four  beautiful  statues 
by  famous  Italian  sculptors  adorn  it.  Pho- 
tographs are  largely  sold  here,  and  of  un- 
usually good  quality  for  Italy.  I  always 
made  it  a  point  to  patronize  the  art,  and 
already  my  collection  is  growing  weighty. 
Prints  are  sold  mounted  or  unmounted,  as 
you  like,  a  large  stock  of  each  being  always 
kept  on  hand  by  the  dealers. 

But  the  crowning  glory  of  Milan  is  its 
unrivalled  cathedral.  I  first  caught  a 
glimpse  of  it  as  I  rounded  a  corner  in  a  cab 
on  the  way  to  the  hotel,  and  it  was  not 
many  minutes  after  before  I  was  in  front 
of  it  spellbound  by  its  grandeur.  I  could 
not  take  it  in  at  once,  so  I  entered,  and  as 
service  was  being  held,  I  walked  about 
among  the  people.  Kich  and  poor  were 
here  in  great  numbers,  and  I  saw  enough 
genre  pictures  to  make  any  one  forsake  the 
camera  and  take  up  the  brush  and  the  pallet. 
No  wonder  Raphael  and  Leonardo  and  Paul 
Veronese  painted  as  they  did,  if  they  had 
such  subjects  as  these  to  inspire  them — living 
pictures  in  profusion.  I  turned  away  from 
the  interior  to  the  exterior  again.  I  walked 
around  it,  stood  at  a  distance  on  all  sides, 
and  gazed  upon  it,  and  I  clambered  to  the 
highest  place  accessible  in  the  highest  pin- 
nacle. I  wandered  to  and  fro  among  the 
sculptures  upon  the  roof,  and  once  became 
lost  from  my  guide,  for  the  roof  is  like  the 
streets  of  a  city,  and  one  is  soon  astray  un- 
less  careful   to   follow   the   guide.     About 


forty-five  hundred  marble  statues  are  here, 
varying  in  size  from  eighteen  inches  to 
fifteen  feet  in  height,  scattered  here  and 
there  over  the  marble  roof,  in  niches  and 
under  arches.  The  mind  becomes  bewil- 
dered at  the  sight  of  them.  Even  more  per- 
plexing are  the  turrets  of  purest  Gothic 
style,  ninety-eight  in  number,  and  the 
myriads  of  braces  and  supports,  miles  (al- 
most) of  which  one  may  look  through,  are 
all  of  white  marble.  There  are  hundreds 
of  places  yet  to  fill  with  statues,  and  the 
several  marble  yards  on  the  roof  with  their 
workmen  are  each  year  helping  to  fill  the 
empty  niches.  To  reach  the  roof  we  must 
climb  one  hundred  and  ninety-four  steps  up 
a  winding  stairway.  Now  three  hundred 
more  around  and  around  and  around  on  the 
exterior,  and  we  are  at  the  highest  gallery 
of  the  highest  tower.  From  there  I  had  a 
magnificent  view  of  the  country  around. 
The  Alps!  O  how  beautiful  with  their 
snowy  peaks ;  the  great  arch  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  Simplon  Pass,  and  the  Pass  itself 
for  miles  along ;  Mont  Bosa,  Mont  Blanc, 
Mont  Cenis,  Great  St.  Bernard,  and  many 
other  peaks  uncovered  lay  dozing  in  the 
distance  ;  the  city  of  Milan  at  our  feet  sent 
up  sounds  strange  and  perplexing  from  the 
figures' walking  in  its  streets,  and  far  and 
wide  we  could  see  in  all  directions.  But 
time  compelled  me  to  come  down,  and  it 
was  a  real  journey  to  terra  firms  again.  No 
wonder  the  Milanese  claim  this  as  the 
eighth  wonder  of  the  world.  Where  are 
the  seven  that  take  precedence  ?  The  in- 
terior is  grand  and  majestic  and  solemn- 
looking,  but  does  not  compare  in  beauty 
with  the  exterior.  It  is  477  feet  long,  186 
feet  in  breadth,  and  the  nave  is  158  feet 
high  by  35  broad.  The  dome  is  214  feet 
high  and  the  tower  360  feet.  Fifty-two 
pillars,  each  fifteen  feet  in  diameter,  support 
the  roof,  and  instead  of  being  adorned  with 
capitals,  the  summits  of  all  are  finished 
with  canopied  niches,  in  each  of  which 
stands  a  majestic  statue.  The  pavement  is 
mosaic  work  of  variously  colored  marbles, 
and  well  worn  in  places.  The  walls  are 
adorned  with  some  pretty  monuments  and 
accompanying  sculpture.  The  statue  of  St. 
Bartholomew,  representing  him'  without 
his   skin,   is   very   strange.     The    prettiest 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


227 


work,  I  think,  is  the  relief,  in  one  of  the 
chapels,  representing  the  Virgin.  The 
stained  glass  in  the  three  choir  windows  is 
the  finest  I  have  seen  in  Europe,  I  think, 
and  gives  us  three  hundred  and  fifty  repre- 
sentations of  scriptural  subjects.  One  could 
spend  a  day  in  the  examination  of  them 
alone.  Another  walk  all  around  the  tre- 
mendous pile  and  we  must  leave  it.  Many 
old  buildings  are  close  to  it  now,  but  they 
are  being  demolished,  to  the  great  advan- 
tage of  the  cathedral,  and  are  to  be  re- 
placed by  a  handsome  avenue  and  tine  art 
buildings  in  honor  of  King  Victor  Emanuel. 

If  no  desire  to  see  the  Leaning  Tower  of 
Pisa  had  possessed  me,  surely  in  gratitude 
to  Galileo  for  the  wisdom  which  gave  my 
old  and  revered  grandmother  the  giant 
pendulum  clock,  from  whose  face  I  first 
learned  the  time  of  day,  I  should  visit  Pisa, 
and  I  am  glad  to  say  I  did.  The  principal 
sights  there  are  the  Leaning  Tower,  the 
Cathedral,  the  Baptistery,  and  the  Campo 
Santo,  and  being  all  close  to  each  other,  one 
can  visit  them  in  a  few  hours.  First  to 
the  Cathedral,  and  at  once  to  the  great 
lamp,  which,  swinging  to  and  fro  in  the 
air,  it  is  said,  attracted  Galileo  as  he  sat 
there  singing  mass,  and  gave  him  the  idea 
of  the  pendulum.  It  was  not  so  large  as  I 
had  pictured  it  in  my  mind,  but  there  it 
was,  suspended  from  the  ceiling  sixty  feet 
above  by  a  rope.  1  reached  it  with  my 
umbrella,  gave  it  a  push,  and  then  stood 
and  saw  it  swing  to  and  fro  as  the  great 
mathematician  himself  observed  it.  It  was 
worth  going  to  Pisa  for,  and  that  umbrella 
is  to  be  presented  to  the  Photographic  His- 
torical Society — when  there  is  one. 

The  interior  of  the  Cathedral  is  very  im- 
posing and  pretty.  The  ceiling  is  richly 
carved  and  gilded,  and  is  borne  by  sixty- 
eight  splendid  granite  columns.  The  aisles 
are  vaulted,  and  above  them  runs  a  tri- 
forium  of  fine  proportions.  There  are  twelve 
beautiful  altar  pieces,  said  to  have  been  de- 
signed by  Michael  Angelo,  all  of  white 
marble,  and  certainly  worthy  of  that  great 
sculptor.  A  few  of  the  paintings  are  good, 
the  best  being  by  Andrea  del  Sarto.  The 
photographs  do  not  do  justice  to  the  ex- 
terior, which  is  also  very  pretty — but,  oh, 
the   graceful    Leaning   Tower    eclipses   all 


else,  and  far  exceeded  my  expectations.  It 
looks  as  fresh  and  white  as  if  just  erected, 
being  of  beautiful  white  marble.  Its  height 
(151  feet)  deceives  one,  as  it  looks  lower. 
Its  lean-ness  equalled  my  idea  of  it,  being 
thirteen  feet  out  of  perpendicular.  It  is 
hollow,  eight  stories  high,  and  the  winding 
stairway  is  outside  of  the  great  central 
space.  Look  down  it  from  the  top.  The 
interior  resembles  an  inverted  funnel.  It 
requires  two  hundred  and  ninety-four  steps, 
upward,  downward,  and  around,  to  reach 
the  top.  Nervous  people  tremble  and  hug 
the  iron  rail  when  they  look  down  the  out- 
side on  the  lean  side  from  the  top.  Seven 
bells,  one  of  which  weighs  six  tons,  hang 
on  the  upper  side  of  the  top  story.  The 
view  is  magnificent,  embracing  the  town, 
the  islands,  the  sea,  the  river  Arno  for 
miles,  the  mountains,  and  Italy  far  and 
wide.  The  Leaning  Tower  is  a  joy  never 
to  be  forgotten,  and  came  up  to  my  dreams 
of  it.  Descending  we  visited  the  beautiful 
Baptistery  at  the  rear  of  the  Cathedral.  A 
white  marble  pulpit  there  is  covered  with 
exquisite  bas-reliefs,  representing  scenes  in 
the  life  of  Christ.  The  baptismal  font  is  a 
very  large  and  fine  one,  too,  and  baby 
baptism  was  going  on. 

Now  to  the  Campo  Santo  or  burial-ground, 
which  is  only  a  few  steps  away.  This  is 
"holy  ground,"  for  fifty-three  ship-loads 
of  it  were  brought  from  Mt.  Calvary.  A 
huge  oblong  structure  surrounds  the  church- 
yard, similar  to  the  cloisters  of  a  convent. 
Here  are  some  of  the  most  superb  subjects 
for  the  camera  in  all  Italy,  and  they  are  so 
well  lighted  that  one  has  no  difficulty  in 
making  delightful  pictures  of  them  The 
lofty  circular  arches  of  the  arcades  are  filled 
with  the  richest  Gothic  tracery.  The  walls 
are  covered  with  elaborate  frescoes,  some  of 
which  almost  border  on  the  grotesque,  but 
all  of  which  are  most  interesting  with  refer- 
ence to  the  history  of  art.  The  masters  who 
painted  them  certainly  understood  human 
nature,  which  doubtless  then  was  much  as 
it  is  now,  especially  when  a  guilty  con- 
science preys  upon  the  mind,  and  fear  gets 
after  a  man  with  not  only  a  sharp  stick,  but 
a  red  hot  one  with  many  ends.  Here  are 
many  richly  sculptured  tombs  and  beautiful 
figures,  mixed  in  with  a  superb  collection 


228 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


of  classical  antiquities.  Altars  and  bas- 
reliefs,  and  inscriptions  and  statues,  the  ac- 
cumulations of  ages,  are  gathered  here 
within  these  walls,  and  the  photographs  of 
the  most  of  them  are  more  beautiful  even 
than  the  originals,  although  the  negatives 
are  not  retouched. 

Thirty-five  minutes  from  Pisa  is  Leg- 
horn or  Lagorne,  a  bright,  cleanly,  and 
lively  city,  with  a  beautiful  harbor,  and 
evidently  under  good  government.  It  was 
market  day,  and  we  drove  through  the 
market-places  where  the  peasantry  were 
dispensing  their  grapes  and  figs  and  pome- 
granates. The  scene  was  lively  and  pic- 
turesque. We  passed  several  ancient  foun- 
tains, around  which  groups  of  water-bearers 
with  their  copper  vessels  were  gathered, 
gossiping  and  waiting  their  turn  at  the 
fountain.  The  water  at  Leghorn  is  bad, 
doubtless,  for  the  cows  and  the  goats  are 
driven  from  door  to  door,  and  then  milked 
to  order  in  quantity  to  suit.  Alabaster 
images  and  photographs  are  sold  largely 
there,  the  one  being  apt  to  come  to  destruc- 
tion almost  as  soon  as  the  other,  and  you 
may  guess  which.  There  are  all  sorts  of 
churches  in  Leghorn,  for  in  olden  times  the 
different  sects  who  were  persecuted  at  home 
were  welcomed  to  Leghorn,  where  they 
could  worship  as  they  do  in  these  blessed 
United  States,  according  to  their  own  con- 
sciences. 

Between  Leghorn  and  Rome  I  had  several 
adventures  and  a  nightmare.  Two  of  the 
former  consisted  in  fumigations — once  in  a 
railway  car  by  a  rascally  Italian,  who 
would  smoke,  and  whom  I  froze  out ;  the 
last  in  a  railway  station.  The  other  was 
caused  by  the  non-digestion  of  a  sour  roll 
and  a  raw  egg.  They  do  not  have  the  com- 
fortable railway  restaurants  in  Italy  that 
we  do,  and  one  is  often  glad  to  get  even 
very  inferior  food.  The  news  of  the  failure 
of  Jay  Cooke  &  Co.  had  just  reached  Italy, 
and  I  was  refused  money  on  my  letter  of 
credit,  "because  all  the  American  bankers 
are  broken,"  said  an  Italian  broker.  I 
barely  had  funds  to  carry  me  to  Rome,  and 
the  roll  and  the  egg  were  all  I  dared  to 
invest  in.  I  dreamed  on  them  of  the  differ- 
ence between  the  Italian  of  to-day,  and  of 
the  Italian  of  old,  as  I  saw  him  in  marble — 


These  classic  busts. 


six  hundred  feet  of  him — at  Florence. 
Great  rows  of  those  classic  busts  seemed  to 
be  pedestalled  upon  my  breast  and  stomach, 
making  all  sorts  of  faces  at  me,  but  they 
were  not ;   it  was  the  roll  and  the  egg. 

I  awakened  before  sunrise  in  time  to  see 
the  dome  of  St.  Peter's  in  the  far  distance. 
This  and  the  cities  on 
the  hills,  cavernous 
cities  in  the  hills,  miles 
of  aqueducts  in  ruins, 
and  now  the  muddy  Ti- 
ber, told  me  I  was  near- 
ing  Rome,  and  when  I 
arrived  there,  after  fu- 
ming again,  my  first  move  was  for  a  good 
breakfast.  And  now  when  I  would  write 
you  about  Rome  I  am  an  imbecile  indeed. 
Many  times  since  I  began 
to  place  these  "  Views"  on 
record,  have  I  regretted 
it,  so  impossible  is  it  to 
give  any  sort  of  an  idea  of 
the  beauties  I  have  seen, 
in  so  limited  a  space  ;  and 
at  no  time  have  I  felt  that 
regret  so  deeply  as  now, 
when  I  take  up  the  notes 
I  made  while  at  Rome,  and  attempt  to  filter 
therefrom  a  few  of  the  most  useful  and  in- 
teresting items. 

To  see  Rome  was  the  great  desire  of  my 
heart  from  the  time  I  left 
home,  and  I  hurried  at  all 
other  places  in  order  to 
make  it ;  for  at  Rome  is 
the  Vatican  collection  of 
pictures  and  sculpture,  un- 
equalled, unsurpassed ;  and 
to  be  among  them  was  my 
desire.  I  went,  I  wan- 
dered and  wondered,  and 
now  I  can  tell  you  very  little  of  what  I 
saw.  1  went  straight  to  the  Forum  first, 
where  the  great  columns  stand,  like 
spectres,  shoulder  to  shoulder,  and  the 
beautiful  arches  mark  the  memories  of  those 
who  erected  them,  glory  once  covered  up 
and  now  exposed  again,  and  excavation 
going  on.  Those  eight  columns  are  a  part 
of  the  Temple  of  Saturn,  erected  491  B.  C. 
Those  three  banded  together  are  the  remains 
of  the   Temple   of  Vespasian,   erected   by 


Seemed    pedestalled 
upon  my  breast. 


Making  all  sorts  of 
faces. 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


229 


Titus,  and  across  the  modern  street  stands 
the  arch  of  Septimus  Severus.  Further  on 
is  Trajan's  Forum,  with  its  four  rows  of 
broken  columns,  and  the  great  Trajan  col- 
umn, which  still  stands  158  feet  high,  12 
feet  diameter,  and  covered  with  reliefs, 
which  run  around  it  spirally  to  the  top,  and 
includes  2500  human  figures,  besides  thou- 
sands of  horses,  chariots,  weapons,  &c,  the 
whole  making  up  a  grand  battle  scene. 
Inside  one  hundred  and  eighty-four  steps 
lead  to  the  top.  Ah  me,  what  a  wondrous 
study.  Before  we  knew  it  we  came  to  the 
richest  of  all  the  arches — a  veritable  mass 
of  sculpture — that  of  Constantine,  whose 
reliefs  make  up  another  battle  picture;  and 
right  by  it  is  Rome's  glory,  the  Coliseum. 
How  I  was  deceived  by  it.  Is  this  the  Col- 
iseum ?  I  said.  It  is  1900  feet  in  circum- 
ference, 658  feet  widest  diameter, 
202  feet  high,  took  60,000  Jews  ten 
years  to  build  it,  and  once  seated 
87,000  persons,  and  yet  when  I  first 
saw  it,  it  looked  small.  I  closed  my 
eyes,  and  then  plunged  into  it,  not 
halting  until  I  reached  the  centre  of 
the  great  oval.  I  then  looked,  and 
all  at  once  its  immensity  sprang 
upon  me,  and  the  more  I  clambered 
among  its  numberless  great  arches, 
and  the  nearer  I  approached  its  top, 
the  more  I  was  impressed  with  its 
immensity.  Photography  has  made 
you  very  familiar  with  it.  I  need 
not  go  further.  I  visited  it  several 
times,  and  each  time  I  saw  it,  it 
loomed  up  higher  and  higher  before 
me. 

The  great  St  Peter's  was  no  dis- 
appointment. I  began  to  have  an 
eye  for  size,  and  here  are  some  of 
the  figures  concerning  it.  Its  por- 
tico is  236  feet  long  by  42  feet  wide, 
and  62  feet  high.  Measure  that  with 
the  church  you  go  to.  Now  push 
aside  the  great  leathern  curtain  that 
hangs  at  the  door  and  come  inside.  Fright- 
ened ?  No  wonder,  for  here  is  a  stupendous 
interior,  700  feet  long,  whose  transept  is  440 
feet  high,  and  the  nave  154  feet.  Under 
foot  a  polished  marble  floor,  which  causes 
your  shadow  to  frighten  you  at  every  turn  ; 
overhead  a  golden  vault,  supported  by  784 


columns.  There  are  290  windows,  390 
statues,  46  altars,  and  over  and  above  all, 
the  most  wonderful  of  all  domes.  There  is 
the  bronze  St.  Peter,  whose  toe  has  been 
kissed  away;  the  splendid  altar  with  its 
four  spiral  columns  of  bronze,  the  pair  of 
perfect  cherubs  at  the  fountain,  together 
with  the  sculptures,  which  I  dare  not  name 
a  tithe  of.  Many  visits  were  made  here, 
but  it  had  to  be  neglected  for  the  Vatican. 
There  are  many  other  interesting  churches 
in  Rome  of  course,  all  of  which  must  have 
cost  millions  of  money,  and  all  of  which  are 
museums,  on  account  of  the  sculpture,  paint- 
ings, precious  marbles,  jewels,  and  relics 
they  contain,  to  say  nothing  of  their  own 
architectural  splendor.  Through  these  halls 
of  architectural  glory  I  wandered  delighted 
and    overwhelmed    day   after   day,    alone. 


Through  these  halls  of  architectural  glory  I  wandered. 


Many  times,  good  readers,  did  I  wish  that 
you  all  might  have  the  opportunity  to  enjoy 
as  did  your  humble  correspondent  enjoy. 
Santa  Maria  Maggiore,  St.  John  Lateran, 
the  Pantheon,  and  St.  Paul's,  are  among 
the  most  gorgeous.  The  latter  even  rivals 
St.  Peter's  in  beauty.     It  is  one  grand  hall 


230 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


of  marble,  410  feet  long,  with  an  altar  of 
malachite.  The  roof  is  supported  by  80 
Corinthian  columns,  4  feet  in  diameter. 
You  must  take  300  steps  to  go  from  one  end 
to  the  other.  Its  cloisters  are  most  beau- 
tiful, and  its  collection  of  oil  portraits  of 
the  popes,  &c,  a  most  interesting  study. 

From  the  dome  of  St.  Peter's,  from  the 
Pincian  Hill,  and  from  the  top  of  the  old 
Capitol,  the  views  are  superb.  One  sees 
the  whole  seven  hills  of  ancient  Rome,  the 
Appian  Way,  the  Tiber  almost  to  the  sea, 
and  ruins  in  all  directions,  each  foot  of 
ground  in  sight  having  some  historical 
memory  hanging  about  it.  Photography 
is  largely  practiced  here,  and  the  sales  to 


Strong,  sturdy  men — Romans— playing  games  in  the  streets. 

travellers  are  immense,  and  the  rooms  where 
photographs  are  sold  are  very  richly  furnish- 
ed. MacPherson  produces  very  large  solar 
prints  of  some  of  the  main  buildings  here, 
and  they  have  been  seen  no  doubt  by  the 


most  of  you.  Unfortunately  they  do  not  la.-t 
long.  I  secured  carbon  prints  from  Braun. 
The  street  scenes  in  Pome  are  very  interest- 
ing, though  not  so  much  so  as  at  Venice. 
The  people  look  more  idle  and  degraded  than 
they  do  in  Northern  Italy.  It  is  no  uncom- 
mon thing  to  see  strong,  sturdy  men — Bo- 
mans — playing  games  in  the  streets,  while 
the  streets  themselves  are  reeking  with  filth. 
Why  not  put  them  to  work  ?  Carriage  driv- 
ing employs  a  great  many  of  them,  for 
almost  every  one  rides  in  Borne  who  can,  and 
the  cost  is  trifling.  I  preferred  to  walk  one 
day  onashoppingexpedition,andahaokman 
followed  me  with  his  carriage  for  two  hours 
to  make  twenty  cents  by  taking  me  back, — 
and  made  money  on  it !  Oh  ! 
what  a  contrast  between  these 
people  and  those  of  ancient 
Borne,  if  I  may  judge  from 
the  busts  of  the  latter,  so  plen- 
tiful in  all  the  collections. 
Nay,  not  only  from  them,  but 
from  the  works  of  those  peo- 
ple of  old  themselves.  Think 
of  the  Romans  of  to-day  erect- 
ing a  Coliseum,  or  a  Pan- 
theon, or  a  St.  Peter's,  or  a 
Trajan's  column.  They  hard- 
ly carry  themselves  erect. 

Up  the  Scala   Regia,    the 
finest  stairway  in  the  world, 
all  of  the  finest  white  marble, 
and  I  am  in  the  Vatican  Mu- 
seum.    Vain  would  it  be  to 
try  to  tell  you  of  a  tithe  of  the 
things  to  be  seen  and  learned 
there.     Now  in  the  galleries 
of  sculpture  500  feet  long,  or 
in  the  library,  where  one  may 
walk  900  feet  without  a  turn, 
or  agiiin  among  the  myriads 
of  pictures,  where  are  many 
artists  copying  the  works  of 
the   old   masters,    or    in    the 
chambers     of     the   antique, 
among  shattered  columns  and 
mummies  and  mosaics.     The 
walls  and  the  ceilings  are  covered  with  the 
most  glorious  compositions,  surely  painted 
by  men  whose  natures   differed  from   the 
matter-of-fact  men  of  to-day,  and  in   the 
richest  of  colors,  and  tints  as  fresh-looking 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


231 


now  as  the  day  they  were  painted.  I  soon 
saw  there  was  a  year's  work  here;  so  I  se- 
lected here  and  there  a  picture,  and  in  turn 
studied  and  pored  over  them  again  and 
again.  The  largest  collection  of  the  works 
of  Raphael  is  here,  and  no  wonder  the  Pope 
wept  when  Raphael  died.  His  "  Transfigu- 
ration "  is  the  most  sublime  composition. 
There  is  so  very  much  more  feeling  depicted 
in  his  figures  than  one  ever  thinks  man  able 
to  express  even  in  his  living  body,  that  it 
makes  the  works  of  this  great  master 
so  very  fascinating.  His  Madonna  of  Fo- 
ligno  is  also  another  grand  work  which  one 
can  never  forget.  Of  the  statuary  the 
Apollo  Belvidere  is  of  course  the  gem.  It 
fairly  startles  one  with  its  look  of  life,  and 
nothing  but  the  whiteness  of  the  marble 
can  convince  one  that  it  does  not  breathe. 

I  turned  from  all  these  great  works  for 
awhile  to  visit  the  Sixtine  Chapel  adjoining 
the  Vatican,  and  I  had  it  almost  alone.  No 
jabbering  guides,  no  noisy  traveller  to  dis- 
turb the  pleasure  of  contemplating  these 
great  works  of  Michael  Angelo.  On  the 
ceiling  was  his  great  fresco,  the  "Prepara- 
tion of  the  World  for  the  Advent  of  Christ  " 
In  the  centre  are  the  "  Creation,"  "  Fall,'7 
and  "Deluge,"  with  the  "Sacrifice  and 
Mockery  of  Noah."  Then  prophets,  sibyls, 
angels,  figures,  reliefs,  medallions,  &c.,and 
the  following  representations:  1.  God  the 
Father  Separates  Light  from  Darkness;  2. 
Creation  of  the  Sun  and  Moon  ;  3.  Separa- 
tion of  the  Land  and  Sea ;  4.  Adam  In- 
spired with  Life ;  5.  The  Creation  of  Eve  ; 
6.  The  Fall  and  Banishment  from  Para- 
dise; 7.  Noah's  Thank-offering  after  the 
Deluge;  8.  The  Deluge;  9.  Noah's  Intoxi- 
cation, &c.  ;  and  in  addition  twelve  other 
large  groups  of  equal  splendor,  and  all  so 
grandly  natural  that  the  scenes  themselves 
appear  almost  as  if  they  were  real.  On  the 
wall  of  the  altar  end  of  the  chapel  is  the 
famous  fresco  by  the  same  great  mast°r,  the 
"  Last  Judgment,"  50  feet  high  and  64  feet 
wide,  containing  over  three  hundred  figures 
larger  than  life.  One's  blood  curdles  at  the 
sight.  No  wonder  the  artist  himself  fled 
from  it  repeatedly  while  painting  it. 

But  I  will  stop.  Ever  since  I  began  this 
I  have  felt  the  utter  folly  of  attempting  to 
describe    here    anything  of   what    I    saw. 


Whole  volumes  have  been  devoted  to  that 
work,  which  are  accessible  to  all.  What  T 
may  do  some  day  is  to  return  to  these  glo- 
rious sights,  and  tell  you  some  of  the  les- 
sons 1  learned  from  them. 


The   Enamelled  Cameo   Souvenir  or 
Glace  Portrait  Process. 

BY  E.  D.  ORMSBV. 

Take  a  piece  of  clear  glass,  free  from 
bubbles  or  scratches,  and  clean  by  immers- 
ing in  a  solution  of  concentrated  potash 
over  night.  Wash  thoroughly  in  clean 
water,  and  immerse  for  a  few  minutes  in  a 
mixture  of  nitric  acid  and  water,  one  part 
of  acid  to  three  of  water ;  let  dry  from  the 
acid  without  washing.  Now  coat  your  plate 
with  the  following:  plain  collodion,  one 
ounce;  glycerin,  one-half  drachm,  and  let 
dry.  Then  take  sheet  gelatin  and  soak  it 
in  cold  water  until  it  is  soft,  then  put  it  in 
a  cream  pitcher,  or  a  wide-mouth  bottle,  and 
cover  with  water;  dissolve  the  gelatin  by 
heat,  immerse  your  print  in  this  warm 
gelatin,  and  lay  it  face  downward  on  the 
collodionized  plate,  carefully  pressing  out 


all  air-bubbles ;  now  cement  with  gelatin 
a  piece  of  thin  Bristol  board,  previously 
dampened  to  make  it  pliable,  to  the  back  of 
your  print,  let  dry  thoroughly,  and  loosen 


232 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGE  APHEE. 


the  edges  with  a  knife-blade,  by  running 
around  the  glass  between  the  print  and 
glass,  when  the  whole  thing  will  leave  the 
glass  with  a  very  superior  polish  ;  it  is  now 
ready  for  pressing  in  Orrnsby's  cameo  press, 
the  simplest,  most  practical,  and  cheapest 
cameo  press  ever  invented  Any  carpenter 
will  make  one  for  about  three  dollars.  The 
press  and  process  are  free  for  the  use  of  the 
fraternity.  This  process  is  superior  to  any. 
Where  rubber  is  used  in  the  collodion,  they 
will  never  crack  in  pressing,  and  where  the 
rubber  gives  less  polish  than  collodion 
alone,  the  addition  of  glycerin  gives  an 
extra  polish.  I  inclose  you  a  photograph 
of  my  press.  It  is  made  of  maple  wood, 
three-quarter  inches  thick.  The  raised 
centre  for  moulding  is  glued  on.  It  is  so 
simple  the  photograph  explains  it.  The  top 
and  bottom  are  hinged  together.  My  press 
and  process  have  the  indorsement  of  the 
Chicago  Photographic  Society. 

309  West  Ma  dison  Street, 
Chicago. 


Albumen  Chlorobromide  Process.* 

IiY  M.   CAREY  LEA. 

It  has  been  objected  to  the  various  forms 
of  the  emulsion  process,  that  it  is  inconve- 
nient to  be  obliged  to  use  the  emulsion 
within  a  certain  limit  of  hours  after  it  is 
mixed.  If  kept  beyond  that  time,  inferior 
results  are  obtained. 

It  occurred  to  me  that  the  new  process 
which  I  have  lately  described,  and  sent  a 
brief  sketch  of  to  the  last  meeting  of  the 
Photographic  Society,  that  in  which  the 
plate  is  plunged  direct  into  a  bath  of  albu- 
men, and  other  agents,  as  soon  as  set,  differed 
so  much  in  its  characteristics  from  the  older 
processes,  that  possibly  this  difficulty  as  to 
the  keeping  of  the  emulsion  might  not  exist. 
So  far  I  have  been  able  to  make  but  a  single 
experiment  in  this  direction,  but  the  result 
was  very  curious  and  satisfactory. 

Having  on  one  occasion  a  small  quantity 
of  emulsion  over,  after  coating  a  batch  of 
plates,    I   set    it    aside,   and    subsequently 

*  Read  at  the  June  meeting  of  the  Photo- 
graphic Society  of  Philadelphia. 


coated  a  plate  with  it.  Nineteen  days  had 
elapsed  between  the  mixing  of  the  emulsion 
and  the  coating  of  this  plate  with  it.  It 
lay  aside  for  about  two  weeks,  and  was  then 
exposed  and  developed.  I  inclose  a  print 
from  this  negative.  The  print  does  not  do 
justice  to  the  negative,  which  requires  deeper 
printing,  but  at  this  moment  I  have  not  a 
really  good  print  at  hand.  It  will  serve  to 
show,  however,  that  the  negative  is  an  ex- 
cellent one. 

Of  course  a  principle  cannot  be  estab- 
lished upon  a  single  trial.  That  the  first  (and 
only)  trial  made  should  be  a  complete  suc- 
cess, certainly  argues  very  favorably,  and 
it  seems  highly  probable  that  in  the  case  of 
my  new  process,  the  emulsion  without  any 
special  preparation  can  be  kept  for  a  con- 
siderable time  without  prejudice  to  the 
result. 

The  emulsion  was  made  as  follows: 


Cadmium  Bromide  (dry), 
Ammonium  Bromide, 
Cobalt  Chloride,     . 
Potassium  Nitrite, 
Aqua  Regia,  . 


6 1  grs.  tooz. 

U    "       " 
1    "      " 

1  " 

2  drops  to  oz. 

Sensitized  with  silver  nitrate,  twenty-five 
grains  to  the  ounce.  Preservative  bath, 
gallic  acid  with  tannin  and  albumen  as  al- 
ready described. 

This  plate  was  as  sensitive  as  those  made 
with  freshly  prepared  emulsion  It  was 
tested  against  one,  and  found  to  be  in  no 
respect  inferior. 


RAMBLING  REMARKS. 

BY   JOHN   L.    GIHON. 

I  well  remember  that  when  a  child, 
playing  with  others  of  the  same  age  near 
our  school,  our  party  was  one  day  surprised 
by  the  somewhat  sudden  appearance  in  our 
midst  of  an  oddly  apparelled  elderly  wo- 
man. We  instinctively  knew  her  to  be  a 
"  Gypsy,"  and  would  have  shrunk  away, 
had  not  the  gentleness  of  her  voice  and 
evident  harmlessness  of  intention  dissipated 
our  fears.  Although  she  had  a  kind  word 
for  each,  she  singled  me  out,  and  drawing 
me  towards  her,  bade  me  give  her  my  hand. 

Then,  in  true  dramatic  style,  she  scanned 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


233 


the  many  lines  that  are  curiously  enough 
engraven  upon  its  palm,  and  she  told  me 
that  my  life  would  be  full  of  fortunes  and 
of  misadventures.  She  traced  crossing  upon 
crossing,  giving  to  each  some  peculiar 
name,  and  finally,  when  with  a  pitying  look 
she  passed  me  aside  with  a  blessing,  she 
again  told  mo  that  my  career  would  be  as 
varied  as  the  map  which  she  had  been  study- 
ing. She  may  have  been  no  prophetess, 
but  thus  far  events  certainly  justify  me  in 
giving  her  the  credit  of  having  been  a  re- 
markably good  guesser.  1  merely  mention 
the  incident  from  the  fact  that  my  photo- 
graphic experience  has  been  equally  as  sin- 
gular as  has  been  that  of  my  social  exist- 
ence. If  there  is  a  peculiarly  exceptiona- 
ble task  to  undertake,  at  all  attainable  by 
photography,  it  seems  my  lot  to  fall  into  it, 
and  the  consequence  is,  that  in  the  prosecu- 
tion of  the  art  I  have  found  myself  in  some 
very  queer  places,  attended  by  all  sorts  of 
circumstances.  Even  here  the  fatality  at- 
tends me,  and  I  might  stretch  out  many  a 
chapter  of  more  than  passing  interest. 

A  commission,  the  fulfilment  of  which 
I  undertook  the  other  day,  nearly  termi- 
nated on  my  part  in  a  "  coup  de  soleil,"  for 
although  I  am  now  writing  in  January, 
the  sun  in  these  latitudes  pours  down  his 
warmest  rays,  and  as  the  adventure  was  of 
a  marinal  character,  a  good  deal  of  sailing 
was  necessary  to  reach  and  to  return  from 
the  object  of  interest.  The  latter  was  a 
vessel  that  had  lately  been  towed  into  port 
by  one  of  the  large  steamers  trading  here. 
"When  found  drifting  with  the  current 
along  the  coast,  her  interior  was  a  mass  of 
smouldering  fire,  but  her  hull,  being  of 
metal,  merely  glowed  as  only  red-hot  iron 
can.  Speculation  was  rife  as  to  what  had 
become  of  the  officers  and  crew,  until  they 
made  their  appearance  in  the  city,  after 
having  trudged  through  many  a  weary 
league  of  sand.  They  told  of  the  fire 
which  suddenly  burst  upon  them,  of  their 
well-grounded  fears  of  the  explosion  which 
they  knew  must  follow  (powder  being 
aboard),  of  their  abandonment  of  the  ves- 
sel, of  their  precarious  search  for  land,  and 
of  their  after  hardships.  They  were  sur- 
prised to  find  that  the  remnants  of  their 
once  beautiful  craft  had  arrived  in  advance, 


and  now  began  a  disputation  as  to  who  tiny 
should  revert  to.  Again,  the  underwriters 
in  London  had  to  be  satisfied  as  to  the  con- 
dition of  the  wreck.  A  rational  man  sug- 
gested that  as  to  the  latter,  a  photoyraph 
of  the  interior  would  be  the  best  report  that 
could  possibly  be  devised.  Thus  our  con- 
nection with  the  affair  commenced. 

1  have  worked  under  difficulties  many  a 
time,  but  have  never  yet  encountered 
greater  ones  than  this  offered.  The  cap- 
tain must  have  been  a  practical  joker,  for 
he  assured  me  that  I  would  suffer  no  incon- 
venience, that  there  was  plenty  of  fresh 
water  on  board,  and  several  state-rooms 
sufficiently  dark  for  manipulation.  As  he 
professed  to  have  been  an  amateur  photog- 
rapher, I  had  confidence  in  his  statements, 
and  to  my  after  disgust  abided  by  them. 

Starting  off  in  one  of  the  little  sail-boats 
that  constantly  hover  about  the  moles,  we 
soon  get  upon  the  bosom  of  the  harbor,  and 
as  the  wind  freshens,  ship  just  enough  of 
the  sea  to  completely  drench  all  of  the  lug- 
gage. 

You  know  what  the  result  will  be — swelled 
apparatus,  and  chloride  of  silver  wherever 
the  nitrate  has  been.  At  last  we  reach  the 
seared  and  disabled  ship,  and  find  no  way  of 
getting  on  board.  A  grapnel,  however, 
skilfully  thrown,  attaches  itself  to  the  bul- 
warks, and  gives  us  a  chance  to  clamber  up 
and  over  the  sides,  where  we  find  no  deck 
to  stand  upon.  An  immense  shell  filled 
with  debris,  with  twisted  beams,  with  im- 
mense links  of  chain,  rusted  anchors,  bro- 
ken machinery,  sections  of  tubular  masts, 
knotted  coils  of  wire  rope,  all  this  and 
more  similar  in  character,,  make  up  the 
scene  we  are  to  represent.  Nothing  daunted, 
ingenuity  has  to  be  taxed  to  get  the  traps 
on  board,  and  to  establish  a  place  for  them. 

It  needs  no  scrutiny  to  establish  the  irony 
of  the  captain's  remarks  concerning  the 
rooms.  There  remains  to  us  the  necessity 
for  working,  and  there  looms  upon  us  the 
fact  that  there  is  no  place  for  the  purpose. 
Hesitation  is  useless,  and  as  all  that  re- 
mains about  us  is  of  iron,  we  proceed  to 
make  use  of  it  and  actually  build  a  dark- 
room, or  rather  kennel,  out  of  great  sheets, 
which  have  to  be  lugged  from  various  parts 
of  the  piled-up  rubbish.     Of  course  it  is  not 


234 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


light-tight,  so  we  strip  off  coats  and  vests, 
and  all  that  decency  will  allow,  and  cover 
over  cracks,  fill  up  corners,  and  succeed  in 
having  created  a  stifling,  nasty,  dirty  hole, 
into  which  we  have  to  crawl,  and  out  of 
which  we  return  thanks  for  the  privilege 
of  getting.  And  now  for  the  water!  To  be 
sure  there  is  plenty  around  us,  hut  it  is  as 
the  old  poem  reminds  us,  "  Water,  water 
everywhere,  but  not  a  drop  to  drink,"  and 
as  we  revise  it,  not  a  drop  with  which  to 
wash.  Diligent  search  though  reveals  the 
tops  of  iron  tanks  amidst  the  chaos,  and  in 
the  bottom  of  them  we  discover  sufficient  if 
we  can  get  it.  More  impromptu  mechani- 
cal devices  come  to  our  aid,  and  we  finally 
commence  work.  It  would  be  tedious  to 
recapitulate  the  obstacles  that  obtrude  them- 
selves at  every  step,  but  they  can  be  imag- 
ined when  I  explain  that  we  were  working 
14  by  17  inch  plates  ;  that  there  was  a  heavy 
wind  blowing;  that  the  vessel  itself  had 
some  motion  ;  that  there  was  no  proper  sup- 
port for  the  camera,  and  that  it  would  be 
impossible  to  suggest  any  one  point  that  a 
photographer  could  look  upon  as  conducive 
to  either  comfort  or  convenience.  A  suc- 
cessful negative  ultimately  crowning  our 
efforts,  must  be  looked  upon  as  the  gaining 
of  a  genuine  triumph. 

In  strong  contrast  to  the  above  were  the 
incidents  connected  with  a  picture-making 
excursion  that  we  undertook  not  long  since, 
in  fact  upon  that  which  is  here  known  as 
"  All  Souls'  Day."  Then  we  had  no  reason 
to  complain  of  an  insufficiency  of  darkness 
where  we  conducted  our  chemical  work,  for 
we  were,  literally,  "  down  amongst  the  dead 
men."  For  a  room,  we  improvised  a  niche 
in  one  of  the  galleries  beneath  the  mauso- 
leum or  chapel  in  the  midst  of  the  Spanish 
cemetery.  Here  daylight  never  enters,  and 
although  floor,  walls,  and  ceilings  alike  are 
of  white  marble,  we  can  splatter  silver  with 
impunity,  and  feel  assured  that  no  action  of 
light  will  ever  affect  it.  It  was  a  strange 
and  weird-like  place  in  which  to  work  ;  and 
as  we  groped  around,  assisted  only  by  the 
glimmer  of  a  candle  that  seemed  to  make 
the  surrounding  obscurity  more  intense,  I 
have  no  doubt  that  we  in  turn  presented  a 
study  of  light  and  shade  much  more  pic- 
turesque to  the  observer  than  the  scene  was 


pleasant  to  ourselves.  We  knew  that  all  of 
these  labyrinthine  galleries  contained  scores 
of  dead  ;  and  as  the  walls  repeated  hollow 
echoes,  each  one  different  in  tone,  but  all  in 
imitation  of  the  noises  made  by  our  every 
motion,  it  required  no  great  imagination  to 
fancy  that  the  stark  occupants  about  us  were 
mocking  our  work.  What  a  relief  it  was 
to  rush  into  the  open  air  with  our  p!ate> 
and  linger  in  the  sunshine  over  our  work 
outside.  We  had  been  commissioned  by 
several  parties  to  make  views  of  the  resting- 
places  of  their  departed  ones,  and  this  day 
was  selected  on  account  of  the  extraordinary 
and  beautiful  appearance  the  cemetery  then 
presents. 

There  is  an  annual  decoration  upon  this 
anniversary,  and  the  entire  population  be- 
come visitors.  From  dawn  until  dusk  a 
continuous  swarm  of  human  beings  pass  to 
and  fro  under  the  heavy  archways,  and 
throng  the  grounds.  The  groups  of  people 
present  every  variety  of  character,  every 
condition  of  life,  and  every  phase  of  senti- 
ment. There  is  a  curious  mixture  of  the 
holiday  spirit,  tinctured  with  a  certain  per- 
vading disposition  to  sadness.  From  the 
belfry  there  peals  out  upon  the  air  a  con- 
stant and  mournful  tolling  that  at  once  af- 
fects the  mind.  Don't  look  up  though,  for 
if  you  do  the  illusion  is  at  once  dispelled  by 
your  observing  that  the  ropes  are  pulled  and 
the  hammers  worked  by  a  crowd  of  young- 
sters, who  are  anything  but  reverential  in 
performing  their  duties. 

The  place  itself  is  beautifully  situated 
upon  the  slope  of  a  hill  that  extends  down 
to  the  water's  edge.  It  is  divided  into  three 
distinct  areas,  each  one  of  which  must  be 
intended  for  different  grades  of  society.  The 
elegance  of  the  first  one  is  in  strong  contrast 
to  the  poverty-stricken  appearance  of  the 
last,  where  sticks  and  numbers  planted 
thickly,  even  upon  the  gravel- walks,  indi- 
cate how  crowded  the  ground  must  be  with 
worn-out  humanity.  Each  space  is  sur- 
rounded by  a  very  high  wall  that  appears 
wondrously  thick.  It  is  but  a  honeycomb, 
however;  that  is,  it  is  made  up  of  a  vast 
number  of  cells  or  vaults,  panelled  in  front. 
Every  one  of  these  cells  is  a  depository  for 
the  dead,  and  the  panels  become  suitable 
places  for  inscribing  the  names  of  the  de- 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGKA  PHEP. 


235 


ceased.  Upon  these,  too,  are  hung  the  dec- 
orations, the  tributes  of  love  and  respect, 
that  when  once  placed  here,  are  allowed  to 
remain  until  wind  and  weather  destroy 
them.  For  weeks  previous  to  the  day,  the 
store  windows  are  filled  with  these  offerings, 
and  I  can  assure  you  that  much  taste  and 
money  are  expended  on  their  preparation. 

Black  and  white  beads  strung  on  wires, 
fashioned  into  intricate  patterns,  twined 
around  with  ribbons,  surmounted  by  appro- 
priate mottoes  and  encircling  centre  pieces, 
such  as  pictures  or  plaster  casts  of  scriptural 
subjects,  form  the  main  features  of  these 
emblems.  The  cross,  urn,  and  wreath  are 
of  course  favorite  shapes.  The  walls  spoken 
of  are  absolutely  covered  with  them.  Occa- 
sionally a  plate  glass  front  replaces  the  marble 
panel.  Behind  it  you  will  then  see  thesesame 
decorations  accompanied  with  pyramids  of 
flowers,  lighted  wax  candles,  and  occasion- 
ally a  picture  of  the  departed  loved  one.  We 
finished  some  fine  photographs  and  porce- 
lains for  this  very  purpose.  The  entire  cus- 
tom is,  after  all,  a  pretty  one,  and  entirely 
commendable,  proving,  as  it  does,  that  those 
who  have  gone  before  are  remembered,  at 
the  least,  once  a  year. 

(To  be  continued.) 


Class  in  Landscape  Photography. 

As  the  season  for  field  work  is  upon  us, 
and  fast  passing,  we  will  dwell  no  more  on 
formulae,  but  pass  to  active  outdoor  work, 
which  will  no  doubt  be  most  interesting  to 
the  class. 

All  landscape  workers  are  willing  always 
to  dispense  with  all  superfluous  apparatus, 
and  any  method  of  working  by  which  the 
amount  of  trappings  can  be  reduced  will  be 
hailed  with  satisfaction.  Dry  plates  are 
the  most  convenient  in  this  respect,  but  the 
amount  of  practice  required  by  most  of  the 
dry  processes,  to  work  them  successfully, 
renders  them  impracticable  for  any  but  ex- 
perienced workers.  We  shall,  therefore, 
adhere  for  the  present,  to  wet  plates,  with 
such  modifications  of  working  as  shall  seem 
to  promise  the  greatest  success.  The  emi- 
nent photographer,  Mr.  J.  W.  Black,  of 
Boston,  to  whose  article  in  Mosaics  for  1874, 


we  have  already  referred,  says  further  :  "  I 
use  nothing  to  preserve  my  plates,  neither 
do  I  wash  them  with  vmter,  but  simply  ex- 
pose them,  develop  them  with  the  usual 
iron  developer,  consisting  of  nothing  but 
iron,  water,  and  acetic  acid,  in  proper  pro- 
portions. After  development,  which  I 
allow  to  go  as  long  as  it  will  (the  time  being 
right),  I  then  drain  and  put  into  a  grooved 
box,  the  plates  face  to  face,  near  together, 
a  bit  of  wet  paper  on  the  top.  They  will 
keep  for  twenty-four  hours  in  this  way,  and 
then  may  be  taken  to  the  rooms,  washed 
and  redeveloped,  or  not,  as  they  require. 
If  I  wish  to  keep  them  a  week  or  more  in 
this  condition,  I  can  do  so,  and  they  may 
be  kept  so  perfectly  well.  I  simply  put  a 
little  ball  of  paper  between  the  four  corners 
of  the  front  glasses,  and  put  them  face  to 
face,  and  a  wet  paper  around  the  edges. 
They  will  keep  any  length  of  time,  and  re- 
develop <>r  fix  just  as  well  as  at  the  first 
moment  of  taking.  Bemember,  no  wash- 
ing, no  preservation  of  any  kind.  This  I 
have  practiced  for  five  years  with  success." 
This  is  Mr.  Black's  method  of  working 
with  his  acid  bath  ;  whether  it  would  do  as 
well  with  any  bath  could  soon  be  demon- 
strated by  experiment.  The  advantages  of 
such  a  method  are  very  obvious,  and  we 
think  it  well  worth  practicing. 

We  have  also  another  in  the  same  direc- 
tion which  we  give,  by  Mr.  W.  T.  Wilkin- 
son, an  English  photographer.  In  refer- 
ence to  his  landscape  work  he  says  :  "  There 
is  nothing  new  about  the  method  until  the 
negative  is  developed,  when,  instead  of,  as 
usual,  washing  the  developer  away,  its 
further  action  is  stopped  by  flooding  the 
plate  with  a  little  of  a  mixture  of  acetic 
acid  and  water.  This  is  allowed  to  perme- 
ate the  film ;  the  plate  is  then  drained 
slightly  and  put  into  a  metal  box,  to  be 
finished  at  leisure,  which  may  be  done  in 
an  hour  or  a  week.  By  the  foregoing,  it 
will  be  noticed  that  not  a  drop  of  water  for 
washing  is  required.  This  has  many  ad- 
vantages, amongst  which  are  these:  water 
has  not  to  be  sought  before  a  picture  can  be 
attempted,  nor  has  it  to  be  carried  into 
localities  where  none  is.  Many  fine  views 
have  been  abandoned  because  either  the 
operator  had  finished  all  his  water,  or  none 


236 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


was  to  be  had  handy.  The  advantages  of 
not  taking  intensifier  and  fixer  as  well  as 
water,  are  not  all  the  benefits  arising,  but 
the  negatives  are  more  likely  to  be  first- 
rate,  as  at  home  more  time  can  be  given 
to  the  task  of  intensifying,  which  has  then 
a  better  chance  of  being  properly  done, 
than  when  done  in'  the  field,  in  the  hurry 
of  work,  when  a  deal  of  work  is  tried  to  be 
done  in  a  little  time." 

With  these  good  practical 'suggestions,  as 
to  working  the  chemicals,  we  have  a  few 
hints  of  a  little  different  nature,  from 
Linn's  "  Lookout  Landscape  Photogra- 
phy," on  taking  the  field  : 

"  Having  chosen  the  spot,  pitch  your  tent 
in  a  cool,  shady  place,  as  convenient  to  the 
location  of  your  camera  as  possible. 

"  Put  things  in  order  for  operating.  Go 
to  work  with  coolness,  deliberation,  and 
confidence.  Throw  off  all  care,  constraint, 
and  nervousness.  Woo  dame  Nature  in  her 
mildest  and  happiest  mood.  Let  your  soul 
be  inspired  and  your  senses  charmed  by  her 
matchless  beauties.  Take  your  time  to  it. 
Strivelovingiy,perseveringly,  intelligently, 
and  that  measure  of  success  which  crowns 
the  true  artist  will  gladden  your  heart  at 
last.  Let  every  weary  careworn  operator 
take  a  new  lease  of  life,  by  making  a  cam- 
paign in  the  woods  and  mountains.  Eman- 
cipate yourself  from  the  routine  of  the  gal- 
lery, and  the  baneful  odors  of  the  chemical 
room,  for  communion  with  nature  and  the 
health-giving  breezes  of  heaven.  Do  not 
waste  your  time  or  material  in  operating  on 
a  windy  day ;  you  will  have  ill  success 
when  every  leaf  and  branch  is  swaying  in 
the  wind.  Learn  to  let  well  enough  alone, 
in  the  condition  of  your  bath  and  chemicals, 
but  never  work  with  them  out  of  order/' 


ART  STUDIES  FOR  ALL. 
X. 

ACCESSORIES. 

73.  In  no  direction,  probably,  have  pho- 
tographers erred  so  much  as  in  the  use  of 
accessories ;  and  yet  there  is  scarcely  any 
pictorial  subject  that  does  not  require  the 
expression  and  character  obtained  by  the 
introduction  of  some  accessory. 


74.  Nothing  has  so  bad  an  effect  as  a 
picture  crowded  with  accessories  that  have 
no  connection  with  the  principal  subject. 
Many  good  artists  run  to  excess  in  this 
direction,  and  all  rules  of  art  and  good 
taste  have  been  so  outraged  by  the  great 
mass  that  have  used  accessories  indiscrim- 
inately, without  regard  to  fitness  or  effect, 
that  the  demand  for  pictures  of  this  style 
has  almost  entirely  ceased,  and  the  bust  pic- 
ture, with  but  little  more  than  the  head  and 
shoulders,  has  become  most  in  vogue. 

75.  It  is  not  to  be  understood,  however, 
that  accessories  consist  only  in  the  objects 
that  may  be  placed  in  the  picture  indepen- 
dent of  the  subject,  such  as  chairs,  tables, 
columns,  &c.  ;  but  the  drapery  that  may 
compose  the  costume  is  an  important  acces- 
sory, requiring  taste  and  skill  in  its  arrange- 
ment. 

76.  It  is  universally  allowed  that  Baffa- 
elle  excelled  all  other  painters  in  a  graceful 
arrangement  of  drapery,  and  a  natural  dis- 
position of  the  folds.  By  studying  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  ancients  he  learned  to  consider 
the  figure  as  the  principal  part,  and  that 
drapery  should  be  regarded  as  an  accessory; 
that  it  is  intended  to  cover,  and  not  to  con- 
ceal ;  that  it  is  employed  not  from  caprice, 
but  from  necessity;  consequently,  the  dress 
should  not  be  so  narrow  as  to  constrain  the 
members,  nor  so  ample  as  to  conceal  them, 
but  suitably  adapted  to  the  size  and  attitude 
of  the  figures  represented. 

77.  The  photographic  artist  has  his  dra- 
pery under  his  control  quite  as  much  as  the 
painter,  and  there  is  nothing  in  connection 
with  composition  that  requires  more  careful 
study  and  a  closer  observance  of  nature  than 
the  disposition  of  draperies.  Even  in  the 
simple  bust  picture,  where  there  is  so  little 
to  display,  its  effect  is  wonderful  in  giving 
a  proper  balance  to  the  lines  and  contribut- 
ing to  the  unity  of  the  whole.  But  how 
much  more  important  is  it  in  a  full-length 
figure,  where  its  flowing  lines  and  graceful 
folds  may  be  made  to  not  only  give  support 
and  symmetry  to  the  subject,  but  breadth 
and  force  to  the  whole,  by  a  proper  distri- 
bution of  light  and  shade. 

78.  Variety  in  the  use  of  accessories  is  a 
necessity  that  stimulates  study  and  inven- 
tion.    Nature  never  repeats  herself  even  in 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHEE. 


237 


two  sides  of  a  leaf.  Such  precision  belongs 
only  to  machine  work;  and  in  studying  na- 
ture we  learn  that  variety  is  no  less  neces- 
sary to  a  pleasing  composition  than  unity. 
It  is  the  want  of  this  that  has  compelled  so 
limited  a  use  of  accessories  at  the  present 
time.  The  incongruity  of  photographing 
lawyers,  statesmen,  artists,  farmers,  preach- 
ers, ladies,  and  babies,  all  with  the  same 
surroundings,  became  too  monotonous  to  be 
tolerated,  and  those  who  could  not  remedy 
the  evil  and  retain  the  style,  have  done  well 
to  substitute  a  style  that  was  quite  sure  to 
give  the  variety  that  nature  furnishes  in 
the  ever-varying  phases  of  human  forms 
and  features. 

79.  A  judicious  use  of  accessories  requires 
that  they  should  correspond  with  the  char- 
acter of  the  subject.  If  it  is  light  and  gay, 
a  much  greater  variety  of  objects  may  be 
admitted  than  if  it  is  grave  and  majestic. 
Hy  multiplying  objects  a  greater  variety  is 
obtained  in  line,  and  light  and  shade,  which 
contributes  to  gayety.  A  variety  of  objects 
is  inconsistent  with  the  simplicity  so  essen- 
tial to  the  grand  style.  The  best  works  of 
art,  those  that  are  the  most  pleasing,  the 
most  enduring,  and  produce  the  most  forci- 
ble impression,  are  always  characterized  by 
simplicity.  In  pictures  of  this  character, 
variety  must  be  considered  with  reference 
to  that  undivided  attention  which  a  great 
subject  demands. 

80.  In  the  use  of  accessories  proportion  is 
an  important  consideration.  It  is  requisite 
in  everything  intended  to  please  the  eye. 
In  works  of  art  it  refers  first  to  size ;  next 
to  the  degree  of  light  and  shade ;  and  again , 
to  the  force  of  expression  required  in  the 
character  of  the  scene  represented.  Any 
work  is  in  good  proportion  if  its  details  are 
neither  too  large  nor  too  small  when  viewed 
in  relation  to  the  whole  or  to  each  other. 
For  example:  if  a  man  be  surrounded  with 
furniture  the  proper  size  for  a  child,  he 
would  be  made  to  look  like  a  giant;  while, 
on  the  other  hand,  immense  secretaries  and 
mammoth  chairs  dwarf  the  subject,  giving 
it  an  air  of  weakness  and  inferiority. 

81.  Harmony  is  an  important  element  in 
a  composition.  There  must  be  harmony  of 
line,  harmony  of  grouping,  harmony  of  light 
and  shade,  harmony  of  expression.     Each 


part  must  be  so  adapted  as  to  correspond 
with  the  rest.  The  attitude  must  be  in 
keeping  with  the  expression  ;  and  the  ac- 
cessories must  be  true,  both  to  the  character 
and  the  age  represented.  A  harmonious 
whole  is  always  more  or  less  pleasing  in 
itself,  independent  of  subject  or  style. 

82.  Lastly,  breadth  is  essential  to  har- 
mony. According  to  Allston,  '-by  breadth 
is  meant  such  a  massing  of  the  quantities, 
whether  by  color,  light,  or  shadow,  as  shall 
enable  the  eye  to  pass,  without  obstruction 
and  by  easy  transitions,  from  one  part  to 
another,  so  that  it  shall  appear  to  take  in 
the  whole  at  a  glance."  To  this  unity  is 
essential.  When  the  objects  introduced  in 
a  composition  are  multiplied,  scattered,  and 
divided,  the  eye,  in  searching  for  the  prin- 
cipal object  of  interest,  becomes  wearied 
and  perplexed,  and  the  picture  is  then  said 
to  want  repose.  Unity,  however,  is  distinct 
from  harmony,  and  requires  one  point  of 
view,  one  focus  of  light,  one  prominent 
character  or  group,  one  leading  idea.  There 
may  be  unity  of  parts  when  harmony  in  the 
whole  is  entirely  wanting.  Accessories, 
then,  should  only  be  used  as  such,  and  cor- 
respond with  the  subject,  that  the  eye  will 
be  led  involuntarily  to  the  principal  figure, 
while  all  else  remains  subordinate  and  de- 
pendent. 


Medallion  Mask  for  Ferrotypes. 

A  correspondent  communicates  his 
method  of  making  the  above  as  follows  : 

I  first  had  made  a  frame,  30  by  40  inches, 
of  strips  half  an  inch  thick  by  two  inches 
wide;  then  I  got  a  piece  of  building-paper, 
tacked  it  to  the  frame,  and  trimmed  it 
around  so  that  it  was  the  same  size.  Now 
lay  the  frame  on  the  floor,  and  get  the  cen- 
tre by  laying  a  straight-edge  across  from 
corner  to  corner  each  way.  Make  a  pencil- 
mark,  and  you  have  a  x  in  the  centre; 
now  measure  from  the  x  the  longest  way  of 
the  frame,  7\  inches  each  way,  and  drive  a 
nail  through  into  the  floor  like  this  ;  now 
take  a  string  and  pass  . 

around  one  nail,  carry 
it  by  the  other  one, 
and  tie  it  just  2>\  in- 
ches beyond,  then  take 


^K 

e: 

■x 

') 

•) 

238 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


a  pencil,  put  it  inside  the  string,  mark 
around,  and  you  have  an  oval  16  by  21£; 
take  a  sharp  penknife  and  cut  it  out  care- 
fully, then  get  a  piece  of  bleached  muslin, 
and  paste  it  on  smooth,  cut  it  in  the  centre, 
and  paste  it  on  the  opposite  side,  turn  the 
cloth  in  and  put  it  down  smooth.  Now 
get  four  pieces,  six  feet  long  by  two  inches 
wide,  hinge  them  at  the 
top,  mount  your  frame, 
and  you  are  fixed  for 
making  Medallion  Fer- 
rotypes. The  paper  will 
warp  when  you  paste  on 
the  cloth,  but  never 
mind,  it  will  be  all  right  when  dry. 

C.  N.  Stevens. 
Prophetstown,  III. 


BATHS,   ETC. 

BY   W.    H.    POTTER. 

Having- cut  loose  from  portrait  photog- 
raphy, and  launched  into  landscape  photog- 
raphy, I  commenced  my  operations  this 
season  in  a  campaign  against  the  two  Vir- 
ginias. Of  course,  1  have  done  considerable 
outdoor  work,  which  led  me  to  take  this 
step,  but  heretofore  it  has  been  more  for 
recreation  and  personal  pleasure,  with  a 
fair  portrait  business  to  back  me;  now  it 
will  be  to  a  certain  degree,  a  question  of 
bread  and  butter,  combined  with  the  charms 
of  nature;  not  a  very  happy  combination, 
but  certain  to  exist  in  some  form. 

I  shall  not  describe  my  wagon  until  it  is 
completed,  when  you  may  expect  a  photo- 
graph of  it,  and  a  full  description.  It  is  to 
cost  $350,  and  has  been  thought,  dreamed, 
and  agonized  over  for  six  months  back. 

As  to  my  baths,  I  make  three  large  ones, 
two  iodized  almost  up  to  that  point  where 
it  ceases  to  be  a  virtue,  and  the  other  left 
plain,  but  all  as  pure  as  ice-water,  sunning, 
decanting,  and  filtering  can  make  them. 
The  bath-tub  is  filled  about  two-thirds  full. 
Whenever  the  bath  gives  signs  of  the  pres- 
ence of  too  much  iodide,  give  it  a  small 
dose  of  the  plain  bath,  not  too  much.  The 
bath  works  best  very  near  the  turning-point 
or  excess  of  iodide.  The  plain  solution  also 
decreases  the  quantity  of  alcohol  and  ether 


to  the  amount  of  solution.  You  can  keep 
on  adding,  from  time  to  time,  plain  solu- 
tion till  you  get  your  tub  full,  and  it  saves 
a  great  deal  of  time  when  dame  Nature  is 
balmy,  sunny,  beautiful,  and  calmly  sub- 
mits to  that  tide  of  success  "  which,,  taken 
at  the  flood,"  brings  forth  such  negatives 
that  make  your  heart  throb  for  more  room. 
Also,  the  plain  solution  is  ready  for  rede- 
veloping solutions  for  instantaneous  nega- 
tives, &c. 

Never  take  the  iodide  out  of  your  bath. 
It  is  only  a  waste  of  silver,  profitable  to  no 
one  but  the  refiner.  As  long  as  you  keep 
or  bring  your  bath  up  to  the  original  quan- 
tity and  strength,  you  will  not  have  pin- 
holes from  too  much  iodide.  Prove  it  by 
purifying  or  freeing  your  bath  of  alcohol, 
ether,  and  dirt,  and  by  adding  silver  and 
water,  and  bring  it  up  to  the  original  quan- 
tity. If  eighty-ounce  solution  at  forty 
grains  is  reduced  by  dirty  plates  to  sixty- 
ounce  solution,  you  may  expect  pinholes. 
Reduce  your  vital  force  from  eighty  degrees 
to  sixty  by  letting  off  your  blood,  and  I 
presume  you  would  feel  funny  too.  You 
eat  three  meals  a  day,  and  you  should  at 
least  give  your  bath  a  supper. 

Another  tight- top  bath  is  used  to  clear  up 
negatives.  Solar  negatives  should  be  fixed 
immediately  to  secure  all  the  delicacy  pos- 
sible. By  fixing  and  varnishing  good  neg- 
atives on  the  spot,  you  shall  not  have  cause 
to  regret  afterwards  that  you  possessed  so 
much  common  sense.  Those  gentlemen 
who  rush  through  the  country  making  fif- 
teen or  twenty  negatives  a  day,  must  retire 
sooner  or  later  before  the  men  who  make 
three  or  four  faultless  ones.  The  demand 
now  is  not  quantity  but  quality.  Land- 
scape photography  is  behindhand  in  prices, 
and  something  more,  is  in  the  mud.  But 
there  is  a  place  of  honor  and  profit  for  it, 
as  well  as  the  one  already  reached  by  por- 
trait photography. 

Another  tub  is  filled  with  acid.  After 
you  have  selected  two  of  the  best,  not  pass- 
able negatives  of  any  one  subject,  rub  the 
film  off  of  the  rest,  put  them  in  the  acid  a 
moment  and  wash  them,  and  if  time  is  not 
precious,  albumenize.  By  keeping  your 
plates  out  of  the  dirt,  cleaning  off,  and  using 
the  acid,  &c,  they  are  always  ready  to  be 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


239 


used  over  and  over  without  risk,  and  in  the 
long  run  you  save  time;  for  what  is  more 
mortifying,  when  the  light,  &c,  is  just 
right,  to  find  that  you  have  exposed  a  dirty 
plate? 

Make  at  least  two  good  negatives  of  the 
same  subject.  If  it  is  not  worth  two  nega- 
tives, don't  make  one,  as  there  is  no  fortune 
or  fame  in  it.  Aim  high,  you  will  come 
far  enough  short  then  ;  and  if  so,  where 
will  the  indifferent  or  "Tinkering  Jim" 
appear  ?  The  crown  is  for  that  man  who 
patiently  toils  till  he  reaches  the  top  of  the 
ladder.  What  is  the  comet  or  meteor  com- 
pared with  the  constancy  of  the  sun  ?  Ke- 
solve,  if  God  gives  you  life  and  health,  that 
you  will  reach  the  high  prize  you  have 
fixed  your  eyes  upon.  Don't  take  into 
consideration  failure  and  disappointment; 
they  are  only  your  drill  masters.  They  are 
only  mistakes  to  be  rectified  by  experience. 

In  my  next,  the  four  kinds  of  collodion 
used  in  my  operations,  the  developer,  and 
what  I  saw  on  the  Kanawha,  &c,  will  re- 
ceive attention. 

Mansfield,  Ohio. 

PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  FRANCE. 

BY    ERNEST    LACAN. 

I  have  now  in  hand  a  work  which  I  pur- 
pose to  publish  in  my  journal,  because  I 
believe  it  to  be  of  high  practical  utility;  it 
consists  of  articles  upon  the  special  hygiene 
of  photographers,  from  the  pen  of  a  highly 
experienced  doctor,  Mr.  Henri  Napias, 
physician  to  the  Mutual  Relief  Society  of 
Photographic  Employes.  In  order  to  make 
them  known  to  you  I  will  extract  some  of 
the  most  important  points,  those  from  which 
your  readers  can  derive  interest  and  profit. 
The  profession  of  photography  presents, 
like,  and  more  than  many  others,  its  incon- 
veniences and  its  dangers.  If  those  who 
engage  in  it  are  generally  better  educated 
than  the  workmen  in  other  branches  ;  if  the 
wages  which  they  draw  from  their  work 
are  ordinarily  rather  high,  and  consequently 
sufficiently  remunerative;  if  by  these  two 
causes  they  escape  the  baneful  morbid  in- 
fluences resulting  from  physical  and  mental 
suffering,  nevertheless  they  are  exposed  to 
a  certain  number  of  deleterious  influences 


due  to  the  atmosphere  in  which  they  live, 
and  to  the  daily  manipulation  of  poisonous 
chemical  substances.  For  example,  the 
air  of  the  laboratories  is  impregnated  with 
the  vapors  of  alcohol  and  ether,  which  act 
more  or  less  energetically.  Even  in  the 
case  of  those  who  have  acquired  a  habit  of 
breathing  them,  they  som"times  provoke 
vertigo,  vomiting,  and  especially  violent 
headaches,  resulting  in  a  tendency  to  bron- 
chitis, inflammation  of  the  lungs,  and  con- 
gestion of  the  brain.  In  order  to  escape 
from  the  effects  of  these  vapors,  the  photog- 
rapher should  avoid  above  all  the  abuse  of 
alcoholic  liquors,  which  increases  them  con- 
siderably. Dr.  Napias  advises  operators  to 
take  after  their  work  a  long  walk  in  the 
open  air.  He  also  advises  them  to  drink 
preferably  acidulated  beverages,  such  as 
lemonade,  Seltzer  water,  &c.  He  thinks 
that  they  could  also  measurably  counteract 
the  effects  of  the  ether  by  taking  morning 
and  night  a  wineglassful  of  wine  of  cin- 
chona. In  case  the  headaches  should  con- 
tinue, he  recommends  the  taking  of  a  few 
drops  of  ammonia  and  a  few  drops  of  vine- 
gar in  a  tumbler  of  sweetened  water. 

As  to  the  chemicals  passed  in  review  by 
Dr.  Napias  in  his  work,  there  is  one,  the 
cyanide  of  potassium,  that  he  would  like  to 
see  rigorously  excluded  from  every  atelier. 
The  picture  that  he  draws  of  its  effects  is 
frightful.  The  rapidity  with  which  they 
are  produced  is  something  terrible,  and  he 
would  like  all  photographers  who  use  this 
dangerous  substance  always  to  have  within 
reach  liquid  chlorine  (water  saturated  with 
chlorine  at  the  ordinary  temperature),  of 
which,  at  the  first  symptoms  of  poisoning, 
they  should  take  two  or  three  drops  in  a 
glass  of  water,  without  losing  time  to  add 
the  sugar.  The  person  should  then  Jie  down 
with  bottles  of  hot  water  placed  at  his  feet 
and  along  his  body,  and  the  windows  should 
be  opened  to  allow  as  much  air  as  possible 
to  enter.  Then  he  should  take  ten  drops 
of  laudanum  in  a  cup  of  coffee  or  tea  con- 
taining a  little  brandy  or  rum.  This  drink 
should  be  renewed  three  or  four  times  in 
the  space  of  from  one  to  two  hours. 

When  the  symptoms  are  more  serious  it 
is  necessary,  besides,  to  make  the  patient 
inhale  liquid  chlorine,  and  drink  every  five 


240 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


minutes  a  teaspoonful  of  a  potion  composed 
of  5  grammes  (77  grains)  of  liquid  chlorine, 
2  grammes  (31  grains)  of  chlorohydrate  of 
ammonia,  and  250 grammes  (8J  fluid  ounces) 
of  sweetened  water. 

In  poisoning  produced  by  the  nitrate  of 
silver  the  remedy  prescribed  by  Dr  Napias 
consists  in  taking  a  glass  of  water  highly 
salted  with  chloride  of  sodium  (common 
salt). 

Those  operators  who  frequently  handle 
bichromate  of  potash  are  liable  to  frequent 
colds  in  the  head  and  to  inflammation  of 
the  mucous  membrane,  which  may  produce 
fistulous  perforations.  It  is,  therefore,  nec- 
essary after  work  to  wash  the  hands,  the 
face,  and  even  the  nostrils.  In  case  that 
any  of  this  salt  should  have  been  taken  in- 
wardly, it  would  be  necessary  to  take  imme- 
diately some  lime-water,  mixed  with  milk 
or  albumen,  and  to  actively  rub  tbe  legs 
and  the  arms  with  alcohol  and  ammonia,  5 
grammes  (77  grains)  of  ammonia  for  100 
grammes  (3T*0-  fluid  ounces)  of  alcohol. 

Dr.  Napias  proposes  to  pass  successively 
in  review  all  the  causes  which  can  affect  the 
health  of  photographers,  and  to  point  out 
the  method  of  treatment  to  be  employed  to 
successfully  resist  them. 

In  1869  Mr  Ducos  du  Hauron  made 
known  a  process  of  which  he  was  the  in- 
ventor, and  by' means  of  which  he  obtained 
colored  prints.  This  process  was  based  upon 
the  fact  that  red,  yellow,  and  blue,  mixed  in 
different  proportions,  give  all  the  known 
shades.  The  author  decomposed  into  three 
images  (one  red,  another  yellow,  and  the 
third  blue),  by  means  of  three  different 
mediums,  the  image  received  in  the  cam- 
era; he  then  reproduced  each  one  of  these 
negatives  with  its  elementary  color,  and 
finally  he  blended  these  three  monochrome 
paintings  into  a  single  one,  which  gave  a 
polychrome  reproduction  of  the  subject. 
The  practical  method  consists :  1st.  In  ob- 
taining three  negatives  of  the  same  subject, 
the  first  by  the  interposition  of  a  green 
glass,  the  second  through  a  violet-tinted 
glass,  and  the  third  by  means  of  an  orange- 
tinted  glass.  2d.  In  obtaining  by  carbon 
photography,  or  any  other  similar  process, 
a  red  positive  print  by  means  of  the  first 
negative,  a  yellow  one  with  the  second,  and 


a  blue  one  with  the  third  ;  these  three  im- 
ages incorporated  constitute  the  final  poly- 
chrome image.  The  results  thus  obtained, 
although  very  curious,  left  much  to  be  de- 
sired, and  the  great  length  of  the  pose  nec- 
essary for  the  obtaining  of  the  images  in 
the  camera  formed  by  the  orange-tinted  and 
yellow  glasses  rendered  the  process  almost 
impracticable.  But  recent  experiments 
published  by  Dr.  Vogel  have  enabled  Mr. 
Ducos  du  Hauron  to  modify  his  prepara- 
tions, and  to  considerably  improve  his  pro- 
cess. To-day  the  modus  operandi  published 
by  the  persevering  investigator  may  be 
summed  up  as  follows :  For  each  of  the  three 
negatives  which  he  has  to  make  he  uses  a 
collodion  composed  of  4  parts  of  iodide  for 
1  part  of  bromide,  and  he  adds  4  decigram- 
mes (6  grains)  of  red  coralline  soluble  in 
alcohol,  for  100  cubic  centimetres  (3T47 
fluid  ounces)  of  this  collodion.  He  sensitizes 
in  the  ordinary  manner,  and  develops  with 
iron  or  pyrogallic  acid,  and  fixes  the  image. 
He  then  covers  it  with  a  varnish  composed 
of: 

Water,       .         .     100  c.  c.    (33ff  fl.  oz.), 
Albumen,  .  .       25  c.  c.    (386  grains), 

Glycerin,   .         .         4  c.  c.   (62  grains), 

to  prevent  the  collodion  from  drying. 
When  the  plate  is  dry  he  removes  the  red 
color  due  to  the  coralline,  by  passing  over 
it  alcohol  at  36°,  which,  moreover,  has  the 
advantage  of  solidifying  the  image  by  coagu- 
lating the  albumen;  he  ends  by  the  appli- 
cation of  a  shellac  varnish. 

To  obtain  three  negatives  of  perfect 
sharpness  and  of  the  same  size,  each  one  of 
the  colored  glasses  used  in  their  production 
should  be  placed  in  the  camera,  quite  close 
to  the  sensitized  surface.  As  to  the  mono- 
chrome positives  they  may  be  obtained 
either  by  one  of  the  methods  of  printing 
with  fatty  inks  recently  perfected,  or  by 
the  processes  of  Woodbury,  Albert,  or  Ed- 
wards, or  especially  by  the  mode  of  print- 
ing derived  from  carbon  photography,  so 
skilfully  utilized  by  Mr.  Leon  Vidal  for 
his  polychromatic  prints. 

I  have  not  yet  received  specimens  made 
bjT  Mr.  Ducos  du  Hauron's  process,  and  I 
therefore  cannot  say  if  the  results  that  he 
obtains  surpass  those  that  Mr.  Leon  Vidal 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER, 


241 


readily  produces,  and  some  of  which  may 
now  be  seen  in  the  Photographic  Exposition 
at  the  Palace  of  Industry.  These  last  show 
considerable  progress,  and  upon  examina- 
tion there  can  be  no  doubt  of  the  future  re- 
served to  the  ingenious  method  due  to  the 
eminent  founder  of  the  Photographic  Society 
of  Marseilles  ;  even  at  the  present  time  his 
polychromatic  prints  rival  the  finest  pro- 
ductions of  chromolithography. 

Since  I  have  spoken  of  the  Photographic 
Exposition  I  will  say  that  it  is  far  superior 
to  all  those  that  have  preceded  it.  Among 
the  frames  displayed  in  it  there  are  very 
few  that  do  not  contain  specimens  that  are 
entirely  new,  of  important  improvements, 
or  of  recent  and  ingenious  applications. 
Among  the  novelties  the  splendid  prints  ob- 
tained by  the  new  method  of  enlargement, 
retouching,  and  printing,  designated  by  the 
name  of  Lambertypie,  attract  particular  at- 
tention. Here  again  there  is  progress,  not 
only  because  of  the  beauty  of  execution,  but 
also  on  account  of  the  facility  and  the 
rapidity  of  the  operations.  It  is  precisely  in 
this  double  aspect  that  are  manifested  the 
innovations  to  which  the  present  Exposition 
owes  all  its  interest.  I  will  again  refer  to 
this  Exposition  when  entirely  completed, 
and  when  the  catalogue  shall  have  been 
published. 

The  process  called  Lambertypie  causes 
here  genuine  enthusiasm,  and  our  principal 
portraitists,  Keutlinger  at  the  head,  have 
hastened  to  procure  licenses  so  as  to  make 
use  of  it  at  their  pleasure.  The  neo-olio- 
painting,  of  which  I  recently  sent  you  a 
specimen,  meets  with  a  no  less  favorable 
reception,  specially  in  the  provincial  towns. 

We  expect  shortly  to  have  another 
novelty  in  a  different  line,  but  this  one 
comes  to  us  from  America.  I  allude  to  the 
rolling  burnisher,  which  has  just  been  intro- 
duced here.  I  have  seen  it  in  operation, 
and  I  am  certain  that  in  France  it  will  meet 
with  very  great  success.* 

The  reproduction  of  the  principal  paint- 
ings composing  the  salon  of  1874,  now 
opened  in  the  Palace  of  Industry,  is  about 

*  We  are  told  that  Mr.  Entrekin  received 
orders  from  France  for  his  unrivalled  Enameller 
some  time  ago. — Ed. 


being  published.  Messrs.  Goupil,  Ferrier, 
and  Lecadre,  Marville  &  Michelez,  who 
make  a  specialty  of  this  line,  have  worked 
with  more  than  accustomed  ardor.  But 
the  copies  made  in  the  atelier  Goupil,  under 
the  direction  of  Mr.  Eousselon,  have  the 
advantage  of  being  printed  by  the  Wood- 
bury process,  or  of  being  transformed  into 
heliographic  prints.  Here  is  again  impor- 
tant progress. 


The  Sixth  Annual  Convention  and 
Exhibition  of  the  N.  P.  A. 

The  Convention  and  Exhibition  of  the 
National  Photographic  Association  for  the 
year  1874,  being  the  sixth  of  that  useful  in- 
stitution, is  now  among  the  things  of  the 
past.  All  things  considered,  it  was  a  grand 
success,  and  much  good  will  result  from  it. 

Among  other  matters  passed  at  the  Con- 
vention, was  a  resolution  that  instead  of 
trusting  to  the  magazines  to  publish  the 
proceedings,  that  the  Association  itself  pub- 
lish them  in  pamphlet  form,  and  sell  copies 
to  subscribers  at  cost.  This  leaves  us  to 
make  up  our  own  report,  which  follows  in 
the  shape  of  a  brief  synopsis  of  all  that 
transpired  worth  mentioning.  For  a  full 
report  of  all  the  addresses,  lectures,  debates, 
talks,  reports  of  committees,  resolutions, 
&c,  we  refer  our  readers  to  the  official 
publication,  and  hope  they  will  subscribe 
liberally  for  copies. 

We  arrived  upon  the  scene  several  days 
before  the  opening,  and  found  the  photo- 
graphic fraternity  of  Chicago  all  absorbed 
in  their  preparations  for  the  great  event. 
Local  Secretary  Hesler  was  busied  superin- 
tending the  erection  of  "space  "  for  the  ex- 
hibition of  the  pictures  and  of  merchan- 
dise, and  the  decoration  of  the  splendid  ex- 
hibition halls.  His  assistants  were  busied 
receiving  cases  of  goods  in  great  numbers 
from  all  directions,  and  the  scene  was  a 
most  animated  one. 

We  visited  several  galleries,  and  found 
the  work  of  preparation  going  on  with  like 
vigor.  The  stockdealers  too  were  vying 
with  each  other  to  see  who  could  make  the 
best  appearance,  in  order  to  attract  the 
visiting   photographers.      Messrs.    Kice   &. 


Hi 


242 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Thompson's  already  attractive  store  was 
put  in  prime  order,  and  a  large  banner  dis- 
played bearing  upon  its  face,  "  Photogra- 
phers, we  welcome  you."  Messrs.  N.  C. 
Thayer  &  Co.  made  their  display  in  their 
new  rooms  opposite.  Messrs.  J.  P.  Beard 
&  Co.  took  their  stand  with  the  rest,  and 
their  store  was  a  great  resort.  Mr.  C.  W. 
Stevens,  at  the  "Great  Central,"  certainly 
made  the  most  attractive  display.  Floating 
over  his  store  a  huge  American  flag  at- 
tracted attention,  and  the  front  of  the  store 
was  literally  alive  with  all  sizes  of  •'  stars 
and  stripes"  and  banners.  Up-stairs  was 
the  headquarters  of  the  Chicago  Photogra- 
phic Association,  and  a  register  was  placed 
there  for  visitors.  Mr.  Stevens  and  his 
able  assistant,  Mr.  G.  A.  Douglass,  were 
untiring  in  their  attentions  to  visitors — and 
so  seemed  the  whole  fraternity — bound  to 
give  every  visitor  as  good  a  time  as  they 
knew  how.  This  agreeable  spirit  was  kept 
up  during  the  whole  week,  as  we  can  testify 
from  pleasant  personal  experience. 

Tuesday,  the  eventful  day  for  the  opening 
•of  the  Convention,  arrived",  and  promptly 
•at  10  a  m.  President  Bogardus  sounded  the 
gavel,  and  proceeded  with  the  business  of 
the  Association. 

After  the  address  of  welcome  by  Local 
Secretary  Hesler,  and  the  response  of  the 
President,  routine  business  was  taken  up. 
The  report  of  the  Executive  Committee 
was  an  interesting  one,  as  it  gave  the  doings 
of  that  body  between  conventions,  and 
made  several  important  suggestions,  one 
being  with  regard  to  the  election  of  officers, 
and  the  other  concerning  the  failure  of  the 
members  to  pay  their  dues,  and  the  conse- 
quent debt  of  the  Association.  We  hope  at 
•no  future  time  in  the  life  of  the  Association 
will  the  Executive  Committee  feel  it  incum- 
bent upon  them  to  speak  of  either  of  these 
matters  again.  1.  Because  we  believe  the 
present  year,  1874,  will  see  the  Association 
free  from  debt,  and  a  growing  treasury  ; 
and  2.  Now  that  the  members  see  the 
Association  is  going  to  live  and  grow,  they 
will  hereafter  promptly  pay  their  dues. 
Time  will  tell  whether  or  not  we  are  too 
■sanguine  in  this  matter. 

The  Treasurer  reported  the  Association 
$3556  in  debt.     His  accounts  were  referred 


to  an  Auditing  Committee,  and  reported 
correct. 

As  recommended  by  the  Executive  Com- 
mittee, preparations  were  now  made  for  the 
election  of  officers.  Messrs.  Landy,  Hall, 
Knight,  Southworth,  and  Fitzgibbon  were 
appointed  as  a  committee  to  make  nomina- 
tions, to  report  at  the  afternoon  session. 
They  were  instructed  to  report  a  multi- 
plicity of  candidates  for  each  office. 

Tuesday  afternoon  was  devoted  mainly 
to  discussions  on  photographic  practice,  Mr. 
E.  M.  Collins  taking  the  lead  on  the  Causes 
of  the  Discoloration  of  Prints.  He  was  fol- 
lowed by  Messrs.  Bowdish,  on  "  Lighting 
and  Retouching  ;"  Lockwood,  on  "  Making 
Good  Pictures;"  Rulofson,  on  "How  to 
Push  Business;"  Webster,  on  "Manipula- 
tion ;"  Loomis,  on  the  "  Dignity  of  Photog- 
raphy;" Hough,  on  "  Art  Education,"  &e. 
The  remarks  and  addresses  were  all  models 
of  terseness  and  practical  usefulness. 

The  report  of  the  Nominating  Committee 
followed.  Tellers  and  judges  were  then 
appointed  for  the  election  fixed  for  the 
evening  session,  and  the  tellers  were  in- 
structed to  prepare  tickets  and  to  distribute 
them.  All  this  preparation  was  made,  in- 
stead of  the  election  being  held  as  hereto- 
fore, in  order  to  prevent  the  insinuations 
so  prevalent  that  the}r  were  not  conducted 
fairly. 

Mr.  Bogardus  declined  peremptorily 
serving  another  year  as  President.  Mr. 
Bell  made  an  address  eulogizing  Mr.  Bo- 
gardus for  his  faithful  service  in  behalf  of 
the  Association,  and  in  favor  of  Mr.  Rulof- 
son for  President.  The  session  closed  about 
6  P.M  ,  and  as  the  members  dispersed,  for 
the  first  time  they  learned  of  the  dreadful 
fire  which  had  been  raging  near  by  for 
over  two  hours.  The  smoke  was  flying  in 
dense  clouds  over  the  Exposition  building, 
and  caused  great  consternation  all  around. 
Great  fear  was  entertained  that  the  sixth 
exhibition  of  the  National  Photographic 
Association  was  doomed,  and  that  before 
long  the  thousands  of  beautiful  photographs 
displayed  would  be  in  ashes.  Certainly  no 
fashionable  assemblage  gathered  there,  as 
was  expected,  to  see  them,  and  all  any  of 
us  could  do  was  to  watch  and  wait.  Now 
the  wind  would  drive  the  flames  over  us  in 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


243 


fearful  sheets,  and  following,  a  rain  of  sparks 
and  burning  wood.  At  midnight  it  was 
thought  best  to  remove  many  of  the  goods, 
and  several  exhibitors,  desiring  to  be  on  the 
safe  side,  took  the  precaution  to  place  their 
pictures,  &c,  out  of  danger.  We  joined 
them,  and  removed  our  collection  of  foreign 
photographs,  books,  lantern  slides,  &c, 
after  midnight,  to  safer  quarters. 

In  the  morning  we  were  delighted  to  find 
the  building  unharmed.  The  goods  re- 
moved were  replaced,  and  in  a. few  days  the 
exhibition  halls  looked  as  bright  and  beau- 
tiful as  on  the  day  before.  But  the  fire  had 
broken  the  spirit  of  enthusiasm,  and  there 
was  a  general  anxiety  to  get  away.  How- 
ever, those  who  did  not  flee  the  city,  gath- 
ered together  in  the  morning,  and  business 
was  proceeded  with  as  usual.  But  the  back- 
bone of  the  Convention  and  Exhibition  was 
broken. 

Wednesday  morning,  the  first  order  of 
business  was  the  reading  of  the  report  of  the 
Committee  on  the  Progress  of  Photogra- 
phy. This  was  followed  by  the  appoint- 
ment of  a  committee  to  fix  the  location  for 
the  next  convention,  and  then  Mr.  W.  H. 
Rulofson  made  a  stirring  appeal  to  the  Con- 
vention to  remove  the  debt  "  then,  there,  and 
npiv."  He  was  followed  by  others,  and  it 
was  resolved  to  take  up  the  matter  on  the 
morrow.  Other  routine  business  followed 
In  the  afternoon,  Mr.  D.  H.  Cross,  the 
skilful  operator  for  Mr.  C.  D.  Mosher,  of 
Chicago,  and  a  gentleman  well  known  by 
his  inventions,  made  an  address  on  general 
photographic  practice,  and  he  was  followed 
by  Mr.  C,  E.  Meyers,  in  an  essay  on  photo- 
graphic screens,  which  was  elaborately  il- 
lustrated by  models.  Minor  practical  dis- 
cussions were  entered  into,  and  then  Mr. 
John  R.  demons  gave  one  of  his  inimita- 
ble "  talks  "  on  photography  in  general, 
and  some  branches  of  it  in  particular.  He 
then  answered  the  catechizing  of  the  mem- 
bers until  time  for  adjournment.  The  day 
was  intensely  hot,  and  was  a  fair  test  of  the 
earnest  desire  of  the  visiting  photographers 
for  knowledge  pertaining  to  their  work. 

The  evening  was  devoted  to  the  election. 
The  polls  were  open  from  7  p.m.  to  9  p.m., 
the  tellers  and  judges  being  promptly  at 
their  posts.     The  votes  were  deposited  rap- 


idly, only  a  few  attempting  to  vote  without 
first  paying  their  dues.  All  such  attempts 
were  foiled  by  Treasurer  Moore,  whose  very 
impressive  appearance  reminded  the  gentle- 
men of  their  first  duty  before  voting.  For 
the  first  time  in  its  existence,  the  National 
Photographic  Association  held  its  election 
by  formal  ballot.  The  result  was  nearly 
the  same  as  heretofore,  and  it  is  hoped  that 
all  croakings  about  "  unfairness,"  "  manip- 
ulation," &c,  will  forever  cease,  and  that 
all  good  members  will  accept  and  support 
the  officers  which  have  been  elected.  The 
result  of  the  election  was  as  follows  : 

President — William  H.  Rulofson. 

Permanent  Secretary — Edward  L.  Wilson. 

Treasurer— Albert  Moore. 

Executive  Committee — W.  Irving  Adams, 
A.  Bogardus,  A.  Hesler,  V.  M.  Wilcox, 
I.  B.  Webster,  J.  W.  Black,  W.  H. 
Rhoads,  the  President,  Permanent  Secre- 
tary, and  Treasurer. 

Committee  on  Progress  of  Photography — 
A.  S.  South  worth,  W.  H.  Sherman,  J. 
Landy,  A.  Gardner,  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  G.  W. 
Simpson. 

And  one  Vice-President  from  each  State 
and  Territory. 

We  need  hardly  stop  here  to  speak  our 
mind  concerning  the  new  President.  You 
will  have  an  opportunity  to  judge  of  him 
before  this  report  closes. 

Thursday  morning  President  Bogardus 
occupied  the  chair,  and  received  the  report 
of  the  tellers.  He  then  made  his  closing 
address,  and  welcomed  his  successor  to  the 
chair  amid  great  applause.  Mr.  Rulof- 
son made  an  address  which  won  the  whole 
Convention  over  to  him,  and  we  could  see 
by  the  faces  of  those  present  that  they 
meant  to  support  him.  He  will  prove  a 
most  worthy  incumbent  of  the  office,  which 
he  said  he  considered  "  next  in  honor  to 
that  of  the  Presidency  of  the  United  States." 

Mr.  Loomis  offered  resolutions  eulogizing 
and  thanking  President  Bogardus  for  his 
service.  The  Permanent  Secretary  and 
Treasurer  elect,  being  called  upon,  each 
made  a  brief  address. 

To  Mr.  W.  W.  Gillis,  Rochester,  N.  Y., 
was  awarded  the  gold  medal  for  the  best 
display  of  frames,  and  to  Messrs.   Robinson 


244 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


&  Cherill,  of  England,  the  gold  medal  for 
the  best  display  of  photographs  from  Eng- 
land was  awarded. 

Mr.  Bell  now  moved  that  the  subject  of 
the  debt  of  the  Association  be  taken  up,  and 
made  an  address  on  the  subject.  He  was 
followed  by  others,  when  time  for  adjourn- 
ment arrived.  President  Eulofson  said  the 
debt  would  be  made  the  order  of  business 
for  the  first  half  hour  of  the  afternoon  ses- 
sion.     (Applause.) 

Mr.  demons,  Chairman  of  the  Scovill 
and  Holmes  Medal  Committee,  reported 
that  the  committee  had  awarded  the  Scovill 
(gold)  medal  to  Mr.  W.  G.  Entrekin, 
Manayunk,  Pa.,  for  his  Oscillating  Enani- 
eller,  and  the  Holmes  (silver)  medal  to  Mr. 
L.  V.  Moulton,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis.,  for  his 
Improved  Photo  Washer.     Adjourned. 

As  announced,  the  first  half  hour  of  the 
afternoon  session  was  devoted  to  the  debt 
question.  President  Eulofson  made  a  strong 
appeal  for  its  removal,  and  others  spoke  on 
the  same  score.  Many  contributions  then 
flowed  in  ;  a  large  demand  was  made  for 
tickets  in  the  "  mammoth  offer  "  enterprise, 
and  about  twenty  were  made  life  members, 
the  whole  amounting  to  nearly  one  thou- 
sand dollars.  For  a  first  effort  this  was 
very  handsome.  Mr.  Bowdish  gave  two  of 
his  camera  stands,  which  were  quickly  pur- 
chased ;  Messrs.  Anthony  &  Co.  gave  a 
large  camera  box  and  stand,  and  there  were 
several  other  gifts,  which  brought  out  the 
crowning  one  from  Mr.  Eulofson,  of  all  the 
elegant  pictures  which  he  had  on  exhibi- 
tion, and  which,  he  announced,  he  would 
sell  to  the  highest  bidder  in  the  evening. 
The  Permanent  Secretary,  not  knowing 
what  Mr.  Eulofson's  auction  sales  would 
amount  to,  agreed  to  give  one  dollar  more 
towards  the  debt,  on  a  risk.  President  Eu- 
lofson avowed  that  he  would  make  the  Per- 
manent Secretary  "sick  of  that  offer."  (Ap- 
plause.) One  thing  was  most  convincing, 
and  it  was  worth  more  than  all  the  money 
to  see  it,  namely,  that  the  members  of  the 
National  Photographic  Association  value 
it,  appreciate  and  see  the  good  it  is  doing, 
and  are  determined  it  shall  not  fall.  We 
congratulate  them  on  their  wisdom. 

The  Committee  on  Location  for  1875  re- 
ported in  favor  of  Boston,  with  Mr.  J.  W. 


Black  for  Local  Secretary.  Mr.  Black  was 
present,  and  made  graceful  acknowledg- 
ment, the  usual  promises,  &c. 

Mr.  J.  H.  Tompkins,  Grand  Eapids, 
Mich.,  addressed  the  Convention  at  length 
upon  the  status  of  the  sliding-box  patent, 
and  was  followed  by  Messrs.  Southworth, 
Bell,  &c. 

A  very  pleasant  feature  of  this  session 
was  the  presentation  to  President  Bogardus 
of  a  handsome  solid  silver  pitcher  and  pair 
of  goblets,  as  a  token  of  their  regard,  by  a 
committee  of  members  of  the  Association. 
Mr.  Bogardus  received  it  in  his  usually 
graceful  style. 

Friday  morning,  the  first  thing  taken  up 
was  the  reading  of  Mrs.  Lock  wood's  care- 
fully prepared  report  on  a  Life  Insurance 
League,  and  the  formation  of  a  Photogra- 
phic Fire  Insurance  Company.  These  in- 
teresting matters  deserve  the  attention  of  all 
photographers,  and  we  recommend  their 
careful  reading.  Both  matters  were  re- 
ferred to  a  new  committee,  to  report  next 
year. 

Benjamin  French,  Esq.,  made  an  address 
on  the  "debt,"  and  was  loudly  applauded. 
Further  effort  was  now  made  to  remove 
the  debt,  and  amid  much  enthusiasm  the 
scene  of  yesterday  was  repeated,  until  the 
Permanent  Secretary  announced  that 
enough  tickets  had  been  taken  for  the 
mammoth  prize  to  enable  the  drawing  to 
go  on.  Mrs  Lockwood  and  Messrs.  Mosher 
and  Slee  were  appointed  to  prepare  for  the 
drawing.  More  subscriptions  were  then 
received,  and  the  articles  given  yesterday 
were  sold  to  the  highest  bidders.  The  Per- 
manent Secretary  reported  that  President 
Eulofson's  auction  last  evening  netted 
$224,  and  therefore  he  had  to  acknowledge 
himself  involved  to  the  amount  of  $225 
towards  the  liquidation  of  the  debt.  This 
being  the  case,  the  whole  amount  now  paid 
and  promised  was  sufficient  to  wipe  out 
the  debt!  Tremendous  applause,  and  three 
cheers  proposed  by  Mr.  Bell.  Happiness 
reigned,  and  the  drawing  for  the  mammoth 
prize  followed.  In  one  hat  tickets  bearing 
the  numbers  of  the  tickets  sold  were  put, 
and  in  another  hat  blanks  in  equal  number 
were  placed,  on  one  of  which  was  marked 
the   word    "Prize."      Two   children    then 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


245 


drew  a  blank  and  a  numbered  card  simul- 
taneously, under  tbe  charge  of  the  com- 
mittee. As  drawn  the  numbers  were  an- 
nounced to  the  Convention,  and  for  nearly 
half  an  hour  continued,  before  Mrs.  Lock- 
wood  said  "423" — "Prize."  The  Perma- 
nent Secretary  referred  to  his  list,  and  an- 
nounced that  Mr.  W.  H.  Jacoby  was  the 
owner  of  "423,"  and  therefore  the  prize 
was  his. 

A  committee  was  appointed  to  intercede 
with  the  Post-Office  Department,  for  better 
regulations  for  the  mailing  of  photographs. 

All  routine  business  was  now  finished  up, 
and  President  Kulofson  bade  farewell  to  the 
Convention. 

Friday  afternoon  was  occupied  in  practi- 
cal discussions,  Vice-President,  Colonel  H. 
K.  Marks,  of  Texas,  presiding.  Addresses 
were  made  by  Messrs.  Collins,  Elliott, 
French,  Winsor,  Husher,  Libby,  Hall, 
Webster,  C.  W.  Hearn  (author  of  the  Prac- 
tical Printer),  South  worth,  and  others, 
when  the  Convention  adjourned  to  meet  in 
Boston,  July,  1875. 

Thus  closed  one  of  the  most  eventful  con- 
ventions ever  held  by  any  body.  While  the 
fire  prevented  the  attendance  from  being  as 
large  as  usual,  and  while  there  were  not  as 
many  papers  read  and  practical  discussions 
held  as  heretofore,  yet  we  do  believe  that 
the  stupendous  and  successful  effort  made  to 
place  the  Association  on  a  firm  financial 
basis,  has  done  really  more  for  its  future 
vitality  and  usefulness;  and,  without  doubt, 
the  National  Photographic  Association  left 
Chicago  stronger  than  ever  before. 

Want  of  space  prevents  our  giving  a  list 
of  the  exhibitors  until  our  next  issue.  We 
shall  do  so  then,  and  have  more  to  say,  too, 
on  the  handsome  reception  of  our  Chicago 
friends,  and  also  the  present  status  of  the 
Association. 


MATTERS    OF   THE 


Membership   costs  $2;  annual   dues, 
Life  membership,  $25,  and  no  dues. 


All  remittances  of  back  dues  should  be 
sent  to  the  Treasurer,  Albert  Moore,  828 
Wood  Street,  Philadelphia,  and  fees  and 
dues  for  new  members  to  the  Permanent 
Secretary,  Edward  L.  Wilson,  Seventh  and 
Chen'y  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

Members  are  hereby  notified  that  their 
annual  dues  are  payable  June  1st,  1874. 
Employers  $4,  and  employes  $2.  The 
Treasurer  urges  that  prompt  remittances  be 
made.     Please  remit  now. 

Life  Members. — A  list  of  the  new  life 
members  will  be  given  next  month.  Life 
Membership  fee  is  $25,  and  no  more  dues  to 
pay  ever  after.    Join  the  Association  for  life. 

The  Report  of  the  Proceedings  of  the  late 
Convention  will  be  issued  in  pamphlet  form 
at  cost  to  subscribers.  Before  printing,  the 
Executive  Committee  desire  to  know  how 
many  copies  will  be  needed,  and  therefore 
request  those  who  wish  copies  to  notify  the 
Permanent  Secretary  how  many  at  once. 
The  cost  will  approximate  $1  per  copy. 
Those  not  members  of  the  Association  who 
subscribe  will  also  be  supplied.  The  report 
will  be  valuable  to  every  photographer. 


ON  REPRODUCING  NEGATIVES. 

New  York,  July  20th,  1874. 

Dear  Sir  :  I  have  been  solicited  by  sev- 
eral photographers  and  others  to  give  my 
experience  in  reproducing  negatives,  by 
what  is  known  by  the  "  Powder "  or 
"Graphite  Process,"  and  having  carefully 
tested  it  for  the  past  three  months  I  am 
prepared  to  indorse  it,  and  with  your  per- 
mission will  give  the  details  of  the  process 
as  I  find  best  in  my  practice. 

The  process  is  not  new,  being  based  upon 
a  method  invented  by  F.  Joubert,  and  ex- 
plained by  him  in  a  paper  read  to  the  Photo- 
graphic Society  on  March  4th,  1862,  an  ac- 
count of  which  will  be  found  in  the  Photo- 
graphic News  of  March  14th,  1862,  page  125. 

The  first  use  of  this  process  for  the  repro- 
duction of  negatives  that  has  come  to  my 
notice  was  from  Obernetter,  of  Munich,  who 
gave  a  full  description  in    the  Photographic 


246 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Nevis  for  March  27th,  1874.  Since  then  a 
modification  by  W.  Woodbury  was  pub- 
lished in  the  same  journal  for  May  22d. 

In  recent  experiments  with  these  pro- 
cesses I  find  that  with  Obernetter's  method 
our  climate  is  too  changeable  to  secure  uni- 
form success;  and  by  Woodbury's  method, 
though  better  adapted  to  our  climate,  there 
is  too  much  uncertainty  in  transferring  the 
negative  after  it  is  made ;  but  where  a  re- 
versed negative  is  required,  Woodbury's 
method  is  all  that  can  be  desired ;  still  I 
prefer  a  modification  of  Obernetter's,  for 
the  reason  that  the  resulting  negative  may 
be  reversed  or  not  at  pleasure,  and  I  have 
succeeded  best  with  the  following  formula, 
viz. : 


Dextrin, 

4  grammes 

Glucose,                   . 

.       4 

Bichromate  of  Potash, 

2 

Water,  .... 

.  100 

In  very  dry  weather,  and  for  very  intense 
negatives  in  pure  line,  ten  drops  of  glycerin 
may  be  added,  but  in  warm  weather,  and 
for  negatives  full  of  half  tone,  I  prefer  to 
leave  it  out  entirely. 

This  mixture  is  thoroughly  dissolved  by 
heat,  and  filtered,  and  a  carefully  cleaned 
glass  plate  is  coated  in  the  same  manner  as 
with  collodion,  except  that  it  is  allowed  to 
stand  a  few  seconds  on  the  plate,  so  that  all 
portions  may  be  evenly  coated  ;  the  surplus 
may  now  be  poured  back  into  the  bottle, 
and  the  plate  thoroughly  drained  on  bibu- 
lous paper,  and  dried  over  a  spirit-lamp  or 
a  Bunsen  burner,  and  then  placed  in  contact 
with  the  negative  to  be  reproduced  while 
still  warm,  and  exposed  to  light  until  the 
slightest  trace  of  an  image  is  visible,  which 
will  require  about  one  minute  in  sunlight, 
or  from  two  to  five  minutes  in  strong 
diffused  light.  The  plate  is  then  taken 
to  a  place  where  the  light  is  not  too  strong, 
and  brushed  over  with  a  camel-hair  brush 
dipped  in  the  finest  graphite;  the  image 
will  slowly  develop,  and  may  be  strength- 
ened by  continued  brushing  to  any  desired 
intensity,  but  care  should  be  taken  not  to 
make  it  too  strong,  as  the  graphite  holds 
back  the  light  more  than  silver.  A  negative, 
to  print  well,  should  be  about  as  strong  ap- 
parently as  a  good  solar  negative. 


Breathing  on  the  negative  should  be 
avoided,  except  on  pure  line  work  where 
great  intensity  is  required.  On  these,  breath- 
ing or  blowing  on  weak  parts  may  be  an 
advantage,  and  such  negatives  can  readily 
be  made  pure  black  and  white;  when  the 
proper  strength  is  attained  the  plate  must 
be  coated  with  a  thick  plain  collodion,  and 
when  well  set  immerse  in  a  dish  of  water  ; 
one  minute  will  be  sufficient  to  remove  all 
the  yellow  color,  when  it  should  be  dried  ; 
but  if  it  should  be  required  for  ordinary  sil- 
ver printing,  it  must  be  left  in  water  until 
the  film  becomes  detached,  when  it  can  be 
turned  over  with  a  camel-hair  brush,  and  by 
holding  the  corners  of  the  glass  and  film  to- 
gether lift  them  both  out  together  ;  drain, 
flow  over  with  gum-water,  and  dry.  Should 
there  be  dark  spots  in  the  negative  they  can 
be  avoided  by  using  less  glycerin,  or  keep- 
ing the  plate  slightly  warmed  during  de- 
velopment. Transparent  spots  are  caused 
by  particles  of  dust  or  grease  that  repel  the 
solution,  making  the  coating  thinner  where 
they  occur ;  if  the  solution  is  allowed  to 
stand  on  the  plate  a  few  seconds  before  pour- 
ing off  these  spots  will  not  occur. 

My  best  results  are  with  plates  that  re- 
quire at  least  five  minutes  to  develop,  and 
the  surface  of  the  negative  always  retains 
a  brilliant  lustre,  and  the  less  glycerin  used 
the  better  the  lustre,  but  too  little  will  pre- 
vent the  development. 

It  has  been  until  recently  impossible  to 
obtain  suitable  graphite  for  this  purpose, 
but  I  have  to  thank  the  American  Graphite 
Company,  24  Cliff  Street,  New  York,  for 
the  interest  they  have  taken  in  the  matter, 
by  preparing  the  article  in  such  a  manner 
that  I  doubt  whether  there  is  any  in  the 
world  that  is  better,  and  they  have  con- 
sented to  put  it  up  in  any  quantity  to  suit 
photographers  and  amateurs  for  experi- 
ments. 

Whenever  a  large  number  of  pictures 
are  required  from  one  negative  this  method 
has  proved  in  my  hands  superior  to  any 
other,  and  I  have  no  doubt  but  enlarge- 
ments can  be  made  as  well  if  the  exposure 
is  made  in  a  solar  camera.  This  I  have  not 
tried  yet,  but  intend  to  do  so  soon. 

*  E.   B. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHER. 


247 


THE  PRACTICAL  PRINTER. 

In  our  July  number,  under  this  head,  we 
reviewed  our  latest  photographic  publica- 
tion, a  work  devoted  exclusively  to  the 
printing  department,  by  a  practical  man, 
Mr.  C.  W.  Hearn,  who  has  written  and 
recommended  only  what  he  has  proved  by 
experience  to  be  good  and  reliable.  That 
we  have  not  overestimated  the  work  has 
been  proven  by  the  favor  with  which  it  has 
been  received.  The  demand  has  far  ex- 
ceeded our  expectations  for  the  time  it  has 
been  issued,  and  justifies  the  conviction  we 
entertained  in  publishing  it,  viz.,  that  there 
was  room  for  just  such  a  work. 

"We  sold  a  large  number  at  the  Chicago 
Convention,  and  had  a  good  opportunity  to 
hear  opinions  expressed  upon  it.  It  was 
most  favorably  received  and  commented  on, 
even  by  those  who  did  not  buy  ;  and  from 
all  we  .heard  only  expressions  of  approval 
of  its  merits  and  fitness  to  fill  the  place  for 
which  it  was  designed. 


In  our  hurry  in  getting  out  our  July 
number,  and  preparing  for  the  Chicago 
Convention,  the  cut  of  the  printing-room 
was  inserted  with  the  description  of  the 
silvering  and  toning  room.  "We  see  no 
better  way  to  remedy  this  error  than  to  in- 
sert the  cuts  of  both  rooms  here  in  connec- 
tion with  the  proper  descriptions. 


"The  size  of  the  main  room,  Fig.  1,  is 
10  x  15  x  10  feet.  A  is  the  printing-shelf, 
upon  which  the  negative-boards  are  placed 
out  to  print.  B  is  the  sash  of  glass,  through 
which  the  light  enters  on  the  shelf,  and 
which  sash  is  kept  in  place  by  the  hooks  C. 
D  is  a  window  which  swings  back  and  forth 
by  means  of  the  hinges  Dy.  This  window., 
when  closed,  is  fastened  by  the  button  E. 
This  window  was  arranged  to  permit  the 
printer  to  open  it  in  the  winter-time  and 
sweep  the  snow  from  the  glass,  without  the 
trouble  of  removing  his  frames  and  then 
taking  the  sash  of  ground-glass  in.  There 
is  another  sash  of  plain  glass  made,  which  is 
placed  out  in  place  of  the  ground  one,  when 
it  is  so  desired  by  the  printer.  F  is  the 
window-cord  by  which  the  curtain  is  pulled 
up  or  let  down,  as  occasion  requires.  G  is 
the  drawer  in  which  the  albumen  paper  is 
placed  when  it  is  ready  for  printing.  H  is 
the  drawer  in  which  the  prints  are  placed 
when  printed,  through  the  little  aperture  K, 
which  is  cut  in  the  bench 
and  supplied  with  a  cover 
of  tin  or  zinc,  so  as  to 
avoid  opening  the  draw- 
er so  often  as  to  discolor 
the  whites  of  the  prints 
therein  contained.  L  is 
the  drawer  in  which  the 
albumen-paper  is  kept. 
M  is  a  drawer  in  which 
the  plain  salted  paper 
may  be  placed ;  and  N 
is  another  drawer  in 
which  the  tmsalted  paper 
can  be  placed.  P  P  are 
negatives  which  are  to 
be  printed,  and  which, 
when  they  are  printed, 
are  temporarily  placed 
as  at  P',  until  they  are 
filed  away,  which  is  done 
in  another  room. 
"  The  shelves  K  K  K  are  also  negative 
shelves,  which  are  used  for  special  purposes, 
such  as  "the  family  negatives,"  &c,  &c. 
The  wide  shelf  is  made  for  the  storing  away 
of  negative-boards,  vignette-blocks,  porce- 
lain printing-frames,  &c,  all  of  which  are 
kept  in  order.  The  filling  of  the  boards, 
&c,  will  be  spoken  of  further  on  ;  suffice  it, 


248 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHER. 


for  the  present,  to  say  that  this  filling  is 
done  on  the  bench  T.  U  is  the  door  lead- 
ing to  the  'silvering  and  toning  rooms.' 
V  is  the  fuming-box,  which  will  also  be  ex- 
plained further  on.  W  is  the  box  in  which 
the  old  or  used  hypo-bath  is  poured,  and 
zinc  is  thrown  into  it.  X  is  a  bench  which 
is  used  for  one  thing  and  another,  also  for 
keeping  bottles,  &c,  upon. 

"The  Silvering  and  Toning  Room. 

"  The  principal  use  of  this  room  is  to  sen- 
sitize the  paper  after  it  is  albumenized,  or  in 
the  case  of  the  plain  pa- 
per, after  it  is  salted,  and 
then  later  in  the  day, 
when  the  sensitizing  is 
through  with,  to  tone  and 
fix,  as  well  as  to  wash  the 
prints  in,  all  of  which 
things  can  be  done  with- 
out at  all  interfering 
with  each  other 

"  A  is  a  dark  curtain, 
which  in  the  figure  is 
partly  raised,  but  during 
the  silvering  and  toning 
processes  it  is  brought 
down  to  A7,  and  the  white 
bleached  cloth  screen  B 
(which  is  shaded  in  the 
figure  so  as  to  show 
it  more  distinctly)  covers  the  rest  of  the 
glass,  and  thus,  in  the  toning,  a  soft  and 
diffused  light  is  given  to  that  part  of  the 
room  (the  shelf  C)  where  the  toning  is  done. 
D  is  the  silvering-dish,  and  D/  is  the  place 
where  this  silvering-dish  is  kept  when  not 
in  use.  E  is  where  the  kettle  of  potash  is 
kept  for  the  purpose  of  cleaning  old  plates. 
F  is  where  the  nitric  acid  tray  is  kept.  G  G 
are  two  sinks.  H  is  a  shelf  on  which  the  ton- 
ing-bath  bottles  may  be  kept.  K  is  a  rack 
with  three  overlapping  pieces  of  wood,  to 
which  there  are  a  number  of  spring  clips 
attached,  which  hold  the  pictures  while 
draining,  as  they  are  removed  from  the 
water.  L  is  a  washing-tank,  which  has  a 
perforated  false  bottom  through  which  the 
water  passes  into  the  lower  part,  and  thence 
into  the  waste  pipe  I/.  The  stopcock  M  is 
adjusted  after  the  tank  becomes  three-quar- 
ters filled,  so  that  it  will  permit  the  water 


to  flow  out  as  fast  as  it  enters  through  the 
pipe  N.  P  P  is  an  overflow  pipe,  which 
conducts  the  water,  when  it  reaches  that 
place,  into  the  waste  pipe  I/.  E  is  the 
place  where  the  hypo  dish  is  kept.  S  is  the 
place  where  the  two-gallon  hypo  bottle  is 
placed.  This  bottle  is  always  kept  full  of  a 
saturated  solution  of  hj'posulphite  of  soda- 
V  is  the  door  that  leads  into  the  drying- 
room." 

From  the  foregoing  extracts  it  will  be  seen 
how  minutely  the  author  has  treated  the  de- 
tails of  his  work.  Itissoallthe  way  through  ; 


no  movement  or  method  of  doing  a  thing 
seems  to  have  been  overlooked,  and  yet  it  is 
all  clear  and  explicit.  He  commences  with 
the  negative  as  it  comes  from  the  retoucher, 
and  goes  through  the  whole  process  of  sil- 
vering the  paper,  printing,  toning,  and  fin- 
ishing the  picture,  on  plain  and  albumen 
paper,  and  on  porcelain,  with  instructions 
on  all  the  fancy  styles  of  printing  and  pro- 
ducing tasteful  effects. 

"We  are  sure  it  will  be  a  very  useful  book 
for  reference,  and  every  printer  should  have 
one  to  consult  when  the  work  goes  wrong. 
The  loss  of  a  batch  of  prints,  sometimes, 
which  a  hint  from  this  book  might  save, 
would  be  more  than  the  price  of  half  a 
dozen  copies.  No  photographer  can  afford 
to  be  without  it.     Price  $2.50. 

As  an  example  of  what  intelligent  printing 
may  prodrfce  see  "  Our  Picture  "  this  month. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


249 


GERMAN  CORRESPONDENCE. 

The  Dull  Season — Americans  in  Germany — 
Retouchers  and  Retouching — Obernetter's 
Method  of  Making  Transparent  Positives 
—  Venus  Expedition — PJiotograjohic  Re- 
searches with  the  Spectrum. 

Wk  are  now  in  the  midst  of  the  dull  sea- 
son. In  spite  of  the  cold  summer  and  in- 
cessant rainy  weather  the  metropolis  gradu- 
ally gets  empty.  The  can-get-aways  go  to 
the  watering-places  or  to  the  mountains ; 
and  gradually  our  galleries  assume  a  de- 
serted look ;  only  now  and  then  a  timid 
stranger  puts  in  an  appearance  with  the  red 
Baedecker  or  the  brown  Murray  in  his  hand. 
Amongst  our  visitors  are  many  Yankees, 
who  ask  for  a  ferrotype  or  even  a  porcelain 
picture,  neither  of  which  are  made  here. 
At  this  writing  a  caravan  of  forty  ladies  is 
staying  in  Berlin,  and  all  of  them  have  been 
immortalized  in  the  shape  of  Berlin  cards. 

"  Do  you  consider  the  Berlin  pictures  su- 
perior to  the  American  ones?"  I  asked  a 
young  American  lady  who  had  her  picture 
taken.  "Oh  no,"  she  answered,  "I  con- 
sider the  American  ones  better,  and  only 
get  a  picture  here  so  as  to  show  my  country- 
men how  far  we  are  ahead  in  photography." 
Such  patriotism  is  very  acceptable.  I  have 
always  met  it  in  the  American  ladies.  "  Do 
you  know  Mr.  Kocher,  of  Chicago?"  in- 
quired another  lady.  "  Yes,  madam,  very 
well,"  was  my  reply.  "  Is  he  not  the  first 
photographer  in  the  world  ?"  exclaimed  the 
lady.  "No,  that  is  Mr.  Scholten,  of  St. 
Louis,"  replied  her  friend,  a  resident  of  St. 
Louis.  You  see  that  the  American  photog- 
raphers are  very  well  defended  here,  and  I 
would  propose  that,  at  a  future  international 
exhibition  (1885,  in  Berlin  ???),  America 
will  send  female  jurors  only — young  and 
handsome  preferable. 

Although  business  is  very  dull  our  society 
has  not  been  idle ;  the  summer  meetings 
were  even  better  attended  than  the  winter 
ones,  and  recently  a  very  animated  discus- 
sion was  devoted  to  the  negative  retouch, 
but  this  time  the  discussion  did  not  turn  on 
technical  matters,  but  on  the  retoucher  him- 
self. The  cause  was  the  fate  of  several  re- 
touchers, who,  relying  on  their  art,  had 
opened   galleries   for    themselves,   and,   in 


spite  of  their  skill  as  retouchers,  had  failed 
of  success,  because  their  manner  did  not 
please  the  public,  or  they  did  not  possess  the 
ability  to  pose  and  light  a  person  rapidly 
and  properly,  or  because  they  lacked  busi- 
ness ability.  These  facts  have  demonstrated 
that  to  carry  on  a  photographic  business 
more  is  necessary  than  merely  technical 
skill.  On  the  other  hand  it  was  maintained 
that  the  proprietors  of  many  galleries  are 
good  business  men,  and  know  how  to  make 
money,  but  do  not  possess  any  knowledge  of 
art,  and  expect  of  their  l-etouchers  impossi- 
bilities. It  is  certain  that  the  photographic 
negative  retouch  does  not  exercise  a  benefi- 
cial influence  on  the  photographer.  Fritz 
Luckhardt,  in  Vienna,  states  that  he  had  a 
first  class  artist  as  retoucher,  who,  in  the 
beginning,  made  excellent  work,  but  after- 
wards displayed  a  tendency  to  make  every- 
thing smooth,  and  even  to  remove  the  char- 
acteristic lines.  This  is  not  brought  about 
by  want  of  taste  or  knowledge  of  art,  but 
is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  eye  becomes  dulled 
by  use,  and  the  opinion  is  general  that  no 
one  can  stand  it  longer  than  ten  years.  Mr. 
Prumm  employs  his  retouchers  for  half  a 
day  on  the  negative,  and  the  other  half  on 
the  positive,  and  states  this  change  enables 
his  workers  to  last  much  longer.  Lately  a 
reaction  against  excessive  retouching  has  set 
in.  A  number  of  photographs  from  1862 
were  exhibited,  at  which  time  retouch  was 
unknown,  and  the  opinion  was  generally 
expressed  that  artistically,  and  in  point  of 
reproducing  the  characteristic  features,  they 
were  fully  equal  to  the  productions  of  the 
present  day.  The  retouch  is  now  curtailed 
by  many,  and  I  have  particularly  to  men- 
tion an  artist  by  the  name  of  Technor,  who 
makes  excellent  portraits,  which  he  re- 
touches only  with  a  few  lead-pencil  lines. 

We  have  learned  also  that  no  artificial 
light  effects  are  necessary  in  order  to  pro- 
duce a  characteristic  portrait.  Side-light 
pictures,  Iiembrandts,  and  other  tricks  have 
long  been  laid  aside. 

Another  important  chapter  which  is  dis- 
cussed a  good  deal  is  the  reproduction  of 
negatives.  The  labors  of  Obernetter  in  this 
branch  cannot  be  overestimated.  Of  course 
not  everybody  will  obtain  good  results  with 
his  process,  but  the  matter  is  of  such  great 


250 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


importance  that  no  one  should  give  it  up  if 
the  first  attempts  are  unsuccessful,  as  per- 
fection can  only  be  acquired  by  practice. 

Obernetter  has  recently  published  a  pro- 
cess of  making  a  positive  from  a  negative 
by  means  of  the  dust  process  This  process 
is  not  as  important  as  the  other.  The  making 
of  negatives  from  a  positive  may  also  be  made 
with  little  trouble  by  the  collodion  process : 
besides,  the  time  of  making  positives  by 
this  process  is,  according  to  Obernetter 's 
statement,  longer.  The  method  itself  is  not 
new,  and  was  originated  by  Poitevin.  The 
latter  took  a  solution  of  chloride  of  iron  and 
tartaric  acid,  and  coated  with  it  a  plate  of 
ground-glass,  and  when  dry  exposed  it  to 
light.  The  light  reduces  the  sesquichloride 
to  a  chloride;  the  latter  when  exposed  to 
the  air  attracts  moisture,  and  pigment  pow- 
der dusted  over  it  adheres  to  the  same. 

Obernetter  recommends  for  this  process 
the  following  mixture: 

Citrate  of  the  Oxide  of  Iron,  .  10  grammes. 
Citric  Acid,  .         .         .         .  5        " 

Sesquichloride  of  Iron,  concentra- 
ted solution,      .         .         .         .       2        " 
Water, 100         " 

The  citrate  of  iron  is  finely  pulverized, 
and  is  placed  with  the  other  ingredients  in 
a  flask,  and  heated  to  boiling,  and  left  to 
stand  until  the  citrate  of  iron  has  dissolved  ; 
when  cold,  the  solution  is  filtered.  The 
plates  which  are  prepared  with  this  solution 
are  slightly  warmed,  coated,  and  dried  in  a 
drying  oven.  In  from  five  to  ten  minutes 
the  plate  is  dry,  and  placed  while  still  warm 
in  the  printing-frame  on  the  negative,  and 
exposed  in  the  sun  for  from  eight  to  ten 
minutes,  in  the  shade  for  one  hour.  After 
exposure,  we  breathe  upon  the  plate,  when 
a  feeble  image  will  appear.  By  means  of 
a  brush,  plumbago  or  red  oxide  of  iron  is 
dusted  over  the  plate.  Obernetter  states 
that  it  is  easier  to  dust  such  a  plate  than 
one  prepared  with  chromate  of  potash. 
When  the  plate  has  been  dusted,  it  is  coated 
with  plain  collodion,  placed  in  water  for 
four  minutes,  when  the  film  is  removed  and 
transferred  to  another  surface.  If  the  pic- 
ture is  to  remain  on  the  original  surface,  a 
threefold  diluted  solution  of  iron  is  used  in 
the  preparation  of  the  plate,  and  the  plate 


is  coated  with  castor  oil  collodion,  and  left 
to  dry.     The  picture  can  be  varnished. 

The  expeditions  for  tbe  observation  of  the 
transit  of  Venus  are  starting.  On  the  22d 
one  of  our  parties  started  in  tbe  man-of-war 
Elizabeth  for  Kerguelen  Island,  and  will 
meet  on  this  uninhabited  group  of  islands 
the  English  expedition  and  your  country- 
men, and  lead  for  at  least  eight  weeks  a 
scientific  Robinson  Crusoe  life. 

In  two  weeks  the  second  expedition  starts 
for  Auckland  Island,  south  of  New  Zealand. 
This  one  Krem  of  Dresden  accompanies, 
with  his  son,  as  photographer;  and  four 
weeks  later  the  expedition  for  China  departs, 
with  whicb  I  intended  to  sail,  but  unfortu- 
nately my  obligations  here  make  it  impossi- 
ble for  me  to  be  absent  seven  and  a  half 
months.  I  regret  that  I  will  not  be  able  to 
give  to  your  readers  photographic  reports 
of  India  and  China,  but  hope  to  find  here 
sufficient  material. 

My  credulity  is  somewhat  shaken  when 
I  read  that  not  only  your  honored  towns- 
man, M.  Carey  Lea,  but  also  my  honored 
colleague,  Monckhoven,  enter  the  field 
against  my  discovery  of  the  action  of  yellow 
and  red  rays  on  bromide  of  silver.  He  has 
repeated  my  experiments,  not  with  colored 
glasses,  but  with  the  true,  real,  genuine 
spectrum,  and  has  not  obtained  my  results  ; 
yes,  and  he  asserts  that  in  the  Ecole  Nor- 
mal in  Paris,  and  in  Bunsen's  celebrated 
laboratory  in  Heidelberg,  my  experiments 
have  been  repeated  without  success.  An 
anonymous  writer  in  the  British  Journal 
speaks  to  the  world  in  the  following  man- 
ner:  "Messrs.  Care}'  Lea,  Spiller,  and 
others  have  given  the  final  coup  de  grace  to 
this  notion  of  Dr.  Vogel,  and  his  fine  theory 
of  a  prolongation  of  the  action  of  the  more 
refrangible  rays  of  the  spectrum  must  hence- 
forth be  relegated  to  the  limbo  of  photo- 
graphic abortions." 

First  executed,  next  banished  (relegated), 
and  fortunately  I  have  suffered  both  pro- 
ceedings from  the  distance  without  any  in- 
convenience or  damage,  and  have  even,  as 
an  executed  exile,  the  impudence  to  continue 
my  experiments.  If  I  had  only  tried  two  or 
three  plates  with  the  spectrum  a  doubt 
might  be  possible,  but  when  two  to  three 
hundred  experiments  have  been  made  with 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


251 


absolutely  the  same  result,  there  must  be 
something  more  in  it  than  a  photographic 
abortion. 

Photographic  spectral  experiments  are 
rather  difficult  to  make.  They  cannot  be 
repeated  with  colored  glasses,  for  these 
colors  are  impure,  and  experiments  with 
impure  colors  belong  to  the  same  category 
as  a  chemist  who  wants  to  make  a  chemical 
analysis  with  impure  chemicals.  The  ob- 
jection that  the  spectral  colors  are  not  always 
pure  either  is  not  valid,  for  the  same  can  be 
said  of  the  "  pure  "  reagents  of  the  chemist. 

Monckhoven  has  experimented  with  pure 
spectral  colors,  and  did  not  obtain  my  re- 
sults. The  explanation  is  easily  found. 
Monckhoven 's  spectroscope  had  a  slit  seven 
and  a  half  times  smaller  than  the  slit  of  my 
instrument,  hence  seven  and  a  half  times 
less  light  entered  his  instrument  than  mine. 
Further,  he  elongated  his  spectroscope  to 
forty  centimetres,  that  is,  he  made  it  seven 
times  longer  than  mine,  and  the  consequence 
was  that  his  instrument  was  fifty  times  more 
feeble  in  light  than  mine.  Now  with  my 
instrument  of  great  intensity  of  light,  I  had 
to  expose  for  three  minutes  in  order  to  ob- 
tain an  impression  in  yellow.  Monckhoven 
would  have  obtained  the  same  result  if  he 
had  exposed  for  3  x  50  minutes,  or  one  hun- 
dred and  fifty  minutes.  Instead  of  that,  he 
states  that  he  exposed  for  two  minutes  only. 

Monckhoven  is  in  the  position  of  a  pho- 
tographer who  wants  to  try  a  very  sensitive 
instantaneous  collodion,  and  employs  for  the 
purpose  a  slow-working  landscape  lens  of 
feeble  light. 

I  have  to  mention  still  another  mistake. 
Dr.  Monckhoven  probably  colored  his  plates 
too  highly.  An  intense  color  is  not  bene- 
ficial, but  objectionable.  Each  particle  of 
bromide  of  silver  is  surrounded  by  an  en- 
velope of  colored  collodion.  If  the  color  is 
too  intense  the  light  is  weakened  too  much 
by  being  absorbed  by  the  envelope,  and  can, 
therefore,  not  act  with  sufficient  energy  on 
the  bromide  of  silver.  A  weak  coloring 
which  can  only  be  established  by  experiment, 
is  the  only  way  to  success. 

Yours,  very  truly, 

Dr.  Vogel. 

Berlin,  July  1st,  1874. 


NOTES  IN  AND  OUT  OF  THE 
STUDIO. 

BY  G.   WHARTON  SIMPSON,   M.A.,  P.S.A. 

Strong  Developers. — New  Encaustic  Paste. 
Strong  Developers. — I  remember  some 
years  ago  a  remark  by  a  very  accomplished 
photographic  chemist,  to  the  effect  that  he 
believed  it  would  be  less  to  increased  sen- 
sitiveness in  the  film  than  to  increased 
energy  in  the  developer,  that  any  advance- 
ment in  rapid  photography  would  be  due. 
There  can  be  little  doubt  that  the  discovery 
and  application  of  more  energetic  develop- 
ing agents  than  those  now  in  use  presents 
to  the  photographic  experimentalist  one  of 
the  most  promising  and  useful  fields  for  re- 
search. Gallic  acid,  pyrogallic  acid,  and 
the  salts  of  iron,  and  occasionally  combina- 
tions of  two  of  them,  were  for  many  years 
the  sole  agents  used  in  developing  the  latent 
image.  Something  like  ten  or  a  dozen  years 
ago,  some  fine  instantaneous  stereoscopic 
negatives  on  dry  plates  were  produced,  as 
we  were  informed  in  confidence,  by  means 
of  a  developer  consisting  of  a  saturated  solu- 
tion of  gallic  acid,  which  contained,  in  ad- 
dition, twelve  grains  of  pyrogallic  acid  to 
each  ounce.  The  first  great  advance  in  dry 
plate  development  was  made,  however, 
when  Mr.  Leahy  discovered  the  principle 
of  alkaline  development  by  using  ammonia. 
Since  then  the  method  has  been  worked  out, 
systematized,  and  improved  by  various  dry 
plate  workers,  but  by  none  more  effectually 
than  Col.  Stuart  Wortley,  whose  discovery 
of  the  value  of  solutions  of  ammonia  of  a 
strength  before  undreamed  of  was  one  of 
the  most  marked  steps  of  progress  in  this 
direction.  A  note  presented  by  the  same 
gentleman  at  the  last  meeting  of  the  Photo- 
graphic Society  is  suggestive  of  further  im- 
provement in  the  increased  power  it  places 
in  the  hands  of  the  photographer.  By  the 
use  of  the  concentrated  solution  of  ammonia, 
the  power  of  obtaining  perfect  detail  with 
considerably  decreased  exposure  was  se- 
cured. He  now  points  out — and  he  verified 
his  statement  by  exhibiting  admirably  illus- 
trative negatives — that,  by  properly  varying 
the  proportion  of  pyrogallic  acid  to  the  in- 
creased ammonia,  enormous  control  over 
the   intensity  of  the  negative  is  obtained. 


252 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


To  secure  brevity  of  exposure  and  fulness  of 
detail,  full  doses  of  ammonia  must  be  em- 
ployed ;  and  to  secure  vigor  and  intensity, 
the  proportion  of  pyrogallic  acid  must  be 
used. 

Here  are  the  formulae  which  Colonel 
"Wortley  recommends : 

No.  1. 

Pure  Strong  Carbonate  of  Ammonia,  80  grains. 
Water,       .         .         .         .     ~    .         .1  ounce. 

No.  2. 

Bromide  of  Potassium,  .  .  .  120  grains. 
Water,       ......      1  ounce. 

No.  3. 

Pyrogallic  Acid,  .  .  .  .96  grains. 
Alcohol,  .         ....         .1  ounce. 

To  each  drachm  of  No.  1  add  one  minim 
of  No.  2,  and  from  one  to  six  minims  of 
No.  3,  according  to  the  density  of  the  nega- 
tive required,  remembering  that  it  is  always 
well  not  to  have  too  much  pyrogallic  acid 
in  the  developer  to  begin  with,  in  case 
strongly  lighted  objects  should  thus  come 
too  dense  at  first ;  whereas,  if  we  begin  with 
from  one  to  two  drops  of  pyrogallic  acid  to 
each  drachm,  any  amount  of  density  can 
gradually  be  obtained  by  continued  addi- 
tions of  two  or  three  drops  at  a  time  of  the 
pyrogallic  acid  solution. 

If  it  is  desired  to  replace  the  carbonate  of 
ammonia  by  liquid  ammonia,  make  up  the 
developer  with  distilled  water  instead  of  the 
carbonate  of  ammonia  solution,  and  to  each 
drachm  thereof  add,  as  before,  one  drop  of 
No.  2  and  the  necessary  amount  of  No.  3, 
and  pour  two  or  three  times  on  and  off  the 
plate;  then  add  to  the  developing  solution 
strong  liquidammonia  (specific  gravity  880), 
in  the  proportion  of  two  minims  to  each 
three  minims  that  has  been  used  of  the 
bromide  solution.  The  two  formulae  will 
then  stand  thus  for  a  stereo-sized  plate  : 

Carbonate  of  Ammonia  Development. 

80-grain  solution  of  Carbonate,  .  3  drachms. 
120-grain    solution  of   Bromide   of 

Potassium,  .....     3  minims. 
96-grain    solution    of    Pyrogallic 

Acid,  say    .         .         .         .         .     6      " 


Liquid  Ammonia  Development. 
Distilled  Water,      .  .         .  .3  drachms. 

120-grains  solution  of  Bromide  of 

Potassium,  .         .         .         .         .3  minims. 
96-grain    solution    of    Pyrogallic 
Acid,  say    .         .  .         .  .     6       " 

Pour  off  and  on,  and  then  add  strong  liquid 
ammonia,  880.2  minims.  If  more  density 
is  required,  add  more  pyrogallic  acid;  if 
more  detail  wants  to  be  brought  out,  add 
more  ammonia,  and  some  pyrogallic  acid 
therewith. 

I  feel  sure  that  no  one  who  gives  this 
method  a  fair  trial  will  return  to  the  use  of 
a  weak  alkaline  developer  ;  for  while,  by 
the  strong  developer,  the  sensitiveness  of 
the  plate  is  immensely  increased,  the  chances 
of  a  plate  fogging  are  infinitely  less  than 
with  the  old-fashioned  weak  developer. 

It  should  be  noted  that  this  system  of  de- 
velopment is  suited  to  gum  gallic,  tannin, 
beer,  and  other  bath  plates,  as  well  as  emul- 
sion plates. 

A  New  Encaustic  Paste. — Two  or  three 
years  ago  I  gave  your  readers  details  of  an 
encaustic  paste,  the  formula  of  which  I 
received  from  Herr  Grune.  It  consisted  of 
Marseilles  soap  and  white  wax,  and  gave 
fine  results.  M.  Clement  Sans  speaking  of 
this  paste,  upon  which  he  has  made  an  im- 
provement, says : 

"This  composition  spreads  with  great 
facility,  and  yields  a  good  polish  ;  it 
possesses,  however,  the  inconvenience  of 
scratching  the  albumen  film,  and  has,  more- 
over, a  strong  odor,  which  after  a  time  be- 
comes quite  insupportable. 

"  I  have  modified  this  encaustic  paste,  and 
as  it  is  now  composed,  no  fear  need  be  en- 
tertained of  the  surface  of  the  print  being 
damaged.  The  odor  is,  moreover,  very 
agreeable,  and  it  gives  a  more  brilliant 
polish.     Here  is  its  composition,  viz  : 

Gum  Arabic,  powdered,        .  2  parts. 
Sugar  Candy,  powdered,        .       5     " 
Transparent  Glycerin  Soap, 

finely  rasped,     .         .         .  10     " 

Water,  ....  quant,  suff. 

"  The  water  is  put  in  to  moisten  the  soap 
and  to  dissolve  the  other  ingredients.  Af- 
terwards there  are  added  ten  parts  of  white 
wax  finely  scraped. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


253 


"  The  paste  is  heated  upon  a  sandbath 
until  it  reaches  the  boiling-point,  care  being 
taken  to  stir  the  mixture  continually  to 
prevent  its  burning.  It  should  bo  contained 
in  an  earthen  vessel,  large  enough  to  hold 
five  times  the  quantity.  A  brown  glazed 
coffee-pot  will  answer  the  purpose  very 
well.  After  boiling  for  a  short  time,  and 
being  well  stirred,  it  is  poured  into  any 
suitable  receptacle  to  cool.  When  cold,  the 
encaustic  paste  should  have  the  consistence 
of  pomade.  It  is  applied  to  photographic 
prints  with  a  rag  or  tuft  of  cotton-wool,  in 
exactly  the  same  way  as  other  compositions 
of  like  nature." 


OUR  PICTURE. 

The  second  of  our  prize  series  we  publish 
this  month,  and  feel  proud  that  we  are  able 
to  present  such  work  in  successive  numbers 
as  that  in  our  last  and  this  we  now  issue. 
We  hope  to  continue  at  the  same  high  stand- 
ard till  every  reader  shall  have  been  stimu- 
lated to  such  effort  as  shall  place  him  beside 
these  (at  present)  leaders  in  our  art. 

This  picture  is  from  the  studio  of  Mr.  J. 
Barhj'dt,  of  Rochester,  New  York.  It  was 
only  second  in  order  of  merit  in  the  estima- 
tion of  the  judges,  and  in  many  points  it  was 
difficult  to  decide  which  was  really  the  most 
excellent,  this  or  the  beautiful  picture  by 
Bradley  &  Eulofson,  of  San  Francisco,  which 
was  published  in  our  July  number.  But  the 
judges  were  influenced  in  favor  of  the  latter 
by  the  almost  entire  absenceof  retouching, 
the  negatives  being  equally  brilliant  without 
it.  But  in  this  case  one  of  the  crowning 
merits  of  the  work  is  the  retouching.  Not 
that  this  is  elaborately  retouched,  for  the 
print  will  show  that  it  is  not,  but  the  work 
is  judiciously  done.  We  were  not  aware  of 
the  source  of  this  excellence  until  we  met 
Mr.  Barh3*dt  in  Chicago,  where  he  informed 
us  that  he  did  all  his  retouching  himself! 
We  also  learned  another  secret  of  his 
wonderful  success,  which  only  proves  what 
we  have  been  trying  for  several  years  to 
bring  the  fraternity  to  believe,  namely, 
that  art  will  win.  That  there  was  one 
thing  that  photographers  were  yet  lack- 
ing, and   that  was   art  instruction,  art  cul- 


ture. Mr.  Barhydt  is  a  professional  artist, 
being  a  retired  portrait  and  landscape 
painter,  full  of  the  love  and  poetry  of  art, 
and  possessing  a  love  of  nature  that  sees 
beauty  in  the  tiniest  flower  or  the  simplest 
blade  of  grass.  All  this  feeling  and  love  of 
the  beautiful,  this  knowledge  of  art  and  the 
laws  which  govern  it,  he  has  brought  to 
bear  in  the  production  of  his  superb  speci- 
mens of  the  art  photographic. 

It  will  be  observed  that  there  are  no  lines, 
or  curves,  or  lights  produced  by  the  retouch- 
ing, that  give  the  picture  the  appearance 
of  having  been  copied  from  a  marble  bust, 
but  all'is  harmony  and  beautiful  gradation. 
Excessive  retouching  gives  the  polished, 
marble  effect  referred  to,  and  destroys  the 
tender  fleshly  texture  we  see  in  such  work 
as  this.  We  commend  the  study  of  this 
feature  of  the  work  to  all  who  wish  to  pro- 
duce really  artistic  effects.  But  it  is  not  in 
the  retouching  alone  that  this  picture  excels, 
for  the  lighting,  posing,  and  chemical  work 
evince  great  care  and  skill,  and  show  that 
a  master  hand  guided  it  all. 

The  prints  were  made  for  us  by  Mr.  Bar- 
hydt on  the  "  Extra  brilliant  N.  P.  A.  Dres- 
den paper,"  and  as  examples  of  printing  can- 
not be  excelled.  It  will  thus  be  seen  that 
the  work  represents  Mr.  Barhydt's  estab- 
lishment in  every  department,  and  we  be- 
lieve he  has  taken  a  peculiar  pride  and  in- 
terest in  giving  us  a  picture  that  will  serve 
as  an  instructive  study  to  all,  illustrate  the 
high  aesthetic  attainments  of  our  art,  and 
sustain  the  wide  and  brilliant  reputation  he 
has  already  won. 

Below  we  give  Mr.  Barhydt's  letter,  ac- 
companying an  interior  view  of  his  skylight, 
together  with  his  negative  and  printing  for- 
mulas, by  his  operator,  Mr.  Sherman  Gregg, 
and  Mr.  E.  Case,  his  printer : 

Rochester,  N.  Y.,  June  11th,  1874. 
Mr.  E.  L.  Wilson. 

Dear  Sir  :  Inclosed  you  will  find  an  in- 
terior view  of  the  skylight  attached  to  my 
gallery,  which  in  its  various  appointments 
does  not  differ  materially  from  other  gal- 
leries in  general.  The  light  has  a  northwest 
exposure,  protected  outside  with  lattice- 
screens — not  the  best  light  in  the  world,  but 
the  best  we  can  get  at  present.  The  atelier 
is  20  x  36  feet. 


254 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Inclosed  also  find  formulas  used  by  Mr. 
Sherman  Gregg,  my  operator,  in  producing 
the  negatives  for  your  journal.  I  believe 
he  is  not  wedded  to  any  one  formula,  but 
uses  that  which  he  thinks  best  adapted  to 
the  season  of  the  year. 

Yours  respectfully, 

J.   Barhydt. 


Mr.  Great's  formulae: 


"  COLLODION 

Alcohol  and  Ether, 

equa 

parts 

Iodide  of  Lithium, 

3  grains. 

Iodide  of  Cadmium, 

3 

Bromide  of  Potassium, 

3 

1 

Cotton  (Piirys'),    . 

6 

' 

"  Negative  Bath. — Forty  grains  strong — 
acid. 

"  Developing  Solution. — Iron  half  the 
strength  of  negative  bath,  which  in  this 
case  is  20 grains  ;  acetic  acid  enough  to  give 
a  smooth  flow.     Fix  in  hypo." 

Mr.  E.  Case's  printing  formula  : 
"  Plain  silver  solution  60  grains  strong. 
To  60  ounces  solution  4  drachms  of  satu- 
rated solution  of  sal  soda;  fume,  according 
to  season,  from  five  to  eight  minutes.  Fix 
in  hypo." 

In  conclusion,  we  must  add  that  the  fair 
subject  who  so  amiably  consented  to  sit  for 
our  picture  is  a  daughter  of  Mr.  Barhydt. 
We  cordially  thank  her. 


Dr.  Vogel's  Handbook  of  Photography. — 
Owing  to  much  overwork  at  home  pressing  upon 
him,  Dr.  Vogel  has  not  been  able  to  send  us  the 
sheets  for  his  second  edition  quite  as  soon  as  we 
had  hoped,  but  we  now  have  the  work  in  press, 
and  hope  to  announce  its  completion  in  our  next 
number.  It  will  be  vastly  improved  and  en- 
larged.    More  about  it  in  our  next. 


Honors  from  Germany  to  America. — The 
following  note  explains  itself. 

Berlin,  Prussia,  June  loth,  1874. 
Mr.  Edward  L.  Wilson, 

Editor  Philadelphia  Photographer, 
And  Permanent  Secretary  N.  P.  A.  of  America. 

Dear  Sir  :  I  beg  to  announce  that  the  Berlin 
Society  for  the  Advancement  of  Photography,  in 
consideration  of  their  indebtedness  to  you  for 
the  intimate  connection  existing  between  Ger- 
man and  American  photographers,  and  for  the 
acknowledgment  which  German  photography 
has  found  in  America,  and  for  your  services  in 
behalf  of  your  own  National  Photographic  Asso- 
ciation and  photography  in  general,  have  elected 


you  an  honorary  member.     You   have  only  two 
associate  honorary  members,  Dr.  E.  Horning,  of 
Vienna,  and  Mr.  Max  Petsch,  of  this  city. 
Truly  your  friend. 

Dr.  H   Vogel, 

President  B.  S.  A.  P. 

We  acknowledge  our  appreciation  of  this 
graceful  compliment,  and  prize  it  the  more  be- 
cause it  comes  from  the  city  to  which  we  have 
so  long  looked  for  example  and  advice  as  Amer- 
ican photographers,  and  whose  work  gave  us 
such  a  thorough  stirring  up  a  few  years  ago. 
German  photographers,  and  especially  our  friends 
in  Berlin,  shall  never  be  forgottsn  in  America. 


We  call  the  attention  of  the  craft  to  the  ad- 
vertisement of  Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.,  in  this 
month's  issue.  They  have  for  several  years 
been  supplying  to  order  stoneware  dishes  and 
solid  glass  (two  prong)  dippers,  the  demand  for 
which  has  of  late  so  increased,  that  they  have 
decided  to  keep  the  sizes  advertised  always  in 
stock.     Special  sizes  will  be   made  to  order  at  a 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


255 


slight  advance.     We  have  seen  the  articles,  and 
can  advise  their  purchase. 


The  foreign  competition  for  the  gold  medal 
offered  by  us  is  bringing  some  fine  negatives,  and 
we  hope  for  a  lively  competition  before  the  15th 
of  August. 


The  Landscape  Peize. — We  wish  to  remind 
those  who  think  of  competing  for  the  gold  medal 
we  offered  for  the  best  three  landscape  negatives 
sent  us  by  the  15th  of  August,  that  the  time  is 
short  now,  and  whatever  they  do  must  be  done 
quickly,  as  only  about  two  weeks  will  remain 
after  the  issue  of  this  number.  This  competition 
is  confined  to  American  photographers,  and  will 
close  the  15th  of  August,  allowing  the  usual 
three  days'  gnice.  Do  not  fail  to  make  an  effort, 
and  send  us  the  best  you  can.  The  terms  are 
the  same  as  those  governing  the  competition  in 
portraiture,  published  on  the  first  page  of  our 
April  number. 

Lantern  Slides. — We  recently  sold  a  lot  of 
slides  to  Prof.  R.  S.  Boswirth,  of  Hungerford 
Collegiate  Institute,  at  Adams,  N.  Y.,  and  have 
received  from  him  the  seventh  annual  catalogue 
and  circular  of  that  institution.  In  the  Depart- 
ment of  Natural  Sciences,  "  by  means  of  the 
calcium  or  electric  light,  photographic  diagrams, 
maps,  views,  and  pictures  are  exhibited  to  illus- 
trate astronomy,  physical  geography,  natural 
history,  geology,  architecture,  and  history." 
We  are  constantly  receiving  evidence  of  how  im- 
portant a  place  the  magic  lantern  is  filling  in  our 
institutions  of  learning.  This  is  as  it  should  be. 
There  is  nothing  we  can  commend  that  is  suscep- 
tible of  such  a  fund  of  instruction  and  entertain- 
ment, adapted  to  both  young  and  old.  as  this 
popular  instrument.  But  the  most  important 
item  in  connection  with  its  use  is  a  supply  of 
slides,  or  pictures  on  glass,  which  always  com- 
prise a  part  of  the  outfit.  We  import  these 
largely,  and  are  prepared  to  supply  them  to  col- 
leges and  other  institutions  on  very  favorable 
terms.     See  our  advertising  pages. 


Inter-State  Industrial  Exposition  of 
Chicago  will  open  September  9th  and  close  Oc- 
tober 10th,  1874.  A  pamphlet  circular  sent  us 
by  the  Secretary,  Mr.  John  P.  Reynolds,  gives 
all  the  necessary  information  in  regard  to  the 
Exposition.  We  are  glad  to  see  photography  as 
signed  a  prominent  place  in  the  department  of 
"Pine  Arts."  This  will  be  another  fine  oppor- 
tunity for  our  Western  photographers  to  display 
their  work,  and  we  presume  they  will  not  be 
slow  in  availing  themselves  of  it. 


The  "Western  Photographic  News:  A 
Journal  of  Practical  Photographic  Information." 
— This  is  the  title  of  a  new  sheet  issued  by 
Charles  W.  Stevens,  of  Chicago,  just  before  the 
meeting  of  the  National  Photographic  Society  in 
that  city.  It  contains  a  supplement,  in  which 
is  given  a  map  of  the  business  portion  of  the 
city,  very  useful  to  visiting  members.  We  are 
glad  to  see  this  additional  evidence  of  the  enter- 
prise of  the  proprietor  of  the  "Great  Central." 
He  understands  the  value  of  ink  and  paper,  and 
while  he  diffuses  knowledge  among  the  craft, 
may  his  labors  bring  him  a  rich  reward. 

This  initial  number  is  filled  with  original  and 
interesting  articles  from  some  of  the  leading 
operators  of  the  West,  with  a  page  or  two  of 
well-displayed  advertisements,  and  presents  .a 
very  attractive  appearance.  It  has  our  best 
wishes. 


Wet  Books. — We  had  supposed  at  one  time 
that  these  were  about  exhausted,  but  we  find 
that  many  that  we  supposed  were  uninjured  and 
placed  them  away  upon  the  shelves,  have  shown 
signs  of  dampness,  and  the  bindings  are  stained  so 
as  to  make  it  necessary  to  place  them  among  the 
damaged  goods.  A  reference  to  our  late  adver- 
tisement will  give  the  titles,  terms,  &o. 

Something  New. — This  is  another  little  leaflet 
we  have  just  issued,  similar  to  The  Photographer 
to  his  Patrons,  but  it  is  an  entirely  new  work,  and 
calculated  to  give  such  information  to  the  sitter 
as  shall  save  the  photographer  a  great  deal  of 
trouble  and  annoyance.  The  favor  with  which 
the  other  was  received,  and  the  immense  number 
we  sold,  over  six  hundrrd  thousand,  induced  us 
to  issue  Something  Neiv ;  and  we  believe  all 
who  enjoyed  the  benefit  of  the  few  words,  To 
my  Patrons,  will  feel  the  necessity  of  having 
this  to  take  its  place.  For  terms,  &c,  see  ad- 
vertisement. 


Reading  Photographic  Journals. — Mr. 
Hesler  says  something  to  the  point  which  we  ex- 
tract from  a  business  letter  in  reference  to  his 
arrangements  for  the  Convention  at  Chicago.  He 
says:  "I  am  getting  a  good  many  letters  inquir- 
ing about  arrangements,  by  those  not  members, 
and  who  do  not  take  or  read  the  Journal,  I 
presume.  So  I  tell  them  to  take  the  Journal, 
read  and  be  posted.  I  don't  see  how  any  pho- 
tographer can  be  so  stupid  and  shortsighted  as 
not  to  take  and  read  the  journals  published  on 
our  art.  They  are  mostly  the  ones  who  save  five 
dollars  in  not  subscribing,  and  pay  twenty-five  to 
fifty   dollars  for  some  simple   formula  that  has 


256 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


been    published   in   all  of  them   over  and    over 
again.     I  feel  sorry  for  such." 

Caution. — We  suggest  to  our  readers  the  pro- 
priety of  being  on  their  guard  against  a  "  patent 
adjustable  screen  for  the  transmission  of  yellow 
light,''  which  is  said  to  have  been  patented  and 
put  in  the  market  by  one  Lewis  Felong,  of  San 
Francisco.  We  would  say,  be  sure  of  the  effect 
of  a  yellow  screen  before  you  buy  one. 

Mr.  Romain  Talbot  sends  us  a  "Wholesale 
Price  List''  of  his  photographic  goods,  gotten  up 
in  rather  unique  style.  It  is  lithographed  from 
a  pen  and  ink  copy,  with  cuts  of  dipping  baths, 
dishes,  <&c. ,  and  presents  a  very  neat  appearance. 

Of  the  many  good  words  in  reference  to  our 
publications  we  select  the  following  testimonial 
to  Dr.  Vogel's  Reference  Book,  which  is  one  of 
the  most  useful  works  we  have  ever  published  : 

"Accept  my  thanks  for  the  h.indy  little  book 
kindly  forwarded  to  me  through  our  mutual 
friend  Mr.  Gates.  I  shall  value  it  by  constant 
use,  as  it  is  just  what  one  so  often  wants.  I 
usually  take  a  book  of  this  sort  out  with  me. 

''Again  thanking  you  I  am 

"Yours,  much  obliged, 

"  Frank  M.   Good." 

Mr.  Good  is  a  celebrated  English  landscape 
photographer,  and  his  opinion  is  valuable.  This 
book  is  of  a  size  convenient  to  carry  in  the  pocket, 
and  is  especially  useful  to  landscape  photogra- 
phers. It  is  what  its  name  indicates,  a  Refer- 
ence Book,  alphabetically  arranged,  so  that  any 
desired  information  is  instantly  found  under  its 
proper  head.      See  advertisement. 


The  New  Masonic  Temple. — A  fine  series  of 
views  of  the  interior  and  exterior  of  this  magnifi- 
cent building,  from  negatives  by  Mr.  F.  Gute- 
kunst,  is  being  published  by  Mr.  James  Cremer  of 
this  city,  in  connection  with  Benerman  &  Wilson. 
We  call  the  attention  of  Masons  and  others  to 
the  advertisement.  All  who  are  proud  of  the 
ancient  Order,  the  noble  principles  it  inculcates, 
and  its  high  moral  and  social  standing,  should 
have  a  set  of  these  pictures. 

Photographic  Art. — Few  who  have  seen  the 
prize  photographs  produced  by  Gutekunst,  or 
who  see  the  gold  medal  prize  picture  published 
in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  for  July,  will 
object  to  the  use  of  the  word  "  art,"  in  connec- 
tion with  a  chemical  process  and  delicate  ma- 
nipulation for  producing  pictures.  The  picture 
referred   to  is   the  work  of  Bradley  &  Rulofson, 


of  San  Francisco,  California,  and  is  perfect  in 
all  its  details.  The  pose  and  lighting  of  the 
figure  have  received  most  careful  attention,  and 
the  negative  itself  must  have  been  sharp,  clear, 
and  soft,  without  being  weak.  The  prints  were 
made  by  Mr.  William  H.  Rhoads,  of  this  city, 
and  are  worthy  of  the  fine  negative  from  which 
they  were  taken.  We  have  before  spoken  of 
the  influence  of  photographic  journals,  in  the 
improvement  of  pictures  made  by  that  process. 
The  Philadelphia  Photographer  has  adopted  a 
plan  with  this  end  in  view,  which  seems  likely 
to  lead  to  good  results.  A  few  months  ago,  the 
proprietors  offered  prizes  for  the  best  cabinet 
photographs  sent  to  them  for  publication,  and  in 
this  way  secured  the  fine  specimen  of  which 
mention  has  been  made. — Public  Ledger,  Phila. 


A  Compliment  to  California  Photogra- 
phers — Bradley  it  Rulofson,  of  this  city,  have 
received  from  Edward  L.  Wilson,  editor  of  the 
Philadelphia  Photographer,  the  gold  medal 
awarded  to  them  for  superior  skill  in  the  photo- 
graphic art.  The  Photographer  is  the  organ  of 
the  National  Photographic  Association,  and 
the  prize  secured  by  the  San  Francisco  firm 
mentioned,  was  offered  by  Mr.  Wilson  for  the 
finest  negative  in  the  United  States,  to  be  used 
in  next  month's  issue  of  his  journal.  As  the 
National  Convention  of  Photographers  meet  at 
Chicago,  in  July,  it  is  desirable  that  the  Pho- 
tographer should  present  an  elegant  and  artistic 
appearance,  hence  the  inducements  for  competi- 
tion offered  by  Mr.  Wilson.  The  medal  is  solid 
gold,  and  is  in  itself  a  fine  specimen  of  artistic 
skill.  — Sa?i  Francisco  Poper. 


The  Shaw  &  Wilcox  Company  against 
William  Nims. — Mr.  Nims  has  sent  us  a  cir- 
cular showing  the  status  of  this  case,  which  is 
being  tried  in  the  Supreme  Court  of  the  City  and 
County  of  New  York. 

Pictures  Received. — The  National  Photo- 
graphic Association  Convention  has  taken  the 
attention  of  photographers  from  us  this  month, 
and  we  have  not  been  favored  with  the  usual 
number  of  specimens.  But  we  have  been  remem- 
bered by  a  few,  all  of  whom  deserve  credit  and 
encouragement  for  their  efforts.  From  J.  Pitcher 
Spooner,  Stockton,  Cal.,  Victoria  cards;  cabinets 
from  Mr.  Oruosby,  of  Chicago ;  cards  from  Mr. 
James  Howard,  Plattsburg,  N.  Y.  ;  and  cards 
and  cabinets  from  Mr.  Julius  Hall,  Great  Bar- 
rington,  Mass.  These  last  show  some  very  pretty 
effects,  and  indicate  progress  in  the  right  direc- 
tion. 


ADVERTISING  RATES  FOR  SPECIALTIES — It,  will  be  understood  thai  matter  under 
this  head  is  not  to  be  considered  as  always  having  editorial  sanction,  though  we  shall  endeavor  to  clear  it  of 
anything  tending  to  deceive,  or  mislead.    Stock-dealers  will  find  this. a  beneficial  mode  of  advertising,  and 

sure  to  pay  largely.  Six  lines,  one  insertion,  $2.00,  and  2f>  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a 
line — in  advance.  Operators  desiring  situations,  no  charge.  Matter  must  be  received  by  the  23d  to  secure 
insertion.  Advertisers  will  please  not  ask  us  for  recommendations.  JSSF'We  cannot  undertake  to  mail 
answers  to  parties  who  advertise.    Please  always  add  your  address  to  the  advertisement. 


HANCE'S    PHOTO.    SPECIALTIES. 

Please  read  my  four  page  advertisement. 
Mr.  G.W.  Hope,  Middletown,  N.  J.,  who 
has  been  using  my  Specialties  for  some 
time,  says  (July  17,  1874) :  "I  use  your 
chemicals  altogether.  Your  DOUBLE 
IODIZED  COLLODION  works  splen- 
did, and  its  keeping  so  well,  is  an  ex- 
cellent feature." 
USE  HANCE'S  SPECIALTIES. 

ALL  DEALERS  KEEP  THEM. 


Photograph  Gallery  For  Sale. — Well  fit- 
ted with  instruments  of  fine  quality  ;  good  lights 
and  good  location.  For  further  information, 
address  L.  D.  Wisener, 

Bluffton,  Allen  Co.,  Ohio. 


Lea's  Manual  of  Photog- 
raphy, $3.75.  See  Advertise- 
ment.   Third  Thousand. 


The  Portable  Gallery,  advertised  in  June 
number,  can  be  bought  now  with  backgrounds, 
chairs,  mattings,  head-rests,  stove,  benches,  and 
other  numerous  articles,  costing  $475  for  only 
$235.  Purchaser,  if  he  is  a  second-class  artist,  is 
bound  to  clear  from  $300  to  $400  a  year  here  ;  can 
easily  prove  it.  Being  compelled  to  leave  must  sell 
as  quick  as  possible.  Why  do  not  artists  read  this. 
Write  or  come' to  see  it.     Address 

F.  Dael,  P.  0.  Box  141,  Versailles,  Ky. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Gallery  For  Sale. — In  one  of  the  leading 
shopping  thoroughfares  in  Philadelphia.  Large 
amount  of  solar  work  made  (direct  solar  camera 
on  the  premises).  A  good  business  established 
1 7  years  ;  all  the  facilities  for  making  good  work 
from  medallion  to  20  x  24.  Reasons  for  selling, 
an  .accident  to  the  proprietor.  Call  between  9 
and  10,  a.m.,  or  address  at  his  residence,  1208 
South  Fifth  St.,  Philadelphia. 


Try  Hermagis'  Lenses. 

Used   by  M.  Adam  Salomon, 

Paris.    See  Advertisement. 


TO  MY  CUSTOMERS.     NOTICE! 

Office  Chas.  W.  Stevens,  proprietor  "Great 
Central"  Photographic  Warehouse,  158  State 
Street,  Chicago.  Dear  Sir:  I  beg  your  indul- 
gence for  any  delay  in  meeting  your  commands 
with  accustomed  promptness.  The  National 
Photographic  Convention,  held  in  our  city  du- 
ring the  past  week,  and  the  extra  labor  of  repla- 
cing goods  moved  during  our  late  fire,  is  my 
excuse  for  asking  this  favor. 

The  "  Great  Central  "  is  again  in  good  shape 
for  business,  and  with  an  unusually  large  and 
complete  stock,  ready  to  meet  all  demands  with 
greater  promptness  than  any  other  house  in  the 
trade. 

Awaiting  your  pleasure  and  soliciting  an  order, 
Respectfully, 
July  20,  1874.  Chas.  W.  Stevens. 


Linn's  Landscape  Photogra- 
phy is  the  book  for  the 
season. 


Wanted. — A  good  operator,  as  partner,  with 
four  or  five  hundred  dollars  ;  one  who  can  retouch 
and  make  good  work. 

James  McKeown,  Photographer, 
'    .  Anderson,  Ind. 


PARTNER  WANTED  in  an  estab- 
lished STOCK  BUSINESS,  in  a  South- 
ern city.  Credit  and  business  good,  but 
can  be  very  largely  increased  with 
another  partner.  Address  AUGUSTUS, 
office  Philadelphia  Photographer. 


For  Sale. — The  finest  Photographic  Parlors 

in  the  handsomest  city  in  the  state  of  New  York. 

Entrance  next  door  to  P.  0.     Cash  only  buys  it. 

Business  for  three  persons,  and  lively.     Address 

Well  G.  Singhi,  Binghampton,  N.  Y. 


Reilly's  Negatives  of  the  Trapp  fit  Munch  received 
Yosemite  Valtey,  Sierra  Ne-  the  Medal  of  Merit  for  their 
vadas,  fitc,  for  sale  by  Ben-  j  Albumen  Paper,  at  the  Vien- 
erman  fit  Wilson,  Philada.        I  na  Exhibition. 

USE  WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


Lea's  Manual  of  Photog- 
raphy, $3.75.  See  Advertise- 
ment.   Third  Thousand. 


The  Bee  Hive  Gallery  For  Sale. — The 
most  convenient  and  best  located  gallery  in  In- 
dianapolis, doing  the  largest  amount  of  business 
in  the  city.  Object,  have  fitted  up  an  up-town 
gallery,  and  do  not  care  to  run  both. 

The  above  gallery  is  on  the  2d  floor,  is  sup- 
plied with  water  and  water-closet,  speaking- 
tubes,  separate  toilet  rooms,  is  the  best  arranged 
gallery  in  the  city. 

Mrs.  Mary  A.  Potts,  Proprietor. 


Send  all  your  SOLAR 
PMUSTTING  to  Charles  K. 
Bill,  758  Broadway,  W.  Y. 


For  Sale. — A  first-class  gallery  in  Nashua, 
Iowa.  A  live  town  ;  population  2000.  Gallery 
newly  fitted  up  ;  centrally  located  ;  ground  floor  ; 
plenty  of  room  ;  north  sky  and  side-lights. 

Plenty  of  instruments  for  doing  all  classes  of 
work.  Country  well  settled.  No  opposition. 
.Will  be  sold  cheap.     For  particulars,  address 

J.  E.  Rich,  Charles  City,  Iowa 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

For  Sale. — At  Mauch  Chunk,  Pa.,  Brown's 
(deceased)  Photographic  Gallery  ;  fixtures  and 
stereoscopic  view  negatives,  of  the  coal  regions, 
cheap.  A  photographer  can  open  immediately, 
print  the  views  and  sell  all  he  can  make  during 
the  season.     Over  90,000  visitors  last  season. 

Address  Reuben  Knecht,  Easton,  Pa. 


Try  Hermagis'  Lenses. 

Used  by  M.  Adam  Salomon, 

Paris.    See  Advertisement. 


Attention  is  called  to  J.  A.  Anderson's  Ca- 
mera Boxes  and  testimonials  in  our  advertise- 
ments. These  boxes  are  fast  taking  rank  among 
the  leading  boxes  in  the  country,  and  photogra- 
phers will  find  it  to  their  advantage  to  post 
themselves  in  regard  to  prices,  &c. 


Photographers  in  the  South 
and  Southwest  who  would 
buy  goods  to  their  best  ad- 
vantage would  do  well  to  pat- 
ronize the  Stockhouse  of 
Chas.  A.  Wilson,  No.  7  North 
Charles  St.,  Baltimore,  Md. 
Send  a  trial  order. 

USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


Linn's  Landscape  Photogra- 
phy is  the  book  for  the 
season. 


Our  Latest  Illustrated  Price  List  has 
been  published.  Central  manufacture  for  pho- 
tography. T.  F.  Schippang  &  Co., 

Berlin,  S.  W.  Neuenburger  St.,  25. 


Baltimore 

Baltimore 

Baltimore 
Stockhouse, 

Stockhouse, 

Stockhouse, 
Chas.  A.  Wilson, 

Chas.  A.  Wilson, 

Chas.  A.  Wilson, 
No.  7  North  Charles  St. 
No.  7  North  Charles  St. 
No.  7  North  Charles  St. 

J.  A.  Anderson,  Manufacturer  of  Photo- 
graphic Apparatus,  65  East  Indiana  St.,  Chicago. 
Send  for  price  list. 


If  you  want  to  improve  your 
work  and  save  time  get  the 
Rapid  Photo-Washer. 

Danville,  Iowa,  March  11, 1874. 
Mr.  J.  A.  Anderson. 

Dear  Sir  :  After  a  month's  trial  of  the  box 
bought  of  you,  I  am  willing  to  add  my  testimony 
as  to  the  superiority  of  your  camera  boxes.  It 
works  like  a  charm  and  is  satisfactory  in  every 
respect.  Yours  truly, 

Huberd  Williams. 


To  Landscape  Photogra- 
phers.— Please  remember, 
during  the  coming  season, 
that  we  are  in  the  market 
constantly  for  the  purchase 
of  good  Stereoscopic  Nega- 
tives of  interesting  American 
Views.  Send  proofs  and 
prices  of  negatives  to  Ben- 
erman  &  Wilson,  Photo. 
Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Wanted. — Agents  to  travel  through  the  seve- 
ral states.  None  need  apply  except  practical 
photographers,  and  those  acquainted  with  the 
use  of  the  solar  camera.     Apply  to 

H.  L.  Emmons,  Baltimore,  Md. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 
VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


Try  Hermagis'  Lenses. 

Used  by  M.  Adam  Salomon, 

Paris.    See  Advertisement. 


I  most  cheerfully  recommend  Mr.  J.  A.  Ander- 
son's Camera  Boxes,  for  beauty,  durability,  and 
cheapness.  I  have  two  in  my  establishment 
since  my  opening  here,  and  find  them  fully  up 
to  the  claims  of  &  first-class  instrument. 

W.  A.  Armstrong, 
State  and  Quiney  Streets,  Chicago. 

Mr.  Armstrong  has  for  a  number  of  years  past 
been  engaged  in  business  in  Saginaw,  Mich., 
and  is  a  photographer  well  known  to  the  frater- 
nity. 

C.  D.  Freclricks  and  O'Ml's  Glace  Process, 

CAUTION!  WE  HAVE  NO 
AGENTS.  For  information, 
apply  directly  to  us.  Speci- 
men and  circular  sent  on  ap- 
plication. A  SPECIAL  COL- 
LODION and  all  the  materials 
necessary  for  working  suc- 
cessfully. Embossing  or 
Cameo  Dies  of  any  size  fur- 
nished to  order. 

C.  D.  FREDRICKS  &  CO., 
587  Broadway,  N.  Y. 


East,  West,  'STorth  and  South  acknowledge 
the  superiority  of  Nason's  Inventions. 

Lamson,  of  Portland,  Me.;  Eaton,  of  Omaha, 
Neb.  ;  Zimmerman,  of  St.  Paul,  Minn.,  and  An- 
derson, of  New  Orleans,  La.,  are  all  men  of  large 
experience  and  excellent  judgment,  and  each 
bought  our  goods,  including  the  "Improved 
Background  Carriage,"  "Universal  Light  Modi- 
fier," "  Non-Ague  Camera  Stand,"  "Magic 
Mirror,"  "  Nasonion  Cut-Outs, "  and  many  other 
of  our  novelties. 


Rocher,    Brand,   Mosher,   Gentile, 
and  many  other  well-known  Chicago  photogra- 
phers, bought  largely  of  Nason's  Inventions. 
What  better  recommendations  could  possibJy  be 
had? 


Nasonian  Cut-Outs. 
Unique — Novel — Neat — Useful- 
See  advertisement. 


-Artistic 


Wanted  by  the  1st  of  September,  a  strict  first- 
class  operator  and  artistic  poser,  none  but  fully 
competent  need  to  apply.  To  the  right  man  a 
pleasant  and  permanent  situation  is  guaranteed. 
Address,  stating  terms,         Hallwig  &  Co., 

627  Olive  Street,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


,Mff|?M 


ST^PAVLM/M//. 


SITUATIONS    WANTED. 


By  a  young  man  of  three  years'  experience. 
Can  make  himself  useful  in  any  department  of  a 
gallery.  Ferrotyping  a  specialty.  Salary  no 
object.  Indifferent  as  to  location.  Address  J. 
B.  Ferguson,  Rutland,  Meigs  County.  Ohio. 

As  assistant  operator,  or  as  printer  and  assis- 
tant operator.  Address  Orlando  H.  Peck,  Box 
774,  Richmond,  Ind.  Reference,  Mote  Bros., 
same  place. 

By  an  English  photographer  of  eighteen  years' 
practice,  an  appointment  as  operator,  artistic 
retoucher,  colorist,  &c.  Address  Pyro^  215  Pearl 
Street,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 

By  a  young  man  who  has  some  knowledge  of 
the  business  in  all  its  branches,  as  general  assis- 
tant. Good  references  given.  Address  C.  T. 
Allman,  Napoleon,  Ohio. 

As  general  assistant  in  a  good  gallery.  Would 
prefer  a  place  where  I  could  get  boarding  and 
lodging  with  family  of  photographer.  Referen- 
ces given  as  to  ability  and  character.  Address 
Winfield  Brilla,  Richmond,  Ind. 

By  a  young  man  twenty  years  of  age,  as  prin- 
ter and  toner,  in  some  first-class  gallery.  Can 
operate.  Best  of  reference  given.  Address 
Business,  30  Ontario  Street,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

As  operator  or  printer.  Address  Jos.  D. 
Parker,  Jr.,  231  Mifflin  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

As  dark-room  man,  and  No.  1  portrait  gla- 
cier. References.  Address  Photographer,  94 
Fourth  Avenue,  New  York. 

By  an  India-ink  and  water-color  artist.  Is  a 
practical  photographer,  and  understands  work- 
ing the  solar  camera.  Address  J.  W.  Loyer, 
Meehanicsburg,  Cumberland  County,  Pa. 

As  an  assistant  in  a  gallery.  Has  had  experi- 
ence in  all  branches  ;  can  retouch,  and  experi- 
enced in  out-door  work.  Address  E.  R.  W., 
Norwich,  Conn. 

By  a  young  man  as  assistant  operator.  Is  an 
experienced  ferrotyper.  Address  W.  M.  Deming, 
Canaan,  Conn. 

By  a  first-class  toner  and  printer. ,  Has  had 
three  years'  experience  in  a  first-class  studio. 
Will  assist  in  dark-room,  if  needed.  Can  give 
good  references.    C.  F.  Heald,  Cambridge,  Mass. 

By  a  lady,  to  finish  photographs  in  colors  and 
ink.  References  given  and  required.  Address, 
stating  terms,  M.  B.  Atkinson,  office  Philadel- 
phia Photographer. 

Where  I  can  learn  photography  in  all  its 
branches  ;  have  some  knowledge  in  retouching 
negatives,  and  quite  experienced  in  water  color- 
ing. Address  Miss  Pheba  D.  Hammond,  box  426, 
Elgin,  Illinois. 

By  a  young  lady,  in  a  first-class  gallery,  as 
printer  and  toner,  or  attending  in  reception-room. 
References,  if  desired.  Address  T.  B.  McCaf- 
erty,  Box  128,  Columbus.  Wisconsin. 

VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


In  a  good  photographic  gallery,  in  any  capac- 
ity, by  a  young  man  of  three  and  a-half  years' 
experience.  Address  G.,  care  of  M.  J.  G.  M., 
P.  0.  Box  469,  New  Albany,  Ind. 

By  a  lady  who  has  had  nine  years'  experience 
in  a  first-class  gallery  ;  to  attend  reception  room  ; 
mount  and  retouch  pictures.  Would  be  willing 
to  make  herself  generally  useful.  Good  refer- 
ences can  be  given.  Please  address  Miss  R.  A. 
Gregory,  21  Court  Street,  Utiea,  N.  Y. 

As  an  assistant  operator,  negative  retoucher, 
or  printer.  Address,  stating  terms  and  partic- 
ulars, to  Photographer,  P.  0.  Box  128,  Ottawa 
city,  Ontario,  Canada. 

By  an  energetic  young  man,  in  a  first-class 
gallery,  as  printer  and  toner,  finisher  or  operator. 
Have  had  some  experience  in  the  business.  Good 
recommendations  if  required.  For  further  par- 
ticulars, address  F.  S.  MeKnight,  Rienzi,  Al- 
corn County,  Miss. 

By  a  young  man  of  steady  habits,  as  an  assis- 
tant in  mixed  work  ;  or  will  take  any  part  of 
the  work.  Can  retouch  very  well.  Address 
C.  D.  McClary,  Alexandria,  Madison  County 
Indiana. 

To  learn,  by  a  young  man  of  steady  habits, 
who  has  had  some  experience  as  general  assis- 
tant. Could  be  useful  as  printer's  assistant,  and 
could  take  charge  of  printing  after  some  prac- 
tice. Can  mount  photographs  and  finish  ferro- 
types. Wages  not  so  much  of  an  object  as  a 
good  situation.  Address  soon,  "Beginner," 
care  Box  43,  Skaneateles,  N.  Y. 

By  an  operator  of  nine  years'  experience,  in  a 
good  Gallery.  Has  been  used  to  (and  is  now) 
doing  the  general  work  of  a  gallery.  Address 
W.  I.  Rood,  Spencer,  Clay  Co.,  Iowa. 


SOCIETY  CALENDAR. 

(Published  for  the  convenience  of  Visiting  Pho- 
tographers and  those  desiring  to  correspond. ) 

>g®=  This  Calendar  is  published  free  to  the  Socie- 
ties, and  we  shall  feel  obliged  for  notice  of  any  changes 
in  time  of  meeting  or  in  the  officers,  also  to  add  any 
we  have  overlooked. 

Bosto?i  Photographic  Association. — At  J.  W. 
Black's  studio,  the  first  Friday  of  each  month. 
E.  J.  Foss,  President;  C.  H.  Danforth,  Secre- 
tary, 27  Central  Square,  Cambridgeport. 

Photographic  Section  of  the  American  Insti- 
tute, New  York. — At  the  Institute  rooms,  the 
first  Tuesday  of  each  month.  H.  J.  Newton, 
President ;  Oscar  G.  Mason,  Secretary,  Bellevue 
Hospital. 

German  Photographic  Society,  New  York.  — 
At  Nos.  64  and  66  East  Fourth  Street,  New 
York,  every  Thursday  evening.  W.  Kurtz,  Presi- 
dent ;  Edward  Boettcher,  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, 79  Newark  Avenue,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 

Brooklyn  Photographic  Art  Association, 
Brooklyn,  N-  Y. — Fourth  Tuesday  in  each  month, 
at  179  Montague  Street.  Rev.  Dr.  C.  H.  Hall, 
President ;  Chas.  E.  Bolles,  Cor.  Secretary. 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia.  —  Ad- 
journed. 

Pennsylvania  Photographic  Association,  Phil- 
adelphia.— Adjourned. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association. — At  rooms 
of  C.  W.  Stevens,  158  State  Street,  first  Wednes- 
day evening  of  each  month.  G.  A.  Douglas, 
President ;  0.  F.  Weaver,  Secretary,  158  State 
Street. 

Buffalo  Photographic  Association. — At  Buffa- 
lo, the  first  Wednesday  evening  of  each  month. 
J.  Samo,  President;  Jennie  M.  Crockett,  Sec'y. 


TO   PROFESSIONAL   PHOTOGRAPHERS    AND   THE   TRADE. 


CH.    DAUVOIS, 

Acknowledged  to  be  the  Best  and  Cheapest  in  the  World. 


DH  ^J      n  ROHAUT    &    HUTINET, 

•  -*--*-     \^>         3-       A    1.   ^      M^J      _■_     y  SUCCESSORS, 

No.  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris, 


ESPECIAL   MANUFACTURERS    OP 


MOUNTS^FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


TRADE    MARK,    Ch.D. 


Mounts  for  Cartes-de-Visite, 
Cabinet  Portrait, 
Victoria  Card, 

Stereoscopic  Views — all  new  samples  of  French 
styles. 


Bristol  Boards  of  every  size  and  thickness,  plain. 

India  Tinted  and  Fancy  Printing. 

Book-post  and  Card  Cases. 

Stout  Blotting  Paper  Albums. 

First-class  Rives  Albumenized  Paper,  Ac,  &e. 


MEDALS  AWARDED  AT  EVERY  EXHIBITION. 

All  orders  are  to  be  sent  to  their  establishment,  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris,  or  to  Wholesale  Houses 
of  the  United  States.     Samples  on  application. 

LIBERAL  DISCOUNT  TO  WHOLESALE  HOUSES. 


PHOTOGRAPHERS,   ATTENTION  ! 

YOU  NEED  NOT  BUY  THE  GLACE,  CALIFORNIA, 

OR  ANY  OTHER  ENAMEL  PROCESS. 

EXAMINE  THE  NEW 

Enameled  and  Embossed 


PHOTOGRAPHS, 

AND  PATENT  IMPROVED  PRESSES  FOR  MOULDING  THEM. 


INTRODUCED    BY 


Messrs.  E.  L.  Brand  &  Co. 

596  WABASH  AVENUE,  CHICAGO. 

*®*  Full  Instructions  Supplied  GRATIS! 

Messrs.  E.  L.  BRAND  &  CO.  desire  to  state  to  Photographers  that 
they  purchased  the  process  for  making  the  SOUVENIR  photographs  in 
France,  but  finding  it  incomplete  and  impracticable,  they  have  diligently 
experimented  until  they  have  a  perfect  process.  But  after  all,  the  great 
desideratum  is  a  properly  constructed  PRESS  for  moulding  the  pic- 
tures, or  in  other  words,  raising  them  in  cameo  style.  Such  a  machine 
Messrs.  Brand  &  Co.  have  perfected,  and  offer  to  the  photographers  at 
popular  prices. 

They  are  complete  in  themselves,  embodying  a  press  and  dies  of  all  popu- 
lar sizes.  They  are  made  on  entirely  new  principles,  and  will  commend 
themselves  to  all  who  see  them.     They  were  shown  at 


The  Chicago 


Convention, 


where  a  room  was  furnished  in  the  Exposition  Building  for  the  accommodation  of  those 
who  wished  to  learn  how  to  make  the  SOUVENIR  PHOTOGRAPHS  without  charge. 

It  was  the  point  of  attraction  during  the  whole  Convention. 

They  are  going  to  he  the  leading  picture,  and  will  pay  A  SPLENDID  PROFIT.  Do  not 
pay  for  ANY  process  until  you  see  ours,  with  its  many  improvements,  for  we  can  give  you 
the  best  process  in  the  world,  GRATIS.     For  further  particulars,  address 

E.  L.  BRAND  &  CO. 

596  Wabash  Ave.,  Chicago,  Ills. 


TERMS   IN  ART;   or 
ART  LIFE. 

JBsr    CHAELES     IE  ID  "V  IE  :E  UST  .^  _ 

It  explains  all  those  Terms  connected  with  Fine  Art  which  are  most  important  to  know. 

No  Educated  Person  should  be  without  it. 
It  also  contains  the  Prices  of  all  articles  connected  with  Painting,  &c,  which  will  be 

found  a  very  useful  reference. 


PRICE,  ONE  DOLLAR. 

Sent  to  any  address,  free  of  postage,  on  receipt  of  price. 


For  Sale  by  BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  7th  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Phila. 
STEREOSCOPIC  VIEWS  OF  THE 

MASONIC  TEMPLE,   PHILADELPHIA. 

The  Grand  Lodge  of  Pennsylvania,  finding  from  the  rapid  growth  of  the  Order  they  must  provide 
a  more  spacious  edifice  for  the  meetings  of  the  numerous  Lodges,  in  1867  purchased  the  lot  on  the 
Northeast  corner  Broad  and  Filbert  streets,  suitable  for  their  purpose,  it  being  bounded  on  all  sides 
by  streets.  With  great  care  a  plan  was  decided  upon — James  H.  Windrim,  Architect.  The  building 
is  of  granite,  250  feet  long,  by  150  feet  wide,  style  of  the  Norman  school,  two  stories  and  entresol, 
with  pinnacles  and  towers  ;  main  tower  240  ft.  from  the  base  ;  foundation  31  ft.  below  the  level  of  street. 

The  corner-stone  was  laid  June  24th,  1868,  with  appropriate  Masonic  ceremonies.  From  that  time, 
until  September  26th,  1873,  the  date  of  dedication,  the  Building  Committee  labored  indefatigably, 
and  present,  as  the  result  of  their  labor,  a  Temple  first  in  splendor  since  the  days  of  King  Solomon. 
The  cost  of  building  and  furniture,  one  and  a-half  million  of  dollars. 

The  interior  has  one  main  hall,  of  Doric  architecture,  sweeping  through  from  end  to  end,  250  feet 
long,  and  20  feet  wide.  On  either  side  are  the  rooms  set  apart  for  the  officials  of  the  Grand  Lodge, 
fitted  up  in  the  most  approved  manner.  On  this  floor,  also,  is  the  "  Grand  Banqueting  Hall,"  of  the 
composite  order  of  architecture,  with  decorations  of  flowers,  game,  and  fruit.  The  room  is  105  feet 
long,  50  feet  wide  ;  ceiling  30  feet,  with  accommodation  for  seating  500  persons.  Upon  this  floor  there 
is  one  Lodge  room  called  the  Oriental  Hall,  from  its  style  of  architecture.  It  will  seat  200  persons. 
Its  decoration  and  furniture  strictly  accord  with  the  Oriental  style,  as  do  all  the  decorations  and  fur- 
niture of  all  parts  of  the  Temple,  conform  to  the  style  of  architecture  of  the  rooms  in  which  they  are 
placed.  The  heating  and  ventilating  apparatus  are  wonders.  The  water  is  supplied  from  two  sources  ; 
part  from  the  city :  but  the  main  supply  is  from  a  well  beneath  the  tower,  which  is  forced  into  four 
cedar  tanks  of  four  thousand  gallons  capacity  each,  placed  at  different  parts  of  the  building. 

The  principal  floor  is  divided  into  Lodge  rooms — that  of  the  Grand  Lodge  the  largest ;  it  is  105  feet 
long,  51  feet  wide,  ceiling  50  feet  high  ;  will  seat  800  persons — it  is  in  pure  Corinthian  style.  Grand 
Chapter  Hall  is  90  feet  long,  50  feet  wide,  and  50  feet  high,  and  is  in  the  Italian  Renaissance  style, 
and  will  seat  600  persons.  The  Commandery  Rooms  are  situated  in  Eastern  entresol,  above  the  prin- 
cipal floor,  of  Gothic  architecture,  and  will  seat  500  persons.  The  suite  consists  of  the  Asylum,  Council 
Chamber,  Banqueting  Hall,  Armory,  and  Regalia  Room.  All  are  grandly  magnificent.  The  remaining 
rooms  are  the  Egyptian,  Ionic,  and  Norman  Halls,  with  others,  each  a  marvel  of  beauty. 

There  are  40,000  Free  Masons  in  the  State,  330  Lodges,  60  being  in  the  City  of  Philadelphia. 

$2.  per  dozen  by  mail,  post-paid.  Or  in  sets  of  12,  16,  and  22,  embracing  the  most  beautiful  views 
of  the  exterior  and  interior,  at  the  dozen  rate. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Philadelphia. 


AUG.  SCHWARZE.  SCHWARZE     &    VALK  WILLIAM  VALK. 

JSfO.    614    AltCH   STREET,    PHILADELPHIA. 

f  German  AHniineii  Paper,  anfl  Arrowroot  Plain  Salted.  Paper, 


IMPORTERS  OF  THE 
MOST  CELEBRATED  BRANDS  OF 


I 

DEALERS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  MATERIALS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 

Will  mail  to  any  address  in  the  country,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  $1,  one  dozen  sheets  of  Assorted  Photo- 
graphic Paper,  each  sheet  being  numbered  for  distinction. 


BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO., 

159  Washington  St.,  Boston, 

Importers  and  Sole  Agents  in  the  United  States  for  the  celebrated 

Voigtlander  &  Son,  and  Darlot  Lenses 

For  Portraits,  Views,  and  Stereoscopic  Work  of  all  sizes.     Send  for  Price  List. 


TRY  OUR  NEW  STEREOSCOPIC  LENSES 

IP  YOU  WANT  THE  BEST.     PRICE,  $22  PER  PAIR. 

None  genuine  unless  our  names  are  engraved  on  them. 


ALBUMEN  PAPEES. 


demon's, 
Hovey's, 


Dresden  S.  &  II., 

"       Brilliant. 


AMERICAN  OPTICAL  CO.'S  CAMERA  BOXES 


Black  Walnut  Frames, 0VA1,  and  m^fr  S,rs  *nd  sty,,s' 

f^QY'TrOrl    T?nQi"10     r"PQ"mOC!      Square,   Carved  Rustic,  with  leaf  on  corners.     All 


Sherman  Card  Frames 
White  Hollywood  Frames. 


sizes  up  to  18x22. 


We  have  of  these  three  different  sizes  and  styles  for  the  Card , 
Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 


We  have  these  in  three  different  styles  of  each  size 
for  the  Card,  Victoria,  and  Cabinet  Photographs. 


Stereoscopes,  Prang's  Chromos,  Glass  Baths,  Plain  Paper, 
Porcelain  Ware,  &c. 

And  every  description  of  goods  used  in  the  business,  at  wholesale  and  retail,  at  the  lowest  cash  prices. 

BENJAMIN  FRENCH  &  CO. 

*    * 


^aswo£B 


'8 


LIFE 


(IMPOSITION 


FOR    THE   STEREOSCOPE. 


CATALOGUE. 


1.  Blowing  Bubbles. 

2.  B  stands  for  Bumble-B. 

3.  Blackberry  Blossoms. 

4.  The  Hen's  Nest. 

5.  Let  us  Have  Piece. 

6.  Mamma,  where  was  I  when  you  were 

a  little  girl  ? 

7.  Our  Domestic's  Relations. 

8.  She  went  to  the  Butchers. 

9.  My  Lady  and  My  Lady's  Maid. 

10.  The  Mountain  Spring. 

11.  Unveiling  a  Statue  of  Young  America. 

12.  Young  America  in  the  Nursery. 

13.  Young  America  as  an  Artist. 

14.  Young  America  Asleep. 


15.  The  Sunbeam  Fairy. 

16.  The  Picture-Book. 

17.  Sitting  for  my  Picture. 

18.  Young  America  Bathing. 

19.  Young  Boston's  Ambition. 

20.  Ding-Dong-Ding,  Music  on  a  Bubber 

String. 

21.  Reflection. 

22.  The  Loiterers. 

23.  The  Cabin  Porch. 

24.  Beatrice  Shoo-Fly. 

25.  Home  Group. 

26.  A  View. 

27.  The  Gleaner. 


Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price.    $2.00  per  dozen.     Order  by  number. 
DEALERS  SUPPLIED  ON  GOOD  TERMS. 


These  inimitable  pictures  are  all  natural  compositions,  and  touch  the  tender  chords  of 
human  nature  most  wonderfully.  They  are  attractive  to  every  one  who  has  a  heart,  but 
particularly  instructive  as  studies  for  photographers,  in  grouping,  posing,  and  composition. 

They  will  help  any  man  make  better  and  easier  pictures  of  children,  and  should 

be  studied. 

BENERMAN   &  WILSON,   Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 


RIZE 


ICTUSES 


In  order  that  photographers  may  have  an  early  opportunity  of  studying  the  very  elegant 
pictures  from  negatives  which  have  been  sent  to  us  in  competition  for  our 

GOLD     MEDAL! 

we  publish  them  for  sale.  There  are  THIRTY  PICTURES  IN  A  SET — of  men,  women, 
and  children,  groups  and  single  figures — and  the  following  is  a  catalogue  of  them,  numbered 
in  the  order  in  which  the  negatives  were  received. 


1  A.  N.  Hardy,  Boston,  Mass. 

2  J.  McClure  &  Co.,  St.  John,  N.B. 

3  D.  Ginter,  Conneautvilfe,  Pa. 

4  W.  N.  Lockwood,  Eipon,  Wis. 

5  F.  B.  Clench,  Lockport,  N.  Y. 

6  Theo.  Nieberg,  St.  Marys,  O. 

7  C.  Chadbourne,  Toledo,  O. 

8  E.  H.  Alley,  Toledo,  0. 

9  B.  Gray,  Blooiaington,  111. 

10  C.  D.  Mosher,  Chicago,  111. 

11  E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk,  Conn. 


12  N.  H.  Busey,  Baltimore,  Md. 

13  M.  T.  Carter,  Worcester,  Mass. 

14  W.  W.  Whiddit,  Newburg,  N.  Y. 

15  Li.  G.  Bigelow,  Williamsport,  Pa. 

16  G.  M.  Elton,  Palmyra,  N.  Y. 

17  I.  Saunders,  Alfred  Centre,  N.  Y. 

18  Bradley  &  Bulofson,  San  Fran- 

cisco, Cal. 

19  Forrester  Clark,  Pittsfield, 

Mass. 

20  Otto  Lewin,  New  York  City. 


21  F.  L.  Stuber,  Bethlehem,  Pa. 

22  D.  T.  Burrill,  North   Bridge- 

water,  Mass. 

23  J.  Barhydt,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

24  Albright  Bros.,  Wooster,  O. 

25  F.  S.  Crowell,  Mt.  Vernon,  0. 

26  Trask  &  Bacon,  Philadelphia. 

27  G.  W.  Harris,  Lancaster,  N.  Y. 

28  B.  Williams,  Tunkhannock,  Pa. 

29  F.  Gutekunst,  Philadelphia. 

30  J.  Inglis,  Montreal,  Can. 


It  will  be  seen  that  a  number  of  our  best  photographers  have  competed. 

19"  THE  AWARD  WAS  MADE  FOR  NO.  18. 

Three  negatives  or  more  were  sent  by  each  competitor.     The  sets  include  one  example 
from  each  competitor.     All  the  duplicates  may  be  had  to  order. 
The  print9  are  supplied  at  the  following  rates  : 

A  Set  of  Thirty  in  the  Improved  Photograph  Cover  (advanced),  ...    S4  25 

"  without        "  "  "        3  75 

Selections,  per  dozen, 2  00 


EVERY  OPERATOR  &  EVERY  PRINTER  SHOULD  GET  AND  STUDY  THEM. 


Nothing  so  really  elegant  was  ever  offered  for  sale. 

BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  G..KV  7th  &  Cherry  Sts.,  Phila. 


NEW ! 

CATALOGUE  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PUBLICATIONS. 


Owing  to  the   LATE    FIRE   IN   OUR   OFFICE,  and  to  the 

fact  that  SEVERAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC   BOOKS  ARE 

OUT  OF  PRINT    we  are  obliged  to  issue  a  revised  or 

NEW  CATALOGUE ! 

TO    WHICH    WE    CALL    YOUR   ATTENTION. 

There  is  something  for  the  workers  in  all  branches  of  the  art, — 'Operators, 
posers,  manipulators,  printers,  painters,  retouchers,  finishers,  and  art  students 
— all  are  provided  for. 

We  always  find  the  photographer  who  reads  what  is  published  pertaining 
to  his  profession,  to  be  the  photographer  who  succeeds  in  his  business  the 
best.  Above  all,  those  who  regularly  and  continually  receive  a  good  photog- 
raphic magazine  are  those  who  are  always  ahead  with  new  goods,  new  styles, 
and  new  information.  We  recommend  an  investment  in  a  part  or  all  of  the 
list  below,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  them  to  you  on  receipt  of  price. 


CATALOGUE. 


The  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

The  oldest,  best,  and  most  popular  Photographic  Magazine  in  America.  Eleventh  Year.  Please  read  the 
prospectus  on  page  three  of  cover  and  premium  list  opposite.  Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2.50  for  six 
months,  in  advance.    Current  number,  50  cents.    Specimen  copies,  free. 


Photographic  Mosaics. 


The  1874  edition  excels  all  of  its  eight  older  brethren.  The  list  oi  articles  is  made  up  of  original  contribu- 
ti  ons,  written  especially  for  its  pages,  on  all  departments  of  the  art,  whoi  ly  by  practical  men  who  are  only  heard 
from  once  a  year  through  the  persuasion  of  the  editor,  in  this  way.  See  special  advertisement.  146  pages. 
Paper  cover,  50  cents.    Cloth,  $1.    A  few  copies  of  former  editions,  from  1866,  at  same  price. 

Big  clow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

This  is  not  exactly  a  book,  but  a  collection  of  24  large  Victoria  size  photographic  studies  in  lighting  and 
posing,  made  especially  to  teach  how  to  light  and  pose  ordinary  and  extra-ordinary  subjects  in  all  the  plain, 
fancy,  "  Rembrandt"  and  "Shadow"  styles.  It  is  accompanied  by  an  explanatory  key  of  instructions,  together 
with  a  diagram  for  each  picture,  showing  how  the  sitter  and  the  camera  were  placed  in  the  skylight,  their 
relation  to  the  background,  and  what  blinds  were  opened  and  closed  at  the  time  of  the  sitting.  It  almos 
supplies  a  rule  by  which  you  can  quickly  tell  how  to  manage  every  subject  that  comes  to  you.  The  studies  are 
mounted  on  folding  leaves,  so  that  twelve  can  be  examined  at  once.    Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  $6,  postpaid. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs  in  Water  Colors. 

A  practical  Handbook  designed  especially  for  the  use  of  Students  and  Photographers,  containing  directions 
for  Brush  Work  in  all  descriptions  of  Photo-Portraiture,  Oil,  Water  Colors,  Ink,  How  to  Retouch  the  nega- 
tive, &c.    By  George  B.  Ayres,  Artist.  Third  edition.    Differing  largely  from  previous  editions.    Price,  $2.00. 


Handbook  of  the  Practice  and  Art  of  Photography. 

By  Dr.  H.  Vogel.    Second  edition  in  press.    Ready  September  1st. 

The  Practical  Printer. 

Issued  July,  1874.  A  capital  working  manual,  giving  the  fullest  information  on  all  styles  of  photographic 
printing  on  albumen  and  plain  paper,  and  on  porcelain.  See  special  advertisement  concerning  it.  By  C.  W. 
Hearn.    No  book  was  ever  more  needed.    $2.50. 

Lea's  Manual  of  Photography. 

Third  thousand.    $3.75  per  copy.    A  capital  book  of  instructions  in  all  branches  of  the  art. 

How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph. 

This  is  a  fine  little  work  of  48  pages,  written  by  the  wife  of  a  celebrated  New  York  photographer,  for  the 
purpose  of  educating  the  public  on  the  all-important  subject  of  sitting  for  a  picture.  It  is  bound  in  cloth  at  60 
cents  per  copy,  and  paper  cover  30  cents. 

Lookout  Landscape  Photography . 

By  Prof.  R.  M.  Linn,  Lookout  Mountain,  Tenn.  A  pocket  manual  for  the  outdoor  worker,  and  full  of  good 
for  every  photographer.    75  cents.    Be  sure  to  get  it. 

Himes's  Leaf  Prints ;  or,  Glimpses  at  Photography. 

By  Prof.  Charles  F.  Himes,  Ph.D.  Full  of  useful  information  for  the  photographic  printer.  Illustrated 
with  a  whole-size  photograph.    Cloth,  $1.25. 

The  American  Carbon  Manual. 

By  Edw.  L.  Wilson.  A  complete  manual  of  the  Carbon  process  from  beginning  to  end.  With  a  fine 
example  by  the  process.    Cloth,  $2.00. 

The  Photographer  to  His  Patrons. 

A  splendid  little  twelve-page  leaflet,  which  answers  all  vexatious  questions  put  to  you  by  your  sitters,  and 
serves  as  a  grand  advertising  medium.  It  is  for  photographers  to  give  away  to  their  customers.  Send  for  a 
copy  amd  an  illustrated  circular.  Over  300,000  already  sold  and  in  use  all  over  the  country.  $20.00  for  1000, 
$35.00  for  2000,  and  so  on.    Printed  and  supplied  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

Something  JVeiv. 

Just  out.    Similar  to  the  "  Photographer  to  his  Patrons,"  but  newer.    Prices  the  same. 

Pretty  Faces. 

A  leaflet  much  smaller  than  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons,"  and  "Something  New,"  for  the  same  purpose 
but  costing  less,  viz. :  1000  copies,  $10.00 ;  2000,  $17.50,  and  larger  orders  at  less  rates. 

Elbert  Anderson's  Photo-  Comic  Allmyknack. 

A  complete  Almanac,  full  of  witty  sayings,  jokes,  puns,  stories,  etc.,  etc.  Profusely  illustrated  with  comic 
'  and  original  sketches,  yet  all  interspersed  with  much  practical  matter  of  value  to  every  photographer.  Price, 
75  cents. 

Photographers'  Pocket  Reference- Book. 

By  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  of  Berlin.  A  dictionary  of  all  the  terms  used  in  the  art,  and  contains  formulas  for  almost 
every  known  manipulation.  Altogether  different  from  any  work  ever  published.  Cloth,  $1.50.  See  special 
advertisement.    A  splendid,  indispensable  book. 

Works  found  in  our  old  catalogues,  and  not  in  the  above,  are  out  of  print 
and  cannot  be  had. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Benerman  &  Wilson's  Publications  sold  by  all  Dealers. 


s 


tf.\HHEIL'S  SOfo 


1HKW 


Aplanatic  Lenses 


FOR 

GROUPS, 
LANDSCAPES, 

AND 

COPIES. 


FOE 

GROUPS, 
LANDSCAPES, 

AND 

COPIES. 


{Actual  ti*e  of  a  No.  1  Steinheil  Irtns.) 
We  have  now  a  full  stock  of  these  celebrated  Lenses,  at  the  following  prices  : 


No.  1, 

2. 


1-2 

3,  4-4 

4,  8-10 

5,  10-12  ' 

6 113-16  < 


1-4  size 3£  inch  focus, 


51 

7 

101  ' 
131  ' 
161  ' 


$25  00 
30  00 
45  00 
60  00 
70  00 

110  00 


Nos.  1  aud  2  are  in  matched  pairs  for  Stereoscopic  Work. 


"I  always  take  great  pleasure  in  recommending  the  Steinheil  Lenses,  and  you  can  say  almost 
anything  in  their  favor  for  me.  They  possess  all  the  merits  of  higher  priced  lenses,  and  if  I  was 
starting  again  I  should  stock  myself  with  them."—  B.  W.  Kilburn. 


THEY  ARE 

IN  USE  BY  MOST  LEADING  PHOTOGRAPHERS, 

INCLUDING 

GUTEKUNST,  WENDEROTH, 

BROADBENT  &  PHILLIPS,  FENNEMORE, 

DeMORAT,  LOTHROP, 

And  many  others,  equally  well  known. 

We  feel  sure  that  at  least  one  of  these  Lenses  is  needful  for  the  successful  prosecution  of  your 
business,  and  so  solicit  your  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  States, 

No.  822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


HIcAIiIiISTVBR, 

MANUFACTURING  OPTICIAN, 

1314  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia. 

Sole  Manufacturer  of  the  Stereo-Panopticon  and  Artopticon,  warranted  to  be  the  most 
perfect  and  poiverfid  Magic  Lanterns  made. 

MCALLISTER'S 

PATEUT 

ARTOPTICON 


Each  lantern  is  adjustable  for  use 
with  powerful  coal  oil  light — oxycal- 
cium,  hydro-oxycalcium,  and  oxy- 
hydrogen  lights. 

JUgp'The  coal  oil  lamp  used  gives 
very  much  more  light  than  any  other 
lamp  yet  made. 

Giving  exhibitions  ivith  the  Artopti- 
con will  prove  a  profitable  business  for 
a  man  with  a  small  capital. 


The   STEREO-PAJVOPTICOIH    is  an  improved   instrument,   suitable  for  giving 
exhibitions  of  dissolving  views  on  the  largest  scale.     Send  for  printed  description. 


McALLTSTER'S 

PATENT    TINTERS. 

These  tinters  are  used  for  giving  to  magic  lantern  pictures 
various  beautiful  tints  or  colors,  as  blue,  red,  yellow,  green, 
crimson,  &c,  &c.  They  can  be  adjusted  to  the  lantern,  either 
on  the  end  of  the  front  lens,  or  may  be  screwed  to  the  back 
of  the  front  lens-holder,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Stereo-Panop- 
ticon and  Educational  lanterns.  On  the  Artopticon,  they 
are  placed  on  the  end  of  the  front  lens  tube. 

NEW  and  BEAUTIFUL  SLIDES  for  LANTERN  USE  in  LARGE  VARIETY. 

Priced  and  Illustrated  Catalogues  free,  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  stamp. 


W.  MITCHELL  MCALLISTER,  1314  Chestnut  St.,  Phila. 


DR.    VO  G  E  L'S 


OF 


PHOTOGRAPHY. 


By  Prof.  H.  VOGEL,  Ph.D.,  Berlin,  Prussia. 


THE  SECOND   EDITION 

Is  in  Press  and  will  be  ready  soon. 


It  will  be  much  larger  than  the  first  edition,  and  will  contain  several  new  photographs. 
New  chapters  have  been  added  by  the  author  and  much  of  the  old  edition  has  been  rewritten 
and  revised.     See  future  advertisements. 


FOR    SALE    BY    ALL    DEALERS. 


b@~  It  will  be  the  Best  Work  ever  Issued  on  Photography. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA. 


1874. 


Special  Premium  of  Six  Handsome  German 
Cabinet  Pictures  of  Ladies ! 

By  FKITZ  LITCKHAEDT,  Vienna,  Austria. 

These  pictures  are  alone  worth  $3  for  the  set,  and  more  is  asked  for 
such  by  dealers. 

Given  to  any  one  who  will  send  us  a  NEW  SiMher  for  the  year  1871 

We  make  this  offer  as  A  MATTER  OF  BUSINESS,  and 
not  as  a  favor  to  amy  one  on  either  side.  It  will  pay 
to  GIVE  A  YEAR'S  SUBSCRIPTION  TO  YOUR  OPERATOR 
or  to  your  friend  or  customer >,  in  order  to  SECURE 
THESE  PICTURES. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philada. 


-SJSJ.    KURTZ, 

Madison    Square  (23d    Street), 

BECEIVKD  HIGHEST  AWAED9  IN 

Vienna,  Paris,  and  New  York, 

FOR    PHOTOGRAPHS. 


New  York,  July  1,  1874. 

MR.   CHAS.   F.  USENER. 

Dear  Sir.-  The  Mammoth  Tube  (No.  9002)  which  you  sent  me  on  trial  has  been 
thoroughly  tested,  and  has  proved  itself  quite  beyond  my  expectations;  for  fine 
definition  and  roundness,  or  stereoscopic  effect,  1  have  never  seen  its  equal.  You 
may  readily  see  by  the  specimens  herewith,  of  standing  figures,  that  they  are  as 
sharp  and  as  perfect  as  an  imperial  carte,  although  taken  on  14  x  17  plates;  and 
when  I  add  that  they  were  taken  at  4  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  in  45  seconds,  I 
think  I  can  say  no  more. 

Please  charge  the  tube  to  me,  arid  send  bill.  Yours  truly, 

W.  KURTZ. 


CHARLES  COOPER  &  CO., 

WHOLESALE  AGENTS, 

Nor   ISO    Chatham   Street,  New  York. 


r\  ~\  i  The  most 

U|7  Elaborate, 
l-J'-  Complete 


And  Perfect  g^\ 

^■Chair. 


Enabling  the  photographer  to  successfully  secure  every  variety  of  pose  with  facility  and  reliability. 
It  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  varying  necessities  of  female  portraiture,  and  is  equally  suited  for 
children,  for  vignettes,  or  for  full  lengths.  The  BOWDISH  CHAIR  is  substantial  in  construction, 
elegant  in  design,  and  rich  in  upholstery  and  finish.  Those  .who  have  purchased  them,  speak  in  the 
highest  terms,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 


+- 


-+ 


TESTIMONIALS:  ®* 


®sr 


''About  ten  days  ago  I  received  the  new  chair  you  promised  to  send  me  when  I  saw  you  last,  and 
would  have  written  and  acknowledged  your  bind  favor  long  ago  if  1  had  correctly  known  your  ad- 
dress. Accept  my  best  thanks  for  this  really  beautiful  chair,  which  now,  after  ten  days'  trial,  has 
proved  to  be  a  decided  success  in  every  way.  It  has  become  the  real  favorite  for  posing  in  my  studio. 
Besides  this,  in  external  appearance  the  new  chair  appears  so  much  superior  in  finish,  and  is  at  the 
same  time  highly  ornamental,  and  the  head  rest  is  so  much  easier  handled  than  with  any  chair  I  have 
ever  seen  before.  In  short,  it  gives  the  sitter  the  greatest  possible  comfort  and  steadiness.  I  think 
the  chair  I  have  justly  deserves  the  name  of  'Perfect  Posing  Chair.' " — H.  Rocher,  Chicago,  111., 
January  10,  1873. 

"  Since  receiving  your  posing  chair,  nearly  a  year  since,  I  have  had  it  in  constant  use,  and  am 
satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  posing  chair  in  the  market.  It  is  easily  worked,  and  is  so  well  made  that 
one  will  last  a  life  time,  and  then  be  a  valuable  heirloom." — L.  Gr.  Bigelow. 

"The  Bowdish  Chair  came  in  good  order  and  gives  the  best  of  satisfaction.  Should  you  wish  a 
recommendation  for  it,  say  what  you  please  and  we  will  endorse  it.  You  cannot  praise  it  too  highly." 
— Slee  Bros.,  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  Sept.  10,  1872. 

"  Your  chair  has  arrived  at  last.  I  am  much  pleased  with  it.  1  don't  think  my  gallery  can  be 
complete  without  one  of  them.  Wishing  you  the  success  your  invention  merits,  I  am,  truly  yours, 
A.  Hesler." 

Prints  will  be  sent,  if  desired,  before  purchasing.     There  are  three  styles  kept  in  stock,  viz  : 

No.  2.   With  nickel-plated  rods  and  rest,  in  velveteen  or  reps  $60  00 

No.  4.        "  "  "  "  "  "    square  carved  legs 70  00 

No.  6.        "  "  "  "     in  best  plush,  paneled 80  00 

Special  chairs  to  order. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO.,  Sole  Agents, 

591  Broadway ,  New  York. 


Gihon's  Cut-Outs 

Are  the  very  best  that  are  made,  and  are  now  without  a  rival  in  the  market.  They  are  clean 
cut,  most  desirable  shapes  and  sizes,  and  made  of  non-actinic  paper,  manufactured  specially 
for  the  purpose.  Each  package  contains  30  Cut-Outs,  or  Masks,  with  corresponding  Insides, 
assorted  for  five  differently  sized  ovals  and  one  arch-top. 

PRICE,  $1.00  PER  PACKAGE.     Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

Parties  wishing  special  sizes,  or  large  lots  of  a  few  sizes,  may  have  them  cut  to  order 
promptly,  by  addressing  the  manufacturer.     No  lot  costing  less  than  $1.00  made  at  a  time. 


No  printer  should  attempt  to  make  medallion  pictures  without  them. 

THEY  HAVE  NO  EQUAL  FOR  QUALITY. 

Beware  of  spurious  imitations  made  of  common  paper,  full  of  holes,  badly  cut,  and  odd 
shapes  and  sizes.  Ask  your  stockdealer  for  GIHON'S  CUT-OUTS,  and  see  that  they  are 
in  his'  envelopes  with  instruction  circular  included. 


Gihon's  Opaque 

IS    DESIGNED    EOR 

COMPLETELY  OBSCURING  THE  IMPERFECT  BACKGROUNDS  OF  COPIES, 
RETOUCHING  NEGATIVES, 

FAULTY  SKIES.  IN  LANDSCAPES, 

COATING  THE  INSIDE  OF  LENSES  OR  CAMERA  BOXES, 
BACKING  SOLAR  NEGATIVES, 

COVERING  VIGNETTING  BOARDS, 

AND    EOR  ANSWERING 

ALL  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  INTELLIGENT  PHOTOGRAPHER  IN  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  ARTISTIC  RESULTS  IN  PRINTING. 


WHEREVER  YOU  WANT  TO  KEEP  OUT  LIGHT,  USE  OPAQUE. 

It  is  applied  with  a  brush,  dries  quickly  and  sticks. 


CUT-OUTS  (thirty),  $1.00.  OPAQUE,  50  CENTS. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Address  all  orders  to 

JOHN  L.  CIHON,  Inventor, 

128  _2V.  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


ROBINSON'S 

METALLIC 


fc=j 


Oval,  Round,  Elliptic  and  Square,  of  all  sizes  ;  various  shapes  for  Stereoscopic 
-work,  Drug:  Labels,  t&c,  »Vc.  Regular  sizes  always  on  hand.  Special  Sizes  made 
to  order.  Price  for  regular  photo  sizes,  10  cents  per  inch  the  longest  way  of  the 
aperture.    Special  sizes,  15  cents  per  inch.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALE  DEALERS. 


BENERIAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Apts 


PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


HUNDREDS  EXPORTED  TO  ENGLAND  AND  GERMANY 


R  O  B  I  N  S  O  N'S 

PHOTOGRAPH    TRIMMER 

IS  A  NECESSITY  AND  CONSIDERED  INVALUABLE. 
For  examples  of  its  work  we  refer  to  the  recent  and  present  pictures  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

IT  SAVES-  TIME,  SAVES  PRINTS,  AND  SAVES  MONEY. 

The  accompanying  cut  represents  the  instru- 
ment in  the  act  of  trimming  a  photograph.  It 
does  not  cut,  but  pinches  off  Vav  waste  paper,  and 
leaves  the  print  with  a  neatly  beveled  edge  which 
facilitates  the  adherence  of  the  print  to  the 
mount.  Try  one,  and  you  will  discard  the 
knife  and  punch  at  once. 


Oil  the  wheel  hearings  with  Sewing  Machine  Oil. 

A  Trimmer  Mailed  for  $3.50. 

The  difficult}'  of  procuring  exactly  true  guides 
for  cutting  out  prints  has  induced  the  inventor 
to  put  up  machinery  for  the  production  of  all 
styles  of  them,  guaranteed  mathematically  true, 
»nd  to  be  known  as 

ROBINSON'S  IMPROVED  GUIDES. 

See  advertisement  on  opposite  page. 

A  full  stock  of  regular  sizes  now  on  hand. 
A  complete,  illustrated,  catalogue  and  price-list  will 
be  issued  soon. 


READ   THE  TESTIMONIALS. 


"  For  cutting  ovals  I  think  the  Robinson  Trimmer 
is  perfect,  and  if  nobody  brings  them  out  in  England 
I  shall,  as  I  think  it  a  pity  such  a  good  thing  should 
not  be  introduced." — Walter  B.  Woodbury. 

"I  would  rather  give  fifty  dollars  than  be  without 
one.  By  its  use  all  annoyance  from  dull  knives  tear- 
ing the  prints  is  avoided,  and  it  is  a  pleasure  to  use 
it." — E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk. 

"  Robinson's  Photographic  Trimmer  is  an  excellent 
little  instrument.  It  does  the  work  intended  magnifi- 
cently. It  is  npt  only  exquisite  for  trimming  photo- 
graphs, but  also  for  making  Cut-Outs  and  cutting  the 
sensitized  paper  to  any  needed  size,  using  for  the 
latter  purpose  a  guide  of  steel  in  form  of  a  ruler,  thus 
entirely  dispensing  with  the  knife." — Bern'd  Kihl- 
holz,  Chicago,  I'll. 

"  I  like  the  Trimmer  very  much.  I  think  it  a  very 
useful  article.  It  works  well  and  does  all  it  is  recom- 
mended to  do." — F.  G.  Weller,  Littleton,  N.  H. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmers  have  come  to  hand,  and 
I  like  them  very  much ;  they  are  just  what  I  wanted 
and  found  it  difficult  to  get." — J.  W.  Black,  Boston. 

"  I  am  using  the  Robinson  Trimmer  and  consider 
it  the  best  article  for  trimming  photographs  I  ever 
saw." — W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"  It  does  its  work  magnificently.  The  only  wonder 
is,  that  it  was  not  invented  years  ago.  It  is  indis- 
pensable."— Garrett  Bros.,  Philadelphia. 

"  I  think  the  Robinson  Photographic  Trimmer  is 
the  best  thing  ever  put  upon  the  market  for  photo- 
graphic use.  It  is  cheap  and  does  its  work  perfect.  I 
now  make  with  it  all  the  cut-outs  I  use,  and  also  cut 
out  all  my  photographs  from  eleven  by  fourteen 
down  to  cards.  It  only  cost  me  four  dollars  and  I 
would  not  be  without  it  for  the  best  twenty-five  dol- 
j  ar  cutting  machine  I  ever  saw." — D.  Lothrop,  Phila. 


"The  Trimmer  comes  up  to  all  you  claim  for  it.  I 
would  not  be  without  it." — T.  Cummings,  Lancaster. 

"Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  is  all  that  it  is 
claimed  to  be.  I  have  trimmed  all  my  prints  with  it 
from  the  day  I  received  it,  in  less  than  half  the  time 
taken  by  a  knife.  It  does  its  work  with  mathematical 
correctness  and  uniformity.  I  would  not  be  without 
it  for  ten  times  its  cost.  Itcannot  be  recommended 
too  highly." — W.  H.  Cranston,  Corry,  Pa. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmer  has  proved  to  us  one  of 
the  most  usefully  instruments  that  we  have  in  our 
gallery.  In  the  few  months  that  we  have  owned  it  we 
cut  some  10,000  photographs  with  it,  which  were  cut 
in  one-fourth  the  time,  and  cut  better  than  any  other 
instrument  could  do  it." — Schreiber  &  Sons,  Phila. 

"  It  does  the  work  quick,  sure,  and  perfect.  We 
would  not  be  without  it.  It  is  simply  what  it  is  rep- 
resented to  be."— B.  Frank  Saylor  &  Co.,  Lancaster. 
"The  Photograph  Trimmer  is  a  good  and  quick  work- 
ing thing.  I  do  not  want  any  thing  better  and  more 
useful  in  the  gallery  for  that  purpose.  I  would  not 
be  without  one." — A.  M.  Bachman,  Allentown,  Pa. 

"I  have  used  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  some 
time.  A  lady  was  asked  how  she  liked  her  sewing 
machine,  and  in  reply  said  '  Well  I  could  get  along 
without  it,  but  when  I  do  I  shall  not  sew  any  more.' 
That  is  me,  I  can  get  along  without  the  Trimmer  but 
when  I  do  I  shall  not  trim  photographs." — Well  G. 
Singhi,  Binghamton,  N.  Y. 

"  It  gives  perfect  satisfaction,  being  the  best  thing 
of  the  kind  I  have  ever  used.  There  is  nothing 
amongst  my  photographic  stock  more  useful." — M.  P. 
Rice,  Washington,  D.  C. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmer  works  admirably.  Does 
the  work  intended  with  great  satisfaction." — A.  K.  P. 
Trask",  Philadelphia. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 
FOB  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALEBS.  PHILADELPHIA,  PA 


We  are  informed  that  some  of  our  competitors  are  advancing  the  prices  of 

PI 


And  we  have  been  requested  to  do  the  same,  but  have  declined  to  enter  into  any  combination  what- 
ever. Photographers  can  rest  assured  that  we  shall  adhere  strictly  to  our  LOW  PRICES,  as  published 
in  our  Catalogue  of  August,  1873,  until  further  notice.  The  prices  therein  quoted  are  the  lowest  yet 
made,  and  all  who  have  not  received  that  list  will  please  send  us  their  address,  when  it  will  be  promptly 
forwarded.     Note  our  very  low  prices  on 

FERROTYPE  PLATES,  CAMERA  BOXES,  &c. 

Everything  sold  at  bottom  figures,  and  all  orders  executed  to  the  letter,  and  with  the  greatest  of 
promptness.      Agents  for  the  Northwest  for 

WESTON'S  ROTARY  BURNISHERS, 

WOODWARDS  SOLAR  CAMERAS, 

And  SCOTCH  ALBUMEN  PAPER. 

We  hope  all  those  who  have  not  tried  the  Scotch  Albumen  Paper,  will  give  it  a  trial,  as  it  is  giving 
universal  satisfaction,  and  is  having  an  immense  sale.      We  have  it  in  White  and  Pink. 

Prices  furnished  on  application  for  Woodward's  Solar  Cameras,  either  the  Reflectors  or  Direct  Prin- 
ters, with  license  attached.  Any  one  desiring  a  license  for  the  use  of  Solar  Cameras,  can  get  the  same 
of  us  at  the  price  charged  by  Mr.  Woodward,  $40.00. 

Don't  forget  to  order  a  Weston  Burnisher  ;  we  are  selling  large  numbers  of  them,  and  the  fine  effect 
produced  from  their  use  is  commending  itself  to  all. 

Remember,  we  carry  the  LARGEST  STOCK  IN  THE  WEST,  and  owning  the  land  and  the  building 
we  occupy,  we  are  fully  prepared  to  give  you  rock  bottom  prices  on  everything. 

RICE  &  THOMPSON'S 


t 
259  Wabash  Ave.,  CHICAGO. 


Awarded  the  HOLMES  MEDAL  at  the  Chicago  N.  P.  A.  Exhibition,  1874. 

MOULTON'S 

RAPID  PHOTO-WASHER. 


Patented  August  12th,  1873. 

New  in  Principle.— Quick  and  Reliable  in  Practice. 


Instead  of  soaking  the  Prints  it  applies  the  water  in  the  form  of  spray,  with  considerable 
force,  to  both  sides  of  the  paper  at  each  revolution,  or  from  one  hundred  to  one-hundred- 
fifty  times  per  minute.  Washes  with  exact  uniformity,  and  gives  more  brilliant  and  per- 
manent work ;  is  simple,  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order,  will  last  a  lifetime,  and  will  enable  you 
to  get  out  work  at  short  notice,  thereby  securing  many  orders  that  would  otherwise  be  lost. 


Size 

Cylinder, 

Capacity  in  Cards. 

Largest  Print. 

Price. 

Diam. 

16in. 

Lengtr. 

l  14  l-2in. 

84 

14  by  17  ins. 

$30 

a 

20 

a 

19 

144    ■ 

18  by  22  " 

40 

a 

25 

a 

24 

220 

22  by  28  " 

50 

Larger  sizes  may 

follow. 

SCOVILL  MFG.  00.,  Trade  Agei 

"  I  write  to  testify  to  the  satisfaction  I  feel  with  the  working  of  your  Rapid  Print  Washer.  It  is  simply  per- 
fection, as  far  as  my  experience  with  it  goes,  viz  :  One  year's  constant  use.  I  have  washed  eight  dozen  cartes  in 
ten  minutes,  and  the  most  accurate  test  I  know  of,  starch  and  iodine,  failed  to  show  a  trace  of  hvpo.  remain- 
ing.'—L.  G.  Bigelow,  Detroit,  Mich.,  Feb.  10th,  1874. 

"  Time  saved  is  money  earned."  The  above  maxim  is  as  true  in  the  photographic  business  as  in  any  otter, 
and  in  this  connection  I  would  say,  that  Moulton's  Rapid  Photo- Washer  will  save  more  time  in  any  well-regu- 
lated gallery,  than  any  mechanism  ever  yet  invented  ;  besides  the  prints  finish  with  a  finer  lustre  than  those 
washed  by  any  other  device  I  have  ever  yet  seen.  Having  used  one  for  the  past  two  months,  washing  from  100 
to  300  prints  dailv,  I  am  pleased  to  add  my  testimonial  to  its  excllence."— Wm.  M.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 
March  11th,  1874. 

ANALYSIS    OF    PRINTS. 

"After  analyzing  the  prints  which  were  washed  by  you  during  ten  minutes,  in  your  Rapid  Photo-Washer, 
and  those  furnished  by  an  artist  of  this  city,  washed  in  a  syphon  tank  in  running  water  for  one  hour  and  left  in 
the  water  over  night,  for  the  quantity  of  hyposulphites  left  therein,  I  take  pleasure  in  stating  that  the  prints 
treated  in  the  Rapid  Photo-Washer  contain  perceptibly  less  hyposulphites  than  those  washed  in  the  other  man- 
ner described." — Gustavus  Bode,  Analytical  Chemist,  and  Dealer  in  Photographic  Stock,  Milwaukee,  Feb.  21, 1874 


L.  V.  MOULTON,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis. 


JOHN  DEAN  &  CO., 
MANUFACTURERS, 

Worcester,  Mass., 

OFFER  AT   WHOLESALE,   AT   LOWEST   PRICES,   THE 

damantemt 


LATES, 


BLACK  and  Patent  CHOCOLATE  TINTED, 
EGG-SHELL  and  GLOSSY. 

The  experience  and  extensive  facilities  of  John  Dean  &  Co.  enable  them 
to  produce  the  most  desirable  Ferrotype  Plates  in  the  market. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO., 

TRADE   AGENTS, 

591  BROADWAY,  NEW  YORK. 


DAMAGED 


m 


Pi 


m 


The  recent  tire  in  our  establishment  caused  a  part  of  our  large  stock  of  Lantern  Slides 
to  be  damaged  by  water.  For  all  practical  uses  they  are  not  damaged  at  all.  Any  photog- 
rapher, by  repairing  the  sticking  paper  around  them,  may  make  them  as  good  as  new.  We 
cannot  repair  them  to  look  like  fresh  stock,  so  we  offer  them  at  the  following  reduced  rates : 

Levy's  Foreign  Views  (Holy  Land,  Paris,  and  Europe),  50  cts. 

Eetailed  at  $1.25. 
Colored  Scripture  and  Comic  Slides, .    60  and  75    " 

Eetailed  at  $1.25  and  $2.00. 
American  Views  and  Statuary, 40    " 

Eetailed  at  75  cts.  and  $1.00. 

Care  given  to  selecting  for  parties  who  cannot  be  present  to  select  for  themselves, 


BEKTEEMAH  &  WILSON, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


JOHN   R.  CLEMONS, 

IMPORTER  OE 
AND  MANUFACTURER   OF 

ALBUMEN  AND  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPERS. 

PINK  AND  BLUE  ALBUMEN  PAPER  CONSTANTLY  ON  HAND  OR  MADE  TO  ORDER, 

CLEMONS'  NEW  ALBUMEN   PAPER, 

A  superior  article  introduced  into  the  market  about  a  year  ago.  It  is  equal,  if  not  superior  to  any  Paper 
imported;  the  great  demand  proves  such  to  be  the  case.  It  is  praised  by  all  who  use  it  as  to  its  keeping 
white  during  warm  weather ;  also,  for  its  brilliancy  and  toning  qualities,  and  it  is  made  White,  Pink,  and 
Blue.    Sizes  medium,  26  x  40  and  35  x  46. 

CLEMONS'  ARROWROOT  SALTED   PAPER 

Has  stood  the  test  above  all  other  makes  for  the  last  nine  years.  An  article  extensively  used  for  all  Plain 
Solar,  and  Colored  Work.    Sizes,  Yl%  x  23,  26  x  40,  and  35  x  46. 

Prices  lower  than  (hose  of  any  foreign  make. 

CLEMONS'  N.  P.  A.  VARNISH, 

For  Plain  Work  and  Retouching  upon. 

CLEMONS'  COLDEN  VARNISH, 

For  Intensifying  and  Retouching  upon. 

JOHN  R.  CLEMONS,  Manufacturer, 

915  SANSOM  ST.,  PHILADMLPHIA, 

*   # 


"Make  my  order  thirty  instead  of  twenty.  Lot  last  sent  are  all  gone." — Dr.  E.  Liesegang, 
D-usseldorf,  Germany . 

"Hurry  on  the  Bigelow  Albums  ordered.  We  are  out  and  orders  waiting." — Piper  &  Carter, 
London,  England. 


IGELOW'S  ALBU 


OF 


LIGHTING  AND  POSING. 
SELLS  ALL  OVER  THE  WORLD. 

A  NEW  EDITION  HAS  BEEN  ISSUED  WITH  AN  ENLARGED  KEY, 

AND  WEAKLY  ALL  NEW  STUDIES. 

This   album  brings  lighting  and  posing  down  to  a 
system  at  once  plain,  easy  and  desirable. 

No  good,  intelligent  operator  can  afford 
to  work  without  it. 

It  Contains 

24  Victoria  Portrait  Studies 

in  Light  and  Pose, 

WITH  AN  EXPLANATORY  KEY, 

Telling  exactly  HOW  EACH   PICTURE    WAS 
MADE;   WHERE  THE  CAMERA  AND 
THE    SITTER     WERE    PLACED 
wh  en  it  was  made ;  WHA  T  CUR- 
TAINS WERE  OPENED 
in  lighting  t/te  subject, 

A  diagram  of  the  interior  of  the  skylight  is  given  in  each  case,  telling  the  whole  story.    IT  IS  BOUND 
HANDSOMELY  IN  CLOTH,  GILT. 


NEW  KEY,  ENLARGED. 


NEW  PICTURES. 


1  It  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  aids  to  art  education  which  has  yet  been  presented  to  the  photo, 
portraitist.  Each  print  represents  a  distinct  study  of  pose  and  lighting,  the  widest  variety  of  effects 
being  comprehended.  We  should  be  glad  to  see  it  in  the  hands  of  English  portraitists  generally." — 
Photo.  News. 

"  The  method  is  an  admirable  one  and  Mr.  Bigelow  deserves  credit  for  the  systematic  way  in  which 
he  has  carried  it  out." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  confess  that  this  work  has  furnished  me  much  instruction,  particularly  the  manner  in  which, 
byword  and  picture,  studies  about  light  and  pose  are  explained  and  made  comprehensible." — Dr. 
Vogel. 

"  We  do  not  know  of  anything  ourselves  that  has  been  presented  to  the  trade  which  is  calculated 
to  do  so  much  real  good  as  Bigelow's  Album,  with  the  explanatory  key  to  the  studies.  It  is  an  in- 
valuable guide  to  the  portraitist." — Philadelphia  Photographer. 

It  is  considered  invaluable  by  the  practical  photographers  ivho  use  it. 


PRICE,  $6.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCKDEALERS. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


HOW  TO   PAINT  PHOTOGRAPHS. 


The  THIRD  EDITION  is  so  different  from  former  ones,  that  it  may  almost  be  said  that  it  is  A  new 

WORK. 

It  Gives  the  Best  and  Freshest  Instructions  to  be  had  on  the  Subject. 

Written  by  a  practical  photographic  colorist,  Mr.  Geo.  B.  Ayres. 

PRICE,  $2.00.     FOB  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALEBS. 

Photographers  and  artists  whose  interest  it  is  to  produce  work  in  Water  Colors,  Oil,  India  Ink,  or 
who  wish  complete  instructions  in  retouching  negatives,  should  consult  Mr.  Ayres'  capital  work. 

BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 
Gk    SATJTER. 

No.    13  8  South  Eight  It  Street,   Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURER   AND    WHOLESALE   DEALER   IN 


The  attention  of  the  trade  is  particularly  called  to  the  superior  quality  of  our  Glass  and  materials 
and  neatness  of  finish.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand. 

BULLOCK    &    CRENSHAW, 

No.  528  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURERS  AND  IMPORTERS   OF   PURE   CHEMICALS   FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 
IMPORTERS  OF  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN,  APPARATUS,  ETC. 

TRAPP  &  MUNOH'S 


Slkfttnen 


Introduced  into  this  country  since  1868  has  become  the  leading  paper,  and  is 
now  better  known  and  more  appreciated  than  any  other  brand. 

That  this  great  success  is  Well  deserved  and  due  to  its  excellent  qualities 
may  be  judged  from  the  fact,  that  of  all  the  competitors  of  the  Vienna  Ex- 
hibition, Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  alone  received  the 

iMIIEiD^Ij    O^    MERIT 

for  Albumenized  Paper. 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALL  THE  STOCKHOUSES. 

WILLY  WALLACH, 

GENERAL  AGENT  FOR  THE  UNITED  STATES, 

No.  4  Beekman  St.,  and  36  Park  Row,  New  York. 


SCOVILL  MANUF'G  CO. 


DEALERS 


IN  EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY, 


AND  PROPRIETORS  OF  THE  WORKS  OP  THE 

American  Optical 
Company 

Beg  the  trade  to  remember  that  they  have  removed  from 

No.  4  Beekman  St. 


TO 


J I  (Q  BROOME  J  <^  | 
itiW  STREET,  TfO 


The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 

WHAT  IS  IT? 


TIHE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS  is  a  little  book  or  pamphlet  of  twelve  pages,  the 
1  intention  of  which  is  :  1st.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  say  a  few  words  in  a  kindly  way 
to  those  who  have  photographs  taken,  in  order  that  the  intercourse  between  them  and  their 
photographer  may  be  pleasant  and  result  in  the  most  successful  pictures.  Every  photographer 
knows  that  he  is  constantly  beset  with  a  lot  of  questions,  as  to  the  proper  way  to  dress,  the  best 
time  to  come,  and  so  on,  which  take  a  great  deal  of  his  time  to  answer.  This  little  book  answers 
them  all,  and  the  mere  handing  of  a  copy  to  the  questioner,  which  he  or  she  can  carry  away  and  study 
at  leisure,  serves  as  admirably  as  a  half-hour's  conversation. 

2d.  It  is  a  cheap  mode  of  advertising  What  could  you  want  better  than  to  have  your  business  card 
so  attractive  that  people  will  come  and  ask  for  it,  hand  it  around  from  one  to  another,  discuss  it,  and 
then  keep  it  for  reference  ?  This  is  what  they  do  with  this  little  "  tract.'1  Witness  what  those  who 
have  tried  it  say  below. 

3d.  It  is  also  intended  to  convey  to  the  public  at  large  the  fact  that  photography  is  not  a  branch  of 
mechanics,  nor  photographers  a  sort  of  mechanic  themselves,  but  that  both  are  entitled  to  respect,  the 
same  as  the  family  physician  or  the  minister  ;  that  the  photographer  has  rights  as  well  as  the  public  ; 
that  he  must  be  trusted,  and  that  he  alone-  is  responsible  for  his  results.  Moreover,  that  he  must  make 
the  picture  and  not  they. 

How  far  the  work  serves  these  three  ends  the  reader  must  judge  from  the  testimonials  below,  of  a 
few  of  those  who  have  been  using  our  little  publication  in  their  business. 

We  believe  it  will  pay  you  to  use  it,  and  that  you  will  assist  just  that  much  in  elevating  your  art  and 
your  craft,  an  object  which  we  are  all  working  for. 

We  get  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons  "  up  in  neat  style,  on  the  best  letter  cap  paper,  assorted 
tints,  green,  pink,  and  buff.  Eight  pages  are  devoted  to  the  body  of  the  work,  which  contains  para- 
graphs or  chapters — 1,  on  the  object  of  the  work;  2,  on  photography  ;  3,  when  to  come  ;  4,  how  to 
come;  5,  how  to  dress;  6,  how  to  "behave;  7,  the  children  ;  8,  general  remarks  on  coloring,  copy- 
ing, frames,  prices,  &o. 

All  this  is  inclosed  in  a  cover  of  the  same  kind  of  paper,  the  pages  of  which  are  at  the  service  of 
the  photographer  who  orders  them  to  have  printed  thereon  anything  he  may  please,  which  printing 
we  do  without  extra  charge.     We  publish  this  leaflet  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 


Cuts  for  the  covers  we  supply  free. 


1000  copies,  cover  included, 
2000 


.  $20  00 
.  35  00 


3000  copies,  cover  included, 
5000 


$50  00 
75  00 


Over  500,000  have  been  sold. 
We  invite  you  to  examine  the  good  words  which  our  patrons  have  sent  us  concerning  this  publication. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"  I  sent  one  out  West  to  a  friend,  and  she 
wrote  that  she  was  now  posted,  and  when  she 
came  here  to  have  a  picture  "\ade,  she  would 
come  'according  to  directions.''' — A.  Bogar- 
dus,  New  York. 

"  A  grand  idea." — Elbert  Anderson. 

"  It  is  eagerly  sought  for  and  read  by  every- 
body who  visits  our  Gallery.'' — J.  Gurney  & 
Son,  New  York. 

"  It  assists  me  greatly." — James  Mullen, 
Lexington,  Ky. 

"  The  many  valuable  hints  in  it  cannot  fail  to 
be  beneficial  to  both  photographer  and  patron." 
— Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  W.  Virginia. 


"  You  have  conferred  a  great  favor  on  the  fra- 
ternity in  supplying  it,  and  we  hope  it  will  bene- 
fit some  of  the  'know '-everything ■«  '  in  this  quar- 
ter."— A.  C.  McIntyre  &  Co.,  Ogdensburg. 

' '  They  are  just  the  thing  to  post  people  up  on 
what  they  ought  to  know  in  order  to  secure  good 
pictures." — J.  P.  Whipple,  White  Water. 

"  I  really  think  your  little  book  '  hits  the  nail 
on  the  head.'  " — J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

"It  is  the  best  advertising  medium  I  have 
ever  found." — H.  M.  Sedgewick,  Granville,  O. 

"  I  think  they  are  a  perfect  success,  and  will 
do  us  photographers  a  great  deal  of  good." — G 
W.  Mathis. 


We  will  send  samples  of  the  book,  and  special  rates,  to  any 
who  may  desire  it. 

BEMRMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.t  Philadelphia. 


'£ 


m. PHOT  GRAPHIC  « 


IN  EVERY  VARIETY. 


Nos.  419  &  421  BROOME  ST.,  NEW  YORK, 
No.  73  BOLD  STREET,  LIVERPOOL,  ENGLAND. 


DEALERS  SUPPLIED  WITH  THE  BEST  GOODS  ON  THE  BEST  TERMS, 


Our  own  extensive  facilities  for  manufacturing  enable  us  to  produce  first  quality  of  goods, 
and  our  extensive  connections  at  home  and  abroad  give  us  facilities  which  no  one  else  has. 


MANUFACTORIES :  ( Watg^  SsS^ggg 0t 


SEE  OTHEE  ADVEETISEMENTS  IN  PHOTOGEAPHIC  BOOKS  and  MAGAZINES 


Examine  Scoyill's  Photographic  Clocks,  aM  Read  the  Photographic  Times. 


THE  ZENTMAYER  LENS 

For  Views  and  Copying. 


These  Lenses  possess  pre-eminently,  the  following  qualities  : 

Width  of  visual  angle,  ranging  from  80°  to  90°;    depth  of  focus;    extreme  sharpness  over  the 
whole  field  ;  true  perspective  ;  freedom  from  all  distortion  in  copying  :  portability  and  cheapness. 

Each  mounting  is  provided  with  a  revolving  Diaphragm,  containing  the  stops  of  the  different  com- 

The  larger  ones  are  provided  with  an  internal  shutter  for 


binations  for  which 

they  are  designed 

making  and  closing 

the  exposure. 

No.  1,     2J  inch  focus,    3x3    plate, 

"    2,     3£     " 

4x5 

"    3,     5i     " 

6^x    8i     " 

"    4,     8       " 

10    x    12     " 

"    5,  12       " 

14    x    17     " 

"    6,   18       " 

20    x    24     " 

$20  00 
25  00 
30  00 
42  00 
60  00 
90  00 


No.  1  and  No.  2  combined, 


2 

3  ' 

4  ' 

5  ' 
1,  2 
3,  4 


3 

"  4 

"  5 

"  6 

and  3, 

and  5, 


$33  00 
40  00 
55  00 
75  00 

110  00 
48  00 
88  00 


No.  3,  with  large  mounting  to  combine  with  No.  4  and  No.  5,  $35. 

No.  1  and  No.  2,  specially  adapted  for  Stereoscopic  Views,  are  furnished  in  matched  pairs.  No.  1 
and  No.  2,  single,  not  to  combine  with  other  sizes,  $36  a  pair. 

Lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six  combinations,  from  2^  to  18  inches,  $173. 

Zentmayer's  Stereoscopic  outfits,  including  a  pair  of  No.  2  Lenses  4x7  box,  7  x  10  India  Rubber 
Bath  and  Dipper,  Tripod,  Printing  Frames,  and  outside  box,  $60. 

JOSEPH  ZENTMAYER,  Manufacturer, 

14:7  South  Fourth  Street,  Philadelphia. 

STEREOSCOPIC   riEWS. 


Dealers  selecting  their  autumn  stock  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  would  do  well  to  examine  our 

unrivalled  variety  of  Views  of 

TEE  WE1TE  MOUNTAINS, 

NIAGARA,   WASEINGTON, 

FAIRMOUNT  PARK,  PE1LADELPEIA, 

FLOWERS,  GROUPS,  &c. 

83-  QUALITY  UNSURPASSED  ! 


KILBURN  BROS.,  Littleton,  New  Hampshire. 

NIAGARA 

STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS. 


Winter  and  Summer  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  of  all  sizes.     Trade  supplied  on  good  terms.     Variety 
unequalled. 

G.  E.  CURTIS,  Photographer, 

Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y. 

Mr.  Curtis'  views  answer  Mr.  Robinson's  query  :   "Are  there  any  clouds  in  America?  " 


GERMAN  ALBUMEN  COLORS ! 

JULIUS    KRUGER'S 
fATEWT    C*M*VT    COLORS, 

FOR  COLORING  PHOTOGRAPHS  ON  ALBUMEN  and  PLAIN  PAPER. 

These  colors  have  become  very  popular  in  Germany  and  France  (where  they  have  obtained  the 
highest  recommendations),  on  account  of  their  extraordinary  brilliancy,  evenness,  and  easy  application. 
They  can  be  used  on  Albumen  Paper,  and  are  without  doubt  the  best  that  have  been  offered  to  the 
public.     The  Colors  are  put  up  in  boxes  of  6,  12,  and  18. 

CEO.  RAU,  Sole  Agent, 

No.  922  Girard  Ave.,  Philadelphia. 


The  subscriber  desires  to  call  attention  to  an  Entirely  New  Style  of  Carved  Frame, 
unique,  handsome,  and  stylish,  and  very  becoming  to  photographs,  which  he  is  now  manu- 
facturing, and  will  furnish  at  the  following  prices : 


4x5      @  $6  00  per  doz. 
5Ux7U@    9  00 
6}/?xS%@  12  00 

7x9     @  12  00 


8  x  10  @  $15  00  per  doz. 

9x11  @    15  00 

10x12  @     18  00        " 

11x14  @    24  00 


12x16    @,  $30  00  per  doz. 
13x17    @    36  00 
16x20    ©    42  00        " 


Larger  sizes  $8.00  per  dozen  for  each  additional  four  inches  or  less  in  length  and  breadth. 
Sample  of  each  size,  except  the  two  smallest,  sent  on  receipt  of  price.  Orders  for  one  dozen 
or  more  filled  C.O.I),  if  ten  per  cent,  is  sent  with  order. 

H.  H.  SNELLINC,  Newburgh,  N.  Y. 


The  undersigned,  having  purchased  the  entire  interest,  goodwill,  and  business  of 

Photo.  Materials  &  Picture  Frames 

OF  J.  HAWORTH, 

Desires  to  inform  his  friends  and  the  trade  generally,  that  he  will  continue  the  business,  as 

heretofore,  at  the  old  stand, 

624  ARCH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA, 

Where  he  hopes,  by  prompt  attention  and  fair  dealing,  to  merit  a  continuance  of  the  patron- 
age so  largely  given  to  the  late  firm. 

"We  will  still  keep  a  well  assorted  stock  of 

PICTURE  FRAMES  (OVAL  AND  SQUARE), 

VELVET  CASES,   COLLODIONS, 

VARNISHES,  PURE  CHEMICALS,   &c, 

which  can  be  had  at  the  lowest  rates;  as  well  as 

PASSEPARTOUTS,    STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS   OF    AEE    PARTS    OF   THE  WORLD, 
STEREOSCOPIC  INSTRUMENTS,  Ac 

We  also  have  a  full  line  of  CAMERAS  of  the  best  makes  and  latest  improvements, 
CAMERA  STANDS,  HEAD-RESTS,  BACKGROUNDS,  and  all  Accessories  necessary 
to  the  Photographic  Art.  We  would  call  the  attention  of  photographers  to  the  fact  that  we 
manufacture  SQUARE  FRAMES,  and  so  can  generally  ship  any  frames  (especially  odd 
sizes)  the  same  day  they  are  ordered.  We  would  also  call  attention  to  the  noted  ALBU- 
MEN PAPERS,  Morgan's  and  H.  Extra,  the  best  for  warm  weather,  for  which  I  am 
the  agent. 


THOMAS  H.  McCOLLIN, 

Successor  to  Haworth  &,  McCollin,  624  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


Reflecting  Solar  Camera. 
IMPROVED 


SOLAR    CAMERAS. 


Direct  Printing  Camera. 

Manufactured  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the  original  inventor  and  patentee,  combining 
ALL  THE  IMPORTANT  improvements  that  have  been  made. 

Every  Camera  will  be  tested  and  guaranteed  before  delivery,  and  will  be  licensed  and  accompanied 
by  the  regular  Patent  Stamp  of  the  patentee. 

PRICES  OF  DIRECT  PRINTING  OR  REFLECTING  SOLAR  CAMERAS: 
10  inch  diameter  Condensing  Lens,  will  print  picture  18  x  23  in.,         .....       $190  00 

12     "  "  "  "  "  "       25x30   " 220  00 

15      "  "  "  "  "  "        29x36   " 275  00 

18     ,:  "  "  "  "  40x50  " 380  00 

Can  be  ordered  op   all  Stockdealers,     Boxing  charged  for  at  cost. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD,  Baltimore,  Md. 


ROBINSON'S 

INIMITABLE 

PHOTOGRAPH 
TRIMMER. 

BETTEPv  THAN  KNIVES, 

AND 

WILL  OUTWEAR  A 

GROSS  OF  THEM. 

See  other  Advertisement, 


Ask  your   stockdealer   to  show  it  to  you,  or 
send  direct  to  us  for  one. 

Price,  by  mail,  $3.50. 

BEHERMAN  &  WILSON,  Mailf Ts'  Agents, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


New  York,  May  1st,  1874. 
The  large,  new,  and  magnificent  Gallery  of 
WM.  KURTZ, 
MADISON  SQUARE,  NEW  YORK, 

Opened  April  1st,  is  furnished  with  twelve  back- 
grounds, new  in  design,  from  the  Scenic  Studio 

>f  LAFAYETTE  W.  SEAVEY, 

8  Lafayette  Place,  New  York. 

THE  KURTZ  PLAIN  combines  the  general 
effects  of  light  and  shade  desirable  and  found  in 
our  Scenic  Backgrounds  This  is  the  first  and 
only  plain  ground  with  which  side-slips  can  be 
appropriately  used.     Send  stamp  for  sample. 


EXTRA! 

No.  70. 

A  New  Forest  Background.    Very  peculiar  and 
effective.      Introduced  by  Bogardus,  N.  Y. 

No.  71. 

A  Rich   Interior,  with   elaborate   tapestry  on 
walls.     Introduced  by  Mora,  N.  Y. 

See  other  advertisements. 


LINN'S   LOOKOUT 
LANDSCAPE   PHOTOGRAPHY. 


&<2 
CO 


^T=l 


(T=5 


YET  CONTAINING    MANY    USEFUL    HINTS    FOE  ALL    PHOTOGRAPHEKS. 

By  the  Late  Prof.  R.  M.  LINN, 

LOOKOUT  MOUNTAIN,   TENN. 

This  admirable  little  work  was  published  last  fall,  a  little  too  late  for  the  season.  It  is 
now  confidently  recommended  to  every  photographer  about  to  do  any  class  of  work,  outside 
or  inside  the  skylight. 

CONTENTS. 


Introductory. 

Main  Requisites  of  a  Good  Photographic  Land- 
scape. 

Artistic  Effect. 

Proper  Illumination. 

Direction  of  Light. 

Clouds. 

Length  of  Exposure. 

Apparatus  for  Field  Work. 

On  the  Selection  of  View  Lenses. 

Camera  Boxes. 

Bath  Cups. 

Preliminary  Preparations. 

Taking  the  Field. 

Hints  on  Printing  and  Finishing. 

To  Print  Clouds. 

Toning  Bath  for  Views. 

On  Fixing  and  Washing  Prints. 

Suggestions  on  Mounting  Prints. 

To  Cut  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

To  Mount  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

Formulae  and  Processes  for  Landscape  Photog- 
raphy. 

Ever-ready  Iodizer  for  Landscape  Photography. 


Remarks  on  Preparing  and  Using  Iodizer. 

On  the  Management  of  Flowing  Bottles. 

On  the  Preparation  of  Plain  Collodion. 

The  Silver  Bath  for  Negatives. 

To  Renovate  an  Old  Negative  Bath. 

To  Prepare  Carbonate  of  Silver. 

Permanganate  of  Potash — Its  LTse  in  our  Art. 

Preparation  and  Using  of  Developer. 

Fixing  Solution  for  View  Negatives. 

On  Redeveloping  and  Strengthening  Agents. 

To  Clean  and  Polish  the  Glass. 

To  Prepare  Chloride  of  Gold  Solution. 

The  Paste  for  Mounting  of  Photographs. 

The    Operator's    Oracle — Failures  :    Causes  and 

Remedies  ;  for  consultation  in  time  of  trouble. 
Counsels  and  Cautions  for  the  Printer,  including 

Formulae  for  Silvering  Bath,  &o 
Failures  in  Silvering  Albumenized  Paper. 
Failures  in  Toning  Photographs. 
Failures  in  Fixing  Photographs. 
Instantaneous  Photography. 
View  Photography  Financially  Considered. 
Stereoscoping  Applied  to  Portraiture. 
Concluding  Remarks. 


PRICE,  75  CENTS. 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


NEWELL'S 

IMPROVED  BATH  HOLDER 


ACKNOWLEDGED  TO  BE 


THE    BEST    IN    THE    WORLD! 


READ  THE  LATEST  TESTIMONIALS: 

Messrs.   R.  Newell  &  Son.  Boston,  Mass.,  March  30,  1874. 

Dear  Sirs;  In  answer  to  your  letter  of  inquiry,  as  to  how  I  like  the  Bath  Holder,  I  have  delayed 
answering  that  I  might  have  time  to  thoroughly  test  it.  I  find  it  in  every  way  first  -rate  ;  does  not 
injure  the  bath,  is  light  and  of  convenient  shape,  and  is  altogether  the  best  holder  I  have  used. 
Hoping  you  will  meet  with  success  in  the  sale  of  the  article,  I  remain, 

Yours  truly,  A.  Marshall,  147  Tremont  Street. 


Messrs.  R.  Newell  &  Son. 


Albany.  N.  Y.,  March  25,  1874. 


Gents  :  The  28  x  28  Bath  works  splendid,  and  I  must  say  the  system  of  making  baths  of  wood 
and  coating  them  with  your  composition  has  supplied  a  want  long  needed  by  the  practical  photog- 
rapher, as  large  glass  baths  are  always  dangerous.  Very  truly, 

E.  S.  M.  Hains,  45  North  Pearl  Street. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  FIRST-CLASS  STOCKDEALERS. 


SOUTHERN 

Photographic^Ferrotype 

STOCK  DEPOT, 
Savannah,  Geo. 

FIRST-CLASS  STOCK 

AT  NORTHERN  PRICES, 

Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance, 
cRasscuptwEsTrpHA^^—  Drayage,  &e. 

sieidtid   :fo:r,  if  :r,  ices   list 


WAYNIOUTH'S 


ignetting  Papers 


ARE  NOW  MADE  OF  TWO  SHAPES,  as  shown  in  the  drawings  above.  They  consist  of  finely 
gradated,  lithographed  designs,  mounted  on  protecting  sheets  of  non-actinic  paper,  and  are  the  light 
est,  neatest,  and  best  means  of  producing  vignette  pictures  ever  offered. 

TESTIMONIALS: 

"  Waymouth's  Improved  Vignette  Papers  I  have  tried,  and  they  are  just  what  I  have  been  want- 
ing for  years." — Well  Gt.  Singhi. 

"  They  readily  admit  of  the  gradation  already  very  good,  being  modified  easily  to  suit  the  negative. 
This,  I  take  it,  is  a  point  of  great  importance." — G.  Wharton  Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A. 

"  From  a  trial  made,  we  are  enabled  to  say  that  they  answer  exceedingly  well  ;  and  they  are  certain 
to  find  favor  among  photographers — a  favor  they  well  deserve." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  can  testify  to  the  exquisite  softness  obtained  from  your  Vignette  Papers,  which  gradual  and 
soft  effect  I  have  never  seen  equalled  by  any  other  method.'' — H.  A.  H.  Daniel,  Esq.,  Hon.  Sec.  of  the 
Bristol  and  Clifton  Amateur  Photographic  Association. 

"The  Waymouth  Vignetting  Paper  are  a  decided  success.  They  are  splendid." — J.  W.  &f  J.  S. 
Movlton,  Salem  Mass. 

From  Professional  Photographers. — "First-class."  "The  sample  sent  answers  perfectly."  "I 
consider  them  first  rate  articles."  "I  think  your  Vignette  Papers  will  be  a  great  improvement  on 
the  old  glasses."     &c,  &e. 

Any  number  sent  on  receipt  of  price,  by  any  stockdealer,  or  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers, 

PHILADELPHIA . 

{See  opposite  page.) 


DO   YOU    USE 


WAYMOUTH'S 


(DESIGNS    COPYRIGHTED,) 


OF  ALL  PICTURES,  THE 


fiprite 


IS  THE  MOST  ARTISTIC, 


When  •properly  printed.  But  the  clumsy  devices  generally  in  use  for  printing  them, 
or  rather  for  blending  the  shading  about  the  figure,  produce  but  very  few  really  artistic 
vignette  pictures.  Either  the  shading  is  too  intensely  dark,  not  gradated  in  tint  at  all,  or 
it  shows  an  ugly  direct,  decided  line,  which  is  very  repulsive.  The  shading  should 
blend  gradually  from  the  dark  tint  nearest  to  the  figure,  off'  into  the 
white  background.  The  results  are  then  soft,  artistic,  and  beautiful.  The  easiest  and 
best  way  to  secure  them  is  by  the  use  of 

WAYMOUTH'S  VICNETTE  PAPERS. 

THEY  ARE  NOT  CLUMSY ;  DO  NOT  BREAK  ;  ARE  ALWAYS  READY  ;  COST 
BUT  LITTLE,  AND  ARE  EASY  OF  APPLICATION  TO  ANY  NEGATIVE. 

THEY  NEED  BUT  ONE  ADJUSTMENT  TO  PRINT  ANY  QUANTITY. 

They  entirely  do  away  with  all  the  old  and  troublesome  methods,  either  wood,  metaf, 
or  cotton. 

PLEASE  TRY  THE  SAMPLE  GIVEN  IN  THIS  MAGAZINE  FOE  FEB.  1874. 


Eighteen  sizes  are  now  made,  suiting  all  dimensions"  of  pictures  from  a  small  carte  figure 
to  Whole-size,  Victorias,  Cabinets,  &c.  They  are  printed  in  black  for  ordinary  negatives, 
yellow  bronze  for  thin  negatives,  and  red  bronze  for  still  weaker  ones.  Directions  for  use 
accompany  each  parcel. 

IP  IR,  I  O  IE  S   : 

In  parcels  containing  one  of  each  size,  Nos.  1  to  15,  assorted  colors $1  00 

Assorted  sizes  and  colors,  by  number,  per  package  of  fifteen 1  00 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  assorted  sizes  and  colors,  for  Cartes,  by  number,  per  dozen 50 

"     6,  7,  11,  12,  and  13     "  "       Large  Cartes  and  Victorias,  by  number,  per  doz 75- 

"    8,  9,  10,  14,  and  15     "  "  "      Cabinets  and  Whole-size,  "  "       100 

"    16,  17,  and  18,  ■         "  "  "      Half  "  "  "  "       125 

(SEE  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

When  ordering,  state  the  number  and  color  you  want.  The  Waymouth  Vignette  Papers 
are  an  English  invention,  and  are  becoming  so  universally  used  in  Europe  that  we  have 
pleasure  in  introducing  them  to  our  patrons. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers,  7tH  al  Clierry,  Plata. 

FOR   SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


IMPROVED 

PHOTOGRAPH  COVERS 


Frequent  inquiries  for  something  at  a  much  lower  price  than  an  album,  for  the  holding 
together  and  preservation  of  photographs,  has  induced  us  to  manufacture  an  article  which 
we  think  will  meet  the  want. 

IT  SERVES  ALL  THE  PURPOSES  OF  AN  ALBUM,  FOR 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Portraits, 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Landscapes, 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Photographs  of  any  hind, 

MAY  BE  NEATLY  AND  CHEAPLY  BOUND  IN  THESE  COVERS. 

* 

They  are  made  with  expanding  backs,  so  that  from  six  to  twenty-four  pictures  ma}7  be 

inserted  in  one  cover.  The  pictures  are  mounted  in  the  usual  way,  and  then  strips  of  linen, 
or  strong  paper,  of  the  proper  width,  are  pasted  on  one  edge,  by  which  the  picture  is  inserted 
and  held  in  place  in  the  cover  by  a  paper  fastener.  Fig.  1  represents  the  cover,  with  the 
perforations  in  the  back,  through  which  the  spreading  clasps  of  the  paper  fastener  bind  the 
whole  together.  These  are  so  easily  fhserted  or  removed,  that  pictures  are  readily  put  in  or 
taken  out  at  any  time.  Fig.  2  represents  the  picture,  with  the  guard  pasted  on  ready  for 
insertion.  The  arrangement  is  simple,  and  we  are  sure  will  be  readily  comprehended.  For 
binding  together  views  of  your  town  or  city,  or  portraits  of  celebrities,  they  are  very  neat. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  sizes  and  prices,  without  cards : 

For  Photograph.  Per  dozen.  Per  hundred. 

Card  Size, $1.50 $10.00 

Cabinet  Size, 2.25    ......     13.50 

EXTRA    HEAVY    COVERS. 

5-8  Size, 4.50 33.00 

£-4      " 6.00 40.00 

8-10  " 8.00 56.50 

Larger  or  special  sizes  made  to  order.     Furnished  with  card  board  at  best  rates.     Samples 

mailed  at  dozen  price. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


JAMES  P.  MAGEE  &  CO 

MANUFAOTUKEB.S    OF 

PTJEE 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMICALS, 

No.  108  North  Fifth  Street, 

PHILADELPHIA. 


Stock  Dealers  only  Supplied. 

SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT. 


ALL  PERSONS  ARE  HEREBY  NOTIFIED,  and  cautioned  against  infringing  my  Solar  Camera 
Patent. 

Infringers  will  settle  with   H.  L.  Emmons,    Attorney-at-Law,    Baltimore,   Md. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD, 

Baltimore,  Md. 

STEREOSCOPIC   VIEWS 

OF 

The  Catskill  Mountains,  Trenton  Falls,  N.  Y., 
Lake  Mohonk,  K.  Y.,  &c,  &c. 

GREAT  VARIETY  AND  EIRST-CLASS  QUALITY. 

THE  TRADE  SUPPLIED  ON  REASONABLE  TERMS. 

J.  LOEFFLER,  Photographer,  Tompkinsville,  Staten  Island,  N.  Y. 


BALTIMORE! 

THE  ATTENTION  OF  PHOTOGKAPHERS  is  invited  to  my  stock  of  photographic 
goods.     I  am  prepared  to  fill  all  orders,  large  or  small,  promptly  at  best  prices. 

AMM  WWE  M&WEMWTEM 

are  received  as  soon  as  by  any  one  in  the  market. 

AMOK G  OTHER  THINGS, 

The  American  Optical  Co.'s  Apparatus, 
Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler, 
Chute's  Universal  Cameo  Press, 
Robinson's  Print-Trimmers  and  Guides, 
Morrison's  and  Steinheil's  View  Lenses, 
Waymouth's  Vignette  Papers, 
All  Makes  of  Portrait  Lenses, 
Chemicals,  Glass,  and  Frames, 

are  carefully  selected  for  my  special   sales.     My  expenses  are  light.     I  do  my  own  work 
personally,  and  can  supply  goods  as  low  as  the  next  one. 

A  trial  order  solicited.     Freight  and  expressage  from  Baltimore  very  low  to  any  point 
South  or  West. 

M  

No.  7  No.  7  No.  7 

NORTH    CHARLES    STREET, 

BALTIMORE,  MD. 


G.  GENNERT, 

53  Maiden  Lane,  N.  Y., 


IMPORTER  OF  THE  CELEBRATED 


S.  *  M.  DRESDEN 


AtWlJtt«9 


PAPERS, 


RIVES  &  STEINBACH 

WHITE,  PINK,  and  BLUE. 

Every  one  says  it  works  the  most  uniform,  economical,  and  gives  liner  results  than  any 
other.  To  satisfy  yourself  that  it  is  the  best,  send  to  your  stock  dealer  for  a  sample  dozen. 
Kept  by  all  stock  dealers  in  the  United  States. 

ALSO, 

Hyposulphite  of  Soda, 

Solid  German  Glass  Baths, 

Saxe  Evaporating  Dishes, 

And  French  Filter  Paper- 


Special  attention  is  called  to  the   Extra  Brilliant  or  Double   Glossy  Paper, 

which  is  recognized  by  the  best  artists  all  over  the  world  as  the  finest  Albumen  Paper  in 
this  country  or  Europe. 

*       * 


Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 

EGGSHELL,  GLOSSY,  CHOCOLATE-TIUTED. 

(PATENTED  MARCH  1st,  1870.) 

ALL  SIZES,  FEOM  1-9  to  10x14.  BLACK  AND  CHOCOLATE. 

THE  PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Worcester,  Mass., 

ARE  NOW  MAKING  THE  MOST  POPULAR  BRAND  OF  PLATES  IN  THE  TRADE. 


PRICE     LIST 

Size. 

Eggshell. 

Glossy. 

Size. 

Eggshell, 

Crlossy 

Per  Box  of  8  Doz. 

1-9 

$0.80 

$0.90 

Per  Box  of  2  Doz. 

4-4 

$2.40 

$2.70 

8     « 

1-6 

1.25 

1.35 

«<            4     << 

5-7 

2.40 

2.70 

8     " 

1-4 

1.85 

2.00 

"            2     " 

7-10 

2.70 

2.90 

"            4     " 

4£x6J 

1.85 

2.00 

I!               2      " 

8x10 

2.70 

2.90 

"            4     " 

1-2 

2.20 

2.35 

Per  Sheet, 

10x14 

.17 

.18 

«            2     " 

4^x10 

2.20 

2.35 

Ee vised,  New  York, 

December  28th,  1872 

EGGSHELL,    GLOSSY,    AND    CHOCOLATE-TINTED   PLATES,    ALL    SIZES    AND    STYLES, 
ALWAYS    ON    HAND    AND   READY   TOR   DELIVERY. 

Each  package  of  Phenix  Plates  has  printed  on  the  wrapper,  "Manufactured 

by  the  Phenix  Plate  Co.,  Worcester,  Mass.,"  and  none 

are  genuine  unless  bearing  that  stamp. 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  constitu- 
ting them  our  sole  and  exclusive  agents  for  the  sale  of  our  Plates. 

That  company  is  so  well  and  favorably  known  in  the  business,  that  no  com- 
mendation of  ours  is  required  to  assure  the  Trade  that  they  will  be  liberally 
dealt  with  in  every  respect. 

Phenix  Plates  are  for  sale  by  all  Stock  Dealers  throughout  the  country. 

PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Manufacturers, 

Worcester,  Mass. 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  Apts  for  the  Trade,  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  1 1 


ea's  cMlanual 


OF 


PI  m  i  n  I T I  ft  In  I  n  I A I D 9 U  t  V 


Third  Thousand! 

We  have  undertaken  the  publication  of  the  third  thousand  of  this   valuable  Text-Book, 
and  offer  it  to  the  photog'raphers  in  a  more  attractive  and 


New  Shape. 


The  author's  illustrations  now  number  150,  nearly  double  the  number  of  the  first  edition. 

The  Chapters  on  Failures  have  been  much  elaborated  and  rearranged,  so  as  to  afford  a 
ready  reference  in  case  of  almost  any  trouble  or  difficulty  liable  to  occur  to  the  photogra- 
pher, with  appropriate  remedies  therefor.     The  following  are  among  other 


New  Things: 


Method  of  preparing  silvered  PAPER  WHICH  WILL  KEEP  FOR 
WEEKS,  and  with  care,  even  for  months ;  no  washing  or  additional 
manipulation  of  the  paper  needed. 

Investigation  of  Negative  Varnishes  and  formulas  for  Water-proof  Var- 
nish, such  that  negatives  varnished  with  it  have  been  kept  for  months 
under  water  without  injury. 

Tables  to  aid  in  the  construction  of  glass  houses,  &c. 


NOTICES  OF  THE  PKESS, 


"  There  is  a  valuable  chapter  on  the  preparation  of  a  sensitive  paper  that  is  not  liable  to  discoloration 

We  close  the  present  notice  by  cordially  commending  Mr.  Lea's  Manual  to  our  readers." — British  Journal  of  Pho- 
tography. 

"  M.  Carey  Lea's  excellent '  Manual  of  Photography  '  is  a  very  full  and  complete  work."— PhilaoVa  Bulletin. 

"  If  we  say  that  this  work  is  an  encyclopedia  of  its  art,  we  shall  hardly  exaggerate  its  comprehensiveness. 
....  The  author  takes  every  department  and  every  branch  of  each,  and  gives  that  distinct  and  clear  information 

that  is  needed  by  photographers The  worth  of  the  labor  is  proved  in  the  fact  that  this  new  and  enlarged 

edition  follows  the  first  so  speedily.  Hereafter,  those  who  would  excel  must  master  the  Manual."— North 
American. 

PRICE,  S3.75. 

It  contains  440  pages  on  fine  toned  paper,  150  wood  cuts,  cloth,  beveled  edges,  and  gilt. 

FOE  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCK-DEALERS. 
Sent  by  return  mail,  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


rp  -rq-  -rp 

ALBION  ALBUMENIZING  CO. 

LONDON  AND  GLASGOW, 
(Office,   No.   II    Brackenbury   Road,  Hammersmith,  London,) 

Request  American  Photographers  to  give  their 
Paper  a  fair  trial. 


TESTIMONIALS. 

"  It  is  good  enough  to  eat.     I  use  it  altogether  for  the  prints  for  the  Philadelphia  Photographer." — - 
¥m.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"The  last  lot  of  paper  was  as  good  as  we  wish  to  use. — Vandyke  &  Brown,  Liverpool,  largest  c»n 
siime.rn  in  Kngland. 

A  FRESH  SUPPLY  JUST  RECEIVED  BY 


PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


Marion  & Oo.s  Specialties. 


ALBUMENIZED  PAPERS, 

Used  by  the  best  English  and  Colonial  photographers  ;  Wilson,  of  Aberdeen  ;  Vandyke 
&  Brown,  Liverpool;  Notman,  Montreal;  Bourne  &  Shepherd,  India;  and  hundreds  of 
others. 

MOUNTS 

For  Cartes-de-Visite,  Cabinet,  and  larger  sizes,  of  the  very  best  style  and  quality,  as  made 
for  the  leading  English  and  Colonial  photographers.  We  will  post  samples  free  to  any 
photographer  on  receipt  of  application. 

GILT  AND  SILVER  ORMOLU  METAL  FRAMES, 

For  Miniatures,  Cartes-de-Visite,  and  Cabinets. 

PHOTOGRAPHS. 

The   largest  and  best  selected  stock  in    Great  Britain.       Upwards    of   1000   copies  of 
Modern  Paintings,  artistically  colored  in  water  colors;  English  and  Continental  Photogra- 
phic Views;  the  principal  Picture  Galleries;  Portraits  of  Eminent  Personages;  over  300, 
000  in  stock. 

MARION  &  CO.,  22  &  23  Soho  Square,  LONDON,  ENGLAND, 


A  SPLENDID,  USEFUL  BOOK. 

OUR  LAST  AND  NEWEST  PUBLICATION. 


13  H.    VOCiE 


PHOTOGRAPHER'S 


hr 


m 


UjIU'IG 

FL  ir; 


POCKET 

B*U138 


VM  a\  * 


■j 


An  Alphabetically  arranged  collection  of  practically  important  hints  on  the  construction 
of  the  Gallery  ;  selection  and  trial  of  lenses  and  chemicals  ;  approved  formulae  for  the  differ- 
ent photographic  processes;  tables  of  weights  and  measures;  rules  for  avoiding  failure,  etc., 
etc.,  for 

Photographers  and  Amateurs, 

IS  RECEIVING  THE  HIGHEST  PEAISE  WHEREVER  IT  GOES. 


IT  IS  A  BOOK  EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER  SHOULD  HAVE, 

Because  it  is  a  ready  helper  under  all  difficult  circumstances. 


Extract  from  the  Minutes  of  the  Chicago  Photographic  Association. 

"Messrs.  Hall  and  Hesler  spoke  in  most  flattering  terms  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Pocket  Reference- Book,  of 
its  great  value  to  every  photographer,  and  expressed  the  hope  that  it  may  soon  be  found  in  every 
gallery." 


There  is  hardly  a  matter  occurring  in  your  daily  work  which  it  does  not  throw  light  upon 
and  make  easy.     Examine  it  for  yourself. 


For  sale  by  all  dealers.    Price,  $1.60,  post-paid. 

BENJERMAN &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


LONDON     1851. 


LONDON    1862. 


PARIS    1867. 


ROSS' 


PORTRAIT 


AM"D 


VIEW  LENSES. 


We  have  now  successfully  introduced  to  the  American  Photographers  the  Ross  Lens,  and  by  our 
increased  sales  we  know  they  are  appreciated.  At  the  convention  held  at  Buffalo,  July  15,  many  fine 
photographs  were  exhibited  by  photographers,  and  ourselves,  made  with  the  Ross  Lens,  which 
attracted  great  attention. 

While  Ross  &  Co.  are  the  oldest  manufacturers  of  Photographic  Lenses  in  existence,  they  also 
keep  up  with  the  requirements  of  the  fraternity,  by  constantly  manufacturing;  new  combinations  and 
improving  on  those  already  in  existence.  They  have  lately  perfected,  and  will  soon  furnish  us  stock 
of,  a  new  series  of  Card  Lenses,  extra  rapid,  peculiarly  adapted  for  babies,  and  people  who  will  not  be 
quiet.     We  will  give  notice  of  their  arrival. 

WE  HAVE  NOW  IN  STOCK 

Portrait  Lenses,  from  1-4  to  15x18.  Instantaneous  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Cabinet  Lenses,  Bios.  1,  2,  and  3.  Medium  Angle  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Card  Lenses.  Xos.  1,  2,  and  3.  Large  Angle  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Triplets,  >os.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7.  Stereographic  Lenses,  all  sizes. 

We  shall  soon  have  in  Stock,  Ross  &  Co.'s  latest  introduction,  which  is  at  present  exciting  the 
Photographers  of  Europe  with  its  excellence,  and  has  been  named  the 

SYMMETRICAL    LENS. 


We  shall  keep  following  sizes  in  stock,  other  numbers  imported  to  order. 


*3 


Large  Stop 

Covering. 

5x4 


6     SU'x6J^ 

....      10x8 

15x12 

18x16 


Medium  Stop 
Covering. 

.   i%yay,  .. 

9x7  "  . 

.       12x10  . 

18x16  . 

.       22  x  20  . 


Small  Stop 
Covering. 

.  8x5  . 

.  10x8  . 

.  13x11 

.  22x18  . 

.  25 x  21  . 


Equivalent  p  , 

Focus.  "lce- 

5  inches $27  00 

8       "           54  00 

10       "            72  00 

18       "           108  00 

21       "           135  00 


*  In  matched  pairs,  $54.00. 


Numerous  testimonials  pronounce  them  to  be  the  best,  as  well  as  the  cheapest  Foreign  Lens  ever 
offered  to  the  American  Photographer. 

We  will  mail  price-list  on  application,  and  promptly  fill  all  orders. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 


SOLE  AGENTS  FOR 
THE  UNITED  STATES. 


822  Arcl  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


eowii£ 


MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

Nos.  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 


WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN 


MEMMMM  StfflPmiEB 


On  the  Most  Advantageous  Terms,  with 

EVERY  ARTICLE  IN  THE  WORLD 

Used  or  sold  in  the  Art  of  Photography. 


H^0  Our  facilities  are  such  that  we  cannot  be  superseded  by  any 
other  house.    We  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to  deal  with  us. 


ASK  YOUR  DEALER  FOR  SCOVILL'S  GOODS. 


Removed  to  New  Store,  419  &  421  Broome  St. 

^SeeT;^r;rme"ts  "photographic  times." 


in,  and  read  the 


ETESARIjir  ALL  GONE  I 


1IC 


I^or   1874. 

EDITED  BY  EDWARD  U  WILSON, 


This  favorite  annual  is  -wholly  filled  with  Articles  prepared  expressly  for  it  by  the 
eminent  photographers  of  Europe  and  America,  and  is  Unusually  Good. 

Price,  in  Cloth,  $1.00 ;  in  Paper  Cover,  50  Cents. 


The  Best  Little  HaMW  of  Photography  In  tie  lurid.       For  Sale  ly  all  Dealers. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

POWERS     &     WEI0HTMAN, 


P=! 


PS5 


MANUFACTURING  CHEMISTS, 


OfFer  to  Stockdealers 
A  full  Assortment  of  Reliable 


Photographic  Chemicals 


Of  their  own  Manufacture, 
including  : 


Nitrate  of  Silver,  Sulphuric  Ether  (concentrated),  Ammonia  (concentrated), 
Bromide  of  Potassium,  Acetic  Acid,  Chemically  Pure  Acids, 
Iron  and  Ammonia  Proto-Sulphate,  Chloride  of  Gold, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  Sulphate  of  Iron,  Cyanide  of  Potassium, 
Chloroform,  Tannin,  Sulphuret  of  Potassium. 


QR^ISTD   MEDAL   OF  MEEIT; 

AWARDED  AT  VIENNA   TO 


SEXD    FOR   A    CATALOGUE 


Charles  Bierstadt, 


LANDSCAPE 
-j     PHOTOGRAPHER, 

Trade  supplied  with  the  best  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  Hudson  Elver,  Saratoga,  Partage, 
New  York,"Watkins'  Glen,  Havana  Glen,  California,  Yosemite  Valley,  Sogers'  Statuary,  &c. 


t,  Niagara  Falls,  N.Y. 


LIESEGANG'S  ALBUMEN  PAPEE 

Is  used  and  recommended  by  the  London  Stereoscopic  Company  ;  Messrs.  Alessandri  Fratelli, 
of  Kome  ;  Le  Lieure,  of  Rome  ;  A.  Sorgato,  of  Venice  ;  Fr.  Bruckmann,  of  Munich ;  C.  Eeut- 
linger,  of  Paris ;  C.  Bergamasio,  of  Petersburg ;  Abdullah,  of  Constantinople ;  and  many 
other  first  class  photographers  throughout  the  World. 

IT  IS  THE  BEST  PAPER  IN  THE  MARKET. 
Sample  sheets,  and  English,  French,  and  German  Price  List  to  be  had  free  on  application 
from  the  Manufacturer. 


DUSSELDORF    ON    THE    RHBNE,   GERMANY, 

(FORMERLY  AT  ELBERFELD). 

For  Sale  by  SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  New  York. 


F.  G.  WELLER,  PUBLISHER  OF  STEREOSCOPIC  VIEWS 

OF  THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS  AND  VICINITY  AND  MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS, 

LITTLETON,  ST.  H. 

SPECIALTY  :  WELLER'S  STEREOSCOPIC  TREASURES,  which  embrace  a  sereis  of  subject  pic- 
tures from  nature,  such  as  are  not  made  by  any  other  artist  in  the  country.  New  subjects  added  continually. 
Dealers  and  jobbers  supplied  on  favorable  terms. 


Lantern  Slides. 


A  fine  stock  on  hand,  selected  from  home  and  foreign  catalogues,  embracing 


Views  of  all  Parts  of  the  World ! 


American  Trade  Agents  for  J.  Levy  &  Co.'s  Celebrated  Slides. 


PLAIN,  COLORED,  AND  COMIC 

LANTERN    SLIDES, 


OP  ALL  KINDS,   AT  LOW  PRICES. 


Superior  Slides  made  by  the  Woodbury  Process. 


SCIOPTICONS  AND  LANTERNS  SUPPLIED. 


EXAMINE  OUR  $100   LANTJEBN  OUTFIT, 

SELECTIONS  MADE  PEPtSONALLY.  PKICES  MOST  ADVANTAGEOUS. 


ALSO,  GLASS   STEREOSCOPIC  PICTURES, 

A  NEW  AND  BEAUTIFUL  SELECTION  JUST  RECEIVED. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Southwest  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


MARCY'S 


McAllisters 

MAGIC  LANTERNS 


IN  GREAT  VARIETY. 


LANTERN  SLIDES, 


OF  ALL  PARTS 

OF    THE    WORLD. 


LARGE  STOCK  JUST  RECEIVED  BY 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Importers,  Seventh  aid  Cherry  Sis.,  Plilafla. 


TRY    IT    AND    BE    CONVINCED. 


The  best  COLLODION  in  use  is 

LEWIS  &  HOLT'S  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE, 

Sold  with  a  Printed  Formula  accompanying'  each  Bottle. 

Being  among  the  first  in  this  country  to  make  Collodion  Pictures,  they  can  warrant  it  to  be  one 

of  the  best  in  use. 

ALSO,   THEIR 

ADAMANTINE  VARNISH  for  Amnrotypes,  Negatives,  al  MelaiMypes. 

This  Varnish,  when  applied  to  Negatives,  dries  in  a  few  seconds  perfectly  hard,  and  does  not  lower  the 
intensity,  or  soften  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  in  Printing.  It  gives  a  beautiful  gloss  and  brilliancy  to 
Ambrotypes.    For  Sale  by  Stockdealers  generally.    Prepared  by  K,    A    LEWIS 

160  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

HEADQUARTERS     FOR    THE     TRADE. 

Show  Displayers,  Velvet  Stands, 

Velvet  Passepartouts,         Velvet  Oases, 
Beveled  Matts,  Double  Matts, 

Fancy  Metal  Frames,  Standard  Matts, 

Fancy  Paper  Passepartouts. 

These  goods  are  entirely  of  our  own  manufacturing.  A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand  ;  odd 
sizes  and  styles  made  to  order. 

LEWIS  PATTBEEG  is  BBO.,  709  (B$S)  Broadway,  New  York. 


Photographic  Card  Warehouse. 


A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 

MANUFACTURERS, 

No.  18  South  Sixth  St.  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 

PHILADELPHIA. 


EVERYTHING  APPERTAINING  TO  THE   LINE   OF  OUR 

MANUFACTURES  FURNISHED  WITH  CARE 

AND  PROMPTNESS. 


J$^°  Our  long  experience  in  and  facilities  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods,  and 
familiarity  with  the  peculiar  wants  of  Photographers,  enable  us  to  offer  superior  induce- 
ments to  those  who  may  favor  us  with  their  orders. 


enlaEGEmE  N    X    b 

IDE  BY  THE  SOLAR  CAMERA, 

AND  COPYING  DONE,  FOR  THE  TRADE. 


18   SOLAR   CAMERAS. 


EXPEDITIOUS.  ""SSSXttffiisr""   EXCELLENT 

ALBERT   MOORE, 

No.  828  Wood  Street,  Philadelphia. 


PUBLIC! 
TIONS. 


In  order  to  meet  the  thirst  now  happily  growing  so  rapidly  among  photographers,  for 
knowledge  bearing  upon 

ART  PRINCIPLES  APPLICABLE  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY, 

We  have  arranged  with  the  various  publishers  of  art  Works  for  the  sale  of  such  as  we  think 
will  be  useful  to  photographers,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  copies  of  them  on  receipt  of  price, 
as  follows : 

ART  CULTURE.  A  Hand-book  of  Art  Technicalities  and  Criticism,  selected  from  the 
works  of  John  Ruskin.  An  admirable  work,  giving  most  useful  hints  on  composi- 
tion, posing,  lighting,  backgrounds,  tone,  color,  lines,  unity,  variety,  harmony,  &c,  &c. 
485  pages,  and  finely  illustrated.     Price,  $3.00. 

THE  STUDY  OF  ART.  A  manual  of  short  paragraphs,  numerically  arranged,  on  all 
the  leading  art  topics,  and  a  very  instructive,  useful  book.  By  M.  A.  Dwight.  278 
pages.     Price,  $2.00. 

THE  OLD  MASTERS  AND  THEIR  PICTURES.  A  simple  account  of  the  great 
old  masters  in  painting  of  every  age  and  country,  with  descriptions  of  their  most 
famous  works,  for  the  use  of  learners,  &c.     By  Sarah  Tyler.    363  pages.    Price,  $1.50. 

MODERN  PAINTERS  AND  THEIR  PAINTINGS.  A  companion  to  "The  Old 
Masters,"  and  an  introduction  to  the  Study  of  Modern  Painters  and  their  Pictures. 
By  Sarah  Tyler.     360  pages.     Price,  $1.50. 

THOUGHTS  ABOUT  ART.  A  book  which  every  photographer  should  read,  being  ex- 
haustive on  the  subject,  and  containing  chapters  on  "  The  Relation  between  Photography 
and  Painting,"  "The  Artistic  Spirit,"  "The  Artistic  Observation  of  Nature,"  and 
many  other  useful  subjects,  by  that  delightful  author  Philip  Gilbert  Hamerton. 
383  pages.     Price,  $2.25. 

CHRISTIAN  ART  AND  SYMBOLISM.  A  very  useful  book  with  the  others.  More 
advanced.     Illustrated.     292  pages.     Price,  $2.25. 

THE  LAOCOON.  An  essay  upon  the  limits  of  painting  and  poetry,  with  remarks  illus- 
trative of  various  points  in  the  history  of  ancient  art.  By  Gr.  S.  Lessing.  245  pages. 
Price,  $1.75. 

ART  EDUCATION.  A  very  elaborate  and  elegant  work.  By  Walter  Smith,  Super- 
inteudent  of  Art  Education,  State  of  Massachusetts.     Price,  $5.00. 

j^-ALL  ORDERS  FILLED  PROMPTLY. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


The  publishers  of  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER,  encouraged  by  the 
growing  interest  taken  in  their  PKEMIUM  LIST,  by  operators,  printers,  employees,  etc., 
offer  the  following 

PREMIUMS  FOR  1874, 

FOR  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS 


CONDITIONS:  These  premiums  are  only  given  to  old  or  present  subscribers  for 
new  ones.     No  premium  will  be  given  you  on  your  own  renewal. 


WE  WILL  GIVE  FOE  THREE  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  (IN  ADDITION  TO 
YOUR  OWN),  FOR  ONE  YEAR, 

Vols.  I  &  II  of  the  Photographic  World ! 


TWO  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  FOR  ONE  YEAR, 


Either  Volume  I  or  II  of  the  Photographic  World, 


Or  your  choice  of  the  following  :  $1  on  each  per  year,  pat/able  in  any  of  our  publications, 
not  in  cash ;  i.  e.,  $10  will  secure  our  Magazine  for  one  year  to  an  OLD  subscriber,  to  a  neio  one, 
and  one  dollar's  inorth  of  our  other  publications. 

Any  enterprising  operator  can,  by  writing  a  few  letters  and  a  little  effort,  secure  enough 
new  subscribers  to  pay  for  his  own,  and  fit  him  out  with  our  whole  list  of  premiums,  or  a 
set  of  the  six  Luckhardt  pictures.     (See  special  advertisement.) 

This  magnificent  offer  was  never  equalled  by  any  publisher,  photographic  or  otherwise. 
Strive  hard  to  win  the  whole  ! 

Please  examine  the  order  blanks  in  this  number,  and  send  for  more  if  you  wish  them. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 


Philadelphia  Photographer, 

Is  admitted  by  all  who  understand  such  things  to  be 

The  Livest  and  Best  Photographic  Magazine  Published ! 

IT    PUBLISHES 

A  Handsome  Specimen  Photograph  in  each  issue, 
The  Latest  Photographic  News  from  home  sources, 

Monthly  Letters  from  England,  France,  Germany,  and  Italy, 
Correspondence  from  all  parts  of  the  World, 

Illustrations  on  Wood  of  all  sorts  of  Articles  used  in  the  Art, 
Processes,  Formulae,  Wrinkles  and  Dodgss,  without  number, 
The  Earliest  Information  on  all  matters  of  use  to  its  readers, 
Elaborate  Drawings  of  Skylights  in  all  parts  of  the  World, 

AND 

EACH  MONTHLY  ISSUE  IS  A  PHOTOGRAPHIC  WORK  IS  ITSELP. 

BE   ASSURED 

NO  PHOTOGRAPHER  CAN  AFFORD  TO  DO  WITHOUT  IT. 


NOW  IN  ITS  ELEVENTH  YEAK.     SAMPLE  COPIES  FREE. 


Please  read  what  we  give  for  new  subscribers  as 

PREMIUMS  ON  THE  OPPOSITE  PAGE 


NOTICE   TO    SUBSCRIBERS. 


Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2  50  for  six  months,  50  cents  per  copy.     Positively  in  advance. 

In  remitting  by  mail  a  post-office  order,  or  draft  payable  to  the  order  of  Benerman  &  "Wilson,  is 
preferable  to  bank  notes      Clearly  give   your  Post-office,   County,  and  State. 

Canada  subscribers  must  remit  24  cents  extra,  to  prepay  postage.  Foreign  subscriptions  must  be 
accompanied  by  the  postage  in  addition. 

Advertising  sheets  are  bound  with  each  number  of  the  Magazine.  Advertisements  are  inserted 
at  the  following  rates : 

One  Month.  Six  Months.  One  Year. 

One  Page, $20  00  $110  00  $200  00 

Half    "      12  00  66  00  120  00 

(Quarter  Page, 7  00  38  50  70  00 

Eighth        "      4  00  22  00 40  00 

Cards,  of  Six  lines  or  less, 2  00  11  00 20  00 

The  attention  of  advertisers,  and  those  having  galleries,  &c,  for  sale,  is  called  to  our  Specialties 
pages.  Terms  $2  for  six  lines,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a  line,  always 
in  advance.  Duplicate  insertions,  50  cents  less,  each.  Sure  to  pay.  ggl?0 Operators  desiring  situa- 
tions, no  charge. 

BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

OFFICE,  S.  W.  COR.  OF  SEVENTH  AND  CHEERY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


ENTREKIN'S 

OSCILLATING  ENAMELER. 


BURNISHING 
PHOTOGRAPH 


Far  superior  to  any- 
thing yet  invented  for 
that  purpose. 


BEAUTIFUL 
FINISH  &  GLOSS 


Patented  May  20th,  and 
December  2d,  1873. 

Every  Machine  war- 
ranted perfect. 


PHOTOGRAPHERS !  TAKE  NOTICE ! 

IMPOETANT  PATENT  DECISION! 

Given  on  the  question  of  priority  of  invention  between  the  Weston  and  Entrekin  Burnisher  Patents.  Said 
decision  has  been  given  in  favor  of  TEE  ENTEEEIN  OSCILLATING  INAMELEE,  on  a  hinged  holding  plate,  etc., 
etc.    (See  decision  of  Examiner,  July  3d,  1874.) 

Now  in  accordance  with  the  above  decision,  we  shall  certainly  collect  a  royalty  from  all  parties  using  pho- 
tograph burnishers  infringing  the  patent  of  the  Entrekin  Oscillating  Enameler,  and  shall  commence  legal 
proceedings  to  stop  the  manufacture  and  sale  of  all  such  infringements. 

Whereas  certain  parties  are  advertising  that  they  will  prosecute  all  photographers  who  make  Burnished 
Photographs  on  other  than  their  primitive  machines,  you  are  hereby  notified  that  it  is  believed  that  such  adver- 
tisements are  intended  to  prevent  the  sale  of  Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler.  The  parties  thus  advertising 
are  hereby  dared  to  prosecute  any  one  using  my  Enameler,  or  the  inventor  and  manufacturer  thereof. 

This  Burnisher  is  the  best  in  the  market  and  far  superior  to  any  other.  It  does  not  infringe  any  patent  of 
Weston  or  others.  Persons  wishing  to  purchase  are  requested  to  notify  the  undersigned,  and  they  will  be  fur- 
nished with  certificates  of  superiority,  and,  if  desired,  purchasers  will  be  amply  guaranteed,  protected,  and 
defended  against  any  claim  or  pretended  claim  of  any  prior  patent. 

"WILLIAM  G.  ENTREKIN. 
[Published  by  the  authority  of  George  Harding,  Esq.,  ^Ltlorney-al-Law."\ 


William  G.  Entrekin.  Washington,  D-.  C,  Friday,  June  5th,  1874. 

Dear  Sir  :  Yours  is  just  received.  You  need  not  fear  any  trouble  from  any  parties  in  regard  to  the  Weston 
Machine.  Your  Burnisher  does  not  infringe  with  any  feature  of  the  Weston  Machine  in  the  least  particular. 
You  can,  therefore,  manufacture  and  sell  your  machines  with  impunity.  Yours  truly, 

C.  M.  PARKS, 
Attorney-at-Law  and  Solicitor  of  Patents. 

EXCELSIOR ! 

The  Scovill  Gold  Medal  was  awarded  by  the  National  Photogra- 
phic Association  of  the  United  States  to  W.  G.  Entrekin,  for  his 
Oscillating  Enameler  for  Burnishing  Photographs,  Chicago,  July  16, 
1874. 

Photographers  will  see  that  we  have  a  first-class  article,  and  do 
not  wish  to  impose  upon  them  by  selling  a  press  that  will  not  work. 
We  guarantee  our  press  to  do  all  we  claim  for  it,  as  was  shown  sat- 
isfactorily at  the  Exhibition  at  Chicago,  where  the  press  was  exhib- 
ited and  worked. 

PRICE    LIST: 


6-inch  Roll,  $25;  10-inch,  $40;  14-inch,  $50;  18-inch,  $75. 


If  you 


nun,  >j>4y  ,  ±u-muii,  <f>^v ,  ii-uiwi,  *uwT  xo-iuuju,  «pii 
cannot  obtain  the  press  of  your  dealer,  send  your  order  to 

W.  G.  ENTREKIN, 

4382  &  4384  Main  St.,  Manayunk,  Philadelphia. 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 

Trade  Agents  for  Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler. 


Number  129. 


50  Cents. 


THE 


- 


PHILADELPHIA 


ftfltaDrapftiir. 


AN  ILLUSTRATED  MONTHLY  JOURNAL, 
DEVOTED  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 

THE  OFFICIAL  OKGAN  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGKA.PHIO 
ASSOCIATION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. 

September,  lS'Z-a:. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

BENERMAN    &    WILSON, 

PUBLISHEKS, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cheery  Sts. 


Subscriptions  received  by  all  News  and  Stock-Dealers. 

FIVE  DOLLARS  PER  ANNUM,  IN  ADVANCE. 


Sherman  &  Co.,  Printers,  Philadelphia. 


SOMETHING   NEW!     See  Advertisement  inside. 


SUMMARY    OP    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

The  Magic  Lantern 257 

Wet  Books 257 

Alum.    By  W.  H.  Sherman 258 

Views  Abroad  and  Across.    By  .Edward  L.  Wilson, 

IX 259 

Charles  W.  Hearn's  Formulae 265 

German  Correspondence.    By  Prof.  H.  Vogel,  Ph.D.  266 

Photography  in  France.    By  Ernest  Lacan 268 

Photography  in  Italy.    By  A.  Montague.. 271 

The  New  Book.    By  W.  L.  Shoemaker 273 


PAGE 

Mr  Hearn's  "Practical  Printer," 274 

Hints  under  the  Skylight.    By  R.  J.  Chute..... 276 

The  Exhibition  at  Chicago 277 

Class  in  Landscape  Photography 279 

Matters  of  the  N.  P.  A 280 

The  Sphynx 281 

Notes  In  and  Out  of  the  Studio.    By  G.  Wharton 
Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A 283 

Editor's  Table 286 


Embellishment. — Naples,  Italy.    Negatives  and  Prints  by  G.  Sommer,  Naples,  Italy. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s  Paper. 

Anderson,  J.  A.    Photographic  Apparatus. 

Anthony  &  Co.,  E.  &  H.  T.    The  Bowdish  Chair. 

Art  Publications. 

Benerman  &  Wilson.    Lantern  Slides.    Wet  Books. 

Bierstadt,  Charles.    Photo.  Views. 

Bigelow's  Album  op  Lighting  and  Posing. 

Brand  &  Co.,  E.  L.    Souvenir  Photogra  hs. 

Bullock  &  Crenshaw.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Cameo  Press,  The  Universal. 

Clemons,  Jno.  R.    Albumen  Paper.    Varnish. 

Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  A.  M.    Photograph  Cards. 

Cooper  &  Co.,  Chas.    Portrait  Lenses.  i 

Curtis,  G.  E.    Stereo.  Views. 

Damaged  Lantern  Slides. 

Dean,  John  &  Co.    Adamantean  Ferrotype  Plates. 

Entrekin,  W.  G.    Oscillating  Enameler. 

Faser,  C.    Frames. 

French,  B.  &  Co.    Voigtlander  Lenses,  &c. 

Gennert,  G.    Albumen  Paper,  &c. 

Gihon,  John  L.    Opaque  and  Cut-Outs. 

Griswold's  Life  Compositions  for  the  Stereoscope. 

Hance's  Photo.  Specialties. 

Hale,  Kilburn  &  Co.    Frames,  Mouldings,  &c. 

Hearn,  Chas.  W.    Collodio-Chloride. 

Hermagis'  Portrait  Objectives. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs. 

Improved  Photograph  Covers. 

Kilburn  Bros.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Lea's  Manual  of  Photography. 

Lewis,  R.  A.    Collodion. 

Liesegang,  E.    Albumen  Paper, 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 

Loeffler,  J.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Lcescher  &  Petsch.    A  New  Invoice  of  Studies. 

Magee,  James  F.  &  Co.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Marcy's  Sciopticon,  &c. 

Masonic  Temple,  Philadelphia.    Stereo.  Views. 

McAllister,  W.  Mitchell.    Manufacturing  Optician. 

McCollin,  Thos.  H.    Photographic  Materials. 

Moore,  Albert.    Solar  Printing. 


Mosaics,  1874. 

Moulton,  L.  V.    Rapid  Photo-Washer. 
Nason's  Background  Carriage,  Camera  Stand,  &c. 
Newell's  Improved  Bath-Holder. 
Pattberg,  Lewis  &  Bro.    Passepartouts,  &c 
Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 
Photographer's  Pocket  Reference-Book. 
Photographic  Publications. 
Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 
Powers  &  Weightman.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Premiums  for  1874,  for  New  Subscribers  to  "  Philadel- 
phia Photographer." 
Prize  Pictures. 

Rau,  Geo.    German  Albumen  Colors. 
Rice  &  Thompson.    Photo.  Stock  House. 
Robinson's  New  Photo.  Trimmer. 
Robinson's  Metallic  Guides. 
Rohaut  &  Hutinet.    Photographic  Mounts. 
Ross'  Portrait  and  View  Lenses. 
Rulofson's  Views. 

Ryan,  D.  J.    Photo.  Stock  Depot,  Chromos,  &c. 
Sauter,  G.    Passepartouts. 
Schwarze  &  Valk.    Photo.  Papers. 
Scovill  Manf'g.  Co.    Photographic  Materials. 
Seavey  L.  W.    Scenic  Artist,  Backgrounds,  &c. 
Snelling,  H.  H.    Lebanon  Rustic  Frame. 
"Something  New." 
Steinheil's  New  Aplanatic  Lenses. 
Stevens,  Chas.  W.    Photographic  Goods. 
The  Practical  Printer. 

Thornton,  Mrs.  Mary  A.    Photo.  Refrigerators. 
Vogel's  Hand-Book  of  Photography. 
Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papers. 
Weller's  Stereoscopic  Treasures. 
Wilson,  Charles  A.    Photographic  Goods. 
Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials,  &c. 
Willy  Wallach.    Albumen  Paper. 
Woodward,  D.  A.    Solar  Cameras. 
Zentmayer,  Joseph.    Lenses. 
Zimmerman  Bros.    Photographic  Stock  Depot. 


Wholesale  ^--"""^—^.i  n'  ^i„       ~~~~^  Ma,nttf<ie.t»rers  of 


LOOKING 
GLASS»« 

PICTURE 
FRAMES. 

Patented  Solid 
Ovals  and  Spandrels 

WAREROOMS, 

48  &  50  N.  6th  St. 


Walnut 

Mouldings 

BACKING, 

&c,  &c. 

Solid  Walnut  Work 
A  Specialty. 


FACTORIES, 

615  &  621  Filbert  St. 


tmtQ$  Jfadtp0Utttl  JSnlletin. 


SEIPTIEIMIBIEie,,    IBIXITZR^I 


NEW  ACCESSORIES. 


THE  ELEGANT 

KURTZ  GARDEN  BALUSTRADE. 

Pronounced  the  neatest  and  most  stylish  outdoor 
accessory  yet  seen. 

BOGARDUS  GARDEN  SEAT. 

Imitation  of  stone,  in  papier-mache. 

ANTIQUE  CARVED  CHAIRS, 

Two  styles;  one  of  which  can  be  used  as  a  stool,  by 
detaching  the  back. 

MORA  BALUSTRADE. 

A  fine  article. 


NEW   BACKGROUNDS 


KURTZ  POMPADOUR. 


BOGARDUS  GARDEN. 

No.  67.— Cabinet  style. 
"    68. — A  Standard  Interior. 
"    71. — Mora  Interior. 


Twenty  exhibitors  at  the  Chicago  Convention 
were  using  our  Backgrounds. 

A  good   Background  is  as  important  as 
good  chemicals. 


SEND    STAMP    FOR    SAMPLE    PRINTS. 

Address  LAFAYETTE  W.  SEAVEY,  Scenic  Artist, 

No.  8  Lafayette  Place,  New  York. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  REFRIGERATOR. 

Patented  July  18,  1871,  by  Mrs.  M.  A.  Thornton. 

It  is  generally  understood  by  photographers  that  the  chemicals  with  which  pictures  are  to  be  taken 
must  be  kept  quite  cool  to  insure  good  pictures,  and  as  a  common  ice-box  is  not  convenient,  I  have 
so  arranged  one  which  is  in  every  way  adapted  for  that  purpose,  having  a  permanent  place  for  the 
bath-tub,  one  for  the  collodion  bottles,  and  also  another  place  for  any  chemicals  which  are  required 
to  be  kept  cool.  Being  a  practical  artist  I  have  used  this  box  for  seven  years,  and  found  it  to  be  all 
that  I  recommend,  for  by  its  use  I  can  truly  say  that  it  has  saved  me  more  than  double  its  price  each 
year.  I  do  not  intend  to  manufacture  the  box  myself,  but  wish  to  sell  the  patent  right  to  any  one 
who  wishes  to  buy  it  and  manufacture.  I  will  sell  by  the  State,  Territory,  or  the  whole  of  the  United 
States  and  Territories  at  one  sale.  I  will  sell  as  reasonable  as  I  can  afford.  The  right  runs  for  seven- 
teen years  from  the  18th  day  of  July,  A.D.  1871.  Anyone  wishing  to  purchase  the  right,  please  notify 
me  of  the  same,  and  I  will  then  state  terms  of  the  sale. 

Mrs.  MARY  A.  THORNTON,  Perrysburg,  Wood  County,  Ohio. 
*    * 


OMETH 

NEW 


IS  A 


New  Advertising  Medium 


FOR    PHOTOGRAPHERS. 


BUY  SOME! 


> 

r 
pi 

r 

i— i 

w 
a 

pi 
pi 

o 
o 

> 

0 

PI 


s  s  ~  X 

P.    -j     s     © 

?  Pi  ft 

s 

o   b   2 


*<i 


^     a>     3 
CD     p 


3       T> 


B      * 


H  s- 


A      — '    CD 


9-  2.  51  o 


B    '"- 

-    ~   © 

3    -^    M 

CD      „.     ~ 
03ft 

c   ^    N 
^    o    © 

§  §  © 

2  2  " 
3  ^ 

S?» 

CJq*    ^     Ms 

3  P"   © 


50     <J 
cd    » 


CD      O 
3     o 


3     3 

—     CD 


2    8    o    a 


2   3  12   a 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  &  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


SOMETHING  NEW. 
SOMETHING  NEW. 
SOMETHING  NEW. 
SOMETHING  NEW. 
SOMETHING  NEW. 
SOMETHING  NEW. 


The  best  Advertising  Medium  a  Photogra- 
pher can  Possibly  Employ. 


SPECIMEN  COPY  FREE  ON  APPLICATION  TO  THE  PUBLISHERS. 

IT  INTBEESTS  ALL, 

WILL  MAKE  BUSINESS, 
WILL  SAVE  TIME, 

AND 

HELP  RAISE  PRICES. 

(See  Advertisement  on  opposite  Page.) 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Philadelphia,  Pa. 


THE 

Practical  Printer. 

A  NEW  WORK  ON  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PRINTING. 
By   CHAS.  W.   HEARN, 

A  gentleman  who  has  devoted  several  years  to  photographic  printing  especially,  and  who  is 
now  engaged  at  it  as  his  constant  occupation. 

The  work  gives  all  the  instructions  that  a  beginner  could  possibly  want 
in  detail,  and  is  what  the  title  indicates — practical. 

It  will  also  be  found  of  invaluable  service  to  any  photographic  printer,  be 
he  ever  so  skilled.     For  contents  see  opposite  page. 


OVER  500  COPIES   ARE   ALREADY   SOLD! 


TESTIMONIALS: 

"  I  consider  it  the  best  work  on  printing  and  toning  that  has  been  published,  or  at  least  that  has 
come  into  my  hands,  and  until  I  see  a  better  one  I  shall  give  it  the  first  place.  If  any  one  wishes  to 
be  helped  out  of  the  mud  let  him  read  it;  but  if  he  wants  to  stick  there  let  him  keep  his  money  in 
his  pocket,  and  stick  till  doomsday  if  he  likes." — John  R.  Clkmons,  Philadelphia. 

"I  have  read  it  with  a  great  deal  of  interest,  and  find  it  indispensable  to  the  student  photographer. 
It  contains  so  much  valuable  information  in  modern  photographic  printing  that  I  do  most  cheerfully 
recommend  its  usefulness  to  the  student  printer.  Its  cost  is  money  well  laid  out.'' — C.  D.  Mosher, 
Chicago. 

"It  will  be  of  untold  value  to  any  printer,  and  worth  more  practically  than  a  combination  of  all 
the  volumes  and  essays  on  printing  which  have  been  published  for  the  advancement  of  the  art." — H. 
J.  Rogers,  Hartford,  Conn. 

"  It  is  truly  what  it  claims,  a  thoroughly  practical  treatise  upon  that  most  important  branch  of  our 
art,  photographic  printing.  Mr.  Hearn  has  been  with  me  over  three  years  as  printer  and  toner,  and 
has  ever  manifested  the  greatest  interest  and  enthusiasm  in  his  work,  seeming  to  do  his  utmost  to  ex- 
cel and  advance  himself  continually  in  his  chosen  department  of  our  art  science.  It  seems  to  me 
that  the  merest  tyro  could  make  and  tone  good  prints  if  the  simple  directions  in  this  book  are  faith- 
fully followed.  Indeed,  this  volume  seems  to  fill  a  void  in  our  photographic  literature  that  it  has 
always  surprised  me  was  never  supplied  before." — J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

The  Photographic  News,  of  July  31st,  says  :  "In  the  work  before  us,  however,  silver  printing  and 
everything  connected  therewith  is  treated  most  exhaustively,  and  the  work  is  evidently  that  of  a 
practical  man  who  speaks  out  of  the  fulness  of  his  own  experience  in  every  branch  of  regular  work, 
as  well  as  with  familiarity  of  the  various  forms  of  fancy  printing,  which  have  prevailed  more  in 
America  than  in  this  country.  Mr.  Hearn  manifestly  thoroughly  understands  his  work,  and  is,  more- 
over, a  clear  and  vigorous  writer." 

The  British  Journal  of  Photography,  of  the  same  date,  says:  "  It  is  a  considerable  period  since  we 
rose  from  the  perusal  of  a  new  book  on  photography  with  feelings  of  greater  satisfaction  than  in  the 
present  instance;  and  we  appreciate  the  author  as  a  writer,  not  only  thoroughly  conversant  with  the 
subject,  but  as  very  willing  to  impart  to  those  less  skilled  the  knowledge  he  possesses,  and  who,  hap- 
pily, has  also  the  ability  to  do  this  in  a  singularly  lucid  and  attractive  manner.  '  The  Practical 
Printer'  is  well  'got  up,'  and  the  work  cannot  fail  of  being  acceptable  and  useful  to  all  classes  of 
photographers,  the  veteran  as  well  as  the  tyro  in  our  art-science." 

With  these  flattering  testimonials  the  work  needs  no  farther  recommendation  from  us.  We  are 
satisfied  that  it  will  stand  on  its  own  merits,  and  that  all  progressive  enterprising  photographers  every- 
where will  buy  and  read  the  book.      No  man  in  business  can  afford  to  be  without  it  in  his  gallery. 

A  fine  example  of  Photographic  Printing,  by  the  author,  ac- 
companies the  work,  from   negatives  by  F.  Giitekiuist,  Philada. 


PRICE,     e  2.5  O. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photographic  PnMere.  Seventh  and  Cherry,  PMla. 


The  Last  JYew  Book! 


THE  PRACTICAL  PRINTER. 

A  COMPLETE  MANUAL  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PRINTING 

ON   PLAIN   AND   ALBUMEN   PAPER,    AND    ON   PORCELAIN. 

Too  little  attention  has  heretofore  been  given  to  Photo- 
graphic Printing,  which  is  indeed  quite  as  important  a 
branch  of  the  art  as  negative  making. 

It  is  the  hopo  of  both  author  and  publishers  to  create  REFORM  in  this 
matter,  by  the  issue  of  this  work,  and  as  it  is  to  put  money  in  the  pockets 
of  all  who  read  it,  the  hope  is  that  it  will  be  generally  read. 


GOISTTEHsTTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  Printing  Room,  with  a  Plan.  The  Silver- 
ing and  Toning  Room,  with  a  Plan.  The  Dry- 
ing Room,  with  a  Plan. 

PART  I.— ALBUMEN  PAPER  PRINTING. 

The  Positive  Bath  for  Albumen  Paper.  Sil- 
vering the  Albumen  Paper.  Drying  the  Paper. 
Fuming  the  Paper.  Preservation  of  Sensitive 
Albumenized  Paper — Washed  Sensitive  Paper. 
Cutting  the  Paper.  The  Printing  Boards.  Keep- 
ing Tally.  Vignette  Printing  Blocks.  Treat- 
ment of  the  Negatives  before  Printing.  Filling 
of  the  Boards.  Fitting  Vignette  Boards  to  the 
Negatives  for  Printing.  Medallion  and  Arch- 
top  Printing.  Fancy  Pfinting.  Vignette  Cameo 
and  Medallion  Vignette  Cameo  Printing.  Print- 
ing the  Bendann  Backgrounds.  Printing  Intense 
Negatives.  Printing  Weak  Negatives.  A  Few 
More  Remarks  about  Printing — Treatment  of 
Broken  Negatives.  Cutting  the  Prints.  Wash- 
ing the  Prints.  Acidifying  the  Prints.  Toning 
Baths.  Artistic  Toning.  Fixing  Baths  and 
Fixing  Prints.  Washing  the  Prints.  Mounting 
the  Prints.     Finishing  the  Prints. 

Together  with  over  50  Wood  Cuts,  and  an  elegant  Cabinet  Portrait, 
from  negatives  by  Mr.  P.  Gutckunst,  printed  by  the  author,  Mr.  Chas.  W. 
EL  earn. 


PART  II.— PLAIN  PAPER  PRINTING. 

Salting  the  Paper.  Positive  Baths  for  Plain 
Salted  Paper.  Silvering  Plain  Salted  Paper. 
Drying,  Fuming,  and  Cutting  the  Paper.  Treat- 
ment of  the  Negatives  before  Printing.  Print- 
ing-in  False  Backgrounds.  General  Plain  Paper 
Printing.  Further  Treatment  of  the  Prints  after 
Printing.  Causes  of  Failures  in  Albumen  and 
Plain  Paper  Printing. 


PART  III.— PORCELAIN  PRINTING. 

Selection  of  the  Porcelain  Plates.  Cleaning 
of  the  Porcelain  Plates.  Albumenizing  the 
Porcelain  Plates.  Making  the  Porcelain  Collo- 
dion. Coating,  Fuming,  and  Drying  the  Plates. 
Porcelain  Printing  Boards.  Placing  the  Sensi- 
tive Plate  on  the  Board  for  Printing.  Printing 
Vignette  Porcelains.  Printing  Medallion  Prr- 
celains.  Washing  the  Porcelains.  Toning  the 
Porcelain.  Fixing  the  Porcelain.  Final  Wash- 
ing of  the  Porcelain.  Drying  and  Tinting  of  the 
Porcelain.  Vnrnishing  the  Porcelain.  Causes 
of  Failures  in  Porcelain  Printing. 


It  is  selling  splendidly! 


Hundreds  already  gone! 


MAILED  POST-PAID  ON  RECEIPT  OF  $2.50,  BY  ANY  DEALER,  OR 
BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

PHOTOGBAPHIC  PUBLISHERS, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


IMPORTANT  TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 


TARE  MICE 

WHAT    PARTIES    SAY,    WHO    ARE     USING 

J.  A.  ANDERSON'S  CAMERA   BOXES. 

Office  of  Chicago  Photographic  and  Copying  Company, 
320,  322,  324,  &  326  State  Street. 
J.  A.  Anderson. — Dear  Sir: — The  10x12  Conical  Bellows  Camera  you  made  us  gives  entire  satisfaction.  It 
is  finely  finished,  and  the  working  parts  are  all  complete  in  their  action.  We  now  have  seven  of  your  boxes 
in  our  operating  department  and  shall  discard  all  others  (the  so-called  "Success")  for  your  make,  as  we  will 
save  the  price  in  repairs.  They  are  all  in  constant  use  every  day,  and  stand  the  test  better  than  any  other  make 
we  have  used.  For  durability,  accuracy,  and  cheapness,  they  certainly  have  no  rivals;  they  compare  favorably 
with  the  A.  O.  Co.'s  boxes,  and  are  far  superior  to  anything  else  in  the  market. 

(Signed),  JAS.  S.  NASON. 


0".  JL.   _A.liTIDElK,S02sr'S 

NEW  POSITION  AND  BABY  CHAIR.  COMBINED. 


THE 
HANDSOMEST, 


COMPLETE, 

AND 
CHEAPEST 


PIECE  OF  APPARATUS  EVER  OFFERRD  TO  THE  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


BUY  NO  IMITATION. 


SEND  FOR  PMICE  LIST. 


Photographers  can  save  from   10  to  20  per  cent,  by  sending  direct  to  the  manufactory  for  Apparatus. 

TESTIMONIAL. 

Elgin,  April  5th,  1874. 
Mr.  J.  A.  Anderson. — Sir : — The  Camera  Boxes  prove  to  be  all  that  I  expected.    The  11  x  14  is  superior  to  any 
that  I  ever  used ;  it  is  a  beauty,  and  I  am  proud  of  it.     The  cheapness,  too,  is  an  item  especially  with  meat 
this  time,  having  lost  all  the  contents  of  my  gallery  by  fire.     I  am  obliged  to  you  for  your  favor. 

Yours,  G.  H.  Sherman. 

(>e®"  See  other  testimonials  in  special  advertisements). 

J.    A.    ANDERSON,    (Late  Anderson  &  Bixby), 

65  East  Indiana  Street,  Chicago. 


NASON'S  NOVELTIES 

LEAD  THE  VAN! 

ORDERS  FOR  30/     GASES    0F  THE 

"NASONIAN  CUT-OUTS" 

"Were  taken  at  Chicago  in  two  days — Thursday  and  Friday — and  on  our  arrival  home  the 
following  Wednesday,  we  found  NINETEEN"  letters,  containing  orders  from  parties  who 
saw  the  beautiful  specimens  on  exhibition. 

The  Nasonian  is  the  latest  novelty  in  ornamental  printing,  and  exactly  fills  a  want  long 
felt,  and  will  have  a  larger  and  quicker  sale  than  any  other  one  article  ever  offered  the 
American  Photographer  ;  for  the  simple  reason  that  they  are  sold  so  low. 

There  is  no  cut-out  in  the  market  that  is  got  up  or  put  up  in  as  good  style  as  the  Nasonian. 
The  paper  used  is  of  a  superior  non-actinic  quality.  The  designs  (copyrighted)  are  unique 
and  novel,  and  at  the  same  time  neat  and  artistic. 

Through  the  suggestions  of  Messrs.  Kocher,  Mosher,  Brand,  and  other  leading  photogra- 
phers, we  have  added  two  new  Grecian  designs,  and  will  hereafter  put  them  up  in  THREE, 
instead  of  two  different  sized  cases,  viz: 

CASE  ONE  contains  80  pieces — 40  complete  cut-outs,  20  sizes,  and  10  different  styles — 
for  carte-de-visites  only. 

CASE  TWO  contains  same  number  and  styles  as  the  above,  but  with  3Jx4£,  to  3|x  h\ 
openings,  suitable  for  cabinet  cards,  4-4  and  8  x  10  frames. 

CASE  THREE  contains  same  styles  as  above,  but  with  5x7,  5J  x  7h,  and  6x8  openings, 
suitable  for  4-4,  8  x  10,  10  x  12,  and  11  x  14  frames. 

EACH  CASE  contains  cut-outs  especially  arranged  for  groups,  and  are  sold  at  the 
extreme  low  price  of  two  dollars. 

ALWAYS  try  to  be  the  first  in  introducing  NEW  STYLES  to  your  patrons  ;  and  if 
your  dealer  is  not  enterprising  enough  to  have  these  goods  in  stock  now,  don't  wait,  but 
enclose  two  dollars  to  us,  and  you  will  get  either  set  wanted  by  return  mail  so  quick  you'll 
think  you've  had  them  six  months. 

We  will  send  the  THREE  SETS  COMPLETE  to  any  part  of  America  (express  paid) 
on  receipt  of  $6.00. 

We  have  taken  great  care  in  arranging  and  packing  these  cut-outs  in  elegant  pasteboard 
cases,  therefore  we  cannot  change  or  break  packages. 

ORDERS  FOR  THE  ABOVE,  AND  FOR 

Nason's  Background  Carriage,  Universal  Light  Modifier, 
Non-Ague  Camera  Stand,  Magic  Mirror,  &c, 

Will  receive  prompt  attention  by  being  addressed  to  the 

NASON  NOVELTY  COMPANY, 

>6@=  See  our  other  advertisements.  ^  "1/  U AIL  15  Ufof    (J  JUL  (J, 


HERMAGIS' 

Celebrated  French 

PORTRAIT 
OBJECTIVES 

These  celebrated  lenses,  which  are 

USED  BY  MONS.  ADAM  SALOMON,  OF  PARIS, 

exclusively  for  making  his 

WORLD-RENOWNED  PORTRAITS ! 

have  been  difficult  to  get,  on  account  of  the  demand  for  them  in  Europe. 

Having  been  appointed  his  American  trade  agents  by  Mons.  Hermagis,  we  have  pleasure 
in  announcing  to  American  photographers  that  we  have  just  received  an  invoice  of  his 
lenses  for 

The  Salomon  Style,  8  x  10  size,  $175. 

For  Cabinet  Size,  extra  quick,  $110. 

For  Cabinet  Size,  quick,  $100. 

For  Carte  Size,  extra  quick,  $55. 

For  Carte  Size,  quick,  $45. 


ALSO, 


Hermagis'  Inimitable  Focusing  Glasses,  $6.50. 


These  lenses  are  unsurpassed  by  any  other.     Sent  on  trial  to  responsible  parties, 
C.  0.  D.,  and  instructions  to  Express  Company  to  hold  money  one  week  for  trial. 

BENEKMAN  &  WILSON, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


Sfei 


THE 


§JhiWtlpIna  ^itiUpnyhib 


Vol.  XL  SEPTEMBER,  1874. 

Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1874, 
By  BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


No.  12  9. 


THE  MAGIC  LANTERN. 

The  more  we  think  upon  the  subject,  the 
more  are  we  confirmed  in  our  opinion,  that 
the  magic  lantern  is  going  to  become  more 
popular  as  a  source  of  family  instruction 
and  amusement  than  the  stereoscope  ever 
was.  Of*course  this  will  be  attained  by 
degrees,  and  perhaps  slowly,  but  it  is  bound 
to  come.  As  a  picture,  nothing  equals  a 
well-made  positive  on  glass.  It  gives  every- 
thing in  the  negative,  even  more  than  the 
eye  can  see ;  and  then  when  one  enlarges  it 
upon  trre  screen  by  means  of  the  lantern, 
all  may  assemble  around  it  and  enjoy  it, 
instead  of  only  one  being  enabled  to  sit 
down  selfishly  alone  to  see  it,  as  is  the  case 
with  the  stereoscope. 

Now  one  of  the  first  steps  towards  bring- 
ing about  what  we  predict  is,  the  making 
popular  the  magic  lantern  as  a  source  of 
amusement  by  photographers — they  are  the 
ones  to  do  it  assuredly — giving  family  lan- 
tern exhibitions  on  the  plan  suggested  by 
Mr.  Hesler,  namely,  in  private  parlors,  and 
in  halls,  lyceums,  churches,  &c.  We  know 
of  several  very  eminent  photographers  who, 
for  several  years,  have  very  quietly  been 
coining  money  in  this  way,  and  who  con- 
tinue to  follow  it  up  vigorously.  We  want 
to  show  others  how  to  do  the  same  thing. 

There  is  not  a  photographer  in  any  town 
of  five  hundred  inhabitants   but  can  make 


money  in  the  same  way;  and  the  best  of  it 
is,  it  can  be  done  at  that  season  of  the  year 
when  his  photographic  business  is  dull. 
For  the  reason,  then,  that  we  "see  a  dollar 
in  it"  for  the  fraternity,  and  for  our  honest 
selves,  we  have  determined  upon  keeping 
the  subject  of  the  magic  lantern  before  our 
readers,  for  the  coming  season  at  least.  And 
in  order  that  we  may  not  infringe  upon  the 
rights  of  those  not  interested,  we  will  do 
the  thing  at  our  own  expense,  by  adding  a 
supplement  to  our  magazine,  and  to  which 
we  call  your  earnest  attention. 

We  are  sure  that  sooner  or  later,  you 
must  take  this  matter  up,  and  we  will  en- 
deavor to  place  such  information  in  your 
hands  as  will  enable  you  to  do  it  in  the 
most  economical  and  best  way.  For  such 
information  refer  to  The  Magic  Lantern. 


WET  BOOKS. 

The  books  damaged  by  water  at  the  time 
of  the  fire  in  our  office,  last  March,  are  not 
yet  exhausted  ;  indeed,  they  have  continued 
to  develop  to  an  extent  far  beyond  anything 
we  have  ever  seen  by  any  process.  We 
supposed  at  one  time  that  we  had  disposed 
of  most  of  them,  but  upon  examination  of 
those  that  had  been  placed  upon  the  shelves 
as  perfect,  we  found  that  the  dampness  had 
been  lurking  there,  and  doing  its  work 
most  effectually.     The  bindings  had  been 


17 


258 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHO  TOGEAPHEE. 


attacked  by  roaches  and  mould,  by  the  fer- 
mentation of  the  paste;  under  these  circum- 
stances we  were  obliged  to  consign  them  to 
the  stock  of  wet  books.     It  now  comprises — 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 

Anderson's  Photo-Comic  Allmynack. 

Mosaics,  from  1866  to  1874,  inclusive. 

How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph. 

Dr.  Vogel's  Reference-Book. 

Leaf  Prints,  or  Glimpses  of  Photography. 

Bigelow's  Album, 

Volume  4  (1867),  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

Volume  8  (1871),  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

Volume  1  (1871),  Photographic  World. 

Swan's  Carbon  Process. 

Carbon  Manual  and  Silver  Sunbeam. 

The  most  of  these  books  are  but  slightly 
damaged,  and  are  just  as  good  as  new,  as 
far  as  use  is  concerned. 

"We  propose  to  put  them  up  in  lots,  and 
at  prices  that  will  be  within  the  reach  of 
all.  For  further  particulars  see  our  adver- 
tisement. 


ALUM. 

BY    W.    H.    SHERMAN. 

It  was  announced  before  the  National 
Photographic  Association  at  Chicago,  by 
Mr.  demons,  that  he  had  discovered  a  sim- 
ple process  by  which  the  hyposulphite  may 
be  eliminated  from  silver  prints,  after  fixing, 
in  the  short  time  of  eight  minutes.  All  that 
is  required  to  insure  this  most  important  re- 
sult is  to  immerse  the  prints,  directly  from 
the  fixing  bath,  in  a  saturated  solution  of 
alum,  whence,  after  removal  and  rinsing 
in  a  few  changes  of  water,  the  work  is  ac- 
complished, which  otherwise  requires  much 
labor  and  many  hours'  time,  and  is  even 
then  but  imperfectly  performed. 

I  am  unable  to  say  which  was  most  to  be 
wondered  at,  on  that  memorable  occasion, 
the  comparative  lack  of  enthusiasm  with 
which  the  announcement  was  received,  or 
the  quiet  and  undemonstrative  manner  in 
which  the  discovery  was  made  known.  But 
more  wonderful  and  surprising  than  either 
are  the  simplicity  and  completeness  of  the 
process. 

Here  is  the  problem  which  has  baffled  the 
inquiry  of  investigators  ever  since  it  be- 
came known  that  silver  prints  would  fade, 


until  not  only  is  the  possibility  of  their  per- 
manence wellnigh  despaired  of,  but  the  pub- 
lic are  beginning  to  intimate,  in  a  manner 
nernotto  be  misunderstood,  that  something 
must  be  done  to  remedy  the  difficulty.  The 
need  of  some  safe  and  sure  method  of  re- 
moving the  hyposulphite  from  the  prints  is 
pressing.  Practically  to  accomplish  this 
by  washing  is  impossible.  If  the  prints  are 
washed  rapidly  some  of  the  hypo  remains, 
and  its  presence  may  be  detected  by  a  suit- 
able test.  If  they  are  washed  a  long  time 
they  at  length  turn  yellow  in  the  water, 
probably  by  decomposition  of  hyposulphite 
and  liberation  of  sulphur.  It  remains  then 
to  choose  one  or  the  other  born  of  the  di- 
lemma. One  is  to  remove  the  prints  from 
the  water  in  a  short  time,  with  their  bril- 
liancy unimpaired,  but  with  hypo  in  them; 
the  other  is  to  wash  them  until,  if  there  is 
no  hypo  in  them,  they  are  more  or  less  yel- 
low with  sulphur  from  decomposed  hypo. 
Of  the  two  the  former  is,  unquestionably, 
the  better  choice.  In  either  case  they  will 
fade. 

Is  it  possible  that  photographers  are  so 
indifferent  to  the  future  fate  of  their  pro- 
ductions as  to  fail  to  appreciate  the  discov- 
ery that  enables  them,  in  so  simple  and  easy 
a  manner,  to  remove  the  cause  of  the  mis- 
chief, which,  if  not  remedied,  will  sooner 
or  later  seal  the  doom  of  silver  prints  ? 

The  hypo  all  removed  and  the  washing 
completed  "in  eight  minutes!"  It  can  be 
done.  There  is  no  mistake  about  it.  There 
is  no  longer  even  the  shadow  of  an  excuse 
for  photographers  palming  off  pictures  with 
hypo  in  them.  But  little  water  is  needed 
for  the  prints  after  they  have  been  in  the 
alum.  One  or  two  pailfuls  will  answer  if 
it  happen  to  be  scarce. 

As  to  the  alum  solution,  it  may  be  used 
over  and  over  again.  Mr.  Clemons  did  not 
tell  us  this,  but  it  is  so,  nevertheless.  Take 
a  strong  barrel  with  wooden  hoops,  say  a 
whisky  barrel,  and  into  it  put  a  bushel  of 
alum.  Fill  the  barrel  with  water,  and  stir 
with  a  broom-handle  until  no  more  will  dis- 
solve. This  will  last  your  lifetime.  After 
fixing,  put  your  prints  from  the  hypo  right 
into  the  barrel ;  or,  if  more  convenient, 
drain  off  the  hypo,  and  then  dip  out  enough 
of  the  alum-water  in  a  wooden  bucket,  and 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHER. 


259 


pour  over  the  prints.  After  stirring  and 
soaking  the  prints,  the  alum  may  be  poured 
back,  and  stirred  up  with  the  rest.  It  may 
then  be  left  to  settle. 

It  will  be  observed,  after  immersing  the 
prints  in  the  solution  of  alum,  that  the 
liquid  will  assume  a  milky  appearance,  and 
the  sense  of  smell  will  easily  detect  the  odor 
of  burning  sulphur.  The  former  is  sulphur 
from  the  decomposed  hypo,  and  the  latter 
is  sulphurous  acid  from  the  same  source. 
After  the  prints  are  removed  from  the  alum- 
water  and  rinsed,  dry  them  thoroughly,  and 
burn  them. 

The  alum  "  eliminates  "  the  hypo,  by  con- 
verting it  into  sulphate  of  soda,  sulphur, 
sulphurous  acid,  and  water.  This  com- 
pletely disposes  of  the  hyposulphite.  The 
sulphur  being  insoluble,  the  portion  in  the 
prints  when  liberated  by  the  alum  remains 
in  the  prints.  This  is  the  chief  objection 
to  Mr.  Clemons's  process.  The  sulphur 
must  be  "eliminated"  or  the  prints  will 
fade.  This  may  be  said  to  bi  an  established 
fact.  Sulphur,  in  a  state  of  minute  divis- 
ion, especially  when  associated  with  organic 
matter,  oxidizes  in  the  air.  This,  it  is 
known,  will  cause  paper  to  become  rotten, 
and  this  is  believed  to  be  the  cause  of  the 
fading  of  silver  prints  when  a  trace  of  hypo 
is  left  in  them. 

Whatever  method  is  employed  to  remove 
the  hypo  from  the  prints,  it  is  essential  that 
the  process,  by  which  the  elimination  is 
effected,  do  not  introduce  some  substance  or 
substances  equally  or  more  injurious  in  the 
place  of  that  which  is  eliminated. 


VIEWS  ABROAD  AND  ACROSS. 

BY    EDWARD    L.    WILSON. 

IX. 

From  Rome  to  Naples  by  rail  direct. 
The  most  of  the  journey  was  made  in  the 
night,  and  two  jabbering  Italians  served  as 
a  sure  preventive  of  sleep.  When  two 
hours  or  so  from  Naples  the  train  stopped 
at  the  fortified  city  of  Capua,  and  I  got 
out,  untied  and  untwisted  myself,  and 
caught  my  first  view  of  Vesuvius !  The 
sun  was  just  rising,  lighting  up  and  color- 
ing with  a  crimson  hue  the  arreat  length  of 


The  result  of  which  was. 


cloud  which  the  old  volcano  was  pouring 
forth  from  its  crater.  The  peasantry  were 
moving  lazily  along  the  roadway  to  their 
daily  toil — some  with  their  little  donkeys 
so  completely  covered  up  with  their  load 
that  nothing  but  head  and  tail  could  be  seen, 
the  gentleman  peasant  seated  on  top  of  all, 
while  in  the  rear  walked  the  lady  peasant, 
whose  duty  it  was  to  twist  the  tail  of  the 
poor  brute  and  be. 
labor  him  with  a 
club,  in  order  to  in- 
crease (?)  his  speed. 
Donkey  nature 
has  always  been  a 
subject  of  stud}'  with 
me.  I  noticed  a  pe- 
culiar feature  in  the 
character  of  the  Na- 
ples donkey.  He 
would  first  bear  a 
great  deal  of  tail-twisting  and  beating  by 
the  lady  peasantess  very  patiently,  until  the 
aforesaid  peasantess  would  be  thrown  off 
her  guard,  and  give  a  most  cruel  twist,  when 
donkey  would  put  out  his  head  at  an  angle 
of  45°,  protrude  his  ears  at  right  (and  left) 
angles,  and  with  an  unearthly  bray  start 
upon  a  peculiar  gait,  neither  a  trot  nor  a  run, 
but  a  jolt,  the  result  of  which  was  sure  to  be 
the  spilling  off  of  the  gentleman  on  top  of 
the  load  and  much  of  the  load,  together 
with  a  disrespectful  distance  being  caused 
between  woman  and  beast.  I  always  sym- 
pathized with  the  donkey. 

Great  vineyards  and  groves  of  fig  trees 
surrounded  us  in  all  directions,  and  the 
scene  was  a  most  picturesque  one.  A  whole 
drove  of  beggars  awaited  us  at  the  station. 
A  young  girl  with  a  child  selected  rne  as 
her  victim,  and  she  seemed  to  say  by  her 
gestures  that  she  would  be  compelled  to  cut 
her  throat  then  and  there,  immediately,  un- 
less I  gave  her  the  wherewithal  to  purchase 
maccaroni,  so  to  avoid  seeing  a  tragedy  I — 
entered  the  car,  and  the  train  moved  on. 
We  passed  through  a  country  where  all 
things  seemed  to  grow  in  wild  luxuriance 
without  much  apparent  cultivation. 

In  due  season  we  reached  Naples,  and  I 
was  inhaling  the  lava-dust,  and  the  cool 
breezes  of  the  beautiful  blue  bay  were  blow- 
ing upon  me.     Truly  this  is  the  most  pic- 


260 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


turesque  of  all  the  cities  I  have  seen.  It  is 
ten  times  fuller  of  life  than  Rome,  but  then 
you  know  Rome  is  Rome,  and  although  its 
streets  are  not  so  full  of  living  pictures  as 
those  of  Naples,  it  does  contain  such  gems 
as  are  worth  a  long  travel  to  see.  Now  let 
us  take  a  stroll  into  and  about  this  curious 
city  of  lava-dust  and  bay  breezes. 

First,  a  look  out  of  the  window.  Our 
hotel  is  named  after  the  illustrious  father  of 
our  country,  Washington,  and  it  is  situated 
right  on  the  bay.  At  my  feet  is  the  most 
beautiful  bay,  whose  waters  are  coming  in 
whispering  some  adventure  made  the  night 
before  out  in  the  sea,  which  stretches  out  to 
the  right  as  far  as  the  eye  can  reach.  Across 
from  us  stands  out  against  the  horizon  the 
dim  outlines  of  the  Island  of  Capri.  Now 
to  the  left,  following  the  magnificent  curve 
of  the  bay,  over  the  housetops  of  the  noisy 
city,  and  we  see  Pompeii  in  the  distance; 
then  up  and  lo !  Vesuvius  belching  forth 
her  clouds  of  vapor,  and  sending  them 
across  the  valleys  and  the  neighboring  peaks 
without  rest.  What  a  variety !  Would 
you,  yourself,  see  the  shadow  of  the  sub- 
stance? You  shall.  But  first  a  walk;  and 
woe  betide  you  if  you  attempt  to  walk  in 
Naples.  Ere  you  have  paced  a  hundred 
yards  you  are  beset  by  a  drove  of  hackmen, 
who  fight  and  scramble  with  each  other  for 
a  word  with  you.  And  here  are  all  grades 
of  conveyances,  and  all  sorts  of  teams.  The 
city  is  apparently  built  on  the  upheavals  of 
some  earthquake,  or  the  mounds  of  debris 
of  some  volcanic  eruption.  The  streets  are 
very  narrow,  and  the  buildings  very  high, 
and  at  each  window  is  a  balcony.  Really 
one  must  conclude  that  the  average  Nea- 
politan would  rather  do  without  water  than 
"go  short"  on  a  balcony.  As  to  water, 
there  is  the  "  beautiful  blue  bay,"  but  what 
would  the  bay  be  without  a  balcony  on 
which  to  sit  and  enjoy  it?  Water  is  use- 
less an}r  way,  for  the  lava-dust  flies  con- 
stantly, and  what  is  the  necessity  of  washing 
it  off?  Labor  lost.  On  these  balconies  the 
people  seem  to  live.  You  may  see  them 
seated  there  at  all  sorts  of  work.  The 
party  in  story  No.  13  sits  and  peels  his 
melons,  and  drops  his  rinds  down  upon  the 
head  of  the  man  in  No.  12,  and  he  in  turn 
out  of  pure  revenge  hurls  them  down  upon 


No.  11,  and  so  on.  The  man  who  dwells 
upon  the  ground  floor  is  the  poorest  off  of 
all,  for  he  has  no  balcony.  He  moves  his 
work-bench  out  upon  the  pavement,  and 
gets  a  fuller  share  of  lava-dust,  and  of 
melon-rinds.  At  each  floor,  in  season,  are 
hung  great  bunches  of  green  melons  and 
red  peppers  to  ripen  in  the  sun.  They  look 
very  pretty,  and  break  up  the  dull  monot- 
ony of  the  balconies.  The  street  cries  of 
Naples  attract  one  first.  Almost  everyone 
who  has  anything  to  sell  or  give  away — the 
hackmen,  the  donkey-drivers — all  seem  to 
demonstrate  by  the  word  of  a  very  loud 
mouth.  They  all  talk  in  Italics.  One  can 
see  more  curious  things  here  than  in  any 
other  Italian  city  doubtless,  but  alas  I  I  dare 
not  attempt  to  tell  you  of  them.  It  has  been 
better  done  by  better  men  in  books  of  travel. 

One  of  the  main  objects  of  interest  here 
is  the  National  Museum,  but  having  seen 
so  many  other  collections,  it  was  tedious  to 
me  until  I  came  to  the  department  devoted 
to  the  relics  of  Pompeii.  But  as  we  shall 
go  to  Pompeii  together,  let  us  wait  for  a 
few  words  concerning  them.  In  the  na- 
tional collection  are  some  admirable  paint- 
ings and  sculpture,  enough  to  occupy  one 
delightfully  for  a  week.  Next  to  this  in 
interest  is  the  old  monastery  of  San  Martino, 
which  is  situated  on  an  eminence  overlook- 
ing the  city.  It  was  a  terrifically  hot, 
dusty  climb  to  reach  it  via  the  spiral  road- 
way, but  we  were  well  rewarded  for  our' 
pains.  The  building  is  a  very  rich  one. 
The  cloisters  the  most  suberb  of  any  I  have 
seen,  sixty  marble  Doric  columns  support- 
ing them.  The  interior  of  the  monastery 
is  adorned  with  fine  pictures,  the  "  Descent 
from  the  Cross,"  by  Spagnoletto,  being  the 
gem.  The  sculpture  and  the  marble  mosaic 
pavement  are  extremely  rich,  excelling  in 
style  anything  outside  of  Florence  and 
Rome.  About  $5,000,000  were  expended 
in  erecting  this  grand  monument  to  the 
fine  arts.  In  the  "Treasury"  we  saw  an 
unusual  number  of  curious  relics,  including 
a  large  number  of  dressed-up  skeletons, 
with  "  dead  men's  bones  "  in  abundance. 

But  oh  !  the  view  from  the  garden  was 
what  enchanted  me.  Naples  lay  at  our 
feet,  and  the  shouts  from  her  streets  sounded 
most  strangely.     Her  housetops  are  mostly 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


261 


flat,  and  gardens  cover  many  of  them.  Be- 
yond was  the  beautiful  bay,  dotted  with 
sails  in  all  directions,  far  out  to  sea.  Op- 
posite us  stood  out  Capri,  as  if  rising  from 
the  sea,  and  to  the  left  wondrous  Vesuvius, 
steaming  away  and  looking  promising  for 
the  morrow.  The  sleepy  Apennines  lifted 
up  their  gray  heads  in  the  distance,  and 
between  us  a  hundred  and  one  suburban 
cities  and  villages.  All  this  we  saw  from 
one  of  the  balconies  of  the  monastery.  A 
photographer  was  there  too,  and  being  a 
German  I  was  able  to  converse  with  him. 
He  was  an  employe  of  Mr.  G-.  Sornmer,  of 
Naples,  and  I  at  once  determined  on  having 
this  grand  scene  pictured  for  the  readers  of 
the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  whom,  be 
assured,  I  wished  for  one  and  all,  whenever 
I  saw  any  of  the  wondrous  beauties  of 
nature  and  of  art,  such  as  I  have  been 
privileged  to  feast  upon  during  the  past 
few  weeks;  and,  my  readers,  if  you  will 
turn  to  "  our  picture  "  this  month,  you  will 
have  an  idea  of  what  a  grand  view  I  wit- 
nessed on  this  happy  afternoon.  The  nega- 
tives were  put  at  my  service,  and  the  prints 
made  in  Naples  by  Mr.  Sommer,  who  pre- 
ferred to  print  them  himself.  I  found  our 
German  friend  working  under  considerable 
difficulty.  I  asked  him  to  show  me  some 
of  his  negatives,  which  he  willingly  did. 
"  These,"  he  said,  pointing  to  quite  a  num- 
ber which  were  leaning  against  one  of  the 
grand  old  columns  of  the  cloisters,  "are 
failures."  What !  all  made  to-day  ?  I  asked. 
"Yes,"  he  replied.  I  suggested  that  he 
surely  could  not  have  a  more  desirable  day 
than  this  ;  but  he  showed  me  his  camera  box 
and  his  tent,  and  then  I  began  to  under- 
stand his  failures,  for  they  were  poor  con- 
traptions. I  think  if  the  American  Optical 
Company  would  open  a  branch  at  Naples, 
that  there  would  be  less  of  bad  negatives 
made.  I  found  nothing  peculiar  about  the 
working  of  this  man.  He  coated  his  plates 
with  collodion,  developed  with  iron,  fixed 
with  hypo,  and  fogged  a  great  many  of  his 
plates.  He  was  not  a  clean,  careful  worker, 
but  he  did  get  an  occasional  clean,  good 
plate,  as  our  picture  witnesses,  for  he 
couldn  't  help  it.  He  was  a  cheerful  fellow  and 
an  obliging  one,  and  his  lunch  of  figs  and 
bread  and  wine  were  placed  at  my  service. 


As  in  Venice  and  Eome,  and  in  fact  all 
of  these  old  cities,  photography  is  largely 
practiced,  for  every  traveller  wishes  to  carry 
away  the  shadows  of  the  things  which  he 
has  seen  in  these  curious  places.  In  Naples, 
the  largest  producer  is  Mr.  Sommer,  and 
some  of  his  results  show  that  he  does  not 
rely  alone  upon  our  German  friend  of  the 
monastery  to  make  his  negatives.  Mr. 
Sommer  has  a  very  extensive  salesroom  on 
one  of  the  principal  streets,  where  a  very 
fine  display  is  made,  but  his  manufactory, 
so  to  speak,  is  in  the  Monte  de  Dio,  and 
well  repaid  a  visit.  The  establishment  is  a 
very  extensive  one,  and  is  supplied  with  all 
the  necessities  for  making  excellent  results 
in  any  quantity.  One  feels  somewhat  dis- 
appointed in  visiting  these  places,  to  find 
matters  worked  so  much  similar  to  our  own 
large  photographic  establishments.  Pho- 
tography is  photography  the  same  every- 
where, more  or  less,  but  in  America  it  is, 
without  boasting,  surely  ahead  in  many 
respects. 

From  the  monastery  one  day  we  drove  to 
Puteoli,  the  ancient  city  where  St.  Paul 
found  refuge  after  his  shipwreck,  and  where 
still  stands  the  ruins  of  the  ancient  temple 
of  Neptune,  and  the  Temple  of  Serapis,  first 
discovered  A.D.  1538.  The  old  amphi- 
theatre, too,  we  wandered  through  and 
through,  where  Nero  once  held  his  gladia- 
torial exhibitions.  The  old  town  itself  is  a 
most  curious  one,  and  the  populace  as  curi- 
ous. I  wish  I  had  a  picture  for  you  of  one 
of  the  old  fountains,  surrounded  as  I  saw 
it  by  a  hundred  or  more  water-bearers 
with  their  urns  on  their  heads  and  shoulders. 
Near  here  is  the  still 
acti  ve  volcano  of  Sol- 
fatara,  down  into 
whose  crater  we 
crept  to  its  very 
mouth,  where  the 
dreadful  fire  was 
belching  forth  with 
a  thundering  noise 
more  fearful  than  a 
score  of  fog-horns, 
and   where    a    stick 


A  wicked,  half-naked 
Italian. 


poked  into  the  hot  scoriae  would  cause  the 
flame  to  belch  forth  in  a  hundred  places. 
A    wicked,    half-naked    Italian    threw    a 


262 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGE  APHEE. 


heavy  stone  upon  the  earth,  and  intimated 
that  unless  we  gave  him  some  money  he 
would  knock  a  hole  clean  through  (which 
would  have  been  easy,  for  the  earth  sounded 
very  thin  there),  and  send  us  to  "  I'diable." 
There  has  been  "a  coolness"  between  us 
ever  since.  I  was  glad  to  get  away  from 
the  sulphurous  place,  but  I  was  also  glad  to 
see  a  volcano  in  such  beautiful  operation, 
though  mild  to  what  it  has  been.  All 
around  us  hot  streams  of  alum  and  sulphur 
were  running  down  the  sides  of  the  moun- 
tain. 

At  evening  we  found  the  drive  back  to 
Naples,  along  the  bay,  a  most  fascinating 
one.  On  the  way  we  passed  through  the 
Grotto  of  Posilipo,  a  strange  sort  of  a  tun- 
nel, through  an  upheaval  of  matter,  doubt- 
less from  some  ancient  volcano.  Along  the 
street  San  Lucia  next,  which  is  in  reality 
the  quay  along  the  bay,  where  Neapolitan 
life  is  seen  to  perfection.  Oh  for  the 
camera  !  Women  and  children,  gross  and 
by  the  gross.  Sailors  from  all  parts  of  the 
South  and  East ;  ships  from  the  same ;  here 
and  there  a  group  of  market  people,  with 
their  wares  spread  upon  the  ground,  dozing 
as  they  awaited  their  patrons — a  motley 
scene  indeed.  It  cost  us  something  to  get 
through  it,  for  we  were  besieged  by  beggars 
of  all  ages  and  grades.  The  usual  share  of 
lava-dust,  and  the  breezes  off  the  "  beautiful 
blue  bay,"  are  enjoyed  here  by  these  lazy 
creatures.  They  are  free  to  all.  "  Do  they 
ever  wash  the  dirt  off?"  Sooner  would  an 
Egyptian  wash  in  holy  Nile  water,  than  a 
loyal  Italian  desecrate  his  "beautiful  blue 
bay,"  by  taking  any  portion  of  it  to  wash, 
in.     Volcanoes  and  earthquakes,  never  !  . 

Our  ride  up  Vesuvius  was  a  most  eventful 
one.  We  mounted  our  ponies  at  Pompeii 
one  morning  early,  and  through  the  dusty 
villages  and  long,  walled  roads  and  fig 
orchards  and  vineyards,  we  went,  until 
nearly  half  way  up.  My  pony  was  small, 
and  he  sank  nearly  a  foot  into  the  lava- 
dust  or  scoriae.  My  legs  being  long,  my 
feet  scooped  up  this  scoriae,  and  we  had  a 
dusty  time  of  it.  The  road  was  a  winding, 
ortuous  one. 

My  strange  little  pony  could  not  be  per- 
suaded to  make  any  short  cuts  across  the 
curves.     He  seemed  to  have  some  supersti- 


tious dread  of  leaving  the  winding  track, 
and  despite  all  my  persuasive  powers,  he 
walked  every  turn  and  every  inch.  Some- 
times he  would  walk  his  head  bump  into  a 
bank  of  scoriae,  and  then  turn  about,  and 
not  until  then.  If  I  beat  him,  or  tried  to 
guide  him  aside,  he  would  stop.  I  once  got 
off  to  argue  the  matter  with  him,  but  it  was 
useless.  I  persuaded  and  pounded  and 
pulled  him,  but  he  won.     I  concluded  that 


I  once  got  off  to  argue  (he  matter  with  him,  but  it  was  useless. 

he,  having  been  there  before,  must  know 
the  way  best,  and  that  it  would  be  danger- 
ous to  persuade  him  further,  so  I  remounted 
and  we  proceeded.  As  we  did  so  the  in- 
terest deepened.  We  now  reached  a  sort  of 
a  hollow,  whence  the  ascent  was  so  precipi- 
tous the  ponies  could  not  go  further.  The 
rest  of  the  clamber  was  made  on  foot,  and  a 
hard  one  it  was.  The  great  mass  of  vapor 
from  the  crater  fell  upon  us,  hid  us  from 
each  other,  and  almost  stifled  us  with  its 
sulphurous  breath.  The  scoriae  grew  hotter 
and  hotter,  so  that  it  was  impossible  to 
stand  in  any  one  place  for  a  moment  with- 
out burning.  All  around  us  were  little 
furnaces  of  fire,  wherein  we  roasted  eggs, 
or  brought  forth  masses  of  molten  matter 
with  our  sticks.  A  step  or  two  more  and 
we  are  upon  the  very  verge  of  the  crater. 
What  an  awful  sight !  The  mouth  of  the 
crater  is  one  mile  in  circumference.  I  went 
around  it,  and  then  down  it,  perhaps  250 
feet,  where  I  could  see  its  awful  boiling  and 
seething  to  my  heart's  content.  The  heated 
vapor  as  it  comes  forth,  breaks  up  into  won- 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


263 


drously  shaped  masses,  and  travels  across 
the  valleys  ;  the  inner  surface  of  the  crater 
is  clad  with  shining  crystals  of  sulphur,  and 
salts  of  various  kinds,  looking  like  an  au- 
tumn field  of  golden  rod  and  cardinal  flower, 
but  the  depths  are  shut  in  by  the  seething 
mass  of  vapor.  I  dare  not  go  down  further 
at  the  peril  of  my  life.  I  have  already 
"  gone  too  far,"  cries  the  guide,  but  I  came 
here  for  this.  Oh,  if  those  clouds  would  only 
lift  and  let  me  see  further  down  !  Hardly 
was  the  wish  expressed  ere  a  favorable  cur- 
rent of  wind  blew  the  steam  cloud  aside, 
and  I  trembled  at  what  I  saw — quite  1000 
feet  down — at  least  as  far  as  the  eye  could 
reach,  for  beyond  the  black  depths  no  one 
could  see.  It  was  glorious.  Painted  peaks 
of  rocks  reared  themselves  in  all  directions 
very  high  ;  huge  fissures  and  caverns  here 
and  there,  dark  and  dreadful,  along  whose 
sides  huge  masses  of  debris  were  piled;  the 
sides  of  the  crater  all  covered  with  the  vari- 
ous colored  salts,  and  the  steam  and  vapor 
oozing  forth  in  a  hundred  places,  made  one 
feel  as  when  from  some  height  overlooking 
a  busy  manufacturing  city.  And  all  this 
amid  the  most  intense  quiet.  Not  a  sound 
as  much  as  would  be  made  by  a  one-horse 
engine,  could  be  heard  amid  this  awful 
scene  of  fire  and  steam.  In  this  I  was  dis- 
appointed, for  I  thought  Vesuvius  always 
made  a  noise.  The  heat  became  intense, 
and  the  sulphurous  vapor  overcoming,  so 
we  made  our  departure,  and  in  hot  scoriae 
up  to  our  knees  we  waded,  or  rather  pre- 
cipitated ourselves  back  to  our  ponies. 
Mounting  them  again  we  began  the  descent. 
Our  ascent  was  made  much  of  the  way 
through  cloud.  Now  the  clouds  were  gone, 
and  we  had  a  glorious  view,  as  you  can 
understand  by  referring  to  our  picture, 
and  then  imagining  yourself  descending  the 
grand  old  mountain.  Naples,  bay  and  all, 
Capri,  Pompeii,  Herculaneum,  and  the 
hundred  other  towns  squatted  in  the  richly 
cultivated  valley,  made  up  a  grand  picture. 
At  our  right  were  great  walls  of  lava;  on 
the  left  the  neighboring  mountains,  whose 
deep-scarred  sides  gave  proof  that  they  too 
had  suffered  from  battle  with  the  subterra- 
nean elements.  The  jaunt  down  was  one  of 
hard  and  dirty  labor.  My  faithful  pony 
made  all  the  curves  religiously,  and  I  was 


The  origin  of  the  tripod. 


glad  enough  to  leave  his  back,  and  to  go 
back  to  Naples,  and  dream  of  what  I  had 
seen,  for  I  soon  courted  sleep  on  reaching 
my  hotel.  I  of  course  do  not  believe  in 
dreams,  but  as  a  portion  of  one  has  an  im- 
portant photographic  bearing,  it  may  be 
told  here.  It  clears  up  all  mystery  that 
may  be  connected 
with  the  origin  of  the 
photographic  tripod, 
and  ran  thus:  The 
Devil,  who  had 
heard  that  Vesuvius 
not  only  rivalled 
him  in  the  overpow- 
ering influence  of  its 
sulphurous  fumes, 
but  also  that  the 
crater  was  ten  times 
more  to  be  feared 
than  his  most  heated  chamber,  one  day  at 
dusk  paid  it  a  visit.  He  walked  proudly 
up  to  the  crater,  tail  in  air,  to  the  very 
verge,  when,  beholding  its  awful  depths 
he  fainted,  dropped  his  tail  to  the  earth, 
fell  back  upon  it  for  support,  and  thus  sup- 
plied the  missing  idea  for  the  third  leg  of 
the  tripod.     Believe  it  or  not  as  you  will. 

Our  day  at  Pompeii  was  one  never  to  be 
forgotten.  No  cemetery  ever  made  such  an 
impression  upon  me  as  this  "city  of  the 
dead."  In  a  cemetery  we  see  the  graves  of 
the  departed,  and  learn  of  their  good  works 
from  their  monuments.  Here  are  the 
monuments  of  the  dead  by  their  own  hands 
erected,  many  of  them  looking  as  if  the 
work  had  been  left  but  yesterday.  Here 
are  straight  but  narrow  streets,  paved  in 
such  substantial  manner  over  2000  years 
ago  as  should  shame  our  own  highway 
departments — as  solid  and  firm  as  the  day 
they  were  laid ;  beautiful  monuments,  in 
better  order  than  many  modern  ones ;  pal- 
aces, halls,  shops,  frescoes,  statuary,  foun- 
tains, mills,  wine  cellars,  temples,  amphi- 
theatres, baths,  magnificent  columns,  all 
here  standing  as  they  did  on  that  frightful 
night,  when  the  inhabitants  left  them  to  be 
covered  up  by  the  solid  storm  from  the 
bowels  of  Vesuvius.  All  about  us  we  may 
yet  see  portions  of  the  fated  city,  still  pro- 
truding from  the  hills  of  scoriae.  In  the 
museum  here  and  at  Naples,  we  see  myriads 


264 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


of  the  articles  which  have  been  exhumed. 
How  wonderfully  like  some  of  our  own  are 
the  surgical  instruments,  and  cooking  and 
garden  utensils  ;  as  delicate  in  form  and 
shape,  and  as  beautifully  made.  Although 
many  of  them  have  been  much  decayed  and 
disfigured  by  their  sleep  under  the  scoria? 
they  are  still  beautiful  and  interesting.    No 


They  are  still  beautiful  and  interesting. 

photographic  apparatus  was  found  that  I 
could  see,  though  something  resembling  it 
appears  in  the  drawing  of  some  of  these  Pom- 
peian  antiquities.  The  photographs  and  lan- 
tern slides,  and  books  descriptive  of  this  won- 
drous city  are  so  plentiful,  that  the  interested 
must  be  familiar  with  them.  Photographs 
are  sold  in  great  quantities  in  the  streets  of 
ancient  Pompeii  now.  The  interest  of  our 
visit  here  was  added  to  by  a  sudden  and 
very  violent  thunder  shower,  coming  down 
upon  us  from  Vesuvius,  and  as  I  hovered 
under  one  of  the  arches  in  the  Temple  of 
Fortune,  and  saw  the  tourists  scamper  by, 
I  thought  of  the  consternation  which  must 
have  been  caused  by  the  storm  of  solid  rock 
and  sand  and  mud  which  came  down  when 
Pompeii  was  destroyed  in  her  glory.  Here 
one  desires  to  sit  and  read  again  the  "  Last 
Days  of  Pompeii,"  by  Lord  Lytton,  and 
when  evening  comes  to  creep  stealthily  with- 
out the  gates,  up  the  old  mountain-side  to 
the  cavern  home  of  the  old  Saga,  and  hold  a 
confab  with  her.  Would  you  interview  her 
now?  Perhaps  there  is  some  query  that 
even  Sphynx,  or  the  oft-perplexed  editor 
of  your  favorite  photographic  magazine 
cannot  answer.  Come  then.  We  have  no 
faith  in  witches  or  fortune-tellers,  but  the 
time  is  ours  ;  let  us  go  to  the  old  Saga,  and 
peep  into  her  fiery  cavern.  Look  you  in 
the  roar  sharply  and  what  do  you  see? 
The  "  blackness  of  darkness."  Lo  !  Now, 
and  a  flaming  picture  like  a  lantern  slide, 
lit  up  most  intensely,  covered  with  ancient 
hieroglyphics.  What  does  it  mean  ?  The 
old  crone  says,  "  Think  what  you,  as  a  pho- 
tographer,  most  desire  to  know,   and   the 


rebus  will  be  explained  to  you  "  How 
quickly  the  meaning  flashes  upon  you  ! 
Sliding   Plate-holder    invented    plus  twelve 


fiilli'       Jfeii&i  ,  .  'ill.  JfusjLjE 

Valuable  if  you  can  establish  the  fact. 

years  before  S.  Wing's  patent.  There  is  tes- 
timony for  you  which  will  be  valuable  if 
you  can  establish  the  fact. 

And  now  T  must  turn  homeward,  for  I 
have  much  to  do  ere  the  day  of  my  sailing  ar- 
rives. Had  I  two  weeks  more  I  should  mas- 
ter the  Pyramids  of  Egypt,  Cairo,  Alexan- 
dria, &c,  for  good  company  is  offered  me 
here,  but  I  must  turn  back.  The  farthest 
point  of  my  journey  is  reached.  After  a  day 
or  two  more  at  Naples  among  the  pictures, 
and  the  artists,  and  the  people,  and  then  I  go. 
Oil  paintings  here  may  be  bought  by  the 
acre,  and  I  thus  learned  the  history  of  some 
of  the  "  works  of  the  old  masters,"  which  I 
have  seen  in  America.  All  the  Italian  col- 
lections are  surrounded  by  copyists  con- 
stantly. These  men  will  wait  upon  you 
at  your  hotel,  and  sell  you  very  excellent 
copies,  at  very  fair  rates,  and  as  the  originals 
are  not  for  sale  I  must  be  content  with 
these.  Oh  curious,  beautiful,  oriental, 
dirty  Naples  !  With  what  mixed  sorrow 
and  gladness  I  left  it  and  its  figs  !  Here 
Americans  are  much  envied,  for  do  they  not 
come  from  the  "Great  Republic"  ?  Along 
the  quays  lie  hundreds  of  lazy  Neapolitans, 
who  seldom  get  up  except  when  an  Ameri- 
can vessel  sails  up  the  bay,  and  then  they 
roll  over  on  one  elbow,  or  if  they  have  a 
balcony,  they  come  out  and  cheer  the  stars 
and  stripes,  "the  flag  of  the  Great  Repub- 
lic." They  love  America,  and  would  gladly 
emigrate,  but  the  enervating  influence  of 
the  dust  of  Vesuvius,  and  the  breezes  of  the 
beautiful  blue  bay,  have  still  greater  fasci- 
nation for  them.  My  guide  was  named 
Michael  A?igelo,  good,  faithful  man  that  he 
was,  content  to  earn  eight  francs  per  day. 
As  much  as  he  is  like  his  famed  and  famous 
namesake,  so  is  the  Neapolitan  of  to-day 
like  the  Neapolitan  of  old,  to  whose  culture 
and  taste  and  liberality  we  owe  so  very 
much. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


265 


From  Naples  back  to  Kome  again,  and 
thence  straight  forward,  via  Lake  Maggi- 
ore,  to  the  Alps.  Oh 
what  an  intensely 
beautiful  sail  up  this 
lake,  past  the  ter- 
raced and  castled 
Borromean  Isles, 
stopping  every  mile 
or  two  at  some  pic- 
turesque village, 
with  the  most  ro- 
mantic scenery  all 
around ! 

I  disembarked  at 
Magadino,  at  the 
head  of  Lake  Mag- 
giore,  and  slept  my 
last  sleep  on  Italian 
soil.  After  all,  beau- 
tiful as  it  is,  Italy, 
"sunny  "  Italy,  has 
undoubtedly  obtain- 
ed its  prestige  for 
"  sunshine,  luxuri- 
ous growth  ,blue  sky , 
and  sunsets,"  from 
Englishmen  who 
have  never  visited 
America.  To  those 
•who  come  from  the 
weeping,  foggy  Brit- 
ish Isles,  Italy  must 
indeed  appear  most 
beautiful  and  re- 
freshing. To  an 
American  it  is  in- 
ferior, so  far  as  cli- 
mate  is   concerned, 

and  as  to  comfort  in  travelling  and  living, 
"  The  Great  Republic  forever  I" 

Next  montb  a  scramble  in  the  Alps,  to- 
gether with  a  visit  to  some  interesting  pho- 
tographic establishments,  including  M. 
Braun's  at  Dornach. 

(To  be  continued.) 


Charles  W.  Hearn's  Formulae. 

I  have  very  frequently  been  asked  for 
my  formulas  for  printing,  and  for  the  con- 


venience of  those  who  may  wish  to  know, 
I  will  here  <nve  it  "  in  a  nutshell." 


They  come  out  and  cheer  the  "Stars  and  Stripes,"  the  flag  of  the  Great  Republic. 


Silver  Bath. 
I  place  a  sufficient  quantity  of  the  N.P.A. 
Extra  Brilliant  Dresden  Pink  Paper  for  the 
next  day's  use,  over  night  in  a  close  box, 
on  the  bottom  of  which  I  place  a  tray  of 
fresh  water.     This  dampens  the  surface  of 
the  paper,  and  makes  it  take  very  readily 
to  the  solution  when  floated. 
Make  up  a  solution  as  follows  : 
Nitrate  of  Silver,        .  .     45  grains. 

Nitrate  of  Ammonium,        .     45       " 
Alum,  ....        I  grain. 

Distilled  Water,  .         .       1  ounce. 

Make  the  bath  quite  acid  with  nitric  acid, 


266 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGE  APHEE. 


C.  P.,  and  then  perfectly  neutral  by  the  ad- 
dition of  liq.  ammonia.  Place  a  lump  of 
camphor  in  the  solution,  and  it  will  always 
prevent  blistering.  Float  the  paper  sixty 
seconds,  and  draw  it  over  a  smooth  glass 
rod.  Dry  quickly,  and  fume  ten  minutes. 
Print  about  two  shades  dark. 

Acidifying  Solution. 
Lukewarm  Water,         .  .     1  gallon. 

Acetic  Acid,  No.  8,  .      |  ounce. 

Acidize  fifteen  minutes  ;  keep  moving  all 
the  prints  constantly.  Pour  off  this  water 
and  save  it,  also  the  next  rinsing  water. 
Wash  in  another  fresh  bath  of  water  five 
minutes,  and  they  are  ready  for  toning. 

Toning  Bath. 

Acetate  of  Soda,  .  .  15  grains. 

Chloride  of  Soda,         .  .  10       " 

Chloride  of  Gold,         .         .  1  grain. 

Filtered  Rain-water,  .  .  15  ounces. 

This  bath  ought  to  be  a  week  old  for  stock, 
and  every  day,  about  two  hours  before 
toning,  make  up  in  the  same  proportion  as 
above  a  fresh  lot  of  sixteen  ounces,  and  mix 
the  two  together.  The  prints  will  tone  in 
about  ten  minutes,  which  is  plenty  quick 
enough  for  me.  Tone  a  little  purple. 
Place  the  prints,  as  soon  as  toned,  in  a  bath 
made  as  follows  : 

Sat.  Sol.  Alum,   .         .  .16  ounces. 

Water,  ....      1  gallon. 

Eemove  the  prints,  when  ready  for  fixing, 
from  this  bath  into  a  hypo  bath  made  as 
given  below  : 

Hyposulphite  of  Soda,  Sat.  Sol.,        .  1  ounce. 

Water,       ......  12  ounces. 

Bicarbonate  of  Soda,  Sat.  Sol.,  .  1  ounce. 

Chloride  of  Soda,       .  .  .         .  j       " 

Fix  fifteen  minutes,  weaken  one-half,  and 
fix  five  minutes  longer,  and  then  weaken  to 
about  as  near  as  you  can  calculate  the  den- 
sity of  the  salt  solution,  which  is  made  as 
follows. : 

Chloride  of  Soda,  .  .     1  ounce. 

Water,  ...  .1  gallon. 

Let  the  prints  remain  in  here  about  ten 
minutes,  and  then  weaken  this  to  about 
one-half  of  its  former  density,  and  let  them 
remain  five  minutes  longer,  and  now  finally 


let  this  salt-water  bath  be  weakened  to  the 
density  of  fresh  water,  and  then  remove 
them  to  the  washing-tank,  and  wash  them 
well  before  you  leave  them  for  the  night, 
as  this  is  very  important.  Three  or  four 
hours'  washing  is  sufficient,  when  the  prints 
are  soaked  in  a  salt-water  bath  after  fixing. 
Einse  the  next  morning  in  pure  filtered 
rain-water,  so  as  to  remove  all  iron-rust 
from  the  prints,  and  mount  damp. 
Yours,  fraternally, 

Charles  W.  Hearn, 

Author  of  The  Practical  Printer. 


GERMAN  CORRESPONDENCE. 

The  Chicago  Accident — Action  of  Dry  and 
Damp  Atmospheres  on  Photography — 
Action  of  Hyposulphite  in  the  Developer — 
Impurities  in  the  Developer — -Sulphurous 
Acid  as  a  Substitute/or  Hypo — Intensifying 
with  Permanganate  of  Potassium — The 
Fall  of  Portrait  Photographers. 

Not  without  anxiety  do  we  look  forward 
to  further  news  from  America.  The  tele- 
graph has  notified  us  that  during  the  Ex- 
hibition a  great  conflagration  has  devastated 
the  city.  We  always  follow  with  much  in- 
terest the  proceedings  of  the  American  Pho- 
tographic Association,  and  should  regret  it 
very  much  if  its  deliberations  had  been  dis- 
turbed by  this  accident;  still  more  do  we 
mourn  that  the  ill-fated  city  has  for  the 
second  time  been  visited  by  such  a  calamity. 

We  have  had  lately  such  an  extraordi- 
nary dry  atmosphere,  something  unusual  in 
the  otherwise  eternally  wet  atmosphere  of 
Europe.  For  weeks  we  have  had  hardly  a 
trace  of  rain,  and  this  produces  phenomena 
which  affect  photography  injuriously,  par- 
ticularly with  long  exposure  of  plates  and 
on  the  printing  paper.  Curious  enough  the 
Lichtdruck  is  also  affected  by  it ;  the  gela- 
tin plate  from  which  the  print  is  made  re- 
quires always  a  certain  degree  of  moisture, 
and  the  prints  which  are  made  in  the  damp 
atmosphere  of  autumn  are  much  handsomer 
than  those  made  now.  But  aside  from 
these  matters  a  dry  atmosphere  generally  is 
advantageous  to  photography.  In  the  al- 
ways damp  and  hot  atmosphere  of  Aden,  I 
have   met   with  numberless   obstacles ;  the 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


267 


plates  could  only  be  cleaned  with  difficulty  ; 
after  a  few  hours  they  attracted  moisture 
from  the  atmosphere,  which  required  an 
extra  polishing.  I  could  expose  them  for 
twenty  minutes,  thanks  to  the  damp  atmos- 
phere, but  it  took  an  enormously  long  time 
before  a  plate  became  sufficiently  dry  for 
varnishing,  and  the  varnish  attracted  mois- 
ture from  the  atmosphere  and  became 
cloudy.  The  varnish  film  so  obtained  had 
very  little  stability;  after  a  few  months  it 
cracked,  and  the  plates  which  I  took  at  that 
time  are  now,  all  of  them,  destroyed.  To 
take  dry  plates  in  such  an  atmosphere  is  al- 
most impossible,  simply  because  the  dry 
plates  would  not  dry.  A  preliminary  coat- 
ing with  albumen  was  also  out  of  place,  as 
in  a  very  short  time  small  fungi  would  show 
themselves,  which  produced  spots.  Under 
these  circumstances  I  prefer  to  work  in  a 
dry  atmosphere,  although  here,  too,  we  meet 
with  plenty  of  difficulties. 

Mr.  Schaarwachter  reported  latelya  rather 
curious  annoyance  in  intensifying  ;  the  plate 
became  suddenly  dark,  the  shadows  showed 
a  blue-black  fog,  the  whole  picture  changed 
and  became  a  positive.  This  is  generally 
ascribed  to  deficient  pyrogallic  acid,  or  a 
want  of  acidity  in  the  developer.  Neither 
of  these  causes  operated  here,  for  the  inten- 
sifier  did  not  change  its  action,  after  fresh 
pyrogallic  acid  and  glacial  acetic  acid  had 
been  added  ;  finally  Mr.  Schaarwachter  had 
to  abandon  the  ordinary  method  of  inten- 
sifying, and  strengthened  the  plates  after 
they  had  been  fixed  and  washed.  Pyrogallic 
acid  and  silver  did  not  act  injuriously.  Only 
after  a  long  search  the  cause  of  the  above 
mishap  was  discovered  ;  a  small  quantity  of 
hypo  solution  had  found  its  way  into  the 
developer.  In  fact  anyone  can  produce  this 
action  by  adding  a  small  quantity  of  hypo 
to  the  developer.  Similar  results  are  brought 
about  if  we  add  sulphurous  (S02)  acid  to  the 
developer;  formerly  sulphate  of  iron  was 
frequently  contaminated  with  this  substance, 
and  the  consequence  was  that  the  picture 
became  foggy  over  its  whole  surface.  I 
remember  an  instance  which  happened  ten 
years  ago,  when  a  photographer  in  Java 
(India)  received  a  supply  of  such  sulphate 
from  here,  and  who  in  consequence  had  to 
lie  idle  for  six  months   until  he  could  re- 


ceive a  fresh  supply.  Similar  faults  have 
afterwards  been  unjustly  ascribed  to  the 
iron,  while  in  fact  the  acetic  acid  was  to 
blame.  I  received  from  Hamburg  a  sample 
of  acetic  acid,  which,  when  employed  as 
developer,  produced  fog.  This  acetic  acid 
was  made  from  pyroligneous  spirit.  Since 
that  time  I  do  not  use  any  acetic  acid  in  the 
developer,  but  take  simply  two  to  three  per 
cent,  of  alcohol  and  about  one  cubic  centim- 
etre of  sulphuric  acid  to  one  litre  of  devel- 
oper. The  percentage  of  alcohol  has,  of 
course,  to  be  increased  when  the  bath  con- 
tains much  alcohol,  and  vice  versd. 

Although  I  have  mentioned  that  sul- 
phurous acid  acts  injuriously  in  the  devel- 
oper, I  must  not  omit  to  mention  that  this 
body  is  in  other  respects  of  great  advantage 
to  the  photographer.  Until  recently  the 
rags  which  are  used  for  making  paper  and 
cardboard  have  been  bleached  with  chlorine, 
and  the  last  traces  were  removed  with 
hypo;  a  small  quantity  of  hypo  remained, 
however,  in  the  paper,  which  was  apt  to 
turn  the  picture  yellow.  The  sulphite  of 
soda  does  not  have  these  disadvantages  ;  it 
absorbs  likewise  the  chlorine,  and  is  in  this 
respect  a  perfect  substitute  for  hypo.  The 
sulphite  of  soda  was  formerly  very  expen- 
sive, but  the  price  has  now  been  reduced  so 
much  that  paper-makers  can  use  it,  and  we 
will  hope  that  we  will  get  rid  of  an  un- 
pleasant trouble  with  our  mounts.  At- 
tempts have  also  been  made  here  to  bleach 
the  mounts  with  permanganate  of  potash  ; 
this  does  very  well,  the  color  is  destroyed, 
but  the  paper  itself  is  colored  brown  by  pre- 
cipitated oxide  of  manganese;  the  brown 
color  is  removed  by  sulphurous  acid,  when 
the  mass  becomes  brilliantly  white. 

I  have  lately  tried  again  to  use  per- 
manganate for  intensifying.  When  we 
coat  a  fixed  and  washed  negative  plate  with 
permanganate  of  potash  the  plate  becomes 
of  a  yellow-brown  color;  this  color  is  very 
opaque  for  chemical  rays,  and  this  recom- 
mends it  for  intensifying  the  negatives  of 
drawings,  &c.  A  diluted  solution  of  per- 
manganate 1  to  200  is  employed  at  first,  after- 
wards we  take  a  concentrated  one  of  the 
strength  1  to  100.  The  permanganate  is  de- 
cidedly preferable  to  chloride  of  mercury, 
iodide,  and  sulphide  of  potassium,  for  the 


268 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


latter  has  a  very  unpleasant  smell.  Iodine 
and  bichloride  of  mercury  give  pictures  of 
uncertain  keeping  qualities,  and  sometimes 
the  intensification  is  lost,  i.  e  ,  instead  of 
the  dark  compounds  light  chloride  and 
iodide  of  silver  are  formed.  Permanganate 
has  none  of  these  drawbacks. 

A  few  days  ago  I  read  in  the  Pkotograph- 
isehen  Notizen  a  letter  of  a  portrait  photog- 
rapher, which  I  consider  worthy  of  recital. 

"We  portrait  photographers  are  miser- 
able beings,"  said  an  old  colleague  to  me, 
while  talking  about  the  joys  and  sorrows  of 
our  business.  "The  joys  are  few;  I  believe 
the  only  one  is  the  pleasure  of  earning 
money.  I  feel  like  laughing  when  I  read 
a  description  of  the  pleasure  of  having  made 
a  satisfactory  picture ;  a  picture  which  is 
the  delight  of  the  whole  family,  and  the 
photographer  is  overwhelmed  with  applause. 
I  am  not  vain ;  the  least  am  I  vain  of  my 
pictures.  How  often  does  it  happen  that  I 
devote  all  my  care,  my  attention,  my  knowl- 
edge and  understanding  of  art  to  the  pro- 
duction of  a  perfect  picture.  An  elegant 
young  damsel  is  posed,  lighted  a  la  Rem- 
brandt, and  my  first  operator  and  myself 
do  not  rest  until  a  perfect  negative  has  been 
obtained.  We  are  both  delighted,  we  are 
proud  of  our  work,  the  print  turns  out  mag- 
nificent, but  what  is  the  result  ?  The  beauty 
throws  the  picture  at  my  feet.  She  had 
been  the  night  before  to  a  ball,  was  tired, 
and  poor  me  did  not  know  that.  I  could 
not  tell  whether  that  was  her  ordinary  ex- 
pression, or  whether  her  beauty  was  still 
more  radiant  when  she  had  not  been  to  a 
ball  the  previous  night.  This  has  hap- 
pened to  me  often.  Sometimes  I  can  find 
out  the  reasons  why  my  pictures  do  not 
please ;  at  others,  not.  Then  it  turns  out 
that  he  or  she  had  a  toothache,  or  quarrelled 
with  his  better  half,  or  lost  a  lawsuit. 
Again,  others  had  to  wait  too  long,  and  be- 
came angry.  And  in  the  face  of  such  dis- 
cord the  noble  art  of  photography  creates 
pictures,  but  not  expressions. 

"  On  the  other  hand,  I  know  instances 
where  the  pictures  were  absolute  failures. 
There  was  an  unruly  model,  which  could 
not  be  posed  or  could  not  sit  steady,  or  the 
light  was  bad,  or  the  devil  played  havoc 
with  the  bath   or  the  chemicals;   in  short, 


the  pictures  were  shameful.  When  I 
showed  these  abortions  to  my  customers, 
and  wanted  them  to  sit  a  second  time,  what 
was  the  result?  The  customer  was  delight- 
ed, declared  the  picture  the  finest  that  was 
ever  made,  considered  my  objection  un- 
founded, and  it  is  horrible  to  relate,  but 
true,  such  customers  have  recommended  me 
all  around.  I  should  blush  if  I  saw  those 
pictures  hanging  on  the  walls,  provided 
that  I  was  still  capable  of  blushing,  but  I 
have  become  indifferent  to  such  things. 
Praise  and  blame  run  off  from  me  like  the 
rain  from  a  duck.  Every  photographer  has 
to  be  prepared  to  hear  that  the  finest  picture 
is  found  horrible,  and  he  must  not  think  that 
the  public  is  malicious.  The  portrait  painter 
is  better  off  than  we;  he  really  becomes  ac- 
quainted with  his  model,  for  he  occupies 
himself  with  his  sitter  longer  than  a  quar- 
ter of  an  hour.  Unfortunately  we  have 
not  the  time  for  that,  and  this  trouble  can- 
not be  helped. 

"  A  friend  and  colleague  of  mine  once 
photographed  my  wife  and  little  boy.  It 
was  a  splendid  picture,  but  the  boy  had  his 
tedious  hour,  and  looked  in  the  picture  so 
stupid  and  sleepy,  while  in  reality  he  is  just 
the  reverse.  If  I  should  have  paid  for  the 
picture,  I  would  have  rejected  it,  in  spite  of 
all  its  brilliancy,  sharpness,  light  effects, 
&c.  This  happens  to  us  often.  We  poor 
portrait  photographers." 

Yours,  very  truly, 

Dr.  Vogel. 


PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  FRANCE. 

BY    ERNEST    LACAN. 

At  this  time  the  two  subjects  which  prin- 
cipally occupy  the  minds  of  Parisian  pho- 
tographers, are  the  Photographic  Exposi- 
tion and  Lambertypie.  The  list  of  awards 
awarded  on  the  occasion  of  the  Exhibition 
has  just  been  published.  It  embraces  sev- 
enty-four names,  that  is  to  say,  forty-six 
medals  and  twenty-eight  honorable  men- 
tions;  now,  as  there  are  only  eighty-four 
exhibitors,  the  jury  has  only  excluded  ten 
of  them.  Ear  from  criticizing  the  liber- 
ality with  which  it  has  acted,  I  think  that 
it  might  have  excluded  no  one;  for  all  the 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


269 


works  sent  have  real  merit,  if  it  only  is  in 
their  execution.  It  would  have  been  curi- 
ous to  see  a  collective  medal  given  to  the 
whole  exhibition,  as  in  time  of  war  a  cross 
of  honor  is  given  to  a  whole  regiment  when 
the  majority  of  the  soldiers  which  comprise 
it  have  signally  distinguished  themselves.  I 
am  persuaded  that  no  one  (especially  among 
the  exhibitors)  would  have  protested  against 
this  act  of  justice. 

In  regard  to  Lambertypie,  it  causes  in 
every  atelier  a  veritable  excitement  t  Every 
one  wishes  to  learn  the  secret  of  this  pro- 
cess which  gives  such  splendid  results,  and 
to  acquire  the  right  of  working  it.  In  the 
pi-ovinces,  and  especially  in  the  large  towns, 
each  photographer  of  any  note  tries  to  be 
the  first  to  subscribe,  in  order  to  obtain  the 
exclusive  right  for  his  town,  and  to  thus 
prevent  the  competition  of  his  co-workers 
in  the  same  locality.  What  is  most  curious 
is,  that  after  having  acquired  a  knowledge 
of  the  operations,  each  new  purchaser  of 
the  right,  instead  of  exclaiming,  as  is  too 
often  the  case,  "  Is  that  all !"  is  tilled  with 
enthusiasm,  and  becomes  one  of  the  warm- 
est advocates  of  the  new  method.  It  is  the 
first  time,  perhaps,  after  the  making  known 
of  a  new  invention,  that  we  do  not  hear 
those  who  profit  by  it  cry  out,  "  I  have  been 
doing  this  for  a  long  time  !" 

Neo-olio  painting  is  also  making  its  way, 
and  now  we  have  a  new  style  of  portrait, 
of  which  Mr.  Thomas  Sutton  has  given  me 
the  earliest  information,  and  which  fur- 
nishes an  ingenious  and  useful  application 
to  Mr.  Putteman's  process  by  combining  it 
with  carbon  photography.  Mr.  Sutton's 
communication  may  be  thus  condensed.  A 
sheet  of  paper,  prepared  by  the  carbon  pro- 
cess, is  sensitized  (even  in  full  light)  in  a 
highly  concentrated  solution  of  bichromate 
of  potash.  It  is  then  hung  up  in  the  dark 
to  dry  ;  when  dry  it  is  exposed  as  usual 
under  a  negative.  The  pose  is  much  shorter 
than  for  albumenized  paper  sensitized  with 
silver  ;  it  is  about  one-third  less.  The  plate, 
which  is  to  be  used  for  the  final  support  of 
this  print,  is  put  in  a  dish  filled  with  cold 
water,  and  the  paper  placed  in  contact  with 
it  under  the  water  on  the  side  of  the  image 
for  a  few  seconds ;  then  the  plate,  to  which 
adheres  the  sheet  of  paper,  is  removed  from 


the  bath,  and  a  roller  of  india-rubber  is 
passed  over  it  in  order  to  render  the  contact 
more  complete ;  after  a  few  minutes  the 
plate  and  the  image  that  it  carries  are 
placed  in  a  dish  filled  with  hot  water,  the 
paper  detaches  itself,  and  leaves  the  carbon 
image  adhering  to  the  plate.  It  now  has 
to  be  transformed  into  a  painting  ;  to  effect 
this,  the  simplest  way  is  to  make  use  of  the 
colors  prepared  for  the  neo-olio  painting, 
which  are  applied  as  I  have  said  in  one  of 
my  previous  letters  ;  but  it  is  also  possible 
to  use  opaque  oil  colors,  which  are  sold  in 
metallic  tubes  for  painters;  but  care  must 
be  taken  to  give  them  the  proper  consist- 
ency by  diluting  them  with  a  little  varnish. 
They  should  be  thick  enough  to  form  a 
background  for  the  print.  Mr.  Sutton 
thinks  that  the  mode  of  applying  colors  to 
the  back  of  a  transparent  portrait,  or  one 
rendered  so,  is  the  only  one  which  is  truly 
correct;  for  in  this  manner  it  is  very  evi- 
dent that  the  painting  in  no  wise  alters  the 
likeness,  since  the  photographic  image  re- 
mains unaltered  on  the  opposite  side. 

It  is  easy  to  understand  that  the  colored 
image  thus  executed  on  glass  has  all  the 
charm  of  colored  enamels,  and  all  their  so- 
lidity, without  requiring  as  they  do  a  series 
of  difficult  manipulations  and  special  ap- 
paratus; by  the  way,  Mr  Sutton  designates 
this  new  kind  of  portrait  by  the  name  of 
"  Colored  Carbon  Enamel." 

Mr.  Kodrigues,  director  of  the  photo- 
graphic establishment  of  the  government  of 
Portugal,  at  Lisbon,  has  sent  to  the  Photo- 
graphic Exhibition  a  great  number  of  re- 
productions of  maps,  plans,  and  drawings, 
for  which  he  has  received  a  medal.  All 
these  works,  printed  with  fatty  inks,  are 
obtained  by  a  process  of  photo-lithography, 
which  was  made  known  at  the  last  meeting 
of  the  Society.  It  does  not  differ  from  the 
other  methods  employed  from  the  time  of 
Poitevin  to  that  of  Geymet  &  Alker,  except 
by  the  substitution  of  a  sheet  of  tinfoil  for 
a  sheet  of  paper,  upon  which  Poitevin  and 
some  others  obtained  the  first  print  destined 
to  be  transferred  to  the  stone.  This  very 
thin  sheet  of  foil  is  first  polished  by  pres- 
sure upon  a  finely  grained  stone;  then,  after 
having  been  wet,  it  is  placed  upon  a  zinc 
plate,    perfectly  flat   and    highly   polished, 


270 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


and  is  cleaned  by  means  of  a  fine  tuft  soaked 
in  a  solution  of  potash  or  soda  at  10  per  cent. ; 
if  it  is  very  dirty,  add  a  little  chalk  to  this 
solution.  Now  wash  carefully,  and  spread 
thesensitive  coating  on  the  foil.  This  is  com- 
posed of  a  solution  of  gelatin  (40  grammes 
for  500  of  water),  to  which  is  to  be  added  a 
solution  of  bichromate  of  potash  (20  gram- 
mes for  500  of  water).  This  mixture  is 
spread  with  a  brush.  Desiccation  may  be 
hastened  by  heating  the  zinc  plate  over  gas, 
or  in  a  dry-house.  When  the  surface  of  the 
foil  is  sufficiently  dry,  the  sheet  is  removed 
from  its  support,  and  evaporation  is  pro- 
duced by  heating  the  small  quantity  of  water 
that  it  contains  ;  it  is  then  fit  for  use.  For 
that  it  is  spread  on  the  negative,  which  is 
placed  in  an  ordinary  printing-frame,  and 
exposed  from  five  to  twelve  minutes. 

Before  inking  the  print,  it  is  plunged  into 
a  bath  of  cold  water,  the  image  top  up,  and 
whilst  damp  it  is  placed  on  a  lithographic 
stone,  taking  care  to  avoid  creases.  A  flan- 
nel roller  is  then  passed  over  the  surface, 
then  a  printing  roller  very  evenly  coated 
with  a  mixture  of  three  parts  of  transfer 
ink  for  one  part  of  printing  ink.  This  is 
the  most  difficult  operation  and  requires  a 
practiced  hand.  The  print  is  then  allowed 
to  rest  for  two  hours  before  proceeding  to  a 
second  inking  ;  it  is  then  washed  in  very 
pure  water  with  a  soft  sponge.  It  is  then 
lightly  wiped,  and  detaching  the  sheet  of 
foil,  it  is  hung  up  to  dry.  When  desiccation 
is  complete  the  transfer  is  made  as  in  ordi- 
nary lithography. 

Mr.  Kodrigues  finds  many  advantages  in 
this  process,  and  the  sheets  of  foil  that  he 
exhibited  show  very  sharp  images,  and 
appear  to  have  safely  withstood  all  the 
necessary  manipulations. 

A  high  degree  of  praise  was  given  to 
photography  by  Mr.  Janssen,  at  the  last 
meeting  of  the  Academy  of  Sciences.  The 
near  transit  of  Yenus  over  the  sun  (or 
rather  between  the  earth  and  the  sun),  has 
been  for  the  last  two  years  an  object  of  great 
importance  for  our  savants  ;  owing  to  con- 
siderable efforts,  notwithstanding  the  per- 
turbation caused  by  our  recent  disasters,  it 
has  been  possible  to  unite  all  the  elements 
necessary  for  the  observation  of  this  im- 
portant phenomenon  ;  a  numerous  and  dis- 


tinguished body  of  observers  has  been 
formed,  and  great  care  has  been  exercised 
in  fixing  the  different  stations,  which  each 
of  those  who  compose  it  shall  occupy  on 
the  globe,  and  in  less  than  two  years  (and 
that  was  what  was  most  difficult),  it  has 
been  possible  to  make  special  apparatus  of 
exceptional  precision,  which  is  to  be  used 
on  this  occasion.  But  photographic  instru- 
ments had  been,  if  not  entirely  neglected, 
treated  at  least  with  a  certain  amount  of 
indifference.  Happily  one  of  our  principal 
astronomers,  Mr.  Janssen,  had  given  this 
subject  serious  attention,  and  at  the  meet- 
ing of  the  Academy,  to  which  I  have  above 
alluded,  presented  to  his  colleagues  admir- 
able photographs  of  the  sun,  obtained  by 
means  of  an  instrument  which  he  has  just 
had  constructed,  and  which  he  expects  to 
shortly  make  use  of  in  Japan.  In  making 
this  presentation  he  dwelt  upon  the  impor- 
tance of  the  applications  of  photography  to 
astronomy.  Among  these  applications  those 
which  refer  to  the  sun  occupy,  without 
doubt,  in  his  opinion,  the  most  important 
place,  on  account  of  the  immense  value 
of  the  daily  and  faithful  pictures  of  the 
solar  surface,  the  seat  of  phenomena,  so 
great,  so  rapid,  so  mysterious,  and  which, 
nevertheless,  embrace  the  secrets  of  the 
physical  nature  of  our  system.  In  consid- 
eration of  the  number  and  importance  of 
the  results  which  these  studies  would  give, 
the  eminent  astronomer  expressed  his  as- 
tonishment that  so  fertile  a  branch  of  as- 
tronomy should  have  thus  been  neglected 
by  us  ;  he  reminded  his  hearers  that  a  long 
time  ago  his  illustrious  co-worker,  Mr. 
Faye,  called  the  attention  of  astronomers 
to  the  importance  and  future  of  these  appli- 
cations of  photography.  In  fact,  as  far 
back  as  1858,  Mr.  Faye  presented  to  the 
Academy  a  magnificent  photograph  of  the 
eclipse  of  March  15th,  obtained  by  an  ordi- 
nary photographer,  Mr.  Quinet,  with  the 
large  telescope  of  Porro;  notwithstanding 
this,  it  is  in  foreign  countries  that  celestial 
photography  has  since  been  almost  exclu- 
sively cultivated. 

In  England,  Mr.  Warren  de  la  Rue, 
gave  it  great  impulse ;  his  remarkable 
labors  on  the  moon  procured  for  him  the 
great  prize  of  Labande,   given   to  him  by 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


271 


our  Academy.  He  organized  at  Kew  a 
corps  of  solar  photographers,  which  ha9 
given  to  astronomy  a  precious  series  of  docu- 
ments; since  then  America,  Germany,  Rus- 
sia, Italy,  &c,  have  in  their  turn  entered 
this  new  path.  Mr.  Janssen  recalled  to 
notice  the  admiration  which  had  been  ex- 
cited in  France,  at  the  appearance  of  the 
marvellous  photographs  of  the  moon,  taken 
by  Mr.  Rutherfurd,  of  New  York,  of  which 
a  few  specimens,  now  exhibited  at  the 
Palace  of  Industry,  still  cause  the  astonish- 
ment of  visitors. 

The  observation  of  the  transit  of  Venus 
is,  for  Mr.  Janssen,  an  occasion  to  utilize 
this  fertile  application  of  photography;  so 
that,  although  he  takes  with  him  one  of  the 
instruments  given  by  the  commission  to  its 
delegates,  he  wishes  to  execute  prints  which 
are  more  easy  to  compare  with  those  of 
observers  of  other  nations,  all  of  whom 
have  adopted  the  principle  of  large  images  ; 
it  was,  therefore,  necessary  for  him  to  create 
a  special  instrument,  whose  objective  has 
an  opening  of  five  inches,  and  a  focus  of 
two  metres.  Thus  provided,  there  is  good 
ground  for  hoping  that  Mr.  Janssen  will 
obtain  results  which  will  confer  honor  on 
France,  and  render  important  service  to 
science. 

The  French  Photographic  Society  has 
just  held  its  last  meeting  prior  to  vacation. 
At  this  meeting,  Mr.  Rousselon  made  known 
a  process  which  he  successfully  uses,  to  re- 
move the  varnish  and  the  negative  films 
from  plates  which  have  been  used.  First  dis- 
solve 8  grammes  (123  grains)  of  caustic  pot- 
ash, and  4  decigrammes  (6  grains)  of  car- 
bonate of  potash,  in  170  centilitres  (57  fluid 
ounces)  of  distilled  water,  then  pour  on  this 
solution  500  centilitres  (169  fluid  ounces)  of 
alcohol,  at  40°.  The  shellac  varnish  disap- 
pears easily  by  means  of  the  liquid ;  some  var- 
nishes require  a  little  more  potash.  When 
the  negative  is  completely  rid  of  the  var- 
nish, it  is  washed  and  plunged  for  a  minute 
in  distilled  water,  containing  two  per  cent,  of 
hydrochloric  acid  ;  it  is  withdrawn  as  soon 
as  it  is  perceived  that  one  of  the  corners  of 
the  collodion  rises ;  it  is  then  washed  and 
drained.  When  the  negative  is  completely 
dry  it  is  held  over  the  vapor  of  water  until 
it   is   entirely   covered   with   small   drops, 


then  is  spread  upon  it  a  slight  coating  of 
gelatin,  prepared  in  the  following  manner  : 
Take  100  grammes  (3J-  troy  ounces)  of  gela- 
tin, and  dissolve  in  700  grammes  (22  troy 
ounces)  of  distilled  water,  and  add  (in  sum- 
mer) 15  grammes  (231  grains)  of  glj'cerin 
(in  winter  this  quantity  should  be  reduced). 
When  the  mixture  is  well  dissolved,  add 
10  centilitres  of  a  solution  at  10  per  cent,  of 
chrome-alum  water,  for  each  100  grammes 
(3£  troy  ounces)  of  gelatin  ;  the  negative  is 
then  allowed  to  dry  thoroughly,  after  which 
it  is  coated  with  normal  collodion  prepared 
with  castor  oil;  it  is  then  again  allowed  to 
dry,  after  which  the  border  around  the 
plate  is  cut,  and  the  film  carrying  the  image 
is  removed. 


PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  ITALY. 

Mesagne,  May  31st,  1874. 
My  dear  Sir: 

I  am  so  grateful  to  you  for  the  kindness 
with  which  you  were  pleased  to  accept  my 
first  letter,  that  I  cannot  neglect  writing  to 
you  this  second  one.  I  am  very  sorry  that 
my  continued  occupations  do  not  allow  me 
to  undertake  with  you,  sir,  a  monthly  and 
regular  correspondence ;  but  I  will,  never- 
theless, assemble  a  little  better  all  interest- 
ing matters  which  may  come  to  my  knowl- 
edge, and  refer  them  to  you  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible. 

Continuing,  therefore,  the  short  relation 
I  undertook  in  my  former  letter,  concerning 
our  most  valiant  men  devoted  to  improving 
the  photographic  art,  I  must  mention  to 
you  Prof.  Bortinette,  of  Padua,  whose 
learned  and  constant  investigations  on  in- 
delible photography  with  colored  powders 
instead  of  with  greasy  inks  are,  wherever 
known,  deservedly  esteemed.  We  have 
received  from  the  Professor  proofs  of  some 
experiments  he  has  obtained  by  the  aniline 
colors,  and  he  has  also  acquainted  us  with 
several  curious  observations  on  their  pre- 
rogatives, relatively  to  the  substances  on 
which  they  are  adapted.  By  resuming  such 
observations,  the  wise  Professor  assured  us 
once  more  that  the  ■permanency  of  aniline 
colors  on  animal  filaments  is  greater  than  on 
vegetable.      The  continual  trials  he  accom- 


272 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHER. 


plishes  by  the  very  interesting  greasy  ink 
print  process,  and  the  disinterestedness 
with  which  he  directly  published  them,  led 
already  sundry  persons  in  Italy  to  very 
fortunate  results.  He  lately  deigned  him- 
self to  reveal  a  previous  modification  of  a 
similar  process.  Here  are  the  words  by 
which  he  expresses  himself: 

"  I  smear  a  very  clean  glass  with  ox-gall 
{fiel  de  beuf),  which  I  preserve  for  a  very 
long  time,  and  add  to  it  some  drops  of  crea- 
sote  ;  afterwards  I  rub  the  surface  with  a 
woollen  cloth,  so  that  the  gall  will  uni- 
formly enlarge  upon  it,  and  streaks  will  not 
come  out.  At  that  time  I  softly  warm  the 
glass  until  the  gall  will  be  dry,  and  while 
still  warm  I  put  it  on  a  level  base.  I  pre- 
pare in  advance  a  solution  of — 


Gel  .tin, 

Water, 

Alum, 


5  grammes. 
50 
1  gramme-. 


"  When  the  gelatin  is  perfectly  dissolved 
the  liquid  is  to  be  strained  through  a  linen 
cloth,  and,  while  still  warm,  I  pour  it  on 
the  tepid  glass  smeared  with  gall.  If  the 
solution  does  not  extend  itself  every  where,. 
I  force  it  to  do  so  by  means  of  a  paper 
tube.  Then  I  take  a  white  and  sufficiently 
strong  sheet  of  paper  and  put  it  into  a  dish 
full  of  water  until  it  is  entirely  wet ;  after- 
wards I  dry  it  between  blotting-paper,  and 
delicately  lean  it  against  the  gelatin  surface, 
taking  care  that  bubbles  do  not  form,  and 
that  the  gelatin  does  not  go  on  the  wrong 
side  of  the  sheet.  I  leave  everything 
quietly  till  the  following  day, 'and  if  the  at- 
mosphere be  very  damp  the  paper  will  pull 
up  by  itself;  otherwise  I  raise  it  up  softly 
with  the  blade  of  a  penknife.  Its  surface 
therefore  will  become  glittering,  and  may 
be  indefinitely  preserved.  When  I  want  to 
use  it  I  wash  it  in  a  bichromate  of  potash 
solution  at  3  per  cent.,  and  when  it  has  be- 
come very  dry  I  expose  it  under  a  negative. 
When  the  picture  is  marked  with  all  de- 
tails, I  plunge  it  into  a  solution  of — 


Nitrate  of  Silver,     . 

1  gramme. 

Water, 

.     50 

Alcohol,   . 

.     20 

"At  that  time  the  whole  surface  of  the 
paper  becomes  of  a  brick-red  color,  from 
the  formation  of  chromate  of  silver.     Then 


I  wash  such  a  transformed  picture  with 
pure  water,  and  pour  on  it  some  liquid  and 
almost  diluted  ammonia.  Under  this  reac- 
tion the  red  color  will  disappear  (the  chro- 
mate of  silver  is  dissolved  by  ammonia), 
and  the  resulting  picture  is  of  an  excessively 
pale-green  color,  caused  by  the  oxide  of 
chrome.  After  such  a  mutation  I  wash  the 
paper  with  water,  and  put  the  back  of  it  on 
a  well-glossed,  hard  wooden  block,  fixing 
it  by  means  of  small  nails.  After  that  the 
superfluity  of  water  must  be  taken  from  the 
surface  with  a  very  clean  and  almost  dry 
sponge,  and  then  I  roll  the  lithographic 
cylinder  upon  it.  The  advantage  of  such  a 
process,  compared  with  others,  consists  in 
the  greater  disposition  of  the  picture  to  re- 
ceive the  ink,  with  no  doubt  of  any  muta- 
tion in  the  same  picture  (inversion  of  the 
positive  in  the  negative)  caused  by  the  non- 
decomposed  chrome  salt,  which  cannot  be 
totally  eliminated.  The  gelatin,  by  the 
alum  mixed  in  the  solution,  and  by  the  fol- 
lowing passage  into  the  bichromate  bath, 
renders  itself  completely  insoluble,  and  its 
resistance  is  increased  also  by  the  effect  of 
the  silver  solution." 

I  take  pleasure  in  reporting  to  you  some 
news  about  another  distinguished  improver 
of  photography  in  Italy.  He  is  Mr.  Bet- 
tini,  of  Leghorn,  whose  interesting  pub- 
lications (in  the  Rivista)  you  have,  no 
doubt,  often  read.  The  picture  herewith 
shows  a  "washing  apparatus"  of  his  own 
invention,  which  gives  the  most  perfect 
satisfaction. 

A  varnished  zinc  dish,  A,  contains  the 
pictures  destined  to  be  washed,  after  having 
been  submitted  to  the  hyposulphite's  action 
and  a  salt-water  washing.  At  ten  centime- 
tres from  this  dish's  bottom  is  placed  a  hori- 
zontal bored  plane,  on  which  are  settled  the 
pictures.  The  upper  side,  D,  is  composed  of 
a  double  dish  at  balance.  When  the  reser- 
voir, E,  which  is  located  under  the  water- 
spout, is  full,  it  will  fall  on  the  repair,  F, 
and  sooner  tenders  the  other  to  receive  the 
water.  The  motion  that  consequently  fol- 
lows will  singularly  help  to.  despoil  the  pic- 
tures from  hyposulphite. 

I  will  conclude  by  submitting  to  you  a 
means  proposed  by  Prof.  Ghisi,  of  Milan, 
for  diminishing  the  cause  of  the  breaking 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


273 


of  negatives  in  the  enlarging  apparatus,  and 
allow  to  concentrate  on  them  the  cone  of  rays 
as  much  as  possible.  This  means  consists 
in  the  interposition  between  the  condensing 
lens  and  the  negative  of  a  -mica  plate,  which, 


C"JS 


by  its  anti-diathermal  nature,  would  hinder 
a  superfluous  warming  without  intercepting 
the  passage  of  the  actinic  rays. 

Yours,  very  truly, 

A.  MONTAGNE. 


THE  NEW  BOOK. 

It  is  rare  that  one  has  the  pleasure  of 
reading  a  book  containing  the  quantity  of 
real  experience  and  genuine  instruction  that 
one  may  find  in  the  new  work,  The  Prac- 
tical Printer,  by  Mr.  Charles  W.  Hearn. 

The  author  has  been  very  generous  in 
giving  each  minute  detail  in  his  description 
of  processes,  and  most  faithful  in  pointing 
out  defects  and  failures. 

What  a  gain  this  work  is,  placed  in  the 
hands  of  a  beginner !  And  where  is  the  "  old 
printer  "  that  cannot  learn  at  least  one  good 
point  from  its  pages,  or  to  whose  mind  it  fails 


not  to  recall  some  of  his  past  failures,  and 
thereby  impress  them  firmly  in  his  thoughts? 
The  chapter  on  "Causes  of  Failures  in 
Albumen  and  Plain  Paper  Printing"  is 
fine,  and  contains  every  failure  (and  more, 
too)  that  I  could 
think  of,  and  should 
be  printed  in  slip 
form,  and  hung  up 
in  every  printing- 
room.  That  chap- 
ter alone  is  worth 
the  price  of  the 
work. 

Having  read  the 
book  carefully,  I 
must  say  it  is  nearer 
perfect  than  usual, 
in  its  typical  char- 
acter. In  the  chap- 
ter on  "  Fixing 
Bath  and  Fixing 
Prints,"  page  118, 
the  author  says : 
"Take  a  two-gallon 
bottle,  place  in  it 
!^^»B^^ffis  111  about  one  pound 
hypo  crystals, shake 
well,  and  label  Sat. 
Sol.  Hypo  Soda." 
We  all  know  that  the  quantity  above  given 
is  very  far  below  the  quantity  needed,  and 
should  have  been  at  least  ten  pounds,  or 
better  sti\\,  fill  the  bottle  with  crystals,  then 
add  the  water  ;  for  further  on  he  gives  the 
following  formula: 

Sat.  Sol.  Hypo,    .         .         .1  ounce. 
Water,  ...  .8  ounces. 

Sat.  Sol.  Bicarb,  of  Sodn,     .      i  ounce. 

Although  I  use  it  still  stronger,  i.  e.,  one 
pound  in  five  quarts  of  water,  I  would  not 
recommend  it  with  the  Rives  paper.  We 
do  not  use  it,  but  use  Saxe  only. 

The  precautions  he  gives  to  avoid  trouble 
in  fixing  are  very  accurate,  and  should  be 
observed  b}r  every  printer. 

The  error  I  have  above  described  must 
be  ascribed  to  the  types,  although  the  author 
says  he  is  in  favor  of  a  weak  fixing  bath.  I 
cannot  see  how  it  could  be  used  as  it  reads, 
which  would  be  one  pound  in  sixteen  gal- 
lons of  water. 


18 


274 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


As  this  is  the  only  error  I  have  seen  I 
thought  it  hest  to  call  attention  to  it,  and 
save  some  one  future  trouble  in  having  un- 
fixed prints. 

W.  L.  Shoemaker, 
With  Albert  Moore,  Solar  Printer,  Philadelphia. 


Mr.  Hearn's  "Practical  Printer." 

We  find  that  we  were  not  mistaken  in 
our  idea  that  there  was  a  necessity  for  Mr. 
Hearn's  excellent  work  on  photographic 
printing,  nor  in  our  belief  that  those  live 
photographers  who  are  always  making  prog- 
ress would  readily  purchase  copies  of  it.  In 
proof  of  this  we  are  glad  to  say  that  the  first 
five  hundred  copies  are  "  on  their  way  re- 
joicing"— the  happy  possessors  who  have 
made  the  purchases. 

"  I  really  did  not  think  there  was  so  much 
about  photographic  printing  that  I  did  not 
know  until  Mr.  Hearn;s  invaluable  book 
opened  my  eyes,"  says  one. 

"I  bought  the  book  on  account  of  your 
persuasion,"  says  another,  "but  I  did  it 
without  feeling  the  need  of  it,  and  the 
splendidly  written  book  has  made  me  feel 
my  need  of  it  as  a  constant  companion.  I 
shall  doubtless  soon  wear  this  copy  out  and 
want  the  second  edition,  for  I  am  sure  it 
will  be  called  for  soon." 

The  author  has  received  several  very  flat- 
tering testimonials  as  to  the  value  of  his 
book  from  practical  photographers.  Among 
others  is  a  very  characteristic  one  from  Mr. 
John  R.  demons,  the  manufacturer  of  the 
celebrated  albumen  paper  which  bears  his 
name,  and  than  whom  few  people  know 
more  about  photographic  printing  and  the 
treatment  of  photographic  paper.  Mr. 
Clemons  says: 

"Now  about  that  book:  you  wish  to  hear 
my  opinion.  Well,  I  am  a  very  candid 
man  in  all  things,  and  if  I  did  not  like  it  I 
would  have  written  you  so,  but  as  I  have 
recommended  it  to  all  I  have  met  on  my 
journey  home,  it  is  sufficient  to  say  I  like 
it.  I  consider  it  the  best  work  on  printing 
and  toning  that  has  been  published,  or  at 
least  that  has  come  into  my  hands,  and  until 
I  see  a  better  one  I  shall  give  it  the  first 
place.  If  any  one  wishes  to  be  helped  out 
of  the  mud  let  him  read  it;   but  if  he  wants 


to  stick  there,  let  him  keep  his  money  in  his. 
pocket,  and  stick  till  doomsday  if  he  likes. 
If  any  one  buys  the  book  through  my  rec- 
ommendation and  don't  like  it,  let  him  pitch 
into  me,  for  there  is  nothing  the  matter 
with  the  book  ;  if  there  is,  I  have  overlooked 
it.  With  this  exception :  you  should  have 
given  credit  for  the  camphor  solution, 
which,  perhaps,  you  have  overlooked.  I 
am  willing  to  correspond  with  a  live  man 
like  yourself  on  printing  and  toning.  I  be- 
lieve you  will  be  able  to  take  the  bull  by 
the  horns  and  shake  him  out  until  his  tail 
cracks  like  a  whip. 

"Give  my  regards  to  friend  Lamson,  and 
believe  me  your  true  friend, 

"John  E.  Clemons. 

"  P.  S. — If  you  can  pick  enough  out  of 
the  above  that  will  be  of  advantage  to  you, 
why  use  it.  It  is  from  the  heart  and  is  the 
best." 

The  following  extracts  from  other  letters 
received  by  Mr.  Hearn  speak  for  them- 
selves : 

,  "I  have  read  it  with  a  great  deal  of  in- 
terest, and  find  it  indispensable  to  the  stu- 
dent photographer.  It  contains  so  much 
valuable  information  on  modern  photo- 
graphic printing,  that  I  do  most  cheerfully 
recommend  its  usefulness  to  the  student 
printer.  Its  cost  is  money  well  laid  out. 
"  Yours,  very  respectful^, 

"  C.  D.  Moshee, 
Chicago." 

"  As  printing  and  toning  in  all  their  mul- 
titude of  effects  have  been  my  pride  in  the 
art,  I  obtained  a  copy  of  your  work,  '  The 
Practical  Printer,'  and  after  having  ex- 
amined it  thoroughly,  in  a  practical  man- 
ner, I  desire  to  tell  you  that  it  will  be  of  un- 
told value  to  any  printer,  and  worth  more, 
practically,  than  a  combination  of  all  the 
volumes  and  essays  on  printing  which  have 
been  published  for  the  advancement  of  the 
art  I  love.  I  trust  sincerely  that  every 
photographer  in  this  country  may  have  a 
copy  of  'The  Practical  Printer.' 

"  Yours,  as  ever,  fraternally, 

"H.    J.    RODGERS, 

Hartford,  Conn." 
Mr.  J.  H.  Lamson,  of  Portland,  Maine, 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


275 


Mr.  Hearn's  employer,  writes  to  us  as  fol- 
lows : 

"I  have  carefully  examined  Mr.  C.  W. 
Hearn's  book  upon  photographic  printing, 
and  have  come  to  the  conclusion  that,  what- 
ever may  be  its  literary  merits,  it  is  truly 
what  it  claims  to  be,  a  thoroughly  practical 
treatise  upon  that  most  important  branch 
of  our  art,  photographic  printing. 

"  Mr.  Hearn  has  been  with  me  over  three 
years  as  printer  and  toner,  and  has  ever 
manifested  the  greatest  interest  and  enthu- 
siasm in  his  work,  seeming  to  do  his  utmost 
to  excel  and  advance  himself  continually  in 
his  chosen  department  of  our  art-science. 
It  seems  to  me  that  the  merest  tyro  could 
make  and  tone  good  prints  if  the  simple  di- 
rections in  this  book  are  faithfully  followed. 
Indeed,  this  volume  seems  to  fill  a  void  in 
our  photographic  literature  that  it  has  al- 
ways surprised  me  was  never  supplied  before. 
"  Yours  truly, 

"J.  H.  Lamson." 

This  from  his  employer  must  be  very 
gratifying  to  Mr.  Hearn,  and  it  surely  is 
to  us  as  his  publishers.  But  the  compli- 
ments do  not  stop  here. 

In  England  Mr.  Hearn's  book  has  also 
created  a  sensation,  as  the  following  ex- 
tracts from  the  photographic  magazines 
there  prove,  viz.  : 

The  Photographic  News  of  July  31st  makes 
copious  extracts  from  it,  and  says : 

"Printing  has  too  commonly  been  re- 
garded amongst  photographers  as  a  com- 
monplace and  easy  operation,  which  might 
be  relegated  to  the  care  of  boys  and  girls, 
with,  perhaps,  a  little  supervision  from  an 
experienced  person  ;  and  the  skilled  printer 
who  devotes  himself  solely  to  that  branch 
of  the  art  is  rarely  as  highly  remunerated 
as  the  equally  skilled  operator.  If  the  whole 
art  of  printing  consisted  in  producing  a 
moderately  accurate  impression  from  a  neg- 
ative, and  nothing  more,  nothing  would  be 
more  simple  and  easy.  But,  properly  esti- 
mated, the  business  of  the  printer  is  some- 
thing much  higher.  The  skilled  printer 
must  be  able  to  produce,  not  simply  the  best 
impression  of  which  a  negative  is  capable, 
but  he  must  be  able  to  produce,  if  necessary, 
a  much  better  picture  than  any  simply 
printed  impression  can  present.     He  must 


not  simply  be  master  of  the  various  modes 
of  vignetting  and  masking  to  produce  vari- 
ous shaped  medallions,  but  he  must  under- 
stand the  art  of  masking,  shading,  toning 
down,  and  double  printing,  with  a  view  to 
artistic  effect.  He  must  be  master  of  his 
methods,  so  as  to  produce  the  varied  tones 
which  may  be  required  with  certainty  and 
evenness.  He  must  be  able  to  prepare  his 
materials,  keep  them  in  order,  and  recognize 
and  rectify  disordered  conditions.  He  must 
do  this  with  the  least  possible  waste  of  paper 
and  other  material ;  and  he  must  be  able  to 
secure  the  nearest  approximation  to  per- 
manency which  can  be  hoped  for  in  silver 
printing  on  albumenized  paper.  These  are 
some  of  the  leading  qualifications  of  a  printer 
in  an  ordinary  photographic  establishment. 
If  he  can  print  well  by  development  on  col- 
lodion and  paper  ;  print  well  on  plain  paper 
and  opal  glass  ;  and  has  some  acquaintance 
with  the  various  permanent  printing  pro- 
cesses, so  much  the  better.  But  it  will  be 
admitted  that  the  possession  of  an  approxi- 
mate mastery  of  the  details  we  have  men- 
tioned involves  an  amount  of  accomplish- 
ment in  the  art  not  usually  possessed  by 
boys  and  girls,  and  entitles  the  possessor  to 
a  position  not  in  any  way  inferior  to  that  of 
skilled  hands  in  any  branch  of  the  art. 

"  Notwithstanding  the  real  importance  of 
printing  processes,  it  is  curious  how  com- 
paratively little  has  been  published  on  the 
subject.  In  all  manuals  it,  of  course,  bears 
a  part,  but  often  a  small  one  ;  and,  with  the 
exception  of  one  or  two  tractates,  no  work 
has  been  devoted  to  the  subject.  In  the 
work  before  us,  however,  silver  printing 
and  everything  connected  therewith  is 
treated  most  exhaustively,  and  the  work  is 
evidently  that  of  a  practical  man  who  speaks 
out  of  the  fulness  of  his  own  experience  in 
every  branch  of  regular  work,  as  well  as 
with  familiarity  of  the  various  forms  of 
fancy  printing,  which  have  prevailed  more 
in  America  than  in  this  country.  Mr. 
Hearn  manifestly  thoroughly  understands 
his  work,  and  is,  moreover,  a  clear  and 
vigorous  writer.  As  we  intend  making 
some  copious  extracts  from  this  work,  with 
comments  and  suggestions,  we  will  com- 
mence with  the  author's  introductory  re- 
marks on  the  printing-room." 


276 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


The  British  Journal  of  Photography  of  the 
same  date  also  extracts  several  pages  from 
the  book,  and  among  other  complimentary- 
remarks  says: 

"  In  a  closely  printed  octavo  volume  of 
one  hundred  and  ninety-two  pages,  devoted 
exclusively  to  the  subject  of  the  printing 
of  photographs,  we  naturally  anticipate 
finding  the  matter  very  fully  treated.  It 
is  a  considerable  period  since  we  rose 
from  the  perusal  of  a  new  book  on  photog- 
raphy with  feelings  of  greater  satisfaction 
than  in  the  present  instance;  and  we  appre- 
ciate the  author  as  a  writer,  not  only  thor- 
oughly conversant  with  the  subject,  but  as 
very  willing  to  impart  to  those  less  skilled 
the  knowledge  he  possesses,  and  who,  hap- 
pily, has  also  the  ability  to  do  this  in  a 
singularly  lucid  and  attractive  manner. 
There  are  over  fifty  diagrammatic  illustra- 
tions, and  a  photographic  frontispiece  by 
Gutekunst,  a  cabinet  portrait  of  a  boy,  posed 
in  an  easy  and  effective  manner,  and  printed 
in  a  deep-brown  tone,  just  verging  on  the 
violet 

"  What  treatise  on  photographic  printing 
would  be  complete  without  an  adequate 
portion  being  devoted  to  the  all-important 
topic  of  toning?  Mr.  Hearn  treats  this 
subject  with  much  fulness,  imparting  value 
to  his  observations  by  a  variety  of  formulae, 
and  has  added  practical  instructions  for  the 
guidance  of  operators,  supplementing  the 
more  purely  executive  portion  by  some  ob- 
servations on  'artistic  toning,'  which  con- 
tains such  a  happy  admixture  of  early  ex- 
perience in  toning  and  valuable  aesthetic 
observations  that  we  present  it  as  a  speci- 
men of  the  author's  style 

"'The  Practical  Printer'  is  well  'got 
up,'  and  the  work  cannot  fail  of  being  ac- 
ceptable and  useful  to  all  classes  of  photog- 
raphers, the  veteran  as  well  as  the  tyro  in 
our  art-science." 

With  these  flattering  testimonials  the 
work  needs  no  further  recommendation  from 
us.  We  are  satisfied  that  it  will  stand  on 
its  own  merits,  and  that  all  progressive  en- 
terprising photographers  everywhere  will 
buy  and  read  the  book.  No  man  in  busi- 
ness can  afford  to  be  without  it  in  his 
gallery. 


HINTS  UNDER  THE  SKYLIGHT. 

BY   R.    J.    CHUTE. 

Proportions  of  Light  and  Shade. 

Very  many  of  the  best  photographic 
productions  are  defective  in  the  composi- 
tion of  light  and  shade,  producing  either 
extremes  -of  vigor  by  violent  contrasts  of 
light  and  dark,  or  a  sameness  of  middle 
tint  over  the  whole  that  detracts  from  the 
value  of  the  lights,  and  gives  the  picture  an 
appearance  of  flatness. 

This  is  a  point  that  has  evidently  been 
overlooked,  except  by  the  most  careful  and 
cultured  artists  ;  the  consequence  has  been 
that  the  relative  proportion  of  light  and 
shade  in  a  picture  has  been  a  matter  of 
chance  or  haphazard.  Now,  there  are  certain 
rules  and  conditions  that  govern  this  as  well 
as  any  other  department  of  art,  and  it  is 
only  necessary  that  they  should  be  well 
understood,  to  be  applied  by  the  photogra- 
pher to  the  works  of  art  he  may  produce, 
as  well  as  by  the  old  masters  in  the  various 
schools  of  painting. 

Sir  Joshua  Eeynolds  gives  the  following 
as  the  result  of  his  observations  "  On  the 
works  of  those  artists  who  appear  to  have 
best  understood  the  management  of  light 
and  shade:" 

"Titian,  Paul  Veronese,  and  Tintoreti, 
were  among  the  first  painters  who  reduced 
to  a  system  what  was  before  practiced  with- 
out any  fixed  principle,  and  consequently 
neglected  occasionally. 

"  From  the  Venetian  painters  Rubens  ex- 
tracted his  scheme  of  composition,  which 
was  soon  understood  and  adopted  by  his 
countrymen,  and  extended  even  to  the 
minor  painters  of  familiar  life  in  the  Dutch 
school. 

"  When  I  was  at  Venice,  the  method  I 
took  to  avail  myself  of  their  principles  was 
this  :  When  I  observed  an  extraordinary 
effect  of  light  and  shade  in  any  picture,  I 
took  a  leaf  of  my  pocket-book,  and  dark- 
ened every  part  of  it  in  the  same  gradation 
of  light  and  shade  as  the  picture,  leaving 
the  white  paper  untouched,  to  represent 
light,  and  this  without  any  attention  to  the 
subject  or  to  the  drawing  of  the  figures.  A 
few  trials  of  this  kind  will  be  sufficient  to 
give  the  method  of  their  conduct  in  the 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER 


277 


management  of  their  lights.  After  a  few 
experiments,  I  found  the  paper  blotted 
nearly  alike ;  their  general  practice  ap- 
peared to  he,  to  allow  not  above  a  quarter 
of  the  picture  for  the  light,  including  in 
this  portion  both  the  principal  and  second- 
ary lights ;  another  quarter  to  be  as  dark 
as  possible,  and  the  remaining  half  kept  in 
mezzotint  or  half  shadow. 

"  Reubens  appears  to  have  admitted  rather 
more  light  than  a  quarter,  and  Rembrandt 
much  less,  scarce  an  eighth.  By  this  con- 
duct, Rembrandt's  light  is  extremely  bril- 
liant, but  it  costs  too  much  ;  the  rest  of  the 
picture  is  sacrificed  to  this  one  object.  That 
light  will  certainly  appear  the  brightest 
which  is  surrounded  with  the  greatest  quan- 
tity of  shade,  supposing  equal  skill  in  the 
artist." 

How  applicable  and  instructive  are  these 
observations  to  every  photographic  artist ! 
As  coming  from  one  of  the  foremost  por- 
trait painters  of  his  time,  and  being  careful 
deductions  from  the  works  of  some  of  the 
most  celebrated  artists,  they  are  especially 
worthy  of  thought  and  application  under 
the  skylight. 

The  reference  to  the  peculiar  style  of 
Rembrandt  is  more  applicable  to  photogra- 
phers of  to-day  than  to  artists  of  any  other 
period,  from  the  fact  that  there  are  so  many 
imitators  of  this  style.  "  Rembrandt's 
light  is  extremely  brilliant,  but  it  costs  too 
much."  How  true  in  reference  to  photog- 
raphy. How  many  brilliant  lights  we  see 
that  have  but  little  value,  because  other 
parts  have  suffered  so  much  in  producing 
them.  This  method  of  lighting  is  an  ex- 
treme that  is  only  justifiable  under  certain 
conditions,  or  with  certain  subjects.  For 
light  drapery  it  is  unquestionably  prefer- 
able, as  the  larger  portion  is  then  thrown  in 
the  shade,  and  takes  a  subdued  middle  tint- 
much  more  pleasing  than  the  full  glare  of 
light ;  but  for  general  practice  the  propor- 
tion of  light  used  by  the  other  masters  will 
be  more  likely  to  lead  to  successful  results. 

The  Chicago  Exhibition  showed  that 
many  of  our  photographers  still  strive  for 
the  "  costly  lights."  The  face,  with  its  fine 
modelling,  in  most  cases,  is  set  in  a  great 
expanse  of  background  of  almost  total  black- 
ness.    The  effect  is  not  pleasing ;  the  eye  is 


soon  wearied  and  turns  from  it  dissatisfied. 
A  picture  seen  from  such  a  distance  that 
the  details  cannot  be  distinguished,  will 
attract  attention  at  once,  simply  by  the 
proper  proportion  and  balance  of  light  and 
shade;  and,  on  coming  nearer,  the  eye  is 
captivated  by  its  beauty,  and  dwells  on  it 
with  satisfaction  and  delight. 

It  might  be  said  that  the  Rembrandt 
style  had  cost  too  much  in  effort  and  fail- 
ure ;  but,  though  the  expense  may  have 
been  great,  yet  the  wonderful  advance  made 
in  studying,  comprehending,  and  producing 
light  and  shade,  will  doubtless  compensate 
for  all  the  sacrifice. 


THE  EXHIBITION  AT  CHICAGO. 

As  promised  in  our  last,  we  give  this 
month  as  complete  a  list  of  the  exhibitors 
at  Chicago  as  we  could  make.  We  do  not 
pretend  to  criticize  or  compare,  for  it  is  our 
habit  not  to  do  it.  Each  person  doubtless 
exhibited  the  best  he  could  do,  and  all 
praise  is  due  him  for  his  willingness  to  do 
so.  We  regret  that  the  list  is  so  small,  but 
those  who  are  represented  therein  are  wor- 
thy of  the  highest  commendation  for' their 
public  spirit.  In  these  remarks  we  do  not 
wish  to  be  included,  for  although  we  took 
down  from  the  walls  of  our  offices  the  pre- 
cious gems  which  hang  there,  and  had  them 
sent  to  Chicago  and  exhibited  in  a  special 
room  made  to  imitate  our  home  office,  we 
are  not  producers,  and  therefore  do  not 
arrogate  anything  to  ourselves  but  the  de- 
sire to  instruct  others. 

The  display  of  apparatus  and  other  arti- 
cles needful  for  the  production  of  photo- 
graphs was  unusually  brilliant  and  fine, 
and  as  such  goods  are  judiciously  advertised 
in  our  columns,  we  merely  give  a  list  of  the 
exhibitors.  Next  year  we  do  hope  there 
will  be  more  who  have  public  spirit  and 
generosity  enough  to  give  others  the  oppor- 
tunity of  studying  their  best  works.  As 
near  as  possible  the  pictures  were  arranged 
by  States — a  good  plan. 

List  of  Exhibitors. 
L    G.  Bigelow,  Detroit,  Mich. 
S.  Root,  Dubuque,  Iowa. 
AJonfort  &  Hill,  Burlington,  Iowa. 


278 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


E.  P.  Libby,  Keokuk,  Iowa. 

J.  E.  Bilbrough,  Dubuque,  Iowa. 

B.  P.  Battels,  Akron,  Ohio. 

C.  E.  Seymour  &  Co.,  Findlay,  Ohio. 
Courtney  &  Appleton,  Millersburg,  Ohio. 

F.  S.  Crowell,  Mount  Vernon,  Ohio. 

G.  W.  Edmondson,  Plymouth,  Ohio. 
Albert  Moore,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

A.  J.  Shepler,  Canton,  Ohio. 

F.  M.  Bell  Smith,  Hamilton,  Ont. 
Wilt  Bros.,  Franklin,  Pa. 
McKecknie  &  Thompson,  Toledo,  Ohio. 
L.  W.  Roberts,  Urbana,  Ohio. 

E.  Decker,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 
Hoard  &  Tenney,  Winona,  Minn. 
W.  H.  Jacoby,  Minneapolis,  Minn. 
A.  H.  Beales,  Minneapolis,  Minn. 
J.  A.  W.  Pittman,  Carthage,  111. 
M.  C.  Edgerly,  Peru,  111. 
W.  M.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 
Cook  Ely,  Racine,  Wis. 
Mote  Bros.,  Richmond,  Ind. 

C.  Murr,  Joliet,  111. 

Pickerell  &  White,  Indianapolis,  Ind. 

G.  Bacon,  Pekin,  111. 

D.  H.  Wright,  Terre  Haute,  Ind. 
H.  0.  Heichert,  Frankfort,  Ind. 
S.  M.  Taylor,  Berlin,  Wis. 

.  S.  W.  Truesdell,  Kenosha,  Wis. 

D.  Bendann,  Baltimore,  Md. 
J.  W.  Bryant,  Laporte,  Ind. 
C.  C.  Giers,  Nashville,  Tenn. 
N.  H.  Busey,  Baltimore,  Md. 

E.  Schultheis,  Baltimore,  Md. 
I.  B.  Webster,  Louisville,  Ky. 
W.  C.  Eaton,  Newark,  N.  J. 
E.  L.  Eaton,  Omaha,  Neb. 

J.  L.  Knight,  Topeka,  Kansas. 

C.  L.  Pond,  Buffalo,  N.  Y. 

J.  Smith,  Chicago,  111. 

Copelin  A  Sod,  Chicago,  111. 

H.  W.  Loveday,  Chicago,  111. 

C.  Gentile,  Chicago,  111. 

J.  A.  Morris,  Chicago,  111. 

E.  D.  Ormsby,  Chicago,  111. 

0.  F.  Weaver,  Chicago,  111. 

S.  Rabal,  Evanston,  111. 

J.  Battersby,  Chicago,  111. 

L.  Alschuler,  Chicago,  III. 

S.  M.  Fassett,  Chicago,  111. 

Bradley  &  Rulofson,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 

G.  0.  Hallwig,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

E.  L.  Brand  &  Co.,  Chicago,  111. 

C.  D.  Mosher,  Chicago,  111. 

Henry  Rocher,  Chicago,  111. 

A.  Hesler,  Evanston,  111. 

W.  R.  Howell,  New  York. 


R.  Benecke,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 
E.  R.  Weston,  Bangor,  Me. 
J.  W.  Black,  Boston,  Mass. 

D.  K.  Prescott,  Boston,  Mass. 
M.  T.  Carter,  Worcester,  Mass. 
Allen  &  Rowell,  Boston,  Mass. 
A.  N.  Hardy,  Boston,  Mass. 

T.  R.  Burnham,  Boston,  Mass. 
J.  Barbydt,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

E.  M.  Collins,  Oswego,  N.  Y. 
J.  K.  Stevens,  Chicago,  111. 
A.  Hall,  Chicago,  111. 

Geo.  Barker,  Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y. 

Joslin  &  Phillips,  Danville.  111. 

W.  E.  Bowman,  Ottawa,  111. 

A.  Bogardus,  New  York. 

A.  C.  Partridge,  Boston,  Mass. 

E.  L.  Wilson,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

L.  M.  Melander,  Chicago,   111. 

L.  S.  White,  Indianapolis,  Ind. 

C.  A.  Zimmerman,  St.  Paul,  Minn. 

Fred.  Wingard,  Chicago,  111. 

Z.  P.  McMillen,  Galesburg,  111. 

J.  Q.  A.  Tresize,  Springfield,  111. 

Otto  Westerman,  Pekin,  III. 

J.  W.  Wykes,  Quincy,  111. 

S.  B.  Wilson,  Washington,  111. 

Bulla  Bros.,  South  Bend,  Ind. 

S.  A.  Anderson,  New  Orleans,  La. 

Mrs.  M.  A.  Thornton,  Perrysburg,  Ohio. 

G.  M.  Carlisle,  Providence,  R.  I. 

A.  J.  T.  Joslin,  Gilman,  111. 

Thos.  H.  Rutter  &  Co.,  Deer  Lodge  City,  Mon- 
tana. 

Photographic  Requisites. 

Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

N.  C.  Thayer  &  Co.,  Chicago,  111. 

E.  &  H.  T.  Anthony  &  Co.,  New  York. " 

Gatchel  &  Hyatt,  Cincinnati,  St.  Louis,  Ac. 

Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  New  York. 

C.  W.  Stevens,  Chicago,  111. 

Taft  &  Schwamb,  Chicago,  III. 

B.  French  &  Co.,  Boston,  Mass. 

C.  F.  Usener,  New  York. 

J.  P.  Beard  &  Co.,  Chicago,  III. 

A.  P.  C.  Bonte,  Chicago,  111. 

W.  W.  Gillis,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

L.  W.  Seavey,  New  York. 

L.  Pattberg  &  Bro.,  New  York. 

Nason  Novelty  Co.,  Columbus,  0. 

W.  G.  Entrekin,  Manayunk,  Pa. 

L.  V.  Moulton,  Beaver  Dam,  Wisconsin. 

Rice  &  Thompson,  Chicago,  HI. 

E.  L.  Brand  &  Co.,  Chicago,  111. 

Benerman  &  Wilson,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

L.  G.  Bigelow,  Detroit,  Michigan. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


279 


Class  in  Landscape  Photography. 

Unlike  the  portrait  photographer,  who 
has  his  subjects  come  to  him,  and  who  is 
obliged  to  take  them  as  they  come,  favor- 
able or  unfavorable,  the  landscape  artist 
has  the  larger  liberty  of  going  out  and 
choosing  his.  The  whole  broad  expanse  of 
nature  is  before  him,  and  his  success  de- 
pends upon  the  degree  of  skill  he  may  pos- 
sess in  choosing  the  subjects  that  lie  all 
about  him.  With  this  freedom  of  choice, 
there  comes  to  many,  especially  to  the  be- 
ginner, a  feeling  or  a  wish  to  do  something 
grand.  He  sees  no  subject  of  sufficient  in- 
terest for  his  camera  ;  nothing  short  of  the 
roaring  cataract  of  Niagara,  the  towering 
peaks  of  the  Sierra  Nevadas,  or  the  mag- 
nificent heights  and  depths  of  the  Yosemite 
Valley,  will  do  for  him. 

These  are  among  the  grandest  subjects  in 
the  world,  but  pictures  of  them,  even,  may 
fall  below  mediocrity,  unless  the  eye  of  an 
artist  and  a  love  for  the  beautiful  guide  in 
their  production.  Under  the  direction  of 
these  there  are  pictures  everywhere,  beauti- 
ful gems  lie  all  about  us,  and  if  we  only  see 
aright  we  may  find  beauties  near  our  own 
homes  that  we  have  never  dreamed  of. 

This  choice  of  the  subject  in  landscape 
photography  ranks  in  importance  far  above 
formula,  manipulation,  or  any  other  acces- 
sory consideration  connected  with  the  work. 
It  is  on  this  point  that  study,  skill,  and 
judgment  should  be  brought  to  bear,  more 
than  on  any  other. 

In  making  a  selection  for  a  view,  the 
first  consideration  is  to  find  a  subject ;  it 
must  consist  of  something  that  can  be  read 
without  a  detailed  description  being  given 
with  it.  It  may  consist  of  a  building,  a 
number  of  buildings,  a  street,  a  panoramic 
view,  a  mountain,  valley,  lake,  river,  water- 
fall, a  bridge,  a  ruin,  or  instantaneous  ma- 
rine. Whatever  it  may  be,  the  subject  is 
to  be  first  chosen  ;  then  examine  it  from  dif- 
ferent points  and  in  different  lights,  to  see 
which  presents  it  most  favorably.  If  upon 
selecting  a  point  from  which  the  view  com- 
poses well,  that  is,  presents  good  fore,  mid- 
dle-ground, and  distance,  and  yet  the  light 
is  not  favorable,  then  take  advantage  again 
of  the  freedom  you  have  in  treating  your 
subject,  and  go  either  earlier  or  later  in  the 


day,  when  the  light  may  be  best  for  pro- 
ducing a  truthful  and  pictorial  representa- 
tion. 

In  this  connection  it  may  be  well  to  re- 
mark that  a  view  should  never  be  made 
with  a  direct  front-light  any  more  than  a 
portrait.  The  principle  governing  one  in 
this  respect  is  applicable  to  the  other.  The 
light  should  always  come  from  the  side, 
and,  according  to  the  subject,  may  be  most 
favorable  at  noonday  or  in  the  morning  or 
afternoon.  A  subject  that  is  composed  of 
a  great  many  members  may  be  photo- 
graphed best  when  the  sun  is  high,  as  the 
light  falling  obliquely  upon  them  runs  them 
together  in  confusion;  while,  on  the  con- 
trary, a  subject  in  which  the  members  are 
few  and  scattered  will  be  made  most  effect- 
ive by  their  lengthened  shadows,  which 
tend  to  unite  the  several  parts. 

In  a  diffused  light,  of  course  there  is  but 
little  latitude  in  this  direction;  rbut  we 
would  suggest  to  those  that  are  yet  inex- 
perienced in  this  department  that  very  few 
views  are  as  effective  without  sunlight  as 
with.  A  subject  that  includes  strong  con- 
trasts of  dark  and  light,  as  a  white  house 
surrounded  with  dark  foliage,  is  better  pho- 
tographed in  a  diffused  light.  But  for  gen- 
eral landscape  work,  the  beauty  of  any 
scene  is  enriched  and  intensified  by  the 
glory  of  the  sunlight  falling  upon  it  from 
such  direction  as  shall  have  been  chosen  by 
artistic  judgment,  according  to  the  subject 
and  composition. 

In  selecting  the  best  point  of  view  of  any 
subject,  consideration  must  be  had  as  to  its 
form  and  surroundings.  A  little  in  per- 
spective is  usually  better  for  a  building 
than  a  direct  front  view.  If  it  be  sur- 
rounded with  trees,  or  other  buildings  near 
it,  then  the  view  should  be  from  such  point 
as  to  compose  these  to  the  best  advantage. 
By  composing  is  meant  to  place  them  in 
such  positions  as  will  assist  in  giving  prom- 
inence and  character  to  the  principal  object 
in  the  picture.  Sometimes  a  tree  or  mass 
of  foliage  in  the  immediate  foreground,  in- 
troduced as  a  whole  or  in  part,  according  to 
its  dimensions  and  the  size  of  the  picture, 
is  very  effective  in  giving  depth  and  force 
to  the  composition.  Again,  trees  or  other 
buildings  help  to  form  the  background,  and 


280 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


give  support  and  relief  to  the  subject.  All 
these  are  accessory,  and  should  always  be 
kept  subordinate,  both  as  to  position  or 
prominence.  With  a  panoramic  view,  such 
position  should  be  chosen  as  will  include 
the  subject  to  the  best  advantage,  giving 
the  preference  to  that  which  would  place  a 
range  of  hills  or  mountains,  if  such  there 
be,  in  the  background,  avoiding  always  in 
the  view  any  lines,  that  is,  a  repetition  of 
lines,  that  might  run  either  horizontally  or 
vertically. 

That  picture  of  a  mountain  or  valley  is 
best  which  gives  a  correct  idea  of  its  height 
and  depth.  A  view  of  a  mountain  simply 
by  itself,  showing  its  two  sloping  sides,  con- 
veys no  estimate  of  its  magnitude:  it  may 
be  a  mountain  or  a  mere  hillock;  but  when 
we  get  the  outline  of  the  side  of  a  mountain, 
tracing  it  from  the  sky  to  its  base  in  the 
valley  below,  with  a  portion  of  foreground 
and  distance  to  support  it,  we  then  see  its 
vast  proportions,  and  can  estimate  the 
value  given  to  the  mountain  by  the  valley, 
and  vice  versa. 

(To  be  continued.) 


MATTERS    OF   THE 


Membership  costs  $2;  annual  dues,  $4,  in 
advance.  Life  membership,  $25,  and  no 
dues.  It  is  proposed  presently  to  double  the 
fees  for  life  membership. 

Members  are  hereby  notified  that  their 
annual  dues  were  payable  June  1st,  1874. 
Employers  $4,  and  employes  $2.  The 
Treasurer  urges  that  prompt  remittances  be 
made.     Please  remit  now. 

All  remittances  of  back  dues  should  be 
sent  to  the  Treasurer,  Albert  Moore,  828 
Wood  Street,  Philadelphia,  and  fees  and 
dues  for  new  members  to  the  Permanent 
Secretary,  Edward  L.  Wilson,  Seventh  and 
Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


Life  Members. — A  list  of  the  new  life 
members  will  be  given  next  month.  It  was 
proposed  to  do  so  this  month,  but  the  Ex- 
ecutive Committee  have  not  met. 

The  Report  of  the  Proceedings  of  the  late 
Convention  will  be  issued  by  the  Association 
in  pamphlet  form.  Before  printing,  the 
Executive  Committee  desire  to  know  how 
many  copies  will  be  needed,  and  therefore 
request  those  who  wish  copies  to  notify  the 
Permanent  Secretary  how  many  at  once. 
The  price  is  $1  per  copy.  Those  not  mem- 
bers of  the  Association  who  subscribe  will 
also  be  supplied.  The  report  will  be  valu- 
able to  every  photographer. 

It  was  announced  to  all  the  members  of 
the  Association  by  postal  card,  that  orders 
for  copies  must  be  received  by  August  15th, 
but  as  enough  orders  to  pay  for  the  publi- 
cation were  not  received  by  that  time,  the 
offer  is  made  good  until  September  20th. 
It  is  a  pity  that  the  publication  of  the  re- 
port should  be  delayed  in  this  way.  Last 
year  it  will  be  remembered  that  we  had  the 
report  complete  in  our  September  number. 
u  Large  bodies  move  slowl3r,"  certainly  in 
this  case.  But  the  delay  is  caused  by  those 
to  whom  the  report  will  do  most  good. 

The  1874  Badge.— Members  of  the  Na- 
tional Photographic  Association  who  were 
not  present  at  Chicago,  may  obtain  the 
1874  Badge  by  sending  a  three-cent  stamp 
to  the  Permanent  Secretary.  It  contains 
the  portrait  of  the  Permanent  Secretary. 

The  New  President.— Mr.  W.  H.  Rulofson, 
of  San  Francisco,  proved  to  be  a  good  choice 
at  Chicago,  and  but  for  his  energy  and 
push,  the  Association  would  yet  be  largely 
in  debt.  He  seemed  to  comprehend  the 
situation  at  once,  and  took  hold  of  it  with 
all  the  zeal  and  business  tact  (for  which  he 
is  so  famous  as  a  business  man  at  home)  in 
his  make-up,  until  there  was  a  good  pros- 
pect of  the  debt  being  wiped  out.  And  he 
not  only  urged  the  members  to  do  all  in 
their  power,  but  personally  he  did  much 
more  than  his  share.  He  purchased  liber- 
ally of  the  articles  which  were  given  for 
the  debt  fund,  and  gave  himself  the  hand- 
some collection  of  large  portraits  and  views 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


281 


he  had  on  exhibition ;  and  further,  he 
stood  upon  a  pedestal  one  evening  for  over 
two  hours,  in  the  role  of  an  auctioneer,  and 
in  his  inimitable  style  sold  his  own  and 
other  pictures  to  the  highest  bidder.  "We 
do  not  think  those  who  were  present  at  this 
auction  ever  had  more  real  mirthful  enjoy- 
ment crowded  into  two  hours  than  they 
had  on  that  occasion.  Long  live  the  new 
President. 

How  it  was  Done. — All  praise  to  Local 
Secretary  Hesler.  In  his  characteristically 
quiet  and  unostentatious  way,  he  has 
done  what  was  never  done  before  by  any  of 
his  predecessors.  He  obtained  contribu- 
tions from  citizens  sufficient,  with  the  fees 
paid  by  dealers,  not  only  to  pay  the  entire 
expenses  of  the  Convention  and  Exhibition, 
but  to  place  in  the  treasury  a  balance  of 
very  nearly  three  hundred  dollars.  And 
this,  too,  with  a  free  exhibition.  Was  that 
not  handsome  ?  All  praise,  too,  to  those  who 
gave  him  their  subscriptions  and  paid  them. 
The  names  of  the  donors  should  also  be 
placed  on  record,  and  we  extract  them  from 
Mr.  Hosier's  report: 

Subscriptions.  —  C.  W.  Stevens,  $250  ; 
Kice  &  Thompson,  $50;  A.  P.  C.  Bonte, 
$50  ;  C.  D.  Mosher,  $100  ;  D.  H.  Cross,  $25  ; 
Miss  Gilbert,  Miss  Carr,  Messrs.  P.  Win- 
gard,  J.  P.  Edgeworth,  O.  P.  Weaver, 
Joshua  Smith,  Lovejoy  &  Foster,  Chicago 
Kenning  Co.,  and  W.  E.  Bowman,  each  $10; 
Copelin  &  Son,  $50;  H.  Kocher,  $25;  and 
C.  Gentille,  $25.  Palmer  House,  $100 ; 
Grand  Pacific  Hotel,  $100;  Tremont  House, 
$50;  Clifton  House,  $50;  Commercial,  $25; 
St.  James,  $25;  Kuhns,  $25;  Matteson, 
$25;  Brevoort,  $25;  Metropolitan,  $10;  in 
all  $1100. 

The  following  dealers  paid  $50  each  for 
their  exhibition  space.  It  will  be  noticed 
that  several  of  these  subscribed  to  the  ex- 
penses additionally:  Messrs.  C.  W.  Stevens, 
Eice  &  Thompson,  A.  P.  C.  Bonte,  J.  P. 
Beard  &  Co.,  N.  C.  Thayer  &  Co.,  E.  L. 
Brand  &  Co.,  Taft  &  Schwamb,  Scovill 
Manufacturing  Co.,  Benerman  &  Wilson, 
E.  &  H.  T.  Anthony  &  Co.,  B.  French  & 
Co.,  L.  W.  Seavey,  Gatchel  &  Hyatt,  L. 
Pattberg  &  Brother,  W.  W.  Gillis. 


Total  from  dealers, 
Subscriptions, 
Admittance      to 
badges,  &c, 

Total  receipts, 
Entire  expenses,    . 


meetings, 


$750  00 
1100  00 

62  70 

$1912  70 
1618  67 


Sent  to  the  Treasurer  by  Local 

Secretary  Hesler,        .         .     $294  03 

It  will  be  seen,  then,  that  the  total  ex- 
penses of  the  Convention  is  $1618.67,  of 
which  amount  Chicago  alone  paid  $1100. 
The  balance  was  paid  by  the  fees  from 
dealers. 


».Jl=,lr,b1l^linbib1l=1Lnbil^LnljbiUI=ilJiL=1l=.LnLnLnl=iL:1L 


ail 


Dear  Sir  :  A  friend  suggests,  as  a  good 
way  to  obviate  the  necessity  of  using  Shaw's 
process  to  recover  silver  from  hypo  solution, 
to  put  the  spent  hypo  solution  into  an  iron 
kettle,  and  boil  it  down  to  crystallizing- 
point.  The  soda  crystallizes  and  the  silver 
falls  down  in  a  deposit  at  bottom  of  kettle, 
thus  saving  soda  and  silver.  If  this  is  so, 
Mr.  Shaw  had  better  squelch  on  the  sul- 
phuret  of  potassium  claim,  as  it  is  of  no  use. 

E.  S.  C. 

This  plan  will  not  answer,  as  the  hypo- 
sulphate  of  soda  and  chloride  or  iodide  of 
silver  form  double  soluble  salts,  which  will 
crystallize  out  with  the  hypo,  and  not  fall 
to  the  bottom  as  an  insoluble  precipitate.  M. 

In  reading  articles  on  "  Silvering  Paper  " 
in  your  valuable  journal,  and  other  publica- 
tions, I  frequently  meet  the  phrase,  "  Dry 
quickly.1' 

Will  you  be  so  kind  as  to  tell  us  in  some 
future  number  what  is  meant  by  that  phrase  ? 
It  is  probably  a  small  matter,  but  I  believe 
the  smallest  matters  should  be  done  rightly 


282 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPSEE. 


in  order  to  make  perfect  results.  To  "  dry 
quickly"  may  mean  in  five  minutes  or  five 
hours. 

What  is  the  most  approved  plan  for  quick 
drying?  D.  E.  Smith. 

Any  method  of  applying  artificial  heat, 
whether  from  a  furnace-register,  a  stove, 
gas,  or  lamp,  will  answer  the  purpose. 
Will  some  printer  give  his  method  and 
reasons  for  quick  drying  ?  Sphynx. 

Will  Sphynx  please  tell  me  what  is  the 
cause  of  ferrotypes  drying  a  yellowish  dead 
color  after  varnishing,  looking  something 
like  reflected  light?  I  have  been  bothered 
for  two  or  three  springs  past  (only  in  the 
spring,  however).  I  have  tried  everything 
I  can  think  of  up  to  this  time,  but  have  not 
succeeded  in  finding  a  remedy  as  yet. 

I  find  I  am  not  alone  in  this  trouble,  as  I 
have  seen  it  in  the  pictures  of  others  time 
and  again. 

Some  have  said  it  was  caused  by  over- 
exposure and  too  strong  a  developer.  If 
Sphynx  will  give  a  remedy  that  will  cure 
the  disease  he  will  greatly  oblige 

W.  J.   HlLLMAN. 

Please  tell  me  how  to  give  an  extra  polish 
to  prints  without  a  roller,  and  oblige    H. 

The  best  method  we  know  of  is  to  use 
"Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameller,"  adver- 
tised on  the  outside  of  the  cover.  Or  see 
Mosaics,  1872,  page  93.  Sphynx. 

First.  What  substance  will  produce  a 
perfectly  white  coating  on  ferrotype  plates  or 
any  dark  body  ;  the  same  not  to  affect  pho- 
tographic operations  upon  it,  but  to  remain 
white  ? 

Second.  Also  a  good  process  for  photo- 
graphing on  wood;  the  mode  of  printing, 
&c.  Inquirer. 

First. — You  ask  too  much ;  we  don't 
know.  One  of  the  most  diligent  experi- 
menters in  photography  spent  many  years 
and  his  best  energies  in  solving  this  very 
question.  He  succeeded  to  some  extent, 
but  he  is  dead,  and  his  process,  so  far  as  we 
know,  remains  a  secret. 

Second. — A  good  process  for  photograph- 
ing on  wood  was  published  in  the  Philadel- 
phia Photographer  for  July,  1866. 

Sphynx. 


Answer  to  Olivia  Brown. — The  tone 
or  color  of  the  negative  is  usually  produced 
by  the  development  or  redevelopment,  ex- 
cept where  a  blackening  or  toning  solution, 
such  as  sulphuret  of  potash  or  bichloride 
of  mercury,  is  used  afterwards,  and  the 
development  will  produce  different  effects 
according  to  the  time  of  exposure.  The 
action  of  the  developer  is  affected  by  the 
quantity  of  acid  used,  and  the  condition  of 
the  collodion  and  bath  may  also  affect  the 
result.  But  the  "  olive  brown"  tone  is  most 
effectually  produced  by  making  a  negative 
a  little  weak,  and  strengthening  a  trifle  with 
pyrogallic  acid  after  development.  Pyro- 
gallic  acid  2  grains,  citric  acid  H  grains  to 
the  ounce  of  water.  Sufficient  of  this  solu- 
tion to  cover  the  plate,  and  a  half  dozen 
drops  of  a  weak  silver  solution,  say  from 
15  to  20  grains  to  the  ounce,  flowed  off  and 
on  the  plate  a  few  times,  will  give  the  de- 
sired effect. 

Sphynx. 

A  Tintype  Puzzle  for  Sphynx. — 
Some  years  since  I  was  copying  a  daguer- 
reotype, by  the  daguerreotype  process,  and 
by  oversight  left  the  plate  exposed  to  the 
original  all  night,  and  until  10  o'clock  next 
day,  when  on  taking  the  plate  out,  I  found  a 
picture  as  distinctly  formed  as  if  it  had  been 
mercurialized  ;  this  to  me  was  a  puzzle,  and 
is  yet,  as  the  copying-room  was  so  far  from 
the  dark-room.  A  short  time  since  I  placed  • 
two  ferrotype  plates  in  a  wet  state,  face  to  face, 
and  left  them  to  dry.  On  taking  them  apart 
I  found  that  the  image  on  each  plate  had 
impressed  itself  on  the  other,  just  as  per- 
fectly as  if  it  had  been  lighted  and  devel- 
oped in  the  usual  way.  These  plates  had 
been  just  exposed,  developed,  cleaned,  and 
washed  in  the  usual  way,  and  had  dried 
during  the  night  in  the  dark-room.  I  send 
you  one  of  the  plates. 

Who  will  "  rise  to  explain  "  ?  M. 

By  a  mishap  I  have  recently  had  a 
clothes-pin  (brass  spring)  to  fall  into  each 
a  printing  and  negative  bath  ;  the  former 
I  boiled  down  and  fused ;  still  there  is  a 
greenish-looking  appearance  in  it.  Can 
you  tell  me  how  I  can  get  rid  of  the  copper, 
which  I  presume  it  is?  Each  coil  of  spring 
was  coated  with  a  heavy  deposit  of  metallic 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


283 


silver,  and  a  solid  mass.     Shall  I  send  this 
to  a  refiner  with  other  waste? 

L.  W.  Keen. 

There  is  no  way  of  getting  rid  of  the 
copper.  Try  the  bath  ;  it  may  work  :  if  it 
does  not,  you  will  have  to  put  it  aside  with 
your  wastes.  Save  also  the  metallic  silver 
deposited  on  the  brass  springs  for  refining 
with  your  other  wastes.  M.  H.  M. 

Since  the  above,  Mr.  Keen  writes  us  that 
his  bath  has  got  to  work,  and  is  better  than 
before.  Sphynx. 

Dear  Sphynx:  I  have  been  troubled  for 
three  weeks  with  a  peculiar  case  of  streaks, 
which  I  have  never  seen  explained  in  any 
publication.  They  are  always  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  dip,  and  appear  similar  to  Mr. 
Anderson's  cut,  No.  153,  but  are  not  by  the 
same  cause.  It  seems  to  make  no  difference 
how  long  the  plate  is  held  before  dipping, 
or  how  slow  it  is  dipped,  it  is  all  the  same. 
At  first  I  thought  they  were  caused  by  the 
bath  or  by  dipping,  but  find  they  are  not. 
Some  plates  are  worse  than  others,  and  oc- 
casionally I  don't  see  them,  which  indicates 
that  the  fault  is  in  the  plates.  I  use  my 
plates  over  and  over  again,  and  very  seldom 
use  new  ones.  The  streaks  show  plainly  on 
the  plate  when  taken  from  the  bath,  and  of 
course  the  exposure  and  development  bring 
them  out  stronger. 

"When  I  coat  a  plate  (dark-room  not 
warm),  the  underside  of  the  plate  becomes 
moist,  and  a  spotty,  streaky  moisture  it  is, 
which  means  unclean  plate,  although  the 
plate  looks  clean  when  albumenized.  I 
soak  my  plates  over  night  in  a  saturated 
solution  of  concentrated  potash,  wash  and 
soak  in  a  dilute  nitric  acid  solution,  one- 
quarter  acid,  three-quarters  water,  twelve 
hours.  There  I  suppose  is  where  the  trouble 
is ;  acid  should  not  be  diluted.     Thomas. 

Warm  your  room,  and  expel  the  damp- 
ness. Your  plates  are  too  long  in  the  potash. 
Being  repeated  again  and  again  the  plates 
become  rusted.  Your  acid  is  strong  enough. 
Try  a  new  plate  that  you  know  to  be  clean. 

For  a  method  of  cleaning  off  varnished 
films,  see  the  last  April  issue  of  the  Phila- 
delphia Photographer,  page  107. 

Sphynx. 


NOTES  IN  AND  OUT  OF  THE 
STUDIO. 

BY    G.    WHARTON    SIMPSON,    M.A.,    F.S.A. 

Enamel    Photography. — Reproducing    Nega- 
tives, and  Printing  from  Two  Negatives. 

Enamel  Photography. — There  is,  proba- 
bly, no  branch  of  photography  producing 
results  of  such  high  excellence,  which  has 
made  so  little  headway  with  the  mass  of 
photographers,  as  that  devoted  to  the  pro- 
duction of  ceramic  photographs.  A  fine 
photographic  enamel  is,  as  a  rule,  an  em- 
bodiment of  all  that  can  be  desired  in  a 
photograph.  It  possesses  the  delicacy  of 
the  daguerreotype  with  the  vigor  of  a  paper 
print,  and  a  peculiar  softness  without  loss 
of  definition,  and  a  pearly  tenderness  in  the 
minor  lights  rarely  found  in  any  other  pic- 
ture. And  it  is  not  only  permanent,  but 
indestructible,  unless,  indeed,  it  be  crushed 
under  a  hammer,  or  melted  in  a  furnace. 
And  yet,  although  modes  of  producing  such 
charming  portraits  have  existed  for  nearly 
twenty  years,  the  art  is  still  in  its  infancy, 
and  those  who  undertake  its  study  may  be 
counted  by  tens  instead  of  tens  of  thousands. 

There  are  three  distinct  methods  of  pro- 
ducing enamels.  The  three  processes  are — 
the  tissue  process,  the  conversion  process, 
and  the  powder  process.  The  tissue  process 
consists  in  preparing  a  tissue  like  carbon 
tissue,  using  a  ceramic  powder  in  place  of 
carbon  or  other  pigment.  This  has  been 
but  little  practiced.  The  conversion  pro- 
cess consists  in  producing  a  positive  image 
by  the  wet  process,  and  toning  it  with  pla- 
tinum, gold,  iridium,  palladium,  or  some 
other  metal,  and  then,  after  transferring  the 
image  to  a  suitable  place,  vitrifying  it  by 
the  action  of  heat  in  the  ordinary  muffle 
furnace. 

The  powder  process,  as  your  readers  know, 
consists  in  producing  a  sticky  image,  by 
means  of  a  film  of  bichromate  and  gelatin 
film,  to  which  a  ceramic  powder  adheres  in 
the  exact  ratio  of  its  protection  from  the 
action  of  light  by  the  opaque  parts  of  the 
negative. 

The  powder  process  is,  in  many  respects, 
the  most  easy  method  of  the  three ;  it  is 
more  essentially  mechanical  than  the  others, 
and,   in   some    respects,   more    completely 


284 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


under  control  than  they  are.  And  yet  it 
is  much  less  practiced  than  the  conversion 
process.  We  do  not  at  the  present  moment 
know  a  single  photographer  in  this  country 
who  practices  the  powder  process,  whilst 
there  are  perhaps  a  dozen  practicing  the 
conversion  process.  The  fact  appears  to  be 
this  :  although  there  are  many  uncertainties 
in  the  conversion  process,  the  results,  when 
perfect  success  is  attained,  are  infinitely 
finer  than  any  other.  It  is  not  difficult,  as 
a  rule,  to  distinguish  by  which  process  an 
enamel  has  been  produced.  The  image  pro- 
duced by  the  powder  process  rarely  possesses 
the  delicacy  of  that  produced  by  the  con- 
version process.  There  is  a  certain  dull 
opaqueness  in  the  shadows,  and  at  times  a 
granular  quality  in  the  deposit,  which  con- 
trasts very  unfavorably  with  the  translucent 
delicacy  obtained  by  the  other  process. 
Whether  equally  good  results  can  be  pro- 
duced by  each  process  we  cannot  say,  for 
profound  secrecy  is  preserved  by  some  of 
those  who  produce  the  finest  results  ;  but 
we  believe  that  the  most  successful  men  use 
the  conversion  process. 

Besides  being  inferior  in  delicacy,  a 
variety  of  minor  difficulties  have  beset  the 
powder  process,  arising  from  the  presence 
of  the  chromic  salt.  In  the  powder  process 
there  are  two  or  three  advantages  of  the 
utmost  importance.  In  the  first  place  there 
is  more  complete  control  over  the  tone  of 
the  picture  than  in  the  conversion  process. 
In  the  latter  there  is  generally  more  or  less 
uncertainty  of  the  precise  tone  a  picture 
will  possess  after  it  is  burnt.  In  the  powder 
process,  if  a  suitable  ceramic  pigment  has 
been  chosen,  it  will  generally  burn  to  the 
precise  tint  for  which  it  has  been  selected. 
The  greatest  advantage  possessed  by  the 
powder  process  consists  in  the  control  which 
the  operator  possesses  over  the  character  of 
the  picture,  in  applying  the  powder  in 
greater  or  less  proportion  upon  different 
parts  of  the  image. 

In  a  recent  paper  read  before  the  Vienna 
Society,  Herr  Obernetter  states  that  he  has 
overcome  many  of  the  difficulties  of  the 
powder  process.  I  believe,  however,  that 
it  is  not  under  the  best  conditions  capable 
of  producing  results  of  such  exquisite  deli- 
cacy and  beauty  as  the  conversion  process, 


and  as  it  involves  the  use  of  processes  and 
materials  with  which  photographers  are 
unfamiliar,  it  is  not  likely  to  become  so 
popular  as  the  conversion  process.  All  the 
manipulative  details  of  the  latter  are  simple 
enough,  but  the  highest  excellence  depends 
very  much  upon  exact  formula,  and  the 
best  formula  are  secrets  which  the  very  few 
possessors  regard  as  valuable  property.  The 
worst  of  buying  a  secret  process  is  the  un- 
certainty whether  the  secret  when  commu- 
nicated will  be  worth  the  money.  The  only 
guarantee  the  purchaser  can  have  is  the 
sight  of  excellent  results,  and  the  good  faith 
of  the  vendor.  I  noticed  in  a  recent  Pho- 
tographer, that  you  contemplated  aiding 
your  readers  to  purchase  the  secret  formula 
of  Mr.  Robinson's  process.  Certainly  pur- 
chasers will  possess  the  guarantee  of  won- 
derful excellence  of  result,  and  the  good 
faith  does  not  need  affirming.  I  have 
rarely  seen  such  magnificent  results  in  en- 
amelling as  those  produced  by  Mr.  Robin- 
son. Ah  amusing  pother  has  been  made  in 
a  journal  on  this  side,  by  an  experimentalist 
who  once  sold  Mr.  Robinson  some  hints, 
now  claiming  the  credit  of  the  grand  results, 
which  by  carefully  working  the  thing  out 
Mr.  Robinson  has  been  able  to  arrive  at! 
And  I  think  it  is  further  insinuated,  that 
you  are  a  very  wicked  person  to  try  to  aid 
in  placing  a  good  process  in  the  hands  of 
your  readers ! 

Reproducing  Negatives,  and  Printing  from 
Two  Negatives. — The  method  of  reproducing 
negatives  by  the  powder  process  has  been 
receiving  considerable  attention  here.  The 
extreme  simplicity  of  the  process,  the  fact 
that  a  negative  is  produced  from  a  negative 
at  one  operation  without  the  need  of  first 
producing  a  transparent  positive,  and  the 
real  excellence  of  the  results,  have  combined 
to  give  a  special  interest  to  the  process.  A 
practical  demonstration  of  the  process  show- 
ing its  value  for  various  purposes,  and  the 
simplicity  with  which  it  could  be  worked, 
was  recently  given  at  a  meeting  of  the  South 
London  Photographic  Society.  I  would 
commend  this  method  of  illustrating  a  sub- 
ject to  photographic  societies  amongst  you. 
Where  it  is  possible  to  demonstrate  any  new 
process  by  practically  working,  chatting 
about   the    thing,   asking    and    answering 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGE APHEK. 


285 


questions,  it  gives  a  singularly  interesting 
and  instructive  character  to  a  meeting. 

Amongst  the  incidental  advantages  of  the 
method  of  reproducing  negatives  to  which 
I  am  referring,  there  are  two  or  three  of 
especial  importance.  Your  readers  are 
familiar  with  the  idea  of  using  two  nega- 
tives, one  placed  behind  the  other,  for  the 
purpose  of  producing  one  print,  soft,  round, 
and  vigorous.  Indeed,  if  I  remember 
rightly,  the  idea  was  first  published  in 
America,,  This,  it  is  understood,  is  the  plan 
by  which  Denier,  of  St.  Petersburg,  pro- 
duces the  charmingly  artistic  portraits  which 
have  obtained  much  celebrity.  An  appli- 
cation of  this  powder  process  to  the  purpose 
in  question  was  shown  at  the  South  London 
meeting  by  Mr.  B.  J.  Edwards. 

He  showed  a  print  obtained  from  a  good, 
thin,  sharp  negative,  and  a  print  from  the 
same  negative  with  a  duplicate  negative 
image  placed  behind  it.  The  latter  was 
decidedly  an  improvement  upon  the  first, 
although  the  first  was  an  unusually  fine 
picture.  The  print  obtained  when  the  light 
traversed  two  negatives,  had,  as  in  Denier's 
portraits,  a  peculiarly  rich,  solid,  and  artistic 
quality.  Whilst  there  was  perfect  defini- 
tion as  to  the  result  of  the  contact  negative, 
there  was  a  peculiar  fulness  of  modelling, 
and  a  singular  softness  without  fuzziness, 
produced  by  the  light  passing  through  the 
negative  not  in  contact. 

In  Mr.  Edwards's  experiments,  he  had 
placed  both  the  negatives  on  one  glass,  the 
duplicate  being  on  the  back  of  the  glass  con- 
taining the  original  negative,  in  manner 
similar  to  the  duplicate  negatives  you  de- 
scribed some  time  ago,  obtained  by  coating 
both  sides  of  the  glass  with  collodion,  and 
producing  the  duplicate  image  in  the  camera. 
Mr.  Edwards  coats  the  back  of  his  negative 
with  the  bichromated  syrup,  and  exposes 
the  front  to  parallel  rays,  so  as  to  secure  a 
moderately  sharp  image  by  printing  on  the 
sensitive  film  through  the  glass.  The  ex- 
posure must  be  a  full  one,  as  the  light  im- 
pinging on  the  under  side  of  the  bichromated 
film  must  pass  quite  through  it  in  order  to 
give  a  satisfactory  image,  and  admit  of  de- 
veloping by  application  of  the  powdered 
plumbago.  The  amount  of  intensity  is  quite 
under   control,  and   the   operator   will   be 


governed  by  the  quality  of  the  original  nega- 
tive as  to  whether  he  shall  make  the  dupli- 
cate dense  or  thin. 

It  seems  probable  that  a  better  plan  would 
be  to  take  the  duplicate  negative  in  the  ordi- 
nary way  by  the  powder  process,  upon  a 
separate  glass,  adopting  the  plan,  however, 
of  giving  the  glass  a  preliminary  coating  of 
collodion.  The  completed  duplicate  nega- 
tive being,  after  transfer,  contained  between 
two  layers  of  collodion,  maybe  used  in  that 
form  without  a  glass  support.  It  may  then 
be  used  in  any  position  the  photographer 
may  choose,  either  at  the  back  of  the  origi- 
nal negative,  or  in  contact  with  its  face,  or 
with  some  thin  medium  interposed,  so  as  to 
modify  the  effects  to  be  produced.  In  produ- 
cing the  duplicate  negative  on  a  separate  sup- 
port of  thin  tissue,  rather  than  at  the  back 
of  the  original  negative,  other  advantages 
are  gained,  and  inconveniences  avoided. 

Considerable  scope  to  the  artistic  taste 
and  skill  of  the  photographer,  in  producing 
and  printing  from  his  duplicate  negative  in 
contact  with  the  original,  is  offered  in  this 
process. 

Another  purpose  to  which  this  process 
can  be  applied  is,  giving  additional  intensity 
to  silver  negatives.  Mr.  Woodbury  refers 
to  some  capital  results  obtained  in  this  way 
by  one  of  his  friends.     He  saj's  : 

"  I  think  this  will  prove  a  valuable  ap- 
plication, as  the  intensifying  may,  so  to 
speak,  be  localized,  and  effects  got  that  could 
not  be  obtained  by  the  ordinary  methods  of 
redeveloping.  Having  taken  a  negative, 
and  developed  with  iron,  allow  the  super- 
fluous moisture  to  drain  away,  and  proceed 
exactly  as  I  have  described  in  the  earlier 
part  of  this  article — that  is,  coat  with  the 
sensitive  solution,  dry,  and  expose  to  light. 
The  black  lead  may  then  be  applied  until 
the  desired  effect  is  produced — the  most  work 
being  laid  on  a  weak  foreground,  for  in- 
stance, and  the  least  on  a  delicate  sky,  thus 
avoiding  that  want  of  harmony  so  often 
found  in  a  negative  redeveloped  in  the  ordi- 
nary way.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  the 
black-lead  process  will  not  bring  out  more 
detail,  which  may  be  often  accomplished  by 
silver  redeveloping,  although  I  have  notieed 
that  details  in  the  blacks  that  could  hardly 
be  observed  were  made  to  show  plainly." 


286 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


Lost. — We  had  on  our  table  in  Chicago  a 
French  work,  entitled  "Traite  General  de  Pho- 
tographie,  par  D.  V.  Monckhoven."  It  failed  to 
return  with  our  goods,  and  we  can  find  no  trace 
of  it.  We  have  been  singularly  unfortunate 
with  this  book.  We  had  a  copy,  which  we  had 
just  had  bound,  ruined  by  the  deluge  in  our 
office  last  March ;  we  then  procured  another, 
which  went  with  our  other  books  to  Chicago, 
in  mistake,  and  we  have  lost  that.  Any  one 
finding  and  returning  it  to  us  will  confer  a  great 
favor,  and  we  will  remit  the  postage. 


Soap  and  Alcohol  again. — In  our  July  issue 
we  called  attention  to  the  doings  of  one  Patrick 
H.  Dean,  of  Winchester,  Ind  ,  who  was  striving 
to  exact  a  royalty  from  photographers  for  the 
use  of  soap  and  alcohol,  the  well-known  lubri- 
cator for  prints  previous  to  being  burnished. 
Since  then  several  of  our  subscribers  have  in- 
formed us  that  Mr.  Dean  continues  to  press  this 
amusing  claim  peremptorily  upon  them.  Mr. 
Dean  in  his  patent  specifications  says  as  follows  : 
"  This  invention  consists  of  a  composition  formed 
by  mixing  castile  soap  and  glycerin  with  alcohol 
and  liquid  ammonia.  To  prepare  the  varnish, 
take  24  grains  of  castile  soap,  i  oz.  of  glycerin, 
6  oz.  of  alcohol,  and  £  oz.  of  liq.  ammonia. 
These  ingredients  are  thoroughly  mixed  together 
and  heated  in  a  suitable  vessel  to  effect  their 
intimate  union. 

"I  have  found  by  actual  tests  that  the  varnish 
above  described  is  superior  to  any  now  in  most 
general  use." 

And  further  :  ' '  What  I  claim  as  my  invention, 
and  desire  to  secure  by  letters-patent,  is  the 
herein-described  compound  for  varnishing  pho- 
tographs, consisting  of  a  mixture  of  castile  soap, 
glycerin,  alcohol,  and  liquid  ammonia,  in  about 
the  proportions,  and  prepared  substantially  in 
the  manner  specified." 

Now  as  Mr.  Dean  twice  states  that  his  patent 
"consists  of  a  composition  formed  by  mixing 
castile  soap  and  glycerin  with  alcohol  and  liquid 
ammonia,"  how  absurd  fox  any  one,  for  a  moment, 
to  tolerate  Mr.  Dean's  claim  that  his  patent 
covers  the  use  of  soap  and  alcohol  alone,  let 
alone  to  pay  him  anything  for  it.  He  himself 
limits  his  patent  to  the  combination  named — no 
more,  no  less.  When  will  photographers  learn 
not  to  be  scared  by  every  tonguey  man  who 
comes  along  with  a  patent  specification  and  a 
threat  in  his  hand? 


A  Card. — 

Rochester,  N.  Y.,  Aug.  4th,  1874. 

Friend  Wilson  :  In  your  flattering  notice  of 
the  illustration  for  the  August  Photographer  you 
make  it  appear  (to  me)  that  you  misunderstood 
me  at  Chicago  in  regard  to  the  retouching. 

It  would  be  impossible  for  me  to  do  all  my  re- 
touching, but  although  I  have  able  assistants 
my  time  is  mostly  occupied  that  way. 

The  specimen  (save  the  printing  by  Mr.  E. 
Case),  however,  is  the  work  of  Mr.  S.  Gregg, 
my  operator,  who,  as  a  general  workman,  I 
think  has  no  superior.  I  write  this  in  justice  to 
him,  and  wish  to  state  that  I  am  proud  of  the 
skill  of  all  of  my  assistants,  and  desire  to  give 
honor  where  honor  is  due. 

Yours  truly, 

J.  Barhvdt. 


We  have  received  from  Mr.  Ormsby  the  follow- 
ing explanation  of  his  Enamel  Process,  published 
in  our  last  issue  : 

Chicago,  Aug.  10th,  1874. 
Mr.  Edward  L.  Wilson. 

Dear  Sir  :  I  have  received  quite  a  number  of 
letters  of  complaint,  stating  that  they  have  tried 
the  process  as  published  in  the  August  Photog- 
rapher, and  their  prints  stick  to  the  glass.  The 
following  is  the  remedy  for  sticking  :  After 
cleaning  the  plate  thoroughly,  rub  over  it  a  so- 
lution of  white  wax  dissolved  in  ether;  then 
polish  off  with  tissue-paper  ;  then  coat  with  col- 
lodion, made  of  fire  parts  of  ether  to  three  parts 
of  alcohol,  six  grains  of  cotton  to  the  ounce,  and 
I  will  warrant  them  not  to  stick. 
Respectfully  yours, 

E.  D.   Ormsby. 


Views  of  the  Masonic  Temple. — We  desire 
to  call  the  attention  of  those  of  our  readers  who 
are  members  of  the  Masonic  fraternity  to  the 
beautiful  views  of  the  Masonic  Temple  at  Phila- 
delphia— exterior  and  interior.  In  the  new  ad- 
vertisement of  them  a  list  of  the  subjects  is 
given.  They  are  exquisite  pictures,  from  nega- 
tives by  Mr.  F.  Gutekunst,  Philadelphia,  and  of 
interest,  on  account  of  their  beauty,  to  every  one. 


We  recently  called  upon  our  friend  Mr.  Albert 
Moore,  the  large  solar  printer,  and  Treasurer  of 
the  National  Photographic  Association,  and 
found  him    "pushing  things."     From  the  large 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


287 


number  of  pieces  hanging  up  drying  from  his 
Inst  wash  we  concluded  the  heat  and  the  panic 
had  not  reached  his  person  or  affairs. 

While  commenting  upon  the  beauty  and  va- 
riety of  specimens  of  his  work,  we  noticed  some 
really  handsome  prints  on  pointer's  canvas, 
ready  for  delivery  to  one  of  his  Chicago  patrons  ; 
the  tone,  strength,  and  general  appearance  were 
equal  to  any  of  the  prints  on  plain  paper  that 
we  saw. 

Upon  inquiring  for  the  process,  he  stated  that 
it  was  made  up  of  items,  picked  up  at  various 
times  in  different  articles  published  in  the  Phila- 
delphia Photographer  and  other  journals,  and  in 
general  was  the  most  difficult  of  all  the  printing 
processes;  the  troubles  in  that  connection  being 
so  various  that  the  only  way  was  to  mnke  a  note 
of  every  failure  and  its  cause,  then  when  the 
remedy  was  found  to  remember  it,  and  write 
down  for  future  use  in  case  of  troubles.  That 
the  greatest  trouble  in  canvas  printing  was  to 
get  rid  of  the  oil  qn  the  surfice,  and  to  prevent 
any  of  it  mingling  with  either  the  salting  or  the 
silver. 

After  a  survey  of  the  printing  platform,  which 
was  crowded  with  his  ''pets,''  and  which  con- 
tained too  much  caloric  for  our  general  comfort, 
we  left  him  busy.  Give  him  a  call  ;  he  will  make 
you  welcome.  If  he  don't,  his  right  (good)  hand 
man,  Mr.  William  H.  Shoemaker,  will. 


The  Philadelphia  Press  of  August  7th  says  : 

' '  The  Philadelphia  Photographer  for  August 
gives  a  report  of  the  proceedings  of  the  recent 
Convention  at  Chicago.  Mr.  Edward  L.  Wilson, 
the  editor,  specially  contributes  a  further  por- 
tion of  his  professional  tour  through  Europe  last 
year  ;  it  is  illustrated  as  before,  and  Mr.  Wilson, 
who  is  a  lively  and  well-informed  companion, 
takes  us  with  him  to  Milan,  Pisa,  Leghorn,  and 
Rome.  The  photographic  frontispiece  this  month, 
second  of  the  prize  series,  is  a  portrait  of  a. 
charming  young  lady  ;  negatives  and  prints  by 
J.  Barhydt,  Rochester,  N.  Y.  The  face  is 
charming.'"  

Me.  R.  Benecke,  St.  Louis,  Mo.,  is  undoubt- 
edly one  of  the  best  landscape  photographers  in 
the  world.  He  had  on  exhibition  at  Chicago  an 
admirable  collection  of  outdoor  views  on  the 
Kansas  Pacific  Railway  that  were  very  fine. 
They  were  sold  at  auction  for  the  debt  fund,  and 
now  Mr.  Benecke  has  sent  us  some  beautiful 
proofs,  which  are  in  the  best  style  of  outdoor 
work.  As  examples  of  printing  also  they  are 
unexcelled.  

The  Awards  for  the  Foreign  and  Land- 
scape Prize  Negatives  have  been  postponed 


by  the  judges  until  November,  for  the  following 
reasons.  1.  Because  they  have  notice  of  foreign 
negatives  coming,  which  for  some  reason  are  de- 
layed. 2.  In  order  to  give  landscape  photogra- 
phers the  advantage  of  the  whole  season.  We 
hope  none  will  object  to  this  decision. 

"  Something  New  "  seems  to  have  caused  more 
of  a  sensation  than  we  expected  it  would,  but 
we  believe  not  more  than  it  should,  for  the  ad- 
vantages it  possesses  as  an  advertising  medium 
are  great  and  good.  A  copy,  if  placed  in  the 
hands  of  one  of  your  citizens,  is  almost  sure  to 
bring  you  a  customer.  It  will  really  increase 
your  business  if  you  diffuse  it  with  your  business 
card  on  the  cover.   We  send  specimen  copies  free. 


Mr.  C.  D.  Mosher,  one  of  Chicago's  most  en- 
terprising and  progressive  artists,  has  sent  us 
large  half-size  portraits  of  Ex-President  Bogardus 
and  E.  L.  Wilson,  Permanent  Secretary  of  the 
National  Photographic  Association.  They  are 
among  the  finest  examples  of  work  of  this  size 
we  have  ever  seen.  Mr.  Mosher  made  a  fine 
display  at  the  Exhibition,  and  is  second  to  none 
in  his  efforts  to  elevate  the  photographic  nrt.  He 
is  ably  seconded  in  the  work  by  his  skilful  and 
talented  assistant,  Mr.  D.  H.  Cross. 

The  Glace  Portrait. — We  have  received 
from  Messrs.  C.  D.  Fredricks  &  Co.,  of  New  York, 
some  beautiful  examples  of  this  new  st3Tle  of  pic- 
ture, otherwise  known  as  cameo  enamels,  or  imi- 
tation enamels.  

From  E.  D.  Ormsby,  of  Chicago,  we  have 
received  a  very  fine  photograph  of  Ex- Vice- 
President  Schuyler  Colfax.  It  does  not  always 
require  a  prominent  subject  in  order  to  secure  a 
good  picture,  neither  are  good  pictures  always 
made  of  such  subjects  ;  but  we  congratulate  our 
friend  on  having  made  good  use  of  the  ex-official 
in  his  case.  He  has  given  us  a  most  admirable 
specimen  of  the  style  of  work  he  is  capable  of 
producing.  

Mr.  J.  A.  Scholten  has  recently  fitted  and 
moved  into  his  new  and  superb  gallery,  Nos.  920 
and  922  Olive  Street,  corner  of  Tenth,  St.  Louis. 
We  are  glad  to  see  this  evidence  of  his  pros- 
perity, and  wish  him  continued  success  with  his 
improved  facilities. 

From  Mr.  J.  Pitcher  Spooner,  of  Stock- 
ton, Cal.,  we  have  a  flattering  notice  of  his  es- 
tablishment, clipped  from  a  local  paper.  We 
congratulate  Mr.  Spooner  on  the  reputation  he 
is  making. 


288 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHER. 


Pictures  Received. — From  Messrs.  Bradley 
&  Rulofson,  San  Francisco,  a  number  of  cabinets 
in  their  usual  excellent  style.  Some  of  them 
are  portraits  of  Chinese  in  their  native  costume, 
showing  all  the  peculiarities  of  these  celestials 
in  the  land  of  the  sun.  We  also  have  a  fine 
stereo  view  of  Mr.  Rulofson.  and  a  portion  of  his 
small  family,  forming  an  interesting  domestic 
group  around  the  door  of  his  residence.  From 
Mr.  Alvah  Pearsall,  of  Brooklyn,  an  exquisite 
cabinet  head  of  an  old  white-haired  gentleman. 
The  lighting  is  brilliant,  and  the  modelling  per- 
fect. All  produced  without  any  artifice  of  double 
printing,  or  putting  in  lights.  Cabinets  also 
from  E.  J.  Potter,  Mansfield,  Ohio.  From 
J.  H.  Folsom,  Danbury,  Conn.,  a  number  of 
cards  in  "silhouette,"  being  profile  portraits 
from  life,  evidently  made  with  a  very  short  ex- 
posure on  a  white  ground.  They  are  an  oddity 
as  a  photograph,  and  being  perfectly  black,  with- 
out detail,  most  people  might  object  to  them  on 
account  of  their  tendency  to  the  Ethiopian  order. 
Cards  from  G.  D.  Wakely,  Kansas  City,  Mo., 
and  J.  Paul  Martin,  Boone,  Iowa.  From  H.  W. 
Immke,  Princeton,  111.,  a  number  of  stereos  of 
the  ruins  of  the  Inte  fire  in  Chicago,  and  views 
of  the  Exposition  Building  taken  during  the 
Convention  of  the  National  Photographic  Asso- 
ciation. These  last  give  us  a  very  familiar  scene, 
and  are  well  executed. 


Pictures  Received— From  Bradley  &  Rulof- 
son, of  San  Francisco,  some  beautiful  cabinets, 
showing  that  the  prize  pictures  were  no  accident  : 
they  can  do  such  work  every  day  in  the  week. 
From  Kilburn  Brothers,  Littleton,  N.  H.,  some 
fine  stereos  of  scenery  in  Central  Park,  New 
York.  From  the  following  parties  we  have  re- 
ceived specimens  of  photography,  showing  that 
they  are  sparing  no  pains  or  effort  to  bring  their 
work  up  with  the  times.  L.  E.  Thayer,  view  of 
Lake  Memphremagog,  from  Newport,  Vt.  ;  H.  L. 
Bingham,  San  Antonio,  Texas,  cabinets  and 
cards;  F.  M.  Spencer,  Mansfield,  Pa.,  cabinets 
and  cards;  Louis  de  Planque,  Corpus  Christi, 
Texas,  cabinets,  Victorias,  and  cards  ;  Atkinson's 
Art  Gallery,  Palmyra,  N.Y.,  cabinet ;  S  A.  Rote, 
Ridgway,  Pa.,  and  E.  H.  Train,  Helena,  Mon- 
tana, cards.  We  thank  all  who  have  thus  remem- 
bered us,  and  wish  them  all  the  encouragement 
and  success  they  deserve. 


First  Steamship  Pioneers. — This  is  the  title 
of  an  elegant  souvenir  presented  us  by  the  wor- 
thy President  of  the  National  Photographic  As- 
sociation, Mr.  W.  H.  Rulofson,  of  San  Fran- 
cisco.    It  is  a  volume  of  389  pages,  printed  in 


large,  clear  type,  in  brown  tinted  ink,  inclosed 
with  a  red  border,  leaving  wide  margins,  on 
heavy  white  laid  paper,  bound  in  fine  Turkey 
morocco,  with  gilt  edges.  It  is  edited  by  a  com- 
mittee of  the  Association  whose  name  it  bears, 
and  is  printed  by  H.  S.  Crocker  &  Co.,  of  San 
Francisco.  It  sketches  the  lives  and  doings  of 
the  principel  pioneers  of  California,  many  of 
whom  roamed  through  wilds  of  the  West,  and 
settled  on  the  Pacific  coast  long  before  the  dis- 
covery of  gold.  It  traces  briefly  the  history  of 
that  eventful  period  when  the  gold  fever  ran 
high,  and  relates  many  incidents  of  thrilling  in- 
terest to  those  who  participated  in  the  excite- 
ments of  travel  and  adventure  in  those  early 
days  of  the  Golden  State. 

In  the  "  Introductory  Notes  "  a  very  flattering 
notice  is  given  of  the  firm  of  Bradley  &  Rulofson, 
as  one  of  the  pioneer  houses  in  business. 

The  book  does  great  credit  to  the  committee, 
as  well  as  to  the  printers,  for  the  arrangement  of 
its  contents,  and  the  elegant  and  artistic  man- 
ner in  which  it  is  printed  and  bound. 


Industrial  Exhibitions. — Pamphlets  and 
circulars  have  been  received  giving  notice  of  the 
following  exhibitions  : 

Forty-third  Exhibition  of  American  Institute 
of  the  City  of  New  York  will  open  on  the  9th  of 
September  and  continue  until  late  in  November. 
Under  the  superintendence  of  Mr.  Charles  Wager 
Hull,  whose  interest  in  photography  has  made 
his  name  as  familiar  as  a  household  word  to  the 
fraternity,  we  may  expect  our  art  to  receive  the 
full  recognition  that  its  position  and  importance 
demands,  and  hope  photographers  will  be  liberal 
in  their  efforts  to  exhibit. 

Inter-State  Exposition  of  Chicago  will  open 
September  9th,  and  close  October  10th,  1874. 
Potter  Palmer,  President ;  John  P.  Reynolds, 
Secretary. 

Fifth  Cincinnati  Industrial  Exposition,  1874, 
will  open  September  2d,  and  close  October  3d. 

Franklin  Institute  of  Pennsylvania.  Exhibi- 
tion to  open  in  September  and  close  in  October. 

These  Exhibitions  afford  unequalled  opportuni- 
ties to  photographers  to  exhibit  their  work,  as  it 
is  brought  before  a  very  large  number  of  people, 
and  to  those  who  do  good  work  they  are  invalu- 
able as  advertising  mediums. 


The  case  of  Wing  vs.  Tompkins,  of  Grand 
Rapids,  Mich.,  will  be  argued  September  28th. 
All  interested  in  this  matter  will,  no  doubt,  be 
glad  to  hear  of  a  decision  being  reached. 


ADVERTISING  RATES  FOR  SPECIALTIES.— It  will  be  understood  that  matter  under 
this  head  is  not  to  be  considered  as  always  having  editoiial  sanction,  though  we  shall  endeavor  to  clear  it  of 
anything  tending  to  decaive  or  mislead.  Stock-dealers  will  find  this  a  beneficial  mode  of  advertising,  and 
sure  to  pay  largely.  Six  lines,  one  insertion,  $2.00,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a 
line — in  advance."  Operators  desiring  situations,  no  charge.  Matter  must  be  received  by  the  23d  to  secure 
insertion.  Advertisers  will  please  not  ask  us  for  recommendations.  eSf  We  cannot  undertake  to  mail 
answers  to  parties  who  advertise.    Please  always  add  your  address  to  the  advertisement. 


For  Sale. — A  most  desirable  and  well  ap- 
pointed photograph  gallery  in  Atlanta,  Ga.  ; 
population  35,000.  The  great  railroad  centre 
and  live  place  of  the  south.  A  rare  chance  for 
a  good  artist.  Will  sell  low  for  cash.  For  par- 
ticulars address  D.  W.  Bowdoin, 

33^  Whitehall  St.,  Atlanta,  Ga. 

HANCE'S  PHOTO.  SPBCIATIES. 
Please  read  my  four  page  advertisement. 
Especial  attention  is  called  to  my  new 
BATH  PRESERVATIVE.  Photogra- 
phers all  over  write,  viz.:  "Your 
DOUBLE  IODIZED  COLLODION 
works  splendid,  and  its  keeping  so 
well,  is  an  excellent  feature." 
USE  HANCE'S  SPECIALTIES. 

ALL  DEALERS  KEEP  THEM. 


Wanted. — A  respectable  young  man  as  chief 
operator  in  a  gallery  in  Petersburg,  Va.  ;  must 
be  good  on  positions,  make  a  good  negative,  and 
retouch  well.     Address 

C.  R.  Rees  &  Co.,  Richmond,  Va. 


Lea's  Manual  of  Photog- 
raphy, $3.75.  See  Advertise- 
ment.   Third  Thousand. 


The  Portable  Gallery  advertised  in  June 
number,  can  be  bought  now  with  backgrounds, 
chairs,  mattings,  head-rests,  stove,  benches,  and 
other  numerous  articles,  costing  $475  for  only 
$235.  Purchaser,  if  he  is  a  second-class  artist,  is 
bound  to  clear  from  $300  to  $400  a  year  here  ;  can 
easily  prove  it.  Being  compelled  to  leave  must  sell 
as  quick  as  possible.  Why  do  not  artists  read  this. 
Write  or  come  to  see  it.     Address 

F.  Dael,  P.  0.  Box  141,  Versailles,  Ky. 


Linn's  Landscape  Photogra- 
phy is  the  book  for  the 
season. 


Fob  Sale,  Cheap. — A  traveling  photograph 
saloon,  9  x  24  feet,  with  stock  and  fixtures.  For 
particulars  address 

M.  A.  B.,  Photographer, 

32  Portland  St.,  Worcester,  Mass. 

USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


"  Moulton  will  furnish  cuts  of  the  Rapid 
Photo.  Washer,  free  of  charge,  to  dealers  issuing 
catalogues,  upon  application  !  " 

Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Wanted. — For  Valparaiso,  South  America,  a 
first-class  operator;  must  be  well  up  in  portrait 
and  landscape  photography.  A  young,  unmar- 
ried man  preferred.     Address 

As.  Schtjtz,  44  St.  Mark's  Place, 

New  York  City. 
Or,  parties  in  Philadelphia  may  apply  at  the 
office  of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

Try  Hermagis'  Lenses. 

Used  by  M.  Adam  Salomon, 

Paris.    See  Advertisement. 


"Business  is  Business." — A  cask  customer 
can  buy  a  gallery  in  the  capital  of  a  western 
state  at  $1000  less  than  an  actual  invoice. 
Prices,  $4  for  cards,  and  doing  a  business  of 
from  $8000  to  $10,000  per  year.  If  not  sold 
before  October  1st  will  lease  for  one,  two,  or 
three  years.  Gallery  and  fixtures  will  invoice 
about  $4000.     Address 

"L:"  care  Benerman  &  Wilson. 


PARTNER  WANTED  in  an  estab- 
lished STOCK  BUSINESS,  in  a  South- 
ern city.  Credit  and  business  good,  but 
can  be  very  largely  increased  with 
another  partner.  Address  AUGUSTUS, 
office  Philadelphia  Photographer. 


We  have  received  from  Messrs.  Benj.  French 
&  Co.,  a  price-list  of  Frames,  in  great  variety, 
including  the  necessary  fixtures  for  hanging, 
such  as  screw  eyes,  picture  cord,  &o.  Also,  the 
Holmes  Stereoscope,  in  every  grade  of  finish 
and  price.  Also,  a  price-list  of  (Gem)  Ferrotype 
Camera  Boxes  and  Lenses,  all  fitted  with  Darlot 
Lenses. 


Trapp   &    Munch    received 
the  Medal  of  Merit  for  their 
Albumen  Paper,  at  the  Vien- 
na Exhibition. 
VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


Wanted,  Gallery. — I  wish  to  rent  a  fur- 
nished gallery,  in  a  good  city,  with  privilege  of 
buying  ;  have  run  galleries  of  my  own  for  ten 
years.      Address,  with  full  particulars, 

A.  C.  Woodward,  Metropolis,  111. 


Photographers  in  the  South 
and  Southwest  who  would 
buy  goods  to  their  best  ad- 
vantage would  do  well  to  pat- 
ronize the  Stockhouse  of 
Chas.  A.  Wilson,  No.  7  North 
Charles  St.,  Baltimore,  Md. 
Send  a  trial  order. 


We  awake  to  a  sense  of  the  condition  of  things, 
and  the  photographic  fact  that  we  are  living  in 
an  age  of  progress.  The  "optics''  of  the 
"sons"  of  "light"  are  greeted  with  the  finest 
goods  the  heart  could  wish,  or  the  hands  desire 
to  manipulate,  and  even  the  humblest  of  the 
craft  may  have  the  best  apparatus,  for  the  price 
has  been  placed  so  low  that  it  would  be  folly  to 
purchase  other  than  that  branded  "perfect," 
which  is  made  by  the  American  Optical  Co. 

The  whole  country,  more  especially  the  west, 
can  be  supplied  from  the  "Great  Central,"  at 
Chicago  ;  Chas.  W.  Stevens  will  give  your  orders 
prompt  notice. 


Griswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Fine  Goods. — Nothing  made  by  the  American 
Optical  Co.,  ever  surpassed  those  Camera  Boxes 
exhibited  at  Chicago,  and,  of  course,  that  wide- 
awake dealer,  Chas.  W.  Stevens,  of  the  "Great 
Central,"  could  not  resist  the  temptation  of 
owning  them.  He  purchased  the  whole  display 
of  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  and  has  what  was 
not  sold  by  him  during  Convention,  in  his  spa- 
cious warehouse,  ready  for  the  orders  of  those 
who  appreciate  the  best. 


Linn's  Landscape  Photogra- 
phy is  the  book  for  the 
season. 


Like  a  Dream. — It  seems  to  note  the  progress 
of  photography  and  everything  connected  with 
the  science.  Such  beautiful  and  porfect  appa- 
ratus, such  appropriate  and  varied  accessories, 
and  the  chemist's  skill  fully  tested  in  giving  the 
"Sun  worshippers"  purest  products  of  the  la- 
boratory, and,  to  wind  up  the  picture,  we  are 
favored  with  dealers  that  "  know  their  business,'' 
the  most  popular  being  none  other  than  Chas. 
W.  Stevens,  proprietor  of  the  "Great  Central," 
Chicago  ;  he  is  alive,  and  ready  for  the  pho- 
tographer. 

USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


"  Moulton  can  fnrnisb  either  clock-work  or 
hydraulic  motors  to  run  his  washers  ;  further 
particulars  soon."  Respectfully, 

L.  V.  Moulton. 

If  you  want  to  improve  your 
work  and  save  time  get  the 
Rapid   Photo-Washer. 


Wanted. — About  the  15th  of  September  or 
1st  of  October,  an  operator  to  take  charge  of  a 
newly  fitted-up  gallery.  A  single  gentleman 
who  understands  lighting  and  posing  will  find  a 
permanent  situation  by  addressing 

Humphrey,  care  of  Lock  Box  16, 

Parkersburg,  Va. 


VOIGTLANDER  &  SON  LENSES. 

Ryder's  Art  Gallery,  239  Superior  St-, 
Cleveland,  Ohio,  Dec.  18,  1872. 

Benj.  French  &  Co. 

Dear  Sirs: — Twenty -four  years  ago  I 
bought  and  commenced  using  ray  first 
Voigtlander  Lens.  It  was  a  good  one. 
Since  then  I  have  owned  and  used  a 
good  many  of  the  same  brand,  of  various 
sizes.     They  were  all  and  always  good. 

Some  of  the  larger  sizes  that  I  have 
recently  bought  seem  to  me  better  than 
any  I  have  ever  had  or  seen  before. 
Yours,  truly, 

J.  F.  RYDER. 


Composition  Pictures,  by  Messrs.  Robin- 
son &  Cherrill,  For  Sale. — The  beautiful 
composition  and  combination  pictures  exhibited 
at  the  Chicago  N.  P.  A.,  executed  by  Messrs. 
Robinson  &  Cherrill,  and  for  which  the  Foreign 
Medal  was  awarded,  are  for  sale  at  the  following 
rates  :  Passing  Stranger,  $5  ;  The  Gleaner,  $5  ; 
Study  from  Nature.  $5  :  The  Gypsy,  $5  ;  Lady 
Reading,  $5  ;  Little  Girl,  $5.  Only  one  copy 
each.  Specially  fine  prints.  On  exhibition  and 
for  sale  at  the  office  of  Benerman  &  Wilson , 
Philadelphia. 

Lea's  Manual  of  Photog- 
raphy, $3.75.  See  Advertise- 
ment.   Third  Thousand. 


For  Sale. — The  most  convenient  little  gallery 
in  the  city  ;  it  was  refitted  throughout  last  fall, 
and  furnished  with  new  apparatus  of  the  best 
description.  Rooms  must  be  seen  to  be  appre- 
ciated.    Will  be  sold  cheap  for  cash. 

Wm.  Cowley, 
294  Pearl  St.,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


Baltimore 

Baltimore 

Baltimore 
Stockhouse, 

Stockhouse, 

Stockhouse, 
Chas.  A.  Wilson, 

Chas.  A.  Wilson, 

Chas.  A.  Wilson, 
No.  7  North  Charles  St. 
No.  7  North  Charles  St. 
No.  7  North  Charles  St. 

Wanted,    Operator. — One  who  understands 
copying.      Address  with  references, 
C.  II .  Morgan  &  Co., 

4  7  Summit  St.,  Toledo,  0. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

For  Sale,  very  cheap. — 1  8-4  Voigtlander 
lens,  central  stop,  first-class  instrument  ;  1  8-10 
Swing  Camera  Box;  I  "Perfect''  Camera 
Stand  ;  1  licensed  Woodward  Solar  Camera ; 
1  Scovill  Excelsior  Roller  Press,  12  in.,  nickle- 
plated.  W.  P.  Chase, 

Elmira,  N.  Y. 


Try  Hermagis'  Lenses. 

Used  by  M.  Adam  Salomon, 

Paris.    See  Advertisement. 

For  Sale. — The  finest  Photographic  Parlors 

in  the  handsomest  city  in  the  state  of  New  York. 

Entrance  next  door  to  P.  0,      Cash  only  buys  it. 

Business  for  three  persons,  and  lively.      Address 

WeiTl  G.  Singhi,  Binghampton,  N.  Y. 


Wanted. — Agents  to  travel  through  the  seve- 
ral states.  None  need  apply  except  practical 
photographers,  and  those  acquainted  with  the 
use  of  the  solar  camera.     Apply  to 

H.  L.  Emmons,  Baltimore,  Md. 


For  Sale. — At  Mauch  Chunk,  Pa.,  Brown's 
(deceased)  Photographic  Gallery  ;  fixtures  and 
stereoscopic  view  negatives,  of  the  coal  regions, 
cheap.  A  photographer  can  open  immediately, 
print  the  views  and  sell  all  he  can  make  during 
the  season.     Over  90,000  visitors  last  season. 

Address  Reuben  Knecht,  Easton,  Pa. 


fflfflSm* 


JfQgf^rf: 


Wig$®h 


i 


SITUATIONS    WANTED. 

(No  charge  for  advertisements  under  tJns  head: 

limited  to  four  lines.     Inserted  once  only , 

unless  by  request.) 

4®"  We  cannot  have  letters  directed  to  our  care 
unless  the  parties  send  for  them,  and  send  stamps  to 
pay  postage.  We  cannot  undertake  to  mail  them  ; 
please  do  not  request  it. 


By  an  operator  that  has  eight  years'  experience 
in  the  business,  and  understands  all  the  branches 
of  photography.  Address  Tweedle,  Richwood, 
Ohio. 

By  a  young  man  of  steady  habits,  as  assistant 
operator  or  printer,  or  would  take  a  good  gallery 
on  shares.     Address  Box  139,  Wilton,  N.  H. 

As  operator  or  retoucher,  in  a  good  gallery  ; 
best  of  reference  given.  Address  Retoucher, 
care  C.  A.  Wilson,  Photographic  Stock  Dealer, 
7  N.  Charles  St.,  Baltimore,  Md. 

In  a  first-class  gallery,  as  printer  and  toner. 
Address  B.  G.  A.,  care  C.  A.  Wilson,  Photogra- 
phic Stock  Dealer,  7  N.  Charles  Street,  Balti- 
more, Md. 

By  an  English  photographer  of  eighteen  years' 
practice,  an  appointment  as  operator,  artistic 
retoucher,  colorist,  &c.  Address  Pyro,  215  Pearl 
Street,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 

By  a  young  man  who  thoroughly  understands 

.  printing,  &c.  ;   also,  the  use  of  the  solar  camera. 

Can  assist  generally  ;  is  not  afraid  of  work  ;  best 

of    references.      Address    "F,"    Lock  Box   19. 

Shelbyville,  Tenn. 

By  a  young  lady  who  has  eight  years'  experi- 
ence in  finishing  photographs  in  ink  and  water 
colors.     Address  Artist,  Box  138,  Rockland,  Me. 

As  negative  retoucher,  good  references.  Ad- 
dress J.  D.  Junor,  P.  0.  East  Saginaw,  Mich. 

By  a  strictly  first-class  positionist  and  operator 
(no  Sunday  work).  Address  M.  S.  Williams, 
care  of  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  419  and  421 
Broome  Street,  New  York.  Refers  to  Messrs. 
Bogardus  and  Gurney. 

By  a  young  lady  in  a  gallery  as  first-class 
operator,  poser,  or  printer.  Can  give  good  re- 
ference. Address  Anna  MacBride,  610  Reed 
Street,  Philadelphia. 

As  operator,  either  in  portrait  or  Landscape 
photography,  or  would  accept  a  position  in  a 
photographic  stock  house.  Can  furnish  first-class 
references  as  to  character  and  ability.  Address 
Chas.  L.  Wright,  care  E.  Bierstadt,  58  and  60 
Read  Street,  New  York. 

A  lady  would  like  an  opportunity,  in  a  photo- 
graph gallery,  to  take  charge  of  reception  room 
and  finish  negatives.  Address,  for  two  weeks, 
Miss  L.  M.  F.,  27  Beach  Street,  Boston,  Mass. 

By  a  lady  who  has  had  nine  years'  experience 
in  a  first-class  gallery,  to  attend  to  reception 
room,  mount  and  retouch  pictures.  Would  be 
willing  to  make  herself  generally  useful.  Good 
references  can  be  given.  Please  address  Miss 
R.  A.  Gregory,  21  Court  St.,  Utica,  N.  Y. 

By  a  young  man  of  eight  years'  experience, 
as  a  first-class  operator.  A.  C.  Hopkins,  132 
Genesee  Street,  Utica,  N.  Y. 

By  a  German,  able  also  to  speak  French,  a 
situation  as  operator.  First-class,  guaranteed. 
H.  Hammenstede,  care  Anthony  &  Co.,NewYork. 


USE  WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


Situation  as  operator  or  printer ;  can  make 
myself  generally  useful  at  any  branch  of  the 
business.     A.  L.  Ward,  Marlboro,  Mass. 

By  a  young  man  who  has  had  considerable  ex- 
perience in  printing,  and  assisting  in  gallery 
generally,  will  make  himself  generally  useful. 
A  place  where  I  can  have  board  and  lodging 
with  family  of  photographer  would  be  prefera- 
ble. Address  J.  J.  Wolfe,  care  M.  Wolfe,  Artist, 
Richmond,  Ind. 

A  permanent  situation  by  a  first-class  retouch- 
er, crayonist,  and  colorist,  after  September. 
Address  M.  E.  Torrey,  Sandusky,  Ohio. 

A  lady  who  is  a  good  retoucher,  arid  has  a 
thorough  knowledge  of  gallery  work,  is  desirous 
of  obtaining  a  permanent  situation  in  a  first-class 
gallery.     A.  M.  D.,  1746  Woodstock  St.,  Phila. 

A  lady  artist  who  has  devoted  much  time  to 
coloring  photographs,  porcelain  pictures,  and  is 
a  fine  retoucher,  is  prepared  to  receive  work  at 
247  North  Ninth  St.,  Philadelphia. 

As  retoucher,  by  a  lady  artist.  Address  Artist, 
Newark,  N.  J.     Care  of  A.  P. 

By  one  well  posted  in  all  parts  of  the  business, 
have  had  many  years  experience,  both  in  and 
out  of  doors.  S.  H.  Davis,  1210  G  St.,  Wash- 
ington, D.  C. 


SOCIETY  CALENDAR. 

(Published  for  the  convenience  of  Visiting  Pho- 
tographers and  those,  desiring  to  correspond. ) 

Boston  Photographic  Association. — At  J.  W. 
Black's  studio,  the  first  Friday  of  each  month. 
E.  J.  Foss,  President;  C.  H.  Danforth,  Secre- 
tary, 27  Central  Square,  Cambridgeport. 

Photographic  Section  of  the  American  Insti- 
tute, New  York. — At  the  Institute  rooms,  the 
first  Tuesday  of  each  month.  H.  J.  Newton, 
President ;  Oscar  Gr.  Mason,  Secretary,  Bellevue 
Hospital. 

German  Photographic  Society,  New  York. — 
At  Nos.  64  and  66  East  Fourth  Street,  New 
York,  every  Thursday  evening.  W.  Kurtz,  Presi- 
dent ;  Edward  Boettcher,  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, 79  Newark  Avenue,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 

Brooklyn  Photographic  Art  Association, 
Brooklyn.  N.  Y. — Fourth  Tuesday  in  each  month, 
at  179  Montague  Street.  Rev.  Dr.  C.  H.  Hall, 
President ;  Chas.  E.  Bolles,  Cor.  Secretary. 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia.  —  Ad- 
journed. 

Pennsylvania  Photographic  Association,  Phil- 
adelphia.— Adjourned. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association. — At  rooms 
of  C.  W.  Stevens,  158  State  Street,  first  Wednes- 
day evening  of  each  month.  G-.  A.  Douglas, 
President ;  0.  F.  Weaver,  Secretary,  158  State 
Street. 


HEARN'S  COLLODIO-CHLORIDE. 


I  would  respectfully  call  the  attention  of  Photographers  to  a  new 
Colloclio-Chloride,  which  I  am  manufacturing  for  the  trade. 

Knowing  well  the  difficulty  which  Photographers  generally  expe- 
rience in  the  making  of  this  the  most  fickle  of  all  collodions,  I  have 
at  great  pecuniary  expense,  and  by  the  expenditure  of  much  valuable 
time,  perfected  a  collodion  by  means  of  which  the  most  beautiful 
porcelain  prints  can  very  easily  be  obtained.  Indeed,  so  simple  is 
the  operation  of  producing  them  by  the  use  of  this  collodion,  that 
it  becomes  a  pleasure  on  the  part  of  the  Photographer  to  make 
them,  whereas  before  it  was  an  urdertaking  of  great  difficulty  and 
considerable  expense,  as  well  as  unsatisfactory  results  being  his 
reward. 

The  Porcelain  Print  made  with  this  Collodio-Chloride  is  most 
beautiful,  being  all  that  the  most  critical  Photographer  can  desire, 
in  regard  to  both  its  excellent  keeping  qualities,  and  the  beauty  and 
brilliancy  of  its  tone,  and  more  especially  the  simplicity  of  printing 
and  toning  them. 

Every  batch  of  Collodio-Chloride  made  is  tested  by  myself  before  it 
is  bottled,  and  thus  none  but  what  I  know  is  good  is  ever  sent  away 
to  my  agents,  and  hence  /  can  with  confidence  icarrant  every  bottle 
to  possess  good  keeping  and  excellent  working  qualities. 

More  next  month.     Yours  fraternally, 

CHAS.  W.    HEARN. 


WET    BOOKS. 


Owing  to  the  fact  that  the  dampness  caused  by  the  late  fire  in  our  building  has  caused 
more  of  our  stock  to  develop  mould,  and  stain,  we  offer  the  following 

INDUCEMENTS  TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS: 

1. — Linn's  Landscape  Photography,  25  cts. 

2.— Anderson's  Photo.-Comic  Almyknack,  20  cts. 

3. — Mosaics,  1866  to  1874,  inclusive,  25  cts.  each. 

4. — How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph,  10  cts. 

5. — Dr.  Vogel's  Reference-Book,  50  cts. 

6. — Leaf  Prints,  or  Glimpses  of  Photography,  50  cts. 

7. — Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing,  $2.50. 

8.— Volume  4  (1867),  Philadelphia  Photographer,  $2.50. 

9.— Volume  8  (1871),  Philadelphia  Photographer,  $2.50. 
10.— Volume  1  (1871),  Photographic  World,  2.00. 
11. — Swan's  Carbon  Process,  50  cts. 
12. — Carbon  Manual,  50  cts. 
13.— Silver  Sunbeam,  $1.50  cts. 

One  copy  of  each  of  the  above,  $8.00. 

One  parcel  containing  1  to  6,  11  and  12,  $2.00. 

One  parcel  containing  1,  2,  S,  4,  and  5,  6,  11  or  12,  $1.00. 

One  parcel  containing  1,  2,  3  and  4,  60  cts. 

WHERE  AM  FIVE  BOOKS  ARE  TAKEN  20  PER  CENT.  DISCOUNT. 

Also  an  assorted  lot  of  back  numbers  of  the   Philadelphia  Photographer,  at 
15  ceats,  and  of  the  Photographic  World,  at  10  cents  per  copy. 


The  above  goods  were  WET  and  not  burned.  They  are  now  dry,  and  for 
all  practical  uses  as  good  as  new  books,  but  so  stained  that  we  cannot  sell  them 
for  new,  and  we  offer  them,  for  one  month  only,  at  the  above  rates. 

LET  THE  ORDERS  COME  NOW  !  One  dollar  will  buy  lots  of  useful 
reading!     A  good  chance  to  fill  up  back  volumes  of  our  Magazines. 

State  your  orders  explicitly. 

BENER1IAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 

AUG.  SCH  W  ARZE.  CQU  Uf  AP7P     &    VALK  W ILLI  AM  V  ALK . 

NO.    614    AMCH   STMEJET,    PHILADELPHIA. 

German  Aim  Paper,  M  Arrowroot  Plain  Salted  Paper. 


IMPORTERS  OP- THE 
MOST  CELEBRATED  BRANDS  OF 


DEALERS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  MATERIALS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 

Will  mail  to  any  address  in  the  country,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  $1,  one  dozen  sheets  of  Assorted  Photo- 
graphic Paper,  each  sheet  being  numbered  for  distinction. 


BENJ.  FRENCH  &  CO., 

159  Washington    St.,   Boston, 

IMPORTERS    AND    SOLE    AGENTS    EOR   THE    CELEBRATED 

mm. 


NEW  STEREOSCOPIC  IEISES, 

New  Stereoscopic  Tube  and  Lens,  made  expressly  for  us,  marked  with  our  name  (imita- 
tion Dallmeyer),  with  rack  aud  pinion,  central  stops,  for  portraits  or  views.  Will  work  in 
or  out  of  doors.  Also,  for  instantaneous  pictures.  Four  inch  focus,  price  per  pair, 
$22.00.  By  taking  out  back  lens,  and  using  only  front  lens  in  place  of  back,  you  get 
six  inch  focus.  The  great  and  increasing  demand  for  all  these  lenses,  is  sure  guaran- 
tee that  they  are  the  best.    Read  the  following 

Testimonials. 

"I  have  tried  the  Mammoth  Voigtlander  you  sent  me,  and  I  consider  it  the  best  large  in- 
strument I  have  ever  seen,  and  I  have  tried  those  made  by  other  makers,  Dallmeyer's  in- 
eluded,  and  they  do  not  compare  with  the  Voigtlander.  All  my  baby  pictures  were  made 
with  half-size  Voigtlander  lenses." — J.  Landy,"208  W.  Fourth  St.,  Cincinnati,  Feb.  25,  1874. 

"The  Voigtlander  lenses  have  always  been  favorites  with  me.  My  first  experience,  in  the 
days  of  daguerreotype,  was  with  one,  since  which  I  have  owned  and  tried  many  of  the  differ- 
ent sizes  and  never  saw  one  but  was  an  excellent  instrument.  Lately  again  trying  some  for 
my  own  use  and  for  a  friend,  I  found  them  to  be  superior  to  other  eminent  makers,  particu- 
larly in  the  large  sizes." — W.  J.  Bakee,  Buffalo,  V.  Y. 

"  Twenty-four  years  ago  I  bought  and  commenced  using  my  first  Voigtlander  lens.  It  was 
a  good  one.  Since  then  1  have  owned  and  used  a  good  many  of  the  same  brand,  of  various 
sizes.  They  were  all  and  always  good.  Some  of  the  larger  sizes  that  I  have  recently  bought 
seem  to  me  better  than  any  I  have  ever  had  or  seen  before." — J.  F.  Ryder,  Cleveland,  Ohio, 
Dec.  18,  1872. 

•'  About  a  year  ago  I  bought  a  Voigtlander  &  Son  No.  3  4-4  size  lens.  Said  instrument  gives 
me  great  satisfaction,  being  very  quick,  at  the  same  time  has  great  depth  of  focus." — E.  G. 
Maine,  Columbus,  Miss. 

"Have  never  seen  anything  equal  to  the  Voigtlander  &  Son  Lens.  The  No.  5,  Ex.  4-4  is 
the  best  instrument  I  ever  used.  I  cannot  keep  house  without  it." — D.  B.  Vickery,  Haver- 
hill, Mass. 

"The  pair  of  imitation  Dallmeyer  Stereoscopic  Lenses  you  sent  we  are  very  much  pleased 
with;  they  work  finely." — Goodridge  Bros.,  East  Saginaw,  Mich.  v 

"After  a  trial  of  your  imitation  Dallmeyer  in  the  field  with  those  of  the  Dallmeyer  Rapid 
Rectilinear,  side  by  side,  I  can  say  that  for  general  views  I  like  yours  as  well,  for  some  ob- 
jects far  better,  on  account  of  their  short  focal  length." — D.  H.  Cross,  Mosher's  Gal.,  Chicago. 


GRISWOIjD'S 


STEREOSCOPIC   GROUPS, 


LIFE  COMPOSITIONS  FOR  THE  STEREOSCOPE, 

Are  Excellent  Studies  for  Photographers. 


EVERY  LOVER  OF  NATURE  BUYS  THEM. 

YOU  CAN  MAKE  A  GOOD  PROFIT  ON  THEM. 


The  following  subjects  are  now  ready,  handsomely  mounted. 


1.  Blowing  Bubbles. 

2.  B  stands  for  Bumble-B. 
Blackberry  Blossoms. 
The  Hen's  Nest. 
Let  us  Have  Piece. 
Mamma,  where  was  I  when  you  were 

a  little  girl  ? 
Our  Domestic's  Relations. 
She  went  to  the  Butchers. 
My  Lady  and  My  Lady's  Maid. 
The  Mountain  Spring. 
Unveiling  a  Statue  of  Young  America. 

12.  Young  America  in  the  Nursery. 

13.  Young  America  as  an  Artist. 

14.  Young  America  Asleep. 


9. 
10. 
11. 


15.  The  Sunbeam  Fairy. 

16.  The  Picture-Book. 

17.  Sitting  for  my  Picture. 

18.  Young  America  Bathing. 

19.  Young  Boston's  Ambition. 
Ding-Dong-Ding,  Music  on  a  Rubber 

String. 
Reflection. 

22.  The  Loiterers. 

23.  The  Cabin  Porch. 

24.  Beatrice  Shoo-Fly. 

25.  Home  Group. 

26.  A  View. 

27.  The  Gleaner. 


-.'0 


21 


The  titles  hardly  give  an  idea  of  the  grotesque  humor  possessed  by  these  pictures.  They 
are  capital.  As  a  sample  dozen  we  should  recommend  Nos.  1,  2,  4,  5,  6,  11,  13,  16,  19, 
20,  22,  and  25.     ■ 


Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price.    $2.00  per  dozen.     Order  by  number. 
DEALERS  SUPPLIED  ON  GOOD  TERMS. 


These  inimitable  pictures  are  all  natural  compositions,  and  touch  the  tender  chords  of 
human  nature  most  wonderfully.  They  are  attractive  to  every  one  who  has  a  heart,  but 
particularly  instructive  as  studies  for  photographers,  in  grouping,  posing,  and  composition. 

They  will  help  any  man  make  better  and  easier  pictures  of  children,  and  should 

be  studied. 

BENERftflAN   &  WILSON,   Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


PHOTOGRAPHERS,   ATTENTION  ! 

YOU  NEED  NOT  BUY  THE  GLACE,  CALIFORNIA, 

OR  ANY  OTHER  ENAMEL  PROCESS. 

EXAMINE  THE  NEW 

Enameled  and  Embossed 


souv 


PHOTOGRAPHS, 

AND  PATENT  IMPROVED  PRESSES  FOR  MOULDING  THEM. 


INTRODUCED    BY 


Messrs.  E.  L.  Brand  &  Co. 

596  WABASH  AYENUE,  CHICAGO. 
WS=*  Full  Instructions  Supplied  GRATIS! 

Messrs.  E.  L.  BRAND  &  CO.  desire  to  state  to  Photographers  that 
they  purchased  the  process  for  making  the  SOUVENIR  photographs  in 
France,  but  finding  it  incomplete  and  impracticable,  they  have  diligently 
experimented  until  they  have  a  perfect  process.  But  after  all,  the  great 
desideratum  is  a 

PROPERLY  CONSTRUCTED  PRESS  FOR  MOULDING  THE  PICTURES, 

or  in  other  ivords,  raising  them  in  cameo  style.    Such  a  machine  Messrs. 
Brand  &  Co.  have  perfected,  and  offer  to  the  photographers  at 

POPULAR    PMOESS. 

They  are  complete  in  themselves,  embodying  a  press  and  dies  of  all  popu- 
lar sizes.  They  are  made  on  entirely  new  principles,  and  will  commend 
themselves  to  all  who  see  them. 

They  are  going  to  be  the  leading  pictures,  and  tvill  pay  A  SPLENDID 
PROFIT.  Do  not  pay  for  ANY  process  until  you  see  ours,  with  its  many 
improvements,  for  we  can  give  you  the  best  process  in  the  world,  GRATIS. 

For  further  particulars,  address 

E.  L.  BRAND  &  GO,,  596  Wabash  Ave.,  Chicago,  Ills. 

jjpggr'  The  "  Souvenir  "  press  is  now  in  use  in  the  leading  galleries  of  America. 


DAMAGED 


The  recent  fire  in  our  establishment  caused  a  part  of  our  large  stock  of  Lantern  Slides 
to  be  damaged  by  water.  For  all  practical  uses  they  are  not  damaged  at  all.  Any  photog- 
rapher, by  repairing  the  sticking  paper  around  them,  may  make  them  as  good  as  new.  We 
cannot  repair  them  to  look  like  fresh  stock,  so  we  offer  them  at  the  following  reduced  rates : 

levy's  Foreign  Views  (Holy  Land,  Paris,  and  Europe),  50  ets. 

Eetailed  at  $1.25. 
Colored  Scripture  and  Comic  Slides, .    60  and  75    " 

Eetailed  at  $1.25  and  $2.00. 
American  Views  and  Statuary, 40    " 

Eetailed  at  75  cts.  and  $1.00. 


Nearly  all  Gone.    Wo  Colored  Slides  among  them. 


Care  given  to  selecting  for  parties  who  cannot  be  present  to  select  for  themselves. 

BENERMAW  &  WILSON, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 

JOHN   R.  CIjEMONS, 

IMPORTER  OF 
AND  MANUFACTURER  OF 

ALBUMEN  AND  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPERS. 

PINK  AND  BLUE  ALBUMEN  PAPER  CONSTANTLY  ON  HAND  OR  MADE  TO  ORDER. 

CLEMONS'  NEW  ALBUMEN   PAPER, 

A  superior  article  introduced  iuto  the  market  about  a  year  ago.  It  is  equal,  if  not  superior  to  any  Paper 
imported ;  the  great  demand  proves  such  to  be  the  case.  It  is  praised  by  all  who  use  it  as  to  its  keeping 
white  during  warm  weather ;  also,  for  its  brilliancy  and  toning  qualities,  and  it  is  made  White,  Pink,  and 
Blue.    Sizes  medium,  26  x  40  and  35  x  46. 

CLEMONS'  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPER 

Has  stood  the  test  above  all  other  makes  for  the  last  nine  years.  An  article  extensively  used  for  all  Plain 
Solar,  and  Colored  Work.    Sizes,  17%  x  23,  26  x  40,  and  35  x  46. 

Prices  lower  than  those  of  any  foreign  make. 

CLEMONS'  N.  P.  A.  VARNISH, 

For  Plain  Work  and  Retouching  upon.  .  » 

CLEMONS'  GOLDEN  VARNISH, 

For  Intensifying  and  Retouching  upon. 

JOHN  R.  CLEMONS,  Manufacturer, 

915  SAWSOM  ST.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


Gihon's  Cut-Outs 

Are  the  very  best  that  are  made,  and  are  now  without  a  rival  in  the  market.  They  are  clean 
cut,  most  desirable  shapes  and  sizes,  and  made  of  non-actinic  paper,  manufactured  specially 
for  the  purpose.  Each  package  contains  30  Cut-Outs,  or  Masks,  with  corresponding  Insides, 
assorted  for  five  differently  sized  ovals  and  one  arch-top. 

PRICE,  $1.00  PER  PACKAGE.     Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

Parties  wishing  special  sizes,  or  large  lots  of  a  few  sizes,  may  have  them  cut  to  order 
promptly,  by  addressing  the  manufacturer.     No  lot  costing  less  than  $1.00  made  at  a  time. 


No  printer  should  attempt  to  make  medallion  pictures  without  them. 

THEY  HAVE  NO  EQUAL  FOR  QUALITY. 

Beware  of  spurious  imitations  made  of  common  paper,  full  of  holes,  badly  cut,  and  odd 
shapes  and  sizes.  Ask  your  stockdealer  for  GIHON'S  CUT-OUTS,  and  see  that  they  are 
in  his  envelopes  with  instruction  circular  included. 


Gihon-s  Opaque 

IS    DESIGNED    TOR 

COMPLETELY  OBSCURING  THE  IMPERFECT  BACKGROUNDS  OF  COPIES, 
RETOUCHING  NEGATIVES, 

FAULTY  SKIES  IN  LANDSCAPES, 

COATING  THE  INSIDE  OF  LENSES  OR  CAMERA  BOXES, 
BACKING  SOLAR  NEGATIVES, 

COVERING  VIGNETTING  BOARDS, 

AND   FOR  ANSWERING 

ALL  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  INTELLIGENT  PHOTOGRAPHER  IN  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  ARTISTIC  RESULTS  IN  PRINTING. 


WHEREVER  YOU  WANT  TO  KEEP  OUT  LIGHT,  USE  OPAQUE. 

It  is  applied  with  a  brush,  dries  quickly  and  sticks. 


GUT-OUTS  (thirty),  $1.00.  OPAQUE,  50  CENTS. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Address  all  orders  to 

JOHN  L.  GIHON,  Inventor, 

128  JST.  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


HOW  TO   PAINT  PHOTOGRAPHS. 


The  THIRD  EDITION  is  so  different  from  former  ones,  that  it  may  almost  be  said  that  it  is  A  new 
work. 

It  Gives  the  Best  and  Freshest  Instructions  to  be  had  on  the  Subject. 

Written  by  a  practical  photographic  colorist,  Mr.  Geo.  B.  Ayres. 

PRICE,  $2.00.     FOB  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALEBS. 

Photographers  and  artists  whose  interest  it  is  to  produce  work  in  Water  Colors,  Oil,  India  Ink,  or 
who  wish  complete  instructions  in  retouching  negatives,  should  consult  Mr.  Ayres'  capital  work. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia, 

O-.    SATJTBB. 

No.    138  South  Eighth  Street,   Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURER  AND   WHOLESALE   DEALER  IN 


The  attention  of  the  trade  is  particularly  called  to  the  superior  quality  of  our  Glass  and  materials 
and  neatness  of  finish.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand. 

BULLOCK    &    CRENSHAW, 

No.  528  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURERS  AND  IMPORTERS   OF   PURE  CHEMICALS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 
IMPORTERS  OF  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN,  APPARATUS,  ETC. 

TRAPP  &  MUNOH'S 


gUbttmett 


Introduced  into  this  country  since  1868  has  become  the  leading  paper,  and  is 
now  better  knowu  and  more  appreciated  than  any  other  brand. 

That  this  great  success  is  well  deserved  and  due  to  its  excellent  qualities 
may  be  judged  from  the  fact,  that  of  all  the  competitors  of  the  Vienna  Ex- 
hibition, Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  alone  received  the 

IMIIEID^L,    OIE"1    IMZEIR/IET 

for  Albumenized  Paper. 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALL  THE  STOCKHOUSES. 

WILLY  WALLACH, 

GENERAL  AGENT  FOR  THE  UNITED  STATES, 

No.  4  Beekman  St.,  and  36  Park  Row,  New  York. 


0V1LL 


Xanuf&ctnriag  0©. 


'I 


DEALERS 


III  EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY, 


AND  PROPRIETORS  OP  THE  WORKS  OF  THE 


American  Optical 
Company 


BROOME  J 
STREET, 


Advertising,  Enterprising  Photographers,  Look ! 

The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 

WHAT  IS  IT? 


TIHE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS  is  a  little  book  or  pamphlet  of  twelve  pages,  the 
]  intention  of  which  is  :  1st.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  say  a  few  words  in  a  kindly  way 
to  those  who  have  photographs  taken,  in  order  that  the  intercourse  between  them  and  their 
photographer  may  be  pleasant  and  result  in  the  most  successful  pictures.  Every  photographer 
knows  that  he  is  constantly  beset  with  a  lot  of  questions,  as  to  the  proper  way  to  dress,  the  best 
time  to  come,  and  so  on,  which  take  a  great  deal  of  his  time  to  answer.  This  little  book  answers 
them  all,  and  the  mere  handing  of  a  copy  to  the  questioner,  which  he  or  she  can  carry  away  and  study 
at  leisure,  serves  as  admirably  as  a  half-hour's  conversation. 

2d.  It  is  a  cheap  mode  of  advertising  What  could  you  want  better  than  to  have  your  business  card 
so  attractive  that  people  will  come  and  ask  for  it,  hand  it  around  from  one  to  another,  discuss  it,  and 
then  keep  it  for  reference?  This  is  what  they  do  with  this  little  "tract."  Witness  what  those  who 
have  tried  it  say  below. 

3d.  It  is  also  intended  to  convey  to  the  public  at  large  the  fact  that  photography  is  not  a  branch  of 
mechanics,  nor  photographers  a  sort  of  mechanic  themselves,  but  that  both  are  entitled  to  respect,  the 
same  as  the  family  physician  or  the  minister ;  that  the  photographer  has  rights  as  well  as  the  public  ; 
that  he  must  be  trusted,  and  that  he  alone  is  responsible  for  his  results.  Moreover,  that  /igmust  make 
the  picture  and  not  they. 

How  far  the  work  serves  these  three  ends  the  reader  must  judge  from  the  testimonials  below,  of  a 
few  of  those  who  have  been  using  our  little  publication  in  their  business. 

.    We  believe  it  will  pay  you  to  use  it,  and  that  you  will  assist  just  that  much  in  elevating  your  art  and 
your  craft,  an  object  which  we  are  all  working  for. 

We  get  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons  "  up  in  neat  style,  on  the  best  letter  cap  paper,  assorted 
tints,  green,  pink,  and  buff.  Eight  pages  are  devoted  to  the  body  of  the  work,  which  contains  para- 
graphs or  chapters — 1,  on  the  object  of  the  work  ;  2,  on  photography  ;  3,  when  to  come  ;  4,  how  to 
come;  5,  how  to  dress;  6,  how  to  "behave;  7,  the  children  ;  8,  general  remarks  on  coloring,  copy- 
ing, frames,  prices,  &c. 

All  this  is  inclosed  in  a  cover  of  the  same  kind  of  paper,  the  pages  of  which  are  at  the  service  of 
the  photographer  who  orders  them  to  have  printed  thereon  anything  he  may  please,  which  printing 
we  do  without  extra  charge.     We  publish  this  leaflet  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 


Cuts  for  the  covers  tve  supply  free. 


1000  copies,  cover  included, 
2000 


$20  00  3000  copies,  cover  included,     .     .  $50  00 

35  00  5000       "  "  "  .     .     75  00 

Over  500,000  have  been  sold. 
We  invite  you  to  examine  the  good  words  which  our  patrons  have  sent  us  concerning  this  publication. 

TESTIMONIALS. 


"  I  sent  one  out  West  to  a  friend,  and  she 
wrote  that  she  was  now  posted,  and  when  she 
came  here  to  have  a  picture  made,  she  would 
come  'according  to  directions.'  '■ — A.  Bogar- 
dus,  New  York. 

"  A  grand  idea." — Elbert  Anderson. 

'■'It  is  eagerly  sought  for  and  read  by  every- 
body who  visits  our  Gallery.'' — J.  Gurney  & 
Son,  New  York. 

"  It  assists  me  greatly." — James  Mullen, 
Lexington,  Ky. 

"  The  many  valuable  hints  in  it  cannot  fail  to 
be  beneficial  to  both  photographer  and  patron." 
— Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  W.  Virginia. 


"  You  have  conferred  a  great  favor  on  the  fra- 
ternity in  supplying  it,  and  we  hope  it  will  bene- 
fit some  of  the  '  Icnow-everythings  '  in  this  quar- 
ter."— A.  C.  McIntyre  &  Co.,  Ogdensburg. 

"They  are  just  the  thing  to  post  people  up  on 
what  they  ought  to  know  in  order  to  secure  good 
pictures." — J.  P.  Whipple,  White  Water. 

"  I  really  think  your  little  book  '  hits  the  nail 
on  the  head.'  " — J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

"It  is  the  best  advertising  medium  I  have 
ever  found. "-^-H.  M.  Sedgewick,  Granville,  0. 

"  I  think  they  are  a  perfect  success,  and  will 
do  us  photographers  a  great  deal  of  good." — G 
W.  Mathis. 


We  will  send  samples  of  the  book,  and  special  rates,  to  any 
who  may  desire  it. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


(Jkmpng. 


'% 


IN  EVERY  VARIETY. 


Nos.  419  &  421  BROOME  ST.,  NEW  YORK, 
No.  73  BOLD  STREET,  LIVERPOOL,  ENGLAND. 


DEALERS  SUPPLIED  WITH  THE  BEST  GOODS  ON  THE  BEST  TERMS, 


Our  own  extensive  facilities  for  manufacturing  enable  us  to  produce  first  quality  of  goods, 
and  our  extensive  connections  at  home  and  abroad  give  us  facilities  which  no  one  else  has. 


MANUFACTORIES :  Wat^u$  ^TcSS^ Ct 


SEE  OTHER  ADVERTISEMENTS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  BOOKS  and  MAGAZINES 


Examine  Scoyill's  Photographic  Clock  anJ  Real  the  Photographic  Times. 


THE  ZENTMAYER  LENS 

For  Views  and  Copying. 


These  Lenses  possess  pre-eminently,  the  following  qualities  : 

Width  of  visual  angle,  ranging  from  80°  to  90°  ;  depth  of  focus  ;  extreme  sharpness  over  the 
whole  field  ;  true  perspective ;  freedom  from  all  distortion  in  copying  :  portability  and  cheapness. 

Each  mounting  is  provided  with  a  revolving  Diaphragm,  containing  the  stops  of  the  different  com- 
binations for  which  they  are  designed.  The  larger  ones  are  provided  with  an  internal  shutter  for 
making  and  closing  the  exposure. 


No.  1, 

2i  inch  focus, 

3x3 

"    2, 

3i     "         " 

4x5 

"    3, 

5*     "         " 

6|  x    8i 

"    4, 

8       " 

10    x    12 

"    5, 

12       " 

14    x    17 

"    6, 

18       " 

20    x    24 

plate, 


$20  00 
25  00 
30  00 
42  00 
60  00 
90  00 


No.  1  and  No.  2  combined, 


2 

3  ' 

4  ' 

5  ' 
1,  2 
3,  4 


3 

"  4 

"  5 

"  6 

and  3, 

and  5, 


$33  00 
40  00 
55  00 
75  00 

110  00 
48  00 
88  00 


No.  3,  with  large  mounting  to  combine  with  No.  4  and  No.  5,  $35. 

No.  1  and  No.  2,  specially  adapted  for  Stereoscopic  Views,  are  furnished  in  matched  pairs.  No.  1 
and  No.  2,  single,  not  to  combine  with  other  sizes,  $36  a  pair. 

Lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six  combinations,  from  1\  to  18  inches,  $173. 

Zentmayer's  Stereoscopic  outfits,  including  a  pair  of  No.  2  Lenses  4x7  box,  7x10  India  Rubber 
Bath  and  Dipper,  Tripod,  Printing  Frames,  and  outside  box,  $60. 

JOSEPH  ZENTMAYER,  Manufacturer, 

147  South  Fourth  Street,  Philadelphia. 

STEREOSCOPIC   riEJTS. 


Dealers  selecting  their  autumn  stock  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  would  do  well  to  examine  our 

unrivalled  variety  of  Views  of 

THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS, 

NIAGARA,   WASHINGTON, 

FAIR  MOUNT  PARK,  PHILADELPHIA, 

FLOWERS,  GROUPS,  &c. 

*»-  Q1JAMTT  UNSURPASSED  ! 


KILBURN  BROS.,  Littleton,  New  Hampshire. 

NIAGARA 

STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS. 


Winter  and  Summer  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  of  all  sizes.     Trade  supplied  on  good  terms.     Variety 
unequalled. 

G.  E.  CURTIS,  Photographer, 

Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y. 


Mr.  Curtis'  views  answer  Mr.  Robinson's  query  :   "Are  there  any  clouds  ir>  America?  " 


GERMAN  ALBUMEN  COLORS ! 

JULIUS     KRUGE  R'S 

FOR  COLORING  PHOTOGRAPHS  ON  ALBUMEN  and  PLAIN  PAPER. 

These  colors  have  become  very  popular  in  Germany  and  France  (where  they  have  obtained  the 
highest  recommendations),  on  account  of  their  extraordinary  brilliancy,  evenness,  and  easy  application. 
They  can  be  used  on  Albumen  Paper,  and  are  without  doubt  the  best  that  have  been  offered  to  the 
public.     The  Colors  are  put  up  in  boxes  of  6,  12,  and  18. 

CEO.  RAU,  Sole  Agent, 

No.  922  Girard  Ave.,  Philadelphia. 


f 


The  subscriber  desires  to  call  attention  to  an  Entirely  New  Style  of  Carved  Frame, 
unique,  handsome,  and  stylish,  and  very  becoming  to  photographs,  which  he  is  now  manu- 
facturing, and  will  furnish  at  the  following  prices  : 


4x5      @  $6  00  per  doz. 

8  x  10    @  $15  00  per  doz. 

12x16 

@  $30  00  per  doz 

5^x7}^®    9  00 
SllxS}4@  12  00 

9x11    @    15  00 

13x17 

@    36  00 

10  x  12    @    18  00        " 

16x20 

@    42  00        " 

7x9     @  12  00        ,; 

11x14    @    24  00 

Larger  sizes  $3.00  per  dozen  for  each  additional  four  inches  or  less  in  length  and  breadth. 
Sample  of  each  size,  except  the  two  smallest,  sent  on  receipt  of  price.  Orders  for  one  dozen 
or  more  filled  C.O.D.  if  ten  per  cent,  is  sent  with  order. 

H.  H.  SNELLINC,  Newburgh,  N.  Y. 

The  undersigned,  having  purchased  the  entire  interest,  goodwill,  and  business  of 

Photo.  Materials  &  Picture  Frames 

OF  J.  HAWOETH, 

Desires  to  inform  his  friends  and  the  trade  generally,  that  he  will  continue  the  business,  as 

heretofore,  at  the  old  stand, 

624  ARCH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA, 

Where  he  hopes,  by  prompt  attention  and  fair  dealing,  to  merit  a  continuance  of  the  patron- 
age so  largely  given  to  the  late  firm. 

We  will  still  keep  a  well  assorted  stock  of 

PICTURE  FRAMES  (OVAL  AND  SQUARE), 

VELVET  CASES,  COLLODIONS, 

VARNISHES,  PURE  CHEMICALS,   &c, 

which  can  be  had  at  the  lowest  rates ;  as  well  as 

PASSEPARTOUTS,    STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS   OF   ALL   PARTS    OF  THE  WORLD, 
STEREOSCOPIC  INSTRUMENTS,  Ac. 

We  also  have  a  full  line  of  CAMEEAS  of  the  best  makes  and  latest  improvements, 
CAMEEA  STANDS,  HEAD-EESTS,  BACKGEOUNDS,  and  all  Accessories  necessary 
to  the  Photographic  Art.  We  would  call  the  attention  of  photographers  to  the  fact  that  we 
manufacture  SQXJAEE  EEAMES,  and  so  can  generally  ship  any  frames  (especially  odd 
sizes)  the  same  day  they  are  ordered.  We  would  also  call  attention  to  the  noted  ALBU- 
MEN PAPEES,  Morgan's  and  H.  Extra,  the  best  for  warm  weather,  for  which  I  am 
the  agent. 

THOMAS  H.  McCOLLIN. 

Successor  to  Haworth  &  McCollin,  624  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO.. 

822  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa., 

HAVE  BEEN  APPOINTED 

AGENTS  FOE   THE  SALE  OF  MESSES.  E.  L. 

BEAND  $  CO.'S 

PATENT  IMPROVED  PRESSES, 

for  moulding  the  Souvenir  Photographs,  which  they  will 
furnish  at  following  prices,  including  instructions  : 

No.  1— Cabinet  size, $25  00 

"    1 — Card  and  Cabinet  size,      . 35  00 

"    2— Card  Cabinet  and  6£x8i, 50  00 

"    3— Card  Cabinet,  8x10,  10x13,  13x16,      .     .     .     .     .     .     .     .     .     .100  00 

They  are  also  Agents  for 

THE  LANGD0N  ADJUSTABLE  MITRE  BOX. 

Price,  with  22  inch  Disston  Saw, $10  00 

Their  Latest  Novelties  are 

STONE  ACID  DISHES. 

To  hold  1£  gallons,  each, $2  00 

"        2i         "  " , 3  25 

"        7  "  " 8  75 

SOLID  GLASS  DIPPERS  (two  prong). 

No.  1 — 7  inches  long, $0  35 

"  2—12  "    " .' 45 

"  3—13  "    " 50 

"  4—15  "    " • 60 

"  5—19  "    "  :  .  .- 70 


PRICE  LISTS  FREE  TO  ALL  APPLICANTS. 


LINN'S   LOOKOUT     W 
LANDSCAPE   PHOTOGRAPHY. 


J=o 


5=« 


«rc3 

!= 

s=a 

CCS 

« 

CL3 
C-=> 


YET  CONTAINING    MANY    USEFUL    HINTS    FOE  ALL    PHOTOOBAPHEKS. 

By  the  Late  Prof.  R.  M.  LINN, 

LOOKOUT  MOUNTAIN,   TENN. 

This  admirable  little  work  was  published  last  fall,  a  little  too  late  for  the  season.  It  is 
now  confidently  recommended  to  every  photographer  about  to  do  any  class  of  work,  outside 
or  inside  the  skylight. 

CONTENTS. 


Introductory. 

Main  Requisites  of  a  Good  Photographic  Land- 
scape. 

Artistic  Effect. 

Proper  Illumination. 

Direction  of  Light. 

Clouds. 

Length  of  Exposure. 

Apparatus  for  Field  Work. 

On  the  Selection  of  View  Lenses. 

Camera  Boxes. 

Bath  Cups. 

Preliminary  Preparations. 

Taking  the  Field. 

Hints  on  Printing  and  Finishing. 

To  Print  Clouds. 

Toning  Bath  for  Views. 

On  Fixing  and-  Washing  Prints. 

Suggestions  on  Mounting  Prints. 

To  Cut  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

To  Mount  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

Formulae  and  Processes  for  Landscape  Photog- 
raphy. 

Ever-ready  Iodizer  for  Landscape  Photography. 


Remarks  on  Preparing  and  Using  Iodizer. 

On  the  Management  of  Flowing  Bottles. 

On  the  Preparation  of  Plain  Collodion. 

The  Silver  Bath  for  Negatives. 

To  Renovate  an  Old  Negative  Bath. 

To  Prepare  Carbonate  of  Silver. 

Permanganate  of  Potash — Its  Use  in  our  Art. 

Preparation  and  Using  of  Developer. 

Fixing  Solution  for  View  Negatives. 

On  Redeveloping  and  Strengthening  Agents. 

To  Clean  and  Polish  the  Glass. 

To  Prepare  Chloride  of  Gold  Solution. 

The  Paste  for  Mounting  of  Photographs. 

The    Operator's    Oracle — Failures  :    Causes  and 

Remedies  ;  for  consultation  in  time  of  trouble. 
Counsels  and  Cautions  for  the  Printer,  including 

Formulae  for  Silvering  Bath,  &c 
Failures  in  Silvering  Albumenized  Paper. 
Failures  in  Toning  Photographs. 
Failures  in  Fixing  Photographs. 
Instantaneous  Photography. 
View  Photography  Financially  Considered. 
Stereoscoping  Applied  to  Portraiture. 
Concluding  Remarks. 


PRICE,  75  CENTS. 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


NEWELL'S 


I 


ACKNOWLEDGED  TO  BE 


THE    BEST    IN    THE    WORLD 


READ  THE  LATEST  TESTIMONIALS : 

Messrs.   R.  Newell  &  Son.  Boston,  Mass.,  March  30,  1874. 

Dear  Sirs :  In  answer  to  your  letter  of  inquiry,  ns  to  how  I  like  the  Bath  Holder,  I  have  delayed 
answering  that  I  might  have  time  to  thoroughly  test  it.  I  find  it  in  every  way  first-rate  ;  does  not 
injure  the  bath,  is  light  and  of  convenient  shape,  and  is  altogether  the  best  holder  I  have  used. 
Hoping  you  will  meet  with  success  in  the  sale  of  the  article,  I  remain, 

Yours  truly.  A.  Marshall,  147  Tremont  Street. 


Messrs.  It.  Newell  &  Son. 


Albany,  N.  Y.,  March  25,  1874. 


Gevts  :  The  28  x  28  Bath  works  splendid,  and  I  must  say  the  system  of  making  baths  of  wood 
and  coating  them  with  your  composition  has  supplied  a  want  long  needed  by  the  practical  photog- 
rapher, as  large  glass  baths  are  always  dangerous.  Very  truly, 

E.  S.  M.  Hains,  45  North  Pearl  Street. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  FIRST-CLASS  STOCKDEALERS. 


13.     O". 

SOUTHERN 

Photographic^Ferrotype 

STOCK  DEPOT, 
Savannah,  Geo. 

FIRST-CLASS  STOCK 

AT  NORTHERN  PRICES, 

Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance, 
cRosscuptiNEST.>HA^^— -^=?—  Drayage,  &e. 

sehstid   :fo":r  fi^ioe   list. 


WAYMOUTH'S 


ga^gp^? 

■L            = 

fid 

|BJi^S.v~ 

lis 

m 

^§IHl=^ 

SH 

SiBwMI 

■Hi 

Mi 

iiy    j 

^      m 

ignetting  Papers 


ARE  NOW  MADE  OF  TWO  SHAPES,  as  shown  in   the  drawings  above.     They  consist  of  finely 
gradated,  lithographed  designs,  mounted  on  protecting  sheets  of  non-actinic  paper,  and  are  the  light 
est,  neatest,  and  best  means  of  producing  vignette  pictures  ever  offered. 

TESTIMOUIALS  : 

"  Waymouth's  Improved  Vignette  Papers  I  have  tried,  and  they  are  just  what  I  have  been  want- 
ing for  years." — Well  G.  Singhi. 

"  They  readily  admit  of  the  gradation  already  very  good,  being  modified  easily  to  suit  the  negative. 
This,  I  take  it,  is  a  point  of  great  importance." — G.  Wharton  Simpson,  M.A.,  F.S.A. 

"  From  a  trial  made,  we  are  enabled  to  say  that  they  answer  exceedingly  well  ;  and  they  are  certain 
to  find  favor  among  photographers — a  favor  they  well  deserve." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  can  testify  to  the  exquisite  softness  obtained  from  your  Vignette  Papers,  which  gradual  and 
soft  effect  I  have  never  seen  equalled  by  any  other  method." — H.  A.  H.  Daniel,  Esq.,  Ho?t.  Sec.  of  the 
Bristol  and  Clifton  Amateur  Photographic  Association. 

"  The  Way  mouth  Vignetting  Paper  are  a  decided  success.  They  are  splendid." — J.  W.  fy  J.  S. 
MouUon,  Salem  Mass. 

From  Professional  Photographers.—" First-class."  "The  sample  sent  answers  perfectly."  "I 
consider  them  first  rate  articles."  "I  think  your  Vignette  Papers  will  be  a  great  improvement  on 
the  old  glasses."     Ac,  Ac. 

Any  number  sent  on  receipt  of  price,  by  any  stockdealer,  or  by  » 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers, 

PHILADELPHIA . 

{See  opposite  page.) 


DO  YOU  USB 


WAYMOUTH'S 

VIGNETTE 

PAPERS. 

(DESIGNS    COPYRIGHTED.) 
OF  ALL  PICTURES,  THE 


§ijjttette 


IS  THE  MOST  ARTISTIC, 


When  properly  printed.  But  the  clumsy  devices  generally  in  use  for  printing  them, 
or  rather  for  Mending  the  shading  ahout  the  figure,  produce  hut  very  few  really  artistic 
vignette  pictures.  Either  the  shading  is  too  intensely  dark,  not  gradated  in  tint  at  all,  or 
it  shoAvs  an  ugly  direct,  decided  line,  which  is  very  repulsive.  The  shading  should 
blend  gradually  from,  the  dark  tint  nearest  to  the  figure,  off  into  the 
ivhite  background.  The  results  are  then  soft,  artistic,  and  beautiful.  The  easiest  and 
best  way  to  secure  them  is  by  the  use  of 

WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 

THEY  ARE  NOT  CLUMSY ;  DO  NOT  BREAK  ;  ARE  ALWAYS  READY ;  COST 
BUT  LITTLE,  AND  ARE  EASY  OF  APPLICATION  TO  ANY  NEGATIVE. 

THEY  NEED  BUT  ONE  ADJUSTMENT  TO  PRINT  ANY  QUANTITY. 

They  entirely  do  away  with  all  the  old  and  troublesome  methods,  either  wood,  metal, 
or  cotton. 

PLEASE  TRY  THE  SAMPLE  GIVEN  IN  THIS  MAGAZINE  FOR  FEB.  1874. 


Eighteen  sizes  are  now  made,  suiting  all  dimensions  of  pictures  from  a  small  carte  figure 
to  Whole-size,  Victorias,  Cabinets,  &c.  They  are  printed  in  black  for  ordinary  negatives, 
yellow  bronze  for  thin  negatives,  and  red  bronze  for  still  weaker  ones.  Directions  J  or  use 
accompany  each  parcel. 

IP  IR,  I  C  IE  S  : 

In  parcels  containing  one  of  each  size,  Nos.  1  to  15,  assorted  colors $1  00 

Assorted  sizes  and  colors,  by  number,  per  package  of  fifteen 1  00 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  assorted  sizes  and  colors,  for  Cartes,  by  number,  per  dozen 50 

"    6,  7, 11, 12,  and  13    "  "  "      Large  Cartes  and  Victorias,  by  number,  per  doz 75 

"    8,  9, 10,  14,  and  15    "  "  "     Cabinets  and  Whole-size,  "  " 100 

"    16,  17,  and  18,  "  "  "     Half  "  "  "  "       1  25 

{SEE  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

When  ordering,  state  the  number  and  color  you  want.  The  Waymouth  Vignette  Papers 
are  an  English  invention,  and  are  becoming  so  universally  used  in  Europe  that  we  have 
pleasure  in  introducing  them  to  our  patrons. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers,  7tn  and  Cherry,  Pnilada. 

FOR   SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


IMPROVED 

PHOTOGRAPH  COVERS. 


Fig.  2. 

Frequent  inquiries  for  something  at  a  much  lower  price  than  an  album,  for  the  holding 
together  and  preservation  of  photographs,  has  induced  us  to  manufacture  an  article  which 
we  think  will  meet  the  want. 

IT  SERVES  ALL  THE  PURPOSES  OF  AN  ALBUM,  FOR 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Portraits, 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Landscapes, 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Photographs  of  any  hind, 

MAY  BE  NEATLY  AND  CHEAPLY  BOUND  IN  THESE  COVERS. 

They  are'  made  with  expanding  backs,  so  that  from  six  to  twenty-four  pictures  ma}'  be 
inserted  in  one  cover.  The  pictures  are  mounted  in  the  usual  way,  and  then  strips  of  linen, 
or  strong  paper,  of  the  proper  width,  are  pasted  on  one  edge,  by  which  the  picture  is  inserted 
•and  held  in  place  in  the  cover  by  a  paper  fastener.  Pig.  1  represents  the  cover,  with  the 
perforations  in  the  back,  through  which  the  spreading  clasps  of  the  paper  fastener  bind  the 
whole  together.  These  are  so  easily  inserted  or  removed,  that  pictures  are  readily  put  in  or 
taken  out  at  any  time.  Pig.  2  represents  the  picture,  with  the  guard  pasted  on  ready  for 
insertion.  The  arrangement  is  simple,  and  we  are  sure  will  be  readily  comprehended.  For 
binding  together  views  of  your  town  or  city,  or  portraits  of  celebrities,  they  are  very  neat. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  sizes  and  prices,  without  cards : 

For  Photograph.  Per  dozen.  Per  hundred. 

Card  Size, $1.50    ......  $10.00 

Cabinet  Size, 2.25 13.50 

EXTRA   HEAVY    COVERS. 

5-8  Size, 4.50 33.00 

4-4      " 6.00 40.00 

8-10  " 8.00 56.50 

Larger  or  special  sizes  made  to  order.     Furnished  with  card  board  at  best  rates.     Samples 

mailed  at  dozen  price. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Stieets,  Philadelphia. 


JAMES  F.  MAGEE  &  CO 

MANUFACTURERS    OF 

PURE 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMICALS, 

No.  108  North  Fifth  Street, 

PHILADBLPHIA. 


Stock  Dealers  only  Supplied. 

SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT. 


ALL  PERSONS  ARE  HEREBY  NOTIFIED,  and  cautioned  against  infringing  my  Solar  Camera 
Patent. 

Infringers  will  settle  with  II.  L.  Emmons,   Attorney-at-Law,   Baltimore,   Md. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD, 

Baltimore,  Md. 

STEREOSCOPIC   VIEWS 

OF 

The  CatskiU  Mountains,  Trenton  Falls,  U.  Y., 
Lake  Mohonk,  U.  Y.,  4c,  4c. 

GREAT  VARIETY  AND  FIRST-CLASS  QUALITY. 

THE  TRADE  SUPPLIED  ON  REASONABLE  TERMS. 

J.  LOEFFLER,  Photographer,  Tompkinsville,  Staten  Island,  N.  Y. 


BALTIMORE! 

•'•■••■"■•"••"••■••" ••..••.•-..••..-..-•..••.•■..•...-..■■..•..••..-...•..•-..-..••..-..•- ••-•...-..-<..-..".-. .... ...A 

THE  ATTENTION  OF  PHOTOGRAPHERS  is  invited  to  my  stock  of  photographic 
goods.     I  am  prepared  to  fill  all  orders,  large  or  small,  promptly  at  best  prices. 

are  received  as  soon  as  by  any  one  in  the  market. 

AMOK G  OTHER  THINGS, 

The  American  Optical  Co.'s  Apparatus, 
Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler, 
Chute's  Universal  Cameo  Press, 
Robinson's  Print-Trimmers  and  Guides, 
Morrison's  and  Steinheil's  View  Lenses, 
Waymouth's  Vignette  Papers, 
All  Makes  of  Portrait  Lenses, 
Chemicals,  Glass,  and  Frames, 

are  carefully  selected  for  my  special  sales.     My  expenses  are  light.     I  do  my  own  work 
personally,  and  can  supply  goods  as  low  as  the  next  one. 

A  trial  order  solicited.     Freight  and  expressage  from  Baltimore  very  low  to  any  point 
South  or  West. 

No.  7  No.  7  No.  7 

NORTH    CHARLES    STREET, 

BALTIMORE,  MD. 


1874. 


Special  Premium  of  Six  Handsome  German 
Cabinet  Pictures  of  Ladies ! 

By  FRITZ  LUCKHARDT,  Vienna,  Austria. 

These  pictures  are  alone  worth  $3  for  the  set,  and  more  is  asked  for 
such  by  dealers. 

Given  to  any  one  who  will  send  is  a  NEW  Siitaita  for  tie  year  1874. 

We  make  this  offer  as  A  MATTER  OF  BUSINESS,  and 
not  as  a  favor  to  a,ny  one  on  either  side.  It  will  pay 
to  GIVE  A  YEAR'S  SUBSCRIPTION  TO  YOUR  OPERATOR 
or  to  your  friend  or  customer,  in  order  to  SECURE 
THESE  PICTURES. 

BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philada. 


-VST.    KUH.TZ, 

Madison   Square  (23d    Street), 

BECEIVED  HIGHEST  AWARDS  IN 

Vienna,  Paris,  and  New  York, 

FOR   PHOTOGRAPHS. 


New  Yokk,  July  1,  1874. 

MR.  CHAS.   F.  USENER. 

Dear  Sir.-  The  Mammoth  Tube  (No.  9002)  which  you  sent  me  on  trial  has  been 
thoroughly  tested,  and  has  proved  itself  quite  beyond  my  expectations ;  for  fine 
definition. and  roundness,  or  stereoscopic  effect,  1  have  never  seen  its  equal.  You 
may  readily  see  by  the  specimens  herewith,  of  standing  figures,  that  they  are  as 
sharp  and  as  perfect  as  an  imperial  carte,  although  taken  on  14x17  plates;  and 
when  I  add  that  they  were  taken  at  4  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  in  45  seconds,  I 
think  I  can  say  no  more. 

Please  charge  the  tube  to  me,  and  send  bill.  Yours  truly, 

W.  KURTZ. 


CHARLES  COOPER  &  CO., 

WHOLESALE  AGENTS, 

Nor   150   Chatham   Street,  New  York. 


We  are  informed  that  some  of  our  competitors  are  advancing  the  prices  of 

PI 


And  we  have  been  requested  to  do  the  same,  but  have  declined  to  enter  into  any  combination  what- 
ever. Photographers  can  rest  assured  that  we  shall  adhere  strictly  to  our  LOW  PRICES,  as  published 
in  our  Catalogue  of  August,  1873,  until  further  notice.  The  prices  therein  quoted  are  the  lowest  yet 
made,  and  all  who  have  not  received  that  list  will  please  send  us  their  address,  when  it  will  be  promptly 
forwarded.     Note  our  very  low  prices  on 

FERROTYPE  PLATES,  CAMERA  BOXES,  &c. 

Everything  sold  at  bottom  figures,  and  all  orders  executed  to  the  letter,  and  with  the  greatest  of 
promptness.     Agents  for  the  Northwest  for 

WESTON'S  ROTARY  BURNISHERS, 

WOODWARD'S  SOLAR  CAMERAS, 

And  SCOTCH  ALBUMEN  PAPER. 

We  hope  all  those  who  have  not  tried  the  Scotch  Albumen  Paper,  will  give  it  a  trial,  as  it  is  giving 
universal  satisfaction,  and  is  having  an  immense  sale.      We  have  it  in  White  and  Pink. 

Prices  furnished  on  application  for  Woodward's  Solar  Cameras,  either  the  Reflectors  or  Direct  Prin- 
ters, with  license  attached.  Any  one  desiring  a  license  for  the  use  of  Solar  Cameras,  can  get  the  same 
of  us  at  the  price  charged  by  Mr.  Woodward,  $40.00. 

Don't  forget  to  order  a  Weston  Burnisher  ;  we  are  selling  large  numbers  of  them,  and  the  fine  effect 
produced  from  their  use  is  commending  itself  to  all. 

Remember,  we  carry  the  LARGEST  STOCK  IN  THE  WEST,  and  owning  the  land  and  the  building 
we  occupy,  we  are  fully  prepared  to  give  you  rock  bottom  prices  on  everything. 


RICE  &  THOMPSON'S 


259  Wabash  Ave.,  CHICAGO. 


The 


And  Perfect/^ 

*lL.hair. 


Enabling  the  photographer  to  successfully  secure  every  variety  of  pose  with  facility  and  reliability. 
It  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  varying  necessities  of  female  portraiture,  and  is  equally  suited  for 
children,  for  vignettes,  or  for  full  lengths.  The  BOWDISH  CHAIR  is  substantial  in  construction, 
elegant  in  design,  and  rich  in  upholstery  and  finish.  Those  who  have  purchased  them,  speak  in  the 
highest  terms,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 

4  TESTIMONIALS :  £» 

+ + 

"About  ten  days  ago  I  received  the  new  chair  you  promised  to  send  me  when  I  saw  you  last,  and 
would  have  written  and  acknowledged  your  kind  favor  long  ago  if  1  had  correctly  known  your  ad- 
dress. Accept  my  best  thanks  for  this  really  beautiful  chair,  which  now,  after  ten  days'  trial,  has 
proved  to  be  a  decided  success  in  every  way.  It  has  become  the  real  favorite  for  posing  in  my  studio. 
Besides  this,  in  external  appearance  the  new  chair  appears  so  much  superior  in  finish,  and  is  at  the 
same  time  highly  ornamental,  and  the  head  rest  is  so  much  easier  handled  than  with  any  chair  I  have 
ever  seen  before.  In  short,  it  gives  the  sitter  the  greatest  possible  comfort  and  steadiness.  I  think 
the  chair  I  have  justly  deserves  the  name  of  'Perfect  Posing  Chair.' " — H.  Rocher,  Chicago,  111., 
January  10,  1873. 

"  Since  receiving  your  posing  chair,  nearly  a  year  since,  I  have  had  it  in  constant  use,  and  am 
satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  posing  chair  in  the  market.  It  is  easily  worked,  and  is  so  well  made  that 
one  will  last  a  life  time,  and  then  be  a  valuable  heirloom." — L.  Gr.  Bigelow. 

"The  Bowdish  Chair  came  in  good  order  and  gives  the  best  of  satisfaction.  Should  you  wish  a 
recommendation  for  it,  say  what  you  please  and  we  will  endorse  it.  You  cannot  praise  it  too  highly." 
— Slbe  Bros.,  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  Sept.  10,  1872. 

"  Your  chair  has  arrived  at  last.  I  am  much  pleased  with  it.  1  don't  think  my  gallery  can  be 
complete  without  one  of  them.  Wishing  you  the  success  your  invention  merits,  I  am,  truly  yours, 
A.  Hesler." 

Prints  will  be  sent,  if  desired,  before  purchasing.     There  are  three  styles  kept  in  stock,  viz  : 

No.  2.  With  nickel-plated  rods  and  rest,  in  velveteen  or  reps $60  00 

No.  4.       "  "  "  "  "  "    square  carved  legs 70  00 

No.  6.       "  "  "  "     in  best  plush,  paneled 80  00 

Special  chairs  to  order. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO.,  Sole  Agents, 

591  Broadway ,  JVew  York. 


NEW! 

CATALOGUE  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PUBLICATIONS. 


Owing  to  the  LATE   FIRE  IN  OUR  OFFICE,  and  to  the 

fact  that  SEVERAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC   BOOKS  ARE 

OUT  OF  PRINT    we  are  obliged  to  issue  a  revised  or 

NEW  CATALOGUE! 

TO    WHICH    WE    CALL    YOUR    ATTENTION. 

There  is  something  for  the  workers  in  all  branches  of  the  art, — operators, 
posers,  manipulators,  printers,  painters,  retouchers,  finishers,  and  art  students 
— all  are  provided  for. 

We  always  find  the  photographer  who  reads  what  is  published  pertaining 
to  his  profession,  to  be  the  photographer  who  succeeds  in  his  business  the 
best.  Above  all,  those  who  regularly  and  continually  receive  a  good  photog- 
raphic magazine  are  those  who  are  always  ahead  with  new  goods,  new  styles, 
and  new  information.  We  recommend  an  investment  in  a  part  or  all  of  the 
list  below,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  them  to  you  on  receipt  of  price. 

CATALOGUE. 

The  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

The  oldest,  best,  and  most  popular  Photographic  Magazine  in  America.  Eleventh  Year.  Please  read  the 
prospectus  on  page  three  of  cover  and  premium  list  opposite.  Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2.50  for  six 
months,  in  advance.    Current  number,  50  cents.    Specimen  copies,  free. 

Photographic  Mosaics. 

The  1874  edition  excels  all  of  its  eight  older  brethren.  The  list  of  articles  is  made  up  of  original  contribu- 
tions,  written  especially  for  its  pages,  on  all  departments  of  the  art,  wholly  by  practical  men  who  are  only  heard 
from  once  a  year  through  the  persuasion  of  the  editor,  in  this  way.  See  special  advertisement.  146  pages. 
Paper  cover,  50  cents.    Cloth,  $1.    A  few  copies  of  former  editions,  from  1866,  at  same  price. 

Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

This  is  not  exactly  a  book,  but  a  collection  of  24  large  Victoria  size  photographic  studies  in  lighting  and 
posing,  made  especially  to  teach  how  to  light  and  pose  ordinary  and  extra-ordinary  subjects  in  all  the  plain, 
fancy,  "  Rembrandt "  and  "  Shadow  "  styles.  It  is  accompanied  by  an  explanatory  key  of  instructions,  together 
with  a  diagram  for  each  picture,  showing  how  the  sitter  and  the  camera  were  placed  in  the  skylight,  their 
relation  to  the  background,  and  what  blinds  were  opened  and  closed  at  the  time  of  the  sitting.  It  almos 
supplies  a  rule  by  which  you  can  quickly  tell  how  to  manage  every  subject  that  comes  to  you.  The  studies  are 
mounted  on  folding  leaves,  so  that  twelve  can  be  examined  at  once.    Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  $6,  postpaid. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs  in  Water  Colors. 

A  practical  Handbook  designed  especially  for  the  use  of  Students  and  Photographers,  containing  directions 
for  Brush  Work  in  all  descriptions  of  Photo-Portraiture,  Oil,  Water  Colors,  Ink,  How  to  Retouch  the  nega- 
tive, &c.    By  George  B.  Ayres,  Artist.  Third  edition.    Differing  largely  from  previous  editions.    Price,  $2.00. 


Handbook  of  the  Practice  and  Art  of  Photography. 

By  Dr.  H.  Vogel.    Second  edition  in  press.    Beady  October  1st. 

The  Practical  Printer. 

Issued  July,  1874.  A  capital  working  manual,  giving  the  fullest  information  on  all  styles  of  photographic 
printing  on  albumen  and  plain  paper,  and  on  porcelain.  By  C.  W.  Heakn.  No  book  was  ever  more  needed. 
$2.50.    See  special  advertisement  concerning  it. 

Lea's  Manual  of  Photography. 

Third  thousand.    $3.75  per  copy.    A  capital  book  of  instructions  in  all  branches  of  the  art.    See  advt. 

How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph. 

This  is  a  fine  little  work  of  48  pages,  written  by  the  wife  of  a  celebrated  New  York  photographer,  for  the 
purpose  of  educating  the  public  on  the  all-important  subject  of  sitting  for  a  picture.  It  is  bound  in  cloth  at  60 
cents  per  copy,  and  paper  cover  30  cents. 

Lookout  Landscape  Photography. 

By  Prof.  R.  M.  Linn,  Lookout  Mountain,  Tenn.  A  pocket  manual  for  the  outdoor  worker,  and  full  of  good 
for  every  photographer.    75  cents.    Be  sure  to  get  it. 

Himes's  Leaf  Prints ;  or,  Glimpses  at  Photography. 

By  Prof.  Charles  F.  Himes,  Ph.D.  Full  of  useful  information  for  the  photographic  printer.  Illustrated 
with  a  whole-size  photograph.    Cloth,  $1.25. 

The  American  Carbon  Manual. 

By  Edw.  L.  Wilson.  A  complete  manual  of  the  Carbon  process  from  beginning  to  end.  With  a  fine 
example  by  the  process.    Cloth,  $2.00. 

The  Photographer  to  His  Patrons. 

A  splendid  little  twelve-page  leaflet,  which  answers  all  vexatious  questions  put  to  you  by  your  sitters,  and 
serves  as  a  grand  advertising  medium.  It  is  for  photographers  to  give  away  to  their  customers.  Send  for  a 
copy  and  an  illustrated  circular.  Over  300,000  already  sold  and  in  use  all  over  the  country.  $20.00  for  1000, 
$35.00  for  2000,  and  so  on.    Printed  and  supplied  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

Something  Neiv. 

Just  out.    Similar  to  the  "  Photographer  to  his  Patrons,"  but  newer.    Prices  the  same. 

Pretty  Faces. 

A  leaflet  much  smaller  than  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrom,"  and  "Something  New,"  for  the  same  purpose 
but  costing  less,  viz. :  1000  copies,  $10.00 ;  2000,  $17.50,  and  larger  orders  at  less  rates. 

Elbert  Anderson's  Photo-  Comic  Allmyknack. 

A  complete  Almanac,  full  of  witty  sayings,  jokes,  puns,  stories,  etc.,  etc.  Profusely  illustrated  with  comic 
and  original  sketches,  yet  all  interspersed  with  much  practical  matter  of  value  to  every  photographer.  Price 
75  cents. 

Photographers'  Pocket  Reference- Book. 

By  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  of  Berlin.  A  dictionary  of  all  the  terms  used  in  the  art,  and  contains  formulas  for  almost 
every  known  manipulation.  Altogether  different  from  any  work  ever  published.  Cloth,  $1.50.  See  special 
advertisement.    A  splendid,  indispensable  book. 

Works  found  in  our  old  catalogues,  and  not  in  the  above,  are  out  of  print 
and  cannot  be  had. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Benerman  &  Wilson's  Publications  sold  by  all  Dealers. 


% 


,-tfAHttEIL'S  S0#s, 


WEW 


Aplanatic  Lenses 


FOR 

GROUPS, 
LANDSCAPES, 

AND 

COPIES. 


GROUPS, 
LANDSCAPES, 

AND 

COPIES. 


( Actual  size  of  a  2fo.  1  Steinheil  JLvn*,) 

We  have  now  a  full  stock  of  these  celebrated  Lenses,  at  the  following  prices  : 


No.  1,  1-4  size, 

2 1-2 

"    3,  4-4 

"    4 8-10 

5,  10-12 

6,  13-16 


3|  inch  focus,  .-. $25  00 

30  00 

45  00 

60  00 

70  00 

110  00 


5j 

7 

104i 

16i 


Nos.  1  and  2  are  in  matched  pairs  for  Stereoscopic  Work. 


"I  always  take  great  pleasure  in  recommending  the  Steinheil  Lenses,  and  you  can  say  almost 
anything  in  their  favor  for  me.  They  possess  all  the  merits  of  higher  priced  lenses,  and  if  I  was 
starting  again  I  should  stock  myself  with  them."— B.  W.  Kilbuen. 


THEY  ARE 

IH  USE  BY  MOST  LEADING  PHOTOGRAPHERS, 

INCLUDING 

GUTEKUNST,  WENDEROTH, 

BROADBENT  &  PHILLIPS,  FENNEMORE, 

DeMORAT,  LOTHROP, 

And  many  others,  equally  -well  known. 

We  feel  sure  that  at  least  one  of  these  Lenses  is  needful  for  the  successful  prosecution  of  your 
business,  and  so  solicit  your  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  pou  the  United  States, 

No.  822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


TVIcAI,  LISTER, 

MANUFACTURING  OPTICIAN, 

1314  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia. 

Sole  Manufacturer  of  the  Stereo-Panopticon  and  Artopticon,  warranted  to  be  the  most 
perfect  and  powerful  Magic  Lanterns  made. 


to- 
il I 


™J 


MCALLISTER'S 


PATEUT 


ARTOPTICON 


Each  lantern  is  adjustable  for  use 
with  powerful  coal  oil  light — oxycal- 
cium,  hydro-oxycalcium,  and  oxy- 
hydrogen  lights. 

Jg@T"The  coal  oil  lamp  used  gives 
very  much  more  light  than  any  other 
lamp  yet  made. 

Giving  exhibitions  with  the  Artopti- 
con will  prove  a  profitable  business  for 
a  man  with  a  small  capital. 

The   STEREO-PAUTOPTICORT   is  an  improved   instrument,   suitable  for  giving 
exhibitions  of  dissolving  views  on  the  largest  scale.     Send  for  printed  description. 


McALLTSTER'S 

PATENT    TINTERS. 

These  tinters  are  used  for  giving  to  magic  lantern  pictures 
various  beautiful  tints  or  colors,  as  blue,  red,  yellow,  green, 
crimson,  &c,  &c.  They  can  be  adjusted  to  the  lantern,  either 
on  the  end  of  the  front  lens,  or  .may  be  screwed  to  the  ba'ck 
of  the  front  lens-holder,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Stereo-Panop- 
ticon and  Educational  lanterns.  On  the  Artopticon,  they 
are  placed  on  the  end  of  the  front  lens  tube. 

NEW  and  BEAUTIFUL  SLIDES  for  LANTERN  USE  in  LARGE  VARIETY. 

Priced  and  Illustrated  Catalogues  free,  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  stamp. 


W.  MITCHELL  McALLISTER,  1314  Chestnut  St.,  Phila. 


dr.  vo  g  e  l's 

kamtooob 


OF 


PHOTOGRAPHY. 


By  Prof.  H.  VOGEL,  Ph.D.,  Berlin,  Prussia. 


THE  SECOND   EDITION 

Is  in  Press  and  will  be  ready  soon. 


It  will  be  much  larger  than  the  first  edition,  and  will  contain  several  new  photographs 
and  illustrations.  New  chapters  have  been  added  by  the  author  and  much  of  the  old  edition 
has  been  rewritten  and  revised.     See  future  advertisements. 


FOR    SALE    BY    ALL    DEALERS. 


«@~  It  will  be  the  Best  Work  ever  Issued  on  Photography. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA. 


G.  GENNERT, 

53  Maiden  Lane,  N.  Y., 


IMPORTER  OF  THE  CELEBRATED 


S.  *  M.  DRESDEN 


At*mU\W*M 


PaPERS, 


RIVES  &  STEINBACH 

WHITE,  PINK,  and  BLUE. 


Every  one  says  it  works  the  most  uniform,  economical,  and  gives  finer  results  than  any 
other.  To  satisfy  yourself  that  it  is  the  best,  send  to'your  stock  dealer  for  a  sample  dozen. 
Kept  by  all  stock  dealers  in  the  United  States. 


Hyposulphite  of  Soda, 

Solid  German  Glass  Baths, 

Saxe  Evaporating  Dishes, 

And  French  Filter  Paper. 


Special  attention  is  called  to  the  Extra  Brilliant  or  Double   Glossy  Paper , 

which  is  recognized  by  the  best  artists  all  over  the  world  as  the  finest  Albumen  Paper  in 
this  country  or  Europe. 

*       * 


Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 

EGGSHELL,  GLOSSY,  CHOCOLATE-TINTED. 


(PATENTED  MARCH  1st,  1870.) 


ALL  SIZES,  FEOM  1-9  to  10x14.  BLACK  AND  CHOCOLATE. 

THE  PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Worcester,  Mass., 

ARE  NOW  MAKING  THE  MOST  POPULAR  BRAND  OF  PLATES  IN  THE  TRADE. 


Eggshell.   Glossy. 


LIST 


Size.     Eggshell.   Glossy 


Per  Box  of  8  Doz. 


Size 

1-9  $0.80  $0.90  Per  Box  of  2  Doz.         4-4        $2.40      $2.70 

1-6  1.25  1.35  ".,         4     "           5-7          2.40        2.70 

1-4  1.85  2.00  "            2     «          7-10          2.70        2.90 

4Jx6J  1.85  2.00  "            2     "         8x10          2.70        2.90 

1-2  2.20  2.35  Per  Sheet,                  10x14            .17          .18 

4ixl0  2.20  2.35 

Revised,  New  York,  December  28th,  1872. 


EGGSHELL,    GLOSSY,    AND    CHOCOLATE-TINTED    PLATES,    ALL    SIZES   AND    STYLES, 
ALWAYS    ON    HAND-  AND   READY   FOR   DELIVERY. 

Each  package  of  Phenix  Plates  has  printed  on  the  wrapper,  "Manufactured 

by  the  Phenix  Plate  Co.,  Worcester,  Mass.,"  and  none 

are  genuine  unless  bearing  that  stamp. 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  constitu- 
ting them  our  sole  and  exclusive  agents  for  the  sale  of  our  Plates. 

That  company  is  so  well  and  favorably  known  in  the  business,  that  no  com- 
mendation of  ours  is  required  to  assure  the  Trade  that  they  will  be  liberally 
dealt  with  in  every  respect. 

P&enix  Plates  are  for  sale  ly  all  Stock  Dealers  tbromEbont  the  country. 

PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Manufacturers, 

Worcester,  Mass, 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  Apits  for  tie  Trade,  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  1. 1 


Jtea's  Jplanual 


P  J  H  JOlTlOlGl  RiAl  Pin  It 


Third  Thousand! 

We  have  undertaken  the  publication  of  the  third  thousand  of  this  valuable  Text-Book, 
and  offer  it  to  tlie  photographers  in  a  more  attractive  and 

New  Shape. 

The  aid/tor' s  illustrations  now  number  150,  nearly  double  the  number  of  the  first  edition. 

The  Chapters  on  Failures  have  been  much  elaborated  and  rearranged,  so  as  to  afford  a 
ready  reference  in  case  of  almost  any  trouble  or  difficulty  liable  to  occur  to  the  photogra- 
pher, with  appropriate  remedies  therefor.     The  following  are  among  other 


New  Things: 


Method  of  preparing  silvered  PAPER  WHICH  WILL  KEEP  FOB 
WEEKS,  and  with  care,  even  for  months ;  no  washing  or  additional 
manipulation  of  the  paper  needed. 

Investigation  of  Negative  Varnishes  and  formulas  for  Water-proof  Var- 
nish, such  that  negatives  varnished  with  it  have  been  kept  for  months 
under  water  without  injury. 

Tables  to  aid  in  the  construction  of  glass  houses,  &c. 


NOTICES  OF  THE  PRESS. 


"  There  is  a  valuable  chapter  on  the  preparation  of  a  sensitive  paper  that  is  not  liable  to  discoloration 

We  close  the  present  notice  by  cordially  commending  Mr.  Lea's  Manual  to  our  readers." — British  Journal  of  Pho- 
tography. 

"  M.  Carey  Lea's  excellent '  Manual  of  Photography '  is  a  very  full  and  complete  work." — Philad'a  Bulletin. 

"  If  we  say  that  this  work  is  an  encyclopedia  of  its  art,  we  shall  hardly  exaggerate  its  comprehensiveness. 
....  The  author  takes  every  department  and  every  branch  of  each,  and  gives  that  distinct  and  clear  information 

that  is  needed  by  photographers The  worth  of  the  labor  is  proved  in  the  fact  that  this  new  and  enlarged 

edition  follows  the  first  so  speedily.  Hereafter,  those  who  would  excel  must  master  the  Manual." — North 
American. 

PRICE,  S3.75. 

It  contains  440  pages  on  fine  toned  paper,  150  wood  cuts,  cloth,  beveled  edges,  and  gilt. 

FOE  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCK-DEALERS. 
Sent  by  return  mail,  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


HP  TT  T^ 

ALBION  ALBUMENIZING  CO. 

LONDON  AND  GLASGOW, 

(Office,   No.   II    Brackenbury   Road,  Hammersmith,  London,) 

Request  American  Photographers  to  give  their 
Paper  a  fair  trial. 


TESTIMONIALS 


"It  is  good  enough  to  eat.     I  use  it  altogether  for  the  prints  for  the  Philadelphia  Photographer/' — 
Wm.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"  The  last  lot  of  paper  was  as  good  as  we  wish  to  use. — Vandyke  &  Brown,  Liverpool,  largest  con 
sumers  in  England. 

A  FRESH  SUPPLY  JUST  RECEIVED  BY 


PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


TO   PROFESSIONAL   PHOTOGRAPHERS    AND   THE   TRADE. 


CH.    DAUVOIS, 

Acknowledged  to  be  the  Best  and  Cheapest  in  the  World. 


Hjl  ^      H  ROHAUT&HUTINET, 

•  -■— ^    \_/         A       A    -L   ^      JL-y      JL     j  SUCCESSORS, 

No.  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris, 


ESPECIAL    MANUFACTURERS    OF 


MOUNTSoSFOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


TRADE    MARK,    Ch.D. 


Mounts  for  Cartes-de-Visite, 
Cabinet  Portrait, 
Victoria  Card, 

Stereoscopic  Views — all  new  samples  of  French 
styles. 


Bristol  Boards  of  every  size  and  thickness,  plain. 

India  Tinted  and  Fancy  Printing. 

Book-post  and  Card  Cases. 

Stout  Blotting  Paper  Albums. 

First-class  Rives  Albumenized  Paper,  Ac,  &c. 

MEDALS  AWARDED  AT  EVERY  EXHIBITION. 

All  orders  are  to  be  sent  to  their  establishment,  43  Rue  Gkeneta,  Paris,  or  to  Wholesale  Houses 
of  the  United  States.     Samples  on  application. 

LIBERAL  DISCOUNT  TO  WHOLESALE  HOUSES. 


A   SPLENDID,    USEFUL    BOOK. 


33  Hi    VOG 


PHOTOGRAPHER'S 


POCKET 


wmww 


m 


!TC 


m 


mm 


PI1SI 


■^ 


ji 


An  Alphabetically  arranged  collection  of  practically  important  hints  on  the  construction 
of  the  Gallery  ;  selection  and  trial  of  lenses  and  chemicals  ;  approved  formulae  for  the  differ- 
ent photographic  processes  ;  tables  of  weights  and  measures  ;  rules  for  avoiding  failure,  etc., 
etc.,  for 

Photographers  and  Amateurs, 

IS  RECEIVING  THE  HIGHEST  PRAISE  WHEREVER  IT  GOES. 


IT  IS  A  BOOK  EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER  SHOULD  HAVE, 

Because  it  is  a  ready  helper  under  all  difficult  circumstances. 


Extract  from  the  Minutes  of  the  Chicago  Photographic  Association. 

"Messrs.  Hall  and  Hesler  spoke  in  most  flattering  terms  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Pocket  Reference- Book,  of 
its  great  value  to  every  photographer,  and  expressed  the  hope  that  it  may  soon  be  found  in  every 
gallery." 


There  is  hardly  a  matter  occurring  in  your  daily  work  which  it  does  not  throw  light  upon 
and  make  easy.     Examine  it  for  yourself. 


For  sale  by  all  dealers.    Price,  $l.BO,  post-paid. 

BENERMAN &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


A  NEW 
IKTVOICB 

JUST   RECEIVED 


OF 


LOESCHEE  &  PETSCH'S 


12 


ADMIRABLE 

STUDIES! 


The  praise  which  has  been  bestowed  upon  these  pictures,  particularly  at  the  Vienna  Exhibition,  convinces  us 
that  they  should  be  treasured  as  suilacle  models  of  pose  and  lighting  of  the  sitter,  harmonious  and  artistic  arrangement  of 
furniture,  etc.  These  photographs  are  the  only  European  ones'  for  which  the  international  jury  awarded  the  two 
medals  for  progress  and  taste,  Mr.  Lewitzky,  a  photographer,  and  member  of  the  jury,  exclaimed :  "  The  exhi- 
bition of  Messrs.  Loeschek  &  Petsch  has  charmed  me ;  according  to  my  opinion,  Loescher  &  Petsch,  in 
Europe,  and  Kurtz,  in  New  York,  are  the  first  photographers  of  the  world !" 

We  will  Express  the  sett  on  receipt  of  $30  ;  or  post  them  at  your  risk  to  any  address.  The  price  is  remarka- 
bly low,  as  each  print  is  most  carefully  made. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

4®=  See  review  of  these  pictures  in  the  "  Philadelphia  Photographer  "  for  December,  1873. 

The  Universal 


EMBOSSING    PATENTED   JANUARY 


This  Press  will  cameo  all  sizes,  from  cards  to  cabinets,  and  is  sold  lower  than  any  other  that  will  do 
the  same  work.     It  has  been  greatly  improved  and  made  very  complete  in  all  its  parts. 
We  furnish  a  card,  victoria,  and  cabinet  size. 

PEICE,  ®20.00. 

MANUFACTURED  AND  SOLD  WHOLESALE  AND  RETAIL  BY 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO.,  822  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 

[t^=  CAUTION. — Photographers  are  cautioned  against  buying  other  presses  that  may  use  an  elastic 
embossing  substance,  as  they  are  an  infringement  on  the  above.  R.  J.  Chute,  Patentee. 


&&: 


PROPR 


Etr«b 


?* 


...•ssswssi-     -, 


0^ioaO°- 


ORDERS  FILLED  PROMPTLY  WITH  BEST 
GOODS  AT  LOWEST  PRICES. 


*Sfc*  EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  TO  PHO- 
TOGRAPHY. 


LONDON     1851. 


LONDON    1862. 


PARIS    1867. 


ROSS' 


PORTRAIT 


AK"D 


VIEW  LENSES. 


We  have  now  successfully  introduced  to  the  American  Photographers  the  Ross  Lrns,  and  by  our 
increased  sales  we  know  they  are  appreciated.  At  the  convention  held  at  Buffalo,  July  15,  many  fine 
photographs  were  exhibited  by  photographers,  and  ourselves,  made  with  the  Ross  Lens,  which 
attracted  great  attention. 

While  Ross  &  Co.  are  the  oldest  manufacturers  of  Photographic  Lenses  in  existence,  they  also 
keep  up  with  the  requirements  of  the  fraternity,  by  constantly  manufacturing  new  combinations  and 
improving  on  those  already  in  existence.  They  have  lately  perfected,  and  will  soon  furnish  us  stock 
of,  a  new  series  of  Card  Lenses,  extra  rapid,  peculiarly  adapted  for  babies,  and  people  who  will  not  be 
quiet.      We  will  give  notice  of  their  arrival. 

WE  HAVE  NOW  IN  STOCK 

Portrait  Lenses,  from  1-4  to  15  x  IS.  Instantaneous  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Cabinet  Lenses,  Xos.  1,  2,  and  3.  Medium  Angle  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Card  Lenses,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3.  Larg'e  Angle  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Triplets,  X«s.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7.  Stereograpbic  Lenses,  all  sizes. 

We  shall  soon  have  in  Stock,  Ross  &  Co.'s  latest  introduction,  which  is  at  present  exciting  the 
Photographers  of  Europe  with  its  excellence,  and  has  been  named  the 

SYMMETRICAL    LENS. 

We  shall  keep  following  sizes  in  stock,  other  numbers  imported  to  order. 


No. 


Large  Stop 
Covering. 


*3     5x4 

6     8J^x6>^ 

8     10x8 

11     J5xl2 

12     18x16 


Medium  Stop 
Covering. 

.    7^x4^  - 

9x7 

.      12x10  . 

.       18x16  . 

.      22x20  . 


Small  Stop 
Covering. 


Equivalent 
Focus. 


Price. 


8X0  

10x8  

13x11  

22x18  18 

25x21  21 


5  inches $27  00 

8       "           54  00 

10       "           72  00 

108  00 

135  00 


In  matched  pairs,  $54.00. 


Numerous  testimonials  pronounce  them  to  be  the  best,  as  well  as  the  cheapest  Foreign  Lens  ever 
offered  to  the  American  Photographer. 

We  will  mail  price-list  on  application,  and  promptly  fill  all  orders. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 


SOLE  AGENTS  FOR 
THE  UNITED  STATES 


,  822  Arcl  St.,  PliMfilpMa,  Pa. 


hiladelphia^f  rame  Manufactory 


Office  and  Salesroom,  822  Arch  St.  (second  story), 

PHIL  A  DELPHI  A, 

WHERE  THE  TRADE  "WILL  FIND  THE  LARGEST  ASSORTMENT  OF 

GOLD  rvako-rornd|  FRAMES 

In  this  city,  from  5  x  7  to  29  x  36,  together  with  a  large  assortment  of 

FINE  VELVET  MATS,  WITH  or  WITHOUT  FRAMES, 

From  1-6  to  8-4  sizes  always  on  hand ;  larger  sizes  made  to  order. 

fggg*'  These  Mats  are  of  Lyons  Silk  Velvet,  with  Prepared  and  Gilt,  and  fine  fire  Gilt 
Rings  inside  for  Porcelains.     Also, 

ENGLISH  MATS,  ALL  SIZES. 

ENGLISH  DISPLAY  MATS,  any  size  and  style,  MADE  TO  ORDER. 


Any  kind  of  Fancy  or  Emblematic  Frames  made  to  order. 
FINE  COLD  OVAL  FRAMES,  20x24. 


2  in.,  .  .  $4  50  to  $6  00 

3  "..     5  00  to     7  00 


3 J  in.,  .  .  $5  50  to  $10  00 

4     "  '.  .     7  00  to     12  00 

Other  sizes  in  proportion. 


4 Jin.,   .  .  $10  00  to  $14  50 
5   "      .  .     12  50  to     15  00 


Also,  all  sizes,  Walnut  Ovals  and  Solid   Walnut  Ovals  on  hand ;    Square 
Walnut  Frames  made  at  short  notice. 

Walnut  and  Prepared  Mouldings, 
Walnut  and  Gold  PIER  and  MANTEL   Looking-Glass  Frames, 

IN  DIFFERENT  STYLES  AND  PATTERNS. 
Trial  Orders  from  the  trade  respectfully  solicited. 


Factory,  820  and  822  Calwallader  St., 

Salesroom,  822  Arch  St.  (second  story),  Philadelphia. 


RULOFSON'S   VIEWS 


OF  THE 


Yosemite  Valley, 
California,  Utah, 
The  Sierra  Nevadas, 
Big  Trees, 

Seal  Rocks,  &c. 

FROM  NEGATIVES  BY  BRADLEY  &  RULOFSON, 
SAN  FRANCISCO,  CAL, 


A  large  lot  of  these  pictures  were  on  exhibition  at  Chicago,  and  were  sold 
by  President  Eulofson  at  large  prices  for  the  benefit  of  the  N.  P.  A.  A  great 
many  more  could  have  been  sold.  We  are  now  prepared  to  sell  to  the 
disappointed 

AT  ADVANTAGEOUS   PRICES, 

Stereoscopic  Views, $1.26  per  doz. 

Views  on  Full  Sheet,    .......     3.00  each. 

These  are  the  handsomest  Landscape  pictures  made  in  America.  Selec- 
tions carefully  made  for  those  ordering  by  mail. 

A  Large  Stock  on  Hand.        Dealers  Supplied. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

PHILADELPHIA,   PA. 


BIGELOW'S  ALBUM  OF 

LIGHTING  AND  POSING. 


f«*  SELLS  ALL  OVER  THE  WORLD. 


NEW   EDITION, 

WITH  AN  ENLARGED  KEY,  AND  NEARLY  ALL  NEW  STUDIES. 


jfigf0  Brings  Lighting  and  Posing  down  to  a  system  at  once  plain, 
easy,  and  desirable. 

jf@m  No  good,  intelligent  operator  can  afford  to  work  without  it. 

jd@~  It  contains  24  Victoria  Portrait  Studies  in  Light  and  Pose,  with 
an  explanatory  key,  telling  exactly  how  each  picture  was  made;  where 

THE  CAMERA    AND    SITTER  WERE    PLACED  when  it  WCLS  made  ;    WHAT    CURTAINS 

were  opened  in  lighting  the  subject,  $c,  $c. 

jfgi^  A  diagram  of  the  interior  of  the  skylight  is  given  in  each  case, 
telling  the  whole  story.  IT  IS  BOUND  HANDSOMELY  IN  CLOTH, 
GILT. 

NEW  KEY,  ENLARGED.  NEW  PICTURES. 


*  It  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  aids  to  art  education  which  has  yet  been  presented  to  the  photo, 
portraitist.  Each  print  represents  a  distinct  study  of  pose  and  lighting,  the  widest  variety  of  effects 
being  comprehended.  We  should  be  glad  to  see  it  in  the  hands  of  English  portraitists  generally." — 
Photo.  News. 

"  The  method  is  an  admirable  one  and  Mr.  Bigelow  deserves  credit  for  the  systematic  way  in  which 
he  has  carried  it  out." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  confess  that  this  work  has  furnished  me  much  instruction,  particularly  the  manner  in  which, 
byword  and  picture,  studies  about  light  and  pose   are  explained  and  made  comprehensible." — Dr. 


"  We  do  not  know  of  anything  ourselves  that  has  been  presented  to  the  trade  which  is  calculated 
to  do  so  much  real  good  as  Bigelow's  Album,  with  the  explanatory  key  to  the  studies.  It  is  an  in- 
valuable guide  to  the  portraitist." — Philadelphia  Photographer. 

If  you  would  improve  your  Lighting  and  Posing,  study  Bigelow's  Album. 


PRICE,  $6.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCKDEALERS. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


ROBINSON'S 

METALLIC 

GUIDES. 

(SEE  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

FOR  USE  WITH  THE  ROBINSON  PRINT  TRIMMER. 


MADE  IN  THE  BEST  MANNER  AND  GUARANTEED  TRUE. 


These  Guides  are  made  of  Stout  Iron  and  are  Turned  in  a  Lathe, 
so  that  they  are  Mathematically  True. 

Do  not  Waste  Time  with  a  Knife  and  Glass,  but  Try  Prof. 
Robinson's  Inventions. 


Oval,  Eound,  Elliptic,  and  Square,  of  all  sizes ;  various  shapes 
for  Stereoscopic  work,  Drug  Labels,  &c,  &c. 


REGULAE  SIZES  ALWAYS  ON  HAND.     SPECIAL  SIZES  MADE  TO  OEDER. 

* 

Prioe,  for  regular  photo,  sizes,  10  cents  per  inch  the  longest  way  of  the  aperture. 
Special  sizes,  15  cents  per  inch.         for  sale  by  all  dealers. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


ROBINSON'S 

PHOTOGRAPH  TRIMMER 

IS  A  SUBSTITUTE  FOR  A  KNIFE 

FOR  TRIMMING  PHOTOGRAPHS,   AND  DOES  THE  WORK   MUCH    MORE    EXPEDITIOUSLY   AND 

ELEGANTLY  THAN  A  KNIFE. 

IT  SAVES  TIME,  SAVES  PRINTS,  AND  SAVES  MONEY. 

The  accompanying  cut  represents  the  instru- 
ment in  the  act  of  trimming  a  photograph.  It 
does  not  cut,  hut  pi/ickes  off  the  waste  paper,  and 
leaves  the  print  with  a  neatly  beveled  edge  which 
facilitates  the  adherence  of  the  print  to  the 
mount.  Try  one,  and  you  will  discard  the 
knife  and  punch  at  once.  _  For  ovals  and  rounded 
corners  it  is  worth  its  weight  in  gold. 


A  Trimmer  Mailed  for  $3.50. 
ROBINSON'S  improved  GUIDES 

The  difficulty  of  procuring  exactly  true  guides 
for  cutting  out  prints  has  induced  the  inventor 
to  put  up  machinery  for  the  production  of  all 
styles  of  them,  guaranteed  mathematically  true. 

See  advertisement  on  opposite  page. 

A  full  stock  of  regular  sizes  now  on  hand. 
A  complete,  illustrated,  catalogue  and  price-list  will 
be  issued  soon. 

Oil  the  wheel  bearings  with  Sewing  Machine  Oil. 


ROBINSONS 

INIMITABLE 

PHOTOGRAPH 
TRIMMER. 

BETTEE  THAN  KNIVES, 

AND 

WILL  OUTWEAR  A 

GROSS  OP  THEM. 

Ask  your  stockdealer  to  show 
it  to  you,  or  send  direct  to  us  for 
one. 

Price,  by  mail,  $3.50. 


READ   THE   TESTIMONIALS. 

"I  would  rather  give  fifty  dollars  thau  he  without 
one.  By  its  use  all  annoyance  from  dull  knives  tear- 
ing the  prints  is  avoided." — E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk. 

"  It  does  the  work  intended  magnificently.  It  is 
not  only  exquisite  for  trimniingphotographs,  but  also 
for  making  Cut-Outs.." — B.  Kihlholz,  Chicago,  III. 

"  It  works  well  and  does  all  it  is  recommended  to 
do."— F.  G.  Wellek,  Littleton,  N.  H. 

"  Just  what  I  wanted  and  found  it  difficult  to  get." 
—J.  W.  Black,  Boston. 

"  I  consider  it  the  best  article  for  trimming  photo- 
graphs I  ever  saw." — W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"  I  would  not  be  without  it  for  the  best  twenty-five 
dollarcuttingmachine  lever  saw." — D.  Lothrop,  Pa. 

"  The  Trimmer  comes  up  to  all  you  claim  for  it.  I 
would  not  be  without  it." — T.  Cummings,  Lancaster. 

"  I  have  trimmed  all  my  prints  with  it,  in  less  than 
half  the  time  taken  by  a  knife.  It  cannot  be  recom- 
mended too  highly." — W.  H.  Cranston,  Carry,  Pa. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmer  has  proved  to  us  one  of 
the  most  usefully  instruments  that  we  have  in  our 
gallery." — Sohreiber  &  Sons,  Phila. 

"  I  have  used  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  some 
time.  A  lady  was  asked  how  she  liked  her  sewing 
machine,  and  in  reply  said  '  Well  I  could  get  along 
without  it,  but  when  I  do  I  shall  not  sew  any  more.' 
That  is  me,  I  can  get  along  without  the  Trimmer  but 
when  I  do  I  shall  not  trim  photographs." — Well  O. 
Singhi,  Binghamton,  N.  Y. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmer  works  admirably.  Does 
the  work  intended  with  great  satisfaction." — A.  K.  P. 
Trask,  Philadelphia. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 
FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS.  PHILADELPHIA,  FA. 


STEREOSCOPIC     VIEWS 

OF    THE 

NEW  MASONIC  TEMPLE,  PHILADELPHIA. 

Photographed  by  order  of  the  Grand  Lodge.     The  only  negatives  allowed  to  be  taken. 


Of  these  magnificent  pictures  we  now  supply  the  following 


LIST    OF    SUBJECTS, 


1.  Oriental  Room,  east. 

2.  "  "        west. 

3.  Grand  Chapter  Koom,  east. 

4.  "  "  "        west. 

5.  The  Library. 

6.  Norman  Room,  west. 

7.  "  "■       east. 

8.  Ionic  Room,  west. 

9.  "  "      east. 

10.  Lobby  to  the  Grand  Chapter. 

11.  Main  Hall. 

12.  Lobby  to  the  Grand  Lodge. 

18.  Grand  Stairway  to  the  Main  Hall. 


14.  Egyptian  Room,  west. 

15.  Grand  Lodge  Room,  west. 

16.  "         "  "       east. 

17.  "         "  "       south 

18.  Banqueting  Room. 

19.  Exterior  View  of  the  Temple,  south. 

20.  Parade   of  Knight's   Templar,   Sep- 

tember 30,  1873. 
.2349.  Exterior  View  of  the  Temple,  west. 
2351.  Dedication  Parade,  Sept.  26,  1873. 
2353.  "  "  "         "        and 

entrance  to  the  Temple. 
2355.   Main  entrance  to  the  Temple. 


Parties  who  order  by  number  will  have  their  orders  promptly  filled. 

$2  per  dozen  by  mail,  post-paid.     Or  in  sets  of  12,  16,  and  22,  embracing  the  most  beautiful  views 
of  the  exterior  and  interior,  at  the  dozen  rate.  D.EALERS   SUPPLIED. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Philadelphia. 


Reflecting  Solar  Camera. 
IMPROVED 


SOLAR    CAMERAS. 


Direct  Printing  Camera. 

Manufactured  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the  original  inventor  and  patentee,  combining 
ALL  THE  IMPOETANT  improvements  that  have  been  made. 

Every  Camera  will  be  tested  and  guaranteed  before  delivery,  and  will  be  licensed  and  accompanied 
by  the  regular  Patent  Stamp  of  the  patentee. 

PRICES  OF  DIRECT  PRINTING  OR  REFLECTING  SOLAR  CAMERAS  : 

10  inch  diameter  Condensing  Lens,  will  print  picture  18  x  23  in., $190  00 

12     "  "  "  "  "  "       25x30  " 220  00 

15     "  •'  "  "  "  29x36  " 275  00 

18     "  "  "  "  "  "       40x50  " 380  00 

Can  be  ordered  of  all  Stockdealers..    Boxing  charged  for  at  cost. 

D.  A.  "WOODWARD,  Baltimore,  Md. 


Awarded  the  HOLMES  MEDAL  at  the  Chicago  N.  P.  A.  Exhibition,  1874. 


MOULTON'S 


RAPID  PHOTO-WASHER. 


Patented  August  12th,  1873. 

New  in  Principle.— Quick  and  Reliable  in  Practice. 


Instead  of  soaking  the  Prints  it  applies  the  water  in  the  form  of  spray,  with  considerable 
force,  to  both  sides  of  the  paper  at  each  revolution,  or  from  one  hundred  to  one-hundred- 
fifty  times  per  minute.  Washes  with  exact  uniformity,  and  gives  more  brilliant  and  per- 
manent work;  is  simple,  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order,  will  last  a  lifetime,  and  will  enable  you 
to  get  out  work  at  short  notice,  thereby  securing  many  orders  that  would  otherwise  be  lost. 


Size  Cylinder, 

Capacity  in  Cards.                        Largest  Print. 

Price. 

Diam.  16m.  Length  14  l-2in. 

84                   14  by  17  ins. 

$30 

11     20        "       19 

144                    18  by  22  " 

.  40 

"     25        "       24 

220                    22  by  28  " 

50 

Larger  sizes  may  follow. 

SOOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  Trade 

Agei 

"I  write  to  testify  to  the  satisfaction  I  feel  with  the  working  of  your  Rapid  Print  Washer.  It  is  simply  per- 
fection, as  far  as  my  experience  with  it  goes,  viz  :  One  year's  constant  use.  I  have  washed  eight  dozen  cartes  in 
ten  minutes,  and  the  most  accurate  test  I  know  of,  starch  and  iodine,  failed  to  show  a  trace  of  hypo,  remain-- 
ing.'— L.  G.  Bigblow,  Detroit,  Mich.,  Feb.  10th,  1874. 

"Time  saved  is  money  earned."  The  above  maxim  is  as  true  in  the  photographic  business  as  in  any  otter, 
and  in  this  connection  I  would  say,  that  Moulton's  Rapid  Photo-Washer  will  save  more  time  in  any  weM-regu- 
lated  gallery,  than  any  mechanism  ever  yet  invented  ;  besides  the  prints  finish  with  a  finer  lustre  than  those 
washed  by  any  other  device  I  have  ever  yet  seen.  Having  used  one  for  the  past  two  months,  washing  from  100 
to  300  prints  daily,  I  am  pleased  to  add  my  testimonial  to  its  excllence." — Wm.  M.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 
March  11th,  1874.  

ANALYSIS    OF    PRINTS. 

"After  analyzing  the  prints  which  were  washed  by  you  during  ten  minutes,  in  your  Rapid  Photo-Washer, 
and  those  furnished  by  an  artist  of  this  city,  washed  in  a  syphon  tank  in  running  water  for  one  hour  and  left  in 
the  water  over  night,  for  the  quantity  of  hyposulphites  left  therein,  I  take  pleasure  in  stating  that  the  prints 
treated  in  the  Rapid  Photo-Washer  contain  perceptibly  less  hyposulphites  than  those  washed  in  the  other  man- 
ner described." — Gustavds  Bode,  Analytical  Chemist,  and  Dealer  in  Photographic  Stock,  Milwaukee,  Feb.  21, 1874 


L  V.  MOULTOIM,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis. 


THE 

PRIZE 
PICTURES 


In  order  that  photographers  may  have  an  early  opportunity  of  studying  the  very  elegant 
pictures  from  negatives  which  have  been  sent  to  us  in  competition  for  our 

COLD     MEDAL! 

we  publish  them  for  sale.  There  are  THIRTY  PICTURES  IN  A  SET— of  men,  women, 
and  children,  groups  and  single  figures — and  the  following  is  a  catalogue  of  them,  numbered 
in  the  order  in  which  the  negatives  were  received. 


1  A.  N.  Hardy,  Boston,  Mass. 

2  J.  McCluee  &  Co.,  St.  John,  N.B. 

3  D.  Ginter,  Conneautville,  Pa. 

4  W.  N.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 
o  F.  B.  Clench,  Lockport,  N.  Y. 

6  Theo.  Nieberg,  St.  Marys,  0. 

7  C.  Chadbourne,  Toledo,  O. 

8  E.  H.  Alley,  Toledo,  0. 

9  B.  Gray',  Bloomington,  111. 

10  C.  D.  Mosher,  Chicago,  111. 

11  E.  T.  Whitney",  Norwalk,  Conn. 


12  N.  H.  Busey,  Baltimore,  Md.. 

13  M.  T.  Carter,  Worcester,  Mass. 

14  W.  W.  Wiiiddit,  Newburg,  N.  Y. 

15  L.  G.  Bigelow,  Williamsport,  Pa. 

16  G.  M.  Elton,  Palmyra,  N.  Y. 

17  I.  Saunders,  Alfred  Centre,  N.  Y. 
IS  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  San  Fran- 
cisco, Cal. 

19  Forrester  Clark,  Pittsfield, 

Mass. 

20  Otto  Lewin,  New  York  City. 


21  F.  L.  Stuber,  Bethlehem,  Pa. 

22  D.   T.  Burrill,    North    Bridge- 

water,  Mass. 

23  J.  Barhydt,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

24  Albright  Bros.,  Wooster,  O. 

25  F.  S.  Crowell,  Mt.  Vernon,  O. 

26  Trask  &  Bacon,  Philadelphia. 

27  G.  W.  Harris,  Lancaster,  N.  Y. 

28  B.  Williams,  Tunkhannock,  Pa. 

29  F.  Gutekunst,  Philadelphia. 

30  J.  Inglis,  Montreal,  Can. 


It  will  be  seen  that  a  number  of  our  best  photographers  have  competed. 

THE  AWARD   WAS  MADE  FOB  NO.  18. 


Three  negatives  or  more  were  sent  by  each  competitor.     The  sets  include  one  example 
from  each  competitor.     All  the  dujrticates  may  be  had  to  order. 

Several  thousand  of  these  Pictures  have  already  been  sold.     Get  copies 
while  the  Negatives  are  new. 

The  prints  are  supplied  at  the  following  rates: 

A  Set  of  Thirty  in  the  Improved  Photograph  Cover,.: §>4  25 

"  "  without        "  "  "        3  75 

Selections,  per  dozen, 2  OO 


EVERY  OPERATOR  &  EVERY  PRINTER  SHOULD  GET  AND  STUDY  THEM. 


Nothing  so  really  elegant  ivas  ever  offered  for  sale. 

BEUERMA1T  &  WILSON,  (puBSU)  7th  &  Cherry  Sts.,  Phila. 


G0WI££ 


MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

Nos.  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 


WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN 


MMAMMMS  Mffl&FMimm 


On  the  Most  Advantageous  Terms,  with 

EVERY  ARTICLE  IN  THE  WORLD 

Used  or  sold  in  the  Art  of  Photography. 


jg^gjp-  Our  facilities  are  such  that  we  cannot  be  superseded  by  any 
other  house.    We  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to  deal  with  us. 


ASK  YOUR -DEALER  FOR  SCOVILL'S  GOODS. 


Removed  to  New  Store,  419  &  421  Broome  St. 


~^T%'Znrm*  "PHOTOGRAPHIC  TIMES." 

#      # 


NEARLY  ALL  GONE! 


IC 


EDITED  BY  EDWARD  U  WILSON. 


This  favorite  annual  is  ■wholly  filled  with  Articles  prepared  expressly  for  it  by  the 
eminent  photographers  of  Europe  and  America,  and  is  Unusually  Good. 

Price,  in  Cloth,  $1.00 ;  in  Paper  Cover,  50  Cents. 


The  Best  Little  Hanclboot  of  PMoppliy  in  tie  World.       For  Sale  by  all  Dealers. 

BEJSTEBMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


POWERS     &     WEIGHTMAN, 


m 

02 

Q=J 

< 

P=! 

M 

-*3 

s 

P_ 

i. 

H=S 

- 

S=3 

w 

CO 

Q 

•4 

ta 

E-h 

ti 

(2=5 

M 

a 

S 

- 

«     - 


Cr3 


fcrd 


MANUFACTURING  CHEMISTS, 


Offer  to  Stockdealers 
A  full  Assortment  of  Keliable 


Photographic  Chemicals 


Of  their  own  Manufacture, 
including : 


Nitrate  of  Silver,  Sulphuric  Ether  (concentrated),  Ammonia  (concentrated), 
Bromide  of  Potassium,  Acetic  Acid,  Chemically  Pure  Acids, 
Iron  and  Ammonia  Proto-Sulphate,  Chloride  of  Gold, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  Sulphate  of  Iron,  Cyanide  of  Potassium, 
Chloroform,  Tannin,  Sulphuret  of  Potassium. 


CHARLES  BIERSTADT 

Photographer 


NIAGARA  FALLS, 


New  York. 


VIENNA  MEDAL  OF  MERIT. 


An  Extensive  Assortment  of 
Views  of 

Niagara  Falls,  Washington, 

Hudson  River,  California, 

Saratoga,  Yosemite  Valley, 

Portage,  N.  Y.,  Egypt, 

Watkins'  Glen,  Palestine, 

Havana  Glen,  Africa, 

AND 

MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS. 


SILVER  MEDAL. 


LIESEGANG'S  ALBUMEN  PAPER 

Is  used  and  recommended  by  the  London  Stereoscopic  Company  ;  Messrs.  Alessandri  Fratelli, 
of  Eome  ;  Le  Lieure,  of  Eome  ;  A.  Sorgato,  of  Yenice  ;  Pr-  Bruckmann,  of  Munich ;  C.  Eeut- 
linger,  of  Paris ;  C.  Bergamasio,  of  Petersburg ;  Abdullah,  of  Constantinople ;  and  many 
other  first  class  photographers  throughout  the  World. 

IT  IS  THE  BEST  PAPER  IN  THE  MARKET. 

Sample  sheets,  and  English,  French,  and  German  Price  List  to  be  had  free  on  application 
from  the  Manufacturer. 


DUSSELDORF    ON    THE    RHINE,   GERMANY, 

(FORMERLY  AT  ELBERFELD). 

For  Sale  by  SCOVILL  MANUFACTUEING  COMPANY,  New  York. 


F.  G.  WELLEE,  PUBLISHES  OF  STEEEOSCOPIC  VIEWS 

OF  THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS  AND  VICINITY  AND  MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS, 

LITTLETON,  N.  H. 

SPECIALTY  :  WELLER'S  STEREOSCOPIC  TREASURES,  which  embrace  a  sereis  of  subject  pic- 
tures from  nature,  such  as  are  not  made  by  any  other  artist  in  the  country.  New  subjects  added  continually. 
Dealers  and  jobbers  supplied  on  favorable  terms. 


JOHN  DEAN  &  CO., 
MANUFACTURERS, 

Worcester,  Mass., 

OFFER  AT   WHOLESALE,   AT   LOWEST   PRICES,   THE 


LATES 


BLACK  and  Patent  CHOCOLATE  TINTED, 
EGG-SHELL  and  GLOSSY. 

The  experience  and  extensive  facilities  of  John  Dean  &  Co.  enable  them 
to  produce  the  most  desirable  Ferrotype  Plates  in  the  market. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO., 

TRADE   AGENTS, 

591  BROADWAY,  NEW  YORK. 


MARCY'S 


McAllisters 

MAGIC  LANTERNS 


IN  GREAT  VARIETY. 


LANTERN  SLIDES, 


OF  ALL  PARTS 
op  the  WORLD. 


LARGE  STOCK  JUST  RECEIVED  BY 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Importers,  Seventh  aid  Cherry  Sts„  PMlaai 

TRY    IT    AND    BE    CONVINCED. 


The  best  COLLODION  in  use  is 

LEWIS  &  HOLT'S  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE, 

Sold  with  a  Printed  Formula  accompanying  each  Bottle. 

Being  among  the  first  in  this  country  to  make  Collodion  Pictures,  they  can  warrant  it  to  be  one 

of  the  best  in  use. 


ALSO,  THEIK 


ADAMANTINE  VARNISH  for  Amorotypes,  Negatives,  aifl  MelaiMjp. 

This  Varnish,  when  applied  to  Negatives,  dries  in  a  few  seconds  perfectly  hard,  and  does  not  lower  the 
Intensity,  or  soften  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  in  Printing.  It  gives  a  beautiful  gloss  and  brilliancy  to 
Ambrotypes.    For  Sale  by  Stockdealers  generally.    Prepared  by  K.  A.  LEWIS 

160  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 


HEADQUARTERS     FOR    THE     TRADE. 

Show  Displayers,  Velvet  Stands, 

Velvet  Passepartouts,         Velvet  Oases, 
Beveled  Matts,  Double  Matts, 

Fancy  Metal  Frames,  Standard  Matts, 

Fancy  Paper  Passepartouts. 

These  goods  are  entirely  of  our  own  manufacturing.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand  ;  odd 
sizes  and  styles  made  to  order. 

LEWIS  PATTBERG  &  BRO.,  709  (EM)  Broadway,  New  York. 


Photographic  Card  Warehouse. 


A.  HI.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 

MANUFACTURERS, 

No.  18  South  Sixth  St.  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 

PHILADELPHIA. 


EVERYTHING  APPERTAINING  TO  THE   LINE   OF  OUR 

MANUFACTURES  FURNISHED  WITH  CARE 

AND  PROMPTNESS. 


Our  long  experience  in  and  facilities  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods,  and 
familiarity  with  the  peculiar  wants  of  Photographers,  enable  us  to  offer  superior  induce- 
ments to  those  who  may  favor  us  with  their  orders. 

enLAEGEMEN     X      O 

M&DE  BY  THE  SOUR  CAMERA, 

AND  COPYING  DONE,  FOR  THE  TRADE. 


18  SOLAR   CAMERAS, 


EXPEDITIOUS.  M*£fifiKkB$r**   EXCELLENT 

ALBERT   MOORE, 

No.  828  Wood  Street,  Philadelphia. 


PDBLICA 
TIONS. 


In  order  to  meet  the  thirst  now  happily  growing  so  rapidly  among  photographers,  for 
knowledge  bearing  upon 

ART  PRINCIPLES  APPLICABLE  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY, 

We  have  arranged  with  the  various  publishers  of  art  works  for  the  sale  of  such  as  we  think 
will  be  useful  to  photographers,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  copies  of  them  on  receipt  of  price, 

as  follows : 

ART  CULTURE.  A  Hand-book  of  Art  Technicalities  and  Criticism,  selected  from  the 
works  of  John  Buskin.  An  admirable  work,  giving  most  useful  hints  on  composi- 
tion, posing,  lighting,  backgrounds,  tone,  color,  lines,  unity,  variety,  harmony,  &c,  &c. 
485  pages,  and  finely  illustrated.     Price,  $ 3.00. 

THE  STUDY  OF  ART.  A  manual  of  short  paragraphs,  numerically  arranged,  on  all 
the  leading  art  topics,  and  a  very  instructive,  useful  book.  By  M.  A.  Dwight.  278 
pages.     Price,  $2.00. 

THE  OLD  MASTERS  AND  THEIR  PICTURES.  A  simple  account  of  the  great 
old  masters  in  painting  of  every  age  and  country,  with  descriptions  of  their  most 
famous  works,  for  the  use  of  learners,  &c.    By  Sarah  Tyler.    363  pages.    Price,  $1.50. 

MODERN   PAINTERS    AND    THEIR    PAINTINGS.     A  companion  to  "  The  Old 

Masters,"  and  an  introduction  to  the  Study  of  Modern  Painters  and  their  Pictures. 
By  Sarah  Tyler.     360  pages.     Price,  $1.50. 

THOUGHTS  ABOUT  ART.  A  book  which  every  photographer  should  read,  being  ex- 
haustive on  the  subject,  and  containing  chapters  on  "  The  Kelation  between  Photography 
and  Painting,"  "The  Artistic  Spirit,"  "The  Artistic  Observation  of  Nature,"  and 
many  other  useful  subjects,  by  that  delightful  author  Philip  Gilbert  Hamerton. 
383  pages.     Price,  $2.25. 

CHRISTIAN  ART  AND  SYMBOLISM.  A  very  useful  book  with  the  others.  More 
advanced.     Illustrated.     292  pages.     Price,  $2.25. 

THE  LAOCOON.  An  essay  upon  the  limits  of  painting  and  poetry,  with  remarks  illus- 
trative of  various  points  in  the  history  of  ancient  art.  By  G.  S.  Lessing.  245  pages. 
Price,  $1.75. 

ART  EDUCATION.  A  very  elaborate  and  elegant  work.  By  Walter  Smith,  Super- 
intendent of  Art  Education,  State  of  Massachusetts.     Price,  $5.00. 

g@~ALL  OPvDERS  PILLED  PROMPTLY. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


Premiums 


The  publishers  of  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER,  encouraged  by  the 
growing  interest  taken  in  their  PREMIUM  LIST,  by  operators,  printers,  employees,  etc, 
offer  the  following 

PREMIUMS  FOR  1874, 

FOR  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS 


CONDITIONS:  These  premiums  are  only  given  to  old  or  present  subscribers  for 
new  ones.     No  premium  will  be  given  you  on  your  own  renewal. 


WE   WILL  GIVE  FOR  THREE  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  (IN  ADDITION  TO 
YOUR  OWN),  FOR  ONE  YEAR, 

Vols.  I  &  II  of  the  Photographic  World ! 


TWO  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  FOR  ONE  YEAR, 

Either  Volume  I  or  II  of  the  Photographic  World, 

Or  your  choice  of  the  following  :  $1  on  each  per  year,  payable  in  any  of  our  publications, 
not  in  cash;  i.  e.,  $10  will  secure  our  Magazine  for  one  year  to  an  old  subscriber,  to  a  new  one, 
and  one  dollar's  worth  of  our  other  publications. 

Any  enterprising  operator  can,  by  writing  a  few  letters  and  a  little  effort,  secure  enough 
new  subscribers  to  pay  for  his  own,  and  fit  him  out  with  our  whole  list  of  premiums,  or  a 
set  of  the  six  Luckhardt  pictures.     (See  special  advertisement.) 

This  magnificent  offer  was  never  equalled  by  any  publisher,  photographic  or  otherwise. 
Strive  hard  to  win  the  whole  ! 

Please  examine  the  order  blanks  in  this  number,  and  send  for  more  if  you  wish  them. 

BENEKMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 


Philadelphia  Photographer, 

Is  admitted  by  all  who  understand  such  things  to  be 

The  Livest  and  Best  Photographic  Magazine  Published ! 

IT    PUBLISHES 

A  Handsome  Specimen  Photograph  in  each  issue, 
The  Latest  Photographic  News  from  home  sources, 

Monthly  Letters  from  England,  France,  Germany,  and  Italy, 
Correspondence  from  all  parts  of  the  World, 

Illustrations  on  Wood  of  all  sorts  of  Articles  used  in  the  Art, 
Processes,  Formulae,  Wrinkles  and  Dodges,  without  number, 
The  Earliest  Information  on  all  matters  of  use  to  its  readers, 
Elaborate  Drawings  of  Skylights  in  all  parts  of  the  World, 


EACH  MONTHLY  ISSUE  IS  A  PHOTOGRAPHIC  WORK  IN  ITSELF. 

BE   ASSURED 

NO  PHOTOGRAPHER  CAN  AFFORD  TO  DO  WITHOUT  IT. 


NOW  IN  ITS  ELEVENTH  YEAK.     SAMPLE  COPIES  FKEE. 


Please  read  what  we  give  for  new  subscribers  as 

PREMIUMS  ON  THE  OPPOSITE  PAGE 


NOTICE  TO   SUBSCRIBERS. 


Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2  50  for  six  months,  50  cents  per  copy.     Positively  in  advance. 

In  remitting  by  mail  a  post-office  order,  or  draft  payable  to  the  order  of  Benerman  &  Wilson,  is 
preferable  to  bank  notes.     Clearly  give  your  Post-office,  County,  and  State. 

Canada  subscribers  must  remit  24  cents  extra,  to  prepay  postage.  Foreign  subscriptions  must  be 
accompanied  by  the  postage  in  addition. 

Advertising  sheets  are  bound  with  each  number  of  the  Magazine.  Advertisements  are  inserted 
at  the  following  rates : 

One  Month.  Six  Months.  One  Year. 

OnePage, $20  00  $110  00  $200  00 

Half    "      12  00  66  00  120  00 

Quarter  Page, 7  00  38  50  70  00 

Eighth        "     4  00  22  00  40  00 

Cards,  of  Six  lines  or  less, 2  00  11  00  20  00 

The  attention  of  advertisers,  and  those  having  galleries,  &c,  for  sale,  is  called  to  our  Specialties 
pages.  Terms  $2  for  six  lines,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a  line,  always 
in  advance.  Duplicate  insertions,  50  cents  less,  each.  Sure  to  pay.  JggfOperators  desiring  situa- 
tions, no  charge. 

BENEBMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

OFFICE,  S.  W.  COR.  OF  SEVENTH  AND  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


ENTREKIN'S 

OSCILLATING  HAULER. 


BURNISHING 


Far    superior    to    any-  ^ 
thing    yet   invented    for  Wpil 
that  purpose. 


BEAUTIFUL 
FINISH  &  GLOSS 


Patented  May  20th,  and 
December  2d,  1873. 

Every  Machine  war- 
ranted perfect. 


PHOTOGEAPHERS !  TAKE  NOTICE ! 

IMPORTANT  PATENT  DECISION ! 

Given  on  the  question  of  priority  of  invention  between  the  Weston  and  Entrekin  Burnisher  Patents.  Said 
decision  has  been  given  in  favor  of  TEE  ENTEEEIN  OSCILLATING  ENAMELEE,  on  a  hinged  holding  plate,  etc., 
etc.    (See  decision  of  Examiner,  July  3d,  1874.) 

Now  in  accordance  with  the  above  decision,  we  shall  certainly  collect  a  royalty  from  all  parties  using  pho- 
tograph burnishers  infringing  the  patent  of  the  Entrekin  Oscillating  Enameler,  and  shall  commence  legal 
proceedings  to  stop  the  manufacture  and  sale  of  all  such  infringements. 

Whereas  certain  parties  are  advertising  that  they  will  prosecute  all  photographers  who  make  Burnished 
Photographs  on  other  than  their  primitive  machines,  you  are  hereby  notified  that  it  is  believed  that  such  adver- 
tisements are  intended  to  prevent  the  sale  of  Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler.  The  parties  thus  advertising 
are  hereby  dared  to  prosecute  any  one  using  my  Enameler,  or  the  inventor  and  manufacturer  thereof. 

This  Burnisher  is  the  best  in  the  market  and  far  superior  to  any  other.  It  does  not  infringe  any  patent  of 
Weston  or  others.  Persons  wishing  to  purchase  are  requested  to  notify  the  undersigned,  and  they  will  be  fur- 
nished with  certificates  of  superiority,  and,  if  desired,  purchasers  will  be  amply  guaranteed,  protected,  and 
defended  against  any  claim  or  pretended  claim  of  any  prior  patent. 

WILLIAM  G.  ENTREKIN. 
[Published  by  the  authority  of  George  Harding,  Esq.,  Atlorney-at-Law.'] 


William  G.  Entrekin.  Washington,  D.  C,  Friday,  June  5th,  1874. 

Dear  Sir  :  Yours  is  just  received.  You  need  not  fear  any  trouble  from  any  parties  in  regard  to  the  Weston 
Machine.  Your  Burnisher  does  not  infringe  with  any  feature  of  the  Weston  Machine  in  the  least  particular. 
You  can,  therefore,  manufacture  and  sell  your  machines  with  impunity.  Yours  truly, 

C.  M.  PARKS,  Attorney-at-Law  and  Solicitor  of  Taie^ts. 


A   WRITTEN  GUARANTEE  is  given  to  every  purchaser  of  an  Enameler,  signed  by  the  inventor,  the  form 

of  which  is,  viz. :    "Whereas, has  purchased  Photograph  Burnisher  No. of  my  invention,  and 

made  under  my  Patent,  No.  145,161,  granted  December  2d,  1873, 1,  William  G.  Entrekin,  hereby  covenant  and 

agree  to  warrant  and  defend  the  said his  heirs,  executors,  administrators,  and  assigns,  in  the  use  of  said 

Burnisher,  against  the  consequences  of  any  and  all  suits  for  infringement  which  may  be  brought  against  him, 
by  the  owner  or  owners  of  any  other  Photograph  Burnisher  whatsoever. 

'In  Witness  Whereof,  I,  the  said  William  G.  Entrekin,  have  hereunto  set  my  hand  and  seal  this  — ■ 

day  of A.D.  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and  — ■  "Witness ." 

EXCELSIOR ! 

The  Scovill  Gold  Medal  was  awarded  by  the  National  Photogra- 
phic Association  of  the  United  States  to  W.  G.  Entrekin,  for  his 
Oscillating  Enameler  for  Burnishing  Photographs,  Chicago,  July  16, 
1874. 

Photographers  will  see  that  we  have  a  first-class  article,  and  do 
not  wish  to  impose  upon  them  by  selling  a  press  that  will  not  work. 
We  guarantee  our  press  to  do  all  we  claim  for  it,  as  was  shown  sat- 
isfactorily at  the  Exhibition  at  Chicago,  where  the  press  was  exhib- 
ited and  worked. 

PRICE    LIST: 

6-inch  Roll,  $25;  10-inch,  $40;  14-inch,  $50;  18-inch,  $75. 

If  you  cannot  obtain  the  press  of  your  dealer,  send  your  order  to 

W.  G.  ENTREKIN, 

4382  &  4384  Main  St.,  Manayunk,  Philadelphia. 

SCOVILL  MFG,  CO.,  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 
Trade  Agents  for  Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler. 


/Y/z 


Number  130. 


50  Cents. 


THE 


PHILADELPHIA 


ftat0jirafti|r. 


AN  ILLUSTRATED  MONTHLY  JOURNAL, 
DEVOTED  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 

THE  OFFICIAL  OEGAN  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGKAPHIO 
ASSOCIATION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

BENERMAN    &     WILSON, 

PUBLISHERS, 
S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts. 


Subscriptions  received  by  all  News  and  Stock-Dealers. 

FIVE  DOLLARS  PER  ANNUM,  IN  ADVANCE. 


Sherman  &  Co.,  Printers,  Philadelphia. 


SOMETHING  NEW !     See  Advertisement  inside. 


SUMMARY    OP    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Oar  Picture 289 

Views  Abroad  and  Across.    By  Edward  L.  Wilson, 

X 289 

The  Graphite  Process 298 

Filterings  from  the  Fraternity 300 

Collodion  for  Porcelain  Pictures.    By  G.  Cramer. 

New  Method  of  Silvering  Paper.    By  M.  M.  Gris- 
wold. 

Retouching  Varnish.    By  O.  F.  Weaver. 

St.  Louis  Formulae.    By  R.  Benecke. 

Collodion  Formulae.    By  C.  A.  Zimmerman. 

Managing  the  Development.    By  E.  D.  Ormsby. 

Salting  Plain  Paper.    By  W.  L.  Shoemaker. 

The  Use  of  Graphite  in  the  Negative  Process.    By 
E.  Bierstadt. 

Something  New  about  Toning.    By  Montfort   & 
Hill. 

Making  Solar  Negatives.    By  J.  W.  Wykes. 

No  Sooner  Said  than  Done.    By  P.  C.  Nason. 


PAGE 

Filterings  from  the  Fraternity — continued. 
How  it  is  Done  in  Boston.    By  A.  N.  Hardy. 
How  I  Prepare  Negatives  for  Printing.    By  H.  C. 

Wilt. 
The  Best  Lubricator.    By  B.  F.  Hall. 
Cleveland  Formula.    By  E.  Decker. 
Retouching  Negatives.    By  Mr.  Bildt. 

Class  in  Landscape  Photography 307 

German  Correspondence.    By  Prof.  H.  Vo'gel,  Ph.D.  308 

Photography  in  France.    By  Ernest  Lacan 311 

Hints  under  the  Skylight.    By  R.  J.  Chute 313 

Bibliographic 314 

Industrial  Exhibitions.    By  D.  K.  Cady 315 

Society  Gossip 316 

The  Executive  Committee  of  the  National  Phonogra- 
phic Association 317 

Matters  of  the  N.  P.  A 317 

Obituary 318 

Editor's  Table 318 


Embellishment. — Cabinet  Portrait.    Negatives  by  J.  H.  Kent,  Rochester,  N.  Y.    Prints  by 
W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s  Paper. 

Anderson,  J.  A.    Photographic  Apparatus. 

Anthony  &  Co.,  E.  &  H.  T.    The  Bowdish  Chair. 

Art  Publications. 

Barnett,  John.    Patent  Cameo  Dies. 

Benerman  &  Wilson.    Lantern  Slides.    Wet  Books. 

Bierstadt,  Charles.    Photo.  Views. 

Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

Bullock  &  Crenshaw.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Cameo  Press,  The  Universal. 

Clemons,  Jno.  R.    Albumen  Paper.    Varnish. 

Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  A.  M.    Photograph  Cards. 

Cooper  &  Co.,  Chas.    Portrait  Lenses. 

Curtis,  G.  E.    Stereo.  Views. 

Damaged  Lantern  Slides. 

Dean,  John  &  Co.    Adamantean  Ferrotype  Plates. 

Entrekin,  W.  G.    Oscillating  Enameler. 

Faser,  C.    Frames. 

French,  B.  &  Co.    Voigtlander  Lenses,  &c. 

Gennert,  G.    Albumen  Paper,  &c. 

Gihon,  John  L.    Opaque  and  Cut-Outs. 

Griswold's  Life  Compositions  for  the  Stereoscope'. 

Hance's  Photo.  Specialties. 

Hale,  Kilburn  &  Co.    Frames,  Mouldings,  &c. 

Hearn,  Chas.  W.    Collodio-Chloride. 

Hermagis'  Portrait  Objectives. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs. 

Improved  Photograph  Covers. 

Instruction  in  Photography. 

Kilburn  Bros.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Lea's  Manual  of  Photography. 

Lewis,  R.  A.    Collodion. 

Liesegang,  E.    Albumen  Paper, 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 

Loeffler,  J.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Losscher  &  Petsch.    A  New  Invoice  of  Studies. 

Magee,  James  F.  &  Co.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Marcy's  Sciopticon,  &c. 

Masonic  Temple,  Philadelphia.  'Stereo.  Views. 

McAllister,  W.  Mitchell.    Manufacturing  Optician. 

McCollin,  Thos.  H.    Photographic  Materials. 

Moore,  Albert.'  Solar  Printing. 


Mosaics,  1874. 

Moulton,  L.  V.    Rapid  Photo-Washer. 
Myers,  C.  E.    Patent  Light-Controller. 
Nason  Novelty  Co.    Nasonian  Cut-Outs. 
Newell's  Improved  Bath-Holder. 
Pattberg,  Lewis  &  Bro.    Passepartouts,  &c. 
Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 
Photographer's  Pocket  Reference-Book. 
Photographic  Publications. 
Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 
Powers  &  AVeightman.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Premiums  for  1874,  for  New  Subscribers  to  "Philadel- 
phia Photographer.'' 
Prize  Pictures. 

Rau,.Geo.    German  Albumen  Colors. 
Rice  &  Thompson.    Photo.  Stock  House. 
Robinson's  New  Photo.  Trimmer. 
Robinson's  Metallic  Guides. 
Hutinet,  D.    Photographic  Mounts. 
Ross'  Portrait  and  View  Lenses. 
Rulofson's  Views. 

Ryan,  D.  J.    Photo.  Stock  Depot,  Chromos,  &c. 
Sauter,  G.    Passepartouts. 
Schwarze  &  Valk.    Photo,  Papers. 
Scovill  Manf'g.  Co.    Photographic  Materials. 
Seavey  L.  W.    Scenic  Artist,  Backgrounds,  &c. 
Snelling,  H.  H.    Lebanon  Rustic  Frame. 
"Something  New." 
Spicer's  Lustrene. 
Steinheil's  New  Aplanatic  Lenses. 
Stevens,  Chas.  W.    Photographic  Goods. 
The  Practical  Printer. 

Thornton,  Mrs.  Mary  A.    Photo.  Refrigerators. 
Vogel's  Hand-Book  of  Photography. 
Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papers. 
Weller's  Stereoscopic  Treasures. 
Wilson,  Charles  A.    Photographic  Goods. 
Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials,  &c. 
Willy  Wallach.    Albumen  Paper. 
Woodward,  D.  A.    Solar  Cameras. 
Zentmayer,  Joseph.    Lenses. 
Zimmerman  Bros.    Photographic  Stock  Depot. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

822  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa, 

HAVE  BEEN  APPOINTED 

AGENTS  FOR  THE  SALE  OF  MESSRS.  E.  L.  BRAND  &  OO.'S 

PATENT  IMPROVED  PRESSES, 

for  moulding  the  Souvenir  Photographs,  which  they  will 
furnish  at  following  prices,  including  instructions  : 

No.  1 — Card  and  Cabinet  size,  or  two  Cabinet  dies, •    .  $25  00 

"    2— Card  Cabinet  and  6Jx8J, 50  00 

"    3— Card  Cabinet,  8x10,  10x13,  13x16, 100  00 

They  are  also  Agents  for 

THE  LANGDON  ADJUSTABLE  MITRE  BOX. 

Price,  with  22  inch  Disston  Saw, $10  00 

WITTE'S  EVAPORATING  DISHES  AND  WATER  BATHS  COMBINED. 

To  hold  J  gallon,  each, $3  50 

3  quarts,     '*'         . : 4  50 

1  gallon,      "         5  00 

1*     "  "         •     •     • 5  50 

Larger  sizes  to  order. 

Their  Latest  Novelties  are 

STONE  ACID  DISHES. 

To  hold  1£  gallons,  each, $2  00 

2i         "  "... 3  25 

7  '<  " 8  75 

SOLID  GLASS  DIPPERS  (two  prong). 

No.  1 — 7  inches  long, $0  35 

"  2—12  "    " 45 

"  3—13  "    " 50 

"  4—15  "    " 60 

"  5—19  "    " .  70 

PRICE  LISTS  FREE  TO  ALL  APPLICANTS. 


ALBION  ALBUMENIZING  CO. 

LONDON  AND  GLASGOW,  \ 
(Office,   No.   II    Brackenbury   Road,  Hammersmith,  London,) 

Request  American  Photographers  to  give  their 
Paper  a  fair  trial. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"  It  is  good  .enough  to  eat.     I  use  it  altogether  for  the  prints  for  the  Philadelphia  Photographer  .^ — 
Wm.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"  The  last  lot  of  paper  was  as  good  as  we  wish  to  use. — Vandyke  &  Brown,  Liverpool,  largest  con 
snmer.t  i?>  Knglund. 

A  FRESH  SUPPLY  JUST  RECEIVED  BY 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 
TO   PROFESSIONAL   PHOTOGRAPHERS    AND   THE   TRADE. 


CH.    DAUVOIS, 

Acknowledged  to  be  the  Best  and  Cheapest  in  the  World. 


DH  nJH  ROHAUT&HUTINET, 

•  JL-l    *— '         -■-       A    X   ^      JL_>       A     y  SUCCESSOBS, 

No.  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris, 


ESPECIAL    MANUFACTURERS    OP 


MOUNTS^FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


TRADE    MARK,    Ch.D. 


Mounts  for  Cartes-de-Visite, 
Cabinet  Portrait, 
Victoria  Card, 

Stereoscopic  Views — all  new  samples  of  French 
styles. 


Bristol  Boards  of  every  size  and  thickness,  plain. 

India  Tinted  and  Fancy  Printing. 

Book-post  and  Card  Cases. 

Stout  Blotting  Paper  Albums. 

First-class  Rives  Albumenized  Paper,  &c,  &c. 


MEDALS  AWARDED  AT  EVERY  EXHIBITION. 

All  orders  are  to  be  sent  to  their  establishment,  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris,  or  to  Wholesale  Houses 
of  the  United  States.     Samples  on  application. 

LIBERAL  DISCOUNT  TO  WHOLESALE  HOUSES. 


NEWELL'S  CHEMICAL-PROOF  WARE. 

TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS  AND  STOCK-DEALERS. 

A  yenr  ago  we  introduced  our  Dishes  and  Bath  Holders  at  the  Convention  then  being  held  in  the 
City  of  Buffalo,  as  filling  what  we  supposed  to  be  a  necessity  in  the  photographic  fraternity.  Our 
goods  then,  merely  as  they  were  first  created,  and  in  a,  manner  in  their  crude  state,  attracted  more 
than  a  passing  notice.  A  year  of  practical  experience  has  suggested  some  changes  and  many  improve- 
ments, until  we  have  now  perfected  what  is  acknowledged  to  be  the  very  acme  of  perfection  :  in  attest- 
ation of  which,  the  following  eminent  corroborative  testimony  is  offered: 

New  Yokk,  June  27th,  1874. 

I  have  in  constant  use  one  of  your  Improved  Bath-Holders  and  it  works  finely.  I  consider  it  one 
of  the  many  desirable  improvements  of  the  age,  as  it  possesses  the  qualifications  of  being  good  as  well 
as  chea,}) :  even  the  largest  sizes  are  light  and  easily  handled  in  comparison  with  the  heavy  and  cum- 
bersome holders  so  long  in  use.  Yours  respectfully,  Abm.  Bogardus. 

St.  Louis,  Mo.,  May  IS,  1374. 

It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  bear  testimony  to  the  great  value  of  your  Baths  and  Dishes  for  photo- 
graphic purposes.  I  have  heretofore  used  porcelain,  glass,  and  vulcanized  rubber,  but  usually  managed 
to  break  at  least  one  dozen  a  year — with  all  the  care  that  I  could  possibly  take  of  them  they  would  at 
times  get  a  knock,  a  fall,  a  break  somehow  :  but  now  I  feel  my  troubles  are  at  an  end  with  my  solution 
dishes,  for  I  look  upon  your  dishes  and  baths  as  the  photographer's  boon,  being  durable,  light,  and 
cheap,  and  no  well-regulated  gallery  should  be  without  a  full  set.  Most  respectfully, 

N.B. — This  notice  is  unsolicited.  J.  II.  Fitzgibbon. 

Philadelphia,  January  16,  1874. 

Our  attention  having  been  called  to  your  patent  Baths,  we  determined  upon  giving  them  a  trial.  In 
justice  to  your  discovery,  we  feel  it  our  duty  to  attest  its  merits.  It  is  all  that  is  claimed,  and  more  : 
for,  apart  from  the  many  advantages  claimed  for  it,  it  produces  the  most  perfect  negatives  we  ever 
made,  and  seems  to  have  the  quality  of  purifying  the  solution.  Once  used  no  photographer,  we  feel 
confident,  would  be  without  them.  Schreiber  &  Sons. 


DO  NUT  BE  PERSUADED  TO  USE  ANY  OTHER.  PKICE  LIST  FURNISHED  ON  APPLICATION. 

Manufactured  by  R.  NEWELL  &  SON,  626  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


SOUTHERN 

Photographic^Ferrotype 

STOCK  DEPOT, 
Savannah,  Geo. 

FIRST-CLASS  STOCK 

AT  NORTHERN  PRICES, 

jp§  Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance, 

crosscup&westTpha^^-^-'^s^-—^^^"  Drayage,  &c.  % -;  wj 

SEHD     IB"1  COT&    P3  :R/ 1  C  IE     LIST. 


% 


tfXHHEIL'S  Soft, 


NEW 


Aplanatic 


FOR 

GROUPS, 
LANDSCAPES, 

AND 

COPIES. 


enses 


FOR 

GROUPS, 
LANDSCAPES, 

AND 

COPIES. 


(Actual  size  of  a  No.  1  Steinheil  L^n*.) 
We  have  now  a  full  stock  of  these  celebrated  Lenses,  at  the  following  prices  : 


No.  1,  \-i  size, 

"    2 1-2 

"    3,  4-4 

"    4,  8-10 

"    5,  10-12 

."    6,  13-16 


?4  inch  focus,  $25  00 


5| 

7 

16! 


30  00 

45  00 

60  00 

70  00 

110  00 


Nos.  1  and  2  are  in  matched  pairs  for  Stereoscopic  Work. 


"I  always  take  great  pleasure  in  recommending- the  Steinheil  Lenses,  and  you  can  say  almost 
anything  in  their  favor  for  me.  They  possess  all  the  merits  of  higher  priced  lenses,  and  if  I  was 
starting  again  I  should  stock  myself  with  them." — B.  W.  Kilburn. 


THEY  ARE 

IN  USE  BY  MOST  LEADING  PHOTOGRAPHERS, 

INCLUDING 

GUTEKUNST,  WENDEROTH, 

BROADBENT  &  PHILLIPS,  PENNEMORE, 

DeMORAT,  LOTHROP, 

And  many  others,  equally  well  knoion. 

We  feel  sure  that  at  least  one  of  these  Lenses  is  needful  for  the  successful  prosecution  of  your 
business,  and  so  solicit  your  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  States, 

No.  822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


, 

Wm 

WW    ^ 

) 

jgfty^ 

-  Jtj, 

<m       ^~=»>- 

\  ^  \B 

it 

HI 

iili 

A 

[    /^ 

t^^m^***<-A4^mb  fl 

r^ 

i 

F 

^fifcy*:."' 

H^Sji 

'mm 

sir 

»^'^v5^ 

«»      4 

r ' 

ft- 

f  e 

Br    t^lK^H 

^w 

1 

Pul)Li 


J.  if.  A\E.Vr 


ROOT  ESTER. 


THE 


h0t0gophet\ 


Vol.  XL 


OCTOBER,  1874. 


No.  13  0. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1874, 
Er  BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


OUR  PICTURE, 

The  charming  specimen  we  present  this 
month  requires  but  little  to  be  said  by  us. 
The  artist  is  well  known  to  most  of  our 
readers,  and  seldom  invites  us  to  anything 
stale  or  uninteresting.  In  this  case  he  has 
ventured  to  depart  from  the  popular,  easy, 
and  well-beaten  track  of  soft  and  delicate  chi- 
aroscuro, and  to  strike  out  with  something 
so  bold  and  vigorous  as  to  almost  startle  us 
with  its  brilliancy.  It  is  this  feature  that 
commends  it  to  our  study  and  consideration. 
A  less  skilful  artist  than  Mr.  Kent  would 
hardly  have  been  safe  in  attempting  such  a 
picture,  but  the  harmonious  handling  of  the 
strong  lights  and  shadows,  together  with 
the  easy,  natural  pose,  and  the  neatness  and 
taste  with  which  the  whole  is  arranged, 
show  the  master  hand,  and  demonstrate  the 
skill  with  which  the  work  was  executed. 

In  the  lighting  Mr.  Kent  used  his  hand- 
screen,  which  has  now  come  into  such  gene- 
ral use,  in  one  form  or  another,  and  which 
was  presented  by  him  to  the  National  Pho- 
tographic Association. 

Mr.  Kent's  formula  has  been  given  so 
often,  and  is  so  much  the  same  as  all  good 
photographers  use,  that  he  has  not  repeated 
it  with  this  picture.  This  is  rather  intended 
to  illustrate  a  style  of  lighting  rather  than 
any  chemical  formula. 

The  prints  were  burnished  by  Entrekin's 
Oscillating  Enamelier,  the   most  complete 


machine  that  has  ever  been  devised  for  such 
work.  It  will  be  remembered  that  for  this 
enamelier  Mr.  Entrekin  was  awarded  the 
Scovill  Gold  Medal  at  the  Chicago  Conven- 
tion. 

The  printing  was  done  by  Mr.  William 
H.  Rhoads,  on  the  Albion  albumen  paper, 
and  is  a  fine  example  of  careful  work  in  this 
department. 

VIEWS  ABROAD  AND  ACROSS. 

BY    EDWARD    L.    WILSON. 

X. 

Be  it  known  to  you,  and  it  is  hereby 
made  known  unto  you,  that  m  Switzerland 
I  had  a  good  time.  Such  any  one  who 
visits  that  delectable  land  would  expect, 
but  I  had  an  unusually  good  time.  I  got 
up  before  the  sun  and  journeyed,  day  after 
day,  alpenstock  in  hand,  through  some  of 
the  most  famous  passes ;  kept  company 
and  chatted  with  some  of  the  noisiest  rivers 
you  ever  imagined ;  tested  my  voice  with 
some  of  the  most  rollicksome  of  cascades  to 
see  who  could  raise  the  most  deafening 
echo  ;  tramped  over  some  of  the  most  beau- 
fifral  highways;  scrambled  up  several  of 
the  hardest  peaks,  taking  my  life  in  my 
hand ;  traversed  glaciers  whose  crevices 
open  wide  to  catch  you,  and  whose  beauty 
overpowers  you  more  than  the  danger' tHey 
present ;  I  floated  over  lakes  whose  charms 


19 


290 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEB. 


have  been  sung  by  greater  than  I ;  rested  in 
some  of  the  quaintest  of  villages ;  saw 
chains  and  groups  and  ranges  of  moun- 
tains without  number;  stood  at  safe  dis- 
tances and  saw  the  avalanches  give  their 
mad  leaps,  seemingly  carrying  a  whole 
mountain-side  down  with  them,  and  cre- 
ating a  smaller  mountain  with  their  de'bris; 
I  carried  an  umbrella  over  my  head  to  pro- 
tect me  from  the  sun  while  I  tramped  the 
snow  under  my  feet;  I  rode  in  diligences; 
I  jabbered  with  the  people,  and  I  sighed 
for  a  camera. 

I  may  not  detain  you  with  details. 
Books  upon  books  have  been  written  upon 
the  Alps,  and  photography  has  illustrated 
them.  But  it  is  my  work  to  tell  you  more 
of  what  I  saw  photographic,  much  as  I  would 
like  to  do  the  other.  I  do  not  think  any 
one  ever  had  a  better,  grander  trip  in  the 
Alps  than  I  had,  and  yet  I  was  wicked 
enough  to  want  more.  I  shall  want  to  go 
back  and  take  it  on  foot  for  months,  for 
really  on  foot  is  the  true  way  to  see  the 
Alps,  and  it  can  all  be  done  in  that  way, 
for  the  roads  are  capital.  I  was  curious  to 
see  what  difference  exists  between  the  Alps 
and  our  own  White  Mountains.  It  is  quite 
as  silly  to  attempt  a  comparison  between 
them  as  between  St.  Peter's  at  Rome  and 
Milan  Cathedral.  At  Interlachen,  where 
I  worshipped  at  the  feet  of  the  Jungfrau, 
the  loveliest  of  all  the  Alps,  I  was  fortunate 
in  being  able  to  visit  the  large  photographic 
establishment  of  Mr.  A.  Gabler,  a  gentle- 
man who  has  scrambled  over  these  moun- 
tains pretty  thoroughly  with  his  camera 
from  Italy  to  France.  This  visit  caused 
me  to  add  considerable  to  the  weight  of  my 
satchel,  for  one  has  a  great  propensity  for 
buying  photographs  of  all  the  objects  one 
has  seen,  and  when  the  work  is  as  good  as 
Mr.  Gabler's  is,  it  is  irresistible. 

One  curious  thing  I  noticed  among  many 
others,  pertaining  to  the  costumes  of  the 
Swiss  peasantry,  was  the  seeming  insepara- 
bleness  of  the  women  and  a  certain  kind  of 
basket  which  they  wore  on  their  backs. 
They  seemed  to  have  been  born  with  them, 
and  whether  empty  or  full  of  stores  or  hay, 
k  was  just  the  same  to  them,  apparently. 
I  noticed  that  it  was  difficult  to  turn  around 
with  them,  and  when  any  one  was  heard 


coming  up  behind,  the  bearer  of  the  basket 
would  halt  in  order  to  see  the  passer-by. 
One  of  these  burdened  creatures,  attempting 
to  both  walk  and  look,  fell,  and  from  her 
being  master  of  the  basket,  the  basket  be- 
came master  of  her ! 

Beautiful  Switzerland  !  How  I  did  dis- 
like to  leave  it.  How  much  more  enjoy- 
ment I  had  too  because  of  the  pains  I  had 
taken  to  study  the  effects  of  light  and  shade. 
lam  sure  I  saw  and  enjoyed  much,  very 
much  that  I  would  have  otherwise  passed 
by.  It  seems  to  me  a  lover  and  student 
of  nature  is  given  sweeter  communion,  and 
a  brighter,  better  understanding  of  her 
works  than  he  who  is  not,  is  allowed  to 
have. 

From  the  Alps  straight  to  Paris,  via 
Basle,  Berne,  &c,  stopping  only  at  Dor- 
nach,  on  the  Rhine,  to  see  Adolph  Braun, 
the  great  carbon  printer,  and  his  great 
manufactory,  for  such  it  is,  and  there  is  no 
other  just  like  it  or  as  large  in  the  world. 
Here  the  beautiful  carbon  process,  which 
has  been  attempted  and  thrown  aside  by  so 
many,  and  which  no  one  in  this  great  coun- 
try works  to  any  extent,  is  conducted  on  an 
immense  scale,  and  for  the  two  days  I  was 
there  I  found  much  to  interest  me  in  the 
establishment  of  Mr.  Braun.  The  kind- 
ness I  received  from  him  made  me  want  to 
remain  two  weeks.  Photography  had  al- 
ready made  us  familiar  with  each  other's 
faces,  and  a  long  correspondence  had  made 
us  friends.  He  employs  over  one  hundred 
persons  constantly,  and  with  him  I  visited 
the  several  departments.  Carbon  tissue,  as 
you  remember,  consists  of  a  coating  upon 
paper,  of  gelatin  mixed  with  a  pigment, 
and  made  sensitive  to  light  by  bichromate 
of  potash.  It  is  then  printed  the  same  as 
albumen  paper,  transferred  to  a  sheet  of 
caoutchouc  paper,  the  picture  developed  by 
means  of  hot  water,  and  then  transferred 
again  to  the  sheet  of  paper  upon  which  it  is 
to  remain  permanently.  And  here  we  see 
all  these  operations,  in  all  their  details,  ac- 
tively engaged  in  by  the  hundred  or  more 
employes,  and  be  assured  it  is  done  on  a 
large  scale.  Here  are  the  grinding  ma- 
chines for  grinding  the  pigments,  ten  in  a 
row.  wagging  their  heads  in  all  directions, 
like  so  many  lunatics  who  have  lost  control 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


291 


of  their  necks,  but  at  the  same  time  accom- 
plishing their  purpose;  the  room  where 
the  paper  is  coated,  by  allowing  it  to  pass 
over  a  tank  of  the  melted  gelatin  mixture 
by  means  of  rollers,  the  paper  just  taking 
up  enough  for  the  purpose  as  it  passes  over; 
the  drying-room,  where  we  see  thirty  strips 
of  the  carbon  tissue,  15  feet  long  and  3  feet 
wide,  hung  there  yesterday  evening  to  dry 
over  night  for  the  consumption  of  the 
printers  to-day;  the  printing-room,  where 
is  indeed  a  busy,  busy  scene — men  handling 
negatives,  great  and  small,  and  tearing  off 
the  paper  as  wanted;  the  transfer-room, 
where  the  caoutchouc  paper  and  the  tissue 
are  pressed  together,  and  then,  with  the  aid 
of  the  benzine,  they  are  separated,  and  the 
transfer  made  ;  the  developing-room,  where 
the  great  tanks  are  steaming,  and  the  work- 
men busy  and  as  attentive  as  ail  good  print- 
ers should  be  when  they  tone  their  prints, 
for  the  quality  of  the  carbon  print  depends 
much  upon  the  length  of  time  it  remains  in 
the  warm  water ;  the  drying-room,  where 
the  prints  are  dried  previous  to  the  second 
transfer;  the  mounting-room,  where  gum 
arabic  is  the  mountant;  the  touching-out 
room,  where  all  defects  are  obliterated,  and 
where  the  titles  are  put  upon  the  pictures, 
mainly  by  hand;  the  pressroom,  where 
ponderous  presses  finish  the  work ;  the 
storerooms,  where  the  finished  pictures  are 
kept ;  the  sample-rooms,  where  proofs  of 
all  the  negatives  are  kept;  two  skylights, 
the  one  for  copying  and  the  other  for 
portraiture ;  the  offices,  the  engine-room 
and  engine,  and  last,  but  not  least,  a  large 
basement  devoted  to  the  Woodbury  process, 
which  Mr.  Braun  also  uses  largely. 

Photographic  printing  on  such  a  scale  I 
had  never  seen  before  ;  neither  had  I  ever 
witnessed  such  a  scene  of  activity  in  the 
interests  of  photography. 

Mr.  Braun  turns  out  from  two  to  three 
thousand  pictures  every  day.  Almost 
everything  in  the  photographic  line  he 
makes;  but  the  specialty,  which  has  given 
him  fame,  and  entitles  him  to  the  everlast- 
ing gratitude  of  the  civilized  world,  is  the 
reproduction,  in  indelible  form,  of  the  great 
masterpieces  of  art  which  are  found  in  the 
galleries  of  Europe^  As  literature  for  a 
thousand  years  was  imprisoned  in  cloisters, 


so  has  art  for  centuries  been  imprisoned  in 
the  few  great  museums  of  Europe.  But  we 
have  come  upon  a  new  dispensation,  and  it 
is  possible  now  for  every  school  and  college 
in  America  to  possess  faithful  copies  of  the 
immortal  masterpieces  of  the  chisel,  the 
brush,  and  the  pencil,  and  every  boy  and 
girl  in  their  teens  may  know  Phidias,  Mi- 
chael Angelo,  Raphael,  and  the  rest  of  the 
"great  cloud  of  witnesses,"  by  a  sight  of 
their  great  deeds. 

How  many  years  I  longed  for  the  privi- 
lege of  wading  through  his  sample  portfolios, 
and  here  I  did  it,  and  made  selections  which 
nnw  not  only  bring  to  my  mind  constantly 
the  original  gems  among  which  I  have  been, 
wandering,  but  also  are  a  continual  help, 
and  delight  to  me  whenever  I  can  turn* 
aside  from  work  and  plunge  into  the  be- 
witcheries  of  the  beautiful. 

Mr.  Braun  has  over  10,000  negative* 
stored  in  his  works,  in  strong  boxes,  as  I 
saw,  most  systematically  numbered  and 
classified,  and  at  his  villa  near  by  is  a  set 
of  duplicates.  Some  of  these  negatives  are 
of  immense  weight,  on  plate  glass.  I  never 
saw  an  establishment  where  all  things 
worked  more  harmoniously  together,  or 
where  the  results  were  so  beautiful ;  neither 
did  I  ever  see  a  man  who  seemed  so  utterly 
wrapped  up  in  his  chosen  art  as  Mr.  Braun. 
The  work  he  has  undertaken,  alone,  is  a 
magnificent  one,  and  he  has  been  truly 
called  the  "  Guttenberg  of  Art."  He  has 
placed  within  the  reach  of  all  these  copies 
of  the  works  of  the  old  masters  which, 
heretofore,  only  the  favored  few  could  go- 
to the  galleries  of  the  originals  to  see. 

When  I  think  of  the  days  I  have  spent 
with  him,  I  feel  as  if  I  had  been  with  one 
whose  fame  is  more  deserved  than  that  of 
poet  or  statesman.  It  was  a  privilege  not 
to  be  overvalued. 

But  what  of  Paris  ?  Better  to  ask  what 
not  of  Paris.  In  that  wonderful  city  reside 
some  of  the  most  industrious  photographic 
experimentalists  alive.  In  and  about  it  are 
some  of  the  largest  and  most  noted  places  of 
photographic  interest  in  the  world,  and  the 
wondrous  Louvre,  the  Luxembourg,  and 
many  other  splendid  art  collections.  And 
you  may  know  that  with  such  to  attend  to 
I  did  not  have  much  time  to  devote  to  Paris 


292 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHER. 


proper.  Kindred  spirits  were  not  wanting 
to  take  my  arm  and  lead  me  in  the  right 
direction  to  make  the  best  of  my  time.  If 
an  editor  has  no  happiness  at  home,  he  cer- 
tainly has  the  opportunity  to  make  good 
friends  abroad  who  prove  friends  indeed 
(as  mine  did  in  Paris,  and  everywhere  I 
went)  when  he  calls  upon  them,  and  that  is 
happiness. 

About  the  time  of  my  arrival  in  Paris, 
Mons.  Liebert  had  just  begun  an  excite- 
ment with  his  new  work  on  photography, 
which  is  noticed  elsewhere.  He  had  created 
considerable  excitement  too,  by  a  chapter 
therein  on  the  production  of  enlargements 
from  small  negatives,  for  Mr.  Edwards  was 
then  calling  upon  the  public  to  purchase  his 
process,  and  Mons.  Liebert  rather  check- 
mated his  English  co-worker  by  this  publi- 
cation. It  is  a  process  too  good  to  be 
thrown  aside,  and  I  give  it  to  you  here  be- 
cause I  believe  I  could  not  give  you  any- 
thing of  more  practical  advantage  to  you. 
There  is  money  in  it,  and  it  ought  to  be 
worked  at  until  perfection  is  attained.  M. 
Liebert  is  very  exact.  His  instructions  are 
as  follows : 

"First  method.  Place  in  a  dish  the  whites 
of  four  fresh  eggs,  which  will  give  about 
100  grammes  (34  oz.  troy)  of  albumen,  then 
add  75  grammes  (2|  oz.  troy)  of  distilled 
water,  in  which  have  first  been  dissolved, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,     4  grammes  (61 J  grains). 
Bromide  "  1£  gramme  (23   grains). 

"  Beat  them  to  a  froth  and  allow  them  to 
stand  twenty-four  hours ;  then  filter,  and 
you  will  have  an  iodized  solution  of  albu- 
men. 

"Take  a  plate  that  is  thin,  very  pure 
and  flat,  of  the  size  of  the  small  nega- 
tive that  you  wish  to  produce,  or  of  a  four- 
fold dimension,  which  is  to  be  divided  by  a 
diamond,  after  the  preparation.  When  it 
is  well  cleaned  coat  it  with  a  film  of  neutral 
albumen  diluted  with  three  times  its  volume 
of  water,  in  order  to  make  sure  of  its  being 
perfectly  clean.  When  this  film  is  entirely 
dry,  collodionize  as  usual  with  a  good 
iodized  collodion  ;  when  the  film  has  set, 
which  requires  from  five  to  six  minutes, 
wash  under  the  tap  in  filtered  water,  until 
the  collodion  no  longer  shows  greasy  marks 


Finish  by  washing  in  distilled  water,  drain 
for  a  short  time,  then  cover  with  five  or  six 
successive  coatings  of  the  iodized  solution 
of  albumen  described  above  ;  dry  in  a  place 
free  from  dust,  placing  the  plate  on  blot- 
ters against  the  wall.  The  plates  thus  pre- 
pared may  be  preserved  indefinitely  in 
grooved  boxes.  It  is  better  to  prepare  a 
quantity  at  a  time,  so  as  not  to  be  obliged 
to  recommence  each  day  this  long  and  deli- 
cate operation. 

"  When  you  wish  to  make  a  positive  by 
transparency,  dip  this  plate,  perfectly  dry 
(using,  if  it  is  necessary,  an  alcohol  lamp), 
into  a  new  bath  of  aceto-nitrate  of  silver, 
thus  composed : 

Nitrate  of  Silver,         .  80  grammes  (2  j  troy  oz.). 

Crystallizable  Acetic  )    cn  m  n    -j 

J  V  50  c.c.  (If  fluid  oz.). 

Acid,   .  .  ) 

Distilled  Water,  .     1  litre         (15L quart). 

"  After  an  immersion  of  one  or  two  min- 
utes wash  again  in  distilled  water  and  dry 
with  care,  but,  this  time,  away  from  the 
light.  When  the  desiccation  is  complete, 
place  this  plate  under  the  negative  in  a  pres- 
sure-frame, and  now  expose  to  diffused  light. 
An  exposure  of  from  five  to  fifteen  seconds 
is  generally  sufficient,  according  to  the  in- 
tensity of  the  negative  and  of  the  light ; 
then  carry  to  the  laboratory  to  develop  as 
follows:  On  leaving  the  frame,  the  plate  is 
placed  in  a  dish  filled  with  distilled  water  to 
moisten  the  coating  of  albumen,  it  is  then 
covered  with  the  developer,  composed  of, 

Distilled  Water,    .       1  litre  (l^L  quart). 

Pyrogallic  Acid,   .       7  grammes  (108  grains). 
Acetic  Acid,  .     30  c.c.  (1  fluid  oz.). 

"Under  the  action  of  this  reagent,  the 
image  presents  a  weak  appearance;  now 
add  a  few  drops  of  the  following  intensify- 
ing solution  : 

Distilled  Water,     .       1  litre,  (1^  quart). 

Nitrate  of  Silver,   .     20  grammes  (308i  grains). 
Citric  Acid,    .  .       5         "  (77  grains). 

"  And  continue  the  development  until  the 
image  has  arrived  at  the  requisite  degree  of 
intensity.  The  action  of  the  developer  is 
stopped  by  a  good  washing,  and  the  fixing 
is  done  by  means  of  hyposulphite  of  soda, 
or  of  cyanide  of  potassium,  very  much  di- 
luted. 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


293 


"  If  during  the  development  the  image 
should  be  mottled,  rub  lightly  the  surface 
with  a  tuft  of  cotton-wool.  Under  this  fric- 
tion, repeated  several  times,  the  image  will 
become  perfectly  transparent. 

"Finally,  after  the  washing  that  follows 
the  fixing,  plunge  the  plate  into  a  bath 
composed  of 

Distilled  Water,         .     2  litres  (2^  quarts). 

Chloride  of  Gold,       .     1  gramme  (15i  grains). 

In  which  the  image  will  aqquire  a  sepia 
tone,  suitable  for  the  gradual  transmission 
of  the  light  passing  through  the  positive, 
to  produce  a  large  negative,  strong  in  the 
blacks. 

"  It  might  be  advisable,  according  as  the 
little  negative  to  be  reproduced  is  more  or 
less  hard,  to  modify  the  color  of  the  positive 
by  transparency,  by  covering  it,  before  the 
gold  bath,  with  a  coating  of  bichloride  of 
mercury,  much  diluted.  This  positive  by 
transparency,  thus  finished,  is  dried  ;  then, 
should  it  be  too  gray  or  hard,  place  it  in 
contact  with  a  very  thin  ground-glass,  the 
two  polished  sides  of  the  glass  being  in  con- 
tact, so  that  the  ground  side  should  be  on 
the  outside  as  well  as  the  image;  surround 
with  a  gummed  paper,  retouch  if  necessary 
on  the  ground  side  of  the  glass,  which  re- 
quires a  few  minutes,  then  proceed  to  obtain 
the  large  negative  as  will  be  explained 
further  on. 

"  As  will  be  seen  this  is  no  new  invention, 
for  with  the  exception  of  a  few  details  it  is 
the  albumenized  collodion  process  of  Tau- 
penot  modified,  applied  to  positives  by  trans- 
parency ;  this  is  why  we  do  not  understand 
that  so  many  photographers  should  have 
bought  the  Edwards  process.  We  are  con- 
vinced by  the  results  that  have  passed  under 
our  eyes,  that  his  process  cannot  be  other 
than  the  one  described  by  us,  and  used  by 
almost  all  those  who  make  stereographs  on 
glass.* 

"Second   method.      The    second   method 

*  The  preparation  of  albumenized  plates  is  a 
delicate  and  long  operation  ;  the  want  of  practice 
may  occasion  many  failures.  We  advise  all 
photographers,  unfamiliar  with  these  manipula- 
tions, to  buy  plates  already  prepared.  It  will 
suffice  to  sensitize  them  before  use  in  the  aceto- 
nitrate  of  silver  bath  mentioned  above. 


0.75  gramme  (12  grains). 


consists  in  operating  on  the  collodio-chloride 
of  silver,  as  is  described  further  on. 

"Prepare  separately  the  following  solu- 
tions: 

A. 

Sulphurio  Ether,      .     200  c.c.  (6|fl.  oz.). 

Alcohol.  .         .         .100  c.c.  (3J  fl.  oz.). 

Gun-Cotton,      .         .         5  grammes  (77  grains). 

"After   resting   a   few   days  decant  the 

clear  portion. 

B. 

Alcohol,    .         .         .  25  ce.  (J  fl.  oz.). 

Chloride  of  Magne- 
sium,  . 
"The   chloride  of  magnesium   is   finely 

pulverized  in  a  glass  mortar  to  facilitate  the 

solution,  which  is  to  be  then  filtered. 

C. 
Alcohol,  .         .         .20  c.c.  (f  fl.  oz.). 

Nitrate  of  Silver,      .       4  grammes,  (61 J  grains.) 
Distilled  Water,       .     10  c.c.  (^  fl.  oz.). 

"  The  nitrate  of  silver  is  pulverized,  then 
dissolved  in  the  distilled  water  ;  add  the 
alcohol  and  filter. 

r>. 

Alcohol,   .         .         .18  c.c.  (f  fl.  oz.). 

Citric  Acid,       .         .     0.50  gramme  (7f  grains). 
Boiling  Water,  .     2J  c.c.  (f  fl.   dr.). 

"Dissolve  the  citric  acid  in  the  boiling 
water,  add  the  alcohol,  and  filter. 

"  To  prepare  the  collodion  pour  the  so- 
lution B  into  the  solution  A ;  agitate 
strongly,  then  add  the  solution  C.  Cork 
the  bottle  and  shake  for  a  few  minutes; 
then  add  the  solution  of  citric  acid  D.  Agi- 
tate again,  and  allow  to  rest  for  eight  or 
ten  days.  This  collodion,  thus  prepared, 
improves  with  age ;  but  it  must  be  kept 
away  from  the  light,  in  a  yellow  glass- 
bottle. 

"Now  prepare  a  solution  of  albumen  in 
three  times  its  volume  of  distilled  water,, 
and  filter  through  a  fine  sponge. 

"  The  plates,  well  cleaned,  are  coated 
with  albumen,  which  makes  certain  their 
absolute  cleanness.  When  entirely  dry,, 
flow  the  collodio-chloride  very  slowly,  on 
the  albumenized  side,  so  as  to  obtain  as 
thick  a  coating  as  possible.  Allow  them  to 
dry  spontaneously,  where  there  is  no  light 
or  dust ;  then  place  them  in  grooved  boxes 
perfectly  clean. 


294 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


11  Thus  prepared  the  plates  may  be  pre- 
served for  several  months,  if  kept  in  com- 
plete obscurity. 

"Before  exposing  the  plate  under  the 
negative  it  should  be  treated  with  the  va- 
pors of  ammonia  so  as  to  avoid  solarization. 
Use  for  that  purpose  a  glass  box,  the  grooves 
of  which  are  placed  horizontally.  Place  at 
the  bottom  a  small  capsule  containing  15  or 
20  grammes  (231  or  308  grains)  of  pulver- 
ized carbonate  of  ammonia ;  the  plate  is 
slipped  into  one  of  the  grooves,  at  8  or  10 
centimetres  (3  to  4  inches)  above  it,  and 
exposed  for  four  or  five  minutes  to  these 
vapors,  then  left  to  the  air  for  ten  or  fifteen 
minutes  more,  protected  from  the  light.  It 
is  now  dried  with  care  over  an  alcohol 
lamp,  and  then  placed  in  the  pressure-frame 
in  contact  with  the  negative  to  be  copied. 
(Jover  with  a  sheet  of  black  paper,  close  the 
frame,  and  expose  to  full  light. 

"  The  print  should  be  very  strong,  for  it 
will  lose  a  great  deal  in  the  toning  and 
fixing  baths.  The  time  of  exposure  is  rather 
longer  than  for  albumenized  paper  ;  but  it 
is  easy  to  follow  the  progress  of  the  printing 
without  being  obliged  to  separate  the  two 
plates,  since  the  transparency  of  the  glass 
allows  the  image  to  be  seen  from  the  back, 
by  raising  the  paper  cushion  which  is  under 
the  hinged  planchet  of  the  frame. 

"The  image,  printed  to  the  proper 
strength,  is  washed  in  ordinary  water  and 
placed  in  a  flat  dish  containing  a  toning- 
bath,  as  follows: 

A. 
Distilled  Water,         .    1  litre  (1^  quart). 

P       y  >  40  grammes  (617 grains). 

Ammonium,  ) 


Hyposulphite  of  So-  ) 
ilium,   .         .  ) 


(46  grains) 


Distilled  Water,  .         .      1  litre         (1^  quart). 
Chloride  of  Gold,  neutral,  1  gramme  (15 J  grains). 

"Before  making  use  of  them,  mix  the 
two  solutions  in  equal  portions,  and  in  suffi- 
cient quantity  to  cover  the  plate  which  is 
placed  at  the  bottom  of  the  dish. 

"To  obtain  strong  negatives  the  toning 
should  incline  to  red  rather  than  to  violet; 
this  is  easily  obtained  by  using  a  little  more 
of  the  solution  A  than  of  the  solution  B  ; 
besides,  the  tone  of  the  print  may  be  varied 


at  will,  by  giving  more  or  less  time  to  the 
action  of  the  toning-bath,  which  is  very  im- 
portant for  this  kind  of  work  ;  for  we  know 
that  light  passing  more  easily  through  the 
violet  positive  than  through  the  one  with  a 
brown  tint,  the  large  negative,  which  re- 
sults from  a  sepia  red  transparency,  will  be 
stronger  than  one  obtained  from  a  violet 
positive.  Consequently,  by  this  means,  we 
may  obtain  a  very  soft  large  negative  from 
a  small  hard  positive,  and  vice  versa. 

"When  the  print  has  obtained  the  de- 
sired tone,  fix  by  plunging  it,  for  five  or 
six  minutes,  into  a  dish  containing  a  solu- 
tion of  hyposulphite  of  soda  at  8  per  cent. 

"  The  positives  obtained  by  this  process 
are  of  admirable  delicacy  and  transparency, 
consequently  the  large  cliches  produced  by 
them  have  all  the  qualities  of  the  small 
negatives  used  in  their  reproduction.  On 
account  of  the  facility  with  which  it  may 
be  worked  we  prefer  it  to  the  albumen  pro- 
cess, whose  manipulation  is  much  more 
delicate,  and  whose  results  less  certain  on 
account  of  the  time  of  posing,  which  can 
only  be  estimated.  Nevertheless,  in  the 
dark  days  of  winter,  the  albumen  process 
being  more  rapid,  we  can  obtain  by  it  very 
good  positives  when  the  collodio-chloride 
process  is  often  incapable  of  giving  us  a 
strong  image." 

Mr.  Liebert  has  introduced,  quite  re- 
cently, two  modifications  in  his  method, 
which  had  provoked  some  criticisms  of  de- 
tail in  the  English  press,  and  especially 
from  Mr.  Sutton.  Here  are  these  modifica- 
tions : 

"  The  first  consists  of  the  substitution  of 
the  intermediate  transparent  plate  by  a 
ground-glass,  very  delicately  softened ;  by 
this  means  I  do  away  entirely  with  the  work 
of  retouching,  and  the  simple  interposition 
of  this  ground-glass,  whose  distance  in  front 
of  the  sensitized  glass  varies  from  2  to  2J 
millimetres  (y^th  of  an  inch),  is  sufficient  to 
give  great  softness  to  the  cliche.  The  sharp- 
ness is  somewhat  diminished,  but  the  general 
ensemble  appearance  of  the  portrait  is  very 
harmonious  and  very  agreeable  to  the  eye. 

"  Finally,  the  last  improvement  simpli- 
fies still  further  the  operations,  since  I  com- 
pletely do  away  with  the  intermediate  plate. 

"  The  whole  question  may  be  resumed  in 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


295 


the  obtaining  of  a  positive  by  transparency, 
possessing  the  indispensable  qualities  to  pro- 
duce a  large  negative  having  strength  and 
depth  in  the  blacks,  delicacy,  softness,  and 
good  modelling  in  the  whites,  general  har- 
mony, and  perfect  sharpness.  To  obtain 
these,  I  operate  on  opal  glass,  repolished  on 
one  side  and  softened  on  the  other,  and 
coated  with  white  gelatin  containing  a  small 
quantity  of  sulphide  of  strontium. 

"  I  use  the  collodio-chloride  of  silver 
specified  in  the  second  process  of  my  treatise 
(see  above).  The  image  should  be  very 
strongly  printed,  then  toned  and  fixed,  as 
previously  indicated. 

"  A  positive,  thus  obtained,  produces,  I 
repeat  it,  cliches  of  great  softness  in  the 
whites  and  of  excellent  value  in  the  blacks, 
on  account  of  the  sifting  of  the  light  through 
the  opaline  coating." 

I  trust  that  these  details  will  be  useful  to 
makers  of  lantern  slides 

Tome  one  of  the  most  interesting  places 
in  Paris  is  the  establishment  of  Messrs.  J. 
Levy  &  Co.,  who  make  nothing  but  pho- 
tographic transparencies  on  glass  for  the 
stereoscope,  magic  lantern,  and  for  win- 
dows, etc.  Their  predecessors,  Messrs. 
Ferrier  &  Soulier,  discovered  a  process, 
which  has  always  been  kept  secret,  of  pro- 
ducing a  transparency  that  in  detail,  deli- 
cacy, and  color  surpassed  all  competition,  so 
that  a  couple  of  dozen  medals  were  awarded 
them  in  a  few  years.  And  deservedly  too, 
for  their  pictures  were  superb.  They  im- 
parted their  secret  to  their  successors,  and  I 
find  them  here  producing  the  same  ex- 
quisite results.  Their  establishment  is  a 
busy  one,  and  the  labor  is  so  systematically 
divided  that  there  is  no  clash,  no  bad  re- 
sults— all  is  harmony  and  perfection  of  re- 
sult. As  I  went  from  department  to  depart- 
ment, I  could  not  help  but  be  charmed  at 
the  extreme  care,  and  cleanliness,  and  nicety 
of  manipulation  practiced  by  each  em- 
ploye. You  know  that  a  small  speck  on  a 
lantern  slide  will  prove  a  very  large  spot 
when  enlarged  upon  the  screen,  so  that  here 
all  precautions  must  be  taken  to  preserve 
the  film  as  clean  and  clear  as  possible  until 
it  is  sealed  up  for  the  shelves  of  the  dealer. 
What  splendid  paper  printers  these  men 
would  make,  thought  I,  as  I  watched  them. 


And  how  much  better  our  paper  prints 
would  be  if  our  printers  were  all  as  careful 
as  these  men  are.  The  process  practiced 
here  is  the  albumen  process,  and  although  I 
did  not  obtain  the  secret,  I  saw  that  much, 
and  as  it  is  the  season  for  making  lantern 
slides,  I  will  give  you  another  process  which 
I  think  will  be  of  service.  It  is  one  practiced 
by  Mons.  J.  H.  Martyn,  of  St.  Bees, 
whose  elegant  transparencies  are  suited  for 
any  purpose  for  which  a  transparency 
might  be  required.  The  transparencies 
produced  by  the  albumen  process  are  printed 
out,  not  developed,  on  a  film  of  albuminate 
of  silver,  without  the  presence  of  any  haloid 
salts,  and  fixed  in  the  usual  way. 

Here  are  the  details  in  the  brief  and 
simple  terms  of  Mr.  Martyn.     Take 

Albumen,       .  .         .     1  ounce. 

Water,  .         .         .         .         .1  drachm. 

Beat  up  well,  allow  to  settle,  and  filter  the 
mixture.  Coat  a  well-cleaned  piece  of 
patent  plate-glass,  and  allow  to  dry  spon- 
taneously. Then  sensitize  in  a  fifty-grain 
ammonio-nitrate  of  silver  bath,  to  which 
a  little  alcohol  has  been  added.  Allow  the 
plate  to  dry  spontaneously,  and  print  deep. 
A  very  fine  result  may  be  produced  without 
the  ammonio-nitrate  bath,  but  the  silver 
bath  must,  in  that  case,  be  slightly  alkaline. 
A  fifty-grain  silver  bath,  with  two  or  three 
drops  of  ammonia  to  each  ounce,  will  give  a 
fine  transparency,  but  the  film  will  not  be 
quite  so  sensitive  as  when  the  ammonio- 
nitrate  bath  is  used. 

The  hyposulphite  bath,  for  fixing,  should 
be  somewhat  weak. 

Until  I  visited  this  model  and  interesting 
establishment  I  never  had  any  conception 
of  the  quantity  of  lantern  slides  that  are 
sold.  I  found  them  going  to  all  parts  of  the 
known  world  from  here,  and  quite  as  many 
going  to  India  and  other  heathen  lands,  as 
go  to  the  United  States.  I  became  con- 
vinced that  the  magic  lantern  was  not 
doing  half  its  mission  in  our  country  as  an 
educational  and  entertaining  power,  and  I 
resolved  to  correct  it  if  I  could.  Everybody 
surely  knows  what  a  magic  lantern  is,  yet 
everybody  does  not  know  what  pleasure 
and  instruction  it  can  give,  but  everybody 
must.  In  Mr.  Levy's  collection  there  are 
many  thousands  of  subjects,  and  many  hun- 


296 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


dreds  more  of  American  subjects  are  being 
added  this  season.  No  one  in  the  world 
attempts  to  compete  with  him  in  quality, 
and  it  is  safe  to  say,  he  makes  two-thirds  of 
the  photographic  lantern  slides  that  are 
made.  His  transparencies  for  the  stereo- 
scope are  also  the  most  exquisite  things 
photography  has  ever  produced.  They 
have-gone  out  of  date  in  this  country,  and 
the  magic  lantern  will  still  further  displace 
them,  but  there  will  always  be  some  sale  for 
them.  Every  day,  for  ten  days  or  more,  I 
was  in  this  interesting  establishment,  now 
selecting  slides  to  illustrate  my  whole  tour 
— and  I  could  do  it  here — and  now  into  the 
various  departments  witnessing  the  produc- 
tion of  the  splendid  pictures  I  have  de- 
scribed. Of  such  pleasant  work  I  never 
tired, — and  who  could  tire  when  in  addition 
to  all  this  the  kindly  attentions  of  Mons. 
and  Madame  Levy  were  added  to  the  hap- 
piness of  the  occasion. 

Did  I  go  to  see  Mons.  Adam  Salomon  ? 
Ah  yes!  What  would  a  visit  to  Paris  be 
without  a  day  with  him?  As  his  studio 
and  his  method  of  working  have  already 
been  described  herein,  and  likewise  an  ex- 
ample of  his  work  published,  I  will  not  go 
into  details  concerning  them.  I  found  all 
in  the  old  master  that  I"  had  expected  to 
find.  A  little  older  and  grayer  than  I  had 
anticipated,  but  of  that  J  dare  not  com- 
plain. He  was  busy  with  a  sitter  when  I 
called,  and  pending  his  appearance  I  had 
much  to  entertain  me  with  the  exquisite 
examples  of  photography  in  his  reception- 
room,  and  with  the  works  of  his  mind  and 
hands,  as  a  sculptor,  for  it  must  be  remem- 
bered that  M.  Salomon  is  a  sculptor  and 
not  a  photographer  by  first  profession. 
Among  his  photographic  specimens  I  found 
several  that  were  familiar  to  me,  the  same 
that  made  us  all  sick  at  heart  a  few  years 
ago,  and  many  new  ones.  I  found  that  the 
great  master  had  not  improved  much.  Ah 
me  I  He  could  not.  His  results  were  so  far 
ahead  that  he  could  afford  to  stand  still  a 
few  years.  What  he  will  do  when  we  catch 
up  to  him  I  know  not.  But  that  there  are 
many  at  home  and  abroad  close  upon  him, 
even  he  will  not  deny.  He  loves  photog- 
raphy and  desires  its  progress.  Yet,  with 
all  his  imitators,  there  is  a   stamp,  an  im- 


press upon  his  work  so  distinctively  M. 
Salomon  himself,  that  no  one  can  reach  it; 
a  quality  unrivalled,  unequalled  by  any- 
thing else.  I  have  for  years  worshipped  at 
his  shrine,  and  now  I  am  standing  face  to 
face  with  him,  his  band  in  mine.  "  I  need 
no  introduction  to  you,  Monsieur  Wilson," 
he  said;  "I  have  your  photograph  and 
would  know  your  face.  Besides,  here  upon 
my  table  are  always  kept  several  copies  of 
the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  in  which 
you  have  spoken  many  kind  words  for  me 
and  made  my  fame  in  America."  With 
such  a  greeting  I  soon  felt  at  home,  and  had 
a  most  enjoyable  visit.  During  the  day  I 
was  invited  to  sit  for  a  picture.  I  assured 
Monsieur  Salomon  that  I  would  destroy  his 
instrument.  He  took  the  risk.  His  sky- 
light is  low,  and  in  the  shape  of  an  L,  and 
he  moves  his  backgrounds  and  camera  all 
about  it  to  suit  the  light  and  the  model. 
He  is  most  exact  and  careful  in  the  pose 
and  arrangement  of  the  figure,  and  in  the 
composition  of  the  lines,  internal  as  well  as 
external.  Considerable  time  was  expended 
upon  my  long,  lank,  awkward  figure,  before 
much  of  gracefulness  would  present  itself. 
Seeming  to  be  satisfied,  and  giving  me  no 
head-rest,  he  proceeded  to  place  his  plate  in 
the  camera,  when  down  came  the  whole 
thing  upon  the  floor  with  a  crash,  the 
camera-stand  having  given  way.  The 
laughter  over,  another  stand  was  brought 
in,  and  the  negative  and  several  duplicates 
made.  M.  Salomon  uses  for  his  work  the 
Hermagis  Lens,  made  in  Paris,  about  which 
more  will  be  said  when  we  visit  the  factory 
of  M.  Hermagis.  I  saw  nothing  peculiar 
in  the  method  of  working  practiced  by  M. 
Salomon.  His  success  is  due,  1,  to  M.  Salo- 
mon himself,  and  2,  to  the  practice,  rigidly, 
of  what  has  been  published  over  and  over. 
M.  Salomon's  negatives  are  a  myster}\ 
They  are  thin  and  flat,  and  very  often  dirty, 
but  from  them  he  produces  the  richest  tones 
that  ever  were  produced,  and  I  conclude 
that  only  with  him  as  an  ingredient  in  all 
the  formulae  can  they  be  produced. 

I  agree  with  my  friend  Luckhardt,  of 
Vienna,  that  M.  Adam  Salomon  still  stands 
at  the  head  of  his  profession  in  Paris.  His 
portraits  are  still  unapproached  in  the  way 
6f  artistic  lighting  and  posing.     The  very 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


297 


difficult  art  of  placing  a  sitter's  hands,  for 
instance,  has  in  the  Salomon  portraits  been 
so  thoroughly  mastered,  done  in  such  orig- 
inal and  artistic  ways,  that  it  is  a  pleasure 
to  see  them.  They  stand  out  from  the  pic- 
ture in  distinct  individuality,  and  form  a 
marked  object  of  study.  Some  of  his  prints 
are  in  carbon,  and  the  backgrounds  were 
shaded  away,  so  that  the  light  portions 
should  be  obliterated  by  an  operation  sub- 
sequent to  the  printing.  When  the  image 
has  been  carefully  covered,  the  background 
may  be  worked  upon  with  a  fine,  dry,  yel- 
low sand  to  any  extent  that  may  be  advis- 
able, and  which  shades  it  softly  away  with- 
out any  hard  lines. 

The  print- washing  apparatus  of  M. 
Adam  Salomon  is  also  a  noteworthy  thing. 
It  consists  of  a  deep  box,  the  upper  part  of 
which  is  filled  with  polygonal  rods  hollowed 
at  the  tops.  Between  two  of  these  a  picture 
is  hung,  and  the  water  moving  along  the 
grooves  flows  over  the  pictures  back  and 
front,  draining  off  at  the  bottom.  By  this 
means  each  is  treated  individually,  and  in  a 
thorough  manner. 

Just  previous  to  my  visit,  M.  Salomon 
introduced  a  new  style  of  portrait  of  ladies 
taken  in  white  dresses  with  an  absolutely 
white  background,  so  that  the  face  and 
dress  appear  darker  than  the  ground,  the 
folds  and  laces  standing  forth  sharply.  They 
are  just  the  reverse  of  those  in  vogue  in  Vi- 
enna, where  a  very  dark  background  is  used 
to  give  the  picture  relief,  and  I  do  not  fancy 
them  as  much  as  his  dark  backgrounds. 

I  also  visited  the  studio,  several  times,  of 
Mr.  Ch.  Reutlinger,  but  his  studio  has  since 
been  so  faithfully  described  by  our  good 
friend,  Mr.  Lacan,  that  I  will  here  only 
place  on  record  my  testimony  as  to  the  very 
kind  reception  I  met  by  Mr.  Keutlinger  and 
his  staff.  His  work  is  also  peculiar  to  him- 
self, and  very  excellent.  He  is  working  in 
a  place  much  too  cramped  for  his  busin'ess, 
and  could  easily  afford  to  raise  his  price  and 
make  less  negatives.  Soon,  I  hope,  our 
magazine  will  present  another  specimen 
from  his  establishment. 

As  I  went  about,  I  picked  up  several 
little  dodges,  and  I  will  add  one  or  two  here 
lest  I  forget  them. 

The  first  is  an  idea  for  a  support  for  the 


plate  during  development.  The  drawings 
give  a  lateral  and  a  vertical  view  of  the  ar- 
ticle, and  a  description  is  unnecessary,  ex- 


cept to  say  that  it  is  made  of  wood,  a  slot 
being  cut  in  the  handle  for  the  slide,  which 
is  fastened  by  a  screw  below,  and  the  slide 
and  the  end  cross-piece  being  provided  with 
pins,  as  shown. 


The  glace  or  souvenir  pictures  were  being 
introduced  as  a  new  thing,  and  some  of 
them  were  very  beautiful,  Mr.  Keutlin- 
ger's  were  especially  fine,  having  a  very 
pretty  stippled  background.  It  is  printed 
light  or  dark,  and  enhances  the  value  of 
the  enamelled  cameo  to  a  wonderful  degree. 
There  is  no  secret  in  the  preparation  of 
these  brilliant  pictures  ;  simply  one  operator 
was  kept  solely  for  the  work,  and  he,  natu- 
rally enough,  had  become  very  skilled  in 
their  preparation  after  a  time. 

There  are  two  printings.  First  of  all  the 
portrait  is  printed  in  an  oval,  or  oblong,  as 
the  case  may  be,  and  then  the  print  is  cov- 
ered up  and  the  stippled  ground  produced. 
I  was  not  informed  what  kind  of  medium 
is  employed  as  a  negative  for  printing  in  the 
groundwork,  but  doubtless  a  sheet  of  thin 
paper,  stippled  by  hand,  and  then  waxed  to 
render  it  transparent,  would  answer  the 
purpose  very  well.  A  medium  thus  pro- 
duced would,  of  course,  serve  over  and  over 
again.  The  ground  is  printed  in,  either 
dark  or  light,  as  will  best  match  the  por- 
trait, and  then  the  enamelling  of  the  print 
is  proceeded  with.  A  sheet  of  glass,  after 
being  thoroughly  well  cleaned,  is  coated 
with  collodion  and  allowed  to  set.  A  warm 
solution  of  gelatin  is  then  prepared,  and 
into  this  the  print  is  immersed  bodily,  care 


298 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


being  taken,  of  course,  to  prevent  the  for- 
mation of  air-bubbles.  The  picture  is  laid 
face  downwards  upon  the  collodionized 
plate,  and  pressed  firmly  with  the  fingers, 
air-bubbles  still  being  looked  after.  The 
mount  itself  may  then  be  attached  to  the 
picture  with  gelatin,  and  when  the  whole 
is  dry  it  is  removed  from  the  glass.  The 
mounted  portrait  is  then  moistened  and 
pressed  up,  to  give  it  the  effect  of  a  cameo, 
and  the  operation  is  finished.  There  is  not 
much  novelty  in  the  business,  but  the  effect, 
when  the  operations  are  carefully  carried 
out,  is  exceedingly  good,  and  such  pictures 
are  great  favorites  with  M.  Reutlinger's 
customers. 

Paris  seems  to  be  alive  with  photogra- 
phers, and  there  are  all  classes  and  grades 
of  them.  But  I  must  not  tell  you  all  about 
it  now,  or  there  will  be  nothing  for  next 
month. 


THE  GRAPHITE  PROCESS. 

From  one  of  our  subscribers  in  St.  Peters- 
burg, Russia,  we  have  received  the  follow- 
ing instructive  letter  on  the  above  process, 
which  we  take  pleasure  in  laying  before  our 
readers,  believing  it  may  help  those  who 
are  working  in  this  direction. 

The  writer's  name  we  withhold  by  his 

request. 

"St.  Petersburg,  July  11th,  1874. 

"  Sir  :  After  having  received  so  much 
benefit  from  your  esteemed  journal,  I  feel 
duty  bound,  as  it  were,  to  send  my  mite  for 
the  benefit  of  others.  I  do  not  wish  my 
name  to  be  in  print,  if  you  should  deem 
the  following  fit  for  the  Philadelphia  Pho- 
tographer. 

A    Few    Practical    Hints   on    Repro- 
ducing Negatives  by  the  Dusting 
Process. 

' '  The  Preparation  of  the  Plate  for  the  Re- 
ception of  the  Sensitized  Coating. — If  the 
plates  are  not  clean  it  will  be  found  difficult 
to  get  the  solution  to  flow  over  them  ; 
breathing  upon  them  only  partly  remedies 
this  evil,  but  if  they  are  placed  for  a  few 
hours  in  a  weak  solution  of  nitric  acid, 
afterwards  rinsed  under  the  tap,  and  pol- 
ished with  ordinary  whiting,  the  solution 
will  cover  them  as  easily  as  collodion-coat- 


ing the  plate.  This  is  done  in  the  same 
way  as  for  collodion,  with  the  following 
solution  : 


Dextrin, 
Gum  Solution, 
Grape-sugar, 
Glycerin, 
Water, 


2  parts. 
6  parts. 
5  parts. 

3  parts. 
80  parts. 


"  Add  to  this  a  warm  solution  of 
Bichromate  of  Potash,  .       2  parts. 


Water, 


20  parts. 


"  The  reason  for  employing  this  mixture 
is,  that  it  does  not  require  that  the  quantities 
of  glycerin  and  sugar  be  altered  excepting 
when  a  great  change  takes  place  in  the 
weather,  the  necessity  of  which  will  be  seen 
at  a  glance  as  soon  as  one  plate  is  devel- 
oped ;  in  case  of  an  excess  of  hygroscopic 
ingredients,  the  plate  will  fog ;  if  on  the 
contrary,  it  will  appear  as  if  overexposed, 
and  the  black-lead  will  not  adhere  to  the 
film;  but  should  the  glycerin  be  only  a 
little  in  excess,  the  high-lights  or  opaque 
parts  on  the  negative  will  be  full  of  minute 
transparent  spots.  After  coating,  allow 
the  excess  to  run  off  into  a  bottle,  with  a 
filter  in  it,  and  dry  it  in  a  drying-box,  over 
a  Bunsen  burner,  or  a  spirit-lamp  will  do 
if  the  others  are  not  to  be  had.  "When  the 
box  is  used,  do  not  leave  the  plates  in  too 
long  or  they  will  be  too  dry.  When  the 
desiccation  is  complete,  lay  the  plate  care- 
fully on  the  negative  (which  should  also  be 
slightly  warmed),  cover  with  a  sheet  of 
dark-red  blotting-paper,  and  expose  from 
ten  minutes  to  half  an  hour,  but  not  in  the 
sun  unless  the  negative  is  from  an  engrav- 
ing, and  then  a  beautiful  dense  negative 
can  be  obtained  by  exposing  for  three  min- 
utes in  full  sunlight,  which  will  give  a 
very  fine  transparent  negative.  The  plate 
must  now  be  developed  as  follows: 

"  Have  a  box,  made  as  in  the  accompany- 
ing design,  placed  on  a  bench,  in  front  of 
the  yellow  glazed  window  in  the  dark- 
room; open  the  lid,  lay  the  plate  (which 
must  be  about  the  same  temperature  as  the 
room  where  the  development  is  performed) 
in  the  porcelain  dish,  dust  with  the  best 
levigated  black-lead  (which  should  be  kept 
in  a  wide-mouthed  bottle,  with  a  double 
thickness  of  muslin  stretched  tightly  over 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


299 


it),  by  striking  with  the  palm  of  the  hand 
on  the  bottom  of  the  bottle;  shut  down  the 
lid,  thrust  the  hands  into  the  two  holes,  and 
with  a  soft  camel's-hair  brush,  brush  the 
surface  evenly  (not  hard),  by  giving  the 
Fig.  1. 


Side  view. 
brush  a  circular  motion  ;  as  soon  as  the 
negative  has  assumed  the  proper  density, 
carefully  dust  ofl'  the  superfluous  plumbago, 
take  it  out  and  pour  a  two  per  cent,  normal 
collodion  containing  a  few  drops  of  castor 
oil  upon  it,  then  lay  it  in  a  horizontal 
position  to  dry;  afterwards  place  in  a  dish 
of  warm  water,  when  the  film  will  leave 
the  glass,  and  must  be  caught  upon  the 
other  side  should  a  noninverted  negative 
be  required,  but  if  a  reversed  one  is  desired, 
then  it  is  only  necessary  that  the  bichro- 
mate be  washed  out  of  the  film  with  cold 
water ;  this  being  done,  a  weak  stream  of 
water  must  now  be  brought  to  play  upon 
it,  so  as  to  remove  any  air-bubbles  that  may 
be  between  the  film  and  glass,  then  pour 
gum-water  over  it,  and  when  dry,  back  it. 

"  Remarks. — If  dextrin  is  used  alone,  it 
is  very  difficult  to  filter  properly,  as  it  gives 
small  lumps  in  the  film  which  cause  black 
spots  in  the  negative ;  it  is  also  liable  to 
smear  when  breathed  upon,  whereas  gum 
alone  gives  good  results  even  in  under- 
exposed plates,  but  then  it  has  this  disad- 
vantage: after  it  is  put  into  water  it  refuses 
to  detach  itself  from  the  glass,  so  that  it  can 
only  be  used  for  reversed  negatives.  That 
is  the  reason  why  the  above  solution  will  be 
found  best,  as  in  case  parts  of  the  original 
are  too  weak,  they  can  be  made  deeper  by 
breathing  upon  them  slightly,  and  dusting 
a  little  more  black-lead  over  them. 

"  If  the  plates  are  developed  in  a  damp 
cellar,  the  glycerin  will  not  be  found  neces- 
sary. The  above  process  is  very  useful 
indeed,  as  the  so-called  mezzotint  process  can 
be  done  by  it  from  negatives  already  made, 
thus : 


"Make  two  negatives  as  above,  but 
instead  of  reversing  the  film  on  the  same 
glass,  make  it  on  a  plate  coated  with 
Hance's  Substitute,  or  a  sheet  of  ground- 
glass,  catching  the  film  on  the  plain  side  ; 
when  dry,  fasten  the  two  together,  with  the 
ground-glass  in  the  middle,  and  print  in 
the  ordinary  way. 

"This  process  will  also  be  found  invalu- 
able for  enlargement  in  the  solar  camera. 
A  plate  coated,  dried,  and  exposed  in  the 
camera  from  thirty  seconds  to  two  minutes 
after  development  with  black-lead  will  be 
found  to  give  negatives  from  which  delicate 
prints  may  be  obtained  upon  albumen 
paper.  If  an  enlarged  positive  is  necessary 
to  make  transparent  slides  from  them, 
chloride  of  iron  and  tartaric  acid  must  be 
used  for  sensitizing  with  instead  of  the 
bichromate  of  potash.* 

"As  all  the  subscribers  to  your  journal 
may  not  have  had  the  opportunity  to  see 
the  formulae  of  others,  I  append  the  follow- 
ing, by  Mr.  Jacoby,  in  the  Photog?-aphisches 
Correspondenz  : 

Gum  in  powder,        .         .  1    gramme. 

Sugar,       .  ...  2    grammes. 

Solution  of  Bichromate  of 

Potash,  1  to  10,  .  .  7£  c.  centigrammes. 
Fifty  per  cent,  solution  of 

Honey,  .         .         .  H  grammes. 

Water,      ....  40 

"By  W.  B.  Woodbury,  in  the  Photo- 
graphic News  : 

Gum  (solution  or  powder),     3.75  grammes. 
Grape-sugar,      .         .         .3  " 

Glycerin,    .         .         .         .10  " 

Bichromate  of  Potash,        .     1.875       " 
Water 60 


Front  view. 
"  The  above  box  will  be  found  useful  for 

#  For  full  particulars  of  the  sensitive  prop- 
erties of  these  salts  combined,  see  Professor 
Vogel's  Handbook  of  Photography  (new  edi- 
tion), which  is  already  published  in  German, 
and  a  translation  of  which  will  no  doubt  shortly 
appear  in  America.     [It  will. — Ed.  P.  P.] 


300 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


preventing  the  black-lead  from  entering 
the  mouth  while  developing;  it  is  made  of 
sheet-iron  or  tin,  the  back  and  lid  to  have 
glass  fitted  in  them,  and  inside  lay  a  porce- 
lain dish  that  will  just  fit  the  bottom,  or  a 
tray  made  of  enamelled  cardboard,  with 
the  edges  turned  up  about  1J  inches  all 
round;  the  front-piece  must  have  two  holes 
cut  in  it  large  enough  to  admit  the  arms. 
If  necessary,  a  tray  of  ice  can  be  put  in- 
side, so  as  to  facilitate  the  developing,  if 
the  atmosphere  is  too  dry. 

"  P.  S. — If  old  plates  are  used,  I  would 
advise  that  they  be  smeared  with  oxgall 
previous  to  coating  with  the  solution,  as  the 
films  will  leave  the  glass  more  readily  after 
they  are  placed  in  the  water;  for  new  plates 
this  is  not  necessary. 

"I  will  answer  any  other  questions,  if 
required,  through  the  Philadelphia  Photog- 
rapher.— H." 


Filterings  from  the  Fraternity. 

Under  this  head  we  propose  to  give 
from  month  to  month,  as  long  as  the  mat- 
ter may  prove  interesting,  such  items  of 
formulas  and  processes  as  our  correspondents 
may  favor  us  with — some  of  the  best  and 
most  practical  information  that  can  be  col- 
lected from  prominent  workers  throughout 
the  country,  especially  those  who  were  at 
the  Chicago  Convention,  the  methods  of 
their  everyday  work,  being,  as  it  were,  the 
filterings  from  their  thoughts,  which  a 
large  correspondence  with  them  brings  us. 

We  are  sure  the  material  collected  here 
will  be  found  reliable  and  beneficial  to  all 
who  study  and  practice  it. 

As  we  trust  all  may  be  benefited  we  in- 
vite all  to  contribute  anything  new  or 
novel,  or  the  details  of  their  regular  methods 
of  working,  their  whole  formulas  or  any 
part  thereof.  All  will  be  interesting,  and 
as  no  two  men  pursuing  a  certain  subject 
can  hardly  come  together  without  learning 
something  from  each  other,  so  we  believe 
each  may  find  something  here  that  will  be 
new  and  useful,  something  which,  when 
added  to  his  own  present  stock  of  knowl- 
edge, will  improve  his  work  or  his  way  of 
doing  it. 


In  order  to  set  the  ball  in  motion,  we 
give  below  notes  from  letters  received  from 
a  few  of  our  leading  photographers,  to  whom 
we  return  our  thanks.  Many  more  are  in 
hand. 

What  follows  first,  we  doubt  not,  will 
command  for  the  author  the  hearty  thanks 
of  many  a  hard  worker  who  has  perspired 
over  that  unreliable  agent  known  as  collo- 
dio-chloride  or 

Collodion  for  Porcelain  Pictures, 
by  g.  cramer, 

Cramer,  Gross  &  Co.,  St.  Louis. 

"  The  beautiful  softness  and  richness  of  a 
good  porcelain  picture,  which  cannot  be 
obtained  in  any  other  print,  is  so  charming 
and  so  much  admired  by  the  public,  that  it 
is  only  surprising  that  porcelain  pictures 
are  not  made  more  frequently. 

"The  public  taste  is  in  favor  of  them,  so 
it  seems  to  be  on  the  photographer's  side  to 
introduce  a  greater  demand  for  them  than 
heretofore. 

"The  reason  why  they  are  not  made  more 
frequently  seems  to  be  in  the  trouble  which 
most  operators  have  experienced  in  the  pro- 
duction of  good,  sharp,  and  brilliant  prints 
on  porcelain.  They  are  less  liable  to  fade 
than  prints  on  albumen  paper,  and  if  glass 
of  ordinary  good  quality  is  used,  both  for 
negative  and  print,  they  can  be  obtained 
sharp  and  distinct.  But  the  principal  reason 
for  failure  seems  to  lay  in  the  instability 
of  the  chlor-silver  collodion,  which  may 
work  very  fine  when  newly  made,  but  after 
a  short  time  will  generally  work  flat  and 
unsatisfactorily,  because  the  chloride  of 
silver  is  precipitated  and  falls  to  the  bottom 
of  the  bottle  instead  of  being  kept  in  solu- 
tion as  it  should  be.  As  soon  as  the  silver 
is  precipitated  the  collodion  is  worthless  for 
printing,  and  a  new  lot  has  to  be  made, 
causing  considerable  trouble  and  annoy- 
ance, too  much  perhaps  for  making  only 
one  picture  at  a  time. 

"It  has  been  my  aim  to  overcome  this 
trouble,  and  I  have  succeeded  p-rfectly  in 
making  two  different  collodions,  one  con- 
taining the  silver,  and  the  other  the  chlo- 
ride, so  that  at  a  moment's  notice  a  good 
working  collodion  can  be  obtained  by  mix- 
ing equal  quantities  from  both  bottles. 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


301 


"  Here  are  my  formulae,  which  I  have 
used  to  my  best  satisfaction  for  the  last  two 
years. 

Collodion  No.  1. 

"First  dissolve  60  grains  of  negative  gun- 
cotton  in  2  ounces  of  alcohol  and  3  ounces 
of  ether. 

"Take  120  grains  of  nitrate  of  silver, 
powder  it  very  finely,  put  this  in  a  small 
bottle  with  3  ounces  of  alcohol,  and  heat  by 
setting  the  bottle  in  boiling  hot  water  until 
all  the  silver  is  dissolved  in  the  alcohol.  As 
soon  as  this  is  obtained,  pour  the  silver  so- 
lution, while  still  hot,  in  the  collodion,  stir- 
ring up  all  the  time  to  secure  a  perfect  solu- 
tion. 

Collodion  No.  2 

"Thirty-two  grains  of  chloride  of  stron- 
tium, and  24  grains  of  citric  acid,  are  re- 
duced to  a  fine  powder  and  dissolved  in  4 
ounces  of  alcohol  ;  add  4  ounces  of  ether 
and  60  grains  of  negative  gun-cotton. 

"  These  two  collodions  will  keep  for  any 
length  of  time,  and  when  mixed  in  equal 
proportions  will  produce  brilliant  prints. 

"  To  obtain  fine  porcelain  prints  proceed 
as  follows : 

"  1st.  Coat  the  porcelain  plate  with  albu- 
men from  fresh  eggs  and  water,  equal 
quantities. 

"2d.  After  the  plate  has  dried  (without 
heat)  warm  it  and  let  cool  again. 

"  3d.  Coat  with  the  collodion  (mixture 
of  Nos.  1  and  2),  in  a  moderately  dark 
room,  and  dry  the  plate  perfectly  over  a 
lamp. 

"  4th.  For  printing,  lay  the  negative  on 
the  prepared  porcelain,  being  sure  to  have 
it  in  the  right  place;  protect  the  back  of 
the  porcelain  with  yellow  paper,  and  put 
plenty  of  patent  clothes-pins  all  around  the 
edges  to  secure  a  good  contact.  This  is 
better  than  any  porcelain  printing-frame. 

"  5th.  In  printing,  put  out  in  the  light,  at 
the  same  time,  a  silvered  piece  of  albumen 
paper  under  a  negative  of  the  same  inten- 
sity as  that  for.  the  porcelain,  and  as  soon 
as  this  paper  print  is  dark  enough,  the  por- 
celain picture  is  dark  enough  too.  The 
negative  should  never  be  moved  to  inspect 
the  proceeding  of  printing,  which  moving 
is  unnecessary  this  way. 

"  6th.  After  printing,  wash  first  in  plain 


water,  next  in  water  containing  a  very 
little  salt. 

"  7th.  Tone  in  water  8  ounces,  1  drachm 
of  gold  solution  (1  grain  per  ounce  strong), 
made  neutral  by  adding  a  drop  of  sal  soda 
solution. 

"  8th.  After  toning  and  washing,  fix  in 
hyposulphite  of  soda  1  ounce,  and  water  10 
to  12  ounces." 

Mr.  M.  M.  Griswolb,  of  Boston,  gives 
the  following 

New  Method  for  Silvering  Paper. 
"  The  bath  I  use  is  from  30  to  40  grains 
strong,  containing  a  strong  close  of  nitrate 
of  ammonium,  and  is  alkaline  from  the 
same.  The  sheets  are  immersed,  face  up, 
one  at  a  time  until  from  ten  to  twenty  are 
covered  by  the  solution.  The  dish  being 
rocked  back  and  forth  to  loosen  bubbles  and 
make  sure  that  each  sheet  is  thoroughly  wet, 
I  then  turn  the  whole  mass  over,  which 
brings  the  first  ones  immersed  to  the  top, 
face  down.  The  next  operation  is  as  fol- 
lows:  Have  a  sheet  of  double  thick  glass, 
a  little  larger  than  the  paper  (I  am  speak- 
ing of  whole  sheets  of  paper),  which  place 
at  a  proper  inclination  to  drain  the  surplus 
solution  back  into  the  bath.  Float  the 
paper  to  one  side  of  the  bath  to  get  them 
even,  then  take  them  all  out  together  and 
lay  them  face  down  on  the  inclined  sheet  of 
glass,  near  enough  to  the  top  to  be  held  with 


two  wooden  clips,  one  at  each  end  ;  the  drain- 
age is  now  all  back  into  the  bath.  To  hasten 
this  operation  I  use  a  squeezer,  a  strip  of 
rubber  set  into  a  stick  a 
foot  or  more  long,  which 
is  applied  lengthways  at 
the  top  of  the  paper  and 
pressed  forwards  towards 
the  bottom,  forcing  the  solution  out  of  the 
paper  into  the  bath.     If  desired  to  secure 


302 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGE  APHER. 


the  largest  amount  of  silver  absorbed  by 
the  paper,  press  the  solution  from  the  top 
sheet,  then  the  next,  and  so  on,  or  the 
whole  can  be  squeezed  at  once.  "What  I 
claim  for  paper  so  prepared  is  greater  depth 
and  transparency  to  the  picture,  and  per- 
fect uniformity  in  the  paper,  with  facility 
and  equable  toning.  The  paper  prints  clear 
through,  giving  great  body  to  the  darker 
parts.  On  the  score  of  economy  of  silver 
I  think  the  loss  less  than  when  paper  is 
hung  up  to  drain  (on  the  floor)  in  the  usual 
way.  The  saving  of  time  in  silvering  by 
this  method  would  largely  overbalance  the 
waste  of  silver  by  extra  absorption,  if 
there  be  any. 

"  Here  is  another  dodge  I  have  lately 
suggested.  You  know  that  I  have  gone 
back  to  first  principles  and  use  a  flat  dish 
for  negatives.  My  dodge  is  a  funnel  for 
filtering   into   flat   dishes.      I   call    it   the 


'  Hour-Glass  Funnel.'  When  the  cotton 
or  sponge  gets  dirty,  turn  it  over  and  run 
water  through  the  other  way ;  it  saves  both- 
ering with  bottles,  etc." 

Mr.  O.  F.  Weaver,  of  Chicago,  gives 
the  following  receipt  for 

Retouching  Varnish. 
Alcohol,     .         .  .2    pounds. 

Gum  Sandarac,  .         .     4    ounces. 

Gum  Camphor,  .  .      1£  ounce. 

Venice  Turpentine,   .  .      t    ounce. 

"  Warm  the  negative  slightly  and  dry  by 
artificial  heat.  1  use  from  No.  2  H  to  6  H 
pencils,  without  rubbing  up  the  surface. 

"  Will  try  and  offer  something  for  the 
next  issue." 

St.  Louis  Formula. 

Mr.  R.  Benecke,  of  St.  Louis,  one  of 
the  best  and  most  popular  landscape  and 
portrait  photographers  in  the  West,  com- 
municates his  process  as  follows: 


"  My  formulae  are  the  most  simple  ones 
you  can  find. 


Collodion. 

Alcohol,   . 

£  ounce. 

Ether, 

i       " 

Iodide  of  Ammonium, 

2£  grains. 

Iodide  of  Cadmium, 

2i       " 

Bromide  of  Cadmium, 

2J       " 

Gun-cotton, 

5-6 

"  This  collodion  keeps  well,  and  is  good 
for  view  and  portrait  work.  If  it  should 
become  too  pale  by  long  keeping,  which  it 
will  do  when  the  gun-cotton  has  been 
washed  in  diluted  aqua  ammonia,  tint  it 
with  a  solution  of  iodine  in  alcohol. 

Developer. 
Saturated  Sol.  of  Iron,     .       1  ounce. 
Acetic  Acid,     .         .         .1         " 
Water,     .         .         .         .12  ounces. 

"  For  light  drapery  or  children's  pictures, 
use  it  a  little  stronger. 

"My  bath  is  made  in  the  following 
manner  : 

Water,  ....  8  ounces. 
Glycerin  (good  quality),  .  4  ounces. 
Silver,      ....       1  ounce. 

"  Sun  it  for  a  few  days.  Should  there  be 
any  acid  in  the  silver,  put  a  drop  or  two  of 
aqua  ammonia  into  it.  Then  boil  it  for  a 
few  minutes,  and  give  it,  after  cooling  and 
filtering,  a  liberal  dose  of  nitric  acid. 

"  Plates  prepared  in  this  bath  will  allow 
you  to  go  miles  and  come  back  with  a  wet 
plate. 

"  I  silver  my  paper  on  ammonio-nitrate 
of  silver  ;  very  seldom  I  fume  it.  It  is 
made  thus : 


Silver, 
Water, 


1  ounce. 
8  ounces. 


"  Take  five  ounces  of  this,  add  aqua  am- 
monia until  clear  again,  then  add  the  re- 
maining three  ounces.  Take  half  or  a  little 
more  of  this  turbid  solution,  make  it  de- 
cidedly acid  with  nitric  acid,  and  add  the 
balance.  Filter,  and  it  is  ready  for  use. 
When  paper  and  silver  are  in  good  condi- 
tion, any  toning  bath  will  do." 

From  Mr.  C.  A.  Zimmerman,  St.  Paul, 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTO  GEAPHEE, 


303 


Minn.,   we    have   the    following   collodion 
formulae. 

Good  keeping   Landscape  Collodion  for  Cool 
Weather    Use. 
Ether  and  Alcohol,     .         .         .     equal  parts. 
Iodide  of    Cadmium  per  ounce 

of  Collodion,  .  .         .6  grains. 

Bromide  of  Cadmium  per  ounce 

of  Collodion,  .  .         .  .     3  grains. 

Cotton,       .         .     from  5  to  8  grains  per  ounce 
of  Collodion. 

"  This  will  keep  any  length  of  time,  and 
will,  with  proper  handling,  give  fine,  soft, 
and  brilliant  results.  For  this  collodion,  a 
double  solution  of  iron  developer  is  the  best. 

Landscape  Collodion  for  Ordinary  Use. 
Ether  and  Alcohol,         .         .         .     equal  parts. 
Iodide    of  Ammonium    per  ounce 

of  Collodion,      .         .         .         .     2£  grains. 
Iodide   of  Cadmium  per  ounce    of 

Collodion,  .         .         .         .         .     2£       " 
Bromide  of  Cadmium  per  ounce  of 

Collodion,  .         .         .         .         .     2£       " 
Cotton  ad  libitum. 

"It  will  keep  moderately  well,  and  give 
very  brilliant  results. 

Portrait  or  Landscape  Collodion  for 
Immediate  Use. 
"  "Will  not  keep  as  long  as  that  made  by 
the  above  two  formulae. 

Ether  and  Alcohol  (equal  parts),         .     1  ounce. 
Iodide  of  Ammonium,  .         .         .     5  grains. 

Bromide  of  Ammonium  or  Cadmium,       2£     " 
Cotton  as  desired. 

"  More  another  time." 

Mr.  E.  D.  Ormsby,  of  Chicago,  follows 
with  some  excellent  suggestions  on  man- 
aging 

The  Development. 

"  Many  photographers  devote  too  little  at- 
tention to  the  developer.  They  have  a  cer- 
tain formula  for  mixing  it,  and  they  always 
use  it  the  same  strength,  be  the  subject 
light  or  dark,  well  timed  under  the  light, 
or  undertimed. 

"  We  have  a  great  power  in  the  developer. 
As  much  depends  on  skilful  development 
to  obtain  fine  results  in  the  negative,  as 
skilful  lighting,  in  fact,  more,  for  by  skilful 
manipulation  a  negative  with  faulty  light- 
ing can  be  made  to  produce  good  results. 


As  an  example,  take  children's  pictures. 
Where  you  are  obliged  to  light  strong, 
and  then  can  get  often  only  two  or  three 
seconds'  exposure,  by  using  your  ordinary 
strength  of  developer,  and  keeping  your 
plate  in  motion  during  the  development, 
you  are  bound  to  get  harsh  results.  Increase 
the  strength  of  your  developer  one-half,  and 
hold  your  plate  still  during  development, 
and  note  the  difference  in  the  result  with 
the  same  lighting  and  exposure.  For 
brunettes,  light  soft,  time  well,  and  use  a 
strong  developer,  and  don't  rock  the  plate 
during  development.  For  blondes,  use  a 
little  stronger  contrast  in  lighting,  time 
well,  and  use  a  weaker  developer,  and  keep 
the  plate  moving  gently  during  develop- 
ment. For  white  draperies,  use  a  soft  light, 
long  exposure,  and  a  weak  developer.  The 
advantage  to  be  derived  by  varying  the 
strength  of  the  developer  for  different  sub- 
jects, and  different  conditions  under  which 
we  are  forced  to  work,  is  evident  to  all. 
But  some  will  say,  it  is  too  much  trouble  to 
keep  several  different  strengths  of  developer 
on  hand.  I  say  not  at  all.  Make  a  stock 
solution  of  iron — 1J  ounces  of  iron  to  20 
ounces  of  water;  acetic  acid,  21  ounces. 
Keep  a  bottle  handy  containing  water,  20 
ounces  ;  acetic  acid,  2J  ounces  ;  and  use  it 
to  weaken  your  developer  as  you  use  it.  By 
this  method  you  can  change  the  strength  for 
each  sitting  if  you  wish." 

Mr.  "W.  L.  Shoemaker,  Philada.,  sends 
these  useful  suggestions  in  reference  to 

Salting  Plain  Paper. 

"  To  those  preferring  to  salt  plain  paper  for 
their  own  use,  the  following  hints  may  be 
of  service: 

"  The  kind  of  salt  employed  has  an  effect 
upon  the  tint  of  the  print;  the  weight  of 
salt  employed  has  the  same  effect  upon  the 
tint ;  salting  with  a  bath  of  under  strength 
is  shown  by  the  print  having  a  bluish,  weak 
look,  and  an  entire  absence  of  purplish  con- 
trasts in  the  tints  of  the  face. 

"  Oversalting  produces  paper  that  prints 
slow,  blacks  feeble  and  reddish ;  tone  apt  to 
be  me*asly,  and  drying  flat.  Plain  Saxe  paper 
is  better  floated  than  immersed,  and  should 
be  laid  on  until  the  paper  is  perfectly  flat, 
then  lifted  as  carefully  as  in  silvering. 


304 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


"  The  quantity  of  gelatin  used  in  connec- 
tion with  the  salting  is  generally  different 
with  every  printer,  but  for  medium  Saxe 
paper,  I  would  recommend  at  this  season  of 
the  year  about  one  box  of  Cox's  gelatin  to 
four  gallons  of  salt  solution.  In  winter  this 
can  be  nearly  doubled. 

"  This  same  solution  will  be  strong  enough 
for  the  roll  Saxe  at  this  season.  Salting 
with  chloride  of  ammonium  alone  prints 
rather  brownish,  and  the  paper  does  not 
keep  so  well,  or  print  as  quick,  as  if  used  in 
equal  proportion  with  common  salt. 

"  So  the  resume  would  be, 

Chloride  of  Ammonium,     .     1£  grains. 
Common  Salt,     .         .  1J     " 

Water,         ....     1  ounce 
Gelatin,   30  grs.  to  the  quart  for  summer, 
double  or  nearly  so  in  winter. 

"  Saxe  paper,  so  prepared,  should  be  floated 
and  fumed  the  same  as  albumen  paper." 

From  Mr.  E.  Bierstadt,  of  New  York, 
we  have  the  following  interesting  article  on 

The  Use  or  Graphite  in  the  Negative 
Process. 

"  While  the  subject  of  '  Graphite  Nega- 
tives '  is  yet  fresh,  it  may  be  well  to  name 
a  few  other  uses  that  are  not  generally 
known  for  graphite  in  photography. 

"  1st.  Ordinary  negatives  can  be  strength- 
ened with  it  in  this  manner  :  After  develop- 
ing and  fixing,  wash  well,  and  drain  the 
plate,  and  pour  on  the  dextrin  solution*  at 
the  upper  corner,  so  that  the  water  still  on 
the  plate  may  be  driven  off  before  the 
stream  of  dextrin  ;  drain  and  pour  over  once 
more,  and  this  time  do  not  drain  off  too 
close,  but  as  soon  as  the  stream  becomes 
broken  into  drops,  bring  the  negative  back 
to  a  horizontal  position,  and  dry  over  a 
spirit-lamp;  then  with  the  negative  laid 
face  down  on  a  dark  cloth,  expose  the  back 
side  to  strong  light  nearly  one-half  longer 
than  would  be  required  for  making  a  nega- 
tive;  then  the  graphite  must  be  applied  as 
usual  with  a  camel's-hair  brush  until  the 
desired  strength  is  attained. 

"  2d.  A  new  negative  can  be  made  pn  the 
back  of  an  old  one.  It  will  be  remembered 
that  a  patent  was  granted  some  time  ago  for 

*  See  August  number,  p.  246. 


coating  both  sides  of  a  glass  plate  with  col- 
lodion, and  developing  both  so  as  to  make 
one  diffused  image  on  the  back  of  the  one  in 
focus,  so  that  prints  might  be  made  with  all 
the  soft  effect  of  a  retouched  negative.  With 
graphite  this  can  be  done  after  the  sharp 
negative  is  made,  or  it  can  be  made  on  the 
back  of  any  old  negative.  Clean  the  back, 
and  coat  with  the  sensitive  compound  as  for 
a  negative,  dry  by  heat,  and  expose  the  nega- 
tive side  to  light,  and  apply  graphite  as  usual. 

"Since  my  first  note  referring  to  this  sub- 
ject, the  American  Graphite  Company  has 
merged  into  the  Dixon  Crucible  Company, 
who  have  the  fine  graphite  at  24  Cliff 
Street,  New  York." 

Messrs.  Montfort  &  Hill,  Burlington, 
Iowa,    give    some    good    practical    hints, 
which  will  doubtless  be  new  to  many. 
Something  New  about  Toning. 

"  Take  any  formula?,  or  the  following : 
Two  ounces  of  bicarbonate  of  soda,  one 
ounce  of  acetate  of  soda  and  a  few  grains  of 
citric  acid.  Neutralize  the  toning  bath  into 
this,  and  place  it  in  the  sunlight  for  a  few 
hours.  It  will  turn  dark,  and  a  greasy  scum 
will  appear  on  the  surface.  It  is  then  ready 
to  use  without  filtering.  No  toning  bath 
yet  published  will  give  better  results.  If 
you  like  rich  warm  tones,  try  it. 

"Here  is  a  'dodge.'  Every  operator 
is  supposed  to  possess  a  set  of  one-ninth  size 
gem  tubes.  Take  the  front  lens  of  two  of 
them,  and  fit  them  in  a  board  three  inches 
apart,  so  that  you  can  slip  it  in  your  camera 
box,  then  fasten  a  paper  cap,  with  a  small 
aperture  in  front,  over  each  lens,  and  you 
have  a  cheap  stereoscopic  outfit,  by  which 
you  can  take  as  good  a  negative  as  with  the 
most  expensive  view  tubes.  We  send  a 
sample  picture  to  the  editor  made  in  this 
way,  to  verify  our  statement. 

"  We  publish  this  for  the  benefit  of  pho- 
tographers who  would  like  to  make  work 
of  this  kind,  and  are  not  willing  to  purchase 
extra  instruments." 

Mr.  J.  W.  Wykes  touches  a  subject  that 
has  been  much  neglected,  that  of 

Making  Solar  Negatives. 

His  formulae  may  help  many  others.  He 
says  : 

"I  have   tried  every  other   method  and 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGKAPH  EE. 


305 


always  go  back  to  this  with  pleasure.  If 
it  will  help  some  one  who  is  making  those 
hard  negatives,  so  annoying  to  solar  printers, 
to  better  results  I  shall  be  repaid. 
Bath. 
"Forty  grains  of  silver  to  one  ounce  of 
water;  one-half  drachm  of  nitric  acid  to 
sixteen  ounces  of  solution.  Use  collodion 
of  a  deep  color  with  about  five  grains  of 
cotton  to  the  ounce. 

Developer. 
Water,        .         .         .         .20  ounces. 
Iron,  .....       1  ounce. 
Nitrate  of  Potassium,         .  120  grains. 

No  Sooner  Said  than  Done. 
"If  those  parties  who  have  occasion  to 
make  ferrotypes  are  troubled  with  the  glass 
adhering    to   the  plate, 
and  stains  caused  by  the 
pressure  forcing  the  sur- 
plus  bath   solution  up 
and  over  the  sensitized 
face,  will  cut  the  glass 
used  in  the  form  of  the  above  engraving, 
they  will  be  hugely  tickled  at  the  results." 

How  it  is  Done  in  Boston 
Mr.  A.  N.   Hardy,  of  Boston,  in  com- 
municating his   formulae  as   given    by    his 
operator,  Mr.  Kitz,  says  : 

"  I  do  not  think  of  any  wrinkles  or 
dodges  that  we  have,  except  such  as  have 
already  been  published.  If  we  have  at- 
tained to  any  success  in  our  beautiful  art,  I 
think  it  has  been  by  careful  thinking  and 
skilful  working. 

"Our  Mr.  Kitz  works  the  following: 
Collodion. 


Ether  and  Alcohol, 
Iodide  of  Ammonium, 
Iodide  of  Cadmium, 
Bromide  of  Potassium, 
French  Gun-cotton, 


equal  parts. 

4  grains. 
|  grain. 
2|  grains. 

5  grains. 


ounce, 
ounce, 
ounces. 


Developer. 

Protosulphnte  of  Iron,  .     ] 

Acetic  Acid  (Martin's),  .     1 

Water,  .         .         .  .16 

"To   be   varied  according   to   light  and 
subject. 

Negative  Bath. 
Nitrate  of  Silver,          .         .35    grains. 
Water, 1    ounce. 

"Acidulate  with   nitric  acid;  the  water 


need  not  be  distilled.  Leave  the  solution 
in  sunlight  till  it  is  perfectly  clear,  then 
filter.  Do  not  add  the  acid  till  after  it  has 
been  filtered. 

"The  pictures  on  exhibition  at  Chicago 
were  made  with  the  Voigtlander  &  Son 
instruments,  and  I  would  gladly  recom- 
mend them  to  the  fraternity." 

Mr.  H.  C.  Wilt  sends  the  following 
wrinkles. 

How  I  Prepare  Negatives  for 
Printing. 

"After  retouching,  I  apply  heat  to  the 
negative,  face  up ;  this  melts  the  varnish 
and  lets  the  pencilling  sink  or  penetrate, 
and  the  varnish  runs  over  the  pencil-marks, 
and  thus  the  prints  are  much  softer  than  if 
the  negative  had  not  been  warmed. 

"  A  much  softer  print  can  be  obtained  by 
setting  the  intense  side  of  the  negative  to- 
wards the  light,  and  moving  the  negative 
while  printing;  if  you  turn  the  thin,  or 
weak,  or  shadow  side  towards  the  light  it 
will  print  quicker  and  coarser. 

"  When  I  am  wanting  to  use  an  old  neg- 
ative or  positive  bath  I  add  about  from  1  to 
lsj  drops  glacial  acetic  acid  to  the  ounce  of 
solution;  shake,  and  you  will  see  some  pre- 
cipitate almost  like  cheese.  Let  it  set  over 
night,  filter,,  when,  it  is  ready  for  use, 

"  I  think  we  ought  to  have  a  sign  or  test, 
so  that  the  members  of  the  National  Pho- 
tographic Association  could  know  each, 
other  in  crowds,  especially  when  on  boats, 
or  in  cars.  By  this  testing  we  could  know 
and  approach  each  other,  and.  get  desirable 
information,, and  travel  with. company  that,, 
without  such  sign,  we  would,  not  have  the 
knowledge  of  each  other.''' 

"  The  Best  "  Lubricator. 

Mr.  B.  F.  Hall  communicates  some- 
thing useful  to  those  who  burnish. 

"  Burnishers  are  an  established  fact ;  so 
also  is  the  necessity  for  a  ^lubricator '  when 
it  is-  desirable  to  burnish  enamelled  cards, 
or  rather  pictures  mounted  upon  them. 
Your  remarks  in  September  number,  on 
Dean's  soap  and  alcohol,  moves  me  to  give 
you  for  publication  the  very  best  lubricator, 
in  use,  and  I  have  used  them  all,  Dean's 
patent  mixture  included.    I  have  burnished. 


20 


806 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


photographs  mounted  upon  all  kinds  and 
qualities  of  enamelled  mounts,  fine-tinted, 
gilt  and  tinted  border,  etc.,  and  have  never 
•known  a  failure  when  using  the  following  : 

"When  pictures  are  all  ready  to  burnish, 
Tub  over  them  the  following  mixture : 

"  White  Wax,  15  grains;  Ether,  jounce, 
■or  enough  to  soften  the  wax;  then  add  3 
•ounces  of  Alcohol.  Apply  with  a  rag  or 
-sponge.     No  care  is  necessary." 

Cleveland  Formula. 
Mr.  E.  Decker,  of  Cleveland,  whose 
splendid  pictures  excited  much  envy  at  the 
Chicago  Exhibition,  very  generously  com- 
municates his  whole  formulae,  which  will  be 
found  instructive.     He  says: 

"  My  formulas  are  at  any  one's  service, 
but  you  will  find  they  are  as  simple  as  any 
other.  We  have  been  using  the  same  for 
the  past  five  or  six  years,  with  the  usual 
changes,  of  course,  for  weather  and  tempe- 
rature. 

"  Eor  the  past  two  years  my  operator, 
Mr.  White,  has  had  almost  exclusive 
charge  of  my  dark-room,  myself  giving 
attention  to  making  the  sittings.  I  always 
give  full  time,  let  the  light  be  what  it  may. 
If  the  light  is  very  weak,  and  the  sitter 
cannot  keep  still,  have  them  try  again. 
Instantaneous  or  very  short  time  may  be 
pleasant  for  both  sitter  and  photographer, 
but  it  'don't  pay'  except  in  cases  of  chil- 
dren, as  it  is  necessary  to  use  too  much  light 
for  best  effects. 

"I  am  not  opposed  to  large  lights ;  on 
the  contrary,  I  like  a  large  light,  but  want 
plenty  of  screens  to  govern  or  control  it. 

Negative  Bath. 

Nitrate  of  Silver,    .         .   40    grains. 
Water,     .         .         .         .     1    ounce. 

"  Slightly  acid  with  C.  P.  nitric  acid. 

"When  made  new  J  grain  iodide  of  po- 
tassium to  the  ounce  of  nitrate  of  silver. 

"  I  will  say  here,  however,  that  my 
largest  bath  solution  was  originally  made 
up  eight  or  ten  years  ago,  and  I  have  made 
no  new  one  since,  during  which  time  it  has 
passed  through  one  removal  and  one  fire. 
We  invariably  keep  on  hand  a  double  stock 
of  all  bath  solutions. 


Collodion. 
Alcohol  and  Ether,  .     equal  parts. 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,     .     4    grains  to  ounce. 
Bromide  of  Cadmium,     .     2J       "  " 

Anthony's    Neg.  Cotton,     3  "  " 

Papyroxylin,  .         .         .2         "  "  . 

Developer. 
"  M.    Carey    Lea's     Sugar     Developer ; 
using  much  less  acetic  acid,  however,  than 
he  recommends. 

Redeveloping. 

Pyrogallic  Acid,      .         .     1J  grains  to  ounce. 

Citric  Acid,     .         .         .     1         "  " 

Nitrate  of  Silver,    .         .20  "  " 

"  Or  Developing  Solution  and  Nitrate  of 
Silver  as  above. 

Printing  Bath. 

"  Nitrate  of  Silver,  45  grains  to  the  ounce 
of  Water,  made  as  follows  : 

"  Dissolve  the  silver  in  half  the  water. 
Ammoniate  two-thirds  or  three-quarters  of 
the  solution,  and  add  the  balance.  Add  to 
three-quarters  of  the  above  C.  P.  nitric 
acid  until  slightly' acid,  and  mix  water  to 
dilute  to  the  right  strength.  I  don't  fume. 
Toning. 

"Chloride  of  gold,  slightly  alkaline  with 
bicarbonate  of  soda.  Do  not  throw  away, 
but  use  every  day,  adding  each  day  gold 
and  soda  in  proportion  to  the  number  of 
prints  to  be  toned.     Tone  slow. 

"  I  had  almost  forgotten  to  mention  the 
best  and  most  necessary  part  of  all  the  for- 
mulas, viz.,  a  Dalhneyer  Lens.  To  all  of 
which  add  care,  cleanliness,  and  thought; 
also  patience,  perseverance,  and  sweet  oil ; 
the  last  three  to  be  used  more  particularly 
in  dealing  with  customers. " 

Ketouching  Negatives. 
Mr.  Bildt  gives  the  following  composi- 
tion : 

No.  1. 
Gum  Arabic,   .         .         .         .1  part. 
Water,     .....     7  parts. 

No.  2. 
Bichromate  of  Potash,     .         .     3  parts. 

Water, 7  parts. 

"  Add  to  the  solution  of  gum  as  much  of 
the  bichromatized  solution  as  will  give  it 
the  tint  of  Madeira  wine  ;  it  is  then  ready  for 
use.     Should  be  kept  in  the  dark. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


307 


"  The  negative  fixed,  washed,  and  dried  in 
the  ordinar}'  manner,  is  covered  with  this 
bichromatized  gum,  dried  in  the  dark,  then 
finally  exposed  for  half  an  hour.  The 
negative  is  thus  covered  with  an  insoluble 
varnish,  mat  and  very  hard,  on  which,  with 
a  Fabcr  pencil,  No.  3  or  4,  every  kind 
of  retouching  may  be  made  with  the  same 
facility  as  on  paper.  This  bichromatized 
coating  does  not  injure  the  negative,  and 
may  be  used  without  fear  as  any  other  neg- 
ative varnish." 


Class  in  Landscape  Photography. 

To  photograph  a  lake  or  river,  it  is  not 
sufficient  that  a  view  be  taken  simply  show- 
ing the  expanse  of  water,  as  any  one  would 
readily  see  that  this  would  be  very  tame  and 
uninteresting.  Like  the  mountain  and 
valley,  which  are  made  to  give  character 
and  support  to  each  other,  so  land  and  water 
must  be  introduced  to  give  form  and  dis- 
tinction to  a  lake  or  river.  Water  is  much 
the  same  everywhere,  under  similar  condi- 
tions, but  the  solid  earth  is  full  of  variety. 
Localities  are  recognized  by  the  character- 
istics of  the  surrounding  landscape,  and  the 
sailor  knows  what  port  he  is  Hearing  by  the 
distant  mountains  that  seem  to  rise  out  of 
the  ocean,  and  as  he  approaches,  his  judg- 
ment is  confirmed  by  the  general  "  lay  of 
the  land." 

So  in  photographing  a  sheet  of  water  it 
is  necessary  that  a  portion  of  the  landscape, 
the  hills  that  rise  around  it,  or  some  con- 
spicuous landmark,  which  will  include  a 
portion,  at  least,  of  the  form  and  outline  of 
the  lake  or  river,  should  be  introduced. 

When  the  view  includes  a  large  breadth 
of  water  the  effect  is  greatly  heightened  by 
the  introduction  of  a  boat,  a  log,  rock  or 
island.  But  nearly  all  accessories  may  be 
dispensed  with,  and  an  almost  enchanting 
effect  produced  by  taking  advantage  of  the 
sun's  being  obscured  by  a  cloud,  and  catch- 
ing the  reflection  on  the  water,  which  forms 
a  broad  avenue  of  light,  and  stretches  far 
over  the  dancing  wavelets  as  if  to  some  fairy 
grotto  in  the  dazzling  distance.  A  view  of 
this  kind  must  necessarily  be  instantane- 
ous, and  then  probably  with  a  rather  small 
stop  to  the  instrument.     These  are  usually 


called  moonlight  views,  and  when  well  exe- 
cuted the  illusion  is  perfect. 

A  river  view  will  usually  include  both  its 
banks,  unless  it  be  very  wide.  And  when 
its  winding  course  can  be  traced  by  its 
mirrorlike  surface  through  a  rolling  and 
varied  landscape,  the  effect  is  very  fine. 

Waterfalls  are  usually  attractive  subjects, 
and  many  can  be  found  away  from  Niagara, 
or  the  Bridal  Veil  of  the  Yosemite.  Such 
a  view  should  be  chosen  as  will  give  the 
comparative  height,  and  show  the  form,  as 
far  as  can  be,  of  the  cataract.  The  view 
should  not  be  too  near,  as  a  proper  propor- 
tion of  the  surrounding  rocks  or  foliage,  as 
well  as  of  the  foreground,  is  usually  neces- 
sary to  produce  the  best  effect  in  the  prin- 
cipal subject. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  illustrate  the 
magnitude  of  any  subject  there  is  no  better 
standard  than  the  human  figure.  By  this 
the  size  of  any  object  is  comprehended  at 
once,  and  it  may  rise  into  grandeur  by  its 
vast  proportions,  or  sink  into  insignificance 
simply  by  comparison  with  this  never-fail- 
ing test.  But,  in  introducing  a  figure  for 
this  purpose,  give  it  something  to  do  or  be 
interested  in.  Never  suffer  any  person  to 
stand  and  gaze  at  the  instrument.  If  some 
boorish  individual  persists  in  intruding  him- 
self upon  your  view,  make  a  blank  expo- 
sure on  him  ;  he  will  suppose  yeu  have  taken 
his  picture,  and  will  be  'likely  to  change  his 
position.  When  he  has  gone  or  thinks  you 
have  done  with  your  view,  then  quietly 
make  an  exposure,  with  a  figure  or  two  of 
your  own  choosing  introduced  as  you  may 
direct.  Let  a  person  you  may  place  in  the 
picture  be  looking  anywhere  but  at  the  in- 
strument; nothing  has  a  better  effect  than 
to  see  him  or  them  contemplating  the  prin- 
cipal subject.  It  has  the  effect  of  leading  the 
attention  of  the  beholder  more  directly  to 
it,  and  excites  an  interest  that  otherwise 
would  hardly  be  felt. 

Bridges  of  almost  any  size  or  style  of  con- 
struction are  usually  good  subjects.  The 
best  effect  is  always  produced  by  getting  a 
perspective  view,  such  as  may  be  had  from 
the  bank  of  the  river  or  stream,  and  at  such 
distance  from  the  bridge  as  will  best  give 
its  form  and  situation. 

There  is  no  subject,  probably,  more  fasci- 


308 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


nating  to  the  lover  of  the  picturesque  than 
ruins  of  every  description.  These  may  often 
be  found  and  introduced  with  good  effect  in 
connection  with  other  scenery,  but  where  the 
ruin  possesses  interest  in  itself,  it,  of  course, 
forms  a  subject  which  may  be  treated  inde- 
pendently of  any  surroundings,  except  as 
such  surroundings  may  serve  as  accessories. 
In  this  country,  however,  this  class  of  sub- 
jects, possessing  general  interest,  is  scarce. 
Our  people  take  pride,  not  in  the  ruins  of  their 
former  greatness  and  glory,  the  remains  of 
magnificent  temples  and  fallen  empires, 
but  in  the  living,  thriving  perfection,  the 
unequalled  prosperity  and  greatness  of  their 
country's  glorious  present,  and  aside  from 
the  temporary  ruins  of  some  of  our  burned 
cities  we  have  nothing  in  this  country  that 
is  at  all  worthy  of  special  notice. 

The  last  to  be  enumerated  on  the  list  is, 
to  many,  the  most  fascinating  of  all  the  sub- 
jects of  outdoor  photography.  Instantane- 
ous marine  views,  when  well  executed,  pos- 
sess a  charm  of  real  moving,  active  life,  that 
is  found  nowhere  else  within  the  scope  of 
photography. 

To  succeed  well  with  this  class  of  work 
requires  apparatus  and  chemicals  especially 
adapted  to  it ;  though,  as  far  as  the  chemi- 
cals are  concerned,  it  is  only  necessary  that 
they  should  be  in  good  working  condition 
for  ordinary  work. 

Usually  a  portrait  lens  is  used  for  in- 
stantaneous views,  but  some  of  the  large 
aperture  view  lenses  work  sufficiently  quick. 
An  instantaneous  shutter  is  quite  a  neces- 
sity in  making  these  views,  and  is  the  only 
means  by  which  the  exposure  can  be  made 
short  enough.  There  is  always  the  latitude, 
however,  in  case  of  a  very  brilliant  light, 
that  may  be  taken  advantage  of  by  using 
the  diaphragm,  and  thus  bring  the  light 
and  time  of  exposure  under  control. 

With  instantaneous  marines,  where  it  is 
desirable  to  introduce  shipping  or  craft  of 
any  sort,  a  position  should  be  chosen,  the 
instrument  placed,  and  focussed,  and  par- 
ticular notice  taken  of  the  points  included 
in  the  view.  If  a  vessel  is  seen  approach- 
ing, prepare  a  plate,  and  when  she  sails  be- 
tween the  points  you  have  selected,  so  as  to 
be  in  proper  position  in  the  picture,  then 
make  the  exposure.     Never  attempt  to  go 


after  your  subject  or  to  make  a  focus  on  a 
moving  vessel,  for  she  will  continue  to  sail 
on,  and  possibly  be  out  of  your  view  before 
you  are  ready  to  take  the  picture.  There 
would  be  exceptions  to  this  in  the  case  of  a 
vessel  sailing  directly  to  or  from  you. 

In  all  this  work  success  depends  very 
much  upon  keeping  cool,  and  doing  all 
without  flurry  or  excitement. 

Beginners  are  very  apt  to  get  nervous  in 
their  anxiety  for  success,  and  in  this  condi- 
tion are  liable  to  make  mistakes  and  defeat 
their  own  efforts. 


GERMAN  CORRESPONDENCE. 

Landscape  Photography — The  Effect  of 
Perspective. 

I  am  out  of  town,  at  a  watering-place,  in 
order  to  wash  off  for  once  the  dust  of  the 
city  in  the  briny  waves  of  the  Baltic.  It 
was  my  intention  to  do  nothing,  absolutely 
nothing,  but  I  could  not  resist  the  tempta- 
tion to  take  along  some  photographic  ap- 
paratus. I  believe  photographers  are, like 
actors,  after  one  has  worn  out  a  pair  of 
shoes  on  the  stage  he  cannot  leave  it,  and 
after  a  photographer  has  used  up  a  pound 
of  nitrate  of  silver  he  is  wedded  to  the 
dark-chamber  for  life.  The  amateur  is 
almost  in  a  still  worse  condition.  Many 
a  pretty  study  excites  me  to  work,  for  the 
coast  here  is  highly  romantic.  Mighty  dark 
cliffs,  similar  to  the  Shakspeare  Cliff  at  Do- 
ver, rise  here  out  of  the  water,  the  summits 
crowned  with  the  primeval  forest  of  the 
finest  beech  and  oak.  Deep  gorges  inter- 
sect the  rocks,  mountain  torrents  rush  down 
towards  the  sea,  and  immense  boulders  cover 
the  beach.  Further  inland  you  meet  with 
curiously  formed  giant  tombs,  with  numer- 
ous remnants  of  flint  implements,  and  wea- 
pons peculiarly  formed,  fortifications,  and 
heathen  altars,  all  relics  of  a  people  that  has 
long  ago  passed  away,  and  of  which  we  only 
know  by  legends.  Unfortunately  the  intru- 
sive present,  in  the  shape  of  farmers'  boys 
and  servant  girls,  interferes  with  taking  the 
picture  of  these  remnants  of  the  remote  past , 
for  these  people  believe  that  I  am  an  itine- 
rant photographer,  and  ask  me  regularly 
how  much  I  charge  for  a  half  a  dozen  cards. 
Wind  and  weather  also  interfere  quite  fre- 
quently, but  seldom  the  leaves  are  quiet, 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


309 


and  still  more  rarely  am  I  favored  by  a  ray 
of  sunlight  which  brings  light  and  shade 
into  the  landscape.  Here  is  abundance  of 
splendid  material  for  such  show  pictures  as 
have  been  made  by  Breese  in  England.  I 
mean  his  splendid  instantaneous  photo- 
graphs, where  surging  waves  and  overhang- 
ing clouds  are  illuminated  by  a  sudden  burst 
of  sunshine,  pictures  that  are  made  daily  at 
the  Falls  of  Niagara,  but  which  succeed  so 
rarely  in  the  less  favorable  atmosphere  of 
Germany.  Unfortunately  we  do  not  meet 
with  these  pictures  any  longer  in  the  shops, 
for  Breese  is  reported  dead,  and  his  succes- 
sor has  not  been  found  yet,  although  the 
beautiful  transparencies  were  readily 
bought,  in  spite  of  their  high  price.  It  is, 
anyway,  peculiar  that  the  artistic  landscape 
photographers  do  not  succeed  on  the  Conti- 
nent. Such  magnificent  pictures  as  are 
made  by  Robinson  &  Cherrill  we  look  for 
in  vain  in  Germany,  and  it  is  significant 
enough  that  English  photographers  make 
our  own  a  rather  strong  competition  in  the 
landscape  line. 

It  seems  that  generally  the  photographer 
is  satisfied  with  taking  the  view  that  most 
people  call  for,  but  he  does  not  care  how 
the  illumination  is,  or  if  the  light  comes  from 
the  front,  from  behind,  or  sideways.  The 
travelling  photographer  is  satisfied  to  make 
in  the  shortest  time  as  many  pictures  as 
possible,  and  to  travel  through  the  country 
as  quick  as  possible.  Under  these  circum- 
stances, to  wait  for  the  finest  effects  of  light 
and  shade  is  out  of  the  question. 

This  evil  is  mainly  due  to  the  public  it- 
self. It  makes  great  pretensions  when  its 
own  dear  self  is  concerned.  When  a  por- 
trait is  wanted,  their  vanity  comes  into 
play,  but  with  landscapes  the  case  is  en- 
tirely different.  If  only  the  outlines  of  the 
favorite  spot  are  recognized,  the  public  is 
satisfied,  and  does  not  ask  whether  the  plate 
is  over  or  under  exposed,  whether  it  is 
spotted  or  streaked,  in  fact,  it  accepts  the 
meanest  kind  of  work,  provided  it  is  cheap, 
and  the  best  photographer,  who  would  like 
to  make  the  best  kind  of  work,  finds  to  his 
regret  how  little  even  educated  people  know 
to  value  his  talents.  Such  indolence  can- 
not of  course  promote  progress. 

There  are  very  clever  landscape  photog- 


raphers, particularly  in  the  Alps.  I  refer, 
for  instance,  to  Baldi  &  Wurthole  in  Salz- 
burg, Johannes  in  Portenkirehen.and  Lotze 
in  Bozen.  In  North  Germany  we  had  for- 
merly artists  of  equal  reputation,  but  it 
seems  that  they  have  lately  turned  their  at- 
tention to  other  branches  of  photography. 
We  must  not  forget  that  the  Alps  furnish 
the  photographer  with  a  much  richer  ma- 
terial than  the  flat  plains  of  North  Ger- 
many. In  the  Alps  we  can  turn  the  camera 
in  whatever  direction  we  choose,  and  we 
will,  almost  in  every  instance,  find  a  good 
subject.  But  it  is  different  in  a  level  coun- 
try. Here  it  becomes  difficult  to  fill  out 
the  picture.  We  find,  for  instance,  a  charm- 
ing village  surrounded  by  trees  and  wood- 
land. We  direct  the  camera  towards  it, 
and  we  get  a  picture.  But  how  does  it  look  ? 
The  village  with  the  surrounding  forest  oc- 
cupies a  small  strip  in  the  centre  of  the  pic- 
ture, above  it  there  is  a  wide  blank  space 
representing  the  sky,  and  below  a  broad 
space  of  tedious  foreground  in  the  shape  of 
a  large  stubble-field. 

These  drawbacks  may  be  remedied  by  a 
lens  with  a  long  focus.  Sky  and  foreground 
appear  smaller,  and  the  centre  larger,  but, 
unfortunately,  the  angle  of  view  will  de- 
crease with  a  longer  focus,  and  many  a 
landscape  which  stretches  over  a  consider- 
able horizontal  surface  cannot  be  taken 
with  a  long-focussed  lens.  It  becomes, 
therefore,  necessary  to  stick  to  a  short-fo- 
cussed  lens,  and  thus  it  happens  that  we  see 
many  a  marine  view  in  which  the  tedious 
sky  and  the  equally  tedious  foreground  drive 
the  artistic  viewer  to  desperation.  The 
painter  easily  circumvents  these  difficulties. 
He  fills  the  sky  with  handsome  clouds,  lets 
the  sun  burst  through  them  and  throw  won- 
derful reflexes  on  water  and  foreground,  and 
brings  in  this  manner  harmony  and  poetry 
into  a  landscape  where  photographers  de- 
spair on  account  of  the  monotony  of  the 
subject. 

Yes,  the  painters  nowadays  give  a  prefer- 
ence to  the  level  country,  where  sky  and 
foreground  leave  a  clear  field  for  the  dis- 
play of  their  fancies,  while  in  mountainous 
regions  like  the  Alps,  the  mountains  them- 
selves fill  the  picture  from  bottom  to  top. 

In  view  of  these  miseries  of  the  landscape 


310 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


photographer,  it  is  really  enjoyahle  to  re- 
cord some  new  conquest  in  the  realm  of 
geographical  photography.  These  are  the 
pictures  from  the  Desert  expedition  by  Ger- 
hard Eolf,  taken  by  Ph.  Kernel  e.  Rolf's 
expedition  was  organized  by  the  Viceroy  of 
Egypt,  and  entered  the  sandy  waste  of  the 
Desert  for  the  purpose- of  traeing  the  roads 
of  the  caravans,,  the  oases,,  the  geological 
formations,  etc.  Zoologists,,  botanists-,,  as- 
tronomers,, and  mineralogists  accompanied 
the  expedition.  It  is  the  fisst  African*  one 
which  was  accompanied;  by  a  photographer. 

The  oases  "Charzeh"  and  "  Tara-fre  " 
were  reached,  and  strange  rocky  landscapes, 
interesting  ruins  of  ancient  Egyptian  tem- 
ples were  discovered,  and  an  abundance  of 
the  most  curious  views  were  taken,,  until 
the  further  progress  of  the  enterprise  was 
stopped  by  an  endless  chain  of  sandhills. 
Of  all  these  strange  objects  Remele-has  made 
splendid  pictures,  which  together  form  an 
album  of  about  eighty  subjects.  The  Viceroy 
has  ordered  hundreds  of  these  to  be  made  at 
his  own  expense,  which  he  intends  topresemt 
to  prominent  educational  institutions. 

Lately  I  made  an  observation  on.  the  pe- 
culiar etfect  of  perspective  in  photography. 
A  sculptor  constructed  a  splendid  monu- 
ment— a  kind  of  mausoleum.  The  same 
presented  a  cubical  base,,  surmounted  by  a 
cupola.  The  plaster  model,  of  the  building 
was  about  three  feet  high-  The-  building 
itself  would  reach  a  height  of  sixty  feet. 
To  show  his  work,  the  sculptor  ordered  a 
photograph  to  be  made  of  the  model,,  if 
possible,  with  landscape  surroundings. 
After  much  trouble,  the  photographer  ful- 
filled all  these  conditions.  He  placed  the 
model  in.  front  of  a  landscape  background, 
on  an  artificial  hill,  in  which  pots  with  cy- 
press and  myrtle  were  buried.  A  plate  of 
sixteen  inches  was  made  from  this  model. 
Everything  succeeded,  and  the  photogra- 
pher was  satisfied  with  his  work,  and  others 
who  saw  it  praised  it  highly. 

The  picture  was  handed  to  the  sculptor, 
but  he  was  by  no  means  delighted.  He  did 
not  say  a  word,  paid  the  bill,  and  left.  Be 
took  it  to  the  Artists'  Society,  and  demon- 
strated to  his  colleagues  that  photography 
is  utterly  unable  to*  make  a.  correct  picture 
of  anything. 


We  experience  here  quite  often  that 
artists  take  a  delight  in  taking  hold  of  infe- 
rior pictures,  and  to  demonstrate  from  them 
the  incapacity  of  photography. 

The  mausoleum  mentioned  above  made 
indeed  a  rather  peculiar  impression,  which 
was  felt  by  persons  who  did  not  understand 
anything  about  art.  The  landscape  looked 
quite  natural,  but  the  building  unnatural, 
although  not  every  one  could  explain  why. 
The  reason  of  this  laid  in  the  perspective 
proportions. 

If  we  take  a  photograph  of  a  cube  one 
foot  high,  and  place  the  objective  on  a  level 
with  the  cube,  the  edges  will  separate  but 
little,  and  the  cube  will  look  as  represented 
in  Figure  1.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  we 
cubical  building  which  is 
sixty   feet   high, 


photograph    a 
Fiy.l. 


and  place  the 
camera  at  the 
foot  of  the  build- 
ing, then  the 
lines  of  the  cor- 
nices, a  e  and  ac, 
will  "tumble" 
very  considerably,  as  the  artists  call  it,  and 
the  higher  the  building  is,  the  more  marked 
will  this  appear. 

The  monument  appeared  in  the  pic- 
ture exactly  as  Figure  1.  The  lines  of  the 
cornice  did  not  fall  sufficiently,  and  did  not 
give  the  same  impression  a  high  building 
would  make. 

The  question  arises,  could  this  be  avoided  ? 
At  first  sight  this  seems  impossible.  And 
still  it  can  be  done.  If  we  photograph  a 
cube,  and  place  the  objective  at  various 
distances  from  the  camera,  we  will  find  that 
the  lines  tumble  more  and  more  the  closer 
we  get  to  the  cube.  When  we  get  very 
close,  and  the 
objective  is  on 
a  level  with  the 
base  of  the  mod- 
el, we  will  ob- 
tain a  picture 
like  Figure  2. 
Such  an  ap- 
proach is  possible  with  a  correct  working 
wide-angle  lens,  as,  for  instance,  the  Zent- 
mayer.  Such  lenses  have  sufficient  depth, 
and  make  it  possible  to  work  at  very  short 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


311 


distances.  If  such  an  intrument  had  heen 
employed  in  this  instance,  a  splendid  picture 
of  the  model  would  have  been  the  result, 
which,  also,  would  have  made  the  impression 
of  a  large  building.  We  often  complain  of 
the  exaggerated  perspective  of  wide-angle 
lenses.  In  this  instance  it  would  have  been 
no  disadvantage. 

Yours,  very  truly, 

Dr.  H.  Vogel. 


PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  FRANCE. 

BY   EENEST    LACAN. 

In  my  last  correspondence  I  alluded  to 
the  objective  made  by  Mr.  Prazmowski, 
under  the  direction  of  Mr.  Janssen,  for  the 
photographic  observation  of  the  transit  of 
Venus ;  to  complete  these  details  I  must 
make  known  to  you  the  instrument  that  is 
to  perform  the  function  of  a  multiplying 
frame  and  of  presenting  to  the  focus  of  the 
glass,  acting  as  a  camera,  the  sensitized 
plates  destined  to  receive  the  images. 

It  consists  of  a  table  placed  in  a  circular 
box,  adapting  itself  perfectly  to  the  lower 
extremity  of  the  glass ;  this  table  is  toothed, 
and  is  worked  by  a  pinion  having  detached 
teeth,  which  communicates  to  it  an  alter- 
nate angular  movement  of  the  extent  of  the 
image  to  be  produced  ;  in  other  words,  it 
causes  it  to  turn  progressively  as  fast  as 
each  image  is  obtained,  and  to  an  extent 
corresponding  to  the  size  of  this  image. 
Before  the  box,  and  fixed  upon  the  same 
axis  that  supports  the  table,  is  placed  a  disk 
pierced  with  slits  (the  openings  of  which 
can  be  regulated),  and  which  turns  with  a 
continuous  movement.  Each  time  that  a 
slit  in  the  disk  passes  before  the  one  made 
at  the  bottom  of  the  box,  an  equal  portion 
of  the  sensitized  plate  is  thereby  uncovered 
and  an  image  is  produced.  In  fact,  this 
apparatus  might  be  correctly  designated 
under  the  name  of  the  "  phenakisticope  re- 
volver." It  is  well  understood  that  the 
movements  are  so  regulated  that  the  sensi- 
tized plate  is  in  perfect  repose  when  one  of 
the  windows  above  alluded  to  opens  upon  it. 

By  the  aid  of  the  system  adopted,  and  of 
the  two  apparatuses,  the  objective  and  table, 
Mr.  Janssen  hopes  to  be  able  to  follow  the 


phases  of  the  phenomenon,  and  to  repro- 
duce photographically  each  one  of  the  con- 
tacts. Tho  trials  that  he  has  already  mader 
and  the  images  he  has  already  shown,  go 
far  to  confirm  this  hope. 

At  the  last  monthly  meeting  of  the  com- 
mittee of  the  Mutual  Relief  Society  for 
Photographic  Employes,  it  was  decided 
that  a  letter  of  thanks  should  be  sent  to 
Dr.  Napias  for  his  useful  work  on  the 
special  hygiene  of  photographers,  from 
which  I  have  sent  you  some  extracts.  This 
letter  expresses  the  sentiments  of  all  those 
who  have  read  these  articles,  and  it  is  to  be 
hoped  that  it  will  encourage  the  Doctor  to 
continue  studies  which  can  render  impor- 
tant services  to  all. 

The  lighting  of  photographic  ateliers  is 
a  question  which  interests  operators  in  the 
highest  degree,  and  the  solution  of  which 
presents  great  difficulties.  Light,  the- 
"  raw  material  "  of  the  photographer,  as  it 
is  called  by  Nicephore  Niepce,  is  not  always 
of  a  good  quality,  especially  in  large  cities 
in  which  the  agglomeration  of  houses  con- 
tributes to  its  vitiation.  It  is  then  neces- 
sary that  the  photographer  should  use  a 
number  of  ingenious  devices  to  remedy  this 
defect.  There  is  another  aspect  under 
which*  this  question  should  be  studied.  If 
the  operator  should  seek  to  obtain  as  much 
light  as  possible,  he  must  guard  against  the 
serious  difficulties  produced  by  the  heat,, 
which  reaches  him  at  the  same  time  and  in 
the  same  proportion.  I  have  received  on 
this  subject,  from  a  photographer  in  the 
south  of  France,  a  communication  which 
seems  to  me  to  be  in-teresting  to  all  opera- 
tors. His  atelier,  which  is  8  metres  (26 
feet)  long  by  3£  metres  (11  feet)  wide,  is 
constructed,  as  are  many  others,  on  the- 
roof  of  his  house.  It  is  thus  completely 
isolated  from  the  neighboring  buildings, 
and  is  protected  in  its  length  from  the 
heat  of  the  sun  only  by  a  thin  partition  * 
the  upper  portion  of  the  sash,  composed  of 
ground-glass  over  an  extent  of  5  metres 
(16  feet),  receives  the  light  directly. 

It  is  easy  to  understand  that  in  these 
conditions,  and  in  this  southern  climate,, 
the  unfortunate  photographer  should  have 
often  had  in  his  atelier  a  temperature  ex- 
ceeding 45°  Centigrade  (113°  Fahrenheit)-.. 


312 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGKAPHEP. 


During  the  summer  he  was  consequently 
obliged  to  stop  all  work.  To  remedy  this 
state  of  things,  so  inconvenient  to  his  cus- 
tomers, so  injurious  to  his  health,  and  so 
detrimental  to  his  interests,  my  correspon- 
dent has  found  a  method  which  has  given 
him  complete  success,  and  which  he  recom- 
mends to  his  fellow-workers.  This  consists 
simply  in  spreading  on  the  glass  sash  and 
over  all  the  surface  a  linen  cover  which 
can  be  drawn  up  at  will  by  means  of  a 
simple  mechanism.  It  is  indispensable  to 
leave  between  this  awning  and  the  glass 
sash  a  space  of  about  80  centimetres  (82 
inches),  so  that  the  air  may  freely  circulate. 
Thanks  to  this  system,  the  thermometer 
indicates  in  the  interior  of  the  atelier,  but 
a  few  degrees  more  than  on  the  outside, 
and  with  a  northern  exposure;  and  what  is 
remarkable  is,  that  the  light  is  not  sensibly 
■diminished;  besides,  if  it  is  necessary  to 
operate  in  a  specially  rapid  manner,  to 
make  a  child's  portrait,  for  example,  the 
mechanism  is  put  in  motion  and  the  awn- 
ing for  the  time  being  is  drawn  up.  Thus, 
during  the  necessary  time,  the  maximum 
of  light  is  obtained  without  any  great  in- 
crease of  the  interior  temperature. 

I  am  one  of  those  who  have  insisted  for 
a  long  time,  in  France,  that  photography 
should  find  its  place,  if  not  in  all  lyceums 
and  colleges,  side  by  side  with  natural  phi- 
losophy and  chemistrj',  of  which  it  is  the 
application,  at  least  in  the  special  schools 
in  which  are  formed  our  staff  officers  and 
our  engineers;  unfortunately  instruction 
here  is  one  of  the  things  least  accessible  to 
reform,  and  consequently  to  progress.  It 
is  true  that  permission  has  been  given  for 
the  delivery  of  some  lectures  upon  photog- 
raphy in  such  large  scholastic  institutions 
as  the  Polytechnic  School,  the  Naval  School, 
and  the  Central  School  of  Arts  and  Manu- 
factures, etc.,  but  the  course  only  consists 
of  a  few  hours'  instruction  each  year.  The 
only  exception  is  the  School  for  Civil  Engi- 
neers; there  our  art  is  taught  in  the  most 
complete  manner  theoretically  and  practi- 
cally. You  will  understand  that  I  do  not 
exaggerate  when  I  add  that  the  talented  pro- 
fessor is  Mr.  A.  Davanne. 

Three  years  have  already  elapsed  since 
this  eminent  experimenter  has  undertaken 


these  lectures,  and  he  has  just  sent  me  a 
synopsis  of  them,  forming  a  pamphlet  in 
folio  of  54  pages.  In  this  limited  space 
Mr.  Davanne  has  succeeded  in  condensing 
all  the  information  indispensable  to  opera- 
tors. In  order  to  give  to  the  readers  of  the 
Philadelphia  Photographer  an  idea  of  the 
manner  in  which  Mr.  Davanne  has  treated 
his  subject,  I  will  give  an  extract  from  the 
introduction  to  the  chapter  treating  of  dry 
processes :  they  will  there  find  observations 
which  will  prove  useful  to  them. 

"  The  different  methods  of  dry  processes 
are  numerous;  we  shall  study  only  those 
which  are  most  in  use  and  which  give  the 
best  results.  These  are,  in  our  opinion, 
the  albumenized  collodion  (Taupenot  pro- 
cess) ;  the  collodion  and  tannin  ;  the  dry 
wax-paper,  now  but  little  used.  In  all 
these  processes  the  starting-point  is  the 
same:  the  obtaining  of  a  coating  of  iodide 
and  bromide  of  silver  on  a  permeable  and 
insoluble  medium;  but  whatever  may  be 
that  medium,  from  the  time  when  the  prep- 
aration commences  to  dry,  the  nitrate  of 
silver  in  excess  becomes  concentrated;  it 
reacts  on  the  soluble  salts  of  silver  to  form 
crystals  of  iodo-nitrate  of  silver,  which  de- 
stroy completely  the  prepared  surface. 
Besides,  the  nitrate  of  silver  reacts  on  the 
organic  matter  of  the  sensitive  coating,  im- 
pairs it,  and  renders  impossible  the  develop- 
ment of  a  passable  print.  Therefore,  as  a 
first  condition,  it  is  necessary  to  wash  the 
preparation  and  remove  all  excess  of  nitrate 
of  silver;  the  consequence  is  an  immediate 
diminution  of  sensibility,  so  that  up  to  the 
present  day  all  the  known  dry  processes  still 
remain  a  little  less  sensitive  than  the  wet 
collodion,  although  much  progress  has  been 
made  in  this  direction.  As  a  second  condi- 
tion, it  is  necessary  to  maintain  the  perme- 
ability of  the  coating  ;  it  is  for  that  reason 
that  we  cannot  use  ordinary  collodion  simply 
washed,  for  in  drying  on  the  plate  it  loses 
its  spongy  texture,  and  is  transformed  into 
a  pellicle  impervious  to  liquids,  giving  only 
a  superficial  print  without  any  vigor,  be- 
cause the  reagents  cannot  penetrate  the 
thickness  of  the  coating.  A  very  old  col- 
lodion, impaired  by  age,  or  one  made  with 
gun-cotton,  powdery,  and  of  bad  quality, 
produces    a    disaggregated    coating    more 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHED. 


313 


easily  permeable  by  reagents,  and  gives, 
used  dry,  after  a  simple  washing,  acceptable 
prints,  but  always  inferior  to  those  made 
by  the  processes  which  we  are  going  to  de- 
scribe if  they  are  well  used.  The  general 
process  for  dry  collodion  consists,  then,  in 
leaving  in  the  pores  of  the  collodion  a 
soluble  or  permeable  substance  which  can, 
in  the  developing,  be  replaced  or  penetrated 
by  the  reagents." 

After  having  thus  sot  forth  the  ingenious 
theory  of  the  drj7  processes,  Mr.  Davanne 
gives  the  description  of  the  principal 
methods.  I  repeat  it,  this  manual  is  one 
of  the  most  complete  that  has  ever  been 
written;  unfortunately  it  has  been  only 
autographed,  and  but  a  few  copies  struck 
off. 

Since  July  1st  the  French  Photographic 
Society  and  the  Syndical  Chamber  are 
taking  their  vacation  ;  but  the  majority  of 
the  members  only  dispersed  after  having 
made  provision  of  apparatus  and  new 
products  that  they  intend  trying  in  their 
excursions.  For  photographers  it  is  the 
season,  not  of  rest,  but  for  study  and  ex- 
periment. I  will  inform  you  of  the  inter- 
esting events  which  cannot  fail  to  be  com- 
municated to  me. 


HINTS  UNDER  THE  SKYLIGHT. 

by  r.  j.  chute. 
The  Light  and  the  Subject. 
Different  subjects  require  different 
lights.  This  is  well  understood  by  all  ex- 
perienced posers,  hut  there  are  many  who 
are  inquiring,  whose  experience  has  been 
limited,  and  whose  minds  are  open  for  the 
reception  of  such  additional  light  and  knowl- 
edge as  may  help  them  up  in  the  way  of 
improvement  towards  the  goal  of  excel- 
lence. There  are  certain  standard  rules  or 
conditions  which  are  to  he  observed  with  a 
subject  possessing  fair  and  favorable  quali- 
ties ;  that  is,  regular  features,  rather  fair 
complexion,  and  steady  nerves.  With  this 
class  of  subjects,  we  say  light  at  an  angle  of 
forty-five  degrees,  quite  subdued,  with 
about  such  appearance  of  light  and  shade  on 
the  face  as  is  desired  in  the  finished  picture. 
From  this  as  a  standard  there  will  be  en- 


countered a  great  variety  of  exceptions. 
In  one  direction  they  run  down  through 
the  tender  grades  of  youth  to  the  soul-har- 
rowing baby,  that  must  be  caught  almost  as 
a  bird  on  the  wing.  In  the  other  it  goes 
up  into  the  stern  and  swarthy  hues  of  mus- 
cular manhood,  and  on  through  the  period 
of  silvering  locks  and  declining  years,  down 
to  the  other  end  of  the  scale,  where  we  must 
deal  with  trembling,  tottering  old  age. 

The  fair  complexions  of  children  make 
them  favorable  subjects  for  photography, 
and  the  difficulty  sometimes  of  keeping 
them  still  is  offset  by  the  advantage  of  rapid 
execution.  To  gain  this  rapidity,  however, 
usually  requires  a  different  arrangement  of 
light,  or  in  other  words  no  arrangement  at 
all,  for  the  best  method  is  to  use  all  there  is 
to  be  had  ;  an  impression  may  be  secured  in 
such  a  light  with  a  very  near  approach  to 
an  instantaneous  exposure.  With  light 
drapery,  which  only  is  appropriate  for  chil- 
dren, and  which  the  photographer  should 
always  insist  upon,  the  subject  itself  becomes 
a  source  of  light,  so  that  even  dark  objects 
surrounding  become  sufficiently  illuminated 
for  very  rapid  work.  From  this  it  will  be 
seen  that  but  little  effort  or  skill  is  to  he 
exercised  in  the  lighting  for  very  young 
children,  the  main  thing  being  to  manage 
them  so  as  to  secure  an  impression,  with  all 
the  light  that  can  be  brought  to  bear.  This 
usually  calls  for  all  the  resources  a  man  is 
possessed  of. 

Proceeding  from  our  standard  in  the 
other  direction  we  soon  find  exercise  for  all 
the  talent  we  may  possess  in  adapting  the 
light  to  the  various  subjects  that  come 
before  us.  The  first  may  be  one  of  the  lords 
of  creation,  who  ordinarily  might  be  an  ex- 
cellent subject,  but  having  just  returned  from 
his  summer  vacation,  when  he  has  prom- 
ised his  picture  to  an  indefinite  number  of 
friends,  with  whom  he  went  boating,  fishing 
and  hunting,  he  has  become  as  brown  as  a 
piece  of  bronze  statuary,  and  presents  a  face 
almost  as  difficult  to  photograph.  In  coun- 
try places  these  subjects  are  common  the 
year  round.  To  light  such  a  face  the  main 
point  is  to  avoid  shadows.  The  softest  light 
possible  must  he  had,  and  then  the  shadows 
will  be  strong  enough.  The  resulting  pic- 
ture  bears  little   comparison   to  the  actual 


314 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


light  seen  on  the  face;  both  light  and 
shadows  are  exaggerated,  and  violent  con- 
trasts intrude  themselves,  unless  great  care 
is  taken  to  get  a  subdued  light,  and  give  a 
liberal  exposure. 

The  subject  with  thin  features,  sunken 
cheeks  and  eyes,  requires  to  be  set  well  back 
from  under  the  light,  using  a  low  front- 
light  as  much  as  possible.  A  top-light  gives 
the  shadows  too  strong  under  the  brows  and 
on  the  cheeks,  while  a  side-light  makes  too 
much  contrast  between  the  two  sides  of  the 
face,  one  being  strongly  illuminated  and 
the  other  in  deep  shadow.  Subjects  with 
coarse  heavy  features  and  those  wrinkled 
with  age,  require  similar  treatment. 

Those  with  gray  or  white  hair  are  often 
excellent  subjects,  but  a  diffused  light  is 
necessary  to  avoid  rendering  the  hair  an 
indefinite  blotch  where  the  strongest  light 
falls.  With  many  of  these  subjects  some- 
thing of  the  Rembrandt  style  of  lighting  is 
very  effective.  The  hair  is  kept  mostly  in 
shadow,  and  all  its  detail  is  given  with  the 
utmost  fidelity. 

As  we  approach  the  second  childhood  of 
our  subjects,  the  feeble,  unsteady  nerves 
often  compel  a  resort  to  much  the  same 
practice  that  we  use  in  the  case  of  little 
ones, — plenty  of  ligKt  and  short  exposure. 

It  is  not  only  the  difference  in  the  subject 
that  requires  a  modification  of  the  light  to 
suit  the  occasion,  but  it  is  the  difference  in 
the  size  of  the  picture.  A  light  that  would 
be  suitable  for  a  small  picture,  such  as  a  card 
or  cabinet,  would  not  do  for  one  of  imperial 
or  half-life  size.  The  larger  the  picture  the 
less  contrast  must  there  be  in  light  and 
shadow.  The  theory  of  this  is  obvious  if 
we  consider  that  the  amount  of  light  re- 
ceived in  the  middle-tints  or  half-shadows 
on  the  face  is  concentrated  into  a  very  small 
space  in  the  card  photograph,  we  will  say 
the  half  of  a  square  inch,  and  acquires  con- 
siderable vigor,  but  when  the  same  amount 
of  light  is  to  be  distributed  over  three  or 
four  square  inches  of  surface,  as  in  the  half- 
life  size,  it  becomes  too  feeble  to  be  suffi- 
ciently assisted  by  any  additional  length  of 
exposure  that  may  be  given.  The  onlj- 
remedy,  therefore,  is  additional  light  in  the 
shadows,  or,  in  other  words,  but  little  con- 
trast in  light  and  shade. 


BIBLIOGRAPHIC. 

It  gives  us  pleasure  to  announce  a  second 
edition  of  the  Handbook  of  Photography,  by 
our  good  friend,  Prof.  H.  Vogel.  We  have 
before  us  a  copy  in  German,  and  find  it 
greatly  improved.  New  and  important 
matter  has  been  added  to  it,  including  the 
recent  researches  of  the  author,  covering  a 
large  number  of  pages. 

We  congratulate  the  Professor  on  this 
evidence  of  the  appreciation  of  his  work  in 
his  own  country,  and  hope  the  demand  may 
call  for  many  succeeding  editions. 

It  was  scarcely  announced  that  a  new 
edition  was  to  appear  in  Germany,  when  we 
discovered  that  our  American  edition  was 
about  exhausted,  and  we  set  about  making 
arrangements  for  the  issue  of  the  second 
edition  here.  We  expect  to  publish  it  in  a 
few  weeks  with  all  the  additions  and  im- 
provements. We  are  satisfied  the  work  has 
lost  none  of  its  popularity  in  this  country, 
or  in  England,  and  we  shall  feel  a  great 
deal  of  satisfaction  in  offering  this  revised 
edition  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Handbook  of  Photog- 
raphy to  American  photographers. 

Photography  in  America.  A  complete 
Treatise  of  Practical  Photography.  By 
A.  Liebert.     Second  Edition.     Paris. 

This  is  a  new  French  work  just  issued, 
and  one,  we  have  no  doubt,  that  will  fill  as 
important  a  place  in  France,  as  Dr.  Vogel's 
does  in  Germany  or  America. 

Mr.  Liebert  is  one  of  the  leading  photog- 
raphers of  Paris,  and  was  referred  to  in  very 
high  terms  in  our  "  French  Correspondence" 
recently.  He  was  for  some  years  a  resi- 
dent of  this  country,  and  we  are  glad  he 
found  so  much  here  that  was  valuable  and 
instructive,  as  to  lead  him  to  incorporate  it 
into  his  book,  and  give  it  the  title  of  Pho- 
tography in  America.  In  his  "  Preface," 
the  author,  referring  to  the  purpose  of  his 
work,  and  the  want  of  something  more 
practical  and  comprehensible  than  has  here- 
tofore been  published,  says  :  "  It  is  to  fill 
this  want,  and  at  the  same  time  to  place 
under  the  eyes  of  our  readers  a  comparative 
statement  of  the  processes  and  material 
used  in  the  United  States  of  America,  and 
of  those  used  in  France,  that  we  have  pre- 
pared this  work,  by  means  of  which  any 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


315 


person  of  moderate  intelligence,  and  with- 
out a  practical  knowledge  of  chemistry,  will 
be  able  to  practice  photography,  and  easily 
arrive  at  satisfactory  results." 

We  wish  all  photographic  writers  would 
resolve  to  profit  by  Mr.  Liebert's  example 
in  the  following,  the  italics  being  our  own  : 

' '  We  will  endeavor  to  give  in  the  shortest 
and  clearest  manner  possible  all  the  formulae 
used  by  us,  and  which  have  given  us  the 
best  results;  by  this  means  saving  begin- 
ners the  fatiguing  and  costly  experiments 
that  we  were  obliged  to  make ;  they  will 
thus,  without  much  labor,  profit  by  our 
long  experience." 

Our  own  country  is  made  up  so  largely  of 
representatives  of  other  countries,  many  of 
whom  find  it  difficult  to  acquire  a  thorough 
knowledge  of  the  English  language,  and 
can  receive  instruction  much  better  through 
their  native  tongue,  that  we  would  suggest 
that  the  two  works  we  have  noticed  above 
might  be  very  useful  to  our  German  and 
French  photographers,  and  we  will  be  glad 
to  supply  either  that,  may  be  ordered 
through  us.     Price,  $4  each. 

Instruction  in  Photography.  By  Capt. 
Abney,  R.E.,  F.C.S.,  F.R.A.S.  An- 
other new  work  issued  by  Piper  &  Carter, 
London.     Benerman  &  "Wilson,  Phila. 

The  name  of  Captain  Abaey  is,  doubtless, 
familiar  to  most  of  our  readers,  and  we 
should  say  he  has  here  given  us  a  very 
practical  and  useful  work.  It  is  only  about 
the  size  of  our  MosaicsTyet  it  contains  full 
details  of  the  Wet  Process,  about  all  the 
"  Dry  Processes  "  in  use ;  several  methods  of 
"Mechanical  Printing,"  "Photolithogra- 
phy and  Zincography,"  besides  "Hints  on 
Apparatus,"  "Defects  in  Negatives," 
"Select  Processes,"  "Silver  Printing," 
"Theory  of  Photography,"  etc.r  all  in  a 
very  concise  and  readable  form..  We  have 
it  for  sale.     75  cents. 


INDUSTRIAL  EXHIBITIONS. 

The  Fifth  Annual  Exhibition  of  the  Cin- 
cinnati Industrial  Exposition  is  now  open, 
and  with  evidences  already  of  more  abun- 
dant success  than  its  favored  predecessors 
experienced.  It  looks  as  if  these  annual 
exhibitions  would  become  permanent  insti- 


tutions in  all  the  leading  cities.  Already 
Chicago,  Louisville,  and  Indianapolis  have 
imitated  the  example  set  by  Cincinnati, 
and  no  doubt  the  result  of  your  great  Cen- 
tennial will  induce  the  managers  to  con- 
tinue it  on  from  year  to  year.  Your  Direc- 
tor-General, Mr.  A.  T.  Goshorn,  is  a  gentle- 
man who  has  had  ample  experience  in  the 
duties  to  which  he  has  been  called,  and  I 
can  heartily  commend  him  to  you  as  a  gen- 
tleman in  every  way  qualified  for  the  posi- 
tion. What  comments  I  shall  have  to 
make  upon  the  display  here  must  properly 
be  confined  to  the  Art  Hall.  Power  Hall, 
with  its  acre  or  more  of  working  machinery, 
Floral  Hall,  with  its  grottoes  and  cascades 
of  flowers,  and  the  multitude  of  articles 
exhibited,  which  go  together  to  make  up  an 
exposition,  suggest  subjects  which  are  not 
suited  to  a  photographic  journal.  Pho- 
tography, however,  is  allied  to  the  arts, 
and  those  who  have  won  distinction  in  her 
ranks  are  as  much  entitled  to  be  considered 
artists  as  those  who  have  gained  honor  and 
fame  with  canvas  and  palette.  It  is  this 
intimate  relationship  which  reminds  me  of 
the  great  advantage  which  these  annual 
exhibitions  of  fine  paintings  possess  for  the 
photographer  ambitious  to  advance  in  his 
chosen  field.  Here  spread  before  him  are 
the  works  of  eminent  American  artists, 
Bierstadt,  Church,  Whittredge,  Durand, 
and  De  Haas.  Germany  sends  her  best  rep- 
resentatives, Achenbach,  Knaus,  Muller, 
Hoff.  and  Meyer,  while  France  with  greater 
prodigality  presents  the  names  of  artists 
known  the  world  over :  Geiome,  whose 
pictures  are  always  sold  before  they  are 
finished  ;  August  Bonheur,  who  is  fast 
gaining  the  reputation  of  painting  animals 
better  than  his  sister  Rosa,  Decamps,  Jules 
Bretoa,Meissonnier,Lamheret,  Bouguereau, 
Cabanel  et  al.  The  collection  of  engravings 
and  water  colors  is  also  quite  extensive,  par- 
ticularly the  engravings,  showing  the  ad- 
vance in  the  different  departments,  from  al- 
most its  earliest  introduction.  Mr.  Claghom 
of  your  city  has  kindly  loaned  his  valuable 
collection,  without  doubt  the  most  complete 
of  any  in  this  country.  These  exhibitions  of 
art,  more  particularly  the  display  of  photo- 
graphs at  our  annual  conventions,  make 
their  impress  for  good  on  the  photographer, 


316 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


and  I  am  happy  to  include  as  an  aid  to  this 
effective  agent,  your  valuable  journal  and 
the  current  literature  of  the  profession. 
The  two  causes  put  together  have  worked  a 
wonderful  advance  in  photography  during 
the  past  five  years.  One  has  but  to  compare 
the  prints  of  to-day  with  those  made  a  few 
years  back,  to  note  the  effect  of  this  rapid 
progress.  As  he  looks  at  the  old  pictures  he 
smiles  as  he  thinks  that  he  ever  regarded 
them  with  favor,  and  wonders  how  he  could 
have  been  so  blind  to  the  requirements  of 
art,  and  so  ignorant  of  all  rules  of  good 
taste.  Then  if  he  still  has  any  doubts  on 
the  subject,  let  him  note  in  comparison  the 
difference  in  style — or  rather  the  lack  of  it 
— in  the  frames  and  mats  which  he  formerly 
used,  and  those  with  which  he  now  embel- 
lishes his  pictures.  The  cheap  oval  imita- 
tion rosewood  frame  was  then  generally 
used,  and  the  polished  black  walnut  and  the 
various  patterns  of  square  frames  of  veneered 
mouldings,  which  add  so  much  and  set  off 
our  modern  photographs,  were  not  then  in 
vogue.  Dealers  more  than  photographers 
themselves  notice  this  change  for  the  better. 
Mr.  Collins  will  tell  you  that  the  card 
mount,  which  was  the  standard  card  a  few 
years  ago  (number  two,  gilt),  has  been  re- 
placed altogether  by  others  of  a  better  grade 
and  costing  twice  as  much.  The  American 
Optical  Company's  apparatus  has  almost 
entirely  superseded  the  cheaper  quality  of 
boxes,  and  in  all  branches  of  photographic 
materials,  the  best  always  commands  the 
readiest  sale.  These  few  items  which  have 
suggested  themselves  as  showing  progress 
in  the  right  direction,  have  been  attributed 
in  a  great  measure  to  the  results  of  our  pho- 
tographic exhibitions  and  the  exposition  of 
fine  arts,  which  are  becoming  a  feature  in 
the  United  States.  The  subject  has  been 
barely  touched  upon,  but  enough  has  been 
stated,  let  us  hope,  to  find  abundant  encour- 
agement for  the  perpetuation  of  the  National 
Photographic  Association  and  the  public 
display  of  photographs.  D.  K.  Cady. 

Thanks  to  Scovill  Manufacturing  Company, 
New  York,  for  lists  of  new  importations — 
German  glass  baths,  glassware,  filters,  Joseph 
paper,  B.  P.  C.  glass,  etc.  Also  of  roller  presses, 
printing  cards,  Phenix  collodion,  varnishes,  etc. 


SOCIETY  GOSSIP.* 

Pennsylvania  Association. — The  com- 
peting pictures  were  voted  upon  by  the  As- 
sociation, and  on  the  question  as  to  whether 
they  were  up  to  the  standard,  there  were 
but  two  dissenting  votes.  Mr.  H.  F.  Smith 
had  a  majority  for  his  picture,  and  was 
awarded  the  gold  medal 

Mr.  Saylor  expressed  himself  as  much 
pleased  with  the  work  exhibited,  and  said 
he  would  be  willing  to  give  anybody  a  gold 
medal  that  would  enable  him  to  do  as  well. 

The  Secretary  thought  that  notwithstand- 
ing there  were  but  few  competitors,  we  had 
seemed  to  accomplish  something  by  having 
a  standard  picture.  It  had  stimulated  those 
who  did  compete,  and  the  result  was  some 
work  that  was  almost  unanimously  declared 
up  to  the  standard  by  a  vote  of  the  Associ- 
ation, and  much  better  than  any  that  had 
ever  before  been  presented. 

Mr.  demons  made  some  remarks  on  the 
use  of  alum  for  prints  after  fixing.  He  had 
found  that  putting  them  through  a  satur- 
ated solution  of  alum,  letting  them  remain 
in  the  bath  about  two  minutes,  rinsing  well, 
and  repeating  the  operation  three  times, 
freed  them  from  hj'po  completely.  He  had 
been  unable  to  discover  any  trace  of  hypo 
by  the  most  sensitive  test.  Mr.  demons 
read  the  article  by  W.  H.  Sherman,  in  the 
Philadelphia  Photographer  for  September, 
referring  to  his  process,  and  took  exceptions 
to  Mr.  Sherman's  claim  that  the  sulphur 
remaining  in  the  print  would  destroy  it. 
He  had  experimented  by  soaking  these 
prints  in  a  sulphur  bath,  and  had  proved 
that  after  being  dried  the  sulphur  had  no 
more  action  on  the  print  than  if  it  had 
never  been  submitted  to  it. 

Mr.  Trask  spoke  of  having  had  trouble 
with  iron  for  developer.  He  had  used  a 
sample  that  caused  a  precipitate  on  the 
plate  soon  after  the  development  com- 
menced. It  grew  worse  as  he  used  it  and 
soon  became  worthless,  fogging  the  plate 
soon  after  the  developer  was  poured  on. 
He  thought  much  of  the  trouble  photog- 
raphers experienced  in  this  direction  was 

*  Now  the  season  for  the  meeting  of  societies 
has  arrived,  we  would  be  glad  to  have  from  the 
Secretaries  full  reports  of  their  meetings. — Ed. 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


317 


due  to  the  inferior  quality  of  the  iron.  The 
sample  he  had  found  trouble  with  had  a  yel- 
lowish appearance  as  if  it  contained  traces 
of  sulphur. 

Mr.  Smith  spoke  of  noticing  the  same 
appearance  and  having  the  same  trouble  as 
Mr.  Trask. 


The  Executive  Committee  of  the  Na- 
tional Photographic  Association. 

A  meeting  of  the  Executive  Committee 
was  held  in  New  York  on  the  10th  of  Sep- 
tember. 

The  report  of  the  Local  Secretary,  Mr. 
Hesler,  was  read  and  referred  to  the  audit- 
ing committee. 

A  letter  was  read  from  President  Rulof- 
son,  announcing  his  safe  arrival  home,  and 
the  satisfaction  expressed  by  the  Western 
photographers  at  having  one  of  their  num- 
ber made  president,  and  their  disappoint- 
ment that  San  Erancisco  had  not  been 
chosen  as  the  place  for  the  1875  Convention 
instead  of  Boston. 

The  publication  of  the  annual  report  was 
discussed.  The  Treasurer  reported  less 
than  200  copies  subscribed  for,  whereupon 
it  was  resolved  that  the  report  be  not 
printed  until  300  copies  were  paid  for,  or  if 
the  members  pay  their  dues  by  November 
1st,  the  report  will  be  printed  and  sent  free 
to  the  members,  and  the  money  received 
for  copies,  returned  to  the  subscribers. 

It  is  hoped  that  this  last  plan  will  be 
popular,  and  that  the  dues  will  be  forth- 
coming at  once,  and  the  interesting  report 
no  longer  delayed. 

MATTERS    OF   THE 


Membe7'ship  costs  $2  ;  annual  dues,  $4,  in 
advance.  Employes  half  rates.  Life  mem- 
bership. $25,  and  no  dues.  It  is  proposed 
presently  to  double  the  fees  for  life  mem- 
bership. 

Members  are  hereby  notified  that  their 
annual  dues  were  payable  June   1st,   1874. 


Employers  $4,  and  employe's  $2.  The 
Treasurer  urges  that  prompt  remittances  be 
made.     Please  remit  now. 

All  remittances  of  back  dues  should  be 
sent  to  the  Treasurer,  Albert  Moore,  828 
Wood  Street,  Philadelphia,  and  fees  and 
dues  for  new  members  to  the  Permanent 
Secretary,  Edward  L.  Wilson,  Seventh  and 
Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

Notes. — All  those  who  agreed  to  become 
life  members  at  Chicago  have  not  sent  in 
their  fees  yet,  and  the  list  cannot  be  pub- 
lished until  they  do. — The  1874  badge  may 
be  had  of  the  Permanent  Secretary.  Send 
a  three-cent  stamp  for  postage. — Your  dues 
were  due  June  1st.  Have  you  paid  ? — Read 
the  report  of  the  Executive  Committee. 

What  will  they  Do  with  it  ? — The  Pro- 
ceedings of  the  Chicago  Convention  seem  to 
trouble  the  Executive  Committee  consider- 
ably. It  is  a  shame  that  they  should  be  so 
perplexed,  but  it  is  one  of  those  things 
which  result  from  the  unthinking  way  in 
which  conventions  transact  their  business. 
When  the  Association  started,  the  publishers 
of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer  volun- 
teered to  print  the  Proceedings  free  of 
charge  in  return  for  the  privilege  of  the 
exclusive  right  to  do  so.  This  privilege  the 
Association  thought  best  to  withdraw,  yet 
our  publishers  continued  to  give  a  complete 
report  all  in  one  issue,  while  those  who 
hankered  after  the  "  lucrative  job,"  gar- 
bled up  the  report,  and  spread  it  through 
nearly  a  year  of  numbers.  Not  content 
with  this,  the  Association  voted  at  Buffalo 
that  the  Proceedings  should  be  published 
entire  in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer,  and 
five  hundred  extra  copies  printed  for  mem- 
bers who  do  not  get  that  magazine.  This 
was  unwise,  for  the  treasury  was  too  poor ; 
and  it  was  unnecessary,  for  the  publishers 
would  have  printed  the  report  free  in  re- 
turn for  the  original  privilege  of  exclusive 
right.  But  the  voice  of  the  Convention 
was  "no."  Their  desires  were  followed, 
the  Association  run  in  debt,  and  complaints 
made  of  the  cost.  Discontent  again  arose, 
and  at  Chicago  it  was  voted  that  the  Asso- 
ciation deprive  all  magazines  of  the  privi- 
lege of  printing  the  report,  and  undertake 
the  work  itself,  and  sell  the  copies  at  cost. 


318 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Thereupon  an  effort  has  been  made  to  sell ' 
the  copies,  and  not  enough  have  been  sold 
to  pay  for  the  report,  and  the  dues  being 
unpaid,  the  Treasury  worse  than  empty — 
overdrawn — and  the  Association  in  debt,  of 
course  the  report  cannot  yet  be  printed 
until  more  subscriptions  come  in  or  the  dues 
be  paid.  We  do  think  it  a  wrong  policy,  to 
say  the  least,  to  charge  for  the  report. 
There  are  many  noble  members  who  live 
where  they  can  never  expect  to  be  able  to 
attend  a  convention,  but  who  pay  their  dues 
promptly,  because  they  see  the  Association 
is  doing  good,  and  who  are  justly  entitled  to 
a  copy  of  this  report  free.  We  do  hope, 
therefore,  that  the  dues  will  come  in  thick 
and  fast  this  month,  that  the  dollars  will  be 
returned  to  the  subscribers  for  copies  of  the 
report,  that  the  "lucrative  job"  of  print- 
ing the  report  will  be  given  to  somebody, 
and  that  a  copy  of  the  same  will  be  promptly 
sent  to  all  members  whose  dues  are  paid, 
free!  Gentlemen,  if  the  Association  is 
worth  upholding  at  all,  fulfil  your  obliga- 
tions to  it.  You  will  regret  it  if  you  allow 
it  to  go  down,  and  if  it  goes  down,  you  have 
had  a  great  deal  more  fair  warning  than  we 
have  any  business  to  give  you, 'but  our 
earnestness  must  be  our  excuse  for  our  pre- 
sumption. 

OBITUARY. 

A  Veteran  Gone. — We  regret  to  be 
called  upon  to  announce  the  death  of  one  of 
the  veterans  of  photography,  Mr.  F.  B. 
Gage,  of  St.  Johnsbury,  Vt.,  which  occur- 
red on  the  23d  of  August,  1874.  From  Mr. 
Gage's  family  we  learn  that  he  was  born 
July  29th,  1824.  He  learned  daguerreo- 
typing  when  about  twenty-two  years  of  age, 


and  in  1850  started  the  photograph  business 
in  St.  Johnsbury,  where  he  continued  to 
conduct  it  for  a  period  of  twenty-four  years, 
or  up  to  the  time  of  his  death. 

Mr.  Gage  enjoyed  a  good  reputation  as  an 
artist,  and  was  one  of  the  most  industrious 
experimentalists  in  the  business.  To  him 
the  fraternity  owes  much  of  the  progress 
that  has  been  made  in  the  various  photo- 
graphic processes.  In  July,  1869,  he  patented 
in  the  United  States,  Great  Britain,  and 
France,  a  process  for  using  diffused  light  in 
the  camera  for  the  purpose  of  giving  detail 
"  so  as  to  render  visible  slight  gradations  of 
shade,  both  in  the  light  and  dark  parts  of 
the  picture,  and  to  unite  softness  and 
strength." 

We  well  remember  meeting  Mr.  Gage  in 
New  York,  by  his  request,  to  examine  the 
merits  of  this  invention,  and  how  we  were 
almost  sworn  to  secrecy  before  he  ventured 
to  reveal  the  principle  on  which  his  claim 
was  based.  Previous  to  this  he  also  patented 
an  improvement  in  photographic  cameras. 
He  was  a  man  of  more  than  ordinary 
genius,  and  somewhat  eccentric  withal, 
was  always  inventing  and  trying  new  pro- 
cesses. It  is  said  he  "  hardly  ever  finished 
two  sets  of  pictures  by  the  same  process." 

Mr.  Gage  possessed  a  good  deal  of  liter- 
ary talent,  was  a  frequent  contributor  to 
local  publications  of  current  literature,  as 
well  as  to  this  journal  on  the  various  pro- 
cesses of  photography,  in  which  he  always 
manifested  a  deep  interest.  .  It  is  sad  to  see 
the  pioneers  of  our  art  passing  away  from 
us,  and  when  such  men  as  Mr.  Gage  go, 
they  leave  a  vacancy  that  is  not  easily  filled, 
and  their  memory  is  cherished  by  those  who 
are  benefited  by  the  results  of  their  life- 
long efforts. 


Pictores  Received. — From  Mr.  Julius  Hall, 
Great  Barrington,  Mass.,  a  number  of  stereos 
of  landscape,  mountain,  waterfall,  and  garden 
scenery,  which  are  exquisitely  fine  in  all  the 
qualities  that  go  to  make  up  a  first-class  pho- 
tograph.    The  subjects  are  well  chosen,  the  com- 


position is  excellent,  while  the  lighting  and 
chemicai  effects  are  all  that  can  be  desired. 
From  Messrs.  Montfort  &  Hill,  Burlington, 
Iowa,  some  stereos,  cabinets,  and  cards,  all  very 
creditable  work.  The  delineation  of  light  drapery 
in  some   of  the  cabinets  is   verv  successful.     A 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


319 


fine  cabinet  specimen  from  Mr.  E.  E.  Henry, 
Leavenworth,  Kansas.  From  Mr.  I.  B.  Webster, 
Louisville,  Ky.,  some  very  successful  card  sam- 
ples of  the  glace  process.  Cards  also  from  Mr. 
J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Maine  ;  J.  Lee  Knight; 
Topeka,  Kansas;  E.  P.  Libby,  Keokuk.  Iowa; 
C.  M.  Armstrong,  Leon,  Iowa;  and  Hood,  Yar- 
mouth, N.  S.  From  Messrs  Bradley  &  Rulofson, 
San  Francisco,  we  have  a  photographic  view  of 
their  display  in  the  San  Francisco  "State  Fair." 
It  appears  to  be  almost  a  whole  picture  gallery 
in  itself.  Accompanying  the  print  is  a  notice 
from  a  local  paper  giving  a  full  and  flattering 
description.  There  is  nothing  equal  to  these 
state  fairs  and  exhibitions  for  advertising  a  gal- 
lery, and  our  friends  on  the  Pacific  understand  it. 


Important  to  Tourists  and  Health-seek- 
ers.— This  is  the  title  of  a  little  pamphlet  pub- 
lished by  Duhem  Brothers,  landscape  photog- 
raphers, Denver,  Colorado,  giving  some  account 
of  the  climate,  scenery,  distances,  etc.,  and  con- 
taining a  catalogue  of  over  five  hundred  views 
of  the  wild  scenery  of  the  "Switzerland  of 
America.'' 


The  Magic  Lantern  seems  to  have  created  a 
sensation,  and  lots  of  inquiries  come  in  upon  us, 
and  lots  of  slides  have  gone  out.  How  can  any 
photographer  be  so  unwise  as  to  neglect  this 
sure  method  of  increasing  his  revenue  during 
the  dull  months  ? 


Wet  Books  (new  lot)  most  gone.     See  adver- 
tisement. 


Our  Postal  Cards,  Nos.  1  and  2,  have  been 
sent  to  you.  Look  out  for  No.  3,  and  profit  by 
them  all.     No.  4  may  make  you  rich. 


Mr.  W.  H.  Rulofson  has  sent  us  some  hand- 
some views  of  the  interior  of  the  Industrial 
Exhibition  at  this  writing  open  in  San  Fran- 
cisco. One,  of  the  special  display  of  Messrs. 
Bradley  &  Rulofson,  is  particularly  fine,  as 
must  the  pictures  also  be.  Mr.  Rulofson  is 
perfectly  alive  with  energy  seemingly,  since  his 
visit  to  Chicago.  We  hope  he  cannot  keep  away 
from  the  conventions  hereafter. 


The  Burnt-in  Enamel  Process. — Messrs. 
Robinson  &  Cherrill,  who  at  one  time  offered  an 
honest  bargain  to  the  photographers  of  the 
United  States  for  the  purchase  of  their  improved 
method  of  producing  these  pictures,  were 
"  pitched  into  "  by  one  Mr.  Watson,  of  England, 
from  whom,   in  the  beginning  of   their  experi- 


ments, they  purchased  a  process,  Mr.  Watson 
claiming  that  Messrs.  Robinson  &  Cherrill  were 
"  bartering "  his  process.  It  is  a  long  story, 
and  much  ugly  correspondence  has  followed  in 
the  English  journals,  and  one  of  the  American 
ones  which  "  delights  to  bark  and  bite."  Mr. 
Watson  still  insisting  upon  his  claims,  and 
threatening  to  prosecute  the  other  parties, 
Messrs.  Robinson  &  Cherrill  have  sent  us  his 
process  verbatim  as  they  got  it  from  him,  and  it 
will  be  published  in  our  next  number,  with  a 
note  from  them.  It  came  too  late  for  our  cur- 
rent number.  They  declare  it  to  be  "  the  whole 
of  the  Watson  process." 


The  Photographic  Year-Book  for  1874, 
published  by  Dr.  E.  Horning,  Vienna,  is  before 
us.  It  contains  a  list  of  the  various  photo- 
graphic societies  of  the  world,  many  useful  for- 
mulas, biographical  sketches,  a  complete  calen- 
dar for  the  year,  and  much  other  useful  infor- 
mation. 


The  Philadelphia  New  Age,  an  admirably 
illustrated  paper,  says  of  the  Philadelphia  Pho- 
tographer : 

"Publications  established  as  the  representa- 
tives of  some  special  interest  are  but  too  apt  to 
get  into  some  stereotyped  ruts,  and  to  rest  satis- 
fied with  respectable  mediocrity.  But  this  is  by 
no  means  the  case  with  the  Photographer. 
Each  number  exhibits  signs  of  intelligent  prog- 
ress. The  publishers  are  alive  to  all  that  is 
going  on  around  them,  as  witness  their  zeal  in 
behalf  of  the  Chicago  Convention,  at  which  we 
are  mortified  to  know  the  Philadelphia  exhib- 
itors were  comparatively  few  in  number.  The 
editor  contributes  regularly  his  '  Views  Abroad 
and  Across,'  which  are  illustrated  with  much 
humor,  and  to  the  '  German  Correspondence'  of 
Dr.  Vogel,  and  'Photography  in  France,'  by 
Ernest  Lacan,  is  added  in  this  number  'Pho- 
tography in  Italy,'  by  A.  Montagne.  The  tech- 
nical articles  are  'Alum,'  by  W.  H.  Sherman; 
Charles  W.  Hearn's  formulas  ;  '  Hints  under  the 
Skylight,'  by  R.  J.  Chute,  and  many  other 
useful  articles." 


Kilburn  Brothers'  Views  of  the  White 
Mountains. — We  have  been  taking  our  annual 
rest  among  the  "  White  Hills'' — delectable  land 
— and  of  course  made  our  usual  visits  to  the  fine 
establishments  of  Messrs.  Kilburn  Brothers,  at 
Littleton,  which  we  described  in  our  May  num- 
ber. They  are  driving  business  most  energeti- 
cally.     They   can    manufacture    10,000    stereo- 


320 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


graphs  per  day.  Recently  they  have  published 
some  most  charming  outdoor  groups,  such  as 
"The  Hop  Gatherers,''  "The  Harvesters," 
"The  Last  Load  of  Hay,"  etc.,  which  are  unex- 
celled. Their  work  is  all  first  class,  and  their 
business  continually  growing,  as  it  deserves  to. 


An  Extra  appears  with  our  present  number 
devoted  to  a  sketch  of  the  life  of  one  of  the 
most  worthy  men  known  to  our  art,  Baron  F.  v. 
Voigtlander,  the  eminent  optician,  whose  name 
is  a  household  word  among  us.  We  have  great 
pleasure  in  giving  it  space,  as  we  always  have  in 
recommending  the  use  of  his  lenses,  for  which 
Messrs.  B.  French  &  Co.,  Boston,  are  his  agents. 
And  where  is  the  photographer  who  does  not  pos- 
sess a  Voigtlander  lens. 


Portraits  by  the  Woodbury  Process. — 
We  have  before  us  a  group  of  twenty  portraits 
of  the  officers  of  the  General  Council  of  the 
Evangelical  Lutheran  Church  of  North  America, 
printed  by  Mr.  J.  Carbutt  at  the  American 
Photo-Relief  Works,  624  N.  24th  Street,  Phila. 
They  are  very  successfully  executed,  and  demon- 
strate the  capabilities  of  the  Woodbury  process. 
When  we  consider  their  absolute  permanency, 
the  pictures  possess  a  value  that  will  be  appre- 
ciated by  those  who  desire  something  in  this  way 
connected  with  historical  associations,  that  will 
stand  as  a  permanent  memento  of  those  who 
have  lived  and  acted  important  parts  in  their 
respective  spheres.  Photographers  who  have 
such  groups  to  make  should  employ  Mr.  Car- 
butt's  aid. 


Mr.  Joseph  Zentmayer,  optician,  of  this 
city,  has  issued  an  illustrated  price  list  of 
microscopes,  microscopic  apparatus,  and  optical 
instruments,  which  is  beautifully  gotten  up,  and 
will  be  useful  to  those  interested  in  this  direction. 


The  Western  Photographic  News  makes  its 
second  appearance  much  enlarged,  and  showing 
evidence  of  enthusiasm  and  enterprise  in  the 
work.  The  subscription  price  is  placed  at  an 
extremely  low  figure,  and  we  fear  our  friend  of 
the  Great  Central  will  find  it  a  costly  advertis- 
ing medium. 

Mr.  A.  W.  Simon,  of  Buffalo,  sends  us  some 
fine  stereographs  of  the  ruins  of  Fort  Erie. 


Art    Afloat. — Mr.  J.  P.   Doremus,   of  Pat- 
erson,  N.  J.,   has  built   a   floating   gallery,   in 


which  he  proposes  to  "do  the  Mississippi 
Valley."  In  the  spring  he  intends  to  add  a 
small  steamer  to  tow  his  establishment,  which 
will  make  him  a  whole  team.     A  novel  idea. 


Ms.  W.  H.  Illingworth,  of  St.  Paul,  Minn., 
has  issued  a  neat  catalogue  of  stereoscopic 
views  in  Minnesota,  Dakota,  Wisconsin,  and 
Colorado,  which  are  photographed  and  published 
by  him. 


During  our  recent  visit  to  New  Hampshire 
we  had  the  pleasure  of  visiting  the  studio  of 
Mr.  Frank  G.Weller,  whose  "  Stereoscopic  Treas- 
ures "  are  so  widely  known.  In  this  line  of  genre 
composition,  or  life  pictures,  Mr.  Weller  has 
few  superiors.  He  has  just  commenced  on  a 
new  series  of  his  treasures,  a  specimen  of  which 
is  before  us,  entitled  "  Ancient  and  Modern 
Music,"  the  instruments  being  the  old- 
fashioned  spinning-wheel  and  the  modern  cabi- 
net organ  or  piano.  The  new  series  will  be 
announced  in  Mr.  Weller's  advertisement,  as 
they  are  issued. 


Old  Walnut  Frames  and  Furniture  made 
to  look  like  new. — How  many  old  frames 
and  pieces  of  furniture  there  are  in  every  gal- 
lery that,  having  become  rusty  and  bruised,  are 
thrown  aside,  or  mar  the  appearance  of  the 
whole  gallery  if  kept  in  use.  We  have  recently 
used  an  article,  called  "Spicer's  Lustrene," 
which  restores  the  bruises  and  scratches,  by  not 
merely  polishing  over  the  wood,  but  it  fills  all 
indentations,  making  the  surface  as  complete 
and  perfect  as  new.  We  can  testify  to  the 
merits  of  this  article  as  being  all  that  is  claimed 
for  it,  and  for  those  who  like  everything  looking 
trim  and  neat  about  the  gallery  there  is  nothing 
more  useful.  The  cost  is  trifling.  It  is  for  sale 
by  Charles  A.  Wilson,  Baltimore,  whose  adver- 
tisement will  give  further  information. 


Mr.  Walter  C.  North,  late  of  Utica,  N.  Y. , 
informs  us  that  so  far  his  experience  as  a  teacher 
in  photography  has  resulted  to  the  entire  satis- 
faction of  his  several  pupils.  Spending  two  or 
three  weeks  at  some  places,  he  has  entirely 
renewed  and  rebuilt  the  business  of  parties,  the 
good  results  produced  entirely  changing  the 
whole  state  of  affairs.  Mr.  North  intends 
opening  a  school  of  instruction  at  Columbus, 
Ohio,  full  particulars  of  which  will  be  given  in 
our  next  issue.  Meanwhile,  those  desiring  his 
services  may  address  him,  care  of  W.  H.  Lim- 
pert,  photographer,  Columbus,  Ohio. 


BARON  FREDERICK  v.  VOIGTLANDER. 
BIOGRAPHICAL  SKETCH. 


TRANSLATED  FROM  THE  BIOGRAPHICAL  LEXICON   OF  THE  INTERNATIONAL  EXHIBITION 

HELD  AT  VIENNA  IN  1873. 


Baron  Frederick  v.  Voigtlander,  a  famous  German  optician,  and  the 
subject  of  this  sketch,  is  a  descendant  of  a  long  line  of  opticians,  who,  for  more 
than  a  century,  have  been  celebrated  for  their  genius  in  inventing  and  skill  in 
constructing  optical  and  technical  instruments.  The  grandfather  of  the  present 
representative  of  the  firm  "Voigtlander  &  Son  "  constructed  several  mathemati- 
cal instruments  which  are  used  in  the  Austrian  army  at  the  present  time.  His 
father  was  the  inventor  of  the  double  opera  glass,  while  his  maternal  grand- 
father, Tiedemann  of  Stuttgart,  was  the  first  optician  of  his  day  in  Germany,  his 
telescopes  being  considered  equal  to  those  of  Dollond  and  Ramsden.  Thus, 
with  an  ancestry  so  distinguished  in  their  peculiar  branch  of  scientific  labor, 
and  with  his  own  tastes  and  talents  so  clearly  defined  in  the  same  field,  it  was 
easy  and  natural  for  Voigtlander  to  take  up  and  continue  the  profession  so  suc- 
cessfully and  honorably  followed  by  his  predecessors. 

He  was  born  at  Vienna  in  the  year  1812,  and,  after  the  completion  of  his 
collegiate  course,  received  from  his  father  the  first  practical  instruction  in  the 
profession  in  which  he  was  to  attain  such  marked  success.  Subsequently  he 
pursued  a  course  of  scientific  study  at  the  Institution  of  Polytechnology,  and 
then  several  years  were  spent  in  Germany,  France,  and  England,  in  study  and 
research,  by  which  his  practical  and  scientific  knowledge  was  greatly  enriched. 

In  the  year  1835  his  father  retired  from  business,  and  Voigtlander  became 
the  head  of  the  firm.  Like  Frauenhofei*,  he  applied  himself  to  the  calculation 
of  the  refracting  and  dispersing  powers  of  glass,  and  constructed  an  apparatus 
to  execute  any  given  radius  up  to  0.0005,  intending  to  make  telescopes  of  larger 
dimensions  than  those  he  had  already  produced,  and  which  Stampfer,  Schuh- 
macher,  and  Gauss  considered  superior  to  those  of  Frauenhofer.  In  1840  he 
made  the  acquaintance  of  Professor  Petzval,  after  whose  design  he  constructed 
the  first  Doable  Portrait  Lens.  From  the  discovery  of  this  instrument  dates  the 
rise  of  modern  photography,  as  previous  to  its  invention  it  had  been  impossible 
to  secure  the  likeness  of  an  animate  object,  owing  to  the  want  of  a  sufficiently 
quick  and  correct  working  lens.  In  this  way  new  avenues  were  opened  to  the 
photographic  art,  and  Voigtlander  entered  the  field  with  an  intelligence,  energy, 


BARON  FREDERICK  V.  VOIGTLANDER. 


and  perseverance  worthy  of  so  great  an  invention.  Soon  his  name  was  known 
throughout  the  world,  and  Vienna  became  the  centre  of  an  industry  which 
France  and  England  could  neither  imitate  nor  control. 

As  a  man  of  business  he  was  eminently  successful,  uniting  with  his  practical 
knowledge  a  rare  ability  for  organizing  and  establishing  agencies  in  the  chief 
cities  of  the  old  and  new  world.  Soon  a  second  establishment  became  necessary 
for  the  manufacture  of  lenses,  and  Brunswick,  the  capital  of  the  Grand  Duchy 
bearing  the  same  name,  was  chosen,  and  to  that  city,  in  1849,  Voigtlander 
transferred  his  family  and  home. 

In  a  short  time  afterwards  he  produced  his  Orthoscopic  Objective,  after  Petz- 
val's  design,  and  notwithstanding  large  numbers  of  view-lenses  of  different 
varieties  appeared,  the  "  Voigtlander's  "  retained  their  high  position,  surpassed 
by  none  of  their  competitors.  The  masterpiece  of  his  skill,  however,  is  the 
Double  Objective  for  Portraits,  of  which  he  has  constructed  eighteen  different 
sizes,  the  sales  of  which  have  reached  the  extraordinary  number  of  twenty-one 
thousand,  an  undeniable  proof  of  their  superiority,  the  many  attempts  of  other 
makers  to  produce  instruments  of  equal  excellence  having  proved  unsuccessful. 
The  invention  of  the  Petzval-Voigtlander  was  the  result  of  the  combined  talent 
and  scientific  knowledge  of  the  gentlemen  whose  names  it  bears,  and  most  of  the 
optical  instruments  were  thenceforth  constructed  after  Petzval's  new  theory, 
which  had  already  been  applied  to  the  Double  Objective.  But  the  hopes  of  the 
scientific  world  were  not  to  be  realized,  as  some  disagreement  arose  between 
these  two  gentlemen,  which  ended  in  their  separation.  Says  Bollmann,  in  his 
Photographic  Journal:  "  It  is  to  be  regretted  that  two  men  of  so  eminent  ability 
were  destined  to  remain  united  for  so  short  a  pei'iod,  as  we  had  hoped  to  greet 
many  new  acquisitions  in  science ;  but  as  it  is  we  are  at  all  events  grateful  for 
the  possession  of  such  men."  It  appears  here  the  proper  place  to  express  our 
deep  regret  that  Voigtlander  was  obliged,  partly  by  the  death  of  his  business 
manager,  and  partly  by  circumstances  which  could  not  fail  to  impress  him 
deeply,  to  relinquish  his  establishment  in  Vienna.  Almost  all  the  leading 
journals  of  that  city  contained  articles  expressive  of  sorrow  at  his  departure. 

In  1842  he  achieved  another  triumph  iu  the  invention  of  an  improved  double 
opera  glass,  the  peculiarity  of  which  consists  in  its  achromatic  eye-pieces.  It  is 
especially  appreciated  in  England,  where  it  is  known  as  the  "  Voigtlander,"  and 
is  used  in  the  army  and  navy,  at  theatres,  races,  etc. 

Personally,  Voigtlander  is  a  man  of  commanding  presence,  possessing  a  grand 
physique,  indicating  vigorous  health ;  a  well-developed  head  and  expressive  coun- 
tenance, showing  him  to  be  a  man  of  quick  perception,  deep  thought,  excellent 
judgment,  and  superior  mental  qualities,  while  his  manners  are  courteous  and 
pleasing.  His  intellectual  attainments  are  by  no  means  confined  to  the  special- 
ties connected  with  his  profession  ;  for  he  is  a  man  of  fine  culture,  speaking  most 
of  the  modern  languages  with  fluency,  and,  of  the  same  .  nativity  as  Mozart, 
Beethoven,  Schubert,  he  is  not  only  a  passionate  admirer  of  classical  music,  but 
he  is  himself  an  amateur  of  no  little  skill.     He  has  a  large  family,  and  in  his 


Baron  Frederick  v.  Voigtlander. 


BARON    FREDERICK   V.  VOIGTLANDER. 


business  affairs  he  is  assisted  by  his  eldest  son  Frederick,  whilst  his  stepson, 
John  Sommer,  Professor  of  Mathematics  at  the  Collegio  Carolina  in  Brunswick, 
who  has  published  a  "  Dioptric  of  Systems  of.  Lenses,"  aids  him  in  the  theoretical 
branch  of  the  business,  thus  enabling  him  to  act  as  Chairman  of  the  Board  of 
Inspection  of  Industrial  Enterprises  and  to  become  the  leading  spirit  thereof. 

A  marked  trait  of  his  character  is  a  noble  benevolence  and  exalted  feeling  of 
humanity.  He  makes  the  best  use  of  his  well-earned  fortune,  and  his  name  is 
always  found  in  connection  with  enterprises  which  have  for  their  object  the 
benefit  of  his  fellow-men.  Among  his  more  recent  donations  to  societies  and 
institutions  may  be  mentioned  3000  florins  to  the  army,  4500  florins  to  the 
Photographic  Society  in  Vienna,  and  20,000  florins  for  industrial  purposes  in 
Hungary.  On  relinquishing  his- Vienna  establishment,  he  assigned  pensions  to 
many  of  his  old  workmen,  their  widows  and  families.  In  the  city,  where  he 
had  so  long  resided,  and  where  he  had  won  his  highest  success,  there  was  a  gen- 
eral feeling  of  regret,  that  a  gentleman  of  so  eminent  ability  and  so  noble  a 
character,  could  not  remain  in  his  native  country. 

The  valuable  discoveries  made  by  Voigtlander  which  proved  of  so  much 
value  in  science  and  the  arts,  not  only  made  him  famous  among  men  of  his 
own  profession,  but  received  official  recognition  from  various  governments,  scien- 
tific institutions,  and  societies.  Among  some  of  the  most  important  awards  given 
him  are  the  following:  In  1841  he  received  from  the  "Societe  des  Arts  et  des 
Metiers,"  in  Paris,  a  silver  medal  for  the  Double  Portrait  Lens;  at  the  London 
Exhibition,  in  1862,  the  first  medal.  In  1867,  at  the  great  Paris  Exposition,, 
the  jury  unanimously  voted  him  the  first  position  among  all  the  leading  opti- 
cian, bestowing  in  addition  the  highest  award — a  silver  medal.  From  the 
Emperor  of  Austria  he  received  a  diploma,  and  subsequently  the  "Order  of 
the  Iron  Cross  of  the  Third  Class,"  whereby  the  order  of  hereditary  knighthood 
was  bestowed  upon  him.  The  Duke  of  Brunswick  also  conferred  upon  him  the 
title  and  dignity  of  a  " Commerzienrath  "  (Counsellor  of  Commerce);  the  King 
of  "Wurtemberg,  the  Gold  Medal  of  Arts  and  Sciences ;  the  King  of  Bavaria, 
a  similar  decoration ;  and,  in  addition,  Voigtlander  is  the  receipient  of  numerous 
other  orders,  medals,  and  decorations. 


ADVERTISING  RATES  FOR  SPECTA 

this  head  is  aot  Co  be  considered  as  always  having  edit 
auything  tending  to  deceive  or  mislead.  Stock-dealer 
sure  to  pay  largely.  Six  lines,  one  insertion,  $2.00,  an 
line — in  advance.  Operators  desiring  situations,  no  chc 
insertion.  Advertisers  will  please  not  ask  us  for  re 
answers  to  parties  who  advertise.    Please  always  add  y 


I/I'IES.  II.  will  he  understood  Hint  matter  under 
oiial  sanction,  though  we  shall  endeavor  to  clear  i(  <jf 

s    Will    III!  I    thlSa    l:i::li:lll    UK    I:     of  ail  Veil  i.sil:,.     -:tlil 

a  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a 
'///c.  Matter  must  be  received  by  the  23d  to  secure, 
commendations,  tiwy  We  earned, 'undertake  In  mail 
our  address  to  the  advert  isoment. 


Foil  Sale. — I  now  offer  for  sale  my  fine  Photo- 
graphic Studio  in  this  city.  Population  120,000, 
location  the  very  best.  All  on  ground  floor  ; 
operating  room  24x40,  with  large  top  and  side 
light,  furnished  with  the  best  instruments  and 
boxes,  etc.  Plenty  of  room  in  every  department, 
and  every  facility  for  making  the  best  work. 
Now  doing  a  great  business.  For  reasons  that 
will  be  satisfactorily  explained  (to  those  who 
mean  business),  I  will  sell  this  gallery  at  one- 
half  its  value.  This  is  a  fine  opening  for  one 
who  wants  a  first-class  gallery  in  the  best  city 
for  business  in  the  United  States.  Please  call 
upon  or  address  W.  C.  Eaton, 

709  Broad  Street,  Newark,  N.  J. 


See  advertisement  of   Rapid 
Photo-Washer. 


We  are  well  acquainted  with  W.  C.  Eaton  and 
his  gallery,  and  would  advise  those  of  our  friends 
who  may  want  a  good  place  to  investigate,  that 
it  is  no  second  rate  affair.     Yours, 

C.  J.  McCarty,  with  Scovill  Mfg.  Co. 

Thorough  Washing  is  the  only  sure  thing. 
Moulton's  Washer  will  do  it  in  a  few  minutes, 
and  no  risk,  or  uncertainty  about  it. 


A  Fortune  For  Sale. — Having  engaged  in 
another  business,  my  gallery  must  be  sold  by 
November  1st.  It  is  the  principal  gallery  within 
a  hundred  miles,  doing  a  fine  business  at  good 
prices,  best  quality  of  work  (as  was  seen  at  the 
convention),  and  has  the  cream  of  the  trade. 
Best  solar  and  everything  else.  The  capital  of 
the  sta-e,  a  lovely  city  of  22,000  people,  in  the 
richest  country.  Will  sell  for  $4000.00  (invoice 
$6000.00),  or,  taking  out  a  few  things  not  often 
used,  leaving  it  still  one  of  the  best  equipped 
galleries  east  or  west,  $3000.00.  Two-thirds 
down.  Will  pay  for  itself  in  a  few  months.  The 
legislature  here  this  winter  will  half  pay  for  it. 
J.  Q.  A.  Tresize,  Springfield,  III. 


For  Sale  at  Half  Price. — One  of  E.  L. 
Brand  &  Co.'s  largest  Cameo  Presses  (the  one  on 
exhibition  at  Chicago),  will  be  sold  at  half  its 
cost.     Address  F.  G-utekunst, 

712  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 

USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


Wanted.— If  I  do  not  sell  out  by  October  15th' 
a  good  operator  and  a  good  printer,  one  of  them 
must  retouch,  and  a  reception  room  hand. 
State  terms  particularly,  and  send  photograph  of 
self.  J.  Q.  A  Tresize,  Springfield,  111. 


Gallery  For  Sale. — Cheap  for  cash.     Pop- 
ulation of  the  place  8000.    Only  one  other  gallery 
in  the  place.     Call  on  or  address  with  stamp 
C.  W.  Rundlett, 
Watertown,  Jefferson  Co.,  Wis. 

$275,00  will  buy  a  good  ground  floor  gallery 
in  the  centre  of  a  manufacturing  town  of  2600 
inhabitants,  in  the  best  farming  country.  Gal- 
lery in  operation  11  years.  Good  fixtures,  good 
side  and  sky  light.  No  opposition  within  11 
miles.     Rent  very  cheap.     Address 

F.  A.  Souders,  Chambersburg,  Pa. 


For  Sale. — The  finest  photographic  parlor  in 

the  handsomest  city  in  the  state   of  New  York. 

Entrance  next  door  to  P.  O.     Cash  only  buys  it. 

Business  for  three  persons,  and  lively.     Address 

Well  G.  Singhi,  Binghampton,  N.  Y. 


Moulton's  Washers  are  giving  general  satis- 
faction. He  is  enlarging  his  manufactory  to  keep 
up  with  the  increasing  demand.  All  orders  filled 
promptly  free  of  box  and  cartage.  He  is  already 
receiving  orders  from  Europe,  as  well  as  all  parts 
of  the  United  States  and  Canadas. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 


For  Sale. — A  portable  photograph  gallery 
with  good  instruments  and  fixtures,  only  one 
within  1 5  miles,  good  business,  will  be  sold  cheap. 
Satisfactory  reason  for  selling.       Address 

F.  E.  Bugbee,  Wilton,  N.  H. 


To  Rent. — A  first-Class  photographic  gallery 
in  every  respect,  doing  a  very  fine  business. 
Parties  wishing  to  rent  must  be  first-class  opera- 
tors, none  other  need  apply  ;  also  must  have  $500 
or  $1000  in  cash,  to  cover  stock  on  hand.  Rent 
reasonable,  and  chances  extraordinary.  Apply 
or  call  at  once  upon 

J.  H.  Dampp,  Corning,  N.  Y. 

VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


A  Photographer  remarked  on  seeing  Moul- 
ton's  Washer:  "  It  is  handsome  enough  to  put 
in  the  reception  room.'' 


Composition  Pictures,  by  Messrs.  Robin- 
son &  Cherrill,  For  Sale. — The  beautiful 
composition  and  combination  pictures  exhibited 
at  the  Chicago  N.  P.  A.,  executed  by  Messrs. 
Robinson  &  Cherrill,  and  for  which  the  Foreign 
Medal  was  awarded,  are  for  sale  at  the  following 
rates  :  Passing  Stranger,  $5  ;  The  Gleaner,  $5  ; 
Study  from  Nature,  $5  :  The  Gypsy,  $5 ;  Lady 
Reading,  $5  ;  Little  Girl,  $5.  Only  one  copy 
each.  Specially  fine  prints.  On  exhibition  and 
for  sale  at  the  office  of  Benerman  &  Wilson, 
Philadelphia. 


Wanted. — Agents  to  travel  through  the  seve 
ral  states.  None  need  apply  except  practical 
photographers,  and  those  acquainted  with  the 
use  of  the  solar  camera.     Apply  to 

H.  L.  Emmons,  Baltimore,  Md. 

Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

For  Sale. — An  A  No.  1  gallery  in  Washing- 
ton, Iowa.  Instruments  and  apparatus  the  very 
best  that  is  made.  As  good  light  and  operating 
room  as  there  is  in  the  western  country.  Every- 
thing nice  and  convenient.  Population  between 
3000  and  4000,  and  a  splendid  country  around  it. 
Only  gallery  in  the  place.  Easy  terms  given  if 
desired.     Address  Austin  Kracaw, 

Washington,  Iowa. 


Wanted. — An  experienced  operator,  must  be 
first-class  in  posing  and  lighting.  Tobacco  chew- 
ers  and  liquor  drinkers  need  not  apply. 

Bushby  &  Hart,  Lynn,  Mass. 


Rare  Chance. — One  of  the  leading  Photograph 
galleries  in  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  for  sale.  Estab- 
lished 11  years.  Strictly  first-class  in  all  its 
appointments  and  prices.  Elegant  specimens. 
And  doing  a  large  business.  This  is  a  chance 
seldom  met  with  as  it  will  be  sold  for  half  its 
value ;  the  proprietor  being  engaged  in  other 
business.  Call  or  address 
Photographer,  733  Fulton  St.,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 

Wanted  a  purchaser  for  an  elegantly  and  well 
furnished  gallery  in  Carrollton,  Mo.  Is  a  live 
place,  business  good,  and  rent  low.  Satisfactory 
reasons  will  be  given  for  selling.  Price  $175.00. 
Address  John  Walker, 

Carrollton,  Mo. 


For  Sale. — A  new  and  beautifully  arranged 
gallery  in  a  building  recently  erected  especially 
for  the  purpose,  newly  fitted  up  with  a  splendid 
light,  and  every  convenience  for  making  first- 
class  work,  in  a  city  of  40,000  inhabitants,  and 
a  well  established  business.  The  proprietor  hav- 
ing two  galleries  in  different  cities,  finding  it 
itnposible  to  do  justice  to  both,  will  sell  the  one 
referred  to  above,  on  reasonable  terms,  for  cash. 
Address  Philadelphia  Photographer . 


For  Sale  at  a  Sacrifice. — A  Good  paying 
gallery  on  one  of  the  best  retail  business  street 
of  St.  Louis,  Mo.     Has  been  established  over  two 
years.      For  sale  at  a  moderate  figure,  for  cash 
only.     Good  reasons  for  selling.     Address 
Chas.  Hammersley,  Rembrandt  Gallery, 

1313  Franklin  Avenue,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 


Wanted. — A  first-class  artist  on  all  kinds  of 
large  work.  Address 

Taylor  &  Brown, 
914  Chestnut  St.,  Philadelphia 

SITUATIONS    WANTED. 

( No  charge  for  advertisements  under  this  head : 

limited  to  four  lines.     Inserted  once  only, 

unless  by  request.) 

4®=  We  cannot  have  letters  directed  to  our  care 
unless  the  parties  send  for  them,  and  send  stamps  to 
pay  postage.  We  cannot  undertake  to  mail  them ; 
please  do  not  request  it. 

A  permanent  situation  as  operator,  printer,  or 
retoucher.  Address  Retoucher,  53  Leverett  St., 
Boston,  Mass. 

By  a  first-class  operator  and  retoucher.  Ad- 
dress Cyanide,  care  of  Geo.  S.  Bryant  &  Co.,  34 
Broomeld  St.,  Boston,  Mass. 

By  an  experienced  operator  and  retoucher, 
with  the  best  of  reference.  Address  "N.  F.,'' 
care  of  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

By  a  young  man  of  over  three  years'  experi- 
ence, a  situation  in  a  first-class  establishment. 
Could  make  himself  useful  in  any  department. 
Address,  stating  terms,  Box  54,  Georgetown, 
Ontario. 


As  operator  in  a  first-class  gallery. 
E.  O.  C.,"  Box  960,  Rockford,  111. 


USE  WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


Address 


As  printer  and  toner  in  a  first-class  gallery. 
Best  of  references.  Address  C.  E.  Hendrickson, 
233  Sixth  St.,  New  York. 

In  a  first-class  gallery  as  operator,  can  do  all 
kinds  of  work  pertaining  to  the  art.  None  but 
first-class  galleries  need  apply.  Address,  stating 
terms,  etc.,  Chicago  Art  Gallery,  Crown  Point, 
Indiana. 

By  a  competent  printer  and  retoucher.  City 
references  given.  Salary  moderate.  Address  S. 
M.  Lyon,  care  of  Dudley  House,  Utica,  N.  Y. 

As  ferrotype  operator,  or  photo,  printer,  of 
twelve  years'  experience.  No  objections  to  the 
country.  Apply  to  Jos.  D.  Parker,  Jr.,  231 
Mifflin' St.,  Philadelphia. 

As  operator  in  some  good  gallery  ;  or  would  not 
object  to  taking  charge  of  a  gallery.  Can  retouch 
negatives.  Address  Photographer,  Box  132, 
Clinton,  Ind. 

By  a  lady  retoucher,  can  color,  spot,  print, 
tone,  and  silver  paper.  Address  Miss  T.,  26  Ori- 
ent Av.,  Brooklyn,  E.  D.,  L.  I. 

As  operator  or  assistant  operator,  understands 
printing  and  toning,  also  retouching.  Address 
L.  Whittling,  Box  195,  Cochranton,  Pa. 

By  a  Lady  as  retoucher.  Specimens  of  re- 
touching sent  if  requested.  Address  Mary  King, 
66  Whitesboro  St.,  Utica,  Oneida  Co.,  N.  Y. 

By  a  young  man  as  operator  or  retoucher.  Ad- 
dress A.  K.  Temple,  101  Oneida  St.,  Utica,  N.  Y. 

As  photographic  operator,  or  general  work- 
man. Best  of  reference  given  and  desired.  Illi- 
nois or  Wisconsin  preferred.  Address  G.  L.  Tem- 
ple, Box  731,  Marshall,  Mich. 

By  a  lady  of  good  moral  character,  as  a  re- 
toucher or  printer,  or  will  do  both,  in  a  first-class 
gallery  in  Boston  or  vicinity.  Address  Lock  Box 
25,  Marlboro,  Mass. 

By  a  first-class  retoucher  or  an  assistant  opera- 
tor. Can  give  best  of  reference  if  desired.  Ad- 
dress Park  Bradway,  Cincinnati,  Ohio. 

As  retoucher  of  negatives.  References  given. 
Address  S.  Sidney,  Omaha,  Neb. 

By  a  young  man  of  steady  habits,  as  assistant 
operator,  or  as  a  printer.  Is  willing  to  make  him- 
self generally  useful.   Address  Box  439,  Elyria,  0. 

By  a  lady,  as  a  good  negative  retoucher.  Ad- 
dress, stating  terms,  Miss  L.  Bowers,  Waverly 
Station,  Suffolk  Co.,  Long  Island,  N.  Y. 

By  a  lady  artist,  a  permanent  situation.  Is  a 
first- class  negative  retoucher,  and  finisher  in  ink 
and  colors.  Address  "S.  E.,"  care  J.  L.  Tobin, 
332  Washington  St.,  Newark,  N.  J. 

As  operator.  Prefer  going  North.  Several 
years'  experience.  Best  references  given.  Ad- 
dress Artist,  Box  287,  Hamilton,  0. 

By  a  lady  who  has  been  two  years  at  Cooper 
Institute,  and  one  year  at  Academy  of  Design, 
as  retoucher  and  colorist.  Can  give  the  best  of 
reference,  etc.  Address  Miss  P.  E.  S.,  Box  1280, 
Binghamton,  N.  Y. 

To  act  in  any  capacity  in  a  first  class  gallery. 
Is  well  acquainted  with  the  use  of  the  Solar 
Camera.  .  Address  Operator,  Lock  Box  182, 
Lawrence,  Kansas. 

By  a  lady,  artist,  to  finish  photographs  in 
colors,  crayons,  or  ink.  Address  F.  C,  care  of 
H.  Wood,  639  Broadway,  New  York. 

By  a  good  negative  retoucher.  Would  prefer 
where  he  can  assist  in  other  branches.  Address 
A.  C.  H.,  Post  Office  Station  D,  New  York. 

USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


In  a  gallery  in  the  city  of  New  York  for  half 
of  each  day,  or  for  three  days  in  the  week,  by  a 
good  color,  ink,  and  crayon  worker,  and  nega- 
tive retoucher.  Address  G.  H.  D.,  Box  2256, 
New  York. 

By  a  young  man,  as  assistant  operator  or 
printer,  or  both,  can  make  himself  useful  in  any 
part,  wishes  to  advance  his  knowledge  of  the  art. 
Address  J.  W.  D.,  Box  175,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 

As  Colorist  and  retoucher,  by  a  lady  of  experi- 
ence. Please  address  Mrs.  0.,  care  Cox  &  Ward, 
56  N.  Charles  St.,  Baltimore,  Md. 

In  a  gallery  where  I  can  learn  coloring  and 
inking,  have  had  some  experience  in  oil  painting, 
can  retouch  and  print.  R.  E.  Brown,  Van  West, 
Ohio. 

SOCIETY  CALENDAR^ 

{Published  for  the  convenience  of  Visiting  Pho- 
tographers and  those,  desiring  to  correspond, ) 
4ST  This  Calendar  is  published  free  to  the  Socie- 
ties, and  we  shall  feel  obliged  for  notice  of  any  changes 
in  time  of  meeting  or  in  the  officers,  also  to  add  any 
we  have  overlooked. 

Buffalo  Photographic  Association. — At  Buffa- 
lo, the  first  Wednesday  evening  of  each  month. 
J.  Samo,  President;  Jennie  M.  Crockett,  Sec'y. 

Boston  Photographic  Association. — At  J.  W. 
Black's  studio,  the  first  Friday  of  each  month. 
E.  J.  Foss,  President ;  C.  H.  Danforth,  Secre- 
tary, 27  Central  Square,  Cambridgeport. 

Photographic  Section  of  the  American  Insti- 
tute, New  York. — At  the  Institute  rooms,  the 
first  Tuesday  of  each  month.  H.  J.  Newton, 
President ;  Oscar  G.  Mason,  Secretary,  Bellevue 
Hospital. 

German  Photographic  Society,  New  York.  — 
At  Nos.  64  and  66  East  Fourth  Street,  New 
York,  every  Thursday  evening.  W.  Kurtz,  Presi- 
dent ;  Edward  Boettcher,  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, 79  Newark  Avenue,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 

Brooklyn  Photographic  Art  Association, 
Brooklyn,  N.  Y. — Fourth  Tuesday  in  each  month, 
at  179  Montague  Street.  Rev.  Dr.  C.  H.  Hall, 
President ;  Chas.  E.  Bolles,  Cor.  Secretary. 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia.  —  Ad- 
journed. 

Pennsylvania  Photographic  Association,  Phil- 
adelphia.— Adjourned. 

Chicago  Photographic  Association. — At  rooms 
of  C.  W.  Stevens,  158  State  Street,  first  Wednes- 
day evening  of  each  month.  G.  A.  Douglas, 
President ;  0.  F.  Weaver,  Secretary,  158  State 
Street. 

Chicago  Photographic  Institute,  Chicago. — 
1st  Monday,  monthly,  at  Chicago  Art  Institute. 
A.  Hesler,  President ;  L.  M.  Melander,  Secre- 
tary, Chicago. 

Maryland  Photographic  Association,  Balti- 
more.— At  rooms  of  C.  A.  Wilson,  7  North 
Charles  Street,  first  Thursday  in  each  month. 
N.  H.  Busey,  President ;  G.  0.  Brown,  Secretary, 
Baltimore,  Md. 

Photographic  Association  of  the  District  of 
Columbia,  Washington,  D.  C. — E.  J  Pullman, 
President;  C.  M.  Bell,  Secretary,  459  Pennsyl- 
vania Ave. ,  Washington.   First  Tuesday,  mon  thly. 

Indiana  Photographic  Association. — At  Indi- 
anapolis, first  Wednesday  monthly.  J.  Perry 
Elliott,  President;  D.  0.  Adams,  Secretary,  In- 
dianapolis. 

Photographic  Association  of  Western  Illinois. — 
At  Galesburg,  first  Wednesday  of  October,  Janu- 
ary, April,  and  July.  S.  T.  Bryan,  President  ; 
J.  F.  Barker,  Secretary,  Galesburg. 

VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


mu^tf  <BMtytM\u\  Jullctm. 


OCTOBEE,    ZEXTie,^! 


NEW  ACCESSORIES. 


THE  ELEGANT 

KUETZ  GAEDEN  BALUSTRADE. 

Pronounced  the  neatest  and  most  stylish  outdoor 
accessory  yet  seen. 

BOGAKDUS  GARDEN  SEAT. 

Imitation  of  stone,  in  papier-mache. 

ANTIQUE  CARVED  CHAIRS, 

Two  styles;  one  of  which  can  be  used  as  a  stool,  by 
detaching  the  back. 

MORA  BALUSTRADE. 

A  fine  article. 


NEW   BACKGROUNDS 


KURTZ  POMPADOUR. 


BOGARDUS  GARDEN. 

No.  67. — Cabinet  style. 
"    68. — A  Standard  Interior. 
"    71. — Mora  Interior. 


Twenty  exhibitors  at  the  Chicago  Convention 
were  using  our  Backgrounds. 

A  good  Background  is  as  important  as 
good  chemicals. 


SEND    STAMP    FOR    SAMPLE    PRINTS. 


Address 


LAFAYETTE  W.  SEAVEY,  Scenic  Artist, 

No.  8  Lafayette  Place,  New  York. 


HEARN'S  COLLODIO-CHLORIDE. 

I  would  respectfully  call  the  attention  of  Photographers  to  a  new 
Collodio-Chloride,  which  I  am  manufacturing  for  the  trade. 

Knowing  well  the  difficulty  which  Photographers  generally  expe- 
rience in  the  making  of  this  the  most  fickle  of  all  collodions,  I  have 
at  great  pecuniary  expense,  and  by  the  expenditure  of  much  valuable 
time,  perfected  a  collodion  by  means  of  which  the  most  beautiful 
porcelain  prints  can  very  easily  be  obtained.  Indeed,  so  simple  is 
the  operation  of  producing  them  by  the  use  of  this  collodion,  that 
it  becomes  a  pleasure  on  the  part  of  the  Photographer  to  make 
them,  whereas  before  it  was  an  undertaking  of  great  difficulty  and 
considerable  expense,  as  well  as  unsatisfactory  results  being  his 
reward. 

The  Porcelain  Print  made  with  this  Collodio-Chloride  is  most 
beautiful,  being  all  that  the  most  critical  Photographer  can  desire, 
in  regard  to  both  its  excellent  keeping  qualities,  and  the  beauty  and 
brilliancy  of  its  tone,  and  more  especially  the  simplicity  of  printing 
and  toning  them. 

Every  batch  of  Collodio-Chloride  made  is  tested  by  myself  before  it 
is  bottled,  and  thus  none  but  what  I  know  is  good  is  ever  sent  away 
to  my  agents,  and  hence  /  can  with  confidence  warrant  every  bottle 
to  possess  good  keeping  and  excellent  working  qualities.  Put  up  in 
half-pound  and  pound  bottles. 

CHAS.  W.    HEARN. 

For  Sale  ly  ALFRED  L.  HANGE,  General  Trade  Agent,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

1\  l>   let   ALL  DEALERS. 


IVET^BOOKS. 

Owing  to  the  fact  that  the  dampness  caused  by  the  late  lire  in  our  building  has  caused  more  of  our 
stock  to  develop  mould,  and  stain,  we  ofl'er  the  following  Inducements  to  Photographers  : 


ft— Vol.  I  ( 1867),  Philadelphia  Photographer,  $2.60. 

9,-Vol.s  (1871),  Philadelphia  Photographer,  $2.50. 
10.— Vol.  I  (1871 1,  Photographic  World,  $2,00. 
11.— Swan's  Carbon  Process,  50  cts. 
12.— Carbon1  Mannal,  50  cts, 
13 -Silver  Sunbeam,  $1.50. 


1.— Linn's  Landscape  Photography,  25  cts. 

2.— Anderson's  Photo-Comic  Almyknack,  20  cts. 

3.— Mosaics,  1866  to  1S74,  inclusive,  25  cts.  eaoh. 

4.— How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph,  10  cts. 

5.— Dr.  Vogel's  Reference-Book,  50  cts. 

6.— Leaf  Prints,  or  Glimpses  of  Photography,  50  cts, 

7.— Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing,  $2.50, 

One  copy  of  each  of  the  above,  $8.     One  parcel  containing  1   to  6,  11   and  12,  $2.     One  parcel  con- 
taining 1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  fi,  11  or  12,  $1.     One  parcel  containing  1,  2,  3  and  4,  60  cents. 

WHERE  ANY  FIVE  BOOKS  ARE  TAKEN  20  PER  CENT.  DISCOUNT. 

Also  an  assorted  lot  of  back  numbers  of  the    Philadelphia  Photographer,  at   15  cents,  and  of  the 
Photographic  World,  at  10  cents  per  copy. 


The  above  goods,  for  all  practical  uses  are  as  good  as  new  books. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  PUBLISHERS,     DUII    AnCI   DUIA 
SE  VENTH  AND  CHERR  Y  STS.,      rnlLHUELrnlH. 


AUG.  SCHWARZE. 


WILLIAM  VALK. 


IMPORTERS  OF  THE 
MOST  CELEBRATED  BRANDS  OP 


SCHWARZE  &  VALK, 

NO.    614    ARCH   STREET,    PHILADELPHIA. 

German  Altomeii  Paper,  and  Arrowroot  Plain  Salted  Paper. 


DEALERS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  MATERIALS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 

Will  mail  to  any  address  in  the  country,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  $1,  one  dozen  sheets  of  Assorted  Photo- 
graphic Paper,  each  sheet  being  numbered  for  distinction. 

The  Universal 


EMBOSSING   PATENTED  JANUARY  9th,  1872. 

This  Press  will  cameo  all  sizes,  from  cards  to  cabinets,  and  is  sold  lower  than  any  other  that  will  do 
the  same  work.     It  has  been  greatly  improved  and  made  very  complete  in  all  its  parts. 
We  furnish  a  card,  victoria,  and  cabinet  size. 

PRICE,   $20.00. 

MANUFACTURED  AND  SOLD  WHOLESALE  AND  RETAIL  BY 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO.,  822  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 

\SW  CAUTION.— Photographers  are  cautioned  against  buying  other  presses  that  may  use  an  elastic 
embossing  substance,  as  they  are  an  infringement  on  the  above.  R.  J.  Chute,  Patentee. 


BENJ.  FRENCH  &  CO., 

159  Washington    St.,   Boston, 

IMPORTERS    AND    SOLE   AGENTS    FOR   THE    CELEBRATED 


mm. 


f  JEW  STEKBOSCOPIC  ILII8IS. 

New  Stereoscopic  Tube  and  Lens,  made  expressly  for  us,  marked  with  our  name  (imita- 
tion Dallmeyer),  witli  rack  and  pinion,  central  stops,  for  portraits  or  views.  Will  work  in 
or  out  of  doors.  Also,  for  instantaneous  pictures.  Four  inch  focus,  price  per  pair, 
$22.00.  By  taking  out  back  lens,  and  using  only  front  lens  in  place  of  back,  you  get 
six  inch  focus.  The  great  and  increasing  demand  for  all  these  lenses,  is  sure  guaran- 
tee that  thev  are  the  best.    Read  the  following 


Testimonials. 

"  I  have  tried  the  Mammoth  Voigtlander  you  sent  me,  and  I  consider  it  the  best  large  in- 
strument I  have  ever  seen,  and  I  have  tried  those  made  by  other  makers,  Dallmeyer's  in- 
cluded, and  they  do  not  compare  with  the  Voigtlander.  All  my  baby  pictures  were  made 
with  half-size  Voigtlander  lenses." — J.  Landy,  208  W.  Fourth  St.,  Cincinnati,  Feb.  25, 1874. 

"The  Voigtlander  lenses  have  always  been  favorites  with  me.  My  first  experience,  in  the 
days  of  daguerreotype,  was  with  one,  since  which  I  have  owned  and  tried  many  of  the  differ- 
ent sizes  and  never  saw  one  but  was  an  excellent  instrument.  Lately  again  trying  some  for 
my  own  use  and  for  a  friend,  I  found  them  to  be  superior  to  other  eminent  makers,  particu- 
larly in  the  large  sizes." — W.  J.  Baker,  Buffalo,  N.  Y. 

"  Twenty-four  years  ago  I  bought  and  commenced  using  my  first  Voigtlander  lens.  It  was 
a  good  one.  Since  then  1  have  owned  and  used  a  good  many  of  the  same  brand,  of  various 
sizes.  They  were  all  and  always  good.  Some  of  the  larger  sizes  that  I  have  recently  bought 
seem  to  me  better  than  any  I  have  ever  had  or  seen  before." — J.  F.  Ryder,  Cleveland,  Ohio, 
Dec.  18, 1872. 

•'  About  a  year  ago  I  bought  a  Voigtlander  &  Son  No.  3  4-4  size  lens.  Said  instrument  gives 
me  great  satisfaction,  being  very  quick,  at  the  same  time  has  great  depth  of  focus." — E.  G. 
Maine,  Columbus,  Miss. 

"  Have  never  seen  anything  equal  to  the  Voigtlander  &  Son  Lens.  The  No.  5,  Ex.  4-4  is 
the  best  instrument  I  ever  used.  I  cannot  keep  house  without  it." — D.  B.  Vickery,  Haver- 
hill, Mass. 

"The  pair  of  imitation  Dallmeyer  Stereoscopic  Lenses  you  sent  we  are  very  much  pleased 
with  ;  they  work  finely." — Goodridge  Bros.,  East  Saginaw,  Mich. 

"After  a  trial  of  your  imitation  Dallmeyer  in  the  field  with  those  of  the  Dallmeyer  Rapid 
Rectilinear,  side  by  side,  I  can  say  that  for  general  views  I  like  yours  as  well,  for  some  ob- 
jects far  better,  on  account  of  their  short  focal  length." — D.  H.  Cross,  Mosher's  Gal.,  Chicago. 


GRISWOLDS 


STEREOSCOPIC  GROUPS, 


LIFE  COMPOSITIONS  FOR  TEE  STEREOSCOPE, 

Are  Excellent  Studies  for  Photographers. 


EVERY  LOVER  OF  NATURE  BUYS  THEM. 

YOU  CAN  MAKE  A  GOOD  PROFIT  ON  THEM, 


The  following  subjects  are  now  ready,  handsomely  mounted. 


1.  Blowing  Bubbles. 

2.  B  stands  for  Bumble-B. 

3.  Blackberry  Blossoms. 

4.  The  Hen's  Nest. 

5.  Let  us  Have  Piece. 

6.  Mamma,  where  was  I  when  you  were 

a  little  girl  ? 

7.  Our  Domestic's  Relations. 

8.  She  went  to  the  Butchers. 

9.  My  Lady  and  My  Lady's  Maid. 

10.  The  Mountain  Spring. 

11.  Unveiling  a  Statue  of  Young  America. 

12.  Young  America  in  the  Nursery. 

13.  Young  America  as  an  Artist. 

14.  Young  America  Asleep. 


15.  The  Sunbeam  Fairy. 

16.  The  Picture-Book. 

17.  Sitting  for  my  Picture. 

18.  Young  America  Bathing. 

19.  Young  Boston's  Ambition. 

20.  Ding-Dong-Ding,  Music  on  a  Kubber 

String. 

21.  Reflection. 

22.  The  Loiterers. 

23.  The  Cabin  Porch. 

24.  Beatrice  Shoo-Ply. 

25.  Home  Group. 

26.  A  View. 

27.  The  Gleaner. 


The  titles  hardly  give  an  idea  of  the  grotesque  humor  possessed  by  these  pictures.  They 
are  capital.  As  a  sample  dozen  we  should  recommend  Nos.  1,  2,  4,  5,  6,  11,  13,  16,  19, 
20,  22,  and  25. 


Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price.    $2.00  per  dozen.     Order  by  number. 
DEALERS  SUPPLIED  ON  GOOD  TERMS. 


These  inimitable  pictures  are  all  natural  compositions,  and  touch  the  tender  chords  of 
human  nature  most  wonderfully.  They  are  attractive  to  every  one  who  has  a  heart,  but 
particularly  instructive  as  studies  for  photographers ,  in  grouping,  posing,  and  composition. 

They  -will  help  any  man  make  better  and  easier  pictures  of  children,  and  should 

be  studied. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,   Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


PRICE  LTST 

OF 

DIES. 

Card  Oval, $4  00 

Imperial  Oval,- 8  00 

Arch  Top,..  8  00 

5x7  Oval, 12  00 

-5x7  Double  El'pte,  12  00 
8x10  "  "  18  00 
8x10  Oval, 18  00 


COPYING 
PRESS, 

Suitable  for  above  work, 
furnished  at  the  fol- 
lowing prices  : 

9x12  bed, :$6  00 

10x13      "     7  00 

10x16      "     10  00 

12x18     "     12  50 


ae 
ae 

H 
6S 
- 
M 

pa 

O  - 

- 


i 

ft? 


Da   ©    «8 

BO.- 

H«5« 
'„  f.  s. 
M     „  « 

.2  £ 
Mf  s 

*  «  - 
-   •  4 

„  m  - 
»©* 


- 
= 

M 

a 

- 

© 


PATENT 

CAHE0 

DIES, 

For  EMBOSSING  GLACE  and  other  Photographs. 
This  DIE  is  beyond  doubt  the  best  ever  offered  to  the 
trade;  having  many  advantages  over  all  others  in  the 
market.  The  FIRST,  and  great  advantage  is  >  for  the 
Glace's),  that  you  can  mount  and  emboss  at  the  same 
time,  thereby  saving  much  time,  both  in  making  and 
mounting:  by  this  process  you  have  a  solid  picture, 
and  one  which  will  keep  flat,  which  advantage  is  by 
no  means  to  be  lost  sight  of,  as  you  can  save  at  least 
HO  per  cent,  in  stock  and  labor,  besides  making  a  per- 
fect picture.  SEC-OJf  I>. -This  Die  is  so  constructed  as 
to  gauge  the  picture  without  injuring  the  same  :  this 
you  will  find  to  be  of  great  importance.  THIRD.— The 
plate  is  made  of  metal,  and  nickel-plated,  insuring  at 
all  times  perfect  work,  while  those  made  of  wood  are 
sure  to  warp  and  injure  the  picture.  I  have  spent 
much  time  and  labor  in  perfecting  these  Dies,  not 
alone  for  the  Glace  Picture,  but  for  all  other  photo- 
graphs which  you  will  find  much  improved  by  em- 
bussing. 

REFERENCE  TO  THE  FOLLOWING    PARTIES,  WILL    SUFFICIENTLY   ATTEST 
THE   SUPERIORITY   OF   THESE   DIES  : 


W.  KURTZ,  New  York, 

B.  GURNEY, 

E.  W.  BOGARDUS,  New  York, 

A.  N.  HARDY,  Boston,  Mass., 


BROADBENT  &  PHILLIPS, 

Philadelphia,  Pa., 
J.  LANDY,  Cincinnati,  Ohio, 
J.  P.  RYDER,  Cleveland,    " 


AND  MANY  OTHERS. 


Direct  your  orders  to 


JOHN  BARNETT, 

585  BROADWAY,  N.  Y, 


tf 
9  2 


t 


* 


-.  i 

a  9 

9  "5 

n  9 


>    9 

e   - 


t  2. 


s  ° 

r 
© 
© 


s  < 


a  9 


<K    Z 


9     > 


9      _ 


9 

9 

*   2 

{'    - 

j»    9 


©     ©     01 
©     ©     © 


A   SPLENDID,    USEFUL    BOOK. 


id :fl.  voge 


PHOTOGRAPHER'S 


POCKET 


IiiITj 


Bf 


OJTlii 


li! 


«m 


\A 


!Ji 


An  Alphabetically  arranged  collection  of  practically  important  hints  on  the  construction 
of  the  Gallery  ;  selection  and  trial  of  lenses  and  chemicals  ;  approved  formulas  for  the  differ- 
ent photographic  processes  ;  tables  of  weights  and  measures  ;  rules  for  avoiding  failure,  etc., 
etc.,  for 

Photographers  and  Amateurs, 


IS  RECEIVING  THE  HIGHEST  PRAISE  WHEREVER  IT  GOES. 


IT  IS  A  BOOK  EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER  SHOULD  HAVE, 

Because  it  is  a  ready  helper  under  all  difficult  circumstances. 


Extract  from  the  Minutes  of  the  Chicago  Photographic  Association. 

"Messrs.  Hall  and  Hesler  spoke  in  most  flattering  terms  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Pocket  Reference- Book,  of 
its  great  value  to  every  photographer,  and  expressed  the  hope  that  it  may  soon  be  found  in  every 
gallery." 

There  is  hardly  a  matter  occurring  in  your  daily  work  which  it  does  not  throw  light  upon 
and  make  easy.     Examine  it  for  yourself. 


For  sale  by  all  dealers.    Price,  $1.50,  post-paid. 

BENBBMAN  &  WILSON,  JPhoto.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


RULOFSON'S   VIEWS 


OF  THE 


Yosemite  Valley, 
California,  Utah, 
The  Sierra  Nevadas, 
Big  Trees, 

Seal  Rocks,  &c. 

FROM  NEGATIVES  BY  BRADLEY  &  RULOFSON, 
SAN  FRANCISCO,  CAL. 


A  large  lot  of  these  pictures  were  on  exhibition  at  Chicago,  and  were  sold 
by  President  Rulofson  at  large  prices  for  the  benefit  of  the  N.  P.  A.  A  great 
many  more  could  have  been  sold.  We  are  now  prepared  to  sell  to  the 
disappointed 

AT  ADVANTACEOUS    PRICES, 

Stereoscopic  Views, $1.25  per  doz. 

Views  on  Full  Sheet, 3.00  each. 

These  are  the  handsomest  Landscape  pictures  made  in  America.  Selec- 
tions carefully  made  for  those  ordering  by  mail. 

A  Large  Stoeh  on  Hand.        Dealers  Supplied. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

PHILADELPHIA,   PA. 


BIGELOW'S  ALBUM  OF 

LIGHTING  AND  POSING. 


»®*  SELLS  ALL  OVER  THE  WORLD. -&£f 
NEW   EDITION, 

WITH  AN  ENLARGED  KEY,  AND  NEARLY  ALL  NEW  STUDIES. 


jggg^  Brings  Lighting  and  Posing  down  to  a  system  at  once  plain, 
easy,  and  desirable. 

jggg^  No  good,  intelligent  operator  can  afford  to  work  without  it. 

Ifgg10  It  contains  24  Victoria  Portrait  Studies  in  Light  and  Pose,  with 
an  explanatory  key,  telling  exactly  how  each  picture  was  made;  where 

THE  CAMERA    AND    SITTER  WERE    PLACED  when  it  WO.S  made  ;   WHAT    CURTAINS 

were  opened  in  lighting  the  subject,  <frc,  <frc. 

jl®^  A  diagram  of  the  interior  of  the  skylight  is  given  in  each  case, 
telling  the  whole  story.  IT  IS  BOUND  HANDSOMELY  IN  CLOTH, 
GILT. 

NEW  KEY,  ENLARCED.  NEW  PICTURES. 


'  It  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  aids  to  art  education  which  has  yet  been  presented  to  the  photo, 
portraitist.  Each  print  represents  a  distinct  study  of  pose  and  lighting,  the  widest  variety  of  effects 
being  comprehended.  We  should  be  glad  to  see  it  in  the  hands  of  English  portraitists  generally." — 
Photo.  News. 

"  The  method  is  an  admirable  one  and  Mr.  Bigelow  deserves  credit  for  the  systematic  way  in  which 
he  has  carried  it  out." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  confess  that  this  work  has  furnished  me  much  instruction,  particularly  the  manner  in  which, 
by  word  and  picture,  studies  about  light  and  pose  are  explained  and  made  comprehensible." — Dr. 
Vogel. 

"  We  do  not  know  of  anything  ourselves  that  has  been  presented  to  the  trade  which  is  calculated 
to  do  so  much  real  good  as  Bigelow's  Album,  with  the  explanatory  key  to  the  studies.  It  is  an  in- 
valuable guide  to  the  portraitist." — Philadelphia  Photographer. 

If  you  would  improve  your  Lighting  and  Posing,  study  Bigeloiv's  Album. 


PRICE,  $6.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCKDEALERS. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


ROBINSON'S 

METALLIC 

GUIDES. 

(SEE'  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

FOR  USE  WITH  THE  ROBINSON  PRINT  TRIMMER. 


MADE  IN  THE  BEST  MANNER  AND  GUARANTEED  TRUE. 


These  Guides  are  made  of  Stout  Iron  and  are  Turned  in  a  Lathe, 
so  that  they  are  Mathematically  True. 

Do  not  Waste  Time  with  a  Knife  and  Glass,  but  Try  Prof. 
Robinson's  Inventions. 


Oval,  Round,  Elliptic,  and  Square,  of  all  sizes ;  various  shapes 
for  Stereoscopic  work,  Drug  Labels,  &c,  &c. 


REGULAR  SIZES  ALWAYS  ON  HAND.     SPECIAL  SIZES  MADE  TO  ORDER. 


Price,  for  regular  photo,  sizes,  10  cents  per  inch  the  longest  way  of  the  aperture. 
Special  sizes,  15  cents  per  inch.  for  sale  by  all  dealers. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


ROBINSON'S 

PHOTOGRAPH  TRIMMER 


IS  A  SUBSTITUTE  FOE  A  KNIFE 

FOR  TRIMMING  PHOTOGRAPHS,  AND  DOES  THE  WORK   MUCH    MORE   EXPEDITIOUSLY  AND 

ELEGANTLY  THAN  A  KNIFE. 

IT  SAVES  TIME,  SAVES  PRINTS,  AND  SAVES  MONEY. 

The  accompanying  cut  represents  the  instru- 
ment in  the  act  of  trimming  a  photograph.  It 
does  not  cut,  but  pinches  off  the  waste  paper,  and 
leaves  the  print  with  a  neatly  beveled  edge  which 
facilitates  the  adherence  of  the  print  to  the 
mount.  Try  one,  and  you  will  discard  the 
knife  and  punch  at  once.  For  ovals  and  rounded 
corners-it  is  worth  its  weight  in  gold. 

A  Trimmer  Mailed  for  $3.50. 
ROBINSON'S  improved  GUIDES 

The  difficulty  of  procuring  exactly  true  guides 
for  cutting  out  prints  has  induced  the  inventor 
to  put  up  machinery  for  the  production  of  all 
styles  of  them,  guaranteed  mathematically  true. 

See  advertisement  on  opposite  page. 

A  full  stock  of  regular  sizes  now  on  hand. 
A  complete,  illustrated,  catalogue  and  price-list  will 
be  issued  soon. 

Oil  the  wheel  bearings  with  Sewing  Machine  Oil. 


ROBINSON'S 

INIMITABLE 

PHOTOGRAPH 
TRIMMER. 

BETTER  THAN  KNIVES, 

AND 

WILL  OUTWEAR  A 

GROSS  OF  THEM. 

Ask  your  stockdealer  to  show 
it  to  you,  or  send  direct  to  us  for 
one. 

Price,  by  mail,  $3.50. 


READ   THE   TESTIMONIALS. 

"I  would  rather  give  fifty  dollars  than  be  without 
one.  By  its  use  all  annoyance  from  dull  knives  tear- 
ing the  prints  is  avoided." — E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk. 

"  It  does  the  work  intended  magnificently.  It  is 
notonly  exquisite fortrimmingphotographs,  butalso 
for  making  Cut-Outs.." — B.  Kihlholz,  Chicago,  III. 

"  It  works  well  and  does  all  it  is  recommended  to 
do."— F.  G.  Wellek,  Littleton,  N.  H. 

"Just  what  I  wanted  and  found  it  difficult  to  get." 
— J.  W.  Black,  Boston. 

"I  consider  it  the  best  article  for  trimming  photo- 
graphs I  ever  saw." — W.  H.  Khoads,  Philadelphia. 

"  I  would  not  be  without  it  for  the  best  twenty-five 
dollarcuttingmachine  I  ever  saw." — D.  Lothrop,  Pa. 

"The  Trimmer  comes  up  to  all  you  claim  for  it.  I 
would  not  be  without  it." — T.  Cummings,  Lancaster. 

"  I  have  trimmed  all  my  prints  with  it,  in  less  than 
half  the  time  taken  by  a  knife.  It  cannot  be  recom- 
mended too  highly." — W.  H.  Cranston,  Carry,  Pa. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmer  has  proved  to  us  one  of 
the  most  usefully  instruments  that  we  have  in  our 
gallery." — Schreiber  &  Sons,  Phila. 

"  I  have  used  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  some 
time.  A  lady  was  asked  how  she  liked  her  sewing 
machine,  and  in  reply  said  '  Well  I  could  get  along 
without  it,  but  when  I  do  I  shall  not  sew  any  more.' 
That  is  me,  I  can  get  along  without  the  Trimmer  but 
when  I  do  I  shall  not  trim  photographs." — Well  G. 
Singhi,  Binghamton,  N.  Y. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmer  works  admirably.  Does 
the  work  intended  with  great  satisfaction." — A.  K.  P. 
Trask,  Philadelphia. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 
FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS,  PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


STEREOSCOPIC     VIEWS 

OF    THE 

NEW  MASONIC  TEMPLE,  PHILADELPHIA. 

Photographed  by  order  of  the  Grand  Lodge.     The  only  negatives  allowed  to  be  taken. 


Of  llie.se  magnificent  pictures  we  now  supply  the  following 


LIST    OF    SUBJECTS. 


1. 

Oriental  Boom,  east. 

14 

2. 

"             "        west. 

15 

8. 

Grand  Chapter  Room,  east. 

16 

4. 

"             "             "        west. 

17 

5. 

The  Library. 

18 

6. 

Norman  Room,  west. 

19 

7. 

"              "       east. 

20 

8. 

Ionic  Room,  west. 

9. 

"           "      east. 

2349 

10. 

Lobby  to  the  Grand  Chapter. 

2351 

11. 

Main  Hall. 

2353 

12. 

Lobby  to  the  Grand  Lodge. 

13. 

Grand  Stairway  to  the  Main  Hall. 

2355 

Parties  who  order  by  number  will  have  their 
$2  per  dozen  by  mail,  post-paid.     Or  in  sets 
of  the  exterior  and  interior,  at  the  dozen  rate. 


Egyptian  Room,  west. 
Grand  Lodge  Room,  west. 
"         "  "       east. 

"         "  "       south 

Banqueting  Room. 
Exterior  View  of  the  Temple,  south. 
Parade   of  Knight's   Templar,  Sep- 
tember 30,  1873. 
Exterior  View  of  the  Temple,  west. 
Dedication  Parade,  Sept.  26,  1873. 
"  "  "         "        and 

entrance  to  the  Temple. 
Main  entrance  to  the  Temple. 

orders  promptly  filled. 

of  12,  16,  and  22,  embracing  the  most  beautiful  views 
DEALERS   SUPPLIED. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Philadelphia. 


Reflecting  Solar  Camera. 
IMPROVED 


SOLAR    CAMERAS, 


Direct  Printing  Camera. 

Manufactured  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the  original  inventor  and  patentee,  combining 
ALL  THE  IMPORTANT  improvements  that  have  been  made. 

Every  Camera  will  be  tested  and  guaranteed  before  delivery,  and  will  be  licensed  and  accompanied 
by  the  regular  Patent  Stamp  of  the  patentee. 

PRICES  OF  DIRECT  PRINTING  OR  REFLECTING  SOLAR  CAMERAS  : 
10  inch  diameter  Condensing  Lens,  will  print  picture  18  x  23  in.,         .....        $190  00 

12     "  "  "  "  "  25x30  " 220  00 

15     "  "  "  "  ■"  29x36   " 275  00 

18     '•  "  ■'  "  "  40x50  " 380  00 

Can  be  ordered  of  all  Stockdealers.     Boxing  charged  for  at  cost. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD,  Baltimore,  Md. 


Awarded  the  HOLMES  MEDAL  at  the  Chicago  N.  P.  A.  Exhibition,  1874. 


MOULTON'S 


RAPID  PHOTO-WASHER. 


Patented  August  12th,  1873. 

New  in  Principle.— Quick  and  Reliable  in  Practice. 


Instead  of  soaking  the  Prints  it  applies  the  water  in  the  form  of  spray,  with  considerable 
force,  to  both  sides  of  the  paper  at  each  revolution,  or  from  one  hundred  to  one-hundred- 
fifty  times  per  minute.  Washes  with  exact  uniformity,  and  gives  more  brilliant  and  per- 
manent work ;  is  simple,  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order,  will  last  a  lifetime,  and  will  enable  you 
to  get  out  work  at  short  notice,  thereby  securing  many  orders  that  would  otherwise  be  lost. 


Size  Cylinder, 

Diam.  16in.  Length  14  l-2in. 
11     20        "       19 
"     25        "       24 

Capacity  in  Cards.                         Largest  Print.                    Price. 

84                    14  by  17  ins.          $30 
144                    18  by  22  "             40 
220                    22  by  28  "              50 

Larger  sizes  may  follow. 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  Trade  Age] 

"  I  write  to  testify  to  the  satisfaction  I  feel  with  the  working  of  your  Rapid  Print.  Washer.  It  is  simply  per- 
fection, as  far  as  my  experience  with  it  goes,  viz  :  One  year's  constant  use.  I  have  washed  eight  dozen  cartes  in 
ten  minutes,  and  the  most  accurate  test  I  know  of,  starch  and  iodine,  failed  to  show  a  trace  of  hypo,  remain- 
ing.''—L.  G.  Bigelow,  Detroit,  Mich.,  Feb.  10th,  1874. 

"  Time  saved  is  money  earned."  The  above  maxim  is  as  true  in  the  photographic  business  as  in  any  otter, 
and  in  this  connection  I  would  say,  that  Moulton's  Rapid  Photo-Washer  will  save  more  time  in  any  we/Z-regu- 
lated  gallery,  than  any  mechanism  ever  yet  invented  ;  besides  the  prints  finish  with  a  finer  lustre  than  those 
washed  by  any  other  device  I  have  ever  yet  seen.  Having  used  one  for  the  past  two  months,  washing  from  100 
to  300  prints  daily,  I  am  pleased  to  add  my  testimonial  to  its  excllence." — Wm.  M.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 
March  11th,  1874.  

ANALYSIS    OF    PRINTS. 

"After  analyzing  the  prints  which  were  washed  by  you  during  ten  minutes,  in  your  Eapid  Photo- Washer, 
and  those  furnished  by  an  artist  of  this  city,  washed  in  a  syphon  tank  in  running  water  for  one  hour  and  left  in 
the  water  over  night,  for  the  quantity  of  hyposulphites  left  therein,  I  take  pleasure  in  stating  that  the  prints 
treated  in  the  Rapid  Photo-AVasher  contain  perceptibly  less  hyposulphites  than  those  washed  in  the  other  man- 
ner described." — Gostavus  Bode,  Analytical  Chemist,  and  Dealer  in  Photographic  Stock,  Milwaukee,  Feb.  21, 1874 


L  V.  MOULTON,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis. 


THE 

PRIZE 
PICTURES. 


In  order  that  photographers  may  have  an  early  opportunity  of  studying  the  very  elegant 
pictures  from  negatives  which  have  been  sent  to  us  in  competition  for  our 

COLD     MEDAL! 

we  publish  them  for  sale.  There  are  THIRTY  PICTURES  IN  A  SET— of  men,  women, 
and  children,  groups  and  single  figures — and  the  following  is  a  catalogue  of  them,  numbered 
in  the  order  in  which  the  negatives  were  received. 


1  A.  N.  Hardy,  Boston,  Mass. 

2  J.  McClure  &  Co.,  St.  John,  N.B. 

3  D.  Ginter,  Conneautville,  Pa. 

4  W.  N.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 

5  F.  B.  Clench,  Lockport,  N.  Y. 

6  Theo.  Nieberg,  St.  Marys,  O. 

7  C.  Chadbodrne,  Toledo,  O. 

8  E.  H.  Alley,  Toledo,  O. 

9  B.  Gray,  Bloomington,  111. 

10  C.  D.  Mosher,  Chicago,  111. 

11  E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk,  Conn. 


12  N.  H.  Busey,  Baltimore,  Md. 

13  M.  T.  Carter,  Worcester,  Mass. 

14  W.  W.  Whiddit,  Newburg,  N.  Y. 

15  L.  G.  Bigelow,  Williarnsport,  Pa. 

16  G.  M.  Elton,  Palmyra,  N.  Y. 

17  I.  Saunders,  Alfred  Centre,  N.  Y. 

18  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  San  Fran- 

cisco, Cal. 

19  Forrester  Clark,  Pittsfield, 

Mass. 

20  Otto  Lewin,  New  York  City. 


21  F.  L.  Stdber,  Bethlehem,  Pa. 

22  D.  T.  Burrill,   North   Bridge- 

water,  Mass. 

23  J.  Barhydt,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

24  Albright  Bros.,  Wooster,  O. 

25  F.  S.  Crowell,  Mt.  Vernon,  O. 

26  Trask  &  Bacon,  Philadelphia. 

27  G.  W.  Harris,  Lancaster,  N.  Y. 
2S  B.  Williams,  Tunkhannock,  Pa. 

29  F.  Gutekunst,  Philadelphia. 

30  J.  Inglis,  Montreal,  Can. 


It  will  be  seen  that  a  number  of  our  best  photographers  have  competed. 

THE  AWARD  WAS  MADE  FOB  NO.  18. 


Three  negatives  or  more  were  sent  by  each  competitor.     The  sets  include  one  example 
from  each  competitor.     All  the  duplicates  may  be  had  to  order. 

Several  thousand  of  these  Pictures  have  already  been  sold.     Get  copies 
while  the  Negatives  are  new. 

The  prints  are  supplied  at  the  following  rates  : 

A  Set  of  Thirty  in  the  Improved  Photograph  Cover, $4  25 

"  "  without        "  "  "        3  75 

Selections,  per  dozen, 2  00 


EVERY  OPERATOR  &  EVERY  PRINTER  SHOULD  GET  AND  STUDY  THEM. 


Nothing  so  really  elegant  tvas  ever  offered  for  sale. 

BEUEHMAN  &  WILSON,  UESttv..)  7th  &  Cherry  Sts.,  Phila. 


1874. 


Special  Premium  of  Six  Handsome  German 
Cabinet  Pictures  of  Ladies ! 

By  FE1TZ  LUCKHARDT,  Vienna,  Austria. 

These  pictures  are  alone  worth  $3  for  the  set,  and  more  is  asked  for 
such  by  dealers. 

Given  to  any  one  who  will  sen!  ns  a  NEW  Sntailier  for  the  year  1871 

We  make  this  offer  as  A  MATTER  OF  BUSINESS,  and 
not  as  a  favor  to  any  one  on  either  side-  It  will  pay 
to  GIVE  A  YEAR'S  SUBSCRIPTION  TO  YOUR  OPERATOR 
or  to  your  friend  or  customer,  in  order  to  SECURE 
THESE  PICTURES. 

BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philada. 


"TO".    KLTTUTZ, 

Madison   Square  (23d    Street), 

BKCE1YED  HIGHEST  AWARDS  IN 

Vienna,  Paris,  and  New  York, 

FOR   PHOTOGRAPHS. 


New  York,  July  1,  1874. 

MR.  GEAS.  F.  USENER. 

Dear  Six.-  The  Mammoth  Tube  (No.  9002)  which  you  sent  me  on  trial  has  been 
thoroughly  tested,  and  has  proved  itself  quite  beyond  my  expectations;  for  fine 
definition  and  roundness,  or  stereoscopic  effect,  1  have  never  seen  its  equal.  You 
may  readily  see  by  the  specimens  herewith,  of  standing  figures,  that  they  are  as 
sharp  and  as  perfect  as  an  imperial  carte,  although  taken  on  14x17  plates;  and 
when  I  add  that  they  were  taken  at  4  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  in  45  seconds,  I 
think  I  can  say  no  more. 

Please  charge  the  tube  to  me,  and  send  bill.  Yours  truly, 

W.  KURTZ. 


CHARLES  COOPER  &  CO., 

WHOLESALE  AGENTS, 

Nor   150    Chatham   Street,  New  York. 


BALTIMORE! 

THE  ATTENTION  OF  PHOTOGRAPHEES  is  invited  to  uiy  stock  of  photographic 
goods.     I  am  prepared  to  fill  all  orders,  large  or  small,  promptly  at  best  prices. 

■    AMM  WWW  M@WMMWMM 

are  received  as  soon  as  by  any  one  in  the  market. 

AMONG  OTHER  THINGS, 

The  American  Optical  Co.'s  Apparatus, 
Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler, 
Chute's  Universal  Cameo  Press, 
Robinson's  Print-Trimmers  and  Guides, 
Morrison's  and  Steinheil's  View  Lenses, 
Waymouth's  Vignette  Papers, 
All  Makes  of  Portrait  Lenses, 
Chemicals,  Glass,  and  Frames, 

are  carefully  selected  for  my  special  sales.     My  expenses  are  light.     I  do  my  own  work 
personally,  and  can  supply  goods  as  low  as  the  next  one. 

A  trial  order  solicited.     Freight  and  expressage  from  Baltimore  very  low  to  any  point 
South  or  West. 

No.  7  No.  7  No.  7 

NORTH    CHARLES    STREET, 

BALTIMORE,  MD. 


AiMlPerfMl./^l 

£SjChair. 


Enabling  the  photographer  to  successfully  secure  every  variety  of  pose  with  facility  and  reliability. 
It  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  varying  necessities  of  female  portraiture,  and  is  equally  suited  for 
children,  for  vignettes,  or  for  full  lengths.  The  BOWDISH  CHAIR  is  substantial  in  construction, 
elegant  in  design,  and  rich  in  upholstery  and  finish.  Those  who  have  purchased  them,  speak  in  the 
highest  terms,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 


+- 


TESTIMONIALS : 


-+ 
-+ 


"About  ten  days  ago  I  received  the  new  chair  you  promised  to  send  me  when  I  saw  you  last,  and 
would  have  written  and  acknowledged  your  kind  favor  long  ago  if  1  had  correctly  known  your  ad- 
dress. Accept  my  best  thanks  for  this  really  beautiful  chair,  which  now,  after  ten  days'  trial,  has 
proved  to  be  a  decided  success  in  every  way.  It  has  become  the  real  favorite  for  posing  in  my  studio. 
Besides  this,  in  external  appearance  the  new  chair  appears  so  much  superior  in  finish,  and  is  at  the 
same  time  highly  ornamental,  and  the  head  rest  is  so  much  easier  handled  than  with  any  chair  I  have 
ever  seen  before.  In  short,  it  gives  the  sitter  the  greatest  possible  comfort  and  steadiness.  I  think 
the  chair  I  have  justly  deserves  the  name  of  '  Perfect  Posing  Chair.'  " — H.  Rocher,  Chicago,  111., 
January  10,  1873. 

"  Since  receiving  your  posing  chair,  nearly  a  year  since,  I  have  had  it  in  constant  use,  and  am 
satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  posing  chair  in  the  market.  It  is  easily  worked,  and  is  so  well  made  that 
one  will  last  a  life  time,  and  then  be  a  valuable  heirloom." — L.  G.  Bigelow. 

"The  Bowdish  Chair  came  in  good  order  and  gives  the  best  of  satisfaction.  Should  you  wish  a 
recommendation  for  it,  say  what  you  please  and  we  will  endorse  it.  You  cannot  praise  it  too  highly." 
— Slee  Bros.,  Poug/tkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  Sept.  10,  1872. 

"  Your  chair  has  arrived  at  last.  I  am  much  pleased  with  it.  1  don't  think  my  gallery  can  be 
complete  without  one  of  them.  Wishing  you  the  success  your  invention  merits,  lam,  truly  yours, 
A.  Hesler." 


Prints  will  be  sent,  if  desired,  before  purchasing.     There  are  three  styles  kept  in  stock,  viz  : 

No.  2.  With  nickel-plated  rods  and  rest,  in  velveteen  or  reps $fi0  00 

No.  4.       "  "  "  "  "  "    square  carved  legs, 70  00 

No.  6.       "  "  "  "     in  best  plush,  paneled 80  00 

Special  chairs  to  order. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO.,  Sole  Agents, 

591  Broadway,  JVew  York, 


NEW! 

CATALOGUE  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PUBLICATIONS, 


Owing  to  the   LATE    FIRE   IN   OUR   OFFICE,  and  to  the 

fact  that  SEVERAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC   BOOKS  ARE 

OUT   OF  PRINT    we  are  obliged  to  issue  a  revised  or 

NEW  CATALOGUE! 

TO  WHICH  WE  CALL  YOUR  ATTENTION. 

There  is  something  for  the  workers  in  all  branches  of  the  art, — operators, 
posers,  manipulators,  printers,  painters,  retouchers,  finishers,  and  art  students 
— all  are  provided  for. 

We  always  find  the  photographer  who  reads  what  is  published  pertaining 
to  his  profession,  to  be  the  photographer  who  succeeds  in  his  business  the 
best.  Above  all,  those  who  regularly  and  continually  receive  a  good  photog- 
raphic magazine  are  those  who  are  always  ahead  with  new  goods,  new  styles, 
and  new  information.  We  recommend  an  investment  in  a  part  or  all  of  the 
list  below,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  them  to  you  on  receipt  of  price. 

CATALOGUE. 

The  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

The  oldest,  best,  and  most  popular  Photographic  Magazine  in  America.  Eleventh  Year.  -  Please  read  the 
prospectus  on  page  three  of  cover  and  premium  list  opposite.  Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2.50  for  six 
months,  in  advance.    Current  number,  50  cents.    Specimen  copies,  free. 

Photographic  Mosaics. 

The  1874  edition  excels  all  of  its  eight  older  brethren.  The  list  oi  articles  is  made  up  of  original  contribu- 
t  j  ons,  written  especially  for  its  pages,  on  all  departments  of  the  art,  whoi  ly  by  practical  men  who  are  only  heard 
from  once  a  year  through  the  persuasion  of  the  editor,  in  this  way.  See  special  advertisement.  146  pages. 
Paper  cover,  50  cents.    Cloth,  $1.    A  few  copies  of  former  editions,  from  1866,  at  same  price. 

-  Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

This  .is  not  exactly  a  book,  but  a  collection  of  24  large  Victoria  size  photographic  studies  in  lighting  and 
posing,  made  especially  to  teach  how  to  light  and  pose  ordinary  and  extra-ordinary  subjects  in  all  the  plain* 
fancy,  "  Rembrandt"  and  "Shadow"  styles.  It  is  accompanied  by  an  explanatory  key  of  instructions,  together 
with  a  diagram  for  each  picture,  showing  how  the  sitter  and  the  camera  were  placed  in  the  skylight,  their 
relation  to  the  background,  and  what  blinds  were  opened  and  closed  at  the  time  of  the  sitting.  Italmos 
supplies  a  rule  by  which  you  can  quickly  tell  how  to  manage  every  subject  that  comes  to  you.  The  studies  are 
mounted  on  folding  leaves,  so  that  twelve  can  be  examined  at  once.    Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  |6,  postpaid. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs  in  Water  Colors. 

A  practical  Handbook  designed  especially  for  the  use  of  Students  and  Photographers,  containing  directions 
for  Brush  Work  in  all  descriptions  of  Photo-Portraiture,  Oil,  Water  Colors,  Ink,  How  to  Retouch  the  nega- 
tive, &c.    By  George  B.  Ayees,  Artist.  Third  edition.    Differing  largely  from  previous  editions.    Price,  $2.00. 


Handbook  of  the  Practice  and  Art  of  Photography. 

By  Dit.  II.  Vogkl.    Second  edition  in  press.    Beady  October  1st. 

The  Practical  Printer. 

Issued  July,  1874.  A  capital  working  manual,  giving  the  fullest  information  on  all  styles  of  photographic 
printing  on  albumen  and  plain  paper,  and  on  porcelain.  By  0.  W.  Hearn.  No  book  was  ever  more  needed. 
12.50.     See  special  advertisement  concerning  it. 

Lea's  Manual  of  Photography. 

Third  thousand.    $3.75  per  copy.    A  capital  book  of  instructions  in  all  branches  of  the  art.    See  advt. 

How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph. 

This  is  a  fine  little  work  of  48  pages,  written  by  the  wife  of  a  celebrated  New  York  photographer,  for  the 
purpose  of  educating  the  public  on  the  all-important  subject  of  sitting  for  a  picture.  It  is  bound  in  cloth  at  60 
cents  per  copy,  and  paper  cover  30  cents. 

Lookout  Landscape  Photography. 

By  Prof.  R.  M.  Linn,  Lookout  Mountain,  Tenn.  A  pocket  manual  for  the  outdoor  worker,  and  full  of  good 
for  every  photographer.    75  cents.    Be  sure  to  get  it. 

Himes's  Leaf  Prints;  or,  Glimpses  at  Photography. 

By  Prof.  Charles  F.  Himes,  Ph.D.  Full  of  useful  information  for  the  photographic  printer.  Illustrated 
with  a  whole-size  photograph.    Cloth,  $1.25. 

The  American  Carbon  Manual. 

By  Edw.  L.  Wilson.  A  complete  manual  of  the  Carbon  process  from  beginning  to  end.  With  a  fine 
example  by  the  process.    Cloth,  $2.00. 

The  Photographer  to  His  Patrons. 

A  splendid  little  twelve-page  leaflet,  which  answers  all  vexatious  questions  put  to  you  by  your  sitters,  and 
serves  as  a  grand  advertising  medium.  It  is  for  photographers  to  give  away  to  their  customers.  Send  for  a 
copy  and  an  illustrated  circular.  Over  300,000  already  sold  and  in  use  all  over  the  country.  $20.00  for  1000, 
$35.00  for  2000,  and  so  on.    Printed  and  supplied  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

Something  New. 

Just  out.    Similar  to  the  "  Photographer  to  his  Patrons,"  but  newer.    Prices  the  same. 

Pretty  Faces. 

A  leaflet  much  smaller  than  "  The  Photographer  to  hte  Patrons,"  and  "Something!  New,"  for  the  same  purpose 
but  costing  less,  viz. :  1000  copies,  $10.00  ;  2000,  $17.50,  and  larger  orders  at  less  rates. 

Elbert  Anderson' s  Photo-  Comic  Allmyhnach. 

A  complete  Almanac,  full  of  witty  sayings,  jokes,  puns,  stories,  etc.,  etc.  Profusely  illustrated  with  comic 
and  original  sketches,  yet  all  interspersed  with  much  practical  matter  of  value  to  every  photographer.  Price, 
75  cents. 

Photographers'  Pocket  Reference- Booh. 

By  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  of  Berlin.  A  dictionary  of  all  the  terms  used  in  the  art,  and  contains  formulas  for  almost 
every  known  manipulation.  Altogether  different  from  any  work  ever  published.  Cloth,  $1.50.  See  special 
advertisement.    A  splendid,  indispensable  book. 

Works  found  in  our  old  catalogues,  and  not  in  the  above,  are  out  of  print 
and  cannot  be  had. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

JBenerman  &  Wilson's  Publications  sold  by  all  Dealers. 


JAMES  F.  MAGEE  &  CO 

MANUFACTURERS    OF 

PURE 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMICALS, 

No.  108  North  Fifth  Street, 

PHILADELPHIA. 


Stock  Dealers  only  Supplied. 

SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT. 


ALL  PERSONS  ARE  HEREBY  NOTIFIED,  and  cautioned  against  infringing  my  Solar  Camera 
Patent. 

Infringers  will  settle  with   H.  L.   Emmons,    Attorney-at-Law,   Baltimore,   Md. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD, 

Baltimore,  Md. 

STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS 

OF 

The  Catskill  Mountains,  Trenton  Palls,  H.  Y., 
Lake  Mohonk,  IT.  Y.,  &c.,  &c. 

GREAT  VARIETY  AND  FIRST-CLASS  QUALITY. 

THE  TRADE  SUPPLIED  ON  REASONABLE  TERMS. 

J.  LOEFFLER,  Photographer,  Tompkinsville,  Staten  Island,  N.  Y. 


MANUFACTURING  OPTICIAN, 

1314  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia. 

Sole  Manufacturer  of  the  Stereo-Panopticon  and  Artopticon,  'warranted  to  be  the  must 
■perfect  and  powerful  Magic  Lanterns  made. 


MCALLISTER'S 


•PATENT 


ARTOPTICON 


Each  lantern  is  adjustable  for  use 
with  powerful  coal  oil' light — oxycal- 
eium,  hydro-oxycalcium,  and  oxy- 
hydrogen  lights. 

JKiP^The  coal  oil  lamp  used  gives 
very  much  more  light  than  any  other 
lamp  yet  made. 

Giving  exhibitions  with  the  Artopti- 
con will  prove  a  profitable  business  for 
a  man  ivith  a  small  capital. 


The   STEREO-PASfOPTIC'OIH    is  an  improved   instrument,   suitable  for  givini 
exhibitions  of  dissolving  views  on  the  largest  scale.     Send  for  printed  description. 


MCALLISTER'S 

PATENT    TINTERS. 

These  tinters  are  used  for  giving  to  magic  lantern  pictures 
various  beautiful  tints  or  colors,  as  blue,  red,  yellow,  green, 
crimson,  &c,  &c.  They  can  be  adjusted  to  the  lantern,  either 
on.  the  end  of  the  front  lens,  or  may  be  screwed  to  the  back 
of  the  front  lens-holder,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Stereo-Panop- 
ticon and  Educational  lanterns.  On  the  Artopticon,  they 
are  placed  on  the  end  of  the  front  lens  tube. 

NEW  and  BEAUTIFUL  SLIDES  for  LANTERN  USE  in  LARGE  VARIETY. 

Priced  and  Illustrated  Catalogues  free,  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  stamj). 


W.  MITCHELL  McALLISTER,  1314  Chestnut  St.,  Phila. 


LINN'S  LOOKOUT 
LANDSCAPE   PHOTOGRAPHY 


t-1 


^3 


YET  CONTAINING    MANY    USEFUL    HINTS    FOE  ALL    PHOTOGKAPHEPvS. 

By  the  Late  Prof.  R.  M.  LINN, 

LOOKOUT  MOUNTAIN,   TENN. 

This  admirable  little  work  was  published  last  fall,  a  little  too  late  for  the  season.  It  is 
now  confidently  recommended  to  every  photographer  about  to  do  any  class  of  work,  outside 
or  inside  the  skylight. 

CONTENTS. 


Introductory. 

Main  Requisites  of  a  Good  Photographic  Land- 
scape. 

Artistic  Effect. 

Proper  Illumination. 

Direction  of  Light. 

Clouds. 

Length  of  Exposure. 

Apparatus  for  Field  Work. 

On  the  Selection  of  View  Lenses. 

Camera  Boxes. 

Bath  Cups. 

Preliminary  Preparations. 

Taking  the  Field. 

Hints  on  Printing  and  Finishing. 

To  Print  Clouds. 

Toning  Bath  for  Views. 

On  Fixing  and  Washing  Prints. 

Suggestions  on  Mounting  Prints. 

To  Cut  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

To  Mount  Stereoscopic  Prints. 

Formulae  and  Processes  for  Landscape  Photog- 
raphy. 

Ever-ready  Iodizer  for  Landscape  Photography. 


Remarks  on  Preparing  and  Using  Iodizer. 

On  the  Management  of  Flowing  Bottles. 

On  the  Preparation  of  Plain  Collodion. 

The  Silver  Bath  for  Negatives. 

To  Renovate  an  Old  Negative  Bath. 

To  Prepare  Carbonate  of  Silver. 

Permanganate  of  Potash — Its  Use  in  our  Art. 

Preparation  and  Using  of  Developer. 

Fixing  Solution  for  View  Negatives. 

On  Redeveloping  and  Strengthening  Agents. 

To  Clean  and  Polish  the  Glass. 

To  Prepare  Chloride  of  Gold  Solution. 

The  Paste  for  Mounting  of  Photographs. 

The    Operator's    Oracle — Failures  :    Causes  and 

Remedies  ;  for  consultation  in  time  of  trouble. 
Counsels  and  Cautions  for  the  Printer,  including 

Formula  for  Silvering  Bath,  &a 
Failures  in  Silvering  Albumenized  Paper. 
Failures  in  Toning  Photographs. 
Failures  in  Fixing  Photographs. 
Instantaneous  Photography. 
View  Photography  Financially  Considered. 
Stereoscoping  Applied  to  Portraiture. 
Concluding  Remarks. 


PRICE,  75  CENTS. 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


G.  GENNERT, 
53  Maiden  Lane,  N.  Y., 


IMPORTER  OF  THE  CELEBRATED 


S.  &  M.  DRESDEN 


ALBiUiMEW 


PAPERS, 


RIVES  &  STEINBACH 

WHITE,  PINK,  and  BLUE. 

Every  one  says  it  works  the  most  uniform,  economical,  and  gives  finer  results  than  any 
other.  To  satisfy  yourself  that  it  is  the  best,  send  to  your  stock  dealer  for  a  sample  dozen. 
Kept  by  all  stock  dealers  in  the  United  States. 

ALSO, 

Hyposulphite  of  Soda, 

Solid  German  Glass  Baths, 

Saxe  Evaporating  Dishes, 

And  French  Filter  Paper. 


Speoial  attention  is  called  to  the   Extra  Brilliant  or  Double   Glossy  Paper, 

which  is  recognized  by  the  best  artists  all  over  the  world  as  the  finest  Albumen  Paper  in 
this  country  or  Europe. 

*       * 


"BY  THIS  SKIN  WE  CONQUER 


CARL  MYERS' 

LIGHT-CONTROLLER 

Illustrated  and  described  at  length  in  Anthony's  Bulletin, 
July,  1.H74.     Exhibited  lie/ore  the  Chicago  Convention, 
in  connection  with  a  lecture  on    "  Mechanical 
Appliances  for  Governing  the  Light"  illus- 
trated with  various  models.     [See  pub- 
lished  proceedings). 

The  prophesy  is  made  by  those  employing  the  appara- 
tus, that  it  will  eventually  supersede  all  other  arrange- 
ments for  lighting  the  sitter,  because  cheaper,  more 
immediately  effectual,  and  adapted  to  all  circumstances. 

It  attaches  to  the  top  of  any  head  rest,  weighs  two  and 
a-half  pounds,  costs  15.00,  and  packs  up  four  feet  long, 
averaging  one  inch  diameter.  It  is  not  a  "light  modi- 
fier," but  a  "  light  controller."  Its  motions  are  us  free  and 
unlimited  as  those  of  a  common  hand  screen,  but  it 
remains  fixed  in  any  position  when  the  hand  lets  go.  It 
saves  half  the  necessary  retouching,  and  corrects  all  the 
faults  of  a  defective  light — except  leaking.  No  other  appa- 
ratus will  accomplish  what  this  will. 

As  a  preferable  support  for  the  attachment,  we  sell  for 
$3.50  a  metal  base  with  wooden  column  and  adjustable 
rod — tall,  light,  and  impossible  to  upset  by  accident. 
One  hour's  practice  with  the  apparatus — used  as  screen 
and  reflector — will  better  instruct  an  artist  in  the  true 
science  of  lighting,  than  years  of  experience  with  other 
methods.  Any  desirable  effect  is  got  instantly.  Six 
month's  use  of  the  apparatus  will  dispose  any  sensible 
artist  to  quit  the  profession  rather  than  abandon  its  use. 

Sent  by  express  immediately  on  receipt  of  price,  by 

C.   E.   MYERS, 

Patentee  and  Manufacturer, 

Drawer  Gi.  |53  Main  St.,  Hornellsville,  N.  Y. 


SPICER'S 

LUSTRENE 


OLD  FURNITURE 


RENEWS 

OLD  FRAMES. 


OLD  APPARATUS 


IS    INDISPENSABLE    IN    EVERY    GALLERY. 


This  article  is  a  composition  of  such  substance,  that  all  scratches  or  bruises 
are  completely  filled,  and  the  surface  restored  to  its  originally  perfect  condition. 


PRICE,  PER  BOTTLE,  75  CENTS. 


CHAS.  A.  WILSON,  Sole  Aaeut,  7  North  Charles  Street,  Baltimore, 


DR.    VO  GEL'S 

HANDBOOK 


OF 


PHOTOGRAPHY. 


By  Prof.  H.  VOGEL,  Ph.D.,  Berlin,  Prussia. 


THE  SECOND   EDITION 

Is  in  Press  and  will  be  ready  soon. 


PRICE,    $3.50. 

(SAME    AS    THE    FIRST    EDITION.) 

It  will  be  much  larger  than  the  first  edition,  and  will  contain  several  nexo  -photo- 
graphs and  illustrations.  New  chapters  have  been  added  by  the  author  and  much 
of  the  old  edition  has  been  rewritten  and  revised.     See  future  advertisements. 

FOR    SALE    BY    ALL    DEALERS. 


It  will  be  the  Best  Work  ever  Issued  on  Photography. 


No  book  ever  treated  all  branches  of  the  art  so  plainly  and  satisfactorily  as 
this  does. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


CAPTAIN  ABNEY'S  NEW  BOOK. 


INSTRUCTION  IN  PHOTOGRAPHY 

BY 

CAPTAIN  ABNEY,  R.E.,  F.C.S.,  F.B.A.S., 

Instructor  in  Photography  at  the  School  of  Military  Engineering,  Chatham,  England. 


A  small  edition  of  this  valuable  work  was  originally  prepared  for  private 
circulation  among  the  officers  and  men  of  the  Royal  Engineers,  but  some 
copies  that  have  become  distributed  beyond  this  circle  have  been  the  means 
of  creating  such  a  large  demand  that  the  Author  has  been  induced  to 
reprint  it,  with  considerable  modifications  and  additions,  for  the  b.enefit  of 
Photographers  generally. 


"  Captain  Abney's  manual  is  unique  in  its  class,  in  character  as  well  as  excellence.  All  the  instruc- 
tions, which  are  as  simple,  lucid,  and  easy  to  apprehend  as  they  are  accurate,  are  accompanied  by 
explanations  of  the  rationale  of  the  operations  to  be  conducted.  The  book  is  singularly  valuable  in 
its  completeness,  and  in  that  completeness  arising  out  of  the  practical  experiences  of  a  skilled  worker 
in  many  varied  branches  of  the  art ;  the  instructions  are  not,  therefore,  the  work  of  a  mere  compiler. 
The  work  is,  in  short,  the  most  comprehensive  and  trustworthy  guide  which  has  ever  been  issued 
within  the  same  compass,  in  connection  with  protography,  and  will  be  consulted  by  experienced  work- 
ers and  beginners  with  equal  advantage.'' — The  Photographic  News,  February  6,  1874. 

"In  this  manual  several  of  the  dry-plate  processes  are  described  fully.  In  addition  to  the  usual 
matter  which  finds  a  place  in  every  manual  of  instruction  on  photography,  there  is  a  comprehensive 
account  of  Edward's  heliotype  process,  and  also  of  the  photo-mechanical  process,  described  by  Cap- 
tain Waterhouse,  as  well  as  of  the  processes  of  photo-zincography,  lithography,  and  papyrotype.  ' — 
British  Jotomal  of  Photography,  February  20,  1874. 

"  Captain  Abney's  valuable  work  on  photography  differs  essentially  from  the  ordinary  manual.  For 
while  it  is,  before  everything,  a  practical  handbook,  such  as  the  most  ignorant  of  photographers  would 
have  no  difficulty  in  following,  it  encourages  the  worker  to  inform  himself  in  the  why  and  wherefore  of  a 
reaction  or  process,  and  supplies  him  with  theoretical  information  without  bothering  him  at  the  outset 
by  abstruse  and  complicated  scientific  explanations.  Captain  Abney  brings  down  the  information  to 
a  very  recent  date,  his  own  improved  beer  process — which  is  among  the  most  simple  of  dry-plate 
methods,  being  included.  Photo-mechanical  printing  receives  the  earnest  attention  it  deserves,  and 
photography  in  pigments  is  not  forgotten." — Photographic,  Journal,  February  17. 

"  All  the  usual  branches  of  photography  are  exhaustively  treated,  and  especially  full  information  is 
given  on  the  subject  of  photo  mechanical  printing,  in  which  Captain  Abney  is  an  expert.  The  manual 
is  one  we  can  commend  to  all  interested  in  the  study  of  photography." — Chemical  News,  May  1. 


Mailed  Post-paid  on  Receipt  of  Price,  75  Cents. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  ^S^I#iceS¥fSf  PHILADELPHIA. 


4 


FROM  THE  £L  CORNERS 


OF  THE  GLOBE, 

And  from  hundreds  of  intermediate  points,  come  orders  after  orders  for  the 

Nasonian  Out-Outs. 


Never  was  an  article  offered  the  American  photographer  which  met  with 

such  rapid  sale. 

A  PERFECT  "STORM"  OF  LETTERS, 

Containing  orders,  and  "  N.  B.'s,"  and  "P.  S.'s,"  to  "send  theNasonians  by  return  mail," 
or  "  lightning  express,  as  we  want  to  be  the  first  to  introduce  them  here." 

We  have  large  orders  from  many  of  the  live  dealers  ;  but  so  far  it  has  been  simply 
impossible  for  us  to  fill  them,  the  individual  rush  having  been  so  great.  They  will  be  with 
your  regular  dealer  soon.     Those  who  cannot  wait  had  better  order  direct  of  us. 


•«=*  SPECIAL.  «=mt 

In  introducing  the  Nasonian  Cut-Outs  to  the  photographic  fraternity,  at  home  and  abroad, 
it  was  our  desire  to  put  them  into  the  market  at  the  lowest  possible  price.  Our  great  anx- 
iety to  have  them  become  instantly  popular,  led  us  to  decide  on  the  price  before  we  had  com- 
pleted our  dies  and  presses.  The  enterprise  being  a  new  one,  we  never  dreamed  for  a  moment 
that  it  would  cost  over  two  or  three  hundred  dollars  to  prepare  for  the  manufacture  of  the 
same ;  but  here  we  made  a  grand  mistake,  for  we  have  already  expended  upwards  of  one 
thousand  dollars,  and  not  yet  fully  completed.  We  expected  to  procure'our  paper  for 
twelve  or  fifteen  cents  per  pound  (and  so  we  could),  but  the  quality  did  not  please  us.  So 
we  had  a  peculiar  non-actinic  sample  gotten  up  expressly  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods, 
and  at  an  expense  of  $14.80  per  ream. 

We  shall  fill  all  paid  orders  received  up  to  October  1,  at  former  quotations.  Hereafter 
Cases  Two  and  Three  will  be  $2.50  each.  Case  One  remains  unchanged.  The  three  cases 
sent,  express  paid,  on  receipt  of  $7.00. 

See  advertisement  in  July,  August,  and  September  Philadelphia  Photographer,  and  direct 
your  orders  to  the 

NASON  NOVELTY  CO., 

COLUMBUS,  OHIO. 


Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 

EGGSHELL,  GLOSSY,  CHOCOLATE-TUTTED. 

(PATENTED   MARCH  1st,  1870.) 

ALL  SIZES,  FROM  1-9  to  10x14.  BLACK  AND  CHOCOLATE. 

THE  PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Worcester,  Mass., 

ARE  NOW  MAKING  THE  MOST  POPULAR  BRAND  OF  PLATES  IN  THE  TRADE. 


i^hioie:   list 

Size. 

Eggshell.   Glossy. 

Size. 

Eggshell, 

Glossy 

Per  Box  of  8  Doz. 

1-9 

$0.80      $0.90 

Per  Box  of  2  Doz. 

4-4 

$2.40 

$2.70 

"            8     " 

1-6 

1.25        1.35 

(i            4     " 

5-7 

2.40 

2.70 

«             g     n 

1-4 

1.85        2.00 

"            2     " 

7-10 

2.70 

2.90 

'«            4     " 

4Jx6£ 

1.85        2.00 

"            2     " 

8x10 

2.70 

2.90 

"           4     " 

1-2 

2.20        2.35 

Per  Sheet, 

10x14 

.17 

.18 

"            2     " 

4*xl0 

2.20        2.85 

Revised,  New  York,  December  28th,  1872. 


EGGSHELL,    GLOSSY,    AND    CHOCOLATE-TINTED    PLATES,    ALL    SIZES   AND    STYLES, 
ALWAYS   ON    HAND   AND   READY   FOR   DELIVERY. 

Each  package  of  Phenix  Plates  has  printed  on  the  wrapper,  "Manufactured 

by  the  Phenix  Plate  Co.,  Worcester,  Mass.,"  and  none 

are  genuine  unless  bearing  that  stamp. 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  constitu- 
ting them  our  sole  and  exclusive  agents  for  the  sale  of  our  Plates. 

That  company  is  so  well  and  favorably  known  in  the  business,  that  no  com- 
mendation of  ours  is  required  to  assure  the  Trade  that  they  will  be  liberally 
dealt  with  in  every  respect. 

Pbenix  Plates  are  for  sale  ly  all  Stock  Dealers  throughout  tiie  country. 

PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Manufacturers, 

Worcester,  Mass, 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  Apts  for  tie  Trade,  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  N.  Y. 


hiladelphia^rame  Manufactory 


Office  and  Salesroom,  822  Arch  St.  (second  story), 

PHIL  A  DELPHI  A, 

WHERE  THE  TRADE  WILL  FIND  THE  LARGEST  ASSORTMENT  OF 

GOLD  {°v  ^r0rnd|  FRAMES 

In  this  city,  from  5x7  to  29x36,  together  with  a  large  assortment  of 

FINE  VELVET  MATS,  WITH  or  WITHOUT  FRAMES, 

From  1-6  to  8-4  sizes  always  on  hand  ;  larger  sizes  made  to  order. 

Jl^"  These  Mats  are  of  Lyons  Silk  Velvet,  with  Prepared  and  Gilt,  and  fine  fire  Gilt 
Kings  inside  for  Porcelains.     Also, 

ENGLISH  MATS,  ALL  SIZES. 

ENGLISH  DISPLAY  MATS,  any  size  and  style,  MADE  TO  ORDER. 


Any  kind  of  Fancy  or  Emblematic  Frames  made  to  order. 
FINE  GOLD  OVAL  FRAMES,  20x24. 


2  in.,  .  .  $4  50  to  $6  00 

3  "    .  .     5  00  to     7  00 


3J  in.,  .  .  $5  50  to  $10  00 

4     "     .  .     7  00  to     12  00 

Other  sizes  in  proportion. 


4§in.,   .  .  $10  00  to  $14  50 
5   "      .  .     12  50  to     15  00 


Also,  all  sizes,  Walnut  Ovals  and  Solid   Walnut  Ovals  on  hand ;    Square 
Walnut  Frames  made  at  short  notice. 

Walnut  and  Prepared  Mouldings, 
Walnut  and  Gold  PIER  and  MANTEL  Looking-Glass  Frames, 

IN  DIFFERENT  STYLES  AND  PATTERNS. 
Trial  Orders  front  the  trade  respectfully  solicited 


Factory,  820  and  822  Cadwallader  St., 

Salesroom,  822  Arch  St.  (second  story),  Philadelphia, 


DAMAGED 


The  recent  fire  in  our  establishment  caused  a  part  of  our  large  stock  of  Lantern  Slides 
to  be  damaged  by  water.  For  all  practical  uses  they  are  not  damaged  at  all.  Any  photog- 
rapher, by  repairing  the  sticking  paper  around  them,  may  make  them  as  good  as  new.  We 
cannot  repair  them  to  look  like  fresh  stock,  so  we  offer  them  at  the  following  reduced  rates: 

l.evy'8  Foreign  Views  (Holy  Land  and  Paris),  each,  50  cts. 

Retailed  at  $1.25. 
Colored  Scripture, "     60    " 

Retailed  at  $1.25  and  $2.00. 

On  receipt  of  price  we  will  select  the  best  of  these  and  forward  for  $5.00  per  dozen. 


ORDER  AT  ONCE,  THEY  AEE  GOING  RAPIDLY. 


Care  given  to  selecting  for  parties  who  cannot  be  present  to  select  for  themselves 

BEHERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 

JOHN   R.  CLEKONS, 

IMPORTER  OF 
AND  MANUFACTURER   OF 

ALBUMEN  AND  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPERS. 

PINK  AND  BLUE  ALBUMEN  PAPER  CONSTANTLY  ON  HAND  OR  MADE  TO  ORDER. 

CLEMONS'  NEW  ALBUMEN   PAPER, 

A  superior  article  introduced  into  the  market  about  a  year  ago.  It  is  equal,  if  not  superior  to  any  Paper 
imported ;  the  great  demand  proves  such  to  be  the  case.  It  is  praised  by  all  who  use  it  as  to  its  keeping 
white  during  warm  weather;  also,  for  its  brilliancy  and  toning  qualities,  and  it  is  made  White,  Piuk,  and 
Blue.    Sizes  medium,  26  x  40  and  35  x  46. 

CLEMONS'  ARROWROOT  SALTED   PAPER 

Has  stood  the  test  above  all  other  makes  for  the  last  nine  years.  An  article  extensively  used  for  all  Plain 
Solar,  and  Colored  Work.    Sizes,  17%  x  23,  26  x  40,  and  35  x  46. 

Prices  lower  than  those  of  any  foreign  make. 

CLEMONS'  N.  P.  A.  VARNISH, 

For  Plain  Work  and  Retouching  upon. 

CLEMONS'  GOLDEN  VARNISH, 

For  Intensifying  and  Retouching  upon. 

JOHN  R.  CLEMONS,  Manufacturer, 

915  SAJSTSOM  ST.,  PHILADELPHIA. 

#  # 


Gihon's  Cut-Outs 

Are  the  very  best  that  are  made,  and  are  now  without  a  rival  in  the  market.  They  are  clean 
cut,  most  desirable  shapes  and  sizes,  and  made  of  non-actinic  paper,  manufactured  specially 
for  the  purpose.  Each  package  contains  30  Gut-Outs,  or  Masks,  with  corresponding  Insides, 
assorted  for  five  differently  sized  ovals  and  one  arch-top. 

PRICE,  $1.00  PER  PACKAGE.     Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

Parties  wishing  special  sizes,  or  large  lots  of  a  few  sizes,  may  have  them  cut  to  order 
promptty,  by  addressing  the  manufacturer.     No  lot  costing  less  than  $1.00  made  at  a  time. 


ISTo  printer  should  attempt  to  make  medallion  pictures  without  them. 

THEY  HAVE  NO  EQUAL  FOR  QUALITY. 

Beware  of  spurious  imitations  made  of  common  paper,  full  of  holes,  badly  cut,  and  odd 
shapes  and  sizes.  Ask  your  stockdealer  for  GIHON'S  CUT-OUTS,  and  see  that  they  are 
in  his  envelopes  with  instruction  circular  included. 


Gihon's  Opaque 

IS    DESIGNED    EOR 

COMPLETELY  OBSCURING  THE  IMPERFECT  BACKGROUNDS  OF  COPIES, 
RETOUCHING  NEGATIVES, 

FAULTY  SKIES  IN  LANDSCAPES, 

COATING  THE  INSIDE  OF  LENSES  OR  CAMERA  BOXES, 
BACKING  SOLAR  NEGATIVES, 

COVERING  VIGNETTING  BOARDS, 

AND   EOR  ANSWERING 

ALL  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  INTELLIGENT  PHOTOGRAPHER  IN  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  ARTISTIC   RESULTS  IN  PRINTING. 


WHEREVER  YOU  WANT  TO  KEEP  OUT  LIGHT,  USE  OPAQUE. 

It  is  applied  with  a  brush,  dries  quickly  and  sticks. 


CUT-OUTS  (thirty),  $1.00.  OPAQUE,  50  CENTS. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Address  all  orders  to 

JOHN  L.  CIHON,  Inventor, 

128  JV.  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia,  JPa. 


HOW  TO   PAINT   PHOTOGRAPHS. 

The  THIRD  EDITION  is  so  different  from  former  ones,  that  it  may  almost  be  said  that  it  is  A  new 
work. 

It  Gives  the  Best  and  Freshest  Instructions  to  be  had  on  the  Subject. 

Written  by  a  practical  photographic  colorist,  Mr.  Geo.  B.  Ayrks. 

PRICE,  $2.00.     FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Photographers  and  artists  whose  interest  it  is  to  produce  work  in  Water  Colors,  Oil,  India  Ink,  or 
who  wish  complete  instructions  in  retouching  negatives,  should  consult  Mr.  Ayres'  capital  work. 

BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 
Gk    SATJTER. 

No.    138  South   Eighth  Street,   Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURER   AND   WHOLESALE   DEALER   IN 


The  attention  of  the  trade  is  particularly  called  to  the  superior  quality  of  our  Glass  and  materials 
and  neatness  of  finish.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand. 

BULLOCK    &    CRENSHAW, 

No.  528  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURERS   AND   IMPORTERS   OP   PURE  CHEMICALS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 
IMPORTERS  OF  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN,  APPARATUS,  ETC. 

TRAPP  &  MUNOH'S 


^Ibitmen 


Introduced  into  this  country  since  1868  has  become  the  leading  paper,  and  is 
now  better  known  and  more  appreciated  than  any  other  brand. 

That  this  great  success  is  well  deserved  and  due  to  its  excellent  qualities 
may  be  judged  from  the  fact,  that  of  all  the  competitors  of  the  Yienna  Ex- 
hibition, Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  alone  received  the 

jynEiD^.L  of  :m::e3:k,it 

for  Albumenized  Paper. 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALL  THE  STOCKHOUSES. 

WILLY  WALLACH, 

GENERAL  AGENT  FOR  THE  UNITED  STATES, 

No.  4  Beekman  St.,  and  36  Park  Row,  New  York. 


OVILL 


Co. 


DEALERS 


IN  EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  10  PHOTOGRAPHY, 


AND  PROPRIETORS  OF  THE  WORKS  OF  THE 


American  Optical 


Company 


BROOME/ 
STREET, 


Advertising,  Enterprising  Photographers,  Look! 

The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons 

WHAT  IS  IT? 


TIHE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS  is  a  little  book  or  pamphlet  of  twelve  pages,  the 
1  intention  of  which  is  :  1st.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  say  a  few  words  in  a  kindly  way 
to  those  who  have  photographs  taken,  in  order  that  the  intercourse  between  them  and  their 
photographer  may  be  pleasant  and  result  in  the  most  successful  pictures.  Every  photographer 
knows  that  he  is  constantly  beset  with  a  lot  of  questions,  as  to  the  proper  way  to  dress,  the  best 
time  to  come,  and  so  on,  which  take  a  great  deal  of  his  time  to  answer.  This  little  book  answers 
them  all,  and  the  mere  handing  of  a  copy  to  the  questioner,  which  he  or  she  can  carry  away  and  study 
at  leisure,  serves  as  admirably  as  a  half-hour's  conversation. 

2d.  It  is  a  cheap  mode  of  advertising  What  could  you  want  better  than  to  have  your  business  card 
so  attractive  that  people  will  come  and  ask  for  it,  hand  it  around  from  one  to  another,  discuss  it,  and 
then  keep  it  for  reference?  This  is  what  they  do  with  this  little  "tract."  Witness  what  those  who 
have  tried  it  say  below. 

3d.  It  is  also  intended  to  convey  to  the  public  at  large  the  fact  that  photography  is  not  a  branch  of 
mechanics,  nor  photographers  a  sort  of  mechanic  themselves,  but  that  both  are  entitled  to  respect,  the 
same  as  the  family  physician  or  the  minister  ;  that  the  photographer  has  rights  as  well  as  the  public  ; 
that  he  must  be  trusted,  and  that  he  alone  is  responsible  for  his  results.  Moreover,  that  hevau&i  make 
the  picture  and  not  they. 

How  far  the  work  serves  these  three  ends  the  reader  must  judge  from  the  testimonials  below,  of  a 
few  of  those  who  have  been  using  our  little  publication  in  their  business. 

We  believe  it  will  pay  you  to  use  it,  and  that  you  will  assist  just  that  much  in  elevating  your  art  and 
your  craft,  an  object  which  we  are  all  working  for. 

We  get  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons  "  up  in  neat  style,  on  the  best  letter  cap  paper,  assorted 
tints,  green,  pink,  and  buff.  Eight  pages  are  devoted  to  the  body  of  the  work,  which  contains  para- 
graphs or  chapters — 1,  on  the  object  of  the  work  ;  2,  on  photography  ;  3,  when  to  come  ;  4,  how  to 
come ;  5,  how  to  dress ;  6,  how  to  "  behave  ;  7,  the  children  ;  8,  general  remarks  on  coloring,  copy- 
ing, frames,  prices,  &c. 

All  this  is  inclosed  in  a  cover  of  the  same  kind  of  paper,  the  pages  of  which  are  at  the  service  of 
the  photographer  who  orders  them  to  have  printed  thereon  anything  he  may  please,  which  printing 
we  do  without  extra  charge.     We  publish  this  leaflet  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 


Cuts  for  the  covers  tve  supply  free. 


1000  copies,  cover  included, 
2000   "     " 


$50  00 
75  00 


.  $20  00  3000  copies,  cover  included, 

.     35  00  5000       "  "  " 

.   Over  500,000  have  been  sold. 
We  invite  you  to  examine  the  good  words  which  our  patrons  have  sent  us  concerning  this  publication. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"  I  sent  one  out  West  to  a  friend,  and  she 
wrote  that  she  was  now  posted,  and  when  she 
came  here  to  have  a  picture  ."nade,  she  would 
come  'according  to  directions.'  " — A.  BoGAR- 
dus,  New  York. 

"  A  grand  idea." — Elbert  Anderson. 

"  It  is  eagerly  sought  for  and  read  by  every- 
body who  visits  our  Gallery." — J.  Gurney  & 
Son,  New  York. 

"  It  assists  me  greatly.'' — James  Mullen, 
Lexington,  Ky. 

"  The  many  valuable  hints  in  it  cannot  fail  to 
be  beneficial  to  both  photographer  and  patron." 
— Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  W.  Virginia. 


"  You  have  conferred  a  great  favor  on  the  fra- 
ternity in  supplying  it,  and  we  hope  it  will  bene- 
fit some  of  the  'know ^everything s'  in  this  quar- 
ter."— A.  C.  McIntyre  &  Co.,  Ogdensburg. 

"  They  are  just  the  thing  to  post  people  up  on 
what  they  ought  to  know  in  order  to  secure  good 
pictures." — J.  P.  Whipple,  White  Water. 

' '  I  really  think  your  little  book  '  hits  the  nail 
on  the  head.'  "—J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

"It  is  the  best  advertising  medium  I  have 
ever  found." — H.  M.  Sedgewick,  Granville,  0. 

"  I  think  they  are  a  perfect  success,  and  will 
do  us  photographers  a  great  deal  of  good." — G 
W.  Mathis. 


We  will  send  samples  of  the  book,  and  special  rates,  to  any 
who  may  desire  it. 

BEKERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


% 


« PHOT  0CUF1ICB 


IN  EVERY  VARIETY. 


Nos.  419  &  421  BROOME  ST.,  NEW  YORK, 
No.  73  BOLD  STREET,  LIVERPOOL,  ENGLAND. 


DEALERS  SUPPLIED  WITH  THE  BEST  MODS  ON  THE  BEST  TEEMS. 


Our  own  extensive  facilities  for  manufacturing  enable  us  to  produce  first  quality  of  goods, 
and  our  extensive  connections  at  home  and  abroad  give  us  facilities  which  no  one  else  has. 


MANUFACTORIES :  ( WaS£  °4l^cHxa^' Ct" 


SEE  OTHEll  ADVERTISEMENTS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  BOOKS  and  MAGAZINES 


Examine  Scovill's  Photographic  Clocks,  and  Read  Hie  Photographic  Times. 


THE  ZENTMAYER  LENS 

For  Views  and  Copying. 


These  Lenses  possess  pre-eminently,  the  following  qualities  : 

Width  of  visual  angle,  ranging  from  80°  to  90"  ;    depth  of  focus ;    extreme  sharpness  over  the 
whole  field  ;  true  perspective  ;  freedom  from  all  distortion  in  copying  ;  portability  and  cheapness. 

Each  mounting  is  provided  with  a  revolving  Diaphragm,  containing  the  stops  of  the  different  com- 


binations for  which  they  are  designed, 
making  and  closing  the  exposure. 


The  larger  ones  are  provided  with  an  internal  shutter  for 


No. 


1, 

2, 
3, 

4,  8 

5,  12 

6,  18 


2 J  inch  focus, 
34     " 


5* 


3 

4 

H 

10 
14 
20 


3  plate,  . 

.  $20  00 

5   "   . 

.  25  00 

8i  "   . 

.  30  00 

12  "   . 

.  42  00 

17  "   . 

.   60  00 

24  "   . 

.  90  00 

No.  1  and  No.  2  combined, 

'•  2     "      "    3 

"  3     "      "    4 

"  4    "      "5 

"  5    "      "6 

"  1,  2,  and  3, 

"  3,  4,  and  5, 


$33  00 
40  00 
55  00 
75  00 

110  00 
48  00 
88  00 


No.  3,  with  large  mounting  to  combine  with  No.  4  and  No.  5,  $35. 

No.  1  and  No.  2,  specially  adapted  for  Stereoscopic  Views,  are  furnished  in  matched  pairs.  No.  1 
and  No.  2,  single,  not  to  combine  with  other  sizes,  $36  a  pair.  • 

Lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six  combinations,  from  2£  to  18  inches,  $173. 

Zentmayer's  Stereoscopic  outfits,  including  a  pair  of  No.  2  Lenses  4x7  box,  7x10  India  Rubber 
Bath  and  Dipper,  Tripod,  Printing  Frames,  and  outside  box,  $60. 

JOSEPH  ZENTMAYER,  Manufacturer, 

147  South  Fourth  Street,  Philadelphia. 

STEREOSCOPIC   VIEWS. 


Dealers  selecting  their  autumn  stock  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  would  do  well  to  examine  our 

unrivalled  variety  of  Views  of 

THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS, 

N1A  GARA,   WA  SUING  TON, 

FAIRMOUNT  PARK,  PHILADELPHIA, 

FLOWERS,  GROUPS,  &c. 

4®-  QUAUITY  UNSURPASSED  ! 


KILBURN  BROS.,  Littleton,  New  Hampshire. 

NIAGARA 

STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS. 


Winter  and  Summer  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  of  all  sizes.     Trade  supplied  on  good  terms.     Variety 
unequalled. 

G.  E.  CURTIS,  Photographer, 

Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y. 


Mr.  Curtis1  views  answer  Mr.  Robinson's  query  :   "Are  there  any  clouds  ii   America?  " 


GERMAN  ALBUMEN  COLORS ! 

JULIUS     KRUGER'S 

fr&T&wr  CssuaestT  Ctafco**» 

FOR  COLORING  PHOTOGRAPHS  ON  ALBUMEN  and  PLAIN  PAPER. 

These  colors  have  become  very  popular  in  Germany  arid  France  (where  they  have  obtained  the 
highest  recommendations),  on  account  of  their  extraordinary  brilliancy,  evenness,  and  easy  application. 
They  can  be  used  on  Albumen  Paper,  and  are  without  doubt  the  best  that  have  been  offered  to  the 
public.     The  Colors  are  put  up  in  boxes  of  6,  12,  and  18. 

GEO.  RAU,  Sole  Agent, 

No.  922  Girard  Ave.,  Philadelphia. 


The  subscriber  desires  to  call  attention  to  an  Entirely  New  Style  of  Carved  Frame, 
unique,  handsome,  and  stylish,  and  very  becoming  to  photographs,  which  he  is  now  manu- 
facturing, and  will  furnish  at  the  following  prices: 


4x5     @  $6  00  per  doz. 

8x10 

@  $15  00  per  doz. 

12  x  1G 

@  $30  00  per  doz 

5Ux7M@    9  00       "              a 

9x11 

@    15  00 

13x17 

@    36  00 

(5i.,xSi«@  12  00 

10x12 

@    18  00        " 

16x20 

@    42  00 

f  x  9     @  12  00 

11x14 

@    24  00 

Larger  sizes  $3.00  per  dozen  for  each  additional  four  inches  or  less  in  length  and  breadth. 
Sample  of  each  size,  except  the  two  smallest,  sent  on  receipt  of  price.  Orders  for  one  dozen 
or  more  filled  C.O.I),  if  ten  per  cent,  is  sent  with  order. 

H.  H.  SNELLINC,  Newburgh,  N.  Y. 


The  undersigned,  having  purchased  the  entire  interest,  goodwill,  and  business  of 

Photo.  Materials  &  Picture  Frames 

OF  J.  HAWORTH, 

Desires  to  inform  his  friends  and  the  trade  generally,  that  he  will  continue  the  business,  as 

heretofore,  at  the  old  stand, 

624  ARCH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA, 

Where  he  hopes,  by  prompt  attention  and  fair  dealing,  to  merit  a  continuance  of  the  patron- 
age so  largely  given  to  the  late  firm. 

We  will  still  keep  a  well  assorted  stock  of 

PICTURE  FRAMES  (OVAL  AND  SQUARE), 

VELVET  CASES,  COLLODIONS, 

VARNISHES,  PURE  CHEMICALS,  &c, 

which  can  be  had  at  the  lowest  rates  ;  as  well  as 

PASSEPARTOUTS,    STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS   OF    ALL    PARTS    OF   THE  WORLD, 
STEREOSCOPIC  INSTRUMENTS,  *C. 

We  also  have  a  full  line  of  CAMERAS  of  the  best  makes  and  latest  improvements, 
CAMERA  STANDS,  HEAD-RESTS,  BACKGROUNDS,  and  all  Accessories  necessary 
to  the  Photographic  Art.  We  woidd  call  the  attention  of  photographers  to  the  fact  that  we 
manufacture  SQUARE  FRAMES,  and  so  can  generally  ship  any  frames  (especially  odd 
sizes)  the  same  day  they  are  ordered.  We  would  also  call  attention  to  the  noted  ALBU- 
MEN PAPERS,  Morgan's  and  H.  Extra,  the  best  for  warm  weather,  for  which  I  am 
the  agent. 

THOMAS  H.  McCOLLIN, 

Successor  to  Haworth  &  McCollin,  624  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


LOOKING 
GLASS"* 

PICTURE 
FRAMES. 

Patented  Solid 
Ovals  und  Spandrels 

VVABEKOOMS, 

48&50N.  6thSt. 


331JLTJB1,    KILBURN    &c    CO., 

Wholesale  T.  .„    _  Manufacturers  of 

Walnut 


?#*°^  ^£^ 


»KX 


Mouldings 
BACKING, 


Ac,  &e. 


Solid  Walnut  Woik 
A  Specialty. 


A  NEW 


%!       INVOICES 


f/JUST    RECEIVED 


OF 


LOESCHER  &  PETSCH'S 


ADMIRABLE 


STUDIES! 


The  praise  which  has  been  bestowed  upon  these  pictures,  particularly  at  the  Vienna  Exhibition,  convinces  us 
thai  they  should  be  treasured  as  suita.de  models  of  pose  and  lighting  of  the  sitter,  harmonious  and  artistic  arrangement  of 
furniture,  etc.  These  photographs  are  the  only  European  ones  for  which  the  international  jury  awarded  the  two 
medals  for  progress  and  taste,  Mr.  Lewitzky,  a  photographer,  and  member  of  the  jury,  exclaimed :  "  The  exhi- 
bition of  Messrs.  Loescher  &  Petsch  has  charmed  me;  according  to  my  opinion,  Loescher  &  Petsch,  in 
Europe,  and  Kurtz,  in  New  York,  are  the  first  photographers  of  the  world  !" 

We  will  Express  the  sett  on  receipt  of  $30  ;  or  post  them  at  your  risk  to  any  address.  The  price  is  remarka- 
bly low,  as  each  print  is  most  carefully  made. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

fl®=  See  review  of  these  pictures  in  the  "  Philadelphia  Photographer  "  for  December,  1873. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  REFRIGERATOR. 

Patented  July  18,  1871,  by  Mrs.  M.  A.  Thornton. 

It  is  generally  understood  by  photographers  that  the  chemicals  with  which  pictures  are  to  be  taken 
must  be  kept  quite  cool  to  insure  good  pictures,  and  as  a  common  ice-box  is  not  convenient,  I  have 
so  arranged  one  which  is  in  every  way  adapted  for  that  purpose,  having  a  permanent  place  for  the 
bath-tub,  one  for  the  collodion  bottles,  and  also  another  place  for  any  chemicals  which  are  required 
to  be  kept  cool.  Being  a  practical  artist  I  have  used  this  box  for  seven  years,  and  found  it  to  be  all 
that  I  recommend,  for  by  its  use  I  can  truly  say  that  it  has  saved  me  more  than  double  its  price  each 
year.  I  do  not  intend  to  manufacture  the  box  myself,  but  wish  to  sell  the  patent  right  to  any  one 
who  wishes  to  buy  it  and  manufacture.  I  will  sell  by  the  State,  Territory,  or  the  whole  of  the  United 
States  and  Territories  {it  one  sale.  I  wiil  sell  as  reasonable  as  I  can  afford.  The  right  runs  for  seven- 
teen years  from  the  18th  day  of  July,  A.D.  1S71.  Anyone  wishing  to  purchase  the  right,  please  notify 
me  of  the  same,  and  I  will  then  state  terms  of  the  sale. 

Mrs.  MARY  A.  THORNTON,  Penysburg,  Wood  County,  Ohio. 


SOMETHING 
NEW 

New  Advertising  Medium 


FOR   PHOTOGRAPHERS. 


a  t3   3   <d 
a)    d    o  -c 

•n    .-  >,  a 


.a    a) 


<D 


-w   «   ®   £    -.- 
,c   go  £   a.  :. 

~     2    c    a    0 

83    .2    ♦» 

e 


«C8 

S  * 


rfi     C-    a 

e 
e 
s- 

eg 


fc-s 


a    c 


«     g     J, 

e 


o 


a   » 


%  g.  -s  *  s  ©  -  *; 


©  -* 

•a  .5 

ffi    c 

s  a 

H-5 


©  ,2 


0 

fa 

a  a 

0  a 

63 


fa 
S   „ 

m  © 

.   ^  8 

S  0  cfi 
>,2  « 
■•-  —  c 
2  fa  ® 
a  3  2 

8      J    ■« 

fc  *   a 
>»  9 


s  a* 


«■    "^     -w      u    T3 

sb  ^   o   a   o 

a    -^     03     »3 


TRY  SOME!      BUY  SOME! 


> 

r 
pi 
to 

*Q 
TO 

r 
w 

0 

to 

to 

0 
to 

O 

DC 
> 

0 
to 


a    o  "3 
a,    ^ 

1— »i    CD 


13 


^     — '   <n 


9 

®  2 

0  3 

>g  crq 

55  cd 

-t  V 


a    O 


h3 


<2  §£ 


!'*s 


'     a:       1-5       5 

&a  !. 

©  »    a 
a    cd 

«2? 
2^o 

©     r*     OJ 

©    c*    © 

^     CD      O 

*s  8 
S  *  § 

j    S     3       CD 

*      CD      o. 

©  c  <» 


►— '    CD 

a-  o 


9 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  &  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


GET  AND  READ 

SOMETHING  NEW 
SOMETHING  NEW 
SOMETHING  NEW. 

SOMETHING  NEW. 


The  best  Advertising  Medium  a  Photogra- 
pher can  Possibly  Employ. 


SPECIMEN  COPY  FPvEE  ON   APPLICATION  TO  THE  PUBLISHERS. 

IT  INTERESTS  ALL, 

WILL  MAKE  BUSINESS, 
WILL  SAVE  TIME, 

AND 

HELP  RAISE  PRICES. 

{See  Advertisement  on  opposite  Page.) 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Philadelphia,  Pa. 


THE 

radical  Printer. 

A  NEW  WORK  ON  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PRINTING. 
By   CHAS.  W.   HEARN, 

A  gentleman  who  has  devoted  several  years  to  photographic  printing  especially,  and  who  is 
now  engaged  at  it  as  his  constant  occupation. 

The  work  gives  all  the  instructions  that  a  beginner  could  possibly  want 
in  detail,  and  is  what  the  title  indicates — practical. 

It  will  also  be  found  of  invaluable  service  to  any  photographic  printer,  be 
he  ever  so  skilled.     For  contents  see  opposite  page. 

OVER  500  COPIES   ARE   ALREADY   SOLD! 


TESTIMONIALS: 

"  I  consider  it  the  best  work  on  printing  and  toning  that  has  been  published,  or  at  least  that  has 
come  into  my  hands,  and  until  I  see  a  better  one  I  shall  give  it  the  first  place.  If  any  one  wishes  to 
be  helped  out  of  the  mud  let  him  read  it ;  but  if  he  wants  to  stick  there  let  him  keep  his  money  in 
his  pocket,  and  stick  till  doomsday  if  he  likes.1' — John  R.   Clkmons,  Philadelphia. 

"I  have  read  it  with  a  great  deal  of  interest,  and  find  it  indispensable  to  the  student  photographer. 
It  contains  so  much  valuable  information  in  modern  photographic  printing  that  I  do  most  cheerfully 
recommend  its  usefulness  to  the  student  printer.  Its  cost  is  money  well  laid  out.'' — C.  D.  Mosher, 
Chicago. 

"It  will  be  of  untold  value  to  any  printer,  and  worth  more  practically  than  a  combination  of  all 
the  volumes  and  essays  on  printing  which  have  been  published  for  the  advancement  of  the  art." — H. 
J.  Rogers,  Hartford,  Conn. 

"It  is  truly  what  it  claims,  a  thoroughly  practical  treatise  upon  that  most  important  branch  of  our 
art,  photographic  printing.  Mr.  Hearn  has  been  with  me  over  three  years  as  printer  nnd  toner,  and 
has  ever  manifested  the  greatest  interest  and  enthusiasm  in  his  work,  seeming  to  do  his  utmost  to  ex- 
cel and  advance  himself  continually  in  his  chosen  department  of  our  art  science.  It  seems  to  me 
that  the  merest  tyro  could  make  and  tone  good  prints  if  the  simple  directions  in  this  book  are  faith- 
fully followed.  Indeed,  this  volume  seems  to  fill  a  void  in  our  photographic  literature  that  it  has 
always  surprised  me  was  never  supplied  before." — J.  H.  Lamson,   Portland,  Me. 

Tike  Photographic  News,  of  July  31st,  says:  ''In  the  work  before  us,  however,  silver  printing  and 
everything  connected  therewith  is  treated  most  exhaustively,  and  the  work  is  evidently  that  of  a 
practical  man  who  speaks  out  of  the  fulness  of  his  own  experience  in  every  branch  of  regular  work, 
as  well  as  with  familiarity  of  the  various  forms  of  fancy  printing,  which  have  prevailed  more  in 
America  than  in  this  country.  Mr.  Hearn  manifestly  thoroughly  understands  his  work,  and  is,  more- 
over, a  clear  and  vigorous  writer." 

The  British  Journal  of  Photography,  of  the  same  date,  says  :  "It  is  a  considerable  period  since  we 
rose  from  the  perusal  of  a  new  book  on  photography  with  feelings  of  greater  satisfaction  than  in  the 
present  instance;  and  we  appreciate  the  author  as  a  writer,  not  only  thoroughly  conversant  with  the 
subject,  but  as  very  willing  to  impart  to  those  less  skilled  the  knowledge  he  possesses,  and  who,  hap- 
pily, has  also  the  ability  to  do  this  in  a  singularly  lucid  and  attractive  manner.  'The  Practical 
Printer  '  is  well  'got  up,'  and  the  work  cannot  fail  of  being  acceptable  and  useful  to  all  classes  of 
photographers,  the  veteran  as  well  as  the  tyro  in  our  art-science." 

With  these  flattering  testimonials  the  work  needs  no  farther  recommendation  from  us.  We  are 
satisfied  that  it  will  stand  on  its  own  merits,  and  that  all  progressive  enterprising  photographers  every- 
where will  buy  and  read  the  book.      No  man  in  business  can  afford  to  be  without  it  in  his  gallery. 

A  fine  example  of  Photographic  Printing,  by  the  author,  ac- 
companies the  work,  from   negatives  by  F.  Gutekunst,  Philada. 


PBICE,     S2.50. 

BEHERMAH  &  WILSON,  Photographic  Publishers.  Seventh  and  Cherry,  Phila. 


The  Last  JYew  Book! 


A  COMPLETE  MANUAL  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PRINTING- 

ON   PLAIN   AND   ALBUMEN   PAPER,    AND    ON  PORCELAIN. 


Too  little  attention  has  heretofore  been  given  to  Photo- 
graphic Printing,  which  is  indeed  quite  as  important  a 
branch  of  the  art  as  negative  making. 

It  is  the  hope  of  both  author  and  publishers  to  create  REFORM  in  this 
matter,  by  the  issue  of  this  work,  and  as  it  is  to  put  money  in  the  pockets 
of  all  who  read  it,  the  hope  is  that  it  will  be  generally  read. 


COIsTTE^TTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  Printing  Room,  with  a,  Plan.  The  Silver- 
ing and  Toning  Room,  with  a  Plan.  The  Dry- 
ing Room,  with  a  Plan. 

PART  I.— ALBUMEN  PAPER  PRINTING. 

The  Positive  Bath  for  Albumen  Paper.  Sil- 
vering the  Albumen  Paper.  Drying  the  Paper. 
Fuming  the  Paper.  Preservation  of  Sensitive 
Albumenized  Paper — Washed  Sensitive  Paper. 
Cutting  the  Paper.  The  Printing  Boards.  Keep- 
ing Tally.  Vignette  Printing  Blocks.  Treat- 
ment of  the  Negatives  before  Printing.  Filling 
of  the  Boards.  Fitting  Vignette  Boards  to  the 
Negatives  for  Printing.  Medallion  and  Arch- 
top  Printing.  Fancy  Printing.  Vignette  Cameo 
and  Medallion  Vignette  Cameo  Printing.  Print- 
ing the  Bendann  Backgrounds.  Printing  Intense 
Negatives.  Printing  Weak  Negatives.  A  Few 
More  Remarks  about  Printing — Treatment  of 
Broken  Negatives.  Cutting  the  Prints.  Wash- 
ing the  Prints.  Acidifying  the  Prints.  Toning 
Baths.  Artistic  Toning.  Fixing  Baths  and 
Fixing  Prints.  Washing  the  Prints.  Mounting 
the  Prints.     Finishing  the  Prints. 


PART  II.— PLAIN  PAPER  PRINTING. 

Salting  the  Paper.  Positive  Baths  for  Plain 
Salted  Paper.  Silvering  Plain  Salted  Paper. 
Drying,  Fuming,  and  Cutting  the  Paper.  Treat- 
ment of  the  Negatives  before  Printing.  Print- 
ing-in  False  Backgrounds.  General  Plain  Paper 
Printing.  Further  Treatment  of  the  Prints  after 
Printing.  Causes  of  Failures  in  Albumen  and 
Plain  Paper  Printing. 


PART  III.— PORCELAIN  PRINTING. 

Selection  of  the  Porcelain  Plates.  Cleaning 
of  the  Porcelain  Plates.  Albumenizing  the 
Porcelain  Plates.  Making  the  Porcelain  Collo- 
dion. Coating,  Fuming,  and  Drying  the  Plates. 
Porcelain  Printing  Boards.  Placing  the  Sensi- 
tive Plate  on  the  Board  for  Printing.  Printing 
Vignette  Porcelains.  Printing  Medallion  Prr- 
celains.  Washing  the  Porcelains.  Toning  the 
Porcelain.  Fixing  the  Porcelain.  Final  Wash- 
ing of  the  Porcelain.  Drying  and  Tinting  of  the 
Porcelain.  Varnishing  the  Porcelain.  Causes 
of  Failures  in  Porcelain  Printing. 


Together  with  over 
from  negatives  by  Mr. 
Hearn. 


50  Wood    Cuts,  and    an    elegant   Cabinet  Portrait, 
F.  Gutekunst,  printed  by  the  author,  Mr.  Chas.  W. 


It  is  selling  splendidly! 


Hundreds  already  gone! 


MAILED  POST-PAID  OH  RECEIPT  OF  $2.50,  EY  ANY  DEALER,  OR 
BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  PUBLISHERS, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


IMPORTANT  TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 


TARE  NOTICE ! 

WHAT    PARTIES    SAY,    WHO    ARE     USING 

J.  A.  ANDERSON'S  CAMERA  BOXES. 

■  Office  of  Chicago  Photographic  and  Copying  Company, 
320,  322,  324,  &  326  State  Street. 
J.  A.  Anderson. — Dear  Sir: — The  10x12  Conical  Bellows  Camera  you  made  us  gives  entire  satisfaction.  It 
is  finely  finished,  and  the  working  parts  are  all  complete  in  their  action.  We  now  have  seven  of  your  boxes 
in  our  operating  department  and  shall  discard  all  others  (the  so-called  "Success")  for  your  make,  as  we  will 
save  the  price  in  repairs.  They  are  all  in  constant  use  every  day,  and  stand  the  test  better  than  any  other  make 
we  have  used.  For  durability,  accuracy,  and  cheapness,  they  certainly  have  no  rivals;  they  compare  favorably 
with  the  A.  O.  Co.'s  boxes,  and  are  far  superior  to  anything  else  in  the  market. 

(Signed),  JAS.  S.  NASON. 


a",  .a..  AJsriDiERscyjsrs 
NEW  POSITION  AND  BABY  CHAIR.  COMBINED. 


THE 
HANDSOMEST, 

MOST 
COMPLETE, 

ADD 
CHEAPEST 


PIECE  OF  APPARATUS  EVER  OFFERED  TO  THE  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


BUY  NO  IMITATION. 


SEND  FOR  PBICM  LIST. 


Photographers  can  save  from  10  to  20  per  cent,  by  sending  direct  to  the  manufactory  for  Apparatus. 

TESTIMONIAL. 

Elgin,  April  5th,  1874. 

Mr.  J.  A.  Anderson.— Sir-:— The  Camera  Boxes  prove  to  be  all  that  I  expected.  The  11  x  14  is  superior  to  any 
that  I  ever  used ;  it  is  a  beauty,  and  I  am  proud  of  it.  The  cheapness,  too,  is  an  item  especially  with  me  at 
this  time,  having  lost  all  the  contents  of  my  gallery  by  fire.    I  am  obliged  to  you  for  your  favor. 

Yours,  "  G.  H.  Sherman. 

(4®*  See  other  testimonials  in  special  advertisements). 

J.    A.    ANDERSON,    (Late  Anderson  &  Bixby), 

65  East  Indiana  Street,  Chicago. 


Jtea's  Jplanual 


OF 


LI 


PjIjH  f  O^Tf  Of  G  fRjf  AIP1H 1 Y 

Third  Thousand! 

We  have  undertaken  the  publication  of  the  third  thousand  of  this  valuable  Text-Book, 
and  offer  it  to  the  photographers  in  a  more  attractive  and 

New  Shape. 

The  author's  illustrations  now  number  150,  nearly  double  the  number  of  the  first  edition. 

The  Chapters  on  Failures  have  been  much  elaborated  and  rearranged,  so  as  to  afford  a 
ready  reference  in  case  of  almost  any  trouble  or  difficulty  liable  to  occur  to  the  photogra- 
pher, with  appropriate  remedies  therefor.     The  following  are  among  other 

New  Things: 

Method  of  preparing  silvered  PAPER  WHICH  WILL  KEEP  FOR 
WEEKS,  and  with  care,  even  for  months;  no  washing  or  additional 
manipulation  of  the  paper  needed. 

Investigation  of  Negative  Varnishes  and  formulas  for  Water-proof  Var- 
nish, such  that  negatives  varnished  tvith  it  have  been  kept  for  months 
under  water  ivithout  injury. 

Tables  to  aid  in  the  construction  of  glass  houses,  &c. 


NOTICES  OF  THE  PRESS. 


"  There  is  a  valuable  chapter  on  the  preparation  of  a  sensitive  paper  that  is  not  liable  to  discoloration 

We  close  the  present  notice  by  cordially  commending  Mr.  Lea's  Manual  to  our  readers." — British  Journal  of  Pho- 
tography. 

"  M.  Carey  Lea's  excellent '  Manual  of  Photography  '  is  a  very  full  and  complete  work." — Philad'a  Bulletin. 

"  If  we  say  that  this  work  is  an  encyclopedia  of  its  art,  we  shall  hardly  exaggerate  its  comprehensiveness. 
....  The  author  takes  every  department  and  every  branch  of  each,  and  gives  that  distinct  and  clear  information 

that  is  needed  by  photographers The  worth  of  the  labor  is  proved  in  the  fact  that  this  new  and  enlarged 

edition  follows  the  first  so  speedily.    Hereafter,  those  who  would  excel  must  master  the  Manual." — North 


American. 


PRICE,  $3.75, 


It  contains  440  pages  on  fine  toned  paper,  150  wood  cuts,  cloth,  beveled  edges,  and  gilt. 

FOE  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCK-DEALERS. 
Sent  by  return  mail,  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


HERMAGIS' 

Celebrated  French 

P  ORTR  AIT 
OBJECTIVES 

These  celebrated  lenses,  which  are 

USED  BY  MONS.  ADAM  SALOMON,  OF  PARIS, 

exclusively  for  making  his 

WORLD-RENOWNED  PORTRAITS! 

have  been  difficult  to  get,  on  account  of  the  demand  for  them  in  Europe. 

Having  been  appointed  his  American  trade  agents  by  Mons.  Hermagis,  we  have  pleasure 
in  announcing  to  American  photographers  that  we  have  just  received  an  invoice  of  his 
lenses  for 

The  Salomon  Style,  8  x  10  size,  $175. 

For  Cabinet  Size,  extra  quick,  $110. 

For  Cabinet  Size,  quick,  $100. 

For  Carte  Size,  extra  quick,  $55. 

For  Carte  Size,  quick,  $45. 


ALSO, 


Hermagis'  Inimitable  Focusing  Glasses,  $6.50. 


These  lenses  are  unsurpassed  by  any  other.     Sent  on  trial  to  responsible  parties, 
C.  O.  D.,  and  instructions  to  Express  Company  to  hold  money  one  week  for  trial. 

BENEEMAN  &  WILSON, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


COW!l£ 


MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

Nos.  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 


WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN 


BMAEsBMB  MWPPMBB 

On  the  Most  Advantageous  Terms,  with 

EVERY  ARTICLE  IN  THE  WORLD 

Used  or  sold  in  the  Art  of  Photography. 


H^gr  Our  facilities  are  such  that  we  cannot  be  superseded  hj  any 
other  house.    We  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to  deal  with  us. 


ASK  YOUR  DEALER  FOR  SCOVILL'S  GOODS. 


Removed  to  New  Store,  419  &  421  Broome  St. 
^SeeT^:iTrment8  'PHOTOGRAPHIC  TIMES." 


in,  and  read  the 

#        * 


RTKARXjIT  ALL  GONE ! 


EDITED  BY  EDWARD  L.  WILSON. 


This  favorite  annual  is  wholly  filled  with  Articles  prepared  expressly  for  it  by  the 
eminent  photographers  of  Europe  and  America,  and  is  Unusually  Good. 

Price,  in  Cloth,  $1.00 ;  in  Paper  Cover,  50  Cents. 


The  Best  Little  laultoot  of  Photography  in  the  World.       For  Sale  by  all  Dealers. 

BBNEBMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


POWERS     <£     WEIGHTMABT, 

-=s! 


CnS 


MANUFACTURING  CHEMISTS, 


i> 

» 

J-a* 

taaj 

< — > 

H 

W 

C3-. 

S 

H 

o^> 

S 

0=- 

0 

SS 

(=1 

S 

Offer  to  Stockdealers 
A  full  Assortment  of  Reliable 


Photographic  Chemicals 


Of  their  own  Manufacture, 
including  : 


Nitrate  of  Silver,  Sulphuric  Ether  (concentrated),  Ammonia  (concentrated), 
Bromide  of  Potassium,  Acetic  Acid,  Chemically  Pure  Acids, 
Iron  and  Ammonia  Proto-Sulphate,  Chloride  of  Gold, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  Sulphate  of  Iron,  Cyanide  of  Potassium, 
Chloroform,  Tannin,  Sulphuret  of  Potassium. 


CHARLES  BIERSTADT 

Photographer 


NIAGAEA  FALLS, 
New  York. 


VIENNA  MEDAL  OF  MERIT. 


An  Extensive  Assortment  of 
Views  of 


SILVER  MEDAL. 


Niagara  Falls, 
Hudson  Kiver, 
Saratoga, 
Portage,  N.  Y., 
Watkins'  Glen, 
Havana  Glen, 


Washington, 

California, 

Yosemite  Valley, 

Egypt, 

Palestine, 

Africa, 


MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS. 


LIESEGANG'S  ALBUMEN  PAPEE 

Is  used  and  recommended  by  the  London  Stereoscopic  Company  ;  Messrs.  Alessandri  Fratelli, 
of  Rome  ;  Le  Lieure,  of  Rome  ;  A.  Sorgato,  of  Venice  ;  Fr.  Bruckmann,  of  Munich  ;  C.  Rent- 
linger,  of  Paris ;  C.  Bergamasio,  of  Petersburg ;  Abdullah,  of  Constantinople ;  and  many 
other  first  class  photographers  throughout  the  World. 

IT  IS  THE  BEST  PAPER  IN  THE  MARKET. 

Sample  sheets,  and  English,  French,  and  German  Price  List  to  he  had  free  on  application 
from  the  Manufacturer. 


DUSSELDORF    ON    THE    RHINE,   GERMANY, 


(FORMERLY  AT  ELBERFELD). 


For  Sale  by  SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  New  York. 


ZKTIEW   SBDIRIIES    BEIUG    PBEPABED  I 
SEND  FOR  THE  FIRST  ONE,  NOW  READY. 

" -a. axr ci is 3xr t    ajstid    ivcodsxhnt    ivettsic. 

A  CAPITAL  THING. 

F.  G.  WELLER,  Publisher  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  Statuary,  etc,  LITTLETON,  N.  H. 


JOHN  DEAN  &  CO., 
MANUFACTURERS, 

Worcester,  Mass., 

OFFER  AT   WHOLESALE,   AT    LOWEST   PRICES,   THE 

dmtratten 


LATES, 


BLACK  and  Patent  CHOCOLATE  TINTED, 
EGG-SHELL  and  GLOSSY. 

The  experience  and  extensive  facilities  of  John  Dean  &  Co.  enable  them 
to  produce  the  most  desirable  Ferrotype  Plates  in  the  market. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO., 

TRADE   AGENTS, 

591  BROADWAY,  NEW  YORK. 


MARCY'S 


McAllisters 

MAGIC  LANTERNS 


IN  GREAT  VARIETY. 


LANTERN  SLIDES, 


OF  ALL  PARTS 
op  the  WORLD. 


LARGE  STOCK  JUST  RECEIVED  BY 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Importers,  Seventh  anil  Cherry  Sts.,  Philafla. 


TRY    IT    AND    BE    CONVINCED, 


The  best  COLLODION  in  use  is 

LEWIS  &  HOLT'S  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE, 

Sold  with  a  Printed  Formula  accompanying  each  Bottle. 

Being  among  the  first  in  this  country  to  make  Collodion  Pictures,  they  can  warrant  it  to  be  one 

of  the  best  in  use. 

ALSO,   THEIR 

ADAMANTINE  VARNISH  for  Autotypes,  Negatives,  aid  Melainotjpes. 

This  Varnish,  when  applied  to  Negatives,  dries  in  a  few  seconds  perfectly  hard,  and  does  not  lower  the 
intensity,  or  soften  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  in  Printing.  It  gives  a  beautiful  gloss  and  brilliancy  to 
Ambrotypes.    For  Sale  by  Stockdealers  generally.    Prepared  by  K,    A    LEWIS 

160  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

HEADQUARTERS     FOR    THE     TRADE. 

Show  Displayers,  Velvet  Stands, 

Velvet  Passepartouts,         Velvet  Cases, 
Beveled  Matts,  Double  Matts, 

Fancy  Metal  Frames,  Standard  Matts, 

Fancy  Paper  Passepartouts. 

These  goods  are  entirely  of  our  own  manufacturing.  A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand  ;  odd 
sizes  and  styles  made  to  order. 

LEWIS  PATTBEEG  &  BBO.f  709  (SftTSS)  Broadway,  New  York. 


Photographic  Card  Warehouse. 


A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 

MANUFACTURERS, 

No.  18  South  Sixth  St.  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 

PHILADELPHIA. 


EVERYTHING  APPERTAINING  TO  THE   LINE   OF  OUR 

MANUFACTURES  FURNISHED  WITH  CARE 

AND  PROMPTNESS. 


fi^f  Our  long  experience  in  and  facilities  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods,  and 
familiarity  with  the' peculiar  wants  of  Photographers,  enable  us  to  offer  superior  induce- 
ments to  those  who  may  favor  us  with  their  orders. 

enLaEGEMEN     JL,      O 

■IDE  BY  THE  SOUR  CAMERA, 

AND  COPYING  DONE,  FOR  THE  TRADE. 


18  SOLAR   CAMERAS. 


EXPEDITIOUS.  "te&XMBS5*Sr"«   EXCELLENT 

ALBERT   MOORE, 

No.  828  Wood  Street,  Philadelphia. 


PDBLICA 
TIONS. 


In  order  to  meet  the  thirst  now  happily  growing  so  rapidly  among  photographers,  for 
knowledge  bearing  upon 

UT  PRINCIPLES  APPLICABLE  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY, 

We  have  arranged  with  the  various  publishers  of  art  works  for  the  sale  of  such  as  we  think 
will  be  useful  to  photographers,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  copies  of  them  on  receipt  of  price, 
as  follows : 

ART  CULTURE.  A  Hand-book  of  Art  Technicalities  and  Criticism,  selected  from  the 
works  of  John  Ruskin.  An  admirable  work,  giving  most  useful  hints  on  composi- 
tion, posing,  lighting,  backgrounds,  tone,  color,  lines,  unity,  variety,  harmony,  &c,  &c. 
485  pages,  and  finely  illustrated.     Price,  $3.00. 

THE  STUDY  OF  ART.  A  manual  of  short  paragraphs,  numerically  arranged,  on  all 
the  leading  art  topics,  and  a  very  instructive,  useful  book.  By  M.  A.  Dwight.  278 
pages.     Price,  $2.00. 

THE  OLD  MASTERS  AND  THEIR  PICTURES.  A  simple  account  of  the  great 
old  masters  in  painting  of  every  age  and  country,  with  descriptions  of  their  most 
famous  works,  for  the  use  of  learners,  &c.    By  Sarah  Tyler.    863  pages.    Price,  $1.50. 

MODERN  PAINTERS  AND  THEIR  PAINTINGS.  A  companion  to  "The  Old 
Masters,"  and  an  introduction  to  the  Study  of  Modern  Painters  and  their  Pictures. 
By  Sarah  Tyler.     360  pages.     Price,  $1.50. 

THOUGHTS  ABOUT  ART.  A  book  which  every  photographer  should  read,  being  ex- 
haustive on  the  subject,  and  containing  chapters  on  "  The  Relation  between  Photography 
and  Painting,"  "The  Artistic  Spirit,"  "The  Artistic  Observation  of  Nature,"  and 
many  other  useful  subjects,  by  that  delightful  author  Philip  Gilbert  Hamerton. 
383  pages.     Price,  $2.25. 

CHRISTIAN  ART  AND  SYMBOLISM.  A  very  useful  book  with  the  others.  More 
advanced.     Illustrated.     292  pages.     Price,  $2.25. 

THE  LAOCOON.  An  essay  upon  the  limits  of  painting  and  poetry,  with  remarks  illus- 
trative of  various  points  in  the  history  of  ancient  art.  By  G.  S.  Lessing.  245  pages. 
Price,  $1.75. 

ART  EDUCATION.  A  very  elaborate  and  elegant  work.  By  Walter  Smith,  Super- 
intendent of  Art  Education,  State  of  Massachusetts.     Price,  $5.00. 

fl^-ALL  ORDERS  FILLED  PROMPTLY. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


The  publishers  of  the  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER,  encouraged  by  the 
growing  interest  taken  in  their  PREMIUM  LIST,  by  operators,  printers,  employees,  etc., 
offer  the  following 

PREMIUMS  FOR  1874, 

FOR  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS 


CONDITIONS:  These  premiums  are  only  given  to  old  or  present  subscribers  for 
new  ones.     No  premium  will  be  given  you  on  your  own  renewal. 


WE  WILL  GIVE  FOR  THREE  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  (IN  ADDITION  TO 
YOUR  OWN),  FOR  ONE  YEAR, 

Vols.  I  &  II  of  the  Photographic  World ! 


TWO  NEW  SUBSCRIBERS  FOR  ONE  YEAR, 

Either  Volume  I  or  II  of  the  Photographic  World, 

Or  your  ehoice'of  the  following  :  $1  on  each  per  year,  payable  in  any  of  our  publications, 
not  in  cash;  i.  e.,  $10  will  secure  our  Magazine  for  one  year  to  an  OLD  subscriber,  to  a  new  one, 
and  one  dollar's  worth  of  our  other  publications. 

Any  enterprising  operator  can,  by  writing  a  few  letters  and  a  little  effort,  secure  enough 
new  subscribers  to  pay  for  his  own,  and  fit  him  out  with  our  whole  list  of  premiums,  or  a 
set  of  the  six  Luckhardt  pictures.     (See  special  advertisement.) 

This  magnificent  offer  was  never  equalled  by  any  publisher,  photographic  or  otherwise. 
Strive  hard  to  win  the  whole  ! 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 


Philadelphia  Photographer, 

Is  admitted  by  all  who  understand  such  things  to  be 

The  Livest  and  Best  Photographic  Magazine  Published ! 

IT    PUBLISHES 

A  Handsome  Specimen  Photograph  in  each  issue, 
The  Latest  Photographic  News  from  home  sources, 

Monthly  Letters  from  England,  France,  Germany,  and  Italy, 
Correspondence  from  all  parts  of  the  World, 

Illustrations  on  Wood  of  all  sorts  of  Articles  used  in  the  Art, 
Processes,  Formulae,  Wrinkles  and  Dodges,  without  number, 
The  Earliest  Information  on  all  matters  of  use  to  its  readers, 
Elaborate  Drawings  of  Skylights  in  all  parts  of  the  World, 

AND 

EACH  MONTHLY  ISSUE  IS  A  PHOTOGRAPHIC  WORK  IN  ITSELF. 

BE   ASSURED 

NO  PHOTOGRAPHER  CAN  AFFORD  TO  DO  WITHOUT  IT. 


NOW  IN  ITS  ELEVENTH  YEAE.     SAMPLE  COPIES  EEEE. 


Please  read  what  we  give  for  new  subscribers  as 

PEEMIUMS  ON  THE  OPPOSITE  PAGE 


NOTICE   TO    SUBSCRIBERS. 


Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2  50  for  six. months,  50  cents  per  copy.     Positively  in  advance. 

In  remitting  by  mail  a  post-office  order,  or  draft  payable  to  the  order  of  Benerman  &  "Wilson,  is 
preferable  to  bank  notes.      Clearly  give   your  Post-office,   County,  and  State. 

Canada  subscribers  must  remit  24  cents  extra,  to  prepay  postage.  Foreign  subscriptions  must  be 
accompanied  by  the  postage  in  addition. 

Advertising  sheets  are  bound  with  each  number  of  the  Magazine.  Advertisements  are  inserted 
at  the  following  rates : 

One  Month.  Six  Months.  One  Year. 

OnePage, $20  00  $110  00  $200  00 

Half    "      12  00  66  00  120  00 

Quarter  Page,..' 7  00  38  50  70  00 

Eighth        '*     4  00  22  00  40  00 

Cards,  of  Six  lines  or  less, 2  00  11  00  20  00 

The  attention  of  advertisers,  and  those  having  galleries,  &c,  for  sale,  is  called  to  our  Specialties 
pages.  Terms  $2  for  six  lines,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a  line,  always 
in  advance.  Duplicate  insertions,  50  cents  less,  each.  Sure  to  pay.  JJigf  Operators  desiring  situa- 
tions, no  charge. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

OFFICE,  S.W.  COR.  OF  SEVENTH  AND  CHERRY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


THE  ENTREKIN  BURNISHER  PATENTS. 


THE 

OPINIONS  OF 

EMINENT 

COUNSELGIVEN 

in 
THEIR  FAVOR. 


THEIR 

VALIDITY 

ESTABLISHED 

BEYOND  DOUBT 


Patented  May  20,  and  December  t,  1873. 

TO   DEALERS  AND   PHOTOCRAPHERS : 

The  proprietor  of  the  Weston  &  McDonald  Patent  for  a  Photographic  Burnisher  having 
advertised  that  he  has  prosecuted  all  the  photographers  and  dealers  in  photographic  stock 
in  the  New  England  States  who  are  making,  using,  or  selling  the  Entrekin  Oscillating 
Enameler  for  Burnishing  Photographs,  I  take  this  method  of  informing  the  trade  and  the 
public  that  there  is  no  foundation  whatever  for  the  statement  referred  to.  I  have  guaran- 
teed the  validity  of  my  patent  to  all  who  make,  sell,  or  use  it,  and  have  covenanted  to  de- 
fend them  against  any  and  all  suits  for  infringement  by  the  following  guarantee: 

"Whereas, has  purchased  Photograph  Burnisher  No. of  my  invention,  and  made  under  my 

Patent,  No.  145,161,  granted  December  2d,  1873, 1,  William  G.  Entrekin,  hereby  covenant  and  agree  to  warrant 

and  defend  the  said his  heirs,  executors,  administrators,  and  assigns,  in  the  use  of  said  Burnisher, 

against  the  consequences  of  any  and  all  suits  for  infringement  which  may  be  brought  against  him,  by  the 
owner  or  owners  of  any  other  Photograph  Burnisher  whatsoever. 

"In  Witness  Whereof,  I,  the  said  William  G.  Entrekin,  have  hereunto  set  my  hand  and  seal  this 

day  of A.D.  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and "  Witness ." 

Threats  for  the  purpose  of  intimidation  have  been  freely  circulated,  but  only  a  single  suit 
has  been  brought,  and  that  was  commenced  at  my  invitation,  in  order  that  the  question  of 
the  alleged  infringement  might  be  settled  by  the  adjudication  of  a  court.  I  deny  that  my 
patent  infringes  the  patent  of  Weston  &  McDonald  in  any  particular,  and  in  support  of 
that  denial  cite  the  following  opinion  of  eminent  counsel : 

William  G.  Entrekin.  Washington,  D.  C,  Friday,  June  5,  1874. 

Dear  Sir  :  Yours  is  just  received.  You  need  not  fear  any  trouble  from  any  parties  in  regard  to  the  Weston 
Machine.  Your  Burnisher  does  not  infringe  with  any  feature  of  the  Weston  Machine  in  the  least  particular. 
You  can,  therefore,  manufacture  and  sell  your  machines  with  impunity. 

Yours  truly,  C.  M.  Parks, 

Attorney-at-  Law  and  Solicitor  of  Patents,  Late  Examiner  in  Patent  Office. 

Stansbury  &  Musn, 
Attorneys  and  Counsellors-at-Law,  and  Solicitors  of  American  and  Foreign  Patents, 
W.  G.  Entrekin,  Esq.  Washington,  D.  C,  August  7,  1874. 

Sir:  I  have  examined  reissued  Letters  Patent  No.  5281,  granted  February  11,  1873,  to  Weston  &  McDonald, 
and  your  Patent  No.  145,161,  of  December  2,  1873,  for  Photograph  Burnishers,  and  am  of  opinion  that  your 
Burnisher  does  not  infringe  the  Weston  &  McDonald  Patent.  Chas.  T.  Stansbury. 

William  G.  Entrekin,  Esq.  Philadelphia,  September  3,  1874. 

Having  examined  Letters  Patent  No.  145,161,  dated  December  2, 1873,  to  William  G.  Entrekin,  for  an  improve- 
ment in  burnishers  for  photographs,  and  also  reissued  Letters  Patent  No.  5281,  dated  February  11,1873,  to  E.  R. 
Weston  and  T.  McDonald,  for  a  similar  invention,  I  am  of  opinion  that  burnishers  constructed  according  to 
the  Entrekin  patent  do  not  infringe  the  patent  to  Weston  &  McDonald.  Yours  truly, 

Geo.  Harding,  Attorney-at- Law. 

EXCELSIOR ! 

The  Scovill  Gold  Medal  was  awarded  by  the  National  Photogra- 
phic Association  of  the  United  States  to  W.  G.  Entrekin,  for  his 
Oscillating  Enameler  for  Burnishing  Photographs,  Chicago,  July  16, 
1874. 

Photographers  will  see  that  we  have  a  first-class  article,  and  do 
not  wish  to  impose  upon  them  by  selling  a  press  that  will  not  work. 
We  guarantee  our  press  to  do  all  we  claim  for  it,  as  was  shown  sat- 
isfactorily at  the  Exhibition  at  Chicago,  where  the  press  was  exhib- 
ited and  worked. 

PRICE    LIST: 

6-inch  Roll,  $25;  10-inch,  $40;  14-inch,  $50;  18-inch,  $75. 

If  you  cannot  obtain  the  press  of  your  dealer,  send  your  order  to 


W.  G.  ENTREKIN, 

4382  &  4384  Main  St.,  Manayunk,  Philadelphia. 


7??2,  / 


Number  131. 


50  Cents. 


THE 


PHILADELPHIA 


hfltijrajhifr. 


AN  ILLUSTRATED  MONTHLY  JOURNAL, 
DEVOTED  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 

THE  OFFICIAL  ORGAN  OP  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC 
ASSOCIATION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. 

1>3"  o  "v  o  xxx  "fc>  o  r,    1  3  ,7'4=- 


PHILADELPHIA: 

BENERMAN    &     WILSON, 

PUBLISHERS, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts. 


Subscriptions  received  by  all  News  and  Stock-Dealers. 

FIVE  DOLLARS  PER  ANNUM,  IN  ADVANCE. 


Sherman  &  Co.,  Printers,  Philadelphia. 


SOMETHING   NEW !     See  Advertisement  inside. 


SUMMARY    OP    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Inducements  for  1875 321 

Lanterniana 321 

The'  Glace   or   Enameled    Photograph.     By  I.   B. 

Webster 322 

New  System  of  Lighting.    By  C.  E.  Myers 326 

Views  Abroad  and  Across.    By  Edward  L.  Wilson, 

XI 328 

German  Correspondence.    By  Prof.  H.  Vogel,  Ph.D.  333 

Photography  in  France.    By  Ernest  Lacan 335 

Dr.  Vogel's  Handbook  of  Photography 338 

Industrial  Exhibitions 339 

Society  Gossip 339 

Protosulphate  of  Iron 341 

Matters  of  the  N.  P.  A 342 

The  Sphinx 343 

Our  Picture 344 


page 
Obituary 345 

Filterings  from  the  Fraternity 346 

Blister  Cure. 

Enlargement  Formulae. 

Retouching  and  Lighting. 

Gentile's  Chicago  Process. 

Short  Exposure. 

Drying  and  Fuming. 

Liquid  Glue. 

Useful  Hints. 

How  I  Photographed  the  Moon. 

Hints  from  Providence. 

Developer  with  Copper  of  Mr.  Quiguerez. 

Encaustic  Paste  of  Mr.  Sans. 

Dry  Collodion,  very  rapid,  of  Mr.  Clavier  dAlger. 
Editor's  Table 350 


Embellishment.— Cabinet  Portrait.    Negatives  and  Prints  by  G.  M.  Elton,  Palmyra,  N.  Y. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s  Paper. 

Anderson,  J.  A.    Photographic  Apparatus. 

Anthony  &  Co.,  E.  &  H.  T.    The  Bowdish  Chair. 

Art  Publications. 

Barnett,  John.    Patent  Cameo  Dies. 

Benerman  &  Wilson.    Lantern  Slides.    Wet  Books. 

Bierstadt,  Charles.    Photo.  Views. 

Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

Bullock  &  Crenshaw.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Cameo  Press,  The  Universal. 

Clemons,  Jno.  R.    Albumen  Paper.    Varnish. 

Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  A.  M.    Photograph  Cards. 

Curtis,  G.  E.    Stereo.  Views. 

Dean,  John  &  Co.    Adamantean  Ferrotype  Plates. 

Entrekin,  W.  G.    Oscillating  Enameler. 

Faser,  C.    Frames. 

French,  B.  &  Co.    Voigtlander  Lenses,  &c. 

Gennert,  G.    Albumen  Paper,  &c. 

Gihon,  John  L.    Opaque  and  Cut-Outs. 

Griswold's  Life  Compositions  for  the  Stereoscope. 

Hance's  Photo.  Specialties. 

Hale,  Kilburn  &  Co.    Frames,  Mouldings,  &c. 

Hearn,  Chas.  W.    Collodio-Chloride. 

Hermagis'  Portrait  Objectives. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs. 

Hutinet,  D.    Photographic  Mounts. 

Improved  Photograph  Covers. 

Instruction  in  Photography. 

Kilburn  Bros.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Lea's  Manual  of  Photography. 

Lewis,  R.  A.    Collodion. 

Liesegang,  E.    Albumen  Paper, 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 

Loeffler,  J.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Losscher  &  Petsch.    A  New  Invoice  of  Studies. 

Magee,  James  F.  &  Co.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Masonic  Temple,  Philadelphia.    Stereo.  Views. 

McAllister,  W.  Mitchell.    Manufacturing  Optician. 

Moore,  Albert.    Solar  Printing. 


Mosaics,  1874. 

Moulton,  L.  V.    Rapid  Photo-Washer. 
Myers,  C.  E.    Patent  Light-Controller. 
Nason  Novelty  Co.    Nasonian  Cut-Outs. 
Newell's  Improved  Bath-Holder. 
Pattberg,  Lewis  &  Bro.    Passepartouts,  &c. 
Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 
Photographer's  Pocket  Reference-Book. 
Photographic  Publications. 
Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 
Powers  &  Weightman.    Photographic  Chemicals. 
Premiums  for  1875,  for  New  Subscribers  to  "Philadel- 
phia Photographer.'' 
Prize  Pictures. 

Rau,  Geo.    German  Albumen  Colors. 
Robinson's  New  Photo.  Trimmer. 
Robinson's  Metallic  Guides. 
Ross'  Portrait  and  View  Lenses. 
Rulofson's  Views. 

Ryan,  D.  J.    Photo.  Stock  Depot,  Chromos,  &c. 
Sauter,  G.    Passepartouts. 
Schwarze  &  Valk.    Photo,  Papers. 
Scovill  Manf'g.  Co.    Photographic  Materials. 
Seavey  L.  W.    Scenic  Artist,  Backgrounds,  &c. 
"Something  New." 
Spicer's  Lustrene. 
Steinheil's  New  Aplanatic  Lenses. 
Stevens,  Chas.  W.    Photographic  Goods. 
The  Practical  Printer. 

Thornton,  Mrs.  Mary'  A.    Photo.  Refrigerators. 
Vogel's  Hand-Book  of  Photography. 
Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papers. 
Weller's  Stereoscopic  Treasures. 
Wilson,  Charles  A.    Photographic  Goods. 
Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials,  &c. 
Willy  Wallach.    Albumen  Paper. 
Woodward,  D.  A.    Solar  Cameras. 
Zentmayer,  Joseph.    Lenses. 
Zimmerman  Bros.    Photographic  Stock  Depot. 


The  Last  JYew  Book! 


A  COMPLETE  MANUAL  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PRINTING 

ON  PLAIN   AND   ALBUMEN   PAPER,    AND    ON  PORCELAIN. 

Too  little  attention  has  heretofore  been  given  to  Photo- 
graphic Printing,  which  is  indeed  quite  as  important  a 
branch  of  the  art  as  negative  mahing. 

It  is  the  hope  of  both  author  and  publishers  to  create  REFORM  in  this 
matter,  by  the  issue  of  this  work,  and  as  it  is  to  put  money  in  the  pockets 
of  all  who  read  it,  the  hope  is  that  it  will  be  generally  read. 


OOZKTTIEIDsrTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  Printing  Room,  with  a  Plan.  The  Silver- 
ing and  Toning  Room,  with  a  Plan.  The  Dry- 
ing Room,  with  a  Plan. 

PART  I.— ALBUMEN  PAPER  PRINTING. 

The  Positive  Bath  for  Albumen  Paper.  Sil- 
vering the  Albumen  Paper.  Drying  the  Paper. 
Fuming  the  Paper.  Preservation  of  Sensitive 
Albumenized  Paper — Washed  Sensitive  Paper. 
Cutting  the  Paper.  The  Printing  Boards.  Keep- 
ing Tally.  Vignette  Printing  Blocks.  Treat- 
ment of  the  Negatives  before  Printing.  Filling 
of  the  Boards.  Fitting  Vignette  Boards  to  the 
Negatives  for  Printing.  Medallion  and  Arch- 
top  Printing.  Fancy  Printing.  Vignette  Cameo 
and  Medallion  Vignette  Cameo  Printing.  Print- 
ing the  Bendann  Backgrounds.  Printing  Intense 
Negatives.  Printing  Weak  Negatives.  A  Few 
More  Remarks  about  Printing — Treatment  of 
Broken  Negatives.  Cutting  the  Prints.  Wash- 
ing the  Prints.  Acidifying  the  Prints.  Toning 
Baths.  Artistic  Toning.  Fixing  Baths  and 
Fixing  Prints.  Washing  the  Prints.  Mounting 
the  Prints.     Finishing  the  Prints. 

Together  with  over  50  Wood  Cuts,  and  an  elegant  Cabinet  Portrait, 
from  negatives  by  Mr.  F.  Gutekunst,  printed  by  the  author,  Mr.  Chas.  W. 
Hearn. 


PART  II.— PLAIN  PAPER  PRINTING. 

Salting  the  Paper.  Positive  Baths  for  Plain 
Salted  Paper.  Silvering  Plain  Salted  Paper. 
Drying,  Fuming,  and  Cutting  the  Paper.  Treat- 
ment of  the  Negatives  before  Printing.  Print- 
ing-in  False  Backgrounds.  General  Plain  Paper 
Printing.  Further  Treatment  of  the  Prints  after 
Printing/^  Causes  of  Failures  in  Albumen  and 
Plain  Paper  Printing. 


PART  III.— PORCELAIN  PRINTING. 

Selection  of  the  Porcelain  Plates.  Cleaning 
of  the  Porcelain  Plates.  Albunaenizing  the 
Porcelain  Plates.  Making  the  Porcelain  Collo- 
dion. Coating,  Fuming,  and  Drying  the  Plates. 
Porcelain  Printing  Boards.  Placing  the  Sensi- 
tive Plate  on  the  Board  for  Printing.  Printing 
Vignette  Porcelains.  Printing  Medallion  Por- 
celains. Washing  the  Porcelains.  Toning  the 
Porcelain.  Fixing  the  Porcelain.  Final  Wash- 
ing of  the  Porcelain.  Drying  and  Tinting  of  the 
Porcelain.  Varnishing  the  Porcelain.  Causes 
of  Failures  in  Porcelain  Printing. 


It  is  selling  splendidly! 


Hundreds  already  gone! 


MAILED  POST-PAID  OH  RECEIPT  OF  $2.50,  ET  ANT  DEALER,  OR 
BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  PUBLISHERS, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


IMPORTANT  TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 


TAKE  NOTICE ! 

"WHAT   PARTIES    SAT,    WHO    ARE     USING 

J.  A.  ANDERSON'S  CAMERA   BOXES. 

Office  of  Chicago  Photographic  and  Copying  Company, 
320,  322,  324,  &  326  State  Street. 
J.  A.  Anderson.— Dear  Sir : — The  10x12  Conical  Bellows  Camera  you  made  us  gives  entire  satisfaction.  It 
is  finely  finished,  and  the  working  parts  are  all  complete  in  their  action.  We  now  have  seven  of  your  boxes 
in  our  operating  department  and  shall  discard  all  others  (the  so-called  "Success")  for  your  make,  as  we  will 
save  the  price  in  repairs.  They  are  all  in  constant  use  every  day,  and  stand  the  test  better  than  any  other  make 
we  have  used.  For  durability,  accuracy,  and  cheapness,  they  certainly  have  no  rivals;  they  compare  favorably 
with  the  A.  O.  Co.'s  boxes,  and  are  far  superior  to  anything  else  in  the  market. 

(Signed),         "        J  AS.  S.  NASON. 


0".  J±.  -A.ITIDEE,S01T'S 

NEW  POSITION  AND  BABY  CHAIR,  COMBINED. 


THE 
•HANDSOMEST, 


COIPLETE, 

AND 
CHEAPEST 


PIECE  OF  APPARATUS  EVER  OFFERED  TO  THE  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


BUY  NO  IMITATION. 


SEND  FOB  PRICE  LIST. 


Photographers  can  save  from  10  to  20  per  cent,  by  sending  direct  to  the  manufactory  for  Apparatus. 

TESTIMONIAL. 

Elgin,  April  5th,  1874. 

Mr.  J.  A.  Anderson.— Sir :— The  Camera  Boxes  prove  to  be  all  that  I  expected.  The  11  x  14  is  superior  to  any 
that  I  ever  used ;  it  is  a  beauty,  and  I  am  proud  of  it.  The  cheapness,  too,  is  an  item  especially  with  me  at 
this  time,  having  lost  all  the  contents  of  my  gallery  by  fire.    I  am  obliged  to  you  for  your  favor. 

Yours,  G.  H.  Sherman. 

( J3®~  See  other  testimonials  in  special  advertisements). 

J.    A.    ANDERSON,    (Late  Anderson  &  Bixby), 

65  East  Indiana  Street,  Chicago. 


ea  s 


anual 


PiHlOITlOfGlRfA  PlHfY 


Third  Thousand! 


We  have  undertaken  the  publication  of  the  third  thousand  of  this  valuable  Text-Book, 
and  offer  it  to  the  photographers  in  a  more  attractive  and 


New  Shape. 


The  author's  illustrations  now  number  150,  nearly  double  the  number  of  the  first  edition. 

The  Chapters  on  Failures  bave  been  much  elaborated  and  rearranged,  so  as  to  afford,  a 
ready  reference  in  case  of  almost  any  trouble  or  difficulty  liable  to  occur  to  the  photogra- 
pher, with  appropriate  remedies  therefor.     The  following  are  among  other 


New  Things: 


Method  of  preparing  silvered  PAPER  WHICH  WILL  KEEP  FOR 
WEEKS,  and  with  care,  even  for  months ;  no  washing  or  additional 
manipulation  of  the  paper  needed. 

Investigation  of  Negative  Varnishes  and  formulas  for  Water-proof  Var- 
nish, such  that  negatives  varnished  with  it  have  been  7cept  for  months 
under  water  without  injury. 

Tables  to  aid  in  the  construction  of  glass  houses,  &c. 


NOTICES  OF  THE  PKESS. 


"  There  is  a  valuable  chapter  on  the  preparation  of  a  sensitive  paper  that  is  not  liable  to  discoloration 

We  close  the  present  notice  by  cordially  commending  Mr.  Lea's  Manual  to  our  readers."— British  Journal  of  Pho- 
tography. 

"M.  Carey  Lea's  excellent  'Manual  of  Photography  '  is  a  very  full  and  complete  work." — PhilaoVa  Bulletin. 

"  If  we  say  that  this  work  is  an  encyclopedia  of  its  art,  we  shall  hardly  exaggerate  its  comprehensiveness. 
....  The  author  takes  every  department  and  every  branch  of  each,  and  gives  that  distinct  and  clear  information 

that  is  needed  by  photographers The  worth  of  the  labor  is  proved  in  the  fact  that  this  new  and  enlarged 

edition  follows  the  first  so  speedily.  Hereafter,  those  who  would  excel  must  master  the  Manual." — North 
American. 


PRICE,  $3.75. 


It  contains  440  pages  on  fine  toned  paper,  150  wood  cuts,  cloth,  beveled  edges,  and  gilt. 

EOE  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCK-DEALEES. 
Sent  by  return  mail,  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


THE 


A  NEW  WORK  ON  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PRINTING. 
By   CHAS.  W.   HEARN, 

A  gentleman  w.ho  has  devoted  several  years  to  photographic  printing  especially,  and  who  is 
now  engaged  at  it  as  his  constant  occupation. 

The  work  gives  all  the  instructions  that  a  beginner  could  possibl}'  want 
in  detail,  and  is  what  the  title  indicates — practical. 

It  will  also  be  found  of  invaluable  service  to  any  photographic  printer,  be 
he  ever  so  skilled.     For  contents  see  opposite  page. 


OVER  500  COPIES   ARE   ALREADY   SOLD! 


TESTIMONIALS: 

"  I  consider  it  the  best  work  on  printing  and  toning  that  has  been  published,  or  at  least  that  has 
come  into  my  hands,  and  until  I  see  a  better  one  I  shall  give  it  the  first  place.  If  any  one  wishes  to 
be  helped  out  of  the  mud  let  him  read  it ;  but  if  he  wants  to  stick  there  let  him  keep  his  money  in 
his  pocket,  and  stick  till  doomsday  if  he  likes." — John  R.  Clkmons,  Philadelphia. 

"I  have  read  it  with  a  great  deal  of  interest,  and  find  it  indispensable  to  the  student  photographer. 
It  contains  so  much  valuable  information  in  modern  photographic  printing  that  I  do  most  cheerfully 
recommend  its  usefulness  to  the  student  printer.  Its  cost  is  money  well  laid  out.'' — C.  D.  Mosher, 
Chicago. 

"It  will  be  of  untold  value  to  .any  printer,  and  worth  more  practically  than  a  combination  of  all 
the  volumes  and  essays  on  printing  which  have  been  published  for  the  advancement  of  the  art." — H. 
J.  Rogers,  Hartford,  Conn. 

"  It  is  truly  what  it  claims,  a  thoroughly  practical  treatise  upon  that  most  important  branch  of  our 
art,  photographic  printing.  Mr.  Hearn  has  been  with  me  over  three  years  as  printer  and  toner,  and 
has  ever  manifested  the  greatest  interest  and  enthusiasm  in  his  work,  seeming  to  do  his  utmost  to  ex- 
cel and  advance  himself  continually  in  his  chosen  department  of  our  art  science.  It  seems  to  me 
that  the  merest  tyro  could  make  and  tone  good  prints  if  the  simple  directions  in  this  book  are  faith- 
fully followed.  Indeed,  this  volume  seems  to  fill  a  void  in  our  photographic  literature  that  it  has 
always  surprised  me  was  never  supplied  before." — J.  H.  Lamson,   Portland,  Me. 

The  Photographic  News,  of  July  31st,  says  :  ''In  the  work  before  us,  however,  silver  printing  and 
everything  connected  therewith  is  treated  most  exhaustively,  and  the  work  is  evidently  that  of  a 
practical  man  who  speaks  out  of  the  fulness  of  his  own  experience  in  every  branch  of  regular  work, 
as  well  as  with  familiarity  of  the  various  forms  of  fancy  printing,  which  have  prevailed  more  in 
America  than  in  this  country.  Mr.  Hearn  manifestly  thoroughly  understands  his  work,  and  is,  more- 
over, a  clear  and  vigorous  writer." 

The  British  Journal  of  Photography,  of  the  same  date,  says  :  "  It  is  a  considerable  period  since  we 
rose  from  the  perusal  of  a  new  book  on  photography  with  feelings  of  greater  satisfaction  than  in  the 
present  instance  ;  and  we  appreciate  the  author  as  a  writer,  not  only  thoroughly  conversant  with  the 
subject,  but  as  very  willing  to  impart  to  those  less  skilled  the  knowledge  he  possesses,  and  who,  hap- 
pily, has  also  the  ability  to  do  this  in  a  singularly  lucid  and  attractive  manner.  '  The  Practical 
Printer'  is  well  'got  up,'  and  the  work  cannot  fail  of  being  acceptable  and  useful  to  all  classes  of 
photographers,  the  veteran  as  well  as  the  tyro  in  our  art-science." 

With  these  flattering  testimonials  the  work  needs  no  farther  recommendation  from  us.  We  are 
satisfied  that  it  will  stand  on  its  own  merits,  and  that  all  progressive  enterprising  photographers  every- 
where will  buy  and  read  the  book.     No  man  in  business  can  afford  to  be  without  it  in  his  gallery. 

A  fine  example  of  Photographic  Printing,  by  the  author,  ac- 
companies the  work,  from  negatives  by  F.  Gutekunst,  Philada. 


IP  IR,  i  c  :e7    ss.50. 
BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photographic  Publishers.  Seventh  anfl  Cherry,  Phila, 


:- 


;  library 


tf.  M.  ELTON, 


PALMYRA: 


THE 


^bihuUlpbiu  W%%ty0ii()itt. 


Vol.  XL  NOVEMBER,  1874. 

Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1874, 
By  BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C*. 


No.  131. 


INDUCEMENTS  FOR  1875. 

It  is  not  too  early  for  us  to  announce  to 
our  readers  the  fact  that  theJSfew  Year  is  at 
hand,  and  that  we  are  making  preparations 
for  it  which  we  trust  will  be  for  our  mutual 
good.  We  have  also  purchased  the  Photog- 
rapher's Friend,  published  by  Mr.  Kichard 
"Walzl,  Baltimore,  Md.,  and  will  merge  it 
into  this  magazine,  thus  making  the  Phila- 
delphia Photographer  the  only  photographi- 
cally illustrated  magazine  in  the  world.  It 
was  the  first  and  is  again  the  only  one.  This 
valuable  feature  should  not  be  forgotten. 
Many  fine  things  are  under  way  for  1875. 
We  want  very  much  to  increase  our  circu- 
lation, and  have  concluded  to  offer  to  our 
present  subscribers  most,  extraordinary  in- 
ducements to  aid  us  in  extending  our  use- 
fulness. We  have  detailed  the  whole  plan 
in  our  "  red  letter  "  sheet,  andask  you  all 
to  carefully  read  and  consider  it.  There 
are  none  of  you  unable  to  secure  a  premium, 
and  we  hope  the  competition  will  be  very 
lively  and  strong.  This  is  the  way  of  news- 
papers and  we  must  come  into  it.  We  pre- 
fer this  plan  to  offering  a  chromo,  costing 
ten  cents,  as  a  premium,  under  the  pretext 
that  it  is  worth  $5.  Such  stories  are  .not 
true  and  we  will  not  resort  to  them.  Green- 
backs and  photographic  publications  are 
worth  their  face  value,  and  we  suggest  that 
it  will  be  to  your  interest  to  secure  all  you 


can  of  both.     Please  read  the  ".red  letter  " 
sheet  thoroughly. 

LANTERNIANA. 

Lest  our  readers  should  overlook  the 
humble  little  sheet  called  The  Magic.Lan- 
tern,  which  we  present  them  monthly,  we 
beg  to  call  attention  to  it,  and  also  that 
many  photographers  are.  going  into  the  ex- 
hibition speculation,  and  that  they  are  de- 
lighted with  it.     See  their  testimonials. 

Moreover  we  desire  to  say  that, 

1st.  Our  catalogue  of  apparatus  and  slides 
is  ready,  10  cents. 

2d.  Our  enlarged  catalogue  of  foreign 
and  American  slides  is  ready,  15  cents. 

3d.  Wilson's  Lantern  Journeys,  equally 
useful  to  the  lantern  exhibitor  and  the  lover 
of  the  stereoscope,  is  also  ready,  $2.00. 

Therefore  we  are  in  condition,  better  thar. 
any  one  else,  to  supply,  not  only  the  materi- 
als foryan  exhibition,  but  a  great  deal  of 
matter  descriptive  of  the  best  pictures  to  be 
had.  We  ask  for  The  Magic  Lantern,  this 
month  especially,  a  careful  reading,  and 
also  for  -our  new  advertisements  the  same 
consideration'. 

We  really  believe  that,  with  a  Lantern 
outfit  in  hand,  such  as  we  offer,  any  enter- 
prising photographer  can  make  more  in  his 
winter  evenings  than  he  can  all  day  in  his- 
regular  business. 


21 


322 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHEE. 


Bold  Prints  from  Flat  Negatives. 

BY  CHARLES    W.    HEABN, 
Author  of  "  The  Practical  Printer." 
A  most  excellent  way  to  obtain  fine,  and 
indeed,    excellent    prints,    from    flat     and 
withal  poor  negatives,  is  as  follows: 

Obtain  from  any  bookstore  some  com- 
mon tracing-paper,  and  place  a  suitable 
piece  on  the  back  of  the  negative  that  is  to 
be  doctored,  sticking  the  four  corners  to  the 
plate,  so  as  to  keep  it  in  position.  Now  ob- 
tain a  No.  2  Faber  lead-pencil,  and  lightly 
place  on  the  paper  a  few  touches  of  the  pen- 
cil, softening  down  with  the  ball  of  the 
finger.  The  greatest  care  is  necessary,  in 
placing  this  lead  on,  to  do  the  thing  in  a 
nice  manner.  If  too  much  is  placed  on  the 
paper,  erase  with  a  common  pencil-rubber. 
By  reversing  the  plate,  thus  placing  the 
varnished  side  of  the  plate  towards  you,  you 
can  perceive  at  a  glance  whether  you  have 
touched  up  as  yon  desire  or  not.  Any  de- 
gree of  boldness,  together  with  porcelain 
softness,  is  thus  obtained  with  the  practiced 
hand.  The  negative  should  be  printed 
under  at  least  one  ground-glass  after  the 
marked  paper  is  placed  in  the  negative. 
The  above  is  not  original  with  myself,  but 
as  I  have  "proved  its  practical  value,  I  can 
recommend  it  for  the  purpose  to  which  it  is 
destined. 


THE  "GLACE,"  OR  ENAMELLED 
PHOTOGRAPH. 

How  to  Do  It. 

BY  I.  B.   WEBSTER. 

The  glass  upon  which  the  enamelling  is 
to  be  done  must  be  scrupulously  clean. 
Plate-glass,  free  from  scratches,  is  the  best, 
although  good  photograph  glass  will  do  if  not 
scratched.  Blisters  in  the  glass  hurt  noth- 
ing. After  it  is  thoroughly  clean,  sprinkle 
over  it,  by  means  of  a  live-cent  pepper-box, 
"powdered  talc"  (or  French  chalk),  and 
with  a  tuft  of  cotton  rub  in  a  circular  mo- 
tion (carefully  going  over  the  whole  surface) 
until  no  trace  of  the  chalk  is  perceptible. 
Do  not  rub  heavily.  The  chalk  gives  a 
surface  to  the  glass  that  assists  in  the  lifting 
the  enamelled  print  from  it.     Now  flow  the 


plate  with  collodion  made  as  follows,  viz., 
ether  4^  ounces,  alcohol  3£  ounces,  cotton 
to  thicken  (say  from  5  to  7  grains  to  the 
ounce  of  solution),  and  24  drops  (or  min- 
ims) of  castor  oil.  When  this  flow  is  dry, 
apply  the  prints/ace  down,  after  immersing 
them  in  a  gelatin  solution  made  as  follows : 
Coxe's  gelatin  1  ounce,  water  8  ounces, 
glycerin  50  drops.  Add  the  gelatin  and 
glycerin  to  the  water,  and  let  it  stand  over 
night,  when  it  will  be  ready  for  use  after 
filtering,  which  can  be  done  by  warming 
sufficient  to  make  the  solution  limpid. 
Allow  the  prints  to  remain  in  this  solution 
about  five  minutes  before  laying  them  on 
the  collodionized  glass,  and  then  pass  a 
gum  roller  lightly  over  them  to  press  them 
tightly  to  the  glass,  and  also  to  remove 
the  surplus  gelatin.  After  the  prints  are 
nearly  dry  they  are  ready  for  the  mounts. 
For  this  purpose  light  "  Bristol-board  "  is 
best.  Use  the  gelatin  solution  for  mount- 
ing, and  mount  on  the  glass  as  the  prints 
lay.  The  whole  thing  must  be  perfectly 
dry  before  an  attempt  is  made  to  remove 
them  from  the  glass.  When  they  are  dry 
run  a  knife-blade  around  the  edge  to  start 
them  up,  and  if  thoroughly  dry  and  the 
work  properly  done  they  will  come  off  all 
right.  I  forgot  to  say  in  the  proper  place, 
that  it  is  a  good  idea  to  lay  upon  the  back, 
after  the  mounts  have  been  applied,  a  weight 
of  some  kind,  say  a  heavy  piece  of  glass, 
which  should  remain  there  for  an  hour  at 
least.  This  assists  in  securing  a  complete 
contact  to  the  print.  At  the  end  of  an  hour 
remove  the  weight  and  leave  the  print,  back 
up,  until  perfectly  dry  all  through.  Some- 
times they  start  off  without  help,  which 
shows  perfect  success.  Remember  that 
"careful  manipulation"  is  the  only  surety 
for  success.  A  little  experience  will  enable 
any  one  to  perform  this  operation  well. 


Details  of  Watson's  Enamel  Process. 

To  the  Editor  of  the  Philadelphia 
Photographer. 
Dear  Sir  :  A  friend  who  was  at  the  last 
Exhibition  meeting  of  the  National  Pho- 
tographic Association  has  sent  us  a  circular, 
copies  of  which  were,  we  were  told,  dis- 
tributed at  the   meeting,  in  favor  of  Mr. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


823 


Watson's  process  for  enamels  (Mutter  & 
Co.,  Agent),  in  which  we  find  the  follow- 
ing: 

' '  Dear  Sir  :  In  answer  to  your  favor  respect- 
ing Enamels,  I  beg  to  say  that  our  process,  for 
which  patent  is  applied  for,  is  the  same  now 
used  by  Messrs.  Robinson  &  Cherrill,  of  Tun- 
bridge  Wells,  England,  with  the  most  complete 
success,  and  they  state  that  the  only  difficulty 
they  have  is  in  not  being  able  to  supply  the 
enamels  fast  enough,  the  demand  is  so  great. 

"Full  printed  details  of  the  method  will  be 
furnished  to  you  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  P.  0.  M. 
Order  for  $25. 

"The  printed  directions  contain  everything 
necessary  appertaining  to  the  art,  and  are  the 
same  as  forwarded  to  Messrs.  Robinson  &  Cher- 
rill, who  in  twenty-one  days  from  receipt  were 
quite  masters  of  the  manipulations." 

We  have  great  pleasure  in  recommend- 
ing your  readers  to  try  Watson's  process,, 
but  in  order  for  them  to  do  so  there  is  no 
need  for  them  to  pay  twenty-five  dollars 
for  the  instructions.  We  have  asked  your 
countrymen  to  pay  us  a  large  sum  for  our 
experience  in  the  enamel  process,  but  we 
have  no  objection  to  tell  them  all  we  learned 
from  Mr.  Watson's  instructions,  which  we 
purchased  without  any  reservations  or 
promise  of  secrecy.  Here  are  the  instruc- 
tions, word  for  word.  If  any  of  your 
readers  can,  after  reading  them,  make  en- 
amels as  good  as  those  we  sent  to  the 
National  Photographic  Association  Ex- 
hibition we  will  relinquish  our  claim  to 
have  made  any  improvements  in  the  pro- 
cess. 

Yours  truly, 

Eobinson  &  Cherrill. 

Practical   Details  of  Process  for  Producing 
Vitrified  Photographic  Enamels. 

The  Negative  from  which  it  is  proposed 
to  produce  an  enamel  of  the  finest  descrip- 
tion should  be  clear,  sharp,  and  full  of  de- 
tail ;  not  too  dense  ;  in  fact,  a  good  negative. 
A  transparent  positive  (so  called)  is  required 
in  the  next  place,  which  is  made  by  the 
ordinary  method  of  camera  printing  on  wet 
collodion.  Any  good  bromo-iodized  collo- 
dion will  serve.  The  nitrate  bath  must  be 
in  good  condition  ;  any  trace  of  fog  would 
be  fatal  to  success.     A  small  stop  must  be 


used  in  the  lens  to  insure  sharp  definition. 
The  transparency  is  best  developed  with 

Pyrogallic  Acid,           .          .  3  grains. 

Citric  Acid,          .          .         .  3      " 

Glacial  Acetic  Acid,  .          .  20  drops. 

Water 1  ounce. 

A  full  exposure  is  required,  varying  from 
one  or  two  minutes  to  a  quarter  of  an  hour, 
according  to  the  density  of  the  negative, 
light,  etc.  The  development  proceeds 
slowly,  and  the  transparency,  when  looked 
through,  ought  to  exhibit  fine  gradations  of 
tone,  from  deep  rich  blacks  to  transparent 
glass  in  the  high-lights.  Clear  the  picture 
with  cyanide  in  preference  to  hypo,  and 
wash  quickly  and  well. 

When  a  very  dense  negative  is  to  be 
worked  from  it  is  often  advisable  to  substi- 
tute iron  development  for  the  hypo.  For 
this  purpose  10  grains  of  iron  per  ounce  of 
water,  with  10  minims  of  glacial  acetic 
acid,  may  be  used  ;  but  note  that,  as  the 
development  in  this  case  is  very  much  more 
rapid,  it  must  be  stopped  by  copious  flood- 
ing with  water  as  soon  as  the  faintest  indi- 
cation of  detail  is  observed  in  the  face,  etc., 
of  the  picture,  which  is  now  to  be  strength- 
ened cautiously  with  a  little  of  the  pyro 
developer,  to  which  a  drop  of  silver  solution 
has  been  added. 

Removing  the  Transparency  from  the 
Glass  is  effected  by  first  cleaning  off  with 
the  finger  the  extreme  edge  of  the  collodion 
all  round  the  picture,  and  then  placing  it  in 
a  dish  of  water,  say  half  a  pint,  acidulated 
with  twenty  to  thirty  drops  of  sulphuric 
acid.  In  a  few  minutes  the  film,  assisted 
by  a  gentle  rocking  motion  of  the  dish,  will 
loosen  itself  from  the  glass  and  float  on  the 
surface  of  the  water. 

Carefully  lift  the  floating  film  on  the 
glass  from  the  acid  bath,  and  wash  it  well 
by  immersion  in  five  or  six  successive 
changes  of  clear  water,  and  proceed  to 

The  Toning. — For  this  purpose  iridium  is 
used,  as  yielding  the  finest  and  deepest 
ceramic  black  known.  Hitherto  this  metal 
has  been  of  comparatively  little  value  to 
the  photographic  enameller,  as  the  precipi- 
tate obtained  by  toning  with  the  chloride 
was  found  to  yield  only  a  poor  grayish- 
black  enamel.     By  the  following  method, 


324 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


however,  a  fine  rich   black  is  most  easily 
obtained. 

Stock  Solution,  No.  1. 
Cold  Saturated  Solution  of  Bichloride  of 
Iridium  and  Potassium. 

Stock  Solution,  No.  2. 
Ordinary  Chloride  of  Gold  Solution,  one 
grain  to  each  drachm  of  water. 

Toning  Bath. 

No.  1,  Solution  of  Iridium,      .     6  drachms. 
No.  2,  Solution  of  Gold,  .         .     3         " 
Water,.     .         .         .         .         .6  ounces. 

Immerse  the  picture,  and  allow  the  ton- 
ing to  proceed  until  the  proof  in  the  densest 
parts  has  lost  its  original  gray  tint,  and  the 
whole  appears  of  one  uniform  color.  Ex- 
amine the  back  of  the  picture  through  the 
glass,  and  note  whether  it  is  toned  right 
through  in  deep  blacks. 

When  the  toning  is  finished  wash  again 
in  several  changes  of  water,  taking  care  to 
prevent  the  film  from  folding  and  creasing. 
With  a  little  practice  this  is  quite  easy. 
Note  that,  in  all  operations,  hasty  and  rapid 
movements  are  to  he  avoided. 

After  washing,  immerse  for  a  few  mo- 
ments in  the  following  bath,  which  serves 
to  remove  the  chloride  of  silver  formed 
during  toning,  and  which,  if  left  in  the 
image,  would  impart  to  it  a  greenish  tinge 
not  at  all  agreeable. 

Water,         ....       8  ounces. 

Liquor  Ammoni.i,        .         .     30  drops. 
Then  again  wash  very  carefully  in  several 
changes  of  water. 

If  a  fine  black  color  is  desired,  the  picture 
is  now  ready  to  be  placed  on  the  enamel 
tablet  and  burnt  in  ;:  but  if  a  warmer  shade 
is  desired,  the  picture  is  placed  for  two  or 
three  minutes  in  the  following  bath,  ob- 
serving not  to  allow  it  to  remain  at  rest, 
but  gently  moving  it  to  insure  an  equality 
of  deposit. 

Stock  Solution,  No-.  1. 

Pemitrate  of  Uranium,       .     30  grains. 

AVater,         .....       8  ounces. 

Stock  Solution,  No.  2. 
Red  Prussiate  of  Potash,    .     30  grains. 
Water,         .         .         ...       8  ounqes. 
To  be  kept  in  the  dark.. 


Of  each  of  these  solutions  half  a  drachm 
is  taken  and  mixed  with  10  ounces  of  water 
and  1  minim  of  chloride  of  gold  solution, 
to  form  the  bath.  A  short  immersion  is 
sufficient  to  produce  an  appreciable  warmth 
in  the  finished  enamel.  If  left  too  long  in 
this  bath  the  picture  is  much  reduced  in 
depth  and,  in  comparison,  is  tame  and 
feeble  in  its  tones. 

After  this,  wash  again  the  proof  and 
transfer  it  to  the  enamel  tablet.  These 
tablets  can  now  be  obtained,  with  all  the 
necessary  chemicals  and  furnace  for  burning 
in,  etc.,  of  Mr.  J.  J.  Atkinson,  Manchester 
Street,  Liverpool. 

To  transfer  the  picture  you  have  only  to 
place  it  in  a  shallow  dish  of  pure  water, 
with  the  glass  on  which  it  was  taken  under- 
neath it.  Let  the  glass  down  to  the  bottom 
of  the  dish  and  slip  the  tablet  between  the 
film  and  glass,  taking  care  that  the  collo- 
dion side  of  the  picture  is  next  the  tablet. 
Now  lift  carefully  the  glass  bearing  the 
tablet,  get  the  picture  in  its  proper  position 
on  the  tablet,  and  lift  all  out  together 
gently  taking  care  that  there  are  no  creases 
or  air-bubbles  formed  underneath  the  pic- 
ture; drain  it,  and  dry  smartly  before  a 
clear  fire,  in  an  inclined  position,  or  over  a 
spirit-lamp.  When  quite  dry  cut  with  a 
penknife  the  collodion  film  round  the  edge 
of  the  tablet,  and  remove  from  the  glass ; 
place  it  on  a  sheet  of  blotting-paper,  some- 
where free  from  dust,  to  await  the  finishing 
operation  of  burning  in. 

The  part  of  the  picture  remaining  on  the 
glass  may  be  utilized  in  a  most  excellent 
manner  fur  retouching,  should  any  be 
necessary,  as  follows  :  Dry  it,  and  scrape  it 
off  the  glass,  and  grind  it  up  well  with  a 
little  oil  of  lavender  or  spike,  on  a  palette 
or  a  clean  glass  plate. 

The  Burning  in  of  the  Picture. — The 
muflie  furnace  having  been  charged  with  a 
mixture  of  coke  and  coal,  and  heated  to  a 
clear  white  heat,  the  picture  is  placed  on  a 
smitll  piece  of  fireclay  and  allowed  to  re- 
main on  the  top  of  the  furnace  for  some 
time,  so  as  to  begin  gradually  to  scorch  off 
as  it  were  the  collodion  film.  It  is  neces- 
sary to  use  great  caution  here,  as,  if  the 
temperature  is  raised  too  rapidly,  the  col- 
lodion film  is  liable  to  burst  up  and  destroy 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


325 


the  picture.  The  best  way  is  to  let  it  get 
thoroughly  scorched  brown  all  over  before 
removing  it,  still  resting  on  the  piece  of 
fire-clay,  to  the  ledgn  in  front  of  the  mouth 
of  the  muffle;  it  is  then  to  be  introduced 
into  the  muffle  by  slow  degrees,  turning  it 
around  all  the  time  with  a  stout  piece  of 
iron  wire  bent  at  the  end,  or  by  other 
means,  and  so  complete  the  operation  of 
burning  off  the  collodion.  When  this  is 
accomplished,  and  the  whites  of  the  picture 
appear  clear,  it  is  withdrawn  gradually 
and  placed  on  the  furnace  top  to  cool  some- 
what ;  and  the  rest  of  the  enamels  may 
then  be  treated  in  the  same  manner. 
After  which  they  are  placed  in  a  suitable 
situation  to  become  thoroughly  cooled, 
when  they  are  ready  to  be  glazed. 

If  any  spots,  however,  appear,  they  are 
to  be  retouched  with  the  pigment  before  de- 
scribed, ground  up  with  a  little  oil  of  lav- 
ender, and  then  placed  again  for  a  few 
seconds  in  the  muffle,  observing  the  same 
precautions  in  gradually  introducing  it  and 
withdrawing  it. 

The  Glazing  is  performed  as  follows : 
Take,  say,  one  drachm  of  soft  transparent 
enamel  glaze,  such  as  is  used  for  glazing 
fine  porcelain,  mix  it  with  a  little  water, 
and  grind  it  well  on  a  glass  slab  with  a 
glass  muller,  let  it  dry,  and  then  put  it  in 
a  bottle  with  one  drachm  of  alcohol ;  shake 
it  up  well,  and  allow  the  heavy  particles  to 
subside  for  a  moment  or  two  ;  pour  off  the 
top  into  a  clean  glass  measure,  and  add  to 
it  one  ounce  of  plain  uniodized  collodion, 
and  shake  well.  This  forms  the  glaze, 
which  is  applied  to  the  picture  in  the  same 
manner  as  coating  a  plate  of  glass  with 
collodion.  Have  ready  a  piece  of  very 
bibulous  paper,  and  apply  it  to  that  edge  at 
which  the  superfluous  collodion  was  poured 
off,  so  as  to  remove  the  thick  edge  of  col- 
lodion that  is  otherwise  formed. 

Allow  it  to  become  quite  dry ;  and  your 
furnace  being  still  at  a  white  heat,  intro- 
duce the  picture  as  before  when  burning  off 
the  collodion,  by  slow  degrees  into  the 
muffle,  and  when  the  glaze  appears  to  be 
melted,  the  picture  is  withdrawn  to  cool 
as  before.  It  frequently  happens  that  this 
process  of  glazing  has  to  be  repeated  three 
times  or  more,  according  to  the  density  of 


the  blacks  of  the  picture,  which  will  other- 
wise retain  their  original  dead,  matt  appear- 
ance, and  will  not  be  properly  transparent. 
When,  however,  the  picture  is  thoroughly 
glazed,  the  deepest  blacks  appear  translu- 
cent, and  the  finished  result  is  of  the  most 
beautiful  description  imaginable. 

Herr  Grune's  method  of  toning  with 
platinum  has  been  extensively  used,  and 
with  very  varying  results;  the  proofs, 
however,  obtained  with  platinum  toning 
are  not  to  be  compared  with  those  secured 
by  the  modified  iridium  toning  bath  in  in- 
tensity and  depth  of  coloring.  It  is  re- 
markable that  iridium,  if  used  alone  as  a 
toning  agent,  is  tardy  in  its  action,  and 
almost  unmanageable,  and  only  producing 
a  poor  result,  and  that  gold  toning  alone 
forms  a  dirty  reddish  image,  and  when  burnt, 
entirely  deficient  in  half-tone;  but  when  the 
two  are  combined  in  the  proportions  indi- 
cated, a  most  beautiful  and  intense  black  is 
formed.  The  toning  bath  possesses  good 
keeping  qualities,  and  may  be  used  many 
times  by  simply  adding  a  little  of  the  irid- 
ium and  gold  solutions  in  the  proper  pro- 
portions. 

Should  the  enamel,  after  glazing,  require 
any  retouching,  it  may  be  easily  performed 
by  taking  some  of  the  pigment  previously 
described  and  grinding  it  along  with  a  mi- 
nute portion  of  the  powder  glaze  or  flux 
with  oil  of  lavender,  and  then  submitting 
it  again  to  the  action  of  the  furnace  until 
the  retouching  appears  bright  like  the  rest 
of  the  picture.  In  all  the  burnings  it  is 
recommended  to  examine  the  picture  often 
until  facility  is  acquired  ;  as  if  the  heat  is 
great  and  too  long  continued  the  white  en- 
amel ground  may  begin  to  melt  and  flow, 
and  destroy  the  picture. 

A  very  little  careful  practice  in  this  mat- 
ter is  sufficient,  however,  to  insure  profici- 
ency. 

Additional  Particulars.  —  The  double 
chloride  of  iridium  and  potassium,  made 
by  Johnson  &  Co.,  of  Hatton  Gardens, 
London,  is  meant  to  be  used  (it  is  found  to 
be  in  small  ruby  crystals)  in  preference  to 
the  simple  chloride  of  iridium,  which  is 
very  deliquescent,  and  makes  a  muddy 
solution  with  water.  The  double  chloride 
saturated  solution  is  of  a  fine,  rich,  and  clear 


326 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGR APHEE. 


port  wine  color.  Johnson's  chloride  of 
gold,  sold  in  tubes,  I  like  best. 

When  the  picture  tones  of  a  gray  color, 
and  seems  somewhat  faded,  it  is  an  indica- 
tion that  iridium  is  present  in  excess,  and 
if  such  a  picture  were  burnt  in  it  would  be 
very  dense,  and  black,  and  heavy-looking. 
Remedy,  a  little  water  and  chloride  of  gold. 
When,  after  burning,  the  picture  is  feeble 
and  of  a  dirty  reddish  tone,  there  has  been 
excess  of  gold  in  the  toning  bath.  In  this 
condition  the  bath  soon  decomposes,  and 
the  gold  is  reduced  in  a  state  of  red  pow- 
der, remaining  in  suspension  in  the  liquid, 
and  attaching  itself  to  the  high-lights  of  the 
picture  and  staining  them  ;  in  this  state  it 
is  quite  useless,  and  cannot  be  renovated. 

The  writer  has  used  the  following  method 
of  obtaining  warmer  tones,  with  great  suc- 
cess, in  lieu  of  the  pernitrate  of  uranium 
bath,  or  as  an  addition  to  it : 

Stock  Solution. 
Perchloride  of  Iron,    .  .     1  drachm. 

Water,         .         .         .         .8  ounces. 

Used  the  same  as  uranium  bath  :  J  drachm 
of  iron  solution,  10  ounces  of  water,  and 
^  drachm  of  red  prussiate  of  potash  solution. 

In  this  bath  a  deposit  of  blue  prussiate 
of  iron  is  soon  formed  on  the  picture,  yield- 
ing an  agreeable  brown-black  after  burning. 
Or  the  iron  solution  and  uranium  may  be 
used,  together  with  the  red  prussiate. 

The  tablets  may  be  obtained  of  Mr.  At- 
kinson, of  Liverpool,  but  if  desired,  di- 
rect of  the  manufacturer.  J.  H.  Robinson 
&  Co.,  Mersey  Enamel  Works,  Grafton 
Street,  Liverpool,  supply  mine,  which  I 
find  very  good;  also  Stow,  of  Foster  Lane, 
London.  The  furnaces  are  made  by  Doul- 
ton  &  Co.,  Lambeth  potterers,  Lambeth, 
London.  No.  1,  suitable  for  small  pictures, 
costs  about  £2;  No.  4  costs,  I  believe, 
£4  4s.  These  they  call  their  Muffle  Fur- 
naces, and  are  portable,  may  stand  near 
some  chimney,  and  have  an  iron  stove-pipe 
fitted  on  and  into  the  same. 

The  glaze  for  the  pictures  is  now  obtained 
fineljr  ground,  and  is  best  used  as  follows  : 

Take,  say,  an  ounce  of  plain  collodion, 
thin  it  by  the  addition  of  half  an  ounce  of 
alcohol  and  half  an  ounce  or  more  of  ether, 
and  put  into  it  about  a  teaspoonful  of  the 


glazing  powder:  shake  it  up,  and  allow  it 
to  subside  a  moment  before  usinsj. 


NEW  SYSTEM  OF  LIGHTING. 

Br    C.    E.    MYERS. 

Having  offered,  at  the  Chicago  Conven- 
tion, to  give  any  member,  upon  application, 
a  free  license  under  my  patent  to  make  and 
use  the  Universal  Hand-screen  or  Concave 
Reflector  exhibited  there,  I  trust  that  it 
will  be  believed  that  I  have  no  special  axe 
to  grind  when  I  ask  for  space  to  comment 
further  on  what  may  be  termed  the  New 
System  of  Lighting. 

While  investigating  the  subject  among 
the  fraternity,  I  discovered  that  only  the 
more  intelligent  and  experienced  ones  were 
familiar  with  the  use  of  adjustable  screens 
or  reflectors  for  any  other  purpose  than  as 
slight  u  modifiers"  of  light,  most  of  them 
never  having  tried  any  specially  adapted 
apparatus  or  seen  it  tried.  This  being  the 
case,  the  remarks  I  shall  here  make  may  be 
regarded  by  some  as  revelations,  while 
others,  familiar  with  the  subject,  will  rec- 
ognize only  facts  in  correspondence  with 
their  daily  experience. 

My  experiments  in  this  direction  have 
been  so  extensive  that  my  results  may  be 
considered  as  authoritatively  stated,  until 
contradicted  by  some  one  whose  equal  ex- 
perience renders  his  opinions  entitled  to 
equal  respect. 

In  connection  with  this  article  reference 
is  made  to  my  paper  read  at  the  Chicago 
Convention,  which  may  be  considered  as 
prefatory  to  this,  and  as  being  the  root  of 
the  Neio  System  of  Lighting. 

For  simplicity  it  will  be  understood,  in 
this  connection,  that  the  subject  to  be 
lighted  is  a  human  head  or  bust,  and  the 
light  as  striking  it  from  one  direction  only. 
This  may  be  direct  sunshine,  or  it  may  be 
a  top-light,  or  a  top  and  north  side-light, 
or  any  other  form  of  opening,  the  light 
being  always  an  "open  light,"  and  the 
centre  of  the  opening  the  centre  of  the 
light.  The  subject  is  placed  at  the  point  of 
strongest  illumination  of  the  face,  and  a 
screen  is  interposed  between  it  and  the 
opening  admitting  light.  A  yard  square 
translucent  screen  thus  placed  softens  the 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


327 


light.  If  near,  the  lighting  is  flat;  if  fur- 
ther removed,  the  effect  is  lessened,  and  at 
the  distance  of  a  few  feet  it  is  practically 
without  effect.  Its  office  is  to  soften  the 
light,  not  to  govern  it,  and  for  this  latter 
purpose  other  appliances  are  necessary  in 
connection  with  it  or  without  it.  Its 
proper  position  is  between  the  subject  and 
the  point  where  the  strongest  light  enters. 
As  regarding  effect,  its  angle  is  immaterial. 
A  horizontal  or  a  permanently  inclined 
screen,  attached  to  a  common  head-rest  so 
as  to  be  adjustable  for  height  or  revolution 
about  its  standard,  is  the  limit  of  effect. 

This  is  the  beginning  of  the  screen  theory 
of  lighting. 

If  instead  of  the  ordinary  translucent 
screen  (recognized  always  as  the  white  or 
blue  screen)  we  use  a  semi-opaque  material 
of  some  non-actinic  color,  approximating 
to  the  color  of  freckles,  tan  or  skin  blem- 
ishes, such  as  pale  red  or  pink,  light  yellow 
or  pale  orange,  or  very  light  brown,  the 
effect  of  the  screen  is  immediately  visible 
in  the  lessened  necessity  for  retouching  to 
remove  skin  defects,  the  skin  having  been 
lighted  all  one  color.  The  prolongation  of 
exposure  is  much  less  than  might  be  ex- 
pected before  trial,  for  the  darker  and 
lighter  parts  each  get  their  proper  share  in 
gradation  instead  of  the  whiter  parts  steal- 
ing the  free  silver,  as  is  ordinarily  the  case 
while  developing.  The  softening  effect  is 
also  visible,  as  with  the  white  screen,  but 
less  in  degree,  requiring  us  to  place  it  fur- 
ther from  the  sitter  and  out  of  the  camera's 
view,  the  exposure  being  consequently  still 
less  prolonged.  This  peculiarity  marks  the 
distinctive  and  opposite  characteristics  of 
the  translucent  and  semi-opaque  screens. 

With  the  first,  softness  is  produced,  even 
to  the  extent  of  flatness,  by  putting  it  close 
to  the  subject.  With  the  second  the  shad- 
ows are  stronger  if  the  screen  is  placed 
very  close,  and  it  has  to  be  removed  to 
soften  effects,  the  proper  distance  being  a 
matter  of  experiment,  and  when  tried  it  is 
found  that,  unlike  the  white  screen,  the 
angle  or  position  has  a  marked  effect  on  the 
particular  lighting  of  the  subject,  rendering 
perfection  of  adjustment  absolutely  essential 
for  the  desirable  effect.  These  experiments 
are  best  verified  with  the  common  hand- 


screen,  and  it  will  be  found  that  the  usual 
conglomeration  of  curtains,  shutters,  and 
sliding-screens,  over  the  top-light,  may  be 
entirely  dispensed  with  for  the  mere  light- 
ing of  the  sitter,  thus  saving  expense,  time 
in  adjustment,  and  shortening  the  exposure 
still  more. 

With  a  universally  adjustable  opaque 
screen  the  lighting  effect  is  more  marked, 
and  the  control  of  the  light  is  as  complete 
as  it  is  possible  to  contrive  with  any  form 
of  curtains.  Try  it  on  a  large  doll  with  a 
palmleaf  fan. 

If  the  colored  screen  is  used  it  will  be 
found  effective  in  lessening  retouching  only 
on  that  side  of  the  face  exposed  to  it,  leav- 
ing the  darker  side  of  the  face  wofully  in 
contrast.  The  remedy  is  a  reflector.  A 
plain  white  reflector  improves  matters  by 
lighting  the  darker  side,  but  a  white  patch 
in  the  near  eye  is  nearly  always  an  accom- 
paniment. If  a  colored  reflector  is  used 
this  side  of  the  face  is  manifestly  improved 
as  regards  retouching,  but  remains  too  dark 
for  pleasant  contrast  or  satisfactory  grada- 
tion. The  remedy  is  to  concave  the  surface 
of  the  reflector  exposed  to  the  sitter.  The 
light  is  then  concentrated  to  such  an  extent 
as  to  occasionally  seem  to  reverse  the  former 
lighting  of  the  face.  This  excessive  effect 
is  remedied  by  moving  the  reflector  further 
away.  The  patch  in  the  eye  disappears 
when  the  concave  reflector  is  swung  so  as 
to  light  only  that  part  of  the  face  below 
and  back  of  the  eye,  and  the  darker  parts 
of  the  hair  and  neck,  leaving  the  direct 
light  to  illumine  the  eyes.  The  effect  is 
always  less  on  the  plate  than  it  appears  to 
the  artist's  eyes,  as  the  light  is  colored,  and 
the  reflection  of  a  colored  concave  surface 
in  the  eyes,  even  when  fully  fronting  it,  is 
so  insignificant  as  to  be  practically  ineffec- 
tive. If  this  reflector  is  not  sustained  and 
wielded  by  the  hand  it  must  be  attached  to 
some  support  permitting  complete  adjust- 
ment, as  perfect  accuracy  of  position  is 
more  decidedly  essential  in  the  reflector 
than  in  the  screen  itself. 

Since  reliable  lighting  appliances  have 
assumed  the  importance  they  have,  and  in 
view  of  the  almost  entire  lack  of  informa- 
tion on  this  subject,  I  have  thought  it  ex- 
pedient to  give  these  concise  results  of  mis- 


328 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHO  TOGRAPHEK. 


cellaneous   and  detailed   experimental  ex- 
perience. 

If  called  upon  I  shall  be  glad  to  give 
my  theory  of  proper  skylight  construction, 
combining  cheapness,  utmost  amount  of 
light  through  given  apertures,  immunity 
from  difficulties  incident  to  direct  sunshine 
entering,  and  entire  relief  from  all  leaking. 
I  will  add  here  that  I  work  a  north  light 
covered  with  clear  glass,  open  all  the  year 
round. 
Hornellsville,  N.  Y. 


VIEWS  ABROAD  AND  ACROSS. 

BY   EDWARD    L.    WILSON. 

XI. 

The  year  is  drawing  to  a  close,  and  I 
must  hasten  on,  for  these  narratives  will 
become  tiresome  by  the  time  the  New  Year 
reaches  us,  I  am  sure,  and  you  will  then 
look  for  something  fresh,  so  let  us  finish  up 
Paris  quickly,  then  spend  awhile  in  Lon- 
don, and  there  end  our  views. 

Paris  alone  has  much  to  attract  the  pho- 
tographic student— much  more  than  I  found 
I  could  attend  to.  Here  some  of  the  most 
eminent  men  the  art  has  known  have  re- 
sided and  do  yet  reside;  men  who  patiently 
and  pluckily  plod  away  over  an  idea  until 
they  work  out  some  practical  result  for  the 
benefit  of  the  fraternity  at  large.  One  of 
these  is  our  friend  M.  Liebert,  to  whose 
work  I  alluded  in  my  last.  He  has  had 
the  benefit — for  such  he  is  willing  to  admit 
it  was — of  a  residence  in  America,  and 
therefore  we  feel  more  interest  in  him.  I 
will  mention  one  or  two  more  of  his  devices, 
and  to  him  I  am  also  indebted  for  draw- 
ings of  them. 


y^t* 


The  first  of  these  is  an  elastic  frame  spe- 
cially adapted  for  the  printing  of  positives  on 


opal  glass.  This  frame,  owing  to  its  construc- 
tion, allows  the  following  of  the  progress  of 
the  impression  without  disturbingthe  nega- 
tive, which  is  kept  in  its  frame  against  the 
plate,  by  means  of  a  spring  ;  on  the  other 
hand,  when  it  is  desirable  not  to  cut  a  nega- 
tive on  which  are  several  images,  a  piece  of 
sheet-iron,  rather  thinner  than  the  opal 
glass,  is  fitted  to  the  frame.  Of  this  plate 
a  corner  is  removed  of  the  size  of  the  posi- 
tive print,  which  is  thus  rigidly  held  by  the 
spring  shown  in  the  figure.  The  lower  part 
of  this  frame  being  elastic,  the  image  is  al- 
ways in  perfect  contact  with  the  negative 
by  the  pressure  of  the  spring. 

The  contact  should  be  very  rigid  to  ob- 
tain the  half-tones  ;  because,  besides  losing  a 
great  deal  of  its  intensity  in  the  toning  and 
fixing  baths,  the  image  seen  by  transparency 
through  the  opaline  medium  never  has  the 
same  vigor  as  when  seen  directly  by  reflec- 
tion. Of  course  we  have  a  great  many  de- 
vices for  printing  such  pictures,  but  this 
one  struck  me  as  very  useful  also. 

In  France  they  do  not  have  as  much  sun- 
shine as  we,  therefore  the  construction  of  the 
skylight  has  had  even  more  attention  there 
than  we  give  it.  Every  device  is  employed 
for  securing  a  proper  light,  and  a  proper 
quantity  of  it,  and  for  avoiding  anything 
that  may  obstruct  it.  We  all  know  how 
many  skylights  are  obscured  by  an  accumu- 
lation of  dirt  and  dust  and  rain  on  the  out- 
side. I  have  known  of  several  cases  where 
photographers  have  complained  that  their 
lights  continued  to  work  slower  and  slower, 
when  had  they  but  looked  upon  the  out- 
side the  guilty  cause  would  have  been  very 
apparent. 

But,  in  a  measure,  to  avoid  that  labor,  the 
French  use  the  plan  made  plain  by  the 
figure  annexed.  It  is  not  without  several 
advantages. 

It  is  similar  to  the  ordinary  construction, 
differing,  however,  in  form.  The  sash  is 
curved.  The  advantage  of  this  arrange- 
ment is  alluded  to  above,  and  to  do  away 
with  the  beam  which  absorbs  the  freest  and 
most  actinic  part  of  the  light,  since  it  strikes 
the  sitter  at  precisely  an  angle  of  45°.  The 
other  part  of  the  roof  may  be  sloping  both 
ways,  the  proportions  of  the  atelier  and  the 
glass  sash  remaining  as  ordinarily. 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


329 


At  each  end  of  the  glass  atelier  a  space 
may  be  set  off  of  about  ten  feet  length  on 


the  whole  width  of  the  room,  to  be  used  as  a 
laboratory  and  dressing-room.  The  room 
will  thus  have  a  total  length  of  eighteen 
metres,  or  about  twenty-three  feet. 

For  the  portrait  photographer  who  is 
sometimes  obliged  to  accommodate  the  sitter 
who  cannot  come  to  his  atelier,  the  an- 
nexed cut  of  a  tent,  forming  a  posing-room, 


will  be  found  useful.     The  front  faces  the 
north  in  northern  latitudes,  and  turned,  on 


the  contrary,  to  the  south  in  southern  lati- 
tudes. Use  a  gray-blue  cloth  background, 
which  is  about  six  feet 
wide  by  seven  feet  high. 
In  travelling,  it  is  rolled 
around  the  supporting 
pole ;  the  top  and  the 
sides,  forming  curtains, 
are  made  of  thin  stuff, 
and  held  by  rings  to  the 
rods  of  the  framework, 
which  are  taken  apart 
with  great  ease,  to  be 
packed  into  a  very  small 
compass. 

In  this  portable  atelier 
excellent  portraits  may 
be  obtained,  and  the 
time  of  posing  one-half 
less  than  in  a  glass- 
house. The  professional 
photographer  and  the 
amateur  will  be  hence- 
forth able  to  work  with  advantage  in  the 
open  air,  and  obtain  very  fine  negatives  of 
portraits  and  landscapes,  with  a  baggage 
relatively  light  and  easy  of  transportation. 
And  while  upon  the  subject  of  skylights, 
I  must  not  forget  to  add  M.  Liebert's 
method  of  shortening  the  time  of  the  expo- 
sure of  the  plate  in  the  camera  for  portraits. 
It  has  before  been  broach- 
ed in  these  pages,  but  has 
not  received  the  atten- 
tion that  it  really  should, 
so  I  trust  you  will  bear 
with  me  if  I  bring  it  to 
your  mind  again.  It  con- 
sists in  supplying  the  lens 
with  a  shutter  of  porcelain 
glass,  through  which  a 
preliminary  exposure  of 
the  plate  is  made.  But  I 
will  describe  the  whole 
operation. 

Each  one  of  the  objec- 
tives used  in  the  atelier 
should  be  furnished  with 
a  stop,  whose  brass  pe- 
riphery should  be  lined 
with  cloth  in  the  inside, 
in  order  that  it  may  adjust  itself  perfectly 
to   the  objective,  and  that  it  may  be  re- 


330 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


moved  without  effort ;  in  the  centre  of 
this  stop  a  hole  is  made,  equal  at  least  to 
the  half  of  the  diameter  of  the  front  lens; 
this  opening  is  closed  by  an  opal  glass, 
whose  ground  side  should  face  the  lens,  and 
on  the  front  of  this  stop  is  fixed  a  shade  of 
blackened  sheet-iron,  similar  to  that  which 
is  placed  on  all  the  doublets  objectives  of 
Mr.  Koss.  This  shade,  which  moves  by 
means  of  a  hinge  fixed  to  the  upper  portion 
of  it,  allows  the  lens  to  be  covered  or  un- 
covered at  will,  without  disturbing  the  stop. 
This  arrangement  allows  the  use,  with  the 
same  advantage,  of  holders  with  shutters  or 
with  a  slide. 

To  operate  with  this  instrument,  this  is 
the  manner  of  proceeding  : 

"When  the  sitter  is  suitably  posed  and 
sustained  by  the  head-rest,  bring  to  a  focus 
upon  the  ground-glass,  as  is  customary  ;  the 
objective  is  then  covered  with  the  stop, 
which  is  furnished  with  the  opal  glass,  and 
re-covered  with  the  shade ;  the  ground-glass 
is  replaced  by  the  frame  containing  the 
sensitized  plate. 

The  shade  is  then  raised  for  an  interval 
of  time,  which  may  vary  from  one  to  five 
seconds,  according  to  the  intensity  of  the 
light,  and  especially  according  to  the  length 
of  the  focus  of  the  objective  ;  then  the  lenses 
are  unmasked  by  quickly  removing  the 
stop,  which  is  replaced  as  soon  as  the  pose 
is  finished. 

We  see  that  by  this  process  nothing  is 
changed  in  the  ordinary  operations,  which 
may  be  made  so  rapidly  that  the  sitter  not 
only  feels  no  fatigue  but  is  not  even  aware 
of  its  use.  The  chances  of  a  successful  re- 
sult are  increased,  for,  as  we  have  stated, 
there  is  a  reduction  of  at  least  one-third  in 
the  time  of  sitting. 

The  pose  could  be  reduced  still  further  if, 
after  the  exposure,  and  before  the  develop- 
ment, the  plate  were  dipped  in  a  sensitizing 
silver  bath. 

As  we  have  already  said,  the  preliminary 
exposure  of  the  sensitive  film  can  vary  in 
proportion  to  the  more  or  less  intensity  of 
the  light  at  the  time  of  operating,  and  espe- 
cially in  proportion  to  the  focal  length  of 
the  objective  used,  for  it  is  easy  to  under- 
stand that  the  diffused  light,  penetrating 
into  the  objective  through  an  opal  glass, 


will  act  on  the  sensitive  film  strongly  and 
rapidly,  in  proportion  as  the  space  to  be 
traversed  is  less. 

The  sensibility  will  be  increased  by  a 
longer  exposure  to  the  light,  but  neverthe- 
less without  excess,  for  in  that  case  the  nega- 
tive would  be  completely  fogged. 

A  few  trials  will  suffice  to  make  one 
familiar  with  this  new  mode  of  operating, 
and  with  the  exact  time  to  be  given  to  the 
preliminary  exposure.  It  is  safe  for  me  to 
advise  the  use  of  it  under  all  circumstances 
where  rapidity  is  necessary  to  insure  suc- 
cess. 

It  is  very  important  that  the  exposure 
of  the  sitter  should  immediately  follow  the 
preliminary  exposure,  otherwise  the  rapidity 
would  be  lessened. 

For  the  reasons  given  above,  opticians 
would  do  well  to  adopt  this  new  kind  of  stop 
for  all  the  portrait  objectives  they  may  have 
to  make,  as  I  am  well  convinced  that  this 
mode  of  operating  will  soon  be  universally 
adopted. 

Of  course  no  one  interested  in  photo- 
graphic progress  would  leave  Paris  without 
a  visit  to  the  card-mount  manufactory  of 
Mons.  D.  Hutinet,  for  it  is  well  worthy  of 
it,  and  many  beautiful  things  are  to  be  seen 
there.  It  is  an  immense  establishment,  and 
there  the  production  of  photographic  mounts 
is  seen  in  all  its  stages,  from  the  pasting 
together  of  the  several  sheets  which  make 
up  the  stiff  card,  to  the  calendering  betwixt 
monstrous  rollers,  and  the  cutting  of  the 
round  corners  by  the  delicatety  constructed 
and  ingenious  machine.  This  latter  is  the 
pet  machine  of  the  establishment,  and  works 
most  beautiful^,  the  results  being  as  perfect 
as  perfect  could  be.  In  printing  in  all  sorts 
of  designs  and  in  delicate  colors  M.  Huti- 
net excels,  and  he  and  his  former  partners 
were  undoubtedly  the  first  to  make  advance 
in  this  direction.  It  was  not  many  years 
ago  when  the  variety  of  card-mounts  ob- 
tainable in  this  country  was  very  meagre. 
The  French  ones  were  then  scattered  all 
over  the  country,  and  our  own  excellent 
manufacturers  met  the  demand,  until  now 
there  is  no  end  to  the  variety.  Yet  we  must 
admit  there  is  a  delicac}-  and  a  finish — a 
Frenchy  something  about  those  made  by  M. 
Hutinet,  Avhich  we  have  yet  to  reach.     He 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


331 


pridos  himself  particularly  on  the  purity  of 
his  stock. 

Not  long  ago  there  was  a  good  deal  of 
excitement  in  Germany  and  France  among 
photographers,  because  of  the  frequent  spot- 
ting of  their  prints,  and  the  whole  censure 
was  placed  upon  the  card-mounts.  This 
caused  M.  Hutinet  to  speak  before  the 
Photographic  Society  in  Paris,  on  the  sub- 
ject, and  I  will  quote  part  of  his  interesting 
remarks : 

He  alluded  first  to  a  letter  of  M.  de  Con- 
stant Delessert,  stating  the  existence  in  Ger- 
many and  in  England  of  the  kind  of  photo- 
graphic epidemic  alluded  to,  which  manifests 
itself  by  yellow  spots  on  the  prints.  In  this 
letter  M.  Constant  thus  expresses  himself: 
"  I  have  never  had  this  accident  happen  to 
me  in  my  work-rooms,  but  my  successor,  in 
another  building,  is  very  much  troubled." 

"We  now  come,"  says  M.  Hutinet,  "to 
the  result  of  an  experiment  made  by  me.  A 
photographer  at  Montereau  having  informed 
me  that  the  same  accidents  showed  them- 
selves in  his  establishment,  sent  me  at  the 
same  time  some  boards  upon  which  no  prints 
had  been  pasted  ;  I  pasted  upon  these  boards 
prints  which  had  been  rapidly  dried,  then 
each  of  these  boards  was  cut  in  two  and  one 
half  sent  to  Montereau  ;  at  the  end  of  fifteen 
days  they  were  returned  to  me  full  of  spots  ; 
the  other  portions  of  the  same  cards,  which 
I  retained,  suffered  no  change. 

"  Two  halves  of  the  same  card  were  given 
to  the  Society  in  proof  of  my  experi- 
ment. 

"I  have  remarked  that  the  prints  coming 
from  Montereau  were  not  only  spotted,  but 
that  the  Bristol  itself  had  undergone  a 
change  ;  it  had  become  yellow,  whilst  that 
of  the  prints  kept  by  me  remained  white  and 
smooth. 

"To  what  cause  are  we  to  attribute  this 
change  in  the  two  halves  of  the  same  print 
pasted  on  the  same  card  ? 

"  It  seems  to  me  that  a  local  cause  should 
be  duly  considered,  which  is  also  the  opin- 
ion of  M.  de  Constant. 

"  Is  it  the  dampness  of  the  air  or  emana- 
tions peculiar  to  the  spot  in  which  the  photog- 
rapher has  his  work-rooms?  I  leave  that 
question  to  be  decided  by  the  chemists ;  but 
it  is  clear  to  me  that  the  cause  cannot  be  at- 


tributed to  the  Bristol  or  the  albumenized 
paper. 

"  I  would  add,  that  according  to  Mr.  Dis- 
deri,  the  accident  is  produced  when  the 
prints  have  not  been  sufficiently  fixed  in 
the  hyposulphite,  or  when  this  latter  is  too 
strong  and  not  dissolved." 

But  I  must  go  on ;  and  our  next  visit  will 
be  to  the  manufactory  of  the  photographic 
lenses,  so  well  known  in  Paris,  of  which 
M.  Hermagis,  the  distinguished  experi- 
menter and  optician,  is  the  chief.  Here  I 
had  a  most  interesting  visit.  Do  you  know 
what  a  trouble  it  is  to  make  a  good  photo- 
graphic lens  ?  You  do  know  what  a  trouble 
it  is  to  procure  a  good  one.  When  I  visited 
M.  Salomon,  as  most  photographers  do 
when  they  visit  the  studio  of  another,  I 
looked  all  about,  praised  and  admired  his 
splendid  results,  their  sharpness,. their  mag- 
nificent details,  and  yet  their  lovely  soft- 
ness, and  then  I  turned  my  head  away  a 
moment  and  assumed  a  very  grave  counte- 
nance, so  as  to  be  sure  I  wouldn't  laugh. 
And  turning  again  to  the  great  master,  I 
said  in  the  best  English  I  could,  Aw !  beg 
pawdon,  M.  Salomon,  these  are  lovely  effects 
of  yours.  Aw  !  what  lens  do  you  use  ?  and 
he  answered,  "  Hermagis's!"  Straight  from 
there  on  the  same  day  I  went  to  M.  Her- 
magis's works,  where,  as  I  said,  lenses  are  to 
be  seen  in  all  the  stages  of  production,  from 
ingots  of  brass  and  bricks  of  glass  to  the 
splendid  finished  and  tested  lenses  to  be 
found  in  his  wareroom.  Here  were  men 
grinding,  and  polishing,  and  turning,  and 
testing,  and  adjusting,  and  finishing,  and 
fitting,  and  rubbing  ;  a  perfect  sight.  But 
as  I  shall  take  you  to  see  all  these  optical 
effects  when  we  go  to  London  next  month, 
I  will  leave  you  now  without  further  light 
as  to  how  your  lenses  are  made.  M.  Her- 
magis is  most  careful  and  exact  in  testing 
his  lenses  personally,  and  guarantees  every 
one.  Of  course  you  already  suspect  me  of 
being  interested,  because  our  good  pub- 
lishers are  agents  for  M.  Hermagis  in  this 
country.  Well,  then,  next  month  I  will 
describe  a  factory  I  am  not  interested  in, 
and  say  more  about  it  than  in  all  decency 
I  should  want  to  say  here.  But  do  try  M. 
Hermagis's  lenses.  They  are  good.  It  is 
not  expected  to  sell  many  here  with   the 


331 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


vivacious  Voigtlander,  the  dreadful  Dall- 
meyer,  and  the  rambling  Eoss  in  the  field  ; 
but  enough  about  it  now,  let  us  go  on. 

I  visited  the  works  of  M.  Goupil  &  Co., 
at  Asniers,  where  is  one  of  the  finest  photo- 
printing  places  in  existence.  Photo-lithog- 
raphy, photo-engraving,  the  carbon,  Wood- 
bury, and  silver  printing  processes  are  all 
largely  employed  in  the  reproduction  of 
works  of  art  and  for  commercial  purposes 
only.  M.  Eousselon  is  the  manager,  and  a 
most  practical  photographer  I  found  him  to 
be.  I  wish  I  had  space  to  say  a  great  deal 
more  about  him.  Perhaps  another  time  I 
can. 

The  paintings  are  copied  in  the  open  air 
on  terraces  by  the  Seine — a  most  admirable 
position  for  the  purpose,  the  place  being  so 
advantageously  situated  for  light,  etc.  They 
print  a  good  deal  on  albumenized  paper, 
but  not  nearly  so  much  as  by  the  Woodbury 
process — one  so  well  known  as  only  to  need 
mentioning.  They  produce  pictures  for  il- 
luminated windows,  using  glass  positives  of 
the  size  of  8  x  10,  and  they  are  making  cop- 
per plates  for  printing  by  means  of  a  lead 
impression  taken  from  the  gelatin  matrix, 
which  is  subsequently  coppered  by  the  gal- 
vanic battery.  M.  Rousselon  has  succeeded, 
after  many  experiments,  in  giving  a  grain- 
ing to  the  gelatin,  which  is  subsequently 
taken  up  by  the  lead  and  the  copper-plate, 
and  whereby  a  grand  appearance  is  given 
to  the  picture. 

An  electro-magnetic  apparatus  of  an  ex- 
traordinary size,  which  is  driven  by  a  steam- 
engine,  furnishes  the  electric  light  for 
enlarging.  It  is  so  strong  that  for  enlarge- 
ments of  the  size  of  a  single  sheet  of  paper 
an  exposure  of  ten  minutes  suffices.  It  is 
proposed  to  erect  a  new  hydraulic  press 
capable  of  putting  on  an  enormous  pressure 
on  a  surface,  and  which  is  to  be  used  for 
printing  by  the  Woodbury  process  from 
larger  lead  matrices  than  the  10  x  8,  which 
is  hitherto  the  largest  which  has  been  at- 
tained.    But  good-bye,  M.  Eousselon! 

Each  day  now  is  a  drive,  for  my  days  are 
numbered,  and  I  soon  must  journey  to  Lon- 
don and  then  home.  Oh,  Paris,  to  be  here 
and  have  to  hurry  so !  Of  course  1  went 
to  the  Louvre  and  the  Luxembourg  and 
other  art  palaces,  and  feasted  and  gobbled 


up  and  took  in,  until  I  began  to  feel  a  sort 
of  aesthetic  dyspepsia,  and  I  have  had  it  ever 
since.  I  hope  I  will  never  get  over  it.  I 
am  only  afraid  my  friends  will  get  tired 
and  worn  out  and  have  sleepless  nights  hear- 
ing me  talk  about  it,  so  in  m}7  "  Lantern 
Journeys  "  for  magic  lantern  .lovers  I  have 
"let  out"  a  great  deal  more  than  I  dare 
here.     They  tell  a  great  deal  of  what  I  saw. 

I  went  to  Notre  Dame,  the  Pantheon, 
St.  Stephen's,  the  Madeleine,  out  the  Champs 
Elysees,  not  forgetting  Versailles,  often  to 
the  bloody  Place  de  la  Concorde,  to  the  sad 
Morgue,  up  and  down  the  Seine  and  across 
the  bridges,  and  oh  !  where  did  not  my  good 
friend  Levy  and  others  take  me?  Tou 
who  have  stereoscopic  pictures  and  lantern 
slides  of  all  these  grand  places,  read  the 
"Lantern  Journeys."  You  who  haven't 
them,  pray  get  them  now. 

My  friend,  and  our  correspondent,  Mons. 
Lacan,  came  in  for  his  share  of  attention 
and  consideration,  and  as  you  know,  the  re- 
sult was  his  engagement  as  correspondent 
for  your  good.  M.  Davanne  I  found  busy 
as  usual  in  his  splendid  apartments  experi- 
menting and  studying.  I  must  say  I  was 
greatly  disappointed  with  the  studios  of 
Paris.  Mons.  Lacan  has  told  you  about 
the  most  important  ones.  They  are  very 
far  behind  our  art  palaces,  and  as  to  their 
work — well,  many  a  one  here  can  equal  and 
excel  the  most  of  it.  As  to  the  inventions 
of  M.  Puttemans  and  Lambert,  which  were 
creating  an  excitement  when  I  was  there, 
Mons.  Lacan  has  told  you,  and  has  more  in 
reserve.  And  now  we  must  leave  Paris. 
For  several  days  three  things  have  been  oc- 
cupying my  mind  constantly.  The  one, 
Murillo's  grandly  sublime  painting  of  "The 
Immaculate  Conception."  It  sprung  upon 
me  when  I  was  not  expecting  it.  I  was 
reading  the  catalogue,  and  looking  up  saw 
that  sublime  picture.  I  fairly  jumped, 
almost  frightened.  There  stood  the  noble 
figure  of  the  Virgin,  the  wondrously  sweet 
influence  of  that  wondrously  sweet  face  per- 
vading the  atmosphere  for  a  wide  distance. 
Oh,  how  sublime!  "And  there  appeared 
a  great  wonder  in  heaven  ;  a  woman  clothed 
with  the  sun  and  the  moon  under  her  feet, 
and  upon  her  head  a  crown  of  twelve  stars. " 
Eev.  12  :  1.     Murillo  doubtless  had  this  text 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


333 


in  mind  when  he  painted  this  great  picture 
of  his  life,  and  which  cost  $125,000. 

X\  \  The  other  thought 
was  of  my  poor 
friend  who  might 
be  waiting  for  me 
over  the  Straits  of 
Dover,  standing 
upon  the  highest 
rocks  there  in  a 
drenching  rain,  un- 
der his  best  umbrel- 
la, singing,  I  know, 
"Come!  you  have 
but  ten  days  to  stat- 
in London  ;  it  is  a  huge  place,  and  you  must 
hurry!"  Ah!  and  the  third  thought  was 
that  I  must  cross  that  abominable  North 
Channel  to  get  home.     Oh!  horrible! 


Under  his  best  umbrella. 


GERMAN  CORRESPONDENCE. 

Application  of Photography  to  Industrial  Pur- 
poses—  Talbot  Sensitized  Paper — Hearn's 
Practical  Printer — Reproducing  Negatives 
— Stylish  Backgrounds— Cellular  Structure 
of  the  Collodion — Photographic  Exhibitions 
in  Vienna  and  Berlin. 

The  more  photography  progresses,  the 
more  does  its  application  extend  through  all 
the  branches  of  industry,  and  it  begins  al- 
ready to  become  the  universal  art,  which  is 
practiced  not  only  by  the  practical  photog- 
rapher but  by  all  who  are  necessitated  to 
have  pictorial  illustrations,  be  they  archi- 
tects, machinists,  engineers,  miners,  iron 
founders,  zinc  casters,  printers,  or  dyers. 
Many  photographers  consider  this  general 
spread  of  the  application  of  photography  a 
misfortune ;  they  fear  that  if  every  one  knows 
how  to  photograph,  their  services  will  not  be 
required  any  longer,  and  their  business  will 
retrograde.  Such  views  are  not  only  nar- 
row-minded but  also  unfounded.  Music  also 
is  an  art  which  has  become  universal.  In 
Germany  nearly  every  child  of  well-to-do 
parents  learns  to  play  on  some  instrument, 
still  this  has  not  made  the  professional  mu- 
sician superfluous  ;  on  the  contrary  the  gen- 
eral practice  of  music  makes  him  the  more  in- 
dispensable, forces  him  to  greater  exertions, 
gives  him  employment  as  teacher,  and  in 
spite  of  all  the  home  music  our  public  con- 


certs are  overcrowded.  The  photographer 
need  not  fear  that  his  art  may  become  too 
popular. 

The  application  of  photography  to  art, 
science,  and  the  industrial  pursuits  would 
perhaps  have  spread  mure  rapidly  if  its 
practice  did  not  require  so  much  care  and 
cause  so  much  dirt.  I  know  plenty  of 
amateurs  who  have  a  good  many  opportu- 
nities for  practicing  photography  and  still 
do  not  use  them,  because  the  preliminaries, 
such  as  building  tents,  filtering  the  bath, 
cleaning  plates,  etc.,  gives  them  too  much 
trouble.  In  this  respect  every  invention 
which  lessens  this  work  is  of  great  interest, 
and  before  photography  will  be  practiced 
universally,  two  things  will  have  to  be  in- 
vented— the  one  is  an  absolutely  reliable 
dry  plate,  the  other  a  permanent  sensitive 
paper.  Both  these  requisites  should  be  for 
sale  at  moderate  prices.  Dry  plates  can  be 
bought  in  England,  but  their  reliability  is 
still  in  doubt.  I  have  tried  several  dozen 
of  Wortley  plates,  and  have  always  been 
successful.  The  permanent  sensitive  paper 
has  for  years  been  an  article  of  commerce 
here  in  Berlin.  It  is  consumed  in  enor- 
mous quantities  by  machinists,  architects, 
draughtsmen,  etc.,  who  copy  drawings  with 
it.  It  is  the  same  process  which  is  worked  by 
Mr.  Walker  in  Washington.  The  drawing  is 
placed  in  the  printing-frame,  the  sensitized 
paper  on  top  of  it,  and  the  negative  copy 
so  obtained  is  not  toned  but  simply  fixed 
and  washed.  The  process  is  as  old  as  pho- 
tography itself,  but  its  general  practice 
dates  from  the  time  when  Talbot  here  com- 
menced to  manufacture  his  permanent  paper 
for  the  trade,  for  the  engineers  do  not  like 
to  take  the  trouble  of  sensitizing  their  own 
paper.  Talbot  makes  his  paper  by  floating 
the  sensitized  sheets  on  a  solution  of  a  salt 
of  tartaric  acid.  There  are  many  formulae 
for  making  such  paper;  I  myself  have  tried 
several,  and  all  with  good  result,  but  1  have 
never  obtained  a  paper  which  was  as  per- 
manent as  that  of  Talbot,  for  it  remained 
in  my  dark-room  white  for  eight  months 
in  spite  of  the  influences  of  air  and  damp- 
ness. This,  however,  is  not  only  dependent 
on  the  formula  but  also  on  a  skilful  ma- 
nipulation. Talbot's  paper  is  less  suited  for 
photographic  purposes,  as  it  tones  poorly. 


334 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


I  see  that  Mr.  Hearn,  in  his  excellent 
work,  "The  Practical  Printer,"  a  book 
which  contains  an  abundance  of  interesting 
matter,  treats  this  subject  also.  I  fully 
appreciate  the  thoroughness  with  which 
Mr.  Hearn  treats  everything  of  interest  for 
the  printer.  In  a  future  edition  of  this  beau- 
tiful book  probably  a  new  chapter  will  find 
place.  I  mean  on  reproducing  negatives, 
for  the  new  method  of  reproducing  negatives 
is  in  fact  a  printing  process,  although  with 
development.  We  cannot  be  too  thankful 
to  Mr.  Obernetter  for  his  publication  of  this 
process,  which  in  fact  is  so  easy  and  simple 
that  every  photographer  succeeds  with  it 
after  a  few  trials,  and  I  feel  convinced  that 
in  two  years  it  will  be  practiced  in  every 
atelier  of  any  importance.  The  ordinary 
materials,  dextrin,  chromate  of  potash,  and 
grape-sugar,  can  be  bought  almost  anywhere, 
but  of  great  importance  is  a  very  fine  plum- 
bago. We  get  ours  from  Nuremberg.  Re- 
cently I  received  a  sample  of  excellent 
plumbago  from  Mr.  Bierstadt,in  New  York, 
which  appears  still  more  intense  than  the 
Nuremberg,  and  my  first  plates  made  with 
it  were  too  dense.  A  few  trials  teach  us 
how  to  use  it.  It  is  to  be  regretted  that 
this  method  of  reproducing  negatives  was 
not  known  earlier,  for  it  would  have  saved 
many  a  valuable  plate,  as  for  instance  my 
valuable  Aden  plates,  all  of  which  were  lost. 

Before  the  French  Photographic  Society 
Mr.  Geymet  claims  that  he  has  practiced 
this  process  eighteen  months  earlier  than 
Mr.  Obernetter.  This  is  in  so  far  wrong, 
as  Obernetter  made  "  Lichtdruck  prints"  as 
far  back  as  1870  from  negatives  reproduced 
in  this  manner.  The  dust  process  is  not 
new,  neither  Obernetter  nor  Geymet  have 
invented  it,  but  the  main  point  is,  that 
Woodbury,  who  worked  after  the  formula 
published  by  Geymet,  did  not  succeed,  while 
he  was  perfectly  successful  with  Obernetter's 
method. 

Bierstadt,  in  New  York,  has  sent  to  me  a 
formula  which  differs  somewhat  from  Ober- 
netter's. I  tried  it  and  it  works  splendidly. 
It  is  as  follows  : 


Dextrin, 

Grape-Sugar, 
Bichromate  of  Potash, 

4    grammes 

4 

2i        " 

Water, 

100 

You  will  notice  that  no  glycerin  is  used 
with  this  formula,  which  is  surprising,  as 
I  thought  it  indispensable  for  the  dry  cli- 
mate of  New  York.  Further  experiments 
must  explain  the  action  of  the  glycerin. 
'  All  the  world  complains  about  the  diffi- 
culty of  getting  an  artistic  background. 
Plenty  of  backgrounds  can  be  bought,  but 
they  are  all  too  stylish,  and  rather  suited 
to  spoil  the  picture  than  to  embellish  it. 
Formerly  the  photographers  got  their  back- 
grounds painted  by  scene-painters,  but  these 
were  often  very  picturesque  and  not  always 
useful  for  photographic  purposes,  either  too 
light  or  too  dark  in  tone — in  short  something 
was  always  wanting.  Loescher  &  Petsch 
paint  their  own  backgrounds,  and  possess  in 
Mr.  Hartman  an  artist  who  thoroughly  un- 
derstands his  business.  All  the  other  photog- 
raphers are  in  a  bad  fix,  as  lately  the  scene- 
painters  refuse  to  work  for  them.  In  many 
instances,  backgrounds  have  been  returned 
to  them  as  useless,  and  this  has  induced 
them  to  refuse  further  orders. 

Brothers  Tasschler,  in  Switzerland,  have 
now  adopted  a  new  method  of  making  back- 
grounds. They  place  the  figure  in  front  of 
a  monotonous  background  and  paint  the 
accessories,  which  appear  to  them  suitable, 
on  the  negative.  They  coat  the  back  of  the 
negative  with  a  dull  varnish  and  make  on 
it  the  drawing  with  lead-pencil.  It  consists 
of  very  simple  objects,  such  as  a  wall,  a  few 
trees;  the  effect  is  surprising,  but  it  requires 
of  course  an  artist. 

In  view  of  this  absence  of  artisticall}' 
beautiful  backgrounds,  it  is  advisable  to 
use  in  their  place  wall-paper.  Beautiful 
wallpapers  are  at  present  in  the  market, 
particularly  cloth-paper  with  panel  and 
frieze.  Their  artistic  effect  is  very  striking 
and  their  photographic  action  is  good. 
Colors,  which  appear  too  light  or  too  dark, 
may  readily  be  modified  by  either  painting 
them  with  yellow  ochre  or  with  white. 
Our  photographers  here  have  employed 
these  papers  already  very  successfully. 

We  hear  frequent  complaints  that  the 
collodion  of  commerce  shows  so-called  cellu- 
lar structure.  The  plates  look  after  devel- 
opment as  if  covered  with  a  fine  network, 
which  under  certain  conditions  makes  the 
whole    plate  useless.     I  have   examined   a 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


335 


great  many  samples,  and  found  this  fault 
almost  in  every  one  of  them.  Very  often 
it  is  not  to  be  noticed  with  the  naked  eye, 
but  with  a  magnifier  of  about  one  inch 
focus  it  is  easily  noticed.  American  col- 
lodions do  not  show  this  fault  as  much  as 
the  European  ones.  It  manifests  itself  par- 
ticularly in  summer-time,  and  with  fresh 
collodion  more  frequently  than  with  an  old 
one. 

I  have  noticed  it  often  and  in  the  highest 
degree  with  newly  iodized  collodion.  Four 
weeks  later  not  a  trace  of  it  could  be  noticed, 
and  the  plates  were  perfectly  smooth.  The 
probable  reason  is  that  collodion  is  now  gen- 
erally prepared  at  a  lower  temperature  than 
formerly;  this  makes  a  thicker  collodion, 
more  sensitive,  but  also  less  smooth.  Mr. 
Quidde  remarks  that  this  cellular  structure 
is  more  frequent  when  the  plates  are  warmer 
than  the  collodion  which  is  poured  on.  He 
keeps  his  plates  in  summer-time  in  a  very  cool 
place.  Mr.  Primm  states  that  with  careful 
manipulation  in  pouring  on  the  collodion 
this  evil  may  be  avoided.  Certain  it  is, 
that  diluting  the  collodion  will  avoid  it. 

Next  year  we  will  probably  have  two 
photographic  exhibitions  in  Germany  and 
Austria.  The  Vienna  Photographic  Society 
has  planned  one  for  April  and  May,  and  we 
contemplate  to  hold  one  later.  Those  who 
exhibit  in  Vienna  have  the  advantage  of 
exhibiting  their  pictures  twice.  We  have 
not  had  a  photographic  exhibition  in  Berlin 
for  the  last  ten  years.  The  progress  which 
has  been  made  since  then  is  grand,  and  our 
city  possesses  a  population  that  knows  how 
to  appreciate  it.  In  my  next  letter  I  hope 
to  be  able  to  give  you  further  particulars. 
We  shall  be  very  glad  to  see  American 
photography  well  represented  here. 

Yours  truly,  Dr.  H.  Vogel. 


PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  FRANCE. 

BY    ERNEST    LACAN. 

Photomicrography,  or,  in  other  words, 
the  photographic  reproduction  of  objects  as 
they  appear  when  enlarged  by  the  micro- 
scope, is  one  of  the  most  useful  applications 
of  the  new  art  to  science  and  education. 
It   not   only   furnishes   documents    to    the 


studies,  so  uncertain  up  to  the  present  time, 
of  the  tissues,  of  the  crystals,  and  of  the 
mysterious  world  of  the  infinitely  small, 
but  besides  it  places  under  the  eyes  of  stu- 
dents, in  the  courses  of  histology,  botany, 
zoology,  anatomy,  etc.,  etc.,  images  with 
which  they  can  follow,  in  the  most  complete 
manner,  the  lessons  of  the  professor.  In 
Prance,  at  the  present  time,  there  is  not  a 
single  course  or  scientific  lecture  in  which 
these  marvellous  enlargements  are  not  use- 
fully employed.  The  large  white  screen, 
upon  which  they  are  projected  by  means  of 
electric  light,  as  was  formerly  done  with 
the  pictures  of  the  magic  lantern,  to  the 
great  amusement  of  children,  forms,  to-day, 
as  important  a  part  of  school  furniture  as 
the  mathematician's  blackboard.  A  master 
in  this  line  is  Mr.  Jules  Girard,  to  whom 
we  are  indebted,  by  the  way,  for  a  work, 
having  for  title,  the  "Camera  and  the  Mi- 
croscope." On  the  occasion  of  a  presenta- 
tion, just  made  by  him  to  the  Academy  of 
Sciences,  of  several  microscopic  pictures, 
representing  crystallizations  of  sal  ammo- 
nia and  of  bichromate  of  potash,  Mr. 
Girard  gave  some  new  explanations  con- 
cerning his  manner  of  operating.  He 
made  use  of  an  apparatus  composed  of  a 
metallic  slide  fixed  to  a  support  which  car- 
ries the  camera.  This  horizontal  slide 
comprises  several  instruments  mounted 
upon  a  support  which,  by  means  of  a  screw, 
are  removed  more  or  less  one  from  the 
other,  and,  at  the  same  time,  from  the  cam- 
era. They  consist  of  an  objective,  of  one 
centimetre  (f  inch)  diameter,  so  combined 
as  to  give  an  enlargement  varying  between 
eight  and  twelve  diameters ;  a  spring-pin- 
cers serving  to  hold  in  a  fixed  position  the 
small  plates  of  glass  on  which  are  caused 
to  crystallize  the  salts  which  are  to  be  re- 
produced. There  is  besides  a  plate  of  blue 
glass,  which  gives  a  monochromatic  light 
favorable  to  photographic  impression  ;  and 
finally,  a  movable  plane  mirror,  to  reflect 
the  solar  light  in  the  axis  of  the  whole  sys- 
tem. 

The  time  of  exposure  necessary  for  this 
kind  of  picture  varies  from  instantaneous 
to  two  or  three  minutes,  according  to  the 
transparency  of  the  cr^  stills.  To  obtain  a 
great  relief,  showing  in  a  more  complete 


336 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


manner  the  salient  portions  of  the  crystals, 
oblique  light  is  made  use  of  by  slightly  dis- 
placing the  mirror  from  its  axis. 

The  crystals  to  be  reproduced  are  pre- 
pared by  spreading  a  coat  of  their  solution 
on  a  small  glass  plate ;  it  is  necessary  that 
this  gla-<s  plate  should  be  perfectly  level,  in 
order  that,  after  desiccation,  the  crystals 
should  all  have  the  same  thickness.  It  is 
best  to  prepare  solutions  more  or  less  con- 
centrated, so  as  to  select  from  the  number 
those  that  present  a  definite  character  for 
reproduction. 

A  communication  of  another  kind  was 
also  made  to  the  Academy  of  Sciences  by 
one  of  the  men  who  have  the  most  contrib- 
uted to  the  earliest  developments  of  pho- 
tography, Mr.  Edmund  Becquerel.  I  al- 
lude to  an  article  concerning  the  action  of 
different  refrangible  rays  upon  iodide  and 
bromide  of  silver.  Without  pretending  to 
a  complete  analyzation  of  this  communica- 
tion, which  is  of  very  considerable  scope,  I 
believe  it  useful  to  indicate  the  principal 
points. 

When  the  iodide  of  silver  is  prepared, 
according  to  Daguerre's  process,  on  a  silver 
plate  and  exposed  to  the  action  of  the  solar 
spectrum,  without  having  first  been  impres- 
sioned  by  light,  it  is  only  sensitive  from  the 
blue  to  the  extremity  of  the  ultra  violet;  but 
if  it  has  undergone  a  previous  exposure  it  is 
sensitive,  not  only  between  the  preceding 
limits,  but  it  also  becomes  impressionable 
between  the  red  and  the  blue.  If  the 
iodide  of  silver  is  obtained  by  double  pre- 
cipitation, and  fixed  on  paper  or  incorpo- 
rated with  the  collodion  or  the  gelatin,  the 
observed  effects  may  be  different,  according 
to  the  conditions  in  which  it  is  found  at  the 
time  of  the  luminous  action.  Precipitated, 
insolated,  and  pure,  we  know  that  it  is  very 
nearly  inactive;  fixed  upon  paper,  and  in 
presence  of  an  excess  of  nitrate  of  silver, 
it  comes  to  the  aid  of  the  decomposing  ac- 
tion of  light,  becomes  very  sensitive,  and, 
without  the  use  of  a  developer,  it  can  still 
present  the  effects  of  continuation,  after  a 
previous  insolation  and  two  maxima  of  ac- 
tion, one  in  the  scale,  the  other  in  the  blue 
violet.  Bromide  and  chloride  of  silver  act 
in  the  same  manner. 

The  iodide  of  silver  incorporated  with 


the  collodion  and  forming  the  ordinary 
photographic  coating,  exposed  wet  to  the 
action  of  the  solar  spectrum,  then  treated 
with  sulphate  of  iron  or  pyrogallic  acid,  is 
impressionable  to  a  lesser  degree.  But  with 
dry  collodion  it  is  possible  to  obtain  the 
same  effects  as  with  the  plates  and  the 
papers,  and  after  a  first  insolation  to  obtain 
an  impression  of  the  least  refrangible  rays 
of  the  solar  spectrum.  Mr.  Edmund  Bec- 
querel cites  several  experiments  which  con- 
firm those  that  Dr.  Vogel  has  published,  on 
the  influence  exercised  upon  the  sensibility 
of  iodide  of  silver  by  certain  coloring  sub- 
stances, such  as  coralline,  aniline  green,  etc., 
mixed  with  the  collodion. 

The  action  of  the  spectrum,  on  thq  wet 
or  dry  collodion,  prepared  with  iodide  or 
bromide  of  silver  and  mixed  with  chloro- 
phyll, gives  an  image  more  extended  than 
with  the  collodion  alone.  The  conclusion 
of  the  article  of  Mr.  Edmund  Becquerel  is 
as  follows:  The  action  of  a  coloring  sub- 
stance in  a  very  thin  coat,  which  envelops 
a  body  chemically  impressionable,  shows 
that,  perhaps,  substances  previously  inso- 
lated, as  the  iodide,  bromide,  and  chloride 
of  silver,  become  sensitive  to  the  action  of 
the  least  refrangible  rays,  only  by  a  change 
in  the  coloration  or  in  the  condition  of  their 
surface,  the  absorbing  power  of  this  surface 
for  the  different  rays  of  the  spectrum  being 
then  changed.  The  effects  of  the  continu- 
ing rays  are  thus  explained. 

I  have  just  been  shown,  and  the  inventor 
intends  shortly  to  introduce  in  America, 
after  having  made  arrangements  for  the 
sale  in  France,  a  very  ingenious  apparatus 
which  appears  to  me  to  realize  the  type,  so 
long  sought  for,  of  the  apparatus  used  by 
excursionists.  Imagine  a  box  not  exceed- 
ing the  dimension  of  a  big  volume  in 
quarto,  and  weighing,  certainly,  much  less. 
In  it  all  the  baggage  of  the  operator — 
camera,  frames,  negative,  ground-glass, 
plates  prepared  with  dry  collodion — finds 
its  place.  A  cane  of  ordinary  shape  and 
dimensions  completes  it.  The  camera  is  of 
a  novel  construction,  to  my  knowledge,  and 
entirely  original.  It  consists  of  two  frames 
of  light  wood,  one  serving  to  form  the  bot- 
tom of  the  apparatus  and  to  receive  the 
plate  frame,  the  other,  smaller,  on  which  is 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


537 


fixed  the  objective ;  a  kind  of  bag,  made  of 
green  or  black  silk,  forms  the  body  of  the 
camera.  Previous  to  operating  it  is 
stretched  by  means  of  two  planchets,  one 
placed  above,  the  other  beneath,  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  length,  and  which,  uniting 
the  two  frames,  give  rigidity  to  the  whole. 
In  this  condition  the  camera  has  exactly 
the  appearance  of  a  hand  stereoscope  having 
but  one  lens. 

The  upper  plan- 
chet,  forming  one 
of  the  great  sides 
of  the  camera, 
carries  a  little 
instrument  per- 
forming the  func- 
tion of  a  plumb, 
which  allows  the 
apparatus  to  be 
placed  exactly 
level.  The  up- 
per planchet  has 
in  the  centre  a 
thread  which  re- 
ceives the  screw 
of  the  stand  ;  this 
is  composed  of 
two  wooden  disks  placed  one  over  the  other 
and  surrounding  a  ball,  also  of  wood,  car- 
rying the  screw  in  question.  This  ball  is 
rendered  movable  or  immovable,  according 
as  the  upper  disk  is  screwed  or  unscrewed  ; 
the  lower  disk  is  pierced  with  three  holes, 
in  which  are  fixed  the  three  tubes  which 
form  the  cane,  and,  at  the  same  time,  the 
stand  of  the  apparatus. 

The  length  of  the  camera  is  calculated  so 
that  the  image  is  always  in  focus  for  objects 
placed  at  more  than  25  metres  (27  yards). 
Nearer  objects  are  focussed  by  moving  the 
tube  of  the  objective.  The  frames,  which 
are  not  more  than  12  millimetres  (J  inch) 
thick,  can  hold  two  plates,  placed  back  to 
back  and  separated  by  a  piece  of  opaque 
black  paper ;  the  shutters  are  made  of 
pasteboard,  so  that  it  is  possible  to  carry  a 
considerable  number  of  these  filled  frames 
without  increasing  the  weight  of  the  bag- 
gage much  over  that  of  the  plates. 

The  prints  obtained  with  this  apparatus 
are  18  centimetres  (7  inches)  by  18  centim- 
etres (5  inches).     Stereoscopic  views  may 


be  taken  by  placing  in  the  camera  a  special 
separation  and  by  moving  the  objective, 
which  is  adjusted  on  a  movable  planchet. 

I  was  struck  with  the  simplicity  and  con- 
venience of  this  new  apparatus,  due  to  a 
Belgian  amateur,  Dr.  Candez,  who  has 
called  it  the  Scenograph.  I  am  sure  it  will 
obtain  great  success,  for  it  satisfies  all  the 
exigencies  of  travelling  photographers. 

There  is  in  Paris,  at  the  point  of  the 
island  on  which  stands  the  old  church  of 
Notre  Dame,  a  dismal  building  called  the 
Morgue.  It  is  there  where  are  deposited 
the  remains  of  all  persons  who  have  died 
an  accidental  death  on  the  public  way,  and 
whose  names  and  residences  are  unknown. 
These  mortal  remains  are  placed  on  stone 
tables  and  exposed  to  public  view  to  be 
identified  if  possible.  It  often  happens 
that  they  are  not  claimed  and,  putrefaction 
taking  place,  they  have  to  be  hastily  buried. 
It  is  easy  to  understand  that,  under  these 
circumstances,  disappearances  occur  which 
remain  always  inexplicable  by  the  families 
of  the  deceased.  The  administration  has 
at  length  taken  a  measure  which  should 
have  been  in  vogue  a  long  time  ago,  namely, 
to  photograph  all  the  bodies  brought  to 
the  Morgue,  and  to  preserve  the  prints,  to 
be  placed  at  the  disposition  of  every  person 
who  might  have  occasion  to  consult  them. 
Now  that  the  police  department  has  resolv- 
ed to  take  a  description  of  the  dead,  it 
should  put  into  practice  the  project  pro- 
posed some  time  back  by  an  inspector  gen- 
eral of  prisons,  which  consists  in  taking  a 
portrait  of  all  criminals,  to  be  added  to  the 
court  record  ;  this  system  would  certainly 
do  away  with  many  researches  and  many 
errors,  for,  of  the  number  of  crimes  daily 
committed,  it  may  be  said  that  a  large  ma- 
jority is  the  work  of  liberated  or  escaped 
criminals.  Besides,  this  would  be  a  curious 
collection,  to  be  consulted  by  physiologists, 
physiognomists,  and  moralists. 

Mr.  Heaen's  Practical  Printer  seems  to  please 
everybody.     Mr.  J.  P.  Watt  says  of  it : 

"I  have  received  the  Practical  Printer,  and 
have  read  it  with  a  great  deal  of  pleasure  and 
interest.  I  consider  it  is  the  best  $2.50  worth  I 
have  invested  in  this  year,  and  so  far  in  1874  I 
have  invested  $17.75  in  works  on  photography." 


22 


338 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


DR.   VOGEL'S  HANDBOOK  OF 
PHOTOGRAPHY. 

SECOND  EDITION. 

The  issue  of  this  work  has  been  delayed 
for  reasons  beyond  our  control.  It  required 
a  great  deal  more  of  our  personal  attention 
and  supervision  than  our  already  much-oc- 
cupied time  would  allow,  and  we  were  com- 
pelled to  work  upon  it  only  "  between 
times,"  and  thus  it  has  been  delayed.  It  is 
now  almost  complete,  however,  and  those 
"  hungry  "  for  it  may  begin  to  send  in  their 
orders  in  a  very  few  days.  It  is  almost 
like  a  new  work,  being  revised  and  consid- 
erably enlarged,  so  as  to  make  it,  because 
the  latest,  the  best  work  in  photography  in 
general  and  in  detail,  that  there  is.  Many 
interesting  chapters  have  been  added  of 
great  value,  yet  the  price  will  remain  the 
same  as  the  old  edition — $3.50. 

We  make  a  brief  extract  from  the  new 
matter  on  a  subject,  at  present  quite  in- 
teresting, to  reassure  our  readers  that  the 
talented  author  has  lost  none  of  his  practi- 
cal, incisive  manner  of  treating  his  subject: 

1 '  Gelatinizing  of  Photographs  and  Enamel 
Pictures. — For  this,  two  warming-bottles, 
made  of  tin  plate,  which  have  the  shape  of  a 
right-angled  box,  are  requisite  (one  of  12// 
square,  and  1\"  in  height,  the  other  of  9/r  x 
Z"  square  also  2^//  height)  having  on  one 
end  a  small  tube  for  filling.  The  large  one 
is  used  to  heat  the  collodionized  plate  pre- 
viously to  using  the  smaller  one  as  a  warm 
support  while  gelatinizing.  The  purpose 
of  these  bottles  is  to  keep  the  prepared  col- 
lodion plates  slightly  warm  until  ready*  for 
the  operation,  to  prevent  any  interruption 
while  working  the  gelatin  solution,  which  is 
apt  to  cause  blisters.  Small  plates  of  plate- 
glass,  size  5r/  x  Z\"  are  necessary,  and  are 
coated  with  plain  collodion  and  dried.  Be- 
fore commencing  both  bottles  are  half  filled 
with  water.  On  the  upper  surface  place  a 
piece  of  card  of  corresponding  size;  this  is 
done  for  two  reasons :  first,  to  prevent  the 
glass-plates  from  touching  the  tin  ;  second, 
to  keep  the  gelatin  clean,  which  is  apt  to 
drop  out  during  the  operation,  for  further 
use.  The  gelatin  solution  consists  of  1  part 
of  clean  gelatin  and  8  parts  of  water.  The 
gelatin  is  cut   into  small  pieces,  put  in  a 


stone-ware  cooking-jar,  cold  wat<jr  poured 
on,  and  dissolved,  continually  stirring  with 
a  glass  rod,  with  a  gentle  heat ;  afterwards 
strain  through  a  close  linen  into  the  gelatin 
apparatus.  Cartes  de  visite  and  cabinet  pho- 
tographs are  usually  mounted  on  cards  with 
name  of  the  firm  on  the  back,'  and  in  the 
usual  manner,  touched,  pressed,  and  fin- 
ished. Those  intended  for  gelatinizing  are 
only  discerned  from  the  others  by  being 
somewhat  larger.  The  size  of  the  cards,  in 
behalf  of  subsequent  trimming,  is  marked 
with  a  lithographic  square.  A  very  fre- 
quent cause  of  failure  in  gelatinizing  cartes 
de  visite,  is  that  the  edges,  during  the  oper- 
ation or  later,  in  taking  off  the  glass,  are 
injured  ;  by  using  larger  cards  the  latter  can 
be  avoided  ;  to  avoid  the  first,  a  simple 
method  is  given  below. 

"All  preparations  being  in  readiness, oper- 
ate as  follows  :  Several  collodionized  plates 
are  placed  on  the  large  warming-bottle,  film 
side  up,  for  a  previous  warming.  One  being 
placed  on  the  smaller  one,  a  carte  de  visite 
is  dipped  in  the  warm  gelatin  solution  (face 
upwards),  and  after  a  short  pause  picked 
out  in  such  a  manner  (horizontal,  if  pos- 
sible), that  a  sufficient  quantity  covers  the 
picture.  The  picture  is  now  laid  with  the 
long  edge  on  the  edge  of  the  plate  nearest 
the  operator,  at  the  same  moment  leaving 
the  whole  picture  come  down  on  the  plate. 
Hold  with  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  the 
short  edge  lying  nearest,  and  rub  the  back 
with  the  middle  finger  of  the  right  in  con- 
cise regular  strokes,  commencing  at  the 
furthest  edge,  over  the  whole  picture.  Six 
to  seven  strokes  made  with  the  breadth  of 
the  last  joint  of  the  middle  finger  with  a 
slight  pressure,  are  sufficient  to  remove  all 
superfluous  gelatin  solution,  at  the  same 
time  any  bubbles  contained  therein.  In 
making  the  strokes,  care  must  be  taken 
that  between  the  strokes  no  space  is  left 
untouched,  as  blisters  will  then  surely  re- 
main. The  gelatin  must  in  a  certain  man- 
ner be  forced  from  the  front  edge  to  the  op- 
posite. Herewith,  as  already  mentioned, 
all  bubbles  are  certainly  removed. 

"  The  backs  of  the  pictures  are  then  cleaned 
of  the  gelatin  solution  remaining  with  a 
sponge  dipped  in  warm  water,  the  plate 
with  the  glass  side  up  is  placed  on  a  thor- 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


339 


oughly  wet  and  flat  piece  of  flannel,  until 
the  gelatin  has  set.  This  is  the  method 
mentioned  above  to  prevent  edges  coming 
ofl' directly  after  gelatinizing.  If  the  card- 
side  of  the  gelatinized  plate  is  laid  on  top, 
they  would  dry  very  rapidly,  causing  shrink- 
ing, and  a  sure  coming  off  at  the  edges. 
Being  done  with  gelatinizing,  all  plates  can 
be  turned  and  dried  in  an  ordinary  room 
temperature.  The  best  time  for  gelati- 
nizing is  in  the  evening;  the  next  day, 
about  8  or  9  o'clock,  the  pictures  can  be  re- 
moved from  the  glass.  The  removal  can  be 
interrupted  if  the  foregoing  manipulations 
have  not  been  closely  followed  or  indif- 
ferently. The  pictures  are  often  eameoed. 
For  this  purpose  cameo  presses  are  used,  in 
which  the  picture  is  laid  and  pressed." 

INDUSTRIAL  EXHIBITIONS. 

Mr.  Cady's  article  on  this  subject  last 
month  should  stir  up  our  photographers, 
wherever  convenient  to  State  fairs  or  in- 
dustrial exhibitions,  to  take  more  interest  in 
the  subject,  not  only  as  to  being  enterprising 
enough  to  exhibit  of  their  best  works,  but 
also  to  see  to  it  that  they  are  given  good 
space  and  good  light,  and  accommodations 
throughout  equal  to  those  given  to  any 
branch  of  industry.  And  more  too,  they 
should,  after  the  parties  having  these  exhi- 
bitions in  charge  go  to  the  trouble  and  ex- 
pense of  putting  up  special  apartments, 
see  to  it  that  those  apartments  are  well 
filled.  There  are  complaints  on  both  sides. 
Chicago  is  all  right  as  to  splendid  art  rooms, 
but  the  photographers  don't  fill  them.  This 
year  only  Messrs.  Ormsby,  Armstrong, 
Hali,  Gentile,  Klein,  Mosher,  Brand  &  Co., 
Greene,  Copelin  &  Son,  Fassett,  Hesler, 
Kocher,  and  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  of  San 
Francisco,  exhibit.  This  is  not  right  or 
fair.     Where  are  the  rest? 

In  Boston,  owing  to  want  of  room,  only 
a  few  are  represented,  as  follows  :  Allen  & 
Eowell,  J.  W.  Black,  Metcalf  &  Weldon, 
successors  to  Whipple,  A.  1ST.  Hardy,  A.  C. 
Partridge,  George  K.  Warren,  A.  Marshall, 
T.  R.  Burnham  ;  we  think  this  is  all.  Allen 
&  Eowell  show  nothing  but  carbon  prints  ; 
they  deserve  much  credit.  The  others  ex- 
hibit about  the  same  as  they  had  at  Chicago. 


Benjamin  French  &  Co.  are  the  only  ones 
who  make  a  display  of  photographic  goods, 
which  is  very  fine  for  the  small  space  allowed 
them. 

Great  complaint  is  made  there  because  of 
the  obscure  place  assigned  to  our  beloved 
art,  and  so  the  fault  is  not  with  the  photog-» 
raphers. 

In  Cincinnati,  only  Messrs.  Van  Loo, 
Weingartner,  Teeples,  Cassiday  &  Co.,  and 
Reiman  make  any  show,  we  believe,  and 
their  display  is  very  meagre.  For  shame  ! 
At  the  American  Institute  in  New  York, 
there  is  always  a  fair  display,  and  this  year 
we  find  about  the  usual  stereotype  set  of  ex- 
hibitors, and  so  far  as  some  of  them  go  they 
might  just  as  well  leave  their  pictures  hang 
there  from  year  to  year. 

In  Philadelphia,  at  the  Franklin  Insti- 
tute, there  is  just  as  fair  a  show  as  the  space 
allotted  will  allow,  and  the  greatest  variety 
we  ever  saw  in  any  photographic  exhibition. 
Besides  the  display  of  Messrs.  Gutekunst, 
Broadbent  &  Phillips,  Garrett  &  Bro., 
Trask  &  Bacon,  Cooper,  Gilbert  &  Bro., 
Suddards  &  Fennemore,  and  Brooks,  there 
is  a  fine  display  by  the  Woodbury  printing 
process  under  charge  of  Mr.  J.  Carbutt ;  by 
the  Heliotype  Company  ;  industrial  photog- 
raphy by  Newell  &  Son;  stereographs  by 
James  Cremer ;  lantern  slides  by  Messrs. 
Langenheim,  Briggs,  and  Benerman  & 
Wilson ;  the  whole  making  a  very  fine 
show. 

In  San  Francisco,  Messrs.  Bradley  & 
Rulofson  also  lead,  exhibiting  with  many 
others  of  which  we  have  not  heard.  Let 
the  good  work  go  on — but  better. 

SOCIETY  GOSSIP.* 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadel- 
phia.— October  7th,  the  President,  J.  C. 
Browne,  Esq.,  presiding. 

A  series  of  prints,  illustrative  of  the  "  Al- 
bumen Chloro-Bromide  Process,"  were  pre- 
sented by  the  President  on  behalf  of  Mr. 
M.  Carey  Lea,  and  a  vote  of  thanks  ten 
dered  to  him  therefor. 

Mr.  George  Rau  was  elected  a  member  of 
the  Society. 

*  We  would  be  glad  to  have  the  secretaries  of  all 
photographic  societies  report  their  proceedings  to  us. 


340 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


Mr.  Bell  spoke  at  some  length  of  the  keep- 
ing qualities  of  dry  plates ;  he  said  that 
some  plates  of  his  own  manufacture  had  ac- 
companied the  Transit  of  Venus  Expedition, 
and  that  they  had  proved  uniformly  success- 
ful when  they  had  been  kept  in  a  dry  place 
on  the  vessel  during  the  sea-voyage,  but 
that  some  from  the  same  batch  had  been 
left  in  a  box  which  was  exposed,  to  the  fumes 
of  coal  gas  and  bilge-water,  and  that  all  of 
these  failed.  From  this  he  argued  that  not 
only  dryness,  but  freedom  from  gases  and 
fumes  was  essential  to  the  keeping  qualities 
of  dry  plates. 

The  Secretary  spoke  of  cases  of  insensi- 
tiveness  in  wet  collodion  films,  caused  by 
the  fumes  of  turpentine  in  the  air  of  the 
dark-room. 

Mr.  Bell  said  that  such  fumes  were  highly 
injurious  in  the  daguerreotype  process. 

The  President  exhibited  a  bottle  of  albu- 
men prepared  by  Mr.  Ackland's  formula, 
in  which  the  fibrinous  matter  is  removed 
by  glacial  acetic  acid,  and  the  pure  albumen 
after  filtration  then  made  alkaline  with 
strong  ammonia.  Such  a  preparation  is  said 
to  keep  indefinitely,  but  in  the  case  of  the 
sample  exhibited,  decomposition  had  set  in, 
and  the  whole  mass  was  of  a  light  claret  color. 
The  President  said  that  it  had  been  prepared 
in  February  last,  and  that  the  formula  as 
published  by  Mr.  Ackland  had  been  rigidly 
adhered  to  in  the  preparation.  No  one 
present  could  offer  an  explanation  of  the 
phenomenon. 

Boston  Photographic  Association. — 
October  2d,  the  Vice-President,  Mr.  W.  T. 
Bowers  presiding. 

Mr.  Black  stated  that  the  Executive  Com- 
mittee of  the  National  Photographic  Asso- 
ciation were  considering  the  expediency  of 
changing  the  place  for  the  annual  meeting 
to  some  other  place  than  Boston — perhaps 
to  San  Francisco. 

Mr.  Kowell  said  he  would  like  to  have 
the  Convention  meet  at  Boston  if  we  could 
do  the  thing  up  nicely ;  thought  the  great 
trouble  would  be  to  secure  a  suitable  place 
to  meet,  and  also  to  exhibit  the  pictures. 
Would  not  object  to  go  to  San  Francisco  if 
they  did  not  come  here. 

Mr.  Black  said  if  the  Association  came 
here  he  would  expect  every  man   to  take 


hold  and  help  put  the  thing  through  in  good 
style,  and  thought  the  same  as  Mr.  Howell, 
that  the  trouble  would  be  in  getting  a  hall 
or  exhibition-room  suitable. 

Mr.  Burnham  thought  they  could  get 
some  unoccupied  building  like  the  one  he 
was  in,  that  would  do  very  well  and  at 
little  expense,  as  there  are  several  new  build- 
ings unoccupied  and  others  building. 

The  President,  Mr.  Bowers,  hoped  the 
Executive  Committee  would  stir  up  the  pho- 
tographers and  make  a  fine  exhibition  and 
have  a  nice,  pleasant  meeting ;  and  in  regard 
to  the  Mechanics'  Exhibition  now  in  opera- 
tion in  this  city,  he  said  he  felt  very  indig- 
nant when  he  went  there  and  saw  an  art 
gallery  especially  erected,  but  not  a  photo- 
graph in  the  room  that  was  well  lighted,  but 
that  they  were  crowded  away  in  a  dark 
corner  downstairs  with  the  ceramics,  statu- 
ary, bronzes,  plaster  casts,  parians,  etc.  etc. 
He  thought  by  that  they  were  considered 
not  suitable  to  be  placed  on  exhibition  with 
oil  paintings,  water  colors,  and  steel  engrav- 
ings 

Mr.  Black  said  he  was  of  the  same  opinion  ; 
that  Messrs.  Allen  and  Kowell  had  a  fine 
exhibition  of  carbon  pictures  that  deserved 
a  better  light,  and  that  they  displayed  merit 
and  commendation.  That  an  eminent  artist 
told  him  one  day  that  he  thought  the  pho- 
tographers had  been  entirely  ignored. 

Many  artists  (so  they  call  themselves)  de- 
pend on  our  photographs  to  make  their  pic- 
tures, for  we  give  them  the  position,  the 
light  and  shadow,  and  sometimes  the  ex- 
pression that  they  could  not  get  if  they 
should  paint  a  dozen  pictures  without  our 
pictures  to  copy  from,  and  when  they  have 
finished  it,  it  is  their  own  idea.  "  /painted 
this,  and  photographs  are  of  no  account." 
They  slur  and  entirely  ignore  all  photo- 
graphs. 

Mr.  Bowell  expressed  the  same  feelings 
as  Mr.  Black,  and  both  were  very  sorry 
they  had  any  pictures  in  the  exhibition. 

Mr.  Hardy,  of  Bangor,  Me.,  was  intro- 
duced, and  expressed  great  pleasure  at  being 
with  us.  Said  he  thought  the  real  artist 
could  be  known  by  his  works,  whether  with 
a  red-hot  poker  on  a  board,  or  a  pallet  knife 
or  brush  on  canvas.  He  thought  that  some 
artists  appreciated  photography. 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


341 


By  request,  several  members  present 
stated  the  way  they  deliver  proofs,  and  the 
charge  made  at  the  time  of  sitting.  Most 
of  them  require  a  deposit  at  time  of  sitting. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Low,  it  was  voted  that 
a  committee  be  appointed  to  see  what  ar- 
rangements could  be  made  with  the  Boston 
Athenaeum,  so  the  members  could  visit  it 
with  some  competent  artist  to  point  out  the 
beauties  of  the  pictures.  By  request  of  Mr. 
Low,  it  was  referred  to  the  Executive  Com- 
mittee. 

Mr.  Wing  said  he  had  heard  that  the 
reason  why  the  National  Photographic  As- 
sociation did  not  want  to  come  to  Boston, 
was  that  the  members  were  afraid  they 
would  be  sued  by  him  ;  that  he  would  pledge 
himself  that  if  the  Convention  would  come 
to  Boston,  not  a  man  from  the  time  he 
left  his  home  until  he  returned  should  be 
molested  by  him  or  any  of  his  servants. 

He  would  be  one  of  a  hundred,  or  seventy- 
five,  to  hire  a  hall,  get  apparatus,  etc.,  and 
help  support  it,  so  we  could  have  an  exhibi- 
tion of  some  sort  every  meeting. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Halliman,  it  was  voted 
that  we  have  an  exhibition  of  the  stereopti- 
con  at  the  nest  meeting,  and  that  all  that 
could,  be  requested  to  bring  transparencies 
for  exhibition. 

Pennsylvania  (Philadelphia).  —  Octo- 
ber 19th,  some  discussion  was  had  on  a  pic- 
ture that  was  entered  for  competition. 

Mr.  Saylor  thought  there  should  be  some 
explanation  as  to  the  defects  in  a  picture 
that  was  not  up  to  the  standard  chosen  by 
the  Association.  He  had  been  greatly  bene- 
fited and  had  made  great  improvement 
since  his  connection  with  the  Association ; 
it  paid  him  to  come  from  Lancaster  to  at- 
tend these  meetings,  and  he  wanted  to  see 
them  made  interesting  and  instructive.  If 
this  were  his  picture  that  he  had  brought 
for  competition  he  would  want  to  know 
wherein  he  had  failed,  then  he  would  go 
home  and  try  again  till  he  had  corrected  the 
fault. 

Mr.  demons  said  the  picture  was  under- 
timed,  and  the  developer  had  been  used  too 
strong.  From  experiments  he  had  made  he 
had  found  that  a  short  exposure  with  strong 
iron  produced  a  heavy  deposit  on  the  lights, 
with  but  little  or  no  deposit  in  the  shadows 


and  middle  tints.  The  quantity  of  acid 
used  should  be  according  to  the  strength  of 
the  developer.  A  weak  developer  requires 
very  little  acid,  and  is  best  if  sufficient  time 
can  be  had.  An  excess  of  acid  retards  the 
development,  and  prevents  the  detail  in  the 
shadows  from  being  brought  out. 

Mr.  Lenzi  exhibited  specimens  of  his  new 
embossing  process,  which  he  claims  is  very 
simple  and  inexpensive.  They  were  well 
executed,  and  received  favorable  comments 
from  the  members. 

Mr.  McCollin  said  he  had  just  received 
from  Paris,  by  letter,  a  new  formula  for 
retouching  by  a  mechanical  process,  which 
was  said  to  be  very  simple  and  effective. 
From  Mr.  McCollin's  description,  it  was 
concluded  to  be  the  Lambert  process,  which 
has  been  referred  to  in  the  photographic 
journals,  and  which  has  been  patented  both 
in  Europe  and  in  this  country. 

A  paper  on  Protosulphate  of  Iron,  by 
William  W.  Seeler,  was  received  and  read. 
See  below. 

PROTOSULPHATE  OF  IRON.* 

In  looking  over  the  reported  proceed- 
ings of  the  Pennsylvania  Photographic 
Association,  in  the  October  number  of  the 
Philadelphia  Photographer,  I  noticed  a  few 
remarks  on  the  trouble  experienced  from  an 
impure  article  of  protosulphate  of  iron, 
which  I  may  be  able  to  correct  to  a  certain 
extent.  I  am  of  opinion  that  the  difficulty 
arises  more  from  the  effects  of  oxidation 
than  from  any  other  cause.  Almost  all 
samples  of  protosulphate  of  iron  which  I 
have  examined  have  an  acid  reaction,  which 
can  be  corrected  by  dissolving  and  recrys- 
tallizing. 

The  term  "  oxygen  "  means  "  generator 
of  acid,"  and  it  was  formerly  supposed  to  be 
the  essential  principle  of  all  acids,  but 
hydrogen  has  since  been  found  to  contain 
the  same  properties.  Its  union  with  metals 
and  other  substances  is  called  "oxidation," 
and  the  product  is  an  oxide.  One  equiva- 
lent of  oxygen  is  called  protoxide,  two 
deutoxide,  and  three  sesquioxide  or  per- 
oxide. 

*  Read  before  the  Pennsylvania  Photographic 
Association. 


342 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Protosulphate  of  iron,  when  pure,  is  of  a 
bluish-green  color  ;  by  exposure  to  dry  air 
it  becomes  white  on  the  surface  ;  if  exposed 
to  moisture  it  oxidizes  and  becomes  a 
brownish-yellow,  thus  showing  that  great 
care  should  be  exercised  in  preventing  air 
or  moisture  from  coming  in  contact  with 
this  substance  when  in  bulk. 

It  is  well  known  to  those  who  make 
plain  iron  solution  in  large  quantities  that 
if  not  used  in  a  short  time  it  oxidizes,  and  a 
brownish  precipitate  is  formed.  If  a  small 
quantity  of  any  free  acid  is  added  to  the 
iron  solution,  it  becomes  red  from  the  same 
cause.  It  is  impossible  to  keep  the  develop- 
ing solution  for  any  length  of  time  without 
showing  the  effects  of  this  oxidation,  which 
necessitates  a  longer  period  of  exposure  and 
development.  It  will  also  be  noticed  that 
the  delicate  detail  of  the  negative  is  lost 
when  this  old  solution  is  used. 

Metallic  iron,  when  exposed  to  moisture 
or  air,  oxidizes  or  "rusts  ;"  the  same  result 
is  apparent  with  protosulphate  or  any  of 
the  compounds  of  iron.  The  oxygen  from 
the  atmosphere  causes  them  to  return  to  the 
crude  condition  in  which  they  were  first 
found. 

"William  W.  Seeleb. 


MATTERS    OF    THE 


Membership  costs  $2  ;  annual  dues,  $4,  in 
advance.  Employes  half  rates.  Life  mem- 
bership. $25,  and  no  dues.  It  is  proposed 
presently  to  double  the  fees  for  life  mem- 
bership. 

Members  are  hereby  notified  that  their 
annual  dues  were  payable  June  1st,  1874. 
Employers  $4,  and  employes  $2.  The 
Treasurer  urges  that  prompt  remittances  be 
made.     Please  remit  now. 

All  remittances  of  back  dues  should  be 
sent  to  the  Treasurer,  Albert  Moore,  828 
Wood  Street,  Philadelphia,  and  fees  and 
dues  for  new  members  to  the  Permanent 
Secretary,  Edward  L  Wilson,  Seventh  and 
Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


Some  Real  Facts. — A  great  deal  of  the 
feeling  in  existence  among  photographers 
against  patents  is  due  to  the  manner  in 
which  the  owners  of  said  patents  conduct 
themselves.  We  would  not  speak  of  it  had 
not"  one  of  the  gentlemen  alluded  to  re- 
ferred to  it.  We  allude  to  Mr.  Wing,  who 
at  the  last  meeting  of  the  Boston  Photo- 
graphic Association  took  it  upon  himself 
to  "pledge"  that  if  the  National  Photo- 
graphic Association  Convention  be  held  in 
Boston  in  1875,  that  he  would  not  sue  any 
one  of  the  visitors  for  infringement  of  his 
patent,  meaning  the  so-called  "  sliding 
plate-holder  patent. "  For  shame,  that  there 
should  be  any  necessity  for  such  a  scene  as 
this — a  patentee  professing  to  be  interested 
in  photographic  progress, 'and  swearing  in 
his  application  for  a  patent  that  his  inven- 
tion is  for  the  advancement  of  his  art,  get- 
ting up  in  a  photographic  society  and  offer- 
ing such  a  "pledge"  as  a  coaxer  for  the 
fraternity  to  come  to  the  Hub.  Didst  ever 
read  the  story  of  "  The  Spider  and  the  Fly  ?" 
Now  we  love  Boston  and  its  people,  and  in  no 
section  is  our  circulation  larger,  and  our  sales 
of  books  more  satisfactory  than  in  New  Eng- 
land, but  we  cannot  "hurrah"  for  it  for 
1875  unless  something  a  great  deal  more 
substantial  than  any  man's  promise  or  any 
man's  patent  is  placed  in  the  hands  of  our 
President.  The  real  facts  are  that  for  two 
or  three  years  the  attendants  upon  the  Na- 
tional Photographic  Association  Conven- 
tions have  been  pestered  and  bothered  and 
unnecessarily  annoyed  by  summonses  and 
writs,  and  subpoenas  from  owners  of  dubious 
patents  which  the  high  courts  of  the  coun- 
try never  sustained.  Is  this  furthering 
progress,  ye  ingenious  inventors  ?  If  a  man 
owns  a  patent  and  it  is  disputed,  why  does 
he  not  speedily  have  a  test  case  and  estab- 
lish it  if  he  can,  or  if  he  cannot,  go  into 
some  honest  business  ?  There  are  now  under 
way  more  than  half  a  dozen  suits  in  one 
well-known  case.  Why  not  push  one  to  an 
issue.  We  hope  that  no  one  is  so  foolish  as 
to  be  influenced  by  the  fact  that  certain 
"  influential  and  prominent  photographers 
are  being  sued"  by  certain  patentees. 
Nothing  but  an  absolute  and  final  decree  of 
the  courts  should  satisfy  any  one  of  the 
validity  of  a  patent  which  is  of  a  dubious 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


343 


character.  We  Unow  that  many  staid  away 
from  the  Chicago  Convention  from  fear  of 
being  sued.  An  evil  exists  somewhere.  Let 
it  be  rooted  out. 

Opposition  is  being  made  in  behalf  of  the 
photographers  to  the  application  for  an  ex- 
tension of  a  well-known  but  never  estab- 
lished patent,  with  good  hopes  of  success. 
More  soon. 


Dear  Sphykx  :  I  desire  to  answer  one 
or  two  of  your  September  riddles. 

Nitrate  of  copper  may  be  eliminated 
from  a  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver,  by 
boiling  the  solution  down  to  a  small  quan- 
tity or  nearly  dry,  and  adding,  while  hot 
or  boiling,  oxide  of  silver,  obtained  by 
means  of  caustic  potash.  Dissolve  a  piece 
of  the  potash  in  water,  and  add  slowly  to  it 
a  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver  until  no  more 
dark-brown  precipitate  is  formed ;  wash 
the  precipitate  until  the  water  passes  off 
quite  clear,  and  you  have  an  excellent  alka- 
line oxide  of  silver,  a  very  good  article  to 
keep  on  hand. 

Add  of  this  oxide  to  the  boiling  bath  (as 
before  stated),  a  little  at  a  time,  until  you 
think  all  the  copper  has  been  oxidized, 
then  take  a  small  portion  of  the  bath  and 
reduce  with  distilled  water,  and  filter  ;  add 
to  the  filtered  solution  a  drop  of  ammonia, 
when,  if  the  solution  shows  no  trace  of  blue 
(copper),  the  whole  bath  is  free,  and  may 
be  brought  to  the  required  strength  with 
distilled  water  and  filtered,  and  acidified  if 
necessary  with  nitric  acid,  and  it  is  ready 
for  use.  But  if  a  trace  of  blue  oxide  of 
copper  be  apparent  in  the  test,  more  of  the 
oxide  of  silver  must  be  added  to  the  boiling 
solution  until  the  test  shows  no  copper. 


This  brown  oxide  of  silver  is  the  best 
substance  I  have  ever  tried  with  which  to 
neutralize  both,  negative  and  positive  baths. 
An  excess  does  no  harm. 

I  think  "Thomas"  has  been  victimized 
in  the  quality  of  the  ether  or  alcohol  used 
in  his  collodion,  or  perhaps  a  drachm  more 
of  alcohol  to  the  ounce  of  collodion  would 
cure  his  streaks.  If  the  plates  were  at 
fault,  the  streaks  could  not  follow  the  di- 
rection of  the  dip  always.  If  he  will  take 
his  bath  out  of  the  holder  and  set  it  where 
he  can  observe  the  action  of  the  bath  at  the 
moment  of  dipping  he  will  discover  some- 
thing— an  interesting,  but  by  no  means  a 
pleasing,  experiment.  He  will  probably  see 
that  the  current  of  the  solution  over  the 
plate  is  not  even  and  smooth,  owing  to 
some  repulsive  force,  as  continued  rapid 
volatilization  of  the  solvents,  or  the  pres- 
ence of  volatile  oil  in  the  solvents.  I  have 
had  the  "  bull  by  the  horns  "  in  times  past. 
I  have  found  that  more  alcohol  in  the  col- 
lodion, and  time  for  the  film  to  set  well, 
with  slow,  steady  dipping,  a  remedy,  but 
good  chemicals  to  be  the  cure. 

I  should  advise  "  Thomas  "  to  throw  his 
nitric  acid  away,  and  use  instead  a  nearly 
saturated  solution  of  bichromate  of  potash, 
containing  a  half  pound  by  weight  of  good 
sulphuric  acid  to  the  gallon. 

F.  M.  Spencer. 

P.  S. — I  dry  my  paper  over  an  oil  lamp, 
allowing  it  to  hang  first  until  it  begins  to 
curl  up. 

I  do  so,  1st.  Because  it  will  never  dry 
thoroughly  spontaneously  in  a  moist  atmos- 
phere. 

2d.  To  keep  the  silver  from  penetrating 
into  the  paper  too  far,  or  journeying  to  the 
wrong  side  of  it. 

3d.  I  have  found  that  the  print  is  made 
where  the  silver  stops,  and  I  like  my  prints 
on  the  surface. 

4th.  It  keeps  white  much  longer. 

5th.  I  finish  drying  by  artificial  means, 
so  as  not  to  be  all  day  about  it. 

6th.  The  prints  tone  better  and  quicker. 
F.  M.  S. 

Will  Sphynx  be  kind  enough  to  tell  me 
how  to  avoid  the  contraction  or  converg- 


344 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


ing,  in  taking  architectural  views  from  the 
ground,  when  the  instrument  is  pointed 
upwards,  the  corners  not  coming  perpen- 
dicular but  drawn  in  at  the  top ;  when  a 
front  view  is  taken,  both  corners  converg- 
ing. I  have  a  4  x  4  Globe  lens  and  4x4 
Steinheil ;  both  have  the  same  effect.  Will 
a  swing  front  and  back  rectify  it  ? — having 
never  tried  one,  I  don't  know, — or  will  a 
longer  focus  instrument  remedy  it  ?  If 
some  one  will  give  the  desired  information 
he  will  greatly  oblige, 

Inquirer. 

Dear  Sphynx  :  Your  answer  to  "  H."  is 
good,  but  probably  not  what  he  wanted. 
Give  him  the  following  for  polishing  pho- 
tographs. I  have  used  it  for  years,  and 
would  be  still  but  for  the  Burnisher,  which 
has  superseded  it. 

Shave  1  ounce  of  white  wax  and  put  into 
a  bottle ;  then  add  1  ounce  of  ether,  which 
will  soften  the  wax.  After  which,  add  6 
ounces  of  alcohol  and  two  ounces  of  any  good 
negative  varnish.  Shake  thoroughly.  Ap- 
ply to  the  mounted  photograph  with  a  piece 
of  Canton  flannel,  and  rub  briskly.  Any 
desired  gloss  can  be  given  by  repeating  the 
application. 

B.  F.  Hall. 

M.  H.  M.,  Sphynx,  September,  1874, 
says  :  "  There  is  no  way  of  getting  rid  of 
the  copper."  Suppose  the  next  one  in 
trouble  tries  the  following  plan.  Before 
boiling  down  make  the  silver  solution  acid 
with  nitric  acid  C.  P.  Then  fuse,  and  stir 
the  molten  silver  with  a  glass  rod ;  it  will 
become  black.  Continue  the  process  for 
about  fifteen  minutes;  when  cold  the  silver 
will  be  black,  and  when  dissolved  the  solu- 
tion will  be  black  as  ink,  but  will  filter  clear 
and  limpid.  The  continued  exposure  by 
stirring  the  fused  mass,  brings  the  hot  cop- 
per in  contact  with  the  atmosphere  which 
renders  it  insoluble.  I  am  not  a  chemist, 
so  cannot  say  what  change  takes  place,  but 
a  chemist  informs  me  that  the  copper  is 
oxidized,  and  when  the  fused  mass  is  re- 
dissolved  falls  to  the  bottom  in  a  black  in- 
soluble powder.  A  bath  so  treated  appears 
to  get  rid  of  the  copper,  but  whether  it  does 
or  not,  it  makes  clean  negatives. 


OUR  PICTURE. 

The  interesting  little  picture  illustrative 
of  the  class  of  "stirring  subjects,"  which 
present  themselves  to  the  photographer,  and 
which  graces  our  current  number,  was  one  of 
the  competitors  for  our  prize  medal,  offered- 
last  summer.  The  negatives  were  made  by 
Mr.  G.  M.  Elton,  Palmyra,  N.  Y.  Although 
it  did  not  take  the  medal,  we  considered  it 
worthy  of  being  used  as  one  of  our  em- 
bellishments. Those  who  remember  Mr. 
Elton's  work  at  the  Buffalo  Exhibition  will 
agree  that  he  has  made  rapid  improvement, 
and  some  pictures  we  received  from  him  but 
the  day  before  this  writing,  are  also  far  ahead 
of  this.  Mr.  Elton  is  undoubtedly  a  rising 
artist.  The  tremendous  quantity  of  pictures 
needed  for  our  use,  makes  the  time  of  printing 
so  long,  that  by  the  time  a  man's  picture 
appears,  he  is  almost  ashamed  to  own  it, 
for  if  he  be  a  progressive  man,  he  will 
have  made  such  improvements  during  the 
printing  as  to  make  it  hardly  fair  to  show 
our  picture  as  an  example  of  his  then  best 
work.  Mr.  Elton  is  one  of  this  sort  of  men. 
He  preferred  to  print  the  pictures  for  our 
use,  and  has  done  them  handsomely.  He 
has  sent  us  his  formula,  which  we  append. 
Please  notice  particularly  the  quality  of  the 
Albion  paper  on  which  the  prints  were 
made.  Mr.  Elton  says:  "I  give  you  my 
formula  for  making 

Collodion. 

Ether  and  Alcohol,      ....     equal  parts. 

Cotton 4  to  5  grains  to  ounce. 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  .     .     4       "  " 

Bromide  of  Cadmium, .      .     1£     " 
Bromide  of  Potassium,      .     1       '•'  " 

Iodide  of  Lithium,        .     .     2       il  " 

Silver  bath,  40  grains  strong  and  acid. 

Developer. 
Water,        .         .         .         .16  ounces. 
Iron,  ....       1  ounce. 

Acid,  .         .         .         .       1       " 

"  I  used  the  Albion  Albumenizing  Com- 
pany's paper,  and  like  it  very  much.  I  am 
working  a  north  light  very  similar  to  Mr. 
Barhydt's,  with  top  and  side  screens." 

Dr.  Vogel's  Handbook  of  Photography, 
second  edition,  is  ready.  Price  $3.50,  by 
post. 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


345 


OBITUARY. 

Scarcely  was  the  ink  dry  .after  last  month 
writing  a  notice  of  the  death  of  our  old  friend 
Gage,  when  the  startling  news  came  to  us  of 
the  death  of  Mr.  Jacob  Barhydt,  of  Roches- 
ter,  N.  Y  •  on  the  evening  of  the  30th  of  Sep- 
tember, in  the  52d  year  of  his  age.  It  was  in- 
deed a  sad  announcement,  and  one  that  stirs 
the  deepest  emotions  of  regret  wherever  he 
was  known.  From  the  Eochester  papers  we 
have  affectionate  tributes  to  his  memory, 
showing  how  much  he  was  beloved  and  re- 
spected among  those  who  knew  him  best. 
But  it  is  not  only  upon  his  own  family,  his 
relatives,  his  townspeople,  that  this  bereave- 
ment falls  heavily;  we  of  the  photographic 
fraternity  have  suffered  a  heavy  loss,  and 
the  guiding  influence,  the  high  attainments, 
and  the  brilliant  example  of  his  professional 
life  will  be  sadly  missed  by  all  who  are 
striving  for  the  goal  of  excellence,  to  which 
he  so  brilliantly  led  the  way. 

"  Alas,  alas,  for  the  fading  of  light 

From  eyes  whose  glances  were  loving  and  bright ; 

For  the  heart  that  throbbed  ever  an  answering 

tone 
To  the  truth,  and  the  trust,  and  the  love  of  our 

own ! ' ' 

Like  a  meteor  he  flashed  upon  the  photo- 
graphic sky  at  the  Convention  in  Buffalo 
last  year,  and  startled  all  with  the  magnifi- 
cent productions  of  his  art.  At  Chicago  he 
was  even  still  further  in  advance,  and  in 
the  judgment  of  many  outrivalled  all  com- 
petition. 

Our  personal  relations  with  Mr.  Barhydt 
were  of  the  pleasantest  and  most  cordial 
nature ;  and  when  we  had  such  a  happy  in- 
terview with  him  in  Chicago  last  summer, 
we  felt  proud  that  we  had  such  a  man  that 
was  willing  to  use  his  influence  and  ex- 
ample for  the  education  and  encouragement 
ofothers,  little  thinking  his  light  was  so 
soon  to  go  out.  But  he  has  left  a  name  that  is 
"  more  precious  than  silver  or  gold,"  and  a 
legacy  to  the  photographers  of  this  country 
in  the  beautiful  examples  of  his  work  that 
will  serve  as  a  guide  to  all  who  are  aiming 
for  improvement  for  years  to  come.  His 
memory  will  long  be  cherished  by  all  who 
have  heard  of  his  fame,  and  wish  to  be 
guided  by  his  example. 


A    CARD    FROM    PRESIDENT    RUL0FS0N,    OF 
THE    N.    P.    A. 

San  Francisco,  October  15th,  1874. 
Edward  L.  Wilson, 

Secretary  N.  P.  A. 

It  is  with  feelings  of  the  most  profound 
sorrow  I  learn  of  the  death  of  Jacob  Bar- 
hydt, so  suddenly  called  from  the  bosom  of 
his  family  and  his  field  of  usefulness,  as  an 
ornament  to  our  profession,  and  a  most  suc- 
cessful co-worker  in  the  foremost  rank  of  the 
Association,  to  join  that  great  army  in  the 
country  whence  no  traveller  returns.  I 
must  say  I  feel  that  we  have  sustained  a 
great  loss. 

I  addressed  a  few  lines  of  condolence  to 
the  bereaved  family,  and  would  be  pleased 
to  see  my  name  appended  to  appropriate 
resolutions  expressing  our  esteem  for  the 
deceased,  and  our  sympathy  for  his  family. 
Very  respectfully, 

Wm   H.  Rulofson, 

President  N.  P.  A. 

We  have  to  record  another  loss  to  our 
art  in  the  death  of  the  son  of  our  good 
friend,  Mr.  I.  B.  Webster,  of  Louisville, 
Kentucky.  We  extract  from  his  letter  as 
follows : 

"  It  is  with  grief  that  I  am  again  under 
the  painful  necessity  of  informing  you  of 
another  affliction  which  has  visited  my 
household,  it  being  the  death  of  my  eldest 
son,  Eugene,  aged  twenty-four  years.  He 
came  to  his  death  by  drowning  while  cross- 
ing the  Ohio  River  in  a  skiff,  in  company 
with  two  companions,  on  the  evening  of 
October  10th.  The  body  was  found  about 
forty  hours  afterward,  in  the  immediate 
vicinity,  which  I  immediately  recovered, 
having  taken  the  first  steamer  down.  The 
accident  occurred  one  hundred  miles  below 
here,  four  miles  this  side  of  Cloverport, 
Kentucky. 

"  He  was  a  promising  young  man,  and 
possessed  many  noble  and  virtuous  quali- 
ties. He  was  a  leading  member  of  his 
Sunday-school,  Bible-class,  the  church,  and 
the  choir. 

"  I.  B.  Webster." 

It  was  but  a  few  months  ago  that  Mr. 
Webster  lost  his  wife,  and  this  doubled 
affliction  will  excite  the  sympathy  of  his 
many  friends,  and  they  are  many. 


346 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


Filterings  from  the  Fraternity. 

As  our  filtrations  seemed  to  be  a  success 
last  month,  we  devote  a  good  share  of  our 
present  number  to  some  more  of  the  same 
sort,  to  the  exclusion  of  still  many  more 
chapters  of  the  same  kind  in  hand,  and  other 
valuable  articles,  saying  nothing  of  the 
"pages  of  testimonials"  sent  us  respecting 
the  "  value  "  of  sundry  cottons,  collodions, 
lenses,  etc.,  etc.  We  cannot  "  follow  "  in 
such  things.  Haven't  room.  Must  stick  to 
the  "practical." 

Mr.  J.  Pitcher  Spooner,  Stockton, 
California,  contributes  the  following  good 
hints  : 

Blister  Cure. 

"  A  short  time  since,  while  suffering  from 
blistering — that  excellent,  gentlemanl}', 
photographic  artist  (yes,  he  is  all  three), 
John  A.  Todd,  of  Sacramento,  California, 
dropped  in  to  interview  us,  and  in  his  off- 
hand way  says,  '  Kun  a  little  water  into 
your  hypo  just  before  you  take  your  prints 
out,  wait  till  it's  thoroughly  mixed  with 
the  hypo,  then  add  a  little  more,  and  repeat 
three  or  four  times ;  by  that  time  the  hypo 
will  have  become  the  same  temperature  as 
the  water  the  prints  are  to  wash  in.'  It's 
a  sure  cure  ;  safe  and  expeditious. 

Enlargement  Formulae. 

"  When  your  neighbor  cuts  under  the 
price,  and  in  proportion  issues  an  inferior 
qualit\'  of  work,  and  boldly  says  to  your 
face  he  is  getting  '  first-rate  prices,'  then  is 
the  time  to  enlarge  (your  business),  and  by 
making  extra-finished  work,  and  showing 
it  to  the  appreciative  public.  Enlarge  by 
remembering  to  help  the  exhibitions  at 
fairs;  enlarge  by  employing  the  best  of 
help,  and  best  of  artists ;  by  keeping  posted 
in  matters  photographic,  and  of  the  Na- 
tional Photographic  Association,  and,  by 
judiciously  appealing  to  the  artistic  tastes 
of  your  patrons  through  the  public  press, 
your  business  must  enlarge." 

Mr.  J.  W.  Morgeneier,  of  Sheboygan, 
Wisconsin,  gives  something  useful  to  those 
who  are  troubled  with  tear-drops. 

Difficulty  in  Silvering  the  Paper. 
"  In  our  leading   photographic  journals 
the  complaint  has  often  been  made,  that  by 


silvering  the  paper  the  same  sometimes 
dries  in  'tears'  or  'drops,'  through  which 
it  becomes  useless.  This  stubborn '  evil, 
which  probably  meets  many  a  photogra- 
pher, has  been  tried  to  be  remedied  by  dif- 
ferent formula?.  I  take  the  permission  to 
communicate  the  particular  cause  on  this 
point  I  have  made  by  my  own  experience. 
The  only  reason  for  the  above  appearance 
is,  without  exception,  to  be  found  in  too  hard 
and  dry  a  surface  of  the  albumen.  I  have 
discovered  such  by  all  the  different  papers 
in  the  market.  I  observed  that  this  trouble 
made  its  appearance  in  many  galleries  of 
certain  districts  at  the  same  time,  therefore 
proving  that  the  silver  bath  is  not  the  cause 
of  the  above-named  trouble,  for,  one  may 
have  a  new  bath,  another  an  old  bath  made 
different,  in  some  parts  a  damp  atmosphere, 
while  in  others  a  warm  and  dry.  A  certain 
quantity  of  paper  so  prepared  and  distrib- 
uted by  the  dealer  amongst  his  customers 
confirms  this.  The  different  communica- 
tions to  me  from  brother  photographers,  at 
various  times,  proves  beyond  a  doubt  that 
my  statement  is  nearest  correct. 

"  My  remedy  is  :  Immerse  the  paper  for 
two  seconds  in  absolute  alcohol,  hang  up 
and  dry,  then  put  it  in  a  portfolio  to 
straighten,  and  it  is  ready  for  silvering. 
This  simple  and  economical  process  makes 
the  paper  work  brilliant,  and  gives  perfect 
satisfaction." 

Ketouching  and  Lighting. 

Mr.  D.  H.  Spencer,  of  Hudson,  Mich- 
igan, gives  some  valuable  suggestions  on 
retouching  and  lighting. 

"The  following  suggestions  on  the  sub- 
ject of  retouching  negatives  may  benefit 
those  of  limited  experience  in  that  branch. 

"  I  suppose  there  is  much  sameness  in  the 
mode  of  doing  this  branch  of  business. 
But  I  have  introduced  a  help  in  this  depart- 
ment which  I  think  is  little  used,  if  used  at 
all.  I  refer  to  the  use  of  a  hand  (magnify- 
ing) glass,  four  inches  in  diameter.  I  find 
this  article  so  indispensable  that  I  keep  two 
in  my  establishment,  and,  while  I  admit 
that  many  others  do  fine  pencilling  without 
the  glass,  I  do  know  that  it  is  a  great  help  to 
me,  and  that  I  can  do  the  work  twice  as 
well  as  I  could  without  it.  I  sometimes 
'  grind '   the   surface   to   be   pencilled,  but 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


347 


often  do  not.  When  much  is  to  be  done  to 
the  face,  as  in  case  of  freckles  and  blotches, 
I  should  grind;  and  when  little  is  to  be 
done  I  should  not  grind.  The  best  sub- 
stance to  use  in  grinding  the  face  of  a  neg- 
ative I  believe  to  be  powdered  rosin.  I 
have  tried  other  materials  for  that  purpose, 
and  have  spoiled  several  negatives  in  the 
*  effort  to  make  something  else  work,  but  the 
rosin  never  plays  me  tricks.  I  shall  not 
advocate  a  grade  of  pencil  in  opposition  to 
the  usual  custom  of  the  craft  further  than 
to  say  I  have  not  been  successful  with  the 
harder  grades.  I  seldom  use  a  pencil 
harder  than  HB,  and  never  beyond  H, 
while  I  often  use  B.  T  would  also  add  my 
testimony  to  the  value  of  the  little  head- 
screen  most  have  heard  of,  but  by  many  un- 
tried. If  your  light  ever  gives  you  ugly 
shadows  around  the  eyes,  under  chin  and 
nose,  try  the  head-screen  ;  it  will  do  wonders 
for  you." 

Gentile's  Chicago  Process. 

Mr.  C.  G-entile,  of  Chicago,  communi- 
cates his  negative  process,  as  follows  : 

"  I  find  that  the  best  results  are  obtained 
by  being  particular  in  manipulation,  and 
using  every  care  in  mixing  the  different 
chemicals.  I  use  a  nitrate  bath,  about  85 
grains,  varied  a  little  occasionally  to  the 
temperature  and  collodion  used  and  light. 
Collodion  I  make  myself. 

Ether  and  Alcohol,  equal  parts,    60  ounces. 

Iodide  of  Cadmium,  .         .   240  grains. 

Bromide  of  Cadmium,        .         .   120       " 

Iodide  of  Potassium,         .         .   120       " 

Gun  cotton,      ....  240       " 
Developer. 

Pure  Sulphate  of  Iron,        .         .     4  ounces. 

Water,  about      .         .         .         .   60      •' 

"  No  redeveloper  is  required.  Fix  in 
hypo. 

"  I  find  by  sticking  to  the  above,  with  my 
bath  in  good  order,  always  good  results  can 
be  obtained." 

Mr.  H.  J.  Bodgers,  of  Hartford,  Conn., 
gives  a  process  for  instantaneous  pictures, 
or  for  very  short  exposure  at  least. 

Short  Exposure. 
"  Many  devices  have  been  conceived  of  to 
shorten  and  make  more  agreeable  the  time 


which  has  been  necessary  to  produce  a  good 
negative.  I  have  tried  a  few  of  these  and 
cannot  feel  satisfied  that  they  are  practical. 
It  has  seemed  to  me  that  if  the  time  of  ex- 
posing the  plate  is  reduced,  it  must  be  ac- 
complished in  a  great  measure  through 
chemical  agency.  I  have  not  looked  upon 
a  strong  developer  as  having  any  tendency 
to  arrive  at  the  object  desired  ;  because  if 
we  have  an  excess  of  iron,  there  must  be  a 
corresponding  restraining  effect. 

"  This  appears  in  my  mind  like  two  power- 
ful locomotives  hitched  together  by  the  ten- 
ders and  headed  in  opposite  directions.  A 
short  time  since  I  tried  an  experiment  as  fol- 
lows, and  the  result  has  been  instantaneous 
for  baby  pictures,  while  the  time  necessary 
for  an  adult  was  reduced  three-quarters,  and 
in  some  instances  far  more. 

"  Prepare  albumen  for  negatives  as  fol- 
lows : 

Water,        .         .         .         .32  ounces. 

White  of  1  egg. 

Iodide  of  Potassium,  .         .     32  grains. 

Bromide  of  Potassium,       .16       " 

"Filter,  of  course,  before  albumenizing 

the  glass,  as  usual. 

Develops. 

Water,        .         .         .         .16  ounces. 

Iron,  %  ounce. 

Acetic  Acid,  .  .  .  1£  ounces. 
"Collodion  and  bath  as  usual,  except  do 
not  let  the  collodionized  plate  get  too  dry 
before  immersion.  It  will  be  observed  that 
the  negatives  will  be  unusually  soft  and 
fine,  and  free  from  pinholes,  stains,  etc. 

"  P.  S. — Since  experimenting  with  the 
above  I  have  saved  my  developer  which 
has  been  used,  by  developing  over  a  large 
flat  dish,  and  to  16  ounces  I  added  J  ounce 
of  fresh  protosulphate  of  iron,  and  the  re- 
sult is  even  more  pleasing,  the  film  being 
finer  and  softer  in  effect.  For  a  negative 
of  a  girl  of  fair  complexion,  eleven  years 
of  age,  the  time  was  reduced  to  one  second  ; 
and  for  an  adult,  three  seconds.  This  de- 
veloper adds  fifty  per  cent,  to  the  fineness 
and  beauty  of  a  ferrotype." 

Drying  and  Fuming. 

From  Messrs.  Wilt  Brothers,  Frank- 
lin, Pennsylvania,  we  have  a  suggestion  for 
drying  and  fuming  paper. 


348 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


"  A  good  drying  and  fuming  box  may  be 
made  as  follows : 

"Take  a  common  dry-goods  box,  about 
three  feet  long  and  twelve  by  twenty  inches 
deep  and  wide,  size  not  particular;  make  a 
door  of  the  top,  and  paper  inside  and  out- 
side ;  set  on  end  in  a  dry  room.  When  the 
paper  is  silvered  it  should  be  hung  up  to 
drip,  silver  side  out,  and,  to  prevent  curling, 
fasten  two  corners  together  by  means  of 
pieces  of  cardboard,  one  and  one-fourth 
inch  long  by  half  an  inch  wide,  and  cut 
one-third  their  length  like  a  pen.  Put  this 
split  card  on  the  two  corners,  which  will 
hold  them  in  position  ;  attach  also  a  small 
piece  of  filtering  or  tissue  paper  to  the 
lower  corner,  to  carry  off  the  drop.  Across 
the  top  of  the  drying-box  stretch  two  wires 
equidistant  from  the  front,  back,  and  each 
other  ;  on  these  wires  spring  clothes-pins 
should  be  placed  so  as  to  move  easily  wher- 
ever wanted.  Eight  inches  from  the  bottom 
a  piece  of  wire-cloth  should  be  stretched 
the  full  size  of  the  box  When  the  paper 
has  ceased  dripping,  place  two  pieces  back 
to  back,  fasten  two  or  three  corners,  accord- 
ing to  the  size,  with  the  cardboard  already 
described,  and  suspend  by  the  clothes-pins 
on  the  wires.  If  large,  suspend  by  two 
pins  ;  if  small,  one  is  enough.  Heat  is 
produced  by  an  alcohol  lamp  under  the 
wire-cloth,  which  diffuses  the  heat  uni- 
formly. Dry  in  ten  minutes ;  when  dry, 
remove  the  lamp  and  in  its  place  put  the 
ammonia  for  fuming.  When  fumed,  open- 
ing and  shutting  the  door  violently  will 
expel  the  excess  of  ammonia,  and  the  paper 
may  remain  in  the  box  until  wanted.  Pa- 
per rapidly  dried  in  the  dark  gives  more 
brilliant  prints,  and  is  more  sensitive. 
Paper  kept  long  in  a  very  dry  room  has 
the  peculiar  property  of  not  printing  until 
some  hours  after  silvering  ;  the  same  paper 
hung  in  a  damp  room  over  night,  and  sil- 
vered as  usual,  will  print  all  right.  Paper 
prints  most  brilliant  when  just  dry  enough 
not  to  stick  to  the  negative  ;  if  very  dry,  it 
prints  harsh,  and  will  not  take  a  pleasant 
tone.  Too  dry  paper  gives  prints  lacking 
detail  in  the  shadows  and  softness  in  the 
high-lights, — dead-looking  prints  (but  good 
enough  for  $2  a  dozen)." 


From  the  Bulletin  Beige  we  extract  the 
following  formula  for 

Liquid  Glue, 
Used  for  sticking  glass,  porcelain,  etc., 
and  for  making  paper  adhere  to  a  metallic 
surface.  It  is  composed  of  a  concentrated 
solution  of  gum  arabic  (2  parts  of  gum  for 
5  of  water),  to  which  is  added  sulphate  of 
alumina.  For  250  grammes  (8  ounces)  of 
the  solution  of  gum,  it  suffices  to  add  2 
grammes  (31  grains)  of  crystallized  alumina, 
which  is  mixed  with  the  gum,  having  been 
previously  dissolved  in  20grammes  (-§  ounce) 
of  water. 

From  Mr.  H.  C.  Wilt  of  Franklin,  Pa., 
we  have  the  following 

Useful  Hints. 

"The  heat  of  the  back  of  the  hand,  or 
body,  when  flowing  a  plate,  applied  to  the 
back  of  the  plate,  ofttimes  prevents  the 
plate  from  chilling  in  cold  or  damp  dark- 
rooms or  tents. 

"  Breathing  upon  the  weak  side  or  part 
of  the  plate  or  negative  when  developing  or 
holding  the  plate  or  negative  over  the  warm 
hand  or  heated  substances  will,  almost  as 
well  as  warming  the  developer,  improve 
development  on  the  weak  parts,  or  allow 
of  shorter  exposures.  I  always  found  a 
warm  negative  bath  and  a  cool  collodion  to 
work  quick. 

How  I  Photographed  the  Moon. 

"I  placed  my  camera  upon  a  window- 
sill  moonwards,  and  focussed,  using  a  me- 
dium size  diaphragm.  While  exposing,  I 
stood  directly  behind  the  camera,  and,  aim- 
ing over  the  centre  at  the  moon  as  it  trav- 
elled, moved  the  camera  box  as  close  as  I 
could  in  the  direction  of  the  moon,  ex- 
posed three  seconds,  and  developed. 

"  To  my  surprise  I  had  a  negative  of  the 
moon  which  printed  very  fair  and  distinct. 
Of  course  a  little  practice  in  moving  the 
camera  previous  to  exposing  would  be 
practicable,  somewhat  like  shooting  on  the 
wing." 

Hints  from  Providence. 
Mr.   G.   M.   Carlisle,    of   Providence, 
K.  I.,  most  generously  gives  us  his  whole 
formulas.     Here  we  have  the  photographic 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


349 


process  in  a  nutshell,  together  with  some 
useful  hints  that  all  may  profit  by.    Hesays: 
"  I  fear  the  readers  of  the  Philadelphia 
Photographer    will    find    hut   little   in    my 
mode  of  working  that  is  new  or  novel.     I 
have  tried  a  silver  bath  of  varied  strength, 
and  find   that   30  grains   of  silver  to  the 
ounce  of  water  gives  me  &  finer  negative 
than  a  stronger  or  weaker  solution  will.     I 
use  ordinary  river-water,  and  after  iodizing 
my  30-grain  solution  with  1  grain  iodide  of 
potassium  to  the  ounce,  I  place  it  in  the  sun 
for  a  day,  filter  clear,  make  quite  acid,  say 
\  ounce  nitric  acid  to  a  gallon  of  solution. 
"  My  collodion  is  composed  of 
Ether,    .         .         .         .60    parts. 
Atwood's  Alcohol,  .40        " 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,    .     2£  grains  to  ounce. 
Iodide  of  Potassium,      .     1\         "  " 

Bromide  of  Ammonium,     \\         "  " 

Bromide  of  Cadmium,    .     \\         "  " 

Gun-cotton,   ...     7  "  " 

and  if  found  to  be  too  thick,  add  alcohol  to 
suit  your  work,  and  just  here  let  me  say 
that  I  have  used  for  some  time  '  Challenge 
Cotton,'  and  find  it  the  most  soluble  and 
uniform  I  have  ever  used,  in  fact,  a  better 
article  than  I  have  been  able  to  make  or 
buy.  My  developer  is  a  simple  15-grain 
sulphate  of  iron  solution,  very  acid,  say  4 
ounces  acetic  acid  to  a  quart,  and  I  develop 
my  negative  as  long  as  the  developer  will  con- 
tinue to  act;  seldom  find  it  necessary  to  re- 
develop, but  when  I  do  I  flow  over  three 
or  four  times  a  15-grain  silver  solution  and 
again  develop  very  little,  for  here  there  is 
danger  of  over-development.  I  have  never 
found  any  advantage  in  using  ammonio- 
sulphate  of  iron,  therefore  use  only  the 
pure  sulphate.  I  retouch  my  negatives 
very  sparingly,  in  fact,  as  little  as  possible. 
"  My  printing  bath  is  kept  from  45  to  50 
grains,  made  slightly  alkaline  with  liquor 
ammonia,  and  kept  filtered  and  as  free 
from  other  substances  as  possible,  believing 
that  a  pure  silver  solution,  without  any 
doctoring  whatever,  containing  neither 
alum,  glycerin,  nor  in  fact  anything  but 
pure  silver,  kept  alkaline  as  above,  will 
work  better  and  easier  than  anything  yet 
discovered. 

"  I  tone  with  a  citric  acid  and  gold  bath 
s  in  the  usual  manner,  and  fix  in  hyposul- 


phite 7  to  10  minutes,  fresh  hyposulphite 
of  soda  each  time. 

"While  I  would  not,  if  I  could,  deter 
any  person  from  experimenting,  I  believe 
a  simple  formula  as  above,  carefully  worked, 
much  better  than  skipping  from  one  pro- 
cess to  another  without  any  really  settled 
method.  I  think  the  progress  our  beautiful 
art  has  made  in  the  past  few  years  is  very 
much  more  due  to  careful  posing  and  light- 
ing than  to  any  advance  made  in  the  way 
of  chemical  dodges.  I  am  not  a  believer 
in  any  man's  success  lying  in  a  good  process 
obtained  from  a  successful  photographer. 
T  remember  when  a  Boston  firm  first  intro- 
duced retouched  negatives,  how  the  opera- 
tors of  that  city,  and  in  fact  from  other 
cities,   took  the   first  opportunity  to  visit 

Messrs.   and   with   compass  take  the 

exact  location  of  their  light,  its  angle,  how 
screened,  etc.,  etc.,  to  return  home  and  re- 
model their  own  lights,  thinking  thereby 
to  make  just  as  good  work  ;  and  at  a  new 
gallery  opened  in  another  city,  where  better 
work  was  done  than  had  been  previously 
produced  there,  blue  tarletane  was  tacked 
up  under  the  light  and  above  the  curtains. 
The  neighboring  photographers,  on  hearing 
of  the  blue  tarletane  dodge,  made  such  a  run 
on  dry-goods  stores  that  tarletane  advanced 
5  cents  per  yard,  and  yet  they  did  not  pro- 
duce a  superior  grade  of  work. 

"I  want  my  operators  to  be  capable  of 
using  a  light  of  any  angle,  at  any  point  of 
the  compass,  say  from  8  to  16  feet  high, 
and  with  good  instruments  (which  I  never 
fail  to  have),  and  work  the  old  simple  pro- 
cess, stripped  of  all  superfluities  in  the  way 
of  sugar-coated  developer  and  glycerin- 
greased  silver  baths,  and  produce  good, 
clean,  pure  work.  Dirt  in  any  form  is  the 
common  enemy  of  our  profession,  and  the 
best  formula  that  could  at  this  time  be  of- 
fered to  photographers  is  one  pertaining  to 
perfect  cleanliness.  Keep  your  platehold- 
ers  well  varnished  with  asphaltum  varnish, 
and  camera  box  itself  free  from  dust,  and 
one  great  object  will  have  been  attained. 
Frequently  change  your  samples  or  show 
at  the  door  ;  never  allow  soiled  or  dusty 
prints  to  remain  on  exhibition.  See  that 
your  entrance  and  stairs  are  kept  perfectly 
clean.      Let   your   reception-room  wear   a 


350 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


neat  and  cheerful  appearance,  and  put  any 
extra  furniture  you  may  have  in  the  opera- 
ting-room, for  there  it  is  more  needed  to 
give  variety  and  style  to  your  work.  Per- 
mit no  work  to  leave  the  gallery  that  you 
would  hesitate  to  acknowledge  at  any  time 
under  any  circumstances.  Practice  the 
golden  rule  in  3Tour  business  transactions, 
doing  unto  others  as  you  would  they  would 
do  unto  you  under  like  circumstances,  and 
your  success  is  sure." 

Some  very  good  hints  and  formula?  may 
be  found  in  the  following  gleanings  from 
the  Bulletin  Beige  de  la  Photographie. 

"Developer  with  Copper  of 
Mr.  Quiquerkz. 

Filtered  Water,  .  .  1000  grammes,  32  ounces. 
Sulphate  of  Iron,  .         25      "         386  grains. 

Sulphate  of  Copper,     .         10      "         154       " 

"  Dissolve  and  add, 

Alcohol,     ....     45  c.c,  12  drachms. 
Crystallizable  Acetic  Acid,       25  c.c,    7         " 
Liquid  Ammonia,       .         .       7  c.c,    2         " 

"  Agitate,  allow  it  to  rest  for  a  night,  and 
filter. 

"  This  bath  will  keep  for  along  time  and 
gives  very  fine  images,  and  of  a  density 
almost  always  sufficient  for  the  printing  of 
positives.  However,  each  operator  will 
choose  the  bath  with  which  he  has  the  most 
success." 

"Encaustic  Paste  of  Mr.  Sans. 

Pulverized  Gum  Arabic,  .     2  parts. 

Pulverized  Rock  Candy,  .      5     " 

Transparent      Glycerin    soap, 

well  scraped,         .  .  .  10     " 

Water,      q.s.  to    sufficiently    wet    the  soap 

and  dissolve  the  whole. 


"  Now  add : 
White  Wax,  scraped, .         .     10  parts. 

"  Heat  over  a  water-bath, stirring  contin- 
ually in  an  earthen  vessel  five  times  the  size 
of  the  contents.  Pour  into  a  pot.  When 
cold,  this  encaustic  should  have  the  consist- 
ency of  a  good  pomade." 

"  Dry  Collodion,  very  rapid,  of 
Mr.  Clavier  d'Alger. 

"  The  cleaned  glass  is  covered  with  a  pre- 
liminary coating  of  diluted  albumen  (the 
white  of  one  egg  in  one  litre  (quart)  of 
water),  then  after  drying,  is  collodionized 
with  the  following  collodion  : 

Alcohol  at  40°,        .     50  c.c,     14  drachms. 
Ether  at  62°,  .         .     70  c.c.     20         " 
Gun-cotton,     .         .       1   to       20  grammes, 

15  to  18  grains. 
Iodide  of  Cadmium,     0.30  grammes,     4|  grains. 
Iodide  of  Ammonium,  0.30       "  4£     " 

Bromide  of  Cadmium,  0.60       "  9       " 

Solution  No.  1,         .  2  c.c,  J  drachm. 

"This  solution  No.  1,  is  obtained  by 
dissolving  over  a  water-bath,  in  a  glass  re- 
tort, three  grammes  (46  grains)  of  yellow 
or  white  wax  in  80  cubic  centimetres  (8 
drachms)  of  alcohol  at  40°;  when  cold,  add 
again  30  cubic  centimetres  (8  drachms)  of 
alcohol,  agitate,  filter  through  paper,  after 
which  dissolve  in  the  liquid  3.75  grammes, 
(58  grains)  of  rosin. 

"  Sensitize  in  a  silver  bath  at  eight  per 
cent,  slightly  acid,  wash  with  care,  then 
cover  the  coating  with  a  solution  of  tannin 
at  one  per  cent.  Thus  prepared,  the  plates 
may  be  preserved  a  long  time  without 
losing  their  sensibility.  The  development 
is  the  same  as  in  all  dry  processes." 


"  Stereoscopic  Selections."  Published  by 
Kilburn  Brothers,  Littleton,  N.  H.— This  is  a 
small  catalogue  issued  by  the  Kilburn  Brothers, 
embracing  some  of  their  choicest  subjects  under 
the   following  heads  :   Groups  ;  Frost   and   Ice  ; 


Illustrations  of  the  Vision  of  Sir  Launfal,  twelve 
views;  Flowers;  Animals;  The  Sugar  Orchard  ; 
Fruit ;  Harvest ;  Sporting  ;  Yachting  ;  Shells 
and  Coral ;  Reminiscences  of  Washington,  and 
the  Declaration  of  Independence. 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOG  RAPHES. 


351 


W.  E.  Bowman,  of  Ottowa,  111.,  has  been  add- 
ing new  laurels  to  his  fame  by  photographing  the 
Methodist  Conference  at  Sterling,  111.  His  effort 
with  so  difficult  a  subject,  is  pronounced  "the 
best  of  his  professional  life,"  and  receives  much 
praise. 


Huntington  &  Bartram,  of  St.  Paul,  Minn., 
have  been  burned  out,  suffering  a  total  loss  of 
about  $8000.  But  we  are  glad  to  hear  their 
courage  is  good,  and  they  expect  to  soon  be  at 
work  again  in  a  new  gallery.  Here  is  another 
argument  in  favor  of  a  Mutual  Insurance  League. 


The  Intermediate  Camera  Holder  is  a  de- 
vice to  hold  and  direct  the  tube,  which  may  be 
placed  at  such  angle  as  is  desired  in  photograph- 
ing an  elevated  subject,  or  producing  any  effect 
that  is  usually  secured  by  a  swing-back.  It  is 
the  invention  of  Mr.  S.  A.  Holmes,  of  New  York, 
who  speaks  very  highly  of  its  merits. 


Fire!  Water!  Smoke! — Mr.  John  B.  dem- 
ons, of  this  city,  manufacturer  of  Clemons's  Al- 
bumen Paper,  has  recently  been  a  sufferer  ;  but 
though  in  the  midst  of  the  fire  he  was  not  even 
scorched,  but  badly  wetted  and  smoked.  It  was 
a  little. remarkable  that  there  should  have  been 
fire  all  around  him,  and  yet  it  did  not  penetrate 
his  establishment.  It  was  quite  an  /»gv°-,s-traordi- 
nary  case.  The  loss  of  life  in  this  c«£-astropby 
was  confined  to  a  faithful  tabby,  that  is  supposed 
to  have  expired  from  a  want  of  proper  propor- 
tions of  oxygen,  nitrogen,  carbonic  acid,  and 
other  gases  in  the  atmosphere.  Mr.  Clemons's 
loss  was  mostly  on  his  stock  of  albumen  paper, 
and  was  covered  by  insurance. 

The  above  fire  originated  in  the  sewing  machine 
apartments  of  Wheeler  &  Wilson,  and  directly 
under  the  skylight-room  of  Messrs.  Taylor  & 
Brown,  914  Chestnut  Street,  which  was  entirely 
burned  out.  They  were  fortunate,  however,  in 
having  skylights  in  the  front  of  their  establish- 
ment, so  that  they  suffer  no  interruption  of  busi- 
ness. 


Portraits  by  the  Woodbury  Process. — We 
have  received  some  very  excellent  portraits,  made 
by  the  Woodbury  Process,  from  Mr.  J.  Carbutt, 
Superintendent,  624  North  Twenty-fourth  Street, 
Philadelphia.  They  are  fully  equal  to  silver 
prints,  and  a  great  step  forward  in  mechanical 
printing. 


From  Bichmond,  Va. ,  we  notice  the  opening 
of  a  new  gallery  by  Mr.  D.  H.  Anderson.  It  is 
referred  to  in  a  local  paper  as  "  one  of  the  most 


elegant  in  the  South."     We  congratulate   Mr. 
Anderson,  and  wish  him  success. 


City  of  San  Diego,  California. — We  have 
on  our  table  a  pumphlet,  containing  information 
in  reference  to  the  climate,  mineral  resources, 
commerce,  etc.,  of  the  above  city,  together  with 
a  business  directory,  and  twenty-two  photo- 
graphic illustrations,  by  Messrs.  Parker  &  Par- 
ker and  C.  P.  Fessenden,  of  San  Diego. 


Pictures  Beceived. — Cabinets  :  From  G. 
M  Elton,  Palmyra,  N.  Y.,  some  finely  executed 
specimens,  showing  careful  and  judicious  man- 
agement in  lighting  and  composition. — Perry  & 
Bohm,  Denver,Col. ,  some  very  successful  work. — 
Limpert  &  North,  Columbus,  Ohio,  attractive  sam- 
ples of  vignettes  with  clouded  margin,  quite 
ethereal  and  effective. — G.W.Edmonson, a  variety 
of  styles  of  composition,  excelling  in  the  full  fig- 
ures.— Cards  from  John  Terras,  Markinch,  Scot- 
land, samples  not  retouched,  mostly  small  heads, 
well  executed. — Specimens  of  permanent  photo- 
graphic printing  by  the  Woodbury  process, 
American  Photo-Belief  Printing  Company,  John 
Carbutt,  Superintendent, — everything,  from  a 
skeleton  bouquet  to  a  steam  engine. — A.  F. 
Burnham,  cards  and  stereos. — Stereoscopic  pic- 
tures from  F.  G.  Weller,  Littleton,  N.  H. 
("  Stereo  Treasures  '')  ;  F.  B.  Clench,  Lockport, 
N.  Y.  ;  Finley  &  Son,  Canandaigua,  N.  Y.;  G. 
W.  Edmonson,  Plymouth.  Ohio. — Stereos  :  W.J. 
Topley,  Ottawa,  some  fine  views  of  winter  and 
other  scenery  in  and  around  the  Canadian  capital. 


We  have  received  from  our  old  friend  and 
correspondent,  Prof.  C.  Piazzi  Smith,  several 
pamphlets  relating  to  his  excellent  work  at  the 
great  Pyramid  and  his  controversies  with  the 
Boyal  Society,  together  with  a  descriptive  cata- 
logue of  his  photographs  of  that  great  structure, 
taken  in  1865,  and  before  noticed  by  us.  The 
pictures  are  for  sale  by  Mr.  J.  Pollitt,  Barlow's 
Court,  Market  Street,  Manchester,  England. 
They  are  of  the  interior  as  well  as  the  exterior, 
and  are  exceedingly  interesting. 


Books. — Betnember  that  Benerman  &  Wilson 
are  the  only  parties  in  the  whole  world  who 
make  it  their  regular  business  to  publish  photo- 
graphic books.  They  have  at  least  one  work  of 
instructions  on  every  department  of  the  art. 
Please  read  their  advertised  catalogue  and  make 
your  selections  early  for  the  long  winter  evenings. 
Also  read  our  "  Bed  Letter"  sheet,  giving  new 
ideas  to  our  subscribers. 


352 


THE     PHILADELPHIA   .PHOTOGRAPHER 


The  Photographers'  Friend,  which  has  been 
published  by  Mr.  R.  Walz],  of  Baltimore,  for  sev- 
eral years,  has  been  purchased  by  us,  and  will  be 
merged  in  this  magazine.  Mr.  Walzl  has  found, 
as  we  did  several  years  ago,  that  one  cannot 
well  conduct  a  stock  depot  and  do  his  duty  to  a 
magazino  too.  A  stockdealer  must  necessarily, 
on  account  of  interest,  be  biased  in  certain  direc- 
tions, which  fact  unfits  him  for  the  position  of  a 
journalist  such  as  a  journalist  should  be. 

We  shall  endeavor  to  make  those  readers  of  the 
Friend  who  do  not  already  take  this  magazine  to 
feel  that  if  they  come  over  to  us  they  will  never 
want  a  friend.  We  are  making  greater  prepara- 
tions for  usefulness  for  1875,  and  trust  that  we 
shall  not  only  have  the  Friend,  but  a  host  of  new 
friends. 


Postage  Free  for  1875. — The  new  postal  law 
compels  publishers  to  prepay  postage.  As  this 
burden  will  come  upon  us  without  any  corre- 
sponding return,  we  look  to  our  readers  to  be 
prompt  in  their  payments  in  advance,  and  to  se- 
cure us  all  the  new  subscribers  they  can. 


The  hearing  in  the  Wing-Tompkins  Suit 
has  been  postponed,  on  motion  of  the  plaintiffs, 
to  January  next.  This  is  not  to  be  regarded  as 
detrimental  to  or  as  prejudicing  the  result  in 
any  way.  Have  patience ;  Mr.  Tompkins  is 
doing  all  in  his  power,  and  at  this  writing  is  in 
Philadelphia  taking  new  and  valuable  testimony. 


Spicer's  Lustrene. — Frequenters  of  some  of 
our  offices  will  hardly  know  them  when  next 
they  come  in,  owing  to  the  gloss  and  glare  which 
has  been  caused  by  two  bottles  of  Spicer's  Lus- 
trene having  been  applied  to  things  generally. 
We  are  all  liable  to  grow  old  and  rusty-looking, 
but  Lustrene  will  polish  us  up.  Fear  not.  It 
has  a  charming  effect  upon  old  frames  and  furni- 
ture. Mr.  C.  A.  Wilson,  No.  7  North  Charles 
Street,  Baltimore,  is  agent  for  it,  and  we  pre- 
sume it  may  be  had  of  all  dealers. 


Hance's  Photographic  Specialties. — It  is 
always  a  pleasure  to  see  any  one's  business  grow, 
especially  if  it  is  one  which  benefits  others,  or 
provides  goods  for  their  benefit.  Such  is  the 
case  with  the  business  of  Mr.  Alfred  L.  Hance, 
of  this  city.  We  will  allow  him  to  tell  his  own 
story  by  extracting  from  one  of  his  letters.  It 
is  a  double  testimonial  ;  first,  to  the  quality  of 
his  goods,  and  second — ye  who  have  anything  to 
sell,  make  a  note  of  it — to  the  advantages  of  ad- 
vertising in  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. 
Mr.  Hance  says : 


"Totally  unknown  to  the  photographic  com- 
munity, less  than  three  years  ago  I  started  out 
in  an  humble  way  to  manufacture  reliable  cot- 
tons, collodions,  varnishes,  etc.  I  went  into 
the  business  not  without  fear  and  trembling. 
Not  being  known  by  the  fraternity,  I  knew  that 
I  had  a  ladder  to  climb  that  was  very  shaky  and 
unreliable.  Tricks  and  dodges  had  given  photo- 
graphic men  such  experience  that  they  handled 
the  new  busy  bee  with  masked  faces  and  doubtful 
thoughts,  but  thanks  to  your  excellent  journal, 
through  my  continued  advertisements,  I  have 
more  orders  than  J  can  fill  promptly  ■  Have  made 
the  acquaintance  of  almost  a  thousand  good, 
honest,  energetic  men  whom  I  have  never  seen 
(or  will  never  see),  except  through  the  medium 
of  Uncle  Sam  ;  receive  every  day  letters  from 
parties  I  cannot  visit,  and  who  cannot  visit  me. 
Well,  in  short,  please  continue  my  advertisement 
as  usual." 

The  Central  Magazine  is  the  title  given  to 
a  very  handsomely  gotten  up  periodical,  exclu- 
sively the  work  of  ladies.  It  is  the  only  maga- 
zine in  the  world  which  can  claim  such  a  distinc- 
tion. It  is  edited  by  Miss  Mary  Nolan  and  Mrs. 
Mary  Bowen,  at  1023  Washington  Av.,  St.  Louis. 
The  list  of  articles  is  very  choice,  but  the  most  in- 
teresting one  to  us  is  a  biography  of  that  celebrated 
photographer,  Mr.  John  A.  Scholten,  and  not 
only  that,  it  contains  a  remarkably  good  photo- 
graph of  him  as  its  embellishment,  together  with 
a  splendid  description  of  his  new  art  rooms.  Mr. 
Scholten's  enterprise  in  getting  the  favor  of  the 
ladies  is  sure  to  pay  him,  and  we  like  to  see  it. 

A  Step  Higher. — From  the  Yonkers,  N.  Y., 
Statesman  we  clip  the  following  : 

"The  gallant  and  generous-hearted  Ezekiel 
Y.  Bell  has  been  nominated  to  represent  the  first 
district  in  the  Assembly.  He  was  born  in  the 
district,  and  has  been  prominently  identified  with 
its  rise  and  progress.  Mr.  Bell  is  a  lawyer  in 
good  practice,  and  a  gentleman  by  instinct." 

This  is  a  step  forward  from  being  the  counsel 
of  the  National  Photographic  Association,  and 
we  congratulate  Yonkers  on  its  choice  of  such  a 
Bell-igerent  man  to  represent  them  in  their  State 
Assembly.     Elected?     Of  course  he  will  be. 


"Rejected." — This  is  the  name  given  to  his 
last  "Stereo  Treasure"  by  Mr.  F.  G.  Weller, 
which  represents  a  country  swain  standing  at 
the  door  of  his  "  Dulcinea "  in  a  perplexed 
mood,  etc. 


ADVERTISING  KATES  FOR  SPECIALTIES.— It  will  be  understood  that  matter  under 
this  head  is  not  to  be  considered  as  always  having  editoiial  sanction,  though  we  shall  endeavor  to  clear  it  of 
anything  tending  to  deceive  or  mislead.  Stock-dealers  will  find  this  a  beneficial  mode  of  advertising,  and 
sure  to  pay  largely.  Six  lines,  one  insertion,  $2.00,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a 
line — iq  advance.  Operators  desiring  situations,  no  charge.  Matter  must  be  received  by  the  23d  to  secure 
insertion.  Advertisers  will  please  not  ask  us  for  recommendations.  jfiSj-We  cannot  undertake  to  mail 
answers  to  parties  who  advertise.    Please  always  add  your  address  to  the  advertisement. 


Fob  Sale.— $3000  cash  will  buy  one  of  the 
finest  and  best  paying  galleries  in  the  State  of 
New  York.  Everything  is  new  and  of  the  best 
quality.  North,  top  and  side  light.  Fine  counter 
and  show  cases,  furniture  and  carpets  of  the  best. 
Seven  large  rooms.  Chemical  and  print  rooms 
lead  from  operating-room.  Coal  in  for  the  winter 
and  plenty  of  good  stock  on  hand.  Population 
20,000.  The  gallery  is  the  finest  in  the  city. 
Rent  of  rooms  $350,  including  living  rooms. 
Call  or  address  Singhi, 

Binghampton,  N.  Y. 


Try  Hermagis'  Lenses. 

Used  by  M.  Adam  Salomon, 

Paris.    See  Advertisement. 


The  Practical  Printer. — It  is  very  gratify- 
ing to  find  this  work  so  generally  appreciated. 
The  following,  from  a  letter  written  us  by  Mr. 
J.  H.  Hallenbeck,  of  Boston,  an  old  photogra- 
pher, expresses  the  sentiments  of  many  we  re- 
ceive letters  from  : 

"The  Practical  Printer  is  bound  to  sell,  for  it 
is  a  most  valuable  work,  and  should  have  a  per- 
manent place  in  every  printing  room  in  the 
country.  I  notice  the  oldest  printers  seem 
greatly  interested  in  its  contents.  Benj.  French 
k  Co.  have  a  good  supply,  and  have  sold  many 
copies." 

Here  is  another  from  parties  whose  favorable 
opinion  is  never  given  to  anything  that  has  not 
merit : 

Philadelphia,  Sept.  12,  1874. 

"  Through  the  kindness  of  John  R.  Clemons, 
we  have  had  the  pleasure  of  reading  the  Practi- 
cal Printer,  and,  as  far  as  our  experience  goes, 
think  it  the  best  work  ever  published  on  the  sub- 
ject. We  shall  take  especial  pains  to  recom- 
mend to  all  with  whom  we  come  in  contact. 

"Draper  &  Husted." 


For  Sale. — My  patents  on  Photo.  Tent  and 
Trunk,  at  a  great  sacrifice.  Hoping  to  save  my 
life,  my  home,  and  my  family  from  great  suffer- 
ing induces  me  to  make  this  effort,  as  I  am  now 
imprisoned  and  forced  to  suffering  and  want. 
Address,  with  stamp,  for  a  circular, 

I.  Fletch  Woodward, 
27  N.  Front  St.,  Nashville,  Tenn. 


Wanted. — August  number  of  the  Philadelphia 
Photographer,  for  1874.      We  will  pay  seventy- 
five  cents  per  copy,  in  our  publications  or  cash. 
Benerman  &  Wilson. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

For  Sale. — At  a  bargain,  my  photograph 
gallery  j  doing  business  of  $20,000  a  year; 
strictly  first-class  work.  Prices,  cards,  $6.00; 
cabinets,  $10.00  per  dozen.  Building  is  mine, 
two  story  brick  ;  lease  on  ground  seven  years. 
Would  prefer  to  sell  the  whole  ;  would  not  object 
to  sell  one-half  interest  to  right  kind  of  a  man. 
Terms,  cash  ;  or  good  negotiable  paper. 

C.  D.  Mosher,  951  Wabash  Avenue. 


The  Robinson  Trimmer. — The  wheel  and 
shank  of  this  little  instrument  are  the  parts  that 
carelessness  first  breaks,  and  as  we  frequently 
have  applications  for  these  parts  we  have  ar- 
ranged to  supply  them.  The  price  of  the  wheel 
alone,  is  $1  00  ;  the  wheel  and  shank,  $1.25. 
Every  one  who  uses  the  trimmer  should  have 
extra  ones  of  these  in  reserve. 

Benerman  &  Wilson. 


Please  read  the  two- page 
advertisements  of  Charles  A. 
Wilson,  Baltimore  Stock- 
house,  No.  7  North  Charles 
Street.  Please  remember  the 
number,  7  North  Charles  St., 
Baltimore,  Md. 


For  Sale,  cheap,  if  applied  for  soon.  Busi- 
ness chance  in  one  of  the  best  arranged  galleries 
in  Delaware.  Population  of  town  3000.  No 
competition.     With  or  without  instruments. 

Address  P.O.  Box  208,  Smyrna,  Del. 

For  Sale. — A  well  known  and  paying  gallery 
in  the  City  of  Philadelphia,  in  a  firsi-elass  loca- 
tion and  good  chance  to  increase  business.  For 
terms,  etc.,  address  A.  C.  D., 

Care  Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.,  822  Arch  St. 


Truly  Interesting  to  every  progressive  pho- 
tographer is  Nason's  advertisement  of  new  Nov 
elties  on  another  page. 


USE  WAYMOUTfl'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


Old  Bricks  and  bags  of  short  and  sand  do  not 
enter  into  the  manufacture  of  the  Nason  Univer- 
sal Light  Modifier.     See  advertisements. 


For  Sale. — The  leading  gallery  in  Chester, 
Pa.  The  gallery  has  been  established  more  than 
five  years,  and  the  busniess  has  been  all  the  time 
improving,  as  the  city  is  growing  rapidly  in  popu- 
lation and  wealth.  It  is  a  rare  chance  for  a  good 
operator  who  would  commence  business  on  a 
small  capital.  It  will  bear  investigation.  Price 
$600.     For  particulars,  address 

Wi.  Snell,  Chester,  Pa. 


To  Rent.  —  One  of  the  best  galleries  in 
Northern  Indiana.  All  on  ground  floor.  For 
particulars,  address  W.  L.  Hoff, 

Lagrange,  Indiana. 


Lea's  Manual  of  Photog- 
raphy, $3.75.  See  Advertise- 
ment.   Third  Thousand. 


For  Sale  or  Exchange. — One  No.  7  Voigt. 
lander  Tube,  and  14  x  17  Anthony  Success  Box 
and  Plate  Holders,  nearly  new,  used  but  a  short 
time.  Will  sell  cheap  or  exchange  tube  for  a  No. 
7  Voigtlander,  13  inch  focus.     Address 

Henry  Doerr, 
353  West  Market,  Louisville,  Ky. 


For  Sale. — The  finest  fitted  up  galley  in  the 
South,  outside  of  the  large  cities.  In  the  county 
seat  of  one  of  the  wealthiest  counties  in  the  state. 
Population  4000.  No  other  gallery  of  any  con- 
sequence in  the  county.  Facilities  for  making 
all  styles  and  sizes  of  pictures.  Gallery  newly 
fitted  up  last  winter  and  new  building.  Business 
established  ten  years.  Good  reasons  given  for 
selling.     Address  G.  W.  Jones, 

Lock  Box  19,  Shelbyville,  Tenn. 


WAYiOOTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 

"  I  am  using  and  like  them  very  much 
thus  far."— A.  MARSHALL,  Boston. 

"A  sensible  improvement." — GEO.  S. 
COOK,  Charleston,  S.  C. 


Old  Apparatus  for  Sale. — We  would  call 
the  attention  of  photographers  to  the  advantages 
of  advertising  in  this  department  anything  they 
may  have  to  sell,  in  the  way  of  superfluous  in- 
struments or  apparatus.  The  cash  in  your  hand 
is  much  better  than  dead  stock  in  your  gallery. 
There  are  always  those  who  want  such  things, 
but  do  not  care  to  pay  the  price  of  new  goods, 
and  they  naturally  refer  to  this  department.  Sell 
off  your  old  stock,  we  will  help  you. 

Benerman  &  Wilson. 

USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


Wanted.— Will  take  a  good  8x10  D.  S.  B 
view  box  in  payment  for  a  25-inch  Washer  In 
writing  give  full  description  of  box. 

L.  V.  Moulton,  Cedar  Rapids,  Mich. 

Chicago,  October  19,  1874. 
Mr.  Moulton. 

Dear  Sir  :  The  Washer  is  splendid !  Could 
not  do  without  it.  It  washes  the  prints  better 
in  fifteen  minutes  than  by  the  old  tank  process 
in  all  night.  Wishing  you  every  success,  we  re- 
main, Very  truly, 

E.  L.  Brand  &  Co. 


VOIGTLAMR  &  SON  LENSES. 

Ryder's  Art  Gallery,  239  Superior  St., 
Cleveland,  Ohio,  Dee.  18,  1872. 

Benj.  French  &  Co. 

Dear  Sirs: — Twenty-four  years  ago  I 
bought  and  commenced  using  my  first 
Voigtlander  Lens.  It  was  a  good  one. 
Since  then  I  have  owned  and  used  a 
good  many  of  the  same  brand,  of  various 
sizes.     They  were  all  and  always  good. 

Some  of  the  larger  sizes  that  I  have 
recently  bought  seem  to  me  better  than 
any  I  have  ever  had  or  seen  before. 
Yours,  truly, 

J.  F.  RYDER. 

For  Sale. — I  will  sell  for  one-fourth  cash  and 
balance  on  time,  my  gallery  located  on  the  best 
part  of  Fulton  Street,  Brooklyn.  Newly  fitted 
up  and  furnished  ;  everything  first-class;  rooms 
handsome  and  rent  very  low.  Address,  with  real 
name,  X.  Y.,  office  Phila.  Photographer. 


For  Sale. — An  established  gallery,  favorably 
situated  in  Trenton,  N.  J.  Good  light  and  in- 
struments.    For  particulars,  address 

A.  W.  R., 
Cor.  Broad  and  Market  Sts.,  Trenton,  N.  J. 


For  Sale. — I  now  offer  for  sale  my  fine  Photo- 
graphic Studio  in  this  city.  Population  120,000, 
location  the  very  best.  All  on  ground  floor  ; 
operating  room  24  x  40,  with  large  top  and  side 
light,  furnished  with  the  best  instruments  and 
boxes,  etc.  Plenty  of  room  in  every  department, 
and  every  facility  for  making  the  best  work. 
Now  doing  a  good  business.  For  reasons  that 
will  be  satisfactorily  explained  (to  those  who 
mean  business),  I  will  sell  this  gallery  at  one- 
half  its  value.  This  is  a  fine  opening  for  one 
who  wants  a  first-class  gallery  in  the  best  city 
for  business  in  the  United  States.  Please  call 
upon  or  address  W.  C.  Eaton, 

709  Broad  Street,  Newark,  N.  J. 

VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


We  are  well  acquainted  with  W.  C.  Eaton  and 
his  gallery,  and  would  advise  those  of  our  friends 
who  may  want  a  good  place  to  investigate.  It 
is  no  second  rate  affair.     Yours, 

C.  J.  McCarty,  with  Scovill  Mfg.  Co. 


See  advertisement  of   Rapid 
Photo-Washer. 


For  Sale  at  Half  Price. — One  of  E.  L. 
Brand  &  Co.'s  largest  Cameo  Presses  (the  one  on 
exhibition  at  Chicago),  will  be  sold  at  half  its 
cost.     Address  E.  Gutekonst, 

712  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


Criswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Composition  Pictures,  by  Messrs.  Robin- 
son &  Cherrill,  For  Sale. — The  beautiful 
composition  and  combination  pictures  exhibited 
at  the  Chicago  N.  P.  A.,  executed  by  Messrs. 
Robinson  &  Cherrill,  and  for  which  the  Foreign 
Medal  was  awarded,  are  for  sale  at  the  following 
rates  :  Passing  Stranger,  $5  ;  The  Gleaner,  $5  ; 
Study  from  Nature,  $5  :  The  Gypsy,  $5 ;  Lady 
Reading,  $5  ;  Little  Girl,  $5.  Only  one  copy 
each.  Specially  fine  prints.  On  exhibition  and 
for  sale  at  the  office  of  Benerman  &  Wilson, 
Philadelphia. 


Wanted. — Agents  to  travel  through  the  seve 
ral  states.  None  need  apply  except  practical 
photographers,  and  those  acquainted  with  the 
use  of  the  solar  camera.     Apply  to 

H.  L.  Emmons,  Baltimore,  Md. 


Try  Hermagis'  Lenses. 

Used  by  M.  Adam  Salomon, 

Paris.    See  Advertisement. 


ST.  PAlilTMlffU, 


SITUATIONS    WANTED. 

( No  charge  for  advertisements  under  tJns  head  : 

limited  to  four  lines.     Inserted  once  only, 

unless  by  request.) 

&B*  We  cannot  have  letters  directed  to  our  care 
unless  the  parties  send  for  them,  and  seijd  -damps  to 
pay  postage.  We  r-annot  undertake  to  mail  them; 
please  do  not  requee t  it. 

By  an  experienced  dark-room  man.  Is  willing 
to  do  anything.  Good  reference.  Address  G. 
M.  H.,  842  Wharton  St.,  Philadelphia. 

By  an  operator  of  eight  years  experience,  in 
a  good  gallery,  for  the  winter.  Address  A.  C. 
Hoskins,  132  Genesee  St.,  Utica,  N.  Y. 

By  a  first-class  operator,  retoucher,  printer, 
and  toner.  Address  M.  M.  Ormsby,  care  of  L. 
S.  White,  173  East  Washington  St.,  Indianapo- 
lis, Ind. 

As  printer  or  assistant  operator.  Eight  years' 
experience.  H.  M.  Judd,  Box  511,  Northamp- 
ton, Mass. 

By  a  young  man  as  assistant  operator  or 
printer.  Can  retouch.  Four  years'  experience. 
Best  of  reference.  Address  Wisthe  Forrester, 
care  of  Box  816,  Monmouth,  Ills. 

By  a  young  man  as  printer  and  toner,  in  a 
first-class  gallery.  Can  do  some  retouching. 
Address  Dan  Drenkel,  Jr.,  Box  81,  Oneida,  Ills. 

As  operator  and  retoucher.  Address  W.  B. 
Anderson,  59th  St.  and  Baltimore  Ave.,  West 
Philadelphia. 

As  assistant  printer  and  toner,  in  a  first-class 
gallery.  Address  Box  242,  Skaneateles,  Onon- 
daga County,  N.  Y. 

As  operator  or  retoucher,  in  some  first-class 
gallery.  Address  A.  K.  Semple,  101  Oneida 
St.,  Utiea,  N.  Y. 

By  a  first-rate  negative  retoucher,  moderate 
salary.  Address  N.  A.  R.,  Cherry  Valley,  New 
York. 

By  a  capable  and  thoroughly  practical  re- 
touching and  coloring  artist.  Address  A.  W. 
Sonpher,  Pittsburg,  Pa. 

With  a  -'copying  company,''  by  a  rapid 
worker  in  crayon,  oil.  water  colors,  and  India 
ink.     Address  L.  E.  Mansfield,  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

As  operator  or  assistant.  Would  have  no  ob- 
jection to  going  to  the  country.  Address 
Thomas  A.  Foster,  Anocortin,  Va. 

Can 
Ad- 


By  a  good  portrait  and  landscape  printer, 
operate,  and  understands  dark-room  work, 
dress  H.  C,  Cherry  Valley,  N.  Y. 


"  By  a  first-class  retoucher  and  inker,  from  Chi- 
cago, a  room  to  work  in  a  good  gallery,  in  any 
town  of  from  two  thousand  to  eight  thousand 
inhabitants.  Address  Retoucher,  P.  0.  Box 
255,  Angola,  Ind. 

As  negative  retoucher.  Country  galiery  pre- 
ferred. Address  J.  T.  W.,  care  Newman,  Ar- 
tist, 740  Sansom  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

By  a  lady  who  thoroughly  understands  the 
charge  of  the  reception-room,  can  finish  nega- 
tives ;  has  no  objections  to  leaving  Boston.  Ad- 
dress Miss  N.  Holbrook.  Y.  L.  Christian  Asso- 
ciation, Warrenton,  Street,  Boston,  Mass. 


USE  WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


In  a  first-class  gallery,  as  negative  retoucher 
or  colorist,  by  a  competent  lady  artist.  Address 
Miss  H.  H.,  School  of  Design,  Cooper  Institute, 
New  York. 

In  the  skylight  or  dark-room.  Am  compe- 
tent to  take  entire  charge.  Address  F.  Waller, 
care  E.  Anthony  &  Co.,  591  Broadway,  N.  Y. 

By  a  first-class  operator  and  retoucher.  Will 
work  for  small  salary  if  steady  employment  can 
be  given.  Address  Photographic  Operator,  P. 
0.  Box  18,  Randolph,  N.  Y. 

By  an  experienced  photographer,  that  can 
operate,  retouch,  print,  tone,  and  work  in  India 
ink.  Address  P.  H.  Lamping,  P.  0.  Box  645, 
Lincoln,  Ills. 

A  strictly  first-class  German  operator,  fif- 
teen years  in  the  business,  and  just  returned 
from  Germany.  Address  Mr.  Fred.  Gluecko- 
hardt,  in  care  of  Mr.  Kurtz,  141  Suffolk  St., 
New  York  City. 

As  a  general  assistant  operator,  retoucher, 
printer,  and  toner.  Address  Orlando  H.  Peck, 
Box  7743  Richmond,  Ind. 

By  a  lady,  a  situation  as  a  good  negative  re- 
toucher. Address  E.  L.  B.,  Holtsville,  P.  0., 
Suffolk  Co.,  Long  Island,  N.  Y. 

By  a  young  lady,  experienced  in  finishing 
photographs  in  India  ink,  water  colors,  and 
crayon;  on  plain,  albumen,  and  porcelain  sur- 
faces. First-class  reference  could  be  given. 
Address  A.  L.  M.,  care  G.  K.  Warren,  289 
Washington  St.,  Boston,  Mass. 

By  a  first-class  operator  and  negative  retouch- 
er. Terms  $80  per  month,  and  board.  Address 
"Operator,"  care  of  Box  255,  Angola,  Ind. 

As  operator.  Is  competent  to  take  charge  of 
any  gallery.      Address  Box  68  Corntrie,  Iowa. 

As  reception  lady,  by  a  lady  of  experience, 
will  make  herself  generally  useful  about  the  gal- 
lery. Steady  employment  principal  object. 
Address  I.  A.,  Box  896  Tiffin,  Ohio. 

By  a  first-class  artist  in  water  colors,  India 
ink,  crayon,  &o.     Address  Artist,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

By  one  that  has  many  years  experience  in  the 
business,  wishes  to  take  charge  of  a  gallery,  or 
a  place  as  an  operator.  Address  Harry  Sheldon, 
operator,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

By  a  photographer  who  understands  all  branches 
of  the  photographic  business,  including  the  mak- 
ing of  frames,  window  cornices,  etc.  Also,  by 
a  lady  who  can  retouch,  color,  spot-out  or  print, 
but  who  would  like  to  be  in  the  reception-room  ; 
having  had  two  years'  experience.  Address  G. 
V.  Fhigg,  Photographer,  Ovid,  Seneca  Co.,  N.Y. 


SOCIETY  CALENDAR. 

(Published  for  the  convenience  of  Visiting  Pho 
tographers  and  those  desiring  to  correspond.) 

4ST  This  Calendar  is  published  free  to  the  Socie- 
ties, and  we  shall  feel  obliged  for  notice  of  any  changes 
in  time  of  meeting  or  in  the  officers,  also  to  add  any 
we  have  overlooked. 

Buffalo  Photographic  Association. — At  Buffa- 
lo, the  first  Wednesday  evening  of  each  month. 
J.  Samo,  President;  Jennie  M.  Crockett,  Sec'y. 

Boston  Photographic  Association. — At  J.  W. 
Black's  studio,  the  first  Friday  of  each  month. 
E.  J.  Foss,  President;  C.  H.  Danforth,  Secre- 
tary, 27  Central  Square,  Cambridgeport. 

Photographic  Section  of  the.  American  Insti- 
tute, Netv  York. — At  the  Institute  rooms,  the 
first  Tuesday  of  each  month.  H.  J.  Newton, 
President ;  Oscar  G.  Mason,  Secretary,  Bellevue 
Hospital. 

German  Photographic  Society,  New  York. — 
At  Nos.  64  and  66  East  Fourth  Street,  New 
York,  every  Thursday  evening.  W.  Kurtz,  Presi- 
dent ;  Edward  Boettcher,  Corresponding  Secre- 
tary, 79  Newark  Avenue,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 

Brooklyn  Photographic  Art  Association, 
Brooklyn.  N-  Y. — Fourth  Tuesday  in  each  month, 
at  179  Montague  Street.  Rev.  Dr.  C.  H.  Hall, 
President;  Chas.  E.  Bolles,  Cor.  Secretary. 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadelphia. — First 
Wednesday,  Monthly,  at  520  Walnut  Street. 

Pennsylvania  Photographic  Association,  Phil- 
adelphia.— Third  Monday,  monthly,  at  the  gal- 
leries of  the  members.  R.  J.  Chute,  Secretary, 
offiice  "Philadelphia  Photographer." 

Chicago  Photographic  Association. — At  rooms 
of  C.  W.  Stevens,  158  State  Street,  first  Wednes- 
day evening  of  each  month.  G.  A.  Douglas, 
President ;  O.  F.  Weaver,  Secretary,  158  State 
Street. 

Maryland  Photographic  Association,  Balti- 
more.— At  rooms  of  C.  A.  Wilson,  7  North 
Charles  Street,  first  Thursday  in  each  month. 
N.  H.  Busey,  President ;  G.  0.  Brown,  Secretary, 
Baltimore,  Md. 

Photographic  Association  of  the  District  of 
Columbia,  Washington.  D.  C. — E.  J  Pullman, 
President ;  C.  M.  Bell,  Secretary,  459  Pennsyl- 
vaniaAve  , Washington.    First  Tuesday, monthly. 

Indiana  Photographic  Association. — At  Indi- 
an.-ipolis,  first  Wednesday  monthly.  J.  Perry 
Elliott,  President;  D.  0.  Adams,  Secretary,  In- 
dianapolis. 

Photographic  Association  of  Western  Illinois. — 
At  Galesburg,  first  Wednesday  of  October,  Janu- 
ary, April,  and  July.  J.  F.  Barker,  President  ; 
M.  M.  Graham,  Secretary,  Galesburg. 


GERMAN  ALBUMEN  COLORS! 


JULIUS    KRUGE  R'S 

fATEWT    0&i»2g3?T    0O1OSS, 

FOR  COLORING  PHOTOGRAPHS  ON  ALBUMEN  and  PLAIN  PAPER. 

These  colors  have  become  very  popular  in  Germany  and  France  (where  they  have  obtained  the 
highest  recommendations),  on  account  of  their  extraordinary  brilliancy,  evenness,  and  easy  application. 
They  can  be  used  on  Albumen  Paper,  and  are  without  doubt  the  best  that  have  been  offered  to  the 
public.     The  Colors  are  put  up  in  boxes  of  6,  12,  and  18. 

CEO.  RAU,  Sole  Agent, 

No.  922  Girard  Ave.,  Philadelphia. 


<J> 

•iH 
O 


■ 


o 


o 


d 

c3 

M 


H EARNS  COLLODIO-CHLORIDE, 

MANUFACTURED  BY  CHAS.    W.  IIEARN, 

Author  of  the  "  Practical  Printer," 

Is  a  most  excellent  Collodion  for  the  pur- 
pose of  producing,  with  ordinary  care,  the 
most  beautiful  "  PORCELAIN  PICTURES"    It 

is  prepared,  upon  an  entirely  NE  W  princi- 
ple, which  renders  it  a  MOST  VALUABLE  AID 

in  the  production  of  this  much  admired 
style  of  print.  Among  other  merits,  it  pos- 
sesses the  following,  viz.  : 

1.  It  has  most  excellent  heeping  qualities. 

2.  It  yields  a  very  brilliant,  strong  print, 
yet  one  possessing  the  most  velvety  softness 
throughout  the  high-lights  and  shadows, 
together  with  the  intermediate  half-tints. 

S.  The  most  beautiful  tones  are  attained 
with  the  greatest  facility. 

Full  directions  accompany  each  bottle. 

Every  bottle  warranted.  None  genuine 
unless  the  facsimile  of  the  manufacturer's 
name  is  printed  on  each  label. 

TAKE  NOTICE— Mr.  Hearn  having  ar- 
ranged with  Alfred  I.  Hance,  manufac- 
turer of  Hance's  celebrated  Photo grap hie 
Specialties,  to  conduct  the  sales  of  his  Col- 
lodio- Chloride,  dealers  and;  others  should 
direct  their  orders  for  it  to 

ALFRED  L.  HANCE, 

12 Jf  N.  7th  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


PRICE  LIST 

OF 

DIES. 

Card  Oval, $4  00 

Imperial  Oval,.... 8  00 

"         Arch  Top,..  8  00 

5x7  Oval 12  00 

5x7Double  El'ptc,  12  00 
8x10  "  "  18  00 
8x10  Oval, 18  00 


COPYING 
PRESS, 

Suitable  for  above  work, 
furnished  at  the  fol- 
low xng  prices  : 

9x12  bed, $6  00 

10x13     "     7  00 

10x16     "     10  00 

12x18     "     12  50 


© 

I 


©  * 

10    « 

•  - 


- 

© 

- 

- 
I 

H 

ft 

M 


^ 
^ 
q 


ari 

©a 

K 
■    3- 

- 

W 

- 

K 
M 

fa 
- 
3 


PATENT 

aJIIJEi 

DIES, 

For  EMBOSSING,  GLACE  and  other  Photographs. 
This  DIE  is  beyond  doubt  the  best  ever  offered  to  the 
trade;  having  many  advantages  over  all  others  in  the 
market.  The  FIRST,  and  great  advantage  is  (for  the 
Glace'si,  that  you  can  mount  and  emboss  at  the  same 
time,  thereby  saving  much  time,  both  in  making  and 
mounting;  by  this  process  you  have  a  solid  picture, 
and  one  which  will  keep  flat,  which  advantage  is  by 
no  means  to  be  lost  sight  of,  as  you  can  save  at  least 
50  per  cent,  in  stock  and  labor,  besides  making  a  per- 
fect picture.  SECOND.— This  IMe  is  so  constructed  as 
to  gauge  the  picture  without  injuring  the  same  ;  this 
you  will  find  to  be  of  great  importance.  THIRD.— The 
plate  is  made  of  metal,  and  nickel-plated,  insuring  at 
all  times  perfect  work,  while  those  made  of  wood  are 
sure  to  warp  and  injure  the  picture.  I  have  spent 
much  time  and  labor  in  perfecting  these  Dies,  not 
alone  for  the  Glace  Picture,  but  for  all  other  photo- 
graphs which  you  will  find  much  improved  by  em- 
bossing. 

REFERENCE  TO  THE  FOLLOWING    PARTIES,   WILL    SUFFICIENTLY   ATTEST 
THE  SUPERIORITY  OF  THESE  DIES  : 


W.  KURTZ,  New  York, 

B.  GURNEY, 

E.  W.  BOGARDUS,  New  York, 

A.  N.  HARDY,  Boston,  Mass., 


BROADBENT  &  PHILLIPS, 

Philadelphia,  Pa., 
J.  LANDY,  Cincinnati,  Ohio, 
J.  F.  RYDER,  Cleveland,    " 


AND  MANY  OTHERS. 


Direct  your  orders  to 


JOHN  BARNETT, 

585  BROADWAY,  N.  Y. 


h   2   H 


*  S 

ft        A 

9    § 

"■    5 
»    m 

9    g" 

9  2 

9 
2 


Mi      p, 

a 


*    2 
9    5 

<4     9 


2  *' 


m  9 

*  s. 

a  ? 

S  Si 

9  © 

f  B 


z  * 

9    9 

y   5v 

Si    9 

S  * 
v  a 
S  ° 

I" 

*    § 

2.  ? 

3     * 

«S     £ 

9 

s  • 
*  > 

a 


»   M 


9 

*  J.    . 

jo  S 

en  *    . 

e 

Si 

S  •     • 

Pj 

W  10     p. 

©  ©     01 


A 


MOW 


'^ERASt^' 


Since  exhibiting  the  above-named  stand  at  Chicago,  we  have  made  two  important  improvements, 
viz  :  The  addition  cf  12  round  rubber  rollers  to  the  interior  of  the  verticle  triangle,  which  does  away 
with  all  friction,  and  makes  the  movement  perfectly  noiseless.  Also,  an  entirely  new  mode  of  chang- 
ing the  angle  of  the  top  instantly,  and  leaving  the  same  in  a  perfectly  rigid  position. 

Our  wheels,  which  are  thirty  inches  in  circumference,  are  adjusted  in  a  manner  peculiarly  our 
own.  Each  stand  is  fitted  with  a  "swing"  drawer  for  diaphragms  and  other  paraphernalia.  And  last, 
and  the  most  important  of  all,  is  our  new  INSTANTANEOUS  NON-AGUE  BRAKE.  Everything 
about  it  is  A  No.  1 . 

The  "NON-AGUE"  is  the  only  Camera  Stand  in  America  that  combines  the  three  requisite 
points  which  are  absolutely  necessary  to  form  a  perfect  machine,  viz  :  FIR.MNESS,  COMPACT- 
NESS, and  RAPIDITY  of  movement.     ONLY  $30.00. 


DECIDEDLY  THE  BOSS. 


OVER  800  IN  USE ! 


THE  NASON 


UNIVERSAL  LIGHT  MODIFIER, 

Upon  its  presentation  to  the  trade,  instantly  monopo- 
lized popular  favor.  And,  why  not,  when  it  so  far  excels 
every  other  invention  for  a  like  purpose  '.' 

Just  as  sure  as  the  sun  will  shine,  just  so  sure  will  the 
N.  U.  L.  M.  supersede  all  the  cumbersome  "  hand  screens  " 
"  head  screens  "  and  "  foot  screens  "  in  the  market;  for 
it  is  exactly  what  its  name  indicates,  viz:  UNIVERSAL 
LIGHT  MODIFIER.  Universal  in  movement,  universal 
in  adaptation,  and  at  which  the  universal  host  sent  up  "  a 
shout  in  praise." 

It  is  the  first  and  only  modifier  or  screen  which  takes  up 
no  room;  it  being  attached  directly  either  to  our  back- 
ground carriage,  or  any  back-ground  in  the  studio,  and 
may  be  changed  from  one  to  another  without  a  moment's 
delay.  There  are  no  bags  of  sand  or  old  ekicks  flopping 
around  the  N.  U.  L.  M.,  it  being  constructed  on  purely 
mechanical  principles;  weighs  less  than  three  pounds, 
and  costs  only  $6.50. 


THE  NASON 

Back- Ground  Carriage 

Is  so  well  known,  that  it  needs  no  special  notice  here. 
We  would  only  call  your  attention  to  the  NEW  FORM 
now  being  made,  which  is  a  combination  of  the  popular 
Back -Ground  Carriage  and  the  Universal  Light  Modifier ; 
an  invention  which  every  progressive  photographer  most 
certainly  needs,  and  both  of  which  costs  only  $12.00. 


FOURTEEN  IN  ONE. 

We  hardly  think  there  can  be  found  in  the  whole  world, 
another  piece  of  furniture  of  like  cost,  which  will  afford 
the  photographer  more  profit,  and  his  patrons  as  much 
keal  pleasure  and  satisfaction,  as  will  one  of  our  beauti- 
ful MAGIC  MIRRORS.  Tour  lady  patrons  are  simply 
fascinated  with  this  extremely  charmiDg  adjunct  to  the 
Toilet-Room,  and  how  could  it  be  otherwise,  when  by  its 
use  they  are  given  such  a  perfect  FRONT,  BACK,  "and 
SIDE  view  of  the  FULL  FIGURE.  We  manufacture 
several  styles.  The  one  most  used  by  photographers, 
costs  $25.00. 


IF 


SUCH  A  THING  CAN  BE  POSSIBLE,  THE 

NASONIAN   CUT-OUT'S 

Are  still  gaining  in  popularity.     The  demand  has  kept  steadily  ahead  of  the   supply.     We  shall  soon 
be  ready  to  fill  orders  for  the  large  sizes. 

Present  prices  are  :  Case  No.  1,  $2.00  ;  Case  No.  2,  $2.50  ;   Case  No.  3,  $3.00. 

Will  send  the  three  Cases,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  $7.00.      For  particulars  read  July,  August,  Sep- 
tember, and  October  "Philadelphia  Photographer,"  and  address  all  orders  to  the 

NASON  NOVELTY  COMPANY, 

COLUMBUS,  OHIO. 


WILSON,   HOOD    &    CO.,    PHILADELPHIA,   PA. 


WE  HAVE  BEEN  APPOINTED 


AGENTS  FOB,  THE  SALE  OF  MESSRS.  E.  L.  BRAND  &  CO.'S 

Patent  Improved  Presses, 


EOR    MOULDING   THE 


SOUVENIR  PHOTOGRAPHS, 

Which  they  wilt  furnish  at  following  pieces,  including  instructions  : 

No.  1— Card  and  Cabinet  size,  or  two  Cabinet  No.  2— Card  Cabinet  and  &/2  x  8% $50  00 

dies, $25  00       I        "    3— Card  Cabinet,  8  x  10, 10  x  13,  13  x  16, 100  00 

WE    KEEP    IN    STOCK 

Extra  Fine  French  Gelatine,  $1.25  per  pound, 
Bevel  Edge  Card  Mounts,  $7  per  100, 

Bevel  Edge  Cabinet  Mounts,  $12  per  100. 
Card  Glace  Boxes,  $8  per  100, 

Cabinet  Glace  Boxes,  $12  per  100, 

Fure  Gum,  25  cents  per  ounce. 

WE   HAVE   ALSO   IN  STOCK 

FRAMES,  MATS,  AND  PASSEPARTOUTS,  FOE  THE  "SOUVENIR," 
AND  "GLACE"  PORTRAITS." 


Shall  hereafter  keep  in  stock  NASOVS  BACKGROUND  CARRIAGE,  price,  each,  $5.00.  NASON'S  BACK- 
GROUND CARRIAGES  (Sky  Shade),  price,  each,  $12.00.  NASON'S  CAMERA  STAND,  price,  each,  $30.00. 
NASON'S  CUT-OUTS  (three  sizes),  per  case,  $2.50.    NASON'S  REFLECTING  MIRROR,  price,  each,  $25  00. 

REYNOLD'S  LIQUID  WATER  COLORS,  put  up  in  boxes  containing  12  colors.  Price,  per  box,  $1.20.;  per 
bottle,  15  cents.    They  are  unsurpassed  for  brilliancy,  durability,  etc.,  and  we  advise  their  purchase. 


for 


ENTREKIN'S  OSCILLATING  ENAMELER 


the  styles  and  prices. 


Each  Press  is  supplied  with  Gas  Burner  or  Alcohol  Lamp  (as  the  purchaser  prefers),  a  sheet  of  Crocus  Cloth  for 
polishing  the  Burnisher,  and  one  cake  of  soap  for  making  lubricator.  Size,  6  inch,  $25  ;  10  inch,  $10  ;  14  inch, 
$50  ;  18  inch,  $75. 


Orders  solicited. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


G0¥I4C 


MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

Nos.  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 

WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN 


BEAInEBM  MWPPMEM 

On  the  Most  Advantageous  Terms,  with 

EVERY  ARTICLE  IN  THE  WORLD 

Used  or  sold  in  the  Art  of  Photography. 


Our  facilities  are  such  that  we  cannot  be  superseded  by  any 
other  house.    We  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to  deal  with  us. 


ASK  YOUR  DEALER  FOR  SCOVILL'S  GOODS. 


Removed  to  New  Store,  419  &  421  Broome  St. 

•rtomi;5::~*  "photographic  times." 


*    * 


NEARLY  AXjXs   CrOM3E! 


EDITED  BY  EDWARD  L.  WILSON. 


This  favorite  annual  is  -wholly  filled  with  Articles  prepared  expressly  for  it  by  the 
eminent  photographers  of  Europe  and  America,  and  is  Unusually  Good. 

Price,  in  Cloth,  $1.00 ;  in  Paper  Cover,  50  Cents. 


The  Best  Little  HaMioot  of  PMoiranliy  in  tie  World.       For  Sale  ly  all  Dealers. 


BEJSTEBMAW  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


POWERS     &     WEI^HTMAN, 


P-. 


ta 


tra 


MANUFACTURING  CHEMISTS, 


Offer  to  Stockdealers 
A  full  Assortment  of  Reliable 


Photographic  Chemicals 


Of  their  own  Manufacture, 
including : 


Nitrate  of  Silver,  Sulphuric  Ether  (concentrated),  Ammonia  (concentrated), 
Bromide  of  Potassium,  Acetic  Acid,  Chemically  Pure  Acids, 
Iron  and  Ammonia  Proto-Sulphate,  Chloride  of  Gold, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  Sulphate  of  Iron,  Cyanide  of  Potassium, 
Chloroform,  Tannin,  Sulphuret  of  Potassium. 


CHARLES  BIERSTABT 

Photographer 


VIENNA  MEDAL  OP  MERIT. 


NIAGARA  FALLS, 
New  York. 


An  Extensive  Assortment  of 
Views  of 


SILVER  MEDAL. 


Niagara  Falls, 
Hudson  Kiver, 
Saratoga, 
Portage,  N.  T., 
Watkins'  Glen, 
Havana  Glen, 


Washington, 

California, 

Yosernite  Valley, 

Egypt, 

Palestine, 

Africa, 


MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS. 


LIESEGANG'S  ALBUMEN  PAPER 

Is  used  and  recommended  by  the  London  Stereoscopic  Company  ;  Messrs.  Alessandri  Fratelli, 
of  Eome  ;  Le  Lieure,  of  Rome  ;  A.  Sorgato,  of  Venice  ;  Fr.  Bruckmann,  of  Munich ;  C.  Reut- 
linger,  of  Paris ;  C.  Bergamasio,  of  Petersburg ;  Abdullah,  of  Constantinople ;  and  many 
other  first  class  photographers  throughout  the  World. 

IT  IS  THE  BEST  PAPER  IN  THE  MARKET. 
Sample  sheets,  and  English,  French,  and  German  Price  List  to  be  had  free  on  application 
from  the  Manufacturer. 


DUSSELDORF    ON    THE    RHINE,   GERMANY, 

(FORMERLY  AT  ELBERFELD). 

For  Sale  by  SCOVILL  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  New  York. 


DNTZEW   SBEIES    BEIUG    PBEPAEED  I 
SEND  FOR  THE  FIRST  ONE,  NOW  READY. 

-a. 3nt ci :e ixr t    a.jsty2    iue  o  :d  :e  n.  3nt    b^tjsic." 

A  CAPITAL  THING. 

F.  G.  WELLER,  Publisher  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  Statuary,  etc.,  LITTLETON,  N.  H. 


JOHN  DEAN  &  CO., 
MANUFACTURERS, 

Worcester,  Mass., 

OFFEB  AT   WHOLESALE,   AT   LOWEST   PBICES,   THE 

dmtrcwta 


FERROTYPE 


ii 


BLACK  and  Patent  CHOCOLATE  TINTED, 
EGG-SHELL  and  GLOSSY. 

The  experience  and  extensive  facilities  of  John  Dean  &  Co.  enable  them 
to  produce  the  most  desirable  Ferrotype  Plates  in  the  market. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO., 

TRADE   AGENTS, 

591  BROADWAY,  NEW  YORK. 


? 


AND 


MAGIC  LANTERNS 


IN  GREAT  VARIETY. 


LANTERN  SLIDES, 


OP  ALL  PARTS 
op  the  WORLD. 


Send  for  our  new  Catalogue,  10  cents. 


LARGE  STOCK  JUST  RECEIVED  BY 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  InprterB,  Seventh  anfl  Cherry  Sts,  PMMa, 


TRY    IT    AND    BE    CONVINCED. 


The  best  COLLODION  in  use  is 

LEWIS  &  HOLT'S  POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE, 

Sold  with  a  Printed  Formula  accompanying  each  Bottle. 

Being  among  the  first  in  this  country  to  make  Collodion  Pictures,  they  can  warrant  it  to  be  one 

of  the  best  in  use. 

ALSO,  THEIR 

ADAMANTINE  VARNISH  for  AiaWpes,  Negatives,  anil  lelaiiotp. 

This  Varnish,  when  applied  to  Negatives,  dries  in  a  few  seconds  perfectly  hard,  and  does  not  lower  the 
intensity,  or  soften  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  in  Printing.  It  gives  a  beautiful  gloss  and  brilliancy  to 
Ambrotypes.    For  Sale  by  Stockdealers  generally.    Prepared  by  jj^  ^    LEWIS 

160  Chatham  Street,  New  York. 

HEADQUARTERS     FOR    THE    TRADE. 

Show  Displayers,  Velvet  Stands, 

Velvet  Passepartouts,         Velvet  Oases, 
Beveled  Matts,  Double  Matts, 

Fancy  Metal  Frames,  Standard  Matts, 

Fancy  Paper  Passepartouts. 

These  goods  are  entirely  of  our  own  manufacturing.  A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand  ;  odd 
sizes  and  styles  made  to  order. 

LEWIS  PATTBERG  &  BRO.,  709  (&T$)  Broadway,  New  York. 


Photographic  Card  Warehouse. 


A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 

MANUFACTURERS, 

No.  18  South  Sixth  St.  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 

PHILADELPHIA. 


EVERYTHING  APPERTAINING  TO  THE   LINE   OF  OUR 

MANUFACTURES  FURNISHED  WITH  CARE 

AND  PROMPTNESS. 


Our  long  experience  in  and  facilities  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods,  and 
familiarity  with  the  peculiar  wants  of  Photographers,  enable  us  to  offer  superior  induce- 
ments to  those  who  may  favor  us  with  their  orders. 


ENLAEGEMEN     X      O 

IDE  BY  THE  SOLAR  C&MERA, 

AND  COPYING  DONE,  FOR  THE  TRADE. 


18  SOLAR   CAMERAS. 


EXPEDITIOUS.  SeDd  %8ffir5Sffi*S:",",«   EXCELLENT 

ALBERT   MOORE, 

No.  828  Wood  Street,  Philadelphia. 


PDBLICA 

TIONS. 


In  order  to  meet  the  thirst  now  happily  growing  so  rapidly  among  photographers,  fV>r 
knowledge  bearing  upon 

ART  PRINCIPLES  APPLICABLE  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY, 

We  have  arranged  with  the  various  publishers  of  art  works  for  the  sale  of  such  as  we  think 
will  be  useful  to  photographers,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  copies  of  them  on  receipt  of  price, 
as  follows : 

ART  CULTURE.  A  Hand-book  of  Art  Technicalities  and  Criticism,  selected  from  the 
works  of  Johx  Ruskin.  An  admirable  work,  giving  most  useful  hints  on  composi- 
tion, posing,  lighting,  backgrounds,  tone,  color,  lines,  unity,  variety,  harmony.  &c,  &c. 
485  pages,  and  finely  illustrated.     Price,  $3.00. 

THE  STUDY  OF  ART.  A  manual  of  short  paragraphs,  numerically  arranged,  on  all 
the  leading  art  topics,  and  a  verv  instructive,  useful  book.  Br  M.  A.  Dwight.  278 
pages.     Price,  $2.00. 

jg@=ALL  ORDERS  FILLED  PROMPTLY. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON.  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


$ftm&* 


CS=3 


OCTOBER.    IE  SITS,  .A.  I 


NEW  ACCESSORIES.         NEW   BACKGROUNDS 


THE  ELEGANT 


KUBTZ  GAEDEN  BALUSTRADE, 

Pronounced  the  neatest  and  most  stylish  outdoor 
accessory  yet  seen. 

BOGABDUS  GAEDEN"  SEAT. 

Imitation  of  stone,  in  papier-mache. 

ANTIQUE  CAEVED  OHAIBS, 

Two  styles ;  one  of  which  can  be  used  as  a  stool,  by 
detaching  the  back. 

MOEA  BALUSTEADE, 

A  fine  article. 


KUBTZ  BOMPADOUE. 


BOGABDUS  GABDEN, 

No.  ':'. — Cabinet  style. 
"   68. — A  Standard  Interior. 
£i    71. — Mora  Interior. 


Twenty  exhibitors  at  the  Chicago  Contention 
were  using  our  Backgrounds. 

A  good   Backgbottxd  is  as  important  as 
good  chemicals. 


f^  SEND    STAMP    FOR    SAMPLE    PRINTS.=®S 

Address  LAFAYETTE  W.  SEAVEY,  Scenic  Artist. 


Xo.  8  Lafayette  Place,  New  York. 


GRISWOLD'S 


OSCOPIC  GROUPS, 


LIFE  COMPOSITIONS  FOE  THE  STEREOSCOPE, 

Are  Excellent  Studies  for  Photographers. 


EVERY  LOVER  OF  NATURE  BUYS  THEM. 

YOU  CAN  MAKE  A  GOOD  PROFIT  ON  THEM. 


The  following  subjects  are  now  ready,  handsomely  mounted. 


1.  Blowing  Bubbles. 

2.  B  stands  for  Bumble-B. 

3.  Blackberry  Blossoms. 

4.  The  Hen's  Nest. 

5.  Let  us  Have  Piece. 

6.  Mamma,  wbere  was  I  when  you  were 

a  little  girl  ? 

7.  Our  Domestic's  Kelations. 

8.  She  went  to  the  Butchers. 

9.  My  Lady  and  My  Lady's  Maid. 

10.  The  Mountain  Spring. 

11.  Unveiling  a  Statue  of  Young  America. 

12.  Young  America  in  the  Nursery. 

13.  Young  America  as  an  Artist. 

14.  Young  America  Asleep. 


15.  The  Sunbeam  Fairy. 

16.  The  Picture-Book. 

17.  Sitting  for  my  Picture. 

18.  Young  America  Bathing. 

19.  Young  Boston's  Ambition. 

20.  Ding-Dong-Ding,  Music  on  a  Kubber 

String. 

21.  Reflection. 

22.  The  Loiterers. 

23.  The  Cabin  Porch. 

24.  Beatrice  Shoo-Ply. 

25.  Home  Group. 

26.  A  View. 

27.  The  Gleaner. 


The  titles  hardly  give  an  idea  of  the  grotesque  humor  possessed  by  these  pictures.  They 
are  capital.  As  a  sample  dozen  we  should  recommend  Nos.  1,  2,  4,  5,  6,  11,  13,  16,  19, 
20,  22,  and  25. 


Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  p rice.    $2.00  per  dozen.     Order  by  number. 
DEALERS  SUPPLIED  ON  GOOD  TERMS. 


These  inimitable  pictures  are  all  natural  compositions,  and  touch  the  tender  chords  of 
human  nature  most  wonderfully.  They  are  attractive  to  every  one  who  has  a  heart,  but 
particularly  instructive  as  studies  for  photographers,  in  grouping,  posing,  and  composition. 

They  will  help  any  man  make  better  and  easier  pictures  of  children,  and  should 

be  studied. 

BENERMAN   &  WILSON,   Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


The  Universal 


EMBOSSINC   PATENTED  JANUARY  9th,  1872. 

This  Press  will  cameo  all  sizes,  from  cards  to  cabinets,  and  is  sold  lower  than  any  other  that  will  do 
the  same  work.     It  has  been  greatly  improved  and  made  very  complete  in  all  its  parts. 
We  furnish  a  card,  victoria,  and  cabinet  size. 

PRICE,    $20.00. 

MANUFACTURED  AND  SOLD  WHOLESALE  AND  RETAIL  BY 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO.,  822  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 

D^-  CAUTION. — Photographers  are  cautioned  against  buying  other  presses  that  may  use  an  elastic 
embossing  substance,  as  they  are  an  infringement  on  the  above.  R.  J.  Chute,  Patentee. 

JOHN   R.  CLEMONS, 


IMPORTER  OF 


teograpJtk  ^ut 


AND  MANUFACTURER  OF 

ALBUMEN  AND  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPERS. 

PINK  AND  BLUE  ALBUMEN  PAPER  CONSTANTLY  ON  HAND  OR  MADE  TO  ORDER. 

CLEMONS'  NEW  ALBUMEN  PAPER, 

A  superior  article  introduced  into  the  market  about  a  year  ago.  It  is  equal,  if  not  superior  to  any  Paper 
imported ;  the  great  demand  proves  such  to  be  the  case.  It  is  praised  by  all  who  use  it  as  to  its  keeping 
white  during  warm  weather ;  also,  for  its  brilliancy  and  toning  qualities,  and  it  is  made  White,  Pink,  and 
Blue.    Sizes  medium,  26  x  40  and  35  x  46. 

CLEMONS'  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPER 

Has  stood  the  test  above  all  other  makes  for  the  last  nine  years.  An  article  extensively  used  for  all  Plain 
Solar,  and  Colored  Work.    Sizes,  17%  x  23,  26  x  40,  and  35  x  46. 

Prices  lower  than  those  of  any  foreign  make. 

CLEMONS'  N.  P.  A.  VARNISH, 

For  Plain  Work  and  Retouching  upon. 

CLEMONS'  COLDEN  VARNISH, 

For  Intensifying  and  Retouching  upon. 

JOHN  R.  CLEMONS,  Manufacturer, 

915  SAJSTSOM  ST.,  PHILADELPHIA. 

#  # 


Gihon's  Cut-Outs 

Are  the  very  best  that  are  made,  and  are  now  without  a  rival  in  the  market.  They  are  clean 
cut,  most  desirable  shapes  and  sizes,  and  made  of  non-actinic  paper,  manufactured  specially 
for  the  purpose.  Each  package  contains  30  Cut-Onts,  or  Masks,  with  corresponding  Pnsides, 
assorted  for  five  differently  sized  ovals  and  one  arch-top. 

PRICE,  $1.00  PER  PACKAGE.     Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

Parties  wishing  special  sizes,  or  large  lots  of  a  few  sizes,  may  have  them  cut  to  order 
promptly,  by  addressing  the  manufacturer.     No  lot  costing  less  than  $1.00  made  at  a  time. 


No  printer  should  attempt  to  make  medallion  pictures  without  them. 

THEY  HAVE  NO  EQUAL  FOR  QUALITY. 

Beware  of  spurious  imitations  made  of  common  paper,  full  of  holes,  badly  cut,  and  odd 
shapes  and  sizes.  Ask  your  stockdealer  for -GIHON'S  CUT-OUTS,  and  see  that  they  are 
in  his  envelopes  with  instruction  circular  included. 


5 


ons 


IS    DESIGNED    FOR 

COMPLETELY  OBSCURING  THE  IMPERFECT  BACKGROUNDS  OE  COPIES,X 
RETOUCHING  NEGATIVES, 

FAULTY  SKIES  IN  LANDSCAPES, 

COATING  THE  INSIDE  OF  LENSES  OR  CAMERA  BOXES, 
BACKING  SOLAR  NEGATIVES, 

COVERING  VIGNETTING  BOARDS, 

AND   EOR  ANSWERING 

ALL  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  INTELLIGENT  PHOTOGRAPHER  IN  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  ARTISTIC  RESULTS  IN  PRINTING. 


WHEREVER  YOU  WANT  TO  KEEP  OUT  LIGHT,  USE  OPAQUE. 

It  is  applied  with  a  brush,  dries  quickly  and  sticks. 


CUT-OUTS  (thirty),  $1.00.  OPAQUE,  50  CENTS. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Address  all  orders  to 

JOHN  L.  CIHON,  Inventor, 

128  JV".  Seventh  St.,  PhiladelpJiia,  JPa. 


HOW  TO   PAINT  PHOTOCRAPHS. 


The  THIRD  EDITION  is  so  different  from  former  ones,  that  it  may  almost  be  said  that  it  is  A  new 
work. 

It  Gives  the  Best  and  Freshest  Instructions  to  be  had  on  the  Subject. 

Written  by  a  practical  photographic  colorist,  Mr.  Geo.  B.  Ayres. 

PRICE,  $2.00.     FOB  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALEBS. 

Photographers  and  artists  whose  interest  it  is  to  produce  work  in  Water  Colors,  Oil,  India  Ink,  or 
who  wish  complete  instructions  in  retouching  negatives,  should  consult  Mr.  Ayres'  capital  work. 

EENEBMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia, 

Or.    SATJTBR. 

No.    138   South  Eighth  Street,   Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURER  AND   WHOLESALE   DEALER  IN 


The  attention  of  the  trade  is  particularly  called  to  the  superior  quality  of  our  Glass  and  materials 
and  neatness  of  finish.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand. 

BULLOCK    &    CRENSHAW, 

No.  528  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURERS  AND  IMPORTERS  OF  PURE  CHEMICALS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 
IMPORTERS  OF  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN,  APPARATUS,  ETC. 

TRAPP  &  MUNOH'S 


gJkttWtt 


Introduced  into  this  country  since  1868  has  become  the  leading  paper,  and  is 
now  better  known  and  more  appreciated  than  any  other  brand. 

That  this  great  success  is  well  deserved  and  due  to  its  excellent  qualities 
may  be  judged  from  the  fact,  that  of  all  the  competitors  of  the  Vienna  Ex- 
hibition, Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  alone  received  the 

IMZZEZD-^L    OIF1    MERIT 

for  Albumenized  Paper. 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALL  THE  STOCKHOUSES. 

WILLY  WALLACH, 

GENERAL  AGENT  FOR  THE  UNITED  STATES, 

No.  4  Beekman  St.,  and  36  Park  Row,  New  York. 


©WILL 


o.. 


DEALERS 


IN  EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY, 


AND  PROPRIETORS  OF  THE  WORKS  OP  THE 


1 


Company 


BROOME, # 
STREET, 


Advertising,  Enterprising  Photographers,  Look ! 

The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons, 

WHAT  IS  IT? 


TIHE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS  is  a  little  book  or  pamphlet  of  twelve  pages,  the 
1  intention  of  which  is  :  1st.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  say  a  few  words  in  a  kindly  way 
to  those  who  have  photographs  taken,  in  order  that  the  intercourse  between  them  and  their 
photographer  may  be  pleasant  and  result  in  the  most  successful  pictures.  Every  photographer 
knows  that  he  is  constantly  beset  with  a  lot  of  questions,  as  to  the  proper  way  to  dress,  the  best 
time  to  come,  and  so  on,  which  take  a  great  deal  of  his  time  to  answer.  This  little  book  answers 
them  all,  and  the  mere  handing  of  a  copy  to  the  questioner,  which  he  or  she  can  carry  away  and  study 
at  leisure,  serves  as  admirably  as  a  half-hour's  conversation. 

2d.  It  is  a  cheap  mode  of  advertising.  What  could  you  want  better  than  to  have  your  business  card 
so  attractive  that  people  will  come  and  ask  for  it,  hand  it  around  from  one  to  another,  discuss  it,  and 
then  keep  it  for  reference  ?  This  is  what  they  do  with  this  little  "tract."  Witness  what  those  who 
have  tried  it  say  below. 

3d.  It  is  also  intended  to  convey  to  the  public  at  large  the  fact  that  photography  is  not  a  branch  of 
mechanics,  nor  photographers  a  sort  of  mechanic  themselves,  but  that  both  are  entitled  to  respect,  the 
same  as  the  family  physician  or  the  minister ;  that  the  photographer  has  rights  as  well  as  the  public  ; 
that  he  must  be  trusted,  and  that  he  alone  is  responsible  for  his  results.  Moreover,  that  he  must  make 
the  picture  and  not  they. 

How  far  the  work  serves  these  three  ends  the  reader  must  judge  from  the  testimonials  below,  of  a 
few  of  those  who  have  been  using  our  little  publication  in  their  business. 

We  believe  it  will  pay  you  to  use  it,  and  that  you  will  assist  just  that  much  in  elevating  your  art  and 
your  craft,  an  object  which  we  are  all  working  for. 

We  get  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons"  up  in  neat  style,  on  the  best  letter  cap  paper,  assorted 
tints,  green,  pink,  and  buff.  Eight  pages  are  devoted  to  the  body  of  the  work,  which  contains  para- 
graphs or  chapters — 1,  on  the  object  of  the  work ;  2,  on  photography  ;  3,  when  to  come  ;  4,  how  to 
come ;  5,  how  to  dress ;  6,  how  to  "  behave  ;  7,  the  children  ;  8,  general  remarks  on  coloring,  copy- 
ing, frames,  prices,  &c. 

All  this  is  inclosed  in  a  cover  of  the  same  kind  of  paper,  the  pages  of  which  are  at  the  service  of 
the  photographer  who  orders  them  to  have  printed  thereon  anything  he  may  please,  which  printing 
we  do  without  extra  charge.     We  publish  this  leaflet  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 


Cuts  for  the  covers  tve  supply  free. 


1000  copies,  cover  included, 
2000 


.     .  $20  00      I      3000  copies,  cover  included, 
.     .     35  00  5000       "  "  " 

Over  500,000  have  been  sold. 


.  $50  00 
.     75  00 


We  invite  you  to  examine  the  good  words  which  our  patrons  have  sent  us  concerning  this  publication. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"  I  sent  one  out  West  to  a  friend,  and  she 
wrote  that  she  was  now  posted,  and  when  she 
came  here  to  have  a  picture  made,  she  would 
come  'according  to  directions.'  '' — A.  Bogar- 
dus,  New  York. 

"A  grand  idea." — Elbert  Anderson. 

"  It  is  eagerly  sought  for  and  read  by  every- 
body who  visits  our  Gallery." — J.  Gurney  & 
Son,  New  York. 

"  It  assists  me  greatly." — James  Mullen, 
Lexington,  Ky. 

"  The  many  valuable  hints  in  it  cannot  fail  to 
be  beneficial  to  both  photographer  and  patron." 
— Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  W.  Virginia. 


"  You  have  conferred  a  great  favor  on  the  fra- 
ternity in  supplying  it,  and  we  hope  it  will  bene- 
fit some  of  the  '  know-everythings'  in  this  quar- 
ter."— A.  C.  McIntyre  &  Co.,  Ogdensburg. 

"They  are  just«the  thing  to  post  people  up  on 
what  they  ought  to  know  in  order  to  secure  good 
pictures." — J.  P.  Whipple,  White  Water. 

"  I  really  think  your  little  book  '  hits  the  nail 
on  the  head.'  "—J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

"It  is  the  best  advertising  medium  I  have 
ever  found." — H.  M.  Sedgewick,  Granville,  O. 

"  I  think  they  are  a  perfect  success,  and  will 
do  us  photographers  a  great  deal  of  good." — G 
W.  Mathis. 


We  will  send  samples  of  the  book,  and  special  rates,  to  any 
who  may  desire  it. 

BEKERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


~        dkrmpng. 


% 


fflOTOC-MPHICM 


IN  EVERT  VARIETY. 


Nos.  419  &  421  BROOME  ST.,  NEW  YORK, 
No.  73  BOLD  STREET,  LIVERPOOL,  ENGLAND. 


DEALERS  SUPPLIED  WITH  THE  BEST  GOODS  OH  THE  BEST  TEEIS. 


Our  own  extensive  facilities  for  manufacturing  enable  us  to  produce  first  quality  of  goods, 
and  our  extensive  connections  at  home  and  abroad  °;ive  us  facilities  wbich  no  one  else  has. 


MANUFACTORIES:  (Wat^'  ?g^w^^ 


SEE  OTHEK  ADVEKTISEMENTS  IN  PHOTOGKAPHIC  BOOKS  and  MAGAZINES 


Examine  Scoyill's  Photographic  Clocks,  and  Read  the  Photographic  Times, 


THE  ZENTMAYER  LENS 

For  Views  and  Copying. 


These  Lenses  possess  pre-eminently,  the  following  qualities  : 

Width  of  visual  angle,  ranging  from  80°  to  90°  ;  depth  of  focus ;  extreme  sharpness  over  the 
whole  field  ;  true  perspective  ;  freedom  from  all  distortion  in  copying  ;  portability  and  cheapness. 

Each  mounting  is  provided  with  a  revolving  Diaphragm,  containing  the  stops  of  the  different  com- 
binations for  which  they  are  designed.  The  larger  ones  are  provided  with  an  internal  shutter  for 
making  and  closing  the  exposure. 


No.  1, 

2£  inch  focus, 

3x3    plate,  . 

.  $20  00 

"    2, 
"    3, 

3J     "        " 
8       " 

4x5       "      . 

6i  x    8£     "      . 
10    x    12     "      . 

.     25  00 
.      30  00 
.     42  00 

ii    2     "      "    3 

ii    3     ii      i<    4         i< 

"    4    "      "    5 
i<    5    i<      i<    6 

.     .     .      40  00 
.     .     .      55  00 
.     .     .      75  00 
.     .     .110  00 

"    5, 

12       " 

14    x    17     "      . 

.      60  00 

"    ],  2,  and  3, 

.     .     .      48  00 

"    6, 

18       " 

20    x    24     "       . 

.     90  00 

"    3,  4,  and  5, 

.     .     .      88  00 

No.  3,  with  large  mounting  to  combine  with  No.  4  and  No.  5,  $35. 

No.  1  and  No.  2,  specially  adapted  for  Stereoscopic  Views,  are  furnished  in  matched  pairs.  No.  1 
and  No.  2,  single,  not  to  combine  with  other  sizes,  $36  a  pair. 

Lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six  combinations,  from  2^  to  18  inches,  $173. 

Zentmayer's  Stereoscopic  outfits,  including  a  pair  of  No.  2  Lenses  4x7  box,  7  x  10  India  Rubber 
Bath  and  Dipper,  Tripod,  Printing  Frames,  and  outside  box,  $60. 

JOSEPH  ZENTMAYER,  Manufacturer, 

147  South  Fourth  Street,  Philadelphia. 

STEREOSCOPIC   riEITS. 

*  . 

Dealers  selecting  their  autumn  stock  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  would  do  well  to  examine  our 

unrivalled  variety  of  Views  of 

THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS, 

NIAGARA,   WASHINGTON, 

FAIBMOUNT  PARK,  PHILADELPHIA, 

FLOWERS,  GROUPS,  &c. 

4®-  QUAMTY  UNSURPASSED  ! 


KILBURN  BROS.,  Littleton,  New  Hampshire. 

NIAGARA        ~ 

STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS. 


Winter  and  Summer  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  of  all  sizes.     Trade  supplied  on  good  terms.     Variety 
unequalled. 

G.  E.  CURTIS,  Photographer, 

-  Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y. 

Mr.  Curtis'  views  answer  Mr.  Robinson's  query  :   "Are  there  any  clouds  in  America?  " 


■WTBT    BOOKS. 

Owing  to  the  fact  that  the  dampness  caused  by  the  late  fire  in  our  building  has  caused  more  of  our 
stock  to  develop  mould,  and  stain,  we  oifer  the  following  Inducements  to  Photographers  : 

1.— Linn's  Landscape  Photography,  25  cts.  >        7,— Vol.  4  (1867),  Philadelphia  Photographer,  $2.50. 

2— Anderson's  Photo-Comic  Almyknack,  20  cts.  8 —Vol. 8  (1871), Philadelphia  Photographer,  $2.50. 

8— Mosaics,  1866  to  1874, inclusive,  25  cts.  each.  9— Vol.  1  (1871),  Photographic  World,  $2.00. 

4.— How  to  Sit  for  yonr  Photograph,  10  cts.  10.— Swan's  Carbon  Process,  50  cts. 

5.— Dr.  Vogel's  Eeference-Book,  50  cts.  11.— Carbon  Manual,  50  cts. 
6.— Leaf  Prints,  or  Glimpses  of  Photography,  50  cts. 

One  parcel  containing  1  to  6,  10  or  11,  $2.     One  parcel  containing  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  with  6,  10  or  11, 
$1.     One  parcel  containing  1,  2,  3  and  4,  60  cents. 

WHERE  ANY  FIVE  BOOKS  ARE  TAKEN  20  PER  CENT.  DISCOUNT. 

Also  an  assorted  lot  of  back  numbers  of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer \  at  15  cents,  and  of  the 
Photographic  World,  at  10  cents  per  copy. 


The  above  goods,  for  all  practical  uses  are  as  good  as  new  books. 

BENEBMAN  &  WILSON,  %Ve%rha^c&uebblIsyhse^  PHILADELPHIA. 

AUG.-  SCHWARZE.  SCH  WARZE     &    VALK,  WILLIAM  VALE. 

NO.    61.4    JLMCB   STREET,    PHI  X  AD  E  Z,  P  H I  A. 

most  sss  o-  German  AMien  Paper,  and  Arrowroot  Plain  Sailed  Paper. 

DEALERS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  MATERIALS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 

Will  mail  to  any  address  in  the  country,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  $1,  one  dozen  sheets  of  Assorted  Photo- 
graphic Paper,  each  sheet  being  numbered  for  distinction. 

The  undersigned,  having  purchased  the  entire  interest,  goodwill,  and  business  of 

Photo.  Materials  &  Picture  Frames 

OF  J.  HAWORTH, 

Desires  to  inform  his  friends  and  the  trade  generally,  that  he  will  continue  the  business,  as 

heretofore,  at  the  old  stand, 

624  ARCH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA, 

Where  he  hopes,  by  prompt  attention  and  fair  dealing,  to  merit  a  continuance  of  the  patron- 
age so  largely  given  to  the  late  firm. 

We  will  still  keep  a  well  assorted  stock  of 

PICTURE  FRAMES  (OVAL  AND  SQUARE), 

VELVET  CASES,  COLLODIONS, 

VARNISHES,  PURE  CHEMICALS,   &c, 

which  can  be  had  at  the  lowest  rates  ;  as  well  as 

PASSEPARTOUTS,    STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS   OF   ALL   PARTS    OF  THE  WORLD, 
STEREOSCOPIC  INSTRUMENTS,  Ac. 

We  also  have  a  full  line  of  CAMEKAS  of  the  best  makes  and  latest  improvements, 
CAMERA  STANDS,  HEAD-EESTS,  BACKGROUNDS,  and  all  Accessories  necessary 
to  the  Photographic  Art.  We  would  call  the  attention  of  photographers  to  the  fact  that  we 
manufacture  SQUARE  FRAMES,  and  so  can  generally  ship  any  frames  (especially  odd 
sizes)  the  same  day  they  are  ordered.  We  would  also  call  attention  to  the  noted  ALBU- 
MEN PAPERS,  Morgan's  and  H.  Extra,  the  best  for  warm  weather,  for  which  I  am 
the  agent. 

THOMAS  H.  McCOLLIN, 

Successor  to  Haworth  &  McCollin,  624  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


A    SPLENDID,    USEFUL    BOOK. 


13  rt.  VOG 


PHOTOGRAPHER'S 


POCKET 


nil,  Jlii  J 


\rz 


»! 


n 


m 


M 


IJ 


An  Alphabetically  arranged  collection  of  practically  important  hints  on  the  construction 
of  the  Gallery  ;  selection  and  trial  of  lenses  and  chemicals  ;  approved  formulae  for  the  differ- 
ent photographic  processes ;  tables  of  weights  and  measures ;  rules  for  avoiding  failure,  etc., 
etc.,  for 

Photographers  and  Amateurs, 


IS  KECEIVING  THE  HIGHEST  PEAISE  WHEEEVEK  IT  GOES. 


IT  IS  A  BOOK  EVERY  PHOTOGRAPHER  SHOULD  HAVE, 

Because  it  is  a  ready  helper  under  all  difficult  circumstances. 


Extract  from  the  Minutes  of  the  Chicago  Photographic  Association. 

"Messrs.  Hall  and  Hesler  spoke  in  most  flattering  terms  of  Dr.  Vogel's  Pocket  Reference-Book,  of 
its  great  value  to  every  photographer,  and  expressed  the  hope  that  it  may  soon  be  found  in  every 
gallery." 

There  is  hardly  a  matter  occurring  in  your  daily  work  which  it  does  not  throw  light  upon 
and  make  easy.     Examine  it  for  yourself. 


For  sale  by  all  dealers.    Price,  $1.50,  post-paid. 


BENERMAJST  &  WILSON,  JPhoto.  Publishers, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


RULOFSON'S   VIEWS 


OF  THE 


Yosemite  Valley, 
California,  Utah, 
The  Sierra  Nevadas, 
Big  Trees, 

Seal  Rocks,  &c« 

FROM  NEGATIVES  BY  BRADLEY  &  RULOFSON, 
SAN  FRANCISCO,  CAL, 


A  large  lot  of  these  pictures  wei*e  on  exhibition  at  Chicago,  and  were  sold 
by  President  Kulofson  at  large  prices  for  the  benefit  of  the  N.  P.  A.  A  great 
many  more  could  have  been  sold.  We  are  now  prepared  to  sell  to  the 
disappointed 

AT  ADVANTAGEOUS    PRICES, 

Stereoscopic  Views, $1.28  per  doz. 

Views  on  Full  Sheet, 3.00  each. 

These  are  the  handsomest  Landscape  pictures  made  in  America.  Selec- 
tions carefully  made  for  those  ordering  by  mail. 

A  Large  Stock  on  Hand.        Dealers  Supplied. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

PHILADELPHIA,   PA. 


BIGELOW'S  ALBUM  OF 

LIGHTING  AND  POSING. 


SELLS  ALL  OVER  THE  WORLD. -^^r 


NEW   EDITION, 

WITH  AN  ENLARGED  KEY,  AND  NEARL  Y  ALL  NEW  STUDIES. 


jfgl^  Brings  Lighting  and  Posing  down  to  a  system  at  once  plain, 
easy,  and  desirable. 

H®*  No  good,  intelligent  operator  can  afford  to  work  without  it. 

jggf^  It  contains  24  Victoria  Portrait  Studies  in  Light  and  Pose,  with 
an  explanatory  key,  idling  exactly  how  each  picture  was  made;  where 

THE  CAMERA    AND    SITTER  WERE    PLACED  when  it  lUdS  made  /    WHAT    CURTAINS 

were  opened  in  lighting  the  subject,  $>c,  $c. 

jfggp  A  diagram  of  the  interior  of  the  skylight  is  given  in  each  case, 
telling  the  whole  story.  IT  IS  BOUND  HANDSOMELY  IN  CLOTH, 
GILT. 

NEW  KEY,  ENLARGED.  NEW  PICTURES. 


'It  is  one  of  the  most  valuable  aids  to  art  education  which  has  yet  been  presented  to  the  photo, 
portraitist.  Each  print  represents  a  distinct  study  of  pose  and  lighting,  the  widest  variety  of  effects 
being  comprehended.  We  should  be  glad  to  see  it  in  the  hands  of  English  portraitists  generally." — 
Photo.  News. 

"  The  method  is  an  admirable  one  and  Mr.  Bigelow  deserves  credit  for  the  systematic  way  in  which 
he  has  carried  it  out." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  confess  that  this  work  has  furnished  me  much  instruction,  particularly  the  manner  in  which, 
by  word  and  picture,  studies  about  light  and  pose  are  explained  and  made  comprehensible." — Dr. 
Vogel. 

"  We  do  not  know  of  anything  ourselves  that  has  been  presented  to  the  trade  which  is  calculated 
to  do  so  much  real  good  as  Bigelow's  Album,  with  the  explanatory  key  to  the  studies.  It  is  an  in- 
valuable guide  to  the  portraitist." — Philadelphia  Photographer. 

If  you  would  improve  your  Lighting  and  Posing,  study  Bigelow's  Album. 


PRICE,  $6.00.    FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCKDEALERS, 


BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


ROBINSON'S 

METALLIC 

GUIDES. 

(SEE   OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

FOR  USE  WITH  THE  ROBINSON  PRINT  TRIMMER. 


MADE  IN  THE  BEST  MANNER  AND  GUARANTEED  TRUE. 


These  Guides  are  made  of  Stout  Iron  and  are  Turned  in  a  Lathe, 
so  that  they  are  Mathematically  True. 

Do  not  Waste  Time  with  a  Knife  and  Glass,  but  Try  Prof. 
Robinson's  Inventions. 


Oval,  Hound,  Elliptic,  and  Square,  of  all  sizes ;  various  shapes 
for  Stereoscopic  work,  Drug  Labels,  &c,  &c. 


REGULAR  SIZES  ALWAYS  ON  HAND.     SPECIAL  SIZES  MADE  TO  ORDER. 


Price,  for  regular  photo,  sizes,  10  cents  per  inch  the  longest  way  of  the  aperture. 
Special  sizes,  15  cents  per  inch.         for  sale  by  all  dealers. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


ROBINSON'S 

PHOTOGRAPH  TRIMMER 


IS  A  SUBSTITUTE  FOR  A  KNIFE 

FOR  TRIMMING  PHOTOGRAPHS,  AND  DOES  THE  WORK  MUCH    MORE   EXPEDITIOUSLY  AND 

ELEGANTLY  THAN  A  KNIFE. 

IT  SAVES  TIME,  SAVES  PRINTS,  AND  SAVES  MONEY. 

The  accompanying  cut  represents  the  instru- 
ment in  the  act  of  trimming  a  photograph.  It 
does  not  cut,  but  pinches  off  the  waste  paper,  and 
leaves  the  print  with  a  neatly  beveled  edge  which 
facilitates  the  adherence  of  the  print  to  the 
mount.  Try  one,  and  you  will  discard  the 
knife  and  punch  at  once.  For  ovals  and  rounded 
corners  it  is  worth  its  weight  in  gold. 

A  Trimmer  Mailed  for  $3.50. 
ROBINSON'S  improved  GUIDES 

The  difficulty  of  procuring  exactly  true  guides 
for  cutting  out  prints  has  induced  the  inventor 
to  put  up  machinery  for  the  production  of  all 
styles  of  them,  guaranteed  mathematically  true. 

See  advertisement  on  opposite  page. 

A  full  stock  of  regular  sizes  now  on  hand. 
A  complete,  illustrated,  catalogue  and  price-list  will 
be  issued  soon. 

Oil  the  wheel  bearings  with  Sewing  Machine  Oil. 


ROBINSONS 

INIMITABLE 


READ   THE   TESTIMONIALS. 


PHOTOGRAPH 
TRIMMER. 

BETTEE  THAN  KNIVES, 

AND 

WILL  OUTWEAK  A 

GEOSS  OF  THEM. 

Ask  your  stockdealer  to  show 
it  to  you,  or  send  direct  to  us  for 
one. 

Price,  by  mail,  $3.50. 


"  I  would  rather  give  fifty  dollars  than  be  without 
one.  By  its  use  all  annoyance  from  dull  knives  tear- 
ing the  prints  is  avoided." — E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk. 

"  It  does  the  work  intended  magnificently.  It  is 
not  only  exquisite  for  trimming  photographs,  but  also 
for  making  Cut-Outs.." — B.  Kihlholz,  Chicago,  III. 

"  It  works  well  and  does  all  it  is  recommended  to 
do." — F.  G.  Weller,  Littleton,  N.  H. 

"  Just  what  I  wanted  and  found  it  difficult  to  get." 
— J.  W.  Black,  Boston. 

"  I  consider  it  the  best  article  for  trimming  photo- 
graphs I  ever  saw." — W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"  I  would  not  be  without  it  for  the  best  twenty-five 
dollar  cutting  machine  I  ever  saw." — D.  Lotheop,  Pa. 

"The  Trimmer  comes  up  to  all  you  claim  for  it.  I 
would  not  be  without  it." — T.  Cummings,  Lancaster. 

"  I  have  trimmed  all  my  prints  with  it,  in  less  than 
half  the  time  taken  by  a  knife.  It  cannot  be  recom- 
mended too  highly." — W.  H.  Cranston,  Carry,  Pa. 

"The  Robinson  Trimmer  has  proved  to  us  one  of 
the  most  usefully  instruments  that  we  have  in  our 
gallery." — Schreiber  &  Sons,  Phila. 

"I  have  used  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  some 
time.  A  lady  was  asked  how  she  liked  her  sewing 
machine,  and  in  reply  said  '  Well  I  could  get  along 
without  it,  but  when  I  do  I  shall  not  sew  any  more.' 
That  is  me,  I  can  get  along  without  the  Trimmer  but 
when  I  do  I  shall  not  trim  photographs." — Well  G. 
Singhi,  Binghamton,  N.  Y. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmer  works  admirably.  Does 
the  work  intended  with  great  satisfaction." — A.  K.  P. 
Trask,  Philadelphia. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 
FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS.  PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


STEREOSCOPIC     VIEWS 

OF    THE 

NEW  MASONIC  TEMPLE,  PHILADELPHIA. 

Photographed  by  order  of  the  Grand  Lodge.     The  only  negatives  allowed  to  be  taken. 


Of  these  magnificent  pictures  we  novj  sup-ply  the  following 


LIST    OF    SUBJECTS. 


1.  Oriental  Room,  east. 

2.  "  "        west. 

3.  Grand  Chapter  Room,  east. 

4.  "  "  "        west. 

5.  The  Library. 

6.  Norman  Room,  west. 

7.  "  "       east. 

8.  Ionic  Room,  west. 

9.  "  "      east. 

10.  Lobby  to  the  Grand  Chapter. 

11.  Main  Hall. 

12.  Lobby  to  the  Grand  Lodge. 

13.  Grand  Stairway  to  the  Main  Hall. 


14.  Egyptian  Room,  west. 

15.  Grand  Lodge  Room,  west. 

16.  "         "  "       east. 

17.  "         "  "       south 

18.  Banqueting  Room. 

19.  Exterior  View  of  the  Temple,  south. 

20.  Parade   of  Knight's   Templar,   Sep- 

tember 30,  1873. 
2349.  Exterior  View  of  the  Temple,  west. 
2351.  Dedication  Parade,  Sept.  26,  1873. 
2353.  "  "  "         "        and 

entrance  to  the  Temple. 
2355.   Main  entrance  to  the  Temple. 


Parties  who  order  by  number  will  have  their  orders  promptly  filled. 

$2  per  dozen  by  mail,  post-paid.  Or  in  sets  of  12,  16,  and  22,  embracing  the  most  beautiful  views 
of  the  exterior  and  interior,  at  the  dozen  rate.  DEALERS   SUPPLIED. 

BENERMAN  St  WILSON,  Philadelphia. 

\* 

IS 
JLm 

18L- 

'  "il,j  \M-///// ,  ////#  ~1!J£T — -M 

Reflecting  Solar  Camera.  PATENTED 

Feb.  24,  1857, 
T»,^„^„„^  July  10,  1866, 

IMPB  O  VED  Feb  23i  iwi  m 

_  ^^  May  26,  1874,  .(jg^N 

SOLAR    CAMERAS.     g    8t 

^^  Direct  Printing  Camera. 

Manufactured  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the  original  inventor  and  patentee,  combining 
ALL  THE  IMPORTANT  improvements  that  have  been  made. 

Every  Camera  will  be  tested  and  guaranteed  before  delivery,  and  will  be  licensed  and  accompanied 
by  the  regular  Patent  Stamp  of  the  patentee. 

PRICES  OF  DIRECT  PRINTING  OR  REFLECTING  SOLAR  CAMERAS  : 

10  inch  diameter  Condensing  Lens,  will  print  picture  18  x  23  in., $190  00 

12     "           "                 "               "             "                        25x30  "       .         .                  .         .         .     220  00 

15     "           "                 "               "             "               "       29x36  " 275  00 

18     "                             "               "             "                       40x50  " 380  00 

Can  be  ordered  of  all  Stockdealers.     Boxing  charged  for  at  cost. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD,  Baltimore,  Md. 


Awarded  the  HOLMES  MEDAL  at  the  Chicago  N.  P.  A.  Exhibition,  1874. 


MOULTON'S 

RAPID  PHOTO-WASHER. 


Patented  August  12th,  1873. 

New  in  Principle.— Quick  and  Reliable  in  Practice. 


Instead  of  soaking  the  Prints  it  applies  the  water  in  the  form  of  spray,  with  considerable 
force,  to  both  sides  of  the  paper  at  each  revolution,  or  from  one  hundred  to  one-hundred- 
fifty  times  per  minute.  Washes  with  exact  uniformity,  and  gives  more  brilliant  and  per- 
manent work ;  is  simple,  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order,  will  last  a  lifetime,  and  will  enable  you 
to  get  out  work  at  short  notice,  thereby  securing  many  orders  that  would  otherwise  be  lost. 


Size  Cylinder, 

Diam.  16in.  Length  14  l-2in. 
11     20  .     "       19 
"     25        "       24 

Larger  sizes  may  follow. 


Capacity  in  Cards. 

84 
144 
220 


Largest  Print. 

Price. 

14  by  17  ins. 

$30 

18  by  22  " 

40 

22  by  28  ■  " 

50 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO,,  Trade  Agents. 


axix:jsixax3V[03xrx^LXjS . 

"  I  write  to  testify  to  the  satisfaction  I  feel  with  the  working  of  your  Rapid  Print  Washer.  It  is  simply  per- 
fection, as  far  as  my  experience  with  it  goes,  viz :  One  year's  constant  use.  I  have  washed  eight  dozen  cartes  in 
ten  minutes,  and  the  most  accurate  test  I  know  of,  starch  and  iodine,  failed  to  show  a  trace  of  hypo,  remain- 
ing.'—L.  G.  Bigelow,  Detroit,  Mich.,  Feb.  10th,  1874. 

"Time  saved  is  money  earned."  The  above  maxim  is  as  true  in  the  photographic  business  as  in  any  other, 
and  in  this  connection  I  would  say,  that  Moulton's  Rapid  Photo-Washer  will  save  more  time  in  any  weW-regu- 
lated  gallery,  than  any  mechanism  ever  yet  invented  ;  besides  the  prints  finish  with  a  finer  lustre  than  those 
washed  by  any  other  device  I  have  ever  yet  seen.  Having  used  one  for  the  past  two  months,  washing  from  100 
to  300  prints  daily,  I  am  pleased  to  add  my  testimonial  to  its  excllence." — Wm.  M.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 
March  11th,  1874.  

ANALYSIS    OF    PRINTS. 

"After  analyzing  the  prints  which  were  washed  by  you  during  ten  minutes,  in  your  Rapid  Photo-Washer, 
and  those  furnished  by  an  artist  of  this  city,  washed  in  a  syphon  tank  in  running  water  for  one  hour  and  left  in 
the  water  over  night,  for  the  quantity  of  hyposulphites  left  therein,  I  take  pleasure  in  stating  that  the  prints 
treated  in  the  Bapid  Photo-Washer  contain  perceptibly  less  hyposulphites  than  those  washed  in  the  other  man- 
ner described." — Gustavtjs  Bode,  Analytical  Chemist,  and  Dealer  in  Photographic  Stock,  Milwaukee,  Feb.  21, 1874 


L  V.  MOULTOIN,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis. 


THE 

PRIZE 
PICTURES. 


In  order  that  photographers  may  have  an  early  opportunity  of  studying  the  very  elegant 
pictures  from  negatives  which  have  heen  sent  to  us  in  competition  for  our 

COLD     MEDAL! 

we  publish  them  for  sale.  There  are  THIRTY  PICTURES  IN  A  SET— of  men,  women, 
and  children,  groups  and  single  figures — and  the  following  is  a  catalogue  of  them,  numbered 
in  the  order  in  which  the  negatives  were  received. 


1  A.  N.  Hardy,  Boston,  Mass. 

2  J.  McCluee  &  Co.,  St.  John,  N.B. 

3  D.  Gintee,  Conneautville,  Pa. 

4  W.  N.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 

5  F.  B.  Clench,  Loekport,  N.  Y. 

6  Theo.  Niebebg,  St.  Marys,  O. 

7  C.  Chadbouene,  Toledo,  0. 

8  E.  H.  Alley,  Toledo,  O. 

9  B.  Gray,  Bloornington,  111. 

10  C.  D.  Moshee,  Chicago,  111. 

11  E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk,  Conn. 


12  N.  H.  Busey,  Baltimore,  Md. 

13  M.  T.  Caeter,  Worcester,  Mass. 

14  W.  W.  Whiddit,  Newburg,  N.  Y. 

15  L.  G.  Bigelow,  Williarnsport,  Pa. 

16  G.  M.  Elton,  Palmyra,  N.  Y. 

17  I.  Saunders,  Alfred  Centre,  N.  Y. 

18  Bradley  &  Rulofson,  San  Fran- 

cisco, Cal. 

19  Forrester  Clark,  Pittsfleld, 

Mass. 

20  Otto  Lewin,  New  York  City. 


21  F.  L.  Stubee,  Bethlehem,  Pa. 

22  D.  T.  Burrill,   North   Bridge- 

water,  Mass. 

23  J.  Baehydt,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

24  Albright  Bros.,  Wooster,  O. 

25  F.  S.  Crowell,  Mt.  Vernon,  O. 

26  Trask  &  Bacon,  Philadelphia. 

27  G.  W.  Haeris,  Lancaster,  N.  Y. 

28  B.  Williams,  Tunkhannock,  Pa. 

29  F.  Gutekunst,  Philadelphia. 

30  J.  Inglis,  Montreal,  Can. 


It  will  be  seen  that  a  number  of  our  best  photographers  have  competed. 

THE  AWARD  WAS  MADE  FOB  NO.  18. 


Three  negatives  or  more  were  sent  by  each  competitor.     The  sets  include  one  example 
from  each  competitor.     All  the  duplicates  may  be  had  to  order. 

Several  thousand  of  these  Pictures  have  already  been  sold.     Get  copies 
while  the  Negatives  are  new. 

The  prints  are  supplied  at  the  following  rates  : 

A  Set  of  Thirty  in  the  Improved  Photograph  Cover, $4  25 

"  "  without        "  "  "        3  75 

Selections,  per  dozen, 3  00 


EVERY  OPERATOR  &  EVERY  PRINTER  SHOULD  GET  AND  STUDY  THEM. 


Nothing  so  really  elegant  was  ever  offered  for  sale. 

BENERMAU  &  WILSON,  USSfe,)  7th  L  Cherry  Sts.,  Phila. 


1874. 


Special  Premium  of  Six  Handsome  German 
Cabinet  Pictures  of  Ladies ! 

By  FK1TZ  LUCKHARDT,  Vienna,  Austria. 

These  pictures  are  alone  worth  $3  for  the  set,  and  more  is  asked  for 
such  by  dealers. 

Given  to  any  one  who  will  send  us  a  NEW  Sitarita  for  the  year.1874. 

We  make  this  offer  as  A  MATTER  OF  BUSINESS,  and 
not  as  a  favor  to  any  one  on  either  side-  It  will  pay 
to  GIVE  A  YEAR'S  SUBSCRIPTION  TO  YOUR  OPERATOR 
or  to  your  friend  or  customer,  in  order  to  SECURE 
THESE  PICTURES. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philada. 


Madison    Square  (23d    Street), 

KECEIVED  HIGHEST  AWAKDS  IN 

Vienna,  Paris,  and  New  York, 

FOR   PHOTOGRAPHS. 


New  York,  July  1,  1874. 

MR.  CHAS.  F.  USENER. 

Dear  Sib.-  The  Mammoth  Tube  (No.  9002)  which  you  sent  me  on  trial  has  been 
thoroughly  tested,  and  has  proved  itself  quite  beyond  my  expectations;  for  fine 
definition  and  roundness,  or  stereoscopic  effect,  1  have  never  seen  its  equal.  You 
may  readily  see  by  the  specimens  herewith,  of  standing  figures,  that  they  are  as 
sharp  and  as  perfect  as  an  imperial  carte,  although  taken  on  14  x  17  plates;  and 
when  I  add  that  they  were  taken  at  4  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  in  45  seconds,  I 
think  I  can  say  no  more. 

Please  charge  the  tube  to  me,  and  send  bill.  Yours  truly, 

W.  KURTZ. 


CHARLES  COOPER  &  CO., 

WHOLESALE  AGENTS, 

lor   ISO   Chatham   Street,  New  York* 


BALTIMORE! 

THE  ATTENTION"  OF  PHOTOGRAPHERS  is  invited  to  my  stock  of  photographic 
goods.     I  am  prepared  to  fill  all  orders,  large  or  small,  promptly  at  best  prices. 

AMM  WWM  M&WEMWTMM 

are  received  as  soon  as  by  any  one  in  the  market. 

AMONG  OTHER  THINGS, 

The  American  Optical  Co.'s  Apparatus, 
Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler, 
Chute's  Universal  Cameo  Press, 
Robinson's  Print-Trimmers  and  Guides, 
Morrison's  and  Steinheil's  View  Lenses, 
Waymouth's  Vignette  Papers, 
All  Makes  of  Portrait  Lenses, 
Chemicals,  Glass,  and  Frames, 

are  carefully  selected  for  my  special  sales.     My  expenses  are  light.     I  do  my  own  work 
personally,  and  can  supply  goods  as  low  as  the  next  one. 

A  trial  order  solicited.     Freight  and  expressage  from  Baltimore  very  low  to  any  point 
South  or  West. 

'CHAS.1. WILSON, 

No.  7  No.  7  No.  7 

NORTH    CHARLES    STREET, 

BALTIMORE,  MD. 


And  Perfect!/^ 

£LjL.HAIR. 


Enabling  the  photographer  to  successfully  secure  every  variety  of  pose  with  facility  and  reliability. 
It  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  varying  necessities  of  female  portraiture,  and  is  equally  suited  for 
children,  for  vignettes,  or  for  full  lengths.  The  BOWDISH  CHAIR  is  substantial  in  construction, 
elegant  in  design,  and  rich  in  upholstery  and  finish.  Those  who  have  purchased  them,  speak  in  the 
highest  terms,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 


+  " 


TESTIMONIALS: 


-+ 

-+ 


"About  ten  days  ago  I  received  the  new  chair  you  promised  to  send  me  when  I  saw  you  last,  and 
would  have  written  and  acknowledged  your  kind  favor  long  ago  if  1  had  correctly  known  your  ad- 
dress. Accept  my  best  thanks  for  this  really  beautiful  chair,  which  now,  after  ten  days'  trial,  has 
proved  to  be  a  decided  success  in  every  way.  It  has  become  the  real  favorite  for  posing  in  my  studio. 
Besides  this,  in  external  appearance  the  new  chair  appears  so  much  superior  in  finish,  and  is  at  the 
same  time  highly  ornamental,  and  the  head  rest  is  so  much  easier  handled  than  with  any  chair  I  have 
ever  seen  before.  In  short,  it  gives  the  sitter  the  greatest  possible  comfort  and  steadiness.  I  think 
the  chair  I  have  justly  deserves  the  name  of  'Perfect  Posing  Chair.' " — H.  Rocher,  Chicago,  111., 
January  10,  1873. 

"  Since  receiving  your  posing  chair,  nearly  a  year  since,  I  have  had  it  in  constant  use,  and  am 
satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  posing  chair  in  the  market.  It  is  easily  worked,  and  is  so  well  made  that 
one  will  last  a  life  time,  and  then  be  a  valuable  heirloom. " — L.  G.  Bigelow. 

"The  Bowdish  Chair  came  in  good  order  and  gives  the  best  of  satisfaction.  Should  you  wish  a 
recommendation  for  it,  say  what  you  please  and  we  will  endorse  it.  You  cannot  praise  it  too  highly." 
— Slee  Bros.,  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  Sept.  10,  1872. 

"  Tour  chair  has  arrived  at  last.  I  am  much  pleased  with  it.  1  don't  think  my  gallery  can  be 
complete  without  one  of  them.  Wishing  you  the  success  your  invention  merits,  I  am,  truly  yours, 
A.  Hesler." 


Prints  will  be  sent,  if  desired,  before  purchasing.     There  are  three  styles  kept  in  stock,  viz  : 

No.  2.  With  nickel-plated  rods  and  rest,  in  velveteen  or  reps $60  00 

No.  4.        "  "  "  "  "  "    square  carved  legs 70  00 

No.  6.       "  "  "  "     in  best  plush,  paneled 80  00 

Special  chairs  to  order. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO.,  Sole  Agents, 

591  Broadway ;  JVew  York, 


NEW! 

CATALOGUE  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PUBLICATIONS. 


Owing  to  the   LATE    FIRE   IN   OUR   OFFICE,  and  to  the 

fact  that  SEVERAL  PHOTOGRAPHIC   BOOKS  ARE 

OUT   OF  PRINT    we  are  obliged  to  issue  a  revised  or 

NEW  CATALOGUE! 

TO  WHICH  WE  CALL  YOUR  ATTENTION. 

There  is  something  for  the  workers  in  all  branches  of  the  art,— operators, 
posers,  manipulators,  printers,  painters,  retouchers,  finishers,  and  art  students 
— all  are  provided  for. 

We  always  find  the  photographer  who  reads  what  is  published  pertaining 
to  his  profession,  to  be  the  photographer  who  succeeds  in  his  business  the 
best.  Above  all,  those  who  regularly  and  continually  receive  a  good  photog- 
raphic magazine  are  those  who  are  always  ahead  with  new  goods,  new  styles, 
and  new  information.  We  recommend  an  investment  in  a  part  or  all  of  the 
list  below,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  them  to  you  on  receipt  of  price. 


CATALOGUE. 


The  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

The  oldest,  best,  and  most  popular  Photographic  Magazine  in  America.  Eleventh  Year.  Please  read  the 
prospectus  on  page  three  of  cover  and  premium  list  opposite.  Subscription  price,  |5  a  year,  $2.50  for  six 
months,  in  advance.    Current  number,  50  cents.    Specimen  copies,  free. 


Photographic  Mosaics. 


The  1874  edition  excels  all  of  its  eight  older  brethren.  The  list  oi  articles  is  made  up  of  original  contribu- 
ti  ons,  written  especially  for  its  pages,  on  all  departments  of  the  art,  whoi  ly  by  practical  men  who  are  only  heard 
from  once  a  year  through  the  persuasion  of  the  editor,  in  this  way.  See  special  advertisement.  146  pages. 
Paper  cover,  50  cents.    Cloth,  $1.    A  few  copies  of  former  editions,  1  roro  1866,  at  same  price. 

Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

This  is  not  exactly  a  book,  but  a  collection  of  24  large  Victoria  size  photographic  studies  in  lighting  and 
posing,  made  especially  to  teach  how  to  light  and  pose  ordinary  and  extra-ordinary  subjects  in  all  the  plain, 
fancy,  "  Rembrandt "  and  "  Shadow  "  styles.  It  is  accompanied  by  an  explanatory  key  of  instructions,  together 
with  a  diagram  for  each  picture,  showing  how  the  sitter  and  the  caaiera  were  placed  in  the  skylight,  their 
relation  to  the  background,  and  what  blinds  were  opened  and  closed  at  the  time  of  the  sitting.  It  almos 
supplies  a  rule  by  which  you  can  quickly  tell  how  to  manage  every  subject  that  comes  to  you.  The  studies  are 
mounted  on  folding  leaves,  so  that  twelve  can  be  examined  at  once.    Price,  in  cloth,  gilt,  $6,  postpaid. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs  in  Water  Colors. 

A  practical  Handbook  designed  especially  for  the  use  of  Students  and  Photographers,  containing  directions 
for  Brush  Work  in  all  descriptions  of  Photo-Portraiture,  Oil,  Water  Colors,  Ink,  How  to  Retouch  the  nega- 
tive, &c.    By  George  B.  Ayres,  Artist.  Third  edition.    Differing  largely  from  previous  editions.    Price,  $2.00. 


Handbook  of  the  Practice  and  Art  of  Photography . 

By  Dr.  IT.  Vogel.    Second  edition  in  press.    Ready  October  1st. 

The  Practical  Printer. 

Issued  July,  1874.  A  capital  working  manual,  giving  the  fullest  information  on  all  stylus  of  photographic 
printing  on  albumen  and  plain  paper,  and  on  porcelain.  By  C.  W.  IJkarn.  No  book  was  ever  more  needed. 
$2.50.    See  special  advertisement  concerning  it. 

Lea's  Manual  of  Photography. 

Third  tbousand.    $3.75  per  copy.    A  capital  book  of  instructions  in  all  branches  of  the  art.    See  advt. 

How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph. 

This  is  a  fine  little  work  of  48  pages,  written  by  the  wife  of  a  celebrated  New  York  photographer,  for  the 
purpose  of  educating  the  public  on  the  all-important  subject  of  sitting  for  a  picture.  It  is  bound  in  cloth  at  60 
cents  per  copy,  and  paper  cover  30  cents. 

Lookout  Landscape  Photography. 

By  Prof.  B.  M.  Linn,  Lookout  Mountain,  Tenn.  A  pocket  manual  for  the  outdoor  worker,  and  full  of  good 
for  every  photographer.    75  cents.    Be  sure  to  get  it. 

Himes's  Leaf  Prints ;  or,  Glimpses  at  Photography. 

By  Prof.  Charles  F.  Himes,  Ph.D.  Full  of  useful  information  for  the  photographic  printer.  Illustrated 
with  a  whole-size  photograph.    Cloth,  $1.25.     . 

The  American  Carbon  Manual. 

By  Edw.  L.  "Wilson.  A  complete  manual  of  the  Carbon  process  from  beginning  to  end.  With  a  fine, 
example  by  the  process.    Cloth,  $2.00. 

The  Photographer  to  His  Patrons. 

A  splendid  little  twelve-page  leaflet,  which  answers  all  vexatious  questions  put  to  you  by  your  sitters,  and 
serves  as  a  grand  advertising  medium.  It  is  for  photographers  to  give  away  to  their  customers.  Send  for  a 
copy  and  an  illustrated  circular.  Over  300,000  already  sold  and  in  use  all  over  the  country.  $20.00  for  1000, 
$35.00  for  2000,  and  so  on.    Printed  and  supplied  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 

•  Something  New. 

Just  out.    Similar  to  the  "  Photographer  to  his  Patrons,"  but  newer.    Prices  the  same. 

Pretty  Faces. 

A  leaflet  much  smaller  than  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons"  and  "Something  New,"  for  the  same  purpose 
but  costing  less,  viz. :  1000  copies,  $10.00  ;  2000,  $17.50,  and  larger  orders  at  less  rates. 

Elbert  Anderson' s  Photo-  Comic  Allmyknack. 

A  complete  Almanac,  full  of  witty  sayings,  jokes,  puns,  stories,  etc.,  etc.  Profusely  illustrated  with  comic 
and  original  sketches,  yet  all  interspersed  with  much  practical  matter  of  value  to  every  photographer.  Price 
75  cents. 

Photographers'  Pocket  Reference- Book. 

By  Dr.  H.  Vogel,  of  Berlin.  A  dictionary  of  all  the  terms  used  in  the  art,  and  contains  formulas  for  almost 
every  known  manipulation.  Altogether  different  from  any  work  ever  published.  Cloth,  $1.50.  See  special 
advertisement.    A  splendid,  indispensable  book. 

Works  found  in  our  old  catalogues,  and  not  in  the  above,  are  out  of  print 
and  cannot  be  had. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Benerman  &  Wilson's  Publications  sold  by  all  Dealers. 


JAMES  F.  MAGEE  &  CO. 

MANUFACTURERS    OF 

PURE 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMICALS. 

No.  108  North  Fifth  Street, 


Stock  Dealers  only  Supplied. 

SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT. 


ALL  PERSONS  ARE  HEREBY  NOTIFIED,  and  cautioned  against  infringing  my  Solar  Camera 
Patent. 

Infringers  will  settle  with  H.  L.  Emmons,   Attorney-at-Law,   Baltimore,   Md. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD, 

Baltimore,  Md. 


STEREOSCOPIC   VIEWS 

OF 

The  Catskill  Mountains,  Trenton  Falls,  IT.  Y., 
Lake  Mohonk,  IT.  T.,  &c,  &c. 

GREAT  VARIETY  AND  FIRST-CLASS  QUALITY. 

THE  TRADE  SUPPLIED  ON  REASONABLE  TERMS. 

J.  LOEFFLER,  Photographer,  Tompkinsville,  Staten  Island,  N.  Y. 


MANUFACTURING  OPTICIAN, 

1314  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia. 

Sole  Manufacturer  of  the  Stereo-Panopticon  and  Artopticon,  warranted  to  be  the  most 
perfect  and  powerful  Magic  Lanterns  made. 


MCALLISTER'S 

PATBUT 

ARTOPTICON 


Each  lantern  is  adjustable  for  use 
with  powerful  coal  oil  light — oxycal- 
cium,  hydro-oxycalcium,  and  oxy- 
hydrogen  lights. 

Jgigp^The  coal  oil  lamp  used  gives 
very  much  more  light  than  any  other 
lamp  yet  made. 

Giving  exhibitions  with  the  Artopti- 
con will  prove  a  profitable  business  for 
a  man  with  a  small  capital. 

The   STEREO-PAlfOPTICOM    is  an  improved   instrument,   suitable  for  giving 
exhibitions  of  dissolving  views  on  the  largest  scale.     Send  for  printed  description. 


MCALLISTER'S 

PATENT    TINTERS. 

These  tinters  are  used  for  giving  to  magic  lantern  pictures 
various  beautiful  tints  or  colors,  as  blue,  red,  yellow,  green, 
crimson,  &c,  &c.  They  can  be  adjusted  to  the  lantern,  either 
on  the  end  of  the  front  lens,  or  may  be  screwed  to  the  back 
of  the  front  lens-holder,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Stereo-Panop- 
ticon and  Educational  lanterns.  On  the  Artopticon,  they 
are  placed  on  the  end  of  the  front  lens  tube. 

NEW  and  BEAUTIFUL  SLIDES  for  LANTERN  USE  in  LARGE  VARIETY. 

Priced  and  Illustrated  Catalogues  free,  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  stamp. 

W.  MITCHELL  McALLISTER,  1314  Chestnut  St.,  Phila. 


LINN'S  LOOKOUT 
LANDSCAPE   PHOTOGRAPHY 


Z^-t 


pas 


YET  CONTAINING    MANY    USEFUL    HINTS    FOE  ALL    PHOTOGKAPHERS. 

By  the  Late  Prof.  R.  M.  LINN, 

LOOKOUT  MOUNTAIN,   TENN. 

This  admirable  little  work  was  published  last  fall,  a  little  too  late  for  the  season.  It  is 
now  confidently  recommended  to  every  photographer  about  to  do  any  class  of  work,  outside 
or  inside  the  skylight. 

CONTENTS. 


Introductory. 

Main  Requisites  of  a  Good  Photographic  Land- 

•    scape. 
Artistic  Effect. 
Proper  Illumination. 
Direction  of  Light. 
Clouds. 

Length  of  Exposure. 
Apparatus  for  Field  Work. 
On  the  Selection  of  View  Lenses. 
Camera  Boxes. 
Bath  Cups. 

Preliminary  Preparations. 
Taking  the  Field. 
Hints  on  Printing  and  Finishing. 
To  Print  Clouds. 
Toning  Bath  for  Views. 
On  Fixing  and  Washing  Prints. 
Suggestions  on  Mounting  Prints. 
To  Cut  Stereoscopic  Prints. 
To  Mount  Stereoscopic  Prints. 
Formulae  and   Processes  for  Landscape  Photog- 
raphy. 
Ever-ready  Iodizer  for  Landscape  Photography. 


Remarks  on  Preparing  and  Using  Iodizer. 

On  the  Management  of  Flowing  Bottles. 

On  the  Preparation  of  Plain  Collodion. 

The  Silver  Bath  for  Negatives. 

To  Renovate  an  Old  Negative  Bath. 

To  Prepare  Carbonate  of  Silver. 

Permanganate  of  Potash — Its  Use  in  our  Art. 

Preparation  and  Using  of  Developer. 

Fixing  Solution  for  View  Negatives. 

On  Redeveloping  and  Strengthening  Agents. 

To  Clean  and  Polish  the  Glass. 

To  Prepare  Chloride  of  Gold  Solution. 

The  Paste  for  Mounting  of  Photographs. 

The    Operator's   Oracle — Failures  :    Causes  and 

Remedies  ;  for  consultation  in  time  of  trouble. 
Counsels  and  Cautions  for  the  Printer,  including 

Formulae  for  Silvering  Bath,  &c 
Failures  in  Silvering  Albumenized  Paper. 
Failures  in  Toning  Photographs. 
Failures  in  Fixing  Photographs. 
Instantaneous  Photography. 
View  Photography  Financially  Considered. 
Stereoscoping  Applied  to  Portraiture. 
Concluding  Remarks. 


PRICE,  75  CENTS. 


FOB,  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALEBS. 


BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


G.  GENNERT, 

53  Maiden  Lane,  N.  Y., 


IMPORTER  OF  THE  CELEBRATED 


S.  *  M.  DRESDEN 


4t»Ult«tf 


PAPERS, 


RIVES  &  STEINBACH 

WHITE,  PINK,  and  BLUE. 


Every  one  says  it  works  the  most  uniform,  economical,  and  gives  finer  results  than  any 
other.  To  satisfy  yourself  that  it  is  the  hest,  send  to  your  stock  dealer  for  a  sample  dozen. 
Kept  hy  all  stock  dealers  in  the  United  States. 


Hyposulphite  of  Soda, 

Solid  German  Glass  Baths, 

Saxe  Evaporating  Dishes, 

And  French  Filter  Paper. 


Special  attention  is  called  to  the   Extra  Brilliant  or  Double   Glossy  Paper, 

which  is  recognized  hy  the  best  artists  all  over  the  world  as  the  finest  Albumen  Paper  in 
this  country  or  Europe. 

*       * 


"BY  THIS  SIGX  WE  CONQUISR." 


rms  is 


CARL  MYERS' 

PATENT 

LIGHT-CONTROLLER 

Illustrated  and  described  at  length  in  Anthony's  Bulletin, 
July,  1874.    Exhibited  before  the  Chicago  Convention, 
in  connection  with  a  lecture  on   "  Mechanical 
Afjptiances  for  Governing  the  Light,"  illus- 
trated with  various  models.     (See  pub- 
lished proceedings). 

The  prophesy  is  made  by  those  employing  the  appara- 
tus, that  it  will  eventually  supersede  all  other  arrange- 
ments for  lighting  the  sitter,  because  cheaper,  more 
immediately  effectual,  and  adapted  to  all  circumstances. 

It  attaches  to  the  top  of  any  head  rest,  weighs  two  and 
a-half  pounds,  costs  $5.00,  and  packs  up  four  feet  long, 
averaging  one  inch  diameter.  It  is  not  a  "  light  modi- 
fier," hut  a  "  light  controller."  Its  motions  are  as  free  and 
unlimited  as  those  of  a  common  hand  screen,  but  it 
remains  fix«d  in  any  position  when  the  hand  lets  go.  It 
saves  half  the  necessary  retouching,  and  corrects  all  the 
faults  of  a  defective  light — except  leaking.  No  other  appa- 
ratus will  accomplish  what  this  will. 

As  a  preferable  support  for  the  attachment,  we  sell  for 
$3.50  a  metal  base  with  wooden  column  and  adjustable 
rod— tall,  light,  and  impossible  to  upset  by  accident. 
One  hour's  practice  with  the  apparatus — used  as  screen 
and  reflector — will  better  instruct  an  artist  in  the  true 
science  of  lighting,  than  years  of  experience  with  other 
methods.  Any  desirable  effect  is  got  instantly.  Six 
month's  use  of  the  apparatus  will  dispose  any  sensible 
artist  to  quit  the  profession  rather  than  abandon  its  use. 

Sent  by  express  immediately  on  receipt  of  price,  by 

C.  E.  MYERS, 

Patentee  and  Manufacturer, 

Drawer  6i.  |53  Main  St.,  Hornellsville,  N.  Y. 


SPICER'S 

LUSTRENE 


OLD  FURNITURE 


RENEWS 

OLD  FRAMES. 


-OLD  APPARATUS 


IS    INDISPENSABLE    IN    EVERY    GALLERY. 


This  article  is  a  composition  of  such  substance,  that  all  scratches  or  bruises 
are  completely  filled,  and  the  surface  restored  to  its  originally  perfect  condition. 


PRICE,  PER  BOTTLE,  75  CENTS. 


GHAS.  A.  WILSON,  Sole  Apt,  7  Mi  Charles  Street,  Baltimore, 


DR.    VO  GEL'S 

HANDBOOK 


OF 


PHOTOGRAPHY. 

By  Prof.  H.  VOGEL,  Ph.D.,  Berlin,  Prussia. 


THE  SECOND   EDITION 

Is  in  Press  and  will  be  ready  soon. 


FRIGE,    $3. SO. 

(SAME    AS    THE    FIRST    EDITION.) 

It  will  be  much  larger  than  the  first  edition,  and  will  contain  several  new  photo- 
graphs and  illustrations.  New  chapters  have  been  added  by  the  author  and  much 
of  the  old  edition  has  been  rewritten  and  revised.     See  future  advertisements. 

FOR    SALE    BY    ALL    DEALERS. 


It  will  be  the  Best  Work  ever  Issued  on  Photography. 


No  book  ever  treated  all  branches  of  the  art  so  plainly  and  satisfactorily  as 
this  does. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


CAPTAIN  ABNEY'S  NEW  BOOK. 


INSTRUCTION  IN  PHOTOGRAPHY 

BY 

CAPTAIN  ABNEY,  B.E.,  F.C.S.,  F.B.A.S., 

Instructor  in  Photography  at  the  School  of  Military  Engineering,  Chatham,  England. 


A  small  edition  of  this  valuable  work  was  originally  prepared  for  private 
circulation  among  the  officers  and  men  of  the  Royal  Engineers,  but  some 
copies  that  have  become  distributed  beyond  this  circle  have  been  the  means 
of  creating  such  a  large  demand  that  the  Author  has  been  induced  to 
reprint  it,  with  considerable  modifications  and  additions,  for  the  benefit  of 
Photographers  generally. 


"  Captain  Abney's  manual  is  unique  in  its  class,  in  character  as  well  as  excellence.  All  the  instruc- 
tions, which  are  as  simple,  lucid,  and  easy  to  apprehend  as  they  are  accurate,  are  accompanied  by 
explanations  of  the  rationale  of  the  operations  to  be  conducted.  The  book  is  singularly  valuable  in 
its  completeness,  and  in  that  completeness  arising  out  of  the  practical  experiences  of  a  skilled  worker 
in  many  varied  branches  of  the  art ;  the  instructions  are  not,  therefore,  the  work  of  a  mere  compiler. 
The  work  is,  in  short,  the  most  comprehensive  and  trustworthy  guide  which  has  ever  been  issued 
within  the  same  compass,  in  connection  with  protography,  and  will  be  consulted  by  experienced  work- 
ers and  beginners  with  equal  advantage.'' — The  Photographic  News,  February  6,  1874. 

"In  this  manual  sev«al  of  the  dry-plate  processes  are  described  fully.     In  addition  to  the  usual 
matter  which  finds  a  place  in  every  manual  of  instruction  on  photography,  there   is  a  comprehensive 
account  of  Edward's  heliotype  process,  and  also  of  the  photo-mechanical  process,  described  by  Cap- 
tain Waterhouse,  as  well  as  of  the  processes  of  photo-zincography,  lithography,  and  papyrotype.  ' 
British  Journal  of  Photography,  February  20,  1874. 

"  Captain  Abney's  valuable  work  on  photography  differs  essentially  from  the  ordinary  manual.  For 
while  it  is,  before  everything,  a  practical  handbook,  such  as  the  most  ignorant  of  photographers  would 
have  no  difficulty  in  following,  it  encourages  the  worker  to  inform  himself  in  the  why  and  wherefore  of  a 
reaction  or  process,  and  supplies  him  with  theoretical  information  without  bothering  him  at  the  outset 
by  abstruse  and  complicated  scientific  explanations.  Captain  Abney  brings  down  the  information  to 
a  very  recent  date,  his  own  improved  beer  process — which  is  among  the  most  simple  of  dry-plate 
methods,  being  included.  Photo-mechanical  printing  receives  the  earnest  attention  it  deserves,  and 
photography  in  pigments  is  not  forgotten." — Photographic  Journal,  February  17. 

"  All  the  usual  branches  of  photography  are  exhaustively  treated,  and  especially  full  information  is 
given  on  the  subject  of  photo  mechanical  printing,  in  which  Captain  Abney  is  an  expert.  The  manual 
is  one  we  can  commend  to  all  interested  in  the  study  of  photography." — Chemical  News,  May  1. 


Mailed  Post-paid  on  Receipt  of  Price,  75  Cents. 
BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  ^Ki^i^SfSf  PHILADELPHIA. 


4 


FROM  THE  £L  CORNERS 


OF  THE  GLOBE, 

And  from  hundreds  of  intermediate  points,  come  orders  after  orders  for  the 

Nasonian  Out-Outs. 


Never  was  an  article  offered  the  American  photographer  which  met  with 

such  rapid  sale. 

A  PERFECT  "STORM"  OF  LETTERS, 

Containing  orders,  and  "  N.  B.'s,"  and  "P.  S.'s,"  to  "send  theNasonians  by  return  mail," 
or  "  lightning  express,  as  we  want  to  be  the  first  to  introduce  them  here." 

We  have  large  orders  from  many  of  the  live  dealers ;  but  so  far  it  has  been  simply 
impossible  for  us  to  fill  them,  the  individual  rush  having  been  so  great.  They  will  be  with 
your  regular  dealer  soon.     Those  who  cannot  wait  had  better  order  direct  of  us. 


special.  «®«r 

In  introducing  the  Nasonian  Cut-Outs  to  the  photographic  fraternity,  at  home  and  abroad, 
it  was  our  desire  to  put  them  into  the  market  at  the  lowest  possible  price.  Our  great  anx- 
iety to  have  them  become  instantly  popular,  led  us  to  decide  on  the  price  before  we  had  com- 
pleted our  dies  and  presses.  The  enterprise  being  a  new  one,  we  never  dreamed  for  a  moment 
that  it  would  cost  over  two  or  three  hundred  dollars  to  prepare  for  the  manufacture  of  the 
same ;  but  here  we  made  a  grand  mistake,  for  we  have  already  expended  upwards  of  one 
thousand  dollars,  and  not  yet  fully  completed.  "We  expected  to  procure  our  paper  for 
twelve  or  fifteen  cents  per  pound  (and  so  we  could) ,  but  the  quality  did  not  please  us.  So 
we  had  &  peculiar  non-actinic  sample  gotten  up  expressly  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods, 
and  at  an  expense  of  $14.80  per  ream. 

"We  shall  fill  all  -paid  orders  received  up  to  October  1,  at  former  quotations.  Hereafter 
Cases  Two  and  Three  will  be  $2.50  each.  Case  One  remains  unchanged.  The  three  cases 
sent,  express  paid,  on  receipt  of  $7.00. 

See  advertisement  in  July,  August,  and  September  Philadelphia  Photographer,  and  direct 
your  orders  to  the 

NASON  NOVELTY  CO., 

COLUMBUS,  OHIO. 


Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 

EGGSHELL,  GLOSSY,  CHOCOLATE-TIITED. 

(PATENTED  MARCH  1st,  1870.) 

ALL  SIZES,  FEOM  1-9  to  10x14.  BLACK  AND  CHOCOLATE. 

THE  PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Worcester,  Mass., 

ARE  NOW  MAKING  THE  MOST  POPULAR  BRAND  OF  PLATES  IN  THE  TRADE. 


PRICE     LIST 

Size. 

Eggshell. 

Glossy. 

Size. 

Eggshell. 

Glossy 

Per  Box  of  8  Doz. 

1-9 

$0.80 

$0.90 

Per  Box  of  2  Doz. 

4-4 

$2.40 

$2.70 

"            8     " 

1-6 

1.25 

1.35 

"            4     " 

5-7 

2.40 

2.70 

8     " 

1-4 

1.85 

2.00 

((            2     " 

7-10 

2.70 

2.90 

"            4     " 

4£x6J 

1.85 

2.00 

"            2     " 

8x10 

2.70 

2.90 

4     « 

1-2 

2.20 

2.35 

Per  Sheet, 

10x14 

.17 

.18 

u            2     " 

4JxlO 

2.20 

2.35 

Ke vised,  New  York, 

December  28th,  1872 

EGGSHELL,    GLOSSY,    AND    CHOCOLATE-TINTED   PLATES,    ALL    SIZES   AND    STYLES, 
ALWAYS    ON    HAND   AND   READY   FOR   DELIVERY. 

Each  package  of  Phenix  Plates  has  printed  on  the  wrapper,  "Manufactured 

by  the  Phenix  Plate  Co.,  Worcester,  Mass.,"  and  none 

are  genuine  unless  bearing  that  stamp. 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  constitu- 
ting them  our  sole  and  exclusive  agents  for  the  sale  of  our  Plates. 

That  company  is  so  well  and  favorably  known  in  the  business,  that  no  com- 
mendation of  ours  is  required  to  assure  the  Trade  that  they  will  be  liberally 
dealt  with  in  every  respect. 

Phenix  Plates  are  for  sale  ty  all  Stock  Dealers  tbrouglioiit  tie  country. 

PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Manufacturers, 

Worcester,  Mass. 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO,  Apts  for  tie  Me,  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  I Y 


'hiladelphia  (frame  Manufactory 


Office  and  Salesroom,  822  Arch  St.  (second  story), 

PHIL  A  DMLPBIA, 

WHERE  THE  TRADE  WILL  EIND  THE  LARGEST  ASSORTMENT  OP 

GOLD  {0vakosrornd}  FRAMES 

In  this  city,  from  5  x  7  to  29  x  36,  together  with  a  large  assortment  of 

PINE  VELVET  MATS,  WITH  or  WITHOUT  FRAMES,' 

From  1-6  to  8-4  sizes  always  on  hand ;  larger  sizes  made  to  order. 

HOP*  These  Mats  are  of  Lyons  Silk  Velvet,  with  Prepared  and  G-ilt,  and  fine  fire  Gilt 
Rings  inside  for  Porcelains.     Also, 

ENGLISH  MATS,  ALL  SIZES. 

ENGLISH  DISPLAY  MATS,  any  size  and  style,  MADE  TO  ORDER. 


Any  kind  of  Fancy  or  Emblematic  Frames  made  to  order. 
FINE  COLD  OVAL  FRAMES,  20x24. 


2  in.,  .  .  $4  50  to  $6  00 

3  "    .  .     5  00  to     7  00 


3 J  in.,  .  .  $5  50  to  $10  00 

4     "     .  .     7  00  to     12  00 

Other  sizes  in  proportion. 


4Jin.,   .  .  $10  00  to  $14  50 
5   "      .  .     12  50  to     15  00 


Also,  all  sizes,  Walnut  Ovals  and  Solid  Walnut  Ovals  on  hand ;    Square 
Walnut  Frames  made  at  short  notice. 

Walnut  and  Prepared  Mouldings, 
Walnut  and  Gold  PIER  and  MANTEL  Looking-Glass  Frames, 

IN  DIFFERENT  STYLES  AND  PATTERNS. 
Trial  Orders  from  the  trade  respectfully  solicited 


Factory,  820  and  822  Cadwallader  St., 


Salesroom,  822  Arch  St.  (second  story),  Philadelphia. 


BENJ.  FRENCH  &  CO., 

159  Washington    St.,   Boston, 

IMPORTERS    AND   SOLE   AGENTS    FOR   THE    CELEBRATED 


mux. 


HEW  STEREOSCOPIC  EEISES. 

New  Stereoscopic  Tube  and  Lens,  made  expressly  for  us,  marked  with  our  name  (imita- 
tion. Dallmeyer),  with  rack  and  pinion,  central  stops,  for  portraits  or  views.  Will  work  in 
or  out  of  doors.  Also,  for  instantaneous  pictures.  Four  inch  focus,  price  per  pair, 
$22.00.  iiy  taking  out  back  lens,  and  using  only  front  lens  in  place  of  back,  you  get 
six  inch  focus.  The  great  and  increasing  demand  for  all  these  lenses,  is  sure  guaran- 
tee that  thev  are  the  best.    Read  the  following 


Testimonials. 

"I  have  tried  the  Mammoth  Voigtlander  you  sent  me,  and  I  consider  it  the  best  large  in- 
strument I  have  ever  seen,  and  I  have  tried  those  made  by  other  makers,  Dallrneyer's  in- 
cluded, and  they  do  not  compare  with  the  Voigtlander.  All  my  baby  pictures  were  made 
with  half-size  Voigtlander  lenses." — J.  Landy,  208  W.  Fourth  St.,  Cincinnati,  Feb.  25, 1874. 

"  The  Aroigtlander  lenses  have  always  been  favorites  with  me.  My  first  experience,  in  the 
days  of  daguerreotype,  was  with  one,  since  which  I  have  owned  and  tried  many  of  the  differ- 
ent sizes  and  never  saw  one  but  was  an  excellent  instrument.  Lately  again  trying  some  for 
my  own  use  and  for  a  friend,  I  found  them  to  be  superior  to  other  eminent  makers,  particu- 
larly' in  the  large  sizes." — W.  J.  Baker,  Buffalo,  V.  Y. 

"  Twenty-four  years  ago  I  bought  and  commenced  using  my  first  Voigtlander  lens.  It  was 
a  good  one.  Since  then  1  have  owned  and  used  a  good  many  of  the  same  brand,  of  various 
sizes.  They  were  all  and  always  good.  Some  of  the  larger  sizes  that  I  have  recently  bought 
seem  to  me  better  than  any  I  have  ever  had  or  seen  before." — J.  F.  Ryder,  Cleveland,  Ohio, 
Dec.  18, 1872. 

•'  About  a  year  ago  I  bought  a  Voigtlander  &  Son  No.  3  4-4  size  lens.  Said  instrument  gives 
me  great  satisfaction,  being  very  quie'k,  at  the  same  time  has  great  depth  of  focus." — E.  G. 
Maine,  Columbus,  Miss. 

"Have  never  seen  anything  equal  to  the  Voigtlander  &  Son  Lens.  The  No.  5,  Ex.  4-4  is 
the  best  instrument  I  ever  used.  I  cannot  keep  house  without  it." — D.  B.  Vickeey,  Saver- 
hilt,  Mass. 

"The  pair  of  imitation  Dallmeyer  Stereoscopic  Lenses  you  sent  we  are  very  much  pleased 
with ;  they  work  finely." — Goodridge  Bros.,  Fast  Saginaw,  Mich. 

"  After  a  trial  of  your  imitation  Dallmeyer  in  the  field  with  those  of  the  Dallmeyer  Rapid 
Rectilinear,  side  by  side,  I  can  say  that  for  general  views  I  like  yours  as  well,  for  some  ob- 
jects far  better,  on  account  of  their  short  focal  length." — D.  H.  Cross,  Mosher's  Gal.,  Chicago. 


ALBION  Ami™  COS 

(LONDON  AND  GLASGOW), 

PAPER. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"  It  is  good  enough  to  eat.     I  use  it  altogether  for  the  prints  for  the  Philadelphia  Photographer. '' — 
Wm.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"The  last  lot  of  paper  was  as  good  as  we  wish  to  use. — Vandyke  &  Brown,  Liverpool,  largest  con 
sumers  in  KngUmd. 


FOR  EXAMPLE  OF  PRINTING  SEE  OCTOBER  NO.  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


A  FRESH  SUPPLY  JUST  RECEIVED  Br 

BENER1EA1I    <£    WXX*SON. 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


«@-     TO   PROFESSIONAL   PHOTOGRAPHERS    AND   THE   TRADE. 


CH.    DAUVOIS, 

Acknowledged  to  be  the  Best  and  Cheapest  in  the  World. 


D. 


f— |     I  ^      |H  ROHAUT    &    HUTINET, 

-■-  -*■    *— '         ■*-       JL    -L   ^      M-^J      JL     ^  SUCCESSORS, 

No.  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris, 


ESPECIAL    MANUFACTURERS   OF 


MOUNTS 


-2S.F0R  PHOTOGRAPHY. 

TRADE    MARK,    Ch.D. 


Mounts  for  Cartes-de-Visite, 
Cabinet  Portrait, 
Victoria  Card, 

Stereoscopic  Views — all  new  samples  of  French 
styles. 


Bristol  Boards  of  every  size  and  thickness,  plain. 

India  Tinted  and  Fancy  Printing. 

Book-post  and  Card  Cases. 

Stout  Blotting  Paper  Albums. 

First-class  Rives  Albumenized  Paper,  &o.,  &c. 

MEDALS  AWARDED  AT  EVERT  EXHIBITION. 

All  orders  are  to  be  sent  to  their  establishment,  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris,  or  to  Wholesale  Houses 
of  the  United  States.     Samples  on  application. 

LIBERAL  DISCOUNT  TO  WHOLESALE  HOUSES. 


NEWELL'S  CHEMICAL-PROOF  WARE. 

TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS  AND  STOCK-HEALERS. 

A  year  ago  we  introduced  our  Dishes  and  Bath- Holders  at  the  Convention  then  being  held  in  the 
City  of  Buffalo,  as  filling  what  we  supposed  to  be  a  necessity  in  the  yihotographic  fraternity.  Our 
goods  then,  merely  as  they  were  first  created,  and  in  a  manner  in  their  crude  state,  attracted  more 
than  a  passing  notice.  A  year  of  practical  experience  has  suggested  some  changes  and  many  improve- 
ments, until  we  have  now  perfected  what  is  acknowledged  to  be  the  very  acme  of  perfection  :  in  attest- 
ation of  which,  the  following  eminent  corroborative  testimony  is  offered: 

New  York,  June  27th,  1874. 

I  have  in  constant  use  one  of  your  Improved  Bath-Holders  and  it  works  finely.  I  consider  it  one 
of  the  many  desirable  improvements  of  the  age,  as  it  possesses  the  qualifications  of  being  good  as  well 
as  cheap:  even  the  largest  sizes  are  light  and  easily  handled  in  comparison  with  the  heavy  sind  cum- 
bersome holders  so  long  in  use.  Yours  respectfully,  Abm.  Bogardus. 

St.  Louis,  Mo.,  May  18,  1874. 

It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  bear  testimony  to  the  great  value  of  your  Baths  and  Dishes  for  photo- 
graphic purposes.  I  have  heretofore  used  porcelain,  glass,  and  vulcanized  rubber,  but  usually  managed 
to  break  at  least  one  dozen  a  year — with  all  the  care  that  I  could  possibly  take  of  them  they  would  at 
times  get  a  knock,  a  fall,  a  break  somehow  :  but  now  I  feel  my  troubles  are  at  an  end  with  my  solution 
dishes,  for  I  look  upon  your  dishes  and  baths  as  the  photographer's  boon,  being  durable,  light,  and 
cheap,  and  no  well-regulated  gallery  should  be  without  a  full  set.  Most  respectfully, 

N.B. — This  notice  is  unsolicited.  J.  H.  Fitzgibbon. 

■  Philadelphia,  January  16,  1874. 

Our  attention  having  been  called  to  your  patent  Baths,  we  determined  upon  giving  them  a  trial.  In 
justice  to  your  discovery,  we  feel  it  our  duty  to  attest  its  merits.  It  is  all  that  is  claimed,  and  more  : 
for,  apart  from  the  many  advantages  claimed  for  it,  it  produces  the  most  perfect  negatives  we  ever 
made,  and  seems  to  have  the  quality  of  purifying  the  solution.  Once  used  no  photographer,  we  feel 
confident,  would  be  without  them.  Schreiber  &  Sons. 


DO  NOT  BE  PERSUADED  TO  USE  ANY  OTHER.  PRICE  LIST  FURNISHED  ON  APPLICATION. 

Manufactured  by  E.  NEWELL  k  SON,  626  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


SOUTHERN 

Photographic^Ferrotype 

STOCK  DEPOT, 
Savannah,  Geo. 

FIRST-CLASS  STOCK 

AT  NORTHERN  PRICES, 

ip  Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance, 
cRosscuptwESTTrHA:^-^^ — ~-^^  Drayage,  &e. 

SZEICTID     FOB    IPIR/IOIE]     LIST. 


WAY  MOUTH'S 


ignetting  Papers 


ARE  NOW  MADE  OF  TWO  SHAPES,  as  shown  in  the  drawings  above.  They  consist  of  finely- 
gradated,  lithographed  designs,  mounted  on  protecting  sheets  of  non-actinic  paper,  and  are  the  light 
est,  neatest,  and  best  means  of  producing  vignette  pictures  ever  offered. 

TESTIMONIALS: 

"  Waymouth's  Improved  Vignette  Papers  I  have  tried,  and  they  are  just  what  I  have  been  want- 
ing lor  years." — Well  G.  Singhi. 

"  They  readily  admit  of  the  gradation  already  very  good,  being  modified  easily  to  suit  the  negative. 
This,  I  take  it,  is  a  point  of  great  importance." — G.  Wharton  Simpson,  X.A.,  P.S.A. 

"  From  a  trial  made,  we  are  enabled  to  say  that  they  answer  exceedingly  well  ;  and  they  are  certain 
to  find  favor  among  photographers — a  favor  they  well  deserve." — British  Journal  of  Photography. 

"I  can  testify  to  the  exquisite  softness  obtained  from  your  Vignette  Papers,  which  gradual  and 
soft  effect  I  have  never  seen  equalled  by  any  other  method." — H.  A.  H.  Daniel,  Esq.,  Hon.  Sec.  of  the 
Bristol  and  Clifton  Amateur  Photographic  Association. 

"  The  Waymouth  Vignetting  Paper  are  a  decided  success.  They  are  splendid." — J.  W.fyJ.  S. 
Moulton,  Salem  Mass. 

From  Professional  Photographers. — "First-class."  "The  sample  sent  answers  perfectly."  "I 
consider  them  first  rate  articles."  "I  think  your  Vignette  Papers  will  be  a  great  improvement  on 
the  old  glasses."     &c,  &c. 

Any  number  sent  on  receipt  of  price,  by  any  stockdealer,  or  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers, 

PHILADELPHIA . 

{See  opposite  page.) 


DO  YOU   USE 


WAYMOUTH'S 

VIGNETTE 

PAPERS. 

(DESIGNS    COPYRIGHTED.) 

IS  THE  MOST  ARTISTIC, 


OF  ALL  PICTURES,  THE 


wjjttette 


When  properly  printed.  But  the  clumsy  devices  generally  in  use  for  printing  them, 
or  rather  for  Wending  the  shading  about  the  figure,  produce  but  very  few  really  artistic 
vignette  pictures.  Either  the  shading  is  too  intensely  dark,  not  gradated  in  tint  at  all,  or 
it  shows  an  ugly  direct,  decided  line,  which  is  very  repulsive.  The  shading  should 
blend  gradually  from  the  dark  tint  nearest  to  the  figure,  off  into  the 
white  background.  The  results  are  then  soft,  artistic,  and  beautiful.  The  easiest  and 
best  way  to  secure  them  is  by  the  use  of 

WAYMOUTH'S  VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 

THEY  AEE  NOT  CLUMSY ;  DO  NOT  BKEAK  ;  AKE  ALWAYS  KE AD Y ;  COST 
BUT  LITTLE,  AND  AKE  EASY  OE  APPLICATION  TO  ANY  NEGATIVE. 

THEY  NEED  BUT  ONE  ADJUSTMENT  TO  PRINT  ANY  QUANTITY. 

They  entirely  do  away  with  all  the  old  and  troublesome  methods,  either  wood,  metal, 
or  cotton. 

PLEASE  TRY  THE  SAMPLE  GIVEN  IN"  THIS  MAGAZINE  FOE  FEB.  1874. 


Eighteen  sizes  are  now  made,  suiting  all  dimensions  of  pictures  from  a  small  carte  figure 
to  Whole-size,  Victorias,  Cabinets,  &c.  They  are  printed  in  black  for  ordinary  negatives, 
yellow  bronze  for  thin  negatives,  and  red  bronze  lor  still  weaker  ones.  Directions  for  use 
accompany  each  parcel. 

IP  la  I  C  IE  S  : 

In  parcels  containing  one  of  each  size,  Nos.  1  to  15,  assorted  colors $1  00 

Assorted  sizes  and  colors,  by  number,  per  package  of  fifteen 1  00 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  assorted  sizes  and  colors,  for  Cartes,  by  number,  per  dozen 50 

"    6,  7,  11, 12,  and  13    "  "  "      Large  Cartes  and  Victorias,  by  number,  per  doz 75 

"    8,  9, 10,  14,  and  15    "  "  "     Cabinets  and  Whole-size,  "  "       100 

"    16,  17,  and  18,  "  "  "     Half  "  "  "  "      1  25 

(SEE  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

When  ordering,  state  the  number  and  color  you  want.  The  Waymouth  Vignette  Papers 
are  an  English  invention,  and  are  becoming  so  universally  used  in  Europe  that  we  have 
pleasure  in  introducing  them  to  our  patrons. 

BENERMAH  &  WILSON,  Manufacturers,  7th  and  Clerry,  JPUlaia. 

FOR   SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 


IMPROVED 


PHOTOGRAPH  COVERS 


Fig.  1. 
The  Outside  Appearance. 


Fig.  2. 
A.  Leaf  Showing  the  Guard. 


Frequent  inquiries  for  something  at  a  much  lower  price  than  an  album,  for  the  holding 
together  and  preservation  of  photographs,  has  induced  us  to  manufacture  an  article  which 
we  think  will  meet  the  want. 

IT  SERVES  ALL  THE  PURPOSES  OF  AN  ALBUM,  FOR 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Portraits, 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Landscapes, 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Photographs  of  any  hind, 

MAY  BE  NEATLY  AND  CHEAPLY  BOUND  IN  THESE  COVEKS. 

They  are  made  with  expanding  backs,  so  that  from  six  to  twenty-four  pictures  may  be 
inserted  in  one  cover.  The  pictures  are  mounted  in  the  usual  way,  and  then  strips  of  linen, 
or  strong  paper,  of  the  proper  width,  are  pasted  on  one  edge,  by  which  the  picture  is  inserted 
and  held  in  place  in  the  cover  by  a  paper  fastener.  Fig.  1  represents  the  cover,  with  the 
perforations  in  the  back,  through  which  the  spreading  clasps  of  the  paper  fastener  bind  the 
whole  together.  These  are  so  easily  inserted  or  removed,  that  pictures  are  readily  put  in  or 
taken  out  at  any  time.  Fig.  2  represents  the  picture,  with  the  guard  pasted  on  ready  for 
insertion.  The  arrangement  is  simple,  and  we  are  sure  will  be  readily  comprehended.  For 
binding  together  views  of  your  town  or  city,  or  portraits  of  celebrities,  they  are  very  neat 

The  following  is  a  list  of  sizes  and  prices,  without  cards : 


For  Photograph. 

Card  Size,    . 
Cabinet  Size, 


Per  dozen. 

$1.50 
2.25 


Per  hundred. 

$10.00 
13.50 


EXTRA   HEAVY    COVERS. 

5-8  Size, 4.50    . ' 33.00 

4-4      " 6.00 40.00 

8-10  " 8.00 56.50 

Larger  or  special  sizes  made  to  order.     Furnished  with  card  board  at  best  rates. 

mailed  at  dozen  price. 


Samples 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia. 


LONDON     1851. 


PARIS    1867. 


FORTRAT 


jl.  n^r  id 


VIEW8  LENSES. 


We  have  now  successfully  introduced  to  the  American  Photographers  the  Ross  Lens,  and  by  our 
increased  sales  we  know  they  are  appreciated.  Atthe  convention  held  at  Buffalo,  July  15,  many  fine 
photographs  were  exhibited  by  photographers,  and  ourselves,  made  with  the  Ross  Lens,  which 
attracted  great  attention. 

While  Ross  &  Co.  are  the  oldest  manufacturers  of  Photographic  Lenses  in  existence,  they  also 
keep  up  with  the  requirements  of  the  fraternity,  by  constantly  manufacturing  new  combinations  and 
improving  on  those  already  in  existence.  They  have  lately  perfected,  and  will  soon  furnish  us  stock 
of,  a  new  series  of  Card  Lenses,  extra  rapid,  peculiarly  adapted  for  babies,  and  people  who  will  not  be 
quiet.     We  will  give  notice  of  their  arrival. 

WE  HAVE  NOW  IN  STOCK 

Portrait  Lenses,  from  1-4  to  15x18.  Instantaneous  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Cabinet  Lenses,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3.  Medium  Angle  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Card  Lenses,  SJos.  1,  2,  and  3.  Large  Angle  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Triplets,  Bfos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7.  Stereog-raphic  Lenses,  all  sizes. 

We  shall  soon  have  in  Stock,  Ross  &  Co.'s  latest  introduction,  which  is  at  present  exciting  the 
Photographers  of  Europe  with  its  excellence,  and  has  been  named  the 


SY 


ETRICAL    LENS. 


We  shall  keep  following  sizes  in  stock,  other  numbers  imported  to  order. 


No. 


Large  Stop 
Covering. 


Frice. 


*3     5x4 

6     81^x6^ 

8     10x8 

11     15x12 

12     18x16 


Medium  Stop  Small  Stop  Equivalent 

Covering.                     Covering.                         Focus. 
•     7^x4^    8x5      5  inches $27  00 


9x7 
12x10 
18x16 
22x20 


10x8      S 

13x11      10 

22x18     18 

25x21     21 


54  00 
72  00 
108  00 
135  00 


In  matched  pairs,  $54.00. 


Numerous  testimonials  pronounce  them  to  be  the  best,  as  well  as  the  cheapest  Foreign  Lens  ever 
offered  to  the  American  Photographer. 

We  will  mail  price-list  on  application,  and  promptly  fill  all  orders. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., , 


SOLE  AGENTS  EOR 
HE  UNITED  STATES 


,  822  Arc!  St.,  PMlaflelpliia,  Pa. 


s 


^RHEIL'S  SOl/ 


TCEW 


lanatic  Lenses 


GROUPS, 
LANDSCAPES, 

AND 

COPIES. 


GROUPS, 
LANDSCAPES, 

AND 

COPIES. 


(A.etual  size  of  a  No.  1  Steinheil  Xr9M.) 

We  have  now  a  full  stock  of  these  celebrated  Lenses,  at  the  following  prices  : 


No.  1,  1-4  size, 

2 1-2     " 

"    3,  4-4     " 

4 8-10  " 

5,  10-12  " 

6 13-16  " 


?4  inch  focus,  $25  00 


5| 

7 

10i 

Ui 

16i 


30  00 

45  00 

60  00 

70  00 

110  00 


Nos.  1  and  2  are  in  matched  pairs  for  Stereoscopic  Work. 


"I  always  take  great  pleasure  in  recommending  the  Steinheil  Lenses,  and  you  can  say  almost 
anything  in  their  favor  for  me.  They  possess  all  the  merits  of  higher  priced  lenses,  and  if  I  was 
starting  again  I  should  stock  myself  with  them."— -B.  W.  Kilbdrn. 


THEY  ARE 

IN  USE  BY  MOST  LEADING  PHOTOGRAPHERS, 

INCLUDING 

GUTEKUNST,  WBNDEROTH, 

BROADBENT  &  PHILLIPS,  FENNEMORE, 

DeMORAT,  LOTHROP, 

And  many  others,  equally  well  known. 

We  feel  sure  that  at  least  one  of  these  Lenses  is  needful  for  the  successful  prosecution  of  your 
business,  and  so  solicit  your  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  States, 

No.  822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


THE 


Philadelphia  Photographer, 

Is  admitted  by  all  who  understand  such  things  to  be 

The  Livest  and  Best  Photographic  Magazine  Published ! 

IT    PUBLISHES 

A  Handsome  Specimen  Photograph  in  each  issue, 
The  Latest  Photographic  News  from  home  sources, 

Monthly  Letters  from  England,  France,  Germany,  and  Italy, 
Correspondence  from  all  parts  of  the  World, 

Illustrations  on  Wood  of  all  sorts  of  Articles  used  in  the  Art, 
Processes,  Formulae,  Wrinkles  and  Dodges,  without  number, 
The  Earliest  Information  on  all  matters  of  use  to  its  readers, 
Elaborate  Drawings  of  Skylights  in  all  parts  of  the  World, 

AND 

EACH  MONTHLY  ISSUE  IS  A  PHOTOGRAPHIC  WORK  IN  ITSELP. 

BE    ASSURED 

NO  PHOTOGRAPHER  CAN  AFFORD  TO  DO  WITHOUT  IT. 


NOW  IN  ITS  ELEVENTH  YEAK.     SAMPLE  COPIES  FKEE. 


Please  read  what  we  offer  for  new  subscribers  as 

PREMIUMS,  on  the  RED  LETTER  PAGE  THIS  MONTH. 


NOTICE   TO    SUBSCRIBERS. 


Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  $2.50  for  six  months,  50  cents  per  copy.     Positively  in  advance. 

In  remitting  by  mail  a  post-office  order,  or  draft  payable  to  the  order  of  Benerman  &  Wilson,  is 
preferable  to  bank  notes.     Clearly  give  your  Post-office,  County,  and  State. 

Canada  subscribers  must  remit  24  cents  extra,  to  prepay  postage.  Foreign  subscriptions  must  be 
accompanied  by  the  postage  in  addition. 

Advertising  sheets  are  bound  with  each  number  of  the  Magazine.  Advertisements  are  inserted 
at  the  following  rates : 

One  Month.  Six  Months.  One  Year. 

OnePage, $20  00  $110  00  $200  00 

Half    "      12  00  66  00  120  00 

Quarter  Page, 7  00  38  50  70  00 

Eighth        "      4  00  22  00  40  00 

Oards,  of  Six  lines  or  less, 2  00  11  00  20  00 

The  attention  of  advertisers,  and  those  having  galleries,  &c,  for  sale,  is  called  to  our  Specialties 
pages.  Terms  $2  for  >ix  lines,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a  line,  always 
in  advance.  Duplicate  insertions,  50  cents  less,  each.  Sure  to  pay.  Jgig'^Operators  desiring  situa- 
tions, no  charge. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

OFFICE,  S.  W.  COR.  OF  SEVENTH  AND  CHEERY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


THE  ENTREKIN  BURNISHER  PATENTS. 


THE 

OPINIONS  OF 

EMINENT 

COUNSELGIVEN 

in 
THEIR  FAVOR. 


THEIR 

VALIDITY 

ESTABLISHED 

BEYOND  DOUBT 


Patented  May  20,  and  December  2,  1S73. 

TO   DEALERS  AND   PHOTOGRAPHERS: 

The  proprietor  of  the  Weston  &  McDonald  Patent  for  a  Photographic  Burnisher  having 
advertised  that  he  has  prosecuted  all  the  photographers  and  dealers  in  photographic  stock 
in  the  New  England  States  who  are  making,  using,  or  selling  the  Entrekin  Oscillating 
Enameler  for  Burnishing  Photographs,  I  take  this  method  of  informing  the  trade  and  the 
public  that  there  is  no  foundation  whatever 'for  the  statement  referred  to.  I  have  guaran- 
teed the  validity  of  my  patent  to  all  who  make,  sell,  or  use  it,  and  have  covenanted  to  de- 
fend them  against  any  and  all  suits  for  infringement  by  the  following  guarantee: 

"Whereas, has  purchased  Photograph  Burnisher  No. of  my  invention,  and  made  under  my 

Patent,  No.  145,161,  granted  December  2d,  1873, 1,  William  G.  Entrekin,  hereby  covenant  and  agree  to  warrant 

and  defend  the  said his  heirs,  executors,  administrators,  and  assigns,  in  the  use  of  said  Burnisher, 

against  the  consequences  of  any  and  all  suits  for  infringement  which  may  be  brought  against  him,  by  the 
owner  or  owners  of  any  other  Photograph  Burnisher  whatsoever. 

"In  Witness  Whereof,  I,  the  said  William  G.  Entrekin,  have  hereunto  set  my  hand  and  seal  this 

day  of A.D.  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and "Witness ." 

Threats  for  the  purpose  of  intimidation  have  been  freely  circulated,  but  only  a  single  suit 
has  been  brought,  and  that  was  commenced  at  my  invitation,  in  order  that  the  question  of 
the  alleged  infringement  might  be  settled  by  the  adjudication  of  a  court.  I  deny  that  my 
patent  infringes  the  patent  of  Weston  &  McDonald  in  any  particular,  and  in  support  of 
that  denial  cite  the  following  opinion  of  eminent  counsel : 

WILLIAM  G.  Entrekin.  Washington,  D.  C,  Friday,  June  5,  1871. 

Dear  Sir  :  Yours  is  just  received.  You  need  not  fear  any  trouble  from  any  parties  in  regard  to  the  Weston 
Machine.  Your  Burnisher  does  not  infringe  with  any  feature  of  the  Weston  Machine  in  the  least  particular. 
You  can,  therefore,  manufacture  and  sell  your  machines  with  impunity. 

Yours  truly,  C.  M.  Parks, 

Attorney-at- Law  and  Solicitor  of  Fatents,  Late  Examiner  in  Patent  Office. 

Stansburt  &  Mdsn, 
Attorneys  and  Counsellors-at-Law,  and  Solicitors  of  American  and  Foreign  Patents, 
W.  G.  Entrekin,  Esq.  Washington,  D.  C,  August  7,  1874. 

Sir:  I  have  examined  reissued  Letters  Patent  No.  5281,  granted  February  11,  1873,  to  Weston  &  McDonald, 
and  your  Patent  No.  145,161,  of  December  2,  1873,  for  Photograph  Burnishers,  and  am  of  opinion  that  your 
Burnisher  does  not  infringe  the  Weston  &  McDonald  Patent.  Chas.  T.  Stansbury. 

WILLIAM  G.  ENTREKIN,  Esq.  Philadelphia,  September  3,  1874. 

Having  examined  Letters  Patent  No.  145,161,  dated  December  2, 1873,  to  William  G.  Entrekin,  for  an  improve- 
ment in  burnishers  for  photographs,  and  also  reissued  Letters  Patent  No.  5281,  dated  February  11,1873,  to  E.  R. 
Weston  and  T.  McDonald,  for  a  similar  invention,  I  am  of  opinion  that  burnishers  constructed  according  to 
the  Entrekin  patent  do  not  infringe  the  patent  to  Weston  &  McDonald.  Yours  truly, 

Geo.  Harding,  Attomey-at-Law. 

EXCELSIOR ! 


The  Scovill  Gold  Medal  was  awarded  by  the  National  Photogra- 
phic Association  of  the  United  States  to  W.  G.  Entrekin,  for  his 
Oscillating  Enameler  for  Burnishing  Photographs,  Chicago,  Julv  16, 
1874. 

Photographers  will  see  that  we  have  a  first-class  article,  and  do 
not  wish  to  impose  upon  them  by  selling  a  press  that  will  not  work. 
We  guarantee  our  press  to  do  all  we  claim  for  it,  as  was  shown  sat- 
isfactorily at  the  Exhibition  at  Chicago,  where  the  press  was  exhib- 
ited and  worked. 

PRICE    LIST: 

6-inch  Roll,  $25 ;  10-inch,  $40;  H-inch,  $50;  18-inch,  $75. 

If  you  cannot  obtain  the  press  of  your  dealer,  send  your  order  to 


W.  G.  ENTKEKIN, 

4382  &  4384  Main  St.,  Manayunk.  Philadelphia. 


Number  132. 


50  Cents. 


THE 


PHILADELPHIA 


fcatajranltor. 


AH  ILLUSTRATED  MONTHLY  JOURNAL, 
DEVOTED  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 

THE  OPPIOIAL  OKGAN  OF  THE  NATIONAL  PHOTOGEAPHIO 
ASSOCIATION  OP  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

Edited  by  Edward  L.  Wilson. 

ID  e  o  e  xxi  "fc>  o  r,    18  74. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

BENEKMAN     &     WILSON, 

PUBLISHERS, 

S.  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts. 


Subscriptions  received  by  all  News  and  Stock-Dealers. 

FIVE  DOLLARS  PER  ANNUM,  IN  ADVANCE. 


Sherman  &  Co.,  Printers,  Philadelphia. 


SOMETHING   NEW!     See  Advertisement  inside. 


SUMMARY    OF    CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

A  Last  Word  for  and  before  1875 353 

Order  Sheets 353 

A  Photographic  School  of  Instruction 354 

Views  Abroad  and  Across.    By  Edward  L.  Wilson, 

XII 355 

The  Transit  of  Venus 363 

Our  Picture 366 

Photographing  Interiors : 368 

A  Word  or  Two  about  Books 370 


PAGE 

Matters  of  the  N.  P.  A 371 

Proceedings  of  the  Executive  Committee  of  the  N. 

P.  A 372 

Society  Gossip 373 

The  Glace  Picture 375 

Belgian  Correspondence.    By  Charles  Waldack....  375 
German  Correspondence.    By  Prof.  H.  Vogel,  Ph.D.  379 

Photography  in  France.    By  Ernest  Lacan 380 

Editor's  Table 382 


Embellishment. — Architectural  Study.    Negatives  and  Prints  by  W.  A.  Mansell  &  Co.,  London. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Albion  Albumenizing  Co.'s  Paper. 

Anderson,  J.  A.    Photographic  Apparatus. 

Announcement  of  the  Philadelphia  Photogra- 
pher (red  letters). 

Anthony  &  Co.,  E.  &  H.  T.    The  Bowdish  Chair. 

Art  Publications. 

Barnett,  John.    Patent  Cameo  Dies. 

Beard,  J.  P.,  &  Co.    Photo.  Goods  and  Materials. 

Benerman  &  Wilson.    Lantern  Slides.    Wet  Books. 

Bierstadt,  Charles.    Photo.  Views. 

Bigelow's  Album  of  Lighting  and  Posing. 

Bullock  &  Crenshaw.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Cameo  Press,  The  Universal. 

Clemons,  Jno.  R.    Albumen  Paper.    Varnish. 

Collins,  Son  &  Co.,  A.  M.    Photograph  Cards. 

Cooper,  Chas.,  &  Co.  Wholesale.  Agents  for  "Usener's 
Mammoth  Tubes." 

Cooper,  Chas.,  &  Co.    Hammenstede's  Collodion. 

Curtis,  G.  E.    Stereo.  Views. 

Dean,  John  &  Co.    Adamantean  Ferrotype  Plates. 

Entrekin,  W.  G.    Oscillating  Enameler. 

Faser,  C.    Frames. 

Ferrotyper's  Guide. 

For  Sale,  The  Remains  of  the  Photographer's  Friend. 

French,  B.  &  Co.    Voigtlander  Lenses,  &c. 

Gennert,  G.    Albumen  Paper,  &c. 

Gihon,  John  L.    Opaque  and  CuWDuts. 

Griswold's  Life  Compositions  for  the  Stereoscope. 

Hance's  Photo.  Specialties. 

Hale,  Kilburn  &  Co.    Frames,  Mouldings,  &c. 

Hearn,  Chas.  W.    Collodio-Chloride. 

Hermagis'  Portrait  Objectives. 

How  to  Paint  Photographs. 

Hutinet,  D.    Photographic  Mounts. 

Improved  Photograph  Covers. 

Instruction  in  Photography. 

Kilburn  Bros.    Stereoscopic  Views. 

Lea's  Manual  of  Photography. 

Lewis,  R.  A.    Collodion. 

Liesegang,  E.    Panoramic  Apparatus. 

Linn's  Landscape  Photography. 

Loeffler,  J.    Stereoscopic  Views. 


Losscher  &  Petsch.    A  New  Invoice,  of  Studies. 

Magee,  James  F.  &  Co.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

McAllister,  W.  Mitchell.    Manufacturing  Ontician, 

McCollin,    Thos.    H.     Photo.    Materials  and  Picture 

Moore,  Albert.    Solar  Printing.  [Frames. 

Mosaics,  1875. 

Moulton,  L.  V.    Rapid  Photo-Washer. 

Myers,  C.  E.    Patent  Light-Controller. 

Nason  Novelty  Co.    Nasonian  Cut-Outs. 

Newell,  R.,  &  Son.    Chemical-Proof  Ware. 

Pattberg,  Lewis  &  Bro.    Passepartouts,  &c. 

Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 

Photographer's  Pocket  Reference-Book. 

Photographic  Publications. 

Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 

Powers  &  Weightman.    Photographic  Chemicals. 

Prize  Pictures. 

Rau,  Geo.    German  Albumen  Colors. 

Robinson's  New  Photo.  Trimmer. 

Robinson's  Metallic  Guides. 

Report  of  the  1874  N.  P.  A.  Convention. 

Ross'  Portrait  and  View  Lenses. 

Rulofson's  Views. 

Ryan,  D.  J.    Photo.  Stock  Depot,  Chromos,  &c. 

Sauter,  G.    Passepartouts. 

Schwarze  &  Valk.    Photo.  Papers. 

Scovill  Manf'g.  Co.    Photographic  Materials. 

"Something  New." 

Spicer's  Lustrene. 

Steinheil's  New  Aplanatic  Lenses. 

Stevens,  Chas.  W.    Photographic  Goods. 

Studies,  Mansell  &  Co.'s,  Landscape  and  Architectural. 

The  Practical  Printer. 

vogel's  hand-book  of  photography. 

Waymouth's  Vignetting  Papers. 

Weller's  Stereoscopic  Treasures. 

Wilson,  Chas.  A.    Photo.  Goods,  Spicer's  Lustrene. 

Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.    Photo.  Materials,  &c.j  "Bargains." 

Willy  Wallach.    Albumen  Paper. 

Woodward,  D.  A.    Solar  Cameras. 

Zentmayer,  Joseph.    Lenses. 

Zimmerman  Bros.    Photographic  Stock  Depot. 


MlatUljrttfa  Ittotflgrajjte, 


m  A  MAGNIFICENT  VOLUME. 


HE  Volume  of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer  for  1875,  -will  be 
the  most  beautiful  and  useful  that  has  ever  been  published.  The  pub- 
lishers are  determined  not  to  be  Excelled  by  any  other  periodical  in  the 
^world.  Their  long  experience  and  their  wide  connection  at  home  and  abroad 
with  the  leading  spirits  in  the  Art,  enables  them  to  obtain  the  earliest  and  best 
:  things  that  are  from  time  to  time  made  known  in  all  parts  of  the  world.  Unless 
>we  can  be  first  and  best  in  all  matters  which  turn  up  for  the  benefit  of  our 
subscribers,  we  shall  relinquish  all  claims  to  their  consideration  and  patronage. 
Ours  is  the  only  Photographic  Magazine  in  America  'which  is  exclusively  in- 
terested in  the-  welfare  of  its  patrons ;  no  private  interests ;  everything  given  is  for  the 
good  of  the  whole  fraternity,  and  carefully  prepared.    No  sugar  coating. 

In  addition  to  a  monthly  feast  of  practical  hints  and  suggestions  from  our  own  home 
workers,  our  foreign  subscribers  and  correspondents  will  not  fail  to  keep  us  posted  on 
everything  going  on  among  them,  so  that  we  shall  hear  monthly  from  France,  England. 
Belgium.  Prussia.  Italy,  etc.,  etc. 


% 


OTTIR, 


PICTURES 

FOR  THE  NEW  VOLUME 


Will  include  a  number  of  foreign  specimens  which  will  surprise  you  when  you  see 
them.  But  none  the  less  elegant  will  be  those  from  negatives  by  our  own  native  artists, 
Our  January  Issue  will  oontain  a  splendid  portrait  of  WM.  H.  RULOFSON,  Esq., 
President  of  the  National  Photographio  Association,  to  be  followed  by  other  splendid 
subjects.  In  fact,  in  every  respect,  we  shall  try  to  excel  anything  we  have  ever  produced 
before.    The  subscription  price  will  remain  at  $5  per  annum,  and  include  the  postage. 

gST"  As  we  are  compelled  to  prepay  the  postage,  the  magazine  "will  not  be  sent  to  any 
but  those  who  pay  their  subscription  in  advance. 

THE  EXTRA  ATTRACTIONS 

"Which  we  shall  add  to  our  new  volume  will  cause  us  considerable  outlay,  and  we 
must,  therefore,  neoessarily  increase  our  expenses.  This  being  so,  we  are  compelled 
to  look  for  MORE  SUBSCRIBERS.     It  would  cost  us  to  obtain  500  new  subscribers, 

through  news  agents  and  stock-dealers,  and  by  means  of  premiums,  etc,  at  least  $500. 


We  have,  therefore,  decided  not  to  offer  15  cent  chromos  as  premiums,  but  to  make  to 
our  present  subscribers,  or  to  those  -who  may  become  such  by- 
July  1st,  1875,  the  following 

MA&MiFWBMT  PMBMBMTM I 

A— 1  Cash  Present, $100  00 

B— 1        '•               •         SO  OO 

C— 1        "              •■ 25  OO 

■  D— 2       "              "        $16  each, 30  OO 

E— 5                      "           10      "           SO  OO 

F— 10     •'              "             5      " SO  OO 

G— IS  copies  Dr.  Vogel's  Hand-Book,  2d  edition,  $3.50,     ...  52  SO 

H—  25  copies  Hearn's  Practical  Printer,  $2.50, 62  50 

I — 40  copies  Wilson's  Lantern  Journeys,  $2, 80  OO 


Total  Amount  in  Presents, 


$500  OO 


-83T  A  is  to  be  given  to  the  one  who  sends  us  the  largest  number  of  new  subscribers  for  one  year,  at  $5  each,  In 
advance,  by  July  1,  1875 ;  B  to  the  one  who  sends  the  next  largest  number,  and  so  on  with  the  whole  hundred  presents 
to  the  end.    Those  who  send  only  one  will  be  entitled  to  one  dollar's  worth  of  our  publications. 


In  seeking  to  extend  the  circulation  of  the  Photog- 
rapher, its  publishers  find  that  the  best  agents  they  can 
interest  in  the  work  are  its  subscribers,  who  know  its 
character  and  can  speak  intelligently  of  its  merits. 

For  this  reason  they  offer  inducements  only  to 
subscribers,  to  use  their  influence  and  to  spend  their 
time  in  its  behalf. 

These  inducements  are  in  the  form  of  presents 
and  of  premiums,  which  are  simply  given  as  payment 
for  work  done.    . 

Although  the  presents  and  the  premiums  are  very 
costly  and  valuable,  and  may  seem  to  some  persons 
extravagant,  yet  they  present  what  seems  to  us  the  best 
way  of  paying  commissions  for  new  names;  and  all 
papers  are  obliged  to  pay  commissions  for  this  purpose, 
or  to  employ  agents  at  heavy  salaries. 

We  must  do  as  others  do,  in  order  to  secure  a  large 
circulation  for  the' Photographer,  for  its  price  is  so  low, 


and  its  publication  is  so  costly,  that  it  could  not  live  a 
year  unless  it  had  a  large  subscription  list. 
The  gifts  that  we  offer  will  be  given  to  the  one  hun- 
dred subscribers  to  the  Photographer  who  send  us  the 
largest  number  of  new  names  by  July  1, 1875. 

The  Presents  are  given  to  subscribers,  not  to  news- 
paper club  agents  or  dealers,  for  the  reason  that  their 
business  gives  them  facilities  which  a  regular  subscri- 
ber does  not  possess,  and  it  is  -not  just,  therefore,  to 
place  an  ordinary  subscriber  in  competition  with  an 
organized  business.  We  wish  the  presents  to  be  re- 
ceived by  regular  subscribers  to  the  magazine  scattered 
all  over  the  country,  who  can  only  devote  intervals  of 
their  time  to  the  work,  and  who  will  find  the  presents 
useful. 

The  Premiums  are  given  alike  to  all  full-paid  sub- 
scribers to  the  paper,  whether  newspaper  agents,  deal- 
ers, or  not,  who  send  us  new  subscribers. 


J8S*  Those  who  prefer  it  am  have  the  equivalents  of  their  Presents  in  any  other  works  published  by  vs. 

HOW  10?   CLA-IDsT   IBIS  ZDOlsTIE. 

1.  Renew  your  oivn  subscription  for  1875,  in  order  to  make  yourself  eligible  to  a  Bhare 

in  our  offer  of  presents. 

2.  Get  your  operator,  and  printer,  and  retoucher  to  subscribe,  or  give  it  to  them. 

3.  Many  of  your  enlightened  customers  would  take  it,  for  the  pictures  are  worth  $5  a  year. 

4.  Try  your  co-workers  in  the  same  town  or  city  with  you,  or  wherever  you  know  them 

to  be.     Spend  a  few  hours  writing  postal  cards. 

5.  Get  your  wives  and  employees  to  help  you. 

6.  Try  all  your  Public  Libraries,  and  Literary  Societies,  and  Reading  Rooms,  etc.     Ask 

everybody.     A  little  effort  will  pay,  and  enable  us  to  give  you  a  better  Journal,  be- 
sides thus  paying  you  double. 

a-o  _a.t  it  nsrowi 

A  Sample  Copy  will  be  sent  free  to  any  address  until  January  1st. 

must  be  sent  for  postage,  etc. 


After  that,  10  cents 


MOTIf^E?  —POSTAGE  FREE  TO  ALL  SUBSCRIBERS  IN  THE  UNITED 
IlIVy  I  IvL  STATES,  Vg&~  Persons  desiring  to  renew  their  subscriptions  to 
The  PhilfidelpliifM,  Photographer,  will  much  oblige  the  Publishers  by  sending  in  their 
names  as  early  as  convenient,  before  the  expiration  of  their  present  subscriptions.  This 
will  obviate  the  delay  attendant  upon  re-entering  names  and  mailing  back  numbers,  and 
entitle  them  to  compete  for  the  presents  offered. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  PhotOCThic  Mite,  7th  &  Cherry,  PMM'a,  Pa. 

t&~  PLEASE  SEND  FOR  OUB  CATALOGUE.  ~m 


])r.  Vogel's  Handbook. 

SECOND  EDITION. 

THE  HANDBOOK  OF  THE  PRACTICE  AND 
ART  OF  PHOTOGRAPHY, 

By  Prof.  H.  YOG  EL,  Ph.D.,  Berlin,  Prussia. 
IS  NOW  READY.      AI™r„V™  ™™™£r°      PRICE,  $3.50. 

It  is  Elegantly  Illustrated,  with  Paotopapls  and  EngraMs.  Clota  BenM, 


The  reputatian  Dr.  Vogel  enjoys  in  this  country  as  a  practical  photographic  writer,  is 
first-class,  and  insures  a  hook  of  the  best  quality.  That  his  Handbook  is  eminently  so,  we 
guarantee.  It  has  been  re-arranged  and  revised  specially  for  the  American  photographer, 
giving  the  best  German  formulae,  &c,  and  is,  in  every  sense  of  the  word,  a  Handbook  of 
the  practical  and  a?-tistic  departments  of  Photography.  Over  fifteen  hundred  of  the  first 
edition  were  sold,  and  the  demand  continues. 

IT  ILLUSTRATES  AND  TELLS 

How  the  Ateliers  are  built  and  *sed  in  Berlin  and  elsewhere ; 
How  to  make  the  best  Photographs  ; 

How  to  select  and  use  your  Lenses ; 

How  to  manage  your  Apparatus ; 
How  to  compose  the  Picture ;  How  to  pose  the  Sitter ; 

How  to  choose  Accessories ; 

How  Berlin  Cards  are  Made  ; 

How  to  do  everything  in  the  Art. 

TEACHES  HOW  TO  BECOME  A  PERFECT  PHOTOGRAPHER. 

The  whole  includes,  under  one  cover,  everything  needed  for  the  practice  of  photography  by 
the  beginner,  the  amateur,  and  the  professional — a  complete  Handbook.    See  contents  of  Book# 

The  engravings  are  numerous,  elaborate,  and  expensive.  Four  photographs,  illustrating 
the  lighting  of  the  subject,  accompany  the  work.     Please  read  future  advertisements 


ASK  YOUR  DEALER  FOR   IT. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

S,  W.  cor.  Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  JPhilada. 


REPORT ! 


OF  THE 


1874  N.  P.  A.  CONVENTION, 

HELD  AT  CHICAGO,  JULY,  187 '£. 

$L00.  Now  Ready!  $1.00, 


PUBLICATION  LIMITED  TO  500  COPIES, 

AND  MOST  OF  THEM  ALREADY  TAKEN  UP. 

S^~  Order  Early  or  you  won't  get  it.  l^g 

Only  the  PRACTICAL  and  USEFUL  parts  are  included,  such  as  papers  read,  discussions, 
etc.     It  is  well  worth  the  money.     All  orders  should  be  addressed  to 

EDWARD  L.  WILSON,  Permanent  Secretary, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

THE  REMAINS 

OF  THE 

Photographers'  Friend, 

AND 

PHOTOGRAPHERS'  FRIEND  ALMANAC, 

FOR  SALE ! 

COPIES  OF  THE  PHOTOGRAPHERS'   FRIEND,  .         .         .      '.         .     30  cents. 

ALMANAC,  1872, 30     " 

ALMANAC,  1873,  with  portrait  of  Ex-President  Bogardus, 30     " 

Sold  cheap  to  close  them  out,  as  their  publication  has  been  discontinued. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


THE 


kiladetphui  Wlwtnpnyhtx. 


Vol.  XI.  DECEMBER,  1874. 

Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1874, 
By  BENEKMAN  &  WILSON, 
In  the  orBce  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


No.  13  2. 


A  Last  Word  for  and  before  1875. 

We  will  not  burden  you  with  as  long  an 
article  as  usual  at  the  close  of  the  year,  for 
as  we  grow  older  we  learn  to  be  more  brief 
and  more  earnest.  Eleven  years  have  now 
come  and  gone  since  we  took  up  the  pen  in 
your  behalf,  and  we  hope  to  enter  upon  the 
twelfth  with  all  of  you  upon  our  subscrip- 
tion list,  and  many  more.  Shall  we  not  ? 
We  know  that  times  are  not  as  we  would 
like  to  have  them,  yet  we  believe  you  need 
us  and  we  do  need  you,  so  we  shall  work  on. 
We  have  been  some  months  preparing  good 
and  useful  things  for  you,  because  we  believe 
it  to  be  our  duty  as  well  as  yours  to  try  to 
produce  better  work  each  year  than  that 
made  the  year  before.  You  may  therefore 
look  for  improvements,  both  in  the  reading 
matter  and  in  the  pictures.  As  to  the  lat- 
ter, we  hope  to  make  an  announcement 
presently  which  will  delight  and  profit  you. 
Our  January  issue  will  be  decorated  with  a 
fine  portrait  of  William  H.  Rulofson,  Esq., 
the  President  of  the  National  Photographic 
Association.  It  will  be  followed  by  pic- 
tures from  Mr.  Alva  Pearsall,  and  other 
American  artists,  and  from  other  negatives 
already  in  hand  by  Russian,  French,  and 
German  artists  of  tbe  highest  repute. 

Our  pet  project  of  enlarging  our  number 
of  pages  we  haven't  yet  been  able  to  carry 
out,  but  the  prospects  are  good  for  it,  doubt- 
less during  this  year. 


We  repeat  our  "  Red  Letter  Sheet"  this 
month,  and  beg  you  to  peruse  it.  It  interests 
every  one  of  you.  If  our  presents  have  the 
effect  we  believe  they  will,  there  is  a  good 
prospect  ahead  for  us  all.  Please  do  all  you 
can,  and  do  not  forget  your  usual  present  to 
each  of  your  employe's  of  a  year's  subscrip- 
tion to  our  magazine  and  some  of  our 
books. 

Remember  that  the  Philadelphia  Photog- 
rapher will  cost  you  less  this  year  than  ever 
before,  since  1865,  for  the  reason  that  we  pre- 
pay the  postage,  and  you  have  none  to  pay  on  it. 
This  is  a  direct  tax  upon  us,  but  we  hope 
your  additions  to  our  subscription  list  will 
make  it  up. 


ORDER  SHEETS. 

Please  look  over  the  order  sheet  which 
we  send  you  between  our  pages  this  month. 
Burden  them  with  orders.  Inclose  your 
money  orders  and  drafts  in  them  now,  and 
send  them  to  us  early,  that  no  delay  may 
occur  in  your  prompt  reception  of  the 
January  number.  It  will  contain  some 
splendid  things  which  you  cannot  afford  to 
be  behind  your  neighbor  in  receiving. 
Many  of  our  subscribers  have  not  waited 
for  a  hint,  but  have  already  sent  in  their 
subscriptions  with  many  words  of  good 
cheer.   Here  is  an  extract  from  a  letter  from 


23 


ilf 


356 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPH  EE. 


myself  the  pleasure  of  seeing  many  persons, 
and  places,  and  things  which  I  had  set  my 
heart  on  seeing.  So  I  ignored  the  " sights'' 
of  London,  and  devoted  my  time  entirely 
to  the  collection  of  matter  which  I  hoped 
would  he  interesting  to — you. 

To  London  and  its  adjacent  cities  photog- 
raphy is  vastl}7  in  debt  for  some  of  its 
greatest  advances  and  for  some  of  its  grand- 
est productions.  There  are  many  men  liv- 
ing there  now  to  whom  too  much  credit 
cannot  he  given  for  what  they  have  done 
in  behalf  of  photography.  I  have  not  space 
to  name  them  now. 

In  the  various  photographic  printing 
processes,  London  is  far  in  advance,  and  the 
carbon,  Woodbury,  and  different  forms  of 
the  photolithographic  are  perhaps  more 
largely  practiced  here  than  anywhere  else. 
And  of  course  the  most  ingenious  of  these, 
and  the  one  producing  the  best  results  on 
paper  and  glass,  is  the  Woodbury  process. 
It  has  been  described  to  you,  and  examples 
have  been  given  you,  and  if  you  visit  Phila- 
delphia, under  the  superintendence  of  Mr. 
J.  Carbutt  you  may  see  it  in  active  prac- 
tice at  No.  624  N.  Twenty-fourth  Street. 

I  visited  the  works  in  London  in  com- 
pany with  the  inventor  of  the  process,  Mr. 
Walter  B.  Woodbury,  to  whom  I  owe  much 
for  his  courtesy  to  me,  and  found  them  doing 
a  large  business  and  producing  capital  re- 
sults. The  most  curious,  though  not  the  most 
beautiful,  part  of  this  process  is  the  printing 
A  revolving  table  bearing  six  presses  is 
"run  "  by  one  printer,  and  the  form  of  the 
table  and  the  presses  is  shown  in  our  figure. 
The  lead  mould  is  laid  upon  the  bed  of  the 
press;  upon  the  mould  is  poured  a  "  pud- 
dle "  of  warm  ink,  the  paper  laid  upon  it, 
and  the  top  of  the  press  brought  down  and 
fastened  upon  the  whole.  The  table  is  then 
revolved  so  as  to  bring  the  next  press  before 
the  printer,  and  so  on  until  the  six  are  filled. 
By  the  time  the  sixth  one  is  filled,  the  print 
in  the  first  is  set  ready  to  be  removed,  and 
so  on  all  day  long.  Mr.  Woodbury  cer- 
tainly is  entitled  to  the  credit  of  the  most 
wondrously  beautiful  method  there  is  of 
producing  pictures  of  any  kind.  His  inven- 
tion is  an  invention,  and  how  wonderfully 
he  has  improved  it  since  his  first  crude  re- 
sults were  shown  to  the  public  1     I  trust  he 


may  yet  make  a  large  fortune  from  it.  He 
is  one  of  London's  quietest,  nevertheless 
one  of  her   most  industrious    and   useful, 


photo-experimentalists — always  at  or  after 
something,  and  generally  with  some  effect. 

A  visit  to  his  mansion  at  Greenhithe,  one 
of  the  beautiful  suburbs  of  London,  was  one 
of  the  great  pleasures  of  my  journey.  He 
has  a  complete  laboratory  and  studio  there 
for  working  his  own  and  other  processes, 
and  I  found  many  things  of  interest  to  be 
seen.  I  also  met  there  Mr.  J.  Trail  Taylor, 
editor  of  the  British  Journal  of  Photography, 
a  "jolly  Scot,"  and  of  course  a  man  "well 
up"  in  his  profession.    Of  him,  more  again. 

The  carbon  process  is  more  largely  worked 
in  London  than  anywhere  else,  except  by 
M.  Braun,  in  Dornach.  It  has  had  many 
ups  and  downs  since  its  birth,  but  I  found 
it  in  most  successful  operation  under  the 
management  of  Messrs.  Spencer,  Sawyer, 
Bird  &  Co.,  at  their  extensive  works  at 
Ealing  Dean,  which  I  visited  in  company 
with  Mr.  J.  Stuart,  business  manager  of  the 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


857 


Ross  Lens  manufactory.  I  found  the  works 
most  extensive,  and  matters  being  driven 
with  the  greatest  energy.  Of  course,  with 
Mr.  John  Spencer  at  the  head,  things  must 
go.  Both  the  single  and  double  transfer 
processes  are  used,  and  the  tissue  used  is 
made  by  the  company,  in  a  manner  similar 
to  that  described  in  the  account  of  a  visit  to 
Mr.  Braun.  The  tissue  is  cut  into  lengths 
of  13  feet  each,  as  it  comes  from  the  pigment 
pool,  and  hung  up  to  dry.  Works  of  art 
are  here  reproduced  on  the  most  extensive 
scale,  and  so  very  beautiful  they  are!  Some 
of  the  negatives  used  are  immense.  I  saw 
one  48  inches  by  36  inches,  and  weighing 
seventy-five  pounds.  The  negatives  are 
kept  in  a  fire-proof  room.  Enlargements 
are  made  here  for  the  trade  very  exten- 
sively, and  the  results  are  superb.  The 
company  also  supplies  licenses  for  working 
the  process,  and  all  the  material  requisite. 
But  carbon  printing  is  too  expensive  for  all 
sorts  of  work,  and  resort  is  had  here  also  to 
photolithography.  In  the  rooms  devoted 
to  it,  I  saw  a  very  busy  scene — many  presses 
in  operation — and  all  through,  the  appear- 
ance of  thrift,  enterprise,  and  success.  In 
several  other  places  these  processes  are 
worked,  but  not  to  so  great  an  extent. 
Among  the  most  popular  methods  is  the 
heliotype  process  of  Mr.  Edwards,  but  the 
best  market  for  it  is  found  here,  under  the 
care  of  Messrs.  J.  R.  Osgood  &  Co.,  Bos- 
ton. 

Last  month  I  promised  to  take  you  to  a 
manufactory  of  photographic  lenses,  in 
which  I  had  only  a  common  interest,  and 
this  brings  us  to  the  world-renowned  and 
justly  famed  works  of  Messrs.  Ross  &  Co., 
in  Wigmore  Street,  London.  I  do  not 
remember  ever  having  visited  such  a  model 
establishment  as  this.  Neatness  and  good 
order  and  cleanliness  prevailed  throughout, 
and  I  inspected  the  whole  establishment 
with  intense  interest  and  satisfaction. 

It  is  not  too  much  to  say,  that  in  every 
part  of  the  habitable  globe  in  which  science 
has  obtained  a  footing,  there  is  the  name  of 
Ross,  of  London,  known.  The  great  optical 
establishment  of  Ross  was  founded  by  Mr. 
Andrew  Ross,  about  half  a  century  ago, 
since  which  time  it  has  steadily  increased, 
both  in  scope  and  magnitude,  until  at  pres- 


ent it  stands  unrivalled,  either  for  its  extent 
or  the  completeness  of  its  appliances. 

I  was  conducted  throughout  this  great 
hive  of  industry  by  Mr.  Stuart,  while  all 
the  workmen  were  being  busily  engaged  in 
the  fabrication  of  those  optical  productions 
which  have  acquired  such  worldwide  celeb- 
rity, and  to  have  such  a  privilege  was  to 
enjoy  a  treat  that  will  not  soon  be  forgotten  ; 
and,  in  order  that  my  photographic  readers 
may  share  with  me  in  some  small  degree,  if 
not  the  pleasure,  at  least  the  profit  I  derived 
on  the  occasion  of  that  visit,  I  transcribe 
for  their  benefit  a  few  of  the  notes  that 
were  then  made;  and  as  it  is  in  the  manu- 
facture of  photographic  lenses  that  photog- 
raphers will  doubtless  feel  most  interest, 
I  shall,  for  the  most  part,  confine  my  obser- 
vations to  the  production  of  this  class  of 
work. 

It  is  a  matter  of  primary  importance  that 
the  glass  of  which  achromatic  lenses  are 
made  is  of  the  utmost  purity.  Up  to  within 
a  recent  period,  the  production  of  large  disks 
of  optical  glass  so  free  from  defect  as  to 
render  them  adapted  for  achromatic  lenses, 
was  looked  upon  as  impossible;  for  even 
with  the  greatest  skill,  and  by  using  the 
most  perfect  appliances  of  the  period,  de- 
fects of  a  nature  fatal  to  excellence  were  in- 
herent in  optical  flint  glass.  These  defects, 
to  which  the  best  flint  was  especially  sub- 
ject, consisted  in  a  want  of  homogeneity 
and  in  the  presence  of  strise,  knots,  threads, 
and  other  defects  of  a  similar  nature.  This 
difficulty  in  the  way  of  obtaining  optical 
glass,  except  in  bits  of  very  small  dimen- 
sions, proved  a  serious  detriment  to  the  ad- 
vancement of  those  arts  and  sciences  in  the 
development  of  which  large  lenses  were 
required  ;  but  upwards  of  seventy  years  ago, 
M.  Guinand,  a  Swiss  clockmaker  and  ama- 
teur optician,  having  built  a  furnace  in 
which  to  make  his  own  glass,  succeeded  in 
solving  the  problem  that  till  that  time  had 
engaged  the  attention  of  numerous  men  of 
science,  and  practical  glass-makers.  The 
fame  of  the  excellence  of  his  productions 
rapidly  spread  abroad,  and  M.  Guinand 
soon  emerged  from  the  position  of  an  ob- 
scure clockmaker,  into  that  of  a  man  by 
whom  science  was  to  be  materially  bene- 
fited, and  his  society  was  courted,  especially 


358 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGE  APHEE. 


by  the  leading  opticians  of  the  time.  Al- 
though Guinand's  discovery  has  thus  opened 
the  way  to  the  successful  production  of  large 
disks  of  optical  glass,  yet  is  the  price  of  such 
glass,  even  in  its  rough  form,  very  high. 
This  great  expense  connected  with  the  glass 
alone  partly  accounts  for  the  high  price  of 
large  lenses ;  for  no  optician  who  has  a 
reputation  at  stake  would  jeopardize  or 
rather  ruin  it  by  using  glass  of  an  inferior 
kind.  In  the  homogeneity  of  the  glass 
alone,  as  well  as  in  workmanship,  will  be 
found  the  difference  between  the  productions 
of  the  high  class  and  the  second  rate  optician. 

Before  a  disk  of  glass  is  sent  into  the 
grinding  shop  it  is  subject  to  critical  exami- 
nation, to  permit  of  which,  two  small  por- 
tions of  the  edge,  opposite  to  each  other, 
are  ground  flat  and  polished.  A  beam  of 
polarized  light  is  now  transmitted  through 
the  disk,  which  is  then  examined  by  an 
analyzing  prism.  In  this  way  can  be  de- 
tected the  slightest  deviation  from  uni- 
formity in  the  density  of  the  glass,  a  devia- 
tion which  would  insure  its  being  rejected. 
Now  we  are  where  the  rough  and  hard 
work  is  done,  and  as  each  stage  progresses, 
there  is  less  hard  work  for  the  muscles  and 
more  for  the  brain.  After  the  optical  glass 
passes  muster,  it  is  cut  into  pieces  of  proper 
size  by  the  "splitting"  machine,  diamond 
dust  being  used  for  the  persuasive  power. 

In  the  grinding  of  a  lens,  the  first  opera- 


tion consists  in  "  roughing  "  it  or  bringing 
it  approximately  to  the  curvature  it  is  ulti- 


mately to  assume.  The  adjoining  cut  shows 
in  which  way  this  is  effected.  Cast-iron 
blocks  turned  to  an  appropriate  degree  of 
curvature,  either  concave  or  convex,  accord- 
ing to  the  nature  of  the  surface,  together 
with  coarse  emery  and  water,  form  the  tools- 
required  at  this  stage.  When  the  glass  is 
handed  to  the  rougher  it  is  round  in  shape, 
although  the  edges  are  rough,  having  pre- 
viously passed  through  the  hands  of  another 
staff  of  workmen,  who  chip  the  glass  into 
something  near  the  size  required. 

After  the  first  rough  grinding  has  been 
effected,  the  embryo  lens  then  passes  into 
the  hands  of  the  "lens  grinder,"  whose 
function  it  is  to  follow  up  the  work  of  the 
rougher,  until  the  surface  is  brought  up  to 
that  exquisite  degree  of  polish  seen  in  the 
best  lenses,  and  to  effect  which  a  great  de- 
gree of  care  and  skill  are  required.  Instead 
of  the  cast-iron  curves  used  in  roughing,  the 
tools  now  must  be  gun  metal  or  brass,  hav- 
ing their  curvatures  adjusted  with  the  utmost 
nicety,  for  upon  the  accuracy  of  the  curve 
in  which  the  lens  is  ground  depends  its 
figure  and  subsequent  performance.  Six 
changes  of  emery,  from  the  coarsest  up  to 


the  finest,  are  employed  in  succession,  until 
the  surface  has  been  brought  up  to  the  most 
exquisite  degree  of  smoothness,  although  as 
yet  devoid  of  gloss  or  final  polish.  In  this 
work  the  curved  tool  is  attached  to  the  top 
of  a  post,  around  which  the  workman 
slowly  walks,  grinding  the  lens  by  the  pres- 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTO  GEAPHER. 


359 


sure  of  both  hands.  Not  only  must  he  by 
walking  round  the  post  change  his  own 
position  with  respect  to  the  grinding  tool, 
but  he  must  also  constantly  change  the  posi- 
tion of  the  lens  in  relation  to  his  hand,  as 
he  sweeps  it  over  the  surface  of  the  tool. 
In  this  way  is  avoided  such  errors  of  figure 
as  would  invariably  occur  if  these  precau- 
tions were  not  taken. 

The  piece  of  glass  which  is  to  serve  as 
one  of  the  lenses  of  a  combination,  is 
cemented  to  the  centre  of  the  "tool,"  and 
around  it  are  cemented  six  other  pieces  of 
glass  called  "  pads."  These  are  subjected  to 
the  same  amount  of  grinding,  but  are  of  no 
use  except  that  they  serve  as  bearings  to  in- 
sure the  exact  grinding  of  the  centre  piece. 
Thus  it  will  be  seen  that  a  photographic 
lens  is  actually  the  centre  part  of  a  large 
lens. 

Very  often  a  number  of  small  lenses  are 
ground  at  once  on  one  tool.  For  example, 
I  saw  seven  compound  stereograph  lenses 
being  ground  in  this  way.  In  no  other  way 
could  they  be  made  more  cheaply  than  larger 
lenses,  for  the  amount  of  work  upon  them  is 
just  the  same.  The  grinding-posts  must  be 
level  to  a  degree,  or  errors  will  constantly 
occur. 

Having  been  ground  to  a  true  curve  the 
next  and  final  operation,  so  far  as  the  surface 
of  the  lens  is  concerned,  is  to  bring  it  to  a 
high  degree  of  polish  or  gloss.  Exceptional 
care  is  required  in  doing  so,  for  the  metal 
tool  hitherto  employed  with  its  hard  and 
unyielding  surface  must  be  supplanted,  so 
far  at  least  as  the  mere  surface  is  concerned, 
by  something  of  a  softer  nature,  and  hence 
arise  increased  dangers  in  impairing  the 
perfection  of  the  figure  obtained  by  the 
grinding. 

By  many  opticians  thin  felt  or  cloth  with 
the  nap  worn  or  seared  off  is  employed  for 
polishing,  and  where  the  highest  degree  of 
excellence  is  not  required  it  answers  well. 
It  is  effected  by  coating  the  face  of  an  iron 
tool  with  cement,  laying  upon  this,  while 
hot,  the  cloth,  and  then  pressing  upon  the 
latter  with  a  metal  curve  or  tool  the  exact 
counterpart  of  that  in  which  the  lens  was 
ground.  The  cloth  is  then  charged  with 
putty  powder  moistened  with  water,  and 
upon  this  the  lens  is  polished.     This  method 


has  long  since  been  discarded  by  the  house  of 
Koss  in  favor  of  one  which  gives  more 
perfect  results,  and  without  which  it  would 
indeed  be  impossible  to  produce  lenses,  espe- 
cially of  small  size,  having  the  perfection  of 
form  required  in  some  of  the  most  delicate 
lenses,  such  as  microscopic  objectives,  or 
the  symmetrical  photographic  combinations 
which  are  so  rapidly  superseding  other 
forms  of  lenses  for  landscapes,  groups,  and 
architectual  subjects.  These  receive  their 
final  polish  in  tools  faced  with  a  specially 
hardened  kind  of  beeswax  into  which  is 
imbedded  the  polishing  powder,  and  which 
gives  the  utmost  degree  of  polish  without 
allowing  the  figure  to  be  impaired. 

The  lens  is  now  finished  in  all  but  the 
"edging,"  which  is  of  almost  equal  im- 
portance with  the  proper  grinding  of  the 
surface,  because  on  the  edging  of  a  lens 
depends  the  correct  centring  of  the  combi- 
nation. To  effect  this  the  lens  is  cemented 
to  a  chuck  in  a  turning  lathe,  and  while 
revolving  it  is  centred  accurately  by  watch- 
ing the  reflection  of  a  lighted  candle  thrown 


from  the  surface.  Advantage  being  taken 
of  the  soft  state  of  the  cement  to  bring  it  to 
such  a  state  as  to  show,  while  revolving, 
the  image  of  the  flame  quite  stationary  and 
free  from  the  "wobble"  it  would  have  if 
it  were  not  properly  centred.  When  the 
cement  is  hard,  a  workman  slowly  brings 
in  contact  with  the  revolving  edge  a  piece 
of  metal  charged  with  emery  and  water,  by 


360 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


which  the  asperities  are  removed  and  the 
edge  made  square  and  accurate.  The  en- 
graving represents  the  "  edger  "  holding  a 
small  metallic  cup  in  his  hand,  wherewith 
he  is  finishing  the  edge  of  a  lens  that  has 
been  ground  true. 

The  number  of  tools  or  curves  in  this  es- 
tablishment is  very  great,  consisting  of  up- 
wards of  two  thousand,  all  of  them  being 
ground  with  such  accuracy  that  the  curva- 
ture of  each  is  known  to  the  fourth  place  of 
decimals,  their  respective  radii  extending 
from  30  feet  down  to  .01  inch  (a  hundredth 
of  an  inch).  The  curvature  to  which  any 
particular  lens  is  to  be  ground  is  calculated 
mathematically  to  suit  the  refractive  and 
dispersive  ratios  of  the  glass  of  which  it  is 
to  be  formed  j  and  after  the  lens  is  finished, 
if,  on  examination,  it  fails  to  come  up  to 
the  standard  of  sharpness,  the  particular 
surface  which  exercises  control  over  the 
shortcoming  is  reground  in  a  tool  one  de- 
gree deeper  or  shallower  in  curvature  to 
suit  the  requirements  of  the  case.  The 
most  intense  sharpness  is  insisted  upon  as  a 
sine  qua  non  in  this  establishment,  no  por- 
trait lens  being  allowed  to  pass  into  stock 
unless  it  can  produce  a  picture  with  open 
aperture  sufficiently  sharp  to  bear  a  large 
degree  of  magnifying.  Such  an  idea  as 
"diffusion  of  focus"  is  not  recognized,  the 
reason  assigned  being  that  if  once  a  lens  is 
made  that  will  produce  absolute  sharpness, 
perfection  of  definition  can  at  will  be  de- 
stroyed in  any  special  case  by  the  mere  in- 
terposition of  a  transparent  pellicle,  or  even 
a  sheet  of  homogeneous  paper,  between  the 
negative  and  the  print,  the  latter  of  which 
will  thus  possess  that  quality  known  as 
"diffusion,"  although  from  the  very  same 
negative  may  be  obtained  an  enlargement 
of  the  greatest  sharpness  and  perfection. 

One  large  shop  in  this  factory  is  devoted 
to  brass  turning  and  fitting.  "We  show  in 
the  cut  one  of  the  numerous  workmen  en- 
gaged in  making  the  mount  of  one  of  the 
new  small  symmetrical  lenses.  In  this  kind 
of  lens  the  Messrs.  Boss  have  effected  a  refor- 
mation that  has  for  a  long  time  been  much 
desired  by  photographers,  viz.,  the  reduc- 
tion of  the  diameter  of  the  lenses  to  the 
smallest  possible  size,  and  the  causing  of  the 
whole  series  of  twelve  to  screw  into  one 


flange,  one  cap  also  fitting  all  of  them.  This 
series  of  lenses  consists  of  twelve  separate 
combinations,  all,  as  I  have  said,  of  the 
same  diameter  in  mount,  which,  by  the 
way,  is  very  small,  owing  to  every  superflu- 


ous portion  of  glass  being  removed  from 
the  lenses,  which  are  thus  reduced  to  scarcely 
more  than  the  size  of  the  stop.  Their  foci 
range  from  3  inches  to  21  inches,  a  lens  of 
the  latter  focus  covering  a  plate  21  x  25 
inches.  So  small  and  light  are  they  that  a 
photographer  may  without  any  inconveni- 
ence carry  several  of  them  in  his  pocket, 
and  screw  into  his  camera  any  one  of  them 
which  from  its  focus  is  best  adapted  for  the 
representation  of  any  special  view.  It 
would  be  well  if  this  S3rstem  of  having  one 
standard  flange  for  all  lenses  up  to  a  certain 
size  were  more  prevalent,  for  it  would  prove 
a  boon  of  inestimable  value  to  photogra- 
phers. The  system  of  universality  of  screw 
has  for  many  years  been  in  use  in  connec- 
tion with  the  object-glasses  of  microscopes, 
and  no  matter  now  in  what  countries  either 
microscopes  or  objectives  may  have  been 
made,  all  are  fitted  to  one  gauge.  The 
varying  diameters  of  photographic  object- 
ives will  ever,  of  course,  prevent  the  adop- 
tion of  one  individual  flange  for  all  pur- 
poses ;  but  what  can  and  ought  to  be  done 
is  the  adoption  throughout  the  world  of  a 
series  of  flanges,  as  few  as  possible,  of  recog- 
nized and  standard  sizes.  Notwithstanding 
the  small  dimensions  of  the  symmetrical 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


361 


lenses,  they  work  with  greater  rapidity  than 
those  of  large  size,  when  used  under  sim- 
ilar circumstances  of  lighting  and  aperture. 

The  racks  used  for  portrait  lenses  are 
toothed  in  the  solid,  so  to  speak,  and  are 
sawn  asunder  afterwards,  three  dozen  being 
made  at  a  time. 

The  cutting  of  screws  in  the  tubes,  cells, 
and  flanges,  is  effected  both  by  hand  and  by 
mechanism  attached  to  the  turning  lathe, 
the  special  mode  to  be  adopted  in  each  case 
being  determined  by  the  size  of  the  article. 
The  screwing  of  the  tube  of  a  lens  of  ten  or 
eleven  inches  in  diameter  would  never  be 
undertaken  by  hand  alone  ;  while  on  the 
other  hand  the  services  of  the  lathe  screw- 
ing machine  would  never  be  had  recourse 
to  in  the  case  of  a  small  "  symmetrical"  lens. 

When  two  achromatic  lenses  are  to  be 
mounted,  they  are  first  of  all  placed  in  a 
trial  mount  so  adapted  as  to  permit  of  an 
approximation  or  separation  of  the  lenses. 
The  test  object  is  a  watch  dial  placed  at  the 
extreme  end  of  the  testing-room,  and  the 
image  of  this  dial  is  examined  through  a 
powerful  eyepiece.  Unless  it  can  divide 
the  closest  lines  upon  this  dial  the  lens  is 
rejected.  In  this  trial,  both  the  central  and 
oblique  pencils  are  examined,  and  the  exact 
amount  of  separation  of  the  lenses  from 
each  other  is  now  determined  by  experi- 
ment and  marked  upon  each  pair,  as  the 
instructions  for  the  workman  to  whom  is 
intrusted  the  duty  of  the  final  adjustment 
of  the  length  of  tube,  an  operation  which 
influences  materially  the  performance  of 
the  lens,  when  it  is  considered  that  so  nicely 
poised  are  the  qualities  in  some  of  the  com- 
binations of  more  recent  production,  that 
a  deviation  of  a  fortieth  part  of  an  inch 
from  the  exact  distance  required,  and  de- 
termined in  the  way  described,  will  affect 
its  performance  and  be  detected  by  the  man- 
ager in  course  of  the  final  trial,  which  is 
made  after  the  lenses  have  been  finished. 

The  consulting  engineer  of  the  firm  of 
Koss  &  Co.  is  Mr.  F.  H.  Wenham,  who  has 
apartments  upon  the  premises.  Most  of  the 
modern  improvements  in  the  microscope 
owe  their  existence  to  the  genius  and  exec- 
utive skill  of  this  gentleman,  who,  by  his 
invention  of  the  binocular  microscope,  his 
simplification  and  improvements  of  the  ob- 


ject-glasses, which  throughout  the  world 
are  all  now  made  upon  his  principle,  his 
parabolic  condenser,  and  other  inventions, 
has  acquired  a  name  which  will  ever  be 
associated  with  the  highest  department  of 
optics,  both  mathematical  and  applied. 

There  is  a  well-appointed  glass-room  con- 
nected with  the  establishment  into  which 
purchasers  may  step  and  see  any  lens  prac- 
tically tested,  or  may  compare  the  respec- 
tive merits  of  any  lens  of  their  own,  by 
other  makers,  against  such  as  they  may 
desire  to  subject  to  such  a  scrutiny. 

I  had  almost  omitted  to  say  that  there  is, 
too,  on  the  street  level,  a  front  store  richly 
fitted  up,  and  replete  with  the  choicest  opti- 
cal productions  of  the  age,  including  astro- 
nomical and  every  other  kind  of  telescopes, 
field  and  opera  glasses,  microscopes  of  won- 
derful elaboration  and  finish,  not  to  speak 
of  the  photographic  lenses  concerning  the 
production  of  which  I  have  endeavored  to 
give  a  faint  idea,  although  to  the  exclusion 
of  the  production  of  the  microscope  and 
other  specialties  of  manufacture,  upon  which 
space  does  not  permit  me  to  enter  at  present. 

None  but  men  of  the  highest  experience 
are  employed  in  this  factory ;  and  except 
in  the  counting-house,  no  apprentices  are 
taken.  At  the  time  of  my  visit  there  were 
seventy-five  men  busily  engaged  at  the 
Ross  works.  I  have  failed,  my  memoran- 
dum-book tells  me,  to  describe  the  milling 
and  turning  and  planing  machines  ;  or  how, 
when  the  lenses  are  cemented  together,  they 
are  laid  upon  a  pan  like  griddle  cakes,  and 
subjected  to  the  influence  of  a  flame  and 
carefully  watched. 

But  I  must  not  fail  to  tell  you  what  they 
use  to  blacken  the  insides  of  the  lens  tubes 
with,  for  it  may  be  useful  to  you.  It  is  a 
mixture  of  the  proper  consistency  of  vege- 
table black,  alcohol,  and  shellac.  And  I 
must  tell  you  also  that  I  held  something  in 
my  hand  more  precious  than  a  diamond. 
It  was  a  lens  of  ^th  of  an  inch  in  diameter  ! 
Just  think  of  being  able  to  place  fifty  such 
lenses  side  by  side  within  the  limits  of  an 
inch,  and  yet  it  was  a  perfectly  ground  and 
perfectly  corrected  lens. 

I  wish  I  could  tell  you  all  about  the  mag- 
nificent telescopes  and  microscopes  I  saw 
there,  and  the  field  and  opera  glasses.   Some 


362 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


of  the  latter  are  made  with  cases  of  alu- 
minum— the  lightest  of  all  metals.  The 
only  trouble  about  them  is,  that  if  your 
pocket  is  picked,  you  won't  be  able  to  find  it 
out  even  when  aided  by  a  powerful  Ross  mi- 
croscope. Messrs.  Wilson,  Hood  &  Co.  are 
the  American  agents  for  the  Ross  lenses. 

One  of  the  wonders  of  London  is  the 
establishment  of  Messrs.  W.  A  Mansell  & 
Co.,  publishers  of  photographs  I  never 
saw  so  much  of  the  world  and  its  beauties, 
on  paper,  at  once,  as  I  did  there.  It  is  per- 
fectly overpowering  to  look  over  their 
variety  of  pictures  and  see  what  photog- 
raphy has  done.  But  as  "Our  Picture" 
this  month  is  from  them,  I  make  a  separate 
article  concerning  it  and  them,  robbing 
this  also  of  some  remarks  I  had  reserved  on 
the  grand  interiors  of  Europe,  how  to  pho- 
tograph them,  etc.  Let  me  refer  you  to 
this  article  with  the  hope  that  it  may  be 
useful  to  you  one  day  or  another,  and  then 
trip  on  with  our  views  through  the  London 
fog.  Ah  me !  Talking  of  fog — it  is  a 
hazardous  thing  to  go  out  into  the  streets  of 
London  minus  an  umbrella.  If  you  do 
ever  do  it,  run  back  for  your  life  and  get 
one,  else  get  drenched.  There  is  no  occa- 
sion ever  to  lend  your  umbrella  there,  for 
everybody  always  carries  one.  And  could 
you  but  see  my  Berlin  umbrella,  with  which 
I  swung  Galileo's  lamp  at  Pisa,  and  which 
saved  me  from  sunstroke  in  Switzerland — 
something  like  this !  When  it  doesn't  rain 
the  habit  of  using  the  um- 
brella as  a  walking  stick 
grows  upon  one,  so  that  the 
"woodwork"  invariably 
wears  out  first.  It  must 
be  perplexing  to  be  a  pho- 
tographer there,  yet  there 
are  some  good  ones.  Mr. 
Valentine  Blanchard,  48 
Piccadilly,  has  the  best  stu- 
dio I  saw,  and  the  gentle- 
man himself  is  a  capital  photographer  as  well 
as  a  capital  good  man.  The  largest  studio  is 
probably  Messrs.  Elliott  &  Fry's,  but  none 
compare  with  our  own  American  city  estab- 
lish ments.  Outside  of  and  in  places  near  Lon- 
don, photography  seems  to  flourish  more  than 
in  the  city  proper.  At  Tunbridge  Wells, 
Messrs.   Robinson  &  Cherrill  have  an  ad- 


Somelhing  like  this 


mirably  arranged  studio.  Mr.  H.  P.  Rob- 
inson is  very  well  known  to  many  of  our 
readers  by  his  capital  work  "  Pictorial 
Effect  in  Photography."  I  visited  his 
studio,  and  enjoyed  examining  his  combina- 
tion pictures,  an  example  of  which,  with  the 
method  of  producing  such  works,  was  given 
in  our  March  number.  The  newest  attrac- 
tion to  me  there,  however,  was  the  working 
of  the  burnt-in  enamel  process,  which  I 
was  shown  from  beginning  to  end,  without, 
however,  knowing  anything  of  the  mix- 
tures. The  details  of  a  crude  process  were 
given  in  our  last  number,  but  Messrs.  Rob- 
inson &  Cherrill  have  made  undoubted  im- 
provements— their  work  shows  it — which  I 
hope  some  day  will  become  useful  to  pho- 
tographers generally.  American  photog- 
raphers hardly  seem  ready  for  it  yet,  but  I 
believe  the  time  is  coming  when  these  pic- 
tures will  be  "  all  the  rage." 

The  best  landscape  photographer  here- 
abouts is  undoubtedly  Mr.  Frank  M.  Good, 
and  it  was  explained  when  I  saw  him.  He 
is  a  thorough  artist  in  feeling,  and  fully  up 
in  all  the  requirements  of  his  art.  His 
Egyptian  and  Eastern  views  are  unrivalled. 
He  superintends  his  own  printing,  and  is 
most  careful  and  cleanly  in  every  respect. 
He  "  doctors  "  his  negatives,  and  with  spots 
of  india-ink,  bits  of  tissue,  and  patches  of 
transfer  paper  adhering  to  them,  some  of 
them  look  very  much  covered  up,  but  after 
all  it  is  the  results;  and  his  results,  without 
any  pun,  are  good. 

The  annual  exhibition  of  the  Photogra- 
phic Society  opened  the  day  after  I  left 
London,  but  through  the  courtesy  of  Mr. 
Woodbury,  one  of  the  members,  I  was  al- 
lowed a  peep.  There  were  some  fine  things 
there.  The  Crawshay  prize  pictures  were 
also  shown,  and  some  of  them  were  most 
laughable  distortions.  I  remember  one  lot 
on  pink  paper,  much  overlighted,  which 
struck  me — as  a  blow  in  the  face.  They 
were  perfectly  stunning.  I  do  not  think 
large  lenses  are  a  success.  The  solar  camera 
is  better — and  Moore  of  it. 

And  so  on  I  travelled  through  London, 
day  after  day,  with  that  good  man,  Mr. 
Theo.  N.  Gates,  the  then  agent  of  the 
Phenix  Ferrotype  Company,  as  companion, 
seeing  and  hearing  and  learning  much,  but 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


363 


compelled  to  leave  before  I  had  half  finished 
what  I  desired  to  see.  Of  course  I  went  to 
Westminster  Abbey,  and  St.  Paul's,  and 
the  Crystal  Palace,  and  all  over  and  around, 
but  of  these  I  must  not  write  now,  for  I 
have  not  the  space,  and  besides,  in  my 
"  Lantern  Journeys,"  they  are  all  described. 
The  hour  came  to  go  home,  and  the  last 
night  was  spent  in  packing  up.  Then  next 
day  to  Liverpool,  and  then  the  next  upon 
the  steady  but  slow  ship  Batavia,  I  started 
for  home.  It  was  a  dull  voyage.  First, 
four  days  of  fearful  gale,  then  head-winds 
all  the  way.  During  the  day  a  horizontal 
pose  was  easiest,  because  one  could  scarcely 
walk  the  deck.  In  the  evening  I  looked 
over  at  the  phosphorescence.  Sometimes  the 
display  was  exceedingly  brilliant  and  beau- 
tiful, and  then  again,  as  the  mind  would 
grow  dull  over  matters  and  things  about 
generally,  or  dream  about  home,  recollec- 
tions of  the  past  would  come  up,  and  the 
masses  of  phosphorescent  matter  would 
seemingly  assume  all  sorts  of  shapes  hideous 
t    o  behold,  some  being  in   the  form  of  the 


Faces  of  disagreeable  people  I  had  seen. 


faces  of  disagreeable  people  I  had  seen  in 
Ireland,  and  France,  and  Germany,  and 
Rome,  and  Switzerland,  and  London,  etc. 
There  were  but  few  aboard  whose  digestive 
organs  were  not  disarranged.  The  cause  of 
the  whole  trouble,  the  sailors  said,  resulted 
from  the  fact,  that  Mr.  Mark  Twain  was 
aboard.  I  think  he  sutfered  with  the  rest. 
I  found  him  on  deck  one  day  in  a  most  hope- 
less pose,  writhing  and  sighing  for  New  York. 
After  twelve  days  we  arrived  in  New 
York  Bay,  and  soon  afterwards  at  Jersey 
City.  I  was  the  first  to  spring  ashore.  I 
was  glad  to  see  a  few  of  the  autumnal  tints 
left,  glad  to  be  again  upon  my  native  soil. 


I  ought  here  to  give  a  general  summing 
up  of  my  journeys,  but  there  is  not  room. 
You  may  get  some  of  that  in  a  less  summary 
manner  some  time.  I  have  only  told  you 
of  a  little  of  what  I  saw.  Many  things  I 
have  told  you  might  have  been  left  untold, 
but  you  should  be  thankful  that  I  have  not 
told  many  things  which  I  could  tell. 

With  an  eye  open  to  the  ludicrous,  I  have 
found  it  hard  sometimes  to  remember  that 
I  was  writing  for  a  highly  "  scientific  " 
magazine,  but  if  I  have,  with  all  the  re- 
straint I  felt,  gone  too  far,  I  pray  the  editor 
and  his  readers  to  forget  and  forgive. 

I  do  not  believe  any  one  ever  had  so  good 
a  time  among  the  "  Views  Abroad  and 
Across,"  in  the  same  number  of  months  as  I 
had.  A  friend  or  friends  in  every  city, 
from  whom  nothing  but  kindness  came — 
good  health,  good  weather — all  but  one 
thing  that  one  could  wish. 

I  wished  many  times  for  you  all.  I  do 
believe  you  would  have  enjoyed  it  just  the 
same  and  just  as  much  as  I  did  had  you  been 
there  with  me,  but  since  you  could  not,  how 
selfish  it  would  have  been  in  me  to  have 
kept  all  I  saw  and  learned  to  myself;  this 
is  my  only  apology  for  this  hastily  and 
feebly  written  account  of  a  few  of  my 
Views  Abroad  and  Across. 


THE  TRANSIT  OF  VENUS. 

About  the  time  these  pages  will  appear 
to  our  readers,  the  world  of  science  will  be 
all  in  a  flutter  to  know  what  success  at- 
tended the  efforts  of  the  different  expedi- 
tions who  have  made  so  much  sacrifice  to 
go  to  observe  and  to  photograph  the  Transit 
of  Venus.  And  our  American  readers  will 
be  particularly  interested  to  know  what  suc- 
cess has  crowned  those  of  our  own  country- 
men, whose  departure  we  noticed  on  page 
213  of  our  July  number,  for  various  lands, 
with  the  objects  named  in  view. 

After  the  tedious  voyages  they  land  upon 
the  shores  of  the  station  to  which  they  have 
been  assigned,  and  after  a  more  or  less 
savage  reception  by  the  natives,  they  at 
once  proceed  to  make  preparations  for  the 
coming  phenomena.  Observatories  are 
erected,  and  perhaps  living  quarters;  stone 


364 


THE     PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


foundations  are  sunk  for  the  accommoda- 
tions of  the  telescopes,  and  a  sufficient  quan- 
tity of  the  most  approved  and  improved 
dark-closets  are  erected.  Then  follows 
the  usual  drill  and  preliminary  practice  so 
far  as  possible,  the  daily  discussions  con- 
cerning the  weather,  and  so  on  until  the 
eventful  days  appear. 

Each  expedition  before  leaving  home  was 
supplied  with  a  copy  of  the  printed  instruc- 
tions prepared  by  the  commission  author- 
ized by  Congress  by  authority  of  the  Secre- 
tary of  the  Navy,  so  that  none  of  the 
blunders  which  are  so  often  made  on  such 
critical  occasions  could  possibly  occur. 

Let  us  interest  ourselves  in  our  far-dis- 
tant co-workers  for  a  little  while,  and 
imagining  that  we  are  in  Kerguelen  Land 
or  China  or  New  Zealand,  mentally  "go 
through  some  of  the  motion?."  One  of  our 
party  is  selected  to  keep  a  journal  of  our 
proceedings,  and  each  observer  is  supplied 
with  a  memorandum-book  for  recording  the 
chronometer  indications,  the  readings  of 
the  level,  and  the  exact  time  at  which  the 
photographs  of  the  sun  are  taken,  and  so  on, 
even  to  the  side  of  the  negative  which  was 
towards  the  north,  east,  etc.  We  have  our 
instruments  well  set  upon  rock  or  damp 
sand  foundations,  and  our  photographic 
telescope  set  upon  a  nearly  level  line,  say 
sixty  feet  from  north  to  south,  care  being 
had  always  that  the  sun  be  visible  from  the 
point  occupied  by  our  instrument,  during 
the  whole  time  of  the  transit  and  a  little 
longer.  And  now  we  come  to  the  exact 
adjustment  of  our  objective  and  instru- 
ments for  the  work.  The  requirements  are 
as  follows  : 

1.  The  distance  between  the  photographic 
sensitive  plate  and  the  objective  should  be 
equal  to  the  focal  distance  of  the  latter 
within  a  fraction  of  an  inch. 

2.  The  line  joining  the  optical  centre  of 
the  object-glass  and  the  cross-lines  in  the 
middle  of  the  photographic  plate-glass 
should  be  in  the  true  meridian  within  a 
fraction  of  a  minute  of  arc. 

3.  The  same  line  should  be  horizontal 
within  the  same  limits. 

4.  The  optical  axis  of  the  objective  should 
be  directed  toward  the  centre  of  the  pho- 
tographic plate. 


5.  The  plate  should  be  perpendicular  to 
the  line  joining  its  centre  and  the  centre  of 
the  objective. 

6.  The  bubble  on  the  long  level  of  the 
plate-holder  should  be  at  rest  nearly  in  the 
middle,  or,  at  least,  should  not  touch  either 
end  of  the  tube. 

So  you  see  we  must  be  very  particular, 
but  our  book  of  instructions  gives  us  all  the 
instructions  necessary  to  determine  when 
we  are  right,  and  we  go  on  fearlessly.  Day 
after  day  we  drill,  and  at  night  the  astrono- 
mers are  busy  observing  all  the  visible  oc- 
cupations of  stars  by  the  moon  which  occur, 
until  the  eve  of  the  eventful  8th  of  De- 
cember makes  its  appearance. 

We  again 

1.  Measure  the  distance  between  the  plate- 
holder  and  objective.  And  repeat  this 
measure  on  the  morning  or  afternoon  of  the 
transit,  according  as  the  time  at  which  it 
occurs  gives  the  better  opportunity. 

2.  Determine  the  error  of  level  of  the 
photographic  telescope. 

3.  Take  reversed  photographs  of  the  lines 
of  the  plate-holder. 

4.  See  that  the  adjustments  are  all  cor- 
rect. 

5.  That  the  axis  and  mirror  of  the  helio- 
stat  are  at  the  proper  angles. 

And,  in  general,  that  every  part  of  the 
apparatus  for  observing  and  photographing 
is  in  perfect  working  order. 

We  must  also  see  to  it  that  we  have  two 
hundred  well-cleaned  plates  reserved,  and 
enough  material  to  work  them  all  day. 
During  the  8th  we  photograph  the  sun  at 
intervals,  and  so  on  the  9th,  until  the  first 
contact  of  the  two  great  stars  occurs.  How 
beautiful  they  look  now — like  two  great 
generals  gorgeously  and  strongly  equipped, 
going  into  battle  against  each  other,  and 
just  as  surely  as  they  exist,  one  must  be 
vanquished  while  the  other  conquers. 

Immediately  before  the  computed  time  of 
contact,  the  slide  will  be  drawn  back,  and  a 
sensitive  plate  will  be  placed,  not  in  the 
plate-holder,  but  in  some  movable  support 
immediately  in  front  of  it,  and  in  such  a 
position  that,  when  exposure  is  made,  the 
uncovered  part  of  the  sun's  image  shall  fall 
near  one  vertical  edge  of  the  plate.  An  ex- 
posure will  then  be  made  as  nearly  as  prac- 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHER. 


365 


ticable  at  the  computed  moment  of  first  con- 
tact ;  the  plate  will  then  be  moved  one 
inch,  and  a  second  exposure  will  be  made, 
and  so  on  to  as  many  exposures  as  the  plate 
will  admit  of.  The  chronometer-time  of 
each  expo  ure  must  be  noted  and  recorded, 
and  the  time  must  also  be  marked  on  the 
chronograph. 

The  object  of  this  is  to  have  as  many 
photographs  as  possible  of  the  indentation 
made  by  Venus  on  the  sun's  limb  during 
the  first  five  or  ten  minutes  of  the  transit. 
Therefore,  while  one  plate  is  being  exposed 
another  must  be  preparing.  The  exposures 
must  be  made  as  rapidly  as  the  operations 
can  be  conducted  and  the  times  recorded 
with  the  proper  care. 

The  regular  photographs  of  the  transit 
must  then  be  commenced.  In  the  division 
of  the  labor  it  should  be  the  exclusive  busi- 
ness of  one  person  to  see  that  everything  is 
working  properly.  The  remainder  of  the 
force  must  be  devoted  to  the  taking  of  the 
pictures,  and  the  record  of  the  following 
particulars  in  proper  ruled  forms: 

1.  A  number,  to  be  distinctly  marked  on 
each  negative. 

2.  The  chronometer-time  of  exposure. 

3.  The  reading  of  the  level  on  the  plate- 
holder. 

4.  The  direction  (east  or  west)  of  the  small 
arm  on  top  of  the  frame,  from  the  centre  of 
which  the  plumb-line  is  passed  through  the 
plate-holder. 

5.  The  temperature  in  the  room  at  the 
time  of  exposure. 

6.  The  direction  of  motion  of  the  slide 
(east  or  west). 

In  taking  the  pictures,  the  slide  must  be 
moved  alternately  east  and  west,  and  the 
direction  of  the  arm  carrying  the  plumb- 
line  must  also  be  frequently  changed. 

In  developing  the  picture,  the  sharpest 
and  best-de lined  edge  must  be  sought  for, 
without  regard  to  the  details  of  the  solar  sur- 
face ;  and  the  image  must  be  as  dark  as  pos- 
sible to  the  very  edge.  To  attain  this  end, 
the  central  portions  must  be  a  little  over- 
exposed. If  the  image  is  found  to  shade  off 
toward  the  edge  in  any  considerable  degree, 
the  time  of  exposure  must  be  increased,  first 
by  widening  the  slit,  then,  when  this  is 
fully  open,  by  lessening  the  tension  of  the 


spring.  If  the  exposure  is  still  insufficient, 
the  slide  must  be  moved  over  by  hand  with 
as  uniform  a  motion  as  possible. 

All  hands  are  of  course  anxious  for  suc- 
cess, but  coolness  and  precision  are  all-im- 
portant. Then  if  the  weather  be  good  we 
shall  have  within  our  negative  boxes,  re- 
sults which  the  world  but  seldom  has  the 
opportunity  of  securing,  and  which  will 
immensely  aid  the  cause  of  science.  After 
the  transit  is  ended  the  plates  will  be  care- 
fully packed,  and  then  a  sudden  home-sick- 
ness will  seize  us  all.  But  to  head  that  off 
we  will  depart  from  our  mental  condition, 
and  note  a  few  of  the  matters  pertaining  to 
the  formulas  which  "  the  boys  "  in  actual 
practice  were  instructed  to  use. 

1.  Clean  and  albumenized  plates. 

2.  The  Collodion — the  same  formula  to  be 
used  by  all  the  parties  in  order  to  secure 
uniform  results  as  follows: 

Pyroxylin 80  grains. 

Iodide  of  Cadmium,   .         .  96      " 

Bromide  of  Cadmium,         .  8      " 
Alcohol,       ....       8  ounces. 

Ether,  .         .        .         .  8      " 

3.  The  Nitrate  Bath.  Silver  forty  grains 
to  the  ounce  of  water,  acidified  in  the  pro- 
portion of  one  drop  of  C.  P.  nitric  acid  to 
four  ounces  of  the  bath — no  iodide. 

4.  The  Developer. 

Sulphate  of  Iron  and  Am- 
monia, ...       1  ounce. 
Glacial  Acetic  Acid,         .       2  drachms. 
Alcohol,  ....       1£  ounces. 

Water,      .         .         .         .  16       " 

5.  Fix  with  cyanide,  except  during 
actual  contact,  when  the  plates  may  be  fixed 
in  a  dish  of  hypo. 

The  labor  is  divided  as  follows  :  One  as- 
sistant coats  and  dips  the  plates  in  the  order 
in  which  they  have  been  numbered ;  a 
second  develops  and  fixes,  a  third  takes  the 
plates  from  the  first  and  makes  the  expo- 
sures, while  the  chief  watches  over  all. 

The  great  event  has  transpired,  but  the 
parties  may  not  yet  return  home.  They 
must  remain  a  week  longer,  and  on  every 
sunny  day,  they  must  make  reversed  pho- 
tographs of  lines  of  plate  holder,  just  as  they 
were  required  to  do  for  thirty  days  previous 
to  the  transit.     Directions  are  given  in  full 


366 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


for  this  work,  but  they  would  be  of  little 
interest  to  our  readers. 

We  lay  down  our  pen  now,  and  impa- 
tiently await  the  actual  news  from  our 
friends,  which  we  trust  the  telegraph  will 
soon  bring  us. 

OUR  PICTURE. 

As  a  sort  of  terminus  to  "  Views  Abroad 
and  Across,"  we  present  our  readers  in  the 
current  number  with  a  picture  of  a  little 
different  order  from  any  they  have  ever  had 
before ;  namely,  a  first-class  architectural 
view  of  some  one  or  another  of  the  beautiful 
churches  or  cathedrals  of  the  old  country. 
Among  the  greatest  attractions  to  the  visitor 
in  Europe  are  such  places.  They  not  only 
represent  in  themselves  the  various  styles  of 
architecture,  embodying  some  of  the  most 
exquisite  works  of  art,  but  their  interiors  are 


our  privilege  to  visit,  until  we  were  feasted 
to  the  utmost  limit  of  our  capacity  to  enjoy 
and  understand,  for  one  may  have  too  much 
of  even  such  glorious  things,  if  they  be  taken 
in  too  rapidly. 

About  eight  hundred  years  ago  a  revival 
in  church  architecture  took  place,  and  struc- 
tures were  erected  grander  and  more  mag- 
nificent than  all  those  \if  preceding  centu- 
ries. Associations  of  builders  were  formed, 
whereof  the  prelates  and  abbots  themselves 
formed  a  portion,  and  which  were  essentially 
composed  of  men  who  were  bound  by  a  re- 
ligious vow;  the  arts  were  cultivated  in  the 
convents,  the  churches  were  built  under  the 
direction  of  bishops,  the  monks  co-operated 
in  works  of  all  kinds;  and  for  all  this  pho- 
tography at  least  should  be  thankful,  for  it 
has  supplied  some  of  the  grandest,  loveliest 
subjects  for  the  camera  that  one  could  wish 
for—1 exteriors,  with  their  columns,  and  col- 


St.  Paul's,  London. 


very  often  museums  of  art,  with  their  masses 
of  sculpture  and  acres  of  paintings  by  the  old 
masters,  and  interior  chapels,  to  say  nothing 
of  the  display  of  art  in  the  construction  of 
their  interiors.     Many  of  such  places  it  was 


onnades,  and  porticos,  and  stairways,  and 
domes,  and  turrets,  and  pinnacles,  and  pedi- 
ments, etc. — interiors,  with  their  massive 
aisles,  and  arches,  and  naves,  and  pillars, 
and  niches,  and  chapels,  and  pulpits,  and 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


367 


choirs,  and  triforiums,  and  confessionals, 
and  vaulted  ceilings,  and  domes,  and  altars, 
with  masses  of  statuary  which  seem  almost 
to  possess  breath  and  life  I  Look  for  a  quiet 
example  upon  the  engravings  of  St.  Paul's 
at  London,  exterior  and  interior.  How 
grandly  the  old  dome  stands  out  above  all 
its  neighbors,  over  and  above  the  great  sea 
of  life  at  its  feet,  like  a  lighthouse  in  mid- 
ocean  ;  and  its  interior,  with  its  choir,  and 
arches,  and  glorious  dome,  and  pulpit,  and 
ceiling,  and  pavement,  and  windows — all  so 
impressive  and  beautiful — the  work  of  one 
architect  and  one  master  builder  for  thirty- 
five  years — a  Latin  cross  in  form,  and  five 
hundred  and  fourteen  feet  long,  by  two-hun- 
dred and  eighty-seven  feet  wide,  costing 
four  million  dollars.  The  tombs  of  the 
dead  here  are  elaborated  with  exquisite 
sculpture;  yet  with  all  its  massive  grandeur, 
St.  Paul's  is  not  to  be  compared  with  its 
neighbor,  "Westminster  Abbey.      We   will 


four  hundred  feet  long  and  two  hundred 
feet  wide,  and  is  of  Gothic  design.  There 
are  many  chapels  in  this  exquisite  interior, 
some  of  which  are  made  fairly  gaucly  by 
the  elaborate  display  of  works  of  art,  re- 
minding one  more  of  the  churches  of  Italy 
than  any  other  church  in  England.  You 
will  observe  the  arches,  and  pillars,  and 
niches,  and  choir  stalls,  and  tombs,  and 
works  of  sculpture  in  all  directions,  with  the 
superb  ceiling,  every  foot  of  which  is  a 
study.  These  are  comparatively  feeble  ex- 
amples of  what  may  be  seen  by  the  lover 
of  art  in  Europe,  and  we  only  mention  them 
in  order  to  bring  your  attention  more 
directly  upon  a  subject  which  we  could  not 
help  but  confess,  while  in  Europe,  that 
American  photographers  are  deficient  in. 
Weallude  to  the  photographing  of  churches, 
exteriors  and  interiors.  We  have  many 
beautiful  ones  in  our  country,  though  not 
nearly    so   beautiful   as   those   abroad,   yet 


Westminster  Abbey. 


give  you  a  chance  of  comparing  interiors 
by  examining  the  drawings  which  follow. 
It  is  likewise  built  in  the  form  of  a  cross, 


such  as  are  well  worthy  the  attention  of  the 
camera.  And  the  first  step  towards  prog- 
ress in  that  direction  is  the  study  of  proper 


368 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


examples.  "We  place  such  before  you  now, 
and  propose  in  some  way  or  another  in  the 
future  to  give  you  further  instruction  on 
this  score. 

The  pictures  which  embellish  our  present 
number  were  made  by  Messrs.  W.  A.  Man- 
sell  &  Co.  London.  We  have  digressed 
from  our  usual  plan  of  using  one  picture  all 
through  our  edition,  and  instead  have  used 
quite  a  number  of  subjects.  "We  append  a 
list  of  them,  and  the  number  of  your  print 
you  will  find  on  the  back  of  it.  In  this  way 
we  presentagreatervariety,and  areenabled 
to  do  it  more  quickly  than  we  otherwise 
could.  Again  it  gives  those  subscribers 
who  are  in  the  same  towns  and  cities  an 
opportunity  of  comparing  pictures  with 
each  other.  Still  we  do  not  intend  that 
such  shall  be  their  only  way  of  studying  a 
variety  of  Messrs.  Mansell  &  Co  's  splen- 
did architectural  photographs.  We  have 
arranged  with  those  gentlemen  for  a  large 
lot  of  their  pictures  at  a  very  low  price. 
These  we  have  selected  from  their  long  list, 
and  so  arranged  them  in  sets  as  to  enable 
the  purchaser  to  have  a  splendid  variety  to 
study  of  the  various  orders  of  architecture, 
exteriors,  interiors,  parts  of  interiors,  and 
sculpture. 

The  price  is  so  ridiculously  low  that 
every  photographer  can  afford  to  avail  him- 
self of  this  grand  opportunity.  For  the 
lists  and  terms  we  must  refer  to  the  adver- 
tisement. We  do  not  enter  this  field  as  a 
speculation!  We  do  want  our  readers  to 
become  well  cultivated  in  all  branches  of 
their  work ;  such  study  and  drill  will  do 
them  good,  if  we  may  be  permitted  to  make 
such  a  suggestion.  Following  this,  please 
read  the  article  on  Photographing  Interiors. 
We  trust  that  all  these  things  may  be  of 
profit  to  you,  and  help  you.  We  leave  the 
matter  with  you  to  consider. 

When  in  London  we  visited  the  huge 
photographic  manufactory  of  Messrs.  Man- 
sell  &  Co.,  and  we  see  no  reason  why  sooner 
or  later  we  should  not  have  just  such  grand 
places  here.  A  little  push  is  all  that  is 
needed. 

In  order  that  each  subscriber  may  know 
the  subject  of  the  picture  in  his  number  we 
have  caused  our  mounter  to  place  the  num- 
ber of  the  view  on  the  back  of  the  mount, 


and  here  append  a  list  of  the  subjects  for 
reference. 

The  copies  we  offer  for  sale  are  the  best 
of  these,  carefully  and  studiously  selected 
with  the  object  named  in  view.  The  list  of 
subjects  is  as  follows  : 

List  of  Subjects. 

Norwich  Cathedral,  Nos.  2011.  2011a. 
Hereford  Cathedral,  565,  571,  572,  573,  578,  584, 

590.  591. 
Peterborough  Cathedral,  543,  546. 
Gloucester  Cathedral,  593«,  594,  596,  615. 
Ely  Cathedral,  83,  85,  89,  174,  226,  242,  2002. 
Fountain's  Abbey,  514,  516,  517,  524,  531,  532. 
Oxford  Cathedral,  15,  40,  44,  50,  223,  240. 
Lichfield  Cathedral,  75,  175,  356. 
Windsor  Castle,  211,  342  and  354. 
Durham  Cathedral,  493,  495,  496,  497,  499,  501, 

505,  506,  509,  513. 
Peterborough  Cathedral,  548,  553,  556,  557. 
Lincoln  Cathedral,  214,  217,  220,  243,  344,  365. 
Ripon  Cathedral,  535,  536,  542. 
Winchester  Cathedral,  225,  229,  230,  232. 


PHOTOGRAPHING  INTERIORS. 

In  this  department  photographers  find 
many  difficulties  to  contend  with,  and  often 
entire  failure  is  the  result  of  patient  and 
industrious  effort.  We  have,  therefore,  de- 
voted somewhat  of  our  present  number  to 
instruction  in  this  direction  The  greatest 
difficulty  is  usually  the  want  of  light,  and 
the  consequent  prolonged  exposure,  during 
which  the  plate,  by  the  ordinary  wet  pro- 
cess, becomes  dried  and  stained  beyond 
remedy. 

To  overcome  these  difficulties,  the  re- 
quisites are:  A  quick- working  instrument, 
and  a  sensitive  process  that  will  admit  of  a 
long  exposure. 

In  regard  to  the  first  of  these  no  partic- 
ular instrument  can  be  recommended,  but 
the  photographer  must  use  his  discretion. 
If  there  be  sufficient  light  so  that  a  good 
view  lens  can  be  used,  it  will  doubtless  give 
a  more  perfect  picture,  both  in  the  archi- 
tectural correctness  of  the  drawing,  and  in 
the  depth  of  focus,  where  there  is  an  extent 
of  perspective.  But  in  many  cases  the  light 
is  such  that  only  a  quick-working  portrait 
ens  can  be  used.     Many  of  the  best  por- 


PLEASE  PILL  YOUR  ORDERS  IN  THE  BLANK  BELOW. 


Premium  on  all  New  Subscribers,  not  your  own,  at  the  rate  of  $1  per  annum,  payable  in  any  of  our 

Publications,  offered  to  everybody.    Please  see  Red  Letter  advertisements 

in  the  November  and  December  Numbers. 

Please  read  our  Advertisements  of  Photographic  Publications. 


187 


Messrs,  BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


Find  herein  $ 

publications  : 

M( 

Philadelphia  Photographer,  $5.00  a  year, 


for  the  following 


COMMENCING. 


Copies  Photographic  Mosaic,  18         cloth,  $1.00 ;  paper,  50  cents,    .     .     . 

"  Hearn's  Practical  Printer,  $2.50, 

"  Bigelow's  Alburn  of  Lighting  and  Posing,  $6.00, 

"  How  to  Paint  Photographs  (3d  edition),  $2.00, 

■'  Dr.  Vogel's  Handbook  of  Photography  (new  edition),  $3.50,    .     . 

"  Dr.  Vogel's  Photographer's  Pocket  Keference  Book,  $1.50, 

"  Anderson's  Photo-Comic  Allmynack,  75  cents, 

"  The  Perrotyper's  Guide,  75  cents, . 

"  How  to  Sit  for  your  Photograph  ;  cloth,  60  cents ;  paper,  30  cents, 

"  Linn's  Landscape  Photography,  75  cents, 

■"  Glimpses  at  Photography,  $1.25, 

"  Lea's  Manual  of  Photograph}',  $3.75, 

"  Wilson's  Lantern  Journeys,  $2.00, 

Total  Amount, $ 


Name, 

p.  o., 

County, 
State, 


I  also  add  $ for  the  following,  to  be  sent  to  the  new  subscribers 

named  on  the  other  side.     Premium  wanted  also  named  on  the  other  side. 

[On  the  other  side  please  put  additional  orders  to  your  own  in  the  same  form  as  the  above,  and  your  order  for 
premiums.  Do  not  send  greenbacks  if  yon  can  get  P.  0.  Order  or  draft.  For  premium  list  see  third  page  of  cover 
of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer.]    Sample  Copies  free. 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


369 


trait  combinations,  however,  give  very  per- 
fect lines,  being  almost  entirely  free  from 
distortion,  and  give  good  depth  with  a 
medium-sized  stop.  The  second  requisite 
has  presented  the  greatest  difficulties,  how- 
ever, and  has  commanded  the  attention  and 
skill  of  the  best  workers,  both  in  Europe 
and  this  country,  who  have  endeavored  to 
overcome  the  evils  attendant  upon  long  ex- 
posures, and  devise  processes  that  may  be 
sufficient  for  nearly  all  cases. 

Mr.  Ernest  Lacan,  our  valued  Paris  cor- 
respondent, referred  some  time  ago  to  a 
letter  he  had  received  from  a  correspondent, 
giving  the  process  used  by  MM.  Hanfstsengl 
Brothers,  of  Munich,  for  the  reproductions 
of  paintings  and  photographing  interiors. 

"  The  collodion  which  they  use  is  very 
full  of  alcohol,  being  composed  of 


Alcohol, 
Ether,  . 
Pyroxylin, 


60  cub.  cents. 
40     " 
1  gramme. 


"To  this  is  added  ten  cubic  centimetres  of 
a  sensitizing  solution  thus  made  up  : 

Alcohol,      .         .         .  100  cub.  cents. 
Iodide  of  Cadmium,    .         5  grammes. 
Iodide  of  Ammonium,  5  " 

Bromide  of  Ammonium,      2.50      " 

"  This  collodion  is  easily  spread,  and  al- 
lows of  a  very  long  exposure.  It  has  been 
extended  to  three-quarters  of  an  hour,  with- 
out there  being  the  slightest  desiccation  of 
the  film  apparent,  nor  the  slightest  abnor- 
mal reduction.  When  the  exposure  is  to 
be  very  much  prolonged,  the  reverse  of  the 
plate  is  coated  with  a  film  of  glycerin  " 

For  long  exposures  it  will  be  found  that 
plates  prepared  in  a  bath  free  from  ether 
and  alcohol,  will  keep  much  better  than 
when  the  bath  is  charged  with  these  vola- 
tile liquids.  But  we  give  below  another 
process  which  we  extract  from  the  News, 
which  works  in  a  different  direction  alto- 
gether, and  which  we  commend  to  the  prac- 
tice of  those  making  long  exposures,  as  com- 
ing from  the  best  of  authority,  and  based  on 
sound  principles  of  chemical  science:  "The 
plan  we  are  about  to  describe  is  due  to  Mr. 
Valentine  Blanchard,  who  during  the  hot 
autumnal  months  of  last  year,  found  it  in- 
valuable during  the  long  exposures  neces- 


sary in  some  dark  interiors,  and  on  various 
occasions  during  landscape  work,  in  which 
the  plate  had  to  be  carried  a  long  distance. 
He  has  already  further  put  it  to  the  test  this 
season,  having  a  few  weeks  ago  exposed  a 
12 x  10  plate  in  one  of  the  dark  interiors  of 
Westminster  Abbey  for  three  hours,  and 
then  developed  it  without  a  stain,  and  with- 
out trace  of  fog  or  any  other  defect. 

"  The  plan  is  simple,  and  consists  in  the 
use  of  a  collodion  prepared  for  the  purpose 
by  the  addition  of  a  much  larger  proportion 
of  bromide  than  is  usually  employed.     The 
value   of    bromide   in   securing  immunity 
from  stains,  comets,  and  other  markings,  has 
long  been  known,  but  its  mode  of  operation 
in  doing  this  has  not  been  well  understood. 
Its  action  in  permitting  long  keeping,  how- 
ever, is  easily  explained.     The  process  of 
double  decomposition,  in  which  the  bromide 
salts  employed  in  the  collodion  are  changed 
into  bromide  of  silver,  is  much  slower,  as  is 
well  known,    than    is    the    conversion    of 
iodides,  and  when  a  simply  bromized  col- 
lodion  is  employed,  the  immersion  in  the 
nitrate  bath  needs  to  be  very    much   pro- 
longed, in  order  to  convert  the  whole  of  the 
bromide  in  the  collodion  into  bromide  of 
silver.  In  effecting  his  purpose,  Mr.  Blanch- 
ard just  pursues  the  opposite  course.     Em- 
ploying a  very  highly  bromized  collodion, 
he  gives  the  plate  the  shortest  possible  im- 
mersion in  the  nitrate  bath,  keeping  it  in 
motion  from   the   first,  to  get  rid  rapidly  of 
the  greasy,  streaky  appearance  of  the  plate. 
The  solution   running  evenly  over  the  film, 
without  streaks  or  oily-looking  lines,  which 
is  generally  regarded   as   the  indication  of 
sufficient  immersion,  is,  in  reality,  no  test 
of  the  conversion  of  the  salts  in  the  collo- 
dion film  into  salts  of  silver  ;  it  merely  in- 
dicates that  the  alcohol  and  ether  in   the 
film   have    become  thoroughly  mixed  with 
the  aqueous  solution,  and  the  mutual  repul- 
sion has  ceased.     Under  ordinary  circum- 
stances, however,  by  the  time  this  is  thor- 
oughly effected,  the  mutual  decomposition 
of  the  iodides  originally  in   the   collodion 
and  the  nitrate  of  silver,  and  the  formation 
of  iodide  of  silver  and  a  nitrate  of  potash, 
or  other  base,  is  also  complete.     With  bro- 
mides,  as  we  have  said,  this  operation  is 
not  so  rapidly  completed ;    if    therefore  a 


24 


370 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


collodion  film  containing  a  large  proportion 
of  bromide  be  immersed  and  kept  in  mo- 
tion, so  as  rapidly  to  get  rid  of  greasiness, 
and  then  removed  after  a  very  brief  immer- 
sion, the  film  will  contain  a  large  portion  of 
the  bromide,  say  of  cadmium  or  am- 
monium, which  remains  undecomposed, 
and  is  not  converted  into  bromide  of  silver. 
In  this  fact  lies  the  safety  of  the  plate  for 
long  exposures.  The  free  nitrate  of  silver, 
which  would  otherwise  be  crystallizing  on 
the  surface  of  the  film,  or  by  the  concentra- 
tion of  the  solution  caused  by  evaporation, 
acquiring  a  readier  tendency  to  abnormal 
reduction,  now  performs  a  different  office  ; 
being  in  contact  with  the  unconverted  bro- 
mide of  cadmium  or  ammonium,  it  is  de- 
composed by  it,  and  aids  in  the  formation  of 
bromide  of  silver  in  the  film. 

"  Instead  of  being  made  stronger  by  evap- 
oration of  water,  the  free  nitrate  is  made 
weaker  by  the  loss  of  the  silver  which  com- 
bines with  the  bromine,  whilst  the  nitric 
acid,  combining  with  the  base  which  leaves 
the  bromine,  produces  an  innocuous,  or 
possibly,  in  some  cases,  a  hygroscopic,  and 
therefore  beneficial,  salt.  It  will  thus  be 
readily  seen  how  the  use  of  a  large  portion 
of  bromide  and  a  very  short  immersion  of 
the  plate  in  the  nitrate  bath  tend  to  prevent 
the  stains  of  crystallization,  or  of  reduction 
consequent  on  long  exposure  in  warm 
weather.  The  mode  in  which  the  effect  in 
question  is  secured  in  the  case  described 
may  possibly  suggest  an  explanation  of  the 
general  action  of  bromides  as  aids  to  clean 
negatives.  It  is  probable,  in  most  cases, 
where  a  freely  bromized  collodion  is  em- 
ployed, and  the  plate  kept  in  the  bath  the 
usual  two  or  three  minutes,  that  some  por- 
tion of  the  unconverted  bromide  remains  in 
the  film,  and  that  the  formation  of  bromide 
of  silver  goes  on  after  the  plate  leaves  the 
bath,  the  bromide  of  silver  being  formed  at 
the  expense  of  the  free  nitrate  on  the  film, 
which  is  thus  much  weakened.  As  the  use 
of  a  weak  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver,  at 
times  secured  by  redipping  the  plate  in  a 
weak  bath,  is  known  also  to  be  conducive  to 
cleanliness,  the  weakening  of  the  free 
nitrate  by  the  formation  of  bromide  of  silver 
may  also  be  a  source  of  cleanliness  well  known 
as  an  accompaniment  of  the  use  of  bromides. 


"  The  amount  of  bromide  in  collodion  for 
very  long  exposures  may  vary  from  two 
grains  to  two  grains  and  a  half.  Any  soluble 
bromide  may,  we  presume,  be  used  without 
impropriety." 


A  Word  or  two  about  Books. 

Since  we  include  an  order  sheet  in  our 
present  number,  we  desire  to  call  attention 
to  some  of  our  books,  which  we  believe  pho- 
tographers will  find  particularly  desirable 
and  instructive  during  the  coming  dark 
days  and  long  evenings. 

Dr.  Vogel's  Handbook  of  Photography, 
Second  Edition  ($3.50),  has  been  increased 
to  384  pages,  and  is  without  doubt  the  most 
complete  work  of  its  class.  Many  new 
things  are  added  to  it,  with  fine  new  illustra-  ' 
tions,and  four  new  photographs  illustrating 
the  illumination  of  the  face,  and  the  old  por- 
tions have  been  completely  revised,  so  that 
it  is  really  in  the  main  a  new  book.  You 
cannot  afford  to  lose  the  benefit  of  reading  it 

Photographic  Mosaics  for  1875,  is  no  worse 
than  usual.  It  will  also  be  ready  about 
December  5th,  and  contains  a  list  of  articles 
that  cannot  be  excelled.  To  know  what 
they  are  and  the  names  of  the  authors,  we 
must  ask  you  to  read  the  advertisement. 
You  get  144  pages  of  good  reading  for  50 
cents. 

The  Ferrotyper1  s  Guide,  Second  Edition, 
will  also  be  ready  by  about  the  time  you  see 
this.  The  demand  for  this  little  work  com- 
pels us  to  reprint  it.  It  is  in  matter  much 
the  same  as  former  editions,  which  are  ex- 
hausted.    75  cents. 

The  Practical  Printer  has  proven  a  most 
acceptable  book  both  at  home  and  abroad, 
and  the  copies  left  are  just  as  good  as  those 
already  sold,  so  do  not  be  afraid  to  order 
them.  In  England  a  great  part  of  it  has 
been  reprinted  in  the  photographic  journals, 
doubtless  for  want  of  other  matter  as  good, 
and  to  operators  there  it  has  also  proven  a 
most  acceptable  helper.  Our  correspon- 
dent, Mr.  William  Heighway,  of  London, 
says  of  it:  "  I  think  it  is  the  best  photo- 
graphic book  of  a  practical  character  that  I 
have  read.  Its  simple,  readable,  earnest 
style  pleases  me  wonderfully,  and  it  is  evi- 
dently the  work  of  a  man  who  knows  what 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


371 


he  is  talking  about,  and  ono  who  is  happy 
in  being  able  to  teach  what  he  knows — a  rare 
combination,  as  we  know.  Your  contribu- 
tions to  photographic  literature  are  most 
valuable,  and  of  them  all  this  last  is  most 
valuable."  The  price  of  The  Practical  Prin- 
ter is  $2  50. 

Wilson's  Lantern  Journeys  is  a  readable 
book  to  any  one  interested  in  foreign  coun- 
tries and  places,  and  especially  valuable  to 
any  one  who  has  a  series  of  stereoscopic 
views  or  lantern  slides — six  hundred  places 
described — three  for  a  cent — $2. 

We  now  leave  the  subject  to  you  with  the 
order  sheets. 


MATTERS    OF   THE 


Membership  costs  $2  ;  annual  dues,  $4,  in 
advance.  Employes  half  rates.  Life  mem- 
bership, $25,  and  no  dues.  It  is  proposed 
presently  to  double  the  fees  for  life  mem- 
bership. 

Members  are  hereby  notified  that  their 
annual  dues  were  payable  June  1st,  1874. 
Employers  $4,  and  employes  $2.  The 
Treasurer  urges  that  prompt  remittances  be 
made.     Please  remit  now. 

All  remittances  of  back  dues  should  be 
sent  to  the  Treasurer,  Albert  Moore,  828 
Wood  Street,  Philadelphia,  and  fees  and 
dues  for  new  members  to  the  Permanent 
Secretary,  Edward  L.  Wilson,  Seventh  and 
Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 

What  does  it  mean  ?  The  Executive  Com- 
mittee were  much  surprised  at  their  last 
meeting,  to  hear  the  Secretary  report  twenty- 
four  new  life  members !  This  surely  shows 
greater  prosperity  than  was  ever  known 
before,  and  it  means  that  the  N.  P.  A.  is 
not  going  down.  That  it  is  in  a  more  pros- 
perous condition  now  than  ever  before.  Its 
debt  is  less,  and  its  roll  for  life  is  larger 
than  ever  before  also.  Only  a  small  debt 
remains,  and  if  those  whose  dues  are  not 
paid  will  make  one  more  effort  to  pay  up, 


they  will  never  see  their  Association  in  debt 
again.  Do  it  now,  and  let  the  now  year 
find  it  free  from  any  debt  whatever.  It  can 
be  done. 

The  Report  of  the  Chicago  Convention  is 
now  ready,  and  will  be  sent  to  any  one  who 
sends  the  Secretary  $1  for  it  It  has  been 
carefully  revised,  all  superfluous  matter, 
tedious  discussion,  etc.,  clipped  from  it,  so 
that  it  is  really  a  good  practical  work  on 
photography  of  nearly  one  hundred  pages. 
We  should  prefer  having  seen  it  given  to 
all  the  members  of  the  Association  whose 
dues  are  paid,  or  to  have  had  the  privilege 
of  giving  it  to  our  readers  as  heretofore, 
but  since  we  are  restricted,  we  have  to  say 
that  only  five  hundred  copies  are  issued,  the 
bulk  of  which  have  been  ordered.  When 
the  rest  are  gone,  there  will  be  no  more  ob- 
tainable at  any  price  ;  all  the  practical,  use- 
ful matter  is  included. 

Where  shall  we  go  ?  Boston  has  been 
given  up  by  the  Executive  Committee,  and 
there  is  a  hankering  after  San  Francisco. 
Why  not  go  there?  It  would  satisfy  in  an 
equivalent  those  who  prefer  to  have  no 
convention  in  1875;  and  also  those  who 
reasonably  argue,  that  a  suspension  of  the 
annual  conventions  would  be  fatal  to  the 
life  of  the  Association.  We  do  not  think  a 
better  compromise  could  be  effected,  espe- 
cially as  our  California  friends  offer  such  in- 
ducements. 

Good.  A  city  photographer  was  over- 
heard the  other  day  to  deliver  himself  thus  : 
"  Join  the  N".  P.  A.  ?  Not  I!  Its  conven- 
tions and  exhibitions  have  learned  country 
photographers  to  make  just  as  good  work 
as  we  do.  There  was  a  time  when  country 
people  came  to  us  for  their  good  pictures, 
now  they  can  get  them  at  home.  No,  sir  ! 
No  N.  P.  A.  for  me.'' 

Well,  why  don't  more  of  our  city  photog- 
raphers attend  upon  the  N.  P.  A.  conven- 
tions ?  Perhaps  they  might  learn  something 
too.     There  is  room  for  it  in  some  instances. 

The  National  Photographic  Association 
will  Live. — It  seems  as  though  the  Associa- 
tion is  thought  more  of  by  those  who  are  at 
a  distance,  and  who  cannot  attend  the 
annual  meetings,  than  those  who  are  nea 


372 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGE APHEE. 


and  can.  Here  is  another  example.   Mr.  H. 
B.  Hillyer,  of  San  Antonio,  Texas,  says  : 

"I  should  much  regret  to  see  it  go  down, 
and  as  it  is  the  property,  or  as  it  were,  a 
stock  company,  in  which  every  photogra- 
pher is  or  should  be  interested,  it  is  for  the 
interest  of  each  and  every  individual  pho- 
tographer to  assist  it  on  its  legs,  and  keep 
it  there  ;  and  I  assure  you  there  will  be 
many  regrets  by  those  who  let  it  die  by 
their  neglect,  after  it  is  too  late  to  render 
any  assistance.  "We  often  fail  to  appreciate 
a  thing  when  in  possession,  but  once  lose 
it  irrecoverably,  and  then  we  know  and 
feel  what  we  have  lost ;  and,  I  am  sure, 
there  is  not  a  live  photographer  in  the 
country  but  will  be  sorry,  should  the  Na- 
tional Photographic  Association  cease,  from 
want  of  their  aid.  I  have  felt  much  in  this 
matter,  but  have  from  circumstances  been 
prevented  from  being  as  liberal  as  I  wished 
to  be,  but  with  recovering  health  and  ambi- 
tion, I  hope  in  future  to  do  more  toward 
making  it  a  permanent  success,  and  much 
regret  not  being  able  to  attend  the  meet- 
ing in  Chicago,  in  July,  but  you  can  be 
assured  I  was  with  you  in  soul,  and  shall 
expect  to  see  its  report  soon." 


PROCEEDINGS 

OF  THE 

Executive  Committee  of  the  National 
Photographic  Association. 

A  meeting  of  the  Executive  Committee 
was  held  on  Thursday,  November  12th, 
1874,  at  8  p.m.,  at  the  office  of  the  Philadel- 
phia Photographer.  Present,  Messrs.  W. 
Irving  Adams,  chairman,  A.  Bogardus,  V. 
M.  Wilcox,  J.  W.  Black,  W.  H.  Ehoads, 
and  Edward  L.  "Wilson.  The  minutes  of 
the  last  meeting  were  read  and  approved. 

The  report  of  the  Treasurer  was  read, 
showing  the  treasury  $17.69  overdrawn,  and 
a  debt  of  $346.65  still  upon  the  Association. 

Considerable  pleasure  waa  expressed  that 
the  debt  had  been  reduced  to  "so  fine  a 
point."  The  Secretary  announced  that  if 
all  those  who  had  agreed  at  Chicago  to  be- 
come life-members,  and  to  contribute  to  the 
debt  fund  would  now  keep  their  promises, 
the  debt  would  be  entirely  removed  and  a 
balance  of  about  $100  in  the  treasury.     He 


read  a  list  of  these  promises,  which  amounted 
to  $435,  and  he  was  directed  to  remind  the 
parties  of  the  agreements  and  to  solicit  a 
settlement  as  soon  as  convenient.  All  the 
members  seemed  to  feel  cheerful  over  so 
pleasant  a  prospect  for  the  Association,  and 
were  made  to  feel  still  more  confident  of  the 
ultimate  strength  and  growth  of  it,  by 
the  still  further  report  by  the  Secretary  of 
twenty-three  life  members,  viz. :  J.  A.  W. 
Pittman,  John  Cadwallader,  Kudolph  Goe- 
bel,  E.  Y.  Bell,  A.  S.  Southworth,  D.  H. 
Cross,  F.  A.  Simonds,  George  S.  Cook,  S. 
P.  Wells,  W.  H.  Kulofson,  J.  K.  demons, 
Jr.,  Mrs.  G.  N.  Barrett,  C.  H.  Danforth,  G. 
H.  Loomis,  I.  B.  "Webster,  G.  M.  Carlisle, 
F.  B.  Clench,  Mrs.  E.  N.  Lockwood,  G. 
Cramer,  A.  C.  Partridge,  H.  R.  Marks,  A. 
N.  Hardy,  C.  D.  Mosher. 

These  parties  were  all  approved  by  the 
committee,  and  they  are  life-members. 

Mr.  William  H.  Ehoads,  who  was  ap- 
pointed to  audit  the  report  and  accounts  of 
Local  Secretary  Hesler,  reported  that  he 
found  from  Mr.  Hester's  account  that  the 
expenses  of  the  Convention  and  Exhibition 

were $1618  67 

The  collections  from  dealers,  pho- 
tographers, hotels,  admissions, 
etc., 1162  70 

Leaving  a  deficiency  of       .         .      $455  97 

Which  deficiency  has  been  paid  by  the 
Treasurer  of  the  Association. 

Mr.  Khoads  also  suggested  in  his  report 
"  that  a  special  vote  of  thanks  be  tendered 
to  Local  Secretary  Hesler,  and  through  him 
to  the  numerous  subscribers  at  Chicago, 
who  so  kindly  gave  money  and  their  ser- 
vices for  the  benefit  of  the  Association." 

Mr.  Bhoads's  report  was  accepted  and 
adopted. 

The  Secretary  read  correspondence  di- 
rected by  this  committee  between  himself 
and  Messrs.  J.  W.  Black,  Local  Secretary 
elect,  of  Boston,  and  President  Rulofson, 
with  reference  to  the  time  and  place  of 
holding  the  1875  Convention.  Also  from 
other  parties  on  the  same  score,  the  gist  of 
which  was  that  no  proper  place  could  be 
had  in  Boston  for  the  Exhibition,  without 
great  expense,  and  that  a  hall  was  offered 
in  San  Francisco  free  of  expense,  and  all 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


373 


sorts  of  welcome  tendered  by  the  new  Presi- 
dent to  "come  to  San  Francisco."  Like- 
wise that  the  President  of  the  Central  Pa- 
cific Railroad  had  agreed  to  make  any 
reduction  in  fare  from  Omaha  west  that 
could  he  secured  to  that  point. 

Mr.  Black  was  present,  and  stated  that  if 
it  was  concluded  to  have  the  Convention  in 
Boston  they  would  do  the  best  they  could, 
and  also  expect  to  raise  some  money,  say 
$500  from  the  dealers,  and  more  from 
others.  The  only  objection  was  the  costs 
of  a  proper  hall,  and  they  would  be  great. 

After  the  matter  was  discussed  at  length, 
and  conference  held  with  Mr.  Black,  Mr. 
Rhoads  offered  the  following: 

Whereas,  A  decided  opposition  appears 
against  the  National  Photographic  Associa- 
tion holding  the  next  annual  Convention 
at  Boston  ; 

And  whereas,  A  strong  pressure  is  brought 
to  bear  upon  the  Executive  Committee  to 
hold  the  next  Convention  at  San  Francisco  ; 

And  whereas,  The  National  Photographic 
Association  empowered  the  Executive  Com- 
mittee to  name  the  time  and  place  for  the 
next  Convention,  if  a  change  is  desirable; 
therefore, 

Resolved,  That  after  correspondence  and 
interviews  with  the  Local  Secretary,  Mr. 
Black,  and  prominent  members  of  the  As- 
sociation in  Boston,  and  ascertaining  that 
no  suitable  place  can  be  had,  without  great 
expense,  we  deem  it  inexpedient  to  meet  at 
that  place  next  year. 

Resolved,  That  inasmuch  as  the  Associa- 
tion has  been  repeatedly  urged  by  the  Presi- 
dent, William  H.  Rulofson,  to  hold  the  1875 
Convention  in  San  Francisco,  he  guarantee- 
ing a  hall  free  of  charge,  that  the  Executive 
Committee  address  a  communication  to  the 
prominent  members  and  exhibitors,  asking 
their  views  on  the  subject,  with  a  request  to 
answer  by  return  mail.* 

The  resolutions  were  adopted  unanimous- 
ly, and  the  Secretary  instructed  to  see  what 
railway  terms  could  be  secured  in  case  the 
Convention  be  held  in  San  Francisco. 

Letters  were  read  from  subscribers  for 
copies  of  the  Proceedings  of  the  Chicago 

*  At  this  writing  over  two  thirds  of  the  an- 
swers received  to  the  postal  card  are  in  favor  of 
San  Francisco. 


Convention,  complaining  of  having  to  wait 
so  long  for.it  after  they  had  promptly  paid 
their  money.  The  Secretar}'  reported  that 
about  two  hundred  and  fifty  copies  had  been 
subscribed  and  paid  for ;  not  enough  by 
fifty  dollars  to  cover  the  cost  of  the  lowest 
estimate  bid  for  printing  the  Report.  Sev- 
eral offers  were  made  to  print  it  by  contract, 
and  the  offer  of  Mr.  Edward  L.  Wilson  was 
finally  accepted  as  being  the  most  favorable, 
as  follows  :  "  To  print  the  Report  as  soon  as 
practicable  and  possible,  and  to  make  good 
the  obligations  of  the  Association  to  the 
subscribers  for  copies,  for  the  sum  already 
paid  in  for  the  copies  to  the  treasury,  and 
for  the  exclusive  sale  of  copies  in  the  future ; 
subject,  of  course,  to  the  vote  of  the  Associa- 
tion at  Chicago  that  it  be  published  with- 
out advertisements,  under  cover  alone,  and 
likewise  not  to  be  published  in  any  other 
way ;  and  subject,  too,  to  the  vote  of 
the  Executive  Committee,  that  the  price 
charged  shall  be  one  dollar  per  copy,  and 
no  less."  Thus  that  grievous  matter  was 
disposed  of,  and  the  Report  is  obtainable 
now  as  above. 

After  further  desultory  conversations  and 
congratulations  on  the  flattering  prospects 
of  the  Association,  on  motion,  adjourned. 
Edward  L.  Wilson, 

Secretary. 

SOCIETY  GOSSIP. 

Photographic  Society  of  Philadel- 
phia, November  4th,  1874,  the  President, 
J.  C.  Browne,  Esq  ,  in  the  chair. 

The  minutes  of  the  last  meeting  and  the 
report  of  the  Treasurer  for  the  past  year 
were  read  and  accepted. 

The  resignation  of  Mr.  Joshua  Lippin- 
eott  was  read  and  accepted. 

The  following  gentlemen  were  elected  to 
serve  as  officers  for  the  ensuing  year : 

President,  Mr.  John  C.  Browne. 

Vice-Presidents,  Mr.  George  W.  Hewitt, 
Mr.  John  Carbutt. 

Recording  Secretary,  Mr.  Ellerslie  Wal- 
lace. 

Corresponding  Secretary,  Dr.  Charles 
Seiler. 

Treasurer,  Mr.  S.Fisher  Corlies. 

The  following  committees  were  appointed 
by  the  chair  :    Messrs.  Tilghman,  Fassitt, 


374 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGEAPHEE. 


and  Dixon,  Koom  Committee;  Messrs. 
Hewitt  and  Dixon,  Revising  Committee. 

Mr.  Theophilus  P.  Chandler  was  elected 
to  membership. 

A  motion  was  made  to  change  the  even- 
ing for  the  stated  meetings  to  the  second 
Wednesday  in  the  month.  Laid  over  until 
the  next  meeting. 

Dr.  Seiler  gave  an  account  of  a  micro- 
scopic examination  which  he  had  made  of 
some  decomposed  albumen  exhibited  by  the 
President  at  the  last  meeting.  He  had 
found  numbers  of  animalcules  known  as 
algce  in  the  solution,  and  offered  as  an  ex- 
planation of  their  presence,  the  passage  of 
air  carrying  germs  of  the  same  into  the 
bottle  through  the  cork  or  otherwise. 

Mr.  Carbutt  spoke  in  favor  of  Ackland's 
formula  for  preparing  albumen,  and  said 
that  he  had  kept  such  solutions  for  six 
months  without  change. 

Mr.  Bates  exhibited  a  No.  5  Ross  sym- 
metrical lens. 

On  behalf  of  the  Room  Committee,  Mr. 
Tilghman  reported  that  the  balance  of  the 
Sciopticon  Fund  had  been  expended  in  slides. 

Pennsylvania,  Philadelphia,  No- 
vember 16th. — The  Committee  on  Protec- 
tive Association,  appointed  at  the  May 
meeting,  reported  that  not  having  heard  of 
any  further  action  being  taken  in  New 
York  or  Brooklyn,  where  the  movement 
originated,  there  had  seemed  to  be  no  call 
for  further  action,  in  connection  with  them. 
It  was  agreed,  however,  that  the  committee 
be  continued  with  instructions  to  look  after 
the  interests  of  the  members  of  our  own 
Association  here,  and  protect  them  as  far  as 
possible  from  fraud  or  imposition. 

Mr.  Rhoads  exhibited  some  fine  speci- 
mens of  the  Glace"  pictures.  The  members 
were  much  interested  in  these,  and  also 
some  of  the  same  class  of  work  by  Mr. 
Phillips. 

The  thanks  of  the  Assoc4ation  was  voted 
to  the  publisher  of  the  Western  Photographic 
News  for  a  copy  of  that  journal. 

Boston  Photographic  Association, 
November  6th,  1874,  the  President  in  the 
chair. 

The  Executive  Committee  were  called 
to  report  the  arrangements  made  with  the 
Boston  Athenaeum. 


Mr.  Black  said  he  was  not  aware  that 
such  a  motion  was  made,  and  therefore  he 
had  no  arrangements  made.  Thought  be 
must  have  been  out  of  the  room  when  the 
vote  was  taken.  He  thought  a  visit  to  the 
Athenaeum  might  do  some  good,  but  for  the 
mass  of  photographers  a  lecture  commenc- 
ing at  the  beginning  of  art  would  be  of 
more  benefit.  He  was  sorry  he  was  obliged 
to  leave  the  meeting ;  he  had  received  a 
telegram  from  New  York,  and  was  obliged 
to  retire  in  order  to  reach  the  train. 

Mr.  Southworth  spoke  some  moments, 
and  was  listened  to  with  marked  attention. 
He  said  he  had  not  heard  a  photographer 
that  had  spoken  on  art  that  his  ideas  har- 
monized with  so  closely  as  did  Mr.  Black's. 

The  President,  in  his  remarks,  thought 
some  photographers  were  as  good  artists  as 
oil  painters,  for  the  photographer  does  in 
twenty-five  or  thirty  seconds  what  it  takes 
the  artist  in  oil  a  day  or,  perhaps,  two  or 
three  days.  He  thought  some  artist  pho- 
tographers better  capable  to  instruct  than 
one  not  acquainted  with  the  chemical  ac- 
tion. 

Remarks  were  made  by  Messrs.  Rowell, 
Bowers,  and  others. 

Benjamin  French  &  Co.  exhibited  one 
of  Moulton's  rapid  washers.  Messrs. 
Rowell,  Hentz,  and  others,  who  have  used 
them,  testified  to  their  usefulness,  and  con- 
sidered the  prints  washed  this  way  a  great 
deal  better  than  by  the  old  mode  of  wash- 
ing. 

At  nine  o'clock  the  meeting  adjourned  to 
see  the  exhibition  of  the  stereopticon. 

Transparencies  by  Messrs.  Hallinan, 
"Wires,  Bowers,  Black,  and  others,  were 
shown,  and  much  admired  by  those  present. 
About  an  hour  was  occupied  by  the  exhi- 
bition. 

Indianapolis  Association. — In  the 
Philadelphia  Photographer  for  the  current 
month  I  notice  that  you  request  the  sec- 
retaries of  all  the  photographic  societies 
to  report  to  you.  I  hardly  know  whether 
I  am  one  of  those  to  whom  the  request 
comes  or  not,  for  I  am  sorry — and  humili- 
ated too — to  have  to  inform  you  that  there 
has  not  been  a  quorum  of  the  Indianapolis 
Photographic  Association  present  at  any 
meeting  for  the  last  three  months,  and  con- 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGEAPH  EE. 


375 


sequently  no  business  has  been  transacted 
by  the  Association. 

I  was  about  to  write  the  "obituary"  of 
the  "concern,"  for  practically  it  is  dead; 
but,  upon  reflection,  I  concluded  not  to  do 
so,  as  there  is  still  manifestations  of  life  in 
the  head,  the  right  arm,  and,  perhaps,  some 
other  parts  of  the  body,  though  it  must  be 
confessed  that  many  of  the  members  are 
paralyzed  badly,  and  it  seems  doubtful  if 
the  body  shall  ever  be  restored  to  former 
health  and  usefulness  ;  and  if  it  cannot,  we 
shall,  in  the  course  of  time,  lapse  into  our 
former  secretiveness  and  selfishness  to  a 
great  extent,  no  doubt.  I  regret  exceed- 
ingly the  apathy  that  prevails  among  our 
members  with  reference  to  the  interests  of 
the  society,  and  have  done  about  all  I  could 
to  prevent  it,  as  have  a  few  others,  Mr. 
Judkins  in  particular. 

J.  Perry  Elliott. 


THE  GLACE  PICTURE. 

At  the  present  time  there  appears  to  be  a 
furor  among  many  photographers,  each 
striving  to  excel  his  neighbor  in  the  pro- 
duction of  this  style  of  picture. 

Several  questions  arise  in  considering  the 
subject.  Is  it  an  advance  in  the  art  of  pho- 
tography ?  And  is  the  Glace  picture  worth 
to  the  photographer  the  time  that  is  spent 
in  its  preparation  ? 

In  answer  to  the  first  proposition,  we 
say  decidedly,  No  !  To  the  second,  Doubt- 
ful !  At  best  we  can  recognize  it  only  in 
the  light  of  a  change  that  may  prove  at- 
tractive for  a  short  time,  but  soon  to  be  laid 
aside  and  forgotten.  It  has  generally  been 
conceded,  that  the  aim  of  the  photographer 
was  to  render  his  pictures  more  permanent. 
The  Glace  picture  we  claim  is  far  from  per- 
manent. The  contraction  of  the  collodion 
and  gelatin  must  tend  to  make  the  brilliant 
surface  crack  and  peel,  even  with  all  the 
protection  that  can  be  thrown  around  the 
finished  picture  to  preserve  it.  The  exces- 
sive gloss  is  an  objection,  which  rather  than 
acting  as  a  preservative  will  have  a  ten- 
dency to  yellow  the  picture.  It  cannot  be  a 
popular  style,  for  the  cost  of  production  is  too 
great,  and  it  must  not   be  handled,  or  the 


collodion,  surface  will  soon  show  scratches 
and  become  dull  in  appearance. 

In  conclusion,  we  ask  the  gentlemen  of 
the  photographic  profession  to  give  the  sub- 
ject a  thought,  and  consider  if  the  Glace 
picture  is  of  advantage,  either  to  them- 
selves or  the  public. 

Critic. 


BELGIAN  CORRESPONDENCE. 

Ghent,  November  2d,  1874. 
Editor  Philadelphia  Photographer. 
According  to  promise,  I  will  endeavor 
to  give  you  occasionally  a  brief  account  of 
whatever  observations  I  may  make  here, 
which  can  be  profitable  or  of  interest  to 
your  readers.  The  first  question  that  a  pho- 
tographer coming  back  from  Europe  would 
be  likely  to  be  asked  by  one  of  his  brethren 
would  certainly  be :  What  do  you  think  of 
our  art  in  Europe?  This  question  I  will 
also  try  to  answer  briefly.  In  regard  to 
portraiture  we  (I  always  consider  myself 
as  one  of  you)  certainly  hold  our  own.  In 
landscapes,  a  very  few  artists  in  Europe,  at 
the  head  of  which  I  put  Mr.  R.  M.  Gordon, 
are,  in  my  opinion,  certainly  ahead.  The 
carbon  printing  process  has  been  adopted 
by  a  large  number  of  first-rate  establish- 
ments. I  am  not  aware  that  more  than  one 
or  two  in  America  make  use  of  it  commer- 
cially. In  regard  to  the  processes  in  fatty 
inks,  Europe  is  decidedly  ahead.  The  num- 
ber of  establishments  making  use  of  the  dif- 
ferent processes  of  Lightdruck,  heliotype, 
autotype  printing,  etc.,  is  already  very 
large,  and  the  results  obtained  are  certainly 
very  fine.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  say 
that  these  processes  are  only  practicable 
and  profitable  where  a  large  number  of 
prints  are  required. 

It  is  amusing  sometimes  to  find  in  the 
local  or  in  the  advertising  column  of  some 
paper,  that  one  of  our  brethren,  Mr.  So- 
and-so,  has  just  returned  from  Europe  with 
all  the  latest  improvements  in  the  art.  If 
a  photographer  in  Europe  advertised  in  the 
same  sense,  he  would  have  just  as  great  a 
success  as  our  American  friend,  for  America 
stands  high,  in  photography,  in  the  estima- 
tion of  the  general  public,  and  her  reputa- 


376 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


tiort  dates  from  the  time  when  the  daguerre- 
otype was  in  use,  and  as  far  as  the  daguerre- 
otype is  concerned  her  reputation  was  cer- 
tainly deserved.  The  truth  of  the  matter 
is,  that  with  the  many  publications  in  pho- 
tography, periodical  and  others,  one  need 
not  cross  the  ocean  to  know  what  is  going 
on  on  the  other  side.  The  great  benefit  de- 
rived by  photographers  through  intercourse 
with  their  brethren  of  their  own  or  other 
countries,  does  not  consist  in  new  processes, 
wrinkles,  and  dodges,  so  much  as  in  the 
comparison  of  each  other's  work. 

It  has  been  my  good  fortune  to  come  in 
contact  here  with  an  old  and  valued  friend, 
whose  publications  on  photography  are  well 
known  wherever  our  art  science  is  practiced. 
I  refer  to  Dr.  Von  Monckhoven.  The  Doc- 
tor is  engaged  here  in  the  manufacture  of 
enlarging  apparatus,  collodion,  etc.  The 
dialytic  solar  camera  of  his  production  is 
certainly  the  finest  and  best  constructed 
instrument  of  the  kind  I  have  ever  seen. 
Several,  I  understand,  are  used  in  the 
United  States  and  in  Canada,  and  if  it  was 
not  for  its  high  price,  many  more  would  be 
in  use.  I  do  not  know  what  is  the  policy 
of  the  editor  of  the  Photographer  in  refer- 
ence to  secret  processes.  As  my  object,  how- 
ever, is  to  keep  your  readers  posted  on  what 
comes  under  my  observation,  I  will  venture 
to  make  mention  of  a  new  iron  developing 
solution,  which  is  manufactured  by  Dr. Von 
Monckhoven,  by  the  use  of  which  the  ex- 
posure is  reduced  to  one-half,  and  which  is 
sold  at  a  price  low  enough  to  insure  its 
adoption  by  every  photographer  who  tries  it. 
Dr.  William  Stanley,  of  Blackpool,  Eng- 
land, is  in  possession  of  another  secret  pro- 
cess, by  which  the  same  result  is  produced. 
It  consists  in  flowing  a  certain  solution  over 
the  plate  after  silvering  and  before  expos- 
ing. No  doubt  many  minds  will  be  set  to 
work  to  discover  what  both  these  processes 
really  are,  and  I  should  not  be  surprised  if 
before  very  long  everything  about  them 
will  be  known.  Every  fair-minded  person 
will,  however,  not  begrudge  Dr.  VonMonck- 
hoven  and  Dr.  William  Stanley,  whatever 
pecuniary  benefit  they  may  derive  from  their 
discoveries.  Certain  persons  make  com- 
plaint that  inventors  or  improvers  of  pho- 
tographic processes  should  expect  their  la- 


bors to  be  rewarded.  Let  these  persons 
make  the  experiment  of  working  for  noth- 
ing, and  they  will  speedily  perceive  their 
error. 

I  suppose  you  have  been  informed  of  the 
establishment  of  the  Association  Beige  de 
Photography.  This  Society,  although  only 
three  months  old,  counts  already  over  two 
hundred  members.  A  monthly  bulletin  is 
published  by  it,  of  which  two  numbers  have 
so  far  appeared.  Each  contains  a  creditable 
print  in  fatty  ink.  A  peculiarity  of  this  So- 
ciety, worthy  to  be  imitated,  is  the  establish- 
ment of  a  section  in  each  large  city.  The 
members  of  each  section  meet  at  least  once  a 
month,  and  communicate  their  labors  to  the 
central  committee.  In  theGhent  section,  the 
following  question  was  submitted  by  the 
writer  of  this :  What  is  the  influence  of  the 
quantity  of  sulphate  of  iron  in  the  developer  on 
the  length  of  exposure  ?  One  photographer 
thought  the  quantity  of  iron  had  an  influ- 
ence on  the  rapidity  of  the  development, 
but  not  on  the  length  of  the  exposure;  an- 
other said  that  in  making  pictures  of  chil- 
dren, when  short  exposures  only  can  be 
given,  he  used  with  advantage  a  strong  de- 
veloper. No  opinion  was  given  which  was 
backed  with  facts  suflicient  to  give  it  value. 
Is  it  not  strange  that  no  writer  on  photog- 
raphy mentions  anything  about  this  ques- 
tion? The  secretary  of  the  Ghent  section, 
Monneir  Bother,  who  is  a  professor  of 
chemistry  in  the  school  of  civil  engineer- 
ing and  your  correspondent,  were  made  a 
committee  to  make  experiments.  Solutions 
of  sulphate  of  iron,  without  acetic  acid  or 
alcohol,  were  made  in  the  following  propor- 
tions: \,  1,  2,  4,  and  8  per  cent.,  equivalent 
to  2i,  5,  10,  20,  and  40  grains  to  the  ounce. 
The  experiments  were  made  on  stereoscopic 
plates.  The  solutions  compared  were  used, 
the  one  on  one-half,  and  the  other  on  the 
other  half  of  the  plate.  The  8  per  cent, 
developer  produced,  in  ten  seconds,  a  pic- 
ture which  was  found  well  developed ; 
whereas  the  \  per  cent,  produced  a  very 
dim  and  under-exposed  image,  although  the 
development  was  pushed  to  its  extreme 
limits.  Another  experiment  was  tried. 
One-half  the  plate  was  exposed  160  seconds, 
and  developed  with  the  £  per  cent,  solution. 
The   other   half  received   10  seconds'   ex- 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


377 


posure,  and  was  devoloped  with  the  8  per 
cent,  solution.  The  two  pictures  compared 
were  found  to  have  the  appearance  of  having 
had  the  same  exposure;  but  in  the  one  devel- 
oped with  the  8  per  cent,  the  deposit  of  sil- 
ver was  thicker.  I  dare  say  that  by  redevel- 
oping with  iron  and  silver,  the  £  per  cent, 
picture  could  have  been  brought  up  to  the 
density  of  the  other.  The  thought  of  this 
came  too  late,  otherwise  the  experiment 
would  have  been  tried.  Experiments  were 
made  with  the  other  developers,  which  it 
would  be  too  long  to  describe.  The  con- 
clusions come  to  were:  1.  That  the  length 
of  exposure  is  in  inverse  ratio  to  the  strength 
of  the  developer;  that  is,  that  a  4  per  cent, 
solution  will  require  only  an  exposure  half 
as  long  as  a  2  per  cent ,  etc.  2.  That  the 
rapidity  of  the  development  seems  to  be  in 
proportion  to  the  strength  of  the  iron,  so 
that  a  4  per  cent,  solution  will  take  twice  as 
long  to  develop  the  picture  as  a  2  per  cent. 
3.  That  the  more  rapid  the  development, 
the  more  the  image  will  be  near  the  sur- 
face ;  the  slower  the  development,  the 
deeper  it  will  be  in  the  film.  For  instance, 
an  image  developed  with  a  1  per  cent,  so- 
lution will  strike  through,  and  be  as  visible 
on  the  glass  as  on  the  collodion  side ; 
whereas  an  image  developed  with  the  8  per 
cent,  will  not  be  visible  by  reflection  on  the 
glass  side.  4.  That  the  particles  of  silver 
deposited,  examined  under  a  powerful  mi- 
croscope, are  of  a  size  which  seems  to  cor- 
respond to  the  strength  of  the  solution 
which  has  been  used.  The  effects  described 
in  the  third  and  fourth  conclusions,  are 
probably  the  consequence  of  rapid  develop- 
ment, and  it  is  probable,  that  if  a  restrain- 
ing agent,  such  as  acetic  acid,  sulphuric 
acid,  etc.,  was  used  in  the  strong  developer, 
the  image  would  be  less  on  the  surface,  and 
the  particles  of  silver  deposited  would  be 
smaller  than  if  no  restraining  agent  was 
used.  5.  That  the  intensity,  that  is,  the 
difference  in  thickness  of  deposit  between 
high-lights  and  deep  shadows,  is  greater 
with  the  strong  than  with  a  weak  solution. 
The  reader  should  remember  that  all 
these  experiments  were  made  with  solutions 
of  sulphate  of  iron  without  the  addition  of 
anything  else.  It  has  been  known  for  some 
time  that  such  solutions  with  good  collodion 


and  bath  will  develop  images  without  fog. 
The  same  results  will  probably  be  obtained 
if  a  minimum  of  acetic  acid,  say  1  per  cent., 
is  added.  This,  however,  belongs  to  an- 
other series  of  experiments.  How  strange 
it  is  that  these  few  simple  experiments,  so 
full  of  practical  results,  have  not  been  made 
before.  It  is  proposed  by  the  same  com- 
mittee to  ascertain  the  influence  of  different 
proportions  of  the  different  acids  used  as 
restrainers,  on  the  length  of  exposure  and 
development,  the  condition  of  the  deposit, 
etc.  It  is  also  proposed  to  ascertain  the 
effect  of  alcohol  in  the  development  ;  and, 
finally,  experiments  will  be  undertaken  to 
test  the  value  of  the  different  developers 
used,  such  as  the  sulphate  of  iron  and  am- 
monia, the  addition  of  sulphate  of  copper, 
the  nitrate  of  iron,  the  acetate  of  iron,  the 
addition  of  gelatin,  albumen,  etc  All  of 
these  I  will,  with  the  permission  of  the 
editor,  describe  in  my  following  letters. 

I  must  not  conclude  without  giving  a  few 
lines  to  a  subject  which  is  of  great  impor- 
tance to  photographers.  I  refer  to  the  re- 
duction of  exposure  obtained  by  the  use  of 
colored  glasses  to  admit  light  in  the  camera 
or  by  other  similar  means.  The  colored 
light  is  supposed  to  continue  the  action  of 
the  white  light.  It  is  contended,  however, 
and  with  very  good  reason,  that  this  action 
is  due  to  the  imperfect  opacity  to  the  actinic 
rays  possessed  by  the  glass  which  is  used. 
In  daguerreotype  times,  Blanquart  Evrard 
proposed  to  paste  white  paper  inside  the 
camera,  seven  or  eight  years  ago.  Mr.  Gage 
proposed  to  reflect  the  light  from  his  focus- 
sing cloth  in  the  camera,  by  keeping  it  for 
some  seconds  in  front  of  the  object-glass. 
It  has  been  contended  that  the  only  effect 
of  all  such  means  was  to  fog  the  plate 
slightly,  thus  giving  a  picture  which  was 
less  hard  than  one  which  was  under-ex- 
posed, but  still  devoid  of  details  in  the 
shadows. 

Mr.  Foxlee  gives,  in  the  British  Journal, 
an  account  of  some  experiments  which 
seem  to  set  this  matter  at  rest,  and  prove 
the  great  value  of  these  means  of  shorten- 
ing exposures.  I  have  no  doubt  the  editor 
will  see  the  great  importance  of  reproducing 
the  article  in  question  (page  522).  Query? 
Do  not  some  photographers  owe  the  short- 


378 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


ness  of  the  exposures  they  make  to  the  im- 
perfect obstruction    to  the    actinic  rays  of 
the  yellow  glass  used  in  their  dark-room? 
Chakles  Waldack. 


GERMAN  CORRESPONDENCE. 

Becquerel's  Researches  on  the  Action  of  Pig- 
ments on  the  Sensitiveness  of  the  Salts  of 
Silver — Exciting  and  Continuing  Rays — 
About  the  Different  Action  of  the  Sensi- 
tizers on  the  Va7-ious  Silver  Salts — The  Al- 
cohol Alkaline  Developer — The  Perman- 
ganate Intensifier. 

When  I  published  my  observations  on 
the  action  of  pigments  on  the  sensitiveness 
of  bromide  of  silver,  my  experiments  were 
repeated  in  different  quarters,  but  without 
result.  I  have,  in  several  instances,  demon- 
strated the  cause  of  failure,  still  there  re- 
mained doubters  who  absolutely  refused  to 
believe  that  bromide  of  silver  can  be  made 
sensitive  for  yellow  and  red  light.  These 
doubters  will  no  doubt  hear  with  much  in- 
terest that  Becquerel  in  Paris  has  repeated 
my  experiments  with  perfect  success.  Be- 
sides the  coloring  materials  which  I  em- 
ployed, he  has  also  tried  chlorophyll,  and 
this  material  shows  a  very  great  sensitive- 
ness for  red.  I  must  here  remark  that 
Becquerel  talks  of  his  so-called  continuing 
rays.  Formerly  he  made  a  distinction  be- 
tween exciting  and  continuing  rays,  and 
maintained  that  the  latter,  i.  e.,  the  yellow 
and  red  rays,  might  continue  the  action  pro- 
duced by  blue  rays.  You  are  aware  that, 
based  on  this  supposition,  it  has  been  tried 
a  hundred  times  to  shorten  the  time  of  ex- 
posure by  continuing  the  illumination  with 
yellow  and  red  light.  The  theory  sounded 
very  well,  but  practice  has  demonstrated 
that  the  whole  is  based  on  an  illusion.  And 
if  any  results  were  obtained  by  an  after 
illumination,  it  was  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
yellow  and  red  rays  had  an  admixture  of 
blue  and  violet.  Becquerel  declares  now 
himself  that  with  wet  plates  a  continuous 
action  only  appears  under  certain  condi- 
tions, which  so  far  could  not  be  definitely 
determined — only  with  dry  plates  this  phe- 
nomenon is  clearly  visible. 


The  sensitiveness  which,  according  to  my 
experiments  with  pigments,  is  given  to  bro- 
mide of  silver,  explains  Mr.  Becquerel,  by 
stating  that  by  th  >  first  exposure  the  color 
of  bromide  and  chloride  of  silver  is  changed, 
and  in  this  way  the  power  of  absorption  for 
yellow  light  is  produced.  It  is  a  pity  that 
this  publication  did  not  appear  sooner,  as  it 
would  have  saved  to  the  practical  photog- 
rapher much  valuable  time  spent  in  experi- 
ments. 

Recently  I  have  again  commenced  to 
make  experiments  with  sensitizers,  and  ob- 
tained rather  curious  results.  "We  know 
that  the  sensitiveness  of  iodide  of  silver  is 
materially  increased  if  bodies  are  present 
which  can  bind  iodine  chemically.  For 
instance,  nitrate  of  silver,  tannin,  pyrogal- 
lic  acid,  morphia.  One  should  think  that 
the  same  substances  would  exercise  a  simi- 
lar effect  on  bromide  of  silver,  but  this  is 
not  the  case.  Nitrate  of  silver  increases 
the  sensitiveness  of  bromide  of  silver  con- 
siderably, but  morphia  and  pyrogallic  acid 
exercise  no  influence.  It  follows,  from  the 
above,  that  these  preservatives  affect  bro- 
mide of  silver  dry  plates  different  from 
iodide  of  silver  dry  plates,  and  I  have,  in 
fact,  prepared  bromide  of  silver  dry  plates 
which,  without  a  coating,  were  as  sensitive 
as  those  prepared  with  the  coating  recom- 
mended by  Wortley.  This  variable  affec- 
tion for  sensitizers  extends  also  to  chloride 
of  silver.  So,  for  instance,  is  bromide  of 
silver  made  sensitive  for  yellow  light  by 
the  addition  of  aniline  red,  while  chloride 
of  silver  is  only  slightly  affected  by  the  ad- 
dition of  this  substance,  which  manifests 
itself  only  after  a  long  exposure. 

This  variable  behavior  of  the  different 
salts  is  probably  due  to  physical  causes  in- 
stead of  chemical  ones.  Further  experi- 
ments will  elucidate  these  points. 

While  making  my  experiments  with  dif- 
ferent pigments  I  often  made  use  of  dry 
plates.  I  prepared  these  always  in  the  or- 
dinary way  with  bromine  collodion  and  the 
nitrate  bath.  The  development  I  made  al- 
ways alkaline.  Generally  the  alkaline  de- 
veloper does  not  give  as  clean  a  plate  as  the 
acid.  Lately  I  observed  that  the  alkaline 
developer  works  much  cleaner  if  in  place 
of  water  alcohol  is  used.     You  know  that 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


379 


the  plate  is  moistened  with  ulcohol  previous 
to  developing  it,  and  in  order  to  make  the 
developer  flow  evenly,  which  consists  of 
pyrogallic,  ammonia,  a  bromine  salt,  and 
water,  the  plate  has  to  be  washed  with 
water.  To  avoid  this  latter  operation  I 
made  an  alcoholic  developer,  which  can  be 
poured  on  without  washing.  This  devel- 
oper came  fully  up  to  my  expectations.  It 
develops  much  slower  than  the  watery  solu- 
tion, and  very  clean,  and  I  was  enabled  to 
reduce  the  quantity  of  bromine  salt  consid- 
erably, and  increase  the  proportion  of  pyro- 
gallic materially,  without  being  troubled 
with  fog.  The  more  I  decreased  the 
amount  of  alcohol  the  more  rapidly  did  the 
picture  appear.  It  is  curious  that  the  film 
adheres  very  strongly  to  the  plate  when 
the  alcoholic  developer  has  been  used,  while 
generally  it  easily  leaves  the  plate  when 
an  alkaline  developer  is  employed.  I  de- 
velop in  the  following  manner: 


80  cubic  centimetres. 
10 
10 

10  grammes. 
100 
4 
20 


a.  Alcohol, 
Water, 
Ammonia,  . 

b.  Pyrogallic  Acid, 
Alcohol, 

c.  Bromide  of  Amnion., 
Water, 

Eight  cubic  centimetres  (a)  are  mixed 
with  6  to  24  drops  (b)  and  2  drops  (c)  and 
poured  over  the  plate,  which  has  previously 
been  moistened  with  alcohol.  If  the  pic- 
ture appears  too  slowly,  the  quantity  of 
pyrogallic  and  ammonia  may  be  increased  ; 
it  will  not  appear  too  rapidly,  unless  the 
plate  is  very  much  overexposed  ;  but  even 
then  there  is  ample  time  to  wash  off"  the 
developer  with  alcohol,  and  to  use  a  mix- 
ture containing  less  pyrogallic. 

For  intensification,  8  cubic  centimetres 
ammonia  and  6-20  drops  of  pyrogallic  are 
used;  bromide  of  ammonia  is  not  necessary. 
If  in  formula  a  the  water  is  left  out  en- 
tirely, and  only  absolute  alcohol  is  used 
mixed  with  ammonia,  no  bromide  is  neces- 
sary unless  the  plate  is  much  over-exposed. 
If  a  rapid  development  is  desired,  the 
quantity  of  water  in  a  may  be  increased  ; 
but  the  slow  development  is  a  great  advan- 
tage, as  the  picture  is  under  much  better 
control  than  with  the  watery  developer.  It 
sometimes  happens,  with  the  watery  devel- 


oper, that  an  over-exposed  plate  is  treated 
with  too  much  pyrogallic,  or  too  little  bro- 
mine, and  in  this  way  gets  spoiled,  because 
it  is  difficult  to  3top  the  development. 
With  the  alcoholic  developer  this  does  not 
happen  ;  and  if  a  plate  should  be  under- 
exposed, and  developed  with  insufficient  de- 
tail, the  alcoholic  developer  may  be  washed 
off,  and  the  watery  one  taken  in  its  place. 

The  slower  action  of  the  alcoholic  devel- 
oper depends  probably  on  the  fact  that  the 
alcohol  retards  the  oxidation  of  the  pyro- 
gallic acid.  It  is  well  known  that  pyro- 
gallic in  a  watery  solution  turns  brown 
quickly,  while  dissolved  in  alcohol  it  will 
keep  for  years  without  spoiling.  This  re- 
tarding influence  of  the  alcohol  manifests 
itself  also  in  the  development ;  the  solubil- 
ity of  the  nitrate  of  silver  exercises  a  fur- 
ther influence.  A  slight  quantity  of  nitrate 
of  silver  is  present  in  the  dry  plates,  and 
this  quantity  would  be  dissolved  and  cause 
fog  with  the  alkaline  development  if  no 
bromine  were  present,  which  converts  the 
nitrate  at  once  into  bromide  of  silver.  In 
alcohol  the  nitrate  dissolves  much  more 
slowly,  and  therefore  the  danger  of  fogging 
is,  with  an  alcoholic  developer,  even  when 
very  little  bromine  is  present,  very  slight. 

I  noticed  in  the  English  journals  that 
some  learned  readers  state  that  my  remarks 
about  intensifying  with  permanganate,  as 
described  in  your  September  number,  is 
nothing  new. 

I  fully  agree  with  these  critics,  but  must 
observe  that  I  never  claimed  novelty  for 
this  process,  but  only  intended  to  call  at- 
tention to  this  but  little  practiced  and  but 
little  known  method  of  intensification,  which 
for  reproductions  offers  decided  advantages. 

A  want  of  permanence  I  have  never 
noticed  in  plates  intensified  with  perman- 
ganate. Some  of  them  I  have  kept  now 
for  six  months ;  and  our  mutual  friend 
Simpson  declares  in  his  excellent  periodical, 
"We  have  not  found  any  lack  of  perma- 
nence in  such  negatives."  Concerning  the 
origin  of  this  process,  I  have  to  remark 
that  Mr.  Grune,  of  this  city,  was  the  first 
one  to  practice  it,  and  he  published  his 
method  about  nine  years  ago. 
Yours  truly, 

Prof.  H.  Vogel. 


380 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGRAPHER. 


PHOTOGRAPHY  IN  FRANCE. 

BY   ERNEST    LACAN. 

The  processes  for  enlargement  have  with- 
out doubt  lately  made  great  progress  in 
France.  Not  only  have  the  operations  been 
much  simplified  and  the  appliances  pertain- 
ing thereto,  but  besides  it  has  been  possible 
to  render  more  easy  and  complete  the  re- 
touching which  plays  such  an  important 
part  in  this  kind  of  work.  It  may  be  said, 
that  Lambertypie  transforms  the  most  or- 
dinary negative  into  a  work  of  art,  perfect 
in  every  respect. 

But  in  the  Lambert  process,  as  in  all  pre- 
ceding ones,  it  is  necessary  first  to  have  at 
one's  disposal  daylight,  if  not  solar  light,  in 
all  its  brilliancy;  and  secondly,  to  use  a 
transparent  positive  or  negative  through 
which  this  light  can  pass. 

In  most  cases  the  photographer  receives 
a  portrait,  card  or  album  size,  on  paper 
mounted  on  bristol  board,  and  which  is  des- 
tined to  serve  as  a  starting-point  for  the  en- 
largement. It  is  necessary  that  the  operator 
should  transform  this  original  type  into  a 
glass  negative  or  positive  which,  placed  in 
the  apparatus,  will  give  him  the  final  en- 
largement. 

To-day  this  work  is  entirely  modified  by 
an  apparatus  which  enlarges  opaque  objects, 
so  that  it  is  the  portrait  on  paper  itself  which 
is  used  for  the  enlargement.  This  apparatus 
is  composed  of  a  reflector,  which  may  be 
used  with  all  kinds  of  lamps,  and  of  a  kind 
of  little  camera  forming  an  elbow.  The  ob- 
ject to  be  reproduced  attached  to  a  card,  or 
the  positive  portrait  that  is  to  be  enlarged, 
is  placed  in  a  frame  at  the  inner  angle  of  the 
elbow,  so  as  to  receive  the.  light  at  an  angle 
of  45°,  and  to  reflect  the  image  through  the 
objective,  which  closes  the  camera  at  the 
opposite  end  of  the  box. 

The  metal  reflector,  which  is  polished  in 
the  interior,  is  spherical.  It  fits  exactly  on 
the  lamp  in  such  a  manner  that  all  the 
light  is  collected  and  projected  on  the  object 
to  be  reproduced  ;  a  small  pipe  is  adapted 
to  the  top  of  this  shade,  which,  when  mag- 
nesium is  used,  permits  the  thick  vapors 
which  are  then  produced  to  escape  through 
a  flue  or  window  with  which  it  communi- 
cates. 

The  enlarged  image  appears  on  a  screen 


placed  on  an  ordinary  easel,  which  is  brought 
towards  or  pushed  from  the  objective  accord- 
ing to  the  size  to  be  given  to  the  enlarge- 
ment. After  focussing,  the  screen  is  re- 
placed by  a  sensitized  plate,  or  a  sheet  of 
silvered  paper.  If  it  be  thought  that  the 
light  of  the  oil-lamp  is  insufficient  in  a  pho- 
togenic point  of  view,  a  magnesium  Solomon 
lamp,  or  any  other  lighting  system  may  be 
substituted.  I  must  say,  nevertheless,  that 
one  of  our  most  skilful  amateurs,  Mr. 
Andra,  has  obtained  by  means  of  this  appa- 
ratus, and  with  an  ordinary  moderateur 
lamp,  with  double  action,  an  enlarged  por- 
trait (from  a  card)  in  one  minute  and  a 
half;  the  negative  was  very  sharp  and 
strong. 

The  effect  produced  is  wonderful,  when 
instead  of  the  positive  print  on  paper,  we 
place  in  the  frame  a  piece  of  silver  money, 
a  cameo,  or  any  insect  which  can  be  placed 
on  a  piece  of  pasteboard.  The  relief  given 
by  the  image  is  rendered  with  extreme 
vigor.  It  is  needless  to  remark,  that  this 
process  requires  no  particular  arrangement 
of  the  room,  and  it  is  only  necessary  to 
render  as  dark  as  possible  the  apartment  in 
which  we  operate. 

The  apparatus  in  question  has  therefore 
the  double  advantage  of  allowing  enlarge- 
ments to  be  made  directly  from  positive 
prints  on  paper,  and  of  permitting  this 
kind  of  work  to  be  done  at  all  hours  of  the 
day  or  night.  It  is  evident  that  in  the 
conditions  mentioned  above  retouching  is 
very  easy. 

Count  De  Courten,  who  works  actively 
in  photolithography,  and  who  directs  in 
Florence  a  special  establishment  for  this 
kind  of  work,  sends  me  a  communication 
which  will  particularly  interest  those  per- 
sons who  devote  themselves  to  the  repro- 
duction of  drawings  and  line  engravings. 
These  persons  have  to  fear  two  important 
difficulties,  which  are,  either  the  too  great 
transparency  of  the  tone  of  the  background, 
or  the  veil  more  or  less  intense  which  spreads 
over  the  lines.  The  first  of  these  defects 
should  be  especially  attributed  to  too  short 
an  exposure,  the  second  to  an  exaggerated 
strengthening.  Count  De  Courten  has  suc- 
ceeded in  avoiding  both,  and  in  obtaining 
an   opacity  of  background  which   renders 


THE    PHILADELPHIA    PHOTOGRAPHER. 


381 


certain  the  excellence  of  tho  reproduction. 
He  proceeds  in  the  following  manner  : 

He  prepares  a  first  solution  composed  of 
Alcohol  at  36°,    .         .     6  c.c,  81  minims. 

Bichloride  of  Mercury,     2  grammes,    31  grains. 

The  bichloride  is  first  finely  pulverized, 
then  the  alcohol  is  added,  and  when  the  so- 
lution appears  complete,  an  addition  of 
100  c.c,  S£  fluid  ounces  of  water  is  made. 

A  second  solution  is  composed  of  2 
grammes,  31  grains  of  iodide  of  cadmium, 
in  100  c.c,  3J  fluid  ounces  of  water. 

One  may  be  employed  as  a  bath,  the 
other  is  poured  from  a  glass  vessel  with  a 
lip.  When  the  negative  (which  should  be 
developed  with  sulphate  of  iron)  has  been 
well  washed,  and  the  iodized  film  is  per- 
fectly clear  in  the  lines,  it  is  fixed  in  a  bath 
of  about  twenty-five  per  cent,  of  hyposul- 
phite of  soda.  It  sometimes  happens  that 
the  negative  then  is  so  weak  that  it  might 
be  thought  incapable  of  giving  a  good  print, 
nevertheless  the  apparent  lightness  of  the 
background  is  not  objectionable.  If,  how- 
ever, it  is  thought  necessary,  the  negative 
may  be  strengthened  after  fixing  and  wash- 
ing by  pouring  on  it  at  intervals  a  little  of  the 
iron  solution ,  which  has  been  used  in  develop- 
ing, and  to  which  has  been  added  a  few 
drops  of  the  silver  bath.  It  is  only  neces- 
sary that  the  coating  should  have  obtained 
a  slight  degree  of  intensity  ;  the  addition  of 
the  silver,  however  small  it  may  be,  helps 
the  precipitation  of  the  mercury.  Pyrogal- 
lic  acid  cannot  be  used  for  a  developer,  be- 
cause its  action  is  specially  exerted  on  the 
transparent  lines;  it  becomes  loaded  with 
the  silver  precipitate,  and  the  negative  is 
completely  spoiled. 

Before  preparation  with  the  bichloride, 
the  plate  should  be  freed  from  any  soluble 
reagent  and  well  drained.  It  is  immersed 
face  upward,  and  the  dish  is  shaken  so  that 
the  action  of  the  bichloride  may  be  equally 
distributed. 

A  certain  latitude  may  be  observed  for 
this  intensification  of  the  negative  ;  if  the 
bath  be  short  the  image  takes  a  dark- gray 
tone,  and  then  is  obtained  a  black  couche 
coating  very  agreeable  to  the  eye  ;  if  the 
bath  be  prolonged,  the  coating  becomes  of  a 
whitish-gray,  and  we  have  a  negative  with 
a  sharp  yellow  background  highly  imper- 


meable to  light.  When  removed  from  the 
bichloride  the  plate  is  carefully  washed,  and 
is  covered  at  intervals  with  the  solution  of 
iodide  of  cadmium.  At  once  the  superficial 
coating  becomes  whitish-yellow,  and  the 
lines  acquire  great  limpidity.  Seen  by 
transparency  the  background  is  black, 
opaque,  and  velvety.  It  is  essential  that  all 
the  bichloride  of  mercury  should  be  con- 
verted into  protiodide  of  mercury  ;  it  is 
certain  that  this  result  is  obtained  when  the 
back  of  the  negative,  seen  by  reflection, 
shows  a  uniform  greenish  tint  without 
trace  of  a  gra}'ish  tinge  ;  this  is  the  impor- 
tant point.  The  operation  is  terminated  by 
washing  in  plenty  of  water,  which  pro- 
longed renders  certain  the  preservation  of 
the  negative.  The  plate  is  then  to  be  var- 
nished with  a  solution  of  gum  arabic  at  12 
per  cent. 

Mr.  De  Courten,  in  another  letter,  treats 
of  a  question  which  occupies  much  atten- 
tion among  photographers  ;  this  is  the 
mottling  formed  in  developing  the  images 
on  wet  collodion.  In  working  with  wet 
collodion,  it  too  often  happens  that  streaks 
and  mottlings,  almost  always  irremediable, 
appear  under  the  action  of  the  iron  de- 
veloper. These  abnormal  reductions  al- 
ways occur  at  the  bottom  of  the  plate, 
where  there  is  an  accumulation  of  the  ar- 
gentiferous liquid  ;  they  have  the  form  of 
comb-strokes,  or  of  veins  with  jagged  out- 
lines. Brown  by  transparency,  they  are  of 
a  silvery  gray  when  seen  by  reflection.  It 
is  possible  to  remove  them  under  water 
with  a  soft  brush,  but  the  place  they  occu- 
pied has  no  image  on  it;  the  developer  has 
only  produced  there  incomplete  develop- 
ment. This  occurs  especially  when  we 
make  use  of  a  silver  bath  which  has  been 
in  use  for  some  time,  and  during  very  hot 
weather.  Mr.  De  Courten  has  found  a  very 
simple  remedy  for  this  trouble  :  when  taken 
from  the  frame,  after  exposure,  the  plate  is 
placed  against  the  wall  (the  collodionized 
surface  on  the  outside),  and  resting  on  blot- 
ting-paper; then  a  band  of  blotting-paper, 
very  clean,  or,  what  is  better,  of  Berzelius 
paper,  five  centimetres  (two  inches)  wide 
and  sufficiently  long,  is  lightly  applied  to 
the  bottom  of  the  collodionized  surface,  so 
that  the  excess  of   the  liquid  is  absorbed 


382 


THE     PHILADELPHIA     PHOTOGR  APHEE. 


without  pressure  or  friction.     This  opera- 
tion never  fails  of  success. 

In  a  recent  communication,  one  of  our 
most  distinguished  amateur  photographers 
insists  upon  the  advantages  of  the  silver- 
bath  with  azotate  of  potash  for  sensitizing 
positive  papers.  The  paper  spreads  itself 
on  it  with  great  facility,  and  the  bath  never 
acquires  a  disagreeable  odor,  as  the  salt  of 
potash  acts  as  an  antiputrescent ;  moreover, 
with  a  bath  thus  prepared,  prints  give  in 
toning  all  the  desirable  tints.  The  author 
of  this  communication  does  not  consider 
ammoniacal  fumings  as  indispensable  ;  how- 
ever, they  render  the  printing  quicker  and 
favor  the  toning  ;  besides,  it  is  a  very  simple 


operation.  The  chloride  of  silver  absorb- 
ing the  ammoniacal  gas  in  large  quantity, 
it  results  from  this  that  the  fumed  paper  is 
a  little  in  the  condition  of  a  paper  prepared 
over  a  nitro-ammonia  silver-bath,  which  is 
often  praised  for  shortening  the  exposure, 
and  giving  more  softness  to  the  print. 

I  inclose  in  my  letter  two  pictures  which 
have  been  printed  on  a  paper  sensitized  in 
a  bath  of  three  per  cent,  of  nitrate  of  silver, 
and  eight  per  cent,  of  nitrate  of  potash  ;  the 
paper  which  was  highly  albumenized  has 
lost  nothing  of  its  brilliancy,  and  you  can 
judge  of  the  vigor,  richness,  and  variety  of 
tones  obtainable  by  this  process.  (Excel- 
lent!—Ed.  P.  P.) 


Happy  New  Year!  to  one  and  all,  and  much 
of  the  good  things  of  this  earth  to  help  you  enjoy 
it.  We  have  great  hopes  that  the  first  of  the 
year  will  bring  us  all  better  business  and  more 
of  it.  Keep  at  it,  keep  read  up,  make  good  work, 
and  you  wilt  succeed. 


Index  for  1874,  Vol.  XI. — We  present  with 
this  number  a  copious  index  of  the  current 
volume  of  our  magazine,  with  title  page  for 
binding.  Read  our  "  Red-Letter  Sheet  "  again, 
and  secure  the  biggest  present. 


Mr.  Theodore  N.  Gates,  Worcester,  Mass., 
who  for  over  a  year  has  been  residing  in  London 
in  the  interests  of  the  Phenix  Plate  Company, 
has  attached  himself  again  to  the  same  company, 
and  is  making  effort  to  introduce  the  new  "  white 
ferrotype  plate,"  of  which  more  soon  again. 


The  New  Postal  Law,  compels  us  to  pre- 
pay the  postage  on  our  magazine  next  year,  and 
we  shall  do  it  without  asking  any  return  from 
our  subscribers.  But  we  must  ask  them  to  remit 
for  their  subscriptions  previous  to  January  1st, 
if  they  would  not  compel  us  to  discontinue  send- 
ing their  copies,  as  it  is  not  just  that  we  should 
pay  postage  without  remittance.  Please  attend 
to  this  iioiv. 


The  Photographer's  Friend,  heretofore  pub- 
lished by  Mr.  R.  Walzl,  in  Baltimore,  has  become 


ours,  and  all  orders  for  back  numbers  should  be 
addressed  to  us.  Price  as  before.  We  cannot 
but  congratulate  Mr.  Walzl  on  his  release  from 
the  exacting  duties  of  photographic  journalism. 
He  knows  full  well  how  great  and  responsible 
they  are.  The  Friend  will  no  longer  be  pub- 
lished, and  we  urge  its  old  friends  to  attach  their 
names  to  our  subscription  list  if  there  are  any 
who  are  not  already  there.  We  will  be  as  good 
as  a  friend  to  you. 


"A  Negative  Bath  Three  Years  Old." — 
Under  this  head,  on  page  25  of  Photographic 
Mosaics,  1875,  Mr.  William  H.  Sherman,  of 
Milwaukee,  Wisconsin,  contributes  some  valua- 
ble experience  with  a  novel  bath  of  his,  and  we 
doubt  not  it  will  prove  valuable  to  all.  Some 
pictures  from  negatives  made  in  his  bath  are 
before  us,  and  they  are  as  lovely  and  soft  as 
loveliness  and  softness  can  make  them  ;  the  pic- 
tures of  children  being  particularly  fine.  Mr. 
Sherman  asks  us  to  say  that  where  he  says  use 
"  one-half  fluid  drachm  of  glacial  acetic  acid," 
it  should  be  one  drachm.     Remember  this. 


The  Boston  Photographers  who  had  enter- 
prise enough  to  exhibit  of  their  best  work  at  the 
fair  of  the  Massachusetts  Mechanics'  Association 
fared  well.  Messrs.  Allen  &  Rowell  received  a 
gold  medal  for  their  elegant  carbon  enlargements. 
Messrs.  J.  R.  Osgood  &  Co.,  the  same  for  helio- 
types  j  and  a  silver  medal  was  also  awarded  to 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRA  PHEK. 


383 


Messrs.  A.  Marshall.  J.  W.  Black,  George  Barker 
(of  Niagara  Falls),  and  D.  W.  Butterfield.  We 
have  not  heard  of  the  awards  made  at  the  other 
exhibitions  named  in  our  last,  but  hope  our 
readers  will  post  us  soon. 


Mr.  Well  G.  Singhi,  Binghamton,  New  York, 
offers  his  very  desirable  gallery  for  sale.  He  has 
a  very  fine  set  of  rooms  :  a  roception-room  like  a 
lady's  parlor,  and  the  operating  and  chemical 
rooms  all  one  could  desire.  New  and  of  best 
quality  ;  and  Binghamton  is  called  the  "  Parlor 
City."     It  is  a  sprightly  place  for  business. 


Mit.  John  Barnett,  No.  565  Broadway,  New 
York,  desires  attention  directed  to  his  advertise- 
ment of  his  superior  cameo  dies.  They  are  in 
use  by  many  of  the  leading  photographers,  and 
judging  from  the  handsome  results  he  sends  us, 
they  must  be  very  finely  finished  and  mathemati- 
cally true.  For  this  reason  wo  commend  them 
to  our  readers. 


A  "  pot-up  job"  upon  our  friend,  Mr.  Z.  P. 
McMillen,  Galesburg,  accusing  him  of  arson,  has 
resulted,  we  are  glad  to  say,  just  as  we  expected, 
in  an  acquittal  by  a  unanimous  vote  of  the  jury 
and  the  approval  of  his  fellow-citizens. 


Natural  History. — Messrs.  Hurst  &  Son,  of 
Albany,  N.Y.,  send  us  some  fine  colored  stereos  of 
birds  and  animals.  They  are  really  works  of  art 
both  in  the  grouping  and  coloring,  while  the 
habits  of  each  species  are  faithfully  represented, 
rendering  them  as  true  to  life  as  when  in  their 
native  haunts.  As  educational  studies  for  pic- 
ture teaching,  as  Messrs.  Hurst  intend  them  to 
be,  they  must  prove  valuable  and  interesting. 


Pictures  Received. —  Cabinets  from  Messrs. 
Bogardus,  of  New  York  ;  Limpert  &  North,  Co- 
lumbus, Ohio  ;  T.  Hunter,  Gait,  Ontario  ;  Singhi, 
Binghamton,  N.  Y.  ;  Cabinets  and  Cards  from 
S.  H.  Pearsons,  St.  Johns,  N.  F.  ;  Cards  from 
Messrs.  Singhi,  Binghamton,  N.  Y.  ;  J.  Pitcher 
Spooner,  Stockton,  California  ;  Sitler  &  Launey, 
Shelbyville,  III.  ;  and  Maxwell,  Batesville,  Ark. 
Stereos  from  Messrs.  Julius  Hall,  Great  Bar- 
rington,  Mass. ;  Hurst  &  Son,  Albany,  N.  Y. 
Series  of  Natural  History  Studies,  J.  Collier, 
Central  City,  Colorado.  Unmounted  Cabinet 
Prints  from  Krueger  &  Piper,  San  Antonio, 
Texas. 

It  will  thus  be  seen  how  widespread  is  the  in- 
fluence of  this  Journal.  In  this  little  collection 
we  have  been  remembered  from  California  to 
Newfoundland,  and  from  Texas  to  Ontario. 
Nearly  all  this  work  is  of  a  high  order  of  ex- 
cellence, and  shows  a  marked  improvement  on 


the  part  of  many.  From  the  remotest  sections  we 
now  have  work  that  compares  favorably  with  some 
of  the  best  work  in  more  favored  localities.  We 
are  glad  to  see  this,  and  hope  no  one  will  relax 
his  efforts  because  he  is  doing  well,  but  always 
continue  to  try  to  do  better. 


Messrs.  Long  &  Smith,  Quincy,  Illinois,  send 
us  a  very  complete  pamphlet  catalogue  and  price 
list  of  their  photographic  goods,  which  will  be 
found  valuable  to  photographers  doing  business 
with  them.  

Descriptive  Price  List  op  Photographic 
Fern-Leap  Mottoes. — We  have  received  from 
Miss  Ettie  R.  Kuhn  a  very  neatly  gotten  up  cir- 
cular with  the  above  title,  and  are  glad  to  know 
that  the  ladies  have  taken  hold  of  this  beautiful 
branch  of  photography,  and  doubt  not  that  in 
their  skilful  hands  leaf-prints  will  become  as  fas- 
cinating and  popular  as  we  know  they  are  capable 
of  being.  

In  a  late  number  of  our  magazine  we  alluded 
to  a  very  fine  group  picture  of  the  officers  of  the 
late  Council  of  the  Lutheran  Church,  printed  by 
the  Woodbury  process.  We  now  add,  what  we 
did  not  know  before,  that  it  is  published  by  Mr. 
S.  A.  Rote,  Ridgway,  Elk  County,  Pa.,  and  sold 
at  $2.50  per  copy  for  the  benefit  of  the  Lutheran 
Mission,  who  have  just  built  a  church  at  that 
place.  There  are  nineteen  cards  and  one  cabinet 
picture  in  the  group.  Photographers  would  do 
well  to  have  a  copy  for  use  in  "working  up'' 
just  such  orders  for  ■permanent  photographs,  and 
at  the  same  time  help  a  good  cause. 


Another  Fire. — We  regret  to  learn  that  Mr. 
G.  F.  Flagg,  Ovid,  N.  Y.,  was  recently  burned 
out,  and  lost  nearly  all  his  property.  In  the 
spring  he  hopes  to  rebuild,  and  then  we  predict 
for  him  greater  success  than  ever. 


Frank  Leslie's  Illustrated  Newspaper, 
having  reached  its  thousandth  number,  the  pub- 
lisher, to  commemorate  its  millennial,  gives  with 
this  isiue  a  beautiful  presentation  plate,  entitled 
"Meditation,"  and  a  supplement  showing  the 
progress  of  Frank  Leslie's  Illustrated  Newspaper 
as  the  faithful  record,  with  pen  and  pencil,  of 
the  events  of  the  world  during  the  last  twenty 
years.  In  the  same  number  commences  Farjeon's 
charming  holiday  story,  "The  King  of  No- 
Land."  This  memorial  number  possesses  attrac- 
tions for  all,  and  commends  itself  to  all  interested 
in  the  illustrated  press  of  America,  of  which 
Frank  Leslie's  Illustrated  Newspaper  is  the  pio- 
neer and  type.  

Mr.  J.  F.  Ryder,  Cleveland,  0.,  has  published 
two  more  chromos,  entitled  "  Deacon  Jones's  Ex- 


381 


THE  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


perience  ''  and  "Ouch!"  both  mirth-provoking. 
He  will  send  you  a  circular  describing  them  all, 
with  woodcuts,  if  you  ask  him. 


We  regret  that  our  crowded  space  prevents  the 
insertion  of  nearly  twelve  pages  more  of  "  Filia- 
tions."  and  many  other  good  things  from  the 
craft,  until  our  next  number.  We  thank  our 
contributors  and  friends  for  all  these  good  things. 
We  prefer  the  original  jilt  rations  to  mere  extracts 
of  foreign  matter.  It  requires  some  work  to  pit  11- 
it-in.  but  there  are  plenty  willing  to  join  us,  it 
seems.  — — 

We  received  the  letter  below  from  Mr.  South- 
worth  in  time  for  our  November  issue,  but  it  was 
forgotten,  and  he  asks  us  to  publish  it  now.  We 
do  so  to  gratify  him,  but  at  the  same  time  must 
add  that  it  was  no  fear  of  patentees  or  the  like 
that  influenced  the  Executive  Committee  to  vote 
not  to  hold  the  Convention  in  Boston. 

36  Soley  Street,  Charlestown  District, 
Boston,  October  2d,  1874. 
Editor  of  Philadelphia  Photographer. 

Dear  Sir  :  I  supposed,  in  my  remarks  of 
invitation  to  the  members  of  the  National  Photo- 
graphic Association  at  Chicago,  to  meet  in  Boston 
in  1875,  I  conveyed  clearly  and  directly  to  its 
members,  the  assurance  that  no  legal  steps  to  es- 
tablisn  or  affect  our  patent  rights  would  be  com- 
menced in  any  instance  against  any  member  in 
attendance. 

Whatever  I  did  say  was  then  only  as  one  of 
three  partners.  I  desire  now  to  reiterate  the  same 
by  the  authority  of  my  associates,  that  no  member 
of  the  profession  may  be  deterred  from  attending, 
or  have  any  such  reason  for  not  attending  any 
Convention  of  the  National  Photographic  Associ- 
ation in  any  locality.  Let  me  here  add  that  in 
consideration  of  the  importance  of  the  Centennial 
at  Philadelphia,  in  1876,  and  the  necessity  of  the 
most  strenuous  exertions  of  the  members  of  the 
National  Photographic  Association  to  do  them- 
selves honor,  and  reflect  honor  upon  tbe  art  of 
photography  in  the  United  States,  it  still  seems 
to  me  that  it  would  be  better  to  defer  any  meeting 
of  the  Convention  in  L  875,  and  use  our  funds  and 
energies  to  their  furthest  extent  in  1876,  and  I 
yet  hope  it  is  not  too  late  for  such  a  plan  to  be 
adopted. 

To  the  editor  of  the  Philadelphia  Photographer, 
and  the  officers  and  members  of  the  National  Pho- 
tographic Association,  I  subscribe, 
Most  respectfully,  etc. , 

Albert  S.  Southworth. 


Mr.  Charles  Bierstadt's  Views  in  Egypt 
and   Palestine. — Mr.    Bierstadt    has   recently 


returned  from  a  photographic  tour  through  Egypt 
and  the  Holy  Land.  We  have  had  the  pleasure 
of  inspecting  this  series,  so  intensely  interesting 
in  their  associations  with  scenes  that  awaken  the 
liveliest  emotions  with  every  one  who  is  at  all 
familiar  with  Bible  history,  and  especially  with 
those  who  feel  interested  in  scenes  made  memo- 
rable by  the  life  and  labors  of  Christ  and  the 
Apostles.  In  these  views  we  are  taken  over  the 
very  ground  and  among  the  scenes  that  are  so 
intimately  connected  with  all  they  did.  In  all 
these  the  city  of  Jerusalem  is  the  spot  where  the 
greatest  interest  centres.  Here  are  designated 
the  places  where  all  the  great  events  of  Bible 
history,  from  the  time  of  Solomon  down  to  that 
tragic  event  which  consummated  the  earthly 
labors  of  the  Great  Founder  of  the  Christian 
religion.  From  this  point  attractive  routes  in- 
vite the  tourist  in  all  directions.  But  as  the 
modes  of  travel  there  are  still  the  same  as  in  the 
days  when  Abraham  first  beheld  the  Promised 
Land,  it  is  no  easy  task  to  journey  over  the  ex- 
tent of  country  covered  by  these  views  ;  and  we 
can  but  admire  the  pluck  and  perseverance  which 
stimulated  our  artist  to  accomplish  so  much. 

We  can  follow  Mr.  Bierstadt  in  his  journeys 
over  the  sacred  ground,  from  Jerusalem  through 
the  north  of  Palestine  and  visit  the  wonderful 
ruins  of  Baalbec,  and  the  cities  where  powerful 
kings  have  lived  and  reigned,  but  whose  glory 
has  long  since  departed. 

Towards  the  south  we  go  with  him  over  the 
route  travelled  by  Jacob  and  his  twelve  sons, 
when  they  went  down  into  Egypt  ;  we  make  a 
tour  of  that  strange  country  among  the  mys- 
terious and  mighty  remains  of  a  great  and  pow- 
erful nation,  where  the  Pharaohs  flourished  in 
their  magnificence,  and  the  Pyramids  and 
Sphinxes  lift  themselves  out  of  the  sandy  wastes 
as  monuments  of  some  great  events  of  which 
there  is  but  little  definite  history  except  their 
own  stupendous  proportions. 

In  these  journeyings  our  artist  gives  us  fre- 
quent glimpses  of  the  domestic  life  and  condition 
of  the  people.  We  see  the  Jews  and  priests  of 
Jerusalem  in  real  lifelike  portraits,  and  the  na- 
tive Arabs  in  their  daily  pursuits  along  the 
streets  ;  the  modern  Egyptians,  as  they  serve  as 
guides  or  assistants  to  travellers,  with  the  ever- 
faithful  and  indispensable  camel  ;  and  lastly,  the 
squalid-looking  natives  of  Tripoli,  with  their 
bamboo  huts,  and  a  number  of  views  in  and 
about  that  city,  complete  the  journey.  On  the 
whole  it  is  a  most  interesting  series,  and  Mr. 
Bierstadt  deserves  great  credit  for  his  enterprise, 
in  travelling  so  far  and  overcoming  so  many  dif- 
ficulties to  secure  them. 


SUPPLEMENT. 


IMPORTANT  TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS. 


We  had  the  sheets  of  our  current  num- 
ber in  the  hands  of  the  binder  when  a  piece 
of  news  came  to  our  hands  which  we  thought 
important  enough  to  our  readers  to  delay 
the  issue  of  our  magazine  a  day  in  order  to 
get  in  this  supplement. 

An  application  was  made  to  the  Com- 
missioner of  Patents  by  Simon  Wing,  of 
Boston,  for  an  extension  for  seven  years 
of  his  patent  of  December  4,  1860,  for  an 
"  Improvement  in  Photographic  Cameras." 

Opposition  was  made  to  the  extension, 
Mr.  Edward  L.  Wilson,  of  Philadelphia, 
being  the  voluntary  remonstrant  in  behalf 
of  himself  and  as  many  others  as  desired 
to  be  included  of  the  photographic  frater- 
nity. At  once  a  vigorous  warfare  com- 
menced, Mr.  Wing  himself  occupying  the 
stand  as  a  witness  for  nearly  four  days,  in 
Philadelphia.  Testimony  was  also  taken 
in  Boston,  and  every  means  used  by  both 
parties  to  secure  success.  It  was  done  quiet- 
ly, on  the  part  of  the  remonstrant  at  least, 
no  allusion  being  made  to  it,  except  on  page 
343  of  the  last  number  of  the  Philadelphia 
Photographer,  for  the  reason  that  if  the  re- 
monstrant failed  he  did  not  wish  to  be 
crowed  over  too  much. 


We  have  the  happiness,  however,  of  being 
able  to  announce  to  the  fraternity  the  entire 
success  of  the  opposition  and  the  refusal  of  the 
extension. 

This  we  learn  from  a  telegram  to  our 
counsel.  Further  particulars  and  a  copy 
of  the  decision  will  appear  in  our  next 
number.  The  grounds  for  the  refusal  were, 
"  No  invention  in  view  of  the  state  of  the 
art,  and  a  defective  account." 

A  review  of  the  case  and  some  rich  reve- 
lations concerning  it  and  the  testimony  of 
the  applicant  and  would-be  millionaire,  in 
our  next. 

The  counsel  for  Mr.  Wing  was  Chas. 
P.  Stansbury,  Esq.,  of  Washington,  and 
Messrs.  Howson  &  Son,  of  Philadelphia, 
for  Mr.  Wilson. 

The  hearing  was  held  before  his  honor 
the  Commissioner  of  Patents,  November 
25,  1874 ;  and  the  decision  given  the  day  of 
this  writing,  November  30. 

We  congratulate  the  fraternity  on  this 
result ;  the  more  so  as  no  appeal  to ,  them 
will  be  made  for  the  costs. 

"  Riches  hath  Wings." 


MEDALS    AWARDED ! 


TO 


WILLIAM  C.  ENTREKIN, 


Patent  Photo.  Enamelcr 


THE  SCOVILL  SOLD  MEDAL, 
At  the  N.  P.  A.  Exhibition.        July,  1874. 


THE  FRANKLIN  INSTITUTE  SILVER  MEDAL, 
Highest  Award.    November,  1874. 


TO    PHOTOGRAPHERS. 

I  am  prepared  to  guarantee  all  purchasers  of  the  Entrekin  Enamelers  from  the 
consequences  of  all  suits  for  infringement  brought  by  owners  of  rival  patents.  I  am 
advised  and  believe  that  the  claim  to  burnished-fmished  photographs  has  been  unjustly  if 
not  fraudulently  inserted  in  a  reissue,  as  it  is  capable  of  easy  proof  that  such  photographs 
were  known  and  in  use  several  years  before  the  patent  in  which  it  is  included  was  granted. 
It  is  equally  susceptible  of  proof  that  the  stationary  burnisher  was  known  and  used  for 
burnishing  photographs  more  than  two  years  before  the  Weston  patent  was  issued,  and 
that  therefore  the  said  patent  is  void  in  law. 

Purchasers  and  users  of  my  Enamelers  need  have  no  fears  that  I  shall  fail  to  protect 
them,  and  maintain  my  own  rights  in  my  patent  in  the  courts. 

WE  G.  ENTREKIN, 

Inventor  and  Manufacturer  of  Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler, 


Manayunk,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


ADVERTISING  RATES  FOR  SPECIALTIES.— It  will  be  understood  (hat  matter  under 
this  head  is  not  to  be  considered  as  always  having  editoiial  sanction,  though  we  shall  endeavor  to  clear  it  of 
anything  lending  to  deceive  or  mislead.  Stock-dealers  will  find  this  a  beneficial  mode  of  advertising,  and 
sure  to  pay  largely.  Six  lines,  one  insertion,  $2.00,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional  line,  seven  words  to  a 
line — in  advance.  Operators  desiring  situations,  no  charge.  Mallei-  musl.  be  received  by  the  23d  to  secure, 
insertion.  Advertisers  will  please  not  ask  us  for  recommendations.  4Sr"We  cannot  undertake  to  mail 
answers  to  parties  who  advertise.    Please  always  add  your  address  to  the  advertisement. 


$800  Cash  will  buy  a  photograph  gallery,  sit- 
uated in  central  Georgia,  in  the  city  of  Griffin. 
The  best  instruments,  north,  sky,  and  side  light. 
Population  5000.  Prices — cards,  $4;  cabinets, 
$7.  Facilities  for  making  all  kinds  and  sizes  of 
pictures.     Address  K.  J.  DeAne, 

Griffin,  Ga. 

STEREOSCOPIC  VIEWS. 

A  fine  job  lot  of  choice 
Foreign  Stereoscope  Views, 
Statuary,  Croups,  &c,  for 
sale  low,  By  tuk  package 
only.  For  list  and  prices 
apply  to  Benerman  &  Wilson, 
Philadelphia. 

Fob  Sale.- — Ferrotype  Gallery  and  Sewing 
Machine  Agency.  The  only  ferrotype  gallery  in 
a  flourishing  and  progressive  southern  city,  of 
20,000  inhabitants,  in  connection  with  a  cheap 
sewing  machine  agency,  with  excellent  chances 
of  large  sales.  All  well  furnished,  carpeted,  and 
in  first  class  trim.  Great  cotton  mart;  over 
200,000  bales  yearly  receipts.  Fine  north,  top, 
and  side  light ;  every  convenience  and  facility  ; 
all  necessary  apparatus ;  good  location  ;  eight 
rooms;  housekeeping  on  same  floor;  up  one 
flight  ;  rent  very  low  ;  large  yard.  Sold  because 
of  failing  sight  of  the  proprietor.  Price,  $2000, 
which  includes  stock,  apparatus,  machines,  fur- 
niture, household  goods,  specimen  frames,  signs, 
and  entire,  as  it  now  stands.     Address 

E.  F.  Clarke, 
Care  T.  J.  Hightower,  Atlanta,  Ga. 


Please  read  the  two-page 
advertisements  of  Charles  A. 
Wilson,  Baltimore  Stock- 
house,  No.  7  North  Charles 
Street.  Please  remember  the 
number,  7  North  Charles  St., 
Baltimore,  Mc9. 

For  Sale. — One  of  the  most  complete  and 
handsomely  furnished  galleries  in  the  country  at 
a  very  moderate  figure.  A  well  established  bus- 
iness, and  is  undoubtedly  a  chance  seldom  offered 
to  a  party  who  wishes  to  go  into  the  business. 
Most  satisfactory  reasons  given  for  selling.  Ad- 
dress Photographer, 

Brooklyn  Post-Offlce. 

USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


Wanted  to  Sell. — A  rare  opportunity  to  a 
purchaser  for  a  first-class  photograph  gallery,  of 
twenty  years'  standing,  situated  in  the  central 
portion  of  a  city  of  150,000  inhabitants.  Gal- 
lery stocked  with  tubes  and  boxes  of  all  sizes  ; 
also,  10,000  negatives  on  hand.  Business  good. 
Terms,  one-fourth  cash  and  the  balance  in  nego- 
tiable paper  at  six  and  twelve  months.  Satisfac- 
tory reasons  given  for  selling.  None  except  par- 
ties meaning  business  need  communicate.  For 
particulars,  address  W.  op  L., 

Care  Benerman  &  AVilson,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


JUNE,    1874-AUCUST,    1874 
Numbers   of   the    Philadel- 
phia   Photographer    wanted 
at  this  office  at  75  cts.  each. 

$1000  per  Annum  in  Cash  will  be  paid  to  a 
competent  operator  ;  one  who  can  retouch  pre- 
ferred. A  permanent  and  pleasant  position  to 
the  right  person.  Address,  with  sample  of  work, 
card  of  self,  and  references, 

Richard  Walzl,  Baltimore,  Md. 


Try  Hermagis'  Lenses. 

Used  by  M.  Adam  Salomon, 

Paris.    See  Advertisement. 

Gothic  Combination  Chair,  $15.00,  and  An- 
tique Cabinet,  at  $40.00,  are  Seavey's  latest 
accessories.  L.  W.  Seavey-, 

8  La  Fayette  Place,  New  York. 


Lea's  Manual  of  Photog- 
raphy, $3.75.  See  Advertise- 
ment.   Third  Thousand. 

For  Sale. — A  cash  customer  can  have  a 
bargain  by  writing  to  the  undersigned  for  full 
particulars.  A  full  and  complete  description 
will  be  given  to  any  one  who  means  business. 
This  gallery,  business  and  fittings  first-class. 
Dirt  cheap.     Address  W.  J.  L., 

Providence,  R.  I. 

Griswold's  Stereoscopic 
Compositions.    Read  advt. 

Gallery  for  Sale. — Cheap  for  cash.    Popu- 
lation of  the  place  8000.     Only  one  other  gallery 
in  the  place.     Call  on  or  address,  with  stamp, 
C.  N.  Rondlett, 
Watertown.  Jefferson  Co.,  Wis. 

VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


For  Sale. — A  newly  fitted  up  gallery  with  all 
the  modern  improvements.  The  rooms  were 
constructed  according  to  the  directions  of  an 
operator  of  twenty  years'  experience  and  one  who 
has  fitted  up  a  number  of  galleries.  Long  lease 
and  a  low  i  ent ;  north,  sky,  and  side  light.  Rent, 
$350,  including  three  large  rooms  for  living  pur- 
poses. The  finest  gallery  in  this  part  of  the  State. 
Address  Well  G.  Singhi, 

Binghamton,  N.  Y. 

JUNE,    I874AUCUST,    1874 
Numbers   of   the   Philadel- 
phia   Photographer    wanted 
at  this  office,  at  75  cts.  each. 

$5  Reward  will  be  given  for  any  information 
concerning  the  whereabouts  (or  burial  place  if 
known  to  be  dead)  of  Peter  Lorisnux,  photogra- 
pher. He  formerly  was  employed  by  Fredricks 
in  New  York;  and  has  worked  in  the  United 
States  about  twenty  years.  It  will  serve  the 
cause  of  charity  to  send  any  reliable  information 
concerning  him  to  "  B, '' 

Office  Philadelphia  Photographer. 


Foil  Sale. — At  a  bnrgain,  my  photograph 
gallery;  doing  business  of  $20,000  a  year; 
strictly  first-class  work.  Prices,  cards,  $6.00; 
cabinets,  $10.00  per  dozen.  Building  is  mine, 
two  story  brick  ;  lease  on  ground  seven  years. 
Would  prefer  to  sell  the  whole  ;  would  not  object 
to  sell  one-half  interest  to  right  kind  of  a  man. 
Terms,  cash  :  or  good  negotiable  paper. 

C.  D.  Moshkr,  951  Wabash  Avenue. 


Caution  — A  man  of  small  dimensions,  byname 
J.  W.  Ward,  is  doing  the  fraternity,  selling  a  pro- 
cess for  printing  on  porcelain,  to  said  process  he 
has  no  claim,  it  having  been  worked  out  by  my- 
self, and  learned  to  him.  The  print  is  made  on 
Chlorized  Albumen.  I  intend  writing  it  out  and 
publishing  it.  In  the  meantime  don't  pay  your 
money  for  what  you  can  have  free  by  addressing 

W.  A.  Cox,  56"N.  Charles  St.,  Baltimore,  Md. 


For  Sale. — My  patents  on  Photo.  Tent  and 
Trunk,  at  a  great  sacrifice.  Hoping  to  save  my 
life,  my  home,  and  ray  family  from  great  suffer 
ing  induces  me  to  make  this  effort,  as  I  am  now 
imprisoned  and  forced  to  suffering  and  want. 
Address,  with  stamp,  for  a  circular, 

I.  Flktch  Woodward, 
Wanted. — Agents  to  travel  through  the  seve- 
ral  states.     None  need   apply  except  practical 
photographers,   and   those   acquainted  with  the 
use  of  the  solar  camera.     Apply  to 

II.  L.  Emmons,  Baltimore,  Md. 


USE  WAYMOUTH'S 


SITUATIONS    WANTED. 

As  an  operator,  or  printer  and  toner.  Can  re- 
touch good.  Reference.  Address  R.  F.  Vail, 
Delavan,  Tazewell  Co.,  III. 

By  a  good  operator,  able  to  fill  the  best  posi- 
tion, and  can  furnish  the  best  references.  Ad- 
dress Operator,  508  Oxford  St.,  Philadelphia. 

By  a  careful  printer  and  toner.  Can  operate, 
if  desired,  and  retouch  judiciously.  Best  refer- 
ence.    Address  Toner,  Box  59,  Danbury,  Conn. 

By  a  young  man  of  two  years'  experience,  as 
printer  and  toner,  or  assistant  operator.  Good 
references  given.  Address  Printer,  1195  Elm 
Stieet,  Manchester,  N.  H. 

By  an  operator  and  retoucher  of  twelve  years' 
experience  :  is  a  first-class  workman  in  every 
branch  of  the  business.  Address  Retoucher,  209 
N.  Fourteenth  Street,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

By  an  A  1  retoucher  on  negatives.  Would 
like  to  find  a  permanent  situation.  Terms  mod- 
erate. Address  Petit  Jean,  care  of  Thevenin,  21 
Great  Jones  Street,  New  York  City. 

By  a  first-class  operator  of  eight  years'  exper- 
ience, either  in  or  out  of  doors.  Terms,  $15  per 
week.  (Does  not  retouch.)  Address  L.  W.  G. , 
Box  200,  Peru,  Indiana. 

By  an  A  No.  1  chemical  operator  ;  is  good  on 
position,  speaks  French  and  German  ;  at  present 
engaged  in  a  leading  New  Yoik  Gallery.  Ad- 
dress M.  Eberhardt,  9  Crane  St.,  Newark,  N.  J. 

By  an  operator  who  has  had  twelve  years' 
practice;  is  a  first  class  retoucher  and  posit  ionist. 
Address  Galace,  care  A.  A.  Locke,  Decatur,  111. 

By  a  young  man  as  printer  and  retoucher;  has 
worked  in  city  rooms  and  understands  making 
the  new  Glace  photograph.  Address  C.  Ains- 
worth,  Ashland,  Mass. 

By  an  operator  of  twelve  years'  experience,  to 
take  charge  of  a  gallery.  Address  Robert  A. 
Goodwin,  77  E.  Genesee  Street,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 

By  a  first-class  negative  retoucher  and  painter 
on  porcelain  and  albumin.  Can  work  also  on 
crayons.  Address  Fleury,  care  of  J.  Debeauvais, 
2,  4  &  6  Howard  Street,  N.  Y. 

By  a  lady  of  three  years'  experience,  as  re- 
toucher or  printer  in  Boston  or  vicinity.  Ad- 
dress Lock  Box  25,  Marlboro,  Mass. 

In  .a  gallery,  by  a  lady  who  has  twelve  years' 
experience.  Can  print,  tone,  wait  on  reception- 
loom,  mount,  spot  out  prints,  and  retouch.  Ad- 
dress Lizzie  M.  James,  care  of  0.  B.  Parkin, 
West  Meriden,  Conn. 

By  a  German  operator,  recently  arrived.  Will 
print  until  he  acquires  the  language.  Address 
Lambert  Ries,  479  Walnut  St.,  Cincinnati,  O. 

By  an  experienced  portrait  and  landscape  prin 
ter  and  toner  ;  is  competent  to  act  as  assistant 
operator.  Moderate  salary.  Address  H.  O., 
Cooperstown,  Otsego  County,  N.  Y. 

By  a  good  negative  retoucher;  salary  not  so 
much  an  object  as  steady  employment.  Address 
A.  C.  II.,  Cooperstown,  Otsego  County,  N.  Y. 

By  a  young  man,  as  printer  in  a  good  gallery, 
West  preferred.  Will  work  for  a.  low  salary. 
James  McKirk,  Box  828,  Monmouth,  III. 

By  a.  j  oung  man  as  assistant  printer  and  toner 
in  a  first-class  gallery.  Wages  not  so  much  an 
object  as  a  good  situation.  Good  references. 
Address  A.  F.  Horton,  Skaneateles,  N.  Y. 

By  one  understanding  view  work,  printing,  and 
toning.  Address  at  Photo.  Gallery  273  Fulton 
Street,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 

VIGNETTE  PAPERS. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC 

MOSAICS. 

EDITED  BY  EDWARD  L.  WILSON, 

EDITOR  "  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER,"  Etc.,  Etc. 


This  favorite  and  only  American  annual  is   NOW  READY,  fairly  crammed  with 

articles  prepared  expressly  for  it  by  the  eminent  photographers  of 

Europe  and  America,  and  is  just  as  much  as  ever 


A  NECESSITY! 


IR/IE-A-ID   TUB   COIsTTElTTS. 


A  Negative  Bath  Three  Years  Old. — W.  H.  Sherman. 

Blistering  of  Doubly' Albunienized  Paper. — C.  W. 
Hearn. 

Collodion  and  Pyroxyline.— G.  D.  Wakeley. 

Defects  in  our  Sitters. — B.  D.  Oemsby. 

Soft  Prints  from  Hard  Negatives. — E.  Anderson. 

A  few  Practical  Suggestions. — R.  Goebel. 

Health.— J.  H.  Fitzgibbon. 

Bath  Innovation  made  Easy  and  Sure. — B.  W.  Kil- 
burn. 

Over-Iodizing.— E.  M.  Collins. 

How  to  make  a  Negative  Bath  that  will  work  in  two- 
thirds  the  usual  time.— E.  P.  Libby. 

A  Good  Varnish.— Wm.  H.  Tipton. 

It  is  of  Service  to  you. — Well  G.  Singhi. 

Ou  the  Contrary — Quite  the  Reverse. — Capt.  J.  Lee 
Knight. 

Things  Practical. — A.  W.  Kimball. 

How  to  make  a  large  Negative  and  Retouch  it. — R. 
E.  Atkinson. 

Acid  Baths.— J.  S.  Hovey. 

Photographic  Sauntering*,  H.  J.  Rogers. 

Red  Lead — Its  Uses  in  a  Gallery. — .1.  Cadwallader. 

Snatches  from  Old  Times.— W.  Heighway. 

Albunienized  Paper;  Coagulation  of  the  Albumen 
Silver  Bath  with  Alcohol. — Ed.  Qinqueez. 

Keeping  the  Negative  Bath  Warm. — R.  J.  Chute. 

Pyroxyline  for  Photographic  Purposes. — W.  W. 
Sekler. 

A  Vignette  Printing  Frame  and  Plate  Holder  for 
Cleaning  Glass.— John  Terras. 

Simple,  Certain,  Expeditious,  and  Economical  Appa- 
ratus for  Reducing  Silver  Wastes  to  the  Sul- 
phide.—Wm.  T.  Bashford. 

Stray  Streaks  from  an  Auld  Reekie  Photographer. — 
Alex.  Ascher. 


On  the  Application  of  the  Dusting  Process  in  Pho- 
tography.— J.  B.  Obernktter. 

The  Production  of  Glass  Positives  hy  the  Dusting 
Process. — J.  B.  Obernetter. 

Invisible  Photographs.— G.  Wharton  Simpson. 

Formulary. — A.  Davanne. 

Mississippi  Manipulation. — F.  C.  Hall. 

The  Everlasting  Bath  for  Negatives. — C.  A.  Smyth. 

A  Blunder  Broken  Down. — LB.  Webster. 

Porcelain  Pictures  a  Success. — C.  W.  Hears. 

Correcting  Distortion  in  Copying. 

Hints  on  the  Dust  Process. — .Ino.  M.  Blake. 

Learning  by  ''Hard  Knocks." — J.  M.  Davison. 

Notes  in  and  out  of  the  Studio. — G.  Wharton 
Simpson. 

On  Producing  Developed  Prints.— Dr.  E.  Liesegang. 

Photographic  Conveniences.— J.  H.  Lamson. 

Plate  Boxes  for  Field  Work. — J.  C.  Br->wne. 

About  Finishing,  Framing,  &e. — I.  B.  Webster. 

An  Experiment.— F.  S.  JUcKnight. 

A  Contribution. — E.  M.  Estabrooke. 

Ten  Years  of  Photography  — Geo.  B.  Ayres. 

Proto-Sulphate  of  Iron.— A.  Hall. 

Printing  and  Toning.— A.  Hesler. 

A  Vision  —Mrs.  E.  W.  Lockwood. 

Paper  Negatives. — J.  Nowlkr. 

Art  Always. — Old  Argentum. 

Read  and'lnvestigate.— Geo.  W.  Wallace. 

Modification  of  the  Toning  Operation. — Prof.  J.  Tow- 
ler,  M.D. 

Reproducing  Negatives  by  the  Graphite  Process 
without  Risk  of  Breaking. — J.  Carbutt. 

The  Indifference  of  Photographers. — A.  Bogardus. 

The  Magic  Lantern.— R.  J.  Chute. 

A  Chapter  of  Practical  Matters.— A.  Compiler. 

Many  Mites  from  Many  Minds. — Editor. 


AND  A  HOST  OF  OTHER  USEFUL  ARTICLES. 

Price,  in  Cloth,  $1.00 ;  in  Paper  Cover,  50  cents. 

"  The  Best  Little  Mtofc  of  PMopiy  in  tie  WjrlSL"       For  Sale  by  all  Dealers, 

BEXERMA2T  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


MANSELL  &  CO.'S 


LANDSCAPE 

AND 

ARCHITECTURAL. 


A  SAMPLE  OF  THESE  ADMIRABLE  AND  CHEAP 

[liotograpliio     jSftl;  \l  dies 

Is  given  in  the  "  Philadelphia  Photographer  "  for  December.  We  have  made  judicious  selec- 
tions from  the  large  lists  of  Mansell  &  Co.,  and  arranged  them  in  sets  systematically,  and  offer  them 
to  photographers  at  the  following  very  low  rates  : 

Unmounted  4-4  size per  dozen,   $3  50 

Mounted  4-4  size "  4  00 

Mounted  with  guards  and  Photo.  Cover "  5  00 

In  the  Photograph  Cover  a  dozen  makes  a  very  handsome  and  attractive  album  for  any  photographic 
reception-room,  as  well  as 

CAPITAL  STUDIES 

FOR     THE     PHOTOGRAPHER! 

Tll6  ARCHITECTURAL  SERIES  includes  the  Exteriors  and  Interiors  of  the  handsome 
Places  abroad. 

The  LANDSCAPE  SERIES  includes  a  variety  of  English,  Irish,  and  Scotch  Scenery,  un- 
surpassed. 

Read    "OUR  PICTURE,"  anl  "PHOTOGRAPHING  INTERIORS,"  in    December    "Philadel- 
phia Photographer,"  and  study  the  pictures  with  them. 
All  orders  should  be  addressed  to  the  American  agents, 

BEJVERMAN  $  WILSON, 

Seventh  8?  Cherry,  Philadelphia. 


O 


o 

I 

O 

•iH 

o 


o 


02 

d 
0 

H 


HE  ARM'S  COLL  ODL0-  CHL  ORIDE, 

MANUFACTURED  BY  CHAS.    W.  HEABN, 

Author  of  the  "  Practical  Printer," 

Is  a  most  excellent  Collodion  for  the  pur- 
pose of  producing,  with  ordinary  care,  the 
most  beautiful  "PORCELAIN  PICTURES."    It 

is  prepared,  upon  an  entirely  JVE  W  princi- 
ple, which  renders  it  a  MOST  VALUABLE  AID 

in  the  production  of  this  much  admired 
style  of  print.  Among  other  merits,  it  pos- 
sesses the  following,  viz.  : 

1.  It  has  most  excellent  keeping  qualities. 

2.  It  yields  a  very  brilliant,  strong  print, 
yet  one  possessing  the  most  velvety  softness 
throughout  the  high-lights  and  shadows, 
together  with  the  intermediate  half-tints. 

8.  The  most  beautiful  tones  are  attained 
with  the  greatest  facility. 

Full  directions  accompany  each  bottle. 

Every  bottle  warranted.  JVone  genuine 
unless  the  facsimile  of  the  manufacturers 
name  is  printed  on  each  label.  Price,  $J^.OO 
per  pound  ;  $2.25  per  half-pound  bottle. 

TAKE  NOTICE— Mr.  Ream  having  ar- 
ranged with  Alfred  L.  Hance,  manufac- 
turer of  Hance's  celebrated  Photograp hie 
Specialties,  to  conduct  the  sales  of  his  Col- 
lodio- Chloride,  dealers  and  others  should 
direct  their  orders  for  it  to 

ALFRED  L.  HAJVCE, 

12 "4  JV.  7th  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


A  LARGE  STRIDE  TOWARDS  PERFECTION. 

NO  MORE  TROUBLE  WITH  THE  SILVER  BATH. 

NO  FOG,  STREAKS,  COMETS,  NOR   PINHOLES. 

AL  WA  YS  FA  ULTLESS  NEGATIVES, 

IRRESPECTIVE    OF    SIZE,    WITH    OR    WITHOUT    SILYER-BATH. 

HAMMENSTEDE'S 


ollQdioM 

KEEPS  FOR  YEAES,  AND  WORKS  WELL  TO  THE  LAST  DROP. 

This  Collodion,  or  rather  emulsion,  contains  the  requisite  iodide  of  silver  for  the  film.  It 
works  quicker  than  any  silver-bath  collodion,  and  if  poured  properly  on  the  plate  the  nega- 
tive will  always  be  perfect;  even  plates  30  x  36  inches  are  easily  prepared.  Furthermore, 
the  plates  may  be  prepared  eight  days  before  they  are  wanted,  simply  by  putting  them  into 
water  about  a  minute  after  coating.  When  wanted  for  use  take  them  out,  drain,  and  pour 
some  silver  solution  over  them  for  about  two  minutes,  in  the  same  manner  as  you  would 
apply  the  developer,  then  the  plate  is  exposed  and  developed  with  sulphate  of  iron,  as  usual. 

The  iodide  of  silver  being  formed  in  this  collodion,  and  the  other  salts,  as  well  as  the 
ether  and  alcohol  being  disposed  of  by  the  immersion  of  the  plate  in  water,  it  is  as  well 
for  small  gallery  work  to  dip  the  plate  into  a  silver  bath  instead  of  flowing  it  with  the 
silver  solution.  ^ 

The  bath  will  never  change  its  nature;  it  will  always  remain  a  pure  silver  solution  ;  its 
relative  strength  will  be  always  the  same,  only  the  quantity  of  the  solution  will  diminish 
to  the  extent  of  the  amount  adhering  to  the  plate.  Should  a  plate  be  exposed  after  taking 
it  from  the  water  without  having  been  wetted  with  silver  solution,  no  visible  image  will 
appear,  although  the  latent  one  would  be  formed  in  the  film. 

This  new  process  possesses  all  the  advantages  of  the  old  method,  without  having  a  single 
one  of  its  detriments.  It  is  so  simple  that  nobody  will  continue  the  old  wa}'.  Considera- 
ble silver  is  saved,  because  no  large  baths  are  required.  Some  big  guns  will  thunder  forth 
"  That  they  have  no  trouble  with  their  baths."  Our  reply  is,  "  Gentlemen,  be  progressive; 
if  you  don't  miss  the  target  now,  with  the  new  method  you  will  always  hit  the  bull's-eye." 


HAMMENSTEDE'S 
DRY-PLATE  COLLODION 

Works  as  quick  as  the  wet  process.  Pour  the  collodion  on,  expose,  and  wash  the  plate 
off,  then  develop.     If  the  film  is  allowed  to  dry  no  preservative  is  needed. 

These  Collodions  being  extremely  sensitive,  they  must  be  kept  from  the  light.  They  are 
prepared  at  our  laboratory  by  Mr.  Hammenstede,  and  put  up  in  half-pound  bottles,  with 
full  directions.    Price,  $2.00  per  lb. 

CHAS.  COOPER  &  CO., 

Sole  Trade  Agents, 

Office,  150  Chatham  St.,  New  York. 


A 


NON 


^ERAST^ 


Since  exhibiting  the  above-named  stand  at  Chicago,  we  have  made  two  important  improvements, 
viz  :  The  addition  cf  12  round  rubber  rollers  to  the  interior  of  the  verticle  triangle,  which  does  away 
with  all  friction,  and  makes  the  movement  perfectly  noiseless.  Also,  an  entirely  new  mode  of  chang- 
ing the  angle  of  the  top  instantly,  and  leaving  the  same  in  a  perfectly  rigid  position. 

Our  wheels,  which  are  thirty  inches  in  circumference,  are  adjusted  in  a  manner  peculiarly  our 
own.  Each  stnnd  is  fitted  with  a  "swing"  drawer  for  diaphragms  and  otherparaphernnlia.  And  last, 
and  the  most  important  of  all,  is  our  new  INSTANTANEOUS  NON-AGUE  BRAKE.  Everything 
about  it  is  A  No.  1 . 

The  "NON-AGUE"  is  the  only  Camera  Stand  in  America  that  combines  the  three  requisite 
points  which  are  absolutely  necessary  to  form  a  perfect  machine,  viz:  FIRMNESS,  COMPACT- 
NESS, and  RAPIDITY  of  movement.     ONLY  $30.00. 


DECIDEDLY  THE  BOSS. 


OVER  800  IN  USE ! 


THE  NASON 


UNIVERSAL  LIGHT  MODIFIER, 

Upon  its  presentation  to  the  trade,  instantly  monopo- 
lized popular  favor.  And,  why  not,  when  it  so  far  excels 
every  other  invention  for  a  like  purpose  ? 

Just  as  sure  as  the  sun  will  shine,  just  so  sure  will  the 
N.  U.  L.  M.  supersede  all  the  cumbersome  "hand  screens  " 
"head  screens  "  and  "  foot  screens  "  in  the  market;  for 
it  is  exactly  what  its  name  indicates,  viz:  UNIVERSAL 
LIGHT  MODIFIER  Universal  in  movemeut,  universal 
in  adaptation,  and  at  which  the  universal  host  sem  up  "  a 
shout  in  praise." 

It  is  the  first  and  only  modifier  or  screen  which  takes  up 
no  room:  it  being  attached  directly  either  to  our  back- 
ground carriage,  or  any  back-ground  in  the  studio,  and 
may  be  changed  from  one  to  another  without  a  moment's 
delay.  There  are  no  bags  of  saku  or  oi.n  bricks  flopping 
around  the  N.  U.  L.  M.,  it  being  constructed  on  purely 
mechanical  principles;  weighs  less  than  three  pounds, 
and  costs  only  $6  50. 


THE  NASON 

Back- Ground  Carriage 

Is  so  well  known,  that  it  needs  no  special  notice  here. 
We  would  only  call  your  attention  to  the  NEW  FORM 
now  being  made,  which  is  a  combination  of  the  popular 
Back-Ground  Carriage  and  the  Universal  Light  Modifier; 
an  invention  which  every  progressive  photographer  most 
certainly  needs,  and  both  of  which  costs  only  $12.U0. 


FOURTEEN  IN  ONE. 

We  hardly  think  there  can  be  found  in  the  whole  world, 
another  piece  of  furniture  of  like  cost,  which  will  afford 
the  photographer  more  profit,  and  his  patrons  aH  much 
beal  pleasure  and  s  itisfaclion,  as  will  one  of  our  beauti- 
ful MAGIO  MIRRORS.  Your  lady  patrons  are  f-imply 
fascinated  with  this  extremely  charming  adjunct  to  the 
Toilet-Room,  and  how  could  it  be  otherwise,  when  by  its 
use  they  are  given  such  a  perfect  FRONT,  BACK,  and 
SIDE  view  of  the  FULL  FIGURE.  We  manufacture 
several  stvles.  The  one  most  used  by  photographers, 
costs  $25. (JO. 


IF 


SUCH  A  THING  CAN  BE  POSSIBLE,  THE 

NASONIAN   CUT-OUTS 

Are  still  gaining  in  popularity.     The  demand  has  kept  steadily  ahead  of  the   supply.     We  shall  soon 
be  ready  to  fill  orders  for  the  large  sizes. 

Present  prices  are  :  Case  No.  1,  $2.00  ;  Case  No.  2,  $2.50  ;   Case  No.  3,  $3.00. 

Will  send  the  three  Cases,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  $7.00.     For  particulars  read  July,  August,  Sep- 
tember, and  October  "Philadelphia  Photographer,"  and  address  all  orders  to  the 

NASON  NOVELTY  COMPANY, 

COLUMBUS,  OHIO. 


En    LIESECIAMC? 
IDTTSSiEILiDOIR/IB1,      (3  33  IR,  HvT  ^.  IN"  IT. 

LARGEST  STOCK  OP  PHOTOGRAPHIC  APPARATUS. 
SPECIAL  ATTENTION  of  American  Photographers  is  drawn  to 

LIESEGAUG'S  PANORAMIC  APPARATUS. 

Which  makes  splendid  CROUPS  and  PANORAMIC  VIEWS  on  plates  20x9  inches. 
Hundreds  have  been  sold  in  England,  Italy,  Germany,  Russia,  America,  and  India. 
For  particulars  write  to 

ED.  LIESEGANG,  DUSSELLORF,  GERMANY. 


The  beautiful  groups  made  with  this  Camera,  by  Mr.  Schultz,  of  Dorpat,  created  much  sensation  at 
the  Exhibition  of  the  Photographic  Society  at  Paris,  1874. 


JULIUS     KRUGE  R'S 


FOR  COLORING  PHOTOGRAPHS  ON  ALBUMEN  and  PLAIN  PAPER. 

These  colors  have  become  very  popular  in  Germany  and  France  (where  they  have  obtained  the 
highest  recommendations),  on  account  of  their  extraordinary  brilliancy,  evenness,  and  easy  application. 
They  can  be  used  on  Albumen  Paper,  and  are  without  doubt  the  best  that  have  been  offered  to  the 
public.     The  Colors  are  put  up  in  boxes  of  6,  12,  and  18. 


CEO.  RAU,  Sole  Agent, 

No.  922  Girard  Ave.,  Philadelphia. 


Reflecting  Solar  Camera. 


IMPROVED 


PATENTED 
Feb.  24,  1857, 
July  10,  1866, 
Feb.  23,  1871,  = 
May  26,  1874,  d 
Aug.   4,  1874.    ' 


Direct  Printing  Camera. 

Manufactured  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the  original  inventor  and  patentee,  combining 
ALL  THE  IMPORTANT  improvements  that  have  been  made. 

Every  Camera  will  be  tested  and  guaranteed  before  delivery,  and  will  be  licensed  and  accompanied 
by  the  regular  Patent  Stamp  of  the  patentee. 

PRICES  OF  DIRECT  PRINTING  OR  REFLECTING  SOLAR  CAMERAS  : 
10  inch  diameter  Condensing  Lens,  will  print  picture  18x23  in., 
12     "  "  "  "  "  <•        25x30  "       . 

15     •<  •<  «  <<  u  ,,       29x36   " 

18     "  "  "  "  "  "       40x50  " 

Can  be  ordered  of   all  Stockdealers.     Boxing  charged  for  at  cost 


$190  00 
220  00 
275  00 
400  00 


D.  A.  "WOODWARD,  Baltimore,  Md. 


G.  GENNERT, 
53  Maiden  Lane,  N.  Y., 


IMPORTER  OF  THE  CELEBRATED 


S.  *  M.  DRESDEN 


Atwu  \m*n 


PAPERS, 


RIVES  &  STEINBACH 

WHITE,  PINK,  and  BLUE. 


Every  one  says  it  works  the  most  uniform,  economical,  and  gives  finer  results  than  any 
other.  To  satisfy  yourself  that  it  is  the  best,  send  to  your  stock  dealer  for  a  sample  dozen. 
Kept  by  all  stock  dealers  in  the  United  States. 


Hyposulphite  of  Soda, 

Solid  German  Glass  Baths, 

Saxe  Evaporating  Dishes, 

And  French  Filter  Paper. 


Special  attention  is  called  to  the    Extra  Brilliant  or  Double   Glossy  Paper, 

which  is  recognized  by  the  best  artists  all  over  the  world  as  the  finest  Albumen  Paper  in 
this  country  or  Europe. 

*       # 


To  Clean  our  Stock  we  offer  for  CASH  the  following 


All  Un-Used  Goods,  except  those  marked. 


1  A.  0.  Co.,  No.  30,  4x8  Stereo.  Box. 


$22 

1          "           1-2  View  Box,  first  quality , 19 

1          "           No.  12  Gem  Box,  fitted  with  four  1-9  Darlot  Lenses 40 

1          "           No.  21a  Victoria  Box,  fitted  with  two  1-4  Darlot  Lenses 38 

1          "           8-10  Swing-Front  Camera  Box 25 

J          "           No.  4,  D.  S.  B.  8-10  Portrait  Box 40 

1         "           No.  4$,  10-12  Portrait  Box 36 

1         "           No-  4J,  10-12  D.  S.  B.  Portrait  Box 45 

1         "           No.  54,  10-12  D.  S.  B.  View  Box 45 

1         "           No.  54,  10-12  View  Box 36 

1         "           No.  25,  8-10  Multiplying  Box  and  nine  Darlot  tubes 105 

1          "           No.  25,  8-10              "             "          "              "            "      (secondhand) 90 

1         "          No.  5,  11-14  D.  S.  B.  Portrait  Box 57 

1         "          No.  55,  11-14  D.  S.  B.  View  Box 57 

1          "           No.  56,  14-17  D.  S.  B.  View  Box 65 

1         "           No.  6,  14-17  D.  S.  B.  Portrait  Box 70 

1         "           Platform  Stand , 17 

1  Semmendinger  Box,  8-10 15 

19  dozen  Composition  Card  Frames,  fitted,  per  dozen 

1  Winner's  Fuming  Box 10 

2  No.  1  Columns,  each 10 

2  No.  2         "             " 10 

1  Anthony  Baby  Charmer 3 

1  No.  3  Knickerbocker  Stand 12 

1  No.  3  Wilson  Rest  (second  hand) 8 

1  Weston's  Card  Burnisher  (second  hand) 12 

10  boxes  French  Aniline  Colors,  per  box 3 

10  copies  Vogel's  Reference  Book,  each 1 

20 

20 

9 

11 

12 

15 

22 

1 

4 

6 


1  Bergner  Stereo.  Cutters,  2|  x  3J  Arch  Top  (second  hand} 

1  Bergner  4-4  Cutter  (second  hand) 

1  5-inch  Excelsior  Nickel-Plated  Roller  Press 

16-inch  "  "  "  "     

18-inch  "  "  "         " 

110-inch         "  "  "         "     

2  12-inch  "  "  "  "     each 

100  Braun's  Carbon  Panoramas,  9  x  19,  each 

20         "  "  "       12^x26,      "   

6         "  "       Game  Pieces,  21  x  29,   each 

1    1-2  Voigtlander  Lens  (second  hand) 40 

1  2-3c  "  "  "  "     60 

1  Levelling  Stand  (soiled)  5 


75 

00 

00 

00  % 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

00 

50 

00 

00 

00 

00 

50 

50 

50 

50 

00 

00 

00 

75 

00 

00 

00 

00 

80 

50 

00 

00 

00 

00 


Address  all,  orders  to 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 

822  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


" liT  THIS  SIGN  WE  CONQUEU.' 


THIS  JS 

CARL  MYERS' 

LIGHT-CONTROLLER 

Illustrated  mill  described  at  length  in.  Anthony's  Bulletin, 

July,  1874.    Exhibited  before  the  Ch  ieago  <  'onvenlion , 
in  connection  with  a  lecture  on   "Mechanical 
Appliances  for  Governing  the  Light,"  illus- 
trated with  various  models.     (See  pub- 
lished proceedings). 

The  prophesy  is  made  by  those  employing  the  appara- 
tus, that  it  will  eventually  supersede  all  other  arrange- 
ments for  lighting  the  sitter,  because  cheaper,  more 
immediately  effectual,  and  adapted  to  all  circumstances. 

It  attaches  to  the  top  of  any  head  rest,  weighs  two  and 
a-half  pounds,  costs  15.00,  and  packs  up  four  feet  long, 
averaging  one  inch  diameter.  It  is  not  a  "  light  modi- 
fier," but  a  "  light  controller."  Its  motions  are  as  free  and 
unlimited  as  those  of  a  common  hand  screen,  but  it 
remains  fixed  in  any  position  when  the  hand  lets  go.  It 
saves  half  the  necessary  retouching,  and  corrects  all  the 
faults  of  a  defective  light — except  leaking.  No  other  appa- 
ratus will  accomplish  what  this  will. 

As  a  preferable  support  for  the  attachment,  we  sell  for 
$3.50  a  metal  base  with  wooden  column  and  adjustable 
rod — tall,  light,  and  impossible  to  upset  by  accident. 
One  hour's  practice  with  the  apparatus — used  as  screen 
and  reflector — will  better  instruct  an  artist  in  the  true 
science  of  lighting,  than  years  of  experience  with  other 
methods.  Any  desirable  effect  is  got  instantly.  Six 
month's  use  of  the  apparatus  will  dispose  any  sensible 
artist  to  quit  the  profession  rather  than  abandon  its  use. 

Sent  by  express  immediately  on  receipt,  of  price,  by 

C.   E.   MYERS, 

Patentee  and  Manufacturer, 

Drawer  6i.  153  Main  St.,  Hornellsville,  N.  Y. 


SPICER'S 


LUSTR 


OLD  FURNITURE 


RENEWS 


OLD  FRAMES. 


OLD  APPARATUS 


IS    INDISPENSABLE    IN    EVERY    GALLERY. 


This  article  is  a  composition  of  such  substance,  that  all  scratches  or  bruises 
are  completely  filled,  and  the  surface  restored  to  its  originally  perfect  condition. 


PRICE,  PER  BOTTLE,  75  CENTS. 


CHAS.  A.  WILSON,  Sole  Agent,  7  Ml  Charles  Street,  Baltimore, 


Awarded  the  HOLMES  MEDAL  at  the  Chicago  N.  P.  A.  Exhibition,  1874. 

MOULTON'S 

RAPID  PHOTO-WASHER. 


Patented  August  12th,  1873. 

Hew  in  Principle.— Quick  and  Reliable  in  Practice. 


Instead  of  soaking  the  Prints  it  applies  the  water  in  the  form  of  spray,  with  considerable 
force,  to  both  sides  of  the  paper  at  each  revolution,  or  from  one  hundred  to  one-hundred- 
fifty  times  per  minute.  Washes  with  exact  uniformity,  and  gives  more  brilliant  and  per- 
manent work ;  is  simple,  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order,  will  last  a  lifetime,  and  will  enable  you 
to  get  out  work  at  short  notice,  thereby  securing  many  orders  that  would  otherwise  be  lost. 


Size  Cylinder, 

!Diam.  16in.  Length  14  l-2in. 
"     20        "       19 
11     25        "       24 

Larger  sizes  may  follow. 


Capacity  in  Cards. 

84 

144 
220 


Largest  Print. 

Price. 

14  by  17  ins. 

$30 

18  by  22  " 

40 

22  by  28  " 

50 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  Trade  Agents. 


TESTIIMEOMI  ^A-XjiS  . 

"  I  write  to  testify  to  the  satisfaction  I  feel  with  the  working  of  your  Eapid  Print  Washer.  It  is  simply  per- 
fection, as  far  as  my  experience  with  it  goes,  viz :  One  year's  constant  use.  I  have  washed  eight  doz«n  cartes  in 
ten  minutes,  and  the  most  accurate  test  I  know  of,  starch  and  iodine,  failed  to  show  a  trace  of  hypo,  remain- 
ing.'—L.  G.  Bigelow,  Detroit,  Mich.,  Feb.  10th,  1874. 

"Time  saved  is  money  earned."  The  above  maxim  is  as  true  in  the  photographic  business  as  in  any  other, 
and  in  this  connection  I  would  say,  that  Moultou's  Rapid  Photo-Washer  will  save  more  time  in  any  well-regu- 
lated gallery,  than  any  mechanism  ever  yet  invented  ;  besides  the  prints  finish  with  a  finer  lustre  than  those 
washed  by  any  other  device  I  have  ever  yet  seen.  Having  used  one  for  the  past  two  months,  washing  from  100 
to  300  prints  daily,  I  am  pleased  to  add  my  testimonial  to  its  excllence." — Wm.  M.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 
March  llth,  1874.  

ANALYSIS    OF    PRINTS. 

"After  analyzing  the  prints  which  were  washed  by  you  during  ten  minutes,  in  your  Eapid  Photo-Washer, 
and  those  furnished  by  an  artist  of  this  city,  washed  in  a  syphon  tank  in  running  water  for  one  hour  andleft  in 
the  water  over  night,  for  the  quantity  of  hyposulphites  left  therein,  I  take  pleasure  in  stating  that  the  prints 
treated  in  the  Rapid  Photo-Washer  contain  perceptibly  less  hyposulphites  than  those  washed  in  the  other  man- 
ner described."— Gustavus  Bode,  Analytical  Chemist,  and  Dealer  in  Photographic  Stock,  Milwaukee,  Feb.  21, 1874 


L  V.  MOULTON,  Beaver  Dam,  Wis. 


CAPTAIN  ABNEY'S  NEW  BOOK. 


INSTRUCTION  IN  PHOTOGRAPHY 


BY 


CAPTAIN  ABNEY,  R.E.,  F.O.S.,  F.R.A.S., 

Instructor  in  Photography  at  the  School  of  Military  Engineering,  Chatham,  England. 


A  small  edition  of  this  valuable  work  was  originally  prepared  for  private 
circulation  among  the  officers  and  men  of  the  Royal  Engineers,  but  some 
copies  that  have  become  distributed  beyond  this  circle  have  been  the  means 
of  creating  such  a  large  demand  that  the  Author  has  been  induced  to 
reprint  it,  with  considerable  modifications  and  additions,  for  the  benefit  of 
Photographers  generally. 


"  Captain  Abney's  manual  is  unique  in  its  class,  in  character  as  well  as  excellence.  All  the  instruc- 
tions, which  are  as  simple,  lucid,  and  easy  to  apprehend  as  they  are  accurate,  are  accompanied  by 
explanations  of  the  rationale  of  the  operations  to  be  conducted.  The  book  is  singularly  valuable  in 
its  completeness,  and  in  that  completeness  arising  out  of  the  practical  experiences  of  a  skilled  worker 
in  many  varied  branches  of  the  art ;  the  instructions  are  not,  therefore,  the  work  of  a  mere  compiler. 
The  work  is,  in  short,  the  most  comprehensive  and  trustworthy  guide  which  has  ever  been  issued 
within  the  same  compass,  in  connection  with  protography,  and  will  be  consulted  by  experienced  work- 
ers and  beginners  with  equal  advantage.'' — The  Photographic  Netos,  February  6,  1874. 

"In  this  manual  several  of  the  dry-plate  processes  are  described  fully.     In  addition  to  the  usual 
matter  which  finds  a  place  in  every  manual  of  instruction  on  photography,  there  is  a  comprehensive 
account  of  Edward's  heliotype  process,  and  also  of  the  photo-mechanical  process,  described  by  Cap- 
tain Waterhouse,  as  well  as  of  the  processes  of  photo-zincography,  lithography,  and  papyrotype.  ' 
British  Journal  of  Photography,  February  20,  1874. 

"  Captain  Abney's  valuable  work  on  photography  differs  essentially  from  the  ordinary  manual.  For 
while  it  is,  before  everything,  a  practical  handbook,  such  as  the  most  ignorant  of  photographers  would 
have  no  difficulty  in  following,  it  encourages  the  worker  to  inform  himself  in  the  why  and  wherefore  of  a 
reaction  or  process,  and  supplies  him  with  theoretical  information  without  bothering  him  at  the  outset 
by  abstruse  and  complicated  scientific  explanations.  Captain  Abney  brings  down  the  information  to 
a  very  recent  date,  his  own  improved  beer  process— which  is  among  the  most  simple  of  dry-plate 
methods,  being  included.  Photo-mechanical  printing  receives  the  earnest  attention  it  deserves,  and 
photography  in  pigments  is  not  forgotten." — Photographic  Journal,  February  17. 

"  All  the  usual  branches  of  photography  are  exhaustively  treated,  and  especially  full  information  is 
given  on  the  subject  of  photo  mechanical  printing,  in  which  Captain  Abney  is  an  expert.  The  manual 
is  one  we  can  commend  to  all  interested  in  the  study  of  photography." — Chemical  News,  May  1. 


Mailed  Post-paid  on  Receipt  of  Price,  75  Cents. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  ^Si^i^SSIf  PHILADELPHIA. 


PRICE  LIST 

OP 

DIES. 

Card  Oval, $4  00 

Imperial  Oval, 8  00 

Arch  Top,..  8  00 

5x7  Oval 12  00 

5x7  Double  Erptc,  12  00 
8x10  "  "  18  00 
8x10  Oval, 18  00 


COPYING 
PRESS, 

Suitable  for  above  work, 
furnished  at  the  fol- 
lowing prices  : 

9x12  bed, $6  00 

10x13     "     7  00 

10x16     "     10  00 

12x18     "     12  50 


K 


W  *  A 


o 

^  es 
£s  « 

- 
- 

a 

M 
< 

- 

e 


^ 
1 
^ 


x>jiir/j. 


PATENT 


DIES, 

Fur  EDIBOSSINO,  GLACE  and  other  Photographs. 
This  DIE  is  beyond  doubt  the  best  ever  offered  to  the 
trade;  having  many  advantag-es  over  all  others  in  the 
market.  The  FIRST,  and  great  advantage  is  (for  the 
Glace's),  that  you  can  mount  and  emboss  at  the  same 
time,  thereby  saving  much  time,  both  in  making  and 
mounting:  by  this  process  you  have  a  solid  picture, 
and  one  which  will  keep  flat,  which  advantage  is  by 
no  means  to  be  lost  sight  of,  as  you  can  save  at  least 
50  per  cent,  in  stock  and  labor,  besides  making  a  per- 
fect picture.  SE4JOJJD.— This  Die  is  so  constructed  as 
to  gauge  the  picture  without  injuring  the  same  ;  this 
you  will  find  to  be  of  great  importance.  THIRD.— The 
plate  is  made  of  metal,  and  nickel-plated,  insuring  at 
all  times  perfect  work,  while  those  made  of  wood  are 
sure  to  warp  and  injure  the  picture.  I  have  spent 
much  time  and  labor  in  perfecting  these  Dies,  not 
alone  for  the  Glace  Picture,  but  for  all  other  photo- 
graphs which  you  will  find  much  improved  by  em- 
bossing. 


REFERENCE  TO  THE  FOLLOWING    PARTIES,  WILL    SUFFICIENTLY  ATTEST 
THE  SUPERIORITY  OF  THESE  DIES  : 


W.  KURTZ,  New  York, 

B.  GUENEY, 

E.  W.  BOGAEDUS,  New  York, 

A.  N.  HARDY,  Boston,  Mass., 


BBOADBENT  &  PHILLIPS, 

Philadelphia,  Pa., 
J.  LANDY,  Cincinnati,  Ohio, 
J.  F.  BYDEE,  Cleveland,    " 


AND  MANY  OTHERS. 


Direct  your  orders  to 


JOHN  BARNETT, 

585  BROADWAY,  N.  Y. 


>  ft 

7  M 

0  P 

-  ► 

9  H 


2    *S 


ft     » 
»    "8 


2  «< 


V       ^ 


*"    s 

»    7 

e 


9    9 


»    2 


B     9 


C    S 
=     5     9     0 


2  *' 


«    ST 
S     9 


5.  f 

IB      9 

9 


9  o 

?  B 

M  " 

*  * 

**  s 

Si  » 

©  f 


© 
CI   2 

© 


B 

%  s 


'    B1 

5  • 

<e    > 
i    ft 

5  « 

55 
H 


so    li    -. 

©     ©     01 

©  ©  © 


Phenix  Ferrotype  Plates. 

EGGSHELL,  GLOSSY,  CHOCOLATE-TIHTED. 

(PATENTED  MARCH  1st,  1870.) 

ALL  SIZES,  FEOM  1-9  to  10x14.  BLACK  AND  CHOCOLATE. 

THE  PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Worcester,  Mass., 

ARE  NOW  MAKING  THE  MOST  POPULAR  BRAND  OF  PLATES  IN  THE  TRADE. 

a\&  111  IhDU, 


I*RICE     LIST 

Size. 

Eggshell. 

Glossy. 

Size. 

Eggshell. 

Glossy 

Per  Box  of  8  Doz. 

1-9 

$0.80 

$0.90 

Per  Box  of  2  Doz. 

4-4 

$2.40 

$2.70 

"            8     " 

1-6 

1.25 

1.35 

ii            4     " 

5-7 

2.40 

2.70 

"            8     " 

1-4 

1.85 

2.00 

K            2     " 

7-10 

2.70 

2.90 

"            4     " 

4£x6J 

1.85 

2.00 

«            2     " 

8x10 

2.70 

2.90 

"            4     " 

1-2 

2.20 

2.35 

Per  Sheet, 

10x14 

.17 

.18 

u            2     " 

4JxlO 

2.20 

2.35 

Bevised,  New  York,  December  28th,  1872. 

EGGSHELL,    GLOSSY,   AND    CHOCOLATE-TINTED   PLATES,    ALL   SIZES   AND    STYLES, 
ALWAYS   ON    HAND   AND   READY   FOR   DELIVERY. 

Each  package  of  Phenix  Plates  has  printed  on  the  wrapper,  "Manufactured 

by  the  Phenix  Plate  Co.,  Worcester,  Mass./'  and  none 

are  genuine  unless  bearing  that  stamp. 

We  have  made  arrangements  with  the  Scovill  Manufacturing  Co.,  constitu- 
ting them  our  sole  and  exclusive  agents  for  the  sale  of  our  Plates. 

That  company  is  so  well  and  favorably  known  in  the  business,  that  no  com- 
mendation of  ours  is  required  to  assure  the  Trade  that  they  will  be  liberally 
dealt  with  in  every  respect. 

Pbenix  Plates  are  for  sale  hy  all  Stock  Dealers  throughout  the  country. 

PHENIX  PLATE  CO.,  Manufacturers, 

Worcester,  Mass. 

SCOVILL  MFG.  CO.,  Apnts  for  tie  Trade,  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  N.  Y 


Philadelphia  Jrame  Manufactory 


Office  and  Salesroom,  822  Arch  St.  (second  story), 

PHIL  A  DELPHI  A, 

"WHERE  THE  TRADE  "WILL  FIND  THE  LARGEST  ASSORTMENT  OF 

GOLD  {ovasoraoveaand}  FRAMES 

In  this  city,  from  5x  7  to  29  x  36,  together  with  a  large  assortment  of 

PINE  VELVET  MATS,  WITH  or  WITHOUT  FRAMES, 

From  1-6  to  8-4  sizes  always  on  hand ;  larger  sizes  made  to  order. 


These  Mats  are  of  Lyons  Silk  Velvet,  with  Prepared  and  Gilt,  and  fine  fire  Gilt 
Rings  inside  for  Porcelains.     Also, 

ENGLISH  MATS,  ALL  SIZES. 
ENGLISH  DISPLAY  MATS,  any  size  and  style,  MADE  TO  ORDER. 


Any  kind  of  Fancy  or  Emblematic  Frames  made  to  order. 
FINE  COLD  OVAL  FRAMES,  20x24. 


2  in.,  .  .  $4  50  to  $6  00 

3  "    .  .     5  00  to     7  00 


3^  in.,  .  .  $5.50  to  $10  00 

4     "     .  .     7  00  to     12  00 

Other  sizes  in  proportion. 


4Jin.,   .  .  $10  00  to  $14  50 
5    "      .  .     12  50  to     15  00 


Also,  all  sizes,  Walnut  Ovals  and  Solid   Walnut  Ovals  on  hand;    Square 
Walnut  Frames  made  at  short  notice. 

Walnut  and  Prepared  Mouldings, 
Walnut  and  Gold  PIER  and  MANTEL   Looking-Glass  Frames, 

IN  DIFFERENT  STYLES  AND  PATTERNS. 
Trial  Orders  from  the  trade  respectfully  solicited 


Factory,  820  and  822  Cadwallader  St., 

Salesroom,  822  Arch  St.  (second  story),  Philadelphia. 


RDER  YOUR 

SUPPLIES 
HOLIDAYS 

Where  you  will  find  the  LARGEST    STOCK, 

Best  Goods,  Finest  Assortment,  Latest 

Styles,  and  Lowest  Prices. 

OU  CAN  DIRECT  ALL 
ORDERS  TO  THE 

"Great  Central," 

158  state  St.,        CHICAGO. 

VERYTHING 
PERTAINING  TO 
PHOTOGRAPHY. 

PURE  CHEMICAL! 
A  SPECIALTY. 

CMS.  W.  STEVENS, 

PROPRIETOR. 


BALTIMORE! 

THE  ATTENTION  OF  PHOTOGRAPHERS  is  invited  to  my  stock  of  photographic 
goods.     I  am  prepared  to  fill  all  orders,  large  or  small,  promptly  at  best  prices. 

AMM  TME  M@WEMWMM 

are  received  as  soon  as  by  any  one  in  the  market. 

AMONG  OTHER  THINGS, 

The  American  Optical  Co.'s  Apparatus, 
Entrekin's  Oscillating  Enameler, 
Chute's  Universal  Cameo  Press, 
Robinson's  Print-Trimmers  and  Guides, 
Morrison's  and  Steinheil's  View  Lenses, 
Waymouth's  Vignette  Papers, 
All  Makes  of  Portrait  Lenses, 
Chemicals,  Glass,  and  Frames, 

are  carefully  selected  for  my  special   sales.     My  expenses  are  light.     I  do  my  own  work 
personally,  and  can  supply  goods  as  low  as  the  next  one. 

A  trial  order  solicited.     Freight  and  expressage  from  Baltimore  very  low  to  any  point 
South  or  West. 

No.  7  No.  7  No.  7 

NORTH    CHARLES    STREET, 

BALTIMORE,  MD. 


And  Perfect'/^ 

^iCHAIR. 


Enabling  the  photographer  to  successfully  secure  every  variety  of  pose  with  facility  and  reliability. 
It  is  admirably  adapted  to  the  varying  necessities  of  female  portraiture,  and  is  equally  suited  for 
children,  for  vignettes,  or  for  full  lengths.  The  BOW  DISH  CHAIR  is  substantial  in  construction, 
elegant  in  design,  and  rich  in  upholstery  and  finish.  Those  who  have  purchased  them,  speak  in  the 
highest  terms,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following 


+- 


TESTIMOMALS: 


<©8k 

-+ 


''  About  ten  days  ago  I  received  the  new  chair  you  promised  to  send  me  when  I  saw  you  last,  and 
would  have  written  and  acknowledged  your  kind  favor  long  ago  if  1  had  correctly  known  your  ad- 
dress. Accept  my  best  thanks  for  this  really  beautiful  chair,  which  now,  after  ten  days'  trial,  has 
proved  to  be  a  decided  success  in  every  way.  It  has  become  the  real  favorite  for  posing  in  my  studio. 
Besides  this,  in  external  appearance  the  new  chair  appears  so  much  superior  in  finish,  and  is  at  the 
same  time  highly  ornamental,  and  the  head  rest  is  so  much  easier  handled  than  with  any  chair  I  have 
ever  seen  before.  In  short,  it  gives  the  sitter  the  greatest  possible  comfort  and  steadiness.  I  think 
the  chair  I  have  justly  deserves  the  name  of  'Perfect  Posing  Chair.' " — H.  Rochbr,  Chicago,  111., 
January  10,  1873. 

"  Since  receiving  your  posing  chair,  nearly  a  year  since,  I  have  had  it  in  constant  use,  and  am 
satisfied  that  it  is  the  best  posing  chair  in  the  market.  It  is  easily  worked,  and  is  so  well  made  that 
one  will  last  a  life  time,  and  then  be  a  valuable  heirloom." — L.  Or.  Bhjelow. 

"The  Bowdish  Chair  came  in  good  order  and  gives  the  best  of  satisfaction.  Should  you  wish  a 
recommendation  for  it,  say  what  you  please  and  we  will  endorse  it.  You  cannot  praise  it  too  highly." 
— Slek  Bros.,  Poughkeepde,  N.  Y.,  Sept.  10,  1872. 

"  Your  chair  has  arrived  at  last.  I  am  much  pleased  with  it.  1  don't  think  my  gallery  can  be 
complete  without  one  of  them.  Wishing  you  the  success  your  invention  merits,  I  am,  truly  yours, 
A.  Hesler." 


Prints  will  be  sent,  if  desired,  before  purchasing.     There  are  three  styles  kept  in  stock,  viz  : 

No.  2.  With  nickel-plated  rods  and  rest,  in  velveteen  or  reps $60  00 

No.  4.       "  "  "  "  lt  "    square  carved  legs, 70  00 

No.  6.       "  "  "  "     in  best  plush,  paneled 80  00 

Special  chairs  to  order. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO.,  Sole  Agents, 

5 91  Broadway,  JVew  York, 


J.  A.  ANDERSON'S  ' 


CAMERA  BOXES, 


AND 


PHOTOGRAPHIC 
APPARATUS. 

65  E.  Indiana  St.,  Chicago,  Ills. 


The  great  and  increasing  demand  for  these  Boxes,  is  a  sure  guarantee 
that  they  are  fast  taking  rank  among  the  best  in  the  market.  Try  them, 
compare  prices,  and  you  will  buy  no  other.    Read  the  following 

Testimonials : 


"  After  a  month's  trial  of  the  box  bought  of  you,  I  am  willing  to  add  my  testimony  as 
to  the  superiority  of  your  Camera  Boxes.  It  works  like  a  charm  and  is  satisfactory  in 
every  respect." — Huberd  Williams,  Danville,  Iowa,  Mar.  11,  1874. 

"  The  Camera  Boxes  proved  to  be  all  that  I  expected.  The  11  x  14  is  superior  to  any 
that  I  have  ever  used  ;  it  is  a  beauty,  and  I  am  proud  of  it.  The  cheapness  too  is  an  item, 
especially  with  me  at  this  time,  having  lost  all  the  contents  of  my  gallery  by  fire.  I  am 
obliged  to  you  for  your  favor. "— G.  H.  Sherman,  Elgin,  April  5,  1874. 

"  The  10  x  12  Conical  Bellows  Camera  you  made  us  gives  entire  satisfaction.  It  is  finely 
finished,  and  the  working  parts  are  all  complete  in  their  action.  We  now  have  seven  of 
your  boxes  in  our  operating  department,  and  shall  discard  all  others  (the  so-called  "  Success") 
for  your  make,  as  we  will  save  the  price  in  repair.  They  are  all  in  constant  use  every  day, 
and  stand  the  test  better  than  any  other  make  with  the  A.  0.  Co.'s  boxes,  and  are  far  supe- 
rior to  anything  else  in  the  market." — Jas.  S.  Nason,  Office  of  Chicago  Photographic  and 
Copying  Co.,  320,  322,  224,  &  326  State  St. 

The  11  x  14  single  swing  Multiplying  Box  you  made  for  me  to  order  is  one  of  the  finest 
boxes  I  ever  saw,  it  works  to  a  charm,  is  finely  finished,  and  correct  in  every  respect,  am 
proud  of  it,  and  it  grows  in  favor  every  day." — H.  P.  Kirk,  Mason  City,  Iowa,  June  5,  1874. 


J.  A.  ANDERSON, 

65  East  Indiana  St.,  Chicago,  111. 


I  J.  P.  BEARD  &  Co. 

BHTffwwnm»iMrmr»iiiiihiiiMiiiHiiii^^  »  / 


WE  MANUFACTURE 

New  PEERLESS  COLLODIONj 

FOR  FERROTYPES, 

PEERLESS  COLLODION 

FOR  NEGATIVES, 

EUREKA  VARNISH 

FOR  NEGATIVES, 

EUREKA  VARNISH 

FOR  FERROTYPES, 


WE 


AND 


J.  P.B.  CHLORIDE  of  GOLD. 


ARE 
'AGENTS 
FOR  THE 

ORTHWEST 

FOR 


PATENT 

OSCILLATING 


WE  HAVE  THE 
HICHEST 


FOR 
THE  ABOVE. 

TRY 
THEM! 


WE  ARE  HEADQUARTERS 
FOR  THE 

M.  OPT.  CO.'S 


iV.PP.RATUS. 

W        B  AND  EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  to  the  AET  OF  PHOTOGEAPHY. 


Is^REMEMBER'^fr 

WE  POSITIVELY  WILL  NOT  BE 

UNDERSOLD  BY  ANY  HOUSE 

IN  THE  NORTHWEST. 


CHICAGO,  ILLS. 


JAMES  F.  MAGEE  &  CO 

MANUFACTURERS    OF 

PURE 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMICALS. 

No.  108  North  Fifth  Street, 

PHILAXIELPHIA. 


Stock  Dealers  only  Supplied. 

SOLAR  CAMERA  PATENT. 


ALL  PERSONS  ARE  HEREBY  NOTIFIED,  and  cautioned  against  infringing  my  Solar  Camera 
Patent. 

Infringers  will  settle  with   H.  L.  Emmons,   Attorney-at-Law,   Baltimore,   Md. 

D.  A.  WOODWARD, 

Baltimore,  Md. 

STEREOSCOPIC   VIEWS 

OP 

The  Catskill  Mountains,  Trenton  Palls,  N.  Y., 
Lake  Mohonk,  H.  Y.,  4c,  &c. 

GREAT  VARIETY  AND  EIRST-CLASS  QUALITY. 

THE  TRADE  SUPPLIED  ON  REASONABLE  TERMS. 

J.  LOEFFLER,  Photographer,  Tompkinsville,  Staten  Island,  N.  Y. 


McALLISTER, 

MANUFACTURING  OPTICIAN, 

1314  Chestnut  Street,  Philadelphia. 

Sole  Manufacturer  of  the  Stereo-Panopticon  and  Artopticon,  warranted  to  be  the  most 
perfect  and  poiverful  Magic  Lanterns  made. 


MCALLISTER'S 


PATENT 


ARTOPTICON 


Each  lantern  is  adjustable  for  use 
with  powerful  coal  oil  light — oxycal-  , 
cium,    hydro-oxycalcium,    and    oxy- 
hydrogen  lights. 

JgigfThe  coal  oil  lamp  used  gives 
very  much  more  light  than  any  other 
lamp  yet  made. 

Giving  exhibitions  with  the  Artopti- 
con ivill  prove  a  profitable  busi?iess  for 
a  man  with  a  small  capital. 

The   STEREO-PANOPTICON    is  an  improved   instrument,   suitable  for  giving 
exhibitions  of  dissolving  views  on  the  largest  scale.     Send  for  printed  description. 


MCALLISTER'S 

PATENT    TINTERS. 

These  tinters  are  used  for  giving  to  magic  lantern  pictures 
various  beautiful  tints  or  colors,  as  blue,  red,  yellow,  green, 
crimson,  &c,  &c.  They  can  be  adjusted  to  the  lantern,  either 
on  the  end  of  the  front  lens,  or  may  be  screwed  to  the  back 
of  the  front  lens-holder,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Stereo-Panop- 
ticon and  Educational  lanterns.  On  the  Artopticon,  they 
are  placed  on  the  end  of  the  front  lens  tube. 

NEW  and  BEAUTIFUL  SLIDES  for  LANTERN  USE  in  LARGE  VARIETY. 

Priced  and  Illustrated  Catalogues  free,  by  mail,  on  receipt  of  stamp. 

W.  MITCHELL  McALLISTER,  1314  Chestnut  St.,  Phila. 


YET  CONTAINING    MANY    USEFUL    HINTS    EOE  ALL    PHOTOGKAPHEKS. 

By  the  Late  Prof.  R.  M.  LINN, 

LOOKOUT  MOUNTAIN,  TENN 
PRICE,  75  CENTS.  FOB  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALEBS. 

BENEEMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 


T7CT.    KURT25, 

Madison    Square  (23d    Street), 

BECEIVED  HIGHEST  AWAKDS  IN 

Vienna,  Paris,  and  New  York, 

FOR   PHOTOGRAPHS. 


New  York,  July  1,  1874. 

MR.  CHAS.  F.  USENER. 

Bear  Sir:  The  Mammoth  Tube  (No.  9002)  which  you  sent  me  on  trial  has  been 
thoroughly  tested,  and  has  proved  itself  quite  beyond  my  expectations ;  for  fine 
definition  and  roundness,  or  stereoscopic  effect,  1  have  never  seen  its  equal.  You 
may  readily  see  by  the  specimens  herewith,  of  standing  figures,  that  they  are  as 
sharp  and  as  perfect  as  an  imperial  carte,  although  taken  on  14x17  plates;  and 
when  I  add  that  they  were  taken  at  4  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  in  45  seconds,  I 
think  I  can  say  no  more. 

Please  charge  the  tube  to  me,  and  send  bill.  Yours  truly, 

W.  KURTZ. 


CHARLES  COOPER  &  CO., 

WHOLESALE  AGENTS, 

Nor   ISO    Chatham   Street,  New  York. 


Wholesale 


LOOKING 
GLASS-* 


PICTURE 
FRAMES. 

Patented  Solid 
Ovals  and  Spandrels 

WAREROOMS, 

48  &  50  N.  6th  St. 


^URNfcCO   -P/J^te^    Manufacturers  of 

Walnut 

Mouldings 

BACKING, 


Solid  Walnut  Work 
A  Specialty. 


FACTORIES, 

615  k  621  Filbert  St. 


A  NEW 
JUST    RECEIVED 


OF 


LOESCHER  &  PETSCH'S 

ADMIRABLE 

STUDIES! 

The  praise  which  has  been  bestowed  upon  these  pictures,  particularly  at  the  Vienna  Exhibition,  convinces  us 
that  they  should  be  treasured  as  suitacle  models  of  pose  and  lighting  of  the  sitter,  harmonious  and  artistic  arrangement  of 
furniture,  etc.  These  photographs  are  the  only  European  ones  for  which  the  international  jury  awarded  the  two 
medals  for  progress  and  taste,  Mr.  Lewitzky,  a  photographer,  and  member  of  the  jury,  exclaimed :  "  The  exhi- 
bition of  Messrs.  Loescher  &  Petsch  has  charmed  me ;  according  to  my  opinion,  Loescher  &  Petsch,  in 
Europe,  and  Kurtz,  in  New  York,  are  the  first  photographers  of  the  world !" 

We  will  Express  the  sett  on  receipt  of  $30  ;  or  post  them  at  your  risk  to  any  address.  The  price  is  remarka- 
bly low,  as  each  print  is  most  carefully  made. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 
Seventh  and  Cherry  Sis.,  Philadelphia. 

■©S^  See  review  of  these  pictures  in  the  "  Philadelphia  Photographer  "  for  December,  1873. 


ILsTIEW   SEBIES    ZBJBI^O-    PBBPAEED  I 

SEND  FOR  THE  FIRST  ONE,  NOW  READY. 

A,KTCIE3\TT     ^UNTID      MODERN      MUSIC. 

A  CAPITAL  THING. 

F.  Q.  WELLER,  Publisher  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  Statuary,  etc.,  LITTLETON,  N.  H. 


OMETHING 

NEW 


IS  A 


New  Advertising  Medium 


FOR   PHOTOGRAPHERS, 


M.    0^ 


IS 

a   O 

*  5 
1  ° 

cd    5 


CD      O 


M.      &, 


so  tr 

CD 

B  V 

2  o 


■•§  w 

S  ° 

3  2 

O  © 

3  © 


^  b: 


50      <J 
CD      » 


cr_° 


B     © 


.3 


CD      O 

o    o 

<1  ^ 


3    * 


3   s» 


BUY  SOME! 


2-  3 

CD 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  &  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


GET  AND  READ 

SOMETHING  NEW. 
SOMETHING  NEW. 
SOMETHING  NEW. 

SOMETHING  NEW. 


The  best  Advertising  Medium  a  Photogra- 
pher can  Possibly  Employ. 


SPECIMEN  COPY  FREE  ON  APPLICATION  TO  THE  PUBLISHERS. 

IT  INTEKESTS  ALL, 

WILL  MAKE  BUSINESS, 
WILL  SAVE  TIME, 

AND 

HELP  RAISE  PEICES. 

(See  Advertisement  on  opposite  Page.) 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Philadelphia,  Paa 


ROBINSON'S 

METALLIC 

GUIDES. 

(SEE  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

FOR  USE  WITH  THE  ROBINSON  PRINT  TRIMMER. 


MADE  IN  THE  BEST  MANNEB  AND  GUARANTEED  TRUE. 


These  Guides  are  made  of  Stout  Iron  and  are  Turned  in  a  Lathe, 
so  that  they  are  Mathematically  True. 

Do  not  Waste  Time  with  a  Knife  and  Glass,  but  Try  Prof. 
Robinson's  Inventions. 


Oval,  Bound,  Elliptic,  and  Square,  of  all  sizes ;  various  shapes 
for  Stereoscopic  work,  Drug  Labels,  &c,  &c. 


KEGULAK  SIZES  ALWAYS  ON  HAND.     SPECIAL  SIZES  MADE  TO  OEDEK. 


Price,  for  regular  photo,  sizes,  10  cents  per  inch  the  longest  way  of  the  aperture. 
Special  sizes,  15  cents  per  inch.         for  sale  by  all  dealers. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


ROBINSON'S 

PHOTOGRAPH  TRIMMER 


IS  A  SUBSTITUTE  FOR  A  KNIFE 

FOR  TRIMMING  PHOTOGRAPHS,  AND  DOES  THE  WORK   MUCH    MORE    EXPEDITIOUSLY   AND 

ELEGANTLY  THAN  A  KNIFE. 

IT  SAVES  TIME,  SAVES  PRINTS,  AND  SAVES  MONEY. 

The  accompanying  cut  represents  the  instru- 
ment in  the  act  of  trimming  a  photograph.  It 
does  not  cut,  but  pinches  off  the  waste  paper,  and 
leaves  the  print  with  a  neatly  beveled  edge  which 
facilitates  the  adherence  of  the  print  to  the 
mount.  Try  one,  and  you  will  discard  the 
knife  and  punch  at  once.  For  ovals  and  rounded 
corners  it  is  worth  its  weight  in  gold. 

A  Trimmer  Mailed  for  $3.50.  ■ 
ROBINSON'S  improved  GUIDES 

The  difficulty  of  procuring  exactly  true  guides 
for  cutting  out  prints  has  induced  the  inventor 
to  put  up  machinery  for  the  production  of  all 
styles  of  them,  guaranteed  mathematically  true. 

See  advertisement  on  opposite  page. 

A  full  stock  of  regular  sizes  now  on  hand. 
A  complete,  illustrated,  catalogue  and  price-list  will 
be  issued  soon. 

Oil  the  wheel  bearings  with  Sewing  Machine  Oil. 


ROBINSON'S 

INIMITABLE 

PHOTOGRAPH 
TRIMMER. 

BETTER  THAN  KNIVES, 

AND 

WILL  OUTWEAR  A 

GROSS  OE  THEM. 

Ask  your  stockdealer  to  show 
it  to  you,  or  send  direct  to  us  for 
one. 

Price,  by  mail,  $3.50. 


READ   THE  TESTIMONIALS. 

"I  would  rather  give  fifty  dollars  than  be  without 
one.  By  its  use  all  annoyance  from  dull  knives  tear- 
ing the  prints  is  avoided." — E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk. 

"  It  does  the  work  intended  magnificently.  It  is 
not  only  exquisite  for  trimming  photographs,  but  also 
for  making  Cut-Outs.. " — B.  Kihlholz,  Chicago,  III. 

"  It  works  well  and  does  all  it  is  recommended  to 
do."— F.  G.  Weller,  Littleton,  N.  H. 

"Just  what  I  wanted  and  found  it  difficult  to  get." 
— J.  W.  Black,  Boston. 

"I  consider  it  the  best  article  for  trimming  photo- 
graphs I  ever  saw." — W.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

''  I  would  not  be  without  it  for  the  best  twenty-five 
dollar  cutting  machine  lever  saw." — D.  Lothrop,  Pa. 

"  The  Trimmer  comes  up  to  all  you  claim  for  it.  I 
would  not  be  without  it." — T.  Cummings,  Lancaster. 

"  I  have  trimmed  all  my  prints  with  it,  in  less  than 
half  the  time  taken  by  a  knife.  It  cannot  be  recom- 
mended too  highly." — W.  H.  Cranston,  Corry,  Pa. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmer  has  proved  to  us  one  of 
the  most  usefully  instruments  that  we  have  in  our 
gallery." — Schreiber  &  Sons,  Phila. 

"  I  have  used  Robinson's  Photograph  Trimmer  some 
time.  A  lady  was  asked  how  she  liked  her  sewing 
machine,  and  in  reply  said  '  Well  I  could  get  along 
without  it,  but  when  I  do  I  shall  not  sew  any  more.' 
That  is  me,  I  can  get  along  without  the  Trimmer  but 
when  I  do  I  shall  not  trim  photographs." — Well  G. 
Singhi,  Binghamton,  N.  Y. 

"  The  Robinson  Trimmer  works  admirably.  Does 
the  work  intended  with  great  satisfaction." — A.  K.  P. 
Trask,  Philadelphia. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Manufacturer's  Agents, 
FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS.  PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 


THE 

PRACTICAL  PRINTER 

A  NEW  WORK  ON  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PRINTING. 
By  CHAS.  W.   HEARN, 

A  gentleman  who  has  devoted  several  years  to  photographic  printing  especially,  and  who  is 
now  engaged  at  it  as  his  constant  occupation. 

The  work  gives  all  the  instructions  that  a  beginner  could  possibly  want 
in  detail,  and  is  what  the  title  indicates — practical. 

It  will  also  be  found  of  invaluable  service  to  any  photographic  printer,  be 
he  ever  so  skilled.     For  contents  see  opposite  page. 


OVER  500  COPIES   ARE   ALREADY  SOLD! 


TESTIMONIALS: 

"  I  consider  it  the  best  work  on  printing  and  toning  that  has  been  published,  or  at  least  that  has 
come  into  my  hands,  and  until  I  see  a  better  one  I  shall  give  it  the  first  place.  If  any  one  wishes  to 
be  helped  out  of  the  mud  let  him  read  it ;  but  if  he  wants  to  stick  there  let  him  keep  his  money  in 
his  pocket,  and  stick  till  doomsday  if  he  likes." — John  R.  Clemons,  Philadelphia. 

"I  have  read  it  with  a  great  deal  of  interest,  and  find  it  indispensable  to  the  student  photographer. 
It  contains  so  much  valuable  information  in  modern  photographic  printing  that  I  do  most  cheerfully 
recommend  its  usefulness  to  the  student  printer.  Its  cost  is  money  well  laid  out.'' — C.  D.  Mosheb, 
Chicago. 

"It  will  be  of  untold  value  to  any  printer,  and  worth  more  practically  than  a  combination  of  all 
the  volumes  and  essays  on  printing  which  have  been  published  for  the  advancement  of  the  art." — H. 
J.  Rogers,  Hartford,  Conn. 

•'It  is  truly  what  it  claims,  a  thoroughly  practical  treatise  upon  that  most  important  branch  of  our 
art,  photographic  printing.  Mr.  Hearn  has  been  with  me  over  three  years  as  printer  and  toner,  and 
has  ever  manifested  the  greatest  interest  and  enthusiasm  in  his  work,  seeming  to  do  his  utmost  to  ex- 
cel and  advance  himself  continually  in  his  chosen  department  of  our  art  science.  It  seems  to  me 
that  the  merest  tyro  could  make  and  tone  good  prints  if  the  simple  directions  in  this  book  are  faith- 
fully followed.  Indeed,  this  volume  seems  to  fill  a  void  in  our  photographic  literature  that  it  has 
always  surprised  me  was  never  supplied  before." — J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

The  Photographic  News,  of  July  31st,  says:  ''In  the  work  before  us,  however,  silver  printing  and 
everything  connected  therewith  is  treated  most  exhaustively,  and  the  work  is  evidently  that  of  a 
practical  man  who  speaks  out  of  the  fulness  of  his  own  experience  in  every  branch  of  regular  work, 
as  well  as  with  familiarity  of  the  various  forms  of  fancy  printing,  which  have  prevailed  more  in 
America  than  in  this  country.  Mr.  Hearn  manifestly  thoroughly  understands  his  work,  and  is,  more- 
over, a  clear  and  vigorous  writer." 

The  British  Journal  of  Photography,  of  the  same  date,  says  :  "  It  is  a  considerable  period  since  we 
rose  from  the  perusal  of-a  new  book  on  photography  with  feelings  of  greater  satisfaction  than  in  the 
present  instance  ;  and  we  appreciate  the  author  as  a  writer,  not  only  thoroughly  conversant  with  the 
subject,  but  as  very  willing  to  impart  to  those  less  skilled  the  knowledge  he  possesses,  and  who,  hap- 
pily, has  also  the  ability  to  do  this  in  a  singularly  lucid  and  attractive  manner.  '  The  Practical 
Printer  '  is  well  'got  up,'  and  the  work  cannot  fail  of  being  acceptable  and  useful  to  all  classes  of 
photographers,  the  veteran  as  well  as  the  tyro  in  our  art-science." 

With  these  flattering  testimonials  the  work  needs  no  farther  recommendation  from  us.  We  are 
satisfied  that  it  will  stand  on  its  own  merits,  and  that  all  progressive  enterprising  photographers  every- 
where will  buy  and  read  the  book      No  man  in  business  can  afford  to  be  without  it  in  his  gallery. 

A  fine  example  of  Photographic  Printing,  by  the  author,  ac- 
companies the  work,  from  negatives  by  F.  Gutekunst,  Philada. 

IP  IR,  I  O  IE,      S2.50. 

BEMERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photographic  Publishers,  Seventh  ant  Cherry,  Phila. 


ea's  Jplanual 


P  HPlTfOlGIRlAlPlHlY 


P4  tV 


Third  Thousand! 


We  have  undertaken  the  publication  of  the  third  thousand  of  this  valuable  Text-Book, 
and  offer  it  to  the  photographers  in  a  more  attractive  and 


New  Shape. 


The  author's  illustrations  now  number  150,  nearly  double  the  number  of  the  first  edition. 

The  Chapters  on  Failures  have  been  much  elaborated  and  rearranged,  so  as  to  afford  a 
ready  reference  in  case  of  almost  any  trouble  or  difficulty  liable  to  occur  to  the  photogra- 
pher, with  appropriate  remedies  therefor.     The  following  are  among  other 


New  Things: 


Method  of  preparing  silvered  PAPER  WHICH  WILL  KEEP  FOR 
WEEKS,  and  with  care,  even  for  months;  no  washing  or  additional 
manipulation  of  the  paper  needed. 

Investigation  of  Negative  Varnishes  and  formulas  for  Water-proof  Var- 
nish, such  that  negatives  varnished  with  it  have  been  Jcept  for  months 
under  water  without  injury. 

Tables  to  aid  in  the  construction  of  glass  houses,  &c. 


NOTICES  OF  THE  PRESS. 


"  There  is  a  valuable  chapter  on  the  preparation  of  a  sensitive  paper  that  is  not  liable  to  discoloration 

We  close  the  present  notice  by  cordially  commending  Mr.  Lea's  Manual  to  our  readers." — British  Journal  of  Pho- 
tography. 

"M.  Carey  Lea's  excellent  'Manual  of  Photography '  is  a  very  full  and  complete  work." — PhilaoVa  Bulletin. 

"  If  we  say  that  this  work  is  an  encyclopedia  of  its  art,  we  shall  hardly  exaggerate  its  comprehensiveness. 
....  The  author  takes  every  department  and  every  branch  of  each,  and  gives  thatdistinct  and  clear  information 

that  is  needed  by  photographers The  worth  of  the  labor  is  proved  in  the  fact  that  this  new  and  enlarged 

edition  follows  the  first  so  speedily.  Hereafter,  those  who  would  excel  must  master  the  Manual." — North 
American. 


PRICE,  $3.75. 


It  contains  440  pages  on  fine  toned  paper,  150  wood  cuts,  cloth,  beveled  edges,  and  gilt. 
EOR  SALE  BY  ALL  STOCK-DEALERS. 

Sent  by  return  mail,  on  receipt  of  price  by 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia. 


HERMAGIS' 

Celebrated  French 

P  ORTR  AIT 
OBJECTIVES 

These  celebrated  lenses,  which  are 

USED  BY  MONS.  ADAM  SALOMON,  OF  PARIS, 

exclusively  for  making  his 

WORLD-RENOWNED  PORTRAITS ! 

have  been  difficult  to  get,  on  account  of  the  demand  for  them  in  Europe. 

Having  been  appointed  his  American  trade  agents  by  Mons.  Hermagis,  we  have  pleasure 
in  announcing  to  American  photographers  that  we  have  just  received  an  invoice  of  his 
lenses  for 

The  Salomon  Style,  8  x  10  size,  $175. 

For  Cabinet  Size,  extra  quick,  $110. 

For  Cabinet  Size,  quick,  $100. 

For  Carte  Size,  extra  quick,  $55. 

For  Carte  Size,  quick,  $45. 


ALSO, 


Hermagis'  Inimitable  Focusing  Glasses,  $6.50. 


These  lenses  are  unsurpassed  by  any  other.     Sent  on  trial  to  responsible  parties, 
C.  O.  D.,  and  instructions  to  Express  Company  to  hold  mone}'  one  week  for  trial. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


The  Universal 


EMBOSSINC   PATENTED  JANUARY  9th,  1872. 

This  Press  will  cameo  all  sizes,  from  cards  to  cabinets,  and  is  sold  lower  than  any  other  that  will  do 
the  same  work.     It  has  been  greatly  improved  and  made  very  complete  in  all  its  parts. 
We  furnish  a  card,  victoria,  and  cabinet  size. 

PBIOB,    $20.00. 

MANUFACTURED  AND  SOLD  WHOLESALE  AND  RETAIL  BY 

WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO.,  822  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 

EC?^  CAUTION. — Photographers  are  cautioned  against  buying  other  presses  that  may  use  an  elastic 
embossing  substance,  as  they  are  an  infringement  on  the  above.  R.  J.  Chute,  Patentee. 

JOHN   R.  CLEOSONS, 

IMPORTER   OF 
AND  MANUFACTURER  OF 

ALBUMEN  AND  ARROWROOT  SALTED  PAPERS. 

PINK  AND  BLUE  ALBUMEN  PAPER  CONSTANTLY  ON  HAND  OR  MADE  TO  ORDER, 

CLEMONS'  NEW  ALBUMEN   PAPER, 

A  superior  article  introduced  into  the  market  about  a  year  ago.  It  is  equal,  if  not  superior  to  any  Paper 
imported ;  the  great  demand  proves  such  to  be  the  case.  It  is  praised  by  all  who  use  it  as  to  its  keeping 
white  during  warm  weather ;  also,  for  its  brilliancy  and  toning  qualities,  and  it  is  made  White,  Pink,  and 
Blue.    Sizes  medium,  26  x 40  and  35  x,46. 

CLEMONS'  ARROWROOT  SALTED   PAPER 

Has  stood  the  test  above  all  other  makes  for  the  last  nine  years.  An  article  extensively  used  for  all  Plain 
Solar,  and  Colored  Work.    Sizes,  17%  x  23,  26  x  40,  and  35  x  46. 

Prices  lower  than  those  of  any  foreign  make. 

CLEMONS'  N.  P.  A.  VARNISH, 

For  Plain  Work  and  Retouching  upon. 

CLEMONS'  GOLDEN  VARNISH, 

For  Intensifying  and  Retouching  upon. 

JOHN  R.  CLEMONS,  Manufacturer, 

9 IS  S A  WHOM  ST.,  PHILADELPHIA. 

*  * 


Gihon's  Cut-Outs 

Are  the  very  best  that  are  made,  and  are  now  without  a  rival  in  the  market.  They  are  clean 
cut,  most  desirable  shapes  and  sizes,  and  made  of  non-actinic  paper,  manufactured  specially 
for  the  purpose.  Each  package  contains  30  Cut-Outs,  or  Masks,  with  corresponding  Insides, 
assorted  for  five  differently  sized  ovals  and  one  arch-top. 

PRICE,  $1.00  PER  PACKAGE.     Sent  by  mail  on  receipt  of  price. 

Parties  wishing  special  sizes,  or  large  lots  of  a  few  sizes,  may  have  them  cut  to  order 
promptly,  by  addressing  the  manufacturer.     No  lot  costing  less  than  $1.00  made  at  a  time. 


No  printer  should  attempt  to  make  medallion  pictures  without  them. 

THEY  HAVE  NO  EQUAL  FOR  QUALITY. 

Beware  of  spurious  imitations  made  of  common  paper,  full  of  holes,  badly  cut,  and  odd 
shapes  and  sizes.  Ask  your  stockdealer  for  GIHON'S  CUT-OUTS,  and  see  that  they  are 
in  his  envelopes  with  instruction  circular  included. 


Gihon's  Opaque 

IS    DESIGNED    FOR 

COMPLETELY  OBSCUEING  THE  IMPERFECT  BACKGROUNDS  OF  COPIES, 
RETOUCHING  NEGATIVES, 

FAULTY  SKIES  IN  LANDSCAPES, 

COATING  THE  INSIDE  OF  LENSES  OR  CAMERA  BOXES, 
BACKING  SOLAR  NEGATIVES, 

.  COVERING  VIGNETTING  BOARDS, 

AND    FOR  ANSWERING 

ALL  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  THE  INTELLIGENT  PHOTOGRAPHER  IN  THE 
PRODUCTION  OF  ARTISTIC  RESULTS  IN  PRINTING. 


WHEREVER  YOU  WANT  TO  KEEP  OUT  LIGHT,  USE  OPAQUE. 

It  is  applied  with  a  brush,  dries  quickly  and  sticks. 


CUT-OUTS  (thirty),  $1.00.  OPAQUE,  50  CENTS. 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Address  all  orders  to 

JOHN  L.  GIHON,  Inventor, 

12S  JV.  Seventh  St.,  Philadelphia,  Va. 


HOW  TO   PAINT  PHOTOCRAPHS. 

The  THIKD  EDITION  is  so  different  from  former  ones,  that  it  may  almost  be  said  that  it  is  A  new 
work. 

It  Gives  the  Best  and  Freshest  Instructions  to  be  had  on  the  Subject. 

Written  by  a  practical  photographic  colorist,  Mr.  Geo.  B.  Ayres. 

PRICE,  $2.00.     FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS. 

Photographers  and  artists  whose  interest  it  is  to  produce  work  in  Water  Colors,  Oil,  India  InK,  or 
who  wish  complete  instructions  in  retouching  negatives,  should  consult  Mr.  Ayres'  capital  work. 

BENEBMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 

Gk    SATJTBR. 

No.   138  South  Eighth  Street,  Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURER  AND   WHOLESALE   DEALER  IN 


The  attention  of  the  trade  is  particularly  called  to  the  superior  quality  of  our  Glass  and  materials 
and  neatness  of  finish.     A  large  assortment  constantly  on  hand. 

BULLOCK    &    CRENSHAW, 

No.  528  Arch  Street,  Philadelphia, 

MANUFACTURERS   AND  IMPORTERS   OF   PURE  CHEMICALS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 
IMPORTERS  OF  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN,  APPARATUS,  ETC. 

TRAPP  &  MUNCH'S 

gJknmt  §apr 

Introduced  into  this  country  since  1868  has  become  the  leading-  paper,  and  is 
now  better  knowu  and  more  appreciated  than  any  other  brand. 

That  this  great  success  is  well  deserved  and  due  to  its  excellent  qualities 
may  be  judged  from  the  fact,  that  of  all  the  competitors  of  the  Yienna  Ex- 
hibition, Messrs.  Trapp  &  Munch  alone  received  the 

MEDAL    OIE1   JS/CBTRXI? 

for  Albumenized  Paper. 

FOR  SALE  AT  ALL  THE  STOCKHOUSES. 

WILLY  WALLACH, 

GENERAL  AGENT  FOR  THE  UNITED  STATES, 

No.  4  Beekmau  St.,  and  36  Park  Row,  New  York. 


OWILL 


amuaoiviULff  Ca 


DEALERS 


II  EVERYTHING  PERTAINING  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY, 


AND  PROPRIETORS  OF  THE  WORKS  OF  THE 


American  Optical 
Company 


BROOME J 
STREET, 


Advertising,  Enterprising  Photographers,  Look ! 

The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons. 

WHAT  IS  IT? 

TIHE  PHOTOGRAPHER  TO  HIS  PATRONS  is  a  little  book  or  pamphlet  of  twelve  pages,  the 
*  intention  of  which  is  :  1st.  To  enable  the  photographer  to  say  a  few  words  in  a  kindly  way 
to  those  who  have  photographs  taken,  in  order  that  the  intercourse  between  them  and  their 
photographer  may  be  pleasant  and  result  in  the  most  successful  pictures.  Every  photographer 
knows  that  he  is  constantly  beset  with  a  lot  of  questions,  as  to  the  proper  way  to  dress,  the  best 
time  to  come,  and  so  on,  which  take  a  great  deal  of  his  time  to  answer.  This  little  book  answers 
them  all,  and  the  mere  handing  of  a  copy  to  the  questioner,  which  he  or  she  can  carry  away  and  study 
at  leisure,  serves  as  admirably  as  a  half-hour's  conversation. 

2d.  It  is  a  cheap  mode  of  advertising  What  could  you  want  better  than  to  have  your  business  card 
so  attractive  that  people  will  come  and  ask  for  it,  hand  it  around  from  one  to  another,  discuss  it,  and 
then  keep  it  for  reference  ?  This  is  what  they  do  with  this  little  "tract."  Witness  what  those  who 
have  tried  it  say  below. 

3d.  It  is  also  intended  to  convey  to  the  public  at  large  the  fact  that  photography  is  not  a  branch  of 
mechanics,  nor  photographers  a  sort  of  mechanic  themselves,  but  that  both  are  entitled  to  respect,  the 
same  as* the  family  physician  or  the  minister;  that  the  photographer  has  rights  as  well  as  the  public  ; 
that  he  must  be  trusted,  and  that  he  alone  is  responsible  for  his  results.  Moreover,  that  /temust  make 
the  picture  and  not  they. 

How  far  the  work  serves  these  three  ends  the  reader  must  judge  from  the  testimonials  below,  of  a 
few  of  those  who  have  been  using  our  little  publication  in  their  business. 

We  believe  it  will  pay  you  to  use  it,  and  that  you  will  assist  just  that  much  in  elevating  your  art  and 
your  craft,  an  object  which  we  are  all  working  for. 

We  get  "  The  Photographer  to  his  Patrons'1  up  in  neat  style,  on  the  best  letter  cap  paper,  assorted 
tints,  green,  pink,  and  buff.  Eight  pages  are  devoted  to  the  body  of  the  work,  which  contains  para- 
graphs or  chapters — 1,  on  the  object  of  the  work  ;  2,  on  photography  ;  3,  when  to  come  ;  4,  how  to 
come;  5,  how  to  dress;  6,  how  to  "behave;  7,  the  children  ;  8,  general  remarks  on  coloring,  copy- 
ing, frames,  prices,  &c. 

All  this  is  inclosed  in  a  cover  of  the  same  kind  of  paper,  the  pages  of  which  are  at  the  service  of 
the  photographer  who  orders  them  to  have  printed  thereon  anything  he  may  please,  which  printing 
we  do  without  extra  charge.     We  publish  this  leaflet  in  English,  German,  and  Spanish. 


Cuts  for  the  covers  we  supply  free. 


1000  copies,  cover  included, 
2000       " 


$50  00 
75  00 


.  $20  00  3000  copies,  cover  included, 

.     35  00  5000 

Over  500,000  have  been  sold. 
We  invite  you  to  examine  the  good  words  which  our  patrons  have  sent  us  concerning  this  publication. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


"  I  sent  one  out  West  to  a  friend,  and  she 
wrote  that  she  was  now  posted,  and  when  she 
came  here  to  have  a  picture  ™\ade,  she  would 
come  'according  to  directions.'  '' — A.  Bogar- 
dus,  New  York. 

"A  grand  idea." — Elbert  Anderson. 

"  It  is  eagerly  sought  for  and  read  by  every- 
body who  visits  our  Gallery.'' — J.  Gurney  & 
Son,  New  York. 

"  It  assists  me  greatly." — James  Mullen, 
Lexington,  Ky. 

"  The  many  valuable  hints  in  it  cannot  fail  to 
be  beneficial  to  both  photographer  and  patron." 
— Brown  &  Higgins,  Wheeling,  W.  Virginia. 


"  You  have  conferred  a  great  favor  on  the  fra- 
ternity in  supplying  it,  and  we  hope  it  will  bene- 
fit some  of  the  '■knoio-everythings'1  in  this  quar- 
ter. " — A.  C.  McIntyre  &  Co.,  Ogdensburg. 

"  They  are  just  the  thing  to  post  people  up  on 
what  they  ought  to  know  in  order  to  secure  good 
pictures." — J.  P.  Whipple,  White  Water. 

"  I  really  think  your  little  book  '  hits  the  nail 
on  the  head.'  "—J.  H.  Lamson,  Portland,  Me. 

"It  is  the  best  advertising  medium  I  have 
ever  found." — H.  M.  Sedgewick,  Granville,  0. 

"  I  think  they  are  a  perfect  success,  and  will 
do  us  photographers  a  great  deal  of  good." — G 
W.  Mathis. 


We  will  send  samples  ol  the  book,  and  special  rates,  to  any 
who  may  desire  it. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Sts.f  Philadelphia. 


IN  EVERY  VARIETY. 


Nos.  419  &  421  BROOME  ST.,  NEW  YORK, 
No.  73  BOLD  STREET,  LIVERPOOL,  ENGLAND. 


DEALERS  SUPPLIED  WITH  THE  BEST  GOODS  ON  THE  BEST  TERIS, 


Our  own  extensive  facilities  for  manufacturing  enable  us  to  produce  first  quality  of  goods, 
and  our  extensive  connections  at  home  and  abroad  ffive  us  facilities  which  no  one  else  has. 


MANUFACTORIES :  ( WaS%  £££^££5: Ctl 


SEE  OTHER  ADVERTISEMENTS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  BOOKS  and  MAGAZINES 


Examine  ScovilTs  PMootMc  Clocks,  ani  Read  lie  PMootMc  Times. 


THE  ZENTMAYER  LENS 

For  Views  and  Copying. 


These  Lenses  possess  pre-eminently,  the  following  qualities  : 

Width  of  visual  angle,  ranging  from  80°  to  90°  ;    depth  of  focus ;    extreme  sharpness  over  the 
whole  field  ;  true  perspective  ;  freedom  from  all  distortion  in  copying  ;  portability  and  cheapness. 

Each  mounting  is  provided  with  a  revolving  Diaphragm,  containing  the  stops  of  the  different  com- 


binations for  which  they  are  designed 
making  and  closing  the  exposure. 

No. 


The  larger  ones  are  provided  with  an  internal  shutter  for 


$33  00 
40  00 
55  00 
75  00 

110  00 
48  00 
88  00 


1, 

2i  inch  focus, 

3x3    plate,  . 

.  $20  00 

No.  1  and  No.  2  combined, 

2, 

H    "    .  " 

4x5       "      . 

.     25  00 

"    2    "      "    3 

3. 

5|     "        " 

6£  x    8£     "      . 

.      30  00 

"    3    "      "4         " 

4, 

8       " 

10    x    12     "      . 

.     42  00 

"    5    "      "6 

5, 

12       " 

14    x    17     "      . 

.      60  00 

"    1,  2,  and  3, 

6, 

18       " 

20    x    24     "       . 

.     90  00 

"    3,  4,  and  5, 

No.  3,  with  large  mounting  to  combine  with  No.  4  and  No.  5,  $35. 

No.  1  and  No.  2,  specially  adapted  for  Stereoscopic  Views,  are  furnished  in  matched  pairs.  No.  1 
and  No.  2,  single,  not  to  combine  with  other  sizes,  $36  a  pair. 

Lenses  and  mountings  to  form  all  six  combinations,  from  2£  to  18  inches,  $173. 

Zentmayer's  Stereoscopic  outfits,  including  a  pair  of  No.  2  Lenses  4x7  box,  7  x  10  India  Rubber 
Bath  and  Dipper,  Tripod,  Printing  Frames,  and  outside  box,  $60. 

JOSEPH  ZENTMAYER,  Manufacturer, 

147  South  Fourth  Street,  Philadelphia. 

STEREOSCOPIC   riEWS. 


Dealers  selecting  their  autumn  stock  of  Stereoscopic  Views,  would  do  well  to  examine  our 

unrivalled  variety  of  Views  of 

THE  WHITE  MOUNTAINS, 

NIAGARA,   WASHINGTON, 

EAIRMOUNT  PARK,  PHILADELPHIA, 

FLOWERS,  GROUPS,  &c. 

«3~  QVALITT  UNSURPASSED  ! 


KILBURN  BROS.,  Littleton,  New  Hampshire. 

NIAGARA 

STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS. 


Winter  and  Summer  views  of  Niagara  Falls,  of  all  sizes.     Trade  supplied  on  good  terms.     Variety 
unequalled. 

G.  E.  CURTIS,  Photographer, 

Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y. 

Mr.  Curtis'  views  answer  Mr.  Robinson's  query  :  "Are  there  any  olouds  in  America?  " 


"WTET    BOOKS. 


Owing  to  the  fact  that  the  dampness  caused  by  the  late  fire  in  our  building  has  caused  more  of  our 
stock  to  develop  mould,  and  stain,  we  offer  the  following  Inducements  to  Photographers  : 

1.— Linn's  Landscape  Photography,  25  cts.  7.— "Vol.  4  (1867),  Philadelphia  Photographer,  $2.50, 

2— Anderson's  Photo-Comic  Almyknack,  20  cts.  8.— Vol. 8  (1871), Philadelphia  Photographer,  $2.50, 

3— Mosaics,  1866  to  1874,  inclusive,  25  cts.  each-  9.— Vol.  1  (1871),  Photographic  World,  $2.00. 

4.— How  to  Sit  for  yonr  Photograph,  10  cts.  10.— Swan's  Carbon  Process,  50  cts. 

5. — Dr.  Vogel's  Keference-Book,  50  cts.  11,— Carbon  Manual,  50  cts. 
6.— Leaf  Prints,  or  Glimpses  of  Photography,  50  cts. 

One  parcel  containing  1  to  6,  10  or  11,  $2.     One  parcel  containing  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5,  with  6,  10  or  11, 
$1.     One  parcel  containing  1,  2,  3  and  4,  60  cents. 

WHERE  ANY  FIVE  BOOKS  ARE  TAKEN  20  PER  CENT.  DISCOUNT. 

Also  an  assorted  lot  of  back  numbers  of  the   Philadelphia  Photographer,  at  15  cents,  and  of  the 
Photographic  World,  at  10  cents  per  copy. 


The  above  goods,  for  all  practical  uses  are  as  good  as  new  books. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  ^gg^j^c^^g  PHILADELPHIA. 

AUG.  SCHWARZE.  SCHWARZE     &.    VALK  WILLIAM  VALK. 

JVO.    614   ARCH   STMEET,    PHILADELPHIA. 

MosT  se£E£dothS^  of  German  AlMmen  Paper,  and  Arrowroot  Plain  Salted.  Paper. 

DEALERS  IN  PHOTOGRAPHIC  MATERIALS  OF  EVERY  DESCRIPTION. 

Will  mail  to  any  address  in  the  country,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  $1,  one  dozen  sheets  of  Assorted  Photo- 
graphic Paper,  each  sheet  being  numbered  for  distinction. 

The  undersigned,  having  purchased  the  entire  interest,  goodwill,  and  business  of 

Photo.  Materials  &  Picture  Frames 

OF  J.  HAWORTH, 

Desires  to  inform  his  friends  and  the  trade  generally,  that  he  will  continue  the  business,  as 

heretofore,  at  tbe  old  stand, 

624  ARCH  STREET,  PHILADELPHIA, 

Where  he  hopes,  by  prompt  attention  and  fair  dealing,  to  merit  a  continuance  of  the  patron- 
age so  largely  given  to  the  late  firm. 

We  will  still  keep  a  well  assorted  stock  of 

PICTURE  FRAMES  (OVAL  AND  SQUARE), 

VELVET  CASES,  COLLODIONS, 

VARNISHES,  PURE  CHEMICALS,   &c, 

which  can  be  had  at  the  lowest  rates  ;  as  well  as 

PASSEPARTOUTS,    STEREOSCOPIC    VIEWS   OF   AIL   PARTS    OF  THE  WORLD, 
STEREOSCOPIC  INSTRUMENTS,  «fcc. 

We  also  have  a  full  line  of  CAMERAS  of  the  best  makes  and  latest  improvements, 
CAMERA  STANDS,  HEAD-RESTS,  BACKGROUNDS,  and  all  Accessories  necessary 
to  the  Photographic  Art.  We  would  call  the  attention  of  photographers  to  the  fact  tbat  we 
manufacture  SQUARE  FRAMES,  and  so  can  generally  ship  any  frames  (especially  odd 
sizes)  the  same  day  they  are  ordered.  We  would  also  call  attention  to  the  noted  ALBU- 
MEN PAPERS,  Morgan's  and  H.  Extra,  the  best  for  warm  weather,  for  which  I  am 
the  agent. 

THOMAS  H.  McCOLLIN, 

Successor  to  Haworth  &  McCollin,  624  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


G0¥I1# 


MANUFACTURING  COMPANY, 

Nos.  419  &  421  Broome  St.,  New  York, 


WHOLESALE  DEALERS  IN 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  STOCK 


DEALERS  SWPPMnIEB 

On  the  Most  Advantageous  Terms,  with 

EVERY  ARTICLE  IN  THE  WORLD 

Used  or  sold  in  the  Art  of  Photography. 


g@=  Our  facilities  are  such  that  we  cannot  be  superseded  by  any 
other  house.    We  make  it  to  the  advantage  of  everyone  to  deal  with  us. 


ASK  YOUR  DEALER  FOR  SCOVILL'S  GOODS. 


Removed  to  New  Store,  419  &  421  Broome  St. 

^SeT„:^::r™  "photographic  times." 

#    * 


JOHN  DEAN  &  CO., 
MANUFACTURERS, 

Worcester,  Mass., 

OFFEK  AT   WHOLESALE,   AT   LOWEST   PBICES,   THE 

damantean 


LATES, 


k 


BLACK  and  Patent  CHOCOLATE  TINTED, 
EGG-SHELL  and  GLOSSY. 

The  experience  and  extensive  facilities  of  John  Dean  &  Co.  enable  them 
to  produce  the  most  desirable  Ferrotype  Plates  in  the  market. 

E.  &  H.  T.  ANTHONY  &  CO., 

TRADE   AGENTS, 

591  BROADWAY,  NEW  YORK. 


THE 

PRIZE 
PICTURES. 


In  order  that  photographers  may  have  an  early  opportunity  of  studying  the  very  elegant 
pictures  from  negatives  which  have  been  sent  to  us  in  competition  for  our 

GOLD     MEDAL! 

we  publish  them  for  sale.  There  are  THIRTY  PICTURES  IN  A  SET — of  men,  women, 
and  children,  groups  and  single  figures — and  the  following  is  a  catalogue  of  them,  numbered 
in  the  order  in  which  the  negatives  were  received. 


1  A.  N.  Hardy,  Boston,  Mass. 

2  J.  McClure  &  Co.,  St.  John,  N.B. 

3  D.  Ginter,  Conneautville,  Pa. 

4  W.  N.  Lockwood,  Ripon,  Wis. 

5  F.  B.  Clench,  Lockport,  N.  Y. 

6  Theo.  Nieberg,  St.  Marys,  O. 

7  C.  Chadbourne,  Toledo,  O. 

8  E.  H.  Alley,  Toledo,  0. 

9  B.  Gray,  Bloomington,  111. 

10  C.  D.  Mosher,  Chicago,  111. 

11  E.  T.  Whitney,  Norwalk,  Conn. 


12  N.  H.  Busey,  Baltimore,  Md. 

13  M.  T.  Carter,  Worcester,  Mass. 

14  W.  W.  Whiddit,  Newburg,  N.  Y. 

15  L.  G.  Bigelow,  Williamsport,  Pa. 

16  G.  M.  Elton,  Palmyra,  N.  Y. 

17  I.  Saunders,  Alfred  Centre,  N.  Y. 

18  Bradley  &  Ruloeson,  San  Fran- 

cisco, Cal. 

19  Forrester  Clark,  Pittsfleld, 

Mass. 

20  Otto  Lewin,  New  York  City. 


21  F.  L.  Stuber,  Bethlehem,  Pa. 

22  D.  T.  Burrill,   North   Bridge- 

water,  Mass. 

23  J.  Barhydt,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

24  Albright  Bros.,  Wooster,  O. 

25  F.  S.  Crowell,  Mt.  Vernon,  O. 

26  Trask  &  Bacon,  Philadelphia. 

27  G.  W.  Harris,  Lancaster,  N.  Y. 

28  B.  Williams,  Tunkhannock,  Pa. 

29  F.  Gutekunst,  Philadelphia. 

30  J.  Inglis,  Montreal,  Can. 


It  will  be  seen  that  a  number  of  our  best  photographers  have  competed. 

THE  AWARD  WAS  MADE  FOB,  NO.  18. 


Three  negatives  or  more  were  sent  by  each  competitor.     The  sets  include  one  example 
from  each  competitor.     All  the  duplicates  may  be  had  to  order. 

Several  thousand  of  these  Pictures  have  already  been  sold.     Get  copies 
while  the  Negatives  are  new. 

The  prints  are  supplied  at  the  following  rates : 

A  Set  of  Thirty  in  the  Improved  Photograph  Cover, $4  25 

"  "  without        "  "  "        3  75 

Selections,  per  dozen, 3  00 


EVERY  OPERATOR  &  EVERY  PRINTER  SHOULD  GET  AND  STUDY  THEM. 


Nothing  so  really  elegant  was  ever  offered  for  sale. 

BEHERMAU  &  WILSON,  63SM)  7th  &  Cherry  Sts.,  Phila. 


Photographic  Card  Warehouse. 


A.  M.  COLLINS,  SON  &  CO., 

MANUFACTURERS, 

No.  18  South  Sixth  St.  and  No.  9  Decatur  St., 

PHILADELPHIA. 


EVERYTHING  APPERTAINING  TO  THE   LINE   OF  OUR 

MANUFACTURES  FURNISHED  WITH  CARE 

AND  PROMPTNESS. 


ggp"  Our  long  experience  in  and  facilities  for  the  manufacture  of  these  goods,  and 
familiarity  with  the  peculiar  wants  of  Photographers,  enable  us  to  offer  superior  induce- 
ments to  those  who  may  favor  us  with  their  orders. 


enlaRGEmEN    X     & 

IDE  BY  THE  SOUR  CHEN, 

AND  COPYING  DONE,  FOR  THE  TRADE. 


18  SOLAR   CAMERAS. 


EXPEDITIOUS,  ^gfisftzffi&r""   EXCELLENT 

ALBERT   MOORE, 

No.  828  Wood  Street,  Philadelphia. 


PUBLICA 
TIONS. 


In  order  to  meet  the  thirst  now  happily  growing  so  rapidly  among  photographers,  for 
knowledge  bearing  upon 

ART  PRINCIPLES  APPLICABLE  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY, 

We  have  arranged  with  the  various  publishers  of  art  works  for  the  sale  of  such  as  we  think 
will  be  useful  to  photographers,  and  will  be  glad  to  mail  copies  of  them  on  receipt  of  price, 
as  follows : 

ART  CULTURE.  A  Hand-book  of  Art  Technicalities  and  Criticism,  selected  from  the 
works  of  John  Ktjskin.  An  admirable  work,  giving  most  useful  hints  on  composi- 
tion, posing,  lighting,  backgrounds,  tone,  color,  lines,  unity,  variety,  harmony,  &c,  &c. 
485  pages,  and  finely  illustrated.     Price,  $3.00. 

THE  STUDY  OP  ART.  A  manual  of  short  paragraphs,  numerically  arranged,  on  all 
the  leading  art  topics,  and  a  very  instructive,  useful  book.  By  M.  A.  Dwight.  278 
pages.     Price,  $2.00. 

#®~ALL  ORDERS  FILLED  PROMPTLY. 

BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers,  Philadelphia. 
POWERS     &     WEIGHTMAN, 


P-H 


EX3 


trd 


MANUFACTURING  CHEMISTS, 


Offer  to  Stockdealers 
A  full  Assortment  of  Reliable 


Photographic  Chemicals 


Of  their  own  Manufacture, 
including : 


Nitrate  of  Silver,  Sulphuric  Ether  (concentrated),  Ammonia  (concentrated), 
Bromide  of  Potassium,  Acetic  Acid,  Chemically  Pure  Acids, 
Iron  and  Ammonia  Proto-Sulphate,  Chloride  of  Gold, 

Iodide  of  Ammonium,  Sulphate  of  Iron,  Cyanide  of  Potassium, 
Chloroform,  Tannin,  Sulphuret  of  Potassium. 


TRY    THE 


ALBION  UNIHIIZIK  COS 

(LONDON  AND  GLASGOW), 

PAPER. 


TESTIMONIALS. 

"It  is  good  enough  to  eat.  I  use  it  altogether  for  the  prints  for  the  Philadelphia  Photographer.'"' — 
Wm.  H.  Rhoads,  Philadelphia. 

"The  last  lot  of  paper  was  as  good  as  we  wish  to  use. — Vandyke  &  Brown,  Liverpool,  largest,  con 
sumers  in  England. 


FOR  EXAMPLE  OF  PRINTING  SEE  OCTOBER  NO.  PHILADELPHIA  PHOTOGRAPHER. 


A  FRESH  SUPPLY  JUST  RECEIVED  BY 

BENERMAN    «£    WIIaSON, 

PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 
TO   PROFESSIONAL   PHOTOGRAPHERS    AND   THE   TRADE. 


CH.    DAUVOIS, 

Acknowledged  to  be  the  Best  and  Cheapest  in  the  World. 


D|— 1  'IX      H  ROHAUT    &    HUT  I  NET, 

•  A.  JL    \^J        M.       A    X  ^     J_->      JL     ^  SUCCESSORS, 

No.  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris, 


ESPECIAL   MANUFACTURERS   OF 


MOUNTSoSLFOR  PHOTOGRAPHY. 


TRADE    MARK,    Cli.D. 


Mounts  for  Cartos-de-Visite, 
Cnbinet  Portrait, 
Victoria  C;ird, 

Stereoscopic  Views — all  new  samples  of  French 
styles. 


Bristol  Boards  of  every  size  and  thickness,  plain 

India  Tinted  and  Fancy  Printing. 

Book-post  and  Card  Coses. 

Stout  Blotting  Paper  Albums. 

First-class  Rives  Albumenized  Paper,  Ac,  &c. 


MEDALS  AWARDED  AT  EVERY  EXHIBITION. 

All  orders  are  to  be  sent  to  their  establishment,  43  Rue  Greneta,  Paris,  or  to  Wholesale  Houses 
of  the  United  States.     Samples  on  application. 

LIBERAL  DISCOUNT  TO  WHOLESALE  HOUSES. 


NEWELL'S  CHEMICAL-PROOF  WARE. 

TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS  AND  STOCK-HEALERS. 

A  year  ago  we  introduced  our  Dishes  and  Bath- Holders  at  the  Convention  then  being  held  in  the 
City  of  Buffalo,  as  filling  what  we  supposed  to  be  a  necessity  in  the  photographic  fraternity.  Our 
goods  then,  merely  as  they  were  first  created,  and  in  a  manner  in  their  crude  state,  attracted  more 
than  a  passing  notioe.  A  year  of  practical  experience  has  suggested  some  changes  and  many  improve- 
ments, until  we  have  now  perfected  what  is  acknowledged  to  he  the  very  acme  of  perfection  :  in  attest- 
ation of  which,  the  following  eminent  corroborative  testimony  is  offered: 

New  York,  June  27th,  1874. 

I  have  in  constant  use  one  of  your  Improved  Bath-Holders  and  it  works  finely.  I  consider  it  one 
of  the  many  desirable  improvements  of  the  age,  as  it  possesses  the  qualifications  of  being  good  as  well 
as  cheap  :  even  the  largest  sizes  are  light  and  easily  handled  in  comparison  with  the  heavy  and  cum- 
bersome holders  so  long  in  use.  Yours  respectfully,  Abm.  Bogahdus. 

St.  Louis,  Mo.,  May  18,  1874. 

It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  bear  testimony  to  the  great  value  of  your  Baths  and  Dishes  for  photo- 
graphic purposes.  I  have  heretofore  used  porcelain,  glass,  and  vuloanized  rubber,  but  usually  managed 
to  break  at  least  one  dozen  a  year — with  all  the  care  that  I  could  possibly  take  of  them  they  would  at 
times  get  a  knock,  a  fall,  a  break  somehow  :  but  now  I  feel  my  troubles  are  at  an  end  with  my  solution 
dishes,  for  I  look  upon  your  dishes  and  baths  as  the  photographer's  boon,  being  durable,  light,  and 
cheap,  and  no  well-regulated  gallery  should  be  without  a  full  set.  Most  respectfully, 

N.B. — This  notice  is  unsolicited.  J.  H.  I'itzgibbon. 

Philadelphia,  January  Iff,  1874. 

Our  attention  having  been  called  to  your  patent  Baths,  we  determined  upon  giving  them  a  trial.  In 
justice  to  your  discovery,  we  feel  it  our  duty  to  attest  its  merits.  It  is  all  that  is  claimed,  and  more  : 
for,  apart  from  the  many  advantages  claimed  for  it,  it  produces  the  most  perfect  negatives  we  ever 
made,  and  seems  to  have  the  quality  of  purifying  the  solution.  Once  used  no  photographer,  we  feel 
confident,  would  be  without  them.  Schreiber  &  Sons. 


DO  NOT  BE  PERSUADED  TO  USE  ANY  OTHER.  PRICE  LIST  FURNISHED  ON  APPLICATION. 

Manufactured  by  R.  NEWELL  &  SON,  626  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia. 


SOUTHERN 

Photographic^Ferrotype 

STOCK  DEPOT, 
Savannah,  Geo. 

FIRST-CLASS  STOCK 

AT  NORTHERN  PRICES, 

Saving  Time,  Freight,  Insurance, 
cRosscuptwESTrpHA:^ — =*"  Drayage,  &c. 

SElsTD     IFOIR,    ZPIE^IOIEJ    LIST 


IMPROVED 


PHOTOGRAPH  COVERS 


Fig.  1. 
The  Outside  Appearance. 


Fig.  2. 
A.  Leaf  Showing  the  Q-itard. 


.  Frequent  inquiries  for  something  at  a  much  lower  price  than  an  album,  for  the  holding 
together  and  preservation  of  photographs,  has  induced  us  to  manufacture  an  article  which 
we  think  will  meet  the  want. 

IT  SERVES  ALL  THE  PURPOSES  OF  AN  ALBUM,  FOR 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Portraits, 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Landscapes, 

A  Series  or  a  Set  of  Photographs  of  any  hind, 

MAY  BE  NEATLY  AND  CHEAPLY  BOUND  IN  THESE  COVEKS. 

They  are  made  with  expanding  backs,  so  that  from  six  to  twenty-four  pictures  may  be 
inserted  in  one  cover.  The  pictures  are  mounted  in  the  usual  way,  and  then  strips  of  linen, 
or  strong  paper,  of  the  proper  width,  are  pasted  on  one  edge,  by  which  the  picture  is  inserted 
and  held  in  place  in  the  cover  by  a  paper  fastener.  Eig.  1  represents  the  cover,  with  the 
perforations  in  the  back,  through  which  the  spreading  clasps  of  the  paper  fastener  bind  the 
whole  together.  These  are  so  easily  inserted  or  removed,  that  pictures  are  readily  put  in  or 
taken  out  at  any  time.  Eig.  2  represents  the  picture,  with  the  guard  pasted  on  ready  for 
insertion.  The  arrangement  is  simple,  and  we  are  sure  will  be  readily  comprehended.  For 
binding  together  views  of  your  town  or  city,  or  portraits  of  celebrities,  they  are  very  neat 

The  following  is  a  list  of  sizes  and  prices,  without  cards : 

For  Photograph.  Per  dozen.  Per  hundred. 

Card  Size, $1.50 $10.00 

Cabinet  Size, 2.25 13.50 


EXTRA   HEAVY    COVERS 


5-8  Size, 

4-4  " 

8-10   " 


4.50    .  .     33.00 

6.00 40.00 

8.00 56.50 


Larger  or  special  sizes  made  to  order.     Furnished  with  card  board  at  best  rates. 

mailed  at  dozen  price. 


Samples 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Photo.  Publishers, 

Seventh  and  Cherry  Streets,  Philadelphia, 


LONDON    185 


PARIS    1867. 


ROSS' 


PORTRAIT 


AUID 


VIEW  LENSES 


We  have  now  successfully  introduced  to  the  American  Photographers  the  Ross  Lens,  and  by  our 
increased  sales  we  know  they  are  appreciated.  At  the  convention  held  at  Buffalo,  July  15,  many  fine 
photographs  were  exhibited  by  photographers,  and  ourselves,  made  with  the  Ross  Lens,  which 
attracted  great  attention. 

While  Ross  &  Co.  are  the  oldest  manufacturers  of  Photographic  Lenses  in  existence,  they  also 
keep  up  with  the  requirements  of  the  fraternity,  by  constantly  manufacturing  new  combinations  and 
improving  on  those  already  in  existence.  They  have  lately  perfected,  and  will  soon  furnish  us  stock 
of,  a  new  series  of  Card  Lenses,  extra  rapid,  peculiarly  adapted  for  babies,  and  people  who  will  not  be 
quiet.     We  will  give  notice  of  their  arrival. 

WE  HAVE  NOW  IN  STOCK 

Portrait  Lenses,  from  1-4  to  15x1$.  Instantaneous  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Cabinet  Lenses,  \os.  1,  2,  and  3.  Medium  Angle  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Card  Lenses,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3.  Large  Angle  Doublets,  all  sizes. 

Triplets,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7.  Stereograpbie  Lenses,  all  sizes. 

We  shall  soon  have  in  Stock,  Ross  &  Co.'s  latest  introduction,  which  is  at  present  exciting  the 
Photographers  of  Europe  with  its  excellence,  and  has  been  named  the 

SYMMETRICAL    LENS. 


We  shall  keep  following  sizes  in  stock,  other  numbers  imported  to  order. 


No. 


Large  Stop 
Covering. 


Price. 


*3  5x4 

6  8^x6^ 

8  10x8 

11  15x12 

12  18x16 


Medium  Stop  Small  Stop  Equivalent 

Covering.  Covering.  Focus. 

•    7i4x4i^    8x5      5  inches $27  00 


9x7 
12x10 
18x16 
22x20 


10x8 

13x11      10 

22x18     18 

25x21     21 


54  00 

72  00 

108  00 

135  00 


In  matched  pairs,  $54.00. 


Numerous  testimonials  pronounce  them  to  be  the  best,  as  well  as  the  cheapest  Foreign  Lens  ever 
offered  to  the  American  Photographer. 

We  will  mail  price-list  on  application,  aad  promptly  fill  all  orders. 


WILSON,  HOOD  &  CO., 


SOLE  AGENTS  FOR 
THE  UNITED  STATES 


,  822  Arcl  St.,  PMMelptia,  Pa. 


STEINHEIL'S  SONS' 

NEW  APLANATIC  LENSES 

We  now  have  a  full  stock  of  these  Celebrated  Lenses,  at  the  following  prices : 

No.  1 1-4  size,  3J  inch  focus,      , $25  00 

'•    2,      1-2     "  5i  "  "         30  00 

"    3,     4-4     "  7  "  "        .- 45  00 

"    4 8-10"  10i  ■<  <<        60  00 

"    5 10-12-'  ]3J  "  "         '70  00 

"    6,     13-16   "  16j-  "  "        110  00 

"    7,      18-22  "  200  00 

"    8,     20-24  "  350  00 

Nos.  1  &  2  are  in  matched  pairs  for  Stereoscopic  Work. 


"I  always  take  great  pleasure  in  recommending  the  Steinheil  Lenses,  and  you  can  say  almost  anything  in 
their  favor  for  me.  They  possess  all  the  merits  of  higher-priced  lenses,  and  if  I  was  starting  again  I  should 
stock  myself  with  them." — B.  W.  Kilburn. 

"  The  pair  of  No.  2  Steinheil's  which  I  obtained  of  you,  about  a  year  since,  have  always  been  my  best  friends 
and  give  most  perfect  satisfaction  when  called  upon,  both  in  and  outdoors." — W.  H.  Jackson,  Office  of  the  Geo. 
Survey  of  the  Territories,  Department  of  the  Interior,  Washington,  D.  C,  Nov.  6,  1874. 

"  I  can  cheerfully  indorse  all  that  you  claim  for  the  Steinheil  Lens.  My  No.  3  has  given  entire  satisfaction  as 
a  copying,  portrait,  and  landscape  tuhe."— J.  H.  Bostwick,  Bristol,  Pa.,  Nov.  6,  1874. 

"  The  pair  of  No.  4  Steinheil  Lenses  which  you  sent  us,  are  far  in  anticipation  of  what  we  expected.  Stereo, 
views  in  Natural  History  strain  a  lens  to  its  utmost,  much  more  than  any  other  work,  it  requires  extreme, 
sharpness,  with  great  volumes  of  light.  They  are  the  only  lens  we  have  found  to  come  up  to  the  requirements." 
— Huest  &  Soss,  Albany,  N.  Y,  Nov.  12,  1874. 

"The  Steinheil  No.  4  I  purchased  of  you'gives  complete  satisfaction.  I  use  it  for  large  groups  in  gallery,  all 
kinds  of  outdoor  work,  taking  animals,  groups,  views,  etc.;  also,  inside  views,  and  it  works  admirably  for  all." 
— J.  B.  Gibson,  Coaiesville,  Pa.,  Nov.  9, 1874. 

"The  No.  4  Steinheil  Lens  I  bought  from  you  about  a  year  and  a  half  ago  gives  me  perfect  satisfaction  in 
viewing  and  copying.  I  have  tried  a  number  of  lenses,  but  none  will  compare  (in  my  estimation)  with  the 
Steinheil ;  in  fact,  I  would  not  be  without  it.  For  great  depth  of  focus  and  quick  work  it  cannot  be  excelled." 
— L.  B.  Kline,  Huntingdon,  Pa.,  Nov.  7,  1874. 

"  I  have  had  in  use  for  over  four  years  a  No.  o  Steinheil  Lens,  and  for  the  use  I  have  applied  it  to  it  has  given 
me  the  fullest  satisfaction.  I  have  mostly  used  it  in  reproducing  paintings  and  engravings,  and  in  photograph- 
ing machinery.  It  is  the  best  lens  I  ever  used,  its  depth  of  focus  is  wonderful,  the  illumination  is  very  even 
over  the  whole  plate,  and  as  a  view  and  copying  lens  it  ranks  with  me  as  A  No.  1." — John  Carbutt,  American 
Photo-Relief  Printing  Co.,  Philadelphia,  Nov.  6,  1874. 

"  The  No.  5  Steinheil  Lens,  purchased  of  you,  has  been  in  constant  use  for  copying  during  several  months 
and  gives  perfect  satisfaction.  I  have  made  a  laige  number  of  negatives  (including  several  for  the  New  York- 
Graphic)  which  were  much  admired  for  their  tine  definition.  Where  correct  drawing,  absolute  sharpness,  and 
rapidity  are  desired,  I  think  the  Steinheil  is  the  best  lens  with  which  I  am  acquainted." — D.  A.  Partridge, 
Philadelphia,  Nov.  9,  1874. 

"  I  do  not  know  what  to  say  about  the  Nos.  5  &  6  Steinheil  Lenses  except  that  I  believe  them  to  be  the  best 
lenses  made  for  all  purposes,  except  portraits  indoors.  All  our  copies  of  engravings  and  Patent  Office  negatives 
are  taken  by  them,  and  I  always  recommend  their  adoption." — Ernest  Edwards,  Office  J.  P.  Osgood  A-  Co.,  Bos- 
on, Nov.  9,  1874. 

"The  No.  6  Steinheil  purchased  of  you  is  very  satisfactory.  We  have  it  constantly  in  use  copying  engravings, 
photographs,  etc.,  and  could  not  dispense  with  it,  or  replace  it  with  any  other  lens  we  know  of."- — Charles 
Taber  &  Co.,  Neiv  Bedford,  Mass.,  Nov.  11, 1874. 

"For  several  years  past  I  have  used  a  No.  6  Steinheil  Lense.  There  are  uses  for  it  about  my  gallery  that  no 
other  instrument  would  seem  to  fill,  such  as  copying  drawings  and  maps,  and  taking  negatives  of  models,  ma- 
chinery, etc.  For  short  views  it  works  admirably.  Every  well-regulated  gallery  should  have  one." — J.  F.  By- 
der,  Cleveland,  Nov.! ,  1874. 

Original  letters  containing  the  above  testimonies  can  be  seen  on  application. 
We  feel  sure  that  at  least  one  of  these  lenses  is  needful  for  the  successful  prosecution  of 
your  business,  and  so  solicit  your  orders. 

WILSON,  HOOD  *  CO., 

Sole  Agents  for  the  United  States, 

822  Arch  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


THE 


MWel|ifo 


o 

-ki 

^ 

k 

o 

^ 

« 

g 

•Si 

« 

*K5 

o 

S 

k 

© 

05 

^ 

^ 

■+i> 

& 

•K) 

k 

^3 

-K> 

© 

^ 

ftn 

,^ 

^ 

The  Lives t  and  Best 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  MAGAZINE  PUBLISHED ! 


*  VOLUME  WILL  EXCEED  ALT  « 
<$$>  ^    Its  distinctive  features  will  b(?  °^^ 


^deome    ep 


v°to 


'SrHph  eacb  '^ 


te9t,  Photon 


a 


o 


&   Processes,  % 
»     Formulfe, 
■Wrinkles, 
Dodges. 


N»<w  *•*"*' 


*a*;„    Skylights  in  a»  V  se  \. 
J'°n  on  allmatteva  ot 


0%   v*- 


^     ?5^ 
i 

fcM 

<^ 


EACH  MONTHLY  ISSUE  WILL  BE  A  PHOTOGRAPHIC  WORK  IN  ITSELF. 
NOTICE  TO  SUBSCRIBERS. 


Subscription  price,  $5  a  year,  §2.50  for 
six  months,  50  cents  per  copy,  postpaid. 
positively  i't  advance. 

In  remitting  by  mail  a  post-office  or- 
der, or  draft  payable  to  the  order  of 
Benerman  &  Wilson,  is  preferable  to 
banknotes.  Clearly  give  your  Post- 
Office,  County,  and  State. 

Canada  subscribers  must  remit  24 
cents  extra,  to  prepay  postage. 

Foreign  subscriptions  must  be  accom- 
panied by  tbe  postage  in  additiou. 


ADVERTISING  sheets  are  bound  with 
each  number  of  the  Magazine.  Adver- 
tisements are  inserted  at  the  following 

rates : 

1  Month.   6  Months.  1  Year. 

One  Page,  ....  S20  00    $110  00  $200  00 

Half    "        ....     12  00        66  00  120  00 

Quarter  Page,.  .      7  00        38  50  70  00 

Eighth      "      ...    4  00        22  00  40  00 

Cards,  6  lines.or  less,  2  00     1100  20  00 


The  attention  of  advertisers,  and  those 
having  galleries,  &c,  for  sale,  is  called 
to  our  Specialties  pages.  Terms,  $2  for 
six  lines,  and  25  cents  for  each  additional 
line,  seven  words  to  a  line,  always  in 
advance.  Duplicate  insertions,  50  cents 
less,  each. 

SURE  TO  PAT! 

J$S="  Operators  desiring  situations,  no 
charge. 


BENERMAN  &  WILSON,  Publishers, 

OFFICE,  S.  W.  COR.  OF  SEVENTH  AND  CHEEEY  STS.,  PHILADELPHIA. 


THE  ENTREKIN  BURNISHER  "PATENTS. 


THE 

OPINIONS  OF 

EMINENT 

COUNSELGIVEN 

IN 

THEIR  FAVOR. 


THEIR 

VALIDITY 

ESTABLISHED 

BEYOND  DOUBT 


Patented  May  20,  and  December  2, 1873. 

TO  DEALERS  AND   PHOTOGRAPHERS: 

The  proprietor  of  the  Weston  &  McDonald  Patent  for  a  Photographic  Burnisher  having 
advertised  that  he  has  prosecuted  all  the  photographers  and  dealers  in  photographic  stock 
in  the  New  England  States  who  are  making,  using,  or  selling  the  Entrekin  Oscillating 
Enameler  for  Burnishing  Photographs,  I  take  this  method  of  informing  the  trade  and  the 
public  that  there  is  no  foundation  whatever  for  the  statement  referred  to.  I  have  guaran- 
teed the  validity  of  my  patent  to  all  who  make,  sell,  or  use  it,  and  have  covenanted  to  de- 
fend them  against  any  and  all  suits  for  infringement  by  the  following  guarantee: 


"  Whereas,  ■ 


has  purchased  Photograph  Burnisher  No. of  my  invention,  and  made  under  my 


Patent,  No.  145,161,  granted  Decemher  2d,  1873, 1,  William  G.  Entrekin,  hereby  covenant  and  agree  to  warrant 

and  defend  the  said his  heirs,  executors,  administrators,  and  assigns,  in  the  use  of  said  Burnisher, 

against  the  consequences  of  any  and  all  suits  for  infringement  which  may  be  brought  against  him,  by.the 
owner  or  owners  of  any  other  Photograph  Burnisher  whatsoever. 

"In  Witness  Wheeeof,  I,  the  said  William  G.  Entrekin,  have  hereunto  set  my  hand    .id  seal  this 

day  of A.D.  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and "Witness ." 

Threats  for  the  purpose  of  intimidation  have  been  freely  circulated,  but  only  a  single  suit 
has  been  brought,  and  that  was  commenced  at  my  invitation,  in  order  that  the  question  of 
the  alleged  infringement  might  be  settled  by  the  adjudication  of  a  court.  I  deny  that  my 
patent  infringes  the  patent  of  Weston  &  McDonald  in  any  particular,  and  in  support  of 
that  denial  cite  the  following  opinion  of  eminent  counsel : 

William  G.  Entrekin.  Washington,  D.  C,  Friday,  June  5, 1874. 

Dear  Sir  :  Yours  is  just  received.  You  need  not  fear  any  trouble  from  any  parties  in  regard  to  the  Weston 
Machine.  Your  Burnisher  does  not  infringe  with  any  feature  of  the  Weston  Machine  in  the  least  particular. 
You  can,  therefore,  manufacture  and  sell  your  machines  with  impunity. 

Yours  truly,  C.  M.  Parks, 

Attorney-at- Law  and  Solicitor  of  Patents,  Late  Examiner  in  Patent  Office. 

Stansbury  &  Musn, 
Attorneys  and  Counsellors-at- Law,  and  Solicitors  of  American  and  Foreign  Patents, 
W.  G.  ENTREKIN,  Esq.  Washington,  D.  C,  August  7,  1874. 

Sir:  I  have  examined  reissued  Letters  Patent  No.  5281,  granted  February  11,  1873,  to  Weston  &  McDonald, 
and  your  Patent  No.  145,161,  of  December  2,  1873,  for  Photograph  Burnishers,  and  am  of  opinion  that  your 
Burnisher  does  not  infringe  the  Weston  &  McDonald  Patent.  Chas.  T.  Stansbury. 

WILLIAM  G.  ENTREKIN,  Esq.  Philadelphia,  September  3,  1874. 

Having  examined  Letters  Patent  No.  145,161,  dated  December  2, 1873,  to  William  G.  Entrekin,  for  an  improve- 
ment in  burnishers  for  photographs,  and  also  reissued  Letters  Patent  No.  5281,  dated  February  11,1873,  to  E.  R. 
Weston  and  T.  McDonald,  for  a  similar  invention,  I  am  of  opinion  that  burnishers  constructed  according  to 
the  Entrekin  patent  do  not  infringe  the  patent  to  Weston  &  McDonald.  Yours  truly, 

Geo.  Harding,  Attorney-at- Law. 

EXCELSIOR ! 


The  Scovill  Gold  Medal  was  awarded  by  the  National  Photogra- 
phic Association  of  the  United  States  to  W.  G.  Entrekin,  for  his 
Oscillating  Enameler  for  Burnishing  Photographs,  Chicago,  July  16, 
1874. 

Photographers  will  see  that  we  have  a  first-class  article,  and  do 
not  wish  to  impose  upon  them  by  selling  a  press  that  will  not  work. 
We  guarantee  our  press  to  do  all  we  claim  for  it,  as  was  shown  sat- 
isfactorily at  the  Exhibition  at  Chicago,  where  the  press  was  exhib- 
ited and  worked. 

PRICE    LIST: 


6-inch  Roll,  $25 ;  10-inch,  $40;  14-inch,  $50;  18-inch,  $75. 

If  you  cannot  obtain  the  press  of  your  dealer,  send  your  order  to 

W.  G.  ENTKEKIN, 

4382  &  4384  Main  St.,  Manayunk,  Philadelphia.